initial commit of ebook 13287HEADmain

6 files changed, 65606 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/old/13287-8.txt b/old/13287-8.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3ba4c33
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13287-8.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21102 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Volume VII, by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Volume VII
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: August 25, 2004 [EBook #13287]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME VII ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:
+
+FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF NAVIGATION,
+DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE, BY SEA AND LAND, FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE
+PRESENT TIME.
+
+BY ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. & F.A.S. EDIN.
+
+ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.
+
+VOL. VII.
+
+MDCCCXXIV.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS OF VOL. VII.
+
+PART II. BOOK III. CONTINUED.
+
+CHAP. IV. Continued.
+
+SECT. XIII. Account of an expedition of the Portuguese from India to
+Madagascar in 1613.
+
+XIV. Continuation of the transactions of the Portuguese in India, from
+1617 to 1640: and the conclusion of the Portuguese Asia of Manuel de
+Faria.
+
+XV. Occurrences in Pegu, Martavan, Pram, Siam, and other places.
+
+XVI. A short account of the Portuguese possessions between the Cape of
+Good Hope and China.
+
+CHAP. V. Voyages and Travels in Egypt, Syria, Arabia, Persia, and India.
+By Ludovico Verthema, in 1503.
+
+Introduction
+
+SECT. I Of the Navigation from Venice to Alexandria in Egypt, and from
+thence to Damascus in Syria.
+
+II. Of the City of Damascus.
+
+CHAP. V. SECT. III. Of the Journey from Damascus to Mecca, and of the
+Manners of the Arabians.
+
+IV. Observations of the Author during his residence at Mecca.
+
+V. Adventures of the Author in various parts of Arabia Felix, or Yemen.
+
+VI. Observations of the Author relative to some parts of Persia.
+
+VII. Observations of the Author on various parts of India.
+
+VIII. Account of the famous City and Kingdom of Calicut.
+
+IX. Observations on various parts of India.
+
+X. Continuation of the Authors Adventures, after his return to Calicut.
+
+XI. Account of a memorable Battle between the Mahometan Navy of Calicut
+and the Portuguese.
+
+XII. Navigation of the Author to Ethiopia, and return to Europe by Sea.
+
+CHAP. VI. Voyages and Travels of Cesar Frederick in India.
+
+Introduction
+
+SECT. I. Voyage from Venice to Bir in Asia Minor.
+
+II. Of Feluchia and Babylon.
+
+III. Of Basora.
+
+IV. Of Ormuz.
+
+V. Of Goa, Diu, and Cambaya.
+
+VI. Of Damann, Bassen, Tana, Chaul, and some other places.
+
+VII. Of Goa.
+
+VIII. Of the City of Bijanagur.
+
+IX. Of Cochin.
+
+X. Of the Pearl Fishery in the Gulf of Manaar.
+
+XI. Of the Island of Ceylon.
+
+XII. Of Negapatam.
+
+XIII. Of Saint Thome and other places.
+
+XIV. Of the Island of Sumatra and the City of Malacca.
+
+XV. Of the City of Siam.
+
+XVI. Of the Kingdom of Orissa and the River Ganges.
+
+XVII. Of Tanasserim and other places.
+
+Sect. XVIII. Of Martaban and the Kingdom of Pegu.
+
+XIX. Voyages of the Author to different parts of India.
+
+XX. Some Account of the Commodities of India.
+
+XXI. Return of the Author to Europe.
+
+
+CHAP. VII. Early English Voyages to Guinea, and other parts of the West
+Coast of Africa.
+
+Introduction.
+
+SECT. I. Second Voyage of the English to Barbary, in the year 1552, by
+Captain Thomas Windham.
+
+II. A Voyage from England to Guinea and Benin in 1553, by Captain
+Windham and Antonio Anes Pinteado.
+
+III. Voyage to Guinea, in 1554, by Captain John Lok.
+
+IV. Voyage to Guinea in 1555, by William Towerson, Merchant of London.
+
+V. Second Voyage to Guinea in 1556, by William Towerson.
+
+VI. Third Voyage of William Towerson to Guinea in 1558.
+
+VII. Notices of an intended Voyage to Guinea, in 1561.
+
+VIII. Voyage to Guinea in 1562, written by William Rutter.
+
+IX. Supplementary Account of the foregoing Voyage.
+
+X. Voyage to Guinea in 1563 by Robert Baker.
+
+XI. A Voyage to Guinea in 1564, by Captain David Carlet.
+
+XII. A Voyage to Guinea and the Cape de Verd Islands in 1566, by George
+Fenner.
+
+XIII. Embassy of Mr Edmund Hogan to Morocco in 1577, written by himself.
+
+XIV. Embassy of Henry Roberts from Queen Elizabeth to Morocco, in 1585,
+written by himself.
+
+SECT. XV. Voyage to Benin beyond Guinea in 1588, by James Welsh.
+
+XVI. Supplement to the foregoing Voyage, in a Letter from Anthony Ingram
+the chief factor, written from Plymouth to the Owners, dated 9th
+September, the day of arriving at Plymouth.
+
+XVII. Second Voyage of James Welsh to Benin, in 1590.
+
+VIII. Voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to the Rivers Senegal
+and Gambia adjoining to Guinea, in 1591.
+
+CHAP. VIII. Some miscellaneous early Voyages of the English.
+
+Introduction.
+
+SECT. I. Gallant escape of the Primrose from Bilboa in Spain, in 1585.
+
+II. Voyage of Sir Francis Drake, in 1585, to the West Indies.
+
+III. Cruising Voyage to the Azores by Captain Whiddon, in 1586, written
+by John Evesham.
+
+IV. Brief relation of notable service performed by Sir Francis Drake in
+1587.
+
+V. Brief account of the Expedition of the Spanish Armada in 1588.
+
+VI. Account of the Relief of a part of the Spanish Armada, at Anstruther
+in Scotland, in 1588.
+
+VII. A cruising Voyage to the Azores in 1589, by the Earl of Cumberland.
+
+VIII. Valiant Sea Fight by Ten Merchant Ships of London against Twelve
+Spanish Gallies, in the Straits of Gibraltar, on the 24th April 1590.
+
+IX. A valiant Sea Fight in the Straits of Gibraltar, in April 1591, by
+the Centurion of London, against five Spanish Gallies.
+
+X. Sea-Fight near the Azores, between the Revenge man of war, commanded
+by Sir Richard Granville, and fifteen Spanish men of war, 31st August
+1591. Written by Sir Walter Raleigh.
+
+SECT. XI. Note of the Fleet of the Indies, expected in Spain this year
+1591; with the number that perished, according to the examination of
+certain Spaniards, lately taken and brought to England.
+
+XII. Report of a Cruizing Voyage to the Azores in 1581, by a fleet of
+London ships sent with supplies to the Lord Thomas Howard. Written by
+Captain Robert Flicke.
+
+XIII. Exploits of the English in several Expeditions and cruizing
+Voyages from 1589 to 1592; extracted from John Huighen van Linschoten.
+
+XIV. Cruising voyage to the Azores, in 1592, by Sir John Burrough,
+knight.
+
+XV. The taking of two Spanish Ships, laden with quicksilver and the
+Popes bulls, in 1592, by Captain Thomas White.
+
+XVI. Narrative of the Destruction of a great East India Carak in 1584,
+written by Captain Nicholas Downton.
+
+XVII. List of the Royal Navy of England at the demise of Queen
+Elizabeth.
+
+
+CHAP IX. Early Voyages of the English to the East Indies, before the
+establishment of an exclusive company.
+
+SECT. I. Voyage to Goa in 1579, in the Portuguese fleet, by Thomas
+Stevens.
+
+Introduction.
+
+II. Journey to India over-land, by Ralph Fitch, Merchant of London, and
+others, in 1583.
+
+III. Supplement to the Journey of Fitch No. 1.--Letter from Mr John
+Newbery to Mr Richard Hakluyt of Oxford, Author of the Voyages, &c.
+
+No. 2,--Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore of London.
+
+3.--Letter from Mr John Newbery to the same.
+
+4.--Letter from John Newbery to Messrs John Eldred and William Scales at
+Basora.
+
+5.--Letter from Mr John Newbery to Messrs Eldred and Scales.
+
+6.--Letter from Mr Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore.
+
+7.--Letter from Mr Ralph Fitch to Mr Leonard Poore.
+
+8.--The Report of John Huighen, &c.
+
+A
+GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION
+OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PART II. BOOK III. CONTINUED.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CONTINUATION OF THE DISCOVERIES AND CONQUESTS OF THE PORTUGUESE IN THE
+EAST; TOGETHER WITH SOME ACCOUNT OF THE EARLY VOYAGES Of OTHER EUROPEAN
+NATIONS TO INDIA.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV. CONTINUED.
+
+CONTINUATION OF THE PORTUGUESE TRANSACTIONS IN INDIA, AFTER THE RETURN
+OF DON STEPHANO DE GAMA FROM SUEZ IN 1541, TO THE REDUCTION OF PORTUGAL
+UNDER THE DOMINION OF SPAIN IN 1581.
+
+
+SECTION XIII.
+
+_Account of an Expedition of the Portuguese from India to Madagascar in
+1613._
+
+
+Being anxious to find out a considerable number of Portuguese who were
+reported to exist in the island of St. Lawrence or Madagascar, having
+been cast away at different times on that island, and also desirous of
+propagating the ever blessed gospel among its inhabitants, and to
+exclude the Hollanders from that island by establishing a friendly
+correspondence with the native princes, the viceroy Don Jerome de
+Azevedo sent thither, in 1613, a caravel from Goa commanded by Paul
+Rodrigues de Costa, accompanied by two Jesuits, some interpreters, and a
+competent number of soldiers. This island is about 260 leagues in length
+and 600 in circumference[1], its greatest extent being from N.N.E. to
+S.S.W. It is 80 leagues from E. to W. where widest, but considerably
+less towards the north, where it ends in a point named St Ignatius which
+is about 15 leagues from east to west[2]. It may be considered as
+divided into three parts. The first or northern portion is divided from
+the other two by an imaginary line from east to west at Cape St
+Andrew[3]. The other two divisions are formed by a chain of mountains
+running nearly south from this line to Cape St Romanus, otherwise Cape
+St Mary, but much nearer the east coast than the west. The island is
+divided into a great number of kingdoms, but so confusedly and
+ill-defined, that it were endless to enumerate them. It is very
+populous, the inhabitants having many cities and towns of different
+extent and grandeur[4]. The country is fertile and well watered, and
+everywhere diversified with mountains, vallies, rivers, bays, and ports.
+The natives have no general name for the island, and are entirely
+ignorant of those of Madagascar and St Lawrence, which are given to it
+by strangers. The general population of the island consists of a nation
+called _Buques_, who have no religion and consequently no priests or
+places of worship, yet all their youth are circumcised at six or seven
+years old, any one performing the operation. The natives are not all of
+one colour; some being quite black with crisp or curled hair like
+negroes; others not quite so black with lank hair; others again
+resembling mulatoes; while some that live in the interior are almost
+white, yet have hair of both kinds. They are of large stature, strong
+and well made, of clear judgment, and apt to learn. Every man has as
+many wives as he pleases or can maintain, turning them off at pleasure,
+when they are sure to find other husbands, all of whom buy their wives
+from their fathers, by way of repaying the expence of their maintenance
+before marriage. Their funeral obsequies consist chiefly in feasting the
+guests; and their mourning in laying aside all appearance of joy, and
+cutting off their hair or daubing their faces and bodies with clay.
+Their government is monarchical, their kings or chiefs being called
+_Andias_, _Anrias_, and _Dias_, all independent of each other and almost
+continually engaged in war, more for the purpose of plunder than
+slaughter or conquest. On the Portuguese going among them, no arms were
+found in their possession except a few guns they had procured from the
+Moors and Hollanders, which they knew not how to use, and were even
+fearful of handling. They have excellent amber[5], white sandal,
+tortoises, ebony, sweet woods of various kinds, and abundance of slaves,
+with plenty of cattle of all kinds, the flesh of their goats being as
+sweet as mutton. The island likewise produces abundance of sea cows,
+sea-horses, monkeys, and some say tigers, with a great many snakes which
+are not very venomous. It has no elephants, horses, asses, lions, bears,
+deer, foxes, nor hares.
+
+[Footnote 1: Madagascar, between the latitudes of 12° 30' and 35° 45' S.
+and the longitudes of 44° and 53° W. from Greenwich, rather exceeds 1000
+statute miles from N.N.W to S.S.E. and is about 220 miles in mean width
+from east to west. This island therefore, in a fine climate, capable of
+growing all the tropical productions in perfection, and excellently
+situated for trade, extends to about 200,000 square miles, or 128
+millions of acres, yet is abandoned entirely to ignorant
+barbarians.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 2: The north end of Madagascar, called the point of St
+Ignatius, is 70 miles from east to west, the eastern headland being Cape
+Natal or de Ambro, and the western Cape St Sebastian.--E.]
+
+[3][Footnote 3: 3 Cape Antongil on the east coast is probably here
+meant, in lat. 15° 45' S. as at this place the deep bay of Antongil or
+Manghabei penetrates about 70 mile inland, and the opposite coast also
+is deeply indented by port Massali. It is proper to mention however,
+that Cape St Andrew is on the west coast of Madagascar, in lat. 17° 12'
+S.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 4: There may be numerous villages, or collections of huts, in
+Madagascar, and some of these may possibly be extensive and populous;
+but there certainly never was in that island any place that merited the
+name of a city.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 5: More probably Ambergris thrown on their shores.--E.]
+
+The first place visited by de Costa on this voyage of discovery was a
+large bay near _Masilage_[6] in lat. 16° S. in which there is an island
+half a league in circumference containing a town of 8000 inhabitants,
+most of them weavers of an excellent kind of stuff made of the
+palm-tree. At this place the Moors used to purchase boys who were
+carried to Arabia and sold for infamous uses. The king of this place,
+named _Samamo_, received the Portuguese in a friendly manner, and
+granted leave to preach the gospel among his subjects. Coasting about 40
+leagues south from this place, they came to the mouth of a large river
+named _Balue_ or _Baeli_ in about 17° S. and having doubled Cape St
+Andrew, they saw the river and kingdom of _Casame_, between the
+latitudes of 17° and 18° S. where they found little water and had much
+trouble[7]. Here also amity was established with the king, whose name
+was Sampilla, a discreet old man; but hitherto they could get no
+intelligence of the Portuguese whom they were sent in search of. On
+Whitsunday, which happened that year about the middle of May, mass was
+said on shore and two crosses erected, at which the king appeared so
+much pleased that he engaged to restore them if they happened to fall or
+decay. During the holidays they discovered an island in lat. 18° S. to
+which they gave the name of Espirito Santo[8], and half a degree farther
+they were in some danger from a sand bank 9 leagues long. On Trinity
+Sunday, still in danger from sand banks, they anchored at the seven
+islands of _Cuerpo de Dios_ or _Corpus Christi_[9] in 19° S. near the
+kingdom and river of _Sadia_ to which they came on the 19th of June,
+finding scarcely enough of water to float the caravel. This kingdom is
+extensive, and its principal _city_ on the banks of the river has about
+10,000 inhabitants. The people are black, simple, and good-natured,
+having no trade, but have plenty of flesh, maize, tar, tortoises,
+sandal, ebony, and sweet woods. The name of the king was _Capilate_, who
+was an old man much respected and very honest. He received the
+Portuguese kindly, and even sent his son to guide them along the coast.
+All along this coast from _Massalage_ to _Sadia_ the natives speak the
+same language with the Kafrs on the opposite coast of Africa; while in
+all the rest of the island the native language called _Buqua_ is spoken.
+
+[Footnote 6: On this bay is a town called New Massah to distinguish it
+from Old Massah on the bay of Massali, somewhat more than half a degree
+farther north. Masialege or Meselage is a town at the bottom of the bay
+of Juan Mane de Cuna, about half a degree farther south.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 7: They were here on the bank of Pracel, which seems alluded
+to in the text from the shallowness of the water; though the district
+named Casame in the text is not to be found in modern maps--E.]
+
+[Footnote 8: Probably the island of the bay of St Andrew in 17° 30' is
+here meant; at any rate it must be carefully distinguished from Spiritu
+Santo, St Esprit, or Holy Ghost Island, one of the Comoros in lat. 15°
+S.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 9: Perhaps those now called _barren isles_ on the west coast,
+between lat. 18° 40' and 19° 12' S. The river Sadia of the text may be
+that now called _Santiano_ in lat. 19° S.--E.]
+
+Continuing towards the south they came to the country of the _Buques_,
+a poor and barbarous people feeding on the spawn of fish, who are much
+oppressed by the kings of the inland tribes. Passing the river
+_Mane_[10], that of _Saume_[11] in 20° 15'; _Manoputa_ in 20° 30', where
+they first heard of the Portuguese; _Isango_ in 21°; _Terrir_ in 21°
+30'; the seven islands of _Elizabeth_ in 22°; they came on the 11th of
+July into the port of _St Felix_[12] in 22°, where they heard again of
+the Portuguese of whom they were in search, from _Dissamuta_ the king of
+that part of the country. On offering a silver chain at this place for
+some provisions, the natives gave it to an old woman to examine if it
+was genuine, and she informed the Portuguese that at the distance of
+three days journey there was an island inhabited a long while before by
+a white people dressed like the Portuguese and wearing crosses hanging
+from their necks, who lived by rapine and easily took whatever they
+wanted, as they were armed with spears and guns, with which information
+the Portuguese were much gratified. Continuing their voyage past the bay
+of _St Bonaventura_ and the mouth of the river _Massimanga_, they
+entered the bay of _Santa Clara_, where _Diamassuto_ came to them and
+entered into a treaty of friendship, worshipping the cross on his knees.
+They were here told that white people frequented a neighbouring port,
+and concluded that they were Hollanders. Going onwards they found banks
+of sand not laid down in any chart, and entered a port in lat. 24° S.
+The king of this place was named _Diacomena_, and they here learnt that
+there were Portuguese on the opposite coast who had been cast away, and
+now herded cattle for their subsistence. They said likewise that the
+Hollanders had been three times at their port, and had left them four
+musketeers with whose assistance they had made war upon their enemies.
+On some trees there were several inscriptions, among which were the
+following. _Christophorus Neoportus Anglus Cap_. and on another _Dominus
+Robertus Scherleius Comes, Legatus Regis Persarum_.
+
+[Footnote 10: It is singular that the large circular bay of Mansitare in
+lat. 19° 30' S. is not named, although probably meant by the river
+_Mane_ in the text.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 11: Now called Ranoumanthe, discharging its waters into the
+bay of St Vincents.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 12: Now Port St James.--E.]
+
+In the latitude of 25° S. they entered a port which they named St
+Augustine[13] in a kingdom called _Vavalinta_, of which a _Buque_ named
+_Diamacrinale_ was king, who no sooner saw the Portuguese than he asked
+if these were some of the men from the other coast. This confirmed the
+stories they had formerly heard respecting the Portuguese, and they were
+here informed that the place at which they dwelt was only six days sail
+from that place. In September they got sight of Cape _Romain_ or St
+_Mary_ the most southern point of Madagascar, where they spent 40 days
+in stormy weather, and on St Lukes day, 18th October, they entered the
+port of that name in the kingdom of Enseroe. The natives said that there
+were white people who wore crosses, only at the distance of half a days
+journey, who had a large town, and _Randumana_ the king came on board
+the caravel, and sent one of his subjects with a Portuguese to shew him
+where these white people dwelt, but the black ran away when only half
+way.
+
+[Footnote 13: In lat. 23° 30' or directly under the tropic of Capricorn,
+is a bay now called St Augustine. If that in the text, the latitude 1s
+erroneous a degree and a half.--E.]
+
+Among others of the natives who came to this place to trade with the
+Portuguese, was a king named _Bruto Chembanga_ with above 500 fighting
+men. His sons were almost white, with long hair, wearing gowns and
+breeches of cotton of several colours with silver buttons and bracelets
+and several ornaments of gold, set with pearls and coral. The territory
+of this king was named _Matacassi_, bordering on _Enseroe_ to the west.
+He said that the Portuguese were all dead, who not far from that place
+had built a town of stone houses, where they worshipped the cross, on
+the foot or pedestal of which were unknown characters. He drew
+representations of all these things on the sand, and demanded a high
+reward for his intelligence. Some of his people wore crosses, and
+informed the Portuguese that there were two ships belonging to the
+Hollanders in port _St Lucia_ or _Mangascafe_. In a small island at this
+place there was found a _square stone fort_[14], and at the foot of it
+the arms of Portugal were carved on a piece of marble, with this
+inscription
+
+REX PORTUGALENSIS O S.
+
+[Footnote 14: This is unintelligible as it stands in the text. It may
+possibly have been a square stone pedestal for one of the crosses of
+discovery, that used to be set up by the Portuguese navigators as marks
+of possession.--E.]
+
+Many conjectures were formed to account for the signification of the
+circle between the two last letters of this inscription, but nothing
+satisfactory could be discovered. King _Chembanga_ requested that a
+Portuguese might be sent along with him to his residence, to treat upon
+some important affairs, and left his nephew as an hostage for his safe
+return. Accordingly the master, Antonio Gonzales, and one of the priests
+named Pedro Freyre, were sent; who, at twelve leagues distance, came to
+his residence called _Fansaria_, a very populous and magnificent place.
+At first he treated them with much kindness, after which he grew cold
+towards them, but on making him a considerable present he became
+friendly, and even delivered to them his eldest son to be carried to
+Goa, desiring that the two Jesuits and four other Portuguese might be
+left as hostages, to whom he offered the island of _Santa Cruz_ to live
+in. These people are descended from the Moors, and call themselves
+_Zelimas_; they have the alcoran in Arabic, and have faquirs who teach
+them to read and write; they are circumcised, eat no bacon, and some of
+them have several wives. The king said that in the time of his father a
+ship of the Portuguese was cast away on this coast, from which about 100
+men escaped on shore, some of whom had their wives along with them, and
+the rest married there and left a numerous progeny. He repeated several
+of their names, and even showed a book in Portuguese and Latin which had
+belonged to them, and some maps; and concluded by saying that there were
+more Portuguese on that coast, seven days journey to the north. On
+farther inquiry, a man 90 years of age was found, who had known the
+Portuguese that were cast away there, and could still remember a few
+detached words of their language.
+
+The Portuguese set all hands to work to build a house and chapel for the
+two Jesuits and four Portuguese who were to remain, and when the work
+was finished, mass was solemnly said on shore, many of the natives
+coming to learn how to make the sign of the cross. One day while the
+king was looking on, and saw several men labouring hard to carry a cross
+that was meant to be set upon a rock, he went half naked and bareheaded,
+and carried it without assistance to the place appointed. The Portuguese
+might well say they had found another emperor Heraclius; for after this
+pious act of gigantic strength, he became very wicked; for being ready
+to sail, De Costa demanded that the king's son who had been promised
+should be sent, but he denied having ever made any such promise, and
+offered a slave. On this the captain sent the master and pilot with some
+men to enforce the demand, and safe conduct for some Portuguese to go to
+port _St Lucia_ to see an inscription said by the natives to be at that
+place. The peace was thus broken, and a party of Portuguese soldiers was
+sent armed against the king, who endeavoured to resist, and the king's
+son, a youth of eleven years of age was brought away, the natives being
+unable to contend against fire-arms. Several messages were sent offering
+a high ransom for the boy; but on being told by the captain that he
+would lose his head if he did not carry him to the viceroy, they went
+away much grieved. This happened about the end of 1613; and towards the
+middle of 1614, de Costa arrived safe at Goa with the boy, whom the
+viceroy caused to be instructed in Christianity by the jesuits, and
+stood god-father at his baptism on St Andrews day, when he was named
+Andrew Azevedo.
+
+The viceroy treated him with much honour and magnificence, in hopes that
+when he succeeded to his father, he might encourage the propagation of
+the gospel in Madagascar; and when he was supposed to be sufficiently
+instructed, he was sent away, accompanied by four Jesuits. On this
+occasion a pink and caravel were sent to Madagascar, commanded by Pedro
+de Almeyda Cabral, and Juan Cardoso de Pina, who sailed from Goa on the
+17th of September 1616. On the 20th of March 1617, they discovered a
+most delightful island, watered with pure springs, and producing many
+unknown plants besides others already known, both aromatic and
+medicinal. To this island, in which were two mountains which overtopped
+the clouds, they gave the name of _Isola del Cisne_ or swan island, and
+on it the jesuits planted some crosses and left inscriptions
+commemorative of the discovery[15]. The wreck of two ships of the
+Hollanders were found on this island. On the arrival of the two
+Portuguese ships in the port of St Lucia in Madagascar, the king and
+queen of _Matacassi_ received their son with the strongest
+demonstrations of joy, and gave back the hostages left on taking him
+away. The four jesuits with six soldiers accompanied the young prince
+to his father's court at _Fansaria_, where, and at every place through
+which he passed, he was received with demonstrations of joy, which to
+the Portuguese seemed ridiculous, as no doubt those used by the
+Portuguese on similar occasions would have appeared to them. The king
+made a similar agreement with the two commanders on this voyage with
+that formerly made with De Costa, which was that the fathers should
+inhabit the inland of Santa Cruz and have liberty to preach the gospel
+in Madagascar. Upon this the fathers went to the fort at Santa Cruz,
+where Don Andrew, the king's son, sent them workmen and provisions.
+
+[Footnote 15: The text gives no indication by which even to conjecture
+the situation of this island, unless that being bound towards the
+southern part of the east coast of Madagascar, it may possibly have been
+either the isle of France, or that of Bourbon.--E.]
+
+The captain, Pedro de Almeyda, had orders to bring another of the king's
+sons to Goa, and if refused to carry one away by force; but the king
+declared that he had only one other son, who was too young for the
+voyage, on which Almeyda satisfied himself with Anria Sambo, the king's
+nephew, who was carried to Goa, and baptized by the name of Jerome. When
+sufficiently instructed in the Christian religion, he was sent back to
+his country in a pink, commanded by Emanuel de Andrada, together with
+two Jesuits, 100 soldiers, and presents for the king and prince, worth
+4000 ducats. They set out in the beginning of February 1618; and being
+under the necessity of watering at the _Isola de Cisne_, they found
+three ships sunk at the mouth of the river. On landing, twenty
+Hollanders were found about two leagues from the shore, guarding the
+goods they had saved from the wreck. They made some opposition, but were
+forced to submit to superior numbers, and were found to have a large
+quantity of cloves, pepper, arms, ammunition, and provisions. Andrada
+carried the prisoners, and as many of the valuable commodities on board
+his pink as it could contain, and set fire to the rest, though the
+Hollanders alleged that they had come from the Moluccas, with a regular
+pass.
+
+When Andrada arrived in the port of St Lucia, the two Jesuits came to
+him both sick, declaring that it was impossible to live in that country,
+where all the men who had been left along with them had died. Andrada
+sent the letters with which he was intrusted to the king and prince, by
+the servants of Don Jerome; and in return, the king sent 100 fat oxen,
+with a great quantity of fowls and honey, and six slaves, but would not
+come himself, and it was found that his son had reverted to
+Mahometanism. The tribes in Madagascar called _Sadias_ and _Fansayros_
+are _Mahometan Kafrs_[16], and are attached to the liberty allowed by
+the law of Mahomet, of having a plurality of wives. The king was of the
+_Fansayro_ tribe, and was now desirous to destroy Andrada and the
+Portuguese by treachery; incited to this change of disposition by a
+_Chingalese_ slave belonging to the Jesuits, who had run away, and
+persuaded the king, that the Portuguese would deprive him of his
+kingdom, as they had already done many of the princes in Ceylon and
+India. The Kafrs came accordingly to the shore in great numbers, and
+began to attack the Portuguese with stones and darts, but were soon put
+to flight by the fire-arms, and some of them slain, whose bodies were
+hung upon trees as a warning to the rest, and one of their towns was
+burnt.
+
+[Footnote 16: In strict propriety, this expression is a direct
+contradiction, is Kafr is an Arabic word signifying _unbelievers_; but
+having been long employed as a generic term for the natives of the
+eastern coast of Africa, from the Hottentots to the Moors of Zeyla
+exclusively, we are obliged to employ the ordinary language.--E.]
+
+Andrada carried away with him Don Jerome, the king's nephew, and a
+brother of his who was made prisoner in a skirmish with the natives, who
+was converted, and died at Goa. All the Jesuits agreed to desist from
+the mission of Madagascar, and departed along with Andrada much against
+his inclination; and thus ended the attempt to convert the natives of
+Madagascar to the Christian religion.
+
+
+SECTION XIV.
+
+_Continuation of the Transactions of the Portuguese in India, from 1617
+to 1640; and the conclusion of the Portuguese Asia of Manuel de Faria._
+
+
+Towards the end of 1617, Don Juan Coutinno, count of Redondo, came to
+Goa, as viceroy, to succeed Azevedo. During this year, three ships and
+two fly-boats, going from Portugal for India, were intercepted near the
+Cape of Good Hope by six English ships, when the English admiral
+declared that he had orders from his sovereign to seize effects of the
+Portuguese to the value of 70,000 crowns, in compensation for the injury
+done by the late viceroy Azevedo to the four English ships at Surat.
+Christopher de Noronha, who commanded the Portuguese ships, immediately
+paid the sum demanded by the English admiral, together with 20,000
+crowns more to divide among his men. But Noronha, on his arrival at Goa,
+was immediately put under an arrest by the viceroy, for this
+pusillanimous behaviour, and was sent home prisoner to Lisbon, to answer
+for his conduct.
+
+In the year 1618, the Moor who had been seen long before, at the time
+when Nunno de Cunna took Diu, and was then upwards of 300 years old,
+died at Bengal now 60 years older, yet did not appear more than 60 years
+old at his death. In 1619, a large wooden cross, which stood on one of
+the hills which overlook Goa, was seen by many of the inhabitants of
+that city, on the 23d of February, to have the perfect figure of a
+crucified man upon it. The truth of this having been ascertained by the
+archbishop, he had it taken down, and got made from it a smaller cross,
+only two spans long, on which was fixed a crucified Jesus of ivory, and
+the whole surrounded by a golden glory; the rest of the cross being
+distributed to the churches and persons of quality. Ten days after this
+cross was removed, water gushed from the hole in which it was formerly
+fixed, in which cloths being dipped wrought many miraculous cures. A
+church was built on the spot to commemorate the miracle. At this time it
+was considered, in an assembly of the principal clergy, whether the
+threads, worn by the bramins across their shoulders, were a heathenish
+superstition or only a mark of their nobility, and, after a long debate,
+it was determined to be merely an honourable distinction. The reason of
+examining this matter was, that many of the bramins refused to embrace
+the Christian faith, because obliged to renounce these threads.
+
+In November 1619, the count of Redondo died; and, by virtue of a patent
+of succession, Ferdinand de Albuquerque became governor-general, being
+now 70 years of age, 40 of which he had been an inhabitant of Goa, and
+consequently was well versed in the affairs of India, but too slow in
+his motions for the pressing occasions of the time. During his
+administration, the Portuguese were expelled from Ormuz by the sultan of
+Shiras, assisted by six English ships.
+
+In July 1620, the Hollanders were desirous of gaining possession of the
+city of Macao in China, and appeared before it in seventeen ships, or,
+as some say, twenty-three, having 2000 soldiers on board, and were
+likewise in hopes of taking the fleet at that place, which was bound for
+Japan, having already taken several Portuguese and Chinese ships near
+the Philippine islands. After battering the fort of St Francis for five
+days, the Dutch admiral, Cornelius Regers, landed 800 men, with which he
+got possession of a redoubt or entrenchment, with very little
+opposition. He then marched to take possession of the city, not then
+fortified, where he did not expect any resistance; but Juan Suarez
+Vivas, taking post on some strong ground with only 160 men, defeated the
+Hollanders and compelled them to return precipitately to their ships,
+leaving 300 of their men slain, seven only with the colours and one
+piece of cannon being taken, and they threw away all their arms to
+enable them to swim off to their ships. In the mean while, the ships
+continued to batter the fort, but were so effectually answered that some
+of them were sunk and sixty men slain. After this the enemy abandoned
+the enterprise, and the citizens of Macao built a wall round the city
+with six bastions; and, as the mountain of _our Lady of the Guide_
+commanded the bastion of St Paul, a fort was constructed on its summit
+armed with ten large guns.
+
+We have formerly mentioned the destruction of the Portuguese cities of
+_Liampo_ and _Chincheo_, in China, through their own bad conduct. From
+that time, they lived in the island of _Lampazau_ till the year 1557,
+when they were permitted to build the city _Macao_, the largest
+belonging to the Portuguese in the east after Goa. They had been in use
+to resort to the island of _Sanchuan_, on the coast of China, for trade,
+where they lived in huts made of boughs of trees, and covered with sails
+during their stay. At this time, the island of Goaxama, eighteen leagues
+nearer the coast of China, being wild and mountainous, was the resort of
+robbers who infested the neighbouring part of the continent, and, as the
+Chinese considered the Portuguese a more tolerable evil than these
+outlaws, they offered them that island on condition of extirpating the
+nest of thieves. The Portuguese undertook this task, and succeeded
+without losing a man. Then every one began to build where he liked best,
+as there were no proprietors to sell the land, which now sells at a dear
+rate. The trade and reputation of this city increasing, it soon became
+populous, containing above 1000 Portuguese inhabitants all rich; and as
+the merchants usually give large portions with their daughters, many
+persons of quality used to resort thither in search of wives. Besides
+these, there are a number of Chinese inhabitants who are Christians, who
+are clothed and live after the manner of the Portuguese; and about 6000
+heathens, who are artificers, shop-keepers, and merchants. The duties of
+ships trading from thence to Japan, amount to 300,000 Xeraphins, at 10
+_per cent_, being about equal to as many pieces-of-eight, or Spanish
+dollars[17]. The yearly expence of the garrison and repairs of the
+fortifications is above 40,000 ducats. A similar sum is paid yearly for
+duties at the fair of _Quantung_, or Canton. The Japan voyage, including
+presents to the King and _Tonos_, and the expence of the embassy, costs
+25,000. The Misericordia expends about 9000 in charity, as the city
+maintains two hospitals, three parish churches, and five monasteries,
+besides sending continual alms to the Christians in China, Hainan,
+Japan, Tonkin, Cochin-china, Cambodia, and Siam.
+
+[Footnote 17: The xeraphin, as formerly mentioned, being 5s. 9d., this
+yearly revenue amounted to L.52,250 sterling. But the state of Macao, in
+the text, refers to what it was 150 years ago. It is still inhabited by
+Portuguese, and remains a useless dependence on Portugal, owing its
+principal support to the residence of the British factory for the
+greater part of the year.--E.]
+
+Albuquerque governed India from the end of 1619, to the month of
+September 1622, during all which time so little care was taken in Spain
+of the affairs of Portuguese India that he did not receive a single
+letter from the king. In every thing relating to the civil government he
+was equal to any of his predecessors, but was unfortunate in military
+affairs, especially in the loss of Ormuz. In 1621, Don Alfonso de
+Noronna was nominated viceroy of India; but sailing too late, was driven
+back to Lisbon, being the last viceroy appointed by the pious Philip
+III. On the news coming to Lisbon, of the shameful surrender of the city
+of _Bahia_, in the Brazils, to the Hollanders, without considering his
+age, quality, and rank, he listed as a private soldier for that service,
+an instance of bravery and patriotism deserving of eternal fame, and an
+example that had many followers.
+
+Don Francisco de Gama, Count of Vidugueyra, who had been much hated as
+viceroy of India, and sore affronted at his departure, as formerly
+related, always endeavoured to obtain that command a second time, not
+for revenge, as some asserted, but to satisfy the world that he had been
+undeservedly ill used. At length he obtained his desire, after twenty
+years solicitation, upon the accession of Philip IV. of Spain. He sailed
+from Lisbon on the 18th of March 1622, with four ships. On the coast of
+Natal, a flash of lightning struck his ship, and burnt his colours, but
+killed no one. Under the line two of his ships left him, and arrived at
+Goa in the end of August; another ship staid behind, and it was thought
+they shunned his company designedly. At this time six Dutch ships plied
+near the islands or Angoxa, or the Comoros, one of which perished in
+pursuit of a Portuguese ship; and while standing on for Mozambique, the
+viceroy encountered the other five, on the 22d of June. _His other ships
+had now joined him_, and a terrible battle ensued, which fell heaviest
+on the vice-admiral, whose ship was entirely disabled, but the viceroy
+and Francisco Lobo rescued and brought him off; yet the ship was so much
+battered that it sunk, some men and part of the money on board being
+saved, but some of the men fell into the hands of the enemy. Night
+coming on, the ships of the viceroy and Lobo were cast upon certain
+sands and lost, when they saved what goods, rigging, ammunition, and
+cannon they were able, and burnt the rest, to prevent them from falling
+into the hands of the enemy. The viceroy shipped all the goods that were
+saved on board some galliots, with what men they could contain, and went
+to Cochin, whence he went to Goa in September. On seeing him replaced in
+the dignity of viceroy, his enemies were terrified lest he might revenge
+the affronts formerly given him, but he behaved with unexpected
+moderation. He wished to have punished Simon de Melo, and Luis de Brito,
+for the shameful loss of Ormuz. Melo had fled to the Moors, and Brito
+was in prison; so that he only was punished capitally, and the other was
+hung in effigy.
+
+About the year 1624, some of the Portuguese missionaries penetrated into
+the country of Thibet, in which are the sources of the river Ganges. The
+natives are well inclined, and of docile dispositions; zealous of their
+salvation, and value much the devotions enjoined them by their priests,
+called _Lamas_, who profess poverty and celibacy, and are much given to
+prayer. They have churches and convents like the most curious of those
+in Europe, and have some knowledge of the Christian religion, but mixed
+with many errors, and with strange customs and ceremonies; yet it
+plainly appears that they had formerly the light of the true gospel[18];
+and they abhor the Mahometans and idolaters, being easily converted to
+the Christian faith. The habit of the Lamas is a red cassock, without
+sleeves, leaving their arms bare, girt with a piece of red cloth, of
+which the ends hang down to their feet. On their shoulders they wear a
+striped cloth, which they say was the dress of the Son of God; and they
+have a bottle of water hung at their girdle. They keep two fasts, during
+the principal of which they eat but once a day, and do not speak a word,
+using signs on all necessary occasions. During the other fast they eat
+as often as they have a mind, but use flesh only at one meal The people
+are called to prayers by the sound of trumpets, some of which are made
+of dead men's bones; and they use human skulls as drinking-vessels. Of
+other bones they make beads, which they allege is to remind them of
+death. The churches are only opened twice a year, when the votaries walk
+round the outside three times in procession, and then go in to reverence
+the images, some of which are of angels, called by them _Las_, the
+greatest being the one who intercedes with God for the souls of men.
+This being represented with the devil under his feet, was supposed by
+the missionaries to be St Michael the archangel. It is not unworthy of
+remark, that the word _Lama_, signifying priest, begins with _La_, which
+means an angel. The young Lamas go about the towns, dancing to the sound
+of bells and other noisy instruments of music; which, they say, is in
+imitation of the angels, who are painted by the Christians as singing in
+choirs.
+
+[Footnote 18: Wherever any coincidence appears in the ceremonies and
+externals of the heathen worship, the zealous catholics are eager to
+conceive that these have been borrowed from Christianity; unconscious
+that their own mummeries have all been borrowed from heathen worship,
+and superadded to the rational purity of primitive Christianity,--E.]
+
+At the beginning of every month a procession is made in which are
+carried black flags and the figures of devils, and attended by drums and
+music, which they believe chases away the devils. They use holy water,
+which is consecrated with many prayers, having gold coral and rice put
+into it, and is used for driving devils from their houses. The country
+people bring black horses, cows and sheep, over which the Lamas say many
+prayers, as it is alleged the devils endeavour to get into cattle of a
+black colour. They cure the sick by blowing on the part affected. They
+have three different kinds of funerals, according to the star which
+rules at the time of death. In one the body is buried in a tomb adorned
+with gilded pyramids. In another the body is burnt and the ashes being
+mixed with clay are formed into images by which they swear. In the
+last, which is reckoned the most honourable, the body is exposed to be
+devoured by certain birds resembling cranes. These three forms are used
+with such as have spent good lives, but others are cut in pieces and
+thrown to the dogs. They believe that the good go directly to heaven,
+and the bad to hell; while such as are indifferent remain in an
+intermediate state, whence their souls return to animate noble or base
+creatures according to their deserts. They give their children the names
+of filthy beasts, at the recommendation of their priests, that the devil
+may be loth to meddle with them. They believe in one God in Trinity; the
+son having become a man and died, yet is now in heaven. God equal with
+the father, yet man at the same time; and that his mother was a woman
+who is now in heaven: And they compute the time of the death of the son
+nearly as we do the appearance of the Redeemer on earth. They believe in
+a hell as we do, and burn lamps that God may light them in the right
+road in the other world: Yet do they use divination after a ridiculous
+manner. The country of Thibet produces several fruits of the same kinds
+with those grown in Europe, together with rice and wheat, and has
+abundance of cattle; but a great part of the land is barren.
+
+The Jesuit fathers Andrada and Marquez went from Delhi in the country of
+the Great Mogul to Thibet along with a caravan of pilgrims that were
+going to visit a famous pagoda. Passing through the kingdom of _Lahore_,
+they came to the vast mountains whence the Ganges flows into the lower
+plain country of Hindostan, seeing many stately temples by the way full
+of idols. At the kingdom of _Sirinagur_ they saw the Ganges flowing
+among snow, the whiteness of which is dazzling to the eyes of
+travellers. At the end of 50 days journey they came to a pagoda on the
+borders of _Sirinagur_, to which multitudes resort to bathe in a spring,
+the water of which is so hot as to be hardly sufferable, and which they
+imagine cleanses them from sin. The people here feed on raw flesh and
+eat snow, yet are very healthy; and the usual order of the sexes is
+reversed, as the women plough and the men spin. Having rested at the
+town of _Mana_ the fathers pursued their journey, almost blinded by
+travelling continually among snow, and came at length to the source of
+the Ganges, which flows from a great lake. They soon afterwards entered
+the kingdom of Thibet, and were honourably received by officers sent on
+purpose from _Chaparangue_, the residence of the king of Thibet. The
+king and queen listened to their doctrines with much complacency, and
+even admitted their truths without dispute, and would not allow them to
+return to India till they promised an oath to come back, when the king
+not only engaged to give them liberty to preach, but that he would build
+them a church, and was greatly pleased with a picture they left him of
+the Virgin and Child.
+
+The fathers returned according to promise, on which the king built them
+a church and was afterwards baptised along with the queen, in spite of
+every thing the Lamas could say to prevent him. From merchants who
+traded to this place from China, the fathers understood that it was 60
+days journey from _Chaparangue_ to China, 40 of which was through the
+kingdom of _Usangue_, and thence 20 days to China. They likewise learnt
+that Cathay is not a kingdom, but a great city--the metropolis of a
+province subject to the grand _Sopo_, very near China, whence perhaps
+some give the name of Cathay to China[19]. Perhaps this kingdom of
+Thibet is the empire of Prester John, and not Ethiopia as some have
+believed.
+
+[Footnote 19: This is evidently erroneous, as we know certainly from the
+travels of Marco Polo and other authorities, that Cathay was the
+northern part of China, once a separate kingdom.--E.]
+
+After having governed five years, the Count of Vidugueyra was ordered by
+the king to resign to Don Francisco de Mascarennas in 1628; but as that
+gentleman had left India for Europe, the viceroy resigned the charge of
+government to Don Luis de Brito, bishop of Cochin, and went home to
+Portugal. In this year the king of Acheen made an attempt to gain
+possession of Malacca, against which he sent a fleet of 250 sail, with
+20,000 soldiers and a great train of artillery. In this great fleet
+there were 47 gallies of extraordinary strength, beauty, and size, all
+near 100 feet long and of proportional breadth. The king embarked with
+his wife, children, and treasure; but upon some ill omen the fleet and
+army sailed without him, and came before Malacca in the beginning of
+July 1629, the former under the command of _Marraja_, and the latter of
+Lacsamana, an experienced general who had made many conquests for his
+master. Having landed the troops, they were attacked by Antonio Pinto de
+Fonseca with only 200 men, who slew above 300 of the enemy without
+losing a man, and then retreated into the city. Juan Suarez Vivas with
+350 Portuguese, who commanded at Iller, defended that post for some time
+with great gallantry and did great execution among the enemy; but at
+length, overpowered by numbers, was forced to retire. Having gained an
+eminence called mount St Juan, the enemy erected a battery there from
+which they played furiously against the fort, which answered them with
+great spirit. The Capuchin convent dedicated to the Mother of God, being
+considered as of great importance for the defence of the fort, was
+gallantly defended for 50 days by Diego Lopez de Fonseca, who on one
+occasion made a sally with 200 Portuguese and defeated 2000 of the
+enemy. On Lopez falling sick, Francisco Carvallo de Maya took the
+command of that post, and defended it till the convent was entirely
+ruined, so that he was obliged to withdraw into the city, on which the
+enemy converted it into a strong post in which _Lacsamana_ took up his
+quarters with 3000 men. _Marraja_ occupied mount St Juan, on which he
+erected a large fort; others were established at the convent of St
+Lawrence, at _Iller_ and other places, having strong batteries and lines
+of communication, so that the city was invested on all sides by land,
+while a number of armed boats presented all access by sea for relief.
+Fonseca, who commanded in the besieged city, sent out Vivas with 220
+Portuguese troops to dislodge Lacsamana from his head-quarters on the
+ruins of the Capuchin convent, on which occasion Vivas gained possession
+of the post by a night attack, killing 100 of the enemy, and retired
+with several cannon. The King of _Pam_, who was in alliance with the
+Portuguese, sent a fleet of _paraos_ with 2000 men to the assistance of
+the town; and Michael Pereyra Botello brought five sail from the city of
+San Thome: Yet these reinforcements were insufficient to induce the
+enemy to retire, though they had lost above 4000 men during the siege,
+while 60 were slain on the side of the defenders.
+
+Although the bishop of Cochin was informed in June of the intended
+attack on Malacca and the weak state of its garrison, he postponed
+sending any reinforcement, as it was then the dead of winter on the
+Malabar coast, proposing to dispatch succours in September. He died
+however about the end of July 1629, after having governed India for
+nineteen or twenty months. Upon his death the next patent of succession
+was opened, which named Don Lorenzo de Cunna, the commander of Goa, to
+the civil government of India, and Nunno Alvarez Pereyra to the
+military command. Of this last name there happened to be two in India,
+or none. If Don Nunno Alvarez Pereyra, a gentleman well known, were
+meant, the title of _Don_ was omitted in the patent; if Nunno Alvarez
+Botello, the sirname teemed wrong. It was thought unlikely that the
+title of Don could be omitted through mistake, as that in Portugal is
+peculiar to certain families. The mistake of name in regard to Nunno
+Alvarez Botello was more probable, as he had long gone by the name of
+_Pereyra_, in memory of his grandfather Alvarez Pereyra, and had dropped
+that name for _Botello_ when he inherited the estate of his father,
+whose name was Botello; yet some continued to call him by the old name,
+and others gave him the new one. The council of Goa, and the Count de
+Linnares after his arrival in India, allowed the pretensions of Botello.
+
+In the meantime, considering how dangerous delay might prove to Malacca
+in its distress, Nunno Alvarez Botello undertook the relief of that
+place, saying that he would postpone the decision of the dispute till
+his return. By general consent however, he went by the title of
+governor; and by direction of the council of Goa, the Chancellor Gonzalo
+Pinto de Fonseca assumed the administration of justice, so that the
+government was divided between him, De Cunna, and Botello, who used such
+diligence in preparing for his expedition to relieve Malacca, that, from
+the 2d of August, when the charge of governor was awarded to him, to the
+beginning of September, he had collected 900 Portuguese troops, a good
+train of artillery, a large supply of arms and ammunition, and 30
+vessels, and was ready to put to sea as soon as the weather would allow.
+He set sail on the 22d of September, rather too early, and encountered
+four several storms during his voyage, two of which were so terrible
+that every one expected to be lost. He at length reached _Pulobutum_,
+whence he sent two vessels to give notice at Malacca of his approach,
+yet arrived himself before them. At Pulobutum he found a vessel
+belonging to Cochin and two from Negapatnam, being some addition to his
+fleet He arrived at Malacca on the afternoon of the 22d October 1629, to
+the great surprise of _Lacsamana_, as his fleet was then in the river
+_Pongor_, a league from Malacca, and so situated as to be unable to
+escape.
+
+Botello immediately landed and gave the necessary orders and again
+embarking forced his way up the river through showers of bullets, which
+he repaid with such interest that the enemy abandoned their advanced
+works that same night, and retired to that which they had constructed on
+the ruins of the Capuchin monastery. As the river Pongor had not
+sufficient water for the Portuguese ships, Botello embarked a strong
+detachment in 33 _balones_ or _balames_, being country-vessels of
+lighter draught, with which he went in person to view the strength and
+posture of the hostile fleet. Being anxious for the safety of their
+gallies, the enemy abandoned their works at _Madre de Dios_ and _San
+Juan_, and threw up other works with wonderful expedition for the
+protection of their fleet. But having attacked these with much
+advantage, Botello proposed to the enemy to surrender, on which
+_Marraja_ returned a civil but determined refusal. His situation being
+desperate, Marraja endeavoured the night to escape with the smaller
+vessels, leaving his large gallies at the mercy of the Portuguese, but
+was prevented by the vigilance and bravery of Vasquez de Evora, who cut
+off many of his men, not without some loss on his own side, having one
+of his arms carried off. The enemy now endeavoured to make use of their
+formidable gallies, and the chief among them called the _Terror of the
+World_ was seen in motion; on which Botello sent the admiral of the
+Portuguese gallies, Francisco Lopez to attack her, which he did with
+great gallantry, passing through clouds of smoke, and a tremendous fire
+of artillery, and after two hours hard fighting, carried her by
+boarding, after killing 500 of her men out of 700, with the loss only of
+seven of his own men.
+
+On the 25th of November, the enemy set fire to a galley that was full of
+women whom they had brought to people Malacca, and made a fresh attempt
+to break through the Portuguese fleet, but without success, many of them
+being slain and taken, and great numbers leapt into the water, and fled
+to the woods, where they were devoured by wild beasts. Lacsamana then
+hung out a flag of truce, and sent a deputation to treat with Botello,
+who answered that he would listen to no proposals till they restored
+Pedro de Abren the Portuguese ambassador, whom they kept prisoner; and
+as they delayed compliance; the Portuguese cannon recommenced a
+destructive fire. On the last day of November, Botello got notice that
+_Marraja_ the Acheen admiral was slain, and that the king _Pam_ was
+approaching to the assistance of the Portuguese with 100 sail of
+vessels. Botello went immediately to visit him, and was received with
+the customary ceremonies used by the eastern princes to the Portuguese
+governors. After interchanging presents and mutual compliments, Botello
+returned to his post, where he found the Portuguese rather slackening
+their efforts in consequence of a desperate cannonade from the enemy.
+But on the 4th of December, the enemy sent fresh proposals for an
+accommodation, accompanied by the ambassador Abreu, requiring only to be
+allowed to withdraw with three of their gallies and 4000 men, being all
+that remained of 20,000 with which they had invested Malacca. In answer
+to this, they were told they must surrender at discretion on promise of
+life; and as Lacsamana hesitated to accept such humiliating terms,
+Botello assaulted and forced all his works, where many of the enemy were
+put to the sword; some throwing themselves into the river to swim across
+were drowned, and others who fled to the woods were devoured by beasts
+of prey. In fine, Botello obtained the most glorious victory that was
+ever gained by the Portuguese in India; as of all the fleet which came
+against Malacca, not a single vessel got away, and of the large army,
+not one man escaped death or captivity. So great was the booty, that the
+whole of the Portuguese troops and mariners were enriched, Botello
+reserving nothing to his own share but a _parrot_ which had been much
+valued by Lacsamana.
+
+On going to Malacca after this great victory, he entreated to be allowed
+to walk barefooted and unaccompanied to church, that he might humbly
+prostrate himself before the Lord of Hosts, in acknowledgement that the
+victory was entirely due to God, and not to the Portuguese valour; but
+he was constrained to enter the city in triumph. The streets were
+crowded with men, and the windows and house tops thronged with women,
+who sprinkled the hero with sweet waters and strewed flowers in his
+path. The music could not be heard for the noise of cannon, and all the
+city was filled with extreme joy. At this time an embassy came from the
+king of _Pera_, who was tributary to the king of _Acheen_, offering to
+pay tribute to the king of Portugal, and to deliver up a large treasure
+left in his custody belonging to the king of Acheen and his general
+_Lacsamana_. Don Jerome de Silveyra was sent with eleven ships to
+receive the treasure, and establish a treaty with the king of _Pera_,
+who performed his promise, and the treasure was applied to pay the men
+and refit the fleet.
+
+About the middle of January 1630, Botello being off the straits of
+Cincapura to secure the ships expected from China against the
+Hollanders, _Lacsamana_ and two other officers who had fled to the woods
+were brought prisoners to him, having been taken by the king of Pam.
+Owing to contrary winds, he was unable to get up with five Dutch ships
+that were about _Pulo Laer_, and which took a Portuguese galliot coming
+from China. He returned therefore to Malacca to refit his ships, and
+resolved to attempt the Dutch fort of _Jacatara_[20], the best which was
+possessed by _these rebels_ in all Asia. In the first place, he sent
+Antonio de Sousa Coutinno in the admiral galley lately belonging to
+_Lacsamana_ called the _Terror of the World_, in which Lacsamana was now
+prisoner, to Goa; directing that Lacsamana should be sent to Portugal,
+and that this large and magnificent galley should be given as a present
+to the city of Goa. In this galley there was one cannon made of
+_tombac_, a precious sort of metal, which was valued at above 7000
+ducats, and another cannon reckoned still more valuable on account of
+its curious workmanship. Lacsamana died before he could be carried to
+Portugal.
+
+[Footnote 20: In the neighbourhood of which was afterwards built the
+city of Batavia, the emporium at the Dutch trade in the east, now
+subject to Britain.--E.]
+
+Learning that the Count de Linnares, now viceroy of India, had arrived
+at Goa in October 1629, Botello transmitted to him an account of all
+that he had done, and desired his assistance and approbation to continue
+in these parts in order to carry on his designs against the English and
+Hollanders. About the end of April 1630, the viceroy not only sent him
+every thing he asked, but gave him full power to act as governor
+general, without being obliged to wait for orders from Goa. In the
+meantime Botello sailed with 27 ships towards the straits of Cincapura,
+and put in at _Jambo_[21], a place abounding in pepper, and on that
+account much resorted to by the Dutch and English. At this place he took
+two large ships after a stout resistance; and going higher up the river
+he discovered another ship so large and beautiful that he designed to
+make use of her for his entrance into Goa; but a ball falling into her
+powder-room, blew her up. After employing three weeks in working up the
+river, Botello learnt that at a town about two leagues distant, two
+Dutch ships had taken shelter, and being desirous of taking them, he
+manned 14 light vessels with which he went to view the place, on which
+he was opposed by 26 sail of small vessels manned with Hollanders and
+natives, whom he put to flight; but on viewing the place he found it
+impracticable to attempt the two vessels, on account of the strength of
+the works by which they were protected. He destroyed therefore all the
+neighbourhood with tire and sword, and then sailed down the river,
+intending to proceed against _Jacatara_.
+
+[Footnote 21: Probably _Jambee_ on the N.E. side of Sumatra, in about
+lat. 18 20' S. to the S.E. of the straits of Cincapura.--E.]
+
+While on his way thither, a Dutch ship of 24 guns was met, which was
+laden with powder for their forts, and on being attacked and boarded by
+some of his ships she took fire. In this situation, Botello gave orders
+for his ships to draw off from the danger, and on going up in his
+galliot to bring off Antonio Mascarennas, the Dutch ship blew up while
+Botello was passing her stern, by which his galliot was instantly sunk.
+His body was found and taken to Malacca, where it was honourably
+interred.
+
+Don Michael de Noronna, Count de Linnares, arrived at Goa as viceroy of
+India in October 1629. About the commencement of his administration,
+Constantine de Sa, who commanded in Ceylon, marched from Columbo, which
+he left almost without any garrison, meaning to reduce the interior
+provinces to subjection. His force consisted of 400 Portuguese, with a
+considerable number of Christian Chingalese, in whose fidelity he
+reposed too much confidence, although a Franciscan friar who resided
+among the enemy, and his own officers warned him of the danger to which
+he was exposed. He penetrated to the city of _Uva_ with very little
+opposition, which he destroyed; but was met on his return by the king of
+Candy with a considerable army, to whom the greatest part of the
+Christian Chingalese immediately deserted, and aided him in battle
+against the Portuguese, now reduced to 400 of their own troops and 200
+Chingalese who remained faithful. De Sa and his inconsiderable army
+fought against prodigious odds during three entire days, but the general
+being slain, the Portuguese troops fell into disorder, and were all
+slain or taken prisoners.
+
+Immediately after this victory, the king of Candy laid siege to Columbo
+with an army of 50,000 men, while the garrison under Launcelot de Leixas
+did not exceed 400, even including the priests and monks. The garrison
+was reduced to extreme distress, and even threatened with famine, when a
+ship from Cochin brought them a relief of provisions and ammunition;
+after which five ships came from San Thome and one from Goa. Though not
+mentioned by De Faria, it appears that the siege was now raised; as at a
+subsequent period, after the natives had reduced almost the whole of the
+island, the kings of Candy, Uva, and Matale again laid siege to Columbo
+with an army of 20,000 men. At this time five ships came from Goa to
+carry off the cinnamon to Portugal, on which the enemy raised the siege,
+believing these ships had come to relieve and reinforce the garrison.
+
+The viceroy now appointed Don George de Almeyda to the command in
+Ceylon, who sailed from Goa for that place on the 19th of February 1631,
+in the great galley taken by Botello when he destroyed the fleet of
+Acheen: But encountering a storm off Cape Comorin, the galley was ready
+to founder, on which Almeyda took to the boat with 29 persons, and
+reached one of the Maldive islands after four days of incredible
+distress. Going over from thence to Cochin, he received a reinforcement
+of some Portuguese troops, with 500 kafrs and 800 Canarin lascars, and a
+supply of money, ammunition, and provisions. Having raised some more men
+at Cochin, Almeyda sailed again for Ceylon, where he arrived on the 21st
+October 1631, and landed at Columbo. He marched immediately against the
+enemy, though then the rainy season, and was soon forced to desist, as
+the country was mostly overflowed, and at this season the trees swarm
+with _leeches_, which drop down upon the men as they pass, and bleed
+them to death.
+
+On the return of fine weather, Almeyda marched again on the 5th January
+1632, though with much difficulty, as the waters were still out, so that
+the men had often to wade up to their breasts. Being opposed by the
+enemy near the fort of _Tranqueyra Grande_, many of them were slain, as
+the general gave three or four pistoles for every head that was brought
+him. At another pass, the enemy were defended, to the number of 6000
+men, by some works, but on being attacked, and many of them killed, the
+rest fled, destroying every thing they could not carry away. After these
+successes, many of the natives came in, and submitted, and were treated
+with kindness; but as others hid themselves in hopes of getting away to
+join the enemy, Almeyda caused them to be apprehended, and given as
+slaves among his officers. One was delivered to the Kafrs, who, in sight
+of his wife and children, cut him immediately in pieces, which they
+divided among them to eat. At _Cardevola_, the enemy had two forts,
+which were carried by escalade. The enemy fled in every quarter, making
+no stand till they arrived at the foot of the mountains of Candy, where
+they were defeated, and the forts of _Manicravare_, _Safragam_,
+_Maluana_, and _Caliture_, were immediately afterwards reduced, as was
+the district of Matura, of which the commander of the Chingalese
+Christians, who deserted from de Sa, had made himself king. At last the
+king of Candy sent to implore peace, which was granted at the
+intercession of the priests and monks. In fine, Almeyda not only
+restored the reputation of the Portuguese arms in Ceylon, but increased
+it, and established the government of the island in good order. He was
+removed, however, by the succeeding viceroy, and returned to Goa poor,
+and full of honour, where he died poor, more from grief than age; and no
+sooner was he deprived of the command, than all he had gained was
+speedily lost, though it was again recovered by Diego de Melo y Castro
+in 1633.
+
+About the end of the year 1635, the Count de Linares resigned the
+government of India to Pedro de Silva, who was usually called _Mole_ or
+the Soft, on account of the easiness of his disposition. He disliked the
+government so much, that he was often heard to exclaim, "God forgive
+those who appointed me viceroy, as I am not fit for the office." He held
+the government, however, nearly four years, and died in the end of June
+1639, when he was succeeded as governor by Antonio Tellez de Silva,
+whose name was found in one of the royal patents, which was now opened.
+Tellez happened to be absent from Goa at the time, for which reason, the
+archbishop of Goa, who was next in nomination, assumed the government in
+his name, and sent notice to him of his appointment, and in the
+meantime, employed himself in fitting out twelve ships of war for the
+relief of Malacca, then threatened by the king of Acheen and the
+Hollanders. At this time nine Dutch ships entered the river of Goa, and
+set on fire three Portuguese galleons then lying at _Marmugam_, after
+which they retired without loss or opposition, because the fort was
+destitute of men and ammunition. Antonio Tellez arrived immediately
+after this unfortunate accident, at which he was exceedingly enraged,
+not so much for the actual loss, as that the enemy should be able to
+insult the harbour of the Portuguese Indian capital without harm or
+resistance. On the back of this misfortune, news came that the Dutch
+fleet of 12 sail, and that of Acheen of 35 gallies, were in sight of
+Malacca. While occupied in making great preparations to relieve Malacca,
+and to remedy other disorders then subsisting in Portuguese India, he
+was superseded in the government of India, by the arrival of Juan de
+Silva Tello, as viceroy, towards the end of 1640; on which Antonio
+Tellez, having resigned the sword of command, immediately embarked for
+Portugal, not thinking proper to serve as admiral where he had enjoyed
+the supreme authority.
+
+Other authors will write the actions of the new viceroy, Juan de Silva
+Tello, for he begins his task where I end mine.[22]
+
+[Footnote 22: Manuel de Faria rightly thought proper to close his work
+at this period, which was immediately followed by the expulsion of the
+Portuguese from Malacca and Ceylon, and many other of their Indian
+possessions; where, except a few inconsiderable factories, they now only
+hold Goa, Diu, and Macao, and even these possess very little trade, and
+no political importance. From their subjection to the crown of Spain,
+the Dutch, who had thrown off the iron yoke of the Austrian princes of
+Spain, revenged their own injuries upon the Portuguese in India: And in
+the present age, at the distance of 160 years, having themselves fallen
+under the heavy yoke of the modern French Caesar, they have been
+stripped by Britain of every foreign possession in Asia, Africa, and
+America.--E]
+
+
+SECTION XV.
+
+_Occurrences in Pegu, Martavan, Pram, Siam, and other places._[23]
+
+
+We here propose to give some account of the exploits of the _black_ king
+of Siam, in whose character there was a strange mixture of virtues and
+vices. In the year 1544, the king of the _Birmans_ [24] besieged the
+city of _Martavan_ by sea and land, being the metropolis of the great
+and flourishing kingdom of that name, which had a revenue of three
+millions of gold. _Chaubainaa_ was then king of Martavan, and fell from
+the height of fortune to the depth of misery. The Birman fleet, on this
+occasion, consisted of 700 sail, 100 of which were large gallies, in
+which were 700 Portuguese, commanded by one Juan Cayero, who was reputed
+a commander of courage and conduct. After a siege of some months, during
+which the Birmans lost 12,000 men in five general assaults, _Chaubainaa_
+found himself unable to withstand the power of his enemy, being reduced
+to such extremity that the garrison had already eaten 3000 elephants. He
+offered, therefore, to capitulate, but all terms were refused by the
+enemy; on which he determined to make use of the Portuguese, to whom he
+had always been just and friendly: But favours received from a person in
+prosperity, are forgotten when the benefactor falls into adversity. He
+sent therefore one Seixas, a Portuguese in his service, to make an offer
+to Cayero, if he would receive himself, his family, and treasures, into
+the four ships which he commanded; that he would give half the treasure
+to the king of Portugal, to whom he would become vassal, paying such
+tribute as might be agreed on, being satisfied that he could recover his
+kingdom with the assistance of 2000 Portuguese troops, whom he proposed
+to take into his pay. Cayero consulted with his principal officers on
+this proposition, and asked Seixas, in their presence, what might be the
+amount of treasure belonging to the king of Martavan. Seixas said, that
+he had not seen the whole, but affirmed that he had seen enough in gold
+and jewels to load two ships, and as much silver as would load four or
+five. Envious of the prodigious fortune that Cayero might make by
+accepting this offer, the Portuguese officers threatened to delate him
+to the Birman sovereign, if he consented, and the proposal was
+accordingly refused.
+
+[Footnote 23: De Faria, III. 347--364. Both as in a great measure
+unconnected with the Portuguese transactions, and as not improbably
+derived from the worse than suspicious source of Fernand Mendez de
+Pinro, these very problematical occurrences have been kept by
+themselves, which indeed they are in de Faria. After this opinion
+respecting their more than doubtful authenticity, it would be a waste of
+labour to attempt illustrating their geographical obscurities. Indeed
+the geography of India beyond the Ganges, is still involved in almost
+impenetrable darkness, from the Bay of Bengal to the empire of
+China.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 24: Called always the _Bramas_ by De Faria.--E.]
+
+The king of Martavan was astonished at the rejection of his proposals,
+and finding Seixas determined to withdraw from the danger that menaced
+the city, made him a present of a pair of bracelets, which were
+afterwards sold to the governor of _Narsinga_ for 80,000 ducats.
+Despairing of relief or retreat, the king of Martavan now determined to
+set his capital on fire, and sallying out at the head of the few men
+that remained, to die honourably fighting against his enemies. But that
+night, one of his principal officers deserted to the enemy, and gave
+notice of his intention. Thus betrayed, he surrendered on promise of
+having his own life, and those of his wife and children spared, and
+being allowed to end his days in retirement. These terms were readily
+granted, as the conqueror meant to perform no part of his engagement.
+
+From the gate of the city to the tent of the Birman king, at the
+distance of a league, a double lane of musketeers of sundry nations was
+formed, the Portuguese under Cayero being stationed nearest the gate,
+through which the captives were to march in procession. In the first
+place, came the queen of Martavan in a chair, her two sons and two
+daughters being carried in two other chairs. These were surrounded by
+forty beautiful young ladies, led by an equal number of old ladies, and
+attended by a great number of _Talegrepos_, who are a kind of monks or
+religious men, habited like Capuchins, who prayed with and comforted the
+captives. Then followed the king of Martavan, seated on a small she
+elephant, clothed in black velvet, having his head, beard, and eyebrows
+shaved, and a rope about his neck. On seeing the Portuguese, he refused
+to proceed till they were removed, after which he went on. Being come
+into the presence of the king of the Birmans, he cast himself at his
+feet; and being unable to speak owing to grief, the _Raolim_ of
+_Mounay_, _Talaypor_, or chief priest of Martavan, who was esteemed a
+saint, made a harangue in his behalf, which had been sufficient to have
+moved compassion from any other than the obdurate tyrant to whom it was
+addressed, who immediately ordered the miserable king, with his wife,
+children, and attendant ladies, into confinement. For the two following
+days, a number of men were employed to remove the public treasure of
+Martavan, amounting to 100 millions in gold; and on the third day, the
+army was allowed indiscriminate plunder, which lasted for four days, and
+was estimated at 12 millions. Then the city was burnt, and above 60,000
+persons were supposed to have perished by fire and sword, an equal
+number being reduced to slavery. On this occasion, 2000 temples and
+40,000 houses were destroyed.
+
+On the morning after the destruction of the city, 21 gibbets were
+erected on a neighbouring hill called Beydao, which were surrounded by a
+strong guard of cavalry, and on which the queen, with her children and
+attendants, to the number in all of 140 persons, were all hung up by the
+feet. The king of Martavan, with 50 men of the highest quality, were
+flung into the sea with stones about their necks. At this barbarous
+spectacle, the army of the Birmans mutinied, and for some time the king
+was in imminent danger. Leaving a sufficient number of people to rebuild
+the ruined city, the Birman king returned to Pegu with the rest of his
+army, accompanied by Juan Cayero, and his 700 Portuguese. Four
+Portuguese remained at Martavan, among whom was Juan Falcam; who,
+instead of assisting _Fernan Mendez Pinta_, sent by Pedro de Faria, the
+commander of Malacca, to confirm the peace which subsisted with the late
+king of Martavan, accused him to the governor of the town as an enemy to
+the king of the Birmans. On this false accusation, the governor seized
+the vessel commanded by Pinto, in which were goods to the value of
+100,000 ducats, killed the master and some others, and sent the rest
+prisoners to Pegu. This false dealing was not new in Falcam, who had
+deserted from the late unfortunate king of Martavan, after having
+received many benefits from him.
+
+Instead of being allowed to enjoy the fruits of his victories in peace,
+the king of the Birmans was obliged to engage in a new war with the king
+of Siam, who endeavoured to recover the kingdom of Tangu, which had been
+wrested from him. For this purpose, in March 1546, he embarked with
+900,000 men in 12,000 vessels, on the river _Ansedaa_, out of which he
+passed in the month of April into the river _Pichau Malacoa_, and
+invested the city of _Prom_. The king of this territory was recently
+dead, leaving his successor, only thirteen years of age, who was married
+to a daughter of the king of Ava, from whom he looked for the assistance
+of 60,000 men. For this reason, the king of Siam pressed the siege, that
+he might gain the city before the arrival of the expected succours.
+After six days, the queen of Prom, who administered the government,
+offered to become tributary if he would grant a peace; but the king
+insisted that she should put herself into his hands with all her
+treasure. She refused these degrading terms, knowing his perfidious
+character, and resolved to defend the city to the last extremity. The
+king of Siam accordingly gave several assaults, in all of which he was
+repulsed, and in a short time, lost above 80,000 of his men, partly by
+the sword, and partly by a pestilential disease, which raged in his
+army, 500 Portuguese who were in his service perishing among the rest.
+
+Being unable to take the place by assault, the king of Siam caused a
+great mount to be raised, which overlooked the city, and was planted
+with a great number of cannon, by which the defenders were prodigiously
+annoyed. Upon this, 5000 men sallied from the city, and destroyed the
+mount, killing 16,000 of the enemy, and carrying off 80 pieces of
+cannon. In this affair the king of Siam was wounded; and being greatly
+enraged against a body of 2000 Portuguese, who were in his pay, and had
+the guard of the mount, he caused them all to be massacred. About the
+end of August, _Xemin Maletay_, one of the four principal officers, who
+commanded in Prom, treacherously betrayed the city to the king of Siam,
+who ordered it to be utterly destroyed with fire and sword. Two thousand
+children were cut in pieces, and given as food to the elephants. The
+queen was publicly whipped, and given up to the lust of the soldiers
+till she died. The young king was tied to her dead body, and cast into
+the river; and above 300 principal nobles were impaled. The king of Ava,
+who was marching to the assistance of his sister, understood the
+unfortunate events of Prom, but came to battle with the traitor _Zemin_,
+who had betrayed her, who was at the head of a numerous army. In this
+battle all the soldiers of Ava were slain except 800, after making a
+prodigious slaughter among the enemy; after which the king of Siam came
+up with a part of his army, and slew the remaining 800 men of Ava, with
+the loss of 12,000 of his own men, and then beheaded the traitor
+_Zemin_. He then went up the river _Queytor_, with 60,000 men in 1000
+boats, and coming to the port of Ava, about the middle of October, he
+burnt above 2000 vessels, and several villages, with the loss of 8000 of
+his men, among whom were 62 Portuguese. Understanding that the city of
+Ava was defended by 20,000 men, 30,000 of which people had slain 150,000
+of his army at _Maletay_, and that the king of _Pegu_ was coming to
+their relief, he returned in all haste to _Prom_, where he fortified
+himself, and sent an ambassador to the emperor of _Calaminam_, with rich
+presents, and the offer of an extensive territory, on condition of
+sending him effectual succours.
+
+The empire of _Calaminam_ is said to be 300 leagues in length and as
+much in breadth, having been formerly divided into 27 kingdoms, all
+using the same language, beautified with many cities and towns, and very
+fertile, containing abundance of all the productions of Asia. The name
+of the metropolis is _Timphan_, which is seated on the river _Pitni_, on
+which there are innumerable boats. It is surrounded by two strong and
+beautiful walls, contains 400,000 inhabitants, with many stately palaces
+and fine gardens, having 2500 temples belonging to 24 different sects.
+Some of these use bloody sacrifices. The women are very beautiful, yet
+chaste, two qualities that seldom go together. In their law-suits, O
+happy country! they employ no attornies, solicitors, or proctors, and
+every dispute is decided at one hearing. This kingdom maintains
+1,700,000 soldiers, 400,000 of which are horse, and has 6000 elephants.
+On account of their prodigious number, the emperor assumes the title of
+_Lord of the Elephants_, his revenue exceeding 20 millions. There are
+some remnants of Christianity among these people, as they believe in the
+blessed Trinity, and make the sign of the cross when they sneeze.
+
+Such was the great empire of _Calaminam_ to which the king of the
+Birmans[25], sent his ambassador. On his return, the king sent 150,000
+men in 1300 boats against the city of _Sabadii_, 130 leagues distant to
+the north-east. The general of this army, named _Chaunigrem_, lost many
+of his men in several assaults, after which he raised two mounts whence
+he did much harm to the city: But the besieged sallying out, killed at
+one time 8000 and at another 5000 of his men. Leaving this siege for a
+time and the affairs of the king of the _Birmans_, we purpose to relate
+what was done at _Siam_, in order to treat of them both together.
+
+[Footnote 25: Formerly this was attributed to the king of _Siam_: But
+the whole story of this section is so incredible and absurd as not to
+merit any observations. It is merely retained from De Faria, as an
+instance of the fables of Fernand Mendez de Pinto.--E.]
+
+The king of _Chiammay_, after destroying 30,000 men that had guarded the
+frontiers, besieged the city of _Guitivam_ belonging to the king of
+_Siam_, who immediately drew together an army of 500,000 men, in which
+was a body of 120 Portuguese in which he placed great reliance. This
+vast multitude was conveyed along the river in 3000 boats, while 4000
+elephants and 200 pieces of cannon were sent by land. He found the enemy
+had 300,000 men and 2000 boats. The king of Siam gave the command of his
+vast army to three generals, two of whom were Turks, and the third was
+Dominic Seixas a Portuguese. At first the _Siamese_ were worsted, but
+recovering their order they gained a complete victory, in which 130,000
+of the enemy were slain, 40,000 of whom were excellent cavalry, with the
+loss of 50,000 Siamese, all of whom were the worst troops in their
+army. After this victory the king of Siam marched against the queen of
+_Guibem_, who had allowed the enemy to pass through her country; and
+entering the city of _Fumbacar_ spared neither age nor sex. Being
+besieged in her capital of _Guirar_, the queen agreed to pay an yearly
+tribute of 60,000 ducats, and gave her son as an hostage. After this the
+king of Siam advanced to the city of _Taysiram_, to which place he
+thought the king of Chiammay had fled, destroying every thing in his
+course with fire and sword, only sparing the women; but winter coming on
+he returned to Siam.
+
+On his return to his court of _Odiaa_ or _Odiaz_, he was poisoned by his
+queen, then big with child by one of her servants; but before he died he
+caused his eldest son, then young, to be declared king. He left 30,000
+ducats to the Portuguese then in his service, and gave orders that they
+should pay no duties in any of his ports for three years. The adulterous
+queen, being near the time of her delivery, poisoned her lawful son,
+married her servant, and caused him to be proclaimed king. But in a
+short time they were both slain at a feast by the King of _Cambodia_ and
+_Oya Pansilaco_.
+
+There being no lawful heir to the kingdom of Siam, _Pretiel_ a religious
+_Talagrepo_, bastard brother to him who was poisoned, was raised to the
+throne by common consent in the beginning of the year 1549. Seeing the
+affairs of Siam in confusion, the king of the Birmans, who was likewise
+king of Pegu, resolved to conquer that kingdom. For this purpose he
+raised an army of 800,000 men, of which 40,000 were horse, and 60,000
+armed with muskets, 1000 being Portuguese. He had 20,000 elephants, 1000
+cannon drawn by oxen and _abadias_[26], and 1000 ammunition waggons
+drawn by buffaloes. The Portuguese troops in his service, were commanded
+by Diego Suarez de Mello, commonly called the Gallego, who went out to
+India in 1538. In 1542 this man became a pirate in the neighbourhood of
+Mozambique. In 1547 he was at the relief of Malacca: And now in 1549,
+being in the service of the king of the Birmans, was worth four millions
+in jewels and other valuables, had a pension of 200,000 ducats yearly,
+was stiled the king's brother, and was supreme governor of the kingdom
+and general in chief of the army. With this prodigious army the king of
+the Birmans, after one repulse, took the fort of _Tapuram_ by assault,
+which was defended by 2000 Siamese, all of whom he put to the sword in
+revenge for the loss of 3000 of his own men in the two assaults. In the
+prosecution of his march, the city of Juvopisam surrendered, after which
+he set down before the city of Odiaa the capital of Siam. Diego Suarez
+the commander in chief gave a general assault on the city, in which he
+was repulsed with the loss of 10,000 men: Another attempt was made by
+means of elephants, but with no better success. The king offered 500,000
+ducats to any one who would betray one of the gates to him; which coming
+to the knowledge of _Oya Pansiloco_, who commanded in the city, he
+opened a gate and sent word to the king to bring the money as he waited
+to receive it. After spending five months in the siege, during which he
+lost 150,000 men, news came that _Xemindoo_ had rebelled at Pegu where
+he had slain 15,000 men that opposed him. When this was known in the
+camp, 120,000 Peguers deserted, in hatred to the king of the Birmans who
+oppressed them, and in revenge of the insolence of Diego Suarez their
+general in chief.
+
+[Footnote 26: Rhinoceroses, which are so brutishly ferocious as in
+no instance to have been tamed to labour, or to have ever shewn the
+slightest degree of docility. Being of enormous strength, the only way
+of preserving them when in custody, is in a sling; so that on the first
+attempt to more forwards, they are immediately raised from the
+ground.--E.]
+
+_Xemindoo_ was of the ancient blood royal of Pegu, and being a priest
+was esteemed as a great saint. On one occasion he preached so eloquently
+against the tyranny and oppression which the Peguers suffered under the
+Birmans, that he was taken from the pulpit and proclaimed king of Pegu.
+On this he slew 8000 Birmans that guarded the palace, and seizing the
+royal treasure, he got possession of all the strong-holds in a short
+time, and the whole kingdom submitted to his authority. The armies of
+the rival kings met within two leagues of the city of Pegu; that of the
+Birmans amounting to 350,000 men, while _Xemindoo_ had 600,000; yet
+Xemindoo was defeated with the loss of 300,000 men, while the Birmans
+lost 60,000. The victorious king of the Birmans immediately entered
+Pegu, where he slew a vast multitude of the inhabitants, and recovered
+his treasure. Meanwhile the city of _Martavan_ declared for _Xemindoo_,
+and massacred the garrison of 2000 Birmans. _Zemin_ did the same in the
+city of _Zatam_ where he commanded. The king marched towards him, but he
+contrived to have him murdered by the way; on which _Zemin_ was
+proclaimed king by his followers, and soon raised an army of 30,000 men.
+_Chaumigrem_, brother to the dead king, plundered the palace and city,
+and then fled to _Tangu_ where he was born. In four months _Zemin_
+became so odious to his new subjects by his tyranny, that many of them
+fled to _Xemindoo_, who was soon at the head of 60,000 men.
+
+Some short time before this, as Diego Suarez was passing the house of a
+rich merchant on the day of his daughter's intended marriage, being
+struck by the great beauty of the bride, he attempted to carry her off
+by force, killing the bridegroom and others who came to her rescue, and
+the bride strangled herself to avoid the dishonour. As the father
+expected no justice while that king reigned, he shut himself up till
+_Zemin_ got possession of the throne, on which he so published his
+wrongs about the city, that 50,000 of the people joined with him in
+demanding justice. Fearing evil consequences, _Zemin_ caused Suarez to
+be apprehended and delivered up to the people, by whom he was stoned to
+death. His house was plundered, and as much less treasure was found than
+he was supposed to be worth, he was believed to have buried the rest.
+
+_Zemin_ soon followed Suarez, for his subjects being unable to endure
+his cruelty and avarice, fled in great numbers to Xemindoo, who was now
+master of some considerable towns. Xemindoo having gathered an army of
+200,000 men and 5000 elephants, marched to the city of Pegu, near which
+he was encountered by Zemin at the head of 800,000 men. The battle was
+long doubtful, but at last Gonzalo Neto, who served under _Xemindoo_
+with 80 Portuguese, killed _Zemin_ with a musket ball, on which his army
+fled, and _Xemindoo_ got possession of the capital. This happened on the
+3d of February 1550. Gonzalo was rewarded with a gift of 10,000 crowns,
+and 5000 were divided among his companions.
+
+_Chaumigrem_, who had fled the year before to _Tangu_, hearing that
+_Xemindoo_ had disbanded most of his forces, marched against him and
+obtained a complete victory, by which the kingdom of Pegu was again
+reduced under the authority of the Birmans. Xemindoo was taken some time
+afterwards and put to death. _Chaumigrem_ being now king of the Birmans
+and of Pegu, went to war against Siam, with an army of 1,700,000 men,
+and 17,000 elephants, having a considerable body of Portuguese in his
+service. All this army came to ruin, and the kingdom of Pegu was soon
+afterwards reduced to subjection by the king of Aracan, as formerly
+related.
+
+The kingdom of Siam, though much harassed by these invasions, still
+held out, and, in 1627, was possessed by the _black_ king, so called
+because he really was of a black colour, though all the inhabitants of
+that country are fair complexioned[27]. In 1621, this _black_ king of
+Siam sent ambassadors to Goa, desiring that some Franciscans might be
+sent to preach the gospel in his dominions. Accordingly, father Andrew,
+of the convent of the Holy Ghost, went to _Odiaa_[28], where he was
+received honourably, and got leave to erect a church, which was done at
+the king's expence. He likewise offered great riches to the venerable
+father, who constantly refused his offers, to the great admiration and
+astonishment of the king. This _black_ king of Siam was of small
+stature, of an evil presence, and an extraordinarily compound character,
+of great wickedness, mixed with great generosity. Although cruel men are
+for the most part cowards, he was at the same time exceedingly cruel,
+and very valiant; and though tyrants are generally covetous, he was
+extremely liberal; being barbarous in some parts of his conduct, and
+generous and benevolent in others. Not satisfied with putting thieves
+and robbers to ordinary deaths, he was in use to have them torn in
+pieces in his presence by tigers and crocodiles for his amusement.
+Understanding that one of his vassal kings intended to rebel, he had him
+shut up in a cage, and fed him with morsels of his own flesh torn from
+his body, after which he had him fried in a pan. On one occasion he slew
+seven ladies belonging to the court, only because they walked too quick;
+and on another occasion he cut off the legs of three others, because
+they staid too long when sent by him for some money to give to certain
+Portuguese. He even extended his severity to animals; having cut off the
+paw of a favourite monkey for putting it into a box containing some
+curiosities. A valuable horse was ordered to be beheaded, in presence of
+his other horses, because he did not stop when he checked him. A tiger
+that did not immediately seize a criminal thrown to him, was ordered to
+be beheaded as a coward. Yet had this cruel and capricious tyrant many
+estimable virtues. He kept his word inviolable; was rigorous in the
+execution of justice; liberal in his gifts; and often merciful to those
+who offended him. Having at one time sent a Portuguese to Malacca with
+money to purchase some commodities; this man, after buying them lost
+them all at play, and yet had the boldness to return to the king, who
+even received him kindly, saying that he valued the confidence reposed
+in his generosity more than the goods he ought to have brought. He
+shewed much respect to the Christian priests and missionaries, and gave
+great encouragement to the propagation of the gospel in his dominions.
+His valour was without the smallest stain.
+
+[Footnote 27: De Faria seems now to drop the fables of Fernan Mendez
+Pinto, and to relate real events in the remainder of this section.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 28: More properly Ythia, vulgarly called Siam.--E.]
+
+The proper name of the kingdom we call _Siam_, is _Sornace_[29]. It
+extends along the coast for 700 leagues, and its width inland is 260.
+Most part of the country consists of fertile plains, watered by many
+rivers, producing provisions of all sorts in vast abundance. The hills
+are covered with a variety of trees, among which there are abundance of
+ebony, brasilwood, and _Angelin_. It contains many mines of sulphur,
+saltpetre, tin, iron, silver, gold, sapphires, and rubies; and produces
+much sweet-smelling wood, benzoin, wax, cinnamon, pepper, ginger,
+cardamunis, sugar, honey, silk, and cotton. The royal revenue is about
+thirteen millions. The kingdom contains 13,000 cities and towns, besides
+innumerable villages. All the towns are walled; but the people for the
+most part are weak timorous and unwarlike. The coast is upon both seas;
+that which is on the sea of India, or bay of Bengal, containing the sea
+ports of _Junzalam_[30], and _Tanasserim_; while on the coast of the
+China sea, are _Mompolocata_, _Cey_, _Lugor_, _Chinbu_, and _Perdio_.
+
+[Footnote 29: The oriental term _Shan_, probably derived from the
+inhabitants of Pegu; but the Siamese call themselves _Tai_, or freemen,
+and their country _Meuang tai_, or the country of freemen--E.]
+
+[Footnote 30: Otherwise called Junkseylon.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XVI.
+
+_A short Account of the Portuguese possessions between the Cape of Good
+Hope and China_.[31]
+
+
+In the middle of the seventeenth century, the Portuguese empire in the
+east, comprehended under the general name of India, from beyond the Cape
+of Good Hope in Africa, to Cape Liampo in China, extended for 4000
+leagues along the sea-coast, not including the shores of the Rea Sea and
+the Persian gulf, which would add 1200 leagues more. Within these limits
+are half of Africa, and all of eastern Asia, with innumerable islands
+adjoining these two vast divisions of the world. This vast extent may be
+conveniently divided into seven parts.
+
+[Footnote 31: De Faria, III. 115. This is to be understood as about the
+year 1640, before the Dutch had begun to conquer the Portuguese
+possessions. They are now few and unimportant, containing only some
+remnant of dominion at Mozambique, with the cities of Goa and Diu in
+India, and Macao in China.--E.]
+
+The _first_ division, between the famous Cape of Good Hope, and the
+mouth of the Red Sea, contains along the coast many kingdoms of the
+_Kafrs_; as the vast dominions of the Monomotapa, who is lord of all the
+gold mines of Africa, with those of Sofala, Mozambique, Quiloa, Pemba,
+Melinda, Pate, Brava, Magadoxa, and others. In this division the
+Portuguese have the forts of Sofala and Mombaza, with the city and fort
+of Mozambique.
+
+The _second_ division, from the mouth of the Red Sea to that of the
+Persian gulf, contains the coast of Arabia, in which they have the
+impregnable fortress of Muskat.
+
+The _third_ division, between Busrah, or Bazorah, at the bottom of the
+Persian gulf, and India proper, contains the kingdoms of Ormuz, Guadel,
+and Sinde, with part of Persia, and Cambaya, on which they have the fort
+of Bandel, and the island of Diu.
+
+The _fourth_ division, from the gulph of Cambaya, to Cape Comorin,
+contains what is properly called India, including part of Cambaya, with
+the Decan, Canara, and Malabar, subject to several princes. On this
+coast the Portuguese have, Damam, Assarim, Danu, St Gens, Agazaim, Maim,
+Manora, Trapor, Bazaim, Tana, Caranja, the city of Chaul, with the
+opposite fort of Morro; the most noble city of GOA, the large, strong,
+and populous metropolis of the Portuguese possessions in the east. This
+is the see of an archbishop, who is primate of all the east, and is the
+residence of their viceroys; and there are the courts of inquisition,
+exchequer, and chancery, with a customhouse, arsenal, and well-stored
+magazines. The city of Goa, which stands in an island, is girt with a
+strong wall, and defended by six mighty castles called Dauguim, San
+Blas, Bassoleco, Santiago de Agazaim, Panguim, and Nuestra Sennora del
+Cabo. On the other side of the bar is the castle of Bardes, and opposite
+to Dauguim is the fort of Norva, with a considerable town. On one side
+of the island of Goa is that of Salsete, in which is the fort of Rachol.
+Then going along the coast are the forts of Onor, Barcelor, Mongalor,
+Cananor Cranganor, Cochin, which is a bishopric; and near Cape Comorin,
+the town and fort of Coulan.
+
+The _fifth_ division, between Cape Comorin and the river Ganges,
+contains the coasts of Coromandel and Orixa, on which they have the fort
+of Negapatam, the fort and city of Meliapour, which is a bishopric,
+formerly named after St Thomas, and the fort of Masulipatan.
+
+The _sixth_ division, between the Ganges and Cape Cincapura, contains
+the vast kingdoms of Bengal, Pegu, Tanasserim, and others of less note;
+where the Portuguese have the city of Malacca, the seat of a bishop, and
+their last possession on the continent.
+
+The _seventh_ division, from Cape Cincapura to Cape Liampo in China,
+contains the kingdoms of Pam, Lugor, Siam, Cambodia, Tsiompa, Cochin
+China, and the vast empire of China. In this vast extent the Portuguese
+have only the island and city of Macao, yet trade all along these
+coasts.
+
+In the island of Ceylon, the Portuguese possess the city and fort of
+Columbo, with those of Manaar, Gale, and others. Beyond Malacca, a fort
+in the island of Timor. The number of our ports in all this great track
+is above fifty, with twenty cities and towns, and many dependent
+villages.
+
+Much might be said of Ceylon, but we can only make room for a short
+account of that famous island[32]. About 500 years before the time of
+our Saviour, the heathen king of _Tenacarii_, who ruled over a great
+part of the east, banished his son and heir _Vigia Rajah_, for the
+wickedness and depravity of his conduct. The young man put to sea with
+700 dissipated persons like himself, and landed at the port of
+_Preature_, between Trincomalee, and Jafnapatam, in the island of
+Ceylon, which was not then inhabited, but abounded in delightful rivers,
+springs, woods, and fruit-trees, with many fine birds, and numerous
+animals. These new colonists were so delighted with the country, that
+they gave it the name of _Lancao_, which signifies the terrestrial
+paradise, and, indeed, it is still considered as the delight of all the
+east. The first town they built was _Montota_, opposite to _Manaar_,
+whence they traded with _Cholca Rajah_, the nearest king on the
+continent, who gave his daughter as wife to the prince, and supplied his
+companions with women. He likewise sent them labourers and artizans to
+forward the new plantation; and seeing his power increase, the banished
+prince assumed the title of emperor of the islands. By strangers these
+new come people were named _Galas_, signifying banished men on account
+of their having actually been banished by the king of _Tenacarii._ Vigia
+Rajah died without children, and left the crown to his brother, in whole
+lineage it continued for 900 years. The fertility of the island, and the
+fame of its excellent cinnamon, drew thither the _Chinese_, who
+intermarried with the _Galas_, from which mixture arose a new race,
+called to this day the _Chingalas_, or Chingalese, who are very powerful
+in the island, being subtle, false, and cunning, and excellently adapted
+for courtiers.
+
+[Footnote 32: This is supplied from a former portion of the Portuguese
+Asia, Vol II. p. 507.]
+
+On the extinction of the ancient royal family, the kingdom fell to
+_Dambadine Pandar Pracura Mabago_, who was treacherously taken prisoner
+by the Chinese, afterwards restored, and then murdered by _Alagexere_,
+who usurped the crown. The usurper dying ten years afterwards without
+issue, two sons of _Dambadine_ were sent for who had fled from the
+tyrant. _Maha Pracura Mabago_, the eldest, was raised to the throne, who
+settled his court at _Cota_, and gave the dominion of the four _Corlas_
+to his brother. _Maha Pracura_ was succeeded by a grandson, the son of a
+daughter who was married to the Rajah of _Cholca_. This line likewise
+failed, and _Queta Permal_, king of Jafnapatam, was raised to the
+throne, on which he assumed the name or title of _Bocnegaboa_, or king
+by force of arms, having overcome his brother, who was king of the four
+_corlas_. His son, _Caypura Pandar_, succeeded, but was defeated and
+slain by the king of the four _Corlas_, who mounted the throne, and took
+the name of _Jauira Pracura Magabo_. These two kings were of the royal
+lineage, and had received their dominions from king _Maha Pracura_.
+After _Jauira_, his son _Drama Pracura Magabo_ succeeded, who reigned
+when Vasco de Gama discovered the route by sea to India. Afterwards,
+about the year 1500, the empire of Ceylon was divided by three brothers,
+into three separate kingdoms. _Bocnegababo Pandar_ had _Cota_; _Reigam
+Pandar_ had _Reigam_; and _Madure Pandar_ had _Cheitavaca_.
+
+In the district of _Dinavaca_ in the centre of the island, there is a
+prodigiously high mountain called the _Peak of Adam_, as some have
+conceived that our first parents lived there, and that the print of a
+foot, still to be seen on a rock on its summit, is his. The natives call
+this _Amala Saripadi_, or the mountain of the footstep. Some springs
+running down this mountain form a pool at the bottom, in which pilgrims
+wash themselves, believing that it purifies them from sin. The rock or
+stone on the top resembles a tomb-stone, and the print of the foot seems
+not artificial, but as if it had been made in the same manner as when a
+person treads upon wet clay, on which account it is esteemed miraculous.
+Pilgrims of all sorts resort thither from all the surrounding countries,
+even from Persia and China; and having purified themselves by washing in
+the pool below, they go to the top of the mountain, near which hangs a
+bell, which they strike, and consider its sound as a symbol of their
+having been purified; _as if any other bell, on being struck, would not
+sound_. According to the natives, _Drama Rajah_, the son of an ancient
+king of the island, having done penance on the mountain along with many
+disciples, and being about to go away, left the print of his foot on the
+rock as a memorial. It is therefore respected as the relic of a saint,
+and their common name for this person is _Budam_, which signifies the
+_wise man_. Some believe this saint to have been _St Jesaphat_, but it
+was more likely _St Thomas_, who has left many memorials in the _east_,
+and even in the _west_, both in Brasil and Paraguay.
+
+The natural woods of Ceylon are like the most curious orchards and
+gardens of Europe, producing citrons, lemons, and many other kinds of
+delicious fruit. It abounds in cinnamon, cardamums, sugar-canes, honey,
+and hemp. It produces iron, of which the best firelocks in the east are
+made. It abounds in precious stones, as rubies, sapphires, cats-eyes,
+topazes, chrysolites, amythests, and berils. It has many civet-cats, and
+produces, the noblest elephants in all the east. Its rivers and shores
+abound in a variety of excellent fish, and it has many excellent ports
+fit for the largest ships.
+
+_End of the Portuguese Asia_.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+VOYAGES AND TRAVELS IN EGYPT, SYRIA, ARABIA, PERSIA, AND INDIA. BY
+LUDOVICO VERTHEMA, IN 1503[33].
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+This ancient itinerary into the east, at the commencement of the
+sixteenth century, together with the subsequent chapter, containing the
+peregrinations of Cesar Frederick, about 80 years later, form an
+appropriate supplement to the Portuguese transactions in India, as
+furnishing a great number of observations respecting the countries,
+people, manners, customs, and commerce of the east at an early period.
+We learn from the _Bibliotheque Universelle des Voyages_. I. 264, that
+this itinerary was originally published in Italian at Venice, in 1520.
+The version followed on the present occasion was republished in old
+English, in 1811, in an appendix to a reprint of HAKLUYT'S EARLY
+VOYAGES, TRAVELS, AND DISCOVERIES; from which we learn that it was
+translated from _Latine into Englishe, by Richarde Eden_, and originally
+published in 1576. In both these English versions, the author is named
+_Lewes Vertomannus_; but we learn from the _Biol. Univ. des Voy._ that
+his real name was _Ludovico Verthema_, which we have accordingly adopted
+on the present occasion, in preference to the latinized denomination
+used by Eden. Although, in the present version, we have strictly adhered
+to the sense of that published by Eden 236 years ago, it has appeared
+more useful, and more consonant to the plan of our work, to render the
+antiquated language into modern English: Yet, as on similar occasions,
+we leave the _Preface of the Author_ exactly in the language and
+orthography of Eden, the original translator.
+
+[Footnote 33: Hakluyt, iv. App. pp. 547--612. Ed. Lond. 1810-11.]
+
+The itinerary is vaguely dated in the title as of the year 1503, but we
+learn from the text, that Verthema set out upon the pilgrimage of Mecca
+from Damascus in the beginning of April 1503, after having resided a
+considerable time at Damascus to acquire the language, probably Arabic;
+and he appears to have left India on his return to Europe, by way of the
+Cape of Good Hope and Lisbon, in the end of 1508. From some
+circumstances in the text, but which do not agree with the
+commencement, it would appear that Verthema had been taken prisoner by
+the Mamelukes, when fifteen years of age, and was admitted into that
+celebrated military band at Cairo, after making profession of the
+Mahometan religion. He went afterwards on pilgrimage to Mecca, from
+Damascus in Syria, then under the dominion of the Mameluke Soldan of
+Egypt, and contrived to escape or desert from Mecca. By some unexplained
+means, he appears to have become the servant or slave of a Persian
+merchant, though he calls himself his companion, and along with whom he
+made various extensive peregrinations in India. At length he contrived,
+when at Cananore, to desert again to the Portuguese, through whose means
+he was enabled to return to Europe.
+
+In this itinerary, as in all the ancient voyages and travels, the names
+of persons, places, and things, are generally given in an extremely
+vicious orthography, often almost utterly unintelligible, as taken down
+orally, according to the vernacular modes of the respective writers,
+without any intimate knowledge of the native language, or the employment
+of any fixed general standard. To avoid the multiplication of notes, we
+have endeavoured to supply this defect, by subjoining those names which
+are now almost universally adopted by Europeans, founded upon a more
+intimate acquaintance with the eastern languages. Thus the author, or
+his translator Eden, constantly uses _Cayrus_ and _Alcayr_, for the
+modern capital of Egypt, now known either by the Arabic denomination Al
+Cahira, or the European designation Cairo, probably formed by the
+Venetians from the Arabic. The names used in this itinerary have
+probably been farther disguised and vitiated, by a prevalent fancy or
+fashion of giving _latin_ terminations to all names of persons and
+places in latin translations. Thus, even the author of this itinerary
+has had his modern _Roman_ name, _Verthema_, latinized into
+_Vertomannus_, and probably the _Cairo_, or _Cayro_ of the Italian
+original, was corrupted by Eden into _Cayrus_, by way of giving it a
+latin sound. Yet, while we have endeavoured to give, often
+conjecturally, the better, or at least more intelligible and now
+customary names, it seemed proper to retain those of the original
+translation, which we believe may be found useful to our readers, as a
+kind of _geographical glossary_ of middle-age terms.
+
+Of _Verthema_ or _Vertomannus_, we only know, from the title of the
+translation of his work by Eden, that he was a _gentleman of Rome;_ and
+we learn, at the close of his itinerary, that he was knighted by the
+Portuguese viceroy of India, and that his patent of knighthood was
+confirmed at Lisbon, by the king of Portugal. The full title of this
+journal or itinerary, as given by the original translator, is as
+follows; by which, and the preface of the author, both left unaltered,
+the language and orthography of England towards the end of the sixteenth
+century, or in 1576, when Eden published his translation, will be
+sufficiently illustrated.--Ed.
+
+   THE NAUIGATION AND VYAGES
+   OF
+   LEWES VERTOMANNUS,
+   GENTLEMAN OF THE CITIE OF ROME,
+   TO THE
+   REGIONS OF ARABIA, EGYPTE, PERSIA, SYRIA, ETHIOPIA
+   AND EAST INDIA,
+   BOTH WITHIN AND WITHOUT THE RYUER OF GANGES, ETC.
+   IN THE YEERE OF OUR LORDE 1503.
+   CONTEYNING
+   MANY NOTABLE AND STRAUNGE THYNGES,
+   BOTH HYSTORICALL AND NATURALL
+   TRANSLATED OUT OF LATINE INTO ENGLYSHE,
+   BY RICHARDE EDEN.
+   IN THE YEERE OF OUR LORDE 1576.
+
+THE PREFACE OF THE AUTHOR.
+
+There haue been many before me, who, to know the miracles of the worlde,
+haue with diligent studie read dyuers authours which haue written of
+such thynges. But other giuing more credit to the lyuely voyce, haue
+been more desirous to know the same, by relation of such as haue
+traueyled in those countreys, and seene such thinges whereof they make
+relation, for that in many bookes, geathered of vncertaine aucthoritie,
+are myxt false thinges with true. Other there are so greatly desirous to
+know the trueth of these thinges, that they can in no wyse be satisfied
+vntyll, by theyr owne experience they haue founde the trueth by vyages
+and perigrinations into straunge countreys and people, to know theyr
+maners, fashions, and customes, with dyuers thynges there to be seene:
+wherein the only readyng of bookes could not satisfie theyr thirst of
+such knowledge, but rather increased the same, in so much, that they
+feared not with losse of theyr goods and daunger of lyfe to attempte
+great vyages to dyuers countreys, with witnesse of theyr eyes to see
+that they so greatly desired to knowe. The whiche thyng among other
+chaunced vnto me also, for as often as in the books of Hystories and
+Cosmographie, I read of such marueylous thynges whereof they make
+mention [especially of thynges in the east parts of the world], there
+was nothyng that coulde pacifie my vnquiet mynde, vntyll I had with myne
+eyes seene the trueth thereof.
+
+I know that some there are indued with hygh knowledge, mountyng vnto the
+heauens, whiche will contempne these our wrytinges as base and humble,
+by cause we do not here, after theyr maner, with hygh and subtile
+inquisition intreate of the motions and dispositions of the starres, and
+gyue reason of theyr woorkyng on the earth, with theyr motions,
+retrogradations, directions, mutations, epicicles, reuolutions,
+inclinations, diuinations, reflexions, and suche other parteyning to the
+science of Astrologie: whych certeynely we doe not contempne, but
+greatly prayse. But measuryng vs with our owne foote, we will leaue that
+heauie burden of heauven to the strong shoulders of Atlas and Hercules:
+and only creepyng vpon the earth, in our owne person beholde the
+situations of landes and regions, with the maners and customes of men,
+and variable fourmes, shapes, natures, and properties of beastes,
+fruites, and trees, especially suche as are among the Arabians,
+Persians, Indians, Ethiopians. And whereas in the searchyng of these
+thynges we have [thanked be God], satisfied our desire, we thinke
+neuerthelesse that we haue done little, excepte we should communicate to
+other, such thynges as we haue seene and had experience of, that they
+lykewyse by the readyng therof may take pleasure, for whose sakes we
+have written this long and dangerous discourse, of thynges whych we haue
+seene in dyvers regions and sectes of men, desiryng nothyng more then
+that the trueth may be knowen to them that desyre the same. But what
+incommodities and troubles chaunced vnto me in these vyages, as hunger,
+thirst, colde, heate, warres, captiuitie, terrours, and dyuers other
+suche daungers, I will declare by the way in theyr due places.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Of the Navigation from Venice to Alexandria in Egypt, and from thence
+to Damascus in Syria_[34].
+
+
+Should any one wish to know the cause of my engaging in this voyage, I
+can give no better reason than the ardent desire of knowledge, which
+hath moved me and many others to see the world and the wonders of
+creation which it exhibits. And, as other known parts of the world had
+been already sufficiently travelled over by others, I was determined to
+wait and describe such parts as were not sufficiently known. For which
+reason, with the grace of God, and calling upon his holy name to prosper
+our enterprise, we departed from Venice, and with prosperous winds we
+arrived in few days at the city of Alexandria in Egypt. The desire we
+had to know things more strange and farther off, did not permit us to
+remain long at that place; wherefore, sailing up the river Nile, we came
+to the city of new Babylon, commonly called _Cayrus_ or _Akayr_, _Cairo_
+or _Al-cahira_, called also _Memphis_ in ancient times.
+
+[Footnote 34: To accommodate this curious article to our mode of
+arrangement, we have made a slight alteration of the nomenclature of its
+subdivisions; calling those in this version _Sections_, which in the
+original translation of Mr Eden are denominated chapters; and have used
+the farther freedom of sometimes throwing several of these chapters into
+one section.--E.]
+
+On my first arrival at this place I was more astonished than I can well
+express, yet on a more intimate observation it seemed much inferior to
+the report of its fame, as in extent it seemed not larger than Rome,
+though much more populous. But many have been deceived in regard to its
+size by the extensive suburbs, which are in reality numerous dispersed
+villages with fields interspersed, which some persons have thought to
+belong to the city, though they are from two to three miles distant, and
+surround it on all sides. It is not needful to expatiate in this place
+on the manners and religion of this city and its environs, as it is well
+known that the inhabitants are Mahometans and Mamelukes; these last
+being Christians who have forsaken the true faith to serve the Turks and
+Mahometans. Those of that description who used to serve the Soldan of
+Babylon in Egypt, or Cairo, in former times before the Turkish
+conquest, used to be called Mamelukes, while such of them as served the
+Turks were denominated _Jenetzari_ or Janisaries. The Mameluke
+Mahometans are subject to the Soldan of Syria.
+
+As the riches and magnificence of Cairo, and the Mameluke soldiers by
+whom it is occupied are well known, we do not deem it necessary to say
+any thing respecting them in this place. Wherefore departing from
+Babylon in Egypt, or Cairo, and returning to Alexandria, we again put to
+sea and went to _Berynto_, a city on the coast of Syria Phoenicia,
+inhabited by Mahometans and abounding in all things, where we remained a
+considerable time. This city is not encompassed with walls, except on
+the west side where there are walls close to the sea. We found nothing
+memorable at this place, except an old ruined building where they say
+St. George delivered the kings daughter from a cruel dragon which he
+slew, and then restated the lady to her father. Departing from thence we
+went to Tripoli in Syria, which is two days sail to the east of Berynto.
+It is inhabited by Mahometans, who are subject to the lieutenant or
+governor of Syria under the Soldan. The soil of the neighbouring country
+is very fertile, and as it carries on great trade this city abounds in
+all things. Departing from thence we came to the city of _Comagene_ of
+Syria, commonly called Aleppo, and named by our men Antioch[35]. This is
+a goodly city, which is situated under mount _Taurus_ and is subject to
+the lieutenant of Syria under the Soldan of Egypt. Here are the _scales_
+or ladders as they are called of the Turks and Syrians, being near mount
+Olympus. It is a famous mart of the Azamians and Persians. The Azamians
+are a Mahometan people who inhabit Mesopotamia on the confines of
+Persia.
+
+[Footnote 35: This is a gross error, as Aleppo is above 80 English miles
+N.E. and island from Antioch. From the sequel it is evident that Antioch
+is the place meant by Vertomannus in the text, as the _scales_, mart, or
+staple of the Syrian trade.--E.]
+
+Departing from Antioch we went by land to Damascus, a journey of ten
+days; but mid-way we came to a city named _Aman_ in the neighbourhood of
+which there grows a great quantity of gossampine or cotton, and all
+manner of pleasant fruits. About six miles from Damascus on the
+declivity of a mountain is a city called _Menin_, inhabited by Greek
+christians who are subject to the governor of Damascus. At that place
+there are two fine churches, which the inhabitants allege were built by
+Helena the mother of the emperor Constantine. This place produces all
+kinds of fruit in great perfection, especially excellent grapes, and the
+gardens are watered with perpetual fountains.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Of the City of Damascus_.
+
+
+Departing from _Menin_ we came to Damascus, a city so beautiful as
+surpasses all belief, situated in a soil of wonderful fertility. I was
+so much delighted by the marvellous beauty of this city that I sojourned
+there a considerable time, that by learning the language I might inquire
+into the manners of the people. The inhabitants are Mahometans and
+Mamelukes, with a great number of Christians who follow the Greek
+ritual. It may be proper in this place to give some account of the
+_Hexarchatus_ or commander of Damascus, who is subject to the lieutenant
+of Syria, which some call _sorya_. There is a very strong castle or
+fortress, which was built by a certain Etruscan or native of Florence in
+Tuscany, while he was _exarch_ or governor of Damascus, as appears by a
+flower of the lily graven on marble, being the arms of Florence. This
+castle is encompassed by a deep ditch and high walls with four goodly
+high towers, and is entered by means of a drawbridge which can be let
+down or taken up at pleasure. Within, this castle is provided with all
+kinds of great artillery and warlike ammunition, and has a constant
+guard of fifty Mamelukes, who wait upon the captain of the castle and
+are paid by the viceroy of Syria. The following story respecting the
+Florentine _exarch_ or governor of Damascus was related to me by the
+inhabitants. One of the Soldans of Syria happened to have poison
+administered to him, and when in search of a remedy he was cured by that
+Florentine who belonged to the company of Mamelukes. Owing to this great
+service he grew into high favour with the Soldan, who in reward made him
+exarch or governor of Damascus in which he built the before mentioned
+citadel. For saving the life of their Soldan this man is still reputed
+among them as a saint, and after his death the sovereignty of Damascus
+returned to the Syrians.
+
+The Soldan is said to be much beloved by his princes and lords, to whom
+he is ever ready to grant principalities and governments, reserving
+always to himself the yearly payment of many thousands of those pieces
+of gold called _saraphos_ or serafines, and any one who neglects payment
+of the stipulated tribute is liable to be immediately put to death. Ten
+or twelve of the chief noblemen or governors always reside with the
+Soldan to assist him with their councils and to carry his orders into
+execution. The Mameluke government is exceedingly oppressive to the
+merchants and even to the other Mahometan inhabitants of Damascus. When
+the Soldan thinks fit to extort a sum of money from any of the nobles or
+merchants, he gives two letters to the governor of the castle, in one of
+which is contained a list of such as he thinks proper to be invited into
+the castle, and in the other is set down what sum the Soldan is pleased
+to demand from his subjects; and with these commands they immediately
+comply. Sometimes however the nobles are of such power that they refuse
+to attend at the castle when summoned; and knowing that the tyrant will
+offer them violence, they often escape into the dominions of the Turks.
+We have noticed that the watchmen who are stationed in the towers do not
+give warning to the guard by calling out as with us, but by means of
+drums each answering the other; and if any of the centinels be asleep
+and do not answer the beat of the patrole in a moment, he is immediately
+committed to prison for a whole year.
+
+This city is well built and wonderfully populous, much frequented and
+extremely rich, and abounds in all kinds of commodities and provisions,
+such as flesh, corn, and fruits. It has fresh damascene grapes all the
+year round, with pomegranates, oranges, lemons, and excellent olive
+trees; likewise the finest roses I ever saw, both red and white. The
+apples are excellent, but the pears and peaches are unsavoury, owing as
+is said to too much moisture. A fine clear river runs past the city,
+which is so well supplied with water that almost every house has a
+fountain of curious workmanship, many of them splendidly ornamented with
+embossed or carved work. Outwardly their houses are very plain, but the
+insides are beautifully adorned with various ornaments of the stone
+called _oplus_ or serpentine marble. The city contains many temples
+which they call mosques, the most beautiful of which is built after the
+manner of St Peters at Rome, and as large, only that the middle has no
+roof being entirely open, all the rest of the temple being vaulted. This
+temple has four great double gates of brass, and has many splendid
+fountains on the inside, in which they preserve the body of the prophet
+Zacharias, whom they hold in great veneration. There are still to be
+seen the ruins of many decayed canonical or Christian churches, having
+much fine carved work. About a mile from the city the place is pointed
+out where our Saviour spoke to St Paul, saying, "Paul! Paul! why
+persecutest thou me!" at which place all the Christians who die in the
+city are buried. The tower also is shewn in which Paul was imprisoned,
+which joins the wall of the city; but even the Mahometans do not attempt
+to shut up that part of the tower through which St Paul was conducted by
+the angel, alleging that, when they close it up over night is found open
+again next morning. They likewise point out the houses in which they say
+that Cain slew his brother Abel, which are in a certain valley about a
+mile from the city, but on the side of a hill skirting that valley.
+
+The Mamelukes or stranger soldiers who inhabit Damascus live in a most
+licentious manner. They are all men who have forsaken the Christian
+faith, and who have been purchased as slaves by the governor of Syria.
+Being brought up both in learning and warlike discipline, they are very
+active and brave; and all of them whether high or low, receive regular
+wages from the governor, being six of those pieces of gold called
+serafines monthly, besides meat and drink for themselves and servants,
+and provender for their horses; and as they shew themselves valiant and
+faithful their wages are increased. They never walk singly about the
+city, which would be deemed dishonourable, but always by two or three
+together; and if they chance to meet with two or three women in the
+streets, for whom even they are in use to wait in the neighbourhood of
+such houses as the women frequent, licence is granted to such as first
+meet them to carry them to certain taverns where they abuse them. When
+the Mamelukes attempt to uncover the faces of these women, they strive
+all they can to prevent being known, and are generally allowed to go
+away without having their veils lifted. Hence it sometimes happens, when
+they think to have abused the daughter of some nobleman or person of
+condition, that they have fallen in with their own wives, as actually
+happened while I was there. The women of Damascus beautify and adorn
+themselves with great attention, wearing silk clothes, which they cover
+with an outer garment of cotton as fine as silk. They wear white
+buskins, and red or purple shoes, having their heads decorated with
+rich jewels and ear-rings, with rings on their fingers and splendid
+bracelets on their arms. They marry as often as they please, as when
+weary of, or dissatisfied with their husbands, they apply to the chief
+of their religion, called the _cady_, and request of him to divorce
+them, which divorcement is called _talacare_ in their language, after
+which they are at liberty to contract a new marriage; and the same
+liberty is allowed to the husbands. Some say that the Mahometans have
+usually five or six wives, but as far as I could learn they have only
+two or three. They eat openly in the markets or fairs, and there they
+cook all their food, living on the flesh, of horses, camels, buffaloes,
+goats, and other beasts, and use great quantities of fresh cheese. Those
+who sell milk drive flocks of forty or fifty she-goats through the
+streets, which they bring to the doors of those who buy, driving them
+even into their chambers, though three stories high, where the animals
+are milked, so that every one gets their milk fresh and unadulterated.
+These goats have their ears a span long, and are very fruitful. They use
+many mushrooms, as there are often seen at one time 20 or 30 camels
+loaded with mushrooms coming to market, and yet all are sold in two or
+three days. These are brought from the mountains of Armenia, and from
+Asia Minor, now called Turkey, Natolia, or Anatolia. The Mahometans use
+long loose vestures both of silk and cloth, most having hose or trowsers
+of cotton, and white shoes or slippers. When any Mahometan happens to
+meet a Mameluke, even though the worthier person, he must give place and
+reverence to the Mameluke, who would otherwise beat him with a staff.
+Though often ill used by the Mahometans, the Christians have many
+warehouses in Damascus, where they sell various kinds of silks and
+velvets, and other commodities.
+
+
+
+
+SECT. III.
+
+_Of the Journey from Damascus to Mecca, and of the Manners of the
+Arabians_.
+
+
+On the 8th of April 1503, having hired certain camels to go with the
+caravan to Mecca, and being then ignorant of the manners and customs of
+those with whom I was to travel, I entered into familiarity and
+friendship with a certain Mameluke captain who had forsaken our faith,
+with whom I agreed for the expences of my journey, and who supplied me
+with apparel like that worn by the Mamelukes, and gave me a good horse,
+so that I went in his company along with other Mamelukes. This advantage
+cost me much money and many gifts. Thus entering on our journey, we came
+in three days to a place called _Mezaris_, where we tarried other three
+days that the merchants might provide all necessaries for the journey,
+and especially camels. There is a certain prince called _Zambei_, of
+great power in Arabia, who had three brothers and four sons. This prince
+possessed 40,000 horses, 10,000 mares, and 4000 camels, which he kept in
+a country two days journey in extent. His power is so great, that he is
+at war with the Soldan of Egypt, the governor of Damascus, and the
+prince of Jerusalem all at once. His chief time of robbing and
+plundering is in harvest, when, he often falls unexpectedly on the
+Arabians, invading their lands and carrying away their wheat and barley,
+employing himself continually in predatory incursions. When his mares
+are weary with continual running, he stops to rest them, and gives them
+camels milk to drink, to refresh and cool them after their fatigue.
+These mares are of most wonderful swiftness, and when I saw them they
+seemed rather to fly than to run in riding, these Arabians only cover
+their horses with cloths or mats, and their own clothing is confined to
+a single vesture somewhat like a petticoat. Their weapons are long
+lances or darts made of reeds, ten or twelve cubits long, pointed with
+iron and fringed with silk. The men are despicable looking people, of
+small stature, of a colour between black and yellow, which we call
+olive, having voices like women, and long black hair flowing on their
+shoulders. They are more numerous than can well be believed, and are
+continually at war among themselves. They inhabit the mountains, and
+have certain times appointed for going out on predatory excursions, when
+they march in troops in great order, carrying with them their wives and
+children, and all their goods. Their houses or tents rather are carried
+on camels, having no other houses, but dwelling always in tents like
+soldiers. These tents are made of wool, and look black and filthy.
+
+On the 11th of April we departed from Mezaris to the number of 40,000
+men with 35,000 camels, having only sixty Mamelukes to guide and guard
+us. We were regularly marshalled for the march into a van and main body,
+with two wings, in which order the caravans of pilgrims always travel
+in these regions. From Damascus to Mecca is a journey of forty days and
+forty nights. Departing from Mezaris we continued our journey that day
+till the twenty-second hour of the day. Then our captain or
+_Agmirus_[36], having given the appointed signal, the whole caravan
+immediately halted and disburdened the camels, two hours only being
+allowed for rest and refreshment for the men and beasts. Then upon a new
+signal the camels were all reloaded, and we resumed our march. Every
+camel has for one feed five barley loaves, raw and not baked, as large
+as pomegranates. We continued our second days journey like the first,
+all day and night, from sun-rise to the twenty-second hour of the day,
+and this was the constant regular order. Every eighth day they procure
+water by digging the ground or sand, though sometimes we found wells and
+cisterns. Likewise after every eight day, they rest two days, that the
+camels and horses may recover strength. Every camel bears an incredible
+load, being equal to that Which is borne by two strong-mules.
+
+[Footnote 36: The Emir Haji, or captain of the pilgrimage, which name of
+office is transposed in the text to Haji-emir, corrupted _Agmir_, and
+latinized Agmirus.--E.]
+
+At every resting-place at the waters, they are always obliged to defend
+themselves against vast numbers of Arabians, but these conflicts are
+hardly ever attended with bloodshed, insomuch that though we often
+fought with them, we had only one man slain during the whole journey,
+these Arabians are so weak and cowardly that our threescore Mamelukes
+have often driven 60,000 Arabians before them. Of these Mamelukes, I
+have often seen wonderful instances of their expertness and activity. I
+once saw a Mameluke place an apple on the head of his servant at the
+distance of 12 or 14 paces, and strike it off from his head, another
+while riding at full speed took the saddle from his horse, and carried
+it some time on his head, and put it again on the horse without checking
+his career.
+
+At the end of twelve days journey we came to the valley of Sodom and
+Gomorra, which we found, as is said in the holy scripture, to retain the
+ruins of the destroyed city as a lasting memorial of God's wrath. I may
+affirm that there are three cities, each situated on the declivity of
+three separate hills, and the ruins do not seem above three or four
+cubits high, among which is seen something like blood, or rather like
+red wax mixed with earth. It is easy to believe that these people were
+addicted to horrible vices, as testified by the barren, dry, filthy
+unwholesome region, utterly destitute of water. These people were once
+fed with manna sent from heaven, but abusing the gifts of God they were
+utterly destroyed. Departing about twenty miles from this place, about
+thirty of our company perished for want of water, and several others
+were overwhelmed with sand. A little farther on we found water at the
+foot of a little hill, and there halted. Early next morning there came
+to us 24,000 Arabians, who demanded money from us in payment of the
+water we had taken, and as we refused them any money, saying that the
+water was the free gift of God to all, we came to blows. We gathered
+ourselves together on the mountain as the safest place, using our camels
+as a bulwark, all the merchants and their goods being placed in the
+middle of the camels while we fought manfully on every side. The battle
+continued for two days, when water failed both with us and our enemies,
+who encompassed the mountain all round, continually calling out that
+they would break in among our camels. At length our captain assembled
+all the merchants, whom he commanded to gather twelve hundred pieces of
+gold to be given to the Arabians: but on receiving that sum they said it
+was too little, and demanded ten thousand pieces and more for the water
+we had taken. Whereupon our captain gave orders that every man in the
+caravan who could bear arms should prepare for battle. Next morning our
+commander sent on the caravan with the unarmed pilgrims inclosed by the
+camels, and made an attack upon the enemy with our small army, which
+amounted to about three hundred in all. With the loss only of one man
+and a woman on our side, we completely defeated the Arabians of whom we
+slew 1500 men. This victory is not to be wondered at, considering that
+the Arabians are almost entirely unarmed being almost naked, and having
+only a thin loose vesture, while their horses are very ill provided for
+battle, having no saddles or other caparisons.
+
+Continuing our march after this victory, we came in eight days to a
+mountain about ten or twelve miles in circuit, which was inhabited by
+about 5000 Jews. These were of very small stature, hardly exceeding five
+or six spans in height, and some much less[37]. They have small shrill
+voices like women, and are of very dark complexions, some blacker than
+the rest. Their only food is the flesh of goats. They are all
+circumcised and follow the Jewish law, and when any Mahometan falls into
+their hands they flea him alive. We found a hole at the foot of the
+mountain out of which there flowed an abundant source of water, at which
+we laded 16,000 camels, giving great offence to the Jews. These people
+wander about their mountain like so many goats or deer, not daring to
+descend into the plain for fear of the Arabians. At the bottom of the
+mountain we found a small grove of seven or eight thorn trees, among
+which we found a pair of turtle doves, which were to us a great rarity,
+as during our long journey hitherto we had seen neither beast nor bird.
+
+[Footnote 37: This account of the stature of the Jewish tribe cannot
+fail to be much exaggerated, otherwise the text must have been corrupted
+at this place; as we cannot well conceive of a tribe in Arabia not
+exceeding four feet two inches in average height.--E.]
+
+Proceeding two days journey from the mountain of the Jews, we came to
+_Medinathalhabi_[38] or Medina. Four miles from this city we found a
+well, where the caravan rested and remained for a whole day, that we
+might wash ourselves and put on clean garments to appear decently in the
+city. Medina contains about three hundred houses of stone or brick, and
+is well peopled, being surrounded by bulwarks of earth. The soil is
+utterly barren, except at about two miles from the city there are about
+fifty palm trees which bear dates. At that place, beside a garden, there
+is a water-course which runs into a lower plain, where the pilgrims are
+accustomed to water their camels. I had here an opportunity to refute
+the vulgar opinion that the tomb or coffin of the _wicked_ Mahomet is at
+Mecca, and hangs in the air without support. For I tarried here three
+days and saw with my own eyes the place where Mahomet was buried, which
+is here at Medina, and not at Mecca. On presenting ourselves to enter
+the _Meschita_ or mosque, which name they give to all their churches or
+temples, we could not be allowed to enter unless along with a
+companion[39] little or great, who takes us by the hand and leads us to
+the place where they say that Mahomet is buried. His temple is vaulted,
+being about 100 paces long by 80 in breadth, and is entered by two
+gates. It consists of three parallel vaults, which are supported by
+four hundred pillars of white bricks, and within are suspended about
+three thousand lamps. In the inner part of this mosque or temple is a
+kind of tower five paces in circuit, vaulted on every side, and covered
+with a large cloth of silk, which is borne up by a grate of copper
+curiously wrought, and at the distance of two paces on every side from
+the tower, so that this tower or tomb is only seen as through a lattice
+by the devout pilgrims. This tomb is situated in an inner building
+toward the left hand from the great mosque, in a chapel to which you
+enter by a narrow gate. On every side of these gates or doors are seen
+many books in the manner of a library, twenty on one side, and
+twenty-five on the other, which contain the vile traditions of Mahomet
+and his companions. Within this chapel is seen a sepulchre in which they
+say that Mahomet lies buried with his principal companions, _Nabi_,
+_Bubacar_, _Othamar_, _Aumar_, and _Fatoma_. Mahomet, who was a native
+Arabian, was their chief captain. _Hali_ or _Ali_ was his son in-law,
+for he took to wife his daughter _Fatima_. _Bubacar_ or Abubeker, was as
+they say exalted to be chief councillor and governor under Mahomet, but
+was not honoured with the office of apostle or prophet. _Othamar and
+Aumar_, Othoman and Omar, were chief captains in the army of Mahomet.
+Every one of these have particular books containing the acts and
+traditions which relate to them, whence proceed great dissentions and
+discords of religion and manners among these vile people, some of whom
+adhere to one doctrine and some to another, so that they are divided
+into various sects among themselves, and kill each other like beasts,
+upon quarrels respecting their various opinions, all equally false,
+having each their several patrons, doctors, and saints, as they call
+them. This also is the chief cause of war between the Sophy of Persia
+and the grand Turk, both of whom are Mahometans, yet they live in
+continual and mortal hatred of each other for the maintenance of their
+respective sects, saints, and apostles, every one thinking their own the
+best.
+
+[Footnote 38: This name ought probably to have been written
+Medinat-al-habi, and is assuredly the holy city of Medina, in which
+Mahomet was buried.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 39: This seems to refer to some official residents of Medina,
+who must accompany the pilgrims in their visits to the holy places,
+probably for profit.--E.]
+
+The first evening that we came to Medina, our captain, or Emir of the
+pilgrimage, sent for the chief priest of the temple, and declared that
+the sole object of his coming thither was to visit the sepulchre and
+body of the _Nabi_ or prophet, as they usually call Mahomet, and that he
+understood the price generally paid for being admitted to a sight of
+these mysteries was four thousand gold _serafines_. He told him likewise
+that he had no parents, neither brothers nor sisters, kindred, wife, nor
+children; that he had not come hither to purchase any merchandise, such
+as spices, _bacca_[40], spikenard, or jewels, but merely for the
+salvation of his soul and from pure zeal for religion, and was therefore
+exceedingly desirous to see the body of the prophet. To this the priest
+answered in apparent anger, "Darest thou, with those eyes with which
+thou hast committed so many abominable sins, presume to look on him by
+whom God created heaven and earth?" The captain replied that he spoke
+true, yet prayed him that he might be permitted to see the prophet, when
+he would instantly have his eyes thrust out. Then answered the _Side_ or
+chief priest, "Prince! I will freely communicate all things to you. It
+is undeniable that our holy prophet died at this place; but he was
+immediately borne away by angels to heaven and there received among them
+as their equal." Our captain then asked where was now Jesus Christ the
+son of Mary, and the _Side_ said that he was at the feet of Mahomet: To
+which the captain replied that he was satisfied, and wished for no more
+information. After this, coming out of the temple, he said to us, "See I
+pray you for what stuff I would have paid three thousand _serafines_ of
+gold!"
+
+[Footnote 40: This word is obviously _berries_, and signifies
+coffee.--E.]
+
+That same evening at almost three o'clock of the night[41], ten or
+twelve elders of the city came into the encampment of our caravan, close
+by one of the gates of the city, where running about like madmen, they
+continually cried out aloud, "Mahomet the apostle of God shall rise
+again: O prophet of God thou shalt rise again. God have mercy upon us!"
+Alarmed by these cries, our captain and all of us seized our weapons in
+all haste, suspecting that the Arabians had come to rob our caravan. On
+demanding the reason of all this outcry, for they cried out as is done
+by the Christians when any miraculous event occurs, the elders answered,
+"Saw you not the light which shone from the sepulchre of the prophet?"
+Then said one of the elders, "Are you slaves?" meaning thereby bought
+men or Mamelukes; and when our captain answered that we were Mamelukes,
+the elder replied, "You, my lords, being new to the faith, and not yet
+fully confirmed in the religion of our holy prophet, cannot see these
+heavenly things." To which our captain answered, "O! you mad and
+insensate beasts! I thought to have given you three thousand pieces of
+gold; but now I shall give you nothing, you dogs and progeny of dogs?"
+Now, it is to be understood that the pretended miraculous light which
+was seen to proceed from the sepulchre, was merely occasioned by a flame
+made by the priests in the open part of the tower formerly mentioned,
+which they wished to impose on us as a miracle. After this our commander
+gave orders that none of the caravan should enter into the temple.
+Having thus seen with my own eyes, I can assuredly declare that there is
+neither iron nor steel, nor magnet stone by which the tomb of Mahomet is
+made to hang in the air, as some have falsely imagined, neither is there
+any mountain nearer to Medina than four miles. To this city of Medina
+corn and all other kinds of victuals are brought from Arabia Felix,
+Babylon or Cairo in Egypt, and from Ethiopia by way of the Red Sea,
+which is about four days journey from the city.
+
+[Footnote 41: Counting from sunset after the manner of the
+Italians.--E.]
+
+Having remained three days in our encampment on the outside of Medina to
+rest and refresh ourselves and our animals, and being satisfied, or
+disgusted rather, by the vile and abominable trumperies, deceits, and
+hypocritical trifles of the Mahometan delusions, we determined to resume
+our journey; and procuring a pilot or guide, who might direct our way by
+means of a chart and mariners box or compass, as is used at sea, we bent
+our journey towards the west, where we found a fair well or fountain
+whence flowed an abundant stream of water, and where we and our beasts
+were satisfied with drink. According to a tradition among the
+inhabitants, this region was formerly burnt up with drought and
+sterility, till the evangelist St Mark procured this fountain from God
+by miracle. We came into the _sea of sand_ before our arrival at the
+mountain of the Jews, formerly mentioned, and in it we journeyed three
+days and nights. This is a vast plain covered all over by white sand as
+fine almost as flour; and if by evil chance any one travels south while
+the wind blows to the north, they are overwhelmed by drifted sand. Even
+with the wind favourable, or blowing in the direction of their journey,
+the pilgrims are apt to scatter and disperse, as they cannot see each
+other at ten paces distance. For this reason those who travel across the
+sea of sand are enclosed in wooden cages on the backs of camels, and
+are guided by experienced pilots by chart and compass, as mariners on
+the ocean. In this journey many perish by thirst, and many by drinking
+with too much avidity when they fall in with wells. Owing to this
+_Momia_ is found in these sands, bring the flesh of such as have been
+_drowned in the sea of sand_, which is there dried up by the heat of the
+sun, and the excessive dryness of the sand preventing putrefaction. This
+_Momia_ or dried flesh is esteemed medicinal; but there is another and
+more precious kind of _Momia_, being the dried and embalmed bodies of
+kings and princes, which have been preserved in all times from
+corrupting.
+
+When the wind blows from the north-east, the sand rises, and is driven
+against a certain mountain, which is a branch from Mount Sinai; and in
+that place we found certain pillars artificially wrought, which are
+called _Januan_. On the left hand side of that mountain, and near the
+highest summit, there is a cave or den, to which you enter by an iron
+gate, and into which cave Mahomet is said to have retired for
+meditation. While passing that mountain, we heard certain horrible cries
+and loud noises, which put us in great fear. Departing therefore from
+the fountain of St Mark, we continued our journey for ten days, and
+twice in that time we had to fight against fifty thousand Arabians. At
+length, however, we arrived at Mecca, where we found every thing in
+confusion, in consequence of a civil war between two brothers who
+contended for the kingdom of Mecca.
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Observations of the Author during his residence at Mecca_.
+
+
+The famous city of Mecha or Mecca is populous and well built, in a round
+form, having six thousand houses as well built as those in Rome, some of
+which have cost three or four thousand pieces of gold. It has no walls,
+being protected or fortified as it were on all sides by mountains, over
+one of which, about two furlongs from the city, the road is cut by which
+we descended into the plain below; but there are three other entries
+through the mountains. It is under the dominion of a sultan, one of four
+brethren of the progeny of Mahomet, who is subject to the Soldan of
+Egypt, but his other three brothers are continually at war with him. On
+the 18th day of May, descending from the before-mentioned road obliquely
+into the plain, we came to Mecca by the north side. On the south side of
+the city there are two mountains very near each other, having a very
+narrow intervening valley, which is the way leading to Mecca on that
+side. To the east there in a similar valley between two other mountains,
+by which is the road to a mountain where they sacrifice to the
+patriarchs Abraham and Isaac, which hill or mount is ten or twelve miles
+from Mecca, and is about three stone throws in height, being all of a
+stone as hard as marble, yet is not marble. On the top of this mount is
+a temple or mosque, built after their manner, having three entrances. At
+the foot of the mountain are two great cisterns, which preserve water
+free from corruption: one of these is reserved for the camels belonging
+to the caravan of Cairo, and the other for that of Damascus. These
+cisterns are filled by rain water, which is brought from a great way
+off. We shall speak afterwards of the sacrifices performed at this
+mountain, and must now return to Mecca.
+
+On our arrival we found the caravan from Memphis, or Babylon of Egypt,
+which had arrived eight days before us, coming by a different way, and
+consisted of 64,000 camels, with a guard of an hundred Mamelukes. This
+city of Mecca is assuredly cursed of God, for it is situated in a most
+barren spot, destitute of all manner of fruit or corn, and so burnt up
+with drought, that you cannot have as much water for twelve pence as
+will satisfy one person for a whole day. Most part of their provisions
+are brought from Cairo in Egypt, by the Red Sea, or _Mare Erythreum_ of
+the ancients, and is landed at the port of _Gida_, Joddah or Jiddah,
+which is about forty miles from Mecca. The rest of their provisions are
+brought from the _Happy Arabia_, or _Arabia Felix_, so named from its
+fruitfulness in comparison with the other two divisions, called
+_Petrea_ and _Deserta_, or the Stoney and Desert Arabias. They also
+get much corn from Ethiopia. At Mecca we found a prodigious multitude of
+strangers who were _peregrines_ or pilgrims; some from Syria, others
+from Persia, and others from both the Indies, that is, from India on
+this side the river Ganges, and also from the farther India beyond that
+river. During my stay of twenty days at Mecca, I saw a most prodigious
+number and variety of people, infinitely beyond what I had ever before
+seen. This vast concourse of strangers of many nations and countries
+resort thither from various causes, but chiefly for trade, and to
+obtain pardon of their sins by discharging a vow of pilgrimage.
+
+From India, both on this side and beyond the Ganges, they bring for sale
+precious stones pearls and spices; and especially from that city of the
+greater India, which is named _Bangella_[42] they bring much
+_gossampyne_ cloth[43] and silk. They receive spices also from
+Ethiopia[44]; and, in short, this city of Mecca is a most famous and
+plentiful mart of many rich and valuable commodities. But the main
+object for which pilgrims resort thither from so many countries and
+nations, is, to purchase the pardon of their sins. In the middle of the
+city there is a temple after the manner of the coliseum or amphitheatre
+of Rome, yet not built of marble or hewn stone, being only of burnt
+bricks. Like an amphitheatre, it has ninety or an hundred gates, and is
+vaulted over. It is entered on every side by a descent of twelve steps,
+and in its porch is the mart for jewels and precious stones, all the
+walls of the entry being gilt over in a most splendid manner. In the
+lower part of the temple under the vaults, there is always to be seen a
+prodigious multitude of men; as there are generally five or six thousand
+in that place, who deal solely in sweet ointments and perfumes, among
+which especially is a certain most odoriferous powder, with which dead
+bodies are embalmed. From this place all manner of delightful perfumes
+are carried to all the Mahometan countries, for beyond any thing that
+can be found in the shops of our apothecaries.
+
+[Footnote 42: This must necessarily be the kingdom or province of
+Bengal.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 43: Fine cottons or muslins are here evidently meant.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 44: This is inexplicable, as Ethiopia possesses no spices,
+unless we may suppose the author to mean here the sea of Ethiopia or Red
+Sea, as the track by which spices were brought to Mecca.--E.]
+
+On the 23d day of May yearly, the pardons begin to be distributed in the
+temple, after the following manner: The temple is entirely open in the
+middle, and in its centre stands a turret about six paces in
+circumference, and not exceeding the height of a man, which is hung all
+round with silken tapestry. This turret or cell is entered by a gate of
+silver, on each side of which are vessels full of precious balsam, which
+the inhabitants told us was part of the treasure belonging to the sultan
+of Mecca. _At every vault of the turret is fastened a round circle of
+iron, like the ring of a door_[45]. On the day of Pentecost, all men
+are permitted to visit this holy place. On the 22d of May, a great
+multitude of people began early in the morning, before day, to walk
+seven times round the turret, every corner of which they devoutly kissed
+and frequently handled. About ten or twelve paces from this principal
+turret is another, which is built like a Christian chapel, having three
+or four entries; and in the middle is a well seventy cubits deep, the
+water of which is impregnated with saltpetre. At this well eight men are
+stationed to draw water for all the multitude. After the pilgrims have
+seven times walked round the first turret, they come to this one, and
+touching the mouth or brim of the well, they say these words: "Be it to
+the honour of God, and may God pardon my sins." Then those who draw
+water pour three buckets on the heads of every one that stands around
+the well, washing or wetting them all over, even should their garments
+be of silk; after which the deluded fools fondly imagine that their sins
+are forgiven them. It is pretended that the turret first spoken of was
+the first house that was builded by Abraham; wherefore, while yet all
+over wet by the drenching at the well, they go to the mountain already
+mentioned, where the sacrifice is made to Abraham; and after remaining
+there for two days, they make their sacrifice to the patriarch at the
+foot of the mountain.
+
+[Footnote 45: This description is altogether unintelligible.--E.]
+
+When they intend to sacrifice, the pilgrims who are able to afford it,
+kill some three, some four, or more sheep, even to ten, so that in one
+sacrifice there are sometimes slain above 3000 sheep; and as they are
+all slaughtered at sun-rise, the shambles then flow with blood. Shortly
+afterwards all the carcasses are distributed for God's sake among the
+poor, of whom I saw there at least to the number of 20,000. These poor
+people dig many long ditches in the fields round Mecca, where they make
+fires of camels' dung, at which they roast or seethe the sacrificial
+flesh which has been distributed to them by the richer pilgrims. In my
+opinion, these poor people flock to Mecca more to satisfy their hunger,
+than from motives of devotion. Great quantities of cucumbers are brought
+here for sale from Arabia Felix, which are bought by those who have
+money; and as the parings are thrown out from their tents, the
+half-famished multitude gather these parings from among the mire or sand
+to satisfy their hunger, and are so greedy of that vile food, that they
+fight who shall gather most.
+
+On the day after the sacrifice to Abraham, the _cadi_, who is to these
+people as the preachers of the word of God among us, ascends to the top
+of a high mountain, whence he preaches to the people who stand below. He
+harangued for the space of on hour, principally inculcating that they
+should bewail their sins with tears and sighs and lamentations, beating
+their breasts. At one time he exclaimed with a loud voice, "O! Abraham
+the beloved of God, O! Isaac the chosen of God and his friend, pray to
+God for the people of the prophet." As these words were spoken, we
+suddenly heard loud cries and lamentations, and a rumour was spread that
+an army of 20,000 Arabians was approaching, on which we all fled into
+the city, even those who were appointed to guard the pilgrims being the
+first to make their escape. Mid-way between the mountain of Abraham and
+the city of Mecca, there is a mean wall, about four cubits broad, where
+the passengers had strewed the whole way with stones, owing to the
+following traditionary story: When Abraham was commanded to sacrifice
+his son Isaac, he directed his son to follow him to the place where he
+was to execute the divine command; and as Isaac was following after his
+father, a devil met him in the way near this wall, in the semblance of a
+fair and friendly person, and asked him whither he went. Isaac answered
+that he was going to his father, who waited for him. To this the arch
+enemy replied, that he had better not go, as his father meant to
+sacrifice him. But Isaac despising the warnings of the devil, continued
+his way, that his father might execute the commandments of God
+respecting him. On this the devil departed from him, but met him again
+as he went forward, under the semblance of another friendly person, and
+advised him as before not to go to his father. On this Isaac threw a
+stone at the devil, and wounded him in the forehead; in remembrance of
+which traditionary story it is that the people, on passing this way, are
+accustomed to throw stones at the wall before going to the city. As we
+went this way, the air was in a manner darkened with prodigious
+multitudes of stock doves, all, as they pretend, derived from the dove
+that spoke in the ear of Mahomet, in likeness of the Holy Ghost. These
+doves are seen in vast numbers in all parts about Mecca, as in the
+houses, villages, inns, and granaries of corn and rice, and are so tame
+that they can hardly be driven away. Indeed it is reckoned a capital
+crime to kill or even take them, and there are certain funds assigned
+for feeding them at the temple.
+
+Beyond the temple there are certain parks or inclosures, in which there
+are two _unicorns_ to be seen, called by the Greeks _Monocerotae_, which
+are shewn to the people as miracles of nature, and not without good
+reason, on account of their scarcity and strange appearance. One of
+these, though much higher than the other, is not unlike a colt of thirty
+months old, and has a horn in its forehead, growing straight forwards
+and the length of three cubits. The other is much younger, resembling a
+colt of one year old, and its horn is only four hand breadths long.
+These singular animals are of a weasel chesnut colour, having a head
+like that of a hart, but the neck is not near so long, with a thin mane,
+hanging all to one side. The legs are thin and slender, like those of a
+fawn or hind, and the hoofs are cleft much like those of a goat, the
+outer parts of the hind feet being very full of hair. These animals
+seemed wild and fierce yet exceedingly comely. They were sent out of
+Ethiopia by a king of that country, as a rare and precious gift to the
+sultan of Mecca[46].
+
+[Footnote 46: The unicorn is an unknown, or rather a fabulous animal,
+and the most charitable interpretation that can be made of the
+description in the text is, that Verthema was mistaken, or that one of
+the horns of some species of antelope had either been removed, or was
+wanting by a lusus naturae. The only real _Monoceros_, or one horned
+animal, known to naturalists, is the rhinoceros monoceros, or one-horned
+rhinoceros, which bears its horn on the nose, a little way above the
+muzzle, not on the forehead.--E.]
+
+It may seem proper to mention here certain things which happened to me
+at Mecca, in which may be seen the sharpness of wit in case of urgent
+necessity, which according to the proverb, has no law; for I was driven
+to the extent of my wits how I might contrive to escape privately from
+Mecca. One day, while in the market purchasing some things by the
+direction of our captain, a certain Mameluke knew me to be a Christian,
+and said to me in his own language _inte mename_, which is to say,
+"Whence are you?" To this I answered that I was a Mahometan, but he
+insisted that I spoke falsely, on which I swore by the head of Mahomet
+that I really was. Then he desired me to go home along with him, which I
+willingly did; and when there he began to speak to me in the Italian
+language, affirming that he was quite certain I was not a Mahometan. He
+told me that he had been some time in Genoa and Venice, and mentioned
+many circumstances which convinced me that he spoke truth. On this I
+freely confessed myself A Roman, but declared that I had become a
+Mahometan at Babylon in Egypt, and had been there enrolled among the
+Mamelukes. He seemed much pleased as this, and treated me honourably.
+Being very desirous of proceeding farther in my travels, I asked him if
+this city of Mecca was as famous as was reported in the world, and where
+the vast abundance of pearls, precious stones, spices, and other rich
+merchandise was to be seen, which was generally believed to be in that
+city, wishing to know the reason why these things were not now brought
+there as in former times; but to avoid all suspicion, I durst not make
+any mention of the dominion acquired by the king of Portugal over the
+Indian ocean and the gulfs of Persia and Mecca. Then did he shew the
+cause why this mart of Mecca was not so much frequented as it used to
+be, assigning the whole blame to the King of Portugal. Thereupon I
+purposely detracted from the fame of that king, lest the Mahometan might
+suspect me of rejoicing that the Christians resorted to India for trade.
+Finding me a professed enemy to the Christians, he conceived a great
+esteem for me, and gave me a great deal of information. Then said I to
+him in the language of Mahomet _Menaba menalhabi_, or "I pray you to aid
+me." He asked me in what circumstance I wished his assistance; upon
+which I told him that I wished secretly to depart from Mecca, assuring
+him under the most sacred oaths that I meant to visit those kings who
+were the greatest enemies to the Christians, and that I possessed the
+knowledge of certain estimable secrets, which if known to those kings
+would certainly occasion them to send for me from Mecca. He requested to
+know what these secrets were, on which I informed him that I was
+thoroughly versant in the construction of all manner of guns and
+artillery. He then praised Mahomet for having directed me to these
+parts, as I might do infinite service to the true believers; and he
+agreed to allow me to remain secretly in his house along with his wife.
+
+Having thus cemented a friendship with the Mahometan, he requested of me
+to obtain permission from the captain of our caravan that he might lead
+fifteen camels from Mecca loaded with spices under his name, by which
+means he might evade the duties, as thirty gold seraphines are usually
+paid to the sultan of Mecca for the custom of such a number of camels. I
+gave him great hopes that his request might be complied with, even if he
+asked for an hundred camels, as I alleged he was entitled to the
+privilege as being a Mameluke. Then finding him in excellent good
+humour, I again urged my desire of being concealed in his house; and
+having entirely gained his confidence, he gave me many instructions for
+the prosecution of my intended journey, and counselled me to repair to
+the court of the king of _Decham_, or Deccan, a realm in the greater
+India; of which I shall speak hereafter. Wherefore, on the day before
+the caravan of Damascus was to depart from Mecca, he concealed me in the
+most secret part of his house; and next morning early the trumpeter of
+our caravan of Syria gave warning to all the Mamelukes to prepare
+themselves and their horses for the immediate prosecution of the
+journey, on pain of death to all who should neglect the order. Upon
+hearing this proclamation and penalty I was greatly troubled in mind;
+yet committing myself by earnest prayer to the merciful protection of
+God, I entreated the Mamelukes wife not to betray me. On the Tuesday
+following, our caravan departed from Mecca and the Mameluke went along
+with it, but I remained concealed in his house. Before his departure,
+the friendly Mameluke gave orders to his wife that she should procure me
+the means of going along with the pilgrims who were to depart from
+_Zide_ or Juddah the port of Mecca for India. This port of Juddah is 40
+miles from Mecca. I cannot well express the kindness of the Mamelukes
+wife to me during the time I lay hid in her house; and what contributed
+mainly to my good entertainment was that a beautiful young maid who
+dwelt in the house, being niece to the Mameluke, was in love with me;
+but at that time I was so environed with troubles and fear of danger,
+that the passion of love was almost extinct in my bosom, yet I kept
+myself in her favour by kind words and fair promises.
+
+On the Friday, three days after the departure of the caravan of Syria, I
+departed about noon from Mecca along with the caravan of India; and
+about midnight we came to an Arabian village, where we rested all the
+rest of that night and the next day till noon. From thence continuing
+our journey we arrived at Juddah on the second night of our journey. The
+city of Juddah has no walls, but the houses are well built, resembling
+those in the Italian cities. At this place there is great abundance of
+all kinds of merchandise, being in a manner the resort of all nations,
+except that it is held unlawful for Jews or Christians to come there. As
+soon as I entered Juddah I went to the mosque, where I saw a prodigious
+number of poor people, not less than 25,000, who were attending upon
+the different pilots, that they might go back to their countries. Here I
+suffered much trouble and affliction, being constrained to hide myself
+among these poor wretches and to feign myself sick, that no one might be
+too inquisitive about who I was, whence I came, or whether I was going.
+The city of Juddah is under the dominion of the Soldan of Babylon or
+Cairo, the Sultan of Mecca being his brother and his subject. The
+inhabitants are all Mahometans; the soil around the town is very
+unfruitful, as it wants water; yet this town, which stands on the shore
+of the Red Sea, enjoys abundance of all necessaries which are brought
+from Egypt, Arabia Felix, and various other places. The heat is so
+excessive that the people are in a manner dried up, and there is
+generally great sickness among the inhabitants. This city contains about
+500 houses. After sojourning here for fifteen days, I at length agreed
+for a certain sum with a pilot or ship-master, who engaged to convey me
+to Persia. At this time there lay at anchor in the haven of Mecca near
+an hundred brigantines and foists, with many barks and boats of various
+kinds, some with oars and some with sails.
+
+Three days after I had agreed for my passage, we hoisted sail and began
+our voyage down the Red Sea, called by the ancients _Mare
+erythraeum_[47]. It is well known to learned men that this sea is not
+red, as its name implies and as some have imagined, for it has the same
+colour with other seas. We continued our voyage till the going down of
+the sun, for this sea cannot be navigated during the night, wherefore
+navigators only sail in the day and always come to anchor every night.
+This is owing _as they say_, to the many dangerous sands, rocks and
+shelves, which require the ships way to be guided with great care and
+diligent outlook from the _top castle_, that these dangerous places may
+be seen and avoided: But after coming to the island of _Chameran_ or
+Kamaran, the navigation may be continued with greater safety and
+freedom.
+
+[Footnote 47: The _Mare erythraeum_ of the ancients was of much more
+extended dimensions, comprising all the sea of India from Arabia on the
+west to Guzerat and the Concan on the east, with the coasts of Persia
+and Scindetic India on the north; of which sea the Red Sea and the
+Persian gulfs were considered branches or deep bays.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Adventures of the Author in various parts of Arabia Felix, or Yemen_.
+
+
+After six days sailing from Juddah we came to a city named _Gezan_,
+which is well built and has a commodious port, in which we found about
+45 foists and brigantines belonging to different countries. This city is
+close to the sea, and stands in a fertile district resembling Italy,
+having plenty of pomegranates, quinces, peaches, Assyrian apples,
+_pepons_? melons, oranges, gourds, and various other fruits, also many
+of the finest roses and other flowers that can be conceived, so that it
+seemed an earthly paradise. It has also abundance of flesh, with wheat
+and barley, and a grain like white millet or _hirse_, which they call
+_dora_, of which they make a very excellent bread. The prince of this
+town and all his subjects are Mahometans, most of whom go nearly naked.
+
+After sailing five days from _Gezan_, having always the coast on our
+left hand, we came in sight of some habitations where 14 of us went on
+shore in hopes of procuring some provisions from the inhabitants; but
+instead of giving us victuals they threw stones at us from slings, so
+that we were constrained to fight them in our own defence. There were
+about 100 of these inhospitable natives, who had no other weapons except
+slings, and yet fought us for an hour; but 24 of them being slain the
+rest fled, and we brought away from their houses some poultry and
+calves, which we found very good. Soon afterwards the natives returned,
+being reinforced by others to the number of five or six hundred; but we
+departed with our prey and reimbarked.
+
+Continuing our voyage, we arrived on the same day at an island named
+_Kamaran_, which is ten miles in circuit. This island has a town of two
+hundred houses, inhabited by Mahometans, and has abundance of flesh and
+fresh water, and the fairest salt I ever saw. The port of Kamaran is
+eight miles from the Arabian coast, and is subject to the sultan of
+_Amanian_ or _Yaman_, a kingdom of Arabia Felix. Having remained here
+two days, we again made sail for the mouth of the Red Sea, where we
+arrived in other two days. From Kamaran to the mouth of the Red Sea the
+navigation is safe both night and day; But from Juddah to Kamsran the
+Red Sea can only be navigated by day, as already stated, on account of
+shoals and rocks. On coming to the mouth of the Red Sea, we seemed quite
+inclosed, as the strait is very narrow, being only three miles across.
+On the right hand, or Ethiopian coast, the shore of the continent is
+about ten paces in height, and seems a rude uncultivated soil; and on
+the left hand, or coast of Arabia, there rises a very high rocky hill.
+In the middle of the strait is a small uninhabited island called
+_Bebmendo_[48], and those who sail from the Red Sea towards Zeyla, leave
+this island on the left hand. Such, on the contrary, as go for Aden,
+must keep the north eastern passage, leaving this island on the right.
+
+[Footnote 48: This word is an obvious corruption of Bab-el-Mondub, the
+Arabic name of the straits, formerly explained as signifying the gate or
+passage of lamentation. The island in question is named _Prin_.--E.]
+
+We sailed for _Bab-al-Mondub_ to _Aden_, in two days and a half, always
+having the land of Arabia in sight on our left. I do not remember to
+have seen any city better fortified than Aden. It stands on a tolerably
+level plain, having walls on two sides: all the rest being inclosed by
+mountains, on which there are five fortresses. This city contains 6000
+houses, and only a stone's throw from the city there is a mountain
+having a castle on its summit, the shipping being anchored at the foot
+of the mountain. Aden is an excellent city, and the chief place in all
+Arabia Felix, of which it is the principal mart, to which merchants
+resort from India, Ethiopia, Persia, and the Red Sea; but owing to the
+intolerable heat during the day, the whole business of buying and
+selling takes place at night, beginning two hours after sunset. As soon
+as our brigantines came to anchor in the haven, the customers and
+searchers came off, demanding what we were, whence we came, what
+commodities we had on board, and how many men were in each vessel? After
+being satisfied on these heads they took away our mast, sails, and other
+tackle, that we might not depart without paying the customs.
+
+The day after our arrival at Aden, the Mahometans took me prisoner, and
+put shackles on my legs in consequence of an _idolater_ calling after me
+that I was a Christian dog[49]. Upon this the Mahometans laid hold of
+me, and carried me before the lieutenant of the sultan, who assembled
+his council, to consult with them if I should be put to death as a
+Christian spy. The sultan happened to be absent from the city, and as
+the lieutenant had not hitherto adjudged any one to death, he did not
+think fit to give sentence against me till my case were reported to the
+sultan. By this means I escaped the present danger, and remained in
+prison 55 days, with an iron of eighteen pounds weight fastened to my
+legs. On the second day of my confinement, many Mahometans went in great
+rage to the lieutenant to demand that I should be put to death as a
+Portuguese spy. Only a few days before, these men had difficultly
+escaped from the hands of the Portuguese by swimming, with the loss of
+their foists and barks, and therefore greatly desired to be revenged of
+the Christians, outrageously affirming that I was a Portuguese and a
+spy. But God assisted me, for the master of the prison made fast its
+gates, that these outrageous men might not offer me violence. At the end
+of fifty-five days, the sultan sent for me into his presence; so I was
+placed on the back of a camel with my shackles, and at the end of eight
+days journey I was brought to the city of _Rhada_, where the sultan then
+resided, and where he had assembled an army of 30,000 men to make war
+upon the sultan of _Sanaa_, a fair and populous city about three days
+journey from _Rhada_, situated partly on the slope of a hill and partly
+in a plain. When I was brought before the sultan, he asked me what I
+was: on which I answered that I was a Roman, and had professed myself a
+Mahometan and Mameluke at Babylon in Egypt, or Cairo. That from motives
+of religion, and in discharge of a vow, I had made the pilgrimage to
+_Medinathalhabi_, to see the body of the _Nabi_ or holy prophet, which
+was said to be buried there; and that having heard in all the countries
+and cities through which I passed, of the greatness, wisdom, and virtue
+of the sultan of Rhada, I had continued my travels to his dominions from
+an anxious desire to see his face, and I now gave thanks to God and his
+prophet that I had attained my wish, trusting that his wisdom and
+justice would see that I was no Christian spy, but a true Mahometan, and
+his devoted slave. The sultan then commanded me to say _Leila illala
+Mahumet resullah_, which words I could never well pronounce, either that
+it so pleased God, or because I durst not, from some fear or scruple of
+conscience. Wherefore, seeing me silent, the sultan committed me again
+to prison, commanding that I should be carefully watched by sixteen men
+of the city, every day four in their turns. After this, for the space of
+three months, I never enjoyed the sight of the heavens, being every day
+allowed a loaf of millet bread, so very small that seven of them would
+hardly have satisfied my hunger for one day, yet I would have thought
+myself happy if I could have had my fill of water.
+
+[Footnote 49: According to the monk Picade, Christians are found in all
+regions except Arabia and Egypt, where they are most hated.--_Eden_.]
+
+Three days after I was committed to prison, the sultan marched with his
+army to besiege the city of _Sanaa_, having, as I said before, 30,000
+footmen, besides 3000 horsemen, born of Christian parents, who were
+black like the Ethiopians, and had been brought while young from the
+kingdom of _Prester John_, called in Latin _Presbyter Johannes_, or
+rather _Preciosus Johannes_. These Christian Ethiopians are also called
+Abyssinians, and are brought up in the discipline of war like the
+Mamelukes and Janisaries of the Turks, and are held in high estimation
+by this sultan for the guard of his own person. They have high pay, and
+are in number four-score thousand[50]. Their only dress is a _sindon_ or
+cloak, out of which they put forth one arm. In war they use round
+targets of buffaloe hide, strengthened with some light bars of iron,
+having a wooden handle, and short broad-swords. At other times they use
+vestures of linen of divers colours, also of _gossampine_ or _xylon_,
+otherwise named _bomasine_[51]. In war every man carries a sling, whence
+he casts stones, after having whirled them frequently round his head.
+When they come to forty or fifty years of age, they wreath their hair
+into the form of horns like those of goats. When the army proceeds to
+the wars, it is followed by 5000 camels, all laden with ropes of
+bombasine[52].
+
+[Footnote 50: This is a ridiculous exaggeration, or blunder in
+transcription, and may more readily be limited to four thousand.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 51: These terms unquestionably refer to cotton cloth. Perhaps
+we ought to read gossamopine _of_ Xylon, meaning cotton cloth from
+Ceylon.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 52: The use of this enormous quantity of cotton ropes is
+unintelligible. Perhaps the author only meant to express that the packs
+or bales on the camels were secured by such ropes.--E.]
+
+Hard by the prison to which I was committed, there was a long court or
+entry in the manner of a cloister, where sometimes I and other prisoners
+were permitted to walk, and which was overlooked by a part of the
+sultan's palace. It happened that one of the sultan's wives remained in
+the palace, having twelve young maidens to wait upon her, who were all
+very comely, though inclining to black. By their favour I was much
+aided, after the following manner: There were two other men confined
+alone with me in the same prison, and it was agreed among us that one of
+us should counterfeit madness, by which we might derive some advantage.
+Accordingly it fell to my lot to assume the appearance of madness, which
+made greatly for my purpose, as they consider mad men to be holy, and
+they therefore allowed me to go much more at large than before, until
+such time as the hermits might determine whether I were _holy mad_, or
+raging mad, as shall be shewn hereafter. But the first three days of my
+assumed madness wearied me so much, that I was never so tired with
+labour, or grieved with pain; for the boys and vile people used to run
+after me, sometimes to the number of forty or fifty, calling me a mad
+man, and throwing stones at me, which usage I sometimes repaid in their
+own coin. To give the better colour to my madness, I always carried some
+stones in the lap of my shirt, as I had no other clothing whatever. The
+queen hearing of my madness, used oftentimes to look from her windows to
+see me, more instigated by a secret love for my person than the pleasure
+she derived from my mad pranks, as afterwards appeared. One time, when
+some of the natives played the knave with me in view of the queen, whose
+secret favour towards me I began to perceive, I threw off my shirt, and
+went to a place near the windows, where the queen might see me all
+naked, which I perceived gave her great pleasure, as she always
+contrived some device to prevent me going out of her sight, and would
+sometimes spend almost the whole day in looking at me. In the mean time
+she often sent me secretly abundance of good meat by her maids; and when
+she saw the boys or others doing me harm or vexing me, she called to me
+to kill them, reviling them also as dogs and beasts.
+
+There was a great fat sheep that was fed in the court of the palace, of
+that kind whereof the tail only will sometimes weigh eleven or twelve
+pounds. Under colour of my madness, I one day laid hold of this sheep,
+repeating _Leila illala Mahumet resullah_, the words which the Sultan
+desired me to repeat in his presence, by way of proof whether I was a
+Mahometan or professed Mameluke. As the sheep gave no answer, I asked
+him whether he were Mahometan, Jew, or Christian. And willing to make
+him a Mahometan, I repeated the formula as before, which signifies,
+"There is but one God, and Mahomet is his prophet," being the words the
+Mahometans rehearse as their profession of faith. As the sheep answered
+never a word to all I could say, I at length broke his leg with staff.
+The queen took much delight in these my mad tricks, and commanded the
+carcass of this sheep to be given me, and I never eat meat with more
+relish or better appetite. Three days afterwards I killed an ass that
+used to bring water to the palace, because he would not say these words
+and be a Mahometan. One day I handled a Jew so very roughly, that I had
+near killed him. On another occasion I threw many stones at a person who
+called me a Christian clog, but he threw them back at me with such
+vengeance, that he hurt me sore, on which I returned to my prison, of
+which I barricadoed the door with stones, and lay there for two days, in
+great pain, without meat or drink, so that the queen and others thought
+me dead, but the door was opened by command of the queen. Those Arabian
+dogs used to deride me, giving me stones in place of bread, and pieces
+of white marble, pretending that they were lumps of sugar, and others
+gave me bunches of grapes all full of sand. That they might not think I
+counterfeited madness, I used to eat the grapes sand and all.
+
+When it was rumoured abroad that I had lived two days and nights without
+meat or drink, some began to believe that I was a holy madman, while
+others supposed me to be stark mad; wherefore they consulted to send for
+certain men who dwell in the mountain, who lead a contemplative life,
+and are esteemed holy as we do hermits. When they came to give their
+judgment concerning me, and were debating among themselves for upwards
+of an hour on my case, I pissed in my hands, and threw the water in
+their faces, on which they agreed I was no saint, but a mere madman. The
+queen saw all this from her window, and laughed heartily at it among her
+maids, saying, "By the head of Mahomet this is a good man." Next morning
+I happened to find the man asleep who had so sore hurt me with stones,
+and taking him by the hair of his head with both hands, I so punched him
+in the stomach, and on the face with my knees, that I left him all
+bloody and half dead. The queen happening to see me, she called out,
+"Kill the beast, Kill the dog." Upon which he ran away and came no more
+nigh me.
+
+When the president of the city heard that the queen took so much delight
+in my mad frolics, he gave orders that I might go at liberty about the
+palace, only wearing my shackles, and that I should be immured every
+night in another prison in the lower part of the palace. After I had
+remained in this manner for twenty days, the queen took it into her head
+to carry me along with her a hunting; but on my return, I feigned myself
+sick from fatigue, and continued in my cell for eight days, the queen
+sending every day to inquire how I was. After this I took an opportunity
+to tell the queen that I had vowed to God and Mahomet to visit a certain
+holy person at Aden, and begged her permission to perform my vow. She
+consented to this, and immediately gave orders that a camel and 25 gold
+seraphins should be given me. Accordingly I immediately set off on my
+journey, and came to Aden at the end of eight days, when I visited the
+man who was reputed as a saint, merely because he had always lived in
+great poverty, and without the company of women. There are many such in
+those parts, but doubtless they lose their labour, not being in the
+faith of Christ. Having thus performed my vow, I pretended to have
+recovered my health by miracle performed by this holy person, of which I
+sent notice to the queen, desiring permission to visit certain other
+holy persons in that country who had great reputation. I contrived these
+excuses because the fleet for India was not to depart from Aden for the
+space of a month. I took the opportunity to agree secretly with the
+captain of a ship to carry me to India, making him many fair promises of
+reward. He told me that he did not mean to go to India till after he had
+gone first to Persia, and to this arrangement I agreed.
+
+To fill up the time, I mounted my camel and went a journey of 25 miles,
+to a certain populous city named _Lagi_, seated in a great plain, in
+which are plenty of olives and corn, with many cattle, but no vines, and
+very little wood. The inhabitants are a gross and barbarous people of
+the vagabond Arabs, and very poor. Going a days journey from thence, I
+came to another city named _Aiaz_, which is built on two hills, having a
+large plain between them, in which is a noted fountain, where various
+nations resort as to a famous mart. The inhabitants are Mahometans, yet
+greatly differ in opinion respecting their religion. All those who
+inhabit the northern mount, maintain the faith of Mahomet and his
+successors, of whom I have formerly spoken; but those of the south
+mountain affirm that faith ought only to be given to Mahomet and Ali,
+declaring the others to have been false prophets. The country about
+_Aiaz_ produces goodly fruits of various kinds, among which are vines,
+together with silk and cotton; and the city has great trade in spices
+and other commodities. On the top of both of the hills there are strong
+fortresses, and two days journey from thence is the city of _Dante_, on
+the top of a very high mountain, well fortified both by art and nature.
+
+Departing from _Dante_, I came in two days journey to the city of
+_Almacharam_, on the top of a very high mountain of very difficult
+ascent, by a way so narrow that only two men are able to pass each
+other. On the top of this mountain is a plain of wonderful size, and
+very fertile, which produces abundance of every thing necessary to the
+use of man. It has also plenty of water, insomuch that at one fountain
+only there is sufficient water to supply a hundred thousand men. The
+Sultan is said to have been born in this city, and to keep his treasure
+here, which is so large as to be a sufficient load for an hundred camels
+all in gold. Here also always resides one of his wives. The air of this
+place is remarkably temperate and healthy, and the inhabitants are
+inclining to white. Two days journey from _Almacharam_, is the city of
+_Reame_, containing 2000 houses. The inhabitants are black, and are much
+addicted to commerce. The country around is fertile in all things,
+except wood. On one side of this city is a mountain, on which is a
+strong fortress. At this place I saw a kind of sheep without horns,
+whose tails weigh forty or fifty pounds. The grapes of this district
+have no stones or grains, and are remarkably sweet and delicate, as are
+all the other fruits, which are in great abundance and variety. This
+place is very temperate and healthful, as may be conceived by the long
+life of its inhabitants, for I have conversed with many of them that had
+passed the age of an hundred and twenty-five years, and were still
+vigorous and fresh-coloured. They go almost naked, wearing only shirts,
+or other thin and loose raiment like mantles, having one arm bare.
+Almost all the Arabs wreath their hair in the shape of horns, which they
+think gives them a comely appearance.
+
+Departing from thence, I came in three days journey to the city of
+_Sanaa_ or _Zenan,_ upon the top of a very high mountain, and very
+strong both by art and nature. The Sultan had besieged this place for
+three months with a great army, but was unable to prevail against it by
+force, yet it was afterwards yielded on composition. The walls of this
+city are eighteen cubits high and twenty in thickness, insomuch that
+eight camels may march abreast upon them. The region in which it stands
+is very fertile, and resembles Italy, having abundance of water. The
+city contains four thousand houses, all well built, and in no respect
+inferior to those in Italy, but the city is so large in circuit, that
+fields, gardens, and meadows are contained within the walls. This city
+was governed by a Sultan, who had twelve sons, one of whom named
+Mahomet, was four cubits high, and very strong, of a complexion
+resembling ashes, and from some natural madness or grossly tyrannical
+disposition he delighted in human flesh, so that he used to kill men
+secretly to feed upon them.
+
+Three days journey from thence I came to a city upon a mountain, named
+_Taessa,_ well built, and abounding in all things necessary to man, and
+particularly celebrated for roses, of which the inhabitants make rose
+water. This is an ancient city, having many good houses, and still
+contains several monuments of antiquity. Its temple or chief mosque is
+built much like the church of Sancta Maria Rotunda at Rome. The
+inhabitants are of an ash-colour, inclining to black, and dress much
+like those already mentioned. Many merchants resort thither for trade.
+Three days journey from thence I came to another city named _Zioith_ or
+_Zabid_, half a days journey from the Red Sea. This is a well built
+city, abounding in many good things, particularly in excellent white
+sugar and various kinds of delicious fruits. It is situated in a very
+large plain between two mountains, and has no walls, but is one of the
+principal marts for all sorts of spices, and various other merchandise.
+One days journey from thence I came to _Damar_, which is situated in a
+fruitful soil, and carries on considerable trade. All these cities are
+subject to a Sultan of Arabia-Felix, who is called _Sechamir_, or the
+holy prince; _Secha_ signifying holy, and _Amir_ prince, in the Arabian
+language. He is so named, because he abhors to shed men's blood. While I
+was there in prison, he nourished sixteen thousand poor, including
+captives in prison, who had been condemned to death, and he had as many
+black slaves in his palace.
+
+Departing from Damar I returned in three days journey to Aden, passing
+in the mid way by an exceedingly large and high mountain, on which there
+are many wild beasts, and in particular the whole mountain is as it were
+covered with monkeys. There are also many lions, so that it is by no
+means safe to travel that way unless in large companies of at least a
+hundred men. I passed this way along with a numerous company, yet we
+were in much danger from the lions and other wild beasts which followed
+us, insomuch that we were forced to fight them with darts, slings, and
+arrows, using also the aid of dogs, and after all we escaped with some
+difficulty. On arriving at Aden I feigned myself sick, lurking in the
+mosque all day, and going only out under night to speak with the pilot
+of the ship formerly mentioned, from whom I obtained a bark in which I
+secretly left Aden.
+
+We at length began our voyage for Persia, to which we were to go in the
+first place, our bark being laden with _rubricke_, a certain red earth
+used for dying cloth, with which fifteen or twenty vessels are yearly
+freighted from Arabia Felix. After having sailed six days on our voyage,
+a sudden tempest of contrary wind drove us back again and forced us to
+the coast of Ethiopia, where we took shelter in the port of _Zeyla_. We
+remained here five days to see the city, and to wait till the tempest
+was over and the sea become quiet. The city of Zeyla is a famous mart
+for many commodities, and has marvellous abundance of gold and ivory,
+and a prodigious number of black slaves, which are procured by the
+Mahometan or Moorish inhabitants, by means of war, from Ethiopia in the
+country of Prester John, the Christian king of the Jacobins or
+Abyssinians. These slaves are carried hence into Persia, Arabia Felix,
+Cairo, and Mecca. In this city justice and good laws are observed. The
+soil produces wheat and other convenient things, as oil which is not
+procured from olives but from something else that I do not know. It has
+likewise plenty of honey and wax, and abundance of animals for food,
+among which are sheep having tails of sixteen pounds weight, very fat
+and good; their head and neck black, and all the rest of their bodies
+white. There are also sheep all over white, whose tails are a cubit
+long, and hang down like a large cluster of grapes, with great flaps of
+skin hanging from their throats. The bulls and cows likewise have
+dewlaps hanging down almost to the ground. There are also certain kine
+having horns like to those of harts, which are very wild, and when taken
+are given to the sultan of the city as a gift worthy of a prince. I also
+saw other kine of a bright red colour, having only one horn in the midst
+of the forehead, about a span long, bending backwards, like the horn of
+the unicorn. The walls of this city are greatly decayed, and the haven
+bad and unsafe, yet it is resorted to by vast numbers of merchants. The
+sultan of Zeyla is a Mahometan, and has a numerous army both of horse
+and foot. The people, who are much addicted to war, are of a dark
+ash-colour inclining to black, and wear loose vestments like those
+spoken of in Arabia. After the weather had become calm, we again put to
+sea, and soon afterwards arrived at an island on the coast of Ethiopia
+named _Barbora_, which is under the rule of a Mahometan prince. It is a
+small island, but fertile and well peopled, its principal riches
+consisting in herds of cattle, so that flesh is to be had in great
+plenty. We remained here only one day, and sailing thence went to
+Persia.
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Observations of the Author relative to some parts of Persia._
+
+
+When we had sailed twelve days we came to a city named
+_Divobanderrumi_[53], which name signifies the holy port of the _Rumes_
+or Turks. This place is only a little way from the Continent, and when
+the tides rise high it is an island environed on every side with water,
+but at ebb tides the passage between it and the land is dry. This is a
+great mart of commerce, and is governed by a person named
+_Menacheas_, being subject to the sultan of Cambaia. It is well
+fortified with good walls, and defended by a numerous artillery. The
+barks and brigantines used at this place are smaller than ours of Italy.
+Departing thence we came in three days to _Zoar_[54], which also is a
+well frequented mart in a fertile country inhabited by Mahometans. Near
+this place are two other good cities and ports named _Gieulfar_ and
+_Meschet_ or _Maskat_.
+
+[Footnote 53: From the context, this place appears to have been on that
+part of the oceanic coast of Arabia called the kingdom of Maskat,
+towards Cape Ras-al-gat and the entrance to the Persian gulf. The name
+seems compounded of these words _Div_ or _Diu_, an island, _Bander_ a
+port, and _Rumi_ the term in the east for the Turks as successors of the
+Romans. It is said in the text to have been subject to the sultan of
+Cambaia, but was more probably tributary to the king or sultan of
+Ormuz.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 54: In the text of Hakluyt this place is called _Goa_,
+assuredly by mistake, as it immediately afterwards appears to have been
+in the neighbourhood of Maskat, and in the direct voyage between Aden
+and Ormus, by creeping along the coast from port to port.--E.]
+
+Proceeding on our voyage we came to the fair city of _Ormuz_ or
+_Armusium_, second to none in excellence of situation, and abundance of
+pearls. It stands in an island twelve miles from the Continent, being in
+itself very scarce of water and corn, so that all things required for
+the sustenance of the inhabitants are brought from other places. At the
+distance of three days sail from thence those muscles are procured which
+produce the fairest and largest pearls. There are certain people who
+gain their living by fishing for these muscles in the following manner:
+Going in small boats to that part of the sea where these are found, they
+cast a large stone into the sea on each side of the boat fastened to
+strong ropes, by which they fix their boat steadily in one place like a
+ship at anchor. Then another stone with a cord fastened to it is cast
+into the sea, and a man having a sack hung upon his shoulder both before
+and behind, and a stone hung to his feet, leaps into the water, and
+immediately sinks to the bottom to the depth of 15 paces or more, where
+he remains gathering the pearl muscles and putting them into his sack.
+He then casts off the stone that is tied to his feet and comes up by
+means of the rope. At _Ormuz_ there are sometimes seen almost three
+hundred ships and vessels of various sorts at one time, which come from
+many different places and countries. The sultan of the city is a
+Mahometan. There are not less than four hundred merchants and factors
+continually residing here for the sake of trade in silks, pearls,
+precious stones, spices, and the like. The principal article of their
+sustenance at this place is rice.
+
+Departing from Ormuz I went into Persia, and after ten days journey I
+came to _Eri_[55] a city in _Chorazani_ which also we may name
+_Flaminia_. This region is fertile, and abounds in all good things,
+particularly in silk, so that one might purchase enough in one day to
+load 3000 camels. Owing to the fertility of this country corn is always
+cheap. Rhubarb is in such abundance that six of our pounds of twelve
+ounces each may be bought for one gold crown. This city, in which dwells
+the king of that region, contains about seven thousand houses, all
+inhabited by Mahometans. In twenty days journey from thence, I noticed
+that the inland parts of Persia are well inhabited and have many good
+towns and villages. In this journey I came to a great river called by
+the inhabitants _Eufra_, which I verily believe to be the Euphrates,
+both from the resemblance of names and from its great size. Continuing
+my journey along this river by the left hand, I came in three days
+journey to another city named _Schyra_[56], subject to a prince who is a
+Persian Mahometan, and is independent of any other prince. Here are
+found all sorts of precious stones, especially that called _Eranon_,
+which defends men against witchcraft, madness, and fearfulness
+proceeding from melancholy. It is the stone commonly called _Turquoise_,
+which is brought in great abundance from a city named _Balascam_, where
+also great plenty of _Castoreum_ is procured and various kinds of
+colours. The reason why so very little true _Castoreum_ is found among
+us is because it is adulterated by the Persians before it comes to our
+hands[57]. The way to prove true castoreum is by smelling, and if
+genuine and unadulterated it makes the nose bleed, as I saw proved on
+four persons in succession. When genuine and unadulterated, _castoreum_
+will preserve its flavour for ten years. The Persians are a courteous
+and gentle people, liberal and generous towards each other, and kind to
+strangers, as I found by experience. While here, I met with a Persian
+merchant to whom I was known in the year before when at Mecca. This man
+was born in the city of _Eri_ in Chorozani, and as soon as he saw me he
+knew me again, and asked by what fortune I had come into that country.
+To this I answered, "that I had come thither from a great desire to see
+the world." "Praised be God, said he, that I have now found a companion
+of the same mind with myself." He exhorted me not to depart from him,
+and that I should accompany him in his journeys, as he meant to go
+through the chief parts of the world.
+
+[Footnote 55: In the rambling journey of Verthema, we are often as here
+unable to discover the meaning of his strangely corrupted names.
+Chorazani or Chorassan is in the very north of Persia, at a vast
+distance from Ormuz, and he pays no attention to the particulars of his
+ten days journey which could not have been less than 400 miles. We are
+almost tempted to suspect the author of romancing.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 56: Supposing that the place in the text may possibly mean
+_Shiras_, the author makes a wonderful skip in three days from the
+Euphrates to at least 230 miles distance--E.]
+
+[Footnote 57: What is named _Castoreum_ in the text was probably musk,
+yet Russia castor might in those days have come along with rhubarb
+through Persia.--E.]
+
+I accordingly remained with him for fifteen days in a city named
+_Squilaz_, whence we went in the first place to a city named _Saint
+Bragant_[58], which is larger than Babylon of Egypt and is subject to a
+Mahometan prince, who is said to be able to take the field when occasion
+requires with 60,000 horsemen. This I say only from the information of
+others, as we could not safely pass farther in that direction, by reason
+of the great wars carried on by the Sophy against those Mahometans who
+follow the sect of _Omar_, who are abhorred by the Persians as heretics
+and misbelievers, while they are of the sect of Ali which they consider
+as the most perfect and true religion. At this place my Persian friend,
+as a proof of his unfeigned friendship, offered to give me in marriage
+his niece named _Samis_, which in their language signifies the Sun,
+which name she well deserved for her singular beauty. As we could not
+travel any farther by reason of the wars, we returned to the city of
+Eri, where he entertained me most honourably in his house, and showing
+me his niece desired that she might immediately become my wife. Being
+otherwise minded, yet not willing that I should appear to despise so
+friendly an offer, I thanked him for his goodness, yet begged the match
+might be delayed to a more convenient time. Departing soon afterwards
+from Eri, we came in eight days journey to _Ormuz_, where we took
+shipping for India.
+
+[Footnote 58: Of Squilaz and Saint Bragant it is impossible to make any
+thing, even by conjecture--E.]
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Observations of the Author on various parts of India._
+
+
+We arrived in India at a certain port named _Cheo_[59], past which flows
+the great river Indus, not far from the city of _Cambay_. It is
+situated[60] three miles within the land, so that brigantines and foists
+can have no access to it except when the tide rises higher than
+ordinary, when it sometimes overflows the land for the space of four
+miles. At this place the tides increase differently from what they do
+with us, as they increase with the wane of the moon, whereas with us
+while the moon waxes towards full. This city is walled after our manner,
+and abounds in all kinds of necessaries, especially wheat and all manner
+of wholesome and pleasant fruits. It has also abundance of _gosampine_
+or _bombassine_ (cotton) and some kinds of spices of which I do not know
+the names. Merchants bring here such quantities of cotton and silk, that
+sometimes forty or fifty vessels are loaded with these commodities for
+other countries. In this region there is a mountain in which the _onyx_
+commonly called _carneola_ is found, and not far from thence another
+mountain which produces _calecdony_ and diamonds. While I was there, the
+sultan of Cambay was named Mahomet, and had reigned forty years after
+having expelled the king of Guzerat. The natives are not Mahometans,
+neither are they idolaters, wherefore I believe if they were only
+baptised they would not be far from the way of salvation, for they
+observe the pure rule of justice, doing unto others as they would be
+done by. They deem it unlawful to deprive any living creature of its
+life, and never eat flesh. Some of them go entirely naked, or only cover
+the parts of shame, wearing fillets of a purple colour round their
+heads. Their complexion is a dark yellow, commonly called a _leonell_
+colour.
+
+[Footnote 59: This name is inexplicably corrupted; and nothing more can
+be said of it than is contained in the text, which indeed is very
+vague.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 60: Verthema appears at this place to make an abrupt
+transition to the city of Cambay, taking no farther notice of Cheo.--E.]
+
+The sultan of Cambay maintains a force of 20,000 horse. Every morning
+fifty men riding on elephants repair to his palace to reverence and
+salute the king, which is done likewise by the elephants kneeling down.
+As soon as the king wakes in the morning there is a prodigious noise of
+drums, trumpets, and other warlike instruments of music, as if in token
+of joy that the sultan still lives. The same is done while he is at
+dinner, when likewise the elephants are again brought forward to do him
+reverence. We shall afterwards have occasion to notice the customs,
+docility, and wisdom of these beasts. The sultan has his upper lip so
+large and gross that he sometimes beareth it up with a fillet as women
+do their hair. His beard is white and hangs down below his girdle. He
+has been accustomed to the use of poison even from his infancy, and he
+daily eats some to keep him in use; by which strange custom, although he
+feels no personal hurt therefrom, yet is he so saturated with poison
+that he is a certain poison to others. Insomuch that when he is
+disposed to put any noble to death, he causes the victim to be brought
+into his presence and to stand before him while he chews certain fruits
+called _Chofolos_[61] resembling nutmegs, chewing at the same time the
+leaves of a certain herb named _Tambolos_, to which is added the powder
+of oyster shells. After chewing these things for some time, he spits
+upon the person whom he wishes to kill, and he is sure to die within
+half an hour, so powerful is the venom of his body[62]. He keeps about
+four thousand concubines, and whoever of them chances to sleep with him
+is sure to die next day. When he changes his shirt or any other article
+of his dress, no one dare wear it, or is sure to die. My companion
+learnt from the merchants of Cambay that this wonderful venomous nature
+of the sultan had been occasioned by his having been bred up by his
+father from a child in the constant use of poison, beginning by little
+and little, and taking preservatives at the same time.
+
+[Footnote 61: It is evident from the text that the _areka_ nut is here
+meant, which is chewed along with _betel_ leaf, called tambolos in the
+text, and strewed with _chunam_ or lime made of oyster shells.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 62: This ridiculous story can only be understood as an eastern
+metaphor, expressive of the tyrannous disposition of the sultan.--E.]
+
+Such is the wonderful fertility of this country that it surpasses all
+description. The people, as already said, go almost entirely naked, or
+content themselves with a single garment, and are a brave and warlike
+nation, being at the same time much given to commerce, so that their
+city is frequented by traders of all nations. From this city, and
+another to be named afterwards, innumerable kinds and quantities of
+merchandise are transported to almost every region and nation of the
+world; especially to the Turks, Syrians, Arabians, Indians, and to
+divers regions of Africa, Ethiopia, and Arabia; and more especially vast
+abundance of silk and cotton, so that by means of this prodigious trade
+the sultan is astonishingly rich. The sultan of Cambay is almost
+continually at war with the king of _Joga_, whose realm is fifteen days
+journey from Cambay, and extends very far in all directions. This king
+of _Joga_[63] and all his people are idolaters. He maintains an army
+always on foot of 30.000 men, and is continually in the field travelling
+through his dominions with a prodigious train of followers at the
+charge of his subject, his camp containing at the least 4000 tents and
+pavilions. In this perpetual progress he is accompanied by his wife,
+children, concubines, and slaves, and by every apparatus for hunting and
+amusement. His dress consists of two goat-skins with the hair side
+outwards, one of which covers his breast and the other his back and
+shoulders. His complexion is of a brown weasel colour inclining to
+black, as are most of the native Indians, being scorched by the heat of
+the sun. They wear ear-rings of precious stones, and adorn themselves
+with jewels of various kinds; and the king and principal people paint
+their faces and other parts of their bodies with certain spices and
+sweet gums or ointments. They are addicted to many vain superstitions;
+some professing never to lie on the ground, while others keep a
+continual silence, having two or three persons to minister to their
+wants by signs. These devotees have horns hanging from their necks,
+which they blow all at once when they come to any city or town to make
+the inhabitants afraid, after which they demand victuals and whatever
+else they are in need of from the people. When this king remains
+stationary at any place, the greater part of his army keeps guard about
+his pavilion, while five or six hundred men range about the country
+collecting what they are able to procure. They never tarry above three
+days in one place, but are continually wandering about like vagabond
+Egyptians, Arabs, or Tartars. The region through which they roam is not
+fertile, being mostly composed of steep and craggy mountains. The city
+is without walls, and its houses are despicable huts or hovels. This
+king is an enemy to the sultan of _Machamir_? and vexes his country with
+incessant predatory incursions.
+
+[Footnote 63: What sovereign of India is meant by the _king of Joga_ we
+cannot ascertain, unless perhaps some Hindoo rajah in the hilly country
+to the north-east of Gujerat. From some parts of the account of this
+king and his subjects, we are apt to conceive that the relation in the
+text is founded on some vague account of a chief or leader of a band of
+Hindoo devotees. A king or chief of the _Jogues_.--E.]
+
+
+Departing from Cambay, I came in twelve days journey to the city of
+_Ceull_[64], the land of Guzerat being interposed between these two
+cities. The king of this city is an idolater. His subjects are of a dark
+yellow colour, or lion tawny, and are much addicted to war, in which
+they use swords, bows and arrows, darts, slings, and round targets. They
+have engines to beat down walls and to make a great slaughter in an
+army. The city is only three miles from the sea on the banks of a fine
+river, by which a great deal of merchandise is imported. The soil is
+fertile and produces many different kinds of fruits, and in the district
+great quantities of cotton cloth are made. The people are idolaters like
+those of Calicut, of whom mention will be made hereafter, yet there are
+many Mahometans in the city. The king has but a small military force,
+and the government is administered with justice. Two days journey from
+thence is a city named _Dabuly_[65] on a great river and in a fertile
+country. It is walled like the towns of Italy, and contains a vast
+number of Mahometan merchants. The king is an idolater, having an army
+of 30,000 men. Departing from thence I came to the island of _Goga_[66],
+not above a mile from the continent, which pays yearly a tribute of 1000
+pieces of gold to the king of _Deccan_, about the same value with the
+seraphins of Babylon. These coins are impressed on one side with the
+image of the _devil_[67], and on the other side are some unknown
+characters. On the sea coast at one side of this island there is a town
+much like those of Italy, in which resides the governor, who is captain
+over a company of soldiers named _Savain_, consisting of 400 Mamelukes,
+he being likewise a Mameluke. Whenever he can procure any white man he
+takes them into his service and gives them good entertainment, and if
+fit for military service, of which he makes trial of their strength by
+wrestling, he gives them a monthly allowance of 20 gold seraphins; but
+if not found fit for war he employs them in handicrafts. With this small
+force of only 400 men, he gives much disturbance to the king of
+Narsinga.
+
+[Footnote 64: There is a district on the west of Gujerat or Guzerat
+named _Chuwal_, on the river Butlass or Banass which runs into the gulf
+of Cutch, which may be here meant.--.]
+
+[Footnote 65: No name having the least affinity to that in the text is
+to be found in any modern map of India near the coast of Gujerat. It
+would almost appear that the author had now gone down the coast of
+India, and that his Chuwal and Dabuly are Chaul and Dabul on the coast
+of the Concan.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 66: Nothing can possibly be made of this island of Goga. There
+is a town on the coast of Gujerat and western side of the gulf of Cambay
+called Gogo, but it is no island, and could not possibly be subject to
+the king of the Deccan; and besides Verthema is obviously now going down
+the western coast of India.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 67: Of a Swammy or Hindoo idol.--E.]
+
+From the island of _Goga_ I went to the city of _Dechan_[68], of which
+the king or sultan is a Mahometan, and to whom the before mentioned
+captain of the Mamelukes at _Goga_ is tributary. The city is beautiful,
+and stands in a fertile country which abounds in all things necessary
+for man. The king of this country is reckoned a Mameluke, and has 35,000
+horse and foot in his service. His palace is a sumptuous edifice,
+containing numerous and splendid apartments, insomuch, that one has to
+pass through 44 several rooms in a continued suite before getting to the
+presence-chamber of the sultan, who lives with wonderful pomp and
+magnificence, even those who wait upon him having their shoes or
+_starpins_ ornamented with rubies and diamonds, and rich ear-rings of
+pearls and other precious stones. Six miles from the city is a mountain
+from which they dig diamonds, which mountain is surrounded by a wall,
+and guarded by a band of soldiers. The inhabitants of the city are
+mostly Mahometans, who are generally clad in silk, or at least have
+their shirts or lower garments of that fabric; they wear also thin
+buskin and hose or breeches like the Greek mariners, or what are called
+trowsers. Their women, like those of Damascus, have their faces veiled.
+The king of Deccan is almost in continual war with the king of Nursinga;
+most of his soldiers being white men from distant countries hired for
+war, whereas the natives are of a dark colour like the other inhabitants
+of India. This king is very rich and liberal, and has a large navy of
+ships, but he is a great enemy to the Christians. Having visited this
+country, I went in five days from thence to _Bathacala_ or _Batecolak_,
+the inhabitants of which are idolaters, except some Mahometan merchants
+who resort thither for trade. It abounds in rice, sugar, wheat,
+_walnuts_[69], figs, and many kinds of fruits and roots unknown to us,
+and has plenty of beeves, kine, buffaloes, sheep, goats, and other
+beasts, but no horses, asses, or mules. From thence, at the distance of
+a days journey I came to _Centacola?_ the prince of which has no great
+riches; but the district has plenty of flesh, rice, and such fruits as
+grow in India; and to this place many Mahometans resort for trade. The
+king is an idolater, and is subject to him of Batecolah. Two days
+journey from thence I came to _Onore_, the king of which is an idolater,
+subject to the king of Narsinga. The prince or king of Onore has eight
+armed foists or barks, which make excursions by sea, and subsist by
+piracy, yet is he in friendship with the Portuguese. The district
+produces plenty of rice, and has many kinds of wild beasts, as wild
+boars, harts, wolves, _lions_[70], and many kinds of birds, such as
+peacocks and parrots, besides others very different from ours. It has
+likewise many cattle of a bright yellow colour, and fine fat sheep. It
+has also abundance of flowers of all kinds. The air is so temperate and
+healthy, that the natives live much longer than we do in Italy. Not far
+from this place is another city named Mangalore, whence about sixty
+ships depart yearly with cargoes of rice. The inhabitants are partly
+idolaters, and part Mahometans.
+
+[Footnote 68: Dechan, Deccan, or Dacshin, is the name of a territory or
+kingdom, and properly signifies southern India, or simply the south, in
+reference to Hindostan proper, on the north of the Nerbuddah: But
+Verthema almost always names the capital from the kingdom.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 69: By walnuts, I suspect that coca-nuts are meant, and
+rendered walnuts by some mistaken translation.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 70: There are no lions in India, and tigers are certainly here
+meant.--E.]
+
+Departing from thence we went to the city of _Cananore_, where the king
+of Portugal has a strong garrison, though the king of the city is an
+idolater and no great friend to the Portuguese. At this port many horses
+are imported from Persia, which pay a high duty. Departing from thence
+into the inland we came to the city of _Narsinga_[71], which is
+frequented by many Mahometan merchants. The soil in that country bears
+no wheat, so that the inhabitants have no bread, neither hath it vines
+or any other fruits except oranges and gourds, but they have plenty of
+rice and such walnuts as that country _produces_[72]. It has likewise
+plenty of spices, as pepper, ginger, mirabolans, cardamum, cassia, and
+others, also many kinds of fruits unlike ours, and much sweeter. The
+region is almost inaccessible, _for many dens and ditches made by
+force_[73]. The king has an army of 50,000 _gentlemen whom they call
+heroes_[74]. In war they use swords and round targets, also lances,
+darts, bows, and slings, and are now beginning to use fire arms. These
+men go almost entirely naked, except when engaged in war. They use no
+horses, mules, asses, or camels; only employing elephants, which yet do
+not fight in battle. Great quantities of merchandise are consumed in
+this city, insomuch that two hundred ships resort thither yearly from
+various countries[75].
+
+[Footnote 71: Bijanagur was the capital of the kingdom known by the name
+of Narsinga; but from the neighbourhood of Cananore, it is possible that
+Verthema here means Narsingapoor, about 25 miles S.S.W. from
+Seringapatam.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 72: The walnuts of this author must have been cocoa-nuts,
+perhaps converted to walnuts by erroneous translation.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 73: This singular passage probably means, that the country is
+defended by a great number of forts and garrisons, as indeed we know
+that the interior table land of southern India is thickly planted with
+_droogs_ or hill forts, which must then have been impregnable.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 74: Probably meaning Nairs or Rajputs, who are reckoned of a
+high or noble cast, next to the Bramins--E.]
+
+[Footnote 75: This is a most astonishing error, as Narsingapoor is above
+100 miles from the nearest coast.--E.]
+
+Departing from Narsinga, and travelling 15 days to the _east_[76], we
+came to the city of _Bisinagar_, or Bijanagur, which is subject to the
+king of Narsinga. This city stands upon the side of a hill, and is very
+large, and well fortified, being surrounded by a triple wall, eight
+miles in circuit. The district in which it stands is wonderfully
+fertile, and produces every thing requisite for the necessities, and
+even the delicacies and luxuries of man. It is likewise a most
+convenient country for hunting and hawking, having many large plains,
+and fine woods, so that altogether it is a kind of earthly paradise. The
+king and people are idolaters; and the king has great power and riches,
+maintaining an army of 4000 horsemen, although it may be noted that a
+good horse in this country costs four or five hundred gold coins called
+pardaos, and sometimes eight hundred. The reason of this high price is,
+that these horses are brought from other countries, whence they can
+procure no mares, as the exportation of these is strictly prohibited by
+the princes of the countries whence the horses are procured. He has
+likewise 400 elephants to serve in his wars, and many of those swift
+running camels which we commonly call _dromedaries_[77].
+
+[Footnote 76: Bijanagur is 175 miles directly _north_ from
+Narsingapoor.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 77: In modern language the term dromedary is very improperly
+applied to the Bactrian, or two-hunched camel, a slow beast of burden.
+The word dromedary is formed from the Greek _celer_, and only belongs to
+a peculiar breed of camels of amazing swiftness.--E.]
+
+At this place I had an excellent opportunity of learning the docility
+and almost reasoning wisdom of the elephant, which certainly is the most
+sagacious and most docile of all animals, approaching even to human
+reason, and far exceeding all other beasts in strength. When used for
+war, the Indians fix great pack-saddles on their backs, resembling those
+used in Italy for mules of burden, but vastly larger. These saddles are
+girt round their bellies with two iron chains, and on each side is
+placed a small house, cage, or turret of wood, each of which contains
+three men. Between the two turrets an Indian sits on the back of the
+animal, and speaks to him in the language of the country, which the
+creature understands and obeys. Seven men, therefore, are that placed
+on the back of each elephant, all armed with coats of mail, and having
+lances, bows, darts, and slings, and targets for defence. Also the
+trunk, snout, or proboscis of the elephant is armed with a sword
+fastened to it, two cubits long, very strong, and a handbreadth in
+width. When necessary to advance, to retreat, to turn to either side, to
+strike, or to forbear, the governor or conductor of the elephant sitting
+on his back, causes him to do whatever he wills, by speaking in such
+language and expressions as he is accustomed to, all of which the beast
+understands and obeys, without the use of bridle or spur. But when fire
+is thrown at them, they are wonderfully afraid and run away, on which
+occasions it is impossible to stop them; on which account the Indians
+have many curious devices of fire-works to frighten the elephants, and
+make them run away. I saw an instance of the extraordinary strength of
+these animals while at Cananore, where some Mahometans endeavoured to
+draw a ship on the land, stem foremost, upon three rollers, on which
+occasion three elephant, commodiously applied, drew with great force,
+and bending their heads down to the ground, brought the ship on the
+land. Many have believed that elephants have no joints in their legs,
+which therefore they could not bend; but this notion is utterly false,
+as they have joints like other beasts, but lower down on their legs. The
+female elephants are fiercer than the males, and much stronger for
+carrying burdens. Sometimes they are seized by a kind of fury or
+madness, on which occasions they run about in a disorderly manner. One
+elephant exceeds the size of three buffaloes, to which latter animals
+their hair has some resemblance. Their eyes resemble those of swine.
+Their snout or trunk is very long, and by means of it they convey food
+and drink to their mouths, so that the trunk may be called the hand of
+the elephant. The mouth is under the trunk, and is much like the mouth
+of a sow. The trunk is hollow, and so flexible, that the animal can use
+it to lay hold of sticks, and wield them with it as we do with the hand.
+I once saw the trunk of a tree overthrown by one elephant, which 24 men
+had in vain attempted. It has two great teeth or tusks in the upper jaw.
+Their ears are very broad, above two spans even on the smallest
+elephants. Their feet are round and as broad as the wooden trenchers
+which are in ordinary use, and each foot has five round hoofs like large
+oyster shells. The tail is about four spans long, like that of a
+buffaloe, and is very thin of hair. Elephants are of various sizes, some
+18 spans or 14 spans high, and some have been seen as high as 16 spans;
+but the females are larger than the males of the same age. Their gait is
+slow and wallowing, so that those who are not used to ride upon them are
+apt to become sick, as if they were at sea; but it is pleasant to ride a
+young elephant, as their pace is soft and gentle like an ambling mule.
+On mounting them, they stoop and bend their knee to assist the rider to
+get up; but their keepers use no bridles or halters to guide them. When
+they engender they retire into the most secret recesses of the woods,
+from natural modesty, though some pretend that they copulate backwards.
+
+The king of Narsinga exceeds in riches and dominion, all the princes I
+have ever seen or heard of. In beauty and situation the city resembles
+Milan, only that being on the slope of a hill it is not so level. Other
+subject kingdoms lie round about it, even as Ausonia and Venice surround
+Milan. The bramins or priests informed me that the king receives daily
+of tribute from that city only the sum of 12,000 _pardaos_. He and his
+subjects are idolaters, worshipping the devil like those of Calicut. He
+maintains an army of many thousand men, and is continually at war with
+his neighbours. The richer people wear a slender dress, somewhat like a
+petticoat, not very long, and bind their heads with a fillet or broad
+bandage, after the fashion of the Mahometans, but the common people go
+almost entirely naked, covering only the parts of shame. The king wears
+a cape or short cloak of cloth of gold on his shoulders, only two spans
+long; and when he goes to war he wears a close vest of cotton, over
+which is a cloak adorned with plates of gold, richly bordered with all
+kinds of jewels and precious stones. The horse he rides on, including
+the furniture or caparisons, is estimated to equal one of our cities in
+value, being all over ornamented with jewels of great price. When be
+goes a hunting, he is attended by other three kings, whose office it is
+to bear him company wherever he goes. When he rides out or goes a
+journey he is attended by 6000 horsemen; and from all that we have said,
+and various other circumstances respecting his power, riches, and
+magnificence, he certainly is to be accounted one of the greatest
+sovereigns in the world. Besides the pieces already mentioned, named
+_pardaos_, which are of gold, he coins silver money called _fano_, or
+_fanams_, which are worth sixteen of our smallest copper money. Such is
+the excellent government of this country, that travellers may go through
+the whole of it in safety, if they can avoid the danger of _lions_[78].
+This king is in amity with the king of Portugal, and is a great friend
+to the Christians, so that the Portuguese are received and treated in
+his dominions in a friendly and honourable manner.
+
+[Footnote 78: Wherever lions are mentioned by this traveller in India,
+tigers are to be understood.--E.]
+
+When I had tarried many days in this great city, I returned to Cananore,
+whence, after three days stay I went to a city twelve miles from thence,
+named _Trempata_[79], a sea-port, inhabited by idolaters, but frequented
+by many Mahometan merchants. The only riches of this place consists in
+Indian nuts, or cocoa-nuts, and timber for ship-building. Passing from
+thence, by the cities of _Pandara_ and _Capagot_[80], I came to the
+famous city of Calicut. To avoid prolixity, I pass over many other
+kingdoms and peoples, such as _Chianul_? _Dabul_, _Onouè_? _Bangalore_,
+_Cananore_, _Cochin_, _Cacilon_? and _Calonue_, or _Coulan_[81]. I have
+so done on purpose to enable me to treat more at large of Calicut, being
+in a manner the metropolis of all the Indian cities, as the king thereof
+exceeds all the kings of the east in royal majesty, and is therefore
+called _Samoory_ or _Zamorin_, which in their language signifies _God on
+earth_.
+
+[Footnote 79: About that distance south from Cananore is
+Dermapatam.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 80: No names in the least respect similar to these are to be
+found in the indicated route between Cananore and Calicut.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 81: Of the three places marked with points of interrogation,
+the names are so disfigured in the orthography as to be unintelligible;
+_Cianul_ may possibly be Chaul, _Onouhè_ Onore, and _Cacilon_
+Cranganore.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Account of the famous City and Kingdom of Calicut._
+
+
+The city of Calicut is situated on the continent or main land of India,
+close upon the sea, having no port; but about a mile to the south there
+is a river which runs into the ocean by a narrow mouth. This river is
+divided into many branches among the fields in the plain country, for
+the purpose of being distributed by means of trenches to water the
+grounds, and one of these branches not exceeding three or four feet
+deep runs into the city. Calicut is not walled, and contains about 6000
+houses, which are not built close adjoining each other, as in European
+cities, but a certain space is left between each, either to prevent the
+communication of fire, or owing to the ignorance of the builders. It is
+a mile in length, and its houses are only mean low huts, not exceeding
+the height of a man on horseback, being mostly covered with boughs of
+trees, instead of tiles or other covering. It is said that on digging
+only five or six spans into the ground they come immediately to water,
+on which account they cannot dig foundations of any depth. Warehouses or
+lodgings for merchants may be bought for 15 or 20 pieces of gold; but
+the common run of houses cost only two pieces of gold or even less.
+
+The king and people of Calicut are idolaters, and worshippers of the
+devil, though they acknowledge one supreme God, the Creator of heaven
+and earth, the first chief cause of all things. But they allege that God
+could have no pleasure in his government, if he were to take it upon
+himself, and hath therefore given it in charge to the devil, who was
+sent as they say from heaven, to rule over and judge the world,
+rendering good or evil to men according to their deserts. The great God
+they call _Tamerani_, and this devil or subordinate deity _Deumo_. The
+king has a chapel in his palace, where this Deumo is worshipped. This
+chapel has an open vault or arch on all the four sides, about two paces
+in breadth, and it is about three paces high. The entrance is by a
+wooden gate, ornamented with carved work of monstrous forms or shapes of
+devils. In the midst of the chapel is a royal seat or throne of copper,
+on which sits the figure or image of the devil, likewise of copper. On
+the head of this image is a crown like that worn by the pope, but having
+the addition of four horns, besides which he is represented with a great
+gaping mouth, having four monstrous teeth. The nose is horridly
+deformed, with grim lowering eyes, a threatening look, and crooked
+hands, or talons like flesh-hooks, and feet somewhat like those of a
+cock; forming on the whole, a monster terrible to look at. In every
+corner of the chapel there are other figures of devils of shining
+copper, as if flames of fire devouring miserable souls. These souls are
+about the size of half a finger, some of them larger, and each figure
+puts one of these souls into his mouth with the right hand, while the
+left is on the ground lifting up another. Every morning the priests,
+who are called Bramins, wash the idol with rose water, and perfume him
+with sweet savours, after which they pray to him prostrate on the earth.
+Once every week they sacrifice to the idol after this form. They have a
+little altar or cupboard, three spans high, five spans long and four
+broad, on which they strew all manner of flowers and sweet-smelling
+powders; then bringing a great silver chafing-dish full of warming
+coals, they kill a cock with a silver knife, throwing the blood into the
+fire, together with many sweet perfumes, and even thrust the bloody
+blade of the knife often into the fire that none of the blood may be
+lost; then the priest maketh many strange gestures with the knife, like
+a fencer, giving or defending thrusts. In the mean time other priests
+with burning censers go round about the altar perfuming it with incense,
+and ringing a small silver bell all the time of the sacrifice. The
+priest who sacrifices the cock has his arms and legs garnished with
+silver plates and pendants, which make a noise when he moves like
+hawks-bells, and he wears a kind of boss on his breast inscribed with I
+know not what signs, being perhaps the secret character of some hidden
+mystery. When the sacrifice is finished, he fills both his hands with
+wheat, and goes backwards, keeping his eyes fixed on the altar till he
+comes to a certain tree whereon he casts the wheat; then returning to
+the altar he removes all that is upon it.
+
+The king never sits down to eat till four of his priests have offered
+his meat in this manner to the idol; lifting their hands above their
+heads with many fantastical gesticulations and murmuring voices, they
+present the meat to the idol, and after many foolish ceremonies bring
+back the meat to the king. The meat is offered in a wooden tray, after
+which it is laid on the broad leaves of a certain tree. The meat of the
+king consists of rice and divers other things, such as fruits; and be
+eats sitting on the ground without cloth or carpet. During his repast,
+the priests stand round him at four or five paces distance, carefully
+observing all his orders; and when he has done eating, they carry away
+all the remains of his food, which they give to certain crows, which
+being used to be thus fed, come upon a signal, and being esteemed holy,
+it is not lawful for any one to take or even hurt them. The chief
+priests of these idolaters are the bramins, who are with them as bishops
+are among us, and are considered as the order of highest dignity. The
+second order among them are the nairs, who come in place of our
+gentlemen, and go out to war with swords and bucklers, lancet, bows,
+and other weapons. The third order consists of mechanics and handicrafts
+of all kinds. In the fourth are victuallers, or those that make
+provision of fish and flesh. Next to them are those who gather pepper,
+cocoa nuts, grapes and other fruits. The baser sort are those who sow
+and gather rice, who are kept under such subjection by the bramins and
+nairs that they dare not approach nearer to them than 50 paces under
+pain of death and are therefore obliged to lurk in bye places and
+marshes; and when they go anywhere abroad they call out continually in a
+loud voice, that they may be hoard of the bramins and nairs otherwise if
+any of these were to come near they would certainly put these low people
+to death.
+
+The dress of even the king and queen differ in little or nothing from
+the other idolaters, all going naked, barefooted, and bareheaded, except
+a small piece of silk or cotton to cover their nakedness; but the
+Mahometans wear single garments in a more seemly manner, their women
+being dressed like the men except that their hair is very long. The king
+and nobles eat no kind of flesh, except having first got permission of
+the priests; but the common people may eat any flesh they please except
+that of cows. Those of the basest sort, named _Nirani_ and _Poliars_,
+are only permitted to eat fish dried in the sun.
+
+When the king or zamorin dies, his male children, if any, or his
+brothers by the fathers side, or the sons of these brothers, do not
+succeed in the kingdom: For, by ancient law or custom, the succession
+belongs to the sons of the kings sisters; and if there be none such, it
+goes to the nearest male relation through the female blood. The reason
+of this strange law of succession is, that when the king takes a wife,
+she is always in the first place deflowered by the chief bramin, for
+which he is paid fifty-pieces of gold. When the king goes abroad, either
+in war or a-hunting, the queen is left in charge of the priests, who
+keep company with her till his return; wherefore the king may well think
+that her children may not be his; and for this reason the children of
+his sisters by the same mother are considered as his nearest in blood,
+and the right inheritors of the throne. When the king dies, all his
+subjects express their mourning by cutting their beards and shaving
+their heads; and during the celebration of his funerals, those who live
+by fishing abstain from their employment during eight days. Similar
+rules are observed upon the death of any of the kings wives. Sometimes
+the king abstains from the company of women for the space of a year,
+when likewise he forbears to chew _betel_ and _areka_, which are
+reckoned provocatives.
+
+The gentlemen and merchants of Calicut, when they wish to show great
+friendship to each other, sometimes exchange wives, but on these
+occasions the children remain with their reputed fathers. It is likewise
+customary among these idolaters, for one woman to have seven husbands at
+the same time, each of whom has his appointed night to sleep with her;
+and when she has a child, she fathers it upon any of the husbands she
+pleases. The people of this country, when at their meals, lie upon the
+ground, and eat their meat from copper trays, using certain leaves
+instead of spoons; their food consisting for the most part of rice and
+fish seasoned with spices, and of the ordinary fruits of the country.
+The lowest people eat in a filthy manner, putting their dirty hands into
+the dish, and thrusting their food by handfuls into their mouths. The
+punishment of murder is by impalement; but those who wound or hurt any
+one have to pay a fine to the king. When any one is in debt, and refuses
+to pay, the creditor goes to the judges, of whom there are said to be a
+hundred, and having made due proof of the debt, he receives a certain
+stick or branch of a tree, with authority to arrest his debtor, to whom,
+when he is able to find him, he uses these words: "I charge you by the
+heads of the Bramins, and by the head of the king, that you stir not
+from the spot on which you stand till you pay me what you owe." The
+debtor has now no resource but to pay immediately, or to lose his life:
+for, if he escape after this ceremony, he is adjudged a rebel, and it is
+lawful for any man to kill him.
+
+When they mean to pray to their idols, they resort before sunrise to
+some pool or rivet where they wash themselves, after which they resort
+to the idol-house, taking especial care not to touch any thing by the
+way, and say their prayers prostrate on the ground, making strange
+gesticulations and contortions, so marvellously distorting their faces,
+eyes, and mouths, that it is horrible to behold. The nairs or gentlemen
+may not begin to eat, till one of them has dressed and set the food in
+order, with certain ceremonies, but the lower orders are not bound to
+such rules. The women also have no other care than to dress and beautify
+themselves, as they take much pains to wash and purify their persons,
+and to perfume their bodies with many sweet savours. Likewise when they
+go abroad, they are singularly loaded with jewels and ornaments on their
+ears, arms, and legs.
+
+In Calicut there are certain teachers of warlike exercises, who train up
+the youth in the use of the sword, target, and lance, and of such other
+weapons as they employ in war; and when the king takes the field he has
+an army of 100,000 infantry, but there are no cavalry in that country.
+On this occasion the king rides upon an elephant, and elephants are used
+in their wars. Those who are next in authority to the king wear fillets
+round their heads of crimson or scarlet silk. Their arms are crooked
+swords, lances, bows and arrows, and targets. The royal ensign is an
+umbrella borne aloft on a spear, so as to shade the king from the heat
+of the sun, which ensign in their language is called _somber_. When both
+armies approach within three arrow-flights, the king sends his bramins
+to the enemy by way of heralds, to challenge an hundred of them to
+combat against an hundred of his nairs, during which set combat both
+sides prepare themselves for battle. In the mean time the two select
+parties proceed to combat, mid-way between the two armies, always
+striking with the edge of their swords at the heads of their
+antagonists, and never thrusting with the point, or striking at the
+legs. Usually when five or six are slain of either side, the Bramins
+interpose to stop the fight, and a retreat is sounded at their instance.
+After which the Bramins speak to the adverse kings, and generally
+succeed to make up matters without any battle or farther slaughter.
+
+The king sometimes rides on an elephant, but at other times is carried
+by his nairs or nobles, and when he goes out is always followed by a
+numerous band of minstrels, making a prodigious noise with drums,
+timbrels, tambourets, and other such instruments. The wages of the nairs
+are four _carlines_ each, monthly, in time of peace, and six during war.
+When any of them are slain, their bodies are burned with great pomp and
+many superstitious ceremonies, and their ashes are preserved; but the
+common people are buried in their houses, gardens, fields, or woods,
+without any ceremony. When I was in Calicut it was crowded with
+merchants from almost every part of the east, especially a prodigious
+number of Mahometans. There were many from Malacca and Bengal, from
+Tanaserim, Pegu, and Coromandel, from the islands of Ceylon and Sumatra,
+from all the cities and countries of Western India, and various
+Persians, Arabians, Syrians, Turks, and Ethiopians. As the idolaters do
+not sail on the sea, the Mahometans are exclusively employed in
+navigation, so that there are not less than 15,000 Mahometans resident
+in Calicut, mostly born in that place. Their ships are seldom below the
+burden of four or five hundred tons, yet all open and without decks.
+They do not put any tow or oakum into the seams of their ships, yet join
+the planks so artificially, that they hold out water admirably, the
+seams being pitched and held together with iron nails, and the wood of
+which their ships are built is better than ours. Their sails are made of
+cotton cloth, doubled in the under parts, by which they gather much wind
+and swell out like bags, having only one sail to each vessel. Their
+anchors are of marble, eight spans long, having two on each side of the
+ship, which are hung by means of double ropes. Their voyages are all
+made at certain appointed times and seasons, as one time of the year
+answers for one coast, and another season for other voyages, which must
+all be regulated according to the changes of the weather. In the months
+of May, June, and July, when with us in Italy every thing is almost
+burnt up with heat and drought, they have prodigious rains. The best of
+their ships are built in the island of _Porcai_, not far from Calicut.
+They have one kind of vessel or canoe, made all of one piece of wood
+like a trough, very long, narrow, and sharp, which is propelled either
+by oars or sails, and goes with amazing swiftness, which is much used by
+pirates.
+
+The palace of the king of Calicut exceeds a mile in circumference, and
+is well constructed of beams and posts artificially joined, and
+curiously carved all over with the figures of devils. It is all however
+very low, for the reason before-mentioned, as they cannot dig deep for
+secure foundations. It is impossible to express in words the number and
+riches of the pearls and precious stones which the king wears about him,
+which exceed all estimate in regard to their value. Although, when I was
+in that place, the king lived rather in a state of grief, both on
+account of the war in which he was engaged with the Portuguese, and
+because he was afflicted by the venereal disease which had got into his
+throat, yet his ears, hands, legs, and feet, were richly garnished with
+all sorts of jewels and precious stones, absolutely beyond description.
+His treasure is so vast, that it cannot be contained in two immense
+cellars or warehouses, consisting of precious stones, plates of gold,
+and other rich ornaments, besides as much, gold coin as might load an
+hundred mules, as was reported by the Bramins, to whom these things are
+best known. This treasure is said to have been hoarded up by twelve
+kings, his predecessors. In this treasury there is said to be a coffer
+three spans long and two broad, entirely full of precious stones of
+inestimable value.
+
+Pepper is gathered in the fields around the suburbs of Calicut, and even
+in some places within the city. It grows on a weak and feeble plant,
+somewhat like vines, which is unable to support itself without props or
+stakes. It much resembles ivy, and in like manner creeps up and embraces
+such trees as it grows near. This tree, or bush rather, throws out
+numerous branches of two or three spans long, having leaves like those
+of the Syrian apple, but somewhat thicker. On every twig there hang six
+clusters about the size of dates, and of the colour of unripe grapes,
+but thicker together. These are gathered in October, while still
+inclining to green, and are spread out on mats in the sun to dry, when
+in three days they become black, just as brought to us. The fruitfulness
+of these plants proceeds entirely from the goodness of the soil in which
+they grow, as they do not require pruning or lopping like vines with us.
+This region also produces ginger, some roots weighing twelve ounces,
+though they do not penetrate the ground above three or four spans. When
+the roots are dug up, the uppermost joint is again set in the ground, as
+seed for next year's crop. It and the mirabolans are found in a
+red-coloured soil, and the stalk much resembles a young pear-tree.
+
+Were I to describe all the strange fruits that are produced in this
+country, it would require a large volume for that alone; as they not
+only have many quite different from ours in form, taste, and flavour,
+but even those kinds which are the same with ours, differ essentially in
+many particulars. Natural philosophers may consider how it should so
+happen that things of the same kind become so essentially different,
+according to the changes of soil and climate; by which some fruits and
+seeds, by transplantation to better soil, become more perfect in their
+kind, as larger, fairer, sweeter, and more fruitful; while others are
+improved by a worse soil and colder region. This diversity may not only
+be seen in plants and herbs, but also in beasts, and even in man. It is
+strange to observe how very differently some trees bear their fruits
+and seeds, some in one part of the tree and some in other parts. At
+Calicut there is a fruit named _Jaceros_, which grows on a tree about
+the size of our pear trees. The fruit is about two spans and a half
+long, and as thick as the thigh of a man, growing out of the body of the
+tree under the branches, some in the middle of the tree and others lower
+down. The colour of this fruit is green, and its form and appearance
+resembles a pine apple, but with smaller grains or knobs. When ripe it
+is black, and is gathered in December. It has the taste of a _pepon_
+with a flavour of musk, and in eating seems to give various pleasant
+tastes, sometimes resembling a peach, sometimes like a pomegranate, and
+leaves a rich sweet in the month like new honeycombs. Under the skin it
+has a pulp like that of a peach, and within that are other fruits like
+soft chesnuts, which when roasted eat much like them. This is certainly
+one of the finest fruits I ever met with. There is another fruit called
+_Apolanda_, which is worthy of being mentioned. The tree grows to the
+height of a man, having not above four or five leaves hanging from
+certain slips, each leaf being so large that it is sufficient to cover a
+man entirely from rain or the heat of the sun. In the middle of each
+leaf rises a stalk like that of a bean, which produces flowers followed
+by fruit a span long, and as thick as a mans arm. These fruits are
+gathered unripe, as they become ripe in keeping. Every slip bears about
+two hundred fruits in a cluster. They are of a yellow colour with a very
+thin skin, and are most delicate eating, and very wholesome. There are
+three kinds of this fruit, one of which is not so pleasant or so much
+esteemed as the others. This tree bears fruit only once and then dies;
+but there rise from the ground all about the root fifty or sixty young
+slips which renew the life of the parent tree. The gardeners transplant
+these to other places, and in one year they produce fruit This fruit is
+to be had in great abundance, almost the whole year, and are so cheap
+that twenty of them may be had for a penny. This country produces
+innumerable flowers of great beauty and most pleasant flavour, all the
+year round, and especially roses, both red, white, and yellow.
+
+The cocoa is another tree most worthy of being known, as in fruitfulness
+and sweetness of fruit it surpasses all other trees. Its fruit is a nut
+of large size; and taken altogether, this tree produces ten different
+commodities of value: as it produces wood most excellent for burning,
+nuts very pleasant to eat, cords or ropes that answer well for ships,
+fine cloth, which when dyed resembles silk. The wood is the best that
+can be found for making charcoal, and it yields wine, odoriferous water,
+sugar, and oil. The boughs or leaves serve to cover houses, instead of
+tiles or thatch, as, by reason of their closeness and substance, they
+keep out the rain admirably. One tree will produce about two hundred
+large nuts. The outer rhind of these nuts is removed, and thrown into
+the fire, where it burns quickly and with a strong flame. The inner
+rhind is like cotton or flax, and can be wrought in the same manner.
+From the finer part of this, a kind of cloth is made resembling silk;
+and from the tow, or refuse, they make a coarser cloth, or small ropes
+and twine; while the coarsest parts are made into cables and large ropes
+for ships. The inner hard shell of the nut incloses the kernel, which is
+excellent eating, and lines the shell to the thickness of an inch or
+less. Within this is found to the quantity of two or three cups of sweet
+water, which is excellent to drink, and which, by boiling, produces good
+oil. Only one side of the tree is allowed to produce fruit, as they
+wound the other side every morning and evening in several places, whence
+a juice or sap runs out into vessels placed to receive it. Thus they
+procure at each wound, every night and morning, a cupful of most
+precious liquor, which sometimes they boil till it becomes strong as
+brandy, so as to make people drunk like strong wine, which it resembles
+in taste and flavour. They likewise procure sugar from this tree, but
+not very sweet. This tree produces fruit continually, as at all times
+there are to be seen upon it both old ripe fruit of the past season, and
+green fruit of the present year. It does not begin bearing till five
+years old, and only lives for twenty five years. It thrives best in
+sandy ground, and is planted or set out like our walnuts; and is so much
+valued, that it is to be found all over the country for at least two
+hundred miles. This country also produces other fruits, from which they
+make good oil.
+
+For the cultivation of rice they till the ground with oxen as we do, and
+at the season for sowing they have a holiday, on which they testify
+their joy by singing and dancing to the sound of all kinds of
+instruments of music. To ensure, as they conceive, a favourable produce,
+ten men are disguised like so many devils, who dance to the noise of
+their music; and after the festivities of the day, they pray to the
+devils to send them a plentiful crop.
+
+When any merchant of these idolaters is sore afflicted with disease and
+near death, then certain persons who are accounted physicians among them
+ore called to visit the person in extremity. These persons accordingly
+come to his house in the dead of night, dressed like devils, and
+carrying burning sticks in their mouth and hands. And there, with mad
+cries and boilings, and with the jangling of certain instruments, they
+make such a horrible noise in the ears of the sick man, as is enough to
+make a healthy man sick. This is the only remedy these pretended
+physicians offer to their sick persons, being merely to present to him
+when at the point of death the resemblance of him whom, worse than
+devils, they honour as the vicegerent of the deity. When any one hath so
+engorged himself with eating as to be sick at stomach, he takes the
+powder of ginger, mixed in some liquid to the consistence of syrup,
+which he drinks, and in three days he recovers his former health.
+
+Their bankers, brokers, and money-changers use weights and scales of
+such small size, that the box containing the whole does not exceed an
+ounce in weight, yet are they so delicate and just that they will turn
+with the weight of a hair. For trying the parity of gold, they use the
+touch-stone as with us, but with this addition: having first rubbed the
+gold to be tried on the touch-stone, they rub over the mark with a ball
+of some sort of composition resembling wax, by which all that is not
+fine gold disappears, and the marks or spots of gold remain, by which
+they have an exact proof of the fineness of the gold. When the ball
+becomes full of gold, they melt it in the fire, to recover the gold
+which it contains; yet are these men very ignorant even of the art which
+they profess. In buying or selling merchandise they employ the agency of
+brokers; so that the buyer and seller each employs a separate broker.
+The seller takes the buyer by the hand, under cover of a scarf or veil,
+where, by means of the fingers, counting from one to a hundred thousand
+privately, they offer and bargain far the price till they are agreed,
+all of which passes in profound silence.
+
+The women of this country suckle their children till three months old,
+after which they feed them on goats milk. When in the morning they have
+given them milk, they allow them to tumble about on the sands all foul
+and dirty, leaving them all day in the sun, so that they look more like
+buffaloe calves than human infants; indeed I never saw such filthy
+creatures. In the evening they get milk again. Yet by this manner of
+bringing up they acquire marvellous dexterity in running, leaping,
+swimming, and the like.
+
+There are many different kinds of beasts and birds in this country, as
+_lions_, wild boars, harts, hinds, buffaloes, cows, goats, and
+elephants; but these last are not all bred here, being brought from
+other places. They have also parrots of sundry colours, as green,
+purple, and other mixt colours, and they are so numerous that the rice
+fields have to be watched to drive them away. These birds make a
+wonderful chattering, and are sold so low as a halfpenny each. There are
+many other kinds of birds different from ours, which every morning and
+evening make most sweet music, so that the country is like an earthly
+paradise, the trees, herbs, and flowers being in a continual spring, and
+the temperature of the air quite delightful, as never too hot nor too
+cold. There are also monkeys, which are sold at a low price, and are
+very hurtful to the husbandmen, as they climb the trees, and rob them of
+their valuable fruits and nuts, and cast down the vessels that are
+placed for collecting the sap from which wine is made. There are
+serpents also of prodigious size, their bodies being as thick as those
+of swine, with heads like those of boars; these are four footed, and
+grow to the length of four cubits, and breed in the marshes[82]. The
+inhabitants say that these have no venom. There are three other kinds of
+serpents, some of which have such deadly venom, that if they draw ever
+so little blood death presently follows, as happened several times while
+I was in the country. Of these some are no larger than asps, and some
+much bigger, and they are very numerous. It is said that, from some
+strange superstition, the king of Calicut holds them in such veneration,
+that he has small houses or cottages made on purpose for them,
+conceiving that they are of great virtue against an over abundance of
+rain, and overflowing of the rivers. Hence they are protected by law,
+and any person killing one would be punished with death, so that they
+multiply exceedingly. They have a strange notion that serpents come from
+heaven, and are actuated by heavenly spirits, and they allege that only
+by touching them instant death insues. These serpents know the idolaters
+from the Mahometans, or other strangers, and are much more apt to
+attack the former than the latter. Upon one occasion, I went into a
+house where eight men lay dead, and greatly swollen, having been killed
+the day before by these serpents; yet the natives deem it fortunate to
+meet any of them in their way.
+
+[Footnote 82: From the description these must be crocodiles--E.]
+
+The palace of the king of Calicut contains many mansions, and a
+prodigious number of apartments, in all of which a prodigious number of
+lamps are lighted up every evening. In the great hall of the palace
+there are ten or twelve great and beautiful candlesticks of _laton_ or
+brass, of cunning workmanship, much like goodly fountains, the height of
+a man. In each of these are several vessels, and in every vessel are
+three burning candles of two spans long, with great plenty of oil. In
+the first vessel there are many lamps or wicks of cotton; the middle
+vessel, which is narrower, is also full of lamps; and the lowest vessel
+has also a great number of lights, maintained with oil and cotton wicks.
+All the angles or corners of these candlesticks are covered with figures
+of devils, which also hold lights in their hands; and in a vessel on the
+top of all the candlesticks there are innumerable cotton wicks kept
+constantly burning, and supplied with oil. When any one of the royal
+blood dies, the king sends for all the bramins or priests in his
+dominions, and commands them to mourn for a whole year. On their
+arrival, he feasts them for three days, and when they depart gives each
+of them five pieces of gold.
+
+Not far from Calicut, there is a temple of the idolaters, encompassed
+with water like an island, built in the ancient manner, having a double
+row of pillars much like the church of _St John de fonte_ at Rome, and
+in the middle of this temple is a stone altar, on which the people
+sacrifice to their idols. High up between the rows of pillars there is a
+vessel like a boat, two paces long, and filled with oil. Also, all round
+about the temple there are many trees, on which are hung an incredible
+number of lamps, and the temple itself is everywhere hung round with
+lamps, constantly burning. Every year, on the 25th of December, an
+infinite number of people resort to this temple, even from fifteen days
+journey all round the country, together with a vast number of priests,
+who sacrifice to the idols of the temple, after having washed in the
+water by which it is surrounded. Then the priests ascend to the boat
+which is filled with oil, from which they anoint the heads of all the
+people, and then proceed to the sacrifice. On one side of the altar,
+there is a most horrible figure of a devil, to whom the people lay
+their prayers, prostrate on the ground, and then depart each one to his
+home, believing that all their sins are forgiven them. On this occasion,
+the environs of the temple is considered a sanctuary, where no person
+may be arrested or troubled on any cause or pretence. I never saw so
+prodigious a number of people assembled in any one place, except in the
+city of Mecca.
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_Observations on various parts of India_.
+
+
+As there was no convenience for trade at Calicut, on account of war with
+the Portuguese, because the inhabitants in conjunction with the
+Mahometans had murdered 48 Portuguese while I was in that city, my
+faithful friend and companion _Cociazenor_ the Persian, formerly
+mentioned, thought it best for us to depart from thence. Indeed, in
+revenge for that cruel murder, the Portuguese have ever since waged
+cruel war upon Calicut, doing infinite injury to the city and people.
+Wherefore, departing from thence by way of a fine river, we came to a
+city named _Caicolon_[83], which is fifty leagues from Calicut. The
+inhabitants of this city are idolaters, but it is frequented by many
+merchants from different places, as its district produces excellent
+pepper. At this place we found certain merchants who were Christians,
+calling themselves followers of the apostle St Thomas. They observe
+lent, or the fast of forty days, as we do, and believe in the death and
+resurrection of Christ, so that they celebrate Easter after our manner,
+and observe the other solemnities of the Christian religion after the
+manner of the Greeks. They are commonly named John, James, Matthew,
+Thomas, and so forth, after the names of the apostles. Departing thence,
+after three days journey we came to another city named _Coulan_, about
+twenty leagues from _Caicolon_. The king of this place is an idolater,
+and has an army of 20,000 men always on foot. Coulan has an excellent
+harbour, and the surrounding country produces plenty of pepper, but no
+corn. By reason of the wars, we made no stay here, and on our way
+farther we saw people fishing for pearls, in the manner already
+mentioned when treating of Ormuz.
+
+[Footnote 83: From the distance and direction of the journey or voyage,
+this name may possibly be an error or corruption for Cranganore.--E.]
+
+The _city of Coromandel_ on the sea coast, is seven days sail from
+Coulan. It is very large, but without walls, and is subject to the king
+of Narsinga, being within sight of the island of Ceylon[84]. After
+passing the southern point of Cape Comorin, the eastern coast of India
+produces abundance of rice. This city is resorted to by vast numbers of
+Mahometan merchants from many distant countries, as from it they can
+travel to various great regions and cities of India. At this place I met
+with certain Christians, who affirm that the body of St Thomas the
+apostle is buried in a certain place about twelve miles from the city,
+where several Christians continually dwell to guard the body of the
+saint. They told me that these Christians are evil intreated by the
+natives, on account of the war carried on by the Portuguese against the
+people of the country; and that the Christians are often murdered in
+secret, that it may not be known to the king of Narsinga, who is in
+amity with the Portuguese, and greatly favours the Christians. Once on a
+time there was a conflict between the Christians and Mahometans, in
+which one of the Christians was sore wounded in the arm. He immediately
+repaired to the sepulchre of St Thomas, where, making his prayers and
+touching the holy shrine, he was immediately healed by miracle, upon
+which, as it is said, the king of Narsinga has ever since greatly
+favoured the Christians. At this place my companion sold much of his
+merchandize; but on account of war raging in the country, we determined
+to depart, and calling with much danger over a gulf 20 leagues broad, we
+came to the large island of _Zailon_, or Ceylon.
+
+[Footnote 84: From other circumstances in the text, particularly the
+neighbourhood of the place where St Thomas lay buried, the city here
+alluded to was probably Meliapour, which formerly stood not far from
+Madras, or the famous _Mahubulipoor_, the city of the great Bali, 16 or
+18 miles from the English settlement. The author, as on many other
+occasions, gives the name of the country to the capital. As to being in
+sight of Ceylon, this may be an error in transcription, and we ought to
+read that on the voyage between Coulan and the city of Coromandel; the
+author passed in sight of Ceylon.--E.]
+
+This island of Ceylon is 1000 miles in circumference, and is divided
+among four powerful kings; and because of the wars which then raged
+among them we could not remain long there to acquire any minute
+knowledge of the country and manners of its inhabitants. It contains
+many elephants. At the foot of a very long and high mountain there are
+found many precious stones called _piropi_ or rubies, which are got in
+the following manner. The adventurers purchase from the king a certain
+measure of the ground where these rubies are found, being about a cubit
+square, for which they pay five pieces of gold, yet under the condition
+that there shall always be an officer belonging to the king present
+while they are digging, that if any stone be found beyond the weight of
+ten carats it may be reserved for the king, all under that weight
+belonging to the adventurer. Not far from that mountain they find other
+precious stones, as jacinths, sapphires, and topazes, besides others.
+The soil of Ceylon produces the sweetest fruits I ever saw, especially
+_cloves_[85] and Assyrian apples of wonderful sweetness, and its other
+productions are similar to those of Calicut. The cinnamon-tree is much
+like our bay, only that the leaves are smaller and somewhat white. The
+true cinnamon is the bark of this tree, which is gathered every third
+year, and of which the island produces great quantities. When first
+gathered, it is by no means so sweet and fragrant as it becomes a month
+afterwards when thoroughly dry. A Mahometan merchant assured my
+companion, that on the top of a high mountain in the centre of this
+island, there is a certain cave or den where the inhabitants resort for
+devotion, in memory of our first parents, who, as they allege, lived in
+that place in continual penitence, after breaking the covenant with God,
+which is confirmed by the print of Adam's feet being still to be seen
+there above two spans in length. The inhabitants of this island are
+subject to the king of Narsinga, to whom they pay tribute. The climate
+is temperate and healthy, though situated so near the equinoctial line.
+The people are of a dark tawny colour, and wear slight cotton dresses,
+having the right arm bare, as is the universal custom of the Indians;
+the men being by no means warlike, neither have they the use of iron. In
+this island my companion sold the king a great deal of saffron and
+coral.
+
+[Footnote 85: Cloves are certainly not found in Ceylon.--E.]
+
+In three days sail we came to a city named _Paleachet_ or Pullicat,
+belonging to the king of Narsinga, a famous mart for rich commodities,
+and especially for jewels and precious stones brought from Ceylon and
+Pegu, and where likewise abundance of spices are sold. Many Mahometan
+merchants dwell in this city; and being received into one of their
+houses, we told him whence we came, and that we had brought saffron and
+coral for sale, with other merchandise, of which he was very glad. At
+this city wheat is scarce, but rice is to be had in great plenty; and in
+other respects the productions of the neighbouring country are much the
+same as at Calicut. But as the inhabitants were preparing for war, we
+departed from thence, and after thirteen days sail we arrived at the
+city of _Tarnasari_ or Tanaserim, a hundred miles distant.
+
+The city of Tanaserim is not far from the sea, well walled, seated on a
+fine plain, and has a famous port on a fine river that runs past its
+north side. The king is an idolater of great power, and is constantly at
+war with the kings of Narsinga and Bengal[86]. He is able to bring into
+the field an hundred thousand foot and as many cavalry, together with a
+hundred of the largest and finest elephants I ever saw. The weapons of
+his troops are swords, round bucklers, _peltes_, bows and arrows, and
+javelins or darts made of long reeds; they also use for defence cotton
+jacks wrought very hard and close quilted. The houses in their towns are
+built close together like those in Italy. This country produces wheat,
+cotton, silk of various kinds, Brazil wood, sundry kinds of fruit like
+those of Italy, with Assyrian apples, oranges, lemons, citrons, gourds,
+cucumbers, and many others. It has many animals both wild and tame.
+Among the former are oxen and cows, sheep, goats, hogs, and deer. The
+wild beasts are lions, wolves, catamountains, and musk cats or civets.
+In the woods are many peacocks and falcons, with popinjays or parrots,
+some of which are entirely white, while others are of seven different
+colours. There are plenty of hares and partridges, and several kinds of
+birds of prey larger than eagles. These birds are black and purple, with
+several white feathers intermixed, having yellow bills tipt beautifully
+with crimson, which are so large that the handles of swords are
+sometimes made of the upper mandible. Their cocks and hens are the
+largest I ever saw, and both the natives and the Mahometans who dwell
+there, take great delight in cock-fighting, on which they venture large
+sums. I have seen them fight for six hours, yet will they sometimes
+kill at the first stroke. Some of their goats are much larger and
+handsomer than ours, and of these the females have often four kids at
+one birth. So abundant are animals in this country, that twelve sheep
+may be bought for a single piece of gold worth about a pistole. Some of
+their rams have horns like a buck, and are much bigger and fiercer than
+ours. Their buffaloes are not so good as those of Italy. This coast has
+abundance of fine large fish, which are sold very cheap. The natives eat
+the flesh of all kinds of beasts except cows, and feed sitting on the
+ground without cloth or carpet, having their meat in wooden vessels
+artificially wrought. Their drink is sugar and water. Their beds are
+raised from the ground like ours. Their apparel is a cloak or mantle of
+cotton cloth, leaving one arm bare, but some wear inner vests or shirts
+of silk or cotton. All go bareheaded, except the priests, who have a
+kind of caps of two spans long on their heads, with a knob on the top
+about the size of an acorn, all sparkling with gold. They delight in
+ear-rings, but have neither rings nor bracelets. The complexion of the
+natives inclines towards fair, as the air is more temperate than at
+Calicut. In their tillage and reaping there is little difference from
+the manner of Italy.
+
+[Footnote 86: It is not easy to conceive by what means this could be, as
+Pegu, Ava, Aracan, and Tipera, intervene between Tanaserim and Bengal,
+and the bay of Bengal between Tanaserim and Narsinga or the Carnatic,
+none of the powers mentioned being possessed of any maritime force.--E.]
+
+When the king or any of the priests or great men die, their bodies are
+burnt on a large pile of wood, and all the while the assistants
+sacrifice to the devil. The ashes are then gathered into earthen jars
+like those of _Samos_, and are preserved or buried in their houses.
+While the bodies are burning, they cast into the fire all manner of
+perfumes, as wood of aloes, myrrh, frankincense, storax, sandal-wood,
+and many other sweet gums, spices, and woods: In the mean time also,
+they make an incessant noise with drums, trumpets, pipes, and other
+instruments, much like what was done of old by the Greeks and Romans,
+when deifying their departed great men. Likewise during these obsequies,
+there are 15 or 20 persons disguised like devils, continually walking
+round the fire with strange gesticulations. All the while the wife of
+the deceased stands alone beside the fire weeping and lamenting her
+loss. Fifteen days afterwards she invites all the kindred of her husband
+to a feast, when they go at night in a body to the place where the
+husband was burnt, the widow being dressed in all her jewels and richest
+attire, using on this occasion the help of her relations to decorate her
+person to the utmost. At this place a pit of some size is prepared and
+filled with dry reeds, covered over with a silk cloth to conceal the
+pit. Then a fire of sweet woods is kindled in the pit; and when all the
+guests have been heartily feasted, the widow having eaten a great
+quantity of _betola_ so as to make her mad or drunk, a great company of
+their musicians habited like devils, with burning sticks in their
+mouths, dance around the fire, and then make a sacrifice to the great
+devil _Deumo_. The widow then runs about like a person bereaved of her
+senses, dancing and rejoicing after a strange manner; then turning to
+the persons disguised like devils, she commends herself to their
+prayers, desiring them to make intercession for her with _Deumo_, that
+after this transitory life she may be received among his angels. When
+all the ceremonies are finished, she takes leave of all her kindred, and
+then lifting up her hands, and with a sudden loud cry, she leaps into
+the flaming pit, on which her kindred cover her up with faggots of sweet
+wood, and great quantities of pitch or bitumen, that she may be speedily
+consumed. If the widow refuses thus to sacrifice herself, she would be
+ever afterwards esteemed an evil woman, hated of all men, and even in
+danger of being slain by her own and her husband's kindred. The king is
+generally present at these ceremonies, which are not used at the death
+of ordinary people, but only for kings, priests, and great men.
+
+Justice in strictly administered in this country. Whoever kills a man is
+adjudged to die as at Calicut. Proof of giving or receiving is taken by
+writings or by witnesses, the governor of the city being chief judge. If
+any merchant stranger die there without children, all his goods fall to
+the king. When the king dies, he is succeeded in the throne by his
+children. The children of the natives divide equally among them all the
+possessions of their father. When any Mahometan merchant dies, their
+bodies are embalmed with many sweet spices and gums, and being placed in
+wooden coffins, they are buried with their faces towards Mecca. In their
+manner of writing they use parchment as we do, and not the leaves of
+trees as at Calicut. Their vessels are a kind of shallow brigantines or
+barks with flat bottoms, which draw very little water. Some also use
+foists having _double foreparts_[87], and two masts, but these have no
+decks. They have also some vessels of large burden, even carrying a
+thousand tons, in which they have several boats, and these are used when
+they go to Malacca for spices.
+
+[Footnote 87: This is not easily understood, unless it may mean that
+they are so built that they may sail with either end foremost.--E.]
+
+Having finished our business at Tanaserim, we packed up all our wares
+and embarked for Bengal, distant 700 miles from Tanaserim, whither we
+arrived in twelve days sailing. In fruitfulness and abundance of all
+things _this city_[88] may contend for eminence with any city in the
+world. The kingdom dependent upon this city is very large, rich, and
+populous, and the king, who is a Mahometan, maintains an army of 200,000
+men, including cavalry and infantry, with which he keeps up almost
+continual wars against the king of Narsinga. This country is so
+fruitful, that it possesses every thing conducive to the use of man,
+abounding in all kinds of beasts, wholesome fruits, and corn. It has
+spices also of several kinds, and vast abundance of cotton and silk. No
+other region in the world is comparable to this, so that there are many
+rich merchants. Every year there depart from hence fifty ships laden
+with cloths of cotton or silk, bound for the cities of Turkey, Syria,
+Arabia, Persia, Ethiopia, and India. There are also many merchant
+strangers, who buy precious stones from the natives. We found here many
+Christian merchants who were born, as they told us, in the city of
+_Sarnau_. They had brought to this great mart wood of aloes and _laser_,
+which latter yields the sweet gum called _laserpitium_, commonly called
+_belzoi_, or benzoin, which is a kind of myrrh. They bring also musk and
+several other sweet perfumes. These Christian merchants told us, that in
+their country were many Christian princes, subject to the great khan,
+who dwells in the city of _Cathay_[89]. The dress of these Christians
+was of camblet, very loose and full of plaits, and lined with cotton;
+and they wore sharp pointed caps of a scarlet colour, two spans high.
+They are white men, believing in one God with a trinity of persons, and
+were baptized after our manner. They believe in the doctrines of the
+evangelists and apostles, and write from right to left like the
+Armenians. They celebrate the birth and crucifixion of Christ, observe
+the forty days of lent, and keep the days of several saints. They wear
+no shoes, but have a kind of hose of silk on their legs, garnished with
+jewels. On their fingers they wore rings with stones of wonderful
+splendour. At their meat they use no tables, but eat lying on the
+ground, feeding upon flesh of all kinds. They affirmed also that there
+are certain Christian kings, whom they called _Rumi_, bordering on the
+Turks. When these Christians had seen the precious merchandise belonging
+to my companion, and particularly a great branch of coral, they
+earnestly advised him to accompany them to a certain city, whither they
+were bound, assuring him that by their procurement he should sell this
+to very great advantage, especially if he would take rubies in payment,
+by means of which he might easily gain 10,000 pieces of gold, assuring
+him that these stones were of much greater value in Turkey than in the
+east. And as they were ready to depart the very next day in a foist
+bound for the city of Pegu, where they meant to go, my companion
+consented to go with them, more especially as he expected to find there
+certain Persians his countrymen. Wherefore departing with these men from
+Bengal, and sailing across a great gulf to the south-east, we came at
+length to the city of Pegu, which is 1000 miles from Bengal.
+
+[Footnote 88: Here, as usual, the name of the country is given instead
+of the chief city, and we have no means even to guess what place is
+indicated, unless perhaps the _Satigan_ of other ancient relations,
+which appears to have been a city on the Hoogly river, or western branch
+of the Ganges.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 89: The capital of Cathay or northern China is Cambalu or
+Pekin, but it is difficult to make any thing of these Christian natives
+of _Sarnau_, or of their many Christian princes in Tartary; unless we
+may suppose Verthema to have mistaken the followers of the Lama of
+Thibet for Christians, as appears to have been done by some of the more
+ancient travellers in our early volumes.--E.]
+
+The city of Pegu is situated on the continent, not far from the sea, and
+upon a large river, by which merchandise are conveyed to or from the
+city very conveniently. The city is walled, and the houses are well
+built. The king and his subjects are idolaters, of a fairer complexion
+than those of Tanaserim, as the climate is rather cooler, but in dress,
+manner of living, and general appearance, in every respect resemble the
+inhabitants of that other city. The king has a vast army both of horse
+and foot, among whom are many native Christians, who have six pardaos of
+monthly pay. The beasts and fowls are much the same as at Calicut, so
+that they have abundance of animal food; and besides these they have a
+few elephants. This country produces the best timber I ever saw, either
+for building ships or houses; and has many reeds or canes of vast size,
+as large in diameter as the body of a man or a large barrel. Civet-cats
+or musk-cats are so plenty that three may be bought for one piece of
+gold. This city produces very little merchandise for purchase, except
+precious stones, and especially rubies, which are brought thither from
+another city named _Cassela_, thirty days journey towards the east,
+where also they procure other precious stones called _smaragdes_ or
+emeralds. On our arrival at Pegu, the king was at the distance of
+twenty-five days journey making war upon the king of Ava; but returned
+shortly afterwards in great triumph on account of a victory he had
+obtained over his enemy. Though this king is very rich and powerful, he
+does not use such pompous and magnificent ceremony as the king of
+Calicut, and is so affable and accessible, that even a child may come
+into his presence and speak to him; yet the rich jewels, pearls, and
+precious stones, especially rubies, with which he is decorated surpass
+all belief, and exceed the value of a great and flourishing city. His
+fingers are full of rings, his arms all covered with bracelets, and his
+legs and feet covered with similar ornaments, all gloriously beset and
+sparkling with the finest precious stones, and his ears so loaded with
+jewels that they hang down half a span. With all these splendid jewels
+he shines in a dark night as if with the sunbeams.
+
+At a favourable opportunity, the Christian merchants whom we had
+accompanied to Pegu gave intimation to the king of the valuable
+merchandise which my companion had brought for sale, and accordingly he
+sent for us on the following day, desiring my companion to bring the
+goods which he had to dispose of. Among other things he had two great
+branches of coral so large and beautiful as had not been seen before,
+which the king took great pleasure to look upon, and being astonished at
+these things, he asked the Christian merchants what men we were. They
+answered that we were Persians. The king then desired to know if we
+would sell these things. Upon this my companion desired the interpreters
+to say to the king, that they were all his own, and that he begged he
+would do him the honour to accept them freely. The king then said that
+he had been two years continually at war with the king of Ava, by which
+his treasure was consumed, but if my companion would bargain for them by
+way of exchange for precious stones, especially rubies, that he would
+content him for the coral. Then said my companion to the interpreters,
+"I pray you give the king to understand that I desire nothing else for
+my goods than the good-will of his majesty, and therefore that I humbly
+intreat he may take of my goods what pleases him best without money or
+payment of my kind." When the king heard this, he said that he had often
+been told the Persians were courteous and liberal men, but that he had
+never known any one so generous as this, and swore by the head of the
+devil, that he would try whether he or the Persian were most liberal.
+Upon this he ordered one of his attendants to bring him a casket of
+precious stones. This casket was a span and a half square, entirely full
+of rubies, the inside being divided into many compartments where the
+stones were sorted in order according to their sizes. When he had opened
+the casket, he ordered it to be placed before the Persian, desiring him
+to take of these precious rubies as many as he thought fit. But my
+companion, as if still more provoked to generosity by the liberality of
+the king, spoke to him in these words, "Most high and honourable
+sovereign! Such is my sense of your generous conduct to me, that I swear
+by the head of Mahomet and all the mysteries of his holy religion, that
+I freely and gladly give you all my goods. I do not travel in search of
+gain, but merely from a desire to see the world; in which I have not
+hitherto found any thing that has given me so much delight as the
+generous favour your majesty has now been pleased to shew me!" To this
+the king answered, "Will you yet contend with me in liberality?" Then
+selecting some rubies from all the compartments in the casket, out of
+which he took as many as he could hold in his hand, being two hundred
+rubies, he gave all these to the Persian with most royal munificence,
+and commanded him not to refuse. He gave also to each of the Christians
+two rubies worth not less than a thousand crowns; but those he gave to
+the Persian were reckoned worth a hundred thousand crowns. This king
+therefore certainly exceeds all the kings of the earth in munificence,
+both in manner and in richness of his gifts. About this time news came
+to Pegu that the king of Ava was advancing against him with a vast army,
+on which the king of Pegu went to meet him with one almost innumerable.
+
+Two days after the departure of the king from Pegu, we sailed towards
+the city of Malacca, where we arrived after a voyage of eight days. Not
+far from this city is a famous river named Gaza[90], the largest I ever
+saw, as it is 25 miles broad, and on the other side of it is seen the
+very large island of _Sumatra_, which by old writers was called
+_Taprobana_, and which is said by the inhabitants to be 500 miles in
+circuit[91]. Upon our arrival at _Malacca_, called by some _Melcha_, we
+were commanded to appear before the sultan, who is a Mahometan and
+tributary to the great sultan of _Chini_[92], because as is said the
+city was built about 80 years before on account of the convenience of
+its harbour, being one of the best in the ocean, and to which doubtless
+many ships resort for trade. This region is not everywhere fruitful, yet
+it has a sufficiency of corn and cattle, although scarce of wood. They
+have plenty of birds of the same kind with those at Calicut, but the
+popinjays or parrots are more beautiful. It produces sandal-wood and
+tin; likewise elephants, horses, sheep, kine, _pardalles_ or leopards,
+buffaloes, peacocks, and many other beasts and birds. The country has
+but few products of value, so that its only merchandise is spices and
+silk. The people are of a blackish ash-colour, and are clothed like the
+Mahometans of _Memphis_, otherwise called _Cayr_, _Alchayr_, or
+_Babylon_, on the Nile. They have very large foreheads, round eyes, and
+flat noses; and they are so much given to murder and robbery that it is
+dangerous to go abroad in the night, for they kill one another like
+dogs, and therefore merchants always remain on board their ships in the
+night. The people are fierce, barbarous, and unruly, insomuch that they
+will not submit to any governor, being altogether addicted to sedition
+and rebellion, and they always threaten to quit the country when their
+rulers endeavour to enforce order; which threat they are certainly able
+to execute, as their country is upon the sea-coast.
+
+[Footnote 90: It is obvious from the context, that this famous river of
+Gaza refers to the Straits of Malacca.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 91: The Taprobana of the ancients certainly was Ceylon.
+Sumatra is about 977 statute miles in length, and 200 in its greatest
+breadth, so that its circumference must exceed 2500 miles.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 92: By Chini in the text is probably meant _Acheen_ in
+Sumatra.--E.]
+
+We stopt no time at Malacca, but hiring a brigantine we sailed from
+thence for the island of Sumatra, and arrived at the city of _Pyder_ or
+Pedier about 80 miles from the mainland, where we found an excellent
+harbour. The island of Sumatra is governed by four kings, who with their
+people are all idolaters, and do not differ much in fashions, apparel,
+and manner of life from the inhabitants of Tanaserim. They are of a
+whitish colour with large foreheads, round eyes; and of _brasyll_?
+colour. They wear their hair long, have very broad and flat noses, and
+are of low mean stature. Their money is of gold, silver, and tin. On
+one side the gold coin has the head of a _devil_, and on the other a
+waggon or chariot drawn by elephants. The silver coin is similar, and
+ten of them passes for one of gold; but it requires 25 pieces of tin to
+equal one gold piece. In this country there are a greater number and
+finer elephants than in any other place I have been in. The people are
+by no means warlike, being entirely devoted to merchandise and gain;
+they use strangers with much kindness and hospitality, and justice is
+well administered. They have in this island great abundance of long
+pepper, which in their language is called _Molaga_, and is much longer
+and whiter than any other, yet very light and strong; it is sold by
+measure like corn, and is to be had in such plenty that twenty ships are
+loaded with it every year for _Cathay_, or China, where it is much in
+request on account of the coldness of the climate. The tree which
+produces this pepper has a larger body, with broader and flatter leaves
+than the pepper tree of Calicut. This island produces plenty of silk,
+which is the work of worms as with us; but there is another kind brought
+forth on the trees spontaneously without any care or labour, which is
+worse than the other. Here likewise grows the _laser_ tree, which
+produces the precious gum called _Laserpitium_ or _Belzoe_[93], as we
+were told by the inhabitants and merchants, but not having myself seen
+it I am unable to give any distinct account of this substance. Variety
+is always pleasing, and ingenious minds can never be satiated with
+contemplating the marvellous and diversified works of God in nature:
+Therefore, that the reader may take the more pleasure in these my
+writings, or at least may experience less tediousness in reading them, I
+have thought good to set down such things as I have seen more at large.
+It is therefore to be understood that the reason of no great quantity of
+_aloes_ or _Laserpitium_ being brought to us is because it comes from
+the farthest parts of the earth. There are three kinds or sorts of
+_aloes_, differing greatly in point of goodness. The most perfect is
+that called _Calampat_, which is not found in Sumatra, but is brought
+from the city of _Sarnau_ near which it grows, as we were told by our
+companions the Christian merchants formerly mentioned. There is another
+kind of _aloes_ called _Juba_ or _Luba_, brought to Sumatra by the
+before mentioned river or strait, but I know not from what country. The
+third kind is called _bochor_. These Christian merchants also told us
+that none of the finest and best kind of aloes is brought to us, because
+it comes from the kingdoms of _Cathay, Chini, Macym, Sarnau_, and
+_Gravay_, countries much richer than ours and more abounding in gold,
+having kings of great power and riches, who take great delight in sweet
+savours and use them much more than our western princes, owing to which
+circumstance the true and best kind of _aloes_ is worth ten crowns the
+pound even in the city of _Sarnau_.
+
+[Footnote 93: From similarity of names this appears to be _Benzoin_, or
+_benzoe_, sometimes called _gum benjamin_; yet from some circumstances
+in the sequel it may possibly indicate _camphor_.--E.]
+
+We were taught by the said Christian merchants our companions, how to
+know and distinguish the two kinds of the sweet gums called _aloes_ or
+_Laserpitium_. One of them had a certain portion of them both, and about
+two ounces of the best sort of aloes called _calampat_. Taking a piece
+of this in his hand and holding it close for about as long as one might
+take to rehearse the psalm _Miserere mei Deus_ three times, the aloes
+become hot, and on opening his hand gave out a savour of incredible
+sweetness, such as I had never experienced from any other substance. He
+took also about the size of a walnut of the common _laserpitium_ or
+_belzoe_, and half a pound of that which comes from the city of
+_Sarnau_, and putting both into different chaffing-dishes with burning
+coals in a close chamber, the small quantity of _belzoe_ far exceeded,
+in sweetness of flavour, the other which weighed half a pound, and would
+even have done so had it been two pounds weight[94]. In this region also
+is found the substance called _lacca_ from which a bright red colour is
+procured. This is the gum of a tree not much unlike our walnut tree[95].
+In Pedier I saw in one street not less than 500 bankers or exchangers of
+money; and at this place they make many curious works, such as fine
+baskets garnished with gold, which were sold for two crowns each[96].
+This is a famous mart to which innumerable merchants resort. The
+inhabitants wear mantles of silk, and _syndones_? made of cotton.
+
+[Footnote 94: It is impossible to determine from the account in the text
+what is meant by these articles of sweet scent under the names of
+_aloes, laserpitium, belzoe, calampat, luba_, and _bochor_; all of which
+seem to be different names of the same substance in different degrees of
+quality, and assuredly not the drugs now known by the name of _aloes_
+and _benzoin_. There is a sweet-scented wood in the east known by the
+name of _lignum aloes_, and possibly the sweet gum called _belzoe_ may
+have been extracted from it, or from that which produces the oil of
+rhodium.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 95: Gum lac, long believed the gum of a tree, is now known to
+be the work of insects, serving as a nidus for their young, in the same
+manner as bees wax is used by the honey bee.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 96: Perhaps filagree work?--E.]
+
+This country has plenty of wood fit for the construction of ships. Those
+which they build are of a strange fashion, named _gunchos_ or junks,
+having three masts with two stems and two sterns, having _gouvernals_ or
+rudders on both. "When sailing on the ocean and having given their sails
+to the wind, if it be afterwards needful to have more sails, not
+changing the first they go backwards without turning the ship and using
+only one mast[97]." The natives are most expert swimmers, and have a
+wonderful contrivance for producing fire in an instant. Their houses are
+very low and built of stone, and instead of tiles or thatch they are
+covered by the hide of a fish called _tartaruca_! which is found in that
+part of the Indian sea, which is so huge a monster that one of their
+skins which I saw weighed 330 pounds. There are likewise serpents in
+this country much larger than those at Calicut.
+
+[Footnote 97: This account of the mode of navigation is inexplicable, or
+at least obscure. Perhaps it is meant to express that they do not tack,
+but sail with either end foremost as suits the change of wind or
+direction of the ship.--E.]
+
+At this place our Christian friends, meaning to prosecute their own
+affairs, proposed to take their leave of us, but my Persian companion
+spoke to them in this manner; "Though my friends I am not your
+countryman, yet being all brethren and the children of Adam, I take God
+to witness that I love you as if you were of my own blood, and children
+of the same parents, and considering how long we have kept company
+together in a loving manner, I cannot think of parting from you without
+much grief of mind: Besides, even if you would leave me, I hope you will
+not desert this my companion who is of the same faith with yourselves."
+Then the Christians asked how I, being a Persian, happened to be of the
+Christian faith? To which my companion answered that I was no Persian,
+but had been bought at Jerusalem. On hearing the holy name of Jerusalem
+pronounced, the Christians lifted up their hands and eyes to heaven, and
+prostrating themselves thrice kissed the ground; then rising up, they
+asked what age I was of when brought from Jerusalem. Being told that I
+was then fifteen years of age, they said I might well remember my
+country; to which my companion answered that I did so assuredly, and had
+often given him much pleasure by the things I had told him concerning
+it. Then the merchants said that although they had long desired to
+return into their own country, which was far from thence, they would
+still bear us company to those places to which we proposed going.
+Preparing ourselves therefore for a voyage, we took shipping and in
+fifteen days we came to the island of _Bandan_ or Banda, whence nutmegs
+and mace are procured.
+
+In this voyage to the isle of Banda, we passed about twenty islands,
+some of them inhabited and some desert. This island of Banda is very
+low, savage, and barren, being about 100 miles in circuit. It has
+neither king nor governor, but is inhabited by a savage and brutal
+people, who live without law, order, or government, dwelling in low huts
+scarcely rising above the ground, and having a scanty shirt for their
+whole clothing. Their complexion inclines towards white, and they are of
+low stature: They go bareheaded and barefooted, with their hair hanging
+down, having broad round foreheads. They are idolaters, and worse even
+than the _Poliars_ and _Hyrana_[98] of Calicut, being of dull
+apprehension, little strength, and altogether barbarous in their
+manners. The soil bears no fruits except nutmegs, which grow on a tree
+very much like the peach in its branches and leaves. Before the nut
+becomes ripe, the mace expands round like a red rose; but when the nut
+ripens the mace closes and embraces the nut, and both are gathered
+together, which the natives do without rule or order, catch who catch
+may, all things being there in common. The tree yields fruit of its own
+nature without grafting or pruning, and it is so common and plentiful
+that twenty-six pound weight is sold for three _souses_ or half a
+_carline_ of the money which is current at Calicut. These islanders have
+no other order of justice than the law of nature, and live therefore
+without lawsuits or any of those contentions proceeding from _thine and
+mine_.
+
+[Footnote 98: These are named on a former occasion _Nirani_.--E.]
+
+Having tarried three days in Banda, my companion asked the Christian
+merchants where was the region which produces cloves, and they told him
+that these were found in an island named _Monoch_ or Molucca, six days
+sail from Banda. We therefore resumed our voyage, and came there in
+seven days. This island[99] is very narrow, yet is longer than Banda,
+and the inhabitants are even more barbarous than those of Banda, for if
+it were not for the human shape, they differ in nothing from brutes.
+Their colour is whiter, owing to the air being colder. This island
+produces cloves, which likewise grow on several small and desolate
+islands on its coast. The body of the tree resembles the box-tree, and
+has leaves almost like the bay tree. When the cloves are ripe, the
+inhabitants beat them off the tree with long canes, having previously
+laid matts under the tree to receive them. The soil is sandy, and so low
+under the horizon that the north star cannot be seen[100]. The price of
+cloves is about double that formerly mentioned for nutmegs, but they are
+sold by measure, as the natives are entirely ignorant of the use of
+weights.
+
+[Footnote 99: Instead of one island, the Moluccas are a group of
+islands, the largest of which, Gilolo, is about 200 miles from N. to S.
+On its western side are several small islands, the most important of
+which for the produce of cloves are Ternate and Tidore. Gilolo was
+probably the island visited by Verthema.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 100: A strange mode of expressing that Gilolo is immediately
+under the line.--E]
+
+As we were conversing together respecting our voyages, the Christian
+merchants addressed me as follows: "Dearly beloved friend, as by the
+grace of God we are come thus far in safety, we will, if it so please
+you go to visit one of the finest islands in the world, and so rich as
+we believe you have never seen. But we must go in the first place to
+another island named _Borneo_, where we shall procure a larger vessel,
+as we have to cross a deep and rough sea." My companion then desired
+them to do as they thought proper. Therefore hiring a larger foist, we
+directed our voyage to that island, sailing to the southward both by day
+and night, and passing our time in much pleasant conversation. The
+merchants, among other things, asked me many questions respecting the
+ceremonies and solemnities of the Christian religion as used among us in
+Europe. And when I made mention of the _Veronica_ or _Vernacle_ of the
+face of Christ[101], and of the heads of St Peter and St Paul, the
+chiefest of the apostles, they told me secretly that if I would go with
+them, I should become a great man in their country by my knowledge of
+these divine things. But being deterred by the length of the journey,
+and fearful that I might never be able to get home, I refused to
+accompany them. At length we came to Borneo, which is 200 miles from
+Molucca and is somewhat bigger[102] and as low under the horizon. The
+inhabitant are idolaters of a sharp wit and decent manner of life. Their
+complexion inclines towards fair. They do not all dress alike, as some
+wear cotton shirts, while others have camblet mantles, and others wear
+pointed caps of a red colour. They are under regular government and
+submit to laws, which are righteously administered. This island yields
+great quantities of _camphor_, which I was told was the gum of a tree;
+but I dare not affirm this for fact, as I have never seen the way in
+which it is procured.
+
+[Footnote 101: The Veronica among the Catholics, is the handkerchief
+with which our Saviour is supposed to have wiped his face during his
+passion, which they allege took from his bloody sweat a miraculous
+impression or portrait of his countenance.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 102: Instead of being only _somewhat_ larger than Gilolo,
+Borneo is perhaps the largest island in the world, except New Holland,
+being about 880 English miles in its greatest diameter from S.W. to N.E.
+and 550 in the opposite direction at the widest.--E.]
+
+At Borneo my companion hired a light bark for 100 pieces of gold, and
+having laid in provisions for the voyage, we directed our course for the
+great island of _Gyava_, or Java, to which we came in five days, sailing
+towards the south. Our pilot used the mariners compass with loadstone,
+and the sea chart as ours do. Observing that the north star could not be
+seen, my companion asked the Christian merchants in what manner they
+guided their course in those seas. To this the pilot made answer, that
+in navigating these southern seas, they were particularly guided by five
+stars, and one other particular star which was directly opposite thee
+north star, and that they also used the loadstone, which always points
+to the north. He said moreover, that beyond the island of Java there was
+a certain people who were antipodes to them of European Sarmatia,
+inhabiting a cold climate, and as near to the antarctic pole as Sarmatia
+is to the arctic, as was evident by the shortness of their day, which
+was only four hours long in winter[103], in which conversation we took
+much delight.
+
+[Footnote 103: This pilot must have been acquainted with the southern
+extremity of South America, or must have built this information on
+hypothesis, as there is no known inhabited land of this description to
+the South of Java--E.]
+
+Proceeding on our voyage for five days, we came to the great island of
+Java, in which there are many kingdoms and peoples, all idolaters, but
+of sundry manners and customs. Some worship the sun, others the moon,
+some consider cows as their gods, while others worship all day whatever
+they first meet in the morning. This island produces silk, which grows
+spontaneously in the woods, and has the finest emeralds in the world, as
+also great plenty of gold and copper. The soil is as productive of corn
+and fruits as that of Calicut, and has an abundance of flesh. The
+inhabitants are an honest and fair-dealing people, much of the same
+stature and colour with Europeans, but with larger foreheads, very large
+eyes of a brazil or red colour, with flat noses, and wear their hair
+long. It has a great number of birds different from ours, except
+peacocks, turtle-doves, and crows, which are the same as we have. In
+their dress, the natives wear mantles or cloaks of cotton, silk, or
+camblet, always having one arm bare. They have no defensive armour, as
+they are hardly ever at war; but when they go to sea they use bows and
+arrows, and likewise poisoned arrows made of reeds, which they blow from
+long hollow canes, and the poison with which these arrows are infected
+is so virulent that death certainly follows from the slightest wound.
+They have no kind of fire-arms. They eat all kinds of flesh, fish, or
+fruit, as they please or can procure.
+
+Some of the natives of this island are so very barbarous, that when
+their parents become feeble from age, so as to be useless to themselves
+and others, they bring them into the public market and sell them to the
+cannibals who eat human flesh, who immediately upon buying them, kill
+and eat them. Likewise when any young person falls into disease of which
+they do not expect he shall recover, his kinsmen sell him in the same
+manner to the cannibals. When my companion expressed his horror at this
+barbarous and savage practice, a certain native merchant observed, "That
+no sacrifice could redeem the sins of the Persians, who gave the flesh
+of their dead to be eaten by the worms." Abhorring these savage manners,
+we returned to our ship not willing to tarry longer in that island.
+While we were there, the Christian merchants, who were ever desirous to
+shew us strange things which we might relate at our return to our own
+country, made us remark that the sun at noon-day was to the north of us,
+which as they said is always the case in the month of July. I must
+acknowledge however, that I hardly remember these things distinctly, as
+I had then almost forgot the names of our months. At this island my
+companion bought two fine emeralds for 1000 pieces of gold, and
+likewise two children who were eunuchs, for two hundred pieces, as there
+are in that country certain merchants who deal solely in these young
+eunuchs.
+
+After remaining fifteen days in Java, being weary of the barbarous
+manners of the inhabitants, and of the coldness of the country at that
+season of the year, we determined to prosecute our voyage back to India,
+as there were no other regions in these eastern parts worth seeing.
+Wherefore, hiring a light bark, we departed from thence, and having
+sailed fifteen days to the north-west, we came to the city of Malacca,
+where we remained three days. At this place we took our leave of the
+Christian merchants, with sorrowful minds and many friendly embraces. Of
+this separation I was sore grieved, and had I been a single man without
+wife and children[104], I certainly would never have separated from such
+dear friends. Leaving them therefore at Malacca, they remained at that
+place, whence they said they meant shortly to return to the city of
+_Sana_[105]. My Persian companion and I went on board a foist, in which
+we returned to Coromandel. While on this voyage the pilot informed us
+that there were about seven thousand small islands in the eastern sea,
+beyond Sumatra and Java. While at Malacca my companion bought as much
+spices, perfumes of various kinds, and silk, as cost him 5000 pieces of
+gold. We were fifteen days on our voyage to Coromandel, and remained
+there twenty days. Hiring another foist we sailed thence to the city of
+Coulan, where we found twenty-two Portuguese Christians. Fearing they
+might seize me as a spy, I began to contrive how I might make my escape
+from thence; but as there were many Mahometans there who knew that I had
+been on the pilgrimage to Mecca, I changed my purpose, and we soon
+afterwards went to Calicut by way of the river, which took us twelve
+days.
+
+[Footnote 104: This oblique insinuation of having a wife and children,
+is rather contradictory to several circumstances in the early part of
+the itinerary of Verthema.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 105: This is probably a mistake for _Sarnau_, whence the
+Christians are said to have come.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Continuation of the Author's Adventures, after his Return to Calicut._
+
+
+After so many long and dangerous voyages and peregrinations, in which we
+had partly satisfied our desire of travel, and were partly wearied by
+the many inconveniencies we had undergone, we began to consider of the
+best means for returning to our native country. I will therefore briefly
+relate what happened to me by the way, that other men, taking example by
+my travels, may know better how to conduct themselves in like
+situations, if similar inclinations should move them to undertake such
+voyages. In Calicut we found two Christians of Milan in Italy, who had
+come to India with licence from the king of Portugal, on purpose to buy
+precious stones. The names of these men were John Maria and Peter
+Anthony. I was more rejoiced at the sight of these men than I can
+express, and knowing them to be Christians by their fair complexions,
+though they could not know me as I was naked like the natives, I
+immediately spoke to them, informing them that I also was a Christian,
+and their countryman. Then, taking me kindly by the hand, they brought
+me to their house, where, for joy of this unexpected meeting, we could
+scarcely satisfy ourselves with tears, embraces, and kisses, for it
+seemed a strange thing to me thus to find men who spoke my own language,
+and even to speak it myself. They told me that they were in great favour
+with the king of Calicut, yet anxiously wished to get hack to their
+native country, but knew not how, as they had fled from the Portuguese,
+and durst not run the risk of falling into their hands, having made many
+pieces of great cannon and other ordnance for the king of Calicut, and
+that now the Portuguese fleet would shortly be there. When I proposed to
+endeavour to go to Cananore, and solicit their pardon from the
+Portuguese admiral, they said that could not be looked for, as they were
+well known to many of the kings and princes between Calicut and
+Cananore, who were friendly to the Portuguese, and who would certainly
+intercept them, as they had made above 400 guns, great and small, and
+could never hope for pardon. By this I could perceive how fearful a
+thing it is to have an evil conscience, and called to remembrance the
+saying of the poet:--
+
+"Multa male timeo, qui feci multa proterve."
+
+That is to say, "I fear much evil because I have done much." These men
+had not only made many pieces of artillery for the infidels, to the
+great injury of the Christians, in contempt of Christ and his holy
+religion, but had also taught the idolaters both how to make and use
+them. While I remained in Calicut, I saw them give a mould to the
+idolaters, by which they might cast brass cannon of sufficient bigness
+to receive a charge of 105 _cantaros_ or measures of powder. At this
+time also there was a Jew in Calicut who had built a handsome
+brigantine, in which were four large iron cannons; but Providence soon
+after gave him his due reward, as he was drowned while bathing in the
+river. To return to the two Italians: God knows how earnestly I
+endeavoured to persuade them never to make any more guns or artillery
+for the infidels, in contempt of God, and to the great detriment of our
+most holy faith. At my words, tears fell from the eyes of Peter Anthony;
+but John Maria, who perhaps was not so anxious to return home, said it
+was all one to him whether he died in India or Italy, and that God only
+knew what was decreed for him. Within two days after I returned to my
+companion, who had wondered what was become of me, fearing that I was
+either sick, or had died, or run away. I told him that I had been all
+night in the temple, that he might not suspect my great intimacy with
+the Christians.
+
+While I remained in the lodging of my companion, there came to him two
+Persian merchants from the city of Cananore, saying that they had bad
+news to tell him, as there had arrived twelve Portuguese ships, which
+they had actually seen. Then asked he what manner of men were these
+Portuguese? To this the Persians answered, that they were Christians,
+armed in cuirasses of bright iron, and had built an impregnable fortress
+at Cananore. Then turning to me, my companion asked what kind of people
+these were. To this I answered, that they were a nation of wicked
+people, entirely given up to robbery and piracy on the seas: And I can
+truly say, that he was not so sorry for these news as I was rejoiced at
+their arrival. After the rumour spread of the arrival of the Portuguese,
+I began to be in fear for myself, and to consider what was best to be
+done to ensure my safety; and considering that nothing could be easier
+among these ignorant people than to gain a reputation of holiness by
+hypocrisy, I used to lurk about the temple all day without meat, as all
+the people thought, but in the night I had my fill in the house of the
+two Milanese. By this device, every one took me for a saint or holy
+person, so that in a few days I could go about all the city without
+being suspected. To help me in this assumed character, a rich Mahometan
+merchant of Calicut happened to fall sick, having his belly so
+constipated that he could get no ease; and as he was a friend of my
+Persian companion, and the disease daily increased, he at last asked me
+if I had any skill in physic. To this I answered, that my father was a
+physician, and that I had learnt many things from him. He then took me
+along with him to see his friend the sick merchant, and being told that
+he was very sick at the head and stomach, and sore constipated, and
+having before learnt that he was a great eater and drinker, I felt his
+pulse, and said that he was filled with choler or black bile, owing to
+surfeiting, and that it was necessary he should have a glyster. Then I
+made a glyster of eggs, salt, and sugar, together with butter and such
+herbs as I could think of upon a sudden; and in the space of a day and a
+night I gave him five such glysters, but all in vain, for his pains and
+sickness increased, and I began to repent me of my enterprise. But it
+was now necessary to put a good face on the matter, and to attempt some
+other way, yet my last error seemed worse than ever. Endeavouring to
+inspire him with confidence, I made him lie grovelling on his belly,
+and, by cords tied to his feet, I raised up the hinder part of his body,
+so that he rested only on his breast and hands; and in this posture I
+administered to him another glyster, allowing him to remain in that
+position for half an hour. On beholding this strange mode of practice,
+my Persian friend asked me, if that was the manner of treating sick
+people in my country, to which I answered that it was, but only in cases
+of extremity; on which he observed with a smile, that he believed it
+would certainly relieve him one way or other. In the mean time, the sick
+man cried out in his own language, "It is enough, it is enough, for my
+soul now departeth." We comforted him as well as we could, desiring him
+to have patience yet a little longer; and almost immediately his belly
+was loosened, and he voided like a gutter. We then let him down, and he
+continued to discharge a prodigious quantity, so that shortly the pain
+of his head and stomach left him, and his fever was assuaged, which gave
+us all great joy. By this adventurous cure, and my counterfeit
+holiness, I grew into great credit, and when my patient offered me ten
+pieces of gold as my reward, I would only accept two, which I gave away
+immediately among the poor.
+
+These silly people believed implicitly in my hypocrisy, which I shewed
+in a constrained gravity of countenance and deportment, and by
+forbearing openly from eating flesh, insomuch that all thought
+themselves happy to have me at their houses, or to kiss my hands and
+feet. The report also of my companion, that he had met with me first at
+Mecca, where I had gone to see the body of the holy prophet Mahomet,
+greatly increased among the Mahometans the opinion of my sanctity. But
+all this while, I used to resort secretly in the night to the house of
+the Milanese Christians; and learning from them that the twelve
+Portuguese ships were arrived at Cananore, I thought that it was now a
+favourable opportunity for me to escape. I remained, however, for seven
+days more, learning every thing I could respecting the preparations that
+were making by the king of Calicut and his people against the
+Portuguese, in regard to their army, artillery, and every thing relative
+to the war. But, before I speak of the manner of my departure, it may be
+proper to say something of the religious practices of the Mahometans.
+
+For calling the people to the mosque, their priests and other ministers,
+of whom there are a great number, ascend to the highest tower of the
+temple, where they sound three or four brass trumpets instead of bells,
+and then call to the people in a loud voice to come to prayers. Then
+stopping one ear with their finger, they call out in their own language,
+_Alla u eccubar, etc._ That is to say, "God is great! God is great! Come
+to the temple of the great God! Come pray to the great God! God is
+great! God is great! God was! God is! Mahomet, the messenger of God,
+shall arise!" They even invited me to the mosque, and desired me to pray
+to God for the Mahometans; and this I did outwardly, but with quite a
+different meaning from them. They have certain daily and stated prayers
+as we have, in which they call upon God as their father, and they even
+vouchsafe to name the blessed Virgin Mary; but they always wash before
+prayers. Standing all in order, after the priest has prayed, the whole
+people pray in their own language.
+
+At this time I feigned myself sick, and finding some occasion or pretext
+for going to Cananore, I advertised my companion thereof, who gave me
+his consent, saying that he would shortly follow me to that place, and
+in the meantime gave me letters recommending me to a friend and
+countryman of his, a rich merchant at that place, desiring him to give
+me kind entertainment for his sake. The day before my departure, I made
+the before-mentioned Milanese Christians privy to my intentions, and my
+companion made me join company with two other Persian merchants who were
+going to Cananore, as there were then in Calicut many merchants of
+Persia, Syria, and Turkey. Therefore, on the 1st of December, having
+hired a light bark, I and my two companions set sail; but had hardly got
+from shore an arrow-flight, when four of the _nairs_ of the king's guard
+called to the pilot of our vessel, and ordered him, in the king's name,
+to come to land. When the nairs understood who we were, they asked the
+Persians why they carried me along with them, without licence from the
+king? Then the Persians said, that this was a holy man, who meant to
+accompany them to Cananore. The nairs answered, that they knew I was a
+person who had wrought miracles; but as I could speak the language of
+the Portuguese, it was to be feared that I might betray their secrets to
+the enemy, and give them notice of the navy and army which had been
+prepared at Calicut against them, and therefore they strictly enjoined
+the pilot to carry us no farther. He accordingly obeyed their orders,
+and left us on the shore. It was then proposed by one of the Persians
+that we should return to Calicut, on which I advised him to take heed
+how he did so, as he would be in danger of losing all his silks, if it
+should be discovered that he had not paid the king's custom. Then he
+asked my advice as to what I thought was best for us to do in the
+present exigency, and I advised that we should travel along the shore,
+in hopes of finding some other bark for our purpose. They agreed to this
+proposal, and we accordingly travelled twelve miles along the shore, our
+slaves carrying our baggage; and I leave any judicious person to
+conceive the terror I was in, during this time, of being stopt by the
+servants of the king of Calicut. At length, by good providence, we found
+a poor fisherman, who agreed to carry us in his boat to Cananore, where
+we arrived in safety late at night. We went immediately to wait upon the
+Persian merchant, to whom I had letters of recommendation from my
+companion. Their tenor was as follows: That he should receive me into
+his house, and entertain me in a friendly manner, till his own arrival,
+and that whatever friendship was shewn me should be considered as done
+to himself, as I was a holy man, and united with him in the strictest
+friendship. Immediately on reading this letter, the merchant laid his
+hand on his head, and bid me welcome, swearing by his head that I was in
+safety, and caused a good supper to be set before us. After supper, the
+Persians and I took a walk by the sea side, and we soon came to where
+the Portuguese ships were lying at anchor. I am utterly unable to
+express the joy I felt on seeing these ships, but which I took care
+should not be observed by my companions. In our walk, I observed where
+the Portuguese had built their fortress, and determined within myself to
+go there as soon as possible.
+
+Next day, finding a fit opportunity, I went towards the Portuguese
+fortress, which is not above four furlongs from the city of Cananore,
+and chanced to meet two Portuguese by the way, at whom I inquired in
+Spanish if that were the fortress of the Portuguese. They asked if I
+were a Christian? and having answered that I was, they demanded to know
+whence I came? I told them that I was from Calicut, on which they said
+they would immediately shew me the way to their governor, whose name was
+Lorenzo[106], son to the viceroy. They accordingly brought me before
+him, and when I was come into his presence, I fell down on my knees, and
+entreated him in all humility, for the sake of Christ, to whom I was
+consecrated in baptism, that he would have compassion upon me, and
+deliver me out of the hands of these infidel dogs. When it was noised
+about in the city that I had escaped to the Christians, there began a
+stir and mutiny among the people, upon which the governor commanded his
+officers and men to put their artillery and all things in readiness,
+lest the people in their sudden rage should make any attempt against the
+fortress; but every thing was speedily pacified. After this, the
+governor took me by the hand into a hall or room by ourselves, and
+demanded to know what the king and people of Calicut were preparing to
+do against the Christians. I informed him of all things as far as I
+knew, having diligently inquired into all their preparations and
+designs. When I had thus informed the governor of all I knew, he
+appointed a galley commanded by one Joam Serano to carry me to the
+viceroy, who was then at Cochin.
+
+[Footnote 106: Don Francisco de Almeyda was viceroy of Portuguese India
+from 1507 to 1510, both inclusive, and his son Lorenzo made a
+conspicuous figure on several occasions under his father. It is true
+that Verthema appears in the present journal to have returned from India
+to Europe in the end of 1506 or beginning of 1507; but the dates of the
+present journal are exceedingly few and vague, and the incidents which
+it relates could hardly have occurred in so short a period as between
+the commencement of 1503 and close of 1506.--E.]
+
+The viceroy received me very favourably, and then I gave him an account
+of all the warlike preparations at Calicut. After this I humbly implored
+pardon for the two Italians, Peter Anthony and John Maria, who had made
+artillery for the infidel princes, declaring that they were desirous to
+return to the Christians, and would do them good service, for that all
+they had hitherto done at Calicut was by constraint, and that all they
+asked was a safe conduct and money to defray their charges. The viceroy
+listened to my petition, and three days afterwards he sent me back to
+Cananore with letters to his son, commanding him to deliver me as much
+money as might suffice for the Christian spies at Calicut. At Cananore,
+I procured an idolater, who from poverty had been forced to pawn his
+wife and children, and engaged him to carry a letter from me to the two
+Milanese at Calicut, informing them that the viceroy had granted their
+pardon and safe conduct, with money for their charges. I desired them to
+make no one privy to their intended departure, and particularly not to
+let it be known to their slaves or concubines, each of them having a
+concubine, a child, and a slave, and to leave all their goods behind,
+except things of great value, such as gold coin and precious stones.
+They had a very fine diamond of 32 carats, reckoned to be worth 35,000
+crowns; a pearl of 24 carats; 2000 rubies, some of which weighed one
+carat, and others a carat and half; upwards of 60 bracelets, garnished
+with many fine jewels; and about 1500 pieces of gold coin. But in
+consequence of their covetousness, while they sought to save all they
+lost all, and their lives to boot; for, not content with carrying off
+all these riches, they would needs carry along with them, in spite of
+the advice I sent, four guns, three monkeys, two musquets, and two of
+those wheels on which precious stones are polished. The attempt to carry
+off these bulky articles was the cause of their destruction, as one of
+their slaves gave notice to the zamorin or king of Calicut of what was
+going on. The zamorin would not at first believe the information,
+having conceived a good opinion of their fidelity, yet sent four of his
+nairs to examine into the truth of the information. But the slave,
+perceiving that the zamorin seemed inclined to deal favourably with
+them, went to the cady or chief priest of the Mahometans, and told him
+all that he had said to the zamorin, adding that the two Christians had
+disclosed all their secrets to the Portuguese. The eddy immediately
+convened a council of all the Mahometan merchants, willing them to give
+an hundred pieces of gold to the _king of Gioghi_[107], who was then at
+Calicut, and to speak to him in the following terms: "It is not unknown
+to you, most noble prince, that when your majesty came to this place
+some years ago, we received you in a more honourable manner than we are
+now enabled to do. The change in our behaviour is not owing to any want
+of good will towards you, but is occasioned by the great and manifold
+injuries which we have sustained, and are daily suffering from our
+mortal enemies the Christians. We have at the present moment a notable
+example of this in two Christian traitors now residing in this city, who
+have disclosed all our secrets to the Portuguese; and therefore we most
+humbly petition that you would be pleased to accept from us an hundred
+pieces of gold, and to issue your commands that these traitorous
+Christians shall be slain."
+
+[Footnote 107: This king of _Gioghi_ was probably the chief bramin in
+the southern part of India, a species of patriarch or pope of the
+braminical idolatry, similar to the king of _Joga_, formerly mentioned,
+in Guzerat, in these travels of Verthema. In a future part of our
+collection we shall have a more favourable opportunity of explaining the
+hierarchy of the Hindoos.--E.]
+
+When this oration was repeated to the _king of Gioghi_, he immediately
+accepted the gift, and consented to the prayer of the petition, and
+appointed two hundred of his followers to put the Milanese to death.
+These men, that they might not be suspected by the devoted Christians,
+came in small bodies to their house, only ten at a time, as if to demand
+their customary reward. But on seeing so great a number of men assembled
+about their house, the Christians began to suspect that they were in
+search of something beyond their usual reward or offering, wherefore
+taking to their arms, they so bravely defended themselves, that they
+slew six of the assailants and wounded forty: But at length some of the
+_Gioghi_ or Jogues, shot them both with arrows from cross-bows, one
+being sore wounded in the head and the other in the body; and as soon as
+they saw them fall, they broke into the house and cut their throats.
+Then taking the warm blood into the palms of their hands, they drank it
+up, using the most contumelious expressions against the Christians.
+After this murder, the concubine of John Maria came to Cananore with her
+young son, whom I bought of her for eight pieces of gold, and had him
+baptized by the name of Lorenzo, as he was christened on the festival of
+St Laurence. But he died within a year afterwards of the lues venerea,
+which disease has been spread over almost the whole world, as I have
+seen many infected with it 400 miles beyond Calicut. It is there called
+_pua_, and they affirm that it was not seen there till about seventeen
+years before; yet it is there more grievous and destructive than with us
+in Italy.
+
+
+SECTION XI.
+
+_Account of a memorable Battle between the Mahometan Navy of Calicut and
+the Portuguese_.
+
+
+On the 4th of March 1506, intelligence was received at Cananore of the
+death of the two Milanese Christians at Calicut, and on the same day the
+Calicut fleet set sail from the cities of _Pavan? Capagot? Pandaram_?
+and _Trompatam_? It consisted of 208 vessels [108], of which 84 were
+ships of considerable size and burden, and the rest were rowing vessels
+which are called _paraos_. This great fleet was manned with a prodigious
+number of Mahometans richly dressed in purple silk and cotton, also with
+high pointed caps after their fashion of the same colour, lined with
+silk, having their arms decked with many bracelets, and embroidered
+gloves on their hands. For weapons, they had Turkish bows, swords,
+lances, _peltes_[109], and all kind of guns made in our manner. When we
+saw their fleet proceeding in order and well appointed, it seemed afar
+off like a great wood, so numerous were the masts, yet were we in sure
+belief that God would give us the victory over the blasphemers of his
+holy name, and that we should prevail against the idolaters and
+Saracens, the ancient enemies of the religion of the blessed Jesus.
+Therefore the valiant knight our governor, Don Lorenzo, the son of Don
+Francisco de Almeyda, viceroy of India, who had the supreme command of
+twelve Portuguese ships, with the assistance of the admiral, assembled
+all the Portuguese soldiers and mariners by sound of trumpet, and spoke
+to them after this manner: "Dear friends, and brethren in one God and in
+one faith in the Lord Jesus Christ, it is now time for us to consider
+that our Lord spared not to give his precious body unto death for our
+sakes; wherefore it is our bounden duty to spend our lives in defence of
+his glory and of our holy faith, assuring ourselves of victory over
+these infidel dogs, who are hated of God, being the progeny of the
+devil. Now, therefore, fighting in his holy name and under the banner of
+his cross, shew yourselves valiant, as you have now a fair opportunity
+to gain eternal fame in defending the glorious cause of your Lord and
+Saviour. Therefore, along with me, raising our hearts to God, and our
+arms with force and courage against the enemy, in the name of the Lord,
+let us manfully give the onset." When Don Lorenzo had spoken these
+words, the priest went up to the highest part of the ship, holding in
+his hands the picture of Christ nailed to the cross, which he exposed to
+the view of all the soldiers, and earnestly exhorted them to remember
+the commands of God, and the holy faith in which they were consecrated
+by baptism, having no doubt that all their sins should be forgiven to
+those who fell in the cause of God. Then blessing them in the name of
+the Lord, he pronounced the absolution and forgivenness of their sins.
+This exhortation of the priest so moved all our hearts, that tears of
+joy ran from our eyes, and we were all animated with a desire of dying
+in the holy cause.
+
+[Footnote 108: According to the account of this great armament formerly
+given in the History of the Portuguese Transactions in India, the fleet
+of the Mahometans and Zamorin on this occasion consisted of 260 paraos,
+60 of which exceeded the size of the armed ships then used in India by
+the Portuguese. The action between the Portuguese and their enemies is
+there stated to have been in 1508.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 109: Perhaps cross-bows, or it may probably signify leathern
+targets, or shields made of _pelts_ or skins.--E.]
+
+In the mean time the Mahometan fleet made sail towards us, and on the
+same day our admiral went to reconnoitre their fleet with two foists,
+and passing between two of their largest ships discharged his ordnance
+on both sides, on purpose to try the strength of those ships in which
+they placed the greatest confidence. But nothing of any importance
+occurred this day. Next day the enemy made sail towards Cananore, and
+sent a message to our commanders, saying, that if they were permitted to
+pursue their voyage they would not attack us. To this it was answered,
+that the Christians had not forgotten the perjury and violated faith of
+the Mahometans, when they prevented the Christians from passing that way
+on a former occasion, and had slain 47 Portuguese, and robbed them of
+4000 pieces of gold: Wherefore, they might proceed at their peril, and
+should learn of what spirit and reputation in arms the Christians were
+composed. Then said the Mahometans, "Mahomet will defend us and confound
+the Christians." Then with great fury they assaulted us all at once,
+thinking to have forced their way through our fleet, as they were only
+10 miles from Cananore. Our admiral intentionally allowed them to draw
+near until they were right over-against Cananore, when he intended to
+set upon them with all his force, that the rajah or king of Cananore
+might be a witness of the valour of the Christians. When the trumpeter
+of the admiral sounded the charge as a signal of battle, the admiral
+immediately assaulted two of the largest ships of the enemy, casting his
+grappling irons and chains, that he might fight them hand to hand. After
+throwing our grapplings three times in vain, they caught hold the fourth
+time, on which the Christians boarded the greatest ship, and made such
+havoc that the whole crew of 600 Mahometans were slain, not one escaping
+or being made prisoner. Encouraged by this success, the admiral
+immediately grappled another large ship which had chained itself to one
+of the Christian foists; this ship was likewise taken and sunk, with the
+loss of 500 Mahometans. Discouraged by this defeat, the Mahometans
+assailed our twelve foists with all their force, _and carried them
+away_. On this emergency the captain of the galley, Joam Serano, shewed
+the utmost gallantry, as he fiercely assaulted in his single galley
+those ships of the enemy which had _carried away_ our foists, and made
+such prodigious slaughter among the Mahometans as seemed quite
+incredible, so that he recovered all the foists, and sunk two other
+Mahometan ships. The conflict continued with unabated fury from morning
+till the darkness of the night parted the combatants, and God so
+favoured the Christians that few of them were slain, though many were
+wounded.
+
+I must not omit to notice the zeal and courage displayed by Simon
+Martin, the captain of one of our ships, on the following occasion in
+this battle. It so happened that the brigantine in which I was, was at
+one time somewhat parted from the rest of our ships, on which four ships
+of the enemy assailed us all at once; and 150 of the Mahometans having
+boarded our vessel, constrained us to flee to the poop for safety. While
+we were in this extreme danger, Simon Martin leapt on board our vessel,
+invoking the name of Jesus to aid him, and fought with such desperate
+valour that he slew six of the enemy with his own bond. Encouraged by
+his gallantry, we came down from the poop to his assistance, and so
+handled the Mahometans that they leapt overboard for safety, when some
+of them were drowned and others escaped by swimming. Upon this our
+success, the enemy sent down four other foists to help those who were
+already engaged against us. But our captain took several empty casks in
+which gunpowder had been kept before, and placed them in such a manner
+on the side of our brigantine, that they seemed like large pieces of
+artillery, standing beside them with a _fire-stick_ or lighted match, as
+if about to discharge them. This device put the enemy in such fear that
+they departed from us.
+
+Our admiral continued to pursue the enemy, and gave them another great
+overthrow, taking seven of their foists laden with various kinds of
+merchandise, and sank ten others by the shot of his artillery, one of
+which was laden with elephants. Hie enemy, seeing the ocean almost
+covered with the bodies of their slain, their principal ships taken,
+sunk, or much injured, and having lost all hope of victory, endeavoured
+to save themselves by flight. But the Portuguese determined to follow up
+their success, and again brought them to battle, which continued a whole
+day and night, to the utter discomfiture of the Mahometans, most of
+whose vessels were sunk. At this time some of our foists saw a large
+ship belonging to the enemy at some distance, and made sail towards her;
+but as the enemy saw themselves overmatched, they hurled all their
+carriages into the sea [110], after which they leapt overboard
+themselves, in hopes to swim on shore, as they are most expert swimmers.
+But our men followed them even to the shore with lances, cross-bows,
+and stones, killing them while swimming, so that the sea was coloured
+with their blood. Yet about 200 of them escaped on shore, after swimming
+about 20 miles. These Mahometans are all exceedingly expert swimmers,
+being accustomed to it from their early youth; and while we pursued
+them, they often dived and remained so long under water, that we thought
+they had sunk outright, and when they came up again and floated on the
+water, we thought we had been deceived by phantoms. They were however
+mostly all destroyed afterwards by one mischance or another, so that on
+this occasion the enemy lost a prodigious number of men. After the
+battle and pursuit ceased, our admiral sent some boats on shore in
+sundry places to number the dead bodies, which had been cast up by the
+sea, when about 3000 were found, besides many that had been carried away
+by the sea.
+
+[Footnote 110: Perhaps they threw their guns overboard to lighten their
+vessel and facilitate their escape.--E.]
+
+The king of Cananore beheld this great victory from the shore, and gave
+great commendations to the Portuguese for their valour, and very
+deservedly; for, though I have been in many hard-fought battles, I never
+saw greater valour than was displayed on this occasion by the
+Portuguese. After this great victory, we thought to have enjoyed peace
+and security, but worse events ensued; for the king of Cananore, who was
+a great friend to the Portuguese, died a few days afterwards, and was
+succeeded by a mortal enemy to the Christians, and a great friend to the
+zamorin, by whole interest he had been advanced to the kingdom of
+Cananore. This new king assembled his forces to make war against the
+Portuguese in all haste, believing that much of their ammunition had
+been expended in the late naval battle, and that their men were much
+wearied, and for the most part wounded, so that they would be unable to
+make any great resistance. To aid him on this occasion, the zamorin sent
+him 24 pieces of great cannon. This war began on the 7th of April, and
+continued to the 20th of August [111], before peace was restored. It
+were too long to recount all the brave actions performed by the
+Christians in this war against the Mahometans [112], who never
+encountered them with less than twenty-five or twenty-six thousand men
+and 140 pieces of artillery. The enemy on this occasion were armed in
+the manner already mentioned respecting the weapons of the inhabitants
+of Calicut, and the Christians in the harness and with the weapons then
+used by us in Europe[113].
+
+[Footnote 111: From the context, combined with the date of the late
+naval action, as given from the History of the Portuguese Transactions,
+this land-war with the rajah of Cananore must have been in 1509.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 112: In the naval battle the principal force at least must
+have been Mahometans, as the Hindoos do not use the sea; but, in this
+land-war with the new rajah of Cananore, the nairs would constitute the
+main force of the enemy, though there might be some Mahometan
+auxiliaries.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 113: The European soldiers then wore defensive armour and
+shields. And besides matchlocks, their offensive arms were pikes,
+swords, and cross-bows.--E.]
+
+In their wars, the infidels divide their army into many _wings_, or
+brigades, of two or three thousand men each, only one of which proceeds
+to battle at a time, all the rest waiting the result of this charge
+before they proceed to join battle. While marching to give battle, it
+passes all imagination to conceive the prodigious noise made by
+innumerable musical instruments after their fashion, which fill the ears
+of their soldiers and encourage them to fight; while in the mean time a
+great number of men run before with artificial fireworks[114]. At last
+they give the onset with such fury and outcry, that two or three
+thousand of them are often able to put to flight 10,000 men who are
+unused to this mode of warfare. But God in his merciful providence never
+forsakes those who believe in his holy religion, as was now exemplified
+in our distress. For, while the Portuguese were in a manner overwhelmed
+with the multitude of their enemies, the joyful news arrived that a new
+fleet had come from Portugal to Cananore, under the valiant knight Don
+Tristan de Cunna, who was immediately informed of the straits to which
+we were reduced. He immediately sent us a reinforcement of 300 valiant
+soldiers, well provided with defensive armour, and weapons of offence,
+after the manner of the Christians. On the arrival of these succours, we
+were so encouraged that we would have burnt the city of Cananore, if our
+admiral had permitted us. But on learning the arrival of this
+reinforcement, the enemy were so cast down that they sought to make
+peace with us by every means they could think of, and appointed one
+_Mamalmaricar_, a man of great riches and wisdom, to be their
+ambassador, with full powers to conclude peace. This man accordingly
+waited on our admiral, who told him that he could not make peace without
+the authority of the viceroy, who was then at Cochin: Yet it was thought
+best not to reject the proffered peace, as, during war, the Portuguese
+could not send home their ships with the commodities of India, and for
+this reason the viceroy agreed to the conclusion of peace.
+
+[Footnote 114: Probably alluding to a kind of javelins armed with a
+species of rockets, which have long been used in the wars of India, and
+often produce great disorder among the crowded masses of their
+ill-disciplined troops.--E.]
+
+To mingle some pleasure with these tragedies, I shall now rehearse a
+pleasant story, worthy of being remembered. One day after the peace was
+settled, I happened to walk in the city of Cananore with some merchant
+idolaters, with whom I was acquainted before the war. They asked me to
+show them a certain Christian, much taller and stronger than any of the
+others, who used every day to slay about twenty of the Mahometans, and
+who at one time, when assailed by fifty of the nairs, escaped unhurt. At
+first I answered, that this valiant Christian had gone to Cochin to the
+viceroy: But after some farther consideration, I told them that this
+soldier was the God of the Portuguese, the great God who had created the
+world. Then answered they, that the Mahometans had said as much to them
+already, and therefore they were inclined to believe that the God of the
+Christians was better and more powerful than theirs. Thus it came to be
+rumoured all over the country that the Portuguese had overcome more by
+the assistance of God, than by the strength of man. These people are
+wonderfully simple and ignorant, and are easily astonished at very
+trifling matters; for when they saw one of our company ring a small
+hand-bell, and that it ceased to make a noise when set down, they took
+it for a miracle, saying one to another, "Doubtless the God of these men
+is greater than ours, for when they touch that little instrument it
+speaks, and when they touch it not it is silent." They took much delight
+in seeing the celebration of mass; and when the priest lifted up the
+holy bread, or host, I said unto them, "Behold the God of the Christians
+and of all the world." To which they answered, "You say truly, but we
+see him not." I repeat this that it may be seen how ignorant these
+people are. Yet are they great sorcerers, and can enchant the most
+venomous serpents, so as to do no harm, though their venom is so
+powerful as to kill only by touching. They are likewise of wonderful
+agility, and are astonishingly expert in vaulting, running, leaping,
+swimming, tumbling, walking on ropes, and such other feats of activity.
+
+
+SECTION XII.
+
+_Navigation of the Author to Ethiopia, and return to Europe by Sea._
+
+
+Those who engage to write any history, ought to keep in mind what they
+have promised, lest after all their pains and trouble they only reap
+shame and reproach. Wherefore, having in the beginning of this
+performance engaged to write concerning the navigation of Ethiopia, I
+shall now make an end of my long travels and peregrinations, by a
+description of this voyage, in which I shall speak of such things as I
+saw by the way, on my return from India to my long wished-for country,
+along with the Portuguese.
+
+Leaving India on the 7th of December[115], we directed our course to
+Ethiopia[116]; and having sailed across the great gulf we came to the
+island of _Monzambrick_, or Mozambique, which is under the dominion of
+the king of Portugal. But before our arrival there, we saw many towns
+and fortresses by the way, belonging to the Portuguese, in the kingdoms
+of Melinda and Mombaza. They have also some strong fortresses in
+Mozambique and Sofala. Were I to enlarge upon the memorable deeds of the
+valiant Tristran de Cunna, on his return from India, I should enter upon
+a subject far beyond my powers, being such as would rather require the
+pen of a Homer or a Virgil: For he invaded and subdued the great cities
+of _Gogia, Pati_, and _Crava[117]_, and also the goodly island of
+_Sacutara_, [Socotoro,] where a fortress was erected by order of the
+king of Portugal. I omit also to speak of many islands which we saw by
+the way, such as the island of _Cumeris_, or Curia Muria, and six
+others, which produce plenty of ginger, sugar, and other goodly fruits,
+and the most fruitful island of _Penda_, which is likewise subject to
+the Portuguese.
+
+[Footnote 115: Probably of the year 1508.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 116: It is hardly necessary to remark, that the term Ethiopia
+is here applied to the western coast of Africa on the ocean.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 117: The Gogia of the text is probably Oja, on the coast of
+Africa, 17 leagues from Melinda, and Pati may possibly be some
+corruption of Paniany, both of these places having been reduced by de
+Cunna. Crava may be an error for Brava, on the western coast of
+Africa.--E.]
+
+From the island of Mozambique, which belongs to Portugal, it brought
+much gold and ivory, but these come from the continent of Ethiopia. This
+island is not large, but has a commodious port, and is inhabited by
+black Mahometans[118], who are in great want of all the necessaries of
+life, having no corn or provisions but what are brought from the
+continent. We landed on the continental part of Ethiopia to see the
+country, where we saw a barbarous Vagabond people of blacks, both men
+and women going entirely naked, except covering their parts of shame
+with leaves of trees. Their lips are two fingers thick, their foreheads
+very large, and they have great teeth as white as snow. They are
+exceedingly timorous and fearful of armed men; wherefore six of us, well
+armed with muskets, and accompanied by a black slave who knew the
+country, went a considerable way inland to view the country. When we had
+gone forwards a days journey, we came to many herds of elephants, and
+our guide recommended to us to carry burning firebrands in our hands, as
+these beasts are afraid of fire above all things; but we chanced to fall
+in with three female elephants that had lately calved, and they could
+not be scared by our fire, but followed us so far that we were obliged
+to save ourselves by scrambling up a steep mountain.
+
+[Footnote 118: Perhaps this expression ought to have been black-a-moors,
+the old name for negroes.--E.]
+
+When we were about ten miles inland, we came to a cave on the side of a
+mountain inhabited by some of the black natives, whose manner of speech
+was so strange and chattering, like so many apes, that I am unable to
+express the manner of their language, which comes near the strange
+jargon used by the muleteers of Sicily, when they drive their
+mules[119]. Our pilot asked us if we were inclined to purchase any
+cattle from these people, saying that we might have them at a very low
+price; but suspecting that he either mocked us, or meant, in concert
+with the natives, to impose upon us, we said that we had no money. Then
+he told us that these people wanted no money, having already gold in
+greater plenty than we, which they procure not far from where we were.
+On asking him what articles they were desirous of in payment for their
+cattle, he said they preferred things of small value, such as pins,
+knives, scissars, looking-glasses, hawks-bells, bags, or boxes, to
+contain their gold, copper rings, _janglings_ to hang at their timbrils,
+bosses, laces, broaches, copper-chains, caskanets, bracelets, and such
+like baubles to deck their wives and children. We then said that we
+would willingly give them such things for their cattle if they would
+bring them to us at the shore; but the pilot said the natives would
+drive them to the next mountain, but no farther on any condition. Then
+one of our companions said that he had a boss of engraven copper, and a
+small bell; and as I had none of such merchandise, and yet was desirous
+of eating fresh meat, I said I would give one of my shirts to buy
+cattle. The pilot engaged to make our purchases to the best advantage,
+and calling five or six of the natives about him, he shewed them our
+_goodly jewels,_ and demanded from them _three hundred_ head of cattle.
+The natives, not differing much from beasts, answered by signs that they
+would only give fifteen. At length we made a bargain, though we still
+suspected some deceit; yet they kept their promise, and sent us fifteen
+beasts by two of their companions. We had scarcely gone when we heard a
+noise and tumult among them, and were in some fear lest these
+_troglodites_ might follow to do us some injury, wherefore leaving the
+cattle we took to our weapons. But they made signs to us to fear
+nothing, and the pilot told us they were quarrelling who should have the
+copper boss. Then recovering our cattle, we drove them forward to the
+top of the mountain, where we dismissed the two natives, and continued
+our journey towards the coast. While driving our cattle past a little
+wood, we again fell in with the elephants, which put us in such fear
+that we abandoned our cattle and trusted to our feet, making the best of
+our way to the island.
+
+[Footnote 119: Perhaps alluding to the _cluck_, which occurs perpetually
+in the language of the Hottentots, resembling the sound used in some
+parts to urge on a horse, and which is inexpressible in
+orthography.--E.]
+
+Having made provision for our voyage of such things as could be procured
+at Mozambique, we sailed for the Cape of Good Hope, passing the island
+of St Lawrence, otherwise called Madagascar, which is 80 leagues from
+the nearest part of the continent. I suppose that in a short time the
+Portuguese will be masters of this island, as they have burned and
+destroyed many of its towns and villages, and are much feared by the
+natives. So far as I conjecture by my peregrinations, especially those
+in India and Ethiopia, it is my opinion that the king of Portugal is
+likely to be the richest king in the world, if he continue as he has
+begun; and certainly his dignity and godly zeal is not unworthy of such
+high fortune, as by his means the knowledge of the Christian faith is
+greatly extended. In Cochin, where the viceroy of India resides, every
+holiday ten or twelve Mahometans or idolaters are professed to our
+religion; so that we may have good hope that in time our faith may
+greatly spread with the blessing of God, who hath given such miraculous
+victories to the Christians; wherefore all who profess to believe in the
+holy name of Christ, ought incessantly to pray to God to assist the king
+of Portugal in so godly an enterprise.
+
+When we had sailed about two hundred miles beyond the Cape of Good Hope,
+there arose a sudden tempest of contrary wind, which towed us to and fro
+for seven days in great danger, but we escaped by the blessing of God.
+After the cessation of this tempest, and when we had again proceeded
+other two hundred miles on our voyage, a new tempest arose, which
+scattered all our ships during six days that it continued, so that we
+did not all meet again till our arrival at Lisbon in Portugal. I was in
+a ship called the St Vincent, belonging to one Bartholomew a Florentine,
+who was a citizen of Lisbon. She was a vessel of great size, and carried
+seven hundred tons of spices of all kinds. We passed the island of St
+Helena, near which we saw certain fishes of such enormous bigness that
+one of them was as large as a great house. When they rise above water,
+or gape or yawn, the upper jaw covers all the forehead, as it were a
+soldier in shining armour, and when they swim along the surface of the
+deep, the forehead seems three paces broad. As they swam about near the
+ships, they raised such a commotion in the sea that we discharged all
+our artillery to drive them away. We soon afterwards came to an island
+named _Ascension,_ where we saw many birds about the size of ducks,
+which were so stupid that we took them with our hands, yet immediately
+afterwards they shewed wonderful fierceness. In that island we saw no
+outer living creatures besides these birds, which seemed as if they had
+never seen mankind before, and there were prodigious quantities of fish
+around its shores.
+
+Having sailed many days beyond that island, we seemed to have returned
+again into our own world, as the north star, the guide of mariners,
+appeared to us. Here we have a good opportunity of refuting the opinion
+of those who think that it is impossible to sail in the regions of the
+antartic pole by the guidance of the north star; for it is undeniable
+that the Portuguese sail by the aid of the north polar star, although
+entirely hidden from their sight in the antartic region of the sea. Yet
+they frequently refresh the virtue of the needle by means of that stone
+which ever naturally points towards the north. A few days afterwards we
+arrived at a fair region, in which are seen many islands called the
+_Astures_ Açores, so named from the multitude of that species of eagles
+or hawks which are called açores or _azores_. These islands are
+variously named, as _Pico_, _Martii_, _Corvo_, _Flores_, _St George_,
+_Gratiosa_ and _Fyal_. From thence we went to the island of _Tercera_,
+where we remained two days. All these are very fertile, and have
+abundance of all the necessaries of life.
+
+Departing from thence, we came in seven days sailing to _Luxburne_ or
+_Ulisbona_, [_Lisbon_] in Portugal. On my arrival I was carried to the
+presence of the king, whose hand I had the honour to kiss, and with most
+humble reverence I thanked his majesty for the great favour I had found
+with his officers and subjects in India. He entertained me very
+graciously at his court, until I had informed him fully of all that I
+had observed in my peregrinations in various parts of India. Some days
+afterwards, I shewed his majesty the letters-patent by which his viceroy
+in India had honoured me with the order of knighthood, and humbly
+requested of his majesty to confirm the same under his great seal, which
+he was graciously pleased to grant. Then departing from Lisbon, with the
+passport and safe conduct of the king, I returned at length, after these
+my long and perilous travels, to my long-desired native home, the city
+of Rome, by the blessing of God, to whom be all honour and glory.
+
+_End of the Voyages of Verthema._
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+VOYAGES AND TRAVELS OF CESAR FREDERICK IN INDIA[120].
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+This article has been adopted from the Collection of Hakluyt, and, with
+that immediately preceding, may serve as a supplement to the Portuguese
+Transactions in India. The entire title, as given in that early and
+curious Collection, is "_The Voyage and Travel of M. Cesar Fredericke,
+Merchant of Venice, into the East India and beyond the Indies: Wherein
+are contained the Customes and Rites of these Countries, the Merchandise
+and Commodities, as well of Golde as Silver, as Spices, Drugges,
+Pearles, and other Jewels. Translated out of Italian by M. Thomas
+Hickocke_."
+
+[Footnote 120: Hakluyt, II. pp. 359--375. Ed. Lond. 1810.]
+
+In adapting the present chapter to the purposes of our Collection, the
+only liberty we have taken with the ancient translation exhibited by
+Hakluyt, has been to employ the modern orthography in the names of
+places, persons, and things, and to modernise the language throughout.
+As in the itinerary of Verthema, to avoid the multiplication of notes
+unnecessarily we have corrected the frequently vicious orthography of
+these names as given by Cesar Frederick and his original translator,
+either by substituting the true names or more generally received modern
+orthography, or by subjoining the right name in the text immediately
+after that employed by the author. When the names employed in the
+original translation of this Journal are so corrupt as to be beyond our
+power to rectify, or where we are doubtful of our correction, we have
+marked them with a point of interrogation, as doubtful or unknown, as
+has likewise been done in our version of the Itinerary of Verthema.
+These two journals, besides that they coincide with the plan of our
+arrangement of giving as many appropriate original journals of voyages
+and travels as we can procure, contain a great number of curious
+particulars, nowhere else to be met with, respecting the manners and
+customs of various parts of India, between the years 1503 and 1581,
+with many intersecting notices respecting its history, production, and
+trade.
+
+We learn from the following journal, that Cesar Frederick began his
+peregrination in 1563; and, as he informs us in his preface, that he was
+continually employed in coasting and travelling for eighteen years, he
+could not have returned to Venice before the year 1581. In the
+publication of this journal in the Collection of Hakluyt, it is very
+irregularly divided into fragments, upon no apparent principles of
+regular distribution; but on the present occasion it has been arranged
+in sections, so as to suit the general plan of the present work.--E.
+
+
+
+_Cesar Frederick to the Reader._
+
+Having for the space of eighteen years continually coasted and travelled
+over almost all the East Indies, and many other countries beyond the
+Indies, both with good and bad success; and having seen and learned many
+things worthy of notice, which have never been before communicated to
+the world; I have thought it right, since the Almighty hath graciously
+been pleased to return me to my native country, the noble city of
+Venice, to write and publish this account of the perils I have
+encountered during my long and arduous peregrinations by sea and land,
+together with the many wonderful things I have seen in the Indies; the
+mighty princes that govern these countries; the religion or faith in
+which they live; their rites and customs; the various successes I
+experienced; and which of these countries abound in drugs and jewels:
+All of which may be profitable to such as desire to make a similar
+voyage: Therefore, that the world may be benefited by my experience, I
+have caused my voyages and travels to be printed, which I now present to
+you, gentle and loving readers, in hopes that the variety of things
+contained in this book may give you delight.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Voyage from Venice to Bir in Asia Minor._
+
+
+In the year 1563, while residing at Venice, being desirous to see the
+eastern parts of the world, I embarked in a ship called the _Gradaige_
+of Venice, commanded by Jacomo Vatica, bound for Cyprus, taking with
+me certain merchandise. On arriving at Cyprus, I left that ship, and
+went in a lesser to Tripoli in Syria, where I made a short stay. I then
+travelled by land to Aleppo, where I became acquainted with some
+Armenian and Moorish merchants, and agreed to accompany them to Ormuz.
+We accordingly departed together from Aleppo, and came to the city of
+_Bir_ in two days journey and a-half.
+
+Bir is a small city in which provisions are very scarce, situated in
+Asia Minor, [in lat. 37° 5' N. long. 38° E. from Greenwich], the river
+Euphrates running near its walls. In this city, the merchants who intend
+to descend the Euphrates form themselves into companies or associations,
+according to the quantities of merchandise they possess, and either
+build or buy a boat to carry themselves and their goods down the
+Euphrates to Babylon[121], under the care of a master and mariners hired
+to conduct the boat. These boats are almost flat-bottomed and very
+strong, yet serve only for one voyage, as it is impossible to navigate
+them upwards. They are fitted for the shallowness of the river, which in
+many places is full of great stones which greatly obstruct the
+navigation. At _Feluchia_ a small city on the Euphrates, the merchants
+pull their boats to pieces or sell them for a small price; as a boat
+that cost forty or fifty chequins at Bir sells only at Feluchia for
+seven or eight chequins. When the merchants return back from Babylon, if
+they have merchandise or goods that pay custom, they travel through the
+wilderness in forty days, passing that way at much less expence than the
+other. If they have no such merchandise, they then go by the way of
+Mosul in Mesopotamia, which is attended with great charges both for the
+caravan and company. From Bir to _Feluchia_. on the Euphrates, over
+against Babylon, which is on the Tigris, if the river have sufficient
+water, the voyage down the river may be made in fifteen or eighteen
+days; but when the water is low in consequence of long previous drought,
+the voyage is attended with much trouble, and will sometimes require
+forty or fifty days to get down. In this case the boats often strike on
+the stones in the river, when it becomes necessary to unlade and repair
+them, which is attended with much trouble and delay; and on this account
+the merchants have always one or two spare boats, that if one happen to
+split or be lost by striking on the shoals, they may have another ready
+to take in their goods till they have repaired the broken boat If they
+were to draw the broken boat on the land for repair, it would be
+difficult to defend it in the night from the great numbers of Arabs that
+would come to rob and plunder them. Every night, when it is necessary to
+make fast the boat to the bank, good watch must be kept against the
+Arabs, who are great thieves and as numerous as ants; yet are they not
+given to murder on these occasions, but steal what they can and run
+away. Arquebuses are excellent weapons for keeping off these Arabs, as
+they are in great fear of the shot. In passing down the river from Bir
+to Feluchia, there are certain towns and villages on the Euphrates
+belonging to _the son of Aborise_, king of the Arabs and of the desert,
+at some of which the merchants have to pay so many _medins_ of custom on
+each bale.
+
+[Footnote 121: It is obvious that Bagdat is here meant.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Of Feluchia and Babylon._
+
+
+Feluchia is a village on the Euphrates, where they who come from Bir for
+Babylon disembark with their goods, and go thence by land to Babylon, a
+journey of a day and a half. Babylon is no great city, but is very
+populous and is greatly resorted to by strangers, being the great
+thoroughfare for Persia, Turkey and Arabia, and from this place there
+are frequent caravans to different countries. Babylon is abundantly
+supplied with provisions, which are brought down the river Tigris on
+certain rafts or _zattores_ called Vtrij, the river Tigris running past
+the walls of Babylon. The blown-up hides of which these rafts are
+composed, are bound fast together, on which boards are laid, and on
+these boards the commodities are loaded. When unladed at Babylon, the
+air is let out of the skins, which are then laid on the backs of camels
+and carried back to serve for another voyage. The city of Babylon is
+properly speaking in the kingdom of Persia, but is now under the
+dominion of the Turks. On the other side of the river towards Arabia,
+over against Babylon, there is a handsome town in which is an extensive
+Bazar for the merchants, with many lodging rooms, in which the greater
+part of the stranger merchants that go to Babylon expose their goods
+for sale. The passage across the river between Babylon and this town is
+by a long bridge of boats chained together with great chains: And when
+the river is swollen by the great rains, this bridge is opened in the
+middle, one half falling alongside of the walls of Babylon, and the
+other half along the opposite bank of the borough. So long as the bridge
+remains open, the people cross from side to side in small boats with
+much danger, by reason of their smallness, and that they are usually
+overladen, so that they are very liable to be overset by the swiftness
+of the current, or to be carried away and wrecked on the banks. In this
+manner-many people are lost and drowned, as I have often witnessed.
+
+The tower of Nimrod, or Babel, is situated on the Arabian side of the
+Tigris, in a great plain, seven or eight miles from Babylon. Being
+ruined on every side, it has formed a great mountain, yet a considerable
+part of the tower is still standing, compassed and almost covered up by
+these ruins. It has been built of square bricks dried in the sun, and
+constructed in the following manner. In the first place a course of
+bricks was laid, then a mat made of canes squared like the bricks, and
+daubed with earth instead of lime mortar; and these mats still remain so
+strong that it is wonderful considering their great antiquity. I have
+gone all round it without being able to discover any place where there
+had been a door or entrance, and in my opinion it may be about a mile in
+circumference or rather less. Contrary to all other things, which appear
+small at a distance and become larger the nearer they are approached,
+this tower appears largest when seen from afar, and seems less as you
+come nearer. This may be accounted for, as the tower stands in a very
+large plain, and with its surrounding ruins forms the only perceptible
+object; so that from a distance the tower and the mountains formed of
+its ruins make a greater shew than it is found to be on coming near.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Of Basora._
+
+
+From Babylon I embarked in one of those small vessels which ply upon the
+Tigris between Babylon and Basora, which are built after the manner of
+foists or galliots, having a _speron_[122] and a covered poop. They use
+no pumps, being so well daubed with pitch as effectually to exclude the
+water. This pitch they have from a great plain near the city of _Heit_
+on the Euphrates, two days journey from Babylon. This plain full of
+pitch is marvellous to behold, and a thing almost incredible, as from a
+hole in the earth the pitch is continually thrown into the air with a
+constant great smoke; and being hot it falls as it were sprinkled all
+over the plain, in such abundance that the plain is always full of
+pitch[123]. The Moors and Arabs of the neighbourhood allege that this
+hole is the mouth of Hell; and in truth it is a very memorable object
+From this native pitch or bitumen the whole people of that country
+derive great benefit, as with it they pay or serve their barks, which
+they call _Daneck_ and _Saffin_.
+
+[Footnote 122: In imitation of the original translator Hickocke and
+Hakluyt, this word must be left untranslated and unexplained.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 123: This account of the hole which discharges pitch or native
+bitumen mixed with water is most true; the water and pitch running into
+the valley _or island_, where the pitch remains, and the water runs into
+the Euphrates, when it occasions the water for a long way to have a
+brackish taste with the smell of pitch and brimstone.--Hakl.]
+
+When the river Tigris is well replenished with water, the passage from
+Babylon or Bagdat to Basora may be made in eight or nine days, less or
+more according to circumstances; we were fourteen or fifteen days,
+because the water was low, and when the waters are at the lowest it
+requires eighteen days. Having no rocks or shoals in the river, the
+voyage may be continued day and night. There are some places by the way
+at which you have to pay so many medins for each bale, as toll or
+custom. Basora, Bussora, or Busrah, [in lat. 30° 20' N. long. 47° 40'
+E.] is a city on the Arabian side of the united rivers Euphrates and
+Tigris, which was governed of old by those Arabs called _Zizarij_, but
+is now under the dominion of the grand Turk, who keeps an army there at
+great charge. The tribe of Arabs called Zizarij still have possession of
+a large extent of country, and cannot be overcome by the Turks, as the
+sea divides their country into islands by many channels, so that the
+Turks are unable to bring an army against them either by land or sea,
+and likewise because the inhabitants are brave and warlike. A days sail
+before coming to Basora, we pass a small castle or fort called _Corna_,
+on the point of land where the Euphrates and Tigris join; whence the
+united waters of these two rivers form a very large river that runs into
+the gulf of Persia.
+
+Basora is fifty miles from the sea, and it a place of great trade in
+spices and drugs, which are brought from Ormuz. It is abundantly
+supplied with corn, rice, and dates, from the surrounding country. At
+Basora I shipped myself for Ormuz, to which I sailed through the Persian
+gulf 600 miles, which is the distance between Basora and Ormuz. We
+sailed in small ships built of board fastened together with small ropes
+or cords, and, instead of caulking, a certain kind of straw is laid
+between the boards at their junctions, and they are sewed together;
+owing to which imperfect construction, these vessels are very dangerous,
+and take in much water. On departing from Basora we sailed 200 miles
+along the left shore of the gulf, having the open sea on our right hand,
+till we came to an island called _Carichij_ or _Karak_, whence we
+continued our voyage to Ormuz, always keeping the Persian shore in sight
+on our left, and seeing many islands on our right hand towards Arabia.
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Of Ormuz._
+
+
+The island of Ormuz is twenty-five or thirty miles in circuit, being the
+driest and most barren island in the world, producing nothing but
+salt-water and wood. All things necessary for the life of man are
+brought here from Persia, which is twelve miles off, and from islands
+adjoining to Persia, and in such abundance that the city has always a
+great store of every necessary. Near the shore there stands a fair
+castle, in which resides the commander appointed by the king of
+Portugal, with a good band of Portuguese soldiers. The married men
+belonging to the garrison dwell in the city, in which there are
+merchants of almost every nation, among whom are many Moors and
+Gentiles. This city has a vast trade for all kinds of spices, drugs,
+silk, cloth of silk, brocades, and various kinds of merchandise from
+Persia. The trade in horses is very great, being transported from hence
+to India. The island has a Mahometan or Moorish king of the Persian
+race, who is created and set up by the Portuguese commander in the name
+of the king of Portugal. Being present on one of these occasions, I
+shall set down the ceremonies as I saw them.
+
+The old king being dead, the Portuguese commander proceeds with much
+pomp and ceremony to elect a new one in the castle; and when he is
+chosen from the blood-royal, the new king is sworn to be true and
+faithful to the king of Portugal, as his lord-paramount, after which the
+captain presents him with the royal sceptre. The newly elected king is
+then conducted in great pomp to the royal palace, amid great feasts and
+rejoicings, and attended by a numerous and splendid retinue. The king
+keeps a good train of attendants, and has sufficient revenues to
+maintain his state and dignity, with very little of the cares of
+royalty, as the captain of the castle defends the kingdom. When the king
+and captain ride out together, the king is treated with much ceremony
+and respect, yet cannot ride abroad with his train without having first
+received permission of the captain, which precaution is necessary
+because of the great trade carried on at this place. The native language
+in this island is the Persian. I embarked at Ormuz for Goa in India, in
+a ship on board of which were fourscore horses. All merchants proceeding
+from Ormuz for Goa ought to go in ships carrying horses, because every
+ship carrying twenty horses or upwards is privileged from the payment of
+customs on all their other goods, whereas all ships having no horses
+have to pay eight per centum on their goods and commodities.
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Of Goa, Diu, and Cambaya._
+
+
+Goa is the chief city of the Portuguese in India, in which reside the
+viceroy and his court, being many officers of the crown of Portugal.
+From Ormuz it is 990 miles to Goa, on which passage the first city you
+come to in India is Diu, situated in a small island of the kingdom of
+Cambaia; and, though a small city, is the strongest fortified of any of
+those possessed by the Portuguese in India, having great trade, and
+loading many great ships with merchandise for Ormuz and the Red Sea.
+These ships belong both to Moors and Christians; but the Moors can
+neither trade nor navigate in these seas, unless they have a pass or
+licence from the Portuguese viceroy, without which they we liable to be
+captured. The merchandise loaded at Diu comes from _Cambaietta_, a port
+in the kingdom of Cambaia, about 180 miles up a strait or gulf called
+_Macareo_, which signifies _a race of the tide_, because the water runs
+there with immense rapidity, such as is not to be seen anywhere else,
+except in the kingdom of Pegu, where there is another _Macareo_ or race
+of the tide still more violent. On this account, and because no large
+vessels can go to _Cambaietta_ or _Cambay_, by reason of the shallowness
+of the water in the gulf for 80 or 100 miles, the principal city of
+Cambaia or Guzerat is _Amadaver_ or _Amedabad_, a day and a half
+journey from Cambay, being a great and populous city, and for a city of
+the Gentiles it is well built with handsome houses and wide streets. In
+it there is a fine bason or canul, having many ships, so that it
+resembles Cairo, but not so large.
+
+Cambay is situated on the sea at the head of the gulf of the same name,
+and is a handsome city. While I was there it was suffering great
+calamity, owing to a scarcity, insomuch that the Gentiles offered their
+sons and daughters for sale to the Portuguese, and I have seen them sold
+for 8 or 10 _larines_ each, which is of our money about 10s. or 13s.
+4d.[124]. Yet if I had not actually seen it, I could not have believed
+that Cambay had so great a trade. Every new and full moon, when the
+tides are at the highest, the small barks that come in and go out are
+quite innumerable. These barks are laden with all kinds of spices, with
+silks of China, sandal-wood, elephants teeth, velvets of _Vercini_,
+great quantities of _Pannina_, which comes from Mecca, _chequins_ or
+gold coins worth 7s. each sterling, and various other commodities. These
+barks carry out an infinite quantity of cloth of all sorts made of
+_bumbast_ or cotton, some white, others stamped or painted; large
+quantities of indigo, dried and preserved ginger, dry and confected
+myrabolans, _boraso_ or borax in paste, vast quantities of sugar,
+cotton, opium, asafoetida, _puchio?_ and many other kinds of drugs,
+turbans made at Delhi, great quantities of carnelians, garnets, agates,
+jaspers, calcedonies, _hematitis_, or bloodstones, and some natural
+diamonds.
+
+[Footnote 124: This comparison seems made by the translator between
+_larines_ and sterling money.--E.]
+
+It is customary at Cambay, though no one is obliged, to employ brokers,
+of whom there are great numbers at this place, all Gentiles and of
+great repute, every one of whom keeps fifteen or twenty servants. All
+the Portuguese, and more other merchants who frequent this place, employ
+these brokers, who purchase and tell for them; and such as come there
+for the first time are informed by their friends of this custom, and
+what broker they ought to employ. Every fifteen days, when the great
+fleet of barks comes into port, these brokers come to the water side,
+and the merchants immediately on landing give charge of their cargoes to
+the broker who transacts their business, with the marks of all their
+bales and packages. After this the merchant carries on shore all the
+furniture for his dwelling, it being necessary for every one who trades
+to India to carry a sufficient provision of household staff for his use,
+as none such are to be procured. Then the broker who takes charge of his
+cargo, makes his servants carry the merchant's furniture to some empty
+house in the city, every broker having several such for the
+accommodation of their merchants, where there are only bedsteads,
+tables, chairs, and empty water jars. Then the broker says to the
+merchant, go and repose yourself and take your rest in the city. The
+broker remains at the water-side in charge of the cargo, causes all the
+goods to be discharged from the bark, pays the customs, and causes every
+thing to be carried to the house in which the merchant has taken up his
+residence, the merchant having no trouble with any thing. After this,
+the broker inquires if the merchant is disposed to sell his goods at the
+rate then current; and if he desires it, the broker sells the goods
+immediately, and informs the merchant how much money comes to him after
+payment of all charges. If the merchant is disposed to lay out his money
+in the purchase of other commodities, the broker informs him at what
+rate the different articles may be put free on board, all charges paid.
+Being thus properly instructed, the merchant makes his calculations, and
+if he is satisfied to buy or sell at the current prices he directs the
+broker accordingly; so that if he have even to the value of 20,000
+ducats or more, every thing will be sold off or bartered in fifteen
+days, without giving himself any trouble or concern about the matter.
+Should the merchant not be disposed to sell the goods at the then
+current prices, he may tarry as long as he pleases, but the goods cannot
+be sold for him by any other person than the broker who has taken them
+in hand, and has paid the duties. Sometimes, by delaying the sale of
+their commodities for a time, the merchants make good profit, and at
+other times they lose; but those articles which do not ordinarily come
+every fifteen days, frequently produce great profit by delaying to sell
+till the prices rise.
+
+The barks that lade at Cambay go to Diu to supply the ships at that port
+which are taking in goods for the Red Sea and Ormuz, and some go to
+Chaul and Goa. These ships are either well armed, or are protected by
+Portuguese ships of war, as there are many corsairs or pirates
+continually cruizing along that coast, robbing and plundering whatever
+they are able to master. The kingdom of Cambaia or Guzerat has great
+trade, though it has long been in the hands of tyrants and usurpers,
+ever since the lawful sovereign, then 75 years of age, named Sultan
+Badur, was slain, at the assault of Diu, at which time four or five
+principal officers of his army divided the kingdom among themselves, all
+tyrannizing in their several shares as in emulation of each other.
+Twelve years before my coming, the great Mogul, who is the Mahometan
+king of Delhi and Agra, 40 days journey inland from Amedabad, reduced
+all the provinces of Guzerat under his authority without resistance, his
+power being so great that none of the usurpers dared to oppose him.
+While I dwelt in Cambay, I saw many curious things. There were a
+prodigious number of artificers who made ivory bracelets called mannij,
+of, various colours, with which the Gentile women are in use to decorate
+their arms, some covering their arms entirely over with them. In this
+single article there are many thousand crowns expended yearly, owing to
+this singular custom, that, when any of their kindred die, they break
+all their bracelets in token of grief and mourning, so that they have
+immediately to purchase new ones, as they would rather go without meat
+as not have these ornaments.
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Of Damann, Bassen, Tana, Chaul, and some other places_.
+
+
+Leaving Diu, I went on to Damann, the second city belonging to the
+Portuguese in the territory of Guzerat, and distant from Diu 120 miles.
+This place has no trade of any importance, except in rice and wheat, and
+has many dependent villages, where in time of peace the Portuguese enjoy
+the pleasure of a country retirement, but in time of war they are all
+spoiled and plundered by the enemy, so that then they derive very small
+benefit from them. The next place is Bassen, a small dirty place in
+comparison with Damann, which supplies Goa with rice and wheat, besides
+timber for the construction of ships and gallies. At a small distance
+from Bassen is a small island named Tana, well peopled with Portuguese,
+Moors, and Gentiles. This place affords nothing but rice, but contains
+many manufacturers of _armesies_? and weavers of girdles made of wool
+and cotton, black and red like _moocharie_?
+
+Beyond this is Chaul on the continent, where there are two cities, one
+belonging to the Portuguese, and the other to the Moors; that which
+belongs to the Portuguese is lower than the other, commands the mouth of
+the harbour, and is very strongly fortified. About a mile and a half
+from this city is that of the Moors, belonging to their king _Zamaluco_,
+or Nizam-al-mulk. In time of war no large ships can go to the city of
+the Moors, as they must necessarily pass under the guns of the
+Portuguese castles, which would sink them. Both cities of Chaul are
+sea-ports, and have great trade in all kinds of spices, drugs, raw silk,
+manufactures of silk, sandal-wood, _Marsine, Versine_[125], porcelain of
+China, velvets and scarlets, both from Portugal and Mecca[126], with
+many other valuable commodities. Every year there arrive ten or fifteen
+large ships, laden with great nuts called _Giagra_[127], which are cured
+or dried, and with sugar made from these nuts. The tree on which these
+nuts grow is called the _Palmer_ tree, and is to be found in great
+abundance over all India, especially between this place and Goa. This
+tree very much resembles that which produces dates, and no tree in the
+world is more profitable or more useful to man; no part of it but serves
+for some useful purpose, neither is any part of it so worthless as to be
+burnt. Of its timber they build ships, and with the leaves they make
+sails. Its fruit, or nuts, produce wine, and from the wine they make
+sugar and _placetto_[128]. This wine is gathered in the spring of the
+year from the middle of the tree, where there is then a continual stream
+of clear liquor like water, which they gather in vessels placed on
+purpose under each tree, and take them away full every morning and
+evening. This liquor being distilled by means of fire, is converted into
+a very strong liquor, which is then put into buts with a quantity of
+white or black _Zibibs_, and in a short time it becomes a perfect wine.
+Of the nuts they make great quantities of oil. The tree is made into
+boards and timbers for building houses. Of the bark cables and other
+ropes are made for ships which are said to be better than those made of
+hemp. The branches are made into bed-steads after the Indian fashion,
+and into _Sanasches_? for merchandise. The leaves being cut into thin
+slips are woven into sails for all kinds of ships, or into thin mats.
+The outer rhind of the nut stamped serves as oakum for caulking ships,
+and the hard inner shell serves for spoons and other utensils for
+holding food or drink. Thus no portion whatever of this _Palmer_ tree is
+so worthless as to be thrown away or cast into the fire. When the nuts
+are green, they are full of a sweet water, excellent to drink, and the
+liquor contained in one nut is sufficient to satisfy a thirsty person.
+As the nut ripens, this liquor turns all into kernel.
+
+[Footnote 125: Formerly noticed as a species of velvet; but the words
+marsine and versine were inexplicable in the days of Hakluyt, and must
+so remain.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 126: The velvets and scarlet cloths from Mecca were probably
+Italian manufactures, brought through Egypt and the Red Sea.--E.].
+
+[Footnote 127: These great nuts must necessarily be the cocoa nuts, and
+the palmer tree, on which they grow, the cocoa palm.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 128: Possibly molasses are here meant.--E.]
+
+From Chaul, an infinite quantity of goods are exported for other parts
+of India, Macao, Portugal, the coast of Melinda, Ormuz, and other parts;
+such as cloth of _bumbast_ or cotton, white, painted, and printed,
+indigo, opium, silk of all kinds, borax in paste, asafoetida, iron,
+corn, and other things. Nizam-al-Mulk, the Moorish king, has great
+power, being able to take the field with 200,000 men, and a great store
+of artillery, some of which are made in pieces[129], and are so large
+that they are difficultly removed, yet are they very commodiously used,
+and discharge enormous stone bullets, some of which have been sent to
+the king of Portugal as rarities. The city of _Abnezer[130]_, in which
+Nizam-al-Mulk resides, is seven or eight days journey inland from Chaul.
+Seventy miles[131] from Chaul toward the Indies, or south, is Dabul, a
+haven belonging to Nizam-al-Mulk, from whence to Goa is 150 miles[132].
+
+[Footnote 129: Probably meaning that they were formed of bars hooped or
+welded together, in the way in which the famous _Mons meg_, long in
+Edinburgh Castle, and now in the tower of London, was certainly
+made.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 130: Perhaps that now called Assodnagur in the Mahratta
+country, about 125 miles nearly east from Chaul.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 131: In fact only about half that distance.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 132: About 165 English miles--E.]
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Of Goa._
+
+
+Goa, the principal city of the Portuguese in India, in which the viceroy
+resides with a splendid court, stands in an island about 25 or 30 miles
+in circuit. The city, with its boroughs or suburbs, is moderately large,
+and is sufficiently handsome for an Indian city; but the island is very
+beautiful, being full of fine gardens, and adorned with many trees,
+among which are the _Palmer_, or cocoa-nut trees, formerly mentioned.
+Goa trades largely in all kinds of merchandise usual in these parts, and
+every year five or six large ships come directly thither from Portugal,
+usually arriving about the 6th or 10th of September. They remain there
+40 or 50 days, and go from thence to Cochin, where they finish their
+lading for Portugal; though they often load one ship at Goa and the
+other at Cochin for Portugal. Cochin is 420 miles from Goa. The city of
+Goa stands in the kingdom of _Dial-can_, or Adel Khan, a Moorish or
+Mahometan king, whose capital, called Bejapour or Visiapour, is eight
+days journey inland from Goa[133]. This sovereign has great power; for,
+when I was at Goa in 1570, he came to attack that city, encamping with
+200,000 men at a river side in the neighbourhood, where he remained
+fourteen months, at the end of which a peace was concluded. It was
+reported in Goa that a great mortality prevailed in his army during the
+winter, which also killed many of his elephants. When I went in 1567
+from Goa to _Bezenegur_ or Bijanagur, the capital city of the kingdom of
+_Narsinga,_ eight days journey inland from Goa[134], I travelled in
+company with two other merchants, who carried with them 300 Arabian
+horses for sale to that king; the horses of the country being of small
+stature, occasioning Arabian horses to sell at high prices in that part
+of India. Indeed it is necessary that the merchants should get good
+prices, as they are at great charges in bringing them from Persia to
+Ormuz and thence to Goa. At going out of Goa, 42 pagodas are paid of
+duty for each horse; the pagoda being a small gold coin worth about 6s.
+8d. sterling. In the inland country of Narsinga, the Arabian horses sell
+for 300, 400, and 500 ducats each, and some very superior horses sell as
+high as 1000 ducats.
+
+[Footnote 133: About 175, N.E. from Goa. In the original it is called
+Bisapor.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 134: The ruins of the royal city of Bijanagur are 190 English
+miles nearly due east from Goa.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Of the City of Bijanagur._
+
+
+In the year 1565, the city of Bijanagur was sacked by four Moorish kings
+of great power: Adel-Khan, Nizam-al-Mulk, Cotub-al-Mulk, and
+Viriday-Khan; yet with all their power they were unable to overcome this
+city and its king but by means of treachery. The king of Bijanagur was a
+Gentile, and among the captains of his numerous army had two famous
+Moors, each of whom commanded over seventy or eighty thousand men. These
+two captains being of the same religion with the four Moorish kings,
+treacherously combined with them to betray their own sovereign.
+Accordingly, when the king of Bijanagur, despising the power of his
+enemies, boldly faced them in the field, the battle had scarcely lasted
+four hours, when the two treacherous captains, in the very heat of the
+battle, turned with their followers against their own sovereign, and
+threw his army into such disorder that it broke and fled in the utmost
+confusion.
+
+This kingdom of Bijanagur had been governed for thirty years by the
+usurpation of three brothers, keeping the lawful king a state prisoner,
+and ruling according to their own pleasure, shewing the king only once a
+year to his subjects. They had been principal officers under the father
+of the king whom they now held a prisoner, who was very young when his
+father died, and they assumed the government. The eldest brother was
+called _Ram rajah_, who sat in the royal throne and was called king; the
+second was named _Temi rajah_, who held charge of the civil government
+of the country; and the third, _Bengatre_, was general in chief of the
+army. In the great battle against the four Mahometan kings all the three
+brothers were present, but the first and the last were never heard of
+more, neither dead nor alive. Temi rajah alone escaped from the battle,
+with the loss of one eye. On the news of this great defeat coming to the
+city of Bijanagur, the wives and children of the three tyrants fled with
+the imprisoned king, and the four Mahometan kings entered the city in
+great triumph, where they remained for six months, searching everywhere
+for money and valuable effects that had been hidden. After this they
+departed, being unable to retain possession of so extensive a dominion
+at such a distance from their own territory[135].
+
+[Footnote 135: The reason in the text for evacuating the kingdom of
+Narsinga, or Bijanagur, is very unsatisfactory, as it in fact bordered
+on their dominions. More probably they could not agree on the partition,
+each being afraid of the others acquiring an ascendancy, and they
+satisfied themselves with the enormous spoils of the capital. This event
+has been before mentioned from De Faria.--E.]
+
+After the retreat of the four kings, Temi rajah returned to Bijanagur,
+which he repeopled, and sent word to the merchants of Goa to bring all
+the horses to him that they had for sale, promising good prices; and it
+was on this occasion that the two merchants went up with their horses,
+whom I accompanied. This tyrant also issued a proclamation, that if any
+merchant happened to have any of the horses which were taken in the late
+battle, even although they happened to have the Bijanagur mark upon
+them, that he would pay for them their full values, and give safe
+conduct for all who had such to come to his capital. When by this means
+he had procured a great number of horses, he put off the merchants with
+fair promises, till he saw that no more horses were likely to come, and
+he then ordered the merchants to depart without giving them any thing
+for the horses. I remained in Bijanagur seven months, though I might
+have concluded my whole business in one; but it was necessary for me to
+remain until the ways were cleared of thieves and robbers, who ranged up
+and down in whole troops.
+
+While I rested there I saw many strange and barbarous deeds done among
+these Gentiles. When any noble man or woman dies, the dead body is
+burned. If a married man die, his widow must burn herself alive for the
+love of her husband, and along with his body; but she may have the
+respite of a month, or even of two or three, if she will. When the
+appointed day arrives on which she is to be burnt, she goeth out from
+her house very early in the morning, either on horseback or on an
+elephant, or on a stage carried by eight men, apparelled like a bride,
+and is carried in triumph all round the city, having her hair hanging
+down about her shoulders, garnished with jewels and flowers, according
+to her circumstances, and seemingly as joyful as a bride in Venice going
+to her nuptials. On this occasion, she carries a mirror in her left
+hand, and an arrow in her right, and sings during the procession,
+saying, that she is going to sleep with her dear husband. In this manner
+she continues, surrounded by her kindred and friends till about one or
+two in the afternoon, when the procession goes out of the city to the
+side of the river called _Nigondin_ or _Toombuddra_, which runs past the
+walls of the city, to a certain spot where this ceremony is usually
+performed, where there is prepared a large square pit full of dried
+wood, having a little pinnacle or scaffold close to one side four or
+five steps up. On her arrival, a great banquet is prepared, where the
+victim eats with as much apparent joy as if it were her wedding-day; and
+at the end of the feast there is dancing and singing so long as she
+thinks fit. At length she gives orders of her own accord to kindle the
+dry wood in the square pit; and when told that the fire is kindled, she
+takes the nearest kinsman of her husband by the hand, who leads her to
+the bank of the river, where she puts off her jewels and all her
+clothes, distributing them among her parents or relations; when, putting
+on a cloth, that she may not be seen naked by the people, she throweth
+herself into the river, saying, O! wretches wash away your sins. Coming
+out of the water, she rolls herself up in a yellow cloth, fourteen yards
+long, and again taking the nearest kinsman of her husband by the hand,
+they go together to the pinnacle at the funeral pile. From this place
+she addresses the people, to whom she recommends her children and
+relations. Before the pinnacle it is usual to place a mat, that she may
+not see the fierce fire; yet there are many who order this to be
+removed, as not afraid of the sight. When the silly woman has reasoned
+with the people for some time, another woman takes a pot of oil, part of
+which she pours on the head of the devoted victim, anointing also her
+whole body with the same, and then throws the pot into the fire, which
+the widow immediately follows, leaping into the fiercest of the fire.
+Then those who stand around the pile throw after her many great pieces
+of wood, by the blows from which, and the fierce fire in which she is
+enveloped, she quickly dies and is consumed. Immediately the mirth of
+the people is changed to sorrow and weeping, and such howling and
+lamentation is set up as one is hardly able to bear. I have seen many
+burnt in this manner, as my house was near the gate where they go out to
+the place of burning; and when a great man dies, not only his widow, but
+all the female slaves with whom he has had connection, are burnt along
+with his body. Also when the baser sort of people die, I have seen the
+dead husband carried to the place of sepulchre, where he is placed
+upright; then cometh his widow, and, placing herself on her knees before
+him, she clasps her arms about his neck, till the masons have built a
+wall around both as high us their necks. Then a person from behind
+strangles the widow, and the workmen finish the building over their
+heads, and thus they remain immured in one tomb. Inquiring the reason of
+this barbarous custom, I was told that this law had been established in
+ancient times as a provision against the slaughters which the women were
+in use to make of their husbands, poisoning them on every slight cause
+of displeasure; but that since the promulgation of this law they have
+been more faithful to their husbands, reckoning their lives as dear to
+them as their own, because after the death of their husband their own is
+sure soon to follow. There are many other abominable customs among these
+people, but of which I have no desire to write.
+
+In consideration of the injury done to Bijanagur by the four Mahometan
+kings, the king with his court removed from that city in 1567, and went
+to dwell in a castle named _Penegonde_, eight days journey inland from
+Bijanagur. Six days journey from Bijanagur is the place where diamonds
+are got[136]. I was not there, but was told that it is a great place
+encompassed by a wall, and that the ground within is sold to the
+adventurers at so much per square measure, and that they are even
+limited as to the depth they may dig. All diamonds found of a certain
+size and above belong to the king, and all below that size to the
+adventurers. It is a long time since any diamonds have been got there,
+owing to the troubles that have distracted the kingdom of Narsinga: For
+the son of Temi rajah having put the imprisoned king to death, the
+nobles and great men of the kingdom refused to acknowledge authority of
+the tyrant, so that the kingdom has fallen into anarchy, every one
+setting up for themselves.
+
+[Footnote 136: The diamond mines of Raolconda are about 90 miles direct
+north from the ruins of Bijanagur, on the Kisma. The castle of Penegonde
+is not now to be found in the maps of Indostan; but indeed the names of
+this ingenious traveller an often unintelligible, and almost always
+extremely corrupt.--E.]
+
+The city of Bijanagur is not altogether destroyed, as the houses are
+said to be still standing, but entirely void of population, and become
+the dwellings of tigers, and other wild beasts. The circuit of this
+great city is twenty-four miles round the walls, within which are
+several hills. The ordinary dwellings are of earthen walls, and
+sufficiently mean, but the three palaces of the tyrant brothers, and the
+pagodas or idol temples, are built of fine marble, cemented with lime. I
+have seen many kings courts, yet have never seen any thing to compare
+with the greatness of the royal palace of Bijanagur, which hath nine
+gates. First, when you go into that part where the king lodged, there
+are five great gates kept by captains and soldiers: Within these are
+four lesser gates, which are kept by porters. On the outer side of the
+first gate is a small porch or lodge, where there is a captain and
+twenty-five soldiers, who keep watch day and night; and within that
+another, with a similar guard. Through this you enter into a very fair
+court, at the end of which is another porch like the first, with a
+similar guard, and within that another court. Thus the first five gates
+are each guarded by their respective captains. Then each of the lesser
+gates within are kept by a separate guard of porters. These gates stand
+open the greatest part of the night, as it is the custom of the Gentiles
+to transact business and make their feasts during the night, rather than
+in the day. This city is very safe from thieves, insomuch that the
+Portuguese merchants sleep under porches open to the street, and yet
+never meet with any injury.
+
+At the end of two months, I determined to go for Goa, in company with
+two Portuguese merchants, who were making ready to depart in two
+palankins or small litters, which are very convenient vehicles for
+travelling, being carried by eight _falchines_, or bearers, four at a
+time, and other four as reliefs. For my own use I bought two bullocks,
+one to ride upon and the other to carry my provisions. In that country
+they ride upon bullocks, having pannels fastened with girths, and guide
+them with bridles. In summer, the journey from Bijanagur to Goa takes
+only eight days; but we went in July, which is the middle of winter in
+that country, and were fifteen days in going to _Ancola_, on the sea
+coast. On the eighth day of the journey I lost both my bullocks. That
+which carried my provisions was weak, and could not proceed; and on
+passing a river by means of a small foot bridge, I made my other
+bullock swim across, but he stopt on a small island in the middle of the
+river where he found pasture, and we could devise no means to get him
+out. I was under the necessity therefore to leave him, and was forced to
+go on foot for seven days, during which it rained almost incessantly,
+and I suffered great fatigue. By good fortune I met some
+_falchines_[137] by the way, whom I hired to carry my clothes and
+provisions. In this journey we suffered great troubles, being every day
+made prisoners, and had every morning at our departure to pay four or
+five _pagies?_ a man as ransom. Likewise, as we came almost every day
+into the country of a new governor, though all tributary to the king of
+Bijanagur, we found that every one of them had their own copper coin, so
+that the money we got in change one day was not current on the next. At
+length, by the mercy of God, we got safe to _Ancola_, which is in the
+country of the queen of _Gargopam_[138], a tributary to the king of
+Bijanagur.
+
+[Footnote 137: These _falchines_ of Cesar Frederick are now denominated
+_coolies_.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 138: These names of Ancola and Gargopam are so unintelligibly
+corrupted, as not be even conjecturally referable to any places or
+districts in our best maps.--E.]
+
+The merchandise sent every year from Goa to Bijanagur consists of
+Arabian horses, velvets, damasks, satins, armoisins of Portugal,
+porcelain of China, saffron, and scarlet cloth; and at Bijanagur, they
+received in exchange or barter, jewels and pagodas, which are the gold
+ducats of the country. At Bijanagur, according to the state and
+condition of the wearers, the apparel is of velvet, satin, damask,
+scarlet cloth, or white cotton; and they wear long hats on their heads,
+called _colae_, made of similar materials; having girdles round their
+bodies of fine cotton cloth. They wear breeches made like those used by
+the Turks; having on their feet plain high things called _aspergh_. In
+their ears they wear great quantities of golden ornaments.
+
+Returning to my journey. When we got to _Ancola_, one of my companions
+having nothing to lose, took a guide and set out for Goa, which is only
+at the distance of four days journey; but as the other Portuguese was
+not inclined to travel any farther at this season, he and I remained
+there for the winter[139], which beginning on the 15th of May, lasts to
+the end of October. While we tarried there, another horse-merchant
+arrived in a palanquin, together with two Portuguese soldiers from
+Ceylon, and two letter-carriers, who were Christians born in India. All
+these persons agreed to go in company to Goa, and I resolved to go with
+them; for which purpose, I got a sorry palanquin made for me of canes,
+and in the hollow of one of these I concealed all my jewels. According
+to the usual custom, I hired eight _falchines_ or bearers, and we set
+off one day about eleven o'clock. About two o'clock the same day, as we
+were passing a mountain which separates the territory of _Ancola_ from
+that belonging to Abel Khan, and while I was a little way behind the
+rest of the company, I was assaulted by eight robbers, four of whom were
+armed with swords and targets, and the others with bows and arrows. My
+bearers immediately let fall the palanquin and ran off, leaving me alone
+on the ground wrapped up in my clothes. The robbers instantly came up
+and rifled me of every thing I had, leaving me stark naked. I pretended
+to be sick and would not quit the palanquin, in which I had made a kind
+of bed of my spare clothes. After searching with great industry, the
+thieves found two purses in which I had tied up some copper money I had
+got in change for four pagodas at Ancola; and thinking this treasure
+consisted of gold coin, they searched no farther, and went away,
+throwing all my clothes into a bush. Fortunately at their departure they
+dropped a handkerchief which I noticed, and getting up I wrapped it up
+in my palaquin[140]. In this forlorn condition, I had resolved to pluck
+the hollow cane from my palanquin in which my jewels were hid, and to
+have endeavoured to make my own way on foot to Goa, using the cane as a
+walking stick. But my bearers were so faithful that they returned to
+look for me after the robbers departed, which indeed I did not expect,
+as they were paid before hand, according to the custom of India. We got
+to Goa in four days, during which I fared very badly, as the robbers had
+left me no money of any kind, and all I had to eat was given me by my
+bearers for God's sake; but after my arrival in Goa, I paid them royally
+for what they gave me.
+
+[Footnote 139: This winter of our author, on the coast of Canara, in
+about the lat. of 15° N. when the sun is nearly vertical, must be
+understood as the rainy season.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 140: This incident in the text is given as fortunate, and
+perhaps it ought to have been expressed, "He wrapped it about his loins
+and returned to his palanquin."--E.]
+
+From Goa I departed for Cochin, a voyage of 300 miles, there being
+several strong-holds belonging to the Portuguese between these two
+cities, as Onore, Barcelore, Mangalore, and Cananore. Onore, the first
+of these, is in the dominions of the queen of _Battacella_, or
+_Batecolah_, who is tributary to the king of Bijanagur. There is no
+trade at this place, which is only a military post held by a captain
+with a company of soldiers. After this you go to another small castle of
+the Portuguese called Mangalore, in which there is only a small trade in
+rice. Thence you go to a little fort called Bazelore[141], whence a
+great deal of rice is transported to Goa. From thence you go to a city
+named Cananore, which is within a musket-shot of the capital of the king
+of Cananore who is a Gentile[142]. He and his people are wicked and
+malicious, delighting in going to war with the Portuguese; yet when at
+peace they find their interest in trading with them. From this kingdom
+of Cananore is procured great store of cardomums, pepper, ginger, honey,
+cocoa-nuts, and _archa_ or _areka_. This is a fruit about the size of a
+nutmeg, which is chewed in all the Indies, and even beyond them, along
+with the leaf of a plant resembling ivy called _betel_. The nut is
+wrapped up in a leaf of the betel along with some lime made of oyster
+shells, and through all the Indies they spend a great deal of money; on
+this composition, which they use daily, a thing I could not have
+believed if I had not seen it continually practised. A great revenue is
+drawn from this herb, as it pays custom. When they chew this in their
+mouths, it makes their spittle as red as blood, and it is said to
+produce a good appetite and a sweet breath; but in my opinion, they eat
+it rather to satisfy their filthy lusts, for this herb is moist and hot,
+and causes a strong expulsion.
+
+[Footnote 141: This must be Barcelore, and ought to have been named
+before Managalore, as above 50 miles to the north, between Goa and
+Managalore.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 142: This passage ought to have stood thus "The fort of
+Cananore belonging to the Portuguese, only a musket-shot from the city
+of that name, the capital of" &c.--E.]
+
+From Cananore you go Cranganore, which is a small fort of the Portuguese
+in the country of the king of Cranganore, another king of the Gentiles.
+This is a country of small importance of about a hundred miles extent,
+full of thieves, subject to the king of Calicut, who is another king of
+the Gentiles and a great enemy to the Portuguese, with whom he is
+continually engaged in war. This country is a receptacle of foreign
+thieves, and especially of those Moors called _Carposa_, on account of
+their wearing long red caps. These thieves divide the spoil they get
+with the king of Calicut, who gives them leave to go a-roving; so that
+there are so many thieves all along this coast, that there is no sailing
+in those seas except in large ships well armed, or under convoy of
+Portuguese ships of war. From Cranganore to Cochin is 15 miles[143].
+
+[Footnote 143: The direct distance is twenty geographical miles.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_Of Cochin._
+
+
+Cochin, next to Goa, is the chief place in India belonging to the
+Portuguese, and has a great trade in spices, drugs, and all other kinds
+of merchandise for Portugal. Inland from that place is the pepper
+country, which pepper is loaded by the Portuguese in bulk not in sacks.
+The pepper which is sent to Portugal is not so good as that which goes
+up the Red Sea; because in times past the officers of the king of
+Portugal made a contract with the king of Cochin for all the pepper, to
+be delivered at a fixed price, which is very low; and for which reason
+the country people deliver it to the Portuguese unripe and full of dirt.
+As the Moors of Mecca give a better price, they get it clean and dry and
+in much better condition; but all the spices and drugs which they carry
+to Mecca and the Red Sea are contraband and stolen or smuggled. There
+are two cities at Cochin, one of which belongs to the Portuguese and the
+other to the native king; that of the Portuguese being nearer the sea,
+while the native city is a mile and a half farther up the same river.
+They are both on the banks of the same large river, which comes from the
+mountains in the pepper country[144], in which are many Christians of
+the order of St Thomas. The king of Cochin is a Gentile and a steadfast
+friend to the king of Portugal, and to all the Portuguese who are
+married and have become citizens of Cochin. By the name of Portuguese,
+all the Christians are known in India who come from Europe, whether they
+be Italians, Frenchmen, or Germans. All those who marry and settle at
+Cochin get some office according to the trades they are off, by which
+they have great privileges. The two principal commodities in which they
+deal are silk which comes in great quantities from China, and large
+quantities of sugar, which comes from Bengal. The married citizens pay
+no customs for these two commodities; but pay 4s. per centum for all
+other goods to the king of Cochin, rating their own goods almost at
+their own valuation. Those who are not married pay to the king of
+Portugal 8s. per centum for all kinds of commodities. While I was in
+Cochin, the viceroy used his endeavours to break the privileges of these
+married citizens, that they might pay the same rates of customs with
+others. On this occasion the citizens were glad to weigh their pepper in
+the night to evade the customs. When this came to the knowledge of the
+king of Cochin, he put a stop to the delivery of pepper, so that the
+viceroy was glad to allow the merchants to do as formerly.
+
+[Footnote 144: In the version of Cesar Frederick in Hakluyt, it is said
+"to come from the mountains of the king of the pepper country, who is a
+Gentile, and in whose dominions there are many Christians," &c. as in
+the text. This king of the pepper country is probably meant for the
+rajah of Travancore. The great river of the text is merely a sound,
+which reaches along the coast from Cochin to beyond Coulan, a distance
+of above 90 miles, forming a long range of low islands on the sea-coast,
+and receiving numerous small rivers from the southern gauts.--E.]
+
+The king of Cochin has small power in comparison with the other
+sovereigns of India as he is unable to send above 70,000 men into the
+field. He has a great number of gentlemen, some of whom are called
+_Amochi_[145] and others _Nairs_. These two sorts of men do not value
+their lives in any thing which tends to the honour of their king, and
+will run freely into any danger in his service, even if sure to lose
+their lives in the attempt. These men go naked from the waist upwards,
+and barefooted, having only a cloth wrapped about their thighs. Their
+hair is long and rolled up on the top of their heads, and they go always
+armed, carrying bucklers and naked swords. The Nairs have their wives in
+common among themselves, and when any of them goes into the house of one
+of these women, he leaves his sword and buckler at the door, and while
+he is within no other dare enter the house. The king's children never
+inherit the kingdom after their fathers, lest perchance they may have
+been begotten by some other man; wherefore the son of the king's
+sisters, or of some female of the royal-blood succeeds, that they may be
+sure of having a king of the royal family. Those Naires and their wives
+have great holes in their ears by way of ornament, so large and wide as
+is hardly credible, holding that the larger these holes are, so much the
+more noble are they. I had leave from one of them to measure the
+circumference of the hole in one of his ears with a thread; and within
+that circumference I put my arm up to the shoulder with my clothes on,
+so that in fact they are monstrously large. This is begun when they are
+very young, at which time a hole is made in each ear, to which they hang
+a piece of gold or a lump of lead, putting a certain leaf into the hole
+which causes the hole to increase prodigiously. They load ships at
+Cochin both for Portugal and Ormuz: but all the pepper that is carried
+to Ormuz is smuggled. Cinnamon and all other spices and drugs are
+permitted to be exported to Ormuz or Cambaia, as likewise all other
+kinds of merchandise from other parts of India. From Cochin there are
+sent yearly to Portugal great quantities of pepper, dry and preserved
+ginger, wild cinnamon, areka nuts and large store of cordage made of
+_cayro_, that is from the bark of the cocoa-nut tree, which is reckoned
+better than that made of hemp. The ships for Portugal depart every
+season between the 5th of December and the 5th of January.
+
+[Footnote 145: On former occasions these _amochi_ have been explained as
+devoted naires, under a vow to revenge the death of their
+sovereign.--E.]
+
+From Cochin I went to Coulan, at which is a small fort belonging to the
+Portuguese, 72 miles from Cochin. This is a place of small trade, as
+every year a ship gets only half a lading of pepper here, and then goes
+to Cochin to be filled up. From Cochin to Cape Comorin is 72 miles, and
+here ends the Indian coast. Along this coast, and also at Cape Comorin,
+and down to the low lands of _Chialon_[146], which is about 200 miles,
+there are great numbers of the natives converted to the Christian faith,
+and among them are many churches of the order of St Paul, the friars of
+which order do much good in these places, and take great pains to
+instruct the natives in the Christian faith.
+
+[Footnote 146: These geographical notices are inexplicable, unless by
+_Chialon_ is meant the low or maritime parts of Ceylon, which Cesar
+Frederick afterwards calls Zeilan.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Of the Pearl Fishery in the Gulf of Manaar_.
+
+
+The men along the coast which extends from Cape Comorin to the low land
+of _Chioal_[147], and the island of _Zeilan_ or Ceylon, is called the
+pearl-fishery. This fishery is made every year, beginning in March or
+April, and lasts fifty days. The fishery is by no means made every year
+at one place, but one year at one place, and another year at another
+place; all however in the same sea. When the fishing season approaches,
+some good divers are sent to discover where the greatest quantities of
+oysters are to be found under water; and then directly facing that place
+which is chosen for the fishery, a village with a number of houses, and
+a bazar all of stone, is built, which stands as long as the fishery
+lasts, and is amply supplied with all necessaries. Sometimes it happens
+near places already inhabited, and at other times at a distance from any
+habitations. The fishers or divers are all Christians of the country,
+and all are permitted to engage in this fishery, on payment of certain
+duties to the king of Portugal, and to the churches of the friars of St
+Paul on that coast. Happening to be there one year in my peregrinations,
+I saw the order used in fishing, which is as follows.
+
+[Footnote 147: This word is unintelligible, having no similar name in
+modern geography. From the context, it seems to signify the maritime
+coast of Tinnevelly and Marwar, or the most southern part of the
+Carnatic, opposite to Ceylon; and may possibly be that called _Chialon_
+immediately before--E.]
+
+During the continuance of the fishery, there are always three or four
+armed foists or galliots stationed to defend the fishermen from pirates.
+Usually the fishing-boats unite in companies of three or four together.
+These boats resemble our pilot boats at Venice, but are somewhat
+smaller, having seven or eight men in each. I have seen of a morning a
+great number of these boats go out to fish, anchoring in 15 or 18
+fathoms water, which it the ordinary depth all along this coast. When at
+anchor, they cast a rope into the sea, having a great stone at one end.
+Then a man, having his ears well stopped, and his body anointed with
+oil, and a basket hanging to his neck or under his left arm, goes down
+to the bottom of the sea along the rope, and fills his basket with
+oysters as fast as he can. When that is full, he shakes the rope, and
+his companions draw him up with the basket. The divers follow each other
+in succession in this manner, till the boat is loaded with oysters, and
+they return at evening to the fishing village. Then each boat or company
+makes their heap of oysters at some distance from each other, so that a
+long row of great heaps of oysters are seen piled along the shore. These
+are not touched till the fishing is over, when each company sits down
+beside its own heap, and fails to opening the oysters, which is now
+easy, as the fish within are all dead and dry. If every oyster had
+pearls in them, it would be a profitable occupation, but there are many
+which have none. There are certain persons called _Chitini_, who are
+learned in pearls, and are employed to sort and value them, according to
+their weight, beauty, and goodness, dividing them into four sorts. The
+_first_ sort, which are round, are named _aia_ of Portugal, as they are
+bought by the Portuguese: The _second_, which are not round, are named
+_aia_ of Bengal: The _third_, which are inferior to the second, are
+called _aia_ of Canara, which is the name of the kingdom of Bijanagur or
+Narsinga, into which they are sold: And the _fourth_, or lowest kind, is
+called _aia_ of Cambaia, being sold into that country[148]. Thus sorted,
+and prices affixed to each, there are merchants from all countries ready
+with their money, so that in a few days all the pearls are bought up,
+according to their goodness and weight.
+
+[Footnote 148: Pearls are weighed by _carats_, each of which is four
+grains. The men who sort and price them have a copper instrument with
+holes of various sizes, by which they estimate their several
+values.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+In this sea of the pearl-fishery there is an island called _Manaar_,
+over-against Ceylon, inhabited by Christians who were formerly Gentiles,
+and in which island there is a small fort belonging to the Portuguese.
+Between this island and Ceylon there is a narrow channel with a small
+depth of water, through which only small ships can pass at the full and
+change of the moon, when the tides are high, and even then they must put
+their cargoes into lighters to enable them to pass the shoals, after
+which they take in their goods again, and proceed on their voyage. But
+large ships going for the eastern coast of India pass by the coast of
+Coromandel, on the other side of this gulf, beside the land of
+_Chilao_[149], which is between the firm land and the isle of Manaar. On
+this voyage ships are sometimes lost, but they are empty, as ships going
+this way discharge their cargoes at _Periapatam_ into small
+flat-bottomed boats named _Tane_, which can run over any shoal without
+danger, as they always wait at Periapatam for fine weather. On departing
+from Periapatam, the small ships and flat-bottomed boats go always
+together, and on arriving at the shoals about thirty-six miles from that
+place, they are forced through by the winds, which always blow so
+forcibly that they have no means of taking shelter during the passage.
+The flat boats go through safely; but if the small ships happen to miss
+the proper channel, they get fast on the shoals, by which many of them
+are lost. In coming back from the Indies, instead of this passage, they
+take the channel of Manaar, which has an ouze bottom, so that even in
+case of grounding they are generally got off again without damage. The
+reason of not using this passage on the outward voyage is, that the
+prevailing winds between Ceylon and Manaar frequently occasion that
+channel to have so little water that it cannot be navigated. From Cape
+Comorin to the island of Ceylon, the distance is 120 miles.
+
+[Footnote 149: By this account of the matter, the land of _Chilao_
+appears to be the island of Ramiseram, between which and the island of
+Manaar extends a reef of rocks called _Adams Bridge_. The deep channel
+is between Ramiseram and the point of _Tanitory_ on the Coromandel
+coast.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XI.
+
+_Of the Island of Ceylon_
+
+
+In my judgment, the island of Ceylon is a great deal larger than Cyprus.
+On the west side, facing India, is the city of Columba, the principal
+hold of the Portuguese, but without walls or enemies. In this city,
+which has a free port, dwells the lawful king of the whole island, who
+has become a Christian, and is maintained by the king of Portugal,
+having been deprived of his kingdom. The heathen king to whom this
+island formerly belonged was named _Madoni_, who had two sons named
+_Barbinas_ and _Ragine_. By acquiring the favour of the soldiers, the
+younger son Ragine usurped the kingdom, in prejudice of his father and
+elder brother, and became a great warrior. Formerly there were three
+kingdoms in this island. Those were, the kingdom of Cotta, with other
+dependent or conquered provinces: The kingdom of Candy, which had
+considerable power, and was allied to the Portuguese, the king being
+supposed a secret Christian: The third was the kingdom of
+_Gianisampatam_, or Jafnapatam. During thirteen years that _Ragine_
+ruled over this island, he became a great tyrant.
+
+The island of Ceylon produces fine cinnamon and abundance of pepper,
+with great quantities of _nuts_ and _aroche_[150]. They here make great
+quantities of _cayre_ of which ropes are manufactured, as formerly
+noticed. It likewise produces great store of that kind of crystal called
+_ochi de gati_ or cats eyes, and it is said to produce some rubies; but
+on my return thither from Pegu, I sold some rubies here for a good
+price, which I had bought in that country. Being desirous to see how the
+cinnamon is gathered from the trees, and happening to be there during
+the season when it is gathered, which is in the month of April; at this
+time the Portuguese were in the field making war on the king of the
+country, yet to satisfy my curiosity, I took a guide and went out into a
+wood about three miles from the city, where there grew great numbers of
+cinnamon trees intermixed among other wild trees. The cinnamon is a
+small tree not very high, and has leaves resembling those of the bay
+tree. In March or April, when the sap rises, the cinnamon or bark is
+taken from the trees. They cut the bark of the trees round about in
+lengths, from knot to knot, or from joint to joint, both above and
+below, and then easily strip it off with their hands, after which it is
+laid in the sun to dry. Yet for all this the tree does not die, but
+recovers a new bark by the next year. That which is gathered every year
+is the best cinnamon, as what remains upon the trees for two or three
+years becomes thick and coarse, and not so good as the other. In these
+woods there grows much pepper.
+
+[Footnote 150: The author probably here means cocoa-nuts and areka.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XII.
+
+_Of Negapatam._
+
+
+From the island of Ceylon a trade is carried on in small ships to
+Negapatam on the continent, and 72 miles off is a very great and
+populous city, full of Portuguese and native Christians, with many
+Gentiles.[151] Almost the only trade here is for rice and cotton cloth,
+which is carried to various countries. It formerly abounded in victuals,
+on which account many Portuguese resorted thither and built houses, as
+they could live there at small expense, but provisions have now become
+scarcer and dearer. This city belongs to a Gentile nobleman of the
+kingdom of Bijanagur, yet the Portuguese and other Christians are well
+treated, and have built churches, together with a monastery of the
+Franciscans. They live with great devotion, and are well accommodated
+with houses; yet are they among tyrants who may always do them much harm
+at their pleasure, as in reality happened to them in the year 1565. At
+that time the _nayer_ or lord of the city sent to demand from the
+citizens certain Arabian horses, which they refused; whereupon this lord
+gave out that he proposed to take a view of the sea, so that the poor
+citizens doubted some evil was meant against them by this unusual
+circumstance, dreading that he would plunder the city. Accordingly they
+embarked as fast as they could with all their goods and moveables,
+merchandise, jewels, and money, and put off from the shore. But to their
+great misfortune, a great storm arose next night, by which all their
+ships were driven on shore and wrecked, and all their goods which came
+to land were seized by the troops of this great lord, who had come down
+with his army to see the sea.
+
+[Footnote 151: It is not easy to say whether the author means to express
+that Negapatam is this great city 72 miles from Ceylon, or if he refers
+to another city 72 miles from Negapatam.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XIII.
+
+_Of Saint Thome and other places._
+
+
+Following my voyage from Negapatam 150 miles towards the east, I came to
+the house of the blessed apostle St Thomas[152], which is a church held
+in great devotion, and is even much reverenced by the Gentiles, for the
+great miracles which they have heard were performed by that holy
+apostle. Near to this church the Portuguese have built a city, which
+stands in the country that is subject to the king of Bijanagur. Though
+not large, this city, in my judgment, is the handsomest in all that part
+of India, having many good houses with fine gardens in the environs. The
+streets are large and in straight lines, with many well frequented
+churches; and the houses are built contiguous, each having a small door,
+so that every house is sufficiently defensible by the Portuguese against
+the natives. The Portuguese have no other property here beyond their
+houses and gardens, as the sovereignty, together with the customs on
+trade, belong to the king of Bijanagur. These customs are small and
+easy, and the country is very rich and has great trade. Every year there
+come to this port two or three very large and rich ships, besides many
+other small ships. One of these great ships goes to Pegu and the other
+to Malacca, laden with fine _bumbast_ or cotton cloth of all kinds, many
+of them being beautifully painted, and as it were _gilded_ with various
+colours, which grow the livelier the oftener they are washed. There is
+also other cotton cloth that is woven of divers colours and is of great
+value. They also make at St Thome a great quantity of red yarn, dyed
+with a root called _saia_, which never fades in its colour, but grows
+the redder the oftener it is washed. Most of this red yarn is sent to
+Pegu, where it is woven into cloth according to their own fashion, and
+at less cost than can be done at St Thome.
+
+[Footnote 152: St Thome, about 5 miles south from Madras, is about 160
+English miles nearly north from Negapatam.--E.]
+
+The shipping and landing of men and merchandise at St Thome is very
+wonderful to those who have not seen it before. The place is so
+dangerous that ordinary small barks or ships boats cannot be used, as
+these would be beaten to pieces; but they have certain high barks made
+on purpose, which they call _Masadie_ or _Mussolah_, made of small
+boards sewed together with small cords, in which the owners will embark
+either men or goods. They are laden upon dry land, after which the
+boatmen thrust the loaded boat into the stream, when with the utmost
+speed they exert themselves to row her out against the huge waves of the
+sea which continually best on that shore, and so carry them out to the
+ships. In like manner these _Masadies_ are laden at the ships with men
+and merchandise; and when they come near the shore, the men leap out
+into the sea to keep the bark right, that she may not cast athwart the
+shore, and keeping her right stem on, the surf of the sea sets her with
+her lading high and dry on the land without hurt or danger. Yet
+sometimes these boats are overset; but there can be but small loss on
+such occasions, as they lade but little at a time. All the goods carried
+outwards in this manner are securely covered with ox hides, to prevent
+any injury from wetting.
+
+In my return voyage in 1566, I went from Goa to Malacca in a ship or
+galleon belonging to the king of Portugal, which was bound for Banda to
+lade nutmegs and mace. From Goa to Malacca it is 1800 miles. We passed
+without the island of Ceylon and went through the channel of _Nicobar_,
+and then through the channel of _Sombrero_, past the island of Sumatra,
+called in old times _Taprobana_.[153] Nicobar, off the coast of Pegu,
+consists of a great multitude of islands, many of which are inhabited by
+a wild people. These islands are likewise called _Andemaon_ or
+Andaman.[154] The natives are savages who eat each other, and are
+continually engaged in war, which they carry on in small boats, chiefly
+to make prisoners for their cannibal feasts. When by any chance a ship
+happens to be cast away on those islands, as many have been, the men are
+sure to be slain and devoured. These savages have no trade or
+intercourse with any other people, but live entirely on the productions
+of their own islands. In my voyage from Malacca through the channel of
+Sombrero, two boats came off from these islands to our ship laden with
+fruit, such as _Mouces_ which we call Adams apples, with fresh cocoa
+nuts, and another fruit named _Inani_, much like our turnips, but very
+sweet and good to eat. These people could not be prevailed on to come on
+board our ship, neither would they accept payment for their fruit in
+money, but bartered them for old shirts or old trowsers. These rags were
+let down from the ship into their boats by a rope, and when they had
+considered what they were worth in their estimation, they tied as much
+fruit as they thought proper to give in exchange to the rope, which they
+allowed us to hale up. I was told that sometimes a man may get a
+valuable piece of amber for an old shirt.
+
+[Footnote 153: The Taprobana or Sielendive of the ancients certainly was
+Ceylon, not Sumatra.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 154: The Andaman and Nicobar islands, in long. 93° East from
+Greenwich, reach from the lat. of 6° 45' to 15° N.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XIV.
+
+_Of the Island of Sumatra and the City of Malacca_.
+
+
+The island of Sumatra is very large and is governed by many kings, being
+divided by many channels through which there is a passage[155]. Towards
+the west end is the kingdom of _Assi_ or _Acheen_, under a Mahometan
+king who has great military power, besides a great number of
+_foists_[156] and gallies. This kingdom produces large quantities of
+pepper, besides ginger and benzoin. The king is a bitter enemy to the
+Portuguese, and has frequently gone against Malacca, doing great injury
+to its dependent towns, but was always bravely resisted by the citizens,
+with great injury to his camp and navy, done by their artillery from the
+walls and batteries.
+
+[Footnote 155: This assertion is unintelligible, unless the author means
+to include a number of small islands off the coast as belonging to
+Sumatra.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 156: Foists are described as a kind of brigantines, rather
+larger than half gallies, and much used by the Turks and other eastern
+nations in those days for war. _Maons_, formerly mentioned among the
+ships of Soliman Pacha in the siege of Diu, are said to have been large
+flat-bottomed vessels or hulks, of 700 or 800 tons burden, having
+sometimes _seven_ mizen sails.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+Leaving Sumatra on the right hand, I came to Malacca, which is a city of
+wonderful trade in all kinds of merchandise from various parts, as all
+ships frequenting those seas whether large or small must stop at Malacca
+to pay customs, even though they do not load or unload any part of their
+cargoes at that place, just as all ships in Europe frequenting the
+Baltic must do at Elsineur. Should any pass under night without paying
+the dues at Malacca, they fall into great danger afterwards, if found
+any where in India without the _seal of Malacca_, having in that case to
+pay double duties.
+
+I have not gone beyond Malacca during my Indian peregrinations. Indeed
+the trade to the east of Malacca, particularly to China and Japan, is
+not free for all, being reserved by the king of Portugal to himself and
+his nobles, or to those who have special leave for this purpose from the
+king, who expects to know what voyages are made from Malacca eastwards.
+The royal voyages from Malacca eastwards are as follow. Every year two
+galleons belonging to the king depart from Malacca, one of which is
+bound for the Moluccas to lade cloves, and the other goes to Banda for
+nutmegs and mace. These two are entirely laden on the kings account, and
+do not take any goods belonging to individuals, saving only the
+privilege of the mariners and soldiers. Hence these voyages are not
+frequented by merchants, who would have no means of transporting their
+return goods, and besides the captains of these ships are not permitted
+to carry any merchants thither. There go however to these places some
+small ships belonging to the Moors from the coast of Java, who exchange
+or barter their commodities in the kingdom of Acheen. These are mace,
+cloves, and nutmegs, which are sent from Acheen to the Red Sea. The
+voyages which the king of Portugal grants to his nobles, are those from
+China to Japan and back to China, from China to India, and those of
+Bengal, the Moluccas, and Sunda, with fine cloth and all kinds of cotton
+goods.
+
+Sunda is an island of the Moors near the coast of Java, whence pepper is
+curried to China. The ship which goes yearly from India to China is
+called the _drug ship_, because she carries various drugs of Cambaia,
+but her principal lading consists of silver. From Malacca to China the
+distance is 1800 miles; and from China there goes every year a large
+ship to Japan laden with silk, in return for which she brings back bars
+of silver which are bartered in China for goods. The distance between
+Japan and China is 2400 miles, in which sea there are several islands of
+no great size, in which the friars of St Paul, by the blessing of God,
+have made many Christians _like themselves_: But from these islands the
+seas have not been fully explored and discovered, on account of the
+great numbers of shoals and sand banks [157].
+
+[Footnote 157: The text in this place it erroneous or obscure. The
+indicated distance between China and Japan is enormously exaggerated,
+and probably ought to have been stated as between Malacca and Japan. The
+undiscovered islands and shoals seem to refer to the various islands
+between Java and Japan, to the east and north.--E.]
+
+The Portuguese have a small city named Macao on an island near the
+coast of China, in which the church and houses are built of wood. This
+is a bishopric, but the customs belong to the king of China, and are
+payable at the city of Canton, two days journey and a half from Macao,
+and a place of great importance. The people of China are heathens, and
+are so fearful and jealous that they are unwilling to permit any
+strangers to enter their country. Hence when the Portuguese go there to
+pay their customs and to buy goods, they are not allowed to lodge within
+the city, but are sent out to the suburbs. This country of China, which
+adjoins to great Tartary, is of vast size and importance, as may be
+judged by the rich and precious merchandise which comes from thence,
+than which I believe there are none better or more abundant in quantity
+in all the world besides. In the first place it affords great quantities
+of gold, which is carried thence to the Indies made into small plates
+_like little ships_, and in value 23 _carats_ each[158]; large
+quantities of fine silk, with damasks and taffetas; large quantities of
+musk and of _occam_[159] in bars, quicksilver, cinabar, camphor,
+porcelain in vessels of divers sorts, painted cloth, and squares, and
+the drug called Chinaroot. Every year two or three large ships go from
+China to India laden with these rich and precious commodities. Rhubarb
+goes from thence over land by way of Persia, as there is a caravan every
+year from Persia to China, which takes six months to go there and as
+long to return. This caravan arrives at a place called _Lanchin_, where
+the king and his court reside. I conversed with a Persian who had been
+three years in that city of _Lanchin_, and told me that it was a city of
+great size and wealth.
+
+[Footnote 158: Perhaps the author may have expressed _of 23 carats
+fine_.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 159: Perhaps the mixed metal called tutenag may be here
+meant.--E.]
+
+The voyages which are under the jurisdiction of the captain of Malacca
+are the following. Every year he sends a small ship to Timor to load
+white sandal wood, the best being to be had in that island. He also
+sends another small ship yearly to Cochin-China for aloes wood, which is
+only to be procured in that country, which is on the continent adjoining
+to China. I could never learn in what manner that wood grows, as the
+people of Cochin-China will not allow the Portuguese to go into the
+land except for wood and water, bringing provisions and merchandise and
+all other things they want to their ships in small barks, so that a
+market is held daily on the deck of the ship till she is laden. Another
+ship goes yearly from Malacca for Siam to lade _Verzino_[160]. All these
+voyages belong exclusively to the captain of Malacca, and when he is not
+disposed to make them on his own account he sells them to others.
+
+[Footnote 160: From another part of this voyage it appears that this is
+some species of seed from which oil was expressed.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XV.
+
+_Of the City of Siam_.
+
+
+Siam was the imperial seat of the kingdom of that name and a great city,
+till the year 1567, when it was taken by the king of Pegu, who came by
+land with a prodigious army of 1,400,000 men, marching for four months,
+and besieged Siam for twenty-two mouths, during which he lost a vast
+number of men, and at lost won the city. I happened to be in the city of
+Pegu about six months after his departure on this expedition, and saw
+the governors left by him in the command of Pegu send off 500,000 men,
+to supply the places of those who were slain in this siege. Yet after
+all he would not have won the place unless for treachery, in consequence
+of which one of the gates was left open, through which he forced his way
+with great trouble into the city. When the king of Siam found that he
+was betrayed and that his enemy had gained possession of the city, he
+poisoned himself. His wives and children, and all his nobles that were
+not slain during the siege, were carried captives to Pegu. I was there
+at the return of the king in triumph from this conquest, and his entry
+into Pegu was a goodly sight, especially the vast number of elephants
+laden with gold, silver, and jewels, and carrying the noblemen and women
+who were made captives at Siam.
+
+To return to my voyage. I departed from Malacca in a great ship bound
+for St Thome on the coast of Coromandel, and as at that time the captain
+of Malacca had intelligence that the king of Acheen meant to come
+against Malacca with a great fleet and army, he refused to allow any
+ships to depart. On this account we departed from Malacca under night
+without having made any provision of water; and being upwards of 400
+persons on board, we proposed to have gone to a certain island for
+water, but by contrary winds we were unable to accomplish this, and were
+driven about by the tempests for forty-two days, the mountains of
+_Zerzerline_ near the kingdom of _Orissa_, 500 miles beyond St Thome,
+being the first land we got sight of. So we came to Orissa with many
+sick, and had lost a great number for want of water. The sick generally
+died in four days illness. For the space of a year after, my throat
+continued sore and hoarse, and I could never satisfy my insatiable
+thirst. I judged the reason of this hoarseness to be from the continual
+use of sippets dipped in vinegar and oil, on which I sustained my life
+for many days. We had no scarcity of bread or wine; but the wines of
+that country are so hot that they cannot be drank without water, or they
+produce death. When we began to want water, I saw certain Moors who were
+officers in the ship who sold a small dish of water for a ducat, and I
+have afterwards seen a _bar_ of pepper, which is two quintals and a
+half, offered for a small measure, and it could not be had even at that
+price. I verily believe I must have died, together with my slave, whom I
+had bought at a high price, had I not sold him for half his value, that
+I might save his drink to supply my own urgent wants, and save my own
+life.
+
+
+SECTION XVI.
+
+_Of the Kingdom of Orissa and the River Ganges_.
+
+
+This was a fair and well regulated kingdom, through which a man might
+have travelled with gold in his hand without danger, so long as it was
+governed by its native sovereign who was a Gentile, and resided in the
+city of _Catecha_[161] six days journey inland. This king loved
+strangers, especially merchants who traded in his dominions, insomuch
+that he took no customs from them, neither did he vex them with any
+grievous impositions, only that each ship that came thither paid some
+small affair in proportion to her tonnage. Owing to this good treatment
+twenty-five ships, great and small, used to lade yearly in the port of
+Orissa, mostly with rice and with different kinds of white cotton
+cloths, oil of _zerzerline_ or _verzino_ which is made from a seed, and
+answers well for eating or frying fish, lac, long pepper, ginger, dry
+and candied mirabolans, and great store of cloth made from a kind of
+silk which grows on trees requiring no labour or cultivation, as when
+the _bole_ or round pod is grown to the size of an orange, all they have
+to do is to gather it. About sixteen years before this, the Pagan king
+of Orissa was defeated and slain and his kingdom conquered, by the king
+of _Patane_[162], who was also king of the greatest part of Bengal.
+After the conquest of Orissa, this king imposed a duty of 20 per centum
+on all trade, as had been formerly paid in his other dominions. But this
+king did not enjoy his acquisitions long, being soon conquered by
+another tyrant, who was the great Mogul of Delhi, Agra, and Cambaia,
+against whom the king of Patane made very little resistance.
+
+[Footnote 161: Cuttack, at the head of the Delta of the Mahamuddy or
+Gongah river, in lat. 20° 32' N. lon. 86° 9' E. is probably here meant,
+It is only about 45 miles from the sea, but might have been six days
+journey from the port where the author took shelter, which probably was
+Balasore.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 162: Probably so called from residing at Patna, called Patane
+in the text.--E.]
+
+Departing from Orissa I went to the harbour of _Piqueno_ in Bengal, 170
+miles to the east from Orissa. We went in the first place along the
+coast for 54 miles when we entered the river Ganges. From the mouth of
+this river to a place called _Satagan_, where the merchants assemble
+with their commodities, are 100 miles, to which place they row up the
+river along with the flood tide in _eighteen_ hours. This river ebbs and
+flows as it does in the Thames, and when the ebb begins, although their
+barks are light and propelled with oars like foists, they cannot row
+against the ebb tide, but must make fast to one of the banks of the
+river and wait for next flood. These boats are called _bazaras_ and
+_patuas_, and row as well as a galliot or any vessel I have ever seen.
+At the distance of a good tide rowing before reaching _Satagan_ we come
+to a place called _Buttor_, which ships do not go beyond, as the river
+is very shallow upwards. At _Buttore_ a village is constructed every
+year, in which all the houses and shops are made of straw, and have
+every necessary convenience for the use of the merchants. This village
+continues as long as the ships remain there; but when they depart for
+the Indies, every man goes to his plot of houses and sets them on fire.
+This circumstance seemed very strange to me; for as I passed up the
+river to _Satagan_, I saw this village standing, having a great
+multitude of people with many ships and bazars; and at my return along
+with the captain of the last ship, for whom I tarried, I was amazed to
+see no remains of the village except the appearance of the burnt houses,
+all having been razed and burnt.
+
+Small ships go up to _Satagan_ where they load and unload their cargoes.
+In this port of _Satagan_ twenty-five or thirty ships great and small
+are loaded yearly with rice, cotton cloths of various kinds, lac, great
+quantities of sugar, dried and preserved mirabolans, long pepper, oil of
+_Verzino_, and many other kinds of merchandise. The city of Satagan is
+tolerably handsome as a city of the Moors, abounding in every thing, and
+belonged formerly to the king of _Patane_ or _Patna_, but is now subject
+to the great Mogul. I was in this kingdom four months, where many
+merchants bought or hired boats for their convenience and great
+advantage, as there is a fair every day in one town or city of the
+country. I also hired a bark and went up and down the river in the
+prosecution of my business, in the course of which I saw many strange
+things.
+
+The kingdom of Bengal has been long under the power of the Mahomedans,
+yet there are many Gentile inhabitants. Wherever I speak of Gentiles I
+am to be understood as signifying idolaters, and by Moors I mean the
+followers of Mahomet. The inhabitants of the inland country do greatly
+worship the river Ganges; for if any one is sick, he is brought from the
+country to the banks of the river, where they build for him a cottage of
+straw, and every day they bathe him in the river. Thus many die at the
+side of the Ganges, and after their death they make a heap of boughs and
+sticks on which they lay the dead body and then set the pile on fire.
+When the dead body is half roasted, it is taken from the fire, and
+having an empty jar tied about its neck is thrown into the river. I saw
+this done every night for two months as I passed up and down the river
+in my way to the fairs to purchase commodities from the merchants. On
+account of this practice the Portuguese do not drink the water of the
+Ganges, although it appears to the eye much better and clearer than that
+of the Nile.
+
+"Of _Satagan, Buttor_, and _Piqueno_, in the kingdom of Bengal, no
+notices are to be found in the best modern maps of that country, so that
+we can only approximate their situation by guess. Setting out from what
+the author calls the port of _Orissa_, which has already been
+conjectured to be Balasore, the author coasted to the river Ganges, at
+the distance of 54 miles. This necessarily implies the western branch of
+the Ganges, or _Hoogly_ river, on which the English Indian capital,
+_Calcutta_, now stands. _Satagan_ is said to have been 100 miles up the
+river, which would carry us up almost to the city of _Sautipoor_, which
+may possibly have been _Satagan_. The two first syllables of the name
+are almost exactly the same, and the final syllable in Sauti_poor_ is a
+Persian word signifying town, which may have been _gan_ in some other
+dialect. The entire distance from _Balasore_, or the port of Orissa, to
+_Piqueno_ is stated at 170 miles, of which 154 have been already
+accounted for, so that Piqueno must have been only about 16 miles above
+Satagan, and upon the Ganges[163]."--ED.
+
+[Footnote 163: These observations, distinguished by inverted commas, are
+placed in the text, as too long for a note.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XVII.
+
+_Of Tanasserim and other Places_.
+
+
+In continuation of my peregrinations, I sailed from the port of
+_Piqueno_ to Cochin, from whence I went to Malacca, and afterwards to
+Pegu, being 800 miles distant. That voyage is ordinarily performed in
+twenty-five or thirty days; but we were four months on the way, and at
+the end of three months we were destitute of provisions. The pilot
+alleged that, according to the latitude by his observation, we could not
+be far from _Tanassery_, or _Tanasserim_, a city in the kingdom of Pegu.
+In this he was mistaken, as we found ourselves in the middle of many
+islands and uninhabited rocks, yet some Portuguese who were on board
+affirmed that they knew the land, and could even point out where the
+city of Tanasserim stood. This city belongs of right to Siam, and is
+situated on the side of a great river, which comes from the kingdom of
+Siam. At the month of this river there is a village called _Mirgim,
+Merghi_, or _Morgui_, at which some ships load every year with
+_Verzino_, _Nypa_, and Benzoin, with a few cloves, nutmegs, and mace,
+that come from Siam; but the principal merchandise are _Verzino_ and
+_Nypa_. This last is an excellent wine, which is made from the flower of
+a tree called _Nyper_. They distil the liquor prepared from the _Nyper_,
+and make therewith an excellent drink, as clear as crystal, which is
+pleasant to the taste, and still better to the stomach, as it has most
+excellent virtues, insomuch that if a person were rotten with the lues,
+and drinks abundantly of this wine, he shall be made whole, as I have
+seen proved: For when I was in Cochin, the nose of a friend of mine
+began to drop off with that disease, on which he was advised by the
+physicians to go to Tanasserim at the season of the new wines, and to
+drink the _Nyper_ wine day and night, as much as he was able. He was
+ordered to use it before being distilled, when it is most delicate; for
+after distillation it become much stronger, and is apt to produce
+drunkenness. He went accordingly, and did as he was directed, and I have
+seen him since perfectly sound and well-coloured. It is very cheap in
+Pegu, where a great quantity is made every year; but being in great
+repute in the Indies, it is dear when carried to a distance.
+
+I now return to my unfortunate voyage, where we were among the
+uninhabited rocks and islands far from Tanasserim, and in great straits
+for victuals. From what was said by the pilot and two Portuguese, that
+we were directly opposite the harbour of Tanasserim, we determined to go
+thither in out boat to bring provisions, leaving orders to the ship to
+await our return. Accordingly, twenty-eight of us went into the boat,
+and left the ship about noon one day, expecting to get into the harbour
+before night; but, after rowing all that day and the next night, and all
+the ensuing day, we could find no harbour nor any fit place to land;
+for, trusting to the ignorant counsel of the pilot and the two
+Portuguese, we had overshot the harbour and left it behind us. In this
+way we twenty-eight unfortunate persons in the boat lost both our ship
+and the inhabited land, and were reduced to the utmost extremity, having
+no victuals along with us. By the good providence of God, one of the
+mariners in the boat had brought a small quantity of rice along with
+him, intending to barter it for some other thing, though the whole was
+so little that three or four men might have eaten it all at one meal. I
+took charge of this small store, engaging, with God's blessing, that it
+should serve to keep us all in life, till it might please God to send us
+to some inhabited place, and when I slept I secured it in my bosom, that
+I might not be robbed of my precious deposit. We were nine days rowing
+along the coast, finding nothing but an uninhabited country and desert
+islands, where even grass would have been esteemed a luxury in our
+miserable state. We found indeed some leaves of trees, but so hard that
+we could not chew them. We had wood and water enough, and could only row
+along with the flood tide, as when it ebbed we had to make fast our boat
+to one of the desert islands. On one of these days, it pleased God that
+we discovered a nest or hole, in which were 144 tortoise eggs, which
+proved a wonderful help to us, as they were as large as hens eggs,
+covered only by a tender skin, instead of a shell. Every day we boiled a
+kettle full of these eggs, mixing a handful of rice among the broth. At
+the end of nine days, it pleased God that we discovered some fishermen
+in small barks, employed in catching fish. We rowed immediately towards
+them with much delight and thankfulness, for never were men more glad
+than we, being so much reduced by famine that we could hardly stand on
+our legs; yet, according to the allotment we had made of our rice, we
+still had as much as would have served four days. The first village we
+came to was in the gulf of _Tavay_, on the coast of Tanasserim, in the
+dominions of Pegu, where we found plenty of provisions; yet for two or
+three days after our arrival none of us could eat much, and most of us
+were at the point of death. From Tavay to _Martaban_, in the kingdom of
+Pegu, the distance is 72 miles[164]. We loaded our boat at Tavay with
+provisions sufficient for six months, and then went in our boat to the
+city and port of Martaban, in the kingdom of Pegu, and arrived there in
+a short time. But not finding our ship there as we hoped, we dispatched
+two barks in search of her. They found her in great calamity at an
+anchor, with a contrary wind, which was exceedingly unfortunate for the
+people, especially as they had been a whole month without a boat, which
+prevented them from making any provision of wood and water. The ship,
+however, arrived safe, by the blessing of God, in the harbour of
+Martaban.
+
+[Footnote 164: On the coast of Tanasserim, in lat. 13° N. is an island
+called _Tavay_, so that the gulf of Tavay in the text was probably in
+that neighbourhood. Martaban is in lat. 16° 40' N. So that the
+difference of latitude is 8° 40', and the distance cannot be less than
+250 miles.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XVIII
+
+_Of Martaban and the Kingdom of Pegu._
+
+
+On our arrival at Martaban we found about ninety Portuguese there,
+including merchants and lower people, who had fallen at variance with
+the governor of the city, because certain vagabond Portuguese had slain
+five _falchines,_ or porters, belonging to the king of Pegu. According
+to the custom of that country, when the king of Pegu happens to be at a
+distance from his capital, a caravan, or company of _falchines_, is
+dispatched every fifteen days, each of them having a basket on his head
+full of fruit or some other delicacy, or clean clothes for the king's
+use. It accordingly happened, about a month after the king of Pegu had
+gone against Siam, with 1,400,000 men, that one of these caravans stopt
+at Martaban, to rest for the night. On this occasion a quarrel ensued
+between them and some Portuguese, which ended in blows, and the
+Portuguese being worsted, returned upon the _falchines_ in the night,
+while they were asleep, and cut off five of their heads. There is a law
+in Pegu, that whosoever sheds the blood of a man, shall pay the price of
+blood according to the rank of the person slain: but as these
+_falchines_ were the servants of the king, the governor of Martaban
+durst not do any thing in the matter without the king's orders. The king
+was accordingly informed of the affair, and gave orders that the
+malefactors should be kept in custody till his return, when he would
+duly administer justice, but the captain of the Portuguese refused to
+deliver up these men to the governor, and even armed himself and the
+other Portuguese, marching every day about the city, with drums beating
+and displayed colours, as in despite of the governor, who was unable to
+enforce his authority, as the city was almost empty of men, all who were
+fit for war having gone with the vast army against Siam.
+
+We arrived at Martaban in the midst of this difference, and I thought it
+a very strange thing to see the Portuguese behave themselves with such
+insolence in the city of a sovereign prince. Being very doubtful of the
+consequences, I did not think proper to land my goods, which I
+considered in greater safety on board ship than on shore. Most part of
+the goods on board belonged to the owner, who was at Malacca; but there
+were several merchants in the ship who had goods, though none of them
+had to any great value, and all of them declared they would not land any
+of their goods unless I landed mine; yet they afterwards neglected my
+advice and example, and landed their goods, all of which were
+accordingly lost. The governor and intendant of the custom-house sent
+for me, and demanded to know why I did not land my goods, and pay the
+duties like the rest; on which I said that I was a stranger, only new to
+the country, and observing so much disorder among the Portuguese, I was
+afraid to lose my goods, which I was determined not to bring on shore,
+unless the governor would promise me in the king's name that no harm
+should come to me or my goods, whatever might happen to the Portuguese,
+with whom I had taken no part in the late tumult. As what I said seemed
+reasonable, the governor sent for the _Bargits_, who are the councillors
+of the city, who engaged, in the name of the king, that neither I nor my
+goods should meet with any injury, and of which they made a notarial
+entry or memorandum. I then sent for my goods, and paid the customs,
+which is ten per centum of the value at that port; and for my greater
+security I hired a house for myself and my goods, directly facing the
+house of the governor.
+
+In the sequel, the captain of the Portuguese and all the merchants of
+that nation, were driven out of the city, in which I remained, along
+with twenty-one poor men, who were officers in the ship I came in from
+Malacca. The Gentiles had determined on being revenged of the Portuguese
+for their insolence, but had delayed till all the goods were landed from
+our ship; and the very next night there arrived four thousand soldiers
+from Pegu, with some war elephants. Before these made any stir in the
+city, the governor issued orders to all the Portuguese, in case of
+hearing any noise or clamour in the city, not to stir from their houses
+on pain of death. About four hours after sunset, I heard a prodigious
+noise and tumult of men and elephants, who were bursting open the doors
+of the Portuguese warehouses, and overturning their houses of wood and
+straw, in which tumult some of the Portuguese were wounded, and one of
+them slain. Many of those who had before boasted of their courage, now
+fled on board some small vessels in the harbour, some of them fleeing
+naked from their beds. That night the Peguers carried all the goods
+belonging to the Portuguese from the suburbs into the city, and many of
+the Portuguese were likewise arrested. After this, the Portuguese who
+had fled to the ships resumed courage, and, landing in a body, set fire
+to the houses in the suburbs, and as these were entirely composed of
+boards covered with straw, and the wind blew fresh at the time, the
+entire suburbs were speedily consumed, and half of the city had like to
+have been destroyed. After this exploit, the Portuguese had no hopes of
+recovering any part of their goods, which might amount to the value of
+16,000 ducats, all of which they might assuredly have got back if they
+had not set the town on fire.
+
+Understanding that the late seizure of their goods had been done by the
+sole authority of the governor of Martaban, without authority from the
+king of Pegu, they were sensible of the folly of their proceedings in
+setting the town on fire; yet next morning they began to discharge their
+cannon against the town, and continued their cannonade for four days,
+yet all in vain, as their balls were intercepted by the top of a small
+hill or rising ground which intervened, and did no harm to the city. At
+this time the governor arrested the twenty-one Portuguese who were in
+the city, and sent them to a place four miles up the country, where they
+were detained till such time as the other Portuguese departed with their
+ships, after which they were allowed to go where they pleased, having no
+farther harm done them. During all these turmoils I remained quietly in
+my house, under the protection of a strong guard appointed by the
+governor, to prevent any one from doing harm to me or my goods. In this
+manner he effectually performed the promise he had made me in the king's
+name; but he would on no account permit me to depart till the king
+returned from Siam to Pegu, which was greatly to my hindrance, as I
+remained twenty-one months under sequestration, during all which time I
+could neither buy nor sell any kind of goods whatever. Those commodities
+which I had brought with me were pepper, sandal wood, and porcelain of
+China. At length, when the king came back to Pegu, I made my
+supplication to him, and had liberty to go when and where I pleased.
+Accordingly, I immediately departed from Martaban for Pegu, the capital
+city of the kingdom of that name, being a voyage by sea of three or four
+days. We may likewise go by land between these two places, but it is
+much better and cheaper for anyone that has goods to transport, as I
+had, to go by sea.
+
+In this short voyage we meet with the _Macareo_, or _bore_ of the sea,
+which is one of the most marvellous of the works of nature, and one of
+these hardest to be believed if not seen. This consists in the
+prodigious increase and diminution of the water of the sea all at one
+push or instant, and the horrible noise and earthquake which this
+Macareo produces when it makes its approach. We went from Martaban in
+barks like our pilot boats, taking the flood tide along with us, and
+they went with the most astonishing rapidity, as swift as an arrow from
+a bow as long as the flow lasts. Whenever the water is at the highest,
+these barks are carried out of the mid-channel to one or other bank of
+the river, where they anchor out of the way of the stream of the ebb,
+remaining dry at low water; and when the ebb is completely run out, then
+are the barks left on high above the water in the mid-channel, as far as
+the top of a house is from the foundation. The reason of thus anchoring
+so far from the mid-stream or channel is, that when the first of the
+flood, Macareo or bore, comes in, any ship or vessel riding in the fair
+way or mid-channel would surely be overthrown and destroyed. And even
+with this precaution of anchoring so far above the channel, so that the
+bore has lost much of its force before rising so high as to float them,
+yet they always moor with their bows to the stream, which still is often
+so powerful as to put them in great fear; for if the anchor did not hold
+good, they would be in the utmost danger of being lost. When the water
+begins to increase, it comes on with a prodigious noise as if it were an
+earthquake. In its first great approach it makes three great waves. The
+first wave washes over the bark from stem to stem: The second is not so
+strong; at the third they raise the anchor and resume their voyage up
+the river, rowing with such swiftness that they seem to fly for the
+space of six hours, while the flood lasts. In these tides there must be
+no time lost, for if you arrive not at the proper station before the
+flood is spent, you must turn back from whence you came, as there is no
+staying at any place except at these stations, some of which are more
+dangerous than others, according as they happen to be higher or lower.
+On returning from Pegu to Martaban they never continue more than half
+ebb, that they may have it in their power to lay their barks high upon
+the bank, for the reason already given. I could never learn any reason
+for the prodigious noise made by the water in this extraordinary rise of
+the tide. There is another Macareo in the gulf of Cambay, as formerly
+mentioned, but it is nothing in comparison of this in the river of Pegu.
+
+With the blessing of God we arrived safe at Pegu, which consists of two
+cities, the old and the new, all the merchants of the country and
+stranger merchants residing in the old city, in which is far the
+greatest trade. The city itself is not very large, but it has very great
+suburbs. The houses are all built of canes, and covered with leaves or
+straw; but every merchant has one house or magazine, called _Godown_,
+built of bricks, in which they secure their most valuable commodities,
+to save them from fire, which frequently happens to houses built of such
+combustible materials.
+
+In the new city is the royal palace, in which the king dwells, with all
+his nobles and officers of state, and attendants. While I was there the
+building of the new city was completed. It is of considerable size,
+built perfectly square upon an uniform level, and walled round, having a
+wet ditch on the outside, filled with crocodiles, but there are no
+draw-bridges. Each side of the square has five gates, being twenty in
+all; and there are many places on the walls for centinels, built of
+wood, and gilded over with gold. The streets are all perfectly straight,
+so that from any of the gates you can see clear through to the opposite
+gate, and they are so broad that 10 or 12 horsemen may ride abreast with
+ease. The cross streets are all equally broad and straight, and on each
+side of all the streets close to the houses there is a row of cocoa-nut
+trees, making a most agreeable shade. The houses are all of wood,
+covered with a kind of tiles, in the form of cups, very necessary and
+useful in that country. The palace is in the middle of the city, walled
+round like a castle, the lodgings within being built of wood, all over
+gilded, and richly adorned with pinnacles of costly work, covered all
+over with gold, so that it may truly be called a king's house. Within
+the gate is a large handsome court, in which are lodges for the
+strongest and largest elephants, which are reserved for the king's use,
+among which are four that are entirely white, a rarity that no other
+king can boast of; and were the king of Pegu to hear that any other king
+had white elephants, he would send and demand them as a gift. While I
+was there two such were brought out of a far distant country, which cost
+me something for a sight of them, as the merchants were commanded to go
+to see them, and every one was obliged to give something to the keepers.
+The brokers gave for every merchant half a ducat, which they call a
+_tansa_, and this produced a considerable sum, as there were a great
+many merchants in the city. After paying the _tansa_, they may either
+visit the elephants or not as they please, as after they are put into
+the king's stalls, every one may see them whenever they will. But before
+this, every one mast go to see them, such being the royal pleasure.
+Among his other titles, this king is called _King of the White
+Elephants_; and it is reported that if he knew of any other king having
+any white elephants who would not resign them to him, he would hazard
+his whole kingdom to conquer them. These white elephants are so highly
+esteemed that each of them has a house gilded all over, and they are
+served with extraordinary care and attention in vessels of gold and
+silver. Besides these white elephants, there is a black one of most
+extraordinary size, being _nine cubits high_. It is reported that this
+king has four thousand war elephants, all of which have teeth. They are
+accustomed to put upon their uppermost teeth certain sharp spikes of
+iron, fastened on with rings, because these animals fight with their
+teeth. He has also great numbers of young elephants, whose teeth are not
+yet grown.
+
+In this country they have a curious device for hunting or taking
+elephants, which is erected about two miles from the capital. At that
+place there is a fine palace gilded all over, within which is a
+sumptuous court, and all round the outside there are a great number of
+places for people to stand upon to see the hunting. Near this place is a
+very large wood or forest, through which a great number of the king's
+huntsmen ride on the backs of female elephants trained on purpose, each
+huntsman having five or six of these females, and it is said that their
+parts are anointed with a certain composition, the smell of which so
+powerfully attracts the wild males that they cannot leave them, but
+follow them wheresoever they go. When the huntsmen find any of the wild
+elephants so entangled, they guide the females towards the palace, which
+is called a _tambell_, in which there is a door which opens and shuts by
+machinery, before which door there is a long straight passage having
+trees on both sides, so that it is very close and dark. When the wild
+elephant comes to this avenue, he thinks himself still in the woods. At
+the end of this avenue there is a large field, and when the hunters have
+enticed their prey into this field, they immediately send notice to the
+city, whence come immediately fifty or sixty horsemen, who beset the
+field all round. Then the females which are bred to this business go
+directly to the entry of the dark avenue, and when the wild male
+elephant has entered therein, the horsemen shout aloud and make as much
+noise as possible to drive the wild elephant forward to the gate of the
+palace, which is then open, and as soon as he is gone in, the gate is
+shut without any noise. The hunters, with the female elephants and the
+wild one, are all now within the court of the palace, and the females
+now withdraw one by one from the court, leaving the wild elephant alone,
+finding himself thus alone and entrapped, he is so madly enraged for two
+or three hours, that it is wonderful to behold. He weepeth, he flingeth,
+he runneth, he jostleth, he thrusteth under the galleries where the
+people stand to look at him, endeavouring all he can to kill some of
+them, but the posts and timbers are all so strong that he cannot do harm
+to any one, yet he sometimes breaks his teeth in his rage. At length,
+wearied with violent exertions, and all over in a sweat, he thrusts his
+trunk into his mouth, and sucks it full of water from his stomach, which
+he then blows at the lookers on. When he is seen to be much exhausted,
+certain people go into the court, having long sharp-pointed canes in
+their hands, with which they goad him that he may enter into one of the
+stalls made for the purpose in the court, which are long and narrow, so
+that he cannot turn when once in. These men must be very wary and agile,
+for though their canes are long, the elephants would kill them if they
+were not swift to save themselves. When they have got him into one of
+the stalls, they let down ropes from a loft above, which they pass under
+his belly, about his neck, and round his legs, to bind him fast, and
+leave him there for four or five days without meat or drink. At the end
+of that time, they loosen all the cords, put one of the females in
+beside him, giving them meat and drink, and in eight days after he is
+quite tame and tractable. In my opinion, there is not any animal so
+intelligent as the elephant, nor of so much capacity and understanding,
+for he will do every thing that his keeper desires, and seems to lack
+nothing of human reason except speech.
+
+It is reported that the great military power of the king of Pegu mainly
+depends on his elephants; as, when he goes to battle, each elephant has
+a castle set on his back, bound securely with bands under his belly, and
+in every castle four men are placed, who fight securely with
+arquebusses, bows and arrows, darts, and pikes, or other missile
+weapons; and it is alleged that the skin of the elephant is so hard and
+thick as not to be pierced by the ball of an arquebuss, except under the
+eyes, on the temples, or in some other tender part of the body. Besides
+this, the elephants are of great strength, and have a very excellent
+order in time of battle, as I have seen in their festivals, which they
+make every year, which is a rare sight worth mention, that among so
+barbarous a people there should be such goodly discipline as they have
+in their armies; which are drawn up in distinct and orderly squares, of
+elephants, horsemen, pikemen, and arquebuseers, the number of which is
+infinite and beyond reckoning; but their armour and weapons are
+worthless and weak. Their pikes are very bad, and their swords worse,
+being like long knives without points; yet their arquebusses are very
+good, the king having 80,000 men armed with that weapon, and the number
+is continually increasing. They are ordained to practise daily in
+shooting at a mark, so that by continual exercise they are wonderfully
+expert. The king of Pegu has also great cannon made of very good metal;
+and, in fine, there is not a king in the world who has more power or
+strength than he, having twenty-six crowned kings under his command, and
+he is able to take the field against his enemies with a million and a
+half of soldiers. The state and splendour of this kingdom, and the
+provisions necessary for so vast a multitude of soldiers, is a thing
+incredible, except by those who know the nature and quality of the
+people and government. I have seen with my own eyes these people, both
+the commons and soldiers, feed upon all kinds of beasts or animals,
+however filthy or unclean, everything that hath life serving them for
+food: Yea, I have even seen them eat scorpions and serpents, and all
+kinds of herbs, even grass. Hence, if their vast armies can only get
+enough of water, they can maintain themselves long even in the forests,
+on roots, flowers, and leaves of trees; but they always carry rice with
+them in their marches, which is their main support.
+
+The king of Pegu has no naval force; but for extent of dominion, number
+of people, and treasure of gold and silver, he far exceeds the Grand
+Turk in power and riches. He has various magazines full of treasure in
+gold and silver, which is daily increased, and is never diminished. He
+is also lord of the mines of rubies, sapphires, and spinels. Near the
+royal palace there is an inestimable treasure, of which he seems to make
+no account, as it stands open to universal inspection. It is contained
+in a large court surrounded by a stone wall, in which are two gates that
+stand continually open. Within this court there are four gilded houses
+covered with lead, in each of which houses are certain heathen idols of
+very great value. The first house contains an image of a man of vast
+size all of gold, having a crown of gold on his head enriched with most
+rare rubies and sapphires, and round about him are the images of four
+little children, all likewise of gold. In the second house is the statue
+of a man in massy silver, which seems to sit on heaps of money. This
+enormous idol, though sitting, is as lofty as the roof of a house. I
+measured his feet, which I found exceeded that of my own stature; and
+the head of this statue bears a crown similar to that of the former
+golden image. The third house has a brazen image of equal size, having a
+similar crown on its head. In the fourth house is another statue as
+large as the others, made of gansa, or mixed metal of copper and lead,
+of which the current money of the country is composed, and this idol has
+a crown on its head as rich and splendid as the others. All this
+valuable treasure is freely seen by all who please to go in and look at
+it, as the gates are always open, and the keepers do not refuse
+admission to any one.
+
+Every year the king of Pegu makes a public triumph after the following
+manner. He rides out on a triumphal car or great waggon, richly gilded
+all over, and of great height, covered by a splendid canopy, and drawn
+by sixteen horses, richly caparisoned. Behind the car walk twenty of his
+nobles or chief officers, each of whom holds the end of a rope, the
+other end being fastened to the car to keep it upright and prevent it
+from falling over. The king sits on high in the middle of the car, and
+on the same are four of his most favoured nobles surrounding him. Before
+the car the whole army marches in order, and the whole nobles of the
+kingdom are round about the car; so that it is wonderful to behold so
+many people and so much riches all in such good order, especially
+considering how barbarous are the people. The king of Pegu has one
+principal wife, who lives in a seraglio along with 300 concubines, and
+he is said to have 90 children. He sits every day in person to hear the
+suits of his people, yet he nor they never speak together. The king
+sits up aloft on a high seat or tribunal in a great hall, and lower down
+sit all his barons round about. Those that demand audience enter into
+the great court or hall in presence of the king, and sit down on the
+ground at forty paces from the king, holding their supplications in
+their hands, written on the leaves of a tree three quarters of a yard
+long and two fingers broad, on which the letters are written or
+inscribed by means of a sharp stile or pointed iron. On these occasions
+there is no respect of persons, all of every degree or quality being
+equally admitted to audience. All suitors hold up their supplication in
+writing, and in their hands a present or gift, according to the
+importance of their affairs. Then come the secretaries, who take the
+supplications from the petitioners and read them to the king; and if he
+thinks good to grant the favour or justice which they desire, he
+commands to have the gifts taken from their hands; but if he considers
+their request not just or reasonable, he commands them to depart without
+receiving their presents.
+
+There is no commodity in the Indies worth bringing to Pegu, except
+sometimes the opium of Cambay, and if any one bring money he is sure to
+lose by it. The only merchandise for this market is the fine painted
+calicos of San Thome, of that kind which, on being washed, becomes more
+lively in its colours. This is so much in request, that a small bale of
+it will sell for 1000 or even 2000 ducats. Also from San Thome they send
+great store of cotton yarn, dyed red by means of a root called _saia_,
+which colour never washes out. Every year there goes a great ship from
+San Thome to Pegu laden with a valuable cargo of these commodities. If
+this ship depart from San Thome by the 6th of September, the voyage is
+sure to be prosperous; but if they delay sailing till the 12th, it is a
+great chance if they are not forced to return; for in these parts the
+winds blow firmly for certain times, so as to sail for Pegu with the
+wind astern; and if they arrive not and get to anchor before the wind
+change, they must perforce return back again, as the wind blows three or
+four months with great force always one way. If they once get to anchor
+on the coast, they may save their voyage with great labour. There also
+goes a large ship from Bengal every year, laden with all kinds of fine
+cotton cloth, and which usually arrives in the river of Pegu when the
+ship of San Thome is about to depart. The harbour which these two ships
+go to is called _Cosmin_. From Malacca there go every year to Martaban,
+which is a port of Pegu, many ships, both large and small, with pepper,
+sandal-wood, porcelain of China, camphor, _bruneo_[165], and other
+commodities. The ships that come from the Red Sea frequent the ports of
+Pegu and Ciriam, bringing woollen cloths, scarlets, velvets, opium, and
+chequins, by which last they incur loss, yet they necessarily bring them
+wherewith to make their purchases, and they afterwards make great profit
+of the commodities which they take back with them, from Pegu. Likewise
+the ships of the king of Acheen bring pepper to the same ports.
+
+[Footnote 165: Perhaps we ought to read in the text _camphor of
+Perneo_.--E.]
+
+From San Thome or Bengal, _out of the sea of Bara_? to Pegu, the voyage
+is 300 miles, and they go up the river, with the tide of flood in four
+days to the city of _Cosmin_, where they discharge their cargoes, and
+thither the _customers_ of Pegu come and take notes of all the goods of
+every one, and of their several marks; after which they transport the
+goods to Pegu to the royal warehouses, where the customs of all the
+goods are taken. When the _customers_ have taken charge of the goods,
+and laden them in barks for conveyance to Pegu, the governor of the city
+gives licences to the merchants to accompany their goods, when three or
+four of them club together to hire a bark for their passage to Pegu.
+Should any one attempt to give in a wrong note or entry of his goods,
+for the purpose of stealing any custom, he is utterly undone, as the
+king considers it a most unpardonable offence to attempt depriving him
+of any part of his customs, and for this reason the goods are all most
+scrupulously searched, and examined three several times. This search is
+particularly rigid in regard to diamonds, pearls, and other articles of
+small bulk and great value, as all things, in Pegu that are not of its
+own productions pay custom both in or out. But rubies, sapphires, and
+spinels, being productions of the country, pay no duties. As formerly
+mentioned respecting other parts of India, all merchants going to Pegu
+or other places, must carry with them all sorts of household furniture
+of which they may be in need, as there are no inns or lodging-houses in
+which they can he accommodated, but every man must hire a house when he
+comes to a city, for a month or a year, according to the time he means
+to remain. In Pegu it is customary to hire a house for six months.
+
+From Cosmin to Pegu they go up the river with the flood in six
+hours[166]; but if the tide of ebb begin it is necessary to fasten the
+bark to the river side, and to remain there till the next flood. This is
+a commodious and pleasant passage, as there are many large villages on
+both sides of the river which might even be called cities, and in which
+poultry, eggs, pigeons, milk, rice, and other things may be had on very
+reasonable terms. The country is all level and fertile, and in eight
+days we get up to _Macceo_ which is twelve miles from. Pegu, and the
+goods are there landed from the barks, being carried thence to Pegu in
+carts or wains drawn by oxen. The merchants are conveyed from _Macceo_
+to Pegu in close palanquins, called _delings_ or _doolies_, in each of
+which one man is well accommodated, having cushions to rest upon, and a
+secure covering from the sun or rain, so that he may sleep if he will.
+His four _falchines_ or bearers carry him along at a great rate, running
+all the way, changing at intervals, two and two at a time. The freight
+and customs at Pegu may amount to 20, 22, or 23 per centum, according as
+there may be more or less stolen of the goods on paying the customs. It
+is necessary therefore for one to be very watchful and to have many
+friends; for when the goods are examined for the customs in the great
+hall of the king, many of the Pegu gentlemen go in accompanied by their
+slaves, and these gentlemen are not ashamed when their slaves rob
+strangers, whether of cloth or any other thing, and only laugh at it
+when detected; and though the merchants assist each other to watch the
+safety of their goods, they cannot look so narrowly but some will steal
+more or less according to the nature or quality of the goods. Even if
+fortunate enough to escape being robbed by the slaves, it is impossible
+to prevent pilfering by the officers of the customs; for as they take
+the customs in kind, they oftentimes take the best, and do not rate each
+sort as they ought separately, so that the merchant is often, made to
+pay much more than he ought. After undergoing this search and deduction
+of the customs, the merchant causes his goods to be carried home to his
+house, where he may do with them what he pleases.
+
+[Footnote 166: From subsequent circumstances the text is obviously here
+incorrect, and ought to have been translated, that the flood tides run
+six hours; as it will be afterwards seen that the voyage to a place 12
+miles short of Pegu requires eight days of these tide trips of six]
+
+In Pegu there are eight brokers licenced by the king, named _tareghe_,
+who are bound to sell all the merchandise which comes there at the
+current prices; and if the merchants are willing to sell their goods at
+these rates they sell them out of hand, the brokers having _two per
+centum_ for their trouble, and for which they are bound to make good all
+debts incurred for the goods sold by them, and often the merchant does
+not know to whom his goods are sold. The merchants may indeed sell their
+own goods if they will; but in that case the broker is equally intitled
+to his two per centum, and the merchant must run his own risk of
+recovering his money. This however seldom happens, as the wife,
+children, and slaves of the debtor are all liable in payment. When the
+agreed time of payment arrives, if the debt is not cleared, the creditor
+may seize the person of the debtor and carry him home to his house, and
+if not immediately satisfied, he may take the wife, children, and slaves
+of the debtor and sell them. The current money through all Pegu is made
+of _ganza_, which is a composition of copper and lead, and which every
+one may stamp at his pleasure, as they pass by weight; yet are they
+sometimes falsified by putting in too much lead, on which occasions no
+one will receive them in payment. As there is no other money current,
+you may purchase gold, silver, rubies, musk, and all other things with
+this money. Gold and silver, like other commodities, vary in their
+price, being sometimes cheaper and sometimes dearer. This _ganza_ money
+is reckoned by _byzas_, each _byza_ being 100 _ganzas_, and is worth
+about half a ducat of our money, more or less according as gold is cheap
+or dear.
+
+When any one goes to Pegu to buy jewels, he will do well to remain there
+a whole year; for if he would return by the same ship, he can do very
+little to purpose in so short a time. Those who come from San Thome
+usually have their goods customed about Christmas, after which they must
+sell their goods, giving credit for a month or two, and the ships depart
+about the beginning of March. The merchants of San Thome generally take
+payment for their goods in gold and silver, which are always plentiful
+in Pegu. Eight or ten days before their departure they are satisfied for
+their goods. They may indeed have rubies in payment, but they make no
+account of them. Such as propose to winter in the country ought to
+stipulate in selling their goods for payment in two or three months, and
+that they are to be paid in so many _ganzas_, not in gold or silver, as
+every thing is most advantageously bought and sold by means of this
+_ganza_ money. It is needful to specify very precisely both the time of
+payment, and in what weight of ganzas they are to be paid, as an
+inexperienced person may be much imposed upon both in the weight and
+fineness of the _ganza_ money; for the weight rises and falls greatly
+from place to place, and he may be likewise deceived by false _ganzas_
+or too much alloyed with lead. For this reason, when any one is to
+receive payment he ought to have along with him a public weigher of
+money, engaged a day or two before he commences that business, whom he
+pays two _byzas_ a-month, for which he is bound to make good all your
+money and to maintain it good, as he receives it and seals the bags with
+his own seal, and when he has collected any considerable sum he causes
+it to be delivered to the merchant to whom it belongs. This money is
+very weighty, as forty _byzas_ make a porters burden. As in receiving,
+so in paying money, a public weigher of money must be employed.
+
+The merchandises exported from Pegu are gold, silver, rubies, sapphires,
+spinels, great quantities of benzoin, long-pepper, lead, lac, rice,
+wine, and some sugar. There might be large quantities of sugar made in
+Pegu, as they have great abundance of sugar-canes, but they are given as
+food to the elephants, and the people consume large quantities of them
+in their diet. They likewise spend many of these sugar-canes[167] in
+constructing houses and tents for their idols, which they call _varely_
+and we name pagodas. There are many of these idol houses, both large and
+small, which are ordinarily constructed in a pyramidical form, like
+little hills, sugar-loaves or bells, some of them being as high as an
+ordinary steeple. They are very large at the bottom, some being a
+quarter of a mile in compass. The inside of these temples are all built
+of bricks laid in clay mortar instead of lime, and filled up with earth,
+without any form or comeliness from top to bottom; afterwards they are
+covered with a frame of canes plastered all over with lime to preserve
+them from the great rains which fall in this country. Also about these
+_varely_ or idol-houses they consume a prodigious quantity of leaf gold,
+as all their roofs are gilded over, and sometimes the entire structure
+is covered from top to bottom; and as they require to be newly gilded
+every ten years, a prodigious quantity of gold is wasted on this
+vanity, which occasions gold to be vastly dearer in Pegu than it would
+be otherwise.
+
+[Footnote 167: This is certainly an error, and Cesar Frederick has
+mistaken the bamboo cane used in such erections for the sugar-cane.--E.]
+
+It may be proper to mention, that in buying jewels or precious stones in
+Pegu, he who has no knowledge or experience is sure to get as good and
+as cheap articles as the most experienced in the trade. There are four
+men at Pegu called _tareghe_ or jewel-brokers, who have all the jewels
+or rubies in their hands; and when any person wants to make a purchase
+he goes to one of these brokers, and tells him that he wants to lay out
+so much money on rubies; for these brokers have such prodigious
+quantities always on hand, that they know not what to do with them, and
+therefore sell them at a very low price. Then the broker carries the
+merchant along with him to one of their shops, where he may have what
+jewels he wants according to the sum of money he is disposed to lay out.
+According to the custom of the city, when the merchant has bargained for
+a quantity of jewels, whatever may be the amount of their value, he is
+allowed to carry them home to his house, where he may consider them for
+two or three days; and if he have not himself sufficient knowledge or
+experience in such things, he may always find other merchants who are
+experienced, with whom he may confer and take counsel, as he is at
+liberty to shew them to any person be pleases; and if he find that he
+has not laid out his money to advantage, he may return them back to the
+person from whom he had them without loss or deduction. It is reckoned
+so great a shame to the _tareghe_ or jewel-broker to have his jewels
+returned, that he would rather have a blow on the face than have it
+believed that he had sold his jewels too dear and have them returned on
+his hands; for which reason they are sure to give good bargains,
+especially to those who have no experience, that they may not lose their
+credit. When such merchants as are experienced in jewels purchase too
+dear it is their own fault, and is not laid to the charge of the
+brokers; yet it is good to have knowledge in jewels, as it may sometimes
+enable one to procure them at a lower price. On the occasions of making
+these bargains, as there are generally many other merchants present at
+the bargain, the broker and the purchaser have their hands under a
+cloth, and by certain signals, made by touching the fingers and nipping
+the different joints, they know what is bidden, what is asked, and what
+is settled, without the lookers-on knowing any thing of the matter,
+although the bargain may be for a thousand or ten thousand ducats. This
+is an admirable institution, as, if the lookers-on should understand
+what is going on, it might occasion contention.
+
+
+SECTION XIX.
+
+_Voyages of the Author to different parts of India._
+
+
+When I was at Pegu in August 1569, having got a considerable profit by
+my endeavours, I was desirous to return to my own country by way of St
+Thome, but in that case I should have been obliged to wait till next
+March; I was therefore advised to go by way of Bengal, for which country
+there was a ship ready to sail to the great harbour of Chittagong,
+whence there go small ships to Cochin in sufficient time to arrive there
+before the departure of the Portuguese ships for Lisbon, in which I was
+determined to return to Europe. I went accordingly on board the Bengal
+ship; but this happened to be the year of the _Tyffon_, which will
+require some explanation. It is therefore to be understood that in India
+they have, once every ten or twelve years, such prodigious storms and
+tempests as are almost incredible, except to such as have seen them,
+neither do they know with any certainty on what years they may be
+expected, but unfortunate are they who happen to be at sea when this
+tempest or _tyffon_ takes place, as few escape the dreadful danger. In
+this year it was our evil fortune to be at sea in one of these terrible
+storms; and well it was for us that our ship was newly _over-planked_,
+and had no loading save victuals and ballast, with some gold and silver
+for Bengal, as no other merchandise is carried to Bengal from Pegu. The
+tyffon accordingly assailed us and lasted three days, carrying away our
+sails, yards, and rudder; and as the ship laboured excessively, we
+cut away our mast, yet she continued to labour more heavily than before,
+so that the sea broke over her every moment, and almost filled her with
+water. For the space of three days and three nights, sixty men who were
+on board did nothing else than bale out the water continually, twenty at
+one place, twenty in another, and twenty at a third place; yet during
+all this storm so good was the hull of our ship that she took not in a
+single drop of water at her sides or bottom, all coming in at the
+hatches. Thus driving about at the mercy of the winds and waves, we were
+during the darkness of the third night at about four o'clock after
+sunset cast upon a shoal. When day appeared next morning we could see no
+land on any side of us, so that we knew not where we were. It pleased
+the divine goodness that a great wave of the sea came and floated us off
+from the shoal into deep water, upon which we all felt as men reprieved
+from immediate death, as the sea was calm and the water smooth. Casting
+the lead we found twelve fathoms water, and bye and bye we had only six
+fathoms, when we let go a small anchor which still hung at the stern,
+all the others having been lost during the storm. Our anchor parted next
+night, and our ship again grounded, when we shored her up the best we
+could, to prevent her from over-setting at the side of ebb.
+
+When it was day, we found our ship high and dry on a sand-bank, a full
+mile from the sea. When the _tyffon_ entirely ceased, we discovered an
+island not far from us, to which we walked on the sand, that we might
+learn where we were. We found it inhabited, and in my opinion the most
+fertile island I had ever seen. It is divided into two parts by a
+channel or water-course, which is full at high tides. With much ado we
+brought our ship into that channel; and when the people of the island
+saw our ship, and that we were coming to land, they immediately erected
+a bazar or market-place with shops right over-against the ship, to which
+they brought every kind of provisions for our supply, and sold them at
+wonderfully reasonable rates. I bought many salted kine as provision for
+the ship at half a _larine_ each, being all excellent meat and very fat,
+and four wild hogs ready dressed for a larine. The larine is worth about
+twelve shillings and sixpence. Good fat hens were bought for a _byza_
+each, which does not exceed a penny; and yet some of our people said
+that we were imposed upon, as we ought to have got every thing for half
+the money. We got excellent rice at an excessively low price, and indeed
+every article of food was at this place in the most wonderful abundance.
+The name of this island is _Sondiva_ or Sundeep, and belongs to the
+kingdom of Bengal, being 120 miles from Chittagong, to which place we
+were bound. The people are Moors or Mahometans, and the king or chief
+was a very good kind of man for a Mahometan; for if he had been a tyrant
+like others, he might have robbed us of all we had, as the Portuguese
+captain at Chittagong was in arms against the native chief of that
+place, and every day there were some persons slain. On receiving this
+intelligence, we were in no small fear for our safety, keeping good
+watch and ward every night, according to the custom of the sea; but the
+governor of the town gave us assurance that we had nothing to fear, for
+although the Portuguese had slain the governor or chief at Chittagong,
+we were not to blame, and indeed he every day did us every service and
+civility in his power, which we had no reason to expect, considering
+that the people of Sundeep and those of Chittagong were subjects of the
+same sovereign.
+
+Departing from Sundeep we came to Chittagong, by which time a peace or
+truce had been agreed upon between the Portuguese and the chiefs of the
+city, under condition that the Portuguese captain should depart with his
+ship without any lading. At this time there were 18 Portuguese ships of
+different sizes at that port, and the captain being a gentleman and a
+brave man, was contented to depart in this manner, to his material
+injury, rather than hinder so many of his friends and countrymen who
+were there, and likewise because, the season for going to Western India
+was now past. During the night before his departure, every ship that was
+in the port, and had any part of their lading on board, transshipped it
+to this captain to help to lessen his loss and bear his charges, in
+reward for his courteous behaviour on this occasion. At this time there
+came a messenger from the king of _Rachim_ or Aracan to this Portuguese
+captain, saying that his master had heard tidings of his great valour
+and prowess, and requesting him to bring his ship to the port of Aracan
+where he would be well received. The captain went thither accordingly,
+and was exceedingly well satisfied with his reception.
+
+The kingdom of Aracan is in the mid-way between Bengal and Pegu, and the
+king of Pegu is continually devising means of reducing the king of
+Aracan under subjection, which hitherto he has not been able to effect,
+as he has no maritime force, whereas the king of Aracan can arm two
+hundred galleys or foists; besides which he has the command of certain
+sluices or flood-gates in his country, by which he can drown a great
+part of his country when he thinks proper, when at any time the king of
+Pegu endeavours to invade his dominions, by which be cuts off the way
+by which alone the king of Pegu can have access.
+
+From the great port of Chittagong they export for India great quantities
+of rice, large assortments of cotton cloth of all sorts, with sugar,
+corn, money, and other articles of merchandise. In consequence of the
+war in Chittagong, the Portuguese ships were so long detained there,
+that they were unable to arrive at Cochin at the usual time; for which
+reason the fleet from Cochin was departed for Portugal before their
+arrival. Being in one of the smaller ships, which was somewhat in
+advance of our fleet from Chittagong, I came in sight of Cochin just as
+the very last of the homeward-bound fleet was under sail. This gave me
+much dissatisfaction, as there would be no opportunity of going to
+Portugal for a whole year; wherefore, on my arrival at Cochin, I was
+fully determined to go for Venice by way of Ormuz. At that time Goa was
+besieged by the troops of _Dialcan_ [Adel-khan,] but the citizens made
+light of this attack, as they believed it would not continue long. In
+the prosecution of my design, I embarked at Cochin in a galley bound for
+Goa; but on my arrival there the viceroy would not permit any Portuguese
+ship to sail for Ormuz on account of the war then subsisting, so that I
+was constrained to remain there.
+
+Soon after my arrival at Goa I fell into a severe sickness, which held
+me four months; and as my physic and diet in that time cost me 800
+ducats, I was under the necessity to sell some part of my rubies, for
+which I only got 500 ducats, though well worth 1000. When I began to
+recover my health and strength, very little of my money remained, every
+thing was so scarce and dear. Every chicken, and these not good, cost me
+seven or eight livres, or from six shillings to six and eightpence, and
+all other things in proportion; besides which the apothecaries, with
+their medicines, were a heavy charge upon me. At the end of six months
+the siege of Goa was raised, and as jewels rose materially in their
+price, _I began to work_[168]; and as before I had only sold a small
+quantity of inferior rubies to serve my necessities, I now determined to
+sell all the jewels I had, and to make another voyage to Pegu; and as
+opium was in great request at Pegu when I was there before, I went from
+Goa to Cambay, where I laid out 2100 ducats in the purchase of 60
+parcels of opium, the ducat being worth 4s. 2d. I likewise bought three
+bales of cotton cloth, which cost me 800 ducats, that commodity selling
+well in Pegu. When I had bought these things, I understood the viceroy
+had issued orders that the custom on opium should be paid at Goa, after
+which it might be carried anywhere else. I shipped therefore my three
+bales of cotton cloth at Chaul, in a vessel bound for Cochin, and went
+myself to Goa to pay the duty for my opium.
+
+[Footnote 168: From this expression it may be inferred, that besides his
+mercantile speculations in jewels, Cesar Frederick was a lapidary.--E.]
+
+From Goa I went to Cochin, in a ship that was bound for Pegu, and
+intended to winter at San Thome; but on my arrival at Cochin I learnt
+that the ship with my three bales of cotton cloth was cast away, so that
+I lost my 800 seraphins or ducats. On our voyage from Cochin to San
+Thome, while endeavouring to weather the south point of Ceylon, which
+lies far out to sea, the pilot was out in his reckoning, and laying-to
+in the night, thinking that he had passed hard by the Cape of Ceylon;
+when morning came we were far within the Cape, and fallen to leeward, by
+which it became now impossible to weather the island, as the wind was
+strong and contrary. Thus we lost our voyage for the season, and we were
+constrained to go to Manaar to winter there, the ship having lost all
+her masts, and being saved from entire wreck with great difficulty.
+Besides the delay and disappointment to the passengers, this was a heavy
+loss to the captain of the ship, as he was under the necessity of hiring
+another vessel at San Thome at a heavy charge, to carry us and our goods
+to Pegu. My companions and I, with all the rest of the merchants, hired
+a bark at Manaar to carry us to San Thome, where I received intelligence
+by way of Bengal, that opium was very scarce and dear in Pegu; and as
+there was no other opium but mine then at San Thome, for the Pegu
+market, all the merchants considered me as a very fortunate man, as I
+would make great profit, which indeed I certainly should have done, if
+my adverse fortune had not thwarted my well-grounded expectations, in
+the following manner: A large ship from Cambaya, bound for _Assi_
+[Acheen?] with a large quantity of opium, and to lade pepper in return,
+being forced to lay-to in crossing the mouth of the bay of Bengal, was
+obliged to go _roomer_[169] for 800 miles, by which means it went to
+Pegu, and arrived there one day before me. Owing to this circumstance,
+opium, which had been very dear in Pegu, fell to a very low price, the
+quantity which had sold before for 50 _bizze_ having fallen to 2-1/2, so
+large was the quantity brought by this ship. Owing to this unfortunate
+circumstance, I was forced to remain two years in Pegu, otherwise I must
+have given away my opium for much less than it cost me, and even at the
+end of that time I only made 1000 ducats by what had cost me 2100 in
+Cambaya.
+
+[Footnote 169: The meaning of this ancient nautical term is here clearly
+expressed, as drifting to leeward while laying-to.--E.]
+
+After this I went from Pegu to the Indies[170] and Ormuz, with a
+quantity of _lac_. From Ormuz I returned to Chaul, and thence to Cochin,
+from which place I went again to Pegu. Once more I lost the opportunity
+of becoming rich, as on this voyage I only took a small quantity of
+opium, while I might have sold a large quantity to great advantage,
+being afraid of meeting a similar disappointment with that which
+happened to me before. Being now again resolved to return into my native
+country, I went from Pegu to Cochin, where I wintered, and then sailed
+for Ormuz.
+
+[Footnote 170: Here, and in various other parts of these early voyages,
+India and the Indies seem confined to the western coast of the
+peninsula, as it is called, or the Malabar coast.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XX.
+
+_Some Account of the Commodities of India_.
+
+
+Before concluding this relation of my peregrinations, it seems proper
+that I should give some account of the productions of India.
+
+In all parts of India, both of the western and eastern regions, there is
+pepper and ginger, and in some parts the greatest quantity of pepper is
+found wild in the woods, where it grows without any care or cultivation,
+except the trouble of gathering it when ripe. The tree on which the
+pepper grows is not unlike our ivy, and runs in the same manner up to
+the top of such trees as grow in its neighbourhood, for if it were not
+to get hold of some tree it would lie flat on the ground and perish. Its
+flower and berry in all things resemble the ivy, and its berries or
+grains are the pepper, which are green when gathered, but by drying in
+the sun they become black. Ginger requires cultivation, and its seeds
+are sown on land previously tilled. The herb resembles that called
+_panizzo_, and the root is the spice we call ginger. Cloves all come
+from the Moluccas, where they grow in two small islands, Ternate and
+Tidore, on a tree resembling the laurel. Nutmegs and mace come from the
+island of Banda, where they grow together on one tree, which resembles
+our walnut tree, but not so large. Long pepper grows in Bengal, Pegu,
+and Java.
+
+All the good sandal-wood comes from the island of Timor. Camphor, being
+compounded, or having to undergo a preparation, comes all from China.
+That which grows in canes[171] comes from Borneo, and I think none of
+that kind is brought to Europe, as they consume large quantities of it
+in India, and it is there very dear. Good aloes wood comes from
+Cochin-China; and benjamin from the kingdoms of _Assi_, Acheen? and
+Siam. Musk is brought from Tartary, where it is made, as I have been
+told, in the following manner. There is in Tartary a beast as large and
+fierce as a wolf, which they catch alive, and beat to death with small
+staves, that his blood may spread through his whole body. This they then
+cut in pieces, taking out all the bones, and having pounded the flesh
+and blood very fine in a mortar, they dry it and put it into purses made
+of the skin, and these purses with their contents are the cods of
+musk[172].
+
+[Footnote 171: This is an error, as camphor is a species of essential
+oil, grossly sublimed at first from a tree of the laurel family, and
+afterwards purified by farther processes.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 172: The whole of this story is a gross fabrication imposed by
+ignorance on credulity. The cods of musk are natural bags or
+emunctories, found near the genitals on the males of an animal named
+_Moschus Moschiferus_, or Thibet Musk. It is found through the whole of
+Central Asia, except its most northern parts, but the best musk comes
+from Thibet.--E.
+
+"The Jewes doe counterfeit and take out the halfe of the goode muske,
+beating it up with an equal quantity of the flesh of an asse, and put
+this mixture in the bag or purse, which they sell for true
+muske."--_Hackluyt_.]
+
+I know not whereof amber is made[173], and there are divers opinions
+respecting it; but this much is certain, that it is cast out from the
+sea, and is found on the shores and banks left dry by the recess of the
+tides. Rubies, sapphires, and spinells are got in Pegu. Diamonds come
+from different places, and I know but three kinds of them. The kind
+which is called _Chiappe_ comes from _Bezeneger_, Bijanagur? Those that
+are naturally pointed come from the land of Delly and the island of
+Java, but those of Java are heavier than the others. I could never learn
+whence the precious stones called _Balassi_ are procured. Pearls are
+fished for in different places, as has been already mentioned. The
+substance called Spodium, which is found concreted in certain canes, is
+procured in _Cambaza_, Cambaya? Of this concrete I found many pieces in
+Pegu, when building myself a house there, as in that country they
+construct their houses of canes woven together like mats or basket-work,
+as formerly related.
+
+[Footnote 173: Ambergris is probably meant in the text under the name of
+Amber, as the former came formerly from India, while the latter is
+principally found in the maritime parts of Prussia.--E.]
+
+The Portuguese trade all the way from Chaul along the coast of India,
+and to Melinda in Ethiopia, in the land of Cafraria, on which coast are
+many good ports belonging to the Moors. To these the Portuguese carry a
+very low-priced cotton cloth, and many _paternosters_, or beads made of
+paultry glass, which are manufactured at Chaul; and from thence they
+carry back to India many elephants teeth, slaves, called Kafrs or
+Caffers, with some _amber_ and gold. On this coast the king of Portugal
+has a castle at Mozambique, which is of as great importance as any of
+his fortresses, in the Indies. The captain or governor of this castle
+has certain privileged voyages assigned to him, where only his agents
+may trade. In their dealings with the Kafrs along this coast, to which
+they go in small vessels, their purchases and sales are singularly
+conducted without any conversation or words on either side. While
+sailing along the coast, the Portuguese stop in many places, and going
+on shore they lay down a small quantity of their goods, which they
+leave, going back to the ship. Then the Kafr merchant comes to look at
+the goods, and having estimated them in his own way, he puts down as
+much gold as he thinks the goods are worth, leaving both the gold and
+the goods, and then withdraws. If on the return of the Portuguese trader
+he thinks the quantity of gold sufficient, he taketh it away and goes
+back to his ship, after which the Kafr takes away the goods, and the
+transaction is finished. But if he find the gold still left, it
+indicates that the Portuguese merchant is not contented with the
+quantity, and if he thinks proper he adds a little more. The Portuguese
+must not, however, be too strict with them, as they are apt to be
+affronted and to give over traffic, being a peevish people. By means of
+this trade, the Portuguese exchange their commodities for gold, which
+they carry to the castle of Mozambique, standing in an island near the
+Continental coast of Cafraria, on the coast of Ethiopia, 2800 miles
+distant from India.
+
+
+SECTION XXI.
+
+_Return of the Author to Europe_.
+
+
+To return to my voyage. On my arrival at Ormuz, I found there M. Francis
+Berettin of Venice, and we freighted a bark in conjunction to carry us
+to Bussora, for which we paid 70 ducats; but as other merchants went
+along with us, they eased our freight. We arrived safely at Bussora,
+where we tarried 40 days, to provide a caravan of boats to go up the
+river to _Babylon_ [Bagdat], as it is very unsafe to go this voyage with
+only two or three barks together, because they cannot proceed during the
+night, and have to make fast to the sides of the river, when it is
+necessary to be vigilant and well provided with weapons, both for
+personal safety and the protection of the goods, as there are numerous
+thieves who lie in wait to rob the merchants: Wherefore it is customary
+and proper always to go in fleets of not less than 25 or 30 boats, for
+mutual protection. In going up the river the voyage is generally 38 or
+40 days, according as the wind happens to be favourable or otherwise,
+but we took 50 days. We remained four months at Babylon, until the
+caravan was ready to pass the desert to Aleppo. In this city six
+European merchants of us consorted together to pass the desert, five of
+whom were Venetians and one a Portuguese. The Venetians were _Messer
+Florinasca_, and one of his kinsmen, _Messer Andrea de Polo, Messer
+Francis Berettin_, and I. So we bought horses and mules for our own use,
+which are very cheap there, insomuch that I bought a horse for myself
+for eleven _akens_, and sold him afterwards in Aleppo for 30 ducats. We
+bought likewise a tent, which was of very great convenience and comfort
+to us, and we furnished ourselves with sufficient provisions, and beans
+for the horses, to serve 40 days. We had also among us 33 camels laden
+with merchandise, paying two ducats for every camels load, and,
+according to the custom of the country, they furnish 11 camels for every
+10 bargained and paid for. We likewise had with us three men to serve
+us during the journey, _which are used to go for five Dd._[174] a man,
+and are bound to serve for that sum all the way to Aleppo.
+
+[Footnote 174: Such is the manner in which the hire of these servants is
+expressed in Hakluyt. Perhaps meaning 500 pence; and as the Venetian
+_sol_ is about a halfpenny, this will amount to about a guinea, but it
+does not appear whether this is the sum for each person, or for all
+three.--E.]
+
+By these precautions we made the journey over the desert without any
+trouble, as, whenever the camels stopt for rest, our tent was always the
+first erected. The caravan makes but small journeys of about 20 miles
+a-day, setting out every morning two hours before day, and stopping
+about two hours after noon. We had good fortune on our journey as it
+rained, so that we were never in want of water; yet we always carried
+one camel load of water for our party for whatever might happen in the
+desert, so that we were in no want of any thing whatever that this
+country affords. Among other things we had fresh mutton every day, as we
+had many shepherds along with us taking care of the sheep we had bought
+at Babylon, each merchant having his own marked with a distinguishing
+mark. We gave each shepherd a _medin_, which is twopence of our money,
+for keeping and feeding our sheep by the way, and for killing them;
+besides which the shepherds got the heads, skins, and entrails of all
+the sheep for themselves. We six bought 20 sheep, and 7 of them remained
+alive when we came to Aleppo. While on our journey through the desert,
+we used to lend flesh to each other, so as never to carry any from
+station to station, being repaid next day by those to whom we lent the
+day before.
+
+From Babylon to Aleppo is 40 days journey, of which 36 days are through
+the desert or wilderness, in which neither trees, houses, nor
+inhabitants are anywhere to be seen, being all an uniform extended plain
+or dreary waste, with no object whatever to relieve the eye. On the
+journey, the pilots or guides go always in front, followed by the
+caravan in regular order. When the guides stop, all the caravan does the
+same, and unloads the camels, as the guides know where wells are to be
+found. I have said that the caravan takes 36 days to travel across the
+wilderness; besides these, for the two first days after leaving Babylon
+we go past inhabited villages, till such time as we cross the Euphrates;
+and then we have two days journey through among inhabited villages
+before reaching Aleppo. Along with each caravan there is a captain, who
+dispenses justice to all men, and every night there is a guard
+appointed to keep watch for the security of the whole. From Aleppo we
+went to Tripoli, in Syria, where M. Florinasca, M. Andrea Polo, and I,
+with a friar in company, hired a bark to carry us towards Jerusalem. We
+accordingly sailed from Tripoli to Jaffa, from which place we travelled
+in a day and a half to Jerusalem, leaving orders that the bark should
+wait for our return. We remained 14 days at Jerusalem visiting the holy
+places, whence we returned to Jaffa, and thence back to Tripoli, and
+there we embarked in a ship belonging to Venice, called the Bajazzana;
+and, by the aid of the divine goodness, we safely arrived in Venice on
+the 5th of November 1581.
+
+Should any one incline to travel into those parts of India to which I
+went, let him not be astonished or deterred by the troubles,
+entanglements, and long delays which I underwent, owing to my poverty.
+On leaving Venice, I had 1200 ducats invested in merchandise; but while
+at Tripoli in my way out I fell sick in the house of M. Regaly Oratio,
+who sent away my goods with a small caravan to Aleppo. This caravan was
+robbed, and all my goods lost, except four chests of glasses, which cost
+me 200 ducats. Even of my glasses many were broken, as the thieves had
+broken up the boxes in hopes of getting goods more suitable for their
+purpose. Even with this small remaining stock I adventured to proceed
+for the Indies, where, by exchange and re-exchange, with much patient
+diligence, and with the blessing of God, I at length acquired a
+respectable stock.
+
+It may be proper to mention, for the sake of others who may follow my
+example, by what means they may secure their goods and effects to their
+heirs, in case of their death. In all the cities belonging to the
+Portuguese in India, there is a house or establishment called the school
+of the _Santa Misericordia comissaria_, the governors of which, on
+payment of a certain fee, take a copy of your testament, which you ought
+always to carry along with you when travelling in the Indies. There
+always goes into the different countries of the Gentiles and Mahometans
+a captain or consul, to administer justice to the Portuguese, and other
+Christians connected with them, and this captain has authority to
+recover the goods of all merchants who chance to die on these voyages.
+Should any of these not have their wills along with them, or not have
+them registered in one of the before-mentioned schools, these captains
+are sure to consume their goods in such a way that little or nothing
+will remain for their heirs. There are always also on such voyages some
+merchants who are commissaries of the _Sancta Misericardia_, who take
+charge of the goods of those who have registered their wills in that
+office, and having sold them the money is remitted to the head office of
+the Misericordia at Lisbon, whence intelligence is sent to any part of
+Christendom whence the deceased may have come, so that on the heirs of
+such persons going to Lisbon with satisfactory testimonials, they will
+receive the full value of what was left by their relation. It is to be
+noted, however, that when any merchant happens to die in the kingdom of
+Pegu, one-third of all that belongs to him goes, by ancient law and
+custom, to the king and his officers, but the other two-thirds are
+honourably restored to those having authority to receive them. On this
+account, I have known many rich men who dwelt in Pegu, who have desired
+to go thence into their own country in their old age to die there, that
+they might save the third of their property to their heirs, and these
+have always been allowed freely to depart without trouble or
+molestation.
+
+In Pegu the fashion in dress is uniformly the same for the high and low,
+the rich and the poor, the only difference being in the quality or
+fineness, of the materials, which is cloth of cotton, of various
+qualities. In the first place, they have an inner garment of white
+cotton cloth which serves for a shirt, over which they gird another
+garment of painted cotton cloth of fourteen _brasses_ or yards, which is
+bound or tucked up between the legs. On their heads they wear a _tuck_
+or turban of three yards long, bound round the head somewhat like a
+mitre; but some, instead of this, have a kind of cap like a bee-hive,
+which does not fall below the bottom of the ear. They are all
+barefooted; but the nobles never walk a-foot, being carried by men on a
+seat of some elegance, having a hat made of leaves to keep-off the rain
+and sun; or else they ride on horseback, having their bare feet in the
+stirrups. All women, of whatever degree, wear a shift or smock down to
+the girdle, and from thence down to their feet a cloth of three yards
+long, forming a kind of petticoat which is open before, and so strait
+that at every step they shew their legs and more, so that in walking
+they have to hide themselves as it were very imperfectly with their
+hand. It is reported that this was contrived by one of the queens of
+this country, as a means of winning the men from certain unnatural
+practices to which they were unhappily addicted. The women go all
+barefooted like the men, and have their arms loaded with hoops of gold
+adorned with jewels, and their fingers all filled with precious rings.
+They wear their long hair rolled up and fastened on the crown of their
+heads, and a cloth thrown over their shoulders, by way of a cloak.
+
+By way of concluding this long account of my peregrinations, I have this
+to say, that those parts of the Indies in which I have been are very
+good for a man who has little, and wishes by diligent industry to make
+rich: _providing always that he conducts himself so as to preserve the
+reputation of honesty_. Such, persons will never fail to receive
+assistance to advance their fortunes. But, for those who are vicious,
+dishonest, or indolent, they had better stay at home; for they shall
+always remain poor, and die beggars.
+
+_End of the Peregrinations of Cesar Frederick_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+EARLY ENGLISH VOYAGES TO GUINEA, AND OTHER PARTS OF THE WEST COAST OF
+AFRICA.
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+On the present occasion we are principally guided in our selection by
+chronological order, owing to which this _Chapter_ may have an anomalous
+appearance, as containing the early voyages of the English to the
+Western or Atlantic coast of Africa, while the title of the _Book_ to
+which it belongs was confined to the Discoveries and Conquests of the
+Portuguese, and other European Nations, in India; yet the arrangement
+has been formed on what we have considered as sufficient grounds, more
+especially as resembling the steps by which the Portuguese were led to
+their grand discovery of the route by sea to India. Our collection
+forms a periodical work, in the conduct of which it would be obviously
+improper to tie ourselves too rigidly, in these introductory discourses,
+to any absolute rules of minute arrangement, which might prevent us from
+availing ourselves of such valuable sources of information as may occur
+in the course of our researches. We have derived the principal materials
+of this and the next succeeding chapter, from Hakluyt's Collection of
+the Early Voyages, Travels, and Discoveries of the English Nation, using
+the late edition published at London in 1810, and availing ourselves of
+the previous labours of the Editor of Astleys Collection, published in
+1745. Mr John Green, the intelligent editor of that former collection,
+has combined the substance of the present and succeeding chapters of our
+work in the second book of his first volume, under the title of The
+First Voyages of the English to Guinea and the East Indies; and as our
+present views are almost solely confined to the period which he
+embraces, we have thought it right to insert his introduction to that
+book, as containing a clear historical view of the subject[175]. It is
+proper to mention, however, that, while we follow his steps, we have
+uniformly had recourse to the originals from which he drew his
+materials; and, for reasons formerly assigned, wherever any difference
+may occur between our collection and that of Astley, we shall subjoin
+our remarks and references, at the place or places to which they
+belong.--E.
+
+[Footnote 175: Astley's Collection, Vol. I. p. 138, 140.]
+
+"Although the Portuguese were the first who set on foot discoveries by
+sea, and carried them on for many years before any other European nation
+attempted to follow their example; yet, as soon as these voyages
+appeared to be attended with commercial gain, the English were ready to
+put in for a share. The Portuguese discovered Guinea about the year
+1471; and only ten years afterwards we find the English making
+preparations to visit the newly discovered coast[176]. In the year 1481,
+John Tintam and William Fabian were busy in fitting out a fleet for the
+coast of Guinea; but whether on their own account in whole or in part,
+or solely for the Duke of _Medina Sidonia_ in Spain, by whose command
+they are said to have done this, cannot be now determined. It is
+possible, as the Spaniards were excluded by the Papal grant in favour
+of the Portuguese from trading to the East Indies, that they might
+endeavour to elude this authority by employing Englishmen in that
+navigation. However this may have been, _Joam_ or John II. king of
+Portugal, sent two persons on an embassy to Edward king of England, to
+renew the ancient league of friendship between the crowns, and to move
+him to hinder that fleet from putting to sea. The Portuguese ambassadors
+had orders to acquaint the king of England with the title which the king
+of Portugal derived from the Pope, to the exclusive sovereignty and
+navigation of Guinea, and to demand that Edward should prohibit his
+subjects from sending any ships to that country. This was accordingly
+done, and the purposes of that intended voyage were frustrated. This is
+an authentic testimony of the early attempts of the English, which is
+related at length by _Garcia de Resende_, in the life of Joam II. Ch.
+33[177]. To this, or some similar circumstance, it may have been owing
+that the English desisted so long from sailing to the southwards, and
+turned their endeavours to the discovery of a passage to India by some
+other way.
+
+[Footnote 176: The French pretend to have traded with Guinea from 1364
+till 1413, being 107 years before it was discovered by the
+Portuguese.--Astl. I. 138, a.]
+
+[Footnote 177: Cited by Hakluyt, Vol. II. Part 2. p. 2]
+
+"It appears by a memorandum or letter of _Nicholas Thorn_, senior, a
+considerable merchant in Bristol, of which Hakluyt gives the
+contents[178], that in 1526, and from circumstances for a long time
+previous, certain English merchants, among whom were _Nicholas Thorn_
+and _Thomas Spacheford_, had frequently traded to the Canary islands. In
+that letter or memorandum, notice was given to _Thomas Midnal_ his
+factor and _William Ballard_ his servant; residing in St Lucar in
+Andalusia, that the Christopher of Cadiz bound for the West Indies, had
+taken on board several packs of cloth of different fineness and colours,
+together with packthread, soap, and other goods, to be landed at Santa
+Cruz in Teneriffe. They are directed to sell these goods, and to send
+back returns in Orchil[179], sugar, and kid skins.
+
+[Footnote 178: Id. ib. p. 3.]
+
+[Footnote 179: A species of moss growing on high rocks, much used in
+these days in dying.--Astl. I. 138. d.]
+
+"At length, about the middle of the _sixteenth_ century, the English
+spirit of trade, meeting with favourable circumstances, began to exert
+itself, and to extend its adventures to the south as well as the north.
+About the year 1551, Captain Thomas Windham sailed in the ship Lion for
+Morocco, whither he carried two Moors of the blood-royal. This was the
+first voyage to the western coast of Africa of which we have any
+account, and these are all the particulars to be found respecting it;
+except that one Thomas Alday, a servant to Sebastian Cabot, in a letter
+inserted in Hakluyt's Collection[180], represents himself as the first
+promoter of this trade to Barbary, and observes that he would have
+performed this voyage himself, with the sole command of the ship and
+goods, had it not been that Sir John Lutterel, John Fletcher, Henry
+Ostrich, and others with whom he was connected, died of the sweating
+sickness, and he himself, after escaping that disease, was seized by a
+violent fever, so that Thomas Windham sailed from Portsmouth before he
+recovered, by which he lost eighty pounds.
+
+[Footnote 180: Vol. II. p. 7.]
+
+"In the next year, 1552, Windham made a second voyage to _Zafin_ or
+_Saffi_ and Santa Cruz without the straits, which gave so much offence
+to the Portuguese, that they threatened to treat the English as enemies
+if found in these seas. Yet in the year following, the same Thomas
+Windham, with a Portuguese named Antonio Yanez Pinteado, who appears to
+have been the chief promoter of the attempt, undertook a voyage to
+Guinea, with three ships having an hundred and forty men; and having
+traded for some time on the coast for gold, they went to Benin to load
+pepper: But both the commanders and most of the men dying of sickness,
+occasioned by the climate, the rest returned to Plymouth with one ship
+only, having burnt the other two for want of hands, and brought back no
+great riches. In 1554, Mr John Lok made a voyage with three ships to the
+coast of Guinea, whence he brought back a considerable quantity of gold
+and ivory. These voyages appear to have been succeeded by others almost
+every year. At length, upon application to Queen Elizabeth, two patents
+were granted to certain merchants. One in 1585, for the Barbary or
+Morocco trade, and the other in 1588, for the trade to Guinea between
+the rivers Senegal and Gambia[181]. In 1592, a third patent was granted
+to other persons, taking in the coast from the river _Nonnia_ to the
+south of Sierra Leona, for the space of 100 leagues, which patents gave
+rise to the African company. In all their voyages to the coast of Africa
+they had disputes with the Portuguese. Several of these voyages have
+been preserved by Hakluyt, and will be found inserted in this chapter,
+as forerunners to the English voyages to the East Indies.
+
+[Footnote 181: The former for twelve years, was granted to the Earls of
+Leicester and Warwick, and certain merchants of London, to the number of
+32 in all. The other for ten years to eight persons of Exeter, London,
+and other places. By this latter patent, it appears that this trade was
+advised by the Portuguese residing in London, and one voyage had been
+made before the grant. See Hakluyt, II. part 2. pp. 114 and 123.--Astl.
+I. 139. a.]
+
+"The views of the English extending with experience and success, and
+finding the long attempted north-east and north-west passages to India
+impracticable, they at length determined to proceed for that distant
+region round Africa by the same course with the Portuguese. In 1591,
+that voyage was undertaken for the first time by three large ships under
+the command of Captain Raymond; and in 1596, another fleet of three
+ships set out on the same design under Captain Wood, but with bad
+success. In the mean time several navigators were employed to discover
+this course to the East Indies. At length in 1600, a charter was
+obtained from Queen Elizabeth by a body of merchants, to the number of
+216, having George Earl of Cumberland at their head, under the name of
+the _Company of Merchant Adventurers_, for carrying on a trade to the
+East Indies. From this period ships were sent there regularly every two
+or three years; and thus were laid the foundations of the English East
+India commerce, which has subsisted ever since under exclusive chartered
+companies.
+
+"Long before the English sailed to India in their own ships, several
+English merchants and others had gone to India from time to time in the
+Portuguese ships, and some overland; from a desire to pry into and to
+participate in the advantages of that gainful commerce. Of those who
+went by land, several letters and relations remain which will be found
+in the sequel: But of all who performed the voyage as passengers in the
+Portuguese vessels, we know of only one who left any account of his
+adventures, or at least whose account has been published; viz. Thomas
+Stephens. To this may be added the account by _Captain Davis_ of a
+voyage in the Dutch ship called the _Middleburgh Merchants_ in 1598, of
+which he served as pilot, for the purpose of making himself acquainted
+with the maritime route to India, and the posture of the Portuguese
+affairs in that country. Both of these journals contain very useful
+remarks for the time in which they were made, and both will be found in
+our collection.
+
+"Although the first voyages of the English to the East Indies are full
+of variety, yet the reader is not to expect such a continued series of
+new discoveries, great actions, battles, sieges, and conquests, as are
+to be met with in the history of the Portuguese expeditions: For it must
+be considered that we made few or no discoveries, as these had been
+already made before; that our voyages were for the most part strictly
+commercial; that our settlements were generally made by the consent of
+the natives; that we made no conquests; and that the undertakings were
+set on foot and carried on entirely by our merchants[182]. On this
+account it is, probably, that we have no regular history extant of the
+English Voyages, Discoveries, and Transactions in the East Indies, as we
+find there are many such of the Portuguese and Spanish. It may be
+presumed, however, that as the East India Company has kept regular
+journals of their affairs, and is furnished with letters and other
+memorials from their agents, that a satisfactory account of all the
+English Transactions in India might be collected, if the Company thought
+proper to give orders for its execution[183]."--_Astley_.
+
+[Footnote 182: These observations are to be considered as applying
+entirely to the earlier connection of the English with India. In more
+modern days there has been a sufficiently copious series of great
+actions, battles, sieges, and conquests; but these belong to a different
+and more modern period than that now under review, and are more
+connected with the province of political military and naval history,
+than with a Collection of Voyages and Travels. Yet these likewise will
+require to be noticed in an after division of this work.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 183: A commencement towards this great desideratum in English
+History has been lately made, by the publication of the early History of
+the English East India Company, by John Bruce, Esquire, Historiographer
+to the Company.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Second Voyage of the English to Barbary, in the year 1552, by Captain
+Thomas Windham_[184].
+
+
+Of the first voyage to Barbary without the straits, made by the same
+Captain Thomas Wyndham, the only remaining record is in a letter from
+James Aldaie to Michael Locke, already mentioned in the Introduction to
+this Chapter, and preserved in Hakluyt's Collection, II. 462. According
+to Hakluyt, the account of this second voyage was written by James
+Thomas, then page to Captain Thomas Windham, chief captain of the
+voyage, which was set forth by Sir John Yorke, Sir William Gerard, Sir
+Thomas Wroth, Messieurs Frances Lambert, Cole, and others.--E.
+
+[Footnote 184: Hakluyt, II. 463. Astley, I. 140.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The ships employed on this voyage were three, of which two belonged to
+the River Thames. These were the Lion of London of about 150 tons, of
+which Thomas Windham was captain and part owner; and the Buttolfe of
+about 80 tons. The third was a Portuguese caravel of about 60 tons,
+bought from some Portuguese at Newport in Wales, and freighted for the
+voyage. The number of men in the three ships was 120. The master of the
+Lion was John Kerry of Minehead in Somersetshire, and his mate was David
+Landman. Thomas Windham, the chief captain of the Adventure, was a
+gentleman, born in the county of Norfolk, but resident at Marshfield
+Park in Somersetshire.
+
+The fleet set sail from King-road near Bristol about the beginning of
+May 1552, being on a Monday morning; and on the evening of the Monday
+fortnight we came to anchor in the port of Zafia or Asafi on the coast
+of Barbary, in 32° N. where we landed part of our cargo to be conveyed
+by land to the city of Marocco. Having refreshed at this port, we went
+thence to the port of Santa-Cruz, where we landed the rest of our goods,
+being a considerable quantity of linen and woollen cloth, with coral,
+amber, jet, and divers other goods esteemed by the Moors. We found a
+French ship in the road of Santa-Cruz, the people on board which being
+uncertain whether France and England were then at peace or engaged in
+war, drew her as near as possible to the walls of the town, from which
+they demanded assistance for their defence in case of need; and on
+seeing our vessels draw near, they shot off a piece of ordnance from the
+walls, the ball passing through between the main and fore masts of the
+Lion. We came immediately to anchor, and presently a pinnace came off to
+inquire who we were; and on learning that we had been there the year
+before, and had the licence of their king for trade, they were fully
+satisfied, giving us leave to bring our goods peaceably on shore, where
+the viceroy, Sibill Manache came shortly to visit us, and treated us
+with all civility. Owing to various delays, we were nearly three months
+at this place before we could get our lading, which consisted of sugar,
+dates, almonds, and molasses, or the syrup of sugar. Although we were at
+this place for so long a time during the heat of summer, yet none of our
+company perished of sickness.
+
+When our ships were all loaded, we drew out to sea in waiting for a
+western wind to carry us to England. But while at sea a great leak broke
+out in the Lion, on which we bore away for the island of Lançerota,
+between which and Fuertaventura we came to anchor in a safe road-stead,
+whence we landed 70 chests of sugar upon the island of Lançerota, with a
+dozen or sixteen of our men. Conceiving that we had come wrongfully by
+the caraval, the inhabitants came by surprise upon us and took all who
+were on shore prisoners, among whom I was one, and destroyed our sugars.
+On this transaction being perceived from our ships, they sent on shore
+three boats filled with armed men to our rescue; and our people landing,
+put the Spaniards to flight, of whom they slew eighteen, and made the
+governor of the island prisoner, who was an old gentleman about 70 years
+of age. Our party continued to chase the Spaniards so far for our
+rescue, that they exhausted all their powder and arrows, on which the
+Spaniards rallied and returned upon them, and slew six of our men in the
+retreat. After this our people and the Spaniards came to a parley, in
+which it was agreed that we the prisoners should be restored in exchange
+for the old governor, who gave us a certificate under his hand of the
+damages we had sustained by the spoil of our sugars, that we might be
+compensated upon our return to England, by the merchants belonging to
+the king of Spain.
+
+Having found and repaired the leak, and all our people being returned on
+board, we made sail; and while passing one side of the island, the
+Cacafuego and other ships of the Portuguese navy entered by the other
+side to the same roadstead whence we had just departed, and shot off
+their ordnance in our hearing. It is proper to mention that the
+Portuguese were greatly offended at this our new trade to Barbary, and
+both this year and the former, they gave out through their merchants in
+England, with great threats and menaces, that they would treat us as
+mortal enemies, if they found us in these seas: But by the good
+providence of God we escaped their hands. We were seven or eight weeks
+in making our passage from Lançerota for the coast of England, where the
+first port we made was Plymouth; and from thence sailed for the Thames,
+where we landed our merchandise at London about the end of October 1552.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_A Voyage from England to Guinea and Benin in 1553, by Captain Windham
+and Antonio Anes Pinteado_[185].
+
+
+PREVIOUS REMARKS.
+
+This and the following voyage to Africa were first published by Richard
+Eden in a small collection, which was afterwards reprinted in 4to, by
+Richard Willes in 1577[186]. Hakluyt has inserted both these in his
+Collection, with Eden's preamble as if it were his own; only that he
+ascribes the account of Africa to the right owner[187].
+
+[Footnote 185: Astley, I. 141. Hakluyt, II. 464.--The editor of Astley's
+Collection says _Thomas_ Windham; but we have no evidence in Hakluyt,
+copying from Eden, that such was his Christian name, or that he was the
+same person who had gone twice before to the coast of Morocco. In
+Hakluyt, the Voyage is said to have been at the charge of certain
+merchant adventurers of London.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 186: Hist. of Travayle in the West and East Indies, &c. by
+Eden and Willes, 4to, p. 336.--Astl. I. 141. b.]
+
+[Footnote 187: So far the editor of Astley's Collection: The remainder
+of these previous remarks contains the preamble by Eden, as reprinted by
+Hakluyt, II. 464.--E.]
+
+"I was desired by certain friends to make some mention of this voyage,
+that some memory of it might remain to posterity, being the first
+enterprised by the English to parts that may become of great consequence
+to our merchants, if not hindered by the ambition of such as conceive
+themselves lords of half the world, by having conquered some forty or
+fifty miles here and there, erecting certain fortresses, envying that
+others should enjoy the commodities which they themselves cannot wholly
+possess. And, although such as have been at charges in the discovering
+and conquering of such lands, ought in good reason to have certain
+privileges, pre-eminences and tributes for the same; yet, under
+correction, it may seem somewhat rigorous and unreasonable, or rather
+contrary to the charity that ought to subsist among Christians, that
+such as invade the dominions of others, should not allow other friendly
+nations to trade in places nearer and seldom frequented by themselves,
+by which their own trade is not hindered in such other places as they
+have chosen for themselves as staples or marts of their trade[188]. But
+as I do not propose either to accuse or defend, I shall cease to speak
+any farther on this subject, and proceed to the account of the first
+voyage to those parts, as briefly and faithfully as I was advertised of
+the same, by information of such credible persons as made diligent
+inquiry respecting it, omitting many minute particulars, not greatly
+necessary to be known; but which, with the exact course of the
+navigation, shall be more fully related in the second voyage. If some
+may think that certain persons have been rather sharply reflected on, I
+have this to say, that favour and friendship ought always to give way
+before truth, that honest men may receive the praise of well-doing, and
+bad men be justly reproved; that the good may be encouraged to proceed
+in honest enterprizes, and the bad deterred from following evil example.
+
+[Footnote 188: Richard Eden here obviously endeavours to combat the
+monopoly of trade to the Portuguese discoveries, arrogated by that
+nation; although the entire colonial system of all the European nations
+has always been conducted upon the same exclusive principles, down to
+the present day.--E.]
+
+That these voyages may be the better understood, I have thought proper
+to premise a brief description of Africa, on the west coast of which
+great division of the world, the coast of Guinea begins at Cape Verd in
+about lat. 12° N. and about two degrees in longitude _from the measuring
+line_[189]; whence running from north to south, and in some places by
+east, within 5, 4, and 3-1/2 degrees into the equinoctial, and so forth
+in manner directly east and north, for the space of about 36 degrees in
+longitude from west to east, as shall more plainly appear in the second
+voyage[190].
+
+[Footnote 189: Evidently meaning the first meridian passing through the
+island of Ferro, one of the Canaries, from which Cape Verd is about 2°
+W.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 190: These geographical indications respecting the coast of
+Guinea, are extremely obscure, so as to be almost unintelligible.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Brief Description of Africa, by Richard Eden_[191].
+
+In the lesser Africa are the kingdoms of Tunis and Constantina, which
+latter is at this day subject to Tunis, and also the regions of Bugia,
+Tripoli, and Ezzah. This part of Africa is very barren, by reason of the
+great deserts of Numidia and Barca. The principal ports of the kingdom
+of Tunis are, Goletta, Bizerta, Potofarnia, Bona, and Stora. Tunis and
+Constantina are the chief cities, with several others. To this kingdom
+belong the following islands, Zerbi, Lampadola, Pantalarea, Limoso,
+Beit, Gamelaro, and Malta; in which the grand-master of the knights of
+Rhodes now resides. To the south of this kingdom are the great deserts
+of Lybia. All the nations of this lesser Africa are of the sect of
+Mahomet, a rustical people living scattered in villages.
+
+[Footnote 191: This brief description of Africa is preserved, rather for
+the purpose of shewing what were the ideas of the English on this
+subject towards the end of the sixteenth century, than for any
+excellence.--E.]
+
+The best of this part of Africa is Mauritania, now called Barbary, on
+the coast of the Mediterranean. Mauritania is divided into two parts,
+Tingitana and Cesariensis. Mauritania Tingitana is now called the
+kingdoms of Fez and Marocco, of which the capitals bear the same names.
+Mauritania, Cesariensis is now called the kingdom of Tremessan, the
+capital of which is named Tremessan or Telensin. This region is full of
+deserts, and reaches to the Mediterranean, to the city of Oran with the
+port of Mersalquiber. The kingdom of Fez reaches to the ocean, from the
+west to the city of Arzilla, and Sala or Salee is the port of this
+kingdom. The kingdom of Marocco also extends to the ocean, on which it
+has the cities of Azamor and Azafi. Near to Fez and Marocco in the ocean
+are the Canary islands, anciently called the Fortunate islands.
+
+To the south is the kingdom of Guinea, with Senega, Jalofo, Gambra, and
+many other regions of _the black Moors_, called Ethiopians or Negroes,
+all of which regions are watered by the river Negro, called anciently
+the Niger[192]. In these regions there are no cities, but only villages
+of low cottages made of boughs of trees, plastered over with chalk and
+covered with straw; and in these regions there are great deserts.
+
+[Footnote 192: In the text the Senegal river is to be understood by the
+Negro, or river of the Blacks. But the ancient Niger is now well known
+to run eastwards in the interior of Nigritia, having no connection
+whatever with the Senegal or with the sea.--E.]
+
+The kingdom of Marocco includes seven subordinate kingdoms, named Hea,
+Sus, Guzula, Marocco proper, Duccula, Hazchora, and Tedle. Fez has an
+equal number, as Fez, Temesne, Azgar, Elabath, Errif, Garet, and Elcair.
+Tremessan has only three, being Tremessan, Tenez, and Elgazair; all the
+inhabitants of all these regions being Mahometans. But all the regions
+of Guinea are peopled by Gentiles and idolaters, having no religion or
+knowledge of God except from the law of nature.
+
+Africa, one of the three great divisions of the world known to the
+ancients, is separated from Asia on the east by the river Nile, and on
+the west from Europe by the Pillars of Hercules or the Straits of
+Gibraltar. The entire northern coast along the Mediterranean is now
+called Barbary, and is inhabited by the Moors. The inner part is called
+Lybia and Ethiopia. Lesser Africa, in which stood the noble city of
+Carthage, has Numidia on the west and Cyrenaica on the east.
+
+On the east side of Africa, to the west of the Red Sea, are the
+dominions of the great and mighty Christian king or emperor Prester
+John, well known to the Portuguese in their voyages to Calicut. His
+dominions reach very far on every side, and he has many other kings
+under his authority who pay him tribute, both Christian and Pagan. This
+mighty prince is named David emperor of Ethiopia, and it is said that
+the Portuguese send him every year eight ships laden with merchandise.
+His dominions are bounded on one side by the Red Sea, and stretch far
+into Africa towards Egypt and Barbary. To the southwards they adjoin
+with the great sea or ocean towards the Cape of Good Hope, and to the
+north are bounded by the great and dangerous _Sea of Sand_, lying
+between the great city of Cairo in Egypt and the country of Ethiopia; in
+which are many uninhabitable deserts continuing for the space of five
+days journey. It is affirmed, if the Christian emperor were not hindered
+by the deserts, in which there is great want of provisions and
+especially of water, that he would ere now have invaded Egypt. The chief
+city of Ethiopia, in which this great emperor resides, is called
+_Amacaiz_, being a city of some importance, the inhabitants of which are
+of an olive complexion. There are many other cities, such as the city of
+_Sava_ on the Nile, where the emperor ordinarily resides during the
+summer. There is likewise a great city named _Barbaregaf_ and _Ascon_,
+whence the queen of Saba is supposed to have gone for Jerusalem to hear
+the wisdom of Solomon[193]. This last city though little is very fair,
+and one of the principal cities of Ethiopia. In this province there are
+many very high mountains, on which the terrestrial paradise is supposed
+to have been situated; and some say that the trees of the sun and moon
+which are mentioned by the ancients, are to be found there, but no one
+has ever been able to go to them, on account of great deserts extending
+to an hundred days journey. Also beyond these mountains is the Cape of
+Good Hope.
+
+[Footnote 193: The names of places are so corruptly given as hardly even
+to be guessed at. Amacaiz may possibly be meant for Amba Keshem, Sava
+for Shoa, Barbaregaf for the Baharnagash, and Ascon for Assab.--E.]
+
+_Journal of the Voyage_.
+
+On the 12th of August 1553, there sailed from Portsmouth two goodly
+ships, the Primrose and the Lion, with a pinnace called the Moon, all
+well furnished with 140 able bodied men, and with ordnance and victuals
+fitting for the voyage. They were commanded by two captains; one of whom
+was a foreigner named Antonio Anes Pinteado, a native of Oporto in
+Portugal, a wise, discreet, and sober man, who, for his skill in
+navigation both as an experienced pilot and prudent commander, was at
+one time in such favour with the king of Portugal, that the coasts of
+Brazil and Guinea were committed to his care against the French, to whom
+he was a terror in these seas. He had been likewise a gentleman of the
+household to the king. But as fortune ever flatters when it favours,
+ever deceives when it promises, and ever casts down whom it raises, so
+great wealth and high favour are always accompanied by emulation and
+envy; in like manner was he, after many adversities and malicious
+accusations, forced to take refuge in England. In this golden voyage
+Pinteado was ill-matched with an evil companion, his own various good
+qualities being coupled with one who had few or no virtues. Thus did
+these noble ships depart on their voyage; but previously captain Windham
+put out of his ship at Portsmouth a kinsman of one of the head
+merchants, shewing in this a sample of the bad intention of his mind,
+which grew from this small beginning to a monstrous enormity; yet happy
+was that young man for being left behind.
+
+Arriving at the island of Madeira, they took in some wine for the use of
+the ships. At this island was a great galleon belonging to the king of
+Portugal, full of men and ordnance, which had been expressly fitted out
+to interrupt our ships in their intended voyage, or any others that
+might intend a similar expedition; for the king of Portugal had been
+secretly informed that our ships were armed to attack his castle of
+Mina, though no such thing was intended; yet did not that galleon
+attempt to stay our ships, nor could she have been able to withstand
+them if that had been tried.
+
+After their departure from Madeira the worthy captain Pinteado began to
+experience affliction from Captain Windham, who had hitherto carried a
+fair appearance of good will, but now assumed to himself the sole
+command, setting both captain Pinteado and the merchants factors at
+nought, giving them opprobrious words and sometimes abusing them most
+shamefully with threats of personal ill-treatment. He even proceeded to
+deprive captain Pinteado of the service of the boys and others who had
+been assigned him by order of the merchant adventurers, reducing him to
+the rank of a common mariner, which is the greatest affront that can be
+put upon a Portuguese or Spaniard, who prize their honour above all
+things. Passing the Canaries, they came to the island of St Nicholas,
+one of the Cape Verds, where they procured abundance of the flesh of
+wild goats, being almost its only produce. Following their voyage from
+thence, they tarried by the way at certain desert islands, not willing
+to arrive too early on the coast of Guinea on account of the heat. But
+being under an arbitrary rule, they tarried too long, and came at length
+to the first land of Guinea at the river _Cesto_[194], where they might
+have exchanged their merchandise for a full lading of the _grains_, or
+spice of that country, which is a very hot fruit and much like figs; the
+fruit being full of grains which are loose within the pod[195]. This
+kind of spice is much used in cold countries, and may be sold there to
+great advantage in exchange for other commodities. But, by the
+persuasion or command rather of our tyrannical captain, our people made
+light of this commodity in comparison with the fine gold for which they
+thirsted, wherefore they made sail an hundred leagues farther till they
+came to the golden land or gold coast.
+
+[Footnote 194: Or Sestre, a river on the Grain coast or Malaguette.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 195: This is the Guinea pepper, called grains of Paradise by
+the Italians, whence this part of Guinea was named the grain coast. The
+text describes the pods as having a hole on each side, which, it was
+afterwards learnt, were for putting thongs, strings or twigs on which to
+dry the pods. These pods grow on a humble plant, not above a foot and a
+half or two feet from the ground, and are bright red when first
+gathered,--Astl.]
+
+At this part of the coast, not venturing to come near the castle of St
+George del Mina belonging to the king of Portugal, they made sale of
+their goods only on this side and beyond that place, receiving the gold
+of the country in exchange to the extent of 150 pounds weight[196], and
+they might have bartered all their merchandise for gold at that place,
+if the pride of Windham had allowed him to listen to the counsel and
+experience of Pinteado: but not satisfied with what he had got or might
+still have procured, if he had remained in the neighbourhood of Mina, he
+commanded Pinteado to navigate the ships to Benin under the equinoctial,
+150 leagues beyond the Mina, where he expected to have laden the ships
+with pepper. When Pinteado urged the lateness of the season, and advised
+that instead of going farther they should continue to dispose of their
+wares for gold, by which great profit would have been gained, Windham
+flew into a passion, called Pinteado a Jew, and gave him much
+opprobrious language, saying, "This rascally Jew promised to conduct us
+to places that either do not exist or to which he knows not the way, but
+if he does not I will cut off his ears and nail them to the mast." The
+advice given by Pinteado, not to go farther, was for the safety of the
+mens lives, which would have been in great danger at that late season,
+during their winter or _rossia_, not so called on account of cold, but
+from the heat accompanied with close and cloudy air, alternating with
+great tempests, during which the air was of so putrifying a quality as
+to rot the clothes on their backs. He had formerly lingered by the way,
+to prevent them arriving too soon on the coast, when the heat of the sun
+is scorching and unbearable.
+
+Thus constrained contrary to his wish, he brought the ships to anchor
+off the mouth of the river Benin, whence the pinnace was sent 50 or 60
+leagues up the river. They then landed, and Pinteado, with Francisco
+another Portuguese, Nicholas Lambert a gentleman, and other merchants
+were conducted to the kings court, ten leagues from the river, where
+they were brought into the kings presence by a great company. The king
+was a _black Moor_ or negro, though not quite so black as the rest, and
+sat in a long wide hall having earthen walls without windows, roofed
+with thin planks open in many parts to let in air. These people give
+wonderful reverence to their king, even the highest of his officers
+when in his presence never daring to look him in the face, but sit
+cowering on their buttocks with their elbows on their knees, and their
+hands on their faces, never looking up till the king commands them. When
+coming towards the king they shew him the utmost reverence from as far
+off as they can see him; and when they depart they never turn their
+backs towards him. In the communication of our men with the king, he
+used the Portuguese language, which he had learnt when a child.
+Commanding our men to stand up, he inquired the reason of their coming
+into his country; on which he was answered by Pinteado, that we were
+merchants who had come from a distant country into his dominions, to
+procure the commodities of the country in exchange for wares which we
+had brought from our own country, to the mutual convenience of both
+countries. The king had then 30 or 40 quintals or hundred weights of
+pepper, which had long lain in a store-house, which he desired our
+people to look at, and that they should exhibit to him such commodities
+as they had brought for sale. He likewise sent some of his officers to
+conduct our people to the water-side, and to carry our wares from the
+pinnace to his residence. These things being done, the king engaged to
+our merchants that in 30 days he would provide a sufficiency of pepper
+to load all our ships, and in case our merchandise might not amount to
+the whole value of the pepper, he promised to give credit till next
+season, and immediately sent orders over all the country to gather
+pepper, so that in 30 days 80 tons of pepper were procured.
+
+[Footnote 196: Or 1800 ounces, which at L.3, 17s. 6d. per ounce, is
+equal to L.6975 sterling, a large sum in those days.--E.]
+
+In the meantime our men lived without any rule, eating without measure
+of the fruit of the country, drinking the palm wine which runs in the
+night from the cut branches of that tree, and continually running into
+the water to assuage the extreme heat of the season; and not being used
+to these sudden transitions, which are excessively dangerous, they fell
+into swellings and agues, by which about the end of the year they were
+dying sometimes 3, 4, or 5 in a day. When the 30 days were expired, and
+Windham saw his men dying so fast, he sent orders to Pinteado and the
+rest to come away without any more delay. Pinteado and the others wrote
+back to inform him of the large quantity of pepper already gathered, and
+that they looked daily for more, desiring him to consider the great
+praise they would all get on their return if the voyage turned out
+profitable, and the shame that must attend returning without a full
+loading. Not satisfied with this answer, more especially as the men
+continued to die in great numbers, Windham sent a second message
+ordering them to return immediately, or that he would go away and leave
+them. Thinking to prevail upon him by reasonable means, Pinteado
+returned to the ships under an escort provided by the negro king.
+
+In the mean time Windham, enraged at Pinteado, broke open his cabin and
+all his chests, spoiled all the cordials and sweetmeats he had provided
+for his health, and left him nothing either of his cloaths or nautical
+instruments; after which strange procedure he fell sick and died. When
+he came on board, Pinteado lamented as much for the death of Windham as
+if he had been his dearest friend; but several of the mariners and
+officers spit in his face, calling him Jew, and asserted that he had
+brought them to this place on purpose that they should die; and some
+even drew their swords, threatening to slay him. They insisted that he
+should leave the coast immediately, and though he only requested them to
+wait till those who were left at the court of the king of Benin could be
+sent for, they would by no means consent. He then prayed them to give
+him a boat, and as much of an old sail as might serve to fit her out, in
+which he proposed to bring Nicholas Lambert[197] and the rest to
+England, but even this they would not consent to. Finding all his
+representations in vain, he wrote a letter to the merchants at court,
+informing them of all that had happened at the ships, promising, if God
+spared his life, that he would return as soon as possible for them.
+
+[Footnote 197: This Lambert was a Londoner born, his father having been
+Lord Mayor of London.--Hakluyt.]
+
+Pinteado, thus kept on board against his will, was thrust among the
+cabin-boys, and worse used than any of them, insomuch that he was forced
+to depend on the favour of the cook for subsistence. Having sunk one of
+their ships for want of hands to navigate her, the people departed from
+the coast with the other. Within six or seven days, Pinteado died
+broken-hearted, from the cruel and undeserved usage he had met with,--a
+man worthy to have served any prince, and most vilely used. Of 140 men
+who had sailed originally from Portsmouth on this unfortunate and
+ill-conducted voyage, scarcely 40 got back to Plymouth, and many even
+of those died soon afterwards.
+
+That no one may suspect that I have written in commendation of Pinteado
+from partiality or favour, otherwise than as warranted by truth, I have
+thought good to add copies of the letters which the king of Portugal and
+the infant his brother wrote to induce him to return to Portugal, at the
+time when, by the king's displeasure, and not owing to any crime or
+offence, he was enforced by poverty to come to England, where he first
+induced our merchants to engage in voyages to Guinea. All these writings
+I saw under seal in the house of my friend Nicholas Lieze, with whom
+Pinteado left them when he departed on his unfortunate voyage to Guinea.
+But, notwithstanding these friendly letters and fair promises, Pinteado
+durst not venture to return to Portugal, neither indeed durst he trust
+himself in company with any of his own countrymen, unless in the
+presence of other persons, as he had secret intimation that they meant
+to have assassinated him, when time and place might serve their wicked
+purpose.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The papers alluded to in this concluding paragraph by Richard Eden, do
+not seem necessary to be inserted. They consist of, a commission or
+patent dated 22d September 1551, appointing Pinteado one of the knights
+of the royal household, with 700 _rees_, or ten shillings a month, and
+half a bushel of barley every day so long as he should keep a horse; but
+with an injunction not to marry for six years, lest he might have
+children to succeed in this allowance. The second document is merely a
+certificate of registration of the first. The third is a letter from the
+infant, Don Luis, brother to the king of Portugal, dated 8th December
+1552, urging Pinteado to return to Lisbon, and intimating that Peter
+Gonzalvo, the bearer of the letter, had a safe conduct for him in due
+form. From the introduction to these papers, it appears that Pinteado
+had suffered long disgrace and imprisonment, proceeding upon false
+charges, and had been at last set free by means of the king's confessor,
+a grey friar, who had manifested his innocence.--E.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Voyage to Guinea, in 1554, by Captain John Lok_[198].
+
+
+As in the first voyage of the English to Guinea, I have given rather the
+order of the history than the course of navigation, of which I had then
+no perfect information; so in this second voyage my chief purpose has
+been to shew the course pursued, according to the ordinary custom and
+observation of mariners, and as I received it from the hands of an
+expert pilot, who was one of the chiefest in this voyage[199], who with
+his own hand wrote a brief journal of the whole, as he had found and
+tried in all things, not conjecturally, but by the art of navigation,
+and by means of instruments fitted for nautical use[200]. Not assuming
+therefore to myself the commendations due to another, neither having
+presumed in any part to change the substance or order of this journal,
+so well observed by art and experience, I have thought fit to publish it
+in the language commonly used by mariners, exactly as I received it from
+that pilot[201].
+
+[Footnote 198: Hakluyt, II. 470. Astl 1.114. In the first edition of
+Hakluyt's collection, this voyage is given under the name of Robert
+Gainsh, who was master of the John Evangelist, as we learn by a marginal
+note at the beginning of the voyage in both editions.--Astl. I. 144. a.]
+
+[Footnote 199: Perhaps this might be Robert Gainsh, in whose name the
+voyage was first published.--Astl. I. 144. b.]
+
+[Footnote 200: Yet the latitudes he gives, if observed, are by no means
+exact.--Astl.
+
+In this version we have added the true latitudes and longitudes in the
+text between brackets; the longitude from Greenwich always
+understood.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 201: This is the exordium, written by Richard Eden, from whose
+work it was adopted by Hakluyt, yet without acknowledgement. In the
+title, it appears that this expedition was fitted out as the joint
+adventure of Sir George Barne, Sir John York, Thomas Lok, Anthony
+Hickman, and Edward Castelin.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+On the 11th October 1554, we departed from the river Thames with three
+good ships. One of these named the Trinity, was of 140 tons burden; the
+second, called the Bartholomew, was 90 tons; and the third, called the
+John Evangelist, was 140 tons. With these three ships and two pinnaces,
+one of which was lost on the coast of England, we staid fourteen days at
+Dover, and three or four days at Rye, and lastly we touched at
+Dartmouth. Departing on the 1st November, at 9 o'clock at night, from
+the coast of England, off the Start point, and steering due south-west
+all that night, all next day, and the next night after, till noon of the
+3d, we made our way good, running 60 leagues. The morning of the 17th we
+had sight of the island of Madeira, which to those who approach from
+N.N.E. seems to rise very high, and almost perpendicular in the west. To
+the S.S.E. is a long low land, and a long point with a saddle through
+the midst of it, standing in 32° N. [lat. 32° 30' N. long. 16° 12' W.]
+And in the west part are many springs of water running down from the
+mountain, with many white fields like fields of corn, and some white
+houses in the S.E. part. Also in this part is a rock at a small distance
+from the shore, over which a great gap or opening is seen in the
+mountain.
+
+The 19th at noon we had sight of the isles of Palma, Teneriffe, and
+Grand Canarea. The isle of Palma rises round, and stretches from S.E. to
+N.W. the north-west part being lowest. In the south is a round hill over
+the head-land, with another round hill behind and farther inland.
+Between the S.E. end of Madeira and the N.W. part of the island of
+Palma, the distance is 57 leagues[202], Palma being in 28°. [lat. 28°
+45' N. long 17° 45' W.] Our course between the S.E. end of Madeira and
+the N.W. part of Palma was S. and S. by W. so that we had sight of
+Teneriffe and the Grand Canary. The S.E. part of Palma and N.N.E. of
+Teneriffe lie S.E. and N.W. [rather E. and W.] distance 20 leagues [33
+leagues.] Teneriffe and Grand Canarea, with the west part of
+Fuertaventura, stand in 27° 30'[203]. Gomera is a fair island, but very
+rugged, W.S.W. from Teneriffe, the passage between running from N. by W.
+to S. by E. In the south part of Gomera is a town and good road-stead,
+in lat. 28° N. Teneriffe is a mountainous island, with a great high peak
+like a sugar-loaf, on which there is snow all the year, and by that peak
+it may be known from all other islands. On the 20th November we were
+there becalmed from six in the morning till four in the afternoon. On
+the 22d November, being then under the tropic of Cancer, the sun set W.
+and by S. On the coast of Barbary, 25 leagues N. of Cape Blanco, at 3
+leagues from shore, we had 15 fathoms water on a good shelly bottom
+mixed with sand, and no currents, having two small islands in lat. 22°
+20' N.[7] From Gomera to Cape de las Barbas is 100 leagues, [116] the
+course being S. by E. That cape is in lat. 22° 30, [22° 15'] all the
+coast thereabout being flat, and having 16 and 17 fathoms off shore. All
+the way from the river del Oro to Cape Barbas, at 7 or 8 leagues off
+shore, many Spaniards and Portuguese employ themselves in fishing during
+the month of November, the whole of that coast consisting of very low
+lands. From Cape Barbas we held a course S.S.W. and S.W. by S. till we
+came into lat. 20° 30', reckoning ourselves 7 leagues off shore, and we
+there came to the least shoals of Cape Blanco. We then sailed to the
+lat. of 13° N. reckoning ourselves 20 leagues off; and in 15° _we did
+rear the crossiers_, or cross stars, and might have done so sooner if we
+had looked for them. They are not right across in the month of November,
+as the nights are short there, but we had sight of them on the 29th of
+that month at night. The 1st of December, being in lat. 13° N. we set
+our course S. by E. till the 4th at noon, when we were in 9° 20'
+reckoning ourselves 30 leagues W.S.W. from the shoals of the Rio Grande,
+which extend for 30 leagues. On the 4th, being in 6° 30', we set our
+course S.E. The 9th we changed our course E.S.E. The 14th, being in lat.
+5° 30' and reckoning ourselves 36 leagues from the coast of Guinea, we
+set our course due E. The 19th, reckoning ourselves 17 leagues from Cape
+Mensurado, we set our course E. by N. the said cape being E.N.E. of us,
+and the river Sesto E. The 20th we fell in with Cape Mensurado or
+Mesurado, which bore S.E. 2 leagues distant. This cape may be easily
+known, as it rises into a hummock like the head of a porpoise. Also
+towards the S.E. there are three trees, the eastmost being the highest,
+the middle one resembling a hay-stack, and that to the southward like a
+gibbet. Likewise on the main there are four or five high hills, one
+after the other, like round hummocks. The south-east of the three trees
+is _brandiernaure?_ and all the coast is a white sand. The said cape
+stands within a little of six degrees [lat. 6° 20' N. long. 10° 30' W.]
+The 22d we came to the river Sesto or Sesters, where we remained till
+the 29th, and we thought it best to send our pinnace before us to the
+Rio Dulce, that they might begin the market before the arrival of the
+John Evangelist. At the river Sesto, which is in six degrees less one
+terce, or 5° 40', we got a ton of grains[205]. From Rio Sesto to Rio
+Dulce the distance is 25 leagues, Rio Dulce being in 5° 30' N. The Rio
+Sesto is easily known by a ledge of rocks to the S.E. of the road[206],
+and at the mouth of the river are five or six trees without leaves. It
+is a good harbour, but the entrance of the river is very narrow, and has
+a rock right in the mouth. All that coast, between Cape Mount and Cape
+Palmas, lies S.E. by E. and N.W. by N. being three leagues
+offshore[207], and there are rocks in some places two leagues off,
+especially between the river Sesto and Cape Palmas.
+
+[Footnote 202: The real distance is 84 marine leagues, 20 to the
+degree.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 203: The parallel of lat. 28° N. goes through the centre of
+Grand Canarea, touching the southern point of Teneriffe, and just
+keeping free of the S.W. point of Fuertaventura.--E.]
+
+[204][Footnote 204: 7 Cape Blanco is in lat. 20° 50' N. 25 leagues to
+the north, would only reach to lat. 22° 5'; exactly almost in 22° is the
+small island of Pedro de Agale.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 205: In the preceding voyage grains have been explained as
+Guinea pepper, a species of capsicum.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 206: Rock Sesters is in long. 9° 20' W.]
+
+[Footnote 207: This is not intelligible, unless meant that ships may
+anchor for three leagues from the shore.--E.]
+
+Between the river Sesto and the river Dulce are 25 leagues. Between them
+and 8 leagues from Sesto river is a high land called _Cakeado_, and S.E.
+from it a place called _Shawgro_, and another called _Shyawe_ or
+_Shavo_, where fresh water may be had. Off Shyawe lies a ledge of rocks,
+and to the S.E. is a headland named _Croke_, which is 9 or 10 leagues
+from Cakeado. To the S.E. is a harbour called St Vincent, right over
+against which is a rock under water, two and a half leagues from shore.
+To the S.E. of this rock is an island 3 or 4 leagues off, and not above
+a league from shore, and to the S.E. of the island is a rock above
+water, and past that rock is the entrance of the river Dulce, which may
+be known by that rock. The N.W. side of the haven is flat sand, and the
+S.E. side is like an island, being a bare spot without any trees, which
+is not the case in any other place. In the road ships ride in 13 or 14
+fathoms, the bottom good ouse and sand. The marks for entering this road
+are to bring the island and the north-east land in one. We anchored
+there on the last day of December 1554, and on the 3d of January 1555 we
+came from the Rio Dulce. _Cape Palmas_ is a fair high land, some low
+parts of which by the waterside seem red cliffs, with white streaks like
+highways, a cables length each, which is on the east side of the Cape.
+This is the most southerly land on the coast of Guinea, and is in lat.
+4° 25' N. From Cape Palmas to Cape _Three-points_ or _Tres puntas_, the
+whole coast is perfectly safe and clear, without rock or other danger.
+About 25 leagues to the eastward of Cape Palmas the land is higher than
+in any other place till we come to Cape Three-points, and about ten
+leagues westward from that Cape the land begins to rise, and grows
+higher all the way to the point. Also about 5 leagues west from that
+Cape there is some broken ground with two great rocks, within which, in
+the bight of a bay, there is a castle called _Arra_ belonging to the
+king of Portugal, which is readily known by these rocks, as there are
+none other between Cape Palmas and Cape Three-points. The coast trends
+E. by N. and W. by S. From Cape Palmas to Arra castle is 95 leagues, and
+from thence to the western point of Cape Three-points it is S.E. by S.
+and N.W. by N. This western point of Cape Three-points is low land,
+stretching half a mile out to sea, and on the neck nearest the land is a
+tuft of trees.
+
+We arrived at Cape Three-points on the 11th January, and came next day
+to a town called _Samma_ or _Samua_, 8 leagues beyond, towards E.N.E.
+there being a great ledge of rocks a great way out to sea between Cape
+Three-points and that town. We remained four days off that town, the
+captain of which desired to have a pledge on shore, but on receiving one
+he kept him, and refused to continue trade, even shooting his ordnance
+at us, of which he only had two or three pieces[208]. On the 16th of the
+month we came to a place called Cape _Corea_[209], where dwelt Don John,
+and where we were well received by his people. This Cape Corea is 4
+leagues eastward from the castle of _Mina_. We arrived there on the 18th
+of the month, making sale of all our cloth except two or three packs. On
+the 26th we weighed anchor and went to join the Trinity, which was 7
+leagues to the eastwards of us, and had sold most of her wares. Then the
+people of the Trinity willed us to go 8 or 9 leagues farther to the
+east, to sell part of their wares at a place called _Perecow_, and
+another called _Perecow-grande_, still farther east, which is known by a
+great hill near it called _Monte Rodondo_ lying to the westwards, and
+many palm trees by the water side. From thence we began our voyage
+homewards on the 13th of February, and plied along the coast till we
+came within 7 or 8 leagues of Cape Three-points. About 8 in the
+afternoon of the 15th we cast about to seawards. Whoever shall come from
+the coast of Mina homewards, ought to beware of the currents, and should
+be sure of making his way good as far west as Cape Palmas, where the
+current sets always to the eastwards. About 20 leagues east of Cape
+Palmas is a river called _De los Potos_, where abundance of fresh water
+and ballast may be had, and plenty of ivory or elephants teeth, which
+river is in four degrees and almost two terces, or 4° 40' N. When you
+reckon to be as far west as Cape Palmas, being in lat. 1° or 1° 30' N.
+you may then stand W. or W. by N. till in lat. 3° N. Then you may go W.
+or N.W. by W. till in lat. 5° N. and then N.W. In lat. 6° N. we met
+northerly winds and great ruffling tides, and as far as we could judge
+the current set N.N.W. Likewise between Cape Mount and Cape Verd there
+are great currents, which are very apt to deceive.
+
+[Footnote 208: The pledge was nephew to Sir John Yorke.--_Eden_.]
+
+[Footnote 209: From the context, this seems to have been the place now
+called Cape Coast.--E.]
+
+On the 22d of April we were in lat. 8° 40' N. and continued our course
+to the north-west, having the wind at N.E. and E.N.E. sometimes at E.
+till the first of May, when we were in lat. 18° 20' N. Thence we had the
+wind at E. and E.N.E. sometimes E.S.E. when we reckoned the Cape Verd
+islands E.S.E. from us, and by estimation 48 leagues distant. In 20° and
+21° N. we had the wind more to the east and south than before; and so we
+ran N.W. and N.N.W. sometimes N. by W. and N. till we came into lat. 31°
+N. when we reckoned ourselves 180 leagues S.W. by S. of the island of
+Flores. Here we had the wind S.S.E. and shaped our course N.E. In 23° we
+had the wind at S. and S.W. and made our course N.N.E. in which
+direction we went to 40°, and then set our course N.E. having the wind
+at S.W. and the isle of Flores E. of us, 17 leagues distant. In 41° we
+had the wind N.E. and lay a course N.W. Then we met the wind at W.N.W.
+and at W. within 6 leagues, when we went N.W. We then altered to N.E.
+till in 42° where we shaped our course E.N.E. judging the isle of
+_Corvo_ to be W. of us, 36 leagues distant. On the 21st of May we
+communed with John Rafe who judged us to be in lat. 39° 30' N. 25
+leagues E. of Flora, and recommended to steer N.E.
+
+It is to be noted that in lat. 9° N. on the 4th of September, we lost
+sight of the north star. In lat. 45° N. the compass varied 8° to the W.
+of N. In 40° N. it varied 15°. And in 30° 30' N. its variation was 5° W.
+
+It is also to be noted that two or three days before we came to Cape
+Three-points, the pinnace went along shore endeavouring to sell some of
+our wares, and then we came to anchor three or four leagues west by
+south of that cape, where we left the Trinity. Then our pinnace came on
+board and took in more wares, telling us that they would go to a place
+where the Primrose[210] was, and had received much gold in the first
+voyage to these parts; but being in fear of a brigantine that was then
+on the coast, we weighed anchor and followed them, leaving the Trinity
+about four leagues from us. We accordingly rode at anchor opposite that
+town, where Martine, by his own desire and with the assent of some of
+the commissioners in the pinnace, went on shore to the town, and thence
+John Berin went to trade at another town three miles father on. The town
+is called Samma or Samua, which and Sammaterra are the two first towns
+to the N.E. of Cape Three-points, where we traded for gold.
+
+[Footnote 210: This was one of the ships in the former voyage under
+Windham.--E.]
+
+Having continued the course of the voyage as described by the
+before-mentioned pilot, I will now say something of the country and
+people, and of such things as are brought from thence[211].
+
+[Footnote 211: These subsequent notices seem subjoined by Richard Eden,
+the original publisher.--E.]
+
+They brought home in this voyage, 400 pounds weight and odd of
+gold[212], twenty-two carats and one grain fine. Also 36 buts of
+_grains_, or Guinea pepper, and about 250 elephants teeth of different
+sizes. Some of these I saw and measured, which were nine spans in length
+measured along the crook, and some were as thick as a mans thigh above
+the knee, weighing 90 pounds each, though some are said to have been
+seen weighing 125 pounds. There were some called the teeth of calves, of
+one, two, or three years old, measuring one and a-half, two, or three
+feet, according to the age of the beast. These great teeth or tusks
+grow in the upper jaw downwards, and not upwards from the lower jaw, as
+erroneously represented by some painters and _arras_ workers. In this
+voyage they brought home the head of an elephant of such huge bigness
+that the bones or cranium only, without the tusks or lower jaw, weighed
+about two hundred pounds, and was as much as I could well lift from the
+ground. So that, considering also the weight of the two great tusks and
+the under jaw, with the lesser teeth, the tongue, the great hanging
+ears, the long big snout or trunk, with all the flesh, brains, and skin,
+and other parts belonging to the head, it could not in my opinion weigh
+less than five hundred weight. This head has been seen by many in the
+house of the worthy merchant Sir Andrew Judde, where I saw it with my
+bodily eyes, and contemplated with those of my mind, admiring the
+cunning and wisdom of the work-master, without which consideration such
+strange and wonderful things are only curiosities, not profitable
+subjects of contemplation.
+
+[Footnote 212: Or 4800 ounces, worth, L.18,600 sterling at the old price
+of L.3 17s. 6d. per ounce; and perhaps worth in those days as much as
+ninety or an hundred thousand pounds in the present day.--E.]
+
+The elephant, by some called oliphant, is the largest of all four-footed
+beasts. The fore-legs are longer than those behind; in the lower part or
+ancles of which he has joints. The feet have each five toes, but
+undivided. The trunk or snout is so long and of such form that it serves
+him as a hand, for he both eats and drinks by bringing his food and
+drink to his mouth by its means, and by it he helps up his master or
+keeper, and also overturns trees by its strength. Besides his two great
+tusks, he has four teeth on each side of his mouth, by which he eats or
+grinds his food, each of these teeth being almost a span long, as they
+lie along the jaw, by two inches high and about as much in breadth. The
+tusks of the male are larger than those of the female. The tongue is
+very small, and so far within the mouth that it cannot be seen. This is
+the gentlest and most tractable of all beasts, and understands and is
+taught many things, so that it is even taught to do reverence to kings,
+being of acute sense and great judgment. When the female is once
+seasoned, the male never touches her afterwards. The male lives two
+hundred years, or at least 120, and the female almost as long; but the
+flower of their age is reckoned 60 years. They cannot endure our winter
+or cold weather; but they love to go into rivers, in which they will
+often wade up to their trunk, snuffing and blowing the water about in
+sport; but they cannot swim, owing to the weight of their bodies. If
+they happen to meet a man wandering in the wilderness, they will go
+gently before him and lead him into the right way. In battle they pay
+much respect to those who are wounded, bringing such as are hurt or
+weary into the middle of the army where they may be defended. They are
+made tame by drinking the juice of barley[213].
+
+[Footnote 213: The meaning of this expression is by no means obvious. It
+is known that in India, arrack, or a spirituous liquor distilled from
+rice, is given regularly to elephants, which may be here alluded
+to.--E.]
+
+They have continual war with dragons, which desire their blood because
+it is very cold; wherefore the dragon lies in wait for the passing of an
+elephant, winding its tail of vast length round the hind legs of the
+elephant, then thrusts his head into his trunk and sucks out his breath,
+or bites him in the ears where he cannot reach with his trunk. When the
+elephant becomes faint with the loss of blood, he falls down upon the
+serpent, now gorged with blood, and with the weight of his body crushes
+the dragon to death. Thus his own blood and that of the elephant run out
+of the serpent now mingled together, which cooling is congealed into
+that substance which the apothecaries call _sanguis draconis_ or
+cinnabar[214]. But there are other kinds of cinnabar, commonly called
+_cinoper_ or vermillion, which the painters use in certain colours.
+
+[Footnote 214: It is surely needless to say that this is a mere
+fable.--E.]
+
+There are three kinds of elephants, as of the marshes, the plains, and
+the mountains, differing essentially from each other. Philostratus
+writes, that by how much the elephants of Lybia exceed in bigness the
+horses of Nysea, so much do the elephants of India exceed those of
+Lybia, for some of the elephants of India have been seen nine cubits
+high; and these are so greatly feared by the others, that they dare not
+abide to look upon them. Only the males among the Indian elephants have
+tusks; but in Ethiopia and Lybia, both males and females are provided
+with them. They are of divers heights, as of 12, 13, or 14 _dodrants_,
+the dodrant being a measure of 9 inches; and some say that an elephant
+is bigger than three wild oxen or buffaloes. Those of India are black,
+or mouse-coloured; but those of Ethiopia or Guinea are brown. The hide
+or skin of them all is very hard, and without hair or bristles. Their
+ears are two dodrants, or 18 inches in breadth, and their eyes are very
+small. Our men saw one drinking at a river in Guinea as they sailed
+along the coast. Those who wish to know more of the properties of the
+elephant, as of their wonderful docility, of their use in war, of their
+chastity and generation, when they were first seen in the triumphs and
+amphitheatres of the Romans, how they are taken and tamed, when they
+cast their tusks, and of their use in medicine, and many other
+particulars, will find all these things described in the eighth book of
+Natural History, as written by Pliny. He also says in his twelfth book,
+that the ancients made many goodly works of ivory or elephants teeth;
+such as tables, tressels or couches, posts of houses, rails, lattices
+for windows, idols of their gods, and many other things of ivory, either
+coloured or uncoloured, and intermixed with various kinds of precious
+woods; in which manner at this day are made chairs, lutes, virginals,
+and the like. They had such plenty of it in ancient times, that one of
+the gates of Jerusalem was called the ivory gate, as Josephus reports.
+The whiteness of ivory was so much admired, that it was anciently
+thought to represent the fairness of the human skin; insomuch that those
+who endeavoured to improve, or rather to corrupt, the natural beauty by
+painting, were said reproachfully, _ebur atramento candefacere_, to
+whiten ivory with ink. Poets also, in describing the fair necks of
+beautiful virgins, call them _eburnea colla_, or ivory necks. Thus much
+may suffice of elephants and ivory, and I shall now say somewhat of the
+people, and their manners, and mode of living, with another brief
+description of Africa.
+
+The people who now inhabit the regions of the coast of Guinea and the
+middle parts of Africa, as inner Lybia, Nubia, and various other
+extensive regions in that quarter, were anciently called Ethiopians and
+_Nigritae_, which we now call Moors, Moorens, or Negroes; a beastly
+living people, without God, law, religion, or government, and so
+scorched by the heat of the sun, that in many places they curse it when
+it rises. Of the people about Lybia interior, Gemma Phrysius thus
+writes: Libia interior is large and desolate, containing many horrible
+wildernesses, replenished with various kinds of monstrous beasts and
+serpents. To the south of Mauritania or Barbary is Getulia, a rough and
+savage region, inhabited by a wild and wandering people. After these
+follow the _Melanogetuli_, or black Getulians, and Phransii, who wander
+in the wilderness, carrying with them great gourds filled with water.
+Then the Ethiopians, called Nigritae, occupy a great part of Africa,
+extending to the western ocean or Atlantic. Southwards also they reach
+to the river Nigritis or Niger, which agrees in its nature with the
+Nile, as it increases and diminishes like the Nile, and contains
+crocodiles. Therefore, I believe this to be the river called the Senegal
+by the Portuguese. It is farther said of the Niger, that the inhabitants
+on one side were all black and of goodly stature, while on the other
+side they were brown or tawny and of low stature, which also is the case
+with the Senegal.[215] There are other people of Lybia, called
+_Garamantes_, whose women are in common, having no marriages or any
+respect to chastity. After these are the nations called _Pyrei,
+Sathiodaphintae, Odrangi, Mimaces, Lynxamator, Dolones, Agangince, Leuci
+Ethiopes, Xilicei Ethiopes, Calcei Ethiopes_, and _Nubi_. These last
+have the same situation in Ptolemy, which is now given to the kingdom of
+Nubia, where there are certain Christians under the dominion of the
+great emperor of Ethiopia, called Prester John. From these towards the
+west was a great nation called _Aphricerones_, inhabiting, as far as we
+can conjecture, what is now called the _Regnum Orguene_, bordering on
+the eastern or interior parts of Guinea. From hence westwards and
+towards the north, are the kingdoms of _Gambra_ and _Budamel_, not far
+from the river Senegal; and from thence toward the inland region and
+along the coast are the regions of _Ginoia_ or Guinea. On the west side
+of this region is Cabo Verde, _caput viride_, Cap Verd, or the Green
+Cape, to which the Portuguese first direct their course when they sail
+to the land of Brazil in America, on which occasion they turn to the
+right hand towards the quarter of the wind called _Garbino_, which is
+between the west and south.
+
+[Footnote 215: It may be proper to mention in this place, that the Niger
+and the Senegal, though agreeing in these particulars, are totally
+different rivers in the same parallel. The Senegal runs into the sea
+from the east; while the Niger running to the east, loses itself in an
+interior lake, as the Wolga does in the Caspian, having no connection
+whatever with the ocean. According to some accounts, this lake only
+exists as such during the rainy season, drying up in the other part of
+the year, probably however leaving an extensive marsh, called the
+_Wangara_. If so, the environs of that lake and marsh must be unhealthy
+in the utmost extreme.--E.]
+
+To speak somewhat more of Ethiopia, although there are many nations
+called Ethiopians, yet is Ethiopia chiefly divided into two parts, one
+of which being a great and rich region, is called _Ethiopia sub Egypto_,
+or Ethiopia to the south of Egypt. To this belongs the island of Meroe,
+which is environed by the streams of the Nile. In this island women
+reigned in ancient times, and, according to Josephus, it was some time
+called _Sabea_, whence the queen of Saba went to Jerusalem to listen to
+the wisdom of Solomon. From thence, towards the east and south, reigneth
+the Christian emperor called Prester John, by some named Papa Johannes,
+or as others say _Pean Juan_, signifying Great John, whose empire
+reaches far beyond the Nile, and extends to the coasts of the Red Sea
+and of the Indian ocean. The middle of this region is almost in 66
+degrees of E. longitude, and 12 degrees of N. lat.[216] About this
+region dwell the people called _Clodi, Risophagi, Axiuntiae, Babylonii,
+Molili_, and _Molibae_. After these is the region called _Trogloditica_,
+the inhabitants of which dwell in caves and dens, instead of houses, and
+feed upon the flesh of serpents, as is reported by Pliny and Diodorus
+Siculus, who allege, that instead of language, they have only a kind of
+grinning and chattering. There are also people without heads, called
+_Blemines_, having their eyes and mouths in their breast. Likewise
+_Strucophagi_, and naked _Gamphasantes_; _satyrs_ also, who have nothing
+of human nature except the shape. _Oripei_ likewise, who are great
+hunters, and _Mennones_. Here also is _Smyrnophora_, or the region of
+myrrh; after which is _Azania_, producing many elephants.[217] A great
+portion of the eastern part of Africa beyond the equinoctial line is in
+the kingdom of _Melinda_, the inhabitants of which have long been in use
+to trade with the nations of Arabia, and whose king is now allied to the
+king of Portugal, and pays tribute to Prester John.
+
+[Footnote 216: Reckoning the longitude from the island of Ferro, the
+middle of Abyssinia is only in about 52° 30' E. and as Ferro is 18° W.
+from Greenwich, that coincides with 34° 30' E. as the longitude is now
+reckoned by British geographers.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 217: It is impossible, in the compass of a note, to enter into
+any commentary on this slight sketch of the ancient geography of eastern
+Africa.--E.]
+
+The other, or interior Ethiopia, being a region of vast extent, is now
+only somewhat known upon the sea-coast, but may be described as follows.
+In the first place, towards the south of the equator, is a great region
+of Ethiopians, in which are white elephants, _tigers_, (lions) and
+rhinoceroses. Also a region producing plenty of cinnamon, which lies
+between the branches of the Nile. Also the kingdom of Habesch or
+Habasia,[218] a region inhabited by Christians, on both sides of the
+Nile. Likewise those Ethiopians called _Ichthyophagi_, or who live only
+on fish, who were subdued in the wars of Alexander the Great[219]. Also
+the Ethiopians called _Rapsii_ and _Anthropophagi_, who are in use to
+eat human flesh, and inhabit the regions near the mountains of the moon.
+_Gazatia_ is under the tropic of Capricorn; after which comes the
+_front_ of Africa, and the Cape of Good Hope, past which they sail from
+Lisbon to Calicut: But as the capes and gulfs, with their names, are to
+be found on every globe and chart, it were superfluous to enumerate them
+here.
+
+[Footnote 218: It is strange that Habasia or Abyssinia, inhabited by
+Christians, should thus be divided from the empire of Prester John.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 219: The Icthyophagi of Alexander dwelt on the oceanic coast
+of Persia, now Mekran, between the river Indus and the Persian gulf, not
+in Ethiopia.--E.]
+
+Some allege that Africa was so named by the Greeks, as being without
+cold; the Greek letter _alpha_ signifying privation, void of, or
+without, and _phrice_ signifying cold; as, although it has a cloudy and
+tempestuous season instead of winter, it is yet never cold, but rather
+smothering hot, with hot showers, and such scorching winds, that at
+certain times the inhabitants seem as if living in furnaces, and in a
+manner half ready for purgatory or hell. According to Gemma Phrisius, in
+certain parts of Africa, as in the greater Atlas, the air in the night
+is seen shining with many strange fires and flames, rising as it were as
+high as the moon, and strange noises are heard in the air, as of pipes,
+trumpets, and drums, which are caused perhaps by the vehement motions of
+these fiery exhalations, as we see in many experiments wrought by fire,
+air, and wind. The hollowness also, and various reflections and
+breakings of the clouds, may be great causes thereof, besides the great
+coldness of the middle region of the air, by which these fiery
+exhalations, when they ascend there, are suddenly driven back with great
+force. Daily experience teaches us, by the whizzing of a burning torch,
+what a noise fire occasions in the air, and much more so when it strives
+and is inclosed with air, as seen in guns; and even when air alone is
+inclosed, as in organ pipes and other wind instruments: For wind,
+according to philosophers, is nothing but air vehemently moved, as when
+propelled by a pair of bellows, and the like.
+
+Some credible persons affirm that, in this voyage to Guinea, they felt a
+sensible heat in the night from the beams of the moon; which, though it
+seem strange to us who inhabit a cold region, may yet reasonably have
+been the case, as Pliny writes that the nature of stars and planets
+consists of fire, containing a spirit of life, and cannot therefore be
+without heat. That the moon gives heat to the earth seems confirmed by
+David, in the 121st psalm, where, speaking of such men as are defended
+from evils by the protection of God, he says, "The sun shall not burn
+thee by day, neither the moon by night[220]." They said likewise, that
+in some parts of the sea they saw streams of water, which they call
+_spouts_, falling out of the air into the sea, some of them being as
+large as the pillars of churches; insomuch that, when these fall into
+ships, they are in great danger of being sunk. Some allege these to be
+the cataracts of heaven, which were all opened at Noah's flood: But I
+rather consider them to be those fluxions and eruptions said by
+Aristotle, in his book de Mundo, to happen in the sea. For, speaking of
+such strange things as are often seen in the sea, he writes thus:
+"Oftentimes also, even in the sea are seen evaporations of fire, and
+such eruptions and breaking forth of springs, that the mouths of rivers
+are opened. Whirlpools and fluxions are caused of such other vehement
+motions, not only in the midst of the sea, but also in creeks and
+straits. At certain times also, a great quantity of water is suddenly
+lifted up and carried about by the moon," &c. From these words of
+Aristotle it appears, that such waters are lifted up at one time in one
+place, and suddenly fall down again in another place at another time. To
+this also may be referred what Richard Chancellor told me, as having
+heard from Sebastian Cabot, as far as I remember, either on the coast of
+Brazil or of the Rio de la Plata, that his ship or pinnace was suddenly
+lifted from the sea and cast upon the land, I know not how far. Which,
+and other strange and wonderful works of nature considered, and calling
+to remembrance the narrowness of human knowledge and understanding,
+compared with her mighty power, I can never cease to wonder, and to
+confess with Pliny, that nothing is impossible to nature, whose smallest
+power is still unknown to man.
+
+[Footnote 220: In our present version the word _smite_ is used instead
+of burn. But the quotation in the text is a literal translation from the
+Latin vulgate, and agrees with the older English version, still used in
+the Book of Common Prayer.--E.]
+
+Our people saw and considered many things in this voyage that are
+worthy of notice, and some of which I have thought fit to record, that
+the reader may take pleasure, both in the variety of these things, and
+in the narrative of the voyage. Among other matters respecting the
+manners and customs of these people, this may seem strange, that their
+princes and nobles are in use to pierce and wound their skins in such
+way as to form curious figures upon it, like flowered damask, which they
+consider as very ornamental[221]. Although they go in a manner naked,
+yet many of them, and the women especially, are almost loaded with
+collars, bracelets, rings, and chains, of gold, copper, or ivory. I have
+seen one of their ivory armlets weighing 38 ounces, which was worn by
+one of their women on her arm. It was made of one piece of the largest
+part of an elephant's tooth, turned and somewhat carved, having a hole
+through which to pass the hand. Some have one on each arm and one on
+each leg, and though often so galled by them as to be almost lame, they
+still persist to use them. Some wear great shackles on their legs of
+bright copper, and they wear collars, bracelets, garlands, and girdles
+of certain blue stones, resembling beads. Some also of their women wear
+upon their arms a kind of _fore-sleeves_[222], made of plates of beaten
+gold. They wear likewise rings on their fingers made of gold wire,
+having a knot or wreath, like those which children make on rush rings.
+Among other golden articles bought by our men, were some dog-collars and
+chains.
+
+[Footnote 221: Now well known under the name of tatooing.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 222: Sleeves for the fore-arms, or from the elbow to the
+wrist.--E.]
+
+These natives of Guinea are very wary in driving bargains, and will not
+willingly lose the smallest particle of their gold, using weights and
+measures for the same with great circumspection. In dealing with them,
+it is necessary to behave with civility and gentleness, as they will not
+trade with any who use them ill. During the first voyage of our people
+to that country, on departing from the place where they had first
+traded, one of them either stole a musk-cat or took her away by force,
+not suspecting that this could have any effect to prevent trading at the
+next station: But although they went there in full sail, the news had
+got there before them, and the people refused to deal with them until
+the cat were either restored or paid for at a fixed price. Their houses
+are made of four posts or trees set in the ground, and are covered with
+boughs; and their ordinary food is roots, with such fish as they take,
+which are in great plenty. Among these are flying fishes, similar to
+those seen in the West India seas. Our people endeavoured to salt some
+of the fish which they caught on the coast of Africa, but some said that
+they would not take salt, and must therefore be eaten immediately; while
+others alleged that, if salted immediately when taken, they would keep
+good for ten or twelve days. Part of the salt meat taken by our people
+from England became putrid while on the coast of Africa, yet turned
+sweet again after their return to a temperate region. They have a
+strange method of making bread, which is as follows: They grind, with
+their hands, between two stones, as much corn into meal as they think
+may suffice the family, and making this flour into a paste with water,
+they knead it into thin cakes, which are stuck upon the posts of their
+houses and baked or dried by the heat of the sun; so that when the
+master of the house or any of the family are in want of bread, they take
+it down from the post and eat.
+
+They have very fair wheat, the ear of which is two hand-breadths long
+and as big as a great bulrush, the stem or straw being almost as thick
+as a man's little finger. The grains are white and round, shining like
+pearls that have lost their lustre, and about the size of our pease.
+Almost their whole substance turns to flour, leaving very little bran.
+The ear is inclosed in three blades, each about two inches broad, and
+longer than the ear; and in one of them I counted 260 grains of corn. By
+this fruitfulness, the sun seems in some measure to compensate for the
+trouble and distress produced by its excessive heat. Their drink is
+either water, or the juice which drops from cut branches of the palmito,
+a barren palm or date tree; to collect which they hang great gourds to
+the cut branches every evening, or set them on the ground under the
+trees, to receive the juice which issues during the night. Our people
+said that this juice tasted like whey, but sweeter and more pleasant.
+The branches of the palmito are cut every evening to obtain this juice,
+as the heat of the sun during the day dries up and sears over the wound.
+They have likewise large beans, as big as chesnuts, and very hard,
+having shells instead of husks or pods. While formerly describing the
+fruit containing the _grains_ or Guinea pepper, called by the physicians
+_grana paradisi_, I remarked that they have holes through them, as in
+effect they have when brought to us; but I have been since informed,
+that these holes are made on purpose to put strings or twigs through,
+for hanging up the fruit to dry in the sun. This fruit grows on a plant
+which does not rise above eighteen inches or two feet above the ground.
+
+At their coming home, the keels and bottoms of the ships were strangely
+overgrown with certain shells, two inches or more in length, as thick as
+they could stand, and so large that a man might put his thumb into their
+mouths. It is affirmed that a certain slimy substance grows in these
+shells, which falls afterwards into the sea, and is changed into the
+bird called barnacles[223]. Similar shells have been seen on ships
+coming from Ireland, but these Irish barnacles do not exceed half an
+inch long. I saw the Primrose in dock, after her return from Guinea,
+having her bottom entirely covered over with these shells, which in my
+judgment must have greatly impeded her sailing. Their ships also were in
+many places eaten into by the worms called _Bromas_ or _Bissas_, which
+are mentioned in the Decades[224]. These worms creep between the planks,
+which they eat through in many places.
+
+[Footnote 223: This is an old fable not worth confuting. The Barnacle
+goose or clakis of Willoughby, anas erythropus of Linnaeus, called
+likewise tree-goose, anciently supposed to be generated from drift wood,
+or rather from the _lepas anatifera_ or multivalve shell, called
+barnacle, which is often found on the bottoms of ships.--See Pennant's
+Brit. Zool. 4to. 1776. V. II. 488, and Vol. IV. 64.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 224: Meaning the Decades of Peter Martyr, part of which book
+was translated and published by Richard Eden.--Astl I. 149. b.]
+
+In this voyage, though they sailed to Guinea in seven weeks, they took
+twenty to return; owing to this cause, as they reported, that about the
+coast at Cape Verd the wind was continually east, so that they were
+obliged to stand far out into the ocean, in search of a western wind to
+bring them home. In this last voyage about twenty-four of the men died,
+many of them between the Azores and England, after their return into the
+cold or temperate region. They brought with them several black
+slaves[225], some of whom were tall strong men, who could well agree
+with our meats and drinks. The cold and moist air of England somewhat
+offended them; yet men who are born in hot regions can much better
+endure cold, than those of cold regions can bear heat; because violent
+heat dissolves the radical moisture of the human body, while cold
+concentrates and preserves it. It is to be considered as among the
+secrets of nature, that while all parts of Africa under the equator, and
+for some way on both sides, are excessively hot, and inhabited by black
+people, such regions in the West Indies [America], under the same
+parallels, are very temperate, and the natives are neither black, nor
+have they short curled wool on their heads like the Africans; but are of
+an olive colour, with long black hair. The cause of this difference is
+explained in various places of the _Decades_. Some of those who were
+upon this voyage told me that on the 14th of March they had the sun to
+the north of them at noon.
+
+[Footnote 225: In a side note, _five blacke moors_.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Voyage to Guinea in 1555, by William Towerson, Merchant of
+London_[226].
+
+
+On Monday the 30th of September 1555, we sailed from the harbour of
+Newport, in the Isle of Wight, with two good ships, the Hart and the
+Hind, both belonging to London, of which John Ralph and William Carters
+were masters, bound on a voyage for the river Sestos, in Guinea, and
+other harbours in that neighbourhood. Owing to variable winds, we could
+not reach Dartmouth before the 14th of October; and having continued
+there till the 20th of that month, we warpt out of the harbour, and set
+sail to the S.W. and by next morning had run 30 leagues. On the 1st
+November, by the reckoning of our master, we were in lat. 31° N. and
+that day we ran 40 leagues. The 2d we ran 36 leagues; and on the 3d we
+had sight of Porto Santo, a small island about three leagues long and
+one and a-half broad, belonging to the Portuguese, and lying in the
+ocean. As we came towards it from the N.N.W. it seemed like two small
+hills near each other. The east end of the island is a high land like a
+saddle, having a valley which gives it that appearance; while the west
+end is lower, with several small round hillocks[227]. Porto Santo is in
+about lat. 33° N. The same day at 11 o'clock A.M. we raised the island
+of Madeira, which is 12 leagues S.W. from Porto Santo. Madeira is a fine
+and fertile island belonging to the Portuguese, and rises from afar like
+one great high mountain. By 3 P.M. being athwart of Porto Santo, we set
+our course to the S.W. leaving both Madeira and Porto Santo to the
+eastwards, being the first land we had seen after leaving England. About
+three next morning we were abreast of Madeira, within three leagues of
+its west end, and were becalmed under its high land. We estimated having
+run 30 leagues in the past day and night. The 4th we remained becalmed
+under the west end of Madeira till 1 P.M. when the wind sprung up at
+east, and we continued our course S.W. making in the rest of that day 15
+leagues. The 5th we ran 15 leagues.
+
+[Footnote 226: Hakluyt, II. 480, Astl. I. 150.--From several passages in
+this journal it appears that Towerson had been on the former voyage to
+Guinea with Captain Lock; but in the present voyage he appears to have
+acted as captain or chief director, and seems to have been the author of
+the journal here adopted from Hakluyt.--Astl. I. 150, 2.]
+
+[Footnote 227: The saddle-backed hills of old navigators, are to be
+considered in reference to the old demipique or war-saddle, having high
+abrupt peaks, or hummocks, at each end, with a flattish hollow
+between.--E.]
+
+The 6th in the morning we got sight of _Teneriffe_, otherwise called the
+Peak, being very high land, with a peak on the top like a sugar loaf;
+and the same night we got sight of _Palma_, which also is high land and
+W. from Teneriffe [W.N.W.] The 7th we saw _Gomera_, an island about 12
+leagues S.E. from Palma, and eight W.S.W. from Teneriffe; and lest we
+might have been becalmed under Teneriffe, we left both it and Gomera to
+the east, and passed between Palma and Gomera. This day and night our
+course was 30 leagues. These islands, called the Canaries, are 60
+leagues from Madeira, and there are other three islands in the group to
+the eastward of Teneriffe, named _Gran Canarea_, _Fuertaventura_, and
+_Lancerota_, none of which we saw. All these islands are inhabited by
+Spaniards. On this day likewise we got sight of the Isle of _Ferro_,
+which is 13 leagues south from Gomera, and belongs to the Spaniards like
+the others. We were unable all this day or the following night to get
+beyond Ferro, unless we had chosen to go to the westwards, which had
+been much out of our proper course; wherefore we put about, and stood
+back five hours E.N.E. in hope of being able to clear it next tack, the
+wind keeping always S.E. which is not often met with in that latitude by
+navigators, as it generally keeps in the N.E. and E.N.E. Next morning,
+being on the other tack, we were nearly close in with the island, but
+had room enough to get clear past.
+
+The 8th, our due course to fetch the Barbary coast being S.E. by E. we
+were unable to keep it by reason of the wind being scant, but lay as
+near it as we could, running that day and night 25 leagues. The 9th we
+ran 30 leagues; the 10th 25; and 11th, 24 leagues. The 12th we saw a
+sail under our lee, which we thought to be a fishing bark, and stood
+down to speak with her; but in an hour there came on so thick a fog that
+we could neither see that vessel nor our consort the Hind. We
+accordingly shot off several guns to give notice to the Hind of our
+situation, but she did not hear or answer us. In the afternoon the Hind
+fired a gun, which we heard and answered with another gun. About half an
+hour afterwards the fog cleared away, and we were within four leagues of
+the Barbary coast, when sounding we had 14 fathoms water. The bark also
+had come _room_[228] with us, and anchored here likewise, the wind being
+contrary for going down the coast, or to the southwards. On falling in
+with the land, we could not judge precisely whereabout we were, most of
+that coast being low, the forepart of the coast being white like chalk
+or sand, _and very deep unto the hard shore_[229]. Immediately on coming
+to anchor we began to fish, and got abundance of that kind which the
+Portuguese call _Pergosses_, the French _saders_, and our men salt-water
+_breams_. Before the fog entirely cleared away, the vessel we had
+followed shaped such a course that we lost sight of her, chiefly because
+we had bore up to find the Hind again. Our pilot reckoned that we were
+upon that part of the coast which is 16 leagues eastwards[230] from the
+Rio del Oro.
+
+[Footnote 228: This antiquated nautical word, which occurred before in
+the journal of Don Juan de Castro, is here obviously going down the
+wind, large, or to leeward.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 229: The meaning of this passage is not obvious, and seems to
+want some words to make out the meaning: It may be that the shore is
+very steep, or that the water continues deep close to the shore.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 230: Eastwards from Rio del Oro is directly into the land; so
+that they must either have been N.N.E. or S.S.W. probably the
+former.--E.]
+
+In the afternoon of the 13th we spied a sail coming towards us, which we
+judged to be that we had seen the day before, and we immediately caused
+the Hind to weigh anchor and go towards her, manning likewise our own
+skiff, to lay her on board or to learn what she was, and within half an
+hour we weighed also. When the vessel noticed us, she put about and
+sailed from us; and soon after there came on so heavy a fog that we
+could not see her, and as the fog continued the whole night we had to
+quit the chase. In the afternoon the wind came about fair, so that we
+were able to shape a course S.W. by W. to keep clear of the coast, and
+ran that night 16 leagues. The 14th in the morning was very foggy, but
+the fog cleared away about noon, when we espied a caravel of 60 tons
+fishing, and sent our skiff on board with five men unarmed. For haste
+the caravel slipped her anchors and set sail, yet our unarmed boat
+overtook her and made her strike sail, and brought her away, though she
+had fourteen or fifteen men on board, all armed, but they had not the
+heart to resist. On coming to us they anchored, as we were likewise,
+because the wind had become foul; on which I made our skiff come for me,
+and I went on board the caravel, to take care that no harm was offered,
+and to see if they would spare us any thing for our money. Accordingly
+we got from them three _tapnets_ of figs, two small jars of oil, two
+pipes of water, and four hogsheads of salt fish, which they had taken on
+the coast, besides some fresh fish, which they held of no value, as they
+are so plentiful on that coast that one man may often take as many in an
+hour or less as will serve twenty men a whole day. For these things,
+some wine we drank while on board their ship, and three or four great
+cans which they sent on board our ships, I paid them 27 pistoles, being
+twice as much as they would willingly have taken. We then let them go to
+their anchor and cable which they had slipped, and assisted them to
+recover. After this we made sail, but the wind obliged us to come to
+anchor again about 12 leagues from the Rio del Oro, as we were informed
+by the Portuguese. There were five other caravels in this place, but
+immediately on our appearance they all made away for fear of us.
+
+The 15th we continued at anchor, as the wind was still foul. The 16th we
+set sail and run our course 40 leagues, being this day, according to our
+pilots, right under the Tropic of Cancer, in lat. 23° 30' N. The 17th we
+ran 25 leagues, mostly in sight of the coast of Barbary. The 18th we ran
+30 leagues, and at noon, by the reckoning of our pilots, were abreast of
+Cape Blanco. The 22d they reckoned we were abreast of Cape Verd. The
+12th of December we got sight of the coast of Guinea, towards which we
+immediately hauled, standing to the N.E. and about 12 at night, being
+less than two leagues from the shore, we lay to and sounded, finding 18
+fathoms water. We soon afterwards saw a light between us and the shore,
+which we thought might have been a ship, from which circumstance we
+judged ourselves off the river Sestro, and we immediately came to
+anchor, armed our tops, and made all clear for action, suspecting it
+might be some Portuguese or French ship. In the morning we saw no ship
+whatever, but espied four rocks about two English miles from us, one
+being a large rock and the other three small; whence we concluded that
+the light seen during the night had been on shore. We then weighed and
+stood E.S.E. along shore, because the master did not rightly know the
+place, but thought we were still to the westward of Sestro river. All
+along this coast the land is low, and full of high trees close to the
+shore, so that no one can know what place he falls in with, except by
+means of the latitude. I think we ran 16 leagues that day, as we had all
+night a stiff gale, with much thunder and lightning.
+
+For most port of the 13th we ran E.S.E. along the coast, within two
+leagues of the land, finding the shore all covered with tall trees to
+the water's edge, and great rocks hard by the beach, on which the
+billows continually broke in white foam, so high that the surf might
+easily be seen at four leagues distance, and in such a manner that no
+boat could possibly go to land. At noon our masters and pilots took the
+altitude of the sun, by which they judged that we were 24 leagues beyond
+the river Sestro to the eastwards, wherefore we hauled in towards the
+shore and came to anchor within two English miles of the land in 15
+fathoms, the water being so smooth that we might have rode with a
+hawser. We employed the afternoon to rig out our boat with a sail, for
+the purpose of sending her along shore in search of a place to take in
+water, as we could not go back to the river Sestro, because the wind is
+always contrary and the current sets continually to the eastwards. The
+14th we weighed anchor and plied up along the coast to the W.N.W.
+sending our boats close in shore to seek a watering-place, which they
+found about noon. At this time, being far out to sea, we fell in with
+several small long and narrow boats or canoes of the natives, in each of
+which was one man only. We gave them bread, which they accepted and eat
+readily. About 4 P.M. our boats came off to us with fresh water; and at
+night we anchored off the mouth of a river. The 15th we weighed and
+stood near the shore, sounding all the way, finding sometimes a rocky
+bottom, at other times good ground, and never less than seven fathoms.
+Finally, we cast anchor within an English mile of the shore, in seven
+and a half fathoms, directly over against the mouth of the river, and
+then sent our boats for water, which they got very good after rowing a
+mile up the river. This river, called St Vincent in the chart, is by
+estimation about eight leagues beyond the river Sestro, but is so hard
+to find that a boat may be within half a mile of it without being able
+to discover any river, as a ledge of rocks of greater extent than its
+breadth lies directly before its mouth, so that the boats had to go a
+considerable way between that ledge and the shore before coming to its
+mouth. When once in, it is a great river, having several others that
+fall into it. The entrance is somewhat difficult, as the surf is rather
+high, but after getting in it is as smooth as the Thames.[231] Upon this
+river, near the sea, the inhabitants are tall large men, going entirely
+naked, except a clout about a quarter of a yard long before their
+middle, made of the bark of trees, yet resembling cloth, as the bark
+used for this purpose can be spun like flax. Some also wear a similar
+cloth on their heads, painted with sundry colours, but most of them go
+bareheaded, having their heads clipped and shorn in sundry ways, and
+most of them have their bodies punctured or slashed in various figures
+like a leathern jerkin. The men and women go so much alike, that a woman
+is only to be known from a man by her breasts, which are mostly long and
+hanging down like the udder of a milch goat.
+
+[Footnote 231: Sestro river, in the Complete Neptune of the Rev. James
+Stanier Clarke, chart. 2, is called Sesters, in lat. 5° 30' N. long. 9°
+10' W. from Greenwich. The river St Vincent of the text does not appear
+in that chart, but nearly at the indicated distance to the E.S.E. is one
+named Sangwin.--E.]
+
+Soon after coming to anchor on the 15th December, we went up the river
+in our skiff, carrying with us certain basons, _manels_, &c. for sale.
+We procured that day one hogshead and 100 pounds weight of grains,[232]
+and two elephants teeth, getting both at an easy rate. We sold the
+natives basons, _maneilios_, and _margarits_,[233] but basons were most
+in request, and for most of these we got thirty pounds of _grains_ in
+exchange for each, and gave for an elephants tooth of thirty pounds
+weight six basons. We went again up the river on the 16th, in the
+morning, taking some of every kind of merchandise along with us in our
+boat, and shewed them to the negroes, but they made light of every
+thing, even of the basons, manellios, and margarite which they had
+bought the day before; yet they would have given us some grains for our
+basons, but so very little that we did not that day get above 100 pounds
+weight, through their chief or captain, who would not suffer any one to
+sell but through his mediation and at his price. He was so cunning that
+he would not give above 15 pounds of grains for a bason, and would
+sometimes offer us a small dishful, whereas we had a basket full for
+each the day before. Seeing that we would not accept what he offered,
+the captain of the negroes went away, and caused all the boats to depart
+likewise, thinking perhaps that we would have followed and agreed to his
+terms; but on perceiving his drift, we hauled up our grapnel and went
+away likewise. We landed at a small town, to see the manners of the
+people, and about 60 of them came about us, being at first shy, and
+seemingly afraid of us; but seeing we did them no harm, they came up in
+a familiar manner, and took us by the hand. We then went into their
+town, which consisted of about twenty small hovels, covered over with
+large leaves. All the sides were open, and the floor was raised like a
+scaffold about a yard high, where they work many ingenious things of the
+barks of trees, and there also they sleep. In some of these hovels they
+work in iron, making very pretty heads for javelins, tools for making
+their boats, and various other things, the women working as well as the
+men.
+
+[Footnote 232: That is grains of paradise, so the Italians called Guinea
+pepper when they first saw it, not knowing what it was. We took the name
+from them, and hence came the name of the Grain Coast--Astl. I. 152, a.]
+
+[Footnote 233: Margarits may possibly have been mock pearl beads; the
+manels or manellios were bracelets of some kind.--E.]
+
+While we were among them, several of the women danced and sung after
+their manner, by way of amusing us, but the sound was by no means
+agreeable to our ears. Their song was continually,
+
+   Sakere, sakere, ho! ho!
+   Sakere, sakere, ho! ho!
+
+And with these words they kept leaping, dancing and clapping their
+hands. The only animals we saw among them were two goats, a few small
+dogs, and some hens. Having seen these things, we went on board our
+ships; and on seeing us depart, the chief of the other town sent two of
+his servants after us with a basket of grains, making signs to us that
+when we had slept, or next day, we should have plenty of grains if we
+came for them: Then shewing us his grains, he went away. Accordingly,
+next morning being the 17th, thinking that some business might be done
+with the negroes as the captain sent for us, I sent the master with the
+rest of the merchants on shore, remaining myself on board, because they
+had esteemed our goods so lightly the day before. The captain
+accordingly came to our people after they went up the river, bringing
+grains with him, but not seeing me he made signs to know where I was,
+and was answered in the same manner that I was on board ship. He then
+inquired by signs who was captain, or Diago as they call it, and the
+master of the ship being pointed out to him, he began to shew his
+grains, but held them so unreasonably dear that no profit could be made
+of them; on which, and because they seemed to have no store, the master
+came away with only about 50 pounds of grains. Going on shore at the
+small town on their way back to the ships, some one of our people
+plucked a gourd which gave great offence to the negroes, on which many
+of them came with their darts and large targets, making signs for our
+men to depart; which our men did, as they had only one bow and two or
+three swords among them. As soon as they were on board we weighed and
+set sail, but the wind was from the sea, so that we could not clear
+certain rocks, for which reason we came again to anchor.
+
+This river called St Vincent is in lat. 4° 30' N[234]. The tide at this
+place ebbs and flows every twelve hours, but while we were there the
+rise and fall did not exceed 9 feet. So far as we could see, the whole
+country was altogether covered with wood, all the kinds of trees being
+unknown to us, and of many different sorts, some having large leaves
+like gigantic docks, so high that a tall man is unable to reach their
+tops. By the sea-side there grow certain pease upon great and long
+stalks, one of which I measured and it was 27 paces long. These grow on
+the sand like trees, and so very near the sea that we could distinctly
+perceive by the water marks that the sea sometimes flows into the woods.
+All the trees and other plants of this country are continually green.
+Some of the women have exceedingly long breasts, but they are not all
+so. All day the wind blows from the sea, and all night from the land,
+though we found this to differ sometimes, at which our master was much
+surprised.
+
+[Footnote 234: This latitude would bring us to a river about half way
+between the Grand Sesters and Cape Palmas; but which does not agree with
+the former circumstances, as they could hardly have been so far to the
+S.E. without seeing Cape Palmas. The river Sangwin, which we have before
+supposed might be the St Vincent, is in lat. 5° 20' N. almost a degree
+farther north.--E.]
+
+This night at 9 o'clock the wind came to east, which used ordinarily to
+be at N.N.W. off shore[235]; yet we weighed and hauled off south to
+seawards, and next morning stood in again towards the land, whence we
+took in 6 tons of water for our ship, the Hind probably taking as much.
+On this part of the coast I could not find that the natives had any gold
+or other valuable article of trade, for indeed they are so savage and
+idle that they give not themselves the trouble to seek for any thing,
+for if they would take pains they might easily gather large quantities
+of grains, yet I do not believe there were two tons to be had in all
+that river. They have many fowls likewise in their woods, but the people
+are not at the trouble to catch them. While here I collected the
+following words of their language, all of which they speak very thick,
+often repeating one word three times successively, and always the last
+time longer than the two former.
+
+[Footnote 235: The text here is probably corrupt. The direct off-shore
+wind on the grain coast of Africa is N.E. The wind at N.N.W. certainly
+is in some degree off-shore, but very obliquely; and the wind at east is
+more direct from shore.--E.]
+
+   Bezow! bezow!            Is their salutation.
+   Manegete afoye,[236],     Grains enough.
+   Crocow afoye,            Hens enough.
+   Zeramme afoye,           Have you enough?
+   Begge sacke,             Give me a knife.
+   Begge come,              Give me bread.
+   Borke,                   Silence!
+   Contrecke,               You lie!
+   Veede,                   Put forth, or empty.
+   Brekeke,                 Row!
+   Diago, or dabo,          Captain, or chief.
+
+[Footnote 236: In some maps the grain coast is named Malaguete, probably
+from this word, and consequently synonimous with the ordinary name. It
+is likewise called the Windward coast.--E.]
+
+Towards night on the 18th, while sailing along the coast, we fell in
+with some boats or canoes, when the natives expressed by signs that we
+were abreast of a river where we might have grains, but we did not think
+it right to stop there, lest other ships might get before us. This river
+has three great rocks and five small ones lying before it, with one
+great tree and a small one close by the river, which exceed all the rest
+in height. This night we proceeded 10 leagues along the coast. About
+noon of the 19th, while proceeding along shore, three boats came off to
+tell us we might have grains, and brought some to shew, but we did not
+choose to stop. Continuing our course we anchored at night, having run
+this day 10 leagues. On the 20th as the Hind had come to anchor near us
+among some rocks and foul ground, she lost a small anchor. While passing
+along shore about noon a negro came off to us as before, offering grains
+if we would go on shore, and where we anchored at night another brought
+us a similar intimation, besides which a fire was kindled on shore, as
+if indicating where we might land, which was likewise done on other
+parts of the coast when they saw us anchored. Wherever we happened to
+anchor on this coast from our first watering place, we always found the
+tide [of flood?] running to the westwards, and saw many rocks close
+along shore, many others being a league out to sea. This day we ran 12
+leagues. The 21st though we sailed all day with a brisk gale, yet so
+strong were the tides against us that we were only able to make out 6
+leagues. This day likewise some negroes came off to us, offering to deal
+in grains if we would land. The 22d we ran all day and night to a double
+point called Cabo das Palmas[237].
+
+[Footnote 237: Reckoning the course run as expressed in the text, the
+distance measured back from Cape Palmas brings us very nearly to Sangwin
+for the river St Vincent of Towerson, as formerly conjectured.--E.]
+
+The 23d about 3 o'clock we were abreast of the point, and before we came
+to the western part of it we saw a great ledge of rocks which lie out to
+the west of it about 3 leagues, and a league or more from the shore. We
+soon after got sight of the eastern side of this cape, which is 4
+leagues from the west side. Upon both corners of this cape there are two
+green spots like meadows, and to the westwards of this cape the land
+forms a bay, by which it may be easily known. Four leagues farther on
+there is a head-land jutting out to sea, and about two leagues farther
+on there is a great bay, seemingly the entrance to a river, before which
+we anchored all that night, lest we should overshoot a river where, in
+the voyage of last year, 1554, they got all their elephants teeth. Cape
+Palmas is in lat. 4° 30' N. between which and the river Sestro the
+greatest abundance of grains is to be had, while beyond this cape very
+little is got. Where we anchored this night, we found that the tide now
+ran to the eastwards, while on the other side of the cape it went to the
+N.W. This day we ran about 16 leagues.
+
+While continuing our course on the 24th about 8 o'clock, some boats came
+off to us bringing small soft eggs without shells, and made signs that
+we might have fresh water and goats by going on shore. As the master
+judged this might be the river of which we were in search, we cast
+anchor and sent our boat on shore with a person who knew the river. On
+coming near the shore he perceived that it was not the river, and came
+therefore back again, and went along shore by the help of sails and
+oars, upon which we weighed and sailed likewise along shore. Being now
+13 leagues past the cape, the master observed a place which he believed
+might be the river, when we were in fact two miles past it. At this time
+the boat came off to the ship, reporting that there was no river; yet we
+came to anchor, after which the master and I went in the boat with five
+men, and on coming near the shore he saw that it was the river for which
+he sought. We then rowed in with much difficulty, the entrance being
+very much obstructed by a heavy surf. After entering, several boats came
+off to us, informing us by signs that they had elephants teeth, and
+brought us one of 8 pounds and a small one only one pound weight, both
+of which we bought. Then they brought some other teeth to the river
+side, giving us to understand by signs that they would sell them to us
+if we came next day. We then gave a _manillio_ each to two chiefs, and
+departed to the ships. We sent another boat to a different place on
+shore, where some of the natives in the canoes at sea made signs that
+fresh water was to be had; and on going there they found a town but no
+river, yet the people brought them fresh water and shewed an elephants
+tooth, making signs that they would sell them such next day. This river
+lies 13 leagues beyond Cape Palmas, having a rock to the westwards about
+a league out to sea, and there juts out from the river a point of land
+on which grow five trees which may be discerned two or three leagues off
+when coming from the westwards; but the river itself cannot be seen till
+close upon it, and then a small town may be seen on either side, each of
+which has a _diago_ or captain. The river is small, but the water is
+fresh and good[238]. Two miles beyond the river, where the other town
+lies, another point runs oat to sea, which is green like a meadow,
+having only six trees growing upon it, all distant from each other,
+which is a good mark to know it by, as I have not seen as much bare land
+on the whole coast[239]. In this place, and three or four leagues to the
+westwards, there grow many palm trees, from which the natives have their
+palm wine, all along shore. These trees are easily known almost two
+leagues off, as they are very straight, tall and white bodied, and
+thickest in the middle, having no limbs or boughs, but only a round bush
+of leaves at the top. In this top the natives bore a hole, to which they
+hang a bottle or empty gourd, and in this they receive the juice that
+runs from the tree, which is their wine.
+
+[Footnote 238: From the indicated distance eastwards from Cape Palmas,
+and the description in the text, the river and point in question seem
+those called Tabou, in long. 7° 10' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 239: It is hardly necessary to observe that these are very bad
+land-marks, being subject to alteration from many causes; besides that
+this description is above 250 years old.--E.]
+
+From Cape Palmas to Cape _Tres-puntas_ or Three-points, the distance is
+100 leagues east[240]; and from Cape Three-points to the port where we
+proposed to sell our cloth are other 40 leagues[241]. The language here,
+as far as I could judge, seemed to differ little from that formerly
+mentioned. The people likewise dress much in the same manner, or almost
+naked, but they were gentler in their manners and better looking. They
+chiefly coveted manillios and margarites, and cared very little for the
+rest of our wares. About 9 o'clock A.M. some boats came off to us from
+both towns, bringing with them some elephants teeth, and having made me
+swear by the water of the sea that I would do them no harm, three or
+four of them came on board, and we entertained them with such things as
+we had, of which they eat and drank as freely as ourselves. We then
+bought all their teeth, of which they had 14, 10 being small. On going
+away, they desired us to come to their towns next day. Not wishing to
+trifle our time at this place, I desired the master to go on the 26th
+with two of our merchants to one of the towns, while I went with one
+merchant to the other town, the two towns being three miles asunder.
+Taking with us to both places some of every kind of merchandise that we
+had, the master got nine rather small teeth at one town, while at the
+other I got eleven not large. Leaving on board with the [other] master
+an assortment of manillios, he bought 12 teeth in our absence from
+people who came to the ships. I bought likewise a small goat, and the
+master bought five small hens at the other town. Finding that nothing
+more was to be done here, as they had no more teeth, we went on board by
+one o'clock, P.M. and immediately weighed anchor, continuing our
+progress eastward, always within sight of land.
+
+[Footnote 240: Between these two points is what is called the ivory
+coast of Guinea: After which is the gold coast to Cape St Pauls; and
+then the slave coast.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 241: Forty leagues E.N.E. along the gold coast bring us to
+Saccoom or Accra, in the country called Aquamboo.--E.]
+
+The 28th, the wind turning contrary, we stood out to sea, and when the
+wind changed from the seaward we again stood for the land, which we fell
+in with at a great round red cliff, not very high, having to the
+eastwards a smaller red cliff, and right above that towards the inland a
+round green hummock, which we took to be covered with trees. In the last
+24 hours we only made good about 4 leagues. The 29th coming near the
+shore, we noticed the before mentioned red cliff to have a large tuft of
+trees on its summit. All to the westwards as far as we could see was
+full of red cliffs, and all along the shore, both on the tops of these
+cliffs, and in the low intervals between them, was everywhere full of
+wood. Within a mile of the great cliff to the eastwards there was a
+river, and no cliffs that we could see beyond it, except one small cliff
+very near its eastern side. At this place we had the wind in the night
+at north off the land, and in the day south from the sea, which was not
+usual, as we were assured by such of our people as had been there
+before, being commonly N.W. and S.W. We ran this day and night 12
+leagues. The 31st we went our course by the shore, which was everywhere
+low and covered with wood, with no rocks. This morning many boats of the
+negroes came out to fish, being larger than those we had seen hitherto
+but of similar make, some of them having five men. In the afternoon,
+about 3 o'clock we had sight of a town by the sea-side, which our pilots
+judged to be 25 leagues west from Cape Three-points.
+
+On the morning of the 3d January 1556, we fell in with Cape
+Three-points, having passed during the night one of the Portuguese
+castles, which is 8 leagues west from this point[242]. This is a very
+high land all grown over with trees, and on coming nearer we perceived
+three head-lands, having a kind of two bays between them, which open
+directly westwards. The farthest out to sea is the eastern cape. The
+middle cape is not above a league from the western cape, though the
+chart we had laid them down as 3 leagues asunder. Right before the point
+of the middle cape there is a small rock near it, which cannot be seen
+from the cape itself, except one be near the shore, and on the top of
+this cape there is a great tuft of trees. When abreast of this cape
+there is seen close beside it a round green hummock rising from the
+main-land. The eastern cape is about a league from the middle one, and
+is high land like the other two, and between these there is a little
+head or point of land, and several rocks close in shore. About 8 leagues
+before we came to cape Three-points the coast trends S.E. by E., and
+after passing the cape it runs N.E. by E. About two leagues after
+passing Cape Three-points there is a low glade for about two miles in
+length, after which the land becomes again high, with several successive
+points or headlands, the first of which has several rocks out to sea.
+The middle of the three capes runs farthest out to sea southwards, so
+that it can be seen a great way off from the coast, when it appears to
+rise with two small rocks. We ran this day 8 leagues, and anchored
+before night, lest we might overshoot a town named St Johns[243]. In the
+afternoon a boat with five men came off from the shore and ranged
+alongside of us, as if looking at our flags, but would not come near,
+and after looking at us for some time went back to the land. In the
+morning of the 4th, while sailing along the coast, we espied a ledge of
+rocks close to the shore, to the westwards of which were two green hills
+joining together, with a hollow between them resembling a saddle; and,
+as the master thought the town we were looking for stood within these
+rocks, we manned our boats, taking with us a quantity of cloth and other
+goods, with which we rowed on shore; but after going some way along the
+shore without finding any town, we returned again on board. About two
+leagues to the eastwards from the two saddle hills, a ledge of rocks
+stretches almost two miles out to sea, beyond which is a great bay
+running N.N.W. while the general stretch of the coast at this place is
+from S.W. by W. to N.E. by E. Having with a gentle gale run past that
+uttermost headland, we saw a great red cliff, which the master again
+judged to be near the town of St Johns, on which we again took our boat
+and merchandise and rowed to the shore. We actually found a town on the
+top of a hill to which we directed our course, and on seeing us a
+considerable number of the inhabitants collected together and waved a
+piece of cloth as a signal for us to come in, on which we rowed into an
+excellent bay to eastward of the cliff on which the town stands, and on
+getting fairly into the bay we let drop our grapnel. After remaining
+some time, a boat or canoe came off to us and one of the men in her
+shewed us a piece of gold about half a crown weight, requiring us to
+give them our measure and weight that they might shew them to their
+captain. We accordingly gave them a measure of two ells, and a weight of
+two _angels_, as the principles on which we meant to deal. He took these
+on shore to their captain; and then brought us back a measure of two
+ells one quarter and a half, and one _crusado_ weight of gold, making
+signs that they would give so much weight of gold for that measure of
+cloth and no more; but this we refused. After staying about an hour, and
+finding that they would not deal on our principles, besides
+understanding that the best places for trade were all before us, we
+returned to our ships, weighed anchor, and stood along shore, going
+before in the boat.
+
+[Footnote 242: This was probably Fort St Antonio, at the mouth of the
+river Aximer or Ashim.--Astl. I. 155. a.]
+
+[Footnote 243: St Johns river is about 12 leagues E.N.E. of Cape
+Three-points, nearly in lat. 5° N. long 2° 10' W.--E.]
+
+Having sailed about a league, we came to a point of land having a long
+ledge of rocks running out from it to seawards like the others; and on
+passing the ledge our master noticed a place which he said was assuredly
+the town of Don John[244]. As the night approached we could not see it
+very distinctly, wherefore we came to anchor as near as possible. On the
+morning of the 5th it was recognized to be the town we wanted, wherefore
+we manned our boats and went towards the shore; but knowing that the
+Portuguese had taken away a man from that place the year before, and had
+afterwards shot at them with great _bases_[245], driving them from the
+place, we let go our grapnel almost a _base_ shot from shore, and lay
+there near two hours without any boat coming off to us. At this time
+some of our men who had gone in the Hinds boat into the bay to the
+eastward of the town, where they found a fine fresh river, waved to us
+to join them, because the negroes were seen coming down to that place,
+which we did. Immediately afterwards the negroes came down to the shore,
+and gave us to know by signs that they had gold, but none of them would
+come to our boats, neither indeed did we see that they had any canoes to
+come in, so that we suspected the Portuguese had spoiled their boats, as
+we saw half their town in ruins. Wherefore, having tarried a good while,
+and seeing that they did not come to us, and as we were well armed, we
+run the heads of both boats on shore. Upon this the captain of the town
+came towards us with his dart in his hand, followed by six tall men each
+of whom had a dart and target. Their darts were all headed with iron
+well-fashioned and sharp. After this party came another negro carrying
+the captains stool. We all saluted the captain respectfully, pulling off
+our caps and bowing to him; but he, seeming to consider himself as a man
+of consequence, did not move his cap in return, and gravely sat down on
+his stool, hardly inclining his body in return to our salute: All his
+attendants however, took off their caps and bowed to us.
+
+[Footnote 244: Called St Johns twice before; and we shall see that they
+came to another town afterwards called Don Johns, more to the east,
+whence it appears that the Don John of the text here is an error for St
+John.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 245: Probably musketoons or blunderbusses, and certainly some
+species of gun or fire-arm.--E.]
+
+This chief was clothed from the loins downwards, with a cloth of the
+country manufacture, wrapped about him and made fast with a girdle round
+his waist, having a cap of the country cloth on his head, all his body
+above the loins with his legs and feet being bare. Some of his
+attendants had cloths about their loins, while others had only a clout
+between their legs, fastened before and behind to their girdles; having
+likewise caps on their heads of their own making, some made of
+basket-work, and others like a large wide purse of wild beast skins. All
+their cloth, girdles, fishing lines, and other such things, are made
+from the bark of certain trees, very neatly manufactured. They fabricate
+likewise all such iron implements as they use very artificially; such as
+the heads of their darts, fish-hooks, _hooking_ irons, _ironheads_, and
+great daggers, some of these last being as long as a bill hook, or
+woodcutters knife, very sharp on both sides and bent like a Turkish
+cymeter, and most of the men have such a dagger hanging on their left
+side. Their targets are made of the same materials with their cloths,
+very closely wrought, very large and of an oblong square form, somewhat
+longer than broad, so that when they kneel on the ground the target
+entirely covers their whole body. Their bows are short and tolerably
+strong, as much as a man is able to draw with one finger, and the string
+is made of the bark of a tree, made flat, and a quarter of an inch
+broad. I have not seen any of their arrows, as they were all close
+wrapped up, and I was so busily engaged in traffic that I had not
+leisure to get them opened out for my inspection. They have also the art
+to work up their gold into very pretty ornaments.
+
+When the captain had taken his seat on the stool, I sent him as a
+present two ells of cloth and two basins, and he sent back for our
+weight and measure, on which I sent him a weight of two angels, and
+informed him that such was our price in gold for two ells, or the
+measure I had already sent him. This rule of traffic he absolutely
+refused, and would not suffer his people to buy any thing but basins of
+brass or latten; so that we sold that day 74 brass basins for about half
+an angel weight each, and nine white basins for about a quarter of an
+angel each. We shewed them some of all our other wares, but they did not
+care for any of them. About two o'clock, P.M. the chief returned again,
+and presented me a hen and two great roots, which I accepted, and he
+then made me understand by signs, that many people would come from the
+country that night to trade with me, who would bring great store of
+gold. Accordingly about 4 o'clock there came about 100 men under 3
+chiefs, all well equipped with darts and bows; and when they came to us,
+every man stuck his dart into the ground in token of peace, all the
+chiefs having their stools with them, sat down, after which they sent a
+youth on board our boat who brought a measure of an ell, a quarter and a
+sixteenth, making us understand that they would have four times that
+measure in cloth for the weight in gold of an angel and 12 grains. I
+offered him two ells for that weight, for which I had before demanded
+two angels; but this he despised, and stuck to the four measures, being
+5-1/4 ells. When it grew late and I motioned to go away, he came to four
+ells for the above weight, and as he and I could not agree we went back
+to the ships. This day we took for basins 6 ounces a half and an eighth
+of gold.
+
+In the morning of the 6th, we well manned our boats and the skiff, being
+in some fear of the Portuguese, who had taken away a man from the ships
+in the year before; and as the negroes had not canoes, we went near the
+shore to them. The young man who had been with us the night before was
+again sent to us, and he seemed to have had intercourse with the
+Portuguese, as he could speak a little of that language, and was quite
+expert in weights and measures. At his coming he offered us, as before,
+an angel and 12 grains for four ells, giving us to understand, if we
+would not deal on these terms, we might go away, which we did
+accordingly; but before going away, I offered him three ells of rotten
+cloth for his weight, which he would not accept. We then went on board
+our ships, which lay a league off, after which we went back in the boats
+for sand ballast. When the chiefs saw that our boats had now no
+merchandise, but came only for water and sand, they at last agreed to
+give the weight for three ells. Therefore, when the boats returned to
+the ships, we put wares into both, and, for greater expedition, I and
+John Saville went in one boat, while the master, John Makeworth, and
+Richard Curligin, went in the other. That night I took for my part 52
+ounces of gold, and those in the other boat took 8-1/4 ounces, all by
+the above weight and measure. When it grew late we returned to the
+ships, having taken that day in all 5 pounds of gold.
+
+We went on shore again on the 7th, and that day I took in our boat 3
+pounds 19 ounces[246], so that we had sold most of the cloth we carried
+in the boat before noon, by which time many of the negroes were gone,
+and the rest seemed to have very little gold remaining; yet they made
+signs to us to bring them more latten basins, which I was not inclined
+to, not wishing to spend any more time there, but to push forwards for
+Don Johns town. But as John Saville and John Makeworth were anxious to
+go again, I consented, but did not go myself. They bartered goods for
+eighteen ounces of gold and came away, all the natives having departed
+at a certain cry or signal. While they were on shore, a young negroe who
+could speak a little Portuguese came on board with three others, and to
+him I sold 39 basins and two small white saucers, for three ounces of
+gold. From what I could pick out, this young fellow had been in the
+castle of Mina among the Portuguese, and had got away from them, for he
+told us that the Portuguese were bad men, who made the negroes slaves
+when they could take them, and put irons on their legs. He said also
+that the Portuguese used to hang all the French or English they could
+lay hold of. According to his account, the garrison in the castle
+consisted of 60 men, and that there came thither every year two ships,
+one large and the other a small caravel. He told me farther that Don
+John was at war with the Portuguese, which encouraged me to go to his
+town, which is only four leagues from the castle, and from which our men
+had been driven in the preceding year. This fellow came fearlessly on
+board, and immediately demanded why we had not brought back the men we
+took away the year before, for he knew that the English had taken away
+five negroes. We answered that they were in England, where they were
+well received, and remained there till they could speak the language,
+after which they were to be brought back to serve as interpreters
+between the English and the natives; with which answer he seemed quite
+satisfied, as he spoke no more of that matter.
+
+[Footnote 246: This is surely an error, as the troy or bullion pound
+contains only 12 ounces. We ought therefore to read 3 pounds 9
+ounces--E.]
+
+Our boats being come on board, we weighed and set sail, and soon
+afterwards noticed a great fire on the shore, by the light of which we
+could discern a large white object, which was supposed to be the
+Portuguese castle of St George del Mina; and as it is very difficult to
+ply up to windward on this coast, in case of passing any place, we came
+to anchor for the night two leagues from the shore, lest we might
+overshoot the town of Don John in the night. This town lies in a great
+bay which is very deep[247], and there the people were chiefly desirous
+to procure basins and cloth, though they bought a few other trifles, as
+knives, horse-tails, and horns; and some of our people who were on shore
+sold a cap, a dagger, a hat, and other such articles. They shewed us a
+coarse kind of cloth, which I believe was of French manufacture: The
+wool was very coarse, and the stuff was striped with various colours, as
+green, white, yellow, &c. Several of the negroes at this place wore
+necklaces of large glass beads of various colours. At this place I
+picked up a few words of their language, of which the following is a
+short specimen:
+
+   Mattea! Mattea!       Is their salutation.
+   Dassee! Dassee!       I thank you.
+   Sheke,                Gold.
+   Cowrte,               Cut.
+   Cracca,               Knives.
+   Bassina,              Basins.
+   Foco, foco,           Cloth.
+   Molta, Much,          or great plenty[248]
+
+[Footnote 247: This abrupt account of a town, &c. seems to refer back to
+that of St John, which they had just left.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 248: This language seems partly corrupted.--_Hakluyt_.
+
+Two of the words in this short specimen have been evidently adopted from
+the Portuguese, _bassina_ and _molta_.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 8th, we had sight of the Portuguese castle of
+Mina, but the morning being misty we could not see it distinctly till we
+were almost at Don Johns town, when the weather cleared up and we had a
+full view of the fort, beside which we noticed a white house on a hill,
+which seemed to be a chapel. We stood in towards the shore, within two
+English miles of Don Johns town, where we anchored in seven fathoms. We
+here found, as in many places before, that the current followed the
+course of the wind. At this place the land by the sea is in some places
+low, and in others high, everywhere covered with wood. This town of Don
+John[249] is but small, having only about twenty huts of the negroes,
+and is mostly surrounded by a fence about the height of a man, made of
+reeds or sedge, or some such material. After being at anchor two or
+three hours, without any person coming off to us, we manned our boats
+and put some merchandize into them, and then went with our boats very
+near the shore, where we anchored. They then sent off a man to us, who
+told us by signs that this was the town belonging to Don John, who was
+then in the interior, but would be home at sunset. He then demanded a
+reward, as most of these people do on first coming aboard, and on giving
+him an ell of cloth he went away, and we saw no more of him that night.
+In the morning of the 9th we went again near the shore with our boats,
+when a canoe came off to us, from the people in which we were informed
+by signs that Don John was not yet come home, but was expected that day.
+There came also a man in a canoe from another town a mile from this,
+called Don Devis[250], who shewed us gold, and made signs for us to go
+there. I then left John Saville and John Makeworth at the town of Don
+John, and went in the Hind to the other town, where we anchored, after
+which I went in the boat close to the shore near the town. Boats or
+canoes soon came off to us, shewing a measure of 4-1/2 yards, and a
+weight of an angel and 12 grains, as their rule of traffic, so that I
+could make no bargain. All this day our people lay off Don Johns town
+and did nothing, being told that he was still absent.
+
+[Footnote 249: Or Don _Juan_. This place stands at Cape Korea or
+Cors.--Astl. I. 158. a.
+
+Cape Cors or Korea is now corruptly called Cape coast, at which there is
+an English fort or castle of the same name, in lat. 5° 10' N. long. 1°
+16' W.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 250: Called afterwards the town of John De Viso.--E.]
+
+We went on the 10th to the shore, when a canoe came off with a
+considerable quantity of gold; and after long haggling we at length
+reduced their measure to a nail less than three ells, and brought up
+their weight to an angel and twenty grains, after which, in about a
+quarter of an hour, I sold cloth for a pound and a quarter of an ounce
+of gold. They then made signs for me to tarry till they had parted their
+cloth among them on shore, after their custom, and away they went and
+spread all their cloth on the sand. At this time a man came running from
+the town and spoke with them, and immediately they all hastened away
+into the woods to hide their cloth and gold. We suspected some
+treachery, and though invited by signs to land we would not, but
+returned on board the Hind, whence we could see 30 men on the hill, whom
+we judged to be Portuguese, who went up to the top of the hill, where
+they drew up with a flag. Being desirous to know what the people of the
+Hart were about, I went to her in the Hind's boat, and on nearing her
+was surprised on seeing her shoot off two pieces of ordnance. I then
+made as much haste as possible, and met her boat and skiff coming with
+all speed from the shore. We all met on board the Hart, when they told
+me that they had been on shore all day, where they had given 3-1/2 yards
+of cloth to each of Don Johns two sons, and three basins between them,
+and had delivered 3 yards more cloth at the agreed weight of an angel
+and 12 grains. That while remaining on shore for an answer, some
+Portuguese had come running down the hill upon them, of which the
+negroes had given them warning shortly before, but they understood them
+not. The sons of Don John had conspired with the Portuguese against
+them, so that they were almost taken by surprise; yet they recovered
+their boat and pushed off from the shore, on which the Portuguese
+discharged their calivers or muskets at them, but hurt none of them; in
+revenge for which hostility, the people in the ship had fired off the
+two guns formerly mentioned. We now laid _bases[251]_ into both the
+boats and the skiff, manning and arming them all, and went again towards
+the shore; but being unable to land on account of the wind, we lay off
+at the distance of about 200 yards, whence we fired against the
+Portuguese, but could not injure them as they were sheltered by the
+hill. They fired upon us in return from the hills and rocks, the negroes
+standing by to help them, more from fear than love. Seeing the negroes
+in such subjection that they durst not deal with us, we returned on
+board; and as the wind kept at east all night, we were unable to fetch
+the Hind, but I took the boat and went on board in the night, to see if
+any thing could be done there; and as in the morning we could perceive
+that the town was overawed by the Portuguese like the other, we weighed
+anchor and went along the coast to the eastwards.
+
+[Footnote 251: Formerly conjectured to be musquetoons, or
+wall-pieces.--E.]
+
+This town of John de Viso stands on a hill like that of Don John, but
+had been recently burnt, so that there did not remain above six houses
+standing. Most of the gold on this part of the coast comes from the
+interior country, and doubtless, if the people durst bring their gold,
+which they are prevented from doing by the Portuguese, we might have got
+abundance; but they are under such subjection to the Portuguese, that
+they dare not trade with others.
+
+While coasting along on the 11th, we saw a small town about 4 leagues to
+the east of that we last came from. About half a league farther was
+another town upon a hill, and half a league beyond that another large
+town on the coast, to which we went to try what could be done in the way
+of trade, meaning, if unsuccessful, to return to the towns we had left
+behind, in hopes that the Portuguese would leave them on our departure.
+All the way from the castle of Mina to this place, there were very high
+hills to be seen rising above other hills, all covered with wood, and
+the coast was lined with great red cliffs close to the sea. The boats of
+this coast are larger than those we had seen hitherto, as one of them
+could carry 12 men, but they were still of the same form with all the
+boats along the coast. About these towns there seemed few rivers, and
+their language seemed the same with that at Don Johns town, every person
+being able to speak a few words of Portuguese, which they constantly
+used to us. About five o'clock P.M. we saw 22 of the native boats or
+canoes going along shore to the westwards, on which we suspected some
+treachery; wherefore on the 12th we made sail farther along the coast
+eastwards, and descried more towns, in which there were some larger
+houses than any we had hitherto seen, and from these the people came out
+to look at us, but we could see no boats on the shore. Two miles beyond
+the eastermost town there are black rocks, which continue to the
+uttermost cape or point of the land for the space of a league, after
+which the land runs E.N.E. Some negroes came down to these black rocks,
+whence they waved a white flag for us to land; but as we were near the
+principal town, we continued our course along shore, and when we had
+opened the point of land we perceived another head-land about a league
+farther on, having a rock lying off to sea, which was thought to be the
+place of which were in search. On coming abreast of the town it was
+recognized, and having anchored within half a mile of the shore in five
+fathoms, with good ground, we put wares into our boat, and went near the
+shore to endeavour to open trade. Anchoring close to the shore, about 10
+A.M. we saw many canoes on the beach, and some came past us, but no one
+would draw near, being, as we supposed, afraid of us, as four men had
+been forcibly taken away from thence the year before. Seeing that no one
+came off to us, we went again on board, expecting to make no sales; but
+towards evening a great number of people came to the shore and waved a
+white flag, as inviting us to land, after which their chief or captain
+came down with many men along with him, and sat down under a tree near
+the shore. On seeing this I took some things with me in the boat to
+present to him, and at length he sent off a boat to us which would not
+come near, but made signs for us to return next day. At length, by
+offering things for their captain, I enticed them into our boat, and
+gave them two ells of cloth, a latten basin, a white basin, a bottle, a
+large piece of beef, and six biscuits, which they received and made
+signs for us to come back next day, saying that their chief was _grand
+captain_, which indeed appeared by his numerous attendants, who were
+armed with darts, targets, and other weapons. This town is very large,
+and stands upon a hill among trees, so that it cannot well be seen
+except when one is near. To the eastwards of it there are two very high
+trees on a hill close to the town[27]; and under the town is another
+and lower hill washed by the sea, where it is all composed of great
+black rocks. Beyond this town there is another considerably smaller on a
+bay.
+
+[252][Footnote 252: 27 It is added, _which is a good mark to know the
+town_. But at this distance of time, above 250 years, such marks cannot
+be supposed to remain.--E.]
+
+
+In the morning of the 13th we took our boat and went close to the shore,
+where we remained till ten o'clock, but no one came near us. We prepared
+therefore to return on board, on seeing which some negroes came running
+down and waved us back with a white flag, so we anchored again and they
+made us to understand by signs that the chief would soon come down. In
+the meantime we saw a sail pass by us, but being small we regarded it
+not. As the sun was high, we made a tilt with our oars and sails. There
+now came off to us a canoe with five men, who brought back our bottle,
+and gave me a hen, making signs by the sun that within two hours the
+merchants of the country would come and buy all we had. I gave them six
+_manillios_ to present to their captain; and as they signified by signs
+that they would leave a man with us if we gave them a pledge, we put one
+of our men into their boat; but as they would not give us one of their
+men, we took back our man again, and remained in expectation of the
+merchants. Shortly afterwards there came down one of the natives to the
+shore, arrayed like their captain, attended by a numerous train, who
+saluted us in a friendly manner, and then sat down under a tree where
+the captain used to sit in the former year. Soon afterwards we perceived
+a great number of natives standing at the end of a hollow way, and
+behind them the Portuguese had planted a base, which they suddenly
+discharged, but its ball overshot us, though we were very near. Before
+we could ship our oars to get away, they shot at us again, but did us no
+harm; the negroes came to the rocks close beside us, whence they
+discharged calivers at us, and the Portuguese shot off their base twice
+more. On this our ship made some shots at them, but they were protected
+by the rocks and hills.
+
+We now went on board to leave this place, as the negroes were bent
+against us, because in the former year Robert Gainsh had taken away the
+captains son from this place, with three others, and all their gold and
+every thing else they had about them; owing to which they had become
+friends to the Portuguese, whom they hated before, as appeared in the
+former year when the Trinity was there; when the chief came on board
+and brought them to his town, trading with them largely, and offering
+them ground on which to build a fort[253]. The 14th we plied back to
+meet the Hind, which we met in the morning, and then both ships sailed
+eastwards to try what could be done at the place where the Trinity sold
+her friezes in the preceding year. The day after we parted, the Hind had
+taken eighteen and a half ounces of gold from some negroes in exchange
+for wares. This day, about one P.M. we saw some canoes on the coast,
+with men standing beside them, and going to them with merchandise, we
+took three ounces of gold for eighteen _fuffs_ of cloth, each _fuffe_
+being three and a half yards, at the rate of one angel twelve grains the
+_fuffe_. These people made us understand by signs that if we waited till
+next day we might have plenty of gold. For this reason I sent off the
+master with the Hind, accompanied by John Saville and John Makeworth, to
+seek the other place, while I and Richard Pakeman remained here to try
+our fortunes next day. When the negroes perceived the Hind going away
+they feared the other ship would follow, wherefore they sent off four
+men in two canoes, asking us to remain, and offering two men to remain
+with us, if we would give one as a pledge or hostage for his safety.
+Accordingly, one Edward, who was servant to Mr Morley, seeing them so
+much in earnest, offered himself as a pledge, and we let him go for two
+of them who staid with us, one of whom had his weights and scales, with
+a chain of gold about his neck and another round his arm. These men eat
+readily of such things as we had to give them, and seemed quite
+contented. During the night, the negroes kept a light on shore over
+against us; and about one o'clock, A.M. we saw the flash of a _base_,
+which was twice shot off at the light, and then two _calivers_ were
+discharged, which in the end we perceived came from a Portuguese
+brigantine that followed us from place to place, to warn the natives to
+have no dealings with us.
+
+[Footnote 253: In the margin, Hakluyt sets down the voyage of Robert
+Gainsh to Guinea as in 1554; yet does not mention where that voyage is
+to be found, or that it is the same voyage published in his second
+edition, under the name of Lok, instead of Gainsh to whom it was
+ascribed in his first edition. All the light we have into the matter
+from the second edition, is from a marginal note at the beginning of
+Loks voyage, in which Robert Gainsh is said to have been master of the
+John Evangelist; neither is there any mention of this villainous
+transaction in the relation of that voyage. Such crimes deserve severe
+punishment; since a whole community may suffer for the fault of one bad
+man.--Astl. I. 160, a.]
+
+In the morning of the 15th, the negro chief came down to the coast
+attended by 100 men, bringing his wife along with him, and many others
+brought their wives also, as they meant to remain by the sea side till
+they had bought what they wanted, and their town was eight miles up the
+country. Immediately on his arrival, the chief sent our man on board,
+and offered to come himself if we would give two of our men in pledge
+for him. I accordingly sent him two, but he only retained one, and came
+on board accompanied by his wife and several friends, bringing me a goat
+and two great roots, for which I gave him in return a latten basin, a
+white basin, six _manillios_ and a bottle of _Malmsey_, and to his wife
+a small casket. After this we began to adjust our measure and weight. He
+had a weight of his own, equal to an angel and 14 grains, and required a
+measure of 4-1/2 ells. In fine we concluded the 8th part[254], for an
+angel and 20 grains; and before we had done he took my own weight and
+measure. The 16th I took 8 libs. 1 oz. of gold. Since the departure of
+the Hind I had not heard of her; but when our pledge went into the
+country the first night he said that he saw her at anchor about 5
+leagues from us. The 17th I sold about 17 pieces of cloth, for which I
+got 4 libs. 4-1/2 oz. of gold. The 18th the chief desired to purchase
+some of our wine, offering half a gold ducat for a bottle; but I gave
+him one freely, and made him and his train drink besides. This day I
+took 5 libs. 5 oz. of gold. The 19th I sold about 18 pieces of cloth,
+and took 4 libs. 4-1/2 oz. of gold. The 20th 3 libs. 6-1/4 oz; the 21st
+8 libs. 7-1/4 oz; the 22d 3 libs. 8-1/4 oz: And about 4 o'clock this
+night[255] the chief and all his people went away. The 23d we were waved
+on shore by other negroes, and sold them cloth, caskets, knives, and a
+dozen bells, for 1 lib. 10 oz. of gold. The 24th we sold bells,
+sheets[256], and thimbles, for 2 libs. 1-1/4 oz. of gold. The 25th we
+sold 7 doz. of small bells and other things, and finding their gold all
+gone, we weighed and sailed to leewards in search of the Hind, which we
+found about 5 o'clock, P.M. and understood she had made some sales.
+
+[Footnote 254: The meaning is here obscure; perhaps the word _less_ is
+omitted, and the bargain was for a measure an eighth part less than that
+originally proposed.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 255: Perhaps we should rather understand 4 o'clock next
+morning?--E.]
+
+[Footnote 256: Perhaps this ought to be sheers or scissars?--E.]
+
+The 26th we received from the Hind 48 libs. 3-1/8 oz. of gold, which
+they had taken while we were asunder; and this day, on the request of a
+negro sent us by the chief, we went on shore with our merchandise and
+took 7 libs, 1 oz. of gold. At this place they required no pledges from
+us, yet sent every night a man to sleep on board, as an assurance that
+they would come to us next day. The 27th in both ships we took 8 libs.
+1-7/8 oz. of gold. The 28th we made sales to the amount of 1 lib. 1/3
+oz. for the company. The 29th in the morning we heard two caliver shots
+on shore, which we judged might either be the Portuguese or some of
+their negroes, and we accordingly manned our boats, armed ourselves and
+our men, and went on shore, but they were gone off. The 30th we made
+more sales both for the company and the masters. The 31st we sent our
+boats on shore to take in sand for ballast; and our men met the negroes
+with whom they had dealt the day before, who were now employed fishing,
+and helped them to fill sand; and having now no gold, sold fish to our
+men for their handkerchiefs and neckerchiefs. The 1st of February we
+weighed and went to another place, where we took 1 lib. 9 1/3 oz. of
+gold. The 2d we made more sales; but on taking a survey of our
+provisions, we resolved not to stay much longer on the coast, most of
+our drink being spent, and what remained turning sour. The 3d and 4th we
+made some sales though not great; and finding the wind on this last day
+come off shore, we set sail and went along the coast to the westwards.
+Upon this coast, we found by experience that ordinarily, about 2 o'clock
+in the night[257] the wind came off shore from N.N.E., and continued in
+that direction till 8 o'clock in the morning, blowing all the rest of
+the day and night at S.W. The tide or current on this shore goes
+continually with the wind.[258] We continued our course along shore on
+the 5th, expecting to have met some English ships, but found none.
+
+[Footnote 257: It is hard to say whether this means 2 hours after
+sunset, or after midnight--E.]
+
+[Footnote 258: Apparently running from the east during the land breeze,
+and from the west with the sea breeze--E.]
+
+The 6th February 1556, we altered our course S.W. leaving the coast, to
+fetch under the line, and ran 24 leagues by estimation. By the 13th we
+reckoned ourselves off Cape Palmas, and by the 22d we were by our
+reckoning abreast of Cape Mount, 30 leagues west from the river Sestos
+or Sestro. The 1st March we lost sight of the Hind in a tornado; on
+which we set up a light and fired a gun, but saw nothing of her,
+wherefore we struck sail and lay by for her, and in the morning had
+sight of her 3 leagues astern. This day we found ourselves in the
+latitude of Cape Verd which is in 14° 30' [14° 50' N.] Continuing our
+course till the 29th, we were then in 22°, on which day one of our men
+named William King died in his sleep, having been long sick. His clothes
+were distributed among those of the crew who were in want of such
+things, and his money was kept to be delivered to his friends at home.
+The 30th we found ourselves under the tropic. On the 1st April we were
+in the latitude of the Azores, and on the 7th of May we fell in with the
+south of Ireland, where we sent our boat on shore for fresh water, and
+where we bought two sheep and such other victuals as we needed from the
+country people, who are wild _kernes_. The 14th of the same month we
+went into the port of Bristol called Hungrode[259], where we cast anchor
+in safety, giving God thanks for our happy arrival.
+
+[Footnote 259: Probably that now called King-road?--E.]
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Second Voyage to Guinea in 1556, by William Towerson_[260].
+
+
+On the 14th September 1556, we set sail from Harwich bound for the coast
+of Guinea, in the Tiger of London of 120 tons, directing our coarse for
+Scilly, where we expected to meet the Hart of London of 60 tons and a
+pinnace of 16 tons, both of which had been fitted out and victualled at
+Bristol. We arrived at Scilly on the 28th, and having lain to some time
+for our consorts to no purpose, we sailed back to Plymouth on the 12th
+October. They there joined us, and we sailed together from that port on
+the 15th November.
+
+[Footnote 260: Hakluyt, II. 496. Astl. I. 162.
+
+Hitherto we have given these voyages to Guinea at full length, as they
+are found in the collection of Hakluyt; but in this and the subsequent
+early English voyages to Guinea, we have thought proper to abbreviate
+such matters as seemed of small importance.--E.]
+
+We made the coast of Guinea on the 30th December, where we got sight of
+three ships and two pinnaces which were to windward of us, on which we
+made ourselves ready for action and gave them chase, hauling to the wind
+as near as we could to gain the weather-gage. At first they made sail
+from us, but having cleared for fighting they put about and came towards
+us in brave order, their streamers, pennants and ensigns displayed, and
+trumpets, sounding. When we met they still had the weather-gage of us,
+yet were we firmly determined to have fought them if they had been
+Portuguese, and hailed them to come under our lee, which they stoutly
+refused. On demanding whence they were, they said from France; and we
+then told them we were from London in England. They then told us there
+were certain Portuguese ships gone to Mina to protect that place, and
+that they had already burnt a Portuguese ship of 200 tons at the river
+Sestro. The captain of the admiral ship and several other Frenchmen came
+on board of us in a friendly manner, and proposed that we should join
+company because of the Portuguese, and go together to Mina. We told them
+that we had not yet watered, having just fallen in with the coast. They
+said we were 50 leagues to leeward of Sestro river, but still water
+might be had, and they would assist us in watering with their boats for
+the sake of our company. They told us farther that they had been six
+weeks on the coast, and had only got 3 tons of grains among them
+all[261].
+
+[Footnote 261: These ships were the Espoir of Harfleur, the admiral, of
+which Denis Blundel was captain; the Levriere of Rouen, vice-admiral,
+commanded by Jerome Baudet; and a ship of Houfleur, commanded by Jean de
+Orleans.--E.]
+
+After hearing what they had to say, we considered that even if Mina were
+clear of Portuguese ships, yet if the Frenchmen went before us they
+would spoil our market: That if there were Portuguese ships at Mina, and
+they took the French ships, they would learn that we were behind, and
+would wait to take us likewise: And finally, if we went along with them
+and found the coast clear, we would do as well as they; but if the
+Portuguese remained on the coast we should be stronger in their company.
+Wherefore, having thus considered their friendly offers, we told them
+that we would confer more largely of the matter next day; upon which
+they invited me to dine with them next day, and to bring with me the
+masters of our ships and such merchants as I thought proper, offering to
+supply us with water from their own ships if we would, or else to remain
+with us and help us to water with their boats and pinnaces. In the
+morning of the 31st, the French admiral sent his boat for me, and I went
+on board his ship accompanied by our masters and some of our merchants.
+He had provided a noble banquet for us, and treated us excellently,
+requesting us to keep him company, promising to part with us what
+victuals were in his ship, or any other things that could serve us,
+even offering to strike his flag and obey my commands in all things. Not
+being able to find water at that place, we set sail on the 1st January
+1557, and anchored off the mouth of a river, where on the two following
+days we procured water, and bought a few small elephants teeth.
+
+On the 4th of January we landed with 30 men, well armed with arquebuses,
+pikes, long-bows, cross-bows, partizans, long swords, and swords and
+bucklers, meaning to seek for elephants. We found two, which we wounded
+several times with our fire-arms and arrows, but they both got away from
+us and hurt one of our men. We sailed on the 5th, and next day fell in
+with the river St Andrew, [in long. 6° 4' W.] The land is somewhat high
+to the westward of this river, having a fine bay likewise to the
+westward, but to the east the land is low. This is a great river, having
+7 fathoms water in some places at its mouth. On the 7th we went into the
+river, where we found no village, and only some wild negroes not used to
+trade. Having filled our water casks here, we set sail to the eastward.
+On the 10th we had a conference with Captain Blondel, the admiral of the
+French ships, Jerome Baudet his vice-admiral, and Jean de Orleans,
+master of the ship of 70 tons. We agreed to traffic in friendly accord,
+so as not to hurt each others market, certain persons being appointed to
+make a price for the whole, and then one boat from every ship to make
+sales on the agreed terms. On the 11th, at a place called _Allow_[262],
+we got only half an angel weight and 4 grains of gold, which was taken
+by hand, the natives having no weights.
+
+[Footnote 262: Rather Lu how or La hu.--Astl. I 163. b.--The river
+called Jack Lahows river, in Long. 4° 14' W.--E.]
+
+On the 14th we came within _Saker_ shot of the castle of Mina, whence an
+Almadia was sent out to see what we were, but seeing that we were not
+Portuguese, she went immediately back to the large negroe town of
+_Dondou_ close by the castle. Without this there lie two great rocks
+like islands, and the castle stands on a point resembling an island. At
+some distance to the westwards the land for 5 or 6 leagues was high, but
+for 7 leagues from thence to the castle the land is low, after which it
+becomes high again. The castle of Mina is about 5 leagues east from Cape
+Three-points[263]. Here I took the boat with our negroes, and, went
+along the coast till I came to the cape, where I found two small towns
+having no canoes, neither could we have any trade. At these places our
+negroes understood the natives perfectly, and one of them went on shore
+at all the places, where he was well received by his countrymen. At a
+place called _Bulle_, about 3 leagues east from the eastermost point of
+Cape Three-points, we learnt from the natives by means of our negro
+George, that about a month before there had been an engagement at this
+place, in which two ships had put one to flight; and that some time
+before, one French ship had put to flight four Portuguese ships at the
+castle of Mina.
+
+[Footnote 263: Mina is in Long. 1° 60', Cape Three points in 2 40' both
+west, the difference of Longitude therefore is about 50 minutes, or
+nearly 17 leagues.--E]
+
+On the 16th we went to a place called _Hanta_, 12 leagues beyond the
+cape, but did no good, as the natives held their gold too dear. We went
+thence to _Shamma_[264], where we landed with 5 boats well armed with
+men and ordnance, making a great noise with our drums and trumpets,
+suspecting we might have found Portuguese here, but there were none. We
+sent our negroes first on shore, after which we followed and were well
+received. The 18th we agreed to give the negroes 2 yards and 3 nails of
+cloth, as a _fuffe_, to exchange for an angel-ducat weight; so we took
+in all 70 ducats, of which the Frenchmen had 40 and we 30. The 19th I
+took 4 libs. 2-1/2 oz. of gold, and the boat of the Hart had 21 oz. This
+night we were informed by the negroes that the Portuguese meant to
+attack us next day either by sea or land, and as we were about to return
+on board we heard several shots in the woods, but they durst not come
+near us. The 20th we went on shore well armed, but heard no more of the
+Portuguese, and this day the negroes informed us there were some ships
+come to _Hanta_, a town about 2 leagues to the west. The 21st we went in
+our boats to a town a league to the west, where we found many negroes
+under another chief, with whom we dealt on the same terms as at Shamma.
+The 22d we went again on shore, and I got 1 lib. 4 oz. of gold. The 23d
+the negroes told as that the Portuguese ships had departed from the
+Mina, intending to ply to windward and then come down to fight us,
+giving us warning to be on our guard. The 24th we went again on shore to
+trade, and I invited the chief of the town to dinner. While we were
+ashore on the 25th, our ships descried 5 sail of ships belonging to the
+king of Portugal, and fired several shots to recall us on board. So we
+went to the ships, but by the time that every thing was in order and we
+had weighed anchor it was night, so that nothing could be done. We set
+sail however and tried all night to gain the wind of the Portuguese,
+some of which were very near during the night. One of them, which we
+judged was their admiral, fired a shot, as we supposed to call the
+others to come and speak with him. The 26th we came in with the shore,
+and got sight of the Portuguese at anchor, on which we made sail towards
+them, giving all our men white scarfs, that the French and we might know
+each other in case of boarding: But night coming on before we could
+fetch the Portuguese, we anchored within demi-culverine shot of them.
+
+[Footnote 264: Called Chama in modern maps, near the mouth of St Johns
+river, about 6 leagues east from Mina.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 27th, both we and the Portuguese weighed anchor,
+and by 11 o'clock, A.M. we had gained the weather-gage, on which we went
+room with them[265]: on this they bore away towards the shore, and we
+after them, and when they were near shore they put about again to
+seawards. We put about likewise, and gained a head of them, on which we
+took in our topsails and waited for them. The first that came up was a
+small bark, which sailed so well that she cared not for any of us, and
+had good ordnance. As soon as she came up she discharged her guns at us
+and shot past with ease, after which she fired at the French admiral and
+struck his ship in several places; and as we were in our fighting sails,
+she soon got beyond our reach. Then another caravel came up under our
+lee, discharging her ordnance at us and at the French admiral, wounding
+two of his men and shooting through his main-mast. After him came up the
+Portuguese admiral also under our lee, but was not able to do us so much
+harm as the small ships had done, as he carried his ordnance higher than
+they; neither were we able to make a good shot at any of them, because
+our ship was so weak in the side that she laid all her ordnance in the
+sea[266]. We determined therefore to lay the Portuguese admiral on
+board; but on making the attempt, the French admiral fell to leeward and
+could not fetch him, after which he fell to leeward of two other
+caravels, and was unable to fetch any of them. Being thus to leeward,
+the French admiral kept on towards the shore and left us. We hoisted
+our topsails and gave chase to the enemy, but both the other French
+ships kept their wind and would not come near us, and our own consort
+was so much astern that she could not get up to our assistance. When we
+had followed them to seaward about two hours, the enemy put about
+towards the land, thinking to pay us as they went past, and to gain the
+wind of the French admiral which had gone in shore; but we put about
+likewise keeping still the weather gage, expecting our consort and the
+rest to have followed our example. But when the Portuguese had passed
+our consort and the two French ships, firing as they went along, all of
+these ships and our own pinnace continued to seawards, leaving us in the
+_laps_, (lurch.) We continued our course after the enemy, keeping the
+weather gage, that we might succour the French admiral who was to
+leeward of them all; and on coming up with him, all the enemies ships
+bore down and gave him their broadsides, after which they put about
+again, but durst not board him as we were still to wind-wind of them,
+otherwise they had certainly taken or sunk him. Three of their smallest
+vessels were such prime sailors that it was quite impossible for any of
+our ships to have boarded them, and they carried such ordnance that they
+would have sore troubled any three of our ships; if they had been able
+to gain the weather-gage. Their other ships, the admiral and
+vice-admiral, were both notably appointed.
+
+[Footnote 265: Bore down upon them.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 266: Meaning apparently that she lay too much over to
+leeward.--E.]
+
+When the French admiral was clear of them, he lay as near the wind as
+possible and ran to seaward after the rest, while we followed the enemy
+to leeward. Then seeing us alone and in chase, they put about, which we
+did likewise to keep the wind of them, and in this situation we sailed
+within _base_ shot of them, but they shot not at us, because we had the
+weather gage and they could not therefore harm us. We continued in this
+course till night, when we lost sight of them. All the rest of our ships
+made to seawards with all the sail they could carry; and, as they
+confessed themselves afterwards, they gave us their prayers, and no
+other help had we at their hands.
+
+Next day, the 28th, we rejoined our own consort and pinnace, and two of
+the French ships, but the third, which was a ship of 80 tons belonging
+to Rouen, had fled. I took my skiff and went to them to know why they,
+had deserted me. John Kire said his ship would neither rear nor
+stear[267]. John Davis said the pinnace had broke her rudder, so that
+she could sail no farther, and had been taken in tow by the Hart. I
+found the French admiral to be a man of resolution, but half his crew
+was sick or dead. The other Frenchman said his ship could bear no sail,
+and 16 of his men were sick or dead, so that he could do nothing. After
+this the French ships durst not come to anchor for fear of the
+Portuguese.
+
+[Footnote 267: Meaning perhaps, would neither wear nor tack?--E.]
+
+The 29th, on finding our pinnace incapable of farther use, we took out
+her four bases, anchor, and every thing of value, and set her on fire,
+after which we ran along the coast. On the 3d February we anchored about
+4 leagues from a town, which we saluted with two guns, on which the
+chief came to the shore, to whom I sent Thomas Rippon who knew him.
+After some conference, the chief came off to me; as it was become late,
+he did not enter into bargain for any price, but exchanged pledges and,
+returned on shore. Next day I went on shore, and though some French
+ships had been there and spoiled the market, I took 5-1/2 oz. of gold.
+The 5th I took 8-1/2 oz. but could perceive that the negroes thought the
+French cloth better and broader than ours; wherefore I told Captain
+Blundel that I would go to leeward, as where he was I should do no good.
+The 6th there came an Almadie or canoe to us with some negroes, inviting
+me to their town, where they had plenty of gold and many merchants. I
+did so, but could do no good that night, as the merchants were not come
+from the interior. On the 7th our negro George came to us, having
+followed us at least 30 leagues in a small canoe, and soon after his
+arrival we settled the terms of dealing with the natives. George had
+been left in Shamma at the time of the fight, which he saw from the
+shore, and told us that the Portuguese had gone afterwards into that
+river, when they said that two of their men had been slain by a shot,
+which was from our ship. This day I took 5 libs. 1-1/4 oz. of gold; the
+8th 19 libs. 3-1/2 oz.; the 9th 2 libs. 6-1/2 oz.; the 10th 3 libs. The
+11th. Jerome Baudet, the French vice-admiral, came to us in his pinnace,
+saying that they could do no good where they were, and that he meant to
+go to the eastwards: But we told him this could not be allowed, and
+desired him to return to his comrades, which he refused; till we shot
+three or four pieces at his pinnace; on which his ship put about and ran
+out to sea followed by the pinnace. This day I took 1 lib. 5 oz.
+
+The 12th one of the French pinnaces came with cloth, but we would not
+allow them to trade, and made them remain all day close to our ship.
+This day we took 5 lib. 6-1/2 oz. The 17th we went to another town,
+where we understood that three of the Portuguese ships were at the
+castle, and the other two at Shamma. Though the Portuguese were so near
+that they might have been with us in three hours, we yet resolved to
+remain and make sales if we could. The chief of this town was absent at
+the principal town of the district visiting the king, but came soon back
+with a weight and measure. The 18th some of the kings servants came to
+us, and we took 1 lib. 2-1/8 oz. of gold. The 19th we took 5 libs. 1 oz.
+the 20th 1 lib. 4 oz; the 21st 4 libs. 1 oz; the 22d 3-1/2 oz.
+
+Having sent one of our merchants with a present to the king, he returned
+on the 23d, saying that he had been received in a friendly manner by
+_Abaan_, who had little gold but promised if we would stay that he would
+send all over his country in search of gold for us, and desired our
+people to request our king to send men to his country to build a fort,
+and to bring tailors with them to make them apparel, and to send good
+wares and we should be sure to sell them; but that the French had for
+the present filled the market with cloth. This town where the king Abaan
+resides, is about 4 leagues up the country, and in the opinion of our
+people who were there is as large in circumference as London, though all
+built like those we had already seen. Around the town there was great
+abundance of the wheat of the country, insomuch that on one side of it
+they saw 1000 ricks of wheat and of another sort of grain called _mill_
+or millet, which is much used in Spain. All round this town there is
+kept a good nightly watch, and across all the roads or paths they have
+cords stretched and connected with certain bells; so that if any one
+touch the cords the bells, immediately ring to alarm the watchmen, on
+which they run out to see what is the matter. In case of any enemies,
+they have nets suspended over the paths ready to let fall and entangle
+them. It is impossible to get to the town except by the regular paths,
+as it is every where environed with trees and thick underwood; besides
+which the town is surrounded by a fence of sedge bound with thick ropes
+made of the bark of trees[268].
+
+[Footnote 268: It is hard to discover what place this was. Perhaps it
+was _Great Commendo_ or _Guaffo_, which stands on a river that runs by
+the town of the _Mina_, and is still the residence of a negro king; in
+which case the port they put in at might have been little _Commendo._
+But the royal city is very far from being as large as London was in
+1556, not having above 400 houses. The contrivance for apprizing the
+watchmen of the approach of an enemy, and for taking them prisoners,
+seems a notable invention of our countrymen; for surely an enemy might
+easily destroy these net-traps to catch soldiers, these pack-thread
+fortifications.--Astl. 1. 167. a.]
+
+As in this country it is necessary to travel in the night to avoid the
+heat of the day, our men came to the town about five in the morning.
+About nine the king sent for them, as no one must go to him unless sent
+for, and they proposed carrying their present, but were told they must
+be brought before him three times, before their gift could be offered.
+They then waited upon him and were graciously received. And having been
+sent for three several times, they carried their present the last time,
+which was thankfully accepted; and calling for a pot of Palm wine, the
+king made them drink. Before drinking they use the following ceremonies:
+On bringing out the pot of wine, a hole is made in the ground into which
+a small quantity of the wine is poured, after which the hole is filled
+up, and the pot set on the place. Then with a small cup made of a gourd
+shell, they take out a little of the wine, which is poured on the ground
+in three several places. They set up likewise some branches of the Palm
+tree in different parts of the ground, where they shed some of the wine,
+doing reverence to the palms. All these ceremonies being gone through,
+the king took a gold cup full of wine which he drank off, all the people
+calling out Abaan! Abaan! together with certain words, as is usual in
+Flanders on twelfth night, _the king drinks._ When he had drank, then
+the wine was served round to every one, and the king allowed them to
+depart. Then every one bowed three times, waving his hands, and so
+departed. The king has usually sitting beside him, eight or ten old men
+with grey beards.
+
+On the 23d we took 1 lib. 10 oz. of gold; the 24th 3 lib. 7 oz.; the
+25th 3-1/4 oz.; the 26th 2 libs. 10 oz.; the 27th 2 libs. 5 oz.; the
+28th 4 libs. Then seeing that there was no more gold to be had, we
+weighed anchor and continued along the coast. The 1st of March we came
+to a town called _Moure_, where we found neither boats nor people; but
+when about to depart there came some people to us in two canoes from
+another town, from whom we took 2-1/2 oz. of gold, and who told us that
+the inhabitants had removed from Mowre to _Lagoua._[269]. The 2d we were
+abreast the castle of Mina, where we saw all the five Portuguese ships
+at anchor, and by night we were off Shamma or Chama, where we meant to
+water. But next day we saw a tall ship of about 200 tons to windward
+within two leagues, and then two more astern of her, one a ship of 500
+tons or more and the other a pinnace. Upon this we weighed anchor, and
+made a shirt to stand out to sea, the wind being S.S.W., but the Hart
+fell three leagues to leeward of us. These ships chased us from 9 A.M.
+till 5 P.M. but could not make up with us. At night, when we joined the
+Hart, on asking why she fell to leeward, they pretended that they durst
+not make sail to windward, lest they had carried away their
+fore-top-mast. Having been thus obliged to abandon our watering-place,
+we were under the necessity of boiling our meat-in sea-water, and to
+reduce our allowance of drink to make it hold out, as we now shaped our
+course homewards.
+
+[Footnote 269: Mowree is 4-1/2 leagues east from the castle of Minas,
+and Lagoua or Laguy is 9 leagues east from the same place.--Astl. I.
+168. a.]
+
+On the 16th of March we fell in with the land, which I judged to be Cape
+Misurado, about which there is much high land. The 18th we lost sight of
+the Hart, and I think the master wilfully went in shore on purpose to
+lose us, being offended that I had reproved him for his folly when
+chased by the Portuguese. The 27th we fell in with two small islands
+about 6 leagues off Cape Sierra Leona; and before we saw them we
+reckoned ourselves at least 30 or 40 leagues from them. Therefore all
+who sail this way must allow for the current which sets N.N.W. or they
+will be much deceived. The 14th April we met two large Portuguese ships,
+which we supposed were bound to Calicut. The 23d we saw a French ship of
+90 tons to windward of us, which came down upon us as if to lay us on
+board, sending up some of his men in armour into the tops, and calling
+out to us to strike. Upon this we saluted him with some cross-bars,
+chain-shot, and arrows, so thick that we made their upper works fly
+about their ears, and tore his ship so miserably, that he fell astern
+and made sail. Our trumpeter was a Frenchman, at this time ill in bed;
+yet he blew his trumpet till he could sound no more, and so died. The
+29th we arrived at Plymouth, and gave thanks to God for our safety.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Third Voyage of William Towerson to Guinea, in 1558_[270].
+
+
+On the 30th of January of the above year, we set sail from Plymouth with
+three ships and a pinnace, bound by the grace of God for the Canaries
+and the coast of Guinea. Our ships were the Minion, admiral; the
+Christopher, vice-admiral; the Tiger, and a pinnace called the Unicorn.
+Next day we fell in with two hulks[271] of Dantziek, one called the Rose
+of 400 tons, and the other the Unicorn of 150, both laden at Bourdeaux,
+mostly with wine. We caused them to hoist out their boats and come on
+board, when we examined them separately as to what goods they had on
+board belonging to Frenchmen[272]. At first they denied having any; but
+by their contradictory stories, we suspected the falsehood of their
+charter parties, and ordered them to produce their bills of lading. They
+denied having any, but we sent certain persons to the place where they
+were hid, and thus confronted their falsehood. At length they confessed
+that there were 32 tons and a hogshead of wine in the Unicorn belonging
+to a Frenchman, and 128 tons in the Rose belonging to the, same person;
+but insisted that all the rest was laden by Peter Lewgues of Hamburgh,
+and consigned to Henry Summer of Campvere. After a long consultation,
+considering that to capture or detain them might lose our voyage,
+already too late, we agreed that each of our ships should take out as
+much as they could stow for necessaries, and that we should consider
+next morning what was farther to be done. We accordingly took out many
+tuns of wine, some aquavitae, cordage, rosin, and other things, giving
+them the rest of the Frenchmans wines to pay for what we had taken of
+their own, and took a certificate under their hands of the quantity of
+French goods they had confessed to, and then allowed them to continue
+their voyage.
+
+[Footnote 270: Hakluyt, II. 504. Astley, I. 169.--In the last London
+edition of Hakluyt, 1810, it is dated erroneously in 1577, but we learn
+from the editor of Astley's Collection that in the edition 1589, it is
+dated in 1557. Yet, notwithstanding that authority, we may be assured
+that the date of this voyage could not have been earlier than January
+1558, as Towerson did not return from his former voyage till the 29th of
+April 1557.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 271: Probably meaning large unwieldy ships.--E]
+
+[Footnote 272: It is to be noted, that at this time there was war
+between England and France.--This observation is a side note of Hakluyt:
+And it may be worth while to notice that, so early as 1557, free bottoms
+were not considered by the English as making free goods.--E.]
+
+The 10th January we had sight of the grand Canary, and on the 12th we
+anchored in the road, a league from the town, where we were well
+received. We went to the town with two English merchants who resided
+there, and remained that day at their house. The second day following we
+returned on board to get our pinnace repaired, which had broken her
+rudder, and to deliver our merchandize. The 14th there came nineteen
+sail of Spanish ships into the road, bound for the West Indies, six of
+them being of 400 or 500 tons each, and the rest of 200, 150, and 100
+tons. On coming to anchor they saluted us, which we returned. The
+Spanish admiral, who was a knight, sent a boat for me, and received me
+in a friendly manner, desiring to learn the news of England and
+Flanders. After partaking of a banquet, I departed; and when I was in
+the boat, he desired my interpreter to say that he expected I should
+strike my flag to him, as general of the Emperors fleet. When I was come
+on board my own ship this was told me by the interpreter, and as I
+refused compliance and continued to display my ensign, some Spanish
+soldiers began to discharge their arquebusses at us. At this time some
+Spanish gentlemen came on board to see our ship, to whom I said that if
+they did not order their men to cease firing, I would fire my cannon
+through their ships. They accordingly went away and made their soldiers
+give over firing, and coming back said that they had punished their men.
+I then shewed them our ship, and gave them such cheer as I had, which
+they were well pleased with. Next day they sent for me to dine with
+them, saying their general was sorry any one should have desired me to
+strike my flag, which had been done without his orders.
+
+The 17th we set sail, and got sight of the coast of Africa, and running
+along shore came off Rio del Oro which is almost under the tropic of
+Cancer. The 25th we got sight of the land in the bay to the north of
+Cape Verd[273]. The 26th taking our interpreter Francisco and Francis
+Castelin along with me in the pinnace, I went to the Tiger, which was
+nearer shore than the other ships. With her and the other ships we ran
+W. by S. and W.S.W, till about 4 o'clock, P.M. when we were close on
+board the cape. Then going about 4 leagues beyond the cape S.W. we found
+a fair island, and beside that two or three islands of high rocks, full
+of various kinds of sea fowl and pigeons, with other kinds of land
+birds, and so numerous that the whole island was covered with their
+dung, and as white as if the whole had been covered by chalk. Within
+these islands was a fine bay; and close by the rocks we had 18 fathoms
+and good ground[274]. The 27th, as no negroes came to us, we went along
+shore in the pinnace, and going beyond the point of the bay (Cape
+Emanuel) we found a fair island (_Goree_) with a goodly bay, and saw
+some negroes on the main who waved us on shore. Going a-land, they told
+us that they had elephants teeth, musk[275], and hides for traffic; but
+as the captain of the Christopher was not willing to stop, we went on
+board and made sail, On inquiry, some of the negroes said there had been
+no ships there for 8 months, others said six, and some only four, and
+that they were French ships.
+
+[Footnote 273: The bay of Yof, in lat. 15° N. long. 17° 20' W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 274: Obviously the Bird isles, which are 4-1/2 leagues E.S.E.
+from Cape Verd, not W.S.W. as in the text.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 275: What is here called musk must have either been civet or
+ambergris.--E.]
+
+The 10th of March we fell in with the coast of Guinea, 5 leagues east of
+Cape _Monte_, beside a river called Rio das Palmas. At this place I got
+19 elephants teeth, and 2 1/2oz. of gold. The 13th we came to Rio
+Sestro, and next day sent our boats for water, and delivered such wares
+to the Christopher and Tiger as they needed. The 15th we sent the Tiger
+to another river for water, and to try what she could do for grains. We
+here learnt that three French ships had been at this river two months
+before, two six weeks ago, and one only a fortnight past, all of which
+had gone eastwards to the Mina. Getting few grains, and many of our men
+falling sick at this unwholesome place, and considering that the French
+ships were before us, we left the Rio Sestro on the 19th, and made all
+sail for the Mina[276]. The 21st we came to Rio de Potos, where our
+boats went for water, and where I got 12 small elephants teeth. The 31st
+we came to _Hanta_, where I sold some _Manillios_.
+
+On the 1st of April we had sight of 5 Portuguese ships, on which we
+stood out to sea to gain the wind of them, which we had done if the
+wind had kept its ordinary course at S.W. and W.S.W. but this day it
+kept with a _flow_ always at E. and E.S.E. so that they had the wind of
+us and chased us to leeward till near night, when all but one that
+sailed badly were within shot of us. It then fell calm, and the wind
+came round to S.W. at which time the Christopher was about 4 leagues to
+leeward of us. We tacked in the Minion, and gained the wind of the
+Portuguese admiral and other three of his ships; when he cast about and
+fired at us, which we returned, shooting him four or five times through.
+Several of their shots went through our sails, but none of our men were
+hurt. The Christopher was still to leeward, though the Tiger and the
+pinnace had joined us; but as it was night we did not think it
+adviseable to lay him on board; wherefore, after firing two hours or
+more, we three stood out to sea, and fired a gun to give notice to the
+Christopher. We joined the Christopher on the 2d, which had exchanged
+shots with the Portuguese the night before about midnight, and we agreed
+to seek the Portuguese, keeping however to windward of the place where
+we meant to trade. We accordingly ran all day on the 3d to the S.W. in
+search of the Portuguese ships, but could not see them, and stood
+towards the shore at night. When we made the shore on the 4th, we found
+ourselves off Lagua, 30 leagues to the eastwards of our reckoning, owing
+to the currents setting east. Going on shore with our negro interpreter,
+we learned that there were four French ships on the coast: One at
+_Perinnen_, 6 leagues west of Lagua; one at _Weamba[277]_, 4 leagues
+east of Lagua; a third at _Perecow[9]_, 4 leagues east of Weamba; and
+the fourth at _Egrand[10]_, 4 leagues east of Perecow. We accordingly
+proceeded toward Weamba, where we saw one of the French ships under sail
+to which we gave chase; and lest we should over-shoot her in the night,
+the Minion was brought to anchor, and the Tiger and Christopher followed
+the chase all night.
+
+[Footnote 276: The Mina is here to be considered as the gold coast of
+Guinea, called Mina or the mines on account of its great produce in gold
+dust. The castle of St George del Mina, is usually called in these early
+voyages _the castle._--E.]
+
+[Footnote 277: Or Wiamba, where the English had afterwards a
+fort.--Astl. I. 172. d.]
+
+[278][Footnote 278: 9 This seems to have been little Barakhow, or
+Berow.--Astl. I. 172. c.]
+
+[279][Footnote 279: 10 Probably Akkara, where the English, Dutch, and
+Danes had afterwards separate forts--Astl. 1.172. d.]
+
+The 5th we found three French ships at anchor: One called _La Foi_ of
+Harfleur of 200 tons, the second the _Venturuse_ of Harfleur of 100, and
+third the _Mulet de Batville_ of Rouen of 120 tons. On nearing them, we
+in the Minion were determined to lay the admiral on board, while the
+Christopher boarded the vice-admiral, and the Tiger the smallest. But
+they weighed and got under sail, on which the Christopher, being our
+headmost ship, bore down on La Foi, and we in the Minion on the Mulet,
+which we took; but the Venturuse sailed so swift that we could not take
+her. The one we took was the richest except the admiral, which had taken
+80 libs, of gold, the Venturuse having only 22 libs.; while our prise
+had 50. They had been above two months on the coast; but three others
+had been there before them, and had departed a month before our arrival,
+having swept the coast of 700 pounds of gold. Having continued the chase
+all that day and night, and the next day till 3 P.M. and being unable to
+get up with them, we were afraid of falling too far to leewards, and
+made sail back to the shore. On the 7th, I convened the captains
+masters and merchants of all our three ships, when we weighed the gold
+taken in the prize, being 50 libs. 5 oz., after which we put men out of
+all our ships into the prize to keep her. On the 12th, on coming to
+_Egrand_, having taken all the goods out of the prize, we offered to
+sell the ship to the Frenchmen; but she was so leaky that they would not
+have her, and begged us to save their lives by taking them into our
+ships. So we agreed to take out all the victuals and sink the ship,
+dividing the men among us.
+
+On the 15th, it was proposed to proceed to Benin, but most of our people
+refused; wherefore it was agreed to remain as long as we could on the
+coast of Mina, leaving the Minion at Egrand, sending the Tiger to
+Perecow 4 leagues, west, and the Christopher to Weamba 10 leagues west,
+with directions in case of seeing any force they were unable to cope
+with, to come to leewards to us in the Minion at Egrand. We remained
+here till the last of April, by which time many of our men fell sick and
+six of them died, and we could only trade with the natives three or four
+days of the week, as on the other days they could not come off to us.
+The 3d May, as the pinnace had not come to us with cloth from the other
+ships, as promised, we sold French cloth, giving only three yards for
+every _fuffe_. The 5th the negroes left us, saying they would be back in
+four days. The 8th all our own cloth being sold, I called the people
+together, to ask them whether they chose to remain till the prize cloth
+was all sold. They answered, that as several of our men were dead, and
+twenty now sick, they would not tarry, but desired that we should repair
+to the other two ships. On the 10th we accordingly sailed in quest of
+the other ships, meaning to try what we could do at Don Johns town. The
+11th we joined the Christopher, which had done little. The 13th the
+Tiger was sent down to Egrand, as we found no trade worth while at
+Perinnen. The 14th the pinnace was sent with cloth to Weamba, where she
+had before got 10 libs. of gold.
+
+The 21st we anchored before Don Johns town; and on the 22d we manned our
+boats and went close in shore, but the negroes would not come to us. The
+24th our pinnace came to us from Cormantine, where they had taken 2
+libs. 5 oz. of gold. The 25th the master of the Christopher sent his
+boat on shore at Mowre for ballast, when the negroes attempted to drive
+them off with stones; but our men slew and hurt several of them, then
+burnt their town and stove all their canoes. The 27th we went to
+Cormantine, where we were joined next day by the Christopher. The 2d
+June the Tiger came to us from Egrand and the pinnace from Weamba, the
+two having procured 50 libs. of gold. The 4th we made sail and plied to
+windward for Chama, not being able to remain longer for want of
+victuals, and especially as our drink ran short. The 7th we saw five
+Portuguese ships at anchor beside the castle. The 8th George and Binny
+came off to us, and brought about 2 libs. of gold. The 21st we put 25
+Frenchmen into our pinnace with such victuals as we could spare, and
+sent them away. The 25th we put to sea on our homeward voyage. The 30th
+we fell in again with the land, 18 leagues to leeward of the place
+whence we had taken our departure, having been deceived by the current
+which sets continually towards the east. The 7th July we fell in with
+the island of San Thome [280], where we wished to come to anchor; but
+the wind coming about we again made sail. From that time till the 13th
+we were tossed about by baffling winds, and that day fell in again with
+San Thome.
+
+[Footnote 280: They must have fallen far to leeward, as San Thome is to
+the east of the Bight of Benin, almost 8 degrees or 160 leagues to the
+east of St George del Mina.--E.]
+
+This is a very high island, and being on the west side of it, we had
+sight of a very high small and upright peak, like the steeple of a
+church, which peak is directly under the equator, and to the westward of
+the south end of the island there is a small islet about a mile from the
+larger one. The 3d of August we set sail from San Thome with the wind at
+S.W. The 22d we fell in with the island of _Salt_, one of the Cape
+Verds; and being told by a Scotsman whom we had taken among the French
+on the coast of Guinea, that there were fresh provisions to be had at
+this place, we came to anchor. The 24th we went on shore, where we found
+no houses, and only saw four men who would not come near us. We found
+plenty of goats, but so wild that we could only take three or four of
+them; but we got plenty of fish, and great quantities of sea-fowl on a
+small isle close to the larger one. At night the Christopher broke her
+cable and lost an anchor, so that we were all obliged to weigh and put
+to sea. On this occasion the Scotsman was left on shore, by what means
+we could not tell, unless that he had been found asleep by the
+inhabitants and carried off-prisoner.
+
+The 25th the master of the Tiger came on board, and reported his ship to
+be in so leaky a condition and his men so weak, that he was unable to
+keep her afloat, and requested therefore that we would return to the
+island to take every thing out of her, that she might be abandoned: This
+day on mustering the companies of all the three ships, we had not above
+30 sound men altogether[281]. The 25th we had sight of St Nicholas, and
+the day following of St Lucia, St Vincent, and St Anthony, four of the
+Cape Verd islands, which range with each other from N.W. by W. to S. E
+by E. The 26th we were unable to weather the Cape of St Anthony, and
+this day Philip Jones the master of the Christopher came on board and
+reported that they were not able to keep the Tiger from sinking as she
+was so leaky, and the master and crew were very weak. The 3d September I
+went on board the Tiger, accompanied by the masters and merchants to
+survey her, and we found her in a very leaky condition with only six men
+fit for duty, one of whom was master gunner. It was agreed accordingly
+to take all the men into the other ships, with all the goods we could
+save, and then to abandon her. We began discharging her on the 5th, and
+having taken out her guns, victuals, gold, and every thing we could by
+the 8th, we set her adrift in lat. 25° N.
+
+[Footnote 281: At this place Hakluyt observes in a note, the
+great inconvenience of staying late on the coast of Guinea. He ought
+rather to have said, the impropriety of sailing too late for that
+coast.--E.]
+
+On the 6th October, the ships companies both of the Minion and
+Christopher being very weak, so as to be scarce able to keep the sea, we
+agreed to make for Vigo, which is frequented by many English ships; but
+having a fair wind for England on the 10th, we fired two shots to give
+notice to the Christopher of our intention, and immediately shaped our
+course homewards. She followed us, and we carried a light to direct her
+way; but it was so thick next morning that we could not see her, and as
+she was not seen all that day we concluded she had either shot ahead of
+us in the night or had bore up for Spain, for which reason we hoisted
+our top-sails and continued our course, being then 120 leagues from
+England and 45 leagues N.W. by W. from Cape Finister, having then only
+six mariners and six merchants in health. The 16th we had a great storm
+at W.S.W. by W. which came on about 6 P.M. and our men being very weak
+and unable to hand our sails, we that night lost our mainsail, foresail,
+and spritsail, and were obliged to _lie hulling_ till the 18th, when we
+got up an old foresail; and finding ourselves now in the Channel, we
+bore up for the coast of England. In less than two hours the old
+foresail was blown from the yard by a spurt of wind, and we were again
+forced to lie to till the morning of the 19th, when we got up an old
+bonnet, or topsail, on the fore-yard, which by the blessing of God
+brought us to the Isle of Wight in the afternoon of the 20th.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Commodities most in request in Guinea, between Sierra Leone and the
+farthest extremity of the Mine or Gold Coast[282]._
+
+   MANILS of brass, and some of lead.
+   Basins of various sorts, but chiefly of latten.
+   Pots holding a quart or more, of coarse tin.
+   Some wedges of iron.
+   Margarites, and other low priced beads.
+   Some blue coral.
+   Some horse nails.
+   Linen cloth, principally.
+   Basins of Flanders.
+   Some low priced red cloth, and kersies.
+   Dutch kettles with brass handles.
+   Some large engraved brass basins, like those usually set upon.
+   their cupboards in Flanders.
+   Some large pewter basins and ewers, graven.
+   Some lavers for holding water.
+   Large low priced knives.
+   Slight Flemish caskets.
+   Low priced Rouen chests, or any other chests.
+   Large pins.
+   Coarse French coverlets.
+   Good store of packing sheets.
+
+Swords, daggers, prize-mantles and gowns, cloaks, hats, red cans,
+Spanish blankets, axe heads, hammers, short pieces of iron, slight
+bells, low priced gloves, leather bags, and any other trifling articles
+you will.
+
+[Footnote 282: This list is appended in Hakluyt's Collection, II.513. to
+the present voyage, and is therefore here retained, though several of
+the articles are scarcely intelligible.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Notices of an intended Voyage to Guinea, in 1561[283]._
+
+
+In 1561, a voyage was projected to Guinea by Sir William Gerard, knight,
+in conjunction with Messrs William Hunter, Benjamin Gonson, Anthony
+Hickman, and Edward Castelin. Only one ship, the Minion, was to have
+gone, and seems to have been intended to assist and bring home the
+Primrose and Flower de Luce, then on the coast. The command of the
+Minion was to have been given to John Lok, probably the same person who
+made the Guinea voyage in 1554, already inserted. The adventurers sent
+the following articles of instruction to Mr Lok, dated 8th September
+1561. But Lok declined undertaking the voyage for the following reasons,
+dated Bristol, 11th December 1561. 1. The Minion was so spent and
+rotten, as to be incapable of being put into a fit and safe condition
+for the voyage. 2. The season was too far gone to perform the voyage in
+safety. 3. He understood that four large Portuguese ships were in
+readiness to intercept him. 4. It was quite uncertain that he should
+meet the Primrose, which would have completed her voyage before he could
+get to the coast, or would have been obliged to quit the coast by that
+time for want of provisions. It will be seen in the succeeding section,
+that the Minion actually proceeded on her voyage; on the 25th February
+1562, and the unsuccessful events of that voyage fully justify the
+refusal of Lok.
+
+[Footnote 283: Hakluyt, II. 514. Astl I. 176.--As this voyage did not
+take place, it is principally inserted here for the sake of the
+instructions devised by the adventurers, for the conduct of the intended
+expedition--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Remembrance for Mr Lok, at his Arrival on the Coast of Guinea._
+
+
+When God shall bring you upon the coast of Guinea, you are to make
+yourself acquainted, as you proceed along the coast, with all its
+rivers, havens and harbours or roadsteads, making a plat or chart of the
+same, in which you are to insert every place that you think material,
+all in their true elevations. You will also diligently inquire what are
+the commodities to be procured it the several places you visit, and what
+wares are best calculated for their markets.
+
+As it is believed that a fort on the coast of Mina or the Gold Coast of
+Guinea, in the King of _Habaan's_ country, might be extremely useful,
+you are especially desired to consider where such a fort could be best
+placed, in which you will carefully note the following circumstances.
+
+1. That the situation be adjoining to the sea on one side, so that ships
+and boats may conveniently load and unload--2. What is the nature of the
+soil in its neighbourhood?--3. What wood or timber may be had, and in
+what manner it may be carried?--4. What victuals are to be procured in
+the country, and what kinds of our victuals are best calculated for
+keeping there?--5. The place must be strong by nature, or capable of
+being made strong at small expence, and of being afterwards defended by
+a small number of men.--6. How water is to be procured, if none is to be
+had on the ground where the fort is to stand, or at least near it?--7.
+What help may be expected from the natives, either in building the fort,
+or in defending it afterwards?
+
+You are to sound the King of Habaan at a distance as to the erection of
+a fort in his country, taking notice how he relishes the proposal; yet
+you will so manage your communication with him that he may not
+understand your meaning, although there may seem good cause for its
+erection.
+
+You will search the country as far as you can, both along the coast and
+into the interior. You will likewise use your endeavours to learn what
+became of the merchants who were left at Benin. In all other important
+matters worthy of notice, we have no doubt that you will diligently
+inquire and report to us, which we leave to your good discretion. We
+also request, that you will aid and assist our factors on all occasions,
+both with your advice and otherwise; and thus God send you safely to
+return.
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Voyage to Guinea in 1562, written by William Rutter_[284].
+
+
+This relation is said by Hakluyt to have been written by _one_ William
+Rutter, to his master Anthony Hickman, being an account of a voyage to
+Guinea in 1562, fitted out by Sir William Gerard, Sir William Chester,
+Thomas Lodge, Anthony Hickman, and Edward Castelin. Three of these are
+named in the preceding section as adventurers in the voyage proposed to
+have gone under John Lok, and two of those former adventurers are here
+omitted, while two others seem now to have supplied their places, yet it
+appears to have been the same adventure, as the Minion was the ship
+employed, notwithstanding the unfavourable report made of her by Lok.
+But it would appear that the Primrose was likewise of this voyage, as
+this relation is contained in a letter from Rutter to his master, dated
+on board the Primrose, 16th of August 1563.--E.
+
+[Footnote 284: Hakluyt, II. 516. Astley, I. 177.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Worshipful Sir,--My duty remembered, this shall serve to inform you of
+our voyage, since our departure from Dartmouth on the 25th February
+1562, of which I then gave you notice. Having prosperous wind, we
+arrived at Cape Verd on the 20th of March, whence we sailed along the
+coast, to our first appointed port at Rio de Sestos, where we arrived on
+the morning of the 3d April. We here saw a French ship, which
+immediately made sail to leeward, and we came to anchor in the road.
+While we merchants were on shore engaged in traffic, the French ship
+returned and hailed [_saluted_] our ship with his ordnance. We were
+informed by the negroes that the Frenchman had been trading there for
+three days before our arrival, and we concluded, if he sent his boat on
+shore again for trade, that we would not suffer him till we had
+conferred with his captain and merchants. Accordingly his pinnace came
+on shore in the afternoon, but we desired them not to trade till we had
+spoken with their captain and merchants, whom we desired might come that
+night on board our admiral for that purpose. They did so accordingly,
+when Mr Burton and John Munt went on board the Minion, where the
+Frenchmen were, and it was determined that they should wait eight days
+beside us, allowing us to trade quietly the while. They were much
+dissatisfied with this arrangement, and sailed next morning eastwards to
+the Rio de Potos, on purpose to hinder our trade on the coast.
+
+In consequence of this the merchants, both of the Minion and our ship,
+determined to go on before them, understanding that no other ships had
+gone that way before this season, and that our trade might not be
+interrupted by the French ship. We did so accordingly, and found the
+Frenchman trading to the westward at Rio de Potos, on which we passed
+them, and came to Rio de Potos on the 12th of April, where we remained
+trading till the 15th, when we departed with the Primrose for the river
+St Andrew, where we agreed to wait for the Minion. We arrived at that
+river on the 17th, and the Minion came to us that same day, saying that
+they had met with a great ship and a caravel, belonging to the king of
+Portugal, off cape Palmas, bound for the Mina, which had chased them,
+and shot many guns at them, which the Minion had returned in her
+defence. God be praised the Minion had no harm at that time. We then
+concluded to hasten to cape Three-points, to endeavour to intercept them
+on their way to the castle. We lay to off the cape for two days and a
+night, and suspecting they were past, the Minion went in shore and sent
+her boats to a place called _Anta_, where we had formerly traded. Next
+morning, the 21st of April, we again saw the ship and caravel to
+seaward, when we immediately made sail, endeavouring to get between them
+and the castle, but to our great grief they got to the castle before us,
+when they shot freely at us and we at them, but as they had the aid of
+the castle against us we profited little.
+
+We set sail in the afternoon, and came to the town of Don Juan, called
+_Equi_, where, on the morning of the 22d, we went ashore to trade: But
+the negroes refused till they should hear from Don Luis the son of Don
+Juan, who was now dead. On the 23d Don Luis and Pacheco came to Equi,
+intending to trade with us; but two gallies came rowing along shore from
+the castle of Mina, meaning to interrupt our trade. We made sail on the
+24th, and chased the gallies back to the castle, at which the negroes
+were much pleased; but they desired us to proceed to _Mowre_, about
+three leagues farther on, where they promised to follow us, being in
+fear of the Portuguese. We did so, and remained there waiting for the
+merchants who were coming with gold from the country, but Antonio, the
+son of Don Luis, and Pacheco were on board the Minion. In the morning of
+the 25th the two gallies came again from the castle, the weather being
+very calm, and shot at us, hitting us three times. Shortly after the
+land-wind sprung up, at which time we observed the great ship and the
+caravel making towards us, on which we weighed and made sail to attack
+them; but it was night before we could get up with them, and we lost
+sight of them in the night. While returning towards the coast next night
+we agreed to proceed to Cormantin; and next morning, the 28th, we found
+ourselves very near the large ship and the two gallies, the caravel
+being close in-shore. It being very calm, the two gallies rowed towards
+the stern of the Minion, and fought with her most part of the forenoon.
+During the engagement a barrel of powder blew up in the steward room of
+the Minion, by which misfortune the master-gunner, the steward, and most
+of the gunners were sore hurt. On perceiving this, the gallies became
+more fierce, and with one shot cut half through the Minions foremast, so
+that she could bear no sail till that were repaired. Soon after this,
+the great ship sent her boat to the gallies, which suddenly withdrew.
+
+After their departure we went on board the Minion to consult what was
+best to be done: As the Minion was sore discomfited by the accident, and
+as we knew the negroes durst not trade with us so long as the gallies
+were upon the coast, it was agreed to return to the Rio Sestos. In the
+morning of the 14th of May we fell in with the land, and being uncertain
+whereabout we were, the boats were sent on shore to learn the truth,
+when it was found to be the Rio Barbas. We remained there taking in
+water till the 21st, and lost five of our men by the Hack pinnace
+over-setting. Departing on the 22d, we came to the Rio Sestos on the 2d
+of June. We again set sail on the 4th, and arrived this day, the 6th of
+August, within sight of the Start Point in the west of England, for
+which God be praised. We are very side and weak, not having above twenty
+men in both ships, able for duty. Of our men 21 have died, and many more
+are sore hurt or sick. Mr Burton has been sick for six weeks, and is now
+so very weak that, unless God strengthen him, I fear he will hardly
+escape. Your worship will find inclosed an abstract of all the goods we
+have sold, and also of what commodities we have received for them;
+reserving all things else till our meeting, and to the bearer of this
+letter.
+
+In this voyage there were brought home, in 1563, 166 elephants teeth,
+weighing 1758 libs, and 22 buts full of grains, or Guinea pepper.
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_Supplementary Account of the foregoing Voyage_ [285]
+
+
+An account of the preceding voyage to Guinea in 1563, of which this
+section is an abstract, was written in verse by Robert Baker, who
+appears to have been one of the factors employed by the adventurers. It
+is said to have been written in prison in France, where he had been
+carried on his subsequent voyage, which forms the subject of the next
+section, and was composed at the importunity of his fellow traveller and
+fellow-prisoner, Mr George Gage, the son of Sir Edward Gage. Of this
+voyage he relates nothing material, except a conflict which happened
+with the negroes at a certain river, the name of which is not mentioned;
+neither does the foregoing relation by Rutter give any light into the
+matter. But from the circumstance of the ship commencing her return for
+England immediately after this adventure, it must have happened at the
+river Sestos or Sestre, which was the last place they touched at, and
+where they staid three days, as stated both in this and the proceeding
+narratives.--Astl. I. 179.
+
+
+[Footnote 285: Astley, I. 179. Hakluyt, II. 518.]
+
+In the versified relation, which is to be found at large in the last
+edition of Hakluyts Collection, London, 1810, Vol. II. p.518-523, he
+complains of being detained in a French prison, against all law and
+right, as the war between England and France was concluded by a peace.
+The account given of this conflict with the negroes is to the following
+effect--E.
+
+One day while the ship was at anchor on the coast of Guinea, Baker
+ordered out the small pinnace or boat, with nine men well armed, to go
+on shore to traffic. At length, having entered a river, he saw a great
+number of negroes, whose captain came to him stark naked, sitting in a
+canoe made of a log, _like a trough to feed hogs in_. Stopping, at some
+distance, the negro chief put water on his cheek, not caring to trust
+himself nearer till Baker did the like. This signal of friendship being
+answered, and some tempting merchandize being shewn him, the chief came
+forward and intimated by signs, that he would stand their friend if some
+of these things were given him. He was gratified, and many things given
+to others of the natives. After trading all day with the negroes, Baker
+returned at night to the ship, carrying the chief along with him, where
+he clothed him and treated him kindly. In return the chief promised by
+signs to freight them in a day or two. While on board, Baker observed
+that the chief took much notice of the boat which was left astern, of
+the ship loaded with goods; yet not suspecting he had any ill design, no
+farther care or precaution was taken of the boat.
+
+Next morning the chief was carried on shore, and trade or barter went on
+with the negroes as on the day before; and at the return of Baker to the
+ship, the boat was fastened to the stern, and the goods left in her as
+usual. In the night the negro captain came with two or three canoes, and
+was noticed by the watch to be very busy about the boat. On giving the
+alarm, the negroes fled; but on hoisting up the boat, all the goods were
+carried of. Vexed at being so tricked, the English went next morning up
+the river to the negro town, in order to recover their goods; but all
+their signs were to no purpose, as the negroes would neither understand
+them nor acknowledge the theft. On the contrary, as if wronged by the
+charge, and resolved to revenge the affront, they followed the English
+down the river in 100 canoes, while as many appeared farther down ready
+to intercept their passage. In each canoe were two men armed with
+targets and darts, most of which had long strings to draw them back
+again after they were thrown.
+
+Being hard pressed, they discharged their arquebuses upon the negroes,
+who leapt into the water to avoid the shot. The English then rowed with
+all their might to get to sea; but the negroes getting again into their
+canoes, pursued and overtook them. Then drawing near, poured in their
+darts with accurate aim. The English kept them off with their pikes and
+halberts, and many of the negroes being slain or wounded by the English
+arrows and hail-shot from the arquebuses, they retreated. But when the
+English had expended all their arrows, the negroes came on again, and
+made many attempts to board the boat. The negro chief, who was a large
+tall man, advanced in his canoe under cover of his target, with a
+poisoned dart in his hand, in order to board; and as he pressed forward,
+the masters-mate thrust a pike through his target and throat, which
+dispatched him. While the mate was striving to disengage his pike, which
+stuck fast in the shield, he was wounded by a dart; yet drew the dart
+from his flesh and killed with it the negro who had wounded him. The
+enemy continued the fight closer than ever, and did great mischief with
+their darts, which made wide and grievous wounds. The gunner received
+two desperate wounds, and lost a great deal of blood, and the brave
+masters-mate, while standing firmly in his post, was struck through the
+ribs by a dart, on pulling out which his bowels followed, and he fell
+down dead. On perceiving this, the negroes gave a great shout, and
+pressed to enter the boat where the mate had stood, imagining as so many
+of the English were wounded they would now soon yield. But four of those
+remaining in the pinnace kept them off with their pikes, while the other
+four at the oars made the best of their way to sea.
+
+At length they got out of the river, and the negroes retired having
+expended all their darts. This was fortunate for the English, as six of
+the remaining eight were desperately wounded, one of whom was Robert
+Baker, the author of this narrative, and only two remained who were able
+to handle the oars, so that they made very slow progress to the ship,
+which appears to have been four leagues from the shore. When they got on
+board they were all so faint that none of them were able to stand. After
+having their wounds dressed they refreshed themselves; but as Robert
+Baker had more occasion for rest than food he went to bed, and when he
+awoke in the morning the ship was under sail for England.
+
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Voyage to Guinea in 1563 by Robert Baker_[286]
+
+
+This relation, like the former, is written in verse, and only contains a
+description of two adventures that happened in the voyage, one of which
+proved extremely calamitous to those concerned in it, among whom was the
+author. From the title or preamble, we learn that the adventurers in
+this voyage were Sir William Gerard, Sir William Chester, Sir Thomas
+Lodge, Benjamin Gonson, William Winter, Lionel Ducket, Anthony Hickman,
+and Edward Castelin. There were two ships employed, one called the John
+Baptist, of which Lawrence Rondell was master, and the other the Merlin,
+Robert Revell master. The factors were Robert Baker, the author,
+Justinian Goodwine, James Gliedell, and George Gage. They set out on
+their voyage in November 1563, bound for Guinea and the river Sestos,
+but the port whence they fitted out is nowhere mentioned. After the
+unlucky disaster that befel him in Guinea in the year before, Baker had
+made a kind of poetical vow not to go near that country any more; but
+after his return to England, and recovery from his wounds, he soon
+forgot past sorrows; and being invited to undertake the voyage in
+quality of factor, he consented.--Astley.
+
+[Footnote 286: Astley I. 180. Hakluyt, II. 523-531. The prose abstract
+here inserted is chiefly taken from Astleys collection, carefully
+compared with the original versified narrative in Hakluyt.--E.]
+
+After we had been at sea two days and a night, the man from the main-top
+descried a sail or two, the tallest of which they immediately made up
+to, judging her to be the most valuable; and, as captains are in use to
+do[287], I hailed her to know whence she was. She answered from France,
+on which we _waved_ her, but she nothing dismayed, _waved_ us in return.
+I immediately ordered armed men aloft into the main and fore-tops, and
+caused powder to be laid on the poop to blow up the enemy if they should
+board us that way. At the sound of trumpets we began the fight,
+discharging both chain and bar-shot from our brazen artillery; while the
+Frenchmen, flourishing their swords from the main-yard, called out to
+us to board their ship. Willing to accept their invitation, we plied
+them warmly with our cannon, and poured in flights of arrows, while our
+arquebuses plied them from loop-holes, and we endeavoured to set their
+sails on fire by means of arrows and pikes carrying wildfire. I
+encouraged, the men to board, by handing spiced wine liberally among
+them, which they did with lime-pots, after breaking their nets with
+stones, while those of our men who were aloft entered the enemys tops,
+after killing those who defended them. Then cutting the ropes, they
+brought down the yard by the board, and those who entered the ship plied
+the enemy so well with their swords, that at length the remaining
+Frenchmen ran below deck and cried out for quarter. Having thus become
+masters of the ship, we carried her to the _Groin_ in Spain, or Corunna,
+where we sold the ship and cargo for ready money.
+
+[Footnote 287: In these early trading voyages, the chief factor, who
+here appears to have been Baker, seems to have had the supreme
+command--Astl. I. 180. b.]
+
+After this we proceeded on our voyage and arrived in Guinea. One day
+about noon, I went with eight more in a boat towards the shore to trade,
+meaning to dispatch my business and be back before night. But when we
+had got near the shore, a furious tempest sprung up, accompanied with
+rain and thunder, which drove the ships from their anchors out to sea;
+while we in the boat were forced to run along the coast in search of
+some place for shelter from the storm, but meeting none, had to remain
+all night near the shore, exposed to the thunder, rain, and wind in
+great jeopardy. We learnt afterwards that the ships returned next day in
+search of us, while we rowed forward along the coast, supposing the
+ships were before us, and always anxiously looked out for them; but the
+mist was so great that we could never see them nor they us. The ships
+continued, as we were told afterwards, looking out for us for two or
+three days; after which, concluding that we had inevitably perished in
+the storm, they made the best of their way for England.
+
+Having been three days in great distress for want of food, we at length
+landed on the coast and exchanged some of our wares with the negroes for
+roots and such other provisions as they had, and then put to sea again
+in search of the ships, which we still supposed were before us or to
+leeward, wherefore we went down the coast to the eastwards. We continued
+in this manner ranging along shore for twelve days, seeing nothing but
+thick woods and deserts, full of wild beasts, which often appeared and
+came in crowds at sunset to the sea shore, where they lay down or played
+on the sand, sometimes plunging into the water to cool themselves. At
+any other time it would have been diverting to see how archly the
+elephants would fill their trucks with water, which they spouted out
+upon the rest. Besides deer, wild boars, and antelopes, we saw many
+other wild beasts, such as I had never seen before.
+
+We often saw a man or two on the shore, who on seeing us used to come
+off in their almadias or canoes; when casting anchor we offered such
+wares as we had in the boat for fish and fresh water, or provisions of
+their cooking, and in this way we procured from them roots and the fruit
+of the palm tree, and some of their wine, which is the juice of a tree
+and is of the colour of whey. Sometimes we got wild honeycombs; and by
+means of these and other things we relieved our hunger; but nothing
+could relieve our grief, fatigue and want of sleep, and we were so sore
+depressed by the dreadful situation in which we were placed, that we
+were ready to die, and were reduced to extreme weakness. Having lost all
+hope of rejoining the ships, which we now concluded were either lost or
+gone homewards, we knew not how to conduct ourselves. We were in a
+strange and distant country, inhabited by a people whose manners and
+customs were entirely different from ours; and to attempt getting home
+in an open boat destitute of every necessary was utterly impossible. By
+this time we found we had passed to leeward of _Melegete_ or the grain
+coast, and had got to the Mina or gold coast of Guinea, as the negroes
+who now came on board spoke some Portuguese, and brought off their
+weights and scales for the purpose of trade, asking where were our
+ships. To this we answered, in hopes of being the better treated, that
+we had two ships at sea, which would be with them in a day or two.
+
+We now consulted together how they should best proceed. If we continued
+at sea in our boat, exposed by day to the burning heat of the sun which
+sensibly consumed us by copious perspiration, and to the frequent
+tornadoes or hurricanes by night, accompanied with thunder, lightning
+and rain; which deprived us of all rest, we could not possibly long hold
+out. We were often three days without a morsel of food; and having sat
+for twenty days continually in our boat, we were in danger of losing the
+use of our limbs for want of exercise, and our joints were so swollen by
+the scurvy, that we could hardly stand upright. It was not possible for
+us to remain much longer in the boat in our present condition, so that
+it was necessary to come to some resolution, and we had only three
+things to choose. The first was to repair to the castle of St George del
+Mina, which was not far off, and give ourselves up to the Portuguese who
+were Christians, if we durst trust them or expect the more humanity on
+that account. Even the worst that could happen to us from them was to be
+hanged out of our misery; yet possibly they might have some mercy on us,
+as nine young men such as we were might be serviceable in their gallies,
+and if made galley slaves for life we should have victuals enough to
+enable us to tug at the oar, whereas now we had both to row and starve.
+
+The next alternative was to throw ourselves upon the mercy of the
+negroes, which I stated was very hopeless and discouraging, as I did not
+see what favour could be expected from a beastly savage people, whose
+condition was worse than that of slaves, and who possibly might be
+cannibals. It was likewise difficult for us to conform ourselves to their
+customs, so opposite to ours; and, we could not be expected, having
+always lived on animal food, to confine ourselves to roots and herbs
+like the negroes, which are the food of wild beasts. Besides, having
+been always accustomed to the use of clothes, we could not for shame go
+naked. Even if we could get the better of that prejudice, our bodies
+would be grievously tormented and emaciated by the scorching heat of the
+sun, for want of that covering and defence to which we had been
+accustomed. The only other course was to stay at sea in the boat, and
+die miserably. Being determined to run any risk at land, rather than to
+continue pent up in a narrow boat, exposed to all the inclemencies of
+the weather day and night, and liable to be famished for want of
+victuals, I gave it as my opinion that we had better place confidence in
+the Christian Portuguese than in the negroes who lived like so many
+brutes. We how determined to throw ourselves on the mercy of the
+Portuguese, and hoisting sail shaped our course for the castle of St
+George del Mina; which was not above 20 leagues distant. We went on all
+day without stopping till late at night, when we perceived a light on
+shore. Concluding that this might be a place of trade, our boatswain
+proposed to cast anchor at this place, in hopes that we might be able to
+procure provisions next morning in exchange for some of our wares. This
+was agreed upon, and on going next morning near the shore we saw a
+watchhouse upon a rock, in the place whence the light had proceeded
+during the night, and near the watchhouse a large black cross was
+erected. This made us doubtful whereabout we were, and on looking
+farther we perceived a castle which perplexed us still more[288].
+
+[Footnote 288: It appears in the sequel that this fort or castle had
+been recently erected by the Portuguese at the western point or
+head-land of Cape Three-points, and of which there are no notices in any
+of the preceding voyages on this part of the coast.--Astley, I. 132, a.]
+
+Our doubts were quickly solved by the appearance of some Portuguese, one
+of whom held a white flag in his hand which he waved as inviting us to
+come on shore. Though we were actually bound in quest of the Portuguese,
+yet our hearts now failed us, and we tacked about to make from the
+shore. On being seen from the castle, a gun was fired at us by a negro,
+the ball from which fell within a yard of our boat. At length we turned
+towards the shore to which we rowed, meaning to yield ourselves up; but
+to our great surprise, the nearer we came to the shore the more did the
+Portuguese fire at us; and though the bullets fell thick about us we
+continued to advance till we got close under the castle wall, when we
+were out of danger from their cannon. We now determined to land in order
+to try the courtesy of the Portuguese, but were presently assailed by
+showers of stones from the castle: wall, and saw a number of negroes
+marching down to the beach with their darts and targets, some of them
+having bows and poisoned arrows. Their attack was very furious, partly
+from heavy stones falling into the boat which threatened to break holes
+in her bottom, as well as from flights of arrows which came whizzing
+about our ears, and even wounded some of us: Therefore being in
+desperation, we pushed off from the shore to return to sea, setting four
+of our men to row, while the other five determined to repay some part of
+the civility we had received, and immediately handled our fire-arms and
+bows. We employed these at first against the negroes on the beach, some
+of whom soon dropped; and then against the Portuguese who stood on the
+walls dressed in long white-shirts and linstocks in their hands, many of
+which were dyed red by means of the English arrows. We thus maintained
+our ground a long while, fighting at our leisure, regardless of the
+threats of the enemy, as we saw they had no gallies to send out to make
+us prisoners. When we had sufficiently revenged their want of
+hospitality, we rowed off, and though we knew that we must pass through
+another storm of bullets from the castle, we escaped without damage.
+
+When we got out to sea, we saw three negroes rowing after us in an
+almadia, who came to inquire to what country we belonged, speaking good
+Portuguese. We told them we were Englishmen, and said we had brought
+wares to trade with them if they had not used us so ill. As the negroes
+inquired where our ship was, we said we had two at sea well equipped,
+which would soon come to the coast to trade for gold, and that we only
+waited their return. The negroes then pretended to be sorry for what had
+happened, and intreated us to remain where we were for that day, and
+promised to bring us whatever we were in want of. But placing no
+confidence in their words, we asked what place that was, and being
+answered that it was a Portuguese castle at the western head-land of
+Cape Three-points, we hoisted sail and put to sea, to look out for some
+more friendly place.
+
+We now resolved to have no more reliance on the kindness of the
+Portuguese, of which we had thus sufficient experience, and to make
+trial of the hospitality of the negroes; for which purpose we sailed
+back about 30 leagues along the coast, and coming to anchor, some
+natives came off to the boat, to all of whom we gave presents. By this
+we won their hearts, and the news of such generous strangers being on
+the coast soon brought the kings son to our boat. On his arrival, I
+explained our sad case to him as well as I could by signs, endeavouring
+to make him understand that we were quite forlorn, having been abandoned
+by our ships, and being almost famished for want of food, offering him
+all the goods in our boat if he would take us under his protection and
+relieve our great distress. The negro chief was moved even to tears, and
+bid us be comforted. He went then on shore to know his fathers pleasure
+regarding us, and returning presently invited us to land. This was
+joyful news to us all, and we considered him as a bountiful benefactor
+raised up to us by the goodness of Providence. We accordingly fell to
+our oars in all haste to pull on shore, where at least 500 negroes were
+waiting our arrival; but on coming near shore the surf ran so high that
+the boat overset, on which the negroes plunged immediately into the
+water and brought us all safe on shore. They even preserved the boat and
+all that was in her, some swimming after the oars, and others diving for
+the goods that had sunk. After this they hauled the boat on shore and
+brought every thing that belonged to us, not daring to detain the most
+trifling article, so much were they in awe of the kings son, who was a
+stout and valiant man, and having many excellent endowments.
+
+They now brought us such provisions as they used themselves, and being
+very hungry we fed heartily, the negroes all the while staring at us
+with much astonishment, as the common people are used to do in England
+at strange outlandish creatures. Notwithstanding all this apparent
+humanity and kindness, we were still under great apprehensions of the
+negroes, all of whom were armed with darts. That night we lay upon the
+ground among the negroes, but never once closed our eyes, tearing they
+might kill us while asleep. Yet we received no hurt from them, and for
+two days fared well; but finding the ships did not come for us, as they
+expected would soon have been the case, when likewise they looked to
+have had a large quantity of goods distributed among them in reward for
+their hospitality, they soon became weary of us; and after lessening our
+allowance from day to day, they at length left us to shift for
+ourselves. In this forlorn state, we had to range about the woods in
+search of fruits and roots, which last we had to dig from the ground
+with our fingers for want of any instruments. Hunger had quite abated
+the nicety of our palates, and we were glad to feed on every thing we
+could find that was eatable. Necessity soon reconciled us to going
+naked, for our clothes becoming rotten with our sweat fell from our
+backs by degrees, so that at length we had scarcely rags left to cover
+our nakedness. We were not only forced to provide ourselves in food, but
+had to find fuel and utensils to dress it. We made a pot of clay dried
+in the sun, in which we boiled our roots, and roasted the berries in the
+embers, feasting every evening on these varieties. At night we slept on
+the bare ground, making a great fire round us to scare away the wild
+beasts.
+
+What with the entire change in our manner of living, and the heat and
+unhealthiness of the climate, our people sickened apace; and in a short
+time our original number of nine was reduced to three. To those who died
+it was a release from misery, but we who remained were rendered more
+forlorn and helpless than before. At length, when we had abandoned all
+hopes of relief, a French ship arrived on the coast, which took us on
+board and carried us to France, which was then at war with England,
+where we were detained prisoners.
+
+   A prisner therefore I remaine,
+     And hence I cannot slip
+   Till that my ransome be
+     Agreed upon and paid:
+   Which being levied yet so hie,
+     No agreement can be made.
+   And such is lo my chance,
+    The meane time to abide;
+   A prisner for ransome in France,
+     Till God send time and tide.
+   From whence this idle rime
+     To England I do send:
+   And thus, till I have further time,
+     This tragedie I end.
+
+SECTION XI.
+
+_A Voyage to Guinea, in 1564:, by Captain David Carlet_[289].
+
+
+At a meeting of merchant adventurers, held at the house of Sir William
+Gerard, on the 11th July 1564, for setting forth a voyage to Guinea, the
+following chief adventurers were present, Sir William Gerard, Sir
+William Chester, Sir Thomas Lodge, Anthony Hickman, and John Castelin.
+It was then agreed that Francis Ashbie should be sent to Deptford for
+his letters to Peter Pet, to go about rigging of the Minion at the
+charges of the queens majesty, after which Francis Ashbie was to repair
+with these letters to Gillingham, with money to supply our charges
+there.
+
+[Footnote 289: Hakluyt, II. 531. Astley, I. 134.]
+
+It was also agreed that every one of the five partners shall forthwith
+call upon their partners to supply, towards this new rigging and
+victualling L.29, 10s. 6d., for every L.100 value. Also that every one
+of the five partners shall forthwith bring in L.50, towards the
+furniture of the premises. Likewise, if Mr Gonson give his consent that
+the Merlin shall be brought round from Bristol to Hampton, that a letter
+shall be drawn under his hand, before order be given in the same.
+
+The ships employed in this voyage were, the Minion belonging to the
+queen, David Carlet, captain, the John Baptist of London, and the Merlin
+belonging to Mr Gonson. The success of this voyage in part appears by
+certain brief relations extracted out of the second voyage of Sir John
+Hawkins to the West Indies, made in the year 1564, which I have thought
+good to set down for want of more direct information, which hitherto I
+have not been able to procure notwithstanding every possible
+endeavour[290].
+
+[Footnote 290: This is the substance of Hakluyt's introduction to the
+following brief relation of the present voyage.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Sir John, then only Mr Hawkins, departed from Plymouth with a prosperous
+wind for the West Indies, on the 18th of October 1564, having under his
+command the Jesus of Lubec of 700 tons, the Salomon of 140 tons, a bark
+named the Tiger of 50 tons, and a pinnace called the Swallow of 30 tons,
+having in all 170 men, well supplied with ordnance and provisions for
+such a voyage. While casting loose the foresail, one of the officers in
+the Jesus was killed by the fall of a block, giving a sorrowful
+beginning to the expedition. After getting ten leagues out to sea, they
+fell in with the Minion, a ship belonging to the queen, of which David
+Carlet was captain, and her consort the John Baptist of London; which
+two ships were bound for Guinea. The two squadrons, as they may be
+called, saluted each other with some pieces of ordnance, after the
+custom of the sea; after which the Minion parted company to seek her
+other consort the Merlin of London, which was out of sight astern,
+leaving the John Baptist in company with Hawkins.
+
+Continuing their voyage with a prosperous wind until the 21st, a great
+storm arose at N.E. about 9 o'clock at night, which continued 23 hours,
+in which storm Hawkins lost sight of the John Baptist and of his pinnace
+called the Swallow, the other three ships being sore tossed by the
+tempest. To his great joy the Swallow joined company again in the night,
+10 leagues to the north of Cape Finister, having been obliged to go
+_roomer_, as she was unable to weather that cape against a strong
+contrary wind at S.W. On the 25th, the wind still continuing contrary,
+he put into Ferol in Galicia, where he remained five days, and gave out
+proper instructions to the masters of the other ships for keeping
+company during the rest of the voyage.
+
+On the 26th of the month the Minion came into Ferol, on which Mr Hawkins
+saluted her with some guns, according to the custom of the sea, as a
+welcome for her safe arrival: But the people of the Minion were not in
+the humour of rejoicing, on account of the misfortune which had happened
+to their consort the Merlin, whom they had gone to seek on the coast of
+England when they parted from Mr Hawkins. Having met with her, they kept
+company for two days; when, by the negligence of one of the gunners of
+the Merlin, the powder in her gun-room took fire, by which her stern was
+blown out and three of her men lost, besides many sore hurt, who saved
+their lives in consequence of their brigantine being at her stern; for
+the Merlin immediately sunk, to the heavy loss of the owners and great
+grief of the beholders.
+
+On the 30th of the month, Mr Hawkins and his ships, together with the
+Minion and her remaining consort the John Baptist, set sail in the
+prosecution of their voyage with a prosperous gale, the Minion having
+both brigantines at her stern. The 4th of November they had sight of
+Madeira, and the 6th of Tenerife, which they thought to have been grand
+Canary, as they reckoned themselves to the east of Tenerife, but were
+not. The Minion and her consort, being 3 or 4 leagues a head of the
+ships of Mr Hawkins, kept the course for Tenerife, of which they had a
+better view than the other ships, and by that means they parted company.
+
+Hawkins and his ships continued his voyage by Cape Verd and Sierra
+Leone, after which he crossed the Atlantic ocean and came to the town of
+Burboroata on the coast of the Terra Firma in the West Indies, or South
+America; where he afterwards received information of the unfortunate
+issue of the Guinea voyage, in the following manner. While at anchor in
+the outer road on the 29th of April 1565, a French ship came in called
+the Green Dragon of Newhaven, of which one Bon-temps was captain, which
+saluted the English squadron after the custom of the sea, and was
+saluted in return. This ship had been at the Mina, or Gold coast of
+Guinea, whence she had been driven off by the Portuguese gallies, and
+obliged to make for the Terra Firma to endeavour to sell her wares. She
+informed that the Minion had been treated in the same manner; and that
+the captain, David Carlet, with a merchant or factor and twelve
+mariners, had been treacherously made prisoners by the negroes on their
+arrival on that coast, and remained in the hands of the Portuguese;
+besides which they had lost others of their men through the want of
+_fresh water_, and were in great doubts of being able to get home the
+ships[291].
+
+[Footnote 291: Hakluyt might have said whether they did come home or
+not, which he certainly might have known; but he often leaves us in the
+dark as to such matters.--Astl. I. 185. a.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Note_.--It may not be improper to state in this place, that no ship
+need be reduced to utter distress for want of _fresh water_ at sea; as
+distilled sea water is perfectly fresh and wholesome. For this purpose,
+all ships bound on voyages of any length, ought to have a still head
+worm and cooler adapted to the cooking kettle, to be used when needed,
+by which abundance of fresh water may always be secured while cooking
+the ships provisions, sufficient to preserve the lives of the crew. In
+default of that useful appendage, a still may be easily constructed for
+the occasion, by means of the pitch kettle, a reversed tea kettle for a
+head, and a gun barrel fixed to the spout of the tea kettle, the breach
+pin being screwed out, and the barrel either soldered to the spout, or
+fixed by a paste of flour, soap and water, tied round with rags and
+twine. The tea kettle and gun barrel are to be kept continually wet by
+means of swabs and sea water, to cool and condense the steam. This
+distilled water is at first vapid and nauseous, both to the taste and
+the stomach; but by standing open for some time, especially if agitated
+in contact with air, or by pumping air through it, as is commonly done
+to sweeten putrid water, this unpleasant and nauseous vapidness is soon
+removed.
+
+The nautical world owes this excellent discovery, of distilled sea water
+being perfectly fresh, to the late excellent and ingenious Dr James
+Lino, first physician to the general hospital of the navy at Haslar near
+Portsmouth during the American war, the author of two admirable works,
+on the Scurvy, and the Means of Preserving the Health of Seamen during
+long voyages, to which the British navy, and seamen in general, owe
+inestimable advantages. The editor, while giving this useful hint to
+seamen engaged on long voyages, is happy in having an opportunity of
+bearing this feeble testimony of honourable respect to the friend of his
+youth, under whom he had the happiness and advantage of serving, in that
+magnificent asylum of the brave defenders of the glory and prosperity of
+our king and country, for the last three years of the American war.
+Besides being an eminent and experienced physician, Dr Lind was a man of
+exemplary humanity, and of uncommon urbanity and singleness of manners:
+He was truly the seaman's friend. The rules and expedients which he
+devised and proposed, founded on the solid basis, of observation and
+experience, for Preserving the Health of Seamen on long voyages, were
+afterwards employed and perfected by the great navigator and discoverer
+COOK, and by his pupils and followers; and are now universally
+established in our glorious navy, to the incalculable advantage of the
+service.
+
+In high northern or southern latitudes, solid clear ice melted affords
+good fresh water, the first runnings being thrown away as contaminated
+by adhering sea water. White cellular ice is quite unfit for the
+purpose, being strongly impregnated with salt. In future articles of our
+work, several opportunities will occur in which these two expedients for
+supplying ships with fresh water will be amply detailed. But on the
+present opportunity, it seemed proper to mention these easy and
+effectual expedients for preserving the health and lives of seamen, when
+in want of fresh water by the ordinary means.--Ed.
+
+
+SECTION XII.
+
+_A Voyage to Guinea and the Cape de Verd Islands in 1566, by George
+Fenner_[292]
+
+
+Three ships were employed on this voyage, the admiral, called the Castle
+of Comfort, George Fenner general[293] of the expedition, and William
+Bats master; the May-Flower, vice-admiral, William Courtise master; the
+George, John Heiwood captain, and John Smith of Hampton master; besides
+a small pinnace. Walter Wren, the writer of the narrative, belonged to
+the George.
+
+[Footnote 292: Hakluyt, II. 533. Astley, I. 185.]
+
+[Footnote 293: This general was probably head factor--E.]
+
+We departed from Plymouth on the 10th December 1566, and were abreast of
+Ushant on the 12th. On the 15th we got sight of Cape Finister, and lost
+company of our admiral that night, for which reason we sailed along the
+coast of Portugal, hoping our admiral might be before us. Meeting a
+French ship on the 18th and getting no intelligence of our admiral, we
+made sail for the Canaries, and fell in with the island of Tenerife on
+the 28th, where we came to anchor in a small bay, at which there were
+three or four small houses, about a league from the town of Santa Cruz.
+In this island there is a marvellous high hill called the Peak, and
+although it is in lat. 28° N. where the air is as warm in January as it
+is in England at midsummer, the top of this hill, to which no man has
+ever been known to ascend, is seldom free from snow even in the middle
+of summer. On the 3d January 1567, we departed from this place, going
+round the western point of the island, about 12 or 14 leagues from Santa
+Cruz, and came into a bay right over against the house of one Pedro de
+Souza, where we came to anchor on the 5th, and heard that our admiral
+had been there at anchor seven days before us, and had gone thence to
+the island of Gomera, to which place we followed him, and coming to
+anchor on the 6th over against the town of Gomera, we found our admiral
+at anchor to our great mutual satisfaction. We found here Edward Cooke
+in a tall ship, and a ship of the coppersmiths of London, which had been
+treacherously seized by the Portuguese in the bay of Santa Cruz on the
+coast of Barbary, or Morocco, which ship we left there all spoiled. At
+this place we bought 14 buts of wine for sea stores, at 15 ducats a but,
+which had been offered to us at Santa Cruz for 8, 9, or 10 ducats. The
+9th we went to another bay about three leagues off, where we took in
+fresh water; and on the 10th we sailed for Cape Blanco on the coast of
+Africa.
+
+The 12th we came to a bay to eastwards of Cape Pargos, (_Barbas?_) which
+is 35 leagues from Cape Blanco, but being unacquainted with that part of
+the coast, we proceeded to Cape Blanco, off which we had 16 fathoms two
+leagues from shore, the land being very low and all white sand. At this
+place it is necessary to beware of going too near shore, as when in 12
+or 10 fathoms you may be aground within two or three casts of the lead.
+Directing our course on the 17th S. and S. by E. we fell into a bay
+about 16 leagues east of Cape Verd, where the land seemed like a great
+number of ships under sail, owing to its being composed of a great
+number of hummocks, some high some low, with high trees upon them. When
+within three leagues of the land we sounded and had 28 fathoms over a
+ground of black ouze. This day we saw much fish in sundry _sculs_ or
+shoals, swimming with their noses at the surface. Passing along this
+coast we saw two small round hills about a league from the other,
+forming a cape, and between them great store of trees, and in all our
+sailing we never saw such high land as these two hills. The 19th we came
+to anchor at the cape in a road, fast by the western side of two
+hills[294], where we rode in 10 fathoms, though we might safely have
+gone into five or six fathoms, as the ground is good and the wind always
+blows from the shore.
+
+[Footnote 294: The paps of Cape Verd are about a League S.S.E. from the
+extreme west point of the Cape.--E.]
+
+At this place some of our officers and merchants went on shore with the
+boat unarmed, to the number of about 20 persons, among whom were Mr
+George Fenner the general, his brother Edward Fenner, Thomas Valentine,
+John Worme, and Francis Leigh, merchants, John Haward, William Bats,
+Nicholas Day, John Thomson, and several others. At their coming on shore
+they were met by above 100 negroes armed with bows and arrows. After
+some talk pledges were interchanged, five of the English being delivered
+into their hands, and three negroes taken on board the admirals skiff.
+Our people mentioned the merchandize they had brought, being linen and
+woolen cloth, iron, cheese, and other articles; on which the negroes
+said that they had civet, musk, gold, and grains to give in exchange,
+with which our people were well pleased. The negroes desired to see our
+merchandize, on which one of the boats was sent back to the ships, while
+our general and merchants remained in the other with the three negroe
+pledges, our five men walking about on shore among the negroes. On the
+return of the boat from the ship with goods, bread, wine, and cheese
+were distributed among the natives. At this time two of the negroe
+pledges, on pretence of sickness, were allowed to go on shore, promising
+to send two others in their stead. On perceiving this, Captain Haiward
+began to dread some perfidy, and retreated towards the boat, followed by
+two or three negroes, who stopped him from going on board, and made
+signs for him to bring them more bread and wine, and when he would have
+stepped into the boat, one of them caught him by the breeches, but he
+sprung from him and leapt into the boat. As soon as he was in, one of
+the negroes on shore began to blow a pipe, on which the negroe pledge
+who remained in the boat, suddenly drew Mr Wormes sword, cast himself
+into the sea and swam on shore. The negroes immediately laid hands on
+our men that were on shore, and seized three of them with great
+violence, tore their clothes from their backs, and left them nothing to
+cover them. Then many of them shot so thick at our men in the boats that
+they could scarcely handle their oars, yet by God's help they got the
+boats away, though many of them were hurt by the poisoned arrows. This
+poison is incurable, if the arrow pierce the skin so as to draw blood,
+except the poison be immediately sucked out, or the part hurt be cut out
+forthwith; otherwise the wounded man inevitably dies in four days.
+Within three hours after any part of the body is hurt, or even slightly
+pricked, although it be the little toe, the poison reaches the heart,
+and affects the stomach with excessive vomiting, so that the person can
+take neither meat nor drink.
+
+The persons seized in this treacherous manner by the negroes were
+Nicholas Day, William Bats, and John Thomson, who were led away to a
+town about a mile from the shore. The 20th we sent a boat on shore with
+eight persons, among whom was the before-mentioned John Thomson[295] and
+our interpreter, who was a Frenchman, as one of the negroes spoke good
+French. They carried with them two arquebuses, two targets, and a
+_mantell?_ and were directed to learn what ransom the negroes demanded
+for Bats and Day whom they detained. On coming to the shore and telling
+the negroes the nature of their errand, Bats and Day were brought from
+among some trees quite loose, but surrounded by some 40 or 50 negroes.
+When within a stone's throw of the beach, Bats broke suddenly from them
+and ran as fast as he could into the sea towards the boat; but
+immediately on getting into the water he fell, so that the negroes
+retook him, violently tearing off his clothes. After this some of the
+negroes carried our two men back to the town, while the rest began to
+shoot at our people in the boat with their poisoned arrows, and wounded
+one of our men in the small of the leg, who had nearly died in spite of
+every thing our surgeons could do for him. Notwithstanding this
+unjustifiable conduct, our general sent another message to the negroes,
+offering any terms they pleased to demand as ransom for our men. But
+they gave for answer, that three weeks before we came an English ship
+had forcibly carried off three of their people, and unless we brought or
+sent them back we should not have our men, though we gave our three
+ships and all their lading. On the 21st a French ship, of 80 tons came
+to the place where we were, intending to trade with the negroes, and
+seeing that the Frenchmen were well received by the natives, our general
+told them of our two men being detained, and wished them to endeavour
+to procure their release, promising L.100 to the Frenchmen if they
+succeeded. We then committed this affair to the management of the
+Frenchmen, and departed. Of our men who were hurt by the poisoned
+arrows, four died, and one had to have his arm cut off to save his life.
+Andrews, who was last hurt, lay long lame and unable to help himself,
+and only two recovered.
+
+[Footnote 295: It is not said how he had got away from the negroes.--E.]
+
+While between Cape Verd and Bonavista on the 26th, we saw many flying
+fishes of the size of herrings, two of which fell into the boat which we
+towed at our stern. The 28th we fell in with Bonavista, one of the Cape
+de Verd islands, which is 86 leagues from that cape. The north side of
+that island is full of white sandy hills and dales, being somewhat high
+land. That day we came to anchor about a league within the western
+point, in ten fathoms upon fine sand, but it is quite safe to go nearer
+in five or six fathoms, as the ground is every where good. The 30th we
+went into a bay within a small island about a league from our first
+anchorage, where we took plenty of various kinds of fish. Whoever means
+to anchor in this bay may safely do so in four or five fathoms off the
+south point of the small island; but must beware of the middle of the
+bay, where there is a ledge of rocks on which the sea breaks at low
+water, although then they are covered by three fathoms water. The last
+day of January, our general went on shore in the bay to some houses,
+where he found twelve Portuguese, the whole island not having more than
+30 inhabitants, who were all banished men, some condemned to more years
+of exile and some to less, and among them was a simple man who was their
+captain. They live on goat's flesh, cocks and hens, with fresh water,
+having no other food except fish, which they do not care for, neither
+indeed have they any boats wherewith to catch them. They told us that
+this island had been granted by the king of Portugal to one of his
+gentlemen, who had let it at 100 ducats of yearly rent, which was paid
+by the profit on goats skins, of which 40,000 had been sent from that
+island to Portugal in one year. These men made us very welcome,
+entertaining us as well as they could, giving us the carcasses of as
+many he-goats as we pleased, and even aided us in taking them, bringing
+them down for us from the mountains on their asses. They have great
+store of oil procured from tortoises, which are _fishes_ that swim in
+the sea, having shells on their backs as large as targets. It only rains
+in this island for three months in every year, from the middle of July
+to the middle of October; and the climate is always very hot. Cows have
+been brought here, but owing to the heat and drought they always died.
+
+We left Bonavista, or Buenavista, on the 3d February, and fell in the
+same day with another island called Mayo, 14 leagues distant; there
+being a danger midway between the two islands, but it is always seen and
+easily avoided. We anchored in a fine bay on the N.W. side of Mayo, in
+eight fathoms on a good sandy bottom; but weighed next day and went to
+another island called St Jago, about five leagues E. by S. from Mayo. At
+the westermost point of this island, we saw a good road-stead, having a
+small town by the waterside, close to which was a fort or battery. We
+here proposed to have anchored on purpose to trade; but before we were
+within shot, they let fly two pieces at us, on which we went to leeward
+along shore two or three leagues, where we found a small bay and two or
+three houses, off which we anchored in 14 fathoms upon good ground.
+Within an hour after we had anchored, several persons both on foot and
+horseback were seen passing and repassing opposite the ships. Next day a
+considerable force of horse and foot was seen, and our general sent a
+message to know whether they were disposed to trade with us. They
+answered that we were made welcome as merchants, and should have every
+thing we could reasonably demand. On this our general ordered all the
+boats to be made ready, but doubting the good faith of the Portuguese,
+caused the boats to be well armed, putting a _double base_ in the head
+of his pinnace and two _single bases_ in the skiff, directing the boats
+of the May-flower and George to be similarly armed. On rowing towards
+the shore with all the boats, the general was surprised to see above 60
+horsemen and 200 foot all armed to receive us, for which reason he sent
+a flag of truce to learn their intentions. Their answer was fair and
+smooth, declaring that they meant to treat us like gentlemen and
+merchants, and desired that our general might come on shore to converse
+with their captain. When our general approached the shore in his skiff,
+they came towards him in great numbers, with much seeming politeness,
+bowing and taking off their bonnets, and earnestly requesting our
+general and the merchants to come on shore. He declined this however,
+unless they would give sufficient hostages for our security. At length
+they promised to send two satisfactory hostages, and to give us water,
+provisions, money, and negroes in exchange for our merchandize, and
+desired a list of our wares might be sent on shore; all of which our
+general promised to do forthwith, and withdraw from the shore, causing
+our _bases, curriers_[296], and arquebuses to be fired off in
+compliment to the Portuguese, while at the same time our ships saluted
+them with five or six cannon shot. Most of the Portuguese now left the
+shore, except a few who remained to receive the list of our commodities;
+but, while we meant honestly and fairly to trade with them as friends,
+their intentions were treacherously to betray us to our destruction, as
+will appear in the sequel.
+
+[Footnote 296: Bases and curriers must have been some small species of
+ordnance, capable of being used in boats; arquebuses were matchlock
+muskets.--E.]
+
+About two leagues to the west of where we lay, there was a town behind a
+point of land, where the Portuguese had several caravels, and two
+brigantines or row barges like gallies. With all haste the Portuguese
+fitted out four caravels and these two brigantines, furnishing them with
+as many men and cannon as they could carry; and as soon as it was night
+these vessels made towards us with sails and oars, and as the land was
+high, and the weather somewhat dark and misty, we did not see them till
+they were almost close on board the May-flower, which lay at anchor
+about a gun-shot nearer them than our other ships. When within gun-shot
+of the May-flower, one of the watch chanced to see a light, and then
+looking out espied the four ships and gave the alarm. The Portuguese,
+finding themselves discovered, began immediately to fire their cannon,
+_curriers_, and arquebuses; then lighted up certain tubes of wild fire,
+and all their people both on shore and in their ships set up great
+shouts, while they continued to bear down on the May-flower. With all
+the haste we could, one of our guns was got ready and fired at them, on
+which they seemed to hesitate a little; But they recharged their
+ordnance, and again fired at us very briskly. In the mean time we got
+three guns ready which we fired at them, when they were so near that we
+could have shot an arrow on board. Having a fine breeze of wind from the
+shore, we hoisted our foresail and cut our cable, making sail to join
+our admiral to leeward, while they followed firing sometimes at us and
+sometimes at our admiral. At length one shot from our admiral had the
+effect to make them retire, when they made away from us like cowardly
+traitors. During all this time, though they continually fired all their
+guns at us, not a man or boy among us was hurt; but we know not what
+were the effects of our shot among them.
+
+Seeing the villany of these men, we set sail immediately for an island
+named _Fuego_, or the Fire island, twelve leagues from St Jago, where we
+came to anchor on the 11th February, opposite a white chapel at the west
+end of the island, half a league from a small town, and about a league
+from the western extremity of the island. In this island, there is a
+remarkably high hill which burns continually, and the inhabitants told
+us, that about three years before, the whole island had like to have
+been destroyed by the prodigious quantity of fire which it discharged.
+About a league west from the chapel we found a fine spring of fresh
+water, whence we supplied our ships. They have no wheat in this island,
+instead of which they grow millet, which makes good bread, and they
+likewise cultivate peas like those of Guinea. The inhabitants are
+Portuguese, and are forbidden by their king to trade either with the
+English or French, or even to supply them with provisions, or any other
+thing unless forced. Off this island is another named Brava, or St John,
+not exceeding two leagues over, which has abundance of goats and many
+trees, but not above three or four inhabitants.
+
+On the 25th of February we set sail for the Azores, and on the 23d of
+March we got sight of one of these islands called Flores, to the north
+of which we could see another called Cuervo, about two leagues distant.
+The 27th we came to anchor at Cuervo, opposite a village of about a
+dozen mean houses; but dragging our anchors in the night during a gale
+of wind, we went to Flores, where we saw strange streams of water
+pouring from its high cliffs, occasioned by a prodigious rain. The 18th
+April we took in water at Flores, and sailed for Fayal, which we had
+sight of on the 28th, and of three other islands, Pico, St George, and
+Graciosa, which are round about Fayal. The 29th we anchored in 22
+fathoms water in a fine bay on the S.W. side of Fayal, over against a
+small town, where we got fresh water and fresh provisions. In this
+island, according to the report of the inhabitants, there grows green
+woad, which they allege is far better than the woad of St Michael or of
+Tercera.
+
+The 8th of May we came to Tercera, where we found a Portuguese ship, and
+next morning we saw bearing down, upon us, a great ship and two
+caravels, which we judged to belong to the royal navy of Portugal, as
+they really were, and therefore made ready for our defence. The large
+ship was a galliass, of about 400 tons and 300 men, well appointed with
+brass guns both large and small, some of their shot being as large as a
+mans head; and the two caravels were both well appointed in men and
+ammunition of war. As soon as they were within shot of us, they waved us
+amain with their swords as if in defiance, and as we kept our course
+they fired at us briskly, while we prepared as well as we could for our
+defence. The great ship gave us a whole broadside, besides firing four
+of her greatest guns which were in her stern, by which some of our men
+were hurt, while we did our best to answer their fire. At this time two
+other caravels came from shore to join them, and two pinnaces or boats
+full of men, whom they put on board the great ship, and then returned to
+the shore with only two men in each. The ship and caravels gave us three
+attacks the first day, and when night came they ceased firing, yet kept
+hard by us all night, during which we were busily employed knotting and
+spicing our ropes and strengthening our bulwarks.
+
+Next day the Portuguese were joined by four great caravels or armadas,
+three of which were not less than 100 tons each, the fourth being
+smaller, but all well armed and full of men. All these came up against
+us, in the admiral or Castle of Comfort, and we judged that one of the
+caravels meant to lay us on board, as we could see them preparing their
+false nettings and all other things for that purpose, for which the
+galliasse came up on our larboard side, and the caravel on our
+starboard. Perceiving their intention, we got all our guns ready with
+bar-shot, chain-shot, and grape; and as soon as they came up, and had
+fired off their guns at us, thinking to lay us on board, we gave them
+such a hearty salutation on both sides of us, that they were both glad
+to fall astern, where they continued for two or three hours, there being
+very little wind. Then our small bark the George came up to confer with
+us, and as the Portuguese ships and caravels were coming up again to
+attack us, the George, while endeavouring to get astern of us, fell to
+leeward, and was so long of filling her sails for want of wind, that the
+enemy got up to us, and she got into the middle of them, being unable to
+fetch us. Then five of the caravels assailed her all round about, yet
+she defended herself bravely against them all. The great ship and one
+caravel came to us and fought us all day. The May-flower being well to
+windward, took the benefit of that circumstance, and kept close hauled
+all that day, but would not come near us. When night came, the enemy
+ceased firing, yet followed us all night. During these repeated attacks
+we had some men slain and several wounded, and our tackle much injured;
+yet we did our best endeavour to repair all things, resolving to defend
+ourselves manfully, putting our trust in God. In the night the
+May-flower came up to us, on which our captain requested they would
+spare us half a dozen fresh men, but they would not, and bore away
+again.
+
+Next morning, the enemy seeing us at a distance from one another, came
+up against us with a great noise of hooping and hallooing, as if
+resolved to board or sink us; yet although our company was small, lest
+they might think us any way dismayed, we answered their shouts, and
+waved upon them to board us if they durst, but they did not venture.
+This day they gave us four several assaults; but at night they forsook
+us, desisting with shame from the fight which they had begun with pride.
+We had some leaks in our ship from shot holes, which we stopped with all
+speed, after which we took some rest after our long hard labour. In the
+morning the Mayflower joined, and sent six of her men on board us, which
+gave us much relief, and we sent them four of our wounded men.
+
+We now directed our course for England, and by the 2d of June came into
+soundings off the Lizard. On the 3d we fell in with a Portuguese ship,
+the captain of which came on board our admiral, saying that he was laden
+with sugar and cotton. Our merchants shewed him five negroes we had,
+asking him to buy them, which he agreed to do for 40 chests of sugar,
+which were very small, not containing above 26 loaves each. While they
+were delivering the sugar, we saw a large ship and a small one bearing
+down upon us, which our captain supposed to be men of war or rovers, on
+which he desired the Portuguese to take back their sugars, meaning to
+prepare for defence. But the Portuguese earnestly entreated our captain
+not to forsake him, and promised to give him ten chests of sugar in
+addition to the bargain, if we would defend him. To this our captain
+consented, and the rovers seeing that we were not afraid of them, let us
+alone. Next morning two others came up, but on seeing that we did not
+attempt to avoid them, they left us also. The 5th of June we got sight
+of the Start, and about noon were abreast of Lyme bay, where we sounded
+in 35 fathoms water. Next day we came in at the Needles, and anchored at
+a place called Meadhole, under the isle of Wight; from whence we sailed
+to Southampton, where our voyage ended.
+
+
+SECTION XIII.
+
+_Embassy of Mr Edmund Hogan to Morocco in 1577, written by
+himself_.[297]
+
+
+Though not exactly belonging to the subject of the present chapter, yet
+as given by Hakluyt along with the early voyages to Guinea, it has been
+thought proper to be inserted in this place. According to Hakluyt, Mr
+Hogan was one of the sworn esquires of the person to Queen Elizabeth, by
+whom he was sent ambassador to Muley Abdulmeleck, emperor of Morocco and
+king of Fez.--_Hakl_.
+
+[Footnote 297: Hakluyt, II. 541.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+I Edmund Hogan, being appointed ambassador from her majesty the queen to
+the emperor and king Muley Abdulmeleck, departed from London with my
+company and servants on the 22d of April 1577; and embarking in the good
+ship called the Gallion of London, I arrived at Azafi, a port in
+Barbary, on the 21st of May. I immediately sent Leonell Edgerton on
+shore, with my letters to the care of John Williams and John Bampton,
+who dispatched a _trottero_ or courier to Morocco, to learn the emperors
+pleasure respecting my repair to his court. They with all speed gave the
+king notice of it[298]; who, being much satisfied with the intelligence,
+sent next day some of his officers and soldiers to Azafi, with tents and
+other necessaries, so that these captains, together with John Bampton,
+Robert Washborne, and Robert Lion, came late on Whitsunday night to
+Azafi. Having written in my letter, that I would not land till I knew
+the kings pleasure, I remained on board till their arrival; but I caused
+some of the goods to be landed to lighten the ship.
+
+[Footnote 298: It would appear that Williams and Bampton were resident
+at the city of Morocco.--E.]
+
+The 22d of May the Make-speed arrived in the road: and on the 27th,
+being Whitsunday, John Bampton came on board the Gallion with others in
+his company, giving me to understand that the king was rejoiced at my
+safe arrival from the queen of England, and that for my safe conduct he
+had sent four captains and 100 soldiers, together with a horse and
+furniture on which the king was in use to ride. I accordingly landed
+with my suite consisting of ten persons, three of whom were trumpeters.
+The four English ships in the harbour were dressed up to the best
+advantage, and shot off all their ordnance, to the value of twenty marks
+in powder. On coming ashore, I found all the soldiers drawn up on
+horseback, the captains and the governor of the town standing close to
+the water side to receive me, with a jennet belonging to the king for my
+use. They expressed the great satisfaction of their sovereign, at my
+arrival from the queen my mistress, and that they were appointed by the
+king to attend upon me, it being his pleasure that I should remain five
+or six days on shore, to refresh myself before commencing my journey.
+Having mounted the jennet, they conducted me through the town to a fair
+field, where a tent was provided for me, having the ground spread with
+Turkey carpets. The castle discharged a peal of ordnance, and every
+thing necessary was brought to my tent, where I had convenient table and
+lodging, and had other tents for the accommodation of my servants. The
+soldiers environed the tents, and kept watch as long as I remained
+there.
+
+Although I sought a speedier dispatch, I could not be permitted to begin
+my journey till Wednesday the 2d of June, when I mounted towards
+evening, and travelled about ten miles to the first place on the road
+where water was to be had, and there pitched our tents till next
+morning[299]. The 3d we began our journey early, and travelled till ten
+o'clock, when we halted till four, at which time we resumed our journey,
+travelling as long as we had light, making about 26 miles in all that
+day. The 4th being Friday, we travelled in the same manner about 28
+miles, and pitched our tents beside a river, about six wiles from the
+city of Morocco. Immediately afterwards, all the English and French
+merchants came on horseback to visit me, and before night there came an
+_alcayde_ from the king, with 50 men and several mules laden with
+provisions, to make a banquet for my supper, bringing a message from the
+king, expressing how glad he was to hear from the queen of England, and
+that it was his intention to receive me more honourably than ever
+Christian had been before at the court of Morocco. He desired also to
+know at what time I proposed to come next day into his city, as he was
+resolved that all the Christians, and also his own nobles should meet
+me. He desired likewise that John Bampton should wait upon him early
+next morning, which he did accordingly.
+
+[Footnote 299: Having no inns in Barbary, travellers have to encamp or
+lodge in the open fields where they can find water.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+About seven o'clock the next morning, I moved towards the city,
+accompanied by the English and French merchants, and a great number of
+soldiers; and by the time I had gone about two miles, I was met by all
+the Spanish and Portuguese Christians, which I knew was more owing to
+the kings commands than of their own good will,[300] for some of them,
+though they spoke me fair, hung down their heads like dogs, especially
+the Portuguese, and I behaved to them accordingly. When I had arrived
+within two miles of the city, John Bampton rejoined me, expressing that
+the king was so glad of my arrival, that he knew not how sufficiently to
+shew his good will towards the queen and her realm. His counsellors met
+me without the gates; and on entering the city some of the kings footmen
+and guards were placed on both sides of my horse, and in this manner I
+was conducted to the palace. The king sat in his chair of state, having
+his counsellors about him, both Moors and _Elchies_; and, according to
+his order previously given me, I declared my message to him in the
+Spanish language, and delivered her majestys letters. All that I spoke
+at this time in Spanish, he caused one of his _Elchies_ to interpret to
+the Moors who were present in the _Larbe_ tongue. When this was done, he
+answered me in Spanish, returning great thanks to the queen my mistress,
+for my mission, and offering himself and country to be at her majesty's
+disposal; after which he commanded some of his counsellors to conduct me
+to my lodging, which was at no great distance from the court. The house
+appointed for me was very good according to the fashion of the country,
+and was every day furnished with all kinds of provisions at the kings
+charge.
+
+[Footnote 300: The Spaniards and Portuguese were commanded by the king,
+on pain of death, to meet the English ambassador.--Hakluyt.]
+
+I was sent for again to court that same night, and had a conference with
+the king for the space of about two hours, when I declared to him the
+particulars of what had been given me in charge by the queen, and found
+him perfectly willing to oblige her majesty, and not to urge her with
+any demands that might not conveniently be complied with, well knowing
+that his country might be better supplied from England with such things
+as it stood in need of, than England from his country. He likewise
+informed me, that the king of Spain had sent demanding a licence to send
+an ambassador to him, and had strongly urged him not to give credence or
+entertainment to any ambassador that might come from the queen of
+England: "Yet," said he, "I know well what the king of Spain is, and
+what the queen of England and her realm; for I neither like him nor his
+religion, being so governed by the inquisition that he can do nothing of
+himself; wherefore, when his ambassador comes upon the licence I have
+given, he will see how little account I make of him and Spain, and how
+greatly I shall honour you for the sake of the queen of England. He
+shall not come into my presence, as you have done and shall daily; for I
+mean to accept of you as a companion and one of my household, whereas he
+shall wait twenty days after he has delivered his message."
+
+At the end of this speech I delivered him the letters of Sir Thomas
+Gresham; upon which he took me by the hand, and led me down a long court
+to a palace, past which there ran a fair fountain of water, and sitting
+down in a chair, he commanded me to sit upon another, and sent for such
+simple musicians as he had to entertain me. I then presented him with a
+great bass lute, which he thankfully accepted, and expressed a desire to
+hear when he might expect the musicians: I told him great care had been
+taken to provide them, and I did not doubt that they would come out in
+the first ship after my return. He is willing to give them good
+entertainment, with lodgings and provisions, and to let them live
+according to their own law and conscience, as indeed he urges, no one to
+the contrary. He conducts himself greatly by the fear of God, and I
+found him well read in the scriptures both of the old and new testament,
+bearing a greater affection for our nation than any other, because that
+our religion forbids the worship of images; and indeed the Moors call
+him the Christian king. That same night[301] I continued with him till
+twelve o'clock, and he seemed to have taken a great liking for me, as
+he took from his girdle a short dagger set with 200 stones, rubies and
+turquoises, which he presented to me, after which I was conducted back
+to my lodgings.
+
+[Footnote 301: In the original this is said to have been the 1st of
+June; but from what has gone before, that date must necessarily be
+erroneous; it could not be before the 5th of June, on which day he
+appears to have entered Morocco in he morning.--E.]
+
+Next day being Sunday, which he knew was our Sabbath, he allowed me to
+remain at home; but he sent for me on the afternoon of Monday, when I
+had a conference with him, and was entertained with music. He likewise
+sent for me on Tuesday by three o'clock, when I found him in his garden
+laid upon a silk bed, as he complained of a sore leg. Yet after a long
+conference, he walked with me into another orchard, having a fine
+banqueting-house and a large piece of water, in which was a new galley.
+He took me on board the galley, and for the space of two or three hours,
+shewed me what great experience he had in the management of gallies, in
+which he said he had exercised himself for eighteen years of his youth.
+After supper he shewed me his horses, and other matters about his house.
+From that time I did not see him, as he was confined with his sore leg,
+yet he sent messages to me every day. I was sent for to him again on the
+13th of June, about six in the evening, and continued with him till
+midnight, conferring about her majestys commission, and with regard to
+the good usage of our merchants trading in his dominions. He said that
+he would even do more than was asked for the queen and her subjects, who
+might all come to his ports in perfect security, and trade in every part
+of his dominions, likewise that they should at all times freely have
+water and provisions, and in times of war might bring in the ships taken
+from our enemies, and either sell them there, or freely depart at their
+pleasure. Likewise that all English ships, either passing along his
+coast of Barbary, or going through the straits into the Mediterranean or
+Levant sea, should have safe conducts to pass freely to the dominions of
+the Turks or of Algiers, as well as to his own. And he engaged to write
+to the great Turk and the king of Algiers to use our ships and goods in
+a friendly manner. Also, that if any Englishmen should be hereafter made
+captives and brought into his dominions, that they should on no account
+be sold as slaves. Whereupon, declaring the acceptance by her majesty of
+these conditions, to confirm the intercourse of trade between our
+merchants and his dominions, I engaged to satisfy him with such
+commodities as he stood in need of, to furnish the wants of his country
+in all kinds of merchandize, so that he might not require any thing from
+her majesty contrary to her honour and law, or in breach of league and
+amity with the Christian princes her neighbours. That same night I
+presented him with a case of combs[302], and requested his majesty to
+give orders for the lading of the ships back again, as I found there was
+very little saltpetre in the hands of John Bampton. He answered that I
+should have all the aid in his power, as he expected there was some
+store in his house at _Sus,_ and that the mountaineers had much in
+readiness. On my request that he would send orders for that to be
+brought, he promised to do so.
+
+[Footnote 302: This seems rather a singular present to the emperor of
+Morocco.--E.]
+
+The 18th day I was with him again and continued till night, when he
+shewed me his house, with the amusement of duck-hunting with water
+spaniels, and bull-baiting with English dogs. At this time I reminded
+him of sending to _Sus_ about the saltpetre, which he engaged to do; and
+on the 21st the Alcayde Mammie departed on that errand, accompanied by
+Lionel Edgerton and Rowland Guy, carrying with them, on our account and
+the king's, letters to his brother Muley Hamet, the Alcayde Shavan, and
+the viceroy. The 23d the king sent me out of Morocco with a guard, and
+accompanied by the Alcayde Mahomet, to see his garden called
+Shersbonare; and at night of the 24th I was sent for to court to see a
+Morris dance, and a play acted by his _Elchies._ He promised me an
+audience on the next day being Tuesday, but put it off till Thursday,
+when he sent for me after supper, when the Alcaydes Rodwan and Gowry
+were appointed to confer with me; but after a short conversation, I
+requested to be admitted to the king to receive my dispatch. On being
+admitted, I preferred two bills, or requests, of John Bampton respecting
+the provision of saltpetre, also two other petitions for the quiet trade
+of our English merchants, together with petitions or requests for the
+sugars which had been agreed to be made by the Jews, both for the debts
+they had already incurred to our merchants, and those they might incur
+hereafter, as likewise for the proper regulation of the ingenios. I also
+moved him to give orders for the saltpetre and other affairs that had
+been before agreed upon, which he referred me to be settled by the two
+alcaydes. But on Friday the alcaydes could not attend to my affairs, and
+on Saturday Rodwan fell sick. So on Sunday I again made application to
+the king, and that afternoon I was sent for to confer upon the bargain
+with the alcaydes and others, but we could not agree.
+
+Upon Tuesday I wrote a letter to the king for my dispatch, and was
+called again to court that afternoon, when I referred all things to the
+king, accepting his offer of saltpetre. That night the king took me
+again into his galley, when the water spaniels hunted the duck. On
+Thursday I was appointed to weigh the 300 gross quintals of saltpetre;
+and that afternoon the _tabybe_ came to my lodging, to inform me that
+the king was offended with John Bampton for various reasons. Late on
+Sunday night, being the 7th of July, I got the king to forgive all to
+John Bampton, and he promised to give me another audience on Monday.
+Upon Tuesday I wrote to the king for my dispatch, when he sent _Fray
+Lewes_ to me, who said he had orders to write them out. Upon Wednesday I
+wrote again, and the king sent me word that I should come on Thursday to
+receive my dispatches, so that I might depart without fail on Friday the
+12th of July.
+
+According to the kings appointment I went to court on Friday, when all
+the demands I had made were granted, and all the privileges which had
+been requested on behalf of the English merchants were yielded to with
+great favour and readiness. As the Jews resident in Morocco were
+indebted in large sums to our men, the emperor issued orders that all
+these should be paid in full without delay or excuse. Thus at length I
+was dismissed with great honour and special favour, such as had not
+ordinarily been shewn to other Christian ambassadors. Respecting the
+private affairs treated on between her majesty and the emperor, I had
+letters to satisfy her highness in the same. To conclude, having the
+same honourable escort for my return from court that I had on my way
+there, I embarked with my suite, and arrived soon after in England, when
+I repaired to court, and ended my embassy to her majestys satisfaction,
+by giving a relation of my services.
+
+
+
+SECTION XIV.
+
+_Embassy of Henry Roberts from Queen Elizabeth to Morocco in 1585,
+written by himself_[303].
+
+
+Like the former ambassador, Edmund Hogan, Mr Henry Roberts was one of
+the sworn esquires of the person to Elizabeth queen of England, and the
+following brief relation of his embassy, according to Hakluyt, was
+written by himself. This, like the former, does not properly belong to
+the present portion of our arrangement, but seemed necessary to be
+inserted in this place, however anomalous, as an early record of the
+attentions of the English government to extend the commerce and
+navigation of England, the sinews of our strength, and the bulwark of
+our glorious constitution. Mr Roberts appears to have spent three years
+and five months on this embassy, leaving London on the 14th August 1585,
+and returning to the same place on the 12th January 1589, having, in the
+words of Hakluyt, remained at Morocco as _lieger_, or resident, during
+upwards of three years.
+
+[Footnote 303: Hakluyt, II 602.]
+
+In the commencement of this brief notice, Mr Roberts mentions the
+occasion of his embassy as proceeding from the incorporation of a
+company of merchants, for carrying on an exclusive trade from England to
+Barbary; upon which event he was appointed her majestys messenger and
+agent to the emperor of Morocco, for the furtherance of the affairs of
+that company. It is not our intention to load our work with copies of
+formal patents and diplomatic papers; yet in the present instance it may
+not be amiss to give an abridgment of the patent to the Barbary company,
+as an instance of the mistaken principles of policy on which the early
+foundations of English commerce were attempted.--E.
+
+_Letters Patent and Privileges granted in 1585 by Queen Elizabeth, to
+certain Noblemen and Merchants of London, for a Trade to Barbary.[304]_
+
+[Footnote 304: Hakluyt, II. 599.]
+
+Elizabeth, &c.--Whereas our right trusty and well beloved counsellors,
+Ambrose earl of Warwick, and Robert earl of Leicester, and also our
+loving and natural subjects Thomas Starkie, &c.[305] all merchants of
+London, now trading into the country of Barbary, in the parts of Africa
+under the government of Mulley Hamet Sheriffe, emperor of Morocco, and
+king of Fez and Sus, have made it evident to us that they have sustained
+great and grievous losses, and are likely to sustain greater if it
+should not be prevented. In tender consideration whereof, and because
+diverse merchandize of the same countries are very necessary and
+convenient for the use and defence of this our realm, &c. Wherefore we
+give and grant to the said earls, &c. by themselves, their factors or
+servants, and none others, for and during the space of twelve years, the
+whole freedom and liberty of the said trade, any law, &c. to the
+contrary in any way notwithstanding. The said trade to be free of all
+customs, subsidies or other duties, during the said period to us, our
+heirs and successors, &c. Witness ourself at Westminster, the 5th July,
+in the 27th year of our reign.
+
+[Footnote 305: Here are enumerated forty merchants of London, as members
+of the Barbary company in conjunction with the two earls.--E.]
+
+
+_Narrative._
+
+Upon an incorporation granted to the company of Barbary merchants
+resident in London, I Henry Roberts, one of her majesties sworn esquires
+of her person, was appointed messenger and agent from her highness unto
+Mulley Hamet Sheriffe, emperor of Morocco and king of Fez and Sus. And,
+having received my commission, instructions, and her majesties letters,
+I departed from London, the 14th August 1585, in a tall ship called the
+Ascension, in company with the Minion and Hopewell. We arrived in safety
+at the port of Azaffi in Barbary on the 14th of September following. The
+alcaide of the town, who is the kings chief officer there, or as it were
+mayor of the place, received me with all civility and honour, according
+to the custom of the country, and lodged me in the best house in the
+town. From thence I dispatched a messenger, which in their language is
+called a _trottero_, to inform the emperor of my arrival; who
+immediately sent a party of soldiers for my guard and safe conduct, with
+horses for myself, and mules for my baggage and that of my company or
+suite.
+
+Accompanied by Richard Evans, Edward Salcot, and other English merchants
+resident in the country, and with my escort and baggage, I came to the
+river _Tenisist_, within four miles of the city of Morocco, and pitched
+my tents among a grove of olive trees on the banks of that river, where
+I was met by all the English merchants by themselves, and the French,
+Flemish, and various other Christians, who waited my arrival. After we
+had dined, and when the heat of the day was over, we set out about 4
+o'clock in the afternoon for the city, where I was lodged by order of
+the emperor in a fair house in the _Judaria_ or jewry, the quarter in
+which the Jews have their abode, being the best built and quietest part
+of the city.
+
+After I had rested there three days, I was introduced into the kings
+presence, to whom I delivered my message and her majesties letters, and
+was received with much civility. During three years in which I remained
+there as her majesties agent and _ligier_, or resident, I had favourable
+audiences from time to time; as, whenever I had any business, I was
+either admitted to his majesty himself or to his viceroy, the alcaide
+Breme Saphiana, a very wise and discreet person, and the principal
+officer of the court. For various good and sufficient reasons, I forbear
+to put down in writing the particulars of my service.
+
+After obtaining leave, and receiving an honourable reward from the
+emperor, I departed from his court at Morocco the 18th of August 1588,
+to a garden belonging to him called Shersbonare, where he promised I
+should only stay one day for his letters. Yet on one pretence or
+another, I was detained there till the 14th of September, always at the
+kings charges, having 40 or 50 shot attending upon me as my guard. At
+length I was conducted from thence, with every thing requisite for my
+accommodation, to the port of Santa Cruz, six days journey from Morocco,
+where our ships ordinarily take in their lading, and where I arrived on
+the 21st of that month.
+
+I remained at Santa Cruz 43 days. At length, on the 2d November, I
+embarked in company with one Marshok, a Reis or captain, a gentleman
+sent along with me by the emperor on an embassy to her majesty. After
+much foul weather at sea, we landed on new-years day 1589, at St Ives in
+Cornwal, whence we proceeded together by land to London. We were met
+without the city by 40 or 50 of the principal Barbary merchants all on
+horseback, who accompanied us by torch light into the city on Sunday the
+12th January 1589, the ambassador and myself being together in a coach.
+
+
+_Edict of the Emperor of Morocco in favour of the English, obtained by
+Henry Roberts_.
+
+In the name of the most merciful God, &c. The servant of the Supreme
+God, the conqueror in his cause, the successor appointed by God, emperor
+of the Moors, son of the emperor of the Moors, the Shariffe, the Haceny,
+whose honour and estate may God long increase and advance. This our
+imperial commandment is delivered into the hands of the English
+merchants who reside under the protection of our high court, that all
+men who see these presents may understand that our high councils will
+defend them, by the aid of God, from all that may injure or oppress them
+in any way or manner in which they shall be wronged; and that which way
+soever they may travel, no man shall take them captives in these our
+kingdoms, ports, or other places belonging to us; and that no one shall
+injure or hinder them, by laying violent hands upon them, or shall give
+occasion that they be aggrieved in any manner of way. And we charge and
+command all the officers of our ports, havens, and fortresses, and all
+who bear authority of any sort in our dominions, and likewise all our
+subjects generally of all ranks and conditions, that they shall in no
+way molest, offend, wrong, or injure them. And this our commandment
+shall remain inviolable, being registered on the middle day of the month
+Rabel of the year 996.
+
+The date of this letter agrees with the 20th of March 1587, which I,
+Abdel Rahman el Catun, interpreter for his majesty, have translated out
+of Arabic into Spanish, word for word as contained therein.[306]
+
+[Footnote 306: Besides this, Hakluyt gives copies in Spanish and English
+of a letter from Mulley Hamet to the Earl of Leicester, and of a letter
+from Queen Elizabeth to Mulley Hamet, both of which are merely
+complimentary, or relate to unexplained circumstances respecting one
+John Herman an English rebel, whose punishment is required from the
+emperor of Morocco. He had probably contraveened the exclusive
+privileges of the Barbary company, by trading in Morocco.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XV.
+
+_Voyage to Benin beyond Guinea in 1588, by James Welsh_[307].
+
+
+This and the subsequent voyage to Benin were fitted out by Messrs Bird
+and Newton, merchants of London, in which a ship of 100 tons called the
+Richard of Arundel and a pinnace were employed, under the chief command
+of James Welsh, who wrote the account of both voyages--_Astley_.
+
+[Footnote 307: Hakluyt, II. 613. Astley, I. 199.]
+
+It seems not improbable that these voyages were intended as an evasion
+of an exclusive privilege granted in May 1588 by Queen Elizabeth, for
+trade to the rivers Senegal and Gambia, called Senega and Gambra in
+Hakluyt. The boundaries of this exclusive trade are described as
+beginning at the northermost part of the river Senegal, and from and
+within that river all along the coast of Guinea into the southermost
+part of the river Gambia, and within that river also; and the reason
+assigned for this exclusive grant is, that the patentees had already
+made one voyage to these parts, and that the enterprizing a new trade
+must be attended with considerable hazard and expence. The patentees
+were several merchants of Exeter and other parts of Devonshire, and one
+merchant of London, who had been instigated by certain Portuguese
+resident in England to engage in that trade, and the privilege is
+extended to ten years.[308]--E.
+
+[Footnote 308: See the patent at large in Hakluyt, II. 610. London
+edition, 1810.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+On the 12th October 1588, weighing anchor from Ratcliff we dropped down
+to Blackwall, whence we sailed next day; but owing to contrary winds we
+did not reach Plymouth till the 25th October, where we had to remain for
+want of a fair wind to the 14th of December, when we set sail and passed
+the Lizard that night. Thursday the 2d January 1589, we had sight of the
+land near Rio del Oro, making our lat. 22° 47' N. The 3d we saw Cape
+Barbas, distant 5 leagues S.E. The 4th in the morning we had sight of
+the stars called the _Croziers_. The 7th we had sight of Cape Verd,
+making our lat. 14° 43' at 4 leagues off shore. Friday 17th Cape Mount
+bore from us N.N.E., when we sounded and had 50 fathoms water with a
+black ouse, and at 2 P.M. it bore N.N.W. 8 leagues distant, when Cape
+Misurado bore E. by S. Here the current sets E.S.E. along shore, and at
+midnight we had 26 fathoms on black ouse. The 18th in the morning we
+were athwart a land much resembling Cabo Verde, about 9 leagues beyond
+Cape Misurado. It is a saddle-backed hill, and there are four or five
+one after the other; and 7 leagues farther south we saw a row of
+saddle-backed hills, all the land from Cape Misurado having many
+mountains. The 19th we were off Rio de Sestos, and the 20th Cape Baixos
+was N. by W. 4 leagues distant. In the afternoon a canoe came off with
+three negroes from a place they called Tabanoo. Towards evening we were
+athwart an island, and saw many small islands or rocks to the southward,
+the current setting from the south. We sounded and had 35 fathoms. The
+21st we had a flat hill bearing N.N.E. being 4 leagues from shore; and
+at 2 P.M. we spoke a French ship riding near a place called _Ratere_,
+there being another place hard bye called Crua[309]. The Frenchman
+carried a letter from us on shore for Mr Newton; and as we lay to while
+writing the letter, the current set us a good space along shore to the
+S.S.E. The 25th we were in the bight of a bay to the west of Cape
+Three-points, the current setting E.N.E. The 31st January we were off
+the middle part of Cape Three-points at 7 in the morning, the current
+setting to the E. Saturday 1st February we were off a round foreland,
+which I considered to be the easternmost part of Cape Three-points,
+within which foreland was a great bay and an island in the bay.
+
+[Footnote 309: Krou Sestra, nearly in lat. 5° N.]
+
+The 2nd February we were off the castle of Mina; and when the third
+glass of the watch was run out, we spied under our larboard quarter one
+of their boats with some negroes and one Portuguese, who would not come
+on board. Over the castle upon some high rocks, we saw what we thought
+to be two watch houses, which were very white. At this time our course
+was E.N.E. The 4th in the morning we were athwart a great hill, behind
+which within the land were other high rugged hills, which I reckoned
+were little short of _Monte Redondo_, at which time I reckoned we were
+20 leagues E.N.E. from the castle of Mina; and at 11 o'clock A.M. I saw
+two hills within the land, 7 leagues by estimation beyond the former
+hills. At this place there is a bay, having another hill at its east
+extremity, beyond which the land is very low. We went this day E. N E.
+and E. by N. 22 leagues, and then E. along shore. The 6th we were short
+of Villa Longa, and there we met a Portuguese caravel. The 7th, being a
+fair temperate day, we rode all day before Villa Longa, whence we sailed
+on the 8th, and 10 leagues from thence we anchored again, and remained
+all night in 10 fathoms water. The 9th we sailed again, all along the
+shore being clothed with thick woods, and in the afternoon we were
+athwart a river[310], to the eastward of which a little way was a great
+high bushy tree which seemed to have no leaves. The 10th we sailed E.
+and E. by S. 14 leagues along shore, the whole coast being so thick of
+woods that in my judgment a person would have much difficulty in passing
+through them. Towards night we anchored in 7 fathoms. The 11th we sailed
+E. by S. and 3 leagues from shore we had only 5 fathoms water, all the
+wood along shore being as even as if it had been clipt by gardeners
+sheers. After running 2 leagues, we saw a high tuft of trees on a brow
+of land like the head of a porpoise. A league farther on we had a very
+low head land full of trees; and a great way from the land we had very
+shallow water, on which we hauled off to seaward to get deeper water,
+and then anchored in 5 fathoms, athwart the mouth of the river _Jayo_.
+The 12th we sent the pinnace and the boat to land with the merchants,
+and they did not return till next morning. The shallowest part of this
+river is toward the west, where there is only 4-1/2 fathoms, and it is
+very broad.
+
+[Footnote 310: Rio de Lagoa--_Hakluyt_.--Probably that now called Lagos,
+in long. 2° 40' E. from Greenwich, in the Bight of Benin.--E.]
+
+Thursday the 13th we set sail going S.S.E. along shore, the trees being
+wonderfully even, the east shore being higher than the west shore[311].
+After sailing 18 leagues we had sight of a great river, called Rio de
+Benin, off which we anchored in 3-1/2 fathoms, the sea being here very
+shallow two leagues from the main[312]. The 15th we sent the pinnace and
+boat with the merchants into the river; and as we rode in shallow water,
+we made sail with the starboard tacks aboard till we came to 5 fathoms
+water, where we anchored having the current to the westwards. The west
+part of the land was high-browed, much like the head of a Gurnard, and
+the eastermost land was lower, having three tufts of trees like stacks
+of corn. Next day we only saw two of these trees, having removed more to
+the eastwards. We rode here from the 14th of February till the 14th of
+April, having the wind always at S.W.
+
+[Footnote 311: This is only to be understood as implying that the shore
+was now higher in the eastern part of the voyage along the coast, than
+formerly to the west on the coast of Mina; the east shore and the west
+shore referring to the bight or bay of Benin.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 312: It is probable that the two rivers mentioned in the text
+under the names of Rio de Lagoa and Rio de Benin, are those now called
+the Lagos creek and the great river Formosa, both in the negro kingdom
+of Benin.--E.]
+
+The 17th February our merchants weighed their goods and put them aboard
+the pinnace to go into the river, on which day there came a great
+current out of the river setting to the westwards. The 16th March our
+pinnace came on board with Anthony Ingram the chief factor, bringing 94
+bags of pepper and 28 elephants teeth. All his company were sick. The
+19th our pinnace went again into the river, having the purser and
+surgeon on board; and the 25th we sent the boat up the river again. The
+30th our pinnace came from Benin with the sorrowful news that Thomas
+Hemstead and our captain were both dead. She brought with her 159 serons
+or bags of pepper, besides elephants teeth. In all the time of our
+remaining off the river of Benin, we had fair and temperate weather when
+the wind was at S.W. from the sea; but when the wind blew at N. and N.E.
+from the land, it then rained with thunder and lightning, and the
+weather was intemperately hot.
+
+The 13th of April 1589, we began our voyage homeward, and the 27th of
+July we spoke a ship called the Port belonging to London, giving us good
+news of England. The 9th September we put into Catwater, where we
+remained till the 28th, owing to sickness and want of men. The 29th we
+sailed from Plymouth, and arrived at London on the 2d October 1589.
+
+The commodities we carried out in this, voyage were linens and woollen
+cloths, iron work of sundry kinds, manillios or bracelets of copper,
+glass beads and coral. Those we brought home were pepper, elephants
+teeth, palm oil, cloth made of cotton very curiously woven, and cloth
+made of the bark of the palm tree. Their money consists of pretty white
+shells, as they have no gold or silver. They have also great store of
+cotton. Their bread is made of certain roots called _Inamia_, as large
+as a mans arm, which when well boiled is very pleasant and light of
+digestion. On banian or fish days, our men preferred eating these roots
+with oil and vinegar to the best stock-fish[313]. There are great
+quantities of palm trees, out of which the negroes procure abundance of
+a very pleasant white wine, of which we could purchase two gallons for
+20 shells. The negroes have plenty of soap, which has the flavour of
+violets. They make very pretty mats and baskets, also spoons of ivory
+very curiously wrought with figures of birds and beasts.
+
+[Footnote 313: It is obvious that the banian or meager days, still
+continued in the British navy, are a remnant of the meager days of the
+Roman catholic times, when it was deemed a mortal sin to eat flesh.
+Stock-fish are, however now abandoned, having been found to promote
+scurvy.--E.]
+
+Upon this coast we had the most terrible thunder and lightning, which
+used to make the deck tremble under our feet, such as I never heard the
+like in any other part of the world. Before we became accustomed to it,
+we were much alarmed, but God be thanked we had no harm. The natives are
+very gentle and courteous; both men and women going naked till they are
+married, after which they wear a garment reaching from the middle down
+to the knees. Honey was so plentiful, that they used to sell our people
+earthen pots of comb full of honey, the size of two gallons for 100
+shells. They brought us also great store of oranges and plantains, which
+last is a fruit which grows on a tree, and resembles our cucumbers, but
+is very pleasant eating. It pleased God of his merciful goodness to give
+me the knowledge of a means of preserving water fresh with little cost,
+which served us six months at sea; and when we came to Plymouth it was
+much wondered at by the principal men of the town, who said there was
+not sweeter water in all Plymouth[314]. Thus God provides for his
+creatures, unto whom be praise, now and _for ever more_, amen.
+
+[Footnote 314: This preservative is wrought by casting a handful of
+bay-salt into a hogshead of water, as the author told me.--_Hakluyt_.
+
+The Thames water soon putrifies on board ships in long voyages; but
+afterwards throws down a sediment and becomes perfectly sweet pleasant
+and wholesome; insomuch that it is often bought from ships which have
+been to India and back. Putrid water at sea is purified or rendered
+comparatively sweet by forcing streams of air through it by what is
+called an air pump. Water may be preserved sweet on long voyages, or
+restored when putrid, by means of pounded charcoal.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XVI.
+
+_Supplement to the foregoing Voyage, in a Letter from Anthony Ingram the
+chief Factor, written from Plymouth to the Owners, dated 9th September,
+the day of arriving at Plymouth_[315].
+
+
+
+Worshipful Sirs! The account of our whole proceedings in this voyage
+would require more time than I have, and a person in better health than
+I am at present, so that I trust you will pardon me till I get to
+London.
+
+[Footnote 315: Hakluyt, II. 616. Astley, I. 202.]
+
+Departing from London in December 1588, we arrived at our destined port
+of Benin on the 14th of February following, where we found not water
+enough to carry our ship over the bar, so that we left her without in
+the road. We put the chiefest of our merchandise into the pinnace and
+ships boat, in which we went up the river to a place called _Goto_[316],
+where we arrived on the 20th, that place being the nearest to Benin to
+which we could go by water. From thence we sent negro messengers to
+certify the king of our arrival, and the object of our coming. These
+messengers returned on the 22d with a nobleman to conduct us to the city
+of Benin, and with 200 negroes to carry our merchandise. On the 23d we
+delivered our commodities to the kings factor, and the 25th we came to
+the great city of Benin, where we were well entertained. The 26th we
+went to court to confer with the king, but by reason of a solemn
+festival then holding we could not see him; yet we spoke with his
+_veador_, or chief man who deals with the Christians, who assured us
+that we should have every thing according to our desires, both in regard
+to pepper and elephants teeth.
+
+[Footnote 316: Goto or Gato is a negro town on the northern branch of
+the Rio Formoso, about 45 miles in a straight line from the mouth of the
+river, and about 85 miles short of the town of Benin. This branch or
+creek is probably the river of Benin of the text.--E.]
+
+We were admitted into the kings presence on the 1st of March, who gave
+us like friendly assurances respecting our trade; and next day we went
+again to court, when the _veador_ shewed us a basket of green pepper and
+another of dry in the stalks. We desired to have it plucked from the
+stalks and made clean, which he said would require some time to get
+done, but should be executed to our satisfaction, and that by next year
+it should be all in readiness for us, as we had now come unexpectedly to
+their country, to which no Christians had traded for pepper in the reign
+of the present king. Next day they sent us 12 baskets full, and
+continued to send more daily till the 9th March, by which time we had
+made up 64 serons of pepper and 28 elephants teeth. By this time, as our
+constitutions were unused to the climate of Benin, all of us were seized
+with fevers; upon which the captain sent me down to Goto with the goods
+we had collected. On my arrival there, I found all the men belonging to
+our pinnace sick, so that they were unable to convey the pinnace and
+goods to the ship; but fortunately the boat came up to Goto from the
+ship within two hours after my arrival, to see what we were about, so
+that I put the goods into the boat and went down to the ship: But by the
+time I had got on board several of our men died, among whom were Mr
+Benson, the copper, and the carpenter, with three or four more, and I
+was in so weak a state as to be unable to return to Benin. I therefore
+sent up Samuel Dunne and the surgeon, that he might let blood of them if
+it were thought adviseable; but on their arrival they found the captain
+and your son William Bird both dead, and Thomas Hempstead was so very
+weak that he died two days after.
+
+In this sorrowful state of affairs they returned with all speed to the
+ship, with such pepper and elephants teeth as they had got, as will
+appear by the cargo. At their coming away; the _veador_ told them he
+would use all possible expedition to procure them more goods if they
+would remain longer; but the sickness so increased among us, that by the
+time our men came back we had so many sick and dead, that we looked to
+lose our ship, lives, country, and all. We were so reduced that it was
+with much difficulty we were able to heave our anchors; but by Gods
+blessing we got them up and put to sea, leaving our pinnace behind, on
+the 13th of April. After which our men began to recover and gather
+strength. Sailing between the Cape de Verd islands and the Main, we came
+to the Azores on the 25th of July; and here our men began again to fall
+sick, and several died, among whom was Samuel Dunn, those who remained
+alive being in a sad state. In the midst of our distress, it pleased God
+that we should meet your ship the _Barke Burre_ on this side the North
+Cape, which not only kept company with us, but sent us six fresh men on
+board, without whose assistance we must have been in a sad condition. By
+this providential aid we are now arrived at Plymouth, this 9th
+September; and, for want of better health at this present. I must refer
+you for farther particulars till my arrival in London.--Yours to
+command,
+
+ANTHONY INGRAM.
+
+
+SECTION XVII.
+
+_Second Voyage of James Welsh to Benin, in 1590_[317].
+
+
+In the employment of the same merchants, John Bird and John Newton, and
+with the same ship as in the former voyage, the Richard of Arundel,
+accompanied by a small pinnace, we set sail from Ratclif on the 3d
+September 1590, and came to Plymouth Sound on the 18th of that month. We
+put to sea again on the 22d, and on the 14th October got sight of
+Fuertaventura, one of the Canary islands, which appeared very rugged as
+we sailed past. The 16th of October, in the lat. of 24° 9' N. we met a
+prodigious hollow sea, such as I had never seen before on this coast;
+and this day a monstrous great fish, which I think is called a
+_gobarto_[318], put up his head to the steep-tubs where the cook was
+shifting the victuals, whom I thought the fish would have carried away.
+The 21st, being in lat. 18° N. we had a _counter-sea_ from the north,
+having in the same latitude, on our last voyage, encountered a similar
+sea from the south, both times in very calm weather. The 24th we had
+sight of Cape Verd, and next day had a great hollow sea from the north,
+a common sign that the wind will be northerly, and so it proved. The
+15th November, when in lat. 6° 42' N. we met three currents from west to
+north-west, one after the other, with the interval of an hour between
+each. The 18th we had two other great currents from S.W. The 20th we saw
+another from N.E. The 24th we had a great current from S.S.W. and at 6
+P.M. we had three currents more. The 27th we reckoned to have gone 2-1/2
+leagues every watch, but found that we had only made _one_ league every
+watch for the last 24 hours, occasioned by heavy billows and a swift
+current still from the south. The 5th December, on setting the watch, we
+cast about and lay E.N.E. and N.E. and here in lat. 5° 30' our pinnace
+lost us wilfully. The 7th, at sunset, we saw a great black spot on the
+sun; and on the 8th, both at rising and setting we saw the like, the
+spot appearing about the size of a shilling. We were then in lat. 5° N.
+and still had heavy billows from the south.
+
+[Footnote 317: Hakluyt, II. 618. Astley, I. 203.]
+
+[Footnote 318: In a side note, Astley conjectures this to have been a
+great shark.]
+
+We sounded on the 14th December, having 15 fathoms on coarse red sand,
+two leagues from shore, the current setting S.E. along shore, and still
+we had heavy billows from the south. The 15th we were athwart a rock,
+somewhat like the _Mewstone_ in England, and at the distance of 2
+leagues from the rock, had ground in 27 fathoms. This rock is not above
+a mile from the shore, and a mile farther we saw another rock, the space
+between both being broken ground. We sounded off the second rock, and
+had ground at 20 fathoms on black sand. We could now see plainly that
+the rocks were not along the shore, but at some distance off to sea, and
+about 5 leagues farther south we saw a great bay, being then in lat. 4°
+27' N. The 16th we met a French ship belonging to Harfleur, which robbed
+our pinnace: we sent a letter by him. This night we saw another spot on
+the sun at his going down. Towards evening we were athwart the mouth of
+a river, right over which was a high tuft of trees. The 17th we anchored
+in the mouth of the river, when we found the land to be Cape Palmas,
+there being a great ledge of rocks between us and the Cape, a league and
+half to sea, and an island off the point or foreland of the Cape. We
+then bore to the west of the Cape, and as night came on could see no
+more of the land, except that it trended inwards like a bay, in which
+there ran a stream or tide as it had been the Thames. This was on the
+change day of the moon.
+
+The 19th December, a fair temperate day, with the wind S. we sailed
+east, leaving the land astern of us to the west, all the coast appearing
+low like islands to the east of Cape Palmas, and trending inwards like a
+great bay or sound. We went east all night, and in the morning were only
+three or four leagues from shore. The 20th we were off Rio de las
+Barbas. The 21st we continued along shore; and three or four leagues
+west of Cape Three Points, I found the bay to be set deeper than it is
+laid down by four leagues. At 4 P.M. the land began to shew high, the
+first part of it being covered by palm trees. The 24th, still going
+along shore, the land was very low and full of trees to the water side.
+At noon we anchored off the Rio de Boilas, where we sent the boat
+towards the shore with our merchants, but they durst not put into the
+river, because of a heavy surf that broke continually on the bar. The
+28th we sailed along shore, and anchored at night in seven fathoms, to
+avoid being put back by a current setting from E.S.E. from _Papuas_.
+
+At noon on the 29th we were abreast of Ardrah, and there we took a
+caravel, the people belonging to which had fled to the land. She had
+nothing in her except a small quantity of palm oil and a few roots. Next
+morning our captain and merchants went to meet the Portuguese, who came
+off in a boat to speak with them. After some communing about ransoming
+the caravel, the Portuguese promised to give for her some bullocks and
+elephants teeth, and gave us then one tooth and one bullock, engaging to
+bring the rest next day. Next day being the 1st January 1591, our
+captain went a-land to speak with the Portuguese, but finding them to
+dissemble, he came on board again, when presently we unrigged the
+caravel and set her on fire before the town. We then set sail and went
+along the coast, where we saw a date tree, the like of which is not on
+all that coast, by the water side. We also fell a little aground at one
+place. Thus we went on to _Villalonga_ where we anchored. The 3d we came
+to Rio de Lagoa, or Lagos Creek, where our merchants went to land,
+finding 3 fathoms on the bar, but being late they did not go in. There
+is to the eastward of this river a date tree, higher than all the other
+trees thereabouts. Thus we went along the coast, anchoring every night,
+and all the shore was full of trees and thick woods. The morning of the
+6th was very foggy, so that we could not see the land; but it cleared up
+about three in the afternoon, when we found ourselves off the river
+Jaya; and finding the water very shallow, we bore a little out to
+seawards as we had done in the former voyage, and came to anchor in five
+fathoms. We set sail again next day, and came about noon abreast the
+river of Benin, where we anchored in four fathoms.
+
+The 10th our captain went to land with the boat at 2 P.M. All this week
+it was very foggy every day till 10 o'clock A.M. and hitherto the
+weather had been as temperate as our summer in England. This day we
+anchored in the road in 4 fathoms, the west point bearing from us E.N.E.
+The 21st, being a fair temperate day, Mr Hassald went up to the town of
+Gato to hear news of our captain. The 23d came the caravel[319] in which
+was Samuel, bringing 63 elephants teeth and three bullocks. The 28th was
+a fair temperate day, but towards night we had much rain with thunder
+and lightning. This day our boat came on board from Gato. The 24th
+February, we took in 298 serons or bags of pepper, and 4 elephants
+teeth. The 26th we put the rest of our goods on board the caravel, in
+which Mr Hassald went up to Gato. The 5th March the caravel came again,
+bringing 21 serons of pepper and 4 elephants teeth. The 9th April our
+caravel came again on board with water for our return voyage, and this
+day we lost our shallop or small boat. The 17th was a hazy and rainy
+day, and in the afternoon we saw three great water spouts, two to
+larboard and one right a-head, but by the blessing of God they came not
+to our ship. This day we took in the last of our water for sea store,
+and on the 26th we victualled our caravel to accompany us. The 27th we
+set sail on our voyage homewards.
+
+[Footnote 319: It is not mentioned how they came by this caravel.--Astl.
+I. 204. b. Probably the pinnace that attended them in the voyage, for
+the purpose of going up the shallow rivers.--E.]
+
+The 24th May we were 37 leagues south of Cape Palmas. The 1st July we
+got sight of Brava, one of the Cape Verd islands, bearing east 7 leagues
+off. The 13th August we spoke the queens ship, of which Lord Howard was
+admiral and Sir Richard Grenville vice-admiral. They made us keep
+company till the night of the 15th, lying all the time a hull in waiting
+for prizes, 30 leagues S.W. from the island of Flores. That night we got
+leave to depart, accompanied by a fliboat laden with sugar from the
+island of San Thome which had been taken by the queens ship, and of
+which my lord admiral gave me strict charge not to part with her till
+safe harboured in England. The 23d the N.E. part of the island of Corvo
+bore from us E. by S. 6 leagues distant. The 17th September we fell in
+with a ship belonging to Plymouth bound from the West Indies. Next day
+we had sight of another sail; and this day died Mr Wood one of our
+company. The 23d we spoke the Dragon belonging to my Lord Cumberland, of
+which _master_ Ivie was _maister_[320]. The 2d October we met a ship
+belonging to Newcastle coming from Newfoundland, out of which we got 300
+couple of _Newland_ fish. The 13th we put into Dartmouth, where we staid
+till the 12th December, when we sailed with a west wind, and by the
+blessing of God we anchored on the 18th December 1591, at Limehouse in
+the river Thames, where we discharged 589 sacks of pepper, 150 elephants
+teeth, and 32 barrels of palm oil.
+
+[Footnote 320: This distinction of master and maister often occurs in
+these early voyages.--Astl. I. 205. a.]
+
+The commodities we carried out on this my second voyage were, broad
+cloth, kersies, bays, linen cloth, unwrought iron, copper bracelets,
+coral, hawks bells, horse-tails, hats, and the like. This voyage was
+more comfortable to us than the former, because we had plenty of fresh
+water and that very sweet. For even yet, being the 7th June 1592, the
+water we brought out of Benin on the 1st of April 1591, is as clear and
+good as any fountain can yield. In this voyage we sailed 350 leagues
+within half a degree of the equator, where we found the weather more
+temperate than at our anchorage on the coast of Benin. Under the line we
+killed many small dolphins, and many other good fish, which were very
+refreshing to us; and the fish never forsook us till we were to the
+north of the Azores: But God be thanked we met with several ships of our
+own country, during the five months we were at sea, which were great
+comfort to us, having no consort.
+
+
+SECTION XVIII.
+
+_Voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to the Rivers Senegal and
+Gambia adjoining to Guinea, in 1591_[321].
+
+
+PREVIOUS REMARKS [322].
+
+In virtue of her majestys most gracious charter, given in the year 1588,
+being the 30th of her reign, certain English merchants were privileged
+to trade, in and from the river of Senega or Senegal, to and in the
+river of Gambra or Gambia on the western coast of Africa. The chiefest
+places of trade on that coast, in and between these rivers are: 1.
+_Senegal_ river, where the commodities are hides, gum, elephants teeth,
+a few grains or pepper, ostrich feathers, ambergris, and some gold. 2.
+_Beseguiache_[323], a town near Cape Verd, and ---- leagues[324] from the
+river Senegal. The commodities here are small hides and a few teeth. 3.
+_Rufisque_, or _Refisca viejo_, a town 4 leagues from Beseguiache,
+producing small hides and a few teeth now and then. 4. _Palmerin_, a
+town 2 leagues from Rufisque[325], having small hides and a few
+elephants teeth occasionally. 5. _Porto d'Ally_, or _Portudale_, a town
+5 leagues from Palmerin, having small hides, teeth, ambergris, and a
+little gold; and many Portuguese are there. 6. _Candimal_, a town half a
+league from Portudale, having small hides and a few teeth now and then.
+7. _Palmerin_[326], a town 3 leagues from Candimal, with similar
+commodities. 8. _Jaale_ or _Joala_, 6 leagues beyond Palmerin, its
+commodities being hides, wax, elephants teeth, rice, and some gold, for
+which it is frequented by many Spaniards and Portuguese, 9. _Gambia
+river_, producing rice, wax, hides, elephants teeth, and gold.
+
+[Footnote 321: Hakluyt, III. 2. Astley, I. 242.]
+
+[Footnote 322: In Astley, these previous remarks are stated to have been
+written by Richard Rainolds; but in the original collection of Hakluyt
+no such distinction is made, only that in the text Richard Rainolds
+states himself to have written the account of the voyage.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 323: Or Barzaguiche, by which name the natives call the island
+of Goree; the town of that name being on the opposite shore of the
+continent.--Astl, I. 242. c.]
+
+[Footnote 324: At this place the editor of Astley's Collection supplies
+28 leagues, in the text between brackets: But Cape Verd is 39 leagues
+from the southern mouth of the Senegal, and Goree is 6 leagues beyond
+Cape Verd. Near the situation pointed out for Beseguiache, modern maps
+place two small towns or villages named Dakar and Ben.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 325: A league north from Rufisque in modern maps is a place
+called Ambo; about 1-1/2 league farther north, one named Canne; and near
+2 leagues south, another named Yenne.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 326: We have here two towns called Palmerin within a few
+leagues, perhaps one of them may be wrong named in the text.--E.]
+
+The French have traded thither above thirty years from Dieppe in
+New-haven[327], commonly with four or five ships every year, of which
+two small barks go up the river Senegal. The others are wont, until
+within these four years that our ships came thither, to ride with their
+ships in Portudale, sending small shalops of six or eight tons to some
+of the before-named places on the sea coast. They were generally as well
+beloved and as kindly treated by the negroes as if they had been natives
+of the country, several of the negroes going often into France and
+returning again, to the great increase of their mutual friendship. Since
+we frequented the coast, the French go with their ships to Rufisque, and
+leave us to anchor a Portudale. The French are not in use to go up the
+river Gambia, which is a river of secret trade and riches concealed by
+the Portuguese. Long since, one Frenchman entered the river in a small
+bark, which was surprised, betrayed, and taken by the Portuguese. In
+our second voyage in the second year of our trade[328], about forty
+Englishmen were cruelly slain or captured, and most or all of their
+goods confiscated, by the vile treachery of the Portuguese, with the
+consent of the negro kings in Portudale and Joala. On this occasion only
+two got back, who were the merchants or factors. Likewise, by the
+procurement of Pedro Gonzalves, a person in the service of Don Antonio
+one of the officers of the king of Portugal, Thomas Dassel and others
+had been betrayed, if it had not pleased the Almighty to reveal and
+prevent the same.
+
+[Footnote 327: Havre de Grace is probably here meant--E.]
+
+[Footnote 328: Hence it appears that the relation in the text was the
+third voyage of the English exclusive company, in the third year of
+their patent, but we find no account of the other two beyond what is now
+mentioned. It appears, however from Kelly's ship being at the same time
+upon the coast, that others as well as the patentees carried on this
+trade.--Astl. I. 242. d.]
+
+From the south side of the river Senegal, all along the sea coast to
+Palmerin is one kingdom of the Negroes, the king of which is named
+Melick Zamba[329], who dwells about two days journey inland from
+Rufisque.
+
+[Footnote 329: Melick; or Malek, in Arabic signifies king.--Astl. I.
+242. e.]
+
+_The Voyage._
+
+On the 12th of November 1591, I, Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel,
+being factors in a ship called the Nightingale of London, of 125 tons,
+accompanied by a pinnace of 40 tons called the Messenger, arrived near
+Cape Verd at a small island called the _Isle of Liberty_. At this island
+we set up a small pinnace in which we are in use to carry our goods to
+land in the course of our traffic; and in the mean time Thomas Dassel
+went in the large pinnace to traffic with the Spaniards or Portuguese in
+Portudale or Joale. Over against this island of Liberty [_Goree_] there
+is a village of the negroes called Beseguiache, the alcaide or governor
+of which came on board, with a great train in a number of canoes, to
+receive the kings duties for anchorage and permission to set up our
+pinnace. He was much pleased that we had no Portuguese in our ships,
+saying that we should be always better thought of by the king and people
+of that country if we never brought any Portuguese, but came of
+ourselves as the French do always. To secure his favour, I gave him and
+his company very courteous entertainment, and upon his entreaty, having
+sufficient hostages left on board, I and several others went to the land
+along with him. At this time a war subsisted between this governor and
+the governor of a neighbouring province; but upon our arrival a truce
+was entered into for some time, and I with my companions were conducted
+through among the contending parties belonging to both provinces, to the
+house of the governor of Beseguiache, where we were hospitably
+entertained after their manner, and having received some presents
+returned safely on board. Next day the alcaide came again on board,
+desiring me to send some iron and other commodities in the boat to
+barter with the negroes, and also requested me to remove with the ship
+to Rufisque, which I did accordingly. I observed one thing, that a
+number of negroes, armed with bows and poisoned arrows, poisoned darts,
+and swords, attended the landing of the governor in warlike array,
+because the hostile tribe had come there to view our ship, taking
+advantage of the truce. These his armed attendants for the most part
+approached him in a kneeling posture, and kissed the back of his hand.
+
+On the 17th of November, finding no French ship had yet come out, I left
+the anchorage at the island [_Goree_], and went to the road of Rufisque,
+where the interpreters of the alcaide came on board and received from me
+the kings duties for free trade with the negroes, with whom I every day
+exchanged my iron and other wares for hides and some elephants teeth,
+finding the people very friendly and tractable. Next day I went about
+three miles inland to the town of Rufisque, where I was handsomely
+received and treated by the alcaide, and especially so by a young noble
+named _Conde Amar Pattay_[330], who presented me with an ox, and some
+goats and kids, for my company, assuring me that the king would be glad
+to hear of the arrival of a Christian ship, calling us _blancos_ or
+white men, and more especially that we were English. Every day the young
+_conde_ came to the sea-side with a small company of horsemen, feasting
+me with much courtesy and kindness. On the 5th of December, he and his
+train came on board to view the ship, which to them seemed wonderful, as
+a thing they had seldom seen the like of. He then told me that a
+messenger sent to the king to notify our arrival was returned, and that
+the king was much rejoiced that the English had brought a ship to trade
+in his ports; and as I was the first Englishman who had brought a ship
+there, he promised that I and any Englishman hereafter might be sure of
+being well treated, and of receiving good dealings in his country. The
+_conde_ farther requested, in the kings name and his own, that before my
+final departure from the coast, I might return to the road of Rufisque,
+to confer with him for our better acquaintance, and for the
+establishment of stable friendship between them and the English, which I
+agreed to. Having shewn him and his train every civility in my power, he
+went on shore, on which I proposed to have given him a salute, but he
+desired the contrary, being amazed at the sight of the ship and noise of
+the guns, which they greatly admired.
+
+[Footnote 330: In the name or title of this negro chief or noble may be
+recognized the Portuguese or Spanish _conde_, and the Arabic _amir_ or
+_emir_.--E.]
+
+The 13th of December I weighed anchor from before Rufisque, and went to
+Porto d'Ally, which is in another kingdom, the king of which is called
+Amar Malek, being son to Malek Zamba the other king, and has his
+residence a days journey and a half inland from Porto d'Ally. When we
+had anchored, the governors of the town, who were the kings kinsmen, and
+all the other officers, came on board to receive the kings duty for
+anchorage and liberty to trade, all of whom seemed much pleased that we
+had no Portuguese on board, saying that it was the kings pleasure we
+should bring none of that nation, whom they considered as a people
+devoid of truth[331]. They complained of one Francisco de Costa, a
+servant of Don Antonio, who had often, and particularly the former year,
+abused their king Amar Malek, promising to bring him certain things out
+of England which he had never done, and supposed that might be his
+reason for not coming this voyage. They said likewise that neither the
+Portuguese nor Spaniards could abide us, but always spoke to the great
+defamation and dishonour of England. They also affirmed that on the
+arrival of a ship called the Command, belonging to Richard Kelley of
+Dartmouth, one Pedro Gonzalves, a Portuguese, who came in that ship from
+Don Antonio, reported to them that we were fled from England, and had
+come to rob and commit great spoil on the coast, and that Thomas Dassel
+had murdered Francisco de Acosta since we left England, who was coming
+in our ship with great presents for their king from Don Antonio,
+desiring on our arrival that they should seize our goods and ourselves
+secretly. They assured us however that they had refused to do this, as
+they disbelieved the report of Gonzalves, having often before been
+abused and deceived by such false and slanderous stories by the
+Portuguese. Their king, they said, was extremely sorry for the former
+murder of our people, and would never consent to any such thing in
+future, holding the Portuguese and Spaniards in utter abhorrence ever
+since, and having a much better opinion of us and our nation than these
+our enemies wished them to entertain. I gave them hearty thanks for
+their good opinion, assuring them that they should always find a great
+difference between our honour, and the dishonourable words and actions
+of our enemies, and then paid them the customary duties. As this was a
+chief place for trade, I told them that I intended to wait upon their
+king that I might give him certain presents which I had brought out of
+England, on purpose to strengthen the friendship between their nation
+and ours.
+
+[Footnote 331: From this and other passages of the present journal, it
+appears that the English used to carry a Portuguese along with them in
+their first voyages to the coast of Africa, whether from choice or by
+agreement with the government of Portugal does not clearly appear: and
+that, finding the inconvenience of this custom, they began now to lay it
+aside. This seems to have provoked the king of Portugal, who proposed to
+ruin the English trade by means of these agents or spies.--_Astl_. I.
+214. b.]
+
+All this time, Thomas Dassel was with our large pinnace at the town of
+Joala, in the dominions of king Jocoel Lamiockeric, trading with the
+Spaniards and Portuguese at that place. The before-mentioned Pedro
+Gonzalves, who had come out of England, was there also along with some
+English merchants, employed in the service of Richard Kelley. As
+Gonzalves had not been able to accomplish his treacherous purposes
+against Dassel at Porto d'Ally, where I remained, he attempted, along
+with other Portuguese who were made privy to his design, to betray
+Dassel at this town of Joala, and had seduced the chiefs among the
+negroes, by means of bribes, to concur in his wicked and most
+treacherous intentions. These, by the good providence of God, were
+revealed to Thomas Dassel by Richard Cape, an Englishman, in the service
+of Richard Kelley; on which Thomas Dassel went on board a small English
+bark called the Cherubim of Lyme, where a Portuguese named Joam Payva, a
+servant of Don Antonio, declared that Thomas Dassel would have been
+betrayed long before, if he and one Garcia, a Portuguese, who lived at
+Joala, would have concurred with Pedro Gonzalves. Upon this warning,
+Thomas Dassel contrived next day to get three Portuguese on board the
+pinnace, two of whom he sent on shore, and detained the third named
+Villanova as an hostage, sending a message that if they would bring
+Gonzalves on board next day by eight o'clock, he would release
+Villanova; but they did not. Dassel likewise got intelligence, that
+certain Portuguese and negroes were gone post by land from Joala to
+Porto d'Ally, with the view of having me, Richard Rainolds, and my
+company detained on shore; and, being doubtful of the negro friendship,
+who were often wavering, especially when overcome by wine, he came with
+his pinnace and the Portuguese hostage to Porto d'Ally on the 24th
+December, for our greater security, and to prevent any treacherous plan
+that might have been attempted against us in the roads by the
+Portuguese. He was no sooner arrived beside our large ship the
+Nightingale in the road of Porto d'Ally, than news was brought him from
+John Baily, servant to Anthony Dassel, that he and our goods were
+detained on shore, and that twenty Portuguese and Spaniards were come
+there from Joala along with Pedro Gonzalves, for the purpose of getting
+Villanova released. After a conference of two or three days, held with
+the negro chiefs and the Spaniards and Portuguese, the negroes were in
+the end convinced how vilely Pedro Gonzalves had behaved; and as he was
+in their power, they said he ought to suffer death or torture for his
+villany, as an example to others; but we, in recompence of his cruel
+treachery, pitied him and shewed mercy, desiring the negroes to use him
+well though undeserving; upon which the negro chiefs brought him on
+board the pinnace to Thomas Dassel, to do with him as he thought proper.
+Owing to some improper language he had used of certain princes,
+Gonzalves was well buffetted by a Spaniard at his coming off from the
+shore, and had been slain if the natives had not rescued him for our
+sakes.
+
+When I went on shore to release Villanova, Pedro Gonzalves confessed to
+Thomas Dassel, that he had concerted with some negroes and Portuguese
+about detaining Dassel and the goods on shore; but that he had acted
+nothing on this subject without authority from his king, contained in
+certain letters he had received at Dartmouth from London, after our
+departure from the Thames, occasioned by our presuming to trade to
+Guinea without a servant of the king of Portugal; and declared likewise
+that he had power or authority from Francisco de Costa, a Portuguese,
+remaining in England, to detain the goods of Anthony Dassel in Guinea.
+By consent of Francis Tucker, John Browbeare, and the other factors of
+Richard Kelley, with whom this Pedro Gonzalves came from England, it was
+agreed that we should detain Gonzalves in our ships until their
+departure, to avoid any other mischief that he might contrive.
+Therefore, on 9th January 1592, he was delivered to go for England in
+the same ship that brought him, being all the time he remained in our
+ship, well and courteously treated by me, though much against the will
+of our mariners, who were much disgusted at seeing one who had been
+nourished and relieved in our country, seeking, by villanous means, to
+procure the destruction of us all.
+
+Although the Spaniards and Portuguese are dissemblers and not to be
+trusted, yet when they saw how the subjects of Amar Malek befriended and
+favoured us, and that it would be prejudicial to their trade if we were
+any way injured, they renounced their evil intentions against us,
+shewing detestation of him who had been the cause of it, and promised to
+defend us and our affairs in all faithfulness for the future; desiring
+us, as the negro king had done already, to bring no more Portuguese with
+us from England, for they esteemed one bar of iron as more valuable than
+twenty Portuguese, and more serviceable towards the profitable trade
+which had been of late carried on by us and the French; whereas the
+Portuguese, whom we were in use to bring with us, endeavoured all they
+could to do us injury, and even to hurt all parties concerned in the
+trade.
+
+At the beginning of these broils, Amar Malek had sent his chief
+secretary with three horses for me, Richard Rainolds; but I refused
+going, on account of the disturbances, though I might have had negroes
+of condition left as hostages for my safety; yet I transmitted the
+customary presents for the king. When he understood the reason of my not
+coming to his residence, he was very sorry and much offended at the
+cause, and immediately issued a proclamation, commanding that no injury
+should be done to us in his dominions by his own people, neither
+suffered to be done by the Spaniards or Portuguese; and declaring, if
+any of the neighbouring negro tribes should confederate with the
+Spaniards and Portuguese to molest us, that he and his subjects should
+be ready to aid and defend us. Thus there appeared more kindness and
+good will towards us in these ignorant negroes, than in the Spaniards
+and Portuguese.
+
+None of the Spaniards or Portuguese are in use to trade up the river
+Senegal, except one Portuguese named _Ganigogo_ who dwells far up that
+river, where he has married the daughter of one of the kings. In the
+towns of Porto d'Ally and Joala, which are the places of chief trade on
+this coast, and at Cauton and Cassan in the river Gambia, there are many
+Spaniards and Portuguese who have become resident by permission of the
+negroes, and carry on a valuable trade all along the coast, especially
+to the Rio San Dominica and Rio Grande, which are not far distant from
+the Gambia, to which places they transport the iron which they purchase
+from us and the French, exchanging it for _negro slaves_, which are
+transported to the West Indies in ships that come hither from Spain. By
+order of the governor and renters of the castle of Mina, and of all
+those places on the coast of Guinea where gold is to be had, these
+residents have a place limited for them in the river Gambia, beyond
+which they must not go under pain of death and confiscation of their
+goods; as the renters themselves send their own barks at certain times
+up the river, to those places where gold is to be had. In all those
+places hereabout, where we are in use to trade, the Spaniards and
+Portuguese have no castle or other place of strength, merely trading
+under the licence and safe conduct of the negroes. Most of the Spaniards
+and Portuguese who reside in those parts are banished men or fugitives,
+who have committed heinous crimes; and their life and conversation is
+conformable to their conditions, as they are the basest and most
+villainously behaved persons of their nation that are to be met with in
+any part of the world.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+SOME MISCELLANEOUS EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH.
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+The present chapter is rather of an anomalous nature, and chiefly
+consists of naval expeditions against the Spaniards and Portuguese,
+scarcely belonging in any respect to our plan of arrangement: yet, as
+contained mostly in the ancient English collection of Hakluyt, and in
+that by Astley, we have deemed it improper to exclude them from our
+pages, where they may be considered in some measure as an episode.
+Indeed, in every extensively comprehensive plan, some degree of anomaly
+is unavoidable. The following apology or reason given by the editor of
+Astley's collection for inserting them in that valuable work, may serve
+us likewise on the present occasion; though surely no excuse can be
+needed, in a national collection like ours, for recording the exploits
+of our unrivalled naval defenders.
+
+"For want of a continued series of trading voyages to Guinea, we shall
+here insert an account of some remarkable achievements by the English
+against the Spaniards and Portuguese; who, being greatly alarmed to find
+out merchants extending their commerce, and trading to those parts of
+the world which they pretended a right of engrossing to themselves,
+began to treat our ships very severely, wherever they had the
+superiority; and when they wanted force, endeavoured to surprise them by
+treachery, never scrupling to violate the most solemn oaths and
+engagements to compass their designs. For this reason the English
+merchant ships were obliged to go to sea armed and in company; by which
+means they not only prevented the outrages of these faithless enemies,
+but often revenged the injuries done to others of their countrymen. At
+length, the resentment of the nation being inflamed by their repeated
+treacheries and depredations, the English began to send out fleets to
+annoy their coasts and disturb their navigation. Of these proceedings,
+we propose to give a few instances in this chapter, which may suffice to
+shew the noble spirit that prevailed in these early times."--_Astl_. I.
+194.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Gallant escape of the Primrose from Bilboa in Spain, in 1585_[332].
+
+
+It is not unknown to the world, what dangers our English ships have
+lately escaped from, how sharply they have been entreated, and how
+hardly they have been assaulted; insomuch that the valour of those who
+managed and defended them is worthy of being held in remembrance.
+Wherefore, the courageous attempt and valiant enterprize of the tall
+ship named the Primrose of London, from before the town of Bilboa, in
+the province of Biscay in Spain, (which ship the corregidore of that
+province, accompanied by 97 Spaniards, offered violently to arrest, yet
+was defeated of his purpose, and brought prisoner into England,) having
+obtained renown, I have taken in hand to publish the truth thereof, that
+it may be generally known to the rest of our English ships; that, by the
+good example of this gallant exploit, the rest may be encouraged and
+incited in like extremity to act in a similar manner, to the glory of
+the realm and their own honour.--_Hakluyt_, II, 597.
+
+[Footnote 332: Hakluyt, II. 537. Astley, I.194.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Upon Wednesday the 26th of May 1585, while the ship Primrose of 150 tons
+was riding at anchor off the bay of Bilboa, where she had been two days,
+there came on board a Spanish pinnace, in which were the corregidore and
+six others, who seemed to be merchants, bringing cherries with, them,
+and spoke in a very friendly manner to the master of the ship, whose
+name was Foster. He received them courteously, giving them the best
+cheer he could, with beer, beef, and biscuit. While thus banqueting,
+four of the seven departed in the pinnace for Bilboa; the other three
+remaining, and seeming much pleased with their entertainment. Yet Mr
+Foster was suspicious of some evil designs, and gave secret intimation
+to his people that he was doubtful of the intentions of these men, but
+said nothing to his guests by which they could any way surmise that he
+distrusted them. Soon afterwards there came a shipboat in which were
+seventy persons, seemingly merchants and the like of Biscay, and a
+little behind came the pinnace in which were twenty-four other persons,
+as the Spaniards afterwards confessed. On reaching the Primrose, the
+corregidore and three or four of his men went on board that ship; but on
+seeing such a multitude, Mr Foster desired that no more might come on
+aboard which was agreed to: Yet suddenly all the Spaniards left their
+boat and boarded the Primrose, all being armed with rapiers and other
+weapons which they had brought secretly in the boat, and had even a drum
+along with them to proclaim their expected triumph.
+
+On getting on board, the Spaniards dispersed themselves over the ship,
+some below deck, others entering the cabins, while the most part
+remained in a body as if to guard their prize. Then the corregidore, who
+had an officer along with him bearing a white rod in his hand, desired
+Mr Foster to yield himself as a prisoner to the king of Spain; on which
+he called out to his men that they were betrayed. At this time some of
+the Spaniards threatened Mr Foster with their daggers in a furious
+manner, as if they would have slain him, yet they had no such purpose,
+meaning only to have taken him and his men prisoners. Mr Foster and his
+men were amazed at this sudden assault, and were greatly concerned to
+think themselves ready to be put to death; yet some of them, much
+concerned for their own and Mr Fosters danger, and believing themselves
+doomed to death if landed as prisoners, determined either to defend
+themselves manfully or to die with arms in their hands, rather than to
+submit to the hands of the tormentors[333]; wherefore they boldly took
+to their weapons, some armed with javelins, lances, and boar-spears, and
+others with five calivers ready charged, being all the fire-arms they
+had. With these they fired up through the gratings of the hatches at the
+Spaniards on deck, at which the Spaniards were sore amazed not knowing
+how to escape the danger, and fearing the English had more fire-arms
+than they actually possessed. Others of the crew laid manfully about
+among the Spaniards with their lances and boar-spears, disabling two or
+three of the Spaniards at every stroke. Then some of the Spaniards urged
+Mr Foster to command his men to lay down their arms and surrender; but
+he told them that the English were so courageous in the defence of their
+lives and liberties, that it was not in his power to controul them, for
+on such an occasion they would slay both them and him. At this time the
+blood of the Spaniards flowed plentifully about the deck; some being
+shot between the legs from below, the bullets came out at their
+breasts; some were cut in the head, others thrust in the body, and many
+of them so sore wounded that they rushed faster out at one side of the
+ship than they came in at the other, tumbling fast overboard on both
+side with their weapons, some falling into the sea, and others into
+their boats, in which they made all haste on shore. But though they came
+to the ship in great numbers, only a small number of them returned, yet
+it is not known how many of them were slain or drowned. On this occasion
+only one Englishman was slain named John Tristram, and six others
+wounded; but it was piteous to behold so many Spaniards swimming in the
+sea, and unable to save their lives, of whom four who had got hold of
+some part of the ship, were rescued from the waves by Mr Foster and his
+men, whose bosoms were found stuffed with paper to defend them from the
+shot, and these four being wounded, were dressed by the English surgeon.
+One of these was the corregidore himself, who was governor over an
+hundred cities and towns, his appointments exceeding six hundred pounds
+a year. This strange incident took place about six o'clock in the
+evening; after they had landed upwards of twenty tons of goods from the
+Primrose, which were delivered at Bilboa by John Barrell and John
+Brodbank, who were made prisoners on shore.
+
+[Footnote 333: This seems to allude to their fears of the Inquisition,
+if made prisoners.--E.]
+
+After this valiant exploit, performed by 28 Englishmen against 97
+Spaniards, Mr Foster and his men saw that it were vain for them to
+remain any longer; wherefore they hoisted their sails and came away with
+the rest of their goods, and arrived safely by the blessing of God near
+London, on the 8th June 1585. During their return towards England, the
+corregidore and the other Spaniards they had made prisoners offered 500
+crowns to be set on shore anywhere on the coast of Spain or Portugal;
+but as Mr Foster would not consent, they were glad to crave mercy and
+remain on board. On being questioned by Mr Foster as to their reason for
+endeavouring thus to betray him and his men, the corregidore assured him
+it was not done of their own accord, but by the command of the king of
+Spain; and calling for his hose, which were wet, he took out the royal
+commission authorising and commanding him to do what he had attempted,
+which was to the following purport:
+
+"Licentiate de Escober, my corregidore of my lordship of Biscay. Seeing
+that I have caused a great fleet to be equipped in the havens of Lisbon
+and Seville, that there is required for the soldiers, armour, victuals,
+and ammunition, and that great store of shipping is wanted for the said
+service: I therefore require you, on sight of this order, that with as
+much secrecy as may be, you take order for arresting all the shipping
+that may be found on the coast and in the ports of the said lordship,
+particularly all such as belong to Holland, Zealand, Esterland, Germany,
+England, or other provinces and countries that are in rebellion against
+me; excepting those of France, which, being small and weak, are thought
+unfit for the present service. And being thus arrested and staid, you
+shall take special care, that such merchandise as are on board these
+ships be taken out, and that all the armour, arms, ammunition, tackle,
+sails, and provisions be bestowed in safe custody, so that none of the
+ships and men may escape, &c. Done at Barcelona, the 29th May 1585."
+
+In this gallant exploit is to be noted, both the great courage of the
+master, and the love of the mariners to save their master; likewise the
+great care of Mr Foster to save as much as he could of the goods of his
+owners, although by this conduct he may never more frequent those parts,
+without losing his own life and those of his people, as they would
+assuredly, if known, subject themselves to the sharp torments of their
+_Holy house_. As for the king of Spain pretending that the English were
+in rebellion against him, it is sufficiently well known even to
+themselves, with what love, unity, and concord our ships have ever dealt
+with them, being always at least as willing to shew pleasure and respect
+to their king and them, as they have been to deal hospitably by the
+English.--_Hakl._
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Voyage of Sir Francis Drake, in 1585, to the West Indies_[334].
+
+
+Upon the knowledge of the embargo laid by the king of Spain in 1585,
+upon the English ships, men, and goods found in his country, having no
+means to relieve her subjects by friendly treaty, her majesty authorised
+such as had sustained loss by that order of embargo to right themselves
+by making reprisals upon the subjects of the king of Spain; for which
+she gave them her letters of reprisal, to take and arrest all ships and
+merchandises they might find at sea or elsewhere, belonging to the
+subjects of that King. At the same time, to revenge the wrongs offered
+to her crown and dignity, and to resist the preparations then making
+against her by the king of Spain, her majesty equipped a fleet of
+twenty-five sail of ships, and employed them under the command of Sir
+Francis Drake, as the fittest person in her dominions, by reason of his
+experience and success in sundry actions.
+
+[Footnote 334: Church. Collect. III. 155.]
+
+It is not my intention to give all the particulars of the voyages
+treated of, but merely to enumerate the services performed, and the
+mistakes and oversights committed, as a warning to those who may read
+them, to prevent the like errors hereafter. As this voyage of Sir
+Francis Drake was the first undertaking on either side in this war, for
+it ensued immediately after the arrest of our ships and goods in Spain,
+I shall deliver my opinion of it before I proceed any farther. One
+impediment to the voyage was, that to which the ill success of several
+others that followed was imputed, viz. the want of victuals and other
+necessaries fit for so great an expedition; for had not this fleet met
+with a ship of Biscay, coming from Newfoundland with fish, which
+relieved their necessities, they had been reduced to great extremity. In
+this expedition Sir Francis Drake sailed in the Elizabeth Bonadventure;
+captain Frobisher, in the Aid was second in command; and captain Carlee
+was lieutenant-general of the forces by land, Sir Francis having the
+supreme command both as admiral and general.
+
+The services performed in this expedition were, the taking and sacking
+of St Domingo in Hispaniola, of Carthagena on the continent of America,
+and of St Justina in Florida, three towns of great importance in the
+West Indies. This fleet was the greatest of any nation, except the
+Spaniards, that had ever been seen in these seas since their first
+discovery; and, if the expedition had been as well considered of before
+going from home, as it was happily performed by the valour of those
+engaged, it had more annoyed the king of Spain than all the other
+actions that ensued during that war. But it seems our long peace had
+made us incapable of advice in war; for had we kept and defended those
+places when in our possession, and made provision to have relieved them
+from England, we had diverted the war from Europe; for at that time
+there was no comparison betwixt the strength of Spain and England by
+sea, by means whereof we might have better defended these acquisitions,
+and might more easily have encroached upon the rest of the Indies, than
+the king of Spain could have aided or succoured them. But now we see and
+find by experience, that those places which were then weak and
+unfortified, are since fortified, so that it is to no purpose for us to
+attempt annoying the king of Spain now in his dominions in the West
+Indies. And, though this expedition proved fortunate and victorious, yet
+as it was father an awakening than a weakening of the king of Spain, it
+had been far better wholly let alone, than to have undertaken it on such
+slender grounds, and with such inconsiderable forces[335].
+
+[Footnote 335: It must be acknowledged that the present section can only
+be considered as a species of introduction or prelude to an intended
+narrative of an expedition: Yet such actually is the first article in
+Sir William Monson's celebrated Naval Tracts, as published in the
+Collection of Churchill; leaving the entire of the narrative an absolute
+blank. Nothing could well justify the adoption of this inconclusive and
+utterly imperfect article, but the celebrity of its author and actor:
+For Sir William Monson, and the editor of Churchill's Collection, seem
+to have dosed in giving to the public this _Vox et preterea nihil_.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Cruizing Voyage to the Azores by Captain Whiddon, in 1586, written by
+John Evesham_[336].
+
+
+
+This voyage was performed by two barks or pinnaces, the Serpent of 35
+tons, and the Mary Sparke of Plymouth of 50 tons, both belonging to Sir
+Walter Raleigh, knight. Leaving Plymouth on the 10th June 1586, we
+directed our course in the first place for the coast of Spain, and
+thence for the islands called the Azores, in which course we captured a
+small bark, laden with sumach and other commodities, in which was the
+Portuguese governor of St Michael's Island, with several other
+Portuguese and Spaniards. Sailing thence to the island of Gracioso,
+westward of Tercera, we descried a sail to which we gave chase, and
+found her to be a Spaniard. But at the first, not much respecting whom
+we took, so that we might enrich ourselves, which was the object of our
+expedition, and not willing it should be known what we were, we
+displayed a white silk ensign in our maintop, which made them believe
+that we were of the Spanish navy laying in wait for English cruizers;
+but when we got within shot, we hauled down our white flag, and hoisted
+the St Georges ensign, on which they fled as fast as they were able, but
+all in vain, as our ships sailed faster than they; wherefore they threw
+overboard all their ordnance and shot, with many letters and the chart
+of the straits of Magellan, which lead into the south sea, immediately
+after which we took her, finding on board a Spanish gentleman named
+Pedro Sarmiento, who was governor of the straits of Magellan, whom we
+brought home to England, and presented to the queen our sovereign.
+
+[Footnote 336: Hakluyt; II. 606. Astley, I. 196. The command of this
+expedition is attributed by the editor of Astley's Collection to captain
+Whiddon, on the authority of the concluding sentence.--E.]
+
+After this, while plying off and on about the islands, we espied another
+sail to which we gave chase, during which our admiral sprung his
+main-mast; yet in the night our vice-admiral got up with and captured
+the chase, which we found was laden with fish from Cape Blanco on which
+we let her go for want of hands to bring her home. Next day we descried
+two vessels, one a ship and the other a caravel, to which we gave chase,
+on which they made with all haste for the island of Gracioso, where they
+got to anchor under protection of a fort; as having the wind of us we
+were unable to cut them off from the land, or to get up to attack them
+with our ships as they lay at anchor. Having a small boat which we
+called a _light horseman_, there went into her myself and four men armed
+with calivers, and four others to row, in which we went towards them
+against the wind. On seeing us row towards them, they carried a
+considerable part of their merchandise on shore, and landed all the men
+of both vessels; and as soon as we got near, they began to fire upon us
+both from their cannon and small arms, which we returned as well as we
+could. We then boarded one of their ships, in which they had not left a
+single man; and having cut her cables and hoisted her sails, we sent her
+off with two of our men. The other seven of us then went very near the
+shore and boarded the caravel, which rode within stones throw of the
+shore, insomuch that the people on the land threw stones at us; yet in
+spite of them, we took possession of her, there being only one negro on
+board. Having cut her cables and hoisted her sails, she was so becalmed
+under the land that we had to tow her off with our boat, the fort still
+firing on us from their cannon, while the people on shore, to the number
+of about 150, continually fired at us with muskets and calivers, we
+answering them with our five muskets. At this time the shot from my
+musket, being a bar-shot, happened to strike the gunner of the fort
+dead, while he was levelling one of his great guns; and thus we got off
+from them without loss or wound on our part. Having thus taken five[337]
+sail in all, we did as we had done with the ship with the fish, we
+turned them off without hurting them, save that we took from one of them
+her mainmast for our admiral, and sent her away with all our Spanish and
+Portuguese prisoners, except Pedro Sarmiento, three other principal
+persons, and two negroes, leaving them within sight of land, with bread
+and water sufficient to serve them ten days.
+
+[Footnote 337: Four only are mentioned in the text; and it appears that
+they only sent away at this time the first taken ship, in which they had
+captured Sarmiento.--E.]
+
+We now bent our course for England, taking our departure from off the
+western islands in about the latitude of 41° N. and soon afterwards one
+of our men descried a sail from the foretop, then ten sail, and then
+fifteen sail. It was now concluded to send off our two prizes, by
+manning of which we did not leave above 60 men in our two pinnaces. When
+we had dispatched them, we made sail towards the fleet we had
+discovered, which we found to consist of 24 sail in all; two of them
+being great caraks, one of 1200 and the other of 1000 tons, and 10
+galeons, all the rest being small ships and caravels, laden with
+treasure, spices, and sugars. In our two small pinnaces we kept company
+with this fleet of 24 ships for 32 hours, continually fighting with them
+and they with us; but the two huge caraks always kept between their
+fleet and us, so that we were unable to take any one of them; till at
+length, our powder growing short, we were forced to give over, much
+against our wills, being much bent upon gaining some of them, but
+necessity compelling us by want of powder, we left them, without any
+loss of our men, which was wonderful, considering the disparity of force
+and numbers.
+
+We now continued our course to Plymouth, where we arrived within six
+hours after our prizes, though we sent them away forty hours before we
+began our homeward course. We were joyfully received, with the ordnance
+of the town, and all the people hailed us with willing hearts, we not
+sparing our shot in return with what powder we had left. From thence we
+carried our prizes to Southampton, where our owner, Sir Walter Raleigh,
+met us and distributed to us our shares of the prizes.
+
+Our prizes were laden with sugars, elephants teeth, wax, hides,
+Brazil-wood, and _cuser?_ as may be made manifest by the testimony of
+me, John Evesham, the writer hereof, as likewise of captains Whiddon,
+Thomas Rainford, Benjamin Wood, William Cooper master, William Cornish
+master, Thomas Drak corporal, John Ladd gunner, William Warefield
+gunner, Richard Moon, John Drew, Richard Cooper of Harwich, William
+Beares of Ratcliff, John Row of Saltash, and many others.
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Brief relation of notable service performed by Sir Francis Drake in
+1587_[338].
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+The title of this article at large in Hakluyt is, A brief relation of
+the notable service performed by Sir Francis Drake, upon the Spanish
+fleet prepared in the road of Cadiz; and of his destroying 100 sail of
+barks; passing from thence all along the coast of Spain to _Cape Sacre_,
+where also he took certain forts; and so to the mouth of the river of
+Lisbon; thence crossing over sea to the isle of St Michael, where he
+surprised a mighty carak called the St Philip, coming from the East
+Indies, being the first of that kind ever seen in England.
+
+[Footnote 338: Hakl. II. 607. Astl. I. 197.]
+
+The editor of Astleys Collection says, that this relation seems to have
+been taken from a letter, written by one who was in the expedition to a
+friend; and thinks that it is not unlike the manner of Sir Walter
+Raleigh.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Being informed of mighty naval preparations in Spain for the invasion of
+England, her Majesty queen Elizabeth, by the good advice of her grave
+and prudent council, thought it expedient to use measures to prevent the
+same; for which purpose she caused a fleet of some thirty sail to be
+equipped, over which she appointed as general Sir Francis Drake, of
+whose many former good services she had sufficient proof. She
+accordingly caused four ships of her royal navy to be delivered to him,
+the Bonaventure, in which he went general; the Lion, under the command
+of Mr William Borough, comptroller of the navy; the Dreadnought,
+commanded by Mr Thomas Venner; and the Rainbow, of which Mr Henry
+Bellingham was captain[339]. Besides these four ships, two of her
+majestys pinnaces were appointed to serve as tenders or advice boats. To
+this fleet, there were added certain tall ships belonging to the city of
+London, of whose special good service the general made particular
+mention, in his letters to the queen.
+
+[Footnote 339: Sir William Monson in his Naval Tracts, in Churchills
+Collection, III. 156, gives a short account of this expedition. By him
+the admiral ship is called the Elizabeth Bonaventure, and Sir William
+Burroughs is called vice admiral. From a list given by Sir William
+Monson of the royal navy of England left by queen Elizabeth at her
+death, (Church. Coll. III. 196.) the Bonaventure appears to have been of
+the burden of 600 tons, carrying 50 pieces of cannon and 250 men, 70 of
+whom were mariners, and the rest landsmen. The Lion and Rainbow of 500
+tons each, with the same number of guns and men as the Bonaventure. The
+Dreadnought of 400 tons, 20 guns, 200 men, 50 of them seamen.--E.]
+
+This fleet sailed from Plymouth Sound, towards the coast of Spain, in
+April 1587. The 16th of that month, in latitude of 40° N. we met two
+ships belonging to Middleburg, in Zealand, coming from Cadiz, by which
+we were acquainted that vast abundance of warlike stores were provided
+at Cadiz and that neighbourhood, and were ready to be sent to Lisbon.
+Upon this information, our general made sail with all possible
+expedition thither, to cut off and destroy their said forces and
+stores, and upon the 19th of April entered with his fleet into the
+harbour of Cadiz; where at our first entering we were assailed by six
+gallies over against the town, but which we soon constrained to retire
+under cover of their fortress. There were in the road at our arrival
+sixty ships, besides sundry small vessels close under the fortress.
+Twenty French ships fled immediately to Puerta Real, followed by some
+small Spanish vessels that were able to pass the shoals. At our first
+coming, we sunk a ship belonging to Ragusa of 1000 tons, very richly
+laden, which was armed with 40 brass guns. There came two other gallies
+from Port St Mary, and two more from Puerta Real, which shot freely at
+us, but altogether in vain, so that they were forced to retire well
+beaten for their pains. Before night we had taken 30 of their ships, and
+were entire masters of the road in spite of the gallies, which were glad
+to retire under the protection of the fort. Among the captured ships was
+one quite new, of extraordinary size, being above 1200 tons burden,
+belonging to the Marquis of Santa Cruz, high admiral of Spain. Five were
+ships of Biscay, four of which were taking in stores and provisions
+belonging to the king of Spain for his great fleet at Lisbon, which we
+burnt. The fifth was of about 1000 tons, laden with iron spikes, nails,
+hoops, horse shoes, and other things of a similar kind, for the West
+Indies, which we likewise set on fire. We also took a ship of 250 tons,
+laden with wines on the kings account, which ship we carried with us to
+sea, when we took out the wines for our own use, and then set her on
+fire. We took three fliboats of 300 tons each, laden with biscuit, one
+of which we set on fire, after taking out half her loading, and took the
+other two with us to sea. We likewise fired ten ships, which were laden
+with wine, raisins, figs, oil, wheat, and the like. The whole number of
+ships which we then burnt, sunk, or brought away, amounted to 30 at the
+least, and by our estimation to the burden of 10,000 tons. Besides
+these, there were about 40 ships at Puerta Real, not including those
+that fled from Cadiz.
+
+We found little ease during our stay in the road of Cadiz, as the enemy
+were continually firing at us from the gallies, the fortress, and the
+shore, being continually employed in planting new batteries against us
+in all convenient situations; besides which, finding they could not
+defend their ships any longer, they set them on fire that they might
+come among us, so that at the tide of flood we had much ado to defend
+ourselves: Yet was this a pleasant sight to behold, as we were thereby
+relieved from the great labour and fatigue of discharging the provisions
+and stores belonging to the enemy into our ships. Thus, by the
+assistance of the Almighty, and the invincible courage and good conduct
+of our general, this perilous but happy enterprize was achieved in one
+day and two nights, to the great astonishment of the king of Spain, and
+the so great vexation of the Marquis of Santa Cruz, the high admiral,
+that he never had a good day after, and in a few months, as may justly
+be supposed, he died of extreme grief. Having thus performed this
+notable service, we came out from the road of Cadiz on Friday morning,
+the 21st of April, having sustained so small loss as is not worth
+mentioning.
+
+After our departure, the ten gallies which were in the road of Cadiz
+came out after us, as if in bravado, playing their ordnance against us.
+At this time the wind scanted, upon which we cast round again, and made
+for the shore, coming to anchor within a league of the town; and there,
+for all their vapouring, the gallies allowed us to ride in quiet. Having
+thus had experience of a galley fight, I can assure you that the four
+ships of her majesty which we had with us would make no scruple to fight
+with twenty gallies, if all alone, and not being occupied in guarding
+others. There never were gallies that had better place and opportunity
+of advantage to fight against ships; yet were they forced to retire from
+us while riding at anchor in a narrow gut, which we were obliged to
+maintain till we had discharged and fired their ships, which we could
+only do conveniently upon the flood tide, at which time the burning
+ships might drive clear of us. Being thus provisioned for several months
+with bread and wine at the enemies cost, besides what we had brought
+with us from England, our general dispatched captain Crosse to England
+with his letters, giving him farther in charge to relate all the
+particulars of this our first enterprize to her majesty.
+
+We then shaped our course to Cape Sacre[340], and in our way thither we
+took at several times near 100 ships, barks, and caravels, laden with
+hoops, galley oars, pipe staves, and other stores belonging to the king
+of Spain, intended for furthering his preparations against England, all
+of which we set on fire and destroyed, setting all their men on shore.
+We also spoiled and destroyed all the fishing boats and nets
+thereabouts, to their great annoyance, and as we suppose to the entire
+overthrow of their rich Tunny fishing for that year. We came at length
+to Cape Sagres, where we landed; and the better to enjoy the harbour at
+our ease[341], we assailed the castle of Sagres and three other strong
+holds, some of which we took by storm and others by surrender. From
+thence we came before the harbour of Lisbon or mouth of the Tagus, where
+lay the Marquis of Santa Cruz with his fleet of gallies, who seeing us
+chase his ships on shore, and take and carry away his barks and
+caravels, was obliged to allow us to remain quietly at our pleasure, and
+likewise to depart, without exchanging a single shot. When our general
+sent him word that he was ready to combat with him, the marquis refused
+his challenge, saying that he was not then ready, neither had he any
+such commission from his sovereign.
+
+[Footnote 340: Cape St Vincent, or rather Punta de Sagres, one of the
+head lands of that great promontory.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 341: Probably the harbour of Figuera in Algarve, a town near
+Cape Sagres.--E.]
+
+Thus having his challenge refused by the marquis, and seeing no more
+good to be done on the coast of Spain, our general thought it improper
+to spend any more time there; and therefore with consent of his chief
+officers[342], he shaped his course towards the island of St Michael,
+within 20 or 30 leagues of which he had the good fortune to fall in with
+a Portuguese carak, called the San Philippo, being the same ship which
+had carried out to the Indies three Japanese princes who had been in
+Europe[343]. The carak surrendered without resistance, and being the
+first that had ever been taken on the homeward voyage from India, the
+Portuguese took it for a bad omen, especially as she had the kings own
+name. Our general put all the people belonging to this carak into
+certain vessels well provided with provisions, and sent them courteously
+home to their own country. The riches of this prize seemed so great to
+the whole fleet, as in truth they were, that every one expected to have
+sufficient reward of their labour, and thereupon it was unanimously
+resolved to return to England, which we happily did, and arrived safe
+the same summer in Plymouth with our whole fleet and this rich booty, to
+our own profit and due honour, and the great admiration of the whole
+kingdom.
+
+[Footnote 342: According to Sir William Monson, Church. Col. III. 156.
+Sir Francis Drake went upon this expedition to conciliate the merchant
+adventurers, to whom most of the ships of his squadron belonged.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 343: Sir William Monson, in the place quoted above, says he
+had intelligence of this carak having wintered at Mosambique, and being
+now expected home.--E.]
+
+It may be here noted, that the taking of this carak wrought two
+extraordinary effects in England; as in the first place it taught others
+that caraks were no such bugbears but that they might be easily taken,
+as has been since experienced in taking the Madre de Dios, and in
+burning and sinking others; and secondly in acquainting the English
+nation more particularly with the exceeding riches and vast wealth of
+the East Indies, by which themselves and their neighbours of Holland
+have been encouraged, being no less skillful in navigation nor of less
+courage than the Portuguese, to share with them in the rich trade of
+India, where they are by no means so strong as was formerly supposed.
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Brief account of the Expedition of the Spanish Armada in 1588_[344].
+
+
+Notwithstanding the great hurt and spoil made by Sir Francis Drake in
+Cadiz roads the year before, by intercepting some part of the
+preparations intended for the great navy of the king of Spain, he used
+his utmost endeavours to be revenged this year, lest by longer delay his
+designs might be prevented as before; wherefore he arrested all ships,
+men, and necessaries that were wanting for his fleet, compelling every
+one to serve him in his great expedition. He appointed for general of
+this his so called Invincible Armada, the duke of Medina Sidonia, who
+was employed on this occasion more for his high birth and exalted rank,
+than for any experience in sea affairs; for so many dukes, marquises,
+and earls had volunteered on this occasion, that it was feared they
+might repine if commanded by a person of lower quality than themselves.
+They departed from Lisbon on the 19th of May 1588, with the greatest
+pride and glory, and with less doubt of victory than ever had been done
+by any nation. But God, angry with their insolence, turned the event
+quite contrary to their expectation.
+
+[Footnote 344: Church. Col. III. 157.]
+
+The directions given by the king of Spain to his general, the duke of
+Medina Sidonia, were to repair, as wind and weather might allow, to the
+road of Calais in Picardy, there to wait the arrival of the prince of
+Parma and his army, and on their meeting they were to open a letter
+containing their farther instructions. He was especially commanded to
+sail along the coasts of Brittany and Normandy in going up the channel,
+to avoid being discovered by the English; and, if he even met the
+English fleet, he was in no case to offer them battle, but only to
+defend himself in case of attack. On coming athwart the North Cape[345]
+the duke was assailed with contrary wind and foul weather, by which he
+was forced to take shelter in the _Groyne_, or bay of Corunna, where
+part of his fleet waited for him.
+
+[Footnote 345: Perhaps Cape Ortegal may be here meant, being the most
+northern head land of Spain, and not far from Corunna, called the Groyne
+in the text.--E.]
+
+When about to depart from Corunna, the duke got intelligence from an
+English fisherman, that our fleet had lately been at sea, but had put
+back again and discharged most of their men, as not expecting the
+Spanish armada this year. This intelligence occasioned the duke to alter
+his resolutions, and to disobey the instructions given him by the king;
+yet this was not done without some difficulty, as the council was
+divided in opinion, some holding it best to observe the kings commands,
+while others were anxious not to lose the opportunity of surprising our
+fleet at unawares, when they hoped to burn and destroy them. Diego
+Flores de Valdes, who commanded the squadron of Andalusia, and on whom
+the duke most relied, because of his judgment and experience in maritime
+affairs, was the main cause of persuading to make the attempt upon our
+ships in harbour, and in that design they directed their course for
+England.
+
+The first land they fell in with was the Lizard, being the most
+southerly point of Cornwall, which they mistook for the Ram-head off
+Plymouth; and as the night was at hand, they tacked out to sea, laying
+their account to make an attempt upon our ships in Plymouth next
+morning. In the mean time, while thus deceived in the land, they were
+discovered by captain Fleming, a pirate or freebooter who had been
+roving at sea, and who knowing them to be the Spanish fleet, repaired in
+all haste to Plymouth, and gave notice to our fleet then, riding at
+anchor, as follows:
+
+THE ENGLISH FLEET[346].
+
+   _Ships.       Commanders.                Tons. Guns. Men._
+   The Ark Royal    The Lord Admiral              800   32   400
+   Revenge          Sir F. Drake, vice admiral
+   Victory          Sir J. Hawkins, rear admiral  800   52   400
+   Lion             Lord Thomas Howard            500   80   250
+   Bear             Lord Sheffield                900   40   500
+   Elizabeth-Jonas  Sir Robert Southwell          900   40   500
+   Triumph          Sir Martin Frobisher         1000   40   500
+   Hope             Captain Crosse                600   30   250
+   Bonaventure      ---- Reyman                   600   30   250
+   Dreadnought      ---- George Beeston           400   20   200
+   Nonparielle      ---- Thomas Fenner            500   50   250
+   Swiftsure        ---- William Fenner           400   20   200
+   Rainbow          Lord Henry Seymour
+   Vauntguard       Sir William Wentworth
+   Mary-Rose        Captain Fenton
+   Antilope         Sir Henry Palmer              350   16   160
+   Foresight        Captain Baker                 300   16   160
+   Aid              ---- John Wentworth
+   Swallow          ---- Richard Hawkins          330   16   160
+   Tiger            ---- William Wentworth        200   12   100
+   Scout            ---- Ashley                   120    8    66
+   Bull
+   Tremontanny                                           8    70
+   Acatice                                        100    8    60
+   Charles, pinnace Captain Roberts
+   Moon             ---- Clifford
+   Spy              ---- Bradbury                  50    5    40
+   Noy
+
+[Footnote 346: This list, as given by Sir William Monson in the present
+article, contains only the names of the ships and commanders; the other
+circumstances enumerated, tonnage, guns, and men, are added from a list
+of the royal navy of England at the death of queen Elizabeth, which will
+be given hereafter.--E.]
+
+Immediately on receiving the intelligence brought by Fleming, the lord
+admiral got out his ships to sea with all possible expedition; so that
+before the Spaniards could draw near Plymouth, they were welcomed at sea
+by the lord admiral and his fleet, who continued to fight with them till
+they came to anchor at Calais. The particulars of the fight and its
+success I purposely omit, being things so well known[347].
+
+[Footnote 347: This surely is a poor excuse for omitting the glorious
+destruction of the Spanish Armada; yet in a Collection of Voyages, it
+were improper to attempt supplying even this great omission, by any
+composition of our own; as it may be found in the historians of the
+time.--E.]
+
+While this great armada was preparing, her majesty had frequent and
+perfect intelligence of the designs of the Spaniards; and knowing that
+the king of Spain intended to invade England by means of a mighty fleet
+from his own coast, she caused her royal navy to be fitted out under the
+conduct of the lord high admiral of England, whom she stationed at
+Plymouth as the fittest place for attending their coming. Knowing
+however, that it was not the Armada alone which could endanger the
+safety of England, as it was too weak for any enterprise on land,
+without the assistance of the Prince of Parma and his army in Flanders,
+she therefore appointed thirty ships of the Hollanders to lie at anchor
+off Dunkirk, where the prince and his army were to have embarked in flat
+bottomed boats, which were built on purpose and all in readiness for the
+expedition to England. Thus by the wise precautions of the queen, the
+prince was effectually prevented from putting to sea with his flat
+boats; but in truth neither his vessels nor his army were in readiness,
+which caused the king of Spain to be jealous of him ever after, and is
+supposed to have hastened his end.
+
+Although her majesty had taken the most vigilant precautions to foresee
+and prevent all dangers that might threaten from sea, yet did she not
+deem herself and country too secure against the enemy by these means,
+and therefore prepared a royal army to receive them in case of landing.
+But it was not the will of God that the enemy should set foot on
+England, and the queen became victorious over him at sea with small
+hazard, and little bloodshed of her subjects. Having thus shewn the
+designs of the Spaniards, and the course pursued by the queen to prevent
+them, I propose now to consider the errors committed on both sides[348].
+
+[Footnote 348: Our readers are requested to remember that these are the
+reflections of Sir William Monson, a contemporary.--E.]
+
+Nothing could appear more rational or more likely to happen, after the
+Duke of Medina Sidonia had got intelligence of the state of our navy,
+than a desire to surprise them at unawares in harbour; since he well
+knew, if he had taken away or destroyed our strength at sea, that he
+might have landed when and where he pleased, which is a great advantage
+to an invading enemy: Yet, admitting it to have had the effect he
+designed, I see not how he is to be commended for infringing the
+instructions he had received from his sovereign. That being the case,
+it is easy to appreciate what blame he deserved for the breach of his
+instructions, when so ill an event followed from his rashness and
+disobedience. It was not his want of experience, or his laying the blame
+on Valdes, that excused him at his return to Spain, where he certainly
+had been severely punished, had not his wife obtained for him the royal
+favour.
+
+Before the arrival in Spain of the ships that escaped from the
+catastrophe of this expedition, it was known there that Diego Flores de
+Valdes had persuaded the duke to infringe the royal instructions.
+Accordingly, the king had given strict orders in all his ports, wherever
+Valdes might arrive, to apprehend him, which was executed, and he was
+carried to the castle of Santander, without being permitted to plead in
+his defence, and remained there without being ever seen or heard of
+afterwards; as I learned from his page, with whom I afterwards
+conversed, we being both prisoners together in the castle of Lisbon. If
+the directions of the king of Spain had been punctually carried into
+execution, then the armada had kept along the coast of France, and had
+arrived in the road of Calais before being discovered by our fleet,
+which might have greatly endangered the queen and realm, our fleet being
+so far off at Plymouth. And, though the Prince of Parma had not been
+presently ready, yet he might have gained sufficient time to get in
+readiness, in consequence of our fleet being absent. Although the prince
+was kept in by the thirty sail of Hollanders, yet a sufficient number of
+the dukes fleet might have been able to drive them from the road of
+Dunkirk and to have possessed themselves of that anchorage, so as to
+have secured the junction of the armada and the land army; after which
+it would have been an easy matter for them to have transported
+themselves to England. What would have ensued on their landing may be
+well imagined.
+
+But it was the will of HIM who directs all men and their actions, that
+the fleets should meet, and the enemy be beaten, as they were, and
+driven from their anchorage in Calais roads, the Prince of Parma
+blockaded in the port of Dunkirk, and the armada forced to go about
+Scotland and Ireland with great hazard and loss: Which shews how God did
+marvellously defend us against the dangerous designs of our enemies.
+Here was a favourable opportunity offered for us to have followed up the
+victory upon them: For, after they were beaten from the road of Calais,
+and all their hopes and designs frustrated, if we had once more offered
+to fight them, it is thought that the duke was determined to surrender,
+being so persuaded by his confessor. This example, it is very likely,
+would have been followed by the rest. But this opportunity was lost, not
+through the negligence or backwardness of the lord admiral, but through
+the want of providence in those who had the charge of furnishing and
+providing for the fleet: For, at that time of so great advantage, when
+they came to examine into the state of their stores, they found a
+general scarcity of powder and shot, for want of which they were forced
+to return home; besides which, the dreadful storms which destroyed so
+many of the Spanish fleet, made it impossible for our ships to pursue
+those of them that remained. Another opportunity was lost, not much
+inferior to the other, by not sending part of our fleet to the west of
+Ireland, where the Spaniards were of necessity to pass, after the many
+dangers and disasters they had endured. If we had been so happy as to
+have followed this course, which was both thought of and discoursed of
+at the time, we had been absolutely victorious over this great and
+formidable armada. For they were reduced to such extremity, that they
+would willingly have yielded, as divers of them confessed that were
+shipwrecked in Ireland.
+
+By this we may see how weak and feeble are the designs of men, in
+respect of the great Creator; and how indifferently he dealt between the
+two nations, sometimes giving one the advantage sometimes the other; and
+yet so that he only ordered the battle.
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Account of the Relief of a part of the Spanish Armada, at Anstruther in
+Scotland, in 1588_[349].
+
+
+However glorious and providential the defeat and destruction of the
+_Invincible Armada_, it does not belong to the present work to give a
+minute relation of that great national event. It seems peculiarly
+necessary and proper, however, in this work, to give a very curious
+unpublished record respecting the miserable fate of the Spanish armada,
+as written by a contemporary, the Reverend James Melville, minister of
+Anstruther, a sea-port town on the Fife, or northern, shore of the
+Frith of Forth.
+
+[Footnote 349: From MS. Memoirs of James Melville, a contemporary.]
+
+James Melville, who was born in 1556, and appears to have been inducted
+to the living of Anstruther only a short time before the year 1588, left
+a MS. history of his own life and times, extending to the year 1601. Of
+this curious unpublished historical document, there are several copies
+extant, particularly in the splendid library of the Faculty of
+Advocates, and in that belonging to the Writers to the Signet, both at
+Edinburgh. The present article is transcribed from a volume of MSS
+belonging to a private gentleman, communicated to the editor by a valued
+literary friend. It had formerly belonged to a respectable clergyman of
+Edinburgh, and has the following notice of its origin written by the
+person to whom it originally belonged.
+
+"The following History of the Life of James Melville, was transcribed
+from an old MS. lent to me by Sir William Calderwood of Poltoun, one of
+the Judges of the Courts of Session and Justiciary, who had it among
+other papers that belonged to his grand-uncle, Mr David Calderwood,
+author of Altare Damascenum, History, &c."
+
+This MS. so far as it contains the Life of James Melville, extends to
+360 folio pages; of which the present article occupies about three
+pages, from near the bottom of p. 184. to nearly the same part of p.
+187. The orthography seems to have been considerably modernized by the
+transcriber, but without changing the antiquated words and modes of
+expression. Such of these as appeared difficult to be understood by our
+English readers, are here explained between brackets.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+That winter, [1587-8] the King [James VI. of Scotland] was occupied in
+commenting of the Apocalyps, and in setting out sermons thereupon,
+against the papists and Spaniards; and yet, by a piece of great
+oversight, the papists practiced never more busily in this land, and
+[nor] made greater preparation for receiving of the Spaniards, nor
+[than] that year. For a long time, the news of a Spanish navy and army
+had been blazed abroad; and about the lambastyde of the year 1588, this
+island had found a fearful effect thereof, to the utter subversion both
+of kirk and policy, if God had not wonderfully watched over the same,
+and mightily foughen and defeat that army, by his souldiers the
+elements, which he made all four most fiercely till afflict them, till
+almost utter consumption. Terrible was the fear, peircing were the
+preachings, earnest zealous and fervent were the prayers, sounding were
+the sighs and sabs, and abounding were the tears, at that fast and
+general assembly keeped at Edinburgh, when the news were credibly told,
+sometimes of their landing at Dunbar, sometimes at St Andrews and in
+Tay, and now and then at Aberdeen and Cromerty firth: and, in very deed,
+as we knew certainly soon after, the Lord of armies, who rides upon the
+wings of the wind, the Keeper of his own Israel, was in the mean time
+convying that monstrous navy about our coasts, and directing their hulks
+and galliasses to the islands, rocks and sands, whereupon he had
+distinat their wrack and destruction.
+
+For, within two or three moneths thereafter, early in the morning by
+break of day, one of our baillies[350] came to my bed side, saying, but
+not with fray [fear], "I have to tell you news, Sir: There is arrived
+within our harbour this morning, a shipfull of Spaniards, but not to
+give mercy; but to ask." And so shews me that the commander had landed,
+and he had commanded them to their ship again, and the Spaniards had
+humbly obeyed. He therefore desired me to rise and hear their petition
+with them. Up I got with diligence, and, assembling the honest men of
+the town, came to the tolbooth[351], and after consultation taken to
+hear them and what answer to make, there presented us a very venerable
+man of big stature, and grave and stout countenance, grey haired and
+very humble like, who, after much and very low courtesie, bowing down
+with his face near the ground, and touching my shoe with his hand, began
+his harangue in the Spanish tongue, whereof I understood the substance;
+and, I being about to answer in Latin, he having only a young man with
+him to be his interpreter, [who] began and told over again to us in good
+English.
+
+[Footnote 350: The baillies of towns in Scotland are equivalent to
+aldermen in England. The author here refers to the town of Anstruther, a
+sea port town of Fife, on the northern shore of the Firth of Forth, of
+which he was minister. There are two Anstruthers, easter and wester,
+very near each other, and now separate parishes; but it does not appear
+to which of these the present historical document refers: Perhaps they
+were then one.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 351: The town-house; but now generally applied to signify the
+prison, then, and even now, often attached to the town hall.--E.]
+
+The sum was, That king Philip his master had rigged out a navy and army
+to land in England, for just causes to be avenged of many intollerable
+wrongs which he had received of that nation. But God, for their sins,
+had been against them, and by storm of weather had driven the navy _by_
+[past] the coast of England, and him with certain captains, being the
+general of twenty hulks, upon an isle of Scotland called the Fair isle,
+where they had made shipwrack, and were, so many as had escaped the
+merciless seas and rocks, more nor [than] six or seven weeks suffered
+great hunger and cold, till conducting that bark out of Orkney, they
+were come hither as to their special friends and confederates, to kiss
+the kings majesties hand of Scotland, and herewith he _becked_ [bowed]
+even to the _yeard_ [ground]; and to find relief and comfort thereby to
+himself, these gentlemen, captains, and the poor souldiers, whose
+condition was for the present most miserable and pitiful.
+
+I answered this much in sum, That, howbeit neither our friendship, which
+could not be great, seeing their king and they were friends to the
+greatest enemy of Christ, the pope of Rome, and our king and we defied
+him, nor yet their cause against our neighbours and special friends of
+England, could procure any benefit at our hands for their relief or
+comfort; nevertheless they should know by experience that we were men,
+and so moved by human compassion, and christians of better religion
+_nor_ [than] they, which should _kythe_ [appear manifest] in the fruits
+and effects plain contrary to theirs: For, whereas our people, resorting
+among them in peaceable and lawful affairs of merchandise, were
+violently taken and cast in prison, their goods and _gier_ [chattels]
+confiscate, and their bodies committed to the cruel flaming fire for the
+cause of religion, they should find nothing amongst us but Christian
+pity and works of mercy and alms, leaving to God to work in their hearts
+concerning religion as it pleased him. This being truly reported again
+to him by his townsmen, with great reverence he gave thanks and said,
+"He could not make answer for their _kirk_ [church], and the laws and
+order thereof, only for himself, that there were divers Scotsmen who
+knew him, and to whom he had shewn courtesy and favour at Calice[352],
+and as he supposed some of this same town of Anstruther."
+
+[Footnote 352: _Calice_ in this passage, and _Calais_ in one subsequent,
+certainly means Cadiz in Spain; which to this day is often called
+_Cales_ by English mariners.--E.]
+
+So [I] shewed him that the bailies had granted him licence, with the
+captains, to go to their lodging for their refreshment, but to none of
+their men to land, till the overlord of the town were advertised, and
+understood the kings majesties mind _anent_ [concerning] them. Thus with
+great courtesie he departed.
+
+That night the _laird_ [lord of the manor] being advertised, came; and,
+on the morn, with a good number of the gentlemen of the countrey round
+about, gave the said general and the captains _presence_, [audience] and
+after the same speeches in effect as before, received them in his house,
+and suffered the souldiers to come a land and ly altogether to the
+number of thirteen score, for the most part young beardless men,
+_silly_, [weak] travelled, and hungered; to the which, one day or two
+_kail pottage_[353] and fish was given; for my advice was conform to the
+prophet Elizeus [Elisha] his to the king of Israel in Samaria, _Give
+them bread and water, &c._
+
+[Footnote 353: A mess formerly much used in Scotland among the commons,
+being a kind of soup maigre, composed of _kail_, a species of greens or
+coleworts, boiled in water, and thickened with oat-meal, grits, or
+shelled barley.--E.]
+
+The names of the commanders were Jan [Juan] Gomes de Medina, general of
+twenty hulks, captain Patricio, captain de Lagaretto, captain de
+Luffera, captain Mauretio, and Seingour Serrano. But verily all the
+while, my heart melted within me for desire of thankfulness to God, when
+I remembered the prideful and cruel natural temper of the people, and
+how they would have used us, in case they had landed with their forces
+among us, and the wonderful work of Gods mercy and justice in making us
+see them, the chief commanders of them, to make such due-gard
+[submission] and courtesie to poor seamen, and their souldiers, so
+abjectly, to beg alms at our doors and in our streets.
+
+In the mean time, they knew not of the wrack of the rest, but supposed
+that the rest of the army was safely returned [to Spain,] till one day I
+got in St Andrews, in print, the wrack of the gallies in particular,
+with the names of the principal men, and how they were used, in Ireland
+and our Highlands, in Wales and other parts of England. The which, when
+I recorded to Jan Gomes, by particular and special names, he cried out
+for grief, _bursted and grat_ [burst into tears.] This Jan Gomes shewed
+great kindness to a ship of our town, which he found arriested at
+_Calais_[354] at home coming, _rode_[355] to court for her, and made
+great _russe_ [praise] of Scotland to his king, took the honest men to
+his house, and inquired for the laird of Anstruther, for the minister,
+and his host, and sent home many commendations: But we thanked God in
+our hearts, that we had seen them in that form.
+
+[Footnote 354: This must signify Cadiz, as mentioned before.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 355: Perhaps ought to have been _wrote_.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_A cruising Voyage to the Azores in 1589, by the Earl of
+Cumberland_[356].
+
+
+We learn from Hakluyt, II. 647, that this narrative was written by Mr
+Edward Wright, an eminent mathematician and engineer, who was the real
+author of that admirable invention for charts, commonly called
+_Mercators projection_, but unjustly, as Mr Wright complains in his work
+entitled _Vulgar Errors_, where he charges Mercator with plagiarism.
+From the narrative, Mr Wright appears to have been engaged in the
+expedition and on board the Victory[357].
+
+[Footnote 356: Hakluyt, II. 647. Churchill, III. 161. Astley, I. 206.]
+
+[Footnote 357: Astley, I. 206. a.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The right honourable the Earl of Cumberland, intending to cruize against
+the enemy, prepared a small fleet of four ships only[358] at his own
+charges, one of which was the Victory[359] belonging to the queens royal
+navy. The others were the Meg and Margaret, two small ships, one of
+which was soon obliged to be sent home as unable to endure the sea,
+besides a small caravel. Having assembled about 400 men, sailors and
+soldiers, with several gentlemen volunteers, the earl and they embarked
+and set sail from Plymouth Sound on the 28th June 1589, accompanied by
+the following captains and gentlemen. Captain Christopher Lister, an
+officer of great resolution, Captain Edward Careless, _alias Wright_,
+who had been captain of the Hope in Sir Francis Drakes expedition to
+the West Indies against St Domingo and Carthagena; Captain Boswel, Mr
+Mervin, Mr Henry Long, Mr Partridge, Mr Norton; Mr William Monson,
+afterwards Sir William[360], who was captain of the Meg and
+vice-admiral, and Mr Pigeon, who was captain of the caravel.
+
+[Footnote 358: Sir William Monson, in Churchills collection, says there
+were _five_ ships; and indeed we find a fifth, called the Saucy Jack,
+mentioned in the narrative.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 359: The Victory was of 800 tons, carrying 32 guns and 400
+men; of whom, according to Sir William Monson, 268 were mariners, and
+100 sailors, the remaining 32 being probably soldiers, or as we now call
+them marines. The distinction between mariners and sailors is not
+obvious; perhaps what are now called ordinary and able seamen,--E.]
+
+[Footnote 360: Sir William Monson was author of some curious Naval
+Tracts, giving an account of the Royal Navy of England in the reigns of
+Queen Elizabeth and James I. which are preserved in Churchills
+Collection, Vol. III. pp. 147--508.--E.]
+
+About three days after our departure from Plymouth, we met with three
+French ships, one of which belonged to Newhaven[361], and another to St
+Maloes; and finding them to be leaguers[362], and therefore lawful
+prizes, we took them, and sent two of them home to England with all
+their loading, being mostly fish from Newfoundland, having first
+distributed among our ships as much of the fish as they could find
+stowage room for; and in the third ship we sent all the prisoners home
+to France. On that day and the next we met some other ships, but finding
+them belonging to Rotterdam and Embden, bound for Rochelle, we dismissed
+them. On the 28th and 29th, we met several of our English ships
+returning from an expedition to Portugal, which we relieved with
+victuals. The 13th July, being in sight of the coast of Spain in lat.
+39° N. we descried eleven ships, on which we immediately prepared to
+engage them, sending the Meg commanded by Captain Monson to ascertain
+what and whence they were. On the approach of the Meg some shots were
+exchanged, and as their admiral and vice-admiral displayed their flags,
+we perceived that some fighting was likely to follow. Having therefore
+prepared for battle, we made all haste towards them, always taking care
+to get to windward, and between ten and eleven o'clock A.M. we came up
+with them in the Victory, when they all yielded after a slight
+resistance. The masters all came on board our admiral, and shewed their
+several passports from Hamburg, Lubeck, Bremen, Pomerania, and Calais.
+They had certain bags of pepper and cinnamon, which they confessed to
+belong to a Jew in Lisbon, which they had charge of to deliver to his
+factor in their country; and finding this to be lawful prize by their
+own confession, the same was taken and divided among our whole company,
+the value being estimated at L.4500, at two shillings the pound[363]. We
+dismissed these ships on the 17th of July, but seven of their men,
+having volunteered as sailors in our fleet, were taken to reinforce our
+crew. After this we held on our course for the Azores or Western
+islands.
+
+[Footnote 361: Probably that port now called Havre de Grace.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 362: Alluding to the _Catholic League_, then in alliance with
+Spain, and in rebellious opposition to their lawful sovereign, for the
+purpose of excluding the king of Navarre, afterwards Henry IV. from the
+crown of France.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 363: Sir William Monson, who gives a short account of this
+expedition in the Naval Tracts already quoted, says that spices to the
+value of L.7000 were taken out of these vessels.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 1st August we got sight of St Michael, one of the
+eastermost of the Azores, towards which we made sail all that day; and,
+putting up a Spanish flag at our maintop that we might not be suspected
+for enemies, we approached at night to the chief town and road of the
+island, where we espied three ships and some other vessels at anchor,
+all of which we determined to take during the darkness of the night.
+Accordingly about ten or eleven o'clock P.M. our boats were sent well
+manned to cut their cables and hawsers and tow them out to sea. On
+coming to them, one of the largest of these ships was found to be the
+Falcon of London, commanded by a Scots pilot who passed her off as his
+own. But our men let loose three other smaller ships, which they towed
+towards us, most of their men leaping overboard and swimming on shore
+with loud outcries, which were answered from the town, which was all in
+an uproar on hearing what was going forwards. The castle discharged some
+shots at our boats, but being unable to see them by reason of the
+darkness, did us no harm. The Scotsman too, to make the Spaniards
+believe him their friend, fired a few shots in the air. Shortly after,
+he and some others came on board our admiral, offering their services.
+The three ships brought out were laden with wine and sallad oil from
+Seville. The same day our caravel chaced a Spanish caravel on shore,
+which carried letters by which we learnt that the caraks had departed
+from the island of Tercera eight days before.
+
+The 7th of August we got sight of a small ship which we chased towards
+Tercera with our pinnace, the weather being calm, and overtook her
+towards evening, when we found in her 30 tons of good Madeira wine,
+besides woollen cloth, silk, taffeta, and other goods. Coming on the
+14th to the island of Flores, it was determined to take in fresh water,
+and such fresh provisions as the island afforded; wherefore manning our
+boats with about 120 men, we rowed towards the shore, where the
+inhabitants, who were assembled at the watering-place, hung out a flag
+of truce, and we did the like. On coming to them, the earl gave them to
+understand, by means of his Portuguese interpreter, that he was a friend
+to their king Don Antonio, and came not with any intention to injure
+them, meaning only to procure water and fresh provisions, by way of
+exchange for oil wine and pepper, to which they readily agreed, and sent
+off some of their people immediately for beeves and sheep. In the
+meantime we marched southwards to their town of Santa Cruz, whence all
+the inhabitants had fled and carried off every thing of value. On
+demanding the reason of this, they answered it proceeded from fear, and
+that they always did so on the appearance of any ships near their coast.
+That part of the island was mostly composed of large rocky hills and
+barren mountains, and was little inhabited, being apt to be molested by
+ships of war; and even Santa Cruz, one of their principal towns, was all
+in ruins, having been burnt about two years before by some English ships
+of war, according to what we were told by the inhabitants. As we were
+rowing towards the Victory in the evening, a huge fish pursued us for
+nearly two miles, mostly distant about a spear length from the stern of
+the boat, and sometimes so near as to touch. The tips of his fins at the
+gills, appearing often above water, were by estimation four or five
+yards asunder, and his jaws gaping a yard and half wide, put us in fear
+he might overset our pinnace; but God be thanked, by rowing as hard as
+we could, we escaped.
+
+When we were about the island of Flores, we got notice from a small
+vessel called the Drake[364], that the caraks were at Tercera, of which
+news we were very glad, and made sail thither with all the speed we
+could. By the way we came to Fayal road on the 27th August after sunset,
+where we saw some ships at anchor, towards which Captains Lister and
+Monson were sent in the skiff to see what they were, and lest any
+mischance should befall our boat, we sent in likewise the Saucy Jack and
+the small caravel; but as the wind was off shore, these vessels were not
+able to set up to where the Spanish ships were anchored. The skiff went
+on however, and endeavoured to board a ship of 250 tons, which carried
+14 pieces of ordnance, and continued fighting with her for an hour,
+till our other boats came up to the rescue and aid of the skiff. A fresh
+boarding was then attempted, by one boat on the quarter and another on
+the bow, when we entered on one side while all the Spaniards leapt
+overboard on the other side, except Juan de Palma the captain, and two
+or three more. This ship was moored close to the castle, which fired at
+us all the time; but the only one wounded on the occasion was the master
+of our caravel, who had the calf of one of his legs shot away. This ship
+was from St Juan de Puerto Rico, laden with sugar ginger and hides.
+After we had towed her clear of the castle, our boats went in again and
+brought out five other small ships; one laden with hides, another with
+elephants teeth, grains[365], cocoa-nuts, and goats skins, come from
+Guinea; another with woad, and two with dog-fish, which two last were
+set adrift as of no value, but all the other four were sent for England
+on the 30th of August. At the taking of these prizes there were
+consorted with us some other small men of war, as Master John Davis,
+with his ship, pinnace, and boat; Captain Markesburie with his ship,
+whose owner was Sir Walter Raleigh; and the bark of Lyme, which also was
+consorted with us before.
+
+[Footnote 364: Sir William Monson says, from an English man of war.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 365: Guinea Pepper.--E.]
+
+The last of August we came in sight of Tercera in the morning, being
+about nine or ten leagues from shore, when we espied a small boat under
+sail coming towards us, which seemed strange at such a distance from
+land and no ship in sight; but on coming near, we found it to contain
+eight Englishmen, who had been prisoners in Tercera, and had committed
+themselves to the sea in this open boat in hopes to escape. Their
+mainyard consisted of two pipe-staves tied together by the ends, and
+they had no other provisions than what they had been able to carry off
+in their pockets and bosoms. When taken on board the Victory, they gave
+us certain assurance that the caraks had left Tercera about a week
+before. Being thus without any hopes of taking the caraks, it was
+resolved to return for Fayal, intending to surprise the town; but till
+the 9th of September, we had either the wind so contrary, or such calm
+weather, that in all that time we scarcely made nine or ten leagues way,
+lingering up and down near the island of Pico.
+
+In the afternoon of the 10th September, we came again to Fayal road;
+upon which the earl sent Captain Lister, with a person from Graciosa
+whom Captain Monson had taken some time before, and some others,
+carrying a message to Fayal. He was met by some of the inhabitants in a
+boat, who were brought by Captain Lister to my lord, who gave them their
+choice, either to allow him to take possession of the platform or fort,
+when he and his company would remain quietly there for some space,
+without injury, till the inhabitants had compounded for the ransom of
+their town; or else to stand the chance of war. With this message they
+returned on shore; but those who had charge of the fort said, that it
+was contrary to their allegiance and the oath they had taken to king
+Philip, to deliver up their garrison without endeavouring to defend it.
+Upon this, the earl gave orders for all the boats of the different ships
+to be manned and armed, and he soon afterwards landed with all his men
+on the sandy beach under the side of a hill, about half a league from
+the fort. Certain troops both horse and foot were seen on the top of the
+hill, and two other companies appeared to oppose us with displayed
+ensigns, one on the shore in front of the town, which marched towards
+our landing place as if they meant to attack us; while the other was
+seen in a valley to the south of the fort, as if coming to assist in
+defending the town; and at the same time, the garrison in the fort fired
+upon us briskly from their cannon. In spite of all these demonstrations
+of resistance, having first marshalled his men in proper order, my lord
+marched along the sandy beach towards the fort, passing between the sea
+and the town for something more than a mile; and as the shore became
+rocky, so as to render any farther progress in that direction extremely
+difficult, he entered the town, and marched through the streets
+unopposed to the fort, these companies of the enemy, that seemed at
+first resolved to resist his progress, being soon dispersed. Those in
+the fort likewise fled at our approach, leaving my lord and his men to
+scale the walls and gain possession, without any resistance. In the
+meantime the ships continued to batter the town and fort, until they saw
+the _red cross_ of England floating from the walls.
+
+Fayal is the principal town of this island, and is situated directly
+over against the high and mighty mountain of _Pico_, towards the
+north-west from that mountain, from which it is divided by a narrow sea
+or strait, which at that place is some two or three leagues broad,
+between the islands of Fayal and Pico. This town contained about 300
+houses, which were handsomely and strongly built of stone and lime,
+their roofs being double covered with hollow tyles, much like those used
+in England, only that they are less at one end than at the other. Almost
+every house had a cistern or well in a garden behind, in which likewise
+there were vines with ripe grapes, forming pleasant arbours or shady
+walks; and in every garden there grew some tobacco, then hardly known,
+but now commonly used in England, with which the women of the place were
+then in use to stain their faces, to make them look young and fresh. In
+these gardens there likewise grew pepper, both Indian and common,
+fig-trees with fruit both white and red, peach-trees rather of humble
+growth, oranges, lemons, quinces, potatoes, and other fruits and roots.
+Sweet wood, which I think is cedar, is very common in that island, and
+is used both for building and fuel.
+
+Having possessed himself of the town and fort, my lord issued orders
+that none of the soldiers or mariners should enter into any of the
+houses for plunder, and was especially careful that none of the churches
+or religious houses should suffer injury of any kind, all of which were
+preserved from violation by the appointment of guards for their
+protection. But the rest of the town, either from the want of that
+precaution, or owing to the cupidity of our people, was rifled and
+ransacked by the soldiers and mariners, who scarcely left a single house
+unsearched, taking out of them every thing that struck their fancy or
+seemed worth carrying away, such as chests of sweet wood, chairs,
+clothes, coverlets, hangings, bedding, and the like; besides many of our
+people ranged the country in search of plunder, where some of them were
+wounded by the inhabitants. The friery at this place contained
+Franciscan friars, not one of whom was able to speak pure Latin. It was
+built in 1506 by a friar of that order belonging to Angra in the island
+of Tercera. The tables in its hall or refectory had seats only on one
+side, and was always covered, as if ever ready for feasting. We
+continued in the town from the Wednesday afternoon, at which time we
+took possession, until the Saturday night, when the inhabitants agreed
+to pay 2000 ducats for its ransom, which was mostly paid in church
+plate. In the fort there were 58 pieces of iron ordnance, 23 of which,
+according to my remembrance, were mounted upon carriages, and placed
+between baricadoes or merlins on a platform by the sea side. Taking away
+all the ordnance, we set the platform on fire. On the Sunday following,
+my lord had invited as many of the inhabitants as chose to dine with him
+on board the Victory, save only Diego Gomez the governor, who only came
+once to confer about the ransom. Only four came, who were well
+entertained, and were afterwards honourably dismissed with the sound of
+drums and trumpets, and a salute from our cannon. To these persons my
+lord delivered a letter subscribed by himself, requesting all other
+Englishmen to abstain from any farther molestation of the place, save
+only to take such water and provisions as might be necessary.
+
+The day after we came to Fayal, being the 11th September, two men came
+to us from Pico, who had been prisoners in that island; and we also set
+a prisoner at liberty who had been sent thither from St Jago, being
+cousin to a servant of Don Antonio king of Portugal, then residing in
+England. On Monday we sent our boats on shore for fresh water, having
+now abundance running down the hills in consequence of heavy rain the
+night before, which otherwise had been hard to be got. Next day we sent
+again on shore to complete our stock of water, which was not then so
+easily brought off, by reason of a strong gale, which increased so much
+in the afternoon that we did not think it safe to ride so near the land,
+for which reason we weighed anchor, and stood N.W. by W. along the coast
+of Fayal. Some of the inhabitants came on board this day, who told us
+that the wind usually blew strong at W.S.W. at this time of the year on
+this coast. While near St Georges Island we saw a huge fish of a black
+colour right ahead of our ship, a little under water, or rather even
+with its surface, on which the sea broke in such manner that we supposed
+it a rock; and as we were going directly stem on, we were in great fear
+for a time how to avoid the seeming danger, till at length we saw it
+move out of our way.
+
+It lightened much in the night of the 16th September, which was followed
+by heavy rains and violent gales till the 21st. On the 23d we returned
+to Fayal road, to weigh an anchor which we had left in our haste to
+depart. We went on shore to the town, whence many of the people ran
+away, or were preparing to depart with their goods, till assured by my
+lord that they had nothing to fear, as we only came for fresh water and
+other necessaries, for all of which they should be paid to their
+satisfaction. We then went quietly about the town, purchasing such
+things as we needed as peaceably as if we had been in England; and the
+people helped us to fill our water casks, for which they received what
+satisfied them. We were forced by a heavy tempest to depart on the 25th,
+before we had completed our water; and the tempest came on so suddenly
+that my lord himself had to raise the people from their beds to weigh
+the anchors, himself assisting at the capstans, and cheering the men
+with wine. Next day, the caravel and the Saucy Jack were sent to the
+road of St Michaels to see what was there, and we followed on the 27th,
+plying to and fro; but by contrary winds on the 28th, 29th, and 30th, we
+were driven to leeward, and could not get near the island. The 1st
+October, we sailed along the island of Tercera, and at Cape Brazil, near
+Angra, the strongest town of that island, we espied some boats going
+towards the town, which we attempted to intercept; but being near land,
+they ran on shore and escaped.
+
+Coming near Graciosa in the afternoon, my lord sent Captain Lister on
+shore, to inform the islanders that he only wanted water, wine, and some
+fresh provisions, and would not otherwise trouble them. They sent back
+word that they could give no positive answer, until the governors of the
+island had consulted on the subject, and desired therefore to send for
+an answer next day. The 2d October, early in the morning, we dispatched
+our long-boat and pinnace, with 50 or 60 men, together with the Margaret
+and Captain Davis in his ship to protect them, as we now wanted our
+other consorts; but when our people endeavoured to land, they were fired
+at by the islanders, who would not permit them to go on shore, several
+troops of armed men being drawn up to oppose us with displayed ensigns.
+Our boats rowed along shore, seeking some place where they might land,
+without the enemy having too much advantage, our ships and boats firing
+all the while upon the islanders. No convenient place being found for
+landing, we were under the necessity of retiring without any answer, as
+had been promised. After some negociation and delay, they agreed to let
+us have sixty butts of wine, together with fresh provisions to refresh
+our men; but declared we could not have water, having little or none for
+themselves, except what they had saved in tanks or cisterns, insomuch
+that they would rather give us two tons of wine than one of water. They
+requested that our soldiers might not come on shore, as they would
+themselves bring all they had promised to the water side; which request
+was granted, one of their messengers remaining on board as an hostage
+for the fulfilment of their promise, while the other went ashore with
+our empty casks and some of our men to assist in filling them and
+bringing them away, with such other provision as was promised.
+
+The Margaret, the ship of Captain Davis, and another belonging to
+Weymouth remained at anchor before the town, to take in our wine and
+provisions. This ship of Weymouth came to us only the day before, having
+taken a rich prize said to be worth sixteen thousand pounds, and brought
+us news that the West India fleet had not yet gone past, but was shortly
+expected. We put to sea in the Victory, and on Saturday the 4th October,
+we took a French ship of St Maloes, a city belonging to the league,
+laden with fish from Newfoundland, which had been forced to cut away her
+mast in a tempest, and was now bound to Gracioso for repairs. Taking out
+her principal people, we put some of our own mariners and soldiers on
+board, and sent her off for England. At night on the following Sunday,
+having received all the supplies promised us at Gracioso, we parted from
+the islanders in a friendly manner, and saluted them with our ordnance.
+
+The three next days we plyed to and fro among these western islands,
+having very rough weather. On Thursday night, being driven to within
+three or four leagues of Tercera, we saw fifteen sail of the West India
+fleet going into the haven of Angra in that island; but, though we lay
+as close to windward as possible during the four following days, we were
+unable to get near them. At this time we lost sight of our French prize,
+which was not able to lay so close to the wind as our ships, and heard
+no more of her till our return to England, where she arrived safe.
+Getting at length on the fifth day near the mouth of Angra harbour, we
+inclined to have run among the West India fleet, on purpose to have cut
+out some of them if possible; but this enterprize was deemed too
+hazardous, considering the strength of the place, as the ships were
+hauled close to the town on our approach, under protection of the castle
+of Brazil on one side, having 25 pieces of ordnance, and a fort on the
+other side with 13 or 14 large brass cannon. Besides which, on nearing
+the land, the wind proved too scanty for the attempt.
+
+On Thursday the 14th October, we sent our boat into the road of Angra to
+take the soundings, and to endeavour to find some proper place for us to
+anchor, beyond the shot of the castle and within shot of some of the
+ships, that we might either force them to come out to us or sink them
+where they lay. Our boat found a fit place for us, but the wind would
+not suffer us to get to it; and besides, if we had anchored there, it
+was more likely that they would have run their ships on shore, to save
+their lives and liberties and some of their goods, than have resigned
+all to us by coming out. We therefore discharged a few guns at them, but
+our shot fell far short; upon which we departed, as it was not likely
+they would come out while we watched before the mouth of the harbour, or
+remained within sight. We accordingly put to sea, where we cruized for
+five days, sending a pinnace to watch them close in shore but out of
+sight, to bring us word when they set sail. After some time the pinnace
+brought us notice that all the ships had taken down their sails and
+struck their top-masts, so that we concluded they would remain till sure
+of our departure. Wherefore, having heard there were some Scots ships at
+St Michael, we sailed thither on the 20th October, and found there one
+Scots _roader_, and two or three more at Villa-franca, the next road, a
+league or two east from St Michaels. From these we received five or six
+butts of wine and some fresh water, but by no means sufficient to serve
+our wants. The 21st October, we sent our long-boat on shore to procure
+fresh water at a brook a short way west from Villa-franca; but the
+inhabitants came down with about 150 armed men, having two ensigns
+displayed, and our boat was forced to return without water, having spent
+all its powder in vain, and being unable to prevail against such great
+odds.
+
+Learning that the island of St Mary was a place of no great strength, we
+made sail for that place, intending to take in water there, and to go
+thence to the coast of Spain. On the Friday following, my lord sent
+captain Lister and captain Amias Preston, afterwards Sir Amias, with our
+long-boat and pinnace, with between 60 and 70 arquebusiers, carrying a
+friendly letter to the islanders, desiring leave to procure water, in
+exchange for which he engaged to do them no harm. Captain Preston had
+come on board the Victory not long before from his own ship, which lost
+company with us in the night, so that he was under the necessity of
+remaining with us. We departed from the Victory in our boats about nine
+in the morning, rowing for the land, and by three in the afternoon had
+got within a league or two of the shore, being then four or five leagues
+from the Victory, and our men sore spent with hard rowing. At this time
+we perceived, to our great joy, two ships at anchor close under the
+town; upon which we shifted six or seven of our men into the boat
+belonging to captain Davis, being too much crowded, and retaining about
+20 arquebusiers in the pinnace, we made towards these two ships with all
+possible haste.
+
+While proceeding towards them, we saw several boats passing between the
+_roaders_[366] and the shore, and many men in their shirts swimming and
+wading on shore, who, as we afterwards learnt, were endeavouring to get
+the ships fast aground; and the inhabitants were at the same time busied
+in preparing to defend the ships and themselves against us. On coming
+near them, captain Lister commanded the trumpets to be sounded, but
+prohibited any firing till farther orders; yet some of the people,
+either not hearing, or disregardful of these orders, began firing as
+soon as the trumpets sounded, though with small injury to the islanders,
+who mostly lay under the cover of trenches or other means of defence.
+Captain Lister then urged on the rowers, who began to shrink at the shot
+from the enemy which flew thick about their ears, and was himself the
+first to board one of the ships which lay farther from shore than the
+other, while we speedily followed, still plying the enemy with our shot,
+and having cut her cables and hawsers, we towed her out to sea. In the
+mean time, captain Davis came up in his boat, and boarded the other
+ship, both having been abandoned by their crews; but, as she was quite
+fast aground, he was under the necessity of quitting her, exposed to
+shot and stones even from the shore. At this time, the towns-people made
+an attempt to capture captain Davis and his boats crew, which were but
+few in number; but they joined us, and we jointly towed off our prize,
+which was a ship from Brazil laden with sugar. In this exploit we had
+two men slain and sixteen wounded, while it is probable that the enemy
+suffered small loss, as they were mostly sheltered behind stone walls,
+many of which were built above one another on the end of the hill on
+which the town stands, between two vallies. On the top of the hill they
+had some large cannon, from which they fired leaden bullets, one only
+of which went through the side of our prize, but did no other injury.
+
+[Footnote 366: This uncommon word seems merely to signify, ships lying
+at anchor in an open road.--E.]
+
+Next day we made another attempt to get fresh water at this island, but
+as we were ignorant of the landing-place, where we found many
+inconveniences and disadvantages, we were unable to effect our purpose.
+Wherefore we departed on the night of the 25th October for the island of
+St George, in quest of fresh water, and got there on the 27th. Observing
+a stream of water running down into the sea, the pinnace, and long-boat
+were sent under captains Preston and Manson, by whom a letter was sent
+by my lord to the islanders, desiring leave to take water quietly, and
+no farther injury should be done them. On getting to the shore, our men
+found some of the poor islanders hid among the rocks, being afraid of
+us. On the 29th, our boats returned with fresh water, bringing only six
+tons to the Victory, alleging they could get no more; thinking, as was
+afterwards supposed, as he had only 12 tons of water and wine, that my
+lord would now return direct for England, as many of our men greatly
+desired. My lord, was very unwilling to do this, and meant next day to
+have taken in more water, but from the roughness of the sea, and the
+wind freshening, and owing to the unwillingness of the people, no more
+water was procured: yet my lord would not return with so much provision
+unspent, especially as the expedition had not hitherto produced such
+fruits as might reasonably satisfy himself and others. Wherefore, with
+consent of the whole ships companies, it was agreed to go for England by
+way of the coast of Spain, to endeavour to make more captures, the whole
+people being reduced to half allowance of water, except such as were
+sick or wounded, who were to have whole allowance. On Saturday, the 31st
+October, as the Margaret was very leaky, she was sent off direct for
+England in charge of the Brazil ship, and in them our sick and wounded
+men were sent home; but captain Monson was taken out of the _Megge_ into
+the Victory[367].
+
+
+[Footnote 367: In the commencement of this voyage, the Meg and Margaret
+are named as distinct ships, one of which is said to have been sent home
+soon after, as unfit for sea. In this passage the Margaret and Megge are
+evidently different names for the same ship.--E.]
+
+We now shaped our course for the coast of Spain, having the wind fair
+and large, which had seldom been the case hitherto. On the 4th November
+we saw a sail right before us, to which we gave chase, and coming up
+with her about 3 P.M. we took possession of her, being a ship of about
+110 tons burden, from _Pernambucke_ or Fernambucco, in Brazil, bound
+for Portugal, having on board 410 chests of sugar, and 50 quintals of
+Brazil wood, each quintal being 100 pounds weight. We took her in lat.
+29° N. about 200 leagues west from Lisbon. Captain Preston was sent on
+board the prize, who brought her principal people into the Victory,
+certain of our seamen and soldiers being appointed to take charge of
+her. The Portuguese reported, that they had seen another ship that day
+before them about noon; wherefore, when all things were properly
+disposed respecting our prize, we left her under the charge of captain
+Davis, with whom likewise we left our long-boat, taking his smaller boat
+with us, and made all sail due east after this other ship, leaving
+orders for captain Davis and the prize to follow us due east, and if he
+had not sight of us next morning, to bear away direct for England. Next
+morning we could not see the vessel of which we were in chase, neither
+was the prize or the ship of captain Davis to be seen.
+
+On the 6th November, being then in lat. 38° 30' N. and about 60 leagues
+west from Lisbon, captain Preston descried a sail early in the morning
+two or three leagues a-head of us, which we came up with about 8 or 9
+o'clock A.M. She was lastly from St Michaels, but originally from Brazil
+laden with sugar. While employed shifting the prisoners into the
+Victory, one of our men in the main-top espied another sail some three
+or four leagues a-head, on which we immediately sent back our boat with
+men to take charge of the prize, and made all sail in chase, so that we
+overtook the other ship about 2 P.M. She made some preparation to resist
+us, hanging many hides all round her sides, so that musquetry could not
+have injured her; but by the time we had fired two cannon shot at her,
+she lowered her sails and surrendered. She was of between 300 and 400
+tons, bound from Mexico and St John de Lowe, (San Juan de Ulloa) her
+cargo consisting of 700 dry hides; worth 10s. apiece, six chests of
+cochineal, every chest holding 100 pounds weight, and every pound worth
+L. 1, 6s. 8d., besides which she had several chests of sugar, some
+packages of China ware, with some wrought plate and silver in coin. The
+captain was an Italian, a grave, wise, and civil person, who had to the
+value of 25,000 ducats adventure in this ship. He and some of the
+principal Spanish prisoners were taken on board the Victory; and captain
+Lister was sent into the prize, with some 20 of our best mariners,
+soldiers, and sailors. In the meantime our other prize came up with us,
+and having now our hands full, we joyfully shaped our course for
+England, as we had so many Portuguese, Spanish, and French prisoners,
+that we could not well have manned any more prizes with safety to
+ourselves. Wherefore, about 6 P.M. when our other prize came up, we made
+sail for England. But as our two prizes were unable to keep up with us
+without sparing them many of our own sails, our ship rolled and wallowed
+so that it was both exceedingly troublesome, and put our main-mast in
+great danger of being carried away. Having accordingly acquainted them
+with these circumstances, and taken back our sails, we directed them to
+keep their course following us, so as to make for Portsmouth.
+
+We took this last prize in lat. 39° N. about 46 leagues west from the
+Rock of Lisbon. She was one of the 16 ships we saw going into the
+harbour of Angra in the island of Tercera on the 8th October. Some of
+the prisoners taken from this ship told us, that while we were plying
+off and on before that harbour in waiting for their coming out, three of
+the largest of these ships were unloaded of all their treasure and
+merchandize, by order of the governor of Tercera, and were each manned
+with 300 soldiers, on purpose to have come out and boarded the Victory;
+but by the time these preparations were made, the Victory was gone out
+of sight.
+
+We now went merrily before the wind with all the sails we could carry,
+insomuch that between the noons of Friday and Saturday, or in 24 hours,
+we sailed near 47 leagues, or 141 English miles, although our ship was
+very foul, and much grown with sea grass, owing to our having been long
+at sea. This quick sailing made some of our company expect to be present
+at the tilting on the queens birth-day at Whitehall, while others were
+flattering themselves with keeping a jolly Christmas in England from
+their shares in the prizes. But it was our lot to keep a cold Christmas
+with the Bishop and his Clerks, rocks to the westwards of Scilly; for
+soon after the wind came about to the east, the very worst wind for us
+which could blow from the heavens, so that we could not fetch any part
+of England. Upon this our allowance of drink, before sufficiently
+scanty, was now still farther curtailed, owing to the scarcity in our
+ship, each man being confined to half a pint of cold water at a meal,
+and that not sweet. Yet this was an ample allowance in comparison, as
+our half pint was soon reduced to a quarter, and even at this reduced
+rate our store was rapidly disappearing, insomuch that it was deemed
+necessary for our preservation to put into some port in Ireland to
+procure water. We accordingly endeavoured to do this, being obliged,
+when near that coast, to lie to all night, waiting for day light; but
+when it appeared we had drifted so far to leeward in the night that we
+could fetch no part of Ireland, we were therefore constrained to return
+again, with heavy hearts, and to wait in anxious expectation till it
+should please God to send us a fair wind either for England or Ireland.
+
+In the mean time we were allowed for each man two or three spoonfuls of
+vinegar at each meal, having now no other drink, except that for two or
+three meals we had about as much wine, which was wrung out of the
+remaining lees. Under this hard fare we continued near a fortnight,
+being only able to eat a very little in all that time, by reason of our
+great want of drink. Saving that now and then we enjoyed as it were a
+feast, when rain or hail chanced to fall, on which occasions we gathered
+up the hail-stones with the most anxious care, devouring them more
+eagerly than if they had been the finest comfits. The rain-drops also
+were caught and saved with the utmost careful attention; for which
+purpose some hung up sheets tied by the four corners, having a weight in
+the middle, to make the rain run down there as in a funnel into some
+vessel placed underneath. Those who had no sheets hung up napkins or
+other clouts, which when thoroughly wet they wrung or sucked to get the
+water they had imbibed. Even the water which fell on the deck under
+foot, and washed away the filth and soil of the ship, though as dirty as
+the kennel is in towns during rain, was carefully watched and collected
+at every scupper-hole, nay, often with strife and contention, and caught
+in dishes, pots, cans, and jars, of which some drank hearty draughts,
+mud and all, without waiting for its settlement or cleansing. Others
+cleaned it by filtrating, but it went through so slowly that they could
+ill endure to wait so long, and were loath to lose so much precious
+liquid. Some licked the water like dogs with their tongues from the
+decks, sides, rails, and masts of the ship. Others, that were more
+ingenious, fastened girdles or ropes about the masts, daubing tallow
+between these and the mast, that the rain might not run down between;
+and making one part of these girdles lower than the rest, fixed spouts
+of leather at these lower parts, that the rain running down the masts
+might meet and be received at these spouts. He who was fortunate enough
+to procure a can of water by these means, was sued to, and envied as a
+rich man.
+
+   _Quem pulchrum digito monstrari, et dicere hic est_.
+
+Some of the poor Spaniards who were prisoners, though having the same
+allowance with our own men, often begged us for the love of God to give
+them as much water as they could hold in the hollow of their hands: And,
+notwithstanding our own great extremity, they were given it, to teach
+them some humanity, instead of their accustomed barbarity both to us and
+other nations. Some put leaden bullets into their months, to slack their
+thirst by chewing them. In every corner of the ship, the miserable cries
+of the sick and wounded were sounding lamentably in our ears, pitifully
+crying out and lamenting for want of drink, being ready to die, yea many
+dying for lack thereof. Insomuch, that by this great extremity we lost
+many more men than in all the voyage before; as before this, we were so
+well and amply provided for, that we lived as well and were as healthy
+as if we had been in England, very few dying among us; whereas now, some
+of our men were thrown overboard every day.
+
+The 2d of December 1589 was with us a day of festival, as it then rained
+heartily, and we saved some considerable store of water, though we were
+well wet for it, and that at midnight, and had our skins filled with it
+besides. This went down merrily, although it was bitter and dirty, with
+washing the ship, but we sweetened it with sugar, and were happy to have
+our fill. Besides our other extremities, we were so tossed and turmoiled
+with stormy and tempestuous weather, that every man had to hold fast his
+can or dish, and to fasten himself by the ropes, rails, or sides of the
+ship, to prevent falling on the deck. Our main-sail was torn from the
+yard, and blown away into the sea; and our other sails so rent and torn
+that hardly any of them remained serviceable. The raging waves and
+foaming surges of the sea came rolling upon us in successive mountains,
+breaking through the waste of the ship like a mighty river; although in
+fine weather our deck was near twenty feet above water. So that we were
+ready to cry out, with the royal prophet, Psalm 107, verses 26 and 27.
+"They mount up to heaven, and go down again to the depths: Their soul is
+melted because of trouble. They reel to and fro, and stagger like a
+drunken man, and are at their wits end." In this extremity of foul
+weather, the ship was so tossed and shaken, that, by its creaking noise,
+and the leaking which was now more than ordinary, we were in great fear
+that it would have shaken asunder, and had just cause to pray, a little
+otherwise than the poet, though marring the verse, yet mending the
+meaning:
+
+   Deus maris et caeli, quid enim nisi vota supersunt;
+   Solvere quassatae parcito membra ratis.
+
+Yet it pleased God of his infinite goodness to deliver us out of this
+danger. We made a new main-sail, which we fastened to the yard, and
+repaired our other damages as well as we could. This was hardly done
+when we were reduced to as great extremity as before, so that we had
+almost lost our new main-sail, had not William Antony, the master of our
+ship, when no one else would venture for fear of being washed overboard,
+by crawling along the main-yard, then lowered close down upon the rails,
+and with great danger of drowning, gathered it up out of the sea and
+fastened it to the yard; being in the mean time often ducked overhead
+and ears in the sea. So terrible were these storms, that some of our
+company, who had used the sea for twenty years, had never seen the like,
+and vowed, if ever they got safe to land, that they would never go to
+sea again.
+
+At night on the last day of November, we met with an English ship, and
+because it was too late that night, it was agreed that they were to give
+us two or three tons of wine next morning, being, as they said, all the
+provision of drink they had, save only a butt or two which they must
+reserve for their own use: But, after all, we heard no more of them till
+they were set on ground on the coast of Ireland, where it appeared they
+might have spared us much more than they pretended, as they could very
+well have relieved our necessities, and had sufficient for themselves
+remaining to bring them to England. The first of December we spoke with
+another English ship, and had some beer out of her for our urgent
+necessities, but not sufficient to carry us to England, wherefore we
+were constrained to put into Ireland, the wind so serving. Next day we
+came to an anchor under the land, not far from the S. Kelmes, under the
+land and wind, where we were somewhat more quiet. But as that was not a
+safe place to ride in, we endeavoured next morning to weigh our anchor,
+when having some of our men hurt at the capstan, we were forced to leave
+it behind, holding on our course for Ventrie Haven, [Bantry Bay?] where
+we safely arrived the same day, and found that place a safe and
+convenient harbour for us, so that we had just cause to sing with the
+Psalmist, _They that go down to the sea in ships_, &c.
+
+As soon as we had anchored, my lord went forthwith on shore, and
+presently after brought off fresh provisions and water; such as sheep,
+pigs, fowls, &c. to refresh his ships company, though he had lately been
+very weak himself, and had suffered the same extremity with the rest:
+For, in the time of our former want, having only a little water
+remaining by him in a pot, it was broken in the night and all the water
+lost. The sick and wounded were soon afterwards landed and carried to
+the principal town, called _Dingenacush_[368], about three miles distant
+from the haven, and at which place our surgeons attended them daily.
+Here we well refreshed ourselves, while the Irish harp sounded sweetly
+in our ears, and here we, who in our former extremity were in a manner
+half dead, had our lives as it were restored.
+
+[Footnote 368: Called otherwise Dingle Icouch by the editor of Astleys
+collection.--E.]
+
+This Dingenacush is the chief town in all that part of Ireland,
+consisting but of one street, whence some smaller ones proceed on either
+side. It had gates, as it seemed, in former times at either end, to shut
+and open as a town of war, and a castle also. The houses are very
+strongly built, having thick stone walls and narrow windows, being used,
+as they told us, as so many castles in time of troubles, among the wild
+Irish or otherwise. The castle and all the houses in the town, except
+four, were taken and destroyed by the Earl of Desmond; these four being
+held out against him and all his power, so that he could not win them.
+There still remains a thick stone wall, across the middle of the street,
+which was part of their fortification. Some of the older inhabitants
+informed us, that they were driven to great extremities during their
+defence, like the Jews of old when besieged by the Roman emperor Titus,
+insomuch that they were constrained by hunger to feed on the carcasses
+of the dead. Though somewhat repaired, it still remains only the ruins
+of their former town. Except in the houses of the better sort, they have
+no chimnies, so that we were very much incommoded by the smoke during
+our stay at that place. Their fuel is turf, which they have very good,
+together with whins or furze. As there grows little wood hereabout,
+building is very expensive; as also they are in want of lime, which they
+have to bring from a far distance. But they have abundance of stone, the
+whole country appearing entirely composed of rocks and stones, so that
+they commonly make their hedges of stone, by which each mans ground is
+parted from his neighbour. Yet their country is very fruitful, and
+abounds in grass and grain, as appears by the abundance of cattle and
+sheep; insomuch that we had very good sheep, though smaller than those
+of England, for two shillings, or five groats a-piece, and good pigs and
+hens for threepence each.
+
+The greatest want is of industrious and husbandly inhabitants, to till
+and improve the ground; for the common sort, if they can only provide
+sufficient to serve them from hand to mouth, take no farther care. Good
+land was to be had here for fourpence an acre of yearly rent. They had
+very small store of money among them, for which reason, perhaps, they
+doubled and trebled the prices of every thing we bought, in proportion
+to what they had been before our arrival. They have mines of alum, tin,
+brass, and iron; and we saw certain natural stones, as clear as crystal,
+and naturally squared like diamonds. That part of the country is full of
+great mountains and hills, whence run many pleasant streams of fine
+water. The native hardiness of the Irish nation may be conceived from
+this, that their young children, even in the midst of winter, run about
+the streets with bare legs and feet, and often having no other apparel
+than a scanty mantle to cover their nakedness. The chief officer of
+their town is called the sovereign, who hath the same office and
+authority among them with our mayors in England, having his Serjeants to
+attend upon him, and a mace carried before mm as they have. We were
+first entertained at the sovereigns house, which was one of the four
+that withstood the Earl of Desmond in his rebellion.
+
+They have the same form of common prayer, word for word, that we have,
+only that it is in Latin. On Sunday, the sovereign goeth to church
+having his Serjeant before him, and accompanied by the sheriff and
+others of the town. They there kneel down, every one making his prayers
+privately by himself. They then rise up and go out of the church again
+to drink. After this, they return again to church, and the minister
+makes prayers. Their manner of baptising differs somewhat from ours,
+part of the service belonging to it being in Latin and part in Irish.
+The minister takes the child on his hands, dipping it first backwards
+and then forwards, over head and ears into the cold water even in the
+midst of winter. By this the natural hardiness of the people may appear,
+as before specified. They had neither bell, drums, nor trumpet, to call
+the parishioners together, but wait for the coming of the sovereign,
+when those that have devotion follow him. Their bread is all baked in
+cakes, and the bakers bake for all the town, receiving a tenth part for
+their trouble. We had of them some ten or eleven tons of beer for the
+Victory; but it acted as a severe purge upon all who drank it, so that
+we chose rather to drink water.
+
+Having provided ourselves with fresh water, we set sail from thence on
+the 20th December, accompanied by Sir Edward Dennie and his lady, with
+two young sons. In the morning of that day, my lord went on shore to
+hasten the dispatch of some fresh water for the Victory, and brought us
+news that sixty Spanish prizes were taken and brought to England. For
+two or three days after we sailed, we had a fair wind; but it afterwards
+scanted, so that we were fain to keep a cold Christmas with the bishop
+and his clerks, as I said before. After this, meeting with an English
+ship, we received the joyful news that ninety-one Spanish prizes were
+come to England; and along with that, the sorrowful intelligence that
+our last and best prize was cast away on the coast of Cornwal, at a
+place the Cornish men call _Als-efferne_, that is Hell-cliff, where
+Captain Lister and all the people were drowned, except five or six, half
+English and half Spaniards, who saved their lives by swimming. Yet much
+of the goods were saved and preserved for us, by Sir Francis Godolphin
+and other worshipful gentlemen of the country. My lord was very sorry
+for the death of Captain Lister, saying that he would willingly have
+lost all the fruits of the voyage to have saved his life.
+
+The 29th December we met another ship, from which we learned that Sir
+Martin Frobisher and Captain Reymond had taken the admiral and
+vice-admiral of the fleet we had seen going into the haven of Tercera;
+but that the admiral had sunk, in consequence of much leaking, near the
+Eddystone, a rock over against Plymouth sound, all the people however
+being saved. We were likewise informed by this ship, that Captain
+Preston had captured a ship laden with silver. My lord took his passage
+in this last ship to land at Falmouth, while we held on our course for
+Plymouth.
+
+Towards night we came near the Ram-head, the next cape westwards from
+Plymouth sound, but we feared to double it in the night, by reason of
+the scantness of the wind: so we stood out to seawards for half the
+night, and towards morning had the wind more large. But we made too
+little to spare thereof; partly for which reasons and partly mistaking
+the land, we fell so much to leeward that we could not double the cape.
+For this reason we turned back again and got into Falmouth haven, where
+we grounded in 17 feet water; but as it was low ebb, the sea ready again
+to flow, and the ground soft, we received no harm. Here we gladly set
+our feet again on the long desired English ground, and refreshed
+ourselves by keeping part of Christmas on our native soil.
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Valiant Sea Fight, by Ten Merchant Ships of London against Twelve
+Spanish Gallies in the Straits of Gibraltar, on the 24th April_
+1590[369].
+
+
+In 1590, sundry ships belonging to the merchants of London, some
+freighted for Venice, some for Constantinople, and some to divers other
+parts, met on their homeward course within the Straits of Gibraltar,
+having escaped all danger hitherto. The first of these was the Salomon,
+belonging to Mr Alexander Barnam of London, and Messrs Bond and Tweed of
+Harwich, which had sailed on the first of February last. The second was
+the Margaret and John, belonging to Mr Wats of London. The third was the
+Minion; the fourth the Ascension; the fifth the Centurion, belonging to
+Mr Cordal; the sixth the Violet; the seventh the Samuel; the eighth the
+Crescent; the ninth the Elizabeth; the tenth the Richard belonging to Mr
+Duffield. All these ships, being of notable and approved service, and
+coming near the mouth of the Straits hard by the coast of Barbary, they
+descried twelve tall gallies bravely furnished, and strongly provided
+with men and ammunition of war, ready to intercept and seize them.
+Being perceived by our captains and masters, we made speedy preparation
+for our defence, waiting the whole night for the approach of the enemy.
+
+[Footnote 369: Hakluyt, II. 660.]
+
+Next morning early, being Tuesday in Easter week, the 24th of April
+1590, we had service according to our usual custom, praying to Almighty
+God to save us from the hands of the tyrannous Spaniards, whom we justly
+imagined and had always found to be our most mortal enemies on the sea.
+Having finished our prayers, and set ourselves in readiness, we
+perceived them coming towards us, and knew them indeed to be the Spanish
+gallies, commanded by Andrea Doria, viceroy for the king of Spain in the
+Straits of Gibraltar, and a notable enemy to all Englishmen. When they
+came near us, they _waved us amain_ for the king of Spain, and in return
+we waved them amain for the Queen of England[370]; at which time it
+pleased the Almighty so to encourage our hearts, that the nearer they
+came we the less feared their great strength and huge number of men;
+they having to the amount of two or three hundred in each galley. It was
+concluded among us, that our four largest and tallest ships should be
+placed in the rear, the weaker and smaller ships going foremost; and so
+it was performed, every one of us being ready to take part in such
+successes as it should please God to send.
+
+[Footnote 370: This waving amain seems to have been some salutation of
+defiance, then usual at sea.--E.]
+
+The gallies came upon us very fiercely at the first encounter, yet God
+so strengthened us that, even if they had been ten times more, we had
+not feared them at all. The Salomon, being a hot ship with sundry cast
+pieces in her, gave the first shot in so effectual a manner on their
+headmost galley, that it shared away so many of the men that sat on one
+side of her, and pierced her through and through, insomuch that she was
+ready to sink: Yet they assaulted us the more fiercely. Then the rest of
+our ships, especially the four chiefest, the Salomon, Margaret and John,
+Minion, and the Ascension, gave a hot charge upon them, and they on us,
+commencing a hot and fierce battle with great valour on both sides,
+which continued for the space of six hours. About the commencement of
+this fight, our fleet was joined by two Flemish vessels. Seeing the
+great force of the gallies, one of these presently struck his sails and
+yielded to the enemy; whereas, had they exerted themselves on our side
+and in their own defence, they needed not to have been taken in this
+cowardly manner. The other was ready also to have yielded immediately,
+and began to lower his sails: But the trumpeter of that ship drew his
+faulcion, and stepping up to the pilot at the helm, vowed that he would
+put him instantly to death, if he did not join and take part with the
+English fleet: This he did, for fear of death, and by that means they
+were defended from the tyranny which they had otherwise assuredly found
+among the Spaniards.
+
+When we had continued the fight somewhat more than six hours, God gave
+us the upper hand, so that we escaped the hands of so many enemies, who
+were constrained to flee into harbour to shelter themselves from us.
+This was the manifest work of God, who defended us in such sort from all
+danger, that not one man of us was slain in all this long and fierce
+assault, sustaining no other damage or hurt than this, that the shrouds
+and back-stays of the Salomon, which gave the first and last shot, and
+sore galled the enemy during the whole battle, were clean shot away.
+When the battle ceased, we were constrained for lack of wind to stay and
+waft up and down, and then went back again to _Tition_ [Tetuan] in
+Barbary, six leagues from Gibraltar, where we found the people
+wondrously favourable to us; who, being but Moors and heathen people,
+shewed us where to find fresh water and all other necessaries. In short,
+we had there as good entertainment as if we had been in any place in
+England. The governor favoured us greatly, to whom we in return
+presented such gifts and commodities as we had, which he accepted of
+very graciously: And here we staid four days.
+
+After the cessation of the battle, which was on Easter Tuesday, we
+remained for want of wind before Gibraltar till the next morning, being
+all that time becalmed, and therefore expected every hour that they
+would have sent out a fresh force against us: But they were in no
+condition to do so, all their gallies being so sore battered that they
+durst not come out of harbour, though greatly urged thereunto by the
+governor of that town; but they had already met with so stout
+resistance, that they could not be prevailed on to renew the fight.
+
+While we were at Tetuan, we received a report of the hurt we had done
+the gallies; as we could not well discern any thing during the fight,
+on account of the great smoke. We there heard that we had almost spoiled
+those twelve gallies, which we had shot clean through, so that two of
+them were on the point of sinking; and we had slain so many of their
+men, that they were not able to fit out their gallies any more all that
+year. After going to Tetuan, we attempted three several times to pass
+the straits, but could not: Yet, with the blessing of God, we came
+safely through on the fourth attempt; and so continued on our voyage
+with a pleasant breeze all the way to the coast of England, where we
+arrived on the beginning of July 1590.
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_A valiant sea fight in the Straits of Gibraltar, in April_ 1591, _by
+the Centurion of London, against five Spanish gallies_.
+
+
+In the month of November 1590, sundry ships belonging to different
+merchants of London sailed with merchandise for various ports within the
+Straits of Gibraltar; all of which, having fair wind and weather,
+arrived safe at their destined ports. Among these was the Centurion of
+London, a very tall ship of large burden, yet but weakly manned, as
+appears by the following narrative.
+
+The Centurion arrived safe at Marseilles, on her outward bound voyage,
+where, after delivering her goods, she remained better than five weeks,
+taking in lading, and then intended to return to England. When she was
+ready to come away from Marseilles, there were sundry other ships of
+smaller burden at that place, the masters of which intreated Robert
+Bradshaw of Limehouse, the master of the Centurion, to stay a day or two
+for them till they could get in readiness to depart, saying that it were
+far better for them all to go in company for mutual support and defence,
+than singly to run the hazard of falling into the hands of the Spanish
+gallies in the Straits. On which reasonable persuasion, although the
+Centurion was of such sufficiency as might have been reasonably hazarded
+alone, yet she staid for the smaller ships, and set out along with them
+from Marseilles, all engaging mutually to stand by each other, if they
+chanced to fall in with any of the Spanish gallies.
+
+Thus sailing altogether along the coast of Spain, they were suddenly
+becalmed upon Easter-day in the Straits of Gibraltar, where they
+immediately saw several gallies making towards them in a very gallant
+and courageous manner. The chief leaders and soldiers in these gallies,
+were bravely apparelled in silken coats, with silver whistles depending
+from their necks, and fine plumes of feathers in their hats. Coming on
+courageously, they shot very fast from their calivers upon the
+Centurion, which they boarded somewhat before ten o'clock A.M. But the
+Centurion was prepared for their reception, and meant to give them as
+sour a welcome as they could; and having prepared their close quarters
+with all other things in readiness, called on God for aid, and cheered
+one another to fight to the last. The Centurion discharged her great
+ordnance upon the gallies, but the little ships her consorts durst not
+come forward to her aid, but lay aloof, while five of the gallies laid
+on board the Centurion, to whom they made themselves fast with their
+grappling irons, two on one side and two on the other, while the admiral
+galley lay across her stern. In this guise the Centurion was sore galled
+and battered, her main-mast greatly wounded, all her sails filled with
+shot holes, and her mizen mast and stern rendered almost unserviceable.
+During this sore and deadly fight, the trumpeter of the Centurion
+continually sounded forth the animating points of war, encouraging the
+men to fight gallantly against their enemies; while in the Spanish
+gallies there was no warlike music, save the silver whistles, which were
+blown ever and anon. In this sore fight, many a Spaniard was thrown into
+the sea, while multitudes of them came crawling up the ships sides,
+hanging by every rope, and endeavouring to enter in: Yet as fast as they
+came to enter, so courageously were they received by the English, that
+many of them were fain to tumble alive into the sea, remediless of ever
+getting out alive. There were in the Centurion 48 men and boys in all,
+who bestirred themselves so valiantly and so galled the enemy, that many
+a brave and lusty Spaniard lost his life. The Centurion was set on fire
+five several times, with wild-fire and other combustibles thrown in for
+that purpose by the Spaniards; yet by the blessing of God, and the great
+and diligent foresight of the master, the fire was always extinguished
+without doing any harm.
+
+In every one of these five gallies there were about 200 soldiers; who,
+together with the great guns, spoiled, rent, and battered the Centurion
+very sorely; shot her mainmast through, and slew four of her men, one of
+whom was the masters mate. Ten other persons were hurt by splinters. But
+in the end, the Spaniards had almost spent their shot, so that they were
+obliged to load with hammers and the chains of their galley-slaves, yet,
+God be praised, the English received no more harm. At length, sore
+galled and worn out, the Spaniards were constrained to unfasten their
+grapplings and sheer off; at which time, if there had been any fresh
+ship to aid and succour the Centurion, they had certainly sunk or taken
+all those gallies. The Dolphin lay aloof and durst not come near, while
+the other two small ships fled away. One of the gallies from the
+Centurion set upon the Dolphin; which ship went immediately on fire,
+occasioned by her own powder, so that the ship perished with all her
+men: But whether this was done intentionally or not, was never known.
+Surely, if she had come bravely forward in aid of the Centurion, she had
+not perished.
+
+This fight continued five hours and a half, at the end of which time
+both parties were glad to draw off and breathe themselves; but the
+Spaniards, once gone, durst not renew the fight. Next day, indeed, six
+other gallies came out and looked at the Centurion, but durst on no
+account meddle with her. Thus delivered by the Almighty from the hands
+of their enemies, they gave God thanks for the victory, and arrived not
+long after safe at London. Mr John Hawes merchant, and sundry others of
+good note were present in this fight.
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Sea-fight near the Azores, between the Revenge man of war, commanded by
+Sir Richard Granville, and fifteen Spanish men of war_, 31_st August_
+1591. _Written by Sir Walter Raleigh_[371].
+
+
+PRELIMINARY DISCOURSE[372].
+
+Because the rumours are diversely spread, as well in England as in the
+Low Countries and elsewhere, of this late encounter between her majestys
+ships and the armada of Spain; and that the Spaniards, according to
+their usual manner, fill the world with their vain-glorious vaunts,
+making great shew of victories, when on the contrary themselves are most
+commonly and shamefully beaten and dishonoured, thereby hoping to
+possess the ignorant multitude by anticipating and forerunning false
+reports: It is agreeable with all good reason, for manifestation of the
+truth, to overcome falsehood and untruth, that the beginning,
+continuance, and success of this late honourable encounter by Sir
+Richard Grenville, and others her majestys captains, with the
+armada[373] of Spain, should be truly set down and published, without
+partiality or false imaginations. And it is no marvel that the Spaniards
+should seek, by false and slanderous pamphlets, _advisos_, and letters,
+to cover their own loss, and to derogate from others their due honours,
+especially in this fight being far off; seeing they were not ashamed, in
+the year 1588, when they purposed the invasion of this land, to publish
+in sundry languages in print, great victories in words, which they
+pretended to have obtained against this realm, and spread the same in a
+most false sort over all parts of France, Italy, and other countries.
+When, shortly after it was happily manifested in very deed to all
+nations, how their navy, which they termed _invincible_, consisting of
+140 sail of ships, not only of their own kingdom, but strengthened with
+the greatest argosies, Portugal caraks, Florentines, and huge hulks of
+other countries, were by 80 of her majestys own ships of war, and a few
+belonging to our own merchants, by the wise, valiant, and advantageous
+conduct of the lord Charles Howard, high admiral of England, beaten and
+shuffled together, even from the Lizard in Cornwall, first to Portland
+where they shamefully left Don Pedro de Valdes with his mighty ship:
+from Portland to Calais, where they lost Hugo de Moncado with the
+gallies of which he was captain: and from Calais driven by squibs from
+their anchors, were chased out of sight of England, round about Scotland
+and Ireland. Where for the sympathy of their barbarous religion, hoping
+to find succour and assistance, a great part of them were crushed
+against the rocks, and those others that landed, being very many in
+number, were notwithstanding broken, slain, and taken, and so sent from
+village to village, coupled in halters, to be shipped for England. Where
+her majesty, of her princely and invincible disposition, disdaining to
+put them to death, and scorning either to retain or entertain them, they
+were all sent back again into their countries, to witness and recount
+the worthy achievements of their invincible and dreadful navy: of which,
+the number of soldiers, the fearful burden of their ships, the
+commanders names of every squadron, with all their magazines of
+provisions were put in print, as an army and navy irresistible and
+disdaining prevention. With all which so great and terrible ostentation,
+they did not, in all their sailing about England, so much as sink or
+take one ship, bark, pinnace, or cock-boat of ours, or ever burnt so
+much as one sheep-cot of this land. When, as on the contrary, Sir
+Francis Drake, with only 800 soldiers, not long before landed in their
+Indies, and forced San Jago, Santo Domingo, Carthagena, and the forts of
+Florida.
+
+[Footnote 371: Hakluyt, II. 668. Astley, I. 216.]
+
+[Footnote 372: This preliminary discourse, by the famous Sir Walter
+Raleigh, is given from Hakluyt without alteration, except in
+orthography.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 373: Armada is a general word, signifying in Spanish a ship of
+war or a fleet or squadron. Generally in English it has been limited to
+the invincible armada, or powerful fleet fitted out by Philip II. in the
+vain hope of conquering England.--E.]
+
+And after that, Sir John Norris marched from Peniche in Portugal with a
+handful of soldiers to the gates of Lisbon, being above 40 English
+miles: Where the earl of Essex himself, and other valiant gentlemen,
+braved the city of Lisbon, encamping at the very gates: from whence,
+after many days abode, finding neither promised parley nor provision
+wherewith to batter, they made their retreat by land, in spite of all
+their garrisons both of horse and foot. In this sort I have a little
+digressed from my first purpose, only by the necessary comparison of
+their and our actions: the one covetous of honour, without vaunt or
+ostentation; the other so greedy to purchase the opinion of their own
+affairs, and by false rumours to resist the blasts of their own
+dishonours, as they will not only not blush to spread all manner of
+untruths, but even for the least advantage, be it but for the taking of
+one poor adventurer of the English, will celebrate the victory with
+bonefires in every town, always spending more in faggots than the
+purchase they obtained was worth. Whereas, we never thought it worth the
+consumption of two billets, when we have taken eight or ten of their
+Indian ships at one time, and twenty of their Brazil fleet. Such is the
+difference between true valour and vain ostentation, and between
+honourable actions and frivolous vain-glorious boasting. But to return
+to my purpose:
+
+
+NARRATIVE.
+
+The Lord Thomas Howard, with six of her majestys ships, six victuallers
+of London, the bark Raleigh, and two or three pinnaces, riding at anchor
+near Flores, one of the western islands called the Azores, on the last
+of August 1591, in the afternoon, had intelligence by one captain
+Middleton, of the approach of the Spanish armada. This Middleton, being
+in a very good sailing ship, had kept them company for three days
+before, of good purpose, both to discover their force, and to give the
+lord admiral advice of their approach. He had no sooner communicated the
+news, when the Spanish fleet hove in sight; at which time, many
+belonging to our ships companies were on shore in the island of Flores,
+some providing ballast for the ships, others filling water, and others
+refreshing themselves from the land with such things as they could
+procure either for money or by force. Owing to this, our ships were all
+in confusion, pestered, rummaging, and every thing out of order, very
+light for want of ballast; and what was most of all to their
+disadvantage, the half of the men in every ship was sick and
+unserviceable. For in the Revenge, there were ninety sick; in the
+Bonaventure, not so many in health as could hand her mainsail, insomuch,
+that unless twenty men had been taken from a bark of Sir George Careys
+which was sunk, and appointed into her, she had hardly been able to get
+back to England. The rest of the ships for the most part were in little
+better state.
+
+The names of her majestys ships were as follows: The Defiance, admiral,
+the Revenge, vice-admiral, the Bonaventure commanded by captain Crosse,
+the Lion by George Fenner, the Foresight by Thomas Vavasour, and the
+Crane by Duffild. The Foresight and Crane were small ships, the other
+four were of the middle size. All the others, except the bark Raleigh,
+commanded by captain Thin, were victuallers, and of small or no force.
+The approach of the Spanish fleet being concealed by means of the
+island, they were soon at hand, so that our ships had scarce time to
+weigh their anchors, and some even were obliged to slip their cables and
+set sail. Sir Richard Grenville was the last to weigh, that he might
+recover the men who were a land on the island, who had otherwise been
+lost. The lord Thomas Howard, with the rest of the fleet, very hardly
+recovered the wind, which Sir Richard was unable to do; on which his
+master and others endeavoured to persuade him to cut his main sail and
+cast about, trusting to the swift sailing of his ship, as the squadron
+of Seville was on his weather bow. But Sir Richard absolutely refused to
+turn from the enemy, declaring he would rather die than dishonour
+himself, his country, and her majestys ship, and persuaded his company
+that he would be able to pass through the two squadrons in spite of
+them, and force those of Seville to give him way. This he certainly
+performed upon divers of the foremost, who, as the sailors term it,
+sprang their luff, and fell under the lee of the Revenge. The other
+course had certainly been the better, and might very properly have been
+adopted under so great impossibility of prevailing over such heavy odds;
+but, out of the greatness of his mind, he could not be prevailed on to
+have the semblance of fleeing.
+
+In the meantime, while Sir Richard attended to those ships of the enemy
+that were nearest him and in his way, the great San Philip being to
+windward of him, and coming down towards him, becalmed his sails in such
+sort that his ship could neither make way nor feel the helm, so huge and
+high was the Spanish ship, being of fifteen hundred tons, and which
+presently laid the Revenge on board. At this time, bereft of his sails,
+the ships that had fallen under his lee, luffed up and laid him on board
+also, the first of these that now came up being the vice-admiral of the
+Biscay squadron, a very mighty and puissant ship, commanded by
+Brittandona. The San Philip carried three tier of ordnance on a side,
+and eleven pieces in each tier, besides eight pieces in her forecastle
+chase, and others from her stern-ports. After the Revenge was thus
+entangled by the huge San Philip, four others laid her on board, two to
+larboard and two to starboard. The fight thus began at three in the
+afternoon, and continued very terribly the whole of that evening. But
+the great San Philip, having received a discharge from the lower tier
+of the Revenge, loaded with cross-bar shot, shifted herself with all
+diligence from her side, utterly disliking this her first entertainment.
+Some say the San Philip foundered, but we cannot report this for a
+truth, not having sufficient assurance. Besides the mariners, the
+Spanish ships were filled with companies of soldiers, some having to the
+number of two hundred, some five hundred, and others as far even as
+eight hundred. In ours, there were none besides the mariners, except the
+servants of the commanders, and some few gentlemen volunteers.
+
+After interchanging many vollies of great ordnance and small shot, the
+Spaniards deliberated to enter the Revenge by boarding, and made several
+attempts, hoping to carry her by the multitudes of their armed soldiers
+and musketeers, but were still repulsed again and again, being on every
+attempt beaten back into their own ships or into the sea. In the
+beginning of the fight, the George Noble of London being only one of the
+victuallers, and of small force, having received some shot through her
+from the Spanish _armadas_, fell under the lee of the Revenge, and the
+master of her asked Sir Richard what he was pleased to command him; on
+which Sir Richard bad him save himself as he best might, leaving him to
+his fortune. After the fight had thus continued without intermission,
+while the day lasted, and some hours of the night, many of our men were
+slain and hurt; one of the great galeons of the armada and the admiral
+of the hulks both sunk, and a great slaughter had taken place in many of
+the other great Spanish ships. Some allege that Sir Richard was very
+dangerously hurt almost in the beginning of the fight, and lay
+speechless for a time ere he recovered: But two men belonging to the
+Revenge, who came home in a ship of Lyme from the islands, and were
+examined by some of the lords and others, affirmed, that he was never so
+much wounded as to forsake the upper deck till an hour before midnight,
+and being then shot in the body by a musket ball, was shot again in the
+head as the surgeon was dressing him, the surgeon himself being at the
+same time wounded to death. This also agrees with an examination of four
+other returned mariners of the same ship, taken before Sir Francis
+Godolphin, and sent by him to master William Killegrue of her majestys
+privy chamber.
+
+To return to the fight: As the Spanish ships which attempted to board
+the Revenge were wounded and beaten off, so always others came up in
+their places, she never having less than two mighty galeons by her sides
+and close on board her; so that ere morning, from three o'clock of the
+day before, she had been successively assailed by no less than fifteen
+several armadas or great ships of war; and all of them had so ill
+approved their entertainment, that, by break of day, they were far more
+willing to hearken to a composition, than hastily to make any more
+assaults or entries for boarding. But as the day advanced, so our men
+decreased in number, and as the light grew more and more, by so much
+more increased the discomforts of our men. For now nothing appeared in
+sight but enemies, save one small ship called the Pilgrim, commanded by
+Jacob Whiddon, who hovered all night to see what might be the event;
+but, bearing up towards the Revenge in the morning, was hunted like a
+hare among so many ravenous hounds, yet escaped.
+
+All the powder of the Revenge was now spent to the very last barrel, all
+her pikes broken, forty of her best men slain, and most part of the rest
+wounded. In the beginning of the fight, she had 90 of her men lying sick
+on the ballast in the hold, and only 100 capable of duty, a small crew
+for such a ship, and a weak garrison to resist so mighty an army. By
+this brave hundred was the whole of this hot fight sustained, the
+volleys, boardings, assaults, and entries, from fifteen great ships of
+war all full of men, besides those which had cannonaded her from a
+distance. On the contrary, the Spanish ships were always supplied with
+fresh soldiers from the several squadrons of this vast fleet, and had
+all manner of arms and powder at will; while to our men there remained
+no hope or comfort, no supply either of ships, men, weapons, or powder.
+The masts were all beaten overboard; all her tackle was cut asunder; her
+upper works all battered to pieces, and in effect evened with the water,
+nothing but the hull or bottom of the ship remaining, nothing being left
+over-head for flight or for defence.
+
+Finding his ship in this distress, and altogether unable for any longer
+resistance, after fifteen hours constant fighting against fifteen great
+ships of war which assailed him in turns, having received by estimation
+800 shot of great ordnance, besides many assaults and entries; and
+considering that he and his ship must now soon be in possession of the
+enemy, who had arranged their ships in a ring round about the Revenge,
+which was now unable to move any way, except as acted on by the waves;
+Sir Richard called for his master gunner, whom he knew to be a most
+resolute man, and commanded him to split and sink the ship, that nothing
+of glory or victory might remain to the enemy, who with so great a navy,
+and in so long a time, were unable to take her. They had fifty-three
+ships of war, and above 10,000 men, and had been engaged against this
+single ship for fifteen hours. At the same time, Sir Richard endeavoured
+to prevail upon as many of the company as he could influence, to commit
+themselves to the mercy of God, and not of their enemies, since they had
+like valiant men repulsed so many enemies, urging them not now to
+obscure their honour and that of their nation, for the sake of
+prolonging their lives a few days. The master gunner and various others
+of the crew readily assented to this desperate resolution; but the
+captain and master were quite of an opposite opinion, and conjured Sir
+Richard to desist from his desperate proposal; alleging that the
+Spaniards would be as ready to agree to a capitulation as they to offer
+it; and begged him to consider, that there still were many valiant men
+still living in the ship, and others whose wounds might not be mortal,
+who might be able to do acceptable service to their queen and country
+hereafter. And, although Sir Richard had alleged that the Spaniards
+should never have the glory of taking one ship of her majesty, which had
+been so long and valiantly defended; they answered, that the ship had
+six feet water in her hold, and three shot holes under water, which were
+so weakly stopped, that she must needs sink with the first labouring of
+the sea, and was besides so battered and bruised, that she could never
+be removed from the place.
+
+While the matter was thus in dispute, Sir Richard refusing to listen to
+any reasons, the captain won over the most part to his opinion, and the
+master was conveyed on board the Spanish general, Don Alfonso Baçan.
+Finding none of his people very ready to attempt boarding the Revenge
+again, and fearing lest Sir Richard might blow up both them and himself,
+as he learned from the master his dangerous disposition; Don Alfonso
+agreed that all their lives should be saved, the ships company sent to
+England, and the better sort to pay such reasonable ransom as their
+estate could bear, all in the meantime to be free from prison or the
+gallies. He so much the rather consented to these terms, lest any
+farther loss or mischief might accrue to themselves, and for the
+preservation of Sir Richard, whose notable valour he greatly honoured
+and admired. On receiving this answer, in which the safety of life was
+promised; the common sort, now at the end of their peril, mostly drew
+back from the proposal of Sir Richard and the master gunner, it being no
+hard matter to dissuade men from death to life. Finding himself and Sir
+Richard thus prevented and mastered by the majority, the master gunner
+would have slain himself with his sword, but was prevented by main
+force, and locked up in his cabin.
+
+Then the Spanish general sent many boats on board the Revenge, and
+several of her men, fearing Sir Richards disposition, stole away on
+board the general and other ships. Thus constrained to submit, Sir
+Richard was desired by a message from Alfonso Baçan to remove from the
+Revenge, as it was filled with blood and the bodies of the slain, and
+with wounded men, like a slaughter-house. Sir Richard gave for answer,
+that he might do now with his body what he pleased; and while removing
+from the ship, he fainted away, and on recovering he requested the
+company to pray for him. The Spanish general used Sir Richard with all
+humanity, leaving no means untried that tended towards his recovery,
+highly commending his valour and worthiness, and greatly bewailing his
+dangerous condition; seeing that it was a rare spectacle, and an
+instance of resolution seldom met with, for one ship to withstand so
+many enemies, to endure the batteries and boardings of so many huge
+ships of war, and to resist and repel the assaults and entries of such
+numbers of soldiers. All this and more is confirmed, by the recital of a
+Spanish captain in that same fleet, who was himself engaged in this
+action, and, being severed from the rest in a storm, was taken by the
+Lion, a small ship belonging to London, and is now prisoner in London.
+
+The general commanding this great armada, was Don Alphonso Baçan,
+brother to the Marquis of Santa Cruz. Britandona was admiral of the
+squadron of Biscay. The Marquis of Arumburch [Aremberg] commanded the
+squadron of Seville. Luis Coutinho commanded the hulks and flyboats.
+There were slain and drowned in this fight, as the before-mentioned
+Spanish captain confessed, near a thousand of the enemy, with two
+special commanders, Don Luis de San Juan, and Don George de Prunaria de
+Mallaga, besides others of special account whose names have not yet
+been reported. The admiral of the hulks and the Ascension of Seville
+were both sunk at the side of the Revenge. One other ship, which got
+into the road of San Miguel, sank there also; and a fourth ship had to
+run on shore to save her men. Sir Richard, as it is said, died the
+second or third day on board the general, much bewailed by his enemies;
+but we have not heard what became of his body, whether it were committed
+to the sea or buried on land. The comfort remaining to his friends is,
+that he ended his life honourably, having won great reputation for his
+nation and his posterity, and hath not outlived his honour.
+
+For the rest of her majestys ships, that entered not into the fight like
+the Revenge, the reasons and causes were these: There were of them only
+six in all, two whereof were only small ships; and they could be of no
+service, as the Revenge was engaged past recovery. The island of Flores
+was on one side; 53 sail of Spanish ships were on the other, divided
+into several squadrons, all as full of soldiers as they could contain.
+Almost one half of our men were sick and unable to serve; the ships were
+grown foul, _unroomaged_[374], and hardly able to bear any sail for want
+of ballast, having been six months at sea. If all the rest of the ships
+had entered into the action, they had been all lost; for the very
+hugeness of the Spanish ships, even if no other violence had been
+offered, might have crushed them all into shivers between them; by which
+the loss and dishonour to the queen had been far greater, than any
+injury the enemy could have sustained. It is nevertheless true, that the
+Lord Thomas Howard would have entered between the squadrons of the
+enemy, but the others would on no account consent; and even the master
+of his own ship threatened to leap into the sea, rather than conduct the
+admirals ship and the rest to be a certain prey to the enemy, where
+there was no hope or possibility of victory or even of defence. In my
+opinion, such rashness would have ill assorted with the discretion and
+trust of a general, to have committed himself and his charge to
+assured destruction, without any hope or likelihood of prevailing,
+thereby to have diminished the strength of her majestys navy, and to
+have increased the pride and glory of the enemy.
+
+[Footnote 374: This singular antiquated sea term may signify, not in
+sailing _trim_.--E.]
+
+The Foresight, one of her majestys vessels, commanded by Thomas
+Vavasour, performed a very great service, and staid two hours as near
+the Revenge as the weather would permit, not forsaking the fight till
+well nigh encompassed by the squadrons of the enemy, and then cleared
+himself with great difficulty. The rest gave diverse vollies of shot,
+and engaged as far as the place and their own necessities permitted, so
+as to keep the weather-gage of the enemy, till night parted them.
+
+A few days after this fight, the prisoners being dispersed among the
+Spanish ships of war and ships from the Indies, there arose so great a
+storm from the W. and N.W. that all the fleet was dispersed, as well the
+fleet of the Indies then come to them as the rest of the armada that had
+attended their arrival, of which 14 sail, together with the Revenge
+having 200 Spaniards on board of her, were cast away upon the island of
+St Michael. Thus they honoured the obsequies of the renowned Revenge,
+for the great glory she had achieved, not permitting her to perish
+alone. Besides these, other 15 or 16 of the Spanish ships of war were
+cast away in this storm upon the other islands of the Azores: And, of an
+100 sail and more of the fleet of the Indies, which were expected this
+year in Spain, what with the loss sustained in this tempest, and what
+before in the bay of Mexico and about the Bermuda islands, above 70 were
+lost, including those taken by our London ships; besides one very rich
+ship of the Indies, which set herself on fire being boarded by the
+Pilgrim, and five others taken by the ship belonging to Mr Wats of
+London between the Havannah and Cape St Antonio. On the 4th of November
+this year, we had letters from Tercera, affirming that 3000 dead bodies
+had been thrown upon that island from the perished ships, and that the
+Spaniards confessed to have lost 10,000 men in this storm, besides those
+who perished between the main and the islands. Thus it hath pleased God
+to fight for us, and to defend the justice of our cause, against the
+ambitious and bloody pretences of the Spaniards, who seeking to devour
+all nations are themselves devoured: A manifest testimony how unjust and
+displeasing are their attempts in the sight of God, who hath been
+pleased to witness, by the evil success of their affairs, his mislike of
+their bloody and injurious designs, purposed and practised against all
+Christian princes, over whom they seek unlawful and ungodly rule and
+supreme command.
+
+A day or two before this terrible catastrophe, when some of our
+prisoners desired to be set on shore on the Azores islands, hoping to be
+thence transported into England, and which liberty had been formerly
+promised by the Spanish general; one Morice Fitz John, (son of old John
+of Desmond, a notable traitor, who was cousin-german to the late earl of
+Desmond,) was sent from ship to ship to endeavour to persuade the
+English prisoners to serve the king of Spain. The arguments he used to
+induce them were these. Increase of pay to treble their present
+allowance; advancement to the better sort; and the free exercise of the
+true catholic religion, ensuring the safety of all their souls. For the
+first of these, the beggarly and unnatural behaviour of those English
+and Irish rebels that served the king of Spain in that action was a
+sufficient answer; for so poor and ragged were they, that, for want of
+apparel, they stripped the poor prisoners their countrymen of their
+ragged garments, worn out by six months service, not even sparing to
+despoil them of their bloody shirts from their wounded bodies, and the
+very shoes from their feet; a noble testimony of their rich
+entertainment and high pay. As to the second argument, of hope of
+advancement if they served well and continued faithful to the king of
+Spain; what man could be so blockishly ignorant ever to expect promotion
+and honour from a foreign king, having no other merit or pretension than
+his own disloyalty, his unnatural desertion of his country and parents,
+and rebellion against his true prince, to whose obedience he is bound by
+oath, by nature, and by religion? No! such men are only assured to be
+employed on all desperate enterprizes, and to be held in scorn and
+disdain even among those they serve. That ever a traitor was either
+trusted or advanced I have never learnt, neither can I remember a single
+example. No man could have less becomed the office of orator for such a
+purpose, than this Morice of Desmond: For, the earl his cousin, being
+one of the greatest subjects in the kingdom of Ireland, possessing
+almost whole counties in his large property, many goodly manors,
+castles, and lordships, the county palatine of Kerry, 500 gentlemen of
+his own family and name ready to follow him, all which he and his
+ancestors had enjoyed in peace for three or four hundred years: Yet this
+man, in less than three years after his rebellion and adherence to the
+Spaniards, was beaten from all his holds, not so many as ten gentlemen
+of his name left living, himself taken and beheaded by a gentleman of
+his own nation, and his lands given by parliament to her majesty and
+possessed by the English. His other cousin, Sir John Desmond, taken by
+Mr John Zouch; and his body hung up over the gates of his native city to
+be devoured by ravens. The third brother, Sir James, hanged, drawn, and
+quartered in the same place. Had he been able to vaunt of the success of
+his own house, in thus serving the king of Spain, the argument might
+doubtless have moved much and wrought great effect: the which, because
+he happened to forget, I have thought good to remember in his behalf.
+
+As for the matter of religion, to which he adverted, it would require a
+separate volume, were I to set down how irreligiously they cover their
+greedy and ambitious pretences with that veil of pretended piety. But
+sure I am, there is no kingdom or commonwealth in all Europe that they
+do not invade, under pretence of religion, if it be reformed. Nay if it
+even be what they term catholic, they pretend a title, as if the kings
+of Castile were the natural heirs of all the world. Thus between both,
+no kingdom is exempted from their ambition. Where they dare not invade
+with their own forces, they basely entertain the traitors and vagabonds
+of all nations; seeking by their means, and by their runagate Jesuits,
+to win other parts to their dominion, by which they have ruined many
+noble houses and others in this land, extinguishing their lives and
+families. What good, honour, or fortune, any one hath ever yet achieved
+through them, is yet unheard of. If our English papists will only look
+to Portugal, against which they have no pretence of religion; how their
+nobility are imprisoned and put to death, their rich men made a prey,
+and all sorts of people reduced to servitude; they shall find that the
+obedience even of the Turk is ease and liberty, compared to the tyranny
+of Spain. What have they done in Sicily, in Naples, in Milan, in the low
+countries? Who hath there been spared even for religion? It cometh to my
+remembrance of a certain burgher at Antwerp, whose house was entered by
+a company of Spanish soldiers when they sacked that city. He besought
+them to spare him and his goods, being a good catholic, and therefore
+one of their own party and faction. The Spaniards answered, they knew
+him to be of a good conscience in himself; but his money, plate, jewels,
+and goods, were all heretical, and therefore good prize. So they abused
+and tormented the foolish Fleming, who thought that an _Agnus Dei_ had
+been a sufficient safeguard against all the force of that holy and
+charitable nation.
+
+Neither have they at any time, as they protest, invaded the kingdoms of
+Mexico and Peru and elsewhere, being only led thereto to reduce the
+people to Christianity, not for gold or empire: Whereas, in the single
+island of Hispaniola, they have wasted and destroyed thirty hundred
+thousand of the natives, besides many millions else in other places of
+the Indies: a poor and harmless people, created of God, and might have
+been won to his service, as many of them were, even almost all whom they
+endeavoured to persuade thereto. The story of these their enormities,
+has been written at large by Bartholomew de las Casas[375], a bishop of
+their own nation, and has been translated into English and many other
+languages, under the title of _The Spanish Cruelties_. Who therefore
+would repose trust in such a nation of ravenous strangers, and more
+especially in those Spaniards, who more greedily thirst after the blood
+of the English, for the many overthrows and dishonours they have
+received at our hands; whose weakness we have discovered to the world,
+and whose forces, at home, abroad, in Europe, in the Indies, by sea and
+by land, even with mere handfuls of men and ships on our sides, we have
+overthrown and dishonoured? Let not therefore any Englishman, of what
+religion soever, have other opinion of these Spaniards or their
+abettors, but that those whom they seek to win of our nation, they
+esteem base and traiterous, unworthy persons, and inconstant fools; and
+that they use this pretence of religion, for no other purpose but to
+bewitch us from the obedience due to our natural prince, hoping thereby
+to bring us in time under slavery and subjection, when none shall be
+there so odious and despised, as those very traitors who have sold their
+country to strangers, forsaking their faith and obedience, contrary to
+the laws of nature and religion, and contrary to that humane and
+universal honour, not only of Christians but of heathen and unbelieving
+nations, who have always sustained every degree of labour, embracing
+even death itself, in defence of their country, their prince, and their
+commonwealth.
+
+[Footnote 375: He was bishop of Chiapa in New Spain, and computes the
+Indians destroyed by the Spaniards in about fifty years, at no fewer
+than twenty millions.--Astley, I. 221. a.]
+
+To conclude, it hath ever to this day pleased God to prosper and defend
+her majesty, to break the purposes of her malicious enemies, to confound
+the devices of forsworn traitors, and to overthrow all unjust practices
+and invasions. She hath ever been held in honour by the worthiest kings,
+served by faithful subjects, and shall ever, by the favour of God,
+resist, repell, and confound all attempts against her person and
+kingdom. In the mean time, let the Spaniards and traitors vaunt of their
+success; while we, her true and obedient subjects, guided by the shining
+light of her virtues, shall always love, serve, and obey her, to the end
+of our lives.
+
+
+
+SECTION XI
+
+_Note of the Fleet of the Indies, expected in Spain this year 1591; with
+the number that perished, according to the examination of certain
+Spaniards, lately taken and brought to England[376]._
+
+
+The fleet of New Spain, at their first gathering together, consisted of
+52 sail. The admiral and vice-admiral ships were each of 600 tons
+burden. Four or five of the ships were of 900 and 1000 tons each; some
+were of 400 tons, and the smallest of 200. Of this fleet 19 were cast
+away, containing by estimation 2600 men, which happened along the coast
+of New Spain, so that only 33 sail came to the Havannah.
+
+[Footnote 376: Hakluyt, II. 670.]
+
+The fleet of Terra Firma, at its first departure from Spain, consisted
+of 50 sail, bound for Nombre de Dios, where they discharged their
+loading, and returned thence for their health sake to Carthagena, till
+such time as the treasure they were to take in at Nombre de Dios were
+ready. But before this fleet departed, some were gone by one or two at a
+time, so that only 23 sail of this fleet arrived at the Havannah.
+
+There met at the Havannah,
+
+   33 sail from New Spain,
+   23 from the Terra Firma,
+   12 belonging to San Domingo,
+   9 from Honduras.
+
+Thus 77 ships joined and set sail from the Havannah, on the 17th of July
+1591, according to our account, and kept together till they arrived in
+the lat. of 35° N. which was about the 10th of August. There the wind,
+which had been at S.W. changed suddenly to N. so that the sea coming
+from the S.W. and the wind violent from the N. they were put in great
+extremity, and then first lost the admiral of their fleet, in which were
+500 men; and within three or four days after, another storm rising, five
+or six others of their largest ships were cast away with all their men,
+together with their vice-admiral.
+
+In lat. 38° N. and about the end of August, another great storm arose,
+in which all their remaining ships, except 48, were lost. These 48 ships
+kept together till they came in sight of the islands of Corvo and
+Flores, about the 5th or 6th of September, at which time they were
+separated by a great storm; and of that number, 15 or 16 sail were
+afterwards seen by three Spanish prisoners, riding at anchor under
+Tercera, while 12 or 14 more were observed to bear away for San Miguel.
+What became of them after these Spaniards were taken, cannot yet be
+certified; but their opinion is, that very few of this fleet escaped
+being either taken or cast away. It has been ascertained of late by
+other means of intelligence, that of this whole fleet of 123 sail, which
+should have come to Spain this year, there have only 25 yet arrived.
+This note was extracted from the examinations of certain Spanish
+prisoners, brought to England by six of the London ships, which took
+seven of these men from the before-mentioned fleet of the Indies near
+the islands of the Açores.
+
+
+SECTION XII.
+
+_Report of a Cruizing Voyage to the Azores in 1591, by a feet of London
+ships sent with supplies to the Lord Thomas Howard. Written by Captain
+Robert Flicke_[377].
+
+
+PRELIMINARY REMARKS[378].
+
+The following voyage is extracted from a letter, dated at Plymouth the
+24th of October 1591, and sent thence by Captain Flicke to Messrs Thomas
+Bromley, Richard Staper, and ---- Cordall, three of the contractors, as
+we apprehend, for the ships, and is titled, "Concerning the success of a
+part of the London supplies sent to the isles of the Azores to my Lord
+Thomas Howard." In this letter no mention is made of the number of ships
+employed, nor of the names of more than two captains besides Flicke,
+namely, _Brothus_ and _Furtho_, the latter of whom was bearer of the
+letter. We also find the name of four of the ships; the Costly,
+Centurion, Cherubim, and the Margaret and John, but not the names of
+their commanders, neither the name of the ship in which Flicke sailed,
+and which, for distinctions sake, we call the admiral. These omissions
+may be excuseable in a private letter, written only to acquaint the
+merchants of particulars they had not before learnt, and not designed as
+a formal narrative of the voyage to be laid before the public. As these,
+however, are essential to narratives of this kind, it might have been
+expected of Mr Hakluyt to have supplied such defects. We may judge,
+however, that the number of ships was seven, as in the preceding account
+of the fleet of the Indies, six London ships are mentioned as having
+fallen in with it, which were probably those separated from the admiral
+or commodore, which ship will make the seventh.--_Astley._
+
+[Footnote 377: Hakluyt, II. 671. Astley, I. 221.]
+
+[Footnote 378: Astley, I. 221.]
+
+
+NARRATIVE[379].
+
+
+Worshipful, my hearty commendations to you premised.--By my last letter,
+dated 12th August from this place, I advertised you particularly of the
+accidents which had befallen our fleet till then. It now remains to
+relate our exertions for accomplishing our orders for endeavouring to
+join my Lord Thomas Howard, and the success we have had. We departed
+from hence on the 17th August, the wind not serving before. Next day I
+summoned a council by signal, on which the captains and masters of all
+the ships came on board, when I acquainted them with my commission,
+confirmed by the lords of her majestys council, and with the
+advertisement of Sir Edward Denny, that my lord had determined to remain
+60 leagues west of Fayal, spreading his squadron north and south between
+37° 30' and 38° 30' north. But, if we did not there find him, we were to
+repair to the islands of Flores and Corvo, where a pinnace would
+purposely wait our coming till the last day of August; with the intent,
+after that day, to repair to the coast of Spain, about the heighth of
+the rock [_of Lisbon?_], some twenty or thirty leagues off shore. This
+being advisedly considered, and having regard to the shortness of time
+occasioned by our long delay at this place, and the uncertainty of
+favourable weather for us, it was generally concluded, as the best and
+surest way to meet my lord, to bear up for the heighth of _the rock_,
+without making any stay upon the coast, and thence to make directly for
+the foresaid islands, which was accordingly fully agreed to and
+performed.
+
+[Footnote 379: In pursuance of our uniform plan, of drawing from the
+original sources, this article is an exact transcript from Hakluyt, only
+modernizing his antiquated language and orthography, and not copied from
+the abridgement of Astley.--.E]
+
+The 28th of August we had sight of the Burlings, and being on the 29th
+athwart of Peniche, and having a favourable wind, we directed our course
+west for the Azores, without making any stay off the coast of Portugal.
+The 30th we met the Red Rose, Captain Royden, formerly called the Golden
+Dragon, which had separated from my lord in a storm. He informed us of
+50 sail of the king of Spains armada having sailed for the islands, but
+could not give us any intelligence of my lord, otherwise than supposing
+him to remain about the islands, wherefore we continued our course, the
+wind remaining favourable. The 4th of September we had sight of Tercera,
+and ranged along all the islands, both on their south, and north sides,
+for the space of four days, during which time we met with no ships
+whatever, so that we could learn no intelligence, either of my lord or
+of the fleet of the Indies; wherefore we directed our course to the west
+of Fayal, according to the instructions of Sir Edward Denny. When plying
+to the westwards on the 11th, we descried a sail from our main-top, and
+by two or three in the afternoon raised her hull, but the weather fell
+so calm that we could not fetch her. I therefore sent off my skiff well
+manned, and furnished with shot and swords, the Cherubim and the
+Margaret and John doing the like. Upon this the sail stood off again,
+and on the approach of night our boats lost sight of her and so
+returned. During this pursuit the Centurion was left astern, so that we
+missed her next morning, and spent all that day plying up and down in
+search of her: And, as all our ships were directed, in case of
+separation by stress of weather or other mischance, to meet and join at
+Flores, we, according to the instructions of Sir Edward Denny, proceeded
+for the purpose of finding my Lord Thomas Howard, and being in the
+heighth appointed, and not able to remain there in consequence of
+extreme tempests, which forced us to the isles of Flores and Corvo,
+which we made on the 14th in the morning, and there rejoined the
+Centurion. She informed us, that on the 12th day, being the same on
+which she lost us, she had met 45 sail of the fleet of the Indies.
+
+The same night, in consequence of this intelligence, we came to anchor
+between Flores and Corvo, and next morning at day-break, I convened a
+council of all the captains and masters on board my ship, by a signal
+flag. For satisfying our desire to learn some intelligence of my lord,
+as also for the purpose of procuring a supply of water, it was thought
+good to send our boats on shore armed, under the command of Captain
+Brothus; besides which, it was agreed, after our departure thence, to
+range along the south sides of the islands, that we might either procure
+some intelligence of my lord, or fall in with the fleet of the Indies;
+and, in case of missing both objects, to direct our course for Cape St
+Vincent. The boats being sent on shore, according to this determination,
+it chanced that the Costely, which rode outermost at our anchoring
+ground, having weighed to bring herself nearer among us to assist in
+protecting our boats, discovered two sail in opening the land, which we
+in the road-stead could not perceive. Upon this she fired a shot of
+warning, which caused us to _wave_ all our boats back; and before they
+could recover their ships, the two ships seen by the Costely appeared to
+us, on which we made all sail towards them, and in a happy hour as it
+pleased God. We had no sooner cleared the land and spoken one of them,
+which was a bark belonging to Bristol, also seeking my lord
+ineffectually at the place appointed, when so violent a storm arose that
+we had been in great danger of perishing if we had continued in the
+road. This storm continued in its utmost violence for sixty hours,
+during which I was separated from all our fleet except the Cherubim, and
+Costely, which continued in company. After it subsided, sailing in
+among the islands, I viewed the road of Fayal, and finding no roaders
+there, I went thence for the isle of Tercera.
+
+On the 19th day of September in the morning, coming to Tercera, and
+intending to edge into the road, a tempest arose and so scanted the wind
+that we could not get in. Being accordingly driven to leeward, we fell
+in among some of the fleet of the Indies, which had been dispersed by
+the storm, and driven from the road. Upon this our ship and the two
+others then with me gave several chases, by which we parted company.
+Following up my chase, we made her strike and yield about noon, when she
+turned out to be a Portuguese, laden with hides, sarsa-parilla, and
+_anile_ [Indigo.] At this instant we espied another, and taking our
+prize with us, followed and captured her before night. She was called
+the Conception, commanded by Francisco Spinola, and was laden with
+cochineal, raw hides, and certain raw silk: And as the sea was so
+tempestuous that we could in no way board her, neither by boats nor from
+the ship, so we kept her under our lee till a fit opportunity. That same
+night, a little before day, another ship joined company with us,
+supposing us and our two prizes to belong to their fleet, which we
+dissembled till morning.
+
+In the morning of the 20th, this new sail being somewhat shot a-head of
+us, and being anxious for the safe keeping of the two former, we
+purposed to cause our two prizes put out more sail, so as to keep near
+us while chasing the third, as our master insisted that they would
+follow us; owing to which, by the time we had caused this new one to
+yield, and had sent men on board to take possession, the Conception
+being far astern, and having got the wind of us, stood off with all her
+sails, so that we were forced to make a new chase after her, and had not
+the wind enlarged upon us we had lost her. The whole of this day was
+spent in this new pursuit, before we recovered her, and brought
+ourselves again in company with our other prizes; by which we lost the
+opportunity of that day, during which the weather served for boarding
+the Portuguese prize, which was in great distress, making request of us
+to take them on board, as they were ready to sink, as we could well
+perceive by their pumping incessantly, and in our judgment she went down
+that night.
+
+On the 21st the Conception sprung a leak also, which gained upon her
+notwithstanding every effort at the pumps, so that she could not be kept
+long above water. So I took out of her 42 chests of cochineal and silk,
+leaving her to the sea with 11 feet water in her hold, and 4700 hides.
+The other prize, which we have brought into harbour, is the Nuestra
+Sennora de los Remedios, Francisco Alvares captain, laden with 16 chests
+of cochineal, certain fardels [or bales] of raw silk, and about 4000
+hides. Upon the discharge of the goods, your honours shall be
+particularly advertised of the same. In boarding our prizes, such was
+the disorder of our men, that, besides rifling the persons of the
+Spaniards, they broke open the chests and purloined what money was in
+them; although I had given notice of my intention of going on board in
+person, to have taken a just account thereof in presence of three or
+four witnesses, putting the whole in safe custody, pursuant to the
+articles made in this behalf. And whereas certain sums of money taken
+from our men, which they had thus purloined and embezzled, together with
+other parcels brought on board my ship, amounting to 2129 pesos and a
+half, all of which the company demanded to have shared among them as due
+pillage, I refused this demand, and read to them openly at the mast the
+articles confirmed by my lord treasurer and my lord admiral, by which
+they ought to be directed in these things, declaring that it was not in
+my power to dispose thereof until the same were finally determined at
+home. Thereupon they mutinied, and grew at length to such fury, that
+they declared they would have it or else would break down the cabin.
+Seeing them ready to execute this threat, I was forced to yield, lest
+the great number of Spaniards we had on board might have taken the
+opportunity of rising against us; which, indeed, after the brawls of our
+men were appeased, they actually endeavoured to have done.
+
+By the last advice from Castile, the general of the king of Spains
+armada, lately put to sea, is ordered to join his fleet with that of the
+Indies, and to remain at Tercera till the 15th of October, waiting for
+six _pataches_ with seven or eight millions of the royal treasure
+expected by that time: otherwise they are to wait their coming from the
+Havannah till January next, or until the kings farther pleasure shall be
+made known. These pataches are said to be of 300 tons burden each,
+carrying 30 pieces of brass cannon, and are also reported to sail in a
+superior manner to any other ships. Before their coming to Flores,
+there perished of the fleet of the Indies eleven sail, among which was
+the admiral, and not one roan saved. It is likewise supposed by the
+Spaniards, that the storms we encountered at Flores and Tercera must
+have destroyed many more of them, of which indeed we were partly
+eye-witnesses. On the whole, therefore, what by the seas and our men of
+war, of the 75 sail that came from the Havannah, I presume one half will
+not arrive in Spain.
+
+On the night of the 11th October, we came to anchor in Plymouth sound,
+and got up next morning with our prize into Catwater, for which God be
+praised: For so vehement a storm arose, that our prize was forced to cut
+away her main-mast, otherwise, her ground tackle being bad, she had been
+driven on shore by the violence of the storm. This was the main cause
+which induced me to put in here, where I now propose to discharge the
+goods without farther risk, and have certified thus much to my lord
+admiral, and therewith desire to receive the directions of my lords of
+the council together with yours, as my lord Thomas Howard is not yet
+returned. How the rest of our consorts, which separated from us, may
+have sped, or what prizes they may have taken, of which there is much
+hope by reason of the scattering of the West India fleet, I am as yet
+unable to say any thing. And thus, waiting your answer, and referring
+for all other matters to captain Furtho, the bearer hereof, I make an
+end, at Plymouth this 24th of October 1591.
+
+   Your Worships loving Friend,
+   ROBERT FLICKE.
+
+SECTION XIII.
+
+_Exploits of the English in several Expeditions and cruizing Voyages
+from 1589 to 1592; extracted from John Huighen van Linschoten_[380].
+
+
+PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+
+The entire title of this article in Hakluyts Collection is, "A large
+testimony of John Huighen van Linschoten, Hollander, concerning the
+worthy exploits achieved by the right honourable the Earl of Cumberland,
+by Sir Martine Frobisher, Sir Richard Grenville, and diverse other
+English captains, about the isles of the Azores, and upon the coasts of
+Spain and Portugal, in the years 1589, 1590, 1591, &c. recorded in his
+excellent discourse of voyages to the East and West Indies, cap. 96, 97,
+and 99." Of this article, the Editor of Astley gives the following
+account.
+
+[Footnote 380: Hakluyt, II. 674. Astley, I. 225.]
+
+"The author, John Huighen van Linschoten, left Goa with a fleet of
+ships, viz. The Santa Maria, Nuestra Sennora de la Concepçao, the San
+Christopher admiral, the San Thome which was the largest and most richly
+laden, and the Santa Cruz in which Linschoten sailed. It was extracted
+by Hakluyt from the 96th, 97th, and 99th chapters of the first book of
+Linschotens Voyages in English, beginning at p. 171. This section is
+intended as a supplement to the English cruizing voyages already
+inserted, which fall within the period mentioned in the title; and is
+the more material, as the memoirs it contains not only confirm the most
+material facts related in these preceding voyages, but give a
+satisfactory account of many things which are there but imperfectly
+related, often continuing the history which in these breaks off
+abruptly, and bringing to light some remarkable achievements of our
+countrymen, of which otherwise no mention could be found in our
+voluminous naval transactions.
+
+"We are persuaded the reader will feel a secret joy in contemplating the
+great figure this nation made in these heroic times; owing to that
+universal zeal to promote the commerce and glory of England, which then
+prevailed among the ministers of the crown, as well as the people at
+large. We presume likewise, that this pleasure will be not a little
+enhanced by the consideration that these particulars were written by a
+foreigner, who is held in great reputation for his judgment and
+fidelity, and who has sounded the praise of our countrymen even beyond
+what has been done by our own historians. On the other hand, the reader
+will be no less concerned to find what immense treasures some of our
+adventurers lost, by unaccountably missing the fleets of which they went
+in search, when at the same time they were so near them, that it seemed
+almost impossible they should escape. This shews, after all, how
+uncertain is the meeting of ships at sea, and that two great fleets may
+sail almost close to one another, without having the least
+suspicion."--_Astley._
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The 22d of July 1589, about evening, being near the islands of Flores
+and Corvo, we perceived three ships making towards us, which came from
+under the land and put us in great fear, for they came close to our
+admiral and shot diverse times at him and at another ship of our
+company, whereby we perceived them to be English, for they bore the
+English flag at their main-tops, but none of them seemed above 60 tons
+burden. About evening they followed after us, and all night bore
+lanterns with candles burning at their sterns, although the moon shined.
+That night we passed hard by the island of Fayal; and next morning,
+being between the isle of St George on our right and the small isle of
+Graciosa on our left, we espied the three English ships still following
+us. They consulted together, upon which one of them sailed backwards, as
+if one ship had followed after us without company, and for a time that
+ship was out of sight; but in no long time afterwards, it returned to
+the other two, when they consulted again, and came all three together
+against our ship, because we were to leeward of all our ships, having
+the island of St George on one side instead of a sconce, [fort] thinking
+so to deal with us as to force us to run on shore, to which we were very
+near. In that manner they came bravely towards us, with their flags
+displayed, sounding their trumpets, and sailed at least three times
+about us, discharging at us their muskets and calivers and some pieces
+of great ordnance, doing us no harm in the hull of our ship, but spoiled
+all our sails and ropes, and so plagued us that no man durst put forth
+his head. When we shot off a piece of ordnance, we had at the least an
+hours work to load it again, there being a great noise and cry in our
+ship, as if we had been all cast away, whereupon the English began to
+mock us, calling out to us with many taunting words.
+
+In the mean time, the other ships that were in company with us hoisted
+all their sails, doing their best to bear away for Tercera, and not
+looking once behind them to help us, as not caring for us, but doubting
+they would be too late thither, and thinking they did enough if they
+could save themselves, whereby it may be easily seen what kind of
+company they keep with each other, and what kind of order is among them.
+In the end, finding small advantage against us, and little knowing in
+what fear we were, and also because we were not far from Tercera, the
+English left us; on which we were not a little rejoiced, as thinking
+ourselves risen from death to life, though we were not yet well assured
+nor void of fear, till we got to anchor in the road of Tercera, under
+the protection of the Portuguese fort, towards which we made all
+possible sail. On the other hand, we were still in great doubt, not
+knowing the situation of the island, or whether they were our friends or
+enemies; and we were so much the more doubtful, because we found no man
+of war there, nor any caravels of advice from Portugal as we expected,
+to have convoyed us home, or given us intelligence, as they usually do
+in that country. And, because the English had been so victorious in
+those parts, we suspected that it went not well with Spain. The
+inhabitants of Tercera were no less fearful than we, for on seeing our
+fleet they thought us to have been English, and that we came to over-run
+the island, because the three English ships came in along with us and
+had wound up their flags; upon which the islanders sent out two caravels
+to us that lay there, with advice from the king for such India ships as
+should come there.
+
+Those caravels came to view us, and perceiving what we were made after
+us; upon which the English ships left us and made towards the caravels,
+because the caravels thought them friends and shunned them not, as
+supposing them of our company: But we shot three or four times, and made
+signs to them that they should make towards the island, which they
+presently did. On perceiving that, the Englishmen made out to sea: and
+then the caravels sent on board us, saying that the people of the island
+were all in arms, having received advice from Portugal, that Sir Francis
+Drake was in readiness, and meant to come to the islands. They likewise
+brought us news of the overthrow of the Spanish armada which had gone
+against England, and that the English had been at the gates of Lisbon;
+for which reason it win the king's commands that we should put into the
+island of Tercera, and remain there under the protection of its castle,
+till we received further orders, as it was then thought too dangerous
+for us to continue our voyage to Lisbon. These news put all our fleet in
+great fear, making us look upon each other as not knowing what to do or
+say; as it was dangerous for us to put into the road, which lies open to
+the sea, so that although they had the kings commands for so doing, the
+India ships durst not anchor there, but only used to come thither,
+standing off and on, and sending their boats a-land for such necessaries
+as they wanted, without coming to anchor. But now necessity compelled us
+to this measure, owing to our fears for the three small English ships,
+also because of the kings orders, and because we understood that the
+Earl of Cumberland was not far from these islands with sundry ships of
+war. We made therefore a virtue of necessity, and entering the road of
+Tercera, anchored close under the castle, in waiting for orders from the
+king to pursue our voyage, it being then the 24th of July or St Jameses
+day.
+
+The 12th of August, the Earl of Cumberland, with six or seven ships of
+war, sailed past the island of Tercera; and to our great good fortune
+passed out of sight. We then set out in all haste, and, for our greater
+security, took along with us 400 Spaniards of those who were in garrison
+in the island, and made sail for Lisbon with a favourable wind, so that
+in eleven days we arrived in the river Tagus with great joy and triumph.
+For, had we been one day longer of getting into the river, we had all
+been taken by Captain Drake, [Sir Francis Drake] who came before Cascais
+with 40 ships, at the very time when we cast anchor in the Tagus under
+the guard of several gallies.
+
+While I remained in Tercera, the Earl of Cumberland came to St Marys to
+take in fresh water and other victuals; but the inhabitants would not
+suffer him to have it, and wounded both the earl himself and several of
+his men, so that they were forced to depart without having any thing.
+Likewise, while I was at Tercera, the same earl came to the island of
+Graciosa, where he went to land in person with seven or eight others,
+demanding certain beasts, poultry, and other victuals, with wine and
+fresh water, which they willingly gave him, after which he departed
+without doing any injury, for which the inhabitants were very thankful,
+praising his courtesy and faithfulness to his promise. The earl came
+likewise at that time to Fayal, where at the first they begun to resist
+him; but by reason of some controversy among themselves, they let him
+land, when he razed the castle, throwing all the cannon into the sea,
+and took with him certain caravels and ships that lay in the road, with
+all such provisions as he wanted, and then departed. Thereupon, the king
+caused the principal actors in that transaction to be punished, and went
+thither a company of soldiers, which went from Tereera, with all kind of
+warlike ammunition and great shot, rebuilding the cattle the better to
+defend the island, and no more trusting to the Portuguese inhabitants.
+
+The 9th of October 1589[381], there arrived in Tereera fourteen ships
+from the Spanish West Indies, laden with cochineal, hides, gold, silver,
+pearls, and other rich wares. When they departed from the harbour of the
+Havannah, they were fifty in company; of which eleven sunk in the
+channel [of Florida] by reason of foul weather, and all the rest were
+scattered and separated from each other in a storm. Next day there came
+another ship of the same fleet, which sailed close under the island
+endeavouring to get into the road; when she was met by an English whip
+that had not above three cast pieces [of ordnance], while the Spaniards
+had twelve. They fought a long while together, which we in the island
+could distinctly see. The governor of the island sent out two boats
+filled with musketeers to aid the Spanish ship; but before they could
+get up to her assistance; the English had shot her below water, so that
+we saw her sink into the sea with all her sails up, and she entirely
+disappeared. The Englishmens boat saved the Captain and about thirty
+others, but not one pennyworth of the goods, which were to the value of
+200,000 ducats, in gold, silver, and pearls. All the rest of the crew
+were drowned, to the number of about fifty persons, among whom were some
+friars and women, whom the English could not save. The English set all
+the people they had saved on shore, and then sailed away. The 27th of
+the same month of October 1589, these fourteen ships sailed from
+Tercera, for Seville; and on coming to the coast of Spain, they were all
+taken by some English ships that watched for them, two only excepted
+which made their escape, all the rest being carried to England.
+
+[Footnote 381: In Hakluyt, all that now follows is marked as extracted
+from the 99th chapter of Linschoten.]
+
+About this time, the earl of Cumberland, with one of the queens ships
+and five or six others, kept hovering about the islands, and came
+oft-times close to the island of Tercera, and to the road of Angra, so
+near that the people on land could easily count all the men on his
+decks, and could even distinguish one from another; they of the island
+not once shooting at them, which they might easily have done, as they
+were often within musket-shot of the town and fort. He continued in
+these parts for the space of two months, sailing round about the
+islands, and landed in Graciosa and Fayal, as I have already mentioned.
+He took several ships and caravels, which he sent off to England, so
+that the people of the islands durst not put forth their heads. At one
+time, about three or four days after the earl had been at the island of
+Fayal, and was departed from thence, there arrived there six ships of
+the Indies, the general of which was one _Juan Dorives_, which landed in
+that island four millions of gold and silver[382]. Then, being much in
+fear of the English, and having refreshed themselves with all speed,
+they set sail and arrived safe at San Lucar, without meeting an enemy,
+to the great good luck of the Spaniards and bad fortune of the English;
+for, within less than two days after the gold and silver was again laden
+into the Spanish ships, the earl of Cumberland sailed past the island
+again; so that if he had once got sight of these valuable ships, without
+doubt he had got them all, as the Spaniards themselves confessed.
+
+[Footnote 382: The denomination is not mentioned, perhaps _pezos_, or
+what we call dollars.--E.]
+
+In the month of November, two great ships arrived in Tercera, being the
+admiral and vice-admiral of the fleet laden with silver, which had been
+separated from the fleet in a great storm, and were in great jeopardy
+and distress, ready to sink, being forced to use all their pumps, and so
+terrified, that they wished a thousand times to have met the English, to
+whom they would willingly have given all the silver, and every thing
+they had on board, only to preserve their lives. Although the earl still
+hovered about the islands, yet did he not meet with these ships, which
+got with much labour and difficulty into the road of Angra, where with
+all speed they unladed and landed about five millions in silver, all in
+great pieces or ingots of 8 or 12 great pounds, so that the whole quay
+lay covered with plates and chests of silver, full of pieces of eight
+rials, most wonderful to behold: Each million being worth ten hundred
+thousand ducats, besides gold, pearls, and other precious stones, which
+were not registered. The admiral and chief commander of these ships, and
+of the whole fleet to which they belonged, was _Alvaro Flores de Quin
+Quiniones_, who was sick of the Neapolitan disease, and was brought to
+land; and of which malady he died soon afterwards at Seville. He had
+with him the kings commission under the great seal, giving him full
+authority as general and commander in chief upon the seas, over all
+fleets and ships, and in all places, lands, and islands, on shore
+wherever he came; wherefore the governor of Tercera shewed him much
+honour, and between them it was concerted, seeing the weakness of the
+ships and the danger from the English, that they should send the ships
+first empty of treasure to Seville or Lisbon, under a guard of soldiers,
+when the king might give orders afterwards to fetch the silver home
+under safe convoy. The said admiral Alvaro Flores staid there, under
+colour of taking care of the silver, but chiefly because of his disease
+and fear of the English. He had for his part alone, above the value of
+50,000 ducats in pearls, which he shewed us, and sought to sell or
+barter them with us for spices or bills of exchange. These two ships
+sailed from Tercera with three or four hundred men, including those who
+came with them from the Indies and soldiers; but while at sea in a
+storm, the admiral split and sunk outright, not one man being saved; and
+the vice-admiral, after cutting away her masts, ran aground hard by
+Setubal, where she broke in pieces, some of the men saving themselves by
+swimming, who brought the news of all the rest being drowned.
+
+In the same month of November 1589, there came two great ships out of
+the Spanish Indies, and when within half a mile of the road of Tercera,
+they were met with by an English ship which fought them both together
+for a long while, and took them both. About seven or eight months
+before, there came an English ship to Tercera, pretending to be a
+Frenchman come for traffic, and began to load woad, but being discovered
+was confiscated to the king, both ship and cargo, and the men all made
+prisoners, yet were allowed to roam up and down to get their livings, by
+labouring like slaves, being considered in as safe custody in the island
+at large as if in a prison. But at length, upon a Sunday, they all went
+behind the hills called _Bresil_, where they found a fishing boat, in
+which they rowed out to sea to the ships of the Earl of Cumberland, who
+chanced for their good fortune to come to the island, and anchored with
+his ships about half a mile from the road of Angra, close to two small
+islands about a bare shot from the shore of Tercera, which are full of
+goats, deer, and sheep, belonging to the inhabitants of Tercera. These
+sailors knew this well, wherefore they rowed to these islands in their
+boats, whence they took as many goats and sheep as they needed, which
+was well seen by those of the town and main island, but they durst not
+go forth to hinder them. By this exploit, there only remained behind the
+master and merchant of the detained English ship. This master had a
+brother-in-law in England, who, on hearing of his brothers imprisonment,
+got a licence from the queen to fit out a ship, with which to endeavour
+to recover his losses by cruizing against the Spaniards, by which to
+redeem his brother from imprisonment in Tercera, and it was he who took
+the two Spanish ships before the town: The before-mentioned merchant,
+who was my intimate acquaintance, was standing on the shore along with
+me, looking at them at the time. When these ships were taken, which were
+worth 300,000 ducats, the brother sent all the men on shore, except only
+two of the principal gentlemen, whom he kept to give in exchange for his
+brother; and by the pilot of one of the captured ships he sent a letter
+to the governor of Tercera, offering to send the two gentlemen on shore
+if his brother were delivered up, otherwise he would carry them
+prisoners into England, which indeed he did, as the governor would not
+deliver up his brother, saying the gentlemen might make that suit to the
+king of Spain. We invited that Spanish pilot to supper with us, and the
+Englishmen likewise, when he related to us the particulars of the fight,
+much commending the order and manner in which the English fought, as
+also their courteous behaviour to him: But, in the end, the English
+merchant stole away in a French ship, without paying any ransom.
+
+In January 1590, there arrived one ship alone at Tercera from the
+Spanish West Indies, bringing news that a fleet of an hundred sail,
+which had set out from the Indies, were driven by a storm on the coast
+of Florida, where they were all cast away, vast riches and many men
+being lost, and she alone had escaped with the news. Thus by account, of
+200 ships which were certainly known to have sailed out of New Spain,
+San Domingo, Havannah, Cabo Verde, Brazil, Guinea, &c. in the year
+1589, for Spain and Portugal, not above 14 or 15 of them arrived safe,
+all the rest having either been foundered, cast away, or taken. In the
+same month of January, there came to Tercera from Seville, 15 or 16
+ships, mostly fliboats of the Low Countries, and some ships of Britanny,
+that were arrested in Spain. These came out full of soldiers and well
+provided with guns and ammunition, to lade home the silver that lay in
+Tercera, and to bring home Alvaro Flores into Spain, by order of the
+king. As at this time of the year there are always great storms about
+these islands, the above-mentioned ships durst not enter the road of
+Tercera, for it then blew so great a storm that some of the ships, which
+had entered the road, had been forced to cut away their masts, and were
+in much danger of being lost, and among these a ship of Biscay was
+actually driven upon the coast and dashed to pieces, but all the men
+were saved. The other ships were obliged to keep to sea and to separate
+from each other, allowing themselves to drive at the mercy of the winds
+and waves till the 15th of March, as in all that time they had not one
+day of good weather in which to anchor, so that they endured much
+distress, heartily cursing both the silver and the island.
+
+When this storm was passed, they fell in with an English ship of about
+40 tons, which by reason of the heavy wind could not hoist all her
+sails, so that they took her. Hoisting her English ensign on the stern
+of their admiral, the ships came now as proudly into the road-stead of
+Tercera as if they had defeated the whole navy of England: But, just as
+their admiral was entering the road, trickt out with the English flag on
+his stern, there came by chance two English ships past the island, which
+paid her so well for her bravity, that she had to cry out
+_misericordia_. Had she been a mile farther out, the English ships
+doubtless would have taken her; but getting under the guns of the
+fortress, which began to play upon the English ships, they were forced
+to leave her and put farther out to sea, after having slain five or six
+of the Spaniards.
+
+The Englishmen taken in the small ship were put under hatches, coupled
+together in irons; and, after they had been three or four days
+prisoners, a Spanish ensign in the ship, who had a brother slain in the
+armada that went against England, took a fancy to revenge his brothers
+death, and to shew his own manhood on these captives; whereupon, taking
+a poinard, he stabbed six of them to the heart as they sat below in
+irons. Two others of them perceiving this atrocious action, clasped each
+other about the body, and leapt into the sea, where they were drowned.
+This infamous act was much disliked by all the Spaniards, so that the
+assassin was carried prisoner to Lisbon; upon which the king of Spain
+commanded him to be sent to England, that the queen might use him
+according to her pleasure; which sentence, at the earnest request of the
+friends of the murderer, was commuted to an order for his being
+beheaded; but on Good Friday, when the cardinal was going to mass, the
+captains and commanders made such intercession for him, that he was
+finally pardoned. I thought good to note this incident, that the bloody
+and dishonourable minds of the Spaniards to those who were under
+subjection to them, might be made manifest.
+
+The same two English ships, which followed the Spanish admiral till he
+took shelter under the guns of the fort, put out to sea, where they met
+with the only remaining vessel of that fleet which had been scattered in
+the storm, all the rest being now in the road. This small ship they
+took, sending all me men on shore unhurt; but it they had known what had
+been done to the English captives, I believe they would have taken
+vengeance, as many an innocent soul afterwards paid for the atrocity of
+the Spanish ensign. The ship now taken by the English, was the same
+which had been formerly confiscated at Tercera, and was sold to the
+Spaniards that then came from the Indies, who sailed in her to San
+Lucar; where it also was arrested by the duke, and appointed to go along
+with the others, to fetch the silver from Tercera, as it was a good
+sailer; but it was the meanest of all that fleet. By this means, it was
+taken from the Spaniards and carried to England, where the owners got it
+again when they least expected.
+
+On the 19th March 1590, having laden the kings silver and received
+Alvaro Flores with his company, and good provision of necessaries,
+warlike ammunitions and soldiers, the before-mentioned 19 ships sailed
+from Tercera, firmly resolved, as they set forth, to fight valiantly to
+the last man, before they would yield or lose their riches. Though they
+intended to make for San Lucar, the wind forced them to Lisbon, as if
+willing to keep them there in safety, although Alvaro Flores would have
+persisted in forcing his way to San Lucar against the wind and weather.
+But, constrained by adverse wind, and importunately urged by the
+mariners, who protested they would require their losses and damages from
+him, he consented to put in at Lisbon, whence the silver was conveyed by
+land to Seville. At this time, there lay 20 English ships off Cape St
+Vincent, to watch for this fleet; so that if they had gone forwards for
+Sun Lucar, which they certainly had done if the wind had been fair, they
+must have fallen into the hands of the English: They may say, therefore,
+that the wind lent them a fortunate voyage on this occasion. If the
+English had met them, they had surely been in great danger, and possibly
+few of them had escaped, on account of the fear which they were then in
+of the English; as fortune, or God rather, was then wholly against them,
+which was enough to make the Spaniards out of heart, and to inspire the
+English with the greater boldness; for being victorious, they were stout
+and valiant, and seeing all their enterprizes successful, they were
+become lords and masters of the sea, and needed to care for no man, as
+well appears from this short narrative.
+
+On the 7th of August 1590, a fleet of 20 English ships appeared off
+Tercera, five of them being ships belonging to the queen, of which one
+Martin Frobisher was general, as we afterwards learnt. They came
+purposely to watch for the fleet of the Spanish West Indies, and for the
+India ships, and the ships of the other countries in the West. This put
+the islanders in great fear, especially those of Fayal, where the
+English sent a trumpeter to the governor, to ask certain supplies of
+wine, flesh, and other provisions for their money. This request was not
+only refused, but they shot the messenger and slew him, which gave the
+English much displeasure, so that they sent another message desiring
+them to look to themselves and keep sure guard, as they meant to come
+and visit them per force. The governor sent back for answer, that he was
+there in behalf of the king of Spain, and would do his best to keep them
+out, as in duty bound; but nothing was done after all, though the people
+of Fayal were in great fear, sending to Tercera for aid, whence they had
+some barks with powder and other ammunition of war, with some Biscuit
+and other necessary provisions.
+
+The 30th of August, certain news came from Portugal, that 80 ships had
+sailed from _the Groin_, (Corunna) laden with victuals, ammunition of
+war, money, and soldiers, bound for Britanny in aid of the catholic
+leaguers of France against the king of Navarre. At this time likewise,
+two Netherland hulks, when half seas over on their way from Portugal to
+Tercera, were met by four English ships belonging to the queen,
+commanded by Sir John Hawkins, by whom they were stopped; but he let
+them go again uninjured. According to the report of these Netherlanders,
+each of these ships carried 80 pieces of ordnance. They reported
+likewise, that Captain Drake (Sir Francis) lay with 40 English ships in
+the channel, watching for the fleet from Corunna; and that ten other
+English ships lay off Cape St Vincent, that if any ships escaped
+Frobisher at the islands, they might intercept them. These tidings
+greatly alarmed the islanders, lest if the English failed of catching
+the Spanish fleet, and got nothing by them, they might fall upon the
+islands, that they might not go home empty handed; whereupon they held
+strict watch, sending home advice to the king of what intelligence they
+had.
+
+The 1st September, there came a Portuguese ship from Pernambuco in
+Brazil to the island of St Michael, with news, that the admiral of the
+Portuguese fleet from the East Indies, having missed St Helena, was
+forced to put into Pernambuco, though expressly forbidden by the king
+under a heavy penalty, because of the worms in that haven which greatly
+spoil the ships. The same ship, in which was the Admiral Bernardin
+Ribero, sailed the former year 1589 from Lisbon for India with five
+ships in her company, four only of which got to India, the fifth being
+never heard of, so that she was believed lost. The other four returned
+safe into Portugal, though the admiral was much spoiled, as he met two
+English ships, which fought him a long while and slew many of his men,
+yet he escaped from them at last. The 5th of the same month, there
+arrived at Tercera a caravel belonging to Corvo, bringing 50 men who had
+been spoiled by the English, who set them ashore on the island of Corvo.
+They had been taken in a ship coming from the Spanish West Indies, and
+reported that the English had taken four other West India ships, and a
+caravel having the king of Spains letters of advice for the Portuguese
+ships coming from the East Indies; and that, including those they had
+taken, the English had at least 40 ships together, so that nothing could
+escape them; therefore, that the Portuguese ships coming from India
+durst not put into the islands, but took their course between 40° and
+42° of N. latitude, whence they shaped their course for Lisbon, shunning
+likewise Cape St Vincent, as otherwise they could not look for safety,
+the sea being quite full of English ships. Wherefore, the king advised
+that the fleet now at Havannah in the Spanish West Indies, and ready to
+sail for Spain, should remain till the next year, because of the great
+danger of falling into the hands of the English. This was no small
+charge and hindrance to the fleet, as the ships that remain long at the
+Havannah consume themselves and in a manner eat up one another, from the
+great number of their people, and the great scarcity and dearness of
+every thing at that place; wherefore many of the ships adventured rather
+to hazard themselves singly for the voyage than to stay there; all of
+which fell into the hands of the English, and many of their men were
+brought to Tercera: So that we could see nothing else for a whole day
+but spoiled men set on shore, some from one ship and some from another,
+it being pitiful to see and hear them all, cursing the English and their
+own bad fortunes, with those who had been the cause of provoking the
+English to war, and complaining of the small remedy and order taken
+therein by the officers of the king of Spain.
+
+The 19th of the same month of September, a caravel arrived at Tercera
+from Lisbon, bringing one of the kings officers to cause lade the goods
+that were saved from the Malacca ship, and for which we had so long
+tarried there, and to send them to Lisbon. At the same time Don Alonso
+de Baçan sailed from Corunna for the Azores with 40 great ships of war,
+to wait for the fleets from the Spanish and Portuguese Indies, which,
+along with our Malacca goods when laden, he was to convoy to the Tagus.
+But, when he had been some days at sea, always with a contrary wind,
+only two of his ships could get to the islands, all the rest being
+scattered. When these two ships arrived at Tercera and did not find the
+fleet, they immediately returned in search of it. In the mean time the
+king changing his mind, sent orders for the commercial ships to remain
+in the Indies, and for Don Alonso Baçan to return to Corunna, which he
+did accordingly, never once coming near the Azores except the two ships
+already mentioned; for he well knew that the English lay near Corvo, but
+would not visit them, and so returned to Corunna. Thus our goods from
+Malacca remained unshipped, and were trussed up again, having to wait
+some other opportunity.
+
+The 23d October in this same year 1590, a caravel came from Portugal to
+Tercera, bringing advice that of the five ships which sailed in that
+year from Lisbon for the East Indies, four of them had returned to
+Portugal after being four months at sea: the admiral ship, in which was
+the viceroy Mathias de Albuquerque, having only got to India after being
+eleven months at sea without ever seeing land, as was afterwards learnt
+by news over-land, having arrived in great misery at Malacca. In this
+ship there died 280 men during the voyage out, according to a note sent
+by the viceroy to the cardinal at Lisbon, with the names and sirnames of
+every man, likewise giving a narrative of the voyage, and the misery
+they had endured. This obstinate perseverance was entirely occasioned by
+the anxiety of Albuquerque not to lose the government of Portuguese
+India, as he had sworn to lose his life or arrive in India, which indeed
+he did to the great danger and loss of his company, many of whom paid
+with their lives, and that chiefly owing to want of provisions.
+Albuquerque knew well, however, if he had returned to Portugal with the
+other ships, that he would have been deprived of his government, as the
+people began already to murmur at his proud and lofty demeanour. Among
+other instances of his pride, he caused to be painted over his gallery,
+the figure of Fortune and his own picture, with a staff standing by, as
+if threatening Fortune, with this motto, _Quero que vencas_; that is, _I
+will have thee to overcome_[383]. When this was read by the cardinal and
+other gentlemen, who accompanied him on board out of respect, they
+thought it an instance of foolish arrogance: But this is no strange
+matter among the Portuguese, as they above all others _must let the fool
+peep out of their sleeves_, especially when in authority. I knew Mathias
+de Albuquerque in India, when a military officer, then beloved of all
+men and behaving himself courteously to all, so that he was unanimously
+desired to be their viceroy. But, having received his patent with full
+power and authority, he so much changed from his former behaviour, that,
+by reason of his pride, all began to fear and curse him, even before his
+departure from Lisbon, such charges being often seen in many men, when
+advanced to high state and dignity[384].
+
+[Footnote 383: De Faria says, "The season was so far advanced when he
+set out, that it was generally believed he would not accomplish the
+voyage. But he caused himself to be painted on his colours standing on
+Fortune; and, setting these up in his ship, declared he would perform
+the voyage in spite of her, and did so" As De Faria does not reflect
+upon him for this, it may be presumed, he thought it merely an
+indication of an heroic disposition.--Astley, I. 231. a.]
+
+[Footnote 384: De Faria gives a very advantageous character of this
+viceroy, saying that he was one of the most deserving of those who
+enjoyed that high station. He left 80,000 ducats in the treasury,
+besides jewels of Ceylon of great value. He thought no one could cheat
+him; yet, on purpose to undeceive him, a soldier drew his pay three
+several times by as many names. He was of middle stature, and lame of
+one foot, but not so in disposition and manners, being a good Christian
+and well-bred gentleman.--Astley, I. 231, b.]
+
+The 20th January 1591, news was brought from Portugal to Tercera, that
+the English had taken a ship sent by the king to the Portuguese Indies,
+carrying advice to the viceroy of the return of the four ships to
+Portugal; which captured ship was stuffed full of goods, in consequence
+of their return, besides having 500,000 ducats in ryals of eight. It
+sailed from Lisbon in November 1590, and fought the English a long time,
+but had at length to yield, and was carried to England, where all the
+men were set free and returned to Lisbon, at which place the captain was
+thrown into prison, but afterwards justified himself and was released,
+as he told me personally. The English took, at the same time, a ship
+coming from the Mina, laden with gold, and two ships laden with pepper
+and other spices, bound for Italy, their pepper only being worth 170,000
+ducats. All these rich prizes were carried clear off into England.
+
+
+
+In July 1591, an earthquake commenced in the island of Tercera, which
+continued from the 26th of that month to the 12th of August, or 18 days,
+during all which time no person durst remain within a house, but all
+fled into the fields in terrible consternation, fasting and praying
+almost incessantly. Many houses fell down, and in particular a town
+called Villa Franca was almost utterly destroyed, all its houses and
+cloisters thrown down, and several people slain. In some places the
+ground rose up, the cliffs were removed from their places, and even some
+hills were thrown down and levelled with the adjoining plains. The
+earthquake was so violent, that the ships in the road and in the
+adjoining sea, were shaken as if the whole earth had been agitated to
+its centre. In one place a fountain sprung from the ground, whence clear
+water flowed in abundance for four days, and then ceased. All this time
+a noise was heard under ground as of thunder, or as if all the devils in
+hell had been assembled there, by which many died of fear. Four several
+times the island of Tercera shook with such violence as if it had turned
+upon its foundations, yet was it not overwhelmed. Earthquakes are common
+in these islands, as about 20 years before there happened just such an
+earthquake, when a hill, close to the town of Villa Franca, fell down
+and buried all the town with earth, by which many people were
+overwhelmed and slain.
+
+The 25th of August, the kings armada from Ferrol arrived in Tercera,
+consisting of 30 ships of war belonging to Biscay, Portugal, and Spain,
+together with 10 Dutch fliboats that were pressed at Lisbon into the
+service, besides other small vessels and _pataxos_ to serve as
+advice-boats, and to scour the seas for intelligence. This fleet came to
+wait for and convoy the ships from the Spanish Indies; and the fliboats
+were for the purpose of bringing home to Lisbon our goods that were
+saved in the lost ship from Malacca. This fleet arrived at the island of
+Corvo on the 13th of September[385], where the English then lay waiting
+for the fleet from the Spanish Indies, with a squadron of about 16
+ships. Some or most of the Spanish ships were already come to the
+Azores, and the English were in great hopes to have taken them: But, on
+perceiving the Spanish fleet of war to be so strong, the lord Thomas
+Howard, who was admiral of the English, gave orders to his fleet not to
+assail the Spaniards, and on no account to separate from him without
+special orders[386]. Yet the vice-admiral, Sir Richard Grenville, in his
+ship the Revenge, bore into the Spanish fleet, and shot among them doing
+much harm, thinking that the rest of the English ships would have
+followed him, which they did not, but left him there and sailed away,
+the reason of which could not be known. Perceiving this, the Spaniards
+boarded the Revenge with 7 or 8 ships, but she bravely withstood them
+all, fighting with them at the least 12 hours without ceasing, and sunk
+two of them, one a double fliboat of 600 tons, and admiral of the
+fliboats, the other a ship of Biscay. In the end, however, in
+consequence of the overwhelming number that came against her, the
+Revenge was taken, but to the heavy loss of the Spaniards, who lost in
+the fight, either slain or drowned, above 400 men, while 100 of the
+English were slain. Sir Richard was himself wounded in the brain, of
+which he afterwards died.
+
+[Footnote 385: It is probable, from this date, that the arrival of the
+fleet at Tercera on the 25th August, as above, is an error; and that it
+only then left Ferrol; on its voyage for Tercera.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 386: See the English account of these events in the
+immediately preceding section.--E.]
+
+Sir Richard, after the Revenge yielded, was carried on board the San
+Paulo, the ship in which was Don Alonso de Baçan, the admiral of the
+Spanish fleet, where his wounds were dressed by the Spanish surgeons,
+but Don Alonso would neither see nor speak to him. All the other
+captains went to visit and comfort him in his hard fortune, wondering at
+his courage and constancy, as he shewed no signs of faintness, not even
+changing colour: But, feeling his death approaching, he spoke in Spanish
+to the following purport: "Here die I Richard Grenville, with a joyous
+and quiet mind, having ended my life as a true soldier ought to do,
+fighting for my country, my queen, my religion, and my honour: so that
+my soul most joyfully departeth from this body, and shall always leave
+behind the everlasting fame of a true and valiant soldier, having done
+my duty as became me." When he had finished these, or such like words,
+he gave up the ghost with great and unshaken courage, no man being able
+to perceive the least sign of concern. This sir Richard Grenville was a
+great and rich gentleman of England, having large yearly revenues, but
+of a daring and intrepid disposition, and much affected to warlike
+enterprize; insomuch that he voluntarily offered his services to the
+queen. He had performed many valiant deeds, and was greatly feared among
+the islands, his intrepidity being well known to all. He was, however,
+of a severe and rigid character, so that his own people feared and hated
+him for his fierceness, and spoke very hardly of him. For, when they in
+the Revenge first fell in among the Spanish fleet, they had their
+mainsail in readiness, and might possibly have got away, as it was one
+of the best sailing ships of the English; and, as the master perceived
+that the rest of the squadron had left them, and did not follow up to
+their support, he gave orders to _cut the mainsail_, that they likewise
+should make off: But sir Richard threatened him and all the rest of the
+crew, that if any man laid hold of the mainsail with that intent, he
+would cause him to be hung up immediately; so that in fact they were
+compelled to fight, and in the end were taken. He was of so hardy a
+complexion, that, while among the Spanish officers, while at dinner or
+supper with them, he would swallow three or four bumpers of wine, and
+then by way of bravado, crush the glasses between his teeth and swallow
+them, so that the blood ran out of his mouth, yet without any apparent
+harm to him. This was told me by several credible persons, who had often
+stood by and beheld him.
+
+The Englishmen who remained alive in the Revenge, as the captain of the
+soldiers, the master, and others, were distributed among the different
+ships by which she was taken. On taking possession of her, a fight had
+almost taken place between the Biscaineers and Portuguese who boarded
+her, both claiming the honour of having boarded first, so that there
+grew a great noise and quarrel among them, one seizing the chief ensign,
+and the other the flag, the captains and every one holding their own.
+The ships which had laid her on board were altogether out of order, and
+sore shattered, having many of their men hurt, so that they had to come
+to Tercera to be repaired. On their arrival, I and my chamber companion,
+desirous to hear the news, went on board one of the twelve apostles, or
+great ships of Biscay, whose captain was _Bartandono_[387], who had been
+general of the Biscaineers in the great armada that went against
+England. On seeing us, he called us into his gallery, where he received
+us courteously, being then at dinner along with the English captain, who
+was dressed in a suit of black velvet, but could not tell us any thing,
+as he could speak no other language but English and Latin, which last
+Bartandono could speak a little. The English captain was permitted by
+the governor of Tercera to land with his sword by his side, and was in
+our lodging visiting the Englishman who belonged to the ship of which
+the sailors escaped, as I related before. This captain wrote a letter,
+in which he related all the particulars of the fight, and left it with
+that English merchant who resided in the lodging with us, to forward it
+to the lord admiral of England. The captain went afterwards to Lisbon,
+where he was honourably received, and sent, to Setubal, whence he sailed
+for England with the other prisoners. The master likewise of the Revenge
+came on shore, with licence from Bartandono, and lived in the same
+lodgings with us. He had at the least 10 or 12 wounds, in his head and
+body, of which he afterwards died on his voyage from the islands to
+Lisbon.
+
+[Footnote 387: Named Britandona in the foregoing section.--E.]
+
+The Spanish navy remained at the Azores till the end of September, to
+assemble all the fleet together, which in the end amounted to the number
+of 140 sail in all, including the ships of war and those of the Indies.
+When all ready to sail, there arose suddenly so violent a storm, that
+the islanders declared nothing like it had been seen in the memory of
+man. The sea raged with such fury as if it would have swallowed up the
+islands, the waves rising higher than the cliffs, so that it was amazing
+to behold them, and living fish were thrown upon the land. The storm
+lasted for seven or eight successive days, veering about to every point
+of the compass at least twice or three times during its continuance,
+with a continual tempestuous force most terrible to behold, even by us
+who were on shore, much more to those who were on the sea, and exposed
+to its fury. During this dreadful storm, above 12 ships were dashed to
+pieces on the coasts and rocks of the island of Tercera all round about,
+so that nothing was to be heard but weeping, lamenting, and wailing, now
+a ship being broken in pieces in one place, then another at a different
+place, and all the men drowned. For 20 days after the storm, nothing
+else was done but fishing for dead men that were continually driving on
+shore. Among the rest, the Revenge was cast away on a ledge of rocks
+near the isle of Tercera, where she split to pieces and sunk, having in
+her 70 men, Gallegos and Biscaineers and others, with some of the
+captive English, one only of whom got upon the rock alive, having his
+head and body all wounded. Being brought on shore, he told us the sad
+tidings, and desired to be shriven, after which he presently died. The
+Revenge had in her several fine brass pieces of artillery, which were
+all sunk in the sea; but the islanders had great hopes of weighing them
+up next summer.
+
+Among those ships that were cast away about Tercera, was one of those
+fliboats which had been arrested in Portugal for the kings service,
+named the White Dove, the master of which was one Cornelius Martenson of
+Schiedam in Holland, having in her 100 soldiers, as was the case in all
+the rest. Being overruled by the Spanish captain, so that he could not
+be master of his own ship, he was sailing about at the mercy of the
+winds and waves, and came at length in sight of Tercera, whereupon the
+Spaniards, thinking all their safety consisted in putting into the
+roads, compelled the master and pilot to make towards the island; and
+when they remonstrated, saying they would certainly be cast away and all
+destroyed, the Spanish captain called him a drunkard and heretic, and
+striking him with a staff, commanded him to do as he was ordered. Seeing
+this, the master said, "Well then, since it is your desire to be cast
+away, I can lose but one life." He then made sail for the land, which
+was on that side of the island where there is nothing but rocks and
+stones as high as mountains, most terrible to behold. Several of the
+inhabitants stood on the cliffs with long ropes, having bundles of cork
+fastened to one end, to throw down to the men, that they might lay hold
+of them and save their lives. Few of them, however, got near enough for
+this, as most of them were dashed to pieces before they could reach the
+rocks forming the wall-like shore. At this time, when approaching the
+rocks, the master, who was an old man, called his son who sailed with
+him, and having embraced and taken a last farewell, the good old father
+desired his son to take no note of him, but to seek and save himself.
+"Son, said he, thou art young, and mayst have some hope of saving thy
+life; but I am old and it is no great matter what becomes of me." Thus,
+shedding many tears, as may well be conceived in such a situation, the
+ship struck the rocks and went in pieces, the father and son falling
+into the sea on different sides of the vessel, each laying hold on what
+came first to hand, but to no purpose. The sea was so high and furious,
+that all were drowned, except fourteen or fifteen who saved themselves
+by swimming, with their legs and arms half broken and sore hurt. Among
+these was the Dutch masters son and four other Dutch boys; all the rest
+of the Spaniards and sailors, with captain and master, being drowned.
+What heart so hard as not to melt at so grievous a sight, especially
+considering the beastly and ignorant insolence of the Spaniards? From
+this instance, it may be conceived how the other ships sped, as we
+indeed partly beheld, and were informed by those few who were saved,
+some of whom were our countrymen.
+
+On the other islands the loss was no less than at Tercera, two ships
+were cast away on the island of St George; two on Pico; three on
+Graciosa. Besides those, there were seen everywhere round about, many
+pieces of broken ships and other things, floating towards the islands,
+with which the sea was everywhere covered, most pitiful to behold. Four
+ships were cast away on the island of St Michael, and three more were
+sunk between Tercera and St Michael, from which not one man was saved,
+though they were seen and heard to cry out for aid. All the rest were
+dismasted and driven out to sea, all torn and rent; so that of the whole
+armada and merchant ships, 140 in all, only 32 or 33 arrived in Spain
+and Portugal, and these with great pain, misery and labour, not any two
+together, but this day one, to-morrow another, and next day a third. All
+the rest were cast away about the Azores islands, or foundered at sea,
+whereby may be judged what loss was incurred; as the loss was esteemed
+greater by many, than had been sustained in the great armada that went
+against England. It may very well be considered that this terrible
+disaster was a just judgment of God against the Spaniards; and it may
+truly be said that the taking of the Revenge was justly revenged against
+them, not by the force of men, but by the power of God. Some of the
+people in Tercera said openly, that they verily believed God would
+consume them, and that he had taken part with the Lutherans and
+heretics. They alleged farther, that so soon as they had thrown the body
+of Sir Richard Grenville overboard, they verily believed, as he had a
+devilish faith and religion, therefore all the devils loved him: For he
+instantly sunk to the bottom of the sea, and down into hell, where he
+raised up all the devils to revenge his death; and that they brought
+these great storms and tempests upon the Spaniards, because they only
+maintained the Catholic and true Romish religion. Such and the like
+blasphemies did they utter openly and continually, without being
+reproved of any one for their false opinions.
+
+Of their fleet which sailed from New Spain, 50 in all, 35 were cast away
+or foundered at sea, so that 15 only escaped. Of the San Domingo fleet,
+14 were cast away coming through the channel from Havannah, the admiral
+and vice-admiral being of the number. Two ships, coming from the Terra
+Firma, laden with gold and silver, were taken by the English; and before
+the fleet under Don Alonso de Baçan came to Corvo, at the least 20
+ships, coming from San Domingo, India, Brazil, &c. had been taken at
+different times by the English, all of which were sent to England.
+
+Section XIV.
+
+_Cruizing voyage to the Azores, in 1592, by Sir John Burrough,
+Knight_[388]
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+THE title of this section as here given from Astleys Collection, is by
+no means accurate, as the service performed by Burrough forms only one
+prominent portion of the present narrative. The expedition which it
+relates was fitted out and commanded by the memorable Sir Walter
+Raleigh, and the entire title of this relation, as given by Hakluyt, is
+as follows: "A true report of the honourable service at sea, performed
+by Sir John Burrough, knight, lieutenant-general of the fleet prepared
+by the honourable Sir Walter Raleigh, knight, lord warden of the
+stanneries of Cornwal and Devon. Wherein chiefly the Santa Clara of
+Biscay, a ship of 600 tons, was taken, and two East India Caraks, the
+Santa Cruz and the Madre de Dios were forced; the one burnt, and the
+other taken and brought into Dartmouth, the 7th September 1592."
+
+[Footnote 388: Hakluyt, III. 9. Astley, I. 245.]
+
+Even this long title does not clearly describe the narrative, as Sir
+Walter Raleigh actually sailed on the expedition. But it is not
+necessary to extend this observation, as the story will sufficiently
+explain itself. The editor of Astleys collection, alleges that Sir
+Walter Raleigh seems to have been the author of this article.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Having received a commission from the queen for an expedition to the
+West Indies, Sir Walter Raleigh used the utmost diligence in making all
+necessary preparations, both in the choice of good ships and sufficient
+men and officers, as the performance sufficiently evinced. His ships
+were 14 or 15 in number; of which the two principal belonged to the
+queen, called the Garland and Foresight The rest either belonged to
+himself or his friends, or to the adventurers of London. As for the
+gentlemen who went with him as officers, they were so well qualified in
+courage, experience and discretion, that the greatest prince might think
+himself happy in being served by the like. The honour of
+lieutenant-general [vice-admiral] was conferred upon Sir John Burrough,
+a gentleman every way worthy of that command, by his many good and
+heroic qualities; with whom, after Sir Walter returned, was joined in
+commission Sir Martin Frobisher; who, for his great skill and knowledge
+in maritime affairs, had formerly held employments of similar or greater
+importance. The rest of the captains, sailors and soldiers were men of
+notable resolution, and who for the most part had before given
+sufficient proof of their valour, in sundry services of the like nature.
+
+With these ships thus manned, Sir Walter Raleigh departed towards the
+west country, there to provide such farther necessaries as were needful
+for the expedition. The wind blew long from the west, quite contrary to
+his intended course, by which he was wind-bound many weeks, the fittest
+season for his purpose being thereby lost, his victuals much consumed,
+and the minds of his people greatly changed. When her majesty came to
+understand how crossly all this went, she began to call the propriety of
+this expedition in question, as the 6th of May was come before Sir
+Walter could put to sea. Sir Martin Frobisher came to him the next day,
+in a pinnace of the lord admiral called the Disdain, and brought her
+majestys letters of recal, with orders to leave the fleet under the
+command of Sir John Burrough and Sir Martin Frobisher. But, finding his
+honour so far engaged, that he saw no means to save his reputation or
+content his friends who had adventured great sums on fitting out the
+expedition, Sir Walter pretended to understand the queens letters as if
+they had left it to his choice either to return or proceed; wherefore he
+would in no case leave his fleet, now under sail.
+
+Continuing therefore his course to sea, he met within a day or two some
+ships newly come from Spain, among which was a ship belonging to
+Monsieur Gourdon, governor of Calais, on board of which was one Mr Nevil
+Davies an Englishman, who had endured a long and miserable captivity of
+twelve years, partly in the inquisition, and had now by good fortune
+made his escape, and was on his way home. Among other things, this man
+reported that there was little good to be done or expected this year in
+the West Indies, as the king of Spain had sent express orders to all the
+ports both of the islands and the main, that no ships were to sail that
+year, nor any treasure to be shipt for Spain. Yet did not this
+unpleasant intelligence induce Sir Walter to desist from his
+proceedings; till, on Thursday the 11th of May, a tempest of great
+violence, when he was athwart Cape Finister, so scattered the greater
+part of his fleet, and sunk his boats and pinnaces, that Sir Walter, who
+was in the Garland belonging to her majesty, was in danger of
+foundering.
+
+Upon this, considering that the season of the year was too far gone for
+the enterprize he meditated against Panama, having been detained by
+contrary winds on the coast of England from February till May, in which
+time he had expended three months victuals, and considering that to
+cruize upon the Spanish coast or at the islands for the homeward bound
+East or West India ships, was a mere work of patience, he gave
+directions to Sir John Burrough and Sir Martin Frobisher, to divide the
+fleet in two parts. Sir Martin, with the Garland, Captain George
+Clifford, Captain Henry Thin, Captain Grenville and others, to lie off
+the south cape, on purpose to oblige the Spanish fleet to remain on
+their own coast; while Sir John Burrough, with Captain Robert Crosse,
+Captain Thomson and others, should go to cruize off the Azores for the
+caraks or any other Spanish ships coming from Mexico or other parts of
+the West Indies. These intentions took effect accordingly: For the
+Spanish admiral, having intelligence of the English fleet being on the
+coast, attended to the defence of the southern parts of Spain, keeping
+as near Sir Martin Frobisher as he could, to hinder the success of any
+thing he might undertake, and thereby neglected the safe conduct of the
+caraks.
+
+Before the fleet separated, they met with a great ship of Biscay on the
+coast of Spain, called the Santa Clara of 600 tons, which was taken
+after a stout resistance. She was freighted with all sorts of small iron
+ware, as horse shoes, nails, ploughshares, iron bars, spikes, bolts,
+locks, gimbols, &c. and valued by us at 6000 or 7000 pounds, though
+worth treble that value to them. This ship was on her way to San Lucar,
+to take in there some farther articles of freight for the West Indies;
+and being first rummaged, was sent off for England. Our fleet then
+sailed towards the south cape of St Vincent; and while near the rock of
+Lisbon, Sir John Burrough in the Roebuck espied a sail far off to which
+he gave chace. Being a fliboat and a quick sailer, she drew him far to
+the south before he could fetch her, but at last, she came under his lee
+and struck sail. The master gave information, that a great fleet was
+prepared at Cadiz and San Lucar, destined according to report for the
+West Indies; but the real object of this armament was this: Having
+received notice that Sir Walter Raleigh was fitted out with a strong
+force for the West Indies, the king of Spain had provided this great
+fleet to oppose him; but, in the first place, as the East India caraks
+were expected, this fleet was to convoy them home. But, as he persuaded
+himself, if Sir Walter went to the West Indies, the Azores would only
+have a few small ships of war to infest them, his orders to Don Alonzo
+de Baçan, brother to the Marquis of Santa Cruz, and general of his
+armada, were to pursue the fleet of Sir Walter Raleigh whatever course
+he went, and to attack him wherever he could find him.
+
+Our men soon found this to be true, for, not long after the capture of
+the fliboat, as Sir John Burrough sailed back again to rejoin his fleet,
+he discovered the Spanish fleet to seaward; which, espying him between
+them and the shore, made themselves sure of carrying him into a Spanish
+harbour. For this purpose, they spread themselves in such sort before
+him, that his danger was very great, as his course to seawards was
+utterly impeded, and the land being hostile could yield him no relief.
+In this extremity, putting his trust in God and his good ship, he thrust
+out from among them with all sail, and in spite of their force and
+notable cunning to intercept him, got clear off. Having thus got clear,
+and finding the coast so well guarded by this fleet, and knowing it were
+only folly to expect meeting with Sir Martin Frobisher, who knew of the
+armada as well as himself, and would be sure to avoid them, he began to
+shape his course directly for the Azores, according to the orders of Sir
+Walter Raleigh, and soon came in sight of St Michael, running so near
+the town of Villa Franca, that he could easily discern the ships that
+lay there at anchor. He intercepted several small vessels, both here and
+between St Georges and Pico in his course to Flores, but could get no
+intelligence from them for his purpose.
+
+Arriving before Flores on Thursday the 21st June towards evening, then
+only accompanied by captain Caufield and the master of his ship, the
+rest not being yet arrived, be made towards the shore in his boat, where
+he found all the inhabitants of Santa Cruz, a village or small town of
+that island, under arms, and drawn up to oppose his landing. Having no
+intention of committing hostilities, Sir John shewed a white flag in
+token of amity, which was answered by the islanders, upon which a
+friendly conference ensued, and hostages were taken on both sides, the
+captain of the town for them, and captain Caufield for us; so that
+whatever our people wanted and that place could supply, as fresh water,
+victuals, or the like, was freely granted by the inhabitants, and our
+people had leave to refresh themselves on shore without restraint, as
+long and as often as they pleased. At this place Sir John Burrough was
+informed, that they had no expectation of any fleet coming from the West
+Indies; but that only three days before his arrival, a carak had passed
+by from the East Indies for Lisbon, and that there were four more behind
+all of one convoy. Being very glad of this news, Sir John embarked
+immediately, having at this time in his company only a small bark of
+Bristol, belonging to one Mr Hopkins.
+
+In the meanwhile, part of the English ships that Sir John had left on
+the coast of Spain drew towards the Azores; and Sir John very soon got
+sight of one of the caraks. The same evening he descried two or three of
+the earl of Cumberlands ships, whereof one Mr Norton was captain, which
+had descried the carak and pursued in the track she was following for
+the islands, but no way could be made by either party, as it was almost
+a dead calm. In this dilemma, on purpose to discover her force, burden,
+and countenance, Sir John took his boat and rowed three miles towards
+her, to make her out exactly; and on his return, having consulted with
+his officers, it was resolved to board her in the morning. A heavy storm
+arose in the night, which forced them to weigh anchor, yet did they bear
+up amain against the weather, not to lose the carak. In the morning,
+being very near the shore, our men could perceive the carak close to the
+land, and the Portuguese using their utmost endeavour to convey whatever
+they could from her on shore. Seeing our men making all haste to come
+upon her, the Portuguese forsook her, but first, that nothing might be
+left for our men, they set her on fire, that neither the glory of
+victory nor the benefit of the ship and cargo might remain to the
+English. And, lest the English might find means to extinguish the fire,
+and thereby to preserve a part of the cargo, being in number 400 well
+armed men, they entrenched themselves on shore as near as possible to
+the carak, to keep our men aloof till the fire might consume the carak
+and all her contents.
+
+Seeing this, Sir John landed with an hundred of his men, many of whom
+had to swim on shore or wade more than breast high; and having easily
+dispersed those who guarded the shore, he no sooner approached the
+entrenchment but the Portuguese fled, leaving as much as the fire had
+spared to reward the pains of our men. Among others taken at the
+entrenchment, were a Portuguese called Vincent Fonseca, purser of the
+carak, with two of her cannoneers, one a German, and the other a
+Hollander; who, refusing to give any account voluntarily of what was
+asked, were threatened with torture, and then confessed that within
+fifteen days three other caraks would certainly arrive at the same
+island, there being five caraks in the fleet at their departure from
+Goa, the Buen Jesus admiral, Madre de Dios, San Bernardo, San
+Christophoro, and Santa Cruz, that now on fire. They had especial orders
+from the king of Spain, not in any case to touch at St. Helena, where
+the Portuguese caraks used always till now to refresh on their way from
+the East Indies, procuring water and fresh, provisions. The reason of
+this order was, that the king was informed the English men of war meant
+to lie there in wait for them. If therefore, their necessities should
+drive them to seek supply any where, they were commanded to put in at
+Angola on the coast of Africa, and only to remain there so long as was
+necessary to take in water, that they might avoid the inconvenience of
+infections, to which that hot country is dangerously liable. The last
+rendezvous appointed for them was the island of Flores, where they were
+assured of a naval force meeting them and convoying them to Lisbon.
+
+On receiving this intelligence, Sir John held a council with Captains
+Norton, Downton, and Abraham Cocke, commanding three ships of the Earl
+of Cumberland, Mr Thomson of Harwich, captain of the Dainty, belonging
+to Sir John Hawkins, one of Sir Walter Raleighs fleet, Captain
+Christopher Newton of the Golden Dragon, newly come from the West
+Indies, and others. To these he communicated the intelligence he had
+just got from the foresaid examination, and what great presumptions of
+truth appeared in their story; and wishing, since God and their good
+fortune had so opportunely brought them together, that they might unite
+their utmost endeavours to bring these Orientals under the lee of
+English obedience. Upon this it was mutually agreed not to part company
+or leave these seas, till time and opportunity should enable them to put
+their consultations into execution. Next day her majestys ship
+Foresight, Sir Robert Cross, joined them, and he, being informed of the
+matter, entered heartily on this service. Then Sir John, with all these
+ships, went 6 or 7 leagues to the west of Flores, spreading them out in
+a line from north to south, each ship at least two leagues distant from
+each other, by which order they were able to discover two whole degrees
+of the sea.
+
+They lay in this manner from the 29th of June to the 3d of August, when
+Captain Thomson in the Dainty had first sight of the huge carak called
+the Madre de Dios, one of the greatest belonging to the crown of
+Portugal. Having the start of the rest, and being an excellent sailor,
+the Dainty began the combat something to her cost, by the slaughter and
+hurt of several of her men. Within a little Sir John Burrough came up to
+second her in the Roebuck, belonging to Sir Walter Raleigh, and saluted
+the Madre de Dios with great shot, continuing the fight within
+musket-shot, assisted by Captains Thomson and Newport, till Sir Robert
+Cross came up, who was vice-admiral and was to leeward, on which Sir
+John asked his opinion what was best to be done. Sir Robert said, if she
+were not boarded she would reach the shore and be set on fire, as had
+been done with the other. Wherefore Sir John Burrough concluded to
+grapple her, and Sir Robert Cross engaged to do so likewise at the same
+moment, which was done accordingly. After some time in this situation,
+Sir John Burroughs ship received a shot of a _cannon perier_[389] under
+water; and, being ready to sink, desired Sir Robert to fall off, that he
+also might clear himself and save his ship from sinking. This was done
+with much difficulty, as both the Roebuck and Foresight were so
+entangled that they could not clear themselves.
+
+[Footnote 389: Probably a large stone ball.--E.]
+
+That same evening, finding the carak drawing near the land, Sir Robert
+Crosse persuaded his consorts to board her again, as otherwise there
+were no hopes of taking her. After many fears and excuses, he at last
+encouraged them, and then went athwart her bows all alone, and so
+hindered her sailing, that the rest had time to get up to the attack
+before she could make the land. So, towards evening, after Sir Robert
+had fought her three hours singly, two of the Earl of Cumberlands ships
+came up, and then they and Sir Robert Crosse carried her by boarding
+with very little loss, as Sir Robert by this time had broken their
+courage, and made the assault easy for the rest. Having disarmed the
+Portuguese, and bestowed them for better security as prisoners into the
+other ships, Sir Robert had now time to contemplate the proportions of
+this vast carak, which did then, and may still provoke the admiration of
+all men not accustomed to such a sight. But though this first view
+afforded our men sufficient admiration, yet the pitiful sight of so
+many bodies slain and mangled drew tears from their eyes, and induced
+them to lend aid to those miserable people, whose limbs were sore torn
+by the shot, and their bodies agonized by a multitude of wounds. No man
+could almost step but upon a dead carcass or a bloody floor, but
+especially about the helm, where many of them had been slain while
+endeavouring to steer, as it required the united strength of twelve or
+fourteen men at once to move the rudder, and some of our ships beating
+in at her stern with their ordnance, often slew four or five labouring
+on each side of the helm at one shot, whose places were immediately
+supplied by fresh hands, and as our artillery incessantly plied them
+with continual vollies, much blood was necessarily spilt in that place.
+
+Moved with compassion for their misery, our general immediately sent
+them his own surgeons, withholding no possible aid or relief that he or
+his company could supply. Among those whom this chance of war had
+rendered most deplorable, was Don Fernando de Mendoça, grand captain and
+commander of this mighty carak, descended of the house of Mendoça in
+Spain, but having married in Portugal, lived there as one of that
+nation. He was a gentleman well striken in years, of comely personage
+and good stature, but of hard fortune. In the course of his services
+against the Moors he had been twice taken prisoner, and both times
+ransomed by the king. In a former return voyage from the East Indies, he
+was driven upon the _Baxos_ or sands of _India_, near the coast of
+Sofala, being then captain of a carak which was lost, and himself fell
+into the hands of the infidels on shore, who kept him in a long and
+rigorous captivity. Once more, having great respect for him, and willing
+to mend his fortune, the king had given him the conduct of this huge
+carak, in which he went from Lisbon as admiral of the India fleet, and
+had returned in that capacity, but that the viceroy embarked in the Bon
+Jesus, and assumed that rank in virtue of his late office. Not willing
+to add too severely to the affliction of this man, Sir John Burrough
+freely dismissed Don Fernando and most of his followers, giving them
+some vessels for that purpose, with all necessary provisions.
+
+Having dispatched this business, Sir John Burrough had leisure to take
+such a survey of the goods in his prize, as the convenience of the seas
+would admit; and seeing many inclined to commit spoil and pillage, he
+very prudently seized upon the whole in the name of her majesty. He then
+made a cursory inspection of the cargo, and perceived that the wealth
+would be fully answerable to expectation, and would be more than
+sufficient to content both the desires of the adventurers, and the
+fatigues and dangers of the captors. I cannot here refrain from
+acknowledging the great favour of God to our nation, by putting this
+rich prize into our hands, thereby manifestly discovering the secrets
+and riches of the trade of India, which had hitherto lain strangely
+bidden and cunningly concealed from our knowledge, only a very imperfect
+glimpse of it being seen by a few, while it is now turned into the broad
+light of full and perfect knowledge. Whence it would appear to be the
+will of God for our good, if only our weakness would so apprehend it,
+that we should participate in those East Indian treasures, by the
+establishment of a lawful traffic, to better our means of advancing the
+true religion and the holy service of God.
+
+This carak, in the judgment of those most experienced, was of not less
+than 1600 tons burden, 900 of which were stowed full of rich
+merchandize; the remainder being allowed partly for the ordnance, which
+were 32 pieces of brass cannon of all sorts, and partly to the ships
+company, passengers, and victuals, which last could not be a small
+quantity, considering the length of the voyage, and that there were
+between six and seven hundred persons on board. To give a taste as it
+were of the commodities, it may suffice to give a general enumeration of
+them, according to the catalogue made out at Leadenhall, London, on the
+15th September 1592. After the jewels, which were certainly of great
+value, though they never came to light, the principal wares consisted of
+spices, drugs, silks, calicoes, quilts, carpets, and colours, &c. The
+spices were pepper, cloves, mace, nutmegs, cinnamon, green ginger. The
+drugs, benzoin, frankincense, gallinga, mirabolans, socotorine aloes,
+camphor. The silks, damasks, taffetas, sarcenets, _altobassos_ or
+counterfeit cloth of gold, unwrought China silk, sleaved silk, white
+twisted silk, and curled cypress. The calicoes were book-calicoe,
+calicoe-lawns, broad white calicoes, fine starched calicoes, coarse
+white calicoes, brown broad calicoes, brown coarse calicoes. There were
+also canopies, and coarse diaper towels, quilts of coarse sarsenet, and
+of calico, and carpets like those of Turkey. Likewise pearls, musk,
+civet, and ambergris. The rest of the wares were many in number, but
+less in value; as elephants teeth, porcelain vessels of China, coco
+nuts, hides, ebony as black as jet, bedsteads of the same, curious cloth
+made of the rind of trees, &c. All which piles of merchandize, being
+valued at a reasonable rate by men of approved judgment, amounted to no
+less than 150,000 pounds Sterling, which being divided among the
+adventurers, of whom her majesty was the chief, was sufficient to
+content all parties.
+
+The cargo being taken out, and the goods reloaded on board ten of our
+ships to be sent to London, one Mr Robert Adams, a man of excellent
+skill, took the exact bigness, height, length, breadth, and other
+dimensions of this huge vessel, that these might be preserved according
+to the exact rules of geometrical proportions, both for present
+knowledge and transmission to posterity, omitting nothing which either
+his art could demonstrate, or any mans judgment think worthy of being
+known. After an exact survey of the whole frame, he found the extreme
+length, from the beak head to the stern, where a lantern was erected,
+165 feet. The breadth, in the second close deck, of which she had three,
+but this the broadest, was 46 feet 10 inches. At her departure from
+Cochin in India, her draught of water was 31 feet; but at her arrival in
+Dartmouth, not above 26, being lightened 5 feet during her voyage by
+various causes. She contained 7 several stories; viz. one main orlop,
+three close decks, one forecastle, and a spar deck of two floors each.
+The length of the keel was 100 feet, of the main-mast 121 feet, and its
+circumference at the partners was 10 feet 7 inches. The main-yard was
+106 feet long. By this accurate mensuration, the hugeness of the whole
+is apparent, and far beyond the mould of the largest ships used among
+us, either for war or cargo.
+
+Don Alonso de Baçan, having a greater fleet, and yet suffering these two
+great caraks to be lost, the Santa Cruz burnt, and the Madre de Dios
+taken, was disgraced by the king of Spain for his negligence.
+
+
+SECTION XV.
+
+_The taking of two Spanish Ships, laden with quicksilver and the Popes
+bulls, in 1592, by Captain Thomas White_.[390]
+
+
+
+While returning from Barbary in the Amity of London, and in the latitude
+of 36° N. at 4 in the morning of the 26th of July 1592, Captain White
+got sight of two ships at the distance of three or four leagues. Giving
+immediate chace, he came within gun-shot of them by 7 o'clock; and by
+their boldness in shewing Spanish colours, he judged them rather to be
+ships of war than laden with merchandize; indeed, by their own
+confession afterwards, they made themselves so sure of taking him, that
+they debated among themselves whether it were better for them to carry
+his ship to San Lucar or Lisbon. After waving each other amain, the
+Spaniards placed themselves in order of battle, a cables length before
+the other, when the fight began, both sides charging and firing as fast
+as they were able, at the distance of a cables length, for the space of
+five hours. In this time, the Amity received 32 great shots in her hull,
+masts, and sails, besides at least 500 iron muskets and arquebuses,
+which were counted after the fight.
+
+[Footnote 390: Astley, I. 249. The editor of Astleys collection gives no
+notice of the source whence he procured this narrative. The Spanish
+ships with quicksilver are usually called _azogue_ or _assogue_ ships;
+the word assogue signifying quicksilver.--E.]
+
+Finding them to make so stout a resistance, Captain White attempted to
+board the Biscaian, which was foremost; and after lying on board about
+an hour, plying his ordnance and small shot, he _stowed all her
+men_[391]. At this time, the other vessel, which was a fliboat, thinking
+Captain White had boarded her consort with all his men, _bore room with
+him_[392], intending to have laid him close on board, so as to entrap
+him between both ships, and place him between two fires. Perceiving this
+intention, he fitted his ordnance in such sort as to get quit of her, so
+that she boarded her consort, and both fell from him. Mr White now kept
+his loof, hoisted his main-sails, and weathering both ships, came close
+aboard the fliboat, to which he gave his whole broadside, by which
+several of her men were slain, as appeared by the blood running from her
+scuppers. After this he tacked about, new charged all his ordnance, and
+coming round again upon both ships, ordered them to yield or he would
+sink them outright. One of them being shot between wind and water, would
+have complied, but the other called him a traitor; on which Captain
+White called out, that if he also did not presently yield, he would sink
+him first. Intimidated by this threat, they both hung out white flags
+and yielded; yet refused to strike their own sails, as they had sworn
+not to strike to any Englishman.
+
+[Footnote 391: This expression seems to mean, that he forced them to run
+below.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 392: That is, bore down upon him.--E.]
+
+He then commanded the captains and masters to come on board the Amity,
+where they were examined and placed in safe custody; after which he sent
+some of his own men on board both ships to strike the sails and man
+them. There were found in both, 126 persons alive, with eight dead
+bodies, besides those that had been cast overboard. This victory was
+obtained by 42 men and a boy, of whom two were slain and three wounded.
+The two prizes were laden with 1400 chests of quicksilver, marked with
+the arms of Castile and Leon, besides a vast quantity of bulls or
+indulgences, and ten packs of gilded missals and breviaries, all on the
+kings account. Also an hundred tons of excellent wine, intended for the
+supply of the royal fleet; all of which Captain White brought shortly
+afterwards to Blackwall in the river Thames.
+
+By this capture of quicksilver, the king of Spain lost for every quintal
+a quintal of silver, that should have been delivered to him by the
+mine-masters in Peru, amounting in value to L.600,000. There were
+likewise 2,072,000 bulls for living and dead persons, intended for the
+use of New Spain, Yucatan, Guatimala, Honduras, and the Philippine
+islands, taxed at two ryals each; besides 18,000 bulls at four ryals;
+amounting in all to L.107,700: So that the total loss to the king of
+Spain was L.707,700, not reckoning the loss and disappointment by the
+mass-books and wine.
+
+
+SECTION XVI.
+
+_Narrative of the Destruction of a great East India Carak, in 1594,
+written by Captain Nicholas. Downton_[393].
+
+
+
+In the latter end of the year 1593, the right honourable the earl of
+Cumberland, at his own charges and those of his friends, fitted out
+three ships of equal size and rates, having each the same quantity of
+provisions and the same number of men. These were, the Royal Exchange,
+which went as admiral, commanded by Captain George Cave; the May-flower,
+vice-admiral, commanded by Captain William Anthony; and the Sampson,
+which my lord was pleased to commit to me, Nicholas Downton. In all the
+three ships there were embarked 420 men of all sorts, or 140 in each.
+Besides these, there, was a pinnace: called the Violet, or _Why-not-I._
+
+[Footnote 393: Hakluyt, III. 14. Astley, I 250.]
+
+Our instructions were sent to us at Plymouth, and we were directed to
+open them at sea. The 6th of April 1594, we set sail from Plymouth
+sound, directing our course for the coast of Spain. The 24th, being then
+in lat. 43° N; we divided ourselves east and west from each other, on
+purpose to keep a good look out, with orders from our admiral to close
+up again at night. In the morning of the 27th, we descried the
+May-flower and the little pinnace, in company with a prize they had
+taken belonging to Viana in Portugal, and bound for Angola. This vessel
+was about 28 tons burden, having 17 persons on board, with some 12 tons
+of wine, which we divided among our ships, together with some rusk in
+chests and barrels, 5 bales of coarse blue cloth, and some coarse linen
+for negroes shirts; all of which goods were divided among our fleet. The
+4th of May, we had sight again of our pinnace and the admirals shallop,
+which had taken three Portuguese caravels, two of which we sent away and
+kept the third. The 2d June we came in sight of St Michaels. The 3d we
+sent off our pinnace, which was about 24 tons burden, together with the
+small caravel we had taken off the Burlings, to range about the
+anchorages of the Azores, trying to make captures of any thing they
+could find, appointing them to meet with us at a rendezvous 12 leagues
+W.S.W. from Fayal. Their going from us served no purpose, and was a
+misfortune, as they omitted joining us when appointed, and we also
+missed them when they might have been of much service.
+
+The 13th of June we fell in with a mighty carak from the East Indies,
+called _Las cinquellagues_, or the five wounds. The May-Flower was in
+sight of her before night, and I got up with her in the evening. While I
+had ordered our men to give her a broadside, and stood carefully
+examining her strength, and where I might give council to board her in
+the night when the admiral came up, I received a shot a little above the
+belly, by which I was rendered unserviceable for a good while after, yet
+no other person in my ship was touched that night. Fortunately, by means
+of one captain Grant, an honest true-hearted man, nothing was neglected
+though I was thus disabled. Until midnight, when the admiral came up,
+the May-Flower and the Sampson never desisted from plying her with our
+cannon, taking it in turns: But then captain Cave wished us to stay till
+morning, when each of us was to give her three broadsides, and then lay
+her on board; but we long lingered in the morning till 10 o'clock,
+before we attempted to board her.
+
+The admiral then laid her on board amid ships, and the May-Flower came
+up on her quarter, as if to take her station astern of our admiral on
+the larboard side of the carak; but the captain of the May-Flower was
+slain at the first coming up, on which his ship fell astern on the
+_outlicar_[394] of the carak, a piece of timber, which so tore her
+foresail that they said they could not get up any more to fight, as
+indeed they did not, but kept aloof from us all the rest of the action.
+The Sampson went aboard on the bow of the carak, but had not room
+enough, as our quarter lay on the bow of the Exchange, and our bow on
+that of the carak. At the first coming up of the Exchange, her captain
+Mr Cave was wounded in both legs, one of which he never recovered, so
+that he was disabled from doing his duty, and had no one in his absence
+that would undertake to lead his company to board the enemy. My friend,
+captain Grant, led my men up the side of the carak; but his force being
+small, and not being manfully seconded by the crew of the Exchange, the
+enemy were bolder than they would have been, so that six of my men were
+presently slain, and many more wounded; which made those that remained
+return on board, and they would never more give the assault. Some of the
+Exchanges men did very well, and I have no doubt that many more would
+have done the like, if there had been any principal men to have led them
+on, and not to have run into corners themselves. But I must allow that
+the carak was as well provided for defence as any ship I have seen; and
+perhaps the Portuguese were encouraged by our slackness, as they plied
+our men from behind barricades, where they were out of danger from our
+shot. They plied us also with wildfire, by which most of our men were
+burnt in some parts of their body; and while our men were busied in
+putting out the fire, the enemy galled them sore with small arms and
+darts. This unusual casting of wildfire did much dismay many of our men,
+and caused them greatly to hang back.
+
+[Footnote 394: Probably a boom or outrigger for the management of the
+after-sails.--E.]
+
+Finding that our men would not again board, we plied our great ordnance
+at them, elevated as much as possible, as otherwise we could do them
+little harm. By shooting a piece from our forecastle, we set fire to a
+mat at the beak head of the enemy, which kindled more and more,
+communicating from the mat to the boltsprit, and thence to the
+top-sail-yard; by which fire the Portuguese abaft were much alarmed, and
+began to make show of a parley: But their officers encouraged them,
+alleging that the fire could be easily extinguished, on which they again
+stood stiffly to their defence; yet at length the fire grew so strong,
+that I plainly saw it was beyond all help, even if she had yielded to
+us. We then wished to have disentangled ourselves from the burning
+carak, but had little hope of success; yet we plied water with great
+diligence to keep our ship safe. At this time I had little hope but our
+ship, myself, and several of our wounded men must have been all
+destroyed along with the carak. Most of our people indeed might have
+saved themselves in boats on board our consorts. When we were at the
+worst, by Gods providence our spritsail-yard with the sail and ropes,
+which were fast entangled with the spritsail-yard of the carak, were so
+burned that we fell away, with the loss of some of our sails. The
+Exchange also, being farther aft and more distant from the fire, was
+more easily cleared, and fell off abaft.
+
+As soon as God had put us out of danger, the fire caught hold of the
+forecastle of the carak, where I think there was great store of benzoin,
+or some such combustible matter, for it flamed and flowed over the
+carak, which was almost in an instant all over in flames. The Portuguese
+now leapt over-board in great numbers, and I sent captain Grant with
+the boat, bidding him use his discretion in saving them. He brought me
+on board two gentlemen. One of them was an old man named Nuno Velio
+Pereira, who had been governor of Mozambique and Sofala in the year
+1582, and had since been governor of a place of importance in the East
+Indies. The ship in which he was coming home was cast away a little to
+the east of the Cape of Good Hope, whence he travelled by land to
+Mozambique, and got a passage in this carak. The other was named Bras
+Carrero, who was captain of a carak that was cast away at Mozambique,
+and came likewise as a passenger in this ship. Also three men of the
+inferior sort; but only these two gentlemen we clothed and brought home
+to England. The rest, and others which were saved by our other boats,
+were all set on shore on the island of Flores, except two or three
+negroes, one of whom was a native of Mozambique, and the other of the
+East Indies.
+
+This fight took place in the open sea, 6 leagues to the southward of the
+sound or channel between Fayal and Pico. The people whom we saved
+informed us, that the cause of the carak refusing to yield was, that she
+and all her goods belonged to the king, being all that had been
+collected for him that year in India, and that the captain of her was
+greatly in favour with the king, and expected to have been made viceroy
+of India at his return. This great carak was by no means lumbered,
+either within board or on deck, being more like a ship of war than a
+merchant vessel; and, besides her own men and guns, she had the crew and
+ordnance that belonged to another carak that was cast away at
+Mozambique, and the crew of another that was lost a little way to the
+east of the Cape of Good Hope. Yet, through sickness caught at Angola,
+where they watered, it was said she had not now above 150 white men on
+board, but a great many negroes. They likewise told us there were three
+noblemen and three ladies on board; but we found them to disagree much
+in their stories. The carak continued to burn all the rest of that day
+and the succeeding night; but next morning, on the fire reaching her
+powder, being 60 barrels, which was in the lowest part of her hold, she
+blew up with a dreadful explosion, most of her materials floating about
+on the sea. Some of the people said she was larger than the Madre de
+Dios, and some that she was less. She was much undermasted and
+undersailed, yet she went well through the water, considering that she
+was very foul. The shot we made at her from the cannon of our ship,
+before we laid her on board, might be seven broadsides of six or seven
+shots each, one with another, or about 49 shots in all. We lay on board
+her about two hours, during which we discharged at her about 20 sacre
+shots. Thus much may suffice for our dangerous conflict with that
+unfortunate carak.
+
+On the 30th of June, after traversing the seas, we got sight of another
+huge carak, which some of our company took at first for the great San
+Philippo, the admiral of Spain; but on coming up with her next day, we
+certainly perceived her to be a carak. After bestowing some shots upon
+her, we summoned her to yield, but they stood stoutly on their defence,
+and utterly refused to strike. Wherefore, as no good could be done
+without boarding, I consulted as to what course we should follow for
+that purpose; but as we, who were the chief captains, were partly slain
+and the rest wounded in the former conflict, and because of the
+murmuring of some disorderly and cowardly fellows, all our resolute
+determinations were crossed: To conclude in a few words, the carak
+escaped our hands. After this, we continued to cruize for some time
+about Corvo and Flores, in hopes of falling in with some ships from the
+West Indies; but, being disappointed in this expectation, and provisions
+falling short, we returned for England, where I arrived at Portsmouth on
+the 28th of August 1594.
+
+
+SECTION XVII.
+
+_List of the Royal Navy of England of the demise of Queen
+Elizabeth_[395].
+
+
+The following list of the royal navy of England, as left in good
+condition by Queen Elizabeth at her death in 1603, was written by Sir
+William Monson, a naval officer of that and the two following reigns,
+"By which, he observes, she and her realm gained honour, by the exploits
+and victories they and her subjects obtained." It would occupy too much
+space to give a contrasted list of the royal navy in the present year,
+1813; but which our readers can easily obtain from the monthly lists
+published at London.
+
+[Footnote 395: Church. Collect. III. 196.]
+
+                               Men in   Men at  Of which
+   Names of Ships.   Tonnage.  Harbour.  Sea.   Mariners.  Sailors.  Guns.
+   Elizabeth-Jonas,    900        30     500      340[A]     120[A]  40
+   Triumph,           1000        30     500      340        120     40
+   White Bear,         900        30     500      340        120     40
+   Victory,            800        17     400      268        100     32
+   Ark Royal,          800        17     400      268        100     32
+   Mere Honour,        800        17     400      268        100     32
+   St Matthew,        1000        30     500      340        120     40
+   St Andrew,          900        17     400      268        100     32
+   Due Repulse,        700        16     350      230         90     30
+   Garland,            700        16     300      190         80     30
+   Warspite,           600        12     300      190         80     30
+   Mary-Rose,          600        12     250      150         70     30
+   Hope,               600        12     250      150         70     30
+   Bonaventure,        600        12     250      150         70     30
+   Lion,               500        12     250      150         70     30
+   Nonpareille,        500        12     250      150         70     30
+   Defiance,           500        12     250      150         70     30
+   Rainbow,            500        12     250      150         70     30
+   Dreadnought,        400        10     200      130         50     20
+   Antilope,           350        10     160      114         30     16
+   Swiftsure,          400        10     200      130         50     20
+   Swallow,            380        10     160      114         30     16
+   Foresight,          300        10     160      114         30     16
+   Tide,               250         7     120       88         20     12
+   Crane,              200         7     100       76         20     12
+   Adventure,          250         7     120       88         20     12
+   Quittance,          200         7     100       76         20     12
+   Answer,             200         7     100       76         20     12
+   Advantage,          200         7     100       70         20     12
+   Tiger,              200         7     100       70         20     12
+   Tremontain,                     6      70       52         10      8
+   Scout,              120         6      66       48         10      8
+   Catis,              100         5      60       42         10      8
+   Charles,             70         5      45       32          7      6
+   Moon,                60         5      40       30          5      5
+   Advice,              50         5      40       30          5      5
+   Spy,                 50         5      40       30          5      5
+   Merlin,              45         5      35       26          4      5
+   Sun,                 40         5      30       24          2      4
+   Synnet[B]            20         2
+   George Hoy,         100        10
+   Penny-rose Hoy,      80         8
+
+[Footnote A: The difference between mariners and sailors is not obvious:
+Perhaps the former were what are now called ordinary, and the latter
+able seamen. Besides, the numbers of both these united, do not make up
+the whole compliment of men at sea: Perhaps the deficiency, being 40 in
+the largest ships of this list, was made up by what were then called
+_grummets:_ servants, ship-boys, or landsmen.--E.]
+
+[Footnote B: This name ought probably to have been the Cygnet.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH TO THE EAST INDIES, BEFORE THE
+ESTABLISHMENT OF AN EXCLUSIVE COMPANY.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Voyage to Goa in 1579, in the Portuguese fleet, by Thomas
+Stevens_[396].
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+We now begin to draw towards India, the following being the first
+voyage we know of, that was performed to that country by any Englishman.
+Though Stevens was only a passenger in the ship of another nation, yet
+the account he gave of the navigation was doubtless one of the motives
+that induced his countrymen to visit India a few years afterwards in
+their own bottoms. Indeed the chief and more immediate causes seem to
+have been the rich caraks, taken in the cruizing voyages against the
+Spaniards and Portuguese about this time, which both gave the English
+some insight into the India trade, and inflamed their desire of
+participating in so rich a commerce.
+
+[Footnote 396: Hakluyt, II, 581. Astley, I. 191.]
+
+The account of this voyage is contained in the following letter from
+Thomas Stevens, to his father Thomas Stevens in London: In this letter,
+preserved by Hakluyt, several very good remarks will be found respecting
+the navigation to India, as practised in those days; yet no mention is
+made in the letter, as to the profession of Stevens, or on what occasion
+he went to India. By the letters of Newberry and Fitch[397], which will
+be found in their proper place, written from Goa in 1584, it appears
+that he was a priest or Jesuit, belonging to the college of St Paul at
+that place; whence it may be concluded that the design of his voyage was
+to propagate the Romish religion in India. In a marginal note to one of
+these letters, Hakluyt intimates that _Padre_ Thomas Stevens was born in
+Wiltshire, and was sometime of New College Oxford. He was very
+serviceable to Newberry and Fitch, who acknowledge that they owed the
+recovery of their liberty and goods, if not their lives, to him and
+another _Padre_. This is also mentioned by Pyrard de la Val, who was
+prisoner at Goa in 1608, at which time Stevens was rector of Morgan
+College in the island of Salcet[398]."--_Astley._
+
+[Footnote 397: In Hakluyts Collection, new edition, II. 376. et seq.]
+
+[Footnote 398: Purchas his Pilgrims, II. 1670.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+After most humble commendations to you and my mother, and craving your
+daily blessing, these are to certify you of my being alive, according to
+your will and my duty. I wrote you that I had taken my journey from
+Italy to Portugal, which letter I think came to your hands, in which
+hope I have the less need to tell you the cause of my departing, which
+in one word I may express, by naming _obedience_. I came to Lisbon
+towards the end of March, eight days before the departure of the ships,
+so late that, if they had not been detained about some important
+affairs, they had been gone before our arrival; insomuch that others
+were appointed to go in our stead, that the kings intention and ours
+might not be frustrated. But on our sudden arrival, these others did not
+go, and we went as originally intended.
+
+The 4th of April, five ships departed for Goa, in which, besides
+mariners and soldiers, there were a great number of children, who bear
+the sea much better than men, as also do many women. I need not tell
+you, as you may easily imagine the solemnity of setting out, with sound
+of trumpets and discharges of cannon, as they go forth in a warlike
+manner. The 10th of the same month we came in sight of Porto Sancto near
+Madeira, where an English ship set upon ours, now entirely alone, and
+fired several shots which did us no harm: But when our ship had run out
+her largest ordnance, the English ship made away from us. This English
+ship was large and handsome, and I was sorry to see her so ill
+occupied, as she went roving about the seas, and we met her again at the
+Canaries, where we arrived on the 13th of the same month of April, and
+had good opportunity to wonder at the high peaked mountain in the island
+of Teneriffe, as we beat about between that island and Grand Canary for
+four days with contrary winds, and indeed had such evil weather till the
+14th of May, that we despaired of being able to double the Cape of Good
+Hope that year. Yet, taking our course between Guinea and the Cape de
+Verd islands, without seeing any land at all, we arrived at the coast of
+Guinea, as the Portuguese call that part of the western coast of Africa
+in the torrid zone, from the lat. of 6° N. to the equinoctial; in which
+parts they suffer so much by extreme heats and want of wind, that they
+think themselves happy when past it. Sometimes the ships stand quite
+still and becalmed for many days, and sometimes they go on, but in such
+a manner that they had almost as good stand still. The atmosphere on the
+greatest part of this coast is never clear, but thick and cloudy, full
+of thunder and lightening, and such unwholesome rain, that the water on
+standing only a little while is full of animalculae, and by falling on
+any meat that is hung out, fills it immediately with worms.
+
+All along that coast, we oftentimes saw a thing swimming in the water
+like a cocks comb but much fairer, which they call a _Guinea ship_[399].
+It is borne up in the water by a substance almost like the swimming
+bladder of a fish in size and colour, having many strings from it under
+water, which prevent it from being overturned. It is so poisonous, that
+one cannot touch it without much danger. On this coast, between the
+sixth degree of north latitude and the equator, we spent no less than
+thirty days either in calms or contrary winds. The 30th of May we
+crossed the line with great difficulty, directing our course as well as
+we could to pass the promontory[400], but in all that gulf of Guinea,
+and all the rest of the way to the Cape, we found such frequent calms
+that the most experienced mariners were much astonished. In places where
+there always used to be horrible tempests, we found most invincible
+calms, which were very troublesome to our ships, which being of the
+greatest size cannot go without good winds; insomuch that when it is
+almost an intolerable tempest for other ships, making them furl all
+their sails, those large ships display their sails to the wind and sail
+excellent well, unless the waves be too furious, which seldom happened
+in our voyage. You must understand that, when once past the line, they
+cannot go direct for the Cape the nearest way, but, according to the
+wind, must hold on as near south as they can till in the latitude of the
+Cape, which is 35° 30' S. They then shape their course to the east, and
+so get round the Cape. But the wind so served us at 33 degrees, that we
+directed our course thence for the Cape.
+
+[Footnote 399: Otherwise called, by the English sailors, a Portuguese
+man-of-war.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 400: The Cape of Good Hope must be here meant.--E.]
+
+You know that it is hard to sail from east to west, or the contrary,
+because there is no fixed point in all the sky by which they can direct
+their course, wherefore I shall tell you what help God hath provided to
+direct them. There is not a fowl that appeareth, neither any sign in the
+air or in the sea, that have not been written down by those who have
+formerly made these voyages; so that partly by their own experience,
+judging what space the ship was able to make with such and such a wind,
+and partly by the experience of others recorded in the books of
+navigations which they have, they guess whereabouts they may be in
+regard to longitude, for they are always sure as to latitude. But the
+greatest and best direction of all is, to mark the variation of the
+needle or mariners compass; which, in the meridian of the island of St
+Michael, one of the Azores in the same latitude with Lisbon, points due
+north, and thence swerveth so much towards the east, that, between the
+foresaid meridian and the extreme south point of Africa, it varieth
+three or four of the thirty-two points. Again, having passed a little
+beyond the cape called _das Agulias_, or of the Needles, it returneth
+again towards the north; and when it hath attained that, it swerveth
+again toward the west proportionally, as it did before eastwards.
+
+In regard to the first mentioned signs from fowls: The nearer we came to
+the coast of Africa, the more kinds and greater number of strange fowls
+appeared; insomuch that, when we came within not less than thirty
+leagues, almost 100 miles, and 600 miles as we thought from any other
+land, as good as 3000 fowls of sundry kinds followed our ship; some of
+them so great, that, when their wings were opened, they measured seven
+spans from point to point of their wings, as the sailors said. It is a
+marvellous thing to think how God hath so provided for these fowls in
+so vast an expanse of sea, that they are all fat. The Portuguese have
+named them all, according to some obvious property. Thus they call some
+_rushtails_, because their tails are small and long like a rush, and not
+proportionate to their bodies; some _fork-tails_, because their tails
+are very broad and forked; others again _velvet-sleeves_, because their
+wings are like velvet, and are always bent like a mans elbow. This bird
+is always welcome, as it appears nearest the Cape. I should never have
+an end, were I to tell you all particulars, but shall touch on a few
+that may suffice, if you mark them well, to give cause for glorifying
+God in his wonderful works, and in the variety of his creatures.
+
+To say something of fishes: In all the places of calms, and especially
+in the burning zone near the line, there continually waited on our ship
+certain fishes, called _tuberones_[401] by the Portuguese, as long as a
+man, which came to eat such things as might fall from the ship into the
+sea, not even refusing men themselves if they could light upon any, and
+if they find any meat hung over into the sea, they seize it. These have
+waiting upon them continually six or seven, small fishes, having blue
+and green bands round their bodies, like finely dressed serving men. Of
+these two or three always swim before the shark, and some on every side,
+[whence they are called _pilot fish_, by the English mariners.] They
+have likewise other fishes [called _sucking fish_] which always cleave
+to their bodies; and seem to feed on such superfluities as grow about
+them, and they are said to enter into their bodies to purge them, when
+needful. Formerly the mariners used to eat the sharks, but since they
+have seen them devour men, their stomachs now abhor them; yet they draw
+them up with great hooks, and kill as many of them as they can, thinking
+thereby to take a great revenge. There is another kind of fish almost as
+large as a herring, which hath wings and flieth, and are very numerous.
+These have two enemies, one in the sea and the other in the air.
+
+[Footnote 401: Evidently sharks, from the account of them.--E.]
+
+That in the sea is the fish called _albicore_, as large as a salmon,
+which follows with great swiftness to take them; on which this poor
+fish, which cannot swim fast as it hath no fins, and only swims by the
+motion of its tail, having its wings then shut along the sides of its
+body, springeth out of the water and flieth, but not very high; on this
+the albicore, though he have no wings, giveth a great leap out of the
+water, and sometimes catcheth the flying fish, or else keepeth in the
+water, going that way as fast as the other flieth. When the flying fish
+is weary of the air, or thinketh himself out of danger, he returneth to
+the water, where the albicore meeteth him; but sometimes his other
+enemy, the sea-crow, catcheth him in the air before he falleth.
+
+With these and the like sights, but always making our supplications to
+God for good weather and the preservation of our ship, we came at length
+to the south cape of Africa, the ever famous Cape of Good Hope, so much
+desired yet feared of all men: But we there found no tempest, only
+immense waves, where our pilot was guilty of an oversight; for, whereas
+commonly all navigators do never come within sight of land, but,
+contenting themselves with signs and finding the bottom, go their course
+safe and sure, he, thinking to have the winds at will, shot nigh the
+land; when the wind, changing into the south, with the assistance of the
+mountainous waves, rolled us so near the land that we were in less than
+14 fathoms, only six miles from _Capo das Agulias_, and there we looked
+to be utterly lost. Under us were huge rocks, so sharp and cutting that
+no anchor could possibly hold the ship, and the shore was so excessively
+bad that nothing could take the land, which besides is full of _tigers_
+and savage people, who put all strangers to death, so that we had no
+hope or comfort, but only in God and a good conscience. Yet, after we
+had lost our anchors, hoisting up our sails to try to get the ship upon
+some safer part of the coast, it pleased God, when no man looked for
+help, suddenly to fill our sails with a wind off the land, and so by
+good providence we escaped, thanks be to God. The day following, being
+in a place where they are always wont to fish, we also fell a fishing,
+and caught so many, that they served the whole ships company all that
+day and part of the next. One of our lines pulled up a coral of great
+size and value; for it is said that in this place, which indeed we saw
+by experience, that the corals grow on the rocks at the bottom of the
+sea in the manner of stalks, becoming hard and red.
+
+Our day of peril was the 29th of July. You must understand that, after
+passing the Cape of Good Hope, there are two ways to India, one within
+the island of Madagascar, or between that and Africa, called the Canal
+of Mozambique, which the Portuguese prefer, as they refresh themselves
+for a fortnight or a month at Mozambique, not without great need after
+being so long at sea, and thence in another month get to Goa. The other
+course is on the outside of the island of St Lawrence or Madagascar,
+which they take when they set out too late, or come so late to the Cape
+as not to have time to stop at Mozambique, and then they go on their
+voyage in great heaviness, because in this way they have no port; and,
+by reason of the long navigation, and the want of fresh provisions and
+water, they fall into sundry diseases. Their gums become sore, and swell
+in such a manner that they are fain to cut them away; their legs swell,
+and all their bodies become sore, and so benumbed that they cannot move
+hand nor foot, and so they die of weakness; while others fall into
+fluxes and agues, of which they die. This was the way we were forced to
+take; and, although we had above an hundred and fifty sick, there did
+not die above seven or eight and twenty, which was esteemed a small loss
+in comparison with other times. Though some of our fraternity were
+diseased in this sort, thanks be to God I had good health the whole way,
+contrary to the expectation of many: May God send me as good health on
+the land, if it may be to his glory and service. This way is full of
+hidden rocks and quicksands, so that sometimes we dared not sail by
+night; but by the goodness of God we saw nothing all the way to hurt us,
+neither did we ever find bottom till we came to the coast of India.
+
+When we had again passed the line to the northward, and were come to the
+third degree or somewhat more, we saw crabs swimming that were as red as
+if they had been boiled; but this was no sign of land. About the
+eleventh degree, and for many days, more than ten thousand fishes
+continually followed, or were round about our ship, of which we caught
+so many that we eat nothing else for fifteen days, and they served our
+turn well; for at this time we had no meat remaining, and hardly any
+thing else to eat, our voyage drawing nigh to seven months, which
+commonly is performed in five, when they take the inner passage. These
+fishes were no sign of land, but rather of deep sea. At length two birds
+were caught of the hawk tribe, which gave our people great joy, thinking
+they had been birds of India, but we found afterwards that they were
+from Arabia; and when we thought we had been near India, we were in the
+latitude of Socotoro, an island near the mouth of the Red Sea. Here God
+sent us a strong wind from the N.E. or N.N.E. on which they bore away
+unwillingly toward the east, and we ran thus for ten days without any
+sign of land, by which they perceived their error. Hitherto they had
+directed their course always N.E. desiring to increase their latitude;
+but partly from the difference of the needle, and most of all because
+the currents at that time carried us N.W. we had been drawn into this
+other danger, had not God sent us this wind, which at length became more
+favourable and restored us to our right course.
+
+These currents are very dangerous, as they deceive most pilots, and some
+are so little curious, contenting themselves with ordinary experience,
+that they do not take the trouble of seeking for new expedients when
+they swerve, neither by means of the compass nor by any other trial. The
+first sign of approaching land was by seeing certain birds, which they
+knew to be of India; the second was some sedges and boughs of
+palm-trees; the third was snakes swimming at the surface of the water,
+and a certain substance which they called _money_, as round and broad as
+a groat-piece, and wonderfully printed or stamped by nature, as if it
+had been coined money. These two last signs are so certain, that they
+always see land next day, if the wind serve; which we did next day, when
+all our water, for you know they have no beer in these parts, and
+victuals began to fail us.
+
+We came to Goa the 24th day of October, and were there received in a
+most charitable manner. The natives are tawny, but not disfigured in
+their lips and noses, like the Moors and Kafrs of Ethiopia. The lower
+ranks go for the most part naked, having only a clout or apron before
+them of a span long and as much in breadth, with a lace two fingers
+breadth, girded about with a string, and nothing more; and thus they
+think themselves as well dressed as we, with all our finery. I cannot
+now speak of their trees and fruits, or should write another letter as
+long as this; neither have I yet seen any tree resembling any of those I
+have seen in Europe, except the vine, which here grows to little
+purpose, as all their wines are brought from Portugal. The drink used in
+this country is water, or wine made from the coco palm-tree. Thus much
+must suffice for the present; but if God send me health, I shall have
+opportunity to write you once again; but the length of this letter
+compelleth me now to take my leave, with my best prayers for your most
+prosperous health. From Goa, the 10th November 1579.--Your loving Son,
+
+THOMAS STEVENS.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Journey to India over-land, by Ralph Fitch, Merchant of London, and
+others, in 1583_[402].
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+We learn from the following journal, that the present expedition was
+undertaken at the instigation, and chiefly at the expence of Sir Edward
+Osborne, Knight, and Mr Richard Staper, citizens and merchants of
+London. Besides Fitch, the author of the narrative, Mr John Newbery,
+merchant, William Leedes jeweller, and James Story painter, were engaged
+in the expedition. The chief conduct of this commercial enterprize
+appears to have been confided to John Newbery; and its object appears to
+have been, to extend the trade, which the English merchants seem to have
+only recently established through Syria, by Aleppo, Bagdat and Basora,
+to Ormus and perhaps to Goa, in imitation of the Italians, so as to
+procure the commodities of India as nearly as possible at first hand. In
+the prospect of being able to penetrate into India, and even into China,
+Newbery was furnished with letters of credence or recommendation, from
+Queen Elizabeth to Zelabdim Echebar, stiled king of Cambaia, who
+certainly appears to have been Akbar Shah, emperor of the Mogul
+conquerors of Hindostan, who reigned from 1556 to 1605; and to the
+emperor of China. The promoters of this enterprise, seem to have been
+actuated by a more than ordinary spirit of research for those times, by
+employing a painter to accompany their commercial agents. It is farther
+presumable that the promoters of the expedition, and their agents,
+Newbery and Fitch, were members of the Turkey company; and though the
+speculation turned out unsuccessful, owing to causes sufficiently
+explained in the narrative and its accompanying documents, it is
+obviously a prelude to the establishment of the English East India
+Company; which, from small beginnings, has risen to a colossal height of
+commercial and sovereign grandeur, altogether unexampled in all history.
+
+[Footnote 402: Hakluyt, II. 382.]
+
+Hakluyt gives the following descriptive title of this uncommonly curious
+and interesting narrative: "The voyage of Mr Ralph Fitch, merchant of
+London, by the way of Tripolis in Syria to Ormus, and so to Goa in the
+East India, to Cambaia, and all the kingdom, of Zelabdim Echebar the
+great Mogor, to the mighty river Ganges, and down to Bengala, to Bacola
+and Chonderi, to Pegu, to Imahay in the kingdom of Siam, and back to
+Pegu, and from thence to Malacca, Zeilan, Cochin, and all the coast of
+the East India; begun in the year of our Lord 1583, and ended in 1591:
+wherein the strange rites, manners, and customs of those people, and the
+exceeding rich trade and commodities of those countries, are faithfully
+set down and diligently described, by the foresaid Mr Ralph Fitch."
+
+Hakluyt has prefaced this journal, by several letters respecting the
+journey, from Mr Newbery, and one from Mr Fitch, and gives by way of
+appendix an extract from Linschoten, detailing the imprisonment of the
+adventurers at Ormus and Goa, and their escape, which happened while he
+was at Goa, where he seems to have materially contributed to their
+enlargement from prison. These documents will be found in the sequel to
+the narrative of Mr Fitch.
+
+It must not however be concealed, that the present journal has a very
+questionable appearance in regard to its entire authenticity, as it has
+obviously borrowed liberally from that of Cesar Frederick, already
+inserted in this work, Vol. VII. p. 142-244. It seems therefore highly
+probable, that the journal or narrative of Fitch may have fallen into
+the hand of some ingenious _book-maker_, who wished to increase its
+interest by this unjustifiable art. Under these circumstances, we would
+have been led to reject this article from our collection, were not its
+general authenticity corroborated by these other documents, and by the
+journal of John Eldred, who accompanied Newbery and Fitch to Basora. A
+part of the striking coincidence between the journals of Cesar Frederick
+and Ralph Fitch might have arisen from their having visited the same
+places, and nearly by the same route, only at the distance of 20 years;
+Frederick having commenced his journey in 1563, and Newbery and Fitch
+theirs in 1588. Some of the resemblances however could only have been
+occasioned by plagiarism.
+
+It is very difficult to conceive how Fitch, after his imprisonment at
+Goa, and escape from thence under surety to the Portuguese viceroy,
+should have ventured in the sequel to visit the Portuguese settlements
+in Ceylon, Cochin, Calicut, Goa even, Chaul, and Ormuz, on his way home
+again by Basora, Bagdat, Mosul, &c. to Aleppo and Tripoli. These parts
+of his journal, and his excursions to the north of Pegu, certainly have
+a suspicious appearance. It is possible that he may have described these
+several routes, historically, in his own journal; and that some
+book-maker, into whose hands his papers may have fallen, chose to give
+these a more interesting appearance, by making Fitch the actor in what
+he only described on the authority of others. It is strange that these
+circumstances should not have occurred to Hakluyt, as the narrative of
+Fitch is inserted in his collection immediately following that of Cesar
+Frederick. Yet with these obvious faults, the relation of Fitch is
+interesting, as the first direct attempt of the English to open a trade
+with India; and so far at least, its authenticity is unquestionable,
+being corroborated by other documents that are not liable to the
+smallest suspicion.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In the year 1583, I Ralph Fitch of London, merchant, being desirous to
+see the countries of the Eastern India, went in company with Mr John
+Newbery, merchant, who had been once before at Ormus, together with
+William Leedes, jeweller, and James Story, painter; being chiefly set
+forth by the right worshipful Sir Edward Osburn, knight, and Mr Richard
+Staper, citizens and merchants of London. We shipped ourselves in a ship
+called the Tiger of London, in which we went to Tripoly in Syria, whence
+we went with the caravan to Aleppo in seven days. Finding good company
+at Aleppo, we went from thence to Birra [Bir,] which is two days and a
+half journey with camels.
+
+Bir is a small town, but abounding in provisions, near which runs the
+river Euphrates. We here purchased a boat, and agreed with a master and
+boatmen to carry us to Babylon [Bagdat]. These boats serve only for one
+voyage, as the stream is so rapid that they cannot return. They carry
+passengers to a town called Felugia [Feluchia], where the boat has to be
+sold for very little money, what cost fifty pieces at Bir bringing only
+seven or eight at that place. From Bir to Feluchia is a journey of
+sixteen days; but it is not good for one boat to go alone, as if it
+should chance to break, it would be difficult to save the goods from the
+Arabs, who are always robbing thereabouts, and it is necessary to keep
+good watch in the night, when the boat is made fast, as the Arabs are
+great thieves, and will swim on board to steal your goods, and then flee
+away. Against them a musket is a good weapon, as they are much afraid of
+fire-arms. Between Bir and Feluchia, there are certain places on the
+Euphrates where you have to pay custom, being so many _medins_ for a
+_some_ or camels load, together with certain quantities of raisins and
+soap, which are for the sons of _Aborise_, who is lord of the Arabs and
+of that great desert, and hath some villages on the river. Feluchia,
+where the goods coming from Bir are unladed, is a small village, from
+whence you go to Bagdat in one day.
+
+Babylon, or Bagdat, is not a very large town, but is very populous, and
+much frequented by strangers, being the centre of intercourse between
+Persia, Turkey, and Arabia, caravans going frequently from it to these
+and other countries. It is well supplied with provisions, which are
+brought from Armenia down the river Tigris, upon rafts made of goat skin
+bags blown full of wind, over which boards are laid, on which the goods
+are loaded. When these are discharged, the skin bags are opened and
+emptied of air, and are then carried back to Armenia on camels to serve
+again. Bagdat belonged formerly to Persia, but is now subject to the
+Turks. Over against Bagdat, on the other side of the Tigris, is a very
+fair village, to which there is a passage across from Bagdat by a long
+bridge of boats, connected by a vast iron chain made fast at each side
+of the river. When any boats have to pass up or down the river, a
+passage is made for them by removing some of the boats of this bridge.
+
+The Tower of Babel is on this side of the Tigris towards Arabia, about
+seven or eight miles from Bagdat, being now ruined on all sides, and
+with the ruins thereof hath made a little mountain, so that no shape or
+form of a tower remains. It was built of bricks dried in the sun, having
+canes and leaves of the palm-tree laid between the courses of bricks. It
+stands in a great plain between the Tigris and Euphrates, and no
+entrance can be any where seen for going into it.
+
+Near the river Euphrates, two days journey from Bagdat, in a field near
+a place called _Ait_, there is a hole in the ground which continually
+throws out boiling pitch accompanied by a filthy smoke, the pitch
+flowing into a great field which is always full of it. The _Moors_ call
+this opening the mouth of hell; and on account of the great abundance
+of the pitch, the people of the country daub all their boats two or
+three inches thick with it on the outside, so that no water can enter
+them. These boats are called _danec_. When there is plenty of water in
+the Tigris, the boats may go down from Bagdat to Basora in eight or nine
+days; but when the water is low it requires a longer time.
+
+In times past, Basora belonged to the Arabs, but is now subject to the
+Turks. Yet there are some Arabs that the Turks cannot subdue, as they
+occupy certain islands in the great river Euphrates, which the Turks
+have never been able to conquer. These Arabs are all thieves, and have
+no settled dwelling, but remove from place to place with their camels,
+horses, goats, wives, children, and household goods. They wear large
+blue gowns; their wives having their ears and noses full of copper and
+silver rings, and wear copper rings on their legs. Basora is near the
+head of the gulf of Persia, and drives a great trade in spiceries and
+drugs, which come from Ormus. The country round produces abundance of
+white rice and dates, with which they supply Bagdat and all the country,
+sending likewise to Ormus and India. I went from Basora to Ormus, down
+the gulf of Persia, in a ship made of boards sewed together with
+_cayro_, which is a thread made of the husks of coco-nuts, and having
+certain canes, or leaves, or straw, sewed upon the seams between the
+boards, so that these vessels leak very much. Having Persia on our left
+hand, and Arabia on our right, we passed many islands, and among others
+the famous isle of Baharin, or Bahrain, from which come the best and
+roundest orient pearls.
+
+Ormus is an island about 25 or 30 miles in circuit, which is perhaps the
+most arid and barren island in the world, as it produces nothing but
+salt, all its water, wood, provisions, and every other necessary, coming
+from Persia, which is about 12 miles distant; but all the other islands
+thereabout are very fertile, and from them provisions are sent to Ormus.
+The Portuguese have here a castle near the sea, with a captain and a
+competent garrison, part of which dwell in the castle and part In the
+town; in which likewise dwell merchants from all nations, together with
+many Moors and Gentiles. This place has a great trade in spices, drugs,
+silk, cloth of silk, fine tapestry of Persia, great store of pearls from
+Bahrain, which are the best of all pearls, and many horses from Persia
+which supply all India. Their king is a Moor, or Mahomedan, who is
+chosen by the Portuguese, and is entirely under subjection to them.
+Their women are very strangely attired, wearing many rings set with
+jewels on their ears, noses, necks, arms, and legs, and locks of gold
+and silver in their ears, and a long bar of gold upon the sides of their
+noses. The holes in their ears are worn so wide with the weight of their
+jewels, that one may thrust three fingers into them.
+
+Very shortly after our arrival at Ormus we were put into prison, by
+order of Don Mathias de Albuquerque, the governor of the castle, and had
+part of our goods taken from us; and on the 11th October, he shipped us
+from thence, sending us to the viceroy at Goa, who at that time was Don
+Francisco de Mascarenhas. The ship in which we were embarked belonged to
+the captain, who carried in it 124 horses for sale. All goods carried to
+Goa in a ship wherein there are horses pay no duties; but if there are
+no horses, you then pay eight in the hundred for your goods. The first
+city of India at which we arrived on the 5th November, after passing the
+coast of _Zindi_, [Sindi] was named Diu, which stands in an island on
+the coast of the kingdom of Cambaia, or Gujrat, and is the strongest
+town belonging to the Portuguese in those parts. It is but small, yet
+abounds in merchandise, as they here load many ships with different
+kinds of goods for the straits of Mecca or the Red Sea, Ormus, and other
+places; these ships belong both to Christians and Moors, but the latter
+are not permitted to pass unless they have a Portuguese licence.
+Cambaietta, or Cambay, is the chief city of that province, being great
+and populous and well built for a city of the gentiles. When there
+happens a famine the natives sell their children for a low price. The
+last king of Cambaia was sultan Badur, who was slain at the siege of
+Diu, and shortly after the capital city was reduced by the great
+_Mogor_, [Mogul] who is king of Agra and Delhi, forty days journey from
+thence. Here the women wear upon their arms, a vast number of ivory
+rings, in which they take so much pride that they would rather go
+without their meat than want their bracelets.
+
+Going from Diu, we came to _Damaun_, the second town of the Portuguese
+in the country of Cambaia, forty leagues from Diu. This place, which has
+no trade but in corn and rice, has many villages under its jurisdiction,
+which the Portuguese possess quietly during peace, but in time of war
+they are all occupied by the enemy. From Damaun we passed to _Basaim_,
+[Baseen] and from thence to _Tanna_ in the island of Salsette, at both
+which places the only trade is in rice and corn. The 10th November we
+arrived at _Chaul_ on the firm land, at which place there are two towns,
+one belonging to the Portuguese and the other to the Moors. That of the
+Portuguese is nearest the sea, commanding the bay, and is walled round;
+and a little above it is the Moors town, subject to a king called
+_Xa-Maluco_. At this place is a great trade for all Kinds of spices,
+drugs, silk, raw and manufactured, sandal-wood, elephants teeth, much
+China work, and a great deal of sugar made from the nut called _gagara_,
+[coco]. The tree on which it grows is called the _palmer_, and is the
+most profitable tree in the world. It always bears fruit, and yields
+wine, oil, sugar, vinegar, cordage, coals, or fuel; of the leaves are
+made thatch for houses, sails for ships, and mats to sit or lie on; of
+the branches are made houses, and brooms wherewith they sweep them; of
+the wood ships. The wine issues from the top of the tree, and is
+procured thus: They cut a branch, binding it hard, and hang an earthen
+pot under the cut end, which they empty every evening and morning; and
+still[403] the juice, putting raisins into it, by which it becometh
+strong wine in a short time. Many ships come here from all parts of
+India, and from Ormus and Mecca, so that there are many Moors and
+Gentiles at this place. The natives have a strange superstition,
+worshipping a cow, and having cows dung in great veneration, insomuch
+that they paint or daub the walls of their houses with it. They kill no
+animal whatever, not so much as a louse, holding it a crime to take away
+life. They eat no flesh, living entirely on roots, rice, and milk. When
+a man dies, his living wife is burnt along with his body, if she be
+alive; and if she will not, her head is shaven, and she is ever after
+held in low esteem. They consider it a great sin to bury dead bodies, as
+they would engender many worms and other vermin, and when the bodies
+were consumed these worms would lack sustenance; wherefore they burn
+their dead. In all Guzerat they kill nothing; and in the town of Cambay
+they have hospitals for lame dogs and cats, and for birds, and they even
+provide food for the ants.
+
+[Footnote 403: I am apt to suspect the word _still_ here used, is only
+meant to imply fermentation, not distillation--E.]
+
+Goa is the chief city of the Portuguese in India, in which their viceroy
+resides and holds his court. It stands in an island about 25 or 30 miles
+in circumference, being a fine city and very handsome for an Indian
+town. The island is fertile and full of gardens and orchards, with many
+palmer trees, and several villages. Here are many merchants of all
+nations. The fleet which sails every year from Portugal, consisting of
+four, five, or six great ships, comes first here, arriving mostly in
+September, and remaining there forty or fifty days. It then goes to
+Cochin, where the ships take in pepper for Portugal. Often one ship
+loads entirely at Goa, and the rest go to Cochin, which is 100 leagues
+to the south. Goa stands in the country of Adel Khan, which is six or
+seven days journey inland, the chief city being Bisapor. [Bejapoor.]
+
+On our arrival in Goa we were thrown into prison, and examined before
+the justice, who demanded us to produce letters, [of licence?] and
+charged us with being spies; but they could prove nothing against us. We
+continued in prison till the 22d December, when we were set at liberty,
+putting in surety for 2000 ducats not to depart from the town. Our
+surety was one Andreas Taborer, who was procured for us by father
+Stevens, an English Jesuit whom we found there, and another religious
+man, a friend of his. We paid 2150 ducats into the hands of Andreas
+Taborer, our surety, who still demanded more; on which we petitioned the
+viceroy and justice to order us our money again, seeing they had it near
+five months, and could prove nothing against us. But the viceroy gave us
+a sharp answer, saying, we should be better sifted ere long, and that
+they had other matter against us. Upon this we determined to attempt
+recovering our liberty, rather than run the risk of remaining as slaves
+for ever in the country, and besides it was said we were to have the
+_strapado_. Wherefore, on the 5th of April 1585 in the morning, we
+removed secretly from Goa; and getting across the river, we travelled
+two days on foot in great fear, not knowing the way, as having no guide,
+and not daring to trust any one.
+
+One of the first towns we came to is called _Bellergan?_ where there is
+a great market of diamonds, rubies, sapphires, and many other precious
+stones. From thence we went to _Bejapoor_, a very large city, where the
+king keeps his court, in which there are many Gentiles, who are gross
+idolaters, having their idols standing in the woods, which they call
+pagodas. Some of these are like a cow, some like a monkey, some like a
+buffalo, others resemble a peacock, and others like the devil. In this
+country are many elephants, which they employ in their wars. They have
+great abundance of gold and silver, and their houses are lofty and well
+built. From thence we went to _Galconda_, the king of which is called
+_Cutub de lashach_. In this country, in the kingdom of Adel Khan, and in
+the Decan, those diamonds are found which are called of the _old water_.
+Golconda is a pleasant fair town, having good and handsome houses of
+brick and timber, and it abounds with excellent fruits and good water.
+It is here very hot, and both men and women go about with only a cloth
+bound about their middles, without any other clothing. The winter begins
+here about the last of May.
+
+About eight days journey from thence is a sea port called Masulipatan,
+toward the gulf of Bengal, to which many ships come out of India, Pegu,
+and Sumatra, richly laden with spiceries, pepper, and other commodities.
+The country is very fruitful. From thence I went to _Servidone?_ which
+is a fine country, its king being called the _king of bread_. The houses
+here are all built of loam and thatched. The country contains many Moors
+and Gentiles, but there is not much religion among them. From thence I
+went to _Bellapore_, and so to _Barrampore_, which is in the country of
+_Zelabdim Echebar_ the great _Mogor_. In this place their money is of
+silver, round and thick, to the value of twenty-pence. It is a great and
+populous country; and in their winter, which is in June, July, and
+August, there is no passing the streets except on horseback, the waters
+are so high. In this country they make great quantities of cotton cloth,
+both white and painted, and the land produces great abundance of corn
+and rice. In the towns and villages through which we passed, we found
+many marriages celebrated between boys of eight or ten years old, and
+girls of five or six. These youthful couples did ride both on one horse,
+very bravely dressed, and were carried about the streets with great
+piping and playing, after which they returned home and banqueted on rice
+and fruits, dancing most of the night, and so ended the marriage, which
+is not consumated till the bride be ten years old. We were told they
+married their children thus young, because when a man dies his wife is
+burnt along with him; and by this device they secure a father-in-law, in
+case of the fathers death, to assist in bringing up the children that
+are thus early married, thus taking care not to leave their sons without
+wives, or their daughters without husbands.
+
+From thence we went to _Mandoway?_ a very strong town, which was
+besieged for twelve years by Echebar before he could reduce it. It
+stands on a very great high rock, as do most of their castles, and is of
+very great circuit. From thence we went to _Vgini?_ and _Serringe?_
+where we overtook the ambassador of Zelabdim Echebar, attended by a
+prodigious retinue of men, elephants, and camels. In this district there
+is a great trade carried on in cotton, and cloths made of cotton, and
+great store of drugs. From thence we went to Agra, passing many rivers
+which were much swollen by the rains, so that in crossing them we had
+often to swim for our lives[404].
+
+[Footnote 404: In this route from Masulipatan to Agra, there are several
+places of which the names are so disfigured as to be unintelligible.
+Barrampore and Mandoway, are probably Burhampore and Candwah in the
+northern part of Candeish; Vgini and Serringe, may he Ougein and Seronge
+in Malwa.--E.]
+
+Agra is a very great and populous city built of stone, having large and
+handsome streets, upon a fine river which falls into the gulf of Bengal,
+and has a strong and handsome castle with a broad and deep ditch. It is
+inhabited by many Moors and Gentiles, the king being Zelabdim Echebar,
+called for the most part the great _Mogor_. From thence we went to
+_Fatepore_, where the king ordinarily resides and holds his court, which
+is called _Derican_. This town is larger than Agra, but the streets and
+houses are by no means so good, but it is inhabited by a vast multitude
+of people, both Moors and Gentiles. In Agra and Fatepoor, the king is
+said to have 1000 elephants, 30,000 horses, 1400 tame deer, 800
+concubines, and such numbers of ounces, tigers, buffaloes, game-cocks,
+and hawks as is quite incredible. Agra and Fatepoor are two great
+cities, either of them larger than London, and very populous, at the
+distance of 12 miles from each other[405]. The whole road between these
+places is one continued market of provisions and other articles, and is
+constantly as full of people as a street or market in a great and
+populous town. These people have many fine carts, many of which are
+richly carved and gilt, having two wheels, and are drawn by two little
+bulls, not much larger than our biggest English dogs, which run with
+these carts as fast as any horse, carrying two or three men in each
+cart: They are covered with silk or fine cloth, and are used like our
+coaches in England. There is a great resort of merchants to this place
+from Persia and all parts of India, and vast quantities of merchandise,
+such as silks, cloths, and precious stones, diamonds, rubies, and
+pearls. The king is dressed in a white _cabie_ made like a shirt, and
+tied with strings on one side, having a small cloth on his head, often
+coloured red and yellow. None enter into his apartments, except the
+eunuchs who have charge of his women.
+
+[Footnote 405: Futtipoor, certainly here meant, is now a place of small
+importance about 20 miles west from Agra.--E.]
+
+We remained in Fatepore till the 28th of September 1585, when Mr John
+Newbery took his journey towards Lahore, intending to go from thence
+through Persia to Aleppo or Constantinople, whichever he could get the
+readiest passage to; and he directed me to proceed to Bengal and Pegu,
+promising me, if it pleased God, to meet me at Bengal within two years
+with a ship from England[406]. I left William Leades the jeweller at
+Fatepore, in the service of the king Zelabdim Achebar, who gave him good
+entertainment, giving a house and five slaves, with a horse, and six
+S.S. in money daily. I went from Agra to _Satagam_ in Bengal, in company
+with 180 boats loaded with _salt_, opium, _hinge_, lead, carpets, and
+various other commodities, down the river _Jemena_, [Jumna]; the chief
+merchants being Moors.
+
+[Footnote 406: In Purchas his Pilgrims, I. 110, is the following notice
+respecting Mr Newberry: "Before that," meaning his journey along with
+Fitch, "he had travelled to Ormus in 1580, and thence into the
+Continent, as may appear in fitter place by his journal, which I have,
+passing through the countries of Persia, Media, Armenia, Georgia, and
+Natolia, to Constantinople; and thence to the Danube, through Walachia,
+Poland, Prussia, and Denmark, and thence to England."]
+
+In this country they have many strange ceremonies. The bramins, who are
+their priests, come to the water having a string about their necks, and
+with many ceremonies lave the water with both their hands, turning the
+string with both their hands in several manners; and though it be never
+so cold, they wash themselves regularly at all times. These gentiles eat
+no flesh, neither do they kill any thing, but live on rice, butter,
+milk, and fruits. They pray in the water naked; and both dress and eat
+their food naked. For penance, they lie flat on the earth, then rise up
+and turn themselves round 30 or 40 times, lifting their hands to the
+sun, and kiss the earth with their arms and legs stretched out; every
+time they lie down making a score on the ground with their fingers, that
+they may know when the prescribed number of prostrations is finished.
+Every morning the Bramins mark their foreheads, ears, and throats, with
+a kind of yellow paint or earth; having some old men among them, who go
+about with a box of yellow powder, marking them on the head and neck as
+they meet them. Their women come in troops of 10, 20, and 30 together to
+the water side singing, where they wash themselves and go through their
+ceremonies, and then mark themselves, and so depart singing. Their
+daughters are married at ten years of age, and the men may have seven
+wives each. They are a crafty people, worse than the Jews. When they
+salute one another, they say, _Rame_, _rame_.
+
+From Agra I came to _Prage_[407], where the river Jumna enters into the
+mighty Ganges, and there loses its name. The Ganges comes out of the
+north-west, and runs east to discharge its waters into the gulf of
+Bengal. In these parts there are many tigers, and vast quantities of
+partridges and turtle-doves, besides many other kinds of birds. There
+are multitudes of beggars in these countries, called _Schesche_, which
+go entirely naked. I here saw one who was a monster among the rest. He
+had no clothes whatever, his beard being very long, and the hair of his
+head was so long and plentiful, that it covered his nakedness. The nails
+on some of his fingers were two inches long, as he would cut nothing
+from him; and besides he never spake, being constantly accompanied by
+eight or ten others, who spoke for him. If any one spoke to him, he laid
+his hand on his breast and bowed, but without speaking, for he would not
+have spoken to the king.
+
+[Footnote 407: At the angle of junction between the rivers Jumna and
+Ganges, the city of Allahabad is now situated.--E.]
+
+We went from _Prage_ down the Ganges, which is here very broad, and
+abounds in various wild-fowl, as swans, geese, cranes, and many others,
+the country on both sides being very fertile and populous. For the most
+part the men have their faces shaven, but wear the hair of their heads
+very long; though some have their crowns shaved, and others have all
+their heads shaven except the crown. The water of the river Ganges is
+very sweet and pleasant, having many islands, and the adjoining country
+is very fertile. We stopt at _Bannaras_, [Benares], a large town in
+which great quantities of cotton-cloths are made, and sashes for the
+moors. In this place all the inhabitants are gentiles, and the grossest
+idolaters I ever saw. To this town the gentiles come on pilgrimages out
+of far distant countries. Along the side of the river there are many
+fair houses, in all or most of which they have ill favoured images made
+of stone or wood; some like lions, leopards, or monkeys; some like men
+and women; others like peacocks; and others like the devil, having four
+arms and four hands. These all sit cross-legged, some with one thing in
+their hands, and others with other things; and by break of day or
+before, numbers of men and women come out of the town to these places,
+and wash in the Ganges. On mounds of earth made for the purpose, there
+are divers old men who sit praying, and who give the people three or
+four straws, which they hold between their fingers when they bathe in
+the Ganges; and some sit to mark them in the forehead: And the devotees
+have each a cloth with a small quantity of rice, barley, or money, which
+they give to these old men when they have washed. They then go to one or
+other of the idols, where they present their sacrifices. When they have
+finished their washings oblations and charities, the old men say certain
+prayers by which they are all sanctified.
+
+In divers places there stand a kind of images, called _Ada_ in their
+language, having four hands with claws; and they have sundry carved
+stones on which they pour water, and lay thereon some rice, wheat,
+barley and other things. Likewise they have a great place built of
+stone, like a well, with steps to go down, in which the water is very
+foul and stinking, through the great quantity of flowers which are
+continually thrown into the water: Yet there are always many people in
+that water, for they say that it purifies them from their sins, because,
+as they allege, God washed himself in that place. They even gather up
+the sand or mud from the bottom, which they esteem holy. They never pray
+but in the water, in which they wash themselves over head, laving up the
+water in both hands, and turning themselves about, they drink a little
+of the water three times, and then go to the idols which stand in the
+houses already mentioned. Some take of the water, with which they wash a
+place of their own length, and then lie down stretched out, rising and
+lying down, and kissing the ground twenty or thirty times, yet keeping
+their right foot all the time in the same place. Some make their
+ceremonies with fifteen or sixteen pots, little and great, ringing a
+little bell when they make their mixtures, ten or twelve times. They
+make a circle of water round about their pots and pray, divers sitting
+by them, and one in particular who reaches the pots to them; and they
+say certain words many times over the pots, and when they have done,
+they go to their idols, before which they strew their sacrifices, which
+they think very holy, and mark many of those who sit by in the
+foreheads, which they esteem highly. There sometimes come fifty or even
+an hundred together, to wash at this well, and to sacrifice to these
+idols.
+
+In some of these idol houses, there are people who stand by them in warm
+weather, fanning them as if to cool them; and when they see any company
+coming, they ring a little bell which hangs beside them, when many give
+them alms, particularly those who come out of the country. Many of these
+idols are black and have brazen claws very long, and some ride upon
+peacocks, or on very ill-favoured fowls, having long hawks bills, some
+like one thing and some like another, but none have good faces. Among
+the rest, there is one held in great veneration, as they allege be gives
+them all things, both food and raiment, and one always sits beside this
+idol with a fan, as if to cool him. Here some are burned to ashes, and
+some only scorched in the fire and thrown into the river, where the dogs
+and foxes come presently and eat them. Here the wives are burned along
+with the bodies of their deceased husbands, and if they will not, their
+heads are shaven and they are not afterwards esteemed.
+
+The people go all naked, except a small cloth about their middles. The
+women have their necks, arms, and ears decorated with rings of silver,
+copper, and tin, and with round hoops of ivory, adorned with amber
+stones and many agates, and have their foreheads marked with a great red
+spot, whence a stroke of red goes up the crown, and one to each side. In
+their winter, which is in May, the men wear quilted gowns of cotton,
+like to our counterpanes, and quilted caps like our grocers large
+mortars, with a slit to look out at, tied beneath their ears. When a man
+or woman is sick and like to die, they are laid all night before the
+idols, either to help their sickness or make an end of them. If they do
+not mend that night, the friends come and sit up with them, and cry for
+some time, after which they take them to the side of the river, laying
+them on a raft of reeds, and so let them float down the river.
+
+When they are married the man and woman come to the water side, where
+there is an old bramin or priest, a cow and calf, or a cow with calf.
+Then the man and woman, together with the cow and calf, go into the
+river, giving the old bramin a piece of cloth four yards long, and a
+basket cross bound, in which are sundry things. The bramin lays the
+cloth on the back of the cow, after which he takes hold of the end of
+the cows tail, and says certain words. The woman has a brass or copper
+pot full of water; the man takes hold of the bramin with one hand, and
+the woman with the other, all having hold of the cow by the tail, on
+which they pour water from the pot, so that it runs on all their hands.
+They then lave up water with their hands, and the bramin ties the man
+and woman together by their clothes[408]. When this is done, they go
+round about the cow and calf, and then give some alms to the poor, who
+are always present, and to the bramin or priest they give the cow and
+calf, after which they go to several of the idols, where they offer
+money, lying down flat on the ground before the idol, and kissing the
+earth several times, after which they go away. Their chief idols are
+black and very ugly, with monstrous mouths, having their ears gilded and
+full of jewels, their teeth and eyes of gold, silver, or glass, and
+carrying sundry things in their hands. You may not enter into the houses
+where they stand with your shoes on. In these houses there are lamps
+continually burning before the idols.
+
+[Footnote 408: This tying of new married folks together by the clothes,
+was used by the Mexicans in old times.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+From Benares I went down the Ganges to _Patenaw_, [Patna] passing many
+fair towns and a very fertile country, in which way many great rivers
+enter the Ganges, some as large as itself, by which it becomes so broad
+that in time of the rains you cannot see across. The scorched bodies
+which are thrown into the water swim on the surface, the men with their
+faces down, and the women with theirs up. I thought they had tied some
+weight to their bodies for this purpose, but was told no such thing was
+done. There are many thieves in this country, who roam up and down like
+the Arabs, having no fixed abode. Here the women are so decked with
+silver and copper that it is strange to see them, and they wear so many
+rings on their toes that they cannot use shoes. Here at Patna they find
+gold in this manner: They dig deep pits in the earth, and wash the earth
+in large holes, and in these they find gold, building the pits round
+about with bricks, to prevent the earth from falling in.
+
+Patna is a long and large town, being formerly a separate kingdom, but
+is now under subjection to the great Mogor. The men are tall and
+slender, and have many old people among them. The houses are very
+simple, being made of earth and covered with straw, and the streets are
+very large. There is here a great trade in cotton and cotton cloth,
+likewise great quantities of sugar, which is carried to Bengal and
+India, much opium, and other commodities. He that is chief here under
+the king is called _Tipperdas_, and is held in much estimation by the
+people. Here in Patna I saw a dissembling prophet, who sat on a horse in
+the market-place, making as if he were asleep, and many of the people
+came and touched his feet with their hands, which they then kissed. They
+took him for a great man, but in my opinion he was only a lazy lubber,
+whom I left sleeping there. The people of these countries are much given
+to these dissembling hypocrites.
+
+From Patna I went to _Tanda_ in the land of _Gouren_[409], which is in
+the country of Bengal. This is a place of great trade in cotton and
+cotton cloth, formerly a kingdom, but now subject to the great Mogor.
+The people are great idolaters, going naked with only a cloth about
+their middles, and the country hath many tigers, wild buffaloes, and
+wild fowl. _Tanda_ is about a league from the river Ganges, as in times
+past the river flowed over its banks in the rainy season, and drowned a
+considerable extent of country with many villages, and so it yet
+remains, and the old bed of the river still remains dry, by which means
+the city now stands at a distance from the water. From Agra I was five
+months coming down the Jumna and the Ganges to Bengal, but it may be
+sailed in much shorter time.
+
+[Footnote 409: In our modern maps Tanda and the country or district of
+Gouren are not to be found; but the ruins of _Gour_, which may have some
+reference to Gouren, are laid down in lat. 24° 52' N. long. 88° 5' E.
+about seven miles from the main stream of the great Ganges, and ten
+miles south from the town of Maida.--E.]
+
+I went from Bengal into the country of _Couche_[410], which is 25 days
+journey north from Tanda. The king is a Gentile, named _Suckel Counse_.
+His country is very extensive, and reaches to within no great distance
+of Cauchin China, whence they are said to procure pepper. The port is
+called _Cacchegate_. All the country is set with bamboos or canes made
+sharp at both ends, and driven into the earth, and they can let in the
+water and drown the country above knee-deep, so that neither men nor
+horses can pass; and in case of any wars, they poison all the waters.
+The people are all Gentiles, who kill nothing, having their ears
+marvellously great and a span long, which they draw out by various
+devices when young. They have much silk and musk, and cloth made of
+cotton. They have hospitals for sheep, goats, dogs, cats, birds, and all
+kinds of living creatures, which they keep when old and lame until they
+die. If a man bring any living creature into this country, they will
+give money for it or other victuals, and either let it go at large or
+keep it in their hospitals. They even give food to the ants. Their small
+money is almonds[411], which they often eat.
+
+[Footnote 410: This seemeth to be Quicheu, accounted by some among the
+provinces of China.--_Hakluyt_.
+
+The name of this country is so excessively corrupt, and the description
+of the route so vague, that nothing can be made out of the text at this
+place with any certainty. It is merely possible that he may have gone
+into Bootan, which is to the north of Bengal.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 411: In Mexico they likewise use the cacao fruit, or chocolate
+nut, for small money, which are not unlike almonds.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+From thence I returned to _Hugeli_, [Hoogly in Bengal] which is the
+place where the Portuguese have their residence in Bengal, being in lat.
+23° N[412]. About a league from it is _Satagan_[413], called by the
+Portuguese _Porto Piqueno_, or the little port. We went through the
+wilderness, because the right way was infested by robbers. In passing
+through the country of Gouren we found few villages, being almost all
+wilderness, in which were many buffaloes, wild swine, and deer, with
+many tigers, the grass being everywhere as tall as a man. Not far from
+Porto Piqueno, to the south-westwards, and in the country of _Orixa_, is
+a sea-port called _Angeli_[414]. It was formerly a separate kingdom, the
+king being a great friend to strangers; but was afterwards taken by the
+king of Patna, who did not enjoy it long, being himself conquered by the
+king of Delhi, Agra, and Cambaia, Zelabdim Echebar. Orissa is six days
+journey south-westwards from _Satagan_. In this place there is much,
+rice, and cloth made of cotton; likewise great store of cloth made of
+grass, which they call _Yerva_, resembling silk, of which they make
+excellent cloth, which is sent to India and other places[415]. To this
+haven of _Ingelly_ there come many ships every year out of India,
+Negapatnam, Sumatra, Malacca, and many other places, and load from hence
+great quantities of rice, much cotton cloths, sugar and long pepper, and
+great store of butter and other provisions for India[416]. Satagan is a
+very fair city for one belonging to the Moors, and is very plentiful in
+all things. In Bengal they have every day a great market or fair, called
+_chandeau_, in one place or other, and they have many boats called
+_pericose_, with which they go from place to place to buy rice and many
+other things. These boats are rowed by 24 or 26 oars, and are of great
+burden, but are quite open. The gentiles hold the water of the Ganges in
+great reverence; for even if they have good water close at hand, they
+will send for water from the Ganges at a great distance. If they have
+not enough of it to drink, they will sprinkle a little of it upon
+themselves, thinking it very salutary.
+
+[Footnote 412: More accurately 22° 55' 20" N. and long. 88° 28' E. Hoogly
+stands on the western branch of the Ganges, called the Hoogly river,
+about twenty miles direct north from Calcutta.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 413: We thus are enabled to discover nearly the situation of
+Satagan or Satigan, to have been on the Hoogly river, probably where
+Chinsura now stands, or it may have been Chandernagor.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 414: Injelly, at the mouth of a small river which falls into
+the Hoogly, very near its discharge into the bay of Bengal. Injelly is
+not now considered as in Orissa, but in the district of Hoogly belonging
+to Bengal, above forty miles from the frontiers--E.]
+
+[Footnote 415: A similar cloth may be made of the long grass which grows
+in Virginia.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+[Footnote 416: India seems always here limited to the Malabar
+coast.--E.]
+
+From Satagan I travelled by the country of the King of Tippara, or
+_Porto Grande_[417]. The _Mogores_ or _Mogen_ [Moguls] have almost
+continual wars with Tiperah; the Mogen of the kingdom of _Recon_ and
+_Rame_, are stronger than the King of Tiperah, so that Cittigong or
+Porto Grande is often under the dominion of the king of _Recon_[418].
+There is a country four days journey from _Couche_ called
+_Bottanter_[419], the principal city of which is _Bottia_, and the king
+is called _Dermain_. The people are tall, strong, and very swift. Many
+merchants come here out of China, and it is said even from Muscovy and
+Tartary, to purchase musk, _cambals_, agates, silk, pepper, and saffron,
+like the saffron of Persia[420]. This country is very great, being not
+less than three months journey in extent, and contains many high
+mountains, one of them so steep and high that it may be perfectly seen
+at the distance of six days journey[421]. There are people on these
+mountains having ears a span long, and they call such as have not long
+ears asses. They say that from these mountains _they see ships sailing
+on the sea_, but know not whence they come nor whither they go. There
+are merchants who come out of the east from under the sun, which is from
+China, having no beards, who say their country is warm; but others come
+from the north, on the other side of the mountains, where it is very
+cold. These merchants from the north are apparelled in woollen cloth and
+hats, with close white hose or breeches and boots, who come from Muscovy
+or Tartary. These report that they have excellent horses in their
+country, but very small; some individuals possessing four, five, or six
+hundred horses and cattle. These people live mostly on milk and flesh.
+They cut off the tails of their cows, and sell them very dear, as they
+are in high request in those parts. The rump is only a span long, but
+the hair is a yard in length. These tails are used for show, to hang
+upon the heads of elephants, and are much sought after in Pegu and
+China.
+
+[Footnote 417: Perhaps this ought to have been, by the country of Tipera
+_to_ Porto Grande. Porto Grande, formerly called Chittigong, is now
+called Islamabad, and is in the district of Chittigong, the most
+easterly belonging to Bengal.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 418: Aracan is certainly here meant by _Recon_; of _Rame_
+nothing can be made, unless Brama, or Birmah be meant.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 419: _Bottanter_ almost certainly means Bootan. Of _Bottia_ we
+know nothing, but it is probably meant to indicate the capital.
+_Dermain_ may possibly be some corruption of _Deb raja_, the title of
+the sovereign. It is obvious from this passage, that _Couche_ must have
+been to the south of Bootan, and was perhaps Coch-beyhar, a town and
+district in the north-east of Bengal, near the Bootan frontier.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 420: The saffon of Persia of the text may perhaps mean
+_turmeric_. The cambals may possibly mean camblets.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 421: These seem to be the mountains of Imaus, called Cumao by
+the natives.--_Hakluyt_.
+
+The Himmaleh mountains, dividing Bootan from Thibet, said to be visible
+from the plains of Bengal at the distance of 150 miles.--E.]
+
+From Chittigong in Bengal, I went to _Bacola_[422], the king of which
+country is a Gentile of an excellent disposition, who is particularly
+fond of shooting with a gun. His country is large and fertile, having
+great abundance of rice, and manufactures much silk, and cloths of
+cotton. The houses of this city are good and well built, with large
+streets. The people go naked, except a cloth round their waists, and the
+women wear many silver hoops about their necks and arms, and rings of
+silver, copper, and ivory about their legs. From thence I went to
+_Serrepore_ upon the Ganges, the king or rajah of which is called
+Chondery. They are all hereabouts in rebellion against the great Mogul,
+for there are so many rivers and islands that they escape from one to
+another, so that his horsemen cannot prevail against them. Great store
+of cotton cloth is made here. _Sinnergan_ is a town six leagues from
+_Serrepore_, where the best and finest cotton cloth of all the east is
+made[423]. The chief king of all those countries is called Isa-khan,
+being supreme over all the other kings or rajahs, and is a great friend
+to the Christians. Here, as in most parts of India, the houses are very
+small and covered with straw, having a few mats hung round the walls and
+over the door-way, to keep out tigers and foxes. They live on rice,
+milk, and fruits, eating no flesh and killing no animals; and though
+many of them are very rich, their sole article of dress is a small cloth
+before them. From hence they send great quantities of cotton cloths and
+much rice, all over India, Pegu, Malacca, Sumatra, and other places.
+
+[Footnote 422: Perhaps Pucouloe, a place of some size near Davas between
+the Ganges and Burhampooter rivers.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 423: Serampoor on the Hoogly river agrees at least in sound
+with the Serrepore of the text; but, from the context, I rather suspect
+Serrepore to have stood among the numerous islands of the great eastern
+Ganges, in the province of Dava, and near the junction of the Ganges and
+Burhampooter or Megna rivers. Of Sinnergan I can make nothing, only that
+it must have stood in the same district.--E.]
+
+I went from Serrepore the 28th of November 1586 for Pegu, in a small
+ship or foist, commanded by one Albert Caravallos, and sailing down the
+Ganges, we passed by the island of Sundiva, Porto grande, or Chittigong,
+in the country of Tiperah, and the kingdom of Recon and Mogen[424],
+leaving all on our left hand, our course being south by east, with the
+wind at north-west, which brought us to the bar of Negrais in Pegu. Had
+we met with a foul wind, we must have thrown many things overboard, for
+we were so lumbered with people and goods, even on the deck, that there
+was scarce a place to sit down upon. From Bengal to Pegu is 90 leagues.
+We entered the bar of Negrais, [at the mouth of the western branch of
+the river of Ava], which is an excellent bar, having four fathoms water
+where shallowest. Three days afterwards we came to Cosmin, a very pretty
+town, pleasantly situated and abounding in all things. The people are
+tall and well disposed; the women white, round faced, and having small
+eyes. The houses are high built, set upon great high posts, and they go
+up to them by means of ladders for fear of the tigers, which are very
+numerous. The country is very fertile, abounding in great figs, oranges,
+coconuts, and other fruits. The land is very high on the sea coast, but
+after getting within the bar, it is very low and much intersected with
+rivers, so that they go everywhere in boats, which they call _paraos_,
+in which many of them dwell with their wives and children.
+
+[Footnote 424: Recon has already been supposed to be Aracan, which is
+now quite obvious; but in what manner Mogen may refer to Ava, the next
+country to the south, does not appear.--E.]
+
+From the bar of Negrais to the city of Pegu, is ten days journey by the
+rivers. We went from _Cosmin_ to Pegu in paraos or boats, and passing up
+the river we came to _Medon_, a very pretty town, having a wonderful
+number of paraos, for they dwell in them, and hold markets on the water.
+In rowing up and down with their commodities in these boats, they have a
+great _sombrero_ or umbrella over their heads, to defend them from the
+sun, as broad and round as a great cart wheel, made of the leaves of the
+coco or the fig tree, which are very light. From Medon we went to Dela,
+where there are 18 or 20 great long houses, where they tame and keep
+many elephants belonging to the king, as elephants are caught in the
+wilderness near this place. From Dela we went to _Cirian_, [Siriam] a
+good town having an excellent sea-port, to which come many ships from
+Mecca, Malacca, Sumatra, and other places; and there the ships discharge
+their cargoes, and send up their goods in paraos to Pegu. From Siriam we
+went to _Macao_, a pretty town, where we left the boats, and in the
+morning taking _delingeges_, which are a kind of couches made of cords
+and quilted cloth, carried on a _stang_, or long pole, by three or four
+men, we came to Pegu the same day.
+
+Pegu is a great strong and fair city, having walls of stone and great
+ditches all round about. It consists of two towns, the old and the new.
+In the old town dwell all the stranger merchants, and very many native
+merchants, and all the goods are sold in the old town, which is very
+large, and hath many extensive suburbs all round about it, all the
+houses being of bamboo canes and covered with straw. In your house,
+however, you have a warehouse, which they call a _godown_, built of
+bricks, in which to keep your goods, as often the city takes fire, and
+four or five hundred houses are burnt down, so that these _godowns_ are
+very useful to save your goods. The king with all his nobility and
+gentry dwell in the new town, which is a great and populous city,
+entirely square with fair walls, and a great ditch all round about full
+of water, in which are many crocodiles. It has twenty gates, five on
+each side of the square, all built of stone. There are also many turrets
+for centinels, made of wood and splendidly gilded. The streets are the
+handsomest I ever saw, all as straight as a line from one gate to the
+other, and so broad that ten or twelve men may ride abreast through
+them. On both sides, at every door, there are palmer trees planted,
+which bear coco-nuts, and which make a fine shew as well as a commodious
+shade, so that the people may walk all day in the shade. The houses are
+of wood, covered with tiles.
+
+The palace of the king stands in the middle of this city, and is walled
+and ditched all round, all the houses within being of wood very
+sumptuously gilded, and the fore-front is of very rich workmanship, all
+gilded in a very costly manner. The pagoda, or house in which his idols
+stand, is covered with tiles of silver, and all the walls are gilt over
+with gold. Within the first gate of the palace is a very large court, on
+both sides of which are the houses for the king's elephants, which are
+wonderfully large and handsome, and are trained for war and for the
+king's service. Among the rest, he has four white elephants, which are a
+great rarity, no other king having any but he; and were any other king
+to have any, he would send for it, and if refused would go to war for
+it, and would rather lose a great part of his kingdom than not have the
+elephant. When any white elephant is brought to the king, all the
+merchants in the city are commanded to go and visit him, on which
+occasion each individual makes a present of half a ducat, which amounts
+to a good round sum, as there are a vast many merchants, after which
+present you may go and see them at your pleasure, although they stand in
+the king's house. Among his titles, the king takes that of king of the
+white elephants. They do great honour and service to these white
+elephants, every one of them having a house gilded with gold, and
+getting their food in vessels of gilt silver. Every day when they go to
+the river to wash, each goes under a canopy of cloth of gold or silk,
+carried by six or eight men, and eight or ten men go before each,
+playing on drums, _shawms_, and other instruments. When each has washed
+and is come out of the river, he has a gentleman to wash his feet in a
+silver basin, which office is appointed by the king. There is no such
+account made of the black elephants, be they never so great, and some of
+them are wonderfully large and handsome, some being nine cubits high.
+
+The king has a very large place, about a mile from Pegu, for catching
+wild elephants, in a great grove or wood, having a fair court in the
+middle. There are many huntsmen, who go into the wilderness with
+she-elephants, trained for the purpose, each huntsman having five or six
+which are anointed with a certain ointment to entice the wild males to
+follow them. When they have brought a wild elephant within their snares,
+the hunters send word to the town, on which many horsemen and footmen go
+out, and force the wild elephant to enter into a narrow way leading to
+the inner inclosure, and when the he and she are in, then is the gate
+shut upon them. They then get the female out, and when the male finds
+himself alone and entrapped, he cries out and sheds tears, running
+against the enclosure, which is made of strong trees, and some of them
+break their tusks in endeavouring to force their way out. The people
+then goad him with pointed canes, till they force him into a narrow
+stall, in which he is securely fastened with strong ropes about his body
+and legs, and is left there for three or four days without food or
+drink. Then they bring a female to him, with food and drink, and unbind
+the ropes, and he becomes tame in three or four days. When they take the
+elephants to war, they fix a frame of wood on their backs with great
+ropes, upon which sit four or six men, who fight with guns, bows and
+arrows, darts, and other weapons; and it is said that the elephant's
+hide is so thick that a musket ball will not pierce them, except in some
+tender place.
+
+The weapons of these people are very bad, their swords being short and
+blunt at the points. They have arquebusses also, but they shoot very
+badly with them. The king keeps great state, sitting in public twice
+every day, having all his nobles, which they call _shemines_, sitting on
+each side at a good distance, and a numerous guard on the outside of
+all, so that the hall, or court is very large. If any one wish to speak
+to the king, he maketh three profound reverences, when he enters, in
+the mid way, and when he comes near the king; at each of these he kneels
+down, holds his hands above his head, and bows with his head to the
+ground three times. He then sits down to speak to the king, and if
+favoured is allowed to come near, within three or four paces, but
+otherwise is made to sit at a greater distance. When the king goes to
+war he is accompanied by a great military force. While I was in Pegu, he
+went to Odia, in the kingdom of Siam, with 300,000 men and 5000
+elephants. His particular guard was 30,000. When the king rides abroad,
+he is accompanied by a strong guard and many nobles, and often rides on
+an elephant having a great castle on its back superbly gilded; sometimes
+he travels on a great frame of wood like a horse-litter, having a small
+house or canopy upon it, covered over head, and open at the sides, which
+is all splendidly gilded with gold, and adorned with many rubies and
+sapphires, of which he hath an infinite store, as a vast many of them
+are found in this country. This couch or litter is called _serrion_ in
+their language, and is carried on the shoulders of 16 or 18 men. On
+these occasions, there is much triumphing and shouting made before the
+king, by great numbers of men and women.
+
+This king has little force by sea, having very few ships. He has houses
+quite full of gold and silver, both of which are often coming in to him,
+but very little goes out again, so that he makes little account of it,
+and this vast treasury is always open to inspection, in a great walled
+court with two gates, which are always open to all men. In this court
+there are four houses very richly gilded and covered with leaden roofs,
+in each of which is a pagod or idol, of huge stature and vast value. In
+the first of these houses is the image of a king, all in gold, having a
+golden crown on his head richly set with large rubies and sapphires, and
+round about are the images of four children all in gold. In the second
+house is the image of a man in silver, of prodigious size, as high as a
+house, insomuch that the foot is as long as the stature of a man. This
+figure is in a sitting posture, having a crown on its head, richly
+adorned with precious stones. In the third house is the statue of a man
+in brass, still larger than the former, with a rich crown on its head.
+In the fourth house is another brazen statue, still larger than the
+former, having also a crown on its head richly adorned with jewels. In
+another court not far from this, there are four other pagodas or idols
+of wonderful size, made of copper, which were formed in the places in
+which they now stand, being of such enormous size that they could not be
+removed. These stand in four separate houses, and are gilded all over
+except their heads, which resemble black-a-moors. The expences of these
+people in gilding their images are quite enormous. The king has only one
+wife, but above 300 concubines, by whom he is said to have 80 or 90
+children. He sits in judgment every day, on which occasion the
+applicants use no speech, but give up their supplications in writing,
+being upon long slips of the leaves of a tree, a yard long and about two
+inches broad, written with a pointed iron or stile like a bodkin. He who
+gives in his application, stands at some distance carrying a present. If
+his application is to be complied with, his present is accepted and his
+request granted; but if his suit be denied he returns home with his
+present.
+
+There are few commodities in India which serve for trade at Pegu, except
+opium of Cambaia, painted cottons from San Thome or Masulipatam, and
+white cloth of Bengal, vast quantities of which are sold here. They
+bring likewise much cotton yarn, dyed red with a root called _saia_,
+which never loses its colour, a great quantity of which is sold yearly
+in Pegu at a good profit. The ships from Bengal, San Thome, and
+Masulipatam, come to the bar of Negrais and to Cosmin. To Martaban,
+another sea-port in the kingdom of Pegu, many ships come from Malacca,
+with sandal-wood, porcelains, and other wares of China, camphor of
+Borneo, and pepper from Acheen in the island of Sumatra. To Siriam,
+likewise a port of Pegu, ships come from Mecca with woollen cloth,
+scarlet, velvets, opium, and other goods.
+
+In Pegu there are eight brokers called _tareghe_, which are bound to
+sell your goods at the prices they are worth, receiving as their fee two
+in the hundred, for which they are bound to make good the price, because
+you sell your goods on their word. If the broker do not pay you on the
+day appointed, you may take him home to your house and keep him there,
+which is a great shame for him. And, if he do not now pay you
+immediately, you may take his wife, children, and slaves, and bind them
+at your door in the sun; for such is the law of the country. Their
+current money is of brass, which they call _ganza_, with which you may
+buy gold, silver, rubies, musk, and all other things. Gold and silver is
+reckoned merchandise, and is worth sometimes more and sometimes less,
+like all other wares, according to the supply and demand. The ganza or
+brass money goes by weight, which they call a _biza_; and commonly this
+biza is worth, in our way of reckoning, about half a crown or somewhat
+less. The merchandises in Pegu are, gold, silver, rubies, sapphires,
+spinels, musk, benzoin, frankincense, long pepper, tin, lead, copper,
+_lacca_, of which hard sealing-wax is made, rice, wine made of rice,
+[_aruck_,] and some sugar. The elephants eat sugar canes in great
+quantities, or otherwise they might make abundance of sugar.
+
+They consume many canes likewise[425], in making their _varellas_ or
+idol temples, of which there are a prodigious multitude, both large and
+small. These are made round like a sugar loaf, some being as high as a
+church, and very broad beneath, some being a quarter of a mile in
+compass. Within these are all of earth, faced round with stone. In these
+_varellas_ they consume a vast quantity of gold, as they are all gilded
+aloft, and some from top to bottom; and they must be newly gilded every
+ten or twelve years, because the rain washes off the gold, as they all
+stand exposed to the weather. Were it not for the prodigious quantities
+of gold consumed in this manner, it would be very plentiful and cheap in
+Pegu. About two days journey from Pegu there is a _varella_ or pagoda
+called _dogonne_, of wonderful bigness, gilded all over from top to
+bottom, to which the inhabitants of Pegu go in pilgrimage; and near it
+is a house where their talapoins or priests preach to the people. This
+house is fifty five paces long, and hath three _pawnes_ or covered walks
+in it, the roof being supported by forty great gilded pillars, which
+stand between the walks. It is open on all sides, having a vast number
+of small gilded pillars, and the whole is gilded both within and
+without. Round about this there are many fair houses for the pilgrims to
+dwell in, and many goodly houses in which the talapoins preach, which
+are all full of idols or images, both male and female, all gilded with
+gold. This, in my opinion, is the fairest place in the world. It stands
+very high, having four roads leading to it, all planted on each side
+with fruit-trees, so that the people walk in the shade in all these
+avenues, which are each above two miles long. When the grand festival
+of this varella approaches, one can hardly pass any way, on account of
+the great throngs of people, both by land and water, as they flock from
+all parts of the kingdom of Pegu to be present at the festival.
+
+[Footnote 425: Surely the bamboo, not the sugar cane. It may be noticed,
+that almost the whole of this account of Pegu seems to have been
+borrowed from the relation of Cesar Frederick.--E.]
+
+In Pegu, there are many priests or talapoins, as they are called, who
+preach against all abuses, and many people resort to hear them. When
+they enter into the _kiack_, that is to say the holy place or temple,
+there is a great jar of water at the door, having a cock or ladle, and
+there they wash their feet. They then walk in, and lift their hands to
+their heads, first to the preacher, and then to the sun, after which
+they sit down. The talapoins are strangely apparelled, having a brown
+_cambaline_ or thin cloth next their body, above which is another of
+yellow many times doubled or folded over their shoulders, and these two
+are girded round them by a broad girdle. They have a skin of leather
+hung by a string round their necks, on which they sit, bare headed and
+bare footed, as they wear no shoes. Their right arms are all bare, and
+they carry a large _sombrero_ or umbrella over their heads, which
+protects them from the sun in summer, and from the rain in winter.
+
+Before taking their orders, the talapoins go to school till, twenty
+years old or more, and then go before a head talapoin appointed for the
+purpose, called a _rowli_, who is the most learned of the order, who
+examines them many times, whether they will leave their friends,
+foregoing the company of women, and assume the habit of a talapoin. If
+any one be content, he is made to ride through the streets on a horse,
+very richly apparelled, accompanied by many drums and trumpets, to shew
+that he is about to quit the riches and vanity of the world. A few days
+afterwards, he is again carried through the streets, on a thing like a
+horse litter, called _serion_, mounted on the shoulders of ten or twelve
+men, and dressed in the habit of a talapoin, preceded by drums and
+instruments of music, and accompanied by many talapoins and all his
+friends. He is thus carried to his house without side of the town, and
+is there left.
+
+Every individual talapoin has his own house, which is very small, set
+upon six or eight posts, and to which they have to go up by a ladder of
+twelve or fourteen staves. Their houses are mostly by the road sides,
+and among the trees in the woods. They go about, having a great pot of
+wood or fine earthen ware covered, and hung by a broad belt from their
+shoulder, with which they beg their victuals, being rice, fish, and
+herbs. They never ask any thing, but come to the doors, when the people
+presently give them, some one thing and some another, all of which they
+put into their pot, saying they must feed on their alms and be
+contented. Their festivals are regulated by the moon, their chiefest
+being at the new moon, when the people send rice and other things to the
+_kiack_ or church which they frequent, where all the talapoins belonging
+to it meet and eat the victuals that are sent. When the talapoins
+preach, many of their hearers carry gifts to them in the pulpit, while
+preaching, a person sitting beside the preacher to receive these gifts,
+which are divided between them. So far as I could see, they have no
+other ceremonials or religious service, except preaching.
+
+From Pegu I went to _Jamahey_, in the country of the _Langeiannes_, whom
+we call _Jangomes_, which is twenty-five days journey north from
+Pegu[426], in which journey I passed through many fertile and pleasant
+countries, the whole being low land, with many fine rivers; but the
+houses are mean and bad, being built of canes and covered with straw.
+This country has great numbers of wild elephants and buffaloes.
+_Jamahey_ is a large handsome town, well peopled, and the houses are
+well built of stone, with broad streets. The men are strong and well
+made, having a cloth about their middles, bareheaded and with bare feet,
+as in all these countries they wear no shoes. The women are much fairer
+than those of Pegu. In all these countries they have no wheat, living
+entirely on rice, which they make into cakes. To Jamahey there come many
+merchants out of China, bringing great store of musk, gold, silver, and
+many Chinese manufactures. They have here such great abundance of
+provisions, that they do not take the trouble to milk the buffaloes as
+they do in other places. Here there is great abundance of copper and
+benzoin.
+
+[Footnote 426: The names here used are so corrupted as to be utterly
+unintelligible. Twenty-five days journey north from the city of Pegu, or
+perhaps 500 miles, would lead the author into the northern provinces of
+the Birman empire, of which the geography is very little known, perhaps
+into Assan: Yet the _Langeiannes_ may possibly refer to _Lang-shang_ in
+Laos, nearly west from Pegu. _Jamahey_ may be _Shamai_, in the north of
+Laos; near the N.W. frontier of China.--E.]
+
+In these countries, when people are sick, they make a vow to offer meat
+to the devil in case of recovery; and when they recover, they make a
+banquet, with many pipes and drums and other musical instruments,
+dancing all night, and their friends bring gifts of coco-nuts, figs,
+arecas, and other fruits, and with much dancing and rejoicing they
+offer these to the devil, giving him to eat, and then drive him out.
+While dancing and playing, they often cry and hallow aloud, to drive the
+devil away. While sick, a talapoin or two sit every night by the sick
+person, continually singing, to please the devil, that he may not hurt
+them. When any one dies, he is carried on a great frame of wood like a
+tower, having a covering or canopy made of canes all gilded, which is
+carried by fourteen or sixteen men, preceded by drums, pipes, and other
+instruments, and being taken to a place out of the town, the body is
+there burned. On this occasion, the body is accompanied by all the male
+friends, relations, and neighbours of the deceased; and they give the
+talapoins or priests many mats and much cloth. They then return to the
+house, where they feast for two days. After this, the widow, with all
+her neighbours wives, and female friends, goes to the place where her
+husband was burnt, where they sit a certain time lamenting, and then
+gather up all the pieces of bones which have not been burnt to ashes,
+which they bury; they then return home, and thus make an end of
+mourning. On these occasions, the male and female relations shave their
+heads, which is only done for the death of a friend, as they greatly
+esteem their hair.
+
+_Caplan_, the place where the rubies, sapphires and spinels are found,
+is six days journey from Ava in the kingdom of Pegu. There are here many
+great hills out of which they are dug, but no person is allowed to go to
+the pits, except those employed in digging. In Pegu, and in all the
+countries of Ava, Langeiannes, Siam, and of the Birmans, the men wear
+little round balls in their privities, some having two and some three,
+being put in below the skin, which is cut for that purpose, one on one
+side and another on the other, which they do when 25 or 30 years of age.
+These were devised that they might not abuse the male sex, to which
+shocking vice they were formerly much addicted. It was also ordained,
+that the women should not have more than three cubits of cloth in their
+under garments, which likewise are open before, and so tight, that when
+they walk they shew the leg bare above the knee.
+
+The _bramas_, or birmans of the kings country, for the king is a birman,
+have their legs or bellies, or some other part of their body according
+to their fancy made black by pricking the skin, and rubbing in _anile_
+or indigo, or some other black powder, which continues ever after; and
+this is considered as a great honour, none being allowed to do this but
+the birmans who are of kin to the king. Those people wear no beards, but
+pull out the hair from their faces with small pincers made for the
+purpose. Some leave 16 or 20 hairs growing together, some on one part of
+the face and some on another, and pull out all the rest; every man
+carrying his pincers with him, and pulling out the hairs as fast as they
+appear. If they see a man with a beard they wonder at him. Both men and
+women have their teeth black; for they say a dog has white teeth, and
+therefore they have theirs black. When the Peguers have a law-suit that
+is difficult to determine, they place two long canes upright in the
+water where it is very deep, and both parties go into the water beside
+the poles, having men present to judge them; they both dive, and he who
+remains longest under water gains his suit.
+
+The 10th of January, I went from Pegu to Malacca, passing many of the
+sea-ports of Pegu, as Martaban, the island of _Tavi_ whence all India is
+supplied with tin, Tanaserim, the island of Junkselon, and many others.
+I came on the 8th of February to Malacca, where the Portuguese have a
+castle near the sea. The country without the town belongs to the Malays,
+who are a proud kind of people, going naked with a cloth about their
+waists, and a small roll of cloth round their heads. To this place come
+many ships from China, the Moluccas, Banda, Timor, and many other
+islands of the Javas, bringing great store of spices, drugs, diamonds,
+and other precious stones. The voyages to many of these islands belong
+to the captain of Malacca, so that no one can go there without his
+licence, by which he draws large sums of money every year. The
+Portuguese at Malacca are often at war with the king of Acheen in the
+island of Sumatra; from whence comes great store of pepper and other
+spices yearly to Pegu, Mecca, and other places.
+
+When the Portuguese go from Macao in China to Japan, they carry much
+white silk, gold, musk, and porcelain, and bring from thence nothing but
+silver. A great carak goes on this voyage every year, and brings from
+thence about 600,000 crusadoes: and all this silver of Japan, and
+200,000 more which they bring yearly from India, they employ to great
+advantage in China, whence they bring gold, musk, silk, copper,
+porcelains, and many very costly articles richly gilded. When the
+Portuguese go to Canton in China to trade, they are only permitted to
+remain there a certain number of days. When they enter the gates of the
+city, they have to set down their names in a book, and when they go out
+at night must put out their names, as they are not allowed to remain in
+the town all night, but must sleep in their boats. When their time of
+stay is expired, if any one remain, he is liable to be imprisoned and
+very ill used, as the Chinese are very suspicious and do not trust
+strangers; and it is even thought that the king of China does not know
+of any strangers being admitted into his dominions. It is likewise
+credibly reported, that the people of China see their king very seldom,
+or not at all, and may not even look up to the place where he sits. When
+he goes abroad, he is carried in a great chair or _serion_, splendidly
+gilded, on which is made a small house with a lattice to look through,
+so that he cannot be seen but may see about him. While he is passing,
+all the people kneel with their faces to the ground, holding their hands
+over their heads, and must not look up till he is past.
+
+In China, when in mourning, the people wear white thread shoes and straw
+hats. A man mourns two years for his wife, the wife three years for her
+husband, the son a year for his father, and two years for his mother.
+During the whole time of mourning the dead body is kept in the house,
+the bowels being taken out, filled with _chaunam_ or lime, and put into
+a coffin. When the time expires, it is carried out with much playing and
+piping, and burned. After this they pull off their mourning weeds, and
+may marry again when they please. All the people of China, Japan, and
+Cochin-china, write downwards, from the top of the page to the bottom
+using a fine pencil made of dogs or cats hair.
+
+_Laban_ is an island among the Javas, whence come the diamonds of _the
+new water_. They are there found in the rivers, as the king will not
+allow them to be dug for in the rock. _Jamba_ is another island among
+the Javas, from whence also diamonds are brought. In this island the
+king has a mass of earth growing in the middle of the river, which is
+gold; and when he is in want of gold, they cut part of this earth and
+melt it, whereof cometh gold. This mass of earth is only to be seen once
+a year, in the month of April, when the water is low. _Bima_ is another
+island among the Javas, where the women labour as our men do in England,
+and the men keep the house or go where they will[427].
+
+[Footnote 427: All the names of these islands among the Javas, or isles
+of Sunda are unintelligibly corrupt.--E.]
+
+The 28th of March 1588, I returned from Malacca to Martaban, and thence
+to Pegu, where I remained the second time till the 17th of September,
+and then went to Cosmin where I took shipping; and escaping many dangers
+from contrary winds, it pleased God that we arrived in Bengal in
+November. I had to remain there, for want of a passage, till the 3d
+February 1589, when I embarked for Cochin. In this voyage we suffered
+great hardships for want of water; for the weather was very hot, and we
+were many on board, merchants and passengers, and we had many calms. It
+pleased God that we arrived in Ceylon on the 6th of March, where we
+staid five days, to furnish ourselves with water and necessary
+provisions.
+
+Ceylon is a beautiful and fertile island, yet by reason of continual
+wars with the king, every thing is very dear, as he will not suffer any
+thing to be brought to the castle belonging to the Portuguese, so that
+they are often in great want of victuals, and they are forced to bring
+their provisions every year from Bengal. The king is called rajah and is
+very powerful, for he comes sometimes against Columbo, where the
+Portuguese have their fort, with 100,000 men and many elephants. But
+they are all naked people, though many of them are excellent marksmen
+with their muskets. When the king talks with any man, he stands on one
+leg, setting the other foot on his knee, with his sword in his hand; as,
+according to their customs the king never sits. He is dressed in a fine
+painted cotton cloth wrapped about his middle; his hair long and bound
+about his head with a small fine cloth, and all the rest of his body
+naked. His guard is a thousand men, which stand round about him. They
+are all Chingalese, who are said to be the best kind of the Malabars.
+They have very large ears, as the larger they are the more honourable
+they are esteemed, some being a span long. They burn the wood of the
+cinnamon tree, which gives a pleasant scent. In this island there is
+great store of rubies, sapphires, and spinels of the best kind, but the
+king will not allow the inhabitants to dig for them, lest they should
+tempt his enemies to make war upon him and deprive him of his dominions.
+There are no horses in this country, but many elephants, which are not
+so large as those of Pegu, which are of prodigious size; yet it is said
+all other elephants are afraid of those of Ceylon, and refuse to fight
+them, though small. The women of this island wear a cloth round their
+middles, reaching only to the knees, all the rest of their bodies being
+bare. Both men and women are black and very little. Their houses are
+small, being constructed of the branches of the palmer or coco tree, and
+covered with the leaves of the same tree.
+
+The 11th of March we departed from Ceylon and doubled Cape Comorin. Not
+far from thence, between Ceylon and the main-land of India at
+Negapatnam, they fish for pearls every year, whence all India, Cambaya,
+and Bengal are supplied. But these pearls are _not so orient_ [are not
+so round or of so fine a water] as those of Bahrain in the gulph of
+Persia. From Cape Comorin we went to Coulan, a fort of the Portuguese,
+whence comes great store of pepper for Portugal, as frequently one of
+the caraks is laden here. We arrived at Cochin on the 22d of March,
+where we found the weather very warm, and a great scarcity of
+provisions, as neither corn nor rice grows here, having mostly to be
+supplied from Bengal. They have here very bad water, as the river is far
+off; and by this bad water many of the people are like lepers, and many
+have their legs swollen as big as a mans waist, so that they can hardly
+walk. The people here are Malabars, of the race of the Nairs of Calicut,
+who differ much from the other Malabars. These have their heads very
+full of hair, bound up with a string, above which is a great bush of
+hair. The men are tall and strong, and excellent archers, using a long
+bow and long arrows, which are their best weapons; yet they have some
+fire-arms among them, which they handle very badly.
+
+In this country pepper grows, being trained up a tree or pole. It is
+like our ivy berry, but something longer, like an ear of wheat. At first
+the bunches are green, but as they become ripe they are cut off and
+dried. The leaf is much smaller and thinner than that of ivy. The houses
+of the inhabitants are very small, and are covered with the leaves of
+the coco-tree. The men are of moderate stature, but the women very
+little; all black, with a cloth about their middles, hanging down to
+their hams, all the rest of their bodies being naked. They have horribly
+great ears, with many rings set with pearls and other stones. All the
+pepper sold in Calicut, and the coarse cinnamon [cassia] grow in this
+country. The best cinnamon comes from Ceylon, and is peeled from fine
+young trees. They have here many palmers, or coco-nut trees, which is
+their chief food, as it yields both meat and drink, together with many
+other useful things, as I said formerly.
+
+The nairs belonging to the Samorin or king of Calicut, which are
+Malabars, are always at war with the Portuguese, though their sovereign
+be at peace with them; but his people go to sea to rob and plunder.
+Their chief captain is called _Cogi Alli_, who hath three castles under
+his authority. When the Portuguese complain to the Samorin, he pretends
+that he does not send them out, but he certainly consents to their
+going. They range all along the coast from Ceylon to Goa, and go in
+parties of four or five paraos or boats together, in each of which are
+fifty or sixty men, who immediately board every vessel they come up
+with, doing much harm on that coast, and every year take many foists and
+barks belonging to the Portuguese. Besides the nairs, many of the people
+in these paraos are Moors. The dominions of the Samorin begin twelve
+leagues from Cochin and reach to near Goa.
+
+I remained in Cochin eight months, till the 2d of November, not being
+able to procure a passage in all that time; whereas if I had arrived two
+days sooner I should have got a passage immediately. From Cochin I went
+to Goa, which is an hundred leagues; and after remaining three days I
+went to Chaul, sixty leagues from Goa. I remained twenty-three days at
+Chaul, making all necessary preparations for the prosecution of my
+voyage. I then sailed for Ormus, four hundred leagues from Goa, where I
+had to wait fifty days for a passage to Basora.
+
+From Basora I went up the Euphrates and Tigris to Babylon or Bagdat,
+being drawn up most of the way by the strength of men, hauling by a long
+rope. From Bagdat I went by land to Mosul, which stands near the scite
+of the ancient Nineveh, which is all ruinated and destroyed. From Mosul
+I travelled to Merdin in Armenia, where a people called _Cordies_ or
+Curds now dwell. I went thence to Orfa, a fair town having a fair
+fountain full of fish, where the Mahometans hold many opinions, and
+practice many ceremonies in reference to Abraham, who they allege once
+dwelt there. From thence I went to Bir, where I crossed the Euphrates,
+and continued my journey to Aleppo; whence, after staying some months
+for a caravan, I went to Tripolis in Syria. Finding an English ship
+there, I had a prosperous voyage to London, where by the blessing of God
+I arrived safe on the 29th of April 1591, having been eight years absent
+from my native country.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Before ending this my book, I have thought right to declare some things
+which are produced in India and the countries farther east[428].
+
+[Footnote 428: This account of the commodities of India so very much
+resembles that already given in the perigrinations of Cesar Frederick,
+Vol. VII. p. 204, as to seem in a great measure borrowed from it, though
+with some variations.--E.]
+
+Pepper grows in many parts of India, especially about Cochin; much of it
+growing wild in the fields among the bushes without cultivation, and is
+gathered when ripe. When first gathered it is green, but becomes black
+by drying in the sun. Ginger is found in many parts of India, growing
+like our garlic, the root being the ginger. Cloves come from the Molucca
+islands, the tree resembling our bay. Nutmegs and mace grow together on
+the same tree, and come from the island of Banda, the tree being like
+our walnut-tree, but smaller. White sandal wood comes from the island of
+Timor. It is very sweet scented, and is in great request among the
+natives of India, who grind it up with a little water, and then anoint
+their bodies with it, as a grateful perfume. Camphor is esteemed very
+precious among the Indians, and is sold dearer than gold, so that I
+think none of it comes to Christendom. That which is compounded comes
+from China: But the best, which grows in canes, comes from the great
+island of Borneo.
+
+Lignuo aloes are from Cochin China. Benjamin, or Benzoin, comes from
+Siam and Jangomes[429]. Long pepper grows in Bengal, Pegu, and the
+Javas. Musk comes from Tartary[430], Amber[431] is supposed by most to
+come out of the sea, as it is all found on the shore.
+
+[Footnote 429: In Cesar Fredericks peregrinations, Benzoin is said to
+come from Siam and _Assi_, or Assam, which confirms the conjecture
+already made, of Langeiannes and the Jangomes referring to Assam.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 430: Fitch here repeats the ridiculous, story respecting the
+fabrication of musk, already given by Cesar Frederick.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 431: Certainly Ambergris, the origin of which from the
+Spermaceti whale has been formerly noticed in this work.--E.]
+
+Rubies, sapphires and spinels are found in Pegu. Diamonds are found in
+several places, as in Bisnagur, Agra, Delhi, and the Javan islands. The
+best pearls come from the isle of Bahrein in the gulf of Persia; and an
+inferior sort from the fisheries near Ceylon, and from Ainan, a large
+island off the southern coast of China. Spodium and many other drugs
+come from Cambaia or Gujrat, commonly called Guzerat.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Supplement to the Journey of Fitch_[432].
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+In Hakluyt's collection, p. 235--376, are given letters from queen
+Elizabeth to Akbar Shah, Mogul emperor of Hindostan, called there
+Zelabdim Echebar, king of Cambaia, and to the king or emperor of China,
+dated 1583. These are merely complimentary, and for the purpose of
+recommending John Newbery and his company to the protection and favour
+of these eastern sovereigns, in case of visiting their dominions; and
+need not therefore be inserted in this place. The following articles
+however, are of a different description, consisting of several letters
+from John Newbery and Ralph Fitch to different friends in England; and
+of an extract from the work of John Huighen Van Linschoten, who was in
+Goa in December 1583, upon their arrival at that emporium of the
+Portuguese trade in India, affording a full confirmation of the
+authenticity of the expedition thus far.--E.
+
+[Footnote 432: Hakluyt, II. 375--381. and 399--402.]
+
+
+No. 1.--_Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Richard Hakluyt of Oxford,
+author of the Voyages, &c._
+
+Right well beloved, and my assured good friend, I heartily commend me
+unto you, hoping that you are in good health, &c. After we set sail from
+Gravesend on the 13th of February, we remained on our coast till the
+11th of March, when we sailed from Falmouth, and never anchored till our
+arrival in the road of Tripoli in Syria, on the 30th of April. After
+staying fourteen days there, we came to this place, Aleppo, on the 20th
+of this present month of May, where we have now been eight days, and in
+five or six days, with Gods help, we go from hence towards the Indies.
+Since my arrival at Tripoli, I have made diligent inquiry, both there
+and here, for the book of Cosmography of Abulfeda Ismael, but cannot
+hear of it. Some say that it may possibly be had in Persia; but I shall
+not fail to make inquiry for it both in Babylon and Balsara, [Bagdat and
+Basora] and if I can find it in either of these places, shall send it
+you from thence. The letter which you gave me to copy out, which came
+from Mr Thomas Stevens in Goa, as also the note you gave me of Francis
+Fernandez the Portuguese, I brought away with me inadvertantly among
+other writings; both of which I now return you inclosed.
+
+Great preparations are making here for the wars in Persia; and already
+is gone from hence the pacha of a town called _Rahemet_, and shortly
+after the pachas of Tripoli and Damascus are to follow; but they have
+not in all above 6000 men. They go to a town called _Asmerome_,
+[Erzerum] three days journey from Trebesond, where they are to meet with
+sundry captains and soldiers from Constantinople and other places, to go
+altogether into Persia. This year many men go for these wars, as has
+been the case every year since they began, now about eight years, but
+very few return again; although they have had the advantage over the
+Persians, and have won several castles and strong holds in that country.
+
+Make my hearty commendations to Mr Peter Guillame, Mr Philip Jones, Mr
+Walter Warner, and all the rest of our friends. Mr Fitch sends his
+hearty commendations; and so I commit you to the tuition of Almighty
+God, whom I pray to bless and keep you, and send us a joyful meeting.
+From Aleppo, the 28th of May 1583.
+
+Your loving friend to command in all that I may, JOHN NEWBERY.
+
+No. 2.--_Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore of London_.
+
+My last was sent you on the 25th of February last from Deal out of the
+Downs, after which, in consequence, of contrary winds, we remained on
+the coast of England till the 11th March, when we sailed from Falmouth.
+The 13th the wind came contrary with a great storm, by which some of our
+goods were wet; but, God be thanked, no great hurt was done. After this,
+we sailed with a fair wind within the Straits, continuing our voyage and
+anchoring no where till the 30th of April, when we arrived in the road
+of Tripoli in Syria, which was a good passage, God make us thankful for
+it. We left Tripoli on the 14th of this month of May, and arrived here
+at Aleppo on the 20th; and with Gods help we begin our voyage to-morrow
+for Bagdat and Basora, and so to India.
+
+Our friend Mr Barret, commendeth him to you, and sent you a _ball_
+[bale?] of nutmegs in the Emanuel, for the small trifles you sent him,
+which I hope you have long since received. He has also by his letter
+informed you how he sold these things, whereof I say nothing, neither
+having seen the account nor demanded it; for, ever since our coming
+hither, he has been constantly occupied about the dispatch of the ship
+and about our voyage, and I likewise in purchasing things here to carry
+to Basora and India. We have bought coral to the value of 1200 ducats,
+amber for 400, and some soap and broken glass and other small matters,
+which I hope will serve well for the places we are going to. All the
+rest of the account of the bark Reinolds was sent home in the Emanuel,
+which amounted to 3600 ducats, being L.200 more than they were rated; as
+Mr Staper rated them at L.1100, and it is L.1300; so that our part is
+L.200, besides such profit as it shall please God to send thereof;
+wherefore you would do well to speak to Mr Staper for the account.
+
+If you could resolve to travel for three or four years, I would advise
+you to come here, or to go to Cairo, if any go there. For we doubt not,
+if you were to remain here three or four months, you would like the
+place so well, that I think you would not desire to return in less than
+three or four years; as, were it my chance to remain in any place out of
+England, I would choose this before all other that I know. My reason is,
+that the place is healthful and pleasant, and the profits good; and
+doubtless the profits will be better hereafter, things being carried on
+in an orderly manner. In every ship, the fourth part of her cargo should
+come in money, which would help to put off the rest of our commodities
+at a good price. It were also proper that two good ships should come
+together, for mutual assistance, in which case the danger of the voyage
+would be as little as from London to Antwerp.
+
+Mr Giles Porter and Mr Edmund Porter went from Tripoli in a small bark
+to Jaffa, the same day that we came from thence, which was the 14th of
+this month of May, so that I have no doubt they are long since in
+Jerusalem. God send them and us a safe return. At this instant, I have
+received the account from Mr Barret, and the rest of the rings, with 22
+ducats and 2 medins in ready money; so there remaineth nothing in his
+hands but a few books, and I left certain small trifles with Thomas
+Bostocke, which I pray you to demand. From Aleppo, the 29th May 1583.
+
+
+No. 3.--_Letter from Mr John Newbery to the same_.
+
+My last was of the 29th May from Aleppo, sent by George Gill, purser of
+the Tiger. We left that place on the 31st, and came to Feluchia, which
+is one days journey from Babylon [Bagdat,] on the 19th of June. Yet some
+of our company came not hither till the 30th of June, for want of camels
+to carry our goods; for by reason of the great heats at this time of the
+year, camels are very hard to be got. Since our coming here we have
+found very scanty sales, but are told our commodities will sell well in
+winter, which I pray God may be the case. I think cloth, kersies, and
+tin have never been here so low as now. Yet, if I had here as much ready
+money as our goods are worth, I would not doubt to make a very good
+profit of the voyage here and at Basora, and as it is, with Gods help,
+there will be reasonable profit made of the adventure. But, with half
+money and half commodities, the best sort of spices and other
+merchandise from India, may be bought at reasonable rates, while without
+money there is very little to be done here at this time to purpose. Two
+days hence, God willing, I purpose going from hence to Basora, and from
+thence I must necessarily go to Ormus, for want of a man who speaks the
+Indian tongue. While at Aleppo, I hired two Nazarenes, one of whom has
+been twice in India, and speaks the language well; but he is a very lewd
+fellow, wherefore I will not take him with me.
+
+The following are the prices of wares, as they are worth here at
+present: Cloves and mace the _bateman_, 5 ducats; cinnamon, 6 ducats,
+and very little to be had; ginger, 40 medins; pepper, 75 medins;
+turbetta[433], 50 medins; neel [or indigo,] the _churle_ 70 ducats: the
+churle is 27-1/2 rotils of Aleppo; silk, much better than that which
+comes from Persia, 11-1/2 ducats the bateman, each bateman being 7
+pounds 5 ounces English. From Bagdat this 20th July 1583.
+
+[Footnote 433: Most likely turmeric, anciently called turbith vegetable,
+in contradistinction to turbith mineral, so named from its yellow colour
+resembling turbith or turmeric.--E.]
+
+
+No. 4.--_Letter from, John Newbery to Messrs John Eldred and William
+Scales at Basora_.
+
+Time will not permit to give you an account of my voyage after my
+departure from you. But on the 4th day of this present September, we
+arrived here at Ormus; and the 10th day I and the rest were committed to
+prison. The middle of next month, or thereabout, the captain proposes
+sending us all in his ship to Goa. The cause for which we have been
+imprisoned is said to be, because we brought letters from Don Antonio:
+But the truth is, Michael Stropene is the only cause, through letters
+written to him by his brother from Aleppo. God knows how we may be dealt
+with at Goa; and therefore, if you our masters can procure that the king
+of Spain may send his letters for our release, you would do us great
+good, for they cannot with any justice put us to death, though it may be
+that they will cut our throats, or keep us long in prison. Gods will be
+done.
+
+All the commodities I brought to this place had been well sold, if this
+trouble had not come upon us. You shall do well to send a messenger in
+all speed by land from Basora to Aleppo, to give notice of this
+mischance, even though it may cost 30 or 40 crowns, that we may be the
+sooner released, and I shall thereby be the better able to recover again
+what is now like to be lost. From prison in Ormus, this 21st September
+1583.
+
+No. 5.--_Letter Mr J. Newbery to Messrs Eldred and Scales_.
+
+The bark of the Jews is arrived here two days ago, by which I am sure
+you wrote; but your letters are not likely to come to my hands. The
+bringer of this hath shewed me very great courtesy, for which I pray
+you to shew him what favour you can. About the middle of next month, I
+think we shall depart from hence: God be our guide. I think Andrew will
+go by land to Aleppo; and I pray you to further him what you may: But,
+if he should not go, then I pray you to dispatch a messenger in all
+speed. I can say no more, but beg you to do for me what I should do for
+you in the like case. From prison in Ormus, the 24th September 1583.
+
+
+No. 6.--_Letter from Mr Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore_.
+
+My last from Ormus certified you what had happened to me there, with the
+rest of my company; as in four days after our arrival we were all
+committed to prison, except one Italian, who came with me from Aleppo,
+whom the captain never examined, except asking what countryman he was;
+but I believe Michael Stropene, who accused us, had informed the captain
+of him. The first day of our arrival at Ormus, this Stropene accused us
+of being spies for Don Antonio, besides diverse other lies; yet if we
+had been of any other country than England, we might freely have traded
+with them. Although we be Englishmen, I know no reason why we may not as
+well trade from place to place as the natives of other countries; for
+all nations may and do come freely to Ormus, as Frenchmen, Flemings,
+Germans, Hungarians, Italians, Greeks, Armenians, Nazarenes, Turks,
+Moors, Jews, and Gentiles, Persians, and Muscovites. In short, there is
+no nation they seek to trouble, but only ours; wherefore it were
+contrary to all justice and reason that they should suffer all nations
+to trade with them, and forbid us. Now indeed I have as great liberty as
+those of any other nation, except it be to leave the country, which as
+yet I desire not. But hereafter, and I think ere long, if I shall be
+desirous to go from hence, that they will not refuse me licence. Before
+we were suffered to come out of prison, I was forced to put in sureties
+for 2000 pardaos, not to depart from hence without licence of the
+viceroy; and except this, we have now as much liberty as any one, for I
+have got back our goods, and have taken a house in the chiefest street
+called the _Rue drette_, where we sell our goods.
+
+There were two causes which moved the captain of Ormus to imprison us,
+and afterwards to send us to Goa. The first was because Michael Stropene
+had most falsely accused us of many matters. The other was, because when
+Mr Drake was at the Molucca islands, he caused two pieces of cannon to
+be fired at a Portuguese galeon belonging to the king, at least so they
+allege. But of these things I did not know when at Ormus. In the same
+ship which brought us to Goa, came the chief justice of Ormus, called
+the veedor general of that place, who had been there three years, so
+that his time was expired. This veedor is a great friend to the captain
+of Ormus, and sent for me into his chamber, one day after coming here to
+Goa, and began to demand many things at me, to which I made answers.
+Among other things, he said that Mr Drake had been sent out of England
+with many ships, and had gone to Molucca where he loaded cloves, and
+finding a Portuguese galeon there belonging to the king, had shot two
+pieces of his great ordnance against her. Perceiving this grieved them
+much, I asked if they meant to be revenged on me for what had been done
+by Mr Drake: To which he answered no; though his meaning was yes.
+
+He said moreover, that the captain of Ormus had sent me to Goa, that the
+viceroy might learn the news from me respecting Don Antonio, and whether
+he were in England or not; and that it might possibly be all for the
+best my being sent hither; which I trust in God may so fall out, though
+contrary to his expectation and intention: For, if it had not pleased
+God to influence the minds of the archbishop, and two padres or Jesuits
+of the college of St Paul, to stand our friends, we might have rotted in
+prison. The archbishop is a very good man, who has two young men in his
+service, one called Bernard Borgers born in Hamburgh, and the other
+named John Linscot[434], a native of Enkhuysen, who did us especial
+service; for by them the archbishop was often reminded of our case. The
+two good fathers who laboured so much for us were padre Mark, a native
+of Bruges in Flanders, and padre Thomas Stevens[435], born in Wiltshire
+in England. I chanced likewise to fall in with here a young man, Francis
+de Rea, who was born in Antwerp, but was mostly brought up in London,
+with whom I became acquainted in Aleppo, who also has done me much
+service.
+
+[Footnote 434: John Huighen van Linschoten, the author of the book
+respecting the East Indies, formerly quoted, and from which a second
+quotation will be given in this supplement.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 435: This is he whose letter to his father from Goa has been
+already inserted, and who was sometime of New College in
+Oxford.--Hakluyt.]
+
+We remained many days in prison at Ormus, and were a long while at sea
+coming hither. Immediately on our arrival at this place we were sent to
+prison, whence next day we were brought before the chief justice or
+veedor, to be examined, after which we were remanded to prison. When we
+had been thirteen days in prison, James Storie, the painter who
+accompanied us, went into the monastery of St Paul, where he remains,
+being made one of the company, which life he seems to like[436]. Upon St
+Thomas day, 12th December, 22 days after our arrival here, I was
+liberated from prison, and the next day Ralph Fitch and William
+Bets[437] came out.
+
+[Footnote 436: It will appear afterwards that he did not continue.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 437: In the narrative of Fitch no such name occurs, but
+William Leedes jeweller, is named as one of the party. Perhaps he ought
+to have been named by Fitch, William Bets of Leeds.--E.]
+
+If these troubles had not occurred, I think I was in a fair way of
+making as good a voyage as was ever made with such a sum of money. Many
+of our things I sold very well, both here and at Ormus while in prison,
+although the captain of Ormus wished me to have sold all I had before I
+embarked; so, by his permission, I went sundry times from the castle in
+the mornings, accompanied by officers, and sold things, and returned
+again at night to prison. They wrote down every thing that I sold; and
+at my embarking, the captain directed me to deliver all my money and
+goods into the hands of the _scrivano_ or purser of the ship, which I
+did, and the scrivano left an acknowledgement with the captain, that
+myself with the money and goods should be delivered up to the veedor
+general in India. But on our arrival here, the veedor would not meddle
+with either money or goods, seeing that no crime was substantiated
+against us: Wherefore the goods remained in the ship nine or ten days
+after our arrival; and then, as the ship was to sail from thence, the
+scrivano sent the goods on shore, where they remained a day and a night
+without any one to receive them. In the end, they permitted the bearer
+of this letter to receive them, who put them into a house which he hired
+for me, in which they remained four or five days. When afterwards they
+ought to have delivered the money, it was ordered by the _veedor_, that
+both the money and goods should be given into the custody of the
+_positor_, where they remained for fourteen days after I was liberated
+from prison.
+
+When in Aleppo, I bought a fountain of silver gilt, six knives, six
+spoons, and one fork, all trimmed with coral, for 25 chekins, which the
+captain of Ormus took to himself and only paid 20 pardaos, or 100
+larines, though they were worth there or here at Goa 100 chekins. Also
+he had five emeralds set in gold, worth five or six hundred crowns, for
+which he only paid 100 pardaos. He likewise took 19-1/2 pikes of cloth,
+which cost 20 shillings the pike at London, and was worth 9 or 10 crowns
+the pike at Ormus, for which he only paid 12 larines. He also had two
+pieces of green kersie, worth 24 pardaos each; besides divers other more
+trifling articles which he and the officers took at similar inferior
+prices, and some for nothing at all. But the real cause of all was
+Michal Stropene, who came to Ormus without a penny, and is now worth
+thirty or forty thousand crowns, and is grieved that any stranger should
+trade there but himself. But that shall not avail him; for I trust yet
+to go both hither and thither, and to buy and sell as freely as he or
+any other.
+
+There is a great deal of good to be done here in divers of our
+commodities; and likewise there is much profit to be made with the
+commodities of this country, when carried to Aleppo. It were long for me
+to write, and tedious for you to read, all the incidents which have
+occurred to me since we parted; but the bearer is able to inform you of
+every thing that has befallen me since my arrival in Ormus. It is my
+intention to remain here in Goa; wherefore, if you write me, you may
+send your letters to some friend in Lisbon, to be forwarded from thence
+by the India ships. Let your direction, therefore be in Portuguese or
+Spanish, by which they will the more readily reach me.--From Goa, this
+20th of January 1584.
+
+
+No, 7.--_Letter from Mr Ralph Fitch to Mr Leonard Poore_.
+
+Loving friend, &c. Since my departure from Aleppo, I have not written
+you, because at Bagdat I was ill of flux, and continued in all the way
+thence to Basora, which was twelve days journey down the Tigris, when we
+had extremely hot weather, bad fare, and worse lodging, all of which
+increased my disease; besides which our boat was pestered with people.
+During eight entire days I hardly eat any thing, so that if we had been
+two days longer on the water, I verily believe I had died. But, thanks
+be to God, I presently mended after coming to Basora. We remained there
+fourteen days, when we embarked for Ormus, where we arrived on the 5th
+of September, and were put in prison on the 9th of the same month, where
+we continued till the 11th of October, and were then shipt for this city
+of Goa, in the ship belonging to the captain of Ormus, with 114
+horses[438], and about 200 men. Passing by Diu and Chaul, at which place
+we landed on the 20th November, we arrived at Goa on the 29th of that
+month, where, for our better entertainment, we were committed to a fair
+strong prison, in which we continued till the 22d of December. It
+pleased God, that there were two padres there who befriended us, the one
+an Englishman named Thomas Stevens, the other a Fleming named Marco,
+both Jesuits of the college of St Paul. These good men sued for us to
+the viceroy and other officers, and stood us in such good stead as our
+lives and goods were worth: But for them, even if we had escaped with
+our lives, we must have suffered a long imprisonment.
+
+[Footnote 438: In the narrative of Fitch, called 124, which might easily
+be mistaken either way in transcription.--E.]
+
+When we had been fourteen days in prison, they offered us leave to go at
+large in the town, if we would give sureties, for 2000 ducats, not to
+depart the country without the licence of the viceroy. Being unable to
+procure any such, the before mentioned friendly fathers of St Paul
+procured sureties for us. The Italians are much offended and displeased
+at our enlargement, and many wonder at our delivery. James Storie the
+painter has gone into the cloister of St Paul, as one of their order,
+and seems to like the situation. While we were in prison, both at Ormus
+and here, a great deal of our goods were pilfered and lost, and we have
+been at great charges in gifts and otherwise, so that much of our
+property is consumed. Of what remains, much will sell very well, and for
+some we will get next to nothing. The viceroy is gone to Chaul and Diu
+as it is said to win a castle of the Moors, and it is thought he will
+return about Easter; when I trust in God we shall procure our liberty,
+and have our sureties discharged. It will then, I think, be our best way
+for one or both of us to return, as our troubles have been very great,
+and because so much of our goods have been spoiled and lost: But if it
+should please God that I come to England, I will certainly return here
+again. It is a charming country, and extremely fruitful, having summer
+almost the whole year, but the most delightful season is about
+Christmas. The days and nights are of equal length throughout the whole
+year, or with very little difference; and the country produces a most
+wonderful abundance of fruit. After all our troubles we are fat and in
+good health, for victuals are plentiful and cheap. I omit to inform you
+of many strange things till we meet, as it would be too long to write of
+them. And thus I commit you to God, &c. From Goa in the East Indies,
+25th January 1584.
+
+
+No. 8.--_The Report of John Huighen van Linschoten, concerning the
+imprisonment of Newbery and Fitch; which happened while he was at Goa_.
+
+In the month of December 1583, four Englishmen arrived at Ormus, who
+came by way of Aleppo in Syria, having sailed from England by the
+Mediterranean to Tripoli, a town and haven in Syria, where all ships
+discharge their wares and merchandise for Aleppo, to which they are
+carried by land, which is a journey of nine days. In Aleppo there reside
+many merchants and factors of all nations, as Italians, French, English,
+Armenians, Turks, and Moors, every one following his own religion, and
+paying tribute to the grand Turk. It. is a place of great trade, whence
+twice every year there go two _cafilas_ or caravans, containing great
+companies of people and camels, which travel to India, Persia, Arabia,
+and all the adjoining countries, dealing in all kinds of merchandise
+both to and from these countries, as I have already declared in another
+part of this book.
+
+Three of these Englishmen were sent by the company of English who reside
+in Aleppo, to see if they might keep any factors at Ormus, and so
+traffic in that place, as the Italians do, that is the Venetians, who
+have their factors in Ormus, Goa, and Malacca, and trade there, both for
+pearls and precious stones, and for other wares and spices of these
+countries, which are carried thence over-land to Venice. One of these
+Englishmen, Mr John Newbery, had been once before in the said town of
+Ormus, and had there taken good information of the trade; and on his
+advice the others were then come hither along with him, bringing great
+store of merchandise; such as cloths, saffron, all kinds of drinking
+glasses and haberdashery wares, as looking-glasses, knives, and such
+like stuff; and to conclude, they brought with them every kind of small
+wares that can be thought of.
+
+Although these wares amounted to great sums of money, they were yet only
+as a shadow or colour, to give no occasion of mistrust or suspicion, as
+their principal intention was to purchase great quantities of precious
+stones, as diamonds, pearls, rubies, &c. to which end they brought with
+them a great sum of money in silver and gold, and that very secretly,
+that they might not be robbed of it, or run into danger on its
+account[439]. On their arrival at Ormus, they hired a shop and began to
+sell their wares; which being noticed by the Italians, whose factors
+reside there as I said before, and fearing if these Englishmen got good
+vent for their commodities, that they would become residents and so
+daily increase, which would be no small loss and hindrance to them, they
+presently set about to invent subtle devices to hinder them. To which
+end, they went immediately to the captain of Ormus, who was then Don
+Gonzalo de Menezes[440], saying that these Englishmen were heretics come
+to spy the country, and that they ought to be examined and punished as
+enemies, for a warning to others. Being friendly to these Englishmen, as
+one of them had been there before and had given him presents, the
+captain could not be prevailed upon to injure them, but shipped them
+with all their wares for Goa, sending them to the viceroy, that he might
+examine and deal with them as he thought good.
+
+[Footnote 439: This seems a mere adoption of the rumours of the
+Italians; as Newbery distinctly complains of the want of cash, by which
+he might have made very profitable purchases in Aleppo, Bagdat, and
+Basora.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 440: The captain of the castle of Ormus is named Don Mathias
+de Albuquerque by Fitch.--E.]
+
+Upon their arrival at Goa, they were cast into prison, and were in the
+first place examined whether or not they were good Christians. As they
+could only speak very bad Portuguese, while two of them spoke good
+Dutch, having resided several years in the low countries, a Dutch Jesuit
+who was born at Bruges in Flanders, and had resided thirty years in
+India, was sent to them, to undermine and examine them; in which they
+behaved so well, that they were holden and esteemed for good and
+Catholic Christians; yet were they still suspected, as being strangers
+and Englishmen. The Jesuits told them that they would be sent prisoners
+into Portugal, and advised them to leave off their trade in merchandise,
+and to become Jesuits; promising in return to defend them from all their
+troubles. The cause of thus earnestly persuading them was this: The
+Dutch Jesuit had been secretly informed that they had great sums of
+money, and sought to get that for the order; as the first vow and
+promise made on becoming a Jesuit is, to procure and advance the welfare
+of the order by every possible means. Although the Englishmen refused
+this, saying that they were quite unfit for such matters, yet one of
+them, a painter, who came with the other three to see the country and
+seek his fortune, and was not sent by the English merchants, partly
+through fear, and partly from want of means to relieve himself from
+prison, promised to become a Jesuit. And although the fathers knew that
+he was not one of those who had the treasure, yet, because he was a
+painter, of whom there are few in India, and that they had great need of
+one to paint their church, which would cost them great charges to bring
+from Portugal, they were very glad of him, and hoped in time to get all
+the rest, with all their money, into their fellowship.
+
+To conclude, they made this painter a Jesuit, and he continued some time
+in their college, where they gave him plenty of work to perform, and
+entertained him with all the favour and friendship they could devise,
+all to win the rest to become their prey. But the other three remained
+in prison in great fear, because they did not understand any who came to
+them, neither did any one understand what they said. They were at last
+informed of certain Dutchmen who dwelt with the archbishop, and were
+advised to send for them, at which they greatly rejoiced, and sent for
+me and another Dutchman, desiring us to come and speak with them, which
+we presently did. With tears in their eyes, they complained to us of
+their hard usage, explaining to us distinctly, as is said before, the
+true cause of their coming to Ormus, and praying us for God's sake to
+help them to their liberty upon sureties, declaring themselves ready to
+endure whatever could be justly ordained for them, if they were found to
+be otherwise than they represented, or different from other travelling
+merchants who sought to profit by their wares.
+
+Promising to do our best for them, we at length prevailed on the
+archbishop to deliver a petition for them to the viceroy, and persuaded
+him to set them at liberty and restore their goods, on condition of
+giving security to the amount of 2000 pardaos, not to depart the country
+without licence. Thereupon they presently found a citizen who became
+their surety in 2000 pardaos, to whom they paid in hand 1300, as they
+said they had no more money; wherefore he gave them credit for the rest,
+seeing that they had great store of merchandise, through which he might
+at any time be satisfied, if needful. By these means they were delivered
+out of prison, on which they hired a house, and began to open shop; so
+that they sold many of their goods, and were presently well known among
+the merchants, as they always respected gentlemen, especially such as
+bought their wares, shewing them much honour and courtesy, by which they
+won much credit, and were beloved of all men, so that all favoured them,
+and were ready to shew them favour. To us they shewed great friendship,
+and for our sakes the archbishop favoured them much, and gave them good
+countenance, which they well knew how to increase by offering him many
+presents, although he would not receive them, as he never accepted gift
+or present from any person. They behaved themselves in all things so
+discreetly, that no one carried an evil eye or evil thought towards
+them. This did not please the Jesuits, as it hindered what they still
+wished and hoped for; so that they still ceased not to intimidate them
+by means of the Dutch Jesuit, intimating that they would be sent
+prisoners to Portugal, and counselling them to become Jesuits in the
+cloister of St Paul, when they would be securely defended from all
+troubles. The Dutchman pretended to give them this advice as a friend,
+and one who knew certainly that it was so determined in the viceroy's
+council, and that he only waited till the ship sailed for Portugal;
+using this and other devices to put them in fear, and so to effect their
+purpose.
+
+The Englishmen durst not say any thing to the contrary, but answered
+that they would remain as they were yet a little while and consider
+their proposal, thus putting the Jesuits in hopes of their compliance.
+The principal of these Englishmen, John Newbery, often complained to me,
+saying that he knew not what to think or say of these things, or how
+they might get rid of these troubles. In the end, they determined with
+themselves to depart from Goa; and secretly, by means of other friends,
+they employed their money in the purchase of precious stones, which they
+were the better able to effect as one of them was a jeweller, who came
+with them for that purpose. Having concluded on this step, they durst
+not make it known to any one, not even to us, although they used to
+consult us on all occasions and tell us every thing they knew.
+
+On one of the Whitson holidays, they went out to recreate themselves
+about three miles from Goa, in the mouth of the river, in a country
+called _Bardez_[441], taking with them a supply of victuals and drink.
+That they might not be suspected, they left their house and shop, with
+same of their wares unsold, in the charge of a Dutch boy whom we had
+procured for them, and who remained in their house, quite ignorant of
+their intentions. When in Bardez, they procured a _patamer_, one of the
+Indian post-boys or messengers who carry letters from place to place,
+whom they hired as a guide. Between Bardez and the main-land there is
+only a small river, in a manner half dry, which they passed over on
+foot, and so travelled away by land, and were never heard of again; but
+it is thought they arrived in Aleppo, though no one knows: with
+certainty. Their great dependence is upon John Newbery, who can speak
+the Arabian language, which is used in all these countries, or at least
+understood, being as commonly known in all the east as French is with
+us.
+
+[Footnote 441: Bardes is an island a short way north from the island of
+Goa, and only divided from the main-land by a small river or creek.--E.]
+
+On the news of their departure being brought to Goa, there was a great
+stir and murmuring among the people, as all much wondered. Many were of
+opinion that we had counselled them to withdraw, and presently their
+surety seized on the remaining goods, which might amount to the value of
+200 pardaos; and with that and the money he had received of the
+Englishmen, he went to the viceroy, and delivered it to him, the viceroy
+forgiving him the rest. This flight of the Englishmen grieved the
+Jesuits worst, as they had lost so rich a prey, which they made
+themselves secure of. The Dutch Jesuit came to ask us if we knew of
+their intentions, saying, if he had suspected as much he would have
+dealt differently by them, for he had once in his hands a bag of theirs,
+in which were 40,000 _veneseanders_, [442], each worth two pardaos, at
+the time when they were in prison. But as they had always given him to
+believe he might accomplish his desire of getting them to profess in the
+Jesuit college, he had given them their money again, which otherwise
+they would not have come by so easily, or peradventure never. This he
+said openly, and in the end he called them heretics, spies, and a
+thousand other opprobrious names.
+
+[Footnote 442: This word _veneseander_, or venetiander, probably means,
+a Venetian chekin.--E.]
+
+When the English painter, who had become a Jesuit, heard that his
+countrymen were gone, and found that the Jesuits did not use him with so
+great favour as at first, he repented himself; and not having made any
+solemn vow, and being counselled to leave their house, he told them that
+he made no doubt of gaining a living in the city, and that they had no
+right to keep him against his inclination, and as they could not accuse
+him of any crime, he was determined not to remain with them. They used
+all the means they could devise to keep him in the college, but he would
+not stay, and, hiring a house in the city, he opened shop as a painter,
+where he got plenty of employment, and in the end married the daughter
+of a mestee, so that he laid his account to remain there as long as he
+lived. By this Englishman I was instructed in all the ways, trades, and
+voyages of the country between Aleppo, and Ormus, and of all the rules
+and customs observed in the overland passage, as also of all the towns
+and places on the route. Since the departure of these Englishmen from
+Goa, there have never arrived any strangers, either English or others,
+by land, except Italians, who are constantly engaged in the overland
+trade, going and coming continually.
+
+
+
+END OF VOLUME SEVENTH.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Volume VII, by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME VII ***
+
+***** This file should be named 13287-8.txt or 13287-8.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/2/8/13287/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/old/13287-8.zip b/old/13287-8.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..a494a40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13287-8.zip
diff --git a/old/13287-h.zip b/old/13287-h.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f551f0a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13287-h.zip
diff --git a/old/13287-h/13287-h.htm b/old/13287-h/13287-h.htm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..91cc023
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13287-h/13287-h.htm
@@ -0,0 +1,23402 @@
+<!DOCTYPE HTML PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD HTML 4.01 Transitional//EN">
+<html>
+<head>
+<title>Voyages and Travels Volume 7</title>
+<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content=
+"text/html; charset=iso-8859-1">
+<style type="text/css">
+<!--
+body {background: #ffffcc; margin:10%; text-align:justify}
+h1,h2,h3,h4,h5,h6 {color:green; text-align:center}
+blockquote {font-size: .9em}
+p.poem {text-align:center}
+p.external {font-weight: bold}
+-->
+</style>
+</head>
+<body>
+<pre>
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Volume VII, by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Volume VII
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: August 25, 2004 [EBook #13287]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME VII ***
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+</pre>
+
+<h2>A</h2>
+
+<h2>GENERAL</h2>
+
+<h2>HISTORY AND COLLECTION</h2>
+
+<h2>OF</h2>
+
+<h1>VOYAGES AND TRAVELS,</h1>
+
+<h2>ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:</h2>
+
+<h2>FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS</h2>
+
+<h2>OF NAVIGATION, DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE,</h2>
+
+<h2>BY SEA AND LAND,</h2>
+
+<h2>FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE PRESENT TIME.</h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2>BY</h2>
+
+<h2>ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. &amp; F.A.S. EDIN.</h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2>ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.</h2>
+
+<h2>VOL. VII.</h2>
+
+<h3>WILLIAM BLACKWOOD, EDINBURGH:</h3>
+
+<h3>AND T. CADELL, LONDON.</h3>
+
+<h3>MDCCCXXIV.</h3>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<h2>CONTENTS OF VOLUME VII.</h2>
+
+<p><a href="#part2"><b>PART II.--(Continued.)</b></a></p>
+
+<p><a href="#book2-3"><b>BOOK III.--(Continued.)</b></a></p>
+
+<p><b>CONTINUATION OF THE DISCOVERIES AND CONQUESTS OF THE
+PORTUGUESE IN THE EAST; TOGETHER WITH SOME ACCOUNT OF THE EARLY
+VOYAGES OF OTHER EUROPEAN NATIONS TO INDIA.</b></p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter3-4"><b><i>CHAPTER
+IV.--(Continued.)</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Continuation of the Portuguese transactions in India, after
+the return of Don Stefano de Gama from Suez in 1541, to the
+Reduction of Portugal under the Dominion of Spain in 1581.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIII. Account of an expedition of the Portuguese from
+India to Madagascar in 1613.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIV. Continuation of the transactions of the
+Portuguese in India, from 1617 to 1640: and the conclusion of the
+Portuguese Asia of Manuel de Faria.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XV. Occurrences in Pegu, Martavan, Pram, Siam, and
+other places.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVI. A short account of the Portuguese possessions
+between the Cape of Good Hope and China.</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter3-5"><b><i>CHAPTER V.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyages and Travels in Egypt, Syria, Arabia, Persia, and
+India.<br>
+By Ludovico Verthema, in 1503.</p>
+
+<p>Introduction</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Of the Navigation from Venice to Alexandria in
+Egypt, and from thence to Damascus in Syria.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Of the City of Damascus.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Of the Journey from Damascus to Mecca, and of the
+Manners of the Arabians.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV. Observations of the Author during his residence at
+Mecca.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION V. Adventures of the Author in various parts of Arabia
+Felix, or Yemen.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VI. Observations of the Author relative to some parts
+of Persia.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VII. Observations of the Author on various parts of
+India.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VIII. Account of the famous City and Kingdom of
+Calicut.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IX. Observations on various parts of India.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION X. Continuation of the Authors Adventures, after his
+return to Calicut.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XI. Account of a memorable Battle between the
+Mahometan Navy of Calicut and the Portuguese.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XII. Navigation of the Author to Ethiopia, and return
+to Europe by Sea.</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter3-6"><b><i>CHAPTER VI.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Voyages and Travels of Cesar Frederick in India.</p>
+
+<p>Introduction</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Voyage from Venice to Bir in Asia Minor.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Of Feluchia and Babylon.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Of Basora.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV. Of Ormuz.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION V. Of Goa, Diu, and Cambaya.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VI. Of Damann, Bassen, Tana, Chaul, and some other
+places.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VII. Of Goa.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VIII. Of the City of Bijanagur.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IX. Of Cochin.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION X. Of the Pearl Fishery in the Gulf of Manaar.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XI. Of the Island of Ceylon.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XII. Of Negapatam.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIII. Of Saint Thome and other places.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIV. Of the Island of Sumatra and the City of
+Malacca.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XV. Of the City of Siam.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVI. Of the Kingdom of Orissa and the River
+Ganges.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVII. Of Tanasserim and other places.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVIII. Of Martaban and the Kingdom of Pegu.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIX. Voyages of the Author to different parts of
+India.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XX. Some Account of the Commodities of India.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XXI. Return of the Author to Europe.</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter3-7"><b><i>CHAPTER VII.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Early English Voyages to Guinea, and other parts of the West
+Coast of Africa.</p>
+
+<p>Introduction.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Second Voyage of the English to Barbary, in the
+year 1552, by Captain Thomas Windham.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. A Voyage from England to Guinea and Benin in 1553,
+by Captain Windham and Antonio Anes Pinteado.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Voyage to Guinea, in 1554, by Captain John
+Lok.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV. Voyage to Guinea in 1555, by William Towerson,
+Merchant of London.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION V. Second Voyage to Guinea in 1556, by William
+Towerson.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VI. Third Voyage of William Towerson to Guinea in
+1558.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VII. Notices of an intended Voyage to Guinea, in
+1561.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VIII. Voyage to Guinea in 1562, written by William
+Rutter.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IX. Supplementary Account of the foregoing Voyage.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION X. Voyage to Guinea in 1563 by Robert Baker.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XI. A Voyage to Guinea in 1564, by Captain David
+Carlet.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XII. A Voyage to Guinea and the Cape de Verd Islands
+in 1566, by George Fenner.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIII. Embassy of Mr Edmund Hogan to Morocco in 1577,
+written by himself.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIV. Embassy of Henry Roberts from Queen Elizabeth to
+Morocco, in 1585, written by himself.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XV. Voyage to Benin beyond Guinea in 1588, by James
+Welsh.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVI. Supplement to the foregoing Voyage, in a Letter
+from Anthony Ingram the chief factor, written from Plymouth to
+the Owners, dated 9th September, the day of arriving at
+Plymouth.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVII. Second Voyage of James Welsh to Benin, in
+1590.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVIII. Voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to
+the Rivers Senegal and Gambia adjoining to Guinea, in 1591.</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter3-8"><b><i>CHAPTER VIII.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Some miscellaneous early Voyages of the English.</p>
+
+<p>Introduction.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Gallant escape of the Primrose from Bilboa in
+Spain, in 1585.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Voyage of Sir Francis Drake, in 1585, to the West
+Indies.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Cruising Voyage to the Azores by Captain Whiddon,
+in 1586, written by John Evesham.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV. Brief relation of notable service performed by Sir
+Francis Drake in 1587.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION V. Brief account of the Expedition of the Spanish
+Armada in 1588.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VI. Account of the Relief of a part of the Spanish
+Armada, at Anstruther in Scotland, in 1588.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VII. A cruising Voyage to the Azores in 1589, by the
+Earl of Cumberland.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VIII. Valiant Sea Fight by Ten Merchant Ships of
+London against Twelve Spanish Gallies, in the Straits of
+Gibraltar, on the 24th April 1590.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IX. A valiant Sea Fight in the Straits of Gibraltar,
+in April 1591, by the Centurion of London, against five Spanish
+Gallies.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION X. Sea-Fight near the Azores, between the Revenge man
+of war, commanded by Sir Richard Granville, and fifteen Spanish
+men of war, 31st August 1591. Written by Sir Walter Raleigh.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XI. Note of the Fleet of the Indies, expected in Spain
+this year 1591; with the number that perished, according to the
+examination of certain Spaniards, lately taken and brought to
+England.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XII. Report of a Cruizing Voyage to the Azores in
+1581, by a fleet of London ships sent with supplies to the Lord
+Thomas Howard. Written by Captain Robert Flicke.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIII. Exploits of the English in several Expeditions
+and cruizing Voyages from 1589 to 1592; extracted from John
+Huighen van Linschoten.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIV. Cruising voyage to the Azores, in 1592, by Sir
+John Burrough, knight.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XV. The taking of two Spanish Ships, laden with
+quicksilver and the Popes bulls, in 1592, by Captain Thomas
+White.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVI. Narrative of the Destruction of a great East
+India Carak in 1584, written by Captain Nicholas Downton.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVII. List of the Royal Navy of England at the demise
+of Queen Elizabeth.</p>
+
+<p><a href="#chapter3-9"><b><i>CHAPTER IX.</i></b></a></p>
+
+<p>Early Voyages of the English to the East Indies, before the
+establishment of an exclusive company.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I. Voyage to Goa in 1579, in the Portuguese fleet, by
+Thomas Stevens.</p>
+
+<p>Introduction.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II. Journey to India over-land, by Ralph Fitch,
+Merchant of London, and others, in 1583.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III. Supplement to the Journey of Fitch</p>
+
+<p>No. 1.--Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Richard Hakluyt of
+Oxford, Author of the Voyages, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>No. 2,--Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore of
+London.</p>
+
+<p>No. 3.--Letter from Mr John Newbery to the same.</p>
+
+<p>No. 4.--Letter from John Newbery to Messrs John Eldred and
+William Scales at Basora.</p>
+
+<p>No. 5.--Letter from Mr John Newbery to Messrs Eldred and
+Scales.</p>
+
+<p>No. 6.--Letter from Mr Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore.</p>
+
+<p>No. 7.--Letter from Mr Ralph Fitch to Mr Leonard Poore.</p>
+
+<p>No. 8.--The Report of John Huighen, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<h2>A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.</h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2><a name="part2" id="part2">PART II.--Continued</a></h2>
+
+<h2><a name="book2-3" id="book2-3">BOOK III.--Continued.</a></h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p><b>HISTORY OF THE DISCOVERY OF AMERICA, AND OF SOME OF THE
+EARLY CONQUESTS IN THE NEW WORLD.</b></p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2><a name="chapter3-4" id="chapter3-4">CHAPTER IV.
+CONTINUED.</a></h2>
+
+<p>CONTINUATION OF THE PORTUGUESE TRANSACTIONS IN INDIA, AFTER
+THE RETURN OF DON STEPHANO DE GAMA FROM SUEZ IN 1541, TO THE
+REDUCTION OF PORTUGAL UNDER THE DOMINION OF SPAIN IN 1581.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Account of an Expedition of the Portuguese from India to
+Madagascar in 1613.</i></p>
+
+<p>Being anxious to find out a considerable number of Portuguese
+who were reported to exist in the island of St. Lawrence or
+Madagascar, having been cast away at different times on that
+island, and also desirous of propagating the ever blessed gospel
+among its inhabitants, and to exclude the Hollanders from that
+island by establishing a friendly correspondence with the native
+princes, the viceroy Don Jerome de Azevedo sent thither, in 1613,
+a caravel from Goa commanded by Paul Rodrigues de Costa,
+accompanied by two Jesuits, some interpreters, and a competent
+number of soldiers. This island is about 260 leagues in length
+and 600 in circumference[1], its greatest extent being from
+N.N.E. to S.S.W. It is 80 leagues from E. to W. where widest, but
+considerably less towards the north, where it ends in a point
+named St Ignatius which is about 15 leagues from east to west[2].
+It may be considered as divided into three parts. The first or
+northern portion is divided from the other two by an imaginary
+line from east to west at Cape St Andrew[3]. The other two
+divisions are formed by a chain of mountains running nearly south
+from this line to Cape St Romanus, otherwise Cape St Mary, but
+much nearer the east coast than the west. The island is divided
+into a great number of kingdoms, but so confusedly and
+ill-defined, that it were endless to enumerate them. It is very
+populous, the inhabitants having many cities and towns of
+different extent and grandeur[4]. The country is fertile and well
+watered, and everywhere diversified with mountains, vallies,
+rivers, bays, and ports. The natives have no general name for the
+island, and are entirely ignorant of those of Madagascar and St
+Lawrence, which are given to it by strangers. The general
+population of the island consists of a nation called
+<i>Buques</i>, who have no religion and consequently no priests
+or places of worship, yet all their youth are circumcised at six
+or seven years old, any one performing the operation. The natives
+are not all of one colour; some being quite black with crisp or
+curled hair like negroes; others not quite so black with lank
+hair; others again resembling mulatoes; while some that live in
+the interior are almost white, yet have hair of both kinds. They
+are of large stature, strong and well made, of clear judgment,
+and apt to learn. Every man has as many wives as he pleases or
+can maintain, turning them off at pleasure, when they are sure to
+find other husbands, all of whom buy their wives from their
+fathers, by way of repaying the expence of their maintenance
+before marriage. Their funeral obsequies consist chiefly in
+feasting the guests; and their mourning in laying aside all
+appearance of joy, and cutting off their hair or daubing their
+faces and bodies with clay. Their government is monarchical,
+their kings or chiefs being called <i>Andias</i>, <i>Anrias</i>,
+and <i>Dias</i>, all independent of each other and almost
+continually engaged in war, more for the purpose of plunder than
+slaughter or conquest. On the Portuguese going among them, no
+arms were found in their possession except a few guns they had
+procured from the Moors and Hollanders, which they knew not how
+to use, and were even fearful of handling. They have excellent
+amber[5], white sandal, tortoises, ebony, sweet woods of various
+kinds, and abundance of slaves, with plenty of cattle of all
+kinds, the flesh of their goats being as sweet as mutton. The
+island likewise produces abundance of sea cows, sea-horses,
+monkeys, and some say tigers, with a great many snakes which are
+not very venomous. It has no elephants, horses, asses, lions,
+bears, deer, foxes, nor hares.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 1: Madagascar, between the latitudes of
+12&deg; 30' and 35&deg; 45' S. and the longitudes of 44&deg; and
+53&deg; W. from Greenwich, rather exceeds 1000 statute miles from
+N.N.W to S.S.E. and is about 220 miles in mean width from east to
+west. This island therefore, in a fine climate, capable of
+growing all the tropical productions in perfection, and
+excellently situated for trade, extends to about 200,000 square
+miles, or 128 millions of acres, yet is abandoned entirely to
+ignorant barbarians.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 2: The north end of Madagascar, called the
+point of St Ignatius, is 70 miles from east to west, the eastern
+headland being Cape Natal or de Ambro, and the western Cape St
+Sebastian.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 3: Cape Antongil on the east coast is
+probably here meant, in lat. 15&deg; 45' S. as at this place the
+deep bay of Antongil or Manghabei penetrates about 70 mile
+inland, and the opposite coast also is deeply indented by port
+Massali. It is proper to mention however, that Cape St Andrew is
+on the west coast of Madagascar, in lat. 17&deg; 12'
+S.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 4: There may be numerous villages, or
+collections of huts, in Madagascar, and some of these may
+possibly be extensive and populous; but there certainly never was
+in that island any place that merited the name of a
+city.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 5: More probably Ambergris thrown on their
+shores.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The first place visited by de Costa on this voyage of
+discovery was a large bay near <i>Masilage</i>[6] in lat. 16&deg;
+S. in which there is an island half a league in circumference
+containing a town of 8000 inhabitants, most of them weavers of an
+excellent kind of stuff made of the palm-tree. At this place the
+Moors used to purchase boys who were carried to Arabia and sold
+for infamous uses. The king of this place, named <i>Samamo</i>,
+received the Portuguese in a friendly manner, and granted leave
+to preach the gospel among his subjects. Coasting about 40
+leagues south from this place, they came to the mouth of a large
+river named <i>Balue</i> or <i>Baeli</i> in about 17&deg; S. and
+having doubled Cape St Andrew, they saw the river and kingdom of
+<i>Casame</i>, between the latitudes of 17&deg; and 18&deg; S.
+where they found little water and had much trouble[7]. Here also
+amity was established with the king, whose name was Sampilla, a
+discreet old man; but hitherto they could get no intelligence of
+the Portuguese whom they were sent in search of. On Whitsunday,
+which happened that year about the middle of May, mass was said
+on shore and two crosses erected, at which the king appeared so
+much pleased that he engaged to restore them if they happened to
+fall or decay. During the holidays they discovered an island in
+lat. 18&deg; S. to which they gave the name of Espirito Santo[8],
+and half a degree farther they were in some danger from a sand
+bank 9 leagues long. On Trinity Sunday, still in danger from sand
+banks, they anchored at the seven islands of <i>Cuerpo de
+Dios</i> or <i>Corpus Christi</i>[9] in 19&deg; S. near the
+kingdom and river of <i>Sadia</i> to which they came on the 19th
+of June, finding scarcely enough of water to float the caravel.
+This kingdom is extensive, and its principal <i>city</i> on the
+banks of the river has about 10,000 inhabitants. The people are
+black, simple, and good-natured, having no trade, but have plenty
+of flesh, maize, tar, tortoises, sandal, ebony, and sweet woods.
+The name of the king was <i>Capilate</i>, who was an old man much
+respected and very honest. He received the Portuguese kindly, and
+even sent his son to guide them along the coast. All along this
+coast from <i>Massalage</i> to <i>Sadia</i> the natives speak the
+same language with the Kafrs on the opposite coast of Africa;
+while in all the rest of the island the native language called
+<i>Buqua</i> is spoken.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 6: On this bay is a town called New Massah
+to distinguish it from Old Massah on the bay of Massali, somewhat
+more than half a degree farther north. Masialege or Meselage is a
+town at the bottom of the bay of Juan Mane de Cuna, about half a
+degree farther south.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 7: They were here on the bank of Pracel,
+which seems alluded to in the text from the shallowness of the
+water; though the district named Casame in the text is not to be
+found in modern maps--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 8: Probably the island of the bay of St
+Andrew in 17&deg; 30' is here meant; at any rate it must be
+carefully distinguished from Spiritu Santo, St Esprit, or Holy
+Ghost Island, one of the Comoros in lat. 15&deg;
+S.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 9: Perhaps those now called <i>barren
+isles</i> on the west coast, between lat. 18&deg; 40' and 19&deg;
+12' S. The river Sadia of the text may be that now called
+<i>Santiano</i> in lat. 19&deg; S.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Continuing towards the south they came to the country of the
+<i>Buques</i>, a poor and barbarous people feeding on the spawn
+of fish, who are much oppressed by the kings of the inland
+tribes. Passing the river <i>Mane</i>[10], that of
+<i>Saume</i>[11] in 20&deg; 15'; <i>Manoputa</i> in 20&deg; 30',
+where they first heard of the Portuguese; <i>Isango</i> in
+21&deg;; <i>Terrir</i> in 21&deg; 30'; the seven islands of
+<i>Elizabeth</i> in 22&deg;; they came on the 11th of July into
+the port of <i>St Felix</i>[12] in 22&deg;, where they heard
+again of the Portuguese of whom they were in search, from
+<i>Dissamuta</i> the king of that part of the country. On
+offering a silver chain at this place for some provisions, the
+natives gave it to an old woman to examine if it was genuine, and
+she informed the Portuguese that at the distance of three days
+journey there was an island inhabited a long while before by a
+white people dressed like the Portuguese and wearing crosses
+hanging from their necks, who lived by rapine and easily took
+whatever they wanted, as they were armed with spears and guns,
+with which information the Portuguese were much gratified.
+Continuing their voyage past the bay of <i>St Bonaventura</i> and
+the mouth of the river <i>Massimanga</i>, they entered the bay of
+<i>Santa Clara</i>, where <i>Diamassuto</i> came to them and
+entered into a treaty of friendship, worshipping the cross on his
+knees. They were here told that white people frequented a
+neighbouring port, and concluded that they were Hollanders. Going
+onwards they found banks of sand not laid down in any chart, and
+entered a port in lat. 24&deg; S. The king of this place was
+named <i>Diacomena</i>, and they here learnt that there were
+Portuguese on the opposite coast who had been cast away, and now
+herded cattle for their subsistence. They said likewise that the
+Hollanders had been three times at their port, and had left them
+four musketeers with whose assistance they had made war upon
+their enemies. On some trees there were several inscriptions,
+among which were the following. <i>Christophorus Neoportus Anglus
+Cap</i>. and on another <i>Dominus Robertus Scherleius Comes,
+Legatus Regis Persarum</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 10: It is singular that the large circular
+bay of Mansitare in lat. 19&deg; 30' S. is not named, although
+probably meant by the river <i>Mane</i> in the
+text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 11: Now called Ranoumanthe, discharging its
+waters into the bay of St Vincents.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 12: Now Port St James.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the latitude of 25&deg; S. they entered a port which they
+named St Augustine[13] in a kingdom called <i>Vavalinta</i>, of
+which a <i>Buque</i> named <i>Diamacrinale</i> was king, who no
+sooner saw the Portuguese than he asked if these were some of the
+men from the other coast. This confirmed the stories they had
+formerly heard respecting the Portuguese, and they were here
+informed that the place at which they dwelt was only six days
+sail from that place. In September they got sight of Cape
+<i>Romain</i> or St <i>Mary</i> the most southern point of
+Madagascar, where they spent 40 days in stormy weather, and on St
+Lukes day, 18th October, they entered the port of that name in
+the kingdom of Enseroe. The natives said that there were white
+people who wore crosses, only at the distance of half a days
+journey, who had a large town, and <i>Randumana</i> the king came
+on board the caravel, and sent one of his subjects with a
+Portuguese to shew him where these white people dwelt, but the
+black ran away when only half way.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 13: In lat. 23&deg; 30' or directly under
+the tropic of Capricorn, is a bay now called St Augustine. If
+that in the text, the latitude 1s erroneous a degree and a
+half.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Among others of the natives who came to this place to trade
+with the Portuguese, was a king named <i>Bruto Chembanga</i> with
+above 500 fighting men. His sons were almost white, with long
+hair, wearing gowns and breeches of cotton of several colours
+with silver buttons and bracelets and several ornaments of gold,
+set with pearls and coral. The territory of this king was named
+<i>Matacassi</i>, bordering on <i>Enseroe</i> to the west. He
+said that the Portuguese were all dead, who not far from that
+place had built a town of stone houses, where they worshipped the
+cross, on the foot or pedestal of which were unknown characters.
+He drew representations of all these things on the sand, and
+demanded a high reward for his intelligence. Some of his people
+wore crosses, and informed the Portuguese that there were two
+ships belonging to the Hollanders in port <i>St Lucia</i> or
+<i>Mangascafe</i>. In a small island at this place there was
+found a <i>square stone fort</i>[14], and at the foot of it the
+arms of Portugal were carved on a piece of marble, with this
+inscription</p>
+
+<p>REX PORTUGALENSIS O S.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 14: This is unintelligible as it stands in
+the text. It may possibly have been a square stone pedestal for
+one of the crosses of discovery, that used to be set up by the
+Portuguese navigators as marks of possession.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Many conjectures were formed to account for the signification
+of the circle between the two last letters of this inscription,
+but nothing satisfactory could be discovered. King
+<i>Chembanga</i> requested that a Portuguese might be sent along
+with him to his residence, to treat upon some important affairs,
+and left his nephew as an hostage for his safe return.
+Accordingly the master, Antonio Gonzales, and one of the priests
+named Pedro Freyre, were sent; who, at twelve leagues distance,
+came to his residence called <i>Fansaria</i>, a very populous and
+magnificent place. At first he treated them with much kindness,
+after which he grew cold towards them, but on making him a
+considerable present he became friendly, and even delivered to
+them his eldest son to be carried to Goa, desiring that the two
+Jesuits and four other Portuguese might be left as hostages, to
+whom he offered the island of <i>Santa Cruz</i> to live in. These
+people are descended from the Moors, and call themselves
+<i>Zelimas</i>; they have the alcoran in Arabic, and have faquirs
+who teach them to read and write; they are circumcised, eat no
+bacon, and some of them have several wives. The king said that in
+the time of his father a ship of the Portuguese was cast away on
+this coast, from which about 100 men escaped on shore, some of
+whom had their wives along with them, and the rest married there
+and left a numerous progeny. He repeated several of their names,
+and even showed a book in Portuguese and Latin which had belonged
+to them, and some maps; and concluded by saying that there were
+more Portuguese on that coast, seven days journey to the north.
+On farther inquiry, a man 90 years of age was found, who had
+known the Portuguese that were cast away there, and could still
+remember a few detached words of their language.</p>
+
+<p>The Portuguese set all hands to work to build a house and
+chapel for the two Jesuits and four Portuguese who were to
+remain, and when the work was finished, mass was solemnly said on
+shore, many of the natives coming to learn how to make the sign
+of the cross. One day while the king was looking on, and saw
+several men labouring hard to carry a cross that was meant to be
+set upon a rock, he went half naked and bareheaded, and carried
+it without assistance to the place appointed. The Portuguese
+might well say they had found another emperor Heraclius; for
+after this pious act of gigantic strength, he became very wicked;
+for being ready to sail, De Costa demanded that the king's son
+who had been promised should be sent, but he denied having ever
+made any such promise, and offered a slave. On this the captain
+sent the master and pilot with some men to enforce the demand,
+and safe conduct for some Portuguese to go to port <i>St
+Lucia</i> to see an inscription said by the natives to be at that
+place. The peace was thus broken, and a party of Portuguese
+soldiers was sent armed against the king, who endeavoured to
+resist, and the king's son, a youth of eleven years of age was
+brought away, the natives being unable to contend against
+fire-arms. Several messages were sent offering a high ransom for
+the boy; but on being told by the captain that he would lose his
+head if he did not carry him to the viceroy, they went away much
+grieved. This happened about the end of 1613; and towards the
+middle of 1614, de Costa arrived safe at Goa with the boy, whom
+the viceroy caused to be instructed in Christianity by the
+jesuits, and stood god-father at his baptism on St Andrews day,
+when he was named Andrew Azevedo.</p>
+
+<p>The viceroy treated him with much honour and magnificence, in
+hopes that when he succeeded to his father, he might encourage
+the propagation of the gospel in Madagascar; and when he was
+supposed to be sufficiently instructed, he was sent away,
+accompanied by four Jesuits. On this occasion a pink and caravel
+were sent to Madagascar, commanded by Pedro de Almeyda Cabral,
+and Juan Cardoso de Pina, who sailed from Goa on the 17th of
+September 1616. On the 20th of March 1617, they discovered a most
+delightful island, watered with pure springs, and producing many
+unknown plants besides others already known, both aromatic and
+medicinal. To this island, in which were two mountains which
+overtopped the clouds, they gave the name of <i>Isola del
+Cisne</i> or swan island, and on it the jesuits planted some
+crosses and left inscriptions commemorative of the discovery[15].
+The wreck of two ships of the Hollanders were found on this
+island. On the arrival of the two Portuguese ships in the port of
+St Lucia in Madagascar, the king and queen of <i>Matacassi</i>
+received their son with the strongest demonstrations of joy, and
+gave back the hostages left on taking him away. The four jesuits
+with six soldiers accompanied the young prince to his father's
+court at <i>Fansaria</i>, where, and at every place through which
+he passed, he was received with demonstrations of joy, which to
+the Portuguese seemed ridiculous, as no doubt those used by the
+Portuguese on similar occasions would have appeared to them. The
+king made a similar agreement with the two commanders on this
+voyage with that formerly made with De Costa, which was that the
+fathers should inhabit the inland of Santa Cruz and have liberty
+to preach the gospel in Madagascar. Upon this the fathers went to
+the fort at Santa Cruz, where Don Andrew, the king's son, sent
+them workmen and provisions.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 15: The text gives no indication by which
+even to conjecture the situation of this island, unless that
+being bound towards the southern part of the east coast of
+Madagascar, it may possibly have been either the isle of France,
+or that of Bourbon.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The captain, Pedro de Almeyda, had orders to bring another of
+the king's sons to Goa, and if refused to carry one away by
+force; but the king declared that he had only one other son, who
+was too young for the voyage, on which Almeyda satisfied himself
+with Anria Sambo, the king's nephew, who was carried to Goa, and
+baptized by the name of Jerome. When sufficiently instructed in
+the Christian religion, he was sent back to his country in a
+pink, commanded by Emanuel de Andrada, together with two Jesuits,
+100 soldiers, and presents for the king and prince, worth 4000
+ducats. They set out in the beginning of February 1618; and being
+under the necessity of watering at the <i>Isola de Cisne</i>,
+they found three ships sunk at the mouth of the river. On
+landing, twenty Hollanders were found about two leagues from the
+shore, guarding the goods they had saved from the wreck. They
+made some opposition, but were forced to submit to superior
+numbers, and were found to have a large quantity of cloves,
+pepper, arms, ammunition, and provisions. Andrada carried the
+prisoners, and as many of the valuable commodities on board his
+pink as it could contain, and set fire to the rest, though the
+Hollanders alleged that they had come from the Moluccas, with a
+regular pass.</p>
+
+<p>When Andrada arrived in the port of St Lucia, the two Jesuits
+came to him both sick, declaring that it was impossible to live
+in that country, where all the men who had been left along with
+them had died. Andrada sent the letters with which he was
+intrusted to the king and prince, by the servants of Don Jerome;
+and in return, the king sent 100 fat oxen, with a great quantity
+of fowls and honey, and six slaves, but would not come himself,
+and it was found that his son had reverted to Mahometanism. The
+tribes in Madagascar called <i>Sadias</i> and <i>Fansayros</i>
+are <i>Mahometan Kafrs</i>[16], and are attached to the liberty
+allowed by the law of Mahomet, of having a plurality of wives.
+The king was of the <i>Fansayro</i> tribe, and was now desirous
+to destroy Andrada and the Portuguese by treachery; incited to
+this change of disposition by a <i>Chingalese</i> slave belonging
+to the Jesuits, who had run away, and persuaded the king, that
+the Portuguese would deprive him of his kingdom, as they had
+already done many of the princes in Ceylon and India. The Kafrs
+came accordingly to the shore in great numbers, and began to
+attack the Portuguese with stones and darts, but were soon put to
+flight by the fire-arms, and some of them slain, whose bodies
+were hung upon trees as a warning to the rest, and one of their
+towns was burnt.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 16: In strict propriety, this expression is
+a direct contradiction, is Kafr is an Arabic word signifying
+<i>unbelievers</i>; but having been long employed as a generic
+term for the natives of the eastern coast of Africa, from the
+Hottentots to the Moors of Zeyla exclusively, we are obliged to
+employ the ordinary language.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Andrada carried away with him Don Jerome, the king's nephew,
+and a brother of his who was made prisoner in a skirmish with the
+natives, who was converted, and died at Goa. All the Jesuits
+agreed to desist from the mission of Madagascar, and departed
+along with Andrada much against his inclination; and thus ended
+the attempt to convert the natives of Madagascar to the Christian
+religion.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Continuation of the Transactions of the Portuguese in
+India, from 1617 to 1640; and the conclusion of the Portuguese
+Asia of Manuel de Faria.</i></p>
+
+<p>Towards the end of 1617, Don Juan Coutinno, count of Redondo,
+came to Goa, as viceroy, to succeed Azevedo. During this year,
+three ships and two fly-boats, going from Portugal for India,
+were intercepted near the Cape of Good Hope by six English ships,
+when the English admiral declared that he had orders from his
+sovereign to seize effects of the Portuguese to the value of
+70,000 crowns, in compensation for the injury done by the late
+viceroy Azevedo to the four English ships at Surat. Christopher
+de Noronha, who commanded the Portuguese ships, immediately paid
+the sum demanded by the English admiral, together with 20,000
+crowns more to divide among his men. But Noronha, on his arrival
+at Goa, was immediately put under an arrest by the viceroy, for
+this pusillanimous behaviour, and was sent home prisoner to
+Lisbon, to answer for his conduct.</p>
+
+<p>In the year 1618, the Moor who had been seen long before, at
+the time when Nunno de Cunna took Diu, and was then upwards of
+300 years old, died at Bengal now 60 years older, yet did not
+appear more than 60 years old at his death. In 1619, a large
+wooden cross, which stood on one of the hills which overlook Goa,
+was seen by many of the inhabitants of that city, on the 23d of
+February, to have the perfect figure of a crucified man upon it.
+The truth of this having been ascertained by the archbishop, he
+had it taken down, and got made from it a smaller cross, only two
+spans long, on which was fixed a crucified Jesus of ivory, and
+the whole surrounded by a golden glory; the rest of the cross
+being distributed to the churches and persons of quality. Ten
+days after this cross was removed, water gushed from the hole in
+which it was formerly fixed, in which cloths being dipped wrought
+many miraculous cures. A church was built on the spot to
+commemorate the miracle. At this time it was considered, in an
+assembly of the principal clergy, whether the threads, worn by
+the bramins across their shoulders, were a heathenish
+superstition or only a mark of their nobility, and, after a long
+debate, it was determined to be merely an honourable distinction.
+The reason of examining this matter was, that many of the bramins
+refused to embrace the Christian faith, because obliged to
+renounce these threads.</p>
+
+<p>In November 1619, the count of Redondo died; and, by virtue of
+a patent of succession, Ferdinand de Albuquerque became
+governor-general, being now 70 years of age, 40 of which he had
+been an inhabitant of Goa, and consequently was well versed in
+the affairs of India, but too slow in his motions for the
+pressing occasions of the time. During his administration, the
+Portuguese were expelled from Ormuz by the sultan of Shiras,
+assisted by six English ships.</p>
+
+<p>In July 1620, the Hollanders were desirous of gaining
+possession of the city of Macao in China, and appeared before it
+in seventeen ships, or, as some say, twenty-three, having 2000
+soldiers on board, and were likewise in hopes of taking the fleet
+at that place, which was bound for Japan, having already taken
+several Portuguese and Chinese ships near the Philippine islands.
+After battering the fort of St Francis for five days, the Dutch
+admiral, Cornelius Regers, landed 800 men, with which he got
+possession of a redoubt or entrenchment, with very little
+opposition. He then marched to take possession of the city, not
+then fortified, where he did not expect any resistance; but Juan
+Suarez Vivas, taking post on some strong ground with only 160
+men, defeated the Hollanders and compelled them to return
+precipitately to their ships, leaving 300 of their men slain,
+seven only with the colours and one piece of cannon being taken,
+and they threw away all their arms to enable them to swim off to
+their ships. In the mean while, the ships continued to batter the
+fort, but were so effectually answered that some of them were
+sunk and sixty men slain. After this the enemy abandoned the
+enterprise, and the citizens of Macao built a wall round the city
+with six bastions; and, as the mountain of <i>our Lady of the
+Guide</i> commanded the bastion of St Paul, a fort was
+constructed on its summit armed with ten large guns.</p>
+
+<p>We have formerly mentioned the destruction of the Portuguese
+cities of <i>Liampo</i> and <i>Chincheo</i>, in China, through
+their own bad conduct. From that time, they lived in the island
+of <i>Lampazau</i> till the year 1557, when they were permitted
+to build the city <i>Macao</i>, the largest belonging to the
+Portuguese in the east after Goa. They had been in use to resort
+to the island of <i>Sanchuan</i>, on the coast of China, for
+trade, where they lived in huts made of boughs of trees, and
+covered with sails during their stay. At this time, the island of
+Goaxama, eighteen leagues nearer the coast of China, being wild
+and mountainous, was the resort of robbers who infested the
+neighbouring part of the continent, and, as the Chinese
+considered the Portuguese a more tolerable evil than these
+outlaws, they offered them that island on condition of
+extirpating the nest of thieves. The Portuguese undertook this
+task, and succeeded without losing a man. Then every one began to
+build where he liked best, as there were no proprietors to sell
+the land, which now sells at a dear rate. The trade and
+reputation of this city increasing, it soon became populous,
+containing above 1000 Portuguese inhabitants all rich; and as the
+merchants usually give large portions with their daughters, many
+persons of quality used to resort thither in search of wives.
+Besides these, there are a number of Chinese inhabitants who are
+Christians, who are clothed and live after the manner of the
+Portuguese; and about 6000 heathens, who are artificers,
+shop-keepers, and merchants. The duties of ships trading from
+thence to Japan, amount to 300,000 Xeraphins, at 10 <i>per
+cent</i>, being about equal to as many pieces-of-eight, or
+Spanish dollars[17]. The yearly expence of the garrison and
+repairs of the fortifications is above 40,000 ducats. A similar
+sum is paid yearly for duties at the fair of <i>Quantung</i>, or
+Canton. The Japan voyage, including presents to the King and
+<i>Tonos</i>, and the expence of the embassy, costs 25,000. The
+Misericordia expends about 9000 in charity, as the city maintains
+two hospitals, three parish churches, and five monasteries,
+besides sending continual alms to the Christians in China,
+Hainan, Japan, Tonkin, Cochin-china, Cambodia, and Siam.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 17: The xeraphin, as formerly mentioned,
+being 5s. 9d., this yearly revenue amounted to L.52,250 sterling.
+But the state of Macao, in the text, refers to what it was 150
+years ago. It is still inhabited by Portuguese, and remains a
+useless dependence on Portugal, owing its principal support to
+the residence of the British factory for the greater part of the
+year.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Albuquerque governed India from the end of 1619, to the month
+of September 1622, during all which time so little care was taken
+in Spain of the affairs of Portuguese India that he did not
+receive a single letter from the king. In every thing relating to
+the civil government he was equal to any of his predecessors, but
+was unfortunate in military affairs, especially in the loss of
+Ormuz. In 1621, Don Alfonso de Noronna was nominated viceroy of
+India; but sailing too late, was driven back to Lisbon, being the
+last viceroy appointed by the pious Philip III. On the news
+coming to Lisbon, of the shameful surrender of the city of
+<i>Bahia</i>, in the Brazils, to the Hollanders, without
+considering his age, quality, and rank, he listed as a private
+soldier for that service, an instance of bravery and patriotism
+deserving of eternal fame, and an example that had many
+followers.</p>
+
+<p>Don Francisco de Gama, Count of Vidugueyra, who had been much
+hated as viceroy of India, and sore affronted at his departure,
+as formerly related, always endeavoured to obtain that command a
+second time, not for revenge, as some asserted, but to satisfy
+the world that he had been undeservedly ill used. At length he
+obtained his desire, after twenty years solicitation, upon the
+accession of Philip IV. of Spain. He sailed from Lisbon on the
+18th of March 1622, with four ships. On the coast of Natal, a
+flash of lightning struck his ship, and burnt his colours, but
+killed no one. Under the line two of his ships left him, and
+arrived at Goa in the end of August; another ship staid behind,
+and it was thought they shunned his company designedly. At this
+time six Dutch ships plied near the islands or Angoxa, or the
+Comoros, one of which perished in pursuit of a Portuguese ship;
+and while standing on for Mozambique, the viceroy encountered the
+other five, on the 22d of June. <i>His other ships had now joined
+him</i>, and a terrible battle ensued, which fell heaviest on the
+vice-admiral, whose ship was entirely disabled, but the viceroy
+and Francisco Lobo rescued and brought him off; yet the ship was
+so much battered that it sunk, some men and part of the money on
+board being saved, but some of the men fell into the hands of the
+enemy. Night coming on, the ships of the viceroy and Lobo were
+cast upon certain sands and lost, when they saved what goods,
+rigging, ammunition, and cannon they were able, and burnt the
+rest, to prevent them from falling into the hands of the enemy.
+The viceroy shipped all the goods that were saved on board some
+galliots, with what men they could contain, and went to Cochin,
+whence he went to Goa in September. On seeing him replaced in the
+dignity of viceroy, his enemies were terrified lest he might
+revenge the affronts formerly given him, but he behaved with
+unexpected moderation. He wished to have punished Simon de Melo,
+and Luis de Brito, for the shameful loss of Ormuz. Melo had fled
+to the Moors, and Brito was in prison; so that he only was
+punished capitally, and the other was hung in effigy.</p>
+
+<p>About the year 1624, some of the Portuguese missionaries
+penetrated into the country of Thibet, in which are the sources
+of the river Ganges. The natives are well inclined, and of docile
+dispositions; zealous of their salvation, and value much the
+devotions enjoined them by their priests, called <i>Lamas</i>,
+who profess poverty and celibacy, and are much given to prayer.
+They have churches and convents like the most curious of those in
+Europe, and have some knowledge of the Christian religion, but
+mixed with many errors, and with strange customs and ceremonies;
+yet it plainly appears that they had formerly the light of the
+true gospel[18]; and they abhor the Mahometans and idolaters,
+being easily converted to the Christian faith. The habit of the
+Lamas is a red cassock, without sleeves, leaving their arms bare,
+girt with a piece of red cloth, of which the ends hang down to
+their feet. On their shoulders they wear a striped cloth, which
+they say was the dress of the Son of God; and they have a bottle
+of water hung at their girdle. They keep two fasts, during the
+principal of which they eat but once a day, and do not speak a
+word, using signs on all necessary occasions. During the other
+fast they eat as often as they have a mind, but use flesh only at
+one meal The people are called to prayers by the sound of
+trumpets, some of which are made of dead men's bones; and they
+use human skulls as drinking-vessels. Of other bones they make
+beads, which they allege is to remind them of death. The churches
+are only opened twice a year, when the votaries walk round the
+outside three times in procession, and then go in to reverence
+the images, some of which are of angels, called by them
+<i>Las</i>, the greatest being the one who intercedes with God
+for the souls of men. This being represented with the devil under
+his feet, was supposed by the missionaries to be St Michael the
+archangel. It is not unworthy of remark, that the word
+<i>Lama</i>, signifying priest, begins with <i>La</i>, which
+means an angel. The young Lamas go about the towns, dancing to
+the sound of bells and other noisy instruments of music; which,
+they say, is in imitation of the angels, who are painted by the
+Christians as singing in choirs.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 18: Wherever any coincidence appears in the
+ceremonies and externals of the heathen worship, the zealous
+catholics are eager to conceive that these have been borrowed
+from Christianity; unconscious that their own mummeries have all
+been borrowed from heathen worship, and superadded to the
+rational purity of primitive Christianity,--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At the beginning of every month a procession is made in which
+are carried black flags and the figures of devils, and attended
+by drums and music, which they believe chases away the devils.
+They use holy water, which is consecrated with many prayers,
+having gold coral and rice put into it, and is used for driving
+devils from their houses. The country people bring black horses,
+cows and sheep, over which the Lamas say many prayers, as it is
+alleged the devils endeavour to get into cattle of a black
+colour. They cure the sick by blowing on the part affected. They
+have three different kinds of funerals, according to the star
+which rules at the time of death. In one the body is buried in a
+tomb adorned with gilded pyramids. In another the body is burnt
+and the ashes being mixed with clay are formed into images by
+which they swear. In the last, which is reckoned the most
+honourable, the body is exposed to be devoured by certain birds
+resembling cranes. These three forms are used with such as have
+spent good lives, but others are cut in pieces and thrown to the
+dogs. They believe that the good go directly to heaven, and the
+bad to hell; while such as are indifferent remain in an
+intermediate state, whence their souls return to animate noble or
+base creatures according to their deserts. They give their
+children the names of filthy beasts, at the recommendation of
+their priests, that the devil may be loth to meddle with them.
+They believe in one God in Trinity; the son having become a man
+and died, yet is now in heaven. God equal with the father, yet
+man at the same time; and that his mother was a woman who is now
+in heaven: And they compute the time of the death of the son
+nearly as we do the appearance of the Redeemer on earth. They
+believe in a hell as we do, and burn lamps that God may light
+them in the right road in the other world: Yet do they use
+divination after a ridiculous manner. The country of Thibet
+produces several fruits of the same kinds with those grown in
+Europe, together with rice and wheat, and has abundance of
+cattle; but a great part of the land is barren.</p>
+
+<p>The Jesuit fathers Andrada and Marquez went from Delhi in the
+country of the Great Mogul to Thibet along with a caravan of
+pilgrims that were going to visit a famous pagoda. Passing
+through the kingdom of <i>Lahore</i>, they came to the vast
+mountains whence the Ganges flows into the lower plain country of
+Hindostan, seeing many stately temples by the way full of idols.
+At the kingdom of <i>Sirinagur</i> they saw the Ganges flowing
+among snow, the whiteness of which is dazzling to the eyes of
+travellers. At the end of 50 days journey they came to a pagoda
+on the borders of <i>Sirinagur</i>, to which multitudes resort to
+bathe in a spring, the water of which is so hot as to be hardly
+sufferable, and which they imagine cleanses them from sin. The
+people here feed on raw flesh and eat snow, yet are very healthy;
+and the usual order of the sexes is reversed, as the women plough
+and the men spin. Having rested at the town of <i>Mana</i> the
+fathers pursued their journey, almost blinded by travelling
+continually among snow, and came at length to the source of the
+Ganges, which flows from a great lake. They soon afterwards
+entered the kingdom of Thibet, and were honourably received by
+officers sent on purpose from <i>Chaparangue</i>, the residence
+of the king of Thibet. The king and queen listened to their
+doctrines with much complacency, and even admitted their truths
+without dispute, and would not allow them to return to India till
+they promised an oath to come back, when the king not only
+engaged to give them liberty to preach, but that he would build
+them a church, and was greatly pleased with a picture they left
+him of the Virgin and Child.</p>
+
+<p>The fathers returned according to promise, on which the king
+built them a church and was afterwards baptised along with the
+queen, in spite of every thing the Lamas could say to prevent
+him. From merchants who traded to this place from China, the
+fathers understood that it was 60 days journey from
+<i>Chaparangue</i> to China, 40 of which was through the kingdom
+of <i>Usangue</i>, and thence 20 days to China. They likewise
+learnt that Cathay is not a kingdom, but a great city--the
+metropolis of a province subject to the grand <i>Sopo</i>, very
+near China, whence perhaps some give the name of Cathay to
+China[19]. Perhaps this kingdom of Thibet is the empire of
+Prester John, and not Ethiopia as some have believed.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 19: This is evidently erroneous, as we know
+certainly from the travels of Marco Polo and other authorities,
+that Cathay was the northern part of China, once a separate
+kingdom.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After having governed five years, the Count of Vidugueyra was
+ordered by the king to resign to Don Francisco de Mascarennas in
+1628; but as that gentleman had left India for Europe, the
+viceroy resigned the charge of government to Don Luis de Brito,
+bishop of Cochin, and went home to Portugal. In this year the
+king of Acheen made an attempt to gain possession of Malacca,
+against which he sent a fleet of 250 sail, with 20,000 soldiers
+and a great train of artillery. In this great fleet there were 47
+gallies of extraordinary strength, beauty, and size, all near 100
+feet long and of proportional breadth. The king embarked with his
+wife, children, and treasure; but upon some ill omen the fleet
+and army sailed without him, and came before Malacca in the
+beginning of July 1629, the former under the command of
+<i>Marraja</i>, and the latter of Lacsamana, an experienced
+general who had made many conquests for his master. Having landed
+the troops, they were attacked by Antonio Pinto de Fonseca with
+only 200 men, who slew above 300 of the enemy without losing a
+man, and then retreated into the city. Juan Suarez Vivas with 350
+Portuguese, who commanded at Iller, defended that post for some
+time with great gallantry and did great execution among the
+enemy; but at length, overpowered by numbers, was forced to
+retire. Having gained an eminence called mount St Juan, the enemy
+erected a battery there from which they played furiously against
+the fort, which answered them with great spirit. The Capuchin
+convent dedicated to the Mother of God, being considered as of
+great importance for the defence of the fort, was gallantly
+defended for 50 days by Diego Lopez de Fonseca, who on one
+occasion made a sally with 200 Portuguese and defeated 2000 of
+the enemy. On Lopez falling sick, Francisco Carvallo de Maya took
+the command of that post, and defended it till the convent was
+entirely ruined, so that he was obliged to withdraw into the
+city, on which the enemy converted it into a strong post in which
+<i>Lacsamana</i> took up his quarters with 3000 men.
+<i>Marraja</i> occupied mount St Juan, on which he erected a
+large fort; others were established at the convent of St
+Lawrence, at <i>Iller</i> and other places, having strong
+batteries and lines of communication, so that the city was
+invested on all sides by land, while a number of armed boats
+presented all access by sea for relief. Fonseca, who commanded in
+the besieged city, sent out Vivas with 220 Portuguese troops to
+dislodge Lacsamana from his head-quarters on the ruins of the
+Capuchin convent, on which occasion Vivas gained possession of
+the post by a night attack, killing 100 of the enemy, and retired
+with several cannon. The King of <i>Pam</i>, who was in alliance
+with the Portuguese, sent a fleet of <i>paraos</i> with 2000 men
+to the assistance of the town; and Michael Pereyra Botello
+brought five sail from the city of San Thome: Yet these
+reinforcements were insufficient to induce the enemy to retire,
+though they had lost above 4000 men during the siege, while 60
+were slain on the side of the defenders.</p>
+
+<p>Although the bishop of Cochin was informed in June of the
+intended attack on Malacca and the weak state of its garrison, he
+postponed sending any reinforcement, as it was then the dead of
+winter on the Malabar coast, proposing to dispatch succours in
+September. He died however about the end of July 1629, after
+having governed India for nineteen or twenty months. Upon his
+death the next patent of succession was opened, which named Don
+Lorenzo de Cunna, the commander of Goa, to the civil government
+of India, and Nunno Alvarez Pereyra to the military command. Of
+this last name there happened to be two in India, or none. If Don
+Nunno Alvarez Pereyra, a gentleman well known, were meant, the
+title of <i>Don</i> was omitted in the patent; if Nunno Alvarez
+Botello, the sirname teemed wrong. It was thought unlikely that
+the title of Don could be omitted through mistake, as that in
+Portugal is peculiar to certain families. The mistake of name in
+regard to Nunno Alvarez Botello was more probable, as he had long
+gone by the name of <i>Pereyra</i>, in memory of his grandfather
+Alvarez Pereyra, and had dropped that name for <i>Botello</i>
+when he inherited the estate of his father, whose name was
+Botello; yet some continued to call him by the old name, and
+others gave him the new one. The council of Goa, and the Count de
+Linnares after his arrival in India, allowed the pretensions of
+Botello.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime, considering how dangerous delay might prove
+to Malacca in its distress, Nunno Alvarez Botello undertook the
+relief of that place, saying that he would postpone the decision
+of the dispute till his return. By general consent however, he
+went by the title of governor; and by direction of the council of
+Goa, the Chancellor Gonzalo Pinto de Fonseca assumed the
+administration of justice, so that the government was divided
+between him, De Cunna, and Botello, who used such diligence in
+preparing for his expedition to relieve Malacca, that, from the
+2d of August, when the charge of governor was awarded to him, to
+the beginning of September, he had collected 900 Portuguese
+troops, a good train of artillery, a large supply of arms and
+ammunition, and 30 vessels, and was ready to put to sea as soon
+as the weather would allow. He set sail on the 22d of September,
+rather too early, and encountered four several storms during his
+voyage, two of which were so terrible that every one expected to
+be lost. He at length reached <i>Pulobutum</i>, whence he sent
+two vessels to give notice at Malacca of his approach, yet
+arrived himself before them. At Pulobutum he found a vessel
+belonging to Cochin and two from Negapatnam, being some addition
+to his fleet He arrived at Malacca on the afternoon of the 22d
+October 1629, to the great surprise of <i>Lacsamana</i>, as his
+fleet was then in the river <i>Pongor</i>, a league from Malacca,
+and so situated as to be unable to escape.</p>
+
+<p>Botello immediately landed and gave the necessary orders and
+again embarking forced his way up the river through showers of
+bullets, which he repaid with such interest that the enemy
+abandoned their advanced works that same night, and retired to
+that which they had constructed on the ruins of the Capuchin
+monastery. As the river Pongor had not sufficient water for the
+Portuguese ships, Botello embarked a strong detachment in 33
+<i>balones</i> or <i>balames</i>, being country-vessels of
+lighter draught, with which he went in person to view the
+strength and posture of the hostile fleet. Being anxious for the
+safety of their gallies, the enemy abandoned their works at
+<i>Madre de Dios</i> and <i>San Juan</i>, and threw up other
+works with wonderful expedition for the protection of their
+fleet. But having attacked these with much advantage, Botello
+proposed to the enemy to surrender, on which <i>Marraja</i>
+returned a civil but determined refusal. His situation being
+desperate, Marraja endeavoured the night to escape with the
+smaller vessels, leaving his large gallies at the mercy of the
+Portuguese, but was prevented by the vigilance and bravery of
+Vasquez de Evora, who cut off many of his men, not without some
+loss on his own side, having one of his arms carried off. The
+enemy now endeavoured to make use of their formidable gallies,
+and the chief among them called the <i>Terror of the World</i>
+was seen in motion; on which Botello sent the admiral of the
+Portuguese gallies, Francisco Lopez to attack her, which he did
+with great gallantry, passing through clouds of smoke, and a
+tremendous fire of artillery, and after two hours hard fighting,
+carried her by boarding, after killing 500 of her men out of 700,
+with the loss only of seven of his own men.</p>
+
+<p>On the 25th of November, the enemy set fire to a galley that
+was full of women whom they had brought to people Malacca, and
+made a fresh attempt to break through the Portuguese fleet, but
+without success, many of them being slain and taken, and great
+numbers leapt into the water, and fled to the woods, where they
+were devoured by wild beasts. Lacsamana then hung out a flag of
+truce, and sent a deputation to treat with Botello, who answered
+that he would listen to no proposals till they restored Pedro de
+Abren the Portuguese ambassador, whom they kept prisoner; and as
+they delayed compliance; the Portuguese cannon recommenced a
+destructive fire. On the last day of November, Botello got notice
+that <i>Marraja</i> the Acheen admiral was slain, and that the
+king <i>Pam</i> was approaching to the assistance of the
+Portuguese with 100 sail of vessels. Botello went immediately to
+visit him, and was received with the customary ceremonies used by
+the eastern princes to the Portuguese governors. After
+interchanging presents and mutual compliments, Botello returned
+to his post, where he found the Portuguese rather slackening
+their efforts in consequence of a desperate cannonade from the
+enemy. But on the 4th of December, the enemy sent fresh proposals
+for an accommodation, accompanied by the ambassador Abreu,
+requiring only to be allowed to withdraw with three of their
+gallies and 4000 men, being all that remained of 20,000 with
+which they had invested Malacca. In answer to this, they were
+told they must surrender at discretion on promise of life; and as
+Lacsamana hesitated to accept such humiliating terms, Botello
+assaulted and forced all his works, where many of the enemy were
+put to the sword; some throwing themselves into the river to swim
+across were drowned, and others who fled to the woods were
+devoured by beasts of prey. In fine, Botello obtained the most
+glorious victory that was ever gained by the Portuguese in India;
+as of all the fleet which came against Malacca, not a single
+vessel got away, and of the large army, not one man escaped death
+or captivity. So great was the booty, that the whole of the
+Portuguese troops and mariners were enriched, Botello reserving
+nothing to his own share but a <i>parrot</i> which had been much
+valued by Lacsamana.</p>
+
+<p>On going to Malacca after this great victory, he entreated to
+be allowed to walk barefooted and unaccompanied to church, that
+he might humbly prostrate himself before the Lord of Hosts, in
+acknowledgement that the victory was entirely due to God, and not
+to the Portuguese valour; but he was constrained to enter the
+city in triumph. The streets were crowded with men, and the
+windows and house tops thronged with women, who sprinkled the
+hero with sweet waters and strewed flowers in his path. The music
+could not be heard for the noise of cannon, and all the city was
+filled with extreme joy. At this time an embassy came from the
+king of <i>Pera</i>, who was tributary to the king of
+<i>Acheen</i>, offering to pay tribute to the king of Portugal,
+and to deliver up a large treasure left in his custody belonging
+to the king of Acheen and his general <i>Lacsamana</i>. Don
+Jerome de Silveyra was sent with eleven ships to receive the
+treasure, and establish a treaty with the king of <i>Pera</i>,
+who performed his promise, and the treasure was applied to pay
+the men and refit the fleet.</p>
+
+<p>About the middle of January 1630, Botello being off the
+straits of Cincapura to secure the ships expected from China
+against the Hollanders, <i>Lacsamana</i> and two other officers
+who had fled to the woods were brought prisoners to him, having
+been taken by the king of Pam. Owing to contrary winds, he was
+unable to get up with five Dutch ships that were about <i>Pulo
+Laer</i>, and which took a Portuguese galliot coming from China.
+He returned therefore to Malacca to refit his ships, and resolved
+to attempt the Dutch fort of <i>Jacatara</i>[20], the best which
+was possessed by <i>these rebels</i> in all Asia. In the first
+place, he sent Antonio de Sousa Coutinno in the admiral galley
+lately belonging to <i>Lacsamana</i> called the <i>Terror of the
+World</i>, in which Lacsamana was now prisoner, to Goa; directing
+that Lacsamana should be sent to Portugal, and that this large
+and magnificent galley should be given as a present to the city
+of Goa. In this galley there was one cannon made of
+<i>tombac</i>, a precious sort of metal, which was valued at
+above 7000 ducats, and another cannon reckoned still more
+valuable on account of its curious workmanship. Lacsamana died
+before he could be carried to Portugal.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 20: In the neighbourhood of which was
+afterwards built the city of Batavia, the emporium at the Dutch
+trade in the east, now subject to Britain.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Learning that the Count de Linnares, now viceroy of India, had
+arrived at Goa in October 1629, Botello transmitted to him an
+account of all that he had done, and desired his assistance and
+approbation to continue in these parts in order to carry on his
+designs against the English and Hollanders. About the end of
+April 1630, the viceroy not only sent him every thing he asked,
+but gave him full power to act as governor general, without being
+obliged to wait for orders from Goa. In the meantime Botello
+sailed with 27 ships towards the straits of Cincapura, and put in
+at <i>Jambo</i>[21], a place abounding in pepper, and on that
+account much resorted to by the Dutch and English. At this place
+he took two large ships after a stout resistance; and going
+higher up the river he discovered another ship so large and
+beautiful that he designed to make use of her for his entrance
+into Goa; but a ball falling into her powder-room, blew her up.
+After employing three weeks in working up the river, Botello
+learnt that at a town about two leagues distant, two Dutch ships
+had taken shelter, and being desirous of taking them, he manned
+14 light vessels with which he went to view the place, on which
+he was opposed by 26 sail of small vessels manned with Hollanders
+and natives, whom he put to flight; but on viewing the place he
+found it impracticable to attempt the two vessels, on account of
+the strength of the works by which they were protected. He
+destroyed therefore all the neighbourhood with tire and sword,
+and then sailed down the river, intending to proceed against
+<i>Jacatara</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 21: Probably <i>Jambee</i> on the N.E. side
+of Sumatra, in about lat. 18 20' S. to the S.E. of the straits of
+Cincapura.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>While on his way thither, a Dutch ship of 24 guns was met,
+which was laden with powder for their forts, and on being
+attacked and boarded by some of his ships she took fire. In this
+situation, Botello gave orders for his ships to draw off from the
+danger, and on going up in his galliot to bring off Antonio
+Mascarennas, the Dutch ship blew up while Botello was passing her
+stern, by which his galliot was instantly sunk. His body was
+found and taken to Malacca, where it was honourably interred.</p>
+
+<p>Don Michael de Noronna, Count de Linnares, arrived at Goa as
+viceroy of India in October 1629. About the commencement of his
+administration, Constantine de Sa, who commanded in Ceylon,
+marched from Columbo, which he left almost without any garrison,
+meaning to reduce the interior provinces to subjection. His force
+consisted of 400 Portuguese, with a considerable number of
+Christian Chingalese, in whose fidelity he reposed too much
+confidence, although a Franciscan friar who resided among the
+enemy, and his own officers warned him of the danger to which he
+was exposed. He penetrated to the city of <i>Uva</i> with very
+little opposition, which he destroyed; but was met on his return
+by the king of Candy with a considerable army, to whom the
+greatest part of the Christian Chingalese immediately deserted,
+and aided him in battle against the Portuguese, now reduced to
+400 of their own troops and 200 Chingalese who remained faithful.
+De Sa and his inconsiderable army fought against prodigious odds
+during three entire days, but the general being slain, the
+Portuguese troops fell into disorder, and were all slain or taken
+prisoners.</p>
+
+<p>Immediately after this victory, the king of Candy laid siege
+to Columbo with an army of 50,000 men, while the garrison under
+Launcelot de Leixas did not exceed 400, even including the
+priests and monks. The garrison was reduced to extreme distress,
+and even threatened with famine, when a ship from Cochin brought
+them a relief of provisions and ammunition; after which five
+ships came from San Thome and one from Goa. Though not mentioned
+by De Faria, it appears that the siege was now raised; as at a
+subsequent period, after the natives had reduced almost the whole
+of the island, the kings of Candy, Uva, and Matale again laid
+siege to Columbo with an army of 20,000 men. At this time five
+ships came from Goa to carry off the cinnamon to Portugal, on
+which the enemy raised the siege, believing these ships had come
+to relieve and reinforce the garrison.</p>
+
+<p>The viceroy now appointed Don George de Almeyda to the command
+in Ceylon, who sailed from Goa for that place on the 19th of
+February 1631, in the great galley taken by Botello when he
+destroyed the fleet of Acheen: But encountering a storm off Cape
+Comorin, the galley was ready to founder, on which Almeyda took
+to the boat with 29 persons, and reached one of the Maldive
+islands after four days of incredible distress. Going over from
+thence to Cochin, he received a reinforcement of some Portuguese
+troops, with 500 kafrs and 800 Canarin lascars, and a supply of
+money, ammunition, and provisions. Having raised some more men at
+Cochin, Almeyda sailed again for Ceylon, where he arrived on the
+21st October 1631, and landed at Columbo. He marched immediately
+against the enemy, though then the rainy season, and was soon
+forced to desist, as the country was mostly overflowed, and at
+this season the trees swarm with <i>leeches</i>, which drop down
+upon the men as they pass, and bleed them to death.</p>
+
+<p>On the return of fine weather, Almeyda marched again on the
+5th January 1632, though with much difficulty, as the waters were
+still out, so that the men had often to wade up to their breasts.
+Being opposed by the enemy near the fort of <i>Tranqueyra
+Grande</i>, many of them were slain, as the general gave three or
+four pistoles for every head that was brought him. At another
+pass, the enemy were defended, to the number of 6000 men, by some
+works, but on being attacked, and many of them killed, the rest
+fled, destroying every thing they could not carry away. After
+these successes, many of the natives came in, and submitted, and
+were treated with kindness; but as others hid themselves in hopes
+of getting away to join the enemy, Almeyda caused them to be
+apprehended, and given as slaves among his officers. One was
+delivered to the Kafrs, who, in sight of his wife and children,
+cut him immediately in pieces, which they divided among them to
+eat. At <i>Cardevola</i>, the enemy had two forts, which were
+carried by escalade. The enemy fled in every quarter, making no
+stand till they arrived at the foot of the mountains of Candy,
+where they were defeated, and the forts of <i>Manicravare</i>,
+<i>Safragam</i>, <i>Maluana</i>, and <i>Caliture</i>, were
+immediately afterwards reduced, as was the district of Matura, of
+which the commander of the Chingalese Christians, who deserted
+from de Sa, had made himself king. At last the king of Candy sent
+to implore peace, which was granted at the intercession of the
+priests and monks. In fine, Almeyda not only restored the
+reputation of the Portuguese arms in Ceylon, but increased it,
+and established the government of the island in good order. He
+was removed, however, by the succeeding viceroy, and returned to
+Goa poor, and full of honour, where he died poor, more from grief
+than age; and no sooner was he deprived of the command, than all
+he had gained was speedily lost, though it was again recovered by
+Diego de Melo y Castro in 1633.</p>
+
+<p>About the end of the year 1635, the Count de Linares resigned
+the government of India to Pedro de Silva, who was usually called
+<i>Mole</i> or the Soft, on account of the easiness of his
+disposition. He disliked the government so much, that he was
+often heard to exclaim, "God forgive those who appointed me
+viceroy, as I am not fit for the office." He held the government,
+however, nearly four years, and died in the end of June 1639,
+when he was succeeded as governor by Antonio Tellez de Silva,
+whose name was found in one of the royal patents, which was now
+opened. Tellez happened to be absent from Goa at the time, for
+which reason, the archbishop of Goa, who was next in nomination,
+assumed the government in his name, and sent notice to him of his
+appointment, and in the meantime, employed himself in fitting out
+twelve ships of war for the relief of Malacca, then threatened by
+the king of Acheen and the Hollanders. At this time nine Dutch
+ships entered the river of Goa, and set on fire three Portuguese
+galleons then lying at <i>Marmugam</i>, after which they retired
+without loss or opposition, because the fort was destitute of men
+and ammunition. Antonio Tellez arrived immediately after this
+unfortunate accident, at which he was exceedingly enraged, not so
+much for the actual loss, as that the enemy should be able to
+insult the harbour of the Portuguese Indian capital without harm
+or resistance. On the back of this misfortune, news came that the
+Dutch fleet of 12 sail, and that of Acheen of 35 gallies, were in
+sight of Malacca. While occupied in making great preparations to
+relieve Malacca, and to remedy other disorders then subsisting in
+Portuguese India, he was superseded in the government of India,
+by the arrival of Juan de Silva Tello, as viceroy, towards the
+end of 1640; on which Antonio Tellez, having resigned the sword
+of command, immediately embarked for Portugal, not thinking
+proper to serve as admiral where he had enjoyed the supreme
+authority.</p>
+
+<p>Other authors will write the actions of the new viceroy, Juan
+de Silva Tello, for he begins his task where I end mine.[22]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 22: Manuel de Faria rightly thought proper
+to close his work at this period, which was immediately followed
+by the expulsion of the Portuguese from Malacca and Ceylon, and
+many other of their Indian possessions; where, except a few
+inconsiderable factories, they now only hold Goa, Diu, and Macao,
+and even these possess very little trade, and no political
+importance. From their subjection to the crown of Spain, the
+Dutch, who had thrown off the iron yoke of the Austrian princes
+of Spain, revenged their own injuries upon the Portuguese in
+India: And in the present age, at the distance of 160 years,
+having themselves fallen under the heavy yoke of the modern
+French Caesar, they have been stripped by Britain of every
+foreign possession in Asia, Africa, and America.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Occurrences in Pegu, Martavan, Pram, Siam, and other
+places.</i>[23]</p>
+
+<p>We here propose to give some account of the exploits of the
+<i>black</i> king of Siam, in whose character there was a strange
+mixture of virtues and vices. In the year 1544, the king of the
+<i>Birmans</i> [24] besieged the city of <i>Martavan</i> by sea
+and land, being the metropolis of the great and flourishing
+kingdom of that name, which had a revenue of three millions of
+gold. <i>Chaubainaa</i> was then king of Martavan, and fell from
+the height of fortune to the depth of misery. The Birman fleet,
+on this occasion, consisted of 700 sail, 100 of which were large
+gallies, in which were 700 Portuguese, commanded by one Juan
+Cayero, who was reputed a commander of courage and conduct. After
+a siege of some months, during which the Birmans lost 12,000 men
+in five general assaults, <i>Chaubainaa</i> found himself unable
+to withstand the power of his enemy, being reduced to such
+extremity that the garrison had already eaten 3000 elephants. He
+offered, therefore, to capitulate, but all terms were refused by
+the enemy; on which he determined to make use of the Portuguese,
+to whom he had always been just and friendly: But favours
+received from a person in prosperity, are forgotten when the
+benefactor falls into adversity. He sent therefore one Seixas, a
+Portuguese in his service, to make an offer to Cayero, if he
+would receive himself, his family, and treasures, into the four
+ships which he commanded; that he would give half the treasure to
+the king of Portugal, to whom he would become vassal, paying such
+tribute as might be agreed on, being satisfied that he could
+recover his kingdom with the assistance of 2000 Portuguese
+troops, whom he proposed to take into his pay. Cayero consulted
+with his principal officers on this proposition, and asked
+Seixas, in their presence, what might be the amount of treasure
+belonging to the king of Martavan. Seixas said, that he had not
+seen the whole, but affirmed that he had seen enough in gold and
+jewels to load two ships, and as much silver as would load four
+or five. Envious of the prodigious fortune that Cayero might make
+by accepting this offer, the Portuguese officers threatened to
+delate him to the Birman sovereign, if he consented, and the
+proposal was accordingly refused.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 23: De Faria, III. 347--364. Both as in a
+great measure unconnected with the Portuguese transactions, and
+as not improbably derived from the worse than suspicious source
+of Fernand Mendez de Pinro, these very problematical occurrences
+have been kept by themselves, which indeed they are in de Faria.
+After this opinion respecting their more than doubtful
+authenticity, it would be a waste of labour to attempt
+illustrating their geographical obscurities. Indeed the geography
+of India beyond the Ganges, is still involved in almost
+impenetrable darkness, from the Bay of Bengal to the empire of
+China.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 24: Called always the <i>Bramas</i> by De
+Faria.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The king of Martavan was astonished at the rejection of his
+proposals, and finding Seixas determined to withdraw from the
+danger that menaced the city, made him a present of a pair of
+bracelets, which were afterwards sold to the governor of
+<i>Narsinga</i> for 80,000 ducats. Despairing of relief or
+retreat, the king of Martavan now determined to set his capital
+on fire, and sallying out at the head of the few men that
+remained, to die honourably fighting against his enemies. But
+that night, one of his principal officers deserted to the enemy,
+and gave notice of his intention. Thus betrayed, he surrendered
+on promise of having his own life, and those of his wife and
+children spared, and being allowed to end his days in retirement.
+These terms were readily granted, as the conqueror meant to
+perform no part of his engagement.</p>
+
+<p>From the gate of the city to the tent of the Birman king, at
+the distance of a league, a double lane of musketeers of sundry
+nations was formed, the Portuguese under Cayero being stationed
+nearest the gate, through which the captives were to march in
+procession. In the first place, came the queen of Martavan in a
+chair, her two sons and two daughters being carried in two other
+chairs. These were surrounded by forty beautiful young ladies,
+led by an equal number of old ladies, and attended by a great
+number of <i>Talegrepos</i>, who are a kind of monks or religious
+men, habited like Capuchins, who prayed with and comforted the
+captives. Then followed the king of Martavan, seated on a small
+she elephant, clothed in black velvet, having his head, beard,
+and eyebrows shaved, and a rope about his neck. On seeing the
+Portuguese, he refused to proceed till they were removed, after
+which he went on. Being come into the presence of the king of the
+Birmans, he cast himself at his feet; and being unable to speak
+owing to grief, the <i>Raolim</i> of <i>Mounay</i>,
+<i>Talaypor</i>, or chief priest of Martavan, who was esteemed a
+saint, made a harangue in his behalf, which had been sufficient
+to have moved compassion from any other than the obdurate tyrant
+to whom it was addressed, who immediately ordered the miserable
+king, with his wife, children, and attendant ladies, into
+confinement. For the two following days, a number of men were
+employed to remove the public treasure of Martavan, amounting to
+100 millions in gold; and on the third day, the army was allowed
+indiscriminate plunder, which lasted for four days, and was
+estimated at 12 millions. Then the city was burnt, and above
+60,000 persons were supposed to have perished by fire and sword,
+an equal number being reduced to slavery. On this occasion, 2000
+temples and 40,000 houses were destroyed.</p>
+
+<p>On the morning after the destruction of the city, 21 gibbets
+were erected on a neighbouring hill called Beydao, which were
+surrounded by a strong guard of cavalry, and on which the queen,
+with her children and attendants, to the number in all of 140
+persons, were all hung up by the feet. The king of Martavan, with
+50 men of the highest quality, were flung into the sea with
+stones about their necks. At this barbarous spectacle, the army
+of the Birmans mutinied, and for some time the king was in
+imminent danger. Leaving a sufficient number of people to rebuild
+the ruined city, the Birman king returned to Pegu with the rest
+of his army, accompanied by Juan Cayero, and his 700 Portuguese.
+Four Portuguese remained at Martavan, among whom was Juan Falcam;
+who, instead of assisting <i>Fernan Mendez Pinta</i>, sent by
+Pedro de Faria, the commander of Malacca, to confirm the peace
+which subsisted with the late king of Martavan, accused him to
+the governor of the town as an enemy to the king of the Birmans.
+On this false accusation, the governor seized the vessel
+commanded by Pinto, in which were goods to the value of 100,000
+ducats, killed the master and some others, and sent the rest
+prisoners to Pegu. This false dealing was not new in Falcam, who
+had deserted from the late unfortunate king of Martavan, after
+having received many benefits from him.</p>
+
+<p>Instead of being allowed to enjoy the fruits of his victories
+in peace, the king of the Birmans was obliged to engage in a new
+war with the king of Siam, who endeavoured to recover the kingdom
+of Tangu, which had been wrested from him. For this purpose, in
+March 1546, he embarked with 900,000 men in 12,000 vessels, on
+the river <i>Ansedaa</i>, out of which he passed in the month of
+April into the river <i>Pichau Malacoa</i>, and invested the city
+of <i>Prom</i>. The king of this territory was recently dead,
+leaving his successor, only thirteen years of age, who was
+married to a daughter of the king of Ava, from whom he looked for
+the assistance of 60,000 men. For this reason, the king of Siam
+pressed the siege, that he might gain the city before the arrival
+of the expected succours. After six days, the queen of Prom, who
+administered the government, offered to become tributary if he
+would grant a peace; but the king insisted that she should put
+herself into his hands with all her treasure. She refused these
+degrading terms, knowing his perfidious character, and resolved
+to defend the city to the last extremity. The king of Siam
+accordingly gave several assaults, in all of which he was
+repulsed, and in a short time, lost above 80,000 of his men,
+partly by the sword, and partly by a pestilential disease, which
+raged in his army, 500 Portuguese who were in his service
+perishing among the rest.</p>
+
+<p>Being unable to take the place by assault, the king of Siam
+caused a great mount to be raised, which overlooked the city, and
+was planted with a great number of cannon, by which the defenders
+were prodigiously annoyed. Upon this, 5000 men sallied from the
+city, and destroyed the mount, killing 16,000 of the enemy, and
+carrying off 80 pieces of cannon. In this affair the king of Siam
+was wounded; and being greatly enraged against a body of 2000
+Portuguese, who were in his pay, and had the guard of the mount,
+he caused them all to be massacred. About the end of August,
+<i>Xemin Maletay</i>, one of the four principal officers, who
+commanded in Prom, treacherously betrayed the city to the king of
+Siam, who ordered it to be utterly destroyed with fire and sword.
+Two thousand children were cut in pieces, and given as food to
+the elephants. The queen was publicly whipped, and given up to
+the lust of the soldiers till she died. The young king was tied
+to her dead body, and cast into the river; and above 300
+principal nobles were impaled. The king of Ava, who was marching
+to the assistance of his sister, understood the unfortunate
+events of Prom, but came to battle with the traitor <i>Zemin</i>,
+who had betrayed her, who was at the head of a numerous army. In
+this battle all the soldiers of Ava were slain except 800, after
+making a prodigious slaughter among the enemy; after which the
+king of Siam came up with a part of his army, and slew the
+remaining 800 men of Ava, with the loss of 12,000 of his own men,
+and then beheaded the traitor <i>Zemin</i>. He then went up the
+river <i>Queytor</i>, with 60,000 men in 1000 boats, and coming
+to the port of Ava, about the middle of October, he burnt above
+2000 vessels, and several villages, with the loss of 8000 of his
+men, among whom were 62 Portuguese. Understanding that the city
+of Ava was defended by 20,000 men, 30,000 of which people had
+slain 150,000 of his army at <i>Maletay</i>, and that the king of
+<i>Pegu</i> was coming to their relief, he returned in all haste
+to <i>Prom</i>, where he fortified himself, and sent an
+ambassador to the emperor of <i>Calaminam</i>, with rich
+presents, and the offer of an extensive territory, on condition
+of sending him effectual succours.</p>
+
+<p>The empire of <i>Calaminam</i> is said to be 300 leagues in
+length and as much in breadth, having been formerly divided into
+27 kingdoms, all using the same language, beautified with many
+cities and towns, and very fertile, containing abundance of all
+the productions of Asia. The name of the metropolis is
+<i>Timphan</i>, which is seated on the river <i>Pitni</i>, on
+which there are innumerable boats. It is surrounded by two strong
+and beautiful walls, contains 400,000 inhabitants, with many
+stately palaces and fine gardens, having 2500 temples belonging
+to 24 different sects. Some of these use bloody sacrifices. The
+women are very beautiful, yet chaste, two qualities that seldom
+go together. In their law-suits, O happy country! they employ no
+attornies, solicitors, or proctors, and every dispute is decided
+at one hearing. This kingdom maintains 1,700,000 soldiers,
+400,000 of which are horse, and has 6000 elephants. On account of
+their prodigious number, the emperor assumes the title of <i>Lord
+of the Elephants</i>, his revenue exceeding 20 millions. There
+are some remnants of Christianity among these people, as they
+believe in the blessed Trinity, and make the sign of the cross
+when they sneeze.</p>
+
+<p>Such was the great empire of <i>Calaminam</i> to which the
+king of the Birmans[25], sent his ambassador. On his return, the
+king sent 150,000 men in 1300 boats against the city of
+<i>Sabadii</i>, 130 leagues distant to the north-east. The
+general of this army, named <i>Chaunigrem</i>, lost many of his
+men in several assaults, after which he raised two mounts whence
+he did much harm to the city: But the besieged sallying out,
+killed at one time 8000 and at another 5000 of his men. Leaving
+this siege for a time and the affairs of the king of the
+<i>Birmans</i>, we purpose to relate what was done at
+<i>Siam</i>, in order to treat of them both together.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 25: Formerly this was attributed to the
+king of <i>Siam</i>: But the whole story of this section is so
+incredible and absurd as not to merit any observations. It is
+merely retained from De Faria, as an instance of the fables of
+Fernand Mendez de Pinto.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The king of <i>Chiammay</i>, after destroying 30,000 men that
+had guarded the frontiers, besieged the city of <i>Guitivam</i>
+belonging to the king of <i>Siam</i>, who immediately drew
+together an army of 500,000 men, in which was a body of 120
+Portuguese in which he placed great reliance. This vast multitude
+was conveyed along the river in 3000 boats, while 4000 elephants
+and 200 pieces of cannon were sent by land. He found the enemy
+had 300,000 men and 2000 boats. The king of Siam gave the command
+of his vast army to three generals, two of whom were Turks, and
+the third was Dominic Seixas a Portuguese. At first the
+<i>Siamese</i> were worsted, but recovering their order they
+gained a complete victory, in which 130,000 of the enemy were
+slain, 40,000 of whom were excellent cavalry, with the loss of
+50,000 Siamese, all of whom were the worst troops in their army.
+After this victory the king of Siam marched against the queen of
+<i>Guibem</i>, who had allowed the enemy to pass through her
+country; and entering the city of <i>Fumbacar</i> spared neither
+age nor sex. Being besieged in her capital of <i>Guirar</i>, the
+queen agreed to pay an yearly tribute of 60,000 ducats, and gave
+her son as an hostage. After this the king of Siam advanced to
+the city of <i>Taysiram</i>, to which place he thought the king
+of Chiammay had fled, destroying every thing in his course with
+fire and sword, only sparing the women; but winter coming on he
+returned to Siam.</p>
+
+<p>On his return to his court of <i>Odiaa</i> or <i>Odiaz</i>, he
+was poisoned by his queen, then big with child by one of her
+servants; but before he died he caused his eldest son, then
+young, to be declared king. He left 30,000 ducats to the
+Portuguese then in his service, and gave orders that they should
+pay no duties in any of his ports for three years. The adulterous
+queen, being near the time of her delivery, poisoned her lawful
+son, married her servant, and caused him to be proclaimed king.
+But in a short time they were both slain at a feast by the King
+of <i>Cambodia</i> and <i>Oya Pansilaco</i>.</p>
+
+<p>There being no lawful heir to the kingdom of Siam,
+<i>Pretiel</i> a religious <i>Talagrepo</i>, bastard brother to
+him who was poisoned, was raised to the throne by common consent
+in the beginning of the year 1549. Seeing the affairs of Siam in
+confusion, the king of the Birmans, who was likewise king of
+Pegu, resolved to conquer that kingdom. For this purpose he
+raised an army of 800,000 men, of which 40,000 were horse, and
+60,000 armed with muskets, 1000 being Portuguese. He had 20,000
+elephants, 1000 cannon drawn by oxen and <i>abadias</i>[26], and
+1000 ammunition waggons drawn by buffaloes. The Portuguese troops
+in his service, were commanded by Diego Suarez de Mello, commonly
+called the Gallego, who went out to India in 1538. In 1542 this
+man became a pirate in the neighbourhood of Mozambique. In 1547
+he was at the relief of Malacca: And now in 1549, being in the
+service of the king of the Birmans, was worth four millions in
+jewels and other valuables, had a pension of 200,000 ducats
+yearly, was stiled the king's brother, and was supreme governor
+of the kingdom and general in chief of the army. With this
+prodigious army the king of the Birmans, after one repulse, took
+the fort of <i>Tapuram</i> by assault, which was defended by 2000
+Siamese, all of whom he put to the sword in revenge for the loss
+of 3000 of his own men in the two assaults. In the prosecution of
+his march, the city of Juvopisam surrendered, after which he set
+down before the city of Odiaa the capital of Siam. Diego Suarez
+the commander in chief gave a general assault on the city, in
+which he was repulsed with the loss of 10,000 men: Another
+attempt was made by means of elephants, but with no better
+success. The king offered 500,000 ducats to any one who would
+betray one of the gates to him; which coming to the knowledge of
+<i>Oya Pansiloco</i>, who commanded in the city, he opened a gate
+and sent word to the king to bring the money as he waited to
+receive it. After spending five months in the siege, during which
+he lost 150,000 men, news came that <i>Xemindoo</i> had rebelled
+at Pegu where he had slain 15,000 men that opposed him. When this
+was known in the camp, 120,000 Peguers deserted, in hatred to the
+king of the Birmans who oppressed them, and in revenge of the
+insolence of Diego Suarez their general in chief.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 26: Rhinoceroses, which are so brutishly
+ferocious as in no instance to have been tamed to labour, or to
+have ever shewn the slightest degree of docility. Being of
+enormous strength, the only way of preserving them when in
+custody, is in a sling; so that on the first attempt to more
+forwards, they are immediately raised from the
+ground.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p><i>Xemindoo</i> was of the ancient blood royal of Pegu, and
+being a priest was esteemed as a great saint. On one occasion he
+preached so eloquently against the tyranny and oppression which
+the Peguers suffered under the Birmans, that he was taken from
+the pulpit and proclaimed king of Pegu. On this he slew 8000
+Birmans that guarded the palace, and seizing the royal treasure,
+he got possession of all the strong-holds in a short time, and
+the whole kingdom submitted to his authority. The armies of the
+rival kings met within two leagues of the city of Pegu; that of
+the Birmans amounting to 350,000 men, while <i>Xemindoo</i> had
+600,000; yet Xemindoo was defeated with the loss of 300,000 men,
+while the Birmans lost 60,000. The victorious king of the Birmans
+immediately entered Pegu, where he slew a vast multitude of the
+inhabitants, and recovered his treasure. Meanwhile the city of
+<i>Martavan</i> declared for <i>Xemindoo</i>, and massacred the
+garrison of 2000 Birmans. <i>Zemin</i> did the same in the city
+of <i>Zatam</i> where he commanded. The king marched towards him,
+but he contrived to have him murdered by the way; on which
+<i>Zemin</i> was proclaimed king by his followers, and soon
+raised an army of 30,000 men. <i>Chaumigrem</i>, brother to the
+dead king, plundered the palace and city, and then fled to
+<i>Tangu</i> where he was born. In four months <i>Zemin</i>
+became so odious to his new subjects by his tyranny, that many of
+them fled to <i>Xemindoo</i>, who was soon at the head of 60,000
+men.</p>
+
+<p>Some short time before this, as Diego Suarez was passing the
+house of a rich merchant on the day of his daughter's intended
+marriage, being struck by the great beauty of the bride, he
+attempted to carry her off by force, killing the bridegroom and
+others who came to her rescue, and the bride strangled herself to
+avoid the dishonour. As the father expected no justice while that
+king reigned, he shut himself up till <i>Zemin</i> got possession
+of the throne, on which he so published his wrongs about the
+city, that 50,000 of the people joined with him in demanding
+justice. Fearing evil consequences, <i>Zemin</i> caused Suarez to
+be apprehended and delivered up to the people, by whom he was
+stoned to death. His house was plundered, and as much less
+treasure was found than he was supposed to be worth, he was
+believed to have buried the rest.</p>
+
+<p><i>Zemin</i> soon followed Suarez, for his subjects being
+unable to endure his cruelty and avarice, fled in great numbers
+to Xemindoo, who was now master of some considerable towns.
+Xemindoo having gathered an army of 200,000 men and 5000
+elephants, marched to the city of Pegu, near which he was
+encountered by Zemin at the head of 800,000 men. The battle was
+long doubtful, but at last Gonzalo Neto, who served under
+<i>Xemindoo</i> with 80 Portuguese, killed <i>Zemin</i> with a
+musket ball, on which his army fled, and <i>Xemindoo</i> got
+possession of the capital. This happened on the 3d of February
+1550. Gonzalo was rewarded with a gift of 10,000 crowns, and 5000
+were divided among his companions.</p>
+
+<p><i>Chaumigrem</i>, who had fled the year before to
+<i>Tangu</i>, hearing that <i>Xemindoo</i> had disbanded most of
+his forces, marched against him and obtained a complete victory,
+by which the kingdom of Pegu was again reduced under the
+authority of the Birmans. Xemindoo was taken some time afterwards
+and put to death. <i>Chaumigrem</i> being now king of the Birmans
+and of Pegu, went to war against Siam, with an army of 1,700,000
+men, and 17,000 elephants, having a considerable body of
+Portuguese in his service. All this army came to ruin, and the
+kingdom of Pegu was soon afterwards reduced to subjection by the
+king of Aracan, as formerly related.</p>
+
+<p>The kingdom of Siam, though much harassed by these invasions,
+still held out, and, in 1627, was possessed by the <i>black</i>
+king, so called because he really was of a black colour, though
+all the inhabitants of that country are fair complexioned[27]. In
+1621, this <i>black</i> king of Siam sent ambassadors to Goa,
+desiring that some Franciscans might be sent to preach the gospel
+in his dominions. Accordingly, father Andrew, of the convent of
+the Holy Ghost, went to <i>Odiaa</i>[28], where he was received
+honourably, and got leave to erect a church, which was done at
+the king's expence. He likewise offered great riches to the
+venerable father, who constantly refused his offers, to the great
+admiration and astonishment of the king. This <i>black</i> king
+of Siam was of small stature, of an evil presence, and an
+extraordinarily compound character, of great wickedness, mixed
+with great generosity. Although cruel men are for the most part
+cowards, he was at the same time exceedingly cruel, and very
+valiant; and though tyrants are generally covetous, he was
+extremely liberal; being barbarous in some parts of his conduct,
+and generous and benevolent in others. Not satisfied with putting
+thieves and robbers to ordinary deaths, he was in use to have
+them torn in pieces in his presence by tigers and crocodiles for
+his amusement. Understanding that one of his vassal kings
+intended to rebel, he had him shut up in a cage, and fed him with
+morsels of his own flesh torn from his body, after which he had
+him fried in a pan. On one occasion he slew seven ladies
+belonging to the court, only because they walked too quick; and
+on another occasion he cut off the legs of three others, because
+they staid too long when sent by him for some money to give to
+certain Portuguese. He even extended his severity to animals;
+having cut off the paw of a favourite monkey for putting it into
+a box containing some curiosities. A valuable horse was ordered
+to be beheaded, in presence of his other horses, because he did
+not stop when he checked him. A tiger that did not immediately
+seize a criminal thrown to him, was ordered to be beheaded as a
+coward. Yet had this cruel and capricious tyrant many estimable
+virtues. He kept his word inviolable; was rigorous in the
+execution of justice; liberal in his gifts; and often merciful to
+those who offended him. Having at one time sent a Portuguese to
+Malacca with money to purchase some commodities; this man, after
+buying them lost them all at play, and yet had the boldness to
+return to the king, who even received him kindly, saying that he
+valued the confidence reposed in his generosity more than the
+goods he ought to have brought. He shewed much respect to the
+Christian priests and missionaries, and gave great encouragement
+to the propagation of the gospel in his dominions. His valour was
+without the smallest stain.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 27: De Faria seems now to drop the fables
+of Fernan Mendez Pinto, and to relate real events in the
+remainder of this section.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 28: More properly Ythia, vulgarly called
+Siam.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The proper name of the kingdom we call <i>Siam</i>, is
+<i>Sornace</i>[29]. It extends along the coast for 700 leagues,
+and its width inland is 260. Most part of the country consists of
+fertile plains, watered by many rivers, producing provisions of
+all sorts in vast abundance. The hills are covered with a variety
+of trees, among which there are abundance of ebony, brasilwood,
+and <i>Angelin</i>. It contains many mines of sulphur, saltpetre,
+tin, iron, silver, gold, sapphires, and rubies; and produces much
+sweet-smelling wood, benzoin, wax, cinnamon, pepper, ginger,
+cardamunis, sugar, honey, silk, and cotton. The royal revenue is
+about thirteen millions. The kingdom contains 13,000 cities and
+towns, besides innumerable villages. All the towns are walled;
+but the people for the most part are weak timorous and unwarlike.
+The coast is upon both seas; that which is on the sea of India,
+or bay of Bengal, containing the sea ports of
+<i>Junzalam</i>[30], and <i>Tanasserim</i>; while on the coast of
+the China sea, are <i>Mompolocata</i>, <i>Cey</i>, <i>Lugor</i>,
+<i>Chinbu</i>, and <i>Perdio</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 29: The oriental term <i>Shan</i>, probably
+derived from the inhabitants of Pegu; but the Siamese call
+themselves <i>Tai</i>, or freemen, and their country <i>Meuang
+tai</i>, or the country of freemen--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 30: Otherwise called
+Junkseylon.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XVI.</p>
+
+<p><i>A short Account of the Portuguese possessions between the
+Cape of Good Hope and China</i>.[31]</p>
+
+<p>In the middle of the seventeenth century, the Portuguese
+empire in the east, comprehended under the general name of India,
+from beyond the Cape of Good Hope in Africa, to Cape Liampo in
+China, extended for 4000 leagues along the sea-coast, not
+including the shores of the Rea Sea and the Persian gulf, which
+would add 1200 leagues more. Within these limits are half of
+Africa, and all of eastern Asia, with innumerable islands
+adjoining these two vast divisions of the world. This vast extent
+may be conveniently divided into seven parts.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 31: De Faria, III. 115. This is to be
+understood as about the year 1640, before the Dutch had begun to
+conquer the Portuguese possessions. They are now few and
+unimportant, containing only some remnant of dominion at
+Mozambique, with the cities of Goa and Diu in India, and Macao in
+China.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The <i>first</i> division, between the famous Cape of Good
+Hope, and the mouth of the Red Sea, contains along the coast many
+kingdoms of the <i>Kafrs</i>; as the vast dominions of the
+Monomotapa, who is lord of all the gold mines of Africa, with
+those of Sofala, Mozambique, Quiloa, Pemba, Melinda, Pate, Brava,
+Magadoxa, and others. In this division the Portuguese have the
+forts of Sofala and Mombaza, with the city and fort of
+Mozambique.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>second</i> division, from the mouth of the Red Sea to
+that of the Persian gulf, contains the coast of Arabia, in which
+they have the impregnable fortress of Muskat.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>third</i> division, between Busrah, or Bazorah, at the
+bottom of the Persian gulf, and India proper, contains the
+kingdoms of Ormuz, Guadel, and Sinde, with part of Persia, and
+Cambaya, on which they have the fort of Bandel, and the island of
+Diu.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>fourth</i> division, from the gulph of Cambaya, to Cape
+Comorin, contains what is properly called India, including part
+of Cambaya, with the Decan, Canara, and Malabar, subject to
+several princes. On this coast the Portuguese have, Damam,
+Assarim, Danu, St Gens, Agazaim, Maim, Manora, Trapor, Bazaim,
+Tana, Caranja, the city of Chaul, with the opposite fort of
+Morro; the most noble city of GOA, the large, strong, and
+populous metropolis of the Portuguese possessions in the east.
+This is the see of an archbishop, who is primate of all the east,
+and is the residence of their viceroys; and there are the courts
+of inquisition, exchequer, and chancery, with a customhouse,
+arsenal, and well-stored magazines. The city of Goa, which stands
+in an island, is girt with a strong wall, and defended by six
+mighty castles called Dauguim, San Blas, Bassoleco, Santiago de
+Agazaim, Panguim, and Nuestra Sennora del Cabo. On the other side
+of the bar is the castle of Bardes, and opposite to Dauguim is
+the fort of Norva, with a considerable town. On one side of the
+island of Goa is that of Salsete, in which is the fort of Rachol.
+Then going along the coast are the forts of Onor, Barcelor,
+Mongalor, Cananor Cranganor, Cochin, which is a bishopric; and
+near Cape Comorin, the town and fort of Coulan.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>fifth</i> division, between Cape Comorin and the river
+Ganges, contains the coasts of Coromandel and Orixa, on which
+they have the fort of Negapatam, the fort and city of Meliapour,
+which is a bishopric, formerly named after St Thomas, and the
+fort of Masulipatan.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>sixth</i> division, between the Ganges and Cape
+Cincapura, contains the vast kingdoms of Bengal, Pegu,
+Tanasserim, and others of less note; where the Portuguese have
+the city of Malacca, the seat of a bishop, and their last
+possession on the continent.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>seventh</i> division, from Cape Cincapura to Cape
+Liampo in China, contains the kingdoms of Pam, Lugor, Siam,
+Cambodia, Tsiompa, Cochin China, and the vast empire of China. In
+this vast extent the Portuguese have only the island and city of
+Macao, yet trade all along these coasts.</p>
+
+<p>In the island of Ceylon, the Portuguese possess the city and
+fort of Columbo, with those of Manaar, Gale, and others. Beyond
+Malacca, a fort in the island of Timor. The number of our ports
+in all this great track is above fifty, with twenty cities and
+towns, and many dependent villages.</p>
+
+<p>Much might be said of Ceylon, but we can only make room for a
+short account of that famous island[32]. About 500 years before
+the time of our Saviour, the heathen king of <i>Tenacarii</i>,
+who ruled over a great part of the east, banished his son and
+heir <i>Vigia Rajah</i>, for the wickedness and depravity of his
+conduct. The young man put to sea with 700 dissipated persons
+like himself, and landed at the port of <i>Preature</i>, between
+Trincomalee, and Jafnapatam, in the island of Ceylon, which was
+not then inhabited, but abounded in delightful rivers, springs,
+woods, and fruit-trees, with many fine birds, and numerous
+animals. These new colonists were so delighted with the country,
+that they gave it the name of <i>Lancao</i>, which signifies the
+terrestrial paradise, and, indeed, it is still considered as the
+delight of all the east. The first town they built was
+<i>Montota</i>, opposite to <i>Manaar</i>, whence they traded
+with <i>Cholca Rajah</i>, the nearest king on the continent, who
+gave his daughter as wife to the prince, and supplied his
+companions with women. He likewise sent them labourers and
+artizans to forward the new plantation; and seeing his power
+increase, the banished prince assumed the title of emperor of the
+islands. By strangers these new come people were named
+<i>Galas</i>, signifying banished men on account of their having
+actually been banished by the king of <i>Tenacarii.</i> Vigia
+Rajah died without children, and left the crown to his brother,
+in whole lineage it continued for 900 years. The fertility of the
+island, and the fame of its excellent cinnamon, drew thither the
+<i>Chinese</i>, who intermarried with the <i>Galas</i>, from
+which mixture arose a new race, called to this day the
+<i>Chingalas</i>, or Chingalese, who are very powerful in the
+island, being subtle, false, and cunning, and excellently adapted
+for courtiers.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 32: This is supplied from a former portion
+of the Portuguese Asia, Vol II. p. 507.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the extinction of the ancient royal family, the kingdom
+fell to <i>Dambadine Pandar Pracura Mabago</i>, who was
+treacherously taken prisoner by the Chinese, afterwards restored,
+and then murdered by <i>Alagexere</i>, who usurped the crown. The
+usurper dying ten years afterwards without issue, two sons of
+<i>Dambadine</i> were sent for who had fled from the tyrant.
+<i>Maha Pracura Mabago</i>, the eldest, was raised to the throne,
+who settled his court at <i>Cota</i>, and gave the dominion of
+the four <i>Corlas</i> to his brother. <i>Maha Pracura</i> was
+succeeded by a grandson, the son of a daughter who was married to
+the Rajah of <i>Cholca</i>. This line likewise failed, and
+<i>Queta Permal</i>, king of Jafnapatam, was raised to the
+throne, on which he assumed the name or title of
+<i>Bocnegaboa</i>, or king by force of arms, having overcome his
+brother, who was king of the four <i>corlas</i>. His son,
+<i>Caypura Pandar</i>, succeeded, but was defeated and slain by
+the king of the four <i>Corlas</i>, who mounted the throne, and
+took the name of <i>Jauira Pracura Magabo</i>. These two kings
+were of the royal lineage, and had received their dominions from
+king <i>Maha Pracura</i>. After <i>Jauira</i>, his son <i>Drama
+Pracura Magabo</i> succeeded, who reigned when Vasco de Gama
+discovered the route by sea to India. Afterwards, about the year
+1500, the empire of Ceylon was divided by three brothers, into
+three separate kingdoms. <i>Bocnegababo Pandar</i> had
+<i>Cota</i>; <i>Reigam Pandar</i> had <i>Reigam</i>; and
+<i>Madure Pandar</i> had <i>Cheitavaca</i>.</p>
+
+<p>In the district of <i>Dinavaca</i> in the centre of the
+island, there is a prodigiously high mountain called the <i>Peak
+of Adam</i>, as some have conceived that our first parents lived
+there, and that the print of a foot, still to be seen on a rock
+on its summit, is his. The natives call this <i>Amala
+Saripadi</i>, or the mountain of the footstep. Some springs
+running down this mountain form a pool at the bottom, in which
+pilgrims wash themselves, believing that it purifies them from
+sin. The rock or stone on the top resembles a tomb-stone, and the
+print of the foot seems not artificial, but as if it had been
+made in the same manner as when a person treads upon wet clay, on
+which account it is esteemed miraculous. Pilgrims of all sorts
+resort thither from all the surrounding countries, even from
+Persia and China; and having purified themselves by washing in
+the pool below, they go to the top of the mountain, near which
+hangs a bell, which they strike, and consider its sound as a
+symbol of their having been purified; <i>as if any other bell, on
+being struck, would not sound</i>. According to the natives,
+<i>Drama Rajah</i>, the son of an ancient king of the island,
+having done penance on the mountain along with many disciples,
+and being about to go away, left the print of his foot on the
+rock as a memorial. It is therefore respected as the relic of a
+saint, and their common name for this person is <i>Budam</i>,
+which signifies the <i>wise man</i>. Some believe this saint to
+have been <i>St Jesaphat</i>, but it was more likely <i>St
+Thomas</i>, who has left many memorials in the <i>east</i>, and
+even in the <i>west</i>, both in Brasil and Paraguay.</p>
+
+<p>The natural woods of Ceylon are like the most curious orchards
+and gardens of Europe, producing citrons, lemons, and many other
+kinds of delicious fruit. It abounds in cinnamon, cardamums,
+sugar-canes, honey, and hemp. It produces iron, of which the best
+firelocks in the east are made. It abounds in precious stones, as
+rubies, sapphires, cats-eyes, topazes, chrysolites, amythests,
+and berils. It has many civet-cats, and produces, the noblest
+elephants in all the east. Its rivers and shores abound in a
+variety of excellent fish, and it has many excellent ports fit
+for the largest ships.</p>
+
+<p><i>End of the Portuguese Asia</i>.</p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter3-5" id="chapter3-5">CHAPTER V.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGES AND TRAVELS IN EGYPT, SYRIA, ARABIA, PERSIA, AND
+INDIA. BY LUDOVICO VERTHEMA, IN 1503[33].</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>This ancient itinerary into the east, at the commencement of
+the sixteenth century, together with the subsequent chapter,
+containing the peregrinations of Cesar Frederick, about 80 years
+later, form an appropriate supplement to the Portuguese
+transactions in India, as furnishing a great number of
+observations respecting the countries, people, manners, customs,
+and commerce of the east at an early period. We learn from the
+<i>Bibliotheque Universelle des Voyages</i>. I. 264, that this
+itinerary was originally published in Italian at Venice, in 1520.
+The version followed on the present occasion was republished in
+old English, in 1811, in an appendix to a reprint of HAKLUYT'S
+EARLY VOYAGES, TRAVELS, AND DISCOVERIES; from which we learn that
+it was translated from <i>Latine into Englishe, by Richarde
+Eden</i>, and originally published in 1576. In both these English
+versions, the author is named <i>Lewes Vertomannus</i>; but we
+learn from the <i>Biol. Univ. des Voy.</i> that his real name was
+<i>Ludovico Verthema</i>, which we have accordingly adopted on
+the present occasion, in preference to the latinized denomination
+used by Eden. Although, in the present version, we have strictly
+adhered to the sense of that published by Eden 236 years ago, it
+has appeared more useful, and more consonant to the plan of our
+work, to render the antiquated language into modern English: Yet,
+as on similar occasions, we leave the <i>Preface of the
+Author</i> exactly in the language and orthography of Eden, the
+original translator.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 33: Hakluyt, iv. App. pp. 547--612. Ed.
+Lond. 1810-11.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The itinerary is vaguely dated in the title as of the year
+1503, but we learn from the text, that Verthema set out upon the
+pilgrimage of Mecca from Damascus in the beginning of April 1503,
+after having resided a considerable time at Damascus to acquire
+the language, probably Arabic; and he appears to have left India
+on his return to Europe, by way of the Cape of Good Hope and
+Lisbon, in the end of 1508. From some circumstances in the text,
+but which do not agree with the commencement, it would appear
+that Verthema had been taken prisoner by the Mamelukes, when
+fifteen years of age, and was admitted into that celebrated
+military band at Cairo, after making profession of the Mahometan
+religion. He went afterwards on pilgrimage to Mecca, from
+Damascus in Syria, then under the dominion of the Mameluke Soldan
+of Egypt, and contrived to escape or desert from Mecca. By some
+unexplained means, he appears to have become the servant or slave
+of a Persian merchant, though he calls himself his companion, and
+along with whom he made various extensive peregrinations in
+India. At length he contrived, when at Cananore, to desert again
+to the Portuguese, through whose means he was enabled to return
+to Europe.</p>
+
+<p>In this itinerary, as in all the ancient voyages and travels,
+the names of persons, places, and things, are generally given in
+an extremely vicious orthography, often almost utterly
+unintelligible, as taken down orally, according to the vernacular
+modes of the respective writers, without any intimate knowledge
+of the native language, or the employment of any fixed general
+standard. To avoid the multiplication of notes, we have
+endeavoured to supply this defect, by subjoining those names
+which are now almost universally adopted by Europeans, founded
+upon a more intimate acquaintance with the eastern languages.
+Thus the author, or his translator Eden, constantly uses
+<i>Cayrus</i> and <i>Alcayr</i>, for the modern capital of Egypt,
+now known either by the Arabic denomination Al Cahira, or the
+European designation Cairo, probably formed by the Venetians from
+the Arabic. The names used in this itinerary have probably been
+farther disguised and vitiated, by a prevalent fancy or fashion
+of giving <i>latin</i> terminations to all names of persons and
+places in latin translations. Thus, even the author of this
+itinerary has had his modern <i>Roman</i> name, <i>Verthema</i>,
+latinized into <i>Vertomannus</i>, and probably the <i>Cairo</i>,
+or <i>Cayro</i> of the Italian original, was corrupted by Eden
+into <i>Cayrus</i>, by way of giving it a latin sound. Yet, while
+we have endeavoured to give, often conjecturally, the better, or
+at least more intelligible and now customary names, it seemed
+proper to retain those of the original translation, which we
+believe may be found useful to our readers, as a kind of
+<i>geographical glossary</i> of middle-age terms.</p>
+
+<p>Of <i>Verthema</i> or <i>Vertomannus</i>, we only know, from
+the title of the translation of his work by Eden, that he was a
+<i>gentleman of Rome;</i> and we learn, at the close of his
+itinerary, that he was knighted by the Portuguese viceroy of
+India, and that his patent of knighthood was confirmed at Lisbon,
+by the king of Portugal. The full title of this journal or
+itinerary, as given by the original translator, is as follows; by
+which, and the preface of the author, both left unaltered, the
+language and orthography of England towards the end of the
+sixteenth century, or in 1576, when Eden published his
+translation, will be sufficiently illustrated.--Ed.</p>
+
+<blockquote>THE NAUIGATION AND VOYAGES<br>
+OF<br>
+LEWES VERTOMANNUS,<br>
+GENTLEMAN OF THE CITIE OF ROME,<br>
+TO THE<br>
+REGIONS OF ARABIA, EGYPTE, PERSIA, SYRIA, ETHIOPIA<br>
+AND EAST INDIA,<br>
+BOTH WITHIN AND WITHOUT THE RYUER OF GANGES, ETC.<br>
+IN THE YEERE OF OUR LORDE 1503.<br>
+CONTEYNING<br>
+MANY NOTABLE AND STRAUNGE THYNGES,<br>
+BOTH HYSTORICALL AND NATURALL<br>
+TRANSLATED OUT OF LATINE INTO ENGLYSHE,<br>
+BY RICHARDE EDEN.<br>
+IN THE YEERE OF OUR LORDE 1576.</blockquote>
+
+<p>THE PREFACE OF THE AUTHOR.</p>
+
+<p>There haue been many before me, who, to know the miracles of
+the worlde, haue with diligent studie read dyuers authours which
+haue written of such thynges. But other giuing more credit to the
+lyuely voyce, haue been more desirous to know the same, by
+relation of such as haue traueyled in those countreys, and seene
+such thinges whereof they make relation, for that in many bookes,
+geathered of vncertaine aucthoritie, are myxt false thinges with
+true. Other there are so greatly desirous to know the trueth of
+these thinges, that they can in no wyse be satisfied vntyll, by
+theyr owne experience they haue founde the trueth by vyages and
+perigrinations into straunge countreys and people, to know theyr
+maners, fashions, and customes, with dyuers thynges there to be
+seene: wherein the only readyng of bookes could not satisfie
+theyr thirst of such knowledge, but rather increased the same, in
+so much, that they feared not with losse of theyr goods and
+daunger of lyfe to attempte great vyages to dyuers countreys,
+with witnesse of theyr eyes to see that they so greatly desired
+to knowe. The whiche thyng among other chaunced vnto me also, for
+as often as in the books of Hystories and Cosmographie, I read of
+such marueylous thynges whereof they make mention [especially of
+thynges in the east parts of the world], there was nothyng that
+coulde pacifie my vnquiet mynde, vntyll I had with myne eyes
+seene the trueth thereof.</p>
+
+<p>I know that some there are indued with hygh knowledge,
+mountyng vnto the heauens, whiche will contempne these our
+wrytinges as base and humble, by cause we do not here, after
+theyr maner, with hygh and subtile inquisition intreate of the
+motions and dispositions of the starres, and gyue reason of theyr
+woorkyng on the earth, with theyr motions, retrogradations,
+directions, mutations, epicicles, reuolutions, inclinations,
+diuinations, reflexions, and suche other parteyning to the
+science of Astrologie: whych certeynely we doe not contempne, but
+greatly prayse. But measuryng vs with our owne foote, we will
+leaue that heauie burden of heauven to the strong shoulders of
+Atlas and Hercules: and only creepyng vpon the earth, in our owne
+person beholde the situations of landes and regions, with the
+maners and customes of men, and variable fourmes, shapes,
+natures, and properties of beastes, fruites, and trees,
+especially suche as are among the Arabians, Persians, Indians,
+Ethiopians. And whereas in the searchyng of these thynges we have
+[thanked be God], satisfied our desire, we thinke neuerthelesse
+that we haue done little, excepte we should communicate to other,
+such thynges as we haue seene and had experience of, that they
+lykewyse by the readyng therof may take pleasure, for whose sakes
+we have written this long and dangerous discourse, of thynges
+whych we haue seene in dyvers regions and sectes of men, desiryng
+nothyng more then that the trueth may be knowen to them that
+desyre the same. But what incommodities and troubles chaunced
+vnto me in these vyages, as hunger, thirst, colde, heate, warres,
+captiuitie, terrours, and dyuers other suche daungers, I will
+declare by the way in theyr due places.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of the Navigation from Venice to Alexandria in Egypt, and
+from thence to Damascus in Syria</i>[34].</p>
+
+<p>Should any one wish to know the cause of my engaging in this
+voyage, I can give no better reason than the ardent desire of
+knowledge, which hath moved me and many others to see the world
+and the wonders of creation which it exhibits. And, as other
+known parts of the world had been already sufficiently travelled
+over by others, I was determined to wait and describe such parts
+as were not sufficiently known. For which reason, with the grace
+of God, and calling upon his holy name to prosper our enterprise,
+we departed from Venice, and with prosperous winds we arrived in
+few days at the city of Alexandria in Egypt. The desire we had to
+know things more strange and farther off, did not permit us to
+remain long at that place; wherefore, sailing up the river Nile,
+we came to the city of new Babylon, commonly called <i>Cayrus</i>
+or <i>Akayr</i>, <i>Cairo</i> or <i>Al-cahira</i>, called also
+<i>Memphis</i> in ancient times.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 34: To accommodate this curious article to
+our mode of arrangement, we have made a slight alteration of the
+nomenclature of its subdivisions; calling those in this version
+<i>Sections</i>, which in the original translation of Mr Eden are
+denominated chapters; and have used the farther freedom of
+sometimes throwing several of these chapters into one
+section.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On my first arrival at this place I was more astonished than I
+can well express, yet on a more intimate observation it seemed
+much inferior to the report of its fame, as in extent it seemed
+not larger than Rome, though much more populous. But many have
+been deceived in regard to its size by the extensive suburbs,
+which are in reality numerous dispersed villages with fields
+interspersed, which some persons have thought to belong to the
+city, though they are from two to three miles distant, and
+surround it on all sides. It is not needful to expatiate in this
+place on the manners and religion of this city and its environs,
+as it is well known that the inhabitants are Mahometans and
+Mamelukes; these last being Christians who have forsaken the true
+faith to serve the Turks and Mahometans. Those of that
+description who used to serve the Soldan of Babylon in Egypt, or
+Cairo, in former times before the Turkish conquest, used to be
+called Mamelukes, while such of them as served the Turks were
+denominated <i>Jenetzari</i> or Janisaries. The Mameluke
+Mahometans are subject to the Soldan of Syria.</p>
+
+<p>As the riches and magnificence of Cairo, and the Mameluke
+soldiers by whom it is occupied are well known, we do not deem it
+necessary to say any thing respecting them in this place.
+Wherefore departing from Babylon in Egypt, or Cairo, and
+returning to Alexandria, we again put to sea and went to
+<i>Berynto</i>, a city on the coast of Syria Phoenicia, inhabited
+by Mahometans and abounding in all things, where we remained a
+considerable time. This city is not encompassed with walls,
+except on the west side where there are walls close to the sea.
+We found nothing memorable at this place, except an old ruined
+building where they say St. George delivered the kings daughter
+from a cruel dragon which he slew, and then restated the lady to
+her father. Departing from thence we went to Tripoli in Syria,
+which is two days sail to the east of Berynto. It is inhabited by
+Mahometans, who are subject to the lieutenant or governor of
+Syria under the Soldan. The soil of the neighbouring country is
+very fertile, and as it carries on great trade this city abounds
+in all things. Departing from thence we came to the city of
+<i>Comagene</i> of Syria, commonly called Aleppo, and named by
+our men Antioch[35]. This is a goodly city, which is situated
+under mount <i>Taurus</i> and is subject to the lieutenant of
+Syria under the Soldan of Egypt. Here are the <i>scales</i> or
+ladders as they are called of the Turks and Syrians, being near
+mount Olympus. It is a famous mart of the Azamians and Persians.
+The Azamians are a Mahometan people who inhabit Mesopotamia on
+the confines of Persia.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 35: This is a gross error, as Aleppo is
+above 80 English miles N.E. and island from Antioch. From the
+sequel it is evident that Antioch is the place meant by
+Vertomannus in the text, as the <i>scales</i>, mart, or staple of
+the Syrian trade.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Departing from Antioch we went by land to Damascus, a journey
+of ten days; but mid-way we came to a city named <i>Aman</i> in
+the neighbourhood of which there grows a great quantity of
+gossampine or cotton, and all manner of pleasant fruits. About
+six miles from Damascus on the declivity of a mountain is a city
+called <i>Menin</i>, inhabited by Greek christians who are
+subject to the governor of Damascus. At that place there are two
+fine churches, which the inhabitants allege were built by Helena
+the mother of the emperor Constantine. This place produces all
+kinds of fruit in great perfection, especially excellent grapes,
+and the gardens are watered with perpetual fountains.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of the City of Damascus</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Departing from <i>Menin</i> we came to Damascus, a city so
+beautiful as surpasses all belief, situated in a soil of
+wonderful fertility. I was so much delighted by the marvellous
+beauty of this city that I sojourned there a considerable time,
+that by learning the language I might inquire into the manners of
+the people. The inhabitants are Mahometans and Mamelukes, with a
+great number of Christians who follow the Greek ritual. It may be
+proper in this place to give some account of the
+<i>Hexarchatus</i> or commander of Damascus, who is subject to
+the lieutenant of Syria, which some call <i>sorya</i>. There is a
+very strong castle or fortress, which was built by a certain
+Etruscan or native of Florence in Tuscany, while he was
+<i>exarch</i> or governor of Damascus, as appears by a flower of
+the lily graven on marble, being the arms of Florence. This
+castle is encompassed by a deep ditch and high walls with four
+goodly high towers, and is entered by means of a drawbridge which
+can be let down or taken up at pleasure. Within, this castle is
+provided with all kinds of great artillery and warlike
+ammunition, and has a constant guard of fifty Mamelukes, who wait
+upon the captain of the castle and are paid by the viceroy of
+Syria. The following story respecting the Florentine
+<i>exarch</i> or governor of Damascus was related to me by the
+inhabitants. One of the Soldans of Syria happened to have poison
+administered to him, and when in search of a remedy he was cured
+by that Florentine who belonged to the company of Mamelukes.
+Owing to this great service he grew into high favour with the
+Soldan, who in reward made him exarch or governor of Damascus in
+which he built the before mentioned citadel. For saving the life
+of their Soldan this man is still reputed among them as a saint,
+and after his death the sovereignty of Damascus returned to the
+Syrians.</p>
+
+<p>The Soldan is said to be much beloved by his princes and
+lords, to whom he is ever ready to grant principalities and
+governments, reserving always to himself the yearly payment of
+many thousands of those pieces of gold called <i>saraphos</i> or
+serafines, and any one who neglects payment of the stipulated
+tribute is liable to be immediately put to death. Ten or twelve
+of the chief noblemen or governors always reside with the Soldan
+to assist him with their councils and to carry his orders into
+execution. The Mameluke government is exceedingly oppressive to
+the merchants and even to the other Mahometan inhabitants of
+Damascus. When the Soldan thinks fit to extort a sum of money
+from any of the nobles or merchants, he gives two letters to the
+governor of the castle, in one of which is contained a list of
+such as he thinks proper to be invited into the castle, and in
+the other is set down what sum the Soldan is pleased to demand
+from his subjects; and with these commands they immediately
+comply. Sometimes however the nobles are of such power that they
+refuse to attend at the castle when summoned; and knowing that
+the tyrant will offer them violence, they often escape into the
+dominions of the Turks. We have noticed that the watchmen who are
+stationed in the towers do not give warning to the guard by
+calling out as with us, but by means of drums each answering the
+other; and if any of the centinels be asleep and do not answer
+the beat of the patrole in a moment, he is immediately committed
+to prison for a whole year.</p>
+
+<p>This city is well built and wonderfully populous, much
+frequented and extremely rich, and abounds in all kinds of
+commodities and provisions, such as flesh, corn, and fruits. It
+has fresh damascene grapes all the year round, with pomegranates,
+oranges, lemons, and excellent olive trees; likewise the finest
+roses I ever saw, both red and white. The apples are excellent,
+but the pears and peaches are unsavoury, owing as is said to too
+much moisture. A fine clear river runs past the city, which is so
+well supplied with water that almost every house has a fountain
+of curious workmanship, many of them splendidly ornamented with
+embossed or carved work. Outwardly their houses are very plain,
+but the insides are beautifully adorned with various ornaments of
+the stone called <i>oplus</i> or serpentine marble. The city
+contains many temples which they call mosques, the most beautiful
+of which is built after the manner of St Peters at Rome, and as
+large, only that the middle has no roof being entirely open, all
+the rest of the temple being vaulted. This temple has four great
+double gates of brass, and has many splendid fountains on the
+inside, in which they preserve the body of the prophet Zacharias,
+whom they hold in great veneration. There are still to be seen
+the ruins of many decayed canonical or Christian churches, having
+much fine carved work. About a mile from the city the place is
+pointed out where our Saviour spoke to St Paul, saying, "Paul!
+Paul! why persecutest thou me!" at which place all the Christians
+who die in the city are buried. The tower also is shewn in which
+Paul was imprisoned, which joins the wall of the city; but even
+the Mahometans do not attempt to shut up that part of the tower
+through which St Paul was conducted by the angel, alleging that,
+when they close it up over night is found open again next
+morning. They likewise point out the houses in which they say
+that Cain slew his brother Abel, which are in a certain valley
+about a mile from the city, but on the side of a hill skirting
+that valley.</p>
+
+<p>The Mamelukes or stranger soldiers who inhabit Damascus live
+in a most licentious manner. They are all men who have forsaken
+the Christian faith, and who have been purchased as slaves by the
+governor of Syria. Being brought up both in learning and warlike
+discipline, they are very active and brave; and all of them
+whether high or low, receive regular wages from the governor,
+being six of those pieces of gold called serafines monthly,
+besides meat and drink for themselves and servants, and provender
+for their horses; and as they shew themselves valiant and
+faithful their wages are increased. They never walk singly about
+the city, which would be deemed dishonourable, but always by two
+or three together; and if they chance to meet with two or three
+women in the streets, for whom even they are in use to wait in
+the neighbourhood of such houses as the women frequent, licence
+is granted to such as first meet them to carry them to certain
+taverns where they abuse them. When the Mamelukes attempt to
+uncover the faces of these women, they strive all they can to
+prevent being known, and are generally allowed to go away without
+having their veils lifted. Hence it sometimes happens, when they
+think to have abused the daughter of some nobleman or person of
+condition, that they have fallen in with their own wives, as
+actually happened while I was there. The women of Damascus
+beautify and adorn themselves with great attention, wearing silk
+clothes, which they cover with an outer garment of cotton as fine
+as silk. They wear white buskins, and red or purple shoes, having
+their heads decorated with rich jewels and ear-rings, with rings
+on their fingers and splendid bracelets on their arms. They marry
+as often as they please, as when weary of, or dissatisfied with
+their husbands, they apply to the chief of their religion, called
+the <i>cady</i>, and request of him to divorce them, which
+divorcement is called <i>talacare</i> in their language, after
+which they are at liberty to contract a new marriage; and the
+same liberty is allowed to the husbands. Some say that the
+Mahometans have usually five or six wives, but as far as I could
+learn they have only two or three. They eat openly in the markets
+or fairs, and there they cook all their food, living on the
+flesh, of horses, camels, buffaloes, goats, and other beasts, and
+use great quantities of fresh cheese. Those who sell milk drive
+flocks of forty or fifty she-goats through the streets, which
+they bring to the doors of those who buy, driving them even into
+their chambers, though three stories high, where the animals are
+milked, so that every one gets their milk fresh and
+unadulterated. These goats have their ears a span long, and are
+very fruitful. They use many mushrooms, as there are often seen
+at one time 20 or 30 camels loaded with mushrooms coming to
+market, and yet all are sold in two or three days. These are
+brought from the mountains of Armenia, and from Asia Minor, now
+called Turkey, Natolia, or Anatolia. The Mahometans use long
+loose vestures both of silk and cloth, most having hose or
+trowsers of cotton, and white shoes or slippers. When any
+Mahometan happens to meet a Mameluke, even though the worthier
+person, he must give place and reverence to the Mameluke, who
+would otherwise beat him with a staff. Though often ill used by
+the Mahometans, the Christians have many warehouses in Damascus,
+where they sell various kinds of silks and velvets, and other
+commodities.</p>
+
+<p>SECT. III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of the Journey from Damascus to Mecca, and of the Manners
+of the Arabians</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 8th of April 1503, having hired certain camels to go
+with the caravan to Mecca, and being then ignorant of the manners
+and customs of those with whom I was to travel, I entered into
+familiarity and friendship with a certain Mameluke captain who
+had forsaken our faith, with whom I agreed for the expences of my
+journey, and who supplied me with apparel like that worn by the
+Mamelukes, and gave me a good horse, so that I went in his
+company along with other Mamelukes. This advantage cost me much
+money and many gifts. Thus entering on our journey, we came in
+three days to a place called <i>Mezaris</i>, where we tarried
+other three days that the merchants might provide all necessaries
+for the journey, and especially camels. There is a certain prince
+called <i>Zambei</i>, of great power in Arabia, who had three
+brothers and four sons. This prince possessed 40,000 horses,
+10,000 mares, and 4000 camels, which he kept in a country two
+days journey in extent. His power is so great, that he is at war
+with the Soldan of Egypt, the governor of Damascus, and the
+prince of Jerusalem all at once. His chief time of robbing and
+plundering is in harvest, when, he often falls unexpectedly on
+the Arabians, invading their lands and carrying away their wheat
+and barley, employing himself continually in predatory
+incursions. When his mares are weary with continual running, he
+stops to rest them, and gives them camels milk to drink, to
+refresh and cool them after their fatigue. These mares are of
+most wonderful swiftness, and when I saw them they seemed rather
+to fly than to run in riding, these Arabians only cover their
+horses with cloths or mats, and their own clothing is confined to
+a single vesture somewhat like a petticoat. Their weapons are
+long lances or darts made of reeds, ten or twelve cubits long,
+pointed with iron and fringed with silk. The men are despicable
+looking people, of small stature, of a colour between black and
+yellow, which we call olive, having voices like women, and long
+black hair flowing on their shoulders. They are more numerous
+than can well be believed, and are continually at war among
+themselves. They inhabit the mountains, and have certain times
+appointed for going out on predatory excursions, when they march
+in troops in great order, carrying with them their wives and
+children, and all their goods. Their houses or tents rather are
+carried on camels, having no other houses, but dwelling always in
+tents like soldiers. These tents are made of wool, and look black
+and filthy.</p>
+
+<p>On the 11th of April we departed from Mezaris to the number of
+40,000 men with 35,000 camels, having only sixty Mamelukes to
+guide and guard us. We were regularly marshalled for the march
+into a van and main body, with two wings, in which order the
+caravans of pilgrims always travel in these regions. From
+Damascus to Mecca is a journey of forty days and forty nights.
+Departing from Mezaris we continued our journey that day till the
+twenty-second hour of the day. Then our captain or
+<i>Agmirus</i>[36], having given the appointed signal, the whole
+caravan immediately halted and disburdened the camels, two hours
+only being allowed for rest and refreshment for the men and
+beasts. Then upon a new signal the camels were all reloaded, and
+we resumed our march. Every camel has for one feed five barley
+loaves, raw and not baked, as large as pomegranates. We continued
+our second days journey like the first, all day and night, from
+sun-rise to the twenty-second hour of the day, and this was the
+constant regular order. Every eighth day they procure water by
+digging the ground or sand, though sometimes we found wells and
+cisterns. Likewise after every eight day, they rest two days,
+that the camels and horses may recover strength. Every camel
+bears an incredible load, being equal to that Which is borne by
+two strong-mules.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 36: The Emir Haji, or captain of the
+pilgrimage, which name of office is transposed in the text to
+Haji-emir, corrupted <i>Agmir</i>, and latinized
+Agmirus.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At every resting-place at the waters, they are always obliged
+to defend themselves against vast numbers of Arabians, but these
+conflicts are hardly ever attended with bloodshed, insomuch that
+though we often fought with them, we had only one man slain
+during the whole journey, these Arabians are so weak and cowardly
+that our threescore Mamelukes have often driven 60,000 Arabians
+before them. Of these Mamelukes, I have often seen wonderful
+instances of their expertness and activity. I once saw a Mameluke
+place an apple on the head of his servant at the distance of 12
+or 14 paces, and strike it off from his head, another while
+riding at full speed took the saddle from his horse, and carried
+it some time on his head, and put it again on the horse without
+checking his career.</p>
+
+<p>At the end of twelve days journey we came to the valley of
+Sodom and Gomorra, which we found, as is said in the holy
+scripture, to retain the ruins of the destroyed city as a lasting
+memorial of God's wrath. I may affirm that there are three
+cities, each situated on the declivity of three separate hills,
+and the ruins do not seem above three or four cubits high, among
+which is seen something like blood, or rather like red wax mixed
+with earth. It is easy to believe that these people were addicted
+to horrible vices, as testified by the barren, dry, filthy
+unwholesome region, utterly destitute of water. These people were
+once fed with manna sent from heaven, but abusing the gifts of
+God they were utterly destroyed. Departing about twenty miles
+from this place, about thirty of our company perished for want of
+water, and several others were overwhelmed with sand. A little
+farther on we found water at the foot of a little hill, and there
+halted. Early next morning there came to us 24,000 Arabians, who
+demanded money from us in payment of the water we had taken, and
+as we refused them any money, saying that the water was the free
+gift of God to all, we came to blows. We gathered ourselves
+together on the mountain as the safest place, using our camels as
+a bulwark, all the merchants and their goods being placed in the
+middle of the camels while we fought manfully on every side. The
+battle continued for two days, when water failed both with us and
+our enemies, who encompassed the mountain all round, continually
+calling out that they would break in among our camels. At length
+our captain assembled all the merchants, whom he commanded to
+gather twelve hundred pieces of gold to be given to the Arabians:
+but on receiving that sum they said it was too little, and
+demanded ten thousand pieces and more for the water we had taken.
+Whereupon our captain gave orders that every man in the caravan
+who could bear arms should prepare for battle. Next morning our
+commander sent on the caravan with the unarmed pilgrims inclosed
+by the camels, and made an attack upon the enemy with our small
+army, which amounted to about three hundred in all. With the loss
+only of one man and a woman on our side, we completely defeated
+the Arabians of whom we slew 1500 men. This victory is not to be
+wondered at, considering that the Arabians are almost entirely
+unarmed being almost naked, and having only a thin loose vesture,
+while their horses are very ill provided for battle, having no
+saddles or other caparisons.</p>
+
+<p>Continuing our march after this victory, we came in eight days
+to a mountain about ten or twelve miles in circuit, which was
+inhabited by about 5000 Jews. These were of very small stature,
+hardly exceeding five or six spans in height, and some much
+less[37]. They have small shrill voices like women, and are of
+very dark complexions, some blacker than the rest. Their only
+food is the flesh of goats. They are all circumcised and follow
+the Jewish law, and when any Mahometan falls into their hands
+they flea him alive. We found a hole at the foot of the mountain
+out of which there flowed an abundant source of water, at which
+we laded 16,000 camels, giving great offence to the Jews. These
+people wander about their mountain like so many goats or deer,
+not daring to descend into the plain for fear of the Arabians. At
+the bottom of the mountain we found a small grove of seven or
+eight thorn trees, among which we found a pair of turtle doves,
+which were to us a great rarity, as during our long journey
+hitherto we had seen neither beast nor bird.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 37: This account of the stature of the
+Jewish tribe cannot fail to be much exaggerated, otherwise the
+text must have been corrupted at this place; as we cannot well
+conceive of a tribe in Arabia not exceeding four feet two inches
+in average height.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Proceeding two days journey from the mountain of the Jews, we
+came to <i>Medinathalhabi</i>[38] or Medina. Four miles from this
+city we found a well, where the caravan rested and remained for a
+whole day, that we might wash ourselves and put on clean garments
+to appear decently in the city. Medina contains about three
+hundred houses of stone or brick, and is well peopled, being
+surrounded by bulwarks of earth. The soil is utterly barren,
+except at about two miles from the city there are about fifty
+palm trees which bear dates. At that place, beside a garden,
+there is a water-course which runs into a lower plain, where the
+pilgrims are accustomed to water their camels. I had here an
+opportunity to refute the vulgar opinion that the tomb or coffin
+of the <i>wicked</i> Mahomet is at Mecca, and hangs in the air
+without support. For I tarried here three days and saw with my
+own eyes the place where Mahomet was buried, which is here at
+Medina, and not at Mecca. On presenting ourselves to enter the
+<i>Meschita</i> or mosque, which name they give to all their
+churches or temples, we could not be allowed to enter unless
+along with a companion[39] little or great, who takes us by the
+hand and leads us to the place where they say that Mahomet is
+buried. His temple is vaulted, being about 100 paces long by 80
+in breadth, and is entered by two gates. It consists of three
+parallel vaults, which are supported by four hundred pillars of
+white bricks, and within are suspended about three thousand
+lamps. In the inner part of this mosque or temple is a kind of
+tower five paces in circuit, vaulted on every side, and covered
+with a large cloth of silk, which is borne up by a grate of
+copper curiously wrought, and at the distance of two paces on
+every side from the tower, so that this tower or tomb is only
+seen as through a lattice by the devout pilgrims. This tomb is
+situated in an inner building toward the left hand from the great
+mosque, in a chapel to which you enter by a narrow gate. On every
+side of these gates or doors are seen many books in the manner of
+a library, twenty on one side, and twenty-five on the other,
+which contain the vile traditions of Mahomet and his companions.
+Within this chapel is seen a sepulchre in which they say that
+Mahomet lies buried with his principal companions, <i>Nabi</i>,
+<i>Bubacar</i>, <i>Othamar</i>, <i>Aumar</i>, and <i>Fatoma</i>.
+Mahomet, who was a native Arabian, was their chief captain.
+<i>Hali</i> or <i>Ali</i> was his son in-law, for he took to wife
+his daughter <i>Fatima</i>. <i>Bubacar</i> or Abubeker, was as
+they say exalted to be chief councillor and governor under
+Mahomet, but was not honoured with the office of apostle or
+prophet. <i>Othamar and Aumar</i>, Othoman and Omar, were chief
+captains in the army of Mahomet. Every one of these have
+particular books containing the acts and traditions which relate
+to them, whence proceed great dissentions and discords of
+religion and manners among these vile people, some of whom adhere
+to one doctrine and some to another, so that they are divided
+into various sects among themselves, and kill each other like
+beasts, upon quarrels respecting their various opinions, all
+equally false, having each their several patrons, doctors, and
+saints, as they call them. This also is the chief cause of war
+between the Sophy of Persia and the grand Turk, both of whom are
+Mahometans, yet they live in continual and mortal hatred of each
+other for the maintenance of their respective sects, saints, and
+apostles, every one thinking their own the best.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 38: This name ought probably to have been
+written Medinat-al-habi, and is assuredly the holy city of
+Medina, in which Mahomet was buried.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 39: This seems to refer to some official
+residents of Medina, who must accompany the pilgrims in their
+visits to the holy places, probably for profit.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The first evening that we came to Medina, our captain, or Emir
+of the pilgrimage, sent for the chief priest of the temple, and
+declared that the sole object of his coming thither was to visit
+the sepulchre and body of the <i>Nabi</i> or prophet, as they
+usually call Mahomet, and that he understood the price generally
+paid for being admitted to a sight of these mysteries was four
+thousand gold <i>serafines</i>. He told him likewise that he had
+no parents, neither brothers nor sisters, kindred, wife, nor
+children; that he had not come hither to purchase any
+merchandise, such as spices, <i>bacca</i>[40], spikenard, or
+jewels, but merely for the salvation of his soul and from pure
+zeal for religion, and was therefore exceedingly desirous to see
+the body of the prophet. To this the priest answered in apparent
+anger, "Darest thou, with those eyes with which thou hast
+committed so many abominable sins, presume to look on him by whom
+God created heaven and earth?" The captain replied that he spoke
+true, yet prayed him that he might be permitted to see the
+prophet, when he would instantly have his eyes thrust out. Then
+answered the <i>Side</i> or chief priest, "Prince! I will freely
+communicate all things to you. It is undeniable that our holy
+prophet died at this place; but he was immediately borne away by
+angels to heaven and there received among them as their equal."
+Our captain then asked where was now Jesus Christ the son of
+Mary, and the <i>Side</i> said that he was at the feet of
+Mahomet: To which the captain replied that he was satisfied, and
+wished for no more information. After this, coming out of the
+temple, he said to us, "See I pray you for what stuff I would
+have paid three thousand <i>serafines</i> of gold!"</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 40: This word is obviously <i>berries</i>,
+and signifies coffee.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>That same evening at almost three o'clock of the night[41],
+ten or twelve elders of the city came into the encampment of our
+caravan, close by one of the gates of the city, where running
+about like madmen, they continually cried out aloud, "Mahomet the
+apostle of God shall rise again: O prophet of God thou shalt rise
+again. God have mercy upon us!" Alarmed by these cries, our
+captain and all of us seized our weapons in all haste, suspecting
+that the Arabians had come to rob our caravan. On demanding the
+reason of all this outcry, for they cried out as is done by the
+Christians when any miraculous event occurs, the elders answered,
+"Saw you not the light which shone from the sepulchre of the
+prophet?" Then said one of the elders, "Are you slaves?" meaning
+thereby bought men or Mamelukes; and when our captain answered
+that we were Mamelukes, the elder replied, "You, my lords, being
+new to the faith, and not yet fully confirmed in the religion of
+our holy prophet, cannot see these heavenly things." To which our
+captain answered, "O! you mad and insensate beasts! I thought to
+have given you three thousand pieces of gold; but now I shall
+give you nothing, you dogs and progeny of dogs?" Now, it is to be
+understood that the pretended miraculous light which was seen to
+proceed from the sepulchre, was merely occasioned by a flame made
+by the priests in the open part of the tower formerly mentioned,
+which they wished to impose on us as a miracle. After this our
+commander gave orders that none of the caravan should enter into
+the temple. Having thus seen with my own eyes, I can assuredly
+declare that there is neither iron nor steel, nor magnet stone by
+which the tomb of Mahomet is made to hang in the air, as some
+have falsely imagined, neither is there any mountain nearer to
+Medina than four miles. To this city of Medina corn and all other
+kinds of victuals are brought from Arabia Felix, Babylon or Cairo
+in Egypt, and from Ethiopia by way of the Red Sea, which is about
+four days journey from the city.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 41: Counting from sunset after the manner
+of the Italians.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having remained three days in our encampment on the outside of
+Medina to rest and refresh ourselves and our animals, and being
+satisfied, or disgusted rather, by the vile and abominable
+trumperies, deceits, and hypocritical trifles of the Mahometan
+delusions, we determined to resume our journey; and procuring a
+pilot or guide, who might direct our way by means of a chart and
+mariners box or compass, as is used at sea, we bent our journey
+towards the west, where we found a fair well or fountain whence
+flowed an abundant stream of water, and where we and our beasts
+were satisfied with drink. According to a tradition among the
+inhabitants, this region was formerly burnt up with drought and
+sterility, till the evangelist St Mark procured this fountain
+from God by miracle. We came into the <i>sea of sand</i> before
+our arrival at the mountain of the Jews, formerly mentioned, and
+in it we journeyed three days and nights. This is a vast plain
+covered all over by white sand as fine almost as flour; and if by
+evil chance any one travels south while the wind blows to the
+north, they are overwhelmed by drifted sand. Even with the wind
+favourable, or blowing in the direction of their journey, the
+pilgrims are apt to scatter and disperse, as they cannot see each
+other at ten paces distance. For this reason those who travel
+across the sea of sand are enclosed in wooden cages on the backs
+of camels, and are guided by experienced pilots by chart and
+compass, as mariners on the ocean. In this journey many perish by
+thirst, and many by drinking with too much avidity when they fall
+in with wells. Owing to this <i>Momia</i> is found in these
+sands, bring the flesh of such as have been <i>drowned in the sea
+of sand</i>, which is there dried up by the heat of the sun, and
+the excessive dryness of the sand preventing putrefaction. This
+<i>Momia</i> or dried flesh is esteemed medicinal; but there is
+another and more precious kind of <i>Momia</i>, being the dried
+and embalmed bodies of kings and princes, which have been
+preserved in all times from corrupting.</p>
+
+<p>When the wind blows from the north-east, the sand rises, and
+is driven against a certain mountain, which is a branch from
+Mount Sinai; and in that place we found certain pillars
+artificially wrought, which are called <i>Januan</i>. On the left
+hand side of that mountain, and near the highest summit, there is
+a cave or den, to which you enter by an iron gate, and into which
+cave Mahomet is said to have retired for meditation. While
+passing that mountain, we heard certain horrible cries and loud
+noises, which put us in great fear. Departing therefore from the
+fountain of St Mark, we continued our journey for ten days, and
+twice in that time we had to fight against fifty thousand
+Arabians. At length, however, we arrived at Mecca, where we found
+every thing in confusion, in consequence of a civil war between
+two brothers who contended for the kingdom of Mecca.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Observations of the Author during his residence at
+Mecca</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The famous city of Mecha or Mecca is populous and well built,
+in a round form, having six thousand houses as well built as
+those in Rome, some of which have cost three or four thousand
+pieces of gold. It has no walls, being protected or fortified as
+it were on all sides by mountains, over one of which, about two
+furlongs from the city, the road is cut by which we descended
+into the plain below; but there are three other entries through
+the mountains. It is under the dominion of a sultan, one of four
+brethren of the progeny of Mahomet, who is subject to the Soldan
+of Egypt, but his other three brothers are continually at war
+with him. On the 18th day of May, descending from the
+before-mentioned road obliquely into the plain, we came to Mecca
+by the north side. On the south side of the city there are two
+mountains very near each other, having a very narrow intervening
+valley, which is the way leading to Mecca on that side. To the
+east there in a similar valley between two other mountains, by
+which is the road to a mountain where they sacrifice to the
+patriarchs Abraham and Isaac, which hill or mount is ten or
+twelve miles from Mecca, and is about three stone throws in
+height, being all of a stone as hard as marble, yet is not
+marble. On the top of this mount is a temple or mosque, built
+after their manner, having three entrances. At the foot of the
+mountain are two great cisterns, which preserve water free from
+corruption: one of these is reserved for the camels belonging to
+the caravan of Cairo, and the other for that of Damascus. These
+cisterns are filled by rain water, which is brought from a great
+way off. We shall speak afterwards of the sacrifices performed at
+this mountain, and must now return to Mecca.</p>
+
+<p>On our arrival we found the caravan from Memphis, or Babylon
+of Egypt, which had arrived eight days before us, coming by a
+different way, and consisted of 64,000 camels, with a guard of an
+hundred Mamelukes. This city of Mecca is assuredly cursed of God,
+for it is situated in a most barren spot, destitute of all manner
+of fruit or corn, and so burnt up with drought, that you cannot
+have as much water for twelve pence as will satisfy one person
+for a whole day. Most part of their provisions are brought from
+Cairo in Egypt, by the Red Sea, or <i>Mare Erythreum</i> of the
+ancients, and is landed at the port of <i>Gida</i>, Joddah or
+Jiddah, which is about forty miles from Mecca. The rest of their
+provisions are brought from the <i>Happy Arabia</i>, or <i>Arabia
+Felix</i>, so named from its fruitfulness in comparison with the
+other two divisions, called <i>Petrea</i> and <i>Deserta</i>, or
+the Stoney and Desert Arabias. They also get much corn from
+Ethiopia. At Mecca we found a prodigious multitude of strangers
+who were <i>peregrines</i> or pilgrims; some from Syria, others
+from Persia, and others from both the Indies, that is, from India
+on this side the river Ganges, and also from the farther India
+beyond that river. During my stay of twenty days at Mecca, I saw
+a most prodigious number and variety of people, infinitely beyond
+what I had ever before seen. This vast concourse of strangers of
+many nations and countries resort thither from various causes,
+but chiefly for trade, and to obtain pardon of their sins by
+discharging a vow of pilgrimage.</p>
+
+<p>From India, both on this side and beyond the Ganges, they
+bring for sale precious stones pearls and spices; and especially
+from that city of the greater India, which is named
+<i>Bangella</i>[42] they bring much <i>gossampyne</i> cloth[43]
+and silk. They receive spices also from Ethiopia[44]; and, in
+short, this city of Mecca is a most famous and plentiful mart of
+many rich and valuable commodities. But the main object for which
+pilgrims resort thither from so many countries and nations, is,
+to purchase the pardon of their sins. In the middle of the city
+there is a temple after the manner of the coliseum or
+amphitheatre of Rome, yet not built of marble or hewn stone,
+being only of burnt bricks. Like an amphitheatre, it has ninety
+or an hundred gates, and is vaulted over. It is entered on every
+side by a descent of twelve steps, and in its porch is the mart
+for jewels and precious stones, all the walls of the entry being
+gilt over in a most splendid manner. In the lower part of the
+temple under the vaults, there is always to be seen a prodigious
+multitude of men; as there are generally five or six thousand in
+that place, who deal solely in sweet ointments and perfumes,
+among which especially is a certain most odoriferous powder, with
+which dead bodies are embalmed. From this place all manner of
+delightful perfumes are carried to all the Mahometan countries,
+for beyond any thing that can be found in the shops of our
+apothecaries.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 42: This must necessarily be the kingdom or
+province of Bengal.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 43: Fine cottons or muslins are here
+evidently meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 44: This is inexplicable, as Ethiopia
+possesses no spices, unless we may suppose the author to mean
+here the sea of Ethiopia or Red Sea, as the track by which spices
+were brought to Mecca.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 23d day of May yearly, the pardons begin to be
+distributed in the temple, after the following manner: The temple
+is entirely open in the middle, and in its centre stands a turret
+about six paces in circumference, and not exceeding the height of
+a man, which is hung all round with silken tapestry. This turret
+or cell is entered by a gate of silver, on each side of which are
+vessels full of precious balsam, which the inhabitants told us
+was part of the treasure belonging to the sultan of Mecca. <i>At
+every vault of the turret is fastened a round circle of iron,
+like the ring of a door</i>[45]. On the day of Pentecost, all men
+are permitted to visit this holy place. On the 22d of May, a
+great multitude of people began early in the morning, before day,
+to walk seven times round the turret, every corner of which they
+devoutly kissed and frequently handled. About ten or twelve paces
+from this principal turret is another, which is built like a
+Christian chapel, having three or four entries; and in the middle
+is a well seventy cubits deep, the water of which is impregnated
+with saltpetre. At this well eight men are stationed to draw
+water for all the multitude. After the pilgrims have seven times
+walked round the first turret, they come to this one, and
+touching the mouth or brim of the well, they say these words: "Be
+it to the honour of God, and may God pardon my sins." Then those
+who draw water pour three buckets on the heads of every one that
+stands around the well, washing or wetting them all over, even
+should their garments be of silk; after which the deluded fools
+fondly imagine that their sins are forgiven them. It is pretended
+that the turret first spoken of was the first house that was
+builded by Abraham; wherefore, while yet all over wet by the
+drenching at the well, they go to the mountain already mentioned,
+where the sacrifice is made to Abraham; and after remaining there
+for two days, they make their sacrifice to the patriarch at the
+foot of the mountain.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 45: This description is altogether
+unintelligible.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When they intend to sacrifice, the pilgrims who are able to
+afford it, kill some three, some four, or more sheep, even to
+ten, so that in one sacrifice there are sometimes slain above
+3000 sheep; and as they are all slaughtered at sun-rise, the
+shambles then flow with blood. Shortly afterwards all the
+carcasses are distributed for God's sake among the poor, of whom
+I saw there at least to the number of 20,000. These poor people
+dig many long ditches in the fields round Mecca, where they make
+fires of camels' dung, at which they roast or seethe the
+sacrificial flesh which has been distributed to them by the
+richer pilgrims. In my opinion, these poor people flock to Mecca
+more to satisfy their hunger, than from motives of devotion.
+Great quantities of cucumbers are brought here for sale from
+Arabia Felix, which are bought by those who have money; and as
+the parings are thrown out from their tents, the half-famished
+multitude gather these parings from among the mire or sand to
+satisfy their hunger, and are so greedy of that vile food, that
+they fight who shall gather most.</p>
+
+<p>On the day after the sacrifice to Abraham, the <i>cadi</i>,
+who is to these people as the preachers of the word of God among
+us, ascends to the top of a high mountain, whence he preaches to
+the people who stand below. He harangued for the space of on
+hour, principally inculcating that they should bewail their sins
+with tears and sighs and lamentations, beating their breasts. At
+one time he exclaimed with a loud voice, "O! Abraham the beloved
+of God, O! Isaac the chosen of God and his friend, pray to God
+for the people of the prophet." As these words were spoken, we
+suddenly heard loud cries and lamentations, and a rumour was
+spread that an army of 20,000 Arabians was approaching, on which
+we all fled into the city, even those who were appointed to guard
+the pilgrims being the first to make their escape. Mid-way
+between the mountain of Abraham and the city of Mecca, there is a
+mean wall, about four cubits broad, where the passengers had
+strewed the whole way with stones, owing to the following
+traditionary story: When Abraham was commanded to sacrifice his
+son Isaac, he directed his son to follow him to the place where
+he was to execute the divine command; and as Isaac was following
+after his father, a devil met him in the way near this wall, in
+the semblance of a fair and friendly person, and asked him
+whither he went. Isaac answered that he was going to his father,
+who waited for him. To this the arch enemy replied, that he had
+better not go, as his father meant to sacrifice him. But Isaac
+despising the warnings of the devil, continued his way, that his
+father might execute the commandments of God respecting him. On
+this the devil departed from him, but met him again as he went
+forward, under the semblance of another friendly person, and
+advised him as before not to go to his father. On this Isaac
+threw a stone at the devil, and wounded him in the forehead; in
+remembrance of which traditionary story it is that the people, on
+passing this way, are accustomed to throw stones at the wall
+before going to the city. As we went this way, the air was in a
+manner darkened with prodigious multitudes of stock doves, all,
+as they pretend, derived from the dove that spoke in the ear of
+Mahomet, in likeness of the Holy Ghost. These doves are seen in
+vast numbers in all parts about Mecca, as in the houses,
+villages, inns, and granaries of corn and rice, and are so tame
+that they can hardly be driven away. Indeed it is reckoned a
+capital crime to kill or even take them, and there are certain
+funds assigned for feeding them at the temple.</p>
+
+<p>Beyond the temple there are certain parks or inclosures, in
+which there are two <i>unicorns</i> to be seen, called by the
+Greeks <i>Monocerotae</i>, which are shewn to the people as
+miracles of nature, and not without good reason, on account of
+their scarcity and strange appearance. One of these, though much
+higher than the other, is not unlike a colt of thirty months old,
+and has a horn in its forehead, growing straight forwards and the
+length of three cubits. The other is much younger, resembling a
+colt of one year old, and its horn is only four hand breadths
+long. These singular animals are of a weasel chesnut colour,
+having a head like that of a hart, but the neck is not near so
+long, with a thin mane, hanging all to one side. The legs are
+thin and slender, like those of a fawn or hind, and the hoofs are
+cleft much like those of a goat, the outer parts of the hind feet
+being very full of hair. These animals seemed wild and fierce yet
+exceedingly comely. They were sent out of Ethiopia by a king of
+that country, as a rare and precious gift to the sultan of
+Mecca[46].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 46: The unicorn is an unknown, or rather a
+fabulous animal, and the most charitable interpretation that can
+be made of the description in the text is, that Verthema was
+mistaken, or that one of the horns of some species of antelope
+had either been removed, or was wanting by a lusus naturae. The
+only real <i>Monoceros</i>, or one horned animal, known to
+naturalists, is the rhinoceros monoceros, or one-horned
+rhinoceros, which bears its horn on the nose, a little way above
+the muzzle, not on the forehead.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It may seem proper to mention here certain things which
+happened to me at Mecca, in which may be seen the sharpness of
+wit in case of urgent necessity, which according to the proverb,
+has no law; for I was driven to the extent of my wits how I might
+contrive to escape privately from Mecca. One day, while in the
+market purchasing some things by the direction of our captain, a
+certain Mameluke knew me to be a Christian, and said to me in his
+own language <i>inte mename</i>, which is to say, "Whence are
+you?" To this I answered that I was a Mahometan, but he insisted
+that I spoke falsely, on which I swore by the head of Mahomet
+that I really was. Then he desired me to go home along with him,
+which I willingly did; and when there he began to speak to me in
+the Italian language, affirming that he was quite certain I was
+not a Mahometan. He told me that he had been some time in Genoa
+and Venice, and mentioned many circumstances which convinced me
+that he spoke truth. On this I freely confessed myself A Roman,
+but declared that I had become a Mahometan at Babylon in Egypt,
+and had been there enrolled among the Mamelukes. He seemed much
+pleased as this, and treated me honourably. Being very desirous
+of proceeding farther in my travels, I asked him if this city of
+Mecca was as famous as was reported in the world, and where the
+vast abundance of pearls, precious stones, spices, and other rich
+merchandise was to be seen, which was generally believed to be in
+that city, wishing to know the reason why these things were not
+now brought there as in former times; but to avoid all suspicion,
+I durst not make any mention of the dominion acquired by the king
+of Portugal over the Indian ocean and the gulfs of Persia and
+Mecca. Then did he shew the cause why this mart of Mecca was not
+so much frequented as it used to be, assigning the whole blame to
+the King of Portugal. Thereupon I purposely detracted from the
+fame of that king, lest the Mahometan might suspect me of
+rejoicing that the Christians resorted to India for trade.
+Finding me a professed enemy to the Christians, he conceived a
+great esteem for me, and gave me a great deal of information.
+Then said I to him in the language of Mahomet <i>Menaba
+menalhabi</i>, or "I pray you to aid me." He asked me in what
+circumstance I wished his assistance; upon which I told him that
+I wished secretly to depart from Mecca, assuring him under the
+most sacred oaths that I meant to visit those kings who were the
+greatest enemies to the Christians, and that I possessed the
+knowledge of certain estimable secrets, which if known to those
+kings would certainly occasion them to send for me from Mecca. He
+requested to know what these secrets were, on which I informed
+him that I was thoroughly versant in the construction of all
+manner of guns and artillery. He then praised Mahomet for having
+directed me to these parts, as I might do infinite service to the
+true believers; and he agreed to allow me to remain secretly in
+his house along with his wife.</p>
+
+<p>Having thus cemented a friendship with the Mahometan, he
+requested of me to obtain permission from the captain of our
+caravan that he might lead fifteen camels from Mecca loaded with
+spices under his name, by which means he might evade the duties,
+as thirty gold seraphines are usually paid to the sultan of Mecca
+for the custom of such a number of camels. I gave him great hopes
+that his request might be complied with, even if he asked for an
+hundred camels, as I alleged he was entitled to the privilege as
+being a Mameluke. Then finding him in excellent good humour, I
+again urged my desire of being concealed in his house; and having
+entirely gained his confidence, he gave me many instructions for
+the prosecution of my intended journey, and counselled me to
+repair to the court of the king of <i>Decham</i>, or Deccan, a
+realm in the greater India; of which I shall speak hereafter.
+Wherefore, on the day before the caravan of Damascus was to
+depart from Mecca, he concealed me in the most secret part of his
+house; and next morning early the trumpeter of our caravan of
+Syria gave warning to all the Mamelukes to prepare themselves and
+their horses for the immediate prosecution of the journey, on
+pain of death to all who should neglect the order. Upon hearing
+this proclamation and penalty I was greatly troubled in mind; yet
+committing myself by earnest prayer to the merciful protection of
+God, I entreated the Mamelukes wife not to betray me. On the
+Tuesday following, our caravan departed from Mecca and the
+Mameluke went along with it, but I remained concealed in his
+house. Before his departure, the friendly Mameluke gave orders to
+his wife that she should procure me the means of going along with
+the pilgrims who were to depart from <i>Zide</i> or Juddah the
+port of Mecca for India. This port of Juddah is 40 miles from
+Mecca. I cannot well express the kindness of the Mamelukes wife
+to me during the time I lay hid in her house; and what
+contributed mainly to my good entertainment was that a beautiful
+young maid who dwelt in the house, being niece to the Mameluke,
+was in love with me; but at that time I was so environed with
+troubles and fear of danger, that the passion of love was almost
+extinct in my bosom, yet I kept myself in her favour by kind
+words and fair promises.</p>
+
+<p>On the Friday, three days after the departure of the caravan
+of Syria, I departed about noon from Mecca along with the caravan
+of India; and about midnight we came to an Arabian village, where
+we rested all the rest of that night and the next day till noon.
+From thence continuing our journey we arrived at Juddah on the
+second night of our journey. The city of Juddah has no walls, but
+the houses are well built, resembling those in the Italian
+cities. At this place there is great abundance of all kinds of
+merchandise, being in a manner the resort of all nations, except
+that it is held unlawful for Jews or Christians to come there. As
+soon as I entered Juddah I went to the mosque, where I saw a
+prodigious number of poor people, not less than 25,000, who were
+attending upon the different pilots, that they might go back to
+their countries. Here I suffered much trouble and affliction,
+being constrained to hide myself among these poor wretches and to
+feign myself sick, that no one might be too inquisitive about who
+I was, whence I came, or whether I was going. The city of Juddah
+is under the dominion of the Soldan of Babylon or Cairo, the
+Sultan of Mecca being his brother and his subject. The
+inhabitants are all Mahometans; the soil around the town is very
+unfruitful, as it wants water; yet this town, which stands on the
+shore of the Red Sea, enjoys abundance of all necessaries which
+are brought from Egypt, Arabia Felix, and various other places.
+The heat is so excessive that the people are in a manner dried
+up, and there is generally great sickness among the inhabitants.
+This city contains about 500 houses. After sojourning here for
+fifteen days, I at length agreed for a certain sum with a pilot
+or ship-master, who engaged to convey me to Persia. At this time
+there lay at anchor in the haven of Mecca near an hundred
+brigantines and foists, with many barks and boats of various
+kinds, some with oars and some with sails.</p>
+
+<p>Three days after I had agreed for my passage, we hoisted sail
+and began our voyage down the Red Sea, called by the ancients
+<i>Mare erythraeum</i>[47]. It is well known to learned men that
+this sea is not red, as its name implies and as some have
+imagined, for it has the same colour with other seas. We
+continued our voyage till the going down of the sun, for this sea
+cannot be navigated during the night, wherefore navigators only
+sail in the day and always come to anchor every night. This is
+owing <i>as they say</i>, to the many dangerous sands, rocks and
+shelves, which require the ships way to be guided with great care
+and diligent outlook from the <i>top castle</i>, that these
+dangerous places may be seen and avoided: But after coming to the
+island of <i>Chameran</i> or Kamaran, the navigation may be
+continued with greater safety and freedom.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 47: The <i>Mare erythraeum</i> of the
+ancients was of much more extended dimensions, comprising all the
+sea of India from Arabia on the west to Guzerat and the Concan on
+the east, with the coasts of Persia and Scindetic India on the
+north; of which sea the Red Sea and the Persian gulfs were
+considered branches or deep bays.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+
+<p><i>Adventures of the Author in various parts of Arabia Felix,
+or Yemen</i>.</p>
+
+<p>After six days sailing from Juddah we came to a city named
+<i>Gezan</i>, which is well built and has a commodious port, in
+which we found about 45 foists and brigantines belonging to
+different countries. This city is close to the sea, and stands in
+a fertile district resembling Italy, having plenty of
+pomegranates, quinces, peaches, Assyrian apples, <i>pepons</i>?
+melons, oranges, gourds, and various other fruits, also many of
+the finest roses and other flowers that can be conceived, so that
+it seemed an earthly paradise. It has also abundance of flesh,
+with wheat and barley, and a grain like white millet or
+<i>hirse</i>, which they call <i>dora</i>, of which they make a
+very excellent bread. The prince of this town and all his
+subjects are Mahometans, most of whom go nearly naked.</p>
+
+<p>After sailing five days from <i>Gezan</i>, having always the
+coast on our left hand, we came in sight of some habitations
+where 14 of us went on shore in hopes of procuring some
+provisions from the inhabitants; but instead of giving us
+victuals they threw stones at us from slings, so that we were
+constrained to fight them in our own defence. There were about
+100 of these inhospitable natives, who had no other weapons
+except slings, and yet fought us for an hour; but 24 of them
+being slain the rest fled, and we brought away from their houses
+some poultry and calves, which we found very good. Soon
+afterwards the natives returned, being reinforced by others to
+the number of five or six hundred; but we departed with our prey
+and reimbarked.</p>
+
+<p>Continuing our voyage, we arrived on the same day at an island
+named <i>Kamaran</i>, which is ten miles in circuit. This island
+has a town of two hundred houses, inhabited by Mahometans, and
+has abundance of flesh and fresh water, and the fairest salt I
+ever saw. The port of Kamaran is eight miles from the Arabian
+coast, and is subject to the sultan of <i>Amanian</i> or
+<i>Yaman</i>, a kingdom of Arabia Felix. Having remained here two
+days, we again made sail for the mouth of the Red Sea, where we
+arrived in other two days. From Kamaran to the mouth of the Red
+Sea the navigation is safe both night and day; But from Juddah to
+Kamsran the Red Sea can only be navigated by day, as already
+stated, on account of shoals and rocks. On coming to the mouth of
+the Red Sea, we seemed quite inclosed, as the strait is very
+narrow, being only three miles across. On the right hand, or
+Ethiopian coast, the shore of the continent is about ten paces in
+height, and seems a rude uncultivated soil; and on the left hand,
+or coast of Arabia, there rises a very high rocky hill. In the
+middle of the strait is a small uninhabited island called
+<i>Bebmendo</i>[48], and those who sail from the Red Sea towards
+Zeyla, leave this island on the left hand. Such, on the contrary,
+as go for Aden, must keep the north eastern passage, leaving this
+island on the right.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 48: This word is an obvious corruption of
+Bab-el-Mondub, the Arabic name of the straits, formerly explained
+as signifying the gate or passage of lamentation. The island in
+question is named <i>Prin</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We sailed for <i>Bab-al-Mondub</i> to <i>Aden</i>, in two days
+and a half, always having the land of Arabia in sight on our
+left. I do not remember to have seen any city better fortified
+than Aden. It stands on a tolerably level plain, having walls on
+two sides: all the rest being inclosed by mountains, on which
+there are five fortresses. This city contains 6000 houses, and
+only a stone's throw from the city there is a mountain having a
+castle on its summit, the shipping being anchored at the foot of
+the mountain. Aden is an excellent city, and the chief place in
+all Arabia Felix, of which it is the principal mart, to which
+merchants resort from India, Ethiopia, Persia, and the Red Sea;
+but owing to the intolerable heat during the day, the whole
+business of buying and selling takes place at night, beginning
+two hours after sunset. As soon as our brigantines came to anchor
+in the haven, the customers and searchers came off, demanding
+what we were, whence we came, what commodities we had on board,
+and how many men were in each vessel? After being satisfied on
+these heads they took away our mast, sails, and other tackle,
+that we might not depart without paying the customs.</p>
+
+<p>The day after our arrival at Aden, the Mahometans took me
+prisoner, and put shackles on my legs in consequence of an
+<i>idolater</i> calling after me that I was a Christian dog[49].
+Upon this the Mahometans laid hold of me, and carried me before
+the lieutenant of the sultan, who assembled his council, to
+consult with them if I should be put to death as a Christian spy.
+The sultan happened to be absent from the city, and as the
+lieutenant had not hitherto adjudged any one to death, he did not
+think fit to give sentence against me till my case were reported
+to the sultan. By this means I escaped the present danger, and
+remained in prison 55 days, with an iron of eighteen pounds
+weight fastened to my legs. On the second day of my confinement,
+many Mahometans went in great rage to the lieutenant to demand
+that I should be put to death as a Portuguese spy. Only a few
+days before, these men had difficultly escaped from the hands of
+the Portuguese by swimming, with the loss of their foists and
+barks, and therefore greatly desired to be revenged of the
+Christians, outrageously affirming that I was a Portuguese and a
+spy. But God assisted me, for the master of the prison made fast
+its gates, that these outrageous men might not offer me violence.
+At the end of fifty-five days, the sultan sent for me into his
+presence; so I was placed on the back of a camel with my
+shackles, and at the end of eight days journey I was brought to
+the city of <i>Rhada</i>, where the sultan then resided, and
+where he had assembled an army of 30,000 men to make war upon the
+sultan of <i>Sanaa</i>, a fair and populous city about three days
+journey from <i>Rhada</i>, situated partly on the slope of a hill
+and partly in a plain. When I was brought before the sultan, he
+asked me what I was: on which I answered that I was a Roman, and
+had professed myself a Mahometan and Mameluke at Babylon in
+Egypt, or Cairo. That from motives of religion, and in discharge
+of a vow, I had made the pilgrimage to <i>Medinathalhabi</i>, to
+see the body of the <i>Nabi</i> or holy prophet, which was said
+to be buried there; and that having heard in all the countries
+and cities through which I passed, of the greatness, wisdom, and
+virtue of the sultan of Rhada, I had continued my travels to his
+dominions from an anxious desire to see his face, and I now gave
+thanks to God and his prophet that I had attained my wish,
+trusting that his wisdom and justice would see that I was no
+Christian spy, but a true Mahometan, and his devoted slave. The
+sultan then commanded me to say <i>Leila illala Mahumet
+resullah</i>, which words I could never well pronounce, either
+that it so pleased God, or because I durst not, from some fear or
+scruple of conscience. Wherefore, seeing me silent, the sultan
+committed me again to prison, commanding that I should be
+carefully watched by sixteen men of the city, every day four in
+their turns. After this, for the space of three months, I never
+enjoyed the sight of the heavens, being every day allowed a loaf
+of millet bread, so very small that seven of them would hardly
+have satisfied my hunger for one day, yet I would have thought
+myself happy if I could have had my fill of water.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 49: According to the monk Picade,
+Christians are found in all regions except Arabia and Egypt,
+where they are most hated.--<i>Eden</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Three days after I was committed to prison, the sultan marched
+with his army to besiege the city of <i>Sanaa</i>, having, as I
+said before, 30,000 footmen, besides 3000 horsemen, born of
+Christian parents, who were black like the Ethiopians, and had
+been brought while young from the kingdom of <i>Prester John</i>,
+called in Latin <i>Presbyter Johannes</i>, or rather <i>Preciosus
+Johannes</i>. These Christian Ethiopians are also called
+Abyssinians, and are brought up in the discipline of war like the
+Mamelukes and Janisaries of the Turks, and are held in high
+estimation by this sultan for the guard of his own person. They
+have high pay, and are in number four-score thousand[50]. Their
+only dress is a <i>sindon</i> or cloak, out of which they put
+forth one arm. In war they use round targets of buffaloe hide,
+strengthened with some light bars of iron, having a wooden
+handle, and short broad-swords. At other times they use vestures
+of linen of divers colours, also of <i>gossampine</i> or
+<i>xylon</i>, otherwise named <i>bomasine</i>[51]. In war every
+man carries a sling, whence he casts stones, after having whirled
+them frequently round his head. When they come to forty or fifty
+years of age, they wreath their hair into the form of horns like
+those of goats. When the army proceeds to the wars, it is
+followed by 5000 camels, all laden with ropes of
+bombasine[52].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 50: This is a ridiculous exaggeration, or
+blunder in transcription, and may more readily be limited to four
+thousand.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 51: These terms unquestionably refer to
+cotton cloth. Perhaps we ought to read gossamopine <i>of</i>
+Xylon, meaning cotton cloth from Ceylon.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 52: The use of this enormous quantity of
+cotton ropes is unintelligible. Perhaps the author only meant to
+express that the packs or bales on the camels were secured by
+such ropes.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Hard by the prison to which I was committed, there was a long
+court or entry in the manner of a cloister, where sometimes I and
+other prisoners were permitted to walk, and which was overlooked
+by a part of the sultan's palace. It happened that one of the
+sultan's wives remained in the palace, having twelve young
+maidens to wait upon her, who were all very comely, though
+inclining to black. By their favour I was much aided, after the
+following manner: There were two other men confined alone with me
+in the same prison, and it was agreed among us that one of us
+should counterfeit madness, by which we might derive some
+advantage. Accordingly it fell to my lot to assume the appearance
+of madness, which made greatly for my purpose, as they consider
+mad men to be holy, and they therefore allowed me to go much more
+at large than before, until such time as the hermits might
+determine whether I were <i>holy mad</i>, or raging mad, as shall
+be shewn hereafter. But the first three days of my assumed
+madness wearied me so much, that I was never so tired with
+labour, or grieved with pain; for the boys and vile people used
+to run after me, sometimes to the number of forty or fifty,
+calling me a mad man, and throwing stones at me, which usage I
+sometimes repaid in their own coin. To give the better colour to
+my madness, I always carried some stones in the lap of my shirt,
+as I had no other clothing whatever. The queen hearing of my
+madness, used oftentimes to look from her windows to see me, more
+instigated by a secret love for my person than the pleasure she
+derived from my mad pranks, as afterwards appeared. One time,
+when some of the natives played the knave with me in view of the
+queen, whose secret favour towards me I began to perceive, I
+threw off my shirt, and went to a place near the windows, where
+the queen might see me all naked, which I perceived gave her
+great pleasure, as she always contrived some device to prevent me
+going out of her sight, and would sometimes spend almost the
+whole day in looking at me. In the mean time she often sent me
+secretly abundance of good meat by her maids; and when she saw
+the boys or others doing me harm or vexing me, she called to me
+to kill them, reviling them also as dogs and beasts.</p>
+
+<p>There was a great fat sheep that was fed in the court of the
+palace, of that kind whereof the tail only will sometimes weigh
+eleven or twelve pounds. Under colour of my madness, I one day
+laid hold of this sheep, repeating <i>Leila illala Mahumet
+resullah</i>, the words which the Sultan desired me to repeat in
+his presence, by way of proof whether I was a Mahometan or
+professed Mameluke. As the sheep gave no answer, I asked him
+whether he were Mahometan, Jew, or Christian. And willing to make
+him a Mahometan, I repeated the formula as before, which
+signifies, "There is but one God, and Mahomet is his prophet,"
+being the words the Mahometans rehearse as their profession of
+faith. As the sheep answered never a word to all I could say, I
+at length broke his leg with staff. The queen took much delight
+in these my mad tricks, and commanded the carcass of this sheep
+to be given me, and I never eat meat with more relish or better
+appetite. Three days afterwards I killed an ass that used to
+bring water to the palace, because he would not say these words
+and be a Mahometan. One day I handled a Jew so very roughly, that
+I had near killed him. On another occasion I threw many stones at
+a person who called me a Christian clog, but he threw them back
+at me with such vengeance, that he hurt me sore, on which I
+returned to my prison, of which I barricadoed the door with
+stones, and lay there for two days, in great pain, without meat
+or drink, so that the queen and others thought me dead, but the
+door was opened by command of the queen. Those Arabian dogs used
+to deride me, giving me stones in place of bread, and pieces of
+white marble, pretending that they were lumps of sugar, and
+others gave me bunches of grapes all full of sand. That they
+might not think I counterfeited madness, I used to eat the grapes
+sand and all.</p>
+
+<p>When it was rumoured abroad that I had lived two days and
+nights without meat or drink, some began to believe that I was a
+holy madman, while others supposed me to be stark mad; wherefore
+they consulted to send for certain men who dwell in the mountain,
+who lead a contemplative life, and are esteemed holy as we do
+hermits. When they came to give their judgment concerning me, and
+were debating among themselves for upwards of an hour on my case,
+I pissed in my hands, and threw the water in their faces, on
+which they agreed I was no saint, but a mere madman. The queen
+saw all this from her window, and laughed heartily at it among
+her maids, saying, "By the head of Mahomet this is a good man."
+Next morning I happened to find the man asleep who had so sore
+hurt me with stones, and taking him by the hair of his head with
+both hands, I so punched him in the stomach, and on the face with
+my knees, that I left him all bloody and half dead. The queen
+happening to see me, she called out, "Kill the beast, Kill the
+dog." Upon which he ran away and came no more nigh me.</p>
+
+<p>When the president of the city heard that the queen took so
+much delight in my mad frolics, he gave orders that I might go at
+liberty about the palace, only wearing my shackles, and that I
+should be immured every night in another prison in the lower part
+of the palace. After I had remained in this manner for twenty
+days, the queen took it into her head to carry me along with her
+a hunting; but on my return, I feigned myself sick from fatigue,
+and continued in my cell for eight days, the queen sending every
+day to inquire how I was. After this I took an opportunity to
+tell the queen that I had vowed to God and Mahomet to visit a
+certain holy person at Aden, and begged her permission to perform
+my vow. She consented to this, and immediately gave orders that a
+camel and 25 gold seraphins should be given me. Accordingly I
+immediately set off on my journey, and came to Aden at the end of
+eight days, when I visited the man who was reputed as a saint,
+merely because he had always lived in great poverty, and without
+the company of women. There are many such in those parts, but
+doubtless they lose their labour, not being in the faith of
+Christ. Having thus performed my vow, I pretended to have
+recovered my health by miracle performed by this holy person, of
+which I sent notice to the queen, desiring permission to visit
+certain other holy persons in that country who had great
+reputation. I contrived these excuses because the fleet for India
+was not to depart from Aden for the space of a month. I took the
+opportunity to agree secretly with the captain of a ship to carry
+me to India, making him many fair promises of reward. He told me
+that he did not mean to go to India till after he had gone first
+to Persia, and to this arrangement I agreed.</p>
+
+<p>To fill up the time, I mounted my camel and went a journey of
+25 miles, to a certain populous city named <i>Lagi</i>, seated in
+a great plain, in which are plenty of olives and corn, with many
+cattle, but no vines, and very little wood. The inhabitants are a
+gross and barbarous people of the vagabond Arabs, and very poor.
+Going a days journey from thence, I came to another city named
+<i>Aiaz</i>, which is built on two hills, having a large plain
+between them, in which is a noted fountain, where various nations
+resort as to a famous mart. The inhabitants are Mahometans, yet
+greatly differ in opinion respecting their religion. All those
+who inhabit the northern mount, maintain the faith of Mahomet and
+his successors, of whom I have formerly spoken; but those of the
+south mountain affirm that faith ought only to be given to
+Mahomet and Ali, declaring the others to have been false
+prophets. The country about <i>Aiaz</i> produces goodly fruits of
+various kinds, among which are vines, together with silk and
+cotton; and the city has great trade in spices and other
+commodities. On the top of both of the hills there are strong
+fortresses, and two days journey from thence is the city of
+<i>Dante</i>, on the top of a very high mountain, well fortified
+both by art and nature.</p>
+
+<p>Departing from <i>Dante</i>, I came in two days journey to the
+city of <i>Almacharam</i>, on the top of a very high mountain of
+very difficult ascent, by a way so narrow that only two men are
+able to pass each other. On the top of this mountain is a plain
+of wonderful size, and very fertile, which produces abundance of
+every thing necessary to the use of man. It has also plenty of
+water, insomuch that at one fountain only there is sufficient
+water to supply a hundred thousand men. The Sultan is said to
+have been born in this city, and to keep his treasure here, which
+is so large as to be a sufficient load for an hundred camels all
+in gold. Here also always resides one of his wives. The air of
+this place is remarkably temperate and healthy, and the
+inhabitants are inclining to white. Two days journey from
+<i>Almacharam</i>, is the city of <i>Reame</i>, containing 2000
+houses. The inhabitants are black, and are much addicted to
+commerce. The country around is fertile in all things, except
+wood. On one side of this city is a mountain, on which is a
+strong fortress. At this place I saw a kind of sheep without
+horns, whose tails weigh forty or fifty pounds. The grapes of
+this district have no stones or grains, and are remarkably sweet
+and delicate, as are all the other fruits, which are in great
+abundance and variety. This place is very temperate and
+healthful, as may be conceived by the long life of its
+inhabitants, for I have conversed with many of them that had
+passed the age of an hundred and twenty-five years, and were
+still vigorous and fresh-coloured. They go almost naked, wearing
+only shirts, or other thin and loose raiment like mantles, having
+one arm bare. Almost all the Arabs wreath their hair in the shape
+of horns, which they think gives them a comely appearance.</p>
+
+<p>Departing from thence, I came in three days journey to the
+city of <i>Sanaa</i> or <i>Zenan,</i> upon the top of a very high
+mountain, and very strong both by art and nature. The Sultan had
+besieged this place for three months with a great army, but was
+unable to prevail against it by force, yet it was afterwards
+yielded on composition. The walls of this city are eighteen
+cubits high and twenty in thickness, insomuch that eight camels
+may march abreast upon them. The region in which it stands is
+very fertile, and resembles Italy, having abundance of water. The
+city contains four thousand houses, all well built, and in no
+respect inferior to those in Italy, but the city is so large in
+circuit, that fields, gardens, and meadows are contained within
+the walls. This city was governed by a Sultan, who had twelve
+sons, one of whom named Mahomet, was four cubits high, and very
+strong, of a complexion resembling ashes, and from some natural
+madness or grossly tyrannical disposition he delighted in human
+flesh, so that he used to kill men secretly to feed upon
+them.</p>
+
+<p>Three days journey from thence I came to a city upon a
+mountain, named <i>Taessa,</i> well built, and abounding in all
+things necessary to man, and particularly celebrated for roses,
+of which the inhabitants make rose water. This is an ancient
+city, having many good houses, and still contains several
+monuments of antiquity. Its temple or chief mosque is built much
+like the church of Sancta Maria Rotunda at Rome. The inhabitants
+are of an ash-colour, inclining to black, and dress much like
+those already mentioned. Many merchants resort thither for trade.
+Three days journey from thence I came to another city named
+<i>Zioith</i> or <i>Zabid</i>, half a days journey from the Red
+Sea. This is a well built city, abounding in many good things,
+particularly in excellent white sugar and various kinds of
+delicious fruits. It is situated in a very large plain between
+two mountains, and has no walls, but is one of the principal
+marts for all sorts of spices, and various other merchandise. One
+days journey from thence I came to <i>Damar</i>, which is
+situated in a fruitful soil, and carries on considerable trade.
+All these cities are subject to a Sultan of Arabia-Felix, who is
+called <i>Sechamir</i>, or the holy prince; <i>Secha</i>
+signifying holy, and <i>Amir</i> prince, in the Arabian language.
+He is so named, because he abhors to shed men's blood. While I
+was there in prison, he nourished sixteen thousand poor,
+including captives in prison, who had been condemned to death,
+and he had as many black slaves in his palace.</p>
+
+<p>Departing from Damar I returned in three days journey to Aden,
+passing in the mid way by an exceedingly large and high mountain,
+on which there are many wild beasts, and in particular the whole
+mountain is as it were covered with monkeys. There are also many
+lions, so that it is by no means safe to travel that way unless
+in large companies of at least a hundred men. I passed this way
+along with a numerous company, yet we were in much danger from
+the lions and other wild beasts which followed us, insomuch that
+we were forced to fight them with darts, slings, and arrows,
+using also the aid of dogs, and after all we escaped with some
+difficulty. On arriving at Aden I feigned myself sick, lurking in
+the mosque all day, and going only out under night to speak with
+the pilot of the ship formerly mentioned, from whom I obtained a
+bark in which I secretly left Aden.</p>
+
+<p>We at length began our voyage for Persia, to which we were to
+go in the first place, our bark being laden with <i>rubricke</i>,
+a certain red earth used for dying cloth, with which fifteen or
+twenty vessels are yearly freighted from Arabia Felix. After
+having sailed six days on our voyage, a sudden tempest of
+contrary wind drove us back again and forced us to the coast of
+Ethiopia, where we took shelter in the port of <i>Zeyla</i>. We
+remained here five days to see the city, and to wait till the
+tempest was over and the sea become quiet. The city of Zeyla is a
+famous mart for many commodities, and has marvellous abundance of
+gold and ivory, and a prodigious number of black slaves, which
+are procured by the Mahometan or Moorish inhabitants, by means of
+war, from Ethiopia in the country of Prester John, the Christian
+king of the Jacobins or Abyssinians. These slaves are carried
+hence into Persia, Arabia Felix, Cairo, and Mecca. In this city
+justice and good laws are observed. The soil produces wheat and
+other convenient things, as oil which is not procured from olives
+but from something else that I do not know. It has likewise
+plenty of honey and wax, and abundance of animals for food, among
+which are sheep having tails of sixteen pounds weight, very fat
+and good; their head and neck black, and all the rest of their
+bodies white. There are also sheep all over white, whose tails
+are a cubit long, and hang down like a large cluster of grapes,
+with great flaps of skin hanging from their throats. The bulls
+and cows likewise have dewlaps hanging down almost to the ground.
+There are also certain kine having horns like to those of harts,
+which are very wild, and when taken are given to the sultan of
+the city as a gift worthy of a prince. I also saw other kine of a
+bright red colour, having only one horn in the midst of the
+forehead, about a span long, bending backwards, like the horn of
+the unicorn. The walls of this city are greatly decayed, and the
+haven bad and unsafe, yet it is resorted to by vast numbers of
+merchants. The sultan of Zeyla is a Mahometan, and has a numerous
+army both of horse and foot. The people, who are much addicted to
+war, are of a dark ash-colour inclining to black, and wear loose
+vestments like those spoken of in Arabia. After the weather had
+become calm, we again put to sea, and soon afterwards arrived at
+an island on the coast of Ethiopia named <i>Barbora</i>, which is
+under the rule of a Mahometan prince. It is a small island, but
+fertile and well peopled, its principal riches consisting in
+herds of cattle, so that flesh is to be had in great plenty. We
+remained here only one day, and sailing thence went to
+Persia.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VI.</p>
+
+<p><i>Observations of the Author relative to some parts of
+Persia.</i></p>
+
+<p>When we had sailed twelve days we came to a city named
+<i>Divobanderrumi</i>[53], which name signifies the holy port of
+the <i>Rumes</i> or Turks. This place is only a little way from
+the Continent, and when the tides rise high it is an island
+environed on every side with water, but at ebb tides the passage
+between it and the land is dry. This is a great mart of commerce,
+and is governed by a person named <i>Menacheas</i>, being subject
+to the sultan of Cambaia. It is well fortified with good walls,
+and defended by a numerous artillery. The barks and brigantines
+used at this place are smaller than ours of Italy. Departing
+thence we came in three days to <i>Zoar</i>[54], which also is a
+well frequented mart in a fertile country inhabited by
+Mahometans. Near this place are two other good cities and ports
+named <i>Gieulfar</i> and <i>Meschet</i> or <i>Maskat</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 53: From the context, this place appears to
+have been on that part of the oceanic coast of Arabia called the
+kingdom of Maskat, towards Cape Ras-al-gat and the entrance to
+the Persian gulf. The name seems compounded of these words
+<i>Div</i> or <i>Diu</i>, an island, <i>Bander</i> a port, and
+<i>Rumi</i> the term in the east for the Turks as successors of
+the Romans. It is said in the text to have been subject to the
+sultan of Cambaia, but was more probably tributary to the king or
+sultan of Ormuz.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 54: In the text of Hakluyt this place is
+called <i>Goa</i>, assuredly by mistake, as it immediately
+afterwards appears to have been in the neighbourhood of Maskat,
+and in the direct voyage between Aden and Ormus, by creeping
+along the coast from port to port.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Proceeding on our voyage we came to the fair city of
+<i>Ormuz</i> or <i>Armusium</i>, second to none in excellence of
+situation, and abundance of pearls. It stands in an island twelve
+miles from the Continent, being in itself very scarce of water
+and corn, so that all things required for the sustenance of the
+inhabitants are brought from other places. At the distance of
+three days sail from thence those muscles are procured which
+produce the fairest and largest pearls. There are certain people
+who gain their living by fishing for these muscles in the
+following manner: Going in small boats to that part of the sea
+where these are found, they cast a large stone into the sea on
+each side of the boat fastened to strong ropes, by which they fix
+their boat steadily in one place like a ship at anchor. Then
+another stone with a cord fastened to it is cast into the sea,
+and a man having a sack hung upon his shoulder both before and
+behind, and a stone hung to his feet, leaps into the water, and
+immediately sinks to the bottom to the depth of 15 paces or more,
+where he remains gathering the pearl muscles and putting them
+into his sack. He then casts off the stone that is tied to his
+feet and comes up by means of the rope. At <i>Ormuz</i> there are
+sometimes seen almost three hundred ships and vessels of various
+sorts at one time, which come from many different places and
+countries. The sultan of the city is a Mahometan. There are not
+less than four hundred merchants and factors continually residing
+here for the sake of trade in silks, pearls, precious stones,
+spices, and the like. The principal article of their sustenance
+at this place is rice.</p>
+
+<p>Departing from Ormuz I went into Persia, and after ten days
+journey I came to <i>Eri</i>[55] a city in <i>Chorazani</i> which
+also we may name <i>Flaminia</i>. This region is fertile, and
+abounds in all good things, particularly in silk, so that one
+might purchase enough in one day to load 3000 camels. Owing to
+the fertility of this country corn is always cheap. Rhubarb is in
+such abundance that six of our pounds of twelve ounces each may
+be bought for one gold crown. This city, in which dwells the king
+of that region, contains about seven thousand houses, all
+inhabited by Mahometans. In twenty days journey from thence, I
+noticed that the inland parts of Persia are well inhabited and
+have many good towns and villages. In this journey I came to a
+great river called by the inhabitants <i>Eufra</i>, which I
+verily believe to be the Euphrates, both from the resemblance of
+names and from its great size. Continuing my journey along this
+river by the left hand, I came in three days journey to another
+city named <i>Schyra</i>[56], subject to a prince who is a
+Persian Mahometan, and is independent of any other prince. Here
+are found all sorts of precious stones, especially that called
+<i>Eranon</i>, which defends men against witchcraft, madness, and
+fearfulness proceeding from melancholy. It is the stone commonly
+called <i>Turquoise</i>, which is brought in great abundance from
+a city named <i>Balascam</i>, where also great plenty of
+<i>Castoreum</i> is procured and various kinds of colours. The
+reason why so very little true <i>Castoreum</i> is found among us
+is because it is adulterated by the Persians before it comes to
+our hands[57]. The way to prove true castoreum is by smelling,
+and if genuine and unadulterated it makes the nose bleed, as I
+saw proved on four persons in succession. When genuine and
+unadulterated, <i>castoreum</i> will preserve its flavour for ten
+years. The Persians are a courteous and gentle people, liberal
+and generous towards each other, and kind to strangers, as I
+found by experience. While here, I met with a Persian merchant to
+whom I was known in the year before when at Mecca. This man was
+born in the city of <i>Eri</i> in Chorozani, and as soon as he
+saw me he knew me again, and asked by what fortune I had come
+into that country. To this I answered, "that I had come thither
+from a great desire to see the world." "Praised be God, said he,
+that I have now found a companion of the same mind with myself."
+He exhorted me not to depart from him, and that I should
+accompany him in his journeys, as he meant to go through the
+chief parts of the world.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 55: In the rambling journey of Verthema, we
+are often as here unable to discover the meaning of his strangely
+corrupted names. Chorazani or Chorassan is in the very north of
+Persia, at a vast distance from Ormuz, and he pays no attention
+to the particulars of his ten days journey which could not have
+been less than 400 miles. We are almost tempted to suspect the
+author of romancing.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 56: Supposing that the place in the text
+may possibly mean <i>Shiras</i>, the author makes a wonderful
+skip in three days from the Euphrates to at least 230 miles
+distance--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 57: What is named <i>Castoreum</i> in the
+text was probably musk, yet Russia castor might in those days
+have come along with rhubarb through Persia.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I accordingly remained with him for fifteen days in a city
+named <i>Squilaz</i>, whence we went in the first place to a city
+named <i>Saint Bragant</i>[58], which is larger than Babylon of
+Egypt and is subject to a Mahometan prince, who is said to be
+able to take the field when occasion requires with 60,000
+horsemen. This I say only from the information of others, as we
+could not safely pass farther in that direction, by reason of the
+great wars carried on by the Sophy against those Mahometans who
+follow the sect of <i>Omar</i>, who are abhorred by the Persians
+as heretics and misbelievers, while they are of the sect of Ali
+which they consider as the most perfect and true religion. At
+this place my Persian friend, as a proof of his unfeigned
+friendship, offered to give me in marriage his niece named
+<i>Samis</i>, which in their language signifies the Sun, which
+name she well deserved for her singular beauty. As we could not
+travel any farther by reason of the wars, we returned to the city
+of Eri, where he entertained me most honourably in his house, and
+showing me his niece desired that she might immediately become my
+wife. Being otherwise minded, yet not willing that I should
+appear to despise so friendly an offer, I thanked him for his
+goodness, yet begged the match might be delayed to a more
+convenient time. Departing soon afterwards from Eri, we came in
+eight days journey to <i>Ormuz</i>, where we took shipping for
+India.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 58: Of Squilaz and Saint Bragant it is
+impossible to make any thing, even by
+conjecture--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION VII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Observations of the Author on various parts of
+India.</i></p>
+
+<p>We arrived in India at a certain port named <i>Cheo</i>[59],
+past which flows the great river Indus, not far from the city of
+<i>Cambay</i>. It is situated[60] three miles within the land, so
+that brigantines and foists can have no access to it except when
+the tide rises higher than ordinary, when it sometimes overflows
+the land for the space of four miles. At this place the tides
+increase differently from what they do with us, as they increase
+with the wane of the moon, whereas with us while the moon waxes
+towards full. This city is walled after our manner, and abounds
+in all kinds of necessaries, especially wheat and all manner of
+wholesome and pleasant fruits. It has also abundance of
+<i>gosampine</i> or <i>bombassine</i> (cotton) and some kinds of
+spices of which I do not know the names. Merchants bring here
+such quantities of cotton and silk, that sometimes forty or fifty
+vessels are loaded with these commodities for other countries. In
+this region there is a mountain in which the <i>onyx</i> commonly
+called <i>carneola</i> is found, and not far from thence another
+mountain which produces <i>calecdony</i> and diamonds. While I
+was there, the sultan of Cambay was named Mahomet, and had
+reigned forty years after having expelled the king of Guzerat.
+The natives are not Mahometans, neither are they idolaters,
+wherefore I believe if they were only baptised they would not be
+far from the way of salvation, for they observe the pure rule of
+justice, doing unto others as they would be done by. They deem it
+unlawful to deprive any living creature of its life, and never
+eat flesh. Some of them go entirely naked, or only cover the
+parts of shame, wearing fillets of a purple colour round their
+heads. Their complexion is a dark yellow, commonly called a
+<i>leonell</i> colour.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 59: This name is inexplicably corrupted;
+and nothing more can be said of it than is contained in the text,
+which indeed is very vague.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 60: Verthema appears at this place to make
+an abrupt transition to the city of Cambay, taking no farther
+notice of Cheo.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The sultan of Cambay maintains a force of 20,000 horse. Every
+morning fifty men riding on elephants repair to his palace to
+reverence and salute the king, which is done likewise by the
+elephants kneeling down. As soon as the king wakes in the morning
+there is a prodigious noise of drums, trumpets, and other warlike
+instruments of music, as if in token of joy that the sultan still
+lives. The same is done while he is at dinner, when likewise the
+elephants are again brought forward to do him reverence. We shall
+afterwards have occasion to notice the customs, docility, and
+wisdom of these beasts. The sultan has his upper lip so large and
+gross that he sometimes beareth it up with a fillet as women do
+their hair. His beard is white and hangs down below his girdle.
+He has been accustomed to the use of poison even from his
+infancy, and he daily eats some to keep him in use; by which
+strange custom, although he feels no personal hurt therefrom, yet
+is he so saturated with poison that he is a certain poison to
+others. Insomuch that when he is disposed to put any noble to
+death, he causes the victim to be brought into his presence and
+to stand before him while he chews certain fruits called
+<i>Chofolos</i>[61] resembling nutmegs, chewing at the same time
+the leaves of a certain herb named <i>Tambolos</i>, to which is
+added the powder of oyster shells. After chewing these things for
+some time, he spits upon the person whom he wishes to kill, and
+he is sure to die within half an hour, so powerful is the venom
+of his body[62]. He keeps about four thousand concubines, and
+whoever of them chances to sleep with him is sure to die next
+day. When he changes his shirt or any other article of his dress,
+no one dare wear it, or is sure to die. My companion learnt from
+the merchants of Cambay that this wonderful venomous nature of
+the sultan had been occasioned by his having been bred up by his
+father from a child in the constant use of poison, beginning by
+little and little, and taking preservatives at the same time.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 61: It is evident from the text that the
+<i>areka</i> nut is here meant, which is chewed along with
+<i>betel</i> leaf, called tambolos in the text, and strewed with
+<i>chunam</i> or lime made of oyster shells.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 62: This ridiculous story can only be
+understood as an eastern metaphor, expressive of the tyrannous
+disposition of the sultan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Such is the wonderful fertility of this country that it
+surpasses all description. The people, as already said, go almost
+entirely naked, or content themselves with a single garment, and
+are a brave and warlike nation, being at the same time much given
+to commerce, so that their city is frequented by traders of all
+nations. From this city, and another to be named afterwards,
+innumerable kinds and quantities of merchandise are transported
+to almost every region and nation of the world; especially to the
+Turks, Syrians, Arabians, Indians, and to divers regions of
+Africa, Ethiopia, and Arabia; and more especially vast abundance
+of silk and cotton, so that by means of this prodigious trade the
+sultan is astonishingly rich. The sultan of Cambay is almost
+continually at war with the king of <i>Joga</i>, whose realm is
+fifteen days journey from Cambay, and extends very far in all
+directions. This king of <i>Joga</i>[63] and all his people are
+idolaters. He maintains an army always on foot of 30.000 men, and
+is continually in the field travelling through his dominions with
+a prodigious train of followers at the charge of his subject, his
+camp containing at the least 4000 tents and pavilions. In this
+perpetual progress he is accompanied by his wife, children,
+concubines, and slaves, and by every apparatus for hunting and
+amusement. His dress consists of two goat-skins with the hair
+side outwards, one of which covers his breast and the other his
+back and shoulders. His complexion is of a brown weasel colour
+inclining to black, as are most of the native Indians, being
+scorched by the heat of the sun. They wear ear-rings of precious
+stones, and adorn themselves with jewels of various kinds; and
+the king and principal people paint their faces and other parts
+of their bodies with certain spices and sweet gums or ointments.
+They are addicted to many vain superstitions; some professing
+never to lie on the ground, while others keep a continual
+silence, having two or three persons to minister to their wants
+by signs. These devotees have horns hanging from their necks,
+which they blow all at once when they come to any city or town to
+make the inhabitants afraid, after which they demand victuals and
+whatever else they are in need of from the people. When this king
+remains stationary at any place, the greater part of his army
+keeps guard about his pavilion, while five or six hundred men
+range about the country collecting what they are able to procure.
+They never tarry above three days in one place, but are
+continually wandering about like vagabond Egyptians, Arabs, or
+Tartars. The region through which they roam is not fertile, being
+mostly composed of steep and craggy mountains. The city is
+without walls, and its houses are despicable huts or hovels. This
+king is an enemy to the sultan of <i>Machamir</i>? and vexes his
+country with incessant predatory incursions.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 63: What sovereign of India is meant by the
+<i>king of Joga</i> we cannot ascertain, unless perhaps some
+Hindoo rajah in the hilly country to the north-east of Gujerat.
+From some parts of the account of this king and his subjects, we
+are apt to conceive that the relation in the text is founded on
+some vague account of a chief or leader of a band of Hindoo
+devotees. A king or chief of the <i>Jogues</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Departing from Cambay, I came in twelve days journey to the
+city of <i>Ceull</i>[64], the land of Guzerat being interposed
+between these two cities. The king of this city is an idolater.
+His subjects are of a dark yellow colour, or lion tawny, and are
+much addicted to war, in which they use swords, bows and arrows,
+darts, slings, and round targets. They have engines to beat down
+walls and to make a great slaughter in an army. The city is only
+three miles from the sea on the banks of a fine river, by which a
+great deal of merchandise is imported. The soil is fertile and
+produces many different kinds of fruits, and in the district
+great quantities of cotton cloth are made. The people are
+idolaters like those of Calicut, of whom mention will be made
+hereafter, yet there are many Mahometans in the city. The king
+has but a small military force, and the government is
+administered with justice. Two days journey from thence is a city
+named <i>Dabuly</i>[65] on a great river and in a fertile
+country. It is walled like the towns of Italy, and contains a
+vast number of Mahometan merchants. The king is an idolater,
+having an army of 30,000 men. Departing from thence I came to the
+island of <i>Goga</i>[66], not above a mile from the continent,
+which pays yearly a tribute of 1000 pieces of gold to the king of
+<i>Deccan</i>, about the same value with the seraphins of
+Babylon. These coins are impressed on one side with the image of
+the <i>devil</i>[67], and on the other side are some unknown
+characters. On the sea coast at one side of this island there is
+a town much like those of Italy, in which resides the governor,
+who is captain over a company of soldiers named <i>Savain</i>,
+consisting of 400 Mamelukes, he being likewise a Mameluke.
+Whenever he can procure any white man he takes them into his
+service and gives them good entertainment, and if fit for
+military service, of which he makes trial of their strength by
+wrestling, he gives them a monthly allowance of 20 gold
+seraphins; but if not found fit for war he employs them in
+handicrafts. With this small force of only 400 men, he gives much
+disturbance to the king of Narsinga.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 64: There is a district on the west of
+Gujerat or Guzerat named <i>Chuwal</i>, on the river Butlass or
+Banass which runs into the gulf of Cutch, which may be here
+meant.--.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 65: No name having the least affinity to
+that in the text is to be found in any modern map of India near
+the coast of Gujerat. It would almost appear that the author had
+now gone down the coast of India, and that his Chuwal and Dabuly
+are Chaul and Dabul on the coast of the Concan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 66: Nothing can possibly be made of this
+island of Goga. There is a town on the coast of Gujerat and
+western side of the gulf of Cambay called Gogo, but it is no
+island, and could not possibly be subject to the king of the
+Deccan; and besides Verthema is obviously now going down the
+western coast of India.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 67: Of a Swammy or Hindoo
+idol.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From the island of <i>Goga</i> I went to the city of
+<i>Dechan</i>[68], of which the king or sultan is a Mahometan,
+and to whom the before mentioned captain of the Mamelukes at
+<i>Goga</i> is tributary. The city is beautiful, and stands in a
+fertile country which abounds in all things necessary for man.
+The king of this country is reckoned a Mameluke, and has 35,000
+horse and foot in his service. His palace is a sumptuous edifice,
+containing numerous and splendid apartments, insomuch, that one
+has to pass through 44 several rooms in a continued suite before
+getting to the presence-chamber of the sultan, who lives with
+wonderful pomp and magnificence, even those who wait upon him
+having their shoes or <i>starpins</i> ornamented with rubies and
+diamonds, and rich ear-rings of pearls and other precious stones.
+Six miles from the city is a mountain from which they dig
+diamonds, which mountain is surrounded by a wall, and guarded by
+a band of soldiers. The inhabitants of the city are mostly
+Mahometans, who are generally clad in silk, or at least have
+their shirts or lower garments of that fabric; they wear also
+thin buskin and hose or breeches like the Greek mariners, or what
+are called trowsers. Their women, like those of Damascus, have
+their faces veiled. The king of Deccan is almost in continual war
+with the king of Nursinga; most of his soldiers being white men
+from distant countries hired for war, whereas the natives are of
+a dark colour like the other inhabitants of India. This king is
+very rich and liberal, and has a large navy of ships, but he is a
+great enemy to the Christians. Having visited this country, I
+went in five days from thence to <i>Bathacala</i> or
+<i>Batecolak</i>, the inhabitants of which are idolaters, except
+some Mahometan merchants who resort thither for trade. It abounds
+in rice, sugar, wheat, <i>walnuts</i>[69], figs, and many kinds
+of fruits and roots unknown to us, and has plenty of beeves,
+kine, buffaloes, sheep, goats, and other beasts, but no horses,
+asses, or mules. From thence, at the distance of a days journey I
+came to <i>Centacola?</i> the prince of which has no great
+riches; but the district has plenty of flesh, rice, and such
+fruits as grow in India; and to this place many Mahometans resort
+for trade. The king is an idolater, and is subject to him of
+Batecolah. Two days journey from thence I came to <i>Onore</i>,
+the king of which is an idolater, subject to the king of
+Narsinga. The prince or king of Onore has eight armed foists or
+barks, which make excursions by sea, and subsist by piracy, yet
+is he in friendship with the Portuguese. The district produces
+plenty of rice, and has many kinds of wild beasts, as wild boars,
+harts, wolves, <i>lions</i>[70], and many kinds of birds, such as
+peacocks and parrots, besides others very different from ours. It
+has likewise many cattle of a bright yellow colour, and fine fat
+sheep. It has also abundance of flowers of all kinds. The air is
+so temperate and healthy, that the natives live much longer than
+we do in Italy. Not far from this place is another city named
+Mangalore, whence about sixty ships depart yearly with cargoes of
+rice. The inhabitants are partly idolaters, and part
+Mahometans.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 68: Dechan, Deccan, or Dacshin, is the name
+of a territory or kingdom, and properly signifies southern India,
+or simply the south, in reference to Hindostan proper, on the
+north of the Nerbuddah: But Verthema almost always names the
+capital from the kingdom.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 69: By walnuts, I suspect that coca-nuts
+are meant, and rendered walnuts by some mistaken
+translation.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 70: There are no lions in India, and tigers
+are certainly here meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Departing from thence we went to the city of <i>Cananore</i>,
+where the king of Portugal has a strong garrison, though the king
+of the city is an idolater and no great friend to the Portuguese.
+At this port many horses are imported from Persia, which pay a
+high duty. Departing from thence into the inland we came to the
+city of <i>Narsinga</i>[71], which is frequented by many
+Mahometan merchants. The soil in that country bears no wheat, so
+that the inhabitants have no bread, neither hath it vines or any
+other fruits except oranges and gourds, but they have plenty of
+rice and such walnuts as that country <i>produces</i>[72]. It has
+likewise plenty of spices, as pepper, ginger, mirabolans,
+cardamum, cassia, and others, also many kinds of fruits unlike
+ours, and much sweeter. The region is almost inaccessible, <i>for
+many dens and ditches made by force</i>[73]. The king has an army
+of 50,000 <i>gentlemen whom they call heroes</i>[74]. In war they
+use swords and round targets, also lances, darts, bows, and
+slings, and are now beginning to use fire arms. These men go
+almost entirely naked, except when engaged in war. They use no
+horses, mules, asses, or camels; only employing elephants, which
+yet do not fight in battle. Great quantities of merchandise are
+consumed in this city, insomuch that two hundred ships resort
+thither yearly from various countries[75].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 71: Bijanagur was the capital of the
+kingdom known by the name of Narsinga; but from the neighbourhood
+of Cananore, it is possible that Verthema here means
+Narsingapoor, about 25 miles S.S.W. from
+Seringapatam.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 72: The walnuts of this author must have
+been cocoa-nuts, perhaps converted to walnuts by erroneous
+translation.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 73: This singular passage probably means,
+that the country is defended by a great number of forts and
+garrisons, as indeed we know that the interior table land of
+southern India is thickly planted with <i>droogs</i> or hill
+forts, which must then have been impregnable.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 74: Probably meaning Nairs or Rajputs, who
+are reckoned of a high or noble cast, next to the
+Bramins--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 75: This is a most astonishing error, as
+Narsingapoor is above 100 miles from the nearest
+coast.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Departing from Narsinga, and travelling 15 days to the
+<i>east</i>[76], we came to the city of <i>Bisinagar</i>, or
+Bijanagur, which is subject to the king of Narsinga. This city
+stands upon the side of a hill, and is very large, and well
+fortified, being surrounded by a triple wall, eight miles in
+circuit. The district in which it stands is wonderfully fertile,
+and produces every thing requisite for the necessities, and even
+the delicacies and luxuries of man. It is likewise a most
+convenient country for hunting and hawking, having many large
+plains, and fine woods, so that altogether it is a kind of
+earthly paradise. The king and people are idolaters; and the king
+has great power and riches, maintaining an army of 4000 horsemen,
+although it may be noted that a good horse in this country costs
+four or five hundred gold coins called pardaos, and sometimes
+eight hundred. The reason of this high price is, that these
+horses are brought from other countries, whence they can procure
+no mares, as the exportation of these is strictly prohibited by
+the princes of the countries whence the horses are procured. He
+has likewise 400 elephants to serve in his wars, and many of
+those swift running camels which we commonly call
+<i>dromedaries</i>[77].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 76: Bijanagur is 175 miles directly
+<i>north</i> from Narsingapoor.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 77: In modern language the term dromedary
+is very improperly applied to the Bactrian, or two-hunched camel,
+a slow beast of burden. The word dromedary is formed from the
+Greek <i>celer</i>, and only belongs to a peculiar breed of
+camels of amazing swiftness.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At this place I had an excellent opportunity of learning the
+docility and almost reasoning wisdom of the elephant, which
+certainly is the most sagacious and most docile of all animals,
+approaching even to human reason, and far exceeding all other
+beasts in strength. When used for war, the Indians fix great
+pack-saddles on their backs, resembling those used in Italy for
+mules of burden, but vastly larger. These saddles are girt round
+their bellies with two iron chains, and on each side is placed a
+small house, cage, or turret of wood, each of which contains
+three men. Between the two turrets an Indian sits on the back of
+the animal, and speaks to him in the language of the country,
+which the creature understands and obeys. Seven men, therefore,
+are that placed on the back of each elephant, all armed with
+coats of mail, and having lances, bows, darts, and slings, and
+targets for defence. Also the trunk, snout, or proboscis of the
+elephant is armed with a sword fastened to it, two cubits long,
+very strong, and a handbreadth in width. When necessary to
+advance, to retreat, to turn to either side, to strike, or to
+forbear, the governor or conductor of the elephant sitting on his
+back, causes him to do whatever he wills, by speaking in such
+language and expressions as he is accustomed to, all of which the
+beast understands and obeys, without the use of bridle or spur.
+But when fire is thrown at them, they are wonderfully afraid and
+run away, on which occasions it is impossible to stop them; on
+which account the Indians have many curious devices of fire-works
+to frighten the elephants, and make them run away. I saw an
+instance of the extraordinary strength of these animals while at
+Cananore, where some Mahometans endeavoured to draw a ship on the
+land, stem foremost, upon three rollers, on which occasion three
+elephant, commodiously applied, drew with great force, and
+bending their heads down to the ground, brought the ship on the
+land. Many have believed that elephants have no joints in their
+legs, which therefore they could not bend; but this notion is
+utterly false, as they have joints like other beasts, but lower
+down on their legs. The female elephants are fiercer than the
+males, and much stronger for carrying burdens. Sometimes they are
+seized by a kind of fury or madness, on which occasions they run
+about in a disorderly manner. One elephant exceeds the size of
+three buffaloes, to which latter animals their hair has some
+resemblance. Their eyes resemble those of swine. Their snout or
+trunk is very long, and by means of it they convey food and drink
+to their mouths, so that the trunk may be called the hand of the
+elephant. The mouth is under the trunk, and is much like the
+mouth of a sow. The trunk is hollow, and so flexible, that the
+animal can use it to lay hold of sticks, and wield them with it
+as we do with the hand. I once saw the trunk of a tree overthrown
+by one elephant, which 24 men had in vain attempted. It has two
+great teeth or tusks in the upper jaw. Their ears are very broad,
+above two spans even on the smallest elephants. Their feet are
+round and as broad as the wooden trenchers which are in ordinary
+use, and each foot has five round hoofs like large oyster shells.
+The tail is about four spans long, like that of a buffaloe, and
+is very thin of hair. Elephants are of various sizes, some 18
+spans or 14 spans high, and some have been seen as high as 16
+spans; but the females are larger than the males of the same age.
+Their gait is slow and wallowing, so that those who are not used
+to ride upon them are apt to become sick, as if they were at sea;
+but it is pleasant to ride a young elephant, as their pace is
+soft and gentle like an ambling mule. On mounting them, they
+stoop and bend their knee to assist the rider to get up; but
+their keepers use no bridles or halters to guide them. When they
+engender they retire into the most secret recesses of the woods,
+from natural modesty, though some pretend that they copulate
+backwards.</p>
+
+<p>The king of Narsinga exceeds in riches and dominion, all the
+princes I have ever seen or heard of. In beauty and situation the
+city resembles Milan, only that being on the slope of a hill it
+is not so level. Other subject kingdoms lie round about it, even
+as Ausonia and Venice surround Milan. The bramins or priests
+informed me that the king receives daily of tribute from that
+city only the sum of 12,000 <i>pardaos</i>. He and his subjects
+are idolaters, worshipping the devil like those of Calicut. He
+maintains an army of many thousand men, and is continually at war
+with his neighbours. The richer people wear a slender dress,
+somewhat like a petticoat, not very long, and bind their heads
+with a fillet or broad bandage, after the fashion of the
+Mahometans, but the common people go almost entirely naked,
+covering only the parts of shame. The king wears a cape or short
+cloak of cloth of gold on his shoulders, only two spans long; and
+when he goes to war he wears a close vest of cotton, over which
+is a cloak adorned with plates of gold, richly bordered with all
+kinds of jewels and precious stones. The horse he rides on,
+including the furniture or caparisons, is estimated to equal one
+of our cities in value, being all over ornamented with jewels of
+great price. When be goes a hunting, he is attended by other
+three kings, whose office it is to bear him company wherever he
+goes. When he rides out or goes a journey he is attended by 6000
+horsemen; and from all that we have said, and various other
+circumstances respecting his power, riches, and magnificence, he
+certainly is to be accounted one of the greatest sovereigns in
+the world. Besides the pieces already mentioned, named
+<i>pardaos</i>, which are of gold, he coins silver money called
+<i>fano</i>, or <i>fanams</i>, which are worth sixteen of our
+smallest copper money. Such is the excellent government of this
+country, that travellers may go through the whole of it in
+safety, if they can avoid the danger of <i>lions</i>[78]. This
+king is in amity with the king of Portugal, and is a great friend
+to the Christians, so that the Portuguese are received and
+treated in his dominions in a friendly and honourable manner.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 78: Wherever lions are mentioned by this
+traveller in India, tigers are to be
+understood.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When I had tarried many days in this great city, I returned to
+Cananore, whence, after three days stay I went to a city twelve
+miles from thence, named <i>Trempata</i>[79], a sea-port,
+inhabited by idolaters, but frequented by many Mahometan
+merchants. The only riches of this place consists in Indian nuts,
+or cocoa-nuts, and timber for ship-building. Passing from thence,
+by the cities of <i>Pandara</i> and <i>Capagot</i>[80], I came to
+the famous city of Calicut. To avoid prolixity, I pass over many
+other kingdoms and peoples, such as <i>Chianul</i>? <i>Dabul</i>,
+<i>Onou&egrave;</i>? <i>Bangalore</i>, <i>Cananore</i>,
+<i>Cochin</i>, <i>Cacilon</i>? and <i>Calonue</i>, or
+<i>Coulan</i>[81]. I have so done on purpose to enable me to
+treat more at large of Calicut, being in a manner the metropolis
+of all the Indian cities, as the king thereof exceeds all the
+kings of the east in royal majesty, and is therefore called
+<i>Samoory</i> or <i>Zamorin</i>, which in their language
+signifies <i>God on earth</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 79: About that distance south from Cananore
+is Dermapatam.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 80: No names in the least respect similar
+to these are to be found in the indicated route between Cananore
+and Calicut.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 81: Of the three places marked with points
+of interrogation, the names are so disfigured in the orthography
+as to be unintelligible; <i>Cianul</i> may possibly be Chaul,
+<i>Onouh&egrave;</i> Onore, and <i>Cacilon</i>
+Cranganore.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION VIII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Account of the famous City and Kingdom of Calicut.</i></p>
+
+<p>The city of Calicut is situated on the continent or main land
+of India, close upon the sea, having no port; but about a mile to
+the south there is a river which runs into the ocean by a narrow
+mouth. This river is divided into many branches among the fields
+in the plain country, for the purpose of being distributed by
+means of trenches to water the grounds, and one of these branches
+not exceeding three or four feet deep runs into the city. Calicut
+is not walled, and contains about 6000 houses, which are not
+built close adjoining each other, as in European cities, but a
+certain space is left between each, either to prevent the
+communication of fire, or owing to the ignorance of the builders.
+It is a mile in length, and its houses are only mean low huts,
+not exceeding the height of a man on horseback, being mostly
+covered with boughs of trees, instead of tiles or other covering.
+It is said that on digging only five or six spans into the ground
+they come immediately to water, on which account they cannot dig
+foundations of any depth. Warehouses or lodgings for merchants
+may be bought for 15 or 20 pieces of gold; but the common run of
+houses cost only two pieces of gold or even less.</p>
+
+<p>The king and people of Calicut are idolaters, and worshippers
+of the devil, though they acknowledge one supreme God, the
+Creator of heaven and earth, the first chief cause of all things.
+But they allege that God could have no pleasure in his
+government, if he were to take it upon himself, and hath
+therefore given it in charge to the devil, who was sent as they
+say from heaven, to rule over and judge the world, rendering good
+or evil to men according to their deserts. The great God they
+call <i>Tamerani</i>, and this devil or subordinate deity
+<i>Deumo</i>. The king has a chapel in his palace, where this
+Deumo is worshipped. This chapel has an open vault or arch on all
+the four sides, about two paces in breadth, and it is about three
+paces high. The entrance is by a wooden gate, ornamented with
+carved work of monstrous forms or shapes of devils. In the midst
+of the chapel is a royal seat or throne of copper, on which sits
+the figure or image of the devil, likewise of copper. On the head
+of this image is a crown like that worn by the pope, but having
+the addition of four horns, besides which he is represented with
+a great gaping mouth, having four monstrous teeth. The nose is
+horridly deformed, with grim lowering eyes, a threatening look,
+and crooked hands, or talons like flesh-hooks, and feet somewhat
+like those of a cock; forming on the whole, a monster terrible to
+look at. In every corner of the chapel there are other figures of
+devils of shining copper, as if flames of fire devouring
+miserable souls. These souls are about the size of half a finger,
+some of them larger, and each figure puts one of these souls into
+his mouth with the right hand, while the left is on the ground
+lifting up another. Every morning the priests, who are called
+Bramins, wash the idol with rose water, and perfume him with
+sweet savours, after which they pray to him prostrate on the
+earth. Once every week they sacrifice to the idol after this
+form. They have a little altar or cupboard, three spans high,
+five spans long and four broad, on which they strew all manner of
+flowers and sweet-smelling powders; then bringing a great silver
+chafing-dish full of warming coals, they kill a cock with a
+silver knife, throwing the blood into the fire, together with
+many sweet perfumes, and even thrust the bloody blade of the
+knife often into the fire that none of the blood may be lost;
+then the priest maketh many strange gestures with the knife, like
+a fencer, giving or defending thrusts. In the mean time other
+priests with burning censers go round about the altar perfuming
+it with incense, and ringing a small silver bell all the time of
+the sacrifice. The priest who sacrifices the cock has his arms
+and legs garnished with silver plates and pendants, which make a
+noise when he moves like hawks-bells, and he wears a kind of boss
+on his breast inscribed with I know not what signs, being perhaps
+the secret character of some hidden mystery. When the sacrifice
+is finished, he fills both his hands with wheat, and goes
+backwards, keeping his eyes fixed on the altar till he comes to a
+certain tree whereon he casts the wheat; then returning to the
+altar he removes all that is upon it.</p>
+
+<p>The king never sits down to eat till four of his priests have
+offered his meat in this manner to the idol; lifting their hands
+above their heads with many fantastical gesticulations and
+murmuring voices, they present the meat to the idol, and after
+many foolish ceremonies bring back the meat to the king. The meat
+is offered in a wooden tray, after which it is laid on the broad
+leaves of a certain tree. The meat of the king consists of rice
+and divers other things, such as fruits; and be eats sitting on
+the ground without cloth or carpet. During his repast, the
+priests stand round him at four or five paces distance, carefully
+observing all his orders; and when he has done eating, they carry
+away all the remains of his food, which they give to certain
+crows, which being used to be thus fed, come upon a signal, and
+being esteemed holy, it is not lawful for any one to take or even
+hurt them. The chief priests of these idolaters are the bramins,
+who are with them as bishops are among us, and are considered as
+the order of highest dignity. The second order among them are the
+nairs, who come in place of our gentlemen, and go out to war with
+swords and bucklers, lancet, bows, and other weapons. The third
+order consists of mechanics and handicrafts of all kinds. In the
+fourth are victuallers, or those that make provision of fish and
+flesh. Next to them are those who gather pepper, cocoa nuts,
+grapes and other fruits. The baser sort are those who sow and
+gather rice, who are kept under such subjection by the bramins
+and nairs that they dare not approach nearer to them than 50
+paces under pain of death and are therefore obliged to lurk in
+bye places and marshes; and when they go anywhere abroad they
+call out continually in a loud voice, that they may be hoard of
+the bramins and nairs otherwise if any of these were to come near
+they would certainly put these low people to death.</p>
+
+<p>The dress of even the king and queen differ in little or
+nothing from the other idolaters, all going naked, barefooted,
+and bareheaded, except a small piece of silk or cotton to cover
+their nakedness; but the Mahometans wear single garments in a
+more seemly manner, their women being dressed like the men except
+that their hair is very long. The king and nobles eat no kind of
+flesh, except having first got permission of the priests; but the
+common people may eat any flesh they please except that of cows.
+Those of the basest sort, named <i>Nirani</i> and <i>Poliars</i>,
+are only permitted to eat fish dried in the sun.</p>
+
+<p>When the king or zamorin dies, his male children, if any, or
+his brothers by the fathers side, or the sons of these brothers,
+do not succeed in the kingdom: For, by ancient law or custom, the
+succession belongs to the sons of the kings sisters; and if there
+be none such, it goes to the nearest male relation through the
+female blood. The reason of this strange law of succession is,
+that when the king takes a wife, she is always in the first place
+deflowered by the chief bramin, for which he is paid fifty-pieces
+of gold. When the king goes abroad, either in war or a-hunting,
+the queen is left in charge of the priests, who keep company with
+her till his return; wherefore the king may well think that her
+children may not be his; and for this reason the children of his
+sisters by the same mother are considered as his nearest in
+blood, and the right inheritors of the throne. When the king
+dies, all his subjects express their mourning by cutting their
+beards and shaving their heads; and during the celebration of his
+funerals, those who live by fishing abstain from their employment
+during eight days. Similar rules are observed upon the death of
+any of the kings wives. Sometimes the king abstains from the
+company of women for the space of a year, when likewise he
+forbears to chew <i>betel</i> and <i>areka</i>, which are
+reckoned provocatives.</p>
+
+<p>The gentlemen and merchants of Calicut, when they wish to show
+great friendship to each other, sometimes exchange wives, but on
+these occasions the children remain with their reputed fathers.
+It is likewise customary among these idolaters, for one woman to
+have seven husbands at the same time, each of whom has his
+appointed night to sleep with her; and when she has a child, she
+fathers it upon any of the husbands she pleases. The people of
+this country, when at their meals, lie upon the ground, and eat
+their meat from copper trays, using certain leaves instead of
+spoons; their food consisting for the most part of rice and fish
+seasoned with spices, and of the ordinary fruits of the country.
+The lowest people eat in a filthy manner, putting their dirty
+hands into the dish, and thrusting their food by handfuls into
+their mouths. The punishment of murder is by impalement; but
+those who wound or hurt any one have to pay a fine to the king.
+When any one is in debt, and refuses to pay, the creditor goes to
+the judges, of whom there are said to be a hundred, and having
+made due proof of the debt, he receives a certain stick or branch
+of a tree, with authority to arrest his debtor, to whom, when he
+is able to find him, he uses these words: "I charge you by the
+heads of the Bramins, and by the head of the king, that you stir
+not from the spot on which you stand till you pay me what you
+owe." The debtor has now no resource but to pay immediately, or
+to lose his life: for, if he escape after this ceremony, he is
+adjudged a rebel, and it is lawful for any man to kill him.</p>
+
+<p>When they mean to pray to their idols, they resort before
+sunrise to some pool or rivet where they wash themselves, after
+which they resort to the idol-house, taking especial care not to
+touch any thing by the way, and say their prayers prostrate on
+the ground, making strange gesticulations and contortions, so
+marvellously distorting their faces, eyes, and mouths, that it is
+horrible to behold. The nairs or gentlemen may not begin to eat,
+till one of them has dressed and set the food in order, with
+certain ceremonies, but the lower orders are not bound to such
+rules. The women also have no other care than to dress and
+beautify themselves, as they take much pains to wash and purify
+their persons, and to perfume their bodies with many sweet
+savours. Likewise when they go abroad, they are singularly loaded
+with jewels and ornaments on their ears, arms, and legs.</p>
+
+<p>In Calicut there are certain teachers of warlike exercises,
+who train up the youth in the use of the sword, target, and
+lance, and of such other weapons as they employ in war; and when
+the king takes the field he has an army of 100,000 infantry, but
+there are no cavalry in that country. On this occasion the king
+rides upon an elephant, and elephants are used in their wars.
+Those who are next in authority to the king wear fillets round
+their heads of crimson or scarlet silk. Their arms are crooked
+swords, lances, bows and arrows, and targets. The royal ensign is
+an umbrella borne aloft on a spear, so as to shade the king from
+the heat of the sun, which ensign in their language is called
+<i>somber</i>. When both armies approach within three
+arrow-flights, the king sends his bramins to the enemy by way of
+heralds, to challenge an hundred of them to combat against an
+hundred of his nairs, during which set combat both sides prepare
+themselves for battle. In the mean time the two select parties
+proceed to combat, mid-way between the two armies, always
+striking with the edge of their swords at the heads of their
+antagonists, and never thrusting with the point, or striking at
+the legs. Usually when five or six are slain of either side, the
+Bramins interpose to stop the fight, and a retreat is sounded at
+their instance. After which the Bramins speak to the adverse
+kings, and generally succeed to make up matters without any
+battle or farther slaughter.</p>
+
+<p>The king sometimes rides on an elephant, but at other times is
+carried by his nairs or nobles, and when he goes out is always
+followed by a numerous band of minstrels, making a prodigious
+noise with drums, timbrels, tambourets, and other such
+instruments. The wages of the nairs are four <i>carlines</i>
+each, monthly, in time of peace, and six during war. When any of
+them are slain, their bodies are burned with great pomp and many
+superstitious ceremonies, and their ashes are preserved; but the
+common people are buried in their houses, gardens, fields, or
+woods, without any ceremony. When I was in Calicut it was crowded
+with merchants from almost every part of the east, especially a
+prodigious number of Mahometans. There were many from Malacca and
+Bengal, from Tanaserim, Pegu, and Coromandel, from the islands of
+Ceylon and Sumatra, from all the cities and countries of Western
+India, and various Persians, Arabians, Syrians, Turks, and
+Ethiopians. As the idolaters do not sail on the sea, the
+Mahometans are exclusively employed in navigation, so that there
+are not less than 15,000 Mahometans resident in Calicut, mostly
+born in that place. Their ships are seldom below the burden of
+four or five hundred tons, yet all open and without decks. They
+do not put any tow or oakum into the seams of their ships, yet
+join the planks so artificially, that they hold out water
+admirably, the seams being pitched and held together with iron
+nails, and the wood of which their ships are built is better than
+ours. Their sails are made of cotton cloth, doubled in the under
+parts, by which they gather much wind and swell out like bags,
+having only one sail to each vessel. Their anchors are of marble,
+eight spans long, having two on each side of the ship, which are
+hung by means of double ropes. Their voyages are all made at
+certain appointed times and seasons, as one time of the year
+answers for one coast, and another season for other voyages,
+which must all be regulated according to the changes of the
+weather. In the months of May, June, and July, when with us in
+Italy every thing is almost burnt up with heat and drought, they
+have prodigious rains. The best of their ships are built in the
+island of <i>Porcai</i>, not far from Calicut. They have one kind
+of vessel or canoe, made all of one piece of wood like a trough,
+very long, narrow, and sharp, which is propelled either by oars
+or sails, and goes with amazing swiftness, which is much used by
+pirates.</p>
+
+<p>The palace of the king of Calicut exceeds a mile in
+circumference, and is well constructed of beams and posts
+artificially joined, and curiously carved all over with the
+figures of devils. It is all however very low, for the reason
+before-mentioned, as they cannot dig deep for secure foundations.
+It is impossible to express in words the number and riches of the
+pearls and precious stones which the king wears about him, which
+exceed all estimate in regard to their value. Although, when I
+was in that place, the king lived rather in a state of grief,
+both on account of the war in which he was engaged with the
+Portuguese, and because he was afflicted by the venereal disease
+which had got into his throat, yet his ears, hands, legs, and
+feet, were richly garnished with all sorts of jewels and precious
+stones, absolutely beyond description. His treasure is so vast,
+that it cannot be contained in two immense cellars or warehouses,
+consisting of precious stones, plates of gold, and other rich
+ornaments, besides as much, gold coin as might load an hundred
+mules, as was reported by the Bramins, to whom these things are
+best known. This treasure is said to have been hoarded up by
+twelve kings, his predecessors. In this treasury there is said to
+be a coffer three spans long and two broad, entirely full of
+precious stones of inestimable value.</p>
+
+<p>Pepper is gathered in the fields around the suburbs of
+Calicut, and even in some places within the city. It grows on a
+weak and feeble plant, somewhat like vines, which is unable to
+support itself without props or stakes. It much resembles ivy,
+and in like manner creeps up and embraces such trees as it grows
+near. This tree, or bush rather, throws out numerous branches of
+two or three spans long, having leaves like those of the Syrian
+apple, but somewhat thicker. On every twig there hang six
+clusters about the size of dates, and of the colour of unripe
+grapes, but thicker together. These are gathered in October,
+while still inclining to green, and are spread out on mats in the
+sun to dry, when in three days they become black, just as brought
+to us. The fruitfulness of these plants proceeds entirely from
+the goodness of the soil in which they grow, as they do not
+require pruning or lopping like vines with us. This region also
+produces ginger, some roots weighing twelve ounces, though they
+do not penetrate the ground above three or four spans. When the
+roots are dug up, the uppermost joint is again set in the ground,
+as seed for next year's crop. It and the mirabolans are found in
+a red-coloured soil, and the stalk much resembles a young
+pear-tree.</p>
+
+<p>Were I to describe all the strange fruits that are produced in
+this country, it would require a large volume for that alone; as
+they not only have many quite different from ours in form, taste,
+and flavour, but even those kinds which are the same with ours,
+differ essentially in many particulars. Natural philosophers may
+consider how it should so happen that things of the same kind
+become so essentially different, according to the changes of soil
+and climate; by which some fruits and seeds, by transplantation
+to better soil, become more perfect in their kind, as larger,
+fairer, sweeter, and more fruitful; while others are improved by
+a worse soil and colder region. This diversity may not only be
+seen in plants and herbs, but also in beasts, and even in man. It
+is strange to observe how very differently some trees bear their
+fruits and seeds, some in one part of the tree and some in other
+parts. At Calicut there is a fruit named <i>Jaceros</i>, which
+grows on a tree about the size of our pear trees. The fruit is
+about two spans and a half long, and as thick as the thigh of a
+man, growing out of the body of the tree under the branches, some
+in the middle of the tree and others lower down. The colour of
+this fruit is green, and its form and appearance resembles a pine
+apple, but with smaller grains or knobs. When ripe it is black,
+and is gathered in December. It has the taste of a <i>pepon</i>
+with a flavour of musk, and in eating seems to give various
+pleasant tastes, sometimes resembling a peach, sometimes like a
+pomegranate, and leaves a rich sweet in the month like new
+honeycombs. Under the skin it has a pulp like that of a peach,
+and within that are other fruits like soft chesnuts, which when
+roasted eat much like them. This is certainly one of the finest
+fruits I ever met with. There is another fruit called
+<i>Apolanda</i>, which is worthy of being mentioned. The tree
+grows to the height of a man, having not above four or five
+leaves hanging from certain slips, each leaf being so large that
+it is sufficient to cover a man entirely from rain or the heat of
+the sun. In the middle of each leaf rises a stalk like that of a
+bean, which produces flowers followed by fruit a span long, and
+as thick as a mans arm. These fruits are gathered unripe, as they
+become ripe in keeping. Every slip bears about two hundred fruits
+in a cluster. They are of a yellow colour with a very thin skin,
+and are most delicate eating, and very wholesome. There are three
+kinds of this fruit, one of which is not so pleasant or so much
+esteemed as the others. This tree bears fruit only once and then
+dies; but there rise from the ground all about the root fifty or
+sixty young slips which renew the life of the parent tree. The
+gardeners transplant these to other places, and in one year they
+produce fruit This fruit is to be had in great abundance, almost
+the whole year, and are so cheap that twenty of them may be had
+for a penny. This country produces innumerable flowers of great
+beauty and most pleasant flavour, all the year round, and
+especially roses, both red, white, and yellow.</p>
+
+<p>The cocoa is another tree most worthy of being known, as in
+fruitfulness and sweetness of fruit it surpasses all other trees.
+Its fruit is a nut of large size; and taken altogether, this tree
+produces ten different commodities of value: as it produces wood
+most excellent for burning, nuts very pleasant to eat, cords or
+ropes that answer well for ships, fine cloth, which when dyed
+resembles silk. The wood is the best that can be found for making
+charcoal, and it yields wine, odoriferous water, sugar, and oil.
+The boughs or leaves serve to cover houses, instead of tiles or
+thatch, as, by reason of their closeness and substance, they keep
+out the rain admirably. One tree will produce about two hundred
+large nuts. The outer rhind of these nuts is removed, and thrown
+into the fire, where it burns quickly and with a strong flame.
+The inner rhind is like cotton or flax, and can be wrought in the
+same manner. From the finer part of this, a kind of cloth is made
+resembling silk; and from the tow, or refuse, they make a coarser
+cloth, or small ropes and twine; while the coarsest parts are
+made into cables and large ropes for ships. The inner hard shell
+of the nut incloses the kernel, which is excellent eating, and
+lines the shell to the thickness of an inch or less. Within this
+is found to the quantity of two or three cups of sweet water,
+which is excellent to drink, and which, by boiling, produces good
+oil. Only one side of the tree is allowed to produce fruit, as
+they wound the other side every morning and evening in several
+places, whence a juice or sap runs out into vessels placed to
+receive it. Thus they procure at each wound, every night and
+morning, a cupful of most precious liquor, which sometimes they
+boil till it becomes strong as brandy, so as to make people drunk
+like strong wine, which it resembles in taste and flavour. They
+likewise procure sugar from this tree, but not very sweet. This
+tree produces fruit continually, as at all times there are to be
+seen upon it both old ripe fruit of the past season, and green
+fruit of the present year. It does not begin bearing till five
+years old, and only lives for twenty five years. It thrives best
+in sandy ground, and is planted or set out like our walnuts; and
+is so much valued, that it is to be found all over the country
+for at least two hundred miles. This country also produces other
+fruits, from which they make good oil.</p>
+
+<p>For the cultivation of rice they till the ground with oxen as
+we do, and at the season for sowing they have a holiday, on which
+they testify their joy by singing and dancing to the sound of all
+kinds of instruments of music. To ensure, as they conceive, a
+favourable produce, ten men are disguised like so many devils,
+who dance to the noise of their music; and after the festivities
+of the day, they pray to the devils to send them a plentiful
+crop.</p>
+
+<p>When any merchant of these idolaters is sore afflicted with
+disease and near death, then certain persons who are accounted
+physicians among them ore called to visit the person in
+extremity. These persons accordingly come to his house in the
+dead of night, dressed like devils, and carrying burning sticks
+in their mouth and hands. And there, with mad cries and boilings,
+and with the jangling of certain instruments, they make such a
+horrible noise in the ears of the sick man, as is enough to make
+a healthy man sick. This is the only remedy these pretended
+physicians offer to their sick persons, being merely to present
+to him when at the point of death the resemblance of him whom,
+worse than devils, they honour as the vicegerent of the deity.
+When any one hath so engorged himself with eating as to be sick
+at stomach, he takes the powder of ginger, mixed in some liquid
+to the consistence of syrup, which he drinks, and in three days
+he recovers his former health.</p>
+
+<p>Their bankers, brokers, and money-changers use weights and
+scales of such small size, that the box containing the whole does
+not exceed an ounce in weight, yet are they so delicate and just
+that they will turn with the weight of a hair. For trying the
+parity of gold, they use the touch-stone as with us, but with
+this addition: having first rubbed the gold to be tried on the
+touch-stone, they rub over the mark with a ball of some sort of
+composition resembling wax, by which all that is not fine gold
+disappears, and the marks or spots of gold remain, by which they
+have an exact proof of the fineness of the gold. When the ball
+becomes full of gold, they melt it in the fire, to recover the
+gold which it contains; yet are these men very ignorant even of
+the art which they profess. In buying or selling merchandise they
+employ the agency of brokers; so that the buyer and seller each
+employs a separate broker. The seller takes the buyer by the
+hand, under cover of a scarf or veil, where, by means of the
+fingers, counting from one to a hundred thousand privately, they
+offer and bargain far the price till they are agreed, all of
+which passes in profound silence.</p>
+
+<p>The women of this country suckle their children till three
+months old, after which they feed them on goats milk. When in the
+morning they have given them milk, they allow them to tumble
+about on the sands all foul and dirty, leaving them all day in
+the sun, so that they look more like buffaloe calves than human
+infants; indeed I never saw such filthy creatures. In the evening
+they get milk again. Yet by this manner of bringing up they
+acquire marvellous dexterity in running, leaping, swimming, and
+the like.</p>
+
+<p>There are many different kinds of beasts and birds in this
+country, as <i>lions</i>, wild boars, harts, hinds, buffaloes,
+cows, goats, and elephants; but these last are not all bred here,
+being brought from other places. They have also parrots of sundry
+colours, as green, purple, and other mixt colours, and they are
+so numerous that the rice fields have to be watched to drive them
+away. These birds make a wonderful chattering, and are sold so
+low as a halfpenny each. There are many other kinds of birds
+different from ours, which every morning and evening make most
+sweet music, so that the country is like an earthly paradise, the
+trees, herbs, and flowers being in a continual spring, and the
+temperature of the air quite delightful, as never too hot nor too
+cold. There are also monkeys, which are sold at a low price, and
+are very hurtful to the husbandmen, as they climb the trees, and
+rob them of their valuable fruits and nuts, and cast down the
+vessels that are placed for collecting the sap from which wine is
+made. There are serpents also of prodigious size, their bodies
+being as thick as those of swine, with heads like those of boars;
+these are four footed, and grow to the length of four cubits, and
+breed in the marshes[82]. The inhabitants say that these have no
+venom. There are three other kinds of serpents, some of which
+have such deadly venom, that if they draw ever so little blood
+death presently follows, as happened several times while I was in
+the country. Of these some are no larger than asps, and some much
+bigger, and they are very numerous. It is said that, from some
+strange superstition, the king of Calicut holds them in such
+veneration, that he has small houses or cottages made on purpose
+for them, conceiving that they are of great virtue against an
+over abundance of rain, and overflowing of the rivers. Hence they
+are protected by law, and any person killing one would be
+punished with death, so that they multiply exceedingly. They have
+a strange notion that serpents come from heaven, and are actuated
+by heavenly spirits, and they allege that only by touching them
+instant death insues. These serpents know the idolaters from the
+Mahometans, or other strangers, and are much more apt to attack
+the former than the latter. Upon one occasion, I went into a
+house where eight men lay dead, and greatly swollen, having been
+killed the day before by these serpents; yet the natives deem it
+fortunate to meet any of them in their way.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 82: From the description these must be
+crocodiles--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The palace of the king of Calicut contains many mansions, and
+a prodigious number of apartments, in all of which a prodigious
+number of lamps are lighted up every evening. In the great hall
+of the palace there are ten or twelve great and beautiful
+candlesticks of <i>laton</i> or brass, of cunning workmanship,
+much like goodly fountains, the height of a man. In each of these
+are several vessels, and in every vessel are three burning
+candles of two spans long, with great plenty of oil. In the first
+vessel there are many lamps or wicks of cotton; the middle
+vessel, which is narrower, is also full of lamps; and the lowest
+vessel has also a great number of lights, maintained with oil and
+cotton wicks. All the angles or corners of these candlesticks are
+covered with figures of devils, which also hold lights in their
+hands; and in a vessel on the top of all the candlesticks there
+are innumerable cotton wicks kept constantly burning, and
+supplied with oil. When any one of the royal blood dies, the king
+sends for all the bramins or priests in his dominions, and
+commands them to mourn for a whole year. On their arrival, he
+feasts them for three days, and when they depart gives each of
+them five pieces of gold.</p>
+
+<p>Not far from Calicut, there is a temple of the idolaters,
+encompassed with water like an island, built in the ancient
+manner, having a double row of pillars much like the church of
+<i>St John de fonte</i> at Rome, and in the middle of this temple
+is a stone altar, on which the people sacrifice to their idols.
+High up between the rows of pillars there is a vessel like a
+boat, two paces long, and filled with oil. Also, all round about
+the temple there are many trees, on which are hung an incredible
+number of lamps, and the temple itself is everywhere hung round
+with lamps, constantly burning. Every year, on the 25th of
+December, an infinite number of people resort to this temple,
+even from fifteen days journey all round the country, together
+with a vast number of priests, who sacrifice to the idols of the
+temple, after having washed in the water by which it is
+surrounded. Then the priests ascend to the boat which is filled
+with oil, from which they anoint the heads of all the people, and
+then proceed to the sacrifice. On one side of the altar, there is
+a most horrible figure of a devil, to whom the people lay their
+prayers, prostrate on the ground, and then depart each one to his
+home, believing that all their sins are forgiven them. On this
+occasion, the environs of the temple is considered a sanctuary,
+where no person may be arrested or troubled on any cause or
+pretence. I never saw so prodigious a number of people assembled
+in any one place, except in the city of Mecca.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IX.</p>
+
+<p><i>Observations on various parts of India</i>.</p>
+
+<p>As there was no convenience for trade at Calicut, on account
+of war with the Portuguese, because the inhabitants in
+conjunction with the Mahometans had murdered 48 Portuguese while
+I was in that city, my faithful friend and companion
+<i>Cociazenor</i> the Persian, formerly mentioned, thought it
+best for us to depart from thence. Indeed, in revenge for that
+cruel murder, the Portuguese have ever since waged cruel war upon
+Calicut, doing infinite injury to the city and people. Wherefore,
+departing from thence by way of a fine river, we came to a city
+named <i>Caicolon</i>[83], which is fifty leagues from Calicut.
+The inhabitants of this city are idolaters, but it is frequented
+by many merchants from different places, as its district produces
+excellent pepper. At this place we found certain merchants who
+were Christians, calling themselves followers of the apostle St
+Thomas. They observe lent, or the fast of forty days, as we do,
+and believe in the death and resurrection of Christ, so that they
+celebrate Easter after our manner, and observe the other
+solemnities of the Christian religion after the manner of the
+Greeks. They are commonly named John, James, Matthew, Thomas, and
+so forth, after the names of the apostles. Departing thence,
+after three days journey we came to another city named
+<i>Coulan</i>, about twenty leagues from <i>Caicolon</i>. The
+king of this place is an idolater, and has an army of 20,000 men
+always on foot. Coulan has an excellent harbour, and the
+surrounding country produces plenty of pepper, but no corn. By
+reason of the wars, we made no stay here, and on our way farther
+we saw people fishing for pearls, in the manner already mentioned
+when treating of Ormuz.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 83: From the distance and direction of the
+journey or voyage, this name may possibly be an error or
+corruption for Cranganore.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The <i>city of Coromandel</i> on the sea coast, is seven days
+sail from Coulan. It is very large, but without walls, and is
+subject to the king of Narsinga, being within sight of the island
+of Ceylon[84]. After passing the southern point of Cape Comorin,
+the eastern coast of India produces abundance of rice. This city
+is resorted to by vast numbers of Mahometan merchants from many
+distant countries, as from it they can travel to various great
+regions and cities of India. At this place I met with certain
+Christians, who affirm that the body of St Thomas the apostle is
+buried in a certain place about twelve miles from the city, where
+several Christians continually dwell to guard the body of the
+saint. They told me that these Christians are evil intreated by
+the natives, on account of the war carried on by the Portuguese
+against the people of the country; and that the Christians are
+often murdered in secret, that it may not be known to the king of
+Narsinga, who is in amity with the Portuguese, and greatly
+favours the Christians. Once on a time there was a conflict
+between the Christians and Mahometans, in which one of the
+Christians was sore wounded in the arm. He immediately repaired
+to the sepulchre of St Thomas, where, making his prayers and
+touching the holy shrine, he was immediately healed by miracle,
+upon which, as it is said, the king of Narsinga has ever since
+greatly favoured the Christians. At this place my companion sold
+much of his merchandize; but on account of war raging in the
+country, we determined to depart, and calling with much danger
+over a gulf 20 leagues broad, we came to the large island of
+<i>Zailon</i>, or Ceylon.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 84: From other circumstances in the text,
+particularly the neighbourhood of the place where St Thomas lay
+buried, the city here alluded to was probably Meliapour, which
+formerly stood not far from Madras, or the famous
+<i>Mahubulipoor</i>, the city of the great Bali, 16 or 18 miles
+from the English settlement. The author, as on many other
+occasions, gives the name of the country to the capital. As to
+being in sight of Ceylon, this may be an error in transcription,
+and we ought to read that on the voyage between Coulan and the
+city of Coromandel; the author passed in sight of
+Ceylon.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This island of Ceylon is 1000 miles in circumference, and is
+divided among four powerful kings; and because of the wars which
+then raged among them we could not remain long there to acquire
+any minute knowledge of the country and manners of its
+inhabitants. It contains many elephants. At the foot of a very
+long and high mountain there are found many precious stones
+called <i>piropi</i> or rubies, which are got in the following
+manner. The adventurers purchase from the king a certain measure
+of the ground where these rubies are found, being about a cubit
+square, for which they pay five pieces of gold, yet under the
+condition that there shall always be an officer belonging to the
+king present while they are digging, that if any stone be found
+beyond the weight of ten carats it may be reserved for the king,
+all under that weight belonging to the adventurer. Not far from
+that mountain they find other precious stones, as jacinths,
+sapphires, and topazes, besides others. The soil of Ceylon
+produces the sweetest fruits I ever saw, especially
+<i>cloves</i>[85] and Assyrian apples of wonderful sweetness, and
+its other productions are similar to those of Calicut. The
+cinnamon-tree is much like our bay, only that the leaves are
+smaller and somewhat white. The true cinnamon is the bark of this
+tree, which is gathered every third year, and of which the island
+produces great quantities. When first gathered, it is by no means
+so sweet and fragrant as it becomes a month afterwards when
+thoroughly dry. A Mahometan merchant assured my companion, that
+on the top of a high mountain in the centre of this island, there
+is a certain cave or den where the inhabitants resort for
+devotion, in memory of our first parents, who, as they allege,
+lived in that place in continual penitence, after breaking the
+covenant with God, which is confirmed by the print of Adam's feet
+being still to be seen there above two spans in length. The
+inhabitants of this island are subject to the king of Narsinga,
+to whom they pay tribute. The climate is temperate and healthy,
+though situated so near the equinoctial line. The people are of a
+dark tawny colour, and wear slight cotton dresses, having the
+right arm bare, as is the universal custom of the Indians; the
+men being by no means warlike, neither have they the use of iron.
+In this island my companion sold the king a great deal of saffron
+and coral.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 85: Cloves are certainly not found in
+Ceylon.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In three days sail we came to a city named <i>Paleachet</i> or
+Pullicat, belonging to the king of Narsinga, a famous mart for
+rich commodities, and especially for jewels and precious stones
+brought from Ceylon and Pegu, and where likewise abundance of
+spices are sold. Many Mahometan merchants dwell in this city; and
+being received into one of their houses, we told him whence we
+came, and that we had brought saffron and coral for sale, with
+other merchandise, of which he was very glad. At this city wheat
+is scarce, but rice is to be had in great plenty; and in other
+respects the productions of the neighbouring country are much the
+same as at Calicut. But as the inhabitants were preparing for
+war, we departed from thence, and after thirteen days sail we
+arrived at the city of <i>Tarnasari</i> or Tanaserim, a hundred
+miles distant.</p>
+
+<p>The city of Tanaserim is not far from the sea, well walled,
+seated on a fine plain, and has a famous port on a fine river
+that runs past its north side. The king is an idolater of great
+power, and is constantly at war with the kings of Narsinga and
+Bengal[86]. He is able to bring into the field an hundred
+thousand foot and as many cavalry, together with a hundred of the
+largest and finest elephants I ever saw. The weapons of his
+troops are swords, round bucklers, <i>peltes</i>, bows and
+arrows, and javelins or darts made of long reeds; they also use
+for defence cotton jacks wrought very hard and close quilted. The
+houses in their towns are built close together like those in
+Italy. This country produces wheat, cotton, silk of various
+kinds, Brazil wood, sundry kinds of fruit like those of Italy,
+with Assyrian apples, oranges, lemons, citrons, gourds,
+cucumbers, and many others. It has many animals both wild and
+tame. Among the former are oxen and cows, sheep, goats, hogs, and
+deer. The wild beasts are lions, wolves, catamountains, and musk
+cats or civets. In the woods are many peacocks and falcons, with
+popinjays or parrots, some of which are entirely white, while
+others are of seven different colours. There are plenty of hares
+and partridges, and several kinds of birds of prey larger than
+eagles. These birds are black and purple, with several white
+feathers intermixed, having yellow bills tipt beautifully with
+crimson, which are so large that the handles of swords are
+sometimes made of the upper mandible. Their cocks and hens are
+the largest I ever saw, and both the natives and the Mahometans
+who dwell there, take great delight in cock-fighting, on which
+they venture large sums. I have seen them fight for six hours,
+yet will they sometimes kill at the first stroke. Some of their
+goats are much larger and handsomer than ours, and of these the
+females have often four kids at one birth. So abundant are
+animals in this country, that twelve sheep may be bought for a
+single piece of gold worth about a pistole. Some of their rams
+have horns like a buck, and are much bigger and fiercer than
+ours. Their buffaloes are not so good as those of Italy. This
+coast has abundance of fine large fish, which are sold very
+cheap. The natives eat the flesh of all kinds of beasts except
+cows, and feed sitting on the ground without cloth or carpet,
+having their meat in wooden vessels artificially wrought. Their
+drink is sugar and water. Their beds are raised from the ground
+like ours. Their apparel is a cloak or mantle of cotton cloth,
+leaving one arm bare, but some wear inner vests or shirts of silk
+or cotton. All go bareheaded, except the priests, who have a kind
+of caps of two spans long on their heads, with a knob on the top
+about the size of an acorn, all sparkling with gold. They delight
+in ear-rings, but have neither rings nor bracelets. The
+complexion of the natives inclines towards fair, as the air is
+more temperate than at Calicut. In their tillage and reaping
+there is little difference from the manner of Italy.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 86: It is not easy to conceive by what
+means this could be, as Pegu, Ava, Aracan, and Tipera, intervene
+between Tanaserim and Bengal, and the bay of Bengal between
+Tanaserim and Narsinga or the Carnatic, none of the powers
+mentioned being possessed of any maritime
+force.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When the king or any of the priests or great men die, their
+bodies are burnt on a large pile of wood, and all the while the
+assistants sacrifice to the devil. The ashes are then gathered
+into earthen jars like those of <i>Samos</i>, and are preserved
+or buried in their houses. While the bodies are burning, they
+cast into the fire all manner of perfumes, as wood of aloes,
+myrrh, frankincense, storax, sandal-wood, and many other sweet
+gums, spices, and woods: In the mean time also, they make an
+incessant noise with drums, trumpets, pipes, and other
+instruments, much like what was done of old by the Greeks and
+Romans, when deifying their departed great men. Likewise during
+these obsequies, there are 15 or 20 persons disguised like
+devils, continually walking round the fire with strange
+gesticulations. All the while the wife of the deceased stands
+alone beside the fire weeping and lamenting her loss. Fifteen
+days afterwards she invites all the kindred of her husband to a
+feast, when they go at night in a body to the place where the
+husband was burnt, the widow being dressed in all her jewels and
+richest attire, using on this occasion the help of her relations
+to decorate her person to the utmost. At this place a pit of some
+size is prepared and filled with dry reeds, covered over with a
+silk cloth to conceal the pit. Then a fire of sweet woods is
+kindled in the pit; and when all the guests have been heartily
+feasted, the widow having eaten a great quantity of <i>betola</i>
+so as to make her mad or drunk, a great company of their
+musicians habited like devils, with burning sticks in their
+mouths, dance around the fire, and then make a sacrifice to the
+great devil <i>Deumo</i>. The widow then runs about like a person
+bereaved of her senses, dancing and rejoicing after a strange
+manner; then turning to the persons disguised like devils, she
+commends herself to their prayers, desiring them to make
+intercession for her with <i>Deumo</i>, that after this
+transitory life she may be received among his angels. When all
+the ceremonies are finished, she takes leave of all her kindred,
+and then lifting up her hands, and with a sudden loud cry, she
+leaps into the flaming pit, on which her kindred cover her up
+with faggots of sweet wood, and great quantities of pitch or
+bitumen, that she may be speedily consumed. If the widow refuses
+thus to sacrifice herself, she would be ever afterwards esteemed
+an evil woman, hated of all men, and even in danger of being
+slain by her own and her husband's kindred. The king is generally
+present at these ceremonies, which are not used at the death of
+ordinary people, but only for kings, priests, and great men.</p>
+
+<p>Justice in strictly administered in this country. Whoever
+kills a man is adjudged to die as at Calicut. Proof of giving or
+receiving is taken by writings or by witnesses, the governor of
+the city being chief judge. If any merchant stranger die there
+without children, all his goods fall to the king. When the king
+dies, he is succeeded in the throne by his children. The children
+of the natives divide equally among them all the possessions of
+their father. When any Mahometan merchant dies, their bodies are
+embalmed with many sweet spices and gums, and being placed in
+wooden coffins, they are buried with their faces towards Mecca.
+In their manner of writing they use parchment as we do, and not
+the leaves of trees as at Calicut. Their vessels are a kind of
+shallow brigantines or barks with flat bottoms, which draw very
+little water. Some also use foists having <i>double
+foreparts</i>[87], and two masts, but these have no decks. They
+have also some vessels of large burden, even carrying a thousand
+tons, in which they have several boats, and these are used when
+they go to Malacca for spices.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 87: This is not easily understood, unless
+it may mean that they are so built that they may sail with either
+end foremost.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having finished our business at Tanaserim, we packed up all
+our wares and embarked for Bengal, distant 700 miles from
+Tanaserim, whither we arrived in twelve days sailing. In
+fruitfulness and abundance of all things <i>this city</i>[88] may
+contend for eminence with any city in the world. The kingdom
+dependent upon this city is very large, rich, and populous, and
+the king, who is a Mahometan, maintains an army of 200,000 men,
+including cavalry and infantry, with which he keeps up almost
+continual wars against the king of Narsinga. This country is so
+fruitful, that it possesses every thing conducive to the use of
+man, abounding in all kinds of beasts, wholesome fruits, and
+corn. It has spices also of several kinds, and vast abundance of
+cotton and silk. No other region in the world is comparable to
+this, so that there are many rich merchants. Every year there
+depart from hence fifty ships laden with cloths of cotton or
+silk, bound for the cities of Turkey, Syria, Arabia, Persia,
+Ethiopia, and India. There are also many merchant strangers, who
+buy precious stones from the natives. We found here many
+Christian merchants who were born, as they told us, in the city
+of <i>Sarnau</i>. They had brought to this great mart wood of
+aloes and <i>laser</i>, which latter yields the sweet gum called
+<i>laserpitium</i>, commonly called <i>belzoi</i>, or benzoin,
+which is a kind of myrrh. They bring also musk and several other
+sweet perfumes. These Christian merchants told us, that in their
+country were many Christian princes, subject to the great khan,
+who dwells in the city of <i>Cathay</i>[89]. The dress of these
+Christians was of camblet, very loose and full of plaits, and
+lined with cotton; and they wore sharp pointed caps of a scarlet
+colour, two spans high. They are white men, believing in one God
+with a trinity of persons, and were baptized after our manner.
+They believe in the doctrines of the evangelists and apostles,
+and write from right to left like the Armenians. They celebrate
+the birth and crucifixion of Christ, observe the forty days of
+lent, and keep the days of several saints. They wear no shoes,
+but have a kind of hose of silk on their legs, garnished with
+jewels. On their fingers they wore rings with stones of wonderful
+splendour. At their meat they use no tables, but eat lying on the
+ground, feeding upon flesh of all kinds. They affirmed also that
+there are certain Christian kings, whom they called <i>Rumi</i>,
+bordering on the Turks. When these Christians had seen the
+precious merchandise belonging to my companion, and particularly
+a great branch of coral, they earnestly advised him to accompany
+them to a certain city, whither they were bound, assuring him
+that by their procurement he should sell this to very great
+advantage, especially if he would take rubies in payment, by
+means of which he might easily gain 10,000 pieces of gold,
+assuring him that these stones were of much greater value in
+Turkey than in the east. And as they were ready to depart the
+very next day in a foist bound for the city of Pegu, where they
+meant to go, my companion consented to go with them, more
+especially as he expected to find there certain Persians his
+countrymen. Wherefore departing with these men from Bengal, and
+sailing across a great gulf to the south-east, we came at length
+to the city of Pegu, which is 1000 miles from Bengal.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 88: Here, as usual, the name of the country
+is given instead of the chief city, and we have no means even to
+guess what place is indicated, unless perhaps the <i>Satigan</i>
+of other ancient relations, which appears to have been a city on
+the Hoogly river, or western branch of the
+Ganges.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 89: The capital of Cathay or northern China
+is Cambalu or Pekin, but it is difficult to make any thing of
+these Christian natives of <i>Sarnau</i>, or of their many
+Christian princes in Tartary; unless we may suppose Verthema to
+have mistaken the followers of the Lama of Thibet for Christians,
+as appears to have been done by some of the more ancient
+travellers in our early volumes.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The city of Pegu is situated on the continent, not far from
+the sea, and upon a large river, by which merchandise are
+conveyed to or from the city very conveniently. The city is
+walled, and the houses are well built. The king and his subjects
+are idolaters, of a fairer complexion than those of Tanaserim, as
+the climate is rather cooler, but in dress, manner of living, and
+general appearance, in every respect resemble the inhabitants of
+that other city. The king has a vast army both of horse and foot,
+among whom are many native Christians, who have six pardaos of
+monthly pay. The beasts and fowls are much the same as at
+Calicut, so that they have abundance of animal food; and besides
+these they have a few elephants. This country produces the best
+timber I ever saw, either for building ships or houses; and has
+many reeds or canes of vast size, as large in diameter as the
+body of a man or a large barrel. Civet-cats or musk-cats are so
+plenty that three may be bought for one piece of gold. This city
+produces very little merchandise for purchase, except precious
+stones, and especially rubies, which are brought thither from
+another city named <i>Cassela</i>, thirty days journey towards
+the east, where also they procure other precious stones called
+<i>smaragdes</i> or emeralds. On our arrival at Pegu, the king
+was at the distance of twenty-five days journey making war upon
+the king of Ava; but returned shortly afterwards in great triumph
+on account of a victory he had obtained over his enemy. Though
+this king is very rich and powerful, he does not use such pompous
+and magnificent ceremony as the king of Calicut, and is so
+affable and accessible, that even a child may come into his
+presence and speak to him; yet the rich jewels, pearls, and
+precious stones, especially rubies, with which he is decorated
+surpass all belief, and exceed the value of a great and
+flourishing city. His fingers are full of rings, his arms all
+covered with bracelets, and his legs and feet covered with
+similar ornaments, all gloriously beset and sparkling with the
+finest precious stones, and his ears so loaded with jewels that
+they hang down half a span. With all these splendid jewels he
+shines in a dark night as if with the sunbeams.</p>
+
+<p>At a favourable opportunity, the Christian merchants whom we
+had accompanied to Pegu gave intimation to the king of the
+valuable merchandise which my companion had brought for sale, and
+accordingly he sent for us on the following day, desiring my
+companion to bring the goods which he had to dispose of. Among
+other things he had two great branches of coral so large and
+beautiful as had not been seen before, which the king took great
+pleasure to look upon, and being astonished at these things, he
+asked the Christian merchants what men we were. They answered
+that we were Persians. The king then desired to know if we would
+sell these things. Upon this my companion desired the
+interpreters to say to the king, that they were all his own, and
+that he begged he would do him the honour to accept them freely.
+The king then said that he had been two years continually at war
+with the king of Ava, by which his treasure was consumed, but if
+my companion would bargain for them by way of exchange for
+precious stones, especially rubies, that he would content him for
+the coral. Then said my companion to the interpreters, "I pray
+you give the king to understand that I desire nothing else for my
+goods than the good-will of his majesty, and therefore that I
+humbly intreat he may take of my goods what pleases him best
+without money or payment of my kind." When the king heard this,
+he said that he had often been told the Persians were courteous
+and liberal men, but that he had never known any one so generous
+as this, and swore by the head of the devil, that he would try
+whether he or the Persian were most liberal. Upon this he ordered
+one of his attendants to bring him a casket of precious stones.
+This casket was a span and a half square, entirely full of
+rubies, the inside being divided into many compartments where the
+stones were sorted in order according to their sizes. When he had
+opened the casket, he ordered it to be placed before the Persian,
+desiring him to take of these precious rubies as many as he
+thought fit. But my companion, as if still more provoked to
+generosity by the liberality of the king, spoke to him in these
+words, "Most high and honourable sovereign! Such is my sense of
+your generous conduct to me, that I swear by the head of Mahomet
+and all the mysteries of his holy religion, that I freely and
+gladly give you all my goods. I do not travel in search of gain,
+but merely from a desire to see the world; in which I have not
+hitherto found any thing that has given me so much delight as the
+generous favour your majesty has now been pleased to shew me!" To
+this the king answered, "Will you yet contend with me in
+liberality?" Then selecting some rubies from all the compartments
+in the casket, out of which he took as many as he could hold in
+his hand, being two hundred rubies, he gave all these to the
+Persian with most royal munificence, and commanded him not to
+refuse. He gave also to each of the Christians two rubies worth
+not less than a thousand crowns; but those he gave to the Persian
+were reckoned worth a hundred thousand crowns. This king
+therefore certainly exceeds all the kings of the earth in
+munificence, both in manner and in richness of his gifts. About
+this time news came to Pegu that the king of Ava was advancing
+against him with a vast army, on which the king of Pegu went to
+meet him with one almost innumerable.</p>
+
+<p>Two days after the departure of the king from Pegu, we sailed
+towards the city of Malacca, where we arrived after a voyage of
+eight days. Not far from this city is a famous river named
+Gaza[90], the largest I ever saw, as it is 25 miles broad, and on
+the other side of it is seen the very large island of
+<i>Sumatra</i>, which by old writers was called <i>Taprobana</i>,
+and which is said by the inhabitants to be 500 miles in
+circuit[91]. Upon our arrival at <i>Malacca</i>, called by some
+<i>Melcha</i>, we were commanded to appear before the sultan, who
+is a Mahometan and tributary to the great sultan of
+<i>Chini</i>[92], because as is said the city was built about 80
+years before on account of the convenience of its harbour, being
+one of the best in the ocean, and to which doubtless many ships
+resort for trade. This region is not everywhere fruitful, yet it
+has a sufficiency of corn and cattle, although scarce of wood.
+They have plenty of birds of the same kind with those at Calicut,
+but the popinjays or parrots are more beautiful. It produces
+sandal-wood and tin; likewise elephants, horses, sheep, kine,
+<i>pardalles</i> or leopards, buffaloes, peacocks, and many other
+beasts and birds. The country has but few products of value, so
+that its only merchandise is spices and silk. The people are of a
+blackish ash-colour, and are clothed like the Mahometans of
+<i>Memphis</i>, otherwise called <i>Cayr</i>, <i>Alchayr</i>, or
+<i>Babylon</i>, on the Nile. They have very large foreheads,
+round eyes, and flat noses; and they are so much given to murder
+and robbery that it is dangerous to go abroad in the night, for
+they kill one another like dogs, and therefore merchants always
+remain on board their ships in the night. The people are fierce,
+barbarous, and unruly, insomuch that they will not submit to any
+governor, being altogether addicted to sedition and rebellion,
+and they always threaten to quit the country when their rulers
+endeavour to enforce order; which threat they are certainly able
+to execute, as their country is upon the sea-coast.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 90: It is obvious from the context, that
+this famous river of Gaza refers to the Straits of
+Malacca.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 91: The Taprobana of the ancients certainly
+was Ceylon. Sumatra is about 977 statute miles in length, and 200
+in its greatest breadth, so that its circumference must exceed
+2500 miles.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 92: By Chini in the text is probably meant
+<i>Acheen</i> in Sumatra.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We stopt no time at Malacca, but hiring a brigantine we sailed
+from thence for the island of Sumatra, and arrived at the city of
+<i>Pyder</i> or Pedier about 80 miles from the mainland, where we
+found an excellent harbour. The island of Sumatra is governed by
+four kings, who with their people are all idolaters, and do not
+differ much in fashions, apparel, and manner of life from the
+inhabitants of Tanaserim. They are of a whitish colour with large
+foreheads, round eyes; and of <i>brasyll</i>? colour. They wear
+their hair long, have very broad and flat noses, and are of low
+mean stature. Their money is of gold, silver, and tin. On one
+side the gold coin has the head of a <i>devil</i>, and on the
+other a waggon or chariot drawn by elephants. The silver coin is
+similar, and ten of them passes for one of gold; but it requires
+25 pieces of tin to equal one gold piece. In this country there
+are a greater number and finer elephants than in any other place
+I have been in. The people are by no means warlike, being
+entirely devoted to merchandise and gain; they use strangers with
+much kindness and hospitality, and justice is well administered.
+They have in this island great abundance of long pepper, which in
+their language is called <i>Molaga</i>, and is much longer and
+whiter than any other, yet very light and strong; it is sold by
+measure like corn, and is to be had in such plenty that twenty
+ships are loaded with it every year for <i>Cathay</i>, or China,
+where it is much in request on account of the coldness of the
+climate. The tree which produces this pepper has a larger body,
+with broader and flatter leaves than the pepper tree of Calicut.
+This island produces plenty of silk, which is the work of worms
+as with us; but there is another kind brought forth on the trees
+spontaneously without any care or labour, which is worse than the
+other. Here likewise grows the <i>laser</i> tree, which produces
+the precious gum called <i>Laserpitium</i> or <i>Belzoe</i>[93],
+as we were told by the inhabitants and merchants, but not having
+myself seen it I am unable to give any distinct account of this
+substance. Variety is always pleasing, and ingenious minds can
+never be satiated with contemplating the marvellous and
+diversified works of God in nature: Therefore, that the reader
+may take the more pleasure in these my writings, or at least may
+experience less tediousness in reading them, I have thought good
+to set down such things as I have seen more at large. It is
+therefore to be understood that the reason of no great quantity
+of <i>aloes</i> or <i>Laserpitium</i> being brought to us is
+because it comes from the farthest parts of the earth. There are
+three kinds or sorts of <i>aloes</i>, differing greatly in point
+of goodness. The most perfect is that called <i>Calampat</i>,
+which is not found in Sumatra, but is brought from the city of
+<i>Sarnau</i> near which it grows, as we were told by our
+companions the Christian merchants formerly mentioned. There is
+another kind of <i>aloes</i> called <i>Juba</i> or <i>Luba</i>,
+brought to Sumatra by the before mentioned river or strait, but I
+know not from what country. The third kind is called
+<i>bochor</i>. These Christian merchants also told us that none
+of the finest and best kind of aloes is brought to us, because it
+comes from the kingdoms of <i>Cathay, Chini, Macym, Sarnau</i>,
+and <i>Gravay</i>, countries much richer than ours and more
+abounding in gold, having kings of great power and riches, who
+take great delight in sweet savours and use them much more than
+our western princes, owing to which circumstance the true and
+best kind of <i>aloes</i> is worth ten crowns the pound even in
+the city of <i>Sarnau</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 93: From similarity of names this appears
+to be <i>Benzoin</i>, or <i>benzoe</i>, sometimes called <i>gum
+benjamin</i>; yet from some circumstances in the sequel it may
+possibly indicate <i>camphor</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We were taught by the said Christian merchants our companions,
+how to know and distinguish the two kinds of the sweet gums
+called <i>aloes</i> or <i>Laserpitium</i>. One of them had a
+certain portion of them both, and about two ounces of the best
+sort of aloes called <i>calampat</i>. Taking a piece of this in
+his hand and holding it close for about as long as one might take
+to rehearse the psalm <i>Miserere mei Deus</i> three times, the
+aloes become hot, and on opening his hand gave out a savour of
+incredible sweetness, such as I had never experienced from any
+other substance. He took also about the size of a walnut of the
+common <i>laserpitium</i> or <i>belzoe</i>, and half a pound of
+that which comes from the city of <i>Sarnau</i>, and putting both
+into different chaffing-dishes with burning coals in a close
+chamber, the small quantity of <i>belzoe</i> far exceeded, in
+sweetness of flavour, the other which weighed half a pound, and
+would even have done so had it been two pounds weight[94]. In
+this region also is found the substance called <i>lacca</i> from
+which a bright red colour is procured. This is the gum of a tree
+not much unlike our walnut tree[95]. In Pedier I saw in one
+street not less than 500 bankers or exchangers of money; and at
+this place they make many curious works, such as fine baskets
+garnished with gold, which were sold for two crowns each[96].
+This is a famous mart to which innumerable merchants resort. The
+inhabitants wear mantles of silk, and <i>syndones</i>? made of
+cotton.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 94: It is impossible to determine from the
+account in the text what is meant by these articles of sweet
+scent under the names of <i>aloes, laserpitium, belzoe, calampat,
+luba</i>, and <i>bochor</i>; all of which seem to be different
+names of the same substance in different degrees of quality, and
+assuredly not the drugs now known by the name of <i>aloes</i> and
+<i>benzoin</i>. There is a sweet-scented wood in the east known
+by the name of <i>lignum aloes</i>, and possibly the sweet gum
+called <i>belzoe</i> may have been extracted from it, or from
+that which produces the oil of rhodium.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 95: Gum lac, long believed the gum of a
+tree, is now known to be the work of insects, serving as a nidus
+for their young, in the same manner as bees wax is used by the
+honey bee.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 96: Perhaps filagree
+work?--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This country has plenty of wood fit for the construction of
+ships. Those which they build are of a strange fashion, named
+<i>gunchos</i> or junks, having three masts with two stems and
+two sterns, having <i>gouvernals</i> or rudders on both. "When
+sailing on the ocean and having given their sails to the wind, if
+it be afterwards needful to have more sails, not changing the
+first they go backwards without turning the ship and using only
+one mast[97]." The natives are most expert swimmers, and have a
+wonderful contrivance for producing fire in an instant. Their
+houses are very low and built of stone, and instead of tiles or
+thatch they are covered by the hide of a fish called
+<i>tartaruca</i>! which is found in that part of the Indian sea,
+which is so huge a monster that one of their skins which I saw
+weighed 330 pounds. There are likewise serpents in this country
+much larger than those at Calicut.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 97: This account of the mode of navigation
+is inexplicable, or at least obscure. Perhaps it is meant to
+express that they do not tack, but sail with either end foremost
+as suits the change of wind or direction of the
+ship.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At this place our Christian friends, meaning to prosecute
+their own affairs, proposed to take their leave of us, but my
+Persian companion spoke to them in this manner; "Though my
+friends I am not your countryman, yet being all brethren and the
+children of Adam, I take God to witness that I love you as if you
+were of my own blood, and children of the same parents, and
+considering how long we have kept company together in a loving
+manner, I cannot think of parting from you without much grief of
+mind: Besides, even if you would leave me, I hope you will not
+desert this my companion who is of the same faith with
+yourselves." Then the Christians asked how I, being a Persian,
+happened to be of the Christian faith? To which my companion
+answered that I was no Persian, but had been bought at Jerusalem.
+On hearing the holy name of Jerusalem pronounced, the Christians
+lifted up their hands and eyes to heaven, and prostrating
+themselves thrice kissed the ground; then rising up, they asked
+what age I was of when brought from Jerusalem. Being told that I
+was then fifteen years of age, they said I might well remember my
+country; to which my companion answered that I did so assuredly,
+and had often given him much pleasure by the things I had told
+him concerning it. Then the merchants said that although they had
+long desired to return into their own country, which was far from
+thence, they would still bear us company to those places to which
+we proposed going. Preparing ourselves therefore for a voyage, we
+took shipping and in fifteen days we came to the island of
+<i>Bandan</i> or Banda, whence nutmegs and mace are procured.</p>
+
+<p>In this voyage to the isle of Banda, we passed about twenty
+islands, some of them inhabited and some desert. This island of
+Banda is very low, savage, and barren, being about 100 miles in
+circuit. It has neither king nor governor, but is inhabited by a
+savage and brutal people, who live without law, order, or
+government, dwelling in low huts scarcely rising above the
+ground, and having a scanty shirt for their whole clothing. Their
+complexion inclines towards white, and they are of low stature:
+They go bareheaded and barefooted, with their hair hanging down,
+having broad round foreheads. They are idolaters, and worse even
+than the <i>Poliars</i> and <i>Hyrana</i>[98] of Calicut, being
+of dull apprehension, little strength, and altogether barbarous
+in their manners. The soil bears no fruits except nutmegs, which
+grow on a tree very much like the peach in its branches and
+leaves. Before the nut becomes ripe, the mace expands round like
+a red rose; but when the nut ripens the mace closes and embraces
+the nut, and both are gathered together, which the natives do
+without rule or order, catch who catch may, all things being
+there in common. The tree yields fruit of its own nature without
+grafting or pruning, and it is so common and plentiful that
+twenty-six pound weight is sold for three <i>souses</i> or half a
+<i>carline</i> of the money which is current at Calicut. These
+islanders have no other order of justice than the law of nature,
+and live therefore without lawsuits or any of those contentions
+proceeding from <i>thine and mine</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 98: These are named on a former occasion
+<i>Nirani</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having tarried three days in Banda, my companion asked the
+Christian merchants where was the region which produces cloves,
+and they told him that these were found in an island named
+<i>Monoch</i> or Molucca, six days sail from Banda. We therefore
+resumed our voyage, and came there in seven days. This island[99]
+is very narrow, yet is longer than Banda, and the inhabitants are
+even more barbarous than those of Banda, for if it were not for
+the human shape, they differ in nothing from brutes. Their colour
+is whiter, owing to the air being colder. This island produces
+cloves, which likewise grow on several small and desolate islands
+on its coast. The body of the tree resembles the box-tree, and
+has leaves almost like the bay tree. When the cloves are ripe,
+the inhabitants beat them off the tree with long canes, having
+previously laid matts under the tree to receive them. The soil is
+sandy, and so low under the horizon that the north star cannot be
+seen[100]. The price of cloves is about double that formerly
+mentioned for nutmegs, but they are sold by measure, as the
+natives are entirely ignorant of the use of weights.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 99: Instead of one island, the Moluccas are
+a group of islands, the largest of which, Gilolo, is about 200
+miles from N. to S. On its western side are several small
+islands, the most important of which for the produce of cloves
+are Ternate and Tidore. Gilolo was probably the island visited by
+Verthema.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 100: A strange mode of expressing that
+Gilolo is immediately under the line.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<p>As we were conversing together respecting our voyages, the
+Christian merchants addressed me as follows: "Dearly beloved
+friend, as by the grace of God we are come thus far in safety, we
+will, if it so please you go to visit one of the finest islands
+in the world, and so rich as we believe you have never seen. But
+we must go in the first place to another island named
+<i>Borneo</i>, where we shall procure a larger vessel, as we have
+to cross a deep and rough sea." My companion then desired them to
+do as they thought proper. Therefore hiring a larger foist, we
+directed our voyage to that island, sailing to the southward both
+by day and night, and passing our time in much pleasant
+conversation. The merchants, among other things, asked me many
+questions respecting the ceremonies and solemnities of the
+Christian religion as used among us in Europe. And when I made
+mention of the <i>Veronica</i> or <i>Vernacle</i> of the face of
+Christ[101], and of the heads of St Peter and St Paul, the
+chiefest of the apostles, they told me secretly that if I would
+go with them, I should become a great man in their country by my
+knowledge of these divine things. But being deterred by the
+length of the journey, and fearful that I might never be able to
+get home, I refused to accompany them. At length we came to
+Borneo, which is 200 miles from Molucca and is somewhat
+bigger[102] and as low under the horizon. The inhabitant are
+idolaters of a sharp wit and decent manner of life. Their
+complexion inclines towards fair. They do not all dress alike, as
+some wear cotton shirts, while others have camblet mantles, and
+others wear pointed caps of a red colour. They are under regular
+government and submit to laws, which are righteously
+administered. This island yields great quantities of
+<i>camphor</i>, which I was told was the gum of a tree; but I
+dare not affirm this for fact, as I have never seen the way in
+which it is procured.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 101: The Veronica among the Catholics, is
+the handkerchief with which our Saviour is supposed to have wiped
+his face during his passion, which they allege took from his
+bloody sweat a miraculous impression or portrait of his
+countenance.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 102: Instead of being only <i>somewhat</i>
+larger than Gilolo, Borneo is perhaps the largest island in the
+world, except New Holland, being about 880 English miles in its
+greatest diameter from S.W. to N.E. and 550 in the opposite
+direction at the widest.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At Borneo my companion hired a light bark for 100 pieces of
+gold, and having laid in provisions for the voyage, we directed
+our course for the great island of <i>Gyava</i>, or Java, to
+which we came in five days, sailing towards the south. Our pilot
+used the mariners compass with loadstone, and the sea chart as
+ours do. Observing that the north star could not be seen, my
+companion asked the Christian merchants in what manner they
+guided their course in those seas. To this the pilot made answer,
+that in navigating these southern seas, they were particularly
+guided by five stars, and one other particular star which was
+directly opposite thee north star, and that they also used the
+loadstone, which always points to the north. He said moreover,
+that beyond the island of Java there was a certain people who
+were antipodes to them of European Sarmatia, inhabiting a cold
+climate, and as near to the antarctic pole as Sarmatia is to the
+arctic, as was evident by the shortness of their day, which was
+only four hours long in winter[103], in which conversation we
+took much delight.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 103: This pilot must have been acquainted
+with the southern extremity of South America, or must have built
+this information on hypothesis, as there is no known inhabited
+land of this description to the South of Java--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Proceeding on our voyage for five days, we came to the great
+island of Java, in which there are many kingdoms and peoples, all
+idolaters, but of sundry manners and customs. Some worship the
+sun, others the moon, some consider cows as their gods, while
+others worship all day whatever they first meet in the morning.
+This island produces silk, which grows spontaneously in the
+woods, and has the finest emeralds in the world, as also great
+plenty of gold and copper. The soil is as productive of corn and
+fruits as that of Calicut, and has an abundance of flesh. The
+inhabitants are an honest and fair-dealing people, much of the
+same stature and colour with Europeans, but with larger
+foreheads, very large eyes of a brazil or red colour, with flat
+noses, and wear their hair long. It has a great number of birds
+different from ours, except peacocks, turtle-doves, and crows,
+which are the same as we have. In their dress, the natives wear
+mantles or cloaks of cotton, silk, or camblet, always having one
+arm bare. They have no defensive armour, as they are hardly ever
+at war; but when they go to sea they use bows and arrows, and
+likewise poisoned arrows made of reeds, which they blow from long
+hollow canes, and the poison with which these arrows are infected
+is so virulent that death certainly follows from the slightest
+wound. They have no kind of fire-arms. They eat all kinds of
+flesh, fish, or fruit, as they please or can procure.</p>
+
+<p>Some of the natives of this island are so very barbarous, that
+when their parents become feeble from age, so as to be useless to
+themselves and others, they bring them into the public market and
+sell them to the cannibals who eat human flesh, who immediately
+upon buying them, kill and eat them. Likewise when any young
+person falls into disease of which they do not expect he shall
+recover, his kinsmen sell him in the same manner to the
+cannibals. When my companion expressed his horror at this
+barbarous and savage practice, a certain native merchant
+observed, "That no sacrifice could redeem the sins of the
+Persians, who gave the flesh of their dead to be eaten by the
+worms." Abhorring these savage manners, we returned to our ship
+not willing to tarry longer in that island. While we were there,
+the Christian merchants, who were ever desirous to shew us
+strange things which we might relate at our return to our own
+country, made us remark that the sun at noon-day was to the north
+of us, which as they said is always the case in the month of
+July. I must acknowledge however, that I hardly remember these
+things distinctly, as I had then almost forgot the names of our
+months. At this island my companion bought two fine emeralds for
+1000 pieces of gold, and likewise two children who were eunuchs,
+for two hundred pieces, as there are in that country certain
+merchants who deal solely in these young eunuchs.</p>
+
+<p>After remaining fifteen days in Java, being weary of the
+barbarous manners of the inhabitants, and of the coldness of the
+country at that season of the year, we determined to prosecute
+our voyage back to India, as there were no other regions in these
+eastern parts worth seeing. Wherefore, hiring a light bark, we
+departed from thence, and having sailed fifteen days to the
+north-west, we came to the city of Malacca, where we remained
+three days. At this place we took our leave of the Christian
+merchants, with sorrowful minds and many friendly embraces. Of
+this separation I was sore grieved, and had I been a single man
+without wife and children[104], I certainly would never have
+separated from such dear friends. Leaving them therefore at
+Malacca, they remained at that place, whence they said they meant
+shortly to return to the city of <i>Sana</i>[105]. My Persian
+companion and I went on board a foist, in which we returned to
+Coromandel. While on this voyage the pilot informed us that there
+were about seven thousand small islands in the eastern sea,
+beyond Sumatra and Java. While at Malacca my companion bought as
+much spices, perfumes of various kinds, and silk, as cost him
+5000 pieces of gold. We were fifteen days on our voyage to
+Coromandel, and remained there twenty days. Hiring another foist
+we sailed thence to the city of Coulan, where we found twenty-two
+Portuguese Christians. Fearing they might seize me as a spy, I
+began to contrive how I might make my escape from thence; but as
+there were many Mahometans there who knew that I had been on the
+pilgrimage to Mecca, I changed my purpose, and we soon afterwards
+went to Calicut by way of the river, which took us twelve
+days.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 104: This oblique insinuation of having a
+wife and children, is rather contradictory to several
+circumstances in the early part of the itinerary of
+Verthema.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 105: This is probably a mistake for
+<i>Sarnau</i>, whence the Christians are said to have
+come.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION X.</p>
+
+<p><i>Continuation of the Author's Adventures, after his Return
+to Calicut.</i></p>
+
+<p>After so many long and dangerous voyages and peregrinations,
+in which we had partly satisfied our desire of travel, and were
+partly wearied by the many inconveniencies we had undergone, we
+began to consider of the best means for returning to our native
+country. I will therefore briefly relate what happened to me by
+the way, that other men, taking example by my travels, may know
+better how to conduct themselves in like situations, if similar
+inclinations should move them to undertake such voyages. In
+Calicut we found two Christians of Milan in Italy, who had come
+to India with licence from the king of Portugal, on purpose to
+buy precious stones. The names of these men were John Maria and
+Peter Anthony. I was more rejoiced at the sight of these men than
+I can express, and knowing them to be Christians by their fair
+complexions, though they could not know me as I was naked like
+the natives, I immediately spoke to them, informing them that I
+also was a Christian, and their countryman. Then, taking me
+kindly by the hand, they brought me to their house, where, for
+joy of this unexpected meeting, we could scarcely satisfy
+ourselves with tears, embraces, and kisses, for it seemed a
+strange thing to me thus to find men who spoke my own language,
+and even to speak it myself. They told me that they were in great
+favour with the king of Calicut, yet anxiously wished to get hack
+to their native country, but knew not how, as they had fled from
+the Portuguese, and durst not run the risk of falling into their
+hands, having made many pieces of great cannon and other ordnance
+for the king of Calicut, and that now the Portuguese fleet would
+shortly be there. When I proposed to endeavour to go to Cananore,
+and solicit their pardon from the Portuguese admiral, they said
+that could not be looked for, as they were well known to many of
+the kings and princes between Calicut and Cananore, who were
+friendly to the Portuguese, and who would certainly intercept
+them, as they had made above 400 guns, great and small, and could
+never hope for pardon. By this I could perceive how fearful a
+thing it is to have an evil conscience, and called to remembrance
+the saying of the poet:--</p>
+
+<p>"Multa male timeo, qui feci multa proterve."</p>
+
+<p>That is to say, "I fear much evil because I have done much."
+These men had not only made many pieces of artillery for the
+infidels, to the great injury of the Christians, in contempt of
+Christ and his holy religion, but had also taught the idolaters
+both how to make and use them. While I remained in Calicut, I saw
+them give a mould to the idolaters, by which they might cast
+brass cannon of sufficient bigness to receive a charge of 105
+<i>cantaros</i> or measures of powder. At this time also there
+was a Jew in Calicut who had built a handsome brigantine, in
+which were four large iron cannons; but Providence soon after
+gave him his due reward, as he was drowned while bathing in the
+river. To return to the two Italians: God knows how earnestly I
+endeavoured to persuade them never to make any more guns or
+artillery for the infidels, in contempt of God, and to the great
+detriment of our most holy faith. At my words, tears fell from
+the eyes of Peter Anthony; but John Maria, who perhaps was not so
+anxious to return home, said it was all one to him whether he
+died in India or Italy, and that God only knew what was decreed
+for him. Within two days after I returned to my companion, who
+had wondered what was become of me, fearing that I was either
+sick, or had died, or run away. I told him that I had been all
+night in the temple, that he might not suspect my great intimacy
+with the Christians.</p>
+
+<p>While I remained in the lodging of my companion, there came to
+him two Persian merchants from the city of Cananore, saying that
+they had bad news to tell him, as there had arrived twelve
+Portuguese ships, which they had actually seen. Then asked he
+what manner of men were these Portuguese? To this the Persians
+answered, that they were Christians, armed in cuirasses of bright
+iron, and had built an impregnable fortress at Cananore. Then
+turning to me, my companion asked what kind of people these were.
+To this I answered, that they were a nation of wicked people,
+entirely given up to robbery and piracy on the seas: And I can
+truly say, that he was not so sorry for these news as I was
+rejoiced at their arrival. After the rumour spread of the arrival
+of the Portuguese, I began to be in fear for myself, and to
+consider what was best to be done to ensure my safety; and
+considering that nothing could be easier among these ignorant
+people than to gain a reputation of holiness by hypocrisy, I used
+to lurk about the temple all day without meat, as all the people
+thought, but in the night I had my fill in the house of the two
+Milanese. By this device, every one took me for a saint or holy
+person, so that in a few days I could go about all the city
+without being suspected. To help me in this assumed character, a
+rich Mahometan merchant of Calicut happened to fall sick, having
+his belly so constipated that he could get no ease; and as he was
+a friend of my Persian companion, and the disease daily
+increased, he at last asked me if I had any skill in physic. To
+this I answered, that my father was a physician, and that I had
+learnt many things from him. He then took me along with him to
+see his friend the sick merchant, and being told that he was very
+sick at the head and stomach, and sore constipated, and having
+before learnt that he was a great eater and drinker, I felt his
+pulse, and said that he was filled with choler or black bile,
+owing to surfeiting, and that it was necessary he should have a
+glyster. Then I made a glyster of eggs, salt, and sugar, together
+with butter and such herbs as I could think of upon a sudden; and
+in the space of a day and a night I gave him five such glysters,
+but all in vain, for his pains and sickness increased, and I
+began to repent me of my enterprise. But it was now necessary to
+put a good face on the matter, and to attempt some other way, yet
+my last error seemed worse than ever. Endeavouring to inspire him
+with confidence, I made him lie grovelling on his belly, and, by
+cords tied to his feet, I raised up the hinder part of his body,
+so that he rested only on his breast and hands; and in this
+posture I administered to him another glyster, allowing him to
+remain in that position for half an hour. On beholding this
+strange mode of practice, my Persian friend asked me, if that was
+the manner of treating sick people in my country, to which I
+answered that it was, but only in cases of extremity; on which he
+observed with a smile, that he believed it would certainly
+relieve him one way or other. In the mean time, the sick man
+cried out in his own language, "It is enough, it is enough, for
+my soul now departeth." We comforted him as well as we could,
+desiring him to have patience yet a little longer; and almost
+immediately his belly was loosened, and he voided like a gutter.
+We then let him down, and he continued to discharge a prodigious
+quantity, so that shortly the pain of his head and stomach left
+him, and his fever was assuaged, which gave us all great joy. By
+this adventurous cure, and my counterfeit holiness, I grew into
+great credit, and when my patient offered me ten pieces of gold
+as my reward, I would only accept two, which I gave away
+immediately among the poor.</p>
+
+<p>These silly people believed implicitly in my hypocrisy, which
+I shewed in a constrained gravity of countenance and deportment,
+and by forbearing openly from eating flesh, insomuch that all
+thought themselves happy to have me at their houses, or to kiss
+my hands and feet. The report also of my companion, that he had
+met with me first at Mecca, where I had gone to see the body of
+the holy prophet Mahomet, greatly increased among the Mahometans
+the opinion of my sanctity. But all this while, I used to resort
+secretly in the night to the house of the Milanese Christians;
+and learning from them that the twelve Portuguese ships were
+arrived at Cananore, I thought that it was now a favourable
+opportunity for me to escape. I remained, however, for seven days
+more, learning every thing I could respecting the preparations
+that were making by the king of Calicut and his people against
+the Portuguese, in regard to their army, artillery, and every
+thing relative to the war. But, before I speak of the manner of
+my departure, it may be proper to say something of the religious
+practices of the Mahometans.</p>
+
+<p>For calling the people to the mosque, their priests and other
+ministers, of whom there are a great number, ascend to the
+highest tower of the temple, where they sound three or four brass
+trumpets instead of bells, and then call to the people in a loud
+voice to come to prayers. Then stopping one ear with their
+finger, they call out in their own language, <i>Alla u eccubar,
+etc.</i> That is to say, "God is great! God is great! Come to the
+temple of the great God! Come pray to the great God! God is
+great! God is great! God was! God is! Mahomet, the messenger of
+God, shall arise!" They even invited me to the mosque, and
+desired me to pray to God for the Mahometans; and this I did
+outwardly, but with quite a different meaning from them. They
+have certain daily and stated prayers as we have, in which they
+call upon God as their father, and they even vouchsafe to name
+the blessed Virgin Mary; but they always wash before prayers.
+Standing all in order, after the priest has prayed, the whole
+people pray in their own language.</p>
+
+<p>At this time I feigned myself sick, and finding some occasion
+or pretext for going to Cananore, I advertised my companion
+thereof, who gave me his consent, saying that he would shortly
+follow me to that place, and in the meantime gave me letters
+recommending me to a friend and countryman of his, a rich
+merchant at that place, desiring him to give me kind
+entertainment for his sake. The day before my departure, I made
+the before-mentioned Milanese Christians privy to my intentions,
+and my companion made me join company with two other Persian
+merchants who were going to Cananore, as there were then in
+Calicut many merchants of Persia, Syria, and Turkey. Therefore,
+on the 1st of December, having hired a light bark, I and my two
+companions set sail; but had hardly got from shore an
+arrow-flight, when four of the <i>nairs</i> of the king's guard
+called to the pilot of our vessel, and ordered him, in the king's
+name, to come to land. When the nairs understood who we were,
+they asked the Persians why they carried me along with them,
+without licence from the king? Then the Persians said, that this
+was a holy man, who meant to accompany them to Cananore. The
+nairs answered, that they knew I was a person who had wrought
+miracles; but as I could speak the language of the Portuguese, it
+was to be feared that I might betray their secrets to the enemy,
+and give them notice of the navy and army which had been prepared
+at Calicut against them, and therefore they strictly enjoined the
+pilot to carry us no farther. He accordingly obeyed their orders,
+and left us on the shore. It was then proposed by one of the
+Persians that we should return to Calicut, on which I advised him
+to take heed how he did so, as he would be in danger of losing
+all his silks, if it should be discovered that he had not paid
+the king's custom. Then he asked my advice as to what I thought
+was best for us to do in the present exigency, and I advised that
+we should travel along the shore, in hopes of finding some other
+bark for our purpose. They agreed to this proposal, and we
+accordingly travelled twelve miles along the shore, our slaves
+carrying our baggage; and I leave any judicious person to
+conceive the terror I was in, during this time, of being stopt by
+the servants of the king of Calicut. At length, by good
+providence, we found a poor fisherman, who agreed to carry us in
+his boat to Cananore, where we arrived in safety late at night.
+We went immediately to wait upon the Persian merchant, to whom I
+had letters of recommendation from my companion. Their tenor was
+as follows: That he should receive me into his house, and
+entertain me in a friendly manner, till his own arrival, and that
+whatever friendship was shewn me should be considered as done to
+himself, as I was a holy man, and united with him in the
+strictest friendship. Immediately on reading this letter, the
+merchant laid his hand on his head, and bid me welcome, swearing
+by his head that I was in safety, and caused a good supper to be
+set before us. After supper, the Persians and I took a walk by
+the sea side, and we soon came to where the Portuguese ships were
+lying at anchor. I am utterly unable to express the joy I felt on
+seeing these ships, but which I took care should not be observed
+by my companions. In our walk, I observed where the Portuguese
+had built their fortress, and determined within myself to go
+there as soon as possible.</p>
+
+<p>Next day, finding a fit opportunity, I went towards the
+Portuguese fortress, which is not above four furlongs from the
+city of Cananore, and chanced to meet two Portuguese by the way,
+at whom I inquired in Spanish if that were the fortress of the
+Portuguese. They asked if I were a Christian? and having answered
+that I was, they demanded to know whence I came? I told them that
+I was from Calicut, on which they said they would immediately
+shew me the way to their governor, whose name was Lorenzo[106],
+son to the viceroy. They accordingly brought me before him, and
+when I was come into his presence, I fell down on my knees, and
+entreated him in all humility, for the sake of Christ, to whom I
+was consecrated in baptism, that he would have compassion upon
+me, and deliver me out of the hands of these infidel dogs. When
+it was noised about in the city that I had escaped to the
+Christians, there began a stir and mutiny among the people, upon
+which the governor commanded his officers and men to put their
+artillery and all things in readiness, lest the people in their
+sudden rage should make any attempt against the fortress; but
+every thing was speedily pacified. After this, the governor took
+me by the hand into a hall or room by ourselves, and demanded to
+know what the king and people of Calicut were preparing to do
+against the Christians. I informed him of all things as far as I
+knew, having diligently inquired into all their preparations and
+designs. When I had thus informed the governor of all I knew, he
+appointed a galley commanded by one Joam Serano to carry me to
+the viceroy, who was then at Cochin.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 106: Don Francisco de Almeyda was viceroy
+of Portuguese India from 1507 to 1510, both inclusive, and his
+son Lorenzo made a conspicuous figure on several occasions under
+his father. It is true that Verthema appears in the present
+journal to have returned from India to Europe in the end of 1506
+or beginning of 1507; but the dates of the present journal are
+exceedingly few and vague, and the incidents which it relates
+could hardly have occurred in so short a period as between the
+commencement of 1503 and close of 1506.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The viceroy received me very favourably, and then I gave him
+an account of all the warlike preparations at Calicut. After this
+I humbly implored pardon for the two Italians, Peter Anthony and
+John Maria, who had made artillery for the infidel princes,
+declaring that they were desirous to return to the Christians,
+and would do them good service, for that all they had hitherto
+done at Calicut was by constraint, and that all they asked was a
+safe conduct and money to defray their charges. The viceroy
+listened to my petition, and three days afterwards he sent me
+back to Cananore with letters to his son, commanding him to
+deliver me as much money as might suffice for the Christian spies
+at Calicut. At Cananore, I procured an idolater, who from poverty
+had been forced to pawn his wife and children, and engaged him to
+carry a letter from me to the two Milanese at Calicut, informing
+them that the viceroy had granted their pardon and safe conduct,
+with money for their charges. I desired them to make no one privy
+to their intended departure, and particularly not to let it be
+known to their slaves or concubines, each of them having a
+concubine, a child, and a slave, and to leave all their goods
+behind, except things of great value, such as gold coin and
+precious stones. They had a very fine diamond of 32 carats,
+reckoned to be worth 35,000 crowns; a pearl of 24 carats; 2000
+rubies, some of which weighed one carat, and others a carat and
+half; upwards of 60 bracelets, garnished with many fine jewels;
+and about 1500 pieces of gold coin. But in consequence of their
+covetousness, while they sought to save all they lost all, and
+their lives to boot; for, not content with carrying off all these
+riches, they would needs carry along with them, in spite of the
+advice I sent, four guns, three monkeys, two musquets, and two of
+those wheels on which precious stones are polished. The attempt
+to carry off these bulky articles was the cause of their
+destruction, as one of their slaves gave notice to the zamorin or
+king of Calicut of what was going on. The zamorin would not at
+first believe the information, having conceived a good opinion of
+their fidelity, yet sent four of his nairs to examine into the
+truth of the information. But the slave, perceiving that the
+zamorin seemed inclined to deal favourably with them, went to the
+cady or chief priest of the Mahometans, and told him all that he
+had said to the zamorin, adding that the two Christians had
+disclosed all their secrets to the Portuguese. The eddy
+immediately convened a council of all the Mahometan merchants,
+willing them to give an hundred pieces of gold to the <i>king of
+Gioghi</i>[107], who was then at Calicut, and to speak to him in
+the following terms: "It is not unknown to you, most noble
+prince, that when your majesty came to this place some years ago,
+we received you in a more honourable manner than we are now
+enabled to do. The change in our behaviour is not owing to any
+want of good will towards you, but is occasioned by the great and
+manifold injuries which we have sustained, and are daily
+suffering from our mortal enemies the Christians. We have at the
+present moment a notable example of this in two Christian
+traitors now residing in this city, who have disclosed all our
+secrets to the Portuguese; and therefore we most humbly petition
+that you would be pleased to accept from us an hundred pieces of
+gold, and to issue your commands that these traitorous Christians
+shall be slain."</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 107: This king of <i>Gioghi</i> was
+probably the chief bramin in the southern part of India, a
+species of patriarch or pope of the braminical idolatry, similar
+to the king of <i>Joga</i>, formerly mentioned, in Guzerat, in
+these travels of Verthema. In a future part of our collection we
+shall have a more favourable opportunity of explaining the
+hierarchy of the Hindoos.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When this oration was repeated to the <i>king of Gioghi</i>,
+he immediately accepted the gift, and consented to the prayer of
+the petition, and appointed two hundred of his followers to put
+the Milanese to death. These men, that they might not be
+suspected by the devoted Christians, came in small bodies to
+their house, only ten at a time, as if to demand their customary
+reward. But on seeing so great a number of men assembled about
+their house, the Christians began to suspect that they were in
+search of something beyond their usual reward or offering,
+wherefore taking to their arms, they so bravely defended
+themselves, that they slew six of the assailants and wounded
+forty: But at length some of the <i>Gioghi</i> or Jogues, shot
+them both with arrows from cross-bows, one being sore wounded in
+the head and the other in the body; and as soon as they saw them
+fall, they broke into the house and cut their throats. Then
+taking the warm blood into the palms of their hands, they drank
+it up, using the most contumelious expressions against the
+Christians. After this murder, the concubine of John Maria came
+to Cananore with her young son, whom I bought of her for eight
+pieces of gold, and had him baptized by the name of Lorenzo, as
+he was christened on the festival of St Laurence. But he died
+within a year afterwards of the lues venerea, which disease has
+been spread over almost the whole world, as I have seen many
+infected with it 400 miles beyond Calicut. It is there called
+<i>pua</i>, and they affirm that it was not seen there till about
+seventeen years before; yet it is there more grievous and
+destructive than with us in Italy.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XI.</p>
+
+<p><i>Account of a memorable Battle between the Mahometan Navy of
+Calicut and the Portuguese</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 4th of March 1506, intelligence was received at
+Cananore of the death of the two Milanese Christians at Calicut,
+and on the same day the Calicut fleet set sail from the cities of
+<i>Pavan? Capagot? Pandaram</i>? and <i>Trompatam</i>? It
+consisted of 208 vessels [108], of which 84 were ships of
+considerable size and burden, and the rest were rowing vessels
+which are called <i>paraos</i>. This great fleet was manned with
+a prodigious number of Mahometans richly dressed in purple silk
+and cotton, also with high pointed caps after their fashion of
+the same colour, lined with silk, having their arms decked with
+many bracelets, and embroidered gloves on their hands. For
+weapons, they had Turkish bows, swords, lances,
+<i>peltes</i>[109], and all kind of guns made in our manner. When
+we saw their fleet proceeding in order and well appointed, it
+seemed afar off like a great wood, so numerous were the masts,
+yet were we in sure belief that God would give us the victory
+over the blasphemers of his holy name, and that we should prevail
+against the idolaters and Saracens, the ancient enemies of the
+religion of the blessed Jesus. Therefore the valiant knight our
+governor, Don Lorenzo, the son of Don Francisco de Almeyda,
+viceroy of India, who had the supreme command of twelve
+Portuguese ships, with the assistance of the admiral, assembled
+all the Portuguese soldiers and mariners by sound of trumpet, and
+spoke to them after this manner: "Dear friends, and brethren in
+one God and in one faith in the Lord Jesus Christ, it is now time
+for us to consider that our Lord spared not to give his precious
+body unto death for our sakes; wherefore it is our bounden duty
+to spend our lives in defence of his glory and of our holy faith,
+assuring ourselves of victory over these infidel dogs, who are
+hated of God, being the progeny of the devil. Now, therefore,
+fighting in his holy name and under the banner of his cross, shew
+yourselves valiant, as you have now a fair opportunity to gain
+eternal fame in defending the glorious cause of your Lord and
+Saviour. Therefore, along with me, raising our hearts to God, and
+our arms with force and courage against the enemy, in the name of
+the Lord, let us manfully give the onset." When Don Lorenzo had
+spoken these words, the priest went up to the highest part of the
+ship, holding in his hands the picture of Christ nailed to the
+cross, which he exposed to the view of all the soldiers, and
+earnestly exhorted them to remember the commands of God, and the
+holy faith in which they were consecrated by baptism, having no
+doubt that all their sins should be forgiven to those who fell in
+the cause of God. Then blessing them in the name of the Lord, he
+pronounced the absolution and forgivenness of their sins. This
+exhortation of the priest so moved all our hearts, that tears of
+joy ran from our eyes, and we were all animated with a desire of
+dying in the holy cause.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 108: According to the account of this great
+armament formerly given in the History of the Portuguese
+Transactions in India, the fleet of the Mahometans and Zamorin on
+this occasion consisted of 260 paraos, 60 of which exceeded the
+size of the armed ships then used in India by the Portuguese. The
+action between the Portuguese and their enemies is there stated
+to have been in 1508.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 109: Perhaps cross-bows, or it may probably
+signify leathern targets, or shields made of <i>pelts</i> or
+skins.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the mean time the Mahometan fleet made sail towards us, and
+on the same day our admiral went to reconnoitre their fleet with
+two foists, and passing between two of their largest ships
+discharged his ordnance on both sides, on purpose to try the
+strength of those ships in which they placed the greatest
+confidence. But nothing of any importance occurred this day. Next
+day the enemy made sail towards Cananore, and sent a message to
+our commanders, saying, that if they were permitted to pursue
+their voyage they would not attack us. To this it was answered,
+that the Christians had not forgotten the perjury and violated
+faith of the Mahometans, when they prevented the Christians from
+passing that way on a former occasion, and had slain 47
+Portuguese, and robbed them of 4000 pieces of gold: Wherefore,
+they might proceed at their peril, and should learn of what
+spirit and reputation in arms the Christians were composed. Then
+said the Mahometans, "Mahomet will defend us and confound the
+Christians." Then with great fury they assaulted us all at once,
+thinking to have forced their way through our fleet, as they were
+only 10 miles from Cananore. Our admiral intentionally allowed
+them to draw near until they were right over-against Cananore,
+when he intended to set upon them with all his force, that the
+rajah or king of Cananore might be a witness of the valour of the
+Christians. When the trumpeter of the admiral sounded the charge
+as a signal of battle, the admiral immediately assaulted two of
+the largest ships of the enemy, casting his grappling irons and
+chains, that he might fight them hand to hand. After throwing our
+grapplings three times in vain, they caught hold the fourth time,
+on which the Christians boarded the greatest ship, and made such
+havoc that the whole crew of 600 Mahometans were slain, not one
+escaping or being made prisoner. Encouraged by this success, the
+admiral immediately grappled another large ship which had chained
+itself to one of the Christian foists; this ship was likewise
+taken and sunk, with the loss of 500 Mahometans. Discouraged by
+this defeat, the Mahometans assailed our twelve foists with all
+their force, <i>and carried them away</i>. On this emergency the
+captain of the galley, Joam Serano, shewed the utmost gallantry,
+as he fiercely assaulted in his single galley those ships of the
+enemy which had <i>carried away</i> our foists, and made such
+prodigious slaughter among the Mahometans as seemed quite
+incredible, so that he recovered all the foists, and sunk two
+other Mahometan ships. The conflict continued with unabated fury
+from morning till the darkness of the night parted the
+combatants, and God so favoured the Christians that few of them
+were slain, though many were wounded.</p>
+
+<p>I must not omit to notice the zeal and courage displayed by
+Simon Martin, the captain of one of our ships, on the following
+occasion in this battle. It so happened that the brigantine in
+which I was, was at one time somewhat parted from the rest of our
+ships, on which four ships of the enemy assailed us all at once;
+and 150 of the Mahometans having boarded our vessel, constrained
+us to flee to the poop for safety. While we were in this extreme
+danger, Simon Martin leapt on board our vessel, invoking the name
+of Jesus to aid him, and fought with such desperate valour that
+he slew six of the enemy with his own bond. Encouraged by his
+gallantry, we came down from the poop to his assistance, and so
+handled the Mahometans that they leapt overboard for safety, when
+some of them were drowned and others escaped by swimming. Upon
+this our success, the enemy sent down four other foists to help
+those who were already engaged against us. But our captain took
+several empty casks in which gunpowder had been kept before, and
+placed them in such a manner on the side of our brigantine, that
+they seemed like large pieces of artillery, standing beside them
+with a <i>fire-stick</i> or lighted match, as if about to
+discharge them. This device put the enemy in such fear that they
+departed from us.</p>
+
+<p>Our admiral continued to pursue the enemy, and gave them
+another great overthrow, taking seven of their foists laden with
+various kinds of merchandise, and sank ten others by the shot of
+his artillery, one of which was laden with elephants. Hie enemy,
+seeing the ocean almost covered with the bodies of their slain,
+their principal ships taken, sunk, or much injured, and having
+lost all hope of victory, endeavoured to save themselves by
+flight. But the Portuguese determined to follow up their success,
+and again brought them to battle, which continued a whole day and
+night, to the utter discomfiture of the Mahometans, most of whose
+vessels were sunk. At this time some of our foists saw a large
+ship belonging to the enemy at some distance, and made sail
+towards her; but as the enemy saw themselves overmatched, they
+hurled all their carriages into the sea [110], after which they
+leapt overboard themselves, in hopes to swim on shore, as they
+are most expert swimmers. But our men followed them even to the
+shore with lances, cross-bows, and stones, killing them while
+swimming, so that the sea was coloured with their blood. Yet
+about 200 of them escaped on shore, after swimming about 20
+miles. These Mahometans are all exceedingly expert swimmers,
+being accustomed to it from their early youth; and while we
+pursued them, they often dived and remained so long under water,
+that we thought they had sunk outright, and when they came up
+again and floated on the water, we thought we had been deceived
+by phantoms. They were however mostly all destroyed afterwards by
+one mischance or another, so that on this occasion the enemy lost
+a prodigious number of men. After the battle and pursuit ceased,
+our admiral sent some boats on shore in sundry places to number
+the dead bodies, which had been cast up by the sea, when about
+3000 were found, besides many that had been carried away by the
+sea.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 110: Perhaps they threw their guns
+overboard to lighten their vessel and facilitate their
+escape.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The king of Cananore beheld this great victory from the shore,
+and gave great commendations to the Portuguese for their valour,
+and very deservedly; for, though I have been in many hard-fought
+battles, I never saw greater valour than was displayed on this
+occasion by the Portuguese. After this great victory, we thought
+to have enjoyed peace and security, but worse events ensued; for
+the king of Cananore, who was a great friend to the Portuguese,
+died a few days afterwards, and was succeeded by a mortal enemy
+to the Christians, and a great friend to the zamorin, by whole
+interest he had been advanced to the kingdom of Cananore. This
+new king assembled his forces to make war against the Portuguese
+in all haste, believing that much of their ammunition had been
+expended in the late naval battle, and that their men were much
+wearied, and for the most part wounded, so that they would be
+unable to make any great resistance. To aid him on this occasion,
+the zamorin sent him 24 pieces of great cannon. This war began on
+the 7th of April, and continued to the 20th of August [111],
+before peace was restored. It were too long to recount all the
+brave actions performed by the Christians in this war against the
+Mahometans [112], who never encountered them with less than
+twenty-five or twenty-six thousand men and 140 pieces of
+artillery. The enemy on this occasion were armed in the manner
+already mentioned respecting the weapons of the inhabitants of
+Calicut, and the Christians in the harness and with the weapons
+then used by us in Europe[113].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 111: From the context, combined with the
+date of the late naval action, as given from the History of the
+Portuguese Transactions, this land-war with the rajah of Cananore
+must have been in 1509.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 112: In the naval battle the principal
+force at least must have been Mahometans, as the Hindoos do not
+use the sea; but, in this land-war with the new rajah of
+Cananore, the nairs would constitute the main force of the enemy,
+though there might be some Mahometan
+auxiliaries.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 113: The European soldiers then wore
+defensive armour and shields. And besides matchlocks, their
+offensive arms were pikes, swords, and
+cross-bows.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In their wars, the infidels divide their army into many
+<i>wings</i>, or brigades, of two or three thousand men each,
+only one of which proceeds to battle at a time, all the rest
+waiting the result of this charge before they proceed to join
+battle. While marching to give battle, it passes all imagination
+to conceive the prodigious noise made by innumerable musical
+instruments after their fashion, which fill the ears of their
+soldiers and encourage them to fight; while in the mean time a
+great number of men run before with artificial fireworks[114]. At
+last they give the onset with such fury and outcry, that two or
+three thousand of them are often able to put to flight 10,000 men
+who are unused to this mode of warfare. But God in his merciful
+providence never forsakes those who believe in his holy religion,
+as was now exemplified in our distress. For, while the Portuguese
+were in a manner overwhelmed with the multitude of their enemies,
+the joyful news arrived that a new fleet had come from Portugal
+to Cananore, under the valiant knight Don Tristan de Cunna, who
+was immediately informed of the straits to which we were reduced.
+He immediately sent us a reinforcement of 300 valiant soldiers,
+well provided with defensive armour, and weapons of offence,
+after the manner of the Christians. On the arrival of these
+succours, we were so encouraged that we would have burnt the city
+of Cananore, if our admiral had permitted us. But on learning the
+arrival of this reinforcement, the enemy were so cast down that
+they sought to make peace with us by every means they could think
+of, and appointed one <i>Mamalmaricar</i>, a man of great riches
+and wisdom, to be their ambassador, with full powers to conclude
+peace. This man accordingly waited on our admiral, who told him
+that he could not make peace without the authority of the
+viceroy, who was then at Cochin: Yet it was thought best not to
+reject the proffered peace, as, during war, the Portuguese could
+not send home their ships with the commodities of India, and for
+this reason the viceroy agreed to the conclusion of peace.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 114: Probably alluding to a kind of
+javelins armed with a species of rockets, which have long been
+used in the wars of India, and often produce great disorder among
+the crowded masses of their ill-disciplined
+troops.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>To mingle some pleasure with these tragedies, I shall now
+rehearse a pleasant story, worthy of being remembered. One day
+after the peace was settled, I happened to walk in the city of
+Cananore with some merchant idolaters, with whom I was acquainted
+before the war. They asked me to show them a certain Christian,
+much taller and stronger than any of the others, who used every
+day to slay about twenty of the Mahometans, and who at one time,
+when assailed by fifty of the nairs, escaped unhurt. At first I
+answered, that this valiant Christian had gone to Cochin to the
+viceroy: But after some farther consideration, I told them that
+this soldier was the God of the Portuguese, the great God who had
+created the world. Then answered they, that the Mahometans had
+said as much to them already, and therefore they were inclined to
+believe that the God of the Christians was better and more
+powerful than theirs. Thus it came to be rumoured all over the
+country that the Portuguese had overcome more by the assistance
+of God, than by the strength of man. These people are wonderfully
+simple and ignorant, and are easily astonished at very trifling
+matters; for when they saw one of our company ring a small
+hand-bell, and that it ceased to make a noise when set down, they
+took it for a miracle, saying one to another, "Doubtless the God
+of these men is greater than ours, for when they touch that
+little instrument it speaks, and when they touch it not it is
+silent." They took much delight in seeing the celebration of
+mass; and when the priest lifted up the holy bread, or host, I
+said unto them, "Behold the God of the Christians and of all the
+world." To which they answered, "You say truly, but we see him
+not." I repeat this that it may be seen how ignorant these people
+are. Yet are they great sorcerers, and can enchant the most
+venomous serpents, so as to do no harm, though their venom is so
+powerful as to kill only by touching. They are likewise of
+wonderful agility, and are astonishingly expert in vaulting,
+running, leaping, swimming, tumbling, walking on ropes, and such
+other feats of activity.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Navigation of the Author to Ethiopia, and return to Europe
+by Sea.</i></p>
+
+<p>Those who engage to write any history, ought to keep in mind
+what they have promised, lest after all their pains and trouble
+they only reap shame and reproach. Wherefore, having in the
+beginning of this performance engaged to write concerning the
+navigation of Ethiopia, I shall now make an end of my long
+travels and peregrinations, by a description of this voyage, in
+which I shall speak of such things as I saw by the way, on my
+return from India to my long wished-for country, along with the
+Portuguese.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving India on the 7th of December[115], we directed our
+course to Ethiopia[116]; and having sailed across the great gulf
+we came to the island of <i>Monzambrick</i>, or Mozambique, which
+is under the dominion of the king of Portugal. But before our
+arrival there, we saw many towns and fortresses by the way,
+belonging to the Portuguese, in the kingdoms of Melinda and
+Mombaza. They have also some strong fortresses in Mozambique and
+Sofala. Were I to enlarge upon the memorable deeds of the valiant
+Tristran de Cunna, on his return from India, I should enter upon
+a subject far beyond my powers, being such as would rather
+require the pen of a Homer or a Virgil: For he invaded and
+subdued the great cities of <i>Gogia, Pati</i>, and
+<i>Crava[117]</i>, and also the goodly island of <i>Sacutara</i>,
+[Socotoro,] where a fortress was erected by order of the king of
+Portugal. I omit also to speak of many islands which we saw by
+the way, such as the island of <i>Cumeris</i>, or Curia Muria,
+and six others, which produce plenty of ginger, sugar, and other
+goodly fruits, and the most fruitful island of <i>Penda</i>,
+which is likewise subject to the Portuguese.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 115: Probably of the year
+1508.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 116: It is hardly necessary to remark, that
+the term Ethiopia is here applied to the western coast of Africa
+on the ocean.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 117: The Gogia of the text is probably Oja,
+on the coast of Africa, 17 leagues from Melinda, and Pati may
+possibly be some corruption of Paniany, both of these places
+having been reduced by de Cunna. Crava may be an error for Brava,
+on the western coast of Africa.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From the island of Mozambique, which belongs to Portugal, it
+brought much gold and ivory, but these come from the continent of
+Ethiopia. This island is not large, but has a commodious port,
+and is inhabited by black Mahometans[118], who are in great want
+of all the necessaries of life, having no corn or provisions but
+what are brought from the continent. We landed on the continental
+part of Ethiopia to see the country, where we saw a barbarous
+Vagabond people of blacks, both men and women going entirely
+naked, except covering their parts of shame with leaves of trees.
+Their lips are two fingers thick, their foreheads very large, and
+they have great teeth as white as snow. They are exceedingly
+timorous and fearful of armed men; wherefore six of us, well
+armed with muskets, and accompanied by a black slave who knew the
+country, went a considerable way inland to view the country. When
+we had gone forwards a days journey, we came to many herds of
+elephants, and our guide recommended to us to carry burning
+firebrands in our hands, as these beasts are afraid of fire above
+all things; but we chanced to fall in with three female elephants
+that had lately calved, and they could not be scared by our fire,
+but followed us so far that we were obliged to save ourselves by
+scrambling up a steep mountain.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 118: Perhaps this expression ought to have
+been black-a-moors, the old name for negroes.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When we were about ten miles inland, we came to a cave on the
+side of a mountain inhabited by some of the black natives, whose
+manner of speech was so strange and chattering, like so many
+apes, that I am unable to express the manner of their language,
+which comes near the strange jargon used by the muleteers of
+Sicily, when they drive their mules[119]. Our pilot asked us if
+we were inclined to purchase any cattle from these people, saying
+that we might have them at a very low price; but suspecting that
+he either mocked us, or meant, in concert with the natives, to
+impose upon us, we said that we had no money. Then he told us
+that these people wanted no money, having already gold in greater
+plenty than we, which they procure not far from where we were. On
+asking him what articles they were desirous of in payment for
+their cattle, he said they preferred things of small value, such
+as pins, knives, scissars, looking-glasses, hawks-bells, bags, or
+boxes, to contain their gold, copper rings, <i>janglings</i> to
+hang at their timbrils, bosses, laces, broaches, copper-chains,
+caskanets, bracelets, and such like baubles to deck their wives
+and children. We then said that we would willingly give them such
+things for their cattle if they would bring them to us at the
+shore; but the pilot said the natives would drive them to the
+next mountain, but no farther on any condition. Then one of our
+companions said that he had a boss of engraven copper, and a
+small bell; and as I had none of such merchandise, and yet was
+desirous of eating fresh meat, I said I would give one of my
+shirts to buy cattle. The pilot engaged to make our purchases to
+the best advantage, and calling five or six of the natives about
+him, he shewed them our <i>goodly jewels,</i> and demanded from
+them <i>three hundred</i> head of cattle. The natives, not
+differing much from beasts, answered by signs that they would
+only give fifteen. At length we made a bargain, though we still
+suspected some deceit; yet they kept their promise, and sent us
+fifteen beasts by two of their companions. We had scarcely gone
+when we heard a noise and tumult among them, and were in some
+fear lest these <i>troglodites</i> might follow to do us some
+injury, wherefore leaving the cattle we took to our weapons. But
+they made signs to us to fear nothing, and the pilot told us they
+were quarrelling who should have the copper boss. Then recovering
+our cattle, we drove them forward to the top of the mountain,
+where we dismissed the two natives, and continued our journey
+towards the coast. While driving our cattle past a little wood,
+we again fell in with the elephants, which put us in such fear
+that we abandoned our cattle and trusted to our feet, making the
+best of our way to the island.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 119: Perhaps alluding to the <i>cluck</i>,
+which occurs perpetually in the language of the Hottentots,
+resembling the sound used in some parts to urge on a horse, and
+which is inexpressible in orthography.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having made provision for our voyage of such things as could
+be procured at Mozambique, we sailed for the Cape of Good Hope,
+passing the island of St Lawrence, otherwise called Madagascar,
+which is 80 leagues from the nearest part of the continent. I
+suppose that in a short time the Portuguese will be masters of
+this island, as they have burned and destroyed many of its towns
+and villages, and are much feared by the natives. So far as I
+conjecture by my peregrinations, especially those in India and
+Ethiopia, it is my opinion that the king of Portugal is likely to
+be the richest king in the world, if he continue as he has begun;
+and certainly his dignity and godly zeal is not unworthy of such
+high fortune, as by his means the knowledge of the Christian
+faith is greatly extended. In Cochin, where the viceroy of India
+resides, every holiday ten or twelve Mahometans or idolaters are
+professed to our religion; so that we may have good hope that in
+time our faith may greatly spread with the blessing of God, who
+hath given such miraculous victories to the Christians; wherefore
+all who profess to believe in the holy name of Christ, ought
+incessantly to pray to God to assist the king of Portugal in so
+godly an enterprise.</p>
+
+<p>When we had sailed about two hundred miles beyond the Cape of
+Good Hope, there arose a sudden tempest of contrary wind, which
+towed us to and fro for seven days in great danger, but we
+escaped by the blessing of God. After the cessation of this
+tempest, and when we had again proceeded other two hundred miles
+on our voyage, a new tempest arose, which scattered all our ships
+during six days that it continued, so that we did not all meet
+again till our arrival at Lisbon in Portugal. I was in a ship
+called the St Vincent, belonging to one Bartholomew a Florentine,
+who was a citizen of Lisbon. She was a vessel of great size, and
+carried seven hundred tons of spices of all kinds. We passed the
+island of St Helena, near which we saw certain fishes of such
+enormous bigness that one of them was as large as a great house.
+When they rise above water, or gape or yawn, the upper jaw covers
+all the forehead, as it were a soldier in shining armour, and
+when they swim along the surface of the deep, the forehead seems
+three paces broad. As they swam about near the ships, they raised
+such a commotion in the sea that we discharged all our artillery
+to drive them away. We soon afterwards came to an island named
+<i>Ascension,</i> where we saw many birds about the size of
+ducks, which were so stupid that we took them with our hands, yet
+immediately afterwards they shewed wonderful fierceness. In that
+island we saw no outer living creatures besides these birds,
+which seemed as if they had never seen mankind before, and there
+were prodigious quantities of fish around its shores.</p>
+
+<p>Having sailed many days beyond that island, we seemed to have
+returned again into our own world, as the north star, the guide
+of mariners, appeared to us. Here we have a good opportunity of
+refuting the opinion of those who think that it is impossible to
+sail in the regions of the antartic pole by the guidance of the
+north star; for it is undeniable that the Portuguese sail by the
+aid of the north polar star, although entirely hidden from their
+sight in the antartic region of the sea. Yet they frequently
+refresh the virtue of the needle by means of that stone which
+ever naturally points towards the north. A few days afterwards we
+arrived at a fair region, in which are seen many islands called
+the <i>Astures</i> A&ccedil;ores, so named from the multitude of
+that species of eagles or hawks which are called a&ccedil;ores or
+<i>azores</i>. These islands are variously named, as <i>Pico</i>,
+<i>Martii</i>, <i>Corvo</i>, <i>Flores</i>, <i>St George</i>,
+<i>Gratiosa</i> and <i>Fyal</i>. From thence we went to the
+island of <i>Tercera</i>, where we remained two days. All these
+are very fertile, and have abundance of all the necessaries of
+life.</p>
+
+<p>Departing from thence, we came in seven days sailing to
+<i>Luxburne</i> or <i>Ulisbona</i>, [<i>Lisbon</i>] in Portugal.
+On my arrival I was carried to the presence of the king, whose
+hand I had the honour to kiss, and with most humble reverence I
+thanked his majesty for the great favour I had found with his
+officers and subjects in India. He entertained me very graciously
+at his court, until I had informed him fully of all that I had
+observed in my peregrinations in various parts of India. Some
+days afterwards, I shewed his majesty the letters-patent by which
+his viceroy in India had honoured me with the order of
+knighthood, and humbly requested of his majesty to confirm the
+same under his great seal, which he was graciously pleased to
+grant. Then departing from Lisbon, with the passport and safe
+conduct of the king, I returned at length, after these my long
+and perilous travels, to my long-desired native home, the city of
+Rome, by the blessing of God, to whom be all honour and
+glory.</p>
+
+<p><i>End of the Voyages of Verthema.</i></p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter3-6" id="chapter3-6">CHAPTER VI.</a></h2>
+
+<p>VOYAGES AND TRAVELS OF CESAR FREDERICK IN INDIA[120].</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>This article has been adopted from the Collection of Hakluyt,
+and, with that immediately preceding, may serve as a supplement
+to the Portuguese Transactions in India. The entire title, as
+given in that early and curious Collection, is "<i>The Voyage and
+Travel of M. Cesar Fredericke, Merchant of Venice, into the East
+India and beyond the Indies: Wherein are contained the Customes
+and Rites of these Countries, the Merchandise and Commodities, as
+well of Golde as Silver, as Spices, Drugges, Pearles, and other
+Jewels. Translated out of Italian by M. Thomas Hickocke</i>."</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 120: Hakluyt, II. pp. 359--375. Ed. Lond.
+1810.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In adapting the present chapter to the purposes of our
+Collection, the only liberty we have taken with the ancient
+translation exhibited by Hakluyt, has been to employ the modern
+orthography in the names of places, persons, and things, and to
+modernise the language throughout. As in the itinerary of
+Verthema, to avoid the multiplication of notes unnecessarily we
+have corrected the frequently vicious orthography of these names
+as given by Cesar Frederick and his original translator, either
+by substituting the true names or more generally received modern
+orthography, or by subjoining the right name in the text
+immediately after that employed by the author. When the names
+employed in the original translation of this Journal are so
+corrupt as to be beyond our power to rectify, or where we are
+doubtful of our correction, we have marked them with a point of
+interrogation, as doubtful or unknown, as has likewise been done
+in our version of the Itinerary of Verthema. These two journals,
+besides that they coincide with the plan of our arrangement of
+giving as many appropriate original journals of voyages and
+travels as we can procure, contain a great number of curious
+particulars, nowhere else to be met with, respecting the manners
+and customs of various parts of India, between the years 1503 and
+1581, with many intersecting notices respecting its history,
+production, and trade.</p>
+
+<p>We learn from the following journal, that Cesar Frederick
+began his peregrination in 1563; and, as he informs us in his
+preface, that he was continually employed in coasting and
+travelling for eighteen years, he could not have returned to
+Venice before the year 1581. In the publication of this journal
+in the Collection of Hakluyt, it is very irregularly divided into
+fragments, upon no apparent principles of regular distribution;
+but on the present occasion it has been arranged in sections, so
+as to suit the general plan of the present work.--E.</p>
+
+<p><i>Cesar Frederick to the Reader.</i></p>
+
+<p>Having for the space of eighteen years continually coasted and
+travelled over almost all the East Indies, and many other
+countries beyond the Indies, both with good and bad success; and
+having seen and learned many things worthy of notice, which have
+never been before communicated to the world; I have thought it
+right, since the Almighty hath graciously been pleased to return
+me to my native country, the noble city of Venice, to write and
+publish this account of the perils I have encountered during my
+long and arduous peregrinations by sea and land, together with
+the many wonderful things I have seen in the Indies; the mighty
+princes that govern these countries; the religion or faith in
+which they live; their rites and customs; the various successes I
+experienced; and which of these countries abound in drugs and
+jewels: All of which may be profitable to such as desire to make
+a similar voyage: Therefore, that the world may be benefited by
+my experience, I have caused my voyages and travels to be
+printed, which I now present to you, gentle and loving readers,
+in hopes that the variety of things contained in this book may
+give you delight.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage from Venice to Bir in Asia Minor.</i></p>
+
+<p>In the year 1563, while residing at Venice, being desirous to
+see the eastern parts of the world, I embarked in a ship called
+the <i>Gradaige</i> of Venice, commanded by Jacomo Vatica, bound
+for Cyprus, taking with me certain merchandise. On arriving at
+Cyprus, I left that ship, and went in a lesser to Tripoli in
+Syria, where I made a short stay. I then travelled by land to
+Aleppo, where I became acquainted with some Armenian and Moorish
+merchants, and agreed to accompany them to Ormuz. We accordingly
+departed together from Aleppo, and came to the city of <i>Bir</i>
+in two days journey and a-half.</p>
+
+<p>Bir is a small city in which provisions are very scarce,
+situated in Asia Minor, [in lat. 37&deg; 5' N. long. 38&deg; E.
+from Greenwich], the river Euphrates running near its walls. In
+this city, the merchants who intend to descend the Euphrates form
+themselves into companies or associations, according to the
+quantities of merchandise they possess, and either build or buy a
+boat to carry themselves and their goods down the Euphrates to
+Babylon[121], under the care of a master and mariners hired to
+conduct the boat. These boats are almost flat-bottomed and very
+strong, yet serve only for one voyage, as it is impossible to
+navigate them upwards. They are fitted for the shallowness of the
+river, which in many places is full of great stones which greatly
+obstruct the navigation. At <i>Feluchia</i> a small city on the
+Euphrates, the merchants pull their boats to pieces or sell them
+for a small price; as a boat that cost forty or fifty chequins at
+Bir sells only at Feluchia for seven or eight chequins. When the
+merchants return back from Babylon, if they have merchandise or
+goods that pay custom, they travel through the wilderness in
+forty days, passing that way at much less expence than the other.
+If they have no such merchandise, they then go by the way of
+Mosul in Mesopotamia, which is attended with great charges both
+for the caravan and company. From Bir to <i>Feluchia</i>. on the
+Euphrates, over against Babylon, which is on the Tigris, if the
+river have sufficient water, the voyage down the river may be
+made in fifteen or eighteen days; but when the water is low in
+consequence of long previous drought, the voyage is attended with
+much trouble, and will sometimes require forty or fifty days to
+get down. In this case the boats often strike on the stones in
+the river, when it becomes necessary to unlade and repair them,
+which is attended with much trouble and delay; and on this
+account the merchants have always one or two spare boats, that if
+one happen to split or be lost by striking on the shoals, they
+may have another ready to take in their goods till they have
+repaired the broken boat If they were to draw the broken boat on
+the land for repair, it would be difficult to defend it in the
+night from the great numbers of Arabs that would come to rob and
+plunder them. Every night, when it is necessary to make fast the
+boat to the bank, good watch must be kept against the Arabs, who
+are great thieves and as numerous as ants; yet are they not given
+to murder on these occasions, but steal what they can and run
+away. Arquebuses are excellent weapons for keeping off these
+Arabs, as they are in great fear of the shot. In passing down the
+river from Bir to Feluchia, there are certain towns and villages
+on the Euphrates belonging to <i>the son of Aborise</i>, king of
+the Arabs and of the desert, at some of which the merchants have
+to pay so many <i>medins</i> of custom on each bale.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 121: It is obvious that Bagdat is here
+meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of Feluchia and Babylon.</i></p>
+
+<p>Feluchia is a village on the Euphrates, where they who come
+from Bir for Babylon disembark with their goods, and go thence by
+land to Babylon, a journey of a day and a half. Babylon is no
+great city, but is very populous and is greatly resorted to by
+strangers, being the great thoroughfare for Persia, Turkey and
+Arabia, and from this place there are frequent caravans to
+different countries. Babylon is abundantly supplied with
+provisions, which are brought down the river Tigris on certain
+rafts or <i>zattores</i> called Vtrij, the river Tigris running
+past the walls of Babylon. The blown-up hides of which these
+rafts are composed, are bound fast together, on which boards are
+laid, and on these boards the commodities are loaded. When
+unladed at Babylon, the air is let out of the skins, which are
+then laid on the backs of camels and carried back to serve for
+another voyage. The city of Babylon is properly speaking in the
+kingdom of Persia, but is now under the dominion of the Turks. On
+the other side of the river towards Arabia, over against Babylon,
+there is a handsome town in which is an extensive Bazar for the
+merchants, with many lodging rooms, in which the greater part of
+the stranger merchants that go to Babylon expose their goods for
+sale. The passage across the river between Babylon and this town
+is by a long bridge of boats chained together with great chains:
+And when the river is swollen by the great rains, this bridge is
+opened in the middle, one half falling alongside of the walls of
+Babylon, and the other half along the opposite bank of the
+borough. So long as the bridge remains open, the people cross
+from side to side in small boats with much danger, by reason of
+their smallness, and that they are usually overladen, so that
+they are very liable to be overset by the swiftness of the
+current, or to be carried away and wrecked on the banks. In this
+manner-many people are lost and drowned, as I have often
+witnessed.</p>
+
+<p>The tower of Nimrod, or Babel, is situated on the Arabian side
+of the Tigris, in a great plain, seven or eight miles from
+Babylon. Being ruined on every side, it has formed a great
+mountain, yet a considerable part of the tower is still standing,
+compassed and almost covered up by these ruins. It has been built
+of square bricks dried in the sun, and constructed in the
+following manner. In the first place a course of bricks was laid,
+then a mat made of canes squared like the bricks, and daubed with
+earth instead of lime mortar; and these mats still remain so
+strong that it is wonderful considering their great antiquity. I
+have gone all round it without being able to discover any place
+where there had been a door or entrance, and in my opinion it may
+be about a mile in circumference or rather less. Contrary to all
+other things, which appear small at a distance and become larger
+the nearer they are approached, this tower appears largest when
+seen from afar, and seems less as you come nearer. This may be
+accounted for, as the tower stands in a very large plain, and
+with its surrounding ruins forms the only perceptible object; so
+that from a distance the tower and the mountains formed of its
+ruins make a greater shew than it is found to be on coming
+near.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of Basora.</i></p>
+
+<p>From Babylon I embarked in one of those small vessels which
+ply upon the Tigris between Babylon and Basora, which are built
+after the manner of foists or galliots, having a
+<i>speron</i>[122] and a covered poop. They use no pumps, being
+so well daubed with pitch as effectually to exclude the water.
+This pitch they have from a great plain near the city of
+<i>Heit</i> on the Euphrates, two days journey from Babylon. This
+plain full of pitch is marvellous to behold, and a thing almost
+incredible, as from a hole in the earth the pitch is continually
+thrown into the air with a constant great smoke; and being hot it
+falls as it were sprinkled all over the plain, in such abundance
+that the plain is always full of pitch[123]. The Moors and Arabs
+of the neighbourhood allege that this hole is the mouth of Hell;
+and in truth it is a very memorable object From this native pitch
+or bitumen the whole people of that country derive great benefit,
+as with it they pay or serve their barks, which they call
+<i>Daneck</i> and <i>Saffin</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 122: In imitation of the original
+translator Hickocke and Hakluyt, this word must be left
+untranslated and unexplained.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 123: This account of the hole which
+discharges pitch or native bitumen mixed with water is most true;
+the water and pitch running into the valley <i>or island</i>,
+where the pitch remains, and the water runs into the Euphrates,
+when it occasions the water for a long way to have a brackish
+taste with the smell of pitch and brimstone.--Hakl.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When the river Tigris is well replenished with water, the
+passage from Babylon or Bagdat to Basora may be made in eight or
+nine days, less or more according to circumstances; we were
+fourteen or fifteen days, because the water was low, and when the
+waters are at the lowest it requires eighteen days. Having no
+rocks or shoals in the river, the voyage may be continued day and
+night. There are some places by the way at which you have to pay
+so many medins for each bale, as toll or custom. Basora, Bussora,
+or Busrah, [in lat. 30&deg; 20' N. long. 47&deg; 40' E.] is a
+city on the Arabian side of the united rivers Euphrates and
+Tigris, which was governed of old by those Arabs called
+<i>Zizarij</i>, but is now under the dominion of the grand Turk,
+who keeps an army there at great charge. The tribe of Arabs
+called Zizarij still have possession of a large extent of
+country, and cannot be overcome by the Turks, as the sea divides
+their country into islands by many channels, so that the Turks
+are unable to bring an army against them either by land or sea,
+and likewise because the inhabitants are brave and warlike. A
+days sail before coming to Basora, we pass a small castle or fort
+called <i>Corna</i>, on the point of land where the Euphrates and
+Tigris join; whence the united waters of these two rivers form a
+very large river that runs into the gulf of Persia.</p>
+
+<p>Basora is fifty miles from the sea, and it a place of great
+trade in spices and drugs, which are brought from Ormuz. It is
+abundantly supplied with corn, rice, and dates, from the
+surrounding country. At Basora I shipped myself for Ormuz, to
+which I sailed through the Persian gulf 600 miles, which is the
+distance between Basora and Ormuz. We sailed in small ships built
+of board fastened together with small ropes or cords, and,
+instead of caulking, a certain kind of straw is laid between the
+boards at their junctions, and they are sewed together; owing to
+which imperfect construction, these vessels are very dangerous,
+and take in much water. On departing from Basora we sailed 200
+miles along the left shore of the gulf, having the open sea on
+our right hand, till we came to an island called <i>Carichij</i>
+or <i>Karak</i>, whence we continued our voyage to Ormuz, always
+keeping the Persian shore in sight on our left, and seeing many
+islands on our right hand towards Arabia.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of Ormuz.</i></p>
+
+<p>The island of Ormuz is twenty-five or thirty miles in circuit,
+being the driest and most barren island in the world, producing
+nothing but salt-water and wood. All things necessary for the
+life of man are brought here from Persia, which is twelve miles
+off, and from islands adjoining to Persia, and in such abundance
+that the city has always a great store of every necessary. Near
+the shore there stands a fair castle, in which resides the
+commander appointed by the king of Portugal, with a good band of
+Portuguese soldiers. The married men belonging to the garrison
+dwell in the city, in which there are merchants of almost every
+nation, among whom are many Moors and Gentiles. This city has a
+vast trade for all kinds of spices, drugs, silk, cloth of silk,
+brocades, and various kinds of merchandise from Persia. The trade
+in horses is very great, being transported from hence to India.
+The island has a Mahometan or Moorish king of the Persian race,
+who is created and set up by the Portuguese commander in the name
+of the king of Portugal. Being present on one of these occasions,
+I shall set down the ceremonies as I saw them.</p>
+
+<p>The old king being dead, the Portuguese commander proceeds
+with much pomp and ceremony to elect a new one in the castle; and
+when he is chosen from the blood-royal, the new king is sworn to
+be true and faithful to the king of Portugal, as his
+lord-paramount, after which the captain presents him with the
+royal sceptre. The newly elected king is then conducted in great
+pomp to the royal palace, amid great feasts and rejoicings, and
+attended by a numerous and splendid retinue. The king keeps a
+good train of attendants, and has sufficient revenues to maintain
+his state and dignity, with very little of the cares of royalty,
+as the captain of the castle defends the kingdom. When the king
+and captain ride out together, the king is treated with much
+ceremony and respect, yet cannot ride abroad with his train
+without having first received permission of the captain, which
+precaution is necessary because of the great trade carried on at
+this place. The native language in this island is the Persian. I
+embarked at Ormuz for Goa in India, in a ship on board of which
+were fourscore horses. All merchants proceeding from Ormuz for
+Goa ought to go in ships carrying horses, because every ship
+carrying twenty horses or upwards is privileged from the payment
+of customs on all their other goods, whereas all ships having no
+horses have to pay eight per centum on their goods and
+commodities.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of Goa, Diu, and Cambaya.</i></p>
+
+<p>Goa is the chief city of the Portuguese in India, in which
+reside the viceroy and his court, being many officers of the
+crown of Portugal. From Ormuz it is 990 miles to Goa, on which
+passage the first city you come to in India is Diu, situated in a
+small island of the kingdom of Cambaia; and, though a small city,
+is the strongest fortified of any of those possessed by the
+Portuguese in India, having great trade, and loading many great
+ships with merchandise for Ormuz and the Red Sea. These ships
+belong both to Moors and Christians; but the Moors can neither
+trade nor navigate in these seas, unless they have a pass or
+licence from the Portuguese viceroy, without which they we liable
+to be captured. The merchandise loaded at Diu comes from
+<i>Cambaietta</i>, a port in the kingdom of Cambaia, about 180
+miles up a strait or gulf called <i>Macareo</i>, which signifies
+<i>a race of the tide</i>, because the water runs there with
+immense rapidity, such as is not to be seen anywhere else, except
+in the kingdom of Pegu, where there is another <i>Macareo</i> or
+race of the tide still more violent. On this account, and because
+no large vessels can go to <i>Cambaietta</i> or <i>Cambay</i>, by
+reason of the shallowness of the water in the gulf for 80 or 100
+miles, the principal city of Cambaia or Guzerat is
+<i>Amadaver</i> or <i>Amedabad</i>, a day and a half journey from
+Cambay, being a great and populous city, and for a city of the
+Gentiles it is well built with handsome houses and wide streets.
+In it there is a fine bason or canul, having many ships, so that
+it resembles Cairo, but not so large.</p>
+
+<p>Cambay is situated on the sea at the head of the gulf of the
+same name, and is a handsome city. While I was there it was
+suffering great calamity, owing to a scarcity, insomuch that the
+Gentiles offered their sons and daughters for sale to the
+Portuguese, and I have seen them sold for 8 or 10 <i>larines</i>
+each, which is of our money about 10s. or 13s. 4d.[124]. Yet if I
+had not actually seen it, I could not have believed that Cambay
+had so great a trade. Every new and full moon, when the tides are
+at the highest, the small barks that come in and go out are quite
+innumerable. These barks are laden with all kinds of spices, with
+silks of China, sandal-wood, elephants teeth, velvets of
+<i>Vercini</i>, great quantities of <i>Pannina</i>, which comes
+from Mecca, <i>chequins</i> or gold coins worth 7s. each
+sterling, and various other commodities. These barks carry out an
+infinite quantity of cloth of all sorts made of <i>bumbast</i> or
+cotton, some white, others stamped or painted; large quantities
+of indigo, dried and preserved ginger, dry and confected
+myrabolans, <i>boraso</i> or borax in paste, vast quantities of
+sugar, cotton, opium, asafoetida, <i>puchio?</i> and many other
+kinds of drugs, turbans made at Delhi, great quantities of
+carnelians, garnets, agates, jaspers, calcedonies,
+<i>hematitis</i>, or bloodstones, and some natural diamonds.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 124: This comparison seems made by the
+translator between <i>larines</i> and sterling
+money.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It is customary at Cambay, though no one is obliged, to employ
+brokers, of whom there are great numbers at this place, all
+Gentiles and of great repute, every one of whom keeps fifteen or
+twenty servants. All the Portuguese, and more other merchants who
+frequent this place, employ these brokers, who purchase and tell
+for them; and such as come there for the first time are informed
+by their friends of this custom, and what broker they ought to
+employ. Every fifteen days, when the great fleet of barks comes
+into port, these brokers come to the water side, and the
+merchants immediately on landing give charge of their cargoes to
+the broker who transacts their business, with the marks of all
+their bales and packages. After this the merchant carries on
+shore all the furniture for his dwelling, it being necessary for
+every one who trades to India to carry a sufficient provision of
+household staff for his use, as none such are to be procured.
+Then the broker who takes charge of his cargo, makes his servants
+carry the merchant's furniture to some empty house in the city,
+every broker having several such for the accommodation of their
+merchants, where there are only bedsteads, tables, chairs, and
+empty water jars. Then the broker says to the merchant, go and
+repose yourself and take your rest in the city. The broker
+remains at the water-side in charge of the cargo, causes all the
+goods to be discharged from the bark, pays the customs, and
+causes every thing to be carried to the house in which the
+merchant has taken up his residence, the merchant having no
+trouble with any thing. After this, the broker inquires if the
+merchant is disposed to sell his goods at the rate then current;
+and if he desires it, the broker sells the goods immediately, and
+informs the merchant how much money comes to him after payment of
+all charges. If the merchant is disposed to lay out his money in
+the purchase of other commodities, the broker informs him at what
+rate the different articles may be put free on board, all charges
+paid. Being thus properly instructed, the merchant makes his
+calculations, and if he is satisfied to buy or sell at the
+current prices he directs the broker accordingly; so that if he
+have even to the value of 20,000 ducats or more, every thing will
+be sold off or bartered in fifteen days, without giving himself
+any trouble or concern about the matter. Should the merchant not
+be disposed to sell the goods at the then current prices, he may
+tarry as long as he pleases, but the goods cannot be sold for him
+by any other person than the broker who has taken them in hand,
+and has paid the duties. Sometimes, by delaying the sale of their
+commodities for a time, the merchants make good profit, and at
+other times they lose; but those articles which do not ordinarily
+come every fifteen days, frequently produce great profit by
+delaying to sell till the prices rise.</p>
+
+<p>The barks that lade at Cambay go to Diu to supply the ships at
+that port which are taking in goods for the Red Sea and Ormuz,
+and some go to Chaul and Goa. These ships are either well armed,
+or are protected by Portuguese ships of war, as there are many
+corsairs or pirates continually cruizing along that coast,
+robbing and plundering whatever they are able to master. The
+kingdom of Cambaia or Guzerat has great trade, though it has long
+been in the hands of tyrants and usurpers, ever since the lawful
+sovereign, then 75 years of age, named Sultan Badur, was slain,
+at the assault of Diu, at which time four or five principal
+officers of his army divided the kingdom among themselves, all
+tyrannizing in their several shares as in emulation of each
+other. Twelve years before my coming, the great Mogul, who is the
+Mahometan king of Delhi and Agra, 40 days journey inland from
+Amedabad, reduced all the provinces of Guzerat under his
+authority without resistance, his power being so great that none
+of the usurpers dared to oppose him. While I dwelt in Cambay, I
+saw many curious things. There were a prodigious number of
+artificers who made ivory bracelets called mannij, of, various
+colours, with which the Gentile women are in use to decorate
+their arms, some covering their arms entirely over with them. In
+this single article there are many thousand crowns expended
+yearly, owing to this singular custom, that, when any of their
+kindred die, they break all their bracelets in token of grief and
+mourning, so that they have immediately to purchase new ones, as
+they would rather go without meat as not have these
+ornaments.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VI.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of Damann, Bassen, Tana, Chaul, and some other
+places</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Leaving Diu, I went on to Damann, the second city belonging to
+the Portuguese in the territory of Guzerat, and distant from Diu
+120 miles. This place has no trade of any importance, except in
+rice and wheat, and has many dependent villages, where in time of
+peace the Portuguese enjoy the pleasure of a country retirement,
+but in time of war they are all spoiled and plundered by the
+enemy, so that then they derive very small benefit from them. The
+next place is Bassen, a small dirty place in comparison with
+Damann, which supplies Goa with rice and wheat, besides timber
+for the construction of ships and gallies. At a small distance
+from Bassen is a small island named Tana, well peopled with
+Portuguese, Moors, and Gentiles. This place affords nothing but
+rice, but contains many manufacturers of <i>armesies</i>? and
+weavers of girdles made of wool and cotton, black and red like
+<i>moocharie</i>?</p>
+
+<p>Beyond this is Chaul on the continent, where there are two
+cities, one belonging to the Portuguese, and the other to the
+Moors; that which belongs to the Portuguese is lower than the
+other, commands the mouth of the harbour, and is very strongly
+fortified. About a mile and a half from this city is that of the
+Moors, belonging to their king <i>Zamaluco</i>, or Nizam-al-mulk.
+In time of war no large ships can go to the city of the Moors, as
+they must necessarily pass under the guns of the Portuguese
+castles, which would sink them. Both cities of Chaul are
+sea-ports, and have great trade in all kinds of spices, drugs,
+raw silk, manufactures of silk, sandal-wood, <i>Marsine,
+Versine</i>[125], porcelain of China, velvets and scarlets, both
+from Portugal and Mecca[126], with many other valuable
+commodities. Every year there arrive ten or fifteen large ships,
+laden with great nuts called <i>Giagra</i>[127], which are cured
+or dried, and with sugar made from these nuts. The tree on which
+these nuts grow is called the <i>Palmer</i> tree, and is to be
+found in great abundance over all India, especially between this
+place and Goa. This tree very much resembles that which produces
+dates, and no tree in the world is more profitable or more useful
+to man; no part of it but serves for some useful purpose, neither
+is any part of it so worthless as to be burnt. Of its timber they
+build ships, and with the leaves they make sails. Its fruit, or
+nuts, produce wine, and from the wine they make sugar and
+<i>placetto</i>[128]. This wine is gathered in the spring of the
+year from the middle of the tree, where there is then a continual
+stream of clear liquor like water, which they gather in vessels
+placed on purpose under each tree, and take them away full every
+morning and evening. This liquor being distilled by means of
+fire, is converted into a very strong liquor, which is then put
+into buts with a quantity of white or black <i>Zibibs</i>, and in
+a short time it becomes a perfect wine. Of the nuts they make
+great quantities of oil. The tree is made into boards and timbers
+for building houses. Of the bark cables and other ropes are made
+for ships which are said to be better than those made of hemp.
+The branches are made into bed-steads after the Indian fashion,
+and into <i>Sanasches</i>? for merchandise. The leaves being cut
+into thin slips are woven into sails for all kinds of ships, or
+into thin mats. The outer rhind of the nut stamped serves as
+oakum for caulking ships, and the hard inner shell serves for
+spoons and other utensils for holding food or drink. Thus no
+portion whatever of this <i>Palmer</i> tree is so worthless as to
+be thrown away or cast into the fire. When the nuts are green,
+they are full of a sweet water, excellent to drink, and the
+liquor contained in one nut is sufficient to satisfy a thirsty
+person. As the nut ripens, this liquor turns all into kernel.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 125: Formerly noticed as a species of
+velvet; but the words marsine and versine were inexplicable in
+the days of Hakluyt, and must so remain.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 126: The velvets and scarlet cloths from
+Mecca were probably Italian manufactures, brought through Egypt
+and the Red Sea.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+.
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 127: These great nuts must necessarily be
+the cocoa nuts, and the palmer tree, on which they grow, the
+cocoa palm.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 128: Possibly molasses are here
+meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From Chaul, an infinite quantity of goods are exported for
+other parts of India, Macao, Portugal, the coast of Melinda,
+Ormuz, and other parts; such as cloth of <i>bumbast</i> or
+cotton, white, painted, and printed, indigo, opium, silk of all
+kinds, borax in paste, asafoetida, iron, corn, and other things.
+Nizam-al-Mulk, the Moorish king, has great power, being able to
+take the field with 200,000 men, and a great store of artillery,
+some of which are made in pieces[129], and are so large that they
+are difficultly removed, yet are they very commodiously used, and
+discharge enormous stone bullets, some of which have been sent to
+the king of Portugal as rarities. The city of
+<i>Abnezer[130]</i>, in which Nizam-al-Mulk resides, is seven or
+eight days journey inland from Chaul. Seventy miles[131] from
+Chaul toward the Indies, or south, is Dabul, a haven belonging to
+Nizam-al-Mulk, from whence to Goa is 150 miles[132].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 129: Probably meaning that they were formed
+of bars hooped or welded together, in the way in which the famous
+<i>Mons meg</i>, long in Edinburgh Castle, and now in the tower
+of London, was certainly made.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 130: Perhaps that now called Assodnagur in
+the Mahratta country, about 125 miles nearly east from
+Chaul.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 131: In fact only about half that
+distance.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 132: About 165 English
+miles--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION VII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of Goa.</i></p>
+
+<p>Goa, the principal city of the Portuguese in India, in which
+the viceroy resides with a splendid court, stands in an island
+about 25 or 30 miles in circuit. The city, with its boroughs or
+suburbs, is moderately large, and is sufficiently handsome for an
+Indian city; but the island is very beautiful, being full of fine
+gardens, and adorned with many trees, among which are the
+<i>Palmer</i>, or cocoa-nut trees, formerly mentioned. Goa trades
+largely in all kinds of merchandise usual in these parts, and
+every year five or six large ships come directly thither from
+Portugal, usually arriving about the 6th or 10th of September.
+They remain there 40 or 50 days, and go from thence to Cochin,
+where they finish their lading for Portugal; though they often
+load one ship at Goa and the other at Cochin for Portugal. Cochin
+is 420 miles from Goa. The city of Goa stands in the kingdom of
+<i>Dial-can</i>, or Adel Khan, a Moorish or Mahometan king, whose
+capital, called Bejapour or Visiapour, is eight days journey
+inland from Goa[133]. This sovereign has great power; for, when I
+was at Goa in 1570, he came to attack that city, encamping with
+200,000 men at a river side in the neighbourhood, where he
+remained fourteen months, at the end of which a peace was
+concluded. It was reported in Goa that a great mortality
+prevailed in his army during the winter, which also killed many
+of his elephants. When I went in 1567 from Goa to
+<i>Bezenegur</i> or Bijanagur, the capital city of the kingdom of
+<i>Narsinga,</i> eight days journey inland from Goa[134], I
+travelled in company with two other merchants, who carried with
+them 300 Arabian horses for sale to that king; the horses of the
+country being of small stature, occasioning Arabian horses to
+sell at high prices in that part of India. Indeed it is necessary
+that the merchants should get good prices, as they are at great
+charges in bringing them from Persia to Ormuz and thence to Goa.
+At going out of Goa, 42 pagodas are paid of duty for each horse;
+the pagoda being a small gold coin worth about 6s. 8d. sterling.
+In the inland country of Narsinga, the Arabian horses sell for
+300, 400, and 500 ducats each, and some very superior horses sell
+as high as 1000 ducats.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 133: About 175, N.E. from Goa. In the
+original it is called Bisapor.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 134: The ruins of the royal city of
+Bijanagur are 190 English miles nearly due east from
+Goa.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION VIII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of the City of Bijanagur.</i></p>
+
+<p>In the year 1565, the city of Bijanagur was sacked by four
+Moorish kings of great power: Adel-Khan, Nizam-al-Mulk,
+Cotub-al-Mulk, and Viriday-Khan; yet with all their power they
+were unable to overcome this city and its king but by means of
+treachery. The king of Bijanagur was a Gentile, and among the
+captains of his numerous army had two famous Moors, each of whom
+commanded over seventy or eighty thousand men. These two captains
+being of the same religion with the four Moorish kings,
+treacherously combined with them to betray their own sovereign.
+Accordingly, when the king of Bijanagur, despising the power of
+his enemies, boldly faced them in the field, the battle had
+scarcely lasted four hours, when the two treacherous captains, in
+the very heat of the battle, turned with their followers against
+their own sovereign, and threw his army into such disorder that
+it broke and fled in the utmost confusion.</p>
+
+<p>This kingdom of Bijanagur had been governed for thirty years
+by the usurpation of three brothers, keeping the lawful king a
+state prisoner, and ruling according to their own pleasure,
+shewing the king only once a year to his subjects. They had been
+principal officers under the father of the king whom they now
+held a prisoner, who was very young when his father died, and
+they assumed the government. The eldest brother was called <i>Ram
+rajah</i>, who sat in the royal throne and was called king; the
+second was named <i>Temi rajah</i>, who held charge of the civil
+government of the country; and the third, <i>Bengatre</i>, was
+general in chief of the army. In the great battle against the
+four Mahometan kings all the three brothers were present, but the
+first and the last were never heard of more, neither dead nor
+alive. Temi rajah alone escaped from the battle, with the loss of
+one eye. On the news of this great defeat coming to the city of
+Bijanagur, the wives and children of the three tyrants fled with
+the imprisoned king, and the four Mahometan kings entered the
+city in great triumph, where they remained for six months,
+searching everywhere for money and valuable effects that had been
+hidden. After this they departed, being unable to retain
+possession of so extensive a dominion at such a distance from
+their own territory[135].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 135: The reason in the text for evacuating
+the kingdom of Narsinga, or Bijanagur, is very unsatisfactory, as
+it in fact bordered on their dominions. More probably they could
+not agree on the partition, each being afraid of the others
+acquiring an ascendancy, and they satisfied themselves with the
+enormous spoils of the capital. This event has been before
+mentioned from De Faria.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After the retreat of the four kings, Temi rajah returned to
+Bijanagur, which he repeopled, and sent word to the merchants of
+Goa to bring all the horses to him that they had for sale,
+promising good prices; and it was on this occasion that the two
+merchants went up with their horses, whom I accompanied. This
+tyrant also issued a proclamation, that if any merchant happened
+to have any of the horses which were taken in the late battle,
+even although they happened to have the Bijanagur mark upon them,
+that he would pay for them their full values, and give safe
+conduct for all who had such to come to his capital. When by this
+means he had procured a great number of horses, he put off the
+merchants with fair promises, till he saw that no more horses
+were likely to come, and he then ordered the merchants to depart
+without giving them any thing for the horses. I remained in
+Bijanagur seven months, though I might have concluded my whole
+business in one; but it was necessary for me to remain until the
+ways were cleared of thieves and robbers, who ranged up and down
+in whole troops.</p>
+
+<p>While I rested there I saw many strange and barbarous deeds
+done among these Gentiles. When any noble man or woman dies, the
+dead body is burned. If a married man die, his widow must burn
+herself alive for the love of her husband, and along with his
+body; but she may have the respite of a month, or even of two or
+three, if she will. When the appointed day arrives on which she
+is to be burnt, she goeth out from her house very early in the
+morning, either on horseback or on an elephant, or on a stage
+carried by eight men, apparelled like a bride, and is carried in
+triumph all round the city, having her hair hanging down about
+her shoulders, garnished with jewels and flowers, according to
+her circumstances, and seemingly as joyful as a bride in Venice
+going to her nuptials. On this occasion, she carries a mirror in
+her left hand, and an arrow in her right, and sings during the
+procession, saying, that she is going to sleep with her dear
+husband. In this manner she continues, surrounded by her kindred
+and friends till about one or two in the afternoon, when the
+procession goes out of the city to the side of the river called
+<i>Nigondin</i> or <i>Toombuddra</i>, which runs past the walls
+of the city, to a certain spot where this ceremony is usually
+performed, where there is prepared a large square pit full of
+dried wood, having a little pinnacle or scaffold close to one
+side four or five steps up. On her arrival, a great banquet is
+prepared, where the victim eats with as much apparent joy as if
+it were her wedding-day; and at the end of the feast there is
+dancing and singing so long as she thinks fit. At length she
+gives orders of her own accord to kindle the dry wood in the
+square pit; and when told that the fire is kindled, she takes the
+nearest kinsman of her husband by the hand, who leads her to the
+bank of the river, where she puts off her jewels and all her
+clothes, distributing them among her parents or relations; when,
+putting on a cloth, that she may not be seen naked by the people,
+she throweth herself into the river, saying, O! wretches wash
+away your sins. Coming out of the water, she rolls herself up in
+a yellow cloth, fourteen yards long, and again taking the nearest
+kinsman of her husband by the hand, they go together to the
+pinnacle at the funeral pile. From this place she addresses the
+people, to whom she recommends her children and relations. Before
+the pinnacle it is usual to place a mat, that she may not see the
+fierce fire; yet there are many who order this to be removed, as
+not afraid of the sight. When the silly woman has reasoned with
+the people for some time, another woman takes a pot of oil, part
+of which she pours on the head of the devoted victim, anointing
+also her whole body with the same, and then throws the pot into
+the fire, which the widow immediately follows, leaping into the
+fiercest of the fire. Then those who stand around the pile throw
+after her many great pieces of wood, by the blows from which, and
+the fierce fire in which she is enveloped, she quickly dies and
+is consumed. Immediately the mirth of the people is changed to
+sorrow and weeping, and such howling and lamentation is set up as
+one is hardly able to bear. I have seen many burnt in this
+manner, as my house was near the gate where they go out to the
+place of burning; and when a great man dies, not only his widow,
+but all the female slaves with whom he has had connection, are
+burnt along with his body. Also when the baser sort of people
+die, I have seen the dead husband carried to the place of
+sepulchre, where he is placed upright; then cometh his widow,
+and, placing herself on her knees before him, she clasps her arms
+about his neck, till the masons have built a wall around both as
+high us their necks. Then a person from behind strangles the
+widow, and the workmen finish the building over their heads, and
+thus they remain immured in one tomb. Inquiring the reason of
+this barbarous custom, I was told that this law had been
+established in ancient times as a provision against the
+slaughters which the women were in use to make of their husbands,
+poisoning them on every slight cause of displeasure; but that
+since the promulgation of this law they have been more faithful
+to their husbands, reckoning their lives as dear to them as their
+own, because after the death of their husband their own is sure
+soon to follow. There are many other abominable customs among
+these people, but of which I have no desire to write.</p>
+
+<p>In consideration of the injury done to Bijanagur by the four
+Mahometan kings, the king with his court removed from that city
+in 1567, and went to dwell in a castle named <i>Penegonde</i>,
+eight days journey inland from Bijanagur. Six days journey from
+Bijanagur is the place where diamonds are got[136]. I was not
+there, but was told that it is a great place encompassed by a
+wall, and that the ground within is sold to the adventurers at so
+much per square measure, and that they are even limited as to the
+depth they may dig. All diamonds found of a certain size and
+above belong to the king, and all below that size to the
+adventurers. It is a long time since any diamonds have been got
+there, owing to the troubles that have distracted the kingdom of
+Narsinga: For the son of Temi rajah having put the imprisoned
+king to death, the nobles and great men of the kingdom refused to
+acknowledge authority of the tyrant, so that the kingdom has
+fallen into anarchy, every one setting up for themselves.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 136: The diamond mines of Raolconda are
+about 90 miles direct north from the ruins of Bijanagur, on the
+Kisma. The castle of Penegonde is not now to be found in the maps
+of Indostan; but indeed the names of this ingenious traveller an
+often unintelligible, and almost always extremely
+corrupt.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The city of Bijanagur is not altogether destroyed, as the
+houses are said to be still standing, but entirely void of
+population, and become the dwellings of tigers, and other wild
+beasts. The circuit of this great city is twenty-four miles round
+the walls, within which are several hills. The ordinary dwellings
+are of earthen walls, and sufficiently mean, but the three
+palaces of the tyrant brothers, and the pagodas or idol temples,
+are built of fine marble, cemented with lime. I have seen many
+kings courts, yet have never seen any thing to compare with the
+greatness of the royal palace of Bijanagur, which hath nine
+gates. First, when you go into that part where the king lodged,
+there are five great gates kept by captains and soldiers: Within
+these are four lesser gates, which are kept by porters. On the
+outer side of the first gate is a small porch or lodge, where
+there is a captain and twenty-five soldiers, who keep watch day
+and night; and within that another, with a similar guard. Through
+this you enter into a very fair court, at the end of which is
+another porch like the first, with a similar guard, and within
+that another court. Thus the first five gates are each guarded by
+their respective captains. Then each of the lesser gates within
+are kept by a separate guard of porters. These gates stand open
+the greatest part of the night, as it is the custom of the
+Gentiles to transact business and make their feasts during the
+night, rather than in the day. This city is very safe from
+thieves, insomuch that the Portuguese merchants sleep under
+porches open to the street, and yet never meet with any
+injury.</p>
+
+<p>At the end of two months, I determined to go for Goa, in
+company with two Portuguese merchants, who were making ready to
+depart in two palankins or small litters, which are very
+convenient vehicles for travelling, being carried by eight
+<i>falchines</i>, or bearers, four at a time, and other four as
+reliefs. For my own use I bought two bullocks, one to ride upon
+and the other to carry my provisions. In that country they ride
+upon bullocks, having pannels fastened with girths, and guide
+them with bridles. In summer, the journey from Bijanagur to Goa
+takes only eight days; but we went in July, which is the middle
+of winter in that country, and were fifteen days in going to
+<i>Ancola</i>, on the sea coast. On the eighth day of the journey
+I lost both my bullocks. That which carried my provisions was
+weak, and could not proceed; and on passing a river by means of a
+small foot bridge, I made my other bullock swim across, but he
+stopt on a small island in the middle of the river where he found
+pasture, and we could devise no means to get him out. I was under
+the necessity therefore to leave him, and was forced to go on
+foot for seven days, during which it rained almost incessantly,
+and I suffered great fatigue. By good fortune I met some
+<i>falchines</i>[137] by the way, whom I hired to carry my
+clothes and provisions. In this journey we suffered great
+troubles, being every day made prisoners, and had every morning
+at our departure to pay four or five <i>pagies?</i> a man as
+ransom. Likewise, as we came almost every day into the country of
+a new governor, though all tributary to the king of Bijanagur, we
+found that every one of them had their own copper coin, so that
+the money we got in change one day was not current on the next.
+At length, by the mercy of God, we got safe to <i>Ancola</i>,
+which is in the country of the queen of <i>Gargopam</i>[138], a
+tributary to the king of Bijanagur.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 137: These <i>falchines</i> of Cesar
+Frederick are now denominated <i>coolies</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 138: These names of Ancola and Gargopam are
+so unintelligibly corrupted, as not be even conjecturally
+referable to any places or districts in our best
+maps.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The merchandise sent every year from Goa to Bijanagur consists
+of Arabian horses, velvets, damasks, satins, armoisins of
+Portugal, porcelain of China, saffron, and scarlet cloth; and at
+Bijanagur, they received in exchange or barter, jewels and
+pagodas, which are the gold ducats of the country. At Bijanagur,
+according to the state and condition of the wearers, the apparel
+is of velvet, satin, damask, scarlet cloth, or white cotton; and
+they wear long hats on their heads, called <i>colae</i>, made of
+similar materials; having girdles round their bodies of fine
+cotton cloth. They wear breeches made like those used by the
+Turks; having on their feet plain high things called
+<i>aspergh</i>. In their ears they wear great quantities of
+golden ornaments.</p>
+
+<p>Returning to my journey. When we got to <i>Ancola</i>, one of
+my companions having nothing to lose, took a guide and set out
+for Goa, which is only at the distance of four days journey; but
+as the other Portuguese was not inclined to travel any farther at
+this season, he and I remained there for the winter[139], which
+beginning on the 15th of May, lasts to the end of October. While
+we tarried there, another horse-merchant arrived in a palanquin,
+together with two Portuguese soldiers from Ceylon, and two
+letter-carriers, who were Christians born in India. All these
+persons agreed to go in company to Goa, and I resolved to go with
+them; for which purpose, I got a sorry palanquin made for me of
+canes, and in the hollow of one of these I concealed all my
+jewels. According to the usual custom, I hired eight
+<i>falchines</i> or bearers, and we set off one day about eleven
+o'clock. About two o'clock the same day, as we were passing a
+mountain which separates the territory of <i>Ancola</i> from that
+belonging to Abel Khan, and while I was a little way behind the
+rest of the company, I was assaulted by eight robbers, four of
+whom were armed with swords and targets, and the others with bows
+and arrows. My bearers immediately let fall the palanquin and ran
+off, leaving me alone on the ground wrapped up in my clothes. The
+robbers instantly came up and rifled me of every thing I had,
+leaving me stark naked. I pretended to be sick and would not quit
+the palanquin, in which I had made a kind of bed of my spare
+clothes. After searching with great industry, the thieves found
+two purses in which I had tied up some copper money I had got in
+change for four pagodas at Ancola; and thinking this treasure
+consisted of gold coin, they searched no farther, and went away,
+throwing all my clothes into a bush. Fortunately at their
+departure they dropped a handkerchief which I noticed, and
+getting up I wrapped it up in my palaquin[140]. In this forlorn
+condition, I had resolved to pluck the hollow cane from my
+palanquin in which my jewels were hid, and to have endeavoured to
+make my own way on foot to Goa, using the cane as a walking
+stick. But my bearers were so faithful that they returned to look
+for me after the robbers departed, which indeed I did not expect,
+as they were paid before hand, according to the custom of India.
+We got to Goa in four days, during which I fared very badly, as
+the robbers had left me no money of any kind, and all I had to
+eat was given me by my bearers for God's sake; but after my
+arrival in Goa, I paid them royally for what they gave me.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 139: This winter of our author, on the
+coast of Canara, in about the lat. of 15&deg; N. when the sun is
+nearly vertical, must be understood as the rainy
+season.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 140: This incident in the text is given as
+fortunate, and perhaps it ought to have been expressed, "He
+wrapped it about his loins and returned to his
+palanquin."--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From Goa I departed for Cochin, a voyage of 300 miles, there
+being several strong-holds belonging to the Portuguese between
+these two cities, as Onore, Barcelore, Mangalore, and Cananore.
+Onore, the first of these, is in the dominions of the queen of
+<i>Battacella</i>, or <i>Batecolah</i>, who is tributary to the
+king of Bijanagur. There is no trade at this place, which is only
+a military post held by a captain with a company of soldiers.
+After this you go to another small castle of the Portuguese
+called Mangalore, in which there is only a small trade in rice.
+Thence you go to a little fort called Bazelore[141], whence a
+great deal of rice is transported to Goa. From thence you go to a
+city named Cananore, which is within a musket-shot of the capital
+of the king of Cananore who is a Gentile[142]. He and his people
+are wicked and malicious, delighting in going to war with the
+Portuguese; yet when at peace they find their interest in trading
+with them. From this kingdom of Cananore is procured great store
+of cardomums, pepper, ginger, honey, cocoa-nuts, and <i>archa</i>
+or <i>areka</i>. This is a fruit about the size of a nutmeg,
+which is chewed in all the Indies, and even beyond them, along
+with the leaf of a plant resembling ivy called <i>betel</i>. The
+nut is wrapped up in a leaf of the betel along with some lime
+made of oyster shells, and through all the Indies they spend a
+great deal of money; on this composition, which they use daily, a
+thing I could not have believed if I had not seen it continually
+practised. A great revenue is drawn from this herb, as it pays
+custom. When they chew this in their mouths, it makes their
+spittle as red as blood, and it is said to produce a good
+appetite and a sweet breath; but in my opinion, they eat it
+rather to satisfy their filthy lusts, for this herb is moist and
+hot, and causes a strong expulsion.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 141: This must be Barcelore, and ought to
+have been named before Managalore, as above 50 miles to the
+north, between Goa and Managalore.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 142: This passage ought to have stood thus
+"The fort of Cananore belonging to the Portuguese, only a
+musket-shot from the city of that name, the capital of"
+&amp;c.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From Cananore you go Cranganore, which is a small fort of the
+Portuguese in the country of the king of Cranganore, another king
+of the Gentiles. This is a country of small importance of about a
+hundred miles extent, full of thieves, subject to the king of
+Calicut, who is another king of the Gentiles and a great enemy to
+the Portuguese, with whom he is continually engaged in war. This
+country is a receptacle of foreign thieves, and especially of
+those Moors called <i>Carposa</i>, on account of their wearing
+long red caps. These thieves divide the spoil they get with the
+king of Calicut, who gives them leave to go a-roving; so that
+there are so many thieves all along this coast, that there is no
+sailing in those seas except in large ships well armed, or under
+convoy of Portuguese ships of war. From Cranganore to Cochin is
+15 miles[143].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 143: The direct distance is twenty
+geographical miles.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION IX.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of Cochin.</i></p>
+
+<p>Cochin, next to Goa, is the chief place in India belonging to
+the Portuguese, and has a great trade in spices, drugs, and all
+other kinds of merchandise for Portugal. Inland from that place
+is the pepper country, which pepper is loaded by the Portuguese
+in bulk not in sacks. The pepper which is sent to Portugal is not
+so good as that which goes up the Red Sea; because in times past
+the officers of the king of Portugal made a contract with the
+king of Cochin for all the pepper, to be delivered at a fixed
+price, which is very low; and for which reason the country people
+deliver it to the Portuguese unripe and full of dirt. As the
+Moors of Mecca give a better price, they get it clean and dry and
+in much better condition; but all the spices and drugs which they
+carry to Mecca and the Red Sea are contraband and stolen or
+smuggled. There are two cities at Cochin, one of which belongs to
+the Portuguese and the other to the native king; that of the
+Portuguese being nearer the sea, while the native city is a mile
+and a half farther up the same river. They are both on the banks
+of the same large river, which comes from the mountains in the
+pepper country[144], in which are many Christians of the order of
+St Thomas. The king of Cochin is a Gentile and a steadfast friend
+to the king of Portugal, and to all the Portuguese who are
+married and have become citizens of Cochin. By the name of
+Portuguese, all the Christians are known in India who come from
+Europe, whether they be Italians, Frenchmen, or Germans. All
+those who marry and settle at Cochin get some office according to
+the trades they are off, by which they have great privileges. The
+two principal commodities in which they deal are silk which comes
+in great quantities from China, and large quantities of sugar,
+which comes from Bengal. The married citizens pay no customs for
+these two commodities; but pay 4s. per centum for all other goods
+to the king of Cochin, rating their own goods almost at their own
+valuation. Those who are not married pay to the king of Portugal
+8s. per centum for all kinds of commodities. While I was in
+Cochin, the viceroy used his endeavours to break the privileges
+of these married citizens, that they might pay the same rates of
+customs with others. On this occasion the citizens were glad to
+weigh their pepper in the night to evade the customs. When this
+came to the knowledge of the king of Cochin, he put a stop to the
+delivery of pepper, so that the viceroy was glad to allow the
+merchants to do as formerly.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 144: In the version of Cesar Frederick in
+Hakluyt, it is said "to come from the mountains of the king of
+the pepper country, who is a Gentile, and in whose dominions
+there are many Christians," &amp;c. as in the text. This king of
+the pepper country is probably meant for the rajah of Travancore.
+The great river of the text is merely a sound, which reaches
+along the coast from Cochin to beyond Coulan, a distance of above
+90 miles, forming a long range of low islands on the sea-coast,
+and receiving numerous small rivers from the southern
+gauts.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The king of Cochin has small power in comparison with the
+other sovereigns of India as he is unable to send above 70,000
+men into the field. He has a great number of gentlemen, some of
+whom are called <i>Amochi</i>[145] and others <i>Nairs</i>. These
+two sorts of men do not value their lives in any thing which
+tends to the honour of their king, and will run freely into any
+danger in his service, even if sure to lose their lives in the
+attempt. These men go naked from the waist upwards, and
+barefooted, having only a cloth wrapped about their thighs. Their
+hair is long and rolled up on the top of their heads, and they go
+always armed, carrying bucklers and naked swords. The Nairs have
+their wives in common among themselves, and when any of them goes
+into the house of one of these women, he leaves his sword and
+buckler at the door, and while he is within no other dare enter
+the house. The king's children never inherit the kingdom after
+their fathers, lest perchance they may have been begotten by some
+other man; wherefore the son of the king's sisters, or of some
+female of the royal-blood succeeds, that they may be sure of
+having a king of the royal family. Those Naires and their wives
+have great holes in their ears by way of ornament, so large and
+wide as is hardly credible, holding that the larger these holes
+are, so much the more noble are they. I had leave from one of
+them to measure the circumference of the hole in one of his ears
+with a thread; and within that circumference I put my arm up to
+the shoulder with my clothes on, so that in fact they are
+monstrously large. This is begun when they are very young, at
+which time a hole is made in each ear, to which they hang a piece
+of gold or a lump of lead, putting a certain leaf into the hole
+which causes the hole to increase prodigiously. They load ships
+at Cochin both for Portugal and Ormuz: but all the pepper that is
+carried to Ormuz is smuggled. Cinnamon and all other spices and
+drugs are permitted to be exported to Ormuz or Cambaia, as
+likewise all other kinds of merchandise from other parts of
+India. From Cochin there are sent yearly to Portugal great
+quantities of pepper, dry and preserved ginger, wild cinnamon,
+areka nuts and large store of cordage made of <i>cayro</i>, that
+is from the bark of the cocoa-nut tree, which is reckoned better
+than that made of hemp. The ships for Portugal depart every
+season between the 5th of December and the 5th of January.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 145: On former occasions these
+<i>amochi</i> have been explained as devoted naires, under a vow
+to revenge the death of their sovereign.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From Cochin I went to Coulan, at which is a small fort
+belonging to the Portuguese, 72 miles from Cochin. This is a
+place of small trade, as every year a ship gets only half a
+lading of pepper here, and then goes to Cochin to be filled up.
+From Cochin to Cape Comorin is 72 miles, and here ends the Indian
+coast. Along this coast, and also at Cape Comorin, and down to
+the low lands of <i>Chialon</i>[146], which is about 200 miles,
+there are great numbers of the natives converted to the Christian
+faith, and among them are many churches of the order of St Paul,
+the friars of which order do much good in these places, and take
+great pains to instruct the natives in the Christian faith.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 146: These geographical notices are
+inexplicable, unless by <i>Chialon</i> is meant the low or
+maritime parts of Ceylon, which Cesar Frederick afterwards calls
+Zeilan.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION X.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of the Pearl Fishery in the Gulf of Manaar</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The men along the coast which extends from Cape Comorin to the
+low land of <i>Chioal</i>[147], and the island of <i>Zeilan</i>
+or Ceylon, is called the pearl-fishery. This fishery is made
+every year, beginning in March or April, and lasts fifty days.
+The fishery is by no means made every year at one place, but one
+year at one place, and another year at another place; all however
+in the same sea. When the fishing season approaches, some good
+divers are sent to discover where the greatest quantities of
+oysters are to be found under water; and then directly facing
+that place which is chosen for the fishery, a village with a
+number of houses, and a bazar all of stone, is built, which
+stands as long as the fishery lasts, and is amply supplied with
+all necessaries. Sometimes it happens near places already
+inhabited, and at other times at a distance from any habitations.
+The fishers or divers are all Christians of the country, and all
+are permitted to engage in this fishery, on payment of certain
+duties to the king of Portugal, and to the churches of the friars
+of St Paul on that coast. Happening to be there one year in my
+peregrinations, I saw the order used in fishing, which is as
+follows.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 147: This word is unintelligible, having no
+similar name in modern geography. From the context, it seems to
+signify the maritime coast of Tinnevelly and Marwar, or the most
+southern part of the Carnatic, opposite to Ceylon; and may
+possibly be that called <i>Chialon</i> immediately
+before--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>During the continuance of the fishery, there are always three
+or four armed foists or galliots stationed to defend the
+fishermen from pirates. Usually the fishing-boats unite in
+companies of three or four together. These boats resemble our
+pilot boats at Venice, but are somewhat smaller, having seven or
+eight men in each. I have seen of a morning a great number of
+these boats go out to fish, anchoring in 15 or 18 fathoms water,
+which it the ordinary depth all along this coast. When at anchor,
+they cast a rope into the sea, having a great stone at one end.
+Then a man, having his ears well stopped, and his body anointed
+with oil, and a basket hanging to his neck or under his left arm,
+goes down to the bottom of the sea along the rope, and fills his
+basket with oysters as fast as he can. When that is full, he
+shakes the rope, and his companions draw him up with the basket.
+The divers follow each other in succession in this manner, till
+the boat is loaded with oysters, and they return at evening to
+the fishing village. Then each boat or company makes their heap
+of oysters at some distance from each other, so that a long row
+of great heaps of oysters are seen piled along the shore. These
+are not touched till the fishing is over, when each company sits
+down beside its own heap, and fails to opening the oysters, which
+is now easy, as the fish within are all dead and dry. If every
+oyster had pearls in them, it would be a profitable occupation,
+but there are many which have none. There are certain persons
+called <i>Chitini</i>, who are learned in pearls, and are
+employed to sort and value them, according to their weight,
+beauty, and goodness, dividing them into four sorts. The
+<i>first</i> sort, which are round, are named <i>aia</i> of
+Portugal, as they are bought by the Portuguese: The
+<i>second</i>, which are not round, are named <i>aia</i> of
+Bengal: The <i>third</i>, which are inferior to the second, are
+called <i>aia</i> of Canara, which is the name of the kingdom of
+Bijanagur or Narsinga, into which they are sold: And the
+<i>fourth</i>, or lowest kind, is called <i>aia</i> of Cambaia,
+being sold into that country[148]. Thus sorted, and prices
+affixed to each, there are merchants from all countries ready
+with their money, so that in a few days all the pearls are bought
+up, according to their goodness and weight.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 148: Pearls are weighed by <i>carats</i>,
+each of which is four grains. The men who sort and price them
+have a copper instrument with holes of various sizes, by which
+they estimate their several
+values.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In this sea of the pearl-fishery there is an island called
+<i>Manaar</i>, over-against Ceylon, inhabited by Christians who
+were formerly Gentiles, and in which island there is a small fort
+belonging to the Portuguese. Between this island and Ceylon there
+is a narrow channel with a small depth of water, through which
+only small ships can pass at the full and change of the moon,
+when the tides are high, and even then they must put their
+cargoes into lighters to enable them to pass the shoals, after
+which they take in their goods again, and proceed on their
+voyage. But large ships going for the eastern coast of India pass
+by the coast of Coromandel, on the other side of this gulf,
+beside the land of <i>Chilao</i>[149], which is between the firm
+land and the isle of Manaar. On this voyage ships are sometimes
+lost, but they are empty, as ships going this way discharge their
+cargoes at <i>Periapatam</i> into small flat-bottomed boats named
+<i>Tane</i>, which can run over any shoal without danger, as they
+always wait at Periapatam for fine weather. On departing from
+Periapatam, the small ships and flat-bottomed boats go always
+together, and on arriving at the shoals about thirty-six miles
+from that place, they are forced through by the winds, which
+always blow so forcibly that they have no means of taking shelter
+during the passage. The flat boats go through safely; but if the
+small ships happen to miss the proper channel, they get fast on
+the shoals, by which many of them are lost. In coming back from
+the Indies, instead of this passage, they take the channel of
+Manaar, which has an ouze bottom, so that even in case of
+grounding they are generally got off again without damage. The
+reason of not using this passage on the outward voyage is, that
+the prevailing winds between Ceylon and Manaar frequently
+occasion that channel to have so little water that it cannot be
+navigated. From Cape Comorin to the island of Ceylon, the
+distance is 120 miles.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 149: By this account of the matter, the
+land of <i>Chilao</i> appears to be the island of Ramiseram,
+between which and the island of Manaar extends a reef of rocks
+called <i>Adams Bridge</i>. The deep channel is between Ramiseram
+and the point of <i>Tanitory</i> on the Coromandel
+coast.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XI.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of the Island of Ceylon</i></p>
+
+<p>In my judgment, the island of Ceylon is a great deal larger
+than Cyprus. On the west side, facing India, is the city of
+Columba, the principal hold of the Portuguese, but without walls
+or enemies. In this city, which has a free port, dwells the
+lawful king of the whole island, who has become a Christian, and
+is maintained by the king of Portugal, having been deprived of
+his kingdom. The heathen king to whom this island formerly
+belonged was named <i>Madoni</i>, who had two sons named
+<i>Barbinas</i> and <i>Ragine</i>. By acquiring the favour of the
+soldiers, the younger son Ragine usurped the kingdom, in
+prejudice of his father and elder brother, and became a great
+warrior. Formerly there were three kingdoms in this island. Those
+were, the kingdom of Cotta, with other dependent or conquered
+provinces: The kingdom of Candy, which had considerable power,
+and was allied to the Portuguese, the king being supposed a
+secret Christian: The third was the kingdom of
+<i>Gianisampatam</i>, or Jafnapatam. During thirteen years that
+<i>Ragine</i> ruled over this island, he became a great
+tyrant.</p>
+
+<p>The island of Ceylon produces fine cinnamon and abundance of
+pepper, with great quantities of <i>nuts</i> and
+<i>aroche</i>[150]. They here make great quantities of
+<i>cayre</i> of which ropes are manufactured, as formerly
+noticed. It likewise produces great store of that kind of crystal
+called <i>ochi de gati</i> or cats eyes, and it is said to
+produce some rubies; but on my return thither from Pegu, I sold
+some rubies here for a good price, which I had bought in that
+country. Being desirous to see how the cinnamon is gathered from
+the trees, and happening to be there during the season when it is
+gathered, which is in the month of April; at this time the
+Portuguese were in the field making war on the king of the
+country, yet to satisfy my curiosity, I took a guide and went out
+into a wood about three miles from the city, where there grew
+great numbers of cinnamon trees intermixed among other wild
+trees. The cinnamon is a small tree not very high, and has leaves
+resembling those of the bay tree. In March or April, when the sap
+rises, the cinnamon or bark is taken from the trees. They cut the
+bark of the trees round about in lengths, from knot to knot, or
+from joint to joint, both above and below, and then easily strip
+it off with their hands, after which it is laid in the sun to
+dry. Yet for all this the tree does not die, but recovers a new
+bark by the next year. That which is gathered every year is the
+best cinnamon, as what remains upon the trees for two or three
+years becomes thick and coarse, and not so good as the other. In
+these woods there grows much pepper.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 150: The author probably here means
+cocoa-nuts and areka.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of Negapatam.</i></p>
+
+<p>From the island of Ceylon a trade is carried on in small ships
+to Negapatam on the continent, and 72 miles off is a very great
+and populous city, full of Portuguese and native Christians, with
+many Gentiles.[151] Almost the only trade here is for rice and
+cotton cloth, which is carried to various countries. It formerly
+abounded in victuals, on which account many Portuguese resorted
+thither and built houses, as they could live there at small
+expense, but provisions have now become scarcer and dearer. This
+city belongs to a Gentile nobleman of the kingdom of Bijanagur,
+yet the Portuguese and other Christians are well treated, and
+have built churches, together with a monastery of the
+Franciscans. They live with great devotion, and are well
+accommodated with houses; yet are they among tyrants who may
+always do them much harm at their pleasure, as in reality
+happened to them in the year 1565. At that time the <i>nayer</i>
+or lord of the city sent to demand from the citizens certain
+Arabian horses, which they refused; whereupon this lord gave out
+that he proposed to take a view of the sea, so that the poor
+citizens doubted some evil was meant against them by this unusual
+circumstance, dreading that he would plunder the city.
+Accordingly they embarked as fast as they could with all their
+goods and moveables, merchandise, jewels, and money, and put off
+from the shore. But to their great misfortune, a great storm
+arose next night, by which all their ships were driven on shore
+and wrecked, and all their goods which came to land were seized
+by the troops of this great lord, who had come down with his army
+to see the sea.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 151: It is not easy to say whether the
+author means to express that Negapatam is this great city 72
+miles from Ceylon, or if he refers to another city 72 miles from
+Negapatam.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XIII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of Saint Thome and other places.</i></p>
+
+<p>Following my voyage from Negapatam 150 miles towards the east,
+I came to the house of the blessed apostle St Thomas[152], which
+is a church held in great devotion, and is even much reverenced
+by the Gentiles, for the great miracles which they have heard
+were performed by that holy apostle. Near to this church the
+Portuguese have built a city, which stands in the country that is
+subject to the king of Bijanagur. Though not large, this city, in
+my judgment, is the handsomest in all that part of India, having
+many good houses with fine gardens in the environs. The streets
+are large and in straight lines, with many well frequented
+churches; and the houses are built contiguous, each having a
+small door, so that every house is sufficiently defensible by the
+Portuguese against the natives. The Portuguese have no other
+property here beyond their houses and gardens, as the
+sovereignty, together with the customs on trade, belong to the
+king of Bijanagur. These customs are small and easy, and the
+country is very rich and has great trade. Every year there come
+to this port two or three very large and rich ships, besides many
+other small ships. One of these great ships goes to Pegu and the
+other to Malacca, laden with fine <i>bumbast</i> or cotton cloth
+of all kinds, many of them being beautifully painted, and as it
+were <i>gilded</i> with various colours, which grow the livelier
+the oftener they are washed. There is also other cotton cloth
+that is woven of divers colours and is of great value. They also
+make at St Thome a great quantity of red yarn, dyed with a root
+called <i>saia</i>, which never fades in its colour, but grows
+the redder the oftener it is washed. Most of this red yarn is
+sent to Pegu, where it is woven into cloth according to their own
+fashion, and at less cost than can be done at St Thome.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 152: St Thome, about 5 miles south from
+Madras, is about 160 English miles nearly north from
+Negapatam.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The shipping and landing of men and merchandise at St Thome is
+very wonderful to those who have not seen it before. The place is
+so dangerous that ordinary small barks or ships boats cannot be
+used, as these would be beaten to pieces; but they have certain
+high barks made on purpose, which they call <i>Masadie</i> or
+<i>Mussolah</i>, made of small boards sewed together with small
+cords, in which the owners will embark either men or goods. They
+are laden upon dry land, after which the boatmen thrust the
+loaded boat into the stream, when with the utmost speed they
+exert themselves to row her out against the huge waves of the sea
+which continually best on that shore, and so carry them out to
+the ships. In like manner these <i>Masadies</i> are laden at the
+ships with men and merchandise; and when they come near the
+shore, the men leap out into the sea to keep the bark right, that
+she may not cast athwart the shore, and keeping her right stem
+on, the surf of the sea sets her with her lading high and dry on
+the land without hurt or danger. Yet sometimes these boats are
+overset; but there can be but small loss on such occasions, as
+they lade but little at a time. All the goods carried outwards in
+this manner are securely covered with ox hides, to prevent any
+injury from wetting.</p>
+
+<p>In my return voyage in 1566, I went from Goa to Malacca in a
+ship or galleon belonging to the king of Portugal, which was
+bound for Banda to lade nutmegs and mace. From Goa to Malacca it
+is 1800 miles. We passed without the island of Ceylon and went
+through the channel of <i>Nicobar</i>, and then through the
+channel of <i>Sombrero</i>, past the island of Sumatra, called in
+old times <i>Taprobana</i>.[153] Nicobar, off the coast of Pegu,
+consists of a great multitude of islands, many of which are
+inhabited by a wild people. These islands are likewise called
+<i>Andemaon</i> or Andaman.[154] The natives are savages who eat
+each other, and are continually engaged in war, which they carry
+on in small boats, chiefly to make prisoners for their cannibal
+feasts. When by any chance a ship happens to be cast away on
+those islands, as many have been, the men are sure to be slain
+and devoured. These savages have no trade or intercourse with any
+other people, but live entirely on the productions of their own
+islands. In my voyage from Malacca through the channel of
+Sombrero, two boats came off from these islands to our ship laden
+with fruit, such as <i>Mouces</i> which we call Adams apples,
+with fresh cocoa nuts, and another fruit named <i>Inani</i>, much
+like our turnips, but very sweet and good to eat. These people
+could not be prevailed on to come on board our ship, neither
+would they accept payment for their fruit in money, but bartered
+them for old shirts or old trowsers. These rags were let down
+from the ship into their boats by a rope, and when they had
+considered what they were worth in their estimation, they tied as
+much fruit as they thought proper to give in exchange to the
+rope, which they allowed us to hale up. I was told that sometimes
+a man may get a valuable piece of amber for an old shirt.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 153: The Taprobana or Sielendive of the
+ancients certainly was Ceylon, not Sumatra.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 154: The Andaman and Nicobar islands, in
+long. 93&deg; East from Greenwich, reach from the lat. of 6&deg;
+45' to 15&deg; N.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XIV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of the Island of Sumatra and the City of Malacca</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The island of Sumatra is very large and is governed by many
+kings, being divided by many channels through which there is a
+passage[155]. Towards the west end is the kingdom of <i>Assi</i>
+or <i>Acheen</i>, under a Mahometan king who has great military
+power, besides a great number of <i>foists</i>[156] and gallies.
+This kingdom produces large quantities of pepper, besides ginger
+and benzoin. The king is a bitter enemy to the Portuguese, and
+has frequently gone against Malacca, doing great injury to its
+dependent towns, but was always bravely resisted by the citizens,
+with great injury to his camp and navy, done by their artillery
+from the walls and batteries.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 155: This assertion is unintelligible,
+unless the author means to include a number of small islands off
+the coast as belonging to Sumatra.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 156: Foists are described as a kind of
+brigantines, rather larger than half gallies, and much used by
+the Turks and other eastern nations in those days for war.
+<i>Maons</i>, formerly mentioned among the ships of Soliman Pacha
+in the siege of Diu, are said to have been large flat-bottomed
+vessels or hulks, of 700 or 800 tons burden, having sometimes
+<i>seven</i> mizen sails.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Leaving Sumatra on the right hand, I came to Malacca, which is
+a city of wonderful trade in all kinds of merchandise from
+various parts, as all ships frequenting those seas whether large
+or small must stop at Malacca to pay customs, even though they do
+not load or unload any part of their cargoes at that place, just
+as all ships in Europe frequenting the Baltic must do at
+Elsineur. Should any pass under night without paying the dues at
+Malacca, they fall into great danger afterwards, if found any
+where in India without the <i>seal of Malacca</i>, having in that
+case to pay double duties.</p>
+
+<p>I have not gone beyond Malacca during my Indian
+peregrinations. Indeed the trade to the east of Malacca,
+particularly to China and Japan, is not free for all, being
+reserved by the king of Portugal to himself and his nobles, or to
+those who have special leave for this purpose from the king, who
+expects to know what voyages are made from Malacca eastwards. The
+royal voyages from Malacca eastwards are as follow. Every year
+two galleons belonging to the king depart from Malacca, one of
+which is bound for the Moluccas to lade cloves, and the other
+goes to Banda for nutmegs and mace. These two are entirely laden
+on the kings account, and do not take any goods belonging to
+individuals, saving only the privilege of the mariners and
+soldiers. Hence these voyages are not frequented by merchants,
+who would have no means of transporting their return goods, and
+besides the captains of these ships are not permitted to carry
+any merchants thither. There go however to these places some
+small ships belonging to the Moors from the coast of Java, who
+exchange or barter their commodities in the kingdom of Acheen.
+These are mace, cloves, and nutmegs, which are sent from Acheen
+to the Red Sea. The voyages which the king of Portugal grants to
+his nobles, are those from China to Japan and back to China, from
+China to India, and those of Bengal, the Moluccas, and Sunda,
+with fine cloth and all kinds of cotton goods.</p>
+
+<p>Sunda is an island of the Moors near the coast of Java, whence
+pepper is curried to China. The ship which goes yearly from India
+to China is called the <i>drug ship</i>, because she carries
+various drugs of Cambaia, but her principal lading consists of
+silver. From Malacca to China the distance is 1800 miles; and
+from China there goes every year a large ship to Japan laden with
+silk, in return for which she brings back bars of silver which
+are bartered in China for goods. The distance between Japan and
+China is 2400 miles, in which sea there are several islands of no
+great size, in which the friars of St Paul, by the blessing of
+God, have made many Christians <i>like themselves</i>: But from
+these islands the seas have not been fully explored and
+discovered, on account of the great numbers of shoals and sand
+banks [157].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 157: The text in this place it erroneous or
+obscure. The indicated distance between China and Japan is
+enormously exaggerated, and probably ought to have been stated as
+between Malacca and Japan. The undiscovered islands and shoals
+seem to refer to the various islands between Java and Japan, to
+the east and north.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Portuguese have a small city named Macao on an island near
+the coast of China, in which the church and houses are built of
+wood. This is a bishopric, but the customs belong to the king of
+China, and are payable at the city of Canton, two days journey
+and a half from Macao, and a place of great importance. The
+people of China are heathens, and are so fearful and jealous that
+they are unwilling to permit any strangers to enter their
+country. Hence when the Portuguese go there to pay their customs
+and to buy goods, they are not allowed to lodge within the city,
+but are sent out to the suburbs. This country of China, which
+adjoins to great Tartary, is of vast size and importance, as may
+be judged by the rich and precious merchandise which comes from
+thence, than which I believe there are none better or more
+abundant in quantity in all the world besides. In the first place
+it affords great quantities of gold, which is carried thence to
+the Indies made into small plates <i>like little ships</i>, and
+in value 23 <i>carats</i> each[158]; large quantities of fine
+silk, with damasks and taffetas; large quantities of musk and of
+<i>occam</i>[159] in bars, quicksilver, cinabar, camphor,
+porcelain in vessels of divers sorts, painted cloth, and squares,
+and the drug called Chinaroot. Every year two or three large
+ships go from China to India laden with these rich and precious
+commodities. Rhubarb goes from thence over land by way of Persia,
+as there is a caravan every year from Persia to China, which
+takes six months to go there and as long to return. This caravan
+arrives at a place called <i>Lanchin</i>, where the king and his
+court reside. I conversed with a Persian who had been three years
+in that city of <i>Lanchin</i>, and told me that it was a city of
+great size and wealth.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 158: Perhaps the author may have expressed
+<i>of 23 carats fine</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 159: Perhaps the mixed metal called tutenag
+may be here meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The voyages which are under the jurisdiction of the captain of
+Malacca are the following. Every year he sends a small ship to
+Timor to load white sandal wood, the best being to be had in that
+island. He also sends another small ship yearly to Cochin-China
+for aloes wood, which is only to be procured in that country,
+which is on the continent adjoining to China. I could never learn
+in what manner that wood grows, as the people of Cochin-China
+will not allow the Portuguese to go into the land except for wood
+and water, bringing provisions and merchandise and all other
+things they want to their ships in small barks, so that a market
+is held daily on the deck of the ship till she is laden. Another
+ship goes yearly from Malacca for Siam to lade
+<i>Verzino</i>[160]. All these voyages belong exclusively to the
+captain of Malacca, and when he is not disposed to make them on
+his own account he sells them to others.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 160: From another part of this voyage it
+appears that this is some species of seed from which oil was
+expressed.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of the City of Siam</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Siam was the imperial seat of the kingdom of that name and a
+great city, till the year 1567, when it was taken by the king of
+Pegu, who came by land with a prodigious army of 1,400,000 men,
+marching for four months, and besieged Siam for twenty-two
+mouths, during which he lost a vast number of men, and at lost
+won the city. I happened to be in the city of Pegu about six
+months after his departure on this expedition, and saw the
+governors left by him in the command of Pegu send off 500,000
+men, to supply the places of those who were slain in this siege.
+Yet after all he would not have won the place unless for
+treachery, in consequence of which one of the gates was left
+open, through which he forced his way with great trouble into the
+city. When the king of Siam found that he was betrayed and that
+his enemy had gained possession of the city, he poisoned himself.
+His wives and children, and all his nobles that were not slain
+during the siege, were carried captives to Pegu. I was there at
+the return of the king in triumph from this conquest, and his
+entry into Pegu was a goodly sight, especially the vast number of
+elephants laden with gold, silver, and jewels, and carrying the
+noblemen and women who were made captives at Siam.</p>
+
+<p>To return to my voyage. I departed from Malacca in a great
+ship bound for St Thome on the coast of Coromandel, and as at
+that time the captain of Malacca had intelligence that the king
+of Acheen meant to come against Malacca with a great fleet and
+army, he refused to allow any ships to depart. On this account we
+departed from Malacca under night without having made any
+provision of water; and being upwards of 400 persons on board, we
+proposed to have gone to a certain island for water, but by
+contrary winds we were unable to accomplish this, and were driven
+about by the tempests for forty-two days, the mountains of
+<i>Zerzerline</i> near the kingdom of <i>Orissa</i>, 500 miles
+beyond St Thome, being the first land we got sight of. So we came
+to Orissa with many sick, and had lost a great number for want of
+water. The sick generally died in four days illness. For the
+space of a year after, my throat continued sore and hoarse, and I
+could never satisfy my insatiable thirst. I judged the reason of
+this hoarseness to be from the continual use of sippets dipped in
+vinegar and oil, on which I sustained my life for many days. We
+had no scarcity of bread or wine; but the wines of that country
+are so hot that they cannot be drank without water, or they
+produce death. When we began to want water, I saw certain Moors
+who were officers in the ship who sold a small dish of water for
+a ducat, and I have afterwards seen a <i>bar</i> of pepper, which
+is two quintals and a half, offered for a small measure, and it
+could not be had even at that price. I verily believe I must have
+died, together with my slave, whom I had bought at a high price,
+had I not sold him for half his value, that I might save his
+drink to supply my own urgent wants, and save my own life.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVI.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of the Kingdom of Orissa and the River Ganges</i>.</p>
+
+<p>This was a fair and well regulated kingdom, through which a
+man might have travelled with gold in his hand without danger, so
+long as it was governed by its native sovereign who was a
+Gentile, and resided in the city of <i>Catecha</i>[161] six days
+journey inland. This king loved strangers, especially merchants
+who traded in his dominions, insomuch that he took no customs
+from them, neither did he vex them with any grievous impositions,
+only that each ship that came thither paid some small affair in
+proportion to her tonnage. Owing to this good treatment
+twenty-five ships, great and small, used to lade yearly in the
+port of Orissa, mostly with rice and with different kinds of
+white cotton cloths, oil of <i>zerzerline</i> or <i>verzino</i>
+which is made from a seed, and answers well for eating or frying
+fish, lac, long pepper, ginger, dry and candied mirabolans, and
+great store of cloth made from a kind of silk which grows on
+trees requiring no labour or cultivation, as when the <i>bole</i>
+or round pod is grown to the size of an orange, all they have to
+do is to gather it. About sixteen years before this, the Pagan
+king of Orissa was defeated and slain and his kingdom conquered,
+by the king of <i>Patane</i>[162], who was also king of the
+greatest part of Bengal. After the conquest of Orissa, this king
+imposed a duty of 20 per centum on all trade, as had been
+formerly paid in his other dominions. But this king did not enjoy
+his acquisitions long, being soon conquered by another tyrant,
+who was the great Mogul of Delhi, Agra, and Cambaia, against whom
+the king of Patane made very little resistance.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 161: Cuttack, at the head of the Delta of
+the Mahamuddy or Gongah river, in lat. 20&deg; 32' N. lon.
+86&deg; 9' E. is probably here meant, It is only about 45 miles
+from the sea, but might have been six days journey from the port
+where the author took shelter, which probably was
+Balasore.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 162: Probably so called from residing at
+Patna, called Patane in the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Departing from Orissa I went to the harbour of <i>Piqueno</i>
+in Bengal, 170 miles to the east from Orissa. We went in the
+first place along the coast for 54 miles when we entered the
+river Ganges. From the mouth of this river to a place called
+<i>Satagan</i>, where the merchants assemble with their
+commodities, are 100 miles, to which place they row up the river
+along with the flood tide in <i>eighteen</i> hours. This river
+ebbs and flows as it does in the Thames, and when the ebb begins,
+although their barks are light and propelled with oars like
+foists, they cannot row against the ebb tide, but must make fast
+to one of the banks of the river and wait for next flood. These
+boats are called <i>bazaras</i> and <i>patuas</i>, and row as
+well as a galliot or any vessel I have ever seen. At the distance
+of a good tide rowing before reaching <i>Satagan</i> we come to a
+place called <i>Buttor</i>, which ships do not go beyond, as the
+river is very shallow upwards. At <i>Buttore</i> a village is
+constructed every year, in which all the houses and shops are
+made of straw, and have every necessary convenience for the use
+of the merchants. This village continues as long as the ships
+remain there; but when they depart for the Indies, every man goes
+to his plot of houses and sets them on fire. This circumstance
+seemed very strange to me; for as I passed up the river to
+<i>Satagan</i>, I saw this village standing, having a great
+multitude of people with many ships and bazars; and at my return
+along with the captain of the last ship, for whom I tarried, I
+was amazed to see no remains of the village except the appearance
+of the burnt houses, all having been razed and burnt.</p>
+
+<p>Small ships go up to <i>Satagan</i> where they load and unload
+their cargoes. In this port of <i>Satagan</i> twenty-five or
+thirty ships great and small are loaded yearly with rice, cotton
+cloths of various kinds, lac, great quantities of sugar, dried
+and preserved mirabolans, long pepper, oil of <i>Verzino</i>, and
+many other kinds of merchandise. The city of Satagan is tolerably
+handsome as a city of the Moors, abounding in every thing, and
+belonged formerly to the king of <i>Patane</i> or <i>Patna</i>,
+but is now subject to the great Mogul. I was in this kingdom four
+months, where many merchants bought or hired boats for their
+convenience and great advantage, as there is a fair every day in
+one town or city of the country. I also hired a bark and went up
+and down the river in the prosecution of my business, in the
+course of which I saw many strange things.</p>
+
+<p>The kingdom of Bengal has been long under the power of the
+Mahomedans, yet there are many Gentile inhabitants. Wherever I
+speak of Gentiles I am to be understood as signifying idolaters,
+and by Moors I mean the followers of Mahomet. The inhabitants of
+the inland country do greatly worship the river Ganges; for if
+any one is sick, he is brought from the country to the banks of
+the river, where they build for him a cottage of straw, and every
+day they bathe him in the river. Thus many die at the side of the
+Ganges, and after their death they make a heap of boughs and
+sticks on which they lay the dead body and then set the pile on
+fire. When the dead body is half roasted, it is taken from the
+fire, and having an empty jar tied about its neck is thrown into
+the river. I saw this done every night for two months as I passed
+up and down the river in my way to the fairs to purchase
+commodities from the merchants. On account of this practice the
+Portuguese do not drink the water of the Ganges, although it
+appears to the eye much better and clearer than that of the
+Nile.</p>
+
+<p>"Of <i>Satagan, Buttor</i>, and <i>Piqueno</i>, in the kingdom
+of Bengal, no notices are to be found in the best modern maps of
+that country, so that we can only approximate their situation by
+guess. Setting out from what the author calls the port of
+<i>Orissa</i>, which has already been conjectured to be Balasore,
+the author coasted to the river Ganges, at the distance of 54
+miles. This necessarily implies the western branch of the Ganges,
+or <i>Hoogly</i> river, on which the English Indian capital,
+<i>Calcutta</i>, now stands. <i>Satagan</i> is said to have been
+100 miles up the river, which would carry us up almost to the
+city of <i>Sautipoor</i>, which may possibly have been
+<i>Satagan</i>. The two first syllables of the name are almost
+exactly the same, and the final syllable in Sauti<i>poor</i> is a
+Persian word signifying town, which may have been <i>gan</i> in
+some other dialect. The entire distance from <i>Balasore</i>, or
+the port of Orissa, to <i>Piqueno</i> is stated at 170 miles, of
+which 154 have been already accounted for, so that Piqueno must
+have been only about 16 miles above Satagan, and upon the
+Ganges[163]."--ED.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 163: These observations, distinguished by
+inverted commas, are placed in the text, as too long for a
+note.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XVII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Of Tanasserim and other Places</i>.</p>
+
+<p>In continuation of my peregrinations, I sailed from the port
+of <i>Piqueno</i> to Cochin, from whence I went to Malacca, and
+afterwards to Pegu, being 800 miles distant. That voyage is
+ordinarily performed in twenty-five or thirty days; but we were
+four months on the way, and at the end of three months we were
+destitute of provisions. The pilot alleged that, according to the
+latitude by his observation, we could not be far from
+<i>Tanassery</i>, or <i>Tanasserim</i>, a city in the kingdom of
+Pegu. In this he was mistaken, as we found ourselves in the
+middle of many islands and uninhabited rocks, yet some Portuguese
+who were on board affirmed that they knew the land, and could
+even point out where the city of Tanasserim stood. This city
+belongs of right to Siam, and is situated on the side of a great
+river, which comes from the kingdom of Siam. At the month of this
+river there is a village called <i>Mirgim, Merghi</i>, or
+<i>Morgui</i>, at which some ships load every year with
+<i>Verzino</i>, <i>Nypa</i>, and Benzoin, with a few cloves,
+nutmegs, and mace, that come from Siam; but the principal
+merchandise are <i>Verzino</i> and <i>Nypa</i>. This last is an
+excellent wine, which is made from the flower of a tree called
+<i>Nyper</i>. They distil the liquor prepared from the
+<i>Nyper</i>, and make therewith an excellent drink, as clear as
+crystal, which is pleasant to the taste, and still better to the
+stomach, as it has most excellent virtues, insomuch that if a
+person were rotten with the lues, and drinks abundantly of this
+wine, he shall be made whole, as I have seen proved: For when I
+was in Cochin, the nose of a friend of mine began to drop off
+with that disease, on which he was advised by the physicians to
+go to Tanasserim at the season of the new wines, and to drink the
+<i>Nyper</i> wine day and night, as much as he was able. He was
+ordered to use it before being distilled, when it is most
+delicate; for after distillation it become much stronger, and is
+apt to produce drunkenness. He went accordingly, and did as he
+was directed, and I have seen him since perfectly sound and
+well-coloured. It is very cheap in Pegu, where a great quantity
+is made every year; but being in great repute in the Indies, it
+is dear when carried to a distance.</p>
+
+<p>I now return to my unfortunate voyage, where we were among the
+uninhabited rocks and islands far from Tanasserim, and in great
+straits for victuals. From what was said by the pilot and two
+Portuguese, that we were directly opposite the harbour of
+Tanasserim, we determined to go thither in out boat to bring
+provisions, leaving orders to the ship to await our return.
+Accordingly, twenty-eight of us went into the boat, and left the
+ship about noon one day, expecting to get into the harbour before
+night; but, after rowing all that day and the next night, and all
+the ensuing day, we could find no harbour nor any fit place to
+land; for, trusting to the ignorant counsel of the pilot and the
+two Portuguese, we had overshot the harbour and left it behind
+us. In this way we twenty-eight unfortunate persons in the boat
+lost both our ship and the inhabited land, and were reduced to
+the utmost extremity, having no victuals along with us. By the
+good providence of God, one of the mariners in the boat had
+brought a small quantity of rice along with him, intending to
+barter it for some other thing, though the whole was so little
+that three or four men might have eaten it all at one meal. I
+took charge of this small store, engaging, with God's blessing,
+that it should serve to keep us all in life, till it might please
+God to send us to some inhabited place, and when I slept I
+secured it in my bosom, that I might not be robbed of my precious
+deposit. We were nine days rowing along the coast, finding
+nothing but an uninhabited country and desert islands, where even
+grass would have been esteemed a luxury in our miserable state.
+We found indeed some leaves of trees, but so hard that we could
+not chew them. We had wood and water enough, and could only row
+along with the flood tide, as when it ebbed we had to make fast
+our boat to one of the desert islands. On one of these days, it
+pleased God that we discovered a nest or hole, in which were 144
+tortoise eggs, which proved a wonderful help to us, as they were
+as large as hens eggs, covered only by a tender skin, instead of
+a shell. Every day we boiled a kettle full of these eggs, mixing
+a handful of rice among the broth. At the end of nine days, it
+pleased God that we discovered some fishermen in small barks,
+employed in catching fish. We rowed immediately towards them with
+much delight and thankfulness, for never were men more glad than
+we, being so much reduced by famine that we could hardly stand on
+our legs; yet, according to the allotment we had made of our
+rice, we still had as much as would have served four days. The
+first village we came to was in the gulf of <i>Tavay</i>, on the
+coast of Tanasserim, in the dominions of Pegu, where we found
+plenty of provisions; yet for two or three days after our arrival
+none of us could eat much, and most of us were at the point of
+death. From Tavay to <i>Martaban</i>, in the kingdom of Pegu, the
+distance is 72 miles[164]. We loaded our boat at Tavay with
+provisions sufficient for six months, and then went in our boat
+to the city and port of Martaban, in the kingdom of Pegu, and
+arrived there in a short time. But not finding our ship there as
+we hoped, we dispatched two barks in search of her. They found
+her in great calamity at an anchor, with a contrary wind, which
+was exceedingly unfortunate for the people, especially as they
+had been a whole month without a boat, which prevented them from
+making any provision of wood and water. The ship, however,
+arrived safe, by the blessing of God, in the harbour of
+Martaban.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 164: On the coast of Tanasserim, in lat.
+13&deg; N. is an island called <i>Tavay</i>, so that the gulf of
+Tavay in the text was probably in that neighbourhood. Martaban is
+in lat. 16&deg; 40' N. So that the difference of latitude is
+8&deg; 40', and the distance cannot be less than 250
+miles.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XVIII</p>
+
+<p><i>Of Martaban and the Kingdom of Pegu.</i></p>
+
+<p>On our arrival at Martaban we found about ninety Portuguese
+there, including merchants and lower people, who had fallen at
+variance with the governor of the city, because certain vagabond
+Portuguese had slain five <i>falchines,</i> or porters, belonging
+to the king of Pegu. According to the custom of that country,
+when the king of Pegu happens to be at a distance from his
+capital, a caravan, or company of <i>falchines</i>, is dispatched
+every fifteen days, each of them having a basket on his head full
+of fruit or some other delicacy, or clean clothes for the king's
+use. It accordingly happened, about a month after the king of
+Pegu had gone against Siam, with 1,400,000 men, that one of these
+caravans stopt at Martaban, to rest for the night. On this
+occasion a quarrel ensued between them and some Portuguese, which
+ended in blows, and the Portuguese being worsted, returned upon
+the <i>falchines</i> in the night, while they were asleep, and
+cut off five of their heads. There is a law in Pegu, that
+whosoever sheds the blood of a man, shall pay the price of blood
+according to the rank of the person slain: but as these
+<i>falchines</i> were the servants of the king, the governor of
+Martaban durst not do any thing in the matter without the king's
+orders. The king was accordingly informed of the affair, and gave
+orders that the malefactors should be kept in custody till his
+return, when he would duly administer justice, but the captain of
+the Portuguese refused to deliver up these men to the governor,
+and even armed himself and the other Portuguese, marching every
+day about the city, with drums beating and displayed colours, as
+in despite of the governor, who was unable to enforce his
+authority, as the city was almost empty of men, all who were fit
+for war having gone with the vast army against Siam.</p>
+
+<p>We arrived at Martaban in the midst of this difference, and I
+thought it a very strange thing to see the Portuguese behave
+themselves with such insolence in the city of a sovereign prince.
+Being very doubtful of the consequences, I did not think proper
+to land my goods, which I considered in greater safety on board
+ship than on shore. Most part of the goods on board belonged to
+the owner, who was at Malacca; but there were several merchants
+in the ship who had goods, though none of them had to any great
+value, and all of them declared they would not land any of their
+goods unless I landed mine; yet they afterwards neglected my
+advice and example, and landed their goods, all of which were
+accordingly lost. The governor and intendant of the custom-house
+sent for me, and demanded to know why I did not land my goods,
+and pay the duties like the rest; on which I said that I was a
+stranger, only new to the country, and observing so much disorder
+among the Portuguese, I was afraid to lose my goods, which I was
+determined not to bring on shore, unless the governor would
+promise me in the king's name that no harm should come to me or
+my goods, whatever might happen to the Portuguese, with whom I
+had taken no part in the late tumult. As what I said seemed
+reasonable, the governor sent for the <i>Bargits</i>, who are the
+councillors of the city, who engaged, in the name of the king,
+that neither I nor my goods should meet with any injury, and of
+which they made a notarial entry or memorandum. I then sent for
+my goods, and paid the customs, which is ten per centum of the
+value at that port; and for my greater security I hired a house
+for myself and my goods, directly facing the house of the
+governor.</p>
+
+<p>In the sequel, the captain of the Portuguese and all the
+merchants of that nation, were driven out of the city, in which I
+remained, along with twenty-one poor men, who were officers in
+the ship I came in from Malacca. The Gentiles had determined on
+being revenged of the Portuguese for their insolence, but had
+delayed till all the goods were landed from our ship; and the
+very next night there arrived four thousand soldiers from Pegu,
+with some war elephants. Before these made any stir in the city,
+the governor issued orders to all the Portuguese, in case of
+hearing any noise or clamour in the city, not to stir from their
+houses on pain of death. About four hours after sunset, I heard a
+prodigious noise and tumult of men and elephants, who were
+bursting open the doors of the Portuguese warehouses, and
+overturning their houses of wood and straw, in which tumult some
+of the Portuguese were wounded, and one of them slain. Many of
+those who had before boasted of their courage, now fled on board
+some small vessels in the harbour, some of them fleeing naked
+from their beds. That night the Peguers carried all the goods
+belonging to the Portuguese from the suburbs into the city, and
+many of the Portuguese were likewise arrested. After this, the
+Portuguese who had fled to the ships resumed courage, and,
+landing in a body, set fire to the houses in the suburbs, and as
+these were entirely composed of boards covered with straw, and
+the wind blew fresh at the time, the entire suburbs were speedily
+consumed, and half of the city had like to have been destroyed.
+After this exploit, the Portuguese had no hopes of recovering any
+part of their goods, which might amount to the value of 16,000
+ducats, all of which they might assuredly have got back if they
+had not set the town on fire.</p>
+
+<p>Understanding that the late seizure of their goods had been
+done by the sole authority of the governor of Martaban, without
+authority from the king of Pegu, they were sensible of the folly
+of their proceedings in setting the town on fire; yet next
+morning they began to discharge their cannon against the town,
+and continued their cannonade for four days, yet all in vain, as
+their balls were intercepted by the top of a small hill or rising
+ground which intervened, and did no harm to the city. At this
+time the governor arrested the twenty-one Portuguese who were in
+the city, and sent them to a place four miles up the country,
+where they were detained till such time as the other Portuguese
+departed with their ships, after which they were allowed to go
+where they pleased, having no farther harm done them. During all
+these turmoils I remained quietly in my house, under the
+protection of a strong guard appointed by the governor, to
+prevent any one from doing harm to me or my goods. In this manner
+he effectually performed the promise he had made me in the king's
+name; but he would on no account permit me to depart till the
+king returned from Siam to Pegu, which was greatly to my
+hindrance, as I remained twenty-one months under sequestration,
+during all which time I could neither buy nor sell any kind of
+goods whatever. Those commodities which I had brought with me
+were pepper, sandal wood, and porcelain of China. At length, when
+the king came back to Pegu, I made my supplication to him, and
+had liberty to go when and where I pleased. Accordingly, I
+immediately departed from Martaban for Pegu, the capital city of
+the kingdom of that name, being a voyage by sea of three or four
+days. We may likewise go by land between these two places, but it
+is much better and cheaper for anyone that has goods to
+transport, as I had, to go by sea.</p>
+
+<p>In this short voyage we meet with the <i>Macareo</i>, or
+<i>bore</i> of the sea, which is one of the most marvellous of
+the works of nature, and one of these hardest to be believed if
+not seen. This consists in the prodigious increase and diminution
+of the water of the sea all at one push or instant, and the
+horrible noise and earthquake which this Macareo produces when it
+makes its approach. We went from Martaban in barks like our pilot
+boats, taking the flood tide along with us, and they went with
+the most astonishing rapidity, as swift as an arrow from a bow as
+long as the flow lasts. Whenever the water is at the highest,
+these barks are carried out of the mid-channel to one or other
+bank of the river, where they anchor out of the way of the stream
+of the ebb, remaining dry at low water; and when the ebb is
+completely run out, then are the barks left on high above the
+water in the mid-channel, as far as the top of a house is from
+the foundation. The reason of thus anchoring so far from the
+mid-stream or channel is, that when the first of the flood,
+Macareo or bore, comes in, any ship or vessel riding in the fair
+way or mid-channel would surely be overthrown and destroyed. And
+even with this precaution of anchoring so far above the channel,
+so that the bore has lost much of its force before rising so high
+as to float them, yet they always moor with their bows to the
+stream, which still is often so powerful as to put them in great
+fear; for if the anchor did not hold good, they would be in the
+utmost danger of being lost. When the water begins to increase,
+it comes on with a prodigious noise as if it were an earthquake.
+In its first great approach it makes three great waves. The first
+wave washes over the bark from stem to stem: The second is not so
+strong; at the third they raise the anchor and resume their
+voyage up the river, rowing with such swiftness that they seem to
+fly for the space of six hours, while the flood lasts. In these
+tides there must be no time lost, for if you arrive not at the
+proper station before the flood is spent, you must turn back from
+whence you came, as there is no staying at any place except at
+these stations, some of which are more dangerous than others,
+according as they happen to be higher or lower. On returning from
+Pegu to Martaban they never continue more than half ebb, that
+they may have it in their power to lay their barks high upon the
+bank, for the reason already given. I could never learn any
+reason for the prodigious noise made by the water in this
+extraordinary rise of the tide. There is another Macareo in the
+gulf of Cambay, as formerly mentioned, but it is nothing in
+comparison of this in the river of Pegu.</p>
+
+<p>With the blessing of God we arrived safe at Pegu, which
+consists of two cities, the old and the new, all the merchants of
+the country and stranger merchants residing in the old city, in
+which is far the greatest trade. The city itself is not very
+large, but it has very great suburbs. The houses are all built of
+canes, and covered with leaves or straw; but every merchant has
+one house or magazine, called <i>Godown</i>, built of bricks, in
+which they secure their most valuable commodities, to save them
+from fire, which frequently happens to houses built of such
+combustible materials.</p>
+
+<p>In the new city is the royal palace, in which the king dwells,
+with all his nobles and officers of state, and attendants. While
+I was there the building of the new city was completed. It is of
+considerable size, built perfectly square upon an uniform level,
+and walled round, having a wet ditch on the outside, filled with
+crocodiles, but there are no draw-bridges. Each side of the
+square has five gates, being twenty in all; and there are many
+places on the walls for centinels, built of wood, and gilded over
+with gold. The streets are all perfectly straight, so that from
+any of the gates you can see clear through to the opposite gate,
+and they are so broad that 10 or 12 horsemen may ride abreast
+with ease. The cross streets are all equally broad and straight,
+and on each side of all the streets close to the houses there is
+a row of cocoa-nut trees, making a most agreeable shade. The
+houses are all of wood, covered with a kind of tiles, in the form
+of cups, very necessary and useful in that country. The palace is
+in the middle of the city, walled round like a castle, the
+lodgings within being built of wood, all over gilded, and richly
+adorned with pinnacles of costly work, covered all over with
+gold, so that it may truly be called a king's house. Within the
+gate is a large handsome court, in which are lodges for the
+strongest and largest elephants, which are reserved for the
+king's use, among which are four that are entirely white, a
+rarity that no other king can boast of; and were the king of Pegu
+to hear that any other king had white elephants, he would send
+and demand them as a gift. While I was there two such were
+brought out of a far distant country, which cost me something for
+a sight of them, as the merchants were commanded to go to see
+them, and every one was obliged to give something to the keepers.
+The brokers gave for every merchant half a ducat, which they call
+a <i>tansa</i>, and this produced a considerable sum, as there
+were a great many merchants in the city. After paying the
+<i>tansa</i>, they may either visit the elephants or not as they
+please, as after they are put into the king's stalls, every one
+may see them whenever they will. But before this, every one mast
+go to see them, such being the royal pleasure. Among his other
+titles, this king is called <i>King of the White Elephants</i>;
+and it is reported that if he knew of any other king having any
+white elephants who would not resign them to him, he would hazard
+his whole kingdom to conquer them. These white elephants are so
+highly esteemed that each of them has a house gilded all over,
+and they are served with extraordinary care and attention in
+vessels of gold and silver. Besides these white elephants, there
+is a black one of most extraordinary size, being <i>nine cubits
+high</i>. It is reported that this king has four thousand war
+elephants, all of which have teeth. They are accustomed to put
+upon their uppermost teeth certain sharp spikes of iron, fastened
+on with rings, because these animals fight with their teeth. He
+has also great numbers of young elephants, whose teeth are not
+yet grown.</p>
+
+<p>In this country they have a curious device for hunting or
+taking elephants, which is erected about two miles from the
+capital. At that place there is a fine palace gilded all over,
+within which is a sumptuous court, and all round the outside
+there are a great number of places for people to stand upon to
+see the hunting. Near this place is a very large wood or forest,
+through which a great number of the king's huntsmen ride on the
+backs of female elephants trained on purpose, each huntsman
+having five or six of these females, and it is said that their
+parts are anointed with a certain composition, the smell of which
+so powerfully attracts the wild males that they cannot leave
+them, but follow them wheresoever they go. When the huntsmen find
+any of the wild elephants so entangled, they guide the females
+towards the palace, which is called a <i>tambell</i>, in which
+there is a door which opens and shuts by machinery, before which
+door there is a long straight passage having trees on both sides,
+so that it is very close and dark. When the wild elephant comes
+to this avenue, he thinks himself still in the woods. At the end
+of this avenue there is a large field, and when the hunters have
+enticed their prey into this field, they immediately send notice
+to the city, whence come immediately fifty or sixty horsemen, who
+beset the field all round. Then the females which are bred to
+this business go directly to the entry of the dark avenue, and
+when the wild male elephant has entered therein, the horsemen
+shout aloud and make as much noise as possible to drive the wild
+elephant forward to the gate of the palace, which is then open,
+and as soon as he is gone in, the gate is shut without any noise.
+The hunters, with the female elephants and the wild one, are all
+now within the court of the palace, and the females now withdraw
+one by one from the court, leaving the wild elephant alone,
+finding himself thus alone and entrapped, he is so madly enraged
+for two or three hours, that it is wonderful to behold. He
+weepeth, he flingeth, he runneth, he jostleth, he thrusteth under
+the galleries where the people stand to look at him, endeavouring
+all he can to kill some of them, but the posts and timbers are
+all so strong that he cannot do harm to any one, yet he sometimes
+breaks his teeth in his rage. At length, wearied with violent
+exertions, and all over in a sweat, he thrusts his trunk into his
+mouth, and sucks it full of water from his stomach, which he then
+blows at the lookers on. When he is seen to be much exhausted,
+certain people go into the court, having long sharp-pointed canes
+in their hands, with which they goad him that he may enter into
+one of the stalls made for the purpose in the court, which are
+long and narrow, so that he cannot turn when once in. These men
+must be very wary and agile, for though their canes are long, the
+elephants would kill them if they were not swift to save
+themselves. When they have got him into one of the stalls, they
+let down ropes from a loft above, which they pass under his
+belly, about his neck, and round his legs, to bind him fast, and
+leave him there for four or five days without meat or drink. At
+the end of that time, they loosen all the cords, put one of the
+females in beside him, giving them meat and drink, and in eight
+days after he is quite tame and tractable. In my opinion, there
+is not any animal so intelligent as the elephant, nor of so much
+capacity and understanding, for he will do every thing that his
+keeper desires, and seems to lack nothing of human reason except
+speech.</p>
+
+<p>It is reported that the great military power of the king of
+Pegu mainly depends on his elephants; as, when he goes to battle,
+each elephant has a castle set on his back, bound securely with
+bands under his belly, and in every castle four men are placed,
+who fight securely with arquebusses, bows and arrows, darts, and
+pikes, or other missile weapons; and it is alleged that the skin
+of the elephant is so hard and thick as not to be pierced by the
+ball of an arquebuss, except under the eyes, on the temples, or
+in some other tender part of the body. Besides this, the
+elephants are of great strength, and have a very excellent order
+in time of battle, as I have seen in their festivals, which they
+make every year, which is a rare sight worth mention, that among
+so barbarous a people there should be such goodly discipline as
+they have in their armies; which are drawn up in distinct and
+orderly squares, of elephants, horsemen, pikemen, and
+arquebuseers, the number of which is infinite and beyond
+reckoning; but their armour and weapons are worthless and weak.
+Their pikes are very bad, and their swords worse, being like long
+knives without points; yet their arquebusses are very good, the
+king having 80,000 men armed with that weapon, and the number is
+continually increasing. They are ordained to practise daily in
+shooting at a mark, so that by continual exercise they are
+wonderfully expert. The king of Pegu has also great cannon made
+of very good metal; and, in fine, there is not a king in the
+world who has more power or strength than he, having twenty-six
+crowned kings under his command, and he is able to take the field
+against his enemies with a million and a half of soldiers. The
+state and splendour of this kingdom, and the provisions necessary
+for so vast a multitude of soldiers, is a thing incredible,
+except by those who know the nature and quality of the people and
+government. I have seen with my own eyes these people, both the
+commons and soldiers, feed upon all kinds of beasts or animals,
+however filthy or unclean, everything that hath life serving them
+for food: Yea, I have even seen them eat scorpions and serpents,
+and all kinds of herbs, even grass. Hence, if their vast armies
+can only get enough of water, they can maintain themselves long
+even in the forests, on roots, flowers, and leaves of trees; but
+they always carry rice with them in their marches, which is their
+main support.</p>
+
+<p>The king of Pegu has no naval force; but for extent of
+dominion, number of people, and treasure of gold and silver, he
+far exceeds the Grand Turk in power and riches. He has various
+magazines full of treasure in gold and silver, which is daily
+increased, and is never diminished. He is also lord of the mines
+of rubies, sapphires, and spinels. Near the royal palace there is
+an inestimable treasure, of which he seems to make no account, as
+it stands open to universal inspection. It is contained in a
+large court surrounded by a stone wall, in which are two gates
+that stand continually open. Within this court there are four
+gilded houses covered with lead, in each of which houses are
+certain heathen idols of very great value. The first house
+contains an image of a man of vast size all of gold, having a
+crown of gold on his head enriched with most rare rubies and
+sapphires, and round about him are the images of four little
+children, all likewise of gold. In the second house is the statue
+of a man in massy silver, which seems to sit on heaps of money.
+This enormous idol, though sitting, is as lofty as the roof of a
+house. I measured his feet, which I found exceeded that of my own
+stature; and the head of this statue bears a crown similar to
+that of the former golden image. The third house has a brazen
+image of equal size, having a similar crown on its head. In the
+fourth house is another statue as large as the others, made of
+gansa, or mixed metal of copper and lead, of which the current
+money of the country is composed, and this idol has a crown on
+its head as rich and splendid as the others. All this valuable
+treasure is freely seen by all who please to go in and look at
+it, as the gates are always open, and the keepers do not refuse
+admission to any one.</p>
+
+<p>Every year the king of Pegu makes a public triumph after the
+following manner. He rides out on a triumphal car or great
+waggon, richly gilded all over, and of great height, covered by a
+splendid canopy, and drawn by sixteen horses, richly caparisoned.
+Behind the car walk twenty of his nobles or chief officers, each
+of whom holds the end of a rope, the other end being fastened to
+the car to keep it upright and prevent it from falling over. The
+king sits on high in the middle of the car, and on the same are
+four of his most favoured nobles surrounding him. Before the car
+the whole army marches in order, and the whole nobles of the
+kingdom are round about the car; so that it is wonderful to
+behold so many people and so much riches all in such good order,
+especially considering how barbarous are the people. The king of
+Pegu has one principal wife, who lives in a seraglio along with
+300 concubines, and he is said to have 90 children. He sits every
+day in person to hear the suits of his people, yet he nor they
+never speak together. The king sits up aloft on a high seat or
+tribunal in a great hall, and lower down sit all his barons round
+about. Those that demand audience enter into the great court or
+hall in presence of the king, and sit down on the ground at forty
+paces from the king, holding their supplications in their hands,
+written on the leaves of a tree three quarters of a yard long and
+two fingers broad, on which the letters are written or inscribed
+by means of a sharp stile or pointed iron. On these occasions
+there is no respect of persons, all of every degree or quality
+being equally admitted to audience. All suitors hold up their
+supplication in writing, and in their hands a present or gift,
+according to the importance of their affairs. Then come the
+secretaries, who take the supplications from the petitioners and
+read them to the king; and if he thinks good to grant the favour
+or justice which they desire, he commands to have the gifts taken
+from their hands; but if he considers their request not just or
+reasonable, he commands them to depart without receiving their
+presents.</p>
+
+<p>There is no commodity in the Indies worth bringing to Pegu,
+except sometimes the opium of Cambay, and if any one bring money
+he is sure to lose by it. The only merchandise for this market is
+the fine painted calicos of San Thome, of that kind which, on
+being washed, becomes more lively in its colours. This is so much
+in request, that a small bale of it will sell for 1000 or even
+2000 ducats. Also from San Thome they send great store of cotton
+yarn, dyed red by means of a root called <i>saia</i>, which
+colour never washes out. Every year there goes a great ship from
+San Thome to Pegu laden with a valuable cargo of these
+commodities. If this ship depart from San Thome by the 6th of
+September, the voyage is sure to be prosperous; but if they delay
+sailing till the 12th, it is a great chance if they are not
+forced to return; for in these parts the winds blow firmly for
+certain times, so as to sail for Pegu with the wind astern; and
+if they arrive not and get to anchor before the wind change, they
+must perforce return back again, as the wind blows three or four
+months with great force always one way. If they once get to
+anchor on the coast, they may save their voyage with great
+labour. There also goes a large ship from Bengal every year,
+laden with all kinds of fine cotton cloth, and which usually
+arrives in the river of Pegu when the ship of San Thome is about
+to depart. The harbour which these two ships go to is called
+<i>Cosmin</i>. From Malacca there go every year to Martaban,
+which is a port of Pegu, many ships, both large and small, with
+pepper, sandal-wood, porcelain of China, camphor,
+<i>bruneo</i>[165], and other commodities. The ships that come
+from the Red Sea frequent the ports of Pegu and Ciriam, bringing
+woollen cloths, scarlets, velvets, opium, and chequins, by which
+last they incur loss, yet they necessarily bring them wherewith
+to make their purchases, and they afterwards make great profit of
+the commodities which they take back with them, from Pegu.
+Likewise the ships of the king of Acheen bring pepper to the same
+ports.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 165: Perhaps we ought to read in the text
+<i>camphor of Perneo</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From San Thome or Bengal, <i>out of the sea of Bara</i>? to
+Pegu, the voyage is 300 miles, and they go up the river, with the
+tide of flood in four days to the city of <i>Cosmin</i>, where
+they discharge their cargoes, and thither the <i>customers</i> of
+Pegu come and take notes of all the goods of every one, and of
+their several marks; after which they transport the goods to Pegu
+to the royal warehouses, where the customs of all the goods are
+taken. When the <i>customers</i> have taken charge of the goods,
+and laden them in barks for conveyance to Pegu, the governor of
+the city gives licences to the merchants to accompany their
+goods, when three or four of them club together to hire a bark
+for their passage to Pegu. Should any one attempt to give in a
+wrong note or entry of his goods, for the purpose of stealing any
+custom, he is utterly undone, as the king considers it a most
+unpardonable offence to attempt depriving him of any part of his
+customs, and for this reason the goods are all most scrupulously
+searched, and examined three several times. This search is
+particularly rigid in regard to diamonds, pearls, and other
+articles of small bulk and great value, as all things, in Pegu
+that are not of its own productions pay custom both in or out.
+But rubies, sapphires, and spinels, being productions of the
+country, pay no duties. As formerly mentioned respecting other
+parts of India, all merchants going to Pegu or other places, must
+carry with them all sorts of household furniture of which they
+may be in need, as there are no inns or lodging-houses in which
+they can he accommodated, but every man must hire a house when he
+comes to a city, for a month or a year, according to the time he
+means to remain. In Pegu it is customary to hire a house for six
+months.</p>
+
+<p>From Cosmin to Pegu they go up the river with the flood in six
+hours[166]; but if the tide of ebb begin it is necessary to
+fasten the bark to the river side, and to remain there till the
+next flood. This is a commodious and pleasant passage, as there
+are many large villages on both sides of the river which might
+even be called cities, and in which poultry, eggs, pigeons, milk,
+rice, and other things may be had on very reasonable terms. The
+country is all level and fertile, and in eight days we get up to
+<i>Macceo</i> which is twelve miles from. Pegu, and the goods are
+there landed from the barks, being carried thence to Pegu in
+carts or wains drawn by oxen. The merchants are conveyed from
+<i>Macceo</i> to Pegu in close palanquins, called <i>delings</i>
+or <i>doolies</i>, in each of which one man is well accommodated,
+having cushions to rest upon, and a secure covering from the sun
+or rain, so that he may sleep if he will. His four
+<i>falchines</i> or bearers carry him along at a great rate,
+running all the way, changing at intervals, two and two at a
+time. The freight and customs at Pegu may amount to 20, 22, or 23
+per centum, according as there may be more or less stolen of the
+goods on paying the customs. It is necessary therefore for one to
+be very watchful and to have many friends; for when the goods are
+examined for the customs in the great hall of the king, many of
+the Pegu gentlemen go in accompanied by their slaves, and these
+gentlemen are not ashamed when their slaves rob strangers,
+whether of cloth or any other thing, and only laugh at it when
+detected; and though the merchants assist each other to watch the
+safety of their goods, they cannot look so narrowly but some will
+steal more or less according to the nature or quality of the
+goods. Even if fortunate enough to escape being robbed by the
+slaves, it is impossible to prevent pilfering by the officers of
+the customs; for as they take the customs in kind, they
+oftentimes take the best, and do not rate each sort as they ought
+separately, so that the merchant is often, made to pay much more
+than he ought. After undergoing this search and deduction of the
+customs, the merchant causes his goods to be carried home to his
+house, where he may do with them what he pleases.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 166: From subsequent circumstances the text
+is obviously here incorrect, and ought to have been translated,
+that the flood tides run six hours; as it will be afterwards seen
+that the voyage to a place 12 miles short of Pegu requires eight
+days of these tide trips of six]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In Pegu there are eight brokers licenced by the king, named
+<i>tareghe</i>, who are bound to sell all the merchandise which
+comes there at the current prices; and if the merchants are
+willing to sell their goods at these rates they sell them out of
+hand, the brokers having <i>two per centum</i> for their trouble,
+and for which they are bound to make good all debts incurred for
+the goods sold by them, and often the merchant does not know to
+whom his goods are sold. The merchants may indeed sell their own
+goods if they will; but in that case the broker is equally
+intitled to his two per centum, and the merchant must run his own
+risk of recovering his money. This however seldom happens, as the
+wife, children, and slaves of the debtor are all liable in
+payment. When the agreed time of payment arrives, if the debt is
+not cleared, the creditor may seize the person of the debtor and
+carry him home to his house, and if not immediately satisfied, he
+may take the wife, children, and slaves of the debtor and sell
+them. The current money through all Pegu is made of <i>ganza</i>,
+which is a composition of copper and lead, and which every one
+may stamp at his pleasure, as they pass by weight; yet are they
+sometimes falsified by putting in too much lead, on which
+occasions no one will receive them in payment. As there is no
+other money current, you may purchase gold, silver, rubies, musk,
+and all other things with this money. Gold and silver, like other
+commodities, vary in their price, being sometimes cheaper and
+sometimes dearer. This <i>ganza</i> money is reckoned by
+<i>byzas</i>, each <i>byza</i> being 100 <i>ganzas</i>, and is
+worth about half a ducat of our money, more or less according as
+gold is cheap or dear.</p>
+
+<p>When any one goes to Pegu to buy jewels, he will do well to
+remain there a whole year; for if he would return by the same
+ship, he can do very little to purpose in so short a time. Those
+who come from San Thome usually have their goods customed about
+Christmas, after which they must sell their goods, giving credit
+for a month or two, and the ships depart about the beginning of
+March. The merchants of San Thome generally take payment for
+their goods in gold and silver, which are always plentiful in
+Pegu. Eight or ten days before their departure they are satisfied
+for their goods. They may indeed have rubies in payment, but they
+make no account of them. Such as propose to winter in the country
+ought to stipulate in selling their goods for payment in two or
+three months, and that they are to be paid in so many
+<i>ganzas</i>, not in gold or silver, as every thing is most
+advantageously bought and sold by means of this <i>ganza</i>
+money. It is needful to specify very precisely both the time of
+payment, and in what weight of ganzas they are to be paid, as an
+inexperienced person may be much imposed upon both in the weight
+and fineness of the <i>ganza</i> money; for the weight rises and
+falls greatly from place to place, and he may be likewise
+deceived by false <i>ganzas</i> or too much alloyed with lead.
+For this reason, when any one is to receive payment he ought to
+have along with him a public weigher of money, engaged a day or
+two before he commences that business, whom he pays two
+<i>byzas</i> a-month, for which he is bound to make good all your
+money and to maintain it good, as he receives it and seals the
+bags with his own seal, and when he has collected any
+considerable sum he causes it to be delivered to the merchant to
+whom it belongs. This money is very weighty, as forty
+<i>byzas</i> make a porters burden. As in receiving, so in paying
+money, a public weigher of money must be employed.</p>
+
+<p>The merchandises exported from Pegu are gold, silver, rubies,
+sapphires, spinels, great quantities of benzoin, long-pepper,
+lead, lac, rice, wine, and some sugar. There might be large
+quantities of sugar made in Pegu, as they have great abundance of
+sugar-canes, but they are given as food to the elephants, and the
+people consume large quantities of them in their diet. They
+likewise spend many of these sugar-canes[167] in constructing
+houses and tents for their idols, which they call <i>varely</i>
+and we name pagodas. There are many of these idol houses, both
+large and small, which are ordinarily constructed in a
+pyramidical form, like little hills, sugar-loaves or bells, some
+of them being as high as an ordinary steeple. They are very large
+at the bottom, some being a quarter of a mile in compass. The
+inside of these temples are all built of bricks laid in clay
+mortar instead of lime, and filled up with earth, without any
+form or comeliness from top to bottom; afterwards they are
+covered with a frame of canes plastered all over with lime to
+preserve them from the great rains which fall in this country.
+Also about these <i>varely</i> or idol-houses they consume a
+prodigious quantity of leaf gold, as all their roofs are gilded
+over, and sometimes the entire structure is covered from top to
+bottom; and as they require to be newly gilded every ten years, a
+prodigious quantity of gold is wasted on this vanity, which
+occasions gold to be vastly dearer in Pegu than it would be
+otherwise.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 167: This is certainly an error, and Cesar
+Frederick has mistaken the bamboo cane used in such erections for
+the sugar-cane.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It may be proper to mention, that in buying jewels or precious
+stones in Pegu, he who has no knowledge or experience is sure to
+get as good and as cheap articles as the most experienced in the
+trade. There are four men at Pegu called <i>tareghe</i> or
+jewel-brokers, who have all the jewels or rubies in their hands;
+and when any person wants to make a purchase he goes to one of
+these brokers, and tells him that he wants to lay out so much
+money on rubies; for these brokers have such prodigious
+quantities always on hand, that they know not what to do with
+them, and therefore sell them at a very low price. Then the
+broker carries the merchant along with him to one of their shops,
+where he may have what jewels he wants according to the sum of
+money he is disposed to lay out. According to the custom of the
+city, when the merchant has bargained for a quantity of jewels,
+whatever may be the amount of their value, he is allowed to carry
+them home to his house, where he may consider them for two or
+three days; and if he have not himself sufficient knowledge or
+experience in such things, he may always find other merchants who
+are experienced, with whom he may confer and take counsel, as he
+is at liberty to shew them to any person be pleases; and if he
+find that he has not laid out his money to advantage, he may
+return them back to the person from whom he had them without loss
+or deduction. It is reckoned so great a shame to the
+<i>tareghe</i> or jewel-broker to have his jewels returned, that
+he would rather have a blow on the face than have it believed
+that he had sold his jewels too dear and have them returned on
+his hands; for which reason they are sure to give good bargains,
+especially to those who have no experience, that they may not
+lose their credit. When such merchants as are experienced in
+jewels purchase too dear it is their own fault, and is not laid
+to the charge of the brokers; yet it is good to have knowledge in
+jewels, as it may sometimes enable one to procure them at a lower
+price. On the occasions of making these bargains, as there are
+generally many other merchants present at the bargain, the broker
+and the purchaser have their hands under a cloth, and by certain
+signals, made by touching the fingers and nipping the different
+joints, they know what is bidden, what is asked, and what is
+settled, without the lookers-on knowing any thing of the matter,
+although the bargain may be for a thousand or ten thousand
+ducats. This is an admirable institution, as, if the lookers-on
+should understand what is going on, it might occasion
+contention.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIX.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyages of the Author to different parts of India.</i></p>
+
+<p>When I was at Pegu in August 1569, having got a considerable
+profit by my endeavours, I was desirous to return to my own
+country by way of St Thome, but in that case I should have been
+obliged to wait till next March; I was therefore advised to go by
+way of Bengal, for which country there was a ship ready to sail
+to the great harbour of Chittagong, whence there go small ships
+to Cochin in sufficient time to arrive there before the departure
+of the Portuguese ships for Lisbon, in which I was determined to
+return to Europe. I went accordingly on board the Bengal ship;
+but this happened to be the year of the <i>Tyffon</i>, which will
+require some explanation. It is therefore to be understood that
+in India they have, once every ten or twelve years, such
+prodigious storms and tempests as are almost incredible, except
+to such as have seen them, neither do they know with any
+certainty on what years they may be expected, but unfortunate are
+they who happen to be at sea when this tempest or <i>tyffon</i>
+takes place, as few escape the dreadful danger. In this year it
+was our evil fortune to be at sea in one of these terrible
+storms; and well it was for us that our ship was newly
+<i>over-planked</i>, and had no loading save victuals and
+ballast, with some gold and silver for Bengal, as no other
+merchandise is carried to Bengal from Pegu. The tyffon
+accordingly assailed us and lasted three days, carrying away our
+sails, yards, and rudder; and as the ship laboured excessively,
+we cut away our mast, yet she continued to labour more heavily
+than before, so that the sea broke over her every moment, and
+almost filled her with water. For the space of three days and
+three nights, sixty men who were on board did nothing else than
+bale out the water continually, twenty at one place, twenty in
+another, and twenty at a third place; yet during all this storm
+so good was the hull of our ship that she took not in a single
+drop of water at her sides or bottom, all coming in at the
+hatches. Thus driving about at the mercy of the winds and waves,
+we were during the darkness of the third night at about four
+o'clock after sunset cast upon a shoal. When day appeared next
+morning we could see no land on any side of us, so that we knew
+not where we were. It pleased the divine goodness that a great
+wave of the sea came and floated us off from the shoal into deep
+water, upon which we all felt as men reprieved from immediate
+death, as the sea was calm and the water smooth. Casting the lead
+we found twelve fathoms water, and bye and bye we had only six
+fathoms, when we let go a small anchor which still hung at the
+stern, all the others having been lost during the storm. Our
+anchor parted next night, and our ship again grounded, when we
+shored her up the best we could, to prevent her from over-setting
+at the side of ebb.</p>
+
+<p>When it was day, we found our ship high and dry on a
+sand-bank, a full mile from the sea. When the <i>tyffon</i>
+entirely ceased, we discovered an island not far from us, to
+which we walked on the sand, that we might learn where we were.
+We found it inhabited, and in my opinion the most fertile island
+I had ever seen. It is divided into two parts by a channel or
+water-course, which is full at high tides. With much ado we
+brought our ship into that channel; and when the people of the
+island saw our ship, and that we were coming to land, they
+immediately erected a bazar or market-place with shops right
+over-against the ship, to which they brought every kind of
+provisions for our supply, and sold them at wonderfully
+reasonable rates. I bought many salted kine as provision for the
+ship at half a <i>larine</i> each, being all excellent meat and
+very fat, and four wild hogs ready dressed for a larine. The
+larine is worth about twelve shillings and sixpence. Good fat
+hens were bought for a <i>byza</i> each, which does not exceed a
+penny; and yet some of our people said that we were imposed upon,
+as we ought to have got every thing for half the money. We got
+excellent rice at an excessively low price, and indeed every
+article of food was at this place in the most wonderful
+abundance. The name of this island is <i>Sondiva</i> or Sundeep,
+and belongs to the kingdom of Bengal, being 120 miles from
+Chittagong, to which place we were bound. The people are Moors or
+Mahometans, and the king or chief was a very good kind of man for
+a Mahometan; for if he had been a tyrant like others, he might
+have robbed us of all we had, as the Portuguese captain at
+Chittagong was in arms against the native chief of that place,
+and every day there were some persons slain. On receiving this
+intelligence, we were in no small fear for our safety, keeping
+good watch and ward every night, according to the custom of the
+sea; but the governor of the town gave us assurance that we had
+nothing to fear, for although the Portuguese had slain the
+governor or chief at Chittagong, we were not to blame, and indeed
+he every day did us every service and civility in his power,
+which we had no reason to expect, considering that the people of
+Sundeep and those of Chittagong were subjects of the same
+sovereign.</p>
+
+<p>Departing from Sundeep we came to Chittagong, by which time a
+peace or truce had been agreed upon between the Portuguese and
+the chiefs of the city, under condition that the Portuguese
+captain should depart with his ship without any lading. At this
+time there were 18 Portuguese ships of different sizes at that
+port, and the captain being a gentleman and a brave man, was
+contented to depart in this manner, to his material injury,
+rather than hinder so many of his friends and countrymen who were
+there, and likewise because, the season for going to Western
+India was now past. During the night before his departure, every
+ship that was in the port, and had any part of their lading on
+board, transshipped it to this captain to help to lessen his loss
+and bear his charges, in reward for his courteous behaviour on
+this occasion. At this time there came a messenger from the king
+of <i>Rachim</i> or Aracan to this Portuguese captain, saying
+that his master had heard tidings of his great valour and
+prowess, and requesting him to bring his ship to the port of
+Aracan where he would be well received. The captain went thither
+accordingly, and was exceedingly well satisfied with his
+reception.</p>
+
+<p>The kingdom of Aracan is in the mid-way between Bengal and
+Pegu, and the king of Pegu is continually devising means of
+reducing the king of Aracan under subjection, which hitherto he
+has not been able to effect, as he has no maritime force, whereas
+the king of Aracan can arm two hundred galleys or foists; besides
+which he has the command of certain sluices or flood-gates in his
+country, by which he can drown a great part of his country when
+he thinks proper, when at any time the king of Pegu endeavours to
+invade his dominions, by which be cuts off the way by which alone
+the king of Pegu can have access.</p>
+
+<p>From the great port of Chittagong they export for India great
+quantities of rice, large assortments of cotton cloth of all
+sorts, with sugar, corn, money, and other articles of
+merchandise. In consequence of the war in Chittagong, the
+Portuguese ships were so long detained there, that they were
+unable to arrive at Cochin at the usual time; for which reason
+the fleet from Cochin was departed for Portugal before their
+arrival. Being in one of the smaller ships, which was somewhat in
+advance of our fleet from Chittagong, I came in sight of Cochin
+just as the very last of the homeward-bound fleet was under sail.
+This gave me much dissatisfaction, as there would be no
+opportunity of going to Portugal for a whole year; wherefore, on
+my arrival at Cochin, I was fully determined to go for Venice by
+way of Ormuz. At that time Goa was besieged by the troops of
+<i>Dialcan</i> [Adel-khan,] but the citizens made light of this
+attack, as they believed it would not continue long. In the
+prosecution of my design, I embarked at Cochin in a galley bound
+for Goa; but on my arrival there the viceroy would not permit any
+Portuguese ship to sail for Ormuz on account of the war then
+subsisting, so that I was constrained to remain there.</p>
+
+<p>Soon after my arrival at Goa I fell into a severe sickness,
+which held me four months; and as my physic and diet in that time
+cost me 800 ducats, I was under the necessity to sell some part
+of my rubies, for which I only got 500 ducats, though well worth
+1000. When I began to recover my health and strength, very little
+of my money remained, every thing was so scarce and dear. Every
+chicken, and these not good, cost me seven or eight livres, or
+from six shillings to six and eightpence, and all other things in
+proportion; besides which the apothecaries, with their medicines,
+were a heavy charge upon me. At the end of six months the siege
+of Goa was raised, and as jewels rose materially in their price,
+<i>I began to work</i>[168]; and as before I had only sold a
+small quantity of inferior rubies to serve my necessities, I now
+determined to sell all the jewels I had, and to make another
+voyage to Pegu; and as opium was in great request at Pegu when I
+was there before, I went from Goa to Cambay, where I laid out
+2100 ducats in the purchase of 60 parcels of opium, the ducat
+being worth 4s. 2d. I likewise bought three bales of cotton
+cloth, which cost me 800 ducats, that commodity selling well in
+Pegu. When I had bought these things, I understood the viceroy
+had issued orders that the custom on opium should be paid at Goa,
+after which it might be carried anywhere else. I shipped
+therefore my three bales of cotton cloth at Chaul, in a vessel
+bound for Cochin, and went myself to Goa to pay the duty for my
+opium.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 168: From this expression it may be
+inferred, that besides his mercantile speculations in jewels,
+Cesar Frederick was a lapidary.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From Goa I went to Cochin, in a ship that was bound for Pegu,
+and intended to winter at San Thome; but on my arrival at Cochin
+I learnt that the ship with my three bales of cotton cloth was
+cast away, so that I lost my 800 seraphins or ducats. On our
+voyage from Cochin to San Thome, while endeavouring to weather
+the south point of Ceylon, which lies far out to sea, the pilot
+was out in his reckoning, and laying-to in the night, thinking
+that he had passed hard by the Cape of Ceylon; when morning came
+we were far within the Cape, and fallen to leeward, by which it
+became now impossible to weather the island, as the wind was
+strong and contrary. Thus we lost our voyage for the season, and
+we were constrained to go to Manaar to winter there, the ship
+having lost all her masts, and being saved from entire wreck with
+great difficulty. Besides the delay and disappointment to the
+passengers, this was a heavy loss to the captain of the ship, as
+he was under the necessity of hiring another vessel at San Thome
+at a heavy charge, to carry us and our goods to Pegu. My
+companions and I, with all the rest of the merchants, hired a
+bark at Manaar to carry us to San Thome, where I received
+intelligence by way of Bengal, that opium was very scarce and
+dear in Pegu; and as there was no other opium but mine then at
+San Thome, for the Pegu market, all the merchants considered me
+as a very fortunate man, as I would make great profit, which
+indeed I certainly should have done, if my adverse fortune had
+not thwarted my well-grounded expectations, in the following
+manner: A large ship from Cambaya, bound for <i>Assi</i>
+[Acheen?] with a large quantity of opium, and to lade pepper in
+return, being forced to lay-to in crossing the mouth of the bay
+of Bengal, was obliged to go <i>roomer</i>[169] for 800 miles, by
+which means it went to Pegu, and arrived there one day before me.
+Owing to this circumstance, opium, which had been very dear in
+Pegu, fell to a very low price, the quantity which had sold
+before for 50 <i>bizze</i> having fallen to 2-1/2, so large was
+the quantity brought by this ship. Owing to this unfortunate
+circumstance, I was forced to remain two years in Pegu, otherwise
+I must have given away my opium for much less than it cost me,
+and even at the end of that time I only made 1000 ducats by what
+had cost me 2100 in Cambaya.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 169: The meaning of this ancient nautical
+term is here clearly expressed, as drifting to leeward while
+laying-to.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After this I went from Pegu to the Indies[170] and Ormuz, with
+a quantity of <i>lac</i>. From Ormuz I returned to Chaul, and
+thence to Cochin, from which place I went again to Pegu. Once
+more I lost the opportunity of becoming rich, as on this voyage I
+only took a small quantity of opium, while I might have sold a
+large quantity to great advantage, being afraid of meeting a
+similar disappointment with that which happened to me before.
+Being now again resolved to return into my native country, I went
+from Pegu to Cochin, where I wintered, and then sailed for
+Ormuz.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 170: Here, and in various other parts of
+these early voyages, India and the Indies seem confined to the
+western coast of the peninsula, as it is called, or the Malabar
+coast.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XX.</p>
+
+<p><i>Some Account of the Commodities of India</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Before concluding this relation of my peregrinations, it seems
+proper that I should give some account of the productions of
+India.</p>
+
+<p>In all parts of India, both of the western and eastern
+regions, there is pepper and ginger, and in some parts the
+greatest quantity of pepper is found wild in the woods, where it
+grows without any care or cultivation, except the trouble of
+gathering it when ripe. The tree on which the pepper grows is not
+unlike our ivy, and runs in the same manner up to the top of such
+trees as grow in its neighbourhood, for if it were not to get
+hold of some tree it would lie flat on the ground and perish. Its
+flower and berry in all things resemble the ivy, and its berries
+or grains are the pepper, which are green when gathered, but by
+drying in the sun they become black. Ginger requires cultivation,
+and its seeds are sown on land previously tilled. The herb
+resembles that called <i>panizzo</i>, and the root is the spice
+we call ginger. Cloves all come from the Moluccas, where they
+grow in two small islands, Ternate and Tidore, on a tree
+resembling the laurel. Nutmegs and mace come from the island of
+Banda, where they grow together on one tree, which resembles our
+walnut tree, but not so large. Long pepper grows in Bengal, Pegu,
+and Java.</p>
+
+<p>All the good sandal-wood comes from the island of Timor.
+Camphor, being compounded, or having to undergo a preparation,
+comes all from China. That which grows in canes[171] comes from
+Borneo, and I think none of that kind is brought to Europe, as
+they consume large quantities of it in India, and it is there
+very dear. Good aloes wood comes from Cochin-China; and benjamin
+from the kingdoms of <i>Assi</i>, Acheen? and Siam. Musk is
+brought from Tartary, where it is made, as I have been told, in
+the following manner. There is in Tartary a beast as large and
+fierce as a wolf, which they catch alive, and beat to death with
+small staves, that his blood may spread through his whole body.
+This they then cut in pieces, taking out all the bones, and
+having pounded the flesh and blood very fine in a mortar, they
+dry it and put it into purses made of the skin, and these purses
+with their contents are the cods of musk[172].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 171: This is an error, as camphor is a
+species of essential oil, grossly sublimed at first from a tree
+of the laurel family, and afterwards purified by farther
+processes.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 172: The whole of this story is a gross
+fabrication imposed by ignorance on credulity. The cods of musk
+are natural bags or emunctories, found near the genitals on the
+males of an animal named <i>Moschus Moschiferus</i>, or Thibet
+Musk. It is found through the whole of Central Asia, except its
+most northern parts, but the best musk comes from Thibet.--E.
+
+<p>"The Jewes doe counterfeit and take out the halfe of the goode
+muske, beating it up with an equal quantity of the flesh of an
+asse, and put this mixture in the bag or purse, which they sell
+for true muske."--<i>Hackluyt</i>.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p>I know not whereof amber is made[173], and there are divers
+opinions respecting it; but this much is certain, that it is cast
+out from the sea, and is found on the shores and banks left dry
+by the recess of the tides. Rubies, sapphires, and spinells are
+got in Pegu. Diamonds come from different places, and I know but
+three kinds of them. The kind which is called <i>Chiappe</i>
+comes from <i>Bezeneger</i>, Bijanagur? Those that are naturally
+pointed come from the land of Delly and the island of Java, but
+those of Java are heavier than the others. I could never learn
+whence the precious stones called <i>Balassi</i> are procured.
+Pearls are fished for in different places, as has been already
+mentioned. The substance called Spodium, which is found concreted
+in certain canes, is procured in <i>Cambaza</i>, Cambaya? Of this
+concrete I found many pieces in Pegu, when building myself a
+house there, as in that country they construct their houses of
+canes woven together like mats or basket-work, as formerly
+related.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 173: Ambergris is probably meant in the
+text under the name of Amber, as the former came formerly from
+India, while the latter is principally found in the maritime
+parts of Prussia.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Portuguese trade all the way from Chaul along the coast of
+India, and to Melinda in Ethiopia, in the land of Cafraria, on
+which coast are many good ports belonging to the Moors. To these
+the Portuguese carry a very low-priced cotton cloth, and many
+<i>paternosters</i>, or beads made of paultry glass, which are
+manufactured at Chaul; and from thence they carry back to India
+many elephants teeth, slaves, called Kafrs or Caffers, with some
+<i>amber</i> and gold. On this coast the king of Portugal has a
+castle at Mozambique, which is of as great importance as any of
+his fortresses, in the Indies. The captain or governor of this
+castle has certain privileged voyages assigned to him, where only
+his agents may trade. In their dealings with the Kafrs along this
+coast, to which they go in small vessels, their purchases and
+sales are singularly conducted without any conversation or words
+on either side. While sailing along the coast, the Portuguese
+stop in many places, and going on shore they lay down a small
+quantity of their goods, which they leave, going back to the
+ship. Then the Kafr merchant comes to look at the goods, and
+having estimated them in his own way, he puts down as much gold
+as he thinks the goods are worth, leaving both the gold and the
+goods, and then withdraws. If on the return of the Portuguese
+trader he thinks the quantity of gold sufficient, he taketh it
+away and goes back to his ship, after which the Kafr takes away
+the goods, and the transaction is finished. But if he find the
+gold still left, it indicates that the Portuguese merchant is not
+contented with the quantity, and if he thinks proper he adds a
+little more. The Portuguese must not, however, be too strict with
+them, as they are apt to be affronted and to give over traffic,
+being a peevish people. By means of this trade, the Portuguese
+exchange their commodities for gold, which they carry to the
+castle of Mozambique, standing in an island near the Continental
+coast of Cafraria, on the coast of Ethiopia, 2800 miles distant
+from India.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XXI.</p>
+
+<p><i>Return of the Author to Europe</i>.</p>
+
+<p>To return to my voyage. On my arrival at Ormuz, I found there
+M. Francis Berettin of Venice, and we freighted a bark in
+conjunction to carry us to Bussora, for which we paid 70 ducats;
+but as other merchants went along with us, they eased our
+freight. We arrived safely at Bussora, where we tarried 40 days,
+to provide a caravan of boats to go up the river to
+<i>Babylon</i> [Bagdat], as it is very unsafe to go this voyage
+with only two or three barks together, because they cannot
+proceed during the night, and have to make fast to the sides of
+the river, when it is necessary to be vigilant and well provided
+with weapons, both for personal safety and the protection of the
+goods, as there are numerous thieves who lie in wait to rob the
+merchants: Wherefore it is customary and proper always to go in
+fleets of not less than 25 or 30 boats, for mutual protection. In
+going up the river the voyage is generally 38 or 40 days,
+according as the wind happens to be favourable or otherwise, but
+we took 50 days. We remained four months at Babylon, until the
+caravan was ready to pass the desert to Aleppo. In this city six
+European merchants of us consorted together to pass the desert,
+five of whom were Venetians and one a Portuguese. The Venetians
+were <i>Messer Florinasca</i>, and one of his kinsmen, <i>Messer
+Andrea de Polo, Messer Francis Berettin</i>, and I. So we bought
+horses and mules for our own use, which are very cheap there,
+insomuch that I bought a horse for myself for eleven
+<i>akens</i>, and sold him afterwards in Aleppo for 30 ducats. We
+bought likewise a tent, which was of very great convenience and
+comfort to us, and we furnished ourselves with sufficient
+provisions, and beans for the horses, to serve 40 days. We had
+also among us 33 camels laden with merchandise, paying two ducats
+for every camels load, and, according to the custom of the
+country, they furnish 11 camels for every 10 bargained and paid
+for. We likewise had with us three men to serve us during the
+journey, <i>which are used to go for five Dd.</i>[174] a man, and
+are bound to serve for that sum all the way to Aleppo.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 174: Such is the manner in which the hire
+of these servants is expressed in Hakluyt. Perhaps meaning 500
+pence; and as the Venetian <i>sol</i> is about a halfpenny, this
+will amount to about a guinea, but it does not appear whether
+this is the sum for each person, or for all
+three.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>By these precautions we made the journey over the desert
+without any trouble, as, whenever the camels stopt for rest, our
+tent was always the first erected. The caravan makes but small
+journeys of about 20 miles a-day, setting out every morning two
+hours before day, and stopping about two hours after noon. We had
+good fortune on our journey as it rained, so that we were never
+in want of water; yet we always carried one camel load of water
+for our party for whatever might happen in the desert, so that we
+were in no want of any thing whatever that this country affords.
+Among other things we had fresh mutton every day, as we had many
+shepherds along with us taking care of the sheep we had bought at
+Babylon, each merchant having his own marked with a
+distinguishing mark. We gave each shepherd a <i>medin</i>, which
+is twopence of our money, for keeping and feeding our sheep by
+the way, and for killing them; besides which the shepherds got
+the heads, skins, and entrails of all the sheep for themselves.
+We six bought 20 sheep, and 7 of them remained alive when we came
+to Aleppo. While on our journey through the desert, we used to
+lend flesh to each other, so as never to carry any from station
+to station, being repaid next day by those to whom we lent the
+day before.</p>
+
+<p>From Babylon to Aleppo is 40 days journey, of which 36 days
+are through the desert or wilderness, in which neither trees,
+houses, nor inhabitants are anywhere to be seen, being all an
+uniform extended plain or dreary waste, with no object whatever
+to relieve the eye. On the journey, the pilots or guides go
+always in front, followed by the caravan in regular order. When
+the guides stop, all the caravan does the same, and unloads the
+camels, as the guides know where wells are to be found. I have
+said that the caravan takes 36 days to travel across the
+wilderness; besides these, for the two first days after leaving
+Babylon we go past inhabited villages, till such time as we cross
+the Euphrates; and then we have two days journey through among
+inhabited villages before reaching Aleppo. Along with each
+caravan there is a captain, who dispenses justice to all men, and
+every night there is a guard appointed to keep watch for the
+security of the whole. From Aleppo we went to Tripoli, in Syria,
+where M. Florinasca, M. Andrea Polo, and I, with a friar in
+company, hired a bark to carry us towards Jerusalem. We
+accordingly sailed from Tripoli to Jaffa, from which place we
+travelled in a day and a half to Jerusalem, leaving orders that
+the bark should wait for our return. We remained 14 days at
+Jerusalem visiting the holy places, whence we returned to Jaffa,
+and thence back to Tripoli, and there we embarked in a ship
+belonging to Venice, called the Bajazzana; and, by the aid of the
+divine goodness, we safely arrived in Venice on the 5th of
+November 1581.</p>
+
+<p>Should any one incline to travel into those parts of India to
+which I went, let him not be astonished or deterred by the
+troubles, entanglements, and long delays which I underwent, owing
+to my poverty. On leaving Venice, I had 1200 ducats invested in
+merchandise; but while at Tripoli in my way out I fell sick in
+the house of M. Regaly Oratio, who sent away my goods with a
+small caravan to Aleppo. This caravan was robbed, and all my
+goods lost, except four chests of glasses, which cost me 200
+ducats. Even of my glasses many were broken, as the thieves had
+broken up the boxes in hopes of getting goods more suitable for
+their purpose. Even with this small remaining stock I adventured
+to proceed for the Indies, where, by exchange and re-exchange,
+with much patient diligence, and with the blessing of God, I at
+length acquired a respectable stock.</p>
+
+<p>It may be proper to mention, for the sake of others who may
+follow my example, by what means they may secure their goods and
+effects to their heirs, in case of their death. In all the cities
+belonging to the Portuguese in India, there is a house or
+establishment called the school of the <i>Santa Misericordia
+comissaria</i>, the governors of which, on payment of a certain
+fee, take a copy of your testament, which you ought always to
+carry along with you when travelling in the Indies. There always
+goes into the different countries of the Gentiles and Mahometans
+a captain or consul, to administer justice to the Portuguese, and
+other Christians connected with them, and this captain has
+authority to recover the goods of all merchants who chance to die
+on these voyages. Should any of these not have their wills along
+with them, or not have them registered in one of the
+before-mentioned schools, these captains are sure to consume
+their goods in such a way that little or nothing will remain for
+their heirs. There are always also on such voyages some merchants
+who are commissaries of the <i>Sancta Misericardia</i>, who take
+charge of the goods of those who have registered their wills in
+that office, and having sold them the money is remitted to the
+head office of the Misericordia at Lisbon, whence intelligence is
+sent to any part of Christendom whence the deceased may have
+come, so that on the heirs of such persons going to Lisbon with
+satisfactory testimonials, they will receive the full value of
+what was left by their relation. It is to be noted, however, that
+when any merchant happens to die in the kingdom of Pegu,
+one-third of all that belongs to him goes, by ancient law and
+custom, to the king and his officers, but the other two-thirds
+are honourably restored to those having authority to receive
+them. On this account, I have known many rich men who dwelt in
+Pegu, who have desired to go thence into their own country in
+their old age to die there, that they might save the third of
+their property to their heirs, and these have always been allowed
+freely to depart without trouble or molestation.</p>
+
+<p>In Pegu the fashion in dress is uniformly the same for the
+high and low, the rich and the poor, the only difference being in
+the quality or fineness, of the materials, which is cloth of
+cotton, of various qualities. In the first place, they have an
+inner garment of white cotton cloth which serves for a shirt,
+over which they gird another garment of painted cotton cloth of
+fourteen <i>brasses</i> or yards, which is bound or tucked up
+between the legs. On their heads they wear a <i>tuck</i> or
+turban of three yards long, bound round the head somewhat like a
+mitre; but some, instead of this, have a kind of cap like a
+bee-hive, which does not fall below the bottom of the ear. They
+are all barefooted; but the nobles never walk a-foot, being
+carried by men on a seat of some elegance, having a hat made of
+leaves to keep-off the rain and sun; or else they ride on
+horseback, having their bare feet in the stirrups. All women, of
+whatever degree, wear a shift or smock down to the girdle, and
+from thence down to their feet a cloth of three yards long,
+forming a kind of petticoat which is open before, and so strait
+that at every step they shew their legs and more, so that in
+walking they have to hide themselves as it were very imperfectly
+with their hand. It is reported that this was contrived by one of
+the queens of this country, as a means of winning the men from
+certain unnatural practices to which they were unhappily
+addicted. The women go all barefooted like the men, and have
+their arms loaded with hoops of gold adorned with jewels, and
+their fingers all filled with precious rings. They wear their
+long hair rolled up and fastened on the crown of their heads, and
+a cloth thrown over their shoulders, by way of a cloak.</p>
+
+<p>By way of concluding this long account of my peregrinations, I
+have this to say, that those parts of the Indies in which I have
+been are very good for a man who has little, and wishes by
+diligent industry to make rich: <i>providing always that he
+conducts himself so as to preserve the reputation of honesty</i>.
+Such, persons will never fail to receive assistance to advance
+their fortunes. But, for those who are vicious, dishonest, or
+indolent, they had better stay at home; for they shall always
+remain poor, and die beggars.</p>
+
+<p><i>End of the Peregrinations of Cesar Frederick</i>.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<h2><a name="chapter3-7" id="chapter3-7">CHAPTER VII.</a></h2>
+
+<p>EARLY ENGLISH VOYAGES TO GUINEA, AND OTHER PARTS OF THE WEST
+COAST OF AFRICA.</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>On the present occasion we are principally guided in our
+selection by chronological order, owing to which this
+<i>Chapter</i> may have an anomalous appearance, as containing
+the early voyages of the English to the Western or Atlantic coast
+of Africa, while the title of the <i>Book</i> to which it belongs
+was confined to the Discoveries and Conquests of the Portuguese,
+and other European Nations, in India; yet the arrangement has
+been formed on what we have considered as sufficient grounds,
+more especially as resembling the steps by which the Portuguese
+were led to their grand discovery of the route by sea to India.
+Our collection forms a periodical work, in the conduct of which
+it would be obviously improper to tie ourselves too rigidly, in
+these introductory discourses, to any absolute rules of minute
+arrangement, which might prevent us from availing ourselves of
+such valuable sources of information as may occur in the course
+of our researches. We have derived the principal materials of
+this and the next succeeding chapter, from Hakluyt's Collection
+of the Early Voyages, Travels, and Discoveries of the English
+Nation, using the late edition published at London in 1810, and
+availing ourselves of the previous labours of the Editor of
+Astleys Collection, published in 1745. Mr John Green, the
+intelligent editor of that former collection, has combined the
+substance of the present and succeeding chapters of our work in
+the second book of his first volume, under the title of The First
+Voyages of the English to Guinea and the East Indies; and as our
+present views are almost solely confined to the period which he
+embraces, we have thought it right to insert his introduction to
+that book, as containing a clear historical view of the
+subject[175]. It is proper to mention, however, that, while we
+follow his steps, we have uniformly had recourse to the originals
+from which he drew his materials; and, for reasons formerly
+assigned, wherever any difference may occur between our
+collection and that of Astley, we shall subjoin our remarks and
+references, at the place or places to which they belong.--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 175: Astley's Collection, Vol. I. p. 138,
+140.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"Although the Portuguese were the first who set on foot
+discoveries by sea, and carried them on for many years before any
+other European nation attempted to follow their example; yet, as
+soon as these voyages appeared to be attended with commercial
+gain, the English were ready to put in for a share. The
+Portuguese discovered Guinea about the year 1471; and only ten
+years afterwards we find the English making preparations to visit
+the newly discovered coast[176]. In the year 1481, John Tintam
+and William Fabian were busy in fitting out a fleet for the coast
+of Guinea; but whether on their own account in whole or in part,
+or solely for the Duke of <i>Medina Sidonia</i> in Spain, by
+whose command they are said to have done this, cannot be now
+determined. It is possible, as the Spaniards were excluded by the
+Papal grant in favour of the Portuguese from trading to the East
+Indies, that they might endeavour to elude this authority by
+employing Englishmen in that navigation. However this may have
+been, <i>Joam</i> or John II. king of Portugal, sent two persons
+on an embassy to Edward king of England, to renew the ancient
+league of friendship between the crowns, and to move him to
+hinder that fleet from putting to sea. The Portuguese ambassadors
+had orders to acquaint the king of England with the title which
+the king of Portugal derived from the Pope, to the exclusive
+sovereignty and navigation of Guinea, and to demand that Edward
+should prohibit his subjects from sending any ships to that
+country. This was accordingly done, and the purposes of that
+intended voyage were frustrated. This is an authentic testimony
+of the early attempts of the English, which is related at length
+by <i>Garcia de Resende</i>, in the life of Joam II. Ch. 33[177].
+To this, or some similar circumstance, it may have been owing
+that the English desisted so long from sailing to the southwards,
+and turned their endeavours to the discovery of a passage to
+India by some other way.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 176: The French pretend to have traded with
+Guinea from 1364 till 1413, being 107 years before it was
+discovered by the Portuguese.--Astl. I. 138, a.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 177: Cited by Hakluyt, Vol. II. Part 2. p.
+2]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"It appears by a memorandum or letter of <i>Nicholas
+Thorn</i>, senior, a considerable merchant in Bristol, of which
+Hakluyt gives the contents[178], that in 1526, and from
+circumstances for a long time previous, certain English
+merchants, among whom were <i>Nicholas Thorn</i> and <i>Thomas
+Spacheford</i>, had frequently traded to the Canary islands. In
+that letter or memorandum, notice was given to <i>Thomas
+Midnal</i> his factor and <i>William Ballard</i> his servant;
+residing in St Lucar in Andalusia, that the Christopher of Cadiz
+bound for the West Indies, had taken on board several packs of
+cloth of different fineness and colours, together with
+packthread, soap, and other goods, to be landed at Santa Cruz in
+Teneriffe. They are directed to sell these goods, and to send
+back returns in Orchil[179], sugar, and kid skins.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 178: Id. ib. p. 3.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 179: A species of moss growing on high
+rocks, much used in these days in dying.--Astl. I. 138.
+d.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"At length, about the middle of the <i>sixteenth</i> century,
+the English spirit of trade, meeting with favourable
+circumstances, began to exert itself, and to extend its
+adventures to the south as well as the north. About the year
+1551, Captain Thomas Windham sailed in the ship Lion for Morocco,
+whither he carried two Moors of the blood-royal. This was the
+first voyage to the western coast of Africa of which we have any
+account, and these are all the particulars to be found respecting
+it; except that one Thomas Alday, a servant to Sebastian Cabot,
+in a letter inserted in Hakluyt's Collection[180], represents
+himself as the first promoter of this trade to Barbary, and
+observes that he would have performed this voyage himself, with
+the sole command of the ship and goods, had it not been that Sir
+John Lutterel, John Fletcher, Henry Ostrich, and others with whom
+he was connected, died of the sweating sickness, and he himself,
+after escaping that disease, was seized by a violent fever, so
+that Thomas Windham sailed from Portsmouth before he recovered,
+by which he lost eighty pounds.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 180: Vol. II. p. 7.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"In the next year, 1552, Windham made a second voyage to
+<i>Zafin</i> or <i>Saffi</i> and Santa Cruz without the straits,
+which gave so much offence to the Portuguese, that they
+threatened to treat the English as enemies if found in these
+seas. Yet in the year following, the same Thomas Windham, with a
+Portuguese named Antonio Yanez Pinteado, who appears to have been
+the chief promoter of the attempt, undertook a voyage to Guinea,
+with three ships having an hundred and forty men; and having
+traded for some time on the coast for gold, they went to Benin to
+load pepper: But both the commanders and most of the men dying of
+sickness, occasioned by the climate, the rest returned to
+Plymouth with one ship only, having burnt the other two for want
+of hands, and brought back no great riches. In 1554, Mr John Lok
+made a voyage with three ships to the coast of Guinea, whence he
+brought back a considerable quantity of gold and ivory. These
+voyages appear to have been succeeded by others almost every
+year. At length, upon application to Queen Elizabeth, two patents
+were granted to certain merchants. One in 1585, for the Barbary
+or Morocco trade, and the other in 1588, for the trade to Guinea
+between the rivers Senegal and Gambia[181]. In 1592, a third
+patent was granted to other persons, taking in the coast from the
+river <i>Nonnia</i> to the south of Sierra Leona, for the space
+of 100 leagues, which patents gave rise to the African company.
+In all their voyages to the coast of Africa they had disputes
+with the Portuguese. Several of these voyages have been preserved
+by Hakluyt, and will be found inserted in this chapter, as
+forerunners to the English voyages to the East Indies.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 181: The former for twelve years, was
+granted to the Earls of Leicester and Warwick, and certain
+merchants of London, to the number of 32 in all. The other for
+ten years to eight persons of Exeter, London, and other places.
+By this latter patent, it appears that this trade was advised by
+the Portuguese residing in London, and one voyage had been made
+before the grant. See Hakluyt, II. part 2. pp. 114 and
+123.--Astl. I. 139. a.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"The views of the English extending with experience and
+success, and finding the long attempted north-east and north-west
+passages to India impracticable, they at length determined to
+proceed for that distant region round Africa by the same course
+with the Portuguese. In 1591, that voyage was undertaken for the
+first time by three large ships under the command of Captain
+Raymond; and in 1596, another fleet of three ships set out on the
+same design under Captain Wood, but with bad success. In the mean
+time several navigators were employed to discover this course to
+the East Indies. At length in 1600, a charter was obtained from
+Queen Elizabeth by a body of merchants, to the number of 216,
+having George Earl of Cumberland at their head, under the name of
+the <i>Company of Merchant Adventurers</i>, for carrying on a
+trade to the East Indies. From this period ships were sent there
+regularly every two or three years; and thus were laid the
+foundations of the English East India commerce, which has
+subsisted ever since under exclusive chartered companies.</p>
+
+<p>"Long before the English sailed to India in their own ships,
+several English merchants and others had gone to India from time
+to time in the Portuguese ships, and some overland; from a desire
+to pry into and to participate in the advantages of that gainful
+commerce. Of those who went by land, several letters and
+relations remain which will be found in the sequel: But of all
+who performed the voyage as passengers in the Portuguese vessels,
+we know of only one who left any account of his adventures, or at
+least whose account has been published; viz. Thomas Stephens. To
+this may be added the account by <i>Captain Davis</i> of a voyage
+in the Dutch ship called the <i>Middleburgh Merchants</i> in
+1598, of which he served as pilot, for the purpose of making
+himself acquainted with the maritime route to India, and the
+posture of the Portuguese affairs in that country. Both of these
+journals contain very useful remarks for the time in which they
+were made, and both will be found in our collection.</p>
+
+<p>"Although the first voyages of the English to the East Indies
+are full of variety, yet the reader is not to expect such a
+continued series of new discoveries, great actions, battles,
+sieges, and conquests, as are to be met with in the history of
+the Portuguese expeditions: For it must be considered that we
+made few or no discoveries, as these had been already made
+before; that our voyages were for the most part strictly
+commercial; that our settlements were generally made by the
+consent of the natives; that we made no conquests; and that the
+undertakings were set on foot and carried on entirely by our
+merchants[182]. On this account it is, probably, that we have no
+regular history extant of the English Voyages, Discoveries, and
+Transactions in the East Indies, as we find there are many such
+of the Portuguese and Spanish. It may be presumed, however, that
+as the East India Company has kept regular journals of their
+affairs, and is furnished with letters and other memorials from
+their agents, that a satisfactory account of all the English
+Transactions in India might be collected, if the Company thought
+proper to give orders for its
+execution[183]."--<i>Astley</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 182: These observations are to be
+considered as applying entirely to the earlier connection of the
+English with India. In more modern days there has been a
+sufficiently copious series of great actions, battles, sieges,
+and conquests; but these belong to a different and more modern
+period than that now under review, and are more connected with
+the province of political military and naval history, than with a
+Collection of Voyages and Travels. Yet these likewise will
+require to be noticed in an after division of this
+work.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 183: A commencement towards this great
+desideratum in English History has been lately made, by the
+publication of the early History of the English East India
+Company, by John Bruce, Esquire, Historiographer to the
+Company.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Second Voyage of the English to Barbary, in the year 1552,
+by Captain Thomas Windham</i>[184].</p>
+
+<p>Of the first voyage to Barbary without the straits, made by
+the same Captain Thomas Wyndham, the only remaining record is in
+a letter from James Aldaie to Michael Locke, already mentioned in
+the Introduction to this Chapter, and preserved in Hakluyt's
+Collection, II. 462. According to Hakluyt, the account of this
+second voyage was written by James Thomas, then page to Captain
+Thomas Windham, chief captain of the voyage, which was set forth
+by Sir John Yorke, Sir William Gerard, Sir Thomas Wroth,
+Messieurs Frances Lambert, Cole, and others.--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 184: Hakluyt, II. 463. Astley, I.
+140.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>The ships employed on this voyage were three, of which two
+belonged to the River Thames. These were the Lion of London of
+about 150 tons, of which Thomas Windham was captain and part
+owner; and the Buttolfe of about 80 tons. The third was a
+Portuguese caravel of about 60 tons, bought from some Portuguese
+at Newport in Wales, and freighted for the voyage. The number of
+men in the three ships was 120. The master of the Lion was John
+Kerry of Minehead in Somersetshire, and his mate was David
+Landman. Thomas Windham, the chief captain of the Adventure, was
+a gentleman, born in the county of Norfolk, but resident at
+Marshfield Park in Somersetshire.</p>
+
+<p>The fleet set sail from King-road near Bristol about the
+beginning of May 1552, being on a Monday morning; and on the
+evening of the Monday fortnight we came to anchor in the port of
+Zafia or Asafi on the coast of Barbary, in 32&deg; N. where we
+landed part of our cargo to be conveyed by land to the city of
+Marocco. Having refreshed at this port, we went thence to the
+port of Santa-Cruz, where we landed the rest of our goods, being
+a considerable quantity of linen and woollen cloth, with coral,
+amber, jet, and divers other goods esteemed by the Moors. We
+found a French ship in the road of Santa-Cruz, the people on
+board which being uncertain whether France and England were then
+at peace or engaged in war, drew her as near as possible to the
+walls of the town, from which they demanded assistance for their
+defence in case of need; and on seeing our vessels draw near,
+they shot off a piece of ordnance from the walls, the ball
+passing through between the main and fore masts of the Lion. We
+came immediately to anchor, and presently a pinnace came off to
+inquire who we were; and on learning that we had been there the
+year before, and had the licence of their king for trade, they
+were fully satisfied, giving us leave to bring our goods
+peaceably on shore, where the viceroy, Sibill Manache came
+shortly to visit us, and treated us with all civility. Owing to
+various delays, we were nearly three months at this place before
+we could get our lading, which consisted of sugar, dates,
+almonds, and molasses, or the syrup of sugar. Although we were at
+this place for so long a time during the heat of summer, yet none
+of our company perished of sickness.</p>
+
+<p>When our ships were all loaded, we drew out to sea in waiting
+for a western wind to carry us to England. But while at sea a
+great leak broke out in the Lion, on which we bore away for the
+island of Lan&ccedil;erota, between which and Fuertaventura we
+came to anchor in a safe road-stead, whence we landed 70 chests
+of sugar upon the island of Lan&ccedil;erota, with a dozen or
+sixteen of our men. Conceiving that we had come wrongfully by the
+caraval, the inhabitants came by surprise upon us and took all
+who were on shore prisoners, among whom I was one, and destroyed
+our sugars. On this transaction being perceived from our ships,
+they sent on shore three boats filled with armed men to our
+rescue; and our people landing, put the Spaniards to flight, of
+whom they slew eighteen, and made the governor of the island
+prisoner, who was an old gentleman about 70 years of age. Our
+party continued to chase the Spaniards so far for our rescue,
+that they exhausted all their powder and arrows, on which the
+Spaniards rallied and returned upon them, and slew six of our men
+in the retreat. After this our people and the Spaniards came to a
+parley, in which it was agreed that we the prisoners should be
+restored in exchange for the old governor, who gave us a
+certificate under his hand of the damages we had sustained by the
+spoil of our sugars, that we might be compensated upon our return
+to England, by the merchants belonging to the king of Spain.</p>
+
+<p>Having found and repaired the leak, and all our people being
+returned on board, we made sail; and while passing one side of
+the island, the Cacafuego and other ships of the Portuguese navy
+entered by the other side to the same roadstead whence we had
+just departed, and shot off their ordnance in our hearing. It is
+proper to mention that the Portuguese were greatly offended at
+this our new trade to Barbary, and both this year and the former,
+they gave out through their merchants in England, with great
+threats and menaces, that they would treat us as mortal enemies,
+if they found us in these seas: But by the good providence of God
+we escaped their hands. We were seven or eight weeks in making
+our passage from Lan&ccedil;erota for the coast of England, where
+the first port we made was Plymouth; and from thence sailed for
+the Thames, where we landed our merchandise at London about the
+end of October 1552.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>A Voyage from England to Guinea and Benin in 1553, by
+Captain Windham and Antonio Anes Pinteado</i>[185].</p>
+
+<p>PREVIOUS REMARKS.</p>
+
+<p>This and the following voyage to Africa were first published
+by Richard Eden in a small collection, which was afterwards
+reprinted in 4to, by Richard Willes in 1577[186]. Hakluyt has
+inserted both these in his Collection, with Eden's preamble as if
+it were his own; only that he ascribes the account of Africa to
+the right owner[187].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 185: Astley, I. 141. Hakluyt, II. 464.--The
+editor of Astley's Collection says <i>Thomas</i> Windham; but we
+have no evidence in Hakluyt, copying from Eden, that such was his
+Christian name, or that he was the same person who had gone twice
+before to the coast of Morocco. In Hakluyt, the Voyage is said to
+have been at the charge of certain merchant adventurers of
+London.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 186: Hist. of Travayle in the West and East
+Indies, &amp;c. by Eden and Willes, 4to, p. 336.--Astl. I. 141.
+b.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 187: So far the editor of Astley's
+Collection: The remainder of these previous remarks contains the
+preamble by Eden, as reprinted by Hakluyt, II.
+464.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"I was desired by certain friends to make some mention of this
+voyage, that some memory of it might remain to posterity, being
+the first enterprised by the English to parts that may become of
+great consequence to our merchants, if not hindered by the
+ambition of such as conceive themselves lords of half the world,
+by having conquered some forty or fifty miles here and there,
+erecting certain fortresses, envying that others should enjoy the
+commodities which they themselves cannot wholly possess. And,
+although such as have been at charges in the discovering and
+conquering of such lands, ought in good reason to have certain
+privileges, pre-eminences and tributes for the same; yet, under
+correction, it may seem somewhat rigorous and unreasonable, or
+rather contrary to the charity that ought to subsist among
+Christians, that such as invade the dominions of others, should
+not allow other friendly nations to trade in places nearer and
+seldom frequented by themselves, by which their own trade is not
+hindered in such other places as they have chosen for themselves
+as staples or marts of their trade[188]. But as I do not propose
+either to accuse or defend, I shall cease to speak any farther on
+this subject, and proceed to the account of the first voyage to
+those parts, as briefly and faithfully as I was advertised of the
+same, by information of such credible persons as made diligent
+inquiry respecting it, omitting many minute particulars, not
+greatly necessary to be known; but which, with the exact course
+of the navigation, shall be more fully related in the second
+voyage. If some may think that certain persons have been rather
+sharply reflected on, I have this to say, that favour and
+friendship ought always to give way before truth, that honest men
+may receive the praise of well-doing, and bad men be justly
+reproved; that the good may be encouraged to proceed in honest
+enterprizes, and the bad deterred from following evil
+example.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 188: Richard Eden here obviously endeavours
+to combat the monopoly of trade to the Portuguese discoveries,
+arrogated by that nation; although the entire colonial system of
+all the European nations has always been conducted upon the same
+exclusive principles, down to the present day.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>That these voyages may be the better understood, I have
+thought proper to premise a brief description of Africa, on the
+west coast of which great division of the world, the coast of
+Guinea begins at Cape Verd in about lat. 12&deg; N. and about two
+degrees in longitude <i>from the measuring line</i>[189]; whence
+running from north to south, and in some places by east, within
+5, 4, and 3-1/2 degrees into the equinoctial, and so forth in
+manner directly east and north, for the space of about 36 degrees
+in longitude from west to east, as shall more plainly appear in
+the second voyage[190].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 189: Evidently meaning the first meridian
+passing through the island of Ferro, one of the Canaries, from
+which Cape Verd is about 2&deg; W.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 190: These geographical indications
+respecting the coast of Guinea, are extremely obscure, so as to
+be almost unintelligible.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p><i>Brief Description of Africa, by Richard Eden</i>[191].</p>
+
+<p>In the lesser Africa are the kingdoms of Tunis and
+Constantina, which latter is at this day subject to Tunis, and
+also the regions of Bugia, Tripoli, and Ezzah. This part of
+Africa is very barren, by reason of the great deserts of Numidia
+and Barca. The principal ports of the kingdom of Tunis are,
+Goletta, Bizerta, Potofarnia, Bona, and Stora. Tunis and
+Constantina are the chief cities, with several others. To this
+kingdom belong the following islands, Zerbi, Lampadola,
+Pantalarea, Limoso, Beit, Gamelaro, and Malta; in which the
+grand-master of the knights of Rhodes now resides. To the south
+of this kingdom are the great deserts of Lybia. All the nations
+of this lesser Africa are of the sect of Mahomet, a rustical
+people living scattered in villages.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 191: This brief description of Africa is
+preserved, rather for the purpose of shewing what were the ideas
+of the English on this subject towards the end of the sixteenth
+century, than for any excellence.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The best of this part of Africa is Mauritania, now called
+Barbary, on the coast of the Mediterranean. Mauritania is divided
+into two parts, Tingitana and Cesariensis. Mauritania Tingitana
+is now called the kingdoms of Fez and Marocco, of which the
+capitals bear the same names. Mauritania, Cesariensis is now
+called the kingdom of Tremessan, the capital of which is named
+Tremessan or Telensin. This region is full of deserts, and
+reaches to the Mediterranean, to the city of Oran with the port
+of Mersalquiber. The kingdom of Fez reaches to the ocean, from
+the west to the city of Arzilla, and Sala or Salee is the port of
+this kingdom. The kingdom of Marocco also extends to the ocean,
+on which it has the cities of Azamor and Azafi. Near to Fez and
+Marocco in the ocean are the Canary islands, anciently called the
+Fortunate islands.</p>
+
+<p>To the south is the kingdom of Guinea, with Senega, Jalofo,
+Gambra, and many other regions of <i>the black Moors</i>, called
+Ethiopians or Negroes, all of which regions are watered by the
+river Negro, called anciently the Niger[192]. In these regions
+there are no cities, but only villages of low cottages made of
+boughs of trees, plastered over with chalk and covered with
+straw; and in these regions there are great deserts.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 192: In the text the Senegal river is to be
+understood by the Negro, or river of the Blacks. But the ancient
+Niger is now well known to run eastwards in the interior of
+Nigritia, having no connection whatever with the Senegal or with
+the sea.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The kingdom of Marocco includes seven subordinate kingdoms,
+named Hea, Sus, Guzula, Marocco proper, Duccula, Hazchora, and
+Tedle. Fez has an equal number, as Fez, Temesne, Azgar, Elabath,
+Errif, Garet, and Elcair. Tremessan has only three, being
+Tremessan, Tenez, and Elgazair; all the inhabitants of all these
+regions being Mahometans. But all the regions of Guinea are
+peopled by Gentiles and idolaters, having no religion or
+knowledge of God except from the law of nature.</p>
+
+<p>Africa, one of the three great divisions of the world known to
+the ancients, is separated from Asia on the east by the river
+Nile, and on the west from Europe by the Pillars of Hercules or
+the Straits of Gibraltar. The entire northern coast along the
+Mediterranean is now called Barbary, and is inhabited by the
+Moors. The inner part is called Lybia and Ethiopia. Lesser
+Africa, in which stood the noble city of Carthage, has Numidia on
+the west and Cyrenaica on the east.</p>
+
+<p>On the east side of Africa, to the west of the Red Sea, are
+the dominions of the great and mighty Christian king or emperor
+Prester John, well known to the Portuguese in their voyages to
+Calicut. His dominions reach very far on every side, and he has
+many other kings under his authority who pay him tribute, both
+Christian and Pagan. This mighty prince is named David emperor of
+Ethiopia, and it is said that the Portuguese send him every year
+eight ships laden with merchandise. His dominions are bounded on
+one side by the Red Sea, and stretch far into Africa towards
+Egypt and Barbary. To the southwards they adjoin with the great
+sea or ocean towards the Cape of Good Hope, and to the north are
+bounded by the great and dangerous <i>Sea of Sand</i>, lying
+between the great city of Cairo in Egypt and the country of
+Ethiopia; in which are many uninhabitable deserts continuing for
+the space of five days journey. It is affirmed, if the Christian
+emperor were not hindered by the deserts, in which there is great
+want of provisions and especially of water, that he would ere now
+have invaded Egypt. The chief city of Ethiopia, in which this
+great emperor resides, is called <i>Amacaiz</i>, being a city of
+some importance, the inhabitants of which are of an olive
+complexion. There are many other cities, such as the city of
+<i>Sava</i> on the Nile, where the emperor ordinarily resides
+during the summer. There is likewise a great city named
+<i>Barbaregaf</i> and <i>Ascon</i>, whence the queen of Saba is
+supposed to have gone for Jerusalem to hear the wisdom of
+Solomon[193]. This last city though little is very fair, and one
+of the principal cities of Ethiopia. In this province there are
+many very high mountains, on which the terrestrial paradise is
+supposed to have been situated; and some say that the trees of
+the sun and moon which are mentioned by the ancients, are to be
+found there, but no one has ever been able to go to them, on
+account of great deserts extending to an hundred days journey.
+Also beyond these mountains is the Cape of Good Hope.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 193: The names of places are so corruptly
+given as hardly even to be guessed at. Amacaiz may possibly be
+meant for Amba Keshem, Sava for Shoa, Barbaregaf for the
+Baharnagash, and Ascon for Assab.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p><i>Journal of the Voyage</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 12th of August 1553, there sailed from Portsmouth two
+goodly ships, the Primrose and the Lion, with a pinnace called
+the Moon, all well furnished with 140 able bodied men, and with
+ordnance and victuals fitting for the voyage. They were commanded
+by two captains; one of whom was a foreigner named Antonio Anes
+Pinteado, a native of Oporto in Portugal, a wise, discreet, and
+sober man, who, for his skill in navigation both as an
+experienced pilot and prudent commander, was at one time in such
+favour with the king of Portugal, that the coasts of Brazil and
+Guinea were committed to his care against the French, to whom he
+was a terror in these seas. He had been likewise a gentleman of
+the household to the king. But as fortune ever flatters when it
+favours, ever deceives when it promises, and ever casts down whom
+it raises, so great wealth and high favour are always accompanied
+by emulation and envy; in like manner was he, after many
+adversities and malicious accusations, forced to take refuge in
+England. In this golden voyage Pinteado was ill-matched with an
+evil companion, his own various good qualities being coupled with
+one who had few or no virtues. Thus did these noble ships depart
+on their voyage; but previously captain Windham put out of his
+ship at Portsmouth a kinsman of one of the head merchants,
+shewing in this a sample of the bad intention of his mind, which
+grew from this small beginning to a monstrous enormity; yet happy
+was that young man for being left behind.</p>
+
+<p>Arriving at the island of Madeira, they took in some wine for
+the use of the ships. At this island was a great galleon
+belonging to the king of Portugal, full of men and ordnance,
+which had been expressly fitted out to interrupt our ships in
+their intended voyage, or any others that might intend a similar
+expedition; for the king of Portugal had been secretly informed
+that our ships were armed to attack his castle of Mina, though no
+such thing was intended; yet did not that galleon attempt to stay
+our ships, nor could she have been able to withstand them if that
+had been tried.</p>
+
+<p>After their departure from Madeira the worthy captain Pinteado
+began to experience affliction from Captain Windham, who had
+hitherto carried a fair appearance of good will, but now assumed
+to himself the sole command, setting both captain Pinteado and
+the merchants factors at nought, giving them opprobrious words
+and sometimes abusing them most shamefully with threats of
+personal ill-treatment. He even proceeded to deprive captain
+Pinteado of the service of the boys and others who had been
+assigned him by order of the merchant adventurers, reducing him
+to the rank of a common mariner, which is the greatest affront
+that can be put upon a Portuguese or Spaniard, who prize their
+honour above all things. Passing the Canaries, they came to the
+island of St Nicholas, one of the Cape Verds, where they procured
+abundance of the flesh of wild goats, being almost its only
+produce. Following their voyage from thence, they tarried by the
+way at certain desert islands, not willing to arrive too early on
+the coast of Guinea on account of the heat. But being under an
+arbitrary rule, they tarried too long, and came at length to the
+first land of Guinea at the river <i>Cesto</i>[194], where they
+might have exchanged their merchandise for a full lading of the
+<i>grains</i>, or spice of that country, which is a very hot
+fruit and much like figs; the fruit being full of grains which
+are loose within the pod[195]. This kind of spice is much used in
+cold countries, and may be sold there to great advantage in
+exchange for other commodities. But, by the persuasion or command
+rather of our tyrannical captain, our people made light of this
+commodity in comparison with the fine gold for which they
+thirsted, wherefore they made sail an hundred leagues farther
+till they came to the golden land or gold coast.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 194: Or Sestre, a river on the Grain coast
+or Malaguette.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 195: This is the Guinea pepper, called
+grains of Paradise by the Italians, whence this part of Guinea
+was named the grain coast. The text describes the pods as having
+a hole on each side, which, it was afterwards learnt, were for
+putting thongs, strings or twigs on which to dry the pods. These
+pods grow on a humble plant, not above a foot and a half or two
+feet from the ground, and are bright red when first
+gathered,--Astl.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At this part of the coast, not venturing to come near the
+castle of St George del Mina belonging to the king of Portugal,
+they made sale of their goods only on this side and beyond that
+place, receiving the gold of the country in exchange to the
+extent of 150 pounds weight[196], and they might have bartered
+all their merchandise for gold at that place, if the pride of
+Windham had allowed him to listen to the counsel and experience
+of Pinteado: but not satisfied with what he had got or might
+still have procured, if he had remained in the neighbourhood of
+Mina, he commanded Pinteado to navigate the ships to Benin under
+the equinoctial, 150 leagues beyond the Mina, where he expected
+to have laden the ships with pepper. When Pinteado urged the
+lateness of the season, and advised that instead of going farther
+they should continue to dispose of their wares for gold, by which
+great profit would have been gained, Windham flew into a passion,
+called Pinteado a Jew, and gave him much opprobrious language,
+saying, "This rascally Jew promised to conduct us to places that
+either do not exist or to which he knows not the way, but if he
+does not I will cut off his ears and nail them to the mast." The
+advice given by Pinteado, not to go farther, was for the safety
+of the mens lives, which would have been in great danger at that
+late season, during their winter or <i>rossia</i>, not so called
+on account of cold, but from the heat accompanied with close and
+cloudy air, alternating with great tempests, during which the air
+was of so putrifying a quality as to rot the clothes on their
+backs. He had formerly lingered by the way, to prevent them
+arriving too soon on the coast, when the heat of the sun is
+scorching and unbearable.</p>
+
+<p>Thus constrained contrary to his wish, he brought the ships to
+anchor off the mouth of the river Benin, whence the pinnace was
+sent 50 or 60 leagues up the river. They then landed, and
+Pinteado, with Francisco another Portuguese, Nicholas Lambert a
+gentleman, and other merchants were conducted to the kings court,
+ten leagues from the river, where they were brought into the
+kings presence by a great company. The king was a <i>black
+Moor</i> or negro, though not quite so black as the rest, and sat
+in a long wide hall having earthen walls without windows, roofed
+with thin planks open in many parts to let in air. These people
+give wonderful reverence to their king, even the highest of his
+officers when in his presence never daring to look him in the
+face, but sit cowering on their buttocks with their elbows on
+their knees, and their hands on their faces, never looking up
+till the king commands them. When coming towards the king they
+shew him the utmost reverence from as far off as they can see
+him; and when they depart they never turn their backs towards
+him. In the communication of our men with the king, he used the
+Portuguese language, which he had learnt when a child. Commanding
+our men to stand up, he inquired the reason of their coming into
+his country; on which he was answered by Pinteado, that we were
+merchants who had come from a distant country into his dominions,
+to procure the commodities of the country in exchange for wares
+which we had brought from our own country, to the mutual
+convenience of both countries. The king had then 30 or 40
+quintals or hundred weights of pepper, which had long lain in a
+store-house, which he desired our people to look at, and that
+they should exhibit to him such commodities as they had brought
+for sale. He likewise sent some of his officers to conduct our
+people to the water-side, and to carry our wares from the pinnace
+to his residence. These things being done, the king engaged to
+our merchants that in 30 days he would provide a sufficiency of
+pepper to load all our ships, and in case our merchandise might
+not amount to the whole value of the pepper, he promised to give
+credit till next season, and immediately sent orders over all the
+country to gather pepper, so that in 30 days 80 tons of pepper
+were procured.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 196: Or 1800 ounces, which at L.3, 17s. 6d.
+per ounce, is equal to L.6975 sterling, a large sum in those
+days.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the meantime our men lived without any rule, eating without
+measure of the fruit of the country, drinking the palm wine which
+runs in the night from the cut branches of that tree, and
+continually running into the water to assuage the extreme heat of
+the season; and not being used to these sudden transitions, which
+are excessively dangerous, they fell into swellings and agues, by
+which about the end of the year they were dying sometimes 3, 4,
+or 5 in a day. When the 30 days were expired, and Windham saw his
+men dying so fast, he sent orders to Pinteado and the rest to
+come away without any more delay. Pinteado and the others wrote
+back to inform him of the large quantity of pepper already
+gathered, and that they looked daily for more, desiring him to
+consider the great praise they would all get on their return if
+the voyage turned out profitable, and the shame that must attend
+returning without a full loading. Not satisfied with this answer,
+more especially as the men continued to die in great numbers,
+Windham sent a second message ordering them to return
+immediately, or that he would go away and leave them. Thinking to
+prevail upon him by reasonable means, Pinteado returned to the
+ships under an escort provided by the negro king.</p>
+
+<p>In the mean time Windham, enraged at Pinteado, broke open his
+cabin and all his chests, spoiled all the cordials and sweetmeats
+he had provided for his health, and left him nothing either of
+his cloaths or nautical instruments; after which strange
+procedure he fell sick and died. When he came on board, Pinteado
+lamented as much for the death of Windham as if he had been his
+dearest friend; but several of the mariners and officers spit in
+his face, calling him Jew, and asserted that he had brought them
+to this place on purpose that they should die; and some even drew
+their swords, threatening to slay him. They insisted that he
+should leave the coast immediately, and though he only requested
+them to wait till those who were left at the court of the king of
+Benin could be sent for, they would by no means consent. He then
+prayed them to give him a boat, and as much of an old sail as
+might serve to fit her out, in which he proposed to bring
+Nicholas Lambert[197] and the rest to England, but even this they
+would not consent to. Finding all his representations in vain, he
+wrote a letter to the merchants at court, informing them of all
+that had happened at the ships, promising, if God spared his
+life, that he would return as soon as possible for them.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 197: This Lambert was a Londoner born, his
+father having been Lord Mayor of London.--Hakluyt.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Pinteado, thus kept on board against his will, was thrust
+among the cabin-boys, and worse used than any of them, insomuch
+that he was forced to depend on the favour of the cook for
+subsistence. Having sunk one of their ships for want of hands to
+navigate her, the people departed from the coast with the other.
+Within six or seven days, Pinteado died broken-hearted, from the
+cruel and undeserved usage he had met with,--a man worthy to have
+served any prince, and most vilely used. Of 140 men who had
+sailed originally from Portsmouth on this unfortunate and
+ill-conducted voyage, scarcely 40 got back to Plymouth, and many
+even of those died soon afterwards.</p>
+
+<p>That no one may suspect that I have written in commendation of
+Pinteado from partiality or favour, otherwise than as warranted
+by truth, I have thought good to add copies of the letters which
+the king of Portugal and the infant his brother wrote to induce
+him to return to Portugal, at the time when, by the king's
+displeasure, and not owing to any crime or offence, he was
+enforced by poverty to come to England, where he first induced
+our merchants to engage in voyages to Guinea. All these writings
+I saw under seal in the house of my friend Nicholas Lieze, with
+whom Pinteado left them when he departed on his unfortunate
+voyage to Guinea. But, notwithstanding these friendly letters and
+fair promises, Pinteado durst not venture to return to Portugal,
+neither indeed durst he trust himself in company with any of his
+own countrymen, unless in the presence of other persons, as he
+had secret intimation that they meant to have assassinated him,
+when time and place might serve their wicked purpose.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>The papers alluded to in this concluding paragraph by Richard
+Eden, do not seem necessary to be inserted. They consist of, a
+commission or patent dated 22d September 1551, appointing
+Pinteado one of the knights of the royal household, with 700
+<i>rees</i>, or ten shillings a month, and half a bushel of
+barley every day so long as he should keep a horse; but with an
+injunction not to marry for six years, lest he might have
+children to succeed in this allowance. The second document is
+merely a certificate of registration of the first. The third is a
+letter from the infant, Don Luis, brother to the king of
+Portugal, dated 8th December 1552, urging Pinteado to return to
+Lisbon, and intimating that Peter Gonzalvo, the bearer of the
+letter, had a safe conduct for him in due form. From the
+introduction to these papers, it appears that Pinteado had
+suffered long disgrace and imprisonment, proceeding upon false
+charges, and had been at last set free by means of the king's
+confessor, a grey friar, who had manifested his
+innocence.--E.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage to Guinea, in 1554, by Captain John
+Lok</i>[198].</p>
+
+<p>As in the first voyage of the English to Guinea, I have given
+rather the order of the history than the course of navigation, of
+which I had then no perfect information; so in this second voyage
+my chief purpose has been to shew the course pursued, according
+to the ordinary custom and observation of mariners, and as I
+received it from the hands of an expert pilot, who was one of the
+chiefest in this voyage[199], who with his own hand wrote a brief
+journal of the whole, as he had found and tried in all things,
+not conjecturally, but by the art of navigation, and by means of
+instruments fitted for nautical use[200]. Not assuming therefore
+to myself the commendations due to another, neither having
+presumed in any part to change the substance or order of this
+journal, so well observed by art and experience, I have thought
+fit to publish it in the language commonly used by mariners,
+exactly as I received it from that pilot[201].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 198: Hakluyt, II. 470. Astl 1.114. In the
+first edition of Hakluyt's collection, this voyage is given under
+the name of Robert Gainsh, who was master of the John Evangelist,
+as we learn by a marginal note at the beginning of the voyage in
+both editions.--Astl. I. 144. a.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 199: Perhaps this might be Robert Gainsh,
+in whose name the voyage was first published.--Astl. I. 144.
+b.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 200: Yet the latitudes he gives, if
+observed, are by no means exact.--Astl.
+
+<p>In this version we have added the true latitudes and
+longitudes in the text between brackets; the longitude from
+Greenwich always understood.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 201: This is the exordium, written by
+Richard Eden, from whose work it was adopted by Hakluyt, yet
+without acknowledgement. In the title, it appears that this
+expedition was fitted out as the joint adventure of Sir George
+Barne, Sir John York, Thomas Lok, Anthony Hickman, and Edward
+Castelin.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+
+<p>On the 11th October 1554, we departed from the river Thames
+with three good ships. One of these named the Trinity, was of 140
+tons burden; the second, called the Bartholomew, was 90 tons; and
+the third, called the John Evangelist, was 140 tons. With these
+three ships and two pinnaces, one of which was lost on the coast
+of England, we staid fourteen days at Dover, and three or four
+days at Rye, and lastly we touched at Dartmouth. Departing on the
+1st November, at 9 o'clock at night, from the coast of England,
+off the Start point, and steering due south-west all that night,
+all next day, and the next night after, till noon of the 3d, we
+made our way good, running 60 leagues. The morning of the 17th we
+had sight of the island of Madeira, which to those who approach
+from N.N.E. seems to rise very high, and almost perpendicular in
+the west. To the S.S.E. is a long low land, and a long point with
+a saddle through the midst of it, standing in 32&deg; N. [lat.
+32&deg; 30' N. long. 16&deg; 12' W.]</p>
+
+<p>And in the west part are many springs of water running down from
+the mountain, with many white fields like fields of corn, and
+some white houses in the S.E. part. Also in this part is a rock
+at a small distance from the shore, over which a great gap or
+opening is seen in the mountain.
+
+<p>The 19th at noon we had sight of the isles of Palma,
+Teneriffe, and Grand Canarea. The isle of Palma rises round, and
+stretches from S.E. to N.W. the north-west part being lowest. In
+the south is a round hill over the head-land, with another round
+hill behind and farther inland. Between the S.E. end of Madeira
+and the N.W. part of the island of Palma, the distance is 57
+leagues[202], Palma being in 28&deg;. [lat. 28&deg; 45' N. long
+17&deg; 45' W.] Our course between the S.E. end of Madeira and
+the N.W. part of Palma was S. and S. by W. so that we had sight
+of Teneriffe and the Grand Canary. The S.E. part of Palma and
+N.N.E. of Teneriffe lie S.E. and N.W. [rather E. and W.] distance
+20 leagues [33 leagues.] Teneriffe and Grand Canarea, with the
+west part of Fuertaventura, stand in 27&deg; 30'[203]. Gomera is
+a fair island, but very rugged, W.S.W. from Teneriffe, the
+passage between running from N. by W. to S. by E. In the south
+part of Gomera is a town and good road-stead, in lat. 28&deg; N.
+Teneriffe is a mountainous island, with a great high peak like a
+sugar-loaf, on which there is snow all the year, and by that peak
+it may be known from all other islands. On the 20th November we
+were there becalmed from six in the morning till four in the
+afternoon. On the 22d November, being then under the tropic of
+Cancer, the sun set W. and by S. On the coast of Barbary, 25
+leagues N. of Cape Blanco, at 3 leagues from shore, we had 15
+fathoms water on a good shelly bottom mixed with sand, and no
+currents, having two small islands in lat. 22&deg; 20' N.[7] From
+Gomera to Cape de las Barbas is 100 leagues, [116] the course
+being S. by E. That cape is in lat. 22&deg; 30, [22&deg; 15'] all
+the coast thereabout being flat, and having 16 and 17 fathoms off
+shore. All the way from the river del Oro to Cape Barbas, at 7 or
+8 leagues off shore, many Spaniards and Portuguese employ
+themselves in fishing during the month of November, the whole of
+that coast consisting of very low lands. From Cape Barbas we held
+a course S.S.W. and S.W. by S. till we came into lat. 20&deg;
+30', reckoning ourselves 7 leagues off shore, and we there came
+to the least shoals of Cape Blanco. We then sailed to the lat. of
+13&deg; N. reckoning ourselves 20 leagues off; and in 15&deg;
+<i>we did rear the crossiers</i>, or cross stars, and might have
+done so sooner if we had looked for them. They are not right
+across in the month of November, as the nights are short there,
+but we had sight of them on the 29th of that month at night. The
+1st of December, being in lat. 13&deg; N. we set our course S. by
+E. till the 4th at noon, when we were in 9&deg; 20' reckoning
+ourselves 30 leagues W.S.W. from the shoals of the Rio Grande,
+which extend for 30 leagues. On the 4th, being in 6&deg; 30', we
+set our course S.E. The 9th we changed our course E.S.E. The
+14th, being in lat. 5&deg; 30' and reckoning ourselves 36 leagues
+from the coast of Guinea, we set our course due E. The 19th,
+reckoning ourselves 17 leagues from Cape Mensurado, we set our
+course E. by N. the said cape being E.N.E. of us, and the river
+Sesto E. The 20th we fell in with Cape Mensurado or Mesurado,
+which bore S.E. 2 leagues distant. This cape may be easily known,
+as it rises into a hummock like the head of a porpoise. Also
+towards the S.E. there are three trees, the eastmost being the
+highest, the middle one resembling a hay-stack, and that to the
+southward like a gibbet. Likewise on the main there are four or
+five high hills, one after the other, like round hummocks. The
+south-east of the three trees is <i>brandiernaure?</i> and all
+the coast is a white sand. The said cape stands within a little
+of six degrees [lat. 6&deg; 20' N. long. 10&deg; 30' W.]</p>
+
+The 22d we came to the river Sesto or Sesters, where we remained
+till the 29th, and we thought it best to send our pinnace before
+us to the Rio Dulce, that they might begin the market before the
+arrival of the John Evangelist. At the river Sesto, which is in
+six degrees less one terce, or 5&deg; 40', we got a ton of
+grains[205]. From Rio Sesto to Rio Dulce the distance is 25
+leagues, Rio Dulce being in 5&deg; 30' N. The Rio Sesto is easily
+known by a ledge of rocks to the S.E. of the road[206], and at
+the mouth of the river are five or six trees without leaves. It
+is a good harbour, but the entrance of the river is very narrow,
+and has a rock right in the mouth. All that coast, between Cape
+Mount and Cape Palmas, lies S.E. by E. and N.W. by N. being three
+leagues offshore[207], and there are rocks in some places two
+leagues off, especially between the river Sesto and Cape Palmas.
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 202: The real distance is 84 marine
+leagues, 20 to the degree.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 203: The parallel of lat. 28&deg; N. goes
+through the centre of Grand Canarea, touching the southern point
+of Teneriffe, and just keeping free of the S.W. point of
+Fuertaventura.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>[204]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 204: 7 Cape Blanco is in lat. 20&deg; 50'
+N. 25 leagues to the north, would only reach to lat. 22&deg; 5';
+exactly almost in 22&deg; is the small island of Pedro de
+Agale.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 205: In the preceding voyage grains have
+been explained as Guinea pepper, a species of
+capsicum.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 206: Rock Sesters is in long. 9&deg; 20'
+W.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 207: This is not intelligible, unless meant
+that ships may anchor for three leagues from the
+shore.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Between the river Sesto and the river Dulce are 25 leagues.
+Between them and 8 leagues from Sesto river is a high land called
+<i>Cakeado</i>, and S.E. from it a place called <i>Shawgro</i>,
+and another called <i>Shyawe</i> or <i>Shavo</i>, where fresh
+water may be had. Off Shyawe lies a ledge of rocks, and to the
+S.E. is a headland named <i>Croke</i>, which is 9 or 10 leagues
+from Cakeado. To the S.E. is a harbour called St Vincent, right
+over against which is a rock under water, two and a half leagues
+from shore. To the S.E. of this rock is an island 3 or 4 leagues
+off, and not above a league from shore, and to the S.E. of the
+island is a rock above water, and past that rock is the entrance
+of the river Dulce, which may be known by that rock. The N.W.
+side of the haven is flat sand, and the S.E. side is like an
+island, being a bare spot without any trees, which is not the
+case in any other place. In the road ships ride in 13 or 14
+fathoms, the bottom good ouse and sand. The marks for entering
+this road are to bring the island and the north-east land in one.
+We anchored there on the last day of December 1554, and on the 3d
+of January 1555 we came from the Rio Dulce. <i>Cape Palmas</i> is
+a fair high land, some low parts of which by the waterside seem
+red cliffs, with white streaks like highways, a cables length
+each, which is on the east side of the Cape. This is the most
+southerly land on the coast of Guinea, and is in lat. 4&deg; 25'
+N. From Cape Palmas to Cape <i>Three-points</i> or <i>Tres
+puntas</i>, the whole coast is perfectly safe and clear, without
+rock or other danger. About 25 leagues to the eastward of Cape
+Palmas the land is higher than in any other place till we come to
+Cape Three-points, and about ten leagues westward from that Cape
+the land begins to rise, and grows higher all the way to the
+point. Also about 5 leagues west from that Cape there is some
+broken ground with two great rocks, within which, in the bight of
+a bay, there is a castle called <i>Arra</i> belonging to the king
+of Portugal, which is readily known by these rocks, as there are
+none other between Cape Palmas and Cape Three-points. The coast
+trends E. by N. and W. by S. From Cape Palmas to Arra castle is
+95 leagues, and from thence to the western point of Cape
+Three-points it is S.E. by S. and N.W. by N. This western point
+of Cape Three-points is low land, stretching half a mile out to
+sea, and on the neck nearest the land is a tuft of trees.</p>
+
+<p>We arrived at Cape Three-points on the 11th January, and came
+next day to a town called <i>Samma</i> or <i>Samua</i>, 8 leagues
+beyond, towards E.N.E. there being a great ledge of rocks a great
+way out to sea between Cape Three-points and that town. We
+remained four days off that town, the captain of which desired to
+have a pledge on shore, but on receiving one he kept him, and
+refused to continue trade, even shooting his ordnance at us, of
+which he only had two or three pieces[208]. On the 16th of the
+month we came to a place called Cape <i>Corea</i>[209], where
+dwelt Don John, and where we were well received by his people.
+This Cape Corea is 4 leagues eastward from the castle of
+<i>Mina</i>. We arrived there on the 18th of the month, making
+sale of all our cloth except two or three packs. On the 26th we
+weighed anchor and went to join the Trinity, which was 7 leagues
+to the eastwards of us, and had sold most of her wares. Then the
+people of the Trinity willed us to go 8 or 9 leagues farther to
+the east, to sell part of their wares at a place called
+<i>Perecow</i>, and another called <i>Perecow-grande</i>, still
+farther east, which is known by a great hill near it called
+<i>Monte Rodondo</i> lying to the westwards, and many palm trees
+by the water side. From thence we began our voyage homewards on
+the 13th of February, and plied along the coast till we came
+within 7 or 8 leagues of Cape Three-points. About 8 in the
+afternoon of the 15th we cast about to seawards. Whoever shall
+come from the coast of Mina homewards, ought to beware of the
+currents, and should be sure of making his way good as far west
+as Cape Palmas, where the current sets always to the eastwards.
+About 20 leagues east of Cape Palmas is a river called <i>De los
+Potos</i>, where abundance of fresh water and ballast may be had,
+and plenty of ivory or elephants teeth, which river is in four
+degrees and almost two terces, or 4&deg; 40' N. When you reckon
+to be as far west as Cape Palmas, being in lat. 1&deg; or 1&deg;
+30' N. you may then stand W. or W. by N. till in lat. 3&deg; N.
+Then you may go W. or N.W. by W. till in lat. 5&deg; N. and then
+N.W. In lat. 6&deg; N. we met northerly winds and great ruffling
+tides, and as far as we could judge the current set N.N.W.
+Likewise between Cape Mount and Cape Verd there are great
+currents, which are very apt to deceive.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 208: The pledge was nephew to Sir John
+Yorke.--<i>Eden</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 209: From the context, this seems to have
+been the place now called Cape Coast.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 22d of April we were in lat. 8&deg; 40' N. and
+continued our course to the north-west, having the wind at N.E.
+and E.N.E. sometimes at E. till the first of May, when we were in
+lat. 18&deg; 20' N. Thence we had the wind at E. and E.N.E.
+sometimes E.S.E. when we reckoned the Cape Verd islands E.S.E.
+from us, and by estimation 48 leagues distant. In 20&deg; and
+21&deg; N. we had the wind more to the east and south than
+before; and so we ran N.W. and N.N.W. sometimes N. by W. and N.
+till we came into lat. 31&deg; N. when we reckoned ourselves 180
+leagues S.W. by S. of the island of Flores. Here we had the wind
+S.S.E. and shaped our course N.E. In 23&deg; we had the wind at
+S. and S.W. and made our course N.N.E. in which direction we went
+to 40&deg;, and then set our course N.E. having the wind at S.W.
+and the isle of Flores E. of us, 17 leagues distant. In 41&deg;
+we had the wind N.E. and lay a course N.W. Then we met the wind
+at W.N.W. and at W. within 6 leagues, when we went N.W. We then
+altered to N.E. till in 42&deg; where we shaped our course E.N.E.
+judging the isle of <i>Corvo</i> to be W. of us, 36 leagues
+distant. On the 21st of May we communed with John Rafe who judged
+us to be in lat. 39&deg; 30' N. 25 leagues E. of Flora, and
+recommended to steer N.E.</p>
+
+<p>It is to be noted that in lat. 9&deg; N. on the 4th of
+September, we lost sight of the north star. In lat. 45&deg; N.
+the compass varied 8&deg; to the W. of N. In 40&deg; N. it varied
+15&deg;. And in 30&deg; 30' N. its variation was 5&deg; W.</p>
+
+<p>It is also to be noted that two or three days before we came
+to Cape Three-points, the pinnace went along shore endeavouring
+to sell some of our wares, and then we came to anchor three or
+four leagues west by south of that cape, where we left the
+Trinity. Then our pinnace came on board and took in more wares,
+telling us that they would go to a place where the Primrose[210]
+was, and had received much gold in the first voyage to these
+parts; but being in fear of a brigantine that was then on the
+coast, we weighed anchor and followed them, leaving the Trinity
+about four leagues from us. We accordingly rode at anchor
+opposite that town, where Martine, by his own desire and with the
+assent of some of the commissioners in the pinnace, went on shore
+to the town, and thence John Berin went to trade at another town
+three miles father on. The town is called Samma or Samua, which
+and Sammaterra are the two first towns to the N.E. of Cape
+Three-points, where we traded for gold.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 210: This was one of the ships in the
+former voyage under Windham.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having continued the course of the voyage as described by the
+before-mentioned pilot, I will now say something of the country
+and people, and of such things as are brought from
+thence[211].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 211: These subsequent notices seem
+subjoined by Richard Eden, the original
+publisher.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They brought home in this voyage, 400 pounds weight and odd of
+gold[212], twenty-two carats and one grain fine. Also 36 buts of
+<i>grains</i>, or Guinea pepper, and about 250 elephants teeth of
+different sizes. Some of these I saw and measured, which were
+nine spans in length measured along the crook, and some were as
+thick as a mans thigh above the knee, weighing 90 pounds each,
+though some are said to have been seen weighing 125 pounds. There
+were some called the teeth of calves, of one, two, or three years
+old, measuring one and a-half, two, or three feet, according to
+the age of the beast. These great teeth or tusks grow in the
+upper jaw downwards, and not upwards from the lower jaw, as
+erroneously represented by some painters and <i>arras</i>
+workers. In this voyage they brought home the head of an elephant
+of such huge bigness that the bones or cranium only, without the
+tusks or lower jaw, weighed about two hundred pounds, and was as
+much as I could well lift from the ground. So that, considering
+also the weight of the two great tusks and the under jaw, with
+the lesser teeth, the tongue, the great hanging ears, the long
+big snout or trunk, with all the flesh, brains, and skin, and
+other parts belonging to the head, it could not in my opinion
+weigh less than five hundred weight. This head has been seen by
+many in the house of the worthy merchant Sir Andrew Judde, where
+I saw it with my bodily eyes, and contemplated with those of my
+mind, admiring the cunning and wisdom of the work-master, without
+which consideration such strange and wonderful things are only
+curiosities, not profitable subjects of contemplation.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 212: Or 4800 ounces, worth, L.18,600
+sterling at the old price of L.3 17s. 6d. per ounce; and perhaps
+worth in those days as much as ninety or an hundred thousand
+pounds in the present day.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The elephant, by some called oliphant, is the largest of all
+four-footed beasts. The fore-legs are longer than those behind;
+in the lower part or ancles of which he has joints. The feet have
+each five toes, but undivided. The trunk or snout is so long and
+of such form that it serves him as a hand, for he both eats and
+drinks by bringing his food and drink to his mouth by its means,
+and by it he helps up his master or keeper, and also overturns
+trees by its strength. Besides his two great tusks, he has four
+teeth on each side of his mouth, by which he eats or grinds his
+food, each of these teeth being almost a span long, as they lie
+along the jaw, by two inches high and about as much in breadth.
+The tusks of the male are larger than those of the female. The
+tongue is very small, and so far within the mouth that it cannot
+be seen. This is the gentlest and most tractable of all beasts,
+and understands and is taught many things, so that it is even
+taught to do reverence to kings, being of acute sense and great
+judgment. When the female is once seasoned, the male never
+touches her afterwards. The male lives two hundred years, or at
+least 120, and the female almost as long; but the flower of their
+age is reckoned 60 years. They cannot endure our winter or cold
+weather; but they love to go into rivers, in which they will
+often wade up to their trunk, snuffing and blowing the water
+about in sport; but they cannot swim, owing to the weight of
+their bodies. If they happen to meet a man wandering in the
+wilderness, they will go gently before him and lead him into the
+right way. In battle they pay much respect to those who are
+wounded, bringing such as are hurt or weary into the middle of
+the army where they may be defended. They are made tame by
+drinking the juice of barley[213].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 213: The meaning of this expression is by
+no means obvious. It is known that in India, arrack, or a
+spirituous liquor distilled from rice, is given regularly to
+elephants, which may be here alluded to.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>They have continual war with dragons, which desire their blood
+because it is very cold; wherefore the dragon lies in wait for
+the passing of an elephant, winding its tail of vast length round
+the hind legs of the elephant, then thrusts his head into his
+trunk and sucks out his breath, or bites him in the ears where he
+cannot reach with his trunk. When the elephant becomes faint with
+the loss of blood, he falls down upon the serpent, now gorged
+with blood, and with the weight of his body crushes the dragon to
+death. Thus his own blood and that of the elephant run out of the
+serpent now mingled together, which cooling is congealed into
+that substance which the apothecaries call <i>sanguis
+draconis</i> or cinnabar[214]. But there are other kinds of
+cinnabar, commonly called <i>cinoper</i> or vermillion, which the
+painters use in certain colours.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 214: It is surely needless to say that this
+is a mere fable.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>There are three kinds of elephants, as of the marshes, the
+plains, and the mountains, differing essentially from each other.
+Philostratus writes, that by how much the elephants of Lybia
+exceed in bigness the horses of Nysea, so much do the elephants
+of India exceed those of Lybia, for some of the elephants of
+India have been seen nine cubits high; and these are so greatly
+feared by the others, that they dare not abide to look upon them.
+Only the males among the Indian elephants have tusks; but in
+Ethiopia and Lybia, both males and females are provided with
+them. They are of divers heights, as of 12, 13, or 14
+<i>dodrants</i>, the dodrant being a measure of 9 inches; and
+some say that an elephant is bigger than three wild oxen or
+buffaloes. Those of India are black, or mouse-coloured; but those
+of Ethiopia or Guinea are brown. The hide or skin of them all is
+very hard, and without hair or bristles. Their ears are two
+dodrants, or 18 inches in breadth, and their eyes are very small.
+Our men saw one drinking at a river in Guinea as they sailed
+along the coast. Those who wish to know more of the properties of
+the elephant, as of their wonderful docility, of their use in
+war, of their chastity and generation, when they were first seen
+in the triumphs and amphitheatres of the Romans, how they are
+taken and tamed, when they cast their tusks, and of their use in
+medicine, and many other particulars, will find all these things
+described in the eighth book of Natural History, as written by
+Pliny. He also says in his twelfth book, that the ancients made
+many goodly works of ivory or elephants teeth; such as tables,
+tressels or couches, posts of houses, rails, lattices for
+windows, idols of their gods, and many other things of ivory,
+either coloured or uncoloured, and intermixed with various kinds
+of precious woods; in which manner at this day are made chairs,
+lutes, virginals, and the like. They had such plenty of it in
+ancient times, that one of the gates of Jerusalem was called the
+ivory gate, as Josephus reports. The whiteness of ivory was so
+much admired, that it was anciently thought to represent the
+fairness of the human skin; insomuch that those who endeavoured
+to improve, or rather to corrupt, the natural beauty by painting,
+were said reproachfully, <i>ebur atramento candefacere</i>, to
+whiten ivory with ink. Poets also, in describing the fair necks
+of beautiful virgins, call them <i>eburnea colla</i>, or ivory
+necks. Thus much may suffice of elephants and ivory, and I shall
+now say somewhat of the people, and their manners, and mode of
+living, with another brief description of Africa.</p>
+
+<p>The people who now inhabit the regions of the coast of Guinea
+and the middle parts of Africa, as inner Lybia, Nubia, and
+various other extensive regions in that quarter, were anciently
+called Ethiopians and <i>Nigritae</i>, which we now call Moors,
+Moorens, or Negroes; a beastly living people, without God, law,
+religion, or government, and so scorched by the heat of the sun,
+that in many places they curse it when it rises. Of the people
+about Lybia interior, Gemma Phrysius thus writes: Libia interior
+is large and desolate, containing many horrible wildernesses,
+replenished with various kinds of monstrous beasts and serpents.
+To the south of Mauritania or Barbary is Getulia, a rough and
+savage region, inhabited by a wild and wandering people. After
+these follow the <i>Melanogetuli</i>, or black Getulians, and
+Phransii, who wander in the wilderness, carrying with them great
+gourds filled with water. Then the Ethiopians, called Nigritae,
+occupy a great part of Africa, extending to the western ocean or
+Atlantic. Southwards also they reach to the river Nigritis or
+Niger, which agrees in its nature with the Nile, as it increases
+and diminishes like the Nile, and contains crocodiles. Therefore,
+I believe this to be the river called the Senegal by the
+Portuguese. It is farther said of the Niger, that the inhabitants
+on one side were all black and of goodly stature, while on the
+other side they were brown or tawny and of low stature, which
+also is the case with the Senegal.[215] There are other people of
+Lybia, called <i>Garamantes</i>, whose women are in common,
+having no marriages or any respect to chastity. After these are
+the nations called <i>Pyrei, Sathiodaphintae, Odrangi, Mimaces,
+Lynxamator, Dolones, Agangince, Leuci Ethiopes, Xilicei Ethiopes,
+Calcei Ethiopes</i>, and <i>Nubi</i>. These last have the same
+situation in Ptolemy, which is now given to the kingdom of Nubia,
+where there are certain Christians under the dominion of the
+great emperor of Ethiopia, called Prester John. From these
+towards the west was a great nation called <i>Aphricerones</i>,
+inhabiting, as far as we can conjecture, what is now called the
+<i>Regnum Orguene</i>, bordering on the eastern or interior parts
+of Guinea. From hence westwards and towards the north, are the
+kingdoms of <i>Gambra</i> and <i>Budamel</i>, not far from the
+river Senegal; and from thence toward the inland region and along
+the coast are the regions of <i>Ginoia</i> or Guinea. On the west
+side of this region is Cabo Verde, <i>caput viride</i>, Cap Verd,
+or the Green Cape, to which the Portuguese first direct their
+course when they sail to the land of Brazil in America, on which
+occasion they turn to the right hand towards the quarter of the
+wind called <i>Garbino</i>, which is between the west and
+south.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 215: It may be proper to mention in this
+place, that the Niger and the Senegal, though agreeing in these
+particulars, are totally different rivers in the same parallel.
+The Senegal runs into the sea from the east; while the Niger
+running to the east, loses itself in an interior lake, as the
+Wolga does in the Caspian, having no connection whatever with the
+ocean. According to some accounts, this lake only exists as such
+during the rainy season, drying up in the other part of the year,
+probably however leaving an extensive marsh, called the
+<i>Wangara</i>. If so, the environs of that lake and marsh must
+be unhealthy in the utmost extreme.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>To speak somewhat more of Ethiopia, although there are many
+nations called Ethiopians, yet is Ethiopia chiefly divided into
+two parts, one of which being a great and rich region, is called
+<i>Ethiopia sub Egypto</i>, or Ethiopia to the south of Egypt. To
+this belongs the island of Meroe, which is environed by the
+streams of the Nile. In this island women reigned in ancient
+times, and, according to Josephus, it was some time called
+<i>Sabea</i>, whence the queen of Saba went to Jerusalem to
+listen to the wisdom of Solomon. From thence, towards the east
+and south, reigneth the Christian emperor called Prester John, by
+some named Papa Johannes, or as others say <i>Pean Juan</i>,
+signifying Great John, whose empire reaches far beyond the Nile,
+and extends to the coasts of the Red Sea and of the Indian ocean.
+The middle of this region is almost in 66 degrees of E.
+longitude, and 12 degrees of N. lat.[216] About this region dwell
+the people called <i>Clodi, Risophagi, Axiuntiae, Babylonii,
+Molili</i>, and <i>Molibae</i>. After these is the region called
+<i>Trogloditica</i>, the inhabitants of which dwell in caves and
+dens, instead of houses, and feed upon the flesh of serpents, as
+is reported by Pliny and Diodorus Siculus, who allege, that
+instead of language, they have only a kind of grinning and
+chattering. There are also people without heads, called
+<i>Blemines</i>, having their eyes and mouths in their breast.
+Likewise <i>Strucophagi</i>, and naked <i>Gamphasantes</i>;
+<i>satyrs</i> also, who have nothing of human nature except the
+shape. <i>Oripei</i> likewise, who are great hunters, and
+<i>Mennones</i>. Here also is <i>Smyrnophora</i>, or the region
+of myrrh; after which is <i>Azania</i>, producing many
+elephants.[217] A great portion of the eastern part of Africa
+beyond the equinoctial line is in the kingdom of <i>Melinda</i>,
+the inhabitants of which have long been in use to trade with the
+nations of Arabia, and whose king is now allied to the king of
+Portugal, and pays tribute to Prester John.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 216: Reckoning the longitude from the
+island of Ferro, the middle of Abyssinia is only in about 52&deg;
+30' E. and as Ferro is 18&deg; W. from Greenwich, that coincides
+with 34&deg; 30' E. as the longitude is now reckoned by British
+geographers.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 217: It is impossible, in the compass of a
+note, to enter into any commentary on this slight sketch of the
+ancient geography of eastern Africa.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The other, or interior Ethiopia, being a region of vast
+extent, is now only somewhat known upon the sea-coast, but may be
+described as follows. In the first place, towards the south of
+the equator, is a great region of Ethiopians, in which are white
+elephants, <i>tigers</i>, (lions) and rhinoceroses. Also a region
+producing plenty of cinnamon, which lies between the branches of
+the Nile. Also the kingdom of Habesch or Habasia,[218] a region
+inhabited by Christians, on both sides of the Nile. Likewise
+those Ethiopians called <i>Ichthyophagi</i>, or who live only on
+fish, who were subdued in the wars of Alexander the Great[219].
+Also the Ethiopians called <i>Rapsii</i> and
+<i>Anthropophagi</i>, who are in use to eat human flesh, and
+inhabit the regions near the mountains of the moon.
+<i>Gazatia</i> is under the tropic of Capricorn; after which
+comes the <i>front</i> of Africa, and the Cape of Good Hope, past
+which they sail from Lisbon to Calicut: But as the capes and
+gulfs, with their names, are to be found on every globe and
+chart, it were superfluous to enumerate them here.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 218: It is strange that Habasia or
+Abyssinia, inhabited by Christians, should thus be divided from
+the empire of Prester John.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 219: The Icthyophagi of Alexander dwelt on
+the oceanic coast of Persia, now Mekran, between the river Indus
+and the Persian gulf, not in Ethiopia.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Some allege that Africa was so named by the Greeks, as being
+without cold; the Greek letter <i>alpha</i> signifying privation,
+void of, or without, and <i>phrice</i> signifying cold; as,
+although it has a cloudy and tempestuous season instead of
+winter, it is yet never cold, but rather smothering hot, with hot
+showers, and such scorching winds, that at certain times the
+inhabitants seem as if living in furnaces, and in a manner half
+ready for purgatory or hell. According to Gemma Phrisius, in
+certain parts of Africa, as in the greater Atlas, the air in the
+night is seen shining with many strange fires and flames, rising
+as it were as high as the moon, and strange noises are heard in
+the air, as of pipes, trumpets, and drums, which are caused
+perhaps by the vehement motions of these fiery exhalations, as we
+see in many experiments wrought by fire, air, and wind. The
+hollowness also, and various reflections and breakings of the
+clouds, may be great causes thereof, besides the great coldness
+of the middle region of the air, by which these fiery
+exhalations, when they ascend there, are suddenly driven back
+with great force. Daily experience teaches us, by the whizzing of
+a burning torch, what a noise fire occasions in the air, and much
+more so when it strives and is inclosed with air, as seen in
+guns; and even when air alone is inclosed, as in organ pipes and
+other wind instruments: For wind, according to philosophers, is
+nothing but air vehemently moved, as when propelled by a pair of
+bellows, and the like.</p>
+
+<p>Some credible persons affirm that, in this voyage to Guinea,
+they felt a sensible heat in the night from the beams of the
+moon; which, though it seem strange to us who inhabit a cold
+region, may yet reasonably have been the case, as Pliny writes
+that the nature of stars and planets consists of fire, containing
+a spirit of life, and cannot therefore be without heat. That the
+moon gives heat to the earth seems confirmed by David, in the
+121st psalm, where, speaking of such men as are defended from
+evils by the protection of God, he says, "The sun shall not burn
+thee by day, neither the moon by night[220]." They said likewise,
+that in some parts of the sea they saw streams of water, which
+they call <i>spouts</i>, falling out of the air into the sea,
+some of them being as large as the pillars of churches; insomuch
+that, when these fall into ships, they are in great danger of
+being sunk. Some allege these to be the cataracts of heaven,
+which were all opened at Noah's flood: But I rather consider them
+to be those fluxions and eruptions said by Aristotle, in his book
+de Mundo, to happen in the sea. For, speaking of such strange
+things as are often seen in the sea, he writes thus: "Oftentimes
+also, even in the sea are seen evaporations of fire, and such
+eruptions and breaking forth of springs, that the mouths of
+rivers are opened. Whirlpools and fluxions are caused of such
+other vehement motions, not only in the midst of the sea, but
+also in creeks and straits. At certain times also, a great
+quantity of water is suddenly lifted up and carried about by the
+moon," &amp;c. From these words of Aristotle it appears, that
+such waters are lifted up at one time in one place, and suddenly
+fall down again in another place at another time. To this also
+may be referred what Richard Chancellor told me, as having heard
+from Sebastian Cabot, as far as I remember, either on the coast
+of Brazil or of the Rio de la Plata, that his ship or pinnace was
+suddenly lifted from the sea and cast upon the land, I know not
+how far. Which, and other strange and wonderful works of nature
+considered, and calling to remembrance the narrowness of human
+knowledge and understanding, compared with her mighty power, I
+can never cease to wonder, and to confess with Pliny, that
+nothing is impossible to nature, whose smallest power is still
+unknown to man.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 220: In our present version the word
+<i>smite</i> is used instead of burn. But the quotation in the
+text is a literal translation from the Latin vulgate, and agrees
+with the older English version, still used in the Book of Common
+Prayer.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Our people saw and considered many things in this voyage that
+are worthy of notice, and some of which I have thought fit to
+record, that the reader may take pleasure, both in the variety of
+these things, and in the narrative of the voyage. Among other
+matters respecting the manners and customs of these people, this
+may seem strange, that their princes and nobles are in use to
+pierce and wound their skins in such way as to form curious
+figures upon it, like flowered damask, which they consider as
+very ornamental[221]. Although they go in a manner naked, yet
+many of them, and the women especially, are almost loaded with
+collars, bracelets, rings, and chains, of gold, copper, or ivory.
+I have seen one of their ivory armlets weighing 38 ounces, which
+was worn by one of their women on her arm. It was made of one
+piece of the largest part of an elephant's tooth, turned and
+somewhat carved, having a hole through which to pass the hand.
+Some have one on each arm and one on each leg, and though often
+so galled by them as to be almost lame, they still persist to use
+them. Some wear great shackles on their legs of bright copper,
+and they wear collars, bracelets, garlands, and girdles of
+certain blue stones, resembling beads. Some also of their women
+wear upon their arms a kind of <i>fore-sleeves</i>[222], made of
+plates of beaten gold. They wear likewise rings on their fingers
+made of gold wire, having a knot or wreath, like those which
+children make on rush rings. Among other golden articles bought
+by our men, were some dog-collars and chains.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 221: Now well known under the name of
+tatooing.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 222: Sleeves for the fore-arms, or from the
+elbow to the wrist.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>These natives of Guinea are very wary in driving bargains, and
+will not willingly lose the smallest particle of their gold,
+using weights and measures for the same with great
+circumspection. In dealing with them, it is necessary to behave
+with civility and gentleness, as they will not trade with any who
+use them ill. During the first voyage of our people to that
+country, on departing from the place where they had first traded,
+one of them either stole a musk-cat or took her away by force,
+not suspecting that this could have any effect to prevent trading
+at the next station: But although they went there in full sail,
+the news had got there before them, and the people refused to
+deal with them until the cat were either restored or paid for at
+a fixed price. Their houses are made of four posts or trees set
+in the ground, and are covered with boughs; and their ordinary
+food is roots, with such fish as they take, which are in great
+plenty. Among these are flying fishes, similar to those seen in
+the West India seas. Our people endeavoured to salt some of the
+fish which they caught on the coast of Africa, but some said that
+they would not take salt, and must therefore be eaten
+immediately; while others alleged that, if salted immediately
+when taken, they would keep good for ten or twelve days. Part of
+the salt meat taken by our people from England became putrid
+while on the coast of Africa, yet turned sweet again after their
+return to a temperate region. They have a strange method of
+making bread, which is as follows: They grind, with their hands,
+between two stones, as much corn into meal as they think may
+suffice the family, and making this flour into a paste with
+water, they knead it into thin cakes, which are stuck upon the
+posts of their houses and baked or dried by the heat of the sun;
+so that when the master of the house or any of the family are in
+want of bread, they take it down from the post and eat.</p>
+
+<p>They have very fair wheat, the ear of which is two
+hand-breadths long and as big as a great bulrush, the stem or
+straw being almost as thick as a man's little finger. The grains
+are white and round, shining like pearls that have lost their
+lustre, and about the size of our pease. Almost their whole
+substance turns to flour, leaving very little bran. The ear is
+inclosed in three blades, each about two inches broad, and longer
+than the ear; and in one of them I counted 260 grains of corn. By
+this fruitfulness, the sun seems in some measure to compensate
+for the trouble and distress produced by its excessive heat.
+Their drink is either water, or the juice which drops from cut
+branches of the palmito, a barren palm or date tree; to collect
+which they hang great gourds to the cut branches every evening,
+or set them on the ground under the trees, to receive the juice
+which issues during the night. Our people said that this juice
+tasted like whey, but sweeter and more pleasant. The branches of
+the palmito are cut every evening to obtain this juice, as the
+heat of the sun during the day dries up and sears over the wound.
+They have likewise large beans, as big as chesnuts, and very
+hard, having shells instead of husks or pods. While formerly
+describing the fruit containing the <i>grains</i> or Guinea
+pepper, called by the physicians <i>grana paradisi</i>, I
+remarked that they have holes through them, as in effect they
+have when brought to us; but I have been since informed, that
+these holes are made on purpose to put strings or twigs through,
+for hanging up the fruit to dry in the sun. This fruit grows on a
+plant which does not rise above eighteen inches or two feet above
+the ground.</p>
+
+<p>At their coming home, the keels and bottoms of the ships were
+strangely overgrown with certain shells, two inches or more in
+length, as thick as they could stand, and so large that a man
+might put his thumb into their mouths. It is affirmed that a
+certain slimy substance grows in these shells, which falls
+afterwards into the sea, and is changed into the bird called
+barnacles[223]. Similar shells have been seen on ships coming
+from Ireland, but these Irish barnacles do not exceed half an
+inch long. I saw the Primrose in dock, after her return from
+Guinea, having her bottom entirely covered over with these
+shells, which in my judgment must have greatly impeded her
+sailing. Their ships also were in many places eaten into by the
+worms called <i>Bromas</i> or <i>Bissas</i>, which are mentioned
+in the Decades[224]. These worms creep between the planks, which
+they eat through in many places.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 223: This is an old fable not worth
+confuting. The Barnacle goose or clakis of Willoughby, anas
+erythropus of Linnaeus, called likewise tree-goose, anciently
+supposed to be generated from drift wood, or rather from the
+<i>lepas anatifera</i> or multivalve shell, called barnacle,
+which is often found on the bottoms of ships.--See Pennant's
+Brit. Zool. 4to. 1776. V. II. 488, and Vol. IV.
+64.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 224: Meaning the Decades of Peter Martyr,
+part of which book was translated and published by Richard
+Eden.--Astl I. 149. b.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In this voyage, though they sailed to Guinea in seven weeks,
+they took twenty to return; owing to this cause, as they
+reported, that about the coast at Cape Verd the wind was
+continually east, so that they were obliged to stand far out into
+the ocean, in search of a western wind to bring them home. In
+this last voyage about twenty-four of the men died, many of them
+between the Azores and England, after their return into the cold
+or temperate region. They brought with them several black
+slaves[225], some of whom were tall strong men, who could well
+agree with our meats and drinks. The cold and moist air of
+England somewhat offended them; yet men who are born in hot
+regions can much better endure cold, than those of cold regions
+can bear heat; because violent heat dissolves the radical
+moisture of the human body, while cold concentrates and preserves
+it. It is to be considered as among the secrets of nature, that
+while all parts of Africa under the equator, and for some way on
+both sides, are excessively hot, and inhabited by black people,
+such regions in the West Indies [America], under the same
+parallels, are very temperate, and the natives are neither black,
+nor have they short curled wool on their heads like the Africans;
+but are of an olive colour, with long black hair. The cause of
+this difference is explained in various places of the
+<i>Decades</i>. Some of those who were upon this voyage told me
+that on the 14th of March they had the sun to the north of them
+at noon.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 225: In a side note, <i>five blacke
+moors</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage to Guinea in 1555, by William Towerson, Merchant of
+London</i>[226].</p>
+
+<p>On Monday the 30th of September 1555, we sailed from the
+harbour of Newport, in the Isle of Wight, with two good ships,
+the Hart and the Hind, both belonging to London, of which John
+Ralph and William Carters were masters, bound on a voyage for the
+river Sestos, in Guinea, and other harbours in that
+neighbourhood. Owing to variable winds, we could not reach
+Dartmouth before the 14th of October; and having continued there
+till the 20th of that month, we warpt out of the harbour, and set
+sail to the S.W. and by next morning had run 30 leagues. On the
+1st November, by the reckoning of our master, we were in lat.
+31&deg; N. and that day we ran 40 leagues. The 2d we ran 36
+leagues; and on the 3d we had sight of Porto Santo, a small
+island about three leagues long and one and a-half broad,
+belonging to the Portuguese, and lying in the ocean. As we came
+towards it from the N.N.W. it seemed like two small hills near
+each other. The east end of the island is a high land like a
+saddle, having a valley which gives it that appearance; while the
+west end is lower, with several small round hillocks[227]. Porto
+Santo is in about lat. 33&deg; N. The same day at 11 o'clock A.M.
+we raised the island of Madeira, which is 12 leagues S.W. from
+Porto Santo. Madeira is a fine and fertile island belonging to
+the Portuguese, and rises from afar like one great high mountain.
+By 3 P.M. being athwart of Porto Santo, we set our course to the
+S.W. leaving both Madeira and Porto Santo to the eastwards, being
+the first land we had seen after leaving England. About three
+next morning we were abreast of Madeira, within three leagues of
+its west end, and were becalmed under its high land. We estimated
+having run 30 leagues in the past day and night. The 4th we
+remained becalmed under the west end of Madeira till 1 P.M. when
+the wind sprung up at east, and we continued our course S.W.
+making in the rest of that day 15 leagues. The 5th we ran 15
+leagues.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 226: Hakluyt, II. 480, Astl. I. 150.--From
+several passages in this journal it appears that Towerson had
+been on the former voyage to Guinea with Captain Lock; but in the
+present voyage he appears to have acted as captain or chief
+director, and seems to have been the author of the journal here
+adopted from Hakluyt.--Astl. I. 150, 2.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 227: The saddle-backed hills of old
+navigators, are to be considered in reference to the old
+demipique or war-saddle, having high abrupt peaks, or hummocks,
+at each end, with a flattish hollow between.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 6th in the morning we got sight of <i>Teneriffe</i>,
+otherwise called the Peak, being very high land, with a peak on
+the top like a sugar loaf; and the same night we got sight of
+<i>Palma</i>, which also is high land and W. from Teneriffe
+[W.N.W.] The 7th we saw <i>Gomera</i>, an island about 12 leagues
+S.E. from Palma, and eight W.S.W. from Teneriffe; and lest we
+might have been becalmed under Teneriffe, we left both it and
+Gomera to the east, and passed between Palma and Gomera. This day
+and night our course was 30 leagues. These islands, called the
+Canaries, are 60 leagues from Madeira, and there are other three
+islands in the group to the eastward of Teneriffe, named <i>Gran
+Canarea</i>, <i>Fuertaventura</i>, and <i>Lancerota</i>, none of
+which we saw. All these islands are inhabited by Spaniards. On
+this day likewise we got sight of the Isle of <i>Ferro</i>, which
+is 13 leagues south from Gomera, and belongs to the Spaniards
+like the others. We were unable all this day or the following
+night to get beyond Ferro, unless we had chosen to go to the
+westwards, which had been much out of our proper course;
+wherefore we put about, and stood back five hours E.N.E. in hope
+of being able to clear it next tack, the wind keeping always S.E.
+which is not often met with in that latitude by navigators, as it
+generally keeps in the N.E. and E.N.E. Next morning, being on the
+other tack, we were nearly close in with the island, but had room
+enough to get clear past.</p>
+
+<p>The 8th, our due course to fetch the Barbary coast being S.E.
+by E. we were unable to keep it by reason of the wind being
+scant, but lay as near it as we could, running that day and night
+25 leagues. The 9th we ran 30 leagues; the 10th 25; and 11th, 24
+leagues. The 12th we saw a sail under our lee, which we thought
+to be a fishing bark, and stood down to speak with her; but in an
+hour there came on so thick a fog that we could neither see that
+vessel nor our consort the Hind. We accordingly shot off several
+guns to give notice to the Hind of our situation, but she did not
+hear or answer us. In the afternoon the Hind fired a gun, which
+we heard and answered with another gun. About half an hour
+afterwards the fog cleared away, and we were within four leagues
+of the Barbary coast, when sounding we had 14 fathoms water. The
+bark also had come <i>room</i>[228] with us, and anchored here
+likewise, the wind being contrary for going down the coast, or to
+the southwards. On falling in with the land, we could not judge
+precisely whereabout we were, most of that coast being low, the
+forepart of the coast being white like chalk or sand, <i>and very
+deep unto the hard shore</i>[229]. Immediately on coming to
+anchor we began to fish, and got abundance of that kind which the
+Portuguese call <i>Pergosses</i>, the French <i>saders</i>, and
+our men salt-water <i>breams</i>. Before the fog entirely cleared
+away, the vessel we had followed shaped such a course that we
+lost sight of her, chiefly because we had bore up to find the
+Hind again. Our pilot reckoned that we were upon that part of the
+coast which is 16 leagues eastwards[230] from the Rio del
+Oro.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 228: This antiquated nautical word, which
+occurred before in the journal of Don Juan de Castro, is here
+obviously going down the wind, large, or to
+leeward.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 229: The meaning of this passage is not
+obvious, and seems to want some words to make out the meaning: It
+may be that the shore is very steep, or that the water continues
+deep close to the shore.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 230: Eastwards from Rio del Oro is directly
+into the land; so that they must either have been N.N.E. or
+S.S.W. probably the former.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the afternoon of the 13th we spied a sail coming towards
+us, which we judged to be that we had seen the day before, and we
+immediately caused the Hind to weigh anchor and go towards her,
+manning likewise our own skiff, to lay her on board or to learn
+what she was, and within half an hour we weighed also. When the
+vessel noticed us, she put about and sailed from us; and soon
+after there came on so heavy a fog that we could not see her, and
+as the fog continued the whole night we had to quit the chase. In
+the afternoon the wind came about fair, so that we were able to
+shape a course S.W. by W. to keep clear of the coast, and ran
+that night 16 leagues. The 14th in the morning was very foggy,
+but the fog cleared away about noon, when we espied a caravel of
+60 tons fishing, and sent our skiff on board with five men
+unarmed. For haste the caravel slipped her anchors and set sail,
+yet our unarmed boat overtook her and made her strike sail, and
+brought her away, though she had fourteen or fifteen men on
+board, all armed, but they had not the heart to resist. On coming
+to us they anchored, as we were likewise, because the wind had
+become foul; on which I made our skiff come for me, and I went on
+board the caravel, to take care that no harm was offered, and to
+see if they would spare us any thing for our money. Accordingly
+we got from them three <i>tapnets</i> of figs, two small jars of
+oil, two pipes of water, and four hogsheads of salt fish, which
+they had taken on the coast, besides some fresh fish, which they
+held of no value, as they are so plentiful on that coast that one
+man may often take as many in an hour or less as will serve
+twenty men a whole day. For these things, some wine we drank
+while on board their ship, and three or four great cans which
+they sent on board our ships, I paid them 27 pistoles, being
+twice as much as they would willingly have taken. We then let
+them go to their anchor and cable which they had slipped, and
+assisted them to recover. After this we made sail, but the wind
+obliged us to come to anchor again about 12 leagues from the Rio
+del Oro, as we were informed by the Portuguese. There were five
+other caravels in this place, but immediately on our appearance
+they all made away for fear of us.</p>
+
+<p>The 15th we continued at anchor, as the wind was still foul.
+The 16th we set sail and run our course 40 leagues, being this
+day, according to our pilots, right under the Tropic of Cancer,
+in lat. 23&deg; 30' N. The 17th we ran 25 leagues, mostly in
+sight of the coast of Barbary. The 18th we ran 30 leagues, and at
+noon, by the reckoning of our pilots, were abreast of Cape
+Blanco. The 22d they reckoned we were abreast of Cape Verd. The
+12th of December we got sight of the coast of Guinea, towards
+which we immediately hauled, standing to the N.E. and about 12 at
+night, being less than two leagues from the shore, we lay to and
+sounded, finding 18 fathoms water. We soon afterwards saw a light
+between us and the shore, which we thought might have been a
+ship, from which circumstance we judged ourselves off the river
+Sestro, and we immediately came to anchor, armed our tops, and
+made all clear for action, suspecting it might be some Portuguese
+or French ship. In the morning we saw no ship whatever, but
+espied four rocks about two English miles from us, one being a
+large rock and the other three small; whence we concluded that
+the light seen during the night had been on shore. We then
+weighed and stood E.S.E. along shore, because the master did not
+rightly know the place, but thought we were still to the westward
+of Sestro river. All along this coast the land is low, and full
+of high trees close to the shore, so that no one can know what
+place he falls in with, except by means of the latitude. I think
+we ran 16 leagues that day, as we had all night a stiff gale,
+with much thunder and lightning.</p>
+
+<p>For most port of the 13th we ran E.S.E. along the coast,
+within two leagues of the land, finding the shore all covered
+with tall trees to the water's edge, and great rocks hard by the
+beach, on which the billows continually broke in white foam, so
+high that the surf might easily be seen at four leagues distance,
+and in such a manner that no boat could possibly go to land. At
+noon our masters and pilots took the altitude of the sun, by
+which they judged that we were 24 leagues beyond the river Sestro
+to the eastwards, wherefore we hauled in towards the shore and
+came to anchor within two English miles of the land in 15
+fathoms, the water being so smooth that we might have rode with a
+hawser. We employed the afternoon to rig out our boat with a
+sail, for the purpose of sending her along shore in search of a
+place to take in water, as we could not go back to the river
+Sestro, because the wind is always contrary and the current sets
+continually to the eastwards. The 14th we weighed anchor and
+plied up along the coast to the W.N.W. sending our boats close in
+shore to seek a watering-place, which they found about noon. At
+this time, being far out to sea, we fell in with several small
+long and narrow boats or canoes of the natives, in each of which
+was one man only. We gave them bread, which they accepted and eat
+readily. About 4 P.M. our boats came off to us with fresh water;
+and at night we anchored off the mouth of a river. The 15th we
+weighed and stood near the shore, sounding all the way, finding
+sometimes a rocky bottom, at other times good ground, and never
+less than seven fathoms. Finally, we cast anchor within an
+English mile of the shore, in seven and a half fathoms, directly
+over against the mouth of the river, and then sent our boats for
+water, which they got very good after rowing a mile up the river.
+This river, called St Vincent in the chart, is by estimation
+about eight leagues beyond the river Sestro, but is so hard to
+find that a boat may be within half a mile of it without being
+able to discover any river, as a ledge of rocks of greater extent
+than its breadth lies directly before its mouth, so that the
+boats had to go a considerable way between that ledge and the
+shore before coming to its mouth. When once in, it is a great
+river, having several others that fall into it. The entrance is
+somewhat difficult, as the surf is rather high, but after getting
+in it is as smooth as the Thames.[231] Upon this river, near the
+sea, the inhabitants are tall large men, going entirely naked,
+except a clout about a quarter of a yard long before their
+middle, made of the bark of trees, yet resembling cloth, as the
+bark used for this purpose can be spun like flax. Some also wear
+a similar cloth on their heads, painted with sundry colours, but
+most of them go bareheaded, having their heads clipped and shorn
+in sundry ways, and most of them have their bodies punctured or
+slashed in various figures like a leathern jerkin. The men and
+women go so much alike, that a woman is only to be known from a
+man by her breasts, which are mostly long and hanging down like
+the udder of a milch goat.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 231: Sestro river, in the Complete Neptune
+of the Rev. James Stanier Clarke, chart. 2, is called Sesters, in
+lat. 5&deg; 30' N. long. 9&deg; 10' W. from Greenwich. The river
+St Vincent of the text does not appear in that chart, but nearly
+at the indicated distance to the E.S.E. is one named
+Sangwin.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Soon after coming to anchor on the 15th December, we went up
+the river in our skiff, carrying with us certain basons,
+<i>manels</i>, &amp;c. for sale. We procured that day one
+hogshead and 100 pounds weight of grains,[232] and two elephants
+teeth, getting both at an easy rate. We sold the natives basons,
+<i>maneilios</i>, and <i>margarits</i>,[233] but basons were most
+in request, and for most of these we got thirty pounds of
+<i>grains</i> in exchange for each, and gave for an elephants
+tooth of thirty pounds weight six basons. We went again up the
+river on the 16th, in the morning, taking some of every kind of
+merchandise along with us in our boat, and shewed them to the
+negroes, but they made light of every thing, even of the basons,
+manellios, and margarite which they had bought the day before;
+yet they would have given us some grains for our basons, but so
+very little that we did not that day get above 100 pounds weight,
+through their chief or captain, who would not suffer any one to
+sell but through his mediation and at his price. He was so
+cunning that he would not give above 15 pounds of grains for a
+bason, and would sometimes offer us a small dishful, whereas we
+had a basket full for each the day before. Seeing that we would
+not accept what he offered, the captain of the negroes went away,
+and caused all the boats to depart likewise, thinking perhaps
+that we would have followed and agreed to his terms; but on
+perceiving his drift, we hauled up our grapnel and went away
+likewise. We landed at a small town, to see the manners of the
+people, and about 60 of them came about us, being at first shy,
+and seemingly afraid of us; but seeing we did them no harm, they
+came up in a familiar manner, and took us by the hand. We then
+went into their town, which consisted of about twenty small
+hovels, covered over with large leaves. All the sides were open,
+and the floor was raised like a scaffold about a yard high, where
+they work many ingenious things of the barks of trees, and there
+also they sleep. In some of these hovels they work in iron,
+making very pretty heads for javelins, tools for making their
+boats, and various other things, the women working as well as the
+men.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 232: That is grains of paradise, so the
+Italians called Guinea pepper when they first saw it, not knowing
+what it was. We took the name from them, and hence came the name
+of the Grain Coast--Astl. I. 152, a.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 233: Margarits may possibly have been mock
+pearl beads; the manels or manellios were bracelets of some
+kind.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>While we were among them, several of the women danced and sung
+after their manner, by way of amusing us, but the sound was by no
+means agreeable to our ears. Their song was continually,</p>
+
+<p>Sakere, sakere, ho! ho!<br>
+Sakere, sakere, ho! ho!</p>
+
+<p>And with these words they kept leaping, dancing and clapping
+their hands. The only animals we saw among them were two goats, a
+few small dogs, and some hens. Having seen these things, we went
+on board our ships; and on seeing us depart, the chief of the
+other town sent two of his servants after us with a basket of
+grains, making signs to us that when we had slept, or next day,
+we should have plenty of grains if we came for them: Then shewing
+us his grains, he went away. Accordingly, next morning being the
+17th, thinking that some business might be done with the negroes
+as the captain sent for us, I sent the master with the rest of
+the merchants on shore, remaining myself on board, because they
+had esteemed our goods so lightly the day before. The captain
+accordingly came to our people after they went up the river,
+bringing grains with him, but not seeing me he made signs to know
+where I was, and was answered in the same manner that I was on
+board ship. He then inquired by signs who was captain, or Diago
+as they call it, and the master of the ship being pointed out to
+him, he began to shew his grains, but held them so unreasonably
+dear that no profit could be made of them; on which, and because
+they seemed to have no store, the master came away with only
+about 50 pounds of grains. Going on shore at the small town on
+their way back to the ships, some one of our people plucked a
+gourd which gave great offence to the negroes, on which many of
+them came with their darts and large targets, making signs for
+our men to depart; which our men did, as they had only one bow
+and two or three swords among them. As soon as they were on board
+we weighed and set sail, but the wind was from the sea, so that
+we could not clear certain rocks, for which reason we came again
+to anchor.</p>
+
+<p>This river called St Vincent is in lat. 4&deg; 30' N[234]. The
+tide at this place ebbs and flows every twelve hours, but while
+we were there the rise and fall did not exceed 9 feet. So far as
+we could see, the whole country was altogether covered with wood,
+all the kinds of trees being unknown to us, and of many different
+sorts, some having large leaves like gigantic docks, so high that
+a tall man is unable to reach their tops. By the sea-side there
+grow certain pease upon great and long stalks, one of which I
+measured and it was 27 paces long. These grow on the sand like
+trees, and so very near the sea that we could distinctly perceive
+by the water marks that the sea sometimes flows into the woods.
+All the trees and other plants of this country are continually
+green. Some of the women have exceedingly long breasts, but they
+are not all so. All day the wind blows from the sea, and all
+night from the land, though we found this to differ sometimes, at
+which our master was much surprised.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 234: This latitude would bring us to a
+river about half way between the Grand Sesters and Cape Palmas;
+but which does not agree with the former circumstances, as they
+could hardly have been so far to the S.E. without seeing Cape
+Palmas. The river Sangwin, which we have before supposed might be
+the St Vincent, is in lat. 5&deg; 20' N. almost a degree farther
+north.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This night at 9 o'clock the wind came to east, which used
+ordinarily to be at N.N.W. off shore[235]; yet we weighed and
+hauled off south to seawards, and next morning stood in again
+towards the land, whence we took in 6 tons of water for our ship,
+the Hind probably taking as much. On this part of the coast I
+could not find that the natives had any gold or other valuable
+article of trade, for indeed they are so savage and idle that
+they give not themselves the trouble to seek for any thing, for
+if they would take pains they might easily gather large
+quantities of grains, yet I do not believe there were two tons to
+be had in all that river. They have many fowls likewise in their
+woods, but the people are not at the trouble to catch them. While
+here I collected the following words of their language, all of
+which they speak very thick, often repeating one word three times
+successively, and always the last time longer than the two
+former.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 235: The text here is probably corrupt. The
+direct off-shore wind on the grain coast of Africa is N.E. The
+wind at N.N.W. certainly is in some degree off-shore, but very
+obliquely; and the wind at east is more direct from
+shore.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<pre>
+   Bezow! bezow!            Is their salutation.
+   Manegete afoye,[236],     Grains enough.
+   Crocow afoye,            Hens enough.
+   Zeramme afoye,           Have you enough?
+   Begge sacke,             Give me a knife.
+   Begge come,              Give me bread.
+   Borke,                   Silence!
+   Contrecke,               You lie!
+   Veede,                   Put forth, or empty.
+   Brekeke,                 Row!
+   Diago, or dabo,          Captain, or chief.
+</pre>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 236: In some maps the grain coast is named
+Malaguete, probably from this word, and consequently synonimous
+with the ordinary name. It is likewise called the Windward
+coast.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Towards night on the 18th, while sailing along the coast, we
+fell in with some boats or canoes, when the natives expressed by
+signs that we were abreast of a river where we might have grains,
+but we did not think it right to stop there, lest other ships
+might get before us. This river has three great rocks and five
+small ones lying before it, with one great tree and a small one
+close by the river, which exceed all the rest in height. This
+night we proceeded 10 leagues along the coast. About noon of the
+19th, while proceeding along shore, three boats came off to tell
+us we might have grains, and brought some to shew, but we did not
+choose to stop. Continuing our course we anchored at night,
+having run this day 10 leagues. On the 20th as the Hind had come
+to anchor near us among some rocks and foul ground, she lost a
+small anchor. While passing along shore about noon a negro came
+off to us as before, offering grains if we would go on shore, and
+where we anchored at night another brought us a similar
+intimation, besides which a fire was kindled on shore, as if
+indicating where we might land, which was likewise done on other
+parts of the coast when they saw us anchored. Wherever we
+happened to anchor on this coast from our first watering place,
+we always found the tide [of flood?] running to the westwards,
+and saw many rocks close along shore, many others being a league
+out to sea. This day we ran 12 leagues. The 21st though we sailed
+all day with a brisk gale, yet so strong were the tides against
+us that we were only able to make out 6 leagues. This day
+likewise some negroes came off to us, offering to deal in grains
+if we would land. The 22d we ran all day and night to a double
+point called Cabo das Palmas[237].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 237: Reckoning the course run as expressed
+in the text, the distance measured back from Cape Palmas brings
+us very nearly to Sangwin for the river St Vincent of Towerson,
+as formerly conjectured.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 23d about 3 o'clock we were abreast of the point, and
+before we came to the western part of it we saw a great ledge of
+rocks which lie out to the west of it about 3 leagues, and a
+league or more from the shore. We soon after got sight of the
+eastern side of this cape, which is 4 leagues from the west side.
+Upon both corners of this cape there are two green spots like
+meadows, and to the westwards of this cape the land forms a bay,
+by which it may be easily known. Four leagues farther on there is
+a head-land jutting out to sea, and about two leagues farther on
+there is a great bay, seemingly the entrance to a river, before
+which we anchored all that night, lest we should overshoot a
+river where, in the voyage of last year, 1554, they got all their
+elephants teeth. Cape Palmas is in lat. 4&deg; 30' N. between
+which and the river Sestro the greatest abundance of grains is to
+be had, while beyond this cape very little is got. Where we
+anchored this night, we found that the tide now ran to the
+eastwards, while on the other side of the cape it went to the
+N.W. This day we ran about 16 leagues.</p>
+
+<p>While continuing our course on the 24th about 8 o'clock, some
+boats came off to us bringing small soft eggs without shells, and
+made signs that we might have fresh water and goats by going on
+shore. As the master judged this might be the river of which we
+were in search, we cast anchor and sent our boat on shore with a
+person who knew the river. On coming near the shore he perceived
+that it was not the river, and came therefore back again, and
+went along shore by the help of sails and oars, upon which we
+weighed and sailed likewise along shore. Being now 13 leagues
+past the cape, the master observed a place which he believed
+might be the river, when we were in fact two miles past it. At
+this time the boat came off to the ship, reporting that there was
+no river; yet we came to anchor, after which the master and I
+went in the boat with five men, and on coming near the shore he
+saw that it was the river for which he sought. We then rowed in
+with much difficulty, the entrance being very much obstructed by
+a heavy surf. After entering, several boats came off to us,
+informing us by signs that they had elephants teeth, and brought
+us one of 8 pounds and a small one only one pound weight, both of
+which we bought. Then they brought some other teeth to the river
+side, giving us to understand by signs that they would sell them
+to us if we came next day. We then gave a <i>manillio</i> each to
+two chiefs, and departed to the ships. We sent another boat to a
+different place on shore, where some of the natives in the canoes
+at sea made signs that fresh water was to be had; and on going
+there they found a town but no river, yet the people brought them
+fresh water and shewed an elephants tooth, making signs that they
+would sell them such next day. This river lies 13 leagues beyond
+Cape Palmas, having a rock to the westwards about a league out to
+sea, and there juts out from the river a point of land on which
+grow five trees which may be discerned two or three leagues off
+when coming from the westwards; but the river itself cannot be
+seen till close upon it, and then a small town may be seen on
+either side, each of which has a <i>diago</i> or captain. The
+river is small, but the water is fresh and good[238]. Two miles
+beyond the river, where the other town lies, another point runs
+oat to sea, which is green like a meadow, having only six trees
+growing upon it, all distant from each other, which is a good
+mark to know it by, as I have not seen as much bare land on the
+whole coast[239]. In this place, and three or four leagues to the
+westwards, there grow many palm trees, from which the natives
+have their palm wine, all along shore. These trees are easily
+known almost two leagues off, as they are very straight, tall and
+white bodied, and thickest in the middle, having no limbs or
+boughs, but only a round bush of leaves at the top. In this top
+the natives bore a hole, to which they hang a bottle or empty
+gourd, and in this they receive the juice that runs from the
+tree, which is their wine.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 238: From the indicated distance eastwards
+from Cape Palmas, and the description in the text, the river and
+point in question seem those called Tabou, in long. 7&deg; 10' W.
+from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 239: It is hardly necessary to observe that
+these are very bad land-marks, being subject to alteration from
+many causes; besides that this description is above 250 years
+old.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From Cape Palmas to Cape <i>Tres-puntas</i> or Three-points,
+the distance is 100 leagues east[240]; and from Cape Three-points
+to the port where we proposed to sell our cloth are other 40
+leagues[241]. The language here, as far as I could judge, seemed
+to differ little from that formerly mentioned. The people
+likewise dress much in the same manner, or almost naked, but they
+were gentler in their manners and better looking. They chiefly
+coveted manillios and margarites, and cared very little for the
+rest of our wares. About 9 o'clock A.M. some boats came off to us
+from both towns, bringing with them some elephants teeth, and
+having made me swear by the water of the sea that I would do them
+no harm, three or four of them came on board, and we entertained
+them with such things as we had, of which they eat and drank as
+freely as ourselves. We then bought all their teeth, of which
+they had 14, 10 being small. On going away, they desired us to
+come to their towns next day. Not wishing to trifle our time at
+this place, I desired the master to go on the 26th with two of
+our merchants to one of the towns, while I went with one merchant
+to the other town, the two towns being three miles asunder.
+Taking with us to both places some of every kind of merchandise
+that we had, the master got nine rather small teeth at one town,
+while at the other I got eleven not large. Leaving on board with
+the [other] master an assortment of manillios, he bought 12 teeth
+in our absence from people who came to the ships. I bought
+likewise a small goat, and the master bought five small hens at
+the other town. Finding that nothing more was to be done here, as
+they had no more teeth, we went on board by one o'clock, P.M. and
+immediately weighed anchor, continuing our progress eastward,
+always within sight of land.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 240: Between these two points is what is
+called the ivory coast of Guinea: After which is the gold coast
+to Cape St Pauls; and then the slave coast.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 241: Forty leagues E.N.E. along the gold
+coast bring us to Saccoom or Accra, in the country called
+Aquamboo.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 28th, the wind turning contrary, we stood out to sea, and
+when the wind changed from the seaward we again stood for the
+land, which we fell in with at a great round red cliff, not very
+high, having to the eastwards a smaller red cliff, and right
+above that towards the inland a round green hummock, which we
+took to be covered with trees. In the last 24 hours we only made
+good about 4 leagues. The 29th coming near the shore, we noticed
+the before mentioned red cliff to have a large tuft of trees on
+its summit. All to the westwards as far as we could see was full
+of red cliffs, and all along the shore, both on the tops of these
+cliffs, and in the low intervals between them, was everywhere
+full of wood. Within a mile of the great cliff to the eastwards
+there was a river, and no cliffs that we could see beyond it,
+except one small cliff very near its eastern side. At this place
+we had the wind in the night at north off the land, and in the
+day south from the sea, which was not usual, as we were assured
+by such of our people as had been there before, being commonly
+N.W. and S.W. We ran this day and night 12 leagues. The 31st we
+went our course by the shore, which was everywhere low and
+covered with wood, with no rocks. This morning many boats of the
+negroes came out to fish, being larger than those we had seen
+hitherto but of similar make, some of them having five men. In
+the afternoon, about 3 o'clock we had sight of a town by the
+sea-side, which our pilots judged to be 25 leagues west from Cape
+Three-points.</p>
+
+<p>On the morning of the 3d January 1556, we fell in with Cape
+Three-points, having passed during the night one of the
+Portuguese castles, which is 8 leagues west from this point[242].
+This is a very high land all grown over with trees, and on coming
+nearer we perceived three head-lands, having a kind of two bays
+between them, which open directly westwards. The farthest out to
+sea is the eastern cape. The middle cape is not above a league
+from the western cape, though the chart we had laid them down as
+3 leagues asunder. Right before the point of the middle cape
+there is a small rock near it, which cannot be seen from the cape
+itself, except one be near the shore, and on the top of this cape
+there is a great tuft of trees. When abreast of this cape there
+is seen close beside it a round green hummock rising from the
+main-land. The eastern cape is about a league from the middle
+one, and is high land like the other two, and between these there
+is a little head or point of land, and several rocks close in
+shore. About 8 leagues before we came to cape Three-points the
+coast trends S.E. by E., and after passing the cape it runs N.E.
+by E. About two leagues after passing Cape Three-points there is
+a low glade for about two miles in length, after which the land
+becomes again high, with several successive points or headlands,
+the first of which has several rocks out to sea. The middle of
+the three capes runs farthest out to sea southwards, so that it
+can be seen a great way off from the coast, when it appears to
+rise with two small rocks. We ran this day 8 leagues, and
+anchored before night, lest we might overshoot a town named St
+Johns[243]. In the afternoon a boat with five men came off from
+the shore and ranged alongside of us, as if looking at our flags,
+but would not come near, and after looking at us for some time
+went back to the land. In the morning of the 4th, while sailing
+along the coast, we espied a ledge of rocks close to the shore,
+to the westwards of which were two green hills joining together,
+with a hollow between them resembling a saddle; and, as the
+master thought the town we were looking for stood within these
+rocks, we manned our boats, taking with us a quantity of cloth
+and other goods, with which we rowed on shore; but after going
+some way along the shore without finding any town, we returned
+again on board. About two leagues to the eastwards from the two
+saddle hills, a ledge of rocks stretches almost two miles out to
+sea, beyond which is a great bay running N.N.W. while the general
+stretch of the coast at this place is from S.W. by W. to N.E. by
+E. Having with a gentle gale run past that uttermost headland, we
+saw a great red cliff, which the master again judged to be near
+the town of St Johns, on which we again took our boat and
+merchandise and rowed to the shore. We actually found a town on
+the top of a hill to which we directed our course, and on seeing
+us a considerable number of the inhabitants collected together
+and waved a piece of cloth as a signal for us to come in, on
+which we rowed into an excellent bay to eastward of the cliff on
+which the town stands, and on getting fairly into the bay we let
+drop our grapnel. After remaining some time, a boat or canoe came
+off to us and one of the men in her shewed us a piece of gold
+about half a crown weight, requiring us to give them our measure
+and weight that they might shew them to their captain. We
+accordingly gave them a measure of two ells, and a weight of two
+<i>angels</i>, as the principles on which we meant to deal. He
+took these on shore to their captain; and then brought us back a
+measure of two ells one quarter and a half, and one
+<i>crusado</i> weight of gold, making signs that they would give
+so much weight of gold for that measure of cloth and no more; but
+this we refused. After staying about an hour, and finding that
+they would not deal on our principles, besides understanding that
+the best places for trade were all before us, we returned to our
+ships, weighed anchor, and stood along shore, going before in the
+boat.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 242: This was probably Fort St Antonio, at
+the mouth of the river Aximer or Ashim.--Astl. I. 155.
+a.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 243: St Johns river is about 12 leagues
+E.N.E. of Cape Three-points, nearly in lat. 5&deg; N. long 2&deg;
+10' W.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Having sailed about a league, we came to a point of land
+having a long ledge of rocks running out from it to seawards like
+the others; and on passing the ledge our master noticed a place
+which he said was assuredly the town of Don John[244]. As the
+night approached we could not see it very distinctly, wherefore
+we came to anchor as near as possible. On the morning of the 5th
+it was recognized to be the town we wanted, wherefore we manned
+our boats and went towards the shore; but knowing that the
+Portuguese had taken away a man from that place the year before,
+and had afterwards shot at them with great <i>bases</i>[245],
+driving them from the place, we let go our grapnel almost a
+<i>base</i> shot from shore, and lay there near two hours without
+any boat coming off to us. At this time some of our men who had
+gone in the Hinds boat into the bay to the eastward of the town,
+where they found a fine fresh river, waved to us to join them,
+because the negroes were seen coming down to that place, which we
+did. Immediately afterwards the negroes came down to the shore,
+and gave us to know by signs that they had gold, but none of them
+would come to our boats, neither indeed did we see that they had
+any canoes to come in, so that we suspected the Portuguese had
+spoiled their boats, as we saw half their town in ruins.
+Wherefore, having tarried a good while, and seeing that they did
+not come to us, and as we were well armed, we run the heads of
+both boats on shore. Upon this the captain of the town came
+towards us with his dart in his hand, followed by six tall men
+each of whom had a dart and target. Their darts were all headed
+with iron well-fashioned and sharp. After this party came another
+negro carrying the captains stool. We all saluted the captain
+respectfully, pulling off our caps and bowing to him; but he,
+seeming to consider himself as a man of consequence, did not move
+his cap in return, and gravely sat down on his stool, hardly
+inclining his body in return to our salute: All his attendants
+however, took off their caps and bowed to us.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 244: Called St Johns twice before; and we
+shall see that they came to another town afterwards called Don
+Johns, more to the east, whence it appears that the Don John of
+the text here is an error for St John.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 245: Probably musketoons or blunderbusses,
+and certainly some species of gun or fire-arm.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This chief was clothed from the loins downwards, with a cloth
+of the country manufacture, wrapped about him and made fast with
+a girdle round his waist, having a cap of the country cloth on
+his head, all his body above the loins with his legs and feet
+being bare. Some of his attendants had cloths about their loins,
+while others had only a clout between their legs, fastened before
+and behind to their girdles; having likewise caps on their heads
+of their own making, some made of basket-work, and others like a
+large wide purse of wild beast skins. All their cloth, girdles,
+fishing lines, and other such things, are made from the bark of
+certain trees, very neatly manufactured. They fabricate likewise
+all such iron implements as they use very artificially; such as
+the heads of their darts, fish-hooks, <i>hooking</i> irons,
+<i>ironheads</i>, and great daggers, some of these last being as
+long as a bill hook, or woodcutters knife, very sharp on both
+sides and bent like a Turkish cymeter, and most of the men have
+such a dagger hanging on their left side. Their targets are made
+of the same materials with their cloths, very closely wrought,
+very large and of an oblong square form, somewhat longer than
+broad, so that when they kneel on the ground the target entirely
+covers their whole body. Their bows are short and tolerably
+strong, as much as a man is able to draw with one finger, and the
+string is made of the bark of a tree, made flat, and a quarter of
+an inch broad. I have not seen any of their arrows, as they were
+all close wrapped up, and I was so busily engaged in traffic that
+I had not leisure to get them opened out for my inspection. They
+have also the art to work up their gold into very pretty
+ornaments.</p>
+
+<p>When the captain had taken his seat on the stool, I sent him
+as a present two ells of cloth and two basins, and he sent back
+for our weight and measure, on which I sent him a weight of two
+angels, and informed him that such was our price in gold for two
+ells, or the measure I had already sent him. This rule of traffic
+he absolutely refused, and would not suffer his people to buy any
+thing but basins of brass or latten; so that we sold that day 74
+brass basins for about half an angel weight each, and nine white
+basins for about a quarter of an angel each. We shewed them some
+of all our other wares, but they did not care for any of them.
+About two o'clock, P.M. the chief returned again, and presented
+me a hen and two great roots, which I accepted, and he then made
+me understand by signs, that many people would come from the
+country that night to trade with me, who would bring great store
+of gold. Accordingly about 4 o'clock there came about 100 men
+under 3 chiefs, all well equipped with darts and bows; and when
+they came to us, every man stuck his dart into the ground in
+token of peace, all the chiefs having their stools with them, sat
+down, after which they sent a youth on board our boat who brought
+a measure of an ell, a quarter and a sixteenth, making us
+understand that they would have four times that measure in cloth
+for the weight in gold of an angel and 12 grains. I offered him
+two ells for that weight, for which I had before demanded two
+angels; but this he despised, and stuck to the four measures,
+being 5-1/4 ells. When it grew late and I motioned to go away, he
+came to four ells for the above weight, and as he and I could not
+agree we went back to the ships. This day we took for basins 6
+ounces a half and an eighth of gold.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 6th, we well manned our boats and the
+skiff, being in some fear of the Portuguese, who had taken away a
+man from the ships in the year before; and as the negroes had not
+canoes, we went near the shore to them. The young man who had
+been with us the night before was again sent to us, and he seemed
+to have had intercourse with the Portuguese, as he could speak a
+little of that language, and was quite expert in weights and
+measures. At his coming he offered us, as before, an angel and 12
+grains for four ells, giving us to understand, if we would not
+deal on these terms, we might go away, which we did accordingly;
+but before going away, I offered him three ells of rotten cloth
+for his weight, which he would not accept. We then went on board
+our ships, which lay a league off, after which we went back in
+the boats for sand ballast. When the chiefs saw that our boats
+had now no merchandise, but came only for water and sand, they at
+last agreed to give the weight for three ells. Therefore, when
+the boats returned to the ships, we put wares into both, and, for
+greater expedition, I and John Saville went in one boat, while
+the master, John Makeworth, and Richard Curligin, went in the
+other. That night I took for my part 52 ounces of gold, and those
+in the other boat took 8-1/4 ounces, all by the above weight and
+measure. When it grew late we returned to the ships, having taken
+that day in all 5 pounds of gold.</p>
+
+<p>We went on shore again on the 7th, and that day I took in our
+boat 3 pounds 19 ounces[246], so that we had sold most of the
+cloth we carried in the boat before noon, by which time many of
+the negroes were gone, and the rest seemed to have very little
+gold remaining; yet they made signs to us to bring them more
+latten basins, which I was not inclined to, not wishing to spend
+any more time there, but to push forwards for Don Johns town. But
+as John Saville and John Makeworth were anxious to go again, I
+consented, but did not go myself. They bartered goods for
+eighteen ounces of gold and came away, all the natives having
+departed at a certain cry or signal. While they were on shore, a
+young negroe who could speak a little Portuguese came on board
+with three others, and to him I sold 39 basins and two small
+white saucers, for three ounces of gold. From what I could pick
+out, this young fellow had been in the castle of Mina among the
+Portuguese, and had got away from them, for he told us that the
+Portuguese were bad men, who made the negroes slaves when they
+could take them, and put irons on their legs. He said also that
+the Portuguese used to hang all the French or English they could
+lay hold of. According to his account, the garrison in the castle
+consisted of 60 men, and that there came thither every year two
+ships, one large and the other a small caravel. He told me
+farther that Don John was at war with the Portuguese, which
+encouraged me to go to his town, which is only four leagues from
+the castle, and from which our men had been driven in the
+preceding year. This fellow came fearlessly on board, and
+immediately demanded why we had not brought back the men we took
+away the year before, for he knew that the English had taken away
+five negroes. We answered that they were in England, where they
+were well received, and remained there till they could speak the
+language, after which they were to be brought back to serve as
+interpreters between the English and the natives; with which
+answer he seemed quite satisfied, as he spoke no more of that
+matter.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 246: This is surely an error, as the troy
+or bullion pound contains only 12 ounces. We ought therefore to
+read 3 pounds 9 ounces--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Our boats being come on board, we weighed and set sail, and
+soon afterwards noticed a great fire on the shore, by the light
+of which we could discern a large white object, which was
+supposed to be the Portuguese castle of St George del Mina; and
+as it is very difficult to ply up to windward on this coast, in
+case of passing any place, we came to anchor for the night two
+leagues from the shore, lest we might overshoot the town of Don
+John in the night. This town lies in a great bay which is very
+deep[247], and there the people were chiefly desirous to procure
+basins and cloth, though they bought a few other trifles, as
+knives, horse-tails, and horns; and some of our people who were
+on shore sold a cap, a dagger, a hat, and other such articles.
+They shewed us a coarse kind of cloth, which I believe was of
+French manufacture: The wool was very coarse, and the stuff was
+striped with various colours, as green, white, yellow, &amp;c.
+Several of the negroes at this place wore necklaces of large
+glass beads of various colours. At this place I picked up a few
+words of their language, of which the following is a short
+specimen:</p>
+
+<pre>
+   Mattea! Mattea!       Is their salutation.
+   Dassee! Dassee!       I thank you.
+   Sheke,                Gold.
+   Cowrte,               Cut.
+   Cracca,               Knives.
+   Bassina,              Basins.
+   Foco, foco,           Cloth.
+   Molta, Much,          or great plenty[248]
+</pre>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 247: This abrupt account of a town, &amp;c.
+seems to refer back to that of St John, which they had just
+left.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 248: This language seems partly
+corrupted.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.
+
+<p>Two of the words in this short specimen have been evidently
+adopted from the Portuguese, <i>bassina</i> and
+<i>molta</i>.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 8th, we had sight of the Portuguese
+castle of Mina, but the morning being misty we could not see it
+distinctly till we were almost at Don Johns town, when the
+weather cleared up and we had a full view of the fort, beside
+which we noticed a white house on a hill, which seemed to be a
+chapel. We stood in towards the shore, within two English miles
+of Don Johns town, where we anchored in seven fathoms. We here
+found, as in many places before, that the current followed the
+course of the wind. At this place the land by the sea is in some
+places low, and in others high, everywhere covered with wood.
+This town of Don John[249] is but small, having only about twenty
+huts of the negroes, and is mostly surrounded by a fence about
+the height of a man, made of reeds or sedge, or some such
+material. After being at anchor two or three hours, without any
+person coming off to us, we manned our boats and put some
+merchandize into them, and then went with our boats very near the
+shore, where we anchored. They then sent off a man to us, who
+told us by signs that this was the town belonging to Don John,
+who was then in the interior, but would be home at sunset. He
+then demanded a reward, as most of these people do on first
+coming aboard, and on giving him an ell of cloth he went away,
+and we saw no more of him that night. In the morning of the 9th
+we went again near the shore with our boats, when a canoe came
+off to us, from the people in which we were informed by signs
+that Don John was not yet come home, but was expected that day.
+There came also a man in a canoe from another town a mile from
+this, called Don Devis[250], who shewed us gold, and made signs
+for us to go there. I then left John Saville and John Makeworth
+at the town of Don John, and went in the Hind to the other town,
+where we anchored, after which I went in the boat close to the
+shore near the town. Boats or canoes soon came off to us, shewing
+a measure of 4-1/2 yards, and a weight of an angel and 12 grains,
+as their rule of traffic, so that I could make no bargain. All
+this day our people lay off Don Johns town and did nothing, being
+told that he was still absent.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 249: Or Don <i>Juan</i>. This place stands
+at Cape Korea or Cors.--Astl. I. 158. a.
+
+<p>Cape Cors or Korea is now corruptly called Cape coast, at
+which there is an English fort or castle of the same name, in
+lat. 5&deg; 10' N. long. 1&deg; 16' W.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 250: Called afterwards the town of John De
+Viso.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We went on the 10th to the shore, when a canoe came off with a
+considerable quantity of gold; and after long haggling we at
+length reduced their measure to a nail less than three ells, and
+brought up their weight to an angel and twenty grains, after
+which, in about a quarter of an hour, I sold cloth for a pound
+and a quarter of an ounce of gold. They then made signs for me to
+tarry till they had parted their cloth among them on shore, after
+their custom, and away they went and spread all their cloth on
+the sand. At this time a man came running from the town and spoke
+with them, and immediately they all hastened away into the woods
+to hide their cloth and gold. We suspected some treachery, and
+though invited by signs to land we would not, but returned on
+board the Hind, whence we could see 30 men on the hill, whom we
+judged to be Portuguese, who went up to the top of the hill,
+where they drew up with a flag. Being desirous to know what the
+people of the Hart were about, I went to her in the Hind's boat,
+and on nearing her was surprised on seeing her shoot off two
+pieces of ordnance. I then made as much haste as possible, and
+met her boat and skiff coming with all speed from the shore. We
+all met on board the Hart, when they told me that they had been
+on shore all day, where they had given 3-1/2 yards of cloth to
+each of Don Johns two sons, and three basins between them, and
+had delivered 3 yards more cloth at the agreed weight of an angel
+and 12 grains. That while remaining on shore for an answer, some
+Portuguese had come running down the hill upon them, of which the
+negroes had given them warning shortly before, but they
+understood them not. The sons of Don John had conspired with the
+Portuguese against them, so that they were almost taken by
+surprise; yet they recovered their boat and pushed off from the
+shore, on which the Portuguese discharged their calivers or
+muskets at them, but hurt none of them; in revenge for which
+hostility, the people in the ship had fired off the two guns
+formerly mentioned. We now laid <i>bases[251]</i> into both the
+boats and the skiff, manning and arming them all, and went again
+towards the shore; but being unable to land on account of the
+wind, we lay off at the distance of about 200 yards, whence we
+fired against the Portuguese, but could not injure them as they
+were sheltered by the hill. They fired upon us in return from the
+hills and rocks, the negroes standing by to help them, more from
+fear than love. Seeing the negroes in such subjection that they
+durst not deal with us, we returned on board; and as the wind
+kept at east all night, we were unable to fetch the Hind, but I
+took the boat and went on board in the night, to see if any thing
+could be done there; and as in the morning we could perceive that
+the town was overawed by the Portuguese like the other, we
+weighed anchor and went along the coast to the eastwards.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 251: Formerly conjectured to be
+musquetoons, or wall-pieces.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This town of John de Viso stands on a hill like that of Don
+John, but had been recently burnt, so that there did not remain
+above six houses standing. Most of the gold on this part of the
+coast comes from the interior country, and doubtless, if the
+people durst bring their gold, which they are prevented from
+doing by the Portuguese, we might have got abundance; but they
+are under such subjection to the Portuguese, that they dare not
+trade with others.</p>
+
+<p>While coasting along on the 11th, we saw a small town about 4
+leagues to the east of that we last came from. About half a
+league farther was another town upon a hill, and half a league
+beyond that another large town on the coast, to which we went to
+try what could be done in the way of trade, meaning, if
+unsuccessful, to return to the towns we had left behind, in hopes
+that the Portuguese would leave them on our departure. All the
+way from the castle of Mina to this place, there were very high
+hills to be seen rising above other hills, all covered with wood,
+and the coast was lined with great red cliffs close to the sea.
+The boats of this coast are larger than those we had seen
+hitherto, as one of them could carry 12 men, but they were still
+of the same form with all the boats along the coast. About these
+towns there seemed few rivers, and their language seemed the same
+with that at Don Johns town, every person being able to speak a
+few words of Portuguese, which they constantly used to us. About
+five o'clock P.M. we saw 22 of the native boats or canoes going
+along shore to the westwards, on which we suspected some
+treachery; wherefore on the 12th we made sail farther along the
+coast eastwards, and descried more towns, in which there were
+some larger houses than any we had hitherto seen, and from these
+the people came out to look at us, but we could see no boats on
+the shore. Two miles beyond the eastermost town there are black
+rocks, which continue to the uttermost cape or point of the land
+for the space of a league, after which the land runs E.N.E. Some
+negroes came down to these black rocks, whence they waved a white
+flag for us to land; but as we were near the principal town, we
+continued our course along shore, and when we had opened the
+point of land we perceived another head-land about a league
+farther on, having a rock lying off to sea, which was thought to
+be the place of which were in search. On coming abreast of the
+town it was recognized, and having anchored within half a mile of
+the shore in five fathoms, with good ground, we put wares into
+our boat, and went near the shore to endeavour to open trade.
+Anchoring close to the shore, about 10 A.M. we saw many canoes on
+the beach, and some came past us, but no one would draw near,
+being, as we supposed, afraid of us, as four men had been
+forcibly taken away from thence the year before. Seeing that no
+one came off to us, we went again on board, expecting to make no
+sales; but towards evening a great number of people came to the
+shore and waved a white flag, as inviting us to land, after which
+their chief or captain came down with many men along with him,
+and sat down under a tree near the shore. On seeing this I took
+some things with me in the boat to present to him, and at length
+he sent off a boat to us which would not come near, but made
+signs for us to return next day. At length, by offering things
+for their captain, I enticed them into our boat, and gave them
+two ells of cloth, a latten basin, a white basin, a bottle, a
+large piece of beef, and six biscuits, which they received and
+made signs for us to come back next day, saying that their chief
+was <i>grand captain</i>, which indeed appeared by his numerous
+attendants, who were armed with darts, targets, and other
+weapons. This town is very large, and stands upon a hill among
+trees, so that it cannot well be seen except when one is near. To
+the eastwards of it there are two very high trees on a hill close
+to the town[27]; and under the town is another and lower hill
+washed by the sea, where it is all composed of great black rocks.
+Beyond this town there is another considerably smaller on a
+bay.</p>
+
+<p>[252]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 252: 27 It is added, <i>which is a good
+mark to know the town</i>. But at this distance of time, above
+250 years, such marks cannot be supposed to
+remain.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 13th we took our boat and went close to
+the shore, where we remained till ten o'clock, but no one came
+near us. We prepared therefore to return on board, on seeing
+which some negroes came running down and waved us back with a
+white flag, so we anchored again and they made us to understand
+by signs that the chief would soon come down. In the meantime we
+saw a sail pass by us, but being small we regarded it not. As the
+sun was high, we made a tilt with our oars and sails. There now
+came off to us a canoe with five men, who brought back our
+bottle, and gave me a hen, making signs by the sun that within
+two hours the merchants of the country would come and buy all we
+had. I gave them six <i>manillios</i> to present to their
+captain; and as they signified by signs that they would leave a
+man with us if we gave them a pledge, we put one of our men into
+their boat; but as they would not give us one of their men, we
+took back our man again, and remained in expectation of the
+merchants. Shortly afterwards there came down one of the natives
+to the shore, arrayed like their captain, attended by a numerous
+train, who saluted us in a friendly manner, and then sat down
+under a tree where the captain used to sit in the former year.
+Soon afterwards we perceived a great number of natives standing
+at the end of a hollow way, and behind them the Portuguese had
+planted a base, which they suddenly discharged, but its ball
+overshot us, though we were very near. Before we could ship our
+oars to get away, they shot at us again, but did us no harm; the
+negroes came to the rocks close beside us, whence they discharged
+calivers at us, and the Portuguese shot off their base twice
+more. On this our ship made some shots at them, but they were
+protected by the rocks and hills.</p>
+
+<p>We now went on board to leave this place, as the negroes were
+bent against us, because in the former year Robert Gainsh had
+taken away the captains son from this place, with three others,
+and all their gold and every thing else they had about them;
+owing to which they had become friends to the Portuguese, whom
+they hated before, as appeared in the former year when the
+Trinity was there; when the chief came on board and brought them
+to his town, trading with them largely, and offering them ground
+on which to build a fort[253]. The 14th we plied back to meet the
+Hind, which we met in the morning, and then both ships sailed
+eastwards to try what could be done at the place where the
+Trinity sold her friezes in the preceding year. The day after we
+parted, the Hind had taken eighteen and a half ounces of gold
+from some negroes in exchange for wares. This day, about one P.M.
+we saw some canoes on the coast, with men standing beside them,
+and going to them with merchandise, we took three ounces of gold
+for eighteen <i>fuffs</i> of cloth, each <i>fuffe</i> being three
+and a half yards, at the rate of one angel twelve grains the
+<i>fuffe</i>. These people made us understand by signs that if we
+waited till next day we might have plenty of gold. For this
+reason I sent off the master with the Hind, accompanied by John
+Saville and John Makeworth, to seek the other place, while I and
+Richard Pakeman remained here to try our fortunes next day. When
+the negroes perceived the Hind going away they feared the other
+ship would follow, wherefore they sent off four men in two
+canoes, asking us to remain, and offering two men to remain with
+us, if we would give one as a pledge or hostage for his safety.
+Accordingly, one Edward, who was servant to Mr Morley, seeing
+them so much in earnest, offered himself as a pledge, and we let
+him go for two of them who staid with us, one of whom had his
+weights and scales, with a chain of gold about his neck and
+another round his arm. These men eat readily of such things as we
+had to give them, and seemed quite contented. During the night,
+the negroes kept a light on shore over against us; and about one
+o'clock, A.M. we saw the flash of a <i>base</i>, which was twice
+shot off at the light, and then two <i>calivers</i> were
+discharged, which in the end we perceived came from a Portuguese
+brigantine that followed us from place to place, to warn the
+natives to have no dealings with us.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 253: In the margin, Hakluyt sets down the
+voyage of Robert Gainsh to Guinea as in 1554; yet does not
+mention where that voyage is to be found, or that it is the same
+voyage published in his second edition, under the name of Lok,
+instead of Gainsh to whom it was ascribed in his first edition.
+All the light we have into the matter from the second edition, is
+from a marginal note at the beginning of Loks voyage, in which
+Robert Gainsh is said to have been master of the John Evangelist;
+neither is there any mention of this villainous transaction in
+the relation of that voyage. Such crimes deserve severe
+punishment; since a whole community may suffer for the fault of
+one bad man.--Astl. I. 160, a.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 15th, the negro chief came down to the
+coast attended by 100 men, bringing his wife along with him, and
+many others brought their wives also, as they meant to remain by
+the sea side till they had bought what they wanted, and their
+town was eight miles up the country. Immediately on his arrival,
+the chief sent our man on board, and offered to come himself if
+we would give two of our men in pledge for him. I accordingly
+sent him two, but he only retained one, and came on board
+accompanied by his wife and several friends, bringing me a goat
+and two great roots, for which I gave him in return a latten
+basin, a white basin, six <i>manillios</i> and a bottle of
+<i>Malmsey</i>, and to his wife a small casket. After this we
+began to adjust our measure and weight. He had a weight of his
+own, equal to an angel and 14 grains, and required a measure of
+4-1/2 ells. In fine we concluded the 8th part[254], for an angel
+and 20 grains; and before we had done he took my own weight and
+measure. The 16th I took 8 libs. 1 oz. of gold. Since the
+departure of the Hind I had not heard of her; but when our pledge
+went into the country the first night he said that he saw her at
+anchor about 5 leagues from us. The 17th I sold about 17 pieces
+of cloth, for which I got 4 libs. 4-1/2 oz. of gold. The 18th the
+chief desired to purchase some of our wine, offering half a gold
+ducat for a bottle; but I gave him one freely, and made him and
+his train drink besides. This day I took 5 libs. 5 oz. of gold.
+The 19th I sold about 18 pieces of cloth, and took 4 libs. 4-1/2
+oz. of gold. The 20th 3 libs. 6-1/4 oz; the 21st 8 libs. 7-1/4
+oz; the 22d 3 libs. 8-1/4 oz: And about 4 o'clock this night[255]
+the chief and all his people went away. The 23d we were waved on
+shore by other negroes, and sold them cloth, caskets, knives, and
+a dozen bells, for 1 lib. 10 oz. of gold. The 24th we sold bells,
+sheets[256], and thimbles, for 2 libs. 1-1/4 oz. of gold. The
+25th we sold 7 doz. of small bells and other things, and finding
+their gold all gone, we weighed and sailed to leewards in search
+of the Hind, which we found about 5 o'clock, P.M. and understood
+she had made some sales.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 254: The meaning is here obscure; perhaps
+the word <i>less</i> is omitted, and the bargain was for a
+measure an eighth part less than that originally
+proposed.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 255: Perhaps we should rather understand 4
+o'clock next morning?--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 256: Perhaps this ought to be sheers or
+scissars?--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 26th we received from the Hind 48 libs. 3-1/8 oz. of gold,
+which they had taken while we were asunder; and this day, on the
+request of a negro sent us by the chief, we went on shore with
+our merchandise and took 7 libs, 1 oz. of gold. At this place
+they required no pledges from us, yet sent every night a man to
+sleep on board, as an assurance that they would come to us next
+day. The 27th in both ships we took 8 libs. 1-7/8 oz. of gold.
+The 28th we made sales to the amount of 1 lib. 1/3 oz. for the
+company. The 29th in the morning we heard two caliver shots on
+shore, which we judged might either be the Portuguese or some of
+their negroes, and we accordingly manned our boats, armed
+ourselves and our men, and went on shore, but they were gone off.
+The 30th we made more sales both for the company and the masters.
+The 31st we sent our boats on shore to take in sand for ballast;
+and our men met the negroes with whom they had dealt the day
+before, who were now employed fishing, and helped them to fill
+sand; and having now no gold, sold fish to our men for their
+handkerchiefs and neckerchiefs. The 1st of February we weighed
+and went to another place, where we took 1 lib. 9 1/3 oz. of
+gold. The 2d we made more sales; but on taking a survey of our
+provisions, we resolved not to stay much longer on the coast,
+most of our drink being spent, and what remained turning sour.
+The 3d and 4th we made some sales though not great; and finding
+the wind on this last day come off shore, we set sail and went
+along the coast to the westwards. Upon this coast, we found by
+experience that ordinarily, about 2 o'clock in the night[257] the
+wind came off shore from N.N.E., and continued in that direction
+till 8 o'clock in the morning, blowing all the rest of the day
+and night at S.W. The tide or current on this shore goes
+continually with the wind.[258] We continued our course along
+shore on the 5th, expecting to have met some English ships, but
+found none.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 257: It is hard to say whether this means 2
+hours after sunset, or after midnight--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 258: Apparently running from the east
+during the land breeze, and from the west with the sea
+breeze--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 6th February 1556, we altered our course S.W. leaving the
+coast, to fetch under the line, and ran 24 leagues by estimation.
+By the 13th we reckoned ourselves off Cape Palmas, and by the 22d
+we were by our reckoning abreast of Cape Mount, 30 leagues west
+from the river Sestos or Sestro. The 1st March we lost sight of
+the Hind in a tornado; on which we set up a light and fired a
+gun, but saw nothing of her, wherefore we struck sail and lay by
+for her, and in the morning had sight of her 3 leagues astern.
+This day we found ourselves in the latitude of Cape Verd which is
+in 14&deg; 30' [14&deg; 50' N.] Continuing our course till the
+29th, we were then in 22&deg;, on which day one of our men named
+William King died in his sleep, having been long sick. His
+clothes were distributed among those of the crew who were in want
+of such things, and his money was kept to be delivered to his
+friends at home. The 30th we found ourselves under the tropic. On
+the 1st April we were in the latitude of the Azores, and on the
+7th of May we fell in with the south of Ireland, where we sent
+our boat on shore for fresh water, and where we bought two sheep
+and such other victuals as we needed from the country people, who
+are wild <i>kernes</i>. The 14th of the same month we went into
+the port of Bristol called Hungrode[259], where we cast anchor in
+safety, giving God thanks for our happy arrival.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 259: Probably that now called
+King-road?--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+
+<p><i>Second Voyage to Guinea in 1556, by William
+Towerson</i>[260].</p>
+
+<p>On the 14th September 1556, we set sail from Harwich bound for
+the coast of Guinea, in the Tiger of London of 120 tons,
+directing our coarse for Scilly, where we expected to meet the
+Hart of London of 60 tons and a pinnace of 16 tons, both of which
+had been fitted out and victualled at Bristol. We arrived at
+Scilly on the 28th, and having lain to some time for our consorts
+to no purpose, we sailed back to Plymouth on the 12th October.
+They there joined us, and we sailed together from that port on
+the 15th November.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 260: Hakluyt, II. 496. Astl. I. 162.
+
+<p>Hitherto we have given these voyages to Guinea at full length,
+as they are found in the collection of Hakluyt; but in this and
+the subsequent early English voyages to Guinea, we have thought
+proper to abbreviate such matters as seemed of small
+importance.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p>We made the coast of Guinea on the 30th December, where we got
+sight of three ships and two pinnaces which were to windward of
+us, on which we made ourselves ready for action and gave them
+chase, hauling to the wind as near as we could to gain the
+weather-gage. At first they made sail from us, but having cleared
+for fighting they put about and came towards us in brave order,
+their streamers, pennants and ensigns displayed, and trumpets,
+sounding. When we met they still had the weather-gage of us, yet
+were we firmly determined to have fought them if they had been
+Portuguese, and hailed them to come under our lee, which they
+stoutly refused. On demanding whence they were, they said from
+France; and we then told them we were from London in England.
+They then told us there were certain Portuguese ships gone to
+Mina to protect that place, and that they had already burnt a
+Portuguese ship of 200 tons at the river Sestro. The captain of
+the admiral ship and several other Frenchmen came on board of us
+in a friendly manner, and proposed that we should join company
+because of the Portuguese, and go together to Mina. We told them
+that we had not yet watered, having just fallen in with the
+coast. They said we were 50 leagues to leeward of Sestro river,
+but still water might be had, and they would assist us in
+watering with their boats for the sake of our company. They told
+us farther that they had been six weeks on the coast, and had
+only got 3 tons of grains among them all[261].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 261: These ships were the Espoir of
+Harfleur, the admiral, of which Denis Blundel was captain; the
+Levriere of Rouen, vice-admiral, commanded by Jerome Baudet; and
+a ship of Houfleur, commanded by Jean de
+Orleans.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After hearing what they had to say, we considered that even if
+Mina were clear of Portuguese ships, yet if the Frenchmen went
+before us they would spoil our market: That if there were
+Portuguese ships at Mina, and they took the French ships, they
+would learn that we were behind, and would wait to take us
+likewise: And finally, if we went along with them and found the
+coast clear, we would do as well as they; but if the Portuguese
+remained on the coast we should be stronger in their company.
+Wherefore, having thus considered their friendly offers, we told
+them that we would confer more largely of the matter next day;
+upon which they invited me to dine with them next day, and to
+bring with me the masters of our ships and such merchants as I
+thought proper, offering to supply us with water from their own
+ships if we would, or else to remain with us and help us to water
+with their boats and pinnaces. In the morning of the 31st, the
+French admiral sent his boat for me, and I went on board his ship
+accompanied by our masters and some of our merchants. He had
+provided a noble banquet for us, and treated us excellently,
+requesting us to keep him company, promising to part with us what
+victuals were in his ship, or any other things that could serve
+us, even offering to strike his flag and obey my commands in all
+things. Not being able to find water at that place, we set sail
+on the 1st January 1557, and anchored off the mouth of a river,
+where on the two following days we procured water, and bought a
+few small elephants teeth.</p>
+
+<p>On the 4th of January we landed with 30 men, well armed with
+arquebuses, pikes, long-bows, cross-bows, partizans, long swords,
+and swords and bucklers, meaning to seek for elephants. We found
+two, which we wounded several times with our fire-arms and
+arrows, but they both got away from us and hurt one of our men.
+We sailed on the 5th, and next day fell in with the river St
+Andrew, [in long. 6&deg; 4' W.] The land is somewhat high to the
+westward of this river, having a fine bay likewise to the
+westward, but to the east the land is low. This is a great river,
+having 7 fathoms water in some places at its mouth. On the 7th we
+went into the river, where we found no village, and only some
+wild negroes not used to trade. Having filled our water casks
+here, we set sail to the eastward. On the 10th we had a
+conference with Captain Blondel, the admiral of the French ships,
+Jerome Baudet his vice-admiral, and Jean de Orleans, master of
+the ship of 70 tons. We agreed to traffic in friendly accord, so
+as not to hurt each others market, certain persons being
+appointed to make a price for the whole, and then one boat from
+every ship to make sales on the agreed terms. On the 11th, at a
+place called <i>Allow</i>[262], we got only half an angel weight
+and 4 grains of gold, which was taken by hand, the natives having
+no weights.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 262: Rather Lu how or La hu.--Astl. I 163.
+b.--The river called Jack Lahows river, in Long. 4&deg; 14'
+W.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 14th we came within <i>Saker</i> shot of the castle of
+Mina, whence an Almadia was sent out to see what we were, but
+seeing that we were not Portuguese, she went immediately back to
+the large negroe town of <i>Dondou</i> close by the castle.
+Without this there lie two great rocks like islands, and the
+castle stands on a point resembling an island. At some distance
+to the westwards the land for 5 or 6 leagues was high, but for 7
+leagues from thence to the castle the land is low, after which it
+becomes high again. The castle of Mina is about 5 leagues east
+from Cape Three-points[263]. Here I took the boat with our
+negroes, and, went along the coast till I came to the cape, where
+I found two small towns having no canoes, neither could we have
+any trade. At these places our negroes understood the natives
+perfectly, and one of them went on shore at all the places, where
+he was well received by his countrymen. At a place called
+<i>Bulle</i>, about 3 leagues east from the eastermost point of
+Cape Three-points, we learnt from the natives by means of our
+negro George, that about a month before there had been an
+engagement at this place, in which two ships had put one to
+flight; and that some time before, one French ship had put to
+flight four Portuguese ships at the castle of Mina.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 263: Mina is in Long. 1&deg; 60', Cape
+Three points in 2 40' both west, the difference of Longitude
+therefore is about 50 minutes, or nearly 17
+leagues.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 16th we went to a place called <i>Hanta</i>, 12 leagues
+beyond the cape, but did no good, as the natives held their gold
+too dear. We went thence to <i>Shamma</i>[264], where we landed
+with 5 boats well armed with men and ordnance, making a great
+noise with our drums and trumpets, suspecting we might have found
+Portuguese here, but there were none. We sent our negroes first
+on shore, after which we followed and were well received. The
+18th we agreed to give the negroes 2 yards and 3 nails of cloth,
+as a <i>fuffe</i>, to exchange for an angel-ducat weight; so we
+took in all 70 ducats, of which the Frenchmen had 40 and we 30.
+The 19th I took 4 libs. 2-1/2 oz. of gold, and the boat of the
+Hart had 21 oz. This night we were informed by the negroes that
+the Portuguese meant to attack us next day either by sea or land,
+and as we were about to return on board we heard several shots in
+the woods, but they durst not come near us. The 20th we went on
+shore well armed, but heard no more of the Portuguese, and this
+day the negroes informed us there were some ships come to
+<i>Hanta</i>, a town about 2 leagues to the west. The 21st we
+went in our boats to a town a league to the west, where we found
+many negroes under another chief, with whom we dealt on the same
+terms as at Shamma. The 22d we went again on shore, and I got 1
+lib. 4 oz. of gold. The 23d the negroes told as that the
+Portuguese ships had departed from the Mina, intending to ply to
+windward and then come down to fight us, giving us warning to be
+on our guard. The 24th we went again on shore to trade, and I
+invited the chief of the town to dinner. While we were ashore on
+the 25th, our ships descried 5 sail of ships belonging to the
+king of Portugal, and fired several shots to recall us on board.
+So we went to the ships, but by the time that every thing was in
+order and we had weighed anchor it was night, so that nothing
+could be done. We set sail however and tried all night to gain
+the wind of the Portuguese, some of which were very near during
+the night. One of them, which we judged was their admiral, fired
+a shot, as we supposed to call the others to come and speak with
+him. The 26th we came in with the shore, and got sight of the
+Portuguese at anchor, on which we made sail towards them, giving
+all our men white scarfs, that the French and we might know each
+other in case of boarding: But night coming on before we could
+fetch the Portuguese, we anchored within demi-culverine shot of
+them.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 264: Called Chama in modern maps, near the
+mouth of St Johns river, about 6 leagues east from
+Mina.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 27th, both we and the Portuguese weighed
+anchor, and by 11 o'clock, A.M. we had gained the weather-gage,
+on which we went room with them[265]: on this they bore away
+towards the shore, and we after them, and when they were near
+shore they put about again to seawards. We put about likewise,
+and gained a head of them, on which we took in our topsails and
+waited for them. The first that came up was a small bark, which
+sailed so well that she cared not for any of us, and had good
+ordnance. As soon as she came up she discharged her guns at us
+and shot past with ease, after which she fired at the French
+admiral and struck his ship in several places; and as we were in
+our fighting sails, she soon got beyond our reach. Then another
+caravel came up under our lee, discharging her ordnance at us and
+at the French admiral, wounding two of his men and shooting
+through his main-mast. After him came up the Portuguese admiral
+also under our lee, but was not able to do us so much harm as the
+small ships had done, as he carried his ordnance higher than
+they; neither were we able to make a good shot at any of them,
+because our ship was so weak in the side that she laid all her
+ordnance in the sea[266]. We determined therefore to lay the
+Portuguese admiral on board; but on making the attempt, the
+French admiral fell to leeward and could not fetch him, after
+which he fell to leeward of two other caravels, and was unable to
+fetch any of them. Being thus to leeward, the French admiral kept
+on towards the shore and left us. We hoisted our topsails and
+gave chase to the enemy, but both the other French ships kept
+their wind and would not come near us, and our own consort was so
+much astern that she could not get up to our assistance. When we
+had followed them to seaward about two hours, the enemy put about
+towards the land, thinking to pay us as they went past, and to
+gain the wind of the French admiral which had gone in shore; but
+we put about likewise keeping still the weather gage, expecting
+our consort and the rest to have followed our example. But when
+the Portuguese had passed our consort and the two French ships,
+firing as they went along, all of these ships and our own pinnace
+continued to seawards, leaving us in the <i>laps</i>, (lurch.) We
+continued our course after the enemy, keeping the weather gage,
+that we might succour the French admiral who was to leeward of
+them all; and on coming up with him, all the enemies ships bore
+down and gave him their broadsides, after which they put about
+again, but durst not board him as we were still to wind-wind of
+them, otherwise they had certainly taken or sunk him. Three of
+their smallest vessels were such prime sailors that it was quite
+impossible for any of our ships to have boarded them, and they
+carried such ordnance that they would have sore troubled any
+three of our ships; if they had been able to gain the
+weather-gage. Their other ships, the admiral and vice-admiral,
+were both notably appointed.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 265: Bore down upon them.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 266: Meaning apparently that she lay too
+much over to leeward.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When the French admiral was clear of them, he lay as near the
+wind as possible and ran to seaward after the rest, while we
+followed the enemy to leeward. Then seeing us alone and in chase,
+they put about, which we did likewise to keep the wind of them,
+and in this situation we sailed within <i>base</i> shot of them,
+but they shot not at us, because we had the weather gage and they
+could not therefore harm us. We continued in this course till
+night, when we lost sight of them. All the rest of our ships made
+to seawards with all the sail they could carry; and, as they
+confessed themselves afterwards, they gave us their prayers, and
+no other help had we at their hands.</p>
+
+<p>Next day, the 28th, we rejoined our own consort and pinnace,
+and two of the French ships, but the third, which was a ship of
+80 tons belonging to Rouen, had fled. I took my skiff and went to
+them to know why they, had deserted me. John Kire said his ship
+would neither rear nor stear[267]. John Davis said the pinnace
+had broke her rudder, so that she could sail no farther, and had
+been taken in tow by the Hart. I found the French admiral to be a
+man of resolution, but half his crew was sick or dead. The other
+Frenchman said his ship could bear no sail, and 16 of his men
+were sick or dead, so that he could do nothing. After this the
+French ships durst not come to anchor for fear of the
+Portuguese.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 267: Meaning perhaps, would neither wear
+nor tack?--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 29th, on finding our pinnace incapable of farther use, we
+took out her four bases, anchor, and every thing of value, and
+set her on fire, after which we ran along the coast. On the 3d
+February we anchored about 4 leagues from a town, which we
+saluted with two guns, on which the chief came to the shore, to
+whom I sent Thomas Rippon who knew him. After some conference,
+the chief came off to me; as it was become late, he did not enter
+into bargain for any price, but exchanged pledges and, returned
+on shore. Next day I went on shore, and though some French ships
+had been there and spoiled the market, I took 5-1/2 oz. of gold.
+The 5th I took 8-1/2 oz. but could perceive that the negroes
+thought the French cloth better and broader than ours; wherefore
+I told Captain Blundel that I would go to leeward, as where he
+was I should do no good. The 6th there came an Almadie or canoe
+to us with some negroes, inviting me to their town, where they
+had plenty of gold and many merchants. I did so, but could do no
+good that night, as the merchants were not come from the
+interior. On the 7th our negro George came to us, having followed
+us at least 30 leagues in a small canoe, and soon after his
+arrival we settled the terms of dealing with the natives. George
+had been left in Shamma at the time of the fight, which he saw
+from the shore, and told us that the Portuguese had gone
+afterwards into that river, when they said that two of their men
+had been slain by a shot, which was from our ship. This day I
+took 5 libs. 1-1/4 oz. of gold; the 8th 19 libs. 3-1/2 oz.; the
+9th 2 libs. 6-1/2 oz.; the 10th 3 libs. The 11th. Jerome Baudet,
+the French vice-admiral, came to us in his pinnace, saying that
+they could do no good where they were, and that he meant to go to
+the eastwards: But we told him this could not be allowed, and
+desired him to return to his comrades, which he refused; till we
+shot three or four pieces at his pinnace; on which his ship put
+about and ran out to sea followed by the pinnace. This day I took
+1 lib. 5 oz.</p>
+
+<p>The 12th one of the French pinnaces came with cloth, but we
+would not allow them to trade, and made them remain all day close
+to our ship. This day we took 5 lib. 6-1/2 oz. The 17th we went
+to another town, where we understood that three of the Portuguese
+ships were at the castle, and the other two at Shamma. Though the
+Portuguese were so near that they might have been with us in
+three hours, we yet resolved to remain and make sales if we
+could. The chief of this town was absent at the principal town of
+the district visiting the king, but came soon back with a weight
+and measure. The 18th some of the kings servants came to us, and
+we took 1 lib. 2-1/8 oz. of gold. The 19th we took 5 libs. 1 oz.
+the 20th 1 lib. 4 oz; the 21st 4 libs. 1 oz; the 22d 3-1/2
+oz.</p>
+
+<p>Having sent one of our merchants with a present to the king,
+he returned on the 23d, saying that he had been received in a
+friendly manner by <i>Abaan</i>, who had little gold but promised
+if we would stay that he would send all over his country in
+search of gold for us, and desired our people to request our king
+to send men to his country to build a fort, and to bring tailors
+with them to make them apparel, and to send good wares and we
+should be sure to sell them; but that the French had for the
+present filled the market with cloth. This town where the king
+Abaan resides, is about 4 leagues up the country, and in the
+opinion of our people who were there is as large in circumference
+as London, though all built like those we had already seen.
+Around the town there was great abundance of the wheat of the
+country, insomuch that on one side of it they saw 1000 ricks of
+wheat and of another sort of grain called <i>mill</i> or millet,
+which is much used in Spain. All round this town there is kept a
+good nightly watch, and across all the roads or paths they have
+cords stretched and connected with certain bells; so that if any
+one touch the cords the bells, immediately ring to alarm the
+watchmen, on which they run out to see what is the matter. In
+case of any enemies, they have nets suspended over the paths
+ready to let fall and entangle them. It is impossible to get to
+the town except by the regular paths, as it is every where
+environed with trees and thick underwood; besides which the town
+is surrounded by a fence of sedge bound with thick ropes made of
+the bark of trees[268].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 268: It is hard to discover what place this
+was. Perhaps it was <i>Great Commendo</i> or <i>Guaffo</i>, which
+stands on a river that runs by the town of the <i>Mina</i>, and
+is still the residence of a negro king; in which case the port
+they put in at might have been little <i>Commendo.</i> But the
+royal city is very far from being as large as London was in 1556,
+not having above 400 houses. The contrivance for apprizing the
+watchmen of the approach of an enemy, and for taking them
+prisoners, seems a notable invention of our countrymen; for
+surely an enemy might easily destroy these net-traps to catch
+soldiers, these pack-thread fortifications.--Astl. 1. 167.
+a.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>As in this country it is necessary to travel in the night to
+avoid the heat of the day, our men came to the town about five in
+the morning. About nine the king sent for them, as no one must go
+to him unless sent for, and they proposed carrying their present,
+but were told they must be brought before him three times, before
+their gift could be offered. They then waited upon him and were
+graciously received. And having been sent for three several
+times, they carried their present the last time, which was
+thankfully accepted; and calling for a pot of Palm wine, the king
+made them drink. Before drinking they use the following
+ceremonies: On bringing out the pot of wine, a hole is made in
+the ground into which a small quantity of the wine is poured,
+after which the hole is filled up, and the pot set on the place.
+Then with a small cup made of a gourd shell, they take out a
+little of the wine, which is poured on the ground in three
+several places. They set up likewise some branches of the Palm
+tree in different parts of the ground, where they shed some of
+the wine, doing reverence to the palms. All these ceremonies
+being gone through, the king took a gold cup full of wine which
+he drank off, all the people calling out Abaan! Abaan! together
+with certain words, as is usual in Flanders on twelfth night,
+<i>the king drinks.</i> When he had drank, then the wine was
+served round to every one, and the king allowed them to depart.
+Then every one bowed three times, waving his hands, and so
+departed. The king has usually sitting beside him, eight or ten
+old men with grey beards.</p>
+
+<p>On the 23d we took 1 lib. 10 oz. of gold; the 24th 3 lib. 7
+oz.; the 25th 3-1/4 oz.; the 26th 2 libs. 10 oz.; the 27th 2
+libs. 5 oz.; the 28th 4 libs. Then seeing that there was no more
+gold to be had, we weighed anchor and continued along the coast.
+The 1st of March we came to a town called <i>Moure</i>, where we
+found neither boats nor people; but when about to depart there
+came some people to us in two canoes from another town, from whom
+we took 2-1/2 oz. of gold, and who told us that the inhabitants
+had removed from Mowre to <i>Lagoua.</i>[269]. The 2d we were
+abreast the castle of Mina, where we saw all the five Portuguese
+ships at anchor, and by night we were off Shamma or Chama, where
+we meant to water. But next day we saw a tall ship of about 200
+tons to windward within two leagues, and then two more astern of
+her, one a ship of 500 tons or more and the other a pinnace. Upon
+this we weighed anchor, and made a shirt to stand out to sea, the
+wind being S.S.W., but the Hart fell three leagues to leeward of
+us. These ships chased us from 9 A.M. till 5 P.M. but could not
+make up with us. At night, when we joined the Hart, on asking why
+she fell to leeward, they pretended that they durst not make sail
+to windward, lest they had carried away their fore-top-mast.
+Having been thus obliged to abandon our watering-place, we were
+under the necessity of boiling our meat-in sea-water, and to
+reduce our allowance of drink to make it hold out, as we now
+shaped our course homewards.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 269: Mowree is 4-1/2 leagues east from the
+castle of Minas, and Lagoua or Laguy is 9 leagues east from the
+same place.--Astl. I. 168. a.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 16th of March we fell in with the land, which I judged
+to be Cape Misurado, about which there is much high land. The
+18th we lost sight of the Hart, and I think the master wilfully
+went in shore on purpose to lose us, being offended that I had
+reproved him for his folly when chased by the Portuguese. The
+27th we fell in with two small islands about 6 leagues off Cape
+Sierra Leona; and before we saw them we reckoned ourselves at
+least 30 or 40 leagues from them. Therefore all who sail this way
+must allow for the current which sets N.N.W. or they will be much
+deceived. The 14th April we met two large Portuguese ships, which
+we supposed were bound to Calicut. The 23d we saw a French ship
+of 90 tons to windward of us, which came down upon us as if to
+lay us on board, sending up some of his men in armour into the
+tops, and calling out to us to strike. Upon this we saluted him
+with some cross-bars, chain-shot, and arrows, so thick that we
+made their upper works fly about their ears, and tore his ship so
+miserably, that he fell astern and made sail. Our trumpeter was a
+Frenchman, at this time ill in bed; yet he blew his trumpet till
+he could sound no more, and so died. The 29th we arrived at
+Plymouth, and gave thanks to God for our safety.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VI.</p>
+
+<p><i>Third Voyage of William Towerson to Guinea, in
+1558</i>[270].</p>
+
+<p>On the 30th of January of the above year, we set sail from
+Plymouth with three ships and a pinnace, bound by the grace of
+God for the Canaries and the coast of Guinea. Our ships were the
+Minion, admiral; the Christopher, vice-admiral; the Tiger, and a
+pinnace called the Unicorn. Next day we fell in with two
+hulks[271] of Dantziek, one called the Rose of 400 tons, and the
+other the Unicorn of 150, both laden at Bourdeaux, mostly with
+wine. We caused them to hoist out their boats and come on board,
+when we examined them separately as to what goods they had on
+board belonging to Frenchmen[272]. At first they denied having
+any; but by their contradictory stories, we suspected the
+falsehood of their charter parties, and ordered them to produce
+their bills of lading. They denied having any, but we sent
+certain persons to the place where they were hid, and thus
+confronted their falsehood. At length they confessed that there
+were 32 tons and a hogshead of wine in the Unicorn belonging to a
+Frenchman, and 128 tons in the Rose belonging to the, same
+person; but insisted that all the rest was laden by Peter Lewgues
+of Hamburgh, and consigned to Henry Summer of Campvere. After a
+long consultation, considering that to capture or detain them
+might lose our voyage, already too late, we agreed that each of
+our ships should take out as much as they could stow for
+necessaries, and that we should consider next morning what was
+farther to be done. We accordingly took out many tuns of wine,
+some aquavitae, cordage, rosin, and other things, giving them the
+rest of the Frenchmans wines to pay for what we had taken of
+their own, and took a certificate under their hands of the
+quantity of French goods they had confessed to, and then allowed
+them to continue their voyage.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 270: Hakluyt, II. 504. Astley, I. 169.--In
+the last London edition of Hakluyt, 1810, it is dated erroneously
+in 1577, but we learn from the editor of Astley's Collection that
+in the edition 1589, it is dated in 1557. Yet, notwithstanding
+that authority, we may be assured that the date of this voyage
+could not have been earlier than January 1558, as Towerson did
+not return from his former voyage till the 29th of April
+1557.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 271: Probably meaning large unwieldy
+ships.--E]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 272: It is to be noted, that at this time
+there was war between England and France.--This observation is a
+side note of Hakluyt: And it may be worth while to notice that,
+so early as 1557, free bottoms were not considered by the English
+as making free goods.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 10th January we had sight of the grand Canary, and on the
+12th we anchored in the road, a league from the town, where we
+were well received. We went to the town with two English
+merchants who resided there, and remained that day at their
+house. The second day following we returned on board to get our
+pinnace repaired, which had broken her rudder, and to deliver our
+merchandize. The 14th there came nineteen sail of Spanish ships
+into the road, bound for the West Indies, six of them being of
+400 or 500 tons each, and the rest of 200, 150, and 100 tons. On
+coming to anchor they saluted us, which we returned. The Spanish
+admiral, who was a knight, sent a boat for me, and received me in
+a friendly manner, desiring to learn the news of England and
+Flanders. After partaking of a banquet, I departed; and when I
+was in the boat, he desired my interpreter to say that he
+expected I should strike my flag to him, as general of the
+Emperors fleet. When I was come on board my own ship this was
+told me by the interpreter, and as I refused compliance and
+continued to display my ensign, some Spanish soldiers began to
+discharge their arquebusses at us. At this time some Spanish
+gentlemen came on board to see our ship, to whom I said that if
+they did not order their men to cease firing, I would fire my
+cannon through their ships. They accordingly went away and made
+their soldiers give over firing, and coming back said that they
+had punished their men. I then shewed them our ship, and gave
+them such cheer as I had, which they were well pleased with. Next
+day they sent for me to dine with them, saying their general was
+sorry any one should have desired me to strike my flag, which had
+been done without his orders.</p>
+
+<p>The 17th we set sail, and got sight of the coast of Africa,
+and running along shore came off Rio del Oro which is almost
+under the tropic of Cancer. The 25th we got sight of the land in
+the bay to the north of Cape Verd[273]. The 26th taking our
+interpreter Francisco and Francis Castelin along with me in the
+pinnace, I went to the Tiger, which was nearer shore than the
+other ships. With her and the other ships we ran W. by S. and
+W.S.W, till about 4 o'clock, P.M. when we were close on board the
+cape. Then going about 4 leagues beyond the cape S.W. we found a
+fair island, and beside that two or three islands of high rocks,
+full of various kinds of sea fowl and pigeons, with other kinds
+of land birds, and so numerous that the whole island was covered
+with their dung, and as white as if the whole had been covered by
+chalk. Within these islands was a fine bay; and close by the
+rocks we had 18 fathoms and good ground[274]. The 27th, as no
+negroes came to us, we went along shore in the pinnace, and going
+beyond the point of the bay (Cape Emanuel) we found a fair island
+(<i>Goree</i>) with a goodly bay, and saw some negroes on the
+main who waved us on shore. Going a-land, they told us that they
+had elephants teeth, musk[275], and hides for traffic; but as the
+captain of the Christopher was not willing to stop, we went on
+board and made sail, On inquiry, some of the negroes said there
+had been no ships there for 8 months, others said six, and some
+only four, and that they were French ships.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 273: The bay of Yof, in lat. 15&deg; N.
+long. 17&deg; 20' W. from Greenwich.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 274: Obviously the Bird isles, which are
+4-1/2 leagues E.S.E. from Cape Verd, not W.S.W. as in the
+text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 275: What is here called musk must have
+either been civet or ambergris.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 10th of March we fell in with the coast of Guinea, 5
+leagues east of Cape <i>Monte</i>, beside a river called Rio das
+Palmas. At this place I got 19 elephants teeth, and 2 1/2oz. of
+gold. The 13th we came to Rio Sestro, and next day sent our boats
+for water, and delivered such wares to the Christopher and Tiger
+as they needed. The 15th we sent the Tiger to another river for
+water, and to try what she could do for grains. We here learnt
+that three French ships had been at this river two months before,
+two six weeks ago, and one only a fortnight past, all of which
+had gone eastwards to the Mina. Getting few grains, and many of
+our men falling sick at this unwholesome place, and considering
+that the French ships were before us, we left the Rio Sestro on
+the 19th, and made all sail for the Mina[276]. The 21st we came
+to Rio de Potos, where our boats went for water, and where I got
+12 small elephants teeth. The 31st we came to <i>Hanta</i>, where
+I sold some <i>Manillios</i>.</p>
+
+<p>On the 1st of April we had sight of 5 Portuguese ships, on
+which we stood out to sea to gain the wind of them, which we had
+done if the wind had kept its ordinary course at S.W. and W.S.W.
+but this day it kept with a <i>flow</i> always at E. and E.S.E.
+so that they had the wind of us and chased us to leeward till
+near night, when all but one that sailed badly were within shot
+of us. It then fell calm, and the wind came round to S.W. at
+which time the Christopher was about 4 leagues to leeward of us.
+We tacked in the Minion, and gained the wind of the Portuguese
+admiral and other three of his ships; when he cast about and
+fired at us, which we returned, shooting him four or five times
+through. Several of their shots went through our sails, but none
+of our men were hurt. The Christopher was still to leeward,
+though the Tiger and the pinnace had joined us; but as it was
+night we did not think it adviseable to lay him on board;
+wherefore, after firing two hours or more, we three stood out to
+sea, and fired a gun to give notice to the Christopher. We joined
+the Christopher on the 2d, which had exchanged shots with the
+Portuguese the night before about midnight, and we agreed to seek
+the Portuguese, keeping however to windward of the place where we
+meant to trade. We accordingly ran all day on the 3d to the S.W.
+in search of the Portuguese ships, but could not see them, and
+stood towards the shore at night. When we made the shore on the
+4th, we found ourselves off Lagua, 30 leagues to the eastwards of
+our reckoning, owing to the currents setting east. Going on shore
+with our negro interpreter, we learned that there were four
+French ships on the coast: One at <i>Perinnen</i>, 6 leagues west
+of Lagua; one at <i>Weamba[277]</i>, 4 leagues east of Lagua; a
+third at <i>Perecow[278]</i>, 4 leagues east of Weamba; and the
+fourth at <i>Egrand[279]</i>, 4 leagues east of Perecow. We
+accordingly proceeded toward Weamba, where we saw one of the
+French ships under sail to which we gave chase; and lest we
+should over-shoot her in the night, the Minion was brought to
+anchor, and the Tiger and Christopher followed the chase all
+night.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 276: The Mina is here to be considered as
+the gold coast of Guinea, called Mina or the mines on account of
+its great produce in gold dust. The castle of St George del Mina,
+is usually called in these early voyages <i>the
+castle.</i>--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 277: Or Wiamba, where the English had
+afterwards a fort.--Astl. I. 172. d.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 278: This seems to have been little
+Barakhow, or Berow.--Astl. I. 172. c.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 279: Probably Akkara, where the English,
+Dutch, and Danes had afterwards separate forts--Astl. 1.172.
+d.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 5th we found three French ships at anchor: One called
+<i>La Foi</i> of Harfleur of 200 tons, the second the
+<i>Venturuse</i> of Harfleur of 100, and third the <i>Mulet de
+Batville</i> of Rouen of 120 tons. On nearing them, we in the
+Minion were determined to lay the admiral on board, while the
+Christopher boarded the vice-admiral, and the Tiger the smallest.
+But they weighed and got under sail, on which the Christopher,
+being our headmost ship, bore down on La Foi, and we in the
+Minion on the Mulet, which we took; but the Venturuse sailed so
+swift that we could not take her. The one we took was the richest
+except the admiral, which had taken 80 libs, of gold, the
+Venturuse having only 22 libs.; while our prise had 50. They had
+been above two months on the coast; but three others had been
+there before them, and had departed a month before our arrival,
+having swept the coast of 700 pounds of gold. Having continued
+the chase all that day and night, and the next day till 3 P.M.
+and being unable to get up with them, we were afraid of falling
+too far to leewards, and made sail back to the shore. On the 7th,
+I convened the captains masters and merchants of all our three
+ships, when we weighed the gold taken in the prize, being 50
+libs. 5 oz., after which we put men out of all our ships into the
+prize to keep her. On the 12th, on coming to <i>Egrand</i>,
+having taken all the goods out of the prize, we offered to sell
+the ship to the Frenchmen; but she was so leaky that they would
+not have her, and begged us to save their lives by taking them
+into our ships. So we agreed to take out all the victuals and
+sink the ship, dividing the men among us.</p>
+
+<p>On the 15th, it was proposed to proceed to Benin, but most of
+our people refused; wherefore it was agreed to remain as long as
+we could on the coast of Mina, leaving the Minion at Egrand,
+sending the Tiger to Perecow 4 leagues, west, and the Christopher
+to Weamba 10 leagues west, with directions in case of seeing any
+force they were unable to cope with, to come to leewards to us in
+the Minion at Egrand. We remained here till the last of April, by
+which time many of our men fell sick and six of them died, and we
+could only trade with the natives three or four days of the week,
+as on the other days they could not come off to us. The 3d May,
+as the pinnace had not come to us with cloth from the other
+ships, as promised, we sold French cloth, giving only three yards
+for every <i>fuffe</i>. The 5th the negroes left us, saying they
+would be back in four days. The 8th all our own cloth being sold,
+I called the people together, to ask them whether they chose to
+remain till the prize cloth was all sold. They answered, that as
+several of our men were dead, and twenty now sick, they would not
+tarry, but desired that we should repair to the other two ships.
+On the 10th we accordingly sailed in quest of the other ships,
+meaning to try what we could do at Don Johns town. The 11th we
+joined the Christopher, which had done little. The 13th the Tiger
+was sent down to Egrand, as we found no trade worth while at
+Perinnen. The 14th the pinnace was sent with cloth to Weamba,
+where she had before got 10 libs. of gold.</p>
+
+<p>The 21st we anchored before Don Johns town; and on the 22d we
+manned our boats and went close in shore, but the negroes would
+not come to us. The 24th our pinnace came to us from Cormantine,
+where they had taken 2 libs. 5 oz. of gold. The 25th the master
+of the Christopher sent his boat on shore at Mowre for ballast,
+when the negroes attempted to drive them off with stones; but our
+men slew and hurt several of them, then burnt their town and
+stove all their canoes. The 27th we went to Cormantine, where we
+were joined next day by the Christopher. The 2d June the Tiger
+came to us from Egrand and the pinnace from Weamba, the two
+having procured 50 libs. of gold. The 4th we made sail and plied
+to windward for Chama, not being able to remain longer for want
+of victuals, and especially as our drink ran short. The 7th we
+saw five Portuguese ships at anchor beside the castle. The 8th
+George and Binny came off to us, and brought about 2 libs. of
+gold. The 21st we put 25 Frenchmen into our pinnace with such
+victuals as we could spare, and sent them away. The 25th we put
+to sea on our homeward voyage. The 30th we fell in again with the
+land, 18 leagues to leeward of the place whence we had taken our
+departure, having been deceived by the current which sets
+continually towards the east. The 7th July we fell in with the
+island of San Thome [280], where we wished to come to anchor; but
+the wind coming about we again made sail. From that time till the
+13th we were tossed about by baffling winds, and that day fell in
+again with San Thome.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 280: They must have fallen far to leeward,
+as San Thome is to the east of the Bight of Benin, almost 8
+degrees or 160 leagues to the east of St George del
+Mina.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This is a very high island, and being on the west side of it,
+we had sight of a very high small and upright peak, like the
+steeple of a church, which peak is directly under the equator,
+and to the westward of the south end of the island there is a
+small islet about a mile from the larger one. The 3d of August we
+set sail from San Thome with the wind at S.W. The 22d we fell in
+with the island of <i>Salt</i>, one of the Cape Verds; and being
+told by a Scotsman whom we had taken among the French on the
+coast of Guinea, that there were fresh provisions to be had at
+this place, we came to anchor. The 24th we went on shore, where
+we found no houses, and only saw four men who would not come near
+us. We found plenty of goats, but so wild that we could only take
+three or four of them; but we got plenty of fish, and great
+quantities of sea-fowl on a small isle close to the larger one.
+At night the Christopher broke her cable and lost an anchor, so
+that we were all obliged to weigh and put to sea. On this
+occasion the Scotsman was left on shore, by what means we could
+not tell, unless that he had been found asleep by the inhabitants
+and carried off-prisoner.</p>
+
+<p>The 25th the master of the Tiger came on board, and reported
+his ship to be in so leaky a condition and his men so weak, that
+he was unable to keep her afloat, and requested therefore that we
+would return to the island to take every thing out of her, that
+she might be abandoned: This day on mustering the companies of
+all the three ships, we had not above 30 sound men
+altogether[281]. The 25th we had sight of St Nicholas, and the
+day following of St Lucia, St Vincent, and St Anthony, four of
+the Cape Verd islands, which range with each other from N.W. by
+W. to S. E by E. The 26th we were unable to weather the Cape of
+St Anthony, and this day Philip Jones the master of the
+Christopher came on board and reported that they were not able to
+keep the Tiger from sinking as she was so leaky, and the master
+and crew were very weak. The 3d September I went on board the
+Tiger, accompanied by the masters and merchants to survey her,
+and we found her in a very leaky condition with only six men fit
+for duty, one of whom was master gunner. It was agreed
+accordingly to take all the men into the other ships, with all
+the goods we could save, and then to abandon her. We began
+discharging her on the 5th, and having taken out her guns,
+victuals, gold, and every thing we could by the 8th, we set her
+adrift in lat. 25&deg; N.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 281: At this place Hakluyt observes in a
+note, the great inconvenience of staying late on the coast of
+Guinea. He ought rather to have said, the impropriety of sailing
+too late for that coast.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the 6th October, the ships companies both of the Minion and
+Christopher being very weak, so as to be scarce able to keep the
+sea, we agreed to make for Vigo, which is frequented by many
+English ships; but having a fair wind for England on the 10th, we
+fired two shots to give notice to the Christopher of our
+intention, and immediately shaped our course homewards. She
+followed us, and we carried a light to direct her way; but it was
+so thick next morning that we could not see her, and as she was
+not seen all that day we concluded she had either shot ahead of
+us in the night or had bore up for Spain, for which reason we
+hoisted our top-sails and continued our course, being then 120
+leagues from England and 45 leagues N.W. by W. from Cape
+Finister, having then only six mariners and six merchants in
+health. The 16th we had a great storm at W.S.W. by W. which came
+on about 6 P.M. and our men being very weak and unable to hand
+our sails, we that night lost our mainsail, foresail, and
+spritsail, and were obliged to <i>lie hulling</i> till the 18th,
+when we got up an old foresail; and finding ourselves now in the
+Channel, we bore up for the coast of England. In less than two
+hours the old foresail was blown from the yard by a spurt of
+wind, and we were again forced to lie to till the morning of the
+19th, when we got up an old bonnet, or topsail, on the fore-yard,
+which by the blessing of God brought us to the Isle of Wight in
+the afternoon of the 20th.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p><i>Commodities most in request in Guinea, between Sierra Leone
+and the farthest extremity of the Mine or Gold
+Coast[282].</i></p>
+
+<pre>
+   MANILS of brass, and some of lead.
+   Basins of various sorts, but chiefly of latten.
+   Pots holding a quart or more, of coarse tin.
+   Some wedges of iron.
+   Margarites, and other low priced beads.
+   Some blue coral.
+   Some horse nails.
+   Linen cloth, principally.
+   Basins of Flanders.
+   Some low priced red cloth, and kersies.
+   Dutch kettles with brass handles.
+   Some large engraved brass basins, like those usually set upon.
+   their cupboards in Flanders.
+   Some large pewter basins and ewers, graven.
+   Some lavers for holding water.
+   Large low priced knives.
+   Slight Flemish caskets.
+   Low priced Rouen chests, or any other chests.
+   Large pins.
+   Coarse French coverlets.
+   Good store of packing sheets.
+</pre>
+
+<p>Swords, daggers, prize-mantles and gowns, cloaks, hats, red
+cans, Spanish blankets, axe heads, hammers, short pieces of iron,
+slight bells, low priced gloves, leather bags, and any other
+trifling articles you will.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 282: This list is appended in Hakluyt's
+Collection, II.513. to the present voyage, and is therefore here
+retained, though several of the articles are scarcely
+intelligible.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION VII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Notices of an intended Voyage to Guinea, in
+1561[283].</i></p>
+
+<p>In 1561, a voyage was projected to Guinea by Sir William
+Gerard, knight, in conjunction with Messrs William Hunter,
+Benjamin Gonson, Anthony Hickman, and Edward Castelin. Only one
+ship, the Minion, was to have gone, and seems to have been
+intended to assist and bring home the Primrose and Flower de
+Luce, then on the coast. The command of the Minion was to have
+been given to John Lok, probably the same person who made the
+Guinea voyage in 1554, already inserted. The adventurers sent the
+following articles of instruction to Mr Lok, dated 8th September
+1561. But Lok declined undertaking the voyage for the following
+reasons, dated Bristol, 11th December 1561. 1. The Minion was so
+spent and rotten, as to be incapable of being put into a fit and
+safe condition for the voyage. 2. The season was too far gone to
+perform the voyage in safety. 3. He understood that four large
+Portuguese ships were in readiness to intercept him. 4. It was
+quite uncertain that he should meet the Primrose, which would
+have completed her voyage before he could get to the coast, or
+would have been obliged to quit the coast by that time for want
+of provisions. It will be seen in the succeeding section, that
+the Minion actually proceeded on her voyage; on the 25th February
+1562, and the unsuccessful events of that voyage fully justify
+the refusal of Lok.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 283: Hakluyt, II. 514. Astl I. 176.--As
+this voyage did not take place, it is principally inserted here
+for the sake of the instructions devised by the adventurers, for
+the conduct of the intended expedition--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p><i>Remembrance for Mr Lok, at his Arrival on the Coast of
+Guinea.</i></p>
+
+<p>When God shall bring you upon the coast of Guinea, you are to
+make yourself acquainted, as you proceed along the coast, with
+all its rivers, havens and harbours or roadsteads, making a plat
+or chart of the same, in which you are to insert every place that
+you think material, all in their true elevations. You will also
+diligently inquire what are the commodities to be procured it the
+several places you visit, and what wares are best calculated for
+their markets.</p>
+
+<p>As it is believed that a fort on the coast of Mina or the Gold
+Coast of Guinea, in the King of <i>Habaan's</i> country, might be
+extremely useful, you are especially desired to consider where
+such a fort could be best placed, in which you will carefully
+note the following circumstances.</p>
+
+<p>1. That the situation be adjoining to the sea on one side, so
+that ships and boats may conveniently load and unload--2. What is
+the nature of the soil in its neighbourhood?--3. What wood or
+timber may be had, and in what manner it may be carried?--4. What
+victuals are to be procured in the country, and what kinds of our
+victuals are best calculated for keeping there?--5. The place
+must be strong by nature, or capable of being made strong at
+small expence, and of being afterwards defended by a small number
+of men.--6. How water is to be procured, if none is to be had on
+the ground where the fort is to stand, or at least near it?--7.
+What help may be expected from the natives, either in building
+the fort, or in defending it afterwards?</p>
+
+<p>You are to sound the King of Habaan at a distance as to the
+erection of a fort in his country, taking notice how he relishes
+the proposal; yet you will so manage your communication with him
+that he may not understand your meaning, although there may seem
+good cause for its erection.</p>
+
+<p>You will search the country as far as you can, both along the
+coast and into the interior. You will likewise use your
+endeavours to learn what became of the merchants who were left at
+Benin. In all other important matters worthy of notice, we have
+no doubt that you will diligently inquire and report to us, which
+we leave to your good discretion. We also request, that you will
+aid and assist our factors on all occasions, both with your
+advice and otherwise; and thus God send you safely to return.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VIII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage to Guinea in 1562, written by William
+Rutter</i>[284].</p>
+
+<p>This relation is said by Hakluyt to have been written by
+<i>one</i> William Rutter, to his master Anthony Hickman, being
+an account of a voyage to Guinea in 1562, fitted out by Sir
+William Gerard, Sir William Chester, Thomas Lodge, Anthony
+Hickman, and Edward Castelin. Three of these are named in the
+preceding section as adventurers in the voyage proposed to have
+gone under John Lok, and two of those former adventurers are here
+omitted, while two others seem now to have supplied their places,
+yet it appears to have been the same adventure, as the Minion was
+the ship employed, notwithstanding the unfavourable report made
+of her by Lok. But it would appear that the Primrose was likewise
+of this voyage, as this relation is contained in a letter from
+Rutter to his master, dated on board the Primrose, 16th of August
+1563.--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 284: Hakluyt, II. 516. Astley, I.
+177.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>Worshipful Sir,--My duty remembered, this shall serve to
+inform you of our voyage, since our departure from Dartmouth on
+the 25th February 1562, of which I then gave you notice. Having
+prosperous wind, we arrived at Cape Verd on the 20th of March,
+whence we sailed along the coast, to our first appointed port at
+Rio de Sestos, where we arrived on the morning of the 3d April.
+We here saw a French ship, which immediately made sail to
+leeward, and we came to anchor in the road. While we merchants
+were on shore engaged in traffic, the French ship returned and
+hailed [<i>saluted</i>] our ship with his ordnance. We were
+informed by the negroes that the Frenchman had been trading there
+for three days before our arrival, and we concluded, if he sent
+his boat on shore again for trade, that we would not suffer him
+till we had conferred with his captain and merchants. Accordingly
+his pinnace came on shore in the afternoon, but we desired them
+not to trade till we had spoken with their captain and merchants,
+whom we desired might come that night on board our admiral for
+that purpose. They did so accordingly, when Mr Burton and John
+Munt went on board the Minion, where the Frenchmen were, and it
+was determined that they should wait eight days beside us,
+allowing us to trade quietly the while. They were much
+dissatisfied with this arrangement, and sailed next morning
+eastwards to the Rio de Potos, on purpose to hinder our trade on
+the coast.</p>
+
+<p>In consequence of this the merchants, both of the Minion and
+our ship, determined to go on before them, understanding that no
+other ships had gone that way before this season, and that our
+trade might not be interrupted by the French ship. We did so
+accordingly, and found the Frenchman trading to the westward at
+Rio de Potos, on which we passed them, and came to Rio de Potos
+on the 12th of April, where we remained trading till the 15th,
+when we departed with the Primrose for the river St Andrew, where
+we agreed to wait for the Minion. We arrived at that river on the
+17th, and the Minion came to us that same day, saying that they
+had met with a great ship and a caravel, belonging to the king of
+Portugal, off cape Palmas, bound for the Mina, which had chased
+them, and shot many guns at them, which the Minion had returned
+in her defence. God be praised the Minion had no harm at that
+time. We then concluded to hasten to cape Three-points, to
+endeavour to intercept them on their way to the castle. We lay to
+off the cape for two days and a night, and suspecting they were
+past, the Minion went in shore and sent her boats to a place
+called <i>Anta</i>, where we had formerly traded. Next morning,
+the 21st of April, we again saw the ship and caravel to seaward,
+when we immediately made sail, endeavouring to get between them
+and the castle, but to our great grief they got to the castle
+before us, when they shot freely at us and we at them, but as
+they had the aid of the castle against us we profited little.</p>
+
+<p>We set sail in the afternoon, and came to the town of Don
+Juan, called <i>Equi</i>, where, on the morning of the 22d, we
+went ashore to trade: But the negroes refused till they should
+hear from Don Luis the son of Don Juan, who was now dead. On the
+23d Don Luis and Pacheco came to Equi, intending to trade with
+us; but two gallies came rowing along shore from the castle of
+Mina, meaning to interrupt our trade. We made sail on the 24th,
+and chased the gallies back to the castle, at which the negroes
+were much pleased; but they desired us to proceed to
+<i>Mowre</i>, about three leagues farther on, where they promised
+to follow us, being in fear of the Portuguese. We did so, and
+remained there waiting for the merchants who were coming with
+gold from the country, but Antonio, the son of Don Luis, and
+Pacheco were on board the Minion. In the morning of the 25th the
+two gallies came again from the castle, the weather being very
+calm, and shot at us, hitting us three times. Shortly after the
+land-wind sprung up, at which time we observed the great ship and
+the caravel making towards us, on which we weighed and made sail
+to attack them; but it was night before we could get up with
+them, and we lost sight of them in the night. While returning
+towards the coast next night we agreed to proceed to Cormantin;
+and next morning, the 28th, we found ourselves very near the
+large ship and the two gallies, the caravel being close in-shore.
+It being very calm, the two gallies rowed towards the stern of
+the Minion, and fought with her most part of the forenoon. During
+the engagement a barrel of powder blew up in the steward room of
+the Minion, by which misfortune the master-gunner, the steward,
+and most of the gunners were sore hurt. On perceiving this, the
+gallies became more fierce, and with one shot cut half through
+the Minions foremast, so that she could bear no sail till that
+were repaired. Soon after this, the great ship sent her boat to
+the gallies, which suddenly withdrew.</p>
+
+<p>After their departure we went on board the Minion to consult
+what was best to be done: As the Minion was sore discomfited by
+the accident, and as we knew the negroes durst not trade with us
+so long as the gallies were upon the coast, it was agreed to
+return to the Rio Sestos. In the morning of the 14th of May we
+fell in with the land, and being uncertain whereabout we were,
+the boats were sent on shore to learn the truth, when it was
+found to be the Rio Barbas. We remained there taking in water
+till the 21st, and lost five of our men by the Hack pinnace
+over-setting. Departing on the 22d, we came to the Rio Sestos on
+the 2d of June. We again set sail on the 4th, and arrived this
+day, the 6th of August, within sight of the Start Point in the
+west of England, for which God be praised. We are very side and
+weak, not having above twenty men in both ships, able for duty.
+Of our men 21 have died, and many more are sore hurt or sick. Mr
+Burton has been sick for six weeks, and is now so very weak that,
+unless God strengthen him, I fear he will hardly escape. Your
+worship will find inclosed an abstract of all the goods we have
+sold, and also of what commodities we have received for them;
+reserving all things else till our meeting, and to the bearer of
+this letter.</p>
+
+<p>In this voyage there were brought home, in 1563, 166 elephants
+teeth, weighing 1758 libs, and 22 buts full of grains, or Guinea
+pepper.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IX.</p>
+
+<p><i>Supplementary Account of the foregoing Voyage</i> [285]</p>
+
+<p>An account of the preceding voyage to Guinea in 1563, of which
+this section is an abstract, was written in verse by Robert
+Baker, who appears to have been one of the factors employed by
+the adventurers. It is said to have been written in prison in
+France, where he had been carried on his subsequent voyage, which
+forms the subject of the next section, and was composed at the
+importunity of his fellow traveller and fellow-prisoner, Mr
+George Gage, the son of Sir Edward Gage. Of this voyage he
+relates nothing material, except a conflict which happened with
+the negroes at a certain river, the name of which is not
+mentioned; neither does the foregoing relation by Rutter give any
+light into the matter. But from the circumstance of the ship
+commencing her return for England immediately after this
+adventure, it must have happened at the river Sestos or Sestre,
+which was the last place they touched at, and where they staid
+three days, as stated both in this and the proceeding
+narratives.--Astl. I. 179.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 285: Astley, I. 179. Hakluyt, II.
+518.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the versified relation, which is to be found at large in
+the last edition of Hakluyts Collection, London, 1810, Vol. II.
+p.518-523, he complains of being detained in a French prison,
+against all law and right, as the war between England and France
+was concluded by a peace. The account given of this conflict with
+the negroes is to the following effect--E.</p>
+
+<p>One day while the ship was at anchor on the coast of Guinea,
+Baker ordered out the small pinnace or boat, with nine men well
+armed, to go on shore to traffic. At length, having entered a
+river, he saw a great number of negroes, whose captain came to
+him stark naked, sitting in a canoe made of a log, <i>like a
+trough to feed hogs in</i>. Stopping, at some distance, the negro
+chief put water on his cheek, not caring to trust himself nearer
+till Baker did the like. This signal of friendship being
+answered, and some tempting merchandize being shewn him, the
+chief came forward and intimated by signs, that he would stand
+their friend if some of these things were given him. He was
+gratified, and many things given to others of the natives. After
+trading all day with the negroes, Baker returned at night to the
+ship, carrying the chief along with him, where he clothed him and
+treated him kindly. In return the chief promised by signs to
+freight them in a day or two. While on board, Baker observed that
+the chief took much notice of the boat which was left astern, of
+the ship loaded with goods; yet not suspecting he had any ill
+design, no farther care or precaution was taken of the boat.</p>
+
+<p>Next morning the chief was carried on shore, and trade or
+barter went on with the negroes as on the day before; and at the
+return of Baker to the ship, the boat was fastened to the stern,
+and the goods left in her as usual. In the night the negro
+captain came with two or three canoes, and was noticed by the
+watch to be very busy about the boat. On giving the alarm, the
+negroes fled; but on hoisting up the boat, all the goods were
+carried of. Vexed at being so tricked, the English went next
+morning up the river to the negro town, in order to recover their
+goods; but all their signs were to no purpose, as the negroes
+would neither understand them nor acknowledge the theft. On the
+contrary, as if wronged by the charge, and resolved to revenge
+the affront, they followed the English down the river in 100
+canoes, while as many appeared farther down ready to intercept
+their passage. In each canoe were two men armed with targets and
+darts, most of which had long strings to draw them back again
+after they were thrown.</p>
+
+<p>Being hard pressed, they discharged their arquebuses upon the
+negroes, who leapt into the water to avoid the shot. The English
+then rowed with all their might to get to sea; but the negroes
+getting again into their canoes, pursued and overtook them. Then
+drawing near, poured in their darts with accurate aim. The
+English kept them off with their pikes and halberts, and many of
+the negroes being slain or wounded by the English arrows and
+hail-shot from the arquebuses, they retreated. But when the
+English had expended all their arrows, the negroes came on again,
+and made many attempts to board the boat. The negro chief, who
+was a large tall man, advanced in his canoe under cover of his
+target, with a poisoned dart in his hand, in order to board; and
+as he pressed forward, the masters-mate thrust a pike through his
+target and throat, which dispatched him. While the mate was
+striving to disengage his pike, which stuck fast in the shield,
+he was wounded by a dart; yet drew the dart from his flesh and
+killed with it the negro who had wounded him. The enemy continued
+the fight closer than ever, and did great mischief with their
+darts, which made wide and grievous wounds. The gunner received
+two desperate wounds, and lost a great deal of blood, and the
+brave masters-mate, while standing firmly in his post, was struck
+through the ribs by a dart, on pulling out which his bowels
+followed, and he fell down dead. On perceiving this, the negroes
+gave a great shout, and pressed to enter the boat where the mate
+had stood, imagining as so many of the English were wounded they
+would now soon yield. But four of those remaining in the pinnace
+kept them off with their pikes, while the other four at the oars
+made the best of their way to sea.</p>
+
+<p>At length they got out of the river, and the negroes retired
+having expended all their darts. This was fortunate for the
+English, as six of the remaining eight were desperately wounded,
+one of whom was Robert Baker, the author of this narrative, and
+only two remained who were able to handle the oars, so that they
+made very slow progress to the ship, which appears to have been
+four leagues from the shore. When they got on board they were all
+so faint that none of them were able to stand. After having their
+wounds dressed they refreshed themselves; but as Robert Baker had
+more occasion for rest than food he went to bed, and when he
+awoke in the morning the ship was under sail for England.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION X.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage to Guinea in 1563 by Robert Baker</i>[286]</p>
+
+<p>This relation, like the former, is written in verse, and only
+contains a description of two adventures that happened in the
+voyage, one of which proved extremely calamitous to those
+concerned in it, among whom was the author. From the title or
+preamble, we learn that the adventurers in this voyage were Sir
+William Gerard, Sir William Chester, Sir Thomas Lodge, Benjamin
+Gonson, William Winter, Lionel Ducket, Anthony Hickman, and
+Edward Castelin. There were two ships employed, one called the
+John Baptist, of which Lawrence Rondell was master, and the other
+the Merlin, Robert Revell master. The factors were Robert Baker,
+the author, Justinian Goodwine, James Gliedell, and George Gage.
+They set out on their voyage in November 1563, bound for Guinea
+and the river Sestos, but the port whence they fitted out is
+nowhere mentioned. After the unlucky disaster that befel him in
+Guinea in the year before, Baker had made a kind of poetical vow
+not to go near that country any more; but after his return to
+England, and recovery from his wounds, he soon forgot past
+sorrows; and being invited to undertake the voyage in quality of
+factor, he consented.--Astley.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 286: Astley I. 180. Hakluyt, II. 523-531.
+The prose abstract here inserted is chiefly taken from Astleys
+collection, carefully compared with the original versified
+narrative in Hakluyt.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After we had been at sea two days and a night, the man from
+the main-top descried a sail or two, the tallest of which they
+immediately made up to, judging her to be the most valuable; and,
+as captains are in use to do[287], I hailed her to know whence
+she was. She answered from France, on which we <i>waved</i> her,
+but she nothing dismayed, <i>waved</i> us in return. I
+immediately ordered armed men aloft into the main and fore-tops,
+and caused powder to be laid on the poop to blow up the enemy if
+they should board us that way. At the sound of trumpets we began
+the fight, discharging both chain and bar-shot from our brazen
+artillery; while the Frenchmen, flourishing their swords from the
+main-yard, called out to us to board their ship. Willing to
+accept their invitation, we plied them warmly with our cannon,
+and poured in flights of arrows, while our arquebuses plied them
+from loop-holes, and we endeavoured to set their sails on fire by
+means of arrows and pikes carrying wildfire. I encouraged, the
+men to board, by handing spiced wine liberally among them, which
+they did with lime-pots, after breaking their nets with stones,
+while those of our men who were aloft entered the enemys tops,
+after killing those who defended them. Then cutting the ropes,
+they brought down the yard by the board, and those who entered
+the ship plied the enemy so well with their swords, that at
+length the remaining Frenchmen ran below deck and cried out for
+quarter. Having thus become masters of the ship, we carried her
+to the <i>Groin</i> in Spain, or Corunna, where we sold the ship
+and cargo for ready money.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 287: In these early trading voyages, the
+chief factor, who here appears to have been Baker, seems to have
+had the supreme command--Astl. I. 180. b.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After this we proceeded on our voyage and arrived in Guinea.
+One day about noon, I went with eight more in a boat towards the
+shore to trade, meaning to dispatch my business and be back
+before night. But when we had got near the shore, a furious
+tempest sprung up, accompanied with rain and thunder, which drove
+the ships from their anchors out to sea; while we in the boat
+were forced to run along the coast in search of some place for
+shelter from the storm, but meeting none, had to remain all night
+near the shore, exposed to the thunder, rain, and wind in great
+jeopardy. We learnt afterwards that the ships returned next day
+in search of us, while we rowed forward along the coast,
+supposing the ships were before us, and always anxiously looked
+out for them; but the mist was so great that we could never see
+them nor they us. The ships continued, as we were told
+afterwards, looking out for us for two or three days; after
+which, concluding that we had inevitably perished in the storm,
+they made the best of their way for England.</p>
+
+<p>Having been three days in great distress for want of food, we
+at length landed on the coast and exchanged some of our wares
+with the negroes for roots and such other provisions as they had,
+and then put to sea again in search of the ships, which we still
+supposed were before us or to leeward, wherefore we went down the
+coast to the eastwards. We continued in this manner ranging along
+shore for twelve days, seeing nothing but thick woods and
+deserts, full of wild beasts, which often appeared and came in
+crowds at sunset to the sea shore, where they lay down or played
+on the sand, sometimes plunging into the water to cool
+themselves. At any other time it would have been diverting to see
+how archly the elephants would fill their trucks with water,
+which they spouted out upon the rest. Besides deer, wild boars,
+and antelopes, we saw many other wild beasts, such as I had never
+seen before.</p>
+
+<p>We often saw a man or two on the shore, who on seeing us used
+to come off in their almadias or canoes; when casting anchor we
+offered such wares as we had in the boat for fish and fresh
+water, or provisions of their cooking, and in this way we
+procured from them roots and the fruit of the palm tree, and some
+of their wine, which is the juice of a tree and is of the colour
+of whey. Sometimes we got wild honeycombs; and by means of these
+and other things we relieved our hunger; but nothing could
+relieve our grief, fatigue and want of sleep, and we were so sore
+depressed by the dreadful situation in which we were placed, that
+we were ready to die, and were reduced to extreme weakness.
+Having lost all hope of rejoining the ships, which we now
+concluded were either lost or gone homewards, we knew not how to
+conduct ourselves. We were in a strange and distant country,
+inhabited by a people whose manners and customs were entirely
+different from ours; and to attempt getting home in an open boat
+destitute of every necessary was utterly impossible. By this time
+we found we had passed to leeward of <i>Melegete</i> or the grain
+coast, and had got to the Mina or gold coast of Guinea, as the
+negroes who now came on board spoke some Portuguese, and brought
+off their weights and scales for the purpose of trade, asking
+where were our ships. To this we answered, in hopes of being the
+better treated, that we had two ships at sea, which would be with
+them in a day or two.</p>
+
+<p>We now consulted together how they should best proceed. If we
+continued at sea in our boat, exposed by day to the burning heat
+of the sun which sensibly consumed us by copious perspiration,
+and to the frequent tornadoes or hurricanes by night, accompanied
+with thunder, lightning and rain; which deprived us of all rest,
+we could not possibly long hold out. We were often three days
+without a morsel of food; and having sat for twenty days
+continually in our boat, we were in danger of losing the use of
+our limbs for want of exercise, and our joints were so swollen by
+the scurvy, that we could hardly stand upright. It was not
+possible for us to remain much longer in the boat in our present
+condition, so that it was necessary to come to some resolution,
+and we had only three things to choose. The first was to repair
+to the castle of St George del Mina, which was not far off, and
+give ourselves up to the Portuguese who were Christians, if we
+durst trust them or expect the more humanity on that account.
+Even the worst that could happen to us from them was to be hanged
+out of our misery; yet possibly they might have some mercy on us,
+as nine young men such as we were might be serviceable in their
+gallies, and if made galley slaves for life we should have
+victuals enough to enable us to tug at the oar, whereas now we
+had both to row and starve.</p>
+
+<p>The next alternative was to throw ourselves upon the mercy of
+the negroes, which I stated was very hopeless and discouraging,
+as I did not see what favour could be expected from a beastly
+savage people, whose condition was worse than that of slaves, and
+who possibly might be cannibals. It was likewise difficult for us
+to conform ourselves to their customs, so opposite to ours; and,
+we could not be expected, having always lived on animal food, to
+confine ourselves to roots and herbs like the negroes, which are
+the food of wild beasts. Besides, having been always accustomed
+to the use of clothes, we could not for shame go naked. Even if
+we could get the better of that prejudice, our bodies would be
+grievously tormented and emaciated by the scorching heat of the
+sun, for want of that covering and defence to which we had been
+accustomed. The only other course was to stay at sea in the boat,
+and die miserably. Being determined to run any risk at land,
+rather than to continue pent up in a narrow boat, exposed to all
+the inclemencies of the weather day and night, and liable to be
+famished for want of victuals, I gave it as my opinion that we
+had better place confidence in the Christian Portuguese than in
+the negroes who lived like so many brutes. We how determined to
+throw ourselves on the mercy of the Portuguese, and hoisting sail
+shaped our course for the castle of St George del Mina; which was
+not above 20 leagues distant. We went on all day without stopping
+till late at night, when we perceived a light on shore.
+Concluding that this might be a place of trade, our boatswain
+proposed to cast anchor at this place, in hopes that we might be
+able to procure provisions next morning in exchange for some of
+our wares. This was agreed upon, and on going next morning near
+the shore we saw a watchhouse upon a rock, in the place whence
+the light had proceeded during the night, and near the watchhouse
+a large black cross was erected. This made us doubtful whereabout
+we were, and on looking farther we perceived a castle which
+perplexed us still more[288].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 288: It appears in the sequel that this
+fort or castle had been recently erected by the Portuguese at the
+western point or head-land of Cape Three-points, and of which
+there are no notices in any of the preceding voyages on this part
+of the coast.--Astley, I. 132, a.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Our doubts were quickly solved by the appearance of some
+Portuguese, one of whom held a white flag in his hand which he
+waved as inviting us to come on shore. Though we were actually
+bound in quest of the Portuguese, yet our hearts now failed us,
+and we tacked about to make from the shore. On being seen from
+the castle, a gun was fired at us by a negro, the ball from which
+fell within a yard of our boat. At length we turned towards the
+shore to which we rowed, meaning to yield ourselves up; but to
+our great surprise, the nearer we came to the shore the more did
+the Portuguese fire at us; and though the bullets fell thick
+about us we continued to advance till we got close under the
+castle wall, when we were out of danger from their cannon. We now
+determined to land in order to try the courtesy of the
+Portuguese, but were presently assailed by showers of stones from
+the castle: wall, and saw a number of negroes marching down to
+the beach with their darts and targets, some of them having bows
+and poisoned arrows. Their attack was very furious, partly from
+heavy stones falling into the boat which threatened to break
+holes in her bottom, as well as from flights of arrows which came
+whizzing about our ears, and even wounded some of us: Therefore
+being in desperation, we pushed off from the shore to return to
+sea, setting four of our men to row, while the other five
+determined to repay some part of the civility we had received,
+and immediately handled our fire-arms and bows. We employed these
+at first against the negroes on the beach, some of whom soon
+dropped; and then against the Portuguese who stood on the walls
+dressed in long white-shirts and linstocks in their hands, many
+of which were dyed red by means of the English arrows. We thus
+maintained our ground a long while, fighting at our leisure,
+regardless of the threats of the enemy, as we saw they had no
+gallies to send out to make us prisoners. When we had
+sufficiently revenged their want of hospitality, we rowed off,
+and though we knew that we must pass through another storm of
+bullets from the castle, we escaped without damage.</p>
+
+<p>When we got out to sea, we saw three negroes rowing after us
+in an almadia, who came to inquire to what country we belonged,
+speaking good Portuguese. We told them we were Englishmen, and
+said we had brought wares to trade with them if they had not used
+us so ill. As the negroes inquired where our ship was, we said we
+had two at sea well equipped, which would soon come to the coast
+to trade for gold, and that we only waited their return. The
+negroes then pretended to be sorry for what had happened, and
+intreated us to remain where we were for that day, and promised
+to bring us whatever we were in want of. But placing no
+confidence in their words, we asked what place that was, and
+being answered that it was a Portuguese castle at the western
+head-land of Cape Three-points, we hoisted sail and put to sea,
+to look out for some more friendly place.</p>
+
+<p>We now resolved to have no more reliance on the kindness of
+the Portuguese, of which we had thus sufficient experience, and
+to make trial of the hospitality of the negroes; for which
+purpose we sailed back about 30 leagues along the coast, and
+coming to anchor, some natives came off to the boat, to all of
+whom we gave presents. By this we won their hearts, and the news
+of such generous strangers being on the coast soon brought the
+kings son to our boat. On his arrival, I explained our sad case
+to him as well as I could by signs, endeavouring to make him
+understand that we were quite forlorn, having been abandoned by
+our ships, and being almost famished for want of food, offering
+him all the goods in our boat if he would take us under his
+protection and relieve our great distress. The negro chief was
+moved even to tears, and bid us be comforted. He went then on
+shore to know his fathers pleasure regarding us, and returning
+presently invited us to land. This was joyful news to us all, and
+we considered him as a bountiful benefactor raised up to us by
+the goodness of Providence. We accordingly fell to our oars in
+all haste to pull on shore, where at least 500 negroes were
+waiting our arrival; but on coming near shore the surf ran so
+high that the boat overset, on which the negroes plunged
+immediately into the water and brought us all safe on shore. They
+even preserved the boat and all that was in her, some swimming
+after the oars, and others diving for the goods that had sunk.
+After this they hauled the boat on shore and brought every thing
+that belonged to us, not daring to detain the most trifling
+article, so much were they in awe of the kings son, who was a
+stout and valiant man, and having many excellent endowments.</p>
+
+<p>They now brought us such provisions as they used themselves,
+and being very hungry we fed heartily, the negroes all the while
+staring at us with much astonishment, as the common people are
+used to do in England at strange outlandish creatures.
+Notwithstanding all this apparent humanity and kindness, we were
+still under great apprehensions of the negroes, all of whom were
+armed with darts. That night we lay upon the ground among the
+negroes, but never once closed our eyes, tearing they might kill
+us while asleep. Yet we received no hurt from them, and for two
+days fared well; but finding the ships did not come for us, as
+they expected would soon have been the case, when likewise they
+looked to have had a large quantity of goods distributed among
+them in reward for their hospitality, they soon became weary of
+us; and after lessening our allowance from day to day, they at
+length left us to shift for ourselves. In this forlorn state, we
+had to range about the woods in search of fruits and roots, which
+last we had to dig from the ground with our fingers for want of
+any instruments. Hunger had quite abated the nicety of our
+palates, and we were glad to feed on every thing we could find
+that was eatable. Necessity soon reconciled us to going naked,
+for our clothes becoming rotten with our sweat fell from our
+backs by degrees, so that at length we had scarcely rags left to
+cover our nakedness. We were not only forced to provide ourselves
+in food, but had to find fuel and utensils to dress it. We made a
+pot of clay dried in the sun, in which we boiled our roots, and
+roasted the berries in the embers, feasting every evening on
+these varieties. At night we slept on the bare ground, making a
+great fire round us to scare away the wild beasts.</p>
+
+<p>What with the entire change in our manner of living, and the
+heat and unhealthiness of the climate, our people sickened apace;
+and in a short time our original number of nine was reduced to
+three. To those who died it was a release from misery, but we who
+remained were rendered more forlorn and helpless than before. At
+length, when we had abandoned all hopes of relief, a French ship
+arrived on the coast, which took us on board and carried us to
+France, which was then at war with England, where we were
+detained prisoners.</p>
+
+<pre>
+   A prisner therefore I remaine,
+     And hence I cannot slip
+   Till that my ransome be
+     Agreed upon and paid:
+   Which being levied yet so hie,
+     No agreement can be made.
+   And such is lo my chance,
+    The meane time to abide;
+   A prisner for ransome in France,
+     Till God send time and tide.
+   From whence this idle rime
+     To England I do send:
+   And thus, till I have further time,
+     This tragedie I end.
+</pre>
+
+<p>SECTION XI.</p>
+
+<p><i>A Voyage to Guinea, in 1564:, by Captain David
+Carlet</i>[289].</p>
+
+<p>At a meeting of merchant adventurers, held at the house of Sir
+William Gerard, on the 11th July 1564, for setting forth a voyage
+to Guinea, the following chief adventurers were present, Sir
+William Gerard, Sir William Chester, Sir Thomas Lodge, Anthony
+Hickman, and John Castelin. It was then agreed that Francis
+Ashbie should be sent to Deptford for his letters to Peter Pet,
+to go about rigging of the Minion at the charges of the queens
+majesty, after which Francis Ashbie was to repair with these
+letters to Gillingham, with money to supply our charges
+there.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 289: Hakluyt, II. 531. Astley, I.
+134.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It was also agreed that every one of the five partners shall
+forthwith call upon their partners to supply, towards this new
+rigging and victualling L.29, 10s. 6d., for every L.100 value.
+Also that every one of the five partners shall forthwith bring in
+L.50, towards the furniture of the premises. Likewise, if Mr
+Gonson give his consent that the Merlin shall be brought round
+from Bristol to Hampton, that a letter shall be drawn under his
+hand, before order be given in the same.</p>
+
+<p>The ships employed in this voyage were, the Minion belonging
+to the queen, David Carlet, captain, the John Baptist of London,
+and the Merlin belonging to Mr Gonson. The success of this voyage
+in part appears by certain brief relations extracted out of the
+second voyage of Sir John Hawkins to the West Indies, made in the
+year 1564, which I have thought good to set down for want of more
+direct information, which hitherto I have not been able to
+procure notwithstanding every possible endeavour[290].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 290: This is the substance of Hakluyt's
+introduction to the following brief relation of the present
+voyage.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>Sir John, then only Mr Hawkins, departed from Plymouth with a
+prosperous wind for the West Indies, on the 18th of October 1564,
+having under his command the Jesus of Lubec of 700 tons, the
+Salomon of 140 tons, a bark named the Tiger of 50 tons, and a
+pinnace called the Swallow of 30 tons, having in all 170 men,
+well supplied with ordnance and provisions for such a voyage.
+While casting loose the foresail, one of the officers in the
+Jesus was killed by the fall of a block, giving a sorrowful
+beginning to the expedition. After getting ten leagues out to
+sea, they fell in with the Minion, a ship belonging to the queen,
+of which David Carlet was captain, and her consort the John
+Baptist of London; which two ships were bound for Guinea. The two
+squadrons, as they may be called, saluted each other with some
+pieces of ordnance, after the custom of the sea; after which the
+Minion parted company to seek her other consort the Merlin of
+London, which was out of sight astern, leaving the John Baptist
+in company with Hawkins.</p>
+
+<p>Continuing their voyage with a prosperous wind until the 21st,
+a great storm arose at N.E. about 9 o'clock at night, which
+continued 23 hours, in which storm Hawkins lost sight of the John
+Baptist and of his pinnace called the Swallow, the other three
+ships being sore tossed by the tempest. To his great joy the
+Swallow joined company again in the night, 10 leagues to the
+north of Cape Finister, having been obliged to go <i>roomer</i>,
+as she was unable to weather that cape against a strong contrary
+wind at S.W. On the 25th, the wind still continuing contrary, he
+put into Ferol in Galicia, where he remained five days, and gave
+out proper instructions to the masters of the other ships for
+keeping company during the rest of the voyage.</p>
+
+<p>On the 26th of the month the Minion came into Ferol, on which
+Mr Hawkins saluted her with some guns, according to the custom of
+the sea, as a welcome for her safe arrival: But the people of the
+Minion were not in the humour of rejoicing, on account of the
+misfortune which had happened to their consort the Merlin, whom
+they had gone to seek on the coast of England when they parted
+from Mr Hawkins. Having met with her, they kept company for two
+days; when, by the negligence of one of the gunners of the
+Merlin, the powder in her gun-room took fire, by which her stern
+was blown out and three of her men lost, besides many sore hurt,
+who saved their lives in consequence of their brigantine being at
+her stern; for the Merlin immediately sunk, to the heavy loss of
+the owners and great grief of the beholders.</p>
+
+<p>On the 30th of the month, Mr Hawkins and his ships, together
+with the Minion and her remaining consort the John Baptist, set
+sail in the prosecution of their voyage with a prosperous gale,
+the Minion having both brigantines at her stern. The 4th of
+November they had sight of Madeira, and the 6th of Tenerife,
+which they thought to have been grand Canary, as they reckoned
+themselves to the east of Tenerife, but were not. The Minion and
+her consort, being 3 or 4 leagues a head of the ships of Mr
+Hawkins, kept the course for Tenerife, of which they had a better
+view than the other ships, and by that means they parted
+company.</p>
+
+<p>Hawkins and his ships continued his voyage by Cape Verd and
+Sierra Leone, after which he crossed the Atlantic ocean and came
+to the town of Burboroata on the coast of the Terra Firma in the
+West Indies, or South America; where he afterwards received
+information of the unfortunate issue of the Guinea voyage, in the
+following manner. While at anchor in the outer road on the 29th
+of April 1565, a French ship came in called the Green Dragon of
+Newhaven, of which one Bon-temps was captain, which saluted the
+English squadron after the custom of the sea, and was saluted in
+return. This ship had been at the Mina, or Gold coast of Guinea,
+whence she had been driven off by the Portuguese gallies, and
+obliged to make for the Terra Firma to endeavour to sell her
+wares. She informed that the Minion had been treated in the same
+manner; and that the captain, David Carlet, with a merchant or
+factor and twelve mariners, had been treacherously made prisoners
+by the negroes on their arrival on that coast, and remained in
+the hands of the Portuguese; besides which they had lost others
+of their men through the want of <i>fresh water</i>, and were in
+great doubts of being able to get home the ships[291].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 291: Hakluyt might have said whether they
+did come home or not, which he certainly might have known; but he
+often leaves us in the dark as to such matters.--Astl. I. 185.
+a.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p><i>Note</i>.--It may not be improper to state in this place,
+that no ship need be reduced to utter distress for want of
+<i>fresh water</i> at sea; as distilled sea water is perfectly
+fresh and wholesome. For this purpose, all ships bound on voyages
+of any length, ought to have a still head worm and cooler adapted
+to the cooking kettle, to be used when needed, by which abundance
+of fresh water may always be secured while cooking the ships
+provisions, sufficient to preserve the lives of the crew. In
+default of that useful appendage, a still may be easily
+constructed for the occasion, by means of the pitch kettle, a
+reversed tea kettle for a head, and a gun barrel fixed to the
+spout of the tea kettle, the breach pin being screwed out, and
+the barrel either soldered to the spout, or fixed by a paste of
+flour, soap and water, tied round with rags and twine. The tea
+kettle and gun barrel are to be kept continually wet by means of
+swabs and sea water, to cool and condense the steam. This
+distilled water is at first vapid and nauseous, both to the taste
+and the stomach; but by standing open for some time, especially
+if agitated in contact with air, or by pumping air through it, as
+is commonly done to sweeten putrid water, this unpleasant and
+nauseous vapidness is soon removed.</p>
+
+<p>The nautical world owes this excellent discovery, of distilled
+sea water being perfectly fresh, to the late excellent and
+ingenious Dr James Lino, first physician to the general hospital
+of the navy at Haslar near Portsmouth during the American war,
+the author of two admirable works, on the Scurvy, and the Means
+of Preserving the Health of Seamen during long voyages, to which
+the British navy, and seamen in general, owe inestimable
+advantages. The editor, while giving this useful hint to seamen
+engaged on long voyages, is happy in having an opportunity of
+bearing this feeble testimony of honourable respect to the friend
+of his youth, under whom he had the happiness and advantage of
+serving, in that magnificent asylum of the brave defenders of the
+glory and prosperity of our king and country, for the last three
+years of the American war. Besides being an eminent and
+experienced physician, Dr Lind was a man of exemplary humanity,
+and of uncommon urbanity and singleness of manners: He was truly
+the seaman's friend. The rules and expedients which he devised
+and proposed, founded on the solid basis, of observation and
+experience, for Preserving the Health of Seamen on long voyages,
+were afterwards employed and perfected by the great navigator and
+discoverer COOK, and by his pupils and followers; and are now
+universally established in our glorious navy, to the incalculable
+advantage of the service.</p>
+
+<p>In high northern or southern latitudes, solid clear ice melted
+affords good fresh water, the first runnings being thrown away as
+contaminated by adhering sea water. White cellular ice is quite
+unfit for the purpose, being strongly impregnated with salt. In
+future articles of our work, several opportunities will occur in
+which these two expedients for supplying ships with fresh water
+will be amply detailed. But on the present opportunity, it seemed
+proper to mention these easy and effectual expedients for
+preserving the health and lives of seamen, when in want of fresh
+water by the ordinary means.--Ed.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XII.</p>
+
+<p><i>A Voyage to Guinea and the Cape de Verd Islands in 1566, by
+George Fenner</i>[292]</p>
+
+<p>Three ships were employed on this voyage, the admiral, called
+the Castle of Comfort, George Fenner general[293] of the
+expedition, and William Bats master; the May-Flower,
+vice-admiral, William Courtise master; the George, John Heiwood
+captain, and John Smith of Hampton master; besides a small
+pinnace. Walter Wren, the writer of the narrative, belonged to
+the George.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 292: Hakluyt, II. 533. Astley, I.
+185.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 293: This general was probably head
+factor--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We departed from Plymouth on the 10th December 1566, and were
+abreast of Ushant on the 12th. On the 15th we got sight of Cape
+Finister, and lost company of our admiral that night, for which
+reason we sailed along the coast of Portugal, hoping our admiral
+might be before us. Meeting a French ship on the 18th and getting
+no intelligence of our admiral, we made sail for the Canaries,
+and fell in with the island of Tenerife on the 28th, where we
+came to anchor in a small bay, at which there were three or four
+small houses, about a league from the town of Santa Cruz. In this
+island there is a marvellous high hill called the Peak, and
+although it is in lat. 28&deg; N. where the air is as warm in
+January as it is in England at midsummer, the top of this hill,
+to which no man has ever been known to ascend, is seldom free
+from snow even in the middle of summer. On the 3d January 1567,
+we departed from this place, going round the western point of the
+island, about 12 or 14 leagues from Santa Cruz, and came into a
+bay right over against the house of one Pedro de Souza, where we
+came to anchor on the 5th, and heard that our admiral had been
+there at anchor seven days before us, and had gone thence to the
+island of Gomera, to which place we followed him, and coming to
+anchor on the 6th over against the town of Gomera, we found our
+admiral at anchor to our great mutual satisfaction. We found here
+Edward Cooke in a tall ship, and a ship of the coppersmiths of
+London, which had been treacherously seized by the Portuguese in
+the bay of Santa Cruz on the coast of Barbary, or Morocco, which
+ship we left there all spoiled. At this place we bought 14 buts
+of wine for sea stores, at 15 ducats a but, which had been
+offered to us at Santa Cruz for 8, 9, or 10 ducats. The 9th we
+went to another bay about three leagues off, where we took in
+fresh water; and on the 10th we sailed for Cape Blanco on the
+coast of Africa.</p>
+
+<p>The 12th we came to a bay to eastwards of Cape Pargos,
+(<i>Barbas?</i>) which is 35 leagues from Cape Blanco, but being
+unacquainted with that part of the coast, we proceeded to Cape
+Blanco, off which we had 16 fathoms two leagues from shore, the
+land being very low and all white sand. At this place it is
+necessary to beware of going too near shore, as when in 12 or 10
+fathoms you may be aground within two or three casts of the lead.
+Directing our course on the 17th S. and S. by E. we fell into a
+bay about 16 leagues east of Cape Verd, where the land seemed
+like a great number of ships under sail, owing to its being
+composed of a great number of hummocks, some high some low, with
+high trees upon them. When within three leagues of the land we
+sounded and had 28 fathoms over a ground of black ouze. This day
+we saw much fish in sundry <i>sculs</i> or shoals, swimming with
+their noses at the surface. Passing along this coast we saw two
+small round hills about a league from the other, forming a cape,
+and between them great store of trees, and in all our sailing we
+never saw such high land as these two hills. The 19th we came to
+anchor at the cape in a road, fast by the western side of two
+hills[294], where we rode in 10 fathoms, though we might safely
+have gone into five or six fathoms, as the ground is good and the
+wind always blows from the shore.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 294: The paps of Cape Verd are about a
+League S.S.E. from the extreme west point of the
+Cape.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>At this place some of our officers and merchants went on shore
+with the boat unarmed, to the number of about 20 persons, among
+whom were Mr George Fenner the general, his brother Edward
+Fenner, Thomas Valentine, John Worme, and Francis Leigh,
+merchants, John Haward, William Bats, Nicholas Day, John Thomson,
+and several others. At their coming on shore they were met by
+above 100 negroes armed with bows and arrows. After some talk
+pledges were interchanged, five of the English being delivered
+into their hands, and three negroes taken on board the admirals
+skiff. Our people mentioned the merchandize they had brought,
+being linen and woolen cloth, iron, cheese, and other articles;
+on which the negroes said that they had civet, musk, gold, and
+grains to give in exchange, with which our people were well
+pleased. The negroes desired to see our merchandize, on which one
+of the boats was sent back to the ships, while our general and
+merchants remained in the other with the three negroe pledges,
+our five men walking about on shore among the negroes. On the
+return of the boat from the ship with goods, bread, wine, and
+cheese were distributed among the natives. At this time two of
+the negroe pledges, on pretence of sickness, were allowed to go
+on shore, promising to send two others in their stead. On
+perceiving this, Captain Haiward began to dread some perfidy, and
+retreated towards the boat, followed by two or three negroes, who
+stopped him from going on board, and made signs for him to bring
+them more bread and wine, and when he would have stepped into the
+boat, one of them caught him by the breeches, but he sprung from
+him and leapt into the boat. As soon as he was in, one of the
+negroes on shore began to blow a pipe, on which the negroe pledge
+who remained in the boat, suddenly drew Mr Wormes sword, cast
+himself into the sea and swam on shore. The negroes immediately
+laid hands on our men that were on shore, and seized three of
+them with great violence, tore their clothes from their backs,
+and left them nothing to cover them. Then many of them shot so
+thick at our men in the boats that they could scarcely handle
+their oars, yet by God's help they got the boats away, though
+many of them were hurt by the poisoned arrows. This poison is
+incurable, if the arrow pierce the skin so as to draw blood,
+except the poison be immediately sucked out, or the part hurt be
+cut out forthwith; otherwise the wounded man inevitably dies in
+four days. Within three hours after any part of the body is hurt,
+or even slightly pricked, although it be the little toe, the
+poison reaches the heart, and affects the stomach with excessive
+vomiting, so that the person can take neither meat nor drink.</p>
+
+<p>The persons seized in this treacherous manner by the negroes
+were Nicholas Day, William Bats, and John Thomson, who were led
+away to a town about a mile from the shore. The 20th we sent a
+boat on shore with eight persons, among whom was the
+before-mentioned John Thomson[295] and our interpreter, who was a
+Frenchman, as one of the negroes spoke good French. They carried
+with them two arquebuses, two targets, and a <i>mantell?</i> and
+were directed to learn what ransom the negroes demanded for Bats
+and Day whom they detained. On coming to the shore and telling
+the negroes the nature of their errand, Bats and Day were brought
+from among some trees quite loose, but surrounded by some 40 or
+50 negroes. When within a stone's throw of the beach, Bats broke
+suddenly from them and ran as fast as he could into the sea
+towards the boat; but immediately on getting into the water he
+fell, so that the negroes retook him, violently tearing off his
+clothes. After this some of the negroes carried our two men back
+to the town, while the rest began to shoot at our people in the
+boat with their poisoned arrows, and wounded one of our men in
+the small of the leg, who had nearly died in spite of every thing
+our surgeons could do for him. Notwithstanding this unjustifiable
+conduct, our general sent another message to the negroes,
+offering any terms they pleased to demand as ransom for our men.
+But they gave for answer, that three weeks before we came an
+English ship had forcibly carried off three of their people, and
+unless we brought or sent them back we should not have our men,
+though we gave our three ships and all their lading. On the 21st
+a French ship, of 80 tons came to the place where we were,
+intending to trade with the negroes, and seeing that the
+Frenchmen were well received by the natives, our general told
+them of our two men being detained, and wished them to endeavour
+to procure their release, promising L.100 to the Frenchmen if
+they succeeded. We then committed this affair to the management
+of the Frenchmen, and departed. Of our men who were hurt by the
+poisoned arrows, four died, and one had to have his arm cut off
+to save his life. Andrews, who was last hurt, lay long lame and
+unable to help himself, and only two recovered.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 295: It is not said how he had got away
+from the negroes.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>While between Cape Verd and Bonavista on the 26th, we saw many
+flying fishes of the size of herrings, two of which fell into the
+boat which we towed at our stern. The 28th we fell in with
+Bonavista, one of the Cape de Verd islands, which is 86 leagues
+from that cape. The north side of that island is full of white
+sandy hills and dales, being somewhat high land. That day we came
+to anchor about a league within the western point, in ten fathoms
+upon fine sand, but it is quite safe to go nearer in five or six
+fathoms, as the ground is every where good. The 30th we went into
+a bay within a small island about a league from our first
+anchorage, where we took plenty of various kinds of fish. Whoever
+means to anchor in this bay may safely do so in four or five
+fathoms off the south point of the small island; but must beware
+of the middle of the bay, where there is a ledge of rocks on
+which the sea breaks at low water, although then they are covered
+by three fathoms water. The last day of January, our general went
+on shore in the bay to some houses, where he found twelve
+Portuguese, the whole island not having more than 30 inhabitants,
+who were all banished men, some condemned to more years of exile
+and some to less, and among them was a simple man who was their
+captain. They live on goat's flesh, cocks and hens, with fresh
+water, having no other food except fish, which they do not care
+for, neither indeed have they any boats wherewith to catch them.
+They told us that this island had been granted by the king of
+Portugal to one of his gentlemen, who had let it at 100 ducats of
+yearly rent, which was paid by the profit on goats skins, of
+which 40,000 had been sent from that island to Portugal in one
+year. These men made us very welcome, entertaining us as well as
+they could, giving us the carcasses of as many he-goats as we
+pleased, and even aided us in taking them, bringing them down for
+us from the mountains on their asses. They have great store of
+oil procured from tortoises, which are <i>fishes</i> that swim in
+the sea, having shells on their backs as large as targets. It
+only rains in this island for three months in every year, from
+the middle of July to the middle of October; and the climate is
+always very hot. Cows have been brought here, but owing to the
+heat and drought they always died.</p>
+
+<p>We left Bonavista, or Buenavista, on the 3d February, and fell
+in the same day with another island called Mayo, 14 leagues
+distant; there being a danger midway between the two islands, but
+it is always seen and easily avoided. We anchored in a fine bay
+on the N.W. side of Mayo, in eight fathoms on a good sandy
+bottom; but weighed next day and went to another island called St
+Jago, about five leagues E. by S. from Mayo. At the westermost
+point of this island, we saw a good road-stead, having a small
+town by the waterside, close to which was a fort or battery. We
+here proposed to have anchored on purpose to trade; but before we
+were within shot, they let fly two pieces at us, on which we went
+to leeward along shore two or three leagues, where we found a
+small bay and two or three houses, off which we anchored in 14
+fathoms upon good ground. Within an hour after we had anchored,
+several persons both on foot and horseback were seen passing and
+repassing opposite the ships. Next day a considerable force of
+horse and foot was seen, and our general sent a message to know
+whether they were disposed to trade with us. They answered that
+we were made welcome as merchants, and should have every thing we
+could reasonably demand. On this our general ordered all the
+boats to be made ready, but doubting the good faith of the
+Portuguese, caused the boats to be well armed, putting a
+<i>double base</i> in the head of his pinnace and two <i>single
+bases</i> in the skiff, directing the boats of the May-flower and
+George to be similarly armed. On rowing towards the shore with
+all the boats, the general was surprised to see above 60 horsemen
+and 200 foot all armed to receive us, for which reason he sent a
+flag of truce to learn their intentions. Their answer was fair
+and smooth, declaring that they meant to treat us like gentlemen
+and merchants, and desired that our general might come on shore
+to converse with their captain. When our general approached the
+shore in his skiff, they came towards him in great numbers, with
+much seeming politeness, bowing and taking off their bonnets, and
+earnestly requesting our general and the merchants to come on
+shore. He declined this however, unless they would give
+sufficient hostages for our security. At length they promised to
+send two satisfactory hostages, and to give us water, provisions,
+money, and negroes in exchange for our merchandize, and desired a
+list of our wares might be sent on shore; all of which our
+general promised to do forthwith, and withdraw from the shore,
+causing our <i>bases, curriers</i>[296], and arquebuses to be
+fired off in compliment to the Portuguese, while at the same time
+our ships saluted them with five or six cannon shot. Most of the
+Portuguese now left the shore, except a few who remained to
+receive the list of our commodities; but, while we meant honestly
+and fairly to trade with them as friends, their intentions were
+treacherously to betray us to our destruction, as will appear in
+the sequel.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 296: Bases and curriers must have been some
+small species of ordnance, capable of being used in boats;
+arquebuses were matchlock muskets.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>About two leagues to the west of where we lay, there was a
+town behind a point of land, where the Portuguese had several
+caravels, and two brigantines or row barges like gallies. With
+all haste the Portuguese fitted out four caravels and these two
+brigantines, furnishing them with as many men and cannon as they
+could carry; and as soon as it was night these vessels made
+towards us with sails and oars, and as the land was high, and the
+weather somewhat dark and misty, we did not see them till they
+were almost close on board the May-flower, which lay at anchor
+about a gun-shot nearer them than our other ships. When within
+gun-shot of the May-flower, one of the watch chanced to see a
+light, and then looking out espied the four ships and gave the
+alarm. The Portuguese, finding themselves discovered, began
+immediately to fire their cannon, <i>curriers</i>, and
+arquebuses; then lighted up certain tubes of wild fire, and all
+their people both on shore and in their ships set up great
+shouts, while they continued to bear down on the May-flower. With
+all the haste we could, one of our guns was got ready and fired
+at them, on which they seemed to hesitate a little; But they
+recharged their ordnance, and again fired at us very briskly. In
+the mean time we got three guns ready which we fired at them,
+when they were so near that we could have shot an arrow on board.
+Having a fine breeze of wind from the shore, we hoisted our
+foresail and cut our cable, making sail to join our admiral to
+leeward, while they followed firing sometimes at us and sometimes
+at our admiral. At length one shot from our admiral had the
+effect to make them retire, when they made away from us like
+cowardly traitors. During all this time, though they continually
+fired all their guns at us, not a man or boy among us was hurt;
+but we know not what were the effects of our shot among them.</p>
+
+<p>Seeing the villany of these men, we set sail immediately for
+an island named <i>Fuego</i>, or the Fire island, twelve leagues
+from St Jago, where we came to anchor on the 11th February,
+opposite a white chapel at the west end of the island, half a
+league from a small town, and about a league from the western
+extremity of the island. In this island, there is a remarkably
+high hill which burns continually, and the inhabitants told us,
+that about three years before, the whole island had like to have
+been destroyed by the prodigious quantity of fire which it
+discharged. About a league west from the chapel we found a fine
+spring of fresh water, whence we supplied our ships. They have no
+wheat in this island, instead of which they grow millet, which
+makes good bread, and they likewise cultivate peas like those of
+Guinea. The inhabitants are Portuguese, and are forbidden by
+their king to trade either with the English or French, or even to
+supply them with provisions, or any other thing unless forced.
+Off this island is another named Brava, or St John, not exceeding
+two leagues over, which has abundance of goats and many trees,
+but not above three or four inhabitants.</p>
+
+<p>On the 25th of February we set sail for the Azores, and on the
+23d of March we got sight of one of these islands called Flores,
+to the north of which we could see another called Cuervo, about
+two leagues distant. The 27th we came to anchor at Cuervo,
+opposite a village of about a dozen mean houses; but dragging our
+anchors in the night during a gale of wind, we went to Flores,
+where we saw strange streams of water pouring from its high
+cliffs, occasioned by a prodigious rain. The 18th April we took
+in water at Flores, and sailed for Fayal, which we had sight of
+on the 28th, and of three other islands, Pico, St George, and
+Graciosa, which are round about Fayal. The 29th we anchored in 22
+fathoms water in a fine bay on the S.W. side of Fayal, over
+against a small town, where we got fresh water and fresh
+provisions. In this island, according to the report of the
+inhabitants, there grows green woad, which they allege is far
+better than the woad of St Michael or of Tercera.</p>
+
+<p>The 8th of May we came to Tercera, where we found a Portuguese
+ship, and next morning we saw bearing down, upon us, a great ship
+and two caravels, which we judged to belong to the royal navy of
+Portugal, as they really were, and therefore made ready for our
+defence. The large ship was a galliass, of about 400 tons and 300
+men, well appointed with brass guns both large and small, some of
+their shot being as large as a mans head; and the two caravels
+were both well appointed in men and ammunition of war. As soon as
+they were within shot of us, they waved us amain with their
+swords as if in defiance, and as we kept our course they fired at
+us briskly, while we prepared as well as we could for our
+defence. The great ship gave us a whole broadside, besides firing
+four of her greatest guns which were in her stern, by which some
+of our men were hurt, while we did our best to answer their fire.
+At this time two other caravels came from shore to join them, and
+two pinnaces or boats full of men, whom they put on board the
+great ship, and then returned to the shore with only two men in
+each. The ship and caravels gave us three attacks the first day,
+and when night came they ceased firing, yet kept hard by us all
+night, during which we were busily employed knotting and spicing
+our ropes and strengthening our bulwarks.</p>
+
+<p>Next day the Portuguese were joined by four great caravels or
+armadas, three of which were not less than 100 tons each, the
+fourth being smaller, but all well armed and full of men. All
+these came up against us, in the admiral or Castle of Comfort,
+and we judged that one of the caravels meant to lay us on board,
+as we could see them preparing their false nettings and all other
+things for that purpose, for which the galliasse came up on our
+larboard side, and the caravel on our starboard. Perceiving their
+intention, we got all our guns ready with bar-shot, chain-shot,
+and grape; and as soon as they came up, and had fired off their
+guns at us, thinking to lay us on board, we gave them such a
+hearty salutation on both sides of us, that they were both glad
+to fall astern, where they continued for two or three hours,
+there being very little wind. Then our small bark the George came
+up to confer with us, and as the Portuguese ships and caravels
+were coming up again to attack us, the George, while endeavouring
+to get astern of us, fell to leeward, and was so long of filling
+her sails for want of wind, that the enemy got up to us, and she
+got into the middle of them, being unable to fetch us. Then five
+of the caravels assailed her all round about, yet she defended
+herself bravely against them all. The great ship and one caravel
+came to us and fought us all day. The May-flower being well to
+windward, took the benefit of that circumstance, and kept close
+hauled all that day, but would not come near us. When night came,
+the enemy ceased firing, yet followed us all night. During these
+repeated attacks we had some men slain and several wounded, and
+our tackle much injured; yet we did our best endeavour to repair
+all things, resolving to defend ourselves manfully, putting our
+trust in God. In the night the May-flower came up to us, on which
+our captain requested they would spare us half a dozen fresh men,
+but they would not, and bore away again.</p>
+
+<p>Next morning, the enemy seeing us at a distance from one
+another, came up against us with a great noise of hooping and
+hallooing, as if resolved to board or sink us; yet although our
+company was small, lest they might think us any way dismayed, we
+answered their shouts, and waved upon them to board us if they
+durst, but they did not venture. This day they gave us four
+several assaults; but at night they forsook us, desisting with
+shame from the fight which they had begun with pride. We had some
+leaks in our ship from shot holes, which we stopped with all
+speed, after which we took some rest after our long hard labour.
+In the morning the Mayflower joined, and sent six of her men on
+board us, which gave us much relief, and we sent them four of our
+wounded men.</p>
+
+<p>We now directed our course for England, and by the 2d of June
+came into soundings off the Lizard. On the 3d we fell in with a
+Portuguese ship, the captain of which came on board our admiral,
+saying that he was laden with sugar and cotton. Our merchants
+shewed him five negroes we had, asking him to buy them, which he
+agreed to do for 40 chests of sugar, which were very small, not
+containing above 26 loaves each. While they were delivering the
+sugar, we saw a large ship and a small one bearing down upon us,
+which our captain supposed to be men of war or rovers, on which
+he desired the Portuguese to take back their sugars, meaning to
+prepare for defence. But the Portuguese earnestly entreated our
+captain not to forsake him, and promised to give him ten chests
+of sugar in addition to the bargain, if we would defend him. To
+this our captain consented, and the rovers seeing that we were
+not afraid of them, let us alone. Next morning two others came
+up, but on seeing that we did not attempt to avoid them, they
+left us also. The 5th of June we got sight of the Start, and
+about noon were abreast of Lyme bay, where we sounded in 35
+fathoms water. Next day we came in at the Needles, and anchored
+at a place called Meadhole, under the isle of Wight; from whence
+we sailed to Southampton, where our voyage ended.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Embassy of Mr Edmund Hogan to Morocco in 1577, written by
+himself</i>.[297]</p>
+
+<p>Though not exactly belonging to the subject of the present
+chapter, yet as given by Hakluyt along with the early voyages to
+Guinea, it has been thought proper to be inserted in this place.
+According to Hakluyt, Mr Hogan was one of the sworn esquires of
+the person to Queen Elizabeth, by whom he was sent ambassador to
+Muley Abdulmeleck, emperor of Morocco and king of
+Fez.--<i>Hakl</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 297: Hakluyt, II. 541.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>I Edmund Hogan, being appointed ambassador from her majesty
+the queen to the emperor and king Muley Abdulmeleck, departed
+from London with my company and servants on the 22d of April
+1577; and embarking in the good ship called the Gallion of
+London, I arrived at Azafi, a port in Barbary, on the 21st of
+May. I immediately sent Leonell Edgerton on shore, with my
+letters to the care of John Williams and John Bampton, who
+dispatched a <i>trottero</i> or courier to Morocco, to learn the
+emperors pleasure respecting my repair to his court. They with
+all speed gave the king notice of it[298]; who, being much
+satisfied with the intelligence, sent next day some of his
+officers and soldiers to Azafi, with tents and other necessaries,
+so that these captains, together with John Bampton, Robert
+Washborne, and Robert Lion, came late on Whitsunday night to
+Azafi. Having written in my letter, that I would not land till I
+knew the kings pleasure, I remained on board till their arrival;
+but I caused some of the goods to be landed to lighten the
+ship.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 298: It would appear that Williams and
+Bampton were resident at the city of Morocco.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 22d of May the Make-speed arrived in the road: and on the
+27th, being Whitsunday, John Bampton came on board the Gallion
+with others in his company, giving me to understand that the king
+was rejoiced at my safe arrival from the queen of England, and
+that for my safe conduct he had sent four captains and 100
+soldiers, together with a horse and furniture on which the king
+was in use to ride. I accordingly landed with my suite consisting
+of ten persons, three of whom were trumpeters. The four English
+ships in the harbour were dressed up to the best advantage, and
+shot off all their ordnance, to the value of twenty marks in
+powder. On coming ashore, I found all the soldiers drawn up on
+horseback, the captains and the governor of the town standing
+close to the water side to receive me, with a jennet belonging to
+the king for my use. They expressed the great satisfaction of
+their sovereign, at my arrival from the queen my mistress, and
+that they were appointed by the king to attend upon me, it being
+his pleasure that I should remain five or six days on shore, to
+refresh myself before commencing my journey. Having mounted the
+jennet, they conducted me through the town to a fair field, where
+a tent was provided for me, having the ground spread with Turkey
+carpets. The castle discharged a peal of ordnance, and every
+thing necessary was brought to my tent, where I had convenient
+table and lodging, and had other tents for the accommodation of
+my servants. The soldiers environed the tents, and kept watch as
+long as I remained there.</p>
+
+<p>Although I sought a speedier dispatch, I could not be
+permitted to begin my journey till Wednesday the 2d of June, when
+I mounted towards evening, and travelled about ten miles to the
+first place on the road where water was to be had, and there
+pitched our tents till next morning[299]. The 3d we began our
+journey early, and travelled till ten o'clock, when we halted
+till four, at which time we resumed our journey, travelling as
+long as we had light, making about 26 miles in all that day. The
+4th being Friday, we travelled in the same manner about 28 miles,
+and pitched our tents beside a river, about six wiles from the
+city of Morocco. Immediately afterwards, all the English and
+French merchants came on horseback to visit me, and before night
+there came an <i>alcayde</i> from the king, with 50 men and
+several mules laden with provisions, to make a banquet for my
+supper, bringing a message from the king, expressing how glad he
+was to hear from the queen of England, and that it was his
+intention to receive me more honourably than ever Christian had
+been before at the court of Morocco. He desired also to know at
+what time I proposed to come next day into his city, as he was
+resolved that all the Christians, and also his own nobles should
+meet me. He desired likewise that John Bampton should wait upon
+him early next morning, which he did accordingly.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 299: Having no inns in Barbary, travellers
+have to encamp or lodge in the open fields where they can find
+water.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>About seven o'clock the next morning, I moved towards the
+city, accompanied by the English and French merchants, and a
+great number of soldiers; and by the time I had gone about two
+miles, I was met by all the Spanish and Portuguese Christians,
+which I knew was more owing to the kings commands than of their
+own good will,[300] for some of them, though they spoke me fair,
+hung down their heads like dogs, especially the Portuguese, and I
+behaved to them accordingly. When I had arrived within two miles
+of the city, John Bampton rejoined me, expressing that the king
+was so glad of my arrival, that he knew not how sufficiently to
+shew his good will towards the queen and her realm. His
+counsellors met me without the gates; and on entering the city
+some of the kings footmen and guards were placed on both sides of
+my horse, and in this manner I was conducted to the palace. The
+king sat in his chair of state, having his counsellors about him,
+both Moors and <i>Elchies</i>; and, according to his order
+previously given me, I declared my message to him in the Spanish
+language, and delivered her majestys letters. All that I spoke at
+this time in Spanish, he caused one of his <i>Elchies</i> to
+interpret to the Moors who were present in the <i>Larbe</i>
+tongue. When this was done, he answered me in Spanish, returning
+great thanks to the queen my mistress, for my mission, and
+offering himself and country to be at her majesty's disposal;
+after which he commanded some of his counsellors to conduct me to
+my lodging, which was at no great distance from the court. The
+house appointed for me was very good according to the fashion of
+the country, and was every day furnished with all kinds of
+provisions at the kings charge.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 300: The Spaniards and Portuguese were
+commanded by the king, on pain of death, to meet the English
+ambassador.--Hakluyt.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I was sent for again to court that same night, and had a
+conference with the king for the space of about two hours, when I
+declared to him the particulars of what had been given me in
+charge by the queen, and found him perfectly willing to oblige
+her majesty, and not to urge her with any demands that might not
+conveniently be complied with, well knowing that his country
+might be better supplied from England with such things as it
+stood in need of, than England from his country. He likewise
+informed me, that the king of Spain had sent demanding a licence
+to send an ambassador to him, and had strongly urged him not to
+give credence or entertainment to any ambassador that might come
+from the queen of England: "Yet," said he, "I know well what the
+king of Spain is, and what the queen of England and her realm;
+for I neither like him nor his religion, being so governed by the
+inquisition that he can do nothing of himself; wherefore, when
+his ambassador comes upon the licence I have given, he will see
+how little account I make of him and Spain, and how greatly I
+shall honour you for the sake of the queen of England. He shall
+not come into my presence, as you have done and shall daily; for
+I mean to accept of you as a companion and one of my household,
+whereas he shall wait twenty days after he has delivered his
+message."</p>
+
+<p>At the end of this speech I delivered him the letters of Sir
+Thomas Gresham; upon which he took me by the hand, and led me
+down a long court to a palace, past which there ran a fair
+fountain of water, and sitting down in a chair, he commanded me
+to sit upon another, and sent for such simple musicians as he had
+to entertain me. I then presented him with a great bass lute,
+which he thankfully accepted, and expressed a desire to hear when
+he might expect the musicians: I told him great care had been
+taken to provide them, and I did not doubt that they would come
+out in the first ship after my return. He is willing to give them
+good entertainment, with lodgings and provisions, and to let them
+live according to their own law and conscience, as indeed he
+urges, no one to the contrary. He conducts himself greatly by the
+fear of God, and I found him well read in the scriptures both of
+the old and new testament, bearing a greater affection for our
+nation than any other, because that our religion forbids the
+worship of images; and indeed the Moors call him the Christian
+king. That same night[301] I continued with him till twelve
+o'clock, and he seemed to have taken a great liking for me, as he
+took from his girdle a short dagger set with 200 stones, rubies
+and turquoises, which he presented to me, after which I was
+conducted back to my lodgings.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 301: In the original this is said to have
+been the 1st of June; but from what has gone before, that date
+must necessarily be erroneous; it could not be before the 5th of
+June, on which day he appears to have entered Morocco in he
+morning.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Next day being Sunday, which he knew was our Sabbath, he
+allowed me to remain at home; but he sent for me on the afternoon
+of Monday, when I had a conference with him, and was entertained
+with music. He likewise sent for me on Tuesday by three o'clock,
+when I found him in his garden laid upon a silk bed, as he
+complained of a sore leg. Yet after a long conference, he walked
+with me into another orchard, having a fine banqueting-house and
+a large piece of water, in which was a new galley. He took me on
+board the galley, and for the space of two or three hours, shewed
+me what great experience he had in the management of gallies, in
+which he said he had exercised himself for eighteen years of his
+youth. After supper he shewed me his horses, and other matters
+about his house. From that time I did not see him, as he was
+confined with his sore leg, yet he sent messages to me every day.
+I was sent for to him again on the 13th of June, about six in the
+evening, and continued with him till midnight, conferring about
+her majestys commission, and with regard to the good usage of our
+merchants trading in his dominions. He said that he would even do
+more than was asked for the queen and her subjects, who might all
+come to his ports in perfect security, and trade in every part of
+his dominions, likewise that they should at all times freely have
+water and provisions, and in times of war might bring in the
+ships taken from our enemies, and either sell them there, or
+freely depart at their pleasure. Likewise that all English ships,
+either passing along his coast of Barbary, or going through the
+straits into the Mediterranean or Levant sea, should have safe
+conducts to pass freely to the dominions of the Turks or of
+Algiers, as well as to his own. And he engaged to write to the
+great Turk and the king of Algiers to use our ships and goods in
+a friendly manner. Also, that if any Englishmen should be
+hereafter made captives and brought into his dominions, that they
+should on no account be sold as slaves. Whereupon, declaring the
+acceptance by her majesty of these conditions, to confirm the
+intercourse of trade between our merchants and his dominions, I
+engaged to satisfy him with such commodities as he stood in need
+of, to furnish the wants of his country in all kinds of
+merchandize, so that he might not require any thing from her
+majesty contrary to her honour and law, or in breach of league
+and amity with the Christian princes her neighbours. That same
+night I presented him with a case of combs[302], and requested
+his majesty to give orders for the lading of the ships back
+again, as I found there was very little saltpetre in the hands of
+John Bampton. He answered that I should have all the aid in his
+power, as he expected there was some store in his house at
+<i>Sus,</i> and that the mountaineers had much in readiness. On
+my request that he would send orders for that to be brought, he
+promised to do so.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 302: This seems rather a singular present
+to the emperor of Morocco.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 18th day I was with him again and continued till night,
+when he shewed me his house, with the amusement of duck-hunting
+with water spaniels, and bull-baiting with English dogs. At this
+time I reminded him of sending to <i>Sus</i> about the saltpetre,
+which he engaged to do; and on the 21st the Alcayde Mammie
+departed on that errand, accompanied by Lionel Edgerton and
+Rowland Guy, carrying with them, on our account and the king's,
+letters to his brother Muley Hamet, the Alcayde Shavan, and the
+viceroy. The 23d the king sent me out of Morocco with a guard,
+and accompanied by the Alcayde Mahomet, to see his garden called
+Shersbonare; and at night of the 24th I was sent for to court to
+see a Morris dance, and a play acted by his <i>Elchies.</i> He
+promised me an audience on the next day being Tuesday, but put it
+off till Thursday, when he sent for me after supper, when the
+Alcaydes Rodwan and Gowry were appointed to confer with me; but
+after a short conversation, I requested to be admitted to the
+king to receive my dispatch. On being admitted, I preferred two
+bills, or requests, of John Bampton respecting the provision of
+saltpetre, also two other petitions for the quiet trade of our
+English merchants, together with petitions or requests for the
+sugars which had been agreed to be made by the Jews, both for the
+debts they had already incurred to our merchants, and those they
+might incur hereafter, as likewise for the proper regulation of
+the ingenios. I also moved him to give orders for the saltpetre
+and other affairs that had been before agreed upon, which he
+referred me to be settled by the two alcaydes. But on Friday the
+alcaydes could not attend to my affairs, and on Saturday Rodwan
+fell sick. So on Sunday I again made application to the king, and
+that afternoon I was sent for to confer upon the bargain with the
+alcaydes and others, but we could not agree.</p>
+
+<p>Upon Tuesday I wrote a letter to the king for my dispatch, and
+was called again to court that afternoon, when I referred all
+things to the king, accepting his offer of saltpetre. That night
+the king took me again into his galley, when the water spaniels
+hunted the duck. On Thursday I was appointed to weigh the 300
+gross quintals of saltpetre; and that afternoon the <i>tabybe</i>
+came to my lodging, to inform me that the king was offended with
+John Bampton for various reasons. Late on Sunday night, being the
+7th of July, I got the king to forgive all to John Bampton, and
+he promised to give me another audience on Monday. Upon Tuesday I
+wrote to the king for my dispatch, when he sent <i>Fray Lewes</i>
+to me, who said he had orders to write them out. Upon Wednesday I
+wrote again, and the king sent me word that I should come on
+Thursday to receive my dispatches, so that I might depart without
+fail on Friday the 12th of July.</p>
+
+<p>According to the kings appointment I went to court on Friday,
+when all the demands I had made were granted, and all the
+privileges which had been requested on behalf of the English
+merchants were yielded to with great favour and readiness. As the
+Jews resident in Morocco were indebted in large sums to our men,
+the emperor issued orders that all these should be paid in full
+without delay or excuse. Thus at length I was dismissed with
+great honour and special favour, such as had not ordinarily been
+shewn to other Christian ambassadors. Respecting the private
+affairs treated on between her majesty and the emperor, I had
+letters to satisfy her highness in the same. To conclude, having
+the same honourable escort for my return from court that I had on
+my way there, I embarked with my suite, and arrived soon after in
+England, when I repaired to court, and ended my embassy to her
+majestys satisfaction, by giving a relation of my services.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Embassy of Henry Roberts from Queen Elizabeth to Morocco in
+1585, written by himself</i>[303].</p>
+
+<p>Like the former ambassador, Edmund Hogan, Mr Henry Roberts was
+one of the sworn esquires of the person to Elizabeth queen of
+England, and the following brief relation of his embassy,
+according to Hakluyt, was written by himself. This, like the
+former, does not properly belong to the present portion of our
+arrangement, but seemed necessary to be inserted in this place,
+however anomalous, as an early record of the attentions of the
+English government to extend the commerce and navigation of
+England, the sinews of our strength, and the bulwark of our
+glorious constitution. Mr Roberts appears to have spent three
+years and five months on this embassy, leaving London on the 14th
+August 1585, and returning to the same place on the 12th January
+1589, having, in the words of Hakluyt, remained at Morocco as
+<i>lieger</i>, or resident, during upwards of three years.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 303: Hakluyt, II 602.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the commencement of this brief notice, Mr Roberts mentions
+the occasion of his embassy as proceeding from the incorporation
+of a company of merchants, for carrying on an exclusive trade
+from England to Barbary; upon which event he was appointed her
+majestys messenger and agent to the emperor of Morocco, for the
+furtherance of the affairs of that company. It is not our
+intention to load our work with copies of formal patents and
+diplomatic papers; yet in the present instance it may not be
+amiss to give an abridgment of the patent to the Barbary company,
+as an instance of the mistaken principles of policy on which the
+early foundations of English commerce were attempted.--E.</p>
+
+<p><i>Letters Patent and Privileges granted in 1585 by Queen
+Elizabeth, to certain Noblemen and Merchants of London, for a
+Trade to Barbary.[304]</i></p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 304: Hakluyt, II. 599.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Elizabeth, &amp;c.--Whereas our right trusty and well beloved
+counsellors, Ambrose earl of Warwick, and Robert earl of
+Leicester, and also our loving and natural subjects Thomas
+Starkie, &amp;c.[305] all merchants of London, now trading into
+the country of Barbary, in the parts of Africa under the
+government of Mulley Hamet Sheriffe, emperor of Morocco, and king
+of Fez and Sus, have made it evident to us that they have
+sustained great and grievous losses, and are likely to sustain
+greater if it should not be prevented. In tender consideration
+whereof, and because diverse merchandize of the same countries
+are very necessary and convenient for the use and defence of this
+our realm, &amp;c. Wherefore we give and grant to the said earls,
+&amp;c. by themselves, their factors or servants, and none
+others, for and during the space of twelve years, the whole
+freedom and liberty of the said trade, any law, &amp;c. to the
+contrary in any way notwithstanding. The said trade to be free of
+all customs, subsidies or other duties, during the said period to
+us, our heirs and successors, &amp;c. Witness ourself at
+Westminster, the 5th July, in the 27th year of our reign.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 305: Here are enumerated forty merchants of
+London, as members of the Barbary company in conjunction with the
+two earls.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p><i>Narrative.</i></p>
+
+<p>Upon an incorporation granted to the company of Barbary
+merchants resident in London, I Henry Roberts, one of her
+majesties sworn esquires of her person, was appointed messenger
+and agent from her highness unto Mulley Hamet Sheriffe, emperor
+of Morocco and king of Fez and Sus. And, having received my
+commission, instructions, and her majesties letters, I departed
+from London, the 14th August 1585, in a tall ship called the
+Ascension, in company with the Minion and Hopewell. We arrived in
+safety at the port of Azaffi in Barbary on the 14th of September
+following. The alcaide of the town, who is the kings chief
+officer there, or as it were mayor of the place, received me with
+all civility and honour, according to the custom of the country,
+and lodged me in the best house in the town. From thence I
+dispatched a messenger, which in their language is called a
+<i>trottero</i>, to inform the emperor of my arrival; who
+immediately sent a party of soldiers for my guard and safe
+conduct, with horses for myself, and mules for my baggage and
+that of my company or suite.</p>
+
+<p>Accompanied by Richard Evans, Edward Salcot, and other English
+merchants resident in the country, and with my escort and
+baggage, I came to the river <i>Tenisist</i>, within four miles
+of the city of Morocco, and pitched my tents among a grove of
+olive trees on the banks of that river, where I was met by all
+the English merchants by themselves, and the French, Flemish, and
+various other Christians, who waited my arrival. After we had
+dined, and when the heat of the day was over, we set out about 4
+o'clock in the afternoon for the city, where I was lodged by
+order of the emperor in a fair house in the <i>Judaria</i> or
+jewry, the quarter in which the Jews have their abode, being the
+best built and quietest part of the city.</p>
+
+<p>After I had rested there three days, I was introduced into the
+kings presence, to whom I delivered my message and her majesties
+letters, and was received with much civility. During three years
+in which I remained there as her majesties agent and
+<i>ligier</i>, or resident, I had favourable audiences from time
+to time; as, whenever I had any business, I was either admitted
+to his majesty himself or to his viceroy, the alcaide Breme
+Saphiana, a very wise and discreet person, and the principal
+officer of the court. For various good and sufficient reasons, I
+forbear to put down in writing the particulars of my service.</p>
+
+<p>After obtaining leave, and receiving an honourable reward from
+the emperor, I departed from his court at Morocco the 18th of
+August 1588, to a garden belonging to him called Shersbonare,
+where he promised I should only stay one day for his letters. Yet
+on one pretence or another, I was detained there till the 14th of
+September, always at the kings charges, having 40 or 50 shot
+attending upon me as my guard. At length I was conducted from
+thence, with every thing requisite for my accommodation, to the
+port of Santa Cruz, six days journey from Morocco, where our
+ships ordinarily take in their lading, and where I arrived on the
+21st of that month.</p>
+
+<p>I remained at Santa Cruz 43 days. At length, on the 2d
+November, I embarked in company with one Marshok, a Reis or
+captain, a gentleman sent along with me by the emperor on an
+embassy to her majesty. After much foul weather at sea, we landed
+on new-years day 1589, at St Ives in Cornwal, whence we proceeded
+together by land to London. We were met without the city by 40 or
+50 of the principal Barbary merchants all on horseback, who
+accompanied us by torch light into the city on Sunday the 12th
+January 1589, the ambassador and myself being together in a
+coach.</p>
+
+<p><i>Edict of the Emperor of Morocco in favour of the English,
+obtained by Henry Roberts</i>.</p>
+
+<p>In the name of the most merciful God, &amp;c. The servant of
+the Supreme God, the conqueror in his cause, the successor
+appointed by God, emperor of the Moors, son of the emperor of the
+Moors, the Shariffe, the Haceny, whose honour and estate may God
+long increase and advance. This our imperial commandment is
+delivered into the hands of the English merchants who reside
+under the protection of our high court, that all men who see
+these presents may understand that our high councils will defend
+them, by the aid of God, from all that may injure or oppress them
+in any way or manner in which they shall be wronged; and that
+which way soever they may travel, no man shall take them captives
+in these our kingdoms, ports, or other places belonging to us;
+and that no one shall injure or hinder them, by laying violent
+hands upon them, or shall give occasion that they be aggrieved in
+any manner of way. And we charge and command all the officers of
+our ports, havens, and fortresses, and all who bear authority of
+any sort in our dominions, and likewise all our subjects
+generally of all ranks and conditions, that they shall in no way
+molest, offend, wrong, or injure them. And this our commandment
+shall remain inviolable, being registered on the middle day of
+the month Rabel of the year 996.</p>
+
+<p>The date of this letter agrees with the 20th of March 1587,
+which I, Abdel Rahman el Catun, interpreter for his majesty, have
+translated out of Arabic into Spanish, word for word as contained
+therein.[306]</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 306: Besides this, Hakluyt gives copies in
+Spanish and English of a letter from Mulley Hamet to the Earl of
+Leicester, and of a letter from Queen Elizabeth to Mulley Hamet,
+both of which are merely complimentary, or relate to unexplained
+circumstances respecting one John Herman an English rebel, whose
+punishment is required from the emperor of Morocco. He had
+probably contraveened the exclusive privileges of the Barbary
+company, by trading in Morocco.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage to Benin beyond Guinea in 1588, by James
+Welsh</i>[307].</p>
+
+<p>This and the subsequent voyage to Benin were fitted out by
+Messrs Bird and Newton, merchants of London, in which a ship of
+100 tons called the Richard of Arundel and a pinnace were
+employed, under the chief command of James Welsh, who wrote the
+account of both voyages--<i>Astley</i>.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 307: Hakluyt, II. 613. Astley, I.
+199.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It seems not improbable that these voyages were intended as an
+evasion of an exclusive privilege granted in May 1588 by Queen
+Elizabeth, for trade to the rivers Senegal and Gambia, called
+Senega and Gambra in Hakluyt. The boundaries of this exclusive
+trade are described as beginning at the northermost part of the
+river Senegal, and from and within that river all along the coast
+of Guinea into the southermost part of the river Gambia, and
+within that river also; and the reason assigned for this
+exclusive grant is, that the patentees had already made one
+voyage to these parts, and that the enterprizing a new trade must
+be attended with considerable hazard and expence. The patentees
+were several merchants of Exeter and other parts of Devonshire,
+and one merchant of London, who had been instigated by certain
+Portuguese resident in England to engage in that trade, and the
+privilege is extended to ten years.[308]--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 308: See the patent at large in Hakluyt,
+II. 610. London edition, 1810.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>On the 12th October 1588, weighing anchor from Ratcliff we
+dropped down to Blackwall, whence we sailed next day; but owing
+to contrary winds we did not reach Plymouth till the 25th
+October, where we had to remain for want of a fair wind to the
+14th of December, when we set sail and passed the Lizard that
+night. Thursday the 2d January 1589, we had sight of the land
+near Rio del Oro, making our lat. 22&deg; 47' N. The 3d we saw
+Cape Barbas, distant 5 leagues S.E. The 4th in the morning we had
+sight of the stars called the <i>Croziers</i>. The 7th we had
+sight of Cape Verd, making our lat. 14&deg; 43' at 4 leagues off
+shore. Friday 17th Cape Mount bore from us N.N.E., when we
+sounded and had 50 fathoms water with a black ouse, and at 2 P.M.
+it bore N.N.W. 8 leagues distant, when Cape Misurado bore E. by
+S. Here the current sets E.S.E. along shore, and at midnight we
+had 26 fathoms on black ouse. The 18th in the morning we were
+athwart a land much resembling Cabo Verde, about 9 leagues beyond
+Cape Misurado. It is a saddle-backed hill, and there are four or
+five one after the other; and 7 leagues farther south we saw a
+row of saddle-backed hills, all the land from Cape Misurado
+having many mountains. The 19th we were off Rio de Sestos, and
+the 20th Cape Baixos was N. by W. 4 leagues distant. In the
+afternoon a canoe came off with three negroes from a place they
+called Tabanoo. Towards evening we were athwart an island, and
+saw many small islands or rocks to the southward, the current
+setting from the south. We sounded and had 35 fathoms. The 21st
+we had a flat hill bearing N.N.E. being 4 leagues from shore; and
+at 2 P.M. we spoke a French ship riding near a place called
+<i>Ratere</i>, there being another place hard bye called
+Crua[309]. The Frenchman carried a letter from us on shore for Mr
+Newton; and as we lay to while writing the letter, the current
+set us a good space along shore to the S.S.E. The 25th we were in
+the bight of a bay to the west of Cape Three-points, the current
+setting E.N.E. The 31st January we were off the middle part of
+Cape Three-points at 7 in the morning, the current setting to the
+E. Saturday 1st February we were off a round foreland, which I
+considered to be the easternmost part of Cape Three-points,
+within which foreland was a great bay and an island in the
+bay.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 309: Krou Sestra, nearly in lat. 5&deg;
+N.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 2nd February we were off the castle of Mina; and when the
+third glass of the watch was run out, we spied under our larboard
+quarter one of their boats with some negroes and one Portuguese,
+who would not come on board. Over the castle upon some high
+rocks, we saw what we thought to be two watch houses, which were
+very white. At this time our course was E.N.E. The 4th in the
+morning we were athwart a great hill, behind which within the
+land were other high rugged hills, which I reckoned were little
+short of <i>Monte Redondo</i>, at which time I reckoned we were
+20 leagues E.N.E. from the castle of Mina; and at 11 o'clock A.M.
+I saw two hills within the land, 7 leagues by estimation beyond
+the former hills. At this place there is a bay, having another
+hill at its east extremity, beyond which the land is very low. We
+went this day E. N E. and E. by N. 22 leagues, and then E. along
+shore. The 6th we were short of Villa Longa, and there we met a
+Portuguese caravel. The 7th, being a fair temperate day, we rode
+all day before Villa Longa, whence we sailed on the 8th, and 10
+leagues from thence we anchored again, and remained all night in
+10 fathoms water. The 9th we sailed again, all along the shore
+being clothed with thick woods, and in the afternoon we were
+athwart a river[310], to the eastward of which a little way was a
+great high bushy tree which seemed to have no leaves. The 10th we
+sailed E. and E. by S. 14 leagues along shore, the whole coast
+being so thick of woods that in my judgment a person would have
+much difficulty in passing through them. Towards night we
+anchored in 7 fathoms. The 11th we sailed E. by S. and 3 leagues
+from shore we had only 5 fathoms water, all the wood along shore
+being as even as if it had been clipt by gardeners sheers. After
+running 2 leagues, we saw a high tuft of trees on a brow of land
+like the head of a porpoise. A league farther on we had a very
+low head land full of trees; and a great way from the land we had
+very shallow water, on which we hauled off to seaward to get
+deeper water, and then anchored in 5 fathoms, athwart the mouth
+of the river <i>Jayo</i>. The 12th we sent the pinnace and the
+boat to land with the merchants, and they did not return till
+next morning. The shallowest part of this river is toward the
+west, where there is only 4-1/2 fathoms, and it is very
+broad.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 310: Rio de
+Lagoa--<i>Hakluyt</i>.--Probably that now called Lagos, in long.
+2&deg; 40' E. from Greenwich, in the Bight of
+Benin.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Thursday the 13th we set sail going S.S.E. along shore, the
+trees being wonderfully even, the east shore being higher than
+the west shore[311]. After sailing 18 leagues we had sight of a
+great river, called Rio de Benin, off which we anchored in 3-1/2
+fathoms, the sea being here very shallow two leagues from the
+main[312]. The 15th we sent the pinnace and boat with the
+merchants into the river; and as we rode in shallow water, we
+made sail with the starboard tacks aboard till we came to 5
+fathoms water, where we anchored having the current to the
+westwards. The west part of the land was high-browed, much like
+the head of a Gurnard, and the eastermost land was lower, having
+three tufts of trees like stacks of corn. Next day we only saw
+two of these trees, having removed more to the eastwards. We rode
+here from the 14th of February till the 14th of April, having the
+wind always at S.W.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 311: This is only to be understood as
+implying that the shore was now higher in the eastern part of the
+voyage along the coast, than formerly to the west on the coast of
+Mina; the east shore and the west shore referring to the bight or
+bay of Benin.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 312: It is probable that the two rivers
+mentioned in the text under the names of Rio de Lagoa and Rio de
+Benin, are those now called the Lagos creek and the great river
+Formosa, both in the negro kingdom of Benin.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 17th February our merchants weighed their goods and put
+them aboard the pinnace to go into the river, on which day there
+came a great current out of the river setting to the westwards.
+The 16th March our pinnace came on board with Anthony Ingram the
+chief factor, bringing 94 bags of pepper and 28 elephants teeth.
+All his company were sick. The 19th our pinnace went again into
+the river, having the purser and surgeon on board; and the 25th
+we sent the boat up the river again. The 30th our pinnace came
+from Benin with the sorrowful news that Thomas Hemstead and our
+captain were both dead. She brought with her 159 serons or bags
+of pepper, besides elephants teeth. In all the time of our
+remaining off the river of Benin, we had fair and temperate
+weather when the wind was at S.W. from the sea; but when the wind
+blew at N. and N.E. from the land, it then rained with thunder
+and lightning, and the weather was intemperately hot.</p>
+
+<p>The 13th of April 1589, we began our voyage homeward, and the
+27th of July we spoke a ship called the Port belonging to London,
+giving us good news of England. The 9th September we put into
+Catwater, where we remained till the 28th, owing to sickness and
+want of men. The 29th we sailed from Plymouth, and arrived at
+London on the 2d October 1589.</p>
+
+<p>The commodities we carried out in this, voyage were linens and
+woollen cloths, iron work of sundry kinds, manillios or bracelets
+of copper, glass beads and coral. Those we brought home were
+pepper, elephants teeth, palm oil, cloth made of cotton very
+curiously woven, and cloth made of the bark of the palm tree.
+Their money consists of pretty white shells, as they have no gold
+or silver. They have also great store of cotton. Their bread is
+made of certain roots called <i>Inamia</i>, as large as a mans
+arm, which when well boiled is very pleasant and light of
+digestion. On banian or fish days, our men preferred eating these
+roots with oil and vinegar to the best stock-fish[313]. There are
+great quantities of palm trees, out of which the negroes procure
+abundance of a very pleasant white wine, of which we could
+purchase two gallons for 20 shells. The negroes have plenty of
+soap, which has the flavour of violets. They make very pretty
+mats and baskets, also spoons of ivory very curiously wrought
+with figures of birds and beasts.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 313: It is obvious that the banian or
+meager days, still continued in the British navy, are a remnant
+of the meager days of the Roman catholic times, when it was
+deemed a mortal sin to eat flesh. Stock-fish are, however now
+abandoned, having been found to promote scurvy.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Upon this coast we had the most terrible thunder and
+lightning, which used to make the deck tremble under our feet,
+such as I never heard the like in any other part of the world.
+Before we became accustomed to it, we were much alarmed, but God
+be thanked we had no harm. The natives are very gentle and
+courteous; both men and women going naked till they are married,
+after which they wear a garment reaching from the middle down to
+the knees. Honey was so plentiful, that they used to sell our
+people earthen pots of comb full of honey, the size of two
+gallons for 100 shells. They brought us also great store of
+oranges and plantains, which last is a fruit which grows on a
+tree, and resembles our cucumbers, but is very pleasant eating.
+It pleased God of his merciful goodness to give me the knowledge
+of a means of preserving water fresh with little cost, which
+served us six months at sea; and when we came to Plymouth it was
+much wondered at by the principal men of the town, who said there
+was not sweeter water in all Plymouth[314]. Thus God provides for
+his creatures, unto whom be praise, now and <i>for ever more</i>,
+amen.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 314: This preservative is wrought by
+casting a handful of bay-salt into a hogshead of water, as the
+author told me.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.
+
+<p>The Thames water soon putrifies on board ships in long
+voyages; but afterwards throws down a sediment and becomes
+perfectly sweet pleasant and wholesome; insomuch that it is often
+bought from ships which have been to India and back. Putrid water
+at sea is purified or rendered comparatively sweet by forcing
+streams of air through it by what is called an air pump. Water
+may be preserved sweet on long voyages, or restored when putrid,
+by means of pounded charcoal.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION XVI.</p>
+
+<p><i>Supplement to the foregoing Voyage, in a Letter from
+Anthony Ingram the chief Factor, written from Plymouth to the
+Owners, dated 9th September, the day of arriving at
+Plymouth</i>[315].</p>
+
+<p>Worshipful Sirs! The account of our whole proceedings in this
+voyage would require more time than I have, and a person in
+better health than I am at present, so that I trust you will
+pardon me till I get to London.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 315: Hakluyt, II. 616. Astley, I.
+202.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Departing from London in December 1588, we arrived at our
+destined port of Benin on the 14th of February following, where
+we found not water enough to carry our ship over the bar, so that
+we left her without in the road. We put the chiefest of our
+merchandise into the pinnace and ships boat, in which we went up
+the river to a place called <i>Goto</i>[316], where we arrived on
+the 20th, that place being the nearest to Benin to which we could
+go by water. From thence we sent negro messengers to certify the
+king of our arrival, and the object of our coming. These
+messengers returned on the 22d with a nobleman to conduct us to
+the city of Benin, and with 200 negroes to carry our merchandise.
+On the 23d we delivered our commodities to the kings factor, and
+the 25th we came to the great city of Benin, where we were well
+entertained. The 26th we went to court to confer with the king,
+but by reason of a solemn festival then holding we could not see
+him; yet we spoke with his <i>veador</i>, or chief man who deals
+with the Christians, who assured us that we should have every
+thing according to our desires, both in regard to pepper and
+elephants teeth.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 316: Goto or Gato is a negro town on the
+northern branch of the Rio Formoso, about 45 miles in a straight
+line from the mouth of the river, and about 85 miles short of the
+town of Benin. This branch or creek is probably the river of
+Benin of the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We were admitted into the kings presence on the 1st of March,
+who gave us like friendly assurances respecting our trade; and
+next day we went again to court, when the <i>veador</i> shewed us
+a basket of green pepper and another of dry in the stalks. We
+desired to have it plucked from the stalks and made clean, which
+he said would require some time to get done, but should be
+executed to our satisfaction, and that by next year it should be
+all in readiness for us, as we had now come unexpectedly to their
+country, to which no Christians had traded for pepper in the
+reign of the present king. Next day they sent us 12 baskets full,
+and continued to send more daily till the 9th March, by which
+time we had made up 64 serons of pepper and 28 elephants teeth.
+By this time, as our constitutions were unused to the climate of
+Benin, all of us were seized with fevers; upon which the captain
+sent me down to Goto with the goods we had collected. On my
+arrival there, I found all the men belonging to our pinnace sick,
+so that they were unable to convey the pinnace and goods to the
+ship; but fortunately the boat came up to Goto from the ship
+within two hours after my arrival, to see what we were about, so
+that I put the goods into the boat and went down to the ship: But
+by the time I had got on board several of our men died, among
+whom were Mr Benson, the copper, and the carpenter, with three or
+four more, and I was in so weak a state as to be unable to return
+to Benin. I therefore sent up Samuel Dunne and the surgeon, that
+he might let blood of them if it were thought adviseable; but on
+their arrival they found the captain and your son William Bird
+both dead, and Thomas Hempstead was so very weak that he died two
+days after.</p>
+
+<p>In this sorrowful state of affairs they returned with all
+speed to the ship, with such pepper and elephants teeth as they
+had got, as will appear by the cargo. At their coming away; the
+<i>veador</i> told them he would use all possible expedition to
+procure them more goods if they would remain longer; but the
+sickness so increased among us, that by the time our men came
+back we had so many sick and dead, that we looked to lose our
+ship, lives, country, and all. We were so reduced that it was
+with much difficulty we were able to heave our anchors; but by
+Gods blessing we got them up and put to sea, leaving our pinnace
+behind, on the 13th of April. After which our men began to
+recover and gather strength. Sailing between the Cape de Verd
+islands and the Main, we came to the Azores on the 25th of July;
+and here our men began again to fall sick, and several died,
+among whom was Samuel Dunn, those who remained alive being in a
+sad state. In the midst of our distress, it pleased God that we
+should meet your ship the <i>Barke Burre</i> on this side the
+North Cape, which not only kept company with us, but sent us six
+fresh men on board, without whose assistance we must have been in
+a sad condition. By this providential aid we are now arrived at
+Plymouth, this 9th September; and, for want of better health at
+this present. I must refer you for farther particulars till my
+arrival in London.--Yours to command,</p>
+
+<p>ANTHONY INGRAM.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Second Voyage of James Welsh to Benin, in
+1590</i>[317].</p>
+
+<p>In the employment of the same merchants, John Bird and John
+Newton, and with the same ship as in the former voyage, the
+Richard of Arundel, accompanied by a small pinnace, we set sail
+from Ratclif on the 3d September 1590, and came to Plymouth Sound
+on the 18th of that month. We put to sea again on the 22d, and on
+the 14th October got sight of Fuertaventura, one of the Canary
+islands, which appeared very rugged as we sailed past. The 16th
+of October, in the lat. of 24&deg; 9' N. we met a prodigious
+hollow sea, such as I had never seen before on this coast; and
+this day a monstrous great fish, which I think is called a
+<i>gobarto</i>[318], put up his head to the steep-tubs where the
+cook was shifting the victuals, whom I thought the fish would
+have carried away. The 21st, being in lat. 18&deg; N. we had a
+<i>counter-sea</i> from the north, having in the same latitude,
+on our last voyage, encountered a similar sea from the south,
+both times in very calm weather. The 24th we had sight of Cape
+Verd, and next day had a great hollow sea from the north, a
+common sign that the wind will be northerly, and so it proved.
+The 15th November, when in lat. 6&deg; 42' N. we met three
+currents from west to north-west, one after the other, with the
+interval of an hour between each. The 18th we had two other great
+currents from S.W. The 20th we saw another from N.E. The 24th we
+had a great current from S.S.W. and at 6 P.M. we had three
+currents more. The 27th we reckoned to have gone 2-1/2 leagues
+every watch, but found that we had only made <i>one</i> league
+every watch for the last 24 hours, occasioned by heavy billows
+and a swift current still from the south. The 5th December, on
+setting the watch, we cast about and lay E.N.E. and N.E. and here
+in lat. 5&deg; 30' our pinnace lost us wilfully. The 7th, at
+sunset, we saw a great black spot on the sun; and on the 8th,
+both at rising and setting we saw the like, the spot appearing
+about the size of a shilling. We were then in lat. 5&deg; N. and
+still had heavy billows from the south.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 317: Hakluyt, II. 618. Astley, I.
+203.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 318: In a side note, Astley conjectures
+this to have been a great shark.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We sounded on the 14th December, having 15 fathoms on coarse
+red sand, two leagues from shore, the current setting S.E. along
+shore, and still we had heavy billows from the south. The 15th we
+were athwart a rock, somewhat like the <i>Mewstone</i> in
+England, and at the distance of 2 leagues from the rock, had
+ground in 27 fathoms. This rock is not above a mile from the
+shore, and a mile farther we saw another rock, the space between
+both being broken ground. We sounded off the second rock, and had
+ground at 20 fathoms on black sand. We could now see plainly that
+the rocks were not along the shore, but at some distance off to
+sea, and about 5 leagues farther south we saw a great bay, being
+then in lat. 4&deg; 27' N. The 16th we met a French ship
+belonging to Harfleur, which robbed our pinnace: we sent a letter
+by him. This night we saw another spot on the sun at his going
+down. Towards evening we were athwart the mouth of a river, right
+over which was a high tuft of trees. The 17th we anchored in the
+mouth of the river, when we found the land to be Cape Palmas,
+there being a great ledge of rocks between us and the Cape, a
+league and half to sea, and an island off the point or foreland
+of the Cape. We then bore to the west of the Cape, and as night
+came on could see no more of the land, except that it trended
+inwards like a bay, in which there ran a stream or tide as it had
+been the Thames. This was on the change day of the moon.</p>
+
+<p>The 19th December, a fair temperate day, with the wind S. we
+sailed east, leaving the land astern of us to the west, all the
+coast appearing low like islands to the east of Cape Palmas, and
+trending inwards like a great bay or sound. We went east all
+night, and in the morning were only three or four leagues from
+shore. The 20th we were off Rio de las Barbas. The 21st we
+continued along shore; and three or four leagues west of Cape
+Three Points, I found the bay to be set deeper than it is laid
+down by four leagues. At 4 P.M. the land began to shew high, the
+first part of it being covered by palm trees. The 24th, still
+going along shore, the land was very low and full of trees to the
+water side. At noon we anchored off the Rio de Boilas, where we
+sent the boat towards the shore with our merchants, but they
+durst not put into the river, because of a heavy surf that broke
+continually on the bar. The 28th we sailed along shore, and
+anchored at night in seven fathoms, to avoid being put back by a
+current setting from E.S.E. from <i>Papuas</i>.</p>
+
+<p>At noon on the 29th we were abreast of Ardrah, and there we
+took a caravel, the people belonging to which had fled to the
+land. She had nothing in her except a small quantity of palm oil
+and a few roots. Next morning our captain and merchants went to
+meet the Portuguese, who came off in a boat to speak with them.
+After some communing about ransoming the caravel, the Portuguese
+promised to give for her some bullocks and elephants teeth, and
+gave us then one tooth and one bullock, engaging to bring the
+rest next day. Next day being the 1st January 1591, our captain
+went a-land to speak with the Portuguese, but finding them to
+dissemble, he came on board again, when presently we unrigged the
+caravel and set her on fire before the town. We then set sail and
+went along the coast, where we saw a date tree, the like of which
+is not on all that coast, by the water side. We also fell a
+little aground at one place. Thus we went on to <i>Villalonga</i>
+where we anchored. The 3d we came to Rio de Lagoa, or Lagos
+Creek, where our merchants went to land, finding 3 fathoms on the
+bar, but being late they did not go in. There is to the eastward
+of this river a date tree, higher than all the other trees
+thereabouts. Thus we went along the coast, anchoring every night,
+and all the shore was full of trees and thick woods. The morning
+of the 6th was very foggy, so that we could not see the land; but
+it cleared up about three in the afternoon, when we found
+ourselves off the river Jaya; and finding the water very shallow,
+we bore a little out to seawards as we had done in the former
+voyage, and came to anchor in five fathoms. We set sail again
+next day, and came about noon abreast the river of Benin, where
+we anchored in four fathoms.</p>
+
+<p>The 10th our captain went to land with the boat at 2 P.M. All
+this week it was very foggy every day till 10 o'clock A.M. and
+hitherto the weather had been as temperate as our summer in
+England. This day we anchored in the road in 4 fathoms, the west
+point bearing from us E.N.E. The 21st, being a fair temperate
+day, Mr Hassald went up to the town of Gato to hear news of our
+captain. The 23d came the caravel[319] in which was Samuel,
+bringing 63 elephants teeth and three bullocks. The 28th was a
+fair temperate day, but towards night we had much rain with
+thunder and lightning. This day our boat came on board from Gato.
+The 24th February, we took in 298 serons or bags of pepper, and 4
+elephants teeth. The 26th we put the rest of our goods on board
+the caravel, in which Mr Hassald went up to Gato. The 5th March
+the caravel came again, bringing 21 serons of pepper and 4
+elephants teeth. The 9th April our caravel came again on board
+with water for our return voyage, and this day we lost our
+shallop or small boat. The 17th was a hazy and rainy day, and in
+the afternoon we saw three great water spouts, two to larboard
+and one right a-head, but by the blessing of God they came not to
+our ship. This day we took in the last of our water for sea
+store, and on the 26th we victualled our caravel to accompany us.
+The 27th we set sail on our voyage homewards.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 319: It is not mentioned how they came by
+this caravel.--Astl. I. 204. b. Probably the pinnace that
+attended them in the voyage, for the purpose of going up the
+shallow rivers.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 24th May we were 37 leagues south of Cape Palmas. The 1st
+July we got sight of Brava, one of the Cape Verd islands, bearing
+east 7 leagues off. The 13th August we spoke the queens ship, of
+which Lord Howard was admiral and Sir Richard Grenville
+vice-admiral. They made us keep company till the night of the
+15th, lying all the time a hull in waiting for prizes, 30 leagues
+S.W. from the island of Flores. That night we got leave to
+depart, accompanied by a fliboat laden with sugar from the island
+of San Thome which had been taken by the queens ship, and of
+which my lord admiral gave me strict charge not to part with her
+till safe harboured in England. The 23d the N.E. part of the
+island of Corvo bore from us E. by S. 6 leagues distant. The 17th
+September we fell in with a ship belonging to Plymouth bound from
+the West Indies. Next day we had sight of another sail; and this
+day died Mr Wood one of our company. The 23d we spoke the Dragon
+belonging to my Lord Cumberland, of which <i>master</i> Ivie was
+<i>maister</i>[320]. The 2d October we met a ship belonging to
+Newcastle coming from Newfoundland, out of which we got 300
+couple of <i>Newland</i> fish. The 13th we put into Dartmouth,
+where we staid till the 12th December, when we sailed with a west
+wind, and by the blessing of God we anchored on the 18th December
+1591, at Limehouse in the river Thames, where we discharged 589
+sacks of pepper, 150 elephants teeth, and 32 barrels of palm
+oil.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 320: This distinction of master and maister
+often occurs in these early voyages.--Astl. I. 205.
+a.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The commodities we carried out on this my second voyage were,
+broad cloth, kersies, bays, linen cloth, unwrought iron, copper
+bracelets, coral, hawks bells, horse-tails, hats, and the like.
+This voyage was more comfortable to us than the former, because
+we had plenty of fresh water and that very sweet. For even yet,
+being the 7th June 1592, the water we brought out of Benin on the
+1st of April 1591, is as clear and good as any fountain can
+yield. In this voyage we sailed 350 leagues within half a degree
+of the equator, where we found the weather more temperate than at
+our anchorage on the coast of Benin. Under the line we killed
+many small dolphins, and many other good fish, which were very
+refreshing to us; and the fish never forsook us till we were to
+the north of the Azores: But God be thanked we met with several
+ships of our own country, during the five months we were at sea,
+which were great comfort to us, having no consort.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVIII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to the Rivers
+Senegal and Gambia adjoining to Guinea, in 1591</i>[321].</p>
+
+<p>PREVIOUS REMARKS [322].</p>
+
+<p>In virtue of her majestys most gracious charter, given in the
+year 1588, being the 30th of her reign, certain English merchants
+were privileged to trade, in and from the river of Senega or
+Senegal, to and in the river of Gambra or Gambia on the western
+coast of Africa. The chiefest places of trade on that coast, in
+and between these rivers are: 1. <i>Senegal</i> river, where the
+commodities are hides, gum, elephants teeth, a few grains or
+pepper, ostrich feathers, ambergris, and some gold. 2.
+<i>Beseguiache</i>[323], a town near Cape Verd, and ----
+leagues[324] from the river Senegal. The commodities here are
+small hides and a few teeth. 3. <i>Rufisque</i>, or <i>Refisca
+viejo</i>, a town 4 leagues from Beseguiache, producing small
+hides and a few teeth now and then. 4. <i>Palmerin</i>, a town 2
+leagues from Rufisque[325], having small hides and a few
+elephants teeth occasionally. 5. <i>Porto d'Ally</i>, or
+<i>Portudale</i>, a town 5 leagues from Palmerin, having small
+hides, teeth, ambergris, and a little gold; and many Portuguese
+are there. 6. <i>Candimal</i>, a town half a league from
+Portudale, having small hides and a few teeth now and then. 7.
+<i>Palmerin</i>[326], a town 3 leagues from Candimal, with
+similar commodities. 8. <i>Jaale</i> or <i>Joala</i>, 6 leagues
+beyond Palmerin, its commodities being hides, wax, elephants
+teeth, rice, and some gold, for which it is frequented by many
+Spaniards and Portuguese, 9. <i>Gambia river</i>, producing rice,
+wax, hides, elephants teeth, and gold.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 321: Hakluyt, III. 2. Astley, I.
+242.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 322: In Astley, these previous remarks are
+stated to have been written by Richard Rainolds; but in the
+original collection of Hakluyt no such distinction is made, only
+that in the text Richard Rainolds states himself to have written
+the account of the voyage.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 323: Or Barzaguiche, by which name the
+natives call the island of Goree; the town of that name being on
+the opposite shore of the continent.--Astl, I. 242.
+c.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 324: At this place the editor of Astley's
+Collection supplies 28 leagues, in the text between brackets: But
+Cape Verd is 39 leagues from the southern mouth of the Senegal,
+and Goree is 6 leagues beyond Cape Verd. Near the situation
+pointed out for Beseguiache, modern maps place two small towns or
+villages named Dakar and Ben.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 325: A league north from Rufisque in modern
+maps is a place called Ambo; about 1-1/2 league farther north,
+one named Canne; and near 2 leagues south, another named
+Yenne.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 326: We have here two towns called Palmerin
+within a few leagues, perhaps one of them may be wrong named in
+the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The French have traded thither above thirty years from Dieppe
+in New-haven[327], commonly with four or five ships every year,
+of which two small barks go up the river Senegal. The others are
+wont, until within these four years that our ships came thither,
+to ride with their ships in Portudale, sending small shalops of
+six or eight tons to some of the before-named places on the sea
+coast. They were generally as well beloved and as kindly treated
+by the negroes as if they had been natives of the country,
+several of the negroes going often into France and returning
+again, to the great increase of their mutual friendship. Since we
+frequented the coast, the French go with their ships to Rufisque,
+and leave us to anchor a Portudale. The French are not in use to
+go up the river Gambia, which is a river of secret trade and
+riches concealed by the Portuguese. Long since, one Frenchman
+entered the river in a small bark, which was surprised, betrayed,
+and taken by the Portuguese. In our second voyage in the second
+year of our trade[328], about forty Englishmen were cruelly slain
+or captured, and most or all of their goods confiscated, by the
+vile treachery of the Portuguese, with the consent of the negro
+kings in Portudale and Joala. On this occasion only two got back,
+who were the merchants or factors. Likewise, by the procurement
+of Pedro Gonzalves, a person in the service of Don Antonio one of
+the officers of the king of Portugal, Thomas Dassel and others
+had been betrayed, if it had not pleased the Almighty to reveal
+and prevent the same.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 327: Havre de Grace is probably here
+meant--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 328: Hence it appears that the relation in
+the text was the third voyage of the English exclusive company,
+in the third year of their patent, but we find no account of the
+other two beyond what is now mentioned. It appears, however from
+Kelly's ship being at the same time upon the coast, that others
+as well as the patentees carried on this trade.--Astl. I. 242.
+d.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From the south side of the river Senegal, all along the sea
+coast to Palmerin is one kingdom of the Negroes, the king of
+which is named Melick Zamba[329], who dwells about two days
+journey inland from Rufisque.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 329: Melick; or Malek, in Arabic signifies
+king.--Astl. I. 242. e.]</blockquote>
+
+<p><i>The Voyage.</i></p>
+
+<p>On the 12th of November 1591, I, Richard Rainolds and Thomas
+Dassel, being factors in a ship called the Nightingale of London,
+of 125 tons, accompanied by a pinnace of 40 tons called the
+Messenger, arrived near Cape Verd at a small island called the
+<i>Isle of Liberty</i>. At this island we set up a small pinnace
+in which we are in use to carry our goods to land in the course
+of our traffic; and in the mean time Thomas Dassel went in the
+large pinnace to traffic with the Spaniards or Portuguese in
+Portudale or Joale. Over against this island of Liberty
+[<i>Goree</i>] there is a village of the negroes called
+Beseguiache, the alcaide or governor of which came on board, with
+a great train in a number of canoes, to receive the kings duties
+for anchorage and permission to set up our pinnace. He was much
+pleased that we had no Portuguese in our ships, saying that we
+should be always better thought of by the king and people of that
+country if we never brought any Portuguese, but came of ourselves
+as the French do always. To secure his favour, I gave him and his
+company very courteous entertainment, and upon his entreaty,
+having sufficient hostages left on board, I and several others
+went to the land along with him. At this time a war subsisted
+between this governor and the governor of a neighbouring
+province; but upon our arrival a truce was entered into for some
+time, and I with my companions were conducted through among the
+contending parties belonging to both provinces, to the house of
+the governor of Beseguiache, where we were hospitably entertained
+after their manner, and having received some presents returned
+safely on board. Next day the alcaide came again on board,
+desiring me to send some iron and other commodities in the boat
+to barter with the negroes, and also requested me to remove with
+the ship to Rufisque, which I did accordingly. I observed one
+thing, that a number of negroes, armed with bows and poisoned
+arrows, poisoned darts, and swords, attended the landing of the
+governor in warlike array, because the hostile tribe had come
+there to view our ship, taking advantage of the truce. These his
+armed attendants for the most part approached him in a kneeling
+posture, and kissed the back of his hand.</p>
+
+<p>On the 17th of November, finding no French ship had yet come
+out, I left the anchorage at the island [<i>Goree</i>], and went
+to the road of Rufisque, where the interpreters of the alcaide
+came on board and received from me the kings duties for free
+trade with the negroes, with whom I every day exchanged my iron
+and other wares for hides and some elephants teeth, finding the
+people very friendly and tractable. Next day I went about three
+miles inland to the town of Rufisque, where I was handsomely
+received and treated by the alcaide, and especially so by a young
+noble named <i>Conde Amar Pattay</i>[330], who presented me with
+an ox, and some goats and kids, for my company, assuring me that
+the king would be glad to hear of the arrival of a Christian
+ship, calling us <i>blancos</i> or white men, and more especially
+that we were English. Every day the young <i>conde</i> came to
+the sea-side with a small company of horsemen, feasting me with
+much courtesy and kindness. On the 5th of December, he and his
+train came on board to view the ship, which to them seemed
+wonderful, as a thing they had seldom seen the like of. He then
+told me that a messenger sent to the king to notify our arrival
+was returned, and that the king was much rejoiced that the
+English had brought a ship to trade in his ports; and as I was
+the first Englishman who had brought a ship there, he promised
+that I and any Englishman hereafter might be sure of being well
+treated, and of receiving good dealings in his country. The
+<i>conde</i> farther requested, in the kings name and his own,
+that before my final departure from the coast, I might return to
+the road of Rufisque, to confer with him for our better
+acquaintance, and for the establishment of stable friendship
+between them and the English, which I agreed to. Having shewn him
+and his train every civility in my power, he went on shore, on
+which I proposed to have given him a salute, but he desired the
+contrary, being amazed at the sight of the ship and noise of the
+guns, which they greatly admired.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 330: In the name or title of this negro
+chief or noble may be recognized the Portuguese or Spanish
+<i>conde</i>, and the Arabic <i>amir</i> or
+<i>emir</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 13th of December I weighed anchor from before Rufisque,
+and went to Porto d'Ally, which is in another kingdom, the king
+of which is called Amar Malek, being son to Malek Zamba the other
+king, and has his residence a days journey and a half inland from
+Porto d'Ally. When we had anchored, the governors of the town,
+who were the kings kinsmen, and all the other officers, came on
+board to receive the kings duty for anchorage and liberty to
+trade, all of whom seemed much pleased that we had no Portuguese
+on board, saying that it was the kings pleasure we should bring
+none of that nation, whom they considered as a people devoid of
+truth[331]. They complained of one Francisco de Costa, a servant
+of Don Antonio, who had often, and particularly the former year,
+abused their king Amar Malek, promising to bring him certain
+things out of England which he had never done, and supposed that
+might be his reason for not coming this voyage. They said
+likewise that neither the Portuguese nor Spaniards could abide
+us, but always spoke to the great defamation and dishonour of
+England. They also affirmed that on the arrival of a ship called
+the Command, belonging to Richard Kelley of Dartmouth, one Pedro
+Gonzalves, a Portuguese, who came in that ship from Don Antonio,
+reported to them that we were fled from England, and had come to
+rob and commit great spoil on the coast, and that Thomas Dassel
+had murdered Francisco de Acosta since we left England, who was
+coming in our ship with great presents for their king from Don
+Antonio, desiring on our arrival that they should seize our goods
+and ourselves secretly. They assured us however that they had
+refused to do this, as they disbelieved the report of Gonzalves,
+having often before been abused and deceived by such false and
+slanderous stories by the Portuguese. Their king, they said, was
+extremely sorry for the former murder of our people, and would
+never consent to any such thing in future, holding the Portuguese
+and Spaniards in utter abhorrence ever since, and having a much
+better opinion of us and our nation than these our enemies wished
+them to entertain. I gave them hearty thanks for their good
+opinion, assuring them that they should always find a great
+difference between our honour, and the dishonourable words and
+actions of our enemies, and then paid them the customary duties.
+As this was a chief place for trade, I told them that I intended
+to wait upon their king that I might give him certain presents
+which I had brought out of England, on purpose to strengthen the
+friendship between their nation and ours.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 331: From this and other passages of the
+present journal, it appears that the English used to carry a
+Portuguese along with them in their first voyages to the coast of
+Africa, whether from choice or by agreement with the government
+of Portugal does not clearly appear: and that, finding the
+inconvenience of this custom, they began now to lay it aside.
+This seems to have provoked the king of Portugal, who proposed to
+ruin the English trade by means of these agents or
+spies.--<i>Astl</i>. I. 214. b.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>All this time, Thomas Dassel was with our large pinnace at the
+town of Joala, in the dominions of king Jocoel Lamiockeric,
+trading with the Spaniards and Portuguese at that place. The
+before-mentioned Pedro Gonzalves, who had come out of England,
+was there also along with some English merchants, employed in the
+service of Richard Kelley. As Gonzalves had not been able to
+accomplish his treacherous purposes against Dassel at Porto
+d'Ally, where I remained, he attempted, along with other
+Portuguese who were made privy to his design, to betray Dassel at
+this town of Joala, and had seduced the chiefs among the negroes,
+by means of bribes, to concur in his wicked and most treacherous
+intentions. These, by the good providence of God, were revealed
+to Thomas Dassel by Richard Cape, an Englishman, in the service
+of Richard Kelley; on which Thomas Dassel went on board a small
+English bark called the Cherubim of Lyme, where a Portuguese
+named Joam Payva, a servant of Don Antonio, declared that Thomas
+Dassel would have been betrayed long before, if he and one
+Garcia, a Portuguese, who lived at Joala, would have concurred
+with Pedro Gonzalves. Upon this warning, Thomas Dassel contrived
+next day to get three Portuguese on board the pinnace, two of
+whom he sent on shore, and detained the third named Villanova as
+an hostage, sending a message that if they would bring Gonzalves
+on board next day by eight o'clock, he would release Villanova;
+but they did not. Dassel likewise got intelligence, that certain
+Portuguese and negroes were gone post by land from Joala to Porto
+d'Ally, with the view of having me, Richard Rainolds, and my
+company detained on shore; and, being doubtful of the negro
+friendship, who were often wavering, especially when overcome by
+wine, he came with his pinnace and the Portuguese hostage to
+Porto d'Ally on the 24th December, for our greater security, and
+to prevent any treacherous plan that might have been attempted
+against us in the roads by the Portuguese. He was no sooner
+arrived beside our large ship the Nightingale in the road of
+Porto d'Ally, than news was brought him from John Baily, servant
+to Anthony Dassel, that he and our goods were detained on shore,
+and that twenty Portuguese and Spaniards were come there from
+Joala along with Pedro Gonzalves, for the purpose of getting
+Villanova released. After a conference of two or three days, held
+with the negro chiefs and the Spaniards and Portuguese, the
+negroes were in the end convinced how vilely Pedro Gonzalves had
+behaved; and as he was in their power, they said he ought to
+suffer death or torture for his villany, as an example to others;
+but we, in recompence of his cruel treachery, pitied him and
+shewed mercy, desiring the negroes to use him well though
+undeserving; upon which the negro chiefs brought him on board the
+pinnace to Thomas Dassel, to do with him as he thought proper.
+Owing to some improper language he had used of certain princes,
+Gonzalves was well buffetted by a Spaniard at his coming off from
+the shore, and had been slain if the natives had not rescued him
+for our sakes.</p>
+
+<p>When I went on shore to release Villanova, Pedro Gonzalves
+confessed to Thomas Dassel, that he had concerted with some
+negroes and Portuguese about detaining Dassel and the goods on
+shore; but that he had acted nothing on this subject without
+authority from his king, contained in certain letters he had
+received at Dartmouth from London, after our departure from the
+Thames, occasioned by our presuming to trade to Guinea without a
+servant of the king of Portugal; and declared likewise that he
+had power or authority from Francisco de Costa, a Portuguese,
+remaining in England, to detain the goods of Anthony Dassel in
+Guinea. By consent of Francis Tucker, John Browbeare, and the
+other factors of Richard Kelley, with whom this Pedro Gonzalves
+came from England, it was agreed that we should detain Gonzalves
+in our ships until their departure, to avoid any other mischief
+that he might contrive. Therefore, on 9th January 1592, he was
+delivered to go for England in the same ship that brought him,
+being all the time he remained in our ship, well and courteously
+treated by me, though much against the will of our mariners, who
+were much disgusted at seeing one who had been nourished and
+relieved in our country, seeking, by villanous means, to procure
+the destruction of us all.</p>
+
+<p>Although the Spaniards and Portuguese are dissemblers and not
+to be trusted, yet when they saw how the subjects of Amar Malek
+befriended and favoured us, and that it would be prejudicial to
+their trade if we were any way injured, they renounced their evil
+intentions against us, shewing detestation of him who had been
+the cause of it, and promised to defend us and our affairs in all
+faithfulness for the future; desiring us, as the negro king had
+done already, to bring no more Portuguese with us from England,
+for they esteemed one bar of iron as more valuable than twenty
+Portuguese, and more serviceable towards the profitable trade
+which had been of late carried on by us and the French; whereas
+the Portuguese, whom we were in use to bring with us, endeavoured
+all they could to do us injury, and even to hurt all parties
+concerned in the trade.</p>
+
+<p>At the beginning of these broils, Amar Malek had sent his
+chief secretary with three horses for me, Richard Rainolds; but I
+refused going, on account of the disturbances, though I might
+have had negroes of condition left as hostages for my safety; yet
+I transmitted the customary presents for the king. When he
+understood the reason of my not coming to his residence, he was
+very sorry and much offended at the cause, and immediately issued
+a proclamation, commanding that no injury should be done to us in
+his dominions by his own people, neither suffered to be done by
+the Spaniards or Portuguese; and declaring, if any of the
+neighbouring negro tribes should confederate with the Spaniards
+and Portuguese to molest us, that he and his subjects should be
+ready to aid and defend us. Thus there appeared more kindness and
+good will towards us in these ignorant negroes, than in the
+Spaniards and Portuguese.</p>
+
+<p>None of the Spaniards or Portuguese are in use to trade up the
+river Senegal, except one Portuguese named <i>Ganigogo</i> who
+dwells far up that river, where he has married the daughter of
+one of the kings. In the towns of Porto d'Ally and Joala, which
+are the places of chief trade on this coast, and at Cauton and
+Cassan in the river Gambia, there are many Spaniards and
+Portuguese who have become resident by permission of the negroes,
+and carry on a valuable trade all along the coast, especially to
+the Rio San Dominica and Rio Grande, which are not far distant
+from the Gambia, to which places they transport the iron which
+they purchase from us and the French, exchanging it for <i>negro
+slaves</i>, which are transported to the West Indies in ships
+that come hither from Spain. By order of the governor and renters
+of the castle of Mina, and of all those places on the coast of
+Guinea where gold is to be had, these residents have a place
+limited for them in the river Gambia, beyond which they must not
+go under pain of death and confiscation of their goods; as the
+renters themselves send their own barks at certain times up the
+river, to those places where gold is to be had. In all those
+places hereabout, where we are in use to trade, the Spaniards and
+Portuguese have no castle or other place of strength, merely
+trading under the licence and safe conduct of the negroes. Most
+of the Spaniards and Portuguese who reside in those parts are
+banished men or fugitives, who have committed heinous crimes; and
+their life and conversation is conformable to their conditions,
+as they are the basest and most villainously behaved persons of
+their nation that are to be met with in any part of the
+world.</p>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter3-8" id="chapter3-8">CHAPTER VIII.</a></h2>
+
+<p>SOME MISCELLANEOUS EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH.</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>The present chapter is rather of an anomalous nature, and
+chiefly consists of naval expeditions against the Spaniards and
+Portuguese, scarcely belonging in any respect to our plan of
+arrangement: yet, as contained mostly in the ancient English
+collection of Hakluyt, and in that by Astley, we have deemed it
+improper to exclude them from our pages, where they may be
+considered in some measure as an episode. Indeed, in every
+extensively comprehensive plan, some degree of anomaly is
+unavoidable. The following apology or reason given by the editor
+of Astley's collection for inserting them in that valuable work,
+may serve us likewise on the present occasion; though surely no
+excuse can be needed, in a national collection like ours, for
+recording the exploits of our unrivalled naval defenders.</p>
+
+<p>"For want of a continued series of trading voyages to Guinea,
+we shall here insert an account of some remarkable achievements
+by the English against the Spaniards and Portuguese; who, being
+greatly alarmed to find out merchants extending their commerce,
+and trading to those parts of the world which they pretended a
+right of engrossing to themselves, began to treat our ships very
+severely, wherever they had the superiority; and when they wanted
+force, endeavoured to surprise them by treachery, never scrupling
+to violate the most solemn oaths and engagements to compass their
+designs. For this reason the English merchant ships were obliged
+to go to sea armed and in company; by which means they not only
+prevented the outrages of these faithless enemies, but often
+revenged the injuries done to others of their countrymen. At
+length, the resentment of the nation being inflamed by their
+repeated treacheries and depredations, the English began to send
+out fleets to annoy their coasts and disturb their navigation. Of
+these proceedings, we propose to give a few instances in this
+chapter, which may suffice to shew the noble spirit that
+prevailed in these early times."--<i>Astl</i>. I. 194.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Gallant escape of the Primrose from Bilboa in Spain, in
+1585</i>[332].</p>
+
+<p>It is not unknown to the world, what dangers our English ships
+have lately escaped from, how sharply they have been entreated,
+and how hardly they have been assaulted; insomuch that the valour
+of those who managed and defended them is worthy of being held in
+remembrance. Wherefore, the courageous attempt and valiant
+enterprize of the tall ship named the Primrose of London, from
+before the town of Bilboa, in the province of Biscay in Spain,
+(which ship the corregidore of that province, accompanied by 97
+Spaniards, offered violently to arrest, yet was defeated of his
+purpose, and brought prisoner into England,) having obtained
+renown, I have taken in hand to publish the truth thereof, that
+it may be generally known to the rest of our English ships; that,
+by the good example of this gallant exploit, the rest may be
+encouraged and incited in like extremity to act in a similar
+manner, to the glory of the realm and their own
+honour.--<i>Hakluyt</i>, II, 597.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 332: Hakluyt, II. 537. Astley,
+I.194.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>Upon Wednesday the 26th of May 1585, while the ship Primrose
+of 150 tons was riding at anchor off the bay of Bilboa, where she
+had been two days, there came on board a Spanish pinnace, in
+which were the corregidore and six others, who seemed to be
+merchants, bringing cherries with, them, and spoke in a very
+friendly manner to the master of the ship, whose name was Foster.
+He received them courteously, giving them the best cheer he
+could, with beer, beef, and biscuit. While thus banqueting, four
+of the seven departed in the pinnace for Bilboa; the other three
+remaining, and seeming much pleased with their entertainment. Yet
+Mr Foster was suspicious of some evil designs, and gave secret
+intimation to his people that he was doubtful of the intentions
+of these men, but said nothing to his guests by which they could
+any way surmise that he distrusted them. Soon afterwards there
+came a shipboat in which were seventy persons, seemingly
+merchants and the like of Biscay, and a little behind came the
+pinnace in which were twenty-four other persons, as the Spaniards
+afterwards confessed. On reaching the Primrose, the corregidore
+and three or four of his men went on board that ship; but on
+seeing such a multitude, Mr Foster desired that no more might
+come on aboard which was agreed to: Yet suddenly all the
+Spaniards left their boat and boarded the Primrose, all being
+armed with rapiers and other weapons which they had brought
+secretly in the boat, and had even a drum along with them to
+proclaim their expected triumph.</p>
+
+<p>On getting on board, the Spaniards dispersed themselves over
+the ship, some below deck, others entering the cabins, while the
+most part remained in a body as if to guard their prize. Then the
+corregidore, who had an officer along with him bearing a white
+rod in his hand, desired Mr Foster to yield himself as a prisoner
+to the king of Spain; on which he called out to his men that they
+were betrayed. At this time some of the Spaniards threatened Mr
+Foster with their daggers in a furious manner, as if they would
+have slain him, yet they had no such purpose, meaning only to
+have taken him and his men prisoners. Mr Foster and his men were
+amazed at this sudden assault, and were greatly concerned to
+think themselves ready to be put to death; yet some of them, much
+concerned for their own and Mr Fosters danger, and believing
+themselves doomed to death if landed as prisoners, determined
+either to defend themselves manfully or to die with arms in their
+hands, rather than to submit to the hands of the tormentors[333];
+wherefore they boldly took to their weapons, some armed with
+javelins, lances, and boar-spears, and others with five calivers
+ready charged, being all the fire-arms they had. With these they
+fired up through the gratings of the hatches at the Spaniards on
+deck, at which the Spaniards were sore amazed not knowing how to
+escape the danger, and fearing the English had more fire-arms
+than they actually possessed. Others of the crew laid manfully
+about among the Spaniards with their lances and boar-spears,
+disabling two or three of the Spaniards at every stroke. Then
+some of the Spaniards urged Mr Foster to command his men to lay
+down their arms and surrender; but he told them that the English
+were so courageous in the defence of their lives and liberties,
+that it was not in his power to controul them, for on such an
+occasion they would slay both them and him. At this time the
+blood of the Spaniards flowed plentifully about the deck; some
+being shot between the legs from below, the bullets came out at
+their breasts; some were cut in the head, others thrust in the
+body, and many of them so sore wounded that they rushed faster
+out at one side of the ship than they came in at the other,
+tumbling fast overboard on both side with their weapons, some
+falling into the sea, and others into their boats, in which they
+made all haste on shore. But though they came to the ship in
+great numbers, only a small number of them returned, yet it is
+not known how many of them were slain or drowned. On this
+occasion only one Englishman was slain named John Tristram, and
+six others wounded; but it was piteous to behold so many
+Spaniards swimming in the sea, and unable to save their lives, of
+whom four who had got hold of some part of the ship, were rescued
+from the waves by Mr Foster and his men, whose bosoms were found
+stuffed with paper to defend them from the shot, and these four
+being wounded, were dressed by the English surgeon. One of these
+was the corregidore himself, who was governor over an hundred
+cities and towns, his appointments exceeding six hundred pounds a
+year. This strange incident took place about six o'clock in the
+evening; after they had landed upwards of twenty tons of goods
+from the Primrose, which were delivered at Bilboa by John Barrell
+and John Brodbank, who were made prisoners on shore.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 333: This seems to allude to their fears of
+the Inquisition, if made prisoners.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After this valiant exploit, performed by 28 Englishmen against
+97 Spaniards, Mr Foster and his men saw that it were vain for
+them to remain any longer; wherefore they hoisted their sails and
+came away with the rest of their goods, and arrived safely by the
+blessing of God near London, on the 8th June 1585. During their
+return towards England, the corregidore and the other Spaniards
+they had made prisoners offered 500 crowns to be set on shore
+anywhere on the coast of Spain or Portugal; but as Mr Foster
+would not consent, they were glad to crave mercy and remain on
+board. On being questioned by Mr Foster as to their reason for
+endeavouring thus to betray him and his men, the corregidore
+assured him it was not done of their own accord, but by the
+command of the king of Spain; and calling for his hose, which
+were wet, he took out the royal commission authorising and
+commanding him to do what he had attempted, which was to the
+following purport:</p>
+
+<p>"Licentiate de Escober, my corregidore of my lordship of
+Biscay. Seeing that I have caused a great fleet to be equipped in
+the havens of Lisbon and Seville, that there is required for the
+soldiers, armour, victuals, and ammunition, and that great store
+of shipping is wanted for the said service: I therefore require
+you, on sight of this order, that with as much secrecy as may be,
+you take order for arresting all the shipping that may be found
+on the coast and in the ports of the said lordship, particularly
+all such as belong to Holland, Zealand, Esterland, Germany,
+England, or other provinces and countries that are in rebellion
+against me; excepting those of France, which, being small and
+weak, are thought unfit for the present service. And being thus
+arrested and staid, you shall take special care, that such
+merchandise as are on board these ships be taken out, and that
+all the armour, arms, ammunition, tackle, sails, and provisions
+be bestowed in safe custody, so that none of the ships and men
+may escape, &amp;c. Done at Barcelona, the 29th May 1585."</p>
+
+<p>In this gallant exploit is to be noted, both the great courage
+of the master, and the love of the mariners to save their master;
+likewise the great care of Mr Foster to save as much as he could
+of the goods of his owners, although by this conduct he may never
+more frequent those parts, without losing his own life and those
+of his people, as they would assuredly, if known, subject
+themselves to the sharp torments of their <i>Holy house</i>. As
+for the king of Spain pretending that the English were in
+rebellion against him, it is sufficiently well known even to
+themselves, with what love, unity, and concord our ships have
+ever dealt with them, being always at least as willing to shew
+pleasure and respect to their king and them, as they have been to
+deal hospitably by the English.--<i>Hakl.</i></p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage of Sir Francis Drake, in 1585, to the West
+Indies</i>[334].</p>
+
+<p>Upon the knowledge of the embargo laid by the king of Spain in
+1585, upon the English ships, men, and goods found in his
+country, having no means to relieve her subjects by friendly
+treaty, her majesty authorised such as had sustained loss by that
+order of embargo to right themselves by making reprisals upon the
+subjects of the king of Spain; for which she gave them her
+letters of reprisal, to take and arrest all ships and
+merchandises they might find at sea or elsewhere, belonging to
+the subjects of that King. At the same time, to revenge the
+wrongs offered to her crown and dignity, and to resist the
+preparations then making against her by the king of Spain, her
+majesty equipped a fleet of twenty-five sail of ships, and
+employed them under the command of Sir Francis Drake, as the
+fittest person in her dominions, by reason of his experience and
+success in sundry actions.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 334: Church. Collect. III.
+155.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It is not my intention to give all the particulars of the
+voyages treated of, but merely to enumerate the services
+performed, and the mistakes and oversights committed, as a
+warning to those who may read them, to prevent the like errors
+hereafter. As this voyage of Sir Francis Drake was the first
+undertaking on either side in this war, for it ensued immediately
+after the arrest of our ships and goods in Spain, I shall deliver
+my opinion of it before I proceed any farther. One impediment to
+the voyage was, that to which the ill success of several others
+that followed was imputed, viz. the want of victuals and other
+necessaries fit for so great an expedition; for had not this
+fleet met with a ship of Biscay, coming from Newfoundland with
+fish, which relieved their necessities, they had been reduced to
+great extremity. In this expedition Sir Francis Drake sailed in
+the Elizabeth Bonadventure; captain Frobisher, in the Aid was
+second in command; and captain Carlee was lieutenant-general of
+the forces by land, Sir Francis having the supreme command both
+as admiral and general.</p>
+
+<p>The services performed in this expedition were, the taking and
+sacking of St Domingo in Hispaniola, of Carthagena on the
+continent of America, and of St Justina in Florida, three towns
+of great importance in the West Indies. This fleet was the
+greatest of any nation, except the Spaniards, that had ever been
+seen in these seas since their first discovery; and, if the
+expedition had been as well considered of before going from home,
+as it was happily performed by the valour of those engaged, it
+had more annoyed the king of Spain than all the other actions
+that ensued during that war. But it seems our long peace had made
+us incapable of advice in war; for had we kept and defended those
+places when in our possession, and made provision to have
+relieved them from England, we had diverted the war from Europe;
+for at that time there was no comparison betwixt the strength of
+Spain and England by sea, by means whereof we might have better
+defended these acquisitions, and might more easily have
+encroached upon the rest of the Indies, than the king of Spain
+could have aided or succoured them. But now we see and find by
+experience, that those places which were then weak and
+unfortified, are since fortified, so that it is to no purpose for
+us to attempt annoying the king of Spain now in his dominions in
+the West Indies. And, though this expedition proved fortunate and
+victorious, yet as it was father an awakening than a weakening of
+the king of Spain, it had been far better wholly let alone, than
+to have undertaken it on such slender grounds, and with such
+inconsiderable forces[335].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 335: It must be acknowledged that the
+present section can only be considered as a species of
+introduction or prelude to an intended narrative of an
+expedition: Yet such actually is the first article in Sir William
+Monson's celebrated Naval Tracts, as published in the Collection
+of Churchill; leaving the entire of the narrative an absolute
+blank. Nothing could well justify the adoption of this
+inconclusive and utterly imperfect article, but the celebrity of
+its author and actor: For Sir William Monson, and the editor of
+Churchill's Collection, seem to have dosed in giving to the
+public this <i>Vox et preterea nihil</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Cruizing Voyage to the Azores by Captain Whiddon, in 1586,
+written by John Evesham</i>[336].</p>
+
+<p>This voyage was performed by two barks or pinnaces, the
+Serpent of 35 tons, and the Mary Sparke of Plymouth of 50 tons,
+both belonging to Sir Walter Raleigh, knight. Leaving Plymouth on
+the 10th June 1586, we directed our course in the first place for
+the coast of Spain, and thence for the islands called the Azores,
+in which course we captured a small bark, laden with sumach and
+other commodities, in which was the Portuguese governor of St
+Michael's Island, with several other Portuguese and Spaniards.
+Sailing thence to the island of Gracioso, westward of Tercera, we
+descried a sail to which we gave chase, and found her to be a
+Spaniard. But at the first, not much respecting whom we took, so
+that we might enrich ourselves, which was the object of our
+expedition, and not willing it should be known what we were, we
+displayed a white silk ensign in our maintop, which made them
+believe that we were of the Spanish navy laying in wait for
+English cruizers; but when we got within shot, we hauled down our
+white flag, and hoisted the St Georges ensign, on which they fled
+as fast as they were able, but all in vain, as our ships sailed
+faster than they; wherefore they threw overboard all their
+ordnance and shot, with many letters and the chart of the straits
+of Magellan, which lead into the south sea, immediately after
+which we took her, finding on board a Spanish gentleman named
+Pedro Sarmiento, who was governor of the straits of Magellan,
+whom we brought home to England, and presented to the queen our
+sovereign.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 336: Hakluyt; II. 606. Astley, I. 196. The
+command of this expedition is attributed by the editor of
+Astley's Collection to captain Whiddon, on the authority of the
+concluding sentence.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>After this, while plying off and on about the islands, we
+espied another sail to which we gave chase, during which our
+admiral sprung his main-mast; yet in the night our vice-admiral
+got up with and captured the chase, which we found was laden with
+fish from Cape Blanco on which we let her go for want of hands to
+bring her home. Next day we descried two vessels, one a ship and
+the other a caravel, to which we gave chase, on which they made
+with all haste for the island of Gracioso, where they got to
+anchor under protection of a fort; as having the wind of us we
+were unable to cut them off from the land, or to get up to attack
+them with our ships as they lay at anchor. Having a small boat
+which we called a <i>light horseman</i>, there went into her
+myself and four men armed with calivers, and four others to row,
+in which we went towards them against the wind. On seeing us row
+towards them, they carried a considerable part of their
+merchandise on shore, and landed all the men of both vessels; and
+as soon as we got near, they began to fire upon us both from
+their cannon and small arms, which we returned as well as we
+could. We then boarded one of their ships, in which they had not
+left a single man; and having cut her cables and hoisted her
+sails, we sent her off with two of our men. The other seven of us
+then went very near the shore and boarded the caravel, which rode
+within stones throw of the shore, insomuch that the people on the
+land threw stones at us; yet in spite of them, we took possession
+of her, there being only one negro on board. Having cut her
+cables and hoisted her sails, she was so becalmed under the land
+that we had to tow her off with our boat, the fort still firing
+on us from their cannon, while the people on shore, to the number
+of about 150, continually fired at us with muskets and calivers,
+we answering them with our five muskets. At this time the shot
+from my musket, being a bar-shot, happened to strike the gunner
+of the fort dead, while he was levelling one of his great guns;
+and thus we got off from them without loss or wound on our part.
+Having thus taken five[337] sail in all, we did as we had done
+with the ship with the fish, we turned them off without hurting
+them, save that we took from one of them her mainmast for our
+admiral, and sent her away with all our Spanish and Portuguese
+prisoners, except Pedro Sarmiento, three other principal persons,
+and two negroes, leaving them within sight of land, with bread
+and water sufficient to serve them ten days.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 337: Four only are mentioned in the text;
+and it appears that they only sent away at this time the first
+taken ship, in which they had captured
+Sarmiento.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We now bent our course for England, taking our departure from
+off the western islands in about the latitude of 41&deg; N. and
+soon afterwards one of our men descried a sail from the foretop,
+then ten sail, and then fifteen sail. It was now concluded to
+send off our two prizes, by manning of which we did not leave
+above 60 men in our two pinnaces. When we had dispatched them, we
+made sail towards the fleet we had discovered, which we found to
+consist of 24 sail in all; two of them being great caraks, one of
+1200 and the other of 1000 tons, and 10 galeons, all the rest
+being small ships and caravels, laden with treasure, spices, and
+sugars. In our two small pinnaces we kept company with this fleet
+of 24 ships for 32 hours, continually fighting with them and they
+with us; but the two huge caraks always kept between their fleet
+and us, so that we were unable to take any one of them; till at
+length, our powder growing short, we were forced to give over,
+much against our wills, being much bent upon gaining some of
+them, but necessity compelling us by want of powder, we left
+them, without any loss of our men, which was wonderful,
+considering the disparity of force and numbers.</p>
+
+<p>We now continued our course to Plymouth, where we arrived
+within six hours after our prizes, though we sent them away forty
+hours before we began our homeward course. We were joyfully
+received, with the ordnance of the town, and all the people
+hailed us with willing hearts, we not sparing our shot in return
+with what powder we had left. From thence we carried our prizes
+to Southampton, where our owner, Sir Walter Raleigh, met us and
+distributed to us our shares of the prizes.</p>
+
+<p>Our prizes were laden with sugars, elephants teeth, wax,
+hides, Brazil-wood, and <i>cuser?</i> as may be made manifest by
+the testimony of me, John Evesham, the writer hereof, as likewise
+of captains Whiddon, Thomas Rainford, Benjamin Wood, William
+Cooper master, William Cornish master, Thomas Drak corporal, John
+Ladd gunner, William Warefield gunner, Richard Moon, John Drew,
+Richard Cooper of Harwich, William Beares of Ratcliff, John Row
+of Saltash, and many others.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Brief relation of notable service performed by Sir Francis
+Drake in 1587</i>[338].</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>The title of this article at large in Hakluyt is, A brief
+relation of the notable service performed by Sir Francis Drake,
+upon the Spanish fleet prepared in the road of Cadiz; and of his
+destroying 100 sail of barks; passing from thence all along the
+coast of Spain to <i>Cape Sacre</i>, where also he took certain
+forts; and so to the mouth of the river of Lisbon; thence
+crossing over sea to the isle of St Michael, where he surprised a
+mighty carak called the St Philip, coming from the East Indies,
+being the first of that kind ever seen in England.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 338: Hakl. II. 607. Astl. I.
+197.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The editor of Astleys Collection says, that this relation
+seems to have been taken from a letter, written by one who was in
+the expedition to a friend; and thinks that it is not unlike the
+manner of Sir Walter Raleigh.--E.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>Being informed of mighty naval preparations in Spain for the
+invasion of England, her Majesty queen Elizabeth, by the good
+advice of her grave and prudent council, thought it expedient to
+use measures to prevent the same; for which purpose she caused a
+fleet of some thirty sail to be equipped, over which she
+appointed as general Sir Francis Drake, of whose many former good
+services she had sufficient proof. She accordingly caused four
+ships of her royal navy to be delivered to him, the Bonaventure,
+in which he went general; the Lion, under the command of Mr
+William Borough, comptroller of the navy; the Dreadnought,
+commanded by Mr Thomas Venner; and the Rainbow, of which Mr Henry
+Bellingham was captain[339]. Besides these four ships, two of her
+majestys pinnaces were appointed to serve as tenders or advice
+boats. To this fleet, there were added certain tall ships
+belonging to the city of London, of whose special good service
+the general made particular mention, in his letters to the
+queen.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 339: Sir William Monson in his Naval
+Tracts, in Churchills Collection, III. 156, gives a short account
+of this expedition. By him the admiral ship is called the
+Elizabeth Bonaventure, and Sir William Burroughs is called vice
+admiral. From a list given by Sir William Monson of the royal
+navy of England left by queen Elizabeth at her death, (Church.
+Coll. III. 196.) the Bonaventure appears to have been of the
+burden of 600 tons, carrying 50 pieces of cannon and 250 men, 70
+of whom were mariners, and the rest landsmen. The Lion and
+Rainbow of 500 tons each, with the same number of guns and men as
+the Bonaventure. The Dreadnought of 400 tons, 20 guns, 200 men,
+50 of them seamen.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This fleet sailed from Plymouth Sound, towards the coast of
+Spain, in April 1587. The 16th of that month, in latitude of
+40&deg; N. we met two ships belonging to Middleburg, in Zealand,
+coming from Cadiz, by which we were acquainted that vast
+abundance of warlike stores were provided at Cadiz and that
+neighbourhood, and were ready to be sent to Lisbon. Upon this
+information, our general made sail with all possible expedition
+thither, to cut off and destroy their said forces and stores, and
+upon the 19th of April entered with his fleet into the harbour of
+Cadiz; where at our first entering we were assailed by six
+gallies over against the town, but which we soon constrained to
+retire under cover of their fortress. There were in the road at
+our arrival sixty ships, besides sundry small vessels close under
+the fortress. Twenty French ships fled immediately to Puerta
+Real, followed by some small Spanish vessels that were able to
+pass the shoals. At our first coming, we sunk a ship belonging to
+Ragusa of 1000 tons, very richly laden, which was armed with 40
+brass guns. There came two other gallies from Port St Mary, and
+two more from Puerta Real, which shot freely at us, but
+altogether in vain, so that they were forced to retire well
+beaten for their pains. Before night we had taken 30 of their
+ships, and were entire masters of the road in spite of the
+gallies, which were glad to retire under the protection of the
+fort. Among the captured ships was one quite new, of
+extraordinary size, being above 1200 tons burden, belonging to
+the Marquis of Santa Cruz, high admiral of Spain. Five were ships
+of Biscay, four of which were taking in stores and provisions
+belonging to the king of Spain for his great fleet at Lisbon,
+which we burnt. The fifth was of about 1000 tons, laden with iron
+spikes, nails, hoops, horse shoes, and other things of a similar
+kind, for the West Indies, which we likewise set on fire. We also
+took a ship of 250 tons, laden with wines on the kings account,
+which ship we carried with us to sea, when we took out the wines
+for our own use, and then set her on fire. We took three fliboats
+of 300 tons each, laden with biscuit, one of which we set on
+fire, after taking out half her loading, and took the other two
+with us to sea. We likewise fired ten ships, which were laden
+with wine, raisins, figs, oil, wheat, and the like. The whole
+number of ships which we then burnt, sunk, or brought away,
+amounted to 30 at the least, and by our estimation to the burden
+of 10,000 tons. Besides these, there were about 40 ships at
+Puerta Real, not including those that fled from Cadiz.</p>
+
+<p>We found little ease during our stay in the road of Cadiz, as
+the enemy were continually firing at us from the gallies, the
+fortress, and the shore, being continually employed in planting
+new batteries against us in all convenient situations; besides
+which, finding they could not defend their ships any longer, they
+set them on fire that they might come among us, so that at the
+tide of flood we had much ado to defend ourselves: Yet was this a
+pleasant sight to behold, as we were thereby relieved from the
+great labour and fatigue of discharging the provisions and stores
+belonging to the enemy into our ships. Thus, by the assistance of
+the Almighty, and the invincible courage and good conduct of our
+general, this perilous but happy enterprize was achieved in one
+day and two nights, to the great astonishment of the king of
+Spain, and the so great vexation of the Marquis of Santa Cruz,
+the high admiral, that he never had a good day after, and in a
+few months, as may justly be supposed, he died of extreme grief.
+Having thus performed this notable service, we came out from the
+road of Cadiz on Friday morning, the 21st of April, having
+sustained so small loss as is not worth mentioning.</p>
+
+<p>After our departure, the ten gallies which were in the road of
+Cadiz came out after us, as if in bravado, playing their ordnance
+against us. At this time the wind scanted, upon which we cast
+round again, and made for the shore, coming to anchor within a
+league of the town; and there, for all their vapouring, the
+gallies allowed us to ride in quiet. Having thus had experience
+of a galley fight, I can assure you that the four ships of her
+majesty which we had with us would make no scruple to fight with
+twenty gallies, if all alone, and not being occupied in guarding
+others. There never were gallies that had better place and
+opportunity of advantage to fight against ships; yet were they
+forced to retire from us while riding at anchor in a narrow gut,
+which we were obliged to maintain till we had discharged and
+fired their ships, which we could only do conveniently upon the
+flood tide, at which time the burning ships might drive clear of
+us. Being thus provisioned for several months with bread and wine
+at the enemies cost, besides what we had brought with us from
+England, our general dispatched captain Crosse to England with
+his letters, giving him farther in charge to relate all the
+particulars of this our first enterprize to her majesty.</p>
+
+<p>We then shaped our course to Cape Sacre[340], and in our way
+thither we took at several times near 100 ships, barks, and
+caravels, laden with hoops, galley oars, pipe staves, and other
+stores belonging to the king of Spain, intended for furthering
+his preparations against England, all of which we set on fire and
+destroyed, setting all their men on shore. We also spoiled and
+destroyed all the fishing boats and nets thereabouts, to their
+great annoyance, and as we suppose to the entire overthrow of
+their rich Tunny fishing for that year. We came at length to Cape
+Sagres, where we landed; and the better to enjoy the harbour at
+our ease[341], we assailed the castle of Sagres and three other
+strong holds, some of which we took by storm and others by
+surrender. From thence we came before the harbour of Lisbon or
+mouth of the Tagus, where lay the Marquis of Santa Cruz with his
+fleet of gallies, who seeing us chase his ships on shore, and
+take and carry away his barks and caravels, was obliged to allow
+us to remain quietly at our pleasure, and likewise to depart,
+without exchanging a single shot. When our general sent him word
+that he was ready to combat with him, the marquis refused his
+challenge, saying that he was not then ready, neither had he any
+such commission from his sovereign.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 340: Cape St Vincent, or rather Punta de
+Sagres, one of the head lands of that great
+promontory.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 341: Probably the harbour of Figuera in
+Algarve, a town near Cape Sagres.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Thus having his challenge refused by the marquis, and seeing
+no more good to be done on the coast of Spain, our general
+thought it improper to spend any more time there; and therefore
+with consent of his chief officers[342], he shaped his course
+towards the island of St Michael, within 20 or 30 leagues of
+which he had the good fortune to fall in with a Portuguese carak,
+called the San Philippo, being the same ship which had carried
+out to the Indies three Japanese princes who had been in
+Europe[343]. The carak surrendered without resistance, and being
+the first that had ever been taken on the homeward voyage from
+India, the Portuguese took it for a bad omen, especially as she
+had the kings own name. Our general put all the people belonging
+to this carak into certain vessels well provided with provisions,
+and sent them courteously home to their own country. The riches
+of this prize seemed so great to the whole fleet, as in truth
+they were, that every one expected to have sufficient reward of
+their labour, and thereupon it was unanimously resolved to return
+to England, which we happily did, and arrived safe the same
+summer in Plymouth with our whole fleet and this rich booty, to
+our own profit and due honour, and the great admiration of the
+whole kingdom.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 342: According to Sir William Monson,
+Church. Col. III. 156. Sir Francis Drake went upon this
+expedition to conciliate the merchant adventurers, to whom most
+of the ships of his squadron belonged.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 343: Sir William Monson, in the place
+quoted above, says he had intelligence of this carak having
+wintered at Mosambique, and being now expected
+home.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>It may be here noted, that the taking of this carak wrought
+two extraordinary effects in England; as in the first place it
+taught others that caraks were no such bugbears but that they
+might be easily taken, as has been since experienced in taking
+the Madre de Dios, and in burning and sinking others; and
+secondly in acquainting the English nation more particularly with
+the exceeding riches and vast wealth of the East Indies, by which
+themselves and their neighbours of Holland have been encouraged,
+being no less skillful in navigation nor of less courage than the
+Portuguese, to share with them in the rich trade of India, where
+they are by no means so strong as was formerly supposed.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION V.</p>
+
+<p><i>Brief account of the Expedition of the Spanish Armada in
+1588</i>[344].</p>
+
+<p>Notwithstanding the great hurt and spoil made by Sir Francis
+Drake in Cadiz roads the year before, by intercepting some part
+of the preparations intended for the great navy of the king of
+Spain, he used his utmost endeavours to be revenged this year,
+lest by longer delay his designs might be prevented as before;
+wherefore he arrested all ships, men, and necessaries that were
+wanting for his fleet, compelling every one to serve him in his
+great expedition. He appointed for general of this his so called
+Invincible Armada, the duke of Medina Sidonia, who was employed
+on this occasion more for his high birth and exalted rank, than
+for any experience in sea affairs; for so many dukes, marquises,
+and earls had volunteered on this occasion, that it was feared
+they might repine if commanded by a person of lower quality than
+themselves. They departed from Lisbon on the 19th of May 1588,
+with the greatest pride and glory, and with less doubt of victory
+than ever had been done by any nation. But God, angry with their
+insolence, turned the event quite contrary to their
+expectation.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 344: Church. Col. III. 157.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The directions given by the king of Spain to his general, the
+duke of Medina Sidonia, were to repair, as wind and weather might
+allow, to the road of Calais in Picardy, there to wait the
+arrival of the prince of Parma and his army, and on their meeting
+they were to open a letter containing their farther instructions.
+He was especially commanded to sail along the coasts of Brittany
+and Normandy in going up the channel, to avoid being discovered
+by the English; and, if he even met the English fleet, he was in
+no case to offer them battle, but only to defend himself in case
+of attack. On coming athwart the North Cape[345] the duke was
+assailed with contrary wind and foul weather, by which he was
+forced to take shelter in the <i>Groyne</i>, or bay of Corunna,
+where part of his fleet waited for him.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 345: Perhaps Cape Ortegal may be here
+meant, being the most northern head land of Spain, and not far
+from Corunna, called the Groyne in the text.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When about to depart from Corunna, the duke got intelligence
+from an English fisherman, that our fleet had lately been at sea,
+but had put back again and discharged most of their men, as not
+expecting the Spanish armada this year. This intelligence
+occasioned the duke to alter his resolutions, and to disobey the
+instructions given him by the king; yet this was not done without
+some difficulty, as the council was divided in opinion, some
+holding it best to observe the kings commands, while others were
+anxious not to lose the opportunity of surprising our fleet at
+unawares, when they hoped to burn and destroy them. Diego Flores
+de Valdes, who commanded the squadron of Andalusia, and on whom
+the duke most relied, because of his judgment and experience in
+maritime affairs, was the main cause of persuading to make the
+attempt upon our ships in harbour, and in that design they
+directed their course for England.</p>
+
+<p>The first land they fell in with was the Lizard, being the
+most southerly point of Cornwall, which they mistook for the
+Ram-head off Plymouth; and as the night was at hand, they tacked
+out to sea, laying their account to make an attempt upon our
+ships in Plymouth next morning. In the mean time, while thus
+deceived in the land, they were discovered by captain Fleming, a
+pirate or freebooter who had been roving at sea, and who knowing
+them to be the Spanish fleet, repaired in all haste to Plymouth,
+and gave notice to our fleet then, riding at anchor, as
+follows:</p>
+
+<p>THE ENGLISH FLEET[346].</p>
+
+<pre>
+<i>Ships.           Commanders.                  Tons. Guns. Men.</i>
+   The Ark Royal    The Lord Admiral              800   32   400
+   Revenge          Sir F. Drake, vice admiral
+   Victory          Sir J. Hawkins, rear admiral  800   52   400
+   Lion             Lord Thomas Howard            500   80   250
+   Bear             Lord Sheffield                900   40   500
+   Elizabeth-Jonas  Sir Robert Southwell          900   40   500
+   Triumph          Sir Martin Frobisher         1000   40   500
+   Hope             Captain Crosse                600   30   250
+   Bonaventure      ---- Reyman                   600   30   250
+   Dreadnought      ---- George Beeston           400   20   200
+   Nonparielle      ---- Thomas Fenner            500   50   250
+   Swiftsure        ---- William Fenner           400   20   200
+   Rainbow          Lord Henry Seymour
+   Vauntguard       Sir William Wentworth
+   Mary-Rose        Captain Fenton
+   Antilope         Sir Henry Palmer              350   16   160
+   Foresight        Captain Baker                 300   16   160
+   Aid              ---- John Wentworth
+   Swallow          ---- Richard Hawkins          330   16   160
+   Tiger            ---- William Wentworth        200   12   100
+   Scout            ---- Ashley                   120    8    66
+   Bull
+   Tremontanny                                           8    70
+   Acatice                                        100    8    60
+   Charles, pinnace Captain Roberts
+   Moon             ---- Clifford
+   Spy              ---- Bradbury                  50    5    40
+   Noy
+</pre>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 346: This list, as given by Sir William
+Monson in the present article, contains only the names of the
+ships and commanders; the other circumstances enumerated,
+tonnage, guns, and men, are added from a list of the royal navy
+of England at the death of queen Elizabeth, which will be given
+hereafter.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Immediately on receiving the intelligence brought by Fleming,
+the lord admiral got out his ships to sea with all possible
+expedition; so that before the Spaniards could draw near
+Plymouth, they were welcomed at sea by the lord admiral and his
+fleet, who continued to fight with them till they came to anchor
+at Calais. The particulars of the fight and its success I
+purposely omit, being things so well known[347].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 347: This surely is a poor excuse for
+omitting the glorious destruction of the Spanish Armada; yet in a
+Collection of Voyages, it were improper to attempt supplying even
+this great omission, by any composition of our own; as it may be
+found in the historians of the time.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>While this great armada was preparing, her majesty had
+frequent and perfect intelligence of the designs of the
+Spaniards; and knowing that the king of Spain intended to invade
+England by means of a mighty fleet from his own coast, she caused
+her royal navy to be fitted out under the conduct of the lord
+high admiral of England, whom she stationed at Plymouth as the
+fittest place for attending their coming. Knowing however, that
+it was not the Armada alone which could endanger the safety of
+England, as it was too weak for any enterprise on land, without
+the assistance of the Prince of Parma and his army in Flanders,
+she therefore appointed thirty ships of the Hollanders to lie at
+anchor off Dunkirk, where the prince and his army were to have
+embarked in flat bottomed boats, which were built on purpose and
+all in readiness for the expedition to England. Thus by the wise
+precautions of the queen, the prince was effectually prevented
+from putting to sea with his flat boats; but in truth neither his
+vessels nor his army were in readiness, which caused the king of
+Spain to be jealous of him ever after, and is supposed to have
+hastened his end.</p>
+
+<p>Although her majesty had taken the most vigilant precautions
+to foresee and prevent all dangers that might threaten from sea,
+yet did she not deem herself and country too secure against the
+enemy by these means, and therefore prepared a royal army to
+receive them in case of landing. But it was not the will of God
+that the enemy should set foot on England, and the queen became
+victorious over him at sea with small hazard, and little
+bloodshed of her subjects. Having thus shewn the designs of the
+Spaniards, and the course pursued by the queen to prevent them, I
+propose now to consider the errors committed on both
+sides[348].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 348: Our readers are requested to remember
+that these are the reflections of Sir William Monson, a
+contemporary.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Nothing could appear more rational or more likely to happen,
+after the Duke of Medina Sidonia had got intelligence of the
+state of our navy, than a desire to surprise them at unawares in
+harbour; since he well knew, if he had taken away or destroyed
+our strength at sea, that he might have landed when and where he
+pleased, which is a great advantage to an invading enemy: Yet,
+admitting it to have had the effect he designed, I see not how he
+is to be commended for infringing the instructions he had
+received from his sovereign. That being the case, it is easy to
+appreciate what blame he deserved for the breach of his
+instructions, when so ill an event followed from his rashness and
+disobedience. It was not his want of experience, or his laying
+the blame on Valdes, that excused him at his return to Spain,
+where he certainly had been severely punished, had not his wife
+obtained for him the royal favour.</p>
+
+<p>Before the arrival in Spain of the ships that escaped from the
+catastrophe of this expedition, it was known there that Diego
+Flores de Valdes had persuaded the duke to infringe the royal
+instructions. Accordingly, the king had given strict orders in
+all his ports, wherever Valdes might arrive, to apprehend him,
+which was executed, and he was carried to the castle of
+Santander, without being permitted to plead in his defence, and
+remained there without being ever seen or heard of afterwards; as
+I learned from his page, with whom I afterwards conversed, we
+being both prisoners together in the castle of Lisbon. If the
+directions of the king of Spain had been punctually carried into
+execution, then the armada had kept along the coast of France,
+and had arrived in the road of Calais before being discovered by
+our fleet, which might have greatly endangered the queen and
+realm, our fleet being so far off at Plymouth. And, though the
+Prince of Parma had not been presently ready, yet he might have
+gained sufficient time to get in readiness, in consequence of our
+fleet being absent. Although the prince was kept in by the thirty
+sail of Hollanders, yet a sufficient number of the dukes fleet
+might have been able to drive them from the road of Dunkirk and
+to have possessed themselves of that anchorage, so as to have
+secured the junction of the armada and the land army; after which
+it would have been an easy matter for them to have transported
+themselves to England. What would have ensued on their landing
+may be well imagined.</p>
+
+<p>But it was the will of HIM who directs all men and their
+actions, that the fleets should meet, and the enemy be beaten, as
+they were, and driven from their anchorage in Calais roads, the
+Prince of Parma blockaded in the port of Dunkirk, and the armada
+forced to go about Scotland and Ireland with great hazard and
+loss: Which shews how God did marvellously defend us against the
+dangerous designs of our enemies. Here was a favourable
+opportunity offered for us to have followed up the victory upon
+them: For, after they were beaten from the road of Calais, and
+all their hopes and designs frustrated, if we had once more
+offered to fight them, it is thought that the duke was determined
+to surrender, being so persuaded by his confessor. This example,
+it is very likely, would have been followed by the rest. But this
+opportunity was lost, not through the negligence or backwardness
+of the lord admiral, but through the want of providence in those
+who had the charge of furnishing and providing for the fleet:
+For, at that time of so great advantage, when they came to
+examine into the state of their stores, they found a general
+scarcity of powder and shot, for want of which they were forced
+to return home; besides which, the dreadful storms which
+destroyed so many of the Spanish fleet, made it impossible for
+our ships to pursue those of them that remained. Another
+opportunity was lost, not much inferior to the other, by not
+sending part of our fleet to the west of Ireland, where the
+Spaniards were of necessity to pass, after the many dangers and
+disasters they had endured. If we had been so happy as to have
+followed this course, which was both thought of and discoursed of
+at the time, we had been absolutely victorious over this great
+and formidable armada. For they were reduced to such extremity,
+that they would willingly have yielded, as divers of them
+confessed that were shipwrecked in Ireland.</p>
+
+<p>By this we may see how weak and feeble are the designs of men,
+in respect of the great Creator; and how indifferently he dealt
+between the two nations, sometimes giving one the advantage
+sometimes the other; and yet so that he only ordered the
+battle.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VI.</p>
+
+<p><i>Account of the Relief of a part of the Spanish Armada, at
+Anstruther in Scotland, in 1588</i>[349].</p>
+
+<p>However glorious and providential the defeat and destruction
+of the <i>Invincible Armada</i>, it does not belong to the
+present work to give a minute relation of that great national
+event. It seems peculiarly necessary and proper, however, in this
+work, to give a very curious unpublished record respecting the
+miserable fate of the Spanish armada, as written by a
+contemporary, the Reverend James Melville, minister of
+Anstruther, a sea-port town on the Fife, or northern, shore of
+the Frith of Forth.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 349: From MS. Memoirs of James Melville, a
+contemporary.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>James Melville, who was born in 1556, and appears to have been
+inducted to the living of Anstruther only a short time before the
+year 1588, left a MS. history of his own life and times,
+extending to the year 1601. Of this curious unpublished
+historical document, there are several copies extant,
+particularly in the splendid library of the Faculty of Advocates,
+and in that belonging to the Writers to the Signet, both at
+Edinburgh. The present article is transcribed from a volume of
+MSS belonging to a private gentleman, communicated to the editor
+by a valued literary friend. It had formerly belonged to a
+respectable clergyman of Edinburgh, and has the following notice
+of its origin written by the person to whom it originally
+belonged.</p>
+
+<p>"The following History of the Life of James Melville, was
+transcribed from an old MS. lent to me by Sir William Calderwood
+of Poltoun, one of the Judges of the Courts of Session and
+Justiciary, who had it among other papers that belonged to his
+grand-uncle, Mr David Calderwood, author of Altare Damascenum,
+History, &amp;c."</p>
+
+<p>This MS. so far as it contains the Life of James Melville,
+extends to 360 folio pages; of which the present article occupies
+about three pages, from near the bottom of p. 184. to nearly the
+same part of p. 187. The orthography seems to have been
+considerably modernized by the transcriber, but without changing
+the antiquated words and modes of expression. Such of these as
+appeared difficult to be understood by our English readers, are
+here explained between brackets.--E.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>That winter, [1587-8] the King [James VI. of Scotland] was
+occupied in commenting of the Apocalyps, and in setting out
+sermons thereupon, against the papists and Spaniards; and yet, by
+a piece of great oversight, the papists practiced never more
+busily in this land, and [nor] made greater preparation for
+receiving of the Spaniards, nor [than] that year. For a long
+time, the news of a Spanish navy and army had been blazed abroad;
+and about the lambastyde of the year 1588, this island had found
+a fearful effect thereof, to the utter subversion both of kirk
+and policy, if God had not wonderfully watched over the same, and
+mightily foughen and defeat that army, by his souldiers the
+elements, which he made all four most fiercely till afflict them,
+till almost utter consumption. Terrible was the fear, peircing
+were the preachings, earnest zealous and fervent were the
+prayers, sounding were the sighs and sabs, and abounding were the
+tears, at that fast and general assembly keeped at Edinburgh,
+when the news were credibly told, sometimes of their landing at
+Dunbar, sometimes at St Andrews and in Tay, and now and then at
+Aberdeen and Cromerty firth: and, in very deed, as we knew
+certainly soon after, the Lord of armies, who rides upon the
+wings of the wind, the Keeper of his own Israel, was in the mean
+time convying that monstrous navy about our coasts, and directing
+their hulks and galliasses to the islands, rocks and sands,
+whereupon he had distinat their wrack and destruction.</p>
+
+<p>For, within two or three moneths thereafter, early in the
+morning by break of day, one of our baillies[350] came to my bed
+side, saying, but not with fray [fear], "I have to tell you news,
+Sir: There is arrived within our harbour this morning, a shipfull
+of Spaniards, but not to give mercy; but to ask." And so shews me
+that the commander had landed, and he had commanded them to their
+ship again, and the Spaniards had humbly obeyed. He therefore
+desired me to rise and hear their petition with them. Up I got
+with diligence, and, assembling the honest men of the town, came
+to the tolbooth[351], and after consultation taken to hear them
+and what answer to make, there presented us a very venerable man
+of big stature, and grave and stout countenance, grey haired and
+very humble like, who, after much and very low courtesie, bowing
+down with his face near the ground, and touching my shoe with his
+hand, began his harangue in the Spanish tongue, whereof I
+understood the substance; and, I being about to answer in Latin,
+he having only a young man with him to be his interpreter, [who]
+began and told over again to us in good English.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 350: The baillies of towns in Scotland are
+equivalent to aldermen in England. The author here refers to the
+town of Anstruther, a sea port town of Fife, on the northern
+shore of the Firth of Forth, of which he was minister. There are
+two Anstruthers, easter and wester, very near each other, and now
+separate parishes; but it does not appear to which of these the
+present historical document refers: Perhaps they were then
+one.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 351: The town-house; but now generally
+applied to signify the prison, then, and even now, often attached
+to the town hall.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The sum was, That king Philip his master had rigged out a navy
+and army to land in England, for just causes to be avenged of
+many intollerable wrongs which he had received of that nation.
+But God, for their sins, had been against them, and by storm of
+weather had driven the navy <i>by</i> [past] the coast of
+England, and him with certain captains, being the general of
+twenty hulks, upon an isle of Scotland called the Fair isle,
+where they had made shipwrack, and were, so many as had escaped
+the merciless seas and rocks, more nor [than] six or seven weeks
+suffered great hunger and cold, till conducting that bark out of
+Orkney, they were come hither as to their special friends and
+confederates, to kiss the kings majesties hand of Scotland, and
+herewith he <i>becked</i> [bowed] even to the <i>yeard</i>
+[ground]; and to find relief and comfort thereby to himself,
+these gentlemen, captains, and the poor souldiers, whose
+condition was for the present most miserable and pitiful.</p>
+
+<p>I answered this much in sum, That, howbeit neither our
+friendship, which could not be great, seeing their king and they
+were friends to the greatest enemy of Christ, the pope of Rome,
+and our king and we defied him, nor yet their cause against our
+neighbours and special friends of England, could procure any
+benefit at our hands for their relief or comfort; nevertheless
+they should know by experience that we were men, and so moved by
+human compassion, and christians of better religion <i>nor</i>
+[than] they, which should <i>kythe</i> [appear manifest] in the
+fruits and effects plain contrary to theirs: For, whereas our
+people, resorting among them in peaceable and lawful affairs of
+merchandise, were violently taken and cast in prison, their goods
+and <i>gier</i> [chattels] confiscate, and their bodies committed
+to the cruel flaming fire for the cause of religion, they should
+find nothing amongst us but Christian pity and works of mercy and
+alms, leaving to God to work in their hearts concerning religion
+as it pleased him. This being truly reported again to him by his
+townsmen, with great reverence he gave thanks and said, "He could
+not make answer for their <i>kirk</i> [church], and the laws and
+order thereof, only for himself, that there were divers Scotsmen
+who knew him, and to whom he had shewn courtesy and favour at
+Calice[352], and as he supposed some of this same town of
+Anstruther."</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 352: <i>Calice</i> in this passage, and
+<i>Calais</i> in one subsequent, certainly means Cadiz in Spain;
+which to this day is often called <i>Cales</i> by English
+mariners.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>So [I] shewed him that the bailies had granted him licence,
+with the captains, to go to their lodging for their refreshment,
+but to none of their men to land, till the overlord of the town
+were advertised, and understood the kings majesties mind
+<i>anent</i> [concerning] them. Thus with great courtesie he
+departed.</p>
+
+<p>That night the <i>laird</i> [lord of the manor] being
+advertised, came; and, on the morn, with a good number of the
+gentlemen of the countrey round about, gave the said general and
+the captains <i>presence</i>, [audience] and after the same
+speeches in effect as before, received them in his house, and
+suffered the souldiers to come a land and ly altogether to the
+number of thirteen score, for the most part young beardless men,
+<i>silly</i>, [weak] travelled, and hungered; to the which, one
+day or two <i>kail pottage</i>[353] and fish was given; for my
+advice was conform to the prophet Elizeus [Elisha] his to the
+king of Israel in Samaria, <i>Give them bread and water,
+&amp;c.</i></p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 353: A mess formerly much used in Scotland
+among the commons, being a kind of soup maigre, composed of
+<i>kail</i>, a species of greens or coleworts, boiled in water,
+and thickened with oat-meal, grits, or shelled
+barley.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The names of the commanders were Jan [Juan] Gomes de Medina,
+general of twenty hulks, captain Patricio, captain de Lagaretto,
+captain de Luffera, captain Mauretio, and Seingour Serrano. But
+verily all the while, my heart melted within me for desire of
+thankfulness to God, when I remembered the prideful and cruel
+natural temper of the people, and how they would have used us, in
+case they had landed with their forces among us, and the
+wonderful work of Gods mercy and justice in making us see them,
+the chief commanders of them, to make such due-gard [submission]
+and courtesie to poor seamen, and their souldiers, so abjectly,
+to beg alms at our doors and in our streets.</p>
+
+<p>In the mean time, they knew not of the wrack of the rest, but
+supposed that the rest of the army was safely returned [to
+Spain,] till one day I got in St Andrews, in print, the wrack of
+the gallies in particular, with the names of the principal men,
+and how they were used, in Ireland and our Highlands, in Wales
+and other parts of England. The which, when I recorded to Jan
+Gomes, by particular and special names, he cried out for grief,
+<i>bursted and grat</i> [burst into tears.] This Jan Gomes shewed
+great kindness to a ship of our town, which he found arriested at
+<i>Calais</i>[354] at home coming, <i>rode</i>[355] to court for
+her, and made great <i>russe</i> [praise] of Scotland to his
+king, took the honest men to his house, and inquired for the
+laird of Anstruther, for the minister, and his host, and sent
+home many commendations: But we thanked God in our hearts, that
+we had seen them in that form.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 354: This must signify Cadiz, as mentioned
+before.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 355: Perhaps ought to have been
+<i>wrote</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>SECTION VII.</p>
+
+<p><i>A cruising Voyage to the Azores in 1589, by the Earl of
+Cumberland</i>[356].</p>
+
+<p>We learn from Hakluyt, II. 647, that this narrative was
+written by Mr Edward Wright, an eminent mathematician and
+engineer, who was the real author of that admirable invention for
+charts, commonly called <i>Mercators projection</i>, but
+unjustly, as Mr Wright complains in his work entitled <i>Vulgar
+Errors</i>, where he charges Mercator with plagiarism. From the
+narrative, Mr Wright appears to have been engaged in the
+expedition and on board the Victory[357].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 356: Hakluyt, II. 647. Churchill, III. 161.
+Astley, I. 206.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 357: Astley, I. 206. a.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>The right honourable the Earl of Cumberland, intending to
+cruize against the enemy, prepared a small fleet of four ships
+only[358] at his own charges, one of which was the Victory[359]
+belonging to the queens royal navy. The others were the Meg and
+Margaret, two small ships, one of which was soon obliged to be
+sent home as unable to endure the sea, besides a small caravel.
+Having assembled about 400 men, sailors and soldiers, with
+several gentlemen volunteers, the earl and they embarked and set
+sail from Plymouth Sound on the 28th June 1589, accompanied by
+the following captains and gentlemen. Captain Christopher Lister,
+an officer of great resolution, Captain Edward Careless, <i>alias
+Wright</i>, who had been captain of the Hope in Sir Francis
+Drakes expedition to the West Indies against St Domingo and
+Carthagena; Captain Boswel, Mr Mervin, Mr Henry Long, Mr
+Partridge, Mr Norton; Mr William Monson, afterwards Sir
+William[360], who was captain of the Meg and vice-admiral, and Mr
+Pigeon, who was captain of the caravel.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 358: Sir William Monson, in Churchills
+collection, says there were <i>five</i> ships; and indeed we find
+a fifth, called the Saucy Jack, mentioned in the
+narrative.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 359: The Victory was of 800 tons, carrying
+32 guns and 400 men; of whom, according to Sir William Monson,
+268 were mariners, and 100 sailors, the remaining 32 being
+probably soldiers, or as we now call them marines. The
+distinction between mariners and sailors is not obvious; perhaps
+what are now called ordinary and able seamen,--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 360: Sir William Monson was author of some
+curious Naval Tracts, giving an account of the Royal Navy of
+England in the reigns of Queen Elizabeth and James I. which are
+preserved in Churchills Collection, Vol. III. pp.
+147--508.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>About three days after our departure from Plymouth, we met
+with three French ships, one of which belonged to Newhaven[361],
+and another to St Maloes; and finding them to be leaguers[362],
+and therefore lawful prizes, we took them, and sent two of them
+home to England with all their loading, being mostly fish from
+Newfoundland, having first distributed among our ships as much of
+the fish as they could find stowage room for; and in the third
+ship we sent all the prisoners home to France. On that day and
+the next we met some other ships, but finding them belonging to
+Rotterdam and Embden, bound for Rochelle, we dismissed them. On
+the 28th and 29th, we met several of our English ships returning
+from an expedition to Portugal, which we relieved with victuals.
+The 13th July, being in sight of the coast of Spain in lat.
+39&deg; N. we descried eleven ships, on which we immediately
+prepared to engage them, sending the Meg commanded by Captain
+Monson to ascertain what and whence they were. On the approach of
+the Meg some shots were exchanged, and as their admiral and
+vice-admiral displayed their flags, we perceived that some
+fighting was likely to follow. Having therefore prepared for
+battle, we made all haste towards them, always taking care to get
+to windward, and between ten and eleven o'clock A.M. we came up
+with them in the Victory, when they all yielded after a slight
+resistance. The masters all came on board our admiral, and shewed
+their several passports from Hamburg, Lubeck, Bremen, Pomerania,
+and Calais. They had certain bags of pepper and cinnamon, which
+they confessed to belong to a Jew in Lisbon, which they had
+charge of to deliver to his factor in their country; and finding
+this to be lawful prize by their own confession, the same was
+taken and divided among our whole company, the value being
+estimated at L.4500, at two shillings the pound[363]. We
+dismissed these ships on the 17th of July, but seven of their
+men, having volunteered as sailors in our fleet, were taken to
+reinforce our crew. After this we held on our course for the
+Azores or Western islands.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 361: Probably that port now called Havre de
+Grace.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 362: Alluding to the <i>Catholic
+League</i>, then in alliance with Spain, and in rebellious
+opposition to their lawful sovereign, for the purpose of
+excluding the king of Navarre, afterwards Henry IV. from the
+crown of France.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 363: Sir William Monson, who gives a short
+account of this expedition in the Naval Tracts already quoted,
+says that spices to the value of L.7000 were taken out of these
+vessels.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 1st August we got sight of St Michael,
+one of the eastermost of the Azores, towards which we made sail
+all that day; and, putting up a Spanish flag at our maintop that
+we might not be suspected for enemies, we approached at night to
+the chief town and road of the island, where we espied three
+ships and some other vessels at anchor, all of which we
+determined to take during the darkness of the night. Accordingly
+about ten or eleven o'clock P.M. our boats were sent well manned
+to cut their cables and hawsers and tow them out to sea. On
+coming to them, one of the largest of these ships was found to be
+the Falcon of London, commanded by a Scots pilot who passed her
+off as his own. But our men let loose three other smaller ships,
+which they towed towards us, most of their men leaping overboard
+and swimming on shore with loud outcries, which were answered
+from the town, which was all in an uproar on hearing what was
+going forwards. The castle discharged some shots at our boats,
+but being unable to see them by reason of the darkness, did us no
+harm. The Scotsman too, to make the Spaniards believe him their
+friend, fired a few shots in the air. Shortly after, he and some
+others came on board our admiral, offering their services. The
+three ships brought out were laden with wine and sallad oil from
+Seville. The same day our caravel chaced a Spanish caravel on
+shore, which carried letters by which we learnt that the caraks
+had departed from the island of Tercera eight days before.</p>
+
+<p>The 7th of August we got sight of a small ship which we chased
+towards Tercera with our pinnace, the weather being calm, and
+overtook her towards evening, when we found in her 30 tons of
+good Madeira wine, besides woollen cloth, silk, taffeta, and
+other goods. Coming on the 14th to the island of Flores, it was
+determined to take in fresh water, and such fresh provisions as
+the island afforded; wherefore manning our boats with about 120
+men, we rowed towards the shore, where the inhabitants, who were
+assembled at the watering-place, hung out a flag of truce, and we
+did the like. On coming to them, the earl gave them to
+understand, by means of his Portuguese interpreter, that he was a
+friend to their king Don Antonio, and came not with any intention
+to injure them, meaning only to procure water and fresh
+provisions, by way of exchange for oil wine and pepper, to which
+they readily agreed, and sent off some of their people
+immediately for beeves and sheep. In the meantime we marched
+southwards to their town of Santa Cruz, whence all the
+inhabitants had fled and carried off every thing of value. On
+demanding the reason of this, they answered it proceeded from
+fear, and that they always did so on the appearance of any ships
+near their coast. That part of the island was mostly composed of
+large rocky hills and barren mountains, and was little inhabited,
+being apt to be molested by ships of war; and even Santa Cruz,
+one of their principal towns, was all in ruins, having been burnt
+about two years before by some English ships of war, according to
+what we were told by the inhabitants. As we were rowing towards
+the Victory in the evening, a huge fish pursued us for nearly two
+miles, mostly distant about a spear length from the stern of the
+boat, and sometimes so near as to touch. The tips of his fins at
+the gills, appearing often above water, were by estimation four
+or five yards asunder, and his jaws gaping a yard and half wide,
+put us in fear he might overset our pinnace; but God be thanked,
+by rowing as hard as we could, we escaped.</p>
+
+<p>When we were about the island of Flores, we got notice from a
+small vessel called the Drake[364], that the caraks were at
+Tercera, of which news we were very glad, and made sail thither
+with all the speed we could. By the way we came to Fayal road on
+the 27th August after sunset, where we saw some ships at anchor,
+towards which Captains Lister and Monson were sent in the skiff
+to see what they were, and lest any mischance should befall our
+boat, we sent in likewise the Saucy Jack and the small caravel;
+but as the wind was off shore, these vessels were not able to set
+up to where the Spanish ships were anchored. The skiff went on
+however, and endeavoured to board a ship of 250 tons, which
+carried 14 pieces of ordnance, and continued fighting with her
+for an hour, till our other boats came up to the rescue and aid
+of the skiff. A fresh boarding was then attempted, by one boat on
+the quarter and another on the bow, when we entered on one side
+while all the Spaniards leapt overboard on the other side, except
+Juan de Palma the captain, and two or three more. This ship was
+moored close to the castle, which fired at us all the time; but
+the only one wounded on the occasion was the master of our
+caravel, who had the calf of one of his legs shot away. This ship
+was from St Juan de Puerto Rico, laden with sugar ginger and
+hides. After we had towed her clear of the castle, our boats went
+in again and brought out five other small ships; one laden with
+hides, another with elephants teeth, grains[365], cocoa-nuts, and
+goats skins, come from Guinea; another with woad, and two with
+dog-fish, which two last were set adrift as of no value, but all
+the other four were sent for England on the 30th of August. At
+the taking of these prizes there were consorted with us some
+other small men of war, as Master John Davis, with his ship,
+pinnace, and boat; Captain Markesburie with his ship, whose owner
+was Sir Walter Raleigh; and the bark of Lyme, which also was
+consorted with us before.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 364: Sir William Monson says, from an
+English man of war.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 365: Guinea Pepper.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The last of August we came in sight of Tercera in the morning,
+being about nine or ten leagues from shore, when we espied a
+small boat under sail coming towards us, which seemed strange at
+such a distance from land and no ship in sight; but on coming
+near, we found it to contain eight Englishmen, who had been
+prisoners in Tercera, and had committed themselves to the sea in
+this open boat in hopes to escape. Their mainyard consisted of
+two pipe-staves tied together by the ends, and they had no other
+provisions than what they had been able to carry off in their
+pockets and bosoms. When taken on board the Victory, they gave us
+certain assurance that the caraks had left Tercera about a week
+before. Being thus without any hopes of taking the caraks, it was
+resolved to return for Fayal, intending to surprise the town; but
+till the 9th of September, we had either the wind so contrary, or
+such calm weather, that in all that time we scarcely made nine or
+ten leagues way, lingering up and down near the island of
+Pico.</p>
+
+<p>In the afternoon of the 10th September, we came again to Fayal
+road; upon which the earl sent Captain Lister, with a person from
+Graciosa whom Captain Monson had taken some time before, and some
+others, carrying a message to Fayal. He was met by some of the
+inhabitants in a boat, who were brought by Captain Lister to my
+lord, who gave them their choice, either to allow him to take
+possession of the platform or fort, when he and his company would
+remain quietly there for some space, without injury, till the
+inhabitants had compounded for the ransom of their town; or else
+to stand the chance of war. With this message they returned on
+shore; but those who had charge of the fort said, that it was
+contrary to their allegiance and the oath they had taken to king
+Philip, to deliver up their garrison without endeavouring to
+defend it. Upon this, the earl gave orders for all the boats of
+the different ships to be manned and armed, and he soon
+afterwards landed with all his men on the sandy beach under the
+side of a hill, about half a league from the fort. Certain troops
+both horse and foot were seen on the top of the hill, and two
+other companies appeared to oppose us with displayed ensigns, one
+on the shore in front of the town, which marched towards our
+landing place as if they meant to attack us; while the other was
+seen in a valley to the south of the fort, as if coming to assist
+in defending the town; and at the same time, the garrison in the
+fort fired upon us briskly from their cannon. In spite of all
+these demonstrations of resistance, having first marshalled his
+men in proper order, my lord marched along the sandy beach
+towards the fort, passing between the sea and the town for
+something more than a mile; and as the shore became rocky, so as
+to render any farther progress in that direction extremely
+difficult, he entered the town, and marched through the streets
+unopposed to the fort, these companies of the enemy, that seemed
+at first resolved to resist his progress, being soon dispersed.
+Those in the fort likewise fled at our approach, leaving my lord
+and his men to scale the walls and gain possession, without any
+resistance. In the meantime the ships continued to batter the
+town and fort, until they saw the <i>red cross</i> of England
+floating from the walls.</p>
+
+<p>Fayal is the principal town of this island, and is situated
+directly over against the high and mighty mountain of
+<i>Pico</i>, towards the north-west from that mountain, from
+which it is divided by a narrow sea or strait, which at that
+place is some two or three leagues broad, between the islands of
+Fayal and Pico. This town contained about 300 houses, which were
+handsomely and strongly built of stone and lime, their roofs
+being double covered with hollow tyles, much like those used in
+England, only that they are less at one end than at the other.
+Almost every house had a cistern or well in a garden behind, in
+which likewise there were vines with ripe grapes, forming
+pleasant arbours or shady walks; and in every garden there grew
+some tobacco, then hardly known, but now commonly used in
+England, with which the women of the place were then in use to
+stain their faces, to make them look young and fresh. In these
+gardens there likewise grew pepper, both Indian and common,
+fig-trees with fruit both white and red, peach-trees rather of
+humble growth, oranges, lemons, quinces, potatoes, and other
+fruits and roots. Sweet wood, which I think is cedar, is very
+common in that island, and is used both for building and
+fuel.</p>
+
+<p>Having possessed himself of the town and fort, my lord issued
+orders that none of the soldiers or mariners should enter into
+any of the houses for plunder, and was especially careful that
+none of the churches or religious houses should suffer injury of
+any kind, all of which were preserved from violation by the
+appointment of guards for their protection. But the rest of the
+town, either from the want of that precaution, or owing to the
+cupidity of our people, was rifled and ransacked by the soldiers
+and mariners, who scarcely left a single house unsearched, taking
+out of them every thing that struck their fancy or seemed worth
+carrying away, such as chests of sweet wood, chairs, clothes,
+coverlets, hangings, bedding, and the like; besides many of our
+people ranged the country in search of plunder, where some of
+them were wounded by the inhabitants. The friery at this place
+contained Franciscan friars, not one of whom was able to speak
+pure Latin. It was built in 1506 by a friar of that order
+belonging to Angra in the island of Tercera. The tables in its
+hall or refectory had seats only on one side, and was always
+covered, as if ever ready for feasting. We continued in the town
+from the Wednesday afternoon, at which time we took possession,
+until the Saturday night, when the inhabitants agreed to pay 2000
+ducats for its ransom, which was mostly paid in church plate. In
+the fort there were 58 pieces of iron ordnance, 23 of which,
+according to my remembrance, were mounted upon carriages, and
+placed between baricadoes or merlins on a platform by the sea
+side. Taking away all the ordnance, we set the platform on fire.
+On the Sunday following, my lord had invited as many of the
+inhabitants as chose to dine with him on board the Victory, save
+only Diego Gomez the governor, who only came once to confer about
+the ransom. Only four came, who were well entertained, and were
+afterwards honourably dismissed with the sound of drums and
+trumpets, and a salute from our cannon. To these persons my lord
+delivered a letter subscribed by himself, requesting all other
+Englishmen to abstain from any farther molestation of the place,
+save only to take such water and provisions as might be
+necessary.</p>
+
+<p>The day after we came to Fayal, being the 11th September, two
+men came to us from Pico, who had been prisoners in that island;
+and we also set a prisoner at liberty who had been sent thither
+from St Jago, being cousin to a servant of Don Antonio king of
+Portugal, then residing in England. On Monday we sent our boats
+on shore for fresh water, having now abundance running down the
+hills in consequence of heavy rain the night before, which
+otherwise had been hard to be got. Next day we sent again on
+shore to complete our stock of water, which was not then so
+easily brought off, by reason of a strong gale, which increased
+so much in the afternoon that we did not think it safe to ride so
+near the land, for which reason we weighed anchor, and stood N.W.
+by W. along the coast of Fayal. Some of the inhabitants came on
+board this day, who told us that the wind usually blew strong at
+W.S.W. at this time of the year on this coast. While near St
+Georges Island we saw a huge fish of a black colour right ahead
+of our ship, a little under water, or rather even with its
+surface, on which the sea broke in such manner that we supposed
+it a rock; and as we were going directly stem on, we were in
+great fear for a time how to avoid the seeming danger, till at
+length we saw it move out of our way.</p>
+
+<p>It lightened much in the night of the 16th September, which
+was followed by heavy rains and violent gales till the 21st. On
+the 23d we returned to Fayal road, to weigh an anchor which we
+had left in our haste to depart. We went on shore to the town,
+whence many of the people ran away, or were preparing to depart
+with their goods, till assured by my lord that they had nothing
+to fear, as we only came for fresh water and other necessaries,
+for all of which they should be paid to their satisfaction. We
+then went quietly about the town, purchasing such things as we
+needed as peaceably as if we had been in England; and the people
+helped us to fill our water casks, for which they received what
+satisfied them. We were forced by a heavy tempest to depart on
+the 25th, before we had completed our water; and the tempest came
+on so suddenly that my lord himself had to raise the people from
+their beds to weigh the anchors, himself assisting at the
+capstans, and cheering the men with wine. Next day, the caravel
+and the Saucy Jack were sent to the road of St Michaels to see
+what was there, and we followed on the 27th, plying to and fro;
+but by contrary winds on the 28th, 29th, and 30th, we were driven
+to leeward, and could not get near the island. The 1st October,
+we sailed along the island of Tercera, and at Cape Brazil, near
+Angra, the strongest town of that island, we espied some boats
+going towards the town, which we attempted to intercept; but
+being near land, they ran on shore and escaped.</p>
+
+<p>Coming near Graciosa in the afternoon, my lord sent Captain
+Lister on shore, to inform the islanders that he only wanted
+water, wine, and some fresh provisions, and would not otherwise
+trouble them. They sent back word that they could give no
+positive answer, until the governors of the island had consulted
+on the subject, and desired therefore to send for an answer next
+day. The 2d October, early in the morning, we dispatched our
+long-boat and pinnace, with 50 or 60 men, together with the
+Margaret and Captain Davis in his ship to protect them, as we now
+wanted our other consorts; but when our people endeavoured to
+land, they were fired at by the islanders, who would not permit
+them to go on shore, several troops of armed men being drawn up
+to oppose us with displayed ensigns. Our boats rowed along shore,
+seeking some place where they might land, without the enemy
+having too much advantage, our ships and boats firing all the
+while upon the islanders. No convenient place being found for
+landing, we were under the necessity of retiring without any
+answer, as had been promised. After some negociation and delay,
+they agreed to let us have sixty butts of wine, together with
+fresh provisions to refresh our men; but declared we could not
+have water, having little or none for themselves, except what
+they had saved in tanks or cisterns, insomuch that they would
+rather give us two tons of wine than one of water. They requested
+that our soldiers might not come on shore, as they would
+themselves bring all they had promised to the water side; which
+request was granted, one of their messengers remaining on board
+as an hostage for the fulfilment of their promise, while the
+other went ashore with our empty casks and some of our men to
+assist in filling them and bringing them away, with such other
+provision as was promised.</p>
+
+<p>The Margaret, the ship of Captain Davis, and another belonging
+to Weymouth remained at anchor before the town, to take in our
+wine and provisions. This ship of Weymouth came to us only the
+day before, having taken a rich prize said to be worth sixteen
+thousand pounds, and brought us news that the West India fleet
+had not yet gone past, but was shortly expected. We put to sea in
+the Victory, and on Saturday the 4th October, we took a French
+ship of St Maloes, a city belonging to the league, laden with
+fish from Newfoundland, which had been forced to cut away her
+mast in a tempest, and was now bound to Gracioso for repairs.
+Taking out her principal people, we put some of our own mariners
+and soldiers on board, and sent her off for England. At night on
+the following Sunday, having received all the supplies promised
+us at Gracioso, we parted from the islanders in a friendly
+manner, and saluted them with our ordnance.</p>
+
+<p>The three next days we plyed to and fro among these western
+islands, having very rough weather. On Thursday night, being
+driven to within three or four leagues of Tercera, we saw fifteen
+sail of the West India fleet going into the haven of Angra in
+that island; but, though we lay as close to windward as possible
+during the four following days, we were unable to get near them.
+At this time we lost sight of our French prize, which was not
+able to lay so close to the wind as our ships, and heard no more
+of her till our return to England, where she arrived safe.
+Getting at length on the fifth day near the mouth of Angra
+harbour, we inclined to have run among the West India fleet, on
+purpose to have cut out some of them if possible; but this
+enterprize was deemed too hazardous, considering the strength of
+the place, as the ships were hauled close to the town on our
+approach, under protection of the castle of Brazil on one side,
+having 25 pieces of ordnance, and a fort on the other side with
+13 or 14 large brass cannon. Besides which, on nearing the land,
+the wind proved too scanty for the attempt.</p>
+
+<p>On Thursday the 14th October, we sent our boat into the road
+of Angra to take the soundings, and to endeavour to find some
+proper place for us to anchor, beyond the shot of the castle and
+within shot of some of the ships, that we might either force them
+to come out to us or sink them where they lay. Our boat found a
+fit place for us, but the wind would not suffer us to get to it;
+and besides, if we had anchored there, it was more likely that
+they would have run their ships on shore, to save their lives and
+liberties and some of their goods, than have resigned all to us
+by coming out. We therefore discharged a few guns at them, but
+our shot fell far short; upon which we departed, as it was not
+likely they would come out while we watched before the mouth of
+the harbour, or remained within sight. We accordingly put to sea,
+where we cruized for five days, sending a pinnace to watch them
+close in shore but out of sight, to bring us word when they set
+sail. After some time the pinnace brought us notice that all the
+ships had taken down their sails and struck their top-masts, so
+that we concluded they would remain till sure of our departure.
+Wherefore, having heard there were some Scots ships at St
+Michael, we sailed thither on the 20th October, and found there
+one Scots <i>roader</i>, and two or three more at Villa-franca,
+the next road, a league or two east from St Michaels. From these
+we received five or six butts of wine and some fresh water, but
+by no means sufficient to serve our wants. The 21st October, we
+sent our long-boat on shore to procure fresh water at a brook a
+short way west from Villa-franca; but the inhabitants came down
+with about 150 armed men, having two ensigns displayed, and our
+boat was forced to return without water, having spent all its
+powder in vain, and being unable to prevail against such great
+odds.</p>
+
+<p>Learning that the island of St Mary was a place of no great
+strength, we made sail for that place, intending to take in water
+there, and to go thence to the coast of Spain. On the Friday
+following, my lord sent captain Lister and captain Amias Preston,
+afterwards Sir Amias, with our long-boat and pinnace, with
+between 60 and 70 arquebusiers, carrying a friendly letter to the
+islanders, desiring leave to procure water, in exchange for which
+he engaged to do them no harm. Captain Preston had come on board
+the Victory not long before from his own ship, which lost company
+with us in the night, so that he was under the necessity of
+remaining with us. We departed from the Victory in our boats
+about nine in the morning, rowing for the land, and by three in
+the afternoon had got within a league or two of the shore, being
+then four or five leagues from the Victory, and our men sore
+spent with hard rowing. At this time we perceived, to our great
+joy, two ships at anchor close under the town; upon which we
+shifted six or seven of our men into the boat belonging to
+captain Davis, being too much crowded, and retaining about 20
+arquebusiers in the pinnace, we made towards these two ships with
+all possible haste.</p>
+
+<p>While proceeding towards them, we saw several boats passing
+between the <i>roaders</i>[366] and the shore, and many men in
+their shirts swimming and wading on shore, who, as we afterwards
+learnt, were endeavouring to get the ships fast aground; and the
+inhabitants were at the same time busied in preparing to defend
+the ships and themselves against us. On coming near them, captain
+Lister commanded the trumpets to be sounded, but prohibited any
+firing till farther orders; yet some of the people, either not
+hearing, or disregardful of these orders, began firing as soon as
+the trumpets sounded, though with small injury to the islanders,
+who mostly lay under the cover of trenches or other means of
+defence. Captain Lister then urged on the rowers, who began to
+shrink at the shot from the enemy which flew thick about their
+ears, and was himself the first to board one of the ships which
+lay farther from shore than the other, while we speedily
+followed, still plying the enemy with our shot, and having cut
+her cables and hawsers, we towed her out to sea. In the mean
+time, captain Davis came up in his boat, and boarded the other
+ship, both having been abandoned by their crews; but, as she was
+quite fast aground, he was under the necessity of quitting her,
+exposed to shot and stones even from the shore. At this time, the
+towns-people made an attempt to capture captain Davis and his
+boats crew, which were but few in number; but they joined us, and
+we jointly towed off our prize, which was a ship from Brazil
+laden with sugar. In this exploit we had two men slain and
+sixteen wounded, while it is probable that the enemy suffered
+small loss, as they were mostly sheltered behind stone walls,
+many of which were built above one another on the end of the hill
+on which the town stands, between two vallies. On the top of the
+hill they had some large cannon, from which they fired leaden
+bullets, one only of which went through the side of our prize,
+but did no other injury.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 366: This uncommon word seems merely to
+signify, ships lying at anchor in an open road.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Next day we made another attempt to get fresh water at this
+island, but as we were ignorant of the landing-place, where we
+found many inconveniences and disadvantages, we were unable to
+effect our purpose. Wherefore we departed on the night of the
+25th October for the island of St George, in quest of fresh
+water, and got there on the 27th. Observing a stream of water
+running down into the sea, the pinnace, and long-boat were sent
+under captains Preston and Manson, by whom a letter was sent by
+my lord to the islanders, desiring leave to take water quietly,
+and no farther injury should be done them. On getting to the
+shore, our men found some of the poor islanders hid among the
+rocks, being afraid of us. On the 29th, our boats returned with
+fresh water, bringing only six tons to the Victory, alleging they
+could get no more; thinking, as was afterwards supposed, as he
+had only 12 tons of water and wine, that my lord would now return
+direct for England, as many of our men greatly desired. My lord,
+was very unwilling to do this, and meant next day to have taken
+in more water, but from the roughness of the sea, and the wind
+freshening, and owing to the unwillingness of the people, no more
+water was procured: yet my lord would not return with so much
+provision unspent, especially as the expedition had not hitherto
+produced such fruits as might reasonably satisfy himself and
+others. Wherefore, with consent of the whole ships companies, it
+was agreed to go for England by way of the coast of Spain, to
+endeavour to make more captures, the whole people being reduced
+to half allowance of water, except such as were sick or wounded,
+who were to have whole allowance. On Saturday, the 31st October,
+as the Margaret was very leaky, she was sent off direct for
+England in charge of the Brazil ship, and in them our sick and
+wounded men were sent home; but captain Monson was taken out of
+the <i>Megge</i> into the Victory[367].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 367: In the commencement of this voyage,
+the Meg and Margaret are named as distinct ships, one of which is
+said to have been sent home soon after, as unfit for sea. In this
+passage the Margaret and Megge are evidently different names for
+the same ship.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We now shaped our course for the coast of Spain, having the
+wind fair and large, which had seldom been the case hitherto. On
+the 4th November we saw a sail right before us, to which we gave
+chase, and coming up with her about 3 P.M. we took possession of
+her, being a ship of about 110 tons burden, from
+<i>Pernambucke</i> or Fernambucco, in Brazil, bound for Portugal,
+having on board 410 chests of sugar, and 50 quintals of Brazil
+wood, each quintal being 100 pounds weight. We took her in lat.
+29&deg; N. about 200 leagues west from Lisbon. Captain Preston
+was sent on board the prize, who brought her principal people
+into the Victory, certain of our seamen and soldiers being
+appointed to take charge of her. The Portuguese reported, that
+they had seen another ship that day before them about noon;
+wherefore, when all things were properly disposed respecting our
+prize, we left her under the charge of captain Davis, with whom
+likewise we left our long-boat, taking his smaller boat with us,
+and made all sail due east after this other ship, leaving orders
+for captain Davis and the prize to follow us due east, and if he
+had not sight of us next morning, to bear away direct for
+England. Next morning we could not see the vessel of which we
+were in chase, neither was the prize or the ship of captain Davis
+to be seen.</p>
+
+<p>On the 6th November, being then in lat. 38&deg; 30' N. and
+about 60 leagues west from Lisbon, captain Preston descried a
+sail early in the morning two or three leagues a-head of us,
+which we came up with about 8 or 9 o'clock A.M. She was lastly
+from St Michaels, but originally from Brazil laden with sugar.
+While employed shifting the prisoners into the Victory, one of
+our men in the main-top espied another sail some three or four
+leagues a-head, on which we immediately sent back our boat with
+men to take charge of the prize, and made all sail in chase, so
+that we overtook the other ship about 2 P.M. She made some
+preparation to resist us, hanging many hides all round her sides,
+so that musquetry could not have injured her; but by the time we
+had fired two cannon shot at her, she lowered her sails and
+surrendered. She was of between 300 and 400 tons, bound from
+Mexico and St John de Lowe, (San Juan de Ulloa) her cargo
+consisting of 700 dry hides; worth 10s. apiece, six chests of
+cochineal, every chest holding 100 pounds weight, and every pound
+worth L. 1, 6s. 8d., besides which she had several chests of
+sugar, some packages of China ware, with some wrought plate and
+silver in coin. The captain was an Italian, a grave, wise, and
+civil person, who had to the value of 25,000 ducats adventure in
+this ship. He and some of the principal Spanish prisoners were
+taken on board the Victory; and captain Lister was sent into the
+prize, with some 20 of our best mariners, soldiers, and sailors.
+In the meantime our other prize came up with us, and having now
+our hands full, we joyfully shaped our course for England, as we
+had so many Portuguese, Spanish, and French prisoners, that we
+could not well have manned any more prizes with safety to
+ourselves. Wherefore, about 6 P.M. when our other prize came up,
+we made sail for England. But as our two prizes were unable to
+keep up with us without sparing them many of our own sails, our
+ship rolled and wallowed so that it was both exceedingly
+troublesome, and put our main-mast in great danger of being
+carried away. Having accordingly acquainted them with these
+circumstances, and taken back our sails, we directed them to keep
+their course following us, so as to make for Portsmouth.</p>
+
+<p>We took this last prize in lat. 39&deg; N. about 46 leagues
+west from the Rock of Lisbon. She was one of the 16 ships we saw
+going into the harbour of Angra in the island of Tercera on the
+8th October. Some of the prisoners taken from this ship told us,
+that while we were plying off and on before that harbour in
+waiting for their coming out, three of the largest of these ships
+were unloaded of all their treasure and merchandize, by order of
+the governor of Tercera, and were each manned with 300 soldiers,
+on purpose to have come out and boarded the Victory; but by the
+time these preparations were made, the Victory was gone out of
+sight.</p>
+
+<p>We now went merrily before the wind with all the sails we
+could carry, insomuch that between the noons of Friday and
+Saturday, or in 24 hours, we sailed near 47 leagues, or 141
+English miles, although our ship was very foul, and much grown
+with sea grass, owing to our having been long at sea. This quick
+sailing made some of our company expect to be present at the
+tilting on the queens birth-day at Whitehall, while others were
+flattering themselves with keeping a jolly Christmas in England
+from their shares in the prizes. But it was our lot to keep a
+cold Christmas with the Bishop and his Clerks, rocks to the
+westwards of Scilly; for soon after the wind came about to the
+east, the very worst wind for us which could blow from the
+heavens, so that we could not fetch any part of England. Upon
+this our allowance of drink, before sufficiently scanty, was now
+still farther curtailed, owing to the scarcity in our ship, each
+man being confined to half a pint of cold water at a meal, and
+that not sweet. Yet this was an ample allowance in comparison, as
+our half pint was soon reduced to a quarter, and even at this
+reduced rate our store was rapidly disappearing, insomuch that it
+was deemed necessary for our preservation to put into some port
+in Ireland to procure water. We accordingly endeavoured to do
+this, being obliged, when near that coast, to lie to all night,
+waiting for day light; but when it appeared we had drifted so far
+to leeward in the night that we could fetch no part of Ireland,
+we were therefore constrained to return again, with heavy hearts,
+and to wait in anxious expectation till it should please God to
+send us a fair wind either for England or Ireland.</p>
+
+<p>In the mean time we were allowed for each man two or three
+spoonfuls of vinegar at each meal, having now no other drink,
+except that for two or three meals we had about as much wine,
+which was wrung out of the remaining lees. Under this hard fare
+we continued near a fortnight, being only able to eat a very
+little in all that time, by reason of our great want of drink.
+Saving that now and then we enjoyed as it were a feast, when rain
+or hail chanced to fall, on which occasions we gathered up the
+hail-stones with the most anxious care, devouring them more
+eagerly than if they had been the finest comfits. The rain-drops
+also were caught and saved with the utmost careful attention; for
+which purpose some hung up sheets tied by the four corners,
+having a weight in the middle, to make the rain run down there as
+in a funnel into some vessel placed underneath. Those who had no
+sheets hung up napkins or other clouts, which when thoroughly wet
+they wrung or sucked to get the water they had imbibed. Even the
+water which fell on the deck under foot, and washed away the
+filth and soil of the ship, though as dirty as the kennel is in
+towns during rain, was carefully watched and collected at every
+scupper-hole, nay, often with strife and contention, and caught
+in dishes, pots, cans, and jars, of which some drank hearty
+draughts, mud and all, without waiting for its settlement or
+cleansing. Others cleaned it by filtrating, but it went through
+so slowly that they could ill endure to wait so long, and were
+loath to lose so much precious liquid. Some licked the water like
+dogs with their tongues from the decks, sides, rails, and masts
+of the ship. Others, that were more ingenious, fastened girdles
+or ropes about the masts, daubing tallow between these and the
+mast, that the rain might not run down between; and making one
+part of these girdles lower than the rest, fixed spouts of
+leather at these lower parts, that the rain running down the
+masts might meet and be received at these spouts. He who was
+fortunate enough to procure a can of water by these means, was
+sued to, and envied as a rich man.</p>
+
+<p><i>Quem pulchrum digito monstrari, et dicere hic est</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Some of the poor Spaniards who were prisoners, though having
+the same allowance with our own men, often begged us for the love
+of God to give them as much water as they could hold in the
+hollow of their hands: And, notwithstanding our own great
+extremity, they were given it, to teach them some humanity,
+instead of their accustomed barbarity both to us and other
+nations. Some put leaden bullets into their months, to slack
+their thirst by chewing them. In every corner of the ship, the
+miserable cries of the sick and wounded were sounding lamentably
+in our ears, pitifully crying out and lamenting for want of
+drink, being ready to die, yea many dying for lack thereof.
+Insomuch, that by this great extremity we lost many more men than
+in all the voyage before; as before this, we were so well and
+amply provided for, that we lived as well and were as healthy as
+if we had been in England, very few dying among us; whereas now,
+some of our men were thrown overboard every day.</p>
+
+<p>The 2d of December 1589 was with us a day of festival, as it
+then rained heartily, and we saved some considerable store of
+water, though we were well wet for it, and that at midnight, and
+had our skins filled with it besides. This went down merrily,
+although it was bitter and dirty, with washing the ship, but we
+sweetened it with sugar, and were happy to have our fill. Besides
+our other extremities, we were so tossed and turmoiled with
+stormy and tempestuous weather, that every man had to hold fast
+his can or dish, and to fasten himself by the ropes, rails, or
+sides of the ship, to prevent falling on the deck. Our main-sail
+was torn from the yard, and blown away into the sea; and our
+other sails so rent and torn that hardly any of them remained
+serviceable. The raging waves and foaming surges of the sea came
+rolling upon us in successive mountains, breaking through the
+waste of the ship like a mighty river; although in fine weather
+our deck was near twenty feet above water. So that we were ready
+to cry out, with the royal prophet, Psalm 107, verses 26 and 27.
+"They mount up to heaven, and go down again to the depths: Their
+soul is melted because of trouble. They reel to and fro, and
+stagger like a drunken man, and are at their wits end." In this
+extremity of foul weather, the ship was so tossed and shaken,
+that, by its creaking noise, and the leaking which was now more
+than ordinary, we were in great fear that it would have shaken
+asunder, and had just cause to pray, a little otherwise than the
+poet, though marring the verse, yet mending the meaning:</p>
+
+<p>Deus maris et caeli, quid enim nisi vota supersunt;<br>
+ Solvere quassatae parcito membra ratis.</p>
+
+<p>Yet it pleased God of his infinite goodness to deliver us out
+of this danger. We made a new main-sail, which we fastened to the
+yard, and repaired our other damages as well as we could. This
+was hardly done when we were reduced to as great extremity as
+before, so that we had almost lost our new main-sail, had not
+William Antony, the master of our ship, when no one else would
+venture for fear of being washed overboard, by crawling along the
+main-yard, then lowered close down upon the rails, and with great
+danger of drowning, gathered it up out of the sea and fastened it
+to the yard; being in the mean time often ducked overhead and
+ears in the sea. So terrible were these storms, that some of our
+company, who had used the sea for twenty years, had never seen
+the like, and vowed, if ever they got safe to land, that they
+would never go to sea again.</p>
+
+<p>At night on the last day of November, we met with an English
+ship, and because it was too late that night, it was agreed that
+they were to give us two or three tons of wine next morning,
+being, as they said, all the provision of drink they had, save
+only a butt or two which they must reserve for their own use:
+But, after all, we heard no more of them till they were set on
+ground on the coast of Ireland, where it appeared they might have
+spared us much more than they pretended, as they could very well
+have relieved our necessities, and had sufficient for themselves
+remaining to bring them to England. The first of December we
+spoke with another English ship, and had some beer out of her for
+our urgent necessities, but not sufficient to carry us to
+England, wherefore we were constrained to put into Ireland, the
+wind so serving. Next day we came to an anchor under the land,
+not far from the S. Kelmes, under the land and wind, where we
+were somewhat more quiet. But as that was not a safe place to
+ride in, we endeavoured next morning to weigh our anchor, when
+having some of our men hurt at the capstan, we were forced to
+leave it behind, holding on our course for Ventrie Haven, [Bantry
+Bay?] where we safely arrived the same day, and found that place
+a safe and convenient harbour for us, so that we had just cause
+to sing with the Psalmist, <i>They that go down to the sea in
+ships</i>, &amp;c.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as we had anchored, my lord went forthwith on shore,
+and presently after brought off fresh provisions and water; such
+as sheep, pigs, fowls, &amp;c. to refresh his ships company,
+though he had lately been very weak himself, and had suffered the
+same extremity with the rest: For, in the time of our former
+want, having only a little water remaining by him in a pot, it
+was broken in the night and all the water lost. The sick and
+wounded were soon afterwards landed and carried to the principal
+town, called <i>Dingenacush</i>[368], about three miles distant
+from the haven, and at which place our surgeons attended them
+daily. Here we well refreshed ourselves, while the Irish harp
+sounded sweetly in our ears, and here we, who in our former
+extremity were in a manner half dead, had our lives as it were
+restored.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 368: Called otherwise Dingle Icouch by the
+editor of Astleys collection.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>This Dingenacush is the chief town in all that part of
+Ireland, consisting but of one street, whence some smaller ones
+proceed on either side. It had gates, as it seemed, in former
+times at either end, to shut and open as a town of war, and a
+castle also. The houses are very strongly built, having thick
+stone walls and narrow windows, being used, as they told us, as
+so many castles in time of troubles, among the wild Irish or
+otherwise. The castle and all the houses in the town, except
+four, were taken and destroyed by the Earl of Desmond; these four
+being held out against him and all his power, so that he could
+not win them. There still remains a thick stone wall, across the
+middle of the street, which was part of their fortification. Some
+of the older inhabitants informed us, that they were driven to
+great extremities during their defence, like the Jews of old when
+besieged by the Roman emperor Titus, insomuch that they were
+constrained by hunger to feed on the carcasses of the dead.
+Though somewhat repaired, it still remains only the ruins of
+their former town. Except in the houses of the better sort, they
+have no chimnies, so that we were very much incommoded by the
+smoke during our stay at that place. Their fuel is turf, which
+they have very good, together with whins or furze. As there grows
+little wood hereabout, building is very expensive; as also they
+are in want of lime, which they have to bring from a far
+distance. But they have abundance of stone, the whole country
+appearing entirely composed of rocks and stones, so that they
+commonly make their hedges of stone, by which each mans ground is
+parted from his neighbour. Yet their country is very fruitful,
+and abounds in grass and grain, as appears by the abundance of
+cattle and sheep; insomuch that we had very good sheep, though
+smaller than those of England, for two shillings, or five groats
+a-piece, and good pigs and hens for threepence each.</p>
+
+<p>The greatest want is of industrious and husbandly inhabitants,
+to till and improve the ground; for the common sort, if they can
+only provide sufficient to serve them from hand to mouth, take no
+farther care. Good land was to be had here for fourpence an acre
+of yearly rent. They had very small store of money among them,
+for which reason, perhaps, they doubled and trebled the prices of
+every thing we bought, in proportion to what they had been before
+our arrival. They have mines of alum, tin, brass, and iron; and
+we saw certain natural stones, as clear as crystal, and naturally
+squared like diamonds. That part of the country is full of great
+mountains and hills, whence run many pleasant streams of fine
+water. The native hardiness of the Irish nation may be conceived
+from this, that their young children, even in the midst of
+winter, run about the streets with bare legs and feet, and often
+having no other apparel than a scanty mantle to cover their
+nakedness. The chief officer of their town is called the
+sovereign, who hath the same office and authority among them with
+our mayors in England, having his Serjeants to attend upon him,
+and a mace carried before mm as they have. We were first
+entertained at the sovereigns house, which was one of the four
+that withstood the Earl of Desmond in his rebellion.</p>
+
+<p>They have the same form of common prayer, word for word, that
+we have, only that it is in Latin. On Sunday, the sovereign goeth
+to church having his Serjeant before him, and accompanied by the
+sheriff and others of the town. They there kneel down, every one
+making his prayers privately by himself. They then rise up and go
+out of the church again to drink. After this, they return again
+to church, and the minister makes prayers. Their manner of
+baptising differs somewhat from ours, part of the service
+belonging to it being in Latin and part in Irish. The minister
+takes the child on his hands, dipping it first backwards and then
+forwards, over head and ears into the cold water even in the
+midst of winter. By this the natural hardiness of the people may
+appear, as before specified. They had neither bell, drums, nor
+trumpet, to call the parishioners together, but wait for the
+coming of the sovereign, when those that have devotion follow
+him. Their bread is all baked in cakes, and the bakers bake for
+all the town, receiving a tenth part for their trouble. We had of
+them some ten or eleven tons of beer for the Victory; but it
+acted as a severe purge upon all who drank it, so that we chose
+rather to drink water.</p>
+
+<p>Having provided ourselves with fresh water, we set sail from
+thence on the 20th December, accompanied by Sir Edward Dennie and
+his lady, with two young sons. In the morning of that day, my
+lord went on shore to hasten the dispatch of some fresh water for
+the Victory, and brought us news that sixty Spanish prizes were
+taken and brought to England. For two or three days after we
+sailed, we had a fair wind; but it afterwards scanted, so that we
+were fain to keep a cold Christmas with the bishop and his
+clerks, as I said before. After this, meeting with an English
+ship, we received the joyful news that ninety-one Spanish prizes
+were come to England; and along with that, the sorrowful
+intelligence that our last and best prize was cast away on the
+coast of Cornwal, at a place the Cornish men call
+<i>Als-efferne</i>, that is Hell-cliff, where Captain Lister and
+all the people were drowned, except five or six, half English and
+half Spaniards, who saved their lives by swimming. Yet much of
+the goods were saved and preserved for us, by Sir Francis
+Godolphin and other worshipful gentlemen of the country. My lord
+was very sorry for the death of Captain Lister, saying that he
+would willingly have lost all the fruits of the voyage to have
+saved his life.</p>
+
+<p>The 29th December we met another ship, from which we learned
+that Sir Martin Frobisher and Captain Reymond had taken the
+admiral and vice-admiral of the fleet we had seen going into the
+haven of Tercera; but that the admiral had sunk, in consequence
+of much leaking, near the Eddystone, a rock over against Plymouth
+sound, all the people however being saved. We were likewise
+informed by this ship, that Captain Preston had captured a ship
+laden with silver. My lord took his passage in this last ship to
+land at Falmouth, while we held on our course for Plymouth.</p>
+
+<p>Towards night we came near the Ram-head, the next cape
+westwards from Plymouth sound, but we feared to double it in the
+night, by reason of the scantness of the wind: so we stood out to
+seawards for half the night, and towards morning had the wind
+more large. But we made too little to spare thereof; partly for
+which reasons and partly mistaking the land, we fell so much to
+leeward that we could not double the cape. For this reason we
+turned back again and got into Falmouth haven, where we grounded
+in 17 feet water; but as it was low ebb, the sea ready again to
+flow, and the ground soft, we received no harm. Here we gladly
+set our feet again on the long desired English ground, and
+refreshed ourselves by keeping part of Christmas on our native
+soil.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION VIII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Valiant Sea Fight, by Ten Merchant Ships of London against
+Twelve Spanish Gallies in the Straits of Gibraltar, on the 24th
+April</i> 1590[369].</p>
+
+<p>In 1590, sundry ships belonging to the merchants of London,
+some freighted for Venice, some for Constantinople, and some to
+divers other parts, met on their homeward course within the
+Straits of Gibraltar, having escaped all danger hitherto. The
+first of these was the Salomon, belonging to Mr Alexander Barnam
+of London, and Messrs Bond and Tweed of Harwich, which had sailed
+on the first of February last. The second was the Margaret and
+John, belonging to Mr Wats of London. The third was the Minion;
+the fourth the Ascension; the fifth the Centurion, belonging to
+Mr Cordal; the sixth the Violet; the seventh the Samuel; the
+eighth the Crescent; the ninth the Elizabeth; the tenth the
+Richard belonging to Mr Duffield. All these ships, being of
+notable and approved service, and coming near the mouth of the
+Straits hard by the coast of Barbary, they descried twelve tall
+gallies bravely furnished, and strongly provided with men and
+ammunition of war, ready to intercept and seize them. Being
+perceived by our captains and masters, we made speedy preparation
+for our defence, waiting the whole night for the approach of the
+enemy.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 369: Hakluyt, II. 660.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Next morning early, being Tuesday in Easter week, the 24th of
+April 1590, we had service according to our usual custom, praying
+to Almighty God to save us from the hands of the tyrannous
+Spaniards, whom we justly imagined and had always found to be our
+most mortal enemies on the sea. Having finished our prayers, and
+set ourselves in readiness, we perceived them coming towards us,
+and knew them indeed to be the Spanish gallies, commanded by
+Andrea Doria, viceroy for the king of Spain in the Straits of
+Gibraltar, and a notable enemy to all Englishmen. When they came
+near us, they <i>waved us amain</i> for the king of Spain, and in
+return we waved them amain for the Queen of England[370]; at
+which time it pleased the Almighty so to encourage our hearts,
+that the nearer they came we the less feared their great strength
+and huge number of men; they having to the amount of two or three
+hundred in each galley. It was concluded among us, that our four
+largest and tallest ships should be placed in the rear, the
+weaker and smaller ships going foremost; and so it was performed,
+every one of us being ready to take part in such successes as it
+should please God to send.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 370: This waving amain seems to have been
+some salutation of defiance, then usual at sea.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The gallies came upon us very fiercely at the first encounter,
+yet God so strengthened us that, even if they had been ten times
+more, we had not feared them at all. The Salomon, being a hot
+ship with sundry cast pieces in her, gave the first shot in so
+effectual a manner on their headmost galley, that it shared away
+so many of the men that sat on one side of her, and pierced her
+through and through, insomuch that she was ready to sink: Yet
+they assaulted us the more fiercely. Then the rest of our ships,
+especially the four chiefest, the Salomon, Margaret and John,
+Minion, and the Ascension, gave a hot charge upon them, and they
+on us, commencing a hot and fierce battle with great valour on
+both sides, which continued for the space of six hours. About the
+commencement of this fight, our fleet was joined by two Flemish
+vessels. Seeing the great force of the gallies, one of these
+presently struck his sails and yielded to the enemy; whereas, had
+they exerted themselves on our side and in their own defence,
+they needed not to have been taken in this cowardly manner. The
+other was ready also to have yielded immediately, and began to
+lower his sails: But the trumpeter of that ship drew his
+faulcion, and stepping up to the pilot at the helm, vowed that he
+would put him instantly to death, if he did not join and take
+part with the English fleet: This he did, for fear of death, and
+by that means they were defended from the tyranny which they had
+otherwise assuredly found among the Spaniards.</p>
+
+<p>When we had continued the fight somewhat more than six hours,
+God gave us the upper hand, so that we escaped the hands of so
+many enemies, who were constrained to flee into harbour to
+shelter themselves from us. This was the manifest work of God,
+who defended us in such sort from all danger, that not one man of
+us was slain in all this long and fierce assault, sustaining no
+other damage or hurt than this, that the shrouds and back-stays
+of the Salomon, which gave the first and last shot, and sore
+galled the enemy during the whole battle, were clean shot away.
+When the battle ceased, we were constrained for lack of wind to
+stay and waft up and down, and then went back again to
+<i>Tition</i> [Tetuan] in Barbary, six leagues from Gibraltar,
+where we found the people wondrously favourable to us; who, being
+but Moors and heathen people, shewed us where to find fresh water
+and all other necessaries. In short, we had there as good
+entertainment as if we had been in any place in England. The
+governor favoured us greatly, to whom we in return presented such
+gifts and commodities as we had, which he accepted of very
+graciously: And here we staid four days.</p>
+
+<p>After the cessation of the battle, which was on Easter
+Tuesday, we remained for want of wind before Gibraltar till the
+next morning, being all that time becalmed, and therefore
+expected every hour that they would have sent out a fresh force
+against us: But they were in no condition to do so, all their
+gallies being so sore battered that they durst not come out of
+harbour, though greatly urged thereunto by the governor of that
+town; but they had already met with so stout resistance, that
+they could not be prevailed on to renew the fight.</p>
+
+<p>While we were at Tetuan, we received a report of the hurt we
+had done the gallies; as we could not well discern any thing
+during the fight, on account of the great smoke. We there heard
+that we had almost spoiled those twelve gallies, which we had
+shot clean through, so that two of them were on the point of
+sinking; and we had slain so many of their men, that they were
+not able to fit out their gallies any more all that year. After
+going to Tetuan, we attempted three several times to pass the
+straits, but could not: Yet, with the blessing of God, we came
+safely through on the fourth attempt; and so continued on our
+voyage with a pleasant breeze all the way to the coast of
+England, where we arrived on the beginning of July 1590.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION IX.</p>
+
+<p><i>A valiant sea fight in the Straits of Gibraltar, in
+April</i> 1591, <i>by the Centurion of London, against five
+Spanish gallies</i>.</p>
+
+<p>In the month of November 1590, sundry ships belonging to
+different merchants of London sailed with merchandise for various
+ports within the Straits of Gibraltar; all of which, having fair
+wind and weather, arrived safe at their destined ports. Among
+these was the Centurion of London, a very tall ship of large
+burden, yet but weakly manned, as appears by the following
+narrative.</p>
+
+<p>The Centurion arrived safe at Marseilles, on her outward bound
+voyage, where, after delivering her goods, she remained better
+than five weeks, taking in lading, and then intended to return to
+England. When she was ready to come away from Marseilles, there
+were sundry other ships of smaller burden at that place, the
+masters of which intreated Robert Bradshaw of Limehouse, the
+master of the Centurion, to stay a day or two for them till they
+could get in readiness to depart, saying that it were far better
+for them all to go in company for mutual support and defence,
+than singly to run the hazard of falling into the hands of the
+Spanish gallies in the Straits. On which reasonable persuasion,
+although the Centurion was of such sufficiency as might have been
+reasonably hazarded alone, yet she staid for the smaller ships,
+and set out along with them from Marseilles, all engaging
+mutually to stand by each other, if they chanced to fall in with
+any of the Spanish gallies.</p>
+
+<p>Thus sailing altogether along the coast of Spain, they were
+suddenly becalmed upon Easter-day in the Straits of Gibraltar,
+where they immediately saw several gallies making towards them in
+a very gallant and courageous manner. The chief leaders and
+soldiers in these gallies, were bravely apparelled in silken
+coats, with silver whistles depending from their necks, and fine
+plumes of feathers in their hats. Coming on courageously, they
+shot very fast from their calivers upon the Centurion, which they
+boarded somewhat before ten o'clock A.M. But the Centurion was
+prepared for their reception, and meant to give them as sour a
+welcome as they could; and having prepared their close quarters
+with all other things in readiness, called on God for aid, and
+cheered one another to fight to the last. The Centurion
+discharged her great ordnance upon the gallies, but the little
+ships her consorts durst not come forward to her aid, but lay
+aloof, while five of the gallies laid on board the Centurion, to
+whom they made themselves fast with their grappling irons, two on
+one side and two on the other, while the admiral galley lay
+across her stern. In this guise the Centurion was sore galled and
+battered, her main-mast greatly wounded, all her sails filled
+with shot holes, and her mizen mast and stern rendered almost
+unserviceable. During this sore and deadly fight, the trumpeter
+of the Centurion continually sounded forth the animating points
+of war, encouraging the men to fight gallantly against their
+enemies; while in the Spanish gallies there was no warlike music,
+save the silver whistles, which were blown ever and anon. In this
+sore fight, many a Spaniard was thrown into the sea, while
+multitudes of them came crawling up the ships sides, hanging by
+every rope, and endeavouring to enter in: Yet as fast as they
+came to enter, so courageously were they received by the English,
+that many of them were fain to tumble alive into the sea,
+remediless of ever getting out alive. There were in the Centurion
+48 men and boys in all, who bestirred themselves so valiantly and
+so galled the enemy, that many a brave and lusty Spaniard lost
+his life. The Centurion was set on fire five several times, with
+wild-fire and other combustibles thrown in for that purpose by
+the Spaniards; yet by the blessing of God, and the great and
+diligent foresight of the master, the fire was always
+extinguished without doing any harm.</p>
+
+<p>In every one of these five gallies there were about 200
+soldiers; who, together with the great guns, spoiled, rent, and
+battered the Centurion very sorely; shot her mainmast through,
+and slew four of her men, one of whom was the masters mate. Ten
+other persons were hurt by splinters. But in the end, the
+Spaniards had almost spent their shot, so that they were obliged
+to load with hammers and the chains of their galley-slaves, yet,
+God be praised, the English received no more harm. At length,
+sore galled and worn out, the Spaniards were constrained to
+unfasten their grapplings and sheer off; at which time, if there
+had been any fresh ship to aid and succour the Centurion, they
+had certainly sunk or taken all those gallies. The Dolphin lay
+aloof and durst not come near, while the other two small ships
+fled away. One of the gallies from the Centurion set upon the
+Dolphin; which ship went immediately on fire, occasioned by her
+own powder, so that the ship perished with all her men: But
+whether this was done intentionally or not, was never known.
+Surely, if she had come bravely forward in aid of the Centurion,
+she had not perished.</p>
+
+<p>This fight continued five hours and a half, at the end of
+which time both parties were glad to draw off and breathe
+themselves; but the Spaniards, once gone, durst not renew the
+fight. Next day, indeed, six other gallies came out and looked at
+the Centurion, but durst on no account meddle with her. Thus
+delivered by the Almighty from the hands of their enemies, they
+gave God thanks for the victory, and arrived not long after safe
+at London. Mr John Hawes merchant, and sundry others of good note
+were present in this fight.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION X.</p>
+
+<p><i>Sea-fight near the Azores, between the Revenge man of war,
+commanded by Sir Richard Granville, and fifteen Spanish men of
+war</i>, 31st August 1591. <i>Written by Sir Walter
+Raleigh</i>[371].</p>
+
+<p>PRELIMINARY DISCOURSE[372].</p>
+
+<p>Because the rumours are diversely spread, as well in England
+as in the Low Countries and elsewhere, of this late encounter
+between her majestys ships and the armada of Spain; and that the
+Spaniards, according to their usual manner, fill the world with
+their vain-glorious vaunts, making great shew of victories, when
+on the contrary themselves are most commonly and shamefully
+beaten and dishonoured, thereby hoping to possess the ignorant
+multitude by anticipating and forerunning false reports: It is
+agreeable with all good reason, for manifestation of the truth,
+to overcome falsehood and untruth, that the beginning,
+continuance, and success of this late honourable encounter by Sir
+Richard Grenville, and others her majestys captains, with the
+armada[373] of Spain, should be truly set down and published,
+without partiality or false imaginations. And it is no marvel
+that the Spaniards should seek, by false and slanderous
+pamphlets, <i>advisos</i>, and letters, to cover their own loss,
+and to derogate from others their due honours, especially in this
+fight being far off; seeing they were not ashamed, in the year
+1588, when they purposed the invasion of this land, to publish in
+sundry languages in print, great victories in words, which they
+pretended to have obtained against this realm, and spread the
+same in a most false sort over all parts of France, Italy, and
+other countries. When, shortly after it was happily manifested in
+very deed to all nations, how their navy, which they termed
+<i>invincible</i>, consisting of 140 sail of ships, not only of
+their own kingdom, but strengthened with the greatest argosies,
+Portugal caraks, Florentines, and huge hulks of other countries,
+were by 80 of her majestys own ships of war, and a few belonging
+to our own merchants, by the wise, valiant, and advantageous
+conduct of the lord Charles Howard, high admiral of England,
+beaten and shuffled together, even from the Lizard in Cornwall,
+first to Portland where they shamefully left Don Pedro de Valdes
+with his mighty ship: from Portland to Calais, where they lost
+Hugo de Moncado with the gallies of which he was captain: and
+from Calais driven by squibs from their anchors, were chased out
+of sight of England, round about Scotland and Ireland. Where for
+the sympathy of their barbarous religion, hoping to find succour
+and assistance, a great part of them were crushed against the
+rocks, and those others that landed, being very many in number,
+were notwithstanding broken, slain, and taken, and so sent from
+village to village, coupled in halters, to be shipped for
+England. Where her majesty, of her princely and invincible
+disposition, disdaining to put them to death, and scorning either
+to retain or entertain them, they were all sent back again into
+their countries, to witness and recount the worthy achievements
+of their invincible and dreadful navy: of which, the number of
+soldiers, the fearful burden of their ships, the commanders names
+of every squadron, with all their magazines of provisions were
+put in print, as an army and navy irresistible and disdaining
+prevention. With all which so great and terrible ostentation,
+they did not, in all their sailing about England, so much as sink
+or take one ship, bark, pinnace, or cock-boat of ours, or ever
+burnt so much as one sheep-cot of this land. When, as on the
+contrary, Sir Francis Drake, with only 800 soldiers, not long
+before landed in their Indies, and forced San Jago, Santo
+Domingo, Carthagena, and the forts of Florida.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 371: Hakluyt, II. 668. Astley, I.
+216.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 372: This preliminary discourse, by the
+famous Sir Walter Raleigh, is given from Hakluyt without
+alteration, except in orthography.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 373: Armada is a general word, signifying
+in Spanish a ship of war or a fleet or squadron. Generally in
+English it has been limited to the invincible armada, or powerful
+fleet fitted out by Philip II. in the vain hope of conquering
+England.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>And after that, Sir John Norris marched from Peniche in
+Portugal with a handful of soldiers to the gates of Lisbon, being
+above 40 English miles: Where the earl of Essex himself, and
+other valiant gentlemen, braved the city of Lisbon, encamping at
+the very gates: from whence, after many days abode, finding
+neither promised parley nor provision wherewith to batter, they
+made their retreat by land, in spite of all their garrisons both
+of horse and foot. In this sort I have a little digressed from my
+first purpose, only by the necessary comparison of their and our
+actions: the one covetous of honour, without vaunt or
+ostentation; the other so greedy to purchase the opinion of their
+own affairs, and by false rumours to resist the blasts of their
+own dishonours, as they will not only not blush to spread all
+manner of untruths, but even for the least advantage, be it but
+for the taking of one poor adventurer of the English, will
+celebrate the victory with bonefires in every town, always
+spending more in faggots than the purchase they obtained was
+worth. Whereas, we never thought it worth the consumption of two
+billets, when we have taken eight or ten of their Indian ships at
+one time, and twenty of their Brazil fleet. Such is the
+difference between true valour and vain ostentation, and between
+honourable actions and frivolous vain-glorious boasting. But to
+return to my purpose:</p>
+
+<p>NARRATIVE.</p>
+
+<p>The Lord Thomas Howard, with six of her majestys ships, six
+victuallers of London, the bark Raleigh, and two or three
+pinnaces, riding at anchor near Flores, one of the western
+islands called the Azores, on the last of August 1591, in the
+afternoon, had intelligence by one captain Middleton, of the
+approach of the Spanish armada. This Middleton, being in a very
+good sailing ship, had kept them company for three days before,
+of good purpose, both to discover their force, and to give the
+lord admiral advice of their approach. He had no sooner
+communicated the news, when the Spanish fleet hove in sight; at
+which time, many belonging to our ships companies were on shore
+in the island of Flores, some providing ballast for the ships,
+others filling water, and others refreshing themselves from the
+land with such things as they could procure either for money or
+by force. Owing to this, our ships were all in confusion,
+pestered, rummaging, and every thing out of order, very light for
+want of ballast; and what was most of all to their disadvantage,
+the half of the men in every ship was sick and unserviceable. For
+in the Revenge, there were ninety sick; in the Bonaventure, not
+so many in health as could hand her mainsail, insomuch, that
+unless twenty men had been taken from a bark of Sir George Careys
+which was sunk, and appointed into her, she had hardly been able
+to get back to England. The rest of the ships for the most part
+were in little better state.</p>
+
+<p>The names of her majestys ships were as follows: The Defiance,
+admiral, the Revenge, vice-admiral, the Bonaventure commanded by
+captain Crosse, the Lion by George Fenner, the Foresight by
+Thomas Vavasour, and the Crane by Duffild. The Foresight and
+Crane were small ships, the other four were of the middle size.
+All the others, except the bark Raleigh, commanded by captain
+Thin, were victuallers, and of small or no force. The approach of
+the Spanish fleet being concealed by means of the island, they
+were soon at hand, so that our ships had scarce time to weigh
+their anchors, and some even were obliged to slip their cables
+and set sail. Sir Richard Grenville was the last to weigh, that
+he might recover the men who were a land on the island, who had
+otherwise been lost. The lord Thomas Howard, with the rest of the
+fleet, very hardly recovered the wind, which Sir Richard was
+unable to do; on which his master and others endeavoured to
+persuade him to cut his main sail and cast about, trusting to the
+swift sailing of his ship, as the squadron of Seville was on his
+weather bow. But Sir Richard absolutely refused to turn from the
+enemy, declaring he would rather die than dishonour himself, his
+country, and her majestys ship, and persuaded his company that he
+would be able to pass through the two squadrons in spite of them,
+and force those of Seville to give him way. This he certainly
+performed upon divers of the foremost, who, as the sailors term
+it, sprang their luff, and fell under the lee of the Revenge. The
+other course had certainly been the better, and might very
+properly have been adopted under so great impossibility of
+prevailing over such heavy odds; but, out of the greatness of his
+mind, he could not be prevailed on to have the semblance of
+fleeing.</p>
+
+<p>In the meantime, while Sir Richard attended to those ships of
+the enemy that were nearest him and in his way, the great San
+Philip being to windward of him, and coming down towards him,
+becalmed his sails in such sort that his ship could neither make
+way nor feel the helm, so huge and high was the Spanish ship,
+being of fifteen hundred tons, and which presently laid the
+Revenge on board. At this time, bereft of his sails, the ships
+that had fallen under his lee, luffed up and laid him on board
+also, the first of these that now came up being the vice-admiral
+of the Biscay squadron, a very mighty and puissant ship,
+commanded by Brittandona. The San Philip carried three tier of
+ordnance on a side, and eleven pieces in each tier, besides eight
+pieces in her forecastle chase, and others from her stern-ports.
+After the Revenge was thus entangled by the huge San Philip, four
+others laid her on board, two to larboard and two to starboard.
+The fight thus began at three in the afternoon, and continued
+very terribly the whole of that evening. But the great San
+Philip, having received a discharge from the lower tier of the
+Revenge, loaded with cross-bar shot, shifted herself with all
+diligence from her side, utterly disliking this her first
+entertainment. Some say the San Philip foundered, but we cannot
+report this for a truth, not having sufficient assurance. Besides
+the mariners, the Spanish ships were filled with companies of
+soldiers, some having to the number of two hundred, some five
+hundred, and others as far even as eight hundred. In ours, there
+were none besides the mariners, except the servants of the
+commanders, and some few gentlemen volunteers.</p>
+
+<p>After interchanging many vollies of great ordnance and small
+shot, the Spaniards deliberated to enter the Revenge by boarding,
+and made several attempts, hoping to carry her by the multitudes
+of their armed soldiers and musketeers, but were still repulsed
+again and again, being on every attempt beaten back into their
+own ships or into the sea. In the beginning of the fight, the
+George Noble of London being only one of the victuallers, and of
+small force, having received some shot through her from the
+Spanish <i>armadas</i>, fell under the lee of the Revenge, and
+the master of her asked Sir Richard what he was pleased to
+command him; on which Sir Richard bad him save himself as he best
+might, leaving him to his fortune. After the fight had thus
+continued without intermission, while the day lasted, and some
+hours of the night, many of our men were slain and hurt; one of
+the great galeons of the armada and the admiral of the hulks both
+sunk, and a great slaughter had taken place in many of the other
+great Spanish ships. Some allege that Sir Richard was very
+dangerously hurt almost in the beginning of the fight, and lay
+speechless for a time ere he recovered: But two men belonging to
+the Revenge, who came home in a ship of Lyme from the islands,
+and were examined by some of the lords and others, affirmed, that
+he was never so much wounded as to forsake the upper deck till an
+hour before midnight, and being then shot in the body by a musket
+ball, was shot again in the head as the surgeon was dressing him,
+the surgeon himself being at the same time wounded to death. This
+also agrees with an examination of four other returned mariners
+of the same ship, taken before Sir Francis Godolphin, and sent by
+him to master William Killegrue of her majestys privy
+chamber.</p>
+
+<p>To return to the fight: As the Spanish ships which attempted
+to board the Revenge were wounded and beaten off, so always
+others came up in their places, she never having less than two
+mighty galeons by her sides and close on board her; so that ere
+morning, from three o'clock of the day before, she had been
+successively assailed by no less than fifteen several armadas or
+great ships of war; and all of them had so ill approved their
+entertainment, that, by break of day, they were far more willing
+to hearken to a composition, than hastily to make any more
+assaults or entries for boarding. But as the day advanced, so our
+men decreased in number, and as the light grew more and more, by
+so much more increased the discomforts of our men. For now
+nothing appeared in sight but enemies, save one small ship called
+the Pilgrim, commanded by Jacob Whiddon, who hovered all night to
+see what might be the event; but, bearing up towards the Revenge
+in the morning, was hunted like a hare among so many ravenous
+hounds, yet escaped.</p>
+
+<p>All the powder of the Revenge was now spent to the very last
+barrel, all her pikes broken, forty of her best men slain, and
+most part of the rest wounded. In the beginning of the fight, she
+had 90 of her men lying sick on the ballast in the hold, and only
+100 capable of duty, a small crew for such a ship, and a weak
+garrison to resist so mighty an army. By this brave hundred was
+the whole of this hot fight sustained, the volleys, boardings,
+assaults, and entries, from fifteen great ships of war all full
+of men, besides those which had cannonaded her from a distance.
+On the contrary, the Spanish ships were always supplied with
+fresh soldiers from the several squadrons of this vast fleet, and
+had all manner of arms and powder at will; while to our men there
+remained no hope or comfort, no supply either of ships, men,
+weapons, or powder. The masts were all beaten overboard; all her
+tackle was cut asunder; her upper works all battered to pieces,
+and in effect evened with the water, nothing but the hull or
+bottom of the ship remaining, nothing being left over-head for
+flight or for defence.</p>
+
+<p>Finding his ship in this distress, and altogether unable for
+any longer resistance, after fifteen hours constant fighting
+against fifteen great ships of war which assailed him in turns,
+having received by estimation 800 shot of great ordnance, besides
+many assaults and entries; and considering that he and his ship
+must now soon be in possession of the enemy, who had arranged
+their ships in a ring round about the Revenge, which was now
+unable to move any way, except as acted on by the waves; Sir
+Richard called for his master gunner, whom he knew to be a most
+resolute man, and commanded him to split and sink the ship, that
+nothing of glory or victory might remain to the enemy, who with
+so great a navy, and in so long a time, were unable to take her.
+They had fifty-three ships of war, and above 10,000 men, and had
+been engaged against this single ship for fifteen hours. At the
+same time, Sir Richard endeavoured to prevail upon as many of the
+company as he could influence, to commit themselves to the mercy
+of God, and not of their enemies, since they had like valiant men
+repulsed so many enemies, urging them not now to obscure their
+honour and that of their nation, for the sake of prolonging their
+lives a few days. The master gunner and various others of the
+crew readily assented to this desperate resolution; but the
+captain and master were quite of an opposite opinion, and
+conjured Sir Richard to desist from his desperate proposal;
+alleging that the Spaniards would be as ready to agree to a
+capitulation as they to offer it; and begged him to consider,
+that there still were many valiant men still living in the ship,
+and others whose wounds might not be mortal, who might be able to
+do acceptable service to their queen and country hereafter. And,
+although Sir Richard had alleged that the Spaniards should never
+have the glory of taking one ship of her majesty, which had been
+so long and valiantly defended; they answered, that the ship had
+six feet water in her hold, and three shot holes under water,
+which were so weakly stopped, that she must needs sink with the
+first labouring of the sea, and was besides so battered and
+bruised, that she could never be removed from the place.</p>
+
+<p>While the matter was thus in dispute, Sir Richard refusing to
+listen to any reasons, the captain won over the most part to his
+opinion, and the master was conveyed on board the Spanish
+general, Don Alfonso Ba&ccedil;an. Finding none of his people
+very ready to attempt boarding the Revenge again, and fearing
+lest Sir Richard might blow up both them and himself, as he
+learned from the master his dangerous disposition; Don Alfonso
+agreed that all their lives should be saved, the ships company
+sent to England, and the better sort to pay such reasonable
+ransom as their estate could bear, all in the meantime to be free
+from prison or the gallies. He so much the rather consented to
+these terms, lest any farther loss or mischief might accrue to
+themselves, and for the preservation of Sir Richard, whose
+notable valour he greatly honoured and admired. On receiving this
+answer, in which the safety of life was promised; the common
+sort, now at the end of their peril, mostly drew back from the
+proposal of Sir Richard and the master gunner, it being no hard
+matter to dissuade men from death to life. Finding himself and
+Sir Richard thus prevented and mastered by the majority, the
+master gunner would have slain himself with his sword, but was
+prevented by main force, and locked up in his cabin.</p>
+
+<p>Then the Spanish general sent many boats on board the Revenge,
+and several of her men, fearing Sir Richards disposition, stole
+away on board the general and other ships. Thus constrained to
+submit, Sir Richard was desired by a message from Alfonso
+Ba&ccedil;an to remove from the Revenge, as it was filled with
+blood and the bodies of the slain, and with wounded men, like a
+slaughter-house. Sir Richard gave for answer, that he might do
+now with his body what he pleased; and while removing from the
+ship, he fainted away, and on recovering he requested the company
+to pray for him. The Spanish general used Sir Richard with all
+humanity, leaving no means untried that tended towards his
+recovery, highly commending his valour and worthiness, and
+greatly bewailing his dangerous condition; seeing that it was a
+rare spectacle, and an instance of resolution seldom met with,
+for one ship to withstand so many enemies, to endure the
+batteries and boardings of so many huge ships of war, and to
+resist and repel the assaults and entries of such numbers of
+soldiers. All this and more is confirmed, by the recital of a
+Spanish captain in that same fleet, who was himself engaged in
+this action, and, being severed from the rest in a storm, was
+taken by the Lion, a small ship belonging to London, and is now
+prisoner in London.</p>
+
+<p>The general commanding this great armada, was Don Alphonso
+Ba&ccedil;an, brother to the Marquis of Santa Cruz. Britandona
+was admiral of the squadron of Biscay. The Marquis of Arumburch
+[Aremberg] commanded the squadron of Seville. Luis Coutinho
+commanded the hulks and flyboats. There were slain and drowned in
+this fight, as the before-mentioned Spanish captain confessed,
+near a thousand of the enemy, with two special commanders, Don
+Luis de San Juan, and Don George de Prunaria de Mallaga, besides
+others of special account whose names have not yet been reported.
+The admiral of the hulks and the Ascension of Seville were both
+sunk at the side of the Revenge. One other ship, which got into
+the road of San Miguel, sank there also; and a fourth ship had to
+run on shore to save her men. Sir Richard, as it is said, died
+the second or third day on board the general, much bewailed by
+his enemies; but we have not heard what became of his body,
+whether it were committed to the sea or buried on land. The
+comfort remaining to his friends is, that he ended his life
+honourably, having won great reputation for his nation and his
+posterity, and hath not outlived his honour.</p>
+
+<p>For the rest of her majestys ships, that entered not into the
+fight like the Revenge, the reasons and causes were these: There
+were of them only six in all, two whereof were only small ships;
+and they could be of no service, as the Revenge was engaged past
+recovery. The island of Flores was on one side; 53 sail of
+Spanish ships were on the other, divided into several squadrons,
+all as full of soldiers as they could contain. Almost one half of
+our men were sick and unable to serve; the ships were grown foul,
+<i>unroomaged</i>[374], and hardly able to bear any sail for want
+of ballast, having been six months at sea. If all the rest of the
+ships had entered into the action, they had been all lost; for
+the very hugeness of the Spanish ships, even if no other violence
+had been offered, might have crushed them all into shivers
+between them; by which the loss and dishonour to the queen had
+been far greater, than any injury the enemy could have sustained.
+It is nevertheless true, that the Lord Thomas Howard would have
+entered between the squadrons of the enemy, but the others would
+on no account consent; and even the master of his own ship
+threatened to leap into the sea, rather than conduct the admirals
+ship and the rest to be a certain prey to the enemy, where there
+was no hope or possibility of victory or even of defence. In my
+opinion, such rashness would have ill assorted with the
+discretion and trust of a general, to have committed himself and
+his charge to assured destruction, without any hope or likelihood
+of prevailing, thereby to have diminished the strength of her
+majestys navy, and to have increased the pride and glory of the
+enemy.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 374: This singular antiquated sea term may
+signify, not in sailing <i>trim</i>.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Foresight, one of her majestys vessels, commanded by
+Thomas Vavasour, performed a very great service, and staid two
+hours as near the Revenge as the weather would permit, not
+forsaking the fight till well nigh encompassed by the squadrons
+of the enemy, and then cleared himself with great difficulty. The
+rest gave diverse vollies of shot, and engaged as far as the
+place and their own necessities permitted, so as to keep the
+weather-gage of the enemy, till night parted them.</p>
+
+<p>A few days after this fight, the prisoners being dispersed
+among the Spanish ships of war and ships from the Indies, there
+arose so great a storm from the W. and N.W. that all the fleet
+was dispersed, as well the fleet of the Indies then come to them
+as the rest of the armada that had attended their arrival, of
+which 14 sail, together with the Revenge having 200 Spaniards on
+board of her, were cast away upon the island of St Michael. Thus
+they honoured the obsequies of the renowned Revenge, for the
+great glory she had achieved, not permitting her to perish alone.
+Besides these, other 15 or 16 of the Spanish ships of war were
+cast away in this storm upon the other islands of the Azores:
+And, of an 100 sail and more of the fleet of the Indies, which
+were expected this year in Spain, what with the loss sustained in
+this tempest, and what before in the bay of Mexico and about the
+Bermuda islands, above 70 were lost, including those taken by our
+London ships; besides one very rich ship of the Indies, which set
+herself on fire being boarded by the Pilgrim, and five others
+taken by the ship belonging to Mr Wats of London between the
+Havannah and Cape St Antonio. On the 4th of November this year,
+we had letters from Tercera, affirming that 3000 dead bodies had
+been thrown upon that island from the perished ships, and that
+the Spaniards confessed to have lost 10,000 men in this storm,
+besides those who perished between the main and the islands. Thus
+it hath pleased God to fight for us, and to defend the justice of
+our cause, against the ambitious and bloody pretences of the
+Spaniards, who seeking to devour all nations are themselves
+devoured: A manifest testimony how unjust and displeasing are
+their attempts in the sight of God, who hath been pleased to
+witness, by the evil success of their affairs, his mislike of
+their bloody and injurious designs, purposed and practised
+against all Christian princes, over whom they seek unlawful and
+ungodly rule and supreme command.</p>
+
+<p>A day or two before this terrible catastrophe, when some of
+our prisoners desired to be set on shore on the Azores islands,
+hoping to be thence transported into England, and which liberty
+had been formerly promised by the Spanish general; one Morice
+Fitz John, (son of old John of Desmond, a notable traitor, who
+was cousin-german to the late earl of Desmond,) was sent from
+ship to ship to endeavour to persuade the English prisoners to
+serve the king of Spain. The arguments he used to induce them
+were these. Increase of pay to treble their present allowance;
+advancement to the better sort; and the free exercise of the true
+catholic religion, ensuring the safety of all their souls. For
+the first of these, the beggarly and unnatural behaviour of those
+English and Irish rebels that served the king of Spain in that
+action was a sufficient answer; for so poor and ragged were they,
+that, for want of apparel, they stripped the poor prisoners their
+countrymen of their ragged garments, worn out by six months
+service, not even sparing to despoil them of their bloody shirts
+from their wounded bodies, and the very shoes from their feet; a
+noble testimony of their rich entertainment and high pay. As to
+the second argument, of hope of advancement if they served well
+and continued faithful to the king of Spain; what man could be so
+blockishly ignorant ever to expect promotion and honour from a
+foreign king, having no other merit or pretension than his own
+disloyalty, his unnatural desertion of his country and parents,
+and rebellion against his true prince, to whose obedience he is
+bound by oath, by nature, and by religion? No! such men are only
+assured to be employed on all desperate enterprizes, and to be
+held in scorn and disdain even among those they serve. That ever
+a traitor was either trusted or advanced I have never learnt,
+neither can I remember a single example. No man could have less
+becomed the office of orator for such a purpose, than this Morice
+of Desmond: For, the earl his cousin, being one of the greatest
+subjects in the kingdom of Ireland, possessing almost whole
+counties in his large property, many goodly manors, castles, and
+lordships, the county palatine of Kerry, 500 gentlemen of his own
+family and name ready to follow him, all which he and his
+ancestors had enjoyed in peace for three or four hundred years:
+Yet this man, in less than three years after his rebellion and
+adherence to the Spaniards, was beaten from all his holds, not so
+many as ten gentlemen of his name left living, himself taken and
+beheaded by a gentleman of his own nation, and his lands given by
+parliament to her majesty and possessed by the English. His other
+cousin, Sir John Desmond, taken by Mr John Zouch; and his body
+hung up over the gates of his native city to be devoured by
+ravens. The third brother, Sir James, hanged, drawn, and
+quartered in the same place. Had he been able to vaunt of the
+success of his own house, in thus serving the king of Spain, the
+argument might doubtless have moved much and wrought great
+effect: the which, because he happened to forget, I have thought
+good to remember in his behalf.</p>
+
+<p>As for the matter of religion, to which he adverted, it would
+require a separate volume, were I to set down how irreligiously
+they cover their greedy and ambitious pretences with that veil of
+pretended piety. But sure I am, there is no kingdom or
+commonwealth in all Europe that they do not invade, under
+pretence of religion, if it be reformed. Nay if it even be what
+they term catholic, they pretend a title, as if the kings of
+Castile were the natural heirs of all the world. Thus between
+both, no kingdom is exempted from their ambition. Where they dare
+not invade with their own forces, they basely entertain the
+traitors and vagabonds of all nations; seeking by their means,
+and by their runagate Jesuits, to win other parts to their
+dominion, by which they have ruined many noble houses and others
+in this land, extinguishing their lives and families. What good,
+honour, or fortune, any one hath ever yet achieved through them,
+is yet unheard of. If our English papists will only look to
+Portugal, against which they have no pretence of religion; how
+their nobility are imprisoned and put to death, their rich men
+made a prey, and all sorts of people reduced to servitude; they
+shall find that the obedience even of the Turk is ease and
+liberty, compared to the tyranny of Spain. What have they done in
+Sicily, in Naples, in Milan, in the low countries? Who hath there
+been spared even for religion? It cometh to my remembrance of a
+certain burgher at Antwerp, whose house was entered by a company
+of Spanish soldiers when they sacked that city. He besought them
+to spare him and his goods, being a good catholic, and therefore
+one of their own party and faction. The Spaniards answered, they
+knew him to be of a good conscience in himself; but his money,
+plate, jewels, and goods, were all heretical, and therefore good
+prize. So they abused and tormented the foolish Fleming, who
+thought that an <i>Agnus Dei</i> had been a sufficient safeguard
+against all the force of that holy and charitable nation.</p>
+
+<p>Neither have they at any time, as they protest, invaded the
+kingdoms of Mexico and Peru and elsewhere, being only led thereto
+to reduce the people to Christianity, not for gold or empire:
+Whereas, in the single island of Hispaniola, they have wasted and
+destroyed thirty hundred thousand of the natives, besides many
+millions else in other places of the Indies: a poor and harmless
+people, created of God, and might have been won to his service,
+as many of them were, even almost all whom they endeavoured to
+persuade thereto. The story of these their enormities, has been
+written at large by Bartholomew de las Casas[375], a bishop of
+their own nation, and has been translated into English and many
+other languages, under the title of <i>The Spanish Cruelties</i>.
+Who therefore would repose trust in such a nation of ravenous
+strangers, and more especially in those Spaniards, who more
+greedily thirst after the blood of the English, for the many
+overthrows and dishonours they have received at our hands; whose
+weakness we have discovered to the world, and whose forces, at
+home, abroad, in Europe, in the Indies, by sea and by land, even
+with mere handfuls of men and ships on our sides, we have
+overthrown and dishonoured? Let not therefore any Englishman, of
+what religion soever, have other opinion of these Spaniards or
+their abettors, but that those whom they seek to win of our
+nation, they esteem base and traiterous, unworthy persons, and
+inconstant fools; and that they use this pretence of religion,
+for no other purpose but to bewitch us from the obedience due to
+our natural prince, hoping thereby to bring us in time under
+slavery and subjection, when none shall be there so odious and
+despised, as those very traitors who have sold their country to
+strangers, forsaking their faith and obedience, contrary to the
+laws of nature and religion, and contrary to that humane and
+universal honour, not only of Christians but of heathen and
+unbelieving nations, who have always sustained every degree of
+labour, embracing even death itself, in defence of their country,
+their prince, and their commonwealth.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 375: He was bishop of Chiapa in New Spain,
+and computes the Indians destroyed by the Spaniards in about
+fifty years, at no fewer than twenty millions.--Astley, I. 221.
+a.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>To conclude, it hath ever to this day pleased God to prosper
+and defend her majesty, to break the purposes of her malicious
+enemies, to confound the devices of forsworn traitors, and to
+overthrow all unjust practices and invasions. She hath ever been
+held in honour by the worthiest kings, served by faithful
+subjects, and shall ever, by the favour of God, resist, repell,
+and confound all attempts against her person and kingdom. In the
+mean time, let the Spaniards and traitors vaunt of their success;
+while we, her true and obedient subjects, guided by the shining
+light of her virtues, shall always love, serve, and obey her, to
+the end of our lives.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XI</p>
+
+<p><i>Note of the Fleet of the Indies, expected in Spain this
+year 1591; with the number that perished, according to the
+examination of certain Spaniards, lately taken and brought to
+England[376].</i></p>
+
+<p>The fleet of New Spain, at their first gathering together,
+consisted of 52 sail. The admiral and vice-admiral ships were
+each of 600 tons burden. Four or five of the ships were of 900
+and 1000 tons each; some were of 400 tons, and the smallest of
+200. Of this fleet 19 were cast away, containing by estimation
+2600 men, which happened along the coast of New Spain, so that
+only 33 sail came to the Havannah.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 376: Hakluyt, II. 670.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The fleet of Terra Firma, at its first departure from Spain,
+consisted of 50 sail, bound for Nombre de Dios, where they
+discharged their loading, and returned thence for their health
+sake to Carthagena, till such time as the treasure they were to
+take in at Nombre de Dios were ready. But before this fleet
+departed, some were gone by one or two at a time, so that only 23
+sail of this fleet arrived at the Havannah.</p>
+
+<p>There met at the Havannah,</p>
+
+<pre>
+   33 sail from New Spain,
+   23 from the Terra Firma,
+   12 belonging to San Domingo,
+   9 from Honduras.
+</pre>
+
+<p>Thus 77 ships joined and set sail from the Havannah, on the
+17th of July 1591, according to our account, and kept together
+till they arrived in the lat. of 35&deg; N. which was about the
+10th of August. There the wind, which had been at S.W. changed
+suddenly to N. so that the sea coming from the S.W. and the wind
+violent from the N. they were put in great extremity, and then
+first lost the admiral of their fleet, in which were 500 men; and
+within three or four days after, another storm rising, five or
+six others of their largest ships were cast away with all their
+men, together with their vice-admiral.</p>
+
+<p>In lat. 38&deg; N. and about the end of August, another great
+storm arose, in which all their remaining ships, except 48, were
+lost. These 48 ships kept together till they came in sight of the
+islands of Corvo and Flores, about the 5th or 6th of September,
+at which time they were separated by a great storm; and of that
+number, 15 or 16 sail were afterwards seen by three Spanish
+prisoners, riding at anchor under Tercera, while 12 or 14 more
+were observed to bear away for San Miguel. What became of them
+after these Spaniards were taken, cannot yet be certified; but
+their opinion is, that very few of this fleet escaped being
+either taken or cast away. It has been ascertained of late by
+other means of intelligence, that of this whole fleet of 123
+sail, which should have come to Spain this year, there have only
+25 yet arrived. This note was extracted from the examinations of
+certain Spanish prisoners, brought to England by six of the
+London ships, which took seven of these men from the
+before-mentioned fleet of the Indies near the islands of the
+A&ccedil;ores.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Report of a Cruizing Voyage to the Azores in 1591, by a
+feet of London ships sent with supplies to the Lord Thomas
+Howard. Written by Captain Robert Flicke</i>[377].</p>
+
+<p>PRELIMINARY REMARKS[378].</p>
+
+<p>The following voyage is extracted from a letter, dated at
+Plymouth the 24th of October 1591, and sent thence by Captain
+Flicke to Messrs Thomas Bromley, Richard Staper, and ----
+Cordall, three of the contractors, as we apprehend, for the
+ships, and is titled, "Concerning the success of a part of the
+London supplies sent to the isles of the Azores to my Lord Thomas
+Howard." In this letter no mention is made of the number of ships
+employed, nor of the names of more than two captains besides
+Flicke, namely, <i>Brothus</i> and <i>Furtho</i>, the latter of
+whom was bearer of the letter. We also find the name of four of
+the ships; the Costly, Centurion, Cherubim, and the Margaret and
+John, but not the names of their commanders, neither the name of
+the ship in which Flicke sailed, and which, for distinctions
+sake, we call the admiral. These omissions may be excuseable in a
+private letter, written only to acquaint the merchants of
+particulars they had not before learnt, and not designed as a
+formal narrative of the voyage to be laid before the public. As
+these, however, are essential to narratives of this kind, it
+might have been expected of Mr Hakluyt to have supplied such
+defects. We may judge, however, that the number of ships was
+seven, as in the preceding account of the fleet of the Indies,
+six London ships are mentioned as having fallen in with it, which
+were probably those separated from the admiral or commodore,
+which ship will make the seventh.--<i>Astley.</i></p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 377: Hakluyt, II. 671. Astley, I.
+221.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 378: Astley, I. 221.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>NARRATIVE[379].</p>
+
+<p>Worshipful, my hearty commendations to you premised.--By my
+last letter, dated 12th August from this place, I advertised you
+particularly of the accidents which had befallen our fleet till
+then. It now remains to relate our exertions for accomplishing
+our orders for endeavouring to join my Lord Thomas Howard, and
+the success we have had. We departed from hence on the 17th
+August, the wind not serving before. Next day I summoned a
+council by signal, on which the captains and masters of all the
+ships came on board, when I acquainted them with my commission,
+confirmed by the lords of her majestys council, and with the
+advertisement of Sir Edward Denny, that my lord had determined to
+remain 60 leagues west of Fayal, spreading his squadron north and
+south between 37&deg; 30' and 38&deg; 30' north. But, if we did
+not there find him, we were to repair to the islands of Flores
+and Corvo, where a pinnace would purposely wait our coming till
+the last day of August; with the intent, after that day, to
+repair to the coast of Spain, about the heighth of the rock
+[<i>of Lisbon?</i>], some twenty or thirty leagues off shore.
+This being advisedly considered, and having regard to the
+shortness of time occasioned by our long delay at this place, and
+the uncertainty of favourable weather for us, it was generally
+concluded, as the best and surest way to meet my lord, to bear up
+for the heighth of <i>the rock</i>, without making any stay upon
+the coast, and thence to make directly for the foresaid islands,
+which was accordingly fully agreed to and performed.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 379: In pursuance of our uniform plan, of
+drawing from the original sources, this article is an exact
+transcript from Hakluyt, only modernizing his antiquated language
+and orthography, and not copied from the abridgement of
+Astley.--.E]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 28th of August we had sight of the Burlings, and being on
+the 29th athwart of Peniche, and having a favourable wind, we
+directed our course west for the Azores, without making any stay
+off the coast of Portugal. The 30th we met the Red Rose, Captain
+Royden, formerly called the Golden Dragon, which had separated
+from my lord in a storm. He informed us of 50 sail of the king of
+Spains armada having sailed for the islands, but could not give
+us any intelligence of my lord, otherwise than supposing him to
+remain about the islands, wherefore we continued our course, the
+wind remaining favourable. The 4th of September we had sight of
+Tercera, and ranged along all the islands, both on their south,
+and north sides, for the space of four days, during which time we
+met with no ships whatever, so that we could learn no
+intelligence, either of my lord or of the fleet of the Indies;
+wherefore we directed our course to the west of Fayal, according
+to the instructions of Sir Edward Denny. When plying to the
+westwards on the 11th, we descried a sail from our main-top, and
+by two or three in the afternoon raised her hull, but the weather
+fell so calm that we could not fetch her. I therefore sent off my
+skiff well manned, and furnished with shot and swords, the
+Cherubim and the Margaret and John doing the like. Upon this the
+sail stood off again, and on the approach of night our boats lost
+sight of her and so returned. During this pursuit the Centurion
+was left astern, so that we missed her next morning, and spent
+all that day plying up and down in search of her: And, as all our
+ships were directed, in case of separation by stress of weather
+or other mischance, to meet and join at Flores, we, according to
+the instructions of Sir Edward Denny, proceeded for the purpose
+of finding my Lord Thomas Howard, and being in the heighth
+appointed, and not able to remain there in consequence of extreme
+tempests, which forced us to the isles of Flores and Corvo, which
+we made on the 14th in the morning, and there rejoined the
+Centurion. She informed us, that on the 12th day, being the same
+on which she lost us, she had met 45 sail of the fleet of the
+Indies.</p>
+
+<p>The same night, in consequence of this intelligence, we came
+to anchor between Flores and Corvo, and next morning at
+day-break, I convened a council of all the captains and masters
+on board my ship, by a signal flag. For satisfying our desire to
+learn some intelligence of my lord, as also for the purpose of
+procuring a supply of water, it was thought good to send our
+boats on shore armed, under the command of Captain Brothus;
+besides which, it was agreed, after our departure thence, to
+range along the south sides of the islands, that we might either
+procure some intelligence of my lord, or fall in with the fleet
+of the Indies; and, in case of missing both objects, to direct
+our course for Cape St Vincent. The boats being sent on shore,
+according to this determination, it chanced that the Costely,
+which rode outermost at our anchoring ground, having weighed to
+bring herself nearer among us to assist in protecting our boats,
+discovered two sail in opening the land, which we in the
+road-stead could not perceive. Upon this she fired a shot of
+warning, which caused us to <i>wave</i> all our boats back; and
+before they could recover their ships, the two ships seen by the
+Costely appeared to us, on which we made all sail towards them,
+and in a happy hour as it pleased God. We had no sooner cleared
+the land and spoken one of them, which was a bark belonging to
+Bristol, also seeking my lord ineffectually at the place
+appointed, when so violent a storm arose that we had been in
+great danger of perishing if we had continued in the road. This
+storm continued in its utmost violence for sixty hours, during
+which I was separated from all our fleet except the Cherubim, and
+Costely, which continued in company. After it subsided, sailing
+in among the islands, I viewed the road of Fayal, and finding no
+roaders there, I went thence for the isle of Tercera.</p>
+
+<p>On the 19th day of September in the morning, coming to
+Tercera, and intending to edge into the road, a tempest arose and
+so scanted the wind that we could not get in. Being accordingly
+driven to leeward, we fell in among some of the fleet of the
+Indies, which had been dispersed by the storm, and driven from
+the road. Upon this our ship and the two others then with me gave
+several chases, by which we parted company. Following up my
+chase, we made her strike and yield about noon, when she turned
+out to be a Portuguese, laden with hides, sarsa-parilla, and
+<i>anile</i> [Indigo.] At this instant we espied another, and
+taking our prize with us, followed and captured her before night.
+She was called the Conception, commanded by Francisco Spinola,
+and was laden with cochineal, raw hides, and certain raw silk:
+And as the sea was so tempestuous that we could in no way board
+her, neither by boats nor from the ship, so we kept her under our
+lee till a fit opportunity. That same night, a little before day,
+another ship joined company with us, supposing us and our two
+prizes to belong to their fleet, which we dissembled till
+morning.</p>
+
+<p>In the morning of the 20th, this new sail being somewhat shot
+a-head of us, and being anxious for the safe keeping of the two
+former, we purposed to cause our two prizes put out more sail, so
+as to keep near us while chasing the third, as our master
+insisted that they would follow us; owing to which, by the time
+we had caused this new one to yield, and had sent men on board to
+take possession, the Conception being far astern, and having got
+the wind of us, stood off with all her sails, so that we were
+forced to make a new chase after her, and had not the wind
+enlarged upon us we had lost her. The whole of this day was spent
+in this new pursuit, before we recovered her, and brought
+ourselves again in company with our other prizes; by which we
+lost the opportunity of that day, during which the weather served
+for boarding the Portuguese prize, which was in great distress,
+making request of us to take them on board, as they were ready to
+sink, as we could well perceive by their pumping incessantly, and
+in our judgment she went down that night.</p>
+
+<p>On the 21st the Conception sprung a leak also, which gained
+upon her notwithstanding every effort at the pumps, so that she
+could not be kept long above water. So I took out of her 42
+chests of cochineal and silk, leaving her to the sea with 11 feet
+water in her hold, and 4700 hides. The other prize, which we have
+brought into harbour, is the Nuestra Sennora de los Remedios,
+Francisco Alvares captain, laden with 16 chests of cochineal,
+certain fardels [or bales] of raw silk, and about 4000 hides.
+Upon the discharge of the goods, your honours shall be
+particularly advertised of the same. In boarding our prizes, such
+was the disorder of our men, that, besides rifling the persons of
+the Spaniards, they broke open the chests and purloined what
+money was in them; although I had given notice of my intention of
+going on board in person, to have taken a just account thereof in
+presence of three or four witnesses, putting the whole in safe
+custody, pursuant to the articles made in this behalf. And
+whereas certain sums of money taken from our men, which they had
+thus purloined and embezzled, together with other parcels brought
+on board my ship, amounting to 2129 pesos and a half, all of
+which the company demanded to have shared among them as due
+pillage, I refused this demand, and read to them openly at the
+mast the articles confirmed by my lord treasurer and my lord
+admiral, by which they ought to be directed in these things,
+declaring that it was not in my power to dispose thereof until
+the same were finally determined at home. Thereupon they
+mutinied, and grew at length to such fury, that they declared
+they would have it or else would break down the cabin. Seeing
+them ready to execute this threat, I was forced to yield, lest
+the great number of Spaniards we had on board might have taken
+the opportunity of rising against us; which, indeed, after the
+brawls of our men were appeased, they actually endeavoured to
+have done.</p>
+
+<p>By the last advice from Castile, the general of the king of
+Spains armada, lately put to sea, is ordered to join his fleet
+with that of the Indies, and to remain at Tercera till the 15th
+of October, waiting for six <i>pataches</i> with seven or eight
+millions of the royal treasure expected by that time: otherwise
+they are to wait their coming from the Havannah till January
+next, or until the kings farther pleasure shall be made known.
+These pataches are said to be of 300 tons burden each, carrying
+30 pieces of brass cannon, and are also reported to sail in a
+superior manner to any other ships. Before their coming to
+Flores, there perished of the fleet of the Indies eleven sail,
+among which was the admiral, and not one roan saved. It is
+likewise supposed by the Spaniards, that the storms we
+encountered at Flores and Tercera must have destroyed many more
+of them, of which indeed we were partly eye-witnesses. On the
+whole, therefore, what by the seas and our men of war, of the 75
+sail that came from the Havannah, I presume one half will not
+arrive in Spain.</p>
+
+<p>On the night of the 11th October, we came to anchor in
+Plymouth sound, and got up next morning with our prize into
+Catwater, for which God be praised: For so vehement a storm
+arose, that our prize was forced to cut away her main-mast,
+otherwise, her ground tackle being bad, she had been driven on
+shore by the violence of the storm. This was the main cause which
+induced me to put in here, where I now propose to discharge the
+goods without farther risk, and have certified thus much to my
+lord admiral, and therewith desire to receive the directions of
+my lords of the council together with yours, as my lord Thomas
+Howard is not yet returned. How the rest of our consorts, which
+separated from us, may have sped, or what prizes they may have
+taken, of which there is much hope by reason of the scattering of
+the West India fleet, I am as yet unable to say any thing. And
+thus, waiting your answer, and referring for all other matters to
+captain Furtho, the bearer hereof, I make an end, at Plymouth
+this 24th of October 1591.</p>
+
+<p>Your Worships loving Friend,<br>
+ ROBERT FLICKE.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XIII.</p>
+
+<p><i>Exploits of the English in several Expeditions and cruizing
+Voyages from 1589 to 1592; extracted from John Huighen van
+Linschoten</i>[380].</p>
+
+<p>PRELIMINARY REMARKS.</p>
+
+<p>The entire title of this article in Hakluyts Collection is, "A
+large testimony of John Huighen van Linschoten, Hollander,
+concerning the worthy exploits achieved by the right honourable
+the Earl of Cumberland, by Sir Martine Frobisher, Sir Richard
+Grenville, and diverse other English captains, about the isles of
+the Azores, and upon the coasts of Spain and Portugal, in the
+years 1589, 1590, 1591, &amp;c. recorded in his excellent
+discourse of voyages to the East and West Indies, cap. 96, 97,
+and 99." Of this article, the Editor of Astley gives the
+following account.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 380: Hakluyt, II. 674. Astley, I.
+225.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>"The author, John Huighen van Linschoten, left Goa with a
+fleet of ships, viz. The Santa Maria, Nuestra Sennora de la
+Concep&ccedil;ao, the San Christopher admiral, the San Thome
+which was the largest and most richly laden, and the Santa Cruz
+in which Linschoten sailed. It was extracted by Hakluyt from the
+96th, 97th, and 99th chapters of the first book of Linschotens
+Voyages in English, beginning at p. 171. This section is intended
+as a supplement to the English cruizing voyages already inserted,
+which fall within the period mentioned in the title; and is the
+more material, as the memoirs it contains not only confirm the
+most material facts related in these preceding voyages, but give
+a satisfactory account of many things which are there but
+imperfectly related, often continuing the history which in these
+breaks off abruptly, and bringing to light some remarkable
+achievements of our countrymen, of which otherwise no mention
+could be found in our voluminous naval transactions.</p>
+
+<p>"We are persuaded the reader will feel a secret joy in
+contemplating the great figure this nation made in these heroic
+times; owing to that universal zeal to promote the commerce and
+glory of England, which then prevailed among the ministers of the
+crown, as well as the people at large. We presume likewise, that
+this pleasure will be not a little enhanced by the consideration
+that these particulars were written by a foreigner, who is held
+in great reputation for his judgment and fidelity, and who has
+sounded the praise of our countrymen even beyond what has been
+done by our own historians. On the other hand, the reader will be
+no less concerned to find what immense treasures some of our
+adventurers lost, by unaccountably missing the fleets of which
+they went in search, when at the same time they were so near
+them, that it seemed almost impossible they should escape. This
+shews, after all, how uncertain is the meeting of ships at sea,
+and that two great fleets may sail almost close to one another,
+without having the least suspicion."--<i>Astley.</i></p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>The 22d of July 1589, about evening, being near the islands of
+Flores and Corvo, we perceived three ships making towards us,
+which came from under the land and put us in great fear, for they
+came close to our admiral and shot diverse times at him and at
+another ship of our company, whereby we perceived them to be
+English, for they bore the English flag at their main-tops, but
+none of them seemed above 60 tons burden. About evening they
+followed after us, and all night bore lanterns with candles
+burning at their sterns, although the moon shined. That night we
+passed hard by the island of Fayal; and next morning, being
+between the isle of St George on our right and the small isle of
+Graciosa on our left, we espied the three English ships still
+following us. They consulted together, upon which one of them
+sailed backwards, as if one ship had followed after us without
+company, and for a time that ship was out of sight; but in no
+long time afterwards, it returned to the other two, when they
+consulted again, and came all three together against our ship,
+because we were to leeward of all our ships, having the island of
+St George on one side instead of a sconce, [fort] thinking so to
+deal with us as to force us to run on shore, to which we were
+very near. In that manner they came bravely towards us, with
+their flags displayed, sounding their trumpets, and sailed at
+least three times about us, discharging at us their muskets and
+calivers and some pieces of great ordnance, doing us no harm in
+the hull of our ship, but spoiled all our sails and ropes, and so
+plagued us that no man durst put forth his head. When we shot off
+a piece of ordnance, we had at the least an hours work to load it
+again, there being a great noise and cry in our ship, as if we
+had been all cast away, whereupon the English began to mock us,
+calling out to us with many taunting words.</p>
+
+<p>In the mean time, the other ships that were in company with us
+hoisted all their sails, doing their best to bear away for
+Tercera, and not looking once behind them to help us, as not
+caring for us, but doubting they would be too late thither, and
+thinking they did enough if they could save themselves, whereby
+it may be easily seen what kind of company they keep with each
+other, and what kind of order is among them. In the end, finding
+small advantage against us, and little knowing in what fear we
+were, and also because we were not far from Tercera, the English
+left us; on which we were not a little rejoiced, as thinking
+ourselves risen from death to life, though we were not yet well
+assured nor void of fear, till we got to anchor in the road of
+Tercera, under the protection of the Portuguese fort, towards
+which we made all possible sail. On the other hand, we were still
+in great doubt, not knowing the situation of the island, or
+whether they were our friends or enemies; and we were so much the
+more doubtful, because we found no man of war there, nor any
+caravels of advice from Portugal as we expected, to have convoyed
+us home, or given us intelligence, as they usually do in that
+country. And, because the English had been so victorious in those
+parts, we suspected that it went not well with Spain. The
+inhabitants of Tercera were no less fearful than we, for on
+seeing our fleet they thought us to have been English, and that
+we came to over-run the island, because the three English ships
+came in along with us and had wound up their flags; upon which
+the islanders sent out two caravels to us that lay there, with
+advice from the king for such India ships as should come
+there.</p>
+
+<p>Those caravels came to view us, and perceiving what we were
+made after us; upon which the English ships left us and made
+towards the caravels, because the caravels thought them friends
+and shunned them not, as supposing them of our company: But we
+shot three or four times, and made signs to them that they should
+make towards the island, which they presently did. On perceiving
+that, the Englishmen made out to sea: and then the caravels sent
+on board us, saying that the people of the island were all in
+arms, having received advice from Portugal, that Sir Francis
+Drake was in readiness, and meant to come to the islands. They
+likewise brought us news of the overthrow of the Spanish armada
+which had gone against England, and that the English had been at
+the gates of Lisbon; for which reason it win the king's commands
+that we should put into the island of Tercera, and remain there
+under the protection of its castle, till we received further
+orders, as it was then thought too dangerous for us to continue
+our voyage to Lisbon. These news put all our fleet in great fear,
+making us look upon each other as not knowing what to do or say;
+as it was dangerous for us to put into the road, which lies open
+to the sea, so that although they had the kings commands for so
+doing, the India ships durst not anchor there, but only used to
+come thither, standing off and on, and sending their boats a-land
+for such necessaries as they wanted, without coming to anchor.
+But now necessity compelled us to this measure, owing to our
+fears for the three small English ships, also because of the
+kings orders, and because we understood that the Earl of
+Cumberland was not far from these islands with sundry ships of
+war. We made therefore a virtue of necessity, and entering the
+road of Tercera, anchored close under the castle, in waiting for
+orders from the king to pursue our voyage, it being then the 24th
+of July or St Jameses day.</p>
+
+<p>The 12th of August, the Earl of Cumberland, with six or seven
+ships of war, sailed past the island of Tercera; and to our great
+good fortune passed out of sight. We then set out in all haste,
+and, for our greater security, took along with us 400 Spaniards
+of those who were in garrison in the island, and made sail for
+Lisbon with a favourable wind, so that in eleven days we arrived
+in the river Tagus with great joy and triumph. For, had we been
+one day longer of getting into the river, we had all been taken
+by Captain Drake, [Sir Francis Drake] who came before Cascais
+with 40 ships, at the very time when we cast anchor in the Tagus
+under the guard of several gallies.</p>
+
+<p>While I remained in Tercera, the Earl of Cumberland came to St
+Marys to take in fresh water and other victuals; but the
+inhabitants would not suffer him to have it, and wounded both the
+earl himself and several of his men, so that they were forced to
+depart without having any thing. Likewise, while I was at
+Tercera, the same earl came to the island of Graciosa, where he
+went to land in person with seven or eight others, demanding
+certain beasts, poultry, and other victuals, with wine and fresh
+water, which they willingly gave him, after which he departed
+without doing any injury, for which the inhabitants were very
+thankful, praising his courtesy and faithfulness to his promise.
+The earl came likewise at that time to Fayal, where at the first
+they begun to resist him; but by reason of some controversy among
+themselves, they let him land, when he razed the castle, throwing
+all the cannon into the sea, and took with him certain caravels
+and ships that lay in the road, with all such provisions as he
+wanted, and then departed. Thereupon, the king caused the
+principal actors in that transaction to be punished, and went
+thither a company of soldiers, which went from Tereera, with all
+kind of warlike ammunition and great shot, rebuilding the cattle
+the better to defend the island, and no more trusting to the
+Portuguese inhabitants.</p>
+
+<p>The 9th of October 1589[381], there arrived in Tereera
+fourteen ships from the Spanish West Indies, laden with
+cochineal, hides, gold, silver, pearls, and other rich wares.
+When they departed from the harbour of the Havannah, they were
+fifty in company; of which eleven sunk in the channel [of
+Florida] by reason of foul weather, and all the rest were
+scattered and separated from each other in a storm. Next day
+there came another ship of the same fleet, which sailed close
+under the island endeavouring to get into the road; when she was
+met by an English whip that had not above three cast pieces [of
+ordnance], while the Spaniards had twelve. They fought a long
+while together, which we in the island could distinctly see. The
+governor of the island sent out two boats filled with musketeers
+to aid the Spanish ship; but before they could get up to her
+assistance; the English had shot her below water, so that we saw
+her sink into the sea with all her sails up, and she entirely
+disappeared. The Englishmens boat saved the Captain and about
+thirty others, but not one pennyworth of the goods, which were to
+the value of 200,000 ducats, in gold, silver, and pearls. All the
+rest of the crew were drowned, to the number of about fifty
+persons, among whom were some friars and women, whom the English
+could not save. The English set all the people they had saved on
+shore, and then sailed away. The 27th of the same month of
+October 1589, these fourteen ships sailed from Tercera, for
+Seville; and on coming to the coast of Spain, they were all taken
+by some English ships that watched for them, two only excepted
+which made their escape, all the rest being carried to
+England.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 381: In Hakluyt, all that now follows is
+marked as extracted from the 99th chapter of
+Linschoten.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>About this time, the earl of Cumberland, with one of the
+queens ships and five or six others, kept hovering about the
+islands, and came oft-times close to the island of Tercera, and
+to the road of Angra, so near that the people on land could
+easily count all the men on his decks, and could even distinguish
+one from another; they of the island not once shooting at them,
+which they might easily have done, as they were often within
+musket-shot of the town and fort. He continued in these parts for
+the space of two months, sailing round about the islands, and
+landed in Graciosa and Fayal, as I have already mentioned. He
+took several ships and caravels, which he sent off to England, so
+that the people of the islands durst not put forth their heads.
+At one time, about three or four days after the earl had been at
+the island of Fayal, and was departed from thence, there arrived
+there six ships of the Indies, the general of which was one
+<i>Juan Dorives</i>, which landed in that island four millions of
+gold and silver[382]. Then, being much in fear of the English,
+and having refreshed themselves with all speed, they set sail and
+arrived safe at San Lucar, without meeting an enemy, to the great
+good luck of the Spaniards and bad fortune of the English; for,
+within less than two days after the gold and silver was again
+laden into the Spanish ships, the earl of Cumberland sailed past
+the island again; so that if he had once got sight of these
+valuable ships, without doubt he had got them all, as the
+Spaniards themselves confessed.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 382: The denomination is not mentioned,
+perhaps <i>pezos</i>, or what we call dollars.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In the month of November, two great ships arrived in Tercera,
+being the admiral and vice-admiral of the fleet laden with
+silver, which had been separated from the fleet in a great storm,
+and were in great jeopardy and distress, ready to sink, being
+forced to use all their pumps, and so terrified, that they wished
+a thousand times to have met the English, to whom they would
+willingly have given all the silver, and every thing they had on
+board, only to preserve their lives. Although the earl still
+hovered about the islands, yet did he not meet with these ships,
+which got with much labour and difficulty into the road of Angra,
+where with all speed they unladed and landed about five millions
+in silver, all in great pieces or ingots of 8 or 12 great pounds,
+so that the whole quay lay covered with plates and chests of
+silver, full of pieces of eight rials, most wonderful to behold:
+Each million being worth ten hundred thousand ducats, besides
+gold, pearls, and other precious stones, which were not
+registered. The admiral and chief commander of these ships, and
+of the whole fleet to which they belonged, was <i>Alvaro Flores
+de Quin Quiniones</i>, who was sick of the Neapolitan disease,
+and was brought to land; and of which malady he died soon
+afterwards at Seville. He had with him the kings commission under
+the great seal, giving him full authority as general and
+commander in chief upon the seas, over all fleets and ships, and
+in all places, lands, and islands, on shore wherever he came;
+wherefore the governor of Tercera shewed him much honour, and
+between them it was concerted, seeing the weakness of the ships
+and the danger from the English, that they should send the ships
+first empty of treasure to Seville or Lisbon, under a guard of
+soldiers, when the king might give orders afterwards to fetch the
+silver home under safe convoy. The said admiral Alvaro Flores
+staid there, under colour of taking care of the silver, but
+chiefly because of his disease and fear of the English. He had
+for his part alone, above the value of 50,000 ducats in pearls,
+which he shewed us, and sought to sell or barter them with us for
+spices or bills of exchange. These two ships sailed from Tercera
+with three or four hundred men, including those who came with
+them from the Indies and soldiers; but while at sea in a storm,
+the admiral split and sunk outright, not one man being saved; and
+the vice-admiral, after cutting away her masts, ran aground hard
+by Setubal, where she broke in pieces, some of the men saving
+themselves by swimming, who brought the news of all the rest
+being drowned.</p>
+
+<p>In the same month of November 1589, there came two great ships
+out of the Spanish Indies, and when within half a mile of the
+road of Tercera, they were met with by an English ship which
+fought them both together for a long while, and took them both.
+About seven or eight months before, there came an English ship to
+Tercera, pretending to be a Frenchman come for traffic, and began
+to load woad, but being discovered was confiscated to the king,
+both ship and cargo, and the men all made prisoners, yet were
+allowed to roam up and down to get their livings, by labouring
+like slaves, being considered in as safe custody in the island at
+large as if in a prison. But at length, upon a Sunday, they all
+went behind the hills called <i>Bresil</i>, where they found a
+fishing boat, in which they rowed out to sea to the ships of the
+Earl of Cumberland, who chanced for their good fortune to come to
+the island, and anchored with his ships about half a mile from
+the road of Angra, close to two small islands about a bare shot
+from the shore of Tercera, which are full of goats, deer, and
+sheep, belonging to the inhabitants of Tercera. These sailors
+knew this well, wherefore they rowed to these islands in their
+boats, whence they took as many goats and sheep as they needed,
+which was well seen by those of the town and main island, but
+they durst not go forth to hinder them. By this exploit, there
+only remained behind the master and merchant of the detained
+English ship. This master had a brother-in-law in England, who,
+on hearing of his brothers imprisonment, got a licence from the
+queen to fit out a ship, with which to endeavour to recover his
+losses by cruizing against the Spaniards, by which to redeem his
+brother from imprisonment in Tercera, and it was he who took the
+two Spanish ships before the town: The before-mentioned merchant,
+who was my intimate acquaintance, was standing on the shore along
+with me, looking at them at the time. When these ships were
+taken, which were worth 300,000 ducats, the brother sent all the
+men on shore, except only two of the principal gentlemen, whom he
+kept to give in exchange for his brother; and by the pilot of one
+of the captured ships he sent a letter to the governor of
+Tercera, offering to send the two gentlemen on shore if his
+brother were delivered up, otherwise he would carry them
+prisoners into England, which indeed he did, as the governor
+would not deliver up his brother, saying the gentlemen might make
+that suit to the king of Spain. We invited that Spanish pilot to
+supper with us, and the Englishmen likewise, when he related to
+us the particulars of the fight, much commending the order and
+manner in which the English fought, as also their courteous
+behaviour to him: But, in the end, the English merchant stole
+away in a French ship, without paying any ransom.</p>
+
+<p>In January 1590, there arrived one ship alone at Tercera from
+the Spanish West Indies, bringing news that a fleet of an hundred
+sail, which had set out from the Indies, were driven by a storm
+on the coast of Florida, where they were all cast away, vast
+riches and many men being lost, and she alone had escaped with
+the news. Thus by account, of 200 ships which were certainly
+known to have sailed out of New Spain, San Domingo, Havannah,
+Cabo Verde, Brazil, Guinea, &amp;c. in the year 1589, for Spain
+and Portugal, not above 14 or 15 of them arrived safe, all the
+rest having either been foundered, cast away, or taken. In the
+same month of January, there came to Tercera from Seville, 15 or
+16 ships, mostly fliboats of the Low Countries, and some ships of
+Britanny, that were arrested in Spain. These came out full of
+soldiers and well provided with guns and ammunition, to lade home
+the silver that lay in Tercera, and to bring home Alvaro Flores
+into Spain, by order of the king. As at this time of the year
+there are always great storms about these islands, the
+above-mentioned ships durst not enter the road of Tercera, for it
+then blew so great a storm that some of the ships, which had
+entered the road, had been forced to cut away their masts, and
+were in much danger of being lost, and among these a ship of
+Biscay was actually driven upon the coast and dashed to pieces,
+but all the men were saved. The other ships were obliged to keep
+to sea and to separate from each other, allowing themselves to
+drive at the mercy of the winds and waves till the 15th of March,
+as in all that time they had not one day of good weather in which
+to anchor, so that they endured much distress, heartily cursing
+both the silver and the island.</p>
+
+<p>When this storm was passed, they fell in with an English ship
+of about 40 tons, which by reason of the heavy wind could not
+hoist all her sails, so that they took her. Hoisting her English
+ensign on the stern of their admiral, the ships came now as
+proudly into the road-stead of Tercera as if they had defeated
+the whole navy of England: But, just as their admiral was
+entering the road, trickt out with the English flag on his stern,
+there came by chance two English ships past the island, which
+paid her so well for her bravity, that she had to cry out
+<i>misericordia</i>. Had she been a mile farther out, the English
+ships doubtless would have taken her; but getting under the guns
+of the fortress, which began to play upon the English ships, they
+were forced to leave her and put farther out to sea, after having
+slain five or six of the Spaniards.</p>
+
+<p>The Englishmen taken in the small ship were put under hatches,
+coupled together in irons; and, after they had been three or four
+days prisoners, a Spanish ensign in the ship, who had a brother
+slain in the armada that went against England, took a fancy to
+revenge his brothers death, and to shew his own manhood on these
+captives; whereupon, taking a poinard, he stabbed six of them to
+the heart as they sat below in irons. Two others of them
+perceiving this atrocious action, clasped each other about the
+body, and leapt into the sea, where they were drowned. This
+infamous act was much disliked by all the Spaniards, so that the
+assassin was carried prisoner to Lisbon; upon which the king of
+Spain commanded him to be sent to England, that the queen might
+use him according to her pleasure; which sentence, at the earnest
+request of the friends of the murderer, was commuted to an order
+for his being beheaded; but on Good Friday, when the cardinal was
+going to mass, the captains and commanders made such intercession
+for him, that he was finally pardoned. I thought good to note
+this incident, that the bloody and dishonourable minds of the
+Spaniards to those who were under subjection to them, might be
+made manifest.</p>
+
+<p>The same two English ships, which followed the Spanish admiral
+till he took shelter under the guns of the fort, put out to sea,
+where they met with the only remaining vessel of that fleet which
+had been scattered in the storm, all the rest being now in the
+road. This small ship they took, sending all me men on shore
+unhurt; but it they had known what had been done to the English
+captives, I believe they would have taken vengeance, as many an
+innocent soul afterwards paid for the atrocity of the Spanish
+ensign. The ship now taken by the English, was the same which had
+been formerly confiscated at Tercera, and was sold to the
+Spaniards that then came from the Indies, who sailed in her to
+San Lucar; where it also was arrested by the duke, and appointed
+to go along with the others, to fetch the silver from Tercera, as
+it was a good sailer; but it was the meanest of all that fleet.
+By this means, it was taken from the Spaniards and carried to
+England, where the owners got it again when they least
+expected.</p>
+
+<p>On the 19th March 1590, having laden the kings silver and
+received Alvaro Flores with his company, and good provision of
+necessaries, warlike ammunitions and soldiers, the
+before-mentioned 19 ships sailed from Tercera, firmly resolved,
+as they set forth, to fight valiantly to the last man, before
+they would yield or lose their riches. Though they intended to
+make for San Lucar, the wind forced them to Lisbon, as if willing
+to keep them there in safety, although Alvaro Flores would have
+persisted in forcing his way to San Lucar against the wind and
+weather. But, constrained by adverse wind, and importunately
+urged by the mariners, who protested they would require their
+losses and damages from him, he consented to put in at Lisbon,
+whence the silver was conveyed by land to Seville. At this time,
+there lay 20 English ships off Cape St Vincent, to watch for this
+fleet; so that if they had gone forwards for Sun Lucar, which
+they certainly had done if the wind had been fair, they must have
+fallen into the hands of the English: They may say, therefore,
+that the wind lent them a fortunate voyage on this occasion. If
+the English had met them, they had surely been in great danger,
+and possibly few of them had escaped, on account of the fear
+which they were then in of the English; as fortune, or God
+rather, was then wholly against them, which was enough to make
+the Spaniards out of heart, and to inspire the English with the
+greater boldness; for being victorious, they were stout and
+valiant, and seeing all their enterprizes successful, they were
+become lords and masters of the sea, and needed to care for no
+man, as well appears from this short narrative.</p>
+
+<p>On the 7th of August 1590, a fleet of 20 English ships
+appeared off Tercera, five of them being ships belonging to the
+queen, of which one Martin Frobisher was general, as we
+afterwards learnt. They came purposely to watch for the fleet of
+the Spanish West Indies, and for the India ships, and the ships
+of the other countries in the West. This put the islanders in
+great fear, especially those of Fayal, where the English sent a
+trumpeter to the governor, to ask certain supplies of wine,
+flesh, and other provisions for their money. This request was not
+only refused, but they shot the messenger and slew him, which
+gave the English much displeasure, so that they sent another
+message desiring them to look to themselves and keep sure guard,
+as they meant to come and visit them per force. The governor sent
+back for answer, that he was there in behalf of the king of
+Spain, and would do his best to keep them out, as in duty bound;
+but nothing was done after all, though the people of Fayal were
+in great fear, sending to Tercera for aid, whence they had some
+barks with powder and other ammunition of war, with some Biscuit
+and other necessary provisions.</p>
+
+<p>The 30th of August, certain news came from Portugal, that 80
+ships had sailed from <i>the Groin</i>, (Corunna) laden with
+victuals, ammunition of war, money, and soldiers, bound for
+Britanny in aid of the catholic leaguers of France against the
+king of Navarre. At this time likewise, two Netherland hulks,
+when half seas over on their way from Portugal to Tercera, were
+met by four English ships belonging to the queen, commanded by
+Sir John Hawkins, by whom they were stopped; but he let them go
+again uninjured. According to the report of these Netherlanders,
+each of these ships carried 80 pieces of ordnance. They reported
+likewise, that Captain Drake (Sir Francis) lay with 40 English
+ships in the channel, watching for the fleet from Corunna; and
+that ten other English ships lay off Cape St Vincent, that if any
+ships escaped Frobisher at the islands, they might intercept
+them. These tidings greatly alarmed the islanders, lest if the
+English failed of catching the Spanish fleet, and got nothing by
+them, they might fall upon the islands, that they might not go
+home empty handed; whereupon they held strict watch, sending home
+advice to the king of what intelligence they had.</p>
+
+<p>The 1st September, there came a Portuguese ship from
+Pernambuco in Brazil to the island of St Michael, with news, that
+the admiral of the Portuguese fleet from the East Indies, having
+missed St Helena, was forced to put into Pernambuco, though
+expressly forbidden by the king under a heavy penalty, because of
+the worms in that haven which greatly spoil the ships. The same
+ship, in which was the Admiral Bernardin Ribero, sailed the
+former year 1589 from Lisbon for India with five ships in her
+company, four only of which got to India, the fifth being never
+heard of, so that she was believed lost. The other four returned
+safe into Portugal, though the admiral was much spoiled, as he
+met two English ships, which fought him a long while and slew
+many of his men, yet he escaped from them at last. The 5th of the
+same month, there arrived at Tercera a caravel belonging to
+Corvo, bringing 50 men who had been spoiled by the English, who
+set them ashore on the island of Corvo. They had been taken in a
+ship coming from the Spanish West Indies, and reported that the
+English had taken four other West India ships, and a caravel
+having the king of Spains letters of advice for the Portuguese
+ships coming from the East Indies; and that, including those they
+had taken, the English had at least 40 ships together, so that
+nothing could escape them; therefore, that the Portuguese ships
+coming from India durst not put into the islands, but took their
+course between 40&deg; and 42&deg; of N. latitude, whence they
+shaped their course for Lisbon, shunning likewise Cape St
+Vincent, as otherwise they could not look for safety, the sea
+being quite full of English ships. Wherefore, the king advised
+that the fleet now at Havannah in the Spanish West Indies, and
+ready to sail for Spain, should remain till the next year,
+because of the great danger of falling into the hands of the
+English. This was no small charge and hindrance to the fleet, as
+the ships that remain long at the Havannah consume themselves and
+in a manner eat up one another, from the great number of their
+people, and the great scarcity and dearness of every thing at
+that place; wherefore many of the ships adventured rather to
+hazard themselves singly for the voyage than to stay there; all
+of which fell into the hands of the English, and many of their
+men were brought to Tercera: So that we could see nothing else
+for a whole day but spoiled men set on shore, some from one ship
+and some from another, it being pitiful to see and hear them all,
+cursing the English and their own bad fortunes, with those who
+had been the cause of provoking the English to war, and
+complaining of the small remedy and order taken therein by the
+officers of the king of Spain.</p>
+
+<p>The 19th of the same month of September, a caravel arrived at
+Tercera from Lisbon, bringing one of the kings officers to cause
+lade the goods that were saved from the Malacca ship, and for
+which we had so long tarried there, and to send them to Lisbon.
+At the same time Don Alonso de Ba&ccedil;an sailed from Corunna
+for the Azores with 40 great ships of war, to wait for the fleets
+from the Spanish and Portuguese Indies, which, along with our
+Malacca goods when laden, he was to convoy to the Tagus. But,
+when he had been some days at sea, always with a contrary wind,
+only two of his ships could get to the islands, all the rest
+being scattered. When these two ships arrived at Tercera and did
+not find the fleet, they immediately returned in search of it. In
+the mean time the king changing his mind, sent orders for the
+commercial ships to remain in the Indies, and for Don Alonso
+Ba&ccedil;an to return to Corunna, which he did accordingly,
+never once coming near the Azores except the two ships already
+mentioned; for he well knew that the English lay near Corvo, but
+would not visit them, and so returned to Corunna. Thus our goods
+from Malacca remained unshipped, and were trussed up again,
+having to wait some other opportunity.</p>
+
+<p>The 23d October in this same year 1590, a caravel came from
+Portugal to Tercera, bringing advice that of the five ships which
+sailed in that year from Lisbon for the East Indies, four of them
+had returned to Portugal after being four months at sea: the
+admiral ship, in which was the viceroy Mathias de Albuquerque,
+having only got to India after being eleven months at sea without
+ever seeing land, as was afterwards learnt by news over-land,
+having arrived in great misery at Malacca. In this ship there
+died 280 men during the voyage out, according to a note sent by
+the viceroy to the cardinal at Lisbon, with the names and
+sirnames of every man, likewise giving a narrative of the voyage,
+and the misery they had endured. This obstinate perseverance was
+entirely occasioned by the anxiety of Albuquerque not to lose the
+government of Portuguese India, as he had sworn to lose his life
+or arrive in India, which indeed he did to the great danger and
+loss of his company, many of whom paid with their lives, and that
+chiefly owing to want of provisions. Albuquerque knew well,
+however, if he had returned to Portugal with the other ships,
+that he would have been deprived of his government, as the people
+began already to murmur at his proud and lofty demeanour. Among
+other instances of his pride, he caused to be painted over his
+gallery, the figure of Fortune and his own picture, with a staff
+standing by, as if threatening Fortune, with this motto, <i>Quero
+que vencas</i>; that is, <i>I will have thee to
+overcome</i>[383]. When this was read by the cardinal and other
+gentlemen, who accompanied him on board out of respect, they
+thought it an instance of foolish arrogance: But this is no
+strange matter among the Portuguese, as they above all others
+<i>must let the fool peep out of their sleeves</i>, especially
+when in authority. I knew Mathias de Albuquerque in India, when a
+military officer, then beloved of all men and behaving himself
+courteously to all, so that he was unanimously desired to be
+their viceroy. But, having received his patent with full power
+and authority, he so much changed from his former behaviour,
+that, by reason of his pride, all began to fear and curse him,
+even before his departure from Lisbon, such charges being often
+seen in many men, when advanced to high state and
+dignity[384].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 383: De Faria says, "The season was so far
+advanced when he set out, that it was generally believed he would
+not accomplish the voyage. But he caused himself to be painted on
+his colours standing on Fortune; and, setting these up in his
+ship, declared he would perform the voyage in spite of her, and
+did so" As De Faria does not reflect upon him for this, it may be
+presumed, he thought it merely an indication of an heroic
+disposition.--Astley, I. 231. a.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 384: De Faria gives a very advantageous
+character of this viceroy, saying that he was one of the most
+deserving of those who enjoyed that high station. He left 80,000
+ducats in the treasury, besides jewels of Ceylon of great value.
+He thought no one could cheat him; yet, on purpose to undeceive
+him, a soldier drew his pay three several times by as many names.
+He was of middle stature, and lame of one foot, but not so in
+disposition and manners, being a good Christian and well-bred
+gentleman.--Astley, I. 231, b.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 20th January 1591, news was brought from Portugal to
+Tercera, that the English had taken a ship sent by the king to
+the Portuguese Indies, carrying advice to the viceroy of the
+return of the four ships to Portugal; which captured ship was
+stuffed full of goods, in consequence of their return, besides
+having 500,000 ducats in ryals of eight. It sailed from Lisbon in
+November 1590, and fought the English a long time, but had at
+length to yield, and was carried to England, where all the men
+were set free and returned to Lisbon, at which place the captain
+was thrown into prison, but afterwards justified himself and was
+released, as he told me personally. The English took, at the same
+time, a ship coming from the Mina, laden with gold, and two ships
+laden with pepper and other spices, bound for Italy, their pepper
+only being worth 170,000 ducats. All these rich prizes were
+carried clear off into England.</p>
+
+<p>In July 1591, an earthquake commenced in the island of
+Tercera, which continued from the 26th of that month to the 12th
+of August, or 18 days, during all which time no person durst
+remain within a house, but all fled into the fields in terrible
+consternation, fasting and praying almost incessantly. Many
+houses fell down, and in particular a town called Villa Franca
+was almost utterly destroyed, all its houses and cloisters thrown
+down, and several people slain. In some places the ground rose
+up, the cliffs were removed from their places, and even some
+hills were thrown down and levelled with the adjoining plains.
+The earthquake was so violent, that the ships in the road and in
+the adjoining sea, were shaken as if the whole earth had been
+agitated to its centre. In one place a fountain sprung from the
+ground, whence clear water flowed in abundance for four days, and
+then ceased. All this time a noise was heard under ground as of
+thunder, or as if all the devils in hell had been assembled
+there, by which many died of fear. Four several times the island
+of Tercera shook with such violence as if it had turned upon its
+foundations, yet was it not overwhelmed. Earthquakes are common
+in these islands, as about 20 years before there happened just
+such an earthquake, when a hill, close to the town of Villa
+Franca, fell down and buried all the town with earth, by which
+many people were overwhelmed and slain.</p>
+
+<p>The 25th of August, the kings armada from Ferrol arrived in
+Tercera, consisting of 30 ships of war belonging to Biscay,
+Portugal, and Spain, together with 10 Dutch fliboats that were
+pressed at Lisbon into the service, besides other small vessels
+and <i>pataxos</i> to serve as advice-boats, and to scour the
+seas for intelligence. This fleet came to wait for and convoy the
+ships from the Spanish Indies; and the fliboats were for the
+purpose of bringing home to Lisbon our goods that were saved in
+the lost ship from Malacca. This fleet arrived at the island of
+Corvo on the 13th of September[385], where the English then lay
+waiting for the fleet from the Spanish Indies, with a squadron of
+about 16 ships. Some or most of the Spanish ships were already
+come to the Azores, and the English were in great hopes to have
+taken them: But, on perceiving the Spanish fleet of war to be so
+strong, the lord Thomas Howard, who was admiral of the English,
+gave orders to his fleet not to assail the Spaniards, and on no
+account to separate from him without special orders[386]. Yet the
+vice-admiral, Sir Richard Grenville, in his ship the Revenge,
+bore into the Spanish fleet, and shot among them doing much harm,
+thinking that the rest of the English ships would have followed
+him, which they did not, but left him there and sailed away, the
+reason of which could not be known. Perceiving this, the
+Spaniards boarded the Revenge with 7 or 8 ships, but she bravely
+withstood them all, fighting with them at the least 12 hours
+without ceasing, and sunk two of them, one a double fliboat of
+600 tons, and admiral of the fliboats, the other a ship of
+Biscay. In the end, however, in consequence of the overwhelming
+number that came against her, the Revenge was taken, but to the
+heavy loss of the Spaniards, who lost in the fight, either slain
+or drowned, above 400 men, while 100 of the English were slain.
+Sir Richard was himself wounded in the brain, of which he
+afterwards died.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 385: It is probable, from this date, that
+the arrival of the fleet at Tercera on the 25th August, as above,
+is an error; and that it only then left Ferrol; on its voyage for
+Tercera.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 386: See the English account of these
+events in the immediately preceding section.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Sir Richard, after the Revenge yielded, was carried on board
+the San Paulo, the ship in which was Don Alonso de Ba&ccedil;an,
+the admiral of the Spanish fleet, where his wounds were dressed
+by the Spanish surgeons, but Don Alonso would neither see nor
+speak to him. All the other captains went to visit and comfort
+him in his hard fortune, wondering at his courage and constancy,
+as he shewed no signs of faintness, not even changing colour:
+But, feeling his death approaching, he spoke in Spanish to the
+following purport: "Here die I Richard Grenville, with a joyous
+and quiet mind, having ended my life as a true soldier ought to
+do, fighting for my country, my queen, my religion, and my
+honour: so that my soul most joyfully departeth from this body,
+and shall always leave behind the everlasting fame of a true and
+valiant soldier, having done my duty as became me." When he had
+finished these, or such like words, he gave up the ghost with
+great and unshaken courage, no man being able to perceive the
+least sign of concern. This sir Richard Grenville was a great and
+rich gentleman of England, having large yearly revenues, but of a
+daring and intrepid disposition, and much affected to warlike
+enterprize; insomuch that he voluntarily offered his services to
+the queen. He had performed many valiant deeds, and was greatly
+feared among the islands, his intrepidity being well known to
+all. He was, however, of a severe and rigid character, so that
+his own people feared and hated him for his fierceness, and spoke
+very hardly of him. For, when they in the Revenge first fell in
+among the Spanish fleet, they had their mainsail in readiness,
+and might possibly have got away, as it was one of the best
+sailing ships of the English; and, as the master perceived that
+the rest of the squadron had left them, and did not follow up to
+their support, he gave orders to <i>cut the mainsail</i>, that
+they likewise should make off: But sir Richard threatened him and
+all the rest of the crew, that if any man laid hold of the
+mainsail with that intent, he would cause him to be hung up
+immediately; so that in fact they were compelled to fight, and in
+the end were taken. He was of so hardy a complexion, that, while
+among the Spanish officers, while at dinner or supper with them,
+he would swallow three or four bumpers of wine, and then by way
+of bravado, crush the glasses between his teeth and swallow them,
+so that the blood ran out of his mouth, yet without any apparent
+harm to him. This was told me by several credible persons, who
+had often stood by and beheld him.</p>
+
+<p>The Englishmen who remained alive in the Revenge, as the
+captain of the soldiers, the master, and others, were distributed
+among the different ships by which she was taken. On taking
+possession of her, a fight had almost taken place between the
+Biscaineers and Portuguese who boarded her, both claiming the
+honour of having boarded first, so that there grew a great noise
+and quarrel among them, one seizing the chief ensign, and the
+other the flag, the captains and every one holding their own. The
+ships which had laid her on board were altogether out of order,
+and sore shattered, having many of their men hurt, so that they
+had to come to Tercera to be repaired. On their arrival, I and my
+chamber companion, desirous to hear the news, went on board one
+of the twelve apostles, or great ships of Biscay, whose captain
+was <i>Bartandono</i>[387], who had been general of the
+Biscaineers in the great armada that went against England. On
+seeing us, he called us into his gallery, where he received us
+courteously, being then at dinner along with the English captain,
+who was dressed in a suit of black velvet, but could not tell us
+any thing, as he could speak no other language but English and
+Latin, which last Bartandono could speak a little. The English
+captain was permitted by the governor of Tercera to land with his
+sword by his side, and was in our lodging visiting the Englishman
+who belonged to the ship of which the sailors escaped, as I
+related before. This captain wrote a letter, in which he related
+all the particulars of the fight, and left it with that English
+merchant who resided in the lodging with us, to forward it to the
+lord admiral of England. The captain went afterwards to Lisbon,
+where he was honourably received, and sent, to Setubal, whence he
+sailed for England with the other prisoners. The master likewise
+of the Revenge came on shore, with licence from Bartandono, and
+lived in the same lodgings with us. He had at the least 10 or 12
+wounds, in his head and body, of which he afterwards died on his
+voyage from the islands to Lisbon.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 387: Named Britandona in the foregoing
+section.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The Spanish navy remained at the Azores till the end of
+September, to assemble all the fleet together, which in the end
+amounted to the number of 140 sail in all, including the ships of
+war and those of the Indies. When all ready to sail, there arose
+suddenly so violent a storm, that the islanders declared nothing
+like it had been seen in the memory of man. The sea raged with
+such fury as if it would have swallowed up the islands, the waves
+rising higher than the cliffs, so that it was amazing to behold
+them, and living fish were thrown upon the land. The storm lasted
+for seven or eight successive days, veering about to every point
+of the compass at least twice or three times during its
+continuance, with a continual tempestuous force most terrible to
+behold, even by us who were on shore, much more to those who were
+on the sea, and exposed to its fury. During this dreadful storm,
+above 12 ships were dashed to pieces on the coasts and rocks of
+the island of Tercera all round about, so that nothing was to be
+heard but weeping, lamenting, and wailing, now a ship being
+broken in pieces in one place, then another at a different place,
+and all the men drowned. For 20 days after the storm, nothing
+else was done but fishing for dead men that were continually
+driving on shore. Among the rest, the Revenge was cast away on a
+ledge of rocks near the isle of Tercera, where she split to
+pieces and sunk, having in her 70 men, Gallegos and Biscaineers
+and others, with some of the captive English, one only of whom
+got upon the rock alive, having his head and body all wounded.
+Being brought on shore, he told us the sad tidings, and desired
+to be shriven, after which he presently died. The Revenge had in
+her several fine brass pieces of artillery, which were all sunk
+in the sea; but the islanders had great hopes of weighing them up
+next summer.</p>
+
+<p>Among those ships that were cast away about Tercera, was one
+of those fliboats which had been arrested in Portugal for the
+kings service, named the White Dove, the master of which was one
+Cornelius Martenson of Schiedam in Holland, having in her 100
+soldiers, as was the case in all the rest. Being overruled by the
+Spanish captain, so that he could not be master of his own ship,
+he was sailing about at the mercy of the winds and waves, and
+came at length in sight of Tercera, whereupon the Spaniards,
+thinking all their safety consisted in putting into the roads,
+compelled the master and pilot to make towards the island; and
+when they remonstrated, saying they would certainly be cast away
+and all destroyed, the Spanish captain called him a drunkard and
+heretic, and striking him with a staff, commanded him to do as he
+was ordered. Seeing this, the master said, "Well then, since it
+is your desire to be cast away, I can lose but one life." He then
+made sail for the land, which was on that side of the island
+where there is nothing but rocks and stones as high as mountains,
+most terrible to behold. Several of the inhabitants stood on the
+cliffs with long ropes, having bundles of cork fastened to one
+end, to throw down to the men, that they might lay hold of them
+and save their lives. Few of them, however, got near enough for
+this, as most of them were dashed to pieces before they could
+reach the rocks forming the wall-like shore. At this time, when
+approaching the rocks, the master, who was an old man, called his
+son who sailed with him, and having embraced and taken a last
+farewell, the good old father desired his son to take no note of
+him, but to seek and save himself. "Son, said he, thou art young,
+and mayst have some hope of saving thy life; but I am old and it
+is no great matter what becomes of me." Thus, shedding many
+tears, as may well be conceived in such a situation, the ship
+struck the rocks and went in pieces, the father and son falling
+into the sea on different sides of the vessel, each laying hold
+on what came first to hand, but to no purpose. The sea was so
+high and furious, that all were drowned, except fourteen or
+fifteen who saved themselves by swimming, with their legs and
+arms half broken and sore hurt. Among these was the Dutch masters
+son and four other Dutch boys; all the rest of the Spaniards and
+sailors, with captain and master, being drowned. What heart so
+hard as not to melt at so grievous a sight, especially
+considering the beastly and ignorant insolence of the Spaniards?
+From this instance, it may be conceived how the other ships sped,
+as we indeed partly beheld, and were informed by those few who
+were saved, some of whom were our countrymen.</p>
+
+<p>On the other islands the loss was no less than at Tercera, two
+ships were cast away on the island of St George; two on Pico;
+three on Graciosa. Besides those, there were seen everywhere
+round about, many pieces of broken ships and other things,
+floating towards the islands, with which the sea was everywhere
+covered, most pitiful to behold. Four ships were cast away on the
+island of St Michael, and three more were sunk between Tercera
+and St Michael, from which not one man was saved, though they
+were seen and heard to cry out for aid. All the rest were
+dismasted and driven out to sea, all torn and rent; so that of
+the whole armada and merchant ships, 140 in all, only 32 or 33
+arrived in Spain and Portugal, and these with great pain, misery
+and labour, not any two together, but this day one, to-morrow
+another, and next day a third. All the rest were cast away about
+the Azores islands, or foundered at sea, whereby may be judged
+what loss was incurred; as the loss was esteemed greater by many,
+than had been sustained in the great armada that went against
+England. It may very well be considered that this terrible
+disaster was a just judgment of God against the Spaniards; and it
+may truly be said that the taking of the Revenge was justly
+revenged against them, not by the force of men, but by the power
+of God. Some of the people in Tercera said openly, that they
+verily believed God would consume them, and that he had taken
+part with the Lutherans and heretics. They alleged farther, that
+so soon as they had thrown the body of Sir Richard Grenville
+overboard, they verily believed, as he had a devilish faith and
+religion, therefore all the devils loved him: For he instantly
+sunk to the bottom of the sea, and down into hell, where he
+raised up all the devils to revenge his death; and that they
+brought these great storms and tempests upon the Spaniards,
+because they only maintained the Catholic and true Romish
+religion. Such and the like blasphemies did they utter openly and
+continually, without being reproved of any one for their false
+opinions.</p>
+
+<p>Of their fleet which sailed from New Spain, 50 in all, 35 were
+cast away or foundered at sea, so that 15 only escaped. Of the
+San Domingo fleet, 14 were cast away coming through the channel
+from Havannah, the admiral and vice-admiral being of the number.
+Two ships, coming from the Terra Firma, laden with gold and
+silver, were taken by the English; and before the fleet under Don
+Alonso de Ba&ccedil;an came to Corvo, at the least 20 ships,
+coming from San Domingo, India, Brazil, &amp;c. had been taken at
+different times by the English, all of which were sent to
+England.</p>
+
+<p>Section XIV.</p>
+
+<p><i>Cruizing voyage to the Azores, in 1592, by Sir John
+Burrough, Knight</i>[388]</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>THE title of this section as here given from Astleys
+Collection, is by no means accurate, as the service performed by
+Burrough forms only one prominent portion of the present
+narrative. The expedition which it relates was fitted out and
+commanded by the memorable Sir Walter Raleigh, and the entire
+title of this relation, as given by Hakluyt, is as follows: "A
+true report of the honourable service at sea, performed by Sir
+John Burrough, knight, lieutenant-general of the fleet prepared
+by the honourable Sir Walter Raleigh, knight, lord warden of the
+stanneries of Cornwal and Devon. Wherein chiefly the Santa Clara
+of Biscay, a ship of 600 tons, was taken, and two East India
+Caraks, the Santa Cruz and the Madre de Dios were forced; the one
+burnt, and the other taken and brought into Dartmouth, the 7th
+September 1592."</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 388: Hakluyt, III. 9. Astley, I.
+245.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Even this long title does not clearly describe the narrative,
+as Sir Walter Raleigh actually sailed on the expedition. But it
+is not necessary to extend this observation, as the story will
+sufficiently explain itself. The editor of Astleys collection,
+alleges that Sir Walter Raleigh seems to have been the author of
+this article.--E.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>Having received a commission from the queen for an expedition
+to the West Indies, Sir Walter Raleigh used the utmost diligence
+in making all necessary preparations, both in the choice of good
+ships and sufficient men and officers, as the performance
+sufficiently evinced. His ships were 14 or 15 in number; of which
+the two principal belonged to the queen, called the Garland and
+Foresight The rest either belonged to himself or his friends, or
+to the adventurers of London. As for the gentlemen who went with
+him as officers, they were so well qualified in courage,
+experience and discretion, that the greatest prince might think
+himself happy in being served by the like. The honour of
+lieutenant-general [vice-admiral] was conferred upon Sir John
+Burrough, a gentleman every way worthy of that command, by his
+many good and heroic qualities; with whom, after Sir Walter
+returned, was joined in commission Sir Martin Frobisher; who, for
+his great skill and knowledge in maritime affairs, had formerly
+held employments of similar or greater importance. The rest of
+the captains, sailors and soldiers were men of notable
+resolution, and who for the most part had before given sufficient
+proof of their valour, in sundry services of the like nature.</p>
+
+<p>With these ships thus manned, Sir Walter Raleigh departed
+towards the west country, there to provide such farther
+necessaries as were needful for the expedition. The wind blew
+long from the west, quite contrary to his intended course, by
+which he was wind-bound many weeks, the fittest season for his
+purpose being thereby lost, his victuals much consumed, and the
+minds of his people greatly changed. When her majesty came to
+understand how crossly all this went, she began to call the
+propriety of this expedition in question, as the 6th of May was
+come before Sir Walter could put to sea. Sir Martin Frobisher
+came to him the next day, in a pinnace of the lord admiral called
+the Disdain, and brought her majestys letters of recal, with
+orders to leave the fleet under the command of Sir John Burrough
+and Sir Martin Frobisher. But, finding his honour so far engaged,
+that he saw no means to save his reputation or content his
+friends who had adventured great sums on fitting out the
+expedition, Sir Walter pretended to understand the queens letters
+as if they had left it to his choice either to return or proceed;
+wherefore he would in no case leave his fleet, now under
+sail.</p>
+
+<p>Continuing therefore his course to sea, he met within a day or
+two some ships newly come from Spain, among which was a ship
+belonging to Monsieur Gourdon, governor of Calais, on board of
+which was one Mr Nevil Davies an Englishman, who had endured a
+long and miserable captivity of twelve years, partly in the
+inquisition, and had now by good fortune made his escape, and was
+on his way home. Among other things, this man reported that there
+was little good to be done or expected this year in the West
+Indies, as the king of Spain had sent express orders to all the
+ports both of the islands and the main, that no ships were to
+sail that year, nor any treasure to be shipt for Spain. Yet did
+not this unpleasant intelligence induce Sir Walter to desist from
+his proceedings; till, on Thursday the 11th of May, a tempest of
+great violence, when he was athwart Cape Finister, so scattered
+the greater part of his fleet, and sunk his boats and pinnaces,
+that Sir Walter, who was in the Garland belonging to her majesty,
+was in danger of foundering.</p>
+
+<p>Upon this, considering that the season of the year was too far
+gone for the enterprize he meditated against Panama, having been
+detained by contrary winds on the coast of England from February
+till May, in which time he had expended three months victuals,
+and considering that to cruize upon the Spanish coast or at the
+islands for the homeward bound East or West India ships, was a
+mere work of patience, he gave directions to Sir John Burrough
+and Sir Martin Frobisher, to divide the fleet in two parts. Sir
+Martin, with the Garland, Captain George Clifford, Captain Henry
+Thin, Captain Grenville and others, to lie off the south cape, on
+purpose to oblige the Spanish fleet to remain on their own coast;
+while Sir John Burrough, with Captain Robert Crosse, Captain
+Thomson and others, should go to cruize off the Azores for the
+caraks or any other Spanish ships coming from Mexico or other
+parts of the West Indies. These intentions took effect
+accordingly: For the Spanish admiral, having intelligence of the
+English fleet being on the coast, attended to the defence of the
+southern parts of Spain, keeping as near Sir Martin Frobisher as
+he could, to hinder the success of any thing he might undertake,
+and thereby neglected the safe conduct of the caraks.</p>
+
+<p>Before the fleet separated, they met with a great ship of
+Biscay on the coast of Spain, called the Santa Clara of 600 tons,
+which was taken after a stout resistance. She was freighted with
+all sorts of small iron ware, as horse shoes, nails,
+ploughshares, iron bars, spikes, bolts, locks, gimbols, &amp;c.
+and valued by us at 6000 or 7000 pounds, though worth treble that
+value to them. This ship was on her way to San Lucar, to take in
+there some farther articles of freight for the West Indies; and
+being first rummaged, was sent off for England. Our fleet then
+sailed towards the south cape of St Vincent; and while near the
+rock of Lisbon, Sir John Burrough in the Roebuck espied a sail
+far off to which he gave chace. Being a fliboat and a quick
+sailer, she drew him far to the south before he could fetch her,
+but at last, she came under his lee and struck sail. The master
+gave information, that a great fleet was prepared at Cadiz and
+San Lucar, destined according to report for the West Indies; but
+the real object of this armament was this: Having received notice
+that Sir Walter Raleigh was fitted out with a strong force for
+the West Indies, the king of Spain had provided this great fleet
+to oppose him; but, in the first place, as the East India caraks
+were expected, this fleet was to convoy them home. But, as he
+persuaded himself, if Sir Walter went to the West Indies, the
+Azores would only have a few small ships of war to infest them,
+his orders to Don Alonzo de Ba&ccedil;an, brother to the Marquis
+of Santa Cruz, and general of his armada, were to pursue the
+fleet of Sir Walter Raleigh whatever course he went, and to
+attack him wherever he could find him.</p>
+
+<p>Our men soon found this to be true, for, not long after the
+capture of the fliboat, as Sir John Burrough sailed back again to
+rejoin his fleet, he discovered the Spanish fleet to seaward;
+which, espying him between them and the shore, made themselves
+sure of carrying him into a Spanish harbour. For this purpose,
+they spread themselves in such sort before him, that his danger
+was very great, as his course to seawards was utterly impeded,
+and the land being hostile could yield him no relief. In this
+extremity, putting his trust in God and his good ship, he thrust
+out from among them with all sail, and in spite of their force
+and notable cunning to intercept him, got clear off. Having thus
+got clear, and finding the coast so well guarded by this fleet,
+and knowing it were only folly to expect meeting with Sir Martin
+Frobisher, who knew of the armada as well as himself, and would
+be sure to avoid them, he began to shape his course directly for
+the Azores, according to the orders of Sir Walter Raleigh, and
+soon came in sight of St Michael, running so near the town of
+Villa Franca, that he could easily discern the ships that lay
+there at anchor. He intercepted several small vessels, both here
+and between St Georges and Pico in his course to Flores, but
+could get no intelligence from them for his purpose.</p>
+
+<p>Arriving before Flores on Thursday the 21st June towards
+evening, then only accompanied by captain Caufield and the master
+of his ship, the rest not being yet arrived, be made towards the
+shore in his boat, where he found all the inhabitants of Santa
+Cruz, a village or small town of that island, under arms, and
+drawn up to oppose his landing. Having no intention of committing
+hostilities, Sir John shewed a white flag in token of amity,
+which was answered by the islanders, upon which a friendly
+conference ensued, and hostages were taken on both sides, the
+captain of the town for them, and captain Caufield for us; so
+that whatever our people wanted and that place could supply, as
+fresh water, victuals, or the like, was freely granted by the
+inhabitants, and our people had leave to refresh themselves on
+shore without restraint, as long and as often as they pleased. At
+this place Sir John Burrough was informed, that they had no
+expectation of any fleet coming from the West Indies; but that
+only three days before his arrival, a carak had passed by from
+the East Indies for Lisbon, and that there were four more behind
+all of one convoy. Being very glad of this news, Sir John
+embarked immediately, having at this time in his company only a
+small bark of Bristol, belonging to one Mr Hopkins.</p>
+
+<p>In the meanwhile, part of the English ships that Sir John had
+left on the coast of Spain drew towards the Azores; and Sir John
+very soon got sight of one of the caraks. The same evening he
+descried two or three of the earl of Cumberlands ships, whereof
+one Mr Norton was captain, which had descried the carak and
+pursued in the track she was following for the islands, but no
+way could be made by either party, as it was almost a dead calm.
+In this dilemma, on purpose to discover her force, burden, and
+countenance, Sir John took his boat and rowed three miles towards
+her, to make her out exactly; and on his return, having consulted
+with his officers, it was resolved to board her in the morning. A
+heavy storm arose in the night, which forced them to weigh
+anchor, yet did they bear up amain against the weather, not to
+lose the carak. In the morning, being very near the shore, our
+men could perceive the carak close to the land, and the
+Portuguese using their utmost endeavour to convey whatever they
+could from her on shore. Seeing our men making all haste to come
+upon her, the Portuguese forsook her, but first, that nothing
+might be left for our men, they set her on fire, that neither the
+glory of victory nor the benefit of the ship and cargo might
+remain to the English. And, lest the English might find means to
+extinguish the fire, and thereby to preserve a part of the cargo,
+being in number 400 well armed men, they entrenched themselves on
+shore as near as possible to the carak, to keep our men aloof
+till the fire might consume the carak and all her contents.</p>
+
+<p>Seeing this, Sir John landed with an hundred of his men, many
+of whom had to swim on shore or wade more than breast high; and
+having easily dispersed those who guarded the shore, he no sooner
+approached the entrenchment but the Portuguese fled, leaving as
+much as the fire had spared to reward the pains of our men. Among
+others taken at the entrenchment, were a Portuguese called
+Vincent Fonseca, purser of the carak, with two of her cannoneers,
+one a German, and the other a Hollander; who, refusing to give
+any account voluntarily of what was asked, were threatened with
+torture, and then confessed that within fifteen days three other
+caraks would certainly arrive at the same island, there being
+five caraks in the fleet at their departure from Goa, the Buen
+Jesus admiral, Madre de Dios, San Bernardo, San Christophoro, and
+Santa Cruz, that now on fire. They had especial orders from the
+king of Spain, not in any case to touch at St. Helena, where the
+Portuguese caraks used always till now to refresh on their way
+from the East Indies, procuring water and fresh, provisions. The
+reason of this order was, that the king was informed the English
+men of war meant to lie there in wait for them. If therefore,
+their necessities should drive them to seek supply any where,
+they were commanded to put in at Angola on the coast of Africa,
+and only to remain there so long as was necessary to take in
+water, that they might avoid the inconvenience of infections, to
+which that hot country is dangerously liable. The last rendezvous
+appointed for them was the island of Flores, where they were
+assured of a naval force meeting them and convoying them to
+Lisbon.</p>
+
+<p>On receiving this intelligence, Sir John held a council with
+Captains Norton, Downton, and Abraham Cocke, commanding three
+ships of the Earl of Cumberland, Mr Thomson of Harwich, captain
+of the Dainty, belonging to Sir John Hawkins, one of Sir Walter
+Raleighs fleet, Captain Christopher Newton of the Golden Dragon,
+newly come from the West Indies, and others. To these he
+communicated the intelligence he had just got from the foresaid
+examination, and what great presumptions of truth appeared in
+their story; and wishing, since God and their good fortune had so
+opportunely brought them together, that they might unite their
+utmost endeavours to bring these Orientals under the lee of
+English obedience. Upon this it was mutually agreed not to part
+company or leave these seas, till time and opportunity should
+enable them to put their consultations into execution. Next day
+her majestys ship Foresight, Sir Robert Cross, joined them, and
+he, being informed of the matter, entered heartily on this
+service. Then Sir John, with all these ships, went 6 or 7 leagues
+to the west of Flores, spreading them out in a line from north to
+south, each ship at least two leagues distant from each other, by
+which order they were able to discover two whole degrees of the
+sea.</p>
+
+<p>They lay in this manner from the 29th of June to the 3d of
+August, when Captain Thomson in the Dainty had first sight of the
+huge carak called the Madre de Dios, one of the greatest
+belonging to the crown of Portugal. Having the start of the rest,
+and being an excellent sailor, the Dainty began the combat
+something to her cost, by the slaughter and hurt of several of
+her men. Within a little Sir John Burrough came up to second her
+in the Roebuck, belonging to Sir Walter Raleigh, and saluted the
+Madre de Dios with great shot, continuing the fight within
+musket-shot, assisted by Captains Thomson and Newport, till Sir
+Robert Cross came up, who was vice-admiral and was to leeward, on
+which Sir John asked his opinion what was best to be done. Sir
+Robert said, if she were not boarded she would reach the shore
+and be set on fire, as had been done with the other. Wherefore
+Sir John Burrough concluded to grapple her, and Sir Robert Cross
+engaged to do so likewise at the same moment, which was done
+accordingly. After some time in this situation, Sir John
+Burroughs ship received a shot of a <i>cannon perier</i>[389]
+under water; and, being ready to sink, desired Sir Robert to fall
+off, that he also might clear himself and save his ship from
+sinking. This was done with much difficulty, as both the Roebuck
+and Foresight were so entangled that they could not clear
+themselves.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 389: Probably a large stone
+ball.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>That same evening, finding the carak drawing near the land,
+Sir Robert Crosse persuaded his consorts to board her again, as
+otherwise there were no hopes of taking her. After many fears and
+excuses, he at last encouraged them, and then went athwart her
+bows all alone, and so hindered her sailing, that the rest had
+time to get up to the attack before she could make the land. So,
+towards evening, after Sir Robert had fought her three hours
+singly, two of the Earl of Cumberlands ships came up, and then
+they and Sir Robert Crosse carried her by boarding with very
+little loss, as Sir Robert by this time had broken their courage,
+and made the assault easy for the rest. Having disarmed the
+Portuguese, and bestowed them for better security as prisoners
+into the other ships, Sir Robert had now time to contemplate the
+proportions of this vast carak, which did then, and may still
+provoke the admiration of all men not accustomed to such a sight.
+But though this first view afforded our men sufficient
+admiration, yet the pitiful sight of so many bodies slain and
+mangled drew tears from their eyes, and induced them to lend aid
+to those miserable people, whose limbs were sore torn by the
+shot, and their bodies agonized by a multitude of wounds. No man
+could almost step but upon a dead carcass or a bloody floor, but
+especially about the helm, where many of them had been slain
+while endeavouring to steer, as it required the united strength
+of twelve or fourteen men at once to move the rudder, and some of
+our ships beating in at her stern with their ordnance, often slew
+four or five labouring on each side of the helm at one shot,
+whose places were immediately supplied by fresh hands, and as our
+artillery incessantly plied them with continual vollies, much
+blood was necessarily spilt in that place.</p>
+
+<p>Moved with compassion for their misery, our general
+immediately sent them his own surgeons, withholding no possible
+aid or relief that he or his company could supply. Among those
+whom this chance of war had rendered most deplorable, was Don
+Fernando de Mendo&ccedil;a, grand captain and commander of this
+mighty carak, descended of the house of Mendo&ccedil;a in Spain,
+but having married in Portugal, lived there as one of that
+nation. He was a gentleman well striken in years, of comely
+personage and good stature, but of hard fortune. In the course of
+his services against the Moors he had been twice taken prisoner,
+and both times ransomed by the king. In a former return voyage
+from the East Indies, he was driven upon the <i>Baxos</i> or
+sands of <i>India</i>, near the coast of Sofala, being then
+captain of a carak which was lost, and himself fell into the
+hands of the infidels on shore, who kept him in a long and
+rigorous captivity. Once more, having great respect for him, and
+willing to mend his fortune, the king had given him the conduct
+of this huge carak, in which he went from Lisbon as admiral of
+the India fleet, and had returned in that capacity, but that the
+viceroy embarked in the Bon Jesus, and assumed that rank in
+virtue of his late office. Not willing to add too severely to the
+affliction of this man, Sir John Burrough freely dismissed Don
+Fernando and most of his followers, giving them some vessels for
+that purpose, with all necessary provisions.</p>
+
+<p>Having dispatched this business, Sir John Burrough had leisure
+to take such a survey of the goods in his prize, as the
+convenience of the seas would admit; and seeing many inclined to
+commit spoil and pillage, he very prudently seized upon the whole
+in the name of her majesty. He then made a cursory inspection of
+the cargo, and perceived that the wealth would be fully
+answerable to expectation, and would be more than sufficient to
+content both the desires of the adventurers, and the fatigues and
+dangers of the captors. I cannot here refrain from acknowledging
+the great favour of God to our nation, by putting this rich prize
+into our hands, thereby manifestly discovering the secrets and
+riches of the trade of India, which had hitherto lain strangely
+bidden and cunningly concealed from our knowledge, only a very
+imperfect glimpse of it being seen by a few, while it is now
+turned into the broad light of full and perfect knowledge. Whence
+it would appear to be the will of God for our good, if only our
+weakness would so apprehend it, that we should participate in
+those East Indian treasures, by the establishment of a lawful
+traffic, to better our means of advancing the true religion and
+the holy service of God.</p>
+
+<p>This carak, in the judgment of those most experienced, was of
+not less than 1600 tons burden, 900 of which were stowed full of
+rich merchandize; the remainder being allowed partly for the
+ordnance, which were 32 pieces of brass cannon of all sorts, and
+partly to the ships company, passengers, and victuals, which last
+could not be a small quantity, considering the length of the
+voyage, and that there were between six and seven hundred persons
+on board. To give a taste as it were of the commodities, it may
+suffice to give a general enumeration of them, according to the
+catalogue made out at Leadenhall, London, on the 15th September
+1592. After the jewels, which were certainly of great value,
+though they never came to light, the principal wares consisted of
+spices, drugs, silks, calicoes, quilts, carpets, and colours,
+&amp;c. The spices were pepper, cloves, mace, nutmegs, cinnamon,
+green ginger. The drugs, benzoin, frankincense, gallinga,
+mirabolans, socotorine aloes, camphor. The silks, damasks,
+taffetas, sarcenets, <i>altobassos</i> or counterfeit cloth of
+gold, unwrought China silk, sleaved silk, white twisted silk, and
+curled cypress. The calicoes were book-calicoe, calicoe-lawns,
+broad white calicoes, fine starched calicoes, coarse white
+calicoes, brown broad calicoes, brown coarse calicoes. There were
+also canopies, and coarse diaper towels, quilts of coarse
+sarsenet, and of calico, and carpets like those of Turkey.
+Likewise pearls, musk, civet, and ambergris. The rest of the
+wares were many in number, but less in value; as elephants teeth,
+porcelain vessels of China, coco nuts, hides, ebony as black as
+jet, bedsteads of the same, curious cloth made of the rind of
+trees, &amp;c. All which piles of merchandize, being valued at a
+reasonable rate by men of approved judgment, amounted to no less
+than 150,000 pounds Sterling, which being divided among the
+adventurers, of whom her majesty was the chief, was sufficient to
+content all parties.</p>
+
+<p>The cargo being taken out, and the goods reloaded on board ten
+of our ships to be sent to London, one Mr Robert Adams, a man of
+excellent skill, took the exact bigness, height, length, breadth,
+and other dimensions of this huge vessel, that these might be
+preserved according to the exact rules of geometrical
+proportions, both for present knowledge and transmission to
+posterity, omitting nothing which either his art could
+demonstrate, or any mans judgment think worthy of being known.
+After an exact survey of the whole frame, he found the extreme
+length, from the beak head to the stern, where a lantern was
+erected, 165 feet. The breadth, in the second close deck, of
+which she had three, but this the broadest, was 46 feet 10
+inches. At her departure from Cochin in India, her draught of
+water was 31 feet; but at her arrival in Dartmouth, not above 26,
+being lightened 5 feet during her voyage by various causes. She
+contained 7 several stories; viz. one main orlop, three close
+decks, one forecastle, and a spar deck of two floors each. The
+length of the keel was 100 feet, of the main-mast 121 feet, and
+its circumference at the partners was 10 feet 7 inches. The
+main-yard was 106 feet long. By this accurate mensuration, the
+hugeness of the whole is apparent, and far beyond the mould of
+the largest ships used among us, either for war or cargo.</p>
+
+<p>Don Alonso de Ba&ccedil;an, having a greater fleet, and yet
+suffering these two great caraks to be lost, the Santa Cruz
+burnt, and the Madre de Dios taken, was disgraced by the king of
+Spain for his negligence.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XV.</p>
+
+<p><i>The taking of two Spanish Ships, laden with quicksilver and
+the Popes bulls, in 1592, by Captain Thomas White</i>.[390]</p>
+
+<p>While returning from Barbary in the Amity of London, and in
+the latitude of 36&deg; N. at 4 in the morning of the 26th of
+July 1592, Captain White got sight of two ships at the distance
+of three or four leagues. Giving immediate chace, he came within
+gun-shot of them by 7 o'clock; and by their boldness in shewing
+Spanish colours, he judged them rather to be ships of war than
+laden with merchandize; indeed, by their own confession
+afterwards, they made themselves so sure of taking him, that they
+debated among themselves whether it were better for them to carry
+his ship to San Lucar or Lisbon. After waving each other amain,
+the Spaniards placed themselves in order of battle, a cables
+length before the other, when the fight began, both sides
+charging and firing as fast as they were able, at the distance of
+a cables length, for the space of five hours. In this time, the
+Amity received 32 great shots in her hull, masts, and sails,
+besides at least 500 iron muskets and arquebuses, which were
+counted after the fight.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 390: Astley, I. 249. The editor of Astleys
+collection gives no notice of the source whence he procured this
+narrative. The Spanish ships with quicksilver are usually called
+<i>azogue</i> or <i>assogue</i> ships; the word assogue
+signifying quicksilver.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Finding them to make so stout a resistance, Captain White
+attempted to board the Biscaian, which was foremost; and after
+lying on board about an hour, plying his ordnance and small shot,
+he <i>stowed all her men</i>[391]. At this time, the other
+vessel, which was a fliboat, thinking Captain White had boarded
+her consort with all his men, <i>bore room with him</i>[392],
+intending to have laid him close on board, so as to entrap him
+between both ships, and place him between two fires. Perceiving
+this intention, he fitted his ordnance in such sort as to get
+quit of her, so that she boarded her consort, and both fell from
+him. Mr White now kept his loof, hoisted his main-sails, and
+weathering both ships, came close aboard the fliboat, to which he
+gave his whole broadside, by which several of her men were slain,
+as appeared by the blood running from her scuppers. After this he
+tacked about, new charged all his ordnance, and coming round
+again upon both ships, ordered them to yield or he would sink
+them outright. One of them being shot between wind and water,
+would have complied, but the other called him a traitor; on which
+Captain White called out, that if he also did not presently
+yield, he would sink him first. Intimidated by this threat, they
+both hung out white flags and yielded; yet refused to strike
+their own sails, as they had sworn not to strike to any
+Englishman.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 391: This expression seems to mean, that he
+forced them to run below.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 392: That is, bore down upon
+him.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>He then commanded the captains and masters to come on board
+the Amity, where they were examined and placed in safe custody;
+after which he sent some of his own men on board both ships to
+strike the sails and man them. There were found in both, 126
+persons alive, with eight dead bodies, besides those that had
+been cast overboard. This victory was obtained by 42 men and a
+boy, of whom two were slain and three wounded. The two prizes
+were laden with 1400 chests of quicksilver, marked with the arms
+of Castile and Leon, besides a vast quantity of bulls or
+indulgences, and ten packs of gilded missals and breviaries, all
+on the kings account. Also an hundred tons of excellent wine,
+intended for the supply of the royal fleet; all of which Captain
+White brought shortly afterwards to Blackwall in the river
+Thames.</p>
+
+<p>By this capture of quicksilver, the king of Spain lost for
+every quintal a quintal of silver, that should have been
+delivered to him by the mine-masters in Peru, amounting in value
+to L.600,000. There were likewise 2,072,000 bulls for living and
+dead persons, intended for the use of New Spain, Yucatan,
+Guatimala, Honduras, and the Philippine islands, taxed at two
+ryals each; besides 18,000 bulls at four ryals; amounting in all
+to L.107,700: So that the total loss to the king of Spain was
+L.707,700, not reckoning the loss and disappointment by the
+mass-books and wine.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVI.</p>
+
+<p><i>Narrative of the Destruction of a great East India Carak,
+in 1594, written by Captain Nicholas. Downton</i>[393].</p>
+
+<p>In the latter end of the year 1593, the right honourable the
+earl of Cumberland, at his own charges and those of his friends,
+fitted out three ships of equal size and rates, having each the
+same quantity of provisions and the same number of men. These
+were, the Royal Exchange, which went as admiral, commanded by
+Captain George Cave; the May-flower, vice-admiral, commanded by
+Captain William Anthony; and the Sampson, which my lord was
+pleased to commit to me, Nicholas Downton. In all the three ships
+there were embarked 420 men of all sorts, or 140 in each. Besides
+these, there, was a pinnace: called the Violet, or
+<i>Why-not-I.</i></p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 393: Hakluyt, III. 14. Astley, I
+250.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Our instructions were sent to us at Plymouth, and we were
+directed to open them at sea. The 6th of April 1594, we set sail
+from Plymouth sound, directing our course for the coast of Spain.
+The 24th, being then in lat. 43&deg; N; we divided ourselves east
+and west from each other, on purpose to keep a good look out,
+with orders from our admiral to close up again at night. In the
+morning of the 27th, we descried the May-flower and the little
+pinnace, in company with a prize they had taken belonging to
+Viana in Portugal, and bound for Angola. This vessel was about 28
+tons burden, having 17 persons on board, with some 12 tons of
+wine, which we divided among our ships, together with some rusk
+in chests and barrels, 5 bales of coarse blue cloth, and some
+coarse linen for negroes shirts; all of which goods were divided
+among our fleet. The 4th of May, we had sight again of our
+pinnace and the admirals shallop, which had taken three
+Portuguese caravels, two of which we sent away and kept the
+third. The 2d June we came in sight of St Michaels. The 3d we
+sent off our pinnace, which was about 24 tons burden, together
+with the small caravel we had taken off the Burlings, to range
+about the anchorages of the Azores, trying to make captures of
+any thing they could find, appointing them to meet with us at a
+rendezvous 12 leagues W.S.W. from Fayal. Their going from us
+served no purpose, and was a misfortune, as they omitted joining
+us when appointed, and we also missed them when they might have
+been of much service.</p>
+
+<p>The 13th of June we fell in with a mighty carak from the East
+Indies, called <i>Las cinquellagues</i>, or the five wounds. The
+May-Flower was in sight of her before night, and I got up with
+her in the evening. While I had ordered our men to give her a
+broadside, and stood carefully examining her strength, and where
+I might give council to board her in the night when the admiral
+came up, I received a shot a little above the belly, by which I
+was rendered unserviceable for a good while after, yet no other
+person in my ship was touched that night. Fortunately, by means
+of one captain Grant, an honest true-hearted man, nothing was
+neglected though I was thus disabled. Until midnight, when the
+admiral came up, the May-Flower and the Sampson never desisted
+from plying her with our cannon, taking it in turns: But then
+captain Cave wished us to stay till morning, when each of us was
+to give her three broadsides, and then lay her on board; but we
+long lingered in the morning till 10 o'clock, before we attempted
+to board her.</p>
+
+<p>The admiral then laid her on board amid ships, and the
+May-Flower came up on her quarter, as if to take her station
+astern of our admiral on the larboard side of the carak; but the
+captain of the May-Flower was slain at the first coming up, on
+which his ship fell astern on the <i>outlicar</i>[394] of the
+carak, a piece of timber, which so tore her foresail that they
+said they could not get up any more to fight, as indeed they did
+not, but kept aloof from us all the rest of the action. The
+Sampson went aboard on the bow of the carak, but had not room
+enough, as our quarter lay on the bow of the Exchange, and our
+bow on that of the carak. At the first coming up of the Exchange,
+her captain Mr Cave was wounded in both legs, one of which he
+never recovered, so that he was disabled from doing his duty, and
+had no one in his absence that would undertake to lead his
+company to board the enemy. My friend, captain Grant, led my men
+up the side of the carak; but his force being small, and not
+being manfully seconded by the crew of the Exchange, the enemy
+were bolder than they would have been, so that six of my men were
+presently slain, and many more wounded; which made those that
+remained return on board, and they would never more give the
+assault. Some of the Exchanges men did very well, and I have no
+doubt that many more would have done the like, if there had been
+any principal men to have led them on, and not to have run into
+corners themselves. But I must allow that the carak was as well
+provided for defence as any ship I have seen; and perhaps the
+Portuguese were encouraged by our slackness, as they plied our
+men from behind barricades, where they were out of danger from
+our shot. They plied us also with wildfire, by which most of our
+men were burnt in some parts of their body; and while our men
+were busied in putting out the fire, the enemy galled them sore
+with small arms and darts. This unusual casting of wildfire did
+much dismay many of our men, and caused them greatly to hang
+back.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 394: Probably a boom or outrigger for the
+management of the after-sails.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Finding that our men would not again board, we plied our great
+ordnance at them, elevated as much as possible, as otherwise we
+could do them little harm. By shooting a piece from our
+forecastle, we set fire to a mat at the beak head of the enemy,
+which kindled more and more, communicating from the mat to the
+boltsprit, and thence to the top-sail-yard; by which fire the
+Portuguese abaft were much alarmed, and began to make show of a
+parley: But their officers encouraged them, alleging that the
+fire could be easily extinguished, on which they again stood
+stiffly to their defence; yet at length the fire grew so strong,
+that I plainly saw it was beyond all help, even if she had
+yielded to us. We then wished to have disentangled ourselves from
+the burning carak, but had little hope of success; yet we plied
+water with great diligence to keep our ship safe. At this time I
+had little hope but our ship, myself, and several of our wounded
+men must have been all destroyed along with the carak. Most of
+our people indeed might have saved themselves in boats on board
+our consorts. When we were at the worst, by Gods providence our
+spritsail-yard with the sail and ropes, which were fast entangled
+with the spritsail-yard of the carak, were so burned that we fell
+away, with the loss of some of our sails. The Exchange also,
+being farther aft and more distant from the fire, was more easily
+cleared, and fell off abaft.</p>
+
+<p>As soon as God had put us out of danger, the fire caught hold
+of the forecastle of the carak, where I think there was great
+store of benzoin, or some such combustible matter, for it flamed
+and flowed over the carak, which was almost in an instant all
+over in flames. The Portuguese now leapt over-board in great
+numbers, and I sent captain Grant with the boat, bidding him use
+his discretion in saving them. He brought me on board two
+gentlemen. One of them was an old man named Nuno Velio Pereira,
+who had been governor of Mozambique and Sofala in the year 1582,
+and had since been governor of a place of importance in the East
+Indies. The ship in which he was coming home was cast away a
+little to the east of the Cape of Good Hope, whence he travelled
+by land to Mozambique, and got a passage in this carak. The other
+was named Bras Carrero, who was captain of a carak that was cast
+away at Mozambique, and came likewise as a passenger in this
+ship. Also three men of the inferior sort; but only these two
+gentlemen we clothed and brought home to England. The rest, and
+others which were saved by our other boats, were all set on shore
+on the island of Flores, except two or three negroes, one of whom
+was a native of Mozambique, and the other of the East Indies.</p>
+
+<p>This fight took place in the open sea, 6 leagues to the
+southward of the sound or channel between Fayal and Pico. The
+people whom we saved informed us, that the cause of the carak
+refusing to yield was, that she and all her goods belonged to the
+king, being all that had been collected for him that year in
+India, and that the captain of her was greatly in favour with the
+king, and expected to have been made viceroy of India at his
+return. This great carak was by no means lumbered, either within
+board or on deck, being more like a ship of war than a merchant
+vessel; and, besides her own men and guns, she had the crew and
+ordnance that belonged to another carak that was cast away at
+Mozambique, and the crew of another that was lost a little way to
+the east of the Cape of Good Hope. Yet, through sickness caught
+at Angola, where they watered, it was said she had not now above
+150 white men on board, but a great many negroes. They likewise
+told us there were three noblemen and three ladies on board; but
+we found them to disagree much in their stories. The carak
+continued to burn all the rest of that day and the succeeding
+night; but next morning, on the fire reaching her powder, being
+60 barrels, which was in the lowest part of her hold, she blew up
+with a dreadful explosion, most of her materials floating about
+on the sea. Some of the people said she was larger than the Madre
+de Dios, and some that she was less. She was much undermasted and
+undersailed, yet she went well through the water, considering
+that she was very foul. The shot we made at her from the cannon
+of our ship, before we laid her on board, might be seven
+broadsides of six or seven shots each, one with another, or about
+49 shots in all. We lay on board her about two hours, during
+which we discharged at her about 20 sacre shots. Thus much may
+suffice for our dangerous conflict with that unfortunate
+carak.</p>
+
+<p>On the 30th of June, after traversing the seas, we got sight
+of another huge carak, which some of our company took at first
+for the great San Philippo, the admiral of Spain; but on coming
+up with her next day, we certainly perceived her to be a carak.
+After bestowing some shots upon her, we summoned her to yield,
+but they stood stoutly on their defence, and utterly refused to
+strike. Wherefore, as no good could be done without boarding, I
+consulted as to what course we should follow for that purpose;
+but as we, who were the chief captains, were partly slain and the
+rest wounded in the former conflict, and because of the murmuring
+of some disorderly and cowardly fellows, all our resolute
+determinations were crossed: To conclude in a few words, the
+carak escaped our hands. After this, we continued to cruize for
+some time about Corvo and Flores, in hopes of falling in with
+some ships from the West Indies; but, being disappointed in this
+expectation, and provisions falling short, we returned for
+England, where I arrived at Portsmouth on the 28th of August
+1594.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION XVII.</p>
+
+<p><i>List of the Royal Navy of England of the demise of Queen
+Elizabeth</i>[395].</p>
+
+<p>The following list of the royal navy of England, as left in
+good condition by Queen Elizabeth at her death in 1603, was
+written by Sir William Monson, a naval officer of that and the
+two following reigns, "By which, he observes, she and her realm
+gained honour, by the exploits and victories they and her
+subjects obtained." It would occupy too much space to give a
+contrasted list of the royal navy in the present year, 1813; but
+which our readers can easily obtain from the monthly lists
+published at London.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 395: Church. Collect. III.
+196.]</blockquote>
+
+<pre>
+                               Men in   Men at       Of which
+   Names of Ships.   Tonnage.  Harbour.  Sea.   Mariners.  Sailors.  Guns.
+   Elizabeth-Jonas,    900        30     500      340[A]     120[A]  40
+   Triumph,           1000        30     500      340        120     40
+   White Bear,         900        30     500      340        120     40
+   Victory,            800        17     400      268        100     32
+   Ark Royal,          800        17     400      268        100     32
+   Mere Honour,        800        17     400      268        100     32
+   St Matthew,        1000        30     500      340        120     40
+   St Andrew,          900        17     400      268        100     32
+   Due Repulse,        700        16     350      230         90     30
+   Garland,            700        16     300      190         80     30
+   Warspite,           600        12     300      190         80     30
+   Mary-Rose,          600        12     250      150         70     30
+   Hope,               600        12     250      150         70     30
+   Bonaventure,        600        12     250      150         70     30
+   Lion,               500        12     250      150         70     30
+   Nonpareille,        500        12     250      150         70     30
+   Defiance,           500        12     250      150         70     30
+   Rainbow,            500        12     250      150         70     30
+   Dreadnought,        400        10     200      130         50     20
+   Antilope,           350        10     160      114         30     16
+   Swiftsure,          400        10     200      130         50     20
+   Swallow,            380        10     160      114         30     16
+   Foresight,          300        10     160      114         30     16
+   Tide,               250         7     120       88         20     12
+   Crane,              200         7     100       76         20     12
+   Adventure,          250         7     120       88         20     12
+   Quittance,          200         7     100       76         20     12
+   Answer,             200         7     100       76         20     12
+   Advantage,          200         7     100       70         20     12
+   Tiger,              200         7     100       70         20     12
+   Tremontain,                     6      70       52         10      8
+   Scout,              120         6      66       48         10      8
+   Catis,              100         5      60       42         10      8
+   Charles,             70         5      45       32          7      6
+   Moon,                60         5      40       30          5      5
+   Advice,              50         5      40       30          5      5
+   Spy,                 50         5      40       30          5      5
+   Merlin,              45         5      35       26          4      5
+   Sun,                 40         5      30       24          2      4
+   Synnet[B]            20         2
+   George Hoy,         100        10
+   Penny-rose Hoy,      80         8
+
+</pre>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote A: The difference between mariners and
+sailors is not obvious: Perhaps the former were what are now
+called ordinary, and the latter able seamen. Besides, the numbers
+of both these united, do not make up the whole compliment of men
+at sea: Perhaps the deficiency, being 40 in the largest ships of
+this list, was made up by what were then called <i>grummets:</i>
+servants, ship-boys, or landsmen.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote B: This name ought probably to have been
+the Cygnet.]</blockquote>
+
+<h2><a name="chapter3-9" id="chapter3-9">CHAPTER IX.</a></h2>
+
+<p>EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH TO THE EAST INDIES, BEFORE THE
+ESTABLISHMENT OF AN EXCLUSIVE COMPANY.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION I.</p>
+
+<p><i>Voyage to Goa in 1579, in the Portuguese fleet, by Thomas
+Stevens</i>[396].</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>We now begin to draw towards India, the following being the
+first voyage we know of, that was performed to that country by
+any Englishman. Though Stevens was only a passenger in the ship
+of another nation, yet the account he gave of the navigation was
+doubtless one of the motives that induced his countrymen to visit
+India a few years afterwards in their own bottoms. Indeed the
+chief and more immediate causes seem to have been the rich
+caraks, taken in the cruizing voyages against the Spaniards and
+Portuguese about this time, which both gave the English some
+insight into the India trade, and inflamed their desire of
+participating in so rich a commerce.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 396: Hakluyt, II, 581. Astley, I.
+191.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The account of this voyage is contained in the following
+letter from Thomas Stevens, to his father Thomas Stevens in
+London: In this letter, preserved by Hakluyt, several very good
+remarks will be found respecting the navigation to India, as
+practised in those days; yet no mention is made in the letter, as
+to the profession of Stevens, or on what occasion he went to
+India. By the letters of Newberry and Fitch[397], which will be
+found in their proper place, written from Goa in 1584, it appears
+that he was a priest or Jesuit, belonging to the college of St
+Paul at that place; whence it may be concluded that the design of
+his voyage was to propagate the Romish religion in India. In a
+marginal note to one of these letters, Hakluyt intimates that
+<i>Padre</i> Thomas Stevens was born in Wiltshire, and was
+sometime of New College Oxford. He was very serviceable to
+Newberry and Fitch, who acknowledge that they owed the recovery
+of their liberty and goods, if not their lives, to him and
+another <i>Padre</i>. This is also mentioned by Pyrard de la Val,
+who was prisoner at Goa in 1608, at which time Stevens was rector
+of Morgan College in the island of
+Salcet[398]."--<i>Astley.</i></p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 397: In Hakluyts Collection, new edition,
+II. 376. et seq.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 398: Purchas his Pilgrims, II.
+1670.]</blockquote>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>After most humble commendations to you and my mother, and
+craving your daily blessing, these are to certify you of my being
+alive, according to your will and my duty. I wrote you that I had
+taken my journey from Italy to Portugal, which letter I think
+came to your hands, in which hope I have the less need to tell
+you the cause of my departing, which in one word I may express,
+by naming <i>obedience</i>. I came to Lisbon towards the end of
+March, eight days before the departure of the ships, so late
+that, if they had not been detained about some important affairs,
+they had been gone before our arrival; insomuch that others were
+appointed to go in our stead, that the kings intention and ours
+might not be frustrated. But on our sudden arrival, these others
+did not go, and we went as originally intended.</p>
+
+<p>The 4th of April, five ships departed for Goa, in which,
+besides mariners and soldiers, there were a great number of
+children, who bear the sea much better than men, as also do many
+women. I need not tell you, as you may easily imagine the
+solemnity of setting out, with sound of trumpets and discharges
+of cannon, as they go forth in a warlike manner. The 10th of the
+same month we came in sight of Porto Sancto near Madeira, where
+an English ship set upon ours, now entirely alone, and fired
+several shots which did us no harm: But when our ship had run out
+her largest ordnance, the English ship made away from us. This
+English ship was large and handsome, and I was sorry to see her
+so ill occupied, as she went roving about the seas, and we met
+her again at the Canaries, where we arrived on the 13th of the
+same month of April, and had good opportunity to wonder at the
+high peaked mountain in the island of Teneriffe, as we beat about
+between that island and Grand Canary for four days with contrary
+winds, and indeed had such evil weather till the 14th of May,
+that we despaired of being able to double the Cape of Good Hope
+that year. Yet, taking our course between Guinea and the Cape de
+Verd islands, without seeing any land at all, we arrived at the
+coast of Guinea, as the Portuguese call that part of the western
+coast of Africa in the torrid zone, from the lat. of 6&deg; N. to
+the equinoctial; in which parts they suffer so much by extreme
+heats and want of wind, that they think themselves happy when
+past it. Sometimes the ships stand quite still and becalmed for
+many days, and sometimes they go on, but in such a manner that
+they had almost as good stand still. The atmosphere on the
+greatest part of this coast is never clear, but thick and cloudy,
+full of thunder and lightening, and such unwholesome rain, that
+the water on standing only a little while is full of animalculae,
+and by falling on any meat that is hung out, fills it immediately
+with worms.</p>
+
+<p>All along that coast, we oftentimes saw a thing swimming in
+the water like a cocks comb but much fairer, which they call a
+<i>Guinea ship</i>[399]. It is borne up in the water by a
+substance almost like the swimming bladder of a fish in size and
+colour, having many strings from it under water, which prevent it
+from being overturned. It is so poisonous, that one cannot touch
+it without much danger. On this coast, between the sixth degree
+of north latitude and the equator, we spent no less than thirty
+days either in calms or contrary winds. The 30th of May we
+crossed the line with great difficulty, directing our course as
+well as we could to pass the promontory[400], but in all that
+gulf of Guinea, and all the rest of the way to the Cape, we found
+such frequent calms that the most experienced mariners were much
+astonished. In places where there always used to be horrible
+tempests, we found most invincible calms, which were very
+troublesome to our ships, which being of the greatest size cannot
+go without good winds; insomuch that when it is almost an
+intolerable tempest for other ships, making them furl all their
+sails, those large ships display their sails to the wind and sail
+excellent well, unless the waves be too furious, which seldom
+happened in our voyage. You must understand that, when once past
+the line, they cannot go direct for the Cape the nearest way,
+but, according to the wind, must hold on as near south as they
+can till in the latitude of the Cape, which is 35&deg; 30' S.
+They then shape their course to the east, and so get round the
+Cape. But the wind so served us at 33 degrees, that we directed
+our course thence for the Cape.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 399: Otherwise called, by the English
+sailors, a Portuguese man-of-war.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 400: The Cape of Good Hope must be here
+meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>You know that it is hard to sail from east to west, or the
+contrary, because there is no fixed point in all the sky by which
+they can direct their course, wherefore I shall tell you what
+help God hath provided to direct them. There is not a fowl that
+appeareth, neither any sign in the air or in the sea, that have
+not been written down by those who have formerly made these
+voyages; so that partly by their own experience, judging what
+space the ship was able to make with such and such a wind, and
+partly by the experience of others recorded in the books of
+navigations which they have, they guess whereabouts they may be
+in regard to longitude, for they are always sure as to latitude.
+But the greatest and best direction of all is, to mark the
+variation of the needle or mariners compass; which, in the
+meridian of the island of St Michael, one of the Azores in the
+same latitude with Lisbon, points due north, and thence swerveth
+so much towards the east, that, between the foresaid meridian and
+the extreme south point of Africa, it varieth three or four of
+the thirty-two points. Again, having passed a little beyond the
+cape called <i>das Agulias</i>, or of the Needles, it returneth
+again towards the north; and when it hath attained that, it
+swerveth again toward the west proportionally, as it did before
+eastwards.</p>
+
+<p>In regard to the first mentioned signs from fowls: The nearer
+we came to the coast of Africa, the more kinds and greater number
+of strange fowls appeared; insomuch that, when we came within not
+less than thirty leagues, almost 100 miles, and 600 miles as we
+thought from any other land, as good as 3000 fowls of sundry
+kinds followed our ship; some of them so great, that, when their
+wings were opened, they measured seven spans from point to point
+of their wings, as the sailors said. It is a marvellous thing to
+think how God hath so provided for these fowls in so vast an
+expanse of sea, that they are all fat. The Portuguese have named
+them all, according to some obvious property. Thus they call some
+<i>rushtails</i>, because their tails are small and long like a
+rush, and not proportionate to their bodies; some
+<i>fork-tails</i>, because their tails are very broad and forked;
+others again <i>velvet-sleeves</i>, because their wings are like
+velvet, and are always bent like a mans elbow. This bird is
+always welcome, as it appears nearest the Cape. I should never
+have an end, were I to tell you all particulars, but shall touch
+on a few that may suffice, if you mark them well, to give cause
+for glorifying God in his wonderful works, and in the variety of
+his creatures.</p>
+
+<p>To say something of fishes: In all the places of calms, and
+especially in the burning zone near the line, there continually
+waited on our ship certain fishes, called <i>tuberones</i>[401]
+by the Portuguese, as long as a man, which came to eat such
+things as might fall from the ship into the sea, not even
+refusing men themselves if they could light upon any, and if they
+find any meat hung over into the sea, they seize it. These have
+waiting upon them continually six or seven, small fishes, having
+blue and green bands round their bodies, like finely dressed
+serving men. Of these two or three always swim before the shark,
+and some on every side, [whence they are called <i>pilot
+fish</i>, by the English mariners.] They have likewise other
+fishes [called <i>sucking fish</i>] which always cleave to their
+bodies; and seem to feed on such superfluities as grow about
+them, and they are said to enter into their bodies to purge them,
+when needful. Formerly the mariners used to eat the sharks, but
+since they have seen them devour men, their stomachs now abhor
+them; yet they draw them up with great hooks, and kill as many of
+them as they can, thinking thereby to take a great revenge. There
+is another kind of fish almost as large as a herring, which hath
+wings and flieth, and are very numerous. These have two enemies,
+one in the sea and the other in the air.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 401: Evidently sharks, from the account of
+them.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>That in the sea is the fish called <i>albicore</i>, as large
+as a salmon, which follows with great swiftness to take them; on
+which this poor fish, which cannot swim fast as it hath no fins,
+and only swims by the motion of its tail, having its wings then
+shut along the sides of its body, springeth out of the water and
+flieth, but not very high; on this the albicore, though he have
+no wings, giveth a great leap out of the water, and sometimes
+catcheth the flying fish, or else keepeth in the water, going
+that way as fast as the other flieth. When the flying fish is
+weary of the air, or thinketh himself out of danger, he returneth
+to the water, where the albicore meeteth him; but sometimes his
+other enemy, the sea-crow, catcheth him in the air before he
+falleth.</p>
+
+<p>With these and the like sights, but always making our
+supplications to God for good weather and the preservation of our
+ship, we came at length to the south cape of Africa, the ever
+famous Cape of Good Hope, so much desired yet feared of all men:
+But we there found no tempest, only immense waves, where our
+pilot was guilty of an oversight; for, whereas commonly all
+navigators do never come within sight of land, but, contenting
+themselves with signs and finding the bottom, go their course
+safe and sure, he, thinking to have the winds at will, shot nigh
+the land; when the wind, changing into the south, with the
+assistance of the mountainous waves, rolled us so near the land
+that we were in less than 14 fathoms, only six miles from <i>Capo
+das Agulias</i>, and there we looked to be utterly lost. Under us
+were huge rocks, so sharp and cutting that no anchor could
+possibly hold the ship, and the shore was so excessively bad that
+nothing could take the land, which besides is full of
+<i>tigers</i> and savage people, who put all strangers to death,
+so that we had no hope or comfort, but only in God and a good
+conscience. Yet, after we had lost our anchors, hoisting up our
+sails to try to get the ship upon some safer part of the coast,
+it pleased God, when no man looked for help, suddenly to fill our
+sails with a wind off the land, and so by good providence we
+escaped, thanks be to God. The day following, being in a place
+where they are always wont to fish, we also fell a fishing, and
+caught so many, that they served the whole ships company all that
+day and part of the next. One of our lines pulled up a coral of
+great size and value; for it is said that in this place, which
+indeed we saw by experience, that the corals grow on the rocks at
+the bottom of the sea in the manner of stalks, becoming hard and
+red.</p>
+
+<p>Our day of peril was the 29th of July. You must understand
+that, after passing the Cape of Good Hope, there are two ways to
+India, one within the island of Madagascar, or between that and
+Africa, called the Canal of Mozambique, which the Portuguese
+prefer, as they refresh themselves for a fortnight or a month at
+Mozambique, not without great need after being so long at sea,
+and thence in another month get to Goa. The other course is on
+the outside of the island of St Lawrence or Madagascar, which
+they take when they set out too late, or come so late to the Cape
+as not to have time to stop at Mozambique, and then they go on
+their voyage in great heaviness, because in this way they have no
+port; and, by reason of the long navigation, and the want of
+fresh provisions and water, they fall into sundry diseases. Their
+gums become sore, and swell in such a manner that they are fain
+to cut them away; their legs swell, and all their bodies become
+sore, and so benumbed that they cannot move hand nor foot, and so
+they die of weakness; while others fall into fluxes and agues, of
+which they die. This was the way we were forced to take; and,
+although we had above an hundred and fifty sick, there did not
+die above seven or eight and twenty, which was esteemed a small
+loss in comparison with other times. Though some of our
+fraternity were diseased in this sort, thanks be to God I had
+good health the whole way, contrary to the expectation of many:
+May God send me as good health on the land, if it may be to his
+glory and service. This way is full of hidden rocks and
+quicksands, so that sometimes we dared not sail by night; but by
+the goodness of God we saw nothing all the way to hurt us,
+neither did we ever find bottom till we came to the coast of
+India.</p>
+
+<p>When we had again passed the line to the northward, and were
+come to the third degree or somewhat more, we saw crabs swimming
+that were as red as if they had been boiled; but this was no sign
+of land. About the eleventh degree, and for many days, more than
+ten thousand fishes continually followed, or were round about our
+ship, of which we caught so many that we eat nothing else for
+fifteen days, and they served our turn well; for at this time we
+had no meat remaining, and hardly any thing else to eat, our
+voyage drawing nigh to seven months, which commonly is performed
+in five, when they take the inner passage. These fishes were no
+sign of land, but rather of deep sea. At length two birds were
+caught of the hawk tribe, which gave our people great joy,
+thinking they had been birds of India, but we found afterwards
+that they were from Arabia; and when we thought we had been near
+India, we were in the latitude of Socotoro, an island near the
+mouth of the Red Sea. Here God sent us a strong wind from the
+N.E. or N.N.E. on which they bore away unwillingly toward the
+east, and we ran thus for ten days without any sign of land, by
+which they perceived their error. Hitherto they had directed
+their course always N.E. desiring to increase their latitude; but
+partly from the difference of the needle, and most of all because
+the currents at that time carried us N.W. we had been drawn into
+this other danger, had not God sent us this wind, which at length
+became more favourable and restored us to our right course.</p>
+
+<p>These currents are very dangerous, as they deceive most
+pilots, and some are so little curious, contenting themselves
+with ordinary experience, that they do not take the trouble of
+seeking for new expedients when they swerve, neither by means of
+the compass nor by any other trial. The first sign of approaching
+land was by seeing certain birds, which they knew to be of India;
+the second was some sedges and boughs of palm-trees; the third
+was snakes swimming at the surface of the water, and a certain
+substance which they called <i>money</i>, as round and broad as a
+groat-piece, and wonderfully printed or stamped by nature, as if
+it had been coined money. These two last signs are so certain,
+that they always see land next day, if the wind serve; which we
+did next day, when all our water, for you know they have no beer
+in these parts, and victuals began to fail us.</p>
+
+<p>We came to Goa the 24th day of October, and were there
+received in a most charitable manner. The natives are tawny, but
+not disfigured in their lips and noses, like the Moors and Kafrs
+of Ethiopia. The lower ranks go for the most part naked, having
+only a clout or apron before them of a span long and as much in
+breadth, with a lace two fingers breadth, girded about with a
+string, and nothing more; and thus they think themselves as well
+dressed as we, with all our finery. I cannot now speak of their
+trees and fruits, or should write another letter as long as this;
+neither have I yet seen any tree resembling any of those I have
+seen in Europe, except the vine, which here grows to little
+purpose, as all their wines are brought from Portugal. The drink
+used in this country is water, or wine made from the coco
+palm-tree. Thus much must suffice for the present; but if God
+send me health, I shall have opportunity to write you once again;
+but the length of this letter compelleth me now to take my leave,
+with my best prayers for your most prosperous health. From Goa,
+the 10th November 1579.--Your loving Son,</p>
+
+<p>THOMAS STEVENS.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION II.</p>
+
+<p><i>Journey to India over-land, by Ralph Fitch, Merchant of
+London, and others, in 1583</i>[402].</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION</p>
+
+<p>We learn from the following journal, that the present
+expedition was undertaken at the instigation, and chiefly at the
+expence of Sir Edward Osborne, Knight, and Mr Richard Staper,
+citizens and merchants of London. Besides Fitch, the author of
+the narrative, Mr John Newbery, merchant, William Leedes
+jeweller, and James Story painter, were engaged in the
+expedition. The chief conduct of this commercial enterprize
+appears to have been confided to John Newbery; and its object
+appears to have been, to extend the trade, which the English
+merchants seem to have only recently established through Syria,
+by Aleppo, Bagdat and Basora, to Ormus and perhaps to Goa, in
+imitation of the Italians, so as to procure the commodities of
+India as nearly as possible at first hand. In the prospect of
+being able to penetrate into India, and even into China, Newbery
+was furnished with letters of credence or recommendation, from
+Queen Elizabeth to Zelabdim Echebar, stiled king of Cambaia, who
+certainly appears to have been Akbar Shah, emperor of the Mogul
+conquerors of Hindostan, who reigned from 1556 to 1605; and to
+the emperor of China. The promoters of this enterprise, seem to
+have been actuated by a more than ordinary spirit of research for
+those times, by employing a painter to accompany their commercial
+agents. It is farther presumable that the promoters of the
+expedition, and their agents, Newbery and Fitch, were members of
+the Turkey company; and though the speculation turned out
+unsuccessful, owing to causes sufficiently explained in the
+narrative and its accompanying documents, it is obviously a
+prelude to the establishment of the English East India Company;
+which, from small beginnings, has risen to a colossal height of
+commercial and sovereign grandeur, altogether unexampled in all
+history.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 402: Hakluyt, II. 382.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Hakluyt gives the following descriptive title of this
+uncommonly curious and interesting narrative: "The voyage of Mr
+Ralph Fitch, merchant of London, by the way of Tripolis in Syria
+to Ormus, and so to Goa in the East India, to Cambaia, and all
+the kingdom, of Zelabdim Echebar the great Mogor, to the mighty
+river Ganges, and down to Bengala, to Bacola and Chonderi, to
+Pegu, to Imahay in the kingdom of Siam, and back to Pegu, and
+from thence to Malacca, Zeilan, Cochin, and all the coast of the
+East India; begun in the year of our Lord 1583, and ended in
+1591: wherein the strange rites, manners, and customs of those
+people, and the exceeding rich trade and commodities of those
+countries, are faithfully set down and diligently described, by
+the foresaid Mr Ralph Fitch."</p>
+
+<p>Hakluyt has prefaced this journal, by several letters
+respecting the journey, from Mr Newbery, and one from Mr Fitch,
+and gives by way of appendix an extract from Linschoten,
+detailing the imprisonment of the adventurers at Ormus and Goa,
+and their escape, which happened while he was at Goa, where he
+seems to have materially contributed to their enlargement from
+prison. These documents will be found in the sequel to the
+narrative of Mr Fitch.</p>
+
+<p>It must not however be concealed, that the present journal has
+a very questionable appearance in regard to its entire
+authenticity, as it has obviously borrowed liberally from that of
+Cesar Frederick, already inserted in this work, Vol. VII. p.
+142-244. It seems therefore highly probable, that the journal or
+narrative of Fitch may have fallen into the hand of some
+ingenious <i>book-maker</i>, who wished to increase its interest
+by this unjustifiable art. Under these circumstances, we would
+have been led to reject this article from our collection, were
+not its general authenticity corroborated by these other
+documents, and by the journal of John Eldred, who accompanied
+Newbery and Fitch to Basora. A part of the striking coincidence
+between the journals of Cesar Frederick and Ralph Fitch might
+have arisen from their having visited the same places, and nearly
+by the same route, only at the distance of 20 years; Frederick
+having commenced his journey in 1563, and Newbery and Fitch
+theirs in 1588. Some of the resemblances however could only have
+been occasioned by plagiarism.</p>
+
+<p>It is very difficult to conceive how Fitch, after his
+imprisonment at Goa, and escape from thence under surety to the
+Portuguese viceroy, should have ventured in the sequel to visit
+the Portuguese settlements in Ceylon, Cochin, Calicut, Goa even,
+Chaul, and Ormuz, on his way home again by Basora, Bagdat, Mosul,
+&amp;c. to Aleppo and Tripoli. These parts of his journal, and
+his excursions to the north of Pegu, certainly have a suspicious
+appearance. It is possible that he may have described these
+several routes, historically, in his own journal; and that some
+book-maker, into whose hands his papers may have fallen, chose to
+give these a more interesting appearance, by making Fitch the
+actor in what he only described on the authority of others. It is
+strange that these circumstances should not have occurred to
+Hakluyt, as the narrative of Fitch is inserted in his collection
+immediately following that of Cesar Frederick. Yet with these
+obvious faults, the relation of Fitch is interesting, as the
+first direct attempt of the English to open a trade with India;
+and so far at least, its authenticity is unquestionable, being
+corroborated by other documents that are not liable to the
+smallest suspicion.--E.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>In the year 1583, I Ralph Fitch of London, merchant, being
+desirous to see the countries of the Eastern India, went in
+company with Mr John Newbery, merchant, who had been once before
+at Ormus, together with William Leedes, jeweller, and James
+Story, painter; being chiefly set forth by the right worshipful
+Sir Edward Osburn, knight, and Mr Richard Staper, citizens and
+merchants of London. We shipped ourselves in a ship called the
+Tiger of London, in which we went to Tripoly in Syria, whence we
+went with the caravan to Aleppo in seven days. Finding good
+company at Aleppo, we went from thence to Birra [Bir,] which is
+two days and a half journey with camels.</p>
+
+<p>Bir is a small town, but abounding in provisions, near which
+runs the river Euphrates. We here purchased a boat, and agreed
+with a master and boatmen to carry us to Babylon [Bagdat]. These
+boats serve only for one voyage, as the stream is so rapid that
+they cannot return. They carry passengers to a town called
+Felugia [Feluchia], where the boat has to be sold for very little
+money, what cost fifty pieces at Bir bringing only seven or eight
+at that place. From Bir to Feluchia is a journey of sixteen days;
+but it is not good for one boat to go alone, as if it should
+chance to break, it would be difficult to save the goods from the
+Arabs, who are always robbing thereabouts, and it is necessary to
+keep good watch in the night, when the boat is made fast, as the
+Arabs are great thieves, and will swim on board to steal your
+goods, and then flee away. Against them a musket is a good
+weapon, as they are much afraid of fire-arms. Between Bir and
+Feluchia, there are certain places on the Euphrates where you
+have to pay custom, being so many <i>medins</i> for a <i>some</i>
+or camels load, together with certain quantities of raisins and
+soap, which are for the sons of <i>Aborise</i>, who is lord of
+the Arabs and of that great desert, and hath some villages on the
+river. Feluchia, where the goods coming from Bir are unladed, is
+a small village, from whence you go to Bagdat in one day.</p>
+
+<p>Babylon, or Bagdat, is not a very large town, but is very
+populous, and much frequented by strangers, being the centre of
+intercourse between Persia, Turkey, and Arabia, caravans going
+frequently from it to these and other countries. It is well
+supplied with provisions, which are brought from Armenia down the
+river Tigris, upon rafts made of goat skin bags blown full of
+wind, over which boards are laid, on which the goods are loaded.
+When these are discharged, the skin bags are opened and emptied
+of air, and are then carried back to Armenia on camels to serve
+again. Bagdat belonged formerly to Persia, but is now subject to
+the Turks. Over against Bagdat, on the other side of the Tigris,
+is a very fair village, to which there is a passage across from
+Bagdat by a long bridge of boats, connected by a vast iron chain
+made fast at each side of the river. When any boats have to pass
+up or down the river, a passage is made for them by removing some
+of the boats of this bridge.</p>
+
+<p>The Tower of Babel is on this side of the Tigris towards
+Arabia, about seven or eight miles from Bagdat, being now ruined
+on all sides, and with the ruins thereof hath made a little
+mountain, so that no shape or form of a tower remains. It was
+built of bricks dried in the sun, having canes and leaves of the
+palm-tree laid between the courses of bricks. It stands in a
+great plain between the Tigris and Euphrates, and no entrance can
+be any where seen for going into it.</p>
+
+<p>Near the river Euphrates, two days journey from Bagdat, in a
+field near a place called <i>Ait</i>, there is a hole in the
+ground which continually throws out boiling pitch accompanied by
+a filthy smoke, the pitch flowing into a great field which is
+always full of it. The <i>Moors</i> call this opening the mouth
+of hell; and on account of the great abundance of the pitch, the
+people of the country daub all their boats two or three inches
+thick with it on the outside, so that no water can enter them.
+These boats are called <i>danec</i>. When there is plenty of
+water in the Tigris, the boats may go down from Bagdat to Basora
+in eight or nine days; but when the water is low it requires a
+longer time.</p>
+
+<p>In times past, Basora belonged to the Arabs, but is now
+subject to the Turks. Yet there are some Arabs that the Turks
+cannot subdue, as they occupy certain islands in the great river
+Euphrates, which the Turks have never been able to conquer. These
+Arabs are all thieves, and have no settled dwelling, but remove
+from place to place with their camels, horses, goats, wives,
+children, and household goods. They wear large blue gowns; their
+wives having their ears and noses full of copper and silver
+rings, and wear copper rings on their legs. Basora is near the
+head of the gulf of Persia, and drives a great trade in spiceries
+and drugs, which come from Ormus. The country round produces
+abundance of white rice and dates, with which they supply Bagdat
+and all the country, sending likewise to Ormus and India. I went
+from Basora to Ormus, down the gulf of Persia, in a ship made of
+boards sewed together with <i>cayro</i>, which is a thread made
+of the husks of coco-nuts, and having certain canes, or leaves,
+or straw, sewed upon the seams between the boards, so that these
+vessels leak very much. Having Persia on our left hand, and
+Arabia on our right, we passed many islands, and among others the
+famous isle of Baharin, or Bahrain, from which come the best and
+roundest orient pearls.</p>
+
+<p>Ormus is an island about 25 or 30 miles in circuit, which is
+perhaps the most arid and barren island in the world, as it
+produces nothing but salt, all its water, wood, provisions, and
+every other necessary, coming from Persia, which is about 12
+miles distant; but all the other islands thereabout are very
+fertile, and from them provisions are sent to Ormus. The
+Portuguese have here a castle near the sea, with a captain and a
+competent garrison, part of which dwell in the castle and part In
+the town; in which likewise dwell merchants from all nations,
+together with many Moors and Gentiles. This place has a great
+trade in spices, drugs, silk, cloth of silk, fine tapestry of
+Persia, great store of pearls from Bahrain, which are the best of
+all pearls, and many horses from Persia which supply all India.
+Their king is a Moor, or Mahomedan, who is chosen by the
+Portuguese, and is entirely under subjection to them. Their women
+are very strangely attired, wearing many rings set with jewels on
+their ears, noses, necks, arms, and legs, and locks of gold and
+silver in their ears, and a long bar of gold upon the sides of
+their noses. The holes in their ears are worn so wide with the
+weight of their jewels, that one may thrust three fingers into
+them.</p>
+
+<p>Very shortly after our arrival at Ormus we were put into
+prison, by order of Don Mathias de Albuquerque, the governor of
+the castle, and had part of our goods taken from us; and on the
+11th October, he shipped us from thence, sending us to the
+viceroy at Goa, who at that time was Don Francisco de
+Mascarenhas. The ship in which we were embarked belonged to the
+captain, who carried in it 124 horses for sale. All goods carried
+to Goa in a ship wherein there are horses pay no duties; but if
+there are no horses, you then pay eight in the hundred for your
+goods. The first city of India at which we arrived on the 5th
+November, after passing the coast of <i>Zindi</i>, [Sindi] was
+named Diu, which stands in an island on the coast of the kingdom
+of Cambaia, or Gujrat, and is the strongest town belonging to the
+Portuguese in those parts. It is but small, yet abounds in
+merchandise, as they here load many ships with different kinds of
+goods for the straits of Mecca or the Red Sea, Ormus, and other
+places; these ships belong both to Christians and Moors, but the
+latter are not permitted to pass unless they have a Portuguese
+licence. Cambaietta, or Cambay, is the chief city of that
+province, being great and populous and well built for a city of
+the gentiles. When there happens a famine the natives sell their
+children for a low price. The last king of Cambaia was sultan
+Badur, who was slain at the siege of Diu, and shortly after the
+capital city was reduced by the great <i>Mogor</i>, [Mogul] who
+is king of Agra and Delhi, forty days journey from thence. Here
+the women wear upon their arms, a vast number of ivory rings, in
+which they take so much pride that they would rather go without
+their meat than want their bracelets.</p>
+
+<p>Going from Diu, we came to <i>Damaun</i>, the second town of
+the Portuguese in the country of Cambaia, forty leagues from Diu.
+This place, which has no trade but in corn and rice, has many
+villages under its jurisdiction, which the Portuguese possess
+quietly during peace, but in time of war they are all occupied by
+the enemy. From Damaun we passed to <i>Basaim</i>, [Baseen] and
+from thence to <i>Tanna</i> in the island of Salsette, at both
+which places the only trade is in rice and corn. The 10th
+November we arrived at <i>Chaul</i> on the firm land, at which
+place there are two towns, one belonging to the Portuguese and
+the other to the Moors. That of the Portuguese is nearest the
+sea, commanding the bay, and is walled round; and a little above
+it is the Moors town, subject to a king called <i>Xa-Maluco</i>.
+At this place is a great trade for all Kinds of spices, drugs,
+silk, raw and manufactured, sandal-wood, elephants teeth, much
+China work, and a great deal of sugar made from the nut called
+<i>gagara</i>, [coco]. The tree on which it grows is called the
+<i>palmer</i>, and is the most profitable tree in the world. It
+always bears fruit, and yields wine, oil, sugar, vinegar,
+cordage, coals, or fuel; of the leaves are made thatch for
+houses, sails for ships, and mats to sit or lie on; of the
+branches are made houses, and brooms wherewith they sweep them;
+of the wood ships. The wine issues from the top of the tree, and
+is procured thus: They cut a branch, binding it hard, and hang an
+earthen pot under the cut end, which they empty every evening and
+morning; and still[403] the juice, putting raisins into it, by
+which it becometh strong wine in a short time. Many ships come
+here from all parts of India, and from Ormus and Mecca, so that
+there are many Moors and Gentiles at this place. The natives have
+a strange superstition, worshipping a cow, and having cows dung
+in great veneration, insomuch that they paint or daub the walls
+of their houses with it. They kill no animal whatever, not so
+much as a louse, holding it a crime to take away life. They eat
+no flesh, living entirely on roots, rice, and milk. When a man
+dies, his living wife is burnt along with his body, if she be
+alive; and if she will not, her head is shaven, and she is ever
+after held in low esteem. They consider it a great sin to bury
+dead bodies, as they would engender many worms and other vermin,
+and when the bodies were consumed these worms would lack
+sustenance; wherefore they burn their dead. In all Guzerat they
+kill nothing; and in the town of Cambay they have hospitals for
+lame dogs and cats, and for birds, and they even provide food for
+the ants.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 403: I am apt to suspect the word
+<i>still</i> here used, is only meant to imply fermentation, not
+distillation--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Goa is the chief city of the Portuguese in India, in which
+their viceroy resides and holds his court. It stands in an island
+about 25 or 30 miles in circumference, being a fine city and very
+handsome for an Indian town. The island is fertile and full of
+gardens and orchards, with many palmer trees, and several
+villages. Here are many merchants of all nations. The fleet which
+sails every year from Portugal, consisting of four, five, or six
+great ships, comes first here, arriving mostly in September, and
+remaining there forty or fifty days. It then goes to Cochin,
+where the ships take in pepper for Portugal. Often one ship loads
+entirely at Goa, and the rest go to Cochin, which is 100 leagues
+to the south. Goa stands in the country of Adel Khan, which is
+six or seven days journey inland, the chief city being Bisapor.
+[Bejapoor.]</p>
+
+<p>On our arrival in Goa we were thrown into prison, and examined
+before the justice, who demanded us to produce letters, [of
+licence?] and charged us with being spies; but they could prove
+nothing against us. We continued in prison till the 22d December,
+when we were set at liberty, putting in surety for 2000 ducats
+not to depart from the town. Our surety was one Andreas Taborer,
+who was procured for us by father Stevens, an English Jesuit whom
+we found there, and another religious man, a friend of his. We
+paid 2150 ducats into the hands of Andreas Taborer, our surety,
+who still demanded more; on which we petitioned the viceroy and
+justice to order us our money again, seeing they had it near five
+months, and could prove nothing against us. But the viceroy gave
+us a sharp answer, saying, we should be better sifted ere long,
+and that they had other matter against us. Upon this we
+determined to attempt recovering our liberty, rather than run the
+risk of remaining as slaves for ever in the country, and besides
+it was said we were to have the <i>strapado</i>. Wherefore, on
+the 5th of April 1585 in the morning, we removed secretly from
+Goa; and getting across the river, we travelled two days on foot
+in great fear, not knowing the way, as having no guide, and not
+daring to trust any one.</p>
+
+<p>One of the first towns we came to is called <i>Bellergan?</i>
+where there is a great market of diamonds, rubies, sapphires, and
+many other precious stones. From thence we went to
+<i>Bejapoor</i>, a very large city, where the king keeps his
+court, in which there are many Gentiles, who are gross idolaters,
+having their idols standing in the woods, which they call
+pagodas. Some of these are like a cow, some like a monkey, some
+like a buffalo, others resemble a peacock, and others like the
+devil. In this country are many elephants, which they employ in
+their wars. They have great abundance of gold and silver, and
+their houses are lofty and well built. From thence we went to
+<i>Galconda</i>, the king of which is called <i>Cutub de
+lashach</i>. In this country, in the kingdom of Adel Khan, and in
+the Decan, those diamonds are found which are called of the
+<i>old water</i>. Golconda is a pleasant fair town, having good
+and handsome houses of brick and timber, and it abounds with
+excellent fruits and good water. It is here very hot, and both
+men and women go about with only a cloth bound about their
+middles, without any other clothing. The winter begins here about
+the last of May.</p>
+
+<p>About eight days journey from thence is a sea port called
+Masulipatan, toward the gulf of Bengal, to which many ships come
+out of India, Pegu, and Sumatra, richly laden with spiceries,
+pepper, and other commodities. The country is very fruitful. From
+thence I went to <i>Servidone?</i> which is a fine country, its
+king being called the <i>king of bread</i>. The houses here are
+all built of loam and thatched. The country contains many Moors
+and Gentiles, but there is not much religion among them. From
+thence I went to <i>Bellapore</i>, and so to <i>Barrampore</i>,
+which is in the country of <i>Zelabdim Echebar</i> the great
+<i>Mogor</i>. In this place their money is of silver, round and
+thick, to the value of twenty-pence. It is a great and populous
+country; and in their winter, which is in June, July, and August,
+there is no passing the streets except on horseback, the waters
+are so high. In this country they make great quantities of cotton
+cloth, both white and painted, and the land produces great
+abundance of corn and rice. In the towns and villages through
+which we passed, we found many marriages celebrated between boys
+of eight or ten years old, and girls of five or six. These
+youthful couples did ride both on one horse, very bravely
+dressed, and were carried about the streets with great piping and
+playing, after which they returned home and banqueted on rice and
+fruits, dancing most of the night, and so ended the marriage,
+which is not consumated till the bride be ten years old. We were
+told they married their children thus young, because when a man
+dies his wife is burnt along with him; and by this device they
+secure a father-in-law, in case of the fathers death, to assist
+in bringing up the children that are thus early married, thus
+taking care not to leave their sons without wives, or their
+daughters without husbands.</p>
+
+<p>From thence we went to <i>Mandoway?</i> a very strong town,
+which was besieged for twelve years by Echebar before he could
+reduce it. It stands on a very great high rock, as do most of
+their castles, and is of very great circuit. From thence we went
+to <i>Vgini?</i> and <i>Serringe?</i> where we overtook the
+ambassador of Zelabdim Echebar, attended by a prodigious retinue
+of men, elephants, and camels. In this district there is a great
+trade carried on in cotton, and cloths made of cotton, and great
+store of drugs. From thence we went to Agra, passing many rivers
+which were much swollen by the rains, so that in crossing them we
+had often to swim for our lives[404].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 404: In this route from Masulipatan to
+Agra, there are several places of which the names are so
+disfigured as to be unintelligible. Barrampore and Mandoway, are
+probably Burhampore and Candwah in the northern part of Candeish;
+Vgini and Serringe, may he Ougein and Seronge in
+Malwa.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Agra is a very great and populous city built of stone, having
+large and handsome streets, upon a fine river which falls into
+the gulf of Bengal, and has a strong and handsome castle with a
+broad and deep ditch. It is inhabited by many Moors and Gentiles,
+the king being Zelabdim Echebar, called for the most part the
+great <i>Mogor</i>. From thence we went to <i>Fatepore</i>, where
+the king ordinarily resides and holds his court, which is called
+<i>Derican</i>. This town is larger than Agra, but the streets
+and houses are by no means so good, but it is inhabited by a vast
+multitude of people, both Moors and Gentiles. In Agra and
+Fatepoor, the king is said to have 1000 elephants, 30,000 horses,
+1400 tame deer, 800 concubines, and such numbers of ounces,
+tigers, buffaloes, game-cocks, and hawks as is quite incredible.
+Agra and Fatepoor are two great cities, either of them larger
+than London, and very populous, at the distance of 12 miles from
+each other[405]. The whole road between these places is one
+continued market of provisions and other articles, and is
+constantly as full of people as a street or market in a great and
+populous town. These people have many fine carts, many of which
+are richly carved and gilt, having two wheels, and are drawn by
+two little bulls, not much larger than our biggest English dogs,
+which run with these carts as fast as any horse, carrying two or
+three men in each cart: They are covered with silk or fine cloth,
+and are used like our coaches in England. There is a great resort
+of merchants to this place from Persia and all parts of India,
+and vast quantities of merchandise, such as silks, cloths, and
+precious stones, diamonds, rubies, and pearls. The king is
+dressed in a white <i>cabie</i> made like a shirt, and tied with
+strings on one side, having a small cloth on his head, often
+coloured red and yellow. None enter into his apartments, except
+the eunuchs who have charge of his women.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 405: Futtipoor, certainly here meant, is
+now a place of small importance about 20 miles west from
+Agra.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We remained in Fatepore till the 28th of September 1585, when
+Mr John Newbery took his journey towards Lahore, intending to go
+from thence through Persia to Aleppo or Constantinople, whichever
+he could get the readiest passage to; and he directed me to
+proceed to Bengal and Pegu, promising me, if it pleased God, to
+meet me at Bengal within two years with a ship from England[406].
+I left William Leades the jeweller at Fatepore, in the service of
+the king Zelabdim Achebar, who gave him good entertainment,
+giving a house and five slaves, with a horse, and six S.S. in
+money daily. I went from Agra to <i>Satagam</i> in Bengal, in
+company with 180 boats loaded with <i>salt</i>, opium,
+<i>hinge</i>, lead, carpets, and various other commodities, down
+the river <i>Jemena</i>, [Jumna]; the chief merchants being
+Moors.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 406: In Purchas his Pilgrims, I. 110, is
+the following notice respecting Mr Newberry: "Before that,"
+meaning his journey along with Fitch, "he had travelled to Ormus
+in 1580, and thence into the Continent, as may appear in fitter
+place by his journal, which I have, passing through the countries
+of Persia, Media, Armenia, Georgia, and Natolia, to
+Constantinople; and thence to the Danube, through Walachia,
+Poland, Prussia, and Denmark, and thence to
+England."]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In this country they have many strange ceremonies. The
+bramins, who are their priests, come to the water having a string
+about their necks, and with many ceremonies lave the water with
+both their hands, turning the string with both their hands in
+several manners; and though it be never so cold, they wash
+themselves regularly at all times. These gentiles eat no flesh,
+neither do they kill any thing, but live on rice, butter, milk,
+and fruits. They pray in the water naked; and both dress and eat
+their food naked. For penance, they lie flat on the earth, then
+rise up and turn themselves round 30 or 40 times, lifting their
+hands to the sun, and kiss the earth with their arms and legs
+stretched out; every time they lie down making a score on the
+ground with their fingers, that they may know when the prescribed
+number of prostrations is finished. Every morning the Bramins
+mark their foreheads, ears, and throats, with a kind of yellow
+paint or earth; having some old men among them, who go about with
+a box of yellow powder, marking them on the head and neck as they
+meet them. Their women come in troops of 10, 20, and 30 together
+to the water side singing, where they wash themselves and go
+through their ceremonies, and then mark themselves, and so depart
+singing. Their daughters are married at ten years of age, and the
+men may have seven wives each. They are a crafty people, worse
+than the Jews. When they salute one another, they say,
+<i>Rame</i>, <i>rame</i>.</p>
+
+<p>From Agra I came to <i>Prage</i>[407], where the river Jumna
+enters into the mighty Ganges, and there loses its name. The
+Ganges comes out of the north-west, and runs east to discharge
+its waters into the gulf of Bengal. In these parts there are many
+tigers, and vast quantities of partridges and turtle-doves,
+besides many other kinds of birds. There are multitudes of
+beggars in these countries, called <i>Schesche</i>, which go
+entirely naked. I here saw one who was a monster among the rest.
+He had no clothes whatever, his beard being very long, and the
+hair of his head was so long and plentiful, that it covered his
+nakedness. The nails on some of his fingers were two inches long,
+as he would cut nothing from him; and besides he never spake,
+being constantly accompanied by eight or ten others, who spoke
+for him. If any one spoke to him, he laid his hand on his breast
+and bowed, but without speaking, for he would not have spoken to
+the king.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 407: At the angle of junction between the
+rivers Jumna and Ganges, the city of Allahabad is now
+situated.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We went from <i>Prage</i> down the Ganges, which is here very
+broad, and abounds in various wild-fowl, as swans, geese, cranes,
+and many others, the country on both sides being very fertile and
+populous. For the most part the men have their faces shaven, but
+wear the hair of their heads very long; though some have their
+crowns shaved, and others have all their heads shaven except the
+crown. The water of the river Ganges is very sweet and pleasant,
+having many islands, and the adjoining country is very fertile.
+We stopt at <i>Bannaras</i>, [Benares], a large town in which
+great quantities of cotton-cloths are made, and sashes for the
+moors. In this place all the inhabitants are gentiles, and the
+grossest idolaters I ever saw. To this town the gentiles come on
+pilgrimages out of far distant countries. Along the side of the
+river there are many fair houses, in all or most of which they
+have ill favoured images made of stone or wood; some like lions,
+leopards, or monkeys; some like men and women; others like
+peacocks; and others like the devil, having four arms and four
+hands. These all sit cross-legged, some with one thing in their
+hands, and others with other things; and by break of day or
+before, numbers of men and women come out of the town to these
+places, and wash in the Ganges. On mounds of earth made for the
+purpose, there are divers old men who sit praying, and who give
+the people three or four straws, which they hold between their
+fingers when they bathe in the Ganges; and some sit to mark them
+in the forehead: And the devotees have each a cloth with a small
+quantity of rice, barley, or money, which they give to these old
+men when they have washed. They then go to one or other of the
+idols, where they present their sacrifices. When they have
+finished their washings oblations and charities, the old men say
+certain prayers by which they are all sanctified.</p>
+
+<p>In divers places there stand a kind of images, called
+<i>Ada</i> in their language, having four hands with claws; and
+they have sundry carved stones on which they pour water, and lay
+thereon some rice, wheat, barley and other things. Likewise they
+have a great place built of stone, like a well, with steps to go
+down, in which the water is very foul and stinking, through the
+great quantity of flowers which are continually thrown into the
+water: Yet there are always many people in that water, for they
+say that it purifies them from their sins, because, as they
+allege, God washed himself in that place. They even gather up the
+sand or mud from the bottom, which they esteem holy. They never
+pray but in the water, in which they wash themselves over head,
+laving up the water in both hands, and turning themselves about,
+they drink a little of the water three times, and then go to the
+idols which stand in the houses already mentioned. Some take of
+the water, with which they wash a place of their own length, and
+then lie down stretched out, rising and lying down, and kissing
+the ground twenty or thirty times, yet keeping their right foot
+all the time in the same place. Some make their ceremonies with
+fifteen or sixteen pots, little and great, ringing a little bell
+when they make their mixtures, ten or twelve times. They make a
+circle of water round about their pots and pray, divers sitting
+by them, and one in particular who reaches the pots to them; and
+they say certain words many times over the pots, and when they
+have done, they go to their idols, before which they strew their
+sacrifices, which they think very holy, and mark many of those
+who sit by in the foreheads, which they esteem highly. There
+sometimes come fifty or even an hundred together, to wash at this
+well, and to sacrifice to these idols.</p>
+
+<p>In some of these idol houses, there are people who stand by
+them in warm weather, fanning them as if to cool them; and when
+they see any company coming, they ring a little bell which hangs
+beside them, when many give them alms, particularly those who
+come out of the country. Many of these idols are black and have
+brazen claws very long, and some ride upon peacocks, or on very
+ill-favoured fowls, having long hawks bills, some like one thing
+and some like another, but none have good faces. Among the rest,
+there is one held in great veneration, as they allege be gives
+them all things, both food and raiment, and one always sits
+beside this idol with a fan, as if to cool him. Here some are
+burned to ashes, and some only scorched in the fire and thrown
+into the river, where the dogs and foxes come presently and eat
+them. Here the wives are burned along with the bodies of their
+deceased husbands, and if they will not, their heads are shaven
+and they are not afterwards esteemed.</p>
+
+<p>The people go all naked, except a small cloth about their
+middles. The women have their necks, arms, and ears decorated
+with rings of silver, copper, and tin, and with round hoops of
+ivory, adorned with amber stones and many agates, and have their
+foreheads marked with a great red spot, whence a stroke of red
+goes up the crown, and one to each side. In their winter, which
+is in May, the men wear quilted gowns of cotton, like to our
+counterpanes, and quilted caps like our grocers large mortars,
+with a slit to look out at, tied beneath their ears. When a man
+or woman is sick and like to die, they are laid all night before
+the idols, either to help their sickness or make an end of them.
+If they do not mend that night, the friends come and sit up with
+them, and cry for some time, after which they take them to the
+side of the river, laying them on a raft of reeds, and so let
+them float down the river.</p>
+
+<p>When they are married the man and woman come to the water
+side, where there is an old bramin or priest, a cow and calf, or
+a cow with calf. Then the man and woman, together with the cow
+and calf, go into the river, giving the old bramin a piece of
+cloth four yards long, and a basket cross bound, in which are
+sundry things. The bramin lays the cloth on the back of the cow,
+after which he takes hold of the end of the cows tail, and says
+certain words. The woman has a brass or copper pot full of water;
+the man takes hold of the bramin with one hand, and the woman
+with the other, all having hold of the cow by the tail, on which
+they pour water from the pot, so that it runs on all their hands.
+They then lave up water with their hands, and the bramin ties the
+man and woman together by their clothes[408]. When this is done,
+they go round about the cow and calf, and then give some alms to
+the poor, who are always present, and to the bramin or priest
+they give the cow and calf, after which they go to several of the
+idols, where they offer money, lying down flat on the ground
+before the idol, and kissing the earth several times, after which
+they go away. Their chief idols are black and very ugly, with
+monstrous mouths, having their ears gilded and full of jewels,
+their teeth and eyes of gold, silver, or glass, and carrying
+sundry things in their hands. You may not enter into the houses
+where they stand with your shoes on. In these houses there are
+lamps continually burning before the idols.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 408: This tying of new married folks
+together by the clothes, was used by the Mexicans in old
+times.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From Benares I went down the Ganges to <i>Patenaw</i>, [Patna]
+passing many fair towns and a very fertile country, in which way
+many great rivers enter the Ganges, some as large as itself, by
+which it becomes so broad that in time of the rains you cannot
+see across. The scorched bodies which are thrown into the water
+swim on the surface, the men with their faces down, and the women
+with theirs up. I thought they had tied some weight to their
+bodies for this purpose, but was told no such thing was done.
+There are many thieves in this country, who roam up and down like
+the Arabs, having no fixed abode. Here the women are so decked
+with silver and copper that it is strange to see them, and they
+wear so many rings on their toes that they cannot use shoes. Here
+at Patna they find gold in this manner: They dig deep pits in the
+earth, and wash the earth in large holes, and in these they find
+gold, building the pits round about with bricks, to prevent the
+earth from falling in.</p>
+
+<p>Patna is a long and large town, being formerly a separate
+kingdom, but is now under subjection to the great Mogor. The men
+are tall and slender, and have many old people among them. The
+houses are very simple, being made of earth and covered with
+straw, and the streets are very large. There is here a great
+trade in cotton and cotton cloth, likewise great quantities of
+sugar, which is carried to Bengal and India, much opium, and
+other commodities. He that is chief here under the king is called
+<i>Tipperdas</i>, and is held in much estimation by the people.
+Here in Patna I saw a dissembling prophet, who sat on a horse in
+the market-place, making as if he were asleep, and many of the
+people came and touched his feet with their hands, which they
+then kissed. They took him for a great man, but in my opinion he
+was only a lazy lubber, whom I left sleeping there. The people of
+these countries are much given to these dissembling
+hypocrites.</p>
+
+<p>From Patna I went to <i>Tanda</i> in the land of
+<i>Gouren</i>[409], which is in the country of Bengal. This is a
+place of great trade in cotton and cotton cloth, formerly a
+kingdom, but now subject to the great Mogor. The people are great
+idolaters, going naked with only a cloth about their middles, and
+the country hath many tigers, wild buffaloes, and wild fowl.
+<i>Tanda</i> is about a league from the river Ganges, as in times
+past the river flowed over its banks in the rainy season, and
+drowned a considerable extent of country with many villages, and
+so it yet remains, and the old bed of the river still remains
+dry, by which means the city now stands at a distance from the
+water. From Agra I was five months coming down the Jumna and the
+Ganges to Bengal, but it may be sailed in much shorter time.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 409: In our modern maps Tanda and the
+country or district of Gouren are not to be found; but the ruins
+of <i>Gour</i>, which may have some reference to Gouren, are laid
+down in lat. 24&deg; 52' N. long. 88&deg; 5' E. about seven miles
+from the main stream of the great Ganges, and ten miles south
+from the town of Maida.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I went from Bengal into the country of <i>Couche</i>[410],
+which is 25 days journey north from Tanda. The king is a Gentile,
+named <i>Suckel Counse</i>. His country is very extensive, and
+reaches to within no great distance of Cauchin China, whence they
+are said to procure pepper. The port is called <i>Cacchegate</i>.
+All the country is set with bamboos or canes made sharp at both
+ends, and driven into the earth, and they can let in the water
+and drown the country above knee-deep, so that neither men nor
+horses can pass; and in case of any wars, they poison all the
+waters. The people are all Gentiles, who kill nothing, having
+their ears marvellously great and a span long, which they draw
+out by various devices when young. They have much silk and musk,
+and cloth made of cotton. They have hospitals for sheep, goats,
+dogs, cats, birds, and all kinds of living creatures, which they
+keep when old and lame until they die. If a man bring any living
+creature into this country, they will give money for it or other
+victuals, and either let it go at large or keep it in their
+hospitals. They even give food to the ants. Their small money is
+almonds[411], which they often eat.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 410: This seemeth to be Quicheu, accounted
+by some among the provinces of China.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.
+
+<p>The name of this country is so excessively corrupt, and the
+description of the route so vague, that nothing can be made out
+of the text at this place with any certainty. It is merely
+possible that he may have gone into Bootan, which is to the north
+of Bengal.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 411: In Mexico they likewise use the cacao
+fruit, or chocolate nut, for small money, which are not unlike
+almonds.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From thence I returned to <i>Hugeli</i>, [Hoogly in Bengal]
+which is the place where the Portuguese have their residence in
+Bengal, being in lat. 23&deg; N[412]. About a league from it is
+<i>Satagan</i>[413], called by the Portuguese <i>Porto
+Piqueno</i>, or the little port. We went through the wilderness,
+because the right way was infested by robbers. In passing through
+the country of Gouren we found few villages, being almost all
+wilderness, in which were many buffaloes, wild swine, and deer,
+with many tigers, the grass being everywhere as tall as a man.
+Not far from Porto Piqueno, to the south-westwards, and in the
+country of <i>Orixa</i>, is a sea-port called <i>Angeli</i>[414].
+It was formerly a separate kingdom, the king being a great friend
+to strangers; but was afterwards taken by the king of Patna, who
+did not enjoy it long, being himself conquered by the king of
+Delhi, Agra, and Cambaia, Zelabdim Echebar. Orissa is six days
+journey south-westwards from <i>Satagan</i>. In this place there
+is much, rice, and cloth made of cotton; likewise great store of
+cloth made of grass, which they call <i>Yerva</i>, resembling
+silk, of which they make excellent cloth, which is sent to India
+and other places[415]. To this haven of <i>Ingelly</i> there come
+many ships every year out of India, Negapatnam, Sumatra, Malacca,
+and many other places, and load from hence great quantities of
+rice, much cotton cloths, sugar and long pepper, and great store
+of butter and other provisions for India[416]. Satagan is a very
+fair city for one belonging to the Moors, and is very plentiful
+in all things. In Bengal they have every day a great market or
+fair, called <i>chandeau</i>, in one place or other, and they
+have many boats called <i>pericose</i>, with which they go from
+place to place to buy rice and many other things. These boats are
+rowed by 24 or 26 oars, and are of great burden, but are quite
+open. The gentiles hold the water of the Ganges in great
+reverence; for even if they have good water close at hand, they
+will send for water from the Ganges at a great distance. If they
+have not enough of it to drink, they will sprinkle a little of it
+upon themselves, thinking it very salutary.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 412: More accurately 22&deg; 55' 20" N. and
+long. 88&deg; 28' E. Hoogly stands on the western branch of the
+Ganges, called the Hoogly river, about twenty miles direct north
+from Calcutta.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 413: We thus are enabled to discover nearly
+the situation of Satagan or Satigan, to have been on the Hoogly
+river, probably where Chinsura now stands, or it may have been
+Chandernagor.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 414: Injelly, at the mouth of a small river
+which falls into the Hoogly, very near its discharge into the bay
+of Bengal. Injelly is not now considered as in Orissa, but in the
+district of Hoogly belonging to Bengal, above forty miles from
+the frontiers--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 415: A similar cloth may be made of the
+long grass which grows in
+Virginia.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 416: India seems always here limited to the
+Malabar coast.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From Satagan I travelled by the country of the King of
+Tippara, or <i>Porto Grande</i>[417]. The <i>Mogores</i> or
+<i>Mogen</i> [Moguls] have almost continual wars with Tiperah;
+the Mogen of the kingdom of <i>Recon</i> and <i>Rame</i>, are
+stronger than the King of Tiperah, so that Cittigong or Porto
+Grande is often under the dominion of the king of
+<i>Recon</i>[418]. There is a country four days journey from
+<i>Couche</i> called <i>Bottanter</i>[419], the principal city of
+which is <i>Bottia</i>, and the king is called <i>Dermain</i>.
+The people are tall, strong, and very swift. Many merchants come
+here out of China, and it is said even from Muscovy and Tartary,
+to purchase musk, <i>cambals</i>, agates, silk, pepper, and
+saffron, like the saffron of Persia[420]. This country is very
+great, being not less than three months journey in extent, and
+contains many high mountains, one of them so steep and high that
+it may be perfectly seen at the distance of six days
+journey[421]. There are people on these mountains having ears a
+span long, and they call such as have not long ears asses. They
+say that from these mountains <i>they see ships sailing on the
+sea</i>, but know not whence they come nor whither they go. There
+are merchants who come out of the east from under the sun, which
+is from China, having no beards, who say their country is warm;
+but others come from the north, on the other side of the
+mountains, where it is very cold. These merchants from the north
+are apparelled in woollen cloth and hats, with close white hose
+or breeches and boots, who come from Muscovy or Tartary. These
+report that they have excellent horses in their country, but very
+small; some individuals possessing four, five, or six hundred
+horses and cattle. These people live mostly on milk and flesh.
+They cut off the tails of their cows, and sell them very dear, as
+they are in high request in those parts. The rump is only a span
+long, but the hair is a yard in length. These tails are used for
+show, to hang upon the heads of elephants, and are much sought
+after in Pegu and China.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 417: Perhaps this ought to have been, by
+the country of Tipera <i>to</i> Porto Grande. Porto Grande,
+formerly called Chittigong, is now called Islamabad, and is in
+the district of Chittigong, the most easterly belonging to
+Bengal.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 418: Aracan is certainly here meant by
+<i>Recon</i>; of <i>Rame</i> nothing can be made, unless Brama,
+or Birmah be meant.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 419: <i>Bottanter</i> almost certainly
+means Bootan. Of <i>Bottia</i> we know nothing, but it is
+probably meant to indicate the capital. <i>Dermain</i> may
+possibly be some corruption of <i>Deb raja</i>, the title of the
+sovereign. It is obvious from this passage, that <i>Couche</i>
+must have been to the south of Bootan, and was perhaps
+Coch-beyhar, a town and district in the north-east of Bengal,
+near the Bootan frontier.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 420: The saffon of Persia of the text may
+perhaps mean <i>turmeric</i>. The cambals may possibly mean
+camblets.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 421: These seem to be the mountains of
+Imaus, called Cumao by the natives.--<i>Hakluyt</i>.
+
+<p>The Himmaleh mountains, dividing Bootan from Thibet, said to
+be visible from the plains of Bengal at the distance of 150
+miles.--E.]</p>
+</blockquote>
+
+<p>From Chittigong in Bengal, I went to <i>Bacola</i>[422], the
+king of which country is a Gentile of an excellent disposition,
+who is particularly fond of shooting with a gun. His country is
+large and fertile, having great abundance of rice, and
+manufactures much silk, and cloths of cotton. The houses of this
+city are good and well built, with large streets. The people go
+naked, except a cloth round their waists, and the women wear many
+silver hoops about their necks and arms, and rings of silver,
+copper, and ivory about their legs. From thence I went to
+<i>Serrepore</i> upon the Ganges, the king or rajah of which is
+called Chondery. They are all hereabouts in rebellion against the
+great Mogul, for there are so many rivers and islands that they
+escape from one to another, so that his horsemen cannot prevail
+against them. Great store of cotton cloth is made here.
+<i>Sinnergan</i> is a town six leagues from <i>Serrepore</i>,
+where the best and finest cotton cloth of all the east is
+made[423]. The chief king of all those countries is called
+Isa-khan, being supreme over all the other kings or rajahs, and
+is a great friend to the Christians. Here, as in most parts of
+India, the houses are very small and covered with straw, having a
+few mats hung round the walls and over the door-way, to keep out
+tigers and foxes. They live on rice, milk, and fruits, eating no
+flesh and killing no animals; and though many of them are very
+rich, their sole article of dress is a small cloth before them.
+From hence they send great quantities of cotton cloths and much
+rice, all over India, Pegu, Malacca, Sumatra, and other
+places.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 422: Perhaps Pucouloe, a place of some size
+near Davas between the Ganges and Burhampooter
+rivers.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 423: Serampoor on the Hoogly river agrees
+at least in sound with the Serrepore of the text; but, from the
+context, I rather suspect Serrepore to have stood among the
+numerous islands of the great eastern Ganges, in the province of
+Dava, and near the junction of the Ganges and Burhampooter or
+Megna rivers. Of Sinnergan I can make nothing, only that it must
+have stood in the same district.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>I went from Serrepore the 28th of November 1586 for Pegu, in a
+small ship or foist, commanded by one Albert Caravallos, and
+sailing down the Ganges, we passed by the island of Sundiva,
+Porto grande, or Chittigong, in the country of Tiperah, and the
+kingdom of Recon and Mogen[424], leaving all on our left hand,
+our course being south by east, with the wind at north-west,
+which brought us to the bar of Negrais in Pegu. Had we met with a
+foul wind, we must have thrown many things overboard, for we were
+so lumbered with people and goods, even on the deck, that there
+was scarce a place to sit down upon. From Bengal to Pegu is 90
+leagues. We entered the bar of Negrais, [at the mouth of the
+western branch of the river of Ava], which is an excellent bar,
+having four fathoms water where shallowest. Three days afterwards
+we came to Cosmin, a very pretty town, pleasantly situated and
+abounding in all things. The people are tall and well disposed;
+the women white, round faced, and having small eyes. The houses
+are high built, set upon great high posts, and they go up to them
+by means of ladders for fear of the tigers, which are very
+numerous. The country is very fertile, abounding in great figs,
+oranges, coconuts, and other fruits. The land is very high on the
+sea coast, but after getting within the bar, it is very low and
+much intersected with rivers, so that they go everywhere in
+boats, which they call <i>paraos</i>, in which many of them dwell
+with their wives and children.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 424: Recon has already been supposed to be
+Aracan, which is now quite obvious; but in what manner Mogen may
+refer to Ava, the next country to the south, does not
+appear.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>From the bar of Negrais to the city of Pegu, is ten days
+journey by the rivers. We went from <i>Cosmin</i> to Pegu in
+paraos or boats, and passing up the river we came to
+<i>Medon</i>, a very pretty town, having a wonderful number of
+paraos, for they dwell in them, and hold markets on the water. In
+rowing up and down with their commodities in these boats, they
+have a great <i>sombrero</i> or umbrella over their heads, to
+defend them from the sun, as broad and round as a great cart
+wheel, made of the leaves of the coco or the fig tree, which are
+very light. From Medon we went to Dela, where there are 18 or 20
+great long houses, where they tame and keep many elephants
+belonging to the king, as elephants are caught in the wilderness
+near this place. From Dela we went to <i>Cirian</i>, [Siriam] a
+good town having an excellent sea-port, to which come many ships
+from Mecca, Malacca, Sumatra, and other places; and there the
+ships discharge their cargoes, and send up their goods in paraos
+to Pegu. From Siriam we went to <i>Macao</i>, a pretty town,
+where we left the boats, and in the morning taking
+<i>delingeges</i>, which are a kind of couches made of cords and
+quilted cloth, carried on a <i>stang</i>, or long pole, by three
+or four men, we came to Pegu the same day.</p>
+
+<p>Pegu is a great strong and fair city, having walls of stone
+and great ditches all round about. It consists of two towns, the
+old and the new. In the old town dwell all the stranger
+merchants, and very many native merchants, and all the goods are
+sold in the old town, which is very large, and hath many
+extensive suburbs all round about it, all the houses being of
+bamboo canes and covered with straw. In your house, however, you
+have a warehouse, which they call a <i>godown</i>, built of
+bricks, in which to keep your goods, as often the city takes
+fire, and four or five hundred houses are burnt down, so that
+these <i>godowns</i> are very useful to save your goods. The king
+with all his nobility and gentry dwell in the new town, which is
+a great and populous city, entirely square with fair walls, and a
+great ditch all round about full of water, in which are many
+crocodiles. It has twenty gates, five on each side of the square,
+all built of stone. There are also many turrets for centinels,
+made of wood and splendidly gilded. The streets are the
+handsomest I ever saw, all as straight as a line from one gate to
+the other, and so broad that ten or twelve men may ride abreast
+through them. On both sides, at every door, there are palmer
+trees planted, which bear coco-nuts, and which make a fine shew
+as well as a commodious shade, so that the people may walk all
+day in the shade. The houses are of wood, covered with tiles.</p>
+
+<p>The palace of the king stands in the middle of this city, and
+is walled and ditched all round, all the houses within being of
+wood very sumptuously gilded, and the fore-front is of very rich
+workmanship, all gilded in a very costly manner. The pagoda, or
+house in which his idols stand, is covered with tiles of silver,
+and all the walls are gilt over with gold. Within the first gate
+of the palace is a very large court, on both sides of which are
+the houses for the king's elephants, which are wonderfully large
+and handsome, and are trained for war and for the king's service.
+Among the rest, he has four white elephants, which are a great
+rarity, no other king having any but he; and were any other king
+to have any, he would send for it, and if refused would go to war
+for it, and would rather lose a great part of his kingdom than
+not have the elephant. When any white elephant is brought to the
+king, all the merchants in the city are commanded to go and visit
+him, on which occasion each individual makes a present of half a
+ducat, which amounts to a good round sum, as there are a vast
+many merchants, after which present you may go and see them at
+your pleasure, although they stand in the king's house. Among his
+titles, the king takes that of king of the white elephants. They
+do great honour and service to these white elephants, every one
+of them having a house gilded with gold, and getting their food
+in vessels of gilt silver. Every day when they go to the river to
+wash, each goes under a canopy of cloth of gold or silk, carried
+by six or eight men, and eight or ten men go before each, playing
+on drums, <i>shawms</i>, and other instruments. When each has
+washed and is come out of the river, he has a gentleman to wash
+his feet in a silver basin, which office is appointed by the
+king. There is no such account made of the black elephants, be
+they never so great, and some of them are wonderfully large and
+handsome, some being nine cubits high.</p>
+
+<p>The king has a very large place, about a mile from Pegu, for
+catching wild elephants, in a great grove or wood, having a fair
+court in the middle. There are many huntsmen, who go into the
+wilderness with she-elephants, trained for the purpose, each
+huntsman having five or six which are anointed with a certain
+ointment to entice the wild males to follow them. When they have
+brought a wild elephant within their snares, the hunters send
+word to the town, on which many horsemen and footmen go out, and
+force the wild elephant to enter into a narrow way leading to the
+inner inclosure, and when the he and she are in, then is the gate
+shut upon them. They then get the female out, and when the male
+finds himself alone and entrapped, he cries out and sheds tears,
+running against the enclosure, which is made of strong trees, and
+some of them break their tusks in endeavouring to force their way
+out. The people then goad him with pointed canes, till they force
+him into a narrow stall, in which he is securely fastened with
+strong ropes about his body and legs, and is left there for three
+or four days without food or drink. Then they bring a female to
+him, with food and drink, and unbind the ropes, and he becomes
+tame in three or four days. When they take the elephants to war,
+they fix a frame of wood on their backs with great ropes, upon
+which sit four or six men, who fight with guns, bows and arrows,
+darts, and other weapons; and it is said that the elephant's hide
+is so thick that a musket ball will not pierce them, except in
+some tender place.</p>
+
+<p>The weapons of these people are very bad, their swords being
+short and blunt at the points. They have arquebusses also, but
+they shoot very badly with them. The king keeps great state,
+sitting in public twice every day, having all his nobles, which
+they call <i>shemines</i>, sitting on each side at a good
+distance, and a numerous guard on the outside of all, so that the
+hall, or court is very large. If any one wish to speak to the
+king, he maketh three profound reverences, when he enters, in the
+mid way, and when he comes near the king; at each of these he
+kneels down, holds his hands above his head, and bows with his
+head to the ground three times. He then sits down to speak to the
+king, and if favoured is allowed to come near, within three or
+four paces, but otherwise is made to sit at a greater distance.
+When the king goes to war he is accompanied by a great military
+force. While I was in Pegu, he went to Odia, in the kingdom of
+Siam, with 300,000 men and 5000 elephants. His particular guard
+was 30,000. When the king rides abroad, he is accompanied by a
+strong guard and many nobles, and often rides on an elephant
+having a great castle on its back superbly gilded; sometimes he
+travels on a great frame of wood like a horse-litter, having a
+small house or canopy upon it, covered over head, and open at the
+sides, which is all splendidly gilded with gold, and adorned with
+many rubies and sapphires, of which he hath an infinite store, as
+a vast many of them are found in this country. This couch or
+litter is called <i>serrion</i> in their language, and is carried
+on the shoulders of 16 or 18 men. On these occasions, there is
+much triumphing and shouting made before the king, by great
+numbers of men and women.</p>
+
+<p>This king has little force by sea, having very few ships. He
+has houses quite full of gold and silver, both of which are often
+coming in to him, but very little goes out again, so that he
+makes little account of it, and this vast treasury is always open
+to inspection, in a great walled court with two gates, which are
+always open to all men. In this court there are four houses very
+richly gilded and covered with leaden roofs, in each of which is
+a pagod or idol, of huge stature and vast value. In the first of
+these houses is the image of a king, all in gold, having a golden
+crown on his head richly set with large rubies and sapphires, and
+round about are the images of four children all in gold. In the
+second house is the image of a man in silver, of prodigious size,
+as high as a house, insomuch that the foot is as long as the
+stature of a man. This figure is in a sitting posture, having a
+crown on its head, richly adorned with precious stones. In the
+third house is the statue of a man in brass, still larger than
+the former, with a rich crown on its head. In the fourth house is
+another brazen statue, still larger than the former, having also
+a crown on its head richly adorned with jewels. In another court
+not far from this, there are four other pagodas or idols of
+wonderful size, made of copper, which were formed in the places
+in which they now stand, being of such enormous size that they
+could not be removed. These stand in four separate houses, and
+are gilded all over except their heads, which resemble
+black-a-moors. The expences of these people in gilding their
+images are quite enormous. The king has only one wife, but above
+300 concubines, by whom he is said to have 80 or 90 children. He
+sits in judgment every day, on which occasion the applicants use
+no speech, but give up their supplications in writing, being upon
+long slips of the leaves of a tree, a yard long and about two
+inches broad, written with a pointed iron or stile like a bodkin.
+He who gives in his application, stands at some distance carrying
+a present. If his application is to be complied with, his present
+is accepted and his request granted; but if his suit be denied he
+returns home with his present.</p>
+
+<p>There are few commodities in India which serve for trade at
+Pegu, except opium of Cambaia, painted cottons from San Thome or
+Masulipatam, and white cloth of Bengal, vast quantities of which
+are sold here. They bring likewise much cotton yarn, dyed red
+with a root called <i>saia</i>, which never loses its colour, a
+great quantity of which is sold yearly in Pegu at a good profit.
+The ships from Bengal, San Thome, and Masulipatam, come to the
+bar of Negrais and to Cosmin. To Martaban, another sea-port in
+the kingdom of Pegu, many ships come from Malacca, with
+sandal-wood, porcelains, and other wares of China, camphor of
+Borneo, and pepper from Acheen in the island of Sumatra. To
+Siriam, likewise a port of Pegu, ships come from Mecca with
+woollen cloth, scarlet, velvets, opium, and other goods.</p>
+
+<p>In Pegu there are eight brokers called <i>tareghe</i>, which
+are bound to sell your goods at the prices they are worth,
+receiving as their fee two in the hundred, for which they are
+bound to make good the price, because you sell your goods on
+their word. If the broker do not pay you on the day appointed,
+you may take him home to your house and keep him there, which is
+a great shame for him. And, if he do not now pay you immediately,
+you may take his wife, children, and slaves, and bind them at
+your door in the sun; for such is the law of the country. Their
+current money is of brass, which they call <i>ganza</i>, with
+which you may buy gold, silver, rubies, musk, and all other
+things. Gold and silver is reckoned merchandise, and is worth
+sometimes more and sometimes less, like all other wares,
+according to the supply and demand. The ganza or brass money goes
+by weight, which they call a <i>biza</i>; and commonly this biza
+is worth, in our way of reckoning, about half a crown or somewhat
+less. The merchandises in Pegu are, gold, silver, rubies,
+sapphires, spinels, musk, benzoin, frankincense, long pepper,
+tin, lead, copper, <i>lacca</i>, of which hard sealing-wax is
+made, rice, wine made of rice, [<i>aruck</i>,] and some sugar.
+The elephants eat sugar canes in great quantities, or otherwise
+they might make abundance of sugar.</p>
+
+<p>They consume many canes likewise[425], in making their
+<i>varellas</i> or idol temples, of which there are a prodigious
+multitude, both large and small. These are made round like a
+sugar loaf, some being as high as a church, and very broad
+beneath, some being a quarter of a mile in compass. Within these
+are all of earth, faced round with stone. In these
+<i>varellas</i> they consume a vast quantity of gold, as they are
+all gilded aloft, and some from top to bottom; and they must be
+newly gilded every ten or twelve years, because the rain washes
+off the gold, as they all stand exposed to the weather. Were it
+not for the prodigious quantities of gold consumed in this
+manner, it would be very plentiful and cheap in Pegu. About two
+days journey from Pegu there is a <i>varella</i> or pagoda called
+<i>dogonne</i>, of wonderful bigness, gilded all over from top to
+bottom, to which the inhabitants of Pegu go in pilgrimage; and
+near it is a house where their talapoins or priests preach to the
+people. This house is fifty five paces long, and hath three
+<i>pawnes</i> or covered walks in it, the roof being supported by
+forty great gilded pillars, which stand between the walks. It is
+open on all sides, having a vast number of small gilded pillars,
+and the whole is gilded both within and without. Round about this
+there are many fair houses for the pilgrims to dwell in, and many
+goodly houses in which the talapoins preach, which are all full
+of idols or images, both male and female, all gilded with gold.
+This, in my opinion, is the fairest place in the world. It stands
+very high, having four roads leading to it, all planted on each
+side with fruit-trees, so that the people walk in the shade in
+all these avenues, which are each above two miles long. When the
+grand festival of this varella approaches, one can hardly pass
+any way, on account of the great throngs of people, both by land
+and water, as they flock from all parts of the kingdom of Pegu to
+be present at the festival.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 425: Surely the bamboo, not the sugar cane.
+It may be noticed, that almost the whole of this account of Pegu
+seems to have been borrowed from the relation of Cesar
+Frederick.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In Pegu, there are many priests or talapoins, as they are
+called, who preach against all abuses, and many people resort to
+hear them. When they enter into the <i>kiack</i>, that is to say
+the holy place or temple, there is a great jar of water at the
+door, having a cock or ladle, and there they wash their feet.
+They then walk in, and lift their hands to their heads, first to
+the preacher, and then to the sun, after which they sit down. The
+talapoins are strangely apparelled, having a brown
+<i>cambaline</i> or thin cloth next their body, above which is
+another of yellow many times doubled or folded over their
+shoulders, and these two are girded round them by a broad girdle.
+They have a skin of leather hung by a string round their necks,
+on which they sit, bare headed and bare footed, as they wear no
+shoes. Their right arms are all bare, and they carry a large
+<i>sombrero</i> or umbrella over their heads, which protects them
+from the sun in summer, and from the rain in winter.</p>
+
+<p>Before taking their orders, the talapoins go to school till,
+twenty years old or more, and then go before a head talapoin
+appointed for the purpose, called a <i>rowli</i>, who is the most
+learned of the order, who examines them many times, whether they
+will leave their friends, foregoing the company of women, and
+assume the habit of a talapoin. If any one be content, he is made
+to ride through the streets on a horse, very richly apparelled,
+accompanied by many drums and trumpets, to shew that he is about
+to quit the riches and vanity of the world. A few days
+afterwards, he is again carried through the streets, on a thing
+like a horse litter, called <i>serion</i>, mounted on the
+shoulders of ten or twelve men, and dressed in the habit of a
+talapoin, preceded by drums and instruments of music, and
+accompanied by many talapoins and all his friends. He is thus
+carried to his house without side of the town, and is there
+left.</p>
+
+<p>Every individual talapoin has his own house, which is very
+small, set upon six or eight posts, and to which they have to go
+up by a ladder of twelve or fourteen staves. Their houses are
+mostly by the road sides, and among the trees in the woods. They
+go about, having a great pot of wood or fine earthen ware
+covered, and hung by a broad belt from their shoulder, with which
+they beg their victuals, being rice, fish, and herbs. They never
+ask any thing, but come to the doors, when the people presently
+give them, some one thing and some another, all of which they put
+into their pot, saying they must feed on their alms and be
+contented. Their festivals are regulated by the moon, their
+chiefest being at the new moon, when the people send rice and
+other things to the <i>kiack</i> or church which they frequent,
+where all the talapoins belonging to it meet and eat the victuals
+that are sent. When the talapoins preach, many of their hearers
+carry gifts to them in the pulpit, while preaching, a person
+sitting beside the preacher to receive these gifts, which are
+divided between them. So far as I could see, they have no other
+ceremonials or religious service, except preaching.</p>
+
+<p>From Pegu I went to <i>Jamahey</i>, in the country of the
+<i>Langeiannes</i>, whom we call <i>Jangomes</i>, which is
+twenty-five days journey north from Pegu[426], in which journey I
+passed through many fertile and pleasant countries, the whole
+being low land, with many fine rivers; but the houses are mean
+and bad, being built of canes and covered with straw. This
+country has great numbers of wild elephants and buffaloes.
+<i>Jamahey</i> is a large handsome town, well peopled, and the
+houses are well built of stone, with broad streets. The men are
+strong and well made, having a cloth about their middles,
+bareheaded and with bare feet, as in all these countries they
+wear no shoes. The women are much fairer than those of Pegu. In
+all these countries they have no wheat, living entirely on rice,
+which they make into cakes. To Jamahey there come many merchants
+out of China, bringing great store of musk, gold, silver, and
+many Chinese manufactures. They have here such great abundance of
+provisions, that they do not take the trouble to milk the
+buffaloes as they do in other places. Here there is great
+abundance of copper and benzoin.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 426: The names here used are so corrupted
+as to be utterly unintelligible. Twenty-five days journey north
+from the city of Pegu, or perhaps 500 miles, would lead the
+author into the northern provinces of the Birman empire, of which
+the geography is very little known, perhaps into Assan: Yet the
+<i>Langeiannes</i> may possibly refer to <i>Lang-shang</i> in
+Laos, nearly west from Pegu. <i>Jamahey</i> may be <i>Shamai</i>,
+in the north of Laos; near the N.W. frontier of
+China.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>In these countries, when people are sick, they make a vow to
+offer meat to the devil in case of recovery; and when they
+recover, they make a banquet, with many pipes and drums and other
+musical instruments, dancing all night, and their friends bring
+gifts of coco-nuts, figs, arecas, and other fruits, and with much
+dancing and rejoicing they offer these to the devil, giving him
+to eat, and then drive him out. While dancing and playing, they
+often cry and hallow aloud, to drive the devil away. While sick,
+a talapoin or two sit every night by the sick person, continually
+singing, to please the devil, that he may not hurt them. When any
+one dies, he is carried on a great frame of wood like a tower,
+having a covering or canopy made of canes all gilded, which is
+carried by fourteen or sixteen men, preceded by drums, pipes, and
+other instruments, and being taken to a place out of the town,
+the body is there burned. On this occasion, the body is
+accompanied by all the male friends, relations, and neighbours of
+the deceased; and they give the talapoins or priests many mats
+and much cloth. They then return to the house, where they feast
+for two days. After this, the widow, with all her neighbours
+wives, and female friends, goes to the place where her husband
+was burnt, where they sit a certain time lamenting, and then
+gather up all the pieces of bones which have not been burnt to
+ashes, which they bury; they then return home, and thus make an
+end of mourning. On these occasions, the male and female
+relations shave their heads, which is only done for the death of
+a friend, as they greatly esteem their hair.</p>
+
+<p><i>Caplan</i>, the place where the rubies, sapphires and
+spinels are found, is six days journey from Ava in the kingdom of
+Pegu. There are here many great hills out of which they are dug,
+but no person is allowed to go to the pits, except those employed
+in digging. In Pegu, and in all the countries of Ava,
+Langeiannes, Siam, and of the Birmans, the men wear little round
+balls in their privities, some having two and some three, being
+put in below the skin, which is cut for that purpose, one on one
+side and another on the other, which they do when 25 or 30 years
+of age. These were devised that they might not abuse the male
+sex, to which shocking vice they were formerly much addicted. It
+was also ordained, that the women should not have more than three
+cubits of cloth in their under garments, which likewise are open
+before, and so tight, that when they walk they shew the leg bare
+above the knee.</p>
+
+<p>The <i>bramas</i>, or birmans of the kings country, for the
+king is a birman, have their legs or bellies, or some other part
+of their body according to their fancy made black by pricking the
+skin, and rubbing in <i>anile</i> or indigo, or some other black
+powder, which continues ever after; and this is considered as a
+great honour, none being allowed to do this but the birmans who
+are of kin to the king. Those people wear no beards, but pull out
+the hair from their faces with small pincers made for the
+purpose. Some leave 16 or 20 hairs growing together, some on one
+part of the face and some on another, and pull out all the rest;
+every man carrying his pincers with him, and pulling out the
+hairs as fast as they appear. If they see a man with a beard they
+wonder at him. Both men and women have their teeth black; for
+they say a dog has white teeth, and therefore they have theirs
+black. When the Peguers have a law-suit that is difficult to
+determine, they place two long canes upright in the water where
+it is very deep, and both parties go into the water beside the
+poles, having men present to judge them; they both dive, and he
+who remains longest under water gains his suit.</p>
+
+<p>The 10th of January, I went from Pegu to Malacca, passing many
+of the sea-ports of Pegu, as Martaban, the island of <i>Tavi</i>
+whence all India is supplied with tin, Tanaserim, the island of
+Junkselon, and many others. I came on the 8th of February to
+Malacca, where the Portuguese have a castle near the sea. The
+country without the town belongs to the Malays, who are a proud
+kind of people, going naked with a cloth about their waists, and
+a small roll of cloth round their heads. To this place come many
+ships from China, the Moluccas, Banda, Timor, and many other
+islands of the Javas, bringing great store of spices, drugs,
+diamonds, and other precious stones. The voyages to many of these
+islands belong to the captain of Malacca, so that no one can go
+there without his licence, by which he draws large sums of money
+every year. The Portuguese at Malacca are often at war with the
+king of Acheen in the island of Sumatra; from whence comes great
+store of pepper and other spices yearly to Pegu, Mecca, and other
+places.</p>
+
+<p>When the Portuguese go from Macao in China to Japan, they
+carry much white silk, gold, musk, and porcelain, and bring from
+thence nothing but silver. A great carak goes on this voyage
+every year, and brings from thence about 600,000 crusadoes: and
+all this silver of Japan, and 200,000 more which they bring
+yearly from India, they employ to great advantage in China,
+whence they bring gold, musk, silk, copper, porcelains, and many
+very costly articles richly gilded. When the Portuguese go to
+Canton in China to trade, they are only permitted to remain there
+a certain number of days. When they enter the gates of the city,
+they have to set down their names in a book, and when they go out
+at night must put out their names, as they are not allowed to
+remain in the town all night, but must sleep in their boats. When
+their time of stay is expired, if any one remain, he is liable to
+be imprisoned and very ill used, as the Chinese are very
+suspicious and do not trust strangers; and it is even thought
+that the king of China does not know of any strangers being
+admitted into his dominions. It is likewise credibly reported,
+that the people of China see their king very seldom, or not at
+all, and may not even look up to the place where he sits. When he
+goes abroad, he is carried in a great chair or <i>serion</i>,
+splendidly gilded, on which is made a small house with a lattice
+to look through, so that he cannot be seen but may see about him.
+While he is passing, all the people kneel with their faces to the
+ground, holding their hands over their heads, and must not look
+up till he is past.</p>
+
+<p>In China, when in mourning, the people wear white thread shoes
+and straw hats. A man mourns two years for his wife, the wife
+three years for her husband, the son a year for his father, and
+two years for his mother. During the whole time of mourning the
+dead body is kept in the house, the bowels being taken out,
+filled with <i>chaunam</i> or lime, and put into a coffin. When
+the time expires, it is carried out with much playing and piping,
+and burned. After this they pull off their mourning weeds, and
+may marry again when they please. All the people of China, Japan,
+and Cochin-china, write downwards, from the top of the page to
+the bottom using a fine pencil made of dogs or cats hair.</p>
+
+<p><i>Laban</i> is an island among the Javas, whence come the
+diamonds of <i>the new water</i>. They are there found in the
+rivers, as the king will not allow them to be dug for in the
+rock. <i>Jamba</i> is another island among the Javas, from whence
+also diamonds are brought. In this island the king has a mass of
+earth growing in the middle of the river, which is gold; and when
+he is in want of gold, they cut part of this earth and melt it,
+whereof cometh gold. This mass of earth is only to be seen once a
+year, in the month of April, when the water is low. <i>Bima</i>
+is another island among the Javas, where the women labour as our
+men do in England, and the men keep the house or go where they
+will[427].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 427: All the names of these islands among
+the Javas, or isles of Sunda are unintelligibly
+corrupt.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>The 28th of March 1588, I returned from Malacca to Martaban,
+and thence to Pegu, where I remained the second time till the
+17th of September, and then went to Cosmin where I took shipping;
+and escaping many dangers from contrary winds, it pleased God
+that we arrived in Bengal in November. I had to remain there, for
+want of a passage, till the 3d February 1589, when I embarked for
+Cochin. In this voyage we suffered great hardships for want of
+water; for the weather was very hot, and we were many on board,
+merchants and passengers, and we had many calms. It pleased God
+that we arrived in Ceylon on the 6th of March, where we staid
+five days, to furnish ourselves with water and necessary
+provisions.</p>
+
+<p>Ceylon is a beautiful and fertile island, yet by reason of
+continual wars with the king, every thing is very dear, as he
+will not suffer any thing to be brought to the castle belonging
+to the Portuguese, so that they are often in great want of
+victuals, and they are forced to bring their provisions every
+year from Bengal. The king is called rajah and is very powerful,
+for he comes sometimes against Columbo, where the Portuguese have
+their fort, with 100,000 men and many elephants. But they are all
+naked people, though many of them are excellent marksmen with
+their muskets. When the king talks with any man, he stands on one
+leg, setting the other foot on his knee, with his sword in his
+hand; as, according to their customs the king never sits. He is
+dressed in a fine painted cotton cloth wrapped about his middle;
+his hair long and bound about his head with a small fine cloth,
+and all the rest of his body naked. His guard is a thousand men,
+which stand round about him. They are all Chingalese, who are
+said to be the best kind of the Malabars. They have very large
+ears, as the larger they are the more honourable they are
+esteemed, some being a span long. They burn the wood of the
+cinnamon tree, which gives a pleasant scent. In this island there
+is great store of rubies, sapphires, and spinels of the best
+kind, but the king will not allow the inhabitants to dig for
+them, lest they should tempt his enemies to make war upon him and
+deprive him of his dominions. There are no horses in this
+country, but many elephants, which are not so large as those of
+Pegu, which are of prodigious size; yet it is said all other
+elephants are afraid of those of Ceylon, and refuse to fight
+them, though small. The women of this island wear a cloth round
+their middles, reaching only to the knees, all the rest of their
+bodies being bare. Both men and women are black and very little.
+Their houses are small, being constructed of the branches of the
+palmer or coco tree, and covered with the leaves of the same
+tree.</p>
+
+<p>The 11th of March we departed from Ceylon and doubled Cape
+Comorin. Not far from thence, between Ceylon and the main-land of
+India at Negapatnam, they fish for pearls every year, whence all
+India, Cambaya, and Bengal are supplied. But these pearls are
+<i>not so orient</i> [are not so round or of so fine a water] as
+those of Bahrain in the gulph of Persia. From Cape Comorin we
+went to Coulan, a fort of the Portuguese, whence comes great
+store of pepper for Portugal, as frequently one of the caraks is
+laden here. We arrived at Cochin on the 22d of March, where we
+found the weather very warm, and a great scarcity of provisions,
+as neither corn nor rice grows here, having mostly to be supplied
+from Bengal. They have here very bad water, as the river is far
+off; and by this bad water many of the people are like lepers,
+and many have their legs swollen as big as a mans waist, so that
+they can hardly walk. The people here are Malabars, of the race
+of the Nairs of Calicut, who differ much from the other Malabars.
+These have their heads very full of hair, bound up with a string,
+above which is a great bush of hair. The men are tall and strong,
+and excellent archers, using a long bow and long arrows, which
+are their best weapons; yet they have some fire-arms among them,
+which they handle very badly.</p>
+
+<p>In this country pepper grows, being trained up a tree or pole.
+It is like our ivy berry, but something longer, like an ear of
+wheat. At first the bunches are green, but as they become ripe
+they are cut off and dried. The leaf is much smaller and thinner
+than that of ivy. The houses of the inhabitants are very small,
+and are covered with the leaves of the coco-tree. The men are of
+moderate stature, but the women very little; all black, with a
+cloth about their middles, hanging down to their hams, all the
+rest of their bodies being naked. They have horribly great ears,
+with many rings set with pearls and other stones. All the pepper
+sold in Calicut, and the coarse cinnamon [cassia] grow in this
+country. The best cinnamon comes from Ceylon, and is peeled from
+fine young trees. They have here many palmers, or coco-nut trees,
+which is their chief food, as it yields both meat and drink,
+together with many other useful things, as I said formerly.</p>
+
+<p>The nairs belonging to the Samorin or king of Calicut, which
+are Malabars, are always at war with the Portuguese, though their
+sovereign be at peace with them; but his people go to sea to rob
+and plunder. Their chief captain is called <i>Cogi Alli</i>, who
+hath three castles under his authority. When the Portuguese
+complain to the Samorin, he pretends that he does not send them
+out, but he certainly consents to their going. They range all
+along the coast from Ceylon to Goa, and go in parties of four or
+five paraos or boats together, in each of which are fifty or
+sixty men, who immediately board every vessel they come up with,
+doing much harm on that coast, and every year take many foists
+and barks belonging to the Portuguese. Besides the nairs, many of
+the people in these paraos are Moors. The dominions of the
+Samorin begin twelve leagues from Cochin and reach to near
+Goa.</p>
+
+<p>I remained in Cochin eight months, till the 2d of November,
+not being able to procure a passage in all that time; whereas if
+I had arrived two days sooner I should have got a passage
+immediately. From Cochin I went to Goa, which is an hundred
+leagues; and after remaining three days I went to Chaul, sixty
+leagues from Goa. I remained twenty-three days at Chaul, making
+all necessary preparations for the prosecution of my voyage. I
+then sailed for Ormus, four hundred leagues from Goa, where I had
+to wait fifty days for a passage to Basora.</p>
+
+<p>From Basora I went up the Euphrates and Tigris to Babylon or
+Bagdat, being drawn up most of the way by the strength of men,
+hauling by a long rope. From Bagdat I went by land to Mosul,
+which stands near the scite of the ancient Nineveh, which is all
+ruinated and destroyed. From Mosul I travelled to Merdin in
+Armenia, where a people called <i>Cordies</i> or Curds now dwell.
+I went thence to Orfa, a fair town having a fair fountain full of
+fish, where the Mahometans hold many opinions, and practice many
+ceremonies in reference to Abraham, who they allege once dwelt
+there. From thence I went to Bir, where I crossed the Euphrates,
+and continued my journey to Aleppo; whence, after staying some
+months for a caravan, I went to Tripolis in Syria. Finding an
+English ship there, I had a prosperous voyage to London, where by
+the blessing of God I arrived safe on the 29th of April 1591,
+having been eight years absent from my native country.</p>
+
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<p>Before ending this my book, I have thought right to declare
+some things which are produced in India and the countries farther
+east[428].</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 428: This account of the commodities of
+India so very much resembles that already given in the
+perigrinations of Cesar Frederick, Vol. VII. p. 204, as to seem
+in a great measure borrowed from it, though with some
+variations.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Pepper grows in many parts of India, especially about Cochin;
+much of it growing wild in the fields among the bushes without
+cultivation, and is gathered when ripe. When first gathered it is
+green, but becomes black by drying in the sun. Ginger is found in
+many parts of India, growing like our garlic, the root being the
+ginger. Cloves come from the Molucca islands, the tree resembling
+our bay. Nutmegs and mace grow together on the same tree, and
+come from the island of Banda, the tree being like our
+walnut-tree, but smaller. White sandal wood comes from the island
+of Timor. It is very sweet scented, and is in great request among
+the natives of India, who grind it up with a little water, and
+then anoint their bodies with it, as a grateful perfume. Camphor
+is esteemed very precious among the Indians, and is sold dearer
+than gold, so that I think none of it comes to Christendom. That
+which is compounded comes from China: But the best, which grows
+in canes, comes from the great island of Borneo.</p>
+
+<p>Lignuo aloes are from Cochin China. Benjamin, or Benzoin,
+comes from Siam and Jangomes[429]. Long pepper grows in Bengal,
+Pegu, and the Javas. Musk comes from Tartary[430], Amber[431] is
+supposed by most to come out of the sea, as it is all found on
+the shore.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 429: In Cesar Fredericks peregrinations,
+Benzoin is said to come from Siam and <i>Assi</i>, or Assam,
+which confirms the conjecture already made, of Langeiannes and
+the Jangomes referring to Assam.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 430: Fitch here repeats the ridiculous,
+story respecting the fabrication of musk, already given by Cesar
+Frederick.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 431: Certainly Ambergris, the origin of
+which from the Spermaceti whale has been formerly noticed in this
+work.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Rubies, sapphires and spinels are found in Pegu. Diamonds are
+found in several places, as in Bisnagur, Agra, Delhi, and the
+Javan islands. The best pearls come from the isle of Bahrein in
+the gulf of Persia; and an inferior sort from the fisheries near
+Ceylon, and from Ainan, a large island off the southern coast of
+China. Spodium and many other drugs come from Cambaia or Gujrat,
+commonly called Guzerat.</p>
+
+<p>SECTION III.</p>
+
+<p><i>Supplement to the Journey of Fitch</i>[432].</p>
+
+<p>INTRODUCTION.</p>
+
+<p>In Hakluyt's collection, p. 235--376, are given letters from
+queen Elizabeth to Akbar Shah, Mogul emperor of Hindostan, called
+there Zelabdim Echebar, king of Cambaia, and to the king or
+emperor of China, dated 1583. These are merely complimentary, and
+for the purpose of recommending John Newbery and his company to
+the protection and favour of these eastern sovereigns, in case of
+visiting their dominions; and need not therefore be inserted in
+this place. The following articles however, are of a different
+description, consisting of several letters from John Newbery and
+Ralph Fitch to different friends in England; and of an extract
+from the work of John Huighen Van Linschoten, who was in Goa in
+December 1583, upon their arrival at that emporium of the
+Portuguese trade in India, affording a full confirmation of the
+authenticity of the expedition thus far.--E.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 432: Hakluyt, II. 375--381. and
+399--402.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>No. 1.--<i>Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Richard Hakluyt
+of Oxford, author of the Voyages, &amp;c.</i></p>
+
+<p>Right well beloved, and my assured good friend, I heartily
+commend me unto you, hoping that you are in good health, &amp;c.
+After we set sail from Gravesend on the 13th of February, we
+remained on our coast till the 11th of March, when we sailed from
+Falmouth, and never anchored till our arrival in the road of
+Tripoli in Syria, on the 30th of April. After staying fourteen
+days there, we came to this place, Aleppo, on the 20th of this
+present month of May, where we have now been eight days, and in
+five or six days, with Gods help, we go from hence towards the
+Indies. Since my arrival at Tripoli, I have made diligent
+inquiry, both there and here, for the book of Cosmography of
+Abulfeda Ismael, but cannot hear of it. Some say that it may
+possibly be had in Persia; but I shall not fail to make inquiry
+for it both in Babylon and Balsara, [Bagdat and Basora] and if I
+can find it in either of these places, shall send it you from
+thence. The letter which you gave me to copy out, which came from
+Mr Thomas Stevens in Goa, as also the note you gave me of Francis
+Fernandez the Portuguese, I brought away with me inadvertantly
+among other writings; both of which I now return you
+inclosed.</p>
+
+<p>Great preparations are making here for the wars in Persia; and
+already is gone from hence the pacha of a town called
+<i>Rahemet</i>, and shortly after the pachas of Tripoli and
+Damascus are to follow; but they have not in all above 6000 men.
+They go to a town called <i>Asmerome</i>, [Erzerum] three days
+journey from Trebesond, where they are to meet with sundry
+captains and soldiers from Constantinople and other places, to go
+altogether into Persia. This year many men go for these wars, as
+has been the case every year since they began, now about eight
+years, but very few return again; although they have had the
+advantage over the Persians, and have won several castles and
+strong holds in that country.</p>
+
+<p>Make my hearty commendations to Mr Peter Guillame, Mr Philip
+Jones, Mr Walter Warner, and all the rest of our friends. Mr
+Fitch sends his hearty commendations; and so I commit you to the
+tuition of Almighty God, whom I pray to bless and keep you, and
+send us a joyful meeting. From Aleppo, the 28th of May 1583.</p>
+
+<p>Your loving friend to command in all that I may, JOHN
+NEWBERY.</p>
+
+<p>No. 2.--<i>Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore of
+London</i>.</p>
+
+<p>My last was sent you on the 25th of February last from Deal
+out of the Downs, after which, in consequence, of contrary winds,
+we remained on the coast of England till the 11th March, when we
+sailed from Falmouth. The 13th the wind came contrary with a
+great storm, by which some of our goods were wet; but, God be
+thanked, no great hurt was done. After this, we sailed with a
+fair wind within the Straits, continuing our voyage and anchoring
+no where till the 30th of April, when we arrived in the road of
+Tripoli in Syria, which was a good passage, God make us thankful
+for it. We left Tripoli on the 14th of this month of May, and
+arrived here at Aleppo on the 20th; and with Gods help we begin
+our voyage to-morrow for Bagdat and Basora, and so to India.</p>
+
+<p>Our friend Mr Barret, commendeth him to you, and sent you a
+<i>ball</i> [bale?] of nutmegs in the Emanuel, for the small
+trifles you sent him, which I hope you have long since received.
+He has also by his letter informed you how he sold these things,
+whereof I say nothing, neither having seen the account nor
+demanded it; for, ever since our coming hither, he has been
+constantly occupied about the dispatch of the ship and about our
+voyage, and I likewise in purchasing things here to carry to
+Basora and India. We have bought coral to the value of 1200
+ducats, amber for 400, and some soap and broken glass and other
+small matters, which I hope will serve well for the places we are
+going to. All the rest of the account of the bark Reinolds was
+sent home in the Emanuel, which amounted to 3600 ducats, being
+L.200 more than they were rated; as Mr Staper rated them at
+L.1100, and it is L.1300; so that our part is L.200, besides such
+profit as it shall please God to send thereof; wherefore you
+would do well to speak to Mr Staper for the account.</p>
+
+<p>If you could resolve to travel for three or four years, I
+would advise you to come here, or to go to Cairo, if any go
+there. For we doubt not, if you were to remain here three or four
+months, you would like the place so well, that I think you would
+not desire to return in less than three or four years; as, were
+it my chance to remain in any place out of England, I would
+choose this before all other that I know. My reason is, that the
+place is healthful and pleasant, and the profits good; and
+doubtless the profits will be better hereafter, things being
+carried on in an orderly manner. In every ship, the fourth part
+of her cargo should come in money, which would help to put off
+the rest of our commodities at a good price. It were also proper
+that two good ships should come together, for mutual assistance,
+in which case the danger of the voyage would be as little as from
+London to Antwerp.</p>
+
+<p>Mr Giles Porter and Mr Edmund Porter went from Tripoli in a
+small bark to Jaffa, the same day that we came from thence, which
+was the 14th of this month of May, so that I have no doubt they
+are long since in Jerusalem. God send them and us a safe return.
+At this instant, I have received the account from Mr Barret, and
+the rest of the rings, with 22 ducats and 2 medins in ready
+money; so there remaineth nothing in his hands but a few books,
+and I left certain small trifles with Thomas Bostocke, which I
+pray you to demand. From Aleppo, the 29th May 1583.</p>
+
+<p>No. 3.--<i>Letter from Mr John Newbery to the same</i>.</p>
+
+<p>My last was of the 29th May from Aleppo, sent by George Gill,
+purser of the Tiger. We left that place on the 31st, and came to
+Feluchia, which is one days journey from Babylon [Bagdat,] on the
+19th of June. Yet some of our company came not hither till the
+30th of June, for want of camels to carry our goods; for by
+reason of the great heats at this time of the year, camels are
+very hard to be got. Since our coming here we have found very
+scanty sales, but are told our commodities will sell well in
+winter, which I pray God may be the case. I think cloth, kersies,
+and tin have never been here so low as now. Yet, if I had here as
+much ready money as our goods are worth, I would not doubt to
+make a very good profit of the voyage here and at Basora, and as
+it is, with Gods help, there will be reasonable profit made of
+the adventure. But, with half money and half commodities, the
+best sort of spices and other merchandise from India, may be
+bought at reasonable rates, while without money there is very
+little to be done here at this time to purpose. Two days hence,
+God willing, I purpose going from hence to Basora, and from
+thence I must necessarily go to Ormus, for want of a man who
+speaks the Indian tongue. While at Aleppo, I hired two Nazarenes,
+one of whom has been twice in India, and speaks the language
+well; but he is a very lewd fellow, wherefore I will not take him
+with me.</p>
+
+<p>The following are the prices of wares, as they are worth here
+at present: Cloves and mace the <i>bateman</i>, 5 ducats;
+cinnamon, 6 ducats, and very little to be had; ginger, 40 medins;
+pepper, 75 medins; turbetta[433], 50 medins; neel [or indigo,]
+the <i>churle</i> 70 ducats: the churle is 27-1/2 rotils of
+Aleppo; silk, much better than that which comes from Persia,
+11-1/2 ducats the bateman, each bateman being 7 pounds 5 ounces
+English. From Bagdat this 20th July 1583.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 433: Most likely turmeric, anciently called
+turbith vegetable, in contradistinction to turbith mineral, so
+named from its yellow colour resembling turbith or
+turmeric.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>No. 4.--<i>Letter from, John Newbery to Messrs John Eldred and
+William Scales at Basora</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Time will not permit to give you an account of my voyage after
+my departure from you. But on the 4th day of this present
+September, we arrived here at Ormus; and the 10th day I and the
+rest were committed to prison. The middle of next month, or
+thereabout, the captain proposes sending us all in his ship to
+Goa. The cause for which we have been imprisoned is said to be,
+because we brought letters from Don Antonio: But the truth is,
+Michael Stropene is the only cause, through letters written to
+him by his brother from Aleppo. God knows how we may be dealt
+with at Goa; and therefore, if you our masters can procure that
+the king of Spain may send his letters for our release, you would
+do us great good, for they cannot with any justice put us to
+death, though it may be that they will cut our throats, or keep
+us long in prison. Gods will be done.</p>
+
+<p>All the commodities I brought to this place had been well
+sold, if this trouble had not come upon us. You shall do well to
+send a messenger in all speed by land from Basora to Aleppo, to
+give notice of this mischance, even though it may cost 30 or 40
+crowns, that we may be the sooner released, and I shall thereby
+be the better able to recover again what is now like to be lost.
+From prison in Ormus, this 21st September 1583.</p>
+
+<p>No. 5.--<i>Letter Mr J. Newbery to Messrs Eldred and
+Scales</i>.</p>
+
+<p>The bark of the Jews is arrived here two days ago, by which I
+am sure you wrote; but your letters are not likely to come to my
+hands. The bringer of this hath shewed me very great courtesy,
+for which I pray you to shew him what favour you can. About the
+middle of next month, I think we shall depart from hence: God be
+our guide. I think Andrew will go by land to Aleppo; and I pray
+you to further him what you may: But, if he should not go, then I
+pray you to dispatch a messenger in all speed. I can say no more,
+but beg you to do for me what I should do for you in the like
+case. From prison in Ormus, the 24th September 1583.</p>
+
+<p>No. 6.--<i>Letter from Mr Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore</i>.</p>
+
+<p>My last from Ormus certified you what had happened to me
+there, with the rest of my company; as in four days after our
+arrival we were all committed to prison, except one Italian, who
+came with me from Aleppo, whom the captain never examined, except
+asking what countryman he was; but I believe Michael Stropene,
+who accused us, had informed the captain of him. The first day of
+our arrival at Ormus, this Stropene accused us of being spies for
+Don Antonio, besides diverse other lies; yet if we had been of
+any other country than England, we might freely have traded with
+them. Although we be Englishmen, I know no reason why we may not
+as well trade from place to place as the natives of other
+countries; for all nations may and do come freely to Ormus, as
+Frenchmen, Flemings, Germans, Hungarians, Italians, Greeks,
+Armenians, Nazarenes, Turks, Moors, Jews, and Gentiles, Persians,
+and Muscovites. In short, there is no nation they seek to
+trouble, but only ours; wherefore it were contrary to all justice
+and reason that they should suffer all nations to trade with
+them, and forbid us. Now indeed I have as great liberty as those
+of any other nation, except it be to leave the country, which as
+yet I desire not. But hereafter, and I think ere long, if I shall
+be desirous to go from hence, that they will not refuse me
+licence. Before we were suffered to come out of prison, I was
+forced to put in sureties for 2000 pardaos, not to depart from
+hence without licence of the viceroy; and except this, we have
+now as much liberty as any one, for I have got back our goods,
+and have taken a house in the chiefest street called the <i>Rue
+drette</i>, where we sell our goods.</p>
+
+<p>There were two causes which moved the captain of Ormus to
+imprison us, and afterwards to send us to Goa. The first was
+because Michael Stropene had most falsely accused us of many
+matters. The other was, because when Mr Drake was at the Molucca
+islands, he caused two pieces of cannon to be fired at a
+Portuguese galeon belonging to the king, at least so they allege.
+But of these things I did not know when at Ormus. In the same
+ship which brought us to Goa, came the chief justice of Ormus,
+called the veedor general of that place, who had been there three
+years, so that his time was expired. This veedor is a great
+friend to the captain of Ormus, and sent for me into his chamber,
+one day after coming here to Goa, and began to demand many things
+at me, to which I made answers. Among other things, he said that
+Mr Drake had been sent out of England with many ships, and had
+gone to Molucca where he loaded cloves, and finding a Portuguese
+galeon there belonging to the king, had shot two pieces of his
+great ordnance against her. Perceiving this grieved them much, I
+asked if they meant to be revenged on me for what had been done
+by Mr Drake: To which he answered no; though his meaning was
+yes.</p>
+
+<p>He said moreover, that the captain of Ormus had sent me to
+Goa, that the viceroy might learn the news from me respecting Don
+Antonio, and whether he were in England or not; and that it might
+possibly be all for the best my being sent hither; which I trust
+in God may so fall out, though contrary to his expectation and
+intention: For, if it had not pleased God to influence the minds
+of the archbishop, and two padres or Jesuits of the college of St
+Paul, to stand our friends, we might have rotted in prison. The
+archbishop is a very good man, who has two young men in his
+service, one called Bernard Borgers born in Hamburgh, and the
+other named John Linscot[434], a native of Enkhuysen, who did us
+especial service; for by them the archbishop was often reminded
+of our case. The two good fathers who laboured so much for us
+were padre Mark, a native of Bruges in Flanders, and padre Thomas
+Stevens[435], born in Wiltshire in England. I chanced likewise to
+fall in with here a young man, Francis de Rea, who was born in
+Antwerp, but was mostly brought up in London, with whom I became
+acquainted in Aleppo, who also has done me much service.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 434: John Huighen van Linschoten, the
+author of the book respecting the East Indies, formerly quoted,
+and from which a second quotation will be given in this
+supplement.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 435: This is he whose letter to his father
+from Goa has been already inserted, and who was sometime of New
+College in Oxford.--Hakluyt.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>We remained many days in prison at Ormus, and were a long
+while at sea coming hither. Immediately on our arrival at this
+place we were sent to prison, whence next day we were brought
+before the chief justice or veedor, to be examined, after which
+we were remanded to prison. When we had been thirteen days in
+prison, James Storie, the painter who accompanied us, went into
+the monastery of St Paul, where he remains, being made one of the
+company, which life he seems to like[436]. Upon St Thomas day,
+12th December, 22 days after our arrival here, I was liberated
+from prison, and the next day Ralph Fitch and William Bets[437]
+came out.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 436: It will appear afterwards that he did
+not continue.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 437: In the narrative of Fitch no such name
+occurs, but William Leedes jeweller, is named as one of the
+party. Perhaps he ought to have been named by Fitch, William Bets
+of Leeds.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>If these troubles had not occurred, I think I was in a fair
+way of making as good a voyage as was ever made with such a sum
+of money. Many of our things I sold very well, both here and at
+Ormus while in prison, although the captain of Ormus wished me to
+have sold all I had before I embarked; so, by his permission, I
+went sundry times from the castle in the mornings, accompanied by
+officers, and sold things, and returned again at night to prison.
+They wrote down every thing that I sold; and at my embarking, the
+captain directed me to deliver all my money and goods into the
+hands of the <i>scrivano</i> or purser of the ship, which I did,
+and the scrivano left an acknowledgement with the captain, that
+myself with the money and goods should be delivered up to the
+veedor general in India. But on our arrival here, the veedor
+would not meddle with either money or goods, seeing that no crime
+was substantiated against us: Wherefore the goods remained in the
+ship nine or ten days after our arrival; and then, as the ship
+was to sail from thence, the scrivano sent the goods on shore,
+where they remained a day and a night without any one to receive
+them. In the end, they permitted the bearer of this letter to
+receive them, who put them into a house which he hired for me, in
+which they remained four or five days. When afterwards they ought
+to have delivered the money, it was ordered by the <i>veedor</i>,
+that both the money and goods should be given into the custody of
+the <i>positor</i>, where they remained for fourteen days after I
+was liberated from prison.</p>
+
+<p>When in Aleppo, I bought a fountain of silver gilt, six
+knives, six spoons, and one fork, all trimmed with coral, for 25
+chekins, which the captain of Ormus took to himself and only paid
+20 pardaos, or 100 larines, though they were worth there or here
+at Goa 100 chekins. Also he had five emeralds set in gold, worth
+five or six hundred crowns, for which he only paid 100 pardaos.
+He likewise took 19-1/2 pikes of cloth, which cost 20 shillings
+the pike at London, and was worth 9 or 10 crowns the pike at
+Ormus, for which he only paid 12 larines. He also had two pieces
+of green kersie, worth 24 pardaos each; besides divers other more
+trifling articles which he and the officers took at similar
+inferior prices, and some for nothing at all. But the real cause
+of all was Michal Stropene, who came to Ormus without a penny,
+and is now worth thirty or forty thousand crowns, and is grieved
+that any stranger should trade there but himself. But that shall
+not avail him; for I trust yet to go both hither and thither, and
+to buy and sell as freely as he or any other.</p>
+
+<p>There is a great deal of good to be done here in divers of our
+commodities; and likewise there is much profit to be made with
+the commodities of this country, when carried to Aleppo. It were
+long for me to write, and tedious for you to read, all the
+incidents which have occurred to me since we parted; but the
+bearer is able to inform you of every thing that has befallen me
+since my arrival in Ormus. It is my intention to remain here in
+Goa; wherefore, if you write me, you may send your letters to
+some friend in Lisbon, to be forwarded from thence by the India
+ships. Let your direction, therefore be in Portuguese or Spanish,
+by which they will the more readily reach me.--From Goa, this
+20th of January 1584.</p>
+
+<p>No, 7.--<i>Letter from Mr Ralph Fitch to Mr Leonard
+Poore</i>.</p>
+
+<p>Loving friend, &amp;c. Since my departure from Aleppo, I have
+not written you, because at Bagdat I was ill of flux, and
+continued in all the way thence to Basora, which was twelve days
+journey down the Tigris, when we had extremely hot weather, bad
+fare, and worse lodging, all of which increased my disease;
+besides which our boat was pestered with people. During eight
+entire days I hardly eat any thing, so that if we had been two
+days longer on the water, I verily believe I had died. But,
+thanks be to God, I presently mended after coming to Basora. We
+remained there fourteen days, when we embarked for Ormus, where
+we arrived on the 5th of September, and were put in prison on the
+9th of the same month, where we continued till the 11th of
+October, and were then shipt for this city of Goa, in the ship
+belonging to the captain of Ormus, with 114 horses[438], and
+about 200 men. Passing by Diu and Chaul, at which place we landed
+on the 20th November, we arrived at Goa on the 29th of that
+month, where, for our better entertainment, we were committed to
+a fair strong prison, in which we continued till the 22d of
+December. It pleased God, that there were two padres there who
+befriended us, the one an Englishman named Thomas Stevens, the
+other a Fleming named Marco, both Jesuits of the college of St
+Paul. These good men sued for us to the viceroy and other
+officers, and stood us in such good stead as our lives and goods
+were worth: But for them, even if we had escaped with our lives,
+we must have suffered a long imprisonment.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 438: In the narrative of Fitch, called 124,
+which might easily be mistaken either way in
+transcription.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When we had been fourteen days in prison, they offered us
+leave to go at large in the town, if we would give sureties, for
+2000 ducats, not to depart the country without the licence of the
+viceroy. Being unable to procure any such, the before mentioned
+friendly fathers of St Paul procured sureties for us. The
+Italians are much offended and displeased at our enlargement, and
+many wonder at our delivery. James Storie the painter has gone
+into the cloister of St Paul, as one of their order, and seems to
+like the situation. While we were in prison, both at Ormus and
+here, a great deal of our goods were pilfered and lost, and we
+have been at great charges in gifts and otherwise, so that much
+of our property is consumed. Of what remains, much will sell very
+well, and for some we will get next to nothing. The viceroy is
+gone to Chaul and Diu as it is said to win a castle of the Moors,
+and it is thought he will return about Easter; when I trust in
+God we shall procure our liberty, and have our sureties
+discharged. It will then, I think, be our best way for one or
+both of us to return, as our troubles have been very great, and
+because so much of our goods have been spoiled and lost: But if
+it should please God that I come to England, I will certainly
+return here again. It is a charming country, and extremely
+fruitful, having summer almost the whole year, but the most
+delightful season is about Christmas. The days and nights are of
+equal length throughout the whole year, or with very little
+difference; and the country produces a most wonderful abundance
+of fruit. After all our troubles we are fat and in good health,
+for victuals are plentiful and cheap. I omit to inform you of
+many strange things till we meet, as it would be too long to
+write of them. And thus I commit you to God, &amp;c. From Goa in
+the East Indies, 25th January 1584.</p>
+
+<p>No. 8.--<i>The Report of John Huighen van Linschoten,
+concerning the imprisonment of Newbery and Fitch; which happened
+while he was at Goa</i>.</p>
+
+<p>In the month of December 1583, four Englishmen arrived at
+Ormus, who came by way of Aleppo in Syria, having sailed from
+England by the Mediterranean to Tripoli, a town and haven in
+Syria, where all ships discharge their wares and merchandise for
+Aleppo, to which they are carried by land, which is a journey of
+nine days. In Aleppo there reside many merchants and factors of
+all nations, as Italians, French, English, Armenians, Turks, and
+Moors, every one following his own religion, and paying tribute
+to the grand Turk. It. is a place of great trade, whence twice
+every year there go two <i>cafilas</i> or caravans, containing
+great companies of people and camels, which travel to India,
+Persia, Arabia, and all the adjoining countries, dealing in all
+kinds of merchandise both to and from these countries, as I have
+already declared in another part of this book.</p>
+
+<p>Three of these Englishmen were sent by the company of English
+who reside in Aleppo, to see if they might keep any factors at
+Ormus, and so traffic in that place, as the Italians do, that is
+the Venetians, who have their factors in Ormus, Goa, and Malacca,
+and trade there, both for pearls and precious stones, and for
+other wares and spices of these countries, which are carried
+thence over-land to Venice. One of these Englishmen, Mr John
+Newbery, had been once before in the said town of Ormus, and had
+there taken good information of the trade; and on his advice the
+others were then come hither along with him, bringing great store
+of merchandise; such as cloths, saffron, all kinds of drinking
+glasses and haberdashery wares, as looking-glasses, knives, and
+such like stuff; and to conclude, they brought with them every
+kind of small wares that can be thought of.</p>
+
+<p>Although these wares amounted to great sums of money, they
+were yet only as a shadow or colour, to give no occasion of
+mistrust or suspicion, as their principal intention was to
+purchase great quantities of precious stones, as diamonds,
+pearls, rubies, &amp;c. to which end they brought with them a
+great sum of money in silver and gold, and that very secretly,
+that they might not be robbed of it, or run into danger on its
+account[439]. On their arrival at Ormus, they hired a shop and
+began to sell their wares; which being noticed by the Italians,
+whose factors reside there as I said before, and fearing if these
+Englishmen got good vent for their commodities, that they would
+become residents and so daily increase, which would be no small
+loss and hindrance to them, they presently set about to invent
+subtle devices to hinder them. To which end, they went
+immediately to the captain of Ormus, who was then Don Gonzalo de
+Menezes[440], saying that these Englishmen were heretics come to
+spy the country, and that they ought to be examined and punished
+as enemies, for a warning to others. Being friendly to these
+Englishmen, as one of them had been there before and had given
+him presents, the captain could not be prevailed upon to injure
+them, but shipped them with all their wares for Goa, sending them
+to the viceroy, that he might examine and deal with them as he
+thought good.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 439: This seems a mere adoption of the
+rumours of the Italians; as Newbery distinctly complains of the
+want of cash, by which he might have made very profitable
+purchases in Aleppo, Bagdat, and Basora.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 440: The captain of the castle of Ormus is
+named Don Mathias de Albuquerque by Fitch.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>Upon their arrival at Goa, they were cast into prison, and
+were in the first place examined whether or not they were good
+Christians. As they could only speak very bad Portuguese, while
+two of them spoke good Dutch, having resided several years in the
+low countries, a Dutch Jesuit who was born at Bruges in Flanders,
+and had resided thirty years in India, was sent to them, to
+undermine and examine them; in which they behaved so well, that
+they were holden and esteemed for good and Catholic Christians;
+yet were they still suspected, as being strangers and Englishmen.
+The Jesuits told them that they would be sent prisoners into
+Portugal, and advised them to leave off their trade in
+merchandise, and to become Jesuits; promising in return to defend
+them from all their troubles. The cause of thus earnestly
+persuading them was this: The Dutch Jesuit had been secretly
+informed that they had great sums of money, and sought to get
+that for the order; as the first vow and promise made on becoming
+a Jesuit is, to procure and advance the welfare of the order by
+every possible means. Although the Englishmen refused this,
+saying that they were quite unfit for such matters, yet one of
+them, a painter, who came with the other three to see the country
+and seek his fortune, and was not sent by the English merchants,
+partly through fear, and partly from want of means to relieve
+himself from prison, promised to become a Jesuit. And although
+the fathers knew that he was not one of those who had the
+treasure, yet, because he was a painter, of whom there are few in
+India, and that they had great need of one to paint their church,
+which would cost them great charges to bring from Portugal, they
+were very glad of him, and hoped in time to get all the rest,
+with all their money, into their fellowship.</p>
+
+<p>To conclude, they made this painter a Jesuit, and he continued
+some time in their college, where they gave him plenty of work to
+perform, and entertained him with all the favour and friendship
+they could devise, all to win the rest to become their prey. But
+the other three remained in prison in great fear, because they
+did not understand any who came to them, neither did any one
+understand what they said. They were at last informed of certain
+Dutchmen who dwelt with the archbishop, and were advised to send
+for them, at which they greatly rejoiced, and sent for me and
+another Dutchman, desiring us to come and speak with them, which
+we presently did. With tears in their eyes, they complained to us
+of their hard usage, explaining to us distinctly, as is said
+before, the true cause of their coming to Ormus, and praying us
+for God's sake to help them to their liberty upon sureties,
+declaring themselves ready to endure whatever could be justly
+ordained for them, if they were found to be otherwise than they
+represented, or different from other travelling merchants who
+sought to profit by their wares.</p>
+
+<p>Promising to do our best for them, we at length prevailed on
+the archbishop to deliver a petition for them to the viceroy, and
+persuaded him to set them at liberty and restore their goods, on
+condition of giving security to the amount of 2000 pardaos, not
+to depart the country without licence. Thereupon they presently
+found a citizen who became their surety in 2000 pardaos, to whom
+they paid in hand 1300, as they said they had no more money;
+wherefore he gave them credit for the rest, seeing that they had
+great store of merchandise, through which he might at any time be
+satisfied, if needful. By these means they were delivered out of
+prison, on which they hired a house, and began to open shop; so
+that they sold many of their goods, and were presently well known
+among the merchants, as they always respected gentlemen,
+especially such as bought their wares, shewing them much honour
+and courtesy, by which they won much credit, and were beloved of
+all men, so that all favoured them, and were ready to shew them
+favour. To us they shewed great friendship, and for our sakes the
+archbishop favoured them much, and gave them good countenance,
+which they well knew how to increase by offering him many
+presents, although he would not receive them, as he never
+accepted gift or present from any person. They behaved themselves
+in all things so discreetly, that no one carried an evil eye or
+evil thought towards them. This did not please the Jesuits, as it
+hindered what they still wished and hoped for; so that they still
+ceased not to intimidate them by means of the Dutch Jesuit,
+intimating that they would be sent prisoners to Portugal, and
+counselling them to become Jesuits in the cloister of St Paul,
+when they would be securely defended from all troubles. The
+Dutchman pretended to give them this advice as a friend, and one
+who knew certainly that it was so determined in the viceroy's
+council, and that he only waited till the ship sailed for
+Portugal; using this and other devices to put them in fear, and
+so to effect their purpose.</p>
+
+<p>The Englishmen durst not say any thing to the contrary, but
+answered that they would remain as they were yet a little while
+and consider their proposal, thus putting the Jesuits in hopes of
+their compliance. The principal of these Englishmen, John
+Newbery, often complained to me, saying that he knew not what to
+think or say of these things, or how they might get rid of these
+troubles. In the end, they determined with themselves to depart
+from Goa; and secretly, by means of other friends, they employed
+their money in the purchase of precious stones, which they were
+the better able to effect as one of them was a jeweller, who came
+with them for that purpose. Having concluded on this step, they
+durst not make it known to any one, not even to us, although they
+used to consult us on all occasions and tell us every thing they
+knew.</p>
+
+<p>On one of the Whitson holidays, they went out to recreate
+themselves about three miles from Goa, in the mouth of the river,
+in a country called <i>Bardez</i>[441], taking with them a supply
+of victuals and drink. That they might not be suspected, they
+left their house and shop, with same of their wares unsold, in
+the charge of a Dutch boy whom we had procured for them, and who
+remained in their house, quite ignorant of their intentions. When
+in Bardez, they procured a <i>patamer</i>, one of the Indian
+post-boys or messengers who carry letters from place to place,
+whom they hired as a guide. Between Bardez and the main-land
+there is only a small river, in a manner half dry, which they
+passed over on foot, and so travelled away by land, and were
+never heard of again; but it is thought they arrived in Aleppo,
+though no one knows: with certainty. Their great dependence is
+upon John Newbery, who can speak the Arabian language, which is
+used in all these countries, or at least understood, being as
+commonly known in all the east as French is with us.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 441: Bardes is an island a short way north
+from the island of Goa, and only divided from the main-land by a
+small river or creek.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>On the news of their departure being brought to Goa, there was
+a great stir and murmuring among the people, as all much
+wondered. Many were of opinion that we had counselled them to
+withdraw, and presently their surety seized on the remaining
+goods, which might amount to the value of 200 pardaos; and with
+that and the money he had received of the Englishmen, he went to
+the viceroy, and delivered it to him, the viceroy forgiving him
+the rest. This flight of the Englishmen grieved the Jesuits
+worst, as they had lost so rich a prey, which they made
+themselves secure of. The Dutch Jesuit came to ask us if we knew
+of their intentions, saying, if he had suspected as much he would
+have dealt differently by them, for he had once in his hands a
+bag of theirs, in which were 40,000 <i>veneseanders</i>, [442],
+each worth two pardaos, at the time when they were in prison. But
+as they had always given him to believe he might accomplish his
+desire of getting them to profess in the Jesuit college, he had
+given them their money again, which otherwise they would not have
+come by so easily, or peradventure never. This he said openly,
+and in the end he called them heretics, spies, and a thousand
+other opprobrious names.</p>
+
+<blockquote>[Footnote 442: This word <i>veneseander</i>, or
+venetiander, probably means, a Venetian chekin.--E.]</blockquote>
+
+<p>When the English painter, who had become a Jesuit, heard that
+his countrymen were gone, and found that the Jesuits did not use
+him with so great favour as at first, he repented himself; and
+not having made any solemn vow, and being counselled to leave
+their house, he told them that he made no doubt of gaining a
+living in the city, and that they had no right to keep him
+against his inclination, and as they could not accuse him of any
+crime, he was determined not to remain with them. They used all
+the means they could devise to keep him in the college, but he
+would not stay, and, hiring a house in the city, he opened shop
+as a painter, where he got plenty of employment, and in the end
+married the daughter of a mestee, so that he laid his account to
+remain there as long as he lived. By this Englishman I was
+instructed in all the ways, trades, and voyages of the country
+between Aleppo, and Ormus, and of all the rules and customs
+observed in the overland passage, as also of all the towns and
+places on the route. Since the departure of these Englishmen from
+Goa, there have never arrived any strangers, either English or
+others, by land, except Italians, who are constantly engaged in
+the overland trade, going and coming continually.</p>
+
+<h2>END OF VOLUME SEVENTH.</h2>
+
+<hr align="center" width="50%">
+<hr align="center" width="25%">
+<pre>
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Volume VII, by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME VII ***
+
+***** This file should be named 13287-h.htm or 13287-h.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/2/8/13287/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
+</pre>
+</body>
+</html>
+
diff --git a/old/13287.txt b/old/13287.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..744392c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13287.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,21102 @@
+The Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of Voyages
+and Travels, Volume VII, by Robert Kerr
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: A General History and Collection of Voyages and Travels, Volume VII
+
+Author: Robert Kerr
+
+Release Date: August 25, 2004 [EBook #13287]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME VII ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+A GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+ARRANGED IN SYSTEMATIC ORDER:
+
+FORMING A COMPLETE HISTORY OF THE ORIGIN AND PROGRESS OF NAVIGATION,
+DISCOVERY, AND COMMERCE, BY SEA AND LAND, FROM THE EARLIEST AGES TO THE
+PRESENT TIME.
+
+BY ROBERT KERR, F.R.S. & F.A.S. EDIN.
+
+ILLUSTRATED BY MAPS AND CHARTS.
+
+VOL. VII.
+
+MDCCCXXIV.
+
+
+
+
+CONTENTS OF VOL. VII.
+
+PART II. BOOK III. CONTINUED.
+
+CHAP. IV. Continued.
+
+SECT. XIII. Account of an expedition of the Portuguese from India to
+Madagascar in 1613.
+
+XIV. Continuation of the transactions of the Portuguese in India, from
+1617 to 1640: and the conclusion of the Portuguese Asia of Manuel de
+Faria.
+
+XV. Occurrences in Pegu, Martavan, Pram, Siam, and other places.
+
+XVI. A short account of the Portuguese possessions between the Cape of
+Good Hope and China.
+
+CHAP. V. Voyages and Travels in Egypt, Syria, Arabia, Persia, and India.
+By Ludovico Verthema, in 1503.
+
+Introduction
+
+SECT. I Of the Navigation from Venice to Alexandria in Egypt, and from
+thence to Damascus in Syria.
+
+II. Of the City of Damascus.
+
+CHAP. V. SECT. III. Of the Journey from Damascus to Mecca, and of the
+Manners of the Arabians.
+
+IV. Observations of the Author during his residence at Mecca.
+
+V. Adventures of the Author in various parts of Arabia Felix, or Yemen.
+
+VI. Observations of the Author relative to some parts of Persia.
+
+VII. Observations of the Author on various parts of India.
+
+VIII. Account of the famous City and Kingdom of Calicut.
+
+IX. Observations on various parts of India.
+
+X. Continuation of the Authors Adventures, after his return to Calicut.
+
+XI. Account of a memorable Battle between the Mahometan Navy of Calicut
+and the Portuguese.
+
+XII. Navigation of the Author to Ethiopia, and return to Europe by Sea.
+
+CHAP. VI. Voyages and Travels of Cesar Frederick in India.
+
+Introduction
+
+SECT. I. Voyage from Venice to Bir in Asia Minor.
+
+II. Of Feluchia and Babylon.
+
+III. Of Basora.
+
+IV. Of Ormuz.
+
+V. Of Goa, Diu, and Cambaya.
+
+VI. Of Damann, Bassen, Tana, Chaul, and some other places.
+
+VII. Of Goa.
+
+VIII. Of the City of Bijanagur.
+
+IX. Of Cochin.
+
+X. Of the Pearl Fishery in the Gulf of Manaar.
+
+XI. Of the Island of Ceylon.
+
+XII. Of Negapatam.
+
+XIII. Of Saint Thome and other places.
+
+XIV. Of the Island of Sumatra and the City of Malacca.
+
+XV. Of the City of Siam.
+
+XVI. Of the Kingdom of Orissa and the River Ganges.
+
+XVII. Of Tanasserim and other places.
+
+Sect. XVIII. Of Martaban and the Kingdom of Pegu.
+
+XIX. Voyages of the Author to different parts of India.
+
+XX. Some Account of the Commodities of India.
+
+XXI. Return of the Author to Europe.
+
+
+CHAP. VII. Early English Voyages to Guinea, and other parts of the West
+Coast of Africa.
+
+Introduction.
+
+SECT. I. Second Voyage of the English to Barbary, in the year 1552, by
+Captain Thomas Windham.
+
+II. A Voyage from England to Guinea and Benin in 1553, by Captain
+Windham and Antonio Anes Pinteado.
+
+III. Voyage to Guinea, in 1554, by Captain John Lok.
+
+IV. Voyage to Guinea in 1555, by William Towerson, Merchant of London.
+
+V. Second Voyage to Guinea in 1556, by William Towerson.
+
+VI. Third Voyage of William Towerson to Guinea in 1558.
+
+VII. Notices of an intended Voyage to Guinea, in 1561.
+
+VIII. Voyage to Guinea in 1562, written by William Rutter.
+
+IX. Supplementary Account of the foregoing Voyage.
+
+X. Voyage to Guinea in 1563 by Robert Baker.
+
+XI. A Voyage to Guinea in 1564, by Captain David Carlet.
+
+XII. A Voyage to Guinea and the Cape de Verd Islands in 1566, by George
+Fenner.
+
+XIII. Embassy of Mr Edmund Hogan to Morocco in 1577, written by himself.
+
+XIV. Embassy of Henry Roberts from Queen Elizabeth to Morocco, in 1585,
+written by himself.
+
+SECT. XV. Voyage to Benin beyond Guinea in 1588, by James Welsh.
+
+XVI. Supplement to the foregoing Voyage, in a Letter from Anthony Ingram
+the chief factor, written from Plymouth to the Owners, dated 9th
+September, the day of arriving at Plymouth.
+
+XVII. Second Voyage of James Welsh to Benin, in 1590.
+
+VIII. Voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to the Rivers Senegal
+and Gambia adjoining to Guinea, in 1591.
+
+CHAP. VIII. Some miscellaneous early Voyages of the English.
+
+Introduction.
+
+SECT. I. Gallant escape of the Primrose from Bilboa in Spain, in 1585.
+
+II. Voyage of Sir Francis Drake, in 1585, to the West Indies.
+
+III. Cruising Voyage to the Azores by Captain Whiddon, in 1586, written
+by John Evesham.
+
+IV. Brief relation of notable service performed by Sir Francis Drake in
+1587.
+
+V. Brief account of the Expedition of the Spanish Armada in 1588.
+
+VI. Account of the Relief of a part of the Spanish Armada, at Anstruther
+in Scotland, in 1588.
+
+VII. A cruising Voyage to the Azores in 1589, by the Earl of Cumberland.
+
+VIII. Valiant Sea Fight by Ten Merchant Ships of London against Twelve
+Spanish Gallies, in the Straits of Gibraltar, on the 24th April 1590.
+
+IX. A valiant Sea Fight in the Straits of Gibraltar, in April 1591, by
+the Centurion of London, against five Spanish Gallies.
+
+X. Sea-Fight near the Azores, between the Revenge man of war, commanded
+by Sir Richard Granville, and fifteen Spanish men of war, 31st August
+1591. Written by Sir Walter Raleigh.
+
+SECT. XI. Note of the Fleet of the Indies, expected in Spain this year
+1591; with the number that perished, according to the examination of
+certain Spaniards, lately taken and brought to England.
+
+XII. Report of a Cruizing Voyage to the Azores in 1581, by a fleet of
+London ships sent with supplies to the Lord Thomas Howard. Written by
+Captain Robert Flicke.
+
+XIII. Exploits of the English in several Expeditions and cruizing
+Voyages from 1589 to 1592; extracted from John Huighen van Linschoten.
+
+XIV. Cruising voyage to the Azores, in 1592, by Sir John Burrough,
+knight.
+
+XV. The taking of two Spanish Ships, laden with quicksilver and the
+Popes bulls, in 1592, by Captain Thomas White.
+
+XVI. Narrative of the Destruction of a great East India Carak in 1584,
+written by Captain Nicholas Downton.
+
+XVII. List of the Royal Navy of England at the demise of Queen
+Elizabeth.
+
+
+CHAP IX. Early Voyages of the English to the East Indies, before the
+establishment of an exclusive company.
+
+SECT. I. Voyage to Goa in 1579, in the Portuguese fleet, by Thomas
+Stevens.
+
+Introduction.
+
+II. Journey to India over-land, by Ralph Fitch, Merchant of London, and
+others, in 1583.
+
+III. Supplement to the Journey of Fitch No. 1.--Letter from Mr John
+Newbery to Mr Richard Hakluyt of Oxford, Author of the Voyages, &c.
+
+No. 2,--Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore of London.
+
+3.--Letter from Mr John Newbery to the same.
+
+4.--Letter from John Newbery to Messrs John Eldred and William Scales at
+Basora.
+
+5.--Letter from Mr John Newbery to Messrs Eldred and Scales.
+
+6.--Letter from Mr Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore.
+
+7.--Letter from Mr Ralph Fitch to Mr Leonard Poore.
+
+8.--The Report of John Huighen, &c.
+
+A
+GENERAL HISTORY AND COLLECTION
+OF VOYAGES AND TRAVELS.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+PART II. BOOK III. CONTINUED.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+CONTINUATION OF THE DISCOVERIES AND CONQUESTS OF THE PORTUGUESE IN THE
+EAST; TOGETHER WITH SOME ACCOUNT OF THE EARLY VOYAGES Of OTHER EUROPEAN
+NATIONS TO INDIA.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IV. CONTINUED.
+
+CONTINUATION OF THE PORTUGUESE TRANSACTIONS IN INDIA, AFTER THE RETURN
+OF DON STEPHANO DE GAMA FROM SUEZ IN 1541, TO THE REDUCTION OF PORTUGAL
+UNDER THE DOMINION OF SPAIN IN 1581.
+
+
+SECTION XIII.
+
+_Account of an Expedition of the Portuguese from India to Madagascar in
+1613._
+
+
+Being anxious to find out a considerable number of Portuguese who were
+reported to exist in the island of St. Lawrence or Madagascar, having
+been cast away at different times on that island, and also desirous of
+propagating the ever blessed gospel among its inhabitants, and to
+exclude the Hollanders from that island by establishing a friendly
+correspondence with the native princes, the viceroy Don Jerome de
+Azevedo sent thither, in 1613, a caravel from Goa commanded by Paul
+Rodrigues de Costa, accompanied by two Jesuits, some interpreters, and a
+competent number of soldiers. This island is about 260 leagues in length
+and 600 in circumference[1], its greatest extent being from N.N.E. to
+S.S.W. It is 80 leagues from E. to W. where widest, but considerably
+less towards the north, where it ends in a point named St Ignatius which
+is about 15 leagues from east to west[2]. It may be considered as
+divided into three parts. The first or northern portion is divided from
+the other two by an imaginary line from east to west at Cape St
+Andrew[3]. The other two divisions are formed by a chain of mountains
+running nearly south from this line to Cape St Romanus, otherwise Cape
+St Mary, but much nearer the east coast than the west. The island is
+divided into a great number of kingdoms, but so confusedly and
+ill-defined, that it were endless to enumerate them. It is very
+populous, the inhabitants having many cities and towns of different
+extent and grandeur[4]. The country is fertile and well watered, and
+everywhere diversified with mountains, vallies, rivers, bays, and ports.
+The natives have no general name for the island, and are entirely
+ignorant of those of Madagascar and St Lawrence, which are given to it
+by strangers. The general population of the island consists of a nation
+called _Buques_, who have no religion and consequently no priests or
+places of worship, yet all their youth are circumcised at six or seven
+years old, any one performing the operation. The natives are not all of
+one colour; some being quite black with crisp or curled hair like
+negroes; others not quite so black with lank hair; others again
+resembling mulatoes; while some that live in the interior are almost
+white, yet have hair of both kinds. They are of large stature, strong
+and well made, of clear judgment, and apt to learn. Every man has as
+many wives as he pleases or can maintain, turning them off at pleasure,
+when they are sure to find other husbands, all of whom buy their wives
+from their fathers, by way of repaying the expence of their maintenance
+before marriage. Their funeral obsequies consist chiefly in feasting the
+guests; and their mourning in laying aside all appearance of joy, and
+cutting off their hair or daubing their faces and bodies with clay.
+Their government is monarchical, their kings or chiefs being called
+_Andias_, _Anrias_, and _Dias_, all independent of each other and almost
+continually engaged in war, more for the purpose of plunder than
+slaughter or conquest. On the Portuguese going among them, no arms were
+found in their possession except a few guns they had procured from the
+Moors and Hollanders, which they knew not how to use, and were even
+fearful of handling. They have excellent amber[5], white sandal,
+tortoises, ebony, sweet woods of various kinds, and abundance of slaves,
+with plenty of cattle of all kinds, the flesh of their goats being as
+sweet as mutton. The island likewise produces abundance of sea cows,
+sea-horses, monkeys, and some say tigers, with a great many snakes which
+are not very venomous. It has no elephants, horses, asses, lions, bears,
+deer, foxes, nor hares.
+
+[Footnote 1: Madagascar, between the latitudes of 12 deg. 30' and 35 deg. 45' S.
+and the longitudes of 44 deg. and 53 deg. W. from Greenwich, rather exceeds 1000
+statute miles from N.N.W to S.S.E. and is about 220 miles in mean width
+from east to west. This island therefore, in a fine climate, capable of
+growing all the tropical productions in perfection, and excellently
+situated for trade, extends to about 200,000 square miles, or 128
+millions of acres, yet is abandoned entirely to ignorant
+barbarians.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 2: The north end of Madagascar, called the point of St
+Ignatius, is 70 miles from east to west, the eastern headland being Cape
+Natal or de Ambro, and the western Cape St Sebastian.--E.]
+
+[3][Footnote 3: 3 Cape Antongil on the east coast is probably here
+meant, in lat. 15 deg. 45' S. as at this place the deep bay of Antongil or
+Manghabei penetrates about 70 mile inland, and the opposite coast also
+is deeply indented by port Massali. It is proper to mention however,
+that Cape St Andrew is on the west coast of Madagascar, in lat. 17 deg. 12'
+S.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 4: There may be numerous villages, or collections of huts, in
+Madagascar, and some of these may possibly be extensive and populous;
+but there certainly never was in that island any place that merited the
+name of a city.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 5: More probably Ambergris thrown on their shores.--E.]
+
+The first place visited by de Costa on this voyage of discovery was a
+large bay near _Masilage_[6] in lat. 16 deg. S. in which there is an island
+half a league in circumference containing a town of 8000 inhabitants,
+most of them weavers of an excellent kind of stuff made of the
+palm-tree. At this place the Moors used to purchase boys who were
+carried to Arabia and sold for infamous uses. The king of this place,
+named _Samamo_, received the Portuguese in a friendly manner, and
+granted leave to preach the gospel among his subjects. Coasting about 40
+leagues south from this place, they came to the mouth of a large river
+named _Balue_ or _Baeli_ in about 17 deg. S. and having doubled Cape St
+Andrew, they saw the river and kingdom of _Casame_, between the
+latitudes of 17 deg. and 18 deg. S. where they found little water and had much
+trouble[7]. Here also amity was established with the king, whose name
+was Sampilla, a discreet old man; but hitherto they could get no
+intelligence of the Portuguese whom they were sent in search of. On
+Whitsunday, which happened that year about the middle of May, mass was
+said on shore and two crosses erected, at which the king appeared so
+much pleased that he engaged to restore them if they happened to fall or
+decay. During the holidays they discovered an island in lat. 18 deg. S. to
+which they gave the name of Espirito Santo[8], and half a degree farther
+they were in some danger from a sand bank 9 leagues long. On Trinity
+Sunday, still in danger from sand banks, they anchored at the seven
+islands of _Cuerpo de Dios_ or _Corpus Christi_[9] in 19 deg. S. near the
+kingdom and river of _Sadia_ to which they came on the 19th of June,
+finding scarcely enough of water to float the caravel. This kingdom is
+extensive, and its principal _city_ on the banks of the river has about
+10,000 inhabitants. The people are black, simple, and good-natured,
+having no trade, but have plenty of flesh, maize, tar, tortoises,
+sandal, ebony, and sweet woods. The name of the king was _Capilate_, who
+was an old man much respected and very honest. He received the
+Portuguese kindly, and even sent his son to guide them along the coast.
+All along this coast from _Massalage_ to _Sadia_ the natives speak the
+same language with the Kafrs on the opposite coast of Africa; while in
+all the rest of the island the native language called _Buqua_ is spoken.
+
+[Footnote 6: On this bay is a town called New Massah to distinguish it
+from Old Massah on the bay of Massali, somewhat more than half a degree
+farther north. Masialege or Meselage is a town at the bottom of the bay
+of Juan Mane de Cuna, about half a degree farther south.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 7: They were here on the bank of Pracel, which seems alluded
+to in the text from the shallowness of the water; though the district
+named Casame in the text is not to be found in modern maps--E.]
+
+[Footnote 8: Probably the island of the bay of St Andrew in 17 deg. 30' is
+here meant; at any rate it must be carefully distinguished from Spiritu
+Santo, St Esprit, or Holy Ghost Island, one of the Comoros in lat. 15 deg.
+S.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 9: Perhaps those now called _barren isles_ on the west coast,
+between lat. 18 deg. 40' and 19 deg. 12' S. The river Sadia of the text may be
+that now called _Santiano_ in lat. 19 deg. S.--E.]
+
+Continuing towards the south they came to the country of the _Buques_,
+a poor and barbarous people feeding on the spawn of fish, who are much
+oppressed by the kings of the inland tribes. Passing the river
+_Mane_[10], that of _Saume_[11] in 20 deg. 15'; _Manoputa_ in 20 deg. 30', where
+they first heard of the Portuguese; _Isango_ in 21 deg.; _Terrir_ in 21 deg.
+30'; the seven islands of _Elizabeth_ in 22 deg.; they came on the 11th of
+July into the port of _St Felix_[12] in 22 deg., where they heard again of
+the Portuguese of whom they were in search, from _Dissamuta_ the king of
+that part of the country. On offering a silver chain at this place for
+some provisions, the natives gave it to an old woman to examine if it
+was genuine, and she informed the Portuguese that at the distance of
+three days journey there was an island inhabited a long while before by
+a white people dressed like the Portuguese and wearing crosses hanging
+from their necks, who lived by rapine and easily took whatever they
+wanted, as they were armed with spears and guns, with which information
+the Portuguese were much gratified. Continuing their voyage past the bay
+of _St Bonaventura_ and the mouth of the river _Massimanga_, they
+entered the bay of _Santa Clara_, where _Diamassuto_ came to them and
+entered into a treaty of friendship, worshipping the cross on his knees.
+They were here told that white people frequented a neighbouring port,
+and concluded that they were Hollanders. Going onwards they found banks
+of sand not laid down in any chart, and entered a port in lat. 24 deg. S.
+The king of this place was named _Diacomena_, and they here learnt that
+there were Portuguese on the opposite coast who had been cast away, and
+now herded cattle for their subsistence. They said likewise that the
+Hollanders had been three times at their port, and had left them four
+musketeers with whose assistance they had made war upon their enemies.
+On some trees there were several inscriptions, among which were the
+following. _Christophorus Neoportus Anglus Cap_. and on another _Dominus
+Robertus Scherleius Comes, Legatus Regis Persarum_.
+
+[Footnote 10: It is singular that the large circular bay of Mansitare in
+lat. 19 deg. 30' S. is not named, although probably meant by the river
+_Mane_ in the text.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 11: Now called Ranoumanthe, discharging its waters into the
+bay of St Vincents.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 12: Now Port St James.--E.]
+
+In the latitude of 25 deg. S. they entered a port which they named St
+Augustine[13] in a kingdom called _Vavalinta_, of which a _Buque_ named
+_Diamacrinale_ was king, who no sooner saw the Portuguese than he asked
+if these were some of the men from the other coast. This confirmed the
+stories they had formerly heard respecting the Portuguese, and they were
+here informed that the place at which they dwelt was only six days sail
+from that place. In September they got sight of Cape _Romain_ or St
+_Mary_ the most southern point of Madagascar, where they spent 40 days
+in stormy weather, and on St Lukes day, 18th October, they entered the
+port of that name in the kingdom of Enseroe. The natives said that there
+were white people who wore crosses, only at the distance of half a days
+journey, who had a large town, and _Randumana_ the king came on board
+the caravel, and sent one of his subjects with a Portuguese to shew him
+where these white people dwelt, but the black ran away when only half
+way.
+
+[Footnote 13: In lat. 23 deg. 30' or directly under the tropic of Capricorn,
+is a bay now called St Augustine. If that in the text, the latitude 1s
+erroneous a degree and a half.--E.]
+
+Among others of the natives who came to this place to trade with the
+Portuguese, was a king named _Bruto Chembanga_ with above 500 fighting
+men. His sons were almost white, with long hair, wearing gowns and
+breeches of cotton of several colours with silver buttons and bracelets
+and several ornaments of gold, set with pearls and coral. The territory
+of this king was named _Matacassi_, bordering on _Enseroe_ to the west.
+He said that the Portuguese were all dead, who not far from that place
+had built a town of stone houses, where they worshipped the cross, on
+the foot or pedestal of which were unknown characters. He drew
+representations of all these things on the sand, and demanded a high
+reward for his intelligence. Some of his people wore crosses, and
+informed the Portuguese that there were two ships belonging to the
+Hollanders in port _St Lucia_ or _Mangascafe_. In a small island at this
+place there was found a _square stone fort_[14], and at the foot of it
+the arms of Portugal were carved on a piece of marble, with this
+inscription
+
+REX PORTUGALENSIS O S.
+
+[Footnote 14: This is unintelligible as it stands in the text. It may
+possibly have been a square stone pedestal for one of the crosses of
+discovery, that used to be set up by the Portuguese navigators as marks
+of possession.--E.]
+
+Many conjectures were formed to account for the signification of the
+circle between the two last letters of this inscription, but nothing
+satisfactory could be discovered. King _Chembanga_ requested that a
+Portuguese might be sent along with him to his residence, to treat upon
+some important affairs, and left his nephew as an hostage for his safe
+return. Accordingly the master, Antonio Gonzales, and one of the priests
+named Pedro Freyre, were sent; who, at twelve leagues distance, came to
+his residence called _Fansaria_, a very populous and magnificent place.
+At first he treated them with much kindness, after which he grew cold
+towards them, but on making him a considerable present he became
+friendly, and even delivered to them his eldest son to be carried to
+Goa, desiring that the two Jesuits and four other Portuguese might be
+left as hostages, to whom he offered the island of _Santa Cruz_ to live
+in. These people are descended from the Moors, and call themselves
+_Zelimas_; they have the alcoran in Arabic, and have faquirs who teach
+them to read and write; they are circumcised, eat no bacon, and some of
+them have several wives. The king said that in the time of his father a
+ship of the Portuguese was cast away on this coast, from which about 100
+men escaped on shore, some of whom had their wives along with them, and
+the rest married there and left a numerous progeny. He repeated several
+of their names, and even showed a book in Portuguese and Latin which had
+belonged to them, and some maps; and concluded by saying that there were
+more Portuguese on that coast, seven days journey to the north. On
+farther inquiry, a man 90 years of age was found, who had known the
+Portuguese that were cast away there, and could still remember a few
+detached words of their language.
+
+The Portuguese set all hands to work to build a house and chapel for the
+two Jesuits and four Portuguese who were to remain, and when the work
+was finished, mass was solemnly said on shore, many of the natives
+coming to learn how to make the sign of the cross. One day while the
+king was looking on, and saw several men labouring hard to carry a cross
+that was meant to be set upon a rock, he went half naked and bareheaded,
+and carried it without assistance to the place appointed. The Portuguese
+might well say they had found another emperor Heraclius; for after this
+pious act of gigantic strength, he became very wicked; for being ready
+to sail, De Costa demanded that the king's son who had been promised
+should be sent, but he denied having ever made any such promise, and
+offered a slave. On this the captain sent the master and pilot with some
+men to enforce the demand, and safe conduct for some Portuguese to go to
+port _St Lucia_ to see an inscription said by the natives to be at that
+place. The peace was thus broken, and a party of Portuguese soldiers was
+sent armed against the king, who endeavoured to resist, and the king's
+son, a youth of eleven years of age was brought away, the natives being
+unable to contend against fire-arms. Several messages were sent offering
+a high ransom for the boy; but on being told by the captain that he
+would lose his head if he did not carry him to the viceroy, they went
+away much grieved. This happened about the end of 1613; and towards the
+middle of 1614, de Costa arrived safe at Goa with the boy, whom the
+viceroy caused to be instructed in Christianity by the jesuits, and
+stood god-father at his baptism on St Andrews day, when he was named
+Andrew Azevedo.
+
+The viceroy treated him with much honour and magnificence, in hopes that
+when he succeeded to his father, he might encourage the propagation of
+the gospel in Madagascar; and when he was supposed to be sufficiently
+instructed, he was sent away, accompanied by four Jesuits. On this
+occasion a pink and caravel were sent to Madagascar, commanded by Pedro
+de Almeyda Cabral, and Juan Cardoso de Pina, who sailed from Goa on the
+17th of September 1616. On the 20th of March 1617, they discovered a
+most delightful island, watered with pure springs, and producing many
+unknown plants besides others already known, both aromatic and
+medicinal. To this island, in which were two mountains which overtopped
+the clouds, they gave the name of _Isola del Cisne_ or swan island, and
+on it the jesuits planted some crosses and left inscriptions
+commemorative of the discovery[15]. The wreck of two ships of the
+Hollanders were found on this island. On the arrival of the two
+Portuguese ships in the port of St Lucia in Madagascar, the king and
+queen of _Matacassi_ received their son with the strongest
+demonstrations of joy, and gave back the hostages left on taking him
+away. The four jesuits with six soldiers accompanied the young prince
+to his father's court at _Fansaria_, where, and at every place through
+which he passed, he was received with demonstrations of joy, which to
+the Portuguese seemed ridiculous, as no doubt those used by the
+Portuguese on similar occasions would have appeared to them. The king
+made a similar agreement with the two commanders on this voyage with
+that formerly made with De Costa, which was that the fathers should
+inhabit the inland of Santa Cruz and have liberty to preach the gospel
+in Madagascar. Upon this the fathers went to the fort at Santa Cruz,
+where Don Andrew, the king's son, sent them workmen and provisions.
+
+[Footnote 15: The text gives no indication by which even to conjecture
+the situation of this island, unless that being bound towards the
+southern part of the east coast of Madagascar, it may possibly have been
+either the isle of France, or that of Bourbon.--E.]
+
+The captain, Pedro de Almeyda, had orders to bring another of the king's
+sons to Goa, and if refused to carry one away by force; but the king
+declared that he had only one other son, who was too young for the
+voyage, on which Almeyda satisfied himself with Anria Sambo, the king's
+nephew, who was carried to Goa, and baptized by the name of Jerome. When
+sufficiently instructed in the Christian religion, he was sent back to
+his country in a pink, commanded by Emanuel de Andrada, together with
+two Jesuits, 100 soldiers, and presents for the king and prince, worth
+4000 ducats. They set out in the beginning of February 1618; and being
+under the necessity of watering at the _Isola de Cisne_, they found
+three ships sunk at the mouth of the river. On landing, twenty
+Hollanders were found about two leagues from the shore, guarding the
+goods they had saved from the wreck. They made some opposition, but were
+forced to submit to superior numbers, and were found to have a large
+quantity of cloves, pepper, arms, ammunition, and provisions. Andrada
+carried the prisoners, and as many of the valuable commodities on board
+his pink as it could contain, and set fire to the rest, though the
+Hollanders alleged that they had come from the Moluccas, with a regular
+pass.
+
+When Andrada arrived in the port of St Lucia, the two Jesuits came to
+him both sick, declaring that it was impossible to live in that country,
+where all the men who had been left along with them had died. Andrada
+sent the letters with which he was intrusted to the king and prince, by
+the servants of Don Jerome; and in return, the king sent 100 fat oxen,
+with a great quantity of fowls and honey, and six slaves, but would not
+come himself, and it was found that his son had reverted to
+Mahometanism. The tribes in Madagascar called _Sadias_ and _Fansayros_
+are _Mahometan Kafrs_[16], and are attached to the liberty allowed by
+the law of Mahomet, of having a plurality of wives. The king was of the
+_Fansayro_ tribe, and was now desirous to destroy Andrada and the
+Portuguese by treachery; incited to this change of disposition by a
+_Chingalese_ slave belonging to the Jesuits, who had run away, and
+persuaded the king, that the Portuguese would deprive him of his
+kingdom, as they had already done many of the princes in Ceylon and
+India. The Kafrs came accordingly to the shore in great numbers, and
+began to attack the Portuguese with stones and darts, but were soon put
+to flight by the fire-arms, and some of them slain, whose bodies were
+hung upon trees as a warning to the rest, and one of their towns was
+burnt.
+
+[Footnote 16: In strict propriety, this expression is a direct
+contradiction, is Kafr is an Arabic word signifying _unbelievers_; but
+having been long employed as a generic term for the natives of the
+eastern coast of Africa, from the Hottentots to the Moors of Zeyla
+exclusively, we are obliged to employ the ordinary language.--E.]
+
+Andrada carried away with him Don Jerome, the king's nephew, and a
+brother of his who was made prisoner in a skirmish with the natives, who
+was converted, and died at Goa. All the Jesuits agreed to desist from
+the mission of Madagascar, and departed along with Andrada much against
+his inclination; and thus ended the attempt to convert the natives of
+Madagascar to the Christian religion.
+
+
+SECTION XIV.
+
+_Continuation of the Transactions of the Portuguese in India, from 1617
+to 1640; and the conclusion of the Portuguese Asia of Manuel de Faria._
+
+
+Towards the end of 1617, Don Juan Coutinno, count of Redondo, came to
+Goa, as viceroy, to succeed Azevedo. During this year, three ships and
+two fly-boats, going from Portugal for India, were intercepted near the
+Cape of Good Hope by six English ships, when the English admiral
+declared that he had orders from his sovereign to seize effects of the
+Portuguese to the value of 70,000 crowns, in compensation for the injury
+done by the late viceroy Azevedo to the four English ships at Surat.
+Christopher de Noronha, who commanded the Portuguese ships, immediately
+paid the sum demanded by the English admiral, together with 20,000
+crowns more to divide among his men. But Noronha, on his arrival at Goa,
+was immediately put under an arrest by the viceroy, for this
+pusillanimous behaviour, and was sent home prisoner to Lisbon, to answer
+for his conduct.
+
+In the year 1618, the Moor who had been seen long before, at the time
+when Nunno de Cunna took Diu, and was then upwards of 300 years old,
+died at Bengal now 60 years older, yet did not appear more than 60 years
+old at his death. In 1619, a large wooden cross, which stood on one of
+the hills which overlook Goa, was seen by many of the inhabitants of
+that city, on the 23d of February, to have the perfect figure of a
+crucified man upon it. The truth of this having been ascertained by the
+archbishop, he had it taken down, and got made from it a smaller cross,
+only two spans long, on which was fixed a crucified Jesus of ivory, and
+the whole surrounded by a golden glory; the rest of the cross being
+distributed to the churches and persons of quality. Ten days after this
+cross was removed, water gushed from the hole in which it was formerly
+fixed, in which cloths being dipped wrought many miraculous cures. A
+church was built on the spot to commemorate the miracle. At this time it
+was considered, in an assembly of the principal clergy, whether the
+threads, worn by the bramins across their shoulders, were a heathenish
+superstition or only a mark of their nobility, and, after a long debate,
+it was determined to be merely an honourable distinction. The reason of
+examining this matter was, that many of the bramins refused to embrace
+the Christian faith, because obliged to renounce these threads.
+
+In November 1619, the count of Redondo died; and, by virtue of a patent
+of succession, Ferdinand de Albuquerque became governor-general, being
+now 70 years of age, 40 of which he had been an inhabitant of Goa, and
+consequently was well versed in the affairs of India, but too slow in
+his motions for the pressing occasions of the time. During his
+administration, the Portuguese were expelled from Ormuz by the sultan of
+Shiras, assisted by six English ships.
+
+In July 1620, the Hollanders were desirous of gaining possession of the
+city of Macao in China, and appeared before it in seventeen ships, or,
+as some say, twenty-three, having 2000 soldiers on board, and were
+likewise in hopes of taking the fleet at that place, which was bound for
+Japan, having already taken several Portuguese and Chinese ships near
+the Philippine islands. After battering the fort of St Francis for five
+days, the Dutch admiral, Cornelius Regers, landed 800 men, with which he
+got possession of a redoubt or entrenchment, with very little
+opposition. He then marched to take possession of the city, not then
+fortified, where he did not expect any resistance; but Juan Suarez
+Vivas, taking post on some strong ground with only 160 men, defeated the
+Hollanders and compelled them to return precipitately to their ships,
+leaving 300 of their men slain, seven only with the colours and one
+piece of cannon being taken, and they threw away all their arms to
+enable them to swim off to their ships. In the mean while, the ships
+continued to batter the fort, but were so effectually answered that some
+of them were sunk and sixty men slain. After this the enemy abandoned
+the enterprise, and the citizens of Macao built a wall round the city
+with six bastions; and, as the mountain of _our Lady of the Guide_
+commanded the bastion of St Paul, a fort was constructed on its summit
+armed with ten large guns.
+
+We have formerly mentioned the destruction of the Portuguese cities of
+_Liampo_ and _Chincheo_, in China, through their own bad conduct. From
+that time, they lived in the island of _Lampazau_ till the year 1557,
+when they were permitted to build the city _Macao_, the largest
+belonging to the Portuguese in the east after Goa. They had been in use
+to resort to the island of _Sanchuan_, on the coast of China, for trade,
+where they lived in huts made of boughs of trees, and covered with sails
+during their stay. At this time, the island of Goaxama, eighteen leagues
+nearer the coast of China, being wild and mountainous, was the resort of
+robbers who infested the neighbouring part of the continent, and, as the
+Chinese considered the Portuguese a more tolerable evil than these
+outlaws, they offered them that island on condition of extirpating the
+nest of thieves. The Portuguese undertook this task, and succeeded
+without losing a man. Then every one began to build where he liked best,
+as there were no proprietors to sell the land, which now sells at a dear
+rate. The trade and reputation of this city increasing, it soon became
+populous, containing above 1000 Portuguese inhabitants all rich; and as
+the merchants usually give large portions with their daughters, many
+persons of quality used to resort thither in search of wives. Besides
+these, there are a number of Chinese inhabitants who are Christians, who
+are clothed and live after the manner of the Portuguese; and about 6000
+heathens, who are artificers, shop-keepers, and merchants. The duties of
+ships trading from thence to Japan, amount to 300,000 Xeraphins, at 10
+_per cent_, being about equal to as many pieces-of-eight, or Spanish
+dollars[17]. The yearly expence of the garrison and repairs of the
+fortifications is above 40,000 ducats. A similar sum is paid yearly for
+duties at the fair of _Quantung_, or Canton. The Japan voyage, including
+presents to the King and _Tonos_, and the expence of the embassy, costs
+25,000. The Misericordia expends about 9000 in charity, as the city
+maintains two hospitals, three parish churches, and five monasteries,
+besides sending continual alms to the Christians in China, Hainan,
+Japan, Tonkin, Cochin-china, Cambodia, and Siam.
+
+[Footnote 17: The xeraphin, as formerly mentioned, being 5s. 9d., this
+yearly revenue amounted to L.52,250 sterling. But the state of Macao, in
+the text, refers to what it was 150 years ago. It is still inhabited by
+Portuguese, and remains a useless dependence on Portugal, owing its
+principal support to the residence of the British factory for the
+greater part of the year.--E.]
+
+Albuquerque governed India from the end of 1619, to the month of
+September 1622, during all which time so little care was taken in Spain
+of the affairs of Portuguese India that he did not receive a single
+letter from the king. In every thing relating to the civil government he
+was equal to any of his predecessors, but was unfortunate in military
+affairs, especially in the loss of Ormuz. In 1621, Don Alfonso de
+Noronna was nominated viceroy of India; but sailing too late, was driven
+back to Lisbon, being the last viceroy appointed by the pious Philip
+III. On the news coming to Lisbon, of the shameful surrender of the city
+of _Bahia_, in the Brazils, to the Hollanders, without considering his
+age, quality, and rank, he listed as a private soldier for that service,
+an instance of bravery and patriotism deserving of eternal fame, and an
+example that had many followers.
+
+Don Francisco de Gama, Count of Vidugueyra, who had been much hated as
+viceroy of India, and sore affronted at his departure, as formerly
+related, always endeavoured to obtain that command a second time, not
+for revenge, as some asserted, but to satisfy the world that he had been
+undeservedly ill used. At length he obtained his desire, after twenty
+years solicitation, upon the accession of Philip IV. of Spain. He sailed
+from Lisbon on the 18th of March 1622, with four ships. On the coast of
+Natal, a flash of lightning struck his ship, and burnt his colours, but
+killed no one. Under the line two of his ships left him, and arrived at
+Goa in the end of August; another ship staid behind, and it was thought
+they shunned his company designedly. At this time six Dutch ships plied
+near the islands or Angoxa, or the Comoros, one of which perished in
+pursuit of a Portuguese ship; and while standing on for Mozambique, the
+viceroy encountered the other five, on the 22d of June. _His other ships
+had now joined him_, and a terrible battle ensued, which fell heaviest
+on the vice-admiral, whose ship was entirely disabled, but the viceroy
+and Francisco Lobo rescued and brought him off; yet the ship was so much
+battered that it sunk, some men and part of the money on board being
+saved, but some of the men fell into the hands of the enemy. Night
+coming on, the ships of the viceroy and Lobo were cast upon certain
+sands and lost, when they saved what goods, rigging, ammunition, and
+cannon they were able, and burnt the rest, to prevent them from falling
+into the hands of the enemy. The viceroy shipped all the goods that were
+saved on board some galliots, with what men they could contain, and went
+to Cochin, whence he went to Goa in September. On seeing him replaced in
+the dignity of viceroy, his enemies were terrified lest he might revenge
+the affronts formerly given him, but he behaved with unexpected
+moderation. He wished to have punished Simon de Melo, and Luis de Brito,
+for the shameful loss of Ormuz. Melo had fled to the Moors, and Brito
+was in prison; so that he only was punished capitally, and the other was
+hung in effigy.
+
+About the year 1624, some of the Portuguese missionaries penetrated into
+the country of Thibet, in which are the sources of the river Ganges. The
+natives are well inclined, and of docile dispositions; zealous of their
+salvation, and value much the devotions enjoined them by their priests,
+called _Lamas_, who profess poverty and celibacy, and are much given to
+prayer. They have churches and convents like the most curious of those
+in Europe, and have some knowledge of the Christian religion, but mixed
+with many errors, and with strange customs and ceremonies; yet it
+plainly appears that they had formerly the light of the true gospel[18];
+and they abhor the Mahometans and idolaters, being easily converted to
+the Christian faith. The habit of the Lamas is a red cassock, without
+sleeves, leaving their arms bare, girt with a piece of red cloth, of
+which the ends hang down to their feet. On their shoulders they wear a
+striped cloth, which they say was the dress of the Son of God; and they
+have a bottle of water hung at their girdle. They keep two fasts, during
+the principal of which they eat but once a day, and do not speak a word,
+using signs on all necessary occasions. During the other fast they eat
+as often as they have a mind, but use flesh only at one meal The people
+are called to prayers by the sound of trumpets, some of which are made
+of dead men's bones; and they use human skulls as drinking-vessels. Of
+other bones they make beads, which they allege is to remind them of
+death. The churches are only opened twice a year, when the votaries walk
+round the outside three times in procession, and then go in to reverence
+the images, some of which are of angels, called by them _Las_, the
+greatest being the one who intercedes with God for the souls of men.
+This being represented with the devil under his feet, was supposed by
+the missionaries to be St Michael the archangel. It is not unworthy of
+remark, that the word _Lama_, signifying priest, begins with _La_, which
+means an angel. The young Lamas go about the towns, dancing to the sound
+of bells and other noisy instruments of music; which, they say, is in
+imitation of the angels, who are painted by the Christians as singing in
+choirs.
+
+[Footnote 18: Wherever any coincidence appears in the ceremonies and
+externals of the heathen worship, the zealous catholics are eager to
+conceive that these have been borrowed from Christianity; unconscious
+that their own mummeries have all been borrowed from heathen worship,
+and superadded to the rational purity of primitive Christianity,--E.]
+
+At the beginning of every month a procession is made in which are
+carried black flags and the figures of devils, and attended by drums and
+music, which they believe chases away the devils. They use holy water,
+which is consecrated with many prayers, having gold coral and rice put
+into it, and is used for driving devils from their houses. The country
+people bring black horses, cows and sheep, over which the Lamas say many
+prayers, as it is alleged the devils endeavour to get into cattle of a
+black colour. They cure the sick by blowing on the part affected. They
+have three different kinds of funerals, according to the star which
+rules at the time of death. In one the body is buried in a tomb adorned
+with gilded pyramids. In another the body is burnt and the ashes being
+mixed with clay are formed into images by which they swear. In the
+last, which is reckoned the most honourable, the body is exposed to be
+devoured by certain birds resembling cranes. These three forms are used
+with such as have spent good lives, but others are cut in pieces and
+thrown to the dogs. They believe that the good go directly to heaven,
+and the bad to hell; while such as are indifferent remain in an
+intermediate state, whence their souls return to animate noble or base
+creatures according to their deserts. They give their children the names
+of filthy beasts, at the recommendation of their priests, that the devil
+may be loth to meddle with them. They believe in one God in Trinity; the
+son having become a man and died, yet is now in heaven. God equal with
+the father, yet man at the same time; and that his mother was a woman
+who is now in heaven: And they compute the time of the death of the son
+nearly as we do the appearance of the Redeemer on earth. They believe in
+a hell as we do, and burn lamps that God may light them in the right
+road in the other world: Yet do they use divination after a ridiculous
+manner. The country of Thibet produces several fruits of the same kinds
+with those grown in Europe, together with rice and wheat, and has
+abundance of cattle; but a great part of the land is barren.
+
+The Jesuit fathers Andrada and Marquez went from Delhi in the country of
+the Great Mogul to Thibet along with a caravan of pilgrims that were
+going to visit a famous pagoda. Passing through the kingdom of _Lahore_,
+they came to the vast mountains whence the Ganges flows into the lower
+plain country of Hindostan, seeing many stately temples by the way full
+of idols. At the kingdom of _Sirinagur_ they saw the Ganges flowing
+among snow, the whiteness of which is dazzling to the eyes of
+travellers. At the end of 50 days journey they came to a pagoda on the
+borders of _Sirinagur_, to which multitudes resort to bathe in a spring,
+the water of which is so hot as to be hardly sufferable, and which they
+imagine cleanses them from sin. The people here feed on raw flesh and
+eat snow, yet are very healthy; and the usual order of the sexes is
+reversed, as the women plough and the men spin. Having rested at the
+town of _Mana_ the fathers pursued their journey, almost blinded by
+travelling continually among snow, and came at length to the source of
+the Ganges, which flows from a great lake. They soon afterwards entered
+the kingdom of Thibet, and were honourably received by officers sent on
+purpose from _Chaparangue_, the residence of the king of Thibet. The
+king and queen listened to their doctrines with much complacency, and
+even admitted their truths without dispute, and would not allow them to
+return to India till they promised an oath to come back, when the king
+not only engaged to give them liberty to preach, but that he would build
+them a church, and was greatly pleased with a picture they left him of
+the Virgin and Child.
+
+The fathers returned according to promise, on which the king built them
+a church and was afterwards baptised along with the queen, in spite of
+every thing the Lamas could say to prevent him. From merchants who
+traded to this place from China, the fathers understood that it was 60
+days journey from _Chaparangue_ to China, 40 of which was through the
+kingdom of _Usangue_, and thence 20 days to China. They likewise learnt
+that Cathay is not a kingdom, but a great city--the metropolis of a
+province subject to the grand _Sopo_, very near China, whence perhaps
+some give the name of Cathay to China[19]. Perhaps this kingdom of
+Thibet is the empire of Prester John, and not Ethiopia as some have
+believed.
+
+[Footnote 19: This is evidently erroneous, as we know certainly from the
+travels of Marco Polo and other authorities, that Cathay was the
+northern part of China, once a separate kingdom.--E.]
+
+After having governed five years, the Count of Vidugueyra was ordered by
+the king to resign to Don Francisco de Mascarennas in 1628; but as that
+gentleman had left India for Europe, the viceroy resigned the charge of
+government to Don Luis de Brito, bishop of Cochin, and went home to
+Portugal. In this year the king of Acheen made an attempt to gain
+possession of Malacca, against which he sent a fleet of 250 sail, with
+20,000 soldiers and a great train of artillery. In this great fleet
+there were 47 gallies of extraordinary strength, beauty, and size, all
+near 100 feet long and of proportional breadth. The king embarked with
+his wife, children, and treasure; but upon some ill omen the fleet and
+army sailed without him, and came before Malacca in the beginning of
+July 1629, the former under the command of _Marraja_, and the latter of
+Lacsamana, an experienced general who had made many conquests for his
+master. Having landed the troops, they were attacked by Antonio Pinto de
+Fonseca with only 200 men, who slew above 300 of the enemy without
+losing a man, and then retreated into the city. Juan Suarez Vivas with
+350 Portuguese, who commanded at Iller, defended that post for some time
+with great gallantry and did great execution among the enemy; but at
+length, overpowered by numbers, was forced to retire. Having gained an
+eminence called mount St Juan, the enemy erected a battery there from
+which they played furiously against the fort, which answered them with
+great spirit. The Capuchin convent dedicated to the Mother of God, being
+considered as of great importance for the defence of the fort, was
+gallantly defended for 50 days by Diego Lopez de Fonseca, who on one
+occasion made a sally with 200 Portuguese and defeated 2000 of the
+enemy. On Lopez falling sick, Francisco Carvallo de Maya took the
+command of that post, and defended it till the convent was entirely
+ruined, so that he was obliged to withdraw into the city, on which the
+enemy converted it into a strong post in which _Lacsamana_ took up his
+quarters with 3000 men. _Marraja_ occupied mount St Juan, on which he
+erected a large fort; others were established at the convent of St
+Lawrence, at _Iller_ and other places, having strong batteries and lines
+of communication, so that the city was invested on all sides by land,
+while a number of armed boats presented all access by sea for relief.
+Fonseca, who commanded in the besieged city, sent out Vivas with 220
+Portuguese troops to dislodge Lacsamana from his head-quarters on the
+ruins of the Capuchin convent, on which occasion Vivas gained possession
+of the post by a night attack, killing 100 of the enemy, and retired
+with several cannon. The King of _Pam_, who was in alliance with the
+Portuguese, sent a fleet of _paraos_ with 2000 men to the assistance of
+the town; and Michael Pereyra Botello brought five sail from the city of
+San Thome: Yet these reinforcements were insufficient to induce the
+enemy to retire, though they had lost above 4000 men during the siege,
+while 60 were slain on the side of the defenders.
+
+Although the bishop of Cochin was informed in June of the intended
+attack on Malacca and the weak state of its garrison, he postponed
+sending any reinforcement, as it was then the dead of winter on the
+Malabar coast, proposing to dispatch succours in September. He died
+however about the end of July 1629, after having governed India for
+nineteen or twenty months. Upon his death the next patent of succession
+was opened, which named Don Lorenzo de Cunna, the commander of Goa, to
+the civil government of India, and Nunno Alvarez Pereyra to the
+military command. Of this last name there happened to be two in India,
+or none. If Don Nunno Alvarez Pereyra, a gentleman well known, were
+meant, the title of _Don_ was omitted in the patent; if Nunno Alvarez
+Botello, the sirname teemed wrong. It was thought unlikely that the
+title of Don could be omitted through mistake, as that in Portugal is
+peculiar to certain families. The mistake of name in regard to Nunno
+Alvarez Botello was more probable, as he had long gone by the name of
+_Pereyra_, in memory of his grandfather Alvarez Pereyra, and had dropped
+that name for _Botello_ when he inherited the estate of his father,
+whose name was Botello; yet some continued to call him by the old name,
+and others gave him the new one. The council of Goa, and the Count de
+Linnares after his arrival in India, allowed the pretensions of Botello.
+
+In the meantime, considering how dangerous delay might prove to Malacca
+in its distress, Nunno Alvarez Botello undertook the relief of that
+place, saying that he would postpone the decision of the dispute till
+his return. By general consent however, he went by the title of
+governor; and by direction of the council of Goa, the Chancellor Gonzalo
+Pinto de Fonseca assumed the administration of justice, so that the
+government was divided between him, De Cunna, and Botello, who used such
+diligence in preparing for his expedition to relieve Malacca, that, from
+the 2d of August, when the charge of governor was awarded to him, to the
+beginning of September, he had collected 900 Portuguese troops, a good
+train of artillery, a large supply of arms and ammunition, and 30
+vessels, and was ready to put to sea as soon as the weather would allow.
+He set sail on the 22d of September, rather too early, and encountered
+four several storms during his voyage, two of which were so terrible
+that every one expected to be lost. He at length reached _Pulobutum_,
+whence he sent two vessels to give notice at Malacca of his approach,
+yet arrived himself before them. At Pulobutum he found a vessel
+belonging to Cochin and two from Negapatnam, being some addition to his
+fleet He arrived at Malacca on the afternoon of the 22d October 1629, to
+the great surprise of _Lacsamana_, as his fleet was then in the river
+_Pongor_, a league from Malacca, and so situated as to be unable to
+escape.
+
+Botello immediately landed and gave the necessary orders and again
+embarking forced his way up the river through showers of bullets, which
+he repaid with such interest that the enemy abandoned their advanced
+works that same night, and retired to that which they had constructed on
+the ruins of the Capuchin monastery. As the river Pongor had not
+sufficient water for the Portuguese ships, Botello embarked a strong
+detachment in 33 _balones_ or _balames_, being country-vessels of
+lighter draught, with which he went in person to view the strength and
+posture of the hostile fleet. Being anxious for the safety of their
+gallies, the enemy abandoned their works at _Madre de Dios_ and _San
+Juan_, and threw up other works with wonderful expedition for the
+protection of their fleet. But having attacked these with much
+advantage, Botello proposed to the enemy to surrender, on which
+_Marraja_ returned a civil but determined refusal. His situation being
+desperate, Marraja endeavoured the night to escape with the smaller
+vessels, leaving his large gallies at the mercy of the Portuguese, but
+was prevented by the vigilance and bravery of Vasquez de Evora, who cut
+off many of his men, not without some loss on his own side, having one
+of his arms carried off. The enemy now endeavoured to make use of their
+formidable gallies, and the chief among them called the _Terror of the
+World_ was seen in motion; on which Botello sent the admiral of the
+Portuguese gallies, Francisco Lopez to attack her, which he did with
+great gallantry, passing through clouds of smoke, and a tremendous fire
+of artillery, and after two hours hard fighting, carried her by
+boarding, after killing 500 of her men out of 700, with the loss only of
+seven of his own men.
+
+On the 25th of November, the enemy set fire to a galley that was full of
+women whom they had brought to people Malacca, and made a fresh attempt
+to break through the Portuguese fleet, but without success, many of them
+being slain and taken, and great numbers leapt into the water, and fled
+to the woods, where they were devoured by wild beasts. Lacsamana then
+hung out a flag of truce, and sent a deputation to treat with Botello,
+who answered that he would listen to no proposals till they restored
+Pedro de Abren the Portuguese ambassador, whom they kept prisoner; and
+as they delayed compliance; the Portuguese cannon recommenced a
+destructive fire. On the last day of November, Botello got notice that
+_Marraja_ the Acheen admiral was slain, and that the king _Pam_ was
+approaching to the assistance of the Portuguese with 100 sail of
+vessels. Botello went immediately to visit him, and was received with
+the customary ceremonies used by the eastern princes to the Portuguese
+governors. After interchanging presents and mutual compliments, Botello
+returned to his post, where he found the Portuguese rather slackening
+their efforts in consequence of a desperate cannonade from the enemy.
+But on the 4th of December, the enemy sent fresh proposals for an
+accommodation, accompanied by the ambassador Abreu, requiring only to be
+allowed to withdraw with three of their gallies and 4000 men, being all
+that remained of 20,000 with which they had invested Malacca. In answer
+to this, they were told they must surrender at discretion on promise of
+life; and as Lacsamana hesitated to accept such humiliating terms,
+Botello assaulted and forced all his works, where many of the enemy were
+put to the sword; some throwing themselves into the river to swim across
+were drowned, and others who fled to the woods were devoured by beasts
+of prey. In fine, Botello obtained the most glorious victory that was
+ever gained by the Portuguese in India; as of all the fleet which came
+against Malacca, not a single vessel got away, and of the large army,
+not one man escaped death or captivity. So great was the booty, that the
+whole of the Portuguese troops and mariners were enriched, Botello
+reserving nothing to his own share but a _parrot_ which had been much
+valued by Lacsamana.
+
+On going to Malacca after this great victory, he entreated to be allowed
+to walk barefooted and unaccompanied to church, that he might humbly
+prostrate himself before the Lord of Hosts, in acknowledgement that the
+victory was entirely due to God, and not to the Portuguese valour; but
+he was constrained to enter the city in triumph. The streets were
+crowded with men, and the windows and house tops thronged with women,
+who sprinkled the hero with sweet waters and strewed flowers in his
+path. The music could not be heard for the noise of cannon, and all the
+city was filled with extreme joy. At this time an embassy came from the
+king of _Pera_, who was tributary to the king of _Acheen_, offering to
+pay tribute to the king of Portugal, and to deliver up a large treasure
+left in his custody belonging to the king of Acheen and his general
+_Lacsamana_. Don Jerome de Silveyra was sent with eleven ships to
+receive the treasure, and establish a treaty with the king of _Pera_,
+who performed his promise, and the treasure was applied to pay the men
+and refit the fleet.
+
+About the middle of January 1630, Botello being off the straits of
+Cincapura to secure the ships expected from China against the
+Hollanders, _Lacsamana_ and two other officers who had fled to the woods
+were brought prisoners to him, having been taken by the king of Pam.
+Owing to contrary winds, he was unable to get up with five Dutch ships
+that were about _Pulo Laer_, and which took a Portuguese galliot coming
+from China. He returned therefore to Malacca to refit his ships, and
+resolved to attempt the Dutch fort of _Jacatara_[20], the best which was
+possessed by _these rebels_ in all Asia. In the first place, he sent
+Antonio de Sousa Coutinno in the admiral galley lately belonging to
+_Lacsamana_ called the _Terror of the World_, in which Lacsamana was now
+prisoner, to Goa; directing that Lacsamana should be sent to Portugal,
+and that this large and magnificent galley should be given as a present
+to the city of Goa. In this galley there was one cannon made of
+_tombac_, a precious sort of metal, which was valued at above 7000
+ducats, and another cannon reckoned still more valuable on account of
+its curious workmanship. Lacsamana died before he could be carried to
+Portugal.
+
+[Footnote 20: In the neighbourhood of which was afterwards built the
+city of Batavia, the emporium at the Dutch trade in the east, now
+subject to Britain.--E.]
+
+Learning that the Count de Linnares, now viceroy of India, had arrived
+at Goa in October 1629, Botello transmitted to him an account of all
+that he had done, and desired his assistance and approbation to continue
+in these parts in order to carry on his designs against the English and
+Hollanders. About the end of April 1630, the viceroy not only sent him
+every thing he asked, but gave him full power to act as governor
+general, without being obliged to wait for orders from Goa. In the
+meantime Botello sailed with 27 ships towards the straits of Cincapura,
+and put in at _Jambo_[21], a place abounding in pepper, and on that
+account much resorted to by the Dutch and English. At this place he took
+two large ships after a stout resistance; and going higher up the river
+he discovered another ship so large and beautiful that he designed to
+make use of her for his entrance into Goa; but a ball falling into her
+powder-room, blew her up. After employing three weeks in working up the
+river, Botello learnt that at a town about two leagues distant, two
+Dutch ships had taken shelter, and being desirous of taking them, he
+manned 14 light vessels with which he went to view the place, on which
+he was opposed by 26 sail of small vessels manned with Hollanders and
+natives, whom he put to flight; but on viewing the place he found it
+impracticable to attempt the two vessels, on account of the strength of
+the works by which they were protected. He destroyed therefore all the
+neighbourhood with tire and sword, and then sailed down the river,
+intending to proceed against _Jacatara_.
+
+[Footnote 21: Probably _Jambee_ on the N.E. side of Sumatra, in about
+lat. 18 20' S. to the S.E. of the straits of Cincapura.--E.]
+
+While on his way thither, a Dutch ship of 24 guns was met, which was
+laden with powder for their forts, and on being attacked and boarded by
+some of his ships she took fire. In this situation, Botello gave orders
+for his ships to draw off from the danger, and on going up in his
+galliot to bring off Antonio Mascarennas, the Dutch ship blew up while
+Botello was passing her stern, by which his galliot was instantly sunk.
+His body was found and taken to Malacca, where it was honourably
+interred.
+
+Don Michael de Noronna, Count de Linnares, arrived at Goa as viceroy of
+India in October 1629. About the commencement of his administration,
+Constantine de Sa, who commanded in Ceylon, marched from Columbo, which
+he left almost without any garrison, meaning to reduce the interior
+provinces to subjection. His force consisted of 400 Portuguese, with a
+considerable number of Christian Chingalese, in whose fidelity he
+reposed too much confidence, although a Franciscan friar who resided
+among the enemy, and his own officers warned him of the danger to which
+he was exposed. He penetrated to the city of _Uva_ with very little
+opposition, which he destroyed; but was met on his return by the king of
+Candy with a considerable army, to whom the greatest part of the
+Christian Chingalese immediately deserted, and aided him in battle
+against the Portuguese, now reduced to 400 of their own troops and 200
+Chingalese who remained faithful. De Sa and his inconsiderable army
+fought against prodigious odds during three entire days, but the general
+being slain, the Portuguese troops fell into disorder, and were all
+slain or taken prisoners.
+
+Immediately after this victory, the king of Candy laid siege to Columbo
+with an army of 50,000 men, while the garrison under Launcelot de Leixas
+did not exceed 400, even including the priests and monks. The garrison
+was reduced to extreme distress, and even threatened with famine, when a
+ship from Cochin brought them a relief of provisions and ammunition;
+after which five ships came from San Thome and one from Goa. Though not
+mentioned by De Faria, it appears that the siege was now raised; as at a
+subsequent period, after the natives had reduced almost the whole of the
+island, the kings of Candy, Uva, and Matale again laid siege to Columbo
+with an army of 20,000 men. At this time five ships came from Goa to
+carry off the cinnamon to Portugal, on which the enemy raised the siege,
+believing these ships had come to relieve and reinforce the garrison.
+
+The viceroy now appointed Don George de Almeyda to the command in
+Ceylon, who sailed from Goa for that place on the 19th of February 1631,
+in the great galley taken by Botello when he destroyed the fleet of
+Acheen: But encountering a storm off Cape Comorin, the galley was ready
+to founder, on which Almeyda took to the boat with 29 persons, and
+reached one of the Maldive islands after four days of incredible
+distress. Going over from thence to Cochin, he received a reinforcement
+of some Portuguese troops, with 500 kafrs and 800 Canarin lascars, and a
+supply of money, ammunition, and provisions. Having raised some more men
+at Cochin, Almeyda sailed again for Ceylon, where he arrived on the 21st
+October 1631, and landed at Columbo. He marched immediately against the
+enemy, though then the rainy season, and was soon forced to desist, as
+the country was mostly overflowed, and at this season the trees swarm
+with _leeches_, which drop down upon the men as they pass, and bleed
+them to death.
+
+On the return of fine weather, Almeyda marched again on the 5th January
+1632, though with much difficulty, as the waters were still out, so that
+the men had often to wade up to their breasts. Being opposed by the
+enemy near the fort of _Tranqueyra Grande_, many of them were slain, as
+the general gave three or four pistoles for every head that was brought
+him. At another pass, the enemy were defended, to the number of 6000
+men, by some works, but on being attacked, and many of them killed, the
+rest fled, destroying every thing they could not carry away. After these
+successes, many of the natives came in, and submitted, and were treated
+with kindness; but as others hid themselves in hopes of getting away to
+join the enemy, Almeyda caused them to be apprehended, and given as
+slaves among his officers. One was delivered to the Kafrs, who, in sight
+of his wife and children, cut him immediately in pieces, which they
+divided among them to eat. At _Cardevola_, the enemy had two forts,
+which were carried by escalade. The enemy fled in every quarter, making
+no stand till they arrived at the foot of the mountains of Candy, where
+they were defeated, and the forts of _Manicravare_, _Safragam_,
+_Maluana_, and _Caliture_, were immediately afterwards reduced, as was
+the district of Matura, of which the commander of the Chingalese
+Christians, who deserted from de Sa, had made himself king. At last the
+king of Candy sent to implore peace, which was granted at the
+intercession of the priests and monks. In fine, Almeyda not only
+restored the reputation of the Portuguese arms in Ceylon, but increased
+it, and established the government of the island in good order. He was
+removed, however, by the succeeding viceroy, and returned to Goa poor,
+and full of honour, where he died poor, more from grief than age; and no
+sooner was he deprived of the command, than all he had gained was
+speedily lost, though it was again recovered by Diego de Melo y Castro
+in 1633.
+
+About the end of the year 1635, the Count de Linares resigned the
+government of India to Pedro de Silva, who was usually called _Mole_ or
+the Soft, on account of the easiness of his disposition. He disliked the
+government so much, that he was often heard to exclaim, "God forgive
+those who appointed me viceroy, as I am not fit for the office." He held
+the government, however, nearly four years, and died in the end of June
+1639, when he was succeeded as governor by Antonio Tellez de Silva,
+whose name was found in one of the royal patents, which was now opened.
+Tellez happened to be absent from Goa at the time, for which reason, the
+archbishop of Goa, who was next in nomination, assumed the government in
+his name, and sent notice to him of his appointment, and in the
+meantime, employed himself in fitting out twelve ships of war for the
+relief of Malacca, then threatened by the king of Acheen and the
+Hollanders. At this time nine Dutch ships entered the river of Goa, and
+set on fire three Portuguese galleons then lying at _Marmugam_, after
+which they retired without loss or opposition, because the fort was
+destitute of men and ammunition. Antonio Tellez arrived immediately
+after this unfortunate accident, at which he was exceedingly enraged,
+not so much for the actual loss, as that the enemy should be able to
+insult the harbour of the Portuguese Indian capital without harm or
+resistance. On the back of this misfortune, news came that the Dutch
+fleet of 12 sail, and that of Acheen of 35 gallies, were in sight of
+Malacca. While occupied in making great preparations to relieve Malacca,
+and to remedy other disorders then subsisting in Portuguese India, he
+was superseded in the government of India, by the arrival of Juan de
+Silva Tello, as viceroy, towards the end of 1640; on which Antonio
+Tellez, having resigned the sword of command, immediately embarked for
+Portugal, not thinking proper to serve as admiral where he had enjoyed
+the supreme authority.
+
+Other authors will write the actions of the new viceroy, Juan de Silva
+Tello, for he begins his task where I end mine.[22]
+
+[Footnote 22: Manuel de Faria rightly thought proper to close his work
+at this period, which was immediately followed by the expulsion of the
+Portuguese from Malacca and Ceylon, and many other of their Indian
+possessions; where, except a few inconsiderable factories, they now only
+hold Goa, Diu, and Macao, and even these possess very little trade, and
+no political importance. From their subjection to the crown of Spain,
+the Dutch, who had thrown off the iron yoke of the Austrian princes of
+Spain, revenged their own injuries upon the Portuguese in India: And in
+the present age, at the distance of 160 years, having themselves fallen
+under the heavy yoke of the modern French Caesar, they have been
+stripped by Britain of every foreign possession in Asia, Africa, and
+America.--E]
+
+
+SECTION XV.
+
+_Occurrences in Pegu, Martavan, Pram, Siam, and other places._[23]
+
+
+We here propose to give some account of the exploits of the _black_ king
+of Siam, in whose character there was a strange mixture of virtues and
+vices. In the year 1544, the king of the _Birmans_ [24] besieged the
+city of _Martavan_ by sea and land, being the metropolis of the great
+and flourishing kingdom of that name, which had a revenue of three
+millions of gold. _Chaubainaa_ was then king of Martavan, and fell from
+the height of fortune to the depth of misery. The Birman fleet, on this
+occasion, consisted of 700 sail, 100 of which were large gallies, in
+which were 700 Portuguese, commanded by one Juan Cayero, who was reputed
+a commander of courage and conduct. After a siege of some months, during
+which the Birmans lost 12,000 men in five general assaults, _Chaubainaa_
+found himself unable to withstand the power of his enemy, being reduced
+to such extremity that the garrison had already eaten 3000 elephants. He
+offered, therefore, to capitulate, but all terms were refused by the
+enemy; on which he determined to make use of the Portuguese, to whom he
+had always been just and friendly: But favours received from a person in
+prosperity, are forgotten when the benefactor falls into adversity. He
+sent therefore one Seixas, a Portuguese in his service, to make an offer
+to Cayero, if he would receive himself, his family, and treasures, into
+the four ships which he commanded; that he would give half the treasure
+to the king of Portugal, to whom he would become vassal, paying such
+tribute as might be agreed on, being satisfied that he could recover his
+kingdom with the assistance of 2000 Portuguese troops, whom he proposed
+to take into his pay. Cayero consulted with his principal officers on
+this proposition, and asked Seixas, in their presence, what might be the
+amount of treasure belonging to the king of Martavan. Seixas said, that
+he had not seen the whole, but affirmed that he had seen enough in gold
+and jewels to load two ships, and as much silver as would load four or
+five. Envious of the prodigious fortune that Cayero might make by
+accepting this offer, the Portuguese officers threatened to delate him
+to the Birman sovereign, if he consented, and the proposal was
+accordingly refused.
+
+[Footnote 23: De Faria, III. 347--364. Both as in a great measure
+unconnected with the Portuguese transactions, and as not improbably
+derived from the worse than suspicious source of Fernand Mendez de
+Pinro, these very problematical occurrences have been kept by
+themselves, which indeed they are in de Faria. After this opinion
+respecting their more than doubtful authenticity, it would be a waste of
+labour to attempt illustrating their geographical obscurities. Indeed
+the geography of India beyond the Ganges, is still involved in almost
+impenetrable darkness, from the Bay of Bengal to the empire of
+China.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 24: Called always the _Bramas_ by De Faria.--E.]
+
+The king of Martavan was astonished at the rejection of his proposals,
+and finding Seixas determined to withdraw from the danger that menaced
+the city, made him a present of a pair of bracelets, which were
+afterwards sold to the governor of _Narsinga_ for 80,000 ducats.
+Despairing of relief or retreat, the king of Martavan now determined to
+set his capital on fire, and sallying out at the head of the few men
+that remained, to die honourably fighting against his enemies. But that
+night, one of his principal officers deserted to the enemy, and gave
+notice of his intention. Thus betrayed, he surrendered on promise of
+having his own life, and those of his wife and children spared, and
+being allowed to end his days in retirement. These terms were readily
+granted, as the conqueror meant to perform no part of his engagement.
+
+From the gate of the city to the tent of the Birman king, at the
+distance of a league, a double lane of musketeers of sundry nations was
+formed, the Portuguese under Cayero being stationed nearest the gate,
+through which the captives were to march in procession. In the first
+place, came the queen of Martavan in a chair, her two sons and two
+daughters being carried in two other chairs. These were surrounded by
+forty beautiful young ladies, led by an equal number of old ladies, and
+attended by a great number of _Talegrepos_, who are a kind of monks or
+religious men, habited like Capuchins, who prayed with and comforted the
+captives. Then followed the king of Martavan, seated on a small she
+elephant, clothed in black velvet, having his head, beard, and eyebrows
+shaved, and a rope about his neck. On seeing the Portuguese, he refused
+to proceed till they were removed, after which he went on. Being come
+into the presence of the king of the Birmans, he cast himself at his
+feet; and being unable to speak owing to grief, the _Raolim_ of
+_Mounay_, _Talaypor_, or chief priest of Martavan, who was esteemed a
+saint, made a harangue in his behalf, which had been sufficient to have
+moved compassion from any other than the obdurate tyrant to whom it was
+addressed, who immediately ordered the miserable king, with his wife,
+children, and attendant ladies, into confinement. For the two following
+days, a number of men were employed to remove the public treasure of
+Martavan, amounting to 100 millions in gold; and on the third day, the
+army was allowed indiscriminate plunder, which lasted for four days, and
+was estimated at 12 millions. Then the city was burnt, and above 60,000
+persons were supposed to have perished by fire and sword, an equal
+number being reduced to slavery. On this occasion, 2000 temples and
+40,000 houses were destroyed.
+
+On the morning after the destruction of the city, 21 gibbets were
+erected on a neighbouring hill called Beydao, which were surrounded by a
+strong guard of cavalry, and on which the queen, with her children and
+attendants, to the number in all of 140 persons, were all hung up by the
+feet. The king of Martavan, with 50 men of the highest quality, were
+flung into the sea with stones about their necks. At this barbarous
+spectacle, the army of the Birmans mutinied, and for some time the king
+was in imminent danger. Leaving a sufficient number of people to rebuild
+the ruined city, the Birman king returned to Pegu with the rest of his
+army, accompanied by Juan Cayero, and his 700 Portuguese. Four
+Portuguese remained at Martavan, among whom was Juan Falcam; who,
+instead of assisting _Fernan Mendez Pinta_, sent by Pedro de Faria, the
+commander of Malacca, to confirm the peace which subsisted with the late
+king of Martavan, accused him to the governor of the town as an enemy to
+the king of the Birmans. On this false accusation, the governor seized
+the vessel commanded by Pinto, in which were goods to the value of
+100,000 ducats, killed the master and some others, and sent the rest
+prisoners to Pegu. This false dealing was not new in Falcam, who had
+deserted from the late unfortunate king of Martavan, after having
+received many benefits from him.
+
+Instead of being allowed to enjoy the fruits of his victories in peace,
+the king of the Birmans was obliged to engage in a new war with the king
+of Siam, who endeavoured to recover the kingdom of Tangu, which had been
+wrested from him. For this purpose, in March 1546, he embarked with
+900,000 men in 12,000 vessels, on the river _Ansedaa_, out of which he
+passed in the month of April into the river _Pichau Malacoa_, and
+invested the city of _Prom_. The king of this territory was recently
+dead, leaving his successor, only thirteen years of age, who was married
+to a daughter of the king of Ava, from whom he looked for the assistance
+of 60,000 men. For this reason, the king of Siam pressed the siege, that
+he might gain the city before the arrival of the expected succours.
+After six days, the queen of Prom, who administered the government,
+offered to become tributary if he would grant a peace; but the king
+insisted that she should put herself into his hands with all her
+treasure. She refused these degrading terms, knowing his perfidious
+character, and resolved to defend the city to the last extremity. The
+king of Siam accordingly gave several assaults, in all of which he was
+repulsed, and in a short time, lost above 80,000 of his men, partly by
+the sword, and partly by a pestilential disease, which raged in his
+army, 500 Portuguese who were in his service perishing among the rest.
+
+Being unable to take the place by assault, the king of Siam caused a
+great mount to be raised, which overlooked the city, and was planted
+with a great number of cannon, by which the defenders were prodigiously
+annoyed. Upon this, 5000 men sallied from the city, and destroyed the
+mount, killing 16,000 of the enemy, and carrying off 80 pieces of
+cannon. In this affair the king of Siam was wounded; and being greatly
+enraged against a body of 2000 Portuguese, who were in his pay, and had
+the guard of the mount, he caused them all to be massacred. About the
+end of August, _Xemin Maletay_, one of the four principal officers, who
+commanded in Prom, treacherously betrayed the city to the king of Siam,
+who ordered it to be utterly destroyed with fire and sword. Two thousand
+children were cut in pieces, and given as food to the elephants. The
+queen was publicly whipped, and given up to the lust of the soldiers
+till she died. The young king was tied to her dead body, and cast into
+the river; and above 300 principal nobles were impaled. The king of Ava,
+who was marching to the assistance of his sister, understood the
+unfortunate events of Prom, but came to battle with the traitor _Zemin_,
+who had betrayed her, who was at the head of a numerous army. In this
+battle all the soldiers of Ava were slain except 800, after making a
+prodigious slaughter among the enemy; after which the king of Siam came
+up with a part of his army, and slew the remaining 800 men of Ava, with
+the loss of 12,000 of his own men, and then beheaded the traitor
+_Zemin_. He then went up the river _Queytor_, with 60,000 men in 1000
+boats, and coming to the port of Ava, about the middle of October, he
+burnt above 2000 vessels, and several villages, with the loss of 8000 of
+his men, among whom were 62 Portuguese. Understanding that the city of
+Ava was defended by 20,000 men, 30,000 of which people had slain 150,000
+of his army at _Maletay_, and that the king of _Pegu_ was coming to
+their relief, he returned in all haste to _Prom_, where he fortified
+himself, and sent an ambassador to the emperor of _Calaminam_, with rich
+presents, and the offer of an extensive territory, on condition of
+sending him effectual succours.
+
+The empire of _Calaminam_ is said to be 300 leagues in length and as
+much in breadth, having been formerly divided into 27 kingdoms, all
+using the same language, beautified with many cities and towns, and very
+fertile, containing abundance of all the productions of Asia. The name
+of the metropolis is _Timphan_, which is seated on the river _Pitni_, on
+which there are innumerable boats. It is surrounded by two strong and
+beautiful walls, contains 400,000 inhabitants, with many stately palaces
+and fine gardens, having 2500 temples belonging to 24 different sects.
+Some of these use bloody sacrifices. The women are very beautiful, yet
+chaste, two qualities that seldom go together. In their law-suits, O
+happy country! they employ no attornies, solicitors, or proctors, and
+every dispute is decided at one hearing. This kingdom maintains
+1,700,000 soldiers, 400,000 of which are horse, and has 6000 elephants.
+On account of their prodigious number, the emperor assumes the title of
+_Lord of the Elephants_, his revenue exceeding 20 millions. There are
+some remnants of Christianity among these people, as they believe in the
+blessed Trinity, and make the sign of the cross when they sneeze.
+
+Such was the great empire of _Calaminam_ to which the king of the
+Birmans[25], sent his ambassador. On his return, the king sent 150,000
+men in 1300 boats against the city of _Sabadii_, 130 leagues distant to
+the north-east. The general of this army, named _Chaunigrem_, lost many
+of his men in several assaults, after which he raised two mounts whence
+he did much harm to the city: But the besieged sallying out, killed at
+one time 8000 and at another 5000 of his men. Leaving this siege for a
+time and the affairs of the king of the _Birmans_, we purpose to relate
+what was done at _Siam_, in order to treat of them both together.
+
+[Footnote 25: Formerly this was attributed to the king of _Siam_: But
+the whole story of this section is so incredible and absurd as not to
+merit any observations. It is merely retained from De Faria, as an
+instance of the fables of Fernand Mendez de Pinto.--E.]
+
+The king of _Chiammay_, after destroying 30,000 men that had guarded the
+frontiers, besieged the city of _Guitivam_ belonging to the king of
+_Siam_, who immediately drew together an army of 500,000 men, in which
+was a body of 120 Portuguese in which he placed great reliance. This
+vast multitude was conveyed along the river in 3000 boats, while 4000
+elephants and 200 pieces of cannon were sent by land. He found the enemy
+had 300,000 men and 2000 boats. The king of Siam gave the command of his
+vast army to three generals, two of whom were Turks, and the third was
+Dominic Seixas a Portuguese. At first the _Siamese_ were worsted, but
+recovering their order they gained a complete victory, in which 130,000
+of the enemy were slain, 40,000 of whom were excellent cavalry, with the
+loss of 50,000 Siamese, all of whom were the worst troops in their
+army. After this victory the king of Siam marched against the queen of
+_Guibem_, who had allowed the enemy to pass through her country; and
+entering the city of _Fumbacar_ spared neither age nor sex. Being
+besieged in her capital of _Guirar_, the queen agreed to pay an yearly
+tribute of 60,000 ducats, and gave her son as an hostage. After this the
+king of Siam advanced to the city of _Taysiram_, to which place he
+thought the king of Chiammay had fled, destroying every thing in his
+course with fire and sword, only sparing the women; but winter coming on
+he returned to Siam.
+
+On his return to his court of _Odiaa_ or _Odiaz_, he was poisoned by his
+queen, then big with child by one of her servants; but before he died he
+caused his eldest son, then young, to be declared king. He left 30,000
+ducats to the Portuguese then in his service, and gave orders that they
+should pay no duties in any of his ports for three years. The adulterous
+queen, being near the time of her delivery, poisoned her lawful son,
+married her servant, and caused him to be proclaimed king. But in a
+short time they were both slain at a feast by the King of _Cambodia_ and
+_Oya Pansilaco_.
+
+There being no lawful heir to the kingdom of Siam, _Pretiel_ a religious
+_Talagrepo_, bastard brother to him who was poisoned, was raised to the
+throne by common consent in the beginning of the year 1549. Seeing the
+affairs of Siam in confusion, the king of the Birmans, who was likewise
+king of Pegu, resolved to conquer that kingdom. For this purpose he
+raised an army of 800,000 men, of which 40,000 were horse, and 60,000
+armed with muskets, 1000 being Portuguese. He had 20,000 elephants, 1000
+cannon drawn by oxen and _abadias_[26], and 1000 ammunition waggons
+drawn by buffaloes. The Portuguese troops in his service, were commanded
+by Diego Suarez de Mello, commonly called the Gallego, who went out to
+India in 1538. In 1542 this man became a pirate in the neighbourhood of
+Mozambique. In 1547 he was at the relief of Malacca: And now in 1549,
+being in the service of the king of the Birmans, was worth four millions
+in jewels and other valuables, had a pension of 200,000 ducats yearly,
+was stiled the king's brother, and was supreme governor of the kingdom
+and general in chief of the army. With this prodigious army the king of
+the Birmans, after one repulse, took the fort of _Tapuram_ by assault,
+which was defended by 2000 Siamese, all of whom he put to the sword in
+revenge for the loss of 3000 of his own men in the two assaults. In the
+prosecution of his march, the city of Juvopisam surrendered, after which
+he set down before the city of Odiaa the capital of Siam. Diego Suarez
+the commander in chief gave a general assault on the city, in which he
+was repulsed with the loss of 10,000 men: Another attempt was made by
+means of elephants, but with no better success. The king offered 500,000
+ducats to any one who would betray one of the gates to him; which coming
+to the knowledge of _Oya Pansiloco_, who commanded in the city, he
+opened a gate and sent word to the king to bring the money as he waited
+to receive it. After spending five months in the siege, during which he
+lost 150,000 men, news came that _Xemindoo_ had rebelled at Pegu where
+he had slain 15,000 men that opposed him. When this was known in the
+camp, 120,000 Peguers deserted, in hatred to the king of the Birmans who
+oppressed them, and in revenge of the insolence of Diego Suarez their
+general in chief.
+
+[Footnote 26: Rhinoceroses, which are so brutishly ferocious as in
+no instance to have been tamed to labour, or to have ever shewn the
+slightest degree of docility. Being of enormous strength, the only way
+of preserving them when in custody, is in a sling; so that on the first
+attempt to more forwards, they are immediately raised from the
+ground.--E.]
+
+_Xemindoo_ was of the ancient blood royal of Pegu, and being a priest
+was esteemed as a great saint. On one occasion he preached so eloquently
+against the tyranny and oppression which the Peguers suffered under the
+Birmans, that he was taken from the pulpit and proclaimed king of Pegu.
+On this he slew 8000 Birmans that guarded the palace, and seizing the
+royal treasure, he got possession of all the strong-holds in a short
+time, and the whole kingdom submitted to his authority. The armies of
+the rival kings met within two leagues of the city of Pegu; that of the
+Birmans amounting to 350,000 men, while _Xemindoo_ had 600,000; yet
+Xemindoo was defeated with the loss of 300,000 men, while the Birmans
+lost 60,000. The victorious king of the Birmans immediately entered
+Pegu, where he slew a vast multitude of the inhabitants, and recovered
+his treasure. Meanwhile the city of _Martavan_ declared for _Xemindoo_,
+and massacred the garrison of 2000 Birmans. _Zemin_ did the same in the
+city of _Zatam_ where he commanded. The king marched towards him, but he
+contrived to have him murdered by the way; on which _Zemin_ was
+proclaimed king by his followers, and soon raised an army of 30,000 men.
+_Chaumigrem_, brother to the dead king, plundered the palace and city,
+and then fled to _Tangu_ where he was born. In four months _Zemin_
+became so odious to his new subjects by his tyranny, that many of them
+fled to _Xemindoo_, who was soon at the head of 60,000 men.
+
+Some short time before this, as Diego Suarez was passing the house of a
+rich merchant on the day of his daughter's intended marriage, being
+struck by the great beauty of the bride, he attempted to carry her off
+by force, killing the bridegroom and others who came to her rescue, and
+the bride strangled herself to avoid the dishonour. As the father
+expected no justice while that king reigned, he shut himself up till
+_Zemin_ got possession of the throne, on which he so published his
+wrongs about the city, that 50,000 of the people joined with him in
+demanding justice. Fearing evil consequences, _Zemin_ caused Suarez to
+be apprehended and delivered up to the people, by whom he was stoned to
+death. His house was plundered, and as much less treasure was found than
+he was supposed to be worth, he was believed to have buried the rest.
+
+_Zemin_ soon followed Suarez, for his subjects being unable to endure
+his cruelty and avarice, fled in great numbers to Xemindoo, who was now
+master of some considerable towns. Xemindoo having gathered an army of
+200,000 men and 5000 elephants, marched to the city of Pegu, near which
+he was encountered by Zemin at the head of 800,000 men. The battle was
+long doubtful, but at last Gonzalo Neto, who served under _Xemindoo_
+with 80 Portuguese, killed _Zemin_ with a musket ball, on which his army
+fled, and _Xemindoo_ got possession of the capital. This happened on the
+3d of February 1550. Gonzalo was rewarded with a gift of 10,000 crowns,
+and 5000 were divided among his companions.
+
+_Chaumigrem_, who had fled the year before to _Tangu_, hearing that
+_Xemindoo_ had disbanded most of his forces, marched against him and
+obtained a complete victory, by which the kingdom of Pegu was again
+reduced under the authority of the Birmans. Xemindoo was taken some time
+afterwards and put to death. _Chaumigrem_ being now king of the Birmans
+and of Pegu, went to war against Siam, with an army of 1,700,000 men,
+and 17,000 elephants, having a considerable body of Portuguese in his
+service. All this army came to ruin, and the kingdom of Pegu was soon
+afterwards reduced to subjection by the king of Aracan, as formerly
+related.
+
+The kingdom of Siam, though much harassed by these invasions, still
+held out, and, in 1627, was possessed by the _black_ king, so called
+because he really was of a black colour, though all the inhabitants of
+that country are fair complexioned[27]. In 1621, this _black_ king of
+Siam sent ambassadors to Goa, desiring that some Franciscans might be
+sent to preach the gospel in his dominions. Accordingly, father Andrew,
+of the convent of the Holy Ghost, went to _Odiaa_[28], where he was
+received honourably, and got leave to erect a church, which was done at
+the king's expence. He likewise offered great riches to the venerable
+father, who constantly refused his offers, to the great admiration and
+astonishment of the king. This _black_ king of Siam was of small
+stature, of an evil presence, and an extraordinarily compound character,
+of great wickedness, mixed with great generosity. Although cruel men are
+for the most part cowards, he was at the same time exceedingly cruel,
+and very valiant; and though tyrants are generally covetous, he was
+extremely liberal; being barbarous in some parts of his conduct, and
+generous and benevolent in others. Not satisfied with putting thieves
+and robbers to ordinary deaths, he was in use to have them torn in
+pieces in his presence by tigers and crocodiles for his amusement.
+Understanding that one of his vassal kings intended to rebel, he had him
+shut up in a cage, and fed him with morsels of his own flesh torn from
+his body, after which he had him fried in a pan. On one occasion he slew
+seven ladies belonging to the court, only because they walked too quick;
+and on another occasion he cut off the legs of three others, because
+they staid too long when sent by him for some money to give to certain
+Portuguese. He even extended his severity to animals; having cut off the
+paw of a favourite monkey for putting it into a box containing some
+curiosities. A valuable horse was ordered to be beheaded, in presence of
+his other horses, because he did not stop when he checked him. A tiger
+that did not immediately seize a criminal thrown to him, was ordered to
+be beheaded as a coward. Yet had this cruel and capricious tyrant many
+estimable virtues. He kept his word inviolable; was rigorous in the
+execution of justice; liberal in his gifts; and often merciful to those
+who offended him. Having at one time sent a Portuguese to Malacca with
+money to purchase some commodities; this man, after buying them lost
+them all at play, and yet had the boldness to return to the king, who
+even received him kindly, saying that he valued the confidence reposed
+in his generosity more than the goods he ought to have brought. He
+shewed much respect to the Christian priests and missionaries, and gave
+great encouragement to the propagation of the gospel in his dominions.
+His valour was without the smallest stain.
+
+[Footnote 27: De Faria seems now to drop the fables of Fernan Mendez
+Pinto, and to relate real events in the remainder of this section.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 28: More properly Ythia, vulgarly called Siam.--E.]
+
+The proper name of the kingdom we call _Siam_, is _Sornace_[29]. It
+extends along the coast for 700 leagues, and its width inland is 260.
+Most part of the country consists of fertile plains, watered by many
+rivers, producing provisions of all sorts in vast abundance. The hills
+are covered with a variety of trees, among which there are abundance of
+ebony, brasilwood, and _Angelin_. It contains many mines of sulphur,
+saltpetre, tin, iron, silver, gold, sapphires, and rubies; and produces
+much sweet-smelling wood, benzoin, wax, cinnamon, pepper, ginger,
+cardamunis, sugar, honey, silk, and cotton. The royal revenue is about
+thirteen millions. The kingdom contains 13,000 cities and towns, besides
+innumerable villages. All the towns are walled; but the people for the
+most part are weak timorous and unwarlike. The coast is upon both seas;
+that which is on the sea of India, or bay of Bengal, containing the sea
+ports of _Junzalam_[30], and _Tanasserim_; while on the coast of the
+China sea, are _Mompolocata_, _Cey_, _Lugor_, _Chinbu_, and _Perdio_.
+
+[Footnote 29: The oriental term _Shan_, probably derived from the
+inhabitants of Pegu; but the Siamese call themselves _Tai_, or freemen,
+and their country _Meuang tai_, or the country of freemen--E.]
+
+[Footnote 30: Otherwise called Junkseylon.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XVI.
+
+_A short Account of the Portuguese possessions between the Cape of Good
+Hope and China_.[31]
+
+
+In the middle of the seventeenth century, the Portuguese empire in the
+east, comprehended under the general name of India, from beyond the Cape
+of Good Hope in Africa, to Cape Liampo in China, extended for 4000
+leagues along the sea-coast, not including the shores of the Rea Sea and
+the Persian gulf, which would add 1200 leagues more. Within these limits
+are half of Africa, and all of eastern Asia, with innumerable islands
+adjoining these two vast divisions of the world. This vast extent may be
+conveniently divided into seven parts.
+
+[Footnote 31: De Faria, III. 115. This is to be understood as about the
+year 1640, before the Dutch had begun to conquer the Portuguese
+possessions. They are now few and unimportant, containing only some
+remnant of dominion at Mozambique, with the cities of Goa and Diu in
+India, and Macao in China.--E.]
+
+The _first_ division, between the famous Cape of Good Hope, and the
+mouth of the Red Sea, contains along the coast many kingdoms of the
+_Kafrs_; as the vast dominions of the Monomotapa, who is lord of all the
+gold mines of Africa, with those of Sofala, Mozambique, Quiloa, Pemba,
+Melinda, Pate, Brava, Magadoxa, and others. In this division the
+Portuguese have the forts of Sofala and Mombaza, with the city and fort
+of Mozambique.
+
+The _second_ division, from the mouth of the Red Sea to that of the
+Persian gulf, contains the coast of Arabia, in which they have the
+impregnable fortress of Muskat.
+
+The _third_ division, between Busrah, or Bazorah, at the bottom of the
+Persian gulf, and India proper, contains the kingdoms of Ormuz, Guadel,
+and Sinde, with part of Persia, and Cambaya, on which they have the fort
+of Bandel, and the island of Diu.
+
+The _fourth_ division, from the gulph of Cambaya, to Cape Comorin,
+contains what is properly called India, including part of Cambaya, with
+the Decan, Canara, and Malabar, subject to several princes. On this
+coast the Portuguese have, Damam, Assarim, Danu, St Gens, Agazaim, Maim,
+Manora, Trapor, Bazaim, Tana, Caranja, the city of Chaul, with the
+opposite fort of Morro; the most noble city of GOA, the large, strong,
+and populous metropolis of the Portuguese possessions in the east. This
+is the see of an archbishop, who is primate of all the east, and is the
+residence of their viceroys; and there are the courts of inquisition,
+exchequer, and chancery, with a customhouse, arsenal, and well-stored
+magazines. The city of Goa, which stands in an island, is girt with a
+strong wall, and defended by six mighty castles called Dauguim, San
+Blas, Bassoleco, Santiago de Agazaim, Panguim, and Nuestra Sennora del
+Cabo. On the other side of the bar is the castle of Bardes, and opposite
+to Dauguim is the fort of Norva, with a considerable town. On one side
+of the island of Goa is that of Salsete, in which is the fort of Rachol.
+Then going along the coast are the forts of Onor, Barcelor, Mongalor,
+Cananor Cranganor, Cochin, which is a bishopric; and near Cape Comorin,
+the town and fort of Coulan.
+
+The _fifth_ division, between Cape Comorin and the river Ganges,
+contains the coasts of Coromandel and Orixa, on which they have the fort
+of Negapatam, the fort and city of Meliapour, which is a bishopric,
+formerly named after St Thomas, and the fort of Masulipatan.
+
+The _sixth_ division, between the Ganges and Cape Cincapura, contains
+the vast kingdoms of Bengal, Pegu, Tanasserim, and others of less note;
+where the Portuguese have the city of Malacca, the seat of a bishop, and
+their last possession on the continent.
+
+The _seventh_ division, from Cape Cincapura to Cape Liampo in China,
+contains the kingdoms of Pam, Lugor, Siam, Cambodia, Tsiompa, Cochin
+China, and the vast empire of China. In this vast extent the Portuguese
+have only the island and city of Macao, yet trade all along these
+coasts.
+
+In the island of Ceylon, the Portuguese possess the city and fort of
+Columbo, with those of Manaar, Gale, and others. Beyond Malacca, a fort
+in the island of Timor. The number of our ports in all this great track
+is above fifty, with twenty cities and towns, and many dependent
+villages.
+
+Much might be said of Ceylon, but we can only make room for a short
+account of that famous island[32]. About 500 years before the time of
+our Saviour, the heathen king of _Tenacarii_, who ruled over a great
+part of the east, banished his son and heir _Vigia Rajah_, for the
+wickedness and depravity of his conduct. The young man put to sea with
+700 dissipated persons like himself, and landed at the port of
+_Preature_, between Trincomalee, and Jafnapatam, in the island of
+Ceylon, which was not then inhabited, but abounded in delightful rivers,
+springs, woods, and fruit-trees, with many fine birds, and numerous
+animals. These new colonists were so delighted with the country, that
+they gave it the name of _Lancao_, which signifies the terrestrial
+paradise, and, indeed, it is still considered as the delight of all the
+east. The first town they built was _Montota_, opposite to _Manaar_,
+whence they traded with _Cholca Rajah_, the nearest king on the
+continent, who gave his daughter as wife to the prince, and supplied his
+companions with women. He likewise sent them labourers and artizans to
+forward the new plantation; and seeing his power increase, the banished
+prince assumed the title of emperor of the islands. By strangers these
+new come people were named _Galas_, signifying banished men on account
+of their having actually been banished by the king of _Tenacarii._ Vigia
+Rajah died without children, and left the crown to his brother, in whole
+lineage it continued for 900 years. The fertility of the island, and the
+fame of its excellent cinnamon, drew thither the _Chinese_, who
+intermarried with the _Galas_, from which mixture arose a new race,
+called to this day the _Chingalas_, or Chingalese, who are very powerful
+in the island, being subtle, false, and cunning, and excellently adapted
+for courtiers.
+
+[Footnote 32: This is supplied from a former portion of the Portuguese
+Asia, Vol II. p. 507.]
+
+On the extinction of the ancient royal family, the kingdom fell to
+_Dambadine Pandar Pracura Mabago_, who was treacherously taken prisoner
+by the Chinese, afterwards restored, and then murdered by _Alagexere_,
+who usurped the crown. The usurper dying ten years afterwards without
+issue, two sons of _Dambadine_ were sent for who had fled from the
+tyrant. _Maha Pracura Mabago_, the eldest, was raised to the throne, who
+settled his court at _Cota_, and gave the dominion of the four _Corlas_
+to his brother. _Maha Pracura_ was succeeded by a grandson, the son of a
+daughter who was married to the Rajah of _Cholca_. This line likewise
+failed, and _Queta Permal_, king of Jafnapatam, was raised to the
+throne, on which he assumed the name or title of _Bocnegaboa_, or king
+by force of arms, having overcome his brother, who was king of the four
+_corlas_. His son, _Caypura Pandar_, succeeded, but was defeated and
+slain by the king of the four _Corlas_, who mounted the throne, and took
+the name of _Jauira Pracura Magabo_. These two kings were of the royal
+lineage, and had received their dominions from king _Maha Pracura_.
+After _Jauira_, his son _Drama Pracura Magabo_ succeeded, who reigned
+when Vasco de Gama discovered the route by sea to India. Afterwards,
+about the year 1500, the empire of Ceylon was divided by three brothers,
+into three separate kingdoms. _Bocnegababo Pandar_ had _Cota_; _Reigam
+Pandar_ had _Reigam_; and _Madure Pandar_ had _Cheitavaca_.
+
+In the district of _Dinavaca_ in the centre of the island, there is a
+prodigiously high mountain called the _Peak of Adam_, as some have
+conceived that our first parents lived there, and that the print of a
+foot, still to be seen on a rock on its summit, is his. The natives call
+this _Amala Saripadi_, or the mountain of the footstep. Some springs
+running down this mountain form a pool at the bottom, in which pilgrims
+wash themselves, believing that it purifies them from sin. The rock or
+stone on the top resembles a tomb-stone, and the print of the foot seems
+not artificial, but as if it had been made in the same manner as when a
+person treads upon wet clay, on which account it is esteemed miraculous.
+Pilgrims of all sorts resort thither from all the surrounding countries,
+even from Persia and China; and having purified themselves by washing in
+the pool below, they go to the top of the mountain, near which hangs a
+bell, which they strike, and consider its sound as a symbol of their
+having been purified; _as if any other bell, on being struck, would not
+sound_. According to the natives, _Drama Rajah_, the son of an ancient
+king of the island, having done penance on the mountain along with many
+disciples, and being about to go away, left the print of his foot on the
+rock as a memorial. It is therefore respected as the relic of a saint,
+and their common name for this person is _Budam_, which signifies the
+_wise man_. Some believe this saint to have been _St Jesaphat_, but it
+was more likely _St Thomas_, who has left many memorials in the _east_,
+and even in the _west_, both in Brasil and Paraguay.
+
+The natural woods of Ceylon are like the most curious orchards and
+gardens of Europe, producing citrons, lemons, and many other kinds of
+delicious fruit. It abounds in cinnamon, cardamums, sugar-canes, honey,
+and hemp. It produces iron, of which the best firelocks in the east are
+made. It abounds in precious stones, as rubies, sapphires, cats-eyes,
+topazes, chrysolites, amythests, and berils. It has many civet-cats, and
+produces, the noblest elephants in all the east. Its rivers and shores
+abound in a variety of excellent fish, and it has many excellent ports
+fit for the largest ships.
+
+_End of the Portuguese Asia_.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER V.
+
+VOYAGES AND TRAVELS IN EGYPT, SYRIA, ARABIA, PERSIA, AND INDIA. BY
+LUDOVICO VERTHEMA, IN 1503[33].
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+This ancient itinerary into the east, at the commencement of the
+sixteenth century, together with the subsequent chapter, containing the
+peregrinations of Cesar Frederick, about 80 years later, form an
+appropriate supplement to the Portuguese transactions in India, as
+furnishing a great number of observations respecting the countries,
+people, manners, customs, and commerce of the east at an early period.
+We learn from the _Bibliotheque Universelle des Voyages_. I. 264, that
+this itinerary was originally published in Italian at Venice, in 1520.
+The version followed on the present occasion was republished in old
+English, in 1811, in an appendix to a reprint of HAKLUYT'S EARLY
+VOYAGES, TRAVELS, AND DISCOVERIES; from which we learn that it was
+translated from _Latine into Englishe, by Richarde Eden_, and originally
+published in 1576. In both these English versions, the author is named
+_Lewes Vertomannus_; but we learn from the _Biol. Univ. des Voy._ that
+his real name was _Ludovico Verthema_, which we have accordingly adopted
+on the present occasion, in preference to the latinized denomination
+used by Eden. Although, in the present version, we have strictly adhered
+to the sense of that published by Eden 236 years ago, it has appeared
+more useful, and more consonant to the plan of our work, to render the
+antiquated language into modern English: Yet, as on similar occasions,
+we leave the _Preface of the Author_ exactly in the language and
+orthography of Eden, the original translator.
+
+[Footnote 33: Hakluyt, iv. App. pp. 547--612. Ed. Lond. 1810-11.]
+
+The itinerary is vaguely dated in the title as of the year 1503, but we
+learn from the text, that Verthema set out upon the pilgrimage of Mecca
+from Damascus in the beginning of April 1503, after having resided a
+considerable time at Damascus to acquire the language, probably Arabic;
+and he appears to have left India on his return to Europe, by way of the
+Cape of Good Hope and Lisbon, in the end of 1508. From some
+circumstances in the text, but which do not agree with the
+commencement, it would appear that Verthema had been taken prisoner by
+the Mamelukes, when fifteen years of age, and was admitted into that
+celebrated military band at Cairo, after making profession of the
+Mahometan religion. He went afterwards on pilgrimage to Mecca, from
+Damascus in Syria, then under the dominion of the Mameluke Soldan of
+Egypt, and contrived to escape or desert from Mecca. By some unexplained
+means, he appears to have become the servant or slave of a Persian
+merchant, though he calls himself his companion, and along with whom he
+made various extensive peregrinations in India. At length he contrived,
+when at Cananore, to desert again to the Portuguese, through whose means
+he was enabled to return to Europe.
+
+In this itinerary, as in all the ancient voyages and travels, the names
+of persons, places, and things, are generally given in an extremely
+vicious orthography, often almost utterly unintelligible, as taken down
+orally, according to the vernacular modes of the respective writers,
+without any intimate knowledge of the native language, or the employment
+of any fixed general standard. To avoid the multiplication of notes, we
+have endeavoured to supply this defect, by subjoining those names which
+are now almost universally adopted by Europeans, founded upon a more
+intimate acquaintance with the eastern languages. Thus the author, or
+his translator Eden, constantly uses _Cayrus_ and _Alcayr_, for the
+modern capital of Egypt, now known either by the Arabic denomination Al
+Cahira, or the European designation Cairo, probably formed by the
+Venetians from the Arabic. The names used in this itinerary have
+probably been farther disguised and vitiated, by a prevalent fancy or
+fashion of giving _latin_ terminations to all names of persons and
+places in latin translations. Thus, even the author of this itinerary
+has had his modern _Roman_ name, _Verthema_, latinized into
+_Vertomannus_, and probably the _Cairo_, or _Cayro_ of the Italian
+original, was corrupted by Eden into _Cayrus_, by way of giving it a
+latin sound. Yet, while we have endeavoured to give, often
+conjecturally, the better, or at least more intelligible and now
+customary names, it seemed proper to retain those of the original
+translation, which we believe may be found useful to our readers, as a
+kind of _geographical glossary_ of middle-age terms.
+
+Of _Verthema_ or _Vertomannus_, we only know, from the title of the
+translation of his work by Eden, that he was a _gentleman of Rome;_ and
+we learn, at the close of his itinerary, that he was knighted by the
+Portuguese viceroy of India, and that his patent of knighthood was
+confirmed at Lisbon, by the king of Portugal. The full title of this
+journal or itinerary, as given by the original translator, is as
+follows; by which, and the preface of the author, both left unaltered,
+the language and orthography of England towards the end of the sixteenth
+century, or in 1576, when Eden published his translation, will be
+sufficiently illustrated.--Ed.
+
+   THE NAUIGATION AND VYAGES
+   OF
+   LEWES VERTOMANNUS,
+   GENTLEMAN OF THE CITIE OF ROME,
+   TO THE
+   REGIONS OF ARABIA, EGYPTE, PERSIA, SYRIA, ETHIOPIA
+   AND EAST INDIA,
+   BOTH WITHIN AND WITHOUT THE RYUER OF GANGES, ETC.
+   IN THE YEERE OF OUR LORDE 1503.
+   CONTEYNING
+   MANY NOTABLE AND STRAUNGE THYNGES,
+   BOTH HYSTORICALL AND NATURALL
+   TRANSLATED OUT OF LATINE INTO ENGLYSHE,
+   BY RICHARDE EDEN.
+   IN THE YEERE OF OUR LORDE 1576.
+
+THE PREFACE OF THE AUTHOR.
+
+There haue been many before me, who, to know the miracles of the worlde,
+haue with diligent studie read dyuers authours which haue written of
+such thynges. But other giuing more credit to the lyuely voyce, haue
+been more desirous to know the same, by relation of such as haue
+traueyled in those countreys, and seene such thinges whereof they make
+relation, for that in many bookes, geathered of vncertaine aucthoritie,
+are myxt false thinges with true. Other there are so greatly desirous to
+know the trueth of these thinges, that they can in no wyse be satisfied
+vntyll, by theyr owne experience they haue founde the trueth by vyages
+and perigrinations into straunge countreys and people, to know theyr
+maners, fashions, and customes, with dyuers thynges there to be seene:
+wherein the only readyng of bookes could not satisfie theyr thirst of
+such knowledge, but rather increased the same, in so much, that they
+feared not with losse of theyr goods and daunger of lyfe to attempte
+great vyages to dyuers countreys, with witnesse of theyr eyes to see
+that they so greatly desired to knowe. The whiche thyng among other
+chaunced vnto me also, for as often as in the books of Hystories and
+Cosmographie, I read of such marueylous thynges whereof they make
+mention [especially of thynges in the east parts of the world], there
+was nothyng that coulde pacifie my vnquiet mynde, vntyll I had with myne
+eyes seene the trueth thereof.
+
+I know that some there are indued with hygh knowledge, mountyng vnto the
+heauens, whiche will contempne these our wrytinges as base and humble,
+by cause we do not here, after theyr maner, with hygh and subtile
+inquisition intreate of the motions and dispositions of the starres, and
+gyue reason of theyr woorkyng on the earth, with theyr motions,
+retrogradations, directions, mutations, epicicles, reuolutions,
+inclinations, diuinations, reflexions, and suche other parteyning to the
+science of Astrologie: whych certeynely we doe not contempne, but
+greatly prayse. But measuryng vs with our owne foote, we will leaue that
+heauie burden of heauven to the strong shoulders of Atlas and Hercules:
+and only creepyng vpon the earth, in our owne person beholde the
+situations of landes and regions, with the maners and customes of men,
+and variable fourmes, shapes, natures, and properties of beastes,
+fruites, and trees, especially suche as are among the Arabians,
+Persians, Indians, Ethiopians. And whereas in the searchyng of these
+thynges we have [thanked be God], satisfied our desire, we thinke
+neuerthelesse that we haue done little, excepte we should communicate to
+other, such thynges as we haue seene and had experience of, that they
+lykewyse by the readyng therof may take pleasure, for whose sakes we
+have written this long and dangerous discourse, of thynges whych we haue
+seene in dyvers regions and sectes of men, desiryng nothyng more then
+that the trueth may be knowen to them that desyre the same. But what
+incommodities and troubles chaunced vnto me in these vyages, as hunger,
+thirst, colde, heate, warres, captiuitie, terrours, and dyuers other
+suche daungers, I will declare by the way in theyr due places.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Of the Navigation from Venice to Alexandria in Egypt, and from thence
+to Damascus in Syria_[34].
+
+
+Should any one wish to know the cause of my engaging in this voyage, I
+can give no better reason than the ardent desire of knowledge, which
+hath moved me and many others to see the world and the wonders of
+creation which it exhibits. And, as other known parts of the world had
+been already sufficiently travelled over by others, I was determined to
+wait and describe such parts as were not sufficiently known. For which
+reason, with the grace of God, and calling upon his holy name to prosper
+our enterprise, we departed from Venice, and with prosperous winds we
+arrived in few days at the city of Alexandria in Egypt. The desire we
+had to know things more strange and farther off, did not permit us to
+remain long at that place; wherefore, sailing up the river Nile, we came
+to the city of new Babylon, commonly called _Cayrus_ or _Akayr_, _Cairo_
+or _Al-cahira_, called also _Memphis_ in ancient times.
+
+[Footnote 34: To accommodate this curious article to our mode of
+arrangement, we have made a slight alteration of the nomenclature of its
+subdivisions; calling those in this version _Sections_, which in the
+original translation of Mr Eden are denominated chapters; and have used
+the farther freedom of sometimes throwing several of these chapters into
+one section.--E.]
+
+On my first arrival at this place I was more astonished than I can well
+express, yet on a more intimate observation it seemed much inferior to
+the report of its fame, as in extent it seemed not larger than Rome,
+though much more populous. But many have been deceived in regard to its
+size by the extensive suburbs, which are in reality numerous dispersed
+villages with fields interspersed, which some persons have thought to
+belong to the city, though they are from two to three miles distant, and
+surround it on all sides. It is not needful to expatiate in this place
+on the manners and religion of this city and its environs, as it is well
+known that the inhabitants are Mahometans and Mamelukes; these last
+being Christians who have forsaken the true faith to serve the Turks and
+Mahometans. Those of that description who used to serve the Soldan of
+Babylon in Egypt, or Cairo, in former times before the Turkish
+conquest, used to be called Mamelukes, while such of them as served the
+Turks were denominated _Jenetzari_ or Janisaries. The Mameluke
+Mahometans are subject to the Soldan of Syria.
+
+As the riches and magnificence of Cairo, and the Mameluke soldiers by
+whom it is occupied are well known, we do not deem it necessary to say
+any thing respecting them in this place. Wherefore departing from
+Babylon in Egypt, or Cairo, and returning to Alexandria, we again put to
+sea and went to _Berynto_, a city on the coast of Syria Phoenicia,
+inhabited by Mahometans and abounding in all things, where we remained a
+considerable time. This city is not encompassed with walls, except on
+the west side where there are walls close to the sea. We found nothing
+memorable at this place, except an old ruined building where they say
+St. George delivered the kings daughter from a cruel dragon which he
+slew, and then restated the lady to her father. Departing from thence we
+went to Tripoli in Syria, which is two days sail to the east of Berynto.
+It is inhabited by Mahometans, who are subject to the lieutenant or
+governor of Syria under the Soldan. The soil of the neighbouring country
+is very fertile, and as it carries on great trade this city abounds in
+all things. Departing from thence we came to the city of _Comagene_ of
+Syria, commonly called Aleppo, and named by our men Antioch[35]. This is
+a goodly city, which is situated under mount _Taurus_ and is subject to
+the lieutenant of Syria under the Soldan of Egypt. Here are the _scales_
+or ladders as they are called of the Turks and Syrians, being near mount
+Olympus. It is a famous mart of the Azamians and Persians. The Azamians
+are a Mahometan people who inhabit Mesopotamia on the confines of
+Persia.
+
+[Footnote 35: This is a gross error, as Aleppo is above 80 English miles
+N.E. and island from Antioch. From the sequel it is evident that Antioch
+is the place meant by Vertomannus in the text, as the _scales_, mart, or
+staple of the Syrian trade.--E.]
+
+Departing from Antioch we went by land to Damascus, a journey of ten
+days; but mid-way we came to a city named _Aman_ in the neighbourhood of
+which there grows a great quantity of gossampine or cotton, and all
+manner of pleasant fruits. About six miles from Damascus on the
+declivity of a mountain is a city called _Menin_, inhabited by Greek
+christians who are subject to the governor of Damascus. At that place
+there are two fine churches, which the inhabitants allege were built by
+Helena the mother of the emperor Constantine. This place produces all
+kinds of fruit in great perfection, especially excellent grapes, and the
+gardens are watered with perpetual fountains.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Of the City of Damascus_.
+
+
+Departing from _Menin_ we came to Damascus, a city so beautiful as
+surpasses all belief, situated in a soil of wonderful fertility. I was
+so much delighted by the marvellous beauty of this city that I sojourned
+there a considerable time, that by learning the language I might inquire
+into the manners of the people. The inhabitants are Mahometans and
+Mamelukes, with a great number of Christians who follow the Greek
+ritual. It may be proper in this place to give some account of the
+_Hexarchatus_ or commander of Damascus, who is subject to the lieutenant
+of Syria, which some call _sorya_. There is a very strong castle or
+fortress, which was built by a certain Etruscan or native of Florence in
+Tuscany, while he was _exarch_ or governor of Damascus, as appears by a
+flower of the lily graven on marble, being the arms of Florence. This
+castle is encompassed by a deep ditch and high walls with four goodly
+high towers, and is entered by means of a drawbridge which can be let
+down or taken up at pleasure. Within, this castle is provided with all
+kinds of great artillery and warlike ammunition, and has a constant
+guard of fifty Mamelukes, who wait upon the captain of the castle and
+are paid by the viceroy of Syria. The following story respecting the
+Florentine _exarch_ or governor of Damascus was related to me by the
+inhabitants. One of the Soldans of Syria happened to have poison
+administered to him, and when in search of a remedy he was cured by that
+Florentine who belonged to the company of Mamelukes. Owing to this great
+service he grew into high favour with the Soldan, who in reward made him
+exarch or governor of Damascus in which he built the before mentioned
+citadel. For saving the life of their Soldan this man is still reputed
+among them as a saint, and after his death the sovereignty of Damascus
+returned to the Syrians.
+
+The Soldan is said to be much beloved by his princes and lords, to whom
+he is ever ready to grant principalities and governments, reserving
+always to himself the yearly payment of many thousands of those pieces
+of gold called _saraphos_ or serafines, and any one who neglects payment
+of the stipulated tribute is liable to be immediately put to death. Ten
+or twelve of the chief noblemen or governors always reside with the
+Soldan to assist him with their councils and to carry his orders into
+execution. The Mameluke government is exceedingly oppressive to the
+merchants and even to the other Mahometan inhabitants of Damascus. When
+the Soldan thinks fit to extort a sum of money from any of the nobles or
+merchants, he gives two letters to the governor of the castle, in one of
+which is contained a list of such as he thinks proper to be invited into
+the castle, and in the other is set down what sum the Soldan is pleased
+to demand from his subjects; and with these commands they immediately
+comply. Sometimes however the nobles are of such power that they refuse
+to attend at the castle when summoned; and knowing that the tyrant will
+offer them violence, they often escape into the dominions of the Turks.
+We have noticed that the watchmen who are stationed in the towers do not
+give warning to the guard by calling out as with us, but by means of
+drums each answering the other; and if any of the centinels be asleep
+and do not answer the beat of the patrole in a moment, he is immediately
+committed to prison for a whole year.
+
+This city is well built and wonderfully populous, much frequented and
+extremely rich, and abounds in all kinds of commodities and provisions,
+such as flesh, corn, and fruits. It has fresh damascene grapes all the
+year round, with pomegranates, oranges, lemons, and excellent olive
+trees; likewise the finest roses I ever saw, both red and white. The
+apples are excellent, but the pears and peaches are unsavoury, owing as
+is said to too much moisture. A fine clear river runs past the city,
+which is so well supplied with water that almost every house has a
+fountain of curious workmanship, many of them splendidly ornamented with
+embossed or carved work. Outwardly their houses are very plain, but the
+insides are beautifully adorned with various ornaments of the stone
+called _oplus_ or serpentine marble. The city contains many temples
+which they call mosques, the most beautiful of which is built after the
+manner of St Peters at Rome, and as large, only that the middle has no
+roof being entirely open, all the rest of the temple being vaulted. This
+temple has four great double gates of brass, and has many splendid
+fountains on the inside, in which they preserve the body of the prophet
+Zacharias, whom they hold in great veneration. There are still to be
+seen the ruins of many decayed canonical or Christian churches, having
+much fine carved work. About a mile from the city the place is pointed
+out where our Saviour spoke to St Paul, saying, "Paul! Paul! why
+persecutest thou me!" at which place all the Christians who die in the
+city are buried. The tower also is shewn in which Paul was imprisoned,
+which joins the wall of the city; but even the Mahometans do not attempt
+to shut up that part of the tower through which St Paul was conducted by
+the angel, alleging that, when they close it up over night is found open
+again next morning. They likewise point out the houses in which they say
+that Cain slew his brother Abel, which are in a certain valley about a
+mile from the city, but on the side of a hill skirting that valley.
+
+The Mamelukes or stranger soldiers who inhabit Damascus live in a most
+licentious manner. They are all men who have forsaken the Christian
+faith, and who have been purchased as slaves by the governor of Syria.
+Being brought up both in learning and warlike discipline, they are very
+active and brave; and all of them whether high or low, receive regular
+wages from the governor, being six of those pieces of gold called
+serafines monthly, besides meat and drink for themselves and servants,
+and provender for their horses; and as they shew themselves valiant and
+faithful their wages are increased. They never walk singly about the
+city, which would be deemed dishonourable, but always by two or three
+together; and if they chance to meet with two or three women in the
+streets, for whom even they are in use to wait in the neighbourhood of
+such houses as the women frequent, licence is granted to such as first
+meet them to carry them to certain taverns where they abuse them. When
+the Mamelukes attempt to uncover the faces of these women, they strive
+all they can to prevent being known, and are generally allowed to go
+away without having their veils lifted. Hence it sometimes happens, when
+they think to have abused the daughter of some nobleman or person of
+condition, that they have fallen in with their own wives, as actually
+happened while I was there. The women of Damascus beautify and adorn
+themselves with great attention, wearing silk clothes, which they cover
+with an outer garment of cotton as fine as silk. They wear white
+buskins, and red or purple shoes, having their heads decorated with
+rich jewels and ear-rings, with rings on their fingers and splendid
+bracelets on their arms. They marry as often as they please, as when
+weary of, or dissatisfied with their husbands, they apply to the chief
+of their religion, called the _cady_, and request of him to divorce
+them, which divorcement is called _talacare_ in their language, after
+which they are at liberty to contract a new marriage; and the same
+liberty is allowed to the husbands. Some say that the Mahometans have
+usually five or six wives, but as far as I could learn they have only
+two or three. They eat openly in the markets or fairs, and there they
+cook all their food, living on the flesh, of horses, camels, buffaloes,
+goats, and other beasts, and use great quantities of fresh cheese. Those
+who sell milk drive flocks of forty or fifty she-goats through the
+streets, which they bring to the doors of those who buy, driving them
+even into their chambers, though three stories high, where the animals
+are milked, so that every one gets their milk fresh and unadulterated.
+These goats have their ears a span long, and are very fruitful. They use
+many mushrooms, as there are often seen at one time 20 or 30 camels
+loaded with mushrooms coming to market, and yet all are sold in two or
+three days. These are brought from the mountains of Armenia, and from
+Asia Minor, now called Turkey, Natolia, or Anatolia. The Mahometans use
+long loose vestures both of silk and cloth, most having hose or trowsers
+of cotton, and white shoes or slippers. When any Mahometan happens to
+meet a Mameluke, even though the worthier person, he must give place and
+reverence to the Mameluke, who would otherwise beat him with a staff.
+Though often ill used by the Mahometans, the Christians have many
+warehouses in Damascus, where they sell various kinds of silks and
+velvets, and other commodities.
+
+
+
+
+SECT. III.
+
+_Of the Journey from Damascus to Mecca, and of the Manners of the
+Arabians_.
+
+
+On the 8th of April 1503, having hired certain camels to go with the
+caravan to Mecca, and being then ignorant of the manners and customs of
+those with whom I was to travel, I entered into familiarity and
+friendship with a certain Mameluke captain who had forsaken our faith,
+with whom I agreed for the expences of my journey, and who supplied me
+with apparel like that worn by the Mamelukes, and gave me a good horse,
+so that I went in his company along with other Mamelukes. This advantage
+cost me much money and many gifts. Thus entering on our journey, we came
+in three days to a place called _Mezaris_, where we tarried other three
+days that the merchants might provide all necessaries for the journey,
+and especially camels. There is a certain prince called _Zambei_, of
+great power in Arabia, who had three brothers and four sons. This prince
+possessed 40,000 horses, 10,000 mares, and 4000 camels, which he kept in
+a country two days journey in extent. His power is so great, that he is
+at war with the Soldan of Egypt, the governor of Damascus, and the
+prince of Jerusalem all at once. His chief time of robbing and
+plundering is in harvest, when, he often falls unexpectedly on the
+Arabians, invading their lands and carrying away their wheat and barley,
+employing himself continually in predatory incursions. When his mares
+are weary with continual running, he stops to rest them, and gives them
+camels milk to drink, to refresh and cool them after their fatigue.
+These mares are of most wonderful swiftness, and when I saw them they
+seemed rather to fly than to run in riding, these Arabians only cover
+their horses with cloths or mats, and their own clothing is confined to
+a single vesture somewhat like a petticoat. Their weapons are long
+lances or darts made of reeds, ten or twelve cubits long, pointed with
+iron and fringed with silk. The men are despicable looking people, of
+small stature, of a colour between black and yellow, which we call
+olive, having voices like women, and long black hair flowing on their
+shoulders. They are more numerous than can well be believed, and are
+continually at war among themselves. They inhabit the mountains, and
+have certain times appointed for going out on predatory excursions, when
+they march in troops in great order, carrying with them their wives and
+children, and all their goods. Their houses or tents rather are carried
+on camels, having no other houses, but dwelling always in tents like
+soldiers. These tents are made of wool, and look black and filthy.
+
+On the 11th of April we departed from Mezaris to the number of 40,000
+men with 35,000 camels, having only sixty Mamelukes to guide and guard
+us. We were regularly marshalled for the march into a van and main body,
+with two wings, in which order the caravans of pilgrims always travel
+in these regions. From Damascus to Mecca is a journey of forty days and
+forty nights. Departing from Mezaris we continued our journey that day
+till the twenty-second hour of the day. Then our captain or
+_Agmirus_[36], having given the appointed signal, the whole caravan
+immediately halted and disburdened the camels, two hours only being
+allowed for rest and refreshment for the men and beasts. Then upon a new
+signal the camels were all reloaded, and we resumed our march. Every
+camel has for one feed five barley loaves, raw and not baked, as large
+as pomegranates. We continued our second days journey like the first,
+all day and night, from sun-rise to the twenty-second hour of the day,
+and this was the constant regular order. Every eighth day they procure
+water by digging the ground or sand, though sometimes we found wells and
+cisterns. Likewise after every eight day, they rest two days, that the
+camels and horses may recover strength. Every camel bears an incredible
+load, being equal to that Which is borne by two strong-mules.
+
+[Footnote 36: The Emir Haji, or captain of the pilgrimage, which name of
+office is transposed in the text to Haji-emir, corrupted _Agmir_, and
+latinized Agmirus.--E.]
+
+At every resting-place at the waters, they are always obliged to defend
+themselves against vast numbers of Arabians, but these conflicts are
+hardly ever attended with bloodshed, insomuch that though we often
+fought with them, we had only one man slain during the whole journey,
+these Arabians are so weak and cowardly that our threescore Mamelukes
+have often driven 60,000 Arabians before them. Of these Mamelukes, I
+have often seen wonderful instances of their expertness and activity. I
+once saw a Mameluke place an apple on the head of his servant at the
+distance of 12 or 14 paces, and strike it off from his head, another
+while riding at full speed took the saddle from his horse, and carried
+it some time on his head, and put it again on the horse without checking
+his career.
+
+At the end of twelve days journey we came to the valley of Sodom and
+Gomorra, which we found, as is said in the holy scripture, to retain the
+ruins of the destroyed city as a lasting memorial of God's wrath. I may
+affirm that there are three cities, each situated on the declivity of
+three separate hills, and the ruins do not seem above three or four
+cubits high, among which is seen something like blood, or rather like
+red wax mixed with earth. It is easy to believe that these people were
+addicted to horrible vices, as testified by the barren, dry, filthy
+unwholesome region, utterly destitute of water. These people were once
+fed with manna sent from heaven, but abusing the gifts of God they were
+utterly destroyed. Departing about twenty miles from this place, about
+thirty of our company perished for want of water, and several others
+were overwhelmed with sand. A little farther on we found water at the
+foot of a little hill, and there halted. Early next morning there came
+to us 24,000 Arabians, who demanded money from us in payment of the
+water we had taken, and as we refused them any money, saying that the
+water was the free gift of God to all, we came to blows. We gathered
+ourselves together on the mountain as the safest place, using our camels
+as a bulwark, all the merchants and their goods being placed in the
+middle of the camels while we fought manfully on every side. The battle
+continued for two days, when water failed both with us and our enemies,
+who encompassed the mountain all round, continually calling out that
+they would break in among our camels. At length our captain assembled
+all the merchants, whom he commanded to gather twelve hundred pieces of
+gold to be given to the Arabians: but on receiving that sum they said it
+was too little, and demanded ten thousand pieces and more for the water
+we had taken. Whereupon our captain gave orders that every man in the
+caravan who could bear arms should prepare for battle. Next morning our
+commander sent on the caravan with the unarmed pilgrims inclosed by the
+camels, and made an attack upon the enemy with our small army, which
+amounted to about three hundred in all. With the loss only of one man
+and a woman on our side, we completely defeated the Arabians of whom we
+slew 1500 men. This victory is not to be wondered at, considering that
+the Arabians are almost entirely unarmed being almost naked, and having
+only a thin loose vesture, while their horses are very ill provided for
+battle, having no saddles or other caparisons.
+
+Continuing our march after this victory, we came in eight days to a
+mountain about ten or twelve miles in circuit, which was inhabited by
+about 5000 Jews. These were of very small stature, hardly exceeding five
+or six spans in height, and some much less[37]. They have small shrill
+voices like women, and are of very dark complexions, some blacker than
+the rest. Their only food is the flesh of goats. They are all
+circumcised and follow the Jewish law, and when any Mahometan falls into
+their hands they flea him alive. We found a hole at the foot of the
+mountain out of which there flowed an abundant source of water, at which
+we laded 16,000 camels, giving great offence to the Jews. These people
+wander about their mountain like so many goats or deer, not daring to
+descend into the plain for fear of the Arabians. At the bottom of the
+mountain we found a small grove of seven or eight thorn trees, among
+which we found a pair of turtle doves, which were to us a great rarity,
+as during our long journey hitherto we had seen neither beast nor bird.
+
+[Footnote 37: This account of the stature of the Jewish tribe cannot
+fail to be much exaggerated, otherwise the text must have been corrupted
+at this place; as we cannot well conceive of a tribe in Arabia not
+exceeding four feet two inches in average height.--E.]
+
+Proceeding two days journey from the mountain of the Jews, we came to
+_Medinathalhabi_[38] or Medina. Four miles from this city we found a
+well, where the caravan rested and remained for a whole day, that we
+might wash ourselves and put on clean garments to appear decently in the
+city. Medina contains about three hundred houses of stone or brick, and
+is well peopled, being surrounded by bulwarks of earth. The soil is
+utterly barren, except at about two miles from the city there are about
+fifty palm trees which bear dates. At that place, beside a garden, there
+is a water-course which runs into a lower plain, where the pilgrims are
+accustomed to water their camels. I had here an opportunity to refute
+the vulgar opinion that the tomb or coffin of the _wicked_ Mahomet is at
+Mecca, and hangs in the air without support. For I tarried here three
+days and saw with my own eyes the place where Mahomet was buried, which
+is here at Medina, and not at Mecca. On presenting ourselves to enter
+the _Meschita_ or mosque, which name they give to all their churches or
+temples, we could not be allowed to enter unless along with a
+companion[39] little or great, who takes us by the hand and leads us to
+the place where they say that Mahomet is buried. His temple is vaulted,
+being about 100 paces long by 80 in breadth, and is entered by two
+gates. It consists of three parallel vaults, which are supported by
+four hundred pillars of white bricks, and within are suspended about
+three thousand lamps. In the inner part of this mosque or temple is a
+kind of tower five paces in circuit, vaulted on every side, and covered
+with a large cloth of silk, which is borne up by a grate of copper
+curiously wrought, and at the distance of two paces on every side from
+the tower, so that this tower or tomb is only seen as through a lattice
+by the devout pilgrims. This tomb is situated in an inner building
+toward the left hand from the great mosque, in a chapel to which you
+enter by a narrow gate. On every side of these gates or doors are seen
+many books in the manner of a library, twenty on one side, and
+twenty-five on the other, which contain the vile traditions of Mahomet
+and his companions. Within this chapel is seen a sepulchre in which they
+say that Mahomet lies buried with his principal companions, _Nabi_,
+_Bubacar_, _Othamar_, _Aumar_, and _Fatoma_. Mahomet, who was a native
+Arabian, was their chief captain. _Hali_ or _Ali_ was his son in-law,
+for he took to wife his daughter _Fatima_. _Bubacar_ or Abubeker, was as
+they say exalted to be chief councillor and governor under Mahomet, but
+was not honoured with the office of apostle or prophet. _Othamar and
+Aumar_, Othoman and Omar, were chief captains in the army of Mahomet.
+Every one of these have particular books containing the acts and
+traditions which relate to them, whence proceed great dissentions and
+discords of religion and manners among these vile people, some of whom
+adhere to one doctrine and some to another, so that they are divided
+into various sects among themselves, and kill each other like beasts,
+upon quarrels respecting their various opinions, all equally false,
+having each their several patrons, doctors, and saints, as they call
+them. This also is the chief cause of war between the Sophy of Persia
+and the grand Turk, both of whom are Mahometans, yet they live in
+continual and mortal hatred of each other for the maintenance of their
+respective sects, saints, and apostles, every one thinking their own the
+best.
+
+[Footnote 38: This name ought probably to have been written
+Medinat-al-habi, and is assuredly the holy city of Medina, in which
+Mahomet was buried.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 39: This seems to refer to some official residents of Medina,
+who must accompany the pilgrims in their visits to the holy places,
+probably for profit.--E.]
+
+The first evening that we came to Medina, our captain, or Emir of the
+pilgrimage, sent for the chief priest of the temple, and declared that
+the sole object of his coming thither was to visit the sepulchre and
+body of the _Nabi_ or prophet, as they usually call Mahomet, and that he
+understood the price generally paid for being admitted to a sight of
+these mysteries was four thousand gold _serafines_. He told him likewise
+that he had no parents, neither brothers nor sisters, kindred, wife, nor
+children; that he had not come hither to purchase any merchandise, such
+as spices, _bacca_[40], spikenard, or jewels, but merely for the
+salvation of his soul and from pure zeal for religion, and was therefore
+exceedingly desirous to see the body of the prophet. To this the priest
+answered in apparent anger, "Darest thou, with those eyes with which
+thou hast committed so many abominable sins, presume to look on him by
+whom God created heaven and earth?" The captain replied that he spoke
+true, yet prayed him that he might be permitted to see the prophet, when
+he would instantly have his eyes thrust out. Then answered the _Side_ or
+chief priest, "Prince! I will freely communicate all things to you. It
+is undeniable that our holy prophet died at this place; but he was
+immediately borne away by angels to heaven and there received among them
+as their equal." Our captain then asked where was now Jesus Christ the
+son of Mary, and the _Side_ said that he was at the feet of Mahomet: To
+which the captain replied that he was satisfied, and wished for no more
+information. After this, coming out of the temple, he said to us, "See I
+pray you for what stuff I would have paid three thousand _serafines_ of
+gold!"
+
+[Footnote 40: This word is obviously _berries_, and signifies
+coffee.--E.]
+
+That same evening at almost three o'clock of the night[41], ten or
+twelve elders of the city came into the encampment of our caravan, close
+by one of the gates of the city, where running about like madmen, they
+continually cried out aloud, "Mahomet the apostle of God shall rise
+again: O prophet of God thou shalt rise again. God have mercy upon us!"
+Alarmed by these cries, our captain and all of us seized our weapons in
+all haste, suspecting that the Arabians had come to rob our caravan. On
+demanding the reason of all this outcry, for they cried out as is done
+by the Christians when any miraculous event occurs, the elders answered,
+"Saw you not the light which shone from the sepulchre of the prophet?"
+Then said one of the elders, "Are you slaves?" meaning thereby bought
+men or Mamelukes; and when our captain answered that we were Mamelukes,
+the elder replied, "You, my lords, being new to the faith, and not yet
+fully confirmed in the religion of our holy prophet, cannot see these
+heavenly things." To which our captain answered, "O! you mad and
+insensate beasts! I thought to have given you three thousand pieces of
+gold; but now I shall give you nothing, you dogs and progeny of dogs?"
+Now, it is to be understood that the pretended miraculous light which
+was seen to proceed from the sepulchre, was merely occasioned by a flame
+made by the priests in the open part of the tower formerly mentioned,
+which they wished to impose on us as a miracle. After this our commander
+gave orders that none of the caravan should enter into the temple.
+Having thus seen with my own eyes, I can assuredly declare that there is
+neither iron nor steel, nor magnet stone by which the tomb of Mahomet is
+made to hang in the air, as some have falsely imagined, neither is there
+any mountain nearer to Medina than four miles. To this city of Medina
+corn and all other kinds of victuals are brought from Arabia Felix,
+Babylon or Cairo in Egypt, and from Ethiopia by way of the Red Sea,
+which is about four days journey from the city.
+
+[Footnote 41: Counting from sunset after the manner of the
+Italians.--E.]
+
+Having remained three days in our encampment on the outside of Medina to
+rest and refresh ourselves and our animals, and being satisfied, or
+disgusted rather, by the vile and abominable trumperies, deceits, and
+hypocritical trifles of the Mahometan delusions, we determined to resume
+our journey; and procuring a pilot or guide, who might direct our way by
+means of a chart and mariners box or compass, as is used at sea, we bent
+our journey towards the west, where we found a fair well or fountain
+whence flowed an abundant stream of water, and where we and our beasts
+were satisfied with drink. According to a tradition among the
+inhabitants, this region was formerly burnt up with drought and
+sterility, till the evangelist St Mark procured this fountain from God
+by miracle. We came into the _sea of sand_ before our arrival at the
+mountain of the Jews, formerly mentioned, and in it we journeyed three
+days and nights. This is a vast plain covered all over by white sand as
+fine almost as flour; and if by evil chance any one travels south while
+the wind blows to the north, they are overwhelmed by drifted sand. Even
+with the wind favourable, or blowing in the direction of their journey,
+the pilgrims are apt to scatter and disperse, as they cannot see each
+other at ten paces distance. For this reason those who travel across the
+sea of sand are enclosed in wooden cages on the backs of camels, and
+are guided by experienced pilots by chart and compass, as mariners on
+the ocean. In this journey many perish by thirst, and many by drinking
+with too much avidity when they fall in with wells. Owing to this
+_Momia_ is found in these sands, bring the flesh of such as have been
+_drowned in the sea of sand_, which is there dried up by the heat of the
+sun, and the excessive dryness of the sand preventing putrefaction. This
+_Momia_ or dried flesh is esteemed medicinal; but there is another and
+more precious kind of _Momia_, being the dried and embalmed bodies of
+kings and princes, which have been preserved in all times from
+corrupting.
+
+When the wind blows from the north-east, the sand rises, and is driven
+against a certain mountain, which is a branch from Mount Sinai; and in
+that place we found certain pillars artificially wrought, which are
+called _Januan_. On the left hand side of that mountain, and near the
+highest summit, there is a cave or den, to which you enter by an iron
+gate, and into which cave Mahomet is said to have retired for
+meditation. While passing that mountain, we heard certain horrible cries
+and loud noises, which put us in great fear. Departing therefore from
+the fountain of St Mark, we continued our journey for ten days, and
+twice in that time we had to fight against fifty thousand Arabians. At
+length, however, we arrived at Mecca, where we found every thing in
+confusion, in consequence of a civil war between two brothers who
+contended for the kingdom of Mecca.
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Observations of the Author during his residence at Mecca_.
+
+
+The famous city of Mecha or Mecca is populous and well built, in a round
+form, having six thousand houses as well built as those in Rome, some of
+which have cost three or four thousand pieces of gold. It has no walls,
+being protected or fortified as it were on all sides by mountains, over
+one of which, about two furlongs from the city, the road is cut by which
+we descended into the plain below; but there are three other entries
+through the mountains. It is under the dominion of a sultan, one of four
+brethren of the progeny of Mahomet, who is subject to the Soldan of
+Egypt, but his other three brothers are continually at war with him. On
+the 18th day of May, descending from the before-mentioned road obliquely
+into the plain, we came to Mecca by the north side. On the south side of
+the city there are two mountains very near each other, having a very
+narrow intervening valley, which is the way leading to Mecca on that
+side. To the east there in a similar valley between two other mountains,
+by which is the road to a mountain where they sacrifice to the
+patriarchs Abraham and Isaac, which hill or mount is ten or twelve miles
+from Mecca, and is about three stone throws in height, being all of a
+stone as hard as marble, yet is not marble. On the top of this mount is
+a temple or mosque, built after their manner, having three entrances. At
+the foot of the mountain are two great cisterns, which preserve water
+free from corruption: one of these is reserved for the camels belonging
+to the caravan of Cairo, and the other for that of Damascus. These
+cisterns are filled by rain water, which is brought from a great way
+off. We shall speak afterwards of the sacrifices performed at this
+mountain, and must now return to Mecca.
+
+On our arrival we found the caravan from Memphis, or Babylon of Egypt,
+which had arrived eight days before us, coming by a different way, and
+consisted of 64,000 camels, with a guard of an hundred Mamelukes. This
+city of Mecca is assuredly cursed of God, for it is situated in a most
+barren spot, destitute of all manner of fruit or corn, and so burnt up
+with drought, that you cannot have as much water for twelve pence as
+will satisfy one person for a whole day. Most part of their provisions
+are brought from Cairo in Egypt, by the Red Sea, or _Mare Erythreum_ of
+the ancients, and is landed at the port of _Gida_, Joddah or Jiddah,
+which is about forty miles from Mecca. The rest of their provisions are
+brought from the _Happy Arabia_, or _Arabia Felix_, so named from its
+fruitfulness in comparison with the other two divisions, called
+_Petrea_ and _Deserta_, or the Stoney and Desert Arabias. They also
+get much corn from Ethiopia. At Mecca we found a prodigious multitude of
+strangers who were _peregrines_ or pilgrims; some from Syria, others
+from Persia, and others from both the Indies, that is, from India on
+this side the river Ganges, and also from the farther India beyond that
+river. During my stay of twenty days at Mecca, I saw a most prodigious
+number and variety of people, infinitely beyond what I had ever before
+seen. This vast concourse of strangers of many nations and countries
+resort thither from various causes, but chiefly for trade, and to
+obtain pardon of their sins by discharging a vow of pilgrimage.
+
+From India, both on this side and beyond the Ganges, they bring for sale
+precious stones pearls and spices; and especially from that city of the
+greater India, which is named _Bangella_[42] they bring much
+_gossampyne_ cloth[43] and silk. They receive spices also from
+Ethiopia[44]; and, in short, this city of Mecca is a most famous and
+plentiful mart of many rich and valuable commodities. But the main
+object for which pilgrims resort thither from so many countries and
+nations, is, to purchase the pardon of their sins. In the middle of the
+city there is a temple after the manner of the coliseum or amphitheatre
+of Rome, yet not built of marble or hewn stone, being only of burnt
+bricks. Like an amphitheatre, it has ninety or an hundred gates, and is
+vaulted over. It is entered on every side by a descent of twelve steps,
+and in its porch is the mart for jewels and precious stones, all the
+walls of the entry being gilt over in a most splendid manner. In the
+lower part of the temple under the vaults, there is always to be seen a
+prodigious multitude of men; as there are generally five or six thousand
+in that place, who deal solely in sweet ointments and perfumes, among
+which especially is a certain most odoriferous powder, with which dead
+bodies are embalmed. From this place all manner of delightful perfumes
+are carried to all the Mahometan countries, for beyond any thing that
+can be found in the shops of our apothecaries.
+
+[Footnote 42: This must necessarily be the kingdom or province of
+Bengal.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 43: Fine cottons or muslins are here evidently meant.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 44: This is inexplicable, as Ethiopia possesses no spices,
+unless we may suppose the author to mean here the sea of Ethiopia or Red
+Sea, as the track by which spices were brought to Mecca.--E.]
+
+On the 23d day of May yearly, the pardons begin to be distributed in the
+temple, after the following manner: The temple is entirely open in the
+middle, and in its centre stands a turret about six paces in
+circumference, and not exceeding the height of a man, which is hung all
+round with silken tapestry. This turret or cell is entered by a gate of
+silver, on each side of which are vessels full of precious balsam, which
+the inhabitants told us was part of the treasure belonging to the sultan
+of Mecca. _At every vault of the turret is fastened a round circle of
+iron, like the ring of a door_[45]. On the day of Pentecost, all men
+are permitted to visit this holy place. On the 22d of May, a great
+multitude of people began early in the morning, before day, to walk
+seven times round the turret, every corner of which they devoutly kissed
+and frequently handled. About ten or twelve paces from this principal
+turret is another, which is built like a Christian chapel, having three
+or four entries; and in the middle is a well seventy cubits deep, the
+water of which is impregnated with saltpetre. At this well eight men are
+stationed to draw water for all the multitude. After the pilgrims have
+seven times walked round the first turret, they come to this one, and
+touching the mouth or brim of the well, they say these words: "Be it to
+the honour of God, and may God pardon my sins." Then those who draw
+water pour three buckets on the heads of every one that stands around
+the well, washing or wetting them all over, even should their garments
+be of silk; after which the deluded fools fondly imagine that their sins
+are forgiven them. It is pretended that the turret first spoken of was
+the first house that was builded by Abraham; wherefore, while yet all
+over wet by the drenching at the well, they go to the mountain already
+mentioned, where the sacrifice is made to Abraham; and after remaining
+there for two days, they make their sacrifice to the patriarch at the
+foot of the mountain.
+
+[Footnote 45: This description is altogether unintelligible.--E.]
+
+When they intend to sacrifice, the pilgrims who are able to afford it,
+kill some three, some four, or more sheep, even to ten, so that in one
+sacrifice there are sometimes slain above 3000 sheep; and as they are
+all slaughtered at sun-rise, the shambles then flow with blood. Shortly
+afterwards all the carcasses are distributed for God's sake among the
+poor, of whom I saw there at least to the number of 20,000. These poor
+people dig many long ditches in the fields round Mecca, where they make
+fires of camels' dung, at which they roast or seethe the sacrificial
+flesh which has been distributed to them by the richer pilgrims. In my
+opinion, these poor people flock to Mecca more to satisfy their hunger,
+than from motives of devotion. Great quantities of cucumbers are brought
+here for sale from Arabia Felix, which are bought by those who have
+money; and as the parings are thrown out from their tents, the
+half-famished multitude gather these parings from among the mire or sand
+to satisfy their hunger, and are so greedy of that vile food, that they
+fight who shall gather most.
+
+On the day after the sacrifice to Abraham, the _cadi_, who is to these
+people as the preachers of the word of God among us, ascends to the top
+of a high mountain, whence he preaches to the people who stand below. He
+harangued for the space of on hour, principally inculcating that they
+should bewail their sins with tears and sighs and lamentations, beating
+their breasts. At one time he exclaimed with a loud voice, "O! Abraham
+the beloved of God, O! Isaac the chosen of God and his friend, pray to
+God for the people of the prophet." As these words were spoken, we
+suddenly heard loud cries and lamentations, and a rumour was spread that
+an army of 20,000 Arabians was approaching, on which we all fled into
+the city, even those who were appointed to guard the pilgrims being the
+first to make their escape. Mid-way between the mountain of Abraham and
+the city of Mecca, there is a mean wall, about four cubits broad, where
+the passengers had strewed the whole way with stones, owing to the
+following traditionary story: When Abraham was commanded to sacrifice
+his son Isaac, he directed his son to follow him to the place where he
+was to execute the divine command; and as Isaac was following after his
+father, a devil met him in the way near this wall, in the semblance of a
+fair and friendly person, and asked him whither he went. Isaac answered
+that he was going to his father, who waited for him. To this the arch
+enemy replied, that he had better not go, as his father meant to
+sacrifice him. But Isaac despising the warnings of the devil, continued
+his way, that his father might execute the commandments of God
+respecting him. On this the devil departed from him, but met him again
+as he went forward, under the semblance of another friendly person, and
+advised him as before not to go to his father. On this Isaac threw a
+stone at the devil, and wounded him in the forehead; in remembrance of
+which traditionary story it is that the people, on passing this way, are
+accustomed to throw stones at the wall before going to the city. As we
+went this way, the air was in a manner darkened with prodigious
+multitudes of stock doves, all, as they pretend, derived from the dove
+that spoke in the ear of Mahomet, in likeness of the Holy Ghost. These
+doves are seen in vast numbers in all parts about Mecca, as in the
+houses, villages, inns, and granaries of corn and rice, and are so tame
+that they can hardly be driven away. Indeed it is reckoned a capital
+crime to kill or even take them, and there are certain funds assigned
+for feeding them at the temple.
+
+Beyond the temple there are certain parks or inclosures, in which there
+are two _unicorns_ to be seen, called by the Greeks _Monocerotae_, which
+are shewn to the people as miracles of nature, and not without good
+reason, on account of their scarcity and strange appearance. One of
+these, though much higher than the other, is not unlike a colt of thirty
+months old, and has a horn in its forehead, growing straight forwards
+and the length of three cubits. The other is much younger, resembling a
+colt of one year old, and its horn is only four hand breadths long.
+These singular animals are of a weasel chesnut colour, having a head
+like that of a hart, but the neck is not near so long, with a thin mane,
+hanging all to one side. The legs are thin and slender, like those of a
+fawn or hind, and the hoofs are cleft much like those of a goat, the
+outer parts of the hind feet being very full of hair. These animals
+seemed wild and fierce yet exceedingly comely. They were sent out of
+Ethiopia by a king of that country, as a rare and precious gift to the
+sultan of Mecca[46].
+
+[Footnote 46: The unicorn is an unknown, or rather a fabulous animal,
+and the most charitable interpretation that can be made of the
+description in the text is, that Verthema was mistaken, or that one of
+the horns of some species of antelope had either been removed, or was
+wanting by a lusus naturae. The only real _Monoceros_, or one horned
+animal, known to naturalists, is the rhinoceros monoceros, or one-horned
+rhinoceros, which bears its horn on the nose, a little way above the
+muzzle, not on the forehead.--E.]
+
+It may seem proper to mention here certain things which happened to me
+at Mecca, in which may be seen the sharpness of wit in case of urgent
+necessity, which according to the proverb, has no law; for I was driven
+to the extent of my wits how I might contrive to escape privately from
+Mecca. One day, while in the market purchasing some things by the
+direction of our captain, a certain Mameluke knew me to be a Christian,
+and said to me in his own language _inte mename_, which is to say,
+"Whence are you?" To this I answered that I was a Mahometan, but he
+insisted that I spoke falsely, on which I swore by the head of Mahomet
+that I really was. Then he desired me to go home along with him, which I
+willingly did; and when there he began to speak to me in the Italian
+language, affirming that he was quite certain I was not a Mahometan. He
+told me that he had been some time in Genoa and Venice, and mentioned
+many circumstances which convinced me that he spoke truth. On this I
+freely confessed myself A Roman, but declared that I had become a
+Mahometan at Babylon in Egypt, and had been there enrolled among the
+Mamelukes. He seemed much pleased as this, and treated me honourably.
+Being very desirous of proceeding farther in my travels, I asked him if
+this city of Mecca was as famous as was reported in the world, and where
+the vast abundance of pearls, precious stones, spices, and other rich
+merchandise was to be seen, which was generally believed to be in that
+city, wishing to know the reason why these things were not now brought
+there as in former times; but to avoid all suspicion, I durst not make
+any mention of the dominion acquired by the king of Portugal over the
+Indian ocean and the gulfs of Persia and Mecca. Then did he shew the
+cause why this mart of Mecca was not so much frequented as it used to
+be, assigning the whole blame to the King of Portugal. Thereupon I
+purposely detracted from the fame of that king, lest the Mahometan might
+suspect me of rejoicing that the Christians resorted to India for trade.
+Finding me a professed enemy to the Christians, he conceived a great
+esteem for me, and gave me a great deal of information. Then said I to
+him in the language of Mahomet _Menaba menalhabi_, or "I pray you to aid
+me." He asked me in what circumstance I wished his assistance; upon
+which I told him that I wished secretly to depart from Mecca, assuring
+him under the most sacred oaths that I meant to visit those kings who
+were the greatest enemies to the Christians, and that I possessed the
+knowledge of certain estimable secrets, which if known to those kings
+would certainly occasion them to send for me from Mecca. He requested to
+know what these secrets were, on which I informed him that I was
+thoroughly versant in the construction of all manner of guns and
+artillery. He then praised Mahomet for having directed me to these
+parts, as I might do infinite service to the true believers; and he
+agreed to allow me to remain secretly in his house along with his wife.
+
+Having thus cemented a friendship with the Mahometan, he requested of me
+to obtain permission from the captain of our caravan that he might lead
+fifteen camels from Mecca loaded with spices under his name, by which
+means he might evade the duties, as thirty gold seraphines are usually
+paid to the sultan of Mecca for the custom of such a number of camels. I
+gave him great hopes that his request might be complied with, even if he
+asked for an hundred camels, as I alleged he was entitled to the
+privilege as being a Mameluke. Then finding him in excellent good
+humour, I again urged my desire of being concealed in his house; and
+having entirely gained his confidence, he gave me many instructions for
+the prosecution of my intended journey, and counselled me to repair to
+the court of the king of _Decham_, or Deccan, a realm in the greater
+India; of which I shall speak hereafter. Wherefore, on the day before
+the caravan of Damascus was to depart from Mecca, he concealed me in the
+most secret part of his house; and next morning early the trumpeter of
+our caravan of Syria gave warning to all the Mamelukes to prepare
+themselves and their horses for the immediate prosecution of the
+journey, on pain of death to all who should neglect the order. Upon
+hearing this proclamation and penalty I was greatly troubled in mind;
+yet committing myself by earnest prayer to the merciful protection of
+God, I entreated the Mamelukes wife not to betray me. On the Tuesday
+following, our caravan departed from Mecca and the Mameluke went along
+with it, but I remained concealed in his house. Before his departure,
+the friendly Mameluke gave orders to his wife that she should procure me
+the means of going along with the pilgrims who were to depart from
+_Zide_ or Juddah the port of Mecca for India. This port of Juddah is 40
+miles from Mecca. I cannot well express the kindness of the Mamelukes
+wife to me during the time I lay hid in her house; and what contributed
+mainly to my good entertainment was that a beautiful young maid who
+dwelt in the house, being niece to the Mameluke, was in love with me;
+but at that time I was so environed with troubles and fear of danger,
+that the passion of love was almost extinct in my bosom, yet I kept
+myself in her favour by kind words and fair promises.
+
+On the Friday, three days after the departure of the caravan of Syria, I
+departed about noon from Mecca along with the caravan of India; and
+about midnight we came to an Arabian village, where we rested all the
+rest of that night and the next day till noon. From thence continuing
+our journey we arrived at Juddah on the second night of our journey. The
+city of Juddah has no walls, but the houses are well built, resembling
+those in the Italian cities. At this place there is great abundance of
+all kinds of merchandise, being in a manner the resort of all nations,
+except that it is held unlawful for Jews or Christians to come there. As
+soon as I entered Juddah I went to the mosque, where I saw a prodigious
+number of poor people, not less than 25,000, who were attending upon
+the different pilots, that they might go back to their countries. Here I
+suffered much trouble and affliction, being constrained to hide myself
+among these poor wretches and to feign myself sick, that no one might be
+too inquisitive about who I was, whence I came, or whether I was going.
+The city of Juddah is under the dominion of the Soldan of Babylon or
+Cairo, the Sultan of Mecca being his brother and his subject. The
+inhabitants are all Mahometans; the soil around the town is very
+unfruitful, as it wants water; yet this town, which stands on the shore
+of the Red Sea, enjoys abundance of all necessaries which are brought
+from Egypt, Arabia Felix, and various other places. The heat is so
+excessive that the people are in a manner dried up, and there is
+generally great sickness among the inhabitants. This city contains about
+500 houses. After sojourning here for fifteen days, I at length agreed
+for a certain sum with a pilot or ship-master, who engaged to convey me
+to Persia. At this time there lay at anchor in the haven of Mecca near
+an hundred brigantines and foists, with many barks and boats of various
+kinds, some with oars and some with sails.
+
+Three days after I had agreed for my passage, we hoisted sail and began
+our voyage down the Red Sea, called by the ancients _Mare
+erythraeum_[47]. It is well known to learned men that this sea is not
+red, as its name implies and as some have imagined, for it has the same
+colour with other seas. We continued our voyage till the going down of
+the sun, for this sea cannot be navigated during the night, wherefore
+navigators only sail in the day and always come to anchor every night.
+This is owing _as they say_, to the many dangerous sands, rocks and
+shelves, which require the ships way to be guided with great care and
+diligent outlook from the _top castle_, that these dangerous places may
+be seen and avoided: But after coming to the island of _Chameran_ or
+Kamaran, the navigation may be continued with greater safety and
+freedom.
+
+[Footnote 47: The _Mare erythraeum_ of the ancients was of much more
+extended dimensions, comprising all the sea of India from Arabia on the
+west to Guzerat and the Concan on the east, with the coasts of Persia
+and Scindetic India on the north; of which sea the Red Sea and the
+Persian gulfs were considered branches or deep bays.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Adventures of the Author in various parts of Arabia Felix, or Yemen_.
+
+
+After six days sailing from Juddah we came to a city named _Gezan_,
+which is well built and has a commodious port, in which we found about
+45 foists and brigantines belonging to different countries. This city is
+close to the sea, and stands in a fertile district resembling Italy,
+having plenty of pomegranates, quinces, peaches, Assyrian apples,
+_pepons_? melons, oranges, gourds, and various other fruits, also many
+of the finest roses and other flowers that can be conceived, so that it
+seemed an earthly paradise. It has also abundance of flesh, with wheat
+and barley, and a grain like white millet or _hirse_, which they call
+_dora_, of which they make a very excellent bread. The prince of this
+town and all his subjects are Mahometans, most of whom go nearly naked.
+
+After sailing five days from _Gezan_, having always the coast on our
+left hand, we came in sight of some habitations where 14 of us went on
+shore in hopes of procuring some provisions from the inhabitants; but
+instead of giving us victuals they threw stones at us from slings, so
+that we were constrained to fight them in our own defence. There were
+about 100 of these inhospitable natives, who had no other weapons except
+slings, and yet fought us for an hour; but 24 of them being slain the
+rest fled, and we brought away from their houses some poultry and
+calves, which we found very good. Soon afterwards the natives returned,
+being reinforced by others to the number of five or six hundred; but we
+departed with our prey and reimbarked.
+
+Continuing our voyage, we arrived on the same day at an island named
+_Kamaran_, which is ten miles in circuit. This island has a town of two
+hundred houses, inhabited by Mahometans, and has abundance of flesh and
+fresh water, and the fairest salt I ever saw. The port of Kamaran is
+eight miles from the Arabian coast, and is subject to the sultan of
+_Amanian_ or _Yaman_, a kingdom of Arabia Felix. Having remained here
+two days, we again made sail for the mouth of the Red Sea, where we
+arrived in other two days. From Kamaran to the mouth of the Red Sea the
+navigation is safe both night and day; But from Juddah to Kamsran the
+Red Sea can only be navigated by day, as already stated, on account of
+shoals and rocks. On coming to the mouth of the Red Sea, we seemed quite
+inclosed, as the strait is very narrow, being only three miles across.
+On the right hand, or Ethiopian coast, the shore of the continent is
+about ten paces in height, and seems a rude uncultivated soil; and on
+the left hand, or coast of Arabia, there rises a very high rocky hill.
+In the middle of the strait is a small uninhabited island called
+_Bebmendo_[48], and those who sail from the Red Sea towards Zeyla, leave
+this island on the left hand. Such, on the contrary, as go for Aden,
+must keep the north eastern passage, leaving this island on the right.
+
+[Footnote 48: This word is an obvious corruption of Bab-el-Mondub, the
+Arabic name of the straits, formerly explained as signifying the gate or
+passage of lamentation. The island in question is named _Prin_.--E.]
+
+We sailed for _Bab-al-Mondub_ to _Aden_, in two days and a half, always
+having the land of Arabia in sight on our left. I do not remember to
+have seen any city better fortified than Aden. It stands on a tolerably
+level plain, having walls on two sides: all the rest being inclosed by
+mountains, on which there are five fortresses. This city contains 6000
+houses, and only a stone's throw from the city there is a mountain
+having a castle on its summit, the shipping being anchored at the foot
+of the mountain. Aden is an excellent city, and the chief place in all
+Arabia Felix, of which it is the principal mart, to which merchants
+resort from India, Ethiopia, Persia, and the Red Sea; but owing to the
+intolerable heat during the day, the whole business of buying and
+selling takes place at night, beginning two hours after sunset. As soon
+as our brigantines came to anchor in the haven, the customers and
+searchers came off, demanding what we were, whence we came, what
+commodities we had on board, and how many men were in each vessel? After
+being satisfied on these heads they took away our mast, sails, and other
+tackle, that we might not depart without paying the customs.
+
+The day after our arrival at Aden, the Mahometans took me prisoner, and
+put shackles on my legs in consequence of an _idolater_ calling after me
+that I was a Christian dog[49]. Upon this the Mahometans laid hold of
+me, and carried me before the lieutenant of the sultan, who assembled
+his council, to consult with them if I should be put to death as a
+Christian spy. The sultan happened to be absent from the city, and as
+the lieutenant had not hitherto adjudged any one to death, he did not
+think fit to give sentence against me till my case were reported to the
+sultan. By this means I escaped the present danger, and remained in
+prison 55 days, with an iron of eighteen pounds weight fastened to my
+legs. On the second day of my confinement, many Mahometans went in great
+rage to the lieutenant to demand that I should be put to death as a
+Portuguese spy. Only a few days before, these men had difficultly
+escaped from the hands of the Portuguese by swimming, with the loss of
+their foists and barks, and therefore greatly desired to be revenged of
+the Christians, outrageously affirming that I was a Portuguese and a
+spy. But God assisted me, for the master of the prison made fast its
+gates, that these outrageous men might not offer me violence. At the end
+of fifty-five days, the sultan sent for me into his presence; so I was
+placed on the back of a camel with my shackles, and at the end of eight
+days journey I was brought to the city of _Rhada_, where the sultan then
+resided, and where he had assembled an army of 30,000 men to make war
+upon the sultan of _Sanaa_, a fair and populous city about three days
+journey from _Rhada_, situated partly on the slope of a hill and partly
+in a plain. When I was brought before the sultan, he asked me what I
+was: on which I answered that I was a Roman, and had professed myself a
+Mahometan and Mameluke at Babylon in Egypt, or Cairo. That from motives
+of religion, and in discharge of a vow, I had made the pilgrimage to
+_Medinathalhabi_, to see the body of the _Nabi_ or holy prophet, which
+was said to be buried there; and that having heard in all the countries
+and cities through which I passed, of the greatness, wisdom, and virtue
+of the sultan of Rhada, I had continued my travels to his dominions from
+an anxious desire to see his face, and I now gave thanks to God and his
+prophet that I had attained my wish, trusting that his wisdom and
+justice would see that I was no Christian spy, but a true Mahometan, and
+his devoted slave. The sultan then commanded me to say _Leila illala
+Mahumet resullah_, which words I could never well pronounce, either that
+it so pleased God, or because I durst not, from some fear or scruple of
+conscience. Wherefore, seeing me silent, the sultan committed me again
+to prison, commanding that I should be carefully watched by sixteen men
+of the city, every day four in their turns. After this, for the space of
+three months, I never enjoyed the sight of the heavens, being every day
+allowed a loaf of millet bread, so very small that seven of them would
+hardly have satisfied my hunger for one day, yet I would have thought
+myself happy if I could have had my fill of water.
+
+[Footnote 49: According to the monk Picade, Christians are found in all
+regions except Arabia and Egypt, where they are most hated.--_Eden_.]
+
+Three days after I was committed to prison, the sultan marched with his
+army to besiege the city of _Sanaa_, having, as I said before, 30,000
+footmen, besides 3000 horsemen, born of Christian parents, who were
+black like the Ethiopians, and had been brought while young from the
+kingdom of _Prester John_, called in Latin _Presbyter Johannes_, or
+rather _Preciosus Johannes_. These Christian Ethiopians are also called
+Abyssinians, and are brought up in the discipline of war like the
+Mamelukes and Janisaries of the Turks, and are held in high estimation
+by this sultan for the guard of his own person. They have high pay, and
+are in number four-score thousand[50]. Their only dress is a _sindon_ or
+cloak, out of which they put forth one arm. In war they use round
+targets of buffaloe hide, strengthened with some light bars of iron,
+having a wooden handle, and short broad-swords. At other times they use
+vestures of linen of divers colours, also of _gossampine_ or _xylon_,
+otherwise named _bomasine_[51]. In war every man carries a sling, whence
+he casts stones, after having whirled them frequently round his head.
+When they come to forty or fifty years of age, they wreath their hair
+into the form of horns like those of goats. When the army proceeds to
+the wars, it is followed by 5000 camels, all laden with ropes of
+bombasine[52].
+
+[Footnote 50: This is a ridiculous exaggeration, or blunder in
+transcription, and may more readily be limited to four thousand.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 51: These terms unquestionably refer to cotton cloth. Perhaps
+we ought to read gossamopine _of_ Xylon, meaning cotton cloth from
+Ceylon.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 52: The use of this enormous quantity of cotton ropes is
+unintelligible. Perhaps the author only meant to express that the packs
+or bales on the camels were secured by such ropes.--E.]
+
+Hard by the prison to which I was committed, there was a long court or
+entry in the manner of a cloister, where sometimes I and other prisoners
+were permitted to walk, and which was overlooked by a part of the
+sultan's palace. It happened that one of the sultan's wives remained in
+the palace, having twelve young maidens to wait upon her, who were all
+very comely, though inclining to black. By their favour I was much
+aided, after the following manner: There were two other men confined
+alone with me in the same prison, and it was agreed among us that one of
+us should counterfeit madness, by which we might derive some advantage.
+Accordingly it fell to my lot to assume the appearance of madness, which
+made greatly for my purpose, as they consider mad men to be holy, and
+they therefore allowed me to go much more at large than before, until
+such time as the hermits might determine whether I were _holy mad_, or
+raging mad, as shall be shewn hereafter. But the first three days of my
+assumed madness wearied me so much, that I was never so tired with
+labour, or grieved with pain; for the boys and vile people used to run
+after me, sometimes to the number of forty or fifty, calling me a mad
+man, and throwing stones at me, which usage I sometimes repaid in their
+own coin. To give the better colour to my madness, I always carried some
+stones in the lap of my shirt, as I had no other clothing whatever. The
+queen hearing of my madness, used oftentimes to look from her windows to
+see me, more instigated by a secret love for my person than the pleasure
+she derived from my mad pranks, as afterwards appeared. One time, when
+some of the natives played the knave with me in view of the queen, whose
+secret favour towards me I began to perceive, I threw off my shirt, and
+went to a place near the windows, where the queen might see me all
+naked, which I perceived gave her great pleasure, as she always
+contrived some device to prevent me going out of her sight, and would
+sometimes spend almost the whole day in looking at me. In the mean time
+she often sent me secretly abundance of good meat by her maids; and when
+she saw the boys or others doing me harm or vexing me, she called to me
+to kill them, reviling them also as dogs and beasts.
+
+There was a great fat sheep that was fed in the court of the palace, of
+that kind whereof the tail only will sometimes weigh eleven or twelve
+pounds. Under colour of my madness, I one day laid hold of this sheep,
+repeating _Leila illala Mahumet resullah_, the words which the Sultan
+desired me to repeat in his presence, by way of proof whether I was a
+Mahometan or professed Mameluke. As the sheep gave no answer, I asked
+him whether he were Mahometan, Jew, or Christian. And willing to make
+him a Mahometan, I repeated the formula as before, which signifies,
+"There is but one God, and Mahomet is his prophet," being the words the
+Mahometans rehearse as their profession of faith. As the sheep answered
+never a word to all I could say, I at length broke his leg with staff.
+The queen took much delight in these my mad tricks, and commanded the
+carcass of this sheep to be given me, and I never eat meat with more
+relish or better appetite. Three days afterwards I killed an ass that
+used to bring water to the palace, because he would not say these words
+and be a Mahometan. One day I handled a Jew so very roughly, that I had
+near killed him. On another occasion I threw many stones at a person who
+called me a Christian clog, but he threw them back at me with such
+vengeance, that he hurt me sore, on which I returned to my prison, of
+which I barricadoed the door with stones, and lay there for two days, in
+great pain, without meat or drink, so that the queen and others thought
+me dead, but the door was opened by command of the queen. Those Arabian
+dogs used to deride me, giving me stones in place of bread, and pieces
+of white marble, pretending that they were lumps of sugar, and others
+gave me bunches of grapes all full of sand. That they might not think I
+counterfeited madness, I used to eat the grapes sand and all.
+
+When it was rumoured abroad that I had lived two days and nights without
+meat or drink, some began to believe that I was a holy madman, while
+others supposed me to be stark mad; wherefore they consulted to send for
+certain men who dwell in the mountain, who lead a contemplative life,
+and are esteemed holy as we do hermits. When they came to give their
+judgment concerning me, and were debating among themselves for upwards
+of an hour on my case, I pissed in my hands, and threw the water in
+their faces, on which they agreed I was no saint, but a mere madman. The
+queen saw all this from her window, and laughed heartily at it among her
+maids, saying, "By the head of Mahomet this is a good man." Next morning
+I happened to find the man asleep who had so sore hurt me with stones,
+and taking him by the hair of his head with both hands, I so punched him
+in the stomach, and on the face with my knees, that I left him all
+bloody and half dead. The queen happening to see me, she called out,
+"Kill the beast, Kill the dog." Upon which he ran away and came no more
+nigh me.
+
+When the president of the city heard that the queen took so much delight
+in my mad frolics, he gave orders that I might go at liberty about the
+palace, only wearing my shackles, and that I should be immured every
+night in another prison in the lower part of the palace. After I had
+remained in this manner for twenty days, the queen took it into her head
+to carry me along with her a hunting; but on my return, I feigned myself
+sick from fatigue, and continued in my cell for eight days, the queen
+sending every day to inquire how I was. After this I took an opportunity
+to tell the queen that I had vowed to God and Mahomet to visit a certain
+holy person at Aden, and begged her permission to perform my vow. She
+consented to this, and immediately gave orders that a camel and 25 gold
+seraphins should be given me. Accordingly I immediately set off on my
+journey, and came to Aden at the end of eight days, when I visited the
+man who was reputed as a saint, merely because he had always lived in
+great poverty, and without the company of women. There are many such in
+those parts, but doubtless they lose their labour, not being in the
+faith of Christ. Having thus performed my vow, I pretended to have
+recovered my health by miracle performed by this holy person, of which I
+sent notice to the queen, desiring permission to visit certain other
+holy persons in that country who had great reputation. I contrived these
+excuses because the fleet for India was not to depart from Aden for the
+space of a month. I took the opportunity to agree secretly with the
+captain of a ship to carry me to India, making him many fair promises of
+reward. He told me that he did not mean to go to India till after he had
+gone first to Persia, and to this arrangement I agreed.
+
+To fill up the time, I mounted my camel and went a journey of 25 miles,
+to a certain populous city named _Lagi_, seated in a great plain, in
+which are plenty of olives and corn, with many cattle, but no vines, and
+very little wood. The inhabitants are a gross and barbarous people of
+the vagabond Arabs, and very poor. Going a days journey from thence, I
+came to another city named _Aiaz_, which is built on two hills, having a
+large plain between them, in which is a noted fountain, where various
+nations resort as to a famous mart. The inhabitants are Mahometans, yet
+greatly differ in opinion respecting their religion. All those who
+inhabit the northern mount, maintain the faith of Mahomet and his
+successors, of whom I have formerly spoken; but those of the south
+mountain affirm that faith ought only to be given to Mahomet and Ali,
+declaring the others to have been false prophets. The country about
+_Aiaz_ produces goodly fruits of various kinds, among which are vines,
+together with silk and cotton; and the city has great trade in spices
+and other commodities. On the top of both of the hills there are strong
+fortresses, and two days journey from thence is the city of _Dante_, on
+the top of a very high mountain, well fortified both by art and nature.
+
+Departing from _Dante_, I came in two days journey to the city of
+_Almacharam_, on the top of a very high mountain of very difficult
+ascent, by a way so narrow that only two men are able to pass each
+other. On the top of this mountain is a plain of wonderful size, and
+very fertile, which produces abundance of every thing necessary to the
+use of man. It has also plenty of water, insomuch that at one fountain
+only there is sufficient water to supply a hundred thousand men. The
+Sultan is said to have been born in this city, and to keep his treasure
+here, which is so large as to be a sufficient load for an hundred camels
+all in gold. Here also always resides one of his wives. The air of this
+place is remarkably temperate and healthy, and the inhabitants are
+inclining to white. Two days journey from _Almacharam_, is the city of
+_Reame_, containing 2000 houses. The inhabitants are black, and are much
+addicted to commerce. The country around is fertile in all things,
+except wood. On one side of this city is a mountain, on which is a
+strong fortress. At this place I saw a kind of sheep without horns,
+whose tails weigh forty or fifty pounds. The grapes of this district
+have no stones or grains, and are remarkably sweet and delicate, as are
+all the other fruits, which are in great abundance and variety. This
+place is very temperate and healthful, as may be conceived by the long
+life of its inhabitants, for I have conversed with many of them that had
+passed the age of an hundred and twenty-five years, and were still
+vigorous and fresh-coloured. They go almost naked, wearing only shirts,
+or other thin and loose raiment like mantles, having one arm bare.
+Almost all the Arabs wreath their hair in the shape of horns, which they
+think gives them a comely appearance.
+
+Departing from thence, I came in three days journey to the city of
+_Sanaa_ or _Zenan,_ upon the top of a very high mountain, and very
+strong both by art and nature. The Sultan had besieged this place for
+three months with a great army, but was unable to prevail against it by
+force, yet it was afterwards yielded on composition. The walls of this
+city are eighteen cubits high and twenty in thickness, insomuch that
+eight camels may march abreast upon them. The region in which it stands
+is very fertile, and resembles Italy, having abundance of water. The
+city contains four thousand houses, all well built, and in no respect
+inferior to those in Italy, but the city is so large in circuit, that
+fields, gardens, and meadows are contained within the walls. This city
+was governed by a Sultan, who had twelve sons, one of whom named
+Mahomet, was four cubits high, and very strong, of a complexion
+resembling ashes, and from some natural madness or grossly tyrannical
+disposition he delighted in human flesh, so that he used to kill men
+secretly to feed upon them.
+
+Three days journey from thence I came to a city upon a mountain, named
+_Taessa,_ well built, and abounding in all things necessary to man, and
+particularly celebrated for roses, of which the inhabitants make rose
+water. This is an ancient city, having many good houses, and still
+contains several monuments of antiquity. Its temple or chief mosque is
+built much like the church of Sancta Maria Rotunda at Rome. The
+inhabitants are of an ash-colour, inclining to black, and dress much
+like those already mentioned. Many merchants resort thither for trade.
+Three days journey from thence I came to another city named _Zioith_ or
+_Zabid_, half a days journey from the Red Sea. This is a well built
+city, abounding in many good things, particularly in excellent white
+sugar and various kinds of delicious fruits. It is situated in a very
+large plain between two mountains, and has no walls, but is one of the
+principal marts for all sorts of spices, and various other merchandise.
+One days journey from thence I came to _Damar_, which is situated in a
+fruitful soil, and carries on considerable trade. All these cities are
+subject to a Sultan of Arabia-Felix, who is called _Sechamir_, or the
+holy prince; _Secha_ signifying holy, and _Amir_ prince, in the Arabian
+language. He is so named, because he abhors to shed men's blood. While I
+was there in prison, he nourished sixteen thousand poor, including
+captives in prison, who had been condemned to death, and he had as many
+black slaves in his palace.
+
+Departing from Damar I returned in three days journey to Aden, passing
+in the mid way by an exceedingly large and high mountain, on which there
+are many wild beasts, and in particular the whole mountain is as it were
+covered with monkeys. There are also many lions, so that it is by no
+means safe to travel that way unless in large companies of at least a
+hundred men. I passed this way along with a numerous company, yet we
+were in much danger from the lions and other wild beasts which followed
+us, insomuch that we were forced to fight them with darts, slings, and
+arrows, using also the aid of dogs, and after all we escaped with some
+difficulty. On arriving at Aden I feigned myself sick, lurking in the
+mosque all day, and going only out under night to speak with the pilot
+of the ship formerly mentioned, from whom I obtained a bark in which I
+secretly left Aden.
+
+We at length began our voyage for Persia, to which we were to go in the
+first place, our bark being laden with _rubricke_, a certain red earth
+used for dying cloth, with which fifteen or twenty vessels are yearly
+freighted from Arabia Felix. After having sailed six days on our voyage,
+a sudden tempest of contrary wind drove us back again and forced us to
+the coast of Ethiopia, where we took shelter in the port of _Zeyla_. We
+remained here five days to see the city, and to wait till the tempest
+was over and the sea become quiet. The city of Zeyla is a famous mart
+for many commodities, and has marvellous abundance of gold and ivory,
+and a prodigious number of black slaves, which are procured by the
+Mahometan or Moorish inhabitants, by means of war, from Ethiopia in the
+country of Prester John, the Christian king of the Jacobins or
+Abyssinians. These slaves are carried hence into Persia, Arabia Felix,
+Cairo, and Mecca. In this city justice and good laws are observed. The
+soil produces wheat and other convenient things, as oil which is not
+procured from olives but from something else that I do not know. It has
+likewise plenty of honey and wax, and abundance of animals for food,
+among which are sheep having tails of sixteen pounds weight, very fat
+and good; their head and neck black, and all the rest of their bodies
+white. There are also sheep all over white, whose tails are a cubit
+long, and hang down like a large cluster of grapes, with great flaps of
+skin hanging from their throats. The bulls and cows likewise have
+dewlaps hanging down almost to the ground. There are also certain kine
+having horns like to those of harts, which are very wild, and when taken
+are given to the sultan of the city as a gift worthy of a prince. I also
+saw other kine of a bright red colour, having only one horn in the midst
+of the forehead, about a span long, bending backwards, like the horn of
+the unicorn. The walls of this city are greatly decayed, and the haven
+bad and unsafe, yet it is resorted to by vast numbers of merchants. The
+sultan of Zeyla is a Mahometan, and has a numerous army both of horse
+and foot. The people, who are much addicted to war, are of a dark
+ash-colour inclining to black, and wear loose vestments like those
+spoken of in Arabia. After the weather had become calm, we again put to
+sea, and soon afterwards arrived at an island on the coast of Ethiopia
+named _Barbora_, which is under the rule of a Mahometan prince. It is a
+small island, but fertile and well peopled, its principal riches
+consisting in herds of cattle, so that flesh is to be had in great
+plenty. We remained here only one day, and sailing thence went to
+Persia.
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Observations of the Author relative to some parts of Persia._
+
+
+When we had sailed twelve days we came to a city named
+_Divobanderrumi_[53], which name signifies the holy port of the _Rumes_
+or Turks. This place is only a little way from the Continent, and when
+the tides rise high it is an island environed on every side with water,
+but at ebb tides the passage between it and the land is dry. This is a
+great mart of commerce, and is governed by a person named
+_Menacheas_, being subject to the sultan of Cambaia. It is well
+fortified with good walls, and defended by a numerous artillery. The
+barks and brigantines used at this place are smaller than ours of Italy.
+Departing thence we came in three days to _Zoar_[54], which also is a
+well frequented mart in a fertile country inhabited by Mahometans. Near
+this place are two other good cities and ports named _Gieulfar_ and
+_Meschet_ or _Maskat_.
+
+[Footnote 53: From the context, this place appears to have been on that
+part of the oceanic coast of Arabia called the kingdom of Maskat,
+towards Cape Ras-al-gat and the entrance to the Persian gulf. The name
+seems compounded of these words _Div_ or _Diu_, an island, _Bander_ a
+port, and _Rumi_ the term in the east for the Turks as successors of the
+Romans. It is said in the text to have been subject to the sultan of
+Cambaia, but was more probably tributary to the king or sultan of
+Ormuz.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 54: In the text of Hakluyt this place is called _Goa_,
+assuredly by mistake, as it immediately afterwards appears to have been
+in the neighbourhood of Maskat, and in the direct voyage between Aden
+and Ormus, by creeping along the coast from port to port.--E.]
+
+Proceeding on our voyage we came to the fair city of _Ormuz_ or
+_Armusium_, second to none in excellence of situation, and abundance of
+pearls. It stands in an island twelve miles from the Continent, being in
+itself very scarce of water and corn, so that all things required for
+the sustenance of the inhabitants are brought from other places. At the
+distance of three days sail from thence those muscles are procured which
+produce the fairest and largest pearls. There are certain people who
+gain their living by fishing for these muscles in the following manner:
+Going in small boats to that part of the sea where these are found, they
+cast a large stone into the sea on each side of the boat fastened to
+strong ropes, by which they fix their boat steadily in one place like a
+ship at anchor. Then another stone with a cord fastened to it is cast
+into the sea, and a man having a sack hung upon his shoulder both before
+and behind, and a stone hung to his feet, leaps into the water, and
+immediately sinks to the bottom to the depth of 15 paces or more, where
+he remains gathering the pearl muscles and putting them into his sack.
+He then casts off the stone that is tied to his feet and comes up by
+means of the rope. At _Ormuz_ there are sometimes seen almost three
+hundred ships and vessels of various sorts at one time, which come from
+many different places and countries. The sultan of the city is a
+Mahometan. There are not less than four hundred merchants and factors
+continually residing here for the sake of trade in silks, pearls,
+precious stones, spices, and the like. The principal article of their
+sustenance at this place is rice.
+
+Departing from Ormuz I went into Persia, and after ten days journey I
+came to _Eri_[55] a city in _Chorazani_ which also we may name
+_Flaminia_. This region is fertile, and abounds in all good things,
+particularly in silk, so that one might purchase enough in one day to
+load 3000 camels. Owing to the fertility of this country corn is always
+cheap. Rhubarb is in such abundance that six of our pounds of twelve
+ounces each may be bought for one gold crown. This city, in which dwells
+the king of that region, contains about seven thousand houses, all
+inhabited by Mahometans. In twenty days journey from thence, I noticed
+that the inland parts of Persia are well inhabited and have many good
+towns and villages. In this journey I came to a great river called by
+the inhabitants _Eufra_, which I verily believe to be the Euphrates,
+both from the resemblance of names and from its great size. Continuing
+my journey along this river by the left hand, I came in three days
+journey to another city named _Schyra_[56], subject to a prince who is a
+Persian Mahometan, and is independent of any other prince. Here are
+found all sorts of precious stones, especially that called _Eranon_,
+which defends men against witchcraft, madness, and fearfulness
+proceeding from melancholy. It is the stone commonly called _Turquoise_,
+which is brought in great abundance from a city named _Balascam_, where
+also great plenty of _Castoreum_ is procured and various kinds of
+colours. The reason why so very little true _Castoreum_ is found among
+us is because it is adulterated by the Persians before it comes to our
+hands[57]. The way to prove true castoreum is by smelling, and if
+genuine and unadulterated it makes the nose bleed, as I saw proved on
+four persons in succession. When genuine and unadulterated, _castoreum_
+will preserve its flavour for ten years. The Persians are a courteous
+and gentle people, liberal and generous towards each other, and kind to
+strangers, as I found by experience. While here, I met with a Persian
+merchant to whom I was known in the year before when at Mecca. This man
+was born in the city of _Eri_ in Chorozani, and as soon as he saw me he
+knew me again, and asked by what fortune I had come into that country.
+To this I answered, "that I had come thither from a great desire to see
+the world." "Praised be God, said he, that I have now found a companion
+of the same mind with myself." He exhorted me not to depart from him,
+and that I should accompany him in his journeys, as he meant to go
+through the chief parts of the world.
+
+[Footnote 55: In the rambling journey of Verthema, we are often as here
+unable to discover the meaning of his strangely corrupted names.
+Chorazani or Chorassan is in the very north of Persia, at a vast
+distance from Ormuz, and he pays no attention to the particulars of his
+ten days journey which could not have been less than 400 miles. We are
+almost tempted to suspect the author of romancing.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 56: Supposing that the place in the text may possibly mean
+_Shiras_, the author makes a wonderful skip in three days from the
+Euphrates to at least 230 miles distance--E.]
+
+[Footnote 57: What is named _Castoreum_ in the text was probably musk,
+yet Russia castor might in those days have come along with rhubarb
+through Persia.--E.]
+
+I accordingly remained with him for fifteen days in a city named
+_Squilaz_, whence we went in the first place to a city named _Saint
+Bragant_[58], which is larger than Babylon of Egypt and is subject to a
+Mahometan prince, who is said to be able to take the field when occasion
+requires with 60,000 horsemen. This I say only from the information of
+others, as we could not safely pass farther in that direction, by reason
+of the great wars carried on by the Sophy against those Mahometans who
+follow the sect of _Omar_, who are abhorred by the Persians as heretics
+and misbelievers, while they are of the sect of Ali which they consider
+as the most perfect and true religion. At this place my Persian friend,
+as a proof of his unfeigned friendship, offered to give me in marriage
+his niece named _Samis_, which in their language signifies the Sun,
+which name she well deserved for her singular beauty. As we could not
+travel any farther by reason of the wars, we returned to the city of
+Eri, where he entertained me most honourably in his house, and showing
+me his niece desired that she might immediately become my wife. Being
+otherwise minded, yet not willing that I should appear to despise so
+friendly an offer, I thanked him for his goodness, yet begged the match
+might be delayed to a more convenient time. Departing soon afterwards
+from Eri, we came in eight days journey to _Ormuz_, where we took
+shipping for India.
+
+[Footnote 58: Of Squilaz and Saint Bragant it is impossible to make any
+thing, even by conjecture--E.]
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Observations of the Author on various parts of India._
+
+
+We arrived in India at a certain port named _Cheo_[59], past which flows
+the great river Indus, not far from the city of _Cambay_. It is
+situated[60] three miles within the land, so that brigantines and foists
+can have no access to it except when the tide rises higher than
+ordinary, when it sometimes overflows the land for the space of four
+miles. At this place the tides increase differently from what they do
+with us, as they increase with the wane of the moon, whereas with us
+while the moon waxes towards full. This city is walled after our manner,
+and abounds in all kinds of necessaries, especially wheat and all manner
+of wholesome and pleasant fruits. It has also abundance of _gosampine_
+or _bombassine_ (cotton) and some kinds of spices of which I do not know
+the names. Merchants bring here such quantities of cotton and silk, that
+sometimes forty or fifty vessels are loaded with these commodities for
+other countries. In this region there is a mountain in which the _onyx_
+commonly called _carneola_ is found, and not far from thence another
+mountain which produces _calecdony_ and diamonds. While I was there, the
+sultan of Cambay was named Mahomet, and had reigned forty years after
+having expelled the king of Guzerat. The natives are not Mahometans,
+neither are they idolaters, wherefore I believe if they were only
+baptised they would not be far from the way of salvation, for they
+observe the pure rule of justice, doing unto others as they would be
+done by. They deem it unlawful to deprive any living creature of its
+life, and never eat flesh. Some of them go entirely naked, or only cover
+the parts of shame, wearing fillets of a purple colour round their
+heads. Their complexion is a dark yellow, commonly called a _leonell_
+colour.
+
+[Footnote 59: This name is inexplicably corrupted; and nothing more can
+be said of it than is contained in the text, which indeed is very
+vague.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 60: Verthema appears at this place to make an abrupt
+transition to the city of Cambay, taking no farther notice of Cheo.--E.]
+
+The sultan of Cambay maintains a force of 20,000 horse. Every morning
+fifty men riding on elephants repair to his palace to reverence and
+salute the king, which is done likewise by the elephants kneeling down.
+As soon as the king wakes in the morning there is a prodigious noise of
+drums, trumpets, and other warlike instruments of music, as if in token
+of joy that the sultan still lives. The same is done while he is at
+dinner, when likewise the elephants are again brought forward to do him
+reverence. We shall afterwards have occasion to notice the customs,
+docility, and wisdom of these beasts. The sultan has his upper lip so
+large and gross that he sometimes beareth it up with a fillet as women
+do their hair. His beard is white and hangs down below his girdle. He
+has been accustomed to the use of poison even from his infancy, and he
+daily eats some to keep him in use; by which strange custom, although he
+feels no personal hurt therefrom, yet is he so saturated with poison
+that he is a certain poison to others. Insomuch that when he is
+disposed to put any noble to death, he causes the victim to be brought
+into his presence and to stand before him while he chews certain fruits
+called _Chofolos_[61] resembling nutmegs, chewing at the same time the
+leaves of a certain herb named _Tambolos_, to which is added the powder
+of oyster shells. After chewing these things for some time, he spits
+upon the person whom he wishes to kill, and he is sure to die within
+half an hour, so powerful is the venom of his body[62]. He keeps about
+four thousand concubines, and whoever of them chances to sleep with him
+is sure to die next day. When he changes his shirt or any other article
+of his dress, no one dare wear it, or is sure to die. My companion
+learnt from the merchants of Cambay that this wonderful venomous nature
+of the sultan had been occasioned by his having been bred up by his
+father from a child in the constant use of poison, beginning by little
+and little, and taking preservatives at the same time.
+
+[Footnote 61: It is evident from the text that the _areka_ nut is here
+meant, which is chewed along with _betel_ leaf, called tambolos in the
+text, and strewed with _chunam_ or lime made of oyster shells.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 62: This ridiculous story can only be understood as an eastern
+metaphor, expressive of the tyrannous disposition of the sultan.--E.]
+
+Such is the wonderful fertility of this country that it surpasses all
+description. The people, as already said, go almost entirely naked, or
+content themselves with a single garment, and are a brave and warlike
+nation, being at the same time much given to commerce, so that their
+city is frequented by traders of all nations. From this city, and
+another to be named afterwards, innumerable kinds and quantities of
+merchandise are transported to almost every region and nation of the
+world; especially to the Turks, Syrians, Arabians, Indians, and to
+divers regions of Africa, Ethiopia, and Arabia; and more especially vast
+abundance of silk and cotton, so that by means of this prodigious trade
+the sultan is astonishingly rich. The sultan of Cambay is almost
+continually at war with the king of _Joga_, whose realm is fifteen days
+journey from Cambay, and extends very far in all directions. This king
+of _Joga_[63] and all his people are idolaters. He maintains an army
+always on foot of 30.000 men, and is continually in the field travelling
+through his dominions with a prodigious train of followers at the
+charge of his subject, his camp containing at the least 4000 tents and
+pavilions. In this perpetual progress he is accompanied by his wife,
+children, concubines, and slaves, and by every apparatus for hunting and
+amusement. His dress consists of two goat-skins with the hair side
+outwards, one of which covers his breast and the other his back and
+shoulders. His complexion is of a brown weasel colour inclining to
+black, as are most of the native Indians, being scorched by the heat of
+the sun. They wear ear-rings of precious stones, and adorn themselves
+with jewels of various kinds; and the king and principal people paint
+their faces and other parts of their bodies with certain spices and
+sweet gums or ointments. They are addicted to many vain superstitions;
+some professing never to lie on the ground, while others keep a
+continual silence, having two or three persons to minister to their
+wants by signs. These devotees have horns hanging from their necks,
+which they blow all at once when they come to any city or town to make
+the inhabitants afraid, after which they demand victuals and whatever
+else they are in need of from the people. When this king remains
+stationary at any place, the greater part of his army keeps guard about
+his pavilion, while five or six hundred men range about the country
+collecting what they are able to procure. They never tarry above three
+days in one place, but are continually wandering about like vagabond
+Egyptians, Arabs, or Tartars. The region through which they roam is not
+fertile, being mostly composed of steep and craggy mountains. The city
+is without walls, and its houses are despicable huts or hovels. This
+king is an enemy to the sultan of _Machamir_? and vexes his country with
+incessant predatory incursions.
+
+[Footnote 63: What sovereign of India is meant by the _king of Joga_ we
+cannot ascertain, unless perhaps some Hindoo rajah in the hilly country
+to the north-east of Gujerat. From some parts of the account of this
+king and his subjects, we are apt to conceive that the relation in the
+text is founded on some vague account of a chief or leader of a band of
+Hindoo devotees. A king or chief of the _Jogues_.--E.]
+
+
+Departing from Cambay, I came in twelve days journey to the city of
+_Ceull_[64], the land of Guzerat being interposed between these two
+cities. The king of this city is an idolater. His subjects are of a dark
+yellow colour, or lion tawny, and are much addicted to war, in which
+they use swords, bows and arrows, darts, slings, and round targets. They
+have engines to beat down walls and to make a great slaughter in an
+army. The city is only three miles from the sea on the banks of a fine
+river, by which a great deal of merchandise is imported. The soil is
+fertile and produces many different kinds of fruits, and in the district
+great quantities of cotton cloth are made. The people are idolaters like
+those of Calicut, of whom mention will be made hereafter, yet there are
+many Mahometans in the city. The king has but a small military force,
+and the government is administered with justice. Two days journey from
+thence is a city named _Dabuly_[65] on a great river and in a fertile
+country. It is walled like the towns of Italy, and contains a vast
+number of Mahometan merchants. The king is an idolater, having an army
+of 30,000 men. Departing from thence I came to the island of _Goga_[66],
+not above a mile from the continent, which pays yearly a tribute of 1000
+pieces of gold to the king of _Deccan_, about the same value with the
+seraphins of Babylon. These coins are impressed on one side with the
+image of the _devil_[67], and on the other side are some unknown
+characters. On the sea coast at one side of this island there is a town
+much like those of Italy, in which resides the governor, who is captain
+over a company of soldiers named _Savain_, consisting of 400 Mamelukes,
+he being likewise a Mameluke. Whenever he can procure any white man he
+takes them into his service and gives them good entertainment, and if
+fit for military service, of which he makes trial of their strength by
+wrestling, he gives them a monthly allowance of 20 gold seraphins; but
+if not found fit for war he employs them in handicrafts. With this small
+force of only 400 men, he gives much disturbance to the king of
+Narsinga.
+
+[Footnote 64: There is a district on the west of Gujerat or Guzerat
+named _Chuwal_, on the river Butlass or Banass which runs into the gulf
+of Cutch, which may be here meant.--.]
+
+[Footnote 65: No name having the least affinity to that in the text is
+to be found in any modern map of India near the coast of Gujerat. It
+would almost appear that the author had now gone down the coast of
+India, and that his Chuwal and Dabuly are Chaul and Dabul on the coast
+of the Concan.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 66: Nothing can possibly be made of this island of Goga. There
+is a town on the coast of Gujerat and western side of the gulf of Cambay
+called Gogo, but it is no island, and could not possibly be subject to
+the king of the Deccan; and besides Verthema is obviously now going down
+the western coast of India.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 67: Of a Swammy or Hindoo idol.--E.]
+
+From the island of _Goga_ I went to the city of _Dechan_[68], of which
+the king or sultan is a Mahometan, and to whom the before mentioned
+captain of the Mamelukes at _Goga_ is tributary. The city is beautiful,
+and stands in a fertile country which abounds in all things necessary
+for man. The king of this country is reckoned a Mameluke, and has 35,000
+horse and foot in his service. His palace is a sumptuous edifice,
+containing numerous and splendid apartments, insomuch, that one has to
+pass through 44 several rooms in a continued suite before getting to the
+presence-chamber of the sultan, who lives with wonderful pomp and
+magnificence, even those who wait upon him having their shoes or
+_starpins_ ornamented with rubies and diamonds, and rich ear-rings of
+pearls and other precious stones. Six miles from the city is a mountain
+from which they dig diamonds, which mountain is surrounded by a wall,
+and guarded by a band of soldiers. The inhabitants of the city are
+mostly Mahometans, who are generally clad in silk, or at least have
+their shirts or lower garments of that fabric; they wear also thin
+buskin and hose or breeches like the Greek mariners, or what are called
+trowsers. Their women, like those of Damascus, have their faces veiled.
+The king of Deccan is almost in continual war with the king of Nursinga;
+most of his soldiers being white men from distant countries hired for
+war, whereas the natives are of a dark colour like the other inhabitants
+of India. This king is very rich and liberal, and has a large navy of
+ships, but he is a great enemy to the Christians. Having visited this
+country, I went in five days from thence to _Bathacala_ or _Batecolak_,
+the inhabitants of which are idolaters, except some Mahometan merchants
+who resort thither for trade. It abounds in rice, sugar, wheat,
+_walnuts_[69], figs, and many kinds of fruits and roots unknown to us,
+and has plenty of beeves, kine, buffaloes, sheep, goats, and other
+beasts, but no horses, asses, or mules. From thence, at the distance of
+a days journey I came to _Centacola?_ the prince of which has no great
+riches; but the district has plenty of flesh, rice, and such fruits as
+grow in India; and to this place many Mahometans resort for trade. The
+king is an idolater, and is subject to him of Batecolah. Two days
+journey from thence I came to _Onore_, the king of which is an idolater,
+subject to the king of Narsinga. The prince or king of Onore has eight
+armed foists or barks, which make excursions by sea, and subsist by
+piracy, yet is he in friendship with the Portuguese. The district
+produces plenty of rice, and has many kinds of wild beasts, as wild
+boars, harts, wolves, _lions_[70], and many kinds of birds, such as
+peacocks and parrots, besides others very different from ours. It has
+likewise many cattle of a bright yellow colour, and fine fat sheep. It
+has also abundance of flowers of all kinds. The air is so temperate and
+healthy, that the natives live much longer than we do in Italy. Not far
+from this place is another city named Mangalore, whence about sixty
+ships depart yearly with cargoes of rice. The inhabitants are partly
+idolaters, and part Mahometans.
+
+[Footnote 68: Dechan, Deccan, or Dacshin, is the name of a territory or
+kingdom, and properly signifies southern India, or simply the south, in
+reference to Hindostan proper, on the north of the Nerbuddah: But
+Verthema almost always names the capital from the kingdom.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 69: By walnuts, I suspect that coca-nuts are meant, and
+rendered walnuts by some mistaken translation.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 70: There are no lions in India, and tigers are certainly here
+meant.--E.]
+
+Departing from thence we went to the city of _Cananore_, where the king
+of Portugal has a strong garrison, though the king of the city is an
+idolater and no great friend to the Portuguese. At this port many horses
+are imported from Persia, which pay a high duty. Departing from thence
+into the inland we came to the city of _Narsinga_[71], which is
+frequented by many Mahometan merchants. The soil in that country bears
+no wheat, so that the inhabitants have no bread, neither hath it vines
+or any other fruits except oranges and gourds, but they have plenty of
+rice and such walnuts as that country _produces_[72]. It has likewise
+plenty of spices, as pepper, ginger, mirabolans, cardamum, cassia, and
+others, also many kinds of fruits unlike ours, and much sweeter. The
+region is almost inaccessible, _for many dens and ditches made by
+force_[73]. The king has an army of 50,000 _gentlemen whom they call
+heroes_[74]. In war they use swords and round targets, also lances,
+darts, bows, and slings, and are now beginning to use fire arms. These
+men go almost entirely naked, except when engaged in war. They use no
+horses, mules, asses, or camels; only employing elephants, which yet do
+not fight in battle. Great quantities of merchandise are consumed in
+this city, insomuch that two hundred ships resort thither yearly from
+various countries[75].
+
+[Footnote 71: Bijanagur was the capital of the kingdom known by the name
+of Narsinga; but from the neighbourhood of Cananore, it is possible that
+Verthema here means Narsingapoor, about 25 miles S.S.W. from
+Seringapatam.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 72: The walnuts of this author must have been cocoa-nuts,
+perhaps converted to walnuts by erroneous translation.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 73: This singular passage probably means, that the country is
+defended by a great number of forts and garrisons, as indeed we know
+that the interior table land of southern India is thickly planted with
+_droogs_ or hill forts, which must then have been impregnable.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 74: Probably meaning Nairs or Rajputs, who are reckoned of a
+high or noble cast, next to the Bramins--E.]
+
+[Footnote 75: This is a most astonishing error, as Narsingapoor is above
+100 miles from the nearest coast.--E.]
+
+Departing from Narsinga, and travelling 15 days to the _east_[76], we
+came to the city of _Bisinagar_, or Bijanagur, which is subject to the
+king of Narsinga. This city stands upon the side of a hill, and is very
+large, and well fortified, being surrounded by a triple wall, eight
+miles in circuit. The district in which it stands is wonderfully
+fertile, and produces every thing requisite for the necessities, and
+even the delicacies and luxuries of man. It is likewise a most
+convenient country for hunting and hawking, having many large plains,
+and fine woods, so that altogether it is a kind of earthly paradise. The
+king and people are idolaters; and the king has great power and riches,
+maintaining an army of 4000 horsemen, although it may be noted that a
+good horse in this country costs four or five hundred gold coins called
+pardaos, and sometimes eight hundred. The reason of this high price is,
+that these horses are brought from other countries, whence they can
+procure no mares, as the exportation of these is strictly prohibited by
+the princes of the countries whence the horses are procured. He has
+likewise 400 elephants to serve in his wars, and many of those swift
+running camels which we commonly call _dromedaries_[77].
+
+[Footnote 76: Bijanagur is 175 miles directly _north_ from
+Narsingapoor.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 77: In modern language the term dromedary is very improperly
+applied to the Bactrian, or two-hunched camel, a slow beast of burden.
+The word dromedary is formed from the Greek _celer_, and only belongs to
+a peculiar breed of camels of amazing swiftness.--E.]
+
+At this place I had an excellent opportunity of learning the docility
+and almost reasoning wisdom of the elephant, which certainly is the most
+sagacious and most docile of all animals, approaching even to human
+reason, and far exceeding all other beasts in strength. When used for
+war, the Indians fix great pack-saddles on their backs, resembling those
+used in Italy for mules of burden, but vastly larger. These saddles are
+girt round their bellies with two iron chains, and on each side is
+placed a small house, cage, or turret of wood, each of which contains
+three men. Between the two turrets an Indian sits on the back of the
+animal, and speaks to him in the language of the country, which the
+creature understands and obeys. Seven men, therefore, are that placed
+on the back of each elephant, all armed with coats of mail, and having
+lances, bows, darts, and slings, and targets for defence. Also the
+trunk, snout, or proboscis of the elephant is armed with a sword
+fastened to it, two cubits long, very strong, and a handbreadth in
+width. When necessary to advance, to retreat, to turn to either side, to
+strike, or to forbear, the governor or conductor of the elephant sitting
+on his back, causes him to do whatever he wills, by speaking in such
+language and expressions as he is accustomed to, all of which the beast
+understands and obeys, without the use of bridle or spur. But when fire
+is thrown at them, they are wonderfully afraid and run away, on which
+occasions it is impossible to stop them; on which account the Indians
+have many curious devices of fire-works to frighten the elephants, and
+make them run away. I saw an instance of the extraordinary strength of
+these animals while at Cananore, where some Mahometans endeavoured to
+draw a ship on the land, stem foremost, upon three rollers, on which
+occasion three elephant, commodiously applied, drew with great force,
+and bending their heads down to the ground, brought the ship on the
+land. Many have believed that elephants have no joints in their legs,
+which therefore they could not bend; but this notion is utterly false,
+as they have joints like other beasts, but lower down on their legs. The
+female elephants are fiercer than the males, and much stronger for
+carrying burdens. Sometimes they are seized by a kind of fury or
+madness, on which occasions they run about in a disorderly manner. One
+elephant exceeds the size of three buffaloes, to which latter animals
+their hair has some resemblance. Their eyes resemble those of swine.
+Their snout or trunk is very long, and by means of it they convey food
+and drink to their mouths, so that the trunk may be called the hand of
+the elephant. The mouth is under the trunk, and is much like the mouth
+of a sow. The trunk is hollow, and so flexible, that the animal can use
+it to lay hold of sticks, and wield them with it as we do with the hand.
+I once saw the trunk of a tree overthrown by one elephant, which 24 men
+had in vain attempted. It has two great teeth or tusks in the upper jaw.
+Their ears are very broad, above two spans even on the smallest
+elephants. Their feet are round and as broad as the wooden trenchers
+which are in ordinary use, and each foot has five round hoofs like large
+oyster shells. The tail is about four spans long, like that of a
+buffaloe, and is very thin of hair. Elephants are of various sizes, some
+18 spans or 14 spans high, and some have been seen as high as 16 spans;
+but the females are larger than the males of the same age. Their gait is
+slow and wallowing, so that those who are not used to ride upon them are
+apt to become sick, as if they were at sea; but it is pleasant to ride a
+young elephant, as their pace is soft and gentle like an ambling mule.
+On mounting them, they stoop and bend their knee to assist the rider to
+get up; but their keepers use no bridles or halters to guide them. When
+they engender they retire into the most secret recesses of the woods,
+from natural modesty, though some pretend that they copulate backwards.
+
+The king of Narsinga exceeds in riches and dominion, all the princes I
+have ever seen or heard of. In beauty and situation the city resembles
+Milan, only that being on the slope of a hill it is not so level. Other
+subject kingdoms lie round about it, even as Ausonia and Venice surround
+Milan. The bramins or priests informed me that the king receives daily
+of tribute from that city only the sum of 12,000 _pardaos_. He and his
+subjects are idolaters, worshipping the devil like those of Calicut. He
+maintains an army of many thousand men, and is continually at war with
+his neighbours. The richer people wear a slender dress, somewhat like a
+petticoat, not very long, and bind their heads with a fillet or broad
+bandage, after the fashion of the Mahometans, but the common people go
+almost entirely naked, covering only the parts of shame. The king wears
+a cape or short cloak of cloth of gold on his shoulders, only two spans
+long; and when he goes to war he wears a close vest of cotton, over
+which is a cloak adorned with plates of gold, richly bordered with all
+kinds of jewels and precious stones. The horse he rides on, including
+the furniture or caparisons, is estimated to equal one of our cities in
+value, being all over ornamented with jewels of great price. When be
+goes a hunting, he is attended by other three kings, whose office it is
+to bear him company wherever he goes. When he rides out or goes a
+journey he is attended by 6000 horsemen; and from all that we have said,
+and various other circumstances respecting his power, riches, and
+magnificence, he certainly is to be accounted one of the greatest
+sovereigns in the world. Besides the pieces already mentioned, named
+_pardaos_, which are of gold, he coins silver money called _fano_, or
+_fanams_, which are worth sixteen of our smallest copper money. Such is
+the excellent government of this country, that travellers may go through
+the whole of it in safety, if they can avoid the danger of _lions_[78].
+This king is in amity with the king of Portugal, and is a great friend
+to the Christians, so that the Portuguese are received and treated in
+his dominions in a friendly and honourable manner.
+
+[Footnote 78: Wherever lions are mentioned by this traveller in India,
+tigers are to be understood.--E.]
+
+When I had tarried many days in this great city, I returned to Cananore,
+whence, after three days stay I went to a city twelve miles from thence,
+named _Trempata_[79], a sea-port, inhabited by idolaters, but frequented
+by many Mahometan merchants. The only riches of this place consists in
+Indian nuts, or cocoa-nuts, and timber for ship-building. Passing from
+thence, by the cities of _Pandara_ and _Capagot_[80], I came to the
+famous city of Calicut. To avoid prolixity, I pass over many other
+kingdoms and peoples, such as _Chianul_? _Dabul_, _Onoue_? _Bangalore_,
+_Cananore_, _Cochin_, _Cacilon_? and _Calonue_, or _Coulan_[81]. I have
+so done on purpose to enable me to treat more at large of Calicut, being
+in a manner the metropolis of all the Indian cities, as the king thereof
+exceeds all the kings of the east in royal majesty, and is therefore
+called _Samoory_ or _Zamorin_, which in their language signifies _God on
+earth_.
+
+[Footnote 79: About that distance south from Cananore is
+Dermapatam.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 80: No names in the least respect similar to these are to be
+found in the indicated route between Cananore and Calicut.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 81: Of the three places marked with points of interrogation,
+the names are so disfigured in the orthography as to be unintelligible;
+_Cianul_ may possibly be Chaul, _Onouhe_ Onore, and _Cacilon_
+Cranganore.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Account of the famous City and Kingdom of Calicut._
+
+
+The city of Calicut is situated on the continent or main land of India,
+close upon the sea, having no port; but about a mile to the south there
+is a river which runs into the ocean by a narrow mouth. This river is
+divided into many branches among the fields in the plain country, for
+the purpose of being distributed by means of trenches to water the
+grounds, and one of these branches not exceeding three or four feet
+deep runs into the city. Calicut is not walled, and contains about 6000
+houses, which are not built close adjoining each other, as in European
+cities, but a certain space is left between each, either to prevent the
+communication of fire, or owing to the ignorance of the builders. It is
+a mile in length, and its houses are only mean low huts, not exceeding
+the height of a man on horseback, being mostly covered with boughs of
+trees, instead of tiles or other covering. It is said that on digging
+only five or six spans into the ground they come immediately to water,
+on which account they cannot dig foundations of any depth. Warehouses or
+lodgings for merchants may be bought for 15 or 20 pieces of gold; but
+the common run of houses cost only two pieces of gold or even less.
+
+The king and people of Calicut are idolaters, and worshippers of the
+devil, though they acknowledge one supreme God, the Creator of heaven
+and earth, the first chief cause of all things. But they allege that God
+could have no pleasure in his government, if he were to take it upon
+himself, and hath therefore given it in charge to the devil, who was
+sent as they say from heaven, to rule over and judge the world,
+rendering good or evil to men according to their deserts. The great God
+they call _Tamerani_, and this devil or subordinate deity _Deumo_. The
+king has a chapel in his palace, where this Deumo is worshipped. This
+chapel has an open vault or arch on all the four sides, about two paces
+in breadth, and it is about three paces high. The entrance is by a
+wooden gate, ornamented with carved work of monstrous forms or shapes of
+devils. In the midst of the chapel is a royal seat or throne of copper,
+on which sits the figure or image of the devil, likewise of copper. On
+the head of this image is a crown like that worn by the pope, but having
+the addition of four horns, besides which he is represented with a great
+gaping mouth, having four monstrous teeth. The nose is horridly
+deformed, with grim lowering eyes, a threatening look, and crooked
+hands, or talons like flesh-hooks, and feet somewhat like those of a
+cock; forming on the whole, a monster terrible to look at. In every
+corner of the chapel there are other figures of devils of shining
+copper, as if flames of fire devouring miserable souls. These souls are
+about the size of half a finger, some of them larger, and each figure
+puts one of these souls into his mouth with the right hand, while the
+left is on the ground lifting up another. Every morning the priests,
+who are called Bramins, wash the idol with rose water, and perfume him
+with sweet savours, after which they pray to him prostrate on the earth.
+Once every week they sacrifice to the idol after this form. They have a
+little altar or cupboard, three spans high, five spans long and four
+broad, on which they strew all manner of flowers and sweet-smelling
+powders; then bringing a great silver chafing-dish full of warming
+coals, they kill a cock with a silver knife, throwing the blood into the
+fire, together with many sweet perfumes, and even thrust the bloody
+blade of the knife often into the fire that none of the blood may be
+lost; then the priest maketh many strange gestures with the knife, like
+a fencer, giving or defending thrusts. In the mean time other priests
+with burning censers go round about the altar perfuming it with incense,
+and ringing a small silver bell all the time of the sacrifice. The
+priest who sacrifices the cock has his arms and legs garnished with
+silver plates and pendants, which make a noise when he moves like
+hawks-bells, and he wears a kind of boss on his breast inscribed with I
+know not what signs, being perhaps the secret character of some hidden
+mystery. When the sacrifice is finished, he fills both his hands with
+wheat, and goes backwards, keeping his eyes fixed on the altar till he
+comes to a certain tree whereon he casts the wheat; then returning to
+the altar he removes all that is upon it.
+
+The king never sits down to eat till four of his priests have offered
+his meat in this manner to the idol; lifting their hands above their
+heads with many fantastical gesticulations and murmuring voices, they
+present the meat to the idol, and after many foolish ceremonies bring
+back the meat to the king. The meat is offered in a wooden tray, after
+which it is laid on the broad leaves of a certain tree. The meat of the
+king consists of rice and divers other things, such as fruits; and be
+eats sitting on the ground without cloth or carpet. During his repast,
+the priests stand round him at four or five paces distance, carefully
+observing all his orders; and when he has done eating, they carry away
+all the remains of his food, which they give to certain crows, which
+being used to be thus fed, come upon a signal, and being esteemed holy,
+it is not lawful for any one to take or even hurt them. The chief
+priests of these idolaters are the bramins, who are with them as bishops
+are among us, and are considered as the order of highest dignity. The
+second order among them are the nairs, who come in place of our
+gentlemen, and go out to war with swords and bucklers, lancet, bows,
+and other weapons. The third order consists of mechanics and handicrafts
+of all kinds. In the fourth are victuallers, or those that make
+provision of fish and flesh. Next to them are those who gather pepper,
+cocoa nuts, grapes and other fruits. The baser sort are those who sow
+and gather rice, who are kept under such subjection by the bramins and
+nairs that they dare not approach nearer to them than 50 paces under
+pain of death and are therefore obliged to lurk in bye places and
+marshes; and when they go anywhere abroad they call out continually in a
+loud voice, that they may be hoard of the bramins and nairs otherwise if
+any of these were to come near they would certainly put these low people
+to death.
+
+The dress of even the king and queen differ in little or nothing from
+the other idolaters, all going naked, barefooted, and bareheaded, except
+a small piece of silk or cotton to cover their nakedness; but the
+Mahometans wear single garments in a more seemly manner, their women
+being dressed like the men except that their hair is very long. The king
+and nobles eat no kind of flesh, except having first got permission of
+the priests; but the common people may eat any flesh they please except
+that of cows. Those of the basest sort, named _Nirani_ and _Poliars_,
+are only permitted to eat fish dried in the sun.
+
+When the king or zamorin dies, his male children, if any, or his
+brothers by the fathers side, or the sons of these brothers, do not
+succeed in the kingdom: For, by ancient law or custom, the succession
+belongs to the sons of the kings sisters; and if there be none such, it
+goes to the nearest male relation through the female blood. The reason
+of this strange law of succession is, that when the king takes a wife,
+she is always in the first place deflowered by the chief bramin, for
+which he is paid fifty-pieces of gold. When the king goes abroad, either
+in war or a-hunting, the queen is left in charge of the priests, who
+keep company with her till his return; wherefore the king may well think
+that her children may not be his; and for this reason the children of
+his sisters by the same mother are considered as his nearest in blood,
+and the right inheritors of the throne. When the king dies, all his
+subjects express their mourning by cutting their beards and shaving
+their heads; and during the celebration of his funerals, those who live
+by fishing abstain from their employment during eight days. Similar
+rules are observed upon the death of any of the kings wives. Sometimes
+the king abstains from the company of women for the space of a year,
+when likewise he forbears to chew _betel_ and _areka_, which are
+reckoned provocatives.
+
+The gentlemen and merchants of Calicut, when they wish to show great
+friendship to each other, sometimes exchange wives, but on these
+occasions the children remain with their reputed fathers. It is likewise
+customary among these idolaters, for one woman to have seven husbands at
+the same time, each of whom has his appointed night to sleep with her;
+and when she has a child, she fathers it upon any of the husbands she
+pleases. The people of this country, when at their meals, lie upon the
+ground, and eat their meat from copper trays, using certain leaves
+instead of spoons; their food consisting for the most part of rice and
+fish seasoned with spices, and of the ordinary fruits of the country.
+The lowest people eat in a filthy manner, putting their dirty hands into
+the dish, and thrusting their food by handfuls into their mouths. The
+punishment of murder is by impalement; but those who wound or hurt any
+one have to pay a fine to the king. When any one is in debt, and refuses
+to pay, the creditor goes to the judges, of whom there are said to be a
+hundred, and having made due proof of the debt, he receives a certain
+stick or branch of a tree, with authority to arrest his debtor, to whom,
+when he is able to find him, he uses these words: "I charge you by the
+heads of the Bramins, and by the head of the king, that you stir not
+from the spot on which you stand till you pay me what you owe." The
+debtor has now no resource but to pay immediately, or to lose his life:
+for, if he escape after this ceremony, he is adjudged a rebel, and it is
+lawful for any man to kill him.
+
+When they mean to pray to their idols, they resort before sunrise to
+some pool or rivet where they wash themselves, after which they resort
+to the idol-house, taking especial care not to touch any thing by the
+way, and say their prayers prostrate on the ground, making strange
+gesticulations and contortions, so marvellously distorting their faces,
+eyes, and mouths, that it is horrible to behold. The nairs or gentlemen
+may not begin to eat, till one of them has dressed and set the food in
+order, with certain ceremonies, but the lower orders are not bound to
+such rules. The women also have no other care than to dress and beautify
+themselves, as they take much pains to wash and purify their persons,
+and to perfume their bodies with many sweet savours. Likewise when they
+go abroad, they are singularly loaded with jewels and ornaments on their
+ears, arms, and legs.
+
+In Calicut there are certain teachers of warlike exercises, who train up
+the youth in the use of the sword, target, and lance, and of such other
+weapons as they employ in war; and when the king takes the field he has
+an army of 100,000 infantry, but there are no cavalry in that country.
+On this occasion the king rides upon an elephant, and elephants are used
+in their wars. Those who are next in authority to the king wear fillets
+round their heads of crimson or scarlet silk. Their arms are crooked
+swords, lances, bows and arrows, and targets. The royal ensign is an
+umbrella borne aloft on a spear, so as to shade the king from the heat
+of the sun, which ensign in their language is called _somber_. When both
+armies approach within three arrow-flights, the king sends his bramins
+to the enemy by way of heralds, to challenge an hundred of them to
+combat against an hundred of his nairs, during which set combat both
+sides prepare themselves for battle. In the mean time the two select
+parties proceed to combat, mid-way between the two armies, always
+striking with the edge of their swords at the heads of their
+antagonists, and never thrusting with the point, or striking at the
+legs. Usually when five or six are slain of either side, the Bramins
+interpose to stop the fight, and a retreat is sounded at their instance.
+After which the Bramins speak to the adverse kings, and generally
+succeed to make up matters without any battle or farther slaughter.
+
+The king sometimes rides on an elephant, but at other times is carried
+by his nairs or nobles, and when he goes out is always followed by a
+numerous band of minstrels, making a prodigious noise with drums,
+timbrels, tambourets, and other such instruments. The wages of the nairs
+are four _carlines_ each, monthly, in time of peace, and six during war.
+When any of them are slain, their bodies are burned with great pomp and
+many superstitious ceremonies, and their ashes are preserved; but the
+common people are buried in their houses, gardens, fields, or woods,
+without any ceremony. When I was in Calicut it was crowded with
+merchants from almost every part of the east, especially a prodigious
+number of Mahometans. There were many from Malacca and Bengal, from
+Tanaserim, Pegu, and Coromandel, from the islands of Ceylon and Sumatra,
+from all the cities and countries of Western India, and various
+Persians, Arabians, Syrians, Turks, and Ethiopians. As the idolaters do
+not sail on the sea, the Mahometans are exclusively employed in
+navigation, so that there are not less than 15,000 Mahometans resident
+in Calicut, mostly born in that place. Their ships are seldom below the
+burden of four or five hundred tons, yet all open and without decks.
+They do not put any tow or oakum into the seams of their ships, yet join
+the planks so artificially, that they hold out water admirably, the
+seams being pitched and held together with iron nails, and the wood of
+which their ships are built is better than ours. Their sails are made of
+cotton cloth, doubled in the under parts, by which they gather much wind
+and swell out like bags, having only one sail to each vessel. Their
+anchors are of marble, eight spans long, having two on each side of the
+ship, which are hung by means of double ropes. Their voyages are all
+made at certain appointed times and seasons, as one time of the year
+answers for one coast, and another season for other voyages, which must
+all be regulated according to the changes of the weather. In the months
+of May, June, and July, when with us in Italy every thing is almost
+burnt up with heat and drought, they have prodigious rains. The best of
+their ships are built in the island of _Porcai_, not far from Calicut.
+They have one kind of vessel or canoe, made all of one piece of wood
+like a trough, very long, narrow, and sharp, which is propelled either
+by oars or sails, and goes with amazing swiftness, which is much used by
+pirates.
+
+The palace of the king of Calicut exceeds a mile in circumference, and
+is well constructed of beams and posts artificially joined, and
+curiously carved all over with the figures of devils. It is all however
+very low, for the reason before-mentioned, as they cannot dig deep for
+secure foundations. It is impossible to express in words the number and
+riches of the pearls and precious stones which the king wears about him,
+which exceed all estimate in regard to their value. Although, when I was
+in that place, the king lived rather in a state of grief, both on
+account of the war in which he was engaged with the Portuguese, and
+because he was afflicted by the venereal disease which had got into his
+throat, yet his ears, hands, legs, and feet, were richly garnished with
+all sorts of jewels and precious stones, absolutely beyond description.
+His treasure is so vast, that it cannot be contained in two immense
+cellars or warehouses, consisting of precious stones, plates of gold,
+and other rich ornaments, besides as much, gold coin as might load an
+hundred mules, as was reported by the Bramins, to whom these things are
+best known. This treasure is said to have been hoarded up by twelve
+kings, his predecessors. In this treasury there is said to be a coffer
+three spans long and two broad, entirely full of precious stones of
+inestimable value.
+
+Pepper is gathered in the fields around the suburbs of Calicut, and even
+in some places within the city. It grows on a weak and feeble plant,
+somewhat like vines, which is unable to support itself without props or
+stakes. It much resembles ivy, and in like manner creeps up and embraces
+such trees as it grows near. This tree, or bush rather, throws out
+numerous branches of two or three spans long, having leaves like those
+of the Syrian apple, but somewhat thicker. On every twig there hang six
+clusters about the size of dates, and of the colour of unripe grapes,
+but thicker together. These are gathered in October, while still
+inclining to green, and are spread out on mats in the sun to dry, when
+in three days they become black, just as brought to us. The fruitfulness
+of these plants proceeds entirely from the goodness of the soil in which
+they grow, as they do not require pruning or lopping like vines with us.
+This region also produces ginger, some roots weighing twelve ounces,
+though they do not penetrate the ground above three or four spans. When
+the roots are dug up, the uppermost joint is again set in the ground, as
+seed for next year's crop. It and the mirabolans are found in a
+red-coloured soil, and the stalk much resembles a young pear-tree.
+
+Were I to describe all the strange fruits that are produced in this
+country, it would require a large volume for that alone; as they not
+only have many quite different from ours in form, taste, and flavour,
+but even those kinds which are the same with ours, differ essentially in
+many particulars. Natural philosophers may consider how it should so
+happen that things of the same kind become so essentially different,
+according to the changes of soil and climate; by which some fruits and
+seeds, by transplantation to better soil, become more perfect in their
+kind, as larger, fairer, sweeter, and more fruitful; while others are
+improved by a worse soil and colder region. This diversity may not only
+be seen in plants and herbs, but also in beasts, and even in man. It is
+strange to observe how very differently some trees bear their fruits
+and seeds, some in one part of the tree and some in other parts. At
+Calicut there is a fruit named _Jaceros_, which grows on a tree about
+the size of our pear trees. The fruit is about two spans and a half
+long, and as thick as the thigh of a man, growing out of the body of the
+tree under the branches, some in the middle of the tree and others lower
+down. The colour of this fruit is green, and its form and appearance
+resembles a pine apple, but with smaller grains or knobs. When ripe it
+is black, and is gathered in December. It has the taste of a _pepon_
+with a flavour of musk, and in eating seems to give various pleasant
+tastes, sometimes resembling a peach, sometimes like a pomegranate, and
+leaves a rich sweet in the month like new honeycombs. Under the skin it
+has a pulp like that of a peach, and within that are other fruits like
+soft chesnuts, which when roasted eat much like them. This is certainly
+one of the finest fruits I ever met with. There is another fruit called
+_Apolanda_, which is worthy of being mentioned. The tree grows to the
+height of a man, having not above four or five leaves hanging from
+certain slips, each leaf being so large that it is sufficient to cover a
+man entirely from rain or the heat of the sun. In the middle of each
+leaf rises a stalk like that of a bean, which produces flowers followed
+by fruit a span long, and as thick as a mans arm. These fruits are
+gathered unripe, as they become ripe in keeping. Every slip bears about
+two hundred fruits in a cluster. They are of a yellow colour with a very
+thin skin, and are most delicate eating, and very wholesome. There are
+three kinds of this fruit, one of which is not so pleasant or so much
+esteemed as the others. This tree bears fruit only once and then dies;
+but there rise from the ground all about the root fifty or sixty young
+slips which renew the life of the parent tree. The gardeners transplant
+these to other places, and in one year they produce fruit This fruit is
+to be had in great abundance, almost the whole year, and are so cheap
+that twenty of them may be had for a penny. This country produces
+innumerable flowers of great beauty and most pleasant flavour, all the
+year round, and especially roses, both red, white, and yellow.
+
+The cocoa is another tree most worthy of being known, as in fruitfulness
+and sweetness of fruit it surpasses all other trees. Its fruit is a nut
+of large size; and taken altogether, this tree produces ten different
+commodities of value: as it produces wood most excellent for burning,
+nuts very pleasant to eat, cords or ropes that answer well for ships,
+fine cloth, which when dyed resembles silk. The wood is the best that
+can be found for making charcoal, and it yields wine, odoriferous water,
+sugar, and oil. The boughs or leaves serve to cover houses, instead of
+tiles or thatch, as, by reason of their closeness and substance, they
+keep out the rain admirably. One tree will produce about two hundred
+large nuts. The outer rhind of these nuts is removed, and thrown into
+the fire, where it burns quickly and with a strong flame. The inner
+rhind is like cotton or flax, and can be wrought in the same manner.
+From the finer part of this, a kind of cloth is made resembling silk;
+and from the tow, or refuse, they make a coarser cloth, or small ropes
+and twine; while the coarsest parts are made into cables and large ropes
+for ships. The inner hard shell of the nut incloses the kernel, which is
+excellent eating, and lines the shell to the thickness of an inch or
+less. Within this is found to the quantity of two or three cups of sweet
+water, which is excellent to drink, and which, by boiling, produces good
+oil. Only one side of the tree is allowed to produce fruit, as they
+wound the other side every morning and evening in several places, whence
+a juice or sap runs out into vessels placed to receive it. Thus they
+procure at each wound, every night and morning, a cupful of most
+precious liquor, which sometimes they boil till it becomes strong as
+brandy, so as to make people drunk like strong wine, which it resembles
+in taste and flavour. They likewise procure sugar from this tree, but
+not very sweet. This tree produces fruit continually, as at all times
+there are to be seen upon it both old ripe fruit of the past season, and
+green fruit of the present year. It does not begin bearing till five
+years old, and only lives for twenty five years. It thrives best in
+sandy ground, and is planted or set out like our walnuts; and is so much
+valued, that it is to be found all over the country for at least two
+hundred miles. This country also produces other fruits, from which they
+make good oil.
+
+For the cultivation of rice they till the ground with oxen as we do, and
+at the season for sowing they have a holiday, on which they testify
+their joy by singing and dancing to the sound of all kinds of
+instruments of music. To ensure, as they conceive, a favourable produce,
+ten men are disguised like so many devils, who dance to the noise of
+their music; and after the festivities of the day, they pray to the
+devils to send them a plentiful crop.
+
+When any merchant of these idolaters is sore afflicted with disease and
+near death, then certain persons who are accounted physicians among them
+ore called to visit the person in extremity. These persons accordingly
+come to his house in the dead of night, dressed like devils, and
+carrying burning sticks in their mouth and hands. And there, with mad
+cries and boilings, and with the jangling of certain instruments, they
+make such a horrible noise in the ears of the sick man, as is enough to
+make a healthy man sick. This is the only remedy these pretended
+physicians offer to their sick persons, being merely to present to him
+when at the point of death the resemblance of him whom, worse than
+devils, they honour as the vicegerent of the deity. When any one hath so
+engorged himself with eating as to be sick at stomach, he takes the
+powder of ginger, mixed in some liquid to the consistence of syrup,
+which he drinks, and in three days he recovers his former health.
+
+Their bankers, brokers, and money-changers use weights and scales of
+such small size, that the box containing the whole does not exceed an
+ounce in weight, yet are they so delicate and just that they will turn
+with the weight of a hair. For trying the parity of gold, they use the
+touch-stone as with us, but with this addition: having first rubbed the
+gold to be tried on the touch-stone, they rub over the mark with a ball
+of some sort of composition resembling wax, by which all that is not
+fine gold disappears, and the marks or spots of gold remain, by which
+they have an exact proof of the fineness of the gold. When the ball
+becomes full of gold, they melt it in the fire, to recover the gold
+which it contains; yet are these men very ignorant even of the art which
+they profess. In buying or selling merchandise they employ the agency of
+brokers; so that the buyer and seller each employs a separate broker.
+The seller takes the buyer by the hand, under cover of a scarf or veil,
+where, by means of the fingers, counting from one to a hundred thousand
+privately, they offer and bargain far the price till they are agreed,
+all of which passes in profound silence.
+
+The women of this country suckle their children till three months old,
+after which they feed them on goats milk. When in the morning they have
+given them milk, they allow them to tumble about on the sands all foul
+and dirty, leaving them all day in the sun, so that they look more like
+buffaloe calves than human infants; indeed I never saw such filthy
+creatures. In the evening they get milk again. Yet by this manner of
+bringing up they acquire marvellous dexterity in running, leaping,
+swimming, and the like.
+
+There are many different kinds of beasts and birds in this country, as
+_lions_, wild boars, harts, hinds, buffaloes, cows, goats, and
+elephants; but these last are not all bred here, being brought from
+other places. They have also parrots of sundry colours, as green,
+purple, and other mixt colours, and they are so numerous that the rice
+fields have to be watched to drive them away. These birds make a
+wonderful chattering, and are sold so low as a halfpenny each. There are
+many other kinds of birds different from ours, which every morning and
+evening make most sweet music, so that the country is like an earthly
+paradise, the trees, herbs, and flowers being in a continual spring, and
+the temperature of the air quite delightful, as never too hot nor too
+cold. There are also monkeys, which are sold at a low price, and are
+very hurtful to the husbandmen, as they climb the trees, and rob them of
+their valuable fruits and nuts, and cast down the vessels that are
+placed for collecting the sap from which wine is made. There are
+serpents also of prodigious size, their bodies being as thick as those
+of swine, with heads like those of boars; these are four footed, and
+grow to the length of four cubits, and breed in the marshes[82]. The
+inhabitants say that these have no venom. There are three other kinds of
+serpents, some of which have such deadly venom, that if they draw ever
+so little blood death presently follows, as happened several times while
+I was in the country. Of these some are no larger than asps, and some
+much bigger, and they are very numerous. It is said that, from some
+strange superstition, the king of Calicut holds them in such veneration,
+that he has small houses or cottages made on purpose for them,
+conceiving that they are of great virtue against an over abundance of
+rain, and overflowing of the rivers. Hence they are protected by law,
+and any person killing one would be punished with death, so that they
+multiply exceedingly. They have a strange notion that serpents come from
+heaven, and are actuated by heavenly spirits, and they allege that only
+by touching them instant death insues. These serpents know the idolaters
+from the Mahometans, or other strangers, and are much more apt to
+attack the former than the latter. Upon one occasion, I went into a
+house where eight men lay dead, and greatly swollen, having been killed
+the day before by these serpents; yet the natives deem it fortunate to
+meet any of them in their way.
+
+[Footnote 82: From the description these must be crocodiles--E.]
+
+The palace of the king of Calicut contains many mansions, and a
+prodigious number of apartments, in all of which a prodigious number of
+lamps are lighted up every evening. In the great hall of the palace
+there are ten or twelve great and beautiful candlesticks of _laton_ or
+brass, of cunning workmanship, much like goodly fountains, the height of
+a man. In each of these are several vessels, and in every vessel are
+three burning candles of two spans long, with great plenty of oil. In
+the first vessel there are many lamps or wicks of cotton; the middle
+vessel, which is narrower, is also full of lamps; and the lowest vessel
+has also a great number of lights, maintained with oil and cotton wicks.
+All the angles or corners of these candlesticks are covered with figures
+of devils, which also hold lights in their hands; and in a vessel on the
+top of all the candlesticks there are innumerable cotton wicks kept
+constantly burning, and supplied with oil. When any one of the royal
+blood dies, the king sends for all the bramins or priests in his
+dominions, and commands them to mourn for a whole year. On their
+arrival, he feasts them for three days, and when they depart gives each
+of them five pieces of gold.
+
+Not far from Calicut, there is a temple of the idolaters, encompassed
+with water like an island, built in the ancient manner, having a double
+row of pillars much like the church of _St John de fonte_ at Rome, and
+in the middle of this temple is a stone altar, on which the people
+sacrifice to their idols. High up between the rows of pillars there is a
+vessel like a boat, two paces long, and filled with oil. Also, all round
+about the temple there are many trees, on which are hung an incredible
+number of lamps, and the temple itself is everywhere hung round with
+lamps, constantly burning. Every year, on the 25th of December, an
+infinite number of people resort to this temple, even from fifteen days
+journey all round the country, together with a vast number of priests,
+who sacrifice to the idols of the temple, after having washed in the
+water by which it is surrounded. Then the priests ascend to the boat
+which is filled with oil, from which they anoint the heads of all the
+people, and then proceed to the sacrifice. On one side of the altar,
+there is a most horrible figure of a devil, to whom the people lay
+their prayers, prostrate on the ground, and then depart each one to his
+home, believing that all their sins are forgiven them. On this occasion,
+the environs of the temple is considered a sanctuary, where no person
+may be arrested or troubled on any cause or pretence. I never saw so
+prodigious a number of people assembled in any one place, except in the
+city of Mecca.
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_Observations on various parts of India_.
+
+
+As there was no convenience for trade at Calicut, on account of war with
+the Portuguese, because the inhabitants in conjunction with the
+Mahometans had murdered 48 Portuguese while I was in that city, my
+faithful friend and companion _Cociazenor_ the Persian, formerly
+mentioned, thought it best for us to depart from thence. Indeed, in
+revenge for that cruel murder, the Portuguese have ever since waged
+cruel war upon Calicut, doing infinite injury to the city and people.
+Wherefore, departing from thence by way of a fine river, we came to a
+city named _Caicolon_[83], which is fifty leagues from Calicut. The
+inhabitants of this city are idolaters, but it is frequented by many
+merchants from different places, as its district produces excellent
+pepper. At this place we found certain merchants who were Christians,
+calling themselves followers of the apostle St Thomas. They observe
+lent, or the fast of forty days, as we do, and believe in the death and
+resurrection of Christ, so that they celebrate Easter after our manner,
+and observe the other solemnities of the Christian religion after the
+manner of the Greeks. They are commonly named John, James, Matthew,
+Thomas, and so forth, after the names of the apostles. Departing thence,
+after three days journey we came to another city named _Coulan_, about
+twenty leagues from _Caicolon_. The king of this place is an idolater,
+and has an army of 20,000 men always on foot. Coulan has an excellent
+harbour, and the surrounding country produces plenty of pepper, but no
+corn. By reason of the wars, we made no stay here, and on our way
+farther we saw people fishing for pearls, in the manner already
+mentioned when treating of Ormuz.
+
+[Footnote 83: From the distance and direction of the journey or voyage,
+this name may possibly be an error or corruption for Cranganore.--E.]
+
+The _city of Coromandel_ on the sea coast, is seven days sail from
+Coulan. It is very large, but without walls, and is subject to the king
+of Narsinga, being within sight of the island of Ceylon[84]. After
+passing the southern point of Cape Comorin, the eastern coast of India
+produces abundance of rice. This city is resorted to by vast numbers of
+Mahometan merchants from many distant countries, as from it they can
+travel to various great regions and cities of India. At this place I met
+with certain Christians, who affirm that the body of St Thomas the
+apostle is buried in a certain place about twelve miles from the city,
+where several Christians continually dwell to guard the body of the
+saint. They told me that these Christians are evil intreated by the
+natives, on account of the war carried on by the Portuguese against the
+people of the country; and that the Christians are often murdered in
+secret, that it may not be known to the king of Narsinga, who is in
+amity with the Portuguese, and greatly favours the Christians. Once on a
+time there was a conflict between the Christians and Mahometans, in
+which one of the Christians was sore wounded in the arm. He immediately
+repaired to the sepulchre of St Thomas, where, making his prayers and
+touching the holy shrine, he was immediately healed by miracle, upon
+which, as it is said, the king of Narsinga has ever since greatly
+favoured the Christians. At this place my companion sold much of his
+merchandize; but on account of war raging in the country, we determined
+to depart, and calling with much danger over a gulf 20 leagues broad, we
+came to the large island of _Zailon_, or Ceylon.
+
+[Footnote 84: From other circumstances in the text, particularly the
+neighbourhood of the place where St Thomas lay buried, the city here
+alluded to was probably Meliapour, which formerly stood not far from
+Madras, or the famous _Mahubulipoor_, the city of the great Bali, 16 or
+18 miles from the English settlement. The author, as on many other
+occasions, gives the name of the country to the capital. As to being in
+sight of Ceylon, this may be an error in transcription, and we ought to
+read that on the voyage between Coulan and the city of Coromandel; the
+author passed in sight of Ceylon.--E.]
+
+This island of Ceylon is 1000 miles in circumference, and is divided
+among four powerful kings; and because of the wars which then raged
+among them we could not remain long there to acquire any minute
+knowledge of the country and manners of its inhabitants. It contains
+many elephants. At the foot of a very long and high mountain there are
+found many precious stones called _piropi_ or rubies, which are got in
+the following manner. The adventurers purchase from the king a certain
+measure of the ground where these rubies are found, being about a cubit
+square, for which they pay five pieces of gold, yet under the condition
+that there shall always be an officer belonging to the king present
+while they are digging, that if any stone be found beyond the weight of
+ten carats it may be reserved for the king, all under that weight
+belonging to the adventurer. Not far from that mountain they find other
+precious stones, as jacinths, sapphires, and topazes, besides others.
+The soil of Ceylon produces the sweetest fruits I ever saw, especially
+_cloves_[85] and Assyrian apples of wonderful sweetness, and its other
+productions are similar to those of Calicut. The cinnamon-tree is much
+like our bay, only that the leaves are smaller and somewhat white. The
+true cinnamon is the bark of this tree, which is gathered every third
+year, and of which the island produces great quantities. When first
+gathered, it is by no means so sweet and fragrant as it becomes a month
+afterwards when thoroughly dry. A Mahometan merchant assured my
+companion, that on the top of a high mountain in the centre of this
+island, there is a certain cave or den where the inhabitants resort for
+devotion, in memory of our first parents, who, as they allege, lived in
+that place in continual penitence, after breaking the covenant with God,
+which is confirmed by the print of Adam's feet being still to be seen
+there above two spans in length. The inhabitants of this island are
+subject to the king of Narsinga, to whom they pay tribute. The climate
+is temperate and healthy, though situated so near the equinoctial line.
+The people are of a dark tawny colour, and wear slight cotton dresses,
+having the right arm bare, as is the universal custom of the Indians;
+the men being by no means warlike, neither have they the use of iron. In
+this island my companion sold the king a great deal of saffron and
+coral.
+
+[Footnote 85: Cloves are certainly not found in Ceylon.--E.]
+
+In three days sail we came to a city named _Paleachet_ or Pullicat,
+belonging to the king of Narsinga, a famous mart for rich commodities,
+and especially for jewels and precious stones brought from Ceylon and
+Pegu, and where likewise abundance of spices are sold. Many Mahometan
+merchants dwell in this city; and being received into one of their
+houses, we told him whence we came, and that we had brought saffron and
+coral for sale, with other merchandise, of which he was very glad. At
+this city wheat is scarce, but rice is to be had in great plenty; and in
+other respects the productions of the neighbouring country are much the
+same as at Calicut. But as the inhabitants were preparing for war, we
+departed from thence, and after thirteen days sail we arrived at the
+city of _Tarnasari_ or Tanaserim, a hundred miles distant.
+
+The city of Tanaserim is not far from the sea, well walled, seated on a
+fine plain, and has a famous port on a fine river that runs past its
+north side. The king is an idolater of great power, and is constantly at
+war with the kings of Narsinga and Bengal[86]. He is able to bring into
+the field an hundred thousand foot and as many cavalry, together with a
+hundred of the largest and finest elephants I ever saw. The weapons of
+his troops are swords, round bucklers, _peltes_, bows and arrows, and
+javelins or darts made of long reeds; they also use for defence cotton
+jacks wrought very hard and close quilted. The houses in their towns are
+built close together like those in Italy. This country produces wheat,
+cotton, silk of various kinds, Brazil wood, sundry kinds of fruit like
+those of Italy, with Assyrian apples, oranges, lemons, citrons, gourds,
+cucumbers, and many others. It has many animals both wild and tame.
+Among the former are oxen and cows, sheep, goats, hogs, and deer. The
+wild beasts are lions, wolves, catamountains, and musk cats or civets.
+In the woods are many peacocks and falcons, with popinjays or parrots,
+some of which are entirely white, while others are of seven different
+colours. There are plenty of hares and partridges, and several kinds of
+birds of prey larger than eagles. These birds are black and purple, with
+several white feathers intermixed, having yellow bills tipt beautifully
+with crimson, which are so large that the handles of swords are
+sometimes made of the upper mandible. Their cocks and hens are the
+largest I ever saw, and both the natives and the Mahometans who dwell
+there, take great delight in cock-fighting, on which they venture large
+sums. I have seen them fight for six hours, yet will they sometimes
+kill at the first stroke. Some of their goats are much larger and
+handsomer than ours, and of these the females have often four kids at
+one birth. So abundant are animals in this country, that twelve sheep
+may be bought for a single piece of gold worth about a pistole. Some of
+their rams have horns like a buck, and are much bigger and fiercer than
+ours. Their buffaloes are not so good as those of Italy. This coast has
+abundance of fine large fish, which are sold very cheap. The natives eat
+the flesh of all kinds of beasts except cows, and feed sitting on the
+ground without cloth or carpet, having their meat in wooden vessels
+artificially wrought. Their drink is sugar and water. Their beds are
+raised from the ground like ours. Their apparel is a cloak or mantle of
+cotton cloth, leaving one arm bare, but some wear inner vests or shirts
+of silk or cotton. All go bareheaded, except the priests, who have a
+kind of caps of two spans long on their heads, with a knob on the top
+about the size of an acorn, all sparkling with gold. They delight in
+ear-rings, but have neither rings nor bracelets. The complexion of the
+natives inclines towards fair, as the air is more temperate than at
+Calicut. In their tillage and reaping there is little difference from
+the manner of Italy.
+
+[Footnote 86: It is not easy to conceive by what means this could be, as
+Pegu, Ava, Aracan, and Tipera, intervene between Tanaserim and Bengal,
+and the bay of Bengal between Tanaserim and Narsinga or the Carnatic,
+none of the powers mentioned being possessed of any maritime force.--E.]
+
+When the king or any of the priests or great men die, their bodies are
+burnt on a large pile of wood, and all the while the assistants
+sacrifice to the devil. The ashes are then gathered into earthen jars
+like those of _Samos_, and are preserved or buried in their houses.
+While the bodies are burning, they cast into the fire all manner of
+perfumes, as wood of aloes, myrrh, frankincense, storax, sandal-wood,
+and many other sweet gums, spices, and woods: In the mean time also,
+they make an incessant noise with drums, trumpets, pipes, and other
+instruments, much like what was done of old by the Greeks and Romans,
+when deifying their departed great men. Likewise during these obsequies,
+there are 15 or 20 persons disguised like devils, continually walking
+round the fire with strange gesticulations. All the while the wife of
+the deceased stands alone beside the fire weeping and lamenting her
+loss. Fifteen days afterwards she invites all the kindred of her husband
+to a feast, when they go at night in a body to the place where the
+husband was burnt, the widow being dressed in all her jewels and richest
+attire, using on this occasion the help of her relations to decorate her
+person to the utmost. At this place a pit of some size is prepared and
+filled with dry reeds, covered over with a silk cloth to conceal the
+pit. Then a fire of sweet woods is kindled in the pit; and when all the
+guests have been heartily feasted, the widow having eaten a great
+quantity of _betola_ so as to make her mad or drunk, a great company of
+their musicians habited like devils, with burning sticks in their
+mouths, dance around the fire, and then make a sacrifice to the great
+devil _Deumo_. The widow then runs about like a person bereaved of her
+senses, dancing and rejoicing after a strange manner; then turning to
+the persons disguised like devils, she commends herself to their
+prayers, desiring them to make intercession for her with _Deumo_, that
+after this transitory life she may be received among his angels. When
+all the ceremonies are finished, she takes leave of all her kindred, and
+then lifting up her hands, and with a sudden loud cry, she leaps into
+the flaming pit, on which her kindred cover her up with faggots of sweet
+wood, and great quantities of pitch or bitumen, that she may be speedily
+consumed. If the widow refuses thus to sacrifice herself, she would be
+ever afterwards esteemed an evil woman, hated of all men, and even in
+danger of being slain by her own and her husband's kindred. The king is
+generally present at these ceremonies, which are not used at the death
+of ordinary people, but only for kings, priests, and great men.
+
+Justice in strictly administered in this country. Whoever kills a man is
+adjudged to die as at Calicut. Proof of giving or receiving is taken by
+writings or by witnesses, the governor of the city being chief judge. If
+any merchant stranger die there without children, all his goods fall to
+the king. When the king dies, he is succeeded in the throne by his
+children. The children of the natives divide equally among them all the
+possessions of their father. When any Mahometan merchant dies, their
+bodies are embalmed with many sweet spices and gums, and being placed in
+wooden coffins, they are buried with their faces towards Mecca. In their
+manner of writing they use parchment as we do, and not the leaves of
+trees as at Calicut. Their vessels are a kind of shallow brigantines or
+barks with flat bottoms, which draw very little water. Some also use
+foists having _double foreparts_[87], and two masts, but these have no
+decks. They have also some vessels of large burden, even carrying a
+thousand tons, in which they have several boats, and these are used when
+they go to Malacca for spices.
+
+[Footnote 87: This is not easily understood, unless it may mean that
+they are so built that they may sail with either end foremost.--E.]
+
+Having finished our business at Tanaserim, we packed up all our wares
+and embarked for Bengal, distant 700 miles from Tanaserim, whither we
+arrived in twelve days sailing. In fruitfulness and abundance of all
+things _this city_[88] may contend for eminence with any city in the
+world. The kingdom dependent upon this city is very large, rich, and
+populous, and the king, who is a Mahometan, maintains an army of 200,000
+men, including cavalry and infantry, with which he keeps up almost
+continual wars against the king of Narsinga. This country is so
+fruitful, that it possesses every thing conducive to the use of man,
+abounding in all kinds of beasts, wholesome fruits, and corn. It has
+spices also of several kinds, and vast abundance of cotton and silk. No
+other region in the world is comparable to this, so that there are many
+rich merchants. Every year there depart from hence fifty ships laden
+with cloths of cotton or silk, bound for the cities of Turkey, Syria,
+Arabia, Persia, Ethiopia, and India. There are also many merchant
+strangers, who buy precious stones from the natives. We found here many
+Christian merchants who were born, as they told us, in the city of
+_Sarnau_. They had brought to this great mart wood of aloes and _laser_,
+which latter yields the sweet gum called _laserpitium_, commonly called
+_belzoi_, or benzoin, which is a kind of myrrh. They bring also musk and
+several other sweet perfumes. These Christian merchants told us, that in
+their country were many Christian princes, subject to the great khan,
+who dwells in the city of _Cathay_[89]. The dress of these Christians
+was of camblet, very loose and full of plaits, and lined with cotton;
+and they wore sharp pointed caps of a scarlet colour, two spans high.
+They are white men, believing in one God with a trinity of persons, and
+were baptized after our manner. They believe in the doctrines of the
+evangelists and apostles, and write from right to left like the
+Armenians. They celebrate the birth and crucifixion of Christ, observe
+the forty days of lent, and keep the days of several saints. They wear
+no shoes, but have a kind of hose of silk on their legs, garnished with
+jewels. On their fingers they wore rings with stones of wonderful
+splendour. At their meat they use no tables, but eat lying on the
+ground, feeding upon flesh of all kinds. They affirmed also that there
+are certain Christian kings, whom they called _Rumi_, bordering on the
+Turks. When these Christians had seen the precious merchandise belonging
+to my companion, and particularly a great branch of coral, they
+earnestly advised him to accompany them to a certain city, whither they
+were bound, assuring him that by their procurement he should sell this
+to very great advantage, especially if he would take rubies in payment,
+by means of which he might easily gain 10,000 pieces of gold, assuring
+him that these stones were of much greater value in Turkey than in the
+east. And as they were ready to depart the very next day in a foist
+bound for the city of Pegu, where they meant to go, my companion
+consented to go with them, more especially as he expected to find there
+certain Persians his countrymen. Wherefore departing with these men from
+Bengal, and sailing across a great gulf to the south-east, we came at
+length to the city of Pegu, which is 1000 miles from Bengal.
+
+[Footnote 88: Here, as usual, the name of the country is given instead
+of the chief city, and we have no means even to guess what place is
+indicated, unless perhaps the _Satigan_ of other ancient relations,
+which appears to have been a city on the Hoogly river, or western branch
+of the Ganges.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 89: The capital of Cathay or northern China is Cambalu or
+Pekin, but it is difficult to make any thing of these Christian natives
+of _Sarnau_, or of their many Christian princes in Tartary; unless we
+may suppose Verthema to have mistaken the followers of the Lama of
+Thibet for Christians, as appears to have been done by some of the more
+ancient travellers in our early volumes.--E.]
+
+The city of Pegu is situated on the continent, not far from the sea, and
+upon a large river, by which merchandise are conveyed to or from the
+city very conveniently. The city is walled, and the houses are well
+built. The king and his subjects are idolaters, of a fairer complexion
+than those of Tanaserim, as the climate is rather cooler, but in dress,
+manner of living, and general appearance, in every respect resemble the
+inhabitants of that other city. The king has a vast army both of horse
+and foot, among whom are many native Christians, who have six pardaos of
+monthly pay. The beasts and fowls are much the same as at Calicut, so
+that they have abundance of animal food; and besides these they have a
+few elephants. This country produces the best timber I ever saw, either
+for building ships or houses; and has many reeds or canes of vast size,
+as large in diameter as the body of a man or a large barrel. Civet-cats
+or musk-cats are so plenty that three may be bought for one piece of
+gold. This city produces very little merchandise for purchase, except
+precious stones, and especially rubies, which are brought thither from
+another city named _Cassela_, thirty days journey towards the east,
+where also they procure other precious stones called _smaragdes_ or
+emeralds. On our arrival at Pegu, the king was at the distance of
+twenty-five days journey making war upon the king of Ava; but returned
+shortly afterwards in great triumph on account of a victory he had
+obtained over his enemy. Though this king is very rich and powerful, he
+does not use such pompous and magnificent ceremony as the king of
+Calicut, and is so affable and accessible, that even a child may come
+into his presence and speak to him; yet the rich jewels, pearls, and
+precious stones, especially rubies, with which he is decorated surpass
+all belief, and exceed the value of a great and flourishing city. His
+fingers are full of rings, his arms all covered with bracelets, and his
+legs and feet covered with similar ornaments, all gloriously beset and
+sparkling with the finest precious stones, and his ears so loaded with
+jewels that they hang down half a span. With all these splendid jewels
+he shines in a dark night as if with the sunbeams.
+
+At a favourable opportunity, the Christian merchants whom we had
+accompanied to Pegu gave intimation to the king of the valuable
+merchandise which my companion had brought for sale, and accordingly he
+sent for us on the following day, desiring my companion to bring the
+goods which he had to dispose of. Among other things he had two great
+branches of coral so large and beautiful as had not been seen before,
+which the king took great pleasure to look upon, and being astonished at
+these things, he asked the Christian merchants what men we were. They
+answered that we were Persians. The king then desired to know if we
+would sell these things. Upon this my companion desired the interpreters
+to say to the king, that they were all his own, and that he begged he
+would do him the honour to accept them freely. The king then said that
+he had been two years continually at war with the king of Ava, by which
+his treasure was consumed, but if my companion would bargain for them by
+way of exchange for precious stones, especially rubies, that he would
+content him for the coral. Then said my companion to the interpreters,
+"I pray you give the king to understand that I desire nothing else for
+my goods than the good-will of his majesty, and therefore that I humbly
+intreat he may take of my goods what pleases him best without money or
+payment of my kind." When the king heard this, he said that he had often
+been told the Persians were courteous and liberal men, but that he had
+never known any one so generous as this, and swore by the head of the
+devil, that he would try whether he or the Persian were most liberal.
+Upon this he ordered one of his attendants to bring him a casket of
+precious stones. This casket was a span and a half square, entirely full
+of rubies, the inside being divided into many compartments where the
+stones were sorted in order according to their sizes. When he had opened
+the casket, he ordered it to be placed before the Persian, desiring him
+to take of these precious rubies as many as he thought fit. But my
+companion, as if still more provoked to generosity by the liberality of
+the king, spoke to him in these words, "Most high and honourable
+sovereign! Such is my sense of your generous conduct to me, that I swear
+by the head of Mahomet and all the mysteries of his holy religion, that
+I freely and gladly give you all my goods. I do not travel in search of
+gain, but merely from a desire to see the world; in which I have not
+hitherto found any thing that has given me so much delight as the
+generous favour your majesty has now been pleased to shew me!" To this
+the king answered, "Will you yet contend with me in liberality?" Then
+selecting some rubies from all the compartments in the casket, out of
+which he took as many as he could hold in his hand, being two hundred
+rubies, he gave all these to the Persian with most royal munificence,
+and commanded him not to refuse. He gave also to each of the Christians
+two rubies worth not less than a thousand crowns; but those he gave to
+the Persian were reckoned worth a hundred thousand crowns. This king
+therefore certainly exceeds all the kings of the earth in munificence,
+both in manner and in richness of his gifts. About this time news came
+to Pegu that the king of Ava was advancing against him with a vast army,
+on which the king of Pegu went to meet him with one almost innumerable.
+
+Two days after the departure of the king from Pegu, we sailed towards
+the city of Malacca, where we arrived after a voyage of eight days. Not
+far from this city is a famous river named Gaza[90], the largest I ever
+saw, as it is 25 miles broad, and on the other side of it is seen the
+very large island of _Sumatra_, which by old writers was called
+_Taprobana_, and which is said by the inhabitants to be 500 miles in
+circuit[91]. Upon our arrival at _Malacca_, called by some _Melcha_, we
+were commanded to appear before the sultan, who is a Mahometan and
+tributary to the great sultan of _Chini_[92], because as is said the
+city was built about 80 years before on account of the convenience of
+its harbour, being one of the best in the ocean, and to which doubtless
+many ships resort for trade. This region is not everywhere fruitful, yet
+it has a sufficiency of corn and cattle, although scarce of wood. They
+have plenty of birds of the same kind with those at Calicut, but the
+popinjays or parrots are more beautiful. It produces sandal-wood and
+tin; likewise elephants, horses, sheep, kine, _pardalles_ or leopards,
+buffaloes, peacocks, and many other beasts and birds. The country has
+but few products of value, so that its only merchandise is spices and
+silk. The people are of a blackish ash-colour, and are clothed like the
+Mahometans of _Memphis_, otherwise called _Cayr_, _Alchayr_, or
+_Babylon_, on the Nile. They have very large foreheads, round eyes, and
+flat noses; and they are so much given to murder and robbery that it is
+dangerous to go abroad in the night, for they kill one another like
+dogs, and therefore merchants always remain on board their ships in the
+night. The people are fierce, barbarous, and unruly, insomuch that they
+will not submit to any governor, being altogether addicted to sedition
+and rebellion, and they always threaten to quit the country when their
+rulers endeavour to enforce order; which threat they are certainly able
+to execute, as their country is upon the sea-coast.
+
+[Footnote 90: It is obvious from the context, that this famous river of
+Gaza refers to the Straits of Malacca.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 91: The Taprobana of the ancients certainly was Ceylon.
+Sumatra is about 977 statute miles in length, and 200 in its greatest
+breadth, so that its circumference must exceed 2500 miles.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 92: By Chini in the text is probably meant _Acheen_ in
+Sumatra.--E.]
+
+We stopt no time at Malacca, but hiring a brigantine we sailed from
+thence for the island of Sumatra, and arrived at the city of _Pyder_ or
+Pedier about 80 miles from the mainland, where we found an excellent
+harbour. The island of Sumatra is governed by four kings, who with their
+people are all idolaters, and do not differ much in fashions, apparel,
+and manner of life from the inhabitants of Tanaserim. They are of a
+whitish colour with large foreheads, round eyes; and of _brasyll_?
+colour. They wear their hair long, have very broad and flat noses, and
+are of low mean stature. Their money is of gold, silver, and tin. On
+one side the gold coin has the head of a _devil_, and on the other a
+waggon or chariot drawn by elephants. The silver coin is similar, and
+ten of them passes for one of gold; but it requires 25 pieces of tin to
+equal one gold piece. In this country there are a greater number and
+finer elephants than in any other place I have been in. The people are
+by no means warlike, being entirely devoted to merchandise and gain;
+they use strangers with much kindness and hospitality, and justice is
+well administered. They have in this island great abundance of long
+pepper, which in their language is called _Molaga_, and is much longer
+and whiter than any other, yet very light and strong; it is sold by
+measure like corn, and is to be had in such plenty that twenty ships are
+loaded with it every year for _Cathay_, or China, where it is much in
+request on account of the coldness of the climate. The tree which
+produces this pepper has a larger body, with broader and flatter leaves
+than the pepper tree of Calicut. This island produces plenty of silk,
+which is the work of worms as with us; but there is another kind brought
+forth on the trees spontaneously without any care or labour, which is
+worse than the other. Here likewise grows the _laser_ tree, which
+produces the precious gum called _Laserpitium_ or _Belzoe_[93], as we
+were told by the inhabitants and merchants, but not having myself seen
+it I am unable to give any distinct account of this substance. Variety
+is always pleasing, and ingenious minds can never be satiated with
+contemplating the marvellous and diversified works of God in nature:
+Therefore, that the reader may take the more pleasure in these my
+writings, or at least may experience less tediousness in reading them, I
+have thought good to set down such things as I have seen more at large.
+It is therefore to be understood that the reason of no great quantity of
+_aloes_ or _Laserpitium_ being brought to us is because it comes from
+the farthest parts of the earth. There are three kinds or sorts of
+_aloes_, differing greatly in point of goodness. The most perfect is
+that called _Calampat_, which is not found in Sumatra, but is brought
+from the city of _Sarnau_ near which it grows, as we were told by our
+companions the Christian merchants formerly mentioned. There is another
+kind of _aloes_ called _Juba_ or _Luba_, brought to Sumatra by the
+before mentioned river or strait, but I know not from what country. The
+third kind is called _bochor_. These Christian merchants also told us
+that none of the finest and best kind of aloes is brought to us, because
+it comes from the kingdoms of _Cathay, Chini, Macym, Sarnau_, and
+_Gravay_, countries much richer than ours and more abounding in gold,
+having kings of great power and riches, who take great delight in sweet
+savours and use them much more than our western princes, owing to which
+circumstance the true and best kind of _aloes_ is worth ten crowns the
+pound even in the city of _Sarnau_.
+
+[Footnote 93: From similarity of names this appears to be _Benzoin_, or
+_benzoe_, sometimes called _gum benjamin_; yet from some circumstances
+in the sequel it may possibly indicate _camphor_.--E.]
+
+We were taught by the said Christian merchants our companions, how to
+know and distinguish the two kinds of the sweet gums called _aloes_ or
+_Laserpitium_. One of them had a certain portion of them both, and about
+two ounces of the best sort of aloes called _calampat_. Taking a piece
+of this in his hand and holding it close for about as long as one might
+take to rehearse the psalm _Miserere mei Deus_ three times, the aloes
+become hot, and on opening his hand gave out a savour of incredible
+sweetness, such as I had never experienced from any other substance. He
+took also about the size of a walnut of the common _laserpitium_ or
+_belzoe_, and half a pound of that which comes from the city of
+_Sarnau_, and putting both into different chaffing-dishes with burning
+coals in a close chamber, the small quantity of _belzoe_ far exceeded,
+in sweetness of flavour, the other which weighed half a pound, and would
+even have done so had it been two pounds weight[94]. In this region also
+is found the substance called _lacca_ from which a bright red colour is
+procured. This is the gum of a tree not much unlike our walnut tree[95].
+In Pedier I saw in one street not less than 500 bankers or exchangers of
+money; and at this place they make many curious works, such as fine
+baskets garnished with gold, which were sold for two crowns each[96].
+This is a famous mart to which innumerable merchants resort. The
+inhabitants wear mantles of silk, and _syndones_? made of cotton.
+
+[Footnote 94: It is impossible to determine from the account in the text
+what is meant by these articles of sweet scent under the names of
+_aloes, laserpitium, belzoe, calampat, luba_, and _bochor_; all of which
+seem to be different names of the same substance in different degrees of
+quality, and assuredly not the drugs now known by the name of _aloes_
+and _benzoin_. There is a sweet-scented wood in the east known by the
+name of _lignum aloes_, and possibly the sweet gum called _belzoe_ may
+have been extracted from it, or from that which produces the oil of
+rhodium.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 95: Gum lac, long believed the gum of a tree, is now known to
+be the work of insects, serving as a nidus for their young, in the same
+manner as bees wax is used by the honey bee.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 96: Perhaps filagree work?--E.]
+
+This country has plenty of wood fit for the construction of ships. Those
+which they build are of a strange fashion, named _gunchos_ or junks,
+having three masts with two stems and two sterns, having _gouvernals_ or
+rudders on both. "When sailing on the ocean and having given their sails
+to the wind, if it be afterwards needful to have more sails, not
+changing the first they go backwards without turning the ship and using
+only one mast[97]." The natives are most expert swimmers, and have a
+wonderful contrivance for producing fire in an instant. Their houses are
+very low and built of stone, and instead of tiles or thatch they are
+covered by the hide of a fish called _tartaruca_! which is found in that
+part of the Indian sea, which is so huge a monster that one of their
+skins which I saw weighed 330 pounds. There are likewise serpents in
+this country much larger than those at Calicut.
+
+[Footnote 97: This account of the mode of navigation is inexplicable, or
+at least obscure. Perhaps it is meant to express that they do not tack,
+but sail with either end foremost as suits the change of wind or
+direction of the ship.--E.]
+
+At this place our Christian friends, meaning to prosecute their own
+affairs, proposed to take their leave of us, but my Persian companion
+spoke to them in this manner; "Though my friends I am not your
+countryman, yet being all brethren and the children of Adam, I take God
+to witness that I love you as if you were of my own blood, and children
+of the same parents, and considering how long we have kept company
+together in a loving manner, I cannot think of parting from you without
+much grief of mind: Besides, even if you would leave me, I hope you will
+not desert this my companion who is of the same faith with yourselves."
+Then the Christians asked how I, being a Persian, happened to be of the
+Christian faith? To which my companion answered that I was no Persian,
+but had been bought at Jerusalem. On hearing the holy name of Jerusalem
+pronounced, the Christians lifted up their hands and eyes to heaven, and
+prostrating themselves thrice kissed the ground; then rising up, they
+asked what age I was of when brought from Jerusalem. Being told that I
+was then fifteen years of age, they said I might well remember my
+country; to which my companion answered that I did so assuredly, and had
+often given him much pleasure by the things I had told him concerning
+it. Then the merchants said that although they had long desired to
+return into their own country, which was far from thence, they would
+still bear us company to those places to which we proposed going.
+Preparing ourselves therefore for a voyage, we took shipping and in
+fifteen days we came to the island of _Bandan_ or Banda, whence nutmegs
+and mace are procured.
+
+In this voyage to the isle of Banda, we passed about twenty islands,
+some of them inhabited and some desert. This island of Banda is very
+low, savage, and barren, being about 100 miles in circuit. It has
+neither king nor governor, but is inhabited by a savage and brutal
+people, who live without law, order, or government, dwelling in low huts
+scarcely rising above the ground, and having a scanty shirt for their
+whole clothing. Their complexion inclines towards white, and they are of
+low stature: They go bareheaded and barefooted, with their hair hanging
+down, having broad round foreheads. They are idolaters, and worse even
+than the _Poliars_ and _Hyrana_[98] of Calicut, being of dull
+apprehension, little strength, and altogether barbarous in their
+manners. The soil bears no fruits except nutmegs, which grow on a tree
+very much like the peach in its branches and leaves. Before the nut
+becomes ripe, the mace expands round like a red rose; but when the nut
+ripens the mace closes and embraces the nut, and both are gathered
+together, which the natives do without rule or order, catch who catch
+may, all things being there in common. The tree yields fruit of its own
+nature without grafting or pruning, and it is so common and plentiful
+that twenty-six pound weight is sold for three _souses_ or half a
+_carline_ of the money which is current at Calicut. These islanders have
+no other order of justice than the law of nature, and live therefore
+without lawsuits or any of those contentions proceeding from _thine and
+mine_.
+
+[Footnote 98: These are named on a former occasion _Nirani_.--E.]
+
+Having tarried three days in Banda, my companion asked the Christian
+merchants where was the region which produces cloves, and they told him
+that these were found in an island named _Monoch_ or Molucca, six days
+sail from Banda. We therefore resumed our voyage, and came there in
+seven days. This island[99] is very narrow, yet is longer than Banda,
+and the inhabitants are even more barbarous than those of Banda, for if
+it were not for the human shape, they differ in nothing from brutes.
+Their colour is whiter, owing to the air being colder. This island
+produces cloves, which likewise grow on several small and desolate
+islands on its coast. The body of the tree resembles the box-tree, and
+has leaves almost like the bay tree. When the cloves are ripe, the
+inhabitants beat them off the tree with long canes, having previously
+laid matts under the tree to receive them. The soil is sandy, and so low
+under the horizon that the north star cannot be seen[100]. The price of
+cloves is about double that formerly mentioned for nutmegs, but they are
+sold by measure, as the natives are entirely ignorant of the use of
+weights.
+
+[Footnote 99: Instead of one island, the Moluccas are a group of
+islands, the largest of which, Gilolo, is about 200 miles from N. to S.
+On its western side are several small islands, the most important of
+which for the produce of cloves are Ternate and Tidore. Gilolo was
+probably the island visited by Verthema.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 100: A strange mode of expressing that Gilolo is immediately
+under the line.--E]
+
+As we were conversing together respecting our voyages, the Christian
+merchants addressed me as follows: "Dearly beloved friend, as by the
+grace of God we are come thus far in safety, we will, if it so please
+you go to visit one of the finest islands in the world, and so rich as
+we believe you have never seen. But we must go in the first place to
+another island named _Borneo_, where we shall procure a larger vessel,
+as we have to cross a deep and rough sea." My companion then desired
+them to do as they thought proper. Therefore hiring a larger foist, we
+directed our voyage to that island, sailing to the southward both by day
+and night, and passing our time in much pleasant conversation. The
+merchants, among other things, asked me many questions respecting the
+ceremonies and solemnities of the Christian religion as used among us in
+Europe. And when I made mention of the _Veronica_ or _Vernacle_ of the
+face of Christ[101], and of the heads of St Peter and St Paul, the
+chiefest of the apostles, they told me secretly that if I would go with
+them, I should become a great man in their country by my knowledge of
+these divine things. But being deterred by the length of the journey,
+and fearful that I might never be able to get home, I refused to
+accompany them. At length we came to Borneo, which is 200 miles from
+Molucca and is somewhat bigger[102] and as low under the horizon. The
+inhabitant are idolaters of a sharp wit and decent manner of life. Their
+complexion inclines towards fair. They do not all dress alike, as some
+wear cotton shirts, while others have camblet mantles, and others wear
+pointed caps of a red colour. They are under regular government and
+submit to laws, which are righteously administered. This island yields
+great quantities of _camphor_, which I was told was the gum of a tree;
+but I dare not affirm this for fact, as I have never seen the way in
+which it is procured.
+
+[Footnote 101: The Veronica among the Catholics, is the handkerchief
+with which our Saviour is supposed to have wiped his face during his
+passion, which they allege took from his bloody sweat a miraculous
+impression or portrait of his countenance.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 102: Instead of being only _somewhat_ larger than Gilolo,
+Borneo is perhaps the largest island in the world, except New Holland,
+being about 880 English miles in its greatest diameter from S.W. to N.E.
+and 550 in the opposite direction at the widest.--E.]
+
+At Borneo my companion hired a light bark for 100 pieces of gold, and
+having laid in provisions for the voyage, we directed our course for the
+great island of _Gyava_, or Java, to which we came in five days, sailing
+towards the south. Our pilot used the mariners compass with loadstone,
+and the sea chart as ours do. Observing that the north star could not be
+seen, my companion asked the Christian merchants in what manner they
+guided their course in those seas. To this the pilot made answer, that
+in navigating these southern seas, they were particularly guided by five
+stars, and one other particular star which was directly opposite thee
+north star, and that they also used the loadstone, which always points
+to the north. He said moreover, that beyond the island of Java there was
+a certain people who were antipodes to them of European Sarmatia,
+inhabiting a cold climate, and as near to the antarctic pole as Sarmatia
+is to the arctic, as was evident by the shortness of their day, which
+was only four hours long in winter[103], in which conversation we took
+much delight.
+
+[Footnote 103: This pilot must have been acquainted with the southern
+extremity of South America, or must have built this information on
+hypothesis, as there is no known inhabited land of this description to
+the South of Java--E.]
+
+Proceeding on our voyage for five days, we came to the great island of
+Java, in which there are many kingdoms and peoples, all idolaters, but
+of sundry manners and customs. Some worship the sun, others the moon,
+some consider cows as their gods, while others worship all day whatever
+they first meet in the morning. This island produces silk, which grows
+spontaneously in the woods, and has the finest emeralds in the world, as
+also great plenty of gold and copper. The soil is as productive of corn
+and fruits as that of Calicut, and has an abundance of flesh. The
+inhabitants are an honest and fair-dealing people, much of the same
+stature and colour with Europeans, but with larger foreheads, very large
+eyes of a brazil or red colour, with flat noses, and wear their hair
+long. It has a great number of birds different from ours, except
+peacocks, turtle-doves, and crows, which are the same as we have. In
+their dress, the natives wear mantles or cloaks of cotton, silk, or
+camblet, always having one arm bare. They have no defensive armour, as
+they are hardly ever at war; but when they go to sea they use bows and
+arrows, and likewise poisoned arrows made of reeds, which they blow from
+long hollow canes, and the poison with which these arrows are infected
+is so virulent that death certainly follows from the slightest wound.
+They have no kind of fire-arms. They eat all kinds of flesh, fish, or
+fruit, as they please or can procure.
+
+Some of the natives of this island are so very barbarous, that when
+their parents become feeble from age, so as to be useless to themselves
+and others, they bring them into the public market and sell them to the
+cannibals who eat human flesh, who immediately upon buying them, kill
+and eat them. Likewise when any young person falls into disease of which
+they do not expect he shall recover, his kinsmen sell him in the same
+manner to the cannibals. When my companion expressed his horror at this
+barbarous and savage practice, a certain native merchant observed, "That
+no sacrifice could redeem the sins of the Persians, who gave the flesh
+of their dead to be eaten by the worms." Abhorring these savage manners,
+we returned to our ship not willing to tarry longer in that island.
+While we were there, the Christian merchants, who were ever desirous to
+shew us strange things which we might relate at our return to our own
+country, made us remark that the sun at noon-day was to the north of us,
+which as they said is always the case in the month of July. I must
+acknowledge however, that I hardly remember these things distinctly, as
+I had then almost forgot the names of our months. At this island my
+companion bought two fine emeralds for 1000 pieces of gold, and
+likewise two children who were eunuchs, for two hundred pieces, as there
+are in that country certain merchants who deal solely in these young
+eunuchs.
+
+After remaining fifteen days in Java, being weary of the barbarous
+manners of the inhabitants, and of the coldness of the country at that
+season of the year, we determined to prosecute our voyage back to India,
+as there were no other regions in these eastern parts worth seeing.
+Wherefore, hiring a light bark, we departed from thence, and having
+sailed fifteen days to the north-west, we came to the city of Malacca,
+where we remained three days. At this place we took our leave of the
+Christian merchants, with sorrowful minds and many friendly embraces. Of
+this separation I was sore grieved, and had I been a single man without
+wife and children[104], I certainly would never have separated from such
+dear friends. Leaving them therefore at Malacca, they remained at that
+place, whence they said they meant shortly to return to the city of
+_Sana_[105]. My Persian companion and I went on board a foist, in which
+we returned to Coromandel. While on this voyage the pilot informed us
+that there were about seven thousand small islands in the eastern sea,
+beyond Sumatra and Java. While at Malacca my companion bought as much
+spices, perfumes of various kinds, and silk, as cost him 5000 pieces of
+gold. We were fifteen days on our voyage to Coromandel, and remained
+there twenty days. Hiring another foist we sailed thence to the city of
+Coulan, where we found twenty-two Portuguese Christians. Fearing they
+might seize me as a spy, I began to contrive how I might make my escape
+from thence; but as there were many Mahometans there who knew that I had
+been on the pilgrimage to Mecca, I changed my purpose, and we soon
+afterwards went to Calicut by way of the river, which took us twelve
+days.
+
+[Footnote 104: This oblique insinuation of having a wife and children,
+is rather contradictory to several circumstances in the early part of
+the itinerary of Verthema.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 105: This is probably a mistake for _Sarnau_, whence the
+Christians are said to have come.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Continuation of the Author's Adventures, after his Return to Calicut._
+
+
+After so many long and dangerous voyages and peregrinations, in which we
+had partly satisfied our desire of travel, and were partly wearied by
+the many inconveniencies we had undergone, we began to consider of the
+best means for returning to our native country. I will therefore briefly
+relate what happened to me by the way, that other men, taking example by
+my travels, may know better how to conduct themselves in like
+situations, if similar inclinations should move them to undertake such
+voyages. In Calicut we found two Christians of Milan in Italy, who had
+come to India with licence from the king of Portugal, on purpose to buy
+precious stones. The names of these men were John Maria and Peter
+Anthony. I was more rejoiced at the sight of these men than I can
+express, and knowing them to be Christians by their fair complexions,
+though they could not know me as I was naked like the natives, I
+immediately spoke to them, informing them that I also was a Christian,
+and their countryman. Then, taking me kindly by the hand, they brought
+me to their house, where, for joy of this unexpected meeting, we could
+scarcely satisfy ourselves with tears, embraces, and kisses, for it
+seemed a strange thing to me thus to find men who spoke my own language,
+and even to speak it myself. They told me that they were in great favour
+with the king of Calicut, yet anxiously wished to get hack to their
+native country, but knew not how, as they had fled from the Portuguese,
+and durst not run the risk of falling into their hands, having made many
+pieces of great cannon and other ordnance for the king of Calicut, and
+that now the Portuguese fleet would shortly be there. When I proposed to
+endeavour to go to Cananore, and solicit their pardon from the
+Portuguese admiral, they said that could not be looked for, as they were
+well known to many of the kings and princes between Calicut and
+Cananore, who were friendly to the Portuguese, and who would certainly
+intercept them, as they had made above 400 guns, great and small, and
+could never hope for pardon. By this I could perceive how fearful a
+thing it is to have an evil conscience, and called to remembrance the
+saying of the poet:--
+
+"Multa male timeo, qui feci multa proterve."
+
+That is to say, "I fear much evil because I have done much." These men
+had not only made many pieces of artillery for the infidels, to the
+great injury of the Christians, in contempt of Christ and his holy
+religion, but had also taught the idolaters both how to make and use
+them. While I remained in Calicut, I saw them give a mould to the
+idolaters, by which they might cast brass cannon of sufficient bigness
+to receive a charge of 105 _cantaros_ or measures of powder. At this
+time also there was a Jew in Calicut who had built a handsome
+brigantine, in which were four large iron cannons; but Providence soon
+after gave him his due reward, as he was drowned while bathing in the
+river. To return to the two Italians: God knows how earnestly I
+endeavoured to persuade them never to make any more guns or artillery
+for the infidels, in contempt of God, and to the great detriment of our
+most holy faith. At my words, tears fell from the eyes of Peter Anthony;
+but John Maria, who perhaps was not so anxious to return home, said it
+was all one to him whether he died in India or Italy, and that God only
+knew what was decreed for him. Within two days after I returned to my
+companion, who had wondered what was become of me, fearing that I was
+either sick, or had died, or run away. I told him that I had been all
+night in the temple, that he might not suspect my great intimacy with
+the Christians.
+
+While I remained in the lodging of my companion, there came to him two
+Persian merchants from the city of Cananore, saying that they had bad
+news to tell him, as there had arrived twelve Portuguese ships, which
+they had actually seen. Then asked he what manner of men were these
+Portuguese? To this the Persians answered, that they were Christians,
+armed in cuirasses of bright iron, and had built an impregnable fortress
+at Cananore. Then turning to me, my companion asked what kind of people
+these were. To this I answered, that they were a nation of wicked
+people, entirely given up to robbery and piracy on the seas: And I can
+truly say, that he was not so sorry for these news as I was rejoiced at
+their arrival. After the rumour spread of the arrival of the Portuguese,
+I began to be in fear for myself, and to consider what was best to be
+done to ensure my safety; and considering that nothing could be easier
+among these ignorant people than to gain a reputation of holiness by
+hypocrisy, I used to lurk about the temple all day without meat, as all
+the people thought, but in the night I had my fill in the house of the
+two Milanese. By this device, every one took me for a saint or holy
+person, so that in a few days I could go about all the city without
+being suspected. To help me in this assumed character, a rich Mahometan
+merchant of Calicut happened to fall sick, having his belly so
+constipated that he could get no ease; and as he was a friend of my
+Persian companion, and the disease daily increased, he at last asked me
+if I had any skill in physic. To this I answered, that my father was a
+physician, and that I had learnt many things from him. He then took me
+along with him to see his friend the sick merchant, and being told that
+he was very sick at the head and stomach, and sore constipated, and
+having before learnt that he was a great eater and drinker, I felt his
+pulse, and said that he was filled with choler or black bile, owing to
+surfeiting, and that it was necessary he should have a glyster. Then I
+made a glyster of eggs, salt, and sugar, together with butter and such
+herbs as I could think of upon a sudden; and in the space of a day and a
+night I gave him five such glysters, but all in vain, for his pains and
+sickness increased, and I began to repent me of my enterprise. But it
+was now necessary to put a good face on the matter, and to attempt some
+other way, yet my last error seemed worse than ever. Endeavouring to
+inspire him with confidence, I made him lie grovelling on his belly,
+and, by cords tied to his feet, I raised up the hinder part of his body,
+so that he rested only on his breast and hands; and in this posture I
+administered to him another glyster, allowing him to remain in that
+position for half an hour. On beholding this strange mode of practice,
+my Persian friend asked me, if that was the manner of treating sick
+people in my country, to which I answered that it was, but only in cases
+of extremity; on which he observed with a smile, that he believed it
+would certainly relieve him one way or other. In the mean time, the sick
+man cried out in his own language, "It is enough, it is enough, for my
+soul now departeth." We comforted him as well as we could, desiring him
+to have patience yet a little longer; and almost immediately his belly
+was loosened, and he voided like a gutter. We then let him down, and he
+continued to discharge a prodigious quantity, so that shortly the pain
+of his head and stomach left him, and his fever was assuaged, which gave
+us all great joy. By this adventurous cure, and my counterfeit
+holiness, I grew into great credit, and when my patient offered me ten
+pieces of gold as my reward, I would only accept two, which I gave away
+immediately among the poor.
+
+These silly people believed implicitly in my hypocrisy, which I shewed
+in a constrained gravity of countenance and deportment, and by
+forbearing openly from eating flesh, insomuch that all thought
+themselves happy to have me at their houses, or to kiss my hands and
+feet. The report also of my companion, that he had met with me first at
+Mecca, where I had gone to see the body of the holy prophet Mahomet,
+greatly increased among the Mahometans the opinion of my sanctity. But
+all this while, I used to resort secretly in the night to the house of
+the Milanese Christians; and learning from them that the twelve
+Portuguese ships were arrived at Cananore, I thought that it was now a
+favourable opportunity for me to escape. I remained, however, for seven
+days more, learning every thing I could respecting the preparations that
+were making by the king of Calicut and his people against the
+Portuguese, in regard to their army, artillery, and every thing relative
+to the war. But, before I speak of the manner of my departure, it may be
+proper to say something of the religious practices of the Mahometans.
+
+For calling the people to the mosque, their priests and other ministers,
+of whom there are a great number, ascend to the highest tower of the
+temple, where they sound three or four brass trumpets instead of bells,
+and then call to the people in a loud voice to come to prayers. Then
+stopping one ear with their finger, they call out in their own language,
+_Alla u eccubar, etc._ That is to say, "God is great! God is great! Come
+to the temple of the great God! Come pray to the great God! God is
+great! God is great! God was! God is! Mahomet, the messenger of God,
+shall arise!" They even invited me to the mosque, and desired me to pray
+to God for the Mahometans; and this I did outwardly, but with quite a
+different meaning from them. They have certain daily and stated prayers
+as we have, in which they call upon God as their father, and they even
+vouchsafe to name the blessed Virgin Mary; but they always wash before
+prayers. Standing all in order, after the priest has prayed, the whole
+people pray in their own language.
+
+At this time I feigned myself sick, and finding some occasion or pretext
+for going to Cananore, I advertised my companion thereof, who gave me
+his consent, saying that he would shortly follow me to that place, and
+in the meantime gave me letters recommending me to a friend and
+countryman of his, a rich merchant at that place, desiring him to give
+me kind entertainment for his sake. The day before my departure, I made
+the before-mentioned Milanese Christians privy to my intentions, and my
+companion made me join company with two other Persian merchants who were
+going to Cananore, as there were then in Calicut many merchants of
+Persia, Syria, and Turkey. Therefore, on the 1st of December, having
+hired a light bark, I and my two companions set sail; but had hardly got
+from shore an arrow-flight, when four of the _nairs_ of the king's guard
+called to the pilot of our vessel, and ordered him, in the king's name,
+to come to land. When the nairs understood who we were, they asked the
+Persians why they carried me along with them, without licence from the
+king? Then the Persians said, that this was a holy man, who meant to
+accompany them to Cananore. The nairs answered, that they knew I was a
+person who had wrought miracles; but as I could speak the language of
+the Portuguese, it was to be feared that I might betray their secrets to
+the enemy, and give them notice of the navy and army which had been
+prepared at Calicut against them, and therefore they strictly enjoined
+the pilot to carry us no farther. He accordingly obeyed their orders,
+and left us on the shore. It was then proposed by one of the Persians
+that we should return to Calicut, on which I advised him to take heed
+how he did so, as he would be in danger of losing all his silks, if it
+should be discovered that he had not paid the king's custom. Then he
+asked my advice as to what I thought was best for us to do in the
+present exigency, and I advised that we should travel along the shore,
+in hopes of finding some other bark for our purpose. They agreed to this
+proposal, and we accordingly travelled twelve miles along the shore, our
+slaves carrying our baggage; and I leave any judicious person to
+conceive the terror I was in, during this time, of being stopt by the
+servants of the king of Calicut. At length, by good providence, we found
+a poor fisherman, who agreed to carry us in his boat to Cananore, where
+we arrived in safety late at night. We went immediately to wait upon the
+Persian merchant, to whom I had letters of recommendation from my
+companion. Their tenor was as follows: That he should receive me into
+his house, and entertain me in a friendly manner, till his own arrival,
+and that whatever friendship was shewn me should be considered as done
+to himself, as I was a holy man, and united with him in the strictest
+friendship. Immediately on reading this letter, the merchant laid his
+hand on his head, and bid me welcome, swearing by his head that I was in
+safety, and caused a good supper to be set before us. After supper, the
+Persians and I took a walk by the sea side, and we soon came to where
+the Portuguese ships were lying at anchor. I am utterly unable to
+express the joy I felt on seeing these ships, but which I took care
+should not be observed by my companions. In our walk, I observed where
+the Portuguese had built their fortress, and determined within myself to
+go there as soon as possible.
+
+Next day, finding a fit opportunity, I went towards the Portuguese
+fortress, which is not above four furlongs from the city of Cananore,
+and chanced to meet two Portuguese by the way, at whom I inquired in
+Spanish if that were the fortress of the Portuguese. They asked if I
+were a Christian? and having answered that I was, they demanded to know
+whence I came? I told them that I was from Calicut, on which they said
+they would immediately shew me the way to their governor, whose name was
+Lorenzo[106], son to the viceroy. They accordingly brought me before
+him, and when I was come into his presence, I fell down on my knees, and
+entreated him in all humility, for the sake of Christ, to whom I was
+consecrated in baptism, that he would have compassion upon me, and
+deliver me out of the hands of these infidel dogs. When it was noised
+about in the city that I had escaped to the Christians, there began a
+stir and mutiny among the people, upon which the governor commanded his
+officers and men to put their artillery and all things in readiness,
+lest the people in their sudden rage should make any attempt against the
+fortress; but every thing was speedily pacified. After this, the
+governor took me by the hand into a hall or room by ourselves, and
+demanded to know what the king and people of Calicut were preparing to
+do against the Christians. I informed him of all things as far as I
+knew, having diligently inquired into all their preparations and
+designs. When I had thus informed the governor of all I knew, he
+appointed a galley commanded by one Joam Serano to carry me to the
+viceroy, who was then at Cochin.
+
+[Footnote 106: Don Francisco de Almeyda was viceroy of Portuguese India
+from 1507 to 1510, both inclusive, and his son Lorenzo made a
+conspicuous figure on several occasions under his father. It is true
+that Verthema appears in the present journal to have returned from India
+to Europe in the end of 1506 or beginning of 1507; but the dates of the
+present journal are exceedingly few and vague, and the incidents which
+it relates could hardly have occurred in so short a period as between
+the commencement of 1503 and close of 1506.--E.]
+
+The viceroy received me very favourably, and then I gave him an account
+of all the warlike preparations at Calicut. After this I humbly implored
+pardon for the two Italians, Peter Anthony and John Maria, who had made
+artillery for the infidel princes, declaring that they were desirous to
+return to the Christians, and would do them good service, for that all
+they had hitherto done at Calicut was by constraint, and that all they
+asked was a safe conduct and money to defray their charges. The viceroy
+listened to my petition, and three days afterwards he sent me back to
+Cananore with letters to his son, commanding him to deliver me as much
+money as might suffice for the Christian spies at Calicut. At Cananore,
+I procured an idolater, who from poverty had been forced to pawn his
+wife and children, and engaged him to carry a letter from me to the two
+Milanese at Calicut, informing them that the viceroy had granted their
+pardon and safe conduct, with money for their charges. I desired them to
+make no one privy to their intended departure, and particularly not to
+let it be known to their slaves or concubines, each of them having a
+concubine, a child, and a slave, and to leave all their goods behind,
+except things of great value, such as gold coin and precious stones.
+They had a very fine diamond of 32 carats, reckoned to be worth 35,000
+crowns; a pearl of 24 carats; 2000 rubies, some of which weighed one
+carat, and others a carat and half; upwards of 60 bracelets, garnished
+with many fine jewels; and about 1500 pieces of gold coin. But in
+consequence of their covetousness, while they sought to save all they
+lost all, and their lives to boot; for, not content with carrying off
+all these riches, they would needs carry along with them, in spite of
+the advice I sent, four guns, three monkeys, two musquets, and two of
+those wheels on which precious stones are polished. The attempt to carry
+off these bulky articles was the cause of their destruction, as one of
+their slaves gave notice to the zamorin or king of Calicut of what was
+going on. The zamorin would not at first believe the information,
+having conceived a good opinion of their fidelity, yet sent four of his
+nairs to examine into the truth of the information. But the slave,
+perceiving that the zamorin seemed inclined to deal favourably with
+them, went to the cady or chief priest of the Mahometans, and told him
+all that he had said to the zamorin, adding that the two Christians had
+disclosed all their secrets to the Portuguese. The eddy immediately
+convened a council of all the Mahometan merchants, willing them to give
+an hundred pieces of gold to the _king of Gioghi_[107], who was then at
+Calicut, and to speak to him in the following terms: "It is not unknown
+to you, most noble prince, that when your majesty came to this place
+some years ago, we received you in a more honourable manner than we are
+now enabled to do. The change in our behaviour is not owing to any want
+of good will towards you, but is occasioned by the great and manifold
+injuries which we have sustained, and are daily suffering from our
+mortal enemies the Christians. We have at the present moment a notable
+example of this in two Christian traitors now residing in this city, who
+have disclosed all our secrets to the Portuguese; and therefore we most
+humbly petition that you would be pleased to accept from us an hundred
+pieces of gold, and to issue your commands that these traitorous
+Christians shall be slain."
+
+[Footnote 107: This king of _Gioghi_ was probably the chief bramin in
+the southern part of India, a species of patriarch or pope of the
+braminical idolatry, similar to the king of _Joga_, formerly mentioned,
+in Guzerat, in these travels of Verthema. In a future part of our
+collection we shall have a more favourable opportunity of explaining the
+hierarchy of the Hindoos.--E.]
+
+When this oration was repeated to the _king of Gioghi_, he immediately
+accepted the gift, and consented to the prayer of the petition, and
+appointed two hundred of his followers to put the Milanese to death.
+These men, that they might not be suspected by the devoted Christians,
+came in small bodies to their house, only ten at a time, as if to demand
+their customary reward. But on seeing so great a number of men assembled
+about their house, the Christians began to suspect that they were in
+search of something beyond their usual reward or offering, wherefore
+taking to their arms, they so bravely defended themselves, that they
+slew six of the assailants and wounded forty: But at length some of the
+_Gioghi_ or Jogues, shot them both with arrows from cross-bows, one
+being sore wounded in the head and the other in the body; and as soon as
+they saw them fall, they broke into the house and cut their throats.
+Then taking the warm blood into the palms of their hands, they drank it
+up, using the most contumelious expressions against the Christians.
+After this murder, the concubine of John Maria came to Cananore with her
+young son, whom I bought of her for eight pieces of gold, and had him
+baptized by the name of Lorenzo, as he was christened on the festival of
+St Laurence. But he died within a year afterwards of the lues venerea,
+which disease has been spread over almost the whole world, as I have
+seen many infected with it 400 miles beyond Calicut. It is there called
+_pua_, and they affirm that it was not seen there till about seventeen
+years before; yet it is there more grievous and destructive than with us
+in Italy.
+
+
+SECTION XI.
+
+_Account of a memorable Battle between the Mahometan Navy of Calicut and
+the Portuguese_.
+
+
+On the 4th of March 1506, intelligence was received at Cananore of the
+death of the two Milanese Christians at Calicut, and on the same day the
+Calicut fleet set sail from the cities of _Pavan? Capagot? Pandaram_?
+and _Trompatam_? It consisted of 208 vessels [108], of which 84 were
+ships of considerable size and burden, and the rest were rowing vessels
+which are called _paraos_. This great fleet was manned with a prodigious
+number of Mahometans richly dressed in purple silk and cotton, also with
+high pointed caps after their fashion of the same colour, lined with
+silk, having their arms decked with many bracelets, and embroidered
+gloves on their hands. For weapons, they had Turkish bows, swords,
+lances, _peltes_[109], and all kind of guns made in our manner. When we
+saw their fleet proceeding in order and well appointed, it seemed afar
+off like a great wood, so numerous were the masts, yet were we in sure
+belief that God would give us the victory over the blasphemers of his
+holy name, and that we should prevail against the idolaters and
+Saracens, the ancient enemies of the religion of the blessed Jesus.
+Therefore the valiant knight our governor, Don Lorenzo, the son of Don
+Francisco de Almeyda, viceroy of India, who had the supreme command of
+twelve Portuguese ships, with the assistance of the admiral, assembled
+all the Portuguese soldiers and mariners by sound of trumpet, and spoke
+to them after this manner: "Dear friends, and brethren in one God and in
+one faith in the Lord Jesus Christ, it is now time for us to consider
+that our Lord spared not to give his precious body unto death for our
+sakes; wherefore it is our bounden duty to spend our lives in defence of
+his glory and of our holy faith, assuring ourselves of victory over
+these infidel dogs, who are hated of God, being the progeny of the
+devil. Now, therefore, fighting in his holy name and under the banner of
+his cross, shew yourselves valiant, as you have now a fair opportunity
+to gain eternal fame in defending the glorious cause of your Lord and
+Saviour. Therefore, along with me, raising our hearts to God, and our
+arms with force and courage against the enemy, in the name of the Lord,
+let us manfully give the onset." When Don Lorenzo had spoken these
+words, the priest went up to the highest part of the ship, holding in
+his hands the picture of Christ nailed to the cross, which he exposed to
+the view of all the soldiers, and earnestly exhorted them to remember
+the commands of God, and the holy faith in which they were consecrated
+by baptism, having no doubt that all their sins should be forgiven to
+those who fell in the cause of God. Then blessing them in the name of
+the Lord, he pronounced the absolution and forgivenness of their sins.
+This exhortation of the priest so moved all our hearts, that tears of
+joy ran from our eyes, and we were all animated with a desire of dying
+in the holy cause.
+
+[Footnote 108: According to the account of this great armament formerly
+given in the History of the Portuguese Transactions in India, the fleet
+of the Mahometans and Zamorin on this occasion consisted of 260 paraos,
+60 of which exceeded the size of the armed ships then used in India by
+the Portuguese. The action between the Portuguese and their enemies is
+there stated to have been in 1508.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 109: Perhaps cross-bows, or it may probably signify leathern
+targets, or shields made of _pelts_ or skins.--E.]
+
+In the mean time the Mahometan fleet made sail towards us, and on the
+same day our admiral went to reconnoitre their fleet with two foists,
+and passing between two of their largest ships discharged his ordnance
+on both sides, on purpose to try the strength of those ships in which
+they placed the greatest confidence. But nothing of any importance
+occurred this day. Next day the enemy made sail towards Cananore, and
+sent a message to our commanders, saying, that if they were permitted to
+pursue their voyage they would not attack us. To this it was answered,
+that the Christians had not forgotten the perjury and violated faith of
+the Mahometans, when they prevented the Christians from passing that way
+on a former occasion, and had slain 47 Portuguese, and robbed them of
+4000 pieces of gold: Wherefore, they might proceed at their peril, and
+should learn of what spirit and reputation in arms the Christians were
+composed. Then said the Mahometans, "Mahomet will defend us and confound
+the Christians." Then with great fury they assaulted us all at once,
+thinking to have forced their way through our fleet, as they were only
+10 miles from Cananore. Our admiral intentionally allowed them to draw
+near until they were right over-against Cananore, when he intended to
+set upon them with all his force, that the rajah or king of Cananore
+might be a witness of the valour of the Christians. When the trumpeter
+of the admiral sounded the charge as a signal of battle, the admiral
+immediately assaulted two of the largest ships of the enemy, casting his
+grappling irons and chains, that he might fight them hand to hand. After
+throwing our grapplings three times in vain, they caught hold the fourth
+time, on which the Christians boarded the greatest ship, and made such
+havoc that the whole crew of 600 Mahometans were slain, not one escaping
+or being made prisoner. Encouraged by this success, the admiral
+immediately grappled another large ship which had chained itself to one
+of the Christian foists; this ship was likewise taken and sunk, with the
+loss of 500 Mahometans. Discouraged by this defeat, the Mahometans
+assailed our twelve foists with all their force, _and carried them
+away_. On this emergency the captain of the galley, Joam Serano, shewed
+the utmost gallantry, as he fiercely assaulted in his single galley
+those ships of the enemy which had _carried away_ our foists, and made
+such prodigious slaughter among the Mahometans as seemed quite
+incredible, so that he recovered all the foists, and sunk two other
+Mahometan ships. The conflict continued with unabated fury from morning
+till the darkness of the night parted the combatants, and God so
+favoured the Christians that few of them were slain, though many were
+wounded.
+
+I must not omit to notice the zeal and courage displayed by Simon
+Martin, the captain of one of our ships, on the following occasion in
+this battle. It so happened that the brigantine in which I was, was at
+one time somewhat parted from the rest of our ships, on which four ships
+of the enemy assailed us all at once; and 150 of the Mahometans having
+boarded our vessel, constrained us to flee to the poop for safety. While
+we were in this extreme danger, Simon Martin leapt on board our vessel,
+invoking the name of Jesus to aid him, and fought with such desperate
+valour that he slew six of the enemy with his own bond. Encouraged by
+his gallantry, we came down from the poop to his assistance, and so
+handled the Mahometans that they leapt overboard for safety, when some
+of them were drowned and others escaped by swimming. Upon this our
+success, the enemy sent down four other foists to help those who were
+already engaged against us. But our captain took several empty casks in
+which gunpowder had been kept before, and placed them in such a manner
+on the side of our brigantine, that they seemed like large pieces of
+artillery, standing beside them with a _fire-stick_ or lighted match, as
+if about to discharge them. This device put the enemy in such fear that
+they departed from us.
+
+Our admiral continued to pursue the enemy, and gave them another great
+overthrow, taking seven of their foists laden with various kinds of
+merchandise, and sank ten others by the shot of his artillery, one of
+which was laden with elephants. Hie enemy, seeing the ocean almost
+covered with the bodies of their slain, their principal ships taken,
+sunk, or much injured, and having lost all hope of victory, endeavoured
+to save themselves by flight. But the Portuguese determined to follow up
+their success, and again brought them to battle, which continued a whole
+day and night, to the utter discomfiture of the Mahometans, most of
+whose vessels were sunk. At this time some of our foists saw a large
+ship belonging to the enemy at some distance, and made sail towards her;
+but as the enemy saw themselves overmatched, they hurled all their
+carriages into the sea [110], after which they leapt overboard
+themselves, in hopes to swim on shore, as they are most expert swimmers.
+But our men followed them even to the shore with lances, cross-bows,
+and stones, killing them while swimming, so that the sea was coloured
+with their blood. Yet about 200 of them escaped on shore, after swimming
+about 20 miles. These Mahometans are all exceedingly expert swimmers,
+being accustomed to it from their early youth; and while we pursued
+them, they often dived and remained so long under water, that we thought
+they had sunk outright, and when they came up again and floated on the
+water, we thought we had been deceived by phantoms. They were however
+mostly all destroyed afterwards by one mischance or another, so that on
+this occasion the enemy lost a prodigious number of men. After the
+battle and pursuit ceased, our admiral sent some boats on shore in
+sundry places to number the dead bodies, which had been cast up by the
+sea, when about 3000 were found, besides many that had been carried away
+by the sea.
+
+[Footnote 110: Perhaps they threw their guns overboard to lighten their
+vessel and facilitate their escape.--E.]
+
+The king of Cananore beheld this great victory from the shore, and gave
+great commendations to the Portuguese for their valour, and very
+deservedly; for, though I have been in many hard-fought battles, I never
+saw greater valour than was displayed on this occasion by the
+Portuguese. After this great victory, we thought to have enjoyed peace
+and security, but worse events ensued; for the king of Cananore, who was
+a great friend to the Portuguese, died a few days afterwards, and was
+succeeded by a mortal enemy to the Christians, and a great friend to the
+zamorin, by whole interest he had been advanced to the kingdom of
+Cananore. This new king assembled his forces to make war against the
+Portuguese in all haste, believing that much of their ammunition had
+been expended in the late naval battle, and that their men were much
+wearied, and for the most part wounded, so that they would be unable to
+make any great resistance. To aid him on this occasion, the zamorin sent
+him 24 pieces of great cannon. This war began on the 7th of April, and
+continued to the 20th of August [111], before peace was restored. It
+were too long to recount all the brave actions performed by the
+Christians in this war against the Mahometans [112], who never
+encountered them with less than twenty-five or twenty-six thousand men
+and 140 pieces of artillery. The enemy on this occasion were armed in
+the manner already mentioned respecting the weapons of the inhabitants
+of Calicut, and the Christians in the harness and with the weapons then
+used by us in Europe[113].
+
+[Footnote 111: From the context, combined with the date of the late
+naval action, as given from the History of the Portuguese Transactions,
+this land-war with the rajah of Cananore must have been in 1509.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 112: In the naval battle the principal force at least must
+have been Mahometans, as the Hindoos do not use the sea; but, in this
+land-war with the new rajah of Cananore, the nairs would constitute the
+main force of the enemy, though there might be some Mahometan
+auxiliaries.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 113: The European soldiers then wore defensive armour and
+shields. And besides matchlocks, their offensive arms were pikes,
+swords, and cross-bows.--E.]
+
+In their wars, the infidels divide their army into many _wings_, or
+brigades, of two or three thousand men each, only one of which proceeds
+to battle at a time, all the rest waiting the result of this charge
+before they proceed to join battle. While marching to give battle, it
+passes all imagination to conceive the prodigious noise made by
+innumerable musical instruments after their fashion, which fill the ears
+of their soldiers and encourage them to fight; while in the mean time a
+great number of men run before with artificial fireworks[114]. At last
+they give the onset with such fury and outcry, that two or three
+thousand of them are often able to put to flight 10,000 men who are
+unused to this mode of warfare. But God in his merciful providence never
+forsakes those who believe in his holy religion, as was now exemplified
+in our distress. For, while the Portuguese were in a manner overwhelmed
+with the multitude of their enemies, the joyful news arrived that a new
+fleet had come from Portugal to Cananore, under the valiant knight Don
+Tristan de Cunna, who was immediately informed of the straits to which
+we were reduced. He immediately sent us a reinforcement of 300 valiant
+soldiers, well provided with defensive armour, and weapons of offence,
+after the manner of the Christians. On the arrival of these succours, we
+were so encouraged that we would have burnt the city of Cananore, if our
+admiral had permitted us. But on learning the arrival of this
+reinforcement, the enemy were so cast down that they sought to make
+peace with us by every means they could think of, and appointed one
+_Mamalmaricar_, a man of great riches and wisdom, to be their
+ambassador, with full powers to conclude peace. This man accordingly
+waited on our admiral, who told him that he could not make peace without
+the authority of the viceroy, who was then at Cochin: Yet it was thought
+best not to reject the proffered peace, as, during war, the Portuguese
+could not send home their ships with the commodities of India, and for
+this reason the viceroy agreed to the conclusion of peace.
+
+[Footnote 114: Probably alluding to a kind of javelins armed with a
+species of rockets, which have long been used in the wars of India, and
+often produce great disorder among the crowded masses of their
+ill-disciplined troops.--E.]
+
+To mingle some pleasure with these tragedies, I shall now rehearse a
+pleasant story, worthy of being remembered. One day after the peace was
+settled, I happened to walk in the city of Cananore with some merchant
+idolaters, with whom I was acquainted before the war. They asked me to
+show them a certain Christian, much taller and stronger than any of the
+others, who used every day to slay about twenty of the Mahometans, and
+who at one time, when assailed by fifty of the nairs, escaped unhurt. At
+first I answered, that this valiant Christian had gone to Cochin to the
+viceroy: But after some farther consideration, I told them that this
+soldier was the God of the Portuguese, the great God who had created the
+world. Then answered they, that the Mahometans had said as much to them
+already, and therefore they were inclined to believe that the God of the
+Christians was better and more powerful than theirs. Thus it came to be
+rumoured all over the country that the Portuguese had overcome more by
+the assistance of God, than by the strength of man. These people are
+wonderfully simple and ignorant, and are easily astonished at very
+trifling matters; for when they saw one of our company ring a small
+hand-bell, and that it ceased to make a noise when set down, they took
+it for a miracle, saying one to another, "Doubtless the God of these men
+is greater than ours, for when they touch that little instrument it
+speaks, and when they touch it not it is silent." They took much delight
+in seeing the celebration of mass; and when the priest lifted up the
+holy bread, or host, I said unto them, "Behold the God of the Christians
+and of all the world." To which they answered, "You say truly, but we
+see him not." I repeat this that it may be seen how ignorant these
+people are. Yet are they great sorcerers, and can enchant the most
+venomous serpents, so as to do no harm, though their venom is so
+powerful as to kill only by touching. They are likewise of wonderful
+agility, and are astonishingly expert in vaulting, running, leaping,
+swimming, tumbling, walking on ropes, and such other feats of activity.
+
+
+SECTION XII.
+
+_Navigation of the Author to Ethiopia, and return to Europe by Sea._
+
+
+Those who engage to write any history, ought to keep in mind what they
+have promised, lest after all their pains and trouble they only reap
+shame and reproach. Wherefore, having in the beginning of this
+performance engaged to write concerning the navigation of Ethiopia, I
+shall now make an end of my long travels and peregrinations, by a
+description of this voyage, in which I shall speak of such things as I
+saw by the way, on my return from India to my long wished-for country,
+along with the Portuguese.
+
+Leaving India on the 7th of December[115], we directed our course to
+Ethiopia[116]; and having sailed across the great gulf we came to the
+island of _Monzambrick_, or Mozambique, which is under the dominion of
+the king of Portugal. But before our arrival there, we saw many towns
+and fortresses by the way, belonging to the Portuguese, in the kingdoms
+of Melinda and Mombaza. They have also some strong fortresses in
+Mozambique and Sofala. Were I to enlarge upon the memorable deeds of the
+valiant Tristran de Cunna, on his return from India, I should enter upon
+a subject far beyond my powers, being such as would rather require the
+pen of a Homer or a Virgil: For he invaded and subdued the great cities
+of _Gogia, Pati_, and _Crava[117]_, and also the goodly island of
+_Sacutara_, [Socotoro,] where a fortress was erected by order of the
+king of Portugal. I omit also to speak of many islands which we saw by
+the way, such as the island of _Cumeris_, or Curia Muria, and six
+others, which produce plenty of ginger, sugar, and other goodly fruits,
+and the most fruitful island of _Penda_, which is likewise subject to
+the Portuguese.
+
+[Footnote 115: Probably of the year 1508.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 116: It is hardly necessary to remark, that the term Ethiopia
+is here applied to the western coast of Africa on the ocean.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 117: The Gogia of the text is probably Oja, on the coast of
+Africa, 17 leagues from Melinda, and Pati may possibly be some
+corruption of Paniany, both of these places having been reduced by de
+Cunna. Crava may be an error for Brava, on the western coast of
+Africa.--E.]
+
+From the island of Mozambique, which belongs to Portugal, it brought
+much gold and ivory, but these come from the continent of Ethiopia. This
+island is not large, but has a commodious port, and is inhabited by
+black Mahometans[118], who are in great want of all the necessaries of
+life, having no corn or provisions but what are brought from the
+continent. We landed on the continental part of Ethiopia to see the
+country, where we saw a barbarous Vagabond people of blacks, both men
+and women going entirely naked, except covering their parts of shame
+with leaves of trees. Their lips are two fingers thick, their foreheads
+very large, and they have great teeth as white as snow. They are
+exceedingly timorous and fearful of armed men; wherefore six of us, well
+armed with muskets, and accompanied by a black slave who knew the
+country, went a considerable way inland to view the country. When we had
+gone forwards a days journey, we came to many herds of elephants, and
+our guide recommended to us to carry burning firebrands in our hands, as
+these beasts are afraid of fire above all things; but we chanced to fall
+in with three female elephants that had lately calved, and they could
+not be scared by our fire, but followed us so far that we were obliged
+to save ourselves by scrambling up a steep mountain.
+
+[Footnote 118: Perhaps this expression ought to have been black-a-moors,
+the old name for negroes.--E.]
+
+When we were about ten miles inland, we came to a cave on the side of a
+mountain inhabited by some of the black natives, whose manner of speech
+was so strange and chattering, like so many apes, that I am unable to
+express the manner of their language, which comes near the strange
+jargon used by the muleteers of Sicily, when they drive their
+mules[119]. Our pilot asked us if we were inclined to purchase any
+cattle from these people, saying that we might have them at a very low
+price; but suspecting that he either mocked us, or meant, in concert
+with the natives, to impose upon us, we said that we had no money. Then
+he told us that these people wanted no money, having already gold in
+greater plenty than we, which they procure not far from where we were.
+On asking him what articles they were desirous of in payment for their
+cattle, he said they preferred things of small value, such as pins,
+knives, scissars, looking-glasses, hawks-bells, bags, or boxes, to
+contain their gold, copper rings, _janglings_ to hang at their timbrils,
+bosses, laces, broaches, copper-chains, caskanets, bracelets, and such
+like baubles to deck their wives and children. We then said that we
+would willingly give them such things for their cattle if they would
+bring them to us at the shore; but the pilot said the natives would
+drive them to the next mountain, but no farther on any condition. Then
+one of our companions said that he had a boss of engraven copper, and a
+small bell; and as I had none of such merchandise, and yet was desirous
+of eating fresh meat, I said I would give one of my shirts to buy
+cattle. The pilot engaged to make our purchases to the best advantage,
+and calling five or six of the natives about him, he shewed them our
+_goodly jewels,_ and demanded from them _three hundred_ head of cattle.
+The natives, not differing much from beasts, answered by signs that they
+would only give fifteen. At length we made a bargain, though we still
+suspected some deceit; yet they kept their promise, and sent us fifteen
+beasts by two of their companions. We had scarcely gone when we heard a
+noise and tumult among them, and were in some fear lest these
+_troglodites_ might follow to do us some injury, wherefore leaving the
+cattle we took to our weapons. But they made signs to us to fear
+nothing, and the pilot told us they were quarrelling who should have the
+copper boss. Then recovering our cattle, we drove them forward to the
+top of the mountain, where we dismissed the two natives, and continued
+our journey towards the coast. While driving our cattle past a little
+wood, we again fell in with the elephants, which put us in such fear
+that we abandoned our cattle and trusted to our feet, making the best of
+our way to the island.
+
+[Footnote 119: Perhaps alluding to the _cluck_, which occurs perpetually
+in the language of the Hottentots, resembling the sound used in some
+parts to urge on a horse, and which is inexpressible in
+orthography.--E.]
+
+Having made provision for our voyage of such things as could be procured
+at Mozambique, we sailed for the Cape of Good Hope, passing the island
+of St Lawrence, otherwise called Madagascar, which is 80 leagues from
+the nearest part of the continent. I suppose that in a short time the
+Portuguese will be masters of this island, as they have burned and
+destroyed many of its towns and villages, and are much feared by the
+natives. So far as I conjecture by my peregrinations, especially those
+in India and Ethiopia, it is my opinion that the king of Portugal is
+likely to be the richest king in the world, if he continue as he has
+begun; and certainly his dignity and godly zeal is not unworthy of such
+high fortune, as by his means the knowledge of the Christian faith is
+greatly extended. In Cochin, where the viceroy of India resides, every
+holiday ten or twelve Mahometans or idolaters are professed to our
+religion; so that we may have good hope that in time our faith may
+greatly spread with the blessing of God, who hath given such miraculous
+victories to the Christians; wherefore all who profess to believe in the
+holy name of Christ, ought incessantly to pray to God to assist the king
+of Portugal in so godly an enterprise.
+
+When we had sailed about two hundred miles beyond the Cape of Good Hope,
+there arose a sudden tempest of contrary wind, which towed us to and fro
+for seven days in great danger, but we escaped by the blessing of God.
+After the cessation of this tempest, and when we had again proceeded
+other two hundred miles on our voyage, a new tempest arose, which
+scattered all our ships during six days that it continued, so that we
+did not all meet again till our arrival at Lisbon in Portugal. I was in
+a ship called the St Vincent, belonging to one Bartholomew a Florentine,
+who was a citizen of Lisbon. She was a vessel of great size, and carried
+seven hundred tons of spices of all kinds. We passed the island of St
+Helena, near which we saw certain fishes of such enormous bigness that
+one of them was as large as a great house. When they rise above water,
+or gape or yawn, the upper jaw covers all the forehead, as it were a
+soldier in shining armour, and when they swim along the surface of the
+deep, the forehead seems three paces broad. As they swam about near the
+ships, they raised such a commotion in the sea that we discharged all
+our artillery to drive them away. We soon afterwards came to an island
+named _Ascension,_ where we saw many birds about the size of ducks,
+which were so stupid that we took them with our hands, yet immediately
+afterwards they shewed wonderful fierceness. In that island we saw no
+outer living creatures besides these birds, which seemed as if they had
+never seen mankind before, and there were prodigious quantities of fish
+around its shores.
+
+Having sailed many days beyond that island, we seemed to have returned
+again into our own world, as the north star, the guide of mariners,
+appeared to us. Here we have a good opportunity of refuting the opinion
+of those who think that it is impossible to sail in the regions of the
+antartic pole by the guidance of the north star; for it is undeniable
+that the Portuguese sail by the aid of the north polar star, although
+entirely hidden from their sight in the antartic region of the sea. Yet
+they frequently refresh the virtue of the needle by means of that stone
+which ever naturally points towards the north. A few days afterwards we
+arrived at a fair region, in which are seen many islands called the
+_Astures_ Acores, so named from the multitude of that species of eagles
+or hawks which are called acores or _azores_. These islands are
+variously named, as _Pico_, _Martii_, _Corvo_, _Flores_, _St George_,
+_Gratiosa_ and _Fyal_. From thence we went to the island of _Tercera_,
+where we remained two days. All these are very fertile, and have
+abundance of all the necessaries of life.
+
+Departing from thence, we came in seven days sailing to _Luxburne_ or
+_Ulisbona_, [_Lisbon_] in Portugal. On my arrival I was carried to the
+presence of the king, whose hand I had the honour to kiss, and with most
+humble reverence I thanked his majesty for the great favour I had found
+with his officers and subjects in India. He entertained me very
+graciously at his court, until I had informed him fully of all that I
+had observed in my peregrinations in various parts of India. Some days
+afterwards, I shewed his majesty the letters-patent by which his viceroy
+in India had honoured me with the order of knighthood, and humbly
+requested of his majesty to confirm the same under his great seal, which
+he was graciously pleased to grant. Then departing from Lisbon, with the
+passport and safe conduct of the king, I returned at length, after these
+my long and perilous travels, to my long-desired native home, the city
+of Rome, by the blessing of God, to whom be all honour and glory.
+
+_End of the Voyages of Verthema._
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VI.
+
+VOYAGES AND TRAVELS OF CESAR FREDERICK IN INDIA[120].
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+This article has been adopted from the Collection of Hakluyt, and, with
+that immediately preceding, may serve as a supplement to the Portuguese
+Transactions in India. The entire title, as given in that early and
+curious Collection, is "_The Voyage and Travel of M. Cesar Fredericke,
+Merchant of Venice, into the East India and beyond the Indies: Wherein
+are contained the Customes and Rites of these Countries, the Merchandise
+and Commodities, as well of Golde as Silver, as Spices, Drugges,
+Pearles, and other Jewels. Translated out of Italian by M. Thomas
+Hickocke_."
+
+[Footnote 120: Hakluyt, II. pp. 359--375. Ed. Lond. 1810.]
+
+In adapting the present chapter to the purposes of our Collection, the
+only liberty we have taken with the ancient translation exhibited by
+Hakluyt, has been to employ the modern orthography in the names of
+places, persons, and things, and to modernise the language throughout.
+As in the itinerary of Verthema, to avoid the multiplication of notes
+unnecessarily we have corrected the frequently vicious orthography of
+these names as given by Cesar Frederick and his original translator,
+either by substituting the true names or more generally received modern
+orthography, or by subjoining the right name in the text immediately
+after that employed by the author. When the names employed in the
+original translation of this Journal are so corrupt as to be beyond our
+power to rectify, or where we are doubtful of our correction, we have
+marked them with a point of interrogation, as doubtful or unknown, as
+has likewise been done in our version of the Itinerary of Verthema.
+These two journals, besides that they coincide with the plan of our
+arrangement of giving as many appropriate original journals of voyages
+and travels as we can procure, contain a great number of curious
+particulars, nowhere else to be met with, respecting the manners and
+customs of various parts of India, between the years 1503 and 1581,
+with many intersecting notices respecting its history, production, and
+trade.
+
+We learn from the following journal, that Cesar Frederick began his
+peregrination in 1563; and, as he informs us in his preface, that he was
+continually employed in coasting and travelling for eighteen years, he
+could not have returned to Venice before the year 1581. In the
+publication of this journal in the Collection of Hakluyt, it is very
+irregularly divided into fragments, upon no apparent principles of
+regular distribution; but on the present occasion it has been arranged
+in sections, so as to suit the general plan of the present work.--E.
+
+
+
+_Cesar Frederick to the Reader._
+
+Having for the space of eighteen years continually coasted and travelled
+over almost all the East Indies, and many other countries beyond the
+Indies, both with good and bad success; and having seen and learned many
+things worthy of notice, which have never been before communicated to
+the world; I have thought it right, since the Almighty hath graciously
+been pleased to return me to my native country, the noble city of
+Venice, to write and publish this account of the perils I have
+encountered during my long and arduous peregrinations by sea and land,
+together with the many wonderful things I have seen in the Indies; the
+mighty princes that govern these countries; the religion or faith in
+which they live; their rites and customs; the various successes I
+experienced; and which of these countries abound in drugs and jewels:
+All of which may be profitable to such as desire to make a similar
+voyage: Therefore, that the world may be benefited by my experience, I
+have caused my voyages and travels to be printed, which I now present to
+you, gentle and loving readers, in hopes that the variety of things
+contained in this book may give you delight.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Voyage from Venice to Bir in Asia Minor._
+
+
+In the year 1563, while residing at Venice, being desirous to see the
+eastern parts of the world, I embarked in a ship called the _Gradaige_
+of Venice, commanded by Jacomo Vatica, bound for Cyprus, taking with
+me certain merchandise. On arriving at Cyprus, I left that ship, and
+went in a lesser to Tripoli in Syria, where I made a short stay. I then
+travelled by land to Aleppo, where I became acquainted with some
+Armenian and Moorish merchants, and agreed to accompany them to Ormuz.
+We accordingly departed together from Aleppo, and came to the city of
+_Bir_ in two days journey and a-half.
+
+Bir is a small city in which provisions are very scarce, situated in
+Asia Minor, [in lat. 37 deg. 5' N. long. 38 deg. E. from Greenwich], the river
+Euphrates running near its walls. In this city, the merchants who intend
+to descend the Euphrates form themselves into companies or associations,
+according to the quantities of merchandise they possess, and either
+build or buy a boat to carry themselves and their goods down the
+Euphrates to Babylon[121], under the care of a master and mariners hired
+to conduct the boat. These boats are almost flat-bottomed and very
+strong, yet serve only for one voyage, as it is impossible to navigate
+them upwards. They are fitted for the shallowness of the river, which in
+many places is full of great stones which greatly obstruct the
+navigation. At _Feluchia_ a small city on the Euphrates, the merchants
+pull their boats to pieces or sell them for a small price; as a boat
+that cost forty or fifty chequins at Bir sells only at Feluchia for
+seven or eight chequins. When the merchants return back from Babylon, if
+they have merchandise or goods that pay custom, they travel through the
+wilderness in forty days, passing that way at much less expence than the
+other. If they have no such merchandise, they then go by the way of
+Mosul in Mesopotamia, which is attended with great charges both for the
+caravan and company. From Bir to _Feluchia_. on the Euphrates, over
+against Babylon, which is on the Tigris, if the river have sufficient
+water, the voyage down the river may be made in fifteen or eighteen
+days; but when the water is low in consequence of long previous drought,
+the voyage is attended with much trouble, and will sometimes require
+forty or fifty days to get down. In this case the boats often strike on
+the stones in the river, when it becomes necessary to unlade and repair
+them, which is attended with much trouble and delay; and on this account
+the merchants have always one or two spare boats, that if one happen to
+split or be lost by striking on the shoals, they may have another ready
+to take in their goods till they have repaired the broken boat If they
+were to draw the broken boat on the land for repair, it would be
+difficult to defend it in the night from the great numbers of Arabs that
+would come to rob and plunder them. Every night, when it is necessary to
+make fast the boat to the bank, good watch must be kept against the
+Arabs, who are great thieves and as numerous as ants; yet are they not
+given to murder on these occasions, but steal what they can and run
+away. Arquebuses are excellent weapons for keeping off these Arabs, as
+they are in great fear of the shot. In passing down the river from Bir
+to Feluchia, there are certain towns and villages on the Euphrates
+belonging to _the son of Aborise_, king of the Arabs and of the desert,
+at some of which the merchants have to pay so many _medins_ of custom on
+each bale.
+
+[Footnote 121: It is obvious that Bagdat is here meant.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Of Feluchia and Babylon._
+
+
+Feluchia is a village on the Euphrates, where they who come from Bir for
+Babylon disembark with their goods, and go thence by land to Babylon, a
+journey of a day and a half. Babylon is no great city, but is very
+populous and is greatly resorted to by strangers, being the great
+thoroughfare for Persia, Turkey and Arabia, and from this place there
+are frequent caravans to different countries. Babylon is abundantly
+supplied with provisions, which are brought down the river Tigris on
+certain rafts or _zattores_ called Vtrij, the river Tigris running past
+the walls of Babylon. The blown-up hides of which these rafts are
+composed, are bound fast together, on which boards are laid, and on
+these boards the commodities are loaded. When unladed at Babylon, the
+air is let out of the skins, which are then laid on the backs of camels
+and carried back to serve for another voyage. The city of Babylon is
+properly speaking in the kingdom of Persia, but is now under the
+dominion of the Turks. On the other side of the river towards Arabia,
+over against Babylon, there is a handsome town in which is an extensive
+Bazar for the merchants, with many lodging rooms, in which the greater
+part of the stranger merchants that go to Babylon expose their goods
+for sale. The passage across the river between Babylon and this town is
+by a long bridge of boats chained together with great chains: And when
+the river is swollen by the great rains, this bridge is opened in the
+middle, one half falling alongside of the walls of Babylon, and the
+other half along the opposite bank of the borough. So long as the bridge
+remains open, the people cross from side to side in small boats with
+much danger, by reason of their smallness, and that they are usually
+overladen, so that they are very liable to be overset by the swiftness
+of the current, or to be carried away and wrecked on the banks. In this
+manner-many people are lost and drowned, as I have often witnessed.
+
+The tower of Nimrod, or Babel, is situated on the Arabian side of the
+Tigris, in a great plain, seven or eight miles from Babylon. Being
+ruined on every side, it has formed a great mountain, yet a considerable
+part of the tower is still standing, compassed and almost covered up by
+these ruins. It has been built of square bricks dried in the sun, and
+constructed in the following manner. In the first place a course of
+bricks was laid, then a mat made of canes squared like the bricks, and
+daubed with earth instead of lime mortar; and these mats still remain so
+strong that it is wonderful considering their great antiquity. I have
+gone all round it without being able to discover any place where there
+had been a door or entrance, and in my opinion it may be about a mile in
+circumference or rather less. Contrary to all other things, which appear
+small at a distance and become larger the nearer they are approached,
+this tower appears largest when seen from afar, and seems less as you
+come nearer. This may be accounted for, as the tower stands in a very
+large plain, and with its surrounding ruins forms the only perceptible
+object; so that from a distance the tower and the mountains formed of
+its ruins make a greater shew than it is found to be on coming near.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Of Basora._
+
+
+From Babylon I embarked in one of those small vessels which ply upon the
+Tigris between Babylon and Basora, which are built after the manner of
+foists or galliots, having a _speron_[122] and a covered poop. They use
+no pumps, being so well daubed with pitch as effectually to exclude the
+water. This pitch they have from a great plain near the city of _Heit_
+on the Euphrates, two days journey from Babylon. This plain full of
+pitch is marvellous to behold, and a thing almost incredible, as from a
+hole in the earth the pitch is continually thrown into the air with a
+constant great smoke; and being hot it falls as it were sprinkled all
+over the plain, in such abundance that the plain is always full of
+pitch[123]. The Moors and Arabs of the neighbourhood allege that this
+hole is the mouth of Hell; and in truth it is a very memorable object
+From this native pitch or bitumen the whole people of that country
+derive great benefit, as with it they pay or serve their barks, which
+they call _Daneck_ and _Saffin_.
+
+[Footnote 122: In imitation of the original translator Hickocke and
+Hakluyt, this word must be left untranslated and unexplained.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 123: This account of the hole which discharges pitch or native
+bitumen mixed with water is most true; the water and pitch running into
+the valley _or island_, where the pitch remains, and the water runs into
+the Euphrates, when it occasions the water for a long way to have a
+brackish taste with the smell of pitch and brimstone.--Hakl.]
+
+When the river Tigris is well replenished with water, the passage from
+Babylon or Bagdat to Basora may be made in eight or nine days, less or
+more according to circumstances; we were fourteen or fifteen days,
+because the water was low, and when the waters are at the lowest it
+requires eighteen days. Having no rocks or shoals in the river, the
+voyage may be continued day and night. There are some places by the way
+at which you have to pay so many medins for each bale, as toll or
+custom. Basora, Bussora, or Busrah, [in lat. 30 deg. 20' N. long. 47 deg. 40'
+E.] is a city on the Arabian side of the united rivers Euphrates and
+Tigris, which was governed of old by those Arabs called _Zizarij_, but
+is now under the dominion of the grand Turk, who keeps an army there at
+great charge. The tribe of Arabs called Zizarij still have possession of
+a large extent of country, and cannot be overcome by the Turks, as the
+sea divides their country into islands by many channels, so that the
+Turks are unable to bring an army against them either by land or sea,
+and likewise because the inhabitants are brave and warlike. A days sail
+before coming to Basora, we pass a small castle or fort called _Corna_,
+on the point of land where the Euphrates and Tigris join; whence the
+united waters of these two rivers form a very large river that runs into
+the gulf of Persia.
+
+Basora is fifty miles from the sea, and it a place of great trade in
+spices and drugs, which are brought from Ormuz. It is abundantly
+supplied with corn, rice, and dates, from the surrounding country. At
+Basora I shipped myself for Ormuz, to which I sailed through the Persian
+gulf 600 miles, which is the distance between Basora and Ormuz. We
+sailed in small ships built of board fastened together with small ropes
+or cords, and, instead of caulking, a certain kind of straw is laid
+between the boards at their junctions, and they are sewed together;
+owing to which imperfect construction, these vessels are very dangerous,
+and take in much water. On departing from Basora we sailed 200 miles
+along the left shore of the gulf, having the open sea on our right hand,
+till we came to an island called _Carichij_ or _Karak_, whence we
+continued our voyage to Ormuz, always keeping the Persian shore in sight
+on our left, and seeing many islands on our right hand towards Arabia.
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Of Ormuz._
+
+
+The island of Ormuz is twenty-five or thirty miles in circuit, being the
+driest and most barren island in the world, producing nothing but
+salt-water and wood. All things necessary for the life of man are
+brought here from Persia, which is twelve miles off, and from islands
+adjoining to Persia, and in such abundance that the city has always a
+great store of every necessary. Near the shore there stands a fair
+castle, in which resides the commander appointed by the king of
+Portugal, with a good band of Portuguese soldiers. The married men
+belonging to the garrison dwell in the city, in which there are
+merchants of almost every nation, among whom are many Moors and
+Gentiles. This city has a vast trade for all kinds of spices, drugs,
+silk, cloth of silk, brocades, and various kinds of merchandise from
+Persia. The trade in horses is very great, being transported from hence
+to India. The island has a Mahometan or Moorish king of the Persian
+race, who is created and set up by the Portuguese commander in the name
+of the king of Portugal. Being present on one of these occasions, I
+shall set down the ceremonies as I saw them.
+
+The old king being dead, the Portuguese commander proceeds with much
+pomp and ceremony to elect a new one in the castle; and when he is
+chosen from the blood-royal, the new king is sworn to be true and
+faithful to the king of Portugal, as his lord-paramount, after which the
+captain presents him with the royal sceptre. The newly elected king is
+then conducted in great pomp to the royal palace, amid great feasts and
+rejoicings, and attended by a numerous and splendid retinue. The king
+keeps a good train of attendants, and has sufficient revenues to
+maintain his state and dignity, with very little of the cares of
+royalty, as the captain of the castle defends the kingdom. When the king
+and captain ride out together, the king is treated with much ceremony
+and respect, yet cannot ride abroad with his train without having first
+received permission of the captain, which precaution is necessary
+because of the great trade carried on at this place. The native language
+in this island is the Persian. I embarked at Ormuz for Goa in India, in
+a ship on board of which were fourscore horses. All merchants proceeding
+from Ormuz for Goa ought to go in ships carrying horses, because every
+ship carrying twenty horses or upwards is privileged from the payment of
+customs on all their other goods, whereas all ships having no horses
+have to pay eight per centum on their goods and commodities.
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Of Goa, Diu, and Cambaya._
+
+
+Goa is the chief city of the Portuguese in India, in which reside the
+viceroy and his court, being many officers of the crown of Portugal.
+From Ormuz it is 990 miles to Goa, on which passage the first city you
+come to in India is Diu, situated in a small island of the kingdom of
+Cambaia; and, though a small city, is the strongest fortified of any of
+those possessed by the Portuguese in India, having great trade, and
+loading many great ships with merchandise for Ormuz and the Red Sea.
+These ships belong both to Moors and Christians; but the Moors can
+neither trade nor navigate in these seas, unless they have a pass or
+licence from the Portuguese viceroy, without which they we liable to be
+captured. The merchandise loaded at Diu comes from _Cambaietta_, a port
+in the kingdom of Cambaia, about 180 miles up a strait or gulf called
+_Macareo_, which signifies _a race of the tide_, because the water runs
+there with immense rapidity, such as is not to be seen anywhere else,
+except in the kingdom of Pegu, where there is another _Macareo_ or race
+of the tide still more violent. On this account, and because no large
+vessels can go to _Cambaietta_ or _Cambay_, by reason of the shallowness
+of the water in the gulf for 80 or 100 miles, the principal city of
+Cambaia or Guzerat is _Amadaver_ or _Amedabad_, a day and a half
+journey from Cambay, being a great and populous city, and for a city of
+the Gentiles it is well built with handsome houses and wide streets. In
+it there is a fine bason or canul, having many ships, so that it
+resembles Cairo, but not so large.
+
+Cambay is situated on the sea at the head of the gulf of the same name,
+and is a handsome city. While I was there it was suffering great
+calamity, owing to a scarcity, insomuch that the Gentiles offered their
+sons and daughters for sale to the Portuguese, and I have seen them sold
+for 8 or 10 _larines_ each, which is of our money about 10s. or 13s.
+4d.[124]. Yet if I had not actually seen it, I could not have believed
+that Cambay had so great a trade. Every new and full moon, when the
+tides are at the highest, the small barks that come in and go out are
+quite innumerable. These barks are laden with all kinds of spices, with
+silks of China, sandal-wood, elephants teeth, velvets of _Vercini_,
+great quantities of _Pannina_, which comes from Mecca, _chequins_ or
+gold coins worth 7s. each sterling, and various other commodities. These
+barks carry out an infinite quantity of cloth of all sorts made of
+_bumbast_ or cotton, some white, others stamped or painted; large
+quantities of indigo, dried and preserved ginger, dry and confected
+myrabolans, _boraso_ or borax in paste, vast quantities of sugar,
+cotton, opium, asafoetida, _puchio?_ and many other kinds of drugs,
+turbans made at Delhi, great quantities of carnelians, garnets, agates,
+jaspers, calcedonies, _hematitis_, or bloodstones, and some natural
+diamonds.
+
+[Footnote 124: This comparison seems made by the translator between
+_larines_ and sterling money.--E.]
+
+It is customary at Cambay, though no one is obliged, to employ brokers,
+of whom there are great numbers at this place, all Gentiles and of
+great repute, every one of whom keeps fifteen or twenty servants. All
+the Portuguese, and more other merchants who frequent this place, employ
+these brokers, who purchase and tell for them; and such as come there
+for the first time are informed by their friends of this custom, and
+what broker they ought to employ. Every fifteen days, when the great
+fleet of barks comes into port, these brokers come to the water side,
+and the merchants immediately on landing give charge of their cargoes to
+the broker who transacts their business, with the marks of all their
+bales and packages. After this the merchant carries on shore all the
+furniture for his dwelling, it being necessary for every one who trades
+to India to carry a sufficient provision of household staff for his use,
+as none such are to be procured. Then the broker who takes charge of his
+cargo, makes his servants carry the merchant's furniture to some empty
+house in the city, every broker having several such for the
+accommodation of their merchants, where there are only bedsteads,
+tables, chairs, and empty water jars. Then the broker says to the
+merchant, go and repose yourself and take your rest in the city. The
+broker remains at the water-side in charge of the cargo, causes all the
+goods to be discharged from the bark, pays the customs, and causes every
+thing to be carried to the house in which the merchant has taken up his
+residence, the merchant having no trouble with any thing. After this,
+the broker inquires if the merchant is disposed to sell his goods at the
+rate then current; and if he desires it, the broker sells the goods
+immediately, and informs the merchant how much money comes to him after
+payment of all charges. If the merchant is disposed to lay out his money
+in the purchase of other commodities, the broker informs him at what
+rate the different articles may be put free on board, all charges paid.
+Being thus properly instructed, the merchant makes his calculations, and
+if he is satisfied to buy or sell at the current prices he directs the
+broker accordingly; so that if he have even to the value of 20,000
+ducats or more, every thing will be sold off or bartered in fifteen
+days, without giving himself any trouble or concern about the matter.
+Should the merchant not be disposed to sell the goods at the then
+current prices, he may tarry as long as he pleases, but the goods cannot
+be sold for him by any other person than the broker who has taken them
+in hand, and has paid the duties. Sometimes, by delaying the sale of
+their commodities for a time, the merchants make good profit, and at
+other times they lose; but those articles which do not ordinarily come
+every fifteen days, frequently produce great profit by delaying to sell
+till the prices rise.
+
+The barks that lade at Cambay go to Diu to supply the ships at that port
+which are taking in goods for the Red Sea and Ormuz, and some go to
+Chaul and Goa. These ships are either well armed, or are protected by
+Portuguese ships of war, as there are many corsairs or pirates
+continually cruizing along that coast, robbing and plundering whatever
+they are able to master. The kingdom of Cambaia or Guzerat has great
+trade, though it has long been in the hands of tyrants and usurpers,
+ever since the lawful sovereign, then 75 years of age, named Sultan
+Badur, was slain, at the assault of Diu, at which time four or five
+principal officers of his army divided the kingdom among themselves, all
+tyrannizing in their several shares as in emulation of each other.
+Twelve years before my coming, the great Mogul, who is the Mahometan
+king of Delhi and Agra, 40 days journey inland from Amedabad, reduced
+all the provinces of Guzerat under his authority without resistance, his
+power being so great that none of the usurpers dared to oppose him.
+While I dwelt in Cambay, I saw many curious things. There were a
+prodigious number of artificers who made ivory bracelets called mannij,
+of, various colours, with which the Gentile women are in use to decorate
+their arms, some covering their arms entirely over with them. In this
+single article there are many thousand crowns expended yearly, owing to
+this singular custom, that, when any of their kindred die, they break
+all their bracelets in token of grief and mourning, so that they have
+immediately to purchase new ones, as they would rather go without meat
+as not have these ornaments.
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Of Damann, Bassen, Tana, Chaul, and some other places_.
+
+
+Leaving Diu, I went on to Damann, the second city belonging to the
+Portuguese in the territory of Guzerat, and distant from Diu 120 miles.
+This place has no trade of any importance, except in rice and wheat, and
+has many dependent villages, where in time of peace the Portuguese enjoy
+the pleasure of a country retirement, but in time of war they are all
+spoiled and plundered by the enemy, so that then they derive very small
+benefit from them. The next place is Bassen, a small dirty place in
+comparison with Damann, which supplies Goa with rice and wheat, besides
+timber for the construction of ships and gallies. At a small distance
+from Bassen is a small island named Tana, well peopled with Portuguese,
+Moors, and Gentiles. This place affords nothing but rice, but contains
+many manufacturers of _armesies_? and weavers of girdles made of wool
+and cotton, black and red like _moocharie_?
+
+Beyond this is Chaul on the continent, where there are two cities, one
+belonging to the Portuguese, and the other to the Moors; that which
+belongs to the Portuguese is lower than the other, commands the mouth of
+the harbour, and is very strongly fortified. About a mile and a half
+from this city is that of the Moors, belonging to their king _Zamaluco_,
+or Nizam-al-mulk. In time of war no large ships can go to the city of
+the Moors, as they must necessarily pass under the guns of the
+Portuguese castles, which would sink them. Both cities of Chaul are
+sea-ports, and have great trade in all kinds of spices, drugs, raw silk,
+manufactures of silk, sandal-wood, _Marsine, Versine_[125], porcelain of
+China, velvets and scarlets, both from Portugal and Mecca[126], with
+many other valuable commodities. Every year there arrive ten or fifteen
+large ships, laden with great nuts called _Giagra_[127], which are cured
+or dried, and with sugar made from these nuts. The tree on which these
+nuts grow is called the _Palmer_ tree, and is to be found in great
+abundance over all India, especially between this place and Goa. This
+tree very much resembles that which produces dates, and no tree in the
+world is more profitable or more useful to man; no part of it but serves
+for some useful purpose, neither is any part of it so worthless as to be
+burnt. Of its timber they build ships, and with the leaves they make
+sails. Its fruit, or nuts, produce wine, and from the wine they make
+sugar and _placetto_[128]. This wine is gathered in the spring of the
+year from the middle of the tree, where there is then a continual stream
+of clear liquor like water, which they gather in vessels placed on
+purpose under each tree, and take them away full every morning and
+evening. This liquor being distilled by means of fire, is converted into
+a very strong liquor, which is then put into buts with a quantity of
+white or black _Zibibs_, and in a short time it becomes a perfect wine.
+Of the nuts they make great quantities of oil. The tree is made into
+boards and timbers for building houses. Of the bark cables and other
+ropes are made for ships which are said to be better than those made of
+hemp. The branches are made into bed-steads after the Indian fashion,
+and into _Sanasches_? for merchandise. The leaves being cut into thin
+slips are woven into sails for all kinds of ships, or into thin mats.
+The outer rhind of the nut stamped serves as oakum for caulking ships,
+and the hard inner shell serves for spoons and other utensils for
+holding food or drink. Thus no portion whatever of this _Palmer_ tree is
+so worthless as to be thrown away or cast into the fire. When the nuts
+are green, they are full of a sweet water, excellent to drink, and the
+liquor contained in one nut is sufficient to satisfy a thirsty person.
+As the nut ripens, this liquor turns all into kernel.
+
+[Footnote 125: Formerly noticed as a species of velvet; but the words
+marsine and versine were inexplicable in the days of Hakluyt, and must
+so remain.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 126: The velvets and scarlet cloths from Mecca were probably
+Italian manufactures, brought through Egypt and the Red Sea.--E.].
+
+[Footnote 127: These great nuts must necessarily be the cocoa nuts, and
+the palmer tree, on which they grow, the cocoa palm.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 128: Possibly molasses are here meant.--E.]
+
+From Chaul, an infinite quantity of goods are exported for other parts
+of India, Macao, Portugal, the coast of Melinda, Ormuz, and other parts;
+such as cloth of _bumbast_ or cotton, white, painted, and printed,
+indigo, opium, silk of all kinds, borax in paste, asafoetida, iron,
+corn, and other things. Nizam-al-Mulk, the Moorish king, has great
+power, being able to take the field with 200,000 men, and a great store
+of artillery, some of which are made in pieces[129], and are so large
+that they are difficultly removed, yet are they very commodiously used,
+and discharge enormous stone bullets, some of which have been sent to
+the king of Portugal as rarities. The city of _Abnezer[130]_, in which
+Nizam-al-Mulk resides, is seven or eight days journey inland from Chaul.
+Seventy miles[131] from Chaul toward the Indies, or south, is Dabul, a
+haven belonging to Nizam-al-Mulk, from whence to Goa is 150 miles[132].
+
+[Footnote 129: Probably meaning that they were formed of bars hooped or
+welded together, in the way in which the famous _Mons meg_, long in
+Edinburgh Castle, and now in the tower of London, was certainly
+made.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 130: Perhaps that now called Assodnagur in the Mahratta
+country, about 125 miles nearly east from Chaul.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 131: In fact only about half that distance.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 132: About 165 English miles--E.]
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Of Goa._
+
+
+Goa, the principal city of the Portuguese in India, in which the viceroy
+resides with a splendid court, stands in an island about 25 or 30 miles
+in circuit. The city, with its boroughs or suburbs, is moderately large,
+and is sufficiently handsome for an Indian city; but the island is very
+beautiful, being full of fine gardens, and adorned with many trees,
+among which are the _Palmer_, or cocoa-nut trees, formerly mentioned.
+Goa trades largely in all kinds of merchandise usual in these parts, and
+every year five or six large ships come directly thither from Portugal,
+usually arriving about the 6th or 10th of September. They remain there
+40 or 50 days, and go from thence to Cochin, where they finish their
+lading for Portugal; though they often load one ship at Goa and the
+other at Cochin for Portugal. Cochin is 420 miles from Goa. The city of
+Goa stands in the kingdom of _Dial-can_, or Adel Khan, a Moorish or
+Mahometan king, whose capital, called Bejapour or Visiapour, is eight
+days journey inland from Goa[133]. This sovereign has great power; for,
+when I was at Goa in 1570, he came to attack that city, encamping with
+200,000 men at a river side in the neighbourhood, where he remained
+fourteen months, at the end of which a peace was concluded. It was
+reported in Goa that a great mortality prevailed in his army during the
+winter, which also killed many of his elephants. When I went in 1567
+from Goa to _Bezenegur_ or Bijanagur, the capital city of the kingdom of
+_Narsinga,_ eight days journey inland from Goa[134], I travelled in
+company with two other merchants, who carried with them 300 Arabian
+horses for sale to that king; the horses of the country being of small
+stature, occasioning Arabian horses to sell at high prices in that part
+of India. Indeed it is necessary that the merchants should get good
+prices, as they are at great charges in bringing them from Persia to
+Ormuz and thence to Goa. At going out of Goa, 42 pagodas are paid of
+duty for each horse; the pagoda being a small gold coin worth about 6s.
+8d. sterling. In the inland country of Narsinga, the Arabian horses sell
+for 300, 400, and 500 ducats each, and some very superior horses sell as
+high as 1000 ducats.
+
+[Footnote 133: About 175, N.E. from Goa. In the original it is called
+Bisapor.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 134: The ruins of the royal city of Bijanagur are 190 English
+miles nearly due east from Goa.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Of the City of Bijanagur._
+
+
+In the year 1565, the city of Bijanagur was sacked by four Moorish kings
+of great power: Adel-Khan, Nizam-al-Mulk, Cotub-al-Mulk, and
+Viriday-Khan; yet with all their power they were unable to overcome this
+city and its king but by means of treachery. The king of Bijanagur was a
+Gentile, and among the captains of his numerous army had two famous
+Moors, each of whom commanded over seventy or eighty thousand men. These
+two captains being of the same religion with the four Moorish kings,
+treacherously combined with them to betray their own sovereign.
+Accordingly, when the king of Bijanagur, despising the power of his
+enemies, boldly faced them in the field, the battle had scarcely lasted
+four hours, when the two treacherous captains, in the very heat of the
+battle, turned with their followers against their own sovereign, and
+threw his army into such disorder that it broke and fled in the utmost
+confusion.
+
+This kingdom of Bijanagur had been governed for thirty years by the
+usurpation of three brothers, keeping the lawful king a state prisoner,
+and ruling according to their own pleasure, shewing the king only once a
+year to his subjects. They had been principal officers under the father
+of the king whom they now held a prisoner, who was very young when his
+father died, and they assumed the government. The eldest brother was
+called _Ram rajah_, who sat in the royal throne and was called king; the
+second was named _Temi rajah_, who held charge of the civil government
+of the country; and the third, _Bengatre_, was general in chief of the
+army. In the great battle against the four Mahometan kings all the three
+brothers were present, but the first and the last were never heard of
+more, neither dead nor alive. Temi rajah alone escaped from the battle,
+with the loss of one eye. On the news of this great defeat coming to the
+city of Bijanagur, the wives and children of the three tyrants fled with
+the imprisoned king, and the four Mahometan kings entered the city in
+great triumph, where they remained for six months, searching everywhere
+for money and valuable effects that had been hidden. After this they
+departed, being unable to retain possession of so extensive a dominion
+at such a distance from their own territory[135].
+
+[Footnote 135: The reason in the text for evacuating the kingdom of
+Narsinga, or Bijanagur, is very unsatisfactory, as it in fact bordered
+on their dominions. More probably they could not agree on the partition,
+each being afraid of the others acquiring an ascendancy, and they
+satisfied themselves with the enormous spoils of the capital. This event
+has been before mentioned from De Faria.--E.]
+
+After the retreat of the four kings, Temi rajah returned to Bijanagur,
+which he repeopled, and sent word to the merchants of Goa to bring all
+the horses to him that they had for sale, promising good prices; and it
+was on this occasion that the two merchants went up with their horses,
+whom I accompanied. This tyrant also issued a proclamation, that if any
+merchant happened to have any of the horses which were taken in the late
+battle, even although they happened to have the Bijanagur mark upon
+them, that he would pay for them their full values, and give safe
+conduct for all who had such to come to his capital. When by this means
+he had procured a great number of horses, he put off the merchants with
+fair promises, till he saw that no more horses were likely to come, and
+he then ordered the merchants to depart without giving them any thing
+for the horses. I remained in Bijanagur seven months, though I might
+have concluded my whole business in one; but it was necessary for me to
+remain until the ways were cleared of thieves and robbers, who ranged up
+and down in whole troops.
+
+While I rested there I saw many strange and barbarous deeds done among
+these Gentiles. When any noble man or woman dies, the dead body is
+burned. If a married man die, his widow must burn herself alive for the
+love of her husband, and along with his body; but she may have the
+respite of a month, or even of two or three, if she will. When the
+appointed day arrives on which she is to be burnt, she goeth out from
+her house very early in the morning, either on horseback or on an
+elephant, or on a stage carried by eight men, apparelled like a bride,
+and is carried in triumph all round the city, having her hair hanging
+down about her shoulders, garnished with jewels and flowers, according
+to her circumstances, and seemingly as joyful as a bride in Venice going
+to her nuptials. On this occasion, she carries a mirror in her left
+hand, and an arrow in her right, and sings during the procession,
+saying, that she is going to sleep with her dear husband. In this manner
+she continues, surrounded by her kindred and friends till about one or
+two in the afternoon, when the procession goes out of the city to the
+side of the river called _Nigondin_ or _Toombuddra_, which runs past the
+walls of the city, to a certain spot where this ceremony is usually
+performed, where there is prepared a large square pit full of dried
+wood, having a little pinnacle or scaffold close to one side four or
+five steps up. On her arrival, a great banquet is prepared, where the
+victim eats with as much apparent joy as if it were her wedding-day; and
+at the end of the feast there is dancing and singing so long as she
+thinks fit. At length she gives orders of her own accord to kindle the
+dry wood in the square pit; and when told that the fire is kindled, she
+takes the nearest kinsman of her husband by the hand, who leads her to
+the bank of the river, where she puts off her jewels and all her
+clothes, distributing them among her parents or relations; when, putting
+on a cloth, that she may not be seen naked by the people, she throweth
+herself into the river, saying, O! wretches wash away your sins. Coming
+out of the water, she rolls herself up in a yellow cloth, fourteen yards
+long, and again taking the nearest kinsman of her husband by the hand,
+they go together to the pinnacle at the funeral pile. From this place
+she addresses the people, to whom she recommends her children and
+relations. Before the pinnacle it is usual to place a mat, that she may
+not see the fierce fire; yet there are many who order this to be
+removed, as not afraid of the sight. When the silly woman has reasoned
+with the people for some time, another woman takes a pot of oil, part of
+which she pours on the head of the devoted victim, anointing also her
+whole body with the same, and then throws the pot into the fire, which
+the widow immediately follows, leaping into the fiercest of the fire.
+Then those who stand around the pile throw after her many great pieces
+of wood, by the blows from which, and the fierce fire in which she is
+enveloped, she quickly dies and is consumed. Immediately the mirth of
+the people is changed to sorrow and weeping, and such howling and
+lamentation is set up as one is hardly able to bear. I have seen many
+burnt in this manner, as my house was near the gate where they go out to
+the place of burning; and when a great man dies, not only his widow, but
+all the female slaves with whom he has had connection, are burnt along
+with his body. Also when the baser sort of people die, I have seen the
+dead husband carried to the place of sepulchre, where he is placed
+upright; then cometh his widow, and, placing herself on her knees before
+him, she clasps her arms about his neck, till the masons have built a
+wall around both as high us their necks. Then a person from behind
+strangles the widow, and the workmen finish the building over their
+heads, and thus they remain immured in one tomb. Inquiring the reason of
+this barbarous custom, I was told that this law had been established in
+ancient times as a provision against the slaughters which the women were
+in use to make of their husbands, poisoning them on every slight cause
+of displeasure; but that since the promulgation of this law they have
+been more faithful to their husbands, reckoning their lives as dear to
+them as their own, because after the death of their husband their own is
+sure soon to follow. There are many other abominable customs among these
+people, but of which I have no desire to write.
+
+In consideration of the injury done to Bijanagur by the four Mahometan
+kings, the king with his court removed from that city in 1567, and went
+to dwell in a castle named _Penegonde_, eight days journey inland from
+Bijanagur. Six days journey from Bijanagur is the place where diamonds
+are got[136]. I was not there, but was told that it is a great place
+encompassed by a wall, and that the ground within is sold to the
+adventurers at so much per square measure, and that they are even
+limited as to the depth they may dig. All diamonds found of a certain
+size and above belong to the king, and all below that size to the
+adventurers. It is a long time since any diamonds have been got there,
+owing to the troubles that have distracted the kingdom of Narsinga: For
+the son of Temi rajah having put the imprisoned king to death, the
+nobles and great men of the kingdom refused to acknowledge authority of
+the tyrant, so that the kingdom has fallen into anarchy, every one
+setting up for themselves.
+
+[Footnote 136: The diamond mines of Raolconda are about 90 miles direct
+north from the ruins of Bijanagur, on the Kisma. The castle of Penegonde
+is not now to be found in the maps of Indostan; but indeed the names of
+this ingenious traveller an often unintelligible, and almost always
+extremely corrupt.--E.]
+
+The city of Bijanagur is not altogether destroyed, as the houses are
+said to be still standing, but entirely void of population, and become
+the dwellings of tigers, and other wild beasts. The circuit of this
+great city is twenty-four miles round the walls, within which are
+several hills. The ordinary dwellings are of earthen walls, and
+sufficiently mean, but the three palaces of the tyrant brothers, and the
+pagodas or idol temples, are built of fine marble, cemented with lime. I
+have seen many kings courts, yet have never seen any thing to compare
+with the greatness of the royal palace of Bijanagur, which hath nine
+gates. First, when you go into that part where the king lodged, there
+are five great gates kept by captains and soldiers: Within these are
+four lesser gates, which are kept by porters. On the outer side of the
+first gate is a small porch or lodge, where there is a captain and
+twenty-five soldiers, who keep watch day and night; and within that
+another, with a similar guard. Through this you enter into a very fair
+court, at the end of which is another porch like the first, with a
+similar guard, and within that another court. Thus the first five gates
+are each guarded by their respective captains. Then each of the lesser
+gates within are kept by a separate guard of porters. These gates stand
+open the greatest part of the night, as it is the custom of the Gentiles
+to transact business and make their feasts during the night, rather than
+in the day. This city is very safe from thieves, insomuch that the
+Portuguese merchants sleep under porches open to the street, and yet
+never meet with any injury.
+
+At the end of two months, I determined to go for Goa, in company with
+two Portuguese merchants, who were making ready to depart in two
+palankins or small litters, which are very convenient vehicles for
+travelling, being carried by eight _falchines_, or bearers, four at a
+time, and other four as reliefs. For my own use I bought two bullocks,
+one to ride upon and the other to carry my provisions. In that country
+they ride upon bullocks, having pannels fastened with girths, and guide
+them with bridles. In summer, the journey from Bijanagur to Goa takes
+only eight days; but we went in July, which is the middle of winter in
+that country, and were fifteen days in going to _Ancola_, on the sea
+coast. On the eighth day of the journey I lost both my bullocks. That
+which carried my provisions was weak, and could not proceed; and on
+passing a river by means of a small foot bridge, I made my other
+bullock swim across, but he stopt on a small island in the middle of the
+river where he found pasture, and we could devise no means to get him
+out. I was under the necessity therefore to leave him, and was forced to
+go on foot for seven days, during which it rained almost incessantly,
+and I suffered great fatigue. By good fortune I met some
+_falchines_[137] by the way, whom I hired to carry my clothes and
+provisions. In this journey we suffered great troubles, being every day
+made prisoners, and had every morning at our departure to pay four or
+five _pagies?_ a man as ransom. Likewise, as we came almost every day
+into the country of a new governor, though all tributary to the king of
+Bijanagur, we found that every one of them had their own copper coin, so
+that the money we got in change one day was not current on the next. At
+length, by the mercy of God, we got safe to _Ancola_, which is in the
+country of the queen of _Gargopam_[138], a tributary to the king of
+Bijanagur.
+
+[Footnote 137: These _falchines_ of Cesar Frederick are now denominated
+_coolies_.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 138: These names of Ancola and Gargopam are so unintelligibly
+corrupted, as not be even conjecturally referable to any places or
+districts in our best maps.--E.]
+
+The merchandise sent every year from Goa to Bijanagur consists of
+Arabian horses, velvets, damasks, satins, armoisins of Portugal,
+porcelain of China, saffron, and scarlet cloth; and at Bijanagur, they
+received in exchange or barter, jewels and pagodas, which are the gold
+ducats of the country. At Bijanagur, according to the state and
+condition of the wearers, the apparel is of velvet, satin, damask,
+scarlet cloth, or white cotton; and they wear long hats on their heads,
+called _colae_, made of similar materials; having girdles round their
+bodies of fine cotton cloth. They wear breeches made like those used by
+the Turks; having on their feet plain high things called _aspergh_. In
+their ears they wear great quantities of golden ornaments.
+
+Returning to my journey. When we got to _Ancola_, one of my companions
+having nothing to lose, took a guide and set out for Goa, which is only
+at the distance of four days journey; but as the other Portuguese was
+not inclined to travel any farther at this season, he and I remained
+there for the winter[139], which beginning on the 15th of May, lasts to
+the end of October. While we tarried there, another horse-merchant
+arrived in a palanquin, together with two Portuguese soldiers from
+Ceylon, and two letter-carriers, who were Christians born in India. All
+these persons agreed to go in company to Goa, and I resolved to go with
+them; for which purpose, I got a sorry palanquin made for me of canes,
+and in the hollow of one of these I concealed all my jewels. According
+to the usual custom, I hired eight _falchines_ or bearers, and we set
+off one day about eleven o'clock. About two o'clock the same day, as we
+were passing a mountain which separates the territory of _Ancola_ from
+that belonging to Abel Khan, and while I was a little way behind the
+rest of the company, I was assaulted by eight robbers, four of whom were
+armed with swords and targets, and the others with bows and arrows. My
+bearers immediately let fall the palanquin and ran off, leaving me alone
+on the ground wrapped up in my clothes. The robbers instantly came up
+and rifled me of every thing I had, leaving me stark naked. I pretended
+to be sick and would not quit the palanquin, in which I had made a kind
+of bed of my spare clothes. After searching with great industry, the
+thieves found two purses in which I had tied up some copper money I had
+got in change for four pagodas at Ancola; and thinking this treasure
+consisted of gold coin, they searched no farther, and went away,
+throwing all my clothes into a bush. Fortunately at their departure they
+dropped a handkerchief which I noticed, and getting up I wrapped it up
+in my palaquin[140]. In this forlorn condition, I had resolved to pluck
+the hollow cane from my palanquin in which my jewels were hid, and to
+have endeavoured to make my own way on foot to Goa, using the cane as a
+walking stick. But my bearers were so faithful that they returned to
+look for me after the robbers departed, which indeed I did not expect,
+as they were paid before hand, according to the custom of India. We got
+to Goa in four days, during which I fared very badly, as the robbers had
+left me no money of any kind, and all I had to eat was given me by my
+bearers for God's sake; but after my arrival in Goa, I paid them royally
+for what they gave me.
+
+[Footnote 139: This winter of our author, on the coast of Canara, in
+about the lat. of 15 deg. N. when the sun is nearly vertical, must be
+understood as the rainy season.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 140: This incident in the text is given as fortunate, and
+perhaps it ought to have been expressed, "He wrapped it about his loins
+and returned to his palanquin."--E.]
+
+From Goa I departed for Cochin, a voyage of 300 miles, there being
+several strong-holds belonging to the Portuguese between these two
+cities, as Onore, Barcelore, Mangalore, and Cananore. Onore, the first
+of these, is in the dominions of the queen of _Battacella_, or
+_Batecolah_, who is tributary to the king of Bijanagur. There is no
+trade at this place, which is only a military post held by a captain
+with a company of soldiers. After this you go to another small castle of
+the Portuguese called Mangalore, in which there is only a small trade in
+rice. Thence you go to a little fort called Bazelore[141], whence a
+great deal of rice is transported to Goa. From thence you go to a city
+named Cananore, which is within a musket-shot of the capital of the king
+of Cananore who is a Gentile[142]. He and his people are wicked and
+malicious, delighting in going to war with the Portuguese; yet when at
+peace they find their interest in trading with them. From this kingdom
+of Cananore is procured great store of cardomums, pepper, ginger, honey,
+cocoa-nuts, and _archa_ or _areka_. This is a fruit about the size of a
+nutmeg, which is chewed in all the Indies, and even beyond them, along
+with the leaf of a plant resembling ivy called _betel_. The nut is
+wrapped up in a leaf of the betel along with some lime made of oyster
+shells, and through all the Indies they spend a great deal of money; on
+this composition, which they use daily, a thing I could not have
+believed if I had not seen it continually practised. A great revenue is
+drawn from this herb, as it pays custom. When they chew this in their
+mouths, it makes their spittle as red as blood, and it is said to
+produce a good appetite and a sweet breath; but in my opinion, they eat
+it rather to satisfy their filthy lusts, for this herb is moist and hot,
+and causes a strong expulsion.
+
+[Footnote 141: This must be Barcelore, and ought to have been named
+before Managalore, as above 50 miles to the north, between Goa and
+Managalore.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 142: This passage ought to have stood thus "The fort of
+Cananore belonging to the Portuguese, only a musket-shot from the city
+of that name, the capital of" &c.--E.]
+
+From Cananore you go Cranganore, which is a small fort of the Portuguese
+in the country of the king of Cranganore, another king of the Gentiles.
+This is a country of small importance of about a hundred miles extent,
+full of thieves, subject to the king of Calicut, who is another king of
+the Gentiles and a great enemy to the Portuguese, with whom he is
+continually engaged in war. This country is a receptacle of foreign
+thieves, and especially of those Moors called _Carposa_, on account of
+their wearing long red caps. These thieves divide the spoil they get
+with the king of Calicut, who gives them leave to go a-roving; so that
+there are so many thieves all along this coast, that there is no sailing
+in those seas except in large ships well armed, or under convoy of
+Portuguese ships of war. From Cranganore to Cochin is 15 miles[143].
+
+[Footnote 143: The direct distance is twenty geographical miles.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_Of Cochin._
+
+
+Cochin, next to Goa, is the chief place in India belonging to the
+Portuguese, and has a great trade in spices, drugs, and all other kinds
+of merchandise for Portugal. Inland from that place is the pepper
+country, which pepper is loaded by the Portuguese in bulk not in sacks.
+The pepper which is sent to Portugal is not so good as that which goes
+up the Red Sea; because in times past the officers of the king of
+Portugal made a contract with the king of Cochin for all the pepper, to
+be delivered at a fixed price, which is very low; and for which reason
+the country people deliver it to the Portuguese unripe and full of dirt.
+As the Moors of Mecca give a better price, they get it clean and dry and
+in much better condition; but all the spices and drugs which they carry
+to Mecca and the Red Sea are contraband and stolen or smuggled. There
+are two cities at Cochin, one of which belongs to the Portuguese and the
+other to the native king; that of the Portuguese being nearer the sea,
+while the native city is a mile and a half farther up the same river.
+They are both on the banks of the same large river, which comes from the
+mountains in the pepper country[144], in which are many Christians of
+the order of St Thomas. The king of Cochin is a Gentile and a steadfast
+friend to the king of Portugal, and to all the Portuguese who are
+married and have become citizens of Cochin. By the name of Portuguese,
+all the Christians are known in India who come from Europe, whether they
+be Italians, Frenchmen, or Germans. All those who marry and settle at
+Cochin get some office according to the trades they are off, by which
+they have great privileges. The two principal commodities in which they
+deal are silk which comes in great quantities from China, and large
+quantities of sugar, which comes from Bengal. The married citizens pay
+no customs for these two commodities; but pay 4s. per centum for all
+other goods to the king of Cochin, rating their own goods almost at
+their own valuation. Those who are not married pay to the king of
+Portugal 8s. per centum for all kinds of commodities. While I was in
+Cochin, the viceroy used his endeavours to break the privileges of these
+married citizens, that they might pay the same rates of customs with
+others. On this occasion the citizens were glad to weigh their pepper in
+the night to evade the customs. When this came to the knowledge of the
+king of Cochin, he put a stop to the delivery of pepper, so that the
+viceroy was glad to allow the merchants to do as formerly.
+
+[Footnote 144: In the version of Cesar Frederick in Hakluyt, it is said
+"to come from the mountains of the king of the pepper country, who is a
+Gentile, and in whose dominions there are many Christians," &c. as in
+the text. This king of the pepper country is probably meant for the
+rajah of Travancore. The great river of the text is merely a sound,
+which reaches along the coast from Cochin to beyond Coulan, a distance
+of above 90 miles, forming a long range of low islands on the sea-coast,
+and receiving numerous small rivers from the southern gauts.--E.]
+
+The king of Cochin has small power in comparison with the other
+sovereigns of India as he is unable to send above 70,000 men into the
+field. He has a great number of gentlemen, some of whom are called
+_Amochi_[145] and others _Nairs_. These two sorts of men do not value
+their lives in any thing which tends to the honour of their king, and
+will run freely into any danger in his service, even if sure to lose
+their lives in the attempt. These men go naked from the waist upwards,
+and barefooted, having only a cloth wrapped about their thighs. Their
+hair is long and rolled up on the top of their heads, and they go always
+armed, carrying bucklers and naked swords. The Nairs have their wives in
+common among themselves, and when any of them goes into the house of one
+of these women, he leaves his sword and buckler at the door, and while
+he is within no other dare enter the house. The king's children never
+inherit the kingdom after their fathers, lest perchance they may have
+been begotten by some other man; wherefore the son of the king's
+sisters, or of some female of the royal-blood succeeds, that they may be
+sure of having a king of the royal family. Those Naires and their wives
+have great holes in their ears by way of ornament, so large and wide as
+is hardly credible, holding that the larger these holes are, so much the
+more noble are they. I had leave from one of them to measure the
+circumference of the hole in one of his ears with a thread; and within
+that circumference I put my arm up to the shoulder with my clothes on,
+so that in fact they are monstrously large. This is begun when they are
+very young, at which time a hole is made in each ear, to which they hang
+a piece of gold or a lump of lead, putting a certain leaf into the hole
+which causes the hole to increase prodigiously. They load ships at
+Cochin both for Portugal and Ormuz: but all the pepper that is carried
+to Ormuz is smuggled. Cinnamon and all other spices and drugs are
+permitted to be exported to Ormuz or Cambaia, as likewise all other
+kinds of merchandise from other parts of India. From Cochin there are
+sent yearly to Portugal great quantities of pepper, dry and preserved
+ginger, wild cinnamon, areka nuts and large store of cordage made of
+_cayro_, that is from the bark of the cocoa-nut tree, which is reckoned
+better than that made of hemp. The ships for Portugal depart every
+season between the 5th of December and the 5th of January.
+
+[Footnote 145: On former occasions these _amochi_ have been explained as
+devoted naires, under a vow to revenge the death of their
+sovereign.--E.]
+
+From Cochin I went to Coulan, at which is a small fort belonging to the
+Portuguese, 72 miles from Cochin. This is a place of small trade, as
+every year a ship gets only half a lading of pepper here, and then goes
+to Cochin to be filled up. From Cochin to Cape Comorin is 72 miles, and
+here ends the Indian coast. Along this coast, and also at Cape Comorin,
+and down to the low lands of _Chialon_[146], which is about 200 miles,
+there are great numbers of the natives converted to the Christian faith,
+and among them are many churches of the order of St Paul, the friars of
+which order do much good in these places, and take great pains to
+instruct the natives in the Christian faith.
+
+[Footnote 146: These geographical notices are inexplicable, unless by
+_Chialon_ is meant the low or maritime parts of Ceylon, which Cesar
+Frederick afterwards calls Zeilan.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Of the Pearl Fishery in the Gulf of Manaar_.
+
+
+The men along the coast which extends from Cape Comorin to the low land
+of _Chioal_[147], and the island of _Zeilan_ or Ceylon, is called the
+pearl-fishery. This fishery is made every year, beginning in March or
+April, and lasts fifty days. The fishery is by no means made every year
+at one place, but one year at one place, and another year at another
+place; all however in the same sea. When the fishing season approaches,
+some good divers are sent to discover where the greatest quantities of
+oysters are to be found under water; and then directly facing that place
+which is chosen for the fishery, a village with a number of houses, and
+a bazar all of stone, is built, which stands as long as the fishery
+lasts, and is amply supplied with all necessaries. Sometimes it happens
+near places already inhabited, and at other times at a distance from any
+habitations. The fishers or divers are all Christians of the country,
+and all are permitted to engage in this fishery, on payment of certain
+duties to the king of Portugal, and to the churches of the friars of St
+Paul on that coast. Happening to be there one year in my peregrinations,
+I saw the order used in fishing, which is as follows.
+
+[Footnote 147: This word is unintelligible, having no similar name in
+modern geography. From the context, it seems to signify the maritime
+coast of Tinnevelly and Marwar, or the most southern part of the
+Carnatic, opposite to Ceylon; and may possibly be that called _Chialon_
+immediately before--E.]
+
+During the continuance of the fishery, there are always three or four
+armed foists or galliots stationed to defend the fishermen from pirates.
+Usually the fishing-boats unite in companies of three or four together.
+These boats resemble our pilot boats at Venice, but are somewhat
+smaller, having seven or eight men in each. I have seen of a morning a
+great number of these boats go out to fish, anchoring in 15 or 18
+fathoms water, which it the ordinary depth all along this coast. When at
+anchor, they cast a rope into the sea, having a great stone at one end.
+Then a man, having his ears well stopped, and his body anointed with
+oil, and a basket hanging to his neck or under his left arm, goes down
+to the bottom of the sea along the rope, and fills his basket with
+oysters as fast as he can. When that is full, he shakes the rope, and
+his companions draw him up with the basket. The divers follow each other
+in succession in this manner, till the boat is loaded with oysters, and
+they return at evening to the fishing village. Then each boat or company
+makes their heap of oysters at some distance from each other, so that a
+long row of great heaps of oysters are seen piled along the shore. These
+are not touched till the fishing is over, when each company sits down
+beside its own heap, and fails to opening the oysters, which is now
+easy, as the fish within are all dead and dry. If every oyster had
+pearls in them, it would be a profitable occupation, but there are many
+which have none. There are certain persons called _Chitini_, who are
+learned in pearls, and are employed to sort and value them, according to
+their weight, beauty, and goodness, dividing them into four sorts. The
+_first_ sort, which are round, are named _aia_ of Portugal, as they are
+bought by the Portuguese: The _second_, which are not round, are named
+_aia_ of Bengal: The _third_, which are inferior to the second, are
+called _aia_ of Canara, which is the name of the kingdom of Bijanagur or
+Narsinga, into which they are sold: And the _fourth_, or lowest kind, is
+called _aia_ of Cambaia, being sold into that country[148]. Thus sorted,
+and prices affixed to each, there are merchants from all countries ready
+with their money, so that in a few days all the pearls are bought up,
+according to their goodness and weight.
+
+[Footnote 148: Pearls are weighed by _carats_, each of which is four
+grains. The men who sort and price them have a copper instrument with
+holes of various sizes, by which they estimate their several
+values.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+In this sea of the pearl-fishery there is an island called _Manaar_,
+over-against Ceylon, inhabited by Christians who were formerly Gentiles,
+and in which island there is a small fort belonging to the Portuguese.
+Between this island and Ceylon there is a narrow channel with a small
+depth of water, through which only small ships can pass at the full and
+change of the moon, when the tides are high, and even then they must put
+their cargoes into lighters to enable them to pass the shoals, after
+which they take in their goods again, and proceed on their voyage. But
+large ships going for the eastern coast of India pass by the coast of
+Coromandel, on the other side of this gulf, beside the land of
+_Chilao_[149], which is between the firm land and the isle of Manaar. On
+this voyage ships are sometimes lost, but they are empty, as ships going
+this way discharge their cargoes at _Periapatam_ into small
+flat-bottomed boats named _Tane_, which can run over any shoal without
+danger, as they always wait at Periapatam for fine weather. On departing
+from Periapatam, the small ships and flat-bottomed boats go always
+together, and on arriving at the shoals about thirty-six miles from that
+place, they are forced through by the winds, which always blow so
+forcibly that they have no means of taking shelter during the passage.
+The flat boats go through safely; but if the small ships happen to miss
+the proper channel, they get fast on the shoals, by which many of them
+are lost. In coming back from the Indies, instead of this passage, they
+take the channel of Manaar, which has an ouze bottom, so that even in
+case of grounding they are generally got off again without damage. The
+reason of not using this passage on the outward voyage is, that the
+prevailing winds between Ceylon and Manaar frequently occasion that
+channel to have so little water that it cannot be navigated. From Cape
+Comorin to the island of Ceylon, the distance is 120 miles.
+
+[Footnote 149: By this account of the matter, the land of _Chilao_
+appears to be the island of Ramiseram, between which and the island of
+Manaar extends a reef of rocks called _Adams Bridge_. The deep channel
+is between Ramiseram and the point of _Tanitory_ on the Coromandel
+coast.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XI.
+
+_Of the Island of Ceylon_
+
+
+In my judgment, the island of Ceylon is a great deal larger than Cyprus.
+On the west side, facing India, is the city of Columba, the principal
+hold of the Portuguese, but without walls or enemies. In this city,
+which has a free port, dwells the lawful king of the whole island, who
+has become a Christian, and is maintained by the king of Portugal,
+having been deprived of his kingdom. The heathen king to whom this
+island formerly belonged was named _Madoni_, who had two sons named
+_Barbinas_ and _Ragine_. By acquiring the favour of the soldiers, the
+younger son Ragine usurped the kingdom, in prejudice of his father and
+elder brother, and became a great warrior. Formerly there were three
+kingdoms in this island. Those were, the kingdom of Cotta, with other
+dependent or conquered provinces: The kingdom of Candy, which had
+considerable power, and was allied to the Portuguese, the king being
+supposed a secret Christian: The third was the kingdom of
+_Gianisampatam_, or Jafnapatam. During thirteen years that _Ragine_
+ruled over this island, he became a great tyrant.
+
+The island of Ceylon produces fine cinnamon and abundance of pepper,
+with great quantities of _nuts_ and _aroche_[150]. They here make great
+quantities of _cayre_ of which ropes are manufactured, as formerly
+noticed. It likewise produces great store of that kind of crystal called
+_ochi de gati_ or cats eyes, and it is said to produce some rubies; but
+on my return thither from Pegu, I sold some rubies here for a good
+price, which I had bought in that country. Being desirous to see how the
+cinnamon is gathered from the trees, and happening to be there during
+the season when it is gathered, which is in the month of April; at this
+time the Portuguese were in the field making war on the king of the
+country, yet to satisfy my curiosity, I took a guide and went out into a
+wood about three miles from the city, where there grew great numbers of
+cinnamon trees intermixed among other wild trees. The cinnamon is a
+small tree not very high, and has leaves resembling those of the bay
+tree. In March or April, when the sap rises, the cinnamon or bark is
+taken from the trees. They cut the bark of the trees round about in
+lengths, from knot to knot, or from joint to joint, both above and
+below, and then easily strip it off with their hands, after which it is
+laid in the sun to dry. Yet for all this the tree does not die, but
+recovers a new bark by the next year. That which is gathered every year
+is the best cinnamon, as what remains upon the trees for two or three
+years becomes thick and coarse, and not so good as the other. In these
+woods there grows much pepper.
+
+[Footnote 150: The author probably here means cocoa-nuts and areka.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XII.
+
+_Of Negapatam._
+
+
+From the island of Ceylon a trade is carried on in small ships to
+Negapatam on the continent, and 72 miles off is a very great and
+populous city, full of Portuguese and native Christians, with many
+Gentiles.[151] Almost the only trade here is for rice and cotton cloth,
+which is carried to various countries. It formerly abounded in victuals,
+on which account many Portuguese resorted thither and built houses, as
+they could live there at small expense, but provisions have now become
+scarcer and dearer. This city belongs to a Gentile nobleman of the
+kingdom of Bijanagur, yet the Portuguese and other Christians are well
+treated, and have built churches, together with a monastery of the
+Franciscans. They live with great devotion, and are well accommodated
+with houses; yet are they among tyrants who may always do them much harm
+at their pleasure, as in reality happened to them in the year 1565. At
+that time the _nayer_ or lord of the city sent to demand from the
+citizens certain Arabian horses, which they refused; whereupon this lord
+gave out that he proposed to take a view of the sea, so that the poor
+citizens doubted some evil was meant against them by this unusual
+circumstance, dreading that he would plunder the city. Accordingly they
+embarked as fast as they could with all their goods and moveables,
+merchandise, jewels, and money, and put off from the shore. But to their
+great misfortune, a great storm arose next night, by which all their
+ships were driven on shore and wrecked, and all their goods which came
+to land were seized by the troops of this great lord, who had come down
+with his army to see the sea.
+
+[Footnote 151: It is not easy to say whether the author means to express
+that Negapatam is this great city 72 miles from Ceylon, or if he refers
+to another city 72 miles from Negapatam.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XIII.
+
+_Of Saint Thome and other places._
+
+
+Following my voyage from Negapatam 150 miles towards the east, I came to
+the house of the blessed apostle St Thomas[152], which is a church held
+in great devotion, and is even much reverenced by the Gentiles, for the
+great miracles which they have heard were performed by that holy
+apostle. Near to this church the Portuguese have built a city, which
+stands in the country that is subject to the king of Bijanagur. Though
+not large, this city, in my judgment, is the handsomest in all that part
+of India, having many good houses with fine gardens in the environs. The
+streets are large and in straight lines, with many well frequented
+churches; and the houses are built contiguous, each having a small door,
+so that every house is sufficiently defensible by the Portuguese against
+the natives. The Portuguese have no other property here beyond their
+houses and gardens, as the sovereignty, together with the customs on
+trade, belong to the king of Bijanagur. These customs are small and
+easy, and the country is very rich and has great trade. Every year there
+come to this port two or three very large and rich ships, besides many
+other small ships. One of these great ships goes to Pegu and the other
+to Malacca, laden with fine _bumbast_ or cotton cloth of all kinds, many
+of them being beautifully painted, and as it were _gilded_ with various
+colours, which grow the livelier the oftener they are washed. There is
+also other cotton cloth that is woven of divers colours and is of great
+value. They also make at St Thome a great quantity of red yarn, dyed
+with a root called _saia_, which never fades in its colour, but grows
+the redder the oftener it is washed. Most of this red yarn is sent to
+Pegu, where it is woven into cloth according to their own fashion, and
+at less cost than can be done at St Thome.
+
+[Footnote 152: St Thome, about 5 miles south from Madras, is about 160
+English miles nearly north from Negapatam.--E.]
+
+The shipping and landing of men and merchandise at St Thome is very
+wonderful to those who have not seen it before. The place is so
+dangerous that ordinary small barks or ships boats cannot be used, as
+these would be beaten to pieces; but they have certain high barks made
+on purpose, which they call _Masadie_ or _Mussolah_, made of small
+boards sewed together with small cords, in which the owners will embark
+either men or goods. They are laden upon dry land, after which the
+boatmen thrust the loaded boat into the stream, when with the utmost
+speed they exert themselves to row her out against the huge waves of the
+sea which continually best on that shore, and so carry them out to the
+ships. In like manner these _Masadies_ are laden at the ships with men
+and merchandise; and when they come near the shore, the men leap out
+into the sea to keep the bark right, that she may not cast athwart the
+shore, and keeping her right stem on, the surf of the sea sets her with
+her lading high and dry on the land without hurt or danger. Yet
+sometimes these boats are overset; but there can be but small loss on
+such occasions, as they lade but little at a time. All the goods carried
+outwards in this manner are securely covered with ox hides, to prevent
+any injury from wetting.
+
+In my return voyage in 1566, I went from Goa to Malacca in a ship or
+galleon belonging to the king of Portugal, which was bound for Banda to
+lade nutmegs and mace. From Goa to Malacca it is 1800 miles. We passed
+without the island of Ceylon and went through the channel of _Nicobar_,
+and then through the channel of _Sombrero_, past the island of Sumatra,
+called in old times _Taprobana_.[153] Nicobar, off the coast of Pegu,
+consists of a great multitude of islands, many of which are inhabited by
+a wild people. These islands are likewise called _Andemaon_ or
+Andaman.[154] The natives are savages who eat each other, and are
+continually engaged in war, which they carry on in small boats, chiefly
+to make prisoners for their cannibal feasts. When by any chance a ship
+happens to be cast away on those islands, as many have been, the men are
+sure to be slain and devoured. These savages have no trade or
+intercourse with any other people, but live entirely on the productions
+of their own islands. In my voyage from Malacca through the channel of
+Sombrero, two boats came off from these islands to our ship laden with
+fruit, such as _Mouces_ which we call Adams apples, with fresh cocoa
+nuts, and another fruit named _Inani_, much like our turnips, but very
+sweet and good to eat. These people could not be prevailed on to come on
+board our ship, neither would they accept payment for their fruit in
+money, but bartered them for old shirts or old trowsers. These rags were
+let down from the ship into their boats by a rope, and when they had
+considered what they were worth in their estimation, they tied as much
+fruit as they thought proper to give in exchange to the rope, which they
+allowed us to hale up. I was told that sometimes a man may get a
+valuable piece of amber for an old shirt.
+
+[Footnote 153: The Taprobana or Sielendive of the ancients certainly was
+Ceylon, not Sumatra.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 154: The Andaman and Nicobar islands, in long. 93 deg. East from
+Greenwich, reach from the lat. of 6 deg. 45' to 15 deg. N.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XIV.
+
+_Of the Island of Sumatra and the City of Malacca_.
+
+
+The island of Sumatra is very large and is governed by many kings, being
+divided by many channels through which there is a passage[155]. Towards
+the west end is the kingdom of _Assi_ or _Acheen_, under a Mahometan
+king who has great military power, besides a great number of
+_foists_[156] and gallies. This kingdom produces large quantities of
+pepper, besides ginger and benzoin. The king is a bitter enemy to the
+Portuguese, and has frequently gone against Malacca, doing great injury
+to its dependent towns, but was always bravely resisted by the citizens,
+with great injury to his camp and navy, done by their artillery from the
+walls and batteries.
+
+[Footnote 155: This assertion is unintelligible, unless the author means
+to include a number of small islands off the coast as belonging to
+Sumatra.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 156: Foists are described as a kind of brigantines, rather
+larger than half gallies, and much used by the Turks and other eastern
+nations in those days for war. _Maons_, formerly mentioned among the
+ships of Soliman Pacha in the siege of Diu, are said to have been large
+flat-bottomed vessels or hulks, of 700 or 800 tons burden, having
+sometimes _seven_ mizen sails.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+Leaving Sumatra on the right hand, I came to Malacca, which is a city of
+wonderful trade in all kinds of merchandise from various parts, as all
+ships frequenting those seas whether large or small must stop at Malacca
+to pay customs, even though they do not load or unload any part of their
+cargoes at that place, just as all ships in Europe frequenting the
+Baltic must do at Elsineur. Should any pass under night without paying
+the dues at Malacca, they fall into great danger afterwards, if found
+any where in India without the _seal of Malacca_, having in that case to
+pay double duties.
+
+I have not gone beyond Malacca during my Indian peregrinations. Indeed
+the trade to the east of Malacca, particularly to China and Japan, is
+not free for all, being reserved by the king of Portugal to himself and
+his nobles, or to those who have special leave for this purpose from the
+king, who expects to know what voyages are made from Malacca eastwards.
+The royal voyages from Malacca eastwards are as follow. Every year two
+galleons belonging to the king depart from Malacca, one of which is
+bound for the Moluccas to lade cloves, and the other goes to Banda for
+nutmegs and mace. These two are entirely laden on the kings account, and
+do not take any goods belonging to individuals, saving only the
+privilege of the mariners and soldiers. Hence these voyages are not
+frequented by merchants, who would have no means of transporting their
+return goods, and besides the captains of these ships are not permitted
+to carry any merchants thither. There go however to these places some
+small ships belonging to the Moors from the coast of Java, who exchange
+or barter their commodities in the kingdom of Acheen. These are mace,
+cloves, and nutmegs, which are sent from Acheen to the Red Sea. The
+voyages which the king of Portugal grants to his nobles, are those from
+China to Japan and back to China, from China to India, and those of
+Bengal, the Moluccas, and Sunda, with fine cloth and all kinds of cotton
+goods.
+
+Sunda is an island of the Moors near the coast of Java, whence pepper is
+curried to China. The ship which goes yearly from India to China is
+called the _drug ship_, because she carries various drugs of Cambaia,
+but her principal lading consists of silver. From Malacca to China the
+distance is 1800 miles; and from China there goes every year a large
+ship to Japan laden with silk, in return for which she brings back bars
+of silver which are bartered in China for goods. The distance between
+Japan and China is 2400 miles, in which sea there are several islands of
+no great size, in which the friars of St Paul, by the blessing of God,
+have made many Christians _like themselves_: But from these islands the
+seas have not been fully explored and discovered, on account of the
+great numbers of shoals and sand banks [157].
+
+[Footnote 157: The text in this place it erroneous or obscure. The
+indicated distance between China and Japan is enormously exaggerated,
+and probably ought to have been stated as between Malacca and Japan. The
+undiscovered islands and shoals seem to refer to the various islands
+between Java and Japan, to the east and north.--E.]
+
+The Portuguese have a small city named Macao on an island near the
+coast of China, in which the church and houses are built of wood. This
+is a bishopric, but the customs belong to the king of China, and are
+payable at the city of Canton, two days journey and a half from Macao,
+and a place of great importance. The people of China are heathens, and
+are so fearful and jealous that they are unwilling to permit any
+strangers to enter their country. Hence when the Portuguese go there to
+pay their customs and to buy goods, they are not allowed to lodge within
+the city, but are sent out to the suburbs. This country of China, which
+adjoins to great Tartary, is of vast size and importance, as may be
+judged by the rich and precious merchandise which comes from thence,
+than which I believe there are none better or more abundant in quantity
+in all the world besides. In the first place it affords great quantities
+of gold, which is carried thence to the Indies made into small plates
+_like little ships_, and in value 23 _carats_ each[158]; large
+quantities of fine silk, with damasks and taffetas; large quantities of
+musk and of _occam_[159] in bars, quicksilver, cinabar, camphor,
+porcelain in vessels of divers sorts, painted cloth, and squares, and
+the drug called Chinaroot. Every year two or three large ships go from
+China to India laden with these rich and precious commodities. Rhubarb
+goes from thence over land by way of Persia, as there is a caravan every
+year from Persia to China, which takes six months to go there and as
+long to return. This caravan arrives at a place called _Lanchin_, where
+the king and his court reside. I conversed with a Persian who had been
+three years in that city of _Lanchin_, and told me that it was a city of
+great size and wealth.
+
+[Footnote 158: Perhaps the author may have expressed _of 23 carats
+fine_.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 159: Perhaps the mixed metal called tutenag may be here
+meant.--E.]
+
+The voyages which are under the jurisdiction of the captain of Malacca
+are the following. Every year he sends a small ship to Timor to load
+white sandal wood, the best being to be had in that island. He also
+sends another small ship yearly to Cochin-China for aloes wood, which is
+only to be procured in that country, which is on the continent adjoining
+to China. I could never learn in what manner that wood grows, as the
+people of Cochin-China will not allow the Portuguese to go into the
+land except for wood and water, bringing provisions and merchandise and
+all other things they want to their ships in small barks, so that a
+market is held daily on the deck of the ship till she is laden. Another
+ship goes yearly from Malacca for Siam to lade _Verzino_[160]. All these
+voyages belong exclusively to the captain of Malacca, and when he is not
+disposed to make them on his own account he sells them to others.
+
+[Footnote 160: From another part of this voyage it appears that this is
+some species of seed from which oil was expressed.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XV.
+
+_Of the City of Siam_.
+
+
+Siam was the imperial seat of the kingdom of that name and a great city,
+till the year 1567, when it was taken by the king of Pegu, who came by
+land with a prodigious army of 1,400,000 men, marching for four months,
+and besieged Siam for twenty-two mouths, during which he lost a vast
+number of men, and at lost won the city. I happened to be in the city of
+Pegu about six months after his departure on this expedition, and saw
+the governors left by him in the command of Pegu send off 500,000 men,
+to supply the places of those who were slain in this siege. Yet after
+all he would not have won the place unless for treachery, in consequence
+of which one of the gates was left open, through which he forced his way
+with great trouble into the city. When the king of Siam found that he
+was betrayed and that his enemy had gained possession of the city, he
+poisoned himself. His wives and children, and all his nobles that were
+not slain during the siege, were carried captives to Pegu. I was there
+at the return of the king in triumph from this conquest, and his entry
+into Pegu was a goodly sight, especially the vast number of elephants
+laden with gold, silver, and jewels, and carrying the noblemen and women
+who were made captives at Siam.
+
+To return to my voyage. I departed from Malacca in a great ship bound
+for St Thome on the coast of Coromandel, and as at that time the captain
+of Malacca had intelligence that the king of Acheen meant to come
+against Malacca with a great fleet and army, he refused to allow any
+ships to depart. On this account we departed from Malacca under night
+without having made any provision of water; and being upwards of 400
+persons on board, we proposed to have gone to a certain island for
+water, but by contrary winds we were unable to accomplish this, and were
+driven about by the tempests for forty-two days, the mountains of
+_Zerzerline_ near the kingdom of _Orissa_, 500 miles beyond St Thome,
+being the first land we got sight of. So we came to Orissa with many
+sick, and had lost a great number for want of water. The sick generally
+died in four days illness. For the space of a year after, my throat
+continued sore and hoarse, and I could never satisfy my insatiable
+thirst. I judged the reason of this hoarseness to be from the continual
+use of sippets dipped in vinegar and oil, on which I sustained my life
+for many days. We had no scarcity of bread or wine; but the wines of
+that country are so hot that they cannot be drank without water, or they
+produce death. When we began to want water, I saw certain Moors who were
+officers in the ship who sold a small dish of water for a ducat, and I
+have afterwards seen a _bar_ of pepper, which is two quintals and a
+half, offered for a small measure, and it could not be had even at that
+price. I verily believe I must have died, together with my slave, whom I
+had bought at a high price, had I not sold him for half his value, that
+I might save his drink to supply my own urgent wants, and save my own
+life.
+
+
+SECTION XVI.
+
+_Of the Kingdom of Orissa and the River Ganges_.
+
+
+This was a fair and well regulated kingdom, through which a man might
+have travelled with gold in his hand without danger, so long as it was
+governed by its native sovereign who was a Gentile, and resided in the
+city of _Catecha_[161] six days journey inland. This king loved
+strangers, especially merchants who traded in his dominions, insomuch
+that he took no customs from them, neither did he vex them with any
+grievous impositions, only that each ship that came thither paid some
+small affair in proportion to her tonnage. Owing to this good treatment
+twenty-five ships, great and small, used to lade yearly in the port of
+Orissa, mostly with rice and with different kinds of white cotton
+cloths, oil of _zerzerline_ or _verzino_ which is made from a seed, and
+answers well for eating or frying fish, lac, long pepper, ginger, dry
+and candied mirabolans, and great store of cloth made from a kind of
+silk which grows on trees requiring no labour or cultivation, as when
+the _bole_ or round pod is grown to the size of an orange, all they have
+to do is to gather it. About sixteen years before this, the Pagan king
+of Orissa was defeated and slain and his kingdom conquered, by the king
+of _Patane_[162], who was also king of the greatest part of Bengal.
+After the conquest of Orissa, this king imposed a duty of 20 per centum
+on all trade, as had been formerly paid in his other dominions. But this
+king did not enjoy his acquisitions long, being soon conquered by
+another tyrant, who was the great Mogul of Delhi, Agra, and Cambaia,
+against whom the king of Patane made very little resistance.
+
+[Footnote 161: Cuttack, at the head of the Delta of the Mahamuddy or
+Gongah river, in lat. 20 deg. 32' N. lon. 86 deg. 9' E. is probably here meant,
+It is only about 45 miles from the sea, but might have been six days
+journey from the port where the author took shelter, which probably was
+Balasore.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 162: Probably so called from residing at Patna, called Patane
+in the text.--E.]
+
+Departing from Orissa I went to the harbour of _Piqueno_ in Bengal, 170
+miles to the east from Orissa. We went in the first place along the
+coast for 54 miles when we entered the river Ganges. From the mouth of
+this river to a place called _Satagan_, where the merchants assemble
+with their commodities, are 100 miles, to which place they row up the
+river along with the flood tide in _eighteen_ hours. This river ebbs and
+flows as it does in the Thames, and when the ebb begins, although their
+barks are light and propelled with oars like foists, they cannot row
+against the ebb tide, but must make fast to one of the banks of the
+river and wait for next flood. These boats are called _bazaras_ and
+_patuas_, and row as well as a galliot or any vessel I have ever seen.
+At the distance of a good tide rowing before reaching _Satagan_ we come
+to a place called _Buttor_, which ships do not go beyond, as the river
+is very shallow upwards. At _Buttore_ a village is constructed every
+year, in which all the houses and shops are made of straw, and have
+every necessary convenience for the use of the merchants. This village
+continues as long as the ships remain there; but when they depart for
+the Indies, every man goes to his plot of houses and sets them on fire.
+This circumstance seemed very strange to me; for as I passed up the
+river to _Satagan_, I saw this village standing, having a great
+multitude of people with many ships and bazars; and at my return along
+with the captain of the last ship, for whom I tarried, I was amazed to
+see no remains of the village except the appearance of the burnt houses,
+all having been razed and burnt.
+
+Small ships go up to _Satagan_ where they load and unload their cargoes.
+In this port of _Satagan_ twenty-five or thirty ships great and small
+are loaded yearly with rice, cotton cloths of various kinds, lac, great
+quantities of sugar, dried and preserved mirabolans, long pepper, oil of
+_Verzino_, and many other kinds of merchandise. The city of Satagan is
+tolerably handsome as a city of the Moors, abounding in every thing, and
+belonged formerly to the king of _Patane_ or _Patna_, but is now subject
+to the great Mogul. I was in this kingdom four months, where many
+merchants bought or hired boats for their convenience and great
+advantage, as there is a fair every day in one town or city of the
+country. I also hired a bark and went up and down the river in the
+prosecution of my business, in the course of which I saw many strange
+things.
+
+The kingdom of Bengal has been long under the power of the Mahomedans,
+yet there are many Gentile inhabitants. Wherever I speak of Gentiles I
+am to be understood as signifying idolaters, and by Moors I mean the
+followers of Mahomet. The inhabitants of the inland country do greatly
+worship the river Ganges; for if any one is sick, he is brought from the
+country to the banks of the river, where they build for him a cottage of
+straw, and every day they bathe him in the river. Thus many die at the
+side of the Ganges, and after their death they make a heap of boughs and
+sticks on which they lay the dead body and then set the pile on fire.
+When the dead body is half roasted, it is taken from the fire, and
+having an empty jar tied about its neck is thrown into the river. I saw
+this done every night for two months as I passed up and down the river
+in my way to the fairs to purchase commodities from the merchants. On
+account of this practice the Portuguese do not drink the water of the
+Ganges, although it appears to the eye much better and clearer than that
+of the Nile.
+
+"Of _Satagan, Buttor_, and _Piqueno_, in the kingdom of Bengal, no
+notices are to be found in the best modern maps of that country, so that
+we can only approximate their situation by guess. Setting out from what
+the author calls the port of _Orissa_, which has already been
+conjectured to be Balasore, the author coasted to the river Ganges, at
+the distance of 54 miles. This necessarily implies the western branch of
+the Ganges, or _Hoogly_ river, on which the English Indian capital,
+_Calcutta_, now stands. _Satagan_ is said to have been 100 miles up the
+river, which would carry us up almost to the city of _Sautipoor_, which
+may possibly have been _Satagan_. The two first syllables of the name
+are almost exactly the same, and the final syllable in Sauti_poor_ is a
+Persian word signifying town, which may have been _gan_ in some other
+dialect. The entire distance from _Balasore_, or the port of Orissa, to
+_Piqueno_ is stated at 170 miles, of which 154 have been already
+accounted for, so that Piqueno must have been only about 16 miles above
+Satagan, and upon the Ganges[163]."--ED.
+
+[Footnote 163: These observations, distinguished by inverted commas, are
+placed in the text, as too long for a note.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XVII.
+
+_Of Tanasserim and other Places_.
+
+
+In continuation of my peregrinations, I sailed from the port of
+_Piqueno_ to Cochin, from whence I went to Malacca, and afterwards to
+Pegu, being 800 miles distant. That voyage is ordinarily performed in
+twenty-five or thirty days; but we were four months on the way, and at
+the end of three months we were destitute of provisions. The pilot
+alleged that, according to the latitude by his observation, we could not
+be far from _Tanassery_, or _Tanasserim_, a city in the kingdom of Pegu.
+In this he was mistaken, as we found ourselves in the middle of many
+islands and uninhabited rocks, yet some Portuguese who were on board
+affirmed that they knew the land, and could even point out where the
+city of Tanasserim stood. This city belongs of right to Siam, and is
+situated on the side of a great river, which comes from the kingdom of
+Siam. At the month of this river there is a village called _Mirgim,
+Merghi_, or _Morgui_, at which some ships load every year with
+_Verzino_, _Nypa_, and Benzoin, with a few cloves, nutmegs, and mace,
+that come from Siam; but the principal merchandise are _Verzino_ and
+_Nypa_. This last is an excellent wine, which is made from the flower of
+a tree called _Nyper_. They distil the liquor prepared from the _Nyper_,
+and make therewith an excellent drink, as clear as crystal, which is
+pleasant to the taste, and still better to the stomach, as it has most
+excellent virtues, insomuch that if a person were rotten with the lues,
+and drinks abundantly of this wine, he shall be made whole, as I have
+seen proved: For when I was in Cochin, the nose of a friend of mine
+began to drop off with that disease, on which he was advised by the
+physicians to go to Tanasserim at the season of the new wines, and to
+drink the _Nyper_ wine day and night, as much as he was able. He was
+ordered to use it before being distilled, when it is most delicate; for
+after distillation it become much stronger, and is apt to produce
+drunkenness. He went accordingly, and did as he was directed, and I have
+seen him since perfectly sound and well-coloured. It is very cheap in
+Pegu, where a great quantity is made every year; but being in great
+repute in the Indies, it is dear when carried to a distance.
+
+I now return to my unfortunate voyage, where we were among the
+uninhabited rocks and islands far from Tanasserim, and in great straits
+for victuals. From what was said by the pilot and two Portuguese, that
+we were directly opposite the harbour of Tanasserim, we determined to go
+thither in out boat to bring provisions, leaving orders to the ship to
+await our return. Accordingly, twenty-eight of us went into the boat,
+and left the ship about noon one day, expecting to get into the harbour
+before night; but, after rowing all that day and the next night, and all
+the ensuing day, we could find no harbour nor any fit place to land;
+for, trusting to the ignorant counsel of the pilot and the two
+Portuguese, we had overshot the harbour and left it behind us. In this
+way we twenty-eight unfortunate persons in the boat lost both our ship
+and the inhabited land, and were reduced to the utmost extremity, having
+no victuals along with us. By the good providence of God, one of the
+mariners in the boat had brought a small quantity of rice along with
+him, intending to barter it for some other thing, though the whole was
+so little that three or four men might have eaten it all at one meal. I
+took charge of this small store, engaging, with God's blessing, that it
+should serve to keep us all in life, till it might please God to send us
+to some inhabited place, and when I slept I secured it in my bosom, that
+I might not be robbed of my precious deposit. We were nine days rowing
+along the coast, finding nothing but an uninhabited country and desert
+islands, where even grass would have been esteemed a luxury in our
+miserable state. We found indeed some leaves of trees, but so hard that
+we could not chew them. We had wood and water enough, and could only row
+along with the flood tide, as when it ebbed we had to make fast our boat
+to one of the desert islands. On one of these days, it pleased God that
+we discovered a nest or hole, in which were 144 tortoise eggs, which
+proved a wonderful help to us, as they were as large as hens eggs,
+covered only by a tender skin, instead of a shell. Every day we boiled a
+kettle full of these eggs, mixing a handful of rice among the broth. At
+the end of nine days, it pleased God that we discovered some fishermen
+in small barks, employed in catching fish. We rowed immediately towards
+them with much delight and thankfulness, for never were men more glad
+than we, being so much reduced by famine that we could hardly stand on
+our legs; yet, according to the allotment we had made of our rice, we
+still had as much as would have served four days. The first village we
+came to was in the gulf of _Tavay_, on the coast of Tanasserim, in the
+dominions of Pegu, where we found plenty of provisions; yet for two or
+three days after our arrival none of us could eat much, and most of us
+were at the point of death. From Tavay to _Martaban_, in the kingdom of
+Pegu, the distance is 72 miles[164]. We loaded our boat at Tavay with
+provisions sufficient for six months, and then went in our boat to the
+city and port of Martaban, in the kingdom of Pegu, and arrived there in
+a short time. But not finding our ship there as we hoped, we dispatched
+two barks in search of her. They found her in great calamity at an
+anchor, with a contrary wind, which was exceedingly unfortunate for the
+people, especially as they had been a whole month without a boat, which
+prevented them from making any provision of wood and water. The ship,
+however, arrived safe, by the blessing of God, in the harbour of
+Martaban.
+
+[Footnote 164: On the coast of Tanasserim, in lat. 13 deg. N. is an island
+called _Tavay_, so that the gulf of Tavay in the text was probably in
+that neighbourhood. Martaban is in lat. 16 deg. 40' N. So that the
+difference of latitude is 8 deg. 40', and the distance cannot be less than
+250 miles.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XVIII
+
+_Of Martaban and the Kingdom of Pegu._
+
+
+On our arrival at Martaban we found about ninety Portuguese there,
+including merchants and lower people, who had fallen at variance with
+the governor of the city, because certain vagabond Portuguese had slain
+five _falchines,_ or porters, belonging to the king of Pegu. According
+to the custom of that country, when the king of Pegu happens to be at a
+distance from his capital, a caravan, or company of _falchines_, is
+dispatched every fifteen days, each of them having a basket on his head
+full of fruit or some other delicacy, or clean clothes for the king's
+use. It accordingly happened, about a month after the king of Pegu had
+gone against Siam, with 1,400,000 men, that one of these caravans stopt
+at Martaban, to rest for the night. On this occasion a quarrel ensued
+between them and some Portuguese, which ended in blows, and the
+Portuguese being worsted, returned upon the _falchines_ in the night,
+while they were asleep, and cut off five of their heads. There is a law
+in Pegu, that whosoever sheds the blood of a man, shall pay the price of
+blood according to the rank of the person slain: but as these
+_falchines_ were the servants of the king, the governor of Martaban
+durst not do any thing in the matter without the king's orders. The king
+was accordingly informed of the affair, and gave orders that the
+malefactors should be kept in custody till his return, when he would
+duly administer justice, but the captain of the Portuguese refused to
+deliver up these men to the governor, and even armed himself and the
+other Portuguese, marching every day about the city, with drums beating
+and displayed colours, as in despite of the governor, who was unable to
+enforce his authority, as the city was almost empty of men, all who were
+fit for war having gone with the vast army against Siam.
+
+We arrived at Martaban in the midst of this difference, and I thought it
+a very strange thing to see the Portuguese behave themselves with such
+insolence in the city of a sovereign prince. Being very doubtful of the
+consequences, I did not think proper to land my goods, which I
+considered in greater safety on board ship than on shore. Most part of
+the goods on board belonged to the owner, who was at Malacca; but there
+were several merchants in the ship who had goods, though none of them
+had to any great value, and all of them declared they would not land any
+of their goods unless I landed mine; yet they afterwards neglected my
+advice and example, and landed their goods, all of which were
+accordingly lost. The governor and intendant of the custom-house sent
+for me, and demanded to know why I did not land my goods, and pay the
+duties like the rest; on which I said that I was a stranger, only new to
+the country, and observing so much disorder among the Portuguese, I was
+afraid to lose my goods, which I was determined not to bring on shore,
+unless the governor would promise me in the king's name that no harm
+should come to me or my goods, whatever might happen to the Portuguese,
+with whom I had taken no part in the late tumult. As what I said seemed
+reasonable, the governor sent for the _Bargits_, who are the councillors
+of the city, who engaged, in the name of the king, that neither I nor my
+goods should meet with any injury, and of which they made a notarial
+entry or memorandum. I then sent for my goods, and paid the customs,
+which is ten per centum of the value at that port; and for my greater
+security I hired a house for myself and my goods, directly facing the
+house of the governor.
+
+In the sequel, the captain of the Portuguese and all the merchants of
+that nation, were driven out of the city, in which I remained, along
+with twenty-one poor men, who were officers in the ship I came in from
+Malacca. The Gentiles had determined on being revenged of the Portuguese
+for their insolence, but had delayed till all the goods were landed from
+our ship; and the very next night there arrived four thousand soldiers
+from Pegu, with some war elephants. Before these made any stir in the
+city, the governor issued orders to all the Portuguese, in case of
+hearing any noise or clamour in the city, not to stir from their houses
+on pain of death. About four hours after sunset, I heard a prodigious
+noise and tumult of men and elephants, who were bursting open the doors
+of the Portuguese warehouses, and overturning their houses of wood and
+straw, in which tumult some of the Portuguese were wounded, and one of
+them slain. Many of those who had before boasted of their courage, now
+fled on board some small vessels in the harbour, some of them fleeing
+naked from their beds. That night the Peguers carried all the goods
+belonging to the Portuguese from the suburbs into the city, and many of
+the Portuguese were likewise arrested. After this, the Portuguese who
+had fled to the ships resumed courage, and, landing in a body, set fire
+to the houses in the suburbs, and as these were entirely composed of
+boards covered with straw, and the wind blew fresh at the time, the
+entire suburbs were speedily consumed, and half of the city had like to
+have been destroyed. After this exploit, the Portuguese had no hopes of
+recovering any part of their goods, which might amount to the value of
+16,000 ducats, all of which they might assuredly have got back if they
+had not set the town on fire.
+
+Understanding that the late seizure of their goods had been done by the
+sole authority of the governor of Martaban, without authority from the
+king of Pegu, they were sensible of the folly of their proceedings in
+setting the town on fire; yet next morning they began to discharge their
+cannon against the town, and continued their cannonade for four days,
+yet all in vain, as their balls were intercepted by the top of a small
+hill or rising ground which intervened, and did no harm to the city. At
+this time the governor arrested the twenty-one Portuguese who were in
+the city, and sent them to a place four miles up the country, where they
+were detained till such time as the other Portuguese departed with their
+ships, after which they were allowed to go where they pleased, having no
+farther harm done them. During all these turmoils I remained quietly in
+my house, under the protection of a strong guard appointed by the
+governor, to prevent any one from doing harm to me or my goods. In this
+manner he effectually performed the promise he had made me in the king's
+name; but he would on no account permit me to depart till the king
+returned from Siam to Pegu, which was greatly to my hindrance, as I
+remained twenty-one months under sequestration, during all which time I
+could neither buy nor sell any kind of goods whatever. Those commodities
+which I had brought with me were pepper, sandal wood, and porcelain of
+China. At length, when the king came back to Pegu, I made my
+supplication to him, and had liberty to go when and where I pleased.
+Accordingly, I immediately departed from Martaban for Pegu, the capital
+city of the kingdom of that name, being a voyage by sea of three or four
+days. We may likewise go by land between these two places, but it is
+much better and cheaper for anyone that has goods to transport, as I
+had, to go by sea.
+
+In this short voyage we meet with the _Macareo_, or _bore_ of the sea,
+which is one of the most marvellous of the works of nature, and one of
+these hardest to be believed if not seen. This consists in the
+prodigious increase and diminution of the water of the sea all at one
+push or instant, and the horrible noise and earthquake which this
+Macareo produces when it makes its approach. We went from Martaban in
+barks like our pilot boats, taking the flood tide along with us, and
+they went with the most astonishing rapidity, as swift as an arrow from
+a bow as long as the flow lasts. Whenever the water is at the highest,
+these barks are carried out of the mid-channel to one or other bank of
+the river, where they anchor out of the way of the stream of the ebb,
+remaining dry at low water; and when the ebb is completely run out, then
+are the barks left on high above the water in the mid-channel, as far as
+the top of a house is from the foundation. The reason of thus anchoring
+so far from the mid-stream or channel is, that when the first of the
+flood, Macareo or bore, comes in, any ship or vessel riding in the fair
+way or mid-channel would surely be overthrown and destroyed. And even
+with this precaution of anchoring so far above the channel, so that the
+bore has lost much of its force before rising so high as to float them,
+yet they always moor with their bows to the stream, which still is often
+so powerful as to put them in great fear; for if the anchor did not hold
+good, they would be in the utmost danger of being lost. When the water
+begins to increase, it comes on with a prodigious noise as if it were an
+earthquake. In its first great approach it makes three great waves. The
+first wave washes over the bark from stem to stem: The second is not so
+strong; at the third they raise the anchor and resume their voyage up
+the river, rowing with such swiftness that they seem to fly for the
+space of six hours, while the flood lasts. In these tides there must be
+no time lost, for if you arrive not at the proper station before the
+flood is spent, you must turn back from whence you came, as there is no
+staying at any place except at these stations, some of which are more
+dangerous than others, according as they happen to be higher or lower.
+On returning from Pegu to Martaban they never continue more than half
+ebb, that they may have it in their power to lay their barks high upon
+the bank, for the reason already given. I could never learn any reason
+for the prodigious noise made by the water in this extraordinary rise of
+the tide. There is another Macareo in the gulf of Cambay, as formerly
+mentioned, but it is nothing in comparison of this in the river of Pegu.
+
+With the blessing of God we arrived safe at Pegu, which consists of two
+cities, the old and the new, all the merchants of the country and
+stranger merchants residing in the old city, in which is far the
+greatest trade. The city itself is not very large, but it has very great
+suburbs. The houses are all built of canes, and covered with leaves or
+straw; but every merchant has one house or magazine, called _Godown_,
+built of bricks, in which they secure their most valuable commodities,
+to save them from fire, which frequently happens to houses built of such
+combustible materials.
+
+In the new city is the royal palace, in which the king dwells, with all
+his nobles and officers of state, and attendants. While I was there the
+building of the new city was completed. It is of considerable size,
+built perfectly square upon an uniform level, and walled round, having a
+wet ditch on the outside, filled with crocodiles, but there are no
+draw-bridges. Each side of the square has five gates, being twenty in
+all; and there are many places on the walls for centinels, built of
+wood, and gilded over with gold. The streets are all perfectly straight,
+so that from any of the gates you can see clear through to the opposite
+gate, and they are so broad that 10 or 12 horsemen may ride abreast with
+ease. The cross streets are all equally broad and straight, and on each
+side of all the streets close to the houses there is a row of cocoa-nut
+trees, making a most agreeable shade. The houses are all of wood,
+covered with a kind of tiles, in the form of cups, very necessary and
+useful in that country. The palace is in the middle of the city, walled
+round like a castle, the lodgings within being built of wood, all over
+gilded, and richly adorned with pinnacles of costly work, covered all
+over with gold, so that it may truly be called a king's house. Within
+the gate is a large handsome court, in which are lodges for the
+strongest and largest elephants, which are reserved for the king's use,
+among which are four that are entirely white, a rarity that no other
+king can boast of; and were the king of Pegu to hear that any other king
+had white elephants, he would send and demand them as a gift. While I
+was there two such were brought out of a far distant country, which cost
+me something for a sight of them, as the merchants were commanded to go
+to see them, and every one was obliged to give something to the keepers.
+The brokers gave for every merchant half a ducat, which they call a
+_tansa_, and this produced a considerable sum, as there were a great
+many merchants in the city. After paying the _tansa_, they may either
+visit the elephants or not as they please, as after they are put into
+the king's stalls, every one may see them whenever they will. But before
+this, every one mast go to see them, such being the royal pleasure.
+Among his other titles, this king is called _King of the White
+Elephants_; and it is reported that if he knew of any other king having
+any white elephants who would not resign them to him, he would hazard
+his whole kingdom to conquer them. These white elephants are so highly
+esteemed that each of them has a house gilded all over, and they are
+served with extraordinary care and attention in vessels of gold and
+silver. Besides these white elephants, there is a black one of most
+extraordinary size, being _nine cubits high_. It is reported that this
+king has four thousand war elephants, all of which have teeth. They are
+accustomed to put upon their uppermost teeth certain sharp spikes of
+iron, fastened on with rings, because these animals fight with their
+teeth. He has also great numbers of young elephants, whose teeth are not
+yet grown.
+
+In this country they have a curious device for hunting or taking
+elephants, which is erected about two miles from the capital. At that
+place there is a fine palace gilded all over, within which is a
+sumptuous court, and all round the outside there are a great number of
+places for people to stand upon to see the hunting. Near this place is a
+very large wood or forest, through which a great number of the king's
+huntsmen ride on the backs of female elephants trained on purpose, each
+huntsman having five or six of these females, and it is said that their
+parts are anointed with a certain composition, the smell of which so
+powerfully attracts the wild males that they cannot leave them, but
+follow them wheresoever they go. When the huntsmen find any of the wild
+elephants so entangled, they guide the females towards the palace, which
+is called a _tambell_, in which there is a door which opens and shuts by
+machinery, before which door there is a long straight passage having
+trees on both sides, so that it is very close and dark. When the wild
+elephant comes to this avenue, he thinks himself still in the woods. At
+the end of this avenue there is a large field, and when the hunters have
+enticed their prey into this field, they immediately send notice to the
+city, whence come immediately fifty or sixty horsemen, who beset the
+field all round. Then the females which are bred to this business go
+directly to the entry of the dark avenue, and when the wild male
+elephant has entered therein, the horsemen shout aloud and make as much
+noise as possible to drive the wild elephant forward to the gate of the
+palace, which is then open, and as soon as he is gone in, the gate is
+shut without any noise. The hunters, with the female elephants and the
+wild one, are all now within the court of the palace, and the females
+now withdraw one by one from the court, leaving the wild elephant alone,
+finding himself thus alone and entrapped, he is so madly enraged for two
+or three hours, that it is wonderful to behold. He weepeth, he flingeth,
+he runneth, he jostleth, he thrusteth under the galleries where the
+people stand to look at him, endeavouring all he can to kill some of
+them, but the posts and timbers are all so strong that he cannot do harm
+to any one, yet he sometimes breaks his teeth in his rage. At length,
+wearied with violent exertions, and all over in a sweat, he thrusts his
+trunk into his mouth, and sucks it full of water from his stomach, which
+he then blows at the lookers on. When he is seen to be much exhausted,
+certain people go into the court, having long sharp-pointed canes in
+their hands, with which they goad him that he may enter into one of the
+stalls made for the purpose in the court, which are long and narrow, so
+that he cannot turn when once in. These men must be very wary and agile,
+for though their canes are long, the elephants would kill them if they
+were not swift to save themselves. When they have got him into one of
+the stalls, they let down ropes from a loft above, which they pass under
+his belly, about his neck, and round his legs, to bind him fast, and
+leave him there for four or five days without meat or drink. At the end
+of that time, they loosen all the cords, put one of the females in
+beside him, giving them meat and drink, and in eight days after he is
+quite tame and tractable. In my opinion, there is not any animal so
+intelligent as the elephant, nor of so much capacity and understanding,
+for he will do every thing that his keeper desires, and seems to lack
+nothing of human reason except speech.
+
+It is reported that the great military power of the king of Pegu mainly
+depends on his elephants; as, when he goes to battle, each elephant has
+a castle set on his back, bound securely with bands under his belly, and
+in every castle four men are placed, who fight securely with
+arquebusses, bows and arrows, darts, and pikes, or other missile
+weapons; and it is alleged that the skin of the elephant is so hard and
+thick as not to be pierced by the ball of an arquebuss, except under the
+eyes, on the temples, or in some other tender part of the body. Besides
+this, the elephants are of great strength, and have a very excellent
+order in time of battle, as I have seen in their festivals, which they
+make every year, which is a rare sight worth mention, that among so
+barbarous a people there should be such goodly discipline as they have
+in their armies; which are drawn up in distinct and orderly squares, of
+elephants, horsemen, pikemen, and arquebuseers, the number of which is
+infinite and beyond reckoning; but their armour and weapons are
+worthless and weak. Their pikes are very bad, and their swords worse,
+being like long knives without points; yet their arquebusses are very
+good, the king having 80,000 men armed with that weapon, and the number
+is continually increasing. They are ordained to practise daily in
+shooting at a mark, so that by continual exercise they are wonderfully
+expert. The king of Pegu has also great cannon made of very good metal;
+and, in fine, there is not a king in the world who has more power or
+strength than he, having twenty-six crowned kings under his command, and
+he is able to take the field against his enemies with a million and a
+half of soldiers. The state and splendour of this kingdom, and the
+provisions necessary for so vast a multitude of soldiers, is a thing
+incredible, except by those who know the nature and quality of the
+people and government. I have seen with my own eyes these people, both
+the commons and soldiers, feed upon all kinds of beasts or animals,
+however filthy or unclean, everything that hath life serving them for
+food: Yea, I have even seen them eat scorpions and serpents, and all
+kinds of herbs, even grass. Hence, if their vast armies can only get
+enough of water, they can maintain themselves long even in the forests,
+on roots, flowers, and leaves of trees; but they always carry rice with
+them in their marches, which is their main support.
+
+The king of Pegu has no naval force; but for extent of dominion, number
+of people, and treasure of gold and silver, he far exceeds the Grand
+Turk in power and riches. He has various magazines full of treasure in
+gold and silver, which is daily increased, and is never diminished. He
+is also lord of the mines of rubies, sapphires, and spinels. Near the
+royal palace there is an inestimable treasure, of which he seems to make
+no account, as it stands open to universal inspection. It is contained
+in a large court surrounded by a stone wall, in which are two gates that
+stand continually open. Within this court there are four gilded houses
+covered with lead, in each of which houses are certain heathen idols of
+very great value. The first house contains an image of a man of vast
+size all of gold, having a crown of gold on his head enriched with most
+rare rubies and sapphires, and round about him are the images of four
+little children, all likewise of gold. In the second house is the statue
+of a man in massy silver, which seems to sit on heaps of money. This
+enormous idol, though sitting, is as lofty as the roof of a house. I
+measured his feet, which I found exceeded that of my own stature; and
+the head of this statue bears a crown similar to that of the former
+golden image. The third house has a brazen image of equal size, having a
+similar crown on its head. In the fourth house is another statue as
+large as the others, made of gansa, or mixed metal of copper and lead,
+of which the current money of the country is composed, and this idol has
+a crown on its head as rich and splendid as the others. All this
+valuable treasure is freely seen by all who please to go in and look at
+it, as the gates are always open, and the keepers do not refuse
+admission to any one.
+
+Every year the king of Pegu makes a public triumph after the following
+manner. He rides out on a triumphal car or great waggon, richly gilded
+all over, and of great height, covered by a splendid canopy, and drawn
+by sixteen horses, richly caparisoned. Behind the car walk twenty of his
+nobles or chief officers, each of whom holds the end of a rope, the
+other end being fastened to the car to keep it upright and prevent it
+from falling over. The king sits on high in the middle of the car, and
+on the same are four of his most favoured nobles surrounding him. Before
+the car the whole army marches in order, and the whole nobles of the
+kingdom are round about the car; so that it is wonderful to behold so
+many people and so much riches all in such good order, especially
+considering how barbarous are the people. The king of Pegu has one
+principal wife, who lives in a seraglio along with 300 concubines, and
+he is said to have 90 children. He sits every day in person to hear the
+suits of his people, yet he nor they never speak together. The king
+sits up aloft on a high seat or tribunal in a great hall, and lower down
+sit all his barons round about. Those that demand audience enter into
+the great court or hall in presence of the king, and sit down on the
+ground at forty paces from the king, holding their supplications in
+their hands, written on the leaves of a tree three quarters of a yard
+long and two fingers broad, on which the letters are written or
+inscribed by means of a sharp stile or pointed iron. On these occasions
+there is no respect of persons, all of every degree or quality being
+equally admitted to audience. All suitors hold up their supplication in
+writing, and in their hands a present or gift, according to the
+importance of their affairs. Then come the secretaries, who take the
+supplications from the petitioners and read them to the king; and if he
+thinks good to grant the favour or justice which they desire, he
+commands to have the gifts taken from their hands; but if he considers
+their request not just or reasonable, he commands them to depart without
+receiving their presents.
+
+There is no commodity in the Indies worth bringing to Pegu, except
+sometimes the opium of Cambay, and if any one bring money he is sure to
+lose by it. The only merchandise for this market is the fine painted
+calicos of San Thome, of that kind which, on being washed, becomes more
+lively in its colours. This is so much in request, that a small bale of
+it will sell for 1000 or even 2000 ducats. Also from San Thome they send
+great store of cotton yarn, dyed red by means of a root called _saia_,
+which colour never washes out. Every year there goes a great ship from
+San Thome to Pegu laden with a valuable cargo of these commodities. If
+this ship depart from San Thome by the 6th of September, the voyage is
+sure to be prosperous; but if they delay sailing till the 12th, it is a
+great chance if they are not forced to return; for in these parts the
+winds blow firmly for certain times, so as to sail for Pegu with the
+wind astern; and if they arrive not and get to anchor before the wind
+change, they must perforce return back again, as the wind blows three or
+four months with great force always one way. If they once get to anchor
+on the coast, they may save their voyage with great labour. There also
+goes a large ship from Bengal every year, laden with all kinds of fine
+cotton cloth, and which usually arrives in the river of Pegu when the
+ship of San Thome is about to depart. The harbour which these two ships
+go to is called _Cosmin_. From Malacca there go every year to Martaban,
+which is a port of Pegu, many ships, both large and small, with pepper,
+sandal-wood, porcelain of China, camphor, _bruneo_[165], and other
+commodities. The ships that come from the Red Sea frequent the ports of
+Pegu and Ciriam, bringing woollen cloths, scarlets, velvets, opium, and
+chequins, by which last they incur loss, yet they necessarily bring them
+wherewith to make their purchases, and they afterwards make great profit
+of the commodities which they take back with them, from Pegu. Likewise
+the ships of the king of Acheen bring pepper to the same ports.
+
+[Footnote 165: Perhaps we ought to read in the text _camphor of
+Perneo_.--E.]
+
+From San Thome or Bengal, _out of the sea of Bara_? to Pegu, the voyage
+is 300 miles, and they go up the river, with the tide of flood in four
+days to the city of _Cosmin_, where they discharge their cargoes, and
+thither the _customers_ of Pegu come and take notes of all the goods of
+every one, and of their several marks; after which they transport the
+goods to Pegu to the royal warehouses, where the customs of all the
+goods are taken. When the _customers_ have taken charge of the goods,
+and laden them in barks for conveyance to Pegu, the governor of the city
+gives licences to the merchants to accompany their goods, when three or
+four of them club together to hire a bark for their passage to Pegu.
+Should any one attempt to give in a wrong note or entry of his goods,
+for the purpose of stealing any custom, he is utterly undone, as the
+king considers it a most unpardonable offence to attempt depriving him
+of any part of his customs, and for this reason the goods are all most
+scrupulously searched, and examined three several times. This search is
+particularly rigid in regard to diamonds, pearls, and other articles of
+small bulk and great value, as all things, in Pegu that are not of its
+own productions pay custom both in or out. But rubies, sapphires, and
+spinels, being productions of the country, pay no duties. As formerly
+mentioned respecting other parts of India, all merchants going to Pegu
+or other places, must carry with them all sorts of household furniture
+of which they may be in need, as there are no inns or lodging-houses in
+which they can he accommodated, but every man must hire a house when he
+comes to a city, for a month or a year, according to the time he means
+to remain. In Pegu it is customary to hire a house for six months.
+
+From Cosmin to Pegu they go up the river with the flood in six
+hours[166]; but if the tide of ebb begin it is necessary to fasten the
+bark to the river side, and to remain there till the next flood. This is
+a commodious and pleasant passage, as there are many large villages on
+both sides of the river which might even be called cities, and in which
+poultry, eggs, pigeons, milk, rice, and other things may be had on very
+reasonable terms. The country is all level and fertile, and in eight
+days we get up to _Macceo_ which is twelve miles from. Pegu, and the
+goods are there landed from the barks, being carried thence to Pegu in
+carts or wains drawn by oxen. The merchants are conveyed from _Macceo_
+to Pegu in close palanquins, called _delings_ or _doolies_, in each of
+which one man is well accommodated, having cushions to rest upon, and a
+secure covering from the sun or rain, so that he may sleep if he will.
+His four _falchines_ or bearers carry him along at a great rate, running
+all the way, changing at intervals, two and two at a time. The freight
+and customs at Pegu may amount to 20, 22, or 23 per centum, according as
+there may be more or less stolen of the goods on paying the customs. It
+is necessary therefore for one to be very watchful and to have many
+friends; for when the goods are examined for the customs in the great
+hall of the king, many of the Pegu gentlemen go in accompanied by their
+slaves, and these gentlemen are not ashamed when their slaves rob
+strangers, whether of cloth or any other thing, and only laugh at it
+when detected; and though the merchants assist each other to watch the
+safety of their goods, they cannot look so narrowly but some will steal
+more or less according to the nature or quality of the goods. Even if
+fortunate enough to escape being robbed by the slaves, it is impossible
+to prevent pilfering by the officers of the customs; for as they take
+the customs in kind, they oftentimes take the best, and do not rate each
+sort as they ought separately, so that the merchant is often, made to
+pay much more than he ought. After undergoing this search and deduction
+of the customs, the merchant causes his goods to be carried home to his
+house, where he may do with them what he pleases.
+
+[Footnote 166: From subsequent circumstances the text is obviously here
+incorrect, and ought to have been translated, that the flood tides run
+six hours; as it will be afterwards seen that the voyage to a place 12
+miles short of Pegu requires eight days of these tide trips of six]
+
+In Pegu there are eight brokers licenced by the king, named _tareghe_,
+who are bound to sell all the merchandise which comes there at the
+current prices; and if the merchants are willing to sell their goods at
+these rates they sell them out of hand, the brokers having _two per
+centum_ for their trouble, and for which they are bound to make good all
+debts incurred for the goods sold by them, and often the merchant does
+not know to whom his goods are sold. The merchants may indeed sell their
+own goods if they will; but in that case the broker is equally intitled
+to his two per centum, and the merchant must run his own risk of
+recovering his money. This however seldom happens, as the wife,
+children, and slaves of the debtor are all liable in payment. When the
+agreed time of payment arrives, if the debt is not cleared, the creditor
+may seize the person of the debtor and carry him home to his house, and
+if not immediately satisfied, he may take the wife, children, and slaves
+of the debtor and sell them. The current money through all Pegu is made
+of _ganza_, which is a composition of copper and lead, and which every
+one may stamp at his pleasure, as they pass by weight; yet are they
+sometimes falsified by putting in too much lead, on which occasions no
+one will receive them in payment. As there is no other money current,
+you may purchase gold, silver, rubies, musk, and all other things with
+this money. Gold and silver, like other commodities, vary in their
+price, being sometimes cheaper and sometimes dearer. This _ganza_ money
+is reckoned by _byzas_, each _byza_ being 100 _ganzas_, and is worth
+about half a ducat of our money, more or less according as gold is cheap
+or dear.
+
+When any one goes to Pegu to buy jewels, he will do well to remain there
+a whole year; for if he would return by the same ship, he can do very
+little to purpose in so short a time. Those who come from San Thome
+usually have their goods customed about Christmas, after which they must
+sell their goods, giving credit for a month or two, and the ships depart
+about the beginning of March. The merchants of San Thome generally take
+payment for their goods in gold and silver, which are always plentiful
+in Pegu. Eight or ten days before their departure they are satisfied for
+their goods. They may indeed have rubies in payment, but they make no
+account of them. Such as propose to winter in the country ought to
+stipulate in selling their goods for payment in two or three months, and
+that they are to be paid in so many _ganzas_, not in gold or silver, as
+every thing is most advantageously bought and sold by means of this
+_ganza_ money. It is needful to specify very precisely both the time of
+payment, and in what weight of ganzas they are to be paid, as an
+inexperienced person may be much imposed upon both in the weight and
+fineness of the _ganza_ money; for the weight rises and falls greatly
+from place to place, and he may be likewise deceived by false _ganzas_
+or too much alloyed with lead. For this reason, when any one is to
+receive payment he ought to have along with him a public weigher of
+money, engaged a day or two before he commences that business, whom he
+pays two _byzas_ a-month, for which he is bound to make good all your
+money and to maintain it good, as he receives it and seals the bags with
+his own seal, and when he has collected any considerable sum he causes
+it to be delivered to the merchant to whom it belongs. This money is
+very weighty, as forty _byzas_ make a porters burden. As in receiving,
+so in paying money, a public weigher of money must be employed.
+
+The merchandises exported from Pegu are gold, silver, rubies, sapphires,
+spinels, great quantities of benzoin, long-pepper, lead, lac, rice,
+wine, and some sugar. There might be large quantities of sugar made in
+Pegu, as they have great abundance of sugar-canes, but they are given as
+food to the elephants, and the people consume large quantities of them
+in their diet. They likewise spend many of these sugar-canes[167] in
+constructing houses and tents for their idols, which they call _varely_
+and we name pagodas. There are many of these idol houses, both large and
+small, which are ordinarily constructed in a pyramidical form, like
+little hills, sugar-loaves or bells, some of them being as high as an
+ordinary steeple. They are very large at the bottom, some being a
+quarter of a mile in compass. The inside of these temples are all built
+of bricks laid in clay mortar instead of lime, and filled up with earth,
+without any form or comeliness from top to bottom; afterwards they are
+covered with a frame of canes plastered all over with lime to preserve
+them from the great rains which fall in this country. Also about these
+_varely_ or idol-houses they consume a prodigious quantity of leaf gold,
+as all their roofs are gilded over, and sometimes the entire structure
+is covered from top to bottom; and as they require to be newly gilded
+every ten years, a prodigious quantity of gold is wasted on this
+vanity, which occasions gold to be vastly dearer in Pegu than it would
+be otherwise.
+
+[Footnote 167: This is certainly an error, and Cesar Frederick has
+mistaken the bamboo cane used in such erections for the sugar-cane.--E.]
+
+It may be proper to mention, that in buying jewels or precious stones in
+Pegu, he who has no knowledge or experience is sure to get as good and
+as cheap articles as the most experienced in the trade. There are four
+men at Pegu called _tareghe_ or jewel-brokers, who have all the jewels
+or rubies in their hands; and when any person wants to make a purchase
+he goes to one of these brokers, and tells him that he wants to lay out
+so much money on rubies; for these brokers have such prodigious
+quantities always on hand, that they know not what to do with them, and
+therefore sell them at a very low price. Then the broker carries the
+merchant along with him to one of their shops, where he may have what
+jewels he wants according to the sum of money he is disposed to lay out.
+According to the custom of the city, when the merchant has bargained for
+a quantity of jewels, whatever may be the amount of their value, he is
+allowed to carry them home to his house, where he may consider them for
+two or three days; and if he have not himself sufficient knowledge or
+experience in such things, he may always find other merchants who are
+experienced, with whom he may confer and take counsel, as he is at
+liberty to shew them to any person be pleases; and if he find that he
+has not laid out his money to advantage, he may return them back to the
+person from whom he had them without loss or deduction. It is reckoned
+so great a shame to the _tareghe_ or jewel-broker to have his jewels
+returned, that he would rather have a blow on the face than have it
+believed that he had sold his jewels too dear and have them returned on
+his hands; for which reason they are sure to give good bargains,
+especially to those who have no experience, that they may not lose their
+credit. When such merchants as are experienced in jewels purchase too
+dear it is their own fault, and is not laid to the charge of the
+brokers; yet it is good to have knowledge in jewels, as it may sometimes
+enable one to procure them at a lower price. On the occasions of making
+these bargains, as there are generally many other merchants present at
+the bargain, the broker and the purchaser have their hands under a
+cloth, and by certain signals, made by touching the fingers and nipping
+the different joints, they know what is bidden, what is asked, and what
+is settled, without the lookers-on knowing any thing of the matter,
+although the bargain may be for a thousand or ten thousand ducats. This
+is an admirable institution, as, if the lookers-on should understand
+what is going on, it might occasion contention.
+
+
+SECTION XIX.
+
+_Voyages of the Author to different parts of India._
+
+
+When I was at Pegu in August 1569, having got a considerable profit by
+my endeavours, I was desirous to return to my own country by way of St
+Thome, but in that case I should have been obliged to wait till next
+March; I was therefore advised to go by way of Bengal, for which country
+there was a ship ready to sail to the great harbour of Chittagong,
+whence there go small ships to Cochin in sufficient time to arrive there
+before the departure of the Portuguese ships for Lisbon, in which I was
+determined to return to Europe. I went accordingly on board the Bengal
+ship; but this happened to be the year of the _Tyffon_, which will
+require some explanation. It is therefore to be understood that in India
+they have, once every ten or twelve years, such prodigious storms and
+tempests as are almost incredible, except to such as have seen them,
+neither do they know with any certainty on what years they may be
+expected, but unfortunate are they who happen to be at sea when this
+tempest or _tyffon_ takes place, as few escape the dreadful danger. In
+this year it was our evil fortune to be at sea in one of these terrible
+storms; and well it was for us that our ship was newly _over-planked_,
+and had no loading save victuals and ballast, with some gold and silver
+for Bengal, as no other merchandise is carried to Bengal from Pegu. The
+tyffon accordingly assailed us and lasted three days, carrying away our
+sails, yards, and rudder; and as the ship laboured excessively, we
+cut away our mast, yet she continued to labour more heavily than before,
+so that the sea broke over her every moment, and almost filled her with
+water. For the space of three days and three nights, sixty men who were
+on board did nothing else than bale out the water continually, twenty at
+one place, twenty in another, and twenty at a third place; yet during
+all this storm so good was the hull of our ship that she took not in a
+single drop of water at her sides or bottom, all coming in at the
+hatches. Thus driving about at the mercy of the winds and waves, we were
+during the darkness of the third night at about four o'clock after
+sunset cast upon a shoal. When day appeared next morning we could see no
+land on any side of us, so that we knew not where we were. It pleased
+the divine goodness that a great wave of the sea came and floated us off
+from the shoal into deep water, upon which we all felt as men reprieved
+from immediate death, as the sea was calm and the water smooth. Casting
+the lead we found twelve fathoms water, and bye and bye we had only six
+fathoms, when we let go a small anchor which still hung at the stern,
+all the others having been lost during the storm. Our anchor parted next
+night, and our ship again grounded, when we shored her up the best we
+could, to prevent her from over-setting at the side of ebb.
+
+When it was day, we found our ship high and dry on a sand-bank, a full
+mile from the sea. When the _tyffon_ entirely ceased, we discovered an
+island not far from us, to which we walked on the sand, that we might
+learn where we were. We found it inhabited, and in my opinion the most
+fertile island I had ever seen. It is divided into two parts by a
+channel or water-course, which is full at high tides. With much ado we
+brought our ship into that channel; and when the people of the island
+saw our ship, and that we were coming to land, they immediately erected
+a bazar or market-place with shops right over-against the ship, to which
+they brought every kind of provisions for our supply, and sold them at
+wonderfully reasonable rates. I bought many salted kine as provision for
+the ship at half a _larine_ each, being all excellent meat and very fat,
+and four wild hogs ready dressed for a larine. The larine is worth about
+twelve shillings and sixpence. Good fat hens were bought for a _byza_
+each, which does not exceed a penny; and yet some of our people said
+that we were imposed upon, as we ought to have got every thing for half
+the money. We got excellent rice at an excessively low price, and indeed
+every article of food was at this place in the most wonderful abundance.
+The name of this island is _Sondiva_ or Sundeep, and belongs to the
+kingdom of Bengal, being 120 miles from Chittagong, to which place we
+were bound. The people are Moors or Mahometans, and the king or chief
+was a very good kind of man for a Mahometan; for if he had been a tyrant
+like others, he might have robbed us of all we had, as the Portuguese
+captain at Chittagong was in arms against the native chief of that
+place, and every day there were some persons slain. On receiving this
+intelligence, we were in no small fear for our safety, keeping good
+watch and ward every night, according to the custom of the sea; but the
+governor of the town gave us assurance that we had nothing to fear, for
+although the Portuguese had slain the governor or chief at Chittagong,
+we were not to blame, and indeed he every day did us every service and
+civility in his power, which we had no reason to expect, considering
+that the people of Sundeep and those of Chittagong were subjects of the
+same sovereign.
+
+Departing from Sundeep we came to Chittagong, by which time a peace or
+truce had been agreed upon between the Portuguese and the chiefs of the
+city, under condition that the Portuguese captain should depart with his
+ship without any lading. At this time there were 18 Portuguese ships of
+different sizes at that port, and the captain being a gentleman and a
+brave man, was contented to depart in this manner, to his material
+injury, rather than hinder so many of his friends and countrymen who
+were there, and likewise because, the season for going to Western India
+was now past. During the night before his departure, every ship that was
+in the port, and had any part of their lading on board, transshipped it
+to this captain to help to lessen his loss and bear his charges, in
+reward for his courteous behaviour on this occasion. At this time there
+came a messenger from the king of _Rachim_ or Aracan to this Portuguese
+captain, saying that his master had heard tidings of his great valour
+and prowess, and requesting him to bring his ship to the port of Aracan
+where he would be well received. The captain went thither accordingly,
+and was exceedingly well satisfied with his reception.
+
+The kingdom of Aracan is in the mid-way between Bengal and Pegu, and the
+king of Pegu is continually devising means of reducing the king of
+Aracan under subjection, which hitherto he has not been able to effect,
+as he has no maritime force, whereas the king of Aracan can arm two
+hundred galleys or foists; besides which he has the command of certain
+sluices or flood-gates in his country, by which he can drown a great
+part of his country when he thinks proper, when at any time the king of
+Pegu endeavours to invade his dominions, by which be cuts off the way
+by which alone the king of Pegu can have access.
+
+From the great port of Chittagong they export for India great quantities
+of rice, large assortments of cotton cloth of all sorts, with sugar,
+corn, money, and other articles of merchandise. In consequence of the
+war in Chittagong, the Portuguese ships were so long detained there,
+that they were unable to arrive at Cochin at the usual time; for which
+reason the fleet from Cochin was departed for Portugal before their
+arrival. Being in one of the smaller ships, which was somewhat in
+advance of our fleet from Chittagong, I came in sight of Cochin just as
+the very last of the homeward-bound fleet was under sail. This gave me
+much dissatisfaction, as there would be no opportunity of going to
+Portugal for a whole year; wherefore, on my arrival at Cochin, I was
+fully determined to go for Venice by way of Ormuz. At that time Goa was
+besieged by the troops of _Dialcan_ [Adel-khan,] but the citizens made
+light of this attack, as they believed it would not continue long. In
+the prosecution of my design, I embarked at Cochin in a galley bound for
+Goa; but on my arrival there the viceroy would not permit any Portuguese
+ship to sail for Ormuz on account of the war then subsisting, so that I
+was constrained to remain there.
+
+Soon after my arrival at Goa I fell into a severe sickness, which held
+me four months; and as my physic and diet in that time cost me 800
+ducats, I was under the necessity to sell some part of my rubies, for
+which I only got 500 ducats, though well worth 1000. When I began to
+recover my health and strength, very little of my money remained, every
+thing was so scarce and dear. Every chicken, and these not good, cost me
+seven or eight livres, or from six shillings to six and eightpence, and
+all other things in proportion; besides which the apothecaries, with
+their medicines, were a heavy charge upon me. At the end of six months
+the siege of Goa was raised, and as jewels rose materially in their
+price, _I began to work_[168]; and as before I had only sold a small
+quantity of inferior rubies to serve my necessities, I now determined to
+sell all the jewels I had, and to make another voyage to Pegu; and as
+opium was in great request at Pegu when I was there before, I went from
+Goa to Cambay, where I laid out 2100 ducats in the purchase of 60
+parcels of opium, the ducat being worth 4s. 2d. I likewise bought three
+bales of cotton cloth, which cost me 800 ducats, that commodity selling
+well in Pegu. When I had bought these things, I understood the viceroy
+had issued orders that the custom on opium should be paid at Goa, after
+which it might be carried anywhere else. I shipped therefore my three
+bales of cotton cloth at Chaul, in a vessel bound for Cochin, and went
+myself to Goa to pay the duty for my opium.
+
+[Footnote 168: From this expression it may be inferred, that besides his
+mercantile speculations in jewels, Cesar Frederick was a lapidary.--E.]
+
+From Goa I went to Cochin, in a ship that was bound for Pegu, and
+intended to winter at San Thome; but on my arrival at Cochin I learnt
+that the ship with my three bales of cotton cloth was cast away, so that
+I lost my 800 seraphins or ducats. On our voyage from Cochin to San
+Thome, while endeavouring to weather the south point of Ceylon, which
+lies far out to sea, the pilot was out in his reckoning, and laying-to
+in the night, thinking that he had passed hard by the Cape of Ceylon;
+when morning came we were far within the Cape, and fallen to leeward, by
+which it became now impossible to weather the island, as the wind was
+strong and contrary. Thus we lost our voyage for the season, and we were
+constrained to go to Manaar to winter there, the ship having lost all
+her masts, and being saved from entire wreck with great difficulty.
+Besides the delay and disappointment to the passengers, this was a heavy
+loss to the captain of the ship, as he was under the necessity of hiring
+another vessel at San Thome at a heavy charge, to carry us and our goods
+to Pegu. My companions and I, with all the rest of the merchants, hired
+a bark at Manaar to carry us to San Thome, where I received intelligence
+by way of Bengal, that opium was very scarce and dear in Pegu; and as
+there was no other opium but mine then at San Thome, for the Pegu
+market, all the merchants considered me as a very fortunate man, as I
+would make great profit, which indeed I certainly should have done, if
+my adverse fortune had not thwarted my well-grounded expectations, in
+the following manner: A large ship from Cambaya, bound for _Assi_
+[Acheen?] with a large quantity of opium, and to lade pepper in return,
+being forced to lay-to in crossing the mouth of the bay of Bengal, was
+obliged to go _roomer_[169] for 800 miles, by which means it went to
+Pegu, and arrived there one day before me. Owing to this circumstance,
+opium, which had been very dear in Pegu, fell to a very low price, the
+quantity which had sold before for 50 _bizze_ having fallen to 2-1/2, so
+large was the quantity brought by this ship. Owing to this unfortunate
+circumstance, I was forced to remain two years in Pegu, otherwise I must
+have given away my opium for much less than it cost me, and even at the
+end of that time I only made 1000 ducats by what had cost me 2100 in
+Cambaya.
+
+[Footnote 169: The meaning of this ancient nautical term is here clearly
+expressed, as drifting to leeward while laying-to.--E.]
+
+After this I went from Pegu to the Indies[170] and Ormuz, with a
+quantity of _lac_. From Ormuz I returned to Chaul, and thence to Cochin,
+from which place I went again to Pegu. Once more I lost the opportunity
+of becoming rich, as on this voyage I only took a small quantity of
+opium, while I might have sold a large quantity to great advantage,
+being afraid of meeting a similar disappointment with that which
+happened to me before. Being now again resolved to return into my native
+country, I went from Pegu to Cochin, where I wintered, and then sailed
+for Ormuz.
+
+[Footnote 170: Here, and in various other parts of these early voyages,
+India and the Indies seem confined to the western coast of the
+peninsula, as it is called, or the Malabar coast.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XX.
+
+_Some Account of the Commodities of India_.
+
+
+Before concluding this relation of my peregrinations, it seems proper
+that I should give some account of the productions of India.
+
+In all parts of India, both of the western and eastern regions, there is
+pepper and ginger, and in some parts the greatest quantity of pepper is
+found wild in the woods, where it grows without any care or cultivation,
+except the trouble of gathering it when ripe. The tree on which the
+pepper grows is not unlike our ivy, and runs in the same manner up to
+the top of such trees as grow in its neighbourhood, for if it were not
+to get hold of some tree it would lie flat on the ground and perish. Its
+flower and berry in all things resemble the ivy, and its berries or
+grains are the pepper, which are green when gathered, but by drying in
+the sun they become black. Ginger requires cultivation, and its seeds
+are sown on land previously tilled. The herb resembles that called
+_panizzo_, and the root is the spice we call ginger. Cloves all come
+from the Moluccas, where they grow in two small islands, Ternate and
+Tidore, on a tree resembling the laurel. Nutmegs and mace come from the
+island of Banda, where they grow together on one tree, which resembles
+our walnut tree, but not so large. Long pepper grows in Bengal, Pegu,
+and Java.
+
+All the good sandal-wood comes from the island of Timor. Camphor, being
+compounded, or having to undergo a preparation, comes all from China.
+That which grows in canes[171] comes from Borneo, and I think none of
+that kind is brought to Europe, as they consume large quantities of it
+in India, and it is there very dear. Good aloes wood comes from
+Cochin-China; and benjamin from the kingdoms of _Assi_, Acheen? and
+Siam. Musk is brought from Tartary, where it is made, as I have been
+told, in the following manner. There is in Tartary a beast as large and
+fierce as a wolf, which they catch alive, and beat to death with small
+staves, that his blood may spread through his whole body. This they then
+cut in pieces, taking out all the bones, and having pounded the flesh
+and blood very fine in a mortar, they dry it and put it into purses made
+of the skin, and these purses with their contents are the cods of
+musk[172].
+
+[Footnote 171: This is an error, as camphor is a species of essential
+oil, grossly sublimed at first from a tree of the laurel family, and
+afterwards purified by farther processes.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 172: The whole of this story is a gross fabrication imposed by
+ignorance on credulity. The cods of musk are natural bags or
+emunctories, found near the genitals on the males of an animal named
+_Moschus Moschiferus_, or Thibet Musk. It is found through the whole of
+Central Asia, except its most northern parts, but the best musk comes
+from Thibet.--E.
+
+"The Jewes doe counterfeit and take out the halfe of the goode muske,
+beating it up with an equal quantity of the flesh of an asse, and put
+this mixture in the bag or purse, which they sell for true
+muske."--_Hackluyt_.]
+
+I know not whereof amber is made[173], and there are divers opinions
+respecting it; but this much is certain, that it is cast out from the
+sea, and is found on the shores and banks left dry by the recess of the
+tides. Rubies, sapphires, and spinells are got in Pegu. Diamonds come
+from different places, and I know but three kinds of them. The kind
+which is called _Chiappe_ comes from _Bezeneger_, Bijanagur? Those that
+are naturally pointed come from the land of Delly and the island of
+Java, but those of Java are heavier than the others. I could never learn
+whence the precious stones called _Balassi_ are procured. Pearls are
+fished for in different places, as has been already mentioned. The
+substance called Spodium, which is found concreted in certain canes, is
+procured in _Cambaza_, Cambaya? Of this concrete I found many pieces in
+Pegu, when building myself a house there, as in that country they
+construct their houses of canes woven together like mats or basket-work,
+as formerly related.
+
+[Footnote 173: Ambergris is probably meant in the text under the name of
+Amber, as the former came formerly from India, while the latter is
+principally found in the maritime parts of Prussia.--E.]
+
+The Portuguese trade all the way from Chaul along the coast of India,
+and to Melinda in Ethiopia, in the land of Cafraria, on which coast are
+many good ports belonging to the Moors. To these the Portuguese carry a
+very low-priced cotton cloth, and many _paternosters_, or beads made of
+paultry glass, which are manufactured at Chaul; and from thence they
+carry back to India many elephants teeth, slaves, called Kafrs or
+Caffers, with some _amber_ and gold. On this coast the king of Portugal
+has a castle at Mozambique, which is of as great importance as any of
+his fortresses, in the Indies. The captain or governor of this castle
+has certain privileged voyages assigned to him, where only his agents
+may trade. In their dealings with the Kafrs along this coast, to which
+they go in small vessels, their purchases and sales are singularly
+conducted without any conversation or words on either side. While
+sailing along the coast, the Portuguese stop in many places, and going
+on shore they lay down a small quantity of their goods, which they
+leave, going back to the ship. Then the Kafr merchant comes to look at
+the goods, and having estimated them in his own way, he puts down as
+much gold as he thinks the goods are worth, leaving both the gold and
+the goods, and then withdraws. If on the return of the Portuguese trader
+he thinks the quantity of gold sufficient, he taketh it away and goes
+back to his ship, after which the Kafr takes away the goods, and the
+transaction is finished. But if he find the gold still left, it
+indicates that the Portuguese merchant is not contented with the
+quantity, and if he thinks proper he adds a little more. The Portuguese
+must not, however, be too strict with them, as they are apt to be
+affronted and to give over traffic, being a peevish people. By means of
+this trade, the Portuguese exchange their commodities for gold, which
+they carry to the castle of Mozambique, standing in an island near the
+Continental coast of Cafraria, on the coast of Ethiopia, 2800 miles
+distant from India.
+
+
+SECTION XXI.
+
+_Return of the Author to Europe_.
+
+
+To return to my voyage. On my arrival at Ormuz, I found there M. Francis
+Berettin of Venice, and we freighted a bark in conjunction to carry us
+to Bussora, for which we paid 70 ducats; but as other merchants went
+along with us, they eased our freight. We arrived safely at Bussora,
+where we tarried 40 days, to provide a caravan of boats to go up the
+river to _Babylon_ [Bagdat], as it is very unsafe to go this voyage with
+only two or three barks together, because they cannot proceed during the
+night, and have to make fast to the sides of the river, when it is
+necessary to be vigilant and well provided with weapons, both for
+personal safety and the protection of the goods, as there are numerous
+thieves who lie in wait to rob the merchants: Wherefore it is customary
+and proper always to go in fleets of not less than 25 or 30 boats, for
+mutual protection. In going up the river the voyage is generally 38 or
+40 days, according as the wind happens to be favourable or otherwise,
+but we took 50 days. We remained four months at Babylon, until the
+caravan was ready to pass the desert to Aleppo. In this city six
+European merchants of us consorted together to pass the desert, five of
+whom were Venetians and one a Portuguese. The Venetians were _Messer
+Florinasca_, and one of his kinsmen, _Messer Andrea de Polo, Messer
+Francis Berettin_, and I. So we bought horses and mules for our own use,
+which are very cheap there, insomuch that I bought a horse for myself
+for eleven _akens_, and sold him afterwards in Aleppo for 30 ducats. We
+bought likewise a tent, which was of very great convenience and comfort
+to us, and we furnished ourselves with sufficient provisions, and beans
+for the horses, to serve 40 days. We had also among us 33 camels laden
+with merchandise, paying two ducats for every camels load, and,
+according to the custom of the country, they furnish 11 camels for every
+10 bargained and paid for. We likewise had with us three men to serve
+us during the journey, _which are used to go for five Dd._[174] a man,
+and are bound to serve for that sum all the way to Aleppo.
+
+[Footnote 174: Such is the manner in which the hire of these servants is
+expressed in Hakluyt. Perhaps meaning 500 pence; and as the Venetian
+_sol_ is about a halfpenny, this will amount to about a guinea, but it
+does not appear whether this is the sum for each person, or for all
+three.--E.]
+
+By these precautions we made the journey over the desert without any
+trouble, as, whenever the camels stopt for rest, our tent was always the
+first erected. The caravan makes but small journeys of about 20 miles
+a-day, setting out every morning two hours before day, and stopping
+about two hours after noon. We had good fortune on our journey as it
+rained, so that we were never in want of water; yet we always carried
+one camel load of water for our party for whatever might happen in the
+desert, so that we were in no want of any thing whatever that this
+country affords. Among other things we had fresh mutton every day, as we
+had many shepherds along with us taking care of the sheep we had bought
+at Babylon, each merchant having his own marked with a distinguishing
+mark. We gave each shepherd a _medin_, which is twopence of our money,
+for keeping and feeding our sheep by the way, and for killing them;
+besides which the shepherds got the heads, skins, and entrails of all
+the sheep for themselves. We six bought 20 sheep, and 7 of them remained
+alive when we came to Aleppo. While on our journey through the desert,
+we used to lend flesh to each other, so as never to carry any from
+station to station, being repaid next day by those to whom we lent the
+day before.
+
+From Babylon to Aleppo is 40 days journey, of which 36 days are through
+the desert or wilderness, in which neither trees, houses, nor
+inhabitants are anywhere to be seen, being all an uniform extended plain
+or dreary waste, with no object whatever to relieve the eye. On the
+journey, the pilots or guides go always in front, followed by the
+caravan in regular order. When the guides stop, all the caravan does the
+same, and unloads the camels, as the guides know where wells are to be
+found. I have said that the caravan takes 36 days to travel across the
+wilderness; besides these, for the two first days after leaving Babylon
+we go past inhabited villages, till such time as we cross the Euphrates;
+and then we have two days journey through among inhabited villages
+before reaching Aleppo. Along with each caravan there is a captain, who
+dispenses justice to all men, and every night there is a guard
+appointed to keep watch for the security of the whole. From Aleppo we
+went to Tripoli, in Syria, where M. Florinasca, M. Andrea Polo, and I,
+with a friar in company, hired a bark to carry us towards Jerusalem. We
+accordingly sailed from Tripoli to Jaffa, from which place we travelled
+in a day and a half to Jerusalem, leaving orders that the bark should
+wait for our return. We remained 14 days at Jerusalem visiting the holy
+places, whence we returned to Jaffa, and thence back to Tripoli, and
+there we embarked in a ship belonging to Venice, called the Bajazzana;
+and, by the aid of the divine goodness, we safely arrived in Venice on
+the 5th of November 1581.
+
+Should any one incline to travel into those parts of India to which I
+went, let him not be astonished or deterred by the troubles,
+entanglements, and long delays which I underwent, owing to my poverty.
+On leaving Venice, I had 1200 ducats invested in merchandise; but while
+at Tripoli in my way out I fell sick in the house of M. Regaly Oratio,
+who sent away my goods with a small caravan to Aleppo. This caravan was
+robbed, and all my goods lost, except four chests of glasses, which cost
+me 200 ducats. Even of my glasses many were broken, as the thieves had
+broken up the boxes in hopes of getting goods more suitable for their
+purpose. Even with this small remaining stock I adventured to proceed
+for the Indies, where, by exchange and re-exchange, with much patient
+diligence, and with the blessing of God, I at length acquired a
+respectable stock.
+
+It may be proper to mention, for the sake of others who may follow my
+example, by what means they may secure their goods and effects to their
+heirs, in case of their death. In all the cities belonging to the
+Portuguese in India, there is a house or establishment called the school
+of the _Santa Misericordia comissaria_, the governors of which, on
+payment of a certain fee, take a copy of your testament, which you ought
+always to carry along with you when travelling in the Indies. There
+always goes into the different countries of the Gentiles and Mahometans
+a captain or consul, to administer justice to the Portuguese, and other
+Christians connected with them, and this captain has authority to
+recover the goods of all merchants who chance to die on these voyages.
+Should any of these not have their wills along with them, or not have
+them registered in one of the before-mentioned schools, these captains
+are sure to consume their goods in such a way that little or nothing
+will remain for their heirs. There are always also on such voyages some
+merchants who are commissaries of the _Sancta Misericardia_, who take
+charge of the goods of those who have registered their wills in that
+office, and having sold them the money is remitted to the head office of
+the Misericordia at Lisbon, whence intelligence is sent to any part of
+Christendom whence the deceased may have come, so that on the heirs of
+such persons going to Lisbon with satisfactory testimonials, they will
+receive the full value of what was left by their relation. It is to be
+noted, however, that when any merchant happens to die in the kingdom of
+Pegu, one-third of all that belongs to him goes, by ancient law and
+custom, to the king and his officers, but the other two-thirds are
+honourably restored to those having authority to receive them. On this
+account, I have known many rich men who dwelt in Pegu, who have desired
+to go thence into their own country in their old age to die there, that
+they might save the third of their property to their heirs, and these
+have always been allowed freely to depart without trouble or
+molestation.
+
+In Pegu the fashion in dress is uniformly the same for the high and low,
+the rich and the poor, the only difference being in the quality or
+fineness, of the materials, which is cloth of cotton, of various
+qualities. In the first place, they have an inner garment of white
+cotton cloth which serves for a shirt, over which they gird another
+garment of painted cotton cloth of fourteen _brasses_ or yards, which is
+bound or tucked up between the legs. On their heads they wear a _tuck_
+or turban of three yards long, bound round the head somewhat like a
+mitre; but some, instead of this, have a kind of cap like a bee-hive,
+which does not fall below the bottom of the ear. They are all
+barefooted; but the nobles never walk a-foot, being carried by men on a
+seat of some elegance, having a hat made of leaves to keep-off the rain
+and sun; or else they ride on horseback, having their bare feet in the
+stirrups. All women, of whatever degree, wear a shift or smock down to
+the girdle, and from thence down to their feet a cloth of three yards
+long, forming a kind of petticoat which is open before, and so strait
+that at every step they shew their legs and more, so that in walking
+they have to hide themselves as it were very imperfectly with their
+hand. It is reported that this was contrived by one of the queens of
+this country, as a means of winning the men from certain unnatural
+practices to which they were unhappily addicted. The women go all
+barefooted like the men, and have their arms loaded with hoops of gold
+adorned with jewels, and their fingers all filled with precious rings.
+They wear their long hair rolled up and fastened on the crown of their
+heads, and a cloth thrown over their shoulders, by way of a cloak.
+
+By way of concluding this long account of my peregrinations, I have this
+to say, that those parts of the Indies in which I have been are very
+good for a man who has little, and wishes by diligent industry to make
+rich: _providing always that he conducts himself so as to preserve the
+reputation of honesty_. Such, persons will never fail to receive
+assistance to advance their fortunes. But, for those who are vicious,
+dishonest, or indolent, they had better stay at home; for they shall
+always remain poor, and die beggars.
+
+_End of the Peregrinations of Cesar Frederick_.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VII.
+
+EARLY ENGLISH VOYAGES TO GUINEA, AND OTHER PARTS OF THE WEST COAST OF
+AFRICA.
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+On the present occasion we are principally guided in our selection by
+chronological order, owing to which this _Chapter_ may have an anomalous
+appearance, as containing the early voyages of the English to the
+Western or Atlantic coast of Africa, while the title of the _Book_ to
+which it belongs was confined to the Discoveries and Conquests of the
+Portuguese, and other European Nations, in India; yet the arrangement
+has been formed on what we have considered as sufficient grounds, more
+especially as resembling the steps by which the Portuguese were led to
+their grand discovery of the route by sea to India. Our collection
+forms a periodical work, in the conduct of which it would be obviously
+improper to tie ourselves too rigidly, in these introductory discourses,
+to any absolute rules of minute arrangement, which might prevent us from
+availing ourselves of such valuable sources of information as may occur
+in the course of our researches. We have derived the principal materials
+of this and the next succeeding chapter, from Hakluyt's Collection of
+the Early Voyages, Travels, and Discoveries of the English Nation, using
+the late edition published at London in 1810, and availing ourselves of
+the previous labours of the Editor of Astleys Collection, published in
+1745. Mr John Green, the intelligent editor of that former collection,
+has combined the substance of the present and succeeding chapters of our
+work in the second book of his first volume, under the title of The
+First Voyages of the English to Guinea and the East Indies; and as our
+present views are almost solely confined to the period which he
+embraces, we have thought it right to insert his introduction to that
+book, as containing a clear historical view of the subject[175]. It is
+proper to mention, however, that, while we follow his steps, we have
+uniformly had recourse to the originals from which he drew his
+materials; and, for reasons formerly assigned, wherever any difference
+may occur between our collection and that of Astley, we shall subjoin
+our remarks and references, at the place or places to which they
+belong.--E.
+
+[Footnote 175: Astley's Collection, Vol. I. p. 138, 140.]
+
+"Although the Portuguese were the first who set on foot discoveries by
+sea, and carried them on for many years before any other European nation
+attempted to follow their example; yet, as soon as these voyages
+appeared to be attended with commercial gain, the English were ready to
+put in for a share. The Portuguese discovered Guinea about the year
+1471; and only ten years afterwards we find the English making
+preparations to visit the newly discovered coast[176]. In the year 1481,
+John Tintam and William Fabian were busy in fitting out a fleet for the
+coast of Guinea; but whether on their own account in whole or in part,
+or solely for the Duke of _Medina Sidonia_ in Spain, by whose command
+they are said to have done this, cannot be now determined. It is
+possible, as the Spaniards were excluded by the Papal grant in favour
+of the Portuguese from trading to the East Indies, that they might
+endeavour to elude this authority by employing Englishmen in that
+navigation. However this may have been, _Joam_ or John II. king of
+Portugal, sent two persons on an embassy to Edward king of England, to
+renew the ancient league of friendship between the crowns, and to move
+him to hinder that fleet from putting to sea. The Portuguese ambassadors
+had orders to acquaint the king of England with the title which the king
+of Portugal derived from the Pope, to the exclusive sovereignty and
+navigation of Guinea, and to demand that Edward should prohibit his
+subjects from sending any ships to that country. This was accordingly
+done, and the purposes of that intended voyage were frustrated. This is
+an authentic testimony of the early attempts of the English, which is
+related at length by _Garcia de Resende_, in the life of Joam II. Ch.
+33[177]. To this, or some similar circumstance, it may have been owing
+that the English desisted so long from sailing to the southwards, and
+turned their endeavours to the discovery of a passage to India by some
+other way.
+
+[Footnote 176: The French pretend to have traded with Guinea from 1364
+till 1413, being 107 years before it was discovered by the
+Portuguese.--Astl. I. 138, a.]
+
+[Footnote 177: Cited by Hakluyt, Vol. II. Part 2. p. 2]
+
+"It appears by a memorandum or letter of _Nicholas Thorn_, senior, a
+considerable merchant in Bristol, of which Hakluyt gives the
+contents[178], that in 1526, and from circumstances for a long time
+previous, certain English merchants, among whom were _Nicholas Thorn_
+and _Thomas Spacheford_, had frequently traded to the Canary islands. In
+that letter or memorandum, notice was given to _Thomas Midnal_ his
+factor and _William Ballard_ his servant; residing in St Lucar in
+Andalusia, that the Christopher of Cadiz bound for the West Indies, had
+taken on board several packs of cloth of different fineness and colours,
+together with packthread, soap, and other goods, to be landed at Santa
+Cruz in Teneriffe. They are directed to sell these goods, and to send
+back returns in Orchil[179], sugar, and kid skins.
+
+[Footnote 178: Id. ib. p. 3.]
+
+[Footnote 179: A species of moss growing on high rocks, much used in
+these days in dying.--Astl. I. 138. d.]
+
+"At length, about the middle of the _sixteenth_ century, the English
+spirit of trade, meeting with favourable circumstances, began to exert
+itself, and to extend its adventures to the south as well as the north.
+About the year 1551, Captain Thomas Windham sailed in the ship Lion for
+Morocco, whither he carried two Moors of the blood-royal. This was the
+first voyage to the western coast of Africa of which we have any
+account, and these are all the particulars to be found respecting it;
+except that one Thomas Alday, a servant to Sebastian Cabot, in a letter
+inserted in Hakluyt's Collection[180], represents himself as the first
+promoter of this trade to Barbary, and observes that he would have
+performed this voyage himself, with the sole command of the ship and
+goods, had it not been that Sir John Lutterel, John Fletcher, Henry
+Ostrich, and others with whom he was connected, died of the sweating
+sickness, and he himself, after escaping that disease, was seized by a
+violent fever, so that Thomas Windham sailed from Portsmouth before he
+recovered, by which he lost eighty pounds.
+
+[Footnote 180: Vol. II. p. 7.]
+
+"In the next year, 1552, Windham made a second voyage to _Zafin_ or
+_Saffi_ and Santa Cruz without the straits, which gave so much offence
+to the Portuguese, that they threatened to treat the English as enemies
+if found in these seas. Yet in the year following, the same Thomas
+Windham, with a Portuguese named Antonio Yanez Pinteado, who appears to
+have been the chief promoter of the attempt, undertook a voyage to
+Guinea, with three ships having an hundred and forty men; and having
+traded for some time on the coast for gold, they went to Benin to load
+pepper: But both the commanders and most of the men dying of sickness,
+occasioned by the climate, the rest returned to Plymouth with one ship
+only, having burnt the other two for want of hands, and brought back no
+great riches. In 1554, Mr John Lok made a voyage with three ships to the
+coast of Guinea, whence he brought back a considerable quantity of gold
+and ivory. These voyages appear to have been succeeded by others almost
+every year. At length, upon application to Queen Elizabeth, two patents
+were granted to certain merchants. One in 1585, for the Barbary or
+Morocco trade, and the other in 1588, for the trade to Guinea between
+the rivers Senegal and Gambia[181]. In 1592, a third patent was granted
+to other persons, taking in the coast from the river _Nonnia_ to the
+south of Sierra Leona, for the space of 100 leagues, which patents gave
+rise to the African company. In all their voyages to the coast of Africa
+they had disputes with the Portuguese. Several of these voyages have
+been preserved by Hakluyt, and will be found inserted in this chapter,
+as forerunners to the English voyages to the East Indies.
+
+[Footnote 181: The former for twelve years, was granted to the Earls of
+Leicester and Warwick, and certain merchants of London, to the number of
+32 in all. The other for ten years to eight persons of Exeter, London,
+and other places. By this latter patent, it appears that this trade was
+advised by the Portuguese residing in London, and one voyage had been
+made before the grant. See Hakluyt, II. part 2. pp. 114 and 123.--Astl.
+I. 139. a.]
+
+"The views of the English extending with experience and success, and
+finding the long attempted north-east and north-west passages to India
+impracticable, they at length determined to proceed for that distant
+region round Africa by the same course with the Portuguese. In 1591,
+that voyage was undertaken for the first time by three large ships under
+the command of Captain Raymond; and in 1596, another fleet of three
+ships set out on the same design under Captain Wood, but with bad
+success. In the mean time several navigators were employed to discover
+this course to the East Indies. At length in 1600, a charter was
+obtained from Queen Elizabeth by a body of merchants, to the number of
+216, having George Earl of Cumberland at their head, under the name of
+the _Company of Merchant Adventurers_, for carrying on a trade to the
+East Indies. From this period ships were sent there regularly every two
+or three years; and thus were laid the foundations of the English East
+India commerce, which has subsisted ever since under exclusive chartered
+companies.
+
+"Long before the English sailed to India in their own ships, several
+English merchants and others had gone to India from time to time in the
+Portuguese ships, and some overland; from a desire to pry into and to
+participate in the advantages of that gainful commerce. Of those who
+went by land, several letters and relations remain which will be found
+in the sequel: But of all who performed the voyage as passengers in the
+Portuguese vessels, we know of only one who left any account of his
+adventures, or at least whose account has been published; viz. Thomas
+Stephens. To this may be added the account by _Captain Davis_ of a
+voyage in the Dutch ship called the _Middleburgh Merchants_ in 1598, of
+which he served as pilot, for the purpose of making himself acquainted
+with the maritime route to India, and the posture of the Portuguese
+affairs in that country. Both of these journals contain very useful
+remarks for the time in which they were made, and both will be found in
+our collection.
+
+"Although the first voyages of the English to the East Indies are full
+of variety, yet the reader is not to expect such a continued series of
+new discoveries, great actions, battles, sieges, and conquests, as are
+to be met with in the history of the Portuguese expeditions: For it must
+be considered that we made few or no discoveries, as these had been
+already made before; that our voyages were for the most part strictly
+commercial; that our settlements were generally made by the consent of
+the natives; that we made no conquests; and that the undertakings were
+set on foot and carried on entirely by our merchants[182]. On this
+account it is, probably, that we have no regular history extant of the
+English Voyages, Discoveries, and Transactions in the East Indies, as we
+find there are many such of the Portuguese and Spanish. It may be
+presumed, however, that as the East India Company has kept regular
+journals of their affairs, and is furnished with letters and other
+memorials from their agents, that a satisfactory account of all the
+English Transactions in India might be collected, if the Company thought
+proper to give orders for its execution[183]."--_Astley_.
+
+[Footnote 182: These observations are to be considered as applying
+entirely to the earlier connection of the English with India. In more
+modern days there has been a sufficiently copious series of great
+actions, battles, sieges, and conquests; but these belong to a different
+and more modern period than that now under review, and are more
+connected with the province of political military and naval history,
+than with a Collection of Voyages and Travels. Yet these likewise will
+require to be noticed in an after division of this work.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 183: A commencement towards this great desideratum in English
+History has been lately made, by the publication of the early History of
+the English East India Company, by John Bruce, Esquire, Historiographer
+to the Company.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Second Voyage of the English to Barbary, in the year 1552, by Captain
+Thomas Windham_[184].
+
+
+Of the first voyage to Barbary without the straits, made by the same
+Captain Thomas Wyndham, the only remaining record is in a letter from
+James Aldaie to Michael Locke, already mentioned in the Introduction to
+this Chapter, and preserved in Hakluyt's Collection, II. 462. According
+to Hakluyt, the account of this second voyage was written by James
+Thomas, then page to Captain Thomas Windham, chief captain of the
+voyage, which was set forth by Sir John Yorke, Sir William Gerard, Sir
+Thomas Wroth, Messieurs Frances Lambert, Cole, and others.--E.
+
+[Footnote 184: Hakluyt, II. 463. Astley, I. 140.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The ships employed on this voyage were three, of which two belonged to
+the River Thames. These were the Lion of London of about 150 tons, of
+which Thomas Windham was captain and part owner; and the Buttolfe of
+about 80 tons. The third was a Portuguese caravel of about 60 tons,
+bought from some Portuguese at Newport in Wales, and freighted for the
+voyage. The number of men in the three ships was 120. The master of the
+Lion was John Kerry of Minehead in Somersetshire, and his mate was David
+Landman. Thomas Windham, the chief captain of the Adventure, was a
+gentleman, born in the county of Norfolk, but resident at Marshfield
+Park in Somersetshire.
+
+The fleet set sail from King-road near Bristol about the beginning of
+May 1552, being on a Monday morning; and on the evening of the Monday
+fortnight we came to anchor in the port of Zafia or Asafi on the coast
+of Barbary, in 32 deg. N. where we landed part of our cargo to be conveyed
+by land to the city of Marocco. Having refreshed at this port, we went
+thence to the port of Santa-Cruz, where we landed the rest of our goods,
+being a considerable quantity of linen and woollen cloth, with coral,
+amber, jet, and divers other goods esteemed by the Moors. We found a
+French ship in the road of Santa-Cruz, the people on board which being
+uncertain whether France and England were then at peace or engaged in
+war, drew her as near as possible to the walls of the town, from which
+they demanded assistance for their defence in case of need; and on
+seeing our vessels draw near, they shot off a piece of ordnance from the
+walls, the ball passing through between the main and fore masts of the
+Lion. We came immediately to anchor, and presently a pinnace came off to
+inquire who we were; and on learning that we had been there the year
+before, and had the licence of their king for trade, they were fully
+satisfied, giving us leave to bring our goods peaceably on shore, where
+the viceroy, Sibill Manache came shortly to visit us, and treated us
+with all civility. Owing to various delays, we were nearly three months
+at this place before we could get our lading, which consisted of sugar,
+dates, almonds, and molasses, or the syrup of sugar. Although we were at
+this place for so long a time during the heat of summer, yet none of our
+company perished of sickness.
+
+When our ships were all loaded, we drew out to sea in waiting for a
+western wind to carry us to England. But while at sea a great leak broke
+out in the Lion, on which we bore away for the island of Lancerota,
+between which and Fuertaventura we came to anchor in a safe road-stead,
+whence we landed 70 chests of sugar upon the island of Lancerota, with a
+dozen or sixteen of our men. Conceiving that we had come wrongfully by
+the caraval, the inhabitants came by surprise upon us and took all who
+were on shore prisoners, among whom I was one, and destroyed our sugars.
+On this transaction being perceived from our ships, they sent on shore
+three boats filled with armed men to our rescue; and our people landing,
+put the Spaniards to flight, of whom they slew eighteen, and made the
+governor of the island prisoner, who was an old gentleman about 70 years
+of age. Our party continued to chase the Spaniards so far for our
+rescue, that they exhausted all their powder and arrows, on which the
+Spaniards rallied and returned upon them, and slew six of our men in the
+retreat. After this our people and the Spaniards came to a parley, in
+which it was agreed that we the prisoners should be restored in exchange
+for the old governor, who gave us a certificate under his hand of the
+damages we had sustained by the spoil of our sugars, that we might be
+compensated upon our return to England, by the merchants belonging to
+the king of Spain.
+
+Having found and repaired the leak, and all our people being returned on
+board, we made sail; and while passing one side of the island, the
+Cacafuego and other ships of the Portuguese navy entered by the other
+side to the same roadstead whence we had just departed, and shot off
+their ordnance in our hearing. It is proper to mention that the
+Portuguese were greatly offended at this our new trade to Barbary, and
+both this year and the former, they gave out through their merchants in
+England, with great threats and menaces, that they would treat us as
+mortal enemies, if they found us in these seas: But by the good
+providence of God we escaped their hands. We were seven or eight weeks
+in making our passage from Lancerota for the coast of England, where the
+first port we made was Plymouth; and from thence sailed for the Thames,
+where we landed our merchandise at London about the end of October 1552.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_A Voyage from England to Guinea and Benin in 1553, by Captain Windham
+and Antonio Anes Pinteado_[185].
+
+
+PREVIOUS REMARKS.
+
+This and the following voyage to Africa were first published by Richard
+Eden in a small collection, which was afterwards reprinted in 4to, by
+Richard Willes in 1577[186]. Hakluyt has inserted both these in his
+Collection, with Eden's preamble as if it were his own; only that he
+ascribes the account of Africa to the right owner[187].
+
+[Footnote 185: Astley, I. 141. Hakluyt, II. 464.--The editor of Astley's
+Collection says _Thomas_ Windham; but we have no evidence in Hakluyt,
+copying from Eden, that such was his Christian name, or that he was the
+same person who had gone twice before to the coast of Morocco. In
+Hakluyt, the Voyage is said to have been at the charge of certain
+merchant adventurers of London.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 186: Hist. of Travayle in the West and East Indies, &c. by
+Eden and Willes, 4to, p. 336.--Astl. I. 141. b.]
+
+[Footnote 187: So far the editor of Astley's Collection: The remainder
+of these previous remarks contains the preamble by Eden, as reprinted by
+Hakluyt, II. 464.--E.]
+
+"I was desired by certain friends to make some mention of this voyage,
+that some memory of it might remain to posterity, being the first
+enterprised by the English to parts that may become of great consequence
+to our merchants, if not hindered by the ambition of such as conceive
+themselves lords of half the world, by having conquered some forty or
+fifty miles here and there, erecting certain fortresses, envying that
+others should enjoy the commodities which they themselves cannot wholly
+possess. And, although such as have been at charges in the discovering
+and conquering of such lands, ought in good reason to have certain
+privileges, pre-eminences and tributes for the same; yet, under
+correction, it may seem somewhat rigorous and unreasonable, or rather
+contrary to the charity that ought to subsist among Christians, that
+such as invade the dominions of others, should not allow other friendly
+nations to trade in places nearer and seldom frequented by themselves,
+by which their own trade is not hindered in such other places as they
+have chosen for themselves as staples or marts of their trade[188]. But
+as I do not propose either to accuse or defend, I shall cease to speak
+any farther on this subject, and proceed to the account of the first
+voyage to those parts, as briefly and faithfully as I was advertised of
+the same, by information of such credible persons as made diligent
+inquiry respecting it, omitting many minute particulars, not greatly
+necessary to be known; but which, with the exact course of the
+navigation, shall be more fully related in the second voyage. If some
+may think that certain persons have been rather sharply reflected on, I
+have this to say, that favour and friendship ought always to give way
+before truth, that honest men may receive the praise of well-doing, and
+bad men be justly reproved; that the good may be encouraged to proceed
+in honest enterprizes, and the bad deterred from following evil example.
+
+[Footnote 188: Richard Eden here obviously endeavours to combat the
+monopoly of trade to the Portuguese discoveries, arrogated by that
+nation; although the entire colonial system of all the European nations
+has always been conducted upon the same exclusive principles, down to
+the present day.--E.]
+
+That these voyages may be the better understood, I have thought proper
+to premise a brief description of Africa, on the west coast of which
+great division of the world, the coast of Guinea begins at Cape Verd in
+about lat. 12 deg. N. and about two degrees in longitude _from the measuring
+line_[189]; whence running from north to south, and in some places by
+east, within 5, 4, and 3-1/2 degrees into the equinoctial, and so forth
+in manner directly east and north, for the space of about 36 degrees in
+longitude from west to east, as shall more plainly appear in the second
+voyage[190].
+
+[Footnote 189: Evidently meaning the first meridian passing through the
+island of Ferro, one of the Canaries, from which Cape Verd is about 2 deg.
+W.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 190: These geographical indications respecting the coast of
+Guinea, are extremely obscure, so as to be almost unintelligible.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Brief Description of Africa, by Richard Eden_[191].
+
+In the lesser Africa are the kingdoms of Tunis and Constantina, which
+latter is at this day subject to Tunis, and also the regions of Bugia,
+Tripoli, and Ezzah. This part of Africa is very barren, by reason of the
+great deserts of Numidia and Barca. The principal ports of the kingdom
+of Tunis are, Goletta, Bizerta, Potofarnia, Bona, and Stora. Tunis and
+Constantina are the chief cities, with several others. To this kingdom
+belong the following islands, Zerbi, Lampadola, Pantalarea, Limoso,
+Beit, Gamelaro, and Malta; in which the grand-master of the knights of
+Rhodes now resides. To the south of this kingdom are the great deserts
+of Lybia. All the nations of this lesser Africa are of the sect of
+Mahomet, a rustical people living scattered in villages.
+
+[Footnote 191: This brief description of Africa is preserved, rather for
+the purpose of shewing what were the ideas of the English on this
+subject towards the end of the sixteenth century, than for any
+excellence.--E.]
+
+The best of this part of Africa is Mauritania, now called Barbary, on
+the coast of the Mediterranean. Mauritania is divided into two parts,
+Tingitana and Cesariensis. Mauritania Tingitana is now called the
+kingdoms of Fez and Marocco, of which the capitals bear the same names.
+Mauritania, Cesariensis is now called the kingdom of Tremessan, the
+capital of which is named Tremessan or Telensin. This region is full of
+deserts, and reaches to the Mediterranean, to the city of Oran with the
+port of Mersalquiber. The kingdom of Fez reaches to the ocean, from the
+west to the city of Arzilla, and Sala or Salee is the port of this
+kingdom. The kingdom of Marocco also extends to the ocean, on which it
+has the cities of Azamor and Azafi. Near to Fez and Marocco in the ocean
+are the Canary islands, anciently called the Fortunate islands.
+
+To the south is the kingdom of Guinea, with Senega, Jalofo, Gambra, and
+many other regions of _the black Moors_, called Ethiopians or Negroes,
+all of which regions are watered by the river Negro, called anciently
+the Niger[192]. In these regions there are no cities, but only villages
+of low cottages made of boughs of trees, plastered over with chalk and
+covered with straw; and in these regions there are great deserts.
+
+[Footnote 192: In the text the Senegal river is to be understood by the
+Negro, or river of the Blacks. But the ancient Niger is now well known
+to run eastwards in the interior of Nigritia, having no connection
+whatever with the Senegal or with the sea.--E.]
+
+The kingdom of Marocco includes seven subordinate kingdoms, named Hea,
+Sus, Guzula, Marocco proper, Duccula, Hazchora, and Tedle. Fez has an
+equal number, as Fez, Temesne, Azgar, Elabath, Errif, Garet, and Elcair.
+Tremessan has only three, being Tremessan, Tenez, and Elgazair; all the
+inhabitants of all these regions being Mahometans. But all the regions
+of Guinea are peopled by Gentiles and idolaters, having no religion or
+knowledge of God except from the law of nature.
+
+Africa, one of the three great divisions of the world known to the
+ancients, is separated from Asia on the east by the river Nile, and on
+the west from Europe by the Pillars of Hercules or the Straits of
+Gibraltar. The entire northern coast along the Mediterranean is now
+called Barbary, and is inhabited by the Moors. The inner part is called
+Lybia and Ethiopia. Lesser Africa, in which stood the noble city of
+Carthage, has Numidia on the west and Cyrenaica on the east.
+
+On the east side of Africa, to the west of the Red Sea, are the
+dominions of the great and mighty Christian king or emperor Prester
+John, well known to the Portuguese in their voyages to Calicut. His
+dominions reach very far on every side, and he has many other kings
+under his authority who pay him tribute, both Christian and Pagan. This
+mighty prince is named David emperor of Ethiopia, and it is said that
+the Portuguese send him every year eight ships laden with merchandise.
+His dominions are bounded on one side by the Red Sea, and stretch far
+into Africa towards Egypt and Barbary. To the southwards they adjoin
+with the great sea or ocean towards the Cape of Good Hope, and to the
+north are bounded by the great and dangerous _Sea of Sand_, lying
+between the great city of Cairo in Egypt and the country of Ethiopia; in
+which are many uninhabitable deserts continuing for the space of five
+days journey. It is affirmed, if the Christian emperor were not hindered
+by the deserts, in which there is great want of provisions and
+especially of water, that he would ere now have invaded Egypt. The chief
+city of Ethiopia, in which this great emperor resides, is called
+_Amacaiz_, being a city of some importance, the inhabitants of which are
+of an olive complexion. There are many other cities, such as the city of
+_Sava_ on the Nile, where the emperor ordinarily resides during the
+summer. There is likewise a great city named _Barbaregaf_ and _Ascon_,
+whence the queen of Saba is supposed to have gone for Jerusalem to hear
+the wisdom of Solomon[193]. This last city though little is very fair,
+and one of the principal cities of Ethiopia. In this province there are
+many very high mountains, on which the terrestrial paradise is supposed
+to have been situated; and some say that the trees of the sun and moon
+which are mentioned by the ancients, are to be found there, but no one
+has ever been able to go to them, on account of great deserts extending
+to an hundred days journey. Also beyond these mountains is the Cape of
+Good Hope.
+
+[Footnote 193: The names of places are so corruptly given as hardly even
+to be guessed at. Amacaiz may possibly be meant for Amba Keshem, Sava
+for Shoa, Barbaregaf for the Baharnagash, and Ascon for Assab.--E.]
+
+_Journal of the Voyage_.
+
+On the 12th of August 1553, there sailed from Portsmouth two goodly
+ships, the Primrose and the Lion, with a pinnace called the Moon, all
+well furnished with 140 able bodied men, and with ordnance and victuals
+fitting for the voyage. They were commanded by two captains; one of whom
+was a foreigner named Antonio Anes Pinteado, a native of Oporto in
+Portugal, a wise, discreet, and sober man, who, for his skill in
+navigation both as an experienced pilot and prudent commander, was at
+one time in such favour with the king of Portugal, that the coasts of
+Brazil and Guinea were committed to his care against the French, to whom
+he was a terror in these seas. He had been likewise a gentleman of the
+household to the king. But as fortune ever flatters when it favours,
+ever deceives when it promises, and ever casts down whom it raises, so
+great wealth and high favour are always accompanied by emulation and
+envy; in like manner was he, after many adversities and malicious
+accusations, forced to take refuge in England. In this golden voyage
+Pinteado was ill-matched with an evil companion, his own various good
+qualities being coupled with one who had few or no virtues. Thus did
+these noble ships depart on their voyage; but previously captain Windham
+put out of his ship at Portsmouth a kinsman of one of the head
+merchants, shewing in this a sample of the bad intention of his mind,
+which grew from this small beginning to a monstrous enormity; yet happy
+was that young man for being left behind.
+
+Arriving at the island of Madeira, they took in some wine for the use of
+the ships. At this island was a great galleon belonging to the king of
+Portugal, full of men and ordnance, which had been expressly fitted out
+to interrupt our ships in their intended voyage, or any others that
+might intend a similar expedition; for the king of Portugal had been
+secretly informed that our ships were armed to attack his castle of
+Mina, though no such thing was intended; yet did not that galleon
+attempt to stay our ships, nor could she have been able to withstand
+them if that had been tried.
+
+After their departure from Madeira the worthy captain Pinteado began to
+experience affliction from Captain Windham, who had hitherto carried a
+fair appearance of good will, but now assumed to himself the sole
+command, setting both captain Pinteado and the merchants factors at
+nought, giving them opprobrious words and sometimes abusing them most
+shamefully with threats of personal ill-treatment. He even proceeded to
+deprive captain Pinteado of the service of the boys and others who had
+been assigned him by order of the merchant adventurers, reducing him to
+the rank of a common mariner, which is the greatest affront that can be
+put upon a Portuguese or Spaniard, who prize their honour above all
+things. Passing the Canaries, they came to the island of St Nicholas,
+one of the Cape Verds, where they procured abundance of the flesh of
+wild goats, being almost its only produce. Following their voyage from
+thence, they tarried by the way at certain desert islands, not willing
+to arrive too early on the coast of Guinea on account of the heat. But
+being under an arbitrary rule, they tarried too long, and came at length
+to the first land of Guinea at the river _Cesto_[194], where they might
+have exchanged their merchandise for a full lading of the _grains_, or
+spice of that country, which is a very hot fruit and much like figs; the
+fruit being full of grains which are loose within the pod[195]. This
+kind of spice is much used in cold countries, and may be sold there to
+great advantage in exchange for other commodities. But, by the
+persuasion or command rather of our tyrannical captain, our people made
+light of this commodity in comparison with the fine gold for which they
+thirsted, wherefore they made sail an hundred leagues farther till they
+came to the golden land or gold coast.
+
+[Footnote 194: Or Sestre, a river on the Grain coast or Malaguette.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 195: This is the Guinea pepper, called grains of Paradise by
+the Italians, whence this part of Guinea was named the grain coast. The
+text describes the pods as having a hole on each side, which, it was
+afterwards learnt, were for putting thongs, strings or twigs on which to
+dry the pods. These pods grow on a humble plant, not above a foot and a
+half or two feet from the ground, and are bright red when first
+gathered,--Astl.]
+
+At this part of the coast, not venturing to come near the castle of St
+George del Mina belonging to the king of Portugal, they made sale of
+their goods only on this side and beyond that place, receiving the gold
+of the country in exchange to the extent of 150 pounds weight[196], and
+they might have bartered all their merchandise for gold at that place,
+if the pride of Windham had allowed him to listen to the counsel and
+experience of Pinteado: but not satisfied with what he had got or might
+still have procured, if he had remained in the neighbourhood of Mina, he
+commanded Pinteado to navigate the ships to Benin under the equinoctial,
+150 leagues beyond the Mina, where he expected to have laden the ships
+with pepper. When Pinteado urged the lateness of the season, and advised
+that instead of going farther they should continue to dispose of their
+wares for gold, by which great profit would have been gained, Windham
+flew into a passion, called Pinteado a Jew, and gave him much
+opprobrious language, saying, "This rascally Jew promised to conduct us
+to places that either do not exist or to which he knows not the way, but
+if he does not I will cut off his ears and nail them to the mast." The
+advice given by Pinteado, not to go farther, was for the safety of the
+mens lives, which would have been in great danger at that late season,
+during their winter or _rossia_, not so called on account of cold, but
+from the heat accompanied with close and cloudy air, alternating with
+great tempests, during which the air was of so putrifying a quality as
+to rot the clothes on their backs. He had formerly lingered by the way,
+to prevent them arriving too soon on the coast, when the heat of the sun
+is scorching and unbearable.
+
+Thus constrained contrary to his wish, he brought the ships to anchor
+off the mouth of the river Benin, whence the pinnace was sent 50 or 60
+leagues up the river. They then landed, and Pinteado, with Francisco
+another Portuguese, Nicholas Lambert a gentleman, and other merchants
+were conducted to the kings court, ten leagues from the river, where
+they were brought into the kings presence by a great company. The king
+was a _black Moor_ or negro, though not quite so black as the rest, and
+sat in a long wide hall having earthen walls without windows, roofed
+with thin planks open in many parts to let in air. These people give
+wonderful reverence to their king, even the highest of his officers
+when in his presence never daring to look him in the face, but sit
+cowering on their buttocks with their elbows on their knees, and their
+hands on their faces, never looking up till the king commands them. When
+coming towards the king they shew him the utmost reverence from as far
+off as they can see him; and when they depart they never turn their
+backs towards him. In the communication of our men with the king, he
+used the Portuguese language, which he had learnt when a child.
+Commanding our men to stand up, he inquired the reason of their coming
+into his country; on which he was answered by Pinteado, that we were
+merchants who had come from a distant country into his dominions, to
+procure the commodities of the country in exchange for wares which we
+had brought from our own country, to the mutual convenience of both
+countries. The king had then 30 or 40 quintals or hundred weights of
+pepper, which had long lain in a store-house, which he desired our
+people to look at, and that they should exhibit to him such commodities
+as they had brought for sale. He likewise sent some of his officers to
+conduct our people to the water-side, and to carry our wares from the
+pinnace to his residence. These things being done, the king engaged to
+our merchants that in 30 days he would provide a sufficiency of pepper
+to load all our ships, and in case our merchandise might not amount to
+the whole value of the pepper, he promised to give credit till next
+season, and immediately sent orders over all the country to gather
+pepper, so that in 30 days 80 tons of pepper were procured.
+
+[Footnote 196: Or 1800 ounces, which at L.3, 17s. 6d. per ounce, is
+equal to L.6975 sterling, a large sum in those days.--E.]
+
+In the meantime our men lived without any rule, eating without measure
+of the fruit of the country, drinking the palm wine which runs in the
+night from the cut branches of that tree, and continually running into
+the water to assuage the extreme heat of the season; and not being used
+to these sudden transitions, which are excessively dangerous, they fell
+into swellings and agues, by which about the end of the year they were
+dying sometimes 3, 4, or 5 in a day. When the 30 days were expired, and
+Windham saw his men dying so fast, he sent orders to Pinteado and the
+rest to come away without any more delay. Pinteado and the others wrote
+back to inform him of the large quantity of pepper already gathered, and
+that they looked daily for more, desiring him to consider the great
+praise they would all get on their return if the voyage turned out
+profitable, and the shame that must attend returning without a full
+loading. Not satisfied with this answer, more especially as the men
+continued to die in great numbers, Windham sent a second message
+ordering them to return immediately, or that he would go away and leave
+them. Thinking to prevail upon him by reasonable means, Pinteado
+returned to the ships under an escort provided by the negro king.
+
+In the mean time Windham, enraged at Pinteado, broke open his cabin and
+all his chests, spoiled all the cordials and sweetmeats he had provided
+for his health, and left him nothing either of his cloaths or nautical
+instruments; after which strange procedure he fell sick and died. When
+he came on board, Pinteado lamented as much for the death of Windham as
+if he had been his dearest friend; but several of the mariners and
+officers spit in his face, calling him Jew, and asserted that he had
+brought them to this place on purpose that they should die; and some
+even drew their swords, threatening to slay him. They insisted that he
+should leave the coast immediately, and though he only requested them to
+wait till those who were left at the court of the king of Benin could be
+sent for, they would by no means consent. He then prayed them to give
+him a boat, and as much of an old sail as might serve to fit her out, in
+which he proposed to bring Nicholas Lambert[197] and the rest to
+England, but even this they would not consent to. Finding all his
+representations in vain, he wrote a letter to the merchants at court,
+informing them of all that had happened at the ships, promising, if God
+spared his life, that he would return as soon as possible for them.
+
+[Footnote 197: This Lambert was a Londoner born, his father having been
+Lord Mayor of London.--Hakluyt.]
+
+Pinteado, thus kept on board against his will, was thrust among the
+cabin-boys, and worse used than any of them, insomuch that he was forced
+to depend on the favour of the cook for subsistence. Having sunk one of
+their ships for want of hands to navigate her, the people departed from
+the coast with the other. Within six or seven days, Pinteado died
+broken-hearted, from the cruel and undeserved usage he had met with,--a
+man worthy to have served any prince, and most vilely used. Of 140 men
+who had sailed originally from Portsmouth on this unfortunate and
+ill-conducted voyage, scarcely 40 got back to Plymouth, and many even
+of those died soon afterwards.
+
+That no one may suspect that I have written in commendation of Pinteado
+from partiality or favour, otherwise than as warranted by truth, I have
+thought good to add copies of the letters which the king of Portugal and
+the infant his brother wrote to induce him to return to Portugal, at the
+time when, by the king's displeasure, and not owing to any crime or
+offence, he was enforced by poverty to come to England, where he first
+induced our merchants to engage in voyages to Guinea. All these writings
+I saw under seal in the house of my friend Nicholas Lieze, with whom
+Pinteado left them when he departed on his unfortunate voyage to Guinea.
+But, notwithstanding these friendly letters and fair promises, Pinteado
+durst not venture to return to Portugal, neither indeed durst he trust
+himself in company with any of his own countrymen, unless in the
+presence of other persons, as he had secret intimation that they meant
+to have assassinated him, when time and place might serve their wicked
+purpose.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The papers alluded to in this concluding paragraph by Richard Eden, do
+not seem necessary to be inserted. They consist of, a commission or
+patent dated 22d September 1551, appointing Pinteado one of the knights
+of the royal household, with 700 _rees_, or ten shillings a month, and
+half a bushel of barley every day so long as he should keep a horse; but
+with an injunction not to marry for six years, lest he might have
+children to succeed in this allowance. The second document is merely a
+certificate of registration of the first. The third is a letter from the
+infant, Don Luis, brother to the king of Portugal, dated 8th December
+1552, urging Pinteado to return to Lisbon, and intimating that Peter
+Gonzalvo, the bearer of the letter, had a safe conduct for him in due
+form. From the introduction to these papers, it appears that Pinteado
+had suffered long disgrace and imprisonment, proceeding upon false
+charges, and had been at last set free by means of the king's confessor,
+a grey friar, who had manifested his innocence.--E.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Voyage to Guinea, in 1554, by Captain John Lok_[198].
+
+
+As in the first voyage of the English to Guinea, I have given rather the
+order of the history than the course of navigation, of which I had then
+no perfect information; so in this second voyage my chief purpose has
+been to shew the course pursued, according to the ordinary custom and
+observation of mariners, and as I received it from the hands of an
+expert pilot, who was one of the chiefest in this voyage[199], who with
+his own hand wrote a brief journal of the whole, as he had found and
+tried in all things, not conjecturally, but by the art of navigation,
+and by means of instruments fitted for nautical use[200]. Not assuming
+therefore to myself the commendations due to another, neither having
+presumed in any part to change the substance or order of this journal,
+so well observed by art and experience, I have thought fit to publish it
+in the language commonly used by mariners, exactly as I received it from
+that pilot[201].
+
+[Footnote 198: Hakluyt, II. 470. Astl 1.114. In the first edition of
+Hakluyt's collection, this voyage is given under the name of Robert
+Gainsh, who was master of the John Evangelist, as we learn by a marginal
+note at the beginning of the voyage in both editions.--Astl. I. 144. a.]
+
+[Footnote 199: Perhaps this might be Robert Gainsh, in whose name the
+voyage was first published.--Astl. I. 144. b.]
+
+[Footnote 200: Yet the latitudes he gives, if observed, are by no means
+exact.--Astl.
+
+In this version we have added the true latitudes and longitudes in the
+text between brackets; the longitude from Greenwich always
+understood.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 201: This is the exordium, written by Richard Eden, from whose
+work it was adopted by Hakluyt, yet without acknowledgement. In the
+title, it appears that this expedition was fitted out as the joint
+adventure of Sir George Barne, Sir John York, Thomas Lok, Anthony
+Hickman, and Edward Castelin.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+On the 11th October 1554, we departed from the river Thames with three
+good ships. One of these named the Trinity, was of 140 tons burden; the
+second, called the Bartholomew, was 90 tons; and the third, called the
+John Evangelist, was 140 tons. With these three ships and two pinnaces,
+one of which was lost on the coast of England, we staid fourteen days at
+Dover, and three or four days at Rye, and lastly we touched at
+Dartmouth. Departing on the 1st November, at 9 o'clock at night, from
+the coast of England, off the Start point, and steering due south-west
+all that night, all next day, and the next night after, till noon of the
+3d, we made our way good, running 60 leagues. The morning of the 17th we
+had sight of the island of Madeira, which to those who approach from
+N.N.E. seems to rise very high, and almost perpendicular in the west. To
+the S.S.E. is a long low land, and a long point with a saddle through
+the midst of it, standing in 32 deg. N. [lat. 32 deg. 30' N. long. 16 deg. 12' W.]
+And in the west part are many springs of water running down from the
+mountain, with many white fields like fields of corn, and some white
+houses in the S.E. part. Also in this part is a rock at a small distance
+from the shore, over which a great gap or opening is seen in the
+mountain.
+
+The 19th at noon we had sight of the isles of Palma, Teneriffe, and
+Grand Canarea. The isle of Palma rises round, and stretches from S.E. to
+N.W. the north-west part being lowest. In the south is a round hill over
+the head-land, with another round hill behind and farther inland.
+Between the S.E. end of Madeira and the N.W. part of the island of
+Palma, the distance is 57 leagues[202], Palma being in 28 deg.. [lat. 28 deg.
+45' N. long 17 deg. 45' W.] Our course between the S.E. end of Madeira and
+the N.W. part of Palma was S. and S. by W. so that we had sight of
+Teneriffe and the Grand Canary. The S.E. part of Palma and N.N.E. of
+Teneriffe lie S.E. and N.W. [rather E. and W.] distance 20 leagues [33
+leagues.] Teneriffe and Grand Canarea, with the west part of
+Fuertaventura, stand in 27 deg. 30'[203]. Gomera is a fair island, but very
+rugged, W.S.W. from Teneriffe, the passage between running from N. by W.
+to S. by E. In the south part of Gomera is a town and good road-stead,
+in lat. 28 deg. N. Teneriffe is a mountainous island, with a great high peak
+like a sugar-loaf, on which there is snow all the year, and by that peak
+it may be known from all other islands. On the 20th November we were
+there becalmed from six in the morning till four in the afternoon. On
+the 22d November, being then under the tropic of Cancer, the sun set W.
+and by S. On the coast of Barbary, 25 leagues N. of Cape Blanco, at 3
+leagues from shore, we had 15 fathoms water on a good shelly bottom
+mixed with sand, and no currents, having two small islands in lat. 22 deg.
+20' N.[7] From Gomera to Cape de las Barbas is 100 leagues, [116] the
+course being S. by E. That cape is in lat. 22 deg. 30, [22 deg. 15'] all the
+coast thereabout being flat, and having 16 and 17 fathoms off shore. All
+the way from the river del Oro to Cape Barbas, at 7 or 8 leagues off
+shore, many Spaniards and Portuguese employ themselves in fishing during
+the month of November, the whole of that coast consisting of very low
+lands. From Cape Barbas we held a course S.S.W. and S.W. by S. till we
+came into lat. 20 deg. 30', reckoning ourselves 7 leagues off shore, and we
+there came to the least shoals of Cape Blanco. We then sailed to the
+lat. of 13 deg. N. reckoning ourselves 20 leagues off; and in 15 deg. _we did
+rear the crossiers_, or cross stars, and might have done so sooner if we
+had looked for them. They are not right across in the month of November,
+as the nights are short there, but we had sight of them on the 29th of
+that month at night. The 1st of December, being in lat. 13 deg. N. we set
+our course S. by E. till the 4th at noon, when we were in 9 deg. 20'
+reckoning ourselves 30 leagues W.S.W. from the shoals of the Rio Grande,
+which extend for 30 leagues. On the 4th, being in 6 deg. 30', we set our
+course S.E. The 9th we changed our course E.S.E. The 14th, being in lat.
+5 deg. 30' and reckoning ourselves 36 leagues from the coast of Guinea, we
+set our course due E. The 19th, reckoning ourselves 17 leagues from Cape
+Mensurado, we set our course E. by N. the said cape being E.N.E. of us,
+and the river Sesto E. The 20th we fell in with Cape Mensurado or
+Mesurado, which bore S.E. 2 leagues distant. This cape may be easily
+known, as it rises into a hummock like the head of a porpoise. Also
+towards the S.E. there are three trees, the eastmost being the highest,
+the middle one resembling a hay-stack, and that to the southward like a
+gibbet. Likewise on the main there are four or five high hills, one
+after the other, like round hummocks. The south-east of the three trees
+is _brandiernaure?_ and all the coast is a white sand. The said cape
+stands within a little of six degrees [lat. 6 deg. 20' N. long. 10 deg. 30' W.]
+The 22d we came to the river Sesto or Sesters, where we remained till
+the 29th, and we thought it best to send our pinnace before us to the
+Rio Dulce, that they might begin the market before the arrival of the
+John Evangelist. At the river Sesto, which is in six degrees less one
+terce, or 5 deg. 40', we got a ton of grains[205]. From Rio Sesto to Rio
+Dulce the distance is 25 leagues, Rio Dulce being in 5 deg. 30' N. The Rio
+Sesto is easily known by a ledge of rocks to the S.E. of the road[206],
+and at the mouth of the river are five or six trees without leaves. It
+is a good harbour, but the entrance of the river is very narrow, and has
+a rock right in the mouth. All that coast, between Cape Mount and Cape
+Palmas, lies S.E. by E. and N.W. by N. being three leagues
+offshore[207], and there are rocks in some places two leagues off,
+especially between the river Sesto and Cape Palmas.
+
+[Footnote 202: The real distance is 84 marine leagues, 20 to the
+degree.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 203: The parallel of lat. 28 deg. N. goes through the centre of
+Grand Canarea, touching the southern point of Teneriffe, and just
+keeping free of the S.W. point of Fuertaventura.--E.]
+
+[204][Footnote 204: 7 Cape Blanco is in lat. 20 deg. 50' N. 25 leagues to
+the north, would only reach to lat. 22 deg. 5'; exactly almost in 22 deg. is the
+small island of Pedro de Agale.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 205: In the preceding voyage grains have been explained as
+Guinea pepper, a species of capsicum.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 206: Rock Sesters is in long. 9 deg. 20' W.]
+
+[Footnote 207: This is not intelligible, unless meant that ships may
+anchor for three leagues from the shore.--E.]
+
+Between the river Sesto and the river Dulce are 25 leagues. Between them
+and 8 leagues from Sesto river is a high land called _Cakeado_, and S.E.
+from it a place called _Shawgro_, and another called _Shyawe_ or
+_Shavo_, where fresh water may be had. Off Shyawe lies a ledge of rocks,
+and to the S.E. is a headland named _Croke_, which is 9 or 10 leagues
+from Cakeado. To the S.E. is a harbour called St Vincent, right over
+against which is a rock under water, two and a half leagues from shore.
+To the S.E. of this rock is an island 3 or 4 leagues off, and not above
+a league from shore, and to the S.E. of the island is a rock above
+water, and past that rock is the entrance of the river Dulce, which may
+be known by that rock. The N.W. side of the haven is flat sand, and the
+S.E. side is like an island, being a bare spot without any trees, which
+is not the case in any other place. In the road ships ride in 13 or 14
+fathoms, the bottom good ouse and sand. The marks for entering this road
+are to bring the island and the north-east land in one. We anchored
+there on the last day of December 1554, and on the 3d of January 1555 we
+came from the Rio Dulce. _Cape Palmas_ is a fair high land, some low
+parts of which by the waterside seem red cliffs, with white streaks like
+highways, a cables length each, which is on the east side of the Cape.
+This is the most southerly land on the coast of Guinea, and is in lat.
+4 deg. 25' N. From Cape Palmas to Cape _Three-points_ or _Tres puntas_, the
+whole coast is perfectly safe and clear, without rock or other danger.
+About 25 leagues to the eastward of Cape Palmas the land is higher than
+in any other place till we come to Cape Three-points, and about ten
+leagues westward from that Cape the land begins to rise, and grows
+higher all the way to the point. Also about 5 leagues west from that
+Cape there is some broken ground with two great rocks, within which, in
+the bight of a bay, there is a castle called _Arra_ belonging to the
+king of Portugal, which is readily known by these rocks, as there are
+none other between Cape Palmas and Cape Three-points. The coast trends
+E. by N. and W. by S. From Cape Palmas to Arra castle is 95 leagues, and
+from thence to the western point of Cape Three-points it is S.E. by S.
+and N.W. by N. This western point of Cape Three-points is low land,
+stretching half a mile out to sea, and on the neck nearest the land is a
+tuft of trees.
+
+We arrived at Cape Three-points on the 11th January, and came next day
+to a town called _Samma_ or _Samua_, 8 leagues beyond, towards E.N.E.
+there being a great ledge of rocks a great way out to sea between Cape
+Three-points and that town. We remained four days off that town, the
+captain of which desired to have a pledge on shore, but on receiving one
+he kept him, and refused to continue trade, even shooting his ordnance
+at us, of which he only had two or three pieces[208]. On the 16th of the
+month we came to a place called Cape _Corea_[209], where dwelt Don John,
+and where we were well received by his people. This Cape Corea is 4
+leagues eastward from the castle of _Mina_. We arrived there on the 18th
+of the month, making sale of all our cloth except two or three packs. On
+the 26th we weighed anchor and went to join the Trinity, which was 7
+leagues to the eastwards of us, and had sold most of her wares. Then the
+people of the Trinity willed us to go 8 or 9 leagues farther to the
+east, to sell part of their wares at a place called _Perecow_, and
+another called _Perecow-grande_, still farther east, which is known by a
+great hill near it called _Monte Rodondo_ lying to the westwards, and
+many palm trees by the water side. From thence we began our voyage
+homewards on the 13th of February, and plied along the coast till we
+came within 7 or 8 leagues of Cape Three-points. About 8 in the
+afternoon of the 15th we cast about to seawards. Whoever shall come from
+the coast of Mina homewards, ought to beware of the currents, and should
+be sure of making his way good as far west as Cape Palmas, where the
+current sets always to the eastwards. About 20 leagues east of Cape
+Palmas is a river called _De los Potos_, where abundance of fresh water
+and ballast may be had, and plenty of ivory or elephants teeth, which
+river is in four degrees and almost two terces, or 4 deg. 40' N. When you
+reckon to be as far west as Cape Palmas, being in lat. 1 deg. or 1 deg. 30' N.
+you may then stand W. or W. by N. till in lat. 3 deg. N. Then you may go W.
+or N.W. by W. till in lat. 5 deg. N. and then N.W. In lat. 6 deg. N. we met
+northerly winds and great ruffling tides, and as far as we could judge
+the current set N.N.W. Likewise between Cape Mount and Cape Verd there
+are great currents, which are very apt to deceive.
+
+[Footnote 208: The pledge was nephew to Sir John Yorke.--_Eden_.]
+
+[Footnote 209: From the context, this seems to have been the place now
+called Cape Coast.--E.]
+
+On the 22d of April we were in lat. 8 deg. 40' N. and continued our course
+to the north-west, having the wind at N.E. and E.N.E. sometimes at E.
+till the first of May, when we were in lat. 18 deg. 20' N. Thence we had the
+wind at E. and E.N.E. sometimes E.S.E. when we reckoned the Cape Verd
+islands E.S.E. from us, and by estimation 48 leagues distant. In 20 deg. and
+21 deg. N. we had the wind more to the east and south than before; and so we
+ran N.W. and N.N.W. sometimes N. by W. and N. till we came into lat. 31 deg.
+N. when we reckoned ourselves 180 leagues S.W. by S. of the island of
+Flores. Here we had the wind S.S.E. and shaped our course N.E. In 23 deg. we
+had the wind at S. and S.W. and made our course N.N.E. in which
+direction we went to 40 deg., and then set our course N.E. having the wind
+at S.W. and the isle of Flores E. of us, 17 leagues distant. In 41 deg. we
+had the wind N.E. and lay a course N.W. Then we met the wind at W.N.W.
+and at W. within 6 leagues, when we went N.W. We then altered to N.E.
+till in 42 deg. where we shaped our course E.N.E. judging the isle of
+_Corvo_ to be W. of us, 36 leagues distant. On the 21st of May we
+communed with John Rafe who judged us to be in lat. 39 deg. 30' N. 25
+leagues E. of Flora, and recommended to steer N.E.
+
+It is to be noted that in lat. 9 deg. N. on the 4th of September, we lost
+sight of the north star. In lat. 45 deg. N. the compass varied 8 deg. to the W.
+of N. In 40 deg. N. it varied 15 deg.. And in 30 deg. 30' N. its variation was 5 deg. W.
+
+It is also to be noted that two or three days before we came to Cape
+Three-points, the pinnace went along shore endeavouring to sell some of
+our wares, and then we came to anchor three or four leagues west by
+south of that cape, where we left the Trinity. Then our pinnace came on
+board and took in more wares, telling us that they would go to a place
+where the Primrose[210] was, and had received much gold in the first
+voyage to these parts; but being in fear of a brigantine that was then
+on the coast, we weighed anchor and followed them, leaving the Trinity
+about four leagues from us. We accordingly rode at anchor opposite that
+town, where Martine, by his own desire and with the assent of some of
+the commissioners in the pinnace, went on shore to the town, and thence
+John Berin went to trade at another town three miles father on. The town
+is called Samma or Samua, which and Sammaterra are the two first towns
+to the N.E. of Cape Three-points, where we traded for gold.
+
+[Footnote 210: This was one of the ships in the former voyage under
+Windham.--E.]
+
+Having continued the course of the voyage as described by the
+before-mentioned pilot, I will now say something of the country and
+people, and of such things as are brought from thence[211].
+
+[Footnote 211: These subsequent notices seem subjoined by Richard Eden,
+the original publisher.--E.]
+
+They brought home in this voyage, 400 pounds weight and odd of
+gold[212], twenty-two carats and one grain fine. Also 36 buts of
+_grains_, or Guinea pepper, and about 250 elephants teeth of different
+sizes. Some of these I saw and measured, which were nine spans in length
+measured along the crook, and some were as thick as a mans thigh above
+the knee, weighing 90 pounds each, though some are said to have been
+seen weighing 125 pounds. There were some called the teeth of calves, of
+one, two, or three years old, measuring one and a-half, two, or three
+feet, according to the age of the beast. These great teeth or tusks
+grow in the upper jaw downwards, and not upwards from the lower jaw, as
+erroneously represented by some painters and _arras_ workers. In this
+voyage they brought home the head of an elephant of such huge bigness
+that the bones or cranium only, without the tusks or lower jaw, weighed
+about two hundred pounds, and was as much as I could well lift from the
+ground. So that, considering also the weight of the two great tusks and
+the under jaw, with the lesser teeth, the tongue, the great hanging
+ears, the long big snout or trunk, with all the flesh, brains, and skin,
+and other parts belonging to the head, it could not in my opinion weigh
+less than five hundred weight. This head has been seen by many in the
+house of the worthy merchant Sir Andrew Judde, where I saw it with my
+bodily eyes, and contemplated with those of my mind, admiring the
+cunning and wisdom of the work-master, without which consideration such
+strange and wonderful things are only curiosities, not profitable
+subjects of contemplation.
+
+[Footnote 212: Or 4800 ounces, worth, L.18,600 sterling at the old price
+of L.3 17s. 6d. per ounce; and perhaps worth in those days as much as
+ninety or an hundred thousand pounds in the present day.--E.]
+
+The elephant, by some called oliphant, is the largest of all four-footed
+beasts. The fore-legs are longer than those behind; in the lower part or
+ancles of which he has joints. The feet have each five toes, but
+undivided. The trunk or snout is so long and of such form that it serves
+him as a hand, for he both eats and drinks by bringing his food and
+drink to his mouth by its means, and by it he helps up his master or
+keeper, and also overturns trees by its strength. Besides his two great
+tusks, he has four teeth on each side of his mouth, by which he eats or
+grinds his food, each of these teeth being almost a span long, as they
+lie along the jaw, by two inches high and about as much in breadth. The
+tusks of the male are larger than those of the female. The tongue is
+very small, and so far within the mouth that it cannot be seen. This is
+the gentlest and most tractable of all beasts, and understands and is
+taught many things, so that it is even taught to do reverence to kings,
+being of acute sense and great judgment. When the female is once
+seasoned, the male never touches her afterwards. The male lives two
+hundred years, or at least 120, and the female almost as long; but the
+flower of their age is reckoned 60 years. They cannot endure our winter
+or cold weather; but they love to go into rivers, in which they will
+often wade up to their trunk, snuffing and blowing the water about in
+sport; but they cannot swim, owing to the weight of their bodies. If
+they happen to meet a man wandering in the wilderness, they will go
+gently before him and lead him into the right way. In battle they pay
+much respect to those who are wounded, bringing such as are hurt or
+weary into the middle of the army where they may be defended. They are
+made tame by drinking the juice of barley[213].
+
+[Footnote 213: The meaning of this expression is by no means obvious. It
+is known that in India, arrack, or a spirituous liquor distilled from
+rice, is given regularly to elephants, which may be here alluded
+to.--E.]
+
+They have continual war with dragons, which desire their blood because
+it is very cold; wherefore the dragon lies in wait for the passing of an
+elephant, winding its tail of vast length round the hind legs of the
+elephant, then thrusts his head into his trunk and sucks out his breath,
+or bites him in the ears where he cannot reach with his trunk. When the
+elephant becomes faint with the loss of blood, he falls down upon the
+serpent, now gorged with blood, and with the weight of his body crushes
+the dragon to death. Thus his own blood and that of the elephant run out
+of the serpent now mingled together, which cooling is congealed into
+that substance which the apothecaries call _sanguis draconis_ or
+cinnabar[214]. But there are other kinds of cinnabar, commonly called
+_cinoper_ or vermillion, which the painters use in certain colours.
+
+[Footnote 214: It is surely needless to say that this is a mere
+fable.--E.]
+
+There are three kinds of elephants, as of the marshes, the plains, and
+the mountains, differing essentially from each other. Philostratus
+writes, that by how much the elephants of Lybia exceed in bigness the
+horses of Nysea, so much do the elephants of India exceed those of
+Lybia, for some of the elephants of India have been seen nine cubits
+high; and these are so greatly feared by the others, that they dare not
+abide to look upon them. Only the males among the Indian elephants have
+tusks; but in Ethiopia and Lybia, both males and females are provided
+with them. They are of divers heights, as of 12, 13, or 14 _dodrants_,
+the dodrant being a measure of 9 inches; and some say that an elephant
+is bigger than three wild oxen or buffaloes. Those of India are black,
+or mouse-coloured; but those of Ethiopia or Guinea are brown. The hide
+or skin of them all is very hard, and without hair or bristles. Their
+ears are two dodrants, or 18 inches in breadth, and their eyes are very
+small. Our men saw one drinking at a river in Guinea as they sailed
+along the coast. Those who wish to know more of the properties of the
+elephant, as of their wonderful docility, of their use in war, of their
+chastity and generation, when they were first seen in the triumphs and
+amphitheatres of the Romans, how they are taken and tamed, when they
+cast their tusks, and of their use in medicine, and many other
+particulars, will find all these things described in the eighth book of
+Natural History, as written by Pliny. He also says in his twelfth book,
+that the ancients made many goodly works of ivory or elephants teeth;
+such as tables, tressels or couches, posts of houses, rails, lattices
+for windows, idols of their gods, and many other things of ivory, either
+coloured or uncoloured, and intermixed with various kinds of precious
+woods; in which manner at this day are made chairs, lutes, virginals,
+and the like. They had such plenty of it in ancient times, that one of
+the gates of Jerusalem was called the ivory gate, as Josephus reports.
+The whiteness of ivory was so much admired, that it was anciently
+thought to represent the fairness of the human skin; insomuch that those
+who endeavoured to improve, or rather to corrupt, the natural beauty by
+painting, were said reproachfully, _ebur atramento candefacere_, to
+whiten ivory with ink. Poets also, in describing the fair necks of
+beautiful virgins, call them _eburnea colla_, or ivory necks. Thus much
+may suffice of elephants and ivory, and I shall now say somewhat of the
+people, and their manners, and mode of living, with another brief
+description of Africa.
+
+The people who now inhabit the regions of the coast of Guinea and the
+middle parts of Africa, as inner Lybia, Nubia, and various other
+extensive regions in that quarter, were anciently called Ethiopians and
+_Nigritae_, which we now call Moors, Moorens, or Negroes; a beastly
+living people, without God, law, religion, or government, and so
+scorched by the heat of the sun, that in many places they curse it when
+it rises. Of the people about Lybia interior, Gemma Phrysius thus
+writes: Libia interior is large and desolate, containing many horrible
+wildernesses, replenished with various kinds of monstrous beasts and
+serpents. To the south of Mauritania or Barbary is Getulia, a rough and
+savage region, inhabited by a wild and wandering people. After these
+follow the _Melanogetuli_, or black Getulians, and Phransii, who wander
+in the wilderness, carrying with them great gourds filled with water.
+Then the Ethiopians, called Nigritae, occupy a great part of Africa,
+extending to the western ocean or Atlantic. Southwards also they reach
+to the river Nigritis or Niger, which agrees in its nature with the
+Nile, as it increases and diminishes like the Nile, and contains
+crocodiles. Therefore, I believe this to be the river called the Senegal
+by the Portuguese. It is farther said of the Niger, that the inhabitants
+on one side were all black and of goodly stature, while on the other
+side they were brown or tawny and of low stature, which also is the case
+with the Senegal.[215] There are other people of Lybia, called
+_Garamantes_, whose women are in common, having no marriages or any
+respect to chastity. After these are the nations called _Pyrei,
+Sathiodaphintae, Odrangi, Mimaces, Lynxamator, Dolones, Agangince, Leuci
+Ethiopes, Xilicei Ethiopes, Calcei Ethiopes_, and _Nubi_. These last
+have the same situation in Ptolemy, which is now given to the kingdom of
+Nubia, where there are certain Christians under the dominion of the
+great emperor of Ethiopia, called Prester John. From these towards the
+west was a great nation called _Aphricerones_, inhabiting, as far as we
+can conjecture, what is now called the _Regnum Orguene_, bordering on
+the eastern or interior parts of Guinea. From hence westwards and
+towards the north, are the kingdoms of _Gambra_ and _Budamel_, not far
+from the river Senegal; and from thence toward the inland region and
+along the coast are the regions of _Ginoia_ or Guinea. On the west side
+of this region is Cabo Verde, _caput viride_, Cap Verd, or the Green
+Cape, to which the Portuguese first direct their course when they sail
+to the land of Brazil in America, on which occasion they turn to the
+right hand towards the quarter of the wind called _Garbino_, which is
+between the west and south.
+
+[Footnote 215: It may be proper to mention in this place, that the Niger
+and the Senegal, though agreeing in these particulars, are totally
+different rivers in the same parallel. The Senegal runs into the sea
+from the east; while the Niger running to the east, loses itself in an
+interior lake, as the Wolga does in the Caspian, having no connection
+whatever with the ocean. According to some accounts, this lake only
+exists as such during the rainy season, drying up in the other part of
+the year, probably however leaving an extensive marsh, called the
+_Wangara_. If so, the environs of that lake and marsh must be unhealthy
+in the utmost extreme.--E.]
+
+To speak somewhat more of Ethiopia, although there are many nations
+called Ethiopians, yet is Ethiopia chiefly divided into two parts, one
+of which being a great and rich region, is called _Ethiopia sub Egypto_,
+or Ethiopia to the south of Egypt. To this belongs the island of Meroe,
+which is environed by the streams of the Nile. In this island women
+reigned in ancient times, and, according to Josephus, it was some time
+called _Sabea_, whence the queen of Saba went to Jerusalem to listen to
+the wisdom of Solomon. From thence, towards the east and south, reigneth
+the Christian emperor called Prester John, by some named Papa Johannes,
+or as others say _Pean Juan_, signifying Great John, whose empire
+reaches far beyond the Nile, and extends to the coasts of the Red Sea
+and of the Indian ocean. The middle of this region is almost in 66
+degrees of E. longitude, and 12 degrees of N. lat.[216] About this
+region dwell the people called _Clodi, Risophagi, Axiuntiae, Babylonii,
+Molili_, and _Molibae_. After these is the region called _Trogloditica_,
+the inhabitants of which dwell in caves and dens, instead of houses, and
+feed upon the flesh of serpents, as is reported by Pliny and Diodorus
+Siculus, who allege, that instead of language, they have only a kind of
+grinning and chattering. There are also people without heads, called
+_Blemines_, having their eyes and mouths in their breast. Likewise
+_Strucophagi_, and naked _Gamphasantes_; _satyrs_ also, who have nothing
+of human nature except the shape. _Oripei_ likewise, who are great
+hunters, and _Mennones_. Here also is _Smyrnophora_, or the region of
+myrrh; after which is _Azania_, producing many elephants.[217] A great
+portion of the eastern part of Africa beyond the equinoctial line is in
+the kingdom of _Melinda_, the inhabitants of which have long been in use
+to trade with the nations of Arabia, and whose king is now allied to the
+king of Portugal, and pays tribute to Prester John.
+
+[Footnote 216: Reckoning the longitude from the island of Ferro, the
+middle of Abyssinia is only in about 52 deg. 30' E. and as Ferro is 18 deg. W.
+from Greenwich, that coincides with 34 deg. 30' E. as the longitude is now
+reckoned by British geographers.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 217: It is impossible, in the compass of a note, to enter into
+any commentary on this slight sketch of the ancient geography of eastern
+Africa.--E.]
+
+The other, or interior Ethiopia, being a region of vast extent, is now
+only somewhat known upon the sea-coast, but may be described as follows.
+In the first place, towards the south of the equator, is a great region
+of Ethiopians, in which are white elephants, _tigers_, (lions) and
+rhinoceroses. Also a region producing plenty of cinnamon, which lies
+between the branches of the Nile. Also the kingdom of Habesch or
+Habasia,[218] a region inhabited by Christians, on both sides of the
+Nile. Likewise those Ethiopians called _Ichthyophagi_, or who live only
+on fish, who were subdued in the wars of Alexander the Great[219]. Also
+the Ethiopians called _Rapsii_ and _Anthropophagi_, who are in use to
+eat human flesh, and inhabit the regions near the mountains of the moon.
+_Gazatia_ is under the tropic of Capricorn; after which comes the
+_front_ of Africa, and the Cape of Good Hope, past which they sail from
+Lisbon to Calicut: But as the capes and gulfs, with their names, are to
+be found on every globe and chart, it were superfluous to enumerate them
+here.
+
+[Footnote 218: It is strange that Habasia or Abyssinia, inhabited by
+Christians, should thus be divided from the empire of Prester John.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 219: The Icthyophagi of Alexander dwelt on the oceanic coast
+of Persia, now Mekran, between the river Indus and the Persian gulf, not
+in Ethiopia.--E.]
+
+Some allege that Africa was so named by the Greeks, as being without
+cold; the Greek letter _alpha_ signifying privation, void of, or
+without, and _phrice_ signifying cold; as, although it has a cloudy and
+tempestuous season instead of winter, it is yet never cold, but rather
+smothering hot, with hot showers, and such scorching winds, that at
+certain times the inhabitants seem as if living in furnaces, and in a
+manner half ready for purgatory or hell. According to Gemma Phrisius, in
+certain parts of Africa, as in the greater Atlas, the air in the night
+is seen shining with many strange fires and flames, rising as it were as
+high as the moon, and strange noises are heard in the air, as of pipes,
+trumpets, and drums, which are caused perhaps by the vehement motions of
+these fiery exhalations, as we see in many experiments wrought by fire,
+air, and wind. The hollowness also, and various reflections and
+breakings of the clouds, may be great causes thereof, besides the great
+coldness of the middle region of the air, by which these fiery
+exhalations, when they ascend there, are suddenly driven back with great
+force. Daily experience teaches us, by the whizzing of a burning torch,
+what a noise fire occasions in the air, and much more so when it strives
+and is inclosed with air, as seen in guns; and even when air alone is
+inclosed, as in organ pipes and other wind instruments: For wind,
+according to philosophers, is nothing but air vehemently moved, as when
+propelled by a pair of bellows, and the like.
+
+Some credible persons affirm that, in this voyage to Guinea, they felt a
+sensible heat in the night from the beams of the moon; which, though it
+seem strange to us who inhabit a cold region, may yet reasonably have
+been the case, as Pliny writes that the nature of stars and planets
+consists of fire, containing a spirit of life, and cannot therefore be
+without heat. That the moon gives heat to the earth seems confirmed by
+David, in the 121st psalm, where, speaking of such men as are defended
+from evils by the protection of God, he says, "The sun shall not burn
+thee by day, neither the moon by night[220]." They said likewise, that
+in some parts of the sea they saw streams of water, which they call
+_spouts_, falling out of the air into the sea, some of them being as
+large as the pillars of churches; insomuch that, when these fall into
+ships, they are in great danger of being sunk. Some allege these to be
+the cataracts of heaven, which were all opened at Noah's flood: But I
+rather consider them to be those fluxions and eruptions said by
+Aristotle, in his book de Mundo, to happen in the sea. For, speaking of
+such strange things as are often seen in the sea, he writes thus:
+"Oftentimes also, even in the sea are seen evaporations of fire, and
+such eruptions and breaking forth of springs, that the mouths of rivers
+are opened. Whirlpools and fluxions are caused of such other vehement
+motions, not only in the midst of the sea, but also in creeks and
+straits. At certain times also, a great quantity of water is suddenly
+lifted up and carried about by the moon," &c. From these words of
+Aristotle it appears, that such waters are lifted up at one time in one
+place, and suddenly fall down again in another place at another time. To
+this also may be referred what Richard Chancellor told me, as having
+heard from Sebastian Cabot, as far as I remember, either on the coast of
+Brazil or of the Rio de la Plata, that his ship or pinnace was suddenly
+lifted from the sea and cast upon the land, I know not how far. Which,
+and other strange and wonderful works of nature considered, and calling
+to remembrance the narrowness of human knowledge and understanding,
+compared with her mighty power, I can never cease to wonder, and to
+confess with Pliny, that nothing is impossible to nature, whose smallest
+power is still unknown to man.
+
+[Footnote 220: In our present version the word _smite_ is used instead
+of burn. But the quotation in the text is a literal translation from the
+Latin vulgate, and agrees with the older English version, still used in
+the Book of Common Prayer.--E.]
+
+Our people saw and considered many things in this voyage that are
+worthy of notice, and some of which I have thought fit to record, that
+the reader may take pleasure, both in the variety of these things, and
+in the narrative of the voyage. Among other matters respecting the
+manners and customs of these people, this may seem strange, that their
+princes and nobles are in use to pierce and wound their skins in such
+way as to form curious figures upon it, like flowered damask, which they
+consider as very ornamental[221]. Although they go in a manner naked,
+yet many of them, and the women especially, are almost loaded with
+collars, bracelets, rings, and chains, of gold, copper, or ivory. I have
+seen one of their ivory armlets weighing 38 ounces, which was worn by
+one of their women on her arm. It was made of one piece of the largest
+part of an elephant's tooth, turned and somewhat carved, having a hole
+through which to pass the hand. Some have one on each arm and one on
+each leg, and though often so galled by them as to be almost lame, they
+still persist to use them. Some wear great shackles on their legs of
+bright copper, and they wear collars, bracelets, garlands, and girdles
+of certain blue stones, resembling beads. Some also of their women wear
+upon their arms a kind of _fore-sleeves_[222], made of plates of beaten
+gold. They wear likewise rings on their fingers made of gold wire,
+having a knot or wreath, like those which children make on rush rings.
+Among other golden articles bought by our men, were some dog-collars and
+chains.
+
+[Footnote 221: Now well known under the name of tatooing.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 222: Sleeves for the fore-arms, or from the elbow to the
+wrist.--E.]
+
+These natives of Guinea are very wary in driving bargains, and will not
+willingly lose the smallest particle of their gold, using weights and
+measures for the same with great circumspection. In dealing with them,
+it is necessary to behave with civility and gentleness, as they will not
+trade with any who use them ill. During the first voyage of our people
+to that country, on departing from the place where they had first
+traded, one of them either stole a musk-cat or took her away by force,
+not suspecting that this could have any effect to prevent trading at the
+next station: But although they went there in full sail, the news had
+got there before them, and the people refused to deal with them until
+the cat were either restored or paid for at a fixed price. Their houses
+are made of four posts or trees set in the ground, and are covered with
+boughs; and their ordinary food is roots, with such fish as they take,
+which are in great plenty. Among these are flying fishes, similar to
+those seen in the West India seas. Our people endeavoured to salt some
+of the fish which they caught on the coast of Africa, but some said that
+they would not take salt, and must therefore be eaten immediately; while
+others alleged that, if salted immediately when taken, they would keep
+good for ten or twelve days. Part of the salt meat taken by our people
+from England became putrid while on the coast of Africa, yet turned
+sweet again after their return to a temperate region. They have a
+strange method of making bread, which is as follows: They grind, with
+their hands, between two stones, as much corn into meal as they think
+may suffice the family, and making this flour into a paste with water,
+they knead it into thin cakes, which are stuck upon the posts of their
+houses and baked or dried by the heat of the sun; so that when the
+master of the house or any of the family are in want of bread, they take
+it down from the post and eat.
+
+They have very fair wheat, the ear of which is two hand-breadths long
+and as big as a great bulrush, the stem or straw being almost as thick
+as a man's little finger. The grains are white and round, shining like
+pearls that have lost their lustre, and about the size of our pease.
+Almost their whole substance turns to flour, leaving very little bran.
+The ear is inclosed in three blades, each about two inches broad, and
+longer than the ear; and in one of them I counted 260 grains of corn. By
+this fruitfulness, the sun seems in some measure to compensate for the
+trouble and distress produced by its excessive heat. Their drink is
+either water, or the juice which drops from cut branches of the palmito,
+a barren palm or date tree; to collect which they hang great gourds to
+the cut branches every evening, or set them on the ground under the
+trees, to receive the juice which issues during the night. Our people
+said that this juice tasted like whey, but sweeter and more pleasant.
+The branches of the palmito are cut every evening to obtain this juice,
+as the heat of the sun during the day dries up and sears over the wound.
+They have likewise large beans, as big as chesnuts, and very hard,
+having shells instead of husks or pods. While formerly describing the
+fruit containing the _grains_ or Guinea pepper, called by the physicians
+_grana paradisi_, I remarked that they have holes through them, as in
+effect they have when brought to us; but I have been since informed,
+that these holes are made on purpose to put strings or twigs through,
+for hanging up the fruit to dry in the sun. This fruit grows on a plant
+which does not rise above eighteen inches or two feet above the ground.
+
+At their coming home, the keels and bottoms of the ships were strangely
+overgrown with certain shells, two inches or more in length, as thick as
+they could stand, and so large that a man might put his thumb into their
+mouths. It is affirmed that a certain slimy substance grows in these
+shells, which falls afterwards into the sea, and is changed into the
+bird called barnacles[223]. Similar shells have been seen on ships
+coming from Ireland, but these Irish barnacles do not exceed half an
+inch long. I saw the Primrose in dock, after her return from Guinea,
+having her bottom entirely covered over with these shells, which in my
+judgment must have greatly impeded her sailing. Their ships also were in
+many places eaten into by the worms called _Bromas_ or _Bissas_, which
+are mentioned in the Decades[224]. These worms creep between the planks,
+which they eat through in many places.
+
+[Footnote 223: This is an old fable not worth confuting. The Barnacle
+goose or clakis of Willoughby, anas erythropus of Linnaeus, called
+likewise tree-goose, anciently supposed to be generated from drift wood,
+or rather from the _lepas anatifera_ or multivalve shell, called
+barnacle, which is often found on the bottoms of ships.--See Pennant's
+Brit. Zool. 4to. 1776. V. II. 488, and Vol. IV. 64.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 224: Meaning the Decades of Peter Martyr, part of which book
+was translated and published by Richard Eden.--Astl I. 149. b.]
+
+In this voyage, though they sailed to Guinea in seven weeks, they took
+twenty to return; owing to this cause, as they reported, that about the
+coast at Cape Verd the wind was continually east, so that they were
+obliged to stand far out into the ocean, in search of a western wind to
+bring them home. In this last voyage about twenty-four of the men died,
+many of them between the Azores and England, after their return into the
+cold or temperate region. They brought with them several black
+slaves[225], some of whom were tall strong men, who could well agree
+with our meats and drinks. The cold and moist air of England somewhat
+offended them; yet men who are born in hot regions can much better
+endure cold, than those of cold regions can bear heat; because violent
+heat dissolves the radical moisture of the human body, while cold
+concentrates and preserves it. It is to be considered as among the
+secrets of nature, that while all parts of Africa under the equator, and
+for some way on both sides, are excessively hot, and inhabited by black
+people, such regions in the West Indies [America], under the same
+parallels, are very temperate, and the natives are neither black, nor
+have they short curled wool on their heads like the Africans; but are of
+an olive colour, with long black hair. The cause of this difference is
+explained in various places of the _Decades_. Some of those who were
+upon this voyage told me that on the 14th of March they had the sun to
+the north of them at noon.
+
+[Footnote 225: In a side note, _five blacke moors_.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Voyage to Guinea in 1555, by William Towerson, Merchant of
+London_[226].
+
+
+On Monday the 30th of September 1555, we sailed from the harbour of
+Newport, in the Isle of Wight, with two good ships, the Hart and the
+Hind, both belonging to London, of which John Ralph and William Carters
+were masters, bound on a voyage for the river Sestos, in Guinea, and
+other harbours in that neighbourhood. Owing to variable winds, we could
+not reach Dartmouth before the 14th of October; and having continued
+there till the 20th of that month, we warpt out of the harbour, and set
+sail to the S.W. and by next morning had run 30 leagues. On the 1st
+November, by the reckoning of our master, we were in lat. 31 deg. N. and
+that day we ran 40 leagues. The 2d we ran 36 leagues; and on the 3d we
+had sight of Porto Santo, a small island about three leagues long and
+one and a-half broad, belonging to the Portuguese, and lying in the
+ocean. As we came towards it from the N.N.W. it seemed like two small
+hills near each other. The east end of the island is a high land like a
+saddle, having a valley which gives it that appearance; while the west
+end is lower, with several small round hillocks[227]. Porto Santo is in
+about lat. 33 deg. N. The same day at 11 o'clock A.M. we raised the island
+of Madeira, which is 12 leagues S.W. from Porto Santo. Madeira is a fine
+and fertile island belonging to the Portuguese, and rises from afar like
+one great high mountain. By 3 P.M. being athwart of Porto Santo, we set
+our course to the S.W. leaving both Madeira and Porto Santo to the
+eastwards, being the first land we had seen after leaving England. About
+three next morning we were abreast of Madeira, within three leagues of
+its west end, and were becalmed under its high land. We estimated having
+run 30 leagues in the past day and night. The 4th we remained becalmed
+under the west end of Madeira till 1 P.M. when the wind sprung up at
+east, and we continued our course S.W. making in the rest of that day 15
+leagues. The 5th we ran 15 leagues.
+
+[Footnote 226: Hakluyt, II. 480, Astl. I. 150.--From several passages in
+this journal it appears that Towerson had been on the former voyage to
+Guinea with Captain Lock; but in the present voyage he appears to have
+acted as captain or chief director, and seems to have been the author of
+the journal here adopted from Hakluyt.--Astl. I. 150, 2.]
+
+[Footnote 227: The saddle-backed hills of old navigators, are to be
+considered in reference to the old demipique or war-saddle, having high
+abrupt peaks, or hummocks, at each end, with a flattish hollow
+between.--E.]
+
+The 6th in the morning we got sight of _Teneriffe_, otherwise called the
+Peak, being very high land, with a peak on the top like a sugar loaf;
+and the same night we got sight of _Palma_, which also is high land and
+W. from Teneriffe [W.N.W.] The 7th we saw _Gomera_, an island about 12
+leagues S.E. from Palma, and eight W.S.W. from Teneriffe; and lest we
+might have been becalmed under Teneriffe, we left both it and Gomera to
+the east, and passed between Palma and Gomera. This day and night our
+course was 30 leagues. These islands, called the Canaries, are 60
+leagues from Madeira, and there are other three islands in the group to
+the eastward of Teneriffe, named _Gran Canarea_, _Fuertaventura_, and
+_Lancerota_, none of which we saw. All these islands are inhabited by
+Spaniards. On this day likewise we got sight of the Isle of _Ferro_,
+which is 13 leagues south from Gomera, and belongs to the Spaniards like
+the others. We were unable all this day or the following night to get
+beyond Ferro, unless we had chosen to go to the westwards, which had
+been much out of our proper course; wherefore we put about, and stood
+back five hours E.N.E. in hope of being able to clear it next tack, the
+wind keeping always S.E. which is not often met with in that latitude by
+navigators, as it generally keeps in the N.E. and E.N.E. Next morning,
+being on the other tack, we were nearly close in with the island, but
+had room enough to get clear past.
+
+The 8th, our due course to fetch the Barbary coast being S.E. by E. we
+were unable to keep it by reason of the wind being scant, but lay as
+near it as we could, running that day and night 25 leagues. The 9th we
+ran 30 leagues; the 10th 25; and 11th, 24 leagues. The 12th we saw a
+sail under our lee, which we thought to be a fishing bark, and stood
+down to speak with her; but in an hour there came on so thick a fog that
+we could neither see that vessel nor our consort the Hind. We
+accordingly shot off several guns to give notice to the Hind of our
+situation, but she did not hear or answer us. In the afternoon the Hind
+fired a gun, which we heard and answered with another gun. About half an
+hour afterwards the fog cleared away, and we were within four leagues of
+the Barbary coast, when sounding we had 14 fathoms water. The bark also
+had come _room_[228] with us, and anchored here likewise, the wind being
+contrary for going down the coast, or to the southwards. On falling in
+with the land, we could not judge precisely whereabout we were, most of
+that coast being low, the forepart of the coast being white like chalk
+or sand, _and very deep unto the hard shore_[229]. Immediately on coming
+to anchor we began to fish, and got abundance of that kind which the
+Portuguese call _Pergosses_, the French _saders_, and our men salt-water
+_breams_. Before the fog entirely cleared away, the vessel we had
+followed shaped such a course that we lost sight of her, chiefly because
+we had bore up to find the Hind again. Our pilot reckoned that we were
+upon that part of the coast which is 16 leagues eastwards[230] from the
+Rio del Oro.
+
+[Footnote 228: This antiquated nautical word, which occurred before in
+the journal of Don Juan de Castro, is here obviously going down the
+wind, large, or to leeward.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 229: The meaning of this passage is not obvious, and seems to
+want some words to make out the meaning: It may be that the shore is
+very steep, or that the water continues deep close to the shore.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 230: Eastwards from Rio del Oro is directly into the land; so
+that they must either have been N.N.E. or S.S.W. probably the
+former.--E.]
+
+In the afternoon of the 13th we spied a sail coming towards us, which we
+judged to be that we had seen the day before, and we immediately caused
+the Hind to weigh anchor and go towards her, manning likewise our own
+skiff, to lay her on board or to learn what she was, and within half an
+hour we weighed also. When the vessel noticed us, she put about and
+sailed from us; and soon after there came on so heavy a fog that we
+could not see her, and as the fog continued the whole night we had to
+quit the chase. In the afternoon the wind came about fair, so that we
+were able to shape a course S.W. by W. to keep clear of the coast, and
+ran that night 16 leagues. The 14th in the morning was very foggy, but
+the fog cleared away about noon, when we espied a caravel of 60 tons
+fishing, and sent our skiff on board with five men unarmed. For haste
+the caravel slipped her anchors and set sail, yet our unarmed boat
+overtook her and made her strike sail, and brought her away, though she
+had fourteen or fifteen men on board, all armed, but they had not the
+heart to resist. On coming to us they anchored, as we were likewise,
+because the wind had become foul; on which I made our skiff come for me,
+and I went on board the caravel, to take care that no harm was offered,
+and to see if they would spare us any thing for our money. Accordingly
+we got from them three _tapnets_ of figs, two small jars of oil, two
+pipes of water, and four hogsheads of salt fish, which they had taken on
+the coast, besides some fresh fish, which they held of no value, as they
+are so plentiful on that coast that one man may often take as many in an
+hour or less as will serve twenty men a whole day. For these things,
+some wine we drank while on board their ship, and three or four great
+cans which they sent on board our ships, I paid them 27 pistoles, being
+twice as much as they would willingly have taken. We then let them go to
+their anchor and cable which they had slipped, and assisted them to
+recover. After this we made sail, but the wind obliged us to come to
+anchor again about 12 leagues from the Rio del Oro, as we were informed
+by the Portuguese. There were five other caravels in this place, but
+immediately on our appearance they all made away for fear of us.
+
+The 15th we continued at anchor, as the wind was still foul. The 16th we
+set sail and run our course 40 leagues, being this day, according to our
+pilots, right under the Tropic of Cancer, in lat. 23 deg. 30' N. The 17th we
+ran 25 leagues, mostly in sight of the coast of Barbary. The 18th we ran
+30 leagues, and at noon, by the reckoning of our pilots, were abreast of
+Cape Blanco. The 22d they reckoned we were abreast of Cape Verd. The
+12th of December we got sight of the coast of Guinea, towards which we
+immediately hauled, standing to the N.E. and about 12 at night, being
+less than two leagues from the shore, we lay to and sounded, finding 18
+fathoms water. We soon afterwards saw a light between us and the shore,
+which we thought might have been a ship, from which circumstance we
+judged ourselves off the river Sestro, and we immediately came to
+anchor, armed our tops, and made all clear for action, suspecting it
+might be some Portuguese or French ship. In the morning we saw no ship
+whatever, but espied four rocks about two English miles from us, one
+being a large rock and the other three small; whence we concluded that
+the light seen during the night had been on shore. We then weighed and
+stood E.S.E. along shore, because the master did not rightly know the
+place, but thought we were still to the westward of Sestro river. All
+along this coast the land is low, and full of high trees close to the
+shore, so that no one can know what place he falls in with, except by
+means of the latitude. I think we ran 16 leagues that day, as we had all
+night a stiff gale, with much thunder and lightning.
+
+For most port of the 13th we ran E.S.E. along the coast, within two
+leagues of the land, finding the shore all covered with tall trees to
+the water's edge, and great rocks hard by the beach, on which the
+billows continually broke in white foam, so high that the surf might
+easily be seen at four leagues distance, and in such a manner that no
+boat could possibly go to land. At noon our masters and pilots took the
+altitude of the sun, by which they judged that we were 24 leagues beyond
+the river Sestro to the eastwards, wherefore we hauled in towards the
+shore and came to anchor within two English miles of the land in 15
+fathoms, the water being so smooth that we might have rode with a
+hawser. We employed the afternoon to rig out our boat with a sail, for
+the purpose of sending her along shore in search of a place to take in
+water, as we could not go back to the river Sestro, because the wind is
+always contrary and the current sets continually to the eastwards. The
+14th we weighed anchor and plied up along the coast to the W.N.W.
+sending our boats close in shore to seek a watering-place, which they
+found about noon. At this time, being far out to sea, we fell in with
+several small long and narrow boats or canoes of the natives, in each of
+which was one man only. We gave them bread, which they accepted and eat
+readily. About 4 P.M. our boats came off to us with fresh water; and at
+night we anchored off the mouth of a river. The 15th we weighed and
+stood near the shore, sounding all the way, finding sometimes a rocky
+bottom, at other times good ground, and never less than seven fathoms.
+Finally, we cast anchor within an English mile of the shore, in seven
+and a half fathoms, directly over against the mouth of the river, and
+then sent our boats for water, which they got very good after rowing a
+mile up the river. This river, called St Vincent in the chart, is by
+estimation about eight leagues beyond the river Sestro, but is so hard
+to find that a boat may be within half a mile of it without being able
+to discover any river, as a ledge of rocks of greater extent than its
+breadth lies directly before its mouth, so that the boats had to go a
+considerable way between that ledge and the shore before coming to its
+mouth. When once in, it is a great river, having several others that
+fall into it. The entrance is somewhat difficult, as the surf is rather
+high, but after getting in it is as smooth as the Thames.[231] Upon this
+river, near the sea, the inhabitants are tall large men, going entirely
+naked, except a clout about a quarter of a yard long before their
+middle, made of the bark of trees, yet resembling cloth, as the bark
+used for this purpose can be spun like flax. Some also wear a similar
+cloth on their heads, painted with sundry colours, but most of them go
+bareheaded, having their heads clipped and shorn in sundry ways, and
+most of them have their bodies punctured or slashed in various figures
+like a leathern jerkin. The men and women go so much alike, that a woman
+is only to be known from a man by her breasts, which are mostly long and
+hanging down like the udder of a milch goat.
+
+[Footnote 231: Sestro river, in the Complete Neptune of the Rev. James
+Stanier Clarke, chart. 2, is called Sesters, in lat. 5 deg. 30' N. long. 9 deg.
+10' W. from Greenwich. The river St Vincent of the text does not appear
+in that chart, but nearly at the indicated distance to the E.S.E. is one
+named Sangwin.--E.]
+
+Soon after coming to anchor on the 15th December, we went up the river
+in our skiff, carrying with us certain basons, _manels_, &c. for sale.
+We procured that day one hogshead and 100 pounds weight of grains,[232]
+and two elephants teeth, getting both at an easy rate. We sold the
+natives basons, _maneilios_, and _margarits_,[233] but basons were most
+in request, and for most of these we got thirty pounds of _grains_ in
+exchange for each, and gave for an elephants tooth of thirty pounds
+weight six basons. We went again up the river on the 16th, in the
+morning, taking some of every kind of merchandise along with us in our
+boat, and shewed them to the negroes, but they made light of every
+thing, even of the basons, manellios, and margarite which they had
+bought the day before; yet they would have given us some grains for our
+basons, but so very little that we did not that day get above 100 pounds
+weight, through their chief or captain, who would not suffer any one to
+sell but through his mediation and at his price. He was so cunning that
+he would not give above 15 pounds of grains for a bason, and would
+sometimes offer us a small dishful, whereas we had a basket full for
+each the day before. Seeing that we would not accept what he offered,
+the captain of the negroes went away, and caused all the boats to depart
+likewise, thinking perhaps that we would have followed and agreed to his
+terms; but on perceiving his drift, we hauled up our grapnel and went
+away likewise. We landed at a small town, to see the manners of the
+people, and about 60 of them came about us, being at first shy, and
+seemingly afraid of us; but seeing we did them no harm, they came up in
+a familiar manner, and took us by the hand. We then went into their
+town, which consisted of about twenty small hovels, covered over with
+large leaves. All the sides were open, and the floor was raised like a
+scaffold about a yard high, where they work many ingenious things of the
+barks of trees, and there also they sleep. In some of these hovels they
+work in iron, making very pretty heads for javelins, tools for making
+their boats, and various other things, the women working as well as the
+men.
+
+[Footnote 232: That is grains of paradise, so the Italians called Guinea
+pepper when they first saw it, not knowing what it was. We took the name
+from them, and hence came the name of the Grain Coast--Astl. I. 152, a.]
+
+[Footnote 233: Margarits may possibly have been mock pearl beads; the
+manels or manellios were bracelets of some kind.--E.]
+
+While we were among them, several of the women danced and sung after
+their manner, by way of amusing us, but the sound was by no means
+agreeable to our ears. Their song was continually,
+
+   Sakere, sakere, ho! ho!
+   Sakere, sakere, ho! ho!
+
+And with these words they kept leaping, dancing and clapping their
+hands. The only animals we saw among them were two goats, a few small
+dogs, and some hens. Having seen these things, we went on board our
+ships; and on seeing us depart, the chief of the other town sent two of
+his servants after us with a basket of grains, making signs to us that
+when we had slept, or next day, we should have plenty of grains if we
+came for them: Then shewing us his grains, he went away. Accordingly,
+next morning being the 17th, thinking that some business might be done
+with the negroes as the captain sent for us, I sent the master with the
+rest of the merchants on shore, remaining myself on board, because they
+had esteemed our goods so lightly the day before. The captain
+accordingly came to our people after they went up the river, bringing
+grains with him, but not seeing me he made signs to know where I was,
+and was answered in the same manner that I was on board ship. He then
+inquired by signs who was captain, or Diago as they call it, and the
+master of the ship being pointed out to him, he began to shew his
+grains, but held them so unreasonably dear that no profit could be made
+of them; on which, and because they seemed to have no store, the master
+came away with only about 50 pounds of grains. Going on shore at the
+small town on their way back to the ships, some one of our people
+plucked a gourd which gave great offence to the negroes, on which many
+of them came with their darts and large targets, making signs for our
+men to depart; which our men did, as they had only one bow and two or
+three swords among them. As soon as they were on board we weighed and
+set sail, but the wind was from the sea, so that we could not clear
+certain rocks, for which reason we came again to anchor.
+
+This river called St Vincent is in lat. 4 deg. 30' N[234]. The tide at this
+place ebbs and flows every twelve hours, but while we were there the
+rise and fall did not exceed 9 feet. So far as we could see, the whole
+country was altogether covered with wood, all the kinds of trees being
+unknown to us, and of many different sorts, some having large leaves
+like gigantic docks, so high that a tall man is unable to reach their
+tops. By the sea-side there grow certain pease upon great and long
+stalks, one of which I measured and it was 27 paces long. These grow on
+the sand like trees, and so very near the sea that we could distinctly
+perceive by the water marks that the sea sometimes flows into the woods.
+All the trees and other plants of this country are continually green.
+Some of the women have exceedingly long breasts, but they are not all
+so. All day the wind blows from the sea, and all night from the land,
+though we found this to differ sometimes, at which our master was much
+surprised.
+
+[Footnote 234: This latitude would bring us to a river about half way
+between the Grand Sesters and Cape Palmas; but which does not agree with
+the former circumstances, as they could hardly have been so far to the
+S.E. without seeing Cape Palmas. The river Sangwin, which we have before
+supposed might be the St Vincent, is in lat. 5 deg. 20' N. almost a degree
+farther north.--E.]
+
+This night at 9 o'clock the wind came to east, which used ordinarily to
+be at N.N.W. off shore[235]; yet we weighed and hauled off south to
+seawards, and next morning stood in again towards the land, whence we
+took in 6 tons of water for our ship, the Hind probably taking as much.
+On this part of the coast I could not find that the natives had any gold
+or other valuable article of trade, for indeed they are so savage and
+idle that they give not themselves the trouble to seek for any thing,
+for if they would take pains they might easily gather large quantities
+of grains, yet I do not believe there were two tons to be had in all
+that river. They have many fowls likewise in their woods, but the people
+are not at the trouble to catch them. While here I collected the
+following words of their language, all of which they speak very thick,
+often repeating one word three times successively, and always the last
+time longer than the two former.
+
+[Footnote 235: The text here is probably corrupt. The direct off-shore
+wind on the grain coast of Africa is N.E. The wind at N.N.W. certainly
+is in some degree off-shore, but very obliquely; and the wind at east is
+more direct from shore.--E.]
+
+   Bezow! bezow!            Is their salutation.
+   Manegete afoye,[236],     Grains enough.
+   Crocow afoye,            Hens enough.
+   Zeramme afoye,           Have you enough?
+   Begge sacke,             Give me a knife.
+   Begge come,              Give me bread.
+   Borke,                   Silence!
+   Contrecke,               You lie!
+   Veede,                   Put forth, or empty.
+   Brekeke,                 Row!
+   Diago, or dabo,          Captain, or chief.
+
+[Footnote 236: In some maps the grain coast is named Malaguete, probably
+from this word, and consequently synonimous with the ordinary name. It
+is likewise called the Windward coast.--E.]
+
+Towards night on the 18th, while sailing along the coast, we fell in
+with some boats or canoes, when the natives expressed by signs that we
+were abreast of a river where we might have grains, but we did not think
+it right to stop there, lest other ships might get before us. This river
+has three great rocks and five small ones lying before it, with one
+great tree and a small one close by the river, which exceed all the rest
+in height. This night we proceeded 10 leagues along the coast. About
+noon of the 19th, while proceeding along shore, three boats came off to
+tell us we might have grains, and brought some to shew, but we did not
+choose to stop. Continuing our course we anchored at night, having run
+this day 10 leagues. On the 20th as the Hind had come to anchor near us
+among some rocks and foul ground, she lost a small anchor. While passing
+along shore about noon a negro came off to us as before, offering grains
+if we would go on shore, and where we anchored at night another brought
+us a similar intimation, besides which a fire was kindled on shore, as
+if indicating where we might land, which was likewise done on other
+parts of the coast when they saw us anchored. Wherever we happened to
+anchor on this coast from our first watering place, we always found the
+tide [of flood?] running to the westwards, and saw many rocks close
+along shore, many others being a league out to sea. This day we ran 12
+leagues. The 21st though we sailed all day with a brisk gale, yet so
+strong were the tides against us that we were only able to make out 6
+leagues. This day likewise some negroes came off to us, offering to deal
+in grains if we would land. The 22d we ran all day and night to a double
+point called Cabo das Palmas[237].
+
+[Footnote 237: Reckoning the course run as expressed in the text, the
+distance measured back from Cape Palmas brings us very nearly to Sangwin
+for the river St Vincent of Towerson, as formerly conjectured.--E.]
+
+The 23d about 3 o'clock we were abreast of the point, and before we came
+to the western part of it we saw a great ledge of rocks which lie out to
+the west of it about 3 leagues, and a league or more from the shore. We
+soon after got sight of the eastern side of this cape, which is 4
+leagues from the west side. Upon both corners of this cape there are two
+green spots like meadows, and to the westwards of this cape the land
+forms a bay, by which it may be easily known. Four leagues farther on
+there is a head-land jutting out to sea, and about two leagues farther
+on there is a great bay, seemingly the entrance to a river, before which
+we anchored all that night, lest we should overshoot a river where, in
+the voyage of last year, 1554, they got all their elephants teeth. Cape
+Palmas is in lat. 4 deg. 30' N. between which and the river Sestro the
+greatest abundance of grains is to be had, while beyond this cape very
+little is got. Where we anchored this night, we found that the tide now
+ran to the eastwards, while on the other side of the cape it went to the
+N.W. This day we ran about 16 leagues.
+
+While continuing our course on the 24th about 8 o'clock, some boats came
+off to us bringing small soft eggs without shells, and made signs that
+we might have fresh water and goats by going on shore. As the master
+judged this might be the river of which we were in search, we cast
+anchor and sent our boat on shore with a person who knew the river. On
+coming near the shore he perceived that it was not the river, and came
+therefore back again, and went along shore by the help of sails and
+oars, upon which we weighed and sailed likewise along shore. Being now
+13 leagues past the cape, the master observed a place which he believed
+might be the river, when we were in fact two miles past it. At this time
+the boat came off to the ship, reporting that there was no river; yet we
+came to anchor, after which the master and I went in the boat with five
+men, and on coming near the shore he saw that it was the river for which
+he sought. We then rowed in with much difficulty, the entrance being
+very much obstructed by a heavy surf. After entering, several boats came
+off to us, informing us by signs that they had elephants teeth, and
+brought us one of 8 pounds and a small one only one pound weight, both
+of which we bought. Then they brought some other teeth to the river
+side, giving us to understand by signs that they would sell them to us
+if we came next day. We then gave a _manillio_ each to two chiefs, and
+departed to the ships. We sent another boat to a different place on
+shore, where some of the natives in the canoes at sea made signs that
+fresh water was to be had; and on going there they found a town but no
+river, yet the people brought them fresh water and shewed an elephants
+tooth, making signs that they would sell them such next day. This river
+lies 13 leagues beyond Cape Palmas, having a rock to the westwards about
+a league out to sea, and there juts out from the river a point of land
+on which grow five trees which may be discerned two or three leagues off
+when coming from the westwards; but the river itself cannot be seen till
+close upon it, and then a small town may be seen on either side, each of
+which has a _diago_ or captain. The river is small, but the water is
+fresh and good[238]. Two miles beyond the river, where the other town
+lies, another point runs oat to sea, which is green like a meadow,
+having only six trees growing upon it, all distant from each other,
+which is a good mark to know it by, as I have not seen as much bare land
+on the whole coast[239]. In this place, and three or four leagues to the
+westwards, there grow many palm trees, from which the natives have their
+palm wine, all along shore. These trees are easily known almost two
+leagues off, as they are very straight, tall and white bodied, and
+thickest in the middle, having no limbs or boughs, but only a round bush
+of leaves at the top. In this top the natives bore a hole, to which they
+hang a bottle or empty gourd, and in this they receive the juice that
+runs from the tree, which is their wine.
+
+[Footnote 238: From the indicated distance eastwards from Cape Palmas,
+and the description in the text, the river and point in question seem
+those called Tabou, in long. 7 deg. 10' W. from Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 239: It is hardly necessary to observe that these are very bad
+land-marks, being subject to alteration from many causes; besides that
+this description is above 250 years old.--E.]
+
+From Cape Palmas to Cape _Tres-puntas_ or Three-points, the distance is
+100 leagues east[240]; and from Cape Three-points to the port where we
+proposed to sell our cloth are other 40 leagues[241]. The language here,
+as far as I could judge, seemed to differ little from that formerly
+mentioned. The people likewise dress much in the same manner, or almost
+naked, but they were gentler in their manners and better looking. They
+chiefly coveted manillios and margarites, and cared very little for the
+rest of our wares. About 9 o'clock A.M. some boats came off to us from
+both towns, bringing with them some elephants teeth, and having made me
+swear by the water of the sea that I would do them no harm, three or
+four of them came on board, and we entertained them with such things as
+we had, of which they eat and drank as freely as ourselves. We then
+bought all their teeth, of which they had 14, 10 being small. On going
+away, they desired us to come to their towns next day. Not wishing to
+trifle our time at this place, I desired the master to go on the 26th
+with two of our merchants to one of the towns, while I went with one
+merchant to the other town, the two towns being three miles asunder.
+Taking with us to both places some of every kind of merchandise that we
+had, the master got nine rather small teeth at one town, while at the
+other I got eleven not large. Leaving on board with the [other] master
+an assortment of manillios, he bought 12 teeth in our absence from
+people who came to the ships. I bought likewise a small goat, and the
+master bought five small hens at the other town. Finding that nothing
+more was to be done here, as they had no more teeth, we went on board by
+one o'clock, P.M. and immediately weighed anchor, continuing our
+progress eastward, always within sight of land.
+
+[Footnote 240: Between these two points is what is called the ivory
+coast of Guinea: After which is the gold coast to Cape St Pauls; and
+then the slave coast.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 241: Forty leagues E.N.E. along the gold coast bring us to
+Saccoom or Accra, in the country called Aquamboo.--E.]
+
+The 28th, the wind turning contrary, we stood out to sea, and when the
+wind changed from the seaward we again stood for the land, which we fell
+in with at a great round red cliff, not very high, having to the
+eastwards a smaller red cliff, and right above that towards the inland a
+round green hummock, which we took to be covered with trees. In the last
+24 hours we only made good about 4 leagues. The 29th coming near the
+shore, we noticed the before mentioned red cliff to have a large tuft of
+trees on its summit. All to the westwards as far as we could see was
+full of red cliffs, and all along the shore, both on the tops of these
+cliffs, and in the low intervals between them, was everywhere full of
+wood. Within a mile of the great cliff to the eastwards there was a
+river, and no cliffs that we could see beyond it, except one small cliff
+very near its eastern side. At this place we had the wind in the night
+at north off the land, and in the day south from the sea, which was not
+usual, as we were assured by such of our people as had been there
+before, being commonly N.W. and S.W. We ran this day and night 12
+leagues. The 31st we went our course by the shore, which was everywhere
+low and covered with wood, with no rocks. This morning many boats of the
+negroes came out to fish, being larger than those we had seen hitherto
+but of similar make, some of them having five men. In the afternoon,
+about 3 o'clock we had sight of a town by the sea-side, which our pilots
+judged to be 25 leagues west from Cape Three-points.
+
+On the morning of the 3d January 1556, we fell in with Cape
+Three-points, having passed during the night one of the Portuguese
+castles, which is 8 leagues west from this point[242]. This is a very
+high land all grown over with trees, and on coming nearer we perceived
+three head-lands, having a kind of two bays between them, which open
+directly westwards. The farthest out to sea is the eastern cape. The
+middle cape is not above a league from the western cape, though the
+chart we had laid them down as 3 leagues asunder. Right before the point
+of the middle cape there is a small rock near it, which cannot be seen
+from the cape itself, except one be near the shore, and on the top of
+this cape there is a great tuft of trees. When abreast of this cape
+there is seen close beside it a round green hummock rising from the
+main-land. The eastern cape is about a league from the middle one, and
+is high land like the other two, and between these there is a little
+head or point of land, and several rocks close in shore. About 8 leagues
+before we came to cape Three-points the coast trends S.E. by E., and
+after passing the cape it runs N.E. by E. About two leagues after
+passing Cape Three-points there is a low glade for about two miles in
+length, after which the land becomes again high, with several successive
+points or headlands, the first of which has several rocks out to sea.
+The middle of the three capes runs farthest out to sea southwards, so
+that it can be seen a great way off from the coast, when it appears to
+rise with two small rocks. We ran this day 8 leagues, and anchored
+before night, lest we might overshoot a town named St Johns[243]. In the
+afternoon a boat with five men came off from the shore and ranged
+alongside of us, as if looking at our flags, but would not come near,
+and after looking at us for some time went back to the land. In the
+morning of the 4th, while sailing along the coast, we espied a ledge of
+rocks close to the shore, to the westwards of which were two green hills
+joining together, with a hollow between them resembling a saddle; and,
+as the master thought the town we were looking for stood within these
+rocks, we manned our boats, taking with us a quantity of cloth and other
+goods, with which we rowed on shore; but after going some way along the
+shore without finding any town, we returned again on board. About two
+leagues to the eastwards from the two saddle hills, a ledge of rocks
+stretches almost two miles out to sea, beyond which is a great bay
+running N.N.W. while the general stretch of the coast at this place is
+from S.W. by W. to N.E. by E. Having with a gentle gale run past that
+uttermost headland, we saw a great red cliff, which the master again
+judged to be near the town of St Johns, on which we again took our boat
+and merchandise and rowed to the shore. We actually found a town on the
+top of a hill to which we directed our course, and on seeing us a
+considerable number of the inhabitants collected together and waved a
+piece of cloth as a signal for us to come in, on which we rowed into an
+excellent bay to eastward of the cliff on which the town stands, and on
+getting fairly into the bay we let drop our grapnel. After remaining
+some time, a boat or canoe came off to us and one of the men in her
+shewed us a piece of gold about half a crown weight, requiring us to
+give them our measure and weight that they might shew them to their
+captain. We accordingly gave them a measure of two ells, and a weight of
+two _angels_, as the principles on which we meant to deal. He took these
+on shore to their captain; and then brought us back a measure of two
+ells one quarter and a half, and one _crusado_ weight of gold, making
+signs that they would give so much weight of gold for that measure of
+cloth and no more; but this we refused. After staying about an hour, and
+finding that they would not deal on our principles, besides
+understanding that the best places for trade were all before us, we
+returned to our ships, weighed anchor, and stood along shore, going
+before in the boat.
+
+[Footnote 242: This was probably Fort St Antonio, at the mouth of the
+river Aximer or Ashim.--Astl. I. 155. a.]
+
+[Footnote 243: St Johns river is about 12 leagues E.N.E. of Cape
+Three-points, nearly in lat. 5 deg. N. long 2 deg. 10' W.--E.]
+
+Having sailed about a league, we came to a point of land having a long
+ledge of rocks running out from it to seawards like the others; and on
+passing the ledge our master noticed a place which he said was assuredly
+the town of Don John[244]. As the night approached we could not see it
+very distinctly, wherefore we came to anchor as near as possible. On the
+morning of the 5th it was recognized to be the town we wanted, wherefore
+we manned our boats and went towards the shore; but knowing that the
+Portuguese had taken away a man from that place the year before, and had
+afterwards shot at them with great _bases_[245], driving them from the
+place, we let go our grapnel almost a _base_ shot from shore, and lay
+there near two hours without any boat coming off to us. At this time
+some of our men who had gone in the Hinds boat into the bay to the
+eastward of the town, where they found a fine fresh river, waved to us
+to join them, because the negroes were seen coming down to that place,
+which we did. Immediately afterwards the negroes came down to the shore,
+and gave us to know by signs that they had gold, but none of them would
+come to our boats, neither indeed did we see that they had any canoes to
+come in, so that we suspected the Portuguese had spoiled their boats, as
+we saw half their town in ruins. Wherefore, having tarried a good while,
+and seeing that they did not come to us, and as we were well armed, we
+run the heads of both boats on shore. Upon this the captain of the town
+came towards us with his dart in his hand, followed by six tall men each
+of whom had a dart and target. Their darts were all headed with iron
+well-fashioned and sharp. After this party came another negro carrying
+the captains stool. We all saluted the captain respectfully, pulling off
+our caps and bowing to him; but he, seeming to consider himself as a man
+of consequence, did not move his cap in return, and gravely sat down on
+his stool, hardly inclining his body in return to our salute: All his
+attendants however, took off their caps and bowed to us.
+
+[Footnote 244: Called St Johns twice before; and we shall see that they
+came to another town afterwards called Don Johns, more to the east,
+whence it appears that the Don John of the text here is an error for St
+John.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 245: Probably musketoons or blunderbusses, and certainly some
+species of gun or fire-arm.--E.]
+
+This chief was clothed from the loins downwards, with a cloth of the
+country manufacture, wrapped about him and made fast with a girdle round
+his waist, having a cap of the country cloth on his head, all his body
+above the loins with his legs and feet being bare. Some of his
+attendants had cloths about their loins, while others had only a clout
+between their legs, fastened before and behind to their girdles; having
+likewise caps on their heads of their own making, some made of
+basket-work, and others like a large wide purse of wild beast skins. All
+their cloth, girdles, fishing lines, and other such things, are made
+from the bark of certain trees, very neatly manufactured. They fabricate
+likewise all such iron implements as they use very artificially; such as
+the heads of their darts, fish-hooks, _hooking_ irons, _ironheads_, and
+great daggers, some of these last being as long as a bill hook, or
+woodcutters knife, very sharp on both sides and bent like a Turkish
+cymeter, and most of the men have such a dagger hanging on their left
+side. Their targets are made of the same materials with their cloths,
+very closely wrought, very large and of an oblong square form, somewhat
+longer than broad, so that when they kneel on the ground the target
+entirely covers their whole body. Their bows are short and tolerably
+strong, as much as a man is able to draw with one finger, and the string
+is made of the bark of a tree, made flat, and a quarter of an inch
+broad. I have not seen any of their arrows, as they were all close
+wrapped up, and I was so busily engaged in traffic that I had not
+leisure to get them opened out for my inspection. They have also the art
+to work up their gold into very pretty ornaments.
+
+When the captain had taken his seat on the stool, I sent him as a
+present two ells of cloth and two basins, and he sent back for our
+weight and measure, on which I sent him a weight of two angels, and
+informed him that such was our price in gold for two ells, or the
+measure I had already sent him. This rule of traffic he absolutely
+refused, and would not suffer his people to buy any thing but basins of
+brass or latten; so that we sold that day 74 brass basins for about half
+an angel weight each, and nine white basins for about a quarter of an
+angel each. We shewed them some of all our other wares, but they did not
+care for any of them. About two o'clock, P.M. the chief returned again,
+and presented me a hen and two great roots, which I accepted, and he
+then made me understand by signs, that many people would come from the
+country that night to trade with me, who would bring great store of
+gold. Accordingly about 4 o'clock there came about 100 men under 3
+chiefs, all well equipped with darts and bows; and when they came to us,
+every man stuck his dart into the ground in token of peace, all the
+chiefs having their stools with them, sat down, after which they sent a
+youth on board our boat who brought a measure of an ell, a quarter and a
+sixteenth, making us understand that they would have four times that
+measure in cloth for the weight in gold of an angel and 12 grains. I
+offered him two ells for that weight, for which I had before demanded
+two angels; but this he despised, and stuck to the four measures, being
+5-1/4 ells. When it grew late and I motioned to go away, he came to four
+ells for the above weight, and as he and I could not agree we went back
+to the ships. This day we took for basins 6 ounces a half and an eighth
+of gold.
+
+In the morning of the 6th, we well manned our boats and the skiff, being
+in some fear of the Portuguese, who had taken away a man from the ships
+in the year before; and as the negroes had not canoes, we went near the
+shore to them. The young man who had been with us the night before was
+again sent to us, and he seemed to have had intercourse with the
+Portuguese, as he could speak a little of that language, and was quite
+expert in weights and measures. At his coming he offered us, as before,
+an angel and 12 grains for four ells, giving us to understand, if we
+would not deal on these terms, we might go away, which we did
+accordingly; but before going away, I offered him three ells of rotten
+cloth for his weight, which he would not accept. We then went on board
+our ships, which lay a league off, after which we went back in the boats
+for sand ballast. When the chiefs saw that our boats had now no
+merchandise, but came only for water and sand, they at last agreed to
+give the weight for three ells. Therefore, when the boats returned to
+the ships, we put wares into both, and, for greater expedition, I and
+John Saville went in one boat, while the master, John Makeworth, and
+Richard Curligin, went in the other. That night I took for my part 52
+ounces of gold, and those in the other boat took 8-1/4 ounces, all by
+the above weight and measure. When it grew late we returned to the
+ships, having taken that day in all 5 pounds of gold.
+
+We went on shore again on the 7th, and that day I took in our boat 3
+pounds 19 ounces[246], so that we had sold most of the cloth we carried
+in the boat before noon, by which time many of the negroes were gone,
+and the rest seemed to have very little gold remaining; yet they made
+signs to us to bring them more latten basins, which I was not inclined
+to, not wishing to spend any more time there, but to push forwards for
+Don Johns town. But as John Saville and John Makeworth were anxious to
+go again, I consented, but did not go myself. They bartered goods for
+eighteen ounces of gold and came away, all the natives having departed
+at a certain cry or signal. While they were on shore, a young negroe who
+could speak a little Portuguese came on board with three others, and to
+him I sold 39 basins and two small white saucers, for three ounces of
+gold. From what I could pick out, this young fellow had been in the
+castle of Mina among the Portuguese, and had got away from them, for he
+told us that the Portuguese were bad men, who made the negroes slaves
+when they could take them, and put irons on their legs. He said also
+that the Portuguese used to hang all the French or English they could
+lay hold of. According to his account, the garrison in the castle
+consisted of 60 men, and that there came thither every year two ships,
+one large and the other a small caravel. He told me farther that Don
+John was at war with the Portuguese, which encouraged me to go to his
+town, which is only four leagues from the castle, and from which our men
+had been driven in the preceding year. This fellow came fearlessly on
+board, and immediately demanded why we had not brought back the men we
+took away the year before, for he knew that the English had taken away
+five negroes. We answered that they were in England, where they were
+well received, and remained there till they could speak the language,
+after which they were to be brought back to serve as interpreters
+between the English and the natives; with which answer he seemed quite
+satisfied, as he spoke no more of that matter.
+
+[Footnote 246: This is surely an error, as the troy or bullion pound
+contains only 12 ounces. We ought therefore to read 3 pounds 9
+ounces--E.]
+
+Our boats being come on board, we weighed and set sail, and soon
+afterwards noticed a great fire on the shore, by the light of which we
+could discern a large white object, which was supposed to be the
+Portuguese castle of St George del Mina; and as it is very difficult to
+ply up to windward on this coast, in case of passing any place, we came
+to anchor for the night two leagues from the shore, lest we might
+overshoot the town of Don John in the night. This town lies in a great
+bay which is very deep[247], and there the people were chiefly desirous
+to procure basins and cloth, though they bought a few other trifles, as
+knives, horse-tails, and horns; and some of our people who were on shore
+sold a cap, a dagger, a hat, and other such articles. They shewed us a
+coarse kind of cloth, which I believe was of French manufacture: The
+wool was very coarse, and the stuff was striped with various colours, as
+green, white, yellow, &c. Several of the negroes at this place wore
+necklaces of large glass beads of various colours. At this place I
+picked up a few words of their language, of which the following is a
+short specimen:
+
+   Mattea! Mattea!       Is their salutation.
+   Dassee! Dassee!       I thank you.
+   Sheke,                Gold.
+   Cowrte,               Cut.
+   Cracca,               Knives.
+   Bassina,              Basins.
+   Foco, foco,           Cloth.
+   Molta, Much,          or great plenty[248]
+
+[Footnote 247: This abrupt account of a town, &c. seems to refer back to
+that of St John, which they had just left.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 248: This language seems partly corrupted.--_Hakluyt_.
+
+Two of the words in this short specimen have been evidently adopted from
+the Portuguese, _bassina_ and _molta_.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 8th, we had sight of the Portuguese castle of
+Mina, but the morning being misty we could not see it distinctly till we
+were almost at Don Johns town, when the weather cleared up and we had a
+full view of the fort, beside which we noticed a white house on a hill,
+which seemed to be a chapel. We stood in towards the shore, within two
+English miles of Don Johns town, where we anchored in seven fathoms. We
+here found, as in many places before, that the current followed the
+course of the wind. At this place the land by the sea is in some places
+low, and in others high, everywhere covered with wood. This town of Don
+John[249] is but small, having only about twenty huts of the negroes,
+and is mostly surrounded by a fence about the height of a man, made of
+reeds or sedge, or some such material. After being at anchor two or
+three hours, without any person coming off to us, we manned our boats
+and put some merchandize into them, and then went with our boats very
+near the shore, where we anchored. They then sent off a man to us, who
+told us by signs that this was the town belonging to Don John, who was
+then in the interior, but would be home at sunset. He then demanded a
+reward, as most of these people do on first coming aboard, and on giving
+him an ell of cloth he went away, and we saw no more of him that night.
+In the morning of the 9th we went again near the shore with our boats,
+when a canoe came off to us, from the people in which we were informed
+by signs that Don John was not yet come home, but was expected that day.
+There came also a man in a canoe from another town a mile from this,
+called Don Devis[250], who shewed us gold, and made signs for us to go
+there. I then left John Saville and John Makeworth at the town of Don
+John, and went in the Hind to the other town, where we anchored, after
+which I went in the boat close to the shore near the town. Boats or
+canoes soon came off to us, shewing a measure of 4-1/2 yards, and a
+weight of an angel and 12 grains, as their rule of traffic, so that I
+could make no bargain. All this day our people lay off Don Johns town
+and did nothing, being told that he was still absent.
+
+[Footnote 249: Or Don _Juan_. This place stands at Cape Korea or
+Cors.--Astl. I. 158. a.
+
+Cape Cors or Korea is now corruptly called Cape coast, at which there is
+an English fort or castle of the same name, in lat. 5 deg. 10' N. long. 1 deg.
+16' W.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 250: Called afterwards the town of John De Viso.--E.]
+
+We went on the 10th to the shore, when a canoe came off with a
+considerable quantity of gold; and after long haggling we at length
+reduced their measure to a nail less than three ells, and brought up
+their weight to an angel and twenty grains, after which, in about a
+quarter of an hour, I sold cloth for a pound and a quarter of an ounce
+of gold. They then made signs for me to tarry till they had parted their
+cloth among them on shore, after their custom, and away they went and
+spread all their cloth on the sand. At this time a man came running from
+the town and spoke with them, and immediately they all hastened away
+into the woods to hide their cloth and gold. We suspected some
+treachery, and though invited by signs to land we would not, but
+returned on board the Hind, whence we could see 30 men on the hill, whom
+we judged to be Portuguese, who went up to the top of the hill, where
+they drew up with a flag. Being desirous to know what the people of the
+Hart were about, I went to her in the Hind's boat, and on nearing her
+was surprised on seeing her shoot off two pieces of ordnance. I then
+made as much haste as possible, and met her boat and skiff coming with
+all speed from the shore. We all met on board the Hart, when they told
+me that they had been on shore all day, where they had given 3-1/2 yards
+of cloth to each of Don Johns two sons, and three basins between them,
+and had delivered 3 yards more cloth at the agreed weight of an angel
+and 12 grains. That while remaining on shore for an answer, some
+Portuguese had come running down the hill upon them, of which the
+negroes had given them warning shortly before, but they understood them
+not. The sons of Don John had conspired with the Portuguese against
+them, so that they were almost taken by surprise; yet they recovered
+their boat and pushed off from the shore, on which the Portuguese
+discharged their calivers or muskets at them, but hurt none of them; in
+revenge for which hostility, the people in the ship had fired off the
+two guns formerly mentioned. We now laid _bases[251]_ into both the
+boats and the skiff, manning and arming them all, and went again towards
+the shore; but being unable to land on account of the wind, we lay off
+at the distance of about 200 yards, whence we fired against the
+Portuguese, but could not injure them as they were sheltered by the
+hill. They fired upon us in return from the hills and rocks, the negroes
+standing by to help them, more from fear than love. Seeing the negroes
+in such subjection that they durst not deal with us, we returned on
+board; and as the wind kept at east all night, we were unable to fetch
+the Hind, but I took the boat and went on board in the night, to see if
+any thing could be done there; and as in the morning we could perceive
+that the town was overawed by the Portuguese like the other, we weighed
+anchor and went along the coast to the eastwards.
+
+[Footnote 251: Formerly conjectured to be musquetoons, or
+wall-pieces.--E.]
+
+This town of John de Viso stands on a hill like that of Don John, but
+had been recently burnt, so that there did not remain above six houses
+standing. Most of the gold on this part of the coast comes from the
+interior country, and doubtless, if the people durst bring their gold,
+which they are prevented from doing by the Portuguese, we might have got
+abundance; but they are under such subjection to the Portuguese, that
+they dare not trade with others.
+
+While coasting along on the 11th, we saw a small town about 4 leagues to
+the east of that we last came from. About half a league farther was
+another town upon a hill, and half a league beyond that another large
+town on the coast, to which we went to try what could be done in the way
+of trade, meaning, if unsuccessful, to return to the towns we had left
+behind, in hopes that the Portuguese would leave them on our departure.
+All the way from the castle of Mina to this place, there were very high
+hills to be seen rising above other hills, all covered with wood, and
+the coast was lined with great red cliffs close to the sea. The boats of
+this coast are larger than those we had seen hitherto, as one of them
+could carry 12 men, but they were still of the same form with all the
+boats along the coast. About these towns there seemed few rivers, and
+their language seemed the same with that at Don Johns town, every person
+being able to speak a few words of Portuguese, which they constantly
+used to us. About five o'clock P.M. we saw 22 of the native boats or
+canoes going along shore to the westwards, on which we suspected some
+treachery; wherefore on the 12th we made sail farther along the coast
+eastwards, and descried more towns, in which there were some larger
+houses than any we had hitherto seen, and from these the people came out
+to look at us, but we could see no boats on the shore. Two miles beyond
+the eastermost town there are black rocks, which continue to the
+uttermost cape or point of the land for the space of a league, after
+which the land runs E.N.E. Some negroes came down to these black rocks,
+whence they waved a white flag for us to land; but as we were near the
+principal town, we continued our course along shore, and when we had
+opened the point of land we perceived another head-land about a league
+farther on, having a rock lying off to sea, which was thought to be the
+place of which were in search. On coming abreast of the town it was
+recognized, and having anchored within half a mile of the shore in five
+fathoms, with good ground, we put wares into our boat, and went near the
+shore to endeavour to open trade. Anchoring close to the shore, about 10
+A.M. we saw many canoes on the beach, and some came past us, but no one
+would draw near, being, as we supposed, afraid of us, as four men had
+been forcibly taken away from thence the year before. Seeing that no one
+came off to us, we went again on board, expecting to make no sales; but
+towards evening a great number of people came to the shore and waved a
+white flag, as inviting us to land, after which their chief or captain
+came down with many men along with him, and sat down under a tree near
+the shore. On seeing this I took some things with me in the boat to
+present to him, and at length he sent off a boat to us which would not
+come near, but made signs for us to return next day. At length, by
+offering things for their captain, I enticed them into our boat, and
+gave them two ells of cloth, a latten basin, a white basin, a bottle, a
+large piece of beef, and six biscuits, which they received and made
+signs for us to come back next day, saying that their chief was _grand
+captain_, which indeed appeared by his numerous attendants, who were
+armed with darts, targets, and other weapons. This town is very large,
+and stands upon a hill among trees, so that it cannot well be seen
+except when one is near. To the eastwards of it there are two very high
+trees on a hill close to the town[27]; and under the town is another
+and lower hill washed by the sea, where it is all composed of great
+black rocks. Beyond this town there is another considerably smaller on a
+bay.
+
+[252][Footnote 252: 27 It is added, _which is a good mark to know the
+town_. But at this distance of time, above 250 years, such marks cannot
+be supposed to remain.--E.]
+
+
+In the morning of the 13th we took our boat and went close to the shore,
+where we remained till ten o'clock, but no one came near us. We prepared
+therefore to return on board, on seeing which some negroes came running
+down and waved us back with a white flag, so we anchored again and they
+made us to understand by signs that the chief would soon come down. In
+the meantime we saw a sail pass by us, but being small we regarded it
+not. As the sun was high, we made a tilt with our oars and sails. There
+now came off to us a canoe with five men, who brought back our bottle,
+and gave me a hen, making signs by the sun that within two hours the
+merchants of the country would come and buy all we had. I gave them six
+_manillios_ to present to their captain; and as they signified by signs
+that they would leave a man with us if we gave them a pledge, we put one
+of our men into their boat; but as they would not give us one of their
+men, we took back our man again, and remained in expectation of the
+merchants. Shortly afterwards there came down one of the natives to the
+shore, arrayed like their captain, attended by a numerous train, who
+saluted us in a friendly manner, and then sat down under a tree where
+the captain used to sit in the former year. Soon afterwards we perceived
+a great number of natives standing at the end of a hollow way, and
+behind them the Portuguese had planted a base, which they suddenly
+discharged, but its ball overshot us, though we were very near. Before
+we could ship our oars to get away, they shot at us again, but did us no
+harm; the negroes came to the rocks close beside us, whence they
+discharged calivers at us, and the Portuguese shot off their base twice
+more. On this our ship made some shots at them, but they were protected
+by the rocks and hills.
+
+We now went on board to leave this place, as the negroes were bent
+against us, because in the former year Robert Gainsh had taken away the
+captains son from this place, with three others, and all their gold and
+every thing else they had about them; owing to which they had become
+friends to the Portuguese, whom they hated before, as appeared in the
+former year when the Trinity was there; when the chief came on board
+and brought them to his town, trading with them largely, and offering
+them ground on which to build a fort[253]. The 14th we plied back to
+meet the Hind, which we met in the morning, and then both ships sailed
+eastwards to try what could be done at the place where the Trinity sold
+her friezes in the preceding year. The day after we parted, the Hind had
+taken eighteen and a half ounces of gold from some negroes in exchange
+for wares. This day, about one P.M. we saw some canoes on the coast,
+with men standing beside them, and going to them with merchandise, we
+took three ounces of gold for eighteen _fuffs_ of cloth, each _fuffe_
+being three and a half yards, at the rate of one angel twelve grains the
+_fuffe_. These people made us understand by signs that if we waited till
+next day we might have plenty of gold. For this reason I sent off the
+master with the Hind, accompanied by John Saville and John Makeworth, to
+seek the other place, while I and Richard Pakeman remained here to try
+our fortunes next day. When the negroes perceived the Hind going away
+they feared the other ship would follow, wherefore they sent off four
+men in two canoes, asking us to remain, and offering two men to remain
+with us, if we would give one as a pledge or hostage for his safety.
+Accordingly, one Edward, who was servant to Mr Morley, seeing them so
+much in earnest, offered himself as a pledge, and we let him go for two
+of them who staid with us, one of whom had his weights and scales, with
+a chain of gold about his neck and another round his arm. These men eat
+readily of such things as we had to give them, and seemed quite
+contented. During the night, the negroes kept a light on shore over
+against us; and about one o'clock, A.M. we saw the flash of a _base_,
+which was twice shot off at the light, and then two _calivers_ were
+discharged, which in the end we perceived came from a Portuguese
+brigantine that followed us from place to place, to warn the natives to
+have no dealings with us.
+
+[Footnote 253: In the margin, Hakluyt sets down the voyage of Robert
+Gainsh to Guinea as in 1554; yet does not mention where that voyage is
+to be found, or that it is the same voyage published in his second
+edition, under the name of Lok, instead of Gainsh to whom it was
+ascribed in his first edition. All the light we have into the matter
+from the second edition, is from a marginal note at the beginning of
+Loks voyage, in which Robert Gainsh is said to have been master of the
+John Evangelist; neither is there any mention of this villainous
+transaction in the relation of that voyage. Such crimes deserve severe
+punishment; since a whole community may suffer for the fault of one bad
+man.--Astl. I. 160, a.]
+
+In the morning of the 15th, the negro chief came down to the coast
+attended by 100 men, bringing his wife along with him, and many others
+brought their wives also, as they meant to remain by the sea side till
+they had bought what they wanted, and their town was eight miles up the
+country. Immediately on his arrival, the chief sent our man on board,
+and offered to come himself if we would give two of our men in pledge
+for him. I accordingly sent him two, but he only retained one, and came
+on board accompanied by his wife and several friends, bringing me a goat
+and two great roots, for which I gave him in return a latten basin, a
+white basin, six _manillios_ and a bottle of _Malmsey_, and to his wife
+a small casket. After this we began to adjust our measure and weight. He
+had a weight of his own, equal to an angel and 14 grains, and required a
+measure of 4-1/2 ells. In fine we concluded the 8th part[254], for an
+angel and 20 grains; and before we had done he took my own weight and
+measure. The 16th I took 8 libs. 1 oz. of gold. Since the departure of
+the Hind I had not heard of her; but when our pledge went into the
+country the first night he said that he saw her at anchor about 5
+leagues from us. The 17th I sold about 17 pieces of cloth, for which I
+got 4 libs. 4-1/2 oz. of gold. The 18th the chief desired to purchase
+some of our wine, offering half a gold ducat for a bottle; but I gave
+him one freely, and made him and his train drink besides. This day I
+took 5 libs. 5 oz. of gold. The 19th I sold about 18 pieces of cloth,
+and took 4 libs. 4-1/2 oz. of gold. The 20th 3 libs. 6-1/4 oz; the 21st
+8 libs. 7-1/4 oz; the 22d 3 libs. 8-1/4 oz: And about 4 o'clock this
+night[255] the chief and all his people went away. The 23d we were waved
+on shore by other negroes, and sold them cloth, caskets, knives, and a
+dozen bells, for 1 lib. 10 oz. of gold. The 24th we sold bells,
+sheets[256], and thimbles, for 2 libs. 1-1/4 oz. of gold. The 25th we
+sold 7 doz. of small bells and other things, and finding their gold all
+gone, we weighed and sailed to leewards in search of the Hind, which we
+found about 5 o'clock, P.M. and understood she had made some sales.
+
+[Footnote 254: The meaning is here obscure; perhaps the word _less_ is
+omitted, and the bargain was for a measure an eighth part less than that
+originally proposed.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 255: Perhaps we should rather understand 4 o'clock next
+morning?--E.]
+
+[Footnote 256: Perhaps this ought to be sheers or scissars?--E.]
+
+The 26th we received from the Hind 48 libs. 3-1/8 oz. of gold, which
+they had taken while we were asunder; and this day, on the request of a
+negro sent us by the chief, we went on shore with our merchandise and
+took 7 libs, 1 oz. of gold. At this place they required no pledges from
+us, yet sent every night a man to sleep on board, as an assurance that
+they would come to us next day. The 27th in both ships we took 8 libs.
+1-7/8 oz. of gold. The 28th we made sales to the amount of 1 lib. 1/3
+oz. for the company. The 29th in the morning we heard two caliver shots
+on shore, which we judged might either be the Portuguese or some of
+their negroes, and we accordingly manned our boats, armed ourselves and
+our men, and went on shore, but they were gone off. The 30th we made
+more sales both for the company and the masters. The 31st we sent our
+boats on shore to take in sand for ballast; and our men met the negroes
+with whom they had dealt the day before, who were now employed fishing,
+and helped them to fill sand; and having now no gold, sold fish to our
+men for their handkerchiefs and neckerchiefs. The 1st of February we
+weighed and went to another place, where we took 1 lib. 9 1/3 oz. of
+gold. The 2d we made more sales; but on taking a survey of our
+provisions, we resolved not to stay much longer on the coast, most of
+our drink being spent, and what remained turning sour. The 3d and 4th we
+made some sales though not great; and finding the wind on this last day
+come off shore, we set sail and went along the coast to the westwards.
+Upon this coast, we found by experience that ordinarily, about 2 o'clock
+in the night[257] the wind came off shore from N.N.E., and continued in
+that direction till 8 o'clock in the morning, blowing all the rest of
+the day and night at S.W. The tide or current on this shore goes
+continually with the wind.[258] We continued our course along shore on
+the 5th, expecting to have met some English ships, but found none.
+
+[Footnote 257: It is hard to say whether this means 2 hours after
+sunset, or after midnight--E.]
+
+[Footnote 258: Apparently running from the east during the land breeze,
+and from the west with the sea breeze--E.]
+
+The 6th February 1556, we altered our course S.W. leaving the coast, to
+fetch under the line, and ran 24 leagues by estimation. By the 13th we
+reckoned ourselves off Cape Palmas, and by the 22d we were by our
+reckoning abreast of Cape Mount, 30 leagues west from the river Sestos
+or Sestro. The 1st March we lost sight of the Hind in a tornado; on
+which we set up a light and fired a gun, but saw nothing of her,
+wherefore we struck sail and lay by for her, and in the morning had
+sight of her 3 leagues astern. This day we found ourselves in the
+latitude of Cape Verd which is in 14 deg. 30' [14 deg. 50' N.] Continuing our
+course till the 29th, we were then in 22 deg., on which day one of our men
+named William King died in his sleep, having been long sick. His clothes
+were distributed among those of the crew who were in want of such
+things, and his money was kept to be delivered to his friends at home.
+The 30th we found ourselves under the tropic. On the 1st April we were
+in the latitude of the Azores, and on the 7th of May we fell in with the
+south of Ireland, where we sent our boat on shore for fresh water, and
+where we bought two sheep and such other victuals as we needed from the
+country people, who are wild _kernes_. The 14th of the same month we
+went into the port of Bristol called Hungrode[259], where we cast anchor
+in safety, giving God thanks for our happy arrival.
+
+[Footnote 259: Probably that now called King-road?--E.]
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Second Voyage to Guinea in 1556, by William Towerson_[260].
+
+
+On the 14th September 1556, we set sail from Harwich bound for the coast
+of Guinea, in the Tiger of London of 120 tons, directing our coarse for
+Scilly, where we expected to meet the Hart of London of 60 tons and a
+pinnace of 16 tons, both of which had been fitted out and victualled at
+Bristol. We arrived at Scilly on the 28th, and having lain to some time
+for our consorts to no purpose, we sailed back to Plymouth on the 12th
+October. They there joined us, and we sailed together from that port on
+the 15th November.
+
+[Footnote 260: Hakluyt, II. 496. Astl. I. 162.
+
+Hitherto we have given these voyages to Guinea at full length, as they
+are found in the collection of Hakluyt; but in this and the subsequent
+early English voyages to Guinea, we have thought proper to abbreviate
+such matters as seemed of small importance.--E.]
+
+We made the coast of Guinea on the 30th December, where we got sight of
+three ships and two pinnaces which were to windward of us, on which we
+made ourselves ready for action and gave them chase, hauling to the wind
+as near as we could to gain the weather-gage. At first they made sail
+from us, but having cleared for fighting they put about and came towards
+us in brave order, their streamers, pennants and ensigns displayed, and
+trumpets, sounding. When we met they still had the weather-gage of us,
+yet were we firmly determined to have fought them if they had been
+Portuguese, and hailed them to come under our lee, which they stoutly
+refused. On demanding whence they were, they said from France; and we
+then told them we were from London in England. They then told us there
+were certain Portuguese ships gone to Mina to protect that place, and
+that they had already burnt a Portuguese ship of 200 tons at the river
+Sestro. The captain of the admiral ship and several other Frenchmen came
+on board of us in a friendly manner, and proposed that we should join
+company because of the Portuguese, and go together to Mina. We told them
+that we had not yet watered, having just fallen in with the coast. They
+said we were 50 leagues to leeward of Sestro river, but still water
+might be had, and they would assist us in watering with their boats for
+the sake of our company. They told us farther that they had been six
+weeks on the coast, and had only got 3 tons of grains among them
+all[261].
+
+[Footnote 261: These ships were the Espoir of Harfleur, the admiral, of
+which Denis Blundel was captain; the Levriere of Rouen, vice-admiral,
+commanded by Jerome Baudet; and a ship of Houfleur, commanded by Jean de
+Orleans.--E.]
+
+After hearing what they had to say, we considered that even if Mina were
+clear of Portuguese ships, yet if the Frenchmen went before us they
+would spoil our market: That if there were Portuguese ships at Mina, and
+they took the French ships, they would learn that we were behind, and
+would wait to take us likewise: And finally, if we went along with them
+and found the coast clear, we would do as well as they; but if the
+Portuguese remained on the coast we should be stronger in their company.
+Wherefore, having thus considered their friendly offers, we told them
+that we would confer more largely of the matter next day; upon which
+they invited me to dine with them next day, and to bring with me the
+masters of our ships and such merchants as I thought proper, offering to
+supply us with water from their own ships if we would, or else to remain
+with us and help us to water with their boats and pinnaces. In the
+morning of the 31st, the French admiral sent his boat for me, and I went
+on board his ship accompanied by our masters and some of our merchants.
+He had provided a noble banquet for us, and treated us excellently,
+requesting us to keep him company, promising to part with us what
+victuals were in his ship, or any other things that could serve us,
+even offering to strike his flag and obey my commands in all things. Not
+being able to find water at that place, we set sail on the 1st January
+1557, and anchored off the mouth of a river, where on the two following
+days we procured water, and bought a few small elephants teeth.
+
+On the 4th of January we landed with 30 men, well armed with arquebuses,
+pikes, long-bows, cross-bows, partizans, long swords, and swords and
+bucklers, meaning to seek for elephants. We found two, which we wounded
+several times with our fire-arms and arrows, but they both got away from
+us and hurt one of our men. We sailed on the 5th, and next day fell in
+with the river St Andrew, [in long. 6 deg. 4' W.] The land is somewhat high
+to the westward of this river, having a fine bay likewise to the
+westward, but to the east the land is low. This is a great river, having
+7 fathoms water in some places at its mouth. On the 7th we went into the
+river, where we found no village, and only some wild negroes not used to
+trade. Having filled our water casks here, we set sail to the eastward.
+On the 10th we had a conference with Captain Blondel, the admiral of the
+French ships, Jerome Baudet his vice-admiral, and Jean de Orleans,
+master of the ship of 70 tons. We agreed to traffic in friendly accord,
+so as not to hurt each others market, certain persons being appointed to
+make a price for the whole, and then one boat from every ship to make
+sales on the agreed terms. On the 11th, at a place called _Allow_[262],
+we got only half an angel weight and 4 grains of gold, which was taken
+by hand, the natives having no weights.
+
+[Footnote 262: Rather Lu how or La hu.--Astl. I 163. b.--The river
+called Jack Lahows river, in Long. 4 deg. 14' W.--E.]
+
+On the 14th we came within _Saker_ shot of the castle of Mina, whence an
+Almadia was sent out to see what we were, but seeing that we were not
+Portuguese, she went immediately back to the large negroe town of
+_Dondou_ close by the castle. Without this there lie two great rocks
+like islands, and the castle stands on a point resembling an island. At
+some distance to the westwards the land for 5 or 6 leagues was high, but
+for 7 leagues from thence to the castle the land is low, after which it
+becomes high again. The castle of Mina is about 5 leagues east from Cape
+Three-points[263]. Here I took the boat with our negroes, and, went
+along the coast till I came to the cape, where I found two small towns
+having no canoes, neither could we have any trade. At these places our
+negroes understood the natives perfectly, and one of them went on shore
+at all the places, where he was well received by his countrymen. At a
+place called _Bulle_, about 3 leagues east from the eastermost point of
+Cape Three-points, we learnt from the natives by means of our negro
+George, that about a month before there had been an engagement at this
+place, in which two ships had put one to flight; and that some time
+before, one French ship had put to flight four Portuguese ships at the
+castle of Mina.
+
+[Footnote 263: Mina is in Long. 1 deg. 60', Cape Three points in 2 40' both
+west, the difference of Longitude therefore is about 50 minutes, or
+nearly 17 leagues.--E]
+
+On the 16th we went to a place called _Hanta_, 12 leagues beyond the
+cape, but did no good, as the natives held their gold too dear. We went
+thence to _Shamma_[264], where we landed with 5 boats well armed with
+men and ordnance, making a great noise with our drums and trumpets,
+suspecting we might have found Portuguese here, but there were none. We
+sent our negroes first on shore, after which we followed and were well
+received. The 18th we agreed to give the negroes 2 yards and 3 nails of
+cloth, as a _fuffe_, to exchange for an angel-ducat weight; so we took
+in all 70 ducats, of which the Frenchmen had 40 and we 30. The 19th I
+took 4 libs. 2-1/2 oz. of gold, and the boat of the Hart had 21 oz. This
+night we were informed by the negroes that the Portuguese meant to
+attack us next day either by sea or land, and as we were about to return
+on board we heard several shots in the woods, but they durst not come
+near us. The 20th we went on shore well armed, but heard no more of the
+Portuguese, and this day the negroes informed us there were some ships
+come to _Hanta_, a town about 2 leagues to the west. The 21st we went in
+our boats to a town a league to the west, where we found many negroes
+under another chief, with whom we dealt on the same terms as at Shamma.
+The 22d we went again on shore, and I got 1 lib. 4 oz. of gold. The 23d
+the negroes told as that the Portuguese ships had departed from the
+Mina, intending to ply to windward and then come down to fight us,
+giving us warning to be on our guard. The 24th we went again on shore to
+trade, and I invited the chief of the town to dinner. While we were
+ashore on the 25th, our ships descried 5 sail of ships belonging to the
+king of Portugal, and fired several shots to recall us on board. So we
+went to the ships, but by the time that every thing was in order and we
+had weighed anchor it was night, so that nothing could be done. We set
+sail however and tried all night to gain the wind of the Portuguese,
+some of which were very near during the night. One of them, which we
+judged was their admiral, fired a shot, as we supposed to call the
+others to come and speak with him. The 26th we came in with the shore,
+and got sight of the Portuguese at anchor, on which we made sail towards
+them, giving all our men white scarfs, that the French and we might know
+each other in case of boarding: But night coming on before we could
+fetch the Portuguese, we anchored within demi-culverine shot of them.
+
+[Footnote 264: Called Chama in modern maps, near the mouth of St Johns
+river, about 6 leagues east from Mina.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 27th, both we and the Portuguese weighed anchor,
+and by 11 o'clock, A.M. we had gained the weather-gage, on which we went
+room with them[265]: on this they bore away towards the shore, and we
+after them, and when they were near shore they put about again to
+seawards. We put about likewise, and gained a head of them, on which we
+took in our topsails and waited for them. The first that came up was a
+small bark, which sailed so well that she cared not for any of us, and
+had good ordnance. As soon as she came up she discharged her guns at us
+and shot past with ease, after which she fired at the French admiral and
+struck his ship in several places; and as we were in our fighting sails,
+she soon got beyond our reach. Then another caravel came up under our
+lee, discharging her ordnance at us and at the French admiral, wounding
+two of his men and shooting through his main-mast. After him came up the
+Portuguese admiral also under our lee, but was not able to do us so much
+harm as the small ships had done, as he carried his ordnance higher than
+they; neither were we able to make a good shot at any of them, because
+our ship was so weak in the side that she laid all her ordnance in the
+sea[266]. We determined therefore to lay the Portuguese admiral on
+board; but on making the attempt, the French admiral fell to leeward and
+could not fetch him, after which he fell to leeward of two other
+caravels, and was unable to fetch any of them. Being thus to leeward,
+the French admiral kept on towards the shore and left us. We hoisted
+our topsails and gave chase to the enemy, but both the other French
+ships kept their wind and would not come near us, and our own consort
+was so much astern that she could not get up to our assistance. When we
+had followed them to seaward about two hours, the enemy put about
+towards the land, thinking to pay us as they went past, and to gain the
+wind of the French admiral which had gone in shore; but we put about
+likewise keeping still the weather gage, expecting our consort and the
+rest to have followed our example. But when the Portuguese had passed
+our consort and the two French ships, firing as they went along, all of
+these ships and our own pinnace continued to seawards, leaving us in the
+_laps_, (lurch.) We continued our course after the enemy, keeping the
+weather gage, that we might succour the French admiral who was to
+leeward of them all; and on coming up with him, all the enemies ships
+bore down and gave him their broadsides, after which they put about
+again, but durst not board him as we were still to wind-wind of them,
+otherwise they had certainly taken or sunk him. Three of their smallest
+vessels were such prime sailors that it was quite impossible for any of
+our ships to have boarded them, and they carried such ordnance that they
+would have sore troubled any three of our ships; if they had been able
+to gain the weather-gage. Their other ships, the admiral and
+vice-admiral, were both notably appointed.
+
+[Footnote 265: Bore down upon them.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 266: Meaning apparently that she lay too much over to
+leeward.--E.]
+
+When the French admiral was clear of them, he lay as near the wind as
+possible and ran to seaward after the rest, while we followed the enemy
+to leeward. Then seeing us alone and in chase, they put about, which we
+did likewise to keep the wind of them, and in this situation we sailed
+within _base_ shot of them, but they shot not at us, because we had the
+weather gage and they could not therefore harm us. We continued in this
+course till night, when we lost sight of them. All the rest of our ships
+made to seawards with all the sail they could carry; and, as they
+confessed themselves afterwards, they gave us their prayers, and no
+other help had we at their hands.
+
+Next day, the 28th, we rejoined our own consort and pinnace, and two of
+the French ships, but the third, which was a ship of 80 tons belonging
+to Rouen, had fled. I took my skiff and went to them to know why they,
+had deserted me. John Kire said his ship would neither rear nor
+stear[267]. John Davis said the pinnace had broke her rudder, so that
+she could sail no farther, and had been taken in tow by the Hart. I
+found the French admiral to be a man of resolution, but half his crew
+was sick or dead. The other Frenchman said his ship could bear no sail,
+and 16 of his men were sick or dead, so that he could do nothing. After
+this the French ships durst not come to anchor for fear of the
+Portuguese.
+
+[Footnote 267: Meaning perhaps, would neither wear nor tack?--E.]
+
+The 29th, on finding our pinnace incapable of farther use, we took out
+her four bases, anchor, and every thing of value, and set her on fire,
+after which we ran along the coast. On the 3d February we anchored about
+4 leagues from a town, which we saluted with two guns, on which the
+chief came to the shore, to whom I sent Thomas Rippon who knew him.
+After some conference, the chief came off to me; as it was become late,
+he did not enter into bargain for any price, but exchanged pledges and,
+returned on shore. Next day I went on shore, and though some French
+ships had been there and spoiled the market, I took 5-1/2 oz. of gold.
+The 5th I took 8-1/2 oz. but could perceive that the negroes thought the
+French cloth better and broader than ours; wherefore I told Captain
+Blundel that I would go to leeward, as where he was I should do no good.
+The 6th there came an Almadie or canoe to us with some negroes, inviting
+me to their town, where they had plenty of gold and many merchants. I
+did so, but could do no good that night, as the merchants were not come
+from the interior. On the 7th our negro George came to us, having
+followed us at least 30 leagues in a small canoe, and soon after his
+arrival we settled the terms of dealing with the natives. George had
+been left in Shamma at the time of the fight, which he saw from the
+shore, and told us that the Portuguese had gone afterwards into that
+river, when they said that two of their men had been slain by a shot,
+which was from our ship. This day I took 5 libs. 1-1/4 oz. of gold; the
+8th 19 libs. 3-1/2 oz.; the 9th 2 libs. 6-1/2 oz.; the 10th 3 libs. The
+11th. Jerome Baudet, the French vice-admiral, came to us in his pinnace,
+saying that they could do no good where they were, and that he meant to
+go to the eastwards: But we told him this could not be allowed, and
+desired him to return to his comrades, which he refused; till we shot
+three or four pieces at his pinnace; on which his ship put about and ran
+out to sea followed by the pinnace. This day I took 1 lib. 5 oz.
+
+The 12th one of the French pinnaces came with cloth, but we would not
+allow them to trade, and made them remain all day close to our ship.
+This day we took 5 lib. 6-1/2 oz. The 17th we went to another town,
+where we understood that three of the Portuguese ships were at the
+castle, and the other two at Shamma. Though the Portuguese were so near
+that they might have been with us in three hours, we yet resolved to
+remain and make sales if we could. The chief of this town was absent at
+the principal town of the district visiting the king, but came soon back
+with a weight and measure. The 18th some of the kings servants came to
+us, and we took 1 lib. 2-1/8 oz. of gold. The 19th we took 5 libs. 1 oz.
+the 20th 1 lib. 4 oz; the 21st 4 libs. 1 oz; the 22d 3-1/2 oz.
+
+Having sent one of our merchants with a present to the king, he returned
+on the 23d, saying that he had been received in a friendly manner by
+_Abaan_, who had little gold but promised if we would stay that he would
+send all over his country in search of gold for us, and desired our
+people to request our king to send men to his country to build a fort,
+and to bring tailors with them to make them apparel, and to send good
+wares and we should be sure to sell them; but that the French had for
+the present filled the market with cloth. This town where the king Abaan
+resides, is about 4 leagues up the country, and in the opinion of our
+people who were there is as large in circumference as London, though all
+built like those we had already seen. Around the town there was great
+abundance of the wheat of the country, insomuch that on one side of it
+they saw 1000 ricks of wheat and of another sort of grain called _mill_
+or millet, which is much used in Spain. All round this town there is
+kept a good nightly watch, and across all the roads or paths they have
+cords stretched and connected with certain bells; so that if any one
+touch the cords the bells, immediately ring to alarm the watchmen, on
+which they run out to see what is the matter. In case of any enemies,
+they have nets suspended over the paths ready to let fall and entangle
+them. It is impossible to get to the town except by the regular paths,
+as it is every where environed with trees and thick underwood; besides
+which the town is surrounded by a fence of sedge bound with thick ropes
+made of the bark of trees[268].
+
+[Footnote 268: It is hard to discover what place this was. Perhaps it
+was _Great Commendo_ or _Guaffo_, which stands on a river that runs by
+the town of the _Mina_, and is still the residence of a negro king; in
+which case the port they put in at might have been little _Commendo._
+But the royal city is very far from being as large as London was in
+1556, not having above 400 houses. The contrivance for apprizing the
+watchmen of the approach of an enemy, and for taking them prisoners,
+seems a notable invention of our countrymen; for surely an enemy might
+easily destroy these net-traps to catch soldiers, these pack-thread
+fortifications.--Astl. 1. 167. a.]
+
+As in this country it is necessary to travel in the night to avoid the
+heat of the day, our men came to the town about five in the morning.
+About nine the king sent for them, as no one must go to him unless sent
+for, and they proposed carrying their present, but were told they must
+be brought before him three times, before their gift could be offered.
+They then waited upon him and were graciously received. And having been
+sent for three several times, they carried their present the last time,
+which was thankfully accepted; and calling for a pot of Palm wine, the
+king made them drink. Before drinking they use the following ceremonies:
+On bringing out the pot of wine, a hole is made in the ground into which
+a small quantity of the wine is poured, after which the hole is filled
+up, and the pot set on the place. Then with a small cup made of a gourd
+shell, they take out a little of the wine, which is poured on the ground
+in three several places. They set up likewise some branches of the Palm
+tree in different parts of the ground, where they shed some of the wine,
+doing reverence to the palms. All these ceremonies being gone through,
+the king took a gold cup full of wine which he drank off, all the people
+calling out Abaan! Abaan! together with certain words, as is usual in
+Flanders on twelfth night, _the king drinks._ When he had drank, then
+the wine was served round to every one, and the king allowed them to
+depart. Then every one bowed three times, waving his hands, and so
+departed. The king has usually sitting beside him, eight or ten old men
+with grey beards.
+
+On the 23d we took 1 lib. 10 oz. of gold; the 24th 3 lib. 7 oz.; the
+25th 3-1/4 oz.; the 26th 2 libs. 10 oz.; the 27th 2 libs. 5 oz.; the
+28th 4 libs. Then seeing that there was no more gold to be had, we
+weighed anchor and continued along the coast. The 1st of March we came
+to a town called _Moure_, where we found neither boats nor people; but
+when about to depart there came some people to us in two canoes from
+another town, from whom we took 2-1/2 oz. of gold, and who told us that
+the inhabitants had removed from Mowre to _Lagoua._[269]. The 2d we were
+abreast the castle of Mina, where we saw all the five Portuguese ships
+at anchor, and by night we were off Shamma or Chama, where we meant to
+water. But next day we saw a tall ship of about 200 tons to windward
+within two leagues, and then two more astern of her, one a ship of 500
+tons or more and the other a pinnace. Upon this we weighed anchor, and
+made a shirt to stand out to sea, the wind being S.S.W., but the Hart
+fell three leagues to leeward of us. These ships chased us from 9 A.M.
+till 5 P.M. but could not make up with us. At night, when we joined the
+Hart, on asking why she fell to leeward, they pretended that they durst
+not make sail to windward, lest they had carried away their
+fore-top-mast. Having been thus obliged to abandon our watering-place,
+we were under the necessity of boiling our meat-in sea-water, and to
+reduce our allowance of drink to make it hold out, as we now shaped our
+course homewards.
+
+[Footnote 269: Mowree is 4-1/2 leagues east from the castle of Minas,
+and Lagoua or Laguy is 9 leagues east from the same place.--Astl. I.
+168. a.]
+
+On the 16th of March we fell in with the land, which I judged to be Cape
+Misurado, about which there is much high land. The 18th we lost sight of
+the Hart, and I think the master wilfully went in shore on purpose to
+lose us, being offended that I had reproved him for his folly when
+chased by the Portuguese. The 27th we fell in with two small islands
+about 6 leagues off Cape Sierra Leona; and before we saw them we
+reckoned ourselves at least 30 or 40 leagues from them. Therefore all
+who sail this way must allow for the current which sets N.N.W. or they
+will be much deceived. The 14th April we met two large Portuguese ships,
+which we supposed were bound to Calicut. The 23d we saw a French ship of
+90 tons to windward of us, which came down upon us as if to lay us on
+board, sending up some of his men in armour into the tops, and calling
+out to us to strike. Upon this we saluted him with some cross-bars,
+chain-shot, and arrows, so thick that we made their upper works fly
+about their ears, and tore his ship so miserably, that he fell astern
+and made sail. Our trumpeter was a Frenchman, at this time ill in bed;
+yet he blew his trumpet till he could sound no more, and so died. The
+29th we arrived at Plymouth, and gave thanks to God for our safety.
+
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Third Voyage of William Towerson to Guinea, in 1558_[270].
+
+
+On the 30th of January of the above year, we set sail from Plymouth with
+three ships and a pinnace, bound by the grace of God for the Canaries
+and the coast of Guinea. Our ships were the Minion, admiral; the
+Christopher, vice-admiral; the Tiger, and a pinnace called the Unicorn.
+Next day we fell in with two hulks[271] of Dantziek, one called the Rose
+of 400 tons, and the other the Unicorn of 150, both laden at Bourdeaux,
+mostly with wine. We caused them to hoist out their boats and come on
+board, when we examined them separately as to what goods they had on
+board belonging to Frenchmen[272]. At first they denied having any; but
+by their contradictory stories, we suspected the falsehood of their
+charter parties, and ordered them to produce their bills of lading. They
+denied having any, but we sent certain persons to the place where they
+were hid, and thus confronted their falsehood. At length they confessed
+that there were 32 tons and a hogshead of wine in the Unicorn belonging
+to a Frenchman, and 128 tons in the Rose belonging to the, same person;
+but insisted that all the rest was laden by Peter Lewgues of Hamburgh,
+and consigned to Henry Summer of Campvere. After a long consultation,
+considering that to capture or detain them might lose our voyage,
+already too late, we agreed that each of our ships should take out as
+much as they could stow for necessaries, and that we should consider
+next morning what was farther to be done. We accordingly took out many
+tuns of wine, some aquavitae, cordage, rosin, and other things, giving
+them the rest of the Frenchmans wines to pay for what we had taken of
+their own, and took a certificate under their hands of the quantity of
+French goods they had confessed to, and then allowed them to continue
+their voyage.
+
+[Footnote 270: Hakluyt, II. 504. Astley, I. 169.--In the last London
+edition of Hakluyt, 1810, it is dated erroneously in 1577, but we learn
+from the editor of Astley's Collection that in the edition 1589, it is
+dated in 1557. Yet, notwithstanding that authority, we may be assured
+that the date of this voyage could not have been earlier than January
+1558, as Towerson did not return from his former voyage till the 29th of
+April 1557.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 271: Probably meaning large unwieldy ships.--E]
+
+[Footnote 272: It is to be noted, that at this time there was war
+between England and France.--This observation is a side note of Hakluyt:
+And it may be worth while to notice that, so early as 1557, free bottoms
+were not considered by the English as making free goods.--E.]
+
+The 10th January we had sight of the grand Canary, and on the 12th we
+anchored in the road, a league from the town, where we were well
+received. We went to the town with two English merchants who resided
+there, and remained that day at their house. The second day following we
+returned on board to get our pinnace repaired, which had broken her
+rudder, and to deliver our merchandize. The 14th there came nineteen
+sail of Spanish ships into the road, bound for the West Indies, six of
+them being of 400 or 500 tons each, and the rest of 200, 150, and 100
+tons. On coming to anchor they saluted us, which we returned. The
+Spanish admiral, who was a knight, sent a boat for me, and received me
+in a friendly manner, desiring to learn the news of England and
+Flanders. After partaking of a banquet, I departed; and when I was in
+the boat, he desired my interpreter to say that he expected I should
+strike my flag to him, as general of the Emperors fleet. When I was come
+on board my own ship this was told me by the interpreter, and as I
+refused compliance and continued to display my ensign, some Spanish
+soldiers began to discharge their arquebusses at us. At this time some
+Spanish gentlemen came on board to see our ship, to whom I said that if
+they did not order their men to cease firing, I would fire my cannon
+through their ships. They accordingly went away and made their soldiers
+give over firing, and coming back said that they had punished their men.
+I then shewed them our ship, and gave them such cheer as I had, which
+they were well pleased with. Next day they sent for me to dine with
+them, saying their general was sorry any one should have desired me to
+strike my flag, which had been done without his orders.
+
+The 17th we set sail, and got sight of the coast of Africa, and running
+along shore came off Rio del Oro which is almost under the tropic of
+Cancer. The 25th we got sight of the land in the bay to the north of
+Cape Verd[273]. The 26th taking our interpreter Francisco and Francis
+Castelin along with me in the pinnace, I went to the Tiger, which was
+nearer shore than the other ships. With her and the other ships we ran
+W. by S. and W.S.W, till about 4 o'clock, P.M. when we were close on
+board the cape. Then going about 4 leagues beyond the cape S.W. we found
+a fair island, and beside that two or three islands of high rocks, full
+of various kinds of sea fowl and pigeons, with other kinds of land
+birds, and so numerous that the whole island was covered with their
+dung, and as white as if the whole had been covered by chalk. Within
+these islands was a fine bay; and close by the rocks we had 18 fathoms
+and good ground[274]. The 27th, as no negroes came to us, we went along
+shore in the pinnace, and going beyond the point of the bay (Cape
+Emanuel) we found a fair island (_Goree_) with a goodly bay, and saw
+some negroes on the main who waved us on shore. Going a-land, they told
+us that they had elephants teeth, musk[275], and hides for traffic; but
+as the captain of the Christopher was not willing to stop, we went on
+board and made sail, On inquiry, some of the negroes said there had been
+no ships there for 8 months, others said six, and some only four, and
+that they were French ships.
+
+[Footnote 273: The bay of Yof, in lat. 15 deg. N. long. 17 deg. 20' W. from
+Greenwich.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 274: Obviously the Bird isles, which are 4-1/2 leagues E.S.E.
+from Cape Verd, not W.S.W. as in the text.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 275: What is here called musk must have either been civet or
+ambergris.--E.]
+
+The 10th of March we fell in with the coast of Guinea, 5 leagues east of
+Cape _Monte_, beside a river called Rio das Palmas. At this place I got
+19 elephants teeth, and 2 1/2oz. of gold. The 13th we came to Rio
+Sestro, and next day sent our boats for water, and delivered such wares
+to the Christopher and Tiger as they needed. The 15th we sent the Tiger
+to another river for water, and to try what she could do for grains. We
+here learnt that three French ships had been at this river two months
+before, two six weeks ago, and one only a fortnight past, all of which
+had gone eastwards to the Mina. Getting few grains, and many of our men
+falling sick at this unwholesome place, and considering that the French
+ships were before us, we left the Rio Sestro on the 19th, and made all
+sail for the Mina[276]. The 21st we came to Rio de Potos, where our
+boats went for water, and where I got 12 small elephants teeth. The 31st
+we came to _Hanta_, where I sold some _Manillios_.
+
+On the 1st of April we had sight of 5 Portuguese ships, on which we
+stood out to sea to gain the wind of them, which we had done if the
+wind had kept its ordinary course at S.W. and W.S.W. but this day it
+kept with a _flow_ always at E. and E.S.E. so that they had the wind of
+us and chased us to leeward till near night, when all but one that
+sailed badly were within shot of us. It then fell calm, and the wind
+came round to S.W. at which time the Christopher was about 4 leagues to
+leeward of us. We tacked in the Minion, and gained the wind of the
+Portuguese admiral and other three of his ships; when he cast about and
+fired at us, which we returned, shooting him four or five times through.
+Several of their shots went through our sails, but none of our men were
+hurt. The Christopher was still to leeward, though the Tiger and the
+pinnace had joined us; but as it was night we did not think it
+adviseable to lay him on board; wherefore, after firing two hours or
+more, we three stood out to sea, and fired a gun to give notice to the
+Christopher. We joined the Christopher on the 2d, which had exchanged
+shots with the Portuguese the night before about midnight, and we agreed
+to seek the Portuguese, keeping however to windward of the place where
+we meant to trade. We accordingly ran all day on the 3d to the S.W. in
+search of the Portuguese ships, but could not see them, and stood
+towards the shore at night. When we made the shore on the 4th, we found
+ourselves off Lagua, 30 leagues to the eastwards of our reckoning, owing
+to the currents setting east. Going on shore with our negro interpreter,
+we learned that there were four French ships on the coast: One at
+_Perinnen_, 6 leagues west of Lagua; one at _Weamba[277]_, 4 leagues
+east of Lagua; a third at _Perecow[9]_, 4 leagues east of Weamba; and
+the fourth at _Egrand[10]_, 4 leagues east of Perecow. We accordingly
+proceeded toward Weamba, where we saw one of the French ships under sail
+to which we gave chase; and lest we should over-shoot her in the night,
+the Minion was brought to anchor, and the Tiger and Christopher followed
+the chase all night.
+
+[Footnote 276: The Mina is here to be considered as the gold coast of
+Guinea, called Mina or the mines on account of its great produce in gold
+dust. The castle of St George del Mina, is usually called in these early
+voyages _the castle._--E.]
+
+[Footnote 277: Or Wiamba, where the English had afterwards a
+fort.--Astl. I. 172. d.]
+
+[278][Footnote 278: 9 This seems to have been little Barakhow, or
+Berow.--Astl. I. 172. c.]
+
+[279][Footnote 279: 10 Probably Akkara, where the English, Dutch, and
+Danes had afterwards separate forts--Astl. 1.172. d.]
+
+The 5th we found three French ships at anchor: One called _La Foi_ of
+Harfleur of 200 tons, the second the _Venturuse_ of Harfleur of 100, and
+third the _Mulet de Batville_ of Rouen of 120 tons. On nearing them, we
+in the Minion were determined to lay the admiral on board, while the
+Christopher boarded the vice-admiral, and the Tiger the smallest. But
+they weighed and got under sail, on which the Christopher, being our
+headmost ship, bore down on La Foi, and we in the Minion on the Mulet,
+which we took; but the Venturuse sailed so swift that we could not take
+her. The one we took was the richest except the admiral, which had taken
+80 libs, of gold, the Venturuse having only 22 libs.; while our prise
+had 50. They had been above two months on the coast; but three others
+had been there before them, and had departed a month before our arrival,
+having swept the coast of 700 pounds of gold. Having continued the chase
+all that day and night, and the next day till 3 P.M. and being unable to
+get up with them, we were afraid of falling too far to leewards, and
+made sail back to the shore. On the 7th, I convened the captains
+masters and merchants of all our three ships, when we weighed the gold
+taken in the prize, being 50 libs. 5 oz., after which we put men out of
+all our ships into the prize to keep her. On the 12th, on coming to
+_Egrand_, having taken all the goods out of the prize, we offered to
+sell the ship to the Frenchmen; but she was so leaky that they would not
+have her, and begged us to save their lives by taking them into our
+ships. So we agreed to take out all the victuals and sink the ship,
+dividing the men among us.
+
+On the 15th, it was proposed to proceed to Benin, but most of our people
+refused; wherefore it was agreed to remain as long as we could on the
+coast of Mina, leaving the Minion at Egrand, sending the Tiger to
+Perecow 4 leagues, west, and the Christopher to Weamba 10 leagues west,
+with directions in case of seeing any force they were unable to cope
+with, to come to leewards to us in the Minion at Egrand. We remained
+here till the last of April, by which time many of our men fell sick and
+six of them died, and we could only trade with the natives three or four
+days of the week, as on the other days they could not come off to us.
+The 3d May, as the pinnace had not come to us with cloth from the other
+ships, as promised, we sold French cloth, giving only three yards for
+every _fuffe_. The 5th the negroes left us, saying they would be back in
+four days. The 8th all our own cloth being sold, I called the people
+together, to ask them whether they chose to remain till the prize cloth
+was all sold. They answered, that as several of our men were dead, and
+twenty now sick, they would not tarry, but desired that we should repair
+to the other two ships. On the 10th we accordingly sailed in quest of
+the other ships, meaning to try what we could do at Don Johns town. The
+11th we joined the Christopher, which had done little. The 13th the
+Tiger was sent down to Egrand, as we found no trade worth while at
+Perinnen. The 14th the pinnace was sent with cloth to Weamba, where she
+had before got 10 libs. of gold.
+
+The 21st we anchored before Don Johns town; and on the 22d we manned our
+boats and went close in shore, but the negroes would not come to us. The
+24th our pinnace came to us from Cormantine, where they had taken 2
+libs. 5 oz. of gold. The 25th the master of the Christopher sent his
+boat on shore at Mowre for ballast, when the negroes attempted to drive
+them off with stones; but our men slew and hurt several of them, then
+burnt their town and stove all their canoes. The 27th we went to
+Cormantine, where we were joined next day by the Christopher. The 2d
+June the Tiger came to us from Egrand and the pinnace from Weamba, the
+two having procured 50 libs. of gold. The 4th we made sail and plied to
+windward for Chama, not being able to remain longer for want of
+victuals, and especially as our drink ran short. The 7th we saw five
+Portuguese ships at anchor beside the castle. The 8th George and Binny
+came off to us, and brought about 2 libs. of gold. The 21st we put 25
+Frenchmen into our pinnace with such victuals as we could spare, and
+sent them away. The 25th we put to sea on our homeward voyage. The 30th
+we fell in again with the land, 18 leagues to leeward of the place
+whence we had taken our departure, having been deceived by the current
+which sets continually towards the east. The 7th July we fell in with
+the island of San Thome [280], where we wished to come to anchor; but
+the wind coming about we again made sail. From that time till the 13th
+we were tossed about by baffling winds, and that day fell in again with
+San Thome.
+
+[Footnote 280: They must have fallen far to leeward, as San Thome is to
+the east of the Bight of Benin, almost 8 degrees or 160 leagues to the
+east of St George del Mina.--E.]
+
+This is a very high island, and being on the west side of it, we had
+sight of a very high small and upright peak, like the steeple of a
+church, which peak is directly under the equator, and to the westward of
+the south end of the island there is a small islet about a mile from the
+larger one. The 3d of August we set sail from San Thome with the wind at
+S.W. The 22d we fell in with the island of _Salt_, one of the Cape
+Verds; and being told by a Scotsman whom we had taken among the French
+on the coast of Guinea, that there were fresh provisions to be had at
+this place, we came to anchor. The 24th we went on shore, where we found
+no houses, and only saw four men who would not come near us. We found
+plenty of goats, but so wild that we could only take three or four of
+them; but we got plenty of fish, and great quantities of sea-fowl on a
+small isle close to the larger one. At night the Christopher broke her
+cable and lost an anchor, so that we were all obliged to weigh and put
+to sea. On this occasion the Scotsman was left on shore, by what means
+we could not tell, unless that he had been found asleep by the
+inhabitants and carried off-prisoner.
+
+The 25th the master of the Tiger came on board, and reported his ship to
+be in so leaky a condition and his men so weak, that he was unable to
+keep her afloat, and requested therefore that we would return to the
+island to take every thing out of her, that she might be abandoned: This
+day on mustering the companies of all the three ships, we had not above
+30 sound men altogether[281]. The 25th we had sight of St Nicholas, and
+the day following of St Lucia, St Vincent, and St Anthony, four of the
+Cape Verd islands, which range with each other from N.W. by W. to S. E
+by E. The 26th we were unable to weather the Cape of St Anthony, and
+this day Philip Jones the master of the Christopher came on board and
+reported that they were not able to keep the Tiger from sinking as she
+was so leaky, and the master and crew were very weak. The 3d September I
+went on board the Tiger, accompanied by the masters and merchants to
+survey her, and we found her in a very leaky condition with only six men
+fit for duty, one of whom was master gunner. It was agreed accordingly
+to take all the men into the other ships, with all the goods we could
+save, and then to abandon her. We began discharging her on the 5th, and
+having taken out her guns, victuals, gold, and every thing we could by
+the 8th, we set her adrift in lat. 25 deg. N.
+
+[Footnote 281: At this place Hakluyt observes in a note, the
+great inconvenience of staying late on the coast of Guinea. He ought
+rather to have said, the impropriety of sailing too late for that
+coast.--E.]
+
+On the 6th October, the ships companies both of the Minion and
+Christopher being very weak, so as to be scarce able to keep the sea, we
+agreed to make for Vigo, which is frequented by many English ships; but
+having a fair wind for England on the 10th, we fired two shots to give
+notice to the Christopher of our intention, and immediately shaped our
+course homewards. She followed us, and we carried a light to direct her
+way; but it was so thick next morning that we could not see her, and as
+she was not seen all that day we concluded she had either shot ahead of
+us in the night or had bore up for Spain, for which reason we hoisted
+our top-sails and continued our course, being then 120 leagues from
+England and 45 leagues N.W. by W. from Cape Finister, having then only
+six mariners and six merchants in health. The 16th we had a great storm
+at W.S.W. by W. which came on about 6 P.M. and our men being very weak
+and unable to hand our sails, we that night lost our mainsail, foresail,
+and spritsail, and were obliged to _lie hulling_ till the 18th, when we
+got up an old foresail; and finding ourselves now in the Channel, we
+bore up for the coast of England. In less than two hours the old
+foresail was blown from the yard by a spurt of wind, and we were again
+forced to lie to till the morning of the 19th, when we got up an old
+bonnet, or topsail, on the fore-yard, which by the blessing of God
+brought us to the Isle of Wight in the afternoon of the 20th.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Commodities most in request in Guinea, between Sierra Leone and the
+farthest extremity of the Mine or Gold Coast[282]._
+
+   MANILS of brass, and some of lead.
+   Basins of various sorts, but chiefly of latten.
+   Pots holding a quart or more, of coarse tin.
+   Some wedges of iron.
+   Margarites, and other low priced beads.
+   Some blue coral.
+   Some horse nails.
+   Linen cloth, principally.
+   Basins of Flanders.
+   Some low priced red cloth, and kersies.
+   Dutch kettles with brass handles.
+   Some large engraved brass basins, like those usually set upon.
+   their cupboards in Flanders.
+   Some large pewter basins and ewers, graven.
+   Some lavers for holding water.
+   Large low priced knives.
+   Slight Flemish caskets.
+   Low priced Rouen chests, or any other chests.
+   Large pins.
+   Coarse French coverlets.
+   Good store of packing sheets.
+
+Swords, daggers, prize-mantles and gowns, cloaks, hats, red cans,
+Spanish blankets, axe heads, hammers, short pieces of iron, slight
+bells, low priced gloves, leather bags, and any other trifling articles
+you will.
+
+[Footnote 282: This list is appended in Hakluyt's Collection, II.513. to
+the present voyage, and is therefore here retained, though several of
+the articles are scarcely intelligible.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_Notices of an intended Voyage to Guinea, in 1561[283]._
+
+
+In 1561, a voyage was projected to Guinea by Sir William Gerard, knight,
+in conjunction with Messrs William Hunter, Benjamin Gonson, Anthony
+Hickman, and Edward Castelin. Only one ship, the Minion, was to have
+gone, and seems to have been intended to assist and bring home the
+Primrose and Flower de Luce, then on the coast. The command of the
+Minion was to have been given to John Lok, probably the same person who
+made the Guinea voyage in 1554, already inserted. The adventurers sent
+the following articles of instruction to Mr Lok, dated 8th September
+1561. But Lok declined undertaking the voyage for the following reasons,
+dated Bristol, 11th December 1561. 1. The Minion was so spent and
+rotten, as to be incapable of being put into a fit and safe condition
+for the voyage. 2. The season was too far gone to perform the voyage in
+safety. 3. He understood that four large Portuguese ships were in
+readiness to intercept him. 4. It was quite uncertain that he should
+meet the Primrose, which would have completed her voyage before he could
+get to the coast, or would have been obliged to quit the coast by that
+time for want of provisions. It will be seen in the succeeding section,
+that the Minion actually proceeded on her voyage; on the 25th February
+1562, and the unsuccessful events of that voyage fully justify the
+refusal of Lok.
+
+[Footnote 283: Hakluyt, II. 514. Astl I. 176.--As this voyage did not
+take place, it is principally inserted here for the sake of the
+instructions devised by the adventurers, for the conduct of the intended
+expedition--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Remembrance for Mr Lok, at his Arrival on the Coast of Guinea._
+
+
+When God shall bring you upon the coast of Guinea, you are to make
+yourself acquainted, as you proceed along the coast, with all its
+rivers, havens and harbours or roadsteads, making a plat or chart of the
+same, in which you are to insert every place that you think material,
+all in their true elevations. You will also diligently inquire what are
+the commodities to be procured it the several places you visit, and what
+wares are best calculated for their markets.
+
+As it is believed that a fort on the coast of Mina or the Gold Coast of
+Guinea, in the King of _Habaan's_ country, might be extremely useful,
+you are especially desired to consider where such a fort could be best
+placed, in which you will carefully note the following circumstances.
+
+1. That the situation be adjoining to the sea on one side, so that ships
+and boats may conveniently load and unload--2. What is the nature of the
+soil in its neighbourhood?--3. What wood or timber may be had, and in
+what manner it may be carried?--4. What victuals are to be procured in
+the country, and what kinds of our victuals are best calculated for
+keeping there?--5. The place must be strong by nature, or capable of
+being made strong at small expence, and of being afterwards defended by
+a small number of men.--6. How water is to be procured, if none is to be
+had on the ground where the fort is to stand, or at least near it?--7.
+What help may be expected from the natives, either in building the fort,
+or in defending it afterwards?
+
+You are to sound the King of Habaan at a distance as to the erection of
+a fort in his country, taking notice how he relishes the proposal; yet
+you will so manage your communication with him that he may not
+understand your meaning, although there may seem good cause for its
+erection.
+
+You will search the country as far as you can, both along the coast and
+into the interior. You will likewise use your endeavours to learn what
+became of the merchants who were left at Benin. In all other important
+matters worthy of notice, we have no doubt that you will diligently
+inquire and report to us, which we leave to your good discretion. We
+also request, that you will aid and assist our factors on all occasions,
+both with your advice and otherwise; and thus God send you safely to
+return.
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Voyage to Guinea in 1562, written by William Rutter_[284].
+
+
+This relation is said by Hakluyt to have been written by _one_ William
+Rutter, to his master Anthony Hickman, being an account of a voyage to
+Guinea in 1562, fitted out by Sir William Gerard, Sir William Chester,
+Thomas Lodge, Anthony Hickman, and Edward Castelin. Three of these are
+named in the preceding section as adventurers in the voyage proposed to
+have gone under John Lok, and two of those former adventurers are here
+omitted, while two others seem now to have supplied their places, yet it
+appears to have been the same adventure, as the Minion was the ship
+employed, notwithstanding the unfavourable report made of her by Lok.
+But it would appear that the Primrose was likewise of this voyage, as
+this relation is contained in a letter from Rutter to his master, dated
+on board the Primrose, 16th of August 1563.--E.
+
+[Footnote 284: Hakluyt, II. 516. Astley, I. 177.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Worshipful Sir,--My duty remembered, this shall serve to inform you of
+our voyage, since our departure from Dartmouth on the 25th February
+1562, of which I then gave you notice. Having prosperous wind, we
+arrived at Cape Verd on the 20th of March, whence we sailed along the
+coast, to our first appointed port at Rio de Sestos, where we arrived on
+the morning of the 3d April. We here saw a French ship, which
+immediately made sail to leeward, and we came to anchor in the road.
+While we merchants were on shore engaged in traffic, the French ship
+returned and hailed [_saluted_] our ship with his ordnance. We were
+informed by the negroes that the Frenchman had been trading there for
+three days before our arrival, and we concluded, if he sent his boat on
+shore again for trade, that we would not suffer him till we had
+conferred with his captain and merchants. Accordingly his pinnace came
+on shore in the afternoon, but we desired them not to trade till we had
+spoken with their captain and merchants, whom we desired might come that
+night on board our admiral for that purpose. They did so accordingly,
+when Mr Burton and John Munt went on board the Minion, where the
+Frenchmen were, and it was determined that they should wait eight days
+beside us, allowing us to trade quietly the while. They were much
+dissatisfied with this arrangement, and sailed next morning eastwards to
+the Rio de Potos, on purpose to hinder our trade on the coast.
+
+In consequence of this the merchants, both of the Minion and our ship,
+determined to go on before them, understanding that no other ships had
+gone that way before this season, and that our trade might not be
+interrupted by the French ship. We did so accordingly, and found the
+Frenchman trading to the westward at Rio de Potos, on which we passed
+them, and came to Rio de Potos on the 12th of April, where we remained
+trading till the 15th, when we departed with the Primrose for the river
+St Andrew, where we agreed to wait for the Minion. We arrived at that
+river on the 17th, and the Minion came to us that same day, saying that
+they had met with a great ship and a caravel, belonging to the king of
+Portugal, off cape Palmas, bound for the Mina, which had chased them,
+and shot many guns at them, which the Minion had returned in her
+defence. God be praised the Minion had no harm at that time. We then
+concluded to hasten to cape Three-points, to endeavour to intercept them
+on their way to the castle. We lay to off the cape for two days and a
+night, and suspecting they were past, the Minion went in shore and sent
+her boats to a place called _Anta_, where we had formerly traded. Next
+morning, the 21st of April, we again saw the ship and caravel to
+seaward, when we immediately made sail, endeavouring to get between them
+and the castle, but to our great grief they got to the castle before us,
+when they shot freely at us and we at them, but as they had the aid of
+the castle against us we profited little.
+
+We set sail in the afternoon, and came to the town of Don Juan, called
+_Equi_, where, on the morning of the 22d, we went ashore to trade: But
+the negroes refused till they should hear from Don Luis the son of Don
+Juan, who was now dead. On the 23d Don Luis and Pacheco came to Equi,
+intending to trade with us; but two gallies came rowing along shore from
+the castle of Mina, meaning to interrupt our trade. We made sail on the
+24th, and chased the gallies back to the castle, at which the negroes
+were much pleased; but they desired us to proceed to _Mowre_, about
+three leagues farther on, where they promised to follow us, being in
+fear of the Portuguese. We did so, and remained there waiting for the
+merchants who were coming with gold from the country, but Antonio, the
+son of Don Luis, and Pacheco were on board the Minion. In the morning of
+the 25th the two gallies came again from the castle, the weather being
+very calm, and shot at us, hitting us three times. Shortly after the
+land-wind sprung up, at which time we observed the great ship and the
+caravel making towards us, on which we weighed and made sail to attack
+them; but it was night before we could get up with them, and we lost
+sight of them in the night. While returning towards the coast next night
+we agreed to proceed to Cormantin; and next morning, the 28th, we found
+ourselves very near the large ship and the two gallies, the caravel
+being close in-shore. It being very calm, the two gallies rowed towards
+the stern of the Minion, and fought with her most part of the forenoon.
+During the engagement a barrel of powder blew up in the steward room of
+the Minion, by which misfortune the master-gunner, the steward, and most
+of the gunners were sore hurt. On perceiving this, the gallies became
+more fierce, and with one shot cut half through the Minions foremast, so
+that she could bear no sail till that were repaired. Soon after this,
+the great ship sent her boat to the gallies, which suddenly withdrew.
+
+After their departure we went on board the Minion to consult what was
+best to be done: As the Minion was sore discomfited by the accident, and
+as we knew the negroes durst not trade with us so long as the gallies
+were upon the coast, it was agreed to return to the Rio Sestos. In the
+morning of the 14th of May we fell in with the land, and being uncertain
+whereabout we were, the boats were sent on shore to learn the truth,
+when it was found to be the Rio Barbas. We remained there taking in
+water till the 21st, and lost five of our men by the Hack pinnace
+over-setting. Departing on the 22d, we came to the Rio Sestos on the 2d
+of June. We again set sail on the 4th, and arrived this day, the 6th of
+August, within sight of the Start Point in the west of England, for
+which God be praised. We are very side and weak, not having above twenty
+men in both ships, able for duty. Of our men 21 have died, and many more
+are sore hurt or sick. Mr Burton has been sick for six weeks, and is now
+so very weak that, unless God strengthen him, I fear he will hardly
+escape. Your worship will find inclosed an abstract of all the goods we
+have sold, and also of what commodities we have received for them;
+reserving all things else till our meeting, and to the bearer of this
+letter.
+
+In this voyage there were brought home, in 1563, 166 elephants teeth,
+weighing 1758 libs, and 22 buts full of grains, or Guinea pepper.
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_Supplementary Account of the foregoing Voyage_ [285]
+
+
+An account of the preceding voyage to Guinea in 1563, of which this
+section is an abstract, was written in verse by Robert Baker, who
+appears to have been one of the factors employed by the adventurers. It
+is said to have been written in prison in France, where he had been
+carried on his subsequent voyage, which forms the subject of the next
+section, and was composed at the importunity of his fellow traveller and
+fellow-prisoner, Mr George Gage, the son of Sir Edward Gage. Of this
+voyage he relates nothing material, except a conflict which happened
+with the negroes at a certain river, the name of which is not mentioned;
+neither does the foregoing relation by Rutter give any light into the
+matter. But from the circumstance of the ship commencing her return for
+England immediately after this adventure, it must have happened at the
+river Sestos or Sestre, which was the last place they touched at, and
+where they staid three days, as stated both in this and the proceeding
+narratives.--Astl. I. 179.
+
+
+[Footnote 285: Astley, I. 179. Hakluyt, II. 518.]
+
+In the versified relation, which is to be found at large in the last
+edition of Hakluyts Collection, London, 1810, Vol. II. p.518-523, he
+complains of being detained in a French prison, against all law and
+right, as the war between England and France was concluded by a peace.
+The account given of this conflict with the negroes is to the following
+effect--E.
+
+One day while the ship was at anchor on the coast of Guinea, Baker
+ordered out the small pinnace or boat, with nine men well armed, to go
+on shore to traffic. At length, having entered a river, he saw a great
+number of negroes, whose captain came to him stark naked, sitting in a
+canoe made of a log, _like a trough to feed hogs in_. Stopping, at some
+distance, the negro chief put water on his cheek, not caring to trust
+himself nearer till Baker did the like. This signal of friendship being
+answered, and some tempting merchandize being shewn him, the chief came
+forward and intimated by signs, that he would stand their friend if some
+of these things were given him. He was gratified, and many things given
+to others of the natives. After trading all day with the negroes, Baker
+returned at night to the ship, carrying the chief along with him, where
+he clothed him and treated him kindly. In return the chief promised by
+signs to freight them in a day or two. While on board, Baker observed
+that the chief took much notice of the boat which was left astern, of
+the ship loaded with goods; yet not suspecting he had any ill design, no
+farther care or precaution was taken of the boat.
+
+Next morning the chief was carried on shore, and trade or barter went on
+with the negroes as on the day before; and at the return of Baker to the
+ship, the boat was fastened to the stern, and the goods left in her as
+usual. In the night the negro captain came with two or three canoes, and
+was noticed by the watch to be very busy about the boat. On giving the
+alarm, the negroes fled; but on hoisting up the boat, all the goods were
+carried of. Vexed at being so tricked, the English went next morning up
+the river to the negro town, in order to recover their goods; but all
+their signs were to no purpose, as the negroes would neither understand
+them nor acknowledge the theft. On the contrary, as if wronged by the
+charge, and resolved to revenge the affront, they followed the English
+down the river in 100 canoes, while as many appeared farther down ready
+to intercept their passage. In each canoe were two men armed with
+targets and darts, most of which had long strings to draw them back
+again after they were thrown.
+
+Being hard pressed, they discharged their arquebuses upon the negroes,
+who leapt into the water to avoid the shot. The English then rowed with
+all their might to get to sea; but the negroes getting again into their
+canoes, pursued and overtook them. Then drawing near, poured in their
+darts with accurate aim. The English kept them off with their pikes and
+halberts, and many of the negroes being slain or wounded by the English
+arrows and hail-shot from the arquebuses, they retreated. But when the
+English had expended all their arrows, the negroes came on again, and
+made many attempts to board the boat. The negro chief, who was a large
+tall man, advanced in his canoe under cover of his target, with a
+poisoned dart in his hand, in order to board; and as he pressed forward,
+the masters-mate thrust a pike through his target and throat, which
+dispatched him. While the mate was striving to disengage his pike, which
+stuck fast in the shield, he was wounded by a dart; yet drew the dart
+from his flesh and killed with it the negro who had wounded him. The
+enemy continued the fight closer than ever, and did great mischief with
+their darts, which made wide and grievous wounds. The gunner received
+two desperate wounds, and lost a great deal of blood, and the brave
+masters-mate, while standing firmly in his post, was struck through the
+ribs by a dart, on pulling out which his bowels followed, and he fell
+down dead. On perceiving this, the negroes gave a great shout, and
+pressed to enter the boat where the mate had stood, imagining as so many
+of the English were wounded they would now soon yield. But four of those
+remaining in the pinnace kept them off with their pikes, while the other
+four at the oars made the best of their way to sea.
+
+At length they got out of the river, and the negroes retired having
+expended all their darts. This was fortunate for the English, as six of
+the remaining eight were desperately wounded, one of whom was Robert
+Baker, the author of this narrative, and only two remained who were able
+to handle the oars, so that they made very slow progress to the ship,
+which appears to have been four leagues from the shore. When they got on
+board they were all so faint that none of them were able to stand. After
+having their wounds dressed they refreshed themselves; but as Robert
+Baker had more occasion for rest than food he went to bed, and when he
+awoke in the morning the ship was under sail for England.
+
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Voyage to Guinea in 1563 by Robert Baker_[286]
+
+
+This relation, like the former, is written in verse, and only contains a
+description of two adventures that happened in the voyage, one of which
+proved extremely calamitous to those concerned in it, among whom was the
+author. From the title or preamble, we learn that the adventurers in
+this voyage were Sir William Gerard, Sir William Chester, Sir Thomas
+Lodge, Benjamin Gonson, William Winter, Lionel Ducket, Anthony Hickman,
+and Edward Castelin. There were two ships employed, one called the John
+Baptist, of which Lawrence Rondell was master, and the other the Merlin,
+Robert Revell master. The factors were Robert Baker, the author,
+Justinian Goodwine, James Gliedell, and George Gage. They set out on
+their voyage in November 1563, bound for Guinea and the river Sestos,
+but the port whence they fitted out is nowhere mentioned. After the
+unlucky disaster that befel him in Guinea in the year before, Baker had
+made a kind of poetical vow not to go near that country any more; but
+after his return to England, and recovery from his wounds, he soon
+forgot past sorrows; and being invited to undertake the voyage in
+quality of factor, he consented.--Astley.
+
+[Footnote 286: Astley I. 180. Hakluyt, II. 523-531. The prose abstract
+here inserted is chiefly taken from Astleys collection, carefully
+compared with the original versified narrative in Hakluyt.--E.]
+
+After we had been at sea two days and a night, the man from the main-top
+descried a sail or two, the tallest of which they immediately made up
+to, judging her to be the most valuable; and, as captains are in use to
+do[287], I hailed her to know whence she was. She answered from France,
+on which we _waved_ her, but she nothing dismayed, _waved_ us in return.
+I immediately ordered armed men aloft into the main and fore-tops, and
+caused powder to be laid on the poop to blow up the enemy if they should
+board us that way. At the sound of trumpets we began the fight,
+discharging both chain and bar-shot from our brazen artillery; while the
+Frenchmen, flourishing their swords from the main-yard, called out to
+us to board their ship. Willing to accept their invitation, we plied
+them warmly with our cannon, and poured in flights of arrows, while our
+arquebuses plied them from loop-holes, and we endeavoured to set their
+sails on fire by means of arrows and pikes carrying wildfire. I
+encouraged, the men to board, by handing spiced wine liberally among
+them, which they did with lime-pots, after breaking their nets with
+stones, while those of our men who were aloft entered the enemys tops,
+after killing those who defended them. Then cutting the ropes, they
+brought down the yard by the board, and those who entered the ship plied
+the enemy so well with their swords, that at length the remaining
+Frenchmen ran below deck and cried out for quarter. Having thus become
+masters of the ship, we carried her to the _Groin_ in Spain, or Corunna,
+where we sold the ship and cargo for ready money.
+
+[Footnote 287: In these early trading voyages, the chief factor, who
+here appears to have been Baker, seems to have had the supreme
+command--Astl. I. 180. b.]
+
+After this we proceeded on our voyage and arrived in Guinea. One day
+about noon, I went with eight more in a boat towards the shore to trade,
+meaning to dispatch my business and be back before night. But when we
+had got near the shore, a furious tempest sprung up, accompanied with
+rain and thunder, which drove the ships from their anchors out to sea;
+while we in the boat were forced to run along the coast in search of
+some place for shelter from the storm, but meeting none, had to remain
+all night near the shore, exposed to the thunder, rain, and wind in
+great jeopardy. We learnt afterwards that the ships returned next day in
+search of us, while we rowed forward along the coast, supposing the
+ships were before us, and always anxiously looked out for them; but the
+mist was so great that we could never see them nor they us. The ships
+continued, as we were told afterwards, looking out for us for two or
+three days; after which, concluding that we had inevitably perished in
+the storm, they made the best of their way for England.
+
+Having been three days in great distress for want of food, we at length
+landed on the coast and exchanged some of our wares with the negroes for
+roots and such other provisions as they had, and then put to sea again
+in search of the ships, which we still supposed were before us or to
+leeward, wherefore we went down the coast to the eastwards. We continued
+in this manner ranging along shore for twelve days, seeing nothing but
+thick woods and deserts, full of wild beasts, which often appeared and
+came in crowds at sunset to the sea shore, where they lay down or played
+on the sand, sometimes plunging into the water to cool themselves. At
+any other time it would have been diverting to see how archly the
+elephants would fill their trucks with water, which they spouted out
+upon the rest. Besides deer, wild boars, and antelopes, we saw many
+other wild beasts, such as I had never seen before.
+
+We often saw a man or two on the shore, who on seeing us used to come
+off in their almadias or canoes; when casting anchor we offered such
+wares as we had in the boat for fish and fresh water, or provisions of
+their cooking, and in this way we procured from them roots and the fruit
+of the palm tree, and some of their wine, which is the juice of a tree
+and is of the colour of whey. Sometimes we got wild honeycombs; and by
+means of these and other things we relieved our hunger; but nothing
+could relieve our grief, fatigue and want of sleep, and we were so sore
+depressed by the dreadful situation in which we were placed, that we
+were ready to die, and were reduced to extreme weakness. Having lost all
+hope of rejoining the ships, which we now concluded were either lost or
+gone homewards, we knew not how to conduct ourselves. We were in a
+strange and distant country, inhabited by a people whose manners and
+customs were entirely different from ours; and to attempt getting home
+in an open boat destitute of every necessary was utterly impossible. By
+this time we found we had passed to leeward of _Melegete_ or the grain
+coast, and had got to the Mina or gold coast of Guinea, as the negroes
+who now came on board spoke some Portuguese, and brought off their
+weights and scales for the purpose of trade, asking where were our
+ships. To this we answered, in hopes of being the better treated, that
+we had two ships at sea, which would be with them in a day or two.
+
+We now consulted together how they should best proceed. If we continued
+at sea in our boat, exposed by day to the burning heat of the sun which
+sensibly consumed us by copious perspiration, and to the frequent
+tornadoes or hurricanes by night, accompanied with thunder, lightning
+and rain; which deprived us of all rest, we could not possibly long hold
+out. We were often three days without a morsel of food; and having sat
+for twenty days continually in our boat, we were in danger of losing the
+use of our limbs for want of exercise, and our joints were so swollen by
+the scurvy, that we could hardly stand upright. It was not possible for
+us to remain much longer in the boat in our present condition, so that
+it was necessary to come to some resolution, and we had only three
+things to choose. The first was to repair to the castle of St George del
+Mina, which was not far off, and give ourselves up to the Portuguese who
+were Christians, if we durst trust them or expect the more humanity on
+that account. Even the worst that could happen to us from them was to be
+hanged out of our misery; yet possibly they might have some mercy on us,
+as nine young men such as we were might be serviceable in their gallies,
+and if made galley slaves for life we should have victuals enough to
+enable us to tug at the oar, whereas now we had both to row and starve.
+
+The next alternative was to throw ourselves upon the mercy of the
+negroes, which I stated was very hopeless and discouraging, as I did not
+see what favour could be expected from a beastly savage people, whose
+condition was worse than that of slaves, and who possibly might be
+cannibals. It was likewise difficult for us to conform ourselves to their
+customs, so opposite to ours; and, we could not be expected, having
+always lived on animal food, to confine ourselves to roots and herbs
+like the negroes, which are the food of wild beasts. Besides, having
+been always accustomed to the use of clothes, we could not for shame go
+naked. Even if we could get the better of that prejudice, our bodies
+would be grievously tormented and emaciated by the scorching heat of the
+sun, for want of that covering and defence to which we had been
+accustomed. The only other course was to stay at sea in the boat, and
+die miserably. Being determined to run any risk at land, rather than to
+continue pent up in a narrow boat, exposed to all the inclemencies of
+the weather day and night, and liable to be famished for want of
+victuals, I gave it as my opinion that we had better place confidence in
+the Christian Portuguese than in the negroes who lived like so many
+brutes. We how determined to throw ourselves on the mercy of the
+Portuguese, and hoisting sail shaped our course for the castle of St
+George del Mina; which was not above 20 leagues distant. We went on all
+day without stopping till late at night, when we perceived a light on
+shore. Concluding that this might be a place of trade, our boatswain
+proposed to cast anchor at this place, in hopes that we might be able to
+procure provisions next morning in exchange for some of our wares. This
+was agreed upon, and on going next morning near the shore we saw a
+watchhouse upon a rock, in the place whence the light had proceeded
+during the night, and near the watchhouse a large black cross was
+erected. This made us doubtful whereabout we were, and on looking
+farther we perceived a castle which perplexed us still more[288].
+
+[Footnote 288: It appears in the sequel that this fort or castle had
+been recently erected by the Portuguese at the western point or
+head-land of Cape Three-points, and of which there are no notices in any
+of the preceding voyages on this part of the coast.--Astley, I. 132, a.]
+
+Our doubts were quickly solved by the appearance of some Portuguese, one
+of whom held a white flag in his hand which he waved as inviting us to
+come on shore. Though we were actually bound in quest of the Portuguese,
+yet our hearts now failed us, and we tacked about to make from the
+shore. On being seen from the castle, a gun was fired at us by a negro,
+the ball from which fell within a yard of our boat. At length we turned
+towards the shore to which we rowed, meaning to yield ourselves up; but
+to our great surprise, the nearer we came to the shore the more did the
+Portuguese fire at us; and though the bullets fell thick about us we
+continued to advance till we got close under the castle wall, when we
+were out of danger from their cannon. We now determined to land in order
+to try the courtesy of the Portuguese, but were presently assailed by
+showers of stones from the castle: wall, and saw a number of negroes
+marching down to the beach with their darts and targets, some of them
+having bows and poisoned arrows. Their attack was very furious, partly
+from heavy stones falling into the boat which threatened to break holes
+in her bottom, as well as from flights of arrows which came whizzing
+about our ears, and even wounded some of us: Therefore being in
+desperation, we pushed off from the shore to return to sea, setting four
+of our men to row, while the other five determined to repay some part of
+the civility we had received, and immediately handled our fire-arms and
+bows. We employed these at first against the negroes on the beach, some
+of whom soon dropped; and then against the Portuguese who stood on the
+walls dressed in long white-shirts and linstocks in their hands, many of
+which were dyed red by means of the English arrows. We thus maintained
+our ground a long while, fighting at our leisure, regardless of the
+threats of the enemy, as we saw they had no gallies to send out to make
+us prisoners. When we had sufficiently revenged their want of
+hospitality, we rowed off, and though we knew that we must pass through
+another storm of bullets from the castle, we escaped without damage.
+
+When we got out to sea, we saw three negroes rowing after us in an
+almadia, who came to inquire to what country we belonged, speaking good
+Portuguese. We told them we were Englishmen, and said we had brought
+wares to trade with them if they had not used us so ill. As the negroes
+inquired where our ship was, we said we had two at sea well equipped,
+which would soon come to the coast to trade for gold, and that we only
+waited their return. The negroes then pretended to be sorry for what had
+happened, and intreated us to remain where we were for that day, and
+promised to bring us whatever we were in want of. But placing no
+confidence in their words, we asked what place that was, and being
+answered that it was a Portuguese castle at the western head-land of
+Cape Three-points, we hoisted sail and put to sea, to look out for some
+more friendly place.
+
+We now resolved to have no more reliance on the kindness of the
+Portuguese, of which we had thus sufficient experience, and to make
+trial of the hospitality of the negroes; for which purpose we sailed
+back about 30 leagues along the coast, and coming to anchor, some
+natives came off to the boat, to all of whom we gave presents. By this
+we won their hearts, and the news of such generous strangers being on
+the coast soon brought the kings son to our boat. On his arrival, I
+explained our sad case to him as well as I could by signs, endeavouring
+to make him understand that we were quite forlorn, having been abandoned
+by our ships, and being almost famished for want of food, offering him
+all the goods in our boat if he would take us under his protection and
+relieve our great distress. The negro chief was moved even to tears, and
+bid us be comforted. He went then on shore to know his fathers pleasure
+regarding us, and returning presently invited us to land. This was
+joyful news to us all, and we considered him as a bountiful benefactor
+raised up to us by the goodness of Providence. We accordingly fell to
+our oars in all haste to pull on shore, where at least 500 negroes were
+waiting our arrival; but on coming near shore the surf ran so high that
+the boat overset, on which the negroes plunged immediately into the
+water and brought us all safe on shore. They even preserved the boat and
+all that was in her, some swimming after the oars, and others diving for
+the goods that had sunk. After this they hauled the boat on shore and
+brought every thing that belonged to us, not daring to detain the most
+trifling article, so much were they in awe of the kings son, who was a
+stout and valiant man, and having many excellent endowments.
+
+They now brought us such provisions as they used themselves, and being
+very hungry we fed heartily, the negroes all the while staring at us
+with much astonishment, as the common people are used to do in England
+at strange outlandish creatures. Notwithstanding all this apparent
+humanity and kindness, we were still under great apprehensions of the
+negroes, all of whom were armed with darts. That night we lay upon the
+ground among the negroes, but never once closed our eyes, tearing they
+might kill us while asleep. Yet we received no hurt from them, and for
+two days fared well; but finding the ships did not come for us, as they
+expected would soon have been the case, when likewise they looked to
+have had a large quantity of goods distributed among them in reward for
+their hospitality, they soon became weary of us; and after lessening our
+allowance from day to day, they at length left us to shift for
+ourselves. In this forlorn state, we had to range about the woods in
+search of fruits and roots, which last we had to dig from the ground
+with our fingers for want of any instruments. Hunger had quite abated
+the nicety of our palates, and we were glad to feed on every thing we
+could find that was eatable. Necessity soon reconciled us to going
+naked, for our clothes becoming rotten with our sweat fell from our
+backs by degrees, so that at length we had scarcely rags left to cover
+our nakedness. We were not only forced to provide ourselves in food, but
+had to find fuel and utensils to dress it. We made a pot of clay dried
+in the sun, in which we boiled our roots, and roasted the berries in the
+embers, feasting every evening on these varieties. At night we slept on
+the bare ground, making a great fire round us to scare away the wild
+beasts.
+
+What with the entire change in our manner of living, and the heat and
+unhealthiness of the climate, our people sickened apace; and in a short
+time our original number of nine was reduced to three. To those who died
+it was a release from misery, but we who remained were rendered more
+forlorn and helpless than before. At length, when we had abandoned all
+hopes of relief, a French ship arrived on the coast, which took us on
+board and carried us to France, which was then at war with England,
+where we were detained prisoners.
+
+   A prisner therefore I remaine,
+     And hence I cannot slip
+   Till that my ransome be
+     Agreed upon and paid:
+   Which being levied yet so hie,
+     No agreement can be made.
+   And such is lo my chance,
+    The meane time to abide;
+   A prisner for ransome in France,
+     Till God send time and tide.
+   From whence this idle rime
+     To England I do send:
+   And thus, till I have further time,
+     This tragedie I end.
+
+SECTION XI.
+
+_A Voyage to Guinea, in 1564:, by Captain David Carlet_[289].
+
+
+At a meeting of merchant adventurers, held at the house of Sir William
+Gerard, on the 11th July 1564, for setting forth a voyage to Guinea, the
+following chief adventurers were present, Sir William Gerard, Sir
+William Chester, Sir Thomas Lodge, Anthony Hickman, and John Castelin.
+It was then agreed that Francis Ashbie should be sent to Deptford for
+his letters to Peter Pet, to go about rigging of the Minion at the
+charges of the queens majesty, after which Francis Ashbie was to repair
+with these letters to Gillingham, with money to supply our charges
+there.
+
+[Footnote 289: Hakluyt, II. 531. Astley, I. 134.]
+
+It was also agreed that every one of the five partners shall forthwith
+call upon their partners to supply, towards this new rigging and
+victualling L.29, 10s. 6d., for every L.100 value. Also that every one
+of the five partners shall forthwith bring in L.50, towards the
+furniture of the premises. Likewise, if Mr Gonson give his consent that
+the Merlin shall be brought round from Bristol to Hampton, that a letter
+shall be drawn under his hand, before order be given in the same.
+
+The ships employed in this voyage were, the Minion belonging to the
+queen, David Carlet, captain, the John Baptist of London, and the Merlin
+belonging to Mr Gonson. The success of this voyage in part appears by
+certain brief relations extracted out of the second voyage of Sir John
+Hawkins to the West Indies, made in the year 1564, which I have thought
+good to set down for want of more direct information, which hitherto I
+have not been able to procure notwithstanding every possible
+endeavour[290].
+
+[Footnote 290: This is the substance of Hakluyt's introduction to the
+following brief relation of the present voyage.--E.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Sir John, then only Mr Hawkins, departed from Plymouth with a prosperous
+wind for the West Indies, on the 18th of October 1564, having under his
+command the Jesus of Lubec of 700 tons, the Salomon of 140 tons, a bark
+named the Tiger of 50 tons, and a pinnace called the Swallow of 30 tons,
+having in all 170 men, well supplied with ordnance and provisions for
+such a voyage. While casting loose the foresail, one of the officers in
+the Jesus was killed by the fall of a block, giving a sorrowful
+beginning to the expedition. After getting ten leagues out to sea, they
+fell in with the Minion, a ship belonging to the queen, of which David
+Carlet was captain, and her consort the John Baptist of London; which
+two ships were bound for Guinea. The two squadrons, as they may be
+called, saluted each other with some pieces of ordnance, after the
+custom of the sea; after which the Minion parted company to seek her
+other consort the Merlin of London, which was out of sight astern,
+leaving the John Baptist in company with Hawkins.
+
+Continuing their voyage with a prosperous wind until the 21st, a great
+storm arose at N.E. about 9 o'clock at night, which continued 23 hours,
+in which storm Hawkins lost sight of the John Baptist and of his pinnace
+called the Swallow, the other three ships being sore tossed by the
+tempest. To his great joy the Swallow joined company again in the night,
+10 leagues to the north of Cape Finister, having been obliged to go
+_roomer_, as she was unable to weather that cape against a strong
+contrary wind at S.W. On the 25th, the wind still continuing contrary,
+he put into Ferol in Galicia, where he remained five days, and gave out
+proper instructions to the masters of the other ships for keeping
+company during the rest of the voyage.
+
+On the 26th of the month the Minion came into Ferol, on which Mr Hawkins
+saluted her with some guns, according to the custom of the sea, as a
+welcome for her safe arrival: But the people of the Minion were not in
+the humour of rejoicing, on account of the misfortune which had happened
+to their consort the Merlin, whom they had gone to seek on the coast of
+England when they parted from Mr Hawkins. Having met with her, they kept
+company for two days; when, by the negligence of one of the gunners of
+the Merlin, the powder in her gun-room took fire, by which her stern was
+blown out and three of her men lost, besides many sore hurt, who saved
+their lives in consequence of their brigantine being at her stern; for
+the Merlin immediately sunk, to the heavy loss of the owners and great
+grief of the beholders.
+
+On the 30th of the month, Mr Hawkins and his ships, together with the
+Minion and her remaining consort the John Baptist, set sail in the
+prosecution of their voyage with a prosperous gale, the Minion having
+both brigantines at her stern. The 4th of November they had sight of
+Madeira, and the 6th of Tenerife, which they thought to have been grand
+Canary, as they reckoned themselves to the east of Tenerife, but were
+not. The Minion and her consort, being 3 or 4 leagues a head of the
+ships of Mr Hawkins, kept the course for Tenerife, of which they had a
+better view than the other ships, and by that means they parted company.
+
+Hawkins and his ships continued his voyage by Cape Verd and Sierra
+Leone, after which he crossed the Atlantic ocean and came to the town of
+Burboroata on the coast of the Terra Firma in the West Indies, or South
+America; where he afterwards received information of the unfortunate
+issue of the Guinea voyage, in the following manner. While at anchor in
+the outer road on the 29th of April 1565, a French ship came in called
+the Green Dragon of Newhaven, of which one Bon-temps was captain, which
+saluted the English squadron after the custom of the sea, and was
+saluted in return. This ship had been at the Mina, or Gold coast of
+Guinea, whence she had been driven off by the Portuguese gallies, and
+obliged to make for the Terra Firma to endeavour to sell her wares. She
+informed that the Minion had been treated in the same manner; and that
+the captain, David Carlet, with a merchant or factor and twelve
+mariners, had been treacherously made prisoners by the negroes on their
+arrival on that coast, and remained in the hands of the Portuguese;
+besides which they had lost others of their men through the want of
+_fresh water_, and were in great doubts of being able to get home the
+ships[291].
+
+[Footnote 291: Hakluyt might have said whether they did come home or
+not, which he certainly might have known; but he often leaves us in the
+dark as to such matters.--Astl. I. 185. a.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+_Note_.--It may not be improper to state in this place, that no ship
+need be reduced to utter distress for want of _fresh water_ at sea; as
+distilled sea water is perfectly fresh and wholesome. For this purpose,
+all ships bound on voyages of any length, ought to have a still head
+worm and cooler adapted to the cooking kettle, to be used when needed,
+by which abundance of fresh water may always be secured while cooking
+the ships provisions, sufficient to preserve the lives of the crew. In
+default of that useful appendage, a still may be easily constructed for
+the occasion, by means of the pitch kettle, a reversed tea kettle for a
+head, and a gun barrel fixed to the spout of the tea kettle, the breach
+pin being screwed out, and the barrel either soldered to the spout, or
+fixed by a paste of flour, soap and water, tied round with rags and
+twine. The tea kettle and gun barrel are to be kept continually wet by
+means of swabs and sea water, to cool and condense the steam. This
+distilled water is at first vapid and nauseous, both to the taste and
+the stomach; but by standing open for some time, especially if agitated
+in contact with air, or by pumping air through it, as is commonly done
+to sweeten putrid water, this unpleasant and nauseous vapidness is soon
+removed.
+
+The nautical world owes this excellent discovery, of distilled sea water
+being perfectly fresh, to the late excellent and ingenious Dr James
+Lino, first physician to the general hospital of the navy at Haslar near
+Portsmouth during the American war, the author of two admirable works,
+on the Scurvy, and the Means of Preserving the Health of Seamen during
+long voyages, to which the British navy, and seamen in general, owe
+inestimable advantages. The editor, while giving this useful hint to
+seamen engaged on long voyages, is happy in having an opportunity of
+bearing this feeble testimony of honourable respect to the friend of his
+youth, under whom he had the happiness and advantage of serving, in that
+magnificent asylum of the brave defenders of the glory and prosperity of
+our king and country, for the last three years of the American war.
+Besides being an eminent and experienced physician, Dr Lind was a man of
+exemplary humanity, and of uncommon urbanity and singleness of manners:
+He was truly the seaman's friend. The rules and expedients which he
+devised and proposed, founded on the solid basis, of observation and
+experience, for Preserving the Health of Seamen on long voyages, were
+afterwards employed and perfected by the great navigator and discoverer
+COOK, and by his pupils and followers; and are now universally
+established in our glorious navy, to the incalculable advantage of the
+service.
+
+In high northern or southern latitudes, solid clear ice melted affords
+good fresh water, the first runnings being thrown away as contaminated
+by adhering sea water. White cellular ice is quite unfit for the
+purpose, being strongly impregnated with salt. In future articles of our
+work, several opportunities will occur in which these two expedients for
+supplying ships with fresh water will be amply detailed. But on the
+present opportunity, it seemed proper to mention these easy and
+effectual expedients for preserving the health and lives of seamen, when
+in want of fresh water by the ordinary means.--Ed.
+
+
+SECTION XII.
+
+_A Voyage to Guinea and the Cape de Verd Islands in 1566, by George
+Fenner_[292]
+
+
+Three ships were employed on this voyage, the admiral, called the Castle
+of Comfort, George Fenner general[293] of the expedition, and William
+Bats master; the May-Flower, vice-admiral, William Courtise master; the
+George, John Heiwood captain, and John Smith of Hampton master; besides
+a small pinnace. Walter Wren, the writer of the narrative, belonged to
+the George.
+
+[Footnote 292: Hakluyt, II. 533. Astley, I. 185.]
+
+[Footnote 293: This general was probably head factor--E.]
+
+We departed from Plymouth on the 10th December 1566, and were abreast of
+Ushant on the 12th. On the 15th we got sight of Cape Finister, and lost
+company of our admiral that night, for which reason we sailed along the
+coast of Portugal, hoping our admiral might be before us. Meeting a
+French ship on the 18th and getting no intelligence of our admiral, we
+made sail for the Canaries, and fell in with the island of Tenerife on
+the 28th, where we came to anchor in a small bay, at which there were
+three or four small houses, about a league from the town of Santa Cruz.
+In this island there is a marvellous high hill called the Peak, and
+although it is in lat. 28 deg. N. where the air is as warm in January as it
+is in England at midsummer, the top of this hill, to which no man has
+ever been known to ascend, is seldom free from snow even in the middle
+of summer. On the 3d January 1567, we departed from this place, going
+round the western point of the island, about 12 or 14 leagues from Santa
+Cruz, and came into a bay right over against the house of one Pedro de
+Souza, where we came to anchor on the 5th, and heard that our admiral
+had been there at anchor seven days before us, and had gone thence to
+the island of Gomera, to which place we followed him, and coming to
+anchor on the 6th over against the town of Gomera, we found our admiral
+at anchor to our great mutual satisfaction. We found here Edward Cooke
+in a tall ship, and a ship of the coppersmiths of London, which had been
+treacherously seized by the Portuguese in the bay of Santa Cruz on the
+coast of Barbary, or Morocco, which ship we left there all spoiled. At
+this place we bought 14 buts of wine for sea stores, at 15 ducats a but,
+which had been offered to us at Santa Cruz for 8, 9, or 10 ducats. The
+9th we went to another bay about three leagues off, where we took in
+fresh water; and on the 10th we sailed for Cape Blanco on the coast of
+Africa.
+
+The 12th we came to a bay to eastwards of Cape Pargos, (_Barbas?_) which
+is 35 leagues from Cape Blanco, but being unacquainted with that part of
+the coast, we proceeded to Cape Blanco, off which we had 16 fathoms two
+leagues from shore, the land being very low and all white sand. At this
+place it is necessary to beware of going too near shore, as when in 12
+or 10 fathoms you may be aground within two or three casts of the lead.
+Directing our course on the 17th S. and S. by E. we fell into a bay
+about 16 leagues east of Cape Verd, where the land seemed like a great
+number of ships under sail, owing to its being composed of a great
+number of hummocks, some high some low, with high trees upon them. When
+within three leagues of the land we sounded and had 28 fathoms over a
+ground of black ouze. This day we saw much fish in sundry _sculs_ or
+shoals, swimming with their noses at the surface. Passing along this
+coast we saw two small round hills about a league from the other,
+forming a cape, and between them great store of trees, and in all our
+sailing we never saw such high land as these two hills. The 19th we came
+to anchor at the cape in a road, fast by the western side of two
+hills[294], where we rode in 10 fathoms, though we might safely have
+gone into five or six fathoms, as the ground is good and the wind always
+blows from the shore.
+
+[Footnote 294: The paps of Cape Verd are about a League S.S.E. from the
+extreme west point of the Cape.--E.]
+
+At this place some of our officers and merchants went on shore with the
+boat unarmed, to the number of about 20 persons, among whom were Mr
+George Fenner the general, his brother Edward Fenner, Thomas Valentine,
+John Worme, and Francis Leigh, merchants, John Haward, William Bats,
+Nicholas Day, John Thomson, and several others. At their coming on shore
+they were met by above 100 negroes armed with bows and arrows. After
+some talk pledges were interchanged, five of the English being delivered
+into their hands, and three negroes taken on board the admirals skiff.
+Our people mentioned the merchandize they had brought, being linen and
+woolen cloth, iron, cheese, and other articles; on which the negroes
+said that they had civet, musk, gold, and grains to give in exchange,
+with which our people were well pleased. The negroes desired to see our
+merchandize, on which one of the boats was sent back to the ships, while
+our general and merchants remained in the other with the three negroe
+pledges, our five men walking about on shore among the negroes. On the
+return of the boat from the ship with goods, bread, wine, and cheese
+were distributed among the natives. At this time two of the negroe
+pledges, on pretence of sickness, were allowed to go on shore, promising
+to send two others in their stead. On perceiving this, Captain Haiward
+began to dread some perfidy, and retreated towards the boat, followed by
+two or three negroes, who stopped him from going on board, and made
+signs for him to bring them more bread and wine, and when he would have
+stepped into the boat, one of them caught him by the breeches, but he
+sprung from him and leapt into the boat. As soon as he was in, one of
+the negroes on shore began to blow a pipe, on which the negroe pledge
+who remained in the boat, suddenly drew Mr Wormes sword, cast himself
+into the sea and swam on shore. The negroes immediately laid hands on
+our men that were on shore, and seized three of them with great
+violence, tore their clothes from their backs, and left them nothing to
+cover them. Then many of them shot so thick at our men in the boats that
+they could scarcely handle their oars, yet by God's help they got the
+boats away, though many of them were hurt by the poisoned arrows. This
+poison is incurable, if the arrow pierce the skin so as to draw blood,
+except the poison be immediately sucked out, or the part hurt be cut out
+forthwith; otherwise the wounded man inevitably dies in four days.
+Within three hours after any part of the body is hurt, or even slightly
+pricked, although it be the little toe, the poison reaches the heart,
+and affects the stomach with excessive vomiting, so that the person can
+take neither meat nor drink.
+
+The persons seized in this treacherous manner by the negroes were
+Nicholas Day, William Bats, and John Thomson, who were led away to a
+town about a mile from the shore. The 20th we sent a boat on shore with
+eight persons, among whom was the before-mentioned John Thomson[295] and
+our interpreter, who was a Frenchman, as one of the negroes spoke good
+French. They carried with them two arquebuses, two targets, and a
+_mantell?_ and were directed to learn what ransom the negroes demanded
+for Bats and Day whom they detained. On coming to the shore and telling
+the negroes the nature of their errand, Bats and Day were brought from
+among some trees quite loose, but surrounded by some 40 or 50 negroes.
+When within a stone's throw of the beach, Bats broke suddenly from them
+and ran as fast as he could into the sea towards the boat; but
+immediately on getting into the water he fell, so that the negroes
+retook him, violently tearing off his clothes. After this some of the
+negroes carried our two men back to the town, while the rest began to
+shoot at our people in the boat with their poisoned arrows, and wounded
+one of our men in the small of the leg, who had nearly died in spite of
+every thing our surgeons could do for him. Notwithstanding this
+unjustifiable conduct, our general sent another message to the negroes,
+offering any terms they pleased to demand as ransom for our men. But
+they gave for answer, that three weeks before we came an English ship
+had forcibly carried off three of their people, and unless we brought or
+sent them back we should not have our men, though we gave our three
+ships and all their lading. On the 21st a French ship, of 80 tons came
+to the place where we were, intending to trade with the negroes, and
+seeing that the Frenchmen were well received by the natives, our general
+told them of our two men being detained, and wished them to endeavour
+to procure their release, promising L.100 to the Frenchmen if they
+succeeded. We then committed this affair to the management of the
+Frenchmen, and departed. Of our men who were hurt by the poisoned
+arrows, four died, and one had to have his arm cut off to save his life.
+Andrews, who was last hurt, lay long lame and unable to help himself,
+and only two recovered.
+
+[Footnote 295: It is not said how he had got away from the negroes.--E.]
+
+While between Cape Verd and Bonavista on the 26th, we saw many flying
+fishes of the size of herrings, two of which fell into the boat which we
+towed at our stern. The 28th we fell in with Bonavista, one of the Cape
+de Verd islands, which is 86 leagues from that cape. The north side of
+that island is full of white sandy hills and dales, being somewhat high
+land. That day we came to anchor about a league within the western
+point, in ten fathoms upon fine sand, but it is quite safe to go nearer
+in five or six fathoms, as the ground is every where good. The 30th we
+went into a bay within a small island about a league from our first
+anchorage, where we took plenty of various kinds of fish. Whoever means
+to anchor in this bay may safely do so in four or five fathoms off the
+south point of the small island; but must beware of the middle of the
+bay, where there is a ledge of rocks on which the sea breaks at low
+water, although then they are covered by three fathoms water. The last
+day of January, our general went on shore in the bay to some houses,
+where he found twelve Portuguese, the whole island not having more than
+30 inhabitants, who were all banished men, some condemned to more years
+of exile and some to less, and among them was a simple man who was their
+captain. They live on goat's flesh, cocks and hens, with fresh water,
+having no other food except fish, which they do not care for, neither
+indeed have they any boats wherewith to catch them. They told us that
+this island had been granted by the king of Portugal to one of his
+gentlemen, who had let it at 100 ducats of yearly rent, which was paid
+by the profit on goats skins, of which 40,000 had been sent from that
+island to Portugal in one year. These men made us very welcome,
+entertaining us as well as they could, giving us the carcasses of as
+many he-goats as we pleased, and even aided us in taking them, bringing
+them down for us from the mountains on their asses. They have great
+store of oil procured from tortoises, which are _fishes_ that swim in
+the sea, having shells on their backs as large as targets. It only rains
+in this island for three months in every year, from the middle of July
+to the middle of October; and the climate is always very hot. Cows have
+been brought here, but owing to the heat and drought they always died.
+
+We left Bonavista, or Buenavista, on the 3d February, and fell in the
+same day with another island called Mayo, 14 leagues distant; there
+being a danger midway between the two islands, but it is always seen and
+easily avoided. We anchored in a fine bay on the N.W. side of Mayo, in
+eight fathoms on a good sandy bottom; but weighed next day and went to
+another island called St Jago, about five leagues E. by S. from Mayo. At
+the westermost point of this island, we saw a good road-stead, having a
+small town by the waterside, close to which was a fort or battery. We
+here proposed to have anchored on purpose to trade; but before we were
+within shot, they let fly two pieces at us, on which we went to leeward
+along shore two or three leagues, where we found a small bay and two or
+three houses, off which we anchored in 14 fathoms upon good ground.
+Within an hour after we had anchored, several persons both on foot and
+horseback were seen passing and repassing opposite the ships. Next day a
+considerable force of horse and foot was seen, and our general sent a
+message to know whether they were disposed to trade with us. They
+answered that we were made welcome as merchants, and should have every
+thing we could reasonably demand. On this our general ordered all the
+boats to be made ready, but doubting the good faith of the Portuguese,
+caused the boats to be well armed, putting a _double base_ in the head
+of his pinnace and two _single bases_ in the skiff, directing the boats
+of the May-flower and George to be similarly armed. On rowing towards
+the shore with all the boats, the general was surprised to see above 60
+horsemen and 200 foot all armed to receive us, for which reason he sent
+a flag of truce to learn their intentions. Their answer was fair and
+smooth, declaring that they meant to treat us like gentlemen and
+merchants, and desired that our general might come on shore to converse
+with their captain. When our general approached the shore in his skiff,
+they came towards him in great numbers, with much seeming politeness,
+bowing and taking off their bonnets, and earnestly requesting our
+general and the merchants to come on shore. He declined this however,
+unless they would give sufficient hostages for our security. At length
+they promised to send two satisfactory hostages, and to give us water,
+provisions, money, and negroes in exchange for our merchandize, and
+desired a list of our wares might be sent on shore; all of which our
+general promised to do forthwith, and withdraw from the shore, causing
+our _bases, curriers_[296], and arquebuses to be fired off in
+compliment to the Portuguese, while at the same time our ships saluted
+them with five or six cannon shot. Most of the Portuguese now left the
+shore, except a few who remained to receive the list of our commodities;
+but, while we meant honestly and fairly to trade with them as friends,
+their intentions were treacherously to betray us to our destruction, as
+will appear in the sequel.
+
+[Footnote 296: Bases and curriers must have been some small species of
+ordnance, capable of being used in boats; arquebuses were matchlock
+muskets.--E.]
+
+About two leagues to the west of where we lay, there was a town behind a
+point of land, where the Portuguese had several caravels, and two
+brigantines or row barges like gallies. With all haste the Portuguese
+fitted out four caravels and these two brigantines, furnishing them with
+as many men and cannon as they could carry; and as soon as it was night
+these vessels made towards us with sails and oars, and as the land was
+high, and the weather somewhat dark and misty, we did not see them till
+they were almost close on board the May-flower, which lay at anchor
+about a gun-shot nearer them than our other ships. When within gun-shot
+of the May-flower, one of the watch chanced to see a light, and then
+looking out espied the four ships and gave the alarm. The Portuguese,
+finding themselves discovered, began immediately to fire their cannon,
+_curriers_, and arquebuses; then lighted up certain tubes of wild fire,
+and all their people both on shore and in their ships set up great
+shouts, while they continued to bear down on the May-flower. With all
+the haste we could, one of our guns was got ready and fired at them, on
+which they seemed to hesitate a little; But they recharged their
+ordnance, and again fired at us very briskly. In the mean time we got
+three guns ready which we fired at them, when they were so near that we
+could have shot an arrow on board. Having a fine breeze of wind from the
+shore, we hoisted our foresail and cut our cable, making sail to join
+our admiral to leeward, while they followed firing sometimes at us and
+sometimes at our admiral. At length one shot from our admiral had the
+effect to make them retire, when they made away from us like cowardly
+traitors. During all this time, though they continually fired all their
+guns at us, not a man or boy among us was hurt; but we know not what
+were the effects of our shot among them.
+
+Seeing the villany of these men, we set sail immediately for an island
+named _Fuego_, or the Fire island, twelve leagues from St Jago, where we
+came to anchor on the 11th February, opposite a white chapel at the west
+end of the island, half a league from a small town, and about a league
+from the western extremity of the island. In this island, there is a
+remarkably high hill which burns continually, and the inhabitants told
+us, that about three years before, the whole island had like to have
+been destroyed by the prodigious quantity of fire which it discharged.
+About a league west from the chapel we found a fine spring of fresh
+water, whence we supplied our ships. They have no wheat in this island,
+instead of which they grow millet, which makes good bread, and they
+likewise cultivate peas like those of Guinea. The inhabitants are
+Portuguese, and are forbidden by their king to trade either with the
+English or French, or even to supply them with provisions, or any other
+thing unless forced. Off this island is another named Brava, or St John,
+not exceeding two leagues over, which has abundance of goats and many
+trees, but not above three or four inhabitants.
+
+On the 25th of February we set sail for the Azores, and on the 23d of
+March we got sight of one of these islands called Flores, to the north
+of which we could see another called Cuervo, about two leagues distant.
+The 27th we came to anchor at Cuervo, opposite a village of about a
+dozen mean houses; but dragging our anchors in the night during a gale
+of wind, we went to Flores, where we saw strange streams of water
+pouring from its high cliffs, occasioned by a prodigious rain. The 18th
+April we took in water at Flores, and sailed for Fayal, which we had
+sight of on the 28th, and of three other islands, Pico, St George, and
+Graciosa, which are round about Fayal. The 29th we anchored in 22
+fathoms water in a fine bay on the S.W. side of Fayal, over against a
+small town, where we got fresh water and fresh provisions. In this
+island, according to the report of the inhabitants, there grows green
+woad, which they allege is far better than the woad of St Michael or of
+Tercera.
+
+The 8th of May we came to Tercera, where we found a Portuguese ship, and
+next morning we saw bearing down, upon us, a great ship and two
+caravels, which we judged to belong to the royal navy of Portugal, as
+they really were, and therefore made ready for our defence. The large
+ship was a galliass, of about 400 tons and 300 men, well appointed with
+brass guns both large and small, some of their shot being as large as a
+mans head; and the two caravels were both well appointed in men and
+ammunition of war. As soon as they were within shot of us, they waved us
+amain with their swords as if in defiance, and as we kept our course
+they fired at us briskly, while we prepared as well as we could for our
+defence. The great ship gave us a whole broadside, besides firing four
+of her greatest guns which were in her stern, by which some of our men
+were hurt, while we did our best to answer their fire. At this time two
+other caravels came from shore to join them, and two pinnaces or boats
+full of men, whom they put on board the great ship, and then returned to
+the shore with only two men in each. The ship and caravels gave us three
+attacks the first day, and when night came they ceased firing, yet kept
+hard by us all night, during which we were busily employed knotting and
+spicing our ropes and strengthening our bulwarks.
+
+Next day the Portuguese were joined by four great caravels or armadas,
+three of which were not less than 100 tons each, the fourth being
+smaller, but all well armed and full of men. All these came up against
+us, in the admiral or Castle of Comfort, and we judged that one of the
+caravels meant to lay us on board, as we could see them preparing their
+false nettings and all other things for that purpose, for which the
+galliasse came up on our larboard side, and the caravel on our
+starboard. Perceiving their intention, we got all our guns ready with
+bar-shot, chain-shot, and grape; and as soon as they came up, and had
+fired off their guns at us, thinking to lay us on board, we gave them
+such a hearty salutation on both sides of us, that they were both glad
+to fall astern, where they continued for two or three hours, there being
+very little wind. Then our small bark the George came up to confer with
+us, and as the Portuguese ships and caravels were coming up again to
+attack us, the George, while endeavouring to get astern of us, fell to
+leeward, and was so long of filling her sails for want of wind, that the
+enemy got up to us, and she got into the middle of them, being unable to
+fetch us. Then five of the caravels assailed her all round about, yet
+she defended herself bravely against them all. The great ship and one
+caravel came to us and fought us all day. The May-flower being well to
+windward, took the benefit of that circumstance, and kept close hauled
+all that day, but would not come near us. When night came, the enemy
+ceased firing, yet followed us all night. During these repeated attacks
+we had some men slain and several wounded, and our tackle much injured;
+yet we did our best endeavour to repair all things, resolving to defend
+ourselves manfully, putting our trust in God. In the night the
+May-flower came up to us, on which our captain requested they would
+spare us half a dozen fresh men, but they would not, and bore away
+again.
+
+Next morning, the enemy seeing us at a distance from one another, came
+up against us with a great noise of hooping and hallooing, as if
+resolved to board or sink us; yet although our company was small, lest
+they might think us any way dismayed, we answered their shouts, and
+waved upon them to board us if they durst, but they did not venture.
+This day they gave us four several assaults; but at night they forsook
+us, desisting with shame from the fight which they had begun with pride.
+We had some leaks in our ship from shot holes, which we stopped with all
+speed, after which we took some rest after our long hard labour. In the
+morning the Mayflower joined, and sent six of her men on board us, which
+gave us much relief, and we sent them four of our wounded men.
+
+We now directed our course for England, and by the 2d of June came into
+soundings off the Lizard. On the 3d we fell in with a Portuguese ship,
+the captain of which came on board our admiral, saying that he was laden
+with sugar and cotton. Our merchants shewed him five negroes we had,
+asking him to buy them, which he agreed to do for 40 chests of sugar,
+which were very small, not containing above 26 loaves each. While they
+were delivering the sugar, we saw a large ship and a small one bearing
+down upon us, which our captain supposed to be men of war or rovers, on
+which he desired the Portuguese to take back their sugars, meaning to
+prepare for defence. But the Portuguese earnestly entreated our captain
+not to forsake him, and promised to give him ten chests of sugar in
+addition to the bargain, if we would defend him. To this our captain
+consented, and the rovers seeing that we were not afraid of them, let us
+alone. Next morning two others came up, but on seeing that we did not
+attempt to avoid them, they left us also. The 5th of June we got sight
+of the Start, and about noon were abreast of Lyme bay, where we sounded
+in 35 fathoms water. Next day we came in at the Needles, and anchored at
+a place called Meadhole, under the isle of Wight; from whence we sailed
+to Southampton, where our voyage ended.
+
+
+SECTION XIII.
+
+_Embassy of Mr Edmund Hogan to Morocco in 1577, written by
+himself_.[297]
+
+
+Though not exactly belonging to the subject of the present chapter, yet
+as given by Hakluyt along with the early voyages to Guinea, it has been
+thought proper to be inserted in this place. According to Hakluyt, Mr
+Hogan was one of the sworn esquires of the person to Queen Elizabeth, by
+whom he was sent ambassador to Muley Abdulmeleck, emperor of Morocco and
+king of Fez.--_Hakl_.
+
+[Footnote 297: Hakluyt, II. 541.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+I Edmund Hogan, being appointed ambassador from her majesty the queen to
+the emperor and king Muley Abdulmeleck, departed from London with my
+company and servants on the 22d of April 1577; and embarking in the good
+ship called the Gallion of London, I arrived at Azafi, a port in
+Barbary, on the 21st of May. I immediately sent Leonell Edgerton on
+shore, with my letters to the care of John Williams and John Bampton,
+who dispatched a _trottero_ or courier to Morocco, to learn the emperors
+pleasure respecting my repair to his court. They with all speed gave the
+king notice of it[298]; who, being much satisfied with the intelligence,
+sent next day some of his officers and soldiers to Azafi, with tents and
+other necessaries, so that these captains, together with John Bampton,
+Robert Washborne, and Robert Lion, came late on Whitsunday night to
+Azafi. Having written in my letter, that I would not land till I knew
+the kings pleasure, I remained on board till their arrival; but I caused
+some of the goods to be landed to lighten the ship.
+
+[Footnote 298: It would appear that Williams and Bampton were resident
+at the city of Morocco.--E.]
+
+The 22d of May the Make-speed arrived in the road: and on the 27th,
+being Whitsunday, John Bampton came on board the Gallion with others in
+his company, giving me to understand that the king was rejoiced at my
+safe arrival from the queen of England, and that for my safe conduct he
+had sent four captains and 100 soldiers, together with a horse and
+furniture on which the king was in use to ride. I accordingly landed
+with my suite consisting of ten persons, three of whom were trumpeters.
+The four English ships in the harbour were dressed up to the best
+advantage, and shot off all their ordnance, to the value of twenty marks
+in powder. On coming ashore, I found all the soldiers drawn up on
+horseback, the captains and the governor of the town standing close to
+the water side to receive me, with a jennet belonging to the king for my
+use. They expressed the great satisfaction of their sovereign, at my
+arrival from the queen my mistress, and that they were appointed by the
+king to attend upon me, it being his pleasure that I should remain five
+or six days on shore, to refresh myself before commencing my journey.
+Having mounted the jennet, they conducted me through the town to a fair
+field, where a tent was provided for me, having the ground spread with
+Turkey carpets. The castle discharged a peal of ordnance, and every
+thing necessary was brought to my tent, where I had convenient table and
+lodging, and had other tents for the accommodation of my servants. The
+soldiers environed the tents, and kept watch as long as I remained
+there.
+
+Although I sought a speedier dispatch, I could not be permitted to begin
+my journey till Wednesday the 2d of June, when I mounted towards
+evening, and travelled about ten miles to the first place on the road
+where water was to be had, and there pitched our tents till next
+morning[299]. The 3d we began our journey early, and travelled till ten
+o'clock, when we halted till four, at which time we resumed our journey,
+travelling as long as we had light, making about 26 miles in all that
+day. The 4th being Friday, we travelled in the same manner about 28
+miles, and pitched our tents beside a river, about six wiles from the
+city of Morocco. Immediately afterwards, all the English and French
+merchants came on horseback to visit me, and before night there came an
+_alcayde_ from the king, with 50 men and several mules laden with
+provisions, to make a banquet for my supper, bringing a message from the
+king, expressing how glad he was to hear from the queen of England, and
+that it was his intention to receive me more honourably than ever
+Christian had been before at the court of Morocco. He desired also to
+know at what time I proposed to come next day into his city, as he was
+resolved that all the Christians, and also his own nobles should meet
+me. He desired likewise that John Bampton should wait upon him early
+next morning, which he did accordingly.
+
+[Footnote 299: Having no inns in Barbary, travellers have to encamp or
+lodge in the open fields where they can find water.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+About seven o'clock the next morning, I moved towards the city,
+accompanied by the English and French merchants, and a great number of
+soldiers; and by the time I had gone about two miles, I was met by all
+the Spanish and Portuguese Christians, which I knew was more owing to
+the kings commands than of their own good will,[300] for some of them,
+though they spoke me fair, hung down their heads like dogs, especially
+the Portuguese, and I behaved to them accordingly. When I had arrived
+within two miles of the city, John Bampton rejoined me, expressing that
+the king was so glad of my arrival, that he knew not how sufficiently to
+shew his good will towards the queen and her realm. His counsellors met
+me without the gates; and on entering the city some of the kings footmen
+and guards were placed on both sides of my horse, and in this manner I
+was conducted to the palace. The king sat in his chair of state, having
+his counsellors about him, both Moors and _Elchies_; and, according to
+his order previously given me, I declared my message to him in the
+Spanish language, and delivered her majestys letters. All that I spoke
+at this time in Spanish, he caused one of his _Elchies_ to interpret to
+the Moors who were present in the _Larbe_ tongue. When this was done, he
+answered me in Spanish, returning great thanks to the queen my mistress,
+for my mission, and offering himself and country to be at her majesty's
+disposal; after which he commanded some of his counsellors to conduct me
+to my lodging, which was at no great distance from the court. The house
+appointed for me was very good according to the fashion of the country,
+and was every day furnished with all kinds of provisions at the kings
+charge.
+
+[Footnote 300: The Spaniards and Portuguese were commanded by the king,
+on pain of death, to meet the English ambassador.--Hakluyt.]
+
+I was sent for again to court that same night, and had a conference with
+the king for the space of about two hours, when I declared to him the
+particulars of what had been given me in charge by the queen, and found
+him perfectly willing to oblige her majesty, and not to urge her with
+any demands that might not conveniently be complied with, well knowing
+that his country might be better supplied from England with such things
+as it stood in need of, than England from his country. He likewise
+informed me, that the king of Spain had sent demanding a licence to send
+an ambassador to him, and had strongly urged him not to give credence or
+entertainment to any ambassador that might come from the queen of
+England: "Yet," said he, "I know well what the king of Spain is, and
+what the queen of England and her realm; for I neither like him nor his
+religion, being so governed by the inquisition that he can do nothing of
+himself; wherefore, when his ambassador comes upon the licence I have
+given, he will see how little account I make of him and Spain, and how
+greatly I shall honour you for the sake of the queen of England. He
+shall not come into my presence, as you have done and shall daily; for I
+mean to accept of you as a companion and one of my household, whereas he
+shall wait twenty days after he has delivered his message."
+
+At the end of this speech I delivered him the letters of Sir Thomas
+Gresham; upon which he took me by the hand, and led me down a long court
+to a palace, past which there ran a fair fountain of water, and sitting
+down in a chair, he commanded me to sit upon another, and sent for such
+simple musicians as he had to entertain me. I then presented him with a
+great bass lute, which he thankfully accepted, and expressed a desire to
+hear when he might expect the musicians: I told him great care had been
+taken to provide them, and I did not doubt that they would come out in
+the first ship after my return. He is willing to give them good
+entertainment, with lodgings and provisions, and to let them live
+according to their own law and conscience, as indeed he urges, no one to
+the contrary. He conducts himself greatly by the fear of God, and I
+found him well read in the scriptures both of the old and new testament,
+bearing a greater affection for our nation than any other, because that
+our religion forbids the worship of images; and indeed the Moors call
+him the Christian king. That same night[301] I continued with him till
+twelve o'clock, and he seemed to have taken a great liking for me, as
+he took from his girdle a short dagger set with 200 stones, rubies and
+turquoises, which he presented to me, after which I was conducted back
+to my lodgings.
+
+[Footnote 301: In the original this is said to have been the 1st of
+June; but from what has gone before, that date must necessarily be
+erroneous; it could not be before the 5th of June, on which day he
+appears to have entered Morocco in he morning.--E.]
+
+Next day being Sunday, which he knew was our Sabbath, he allowed me to
+remain at home; but he sent for me on the afternoon of Monday, when I
+had a conference with him, and was entertained with music. He likewise
+sent for me on Tuesday by three o'clock, when I found him in his garden
+laid upon a silk bed, as he complained of a sore leg. Yet after a long
+conference, he walked with me into another orchard, having a fine
+banqueting-house and a large piece of water, in which was a new galley.
+He took me on board the galley, and for the space of two or three hours,
+shewed me what great experience he had in the management of gallies, in
+which he said he had exercised himself for eighteen years of his youth.
+After supper he shewed me his horses, and other matters about his house.
+From that time I did not see him, as he was confined with his sore leg,
+yet he sent messages to me every day. I was sent for to him again on the
+13th of June, about six in the evening, and continued with him till
+midnight, conferring about her majestys commission, and with regard to
+the good usage of our merchants trading in his dominions. He said that
+he would even do more than was asked for the queen and her subjects, who
+might all come to his ports in perfect security, and trade in every part
+of his dominions, likewise that they should at all times freely have
+water and provisions, and in times of war might bring in the ships taken
+from our enemies, and either sell them there, or freely depart at their
+pleasure. Likewise that all English ships, either passing along his
+coast of Barbary, or going through the straits into the Mediterranean or
+Levant sea, should have safe conducts to pass freely to the dominions of
+the Turks or of Algiers, as well as to his own. And he engaged to write
+to the great Turk and the king of Algiers to use our ships and goods in
+a friendly manner. Also, that if any Englishmen should be hereafter made
+captives and brought into his dominions, that they should on no account
+be sold as slaves. Whereupon, declaring the acceptance by her majesty of
+these conditions, to confirm the intercourse of trade between our
+merchants and his dominions, I engaged to satisfy him with such
+commodities as he stood in need of, to furnish the wants of his country
+in all kinds of merchandize, so that he might not require any thing from
+her majesty contrary to her honour and law, or in breach of league and
+amity with the Christian princes her neighbours. That same night I
+presented him with a case of combs[302], and requested his majesty to
+give orders for the lading of the ships back again, as I found there was
+very little saltpetre in the hands of John Bampton. He answered that I
+should have all the aid in his power, as he expected there was some
+store in his house at _Sus,_ and that the mountaineers had much in
+readiness. On my request that he would send orders for that to be
+brought, he promised to do so.
+
+[Footnote 302: This seems rather a singular present to the emperor of
+Morocco.--E.]
+
+The 18th day I was with him again and continued till night, when he
+shewed me his house, with the amusement of duck-hunting with water
+spaniels, and bull-baiting with English dogs. At this time I reminded
+him of sending to _Sus_ about the saltpetre, which he engaged to do; and
+on the 21st the Alcayde Mammie departed on that errand, accompanied by
+Lionel Edgerton and Rowland Guy, carrying with them, on our account and
+the king's, letters to his brother Muley Hamet, the Alcayde Shavan, and
+the viceroy. The 23d the king sent me out of Morocco with a guard, and
+accompanied by the Alcayde Mahomet, to see his garden called
+Shersbonare; and at night of the 24th I was sent for to court to see a
+Morris dance, and a play acted by his _Elchies._ He promised me an
+audience on the next day being Tuesday, but put it off till Thursday,
+when he sent for me after supper, when the Alcaydes Rodwan and Gowry
+were appointed to confer with me; but after a short conversation, I
+requested to be admitted to the king to receive my dispatch. On being
+admitted, I preferred two bills, or requests, of John Bampton respecting
+the provision of saltpetre, also two other petitions for the quiet trade
+of our English merchants, together with petitions or requests for the
+sugars which had been agreed to be made by the Jews, both for the debts
+they had already incurred to our merchants, and those they might incur
+hereafter, as likewise for the proper regulation of the ingenios. I also
+moved him to give orders for the saltpetre and other affairs that had
+been before agreed upon, which he referred me to be settled by the two
+alcaydes. But on Friday the alcaydes could not attend to my affairs, and
+on Saturday Rodwan fell sick. So on Sunday I again made application to
+the king, and that afternoon I was sent for to confer upon the bargain
+with the alcaydes and others, but we could not agree.
+
+Upon Tuesday I wrote a letter to the king for my dispatch, and was
+called again to court that afternoon, when I referred all things to the
+king, accepting his offer of saltpetre. That night the king took me
+again into his galley, when the water spaniels hunted the duck. On
+Thursday I was appointed to weigh the 300 gross quintals of saltpetre;
+and that afternoon the _tabybe_ came to my lodging, to inform me that
+the king was offended with John Bampton for various reasons. Late on
+Sunday night, being the 7th of July, I got the king to forgive all to
+John Bampton, and he promised to give me another audience on Monday.
+Upon Tuesday I wrote to the king for my dispatch, when he sent _Fray
+Lewes_ to me, who said he had orders to write them out. Upon Wednesday I
+wrote again, and the king sent me word that I should come on Thursday to
+receive my dispatches, so that I might depart without fail on Friday the
+12th of July.
+
+According to the kings appointment I went to court on Friday, when all
+the demands I had made were granted, and all the privileges which had
+been requested on behalf of the English merchants were yielded to with
+great favour and readiness. As the Jews resident in Morocco were
+indebted in large sums to our men, the emperor issued orders that all
+these should be paid in full without delay or excuse. Thus at length I
+was dismissed with great honour and special favour, such as had not
+ordinarily been shewn to other Christian ambassadors. Respecting the
+private affairs treated on between her majesty and the emperor, I had
+letters to satisfy her highness in the same. To conclude, having the
+same honourable escort for my return from court that I had on my way
+there, I embarked with my suite, and arrived soon after in England, when
+I repaired to court, and ended my embassy to her majestys satisfaction,
+by giving a relation of my services.
+
+
+
+SECTION XIV.
+
+_Embassy of Henry Roberts from Queen Elizabeth to Morocco in 1585,
+written by himself_[303].
+
+
+Like the former ambassador, Edmund Hogan, Mr Henry Roberts was one of
+the sworn esquires of the person to Elizabeth queen of England, and the
+following brief relation of his embassy, according to Hakluyt, was
+written by himself. This, like the former, does not properly belong to
+the present portion of our arrangement, but seemed necessary to be
+inserted in this place, however anomalous, as an early record of the
+attentions of the English government to extend the commerce and
+navigation of England, the sinews of our strength, and the bulwark of
+our glorious constitution. Mr Roberts appears to have spent three years
+and five months on this embassy, leaving London on the 14th August 1585,
+and returning to the same place on the 12th January 1589, having, in the
+words of Hakluyt, remained at Morocco as _lieger_, or resident, during
+upwards of three years.
+
+[Footnote 303: Hakluyt, II 602.]
+
+In the commencement of this brief notice, Mr Roberts mentions the
+occasion of his embassy as proceeding from the incorporation of a
+company of merchants, for carrying on an exclusive trade from England to
+Barbary; upon which event he was appointed her majestys messenger and
+agent to the emperor of Morocco, for the furtherance of the affairs of
+that company. It is not our intention to load our work with copies of
+formal patents and diplomatic papers; yet in the present instance it may
+not be amiss to give an abridgment of the patent to the Barbary company,
+as an instance of the mistaken principles of policy on which the early
+foundations of English commerce were attempted.--E.
+
+_Letters Patent and Privileges granted in 1585 by Queen Elizabeth, to
+certain Noblemen and Merchants of London, for a Trade to Barbary.[304]_
+
+[Footnote 304: Hakluyt, II. 599.]
+
+Elizabeth, &c.--Whereas our right trusty and well beloved counsellors,
+Ambrose earl of Warwick, and Robert earl of Leicester, and also our
+loving and natural subjects Thomas Starkie, &c.[305] all merchants of
+London, now trading into the country of Barbary, in the parts of Africa
+under the government of Mulley Hamet Sheriffe, emperor of Morocco, and
+king of Fez and Sus, have made it evident to us that they have sustained
+great and grievous losses, and are likely to sustain greater if it
+should not be prevented. In tender consideration whereof, and because
+diverse merchandize of the same countries are very necessary and
+convenient for the use and defence of this our realm, &c. Wherefore we
+give and grant to the said earls, &c. by themselves, their factors or
+servants, and none others, for and during the space of twelve years, the
+whole freedom and liberty of the said trade, any law, &c. to the
+contrary in any way notwithstanding. The said trade to be free of all
+customs, subsidies or other duties, during the said period to us, our
+heirs and successors, &c. Witness ourself at Westminster, the 5th July,
+in the 27th year of our reign.
+
+[Footnote 305: Here are enumerated forty merchants of London, as members
+of the Barbary company in conjunction with the two earls.--E.]
+
+
+_Narrative._
+
+Upon an incorporation granted to the company of Barbary merchants
+resident in London, I Henry Roberts, one of her majesties sworn esquires
+of her person, was appointed messenger and agent from her highness unto
+Mulley Hamet Sheriffe, emperor of Morocco and king of Fez and Sus. And,
+having received my commission, instructions, and her majesties letters,
+I departed from London, the 14th August 1585, in a tall ship called the
+Ascension, in company with the Minion and Hopewell. We arrived in safety
+at the port of Azaffi in Barbary on the 14th of September following. The
+alcaide of the town, who is the kings chief officer there, or as it were
+mayor of the place, received me with all civility and honour, according
+to the custom of the country, and lodged me in the best house in the
+town. From thence I dispatched a messenger, which in their language is
+called a _trottero_, to inform the emperor of my arrival; who
+immediately sent a party of soldiers for my guard and safe conduct, with
+horses for myself, and mules for my baggage and that of my company or
+suite.
+
+Accompanied by Richard Evans, Edward Salcot, and other English merchants
+resident in the country, and with my escort and baggage, I came to the
+river _Tenisist_, within four miles of the city of Morocco, and pitched
+my tents among a grove of olive trees on the banks of that river, where
+I was met by all the English merchants by themselves, and the French,
+Flemish, and various other Christians, who waited my arrival. After we
+had dined, and when the heat of the day was over, we set out about 4
+o'clock in the afternoon for the city, where I was lodged by order of
+the emperor in a fair house in the _Judaria_ or jewry, the quarter in
+which the Jews have their abode, being the best built and quietest part
+of the city.
+
+After I had rested there three days, I was introduced into the kings
+presence, to whom I delivered my message and her majesties letters, and
+was received with much civility. During three years in which I remained
+there as her majesties agent and _ligier_, or resident, I had favourable
+audiences from time to time; as, whenever I had any business, I was
+either admitted to his majesty himself or to his viceroy, the alcaide
+Breme Saphiana, a very wise and discreet person, and the principal
+officer of the court. For various good and sufficient reasons, I forbear
+to put down in writing the particulars of my service.
+
+After obtaining leave, and receiving an honourable reward from the
+emperor, I departed from his court at Morocco the 18th of August 1588,
+to a garden belonging to him called Shersbonare, where he promised I
+should only stay one day for his letters. Yet on one pretence or
+another, I was detained there till the 14th of September, always at the
+kings charges, having 40 or 50 shot attending upon me as my guard. At
+length I was conducted from thence, with every thing requisite for my
+accommodation, to the port of Santa Cruz, six days journey from Morocco,
+where our ships ordinarily take in their lading, and where I arrived on
+the 21st of that month.
+
+I remained at Santa Cruz 43 days. At length, on the 2d November, I
+embarked in company with one Marshok, a Reis or captain, a gentleman
+sent along with me by the emperor on an embassy to her majesty. After
+much foul weather at sea, we landed on new-years day 1589, at St Ives in
+Cornwal, whence we proceeded together by land to London. We were met
+without the city by 40 or 50 of the principal Barbary merchants all on
+horseback, who accompanied us by torch light into the city on Sunday the
+12th January 1589, the ambassador and myself being together in a coach.
+
+
+_Edict of the Emperor of Morocco in favour of the English, obtained by
+Henry Roberts_.
+
+In the name of the most merciful God, &c. The servant of the Supreme
+God, the conqueror in his cause, the successor appointed by God, emperor
+of the Moors, son of the emperor of the Moors, the Shariffe, the Haceny,
+whose honour and estate may God long increase and advance. This our
+imperial commandment is delivered into the hands of the English
+merchants who reside under the protection of our high court, that all
+men who see these presents may understand that our high councils will
+defend them, by the aid of God, from all that may injure or oppress them
+in any way or manner in which they shall be wronged; and that which way
+soever they may travel, no man shall take them captives in these our
+kingdoms, ports, or other places belonging to us; and that no one shall
+injure or hinder them, by laying violent hands upon them, or shall give
+occasion that they be aggrieved in any manner of way. And we charge and
+command all the officers of our ports, havens, and fortresses, and all
+who bear authority of any sort in our dominions, and likewise all our
+subjects generally of all ranks and conditions, that they shall in no
+way molest, offend, wrong, or injure them. And this our commandment
+shall remain inviolable, being registered on the middle day of the month
+Rabel of the year 996.
+
+The date of this letter agrees with the 20th of March 1587, which I,
+Abdel Rahman el Catun, interpreter for his majesty, have translated out
+of Arabic into Spanish, word for word as contained therein.[306]
+
+[Footnote 306: Besides this, Hakluyt gives copies in Spanish and English
+of a letter from Mulley Hamet to the Earl of Leicester, and of a letter
+from Queen Elizabeth to Mulley Hamet, both of which are merely
+complimentary, or relate to unexplained circumstances respecting one
+John Herman an English rebel, whose punishment is required from the
+emperor of Morocco. He had probably contraveened the exclusive
+privileges of the Barbary company, by trading in Morocco.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XV.
+
+_Voyage to Benin beyond Guinea in 1588, by James Welsh_[307].
+
+
+This and the subsequent voyage to Benin were fitted out by Messrs Bird
+and Newton, merchants of London, in which a ship of 100 tons called the
+Richard of Arundel and a pinnace were employed, under the chief command
+of James Welsh, who wrote the account of both voyages--_Astley_.
+
+[Footnote 307: Hakluyt, II. 613. Astley, I. 199.]
+
+It seems not improbable that these voyages were intended as an evasion
+of an exclusive privilege granted in May 1588 by Queen Elizabeth, for
+trade to the rivers Senegal and Gambia, called Senega and Gambra in
+Hakluyt. The boundaries of this exclusive trade are described as
+beginning at the northermost part of the river Senegal, and from and
+within that river all along the coast of Guinea into the southermost
+part of the river Gambia, and within that river also; and the reason
+assigned for this exclusive grant is, that the patentees had already
+made one voyage to these parts, and that the enterprizing a new trade
+must be attended with considerable hazard and expence. The patentees
+were several merchants of Exeter and other parts of Devonshire, and one
+merchant of London, who had been instigated by certain Portuguese
+resident in England to engage in that trade, and the privilege is
+extended to ten years.[308]--E.
+
+[Footnote 308: See the patent at large in Hakluyt, II. 610. London
+edition, 1810.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+On the 12th October 1588, weighing anchor from Ratcliff we dropped down
+to Blackwall, whence we sailed next day; but owing to contrary winds we
+did not reach Plymouth till the 25th October, where we had to remain for
+want of a fair wind to the 14th of December, when we set sail and passed
+the Lizard that night. Thursday the 2d January 1589, we had sight of the
+land near Rio del Oro, making our lat. 22 deg. 47' N. The 3d we saw Cape
+Barbas, distant 5 leagues S.E. The 4th in the morning we had sight of
+the stars called the _Croziers_. The 7th we had sight of Cape Verd,
+making our lat. 14 deg. 43' at 4 leagues off shore. Friday 17th Cape Mount
+bore from us N.N.E., when we sounded and had 50 fathoms water with a
+black ouse, and at 2 P.M. it bore N.N.W. 8 leagues distant, when Cape
+Misurado bore E. by S. Here the current sets E.S.E. along shore, and at
+midnight we had 26 fathoms on black ouse. The 18th in the morning we
+were athwart a land much resembling Cabo Verde, about 9 leagues beyond
+Cape Misurado. It is a saddle-backed hill, and there are four or five
+one after the other; and 7 leagues farther south we saw a row of
+saddle-backed hills, all the land from Cape Misurado having many
+mountains. The 19th we were off Rio de Sestos, and the 20th Cape Baixos
+was N. by W. 4 leagues distant. In the afternoon a canoe came off with
+three negroes from a place they called Tabanoo. Towards evening we were
+athwart an island, and saw many small islands or rocks to the southward,
+the current setting from the south. We sounded and had 35 fathoms. The
+21st we had a flat hill bearing N.N.E. being 4 leagues from shore; and
+at 2 P.M. we spoke a French ship riding near a place called _Ratere_,
+there being another place hard bye called Crua[309]. The Frenchman
+carried a letter from us on shore for Mr Newton; and as we lay to while
+writing the letter, the current set us a good space along shore to the
+S.S.E. The 25th we were in the bight of a bay to the west of Cape
+Three-points, the current setting E.N.E. The 31st January we were off
+the middle part of Cape Three-points at 7 in the morning, the current
+setting to the E. Saturday 1st February we were off a round foreland,
+which I considered to be the easternmost part of Cape Three-points,
+within which foreland was a great bay and an island in the bay.
+
+[Footnote 309: Krou Sestra, nearly in lat. 5 deg. N.]
+
+The 2nd February we were off the castle of Mina; and when the third
+glass of the watch was run out, we spied under our larboard quarter one
+of their boats with some negroes and one Portuguese, who would not come
+on board. Over the castle upon some high rocks, we saw what we thought
+to be two watch houses, which were very white. At this time our course
+was E.N.E. The 4th in the morning we were athwart a great hill, behind
+which within the land were other high rugged hills, which I reckoned
+were little short of _Monte Redondo_, at which time I reckoned we were
+20 leagues E.N.E. from the castle of Mina; and at 11 o'clock A.M. I saw
+two hills within the land, 7 leagues by estimation beyond the former
+hills. At this place there is a bay, having another hill at its east
+extremity, beyond which the land is very low. We went this day E. N E.
+and E. by N. 22 leagues, and then E. along shore. The 6th we were short
+of Villa Longa, and there we met a Portuguese caravel. The 7th, being a
+fair temperate day, we rode all day before Villa Longa, whence we sailed
+on the 8th, and 10 leagues from thence we anchored again, and remained
+all night in 10 fathoms water. The 9th we sailed again, all along the
+shore being clothed with thick woods, and in the afternoon we were
+athwart a river[310], to the eastward of which a little way was a great
+high bushy tree which seemed to have no leaves. The 10th we sailed E.
+and E. by S. 14 leagues along shore, the whole coast being so thick of
+woods that in my judgment a person would have much difficulty in passing
+through them. Towards night we anchored in 7 fathoms. The 11th we sailed
+E. by S. and 3 leagues from shore we had only 5 fathoms water, all the
+wood along shore being as even as if it had been clipt by gardeners
+sheers. After running 2 leagues, we saw a high tuft of trees on a brow
+of land like the head of a porpoise. A league farther on we had a very
+low head land full of trees; and a great way from the land we had very
+shallow water, on which we hauled off to seaward to get deeper water,
+and then anchored in 5 fathoms, athwart the mouth of the river _Jayo_.
+The 12th we sent the pinnace and the boat to land with the merchants,
+and they did not return till next morning. The shallowest part of this
+river is toward the west, where there is only 4-1/2 fathoms, and it is
+very broad.
+
+[Footnote 310: Rio de Lagoa--_Hakluyt_.--Probably that now called Lagos,
+in long. 2 deg. 40' E. from Greenwich, in the Bight of Benin.--E.]
+
+Thursday the 13th we set sail going S.S.E. along shore, the trees being
+wonderfully even, the east shore being higher than the west shore[311].
+After sailing 18 leagues we had sight of a great river, called Rio de
+Benin, off which we anchored in 3-1/2 fathoms, the sea being here very
+shallow two leagues from the main[312]. The 15th we sent the pinnace and
+boat with the merchants into the river; and as we rode in shallow water,
+we made sail with the starboard tacks aboard till we came to 5 fathoms
+water, where we anchored having the current to the westwards. The west
+part of the land was high-browed, much like the head of a Gurnard, and
+the eastermost land was lower, having three tufts of trees like stacks
+of corn. Next day we only saw two of these trees, having removed more to
+the eastwards. We rode here from the 14th of February till the 14th of
+April, having the wind always at S.W.
+
+[Footnote 311: This is only to be understood as implying that the shore
+was now higher in the eastern part of the voyage along the coast, than
+formerly to the west on the coast of Mina; the east shore and the west
+shore referring to the bight or bay of Benin.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 312: It is probable that the two rivers mentioned in the text
+under the names of Rio de Lagoa and Rio de Benin, are those now called
+the Lagos creek and the great river Formosa, both in the negro kingdom
+of Benin.--E.]
+
+The 17th February our merchants weighed their goods and put them aboard
+the pinnace to go into the river, on which day there came a great
+current out of the river setting to the westwards. The 16th March our
+pinnace came on board with Anthony Ingram the chief factor, bringing 94
+bags of pepper and 28 elephants teeth. All his company were sick. The
+19th our pinnace went again into the river, having the purser and
+surgeon on board; and the 25th we sent the boat up the river again. The
+30th our pinnace came from Benin with the sorrowful news that Thomas
+Hemstead and our captain were both dead. She brought with her 159 serons
+or bags of pepper, besides elephants teeth. In all the time of our
+remaining off the river of Benin, we had fair and temperate weather when
+the wind was at S.W. from the sea; but when the wind blew at N. and N.E.
+from the land, it then rained with thunder and lightning, and the
+weather was intemperately hot.
+
+The 13th of April 1589, we began our voyage homeward, and the 27th of
+July we spoke a ship called the Port belonging to London, giving us good
+news of England. The 9th September we put into Catwater, where we
+remained till the 28th, owing to sickness and want of men. The 29th we
+sailed from Plymouth, and arrived at London on the 2d October 1589.
+
+The commodities we carried out in this, voyage were linens and woollen
+cloths, iron work of sundry kinds, manillios or bracelets of copper,
+glass beads and coral. Those we brought home were pepper, elephants
+teeth, palm oil, cloth made of cotton very curiously woven, and cloth
+made of the bark of the palm tree. Their money consists of pretty white
+shells, as they have no gold or silver. They have also great store of
+cotton. Their bread is made of certain roots called _Inamia_, as large
+as a mans arm, which when well boiled is very pleasant and light of
+digestion. On banian or fish days, our men preferred eating these roots
+with oil and vinegar to the best stock-fish[313]. There are great
+quantities of palm trees, out of which the negroes procure abundance of
+a very pleasant white wine, of which we could purchase two gallons for
+20 shells. The negroes have plenty of soap, which has the flavour of
+violets. They make very pretty mats and baskets, also spoons of ivory
+very curiously wrought with figures of birds and beasts.
+
+[Footnote 313: It is obvious that the banian or meager days, still
+continued in the British navy, are a remnant of the meager days of the
+Roman catholic times, when it was deemed a mortal sin to eat flesh.
+Stock-fish are, however now abandoned, having been found to promote
+scurvy.--E.]
+
+Upon this coast we had the most terrible thunder and lightning, which
+used to make the deck tremble under our feet, such as I never heard the
+like in any other part of the world. Before we became accustomed to it,
+we were much alarmed, but God be thanked we had no harm. The natives are
+very gentle and courteous; both men and women going naked till they are
+married, after which they wear a garment reaching from the middle down
+to the knees. Honey was so plentiful, that they used to sell our people
+earthen pots of comb full of honey, the size of two gallons for 100
+shells. They brought us also great store of oranges and plantains, which
+last is a fruit which grows on a tree, and resembles our cucumbers, but
+is very pleasant eating. It pleased God of his merciful goodness to give
+me the knowledge of a means of preserving water fresh with little cost,
+which served us six months at sea; and when we came to Plymouth it was
+much wondered at by the principal men of the town, who said there was
+not sweeter water in all Plymouth[314]. Thus God provides for his
+creatures, unto whom be praise, now and _for ever more_, amen.
+
+[Footnote 314: This preservative is wrought by casting a handful of
+bay-salt into a hogshead of water, as the author told me.--_Hakluyt_.
+
+The Thames water soon putrifies on board ships in long voyages; but
+afterwards throws down a sediment and becomes perfectly sweet pleasant
+and wholesome; insomuch that it is often bought from ships which have
+been to India and back. Putrid water at sea is purified or rendered
+comparatively sweet by forcing streams of air through it by what is
+called an air pump. Water may be preserved sweet on long voyages, or
+restored when putrid, by means of pounded charcoal.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION XVI.
+
+_Supplement to the foregoing Voyage, in a Letter from Anthony Ingram the
+chief Factor, written from Plymouth to the Owners, dated 9th September,
+the day of arriving at Plymouth_[315].
+
+
+
+Worshipful Sirs! The account of our whole proceedings in this voyage
+would require more time than I have, and a person in better health than
+I am at present, so that I trust you will pardon me till I get to
+London.
+
+[Footnote 315: Hakluyt, II. 616. Astley, I. 202.]
+
+Departing from London in December 1588, we arrived at our destined port
+of Benin on the 14th of February following, where we found not water
+enough to carry our ship over the bar, so that we left her without in
+the road. We put the chiefest of our merchandise into the pinnace and
+ships boat, in which we went up the river to a place called _Goto_[316],
+where we arrived on the 20th, that place being the nearest to Benin to
+which we could go by water. From thence we sent negro messengers to
+certify the king of our arrival, and the object of our coming. These
+messengers returned on the 22d with a nobleman to conduct us to the city
+of Benin, and with 200 negroes to carry our merchandise. On the 23d we
+delivered our commodities to the kings factor, and the 25th we came to
+the great city of Benin, where we were well entertained. The 26th we
+went to court to confer with the king, but by reason of a solemn
+festival then holding we could not see him; yet we spoke with his
+_veador_, or chief man who deals with the Christians, who assured us
+that we should have every thing according to our desires, both in regard
+to pepper and elephants teeth.
+
+[Footnote 316: Goto or Gato is a negro town on the northern branch of
+the Rio Formoso, about 45 miles in a straight line from the mouth of the
+river, and about 85 miles short of the town of Benin. This branch or
+creek is probably the river of Benin of the text.--E.]
+
+We were admitted into the kings presence on the 1st of March, who gave
+us like friendly assurances respecting our trade; and next day we went
+again to court, when the _veador_ shewed us a basket of green pepper and
+another of dry in the stalks. We desired to have it plucked from the
+stalks and made clean, which he said would require some time to get
+done, but should be executed to our satisfaction, and that by next year
+it should be all in readiness for us, as we had now come unexpectedly to
+their country, to which no Christians had traded for pepper in the reign
+of the present king. Next day they sent us 12 baskets full, and
+continued to send more daily till the 9th March, by which time we had
+made up 64 serons of pepper and 28 elephants teeth. By this time, as our
+constitutions were unused to the climate of Benin, all of us were seized
+with fevers; upon which the captain sent me down to Goto with the goods
+we had collected. On my arrival there, I found all the men belonging to
+our pinnace sick, so that they were unable to convey the pinnace and
+goods to the ship; but fortunately the boat came up to Goto from the
+ship within two hours after my arrival, to see what we were about, so
+that I put the goods into the boat and went down to the ship: But by the
+time I had got on board several of our men died, among whom were Mr
+Benson, the copper, and the carpenter, with three or four more, and I
+was in so weak a state as to be unable to return to Benin. I therefore
+sent up Samuel Dunne and the surgeon, that he might let blood of them if
+it were thought adviseable; but on their arrival they found the captain
+and your son William Bird both dead, and Thomas Hempstead was so very
+weak that he died two days after.
+
+In this sorrowful state of affairs they returned with all speed to the
+ship, with such pepper and elephants teeth as they had got, as will
+appear by the cargo. At their coming away; the _veador_ told them he
+would use all possible expedition to procure them more goods if they
+would remain longer; but the sickness so increased among us, that by the
+time our men came back we had so many sick and dead, that we looked to
+lose our ship, lives, country, and all. We were so reduced that it was
+with much difficulty we were able to heave our anchors; but by Gods
+blessing we got them up and put to sea, leaving our pinnace behind, on
+the 13th of April. After which our men began to recover and gather
+strength. Sailing between the Cape de Verd islands and the Main, we came
+to the Azores on the 25th of July; and here our men began again to fall
+sick, and several died, among whom was Samuel Dunn, those who remained
+alive being in a sad state. In the midst of our distress, it pleased God
+that we should meet your ship the _Barke Burre_ on this side the North
+Cape, which not only kept company with us, but sent us six fresh men on
+board, without whose assistance we must have been in a sad condition. By
+this providential aid we are now arrived at Plymouth, this 9th
+September; and, for want of better health at this present. I must refer
+you for farther particulars till my arrival in London.--Yours to
+command,
+
+ANTHONY INGRAM.
+
+
+SECTION XVII.
+
+_Second Voyage of James Welsh to Benin, in 1590_[317].
+
+
+In the employment of the same merchants, John Bird and John Newton, and
+with the same ship as in the former voyage, the Richard of Arundel,
+accompanied by a small pinnace, we set sail from Ratclif on the 3d
+September 1590, and came to Plymouth Sound on the 18th of that month. We
+put to sea again on the 22d, and on the 14th October got sight of
+Fuertaventura, one of the Canary islands, which appeared very rugged as
+we sailed past. The 16th of October, in the lat. of 24 deg. 9' N. we met a
+prodigious hollow sea, such as I had never seen before on this coast;
+and this day a monstrous great fish, which I think is called a
+_gobarto_[318], put up his head to the steep-tubs where the cook was
+shifting the victuals, whom I thought the fish would have carried away.
+The 21st, being in lat. 18 deg. N. we had a _counter-sea_ from the north,
+having in the same latitude, on our last voyage, encountered a similar
+sea from the south, both times in very calm weather. The 24th we had
+sight of Cape Verd, and next day had a great hollow sea from the north,
+a common sign that the wind will be northerly, and so it proved. The
+15th November, when in lat. 6 deg. 42' N. we met three currents from west to
+north-west, one after the other, with the interval of an hour between
+each. The 18th we had two other great currents from S.W. The 20th we saw
+another from N.E. The 24th we had a great current from S.S.W. and at 6
+P.M. we had three currents more. The 27th we reckoned to have gone 2-1/2
+leagues every watch, but found that we had only made _one_ league every
+watch for the last 24 hours, occasioned by heavy billows and a swift
+current still from the south. The 5th December, on setting the watch, we
+cast about and lay E.N.E. and N.E. and here in lat. 5 deg. 30' our pinnace
+lost us wilfully. The 7th, at sunset, we saw a great black spot on the
+sun; and on the 8th, both at rising and setting we saw the like, the
+spot appearing about the size of a shilling. We were then in lat. 5 deg. N.
+and still had heavy billows from the south.
+
+[Footnote 317: Hakluyt, II. 618. Astley, I. 203.]
+
+[Footnote 318: In a side note, Astley conjectures this to have been a
+great shark.]
+
+We sounded on the 14th December, having 15 fathoms on coarse red sand,
+two leagues from shore, the current setting S.E. along shore, and still
+we had heavy billows from the south. The 15th we were athwart a rock,
+somewhat like the _Mewstone_ in England, and at the distance of 2
+leagues from the rock, had ground in 27 fathoms. This rock is not above
+a mile from the shore, and a mile farther we saw another rock, the space
+between both being broken ground. We sounded off the second rock, and
+had ground at 20 fathoms on black sand. We could now see plainly that
+the rocks were not along the shore, but at some distance off to sea, and
+about 5 leagues farther south we saw a great bay, being then in lat. 4 deg.
+27' N. The 16th we met a French ship belonging to Harfleur, which robbed
+our pinnace: we sent a letter by him. This night we saw another spot on
+the sun at his going down. Towards evening we were athwart the mouth of
+a river, right over which was a high tuft of trees. The 17th we anchored
+in the mouth of the river, when we found the land to be Cape Palmas,
+there being a great ledge of rocks between us and the Cape, a league and
+half to sea, and an island off the point or foreland of the Cape. We
+then bore to the west of the Cape, and as night came on could see no
+more of the land, except that it trended inwards like a bay, in which
+there ran a stream or tide as it had been the Thames. This was on the
+change day of the moon.
+
+The 19th December, a fair temperate day, with the wind S. we sailed
+east, leaving the land astern of us to the west, all the coast appearing
+low like islands to the east of Cape Palmas, and trending inwards like a
+great bay or sound. We went east all night, and in the morning were only
+three or four leagues from shore. The 20th we were off Rio de las
+Barbas. The 21st we continued along shore; and three or four leagues
+west of Cape Three Points, I found the bay to be set deeper than it is
+laid down by four leagues. At 4 P.M. the land began to shew high, the
+first part of it being covered by palm trees. The 24th, still going
+along shore, the land was very low and full of trees to the water side.
+At noon we anchored off the Rio de Boilas, where we sent the boat
+towards the shore with our merchants, but they durst not put into the
+river, because of a heavy surf that broke continually on the bar. The
+28th we sailed along shore, and anchored at night in seven fathoms, to
+avoid being put back by a current setting from E.S.E. from _Papuas_.
+
+At noon on the 29th we were abreast of Ardrah, and there we took a
+caravel, the people belonging to which had fled to the land. She had
+nothing in her except a small quantity of palm oil and a few roots. Next
+morning our captain and merchants went to meet the Portuguese, who came
+off in a boat to speak with them. After some communing about ransoming
+the caravel, the Portuguese promised to give for her some bullocks and
+elephants teeth, and gave us then one tooth and one bullock, engaging to
+bring the rest next day. Next day being the 1st January 1591, our
+captain went a-land to speak with the Portuguese, but finding them to
+dissemble, he came on board again, when presently we unrigged the
+caravel and set her on fire before the town. We then set sail and went
+along the coast, where we saw a date tree, the like of which is not on
+all that coast, by the water side. We also fell a little aground at one
+place. Thus we went on to _Villalonga_ where we anchored. The 3d we came
+to Rio de Lagoa, or Lagos Creek, where our merchants went to land,
+finding 3 fathoms on the bar, but being late they did not go in. There
+is to the eastward of this river a date tree, higher than all the other
+trees thereabouts. Thus we went along the coast, anchoring every night,
+and all the shore was full of trees and thick woods. The morning of the
+6th was very foggy, so that we could not see the land; but it cleared up
+about three in the afternoon, when we found ourselves off the river
+Jaya; and finding the water very shallow, we bore a little out to
+seawards as we had done in the former voyage, and came to anchor in five
+fathoms. We set sail again next day, and came about noon abreast the
+river of Benin, where we anchored in four fathoms.
+
+The 10th our captain went to land with the boat at 2 P.M. All this week
+it was very foggy every day till 10 o'clock A.M. and hitherto the
+weather had been as temperate as our summer in England. This day we
+anchored in the road in 4 fathoms, the west point bearing from us E.N.E.
+The 21st, being a fair temperate day, Mr Hassald went up to the town of
+Gato to hear news of our captain. The 23d came the caravel[319] in which
+was Samuel, bringing 63 elephants teeth and three bullocks. The 28th was
+a fair temperate day, but towards night we had much rain with thunder
+and lightning. This day our boat came on board from Gato. The 24th
+February, we took in 298 serons or bags of pepper, and 4 elephants
+teeth. The 26th we put the rest of our goods on board the caravel, in
+which Mr Hassald went up to Gato. The 5th March the caravel came again,
+bringing 21 serons of pepper and 4 elephants teeth. The 9th April our
+caravel came again on board with water for our return voyage, and this
+day we lost our shallop or small boat. The 17th was a hazy and rainy
+day, and in the afternoon we saw three great water spouts, two to
+larboard and one right a-head, but by the blessing of God they came not
+to our ship. This day we took in the last of our water for sea store,
+and on the 26th we victualled our caravel to accompany us. The 27th we
+set sail on our voyage homewards.
+
+[Footnote 319: It is not mentioned how they came by this caravel.--Astl.
+I. 204. b. Probably the pinnace that attended them in the voyage, for
+the purpose of going up the shallow rivers.--E.]
+
+The 24th May we were 37 leagues south of Cape Palmas. The 1st July we
+got sight of Brava, one of the Cape Verd islands, bearing east 7 leagues
+off. The 13th August we spoke the queens ship, of which Lord Howard was
+admiral and Sir Richard Grenville vice-admiral. They made us keep
+company till the night of the 15th, lying all the time a hull in waiting
+for prizes, 30 leagues S.W. from the island of Flores. That night we got
+leave to depart, accompanied by a fliboat laden with sugar from the
+island of San Thome which had been taken by the queens ship, and of
+which my lord admiral gave me strict charge not to part with her till
+safe harboured in England. The 23d the N.E. part of the island of Corvo
+bore from us E. by S. 6 leagues distant. The 17th September we fell in
+with a ship belonging to Plymouth bound from the West Indies. Next day
+we had sight of another sail; and this day died Mr Wood one of our
+company. The 23d we spoke the Dragon belonging to my Lord Cumberland, of
+which _master_ Ivie was _maister_[320]. The 2d October we met a ship
+belonging to Newcastle coming from Newfoundland, out of which we got 300
+couple of _Newland_ fish. The 13th we put into Dartmouth, where we staid
+till the 12th December, when we sailed with a west wind, and by the
+blessing of God we anchored on the 18th December 1591, at Limehouse in
+the river Thames, where we discharged 589 sacks of pepper, 150 elephants
+teeth, and 32 barrels of palm oil.
+
+[Footnote 320: This distinction of master and maister often occurs in
+these early voyages.--Astl. I. 205. a.]
+
+The commodities we carried out on this my second voyage were, broad
+cloth, kersies, bays, linen cloth, unwrought iron, copper bracelets,
+coral, hawks bells, horse-tails, hats, and the like. This voyage was
+more comfortable to us than the former, because we had plenty of fresh
+water and that very sweet. For even yet, being the 7th June 1592, the
+water we brought out of Benin on the 1st of April 1591, is as clear and
+good as any fountain can yield. In this voyage we sailed 350 leagues
+within half a degree of the equator, where we found the weather more
+temperate than at our anchorage on the coast of Benin. Under the line we
+killed many small dolphins, and many other good fish, which were very
+refreshing to us; and the fish never forsook us till we were to the
+north of the Azores: But God be thanked we met with several ships of our
+own country, during the five months we were at sea, which were great
+comfort to us, having no consort.
+
+
+SECTION XVIII.
+
+_Voyage of Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel to the Rivers Senegal and
+Gambia adjoining to Guinea, in 1591_[321].
+
+
+PREVIOUS REMARKS [322].
+
+In virtue of her majestys most gracious charter, given in the year 1588,
+being the 30th of her reign, certain English merchants were privileged
+to trade, in and from the river of Senega or Senegal, to and in the
+river of Gambra or Gambia on the western coast of Africa. The chiefest
+places of trade on that coast, in and between these rivers are: 1.
+_Senegal_ river, where the commodities are hides, gum, elephants teeth,
+a few grains or pepper, ostrich feathers, ambergris, and some gold. 2.
+_Beseguiache_[323], a town near Cape Verd, and ---- leagues[324] from the
+river Senegal. The commodities here are small hides and a few teeth. 3.
+_Rufisque_, or _Refisca viejo_, a town 4 leagues from Beseguiache,
+producing small hides and a few teeth now and then. 4. _Palmerin_, a
+town 2 leagues from Rufisque[325], having small hides and a few
+elephants teeth occasionally. 5. _Porto d'Ally_, or _Portudale_, a town
+5 leagues from Palmerin, having small hides, teeth, ambergris, and a
+little gold; and many Portuguese are there. 6. _Candimal_, a town half a
+league from Portudale, having small hides and a few teeth now and then.
+7. _Palmerin_[326], a town 3 leagues from Candimal, with similar
+commodities. 8. _Jaale_ or _Joala_, 6 leagues beyond Palmerin, its
+commodities being hides, wax, elephants teeth, rice, and some gold, for
+which it is frequented by many Spaniards and Portuguese, 9. _Gambia
+river_, producing rice, wax, hides, elephants teeth, and gold.
+
+[Footnote 321: Hakluyt, III. 2. Astley, I. 242.]
+
+[Footnote 322: In Astley, these previous remarks are stated to have been
+written by Richard Rainolds; but in the original collection of Hakluyt
+no such distinction is made, only that in the text Richard Rainolds
+states himself to have written the account of the voyage.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 323: Or Barzaguiche, by which name the natives call the island
+of Goree; the town of that name being on the opposite shore of the
+continent.--Astl, I. 242. c.]
+
+[Footnote 324: At this place the editor of Astley's Collection supplies
+28 leagues, in the text between brackets: But Cape Verd is 39 leagues
+from the southern mouth of the Senegal, and Goree is 6 leagues beyond
+Cape Verd. Near the situation pointed out for Beseguiache, modern maps
+place two small towns or villages named Dakar and Ben.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 325: A league north from Rufisque in modern maps is a place
+called Ambo; about 1-1/2 league farther north, one named Canne; and near
+2 leagues south, another named Yenne.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 326: We have here two towns called Palmerin within a few
+leagues, perhaps one of them may be wrong named in the text.--E.]
+
+The French have traded thither above thirty years from Dieppe in
+New-haven[327], commonly with four or five ships every year, of which
+two small barks go up the river Senegal. The others are wont, until
+within these four years that our ships came thither, to ride with their
+ships in Portudale, sending small shalops of six or eight tons to some
+of the before-named places on the sea coast. They were generally as well
+beloved and as kindly treated by the negroes as if they had been natives
+of the country, several of the negroes going often into France and
+returning again, to the great increase of their mutual friendship. Since
+we frequented the coast, the French go with their ships to Rufisque, and
+leave us to anchor a Portudale. The French are not in use to go up the
+river Gambia, which is a river of secret trade and riches concealed by
+the Portuguese. Long since, one Frenchman entered the river in a small
+bark, which was surprised, betrayed, and taken by the Portuguese. In
+our second voyage in the second year of our trade[328], about forty
+Englishmen were cruelly slain or captured, and most or all of their
+goods confiscated, by the vile treachery of the Portuguese, with the
+consent of the negro kings in Portudale and Joala. On this occasion only
+two got back, who were the merchants or factors. Likewise, by the
+procurement of Pedro Gonzalves, a person in the service of Don Antonio
+one of the officers of the king of Portugal, Thomas Dassel and others
+had been betrayed, if it had not pleased the Almighty to reveal and
+prevent the same.
+
+[Footnote 327: Havre de Grace is probably here meant--E.]
+
+[Footnote 328: Hence it appears that the relation in the text was the
+third voyage of the English exclusive company, in the third year of
+their patent, but we find no account of the other two beyond what is now
+mentioned. It appears, however from Kelly's ship being at the same time
+upon the coast, that others as well as the patentees carried on this
+trade.--Astl. I. 242. d.]
+
+From the south side of the river Senegal, all along the sea coast to
+Palmerin is one kingdom of the Negroes, the king of which is named
+Melick Zamba[329], who dwells about two days journey inland from
+Rufisque.
+
+[Footnote 329: Melick; or Malek, in Arabic signifies king.--Astl. I.
+242. e.]
+
+_The Voyage._
+
+On the 12th of November 1591, I, Richard Rainolds and Thomas Dassel,
+being factors in a ship called the Nightingale of London, of 125 tons,
+accompanied by a pinnace of 40 tons called the Messenger, arrived near
+Cape Verd at a small island called the _Isle of Liberty_. At this island
+we set up a small pinnace in which we are in use to carry our goods to
+land in the course of our traffic; and in the mean time Thomas Dassel
+went in the large pinnace to traffic with the Spaniards or Portuguese in
+Portudale or Joale. Over against this island of Liberty [_Goree_] there
+is a village of the negroes called Beseguiache, the alcaide or governor
+of which came on board, with a great train in a number of canoes, to
+receive the kings duties for anchorage and permission to set up our
+pinnace. He was much pleased that we had no Portuguese in our ships,
+saying that we should be always better thought of by the king and people
+of that country if we never brought any Portuguese, but came of
+ourselves as the French do always. To secure his favour, I gave him and
+his company very courteous entertainment, and upon his entreaty, having
+sufficient hostages left on board, I and several others went to the land
+along with him. At this time a war subsisted between this governor and
+the governor of a neighbouring province; but upon our arrival a truce
+was entered into for some time, and I with my companions were conducted
+through among the contending parties belonging to both provinces, to the
+house of the governor of Beseguiache, where we were hospitably
+entertained after their manner, and having received some presents
+returned safely on board. Next day the alcaide came again on board,
+desiring me to send some iron and other commodities in the boat to
+barter with the negroes, and also requested me to remove with the ship
+to Rufisque, which I did accordingly. I observed one thing, that a
+number of negroes, armed with bows and poisoned arrows, poisoned darts,
+and swords, attended the landing of the governor in warlike array,
+because the hostile tribe had come there to view our ship, taking
+advantage of the truce. These his armed attendants for the most part
+approached him in a kneeling posture, and kissed the back of his hand.
+
+On the 17th of November, finding no French ship had yet come out, I left
+the anchorage at the island [_Goree_], and went to the road of Rufisque,
+where the interpreters of the alcaide came on board and received from me
+the kings duties for free trade with the negroes, with whom I every day
+exchanged my iron and other wares for hides and some elephants teeth,
+finding the people very friendly and tractable. Next day I went about
+three miles inland to the town of Rufisque, where I was handsomely
+received and treated by the alcaide, and especially so by a young noble
+named _Conde Amar Pattay_[330], who presented me with an ox, and some
+goats and kids, for my company, assuring me that the king would be glad
+to hear of the arrival of a Christian ship, calling us _blancos_ or
+white men, and more especially that we were English. Every day the young
+_conde_ came to the sea-side with a small company of horsemen, feasting
+me with much courtesy and kindness. On the 5th of December, he and his
+train came on board to view the ship, which to them seemed wonderful, as
+a thing they had seldom seen the like of. He then told me that a
+messenger sent to the king to notify our arrival was returned, and that
+the king was much rejoiced that the English had brought a ship to trade
+in his ports; and as I was the first Englishman who had brought a ship
+there, he promised that I and any Englishman hereafter might be sure of
+being well treated, and of receiving good dealings in his country. The
+_conde_ farther requested, in the kings name and his own, that before my
+final departure from the coast, I might return to the road of Rufisque,
+to confer with him for our better acquaintance, and for the
+establishment of stable friendship between them and the English, which I
+agreed to. Having shewn him and his train every civility in my power, he
+went on shore, on which I proposed to have given him a salute, but he
+desired the contrary, being amazed at the sight of the ship and noise of
+the guns, which they greatly admired.
+
+[Footnote 330: In the name or title of this negro chief or noble may be
+recognized the Portuguese or Spanish _conde_, and the Arabic _amir_ or
+_emir_.--E.]
+
+The 13th of December I weighed anchor from before Rufisque, and went to
+Porto d'Ally, which is in another kingdom, the king of which is called
+Amar Malek, being son to Malek Zamba the other king, and has his
+residence a days journey and a half inland from Porto d'Ally. When we
+had anchored, the governors of the town, who were the kings kinsmen, and
+all the other officers, came on board to receive the kings duty for
+anchorage and liberty to trade, all of whom seemed much pleased that we
+had no Portuguese on board, saying that it was the kings pleasure we
+should bring none of that nation, whom they considered as a people
+devoid of truth[331]. They complained of one Francisco de Costa, a
+servant of Don Antonio, who had often, and particularly the former year,
+abused their king Amar Malek, promising to bring him certain things out
+of England which he had never done, and supposed that might be his
+reason for not coming this voyage. They said likewise that neither the
+Portuguese nor Spaniards could abide us, but always spoke to the great
+defamation and dishonour of England. They also affirmed that on the
+arrival of a ship called the Command, belonging to Richard Kelley of
+Dartmouth, one Pedro Gonzalves, a Portuguese, who came in that ship from
+Don Antonio, reported to them that we were fled from England, and had
+come to rob and commit great spoil on the coast, and that Thomas Dassel
+had murdered Francisco de Acosta since we left England, who was coming
+in our ship with great presents for their king from Don Antonio,
+desiring on our arrival that they should seize our goods and ourselves
+secretly. They assured us however that they had refused to do this, as
+they disbelieved the report of Gonzalves, having often before been
+abused and deceived by such false and slanderous stories by the
+Portuguese. Their king, they said, was extremely sorry for the former
+murder of our people, and would never consent to any such thing in
+future, holding the Portuguese and Spaniards in utter abhorrence ever
+since, and having a much better opinion of us and our nation than these
+our enemies wished them to entertain. I gave them hearty thanks for
+their good opinion, assuring them that they should always find a great
+difference between our honour, and the dishonourable words and actions
+of our enemies, and then paid them the customary duties. As this was a
+chief place for trade, I told them that I intended to wait upon their
+king that I might give him certain presents which I had brought out of
+England, on purpose to strengthen the friendship between their nation
+and ours.
+
+[Footnote 331: From this and other passages of the present journal, it
+appears that the English used to carry a Portuguese along with them in
+their first voyages to the coast of Africa, whether from choice or by
+agreement with the government of Portugal does not clearly appear: and
+that, finding the inconvenience of this custom, they began now to lay it
+aside. This seems to have provoked the king of Portugal, who proposed to
+ruin the English trade by means of these agents or spies.--_Astl_. I.
+214. b.]
+
+All this time, Thomas Dassel was with our large pinnace at the town of
+Joala, in the dominions of king Jocoel Lamiockeric, trading with the
+Spaniards and Portuguese at that place. The before-mentioned Pedro
+Gonzalves, who had come out of England, was there also along with some
+English merchants, employed in the service of Richard Kelley. As
+Gonzalves had not been able to accomplish his treacherous purposes
+against Dassel at Porto d'Ally, where I remained, he attempted, along
+with other Portuguese who were made privy to his design, to betray
+Dassel at this town of Joala, and had seduced the chiefs among the
+negroes, by means of bribes, to concur in his wicked and most
+treacherous intentions. These, by the good providence of God, were
+revealed to Thomas Dassel by Richard Cape, an Englishman, in the service
+of Richard Kelley; on which Thomas Dassel went on board a small English
+bark called the Cherubim of Lyme, where a Portuguese named Joam Payva, a
+servant of Don Antonio, declared that Thomas Dassel would have been
+betrayed long before, if he and one Garcia, a Portuguese, who lived at
+Joala, would have concurred with Pedro Gonzalves. Upon this warning,
+Thomas Dassel contrived next day to get three Portuguese on board the
+pinnace, two of whom he sent on shore, and detained the third named
+Villanova as an hostage, sending a message that if they would bring
+Gonzalves on board next day by eight o'clock, he would release
+Villanova; but they did not. Dassel likewise got intelligence, that
+certain Portuguese and negroes were gone post by land from Joala to
+Porto d'Ally, with the view of having me, Richard Rainolds, and my
+company detained on shore; and, being doubtful of the negro friendship,
+who were often wavering, especially when overcome by wine, he came with
+his pinnace and the Portuguese hostage to Porto d'Ally on the 24th
+December, for our greater security, and to prevent any treacherous plan
+that might have been attempted against us in the roads by the
+Portuguese. He was no sooner arrived beside our large ship the
+Nightingale in the road of Porto d'Ally, than news was brought him from
+John Baily, servant to Anthony Dassel, that he and our goods were
+detained on shore, and that twenty Portuguese and Spaniards were come
+there from Joala along with Pedro Gonzalves, for the purpose of getting
+Villanova released. After a conference of two or three days, held with
+the negro chiefs and the Spaniards and Portuguese, the negroes were in
+the end convinced how vilely Pedro Gonzalves had behaved; and as he was
+in their power, they said he ought to suffer death or torture for his
+villany, as an example to others; but we, in recompence of his cruel
+treachery, pitied him and shewed mercy, desiring the negroes to use him
+well though undeserving; upon which the negro chiefs brought him on
+board the pinnace to Thomas Dassel, to do with him as he thought proper.
+Owing to some improper language he had used of certain princes,
+Gonzalves was well buffetted by a Spaniard at his coming off from the
+shore, and had been slain if the natives had not rescued him for our
+sakes.
+
+When I went on shore to release Villanova, Pedro Gonzalves confessed to
+Thomas Dassel, that he had concerted with some negroes and Portuguese
+about detaining Dassel and the goods on shore; but that he had acted
+nothing on this subject without authority from his king, contained in
+certain letters he had received at Dartmouth from London, after our
+departure from the Thames, occasioned by our presuming to trade to
+Guinea without a servant of the king of Portugal; and declared likewise
+that he had power or authority from Francisco de Costa, a Portuguese,
+remaining in England, to detain the goods of Anthony Dassel in Guinea.
+By consent of Francis Tucker, John Browbeare, and the other factors of
+Richard Kelley, with whom this Pedro Gonzalves came from England, it was
+agreed that we should detain Gonzalves in our ships until their
+departure, to avoid any other mischief that he might contrive.
+Therefore, on 9th January 1592, he was delivered to go for England in
+the same ship that brought him, being all the time he remained in our
+ship, well and courteously treated by me, though much against the will
+of our mariners, who were much disgusted at seeing one who had been
+nourished and relieved in our country, seeking, by villanous means, to
+procure the destruction of us all.
+
+Although the Spaniards and Portuguese are dissemblers and not to be
+trusted, yet when they saw how the subjects of Amar Malek befriended and
+favoured us, and that it would be prejudicial to their trade if we were
+any way injured, they renounced their evil intentions against us,
+shewing detestation of him who had been the cause of it, and promised to
+defend us and our affairs in all faithfulness for the future; desiring
+us, as the negro king had done already, to bring no more Portuguese with
+us from England, for they esteemed one bar of iron as more valuable than
+twenty Portuguese, and more serviceable towards the profitable trade
+which had been of late carried on by us and the French; whereas the
+Portuguese, whom we were in use to bring with us, endeavoured all they
+could to do us injury, and even to hurt all parties concerned in the
+trade.
+
+At the beginning of these broils, Amar Malek had sent his chief
+secretary with three horses for me, Richard Rainolds; but I refused
+going, on account of the disturbances, though I might have had negroes
+of condition left as hostages for my safety; yet I transmitted the
+customary presents for the king. When he understood the reason of my not
+coming to his residence, he was very sorry and much offended at the
+cause, and immediately issued a proclamation, commanding that no injury
+should be done to us in his dominions by his own people, neither
+suffered to be done by the Spaniards or Portuguese; and declaring, if
+any of the neighbouring negro tribes should confederate with the
+Spaniards and Portuguese to molest us, that he and his subjects should
+be ready to aid and defend us. Thus there appeared more kindness and
+good will towards us in these ignorant negroes, than in the Spaniards
+and Portuguese.
+
+None of the Spaniards or Portuguese are in use to trade up the river
+Senegal, except one Portuguese named _Ganigogo_ who dwells far up that
+river, where he has married the daughter of one of the kings. In the
+towns of Porto d'Ally and Joala, which are the places of chief trade on
+this coast, and at Cauton and Cassan in the river Gambia, there are many
+Spaniards and Portuguese who have become resident by permission of the
+negroes, and carry on a valuable trade all along the coast, especially
+to the Rio San Dominica and Rio Grande, which are not far distant from
+the Gambia, to which places they transport the iron which they purchase
+from us and the French, exchanging it for _negro slaves_, which are
+transported to the West Indies in ships that come hither from Spain. By
+order of the governor and renters of the castle of Mina, and of all
+those places on the coast of Guinea where gold is to be had, these
+residents have a place limited for them in the river Gambia, beyond
+which they must not go under pain of death and confiscation of their
+goods; as the renters themselves send their own barks at certain times
+up the river, to those places where gold is to be had. In all those
+places hereabout, where we are in use to trade, the Spaniards and
+Portuguese have no castle or other place of strength, merely trading
+under the licence and safe conduct of the negroes. Most of the Spaniards
+and Portuguese who reside in those parts are banished men or fugitives,
+who have committed heinous crimes; and their life and conversation is
+conformable to their conditions, as they are the basest and most
+villainously behaved persons of their nation that are to be met with in
+any part of the world.
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER VIII.
+
+SOME MISCELLANEOUS EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH.
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+The present chapter is rather of an anomalous nature, and chiefly
+consists of naval expeditions against the Spaniards and Portuguese,
+scarcely belonging in any respect to our plan of arrangement: yet, as
+contained mostly in the ancient English collection of Hakluyt, and in
+that by Astley, we have deemed it improper to exclude them from our
+pages, where they may be considered in some measure as an episode.
+Indeed, in every extensively comprehensive plan, some degree of anomaly
+is unavoidable. The following apology or reason given by the editor of
+Astley's collection for inserting them in that valuable work, may serve
+us likewise on the present occasion; though surely no excuse can be
+needed, in a national collection like ours, for recording the exploits
+of our unrivalled naval defenders.
+
+"For want of a continued series of trading voyages to Guinea, we shall
+here insert an account of some remarkable achievements by the English
+against the Spaniards and Portuguese; who, being greatly alarmed to find
+out merchants extending their commerce, and trading to those parts of
+the world which they pretended a right of engrossing to themselves,
+began to treat our ships very severely, wherever they had the
+superiority; and when they wanted force, endeavoured to surprise them by
+treachery, never scrupling to violate the most solemn oaths and
+engagements to compass their designs. For this reason the English
+merchant ships were obliged to go to sea armed and in company; by which
+means they not only prevented the outrages of these faithless enemies,
+but often revenged the injuries done to others of their countrymen. At
+length, the resentment of the nation being inflamed by their repeated
+treacheries and depredations, the English began to send out fleets to
+annoy their coasts and disturb their navigation. Of these proceedings,
+we propose to give a few instances in this chapter, which may suffice to
+shew the noble spirit that prevailed in these early times."--_Astl_. I.
+194.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Gallant escape of the Primrose from Bilboa in Spain, in 1585_[332].
+
+
+It is not unknown to the world, what dangers our English ships have
+lately escaped from, how sharply they have been entreated, and how
+hardly they have been assaulted; insomuch that the valour of those who
+managed and defended them is worthy of being held in remembrance.
+Wherefore, the courageous attempt and valiant enterprize of the tall
+ship named the Primrose of London, from before the town of Bilboa, in
+the province of Biscay in Spain, (which ship the corregidore of that
+province, accompanied by 97 Spaniards, offered violently to arrest, yet
+was defeated of his purpose, and brought prisoner into England,) having
+obtained renown, I have taken in hand to publish the truth thereof, that
+it may be generally known to the rest of our English ships; that, by the
+good example of this gallant exploit, the rest may be encouraged and
+incited in like extremity to act in a similar manner, to the glory of
+the realm and their own honour.--_Hakluyt_, II, 597.
+
+[Footnote 332: Hakluyt, II. 537. Astley, I.194.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Upon Wednesday the 26th of May 1585, while the ship Primrose of 150 tons
+was riding at anchor off the bay of Bilboa, where she had been two days,
+there came on board a Spanish pinnace, in which were the corregidore and
+six others, who seemed to be merchants, bringing cherries with, them,
+and spoke in a very friendly manner to the master of the ship, whose
+name was Foster. He received them courteously, giving them the best
+cheer he could, with beer, beef, and biscuit. While thus banqueting,
+four of the seven departed in the pinnace for Bilboa; the other three
+remaining, and seeming much pleased with their entertainment. Yet Mr
+Foster was suspicious of some evil designs, and gave secret intimation
+to his people that he was doubtful of the intentions of these men, but
+said nothing to his guests by which they could any way surmise that he
+distrusted them. Soon afterwards there came a shipboat in which were
+seventy persons, seemingly merchants and the like of Biscay, and a
+little behind came the pinnace in which were twenty-four other persons,
+as the Spaniards afterwards confessed. On reaching the Primrose, the
+corregidore and three or four of his men went on board that ship; but on
+seeing such a multitude, Mr Foster desired that no more might come on
+aboard which was agreed to: Yet suddenly all the Spaniards left their
+boat and boarded the Primrose, all being armed with rapiers and other
+weapons which they had brought secretly in the boat, and had even a drum
+along with them to proclaim their expected triumph.
+
+On getting on board, the Spaniards dispersed themselves over the ship,
+some below deck, others entering the cabins, while the most part
+remained in a body as if to guard their prize. Then the corregidore, who
+had an officer along with him bearing a white rod in his hand, desired
+Mr Foster to yield himself as a prisoner to the king of Spain; on which
+he called out to his men that they were betrayed. At this time some of
+the Spaniards threatened Mr Foster with their daggers in a furious
+manner, as if they would have slain him, yet they had no such purpose,
+meaning only to have taken him and his men prisoners. Mr Foster and his
+men were amazed at this sudden assault, and were greatly concerned to
+think themselves ready to be put to death; yet some of them, much
+concerned for their own and Mr Fosters danger, and believing themselves
+doomed to death if landed as prisoners, determined either to defend
+themselves manfully or to die with arms in their hands, rather than to
+submit to the hands of the tormentors[333]; wherefore they boldly took
+to their weapons, some armed with javelins, lances, and boar-spears, and
+others with five calivers ready charged, being all the fire-arms they
+had. With these they fired up through the gratings of the hatches at the
+Spaniards on deck, at which the Spaniards were sore amazed not knowing
+how to escape the danger, and fearing the English had more fire-arms
+than they actually possessed. Others of the crew laid manfully about
+among the Spaniards with their lances and boar-spears, disabling two or
+three of the Spaniards at every stroke. Then some of the Spaniards urged
+Mr Foster to command his men to lay down their arms and surrender; but
+he told them that the English were so courageous in the defence of their
+lives and liberties, that it was not in his power to controul them, for
+on such an occasion they would slay both them and him. At this time the
+blood of the Spaniards flowed plentifully about the deck; some being
+shot between the legs from below, the bullets came out at their
+breasts; some were cut in the head, others thrust in the body, and many
+of them so sore wounded that they rushed faster out at one side of the
+ship than they came in at the other, tumbling fast overboard on both
+side with their weapons, some falling into the sea, and others into
+their boats, in which they made all haste on shore. But though they came
+to the ship in great numbers, only a small number of them returned, yet
+it is not known how many of them were slain or drowned. On this occasion
+only one Englishman was slain named John Tristram, and six others
+wounded; but it was piteous to behold so many Spaniards swimming in the
+sea, and unable to save their lives, of whom four who had got hold of
+some part of the ship, were rescued from the waves by Mr Foster and his
+men, whose bosoms were found stuffed with paper to defend them from the
+shot, and these four being wounded, were dressed by the English surgeon.
+One of these was the corregidore himself, who was governor over an
+hundred cities and towns, his appointments exceeding six hundred pounds
+a year. This strange incident took place about six o'clock in the
+evening; after they had landed upwards of twenty tons of goods from the
+Primrose, which were delivered at Bilboa by John Barrell and John
+Brodbank, who were made prisoners on shore.
+
+[Footnote 333: This seems to allude to their fears of the Inquisition,
+if made prisoners.--E.]
+
+After this valiant exploit, performed by 28 Englishmen against 97
+Spaniards, Mr Foster and his men saw that it were vain for them to
+remain any longer; wherefore they hoisted their sails and came away with
+the rest of their goods, and arrived safely by the blessing of God near
+London, on the 8th June 1585. During their return towards England, the
+corregidore and the other Spaniards they had made prisoners offered 500
+crowns to be set on shore anywhere on the coast of Spain or Portugal;
+but as Mr Foster would not consent, they were glad to crave mercy and
+remain on board. On being questioned by Mr Foster as to their reason for
+endeavouring thus to betray him and his men, the corregidore assured him
+it was not done of their own accord, but by the command of the king of
+Spain; and calling for his hose, which were wet, he took out the royal
+commission authorising and commanding him to do what he had attempted,
+which was to the following purport:
+
+"Licentiate de Escober, my corregidore of my lordship of Biscay. Seeing
+that I have caused a great fleet to be equipped in the havens of Lisbon
+and Seville, that there is required for the soldiers, armour, victuals,
+and ammunition, and that great store of shipping is wanted for the said
+service: I therefore require you, on sight of this order, that with as
+much secrecy as may be, you take order for arresting all the shipping
+that may be found on the coast and in the ports of the said lordship,
+particularly all such as belong to Holland, Zealand, Esterland, Germany,
+England, or other provinces and countries that are in rebellion against
+me; excepting those of France, which, being small and weak, are thought
+unfit for the present service. And being thus arrested and staid, you
+shall take special care, that such merchandise as are on board these
+ships be taken out, and that all the armour, arms, ammunition, tackle,
+sails, and provisions be bestowed in safe custody, so that none of the
+ships and men may escape, &c. Done at Barcelona, the 29th May 1585."
+
+In this gallant exploit is to be noted, both the great courage of the
+master, and the love of the mariners to save their master; likewise the
+great care of Mr Foster to save as much as he could of the goods of his
+owners, although by this conduct he may never more frequent those parts,
+without losing his own life and those of his people, as they would
+assuredly, if known, subject themselves to the sharp torments of their
+_Holy house_. As for the king of Spain pretending that the English were
+in rebellion against him, it is sufficiently well known even to
+themselves, with what love, unity, and concord our ships have ever dealt
+with them, being always at least as willing to shew pleasure and respect
+to their king and them, as they have been to deal hospitably by the
+English.--_Hakl._
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Voyage of Sir Francis Drake, in 1585, to the West Indies_[334].
+
+
+Upon the knowledge of the embargo laid by the king of Spain in 1585,
+upon the English ships, men, and goods found in his country, having no
+means to relieve her subjects by friendly treaty, her majesty authorised
+such as had sustained loss by that order of embargo to right themselves
+by making reprisals upon the subjects of the king of Spain; for which
+she gave them her letters of reprisal, to take and arrest all ships and
+merchandises they might find at sea or elsewhere, belonging to the
+subjects of that King. At the same time, to revenge the wrongs offered
+to her crown and dignity, and to resist the preparations then making
+against her by the king of Spain, her majesty equipped a fleet of
+twenty-five sail of ships, and employed them under the command of Sir
+Francis Drake, as the fittest person in her dominions, by reason of his
+experience and success in sundry actions.
+
+[Footnote 334: Church. Collect. III. 155.]
+
+It is not my intention to give all the particulars of the voyages
+treated of, but merely to enumerate the services performed, and the
+mistakes and oversights committed, as a warning to those who may read
+them, to prevent the like errors hereafter. As this voyage of Sir
+Francis Drake was the first undertaking on either side in this war, for
+it ensued immediately after the arrest of our ships and goods in Spain,
+I shall deliver my opinion of it before I proceed any farther. One
+impediment to the voyage was, that to which the ill success of several
+others that followed was imputed, viz. the want of victuals and other
+necessaries fit for so great an expedition; for had not this fleet met
+with a ship of Biscay, coming from Newfoundland with fish, which
+relieved their necessities, they had been reduced to great extremity. In
+this expedition Sir Francis Drake sailed in the Elizabeth Bonadventure;
+captain Frobisher, in the Aid was second in command; and captain Carlee
+was lieutenant-general of the forces by land, Sir Francis having the
+supreme command both as admiral and general.
+
+The services performed in this expedition were, the taking and sacking
+of St Domingo in Hispaniola, of Carthagena on the continent of America,
+and of St Justina in Florida, three towns of great importance in the
+West Indies. This fleet was the greatest of any nation, except the
+Spaniards, that had ever been seen in these seas since their first
+discovery; and, if the expedition had been as well considered of before
+going from home, as it was happily performed by the valour of those
+engaged, it had more annoyed the king of Spain than all the other
+actions that ensued during that war. But it seems our long peace had
+made us incapable of advice in war; for had we kept and defended those
+places when in our possession, and made provision to have relieved them
+from England, we had diverted the war from Europe; for at that time
+there was no comparison betwixt the strength of Spain and England by
+sea, by means whereof we might have better defended these acquisitions,
+and might more easily have encroached upon the rest of the Indies, than
+the king of Spain could have aided or succoured them. But now we see and
+find by experience, that those places which were then weak and
+unfortified, are since fortified, so that it is to no purpose for us to
+attempt annoying the king of Spain now in his dominions in the West
+Indies. And, though this expedition proved fortunate and victorious, yet
+as it was father an awakening than a weakening of the king of Spain, it
+had been far better wholly let alone, than to have undertaken it on such
+slender grounds, and with such inconsiderable forces[335].
+
+[Footnote 335: It must be acknowledged that the present section can only
+be considered as a species of introduction or prelude to an intended
+narrative of an expedition: Yet such actually is the first article in
+Sir William Monson's celebrated Naval Tracts, as published in the
+Collection of Churchill; leaving the entire of the narrative an absolute
+blank. Nothing could well justify the adoption of this inconclusive and
+utterly imperfect article, but the celebrity of its author and actor:
+For Sir William Monson, and the editor of Churchill's Collection, seem
+to have dosed in giving to the public this _Vox et preterea nihil_.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Cruizing Voyage to the Azores by Captain Whiddon, in 1586, written by
+John Evesham_[336].
+
+
+
+This voyage was performed by two barks or pinnaces, the Serpent of 35
+tons, and the Mary Sparke of Plymouth of 50 tons, both belonging to Sir
+Walter Raleigh, knight. Leaving Plymouth on the 10th June 1586, we
+directed our course in the first place for the coast of Spain, and
+thence for the islands called the Azores, in which course we captured a
+small bark, laden with sumach and other commodities, in which was the
+Portuguese governor of St Michael's Island, with several other
+Portuguese and Spaniards. Sailing thence to the island of Gracioso,
+westward of Tercera, we descried a sail to which we gave chase, and
+found her to be a Spaniard. But at the first, not much respecting whom
+we took, so that we might enrich ourselves, which was the object of our
+expedition, and not willing it should be known what we were, we
+displayed a white silk ensign in our maintop, which made them believe
+that we were of the Spanish navy laying in wait for English cruizers;
+but when we got within shot, we hauled down our white flag, and hoisted
+the St Georges ensign, on which they fled as fast as they were able, but
+all in vain, as our ships sailed faster than they; wherefore they threw
+overboard all their ordnance and shot, with many letters and the chart
+of the straits of Magellan, which lead into the south sea, immediately
+after which we took her, finding on board a Spanish gentleman named
+Pedro Sarmiento, who was governor of the straits of Magellan, whom we
+brought home to England, and presented to the queen our sovereign.
+
+[Footnote 336: Hakluyt; II. 606. Astley, I. 196. The command of this
+expedition is attributed by the editor of Astley's Collection to captain
+Whiddon, on the authority of the concluding sentence.--E.]
+
+After this, while plying off and on about the islands, we espied another
+sail to which we gave chase, during which our admiral sprung his
+main-mast; yet in the night our vice-admiral got up with and captured
+the chase, which we found was laden with fish from Cape Blanco on which
+we let her go for want of hands to bring her home. Next day we descried
+two vessels, one a ship and the other a caravel, to which we gave chase,
+on which they made with all haste for the island of Gracioso, where they
+got to anchor under protection of a fort; as having the wind of us we
+were unable to cut them off from the land, or to get up to attack them
+with our ships as they lay at anchor. Having a small boat which we
+called a _light horseman_, there went into her myself and four men armed
+with calivers, and four others to row, in which we went towards them
+against the wind. On seeing us row towards them, they carried a
+considerable part of their merchandise on shore, and landed all the men
+of both vessels; and as soon as we got near, they began to fire upon us
+both from their cannon and small arms, which we returned as well as we
+could. We then boarded one of their ships, in which they had not left a
+single man; and having cut her cables and hoisted her sails, we sent her
+off with two of our men. The other seven of us then went very near the
+shore and boarded the caravel, which rode within stones throw of the
+shore, insomuch that the people on the land threw stones at us; yet in
+spite of them, we took possession of her, there being only one negro on
+board. Having cut her cables and hoisted her sails, she was so becalmed
+under the land that we had to tow her off with our boat, the fort still
+firing on us from their cannon, while the people on shore, to the number
+of about 150, continually fired at us with muskets and calivers, we
+answering them with our five muskets. At this time the shot from my
+musket, being a bar-shot, happened to strike the gunner of the fort
+dead, while he was levelling one of his great guns; and thus we got off
+from them without loss or wound on our part. Having thus taken five[337]
+sail in all, we did as we had done with the ship with the fish, we
+turned them off without hurting them, save that we took from one of them
+her mainmast for our admiral, and sent her away with all our Spanish and
+Portuguese prisoners, except Pedro Sarmiento, three other principal
+persons, and two negroes, leaving them within sight of land, with bread
+and water sufficient to serve them ten days.
+
+[Footnote 337: Four only are mentioned in the text; and it appears that
+they only sent away at this time the first taken ship, in which they had
+captured Sarmiento.--E.]
+
+We now bent our course for England, taking our departure from off the
+western islands in about the latitude of 41 deg. N. and soon afterwards one
+of our men descried a sail from the foretop, then ten sail, and then
+fifteen sail. It was now concluded to send off our two prizes, by
+manning of which we did not leave above 60 men in our two pinnaces. When
+we had dispatched them, we made sail towards the fleet we had
+discovered, which we found to consist of 24 sail in all; two of them
+being great caraks, one of 1200 and the other of 1000 tons, and 10
+galeons, all the rest being small ships and caravels, laden with
+treasure, spices, and sugars. In our two small pinnaces we kept company
+with this fleet of 24 ships for 32 hours, continually fighting with them
+and they with us; but the two huge caraks always kept between their
+fleet and us, so that we were unable to take any one of them; till at
+length, our powder growing short, we were forced to give over, much
+against our wills, being much bent upon gaining some of them, but
+necessity compelling us by want of powder, we left them, without any
+loss of our men, which was wonderful, considering the disparity of force
+and numbers.
+
+We now continued our course to Plymouth, where we arrived within six
+hours after our prizes, though we sent them away forty hours before we
+began our homeward course. We were joyfully received, with the ordnance
+of the town, and all the people hailed us with willing hearts, we not
+sparing our shot in return with what powder we had left. From thence we
+carried our prizes to Southampton, where our owner, Sir Walter Raleigh,
+met us and distributed to us our shares of the prizes.
+
+Our prizes were laden with sugars, elephants teeth, wax, hides,
+Brazil-wood, and _cuser?_ as may be made manifest by the testimony of
+me, John Evesham, the writer hereof, as likewise of captains Whiddon,
+Thomas Rainford, Benjamin Wood, William Cooper master, William Cornish
+master, Thomas Drak corporal, John Ladd gunner, William Warefield
+gunner, Richard Moon, John Drew, Richard Cooper of Harwich, William
+Beares of Ratcliff, John Row of Saltash, and many others.
+
+
+SECTION IV.
+
+_Brief relation of notable service performed by Sir Francis Drake in
+1587_[338].
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+The title of this article at large in Hakluyt is, A brief relation of
+the notable service performed by Sir Francis Drake, upon the Spanish
+fleet prepared in the road of Cadiz; and of his destroying 100 sail of
+barks; passing from thence all along the coast of Spain to _Cape Sacre_,
+where also he took certain forts; and so to the mouth of the river of
+Lisbon; thence crossing over sea to the isle of St Michael, where he
+surprised a mighty carak called the St Philip, coming from the East
+Indies, being the first of that kind ever seen in England.
+
+[Footnote 338: Hakl. II. 607. Astl. I. 197.]
+
+The editor of Astleys Collection says, that this relation seems to have
+been taken from a letter, written by one who was in the expedition to a
+friend; and thinks that it is not unlike the manner of Sir Walter
+Raleigh.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Being informed of mighty naval preparations in Spain for the invasion of
+England, her Majesty queen Elizabeth, by the good advice of her grave
+and prudent council, thought it expedient to use measures to prevent the
+same; for which purpose she caused a fleet of some thirty sail to be
+equipped, over which she appointed as general Sir Francis Drake, of
+whose many former good services she had sufficient proof. She
+accordingly caused four ships of her royal navy to be delivered to him,
+the Bonaventure, in which he went general; the Lion, under the command
+of Mr William Borough, comptroller of the navy; the Dreadnought,
+commanded by Mr Thomas Venner; and the Rainbow, of which Mr Henry
+Bellingham was captain[339]. Besides these four ships, two of her
+majestys pinnaces were appointed to serve as tenders or advice boats. To
+this fleet, there were added certain tall ships belonging to the city of
+London, of whose special good service the general made particular
+mention, in his letters to the queen.
+
+[Footnote 339: Sir William Monson in his Naval Tracts, in Churchills
+Collection, III. 156, gives a short account of this expedition. By him
+the admiral ship is called the Elizabeth Bonaventure, and Sir William
+Burroughs is called vice admiral. From a list given by Sir William
+Monson of the royal navy of England left by queen Elizabeth at her
+death, (Church. Coll. III. 196.) the Bonaventure appears to have been of
+the burden of 600 tons, carrying 50 pieces of cannon and 250 men, 70 of
+whom were mariners, and the rest landsmen. The Lion and Rainbow of 500
+tons each, with the same number of guns and men as the Bonaventure. The
+Dreadnought of 400 tons, 20 guns, 200 men, 50 of them seamen.--E.]
+
+This fleet sailed from Plymouth Sound, towards the coast of Spain, in
+April 1587. The 16th of that month, in latitude of 40 deg. N. we met two
+ships belonging to Middleburg, in Zealand, coming from Cadiz, by which
+we were acquainted that vast abundance of warlike stores were provided
+at Cadiz and that neighbourhood, and were ready to be sent to Lisbon.
+Upon this information, our general made sail with all possible
+expedition thither, to cut off and destroy their said forces and
+stores, and upon the 19th of April entered with his fleet into the
+harbour of Cadiz; where at our first entering we were assailed by six
+gallies over against the town, but which we soon constrained to retire
+under cover of their fortress. There were in the road at our arrival
+sixty ships, besides sundry small vessels close under the fortress.
+Twenty French ships fled immediately to Puerta Real, followed by some
+small Spanish vessels that were able to pass the shoals. At our first
+coming, we sunk a ship belonging to Ragusa of 1000 tons, very richly
+laden, which was armed with 40 brass guns. There came two other gallies
+from Port St Mary, and two more from Puerta Real, which shot freely at
+us, but altogether in vain, so that they were forced to retire well
+beaten for their pains. Before night we had taken 30 of their ships, and
+were entire masters of the road in spite of the gallies, which were glad
+to retire under the protection of the fort. Among the captured ships was
+one quite new, of extraordinary size, being above 1200 tons burden,
+belonging to the Marquis of Santa Cruz, high admiral of Spain. Five were
+ships of Biscay, four of which were taking in stores and provisions
+belonging to the king of Spain for his great fleet at Lisbon, which we
+burnt. The fifth was of about 1000 tons, laden with iron spikes, nails,
+hoops, horse shoes, and other things of a similar kind, for the West
+Indies, which we likewise set on fire. We also took a ship of 250 tons,
+laden with wines on the kings account, which ship we carried with us to
+sea, when we took out the wines for our own use, and then set her on
+fire. We took three fliboats of 300 tons each, laden with biscuit, one
+of which we set on fire, after taking out half her loading, and took the
+other two with us to sea. We likewise fired ten ships, which were laden
+with wine, raisins, figs, oil, wheat, and the like. The whole number of
+ships which we then burnt, sunk, or brought away, amounted to 30 at the
+least, and by our estimation to the burden of 10,000 tons. Besides
+these, there were about 40 ships at Puerta Real, not including those
+that fled from Cadiz.
+
+We found little ease during our stay in the road of Cadiz, as the enemy
+were continually firing at us from the gallies, the fortress, and the
+shore, being continually employed in planting new batteries against us
+in all convenient situations; besides which, finding they could not
+defend their ships any longer, they set them on fire that they might
+come among us, so that at the tide of flood we had much ado to defend
+ourselves: Yet was this a pleasant sight to behold, as we were thereby
+relieved from the great labour and fatigue of discharging the provisions
+and stores belonging to the enemy into our ships. Thus, by the
+assistance of the Almighty, and the invincible courage and good conduct
+of our general, this perilous but happy enterprize was achieved in one
+day and two nights, to the great astonishment of the king of Spain, and
+the so great vexation of the Marquis of Santa Cruz, the high admiral,
+that he never had a good day after, and in a few months, as may justly
+be supposed, he died of extreme grief. Having thus performed this
+notable service, we came out from the road of Cadiz on Friday morning,
+the 21st of April, having sustained so small loss as is not worth
+mentioning.
+
+After our departure, the ten gallies which were in the road of Cadiz
+came out after us, as if in bravado, playing their ordnance against us.
+At this time the wind scanted, upon which we cast round again, and made
+for the shore, coming to anchor within a league of the town; and there,
+for all their vapouring, the gallies allowed us to ride in quiet. Having
+thus had experience of a galley fight, I can assure you that the four
+ships of her majesty which we had with us would make no scruple to fight
+with twenty gallies, if all alone, and not being occupied in guarding
+others. There never were gallies that had better place and opportunity
+of advantage to fight against ships; yet were they forced to retire from
+us while riding at anchor in a narrow gut, which we were obliged to
+maintain till we had discharged and fired their ships, which we could
+only do conveniently upon the flood tide, at which time the burning
+ships might drive clear of us. Being thus provisioned for several months
+with bread and wine at the enemies cost, besides what we had brought
+with us from England, our general dispatched captain Crosse to England
+with his letters, giving him farther in charge to relate all the
+particulars of this our first enterprize to her majesty.
+
+We then shaped our course to Cape Sacre[340], and in our way thither we
+took at several times near 100 ships, barks, and caravels, laden with
+hoops, galley oars, pipe staves, and other stores belonging to the king
+of Spain, intended for furthering his preparations against England, all
+of which we set on fire and destroyed, setting all their men on shore.
+We also spoiled and destroyed all the fishing boats and nets
+thereabouts, to their great annoyance, and as we suppose to the entire
+overthrow of their rich Tunny fishing for that year. We came at length
+to Cape Sagres, where we landed; and the better to enjoy the harbour at
+our ease[341], we assailed the castle of Sagres and three other strong
+holds, some of which we took by storm and others by surrender. From
+thence we came before the harbour of Lisbon or mouth of the Tagus, where
+lay the Marquis of Santa Cruz with his fleet of gallies, who seeing us
+chase his ships on shore, and take and carry away his barks and
+caravels, was obliged to allow us to remain quietly at our pleasure, and
+likewise to depart, without exchanging a single shot. When our general
+sent him word that he was ready to combat with him, the marquis refused
+his challenge, saying that he was not then ready, neither had he any
+such commission from his sovereign.
+
+[Footnote 340: Cape St Vincent, or rather Punta de Sagres, one of the
+head lands of that great promontory.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 341: Probably the harbour of Figuera in Algarve, a town near
+Cape Sagres.--E.]
+
+Thus having his challenge refused by the marquis, and seeing no more
+good to be done on the coast of Spain, our general thought it improper
+to spend any more time there; and therefore with consent of his chief
+officers[342], he shaped his course towards the island of St Michael,
+within 20 or 30 leagues of which he had the good fortune to fall in with
+a Portuguese carak, called the San Philippo, being the same ship which
+had carried out to the Indies three Japanese princes who had been in
+Europe[343]. The carak surrendered without resistance, and being the
+first that had ever been taken on the homeward voyage from India, the
+Portuguese took it for a bad omen, especially as she had the kings own
+name. Our general put all the people belonging to this carak into
+certain vessels well provided with provisions, and sent them courteously
+home to their own country. The riches of this prize seemed so great to
+the whole fleet, as in truth they were, that every one expected to have
+sufficient reward of their labour, and thereupon it was unanimously
+resolved to return to England, which we happily did, and arrived safe
+the same summer in Plymouth with our whole fleet and this rich booty, to
+our own profit and due honour, and the great admiration of the whole
+kingdom.
+
+[Footnote 342: According to Sir William Monson, Church. Col. III. 156.
+Sir Francis Drake went upon this expedition to conciliate the merchant
+adventurers, to whom most of the ships of his squadron belonged.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 343: Sir William Monson, in the place quoted above, says he
+had intelligence of this carak having wintered at Mosambique, and being
+now expected home.--E.]
+
+It may be here noted, that the taking of this carak wrought two
+extraordinary effects in England; as in the first place it taught others
+that caraks were no such bugbears but that they might be easily taken,
+as has been since experienced in taking the Madre de Dios, and in
+burning and sinking others; and secondly in acquainting the English
+nation more particularly with the exceeding riches and vast wealth of
+the East Indies, by which themselves and their neighbours of Holland
+have been encouraged, being no less skillful in navigation nor of less
+courage than the Portuguese, to share with them in the rich trade of
+India, where they are by no means so strong as was formerly supposed.
+
+
+SECTION V.
+
+_Brief account of the Expedition of the Spanish Armada in 1588_[344].
+
+
+Notwithstanding the great hurt and spoil made by Sir Francis Drake in
+Cadiz roads the year before, by intercepting some part of the
+preparations intended for the great navy of the king of Spain, he used
+his utmost endeavours to be revenged this year, lest by longer delay his
+designs might be prevented as before; wherefore he arrested all ships,
+men, and necessaries that were wanting for his fleet, compelling every
+one to serve him in his great expedition. He appointed for general of
+this his so called Invincible Armada, the duke of Medina Sidonia, who
+was employed on this occasion more for his high birth and exalted rank,
+than for any experience in sea affairs; for so many dukes, marquises,
+and earls had volunteered on this occasion, that it was feared they
+might repine if commanded by a person of lower quality than themselves.
+They departed from Lisbon on the 19th of May 1588, with the greatest
+pride and glory, and with less doubt of victory than ever had been done
+by any nation. But God, angry with their insolence, turned the event
+quite contrary to their expectation.
+
+[Footnote 344: Church. Col. III. 157.]
+
+The directions given by the king of Spain to his general, the duke of
+Medina Sidonia, were to repair, as wind and weather might allow, to the
+road of Calais in Picardy, there to wait the arrival of the prince of
+Parma and his army, and on their meeting they were to open a letter
+containing their farther instructions. He was especially commanded to
+sail along the coasts of Brittany and Normandy in going up the channel,
+to avoid being discovered by the English; and, if he even met the
+English fleet, he was in no case to offer them battle, but only to
+defend himself in case of attack. On coming athwart the North Cape[345]
+the duke was assailed with contrary wind and foul weather, by which he
+was forced to take shelter in the _Groyne_, or bay of Corunna, where
+part of his fleet waited for him.
+
+[Footnote 345: Perhaps Cape Ortegal may be here meant, being the most
+northern head land of Spain, and not far from Corunna, called the Groyne
+in the text.--E.]
+
+When about to depart from Corunna, the duke got intelligence from an
+English fisherman, that our fleet had lately been at sea, but had put
+back again and discharged most of their men, as not expecting the
+Spanish armada this year. This intelligence occasioned the duke to alter
+his resolutions, and to disobey the instructions given him by the king;
+yet this was not done without some difficulty, as the council was
+divided in opinion, some holding it best to observe the kings commands,
+while others were anxious not to lose the opportunity of surprising our
+fleet at unawares, when they hoped to burn and destroy them. Diego
+Flores de Valdes, who commanded the squadron of Andalusia, and on whom
+the duke most relied, because of his judgment and experience in maritime
+affairs, was the main cause of persuading to make the attempt upon our
+ships in harbour, and in that design they directed their course for
+England.
+
+The first land they fell in with was the Lizard, being the most
+southerly point of Cornwall, which they mistook for the Ram-head off
+Plymouth; and as the night was at hand, they tacked out to sea, laying
+their account to make an attempt upon our ships in Plymouth next
+morning. In the mean time, while thus deceived in the land, they were
+discovered by captain Fleming, a pirate or freebooter who had been
+roving at sea, and who knowing them to be the Spanish fleet, repaired in
+all haste to Plymouth, and gave notice to our fleet then, riding at
+anchor, as follows:
+
+THE ENGLISH FLEET[346].
+
+   _Ships.       Commanders.                Tons. Guns. Men._
+   The Ark Royal    The Lord Admiral              800   32   400
+   Revenge          Sir F. Drake, vice admiral
+   Victory          Sir J. Hawkins, rear admiral  800   52   400
+   Lion             Lord Thomas Howard            500   80   250
+   Bear             Lord Sheffield                900   40   500
+   Elizabeth-Jonas  Sir Robert Southwell          900   40   500
+   Triumph          Sir Martin Frobisher         1000   40   500
+   Hope             Captain Crosse                600   30   250
+   Bonaventure      ---- Reyman                   600   30   250
+   Dreadnought      ---- George Beeston           400   20   200
+   Nonparielle      ---- Thomas Fenner            500   50   250
+   Swiftsure        ---- William Fenner           400   20   200
+   Rainbow          Lord Henry Seymour
+   Vauntguard       Sir William Wentworth
+   Mary-Rose        Captain Fenton
+   Antilope         Sir Henry Palmer              350   16   160
+   Foresight        Captain Baker                 300   16   160
+   Aid              ---- John Wentworth
+   Swallow          ---- Richard Hawkins          330   16   160
+   Tiger            ---- William Wentworth        200   12   100
+   Scout            ---- Ashley                   120    8    66
+   Bull
+   Tremontanny                                           8    70
+   Acatice                                        100    8    60
+   Charles, pinnace Captain Roberts
+   Moon             ---- Clifford
+   Spy              ---- Bradbury                  50    5    40
+   Noy
+
+[Footnote 346: This list, as given by Sir William Monson in the present
+article, contains only the names of the ships and commanders; the other
+circumstances enumerated, tonnage, guns, and men, are added from a list
+of the royal navy of England at the death of queen Elizabeth, which will
+be given hereafter.--E.]
+
+Immediately on receiving the intelligence brought by Fleming, the lord
+admiral got out his ships to sea with all possible expedition; so that
+before the Spaniards could draw near Plymouth, they were welcomed at sea
+by the lord admiral and his fleet, who continued to fight with them till
+they came to anchor at Calais. The particulars of the fight and its
+success I purposely omit, being things so well known[347].
+
+[Footnote 347: This surely is a poor excuse for omitting the glorious
+destruction of the Spanish Armada; yet in a Collection of Voyages, it
+were improper to attempt supplying even this great omission, by any
+composition of our own; as it may be found in the historians of the
+time.--E.]
+
+While this great armada was preparing, her majesty had frequent and
+perfect intelligence of the designs of the Spaniards; and knowing that
+the king of Spain intended to invade England by means of a mighty fleet
+from his own coast, she caused her royal navy to be fitted out under the
+conduct of the lord high admiral of England, whom she stationed at
+Plymouth as the fittest place for attending their coming. Knowing
+however, that it was not the Armada alone which could endanger the
+safety of England, as it was too weak for any enterprise on land,
+without the assistance of the Prince of Parma and his army in Flanders,
+she therefore appointed thirty ships of the Hollanders to lie at anchor
+off Dunkirk, where the prince and his army were to have embarked in flat
+bottomed boats, which were built on purpose and all in readiness for the
+expedition to England. Thus by the wise precautions of the queen, the
+prince was effectually prevented from putting to sea with his flat
+boats; but in truth neither his vessels nor his army were in readiness,
+which caused the king of Spain to be jealous of him ever after, and is
+supposed to have hastened his end.
+
+Although her majesty had taken the most vigilant precautions to foresee
+and prevent all dangers that might threaten from sea, yet did she not
+deem herself and country too secure against the enemy by these means,
+and therefore prepared a royal army to receive them in case of landing.
+But it was not the will of God that the enemy should set foot on
+England, and the queen became victorious over him at sea with small
+hazard, and little bloodshed of her subjects. Having thus shewn the
+designs of the Spaniards, and the course pursued by the queen to prevent
+them, I propose now to consider the errors committed on both sides[348].
+
+[Footnote 348: Our readers are requested to remember that these are the
+reflections of Sir William Monson, a contemporary.--E.]
+
+Nothing could appear more rational or more likely to happen, after the
+Duke of Medina Sidonia had got intelligence of the state of our navy,
+than a desire to surprise them at unawares in harbour; since he well
+knew, if he had taken away or destroyed our strength at sea, that he
+might have landed when and where he pleased, which is a great advantage
+to an invading enemy: Yet, admitting it to have had the effect he
+designed, I see not how he is to be commended for infringing the
+instructions he had received from his sovereign. That being the case,
+it is easy to appreciate what blame he deserved for the breach of his
+instructions, when so ill an event followed from his rashness and
+disobedience. It was not his want of experience, or his laying the blame
+on Valdes, that excused him at his return to Spain, where he certainly
+had been severely punished, had not his wife obtained for him the royal
+favour.
+
+Before the arrival in Spain of the ships that escaped from the
+catastrophe of this expedition, it was known there that Diego Flores de
+Valdes had persuaded the duke to infringe the royal instructions.
+Accordingly, the king had given strict orders in all his ports, wherever
+Valdes might arrive, to apprehend him, which was executed, and he was
+carried to the castle of Santander, without being permitted to plead in
+his defence, and remained there without being ever seen or heard of
+afterwards; as I learned from his page, with whom I afterwards
+conversed, we being both prisoners together in the castle of Lisbon. If
+the directions of the king of Spain had been punctually carried into
+execution, then the armada had kept along the coast of France, and had
+arrived in the road of Calais before being discovered by our fleet,
+which might have greatly endangered the queen and realm, our fleet being
+so far off at Plymouth. And, though the Prince of Parma had not been
+presently ready, yet he might have gained sufficient time to get in
+readiness, in consequence of our fleet being absent. Although the prince
+was kept in by the thirty sail of Hollanders, yet a sufficient number of
+the dukes fleet might have been able to drive them from the road of
+Dunkirk and to have possessed themselves of that anchorage, so as to
+have secured the junction of the armada and the land army; after which
+it would have been an easy matter for them to have transported
+themselves to England. What would have ensued on their landing may be
+well imagined.
+
+But it was the will of HIM who directs all men and their actions, that
+the fleets should meet, and the enemy be beaten, as they were, and
+driven from their anchorage in Calais roads, the Prince of Parma
+blockaded in the port of Dunkirk, and the armada forced to go about
+Scotland and Ireland with great hazard and loss: Which shews how God did
+marvellously defend us against the dangerous designs of our enemies.
+Here was a favourable opportunity offered for us to have followed up the
+victory upon them: For, after they were beaten from the road of Calais,
+and all their hopes and designs frustrated, if we had once more offered
+to fight them, it is thought that the duke was determined to surrender,
+being so persuaded by his confessor. This example, it is very likely,
+would have been followed by the rest. But this opportunity was lost, not
+through the negligence or backwardness of the lord admiral, but through
+the want of providence in those who had the charge of furnishing and
+providing for the fleet: For, at that time of so great advantage, when
+they came to examine into the state of their stores, they found a
+general scarcity of powder and shot, for want of which they were forced
+to return home; besides which, the dreadful storms which destroyed so
+many of the Spanish fleet, made it impossible for our ships to pursue
+those of them that remained. Another opportunity was lost, not much
+inferior to the other, by not sending part of our fleet to the west of
+Ireland, where the Spaniards were of necessity to pass, after the many
+dangers and disasters they had endured. If we had been so happy as to
+have followed this course, which was both thought of and discoursed of
+at the time, we had been absolutely victorious over this great and
+formidable armada. For they were reduced to such extremity, that they
+would willingly have yielded, as divers of them confessed that were
+shipwrecked in Ireland.
+
+By this we may see how weak and feeble are the designs of men, in
+respect of the great Creator; and how indifferently he dealt between the
+two nations, sometimes giving one the advantage sometimes the other; and
+yet so that he only ordered the battle.
+
+
+SECTION VI.
+
+_Account of the Relief of a part of the Spanish Armada, at Anstruther in
+Scotland, in 1588_[349].
+
+
+However glorious and providential the defeat and destruction of the
+_Invincible Armada_, it does not belong to the present work to give a
+minute relation of that great national event. It seems peculiarly
+necessary and proper, however, in this work, to give a very curious
+unpublished record respecting the miserable fate of the Spanish armada,
+as written by a contemporary, the Reverend James Melville, minister of
+Anstruther, a sea-port town on the Fife, or northern, shore of the
+Frith of Forth.
+
+[Footnote 349: From MS. Memoirs of James Melville, a contemporary.]
+
+James Melville, who was born in 1556, and appears to have been inducted
+to the living of Anstruther only a short time before the year 1588, left
+a MS. history of his own life and times, extending to the year 1601. Of
+this curious unpublished historical document, there are several copies
+extant, particularly in the splendid library of the Faculty of
+Advocates, and in that belonging to the Writers to the Signet, both at
+Edinburgh. The present article is transcribed from a volume of MSS
+belonging to a private gentleman, communicated to the editor by a valued
+literary friend. It had formerly belonged to a respectable clergyman of
+Edinburgh, and has the following notice of its origin written by the
+person to whom it originally belonged.
+
+"The following History of the Life of James Melville, was transcribed
+from an old MS. lent to me by Sir William Calderwood of Poltoun, one of
+the Judges of the Courts of Session and Justiciary, who had it among
+other papers that belonged to his grand-uncle, Mr David Calderwood,
+author of Altare Damascenum, History, &c."
+
+This MS. so far as it contains the Life of James Melville, extends to
+360 folio pages; of which the present article occupies about three
+pages, from near the bottom of p. 184. to nearly the same part of p.
+187. The orthography seems to have been considerably modernized by the
+transcriber, but without changing the antiquated words and modes of
+expression. Such of these as appeared difficult to be understood by our
+English readers, are here explained between brackets.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+That winter, [1587-8] the King [James VI. of Scotland] was occupied in
+commenting of the Apocalyps, and in setting out sermons thereupon,
+against the papists and Spaniards; and yet, by a piece of great
+oversight, the papists practiced never more busily in this land, and
+[nor] made greater preparation for receiving of the Spaniards, nor
+[than] that year. For a long time, the news of a Spanish navy and army
+had been blazed abroad; and about the lambastyde of the year 1588, this
+island had found a fearful effect thereof, to the utter subversion both
+of kirk and policy, if God had not wonderfully watched over the same,
+and mightily foughen and defeat that army, by his souldiers the
+elements, which he made all four most fiercely till afflict them, till
+almost utter consumption. Terrible was the fear, peircing were the
+preachings, earnest zealous and fervent were the prayers, sounding were
+the sighs and sabs, and abounding were the tears, at that fast and
+general assembly keeped at Edinburgh, when the news were credibly told,
+sometimes of their landing at Dunbar, sometimes at St Andrews and in
+Tay, and now and then at Aberdeen and Cromerty firth: and, in very deed,
+as we knew certainly soon after, the Lord of armies, who rides upon the
+wings of the wind, the Keeper of his own Israel, was in the mean time
+convying that monstrous navy about our coasts, and directing their hulks
+and galliasses to the islands, rocks and sands, whereupon he had
+distinat their wrack and destruction.
+
+For, within two or three moneths thereafter, early in the morning by
+break of day, one of our baillies[350] came to my bed side, saying, but
+not with fray [fear], "I have to tell you news, Sir: There is arrived
+within our harbour this morning, a shipfull of Spaniards, but not to
+give mercy; but to ask." And so shews me that the commander had landed,
+and he had commanded them to their ship again, and the Spaniards had
+humbly obeyed. He therefore desired me to rise and hear their petition
+with them. Up I got with diligence, and, assembling the honest men of
+the town, came to the tolbooth[351], and after consultation taken to
+hear them and what answer to make, there presented us a very venerable
+man of big stature, and grave and stout countenance, grey haired and
+very humble like, who, after much and very low courtesie, bowing down
+with his face near the ground, and touching my shoe with his hand, began
+his harangue in the Spanish tongue, whereof I understood the substance;
+and, I being about to answer in Latin, he having only a young man with
+him to be his interpreter, [who] began and told over again to us in good
+English.
+
+[Footnote 350: The baillies of towns in Scotland are equivalent to
+aldermen in England. The author here refers to the town of Anstruther, a
+sea port town of Fife, on the northern shore of the Firth of Forth, of
+which he was minister. There are two Anstruthers, easter and wester,
+very near each other, and now separate parishes; but it does not appear
+to which of these the present historical document refers: Perhaps they
+were then one.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 351: The town-house; but now generally applied to signify the
+prison, then, and even now, often attached to the town hall.--E.]
+
+The sum was, That king Philip his master had rigged out a navy and army
+to land in England, for just causes to be avenged of many intollerable
+wrongs which he had received of that nation. But God, for their sins,
+had been against them, and by storm of weather had driven the navy _by_
+[past] the coast of England, and him with certain captains, being the
+general of twenty hulks, upon an isle of Scotland called the Fair isle,
+where they had made shipwrack, and were, so many as had escaped the
+merciless seas and rocks, more nor [than] six or seven weeks suffered
+great hunger and cold, till conducting that bark out of Orkney, they
+were come hither as to their special friends and confederates, to kiss
+the kings majesties hand of Scotland, and herewith he _becked_ [bowed]
+even to the _yeard_ [ground]; and to find relief and comfort thereby to
+himself, these gentlemen, captains, and the poor souldiers, whose
+condition was for the present most miserable and pitiful.
+
+I answered this much in sum, That, howbeit neither our friendship, which
+could not be great, seeing their king and they were friends to the
+greatest enemy of Christ, the pope of Rome, and our king and we defied
+him, nor yet their cause against our neighbours and special friends of
+England, could procure any benefit at our hands for their relief or
+comfort; nevertheless they should know by experience that we were men,
+and so moved by human compassion, and christians of better religion
+_nor_ [than] they, which should _kythe_ [appear manifest] in the fruits
+and effects plain contrary to theirs: For, whereas our people, resorting
+among them in peaceable and lawful affairs of merchandise, were
+violently taken and cast in prison, their goods and _gier_ [chattels]
+confiscate, and their bodies committed to the cruel flaming fire for the
+cause of religion, they should find nothing amongst us but Christian
+pity and works of mercy and alms, leaving to God to work in their hearts
+concerning religion as it pleased him. This being truly reported again
+to him by his townsmen, with great reverence he gave thanks and said,
+"He could not make answer for their _kirk_ [church], and the laws and
+order thereof, only for himself, that there were divers Scotsmen who
+knew him, and to whom he had shewn courtesy and favour at Calice[352],
+and as he supposed some of this same town of Anstruther."
+
+[Footnote 352: _Calice_ in this passage, and _Calais_ in one subsequent,
+certainly means Cadiz in Spain; which to this day is often called
+_Cales_ by English mariners.--E.]
+
+So [I] shewed him that the bailies had granted him licence, with the
+captains, to go to their lodging for their refreshment, but to none of
+their men to land, till the overlord of the town were advertised, and
+understood the kings majesties mind _anent_ [concerning] them. Thus with
+great courtesie he departed.
+
+That night the _laird_ [lord of the manor] being advertised, came; and,
+on the morn, with a good number of the gentlemen of the countrey round
+about, gave the said general and the captains _presence_, [audience] and
+after the same speeches in effect as before, received them in his house,
+and suffered the souldiers to come a land and ly altogether to the
+number of thirteen score, for the most part young beardless men,
+_silly_, [weak] travelled, and hungered; to the which, one day or two
+_kail pottage_[353] and fish was given; for my advice was conform to the
+prophet Elizeus [Elisha] his to the king of Israel in Samaria, _Give
+them bread and water, &c._
+
+[Footnote 353: A mess formerly much used in Scotland among the commons,
+being a kind of soup maigre, composed of _kail_, a species of greens or
+coleworts, boiled in water, and thickened with oat-meal, grits, or
+shelled barley.--E.]
+
+The names of the commanders were Jan [Juan] Gomes de Medina, general of
+twenty hulks, captain Patricio, captain de Lagaretto, captain de
+Luffera, captain Mauretio, and Seingour Serrano. But verily all the
+while, my heart melted within me for desire of thankfulness to God, when
+I remembered the prideful and cruel natural temper of the people, and
+how they would have used us, in case they had landed with their forces
+among us, and the wonderful work of Gods mercy and justice in making us
+see them, the chief commanders of them, to make such due-gard
+[submission] and courtesie to poor seamen, and their souldiers, so
+abjectly, to beg alms at our doors and in our streets.
+
+In the mean time, they knew not of the wrack of the rest, but supposed
+that the rest of the army was safely returned [to Spain,] till one day I
+got in St Andrews, in print, the wrack of the gallies in particular,
+with the names of the principal men, and how they were used, in Ireland
+and our Highlands, in Wales and other parts of England. The which, when
+I recorded to Jan Gomes, by particular and special names, he cried out
+for grief, _bursted and grat_ [burst into tears.] This Jan Gomes shewed
+great kindness to a ship of our town, which he found arriested at
+_Calais_[354] at home coming, _rode_[355] to court for her, and made
+great _russe_ [praise] of Scotland to his king, took the honest men to
+his house, and inquired for the laird of Anstruther, for the minister,
+and his host, and sent home many commendations: But we thanked God in
+our hearts, that we had seen them in that form.
+
+[Footnote 354: This must signify Cadiz, as mentioned before.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 355: Perhaps ought to have been _wrote_.--E.]
+
+
+SECTION VII.
+
+_A cruising Voyage to the Azores in 1589, by the Earl of
+Cumberland_[356].
+
+
+We learn from Hakluyt, II. 647, that this narrative was written by Mr
+Edward Wright, an eminent mathematician and engineer, who was the real
+author of that admirable invention for charts, commonly called
+_Mercators projection_, but unjustly, as Mr Wright complains in his work
+entitled _Vulgar Errors_, where he charges Mercator with plagiarism.
+From the narrative, Mr Wright appears to have been engaged in the
+expedition and on board the Victory[357].
+
+[Footnote 356: Hakluyt, II. 647. Churchill, III. 161. Astley, I. 206.]
+
+[Footnote 357: Astley, I. 206. a.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The right honourable the Earl of Cumberland, intending to cruize against
+the enemy, prepared a small fleet of four ships only[358] at his own
+charges, one of which was the Victory[359] belonging to the queens royal
+navy. The others were the Meg and Margaret, two small ships, one of
+which was soon obliged to be sent home as unable to endure the sea,
+besides a small caravel. Having assembled about 400 men, sailors and
+soldiers, with several gentlemen volunteers, the earl and they embarked
+and set sail from Plymouth Sound on the 28th June 1589, accompanied by
+the following captains and gentlemen. Captain Christopher Lister, an
+officer of great resolution, Captain Edward Careless, _alias Wright_,
+who had been captain of the Hope in Sir Francis Drakes expedition to
+the West Indies against St Domingo and Carthagena; Captain Boswel, Mr
+Mervin, Mr Henry Long, Mr Partridge, Mr Norton; Mr William Monson,
+afterwards Sir William[360], who was captain of the Meg and
+vice-admiral, and Mr Pigeon, who was captain of the caravel.
+
+[Footnote 358: Sir William Monson, in Churchills collection, says there
+were _five_ ships; and indeed we find a fifth, called the Saucy Jack,
+mentioned in the narrative.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 359: The Victory was of 800 tons, carrying 32 guns and 400
+men; of whom, according to Sir William Monson, 268 were mariners, and
+100 sailors, the remaining 32 being probably soldiers, or as we now call
+them marines. The distinction between mariners and sailors is not
+obvious; perhaps what are now called ordinary and able seamen,--E.]
+
+[Footnote 360: Sir William Monson was author of some curious Naval
+Tracts, giving an account of the Royal Navy of England in the reigns of
+Queen Elizabeth and James I. which are preserved in Churchills
+Collection, Vol. III. pp. 147--508.--E.]
+
+About three days after our departure from Plymouth, we met with three
+French ships, one of which belonged to Newhaven[361], and another to St
+Maloes; and finding them to be leaguers[362], and therefore lawful
+prizes, we took them, and sent two of them home to England with all
+their loading, being mostly fish from Newfoundland, having first
+distributed among our ships as much of the fish as they could find
+stowage room for; and in the third ship we sent all the prisoners home
+to France. On that day and the next we met some other ships, but finding
+them belonging to Rotterdam and Embden, bound for Rochelle, we dismissed
+them. On the 28th and 29th, we met several of our English ships
+returning from an expedition to Portugal, which we relieved with
+victuals. The 13th July, being in sight of the coast of Spain in lat.
+39 deg. N. we descried eleven ships, on which we immediately prepared to
+engage them, sending the Meg commanded by Captain Monson to ascertain
+what and whence they were. On the approach of the Meg some shots were
+exchanged, and as their admiral and vice-admiral displayed their flags,
+we perceived that some fighting was likely to follow. Having therefore
+prepared for battle, we made all haste towards them, always taking care
+to get to windward, and between ten and eleven o'clock A.M. we came up
+with them in the Victory, when they all yielded after a slight
+resistance. The masters all came on board our admiral, and shewed their
+several passports from Hamburg, Lubeck, Bremen, Pomerania, and Calais.
+They had certain bags of pepper and cinnamon, which they confessed to
+belong to a Jew in Lisbon, which they had charge of to deliver to his
+factor in their country; and finding this to be lawful prize by their
+own confession, the same was taken and divided among our whole company,
+the value being estimated at L.4500, at two shillings the pound[363]. We
+dismissed these ships on the 17th of July, but seven of their men,
+having volunteered as sailors in our fleet, were taken to reinforce our
+crew. After this we held on our course for the Azores or Western
+islands.
+
+[Footnote 361: Probably that port now called Havre de Grace.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 362: Alluding to the _Catholic League_, then in alliance with
+Spain, and in rebellious opposition to their lawful sovereign, for the
+purpose of excluding the king of Navarre, afterwards Henry IV. from the
+crown of France.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 363: Sir William Monson, who gives a short account of this
+expedition in the Naval Tracts already quoted, says that spices to the
+value of L.7000 were taken out of these vessels.--E.]
+
+In the morning of the 1st August we got sight of St Michael, one of the
+eastermost of the Azores, towards which we made sail all that day; and,
+putting up a Spanish flag at our maintop that we might not be suspected
+for enemies, we approached at night to the chief town and road of the
+island, where we espied three ships and some other vessels at anchor,
+all of which we determined to take during the darkness of the night.
+Accordingly about ten or eleven o'clock P.M. our boats were sent well
+manned to cut their cables and hawsers and tow them out to sea. On
+coming to them, one of the largest of these ships was found to be the
+Falcon of London, commanded by a Scots pilot who passed her off as his
+own. But our men let loose three other smaller ships, which they towed
+towards us, most of their men leaping overboard and swimming on shore
+with loud outcries, which were answered from the town, which was all in
+an uproar on hearing what was going forwards. The castle discharged some
+shots at our boats, but being unable to see them by reason of the
+darkness, did us no harm. The Scotsman too, to make the Spaniards
+believe him their friend, fired a few shots in the air. Shortly after,
+he and some others came on board our admiral, offering their services.
+The three ships brought out were laden with wine and sallad oil from
+Seville. The same day our caravel chaced a Spanish caravel on shore,
+which carried letters by which we learnt that the caraks had departed
+from the island of Tercera eight days before.
+
+The 7th of August we got sight of a small ship which we chased towards
+Tercera with our pinnace, the weather being calm, and overtook her
+towards evening, when we found in her 30 tons of good Madeira wine,
+besides woollen cloth, silk, taffeta, and other goods. Coming on the
+14th to the island of Flores, it was determined to take in fresh water,
+and such fresh provisions as the island afforded; wherefore manning our
+boats with about 120 men, we rowed towards the shore, where the
+inhabitants, who were assembled at the watering-place, hung out a flag
+of truce, and we did the like. On coming to them, the earl gave them to
+understand, by means of his Portuguese interpreter, that he was a friend
+to their king Don Antonio, and came not with any intention to injure
+them, meaning only to procure water and fresh provisions, by way of
+exchange for oil wine and pepper, to which they readily agreed, and sent
+off some of their people immediately for beeves and sheep. In the
+meantime we marched southwards to their town of Santa Cruz, whence all
+the inhabitants had fled and carried off every thing of value. On
+demanding the reason of this, they answered it proceeded from fear, and
+that they always did so on the appearance of any ships near their coast.
+That part of the island was mostly composed of large rocky hills and
+barren mountains, and was little inhabited, being apt to be molested by
+ships of war; and even Santa Cruz, one of their principal towns, was all
+in ruins, having been burnt about two years before by some English ships
+of war, according to what we were told by the inhabitants. As we were
+rowing towards the Victory in the evening, a huge fish pursued us for
+nearly two miles, mostly distant about a spear length from the stern of
+the boat, and sometimes so near as to touch. The tips of his fins at the
+gills, appearing often above water, were by estimation four or five
+yards asunder, and his jaws gaping a yard and half wide, put us in fear
+he might overset our pinnace; but God be thanked, by rowing as hard as
+we could, we escaped.
+
+When we were about the island of Flores, we got notice from a small
+vessel called the Drake[364], that the caraks were at Tercera, of which
+news we were very glad, and made sail thither with all the speed we
+could. By the way we came to Fayal road on the 27th August after sunset,
+where we saw some ships at anchor, towards which Captains Lister and
+Monson were sent in the skiff to see what they were, and lest any
+mischance should befall our boat, we sent in likewise the Saucy Jack and
+the small caravel; but as the wind was off shore, these vessels were not
+able to set up to where the Spanish ships were anchored. The skiff went
+on however, and endeavoured to board a ship of 250 tons, which carried
+14 pieces of ordnance, and continued fighting with her for an hour,
+till our other boats came up to the rescue and aid of the skiff. A fresh
+boarding was then attempted, by one boat on the quarter and another on
+the bow, when we entered on one side while all the Spaniards leapt
+overboard on the other side, except Juan de Palma the captain, and two
+or three more. This ship was moored close to the castle, which fired at
+us all the time; but the only one wounded on the occasion was the master
+of our caravel, who had the calf of one of his legs shot away. This ship
+was from St Juan de Puerto Rico, laden with sugar ginger and hides.
+After we had towed her clear of the castle, our boats went in again and
+brought out five other small ships; one laden with hides, another with
+elephants teeth, grains[365], cocoa-nuts, and goats skins, come from
+Guinea; another with woad, and two with dog-fish, which two last were
+set adrift as of no value, but all the other four were sent for England
+on the 30th of August. At the taking of these prizes there were
+consorted with us some other small men of war, as Master John Davis,
+with his ship, pinnace, and boat; Captain Markesburie with his ship,
+whose owner was Sir Walter Raleigh; and the bark of Lyme, which also was
+consorted with us before.
+
+[Footnote 364: Sir William Monson says, from an English man of war.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 365: Guinea Pepper.--E.]
+
+The last of August we came in sight of Tercera in the morning, being
+about nine or ten leagues from shore, when we espied a small boat under
+sail coming towards us, which seemed strange at such a distance from
+land and no ship in sight; but on coming near, we found it to contain
+eight Englishmen, who had been prisoners in Tercera, and had committed
+themselves to the sea in this open boat in hopes to escape. Their
+mainyard consisted of two pipe-staves tied together by the ends, and
+they had no other provisions than what they had been able to carry off
+in their pockets and bosoms. When taken on board the Victory, they gave
+us certain assurance that the caraks had left Tercera about a week
+before. Being thus without any hopes of taking the caraks, it was
+resolved to return for Fayal, intending to surprise the town; but till
+the 9th of September, we had either the wind so contrary, or such calm
+weather, that in all that time we scarcely made nine or ten leagues way,
+lingering up and down near the island of Pico.
+
+In the afternoon of the 10th September, we came again to Fayal road;
+upon which the earl sent Captain Lister, with a person from Graciosa
+whom Captain Monson had taken some time before, and some others,
+carrying a message to Fayal. He was met by some of the inhabitants in a
+boat, who were brought by Captain Lister to my lord, who gave them their
+choice, either to allow him to take possession of the platform or fort,
+when he and his company would remain quietly there for some space,
+without injury, till the inhabitants had compounded for the ransom of
+their town; or else to stand the chance of war. With this message they
+returned on shore; but those who had charge of the fort said, that it
+was contrary to their allegiance and the oath they had taken to king
+Philip, to deliver up their garrison without endeavouring to defend it.
+Upon this, the earl gave orders for all the boats of the different ships
+to be manned and armed, and he soon afterwards landed with all his men
+on the sandy beach under the side of a hill, about half a league from
+the fort. Certain troops both horse and foot were seen on the top of the
+hill, and two other companies appeared to oppose us with displayed
+ensigns, one on the shore in front of the town, which marched towards
+our landing place as if they meant to attack us; while the other was
+seen in a valley to the south of the fort, as if coming to assist in
+defending the town; and at the same time, the garrison in the fort fired
+upon us briskly from their cannon. In spite of all these demonstrations
+of resistance, having first marshalled his men in proper order, my lord
+marched along the sandy beach towards the fort, passing between the sea
+and the town for something more than a mile; and as the shore became
+rocky, so as to render any farther progress in that direction extremely
+difficult, he entered the town, and marched through the streets
+unopposed to the fort, these companies of the enemy, that seemed at
+first resolved to resist his progress, being soon dispersed. Those in
+the fort likewise fled at our approach, leaving my lord and his men to
+scale the walls and gain possession, without any resistance. In the
+meantime the ships continued to batter the town and fort, until they saw
+the _red cross_ of England floating from the walls.
+
+Fayal is the principal town of this island, and is situated directly
+over against the high and mighty mountain of _Pico_, towards the
+north-west from that mountain, from which it is divided by a narrow sea
+or strait, which at that place is some two or three leagues broad,
+between the islands of Fayal and Pico. This town contained about 300
+houses, which were handsomely and strongly built of stone and lime,
+their roofs being double covered with hollow tyles, much like those used
+in England, only that they are less at one end than at the other. Almost
+every house had a cistern or well in a garden behind, in which likewise
+there were vines with ripe grapes, forming pleasant arbours or shady
+walks; and in every garden there grew some tobacco, then hardly known,
+but now commonly used in England, with which the women of the place were
+then in use to stain their faces, to make them look young and fresh. In
+these gardens there likewise grew pepper, both Indian and common,
+fig-trees with fruit both white and red, peach-trees rather of humble
+growth, oranges, lemons, quinces, potatoes, and other fruits and roots.
+Sweet wood, which I think is cedar, is very common in that island, and
+is used both for building and fuel.
+
+Having possessed himself of the town and fort, my lord issued orders
+that none of the soldiers or mariners should enter into any of the
+houses for plunder, and was especially careful that none of the churches
+or religious houses should suffer injury of any kind, all of which were
+preserved from violation by the appointment of guards for their
+protection. But the rest of the town, either from the want of that
+precaution, or owing to the cupidity of our people, was rifled and
+ransacked by the soldiers and mariners, who scarcely left a single house
+unsearched, taking out of them every thing that struck their fancy or
+seemed worth carrying away, such as chests of sweet wood, chairs,
+clothes, coverlets, hangings, bedding, and the like; besides many of our
+people ranged the country in search of plunder, where some of them were
+wounded by the inhabitants. The friery at this place contained
+Franciscan friars, not one of whom was able to speak pure Latin. It was
+built in 1506 by a friar of that order belonging to Angra in the island
+of Tercera. The tables in its hall or refectory had seats only on one
+side, and was always covered, as if ever ready for feasting. We
+continued in the town from the Wednesday afternoon, at which time we
+took possession, until the Saturday night, when the inhabitants agreed
+to pay 2000 ducats for its ransom, which was mostly paid in church
+plate. In the fort there were 58 pieces of iron ordnance, 23 of which,
+according to my remembrance, were mounted upon carriages, and placed
+between baricadoes or merlins on a platform by the sea side. Taking away
+all the ordnance, we set the platform on fire. On the Sunday following,
+my lord had invited as many of the inhabitants as chose to dine with him
+on board the Victory, save only Diego Gomez the governor, who only came
+once to confer about the ransom. Only four came, who were well
+entertained, and were afterwards honourably dismissed with the sound of
+drums and trumpets, and a salute from our cannon. To these persons my
+lord delivered a letter subscribed by himself, requesting all other
+Englishmen to abstain from any farther molestation of the place, save
+only to take such water and provisions as might be necessary.
+
+The day after we came to Fayal, being the 11th September, two men came
+to us from Pico, who had been prisoners in that island; and we also set
+a prisoner at liberty who had been sent thither from St Jago, being
+cousin to a servant of Don Antonio king of Portugal, then residing in
+England. On Monday we sent our boats on shore for fresh water, having
+now abundance running down the hills in consequence of heavy rain the
+night before, which otherwise had been hard to be got. Next day we sent
+again on shore to complete our stock of water, which was not then so
+easily brought off, by reason of a strong gale, which increased so much
+in the afternoon that we did not think it safe to ride so near the land,
+for which reason we weighed anchor, and stood N.W. by W. along the coast
+of Fayal. Some of the inhabitants came on board this day, who told us
+that the wind usually blew strong at W.S.W. at this time of the year on
+this coast. While near St Georges Island we saw a huge fish of a black
+colour right ahead of our ship, a little under water, or rather even
+with its surface, on which the sea broke in such manner that we supposed
+it a rock; and as we were going directly stem on, we were in great fear
+for a time how to avoid the seeming danger, till at length we saw it
+move out of our way.
+
+It lightened much in the night of the 16th September, which was followed
+by heavy rains and violent gales till the 21st. On the 23d we returned
+to Fayal road, to weigh an anchor which we had left in our haste to
+depart. We went on shore to the town, whence many of the people ran
+away, or were preparing to depart with their goods, till assured by my
+lord that they had nothing to fear, as we only came for fresh water and
+other necessaries, for all of which they should be paid to their
+satisfaction. We then went quietly about the town, purchasing such
+things as we needed as peaceably as if we had been in England; and the
+people helped us to fill our water casks, for which they received what
+satisfied them. We were forced by a heavy tempest to depart on the 25th,
+before we had completed our water; and the tempest came on so suddenly
+that my lord himself had to raise the people from their beds to weigh
+the anchors, himself assisting at the capstans, and cheering the men
+with wine. Next day, the caravel and the Saucy Jack were sent to the
+road of St Michaels to see what was there, and we followed on the 27th,
+plying to and fro; but by contrary winds on the 28th, 29th, and 30th, we
+were driven to leeward, and could not get near the island. The 1st
+October, we sailed along the island of Tercera, and at Cape Brazil, near
+Angra, the strongest town of that island, we espied some boats going
+towards the town, which we attempted to intercept; but being near land,
+they ran on shore and escaped.
+
+Coming near Graciosa in the afternoon, my lord sent Captain Lister on
+shore, to inform the islanders that he only wanted water, wine, and some
+fresh provisions, and would not otherwise trouble them. They sent back
+word that they could give no positive answer, until the governors of the
+island had consulted on the subject, and desired therefore to send for
+an answer next day. The 2d October, early in the morning, we dispatched
+our long-boat and pinnace, with 50 or 60 men, together with the Margaret
+and Captain Davis in his ship to protect them, as we now wanted our
+other consorts; but when our people endeavoured to land, they were fired
+at by the islanders, who would not permit them to go on shore, several
+troops of armed men being drawn up to oppose us with displayed ensigns.
+Our boats rowed along shore, seeking some place where they might land,
+without the enemy having too much advantage, our ships and boats firing
+all the while upon the islanders. No convenient place being found for
+landing, we were under the necessity of retiring without any answer, as
+had been promised. After some negociation and delay, they agreed to let
+us have sixty butts of wine, together with fresh provisions to refresh
+our men; but declared we could not have water, having little or none for
+themselves, except what they had saved in tanks or cisterns, insomuch
+that they would rather give us two tons of wine than one of water. They
+requested that our soldiers might not come on shore, as they would
+themselves bring all they had promised to the water side; which request
+was granted, one of their messengers remaining on board as an hostage
+for the fulfilment of their promise, while the other went ashore with
+our empty casks and some of our men to assist in filling them and
+bringing them away, with such other provision as was promised.
+
+The Margaret, the ship of Captain Davis, and another belonging to
+Weymouth remained at anchor before the town, to take in our wine and
+provisions. This ship of Weymouth came to us only the day before, having
+taken a rich prize said to be worth sixteen thousand pounds, and brought
+us news that the West India fleet had not yet gone past, but was shortly
+expected. We put to sea in the Victory, and on Saturday the 4th October,
+we took a French ship of St Maloes, a city belonging to the league,
+laden with fish from Newfoundland, which had been forced to cut away her
+mast in a tempest, and was now bound to Gracioso for repairs. Taking out
+her principal people, we put some of our own mariners and soldiers on
+board, and sent her off for England. At night on the following Sunday,
+having received all the supplies promised us at Gracioso, we parted from
+the islanders in a friendly manner, and saluted them with our ordnance.
+
+The three next days we plyed to and fro among these western islands,
+having very rough weather. On Thursday night, being driven to within
+three or four leagues of Tercera, we saw fifteen sail of the West India
+fleet going into the haven of Angra in that island; but, though we lay
+as close to windward as possible during the four following days, we were
+unable to get near them. At this time we lost sight of our French prize,
+which was not able to lay so close to the wind as our ships, and heard
+no more of her till our return to England, where she arrived safe.
+Getting at length on the fifth day near the mouth of Angra harbour, we
+inclined to have run among the West India fleet, on purpose to have cut
+out some of them if possible; but this enterprize was deemed too
+hazardous, considering the strength of the place, as the ships were
+hauled close to the town on our approach, under protection of the castle
+of Brazil on one side, having 25 pieces of ordnance, and a fort on the
+other side with 13 or 14 large brass cannon. Besides which, on nearing
+the land, the wind proved too scanty for the attempt.
+
+On Thursday the 14th October, we sent our boat into the road of Angra to
+take the soundings, and to endeavour to find some proper place for us to
+anchor, beyond the shot of the castle and within shot of some of the
+ships, that we might either force them to come out to us or sink them
+where they lay. Our boat found a fit place for us, but the wind would
+not suffer us to get to it; and besides, if we had anchored there, it
+was more likely that they would have run their ships on shore, to save
+their lives and liberties and some of their goods, than have resigned
+all to us by coming out. We therefore discharged a few guns at them, but
+our shot fell far short; upon which we departed, as it was not likely
+they would come out while we watched before the mouth of the harbour, or
+remained within sight. We accordingly put to sea, where we cruized for
+five days, sending a pinnace to watch them close in shore but out of
+sight, to bring us word when they set sail. After some time the pinnace
+brought us notice that all the ships had taken down their sails and
+struck their top-masts, so that we concluded they would remain till sure
+of our departure. Wherefore, having heard there were some Scots ships at
+St Michael, we sailed thither on the 20th October, and found there one
+Scots _roader_, and two or three more at Villa-franca, the next road, a
+league or two east from St Michaels. From these we received five or six
+butts of wine and some fresh water, but by no means sufficient to serve
+our wants. The 21st October, we sent our long-boat on shore to procure
+fresh water at a brook a short way west from Villa-franca; but the
+inhabitants came down with about 150 armed men, having two ensigns
+displayed, and our boat was forced to return without water, having spent
+all its powder in vain, and being unable to prevail against such great
+odds.
+
+Learning that the island of St Mary was a place of no great strength, we
+made sail for that place, intending to take in water there, and to go
+thence to the coast of Spain. On the Friday following, my lord sent
+captain Lister and captain Amias Preston, afterwards Sir Amias, with our
+long-boat and pinnace, with between 60 and 70 arquebusiers, carrying a
+friendly letter to the islanders, desiring leave to procure water, in
+exchange for which he engaged to do them no harm. Captain Preston had
+come on board the Victory not long before from his own ship, which lost
+company with us in the night, so that he was under the necessity of
+remaining with us. We departed from the Victory in our boats about nine
+in the morning, rowing for the land, and by three in the afternoon had
+got within a league or two of the shore, being then four or five leagues
+from the Victory, and our men sore spent with hard rowing. At this time
+we perceived, to our great joy, two ships at anchor close under the
+town; upon which we shifted six or seven of our men into the boat
+belonging to captain Davis, being too much crowded, and retaining about
+20 arquebusiers in the pinnace, we made towards these two ships with all
+possible haste.
+
+While proceeding towards them, we saw several boats passing between the
+_roaders_[366] and the shore, and many men in their shirts swimming and
+wading on shore, who, as we afterwards learnt, were endeavouring to get
+the ships fast aground; and the inhabitants were at the same time busied
+in preparing to defend the ships and themselves against us. On coming
+near them, captain Lister commanded the trumpets to be sounded, but
+prohibited any firing till farther orders; yet some of the people,
+either not hearing, or disregardful of these orders, began firing as
+soon as the trumpets sounded, though with small injury to the islanders,
+who mostly lay under the cover of trenches or other means of defence.
+Captain Lister then urged on the rowers, who began to shrink at the shot
+from the enemy which flew thick about their ears, and was himself the
+first to board one of the ships which lay farther from shore than the
+other, while we speedily followed, still plying the enemy with our shot,
+and having cut her cables and hawsers, we towed her out to sea. In the
+mean time, captain Davis came up in his boat, and boarded the other
+ship, both having been abandoned by their crews; but, as she was quite
+fast aground, he was under the necessity of quitting her, exposed to
+shot and stones even from the shore. At this time, the towns-people made
+an attempt to capture captain Davis and his boats crew, which were but
+few in number; but they joined us, and we jointly towed off our prize,
+which was a ship from Brazil laden with sugar. In this exploit we had
+two men slain and sixteen wounded, while it is probable that the enemy
+suffered small loss, as they were mostly sheltered behind stone walls,
+many of which were built above one another on the end of the hill on
+which the town stands, between two vallies. On the top of the hill they
+had some large cannon, from which they fired leaden bullets, one only
+of which went through the side of our prize, but did no other injury.
+
+[Footnote 366: This uncommon word seems merely to signify, ships lying
+at anchor in an open road.--E.]
+
+Next day we made another attempt to get fresh water at this island, but
+as we were ignorant of the landing-place, where we found many
+inconveniences and disadvantages, we were unable to effect our purpose.
+Wherefore we departed on the night of the 25th October for the island of
+St George, in quest of fresh water, and got there on the 27th. Observing
+a stream of water running down into the sea, the pinnace, and long-boat
+were sent under captains Preston and Manson, by whom a letter was sent
+by my lord to the islanders, desiring leave to take water quietly, and
+no farther injury should be done them. On getting to the shore, our men
+found some of the poor islanders hid among the rocks, being afraid of
+us. On the 29th, our boats returned with fresh water, bringing only six
+tons to the Victory, alleging they could get no more; thinking, as was
+afterwards supposed, as he had only 12 tons of water and wine, that my
+lord would now return direct for England, as many of our men greatly
+desired. My lord, was very unwilling to do this, and meant next day to
+have taken in more water, but from the roughness of the sea, and the
+wind freshening, and owing to the unwillingness of the people, no more
+water was procured: yet my lord would not return with so much provision
+unspent, especially as the expedition had not hitherto produced such
+fruits as might reasonably satisfy himself and others. Wherefore, with
+consent of the whole ships companies, it was agreed to go for England by
+way of the coast of Spain, to endeavour to make more captures, the whole
+people being reduced to half allowance of water, except such as were
+sick or wounded, who were to have whole allowance. On Saturday, the 31st
+October, as the Margaret was very leaky, she was sent off direct for
+England in charge of the Brazil ship, and in them our sick and wounded
+men were sent home; but captain Monson was taken out of the _Megge_ into
+the Victory[367].
+
+
+[Footnote 367: In the commencement of this voyage, the Meg and Margaret
+are named as distinct ships, one of which is said to have been sent home
+soon after, as unfit for sea. In this passage the Margaret and Megge are
+evidently different names for the same ship.--E.]
+
+We now shaped our course for the coast of Spain, having the wind fair
+and large, which had seldom been the case hitherto. On the 4th November
+we saw a sail right before us, to which we gave chase, and coming up
+with her about 3 P.M. we took possession of her, being a ship of about
+110 tons burden, from _Pernambucke_ or Fernambucco, in Brazil, bound
+for Portugal, having on board 410 chests of sugar, and 50 quintals of
+Brazil wood, each quintal being 100 pounds weight. We took her in lat.
+29 deg. N. about 200 leagues west from Lisbon. Captain Preston was sent on
+board the prize, who brought her principal people into the Victory,
+certain of our seamen and soldiers being appointed to take charge of
+her. The Portuguese reported, that they had seen another ship that day
+before them about noon; wherefore, when all things were properly
+disposed respecting our prize, we left her under the charge of captain
+Davis, with whom likewise we left our long-boat, taking his smaller boat
+with us, and made all sail due east after this other ship, leaving
+orders for captain Davis and the prize to follow us due east, and if he
+had not sight of us next morning, to bear away direct for England. Next
+morning we could not see the vessel of which we were in chase, neither
+was the prize or the ship of captain Davis to be seen.
+
+On the 6th November, being then in lat. 38 deg. 30' N. and about 60 leagues
+west from Lisbon, captain Preston descried a sail early in the morning
+two or three leagues a-head of us, which we came up with about 8 or 9
+o'clock A.M. She was lastly from St Michaels, but originally from Brazil
+laden with sugar. While employed shifting the prisoners into the
+Victory, one of our men in the main-top espied another sail some three
+or four leagues a-head, on which we immediately sent back our boat with
+men to take charge of the prize, and made all sail in chase, so that we
+overtook the other ship about 2 P.M. She made some preparation to resist
+us, hanging many hides all round her sides, so that musquetry could not
+have injured her; but by the time we had fired two cannon shot at her,
+she lowered her sails and surrendered. She was of between 300 and 400
+tons, bound from Mexico and St John de Lowe, (San Juan de Ulloa) her
+cargo consisting of 700 dry hides; worth 10s. apiece, six chests of
+cochineal, every chest holding 100 pounds weight, and every pound worth
+L. 1, 6s. 8d., besides which she had several chests of sugar, some
+packages of China ware, with some wrought plate and silver in coin. The
+captain was an Italian, a grave, wise, and civil person, who had to the
+value of 25,000 ducats adventure in this ship. He and some of the
+principal Spanish prisoners were taken on board the Victory; and captain
+Lister was sent into the prize, with some 20 of our best mariners,
+soldiers, and sailors. In the meantime our other prize came up with us,
+and having now our hands full, we joyfully shaped our course for
+England, as we had so many Portuguese, Spanish, and French prisoners,
+that we could not well have manned any more prizes with safety to
+ourselves. Wherefore, about 6 P.M. when our other prize came up, we made
+sail for England. But as our two prizes were unable to keep up with us
+without sparing them many of our own sails, our ship rolled and wallowed
+so that it was both exceedingly troublesome, and put our main-mast in
+great danger of being carried away. Having accordingly acquainted them
+with these circumstances, and taken back our sails, we directed them to
+keep their course following us, so as to make for Portsmouth.
+
+We took this last prize in lat. 39 deg. N. about 46 leagues west from the
+Rock of Lisbon. She was one of the 16 ships we saw going into the
+harbour of Angra in the island of Tercera on the 8th October. Some of
+the prisoners taken from this ship told us, that while we were plying
+off and on before that harbour in waiting for their coming out, three of
+the largest of these ships were unloaded of all their treasure and
+merchandize, by order of the governor of Tercera, and were each manned
+with 300 soldiers, on purpose to have come out and boarded the Victory;
+but by the time these preparations were made, the Victory was gone out
+of sight.
+
+We now went merrily before the wind with all the sails we could carry,
+insomuch that between the noons of Friday and Saturday, or in 24 hours,
+we sailed near 47 leagues, or 141 English miles, although our ship was
+very foul, and much grown with sea grass, owing to our having been long
+at sea. This quick sailing made some of our company expect to be present
+at the tilting on the queens birth-day at Whitehall, while others were
+flattering themselves with keeping a jolly Christmas in England from
+their shares in the prizes. But it was our lot to keep a cold Christmas
+with the Bishop and his Clerks, rocks to the westwards of Scilly; for
+soon after the wind came about to the east, the very worst wind for us
+which could blow from the heavens, so that we could not fetch any part
+of England. Upon this our allowance of drink, before sufficiently
+scanty, was now still farther curtailed, owing to the scarcity in our
+ship, each man being confined to half a pint of cold water at a meal,
+and that not sweet. Yet this was an ample allowance in comparison, as
+our half pint was soon reduced to a quarter, and even at this reduced
+rate our store was rapidly disappearing, insomuch that it was deemed
+necessary for our preservation to put into some port in Ireland to
+procure water. We accordingly endeavoured to do this, being obliged,
+when near that coast, to lie to all night, waiting for day light; but
+when it appeared we had drifted so far to leeward in the night that we
+could fetch no part of Ireland, we were therefore constrained to return
+again, with heavy hearts, and to wait in anxious expectation till it
+should please God to send us a fair wind either for England or Ireland.
+
+In the mean time we were allowed for each man two or three spoonfuls of
+vinegar at each meal, having now no other drink, except that for two or
+three meals we had about as much wine, which was wrung out of the
+remaining lees. Under this hard fare we continued near a fortnight,
+being only able to eat a very little in all that time, by reason of our
+great want of drink. Saving that now and then we enjoyed as it were a
+feast, when rain or hail chanced to fall, on which occasions we gathered
+up the hail-stones with the most anxious care, devouring them more
+eagerly than if they had been the finest comfits. The rain-drops also
+were caught and saved with the utmost careful attention; for which
+purpose some hung up sheets tied by the four corners, having a weight in
+the middle, to make the rain run down there as in a funnel into some
+vessel placed underneath. Those who had no sheets hung up napkins or
+other clouts, which when thoroughly wet they wrung or sucked to get the
+water they had imbibed. Even the water which fell on the deck under
+foot, and washed away the filth and soil of the ship, though as dirty as
+the kennel is in towns during rain, was carefully watched and collected
+at every scupper-hole, nay, often with strife and contention, and caught
+in dishes, pots, cans, and jars, of which some drank hearty draughts,
+mud and all, without waiting for its settlement or cleansing. Others
+cleaned it by filtrating, but it went through so slowly that they could
+ill endure to wait so long, and were loath to lose so much precious
+liquid. Some licked the water like dogs with their tongues from the
+decks, sides, rails, and masts of the ship. Others, that were more
+ingenious, fastened girdles or ropes about the masts, daubing tallow
+between these and the mast, that the rain might not run down between;
+and making one part of these girdles lower than the rest, fixed spouts
+of leather at these lower parts, that the rain running down the masts
+might meet and be received at these spouts. He who was fortunate enough
+to procure a can of water by these means, was sued to, and envied as a
+rich man.
+
+   _Quem pulchrum digito monstrari, et dicere hic est_.
+
+Some of the poor Spaniards who were prisoners, though having the same
+allowance with our own men, often begged us for the love of God to give
+them as much water as they could hold in the hollow of their hands: And,
+notwithstanding our own great extremity, they were given it, to teach
+them some humanity, instead of their accustomed barbarity both to us and
+other nations. Some put leaden bullets into their months, to slack their
+thirst by chewing them. In every corner of the ship, the miserable cries
+of the sick and wounded were sounding lamentably in our ears, pitifully
+crying out and lamenting for want of drink, being ready to die, yea many
+dying for lack thereof. Insomuch, that by this great extremity we lost
+many more men than in all the voyage before; as before this, we were so
+well and amply provided for, that we lived as well and were as healthy
+as if we had been in England, very few dying among us; whereas now, some
+of our men were thrown overboard every day.
+
+The 2d of December 1589 was with us a day of festival, as it then rained
+heartily, and we saved some considerable store of water, though we were
+well wet for it, and that at midnight, and had our skins filled with it
+besides. This went down merrily, although it was bitter and dirty, with
+washing the ship, but we sweetened it with sugar, and were happy to have
+our fill. Besides our other extremities, we were so tossed and turmoiled
+with stormy and tempestuous weather, that every man had to hold fast his
+can or dish, and to fasten himself by the ropes, rails, or sides of the
+ship, to prevent falling on the deck. Our main-sail was torn from the
+yard, and blown away into the sea; and our other sails so rent and torn
+that hardly any of them remained serviceable. The raging waves and
+foaming surges of the sea came rolling upon us in successive mountains,
+breaking through the waste of the ship like a mighty river; although in
+fine weather our deck was near twenty feet above water. So that we were
+ready to cry out, with the royal prophet, Psalm 107, verses 26 and 27.
+"They mount up to heaven, and go down again to the depths: Their soul is
+melted because of trouble. They reel to and fro, and stagger like a
+drunken man, and are at their wits end." In this extremity of foul
+weather, the ship was so tossed and shaken, that, by its creaking noise,
+and the leaking which was now more than ordinary, we were in great fear
+that it would have shaken asunder, and had just cause to pray, a little
+otherwise than the poet, though marring the verse, yet mending the
+meaning:
+
+   Deus maris et caeli, quid enim nisi vota supersunt;
+   Solvere quassatae parcito membra ratis.
+
+Yet it pleased God of his infinite goodness to deliver us out of this
+danger. We made a new main-sail, which we fastened to the yard, and
+repaired our other damages as well as we could. This was hardly done
+when we were reduced to as great extremity as before, so that we had
+almost lost our new main-sail, had not William Antony, the master of our
+ship, when no one else would venture for fear of being washed overboard,
+by crawling along the main-yard, then lowered close down upon the rails,
+and with great danger of drowning, gathered it up out of the sea and
+fastened it to the yard; being in the mean time often ducked overhead
+and ears in the sea. So terrible were these storms, that some of our
+company, who had used the sea for twenty years, had never seen the like,
+and vowed, if ever they got safe to land, that they would never go to
+sea again.
+
+At night on the last day of November, we met with an English ship, and
+because it was too late that night, it was agreed that they were to give
+us two or three tons of wine next morning, being, as they said, all the
+provision of drink they had, save only a butt or two which they must
+reserve for their own use: But, after all, we heard no more of them till
+they were set on ground on the coast of Ireland, where it appeared they
+might have spared us much more than they pretended, as they could very
+well have relieved our necessities, and had sufficient for themselves
+remaining to bring them to England. The first of December we spoke with
+another English ship, and had some beer out of her for our urgent
+necessities, but not sufficient to carry us to England, wherefore we
+were constrained to put into Ireland, the wind so serving. Next day we
+came to an anchor under the land, not far from the S. Kelmes, under the
+land and wind, where we were somewhat more quiet. But as that was not a
+safe place to ride in, we endeavoured next morning to weigh our anchor,
+when having some of our men hurt at the capstan, we were forced to leave
+it behind, holding on our course for Ventrie Haven, [Bantry Bay?] where
+we safely arrived the same day, and found that place a safe and
+convenient harbour for us, so that we had just cause to sing with the
+Psalmist, _They that go down to the sea in ships_, &c.
+
+As soon as we had anchored, my lord went forthwith on shore, and
+presently after brought off fresh provisions and water; such as sheep,
+pigs, fowls, &c. to refresh his ships company, though he had lately been
+very weak himself, and had suffered the same extremity with the rest:
+For, in the time of our former want, having only a little water
+remaining by him in a pot, it was broken in the night and all the water
+lost. The sick and wounded were soon afterwards landed and carried to
+the principal town, called _Dingenacush_[368], about three miles distant
+from the haven, and at which place our surgeons attended them daily.
+Here we well refreshed ourselves, while the Irish harp sounded sweetly
+in our ears, and here we, who in our former extremity were in a manner
+half dead, had our lives as it were restored.
+
+[Footnote 368: Called otherwise Dingle Icouch by the editor of Astleys
+collection.--E.]
+
+This Dingenacush is the chief town in all that part of Ireland,
+consisting but of one street, whence some smaller ones proceed on either
+side. It had gates, as it seemed, in former times at either end, to shut
+and open as a town of war, and a castle also. The houses are very
+strongly built, having thick stone walls and narrow windows, being used,
+as they told us, as so many castles in time of troubles, among the wild
+Irish or otherwise. The castle and all the houses in the town, except
+four, were taken and destroyed by the Earl of Desmond; these four being
+held out against him and all his power, so that he could not win them.
+There still remains a thick stone wall, across the middle of the street,
+which was part of their fortification. Some of the older inhabitants
+informed us, that they were driven to great extremities during their
+defence, like the Jews of old when besieged by the Roman emperor Titus,
+insomuch that they were constrained by hunger to feed on the carcasses
+of the dead. Though somewhat repaired, it still remains only the ruins
+of their former town. Except in the houses of the better sort, they have
+no chimnies, so that we were very much incommoded by the smoke during
+our stay at that place. Their fuel is turf, which they have very good,
+together with whins or furze. As there grows little wood hereabout,
+building is very expensive; as also they are in want of lime, which they
+have to bring from a far distance. But they have abundance of stone, the
+whole country appearing entirely composed of rocks and stones, so that
+they commonly make their hedges of stone, by which each mans ground is
+parted from his neighbour. Yet their country is very fruitful, and
+abounds in grass and grain, as appears by the abundance of cattle and
+sheep; insomuch that we had very good sheep, though smaller than those
+of England, for two shillings, or five groats a-piece, and good pigs and
+hens for threepence each.
+
+The greatest want is of industrious and husbandly inhabitants, to till
+and improve the ground; for the common sort, if they can only provide
+sufficient to serve them from hand to mouth, take no farther care. Good
+land was to be had here for fourpence an acre of yearly rent. They had
+very small store of money among them, for which reason, perhaps, they
+doubled and trebled the prices of every thing we bought, in proportion
+to what they had been before our arrival. They have mines of alum, tin,
+brass, and iron; and we saw certain natural stones, as clear as crystal,
+and naturally squared like diamonds. That part of the country is full of
+great mountains and hills, whence run many pleasant streams of fine
+water. The native hardiness of the Irish nation may be conceived from
+this, that their young children, even in the midst of winter, run about
+the streets with bare legs and feet, and often having no other apparel
+than a scanty mantle to cover their nakedness. The chief officer of
+their town is called the sovereign, who hath the same office and
+authority among them with our mayors in England, having his Serjeants to
+attend upon him, and a mace carried before mm as they have. We were
+first entertained at the sovereigns house, which was one of the four
+that withstood the Earl of Desmond in his rebellion.
+
+They have the same form of common prayer, word for word, that we have,
+only that it is in Latin. On Sunday, the sovereign goeth to church
+having his Serjeant before him, and accompanied by the sheriff and
+others of the town. They there kneel down, every one making his prayers
+privately by himself. They then rise up and go out of the church again
+to drink. After this, they return again to church, and the minister
+makes prayers. Their manner of baptising differs somewhat from ours,
+part of the service belonging to it being in Latin and part in Irish.
+The minister takes the child on his hands, dipping it first backwards
+and then forwards, over head and ears into the cold water even in the
+midst of winter. By this the natural hardiness of the people may appear,
+as before specified. They had neither bell, drums, nor trumpet, to call
+the parishioners together, but wait for the coming of the sovereign,
+when those that have devotion follow him. Their bread is all baked in
+cakes, and the bakers bake for all the town, receiving a tenth part for
+their trouble. We had of them some ten or eleven tons of beer for the
+Victory; but it acted as a severe purge upon all who drank it, so that
+we chose rather to drink water.
+
+Having provided ourselves with fresh water, we set sail from thence on
+the 20th December, accompanied by Sir Edward Dennie and his lady, with
+two young sons. In the morning of that day, my lord went on shore to
+hasten the dispatch of some fresh water for the Victory, and brought us
+news that sixty Spanish prizes were taken and brought to England. For
+two or three days after we sailed, we had a fair wind; but it afterwards
+scanted, so that we were fain to keep a cold Christmas with the bishop
+and his clerks, as I said before. After this, meeting with an English
+ship, we received the joyful news that ninety-one Spanish prizes were
+come to England; and along with that, the sorrowful intelligence that
+our last and best prize was cast away on the coast of Cornwal, at a
+place the Cornish men call _Als-efferne_, that is Hell-cliff, where
+Captain Lister and all the people were drowned, except five or six, half
+English and half Spaniards, who saved their lives by swimming. Yet much
+of the goods were saved and preserved for us, by Sir Francis Godolphin
+and other worshipful gentlemen of the country. My lord was very sorry
+for the death of Captain Lister, saying that he would willingly have
+lost all the fruits of the voyage to have saved his life.
+
+The 29th December we met another ship, from which we learned that Sir
+Martin Frobisher and Captain Reymond had taken the admiral and
+vice-admiral of the fleet we had seen going into the haven of Tercera;
+but that the admiral had sunk, in consequence of much leaking, near the
+Eddystone, a rock over against Plymouth sound, all the people however
+being saved. We were likewise informed by this ship, that Captain
+Preston had captured a ship laden with silver. My lord took his passage
+in this last ship to land at Falmouth, while we held on our course for
+Plymouth.
+
+Towards night we came near the Ram-head, the next cape westwards from
+Plymouth sound, but we feared to double it in the night, by reason of
+the scantness of the wind: so we stood out to seawards for half the
+night, and towards morning had the wind more large. But we made too
+little to spare thereof; partly for which reasons and partly mistaking
+the land, we fell so much to leeward that we could not double the cape.
+For this reason we turned back again and got into Falmouth haven, where
+we grounded in 17 feet water; but as it was low ebb, the sea ready again
+to flow, and the ground soft, we received no harm. Here we gladly set
+our feet again on the long desired English ground, and refreshed
+ourselves by keeping part of Christmas on our native soil.
+
+
+SECTION VIII.
+
+_Valiant Sea Fight, by Ten Merchant Ships of London against Twelve
+Spanish Gallies in the Straits of Gibraltar, on the 24th April_
+1590[369].
+
+
+In 1590, sundry ships belonging to the merchants of London, some
+freighted for Venice, some for Constantinople, and some to divers other
+parts, met on their homeward course within the Straits of Gibraltar,
+having escaped all danger hitherto. The first of these was the Salomon,
+belonging to Mr Alexander Barnam of London, and Messrs Bond and Tweed of
+Harwich, which had sailed on the first of February last. The second was
+the Margaret and John, belonging to Mr Wats of London. The third was the
+Minion; the fourth the Ascension; the fifth the Centurion, belonging to
+Mr Cordal; the sixth the Violet; the seventh the Samuel; the eighth the
+Crescent; the ninth the Elizabeth; the tenth the Richard belonging to Mr
+Duffield. All these ships, being of notable and approved service, and
+coming near the mouth of the Straits hard by the coast of Barbary, they
+descried twelve tall gallies bravely furnished, and strongly provided
+with men and ammunition of war, ready to intercept and seize them.
+Being perceived by our captains and masters, we made speedy preparation
+for our defence, waiting the whole night for the approach of the enemy.
+
+[Footnote 369: Hakluyt, II. 660.]
+
+Next morning early, being Tuesday in Easter week, the 24th of April
+1590, we had service according to our usual custom, praying to Almighty
+God to save us from the hands of the tyrannous Spaniards, whom we justly
+imagined and had always found to be our most mortal enemies on the sea.
+Having finished our prayers, and set ourselves in readiness, we
+perceived them coming towards us, and knew them indeed to be the Spanish
+gallies, commanded by Andrea Doria, viceroy for the king of Spain in the
+Straits of Gibraltar, and a notable enemy to all Englishmen. When they
+came near us, they _waved us amain_ for the king of Spain, and in return
+we waved them amain for the Queen of England[370]; at which time it
+pleased the Almighty so to encourage our hearts, that the nearer they
+came we the less feared their great strength and huge number of men;
+they having to the amount of two or three hundred in each galley. It was
+concluded among us, that our four largest and tallest ships should be
+placed in the rear, the weaker and smaller ships going foremost; and so
+it was performed, every one of us being ready to take part in such
+successes as it should please God to send.
+
+[Footnote 370: This waving amain seems to have been some salutation of
+defiance, then usual at sea.--E.]
+
+The gallies came upon us very fiercely at the first encounter, yet God
+so strengthened us that, even if they had been ten times more, we had
+not feared them at all. The Salomon, being a hot ship with sundry cast
+pieces in her, gave the first shot in so effectual a manner on their
+headmost galley, that it shared away so many of the men that sat on one
+side of her, and pierced her through and through, insomuch that she was
+ready to sink: Yet they assaulted us the more fiercely. Then the rest of
+our ships, especially the four chiefest, the Salomon, Margaret and John,
+Minion, and the Ascension, gave a hot charge upon them, and they on us,
+commencing a hot and fierce battle with great valour on both sides,
+which continued for the space of six hours. About the commencement of
+this fight, our fleet was joined by two Flemish vessels. Seeing the
+great force of the gallies, one of these presently struck his sails and
+yielded to the enemy; whereas, had they exerted themselves on our side
+and in their own defence, they needed not to have been taken in this
+cowardly manner. The other was ready also to have yielded immediately,
+and began to lower his sails: But the trumpeter of that ship drew his
+faulcion, and stepping up to the pilot at the helm, vowed that he would
+put him instantly to death, if he did not join and take part with the
+English fleet: This he did, for fear of death, and by that means they
+were defended from the tyranny which they had otherwise assuredly found
+among the Spaniards.
+
+When we had continued the fight somewhat more than six hours, God gave
+us the upper hand, so that we escaped the hands of so many enemies, who
+were constrained to flee into harbour to shelter themselves from us.
+This was the manifest work of God, who defended us in such sort from all
+danger, that not one man of us was slain in all this long and fierce
+assault, sustaining no other damage or hurt than this, that the shrouds
+and back-stays of the Salomon, which gave the first and last shot, and
+sore galled the enemy during the whole battle, were clean shot away.
+When the battle ceased, we were constrained for lack of wind to stay and
+waft up and down, and then went back again to _Tition_ [Tetuan] in
+Barbary, six leagues from Gibraltar, where we found the people
+wondrously favourable to us; who, being but Moors and heathen people,
+shewed us where to find fresh water and all other necessaries. In short,
+we had there as good entertainment as if we had been in any place in
+England. The governor favoured us greatly, to whom we in return
+presented such gifts and commodities as we had, which he accepted of
+very graciously: And here we staid four days.
+
+After the cessation of the battle, which was on Easter Tuesday, we
+remained for want of wind before Gibraltar till the next morning, being
+all that time becalmed, and therefore expected every hour that they
+would have sent out a fresh force against us: But they were in no
+condition to do so, all their gallies being so sore battered that they
+durst not come out of harbour, though greatly urged thereunto by the
+governor of that town; but they had already met with so stout
+resistance, that they could not be prevailed on to renew the fight.
+
+While we were at Tetuan, we received a report of the hurt we had done
+the gallies; as we could not well discern any thing during the fight,
+on account of the great smoke. We there heard that we had almost spoiled
+those twelve gallies, which we had shot clean through, so that two of
+them were on the point of sinking; and we had slain so many of their
+men, that they were not able to fit out their gallies any more all that
+year. After going to Tetuan, we attempted three several times to pass
+the straits, but could not: Yet, with the blessing of God, we came
+safely through on the fourth attempt; and so continued on our voyage
+with a pleasant breeze all the way to the coast of England, where we
+arrived on the beginning of July 1590.
+
+
+SECTION IX.
+
+_A valiant sea fight in the Straits of Gibraltar, in April_ 1591, _by
+the Centurion of London, against five Spanish gallies_.
+
+
+In the month of November 1590, sundry ships belonging to different
+merchants of London sailed with merchandise for various ports within the
+Straits of Gibraltar; all of which, having fair wind and weather,
+arrived safe at their destined ports. Among these was the Centurion of
+London, a very tall ship of large burden, yet but weakly manned, as
+appears by the following narrative.
+
+The Centurion arrived safe at Marseilles, on her outward bound voyage,
+where, after delivering her goods, she remained better than five weeks,
+taking in lading, and then intended to return to England. When she was
+ready to come away from Marseilles, there were sundry other ships of
+smaller burden at that place, the masters of which intreated Robert
+Bradshaw of Limehouse, the master of the Centurion, to stay a day or two
+for them till they could get in readiness to depart, saying that it were
+far better for them all to go in company for mutual support and defence,
+than singly to run the hazard of falling into the hands of the Spanish
+gallies in the Straits. On which reasonable persuasion, although the
+Centurion was of such sufficiency as might have been reasonably hazarded
+alone, yet she staid for the smaller ships, and set out along with them
+from Marseilles, all engaging mutually to stand by each other, if they
+chanced to fall in with any of the Spanish gallies.
+
+Thus sailing altogether along the coast of Spain, they were suddenly
+becalmed upon Easter-day in the Straits of Gibraltar, where they
+immediately saw several gallies making towards them in a very gallant
+and courageous manner. The chief leaders and soldiers in these gallies,
+were bravely apparelled in silken coats, with silver whistles depending
+from their necks, and fine plumes of feathers in their hats. Coming on
+courageously, they shot very fast from their calivers upon the
+Centurion, which they boarded somewhat before ten o'clock A.M. But the
+Centurion was prepared for their reception, and meant to give them as
+sour a welcome as they could; and having prepared their close quarters
+with all other things in readiness, called on God for aid, and cheered
+one another to fight to the last. The Centurion discharged her great
+ordnance upon the gallies, but the little ships her consorts durst not
+come forward to her aid, but lay aloof, while five of the gallies laid
+on board the Centurion, to whom they made themselves fast with their
+grappling irons, two on one side and two on the other, while the admiral
+galley lay across her stern. In this guise the Centurion was sore galled
+and battered, her main-mast greatly wounded, all her sails filled with
+shot holes, and her mizen mast and stern rendered almost unserviceable.
+During this sore and deadly fight, the trumpeter of the Centurion
+continually sounded forth the animating points of war, encouraging the
+men to fight gallantly against their enemies; while in the Spanish
+gallies there was no warlike music, save the silver whistles, which were
+blown ever and anon. In this sore fight, many a Spaniard was thrown into
+the sea, while multitudes of them came crawling up the ships sides,
+hanging by every rope, and endeavouring to enter in: Yet as fast as they
+came to enter, so courageously were they received by the English, that
+many of them were fain to tumble alive into the sea, remediless of ever
+getting out alive. There were in the Centurion 48 men and boys in all,
+who bestirred themselves so valiantly and so galled the enemy, that many
+a brave and lusty Spaniard lost his life. The Centurion was set on fire
+five several times, with wild-fire and other combustibles thrown in for
+that purpose by the Spaniards; yet by the blessing of God, and the great
+and diligent foresight of the master, the fire was always extinguished
+without doing any harm.
+
+In every one of these five gallies there were about 200 soldiers; who,
+together with the great guns, spoiled, rent, and battered the Centurion
+very sorely; shot her mainmast through, and slew four of her men, one of
+whom was the masters mate. Ten other persons were hurt by splinters. But
+in the end, the Spaniards had almost spent their shot, so that they were
+obliged to load with hammers and the chains of their galley-slaves, yet,
+God be praised, the English received no more harm. At length, sore
+galled and worn out, the Spaniards were constrained to unfasten their
+grapplings and sheer off; at which time, if there had been any fresh
+ship to aid and succour the Centurion, they had certainly sunk or taken
+all those gallies. The Dolphin lay aloof and durst not come near, while
+the other two small ships fled away. One of the gallies from the
+Centurion set upon the Dolphin; which ship went immediately on fire,
+occasioned by her own powder, so that the ship perished with all her
+men: But whether this was done intentionally or not, was never known.
+Surely, if she had come bravely forward in aid of the Centurion, she had
+not perished.
+
+This fight continued five hours and a half, at the end of which time
+both parties were glad to draw off and breathe themselves; but the
+Spaniards, once gone, durst not renew the fight. Next day, indeed, six
+other gallies came out and looked at the Centurion, but durst on no
+account meddle with her. Thus delivered by the Almighty from the hands
+of their enemies, they gave God thanks for the victory, and arrived not
+long after safe at London. Mr John Hawes merchant, and sundry others of
+good note were present in this fight.
+
+
+SECTION X.
+
+_Sea-fight near the Azores, between the Revenge man of war, commanded by
+Sir Richard Granville, and fifteen Spanish men of war_, 31_st August_
+1591. _Written by Sir Walter Raleigh_[371].
+
+
+PRELIMINARY DISCOURSE[372].
+
+Because the rumours are diversely spread, as well in England as in the
+Low Countries and elsewhere, of this late encounter between her majestys
+ships and the armada of Spain; and that the Spaniards, according to
+their usual manner, fill the world with their vain-glorious vaunts,
+making great shew of victories, when on the contrary themselves are most
+commonly and shamefully beaten and dishonoured, thereby hoping to
+possess the ignorant multitude by anticipating and forerunning false
+reports: It is agreeable with all good reason, for manifestation of the
+truth, to overcome falsehood and untruth, that the beginning,
+continuance, and success of this late honourable encounter by Sir
+Richard Grenville, and others her majestys captains, with the
+armada[373] of Spain, should be truly set down and published, without
+partiality or false imaginations. And it is no marvel that the Spaniards
+should seek, by false and slanderous pamphlets, _advisos_, and letters,
+to cover their own loss, and to derogate from others their due honours,
+especially in this fight being far off; seeing they were not ashamed, in
+the year 1588, when they purposed the invasion of this land, to publish
+in sundry languages in print, great victories in words, which they
+pretended to have obtained against this realm, and spread the same in a
+most false sort over all parts of France, Italy, and other countries.
+When, shortly after it was happily manifested in very deed to all
+nations, how their navy, which they termed _invincible_, consisting of
+140 sail of ships, not only of their own kingdom, but strengthened with
+the greatest argosies, Portugal caraks, Florentines, and huge hulks of
+other countries, were by 80 of her majestys own ships of war, and a few
+belonging to our own merchants, by the wise, valiant, and advantageous
+conduct of the lord Charles Howard, high admiral of England, beaten and
+shuffled together, even from the Lizard in Cornwall, first to Portland
+where they shamefully left Don Pedro de Valdes with his mighty ship:
+from Portland to Calais, where they lost Hugo de Moncado with the
+gallies of which he was captain: and from Calais driven by squibs from
+their anchors, were chased out of sight of England, round about Scotland
+and Ireland. Where for the sympathy of their barbarous religion, hoping
+to find succour and assistance, a great part of them were crushed
+against the rocks, and those others that landed, being very many in
+number, were notwithstanding broken, slain, and taken, and so sent from
+village to village, coupled in halters, to be shipped for England. Where
+her majesty, of her princely and invincible disposition, disdaining to
+put them to death, and scorning either to retain or entertain them, they
+were all sent back again into their countries, to witness and recount
+the worthy achievements of their invincible and dreadful navy: of which,
+the number of soldiers, the fearful burden of their ships, the
+commanders names of every squadron, with all their magazines of
+provisions were put in print, as an army and navy irresistible and
+disdaining prevention. With all which so great and terrible ostentation,
+they did not, in all their sailing about England, so much as sink or
+take one ship, bark, pinnace, or cock-boat of ours, or ever burnt so
+much as one sheep-cot of this land. When, as on the contrary, Sir
+Francis Drake, with only 800 soldiers, not long before landed in their
+Indies, and forced San Jago, Santo Domingo, Carthagena, and the forts of
+Florida.
+
+[Footnote 371: Hakluyt, II. 668. Astley, I. 216.]
+
+[Footnote 372: This preliminary discourse, by the famous Sir Walter
+Raleigh, is given from Hakluyt without alteration, except in
+orthography.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 373: Armada is a general word, signifying in Spanish a ship of
+war or a fleet or squadron. Generally in English it has been limited to
+the invincible armada, or powerful fleet fitted out by Philip II. in the
+vain hope of conquering England.--E.]
+
+And after that, Sir John Norris marched from Peniche in Portugal with a
+handful of soldiers to the gates of Lisbon, being above 40 English
+miles: Where the earl of Essex himself, and other valiant gentlemen,
+braved the city of Lisbon, encamping at the very gates: from whence,
+after many days abode, finding neither promised parley nor provision
+wherewith to batter, they made their retreat by land, in spite of all
+their garrisons both of horse and foot. In this sort I have a little
+digressed from my first purpose, only by the necessary comparison of
+their and our actions: the one covetous of honour, without vaunt or
+ostentation; the other so greedy to purchase the opinion of their own
+affairs, and by false rumours to resist the blasts of their own
+dishonours, as they will not only not blush to spread all manner of
+untruths, but even for the least advantage, be it but for the taking of
+one poor adventurer of the English, will celebrate the victory with
+bonefires in every town, always spending more in faggots than the
+purchase they obtained was worth. Whereas, we never thought it worth the
+consumption of two billets, when we have taken eight or ten of their
+Indian ships at one time, and twenty of their Brazil fleet. Such is the
+difference between true valour and vain ostentation, and between
+honourable actions and frivolous vain-glorious boasting. But to return
+to my purpose:
+
+
+NARRATIVE.
+
+The Lord Thomas Howard, with six of her majestys ships, six victuallers
+of London, the bark Raleigh, and two or three pinnaces, riding at anchor
+near Flores, one of the western islands called the Azores, on the last
+of August 1591, in the afternoon, had intelligence by one captain
+Middleton, of the approach of the Spanish armada. This Middleton, being
+in a very good sailing ship, had kept them company for three days
+before, of good purpose, both to discover their force, and to give the
+lord admiral advice of their approach. He had no sooner communicated the
+news, when the Spanish fleet hove in sight; at which time, many
+belonging to our ships companies were on shore in the island of Flores,
+some providing ballast for the ships, others filling water, and others
+refreshing themselves from the land with such things as they could
+procure either for money or by force. Owing to this, our ships were all
+in confusion, pestered, rummaging, and every thing out of order, very
+light for want of ballast; and what was most of all to their
+disadvantage, the half of the men in every ship was sick and
+unserviceable. For in the Revenge, there were ninety sick; in the
+Bonaventure, not so many in health as could hand her mainsail, insomuch,
+that unless twenty men had been taken from a bark of Sir George Careys
+which was sunk, and appointed into her, she had hardly been able to get
+back to England. The rest of the ships for the most part were in little
+better state.
+
+The names of her majestys ships were as follows: The Defiance, admiral,
+the Revenge, vice-admiral, the Bonaventure commanded by captain Crosse,
+the Lion by George Fenner, the Foresight by Thomas Vavasour, and the
+Crane by Duffild. The Foresight and Crane were small ships, the other
+four were of the middle size. All the others, except the bark Raleigh,
+commanded by captain Thin, were victuallers, and of small or no force.
+The approach of the Spanish fleet being concealed by means of the
+island, they were soon at hand, so that our ships had scarce time to
+weigh their anchors, and some even were obliged to slip their cables and
+set sail. Sir Richard Grenville was the last to weigh, that he might
+recover the men who were a land on the island, who had otherwise been
+lost. The lord Thomas Howard, with the rest of the fleet, very hardly
+recovered the wind, which Sir Richard was unable to do; on which his
+master and others endeavoured to persuade him to cut his main sail and
+cast about, trusting to the swift sailing of his ship, as the squadron
+of Seville was on his weather bow. But Sir Richard absolutely refused to
+turn from the enemy, declaring he would rather die than dishonour
+himself, his country, and her majestys ship, and persuaded his company
+that he would be able to pass through the two squadrons in spite of
+them, and force those of Seville to give him way. This he certainly
+performed upon divers of the foremost, who, as the sailors term it,
+sprang their luff, and fell under the lee of the Revenge. The other
+course had certainly been the better, and might very properly have been
+adopted under so great impossibility of prevailing over such heavy odds;
+but, out of the greatness of his mind, he could not be prevailed on to
+have the semblance of fleeing.
+
+In the meantime, while Sir Richard attended to those ships of the enemy
+that were nearest him and in his way, the great San Philip being to
+windward of him, and coming down towards him, becalmed his sails in such
+sort that his ship could neither make way nor feel the helm, so huge and
+high was the Spanish ship, being of fifteen hundred tons, and which
+presently laid the Revenge on board. At this time, bereft of his sails,
+the ships that had fallen under his lee, luffed up and laid him on board
+also, the first of these that now came up being the vice-admiral of the
+Biscay squadron, a very mighty and puissant ship, commanded by
+Brittandona. The San Philip carried three tier of ordnance on a side,
+and eleven pieces in each tier, besides eight pieces in her forecastle
+chase, and others from her stern-ports. After the Revenge was thus
+entangled by the huge San Philip, four others laid her on board, two to
+larboard and two to starboard. The fight thus began at three in the
+afternoon, and continued very terribly the whole of that evening. But
+the great San Philip, having received a discharge from the lower tier
+of the Revenge, loaded with cross-bar shot, shifted herself with all
+diligence from her side, utterly disliking this her first entertainment.
+Some say the San Philip foundered, but we cannot report this for a
+truth, not having sufficient assurance. Besides the mariners, the
+Spanish ships were filled with companies of soldiers, some having to the
+number of two hundred, some five hundred, and others as far even as
+eight hundred. In ours, there were none besides the mariners, except the
+servants of the commanders, and some few gentlemen volunteers.
+
+After interchanging many vollies of great ordnance and small shot, the
+Spaniards deliberated to enter the Revenge by boarding, and made several
+attempts, hoping to carry her by the multitudes of their armed soldiers
+and musketeers, but were still repulsed again and again, being on every
+attempt beaten back into their own ships or into the sea. In the
+beginning of the fight, the George Noble of London being only one of the
+victuallers, and of small force, having received some shot through her
+from the Spanish _armadas_, fell under the lee of the Revenge, and the
+master of her asked Sir Richard what he was pleased to command him; on
+which Sir Richard bad him save himself as he best might, leaving him to
+his fortune. After the fight had thus continued without intermission,
+while the day lasted, and some hours of the night, many of our men were
+slain and hurt; one of the great galeons of the armada and the admiral
+of the hulks both sunk, and a great slaughter had taken place in many of
+the other great Spanish ships. Some allege that Sir Richard was very
+dangerously hurt almost in the beginning of the fight, and lay
+speechless for a time ere he recovered: But two men belonging to the
+Revenge, who came home in a ship of Lyme from the islands, and were
+examined by some of the lords and others, affirmed, that he was never so
+much wounded as to forsake the upper deck till an hour before midnight,
+and being then shot in the body by a musket ball, was shot again in the
+head as the surgeon was dressing him, the surgeon himself being at the
+same time wounded to death. This also agrees with an examination of four
+other returned mariners of the same ship, taken before Sir Francis
+Godolphin, and sent by him to master William Killegrue of her majestys
+privy chamber.
+
+To return to the fight: As the Spanish ships which attempted to board
+the Revenge were wounded and beaten off, so always others came up in
+their places, she never having less than two mighty galeons by her sides
+and close on board her; so that ere morning, from three o'clock of the
+day before, she had been successively assailed by no less than fifteen
+several armadas or great ships of war; and all of them had so ill
+approved their entertainment, that, by break of day, they were far more
+willing to hearken to a composition, than hastily to make any more
+assaults or entries for boarding. But as the day advanced, so our men
+decreased in number, and as the light grew more and more, by so much
+more increased the discomforts of our men. For now nothing appeared in
+sight but enemies, save one small ship called the Pilgrim, commanded by
+Jacob Whiddon, who hovered all night to see what might be the event;
+but, bearing up towards the Revenge in the morning, was hunted like a
+hare among so many ravenous hounds, yet escaped.
+
+All the powder of the Revenge was now spent to the very last barrel, all
+her pikes broken, forty of her best men slain, and most part of the rest
+wounded. In the beginning of the fight, she had 90 of her men lying sick
+on the ballast in the hold, and only 100 capable of duty, a small crew
+for such a ship, and a weak garrison to resist so mighty an army. By
+this brave hundred was the whole of this hot fight sustained, the
+volleys, boardings, assaults, and entries, from fifteen great ships of
+war all full of men, besides those which had cannonaded her from a
+distance. On the contrary, the Spanish ships were always supplied with
+fresh soldiers from the several squadrons of this vast fleet, and had
+all manner of arms and powder at will; while to our men there remained
+no hope or comfort, no supply either of ships, men, weapons, or powder.
+The masts were all beaten overboard; all her tackle was cut asunder; her
+upper works all battered to pieces, and in effect evened with the water,
+nothing but the hull or bottom of the ship remaining, nothing being left
+over-head for flight or for defence.
+
+Finding his ship in this distress, and altogether unable for any longer
+resistance, after fifteen hours constant fighting against fifteen great
+ships of war which assailed him in turns, having received by estimation
+800 shot of great ordnance, besides many assaults and entries; and
+considering that he and his ship must now soon be in possession of the
+enemy, who had arranged their ships in a ring round about the Revenge,
+which was now unable to move any way, except as acted on by the waves;
+Sir Richard called for his master gunner, whom he knew to be a most
+resolute man, and commanded him to split and sink the ship, that nothing
+of glory or victory might remain to the enemy, who with so great a navy,
+and in so long a time, were unable to take her. They had fifty-three
+ships of war, and above 10,000 men, and had been engaged against this
+single ship for fifteen hours. At the same time, Sir Richard endeavoured
+to prevail upon as many of the company as he could influence, to commit
+themselves to the mercy of God, and not of their enemies, since they had
+like valiant men repulsed so many enemies, urging them not now to
+obscure their honour and that of their nation, for the sake of
+prolonging their lives a few days. The master gunner and various others
+of the crew readily assented to this desperate resolution; but the
+captain and master were quite of an opposite opinion, and conjured Sir
+Richard to desist from his desperate proposal; alleging that the
+Spaniards would be as ready to agree to a capitulation as they to offer
+it; and begged him to consider, that there still were many valiant men
+still living in the ship, and others whose wounds might not be mortal,
+who might be able to do acceptable service to their queen and country
+hereafter. And, although Sir Richard had alleged that the Spaniards
+should never have the glory of taking one ship of her majesty, which had
+been so long and valiantly defended; they answered, that the ship had
+six feet water in her hold, and three shot holes under water, which were
+so weakly stopped, that she must needs sink with the first labouring of
+the sea, and was besides so battered and bruised, that she could never
+be removed from the place.
+
+While the matter was thus in dispute, Sir Richard refusing to listen to
+any reasons, the captain won over the most part to his opinion, and the
+master was conveyed on board the Spanish general, Don Alfonso Bacan.
+Finding none of his people very ready to attempt boarding the Revenge
+again, and fearing lest Sir Richard might blow up both them and himself,
+as he learned from the master his dangerous disposition; Don Alfonso
+agreed that all their lives should be saved, the ships company sent to
+England, and the better sort to pay such reasonable ransom as their
+estate could bear, all in the meantime to be free from prison or the
+gallies. He so much the rather consented to these terms, lest any
+farther loss or mischief might accrue to themselves, and for the
+preservation of Sir Richard, whose notable valour he greatly honoured
+and admired. On receiving this answer, in which the safety of life was
+promised; the common sort, now at the end of their peril, mostly drew
+back from the proposal of Sir Richard and the master gunner, it being no
+hard matter to dissuade men from death to life. Finding himself and Sir
+Richard thus prevented and mastered by the majority, the master gunner
+would have slain himself with his sword, but was prevented by main
+force, and locked up in his cabin.
+
+Then the Spanish general sent many boats on board the Revenge, and
+several of her men, fearing Sir Richards disposition, stole away on
+board the general and other ships. Thus constrained to submit, Sir
+Richard was desired by a message from Alfonso Bacan to remove from the
+Revenge, as it was filled with blood and the bodies of the slain, and
+with wounded men, like a slaughter-house. Sir Richard gave for answer,
+that he might do now with his body what he pleased; and while removing
+from the ship, he fainted away, and on recovering he requested the
+company to pray for him. The Spanish general used Sir Richard with all
+humanity, leaving no means untried that tended towards his recovery,
+highly commending his valour and worthiness, and greatly bewailing his
+dangerous condition; seeing that it was a rare spectacle, and an
+instance of resolution seldom met with, for one ship to withstand so
+many enemies, to endure the batteries and boardings of so many huge
+ships of war, and to resist and repel the assaults and entries of such
+numbers of soldiers. All this and more is confirmed, by the recital of a
+Spanish captain in that same fleet, who was himself engaged in this
+action, and, being severed from the rest in a storm, was taken by the
+Lion, a small ship belonging to London, and is now prisoner in London.
+
+The general commanding this great armada, was Don Alphonso Bacan,
+brother to the Marquis of Santa Cruz. Britandona was admiral of the
+squadron of Biscay. The Marquis of Arumburch [Aremberg] commanded the
+squadron of Seville. Luis Coutinho commanded the hulks and flyboats.
+There were slain and drowned in this fight, as the before-mentioned
+Spanish captain confessed, near a thousand of the enemy, with two
+special commanders, Don Luis de San Juan, and Don George de Prunaria de
+Mallaga, besides others of special account whose names have not yet
+been reported. The admiral of the hulks and the Ascension of Seville
+were both sunk at the side of the Revenge. One other ship, which got
+into the road of San Miguel, sank there also; and a fourth ship had to
+run on shore to save her men. Sir Richard, as it is said, died the
+second or third day on board the general, much bewailed by his enemies;
+but we have not heard what became of his body, whether it were committed
+to the sea or buried on land. The comfort remaining to his friends is,
+that he ended his life honourably, having won great reputation for his
+nation and his posterity, and hath not outlived his honour.
+
+For the rest of her majestys ships, that entered not into the fight like
+the Revenge, the reasons and causes were these: There were of them only
+six in all, two whereof were only small ships; and they could be of no
+service, as the Revenge was engaged past recovery. The island of Flores
+was on one side; 53 sail of Spanish ships were on the other, divided
+into several squadrons, all as full of soldiers as they could contain.
+Almost one half of our men were sick and unable to serve; the ships were
+grown foul, _unroomaged_[374], and hardly able to bear any sail for want
+of ballast, having been six months at sea. If all the rest of the ships
+had entered into the action, they had been all lost; for the very
+hugeness of the Spanish ships, even if no other violence had been
+offered, might have crushed them all into shivers between them; by which
+the loss and dishonour to the queen had been far greater, than any
+injury the enemy could have sustained. It is nevertheless true, that the
+Lord Thomas Howard would have entered between the squadrons of the
+enemy, but the others would on no account consent; and even the master
+of his own ship threatened to leap into the sea, rather than conduct the
+admirals ship and the rest to be a certain prey to the enemy, where
+there was no hope or possibility of victory or even of defence. In my
+opinion, such rashness would have ill assorted with the discretion and
+trust of a general, to have committed himself and his charge to
+assured destruction, without any hope or likelihood of prevailing,
+thereby to have diminished the strength of her majestys navy, and to
+have increased the pride and glory of the enemy.
+
+[Footnote 374: This singular antiquated sea term may signify, not in
+sailing _trim_.--E.]
+
+The Foresight, one of her majestys vessels, commanded by Thomas
+Vavasour, performed a very great service, and staid two hours as near
+the Revenge as the weather would permit, not forsaking the fight till
+well nigh encompassed by the squadrons of the enemy, and then cleared
+himself with great difficulty. The rest gave diverse vollies of shot,
+and engaged as far as the place and their own necessities permitted, so
+as to keep the weather-gage of the enemy, till night parted them.
+
+A few days after this fight, the prisoners being dispersed among the
+Spanish ships of war and ships from the Indies, there arose so great a
+storm from the W. and N.W. that all the fleet was dispersed, as well the
+fleet of the Indies then come to them as the rest of the armada that had
+attended their arrival, of which 14 sail, together with the Revenge
+having 200 Spaniards on board of her, were cast away upon the island of
+St Michael. Thus they honoured the obsequies of the renowned Revenge,
+for the great glory she had achieved, not permitting her to perish
+alone. Besides these, other 15 or 16 of the Spanish ships of war were
+cast away in this storm upon the other islands of the Azores: And, of an
+100 sail and more of the fleet of the Indies, which were expected this
+year in Spain, what with the loss sustained in this tempest, and what
+before in the bay of Mexico and about the Bermuda islands, above 70 were
+lost, including those taken by our London ships; besides one very rich
+ship of the Indies, which set herself on fire being boarded by the
+Pilgrim, and five others taken by the ship belonging to Mr Wats of
+London between the Havannah and Cape St Antonio. On the 4th of November
+this year, we had letters from Tercera, affirming that 3000 dead bodies
+had been thrown upon that island from the perished ships, and that the
+Spaniards confessed to have lost 10,000 men in this storm, besides those
+who perished between the main and the islands. Thus it hath pleased God
+to fight for us, and to defend the justice of our cause, against the
+ambitious and bloody pretences of the Spaniards, who seeking to devour
+all nations are themselves devoured: A manifest testimony how unjust and
+displeasing are their attempts in the sight of God, who hath been
+pleased to witness, by the evil success of their affairs, his mislike of
+their bloody and injurious designs, purposed and practised against all
+Christian princes, over whom they seek unlawful and ungodly rule and
+supreme command.
+
+A day or two before this terrible catastrophe, when some of our
+prisoners desired to be set on shore on the Azores islands, hoping to be
+thence transported into England, and which liberty had been formerly
+promised by the Spanish general; one Morice Fitz John, (son of old John
+of Desmond, a notable traitor, who was cousin-german to the late earl of
+Desmond,) was sent from ship to ship to endeavour to persuade the
+English prisoners to serve the king of Spain. The arguments he used to
+induce them were these. Increase of pay to treble their present
+allowance; advancement to the better sort; and the free exercise of the
+true catholic religion, ensuring the safety of all their souls. For the
+first of these, the beggarly and unnatural behaviour of those English
+and Irish rebels that served the king of Spain in that action was a
+sufficient answer; for so poor and ragged were they, that, for want of
+apparel, they stripped the poor prisoners their countrymen of their
+ragged garments, worn out by six months service, not even sparing to
+despoil them of their bloody shirts from their wounded bodies, and the
+very shoes from their feet; a noble testimony of their rich
+entertainment and high pay. As to the second argument, of hope of
+advancement if they served well and continued faithful to the king of
+Spain; what man could be so blockishly ignorant ever to expect promotion
+and honour from a foreign king, having no other merit or pretension than
+his own disloyalty, his unnatural desertion of his country and parents,
+and rebellion against his true prince, to whose obedience he is bound by
+oath, by nature, and by religion? No! such men are only assured to be
+employed on all desperate enterprizes, and to be held in scorn and
+disdain even among those they serve. That ever a traitor was either
+trusted or advanced I have never learnt, neither can I remember a single
+example. No man could have less becomed the office of orator for such a
+purpose, than this Morice of Desmond: For, the earl his cousin, being
+one of the greatest subjects in the kingdom of Ireland, possessing
+almost whole counties in his large property, many goodly manors,
+castles, and lordships, the county palatine of Kerry, 500 gentlemen of
+his own family and name ready to follow him, all which he and his
+ancestors had enjoyed in peace for three or four hundred years: Yet this
+man, in less than three years after his rebellion and adherence to the
+Spaniards, was beaten from all his holds, not so many as ten gentlemen
+of his name left living, himself taken and beheaded by a gentleman of
+his own nation, and his lands given by parliament to her majesty and
+possessed by the English. His other cousin, Sir John Desmond, taken by
+Mr John Zouch; and his body hung up over the gates of his native city to
+be devoured by ravens. The third brother, Sir James, hanged, drawn, and
+quartered in the same place. Had he been able to vaunt of the success of
+his own house, in thus serving the king of Spain, the argument might
+doubtless have moved much and wrought great effect: the which, because
+he happened to forget, I have thought good to remember in his behalf.
+
+As for the matter of religion, to which he adverted, it would require a
+separate volume, were I to set down how irreligiously they cover their
+greedy and ambitious pretences with that veil of pretended piety. But
+sure I am, there is no kingdom or commonwealth in all Europe that they
+do not invade, under pretence of religion, if it be reformed. Nay if it
+even be what they term catholic, they pretend a title, as if the kings
+of Castile were the natural heirs of all the world. Thus between both,
+no kingdom is exempted from their ambition. Where they dare not invade
+with their own forces, they basely entertain the traitors and vagabonds
+of all nations; seeking by their means, and by their runagate Jesuits,
+to win other parts to their dominion, by which they have ruined many
+noble houses and others in this land, extinguishing their lives and
+families. What good, honour, or fortune, any one hath ever yet achieved
+through them, is yet unheard of. If our English papists will only look
+to Portugal, against which they have no pretence of religion; how their
+nobility are imprisoned and put to death, their rich men made a prey,
+and all sorts of people reduced to servitude; they shall find that the
+obedience even of the Turk is ease and liberty, compared to the tyranny
+of Spain. What have they done in Sicily, in Naples, in Milan, in the low
+countries? Who hath there been spared even for religion? It cometh to my
+remembrance of a certain burgher at Antwerp, whose house was entered by
+a company of Spanish soldiers when they sacked that city. He besought
+them to spare him and his goods, being a good catholic, and therefore
+one of their own party and faction. The Spaniards answered, they knew
+him to be of a good conscience in himself; but his money, plate, jewels,
+and goods, were all heretical, and therefore good prize. So they abused
+and tormented the foolish Fleming, who thought that an _Agnus Dei_ had
+been a sufficient safeguard against all the force of that holy and
+charitable nation.
+
+Neither have they at any time, as they protest, invaded the kingdoms of
+Mexico and Peru and elsewhere, being only led thereto to reduce the
+people to Christianity, not for gold or empire: Whereas, in the single
+island of Hispaniola, they have wasted and destroyed thirty hundred
+thousand of the natives, besides many millions else in other places of
+the Indies: a poor and harmless people, created of God, and might have
+been won to his service, as many of them were, even almost all whom they
+endeavoured to persuade thereto. The story of these their enormities,
+has been written at large by Bartholomew de las Casas[375], a bishop of
+their own nation, and has been translated into English and many other
+languages, under the title of _The Spanish Cruelties_. Who therefore
+would repose trust in such a nation of ravenous strangers, and more
+especially in those Spaniards, who more greedily thirst after the blood
+of the English, for the many overthrows and dishonours they have
+received at our hands; whose weakness we have discovered to the world,
+and whose forces, at home, abroad, in Europe, in the Indies, by sea and
+by land, even with mere handfuls of men and ships on our sides, we have
+overthrown and dishonoured? Let not therefore any Englishman, of what
+religion soever, have other opinion of these Spaniards or their
+abettors, but that those whom they seek to win of our nation, they
+esteem base and traiterous, unworthy persons, and inconstant fools; and
+that they use this pretence of religion, for no other purpose but to
+bewitch us from the obedience due to our natural prince, hoping thereby
+to bring us in time under slavery and subjection, when none shall be
+there so odious and despised, as those very traitors who have sold their
+country to strangers, forsaking their faith and obedience, contrary to
+the laws of nature and religion, and contrary to that humane and
+universal honour, not only of Christians but of heathen and unbelieving
+nations, who have always sustained every degree of labour, embracing
+even death itself, in defence of their country, their prince, and their
+commonwealth.
+
+[Footnote 375: He was bishop of Chiapa in New Spain, and computes the
+Indians destroyed by the Spaniards in about fifty years, at no fewer
+than twenty millions.--Astley, I. 221. a.]
+
+To conclude, it hath ever to this day pleased God to prosper and defend
+her majesty, to break the purposes of her malicious enemies, to confound
+the devices of forsworn traitors, and to overthrow all unjust practices
+and invasions. She hath ever been held in honour by the worthiest kings,
+served by faithful subjects, and shall ever, by the favour of God,
+resist, repell, and confound all attempts against her person and
+kingdom. In the mean time, let the Spaniards and traitors vaunt of their
+success; while we, her true and obedient subjects, guided by the shining
+light of her virtues, shall always love, serve, and obey her, to the end
+of our lives.
+
+
+
+SECTION XI
+
+_Note of the Fleet of the Indies, expected in Spain this year 1591; with
+the number that perished, according to the examination of certain
+Spaniards, lately taken and brought to England[376]._
+
+
+The fleet of New Spain, at their first gathering together, consisted of
+52 sail. The admiral and vice-admiral ships were each of 600 tons
+burden. Four or five of the ships were of 900 and 1000 tons each; some
+were of 400 tons, and the smallest of 200. Of this fleet 19 were cast
+away, containing by estimation 2600 men, which happened along the coast
+of New Spain, so that only 33 sail came to the Havannah.
+
+[Footnote 376: Hakluyt, II. 670.]
+
+The fleet of Terra Firma, at its first departure from Spain, consisted
+of 50 sail, bound for Nombre de Dios, where they discharged their
+loading, and returned thence for their health sake to Carthagena, till
+such time as the treasure they were to take in at Nombre de Dios were
+ready. But before this fleet departed, some were gone by one or two at a
+time, so that only 23 sail of this fleet arrived at the Havannah.
+
+There met at the Havannah,
+
+   33 sail from New Spain,
+   23 from the Terra Firma,
+   12 belonging to San Domingo,
+   9 from Honduras.
+
+Thus 77 ships joined and set sail from the Havannah, on the 17th of July
+1591, according to our account, and kept together till they arrived in
+the lat. of 35 deg. N. which was about the 10th of August. There the wind,
+which had been at S.W. changed suddenly to N. so that the sea coming
+from the S.W. and the wind violent from the N. they were put in great
+extremity, and then first lost the admiral of their fleet, in which were
+500 men; and within three or four days after, another storm rising, five
+or six others of their largest ships were cast away with all their men,
+together with their vice-admiral.
+
+In lat. 38 deg. N. and about the end of August, another great storm arose,
+in which all their remaining ships, except 48, were lost. These 48 ships
+kept together till they came in sight of the islands of Corvo and
+Flores, about the 5th or 6th of September, at which time they were
+separated by a great storm; and of that number, 15 or 16 sail were
+afterwards seen by three Spanish prisoners, riding at anchor under
+Tercera, while 12 or 14 more were observed to bear away for San Miguel.
+What became of them after these Spaniards were taken, cannot yet be
+certified; but their opinion is, that very few of this fleet escaped
+being either taken or cast away. It has been ascertained of late by
+other means of intelligence, that of this whole fleet of 123 sail, which
+should have come to Spain this year, there have only 25 yet arrived.
+This note was extracted from the examinations of certain Spanish
+prisoners, brought to England by six of the London ships, which took
+seven of these men from the before-mentioned fleet of the Indies near
+the islands of the Acores.
+
+
+SECTION XII.
+
+_Report of a Cruizing Voyage to the Azores in 1591, by a feet of London
+ships sent with supplies to the Lord Thomas Howard. Written by Captain
+Robert Flicke_[377].
+
+
+PRELIMINARY REMARKS[378].
+
+The following voyage is extracted from a letter, dated at Plymouth the
+24th of October 1591, and sent thence by Captain Flicke to Messrs Thomas
+Bromley, Richard Staper, and ---- Cordall, three of the contractors, as
+we apprehend, for the ships, and is titled, "Concerning the success of a
+part of the London supplies sent to the isles of the Azores to my Lord
+Thomas Howard." In this letter no mention is made of the number of ships
+employed, nor of the names of more than two captains besides Flicke,
+namely, _Brothus_ and _Furtho_, the latter of whom was bearer of the
+letter. We also find the name of four of the ships; the Costly,
+Centurion, Cherubim, and the Margaret and John, but not the names of
+their commanders, neither the name of the ship in which Flicke sailed,
+and which, for distinctions sake, we call the admiral. These omissions
+may be excuseable in a private letter, written only to acquaint the
+merchants of particulars they had not before learnt, and not designed as
+a formal narrative of the voyage to be laid before the public. As these,
+however, are essential to narratives of this kind, it might have been
+expected of Mr Hakluyt to have supplied such defects. We may judge,
+however, that the number of ships was seven, as in the preceding account
+of the fleet of the Indies, six London ships are mentioned as having
+fallen in with it, which were probably those separated from the admiral
+or commodore, which ship will make the seventh.--_Astley._
+
+[Footnote 377: Hakluyt, II. 671. Astley, I. 221.]
+
+[Footnote 378: Astley, I. 221.]
+
+
+NARRATIVE[379].
+
+
+Worshipful, my hearty commendations to you premised.--By my last letter,
+dated 12th August from this place, I advertised you particularly of the
+accidents which had befallen our fleet till then. It now remains to
+relate our exertions for accomplishing our orders for endeavouring to
+join my Lord Thomas Howard, and the success we have had. We departed
+from hence on the 17th August, the wind not serving before. Next day I
+summoned a council by signal, on which the captains and masters of all
+the ships came on board, when I acquainted them with my commission,
+confirmed by the lords of her majestys council, and with the
+advertisement of Sir Edward Denny, that my lord had determined to remain
+60 leagues west of Fayal, spreading his squadron north and south between
+37 deg. 30' and 38 deg. 30' north. But, if we did not there find him, we were to
+repair to the islands of Flores and Corvo, where a pinnace would
+purposely wait our coming till the last day of August; with the intent,
+after that day, to repair to the coast of Spain, about the heighth of
+the rock [_of Lisbon?_], some twenty or thirty leagues off shore. This
+being advisedly considered, and having regard to the shortness of time
+occasioned by our long delay at this place, and the uncertainty of
+favourable weather for us, it was generally concluded, as the best and
+surest way to meet my lord, to bear up for the heighth of _the rock_,
+without making any stay upon the coast, and thence to make directly for
+the foresaid islands, which was accordingly fully agreed to and
+performed.
+
+[Footnote 379: In pursuance of our uniform plan, of drawing from the
+original sources, this article is an exact transcript from Hakluyt, only
+modernizing his antiquated language and orthography, and not copied from
+the abridgement of Astley.--.E]
+
+The 28th of August we had sight of the Burlings, and being on the 29th
+athwart of Peniche, and having a favourable wind, we directed our course
+west for the Azores, without making any stay off the coast of Portugal.
+The 30th we met the Red Rose, Captain Royden, formerly called the Golden
+Dragon, which had separated from my lord in a storm. He informed us of
+50 sail of the king of Spains armada having sailed for the islands, but
+could not give us any intelligence of my lord, otherwise than supposing
+him to remain about the islands, wherefore we continued our course, the
+wind remaining favourable. The 4th of September we had sight of Tercera,
+and ranged along all the islands, both on their south, and north sides,
+for the space of four days, during which time we met with no ships
+whatever, so that we could learn no intelligence, either of my lord or
+of the fleet of the Indies; wherefore we directed our course to the west
+of Fayal, according to the instructions of Sir Edward Denny. When plying
+to the westwards on the 11th, we descried a sail from our main-top, and
+by two or three in the afternoon raised her hull, but the weather fell
+so calm that we could not fetch her. I therefore sent off my skiff well
+manned, and furnished with shot and swords, the Cherubim and the
+Margaret and John doing the like. Upon this the sail stood off again,
+and on the approach of night our boats lost sight of her and so
+returned. During this pursuit the Centurion was left astern, so that we
+missed her next morning, and spent all that day plying up and down in
+search of her: And, as all our ships were directed, in case of
+separation by stress of weather or other mischance, to meet and join at
+Flores, we, according to the instructions of Sir Edward Denny, proceeded
+for the purpose of finding my Lord Thomas Howard, and being in the
+heighth appointed, and not able to remain there in consequence of
+extreme tempests, which forced us to the isles of Flores and Corvo,
+which we made on the 14th in the morning, and there rejoined the
+Centurion. She informed us, that on the 12th day, being the same on
+which she lost us, she had met 45 sail of the fleet of the Indies.
+
+The same night, in consequence of this intelligence, we came to anchor
+between Flores and Corvo, and next morning at day-break, I convened a
+council of all the captains and masters on board my ship, by a signal
+flag. For satisfying our desire to learn some intelligence of my lord,
+as also for the purpose of procuring a supply of water, it was thought
+good to send our boats on shore armed, under the command of Captain
+Brothus; besides which, it was agreed, after our departure thence, to
+range along the south sides of the islands, that we might either procure
+some intelligence of my lord, or fall in with the fleet of the Indies;
+and, in case of missing both objects, to direct our course for Cape St
+Vincent. The boats being sent on shore, according to this determination,
+it chanced that the Costely, which rode outermost at our anchoring
+ground, having weighed to bring herself nearer among us to assist in
+protecting our boats, discovered two sail in opening the land, which we
+in the road-stead could not perceive. Upon this she fired a shot of
+warning, which caused us to _wave_ all our boats back; and before they
+could recover their ships, the two ships seen by the Costely appeared to
+us, on which we made all sail towards them, and in a happy hour as it
+pleased God. We had no sooner cleared the land and spoken one of them,
+which was a bark belonging to Bristol, also seeking my lord
+ineffectually at the place appointed, when so violent a storm arose that
+we had been in great danger of perishing if we had continued in the
+road. This storm continued in its utmost violence for sixty hours,
+during which I was separated from all our fleet except the Cherubim, and
+Costely, which continued in company. After it subsided, sailing in
+among the islands, I viewed the road of Fayal, and finding no roaders
+there, I went thence for the isle of Tercera.
+
+On the 19th day of September in the morning, coming to Tercera, and
+intending to edge into the road, a tempest arose and so scanted the wind
+that we could not get in. Being accordingly driven to leeward, we fell
+in among some of the fleet of the Indies, which had been dispersed by
+the storm, and driven from the road. Upon this our ship and the two
+others then with me gave several chases, by which we parted company.
+Following up my chase, we made her strike and yield about noon, when she
+turned out to be a Portuguese, laden with hides, sarsa-parilla, and
+_anile_ [Indigo.] At this instant we espied another, and taking our
+prize with us, followed and captured her before night. She was called
+the Conception, commanded by Francisco Spinola, and was laden with
+cochineal, raw hides, and certain raw silk: And as the sea was so
+tempestuous that we could in no way board her, neither by boats nor from
+the ship, so we kept her under our lee till a fit opportunity. That same
+night, a little before day, another ship joined company with us,
+supposing us and our two prizes to belong to their fleet, which we
+dissembled till morning.
+
+In the morning of the 20th, this new sail being somewhat shot a-head of
+us, and being anxious for the safe keeping of the two former, we
+purposed to cause our two prizes put out more sail, so as to keep near
+us while chasing the third, as our master insisted that they would
+follow us; owing to which, by the time we had caused this new one to
+yield, and had sent men on board to take possession, the Conception
+being far astern, and having got the wind of us, stood off with all her
+sails, so that we were forced to make a new chase after her, and had not
+the wind enlarged upon us we had lost her. The whole of this day was
+spent in this new pursuit, before we recovered her, and brought
+ourselves again in company with our other prizes; by which we lost the
+opportunity of that day, during which the weather served for boarding
+the Portuguese prize, which was in great distress, making request of us
+to take them on board, as they were ready to sink, as we could well
+perceive by their pumping incessantly, and in our judgment she went down
+that night.
+
+On the 21st the Conception sprung a leak also, which gained upon her
+notwithstanding every effort at the pumps, so that she could not be kept
+long above water. So I took out of her 42 chests of cochineal and silk,
+leaving her to the sea with 11 feet water in her hold, and 4700 hides.
+The other prize, which we have brought into harbour, is the Nuestra
+Sennora de los Remedios, Francisco Alvares captain, laden with 16 chests
+of cochineal, certain fardels [or bales] of raw silk, and about 4000
+hides. Upon the discharge of the goods, your honours shall be
+particularly advertised of the same. In boarding our prizes, such was
+the disorder of our men, that, besides rifling the persons of the
+Spaniards, they broke open the chests and purloined what money was in
+them; although I had given notice of my intention of going on board in
+person, to have taken a just account thereof in presence of three or
+four witnesses, putting the whole in safe custody, pursuant to the
+articles made in this behalf. And whereas certain sums of money taken
+from our men, which they had thus purloined and embezzled, together with
+other parcels brought on board my ship, amounting to 2129 pesos and a
+half, all of which the company demanded to have shared among them as due
+pillage, I refused this demand, and read to them openly at the mast the
+articles confirmed by my lord treasurer and my lord admiral, by which
+they ought to be directed in these things, declaring that it was not in
+my power to dispose thereof until the same were finally determined at
+home. Thereupon they mutinied, and grew at length to such fury, that
+they declared they would have it or else would break down the cabin.
+Seeing them ready to execute this threat, I was forced to yield, lest
+the great number of Spaniards we had on board might have taken the
+opportunity of rising against us; which, indeed, after the brawls of our
+men were appeased, they actually endeavoured to have done.
+
+By the last advice from Castile, the general of the king of Spains
+armada, lately put to sea, is ordered to join his fleet with that of the
+Indies, and to remain at Tercera till the 15th of October, waiting for
+six _pataches_ with seven or eight millions of the royal treasure
+expected by that time: otherwise they are to wait their coming from the
+Havannah till January next, or until the kings farther pleasure shall be
+made known. These pataches are said to be of 300 tons burden each,
+carrying 30 pieces of brass cannon, and are also reported to sail in a
+superior manner to any other ships. Before their coming to Flores,
+there perished of the fleet of the Indies eleven sail, among which was
+the admiral, and not one roan saved. It is likewise supposed by the
+Spaniards, that the storms we encountered at Flores and Tercera must
+have destroyed many more of them, of which indeed we were partly
+eye-witnesses. On the whole, therefore, what by the seas and our men of
+war, of the 75 sail that came from the Havannah, I presume one half will
+not arrive in Spain.
+
+On the night of the 11th October, we came to anchor in Plymouth sound,
+and got up next morning with our prize into Catwater, for which God be
+praised: For so vehement a storm arose, that our prize was forced to cut
+away her main-mast, otherwise, her ground tackle being bad, she had been
+driven on shore by the violence of the storm. This was the main cause
+which induced me to put in here, where I now propose to discharge the
+goods without farther risk, and have certified thus much to my lord
+admiral, and therewith desire to receive the directions of my lords of
+the council together with yours, as my lord Thomas Howard is not yet
+returned. How the rest of our consorts, which separated from us, may
+have sped, or what prizes they may have taken, of which there is much
+hope by reason of the scattering of the West India fleet, I am as yet
+unable to say any thing. And thus, waiting your answer, and referring
+for all other matters to captain Furtho, the bearer hereof, I make an
+end, at Plymouth this 24th of October 1591.
+
+   Your Worships loving Friend,
+   ROBERT FLICKE.
+
+SECTION XIII.
+
+_Exploits of the English in several Expeditions and cruizing Voyages
+from 1589 to 1592; extracted from John Huighen van Linschoten_[380].
+
+
+PRELIMINARY REMARKS.
+
+The entire title of this article in Hakluyts Collection is, "A large
+testimony of John Huighen van Linschoten, Hollander, concerning the
+worthy exploits achieved by the right honourable the Earl of Cumberland,
+by Sir Martine Frobisher, Sir Richard Grenville, and diverse other
+English captains, about the isles of the Azores, and upon the coasts of
+Spain and Portugal, in the years 1589, 1590, 1591, &c. recorded in his
+excellent discourse of voyages to the East and West Indies, cap. 96, 97,
+and 99." Of this article, the Editor of Astley gives the following
+account.
+
+[Footnote 380: Hakluyt, II. 674. Astley, I. 225.]
+
+"The author, John Huighen van Linschoten, left Goa with a fleet of
+ships, viz. The Santa Maria, Nuestra Sennora de la Concepcao, the San
+Christopher admiral, the San Thome which was the largest and most richly
+laden, and the Santa Cruz in which Linschoten sailed. It was extracted
+by Hakluyt from the 96th, 97th, and 99th chapters of the first book of
+Linschotens Voyages in English, beginning at p. 171. This section is
+intended as a supplement to the English cruizing voyages already
+inserted, which fall within the period mentioned in the title; and is
+the more material, as the memoirs it contains not only confirm the most
+material facts related in these preceding voyages, but give a
+satisfactory account of many things which are there but imperfectly
+related, often continuing the history which in these breaks off
+abruptly, and bringing to light some remarkable achievements of our
+countrymen, of which otherwise no mention could be found in our
+voluminous naval transactions.
+
+"We are persuaded the reader will feel a secret joy in contemplating the
+great figure this nation made in these heroic times; owing to that
+universal zeal to promote the commerce and glory of England, which then
+prevailed among the ministers of the crown, as well as the people at
+large. We presume likewise, that this pleasure will be not a little
+enhanced by the consideration that these particulars were written by a
+foreigner, who is held in great reputation for his judgment and
+fidelity, and who has sounded the praise of our countrymen even beyond
+what has been done by our own historians. On the other hand, the reader
+will be no less concerned to find what immense treasures some of our
+adventurers lost, by unaccountably missing the fleets of which they went
+in search, when at the same time they were so near them, that it seemed
+almost impossible they should escape. This shews, after all, how
+uncertain is the meeting of ships at sea, and that two great fleets may
+sail almost close to one another, without having the least
+suspicion."--_Astley._
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+The 22d of July 1589, about evening, being near the islands of Flores
+and Corvo, we perceived three ships making towards us, which came from
+under the land and put us in great fear, for they came close to our
+admiral and shot diverse times at him and at another ship of our
+company, whereby we perceived them to be English, for they bore the
+English flag at their main-tops, but none of them seemed above 60 tons
+burden. About evening they followed after us, and all night bore
+lanterns with candles burning at their sterns, although the moon shined.
+That night we passed hard by the island of Fayal; and next morning,
+being between the isle of St George on our right and the small isle of
+Graciosa on our left, we espied the three English ships still following
+us. They consulted together, upon which one of them sailed backwards, as
+if one ship had followed after us without company, and for a time that
+ship was out of sight; but in no long time afterwards, it returned to
+the other two, when they consulted again, and came all three together
+against our ship, because we were to leeward of all our ships, having
+the island of St George on one side instead of a sconce, [fort] thinking
+so to deal with us as to force us to run on shore, to which we were very
+near. In that manner they came bravely towards us, with their flags
+displayed, sounding their trumpets, and sailed at least three times
+about us, discharging at us their muskets and calivers and some pieces
+of great ordnance, doing us no harm in the hull of our ship, but spoiled
+all our sails and ropes, and so plagued us that no man durst put forth
+his head. When we shot off a piece of ordnance, we had at the least an
+hours work to load it again, there being a great noise and cry in our
+ship, as if we had been all cast away, whereupon the English began to
+mock us, calling out to us with many taunting words.
+
+In the mean time, the other ships that were in company with us hoisted
+all their sails, doing their best to bear away for Tercera, and not
+looking once behind them to help us, as not caring for us, but doubting
+they would be too late thither, and thinking they did enough if they
+could save themselves, whereby it may be easily seen what kind of
+company they keep with each other, and what kind of order is among them.
+In the end, finding small advantage against us, and little knowing in
+what fear we were, and also because we were not far from Tercera, the
+English left us; on which we were not a little rejoiced, as thinking
+ourselves risen from death to life, though we were not yet well assured
+nor void of fear, till we got to anchor in the road of Tercera, under
+the protection of the Portuguese fort, towards which we made all
+possible sail. On the other hand, we were still in great doubt, not
+knowing the situation of the island, or whether they were our friends or
+enemies; and we were so much the more doubtful, because we found no man
+of war there, nor any caravels of advice from Portugal as we expected,
+to have convoyed us home, or given us intelligence, as they usually do
+in that country. And, because the English had been so victorious in
+those parts, we suspected that it went not well with Spain. The
+inhabitants of Tercera were no less fearful than we, for on seeing our
+fleet they thought us to have been English, and that we came to over-run
+the island, because the three English ships came in along with us and
+had wound up their flags; upon which the islanders sent out two caravels
+to us that lay there, with advice from the king for such India ships as
+should come there.
+
+Those caravels came to view us, and perceiving what we were made after
+us; upon which the English ships left us and made towards the caravels,
+because the caravels thought them friends and shunned them not, as
+supposing them of our company: But we shot three or four times, and made
+signs to them that they should make towards the island, which they
+presently did. On perceiving that, the Englishmen made out to sea: and
+then the caravels sent on board us, saying that the people of the island
+were all in arms, having received advice from Portugal, that Sir Francis
+Drake was in readiness, and meant to come to the islands. They likewise
+brought us news of the overthrow of the Spanish armada which had gone
+against England, and that the English had been at the gates of Lisbon;
+for which reason it win the king's commands that we should put into the
+island of Tercera, and remain there under the protection of its castle,
+till we received further orders, as it was then thought too dangerous
+for us to continue our voyage to Lisbon. These news put all our fleet in
+great fear, making us look upon each other as not knowing what to do or
+say; as it was dangerous for us to put into the road, which lies open to
+the sea, so that although they had the kings commands for so doing, the
+India ships durst not anchor there, but only used to come thither,
+standing off and on, and sending their boats a-land for such necessaries
+as they wanted, without coming to anchor. But now necessity compelled us
+to this measure, owing to our fears for the three small English ships,
+also because of the kings orders, and because we understood that the
+Earl of Cumberland was not far from these islands with sundry ships of
+war. We made therefore a virtue of necessity, and entering the road of
+Tercera, anchored close under the castle, in waiting for orders from the
+king to pursue our voyage, it being then the 24th of July or St Jameses
+day.
+
+The 12th of August, the Earl of Cumberland, with six or seven ships of
+war, sailed past the island of Tercera; and to our great good fortune
+passed out of sight. We then set out in all haste, and, for our greater
+security, took along with us 400 Spaniards of those who were in garrison
+in the island, and made sail for Lisbon with a favourable wind, so that
+in eleven days we arrived in the river Tagus with great joy and triumph.
+For, had we been one day longer of getting into the river, we had all
+been taken by Captain Drake, [Sir Francis Drake] who came before Cascais
+with 40 ships, at the very time when we cast anchor in the Tagus under
+the guard of several gallies.
+
+While I remained in Tercera, the Earl of Cumberland came to St Marys to
+take in fresh water and other victuals; but the inhabitants would not
+suffer him to have it, and wounded both the earl himself and several of
+his men, so that they were forced to depart without having any thing.
+Likewise, while I was at Tercera, the same earl came to the island of
+Graciosa, where he went to land in person with seven or eight others,
+demanding certain beasts, poultry, and other victuals, with wine and
+fresh water, which they willingly gave him, after which he departed
+without doing any injury, for which the inhabitants were very thankful,
+praising his courtesy and faithfulness to his promise. The earl came
+likewise at that time to Fayal, where at the first they begun to resist
+him; but by reason of some controversy among themselves, they let him
+land, when he razed the castle, throwing all the cannon into the sea,
+and took with him certain caravels and ships that lay in the road, with
+all such provisions as he wanted, and then departed. Thereupon, the king
+caused the principal actors in that transaction to be punished, and went
+thither a company of soldiers, which went from Tereera, with all kind of
+warlike ammunition and great shot, rebuilding the cattle the better to
+defend the island, and no more trusting to the Portuguese inhabitants.
+
+The 9th of October 1589[381], there arrived in Tereera fourteen ships
+from the Spanish West Indies, laden with cochineal, hides, gold, silver,
+pearls, and other rich wares. When they departed from the harbour of the
+Havannah, they were fifty in company; of which eleven sunk in the
+channel [of Florida] by reason of foul weather, and all the rest were
+scattered and separated from each other in a storm. Next day there came
+another ship of the same fleet, which sailed close under the island
+endeavouring to get into the road; when she was met by an English whip
+that had not above three cast pieces [of ordnance], while the Spaniards
+had twelve. They fought a long while together, which we in the island
+could distinctly see. The governor of the island sent out two boats
+filled with musketeers to aid the Spanish ship; but before they could
+get up to her assistance; the English had shot her below water, so that
+we saw her sink into the sea with all her sails up, and she entirely
+disappeared. The Englishmens boat saved the Captain and about thirty
+others, but not one pennyworth of the goods, which were to the value of
+200,000 ducats, in gold, silver, and pearls. All the rest of the crew
+were drowned, to the number of about fifty persons, among whom were some
+friars and women, whom the English could not save. The English set all
+the people they had saved on shore, and then sailed away. The 27th of
+the same month of October 1589, these fourteen ships sailed from
+Tercera, for Seville; and on coming to the coast of Spain, they were all
+taken by some English ships that watched for them, two only excepted
+which made their escape, all the rest being carried to England.
+
+[Footnote 381: In Hakluyt, all that now follows is marked as extracted
+from the 99th chapter of Linschoten.]
+
+About this time, the earl of Cumberland, with one of the queens ships
+and five or six others, kept hovering about the islands, and came
+oft-times close to the island of Tercera, and to the road of Angra, so
+near that the people on land could easily count all the men on his
+decks, and could even distinguish one from another; they of the island
+not once shooting at them, which they might easily have done, as they
+were often within musket-shot of the town and fort. He continued in
+these parts for the space of two months, sailing round about the
+islands, and landed in Graciosa and Fayal, as I have already mentioned.
+He took several ships and caravels, which he sent off to England, so
+that the people of the islands durst not put forth their heads. At one
+time, about three or four days after the earl had been at the island of
+Fayal, and was departed from thence, there arrived there six ships of
+the Indies, the general of which was one _Juan Dorives_, which landed in
+that island four millions of gold and silver[382]. Then, being much in
+fear of the English, and having refreshed themselves with all speed,
+they set sail and arrived safe at San Lucar, without meeting an enemy,
+to the great good luck of the Spaniards and bad fortune of the English;
+for, within less than two days after the gold and silver was again laden
+into the Spanish ships, the earl of Cumberland sailed past the island
+again; so that if he had once got sight of these valuable ships, without
+doubt he had got them all, as the Spaniards themselves confessed.
+
+[Footnote 382: The denomination is not mentioned, perhaps _pezos_, or
+what we call dollars.--E.]
+
+In the month of November, two great ships arrived in Tercera, being the
+admiral and vice-admiral of the fleet laden with silver, which had been
+separated from the fleet in a great storm, and were in great jeopardy
+and distress, ready to sink, being forced to use all their pumps, and so
+terrified, that they wished a thousand times to have met the English, to
+whom they would willingly have given all the silver, and every thing
+they had on board, only to preserve their lives. Although the earl still
+hovered about the islands, yet did he not meet with these ships, which
+got with much labour and difficulty into the road of Angra, where with
+all speed they unladed and landed about five millions in silver, all in
+great pieces or ingots of 8 or 12 great pounds, so that the whole quay
+lay covered with plates and chests of silver, full of pieces of eight
+rials, most wonderful to behold: Each million being worth ten hundred
+thousand ducats, besides gold, pearls, and other precious stones, which
+were not registered. The admiral and chief commander of these ships, and
+of the whole fleet to which they belonged, was _Alvaro Flores de Quin
+Quiniones_, who was sick of the Neapolitan disease, and was brought to
+land; and of which malady he died soon afterwards at Seville. He had
+with him the kings commission under the great seal, giving him full
+authority as general and commander in chief upon the seas, over all
+fleets and ships, and in all places, lands, and islands, on shore
+wherever he came; wherefore the governor of Tercera shewed him much
+honour, and between them it was concerted, seeing the weakness of the
+ships and the danger from the English, that they should send the ships
+first empty of treasure to Seville or Lisbon, under a guard of soldiers,
+when the king might give orders afterwards to fetch the silver home
+under safe convoy. The said admiral Alvaro Flores staid there, under
+colour of taking care of the silver, but chiefly because of his disease
+and fear of the English. He had for his part alone, above the value of
+50,000 ducats in pearls, which he shewed us, and sought to sell or
+barter them with us for spices or bills of exchange. These two ships
+sailed from Tercera with three or four hundred men, including those who
+came with them from the Indies and soldiers; but while at sea in a
+storm, the admiral split and sunk outright, not one man being saved; and
+the vice-admiral, after cutting away her masts, ran aground hard by
+Setubal, where she broke in pieces, some of the men saving themselves by
+swimming, who brought the news of all the rest being drowned.
+
+In the same month of November 1589, there came two great ships out of
+the Spanish Indies, and when within half a mile of the road of Tercera,
+they were met with by an English ship which fought them both together
+for a long while, and took them both. About seven or eight months
+before, there came an English ship to Tercera, pretending to be a
+Frenchman come for traffic, and began to load woad, but being discovered
+was confiscated to the king, both ship and cargo, and the men all made
+prisoners, yet were allowed to roam up and down to get their livings, by
+labouring like slaves, being considered in as safe custody in the island
+at large as if in a prison. But at length, upon a Sunday, they all went
+behind the hills called _Bresil_, where they found a fishing boat, in
+which they rowed out to sea to the ships of the Earl of Cumberland, who
+chanced for their good fortune to come to the island, and anchored with
+his ships about half a mile from the road of Angra, close to two small
+islands about a bare shot from the shore of Tercera, which are full of
+goats, deer, and sheep, belonging to the inhabitants of Tercera. These
+sailors knew this well, wherefore they rowed to these islands in their
+boats, whence they took as many goats and sheep as they needed, which
+was well seen by those of the town and main island, but they durst not
+go forth to hinder them. By this exploit, there only remained behind the
+master and merchant of the detained English ship. This master had a
+brother-in-law in England, who, on hearing of his brothers imprisonment,
+got a licence from the queen to fit out a ship, with which to endeavour
+to recover his losses by cruizing against the Spaniards, by which to
+redeem his brother from imprisonment in Tercera, and it was he who took
+the two Spanish ships before the town: The before-mentioned merchant,
+who was my intimate acquaintance, was standing on the shore along with
+me, looking at them at the time. When these ships were taken, which were
+worth 300,000 ducats, the brother sent all the men on shore, except only
+two of the principal gentlemen, whom he kept to give in exchange for his
+brother; and by the pilot of one of the captured ships he sent a letter
+to the governor of Tercera, offering to send the two gentlemen on shore
+if his brother were delivered up, otherwise he would carry them
+prisoners into England, which indeed he did, as the governor would not
+deliver up his brother, saying the gentlemen might make that suit to the
+king of Spain. We invited that Spanish pilot to supper with us, and the
+Englishmen likewise, when he related to us the particulars of the fight,
+much commending the order and manner in which the English fought, as
+also their courteous behaviour to him: But, in the end, the English
+merchant stole away in a French ship, without paying any ransom.
+
+In January 1590, there arrived one ship alone at Tercera from the
+Spanish West Indies, bringing news that a fleet of an hundred sail,
+which had set out from the Indies, were driven by a storm on the coast
+of Florida, where they were all cast away, vast riches and many men
+being lost, and she alone had escaped with the news. Thus by account, of
+200 ships which were certainly known to have sailed out of New Spain,
+San Domingo, Havannah, Cabo Verde, Brazil, Guinea, &c. in the year
+1589, for Spain and Portugal, not above 14 or 15 of them arrived safe,
+all the rest having either been foundered, cast away, or taken. In the
+same month of January, there came to Tercera from Seville, 15 or 16
+ships, mostly fliboats of the Low Countries, and some ships of Britanny,
+that were arrested in Spain. These came out full of soldiers and well
+provided with guns and ammunition, to lade home the silver that lay in
+Tercera, and to bring home Alvaro Flores into Spain, by order of the
+king. As at this time of the year there are always great storms about
+these islands, the above-mentioned ships durst not enter the road of
+Tercera, for it then blew so great a storm that some of the ships, which
+had entered the road, had been forced to cut away their masts, and were
+in much danger of being lost, and among these a ship of Biscay was
+actually driven upon the coast and dashed to pieces, but all the men
+were saved. The other ships were obliged to keep to sea and to separate
+from each other, allowing themselves to drive at the mercy of the winds
+and waves till the 15th of March, as in all that time they had not one
+day of good weather in which to anchor, so that they endured much
+distress, heartily cursing both the silver and the island.
+
+When this storm was passed, they fell in with an English ship of about
+40 tons, which by reason of the heavy wind could not hoist all her
+sails, so that they took her. Hoisting her English ensign on the stern
+of their admiral, the ships came now as proudly into the road-stead of
+Tercera as if they had defeated the whole navy of England: But, just as
+their admiral was entering the road, trickt out with the English flag on
+his stern, there came by chance two English ships past the island, which
+paid her so well for her bravity, that she had to cry out
+_misericordia_. Had she been a mile farther out, the English ships
+doubtless would have taken her; but getting under the guns of the
+fortress, which began to play upon the English ships, they were forced
+to leave her and put farther out to sea, after having slain five or six
+of the Spaniards.
+
+The Englishmen taken in the small ship were put under hatches, coupled
+together in irons; and, after they had been three or four days
+prisoners, a Spanish ensign in the ship, who had a brother slain in the
+armada that went against England, took a fancy to revenge his brothers
+death, and to shew his own manhood on these captives; whereupon, taking
+a poinard, he stabbed six of them to the heart as they sat below in
+irons. Two others of them perceiving this atrocious action, clasped each
+other about the body, and leapt into the sea, where they were drowned.
+This infamous act was much disliked by all the Spaniards, so that the
+assassin was carried prisoner to Lisbon; upon which the king of Spain
+commanded him to be sent to England, that the queen might use him
+according to her pleasure; which sentence, at the earnest request of the
+friends of the murderer, was commuted to an order for his being
+beheaded; but on Good Friday, when the cardinal was going to mass, the
+captains and commanders made such intercession for him, that he was
+finally pardoned. I thought good to note this incident, that the bloody
+and dishonourable minds of the Spaniards to those who were under
+subjection to them, might be made manifest.
+
+The same two English ships, which followed the Spanish admiral till he
+took shelter under the guns of the fort, put out to sea, where they met
+with the only remaining vessel of that fleet which had been scattered in
+the storm, all the rest being now in the road. This small ship they
+took, sending all me men on shore unhurt; but it they had known what had
+been done to the English captives, I believe they would have taken
+vengeance, as many an innocent soul afterwards paid for the atrocity of
+the Spanish ensign. The ship now taken by the English, was the same
+which had been formerly confiscated at Tercera, and was sold to the
+Spaniards that then came from the Indies, who sailed in her to San
+Lucar; where it also was arrested by the duke, and appointed to go along
+with the others, to fetch the silver from Tercera, as it was a good
+sailer; but it was the meanest of all that fleet. By this means, it was
+taken from the Spaniards and carried to England, where the owners got it
+again when they least expected.
+
+On the 19th March 1590, having laden the kings silver and received
+Alvaro Flores with his company, and good provision of necessaries,
+warlike ammunitions and soldiers, the before-mentioned 19 ships sailed
+from Tercera, firmly resolved, as they set forth, to fight valiantly to
+the last man, before they would yield or lose their riches. Though they
+intended to make for San Lucar, the wind forced them to Lisbon, as if
+willing to keep them there in safety, although Alvaro Flores would have
+persisted in forcing his way to San Lucar against the wind and weather.
+But, constrained by adverse wind, and importunately urged by the
+mariners, who protested they would require their losses and damages from
+him, he consented to put in at Lisbon, whence the silver was conveyed by
+land to Seville. At this time, there lay 20 English ships off Cape St
+Vincent, to watch for this fleet; so that if they had gone forwards for
+Sun Lucar, which they certainly had done if the wind had been fair, they
+must have fallen into the hands of the English: They may say, therefore,
+that the wind lent them a fortunate voyage on this occasion. If the
+English had met them, they had surely been in great danger, and possibly
+few of them had escaped, on account of the fear which they were then in
+of the English; as fortune, or God rather, was then wholly against them,
+which was enough to make the Spaniards out of heart, and to inspire the
+English with the greater boldness; for being victorious, they were stout
+and valiant, and seeing all their enterprizes successful, they were
+become lords and masters of the sea, and needed to care for no man, as
+well appears from this short narrative.
+
+On the 7th of August 1590, a fleet of 20 English ships appeared off
+Tercera, five of them being ships belonging to the queen, of which one
+Martin Frobisher was general, as we afterwards learnt. They came
+purposely to watch for the fleet of the Spanish West Indies, and for the
+India ships, and the ships of the other countries in the West. This put
+the islanders in great fear, especially those of Fayal, where the
+English sent a trumpeter to the governor, to ask certain supplies of
+wine, flesh, and other provisions for their money. This request was not
+only refused, but they shot the messenger and slew him, which gave the
+English much displeasure, so that they sent another message desiring
+them to look to themselves and keep sure guard, as they meant to come
+and visit them per force. The governor sent back for answer, that he was
+there in behalf of the king of Spain, and would do his best to keep them
+out, as in duty bound; but nothing was done after all, though the people
+of Fayal were in great fear, sending to Tercera for aid, whence they had
+some barks with powder and other ammunition of war, with some Biscuit
+and other necessary provisions.
+
+The 30th of August, certain news came from Portugal, that 80 ships had
+sailed from _the Groin_, (Corunna) laden with victuals, ammunition of
+war, money, and soldiers, bound for Britanny in aid of the catholic
+leaguers of France against the king of Navarre. At this time likewise,
+two Netherland hulks, when half seas over on their way from Portugal to
+Tercera, were met by four English ships belonging to the queen,
+commanded by Sir John Hawkins, by whom they were stopped; but he let
+them go again uninjured. According to the report of these Netherlanders,
+each of these ships carried 80 pieces of ordnance. They reported
+likewise, that Captain Drake (Sir Francis) lay with 40 English ships in
+the channel, watching for the fleet from Corunna; and that ten other
+English ships lay off Cape St Vincent, that if any ships escaped
+Frobisher at the islands, they might intercept them. These tidings
+greatly alarmed the islanders, lest if the English failed of catching
+the Spanish fleet, and got nothing by them, they might fall upon the
+islands, that they might not go home empty handed; whereupon they held
+strict watch, sending home advice to the king of what intelligence they
+had.
+
+The 1st September, there came a Portuguese ship from Pernambuco in
+Brazil to the island of St Michael, with news, that the admiral of the
+Portuguese fleet from the East Indies, having missed St Helena, was
+forced to put into Pernambuco, though expressly forbidden by the king
+under a heavy penalty, because of the worms in that haven which greatly
+spoil the ships. The same ship, in which was the Admiral Bernardin
+Ribero, sailed the former year 1589 from Lisbon for India with five
+ships in her company, four only of which got to India, the fifth being
+never heard of, so that she was believed lost. The other four returned
+safe into Portugal, though the admiral was much spoiled, as he met two
+English ships, which fought him a long while and slew many of his men,
+yet he escaped from them at last. The 5th of the same month, there
+arrived at Tercera a caravel belonging to Corvo, bringing 50 men who had
+been spoiled by the English, who set them ashore on the island of Corvo.
+They had been taken in a ship coming from the Spanish West Indies, and
+reported that the English had taken four other West India ships, and a
+caravel having the king of Spains letters of advice for the Portuguese
+ships coming from the East Indies; and that, including those they had
+taken, the English had at least 40 ships together, so that nothing could
+escape them; therefore, that the Portuguese ships coming from India
+durst not put into the islands, but took their course between 40 deg. and
+42 deg. of N. latitude, whence they shaped their course for Lisbon, shunning
+likewise Cape St Vincent, as otherwise they could not look for safety,
+the sea being quite full of English ships. Wherefore, the king advised
+that the fleet now at Havannah in the Spanish West Indies, and ready to
+sail for Spain, should remain till the next year, because of the great
+danger of falling into the hands of the English. This was no small
+charge and hindrance to the fleet, as the ships that remain long at the
+Havannah consume themselves and in a manner eat up one another, from the
+great number of their people, and the great scarcity and dearness of
+every thing at that place; wherefore many of the ships adventured rather
+to hazard themselves singly for the voyage than to stay there; all of
+which fell into the hands of the English, and many of their men were
+brought to Tercera: So that we could see nothing else for a whole day
+but spoiled men set on shore, some from one ship and some from another,
+it being pitiful to see and hear them all, cursing the English and their
+own bad fortunes, with those who had been the cause of provoking the
+English to war, and complaining of the small remedy and order taken
+therein by the officers of the king of Spain.
+
+The 19th of the same month of September, a caravel arrived at Tercera
+from Lisbon, bringing one of the kings officers to cause lade the goods
+that were saved from the Malacca ship, and for which we had so long
+tarried there, and to send them to Lisbon. At the same time Don Alonso
+de Bacan sailed from Corunna for the Azores with 40 great ships of war,
+to wait for the fleets from the Spanish and Portuguese Indies, which,
+along with our Malacca goods when laden, he was to convoy to the Tagus.
+But, when he had been some days at sea, always with a contrary wind,
+only two of his ships could get to the islands, all the rest being
+scattered. When these two ships arrived at Tercera and did not find the
+fleet, they immediately returned in search of it. In the mean time the
+king changing his mind, sent orders for the commercial ships to remain
+in the Indies, and for Don Alonso Bacan to return to Corunna, which he
+did accordingly, never once coming near the Azores except the two ships
+already mentioned; for he well knew that the English lay near Corvo, but
+would not visit them, and so returned to Corunna. Thus our goods from
+Malacca remained unshipped, and were trussed up again, having to wait
+some other opportunity.
+
+The 23d October in this same year 1590, a caravel came from Portugal to
+Tercera, bringing advice that of the five ships which sailed in that
+year from Lisbon for the East Indies, four of them had returned to
+Portugal after being four months at sea: the admiral ship, in which was
+the viceroy Mathias de Albuquerque, having only got to India after being
+eleven months at sea without ever seeing land, as was afterwards learnt
+by news over-land, having arrived in great misery at Malacca. In this
+ship there died 280 men during the voyage out, according to a note sent
+by the viceroy to the cardinal at Lisbon, with the names and sirnames of
+every man, likewise giving a narrative of the voyage, and the misery
+they had endured. This obstinate perseverance was entirely occasioned by
+the anxiety of Albuquerque not to lose the government of Portuguese
+India, as he had sworn to lose his life or arrive in India, which indeed
+he did to the great danger and loss of his company, many of whom paid
+with their lives, and that chiefly owing to want of provisions.
+Albuquerque knew well, however, if he had returned to Portugal with the
+other ships, that he would have been deprived of his government, as the
+people began already to murmur at his proud and lofty demeanour. Among
+other instances of his pride, he caused to be painted over his gallery,
+the figure of Fortune and his own picture, with a staff standing by, as
+if threatening Fortune, with this motto, _Quero que vencas_; that is, _I
+will have thee to overcome_[383]. When this was read by the cardinal and
+other gentlemen, who accompanied him on board out of respect, they
+thought it an instance of foolish arrogance: But this is no strange
+matter among the Portuguese, as they above all others _must let the fool
+peep out of their sleeves_, especially when in authority. I knew Mathias
+de Albuquerque in India, when a military officer, then beloved of all
+men and behaving himself courteously to all, so that he was unanimously
+desired to be their viceroy. But, having received his patent with full
+power and authority, he so much changed from his former behaviour, that,
+by reason of his pride, all began to fear and curse him, even before his
+departure from Lisbon, such charges being often seen in many men, when
+advanced to high state and dignity[384].
+
+[Footnote 383: De Faria says, "The season was so far advanced when he
+set out, that it was generally believed he would not accomplish the
+voyage. But he caused himself to be painted on his colours standing on
+Fortune; and, setting these up in his ship, declared he would perform
+the voyage in spite of her, and did so" As De Faria does not reflect
+upon him for this, it may be presumed, he thought it merely an
+indication of an heroic disposition.--Astley, I. 231. a.]
+
+[Footnote 384: De Faria gives a very advantageous character of this
+viceroy, saying that he was one of the most deserving of those who
+enjoyed that high station. He left 80,000 ducats in the treasury,
+besides jewels of Ceylon of great value. He thought no one could cheat
+him; yet, on purpose to undeceive him, a soldier drew his pay three
+several times by as many names. He was of middle stature, and lame of
+one foot, but not so in disposition and manners, being a good Christian
+and well-bred gentleman.--Astley, I. 231, b.]
+
+The 20th January 1591, news was brought from Portugal to Tercera, that
+the English had taken a ship sent by the king to the Portuguese Indies,
+carrying advice to the viceroy of the return of the four ships to
+Portugal; which captured ship was stuffed full of goods, in consequence
+of their return, besides having 500,000 ducats in ryals of eight. It
+sailed from Lisbon in November 1590, and fought the English a long time,
+but had at length to yield, and was carried to England, where all the
+men were set free and returned to Lisbon, at which place the captain was
+thrown into prison, but afterwards justified himself and was released,
+as he told me personally. The English took, at the same time, a ship
+coming from the Mina, laden with gold, and two ships laden with pepper
+and other spices, bound for Italy, their pepper only being worth 170,000
+ducats. All these rich prizes were carried clear off into England.
+
+
+
+In July 1591, an earthquake commenced in the island of Tercera, which
+continued from the 26th of that month to the 12th of August, or 18 days,
+during all which time no person durst remain within a house, but all
+fled into the fields in terrible consternation, fasting and praying
+almost incessantly. Many houses fell down, and in particular a town
+called Villa Franca was almost utterly destroyed, all its houses and
+cloisters thrown down, and several people slain. In some places the
+ground rose up, the cliffs were removed from their places, and even some
+hills were thrown down and levelled with the adjoining plains. The
+earthquake was so violent, that the ships in the road and in the
+adjoining sea, were shaken as if the whole earth had been agitated to
+its centre. In one place a fountain sprung from the ground, whence clear
+water flowed in abundance for four days, and then ceased. All this time
+a noise was heard under ground as of thunder, or as if all the devils in
+hell had been assembled there, by which many died of fear. Four several
+times the island of Tercera shook with such violence as if it had turned
+upon its foundations, yet was it not overwhelmed. Earthquakes are common
+in these islands, as about 20 years before there happened just such an
+earthquake, when a hill, close to the town of Villa Franca, fell down
+and buried all the town with earth, by which many people were
+overwhelmed and slain.
+
+The 25th of August, the kings armada from Ferrol arrived in Tercera,
+consisting of 30 ships of war belonging to Biscay, Portugal, and Spain,
+together with 10 Dutch fliboats that were pressed at Lisbon into the
+service, besides other small vessels and _pataxos_ to serve as
+advice-boats, and to scour the seas for intelligence. This fleet came to
+wait for and convoy the ships from the Spanish Indies; and the fliboats
+were for the purpose of bringing home to Lisbon our goods that were
+saved in the lost ship from Malacca. This fleet arrived at the island of
+Corvo on the 13th of September[385], where the English then lay waiting
+for the fleet from the Spanish Indies, with a squadron of about 16
+ships. Some or most of the Spanish ships were already come to the
+Azores, and the English were in great hopes to have taken them: But, on
+perceiving the Spanish fleet of war to be so strong, the lord Thomas
+Howard, who was admiral of the English, gave orders to his fleet not to
+assail the Spaniards, and on no account to separate from him without
+special orders[386]. Yet the vice-admiral, Sir Richard Grenville, in his
+ship the Revenge, bore into the Spanish fleet, and shot among them doing
+much harm, thinking that the rest of the English ships would have
+followed him, which they did not, but left him there and sailed away,
+the reason of which could not be known. Perceiving this, the Spaniards
+boarded the Revenge with 7 or 8 ships, but she bravely withstood them
+all, fighting with them at the least 12 hours without ceasing, and sunk
+two of them, one a double fliboat of 600 tons, and admiral of the
+fliboats, the other a ship of Biscay. In the end, however, in
+consequence of the overwhelming number that came against her, the
+Revenge was taken, but to the heavy loss of the Spaniards, who lost in
+the fight, either slain or drowned, above 400 men, while 100 of the
+English were slain. Sir Richard was himself wounded in the brain, of
+which he afterwards died.
+
+[Footnote 385: It is probable, from this date, that the arrival of the
+fleet at Tercera on the 25th August, as above, is an error; and that it
+only then left Ferrol; on its voyage for Tercera.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 386: See the English account of these events in the
+immediately preceding section.--E.]
+
+Sir Richard, after the Revenge yielded, was carried on board the San
+Paulo, the ship in which was Don Alonso de Bacan, the admiral of the
+Spanish fleet, where his wounds were dressed by the Spanish surgeons,
+but Don Alonso would neither see nor speak to him. All the other
+captains went to visit and comfort him in his hard fortune, wondering at
+his courage and constancy, as he shewed no signs of faintness, not even
+changing colour: But, feeling his death approaching, he spoke in Spanish
+to the following purport: "Here die I Richard Grenville, with a joyous
+and quiet mind, having ended my life as a true soldier ought to do,
+fighting for my country, my queen, my religion, and my honour: so that
+my soul most joyfully departeth from this body, and shall always leave
+behind the everlasting fame of a true and valiant soldier, having done
+my duty as became me." When he had finished these, or such like words,
+he gave up the ghost with great and unshaken courage, no man being able
+to perceive the least sign of concern. This sir Richard Grenville was a
+great and rich gentleman of England, having large yearly revenues, but
+of a daring and intrepid disposition, and much affected to warlike
+enterprize; insomuch that he voluntarily offered his services to the
+queen. He had performed many valiant deeds, and was greatly feared among
+the islands, his intrepidity being well known to all. He was, however,
+of a severe and rigid character, so that his own people feared and hated
+him for his fierceness, and spoke very hardly of him. For, when they in
+the Revenge first fell in among the Spanish fleet, they had their
+mainsail in readiness, and might possibly have got away, as it was one
+of the best sailing ships of the English; and, as the master perceived
+that the rest of the squadron had left them, and did not follow up to
+their support, he gave orders to _cut the mainsail_, that they likewise
+should make off: But sir Richard threatened him and all the rest of the
+crew, that if any man laid hold of the mainsail with that intent, he
+would cause him to be hung up immediately; so that in fact they were
+compelled to fight, and in the end were taken. He was of so hardy a
+complexion, that, while among the Spanish officers, while at dinner or
+supper with them, he would swallow three or four bumpers of wine, and
+then by way of bravado, crush the glasses between his teeth and swallow
+them, so that the blood ran out of his mouth, yet without any apparent
+harm to him. This was told me by several credible persons, who had often
+stood by and beheld him.
+
+The Englishmen who remained alive in the Revenge, as the captain of the
+soldiers, the master, and others, were distributed among the different
+ships by which she was taken. On taking possession of her, a fight had
+almost taken place between the Biscaineers and Portuguese who boarded
+her, both claiming the honour of having boarded first, so that there
+grew a great noise and quarrel among them, one seizing the chief ensign,
+and the other the flag, the captains and every one holding their own.
+The ships which had laid her on board were altogether out of order, and
+sore shattered, having many of their men hurt, so that they had to come
+to Tercera to be repaired. On their arrival, I and my chamber companion,
+desirous to hear the news, went on board one of the twelve apostles, or
+great ships of Biscay, whose captain was _Bartandono_[387], who had been
+general of the Biscaineers in the great armada that went against
+England. On seeing us, he called us into his gallery, where he received
+us courteously, being then at dinner along with the English captain, who
+was dressed in a suit of black velvet, but could not tell us any thing,
+as he could speak no other language but English and Latin, which last
+Bartandono could speak a little. The English captain was permitted by
+the governor of Tercera to land with his sword by his side, and was in
+our lodging visiting the Englishman who belonged to the ship of which
+the sailors escaped, as I related before. This captain wrote a letter,
+in which he related all the particulars of the fight, and left it with
+that English merchant who resided in the lodging with us, to forward it
+to the lord admiral of England. The captain went afterwards to Lisbon,
+where he was honourably received, and sent, to Setubal, whence he sailed
+for England with the other prisoners. The master likewise of the Revenge
+came on shore, with licence from Bartandono, and lived in the same
+lodgings with us. He had at the least 10 or 12 wounds, in his head and
+body, of which he afterwards died on his voyage from the islands to
+Lisbon.
+
+[Footnote 387: Named Britandona in the foregoing section.--E.]
+
+The Spanish navy remained at the Azores till the end of September, to
+assemble all the fleet together, which in the end amounted to the number
+of 140 sail in all, including the ships of war and those of the Indies.
+When all ready to sail, there arose suddenly so violent a storm, that
+the islanders declared nothing like it had been seen in the memory of
+man. The sea raged with such fury as if it would have swallowed up the
+islands, the waves rising higher than the cliffs, so that it was amazing
+to behold them, and living fish were thrown upon the land. The storm
+lasted for seven or eight successive days, veering about to every point
+of the compass at least twice or three times during its continuance,
+with a continual tempestuous force most terrible to behold, even by us
+who were on shore, much more to those who were on the sea, and exposed
+to its fury. During this dreadful storm, above 12 ships were dashed to
+pieces on the coasts and rocks of the island of Tercera all round about,
+so that nothing was to be heard but weeping, lamenting, and wailing, now
+a ship being broken in pieces in one place, then another at a different
+place, and all the men drowned. For 20 days after the storm, nothing
+else was done but fishing for dead men that were continually driving on
+shore. Among the rest, the Revenge was cast away on a ledge of rocks
+near the isle of Tercera, where she split to pieces and sunk, having in
+her 70 men, Gallegos and Biscaineers and others, with some of the
+captive English, one only of whom got upon the rock alive, having his
+head and body all wounded. Being brought on shore, he told us the sad
+tidings, and desired to be shriven, after which he presently died. The
+Revenge had in her several fine brass pieces of artillery, which were
+all sunk in the sea; but the islanders had great hopes of weighing them
+up next summer.
+
+Among those ships that were cast away about Tercera, was one of those
+fliboats which had been arrested in Portugal for the kings service,
+named the White Dove, the master of which was one Cornelius Martenson of
+Schiedam in Holland, having in her 100 soldiers, as was the case in all
+the rest. Being overruled by the Spanish captain, so that he could not
+be master of his own ship, he was sailing about at the mercy of the
+winds and waves, and came at length in sight of Tercera, whereupon the
+Spaniards, thinking all their safety consisted in putting into the
+roads, compelled the master and pilot to make towards the island; and
+when they remonstrated, saying they would certainly be cast away and all
+destroyed, the Spanish captain called him a drunkard and heretic, and
+striking him with a staff, commanded him to do as he was ordered. Seeing
+this, the master said, "Well then, since it is your desire to be cast
+away, I can lose but one life." He then made sail for the land, which
+was on that side of the island where there is nothing but rocks and
+stones as high as mountains, most terrible to behold. Several of the
+inhabitants stood on the cliffs with long ropes, having bundles of cork
+fastened to one end, to throw down to the men, that they might lay hold
+of them and save their lives. Few of them, however, got near enough for
+this, as most of them were dashed to pieces before they could reach the
+rocks forming the wall-like shore. At this time, when approaching the
+rocks, the master, who was an old man, called his son who sailed with
+him, and having embraced and taken a last farewell, the good old father
+desired his son to take no note of him, but to seek and save himself.
+"Son, said he, thou art young, and mayst have some hope of saving thy
+life; but I am old and it is no great matter what becomes of me." Thus,
+shedding many tears, as may well be conceived in such a situation, the
+ship struck the rocks and went in pieces, the father and son falling
+into the sea on different sides of the vessel, each laying hold on what
+came first to hand, but to no purpose. The sea was so high and furious,
+that all were drowned, except fourteen or fifteen who saved themselves
+by swimming, with their legs and arms half broken and sore hurt. Among
+these was the Dutch masters son and four other Dutch boys; all the rest
+of the Spaniards and sailors, with captain and master, being drowned.
+What heart so hard as not to melt at so grievous a sight, especially
+considering the beastly and ignorant insolence of the Spaniards? From
+this instance, it may be conceived how the other ships sped, as we
+indeed partly beheld, and were informed by those few who were saved,
+some of whom were our countrymen.
+
+On the other islands the loss was no less than at Tercera, two ships
+were cast away on the island of St George; two on Pico; three on
+Graciosa. Besides those, there were seen everywhere round about, many
+pieces of broken ships and other things, floating towards the islands,
+with which the sea was everywhere covered, most pitiful to behold. Four
+ships were cast away on the island of St Michael, and three more were
+sunk between Tercera and St Michael, from which not one man was saved,
+though they were seen and heard to cry out for aid. All the rest were
+dismasted and driven out to sea, all torn and rent; so that of the whole
+armada and merchant ships, 140 in all, only 32 or 33 arrived in Spain
+and Portugal, and these with great pain, misery and labour, not any two
+together, but this day one, to-morrow another, and next day a third. All
+the rest were cast away about the Azores islands, or foundered at sea,
+whereby may be judged what loss was incurred; as the loss was esteemed
+greater by many, than had been sustained in the great armada that went
+against England. It may very well be considered that this terrible
+disaster was a just judgment of God against the Spaniards; and it may
+truly be said that the taking of the Revenge was justly revenged against
+them, not by the force of men, but by the power of God. Some of the
+people in Tercera said openly, that they verily believed God would
+consume them, and that he had taken part with the Lutherans and
+heretics. They alleged farther, that so soon as they had thrown the body
+of Sir Richard Grenville overboard, they verily believed, as he had a
+devilish faith and religion, therefore all the devils loved him: For he
+instantly sunk to the bottom of the sea, and down into hell, where he
+raised up all the devils to revenge his death; and that they brought
+these great storms and tempests upon the Spaniards, because they only
+maintained the Catholic and true Romish religion. Such and the like
+blasphemies did they utter openly and continually, without being
+reproved of any one for their false opinions.
+
+Of their fleet which sailed from New Spain, 50 in all, 35 were cast away
+or foundered at sea, so that 15 only escaped. Of the San Domingo fleet,
+14 were cast away coming through the channel from Havannah, the admiral
+and vice-admiral being of the number. Two ships, coming from the Terra
+Firma, laden with gold and silver, were taken by the English; and before
+the fleet under Don Alonso de Bacan came to Corvo, at the least 20
+ships, coming from San Domingo, India, Brazil, &c. had been taken at
+different times by the English, all of which were sent to England.
+
+Section XIV.
+
+_Cruizing voyage to the Azores, in 1592, by Sir John Burrough,
+Knight_[388]
+
+
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+THE title of this section as here given from Astleys Collection, is by
+no means accurate, as the service performed by Burrough forms only one
+prominent portion of the present narrative. The expedition which it
+relates was fitted out and commanded by the memorable Sir Walter
+Raleigh, and the entire title of this relation, as given by Hakluyt, is
+as follows: "A true report of the honourable service at sea, performed
+by Sir John Burrough, knight, lieutenant-general of the fleet prepared
+by the honourable Sir Walter Raleigh, knight, lord warden of the
+stanneries of Cornwal and Devon. Wherein chiefly the Santa Clara of
+Biscay, a ship of 600 tons, was taken, and two East India Caraks, the
+Santa Cruz and the Madre de Dios were forced; the one burnt, and the
+other taken and brought into Dartmouth, the 7th September 1592."
+
+[Footnote 388: Hakluyt, III. 9. Astley, I. 245.]
+
+Even this long title does not clearly describe the narrative, as Sir
+Walter Raleigh actually sailed on the expedition. But it is not
+necessary to extend this observation, as the story will sufficiently
+explain itself. The editor of Astleys collection, alleges that Sir
+Walter Raleigh seems to have been the author of this article.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Having received a commission from the queen for an expedition to the
+West Indies, Sir Walter Raleigh used the utmost diligence in making all
+necessary preparations, both in the choice of good ships and sufficient
+men and officers, as the performance sufficiently evinced. His ships
+were 14 or 15 in number; of which the two principal belonged to the
+queen, called the Garland and Foresight The rest either belonged to
+himself or his friends, or to the adventurers of London. As for the
+gentlemen who went with him as officers, they were so well qualified in
+courage, experience and discretion, that the greatest prince might think
+himself happy in being served by the like. The honour of
+lieutenant-general [vice-admiral] was conferred upon Sir John Burrough,
+a gentleman every way worthy of that command, by his many good and
+heroic qualities; with whom, after Sir Walter returned, was joined in
+commission Sir Martin Frobisher; who, for his great skill and knowledge
+in maritime affairs, had formerly held employments of similar or greater
+importance. The rest of the captains, sailors and soldiers were men of
+notable resolution, and who for the most part had before given
+sufficient proof of their valour, in sundry services of the like nature.
+
+With these ships thus manned, Sir Walter Raleigh departed towards the
+west country, there to provide such farther necessaries as were needful
+for the expedition. The wind blew long from the west, quite contrary to
+his intended course, by which he was wind-bound many weeks, the fittest
+season for his purpose being thereby lost, his victuals much consumed,
+and the minds of his people greatly changed. When her majesty came to
+understand how crossly all this went, she began to call the propriety of
+this expedition in question, as the 6th of May was come before Sir
+Walter could put to sea. Sir Martin Frobisher came to him the next day,
+in a pinnace of the lord admiral called the Disdain, and brought her
+majestys letters of recal, with orders to leave the fleet under the
+command of Sir John Burrough and Sir Martin Frobisher. But, finding his
+honour so far engaged, that he saw no means to save his reputation or
+content his friends who had adventured great sums on fitting out the
+expedition, Sir Walter pretended to understand the queens letters as if
+they had left it to his choice either to return or proceed; wherefore he
+would in no case leave his fleet, now under sail.
+
+Continuing therefore his course to sea, he met within a day or two some
+ships newly come from Spain, among which was a ship belonging to
+Monsieur Gourdon, governor of Calais, on board of which was one Mr Nevil
+Davies an Englishman, who had endured a long and miserable captivity of
+twelve years, partly in the inquisition, and had now by good fortune
+made his escape, and was on his way home. Among other things, this man
+reported that there was little good to be done or expected this year in
+the West Indies, as the king of Spain had sent express orders to all the
+ports both of the islands and the main, that no ships were to sail that
+year, nor any treasure to be shipt for Spain. Yet did not this
+unpleasant intelligence induce Sir Walter to desist from his
+proceedings; till, on Thursday the 11th of May, a tempest of great
+violence, when he was athwart Cape Finister, so scattered the greater
+part of his fleet, and sunk his boats and pinnaces, that Sir Walter, who
+was in the Garland belonging to her majesty, was in danger of
+foundering.
+
+Upon this, considering that the season of the year was too far gone for
+the enterprize he meditated against Panama, having been detained by
+contrary winds on the coast of England from February till May, in which
+time he had expended three months victuals, and considering that to
+cruize upon the Spanish coast or at the islands for the homeward bound
+East or West India ships, was a mere work of patience, he gave
+directions to Sir John Burrough and Sir Martin Frobisher, to divide the
+fleet in two parts. Sir Martin, with the Garland, Captain George
+Clifford, Captain Henry Thin, Captain Grenville and others, to lie off
+the south cape, on purpose to oblige the Spanish fleet to remain on
+their own coast; while Sir John Burrough, with Captain Robert Crosse,
+Captain Thomson and others, should go to cruize off the Azores for the
+caraks or any other Spanish ships coming from Mexico or other parts of
+the West Indies. These intentions took effect accordingly: For the
+Spanish admiral, having intelligence of the English fleet being on the
+coast, attended to the defence of the southern parts of Spain, keeping
+as near Sir Martin Frobisher as he could, to hinder the success of any
+thing he might undertake, and thereby neglected the safe conduct of the
+caraks.
+
+Before the fleet separated, they met with a great ship of Biscay on the
+coast of Spain, called the Santa Clara of 600 tons, which was taken
+after a stout resistance. She was freighted with all sorts of small iron
+ware, as horse shoes, nails, ploughshares, iron bars, spikes, bolts,
+locks, gimbols, &c. and valued by us at 6000 or 7000 pounds, though
+worth treble that value to them. This ship was on her way to San Lucar,
+to take in there some farther articles of freight for the West Indies;
+and being first rummaged, was sent off for England. Our fleet then
+sailed towards the south cape of St Vincent; and while near the rock of
+Lisbon, Sir John Burrough in the Roebuck espied a sail far off to which
+he gave chace. Being a fliboat and a quick sailer, she drew him far to
+the south before he could fetch her, but at last, she came under his lee
+and struck sail. The master gave information, that a great fleet was
+prepared at Cadiz and San Lucar, destined according to report for the
+West Indies; but the real object of this armament was this: Having
+received notice that Sir Walter Raleigh was fitted out with a strong
+force for the West Indies, the king of Spain had provided this great
+fleet to oppose him; but, in the first place, as the East India caraks
+were expected, this fleet was to convoy them home. But, as he persuaded
+himself, if Sir Walter went to the West Indies, the Azores would only
+have a few small ships of war to infest them, his orders to Don Alonzo
+de Bacan, brother to the Marquis of Santa Cruz, and general of his
+armada, were to pursue the fleet of Sir Walter Raleigh whatever course
+he went, and to attack him wherever he could find him.
+
+Our men soon found this to be true, for, not long after the capture of
+the fliboat, as Sir John Burrough sailed back again to rejoin his fleet,
+he discovered the Spanish fleet to seaward; which, espying him between
+them and the shore, made themselves sure of carrying him into a Spanish
+harbour. For this purpose, they spread themselves in such sort before
+him, that his danger was very great, as his course to seawards was
+utterly impeded, and the land being hostile could yield him no relief.
+In this extremity, putting his trust in God and his good ship, he thrust
+out from among them with all sail, and in spite of their force and
+notable cunning to intercept him, got clear off. Having thus got clear,
+and finding the coast so well guarded by this fleet, and knowing it were
+only folly to expect meeting with Sir Martin Frobisher, who knew of the
+armada as well as himself, and would be sure to avoid them, he began to
+shape his course directly for the Azores, according to the orders of Sir
+Walter Raleigh, and soon came in sight of St Michael, running so near
+the town of Villa Franca, that he could easily discern the ships that
+lay there at anchor. He intercepted several small vessels, both here and
+between St Georges and Pico in his course to Flores, but could get no
+intelligence from them for his purpose.
+
+Arriving before Flores on Thursday the 21st June towards evening, then
+only accompanied by captain Caufield and the master of his ship, the
+rest not being yet arrived, be made towards the shore in his boat, where
+he found all the inhabitants of Santa Cruz, a village or small town of
+that island, under arms, and drawn up to oppose his landing. Having no
+intention of committing hostilities, Sir John shewed a white flag in
+token of amity, which was answered by the islanders, upon which a
+friendly conference ensued, and hostages were taken on both sides, the
+captain of the town for them, and captain Caufield for us; so that
+whatever our people wanted and that place could supply, as fresh water,
+victuals, or the like, was freely granted by the inhabitants, and our
+people had leave to refresh themselves on shore without restraint, as
+long and as often as they pleased. At this place Sir John Burrough was
+informed, that they had no expectation of any fleet coming from the West
+Indies; but that only three days before his arrival, a carak had passed
+by from the East Indies for Lisbon, and that there were four more behind
+all of one convoy. Being very glad of this news, Sir John embarked
+immediately, having at this time in his company only a small bark of
+Bristol, belonging to one Mr Hopkins.
+
+In the meanwhile, part of the English ships that Sir John had left on
+the coast of Spain drew towards the Azores; and Sir John very soon got
+sight of one of the caraks. The same evening he descried two or three of
+the earl of Cumberlands ships, whereof one Mr Norton was captain, which
+had descried the carak and pursued in the track she was following for
+the islands, but no way could be made by either party, as it was almost
+a dead calm. In this dilemma, on purpose to discover her force, burden,
+and countenance, Sir John took his boat and rowed three miles towards
+her, to make her out exactly; and on his return, having consulted with
+his officers, it was resolved to board her in the morning. A heavy storm
+arose in the night, which forced them to weigh anchor, yet did they bear
+up amain against the weather, not to lose the carak. In the morning,
+being very near the shore, our men could perceive the carak close to the
+land, and the Portuguese using their utmost endeavour to convey whatever
+they could from her on shore. Seeing our men making all haste to come
+upon her, the Portuguese forsook her, but first, that nothing might be
+left for our men, they set her on fire, that neither the glory of
+victory nor the benefit of the ship and cargo might remain to the
+English. And, lest the English might find means to extinguish the fire,
+and thereby to preserve a part of the cargo, being in number 400 well
+armed men, they entrenched themselves on shore as near as possible to
+the carak, to keep our men aloof till the fire might consume the carak
+and all her contents.
+
+Seeing this, Sir John landed with an hundred of his men, many of whom
+had to swim on shore or wade more than breast high; and having easily
+dispersed those who guarded the shore, he no sooner approached the
+entrenchment but the Portuguese fled, leaving as much as the fire had
+spared to reward the pains of our men. Among others taken at the
+entrenchment, were a Portuguese called Vincent Fonseca, purser of the
+carak, with two of her cannoneers, one a German, and the other a
+Hollander; who, refusing to give any account voluntarily of what was
+asked, were threatened with torture, and then confessed that within
+fifteen days three other caraks would certainly arrive at the same
+island, there being five caraks in the fleet at their departure from
+Goa, the Buen Jesus admiral, Madre de Dios, San Bernardo, San
+Christophoro, and Santa Cruz, that now on fire. They had especial orders
+from the king of Spain, not in any case to touch at St. Helena, where
+the Portuguese caraks used always till now to refresh on their way from
+the East Indies, procuring water and fresh, provisions. The reason of
+this order was, that the king was informed the English men of war meant
+to lie there in wait for them. If therefore, their necessities should
+drive them to seek supply any where, they were commanded to put in at
+Angola on the coast of Africa, and only to remain there so long as was
+necessary to take in water, that they might avoid the inconvenience of
+infections, to which that hot country is dangerously liable. The last
+rendezvous appointed for them was the island of Flores, where they were
+assured of a naval force meeting them and convoying them to Lisbon.
+
+On receiving this intelligence, Sir John held a council with Captains
+Norton, Downton, and Abraham Cocke, commanding three ships of the Earl
+of Cumberland, Mr Thomson of Harwich, captain of the Dainty, belonging
+to Sir John Hawkins, one of Sir Walter Raleighs fleet, Captain
+Christopher Newton of the Golden Dragon, newly come from the West
+Indies, and others. To these he communicated the intelligence he had
+just got from the foresaid examination, and what great presumptions of
+truth appeared in their story; and wishing, since God and their good
+fortune had so opportunely brought them together, that they might unite
+their utmost endeavours to bring these Orientals under the lee of
+English obedience. Upon this it was mutually agreed not to part company
+or leave these seas, till time and opportunity should enable them to put
+their consultations into execution. Next day her majestys ship
+Foresight, Sir Robert Cross, joined them, and he, being informed of the
+matter, entered heartily on this service. Then Sir John, with all these
+ships, went 6 or 7 leagues to the west of Flores, spreading them out in
+a line from north to south, each ship at least two leagues distant from
+each other, by which order they were able to discover two whole degrees
+of the sea.
+
+They lay in this manner from the 29th of June to the 3d of August, when
+Captain Thomson in the Dainty had first sight of the huge carak called
+the Madre de Dios, one of the greatest belonging to the crown of
+Portugal. Having the start of the rest, and being an excellent sailor,
+the Dainty began the combat something to her cost, by the slaughter and
+hurt of several of her men. Within a little Sir John Burrough came up to
+second her in the Roebuck, belonging to Sir Walter Raleigh, and saluted
+the Madre de Dios with great shot, continuing the fight within
+musket-shot, assisted by Captains Thomson and Newport, till Sir Robert
+Cross came up, who was vice-admiral and was to leeward, on which Sir
+John asked his opinion what was best to be done. Sir Robert said, if she
+were not boarded she would reach the shore and be set on fire, as had
+been done with the other. Wherefore Sir John Burrough concluded to
+grapple her, and Sir Robert Cross engaged to do so likewise at the same
+moment, which was done accordingly. After some time in this situation,
+Sir John Burroughs ship received a shot of a _cannon perier_[389] under
+water; and, being ready to sink, desired Sir Robert to fall off, that he
+also might clear himself and save his ship from sinking. This was done
+with much difficulty, as both the Roebuck and Foresight were so
+entangled that they could not clear themselves.
+
+[Footnote 389: Probably a large stone ball.--E.]
+
+That same evening, finding the carak drawing near the land, Sir Robert
+Crosse persuaded his consorts to board her again, as otherwise there
+were no hopes of taking her. After many fears and excuses, he at last
+encouraged them, and then went athwart her bows all alone, and so
+hindered her sailing, that the rest had time to get up to the attack
+before she could make the land. So, towards evening, after Sir Robert
+had fought her three hours singly, two of the Earl of Cumberlands ships
+came up, and then they and Sir Robert Crosse carried her by boarding
+with very little loss, as Sir Robert by this time had broken their
+courage, and made the assault easy for the rest. Having disarmed the
+Portuguese, and bestowed them for better security as prisoners into the
+other ships, Sir Robert had now time to contemplate the proportions of
+this vast carak, which did then, and may still provoke the admiration of
+all men not accustomed to such a sight. But though this first view
+afforded our men sufficient admiration, yet the pitiful sight of so
+many bodies slain and mangled drew tears from their eyes, and induced
+them to lend aid to those miserable people, whose limbs were sore torn
+by the shot, and their bodies agonized by a multitude of wounds. No man
+could almost step but upon a dead carcass or a bloody floor, but
+especially about the helm, where many of them had been slain while
+endeavouring to steer, as it required the united strength of twelve or
+fourteen men at once to move the rudder, and some of our ships beating
+in at her stern with their ordnance, often slew four or five labouring
+on each side of the helm at one shot, whose places were immediately
+supplied by fresh hands, and as our artillery incessantly plied them
+with continual vollies, much blood was necessarily spilt in that place.
+
+Moved with compassion for their misery, our general immediately sent
+them his own surgeons, withholding no possible aid or relief that he or
+his company could supply. Among those whom this chance of war had
+rendered most deplorable, was Don Fernando de Mendoca, grand captain and
+commander of this mighty carak, descended of the house of Mendoca in
+Spain, but having married in Portugal, lived there as one of that
+nation. He was a gentleman well striken in years, of comely personage
+and good stature, but of hard fortune. In the course of his services
+against the Moors he had been twice taken prisoner, and both times
+ransomed by the king. In a former return voyage from the East Indies, he
+was driven upon the _Baxos_ or sands of _India_, near the coast of
+Sofala, being then captain of a carak which was lost, and himself fell
+into the hands of the infidels on shore, who kept him in a long and
+rigorous captivity. Once more, having great respect for him, and willing
+to mend his fortune, the king had given him the conduct of this huge
+carak, in which he went from Lisbon as admiral of the India fleet, and
+had returned in that capacity, but that the viceroy embarked in the Bon
+Jesus, and assumed that rank in virtue of his late office. Not willing
+to add too severely to the affliction of this man, Sir John Burrough
+freely dismissed Don Fernando and most of his followers, giving them
+some vessels for that purpose, with all necessary provisions.
+
+Having dispatched this business, Sir John Burrough had leisure to take
+such a survey of the goods in his prize, as the convenience of the seas
+would admit; and seeing many inclined to commit spoil and pillage, he
+very prudently seized upon the whole in the name of her majesty. He then
+made a cursory inspection of the cargo, and perceived that the wealth
+would be fully answerable to expectation, and would be more than
+sufficient to content both the desires of the adventurers, and the
+fatigues and dangers of the captors. I cannot here refrain from
+acknowledging the great favour of God to our nation, by putting this
+rich prize into our hands, thereby manifestly discovering the secrets
+and riches of the trade of India, which had hitherto lain strangely
+bidden and cunningly concealed from our knowledge, only a very imperfect
+glimpse of it being seen by a few, while it is now turned into the broad
+light of full and perfect knowledge. Whence it would appear to be the
+will of God for our good, if only our weakness would so apprehend it,
+that we should participate in those East Indian treasures, by the
+establishment of a lawful traffic, to better our means of advancing the
+true religion and the holy service of God.
+
+This carak, in the judgment of those most experienced, was of not less
+than 1600 tons burden, 900 of which were stowed full of rich
+merchandize; the remainder being allowed partly for the ordnance, which
+were 32 pieces of brass cannon of all sorts, and partly to the ships
+company, passengers, and victuals, which last could not be a small
+quantity, considering the length of the voyage, and that there were
+between six and seven hundred persons on board. To give a taste as it
+were of the commodities, it may suffice to give a general enumeration of
+them, according to the catalogue made out at Leadenhall, London, on the
+15th September 1592. After the jewels, which were certainly of great
+value, though they never came to light, the principal wares consisted of
+spices, drugs, silks, calicoes, quilts, carpets, and colours, &c. The
+spices were pepper, cloves, mace, nutmegs, cinnamon, green ginger. The
+drugs, benzoin, frankincense, gallinga, mirabolans, socotorine aloes,
+camphor. The silks, damasks, taffetas, sarcenets, _altobassos_ or
+counterfeit cloth of gold, unwrought China silk, sleaved silk, white
+twisted silk, and curled cypress. The calicoes were book-calicoe,
+calicoe-lawns, broad white calicoes, fine starched calicoes, coarse
+white calicoes, brown broad calicoes, brown coarse calicoes. There were
+also canopies, and coarse diaper towels, quilts of coarse sarsenet, and
+of calico, and carpets like those of Turkey. Likewise pearls, musk,
+civet, and ambergris. The rest of the wares were many in number, but
+less in value; as elephants teeth, porcelain vessels of China, coco
+nuts, hides, ebony as black as jet, bedsteads of the same, curious cloth
+made of the rind of trees, &c. All which piles of merchandize, being
+valued at a reasonable rate by men of approved judgment, amounted to no
+less than 150,000 pounds Sterling, which being divided among the
+adventurers, of whom her majesty was the chief, was sufficient to
+content all parties.
+
+The cargo being taken out, and the goods reloaded on board ten of our
+ships to be sent to London, one Mr Robert Adams, a man of excellent
+skill, took the exact bigness, height, length, breadth, and other
+dimensions of this huge vessel, that these might be preserved according
+to the exact rules of geometrical proportions, both for present
+knowledge and transmission to posterity, omitting nothing which either
+his art could demonstrate, or any mans judgment think worthy of being
+known. After an exact survey of the whole frame, he found the extreme
+length, from the beak head to the stern, where a lantern was erected,
+165 feet. The breadth, in the second close deck, of which she had three,
+but this the broadest, was 46 feet 10 inches. At her departure from
+Cochin in India, her draught of water was 31 feet; but at her arrival in
+Dartmouth, not above 26, being lightened 5 feet during her voyage by
+various causes. She contained 7 several stories; viz. one main orlop,
+three close decks, one forecastle, and a spar deck of two floors each.
+The length of the keel was 100 feet, of the main-mast 121 feet, and its
+circumference at the partners was 10 feet 7 inches. The main-yard was
+106 feet long. By this accurate mensuration, the hugeness of the whole
+is apparent, and far beyond the mould of the largest ships used among
+us, either for war or cargo.
+
+Don Alonso de Bacan, having a greater fleet, and yet suffering these two
+great caraks to be lost, the Santa Cruz burnt, and the Madre de Dios
+taken, was disgraced by the king of Spain for his negligence.
+
+
+SECTION XV.
+
+_The taking of two Spanish Ships, laden with quicksilver and the Popes
+bulls, in 1592, by Captain Thomas White_.[390]
+
+
+
+While returning from Barbary in the Amity of London, and in the latitude
+of 36 deg. N. at 4 in the morning of the 26th of July 1592, Captain White
+got sight of two ships at the distance of three or four leagues. Giving
+immediate chace, he came within gun-shot of them by 7 o'clock; and by
+their boldness in shewing Spanish colours, he judged them rather to be
+ships of war than laden with merchandize; indeed, by their own
+confession afterwards, they made themselves so sure of taking him, that
+they debated among themselves whether it were better for them to carry
+his ship to San Lucar or Lisbon. After waving each other amain, the
+Spaniards placed themselves in order of battle, a cables length before
+the other, when the fight began, both sides charging and firing as fast
+as they were able, at the distance of a cables length, for the space of
+five hours. In this time, the Amity received 32 great shots in her hull,
+masts, and sails, besides at least 500 iron muskets and arquebuses,
+which were counted after the fight.
+
+[Footnote 390: Astley, I. 249. The editor of Astleys collection gives no
+notice of the source whence he procured this narrative. The Spanish
+ships with quicksilver are usually called _azogue_ or _assogue_ ships;
+the word assogue signifying quicksilver.--E.]
+
+Finding them to make so stout a resistance, Captain White attempted to
+board the Biscaian, which was foremost; and after lying on board about
+an hour, plying his ordnance and small shot, he _stowed all her
+men_[391]. At this time, the other vessel, which was a fliboat, thinking
+Captain White had boarded her consort with all his men, _bore room with
+him_[392], intending to have laid him close on board, so as to entrap
+him between both ships, and place him between two fires. Perceiving this
+intention, he fitted his ordnance in such sort as to get quit of her, so
+that she boarded her consort, and both fell from him. Mr White now kept
+his loof, hoisted his main-sails, and weathering both ships, came close
+aboard the fliboat, to which he gave his whole broadside, by which
+several of her men were slain, as appeared by the blood running from her
+scuppers. After this he tacked about, new charged all his ordnance, and
+coming round again upon both ships, ordered them to yield or he would
+sink them outright. One of them being shot between wind and water, would
+have complied, but the other called him a traitor; on which Captain
+White called out, that if he also did not presently yield, he would sink
+him first. Intimidated by this threat, they both hung out white flags
+and yielded; yet refused to strike their own sails, as they had sworn
+not to strike to any Englishman.
+
+[Footnote 391: This expression seems to mean, that he forced them to run
+below.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 392: That is, bore down upon him.--E.]
+
+He then commanded the captains and masters to come on board the Amity,
+where they were examined and placed in safe custody; after which he sent
+some of his own men on board both ships to strike the sails and man
+them. There were found in both, 126 persons alive, with eight dead
+bodies, besides those that had been cast overboard. This victory was
+obtained by 42 men and a boy, of whom two were slain and three wounded.
+The two prizes were laden with 1400 chests of quicksilver, marked with
+the arms of Castile and Leon, besides a vast quantity of bulls or
+indulgences, and ten packs of gilded missals and breviaries, all on the
+kings account. Also an hundred tons of excellent wine, intended for the
+supply of the royal fleet; all of which Captain White brought shortly
+afterwards to Blackwall in the river Thames.
+
+By this capture of quicksilver, the king of Spain lost for every quintal
+a quintal of silver, that should have been delivered to him by the
+mine-masters in Peru, amounting in value to L.600,000. There were
+likewise 2,072,000 bulls for living and dead persons, intended for the
+use of New Spain, Yucatan, Guatimala, Honduras, and the Philippine
+islands, taxed at two ryals each; besides 18,000 bulls at four ryals;
+amounting in all to L.107,700: So that the total loss to the king of
+Spain was L.707,700, not reckoning the loss and disappointment by the
+mass-books and wine.
+
+
+SECTION XVI.
+
+_Narrative of the Destruction of a great East India Carak, in 1594,
+written by Captain Nicholas. Downton_[393].
+
+
+
+In the latter end of the year 1593, the right honourable the earl of
+Cumberland, at his own charges and those of his friends, fitted out
+three ships of equal size and rates, having each the same quantity of
+provisions and the same number of men. These were, the Royal Exchange,
+which went as admiral, commanded by Captain George Cave; the May-flower,
+vice-admiral, commanded by Captain William Anthony; and the Sampson,
+which my lord was pleased to commit to me, Nicholas Downton. In all the
+three ships there were embarked 420 men of all sorts, or 140 in each.
+Besides these, there, was a pinnace: called the Violet, or _Why-not-I._
+
+[Footnote 393: Hakluyt, III. 14. Astley, I 250.]
+
+Our instructions were sent to us at Plymouth, and we were directed to
+open them at sea. The 6th of April 1594, we set sail from Plymouth
+sound, directing our course for the coast of Spain. The 24th, being then
+in lat. 43 deg. N; we divided ourselves east and west from each other, on
+purpose to keep a good look out, with orders from our admiral to close
+up again at night. In the morning of the 27th, we descried the
+May-flower and the little pinnace, in company with a prize they had
+taken belonging to Viana in Portugal, and bound for Angola. This vessel
+was about 28 tons burden, having 17 persons on board, with some 12 tons
+of wine, which we divided among our ships, together with some rusk in
+chests and barrels, 5 bales of coarse blue cloth, and some coarse linen
+for negroes shirts; all of which goods were divided among our fleet. The
+4th of May, we had sight again of our pinnace and the admirals shallop,
+which had taken three Portuguese caravels, two of which we sent away and
+kept the third. The 2d June we came in sight of St Michaels. The 3d we
+sent off our pinnace, which was about 24 tons burden, together with the
+small caravel we had taken off the Burlings, to range about the
+anchorages of the Azores, trying to make captures of any thing they
+could find, appointing them to meet with us at a rendezvous 12 leagues
+W.S.W. from Fayal. Their going from us served no purpose, and was a
+misfortune, as they omitted joining us when appointed, and we also
+missed them when they might have been of much service.
+
+The 13th of June we fell in with a mighty carak from the East Indies,
+called _Las cinquellagues_, or the five wounds. The May-Flower was in
+sight of her before night, and I got up with her in the evening. While I
+had ordered our men to give her a broadside, and stood carefully
+examining her strength, and where I might give council to board her in
+the night when the admiral came up, I received a shot a little above the
+belly, by which I was rendered unserviceable for a good while after, yet
+no other person in my ship was touched that night. Fortunately, by means
+of one captain Grant, an honest true-hearted man, nothing was neglected
+though I was thus disabled. Until midnight, when the admiral came up,
+the May-Flower and the Sampson never desisted from plying her with our
+cannon, taking it in turns: But then captain Cave wished us to stay till
+morning, when each of us was to give her three broadsides, and then lay
+her on board; but we long lingered in the morning till 10 o'clock,
+before we attempted to board her.
+
+The admiral then laid her on board amid ships, and the May-Flower came
+up on her quarter, as if to take her station astern of our admiral on
+the larboard side of the carak; but the captain of the May-Flower was
+slain at the first coming up, on which his ship fell astern on the
+_outlicar_[394] of the carak, a piece of timber, which so tore her
+foresail that they said they could not get up any more to fight, as
+indeed they did not, but kept aloof from us all the rest of the action.
+The Sampson went aboard on the bow of the carak, but had not room
+enough, as our quarter lay on the bow of the Exchange, and our bow on
+that of the carak. At the first coming up of the Exchange, her captain
+Mr Cave was wounded in both legs, one of which he never recovered, so
+that he was disabled from doing his duty, and had no one in his absence
+that would undertake to lead his company to board the enemy. My friend,
+captain Grant, led my men up the side of the carak; but his force being
+small, and not being manfully seconded by the crew of the Exchange, the
+enemy were bolder than they would have been, so that six of my men were
+presently slain, and many more wounded; which made those that remained
+return on board, and they would never more give the assault. Some of the
+Exchanges men did very well, and I have no doubt that many more would
+have done the like, if there had been any principal men to have led them
+on, and not to have run into corners themselves. But I must allow that
+the carak was as well provided for defence as any ship I have seen; and
+perhaps the Portuguese were encouraged by our slackness, as they plied
+our men from behind barricades, where they were out of danger from our
+shot. They plied us also with wildfire, by which most of our men were
+burnt in some parts of their body; and while our men were busied in
+putting out the fire, the enemy galled them sore with small arms and
+darts. This unusual casting of wildfire did much dismay many of our men,
+and caused them greatly to hang back.
+
+[Footnote 394: Probably a boom or outrigger for the management of the
+after-sails.--E.]
+
+Finding that our men would not again board, we plied our great ordnance
+at them, elevated as much as possible, as otherwise we could do them
+little harm. By shooting a piece from our forecastle, we set fire to a
+mat at the beak head of the enemy, which kindled more and more,
+communicating from the mat to the boltsprit, and thence to the
+top-sail-yard; by which fire the Portuguese abaft were much alarmed, and
+began to make show of a parley: But their officers encouraged them,
+alleging that the fire could be easily extinguished, on which they again
+stood stiffly to their defence; yet at length the fire grew so strong,
+that I plainly saw it was beyond all help, even if she had yielded to
+us. We then wished to have disentangled ourselves from the burning
+carak, but had little hope of success; yet we plied water with great
+diligence to keep our ship safe. At this time I had little hope but our
+ship, myself, and several of our wounded men must have been all
+destroyed along with the carak. Most of our people indeed might have
+saved themselves in boats on board our consorts. When we were at the
+worst, by Gods providence our spritsail-yard with the sail and ropes,
+which were fast entangled with the spritsail-yard of the carak, were so
+burned that we fell away, with the loss of some of our sails. The
+Exchange also, being farther aft and more distant from the fire, was
+more easily cleared, and fell off abaft.
+
+As soon as God had put us out of danger, the fire caught hold of the
+forecastle of the carak, where I think there was great store of benzoin,
+or some such combustible matter, for it flamed and flowed over the
+carak, which was almost in an instant all over in flames. The Portuguese
+now leapt over-board in great numbers, and I sent captain Grant with
+the boat, bidding him use his discretion in saving them. He brought me
+on board two gentlemen. One of them was an old man named Nuno Velio
+Pereira, who had been governor of Mozambique and Sofala in the year
+1582, and had since been governor of a place of importance in the East
+Indies. The ship in which he was coming home was cast away a little to
+the east of the Cape of Good Hope, whence he travelled by land to
+Mozambique, and got a passage in this carak. The other was named Bras
+Carrero, who was captain of a carak that was cast away at Mozambique,
+and came likewise as a passenger in this ship. Also three men of the
+inferior sort; but only these two gentlemen we clothed and brought home
+to England. The rest, and others which were saved by our other boats,
+were all set on shore on the island of Flores, except two or three
+negroes, one of whom was a native of Mozambique, and the other of the
+East Indies.
+
+This fight took place in the open sea, 6 leagues to the southward of the
+sound or channel between Fayal and Pico. The people whom we saved
+informed us, that the cause of the carak refusing to yield was, that she
+and all her goods belonged to the king, being all that had been
+collected for him that year in India, and that the captain of her was
+greatly in favour with the king, and expected to have been made viceroy
+of India at his return. This great carak was by no means lumbered,
+either within board or on deck, being more like a ship of war than a
+merchant vessel; and, besides her own men and guns, she had the crew and
+ordnance that belonged to another carak that was cast away at
+Mozambique, and the crew of another that was lost a little way to the
+east of the Cape of Good Hope. Yet, through sickness caught at Angola,
+where they watered, it was said she had not now above 150 white men on
+board, but a great many negroes. They likewise told us there were three
+noblemen and three ladies on board; but we found them to disagree much
+in their stories. The carak continued to burn all the rest of that day
+and the succeeding night; but next morning, on the fire reaching her
+powder, being 60 barrels, which was in the lowest part of her hold, she
+blew up with a dreadful explosion, most of her materials floating about
+on the sea. Some of the people said she was larger than the Madre de
+Dios, and some that she was less. She was much undermasted and
+undersailed, yet she went well through the water, considering that she
+was very foul. The shot we made at her from the cannon of our ship,
+before we laid her on board, might be seven broadsides of six or seven
+shots each, one with another, or about 49 shots in all. We lay on board
+her about two hours, during which we discharged at her about 20 sacre
+shots. Thus much may suffice for our dangerous conflict with that
+unfortunate carak.
+
+On the 30th of June, after traversing the seas, we got sight of another
+huge carak, which some of our company took at first for the great San
+Philippo, the admiral of Spain; but on coming up with her next day, we
+certainly perceived her to be a carak. After bestowing some shots upon
+her, we summoned her to yield, but they stood stoutly on their defence,
+and utterly refused to strike. Wherefore, as no good could be done
+without boarding, I consulted as to what course we should follow for
+that purpose; but as we, who were the chief captains, were partly slain
+and the rest wounded in the former conflict, and because of the
+murmuring of some disorderly and cowardly fellows, all our resolute
+determinations were crossed: To conclude in a few words, the carak
+escaped our hands. After this, we continued to cruize for some time
+about Corvo and Flores, in hopes of falling in with some ships from the
+West Indies; but, being disappointed in this expectation, and provisions
+falling short, we returned for England, where I arrived at Portsmouth on
+the 28th of August 1594.
+
+
+SECTION XVII.
+
+_List of the Royal Navy of England of the demise of Queen
+Elizabeth_[395].
+
+
+The following list of the royal navy of England, as left in good
+condition by Queen Elizabeth at her death in 1603, was written by Sir
+William Monson, a naval officer of that and the two following reigns,
+"By which, he observes, she and her realm gained honour, by the exploits
+and victories they and her subjects obtained." It would occupy too much
+space to give a contrasted list of the royal navy in the present year,
+1813; but which our readers can easily obtain from the monthly lists
+published at London.
+
+[Footnote 395: Church. Collect. III. 196.]
+
+                               Men in   Men at  Of which
+   Names of Ships.   Tonnage.  Harbour.  Sea.   Mariners.  Sailors.  Guns.
+   Elizabeth-Jonas,    900        30     500      340[A]     120[A]  40
+   Triumph,           1000        30     500      340        120     40
+   White Bear,         900        30     500      340        120     40
+   Victory,            800        17     400      268        100     32
+   Ark Royal,          800        17     400      268        100     32
+   Mere Honour,        800        17     400      268        100     32
+   St Matthew,        1000        30     500      340        120     40
+   St Andrew,          900        17     400      268        100     32
+   Due Repulse,        700        16     350      230         90     30
+   Garland,            700        16     300      190         80     30
+   Warspite,           600        12     300      190         80     30
+   Mary-Rose,          600        12     250      150         70     30
+   Hope,               600        12     250      150         70     30
+   Bonaventure,        600        12     250      150         70     30
+   Lion,               500        12     250      150         70     30
+   Nonpareille,        500        12     250      150         70     30
+   Defiance,           500        12     250      150         70     30
+   Rainbow,            500        12     250      150         70     30
+   Dreadnought,        400        10     200      130         50     20
+   Antilope,           350        10     160      114         30     16
+   Swiftsure,          400        10     200      130         50     20
+   Swallow,            380        10     160      114         30     16
+   Foresight,          300        10     160      114         30     16
+   Tide,               250         7     120       88         20     12
+   Crane,              200         7     100       76         20     12
+   Adventure,          250         7     120       88         20     12
+   Quittance,          200         7     100       76         20     12
+   Answer,             200         7     100       76         20     12
+   Advantage,          200         7     100       70         20     12
+   Tiger,              200         7     100       70         20     12
+   Tremontain,                     6      70       52         10      8
+   Scout,              120         6      66       48         10      8
+   Catis,              100         5      60       42         10      8
+   Charles,             70         5      45       32          7      6
+   Moon,                60         5      40       30          5      5
+   Advice,              50         5      40       30          5      5
+   Spy,                 50         5      40       30          5      5
+   Merlin,              45         5      35       26          4      5
+   Sun,                 40         5      30       24          2      4
+   Synnet[B]            20         2
+   George Hoy,         100        10
+   Penny-rose Hoy,      80         8
+
+[Footnote A: The difference between mariners and sailors is not obvious:
+Perhaps the former were what are now called ordinary, and the latter
+able seamen. Besides, the numbers of both these united, do not make up
+the whole compliment of men at sea: Perhaps the deficiency, being 40 in
+the largest ships of this list, was made up by what were then called
+_grummets:_ servants, ship-boys, or landsmen.--E.]
+
+[Footnote B: This name ought probably to have been the Cygnet.]
+
+
+
+
+CHAPTER IX.
+
+EARLY VOYAGES OF THE ENGLISH TO THE EAST INDIES, BEFORE THE
+ESTABLISHMENT OF AN EXCLUSIVE COMPANY.
+
+
+SECTION I.
+
+_Voyage to Goa in 1579, in the Portuguese fleet, by Thomas
+Stevens_[396].
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+We now begin to draw towards India, the following being the first
+voyage we know of, that was performed to that country by any Englishman.
+Though Stevens was only a passenger in the ship of another nation, yet
+the account he gave of the navigation was doubtless one of the motives
+that induced his countrymen to visit India a few years afterwards in
+their own bottoms. Indeed the chief and more immediate causes seem to
+have been the rich caraks, taken in the cruizing voyages against the
+Spaniards and Portuguese about this time, which both gave the English
+some insight into the India trade, and inflamed their desire of
+participating in so rich a commerce.
+
+[Footnote 396: Hakluyt, II, 581. Astley, I. 191.]
+
+The account of this voyage is contained in the following letter from
+Thomas Stevens, to his father Thomas Stevens in London: In this letter,
+preserved by Hakluyt, several very good remarks will be found respecting
+the navigation to India, as practised in those days; yet no mention is
+made in the letter, as to the profession of Stevens, or on what occasion
+he went to India. By the letters of Newberry and Fitch[397], which will
+be found in their proper place, written from Goa in 1584, it appears
+that he was a priest or Jesuit, belonging to the college of St Paul at
+that place; whence it may be concluded that the design of his voyage was
+to propagate the Romish religion in India. In a marginal note to one of
+these letters, Hakluyt intimates that _Padre_ Thomas Stevens was born in
+Wiltshire, and was sometime of New College Oxford. He was very
+serviceable to Newberry and Fitch, who acknowledge that they owed the
+recovery of their liberty and goods, if not their lives, to him and
+another _Padre_. This is also mentioned by Pyrard de la Val, who was
+prisoner at Goa in 1608, at which time Stevens was rector of Morgan
+College in the island of Salcet[398]."--_Astley._
+
+[Footnote 397: In Hakluyts Collection, new edition, II. 376. et seq.]
+
+[Footnote 398: Purchas his Pilgrims, II. 1670.]
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+
+After most humble commendations to you and my mother, and craving your
+daily blessing, these are to certify you of my being alive, according to
+your will and my duty. I wrote you that I had taken my journey from
+Italy to Portugal, which letter I think came to your hands, in which
+hope I have the less need to tell you the cause of my departing, which
+in one word I may express, by naming _obedience_. I came to Lisbon
+towards the end of March, eight days before the departure of the ships,
+so late that, if they had not been detained about some important
+affairs, they had been gone before our arrival; insomuch that others
+were appointed to go in our stead, that the kings intention and ours
+might not be frustrated. But on our sudden arrival, these others did not
+go, and we went as originally intended.
+
+The 4th of April, five ships departed for Goa, in which, besides
+mariners and soldiers, there were a great number of children, who bear
+the sea much better than men, as also do many women. I need not tell
+you, as you may easily imagine the solemnity of setting out, with sound
+of trumpets and discharges of cannon, as they go forth in a warlike
+manner. The 10th of the same month we came in sight of Porto Sancto near
+Madeira, where an English ship set upon ours, now entirely alone, and
+fired several shots which did us no harm: But when our ship had run out
+her largest ordnance, the English ship made away from us. This English
+ship was large and handsome, and I was sorry to see her so ill
+occupied, as she went roving about the seas, and we met her again at the
+Canaries, where we arrived on the 13th of the same month of April, and
+had good opportunity to wonder at the high peaked mountain in the island
+of Teneriffe, as we beat about between that island and Grand Canary for
+four days with contrary winds, and indeed had such evil weather till the
+14th of May, that we despaired of being able to double the Cape of Good
+Hope that year. Yet, taking our course between Guinea and the Cape de
+Verd islands, without seeing any land at all, we arrived at the coast of
+Guinea, as the Portuguese call that part of the western coast of Africa
+in the torrid zone, from the lat. of 6 deg. N. to the equinoctial; in which
+parts they suffer so much by extreme heats and want of wind, that they
+think themselves happy when past it. Sometimes the ships stand quite
+still and becalmed for many days, and sometimes they go on, but in such
+a manner that they had almost as good stand still. The atmosphere on the
+greatest part of this coast is never clear, but thick and cloudy, full
+of thunder and lightening, and such unwholesome rain, that the water on
+standing only a little while is full of animalculae, and by falling on
+any meat that is hung out, fills it immediately with worms.
+
+All along that coast, we oftentimes saw a thing swimming in the water
+like a cocks comb but much fairer, which they call a _Guinea ship_[399].
+It is borne up in the water by a substance almost like the swimming
+bladder of a fish in size and colour, having many strings from it under
+water, which prevent it from being overturned. It is so poisonous, that
+one cannot touch it without much danger. On this coast, between the
+sixth degree of north latitude and the equator, we spent no less than
+thirty days either in calms or contrary winds. The 30th of May we
+crossed the line with great difficulty, directing our course as well as
+we could to pass the promontory[400], but in all that gulf of Guinea,
+and all the rest of the way to the Cape, we found such frequent calms
+that the most experienced mariners were much astonished. In places where
+there always used to be horrible tempests, we found most invincible
+calms, which were very troublesome to our ships, which being of the
+greatest size cannot go without good winds; insomuch that when it is
+almost an intolerable tempest for other ships, making them furl all
+their sails, those large ships display their sails to the wind and sail
+excellent well, unless the waves be too furious, which seldom happened
+in our voyage. You must understand that, when once past the line, they
+cannot go direct for the Cape the nearest way, but, according to the
+wind, must hold on as near south as they can till in the latitude of the
+Cape, which is 35 deg. 30' S. They then shape their course to the east, and
+so get round the Cape. But the wind so served us at 33 degrees, that we
+directed our course thence for the Cape.
+
+[Footnote 399: Otherwise called, by the English sailors, a Portuguese
+man-of-war.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 400: The Cape of Good Hope must be here meant.--E.]
+
+You know that it is hard to sail from east to west, or the contrary,
+because there is no fixed point in all the sky by which they can direct
+their course, wherefore I shall tell you what help God hath provided to
+direct them. There is not a fowl that appeareth, neither any sign in the
+air or in the sea, that have not been written down by those who have
+formerly made these voyages; so that partly by their own experience,
+judging what space the ship was able to make with such and such a wind,
+and partly by the experience of others recorded in the books of
+navigations which they have, they guess whereabouts they may be in
+regard to longitude, for they are always sure as to latitude. But the
+greatest and best direction of all is, to mark the variation of the
+needle or mariners compass; which, in the meridian of the island of St
+Michael, one of the Azores in the same latitude with Lisbon, points due
+north, and thence swerveth so much towards the east, that, between the
+foresaid meridian and the extreme south point of Africa, it varieth
+three or four of the thirty-two points. Again, having passed a little
+beyond the cape called _das Agulias_, or of the Needles, it returneth
+again towards the north; and when it hath attained that, it swerveth
+again toward the west proportionally, as it did before eastwards.
+
+In regard to the first mentioned signs from fowls: The nearer we came to
+the coast of Africa, the more kinds and greater number of strange fowls
+appeared; insomuch that, when we came within not less than thirty
+leagues, almost 100 miles, and 600 miles as we thought from any other
+land, as good as 3000 fowls of sundry kinds followed our ship; some of
+them so great, that, when their wings were opened, they measured seven
+spans from point to point of their wings, as the sailors said. It is a
+marvellous thing to think how God hath so provided for these fowls in
+so vast an expanse of sea, that they are all fat. The Portuguese have
+named them all, according to some obvious property. Thus they call some
+_rushtails_, because their tails are small and long like a rush, and not
+proportionate to their bodies; some _fork-tails_, because their tails
+are very broad and forked; others again _velvet-sleeves_, because their
+wings are like velvet, and are always bent like a mans elbow. This bird
+is always welcome, as it appears nearest the Cape. I should never have
+an end, were I to tell you all particulars, but shall touch on a few
+that may suffice, if you mark them well, to give cause for glorifying
+God in his wonderful works, and in the variety of his creatures.
+
+To say something of fishes: In all the places of calms, and especially
+in the burning zone near the line, there continually waited on our ship
+certain fishes, called _tuberones_[401] by the Portuguese, as long as a
+man, which came to eat such things as might fall from the ship into the
+sea, not even refusing men themselves if they could light upon any, and
+if they find any meat hung over into the sea, they seize it. These have
+waiting upon them continually six or seven, small fishes, having blue
+and green bands round their bodies, like finely dressed serving men. Of
+these two or three always swim before the shark, and some on every side,
+[whence they are called _pilot fish_, by the English mariners.] They
+have likewise other fishes [called _sucking fish_] which always cleave
+to their bodies; and seem to feed on such superfluities as grow about
+them, and they are said to enter into their bodies to purge them, when
+needful. Formerly the mariners used to eat the sharks, but since they
+have seen them devour men, their stomachs now abhor them; yet they draw
+them up with great hooks, and kill as many of them as they can, thinking
+thereby to take a great revenge. There is another kind of fish almost as
+large as a herring, which hath wings and flieth, and are very numerous.
+These have two enemies, one in the sea and the other in the air.
+
+[Footnote 401: Evidently sharks, from the account of them.--E.]
+
+That in the sea is the fish called _albicore_, as large as a salmon,
+which follows with great swiftness to take them; on which this poor
+fish, which cannot swim fast as it hath no fins, and only swims by the
+motion of its tail, having its wings then shut along the sides of its
+body, springeth out of the water and flieth, but not very high; on this
+the albicore, though he have no wings, giveth a great leap out of the
+water, and sometimes catcheth the flying fish, or else keepeth in the
+water, going that way as fast as the other flieth. When the flying fish
+is weary of the air, or thinketh himself out of danger, he returneth to
+the water, where the albicore meeteth him; but sometimes his other
+enemy, the sea-crow, catcheth him in the air before he falleth.
+
+With these and the like sights, but always making our supplications to
+God for good weather and the preservation of our ship, we came at length
+to the south cape of Africa, the ever famous Cape of Good Hope, so much
+desired yet feared of all men: But we there found no tempest, only
+immense waves, where our pilot was guilty of an oversight; for, whereas
+commonly all navigators do never come within sight of land, but,
+contenting themselves with signs and finding the bottom, go their course
+safe and sure, he, thinking to have the winds at will, shot nigh the
+land; when the wind, changing into the south, with the assistance of the
+mountainous waves, rolled us so near the land that we were in less than
+14 fathoms, only six miles from _Capo das Agulias_, and there we looked
+to be utterly lost. Under us were huge rocks, so sharp and cutting that
+no anchor could possibly hold the ship, and the shore was so excessively
+bad that nothing could take the land, which besides is full of _tigers_
+and savage people, who put all strangers to death, so that we had no
+hope or comfort, but only in God and a good conscience. Yet, after we
+had lost our anchors, hoisting up our sails to try to get the ship upon
+some safer part of the coast, it pleased God, when no man looked for
+help, suddenly to fill our sails with a wind off the land, and so by
+good providence we escaped, thanks be to God. The day following, being
+in a place where they are always wont to fish, we also fell a fishing,
+and caught so many, that they served the whole ships company all that
+day and part of the next. One of our lines pulled up a coral of great
+size and value; for it is said that in this place, which indeed we saw
+by experience, that the corals grow on the rocks at the bottom of the
+sea in the manner of stalks, becoming hard and red.
+
+Our day of peril was the 29th of July. You must understand that, after
+passing the Cape of Good Hope, there are two ways to India, one within
+the island of Madagascar, or between that and Africa, called the Canal
+of Mozambique, which the Portuguese prefer, as they refresh themselves
+for a fortnight or a month at Mozambique, not without great need after
+being so long at sea, and thence in another month get to Goa. The other
+course is on the outside of the island of St Lawrence or Madagascar,
+which they take when they set out too late, or come so late to the Cape
+as not to have time to stop at Mozambique, and then they go on their
+voyage in great heaviness, because in this way they have no port; and,
+by reason of the long navigation, and the want of fresh provisions and
+water, they fall into sundry diseases. Their gums become sore, and swell
+in such a manner that they are fain to cut them away; their legs swell,
+and all their bodies become sore, and so benumbed that they cannot move
+hand nor foot, and so they die of weakness; while others fall into
+fluxes and agues, of which they die. This was the way we were forced to
+take; and, although we had above an hundred and fifty sick, there did
+not die above seven or eight and twenty, which was esteemed a small loss
+in comparison with other times. Though some of our fraternity were
+diseased in this sort, thanks be to God I had good health the whole way,
+contrary to the expectation of many: May God send me as good health on
+the land, if it may be to his glory and service. This way is full of
+hidden rocks and quicksands, so that sometimes we dared not sail by
+night; but by the goodness of God we saw nothing all the way to hurt us,
+neither did we ever find bottom till we came to the coast of India.
+
+When we had again passed the line to the northward, and were come to the
+third degree or somewhat more, we saw crabs swimming that were as red as
+if they had been boiled; but this was no sign of land. About the
+eleventh degree, and for many days, more than ten thousand fishes
+continually followed, or were round about our ship, of which we caught
+so many that we eat nothing else for fifteen days, and they served our
+turn well; for at this time we had no meat remaining, and hardly any
+thing else to eat, our voyage drawing nigh to seven months, which
+commonly is performed in five, when they take the inner passage. These
+fishes were no sign of land, but rather of deep sea. At length two birds
+were caught of the hawk tribe, which gave our people great joy, thinking
+they had been birds of India, but we found afterwards that they were
+from Arabia; and when we thought we had been near India, we were in the
+latitude of Socotoro, an island near the mouth of the Red Sea. Here God
+sent us a strong wind from the N.E. or N.N.E. on which they bore away
+unwillingly toward the east, and we ran thus for ten days without any
+sign of land, by which they perceived their error. Hitherto they had
+directed their course always N.E. desiring to increase their latitude;
+but partly from the difference of the needle, and most of all because
+the currents at that time carried us N.W. we had been drawn into this
+other danger, had not God sent us this wind, which at length became more
+favourable and restored us to our right course.
+
+These currents are very dangerous, as they deceive most pilots, and some
+are so little curious, contenting themselves with ordinary experience,
+that they do not take the trouble of seeking for new expedients when
+they swerve, neither by means of the compass nor by any other trial. The
+first sign of approaching land was by seeing certain birds, which they
+knew to be of India; the second was some sedges and boughs of
+palm-trees; the third was snakes swimming at the surface of the water,
+and a certain substance which they called _money_, as round and broad as
+a groat-piece, and wonderfully printed or stamped by nature, as if it
+had been coined money. These two last signs are so certain, that they
+always see land next day, if the wind serve; which we did next day, when
+all our water, for you know they have no beer in these parts, and
+victuals began to fail us.
+
+We came to Goa the 24th day of October, and were there received in a
+most charitable manner. The natives are tawny, but not disfigured in
+their lips and noses, like the Moors and Kafrs of Ethiopia. The lower
+ranks go for the most part naked, having only a clout or apron before
+them of a span long and as much in breadth, with a lace two fingers
+breadth, girded about with a string, and nothing more; and thus they
+think themselves as well dressed as we, with all our finery. I cannot
+now speak of their trees and fruits, or should write another letter as
+long as this; neither have I yet seen any tree resembling any of those I
+have seen in Europe, except the vine, which here grows to little
+purpose, as all their wines are brought from Portugal. The drink used in
+this country is water, or wine made from the coco palm-tree. Thus much
+must suffice for the present; but if God send me health, I shall have
+opportunity to write you once again; but the length of this letter
+compelleth me now to take my leave, with my best prayers for your most
+prosperous health. From Goa, the 10th November 1579.--Your loving Son,
+
+THOMAS STEVENS.
+
+
+SECTION II.
+
+_Journey to India over-land, by Ralph Fitch, Merchant of London, and
+others, in 1583_[402].
+
+
+INTRODUCTION
+
+We learn from the following journal, that the present expedition was
+undertaken at the instigation, and chiefly at the expence of Sir Edward
+Osborne, Knight, and Mr Richard Staper, citizens and merchants of
+London. Besides Fitch, the author of the narrative, Mr John Newbery,
+merchant, William Leedes jeweller, and James Story painter, were engaged
+in the expedition. The chief conduct of this commercial enterprize
+appears to have been confided to John Newbery; and its object appears to
+have been, to extend the trade, which the English merchants seem to have
+only recently established through Syria, by Aleppo, Bagdat and Basora,
+to Ormus and perhaps to Goa, in imitation of the Italians, so as to
+procure the commodities of India as nearly as possible at first hand. In
+the prospect of being able to penetrate into India, and even into China,
+Newbery was furnished with letters of credence or recommendation, from
+Queen Elizabeth to Zelabdim Echebar, stiled king of Cambaia, who
+certainly appears to have been Akbar Shah, emperor of the Mogul
+conquerors of Hindostan, who reigned from 1556 to 1605; and to the
+emperor of China. The promoters of this enterprise, seem to have been
+actuated by a more than ordinary spirit of research for those times, by
+employing a painter to accompany their commercial agents. It is farther
+presumable that the promoters of the expedition, and their agents,
+Newbery and Fitch, were members of the Turkey company; and though the
+speculation turned out unsuccessful, owing to causes sufficiently
+explained in the narrative and its accompanying documents, it is
+obviously a prelude to the establishment of the English East India
+Company; which, from small beginnings, has risen to a colossal height of
+commercial and sovereign grandeur, altogether unexampled in all history.
+
+[Footnote 402: Hakluyt, II. 382.]
+
+Hakluyt gives the following descriptive title of this uncommonly curious
+and interesting narrative: "The voyage of Mr Ralph Fitch, merchant of
+London, by the way of Tripolis in Syria to Ormus, and so to Goa in the
+East India, to Cambaia, and all the kingdom, of Zelabdim Echebar the
+great Mogor, to the mighty river Ganges, and down to Bengala, to Bacola
+and Chonderi, to Pegu, to Imahay in the kingdom of Siam, and back to
+Pegu, and from thence to Malacca, Zeilan, Cochin, and all the coast of
+the East India; begun in the year of our Lord 1583, and ended in 1591:
+wherein the strange rites, manners, and customs of those people, and the
+exceeding rich trade and commodities of those countries, are faithfully
+set down and diligently described, by the foresaid Mr Ralph Fitch."
+
+Hakluyt has prefaced this journal, by several letters respecting the
+journey, from Mr Newbery, and one from Mr Fitch, and gives by way of
+appendix an extract from Linschoten, detailing the imprisonment of the
+adventurers at Ormus and Goa, and their escape, which happened while he
+was at Goa, where he seems to have materially contributed to their
+enlargement from prison. These documents will be found in the sequel to
+the narrative of Mr Fitch.
+
+It must not however be concealed, that the present journal has a very
+questionable appearance in regard to its entire authenticity, as it has
+obviously borrowed liberally from that of Cesar Frederick, already
+inserted in this work, Vol. VII. p. 142-244. It seems therefore highly
+probable, that the journal or narrative of Fitch may have fallen into
+the hand of some ingenious _book-maker_, who wished to increase its
+interest by this unjustifiable art. Under these circumstances, we would
+have been led to reject this article from our collection, were not its
+general authenticity corroborated by these other documents, and by the
+journal of John Eldred, who accompanied Newbery and Fitch to Basora. A
+part of the striking coincidence between the journals of Cesar Frederick
+and Ralph Fitch might have arisen from their having visited the same
+places, and nearly by the same route, only at the distance of 20 years;
+Frederick having commenced his journey in 1563, and Newbery and Fitch
+theirs in 1588. Some of the resemblances however could only have been
+occasioned by plagiarism.
+
+It is very difficult to conceive how Fitch, after his imprisonment at
+Goa, and escape from thence under surety to the Portuguese viceroy,
+should have ventured in the sequel to visit the Portuguese settlements
+in Ceylon, Cochin, Calicut, Goa even, Chaul, and Ormuz, on his way home
+again by Basora, Bagdat, Mosul, &c. to Aleppo and Tripoli. These parts
+of his journal, and his excursions to the north of Pegu, certainly have
+a suspicious appearance. It is possible that he may have described these
+several routes, historically, in his own journal; and that some
+book-maker, into whose hands his papers may have fallen, chose to give
+these a more interesting appearance, by making Fitch the actor in what
+he only described on the authority of others. It is strange that these
+circumstances should not have occurred to Hakluyt, as the narrative of
+Fitch is inserted in his collection immediately following that of Cesar
+Frederick. Yet with these obvious faults, the relation of Fitch is
+interesting, as the first direct attempt of the English to open a trade
+with India; and so far at least, its authenticity is unquestionable,
+being corroborated by other documents that are not liable to the
+smallest suspicion.--E.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+In the year 1583, I Ralph Fitch of London, merchant, being desirous to
+see the countries of the Eastern India, went in company with Mr John
+Newbery, merchant, who had been once before at Ormus, together with
+William Leedes, jeweller, and James Story, painter; being chiefly set
+forth by the right worshipful Sir Edward Osburn, knight, and Mr Richard
+Staper, citizens and merchants of London. We shipped ourselves in a ship
+called the Tiger of London, in which we went to Tripoly in Syria, whence
+we went with the caravan to Aleppo in seven days. Finding good company
+at Aleppo, we went from thence to Birra [Bir,] which is two days and a
+half journey with camels.
+
+Bir is a small town, but abounding in provisions, near which runs the
+river Euphrates. We here purchased a boat, and agreed with a master and
+boatmen to carry us to Babylon [Bagdat]. These boats serve only for one
+voyage, as the stream is so rapid that they cannot return. They carry
+passengers to a town called Felugia [Feluchia], where the boat has to be
+sold for very little money, what cost fifty pieces at Bir bringing only
+seven or eight at that place. From Bir to Feluchia is a journey of
+sixteen days; but it is not good for one boat to go alone, as if it
+should chance to break, it would be difficult to save the goods from the
+Arabs, who are always robbing thereabouts, and it is necessary to keep
+good watch in the night, when the boat is made fast, as the Arabs are
+great thieves, and will swim on board to steal your goods, and then flee
+away. Against them a musket is a good weapon, as they are much afraid of
+fire-arms. Between Bir and Feluchia, there are certain places on the
+Euphrates where you have to pay custom, being so many _medins_ for a
+_some_ or camels load, together with certain quantities of raisins and
+soap, which are for the sons of _Aborise_, who is lord of the Arabs and
+of that great desert, and hath some villages on the river. Feluchia,
+where the goods coming from Bir are unladed, is a small village, from
+whence you go to Bagdat in one day.
+
+Babylon, or Bagdat, is not a very large town, but is very populous, and
+much frequented by strangers, being the centre of intercourse between
+Persia, Turkey, and Arabia, caravans going frequently from it to these
+and other countries. It is well supplied with provisions, which are
+brought from Armenia down the river Tigris, upon rafts made of goat skin
+bags blown full of wind, over which boards are laid, on which the goods
+are loaded. When these are discharged, the skin bags are opened and
+emptied of air, and are then carried back to Armenia on camels to serve
+again. Bagdat belonged formerly to Persia, but is now subject to the
+Turks. Over against Bagdat, on the other side of the Tigris, is a very
+fair village, to which there is a passage across from Bagdat by a long
+bridge of boats, connected by a vast iron chain made fast at each side
+of the river. When any boats have to pass up or down the river, a
+passage is made for them by removing some of the boats of this bridge.
+
+The Tower of Babel is on this side of the Tigris towards Arabia, about
+seven or eight miles from Bagdat, being now ruined on all sides, and
+with the ruins thereof hath made a little mountain, so that no shape or
+form of a tower remains. It was built of bricks dried in the sun, having
+canes and leaves of the palm-tree laid between the courses of bricks. It
+stands in a great plain between the Tigris and Euphrates, and no
+entrance can be any where seen for going into it.
+
+Near the river Euphrates, two days journey from Bagdat, in a field near
+a place called _Ait_, there is a hole in the ground which continually
+throws out boiling pitch accompanied by a filthy smoke, the pitch
+flowing into a great field which is always full of it. The _Moors_ call
+this opening the mouth of hell; and on account of the great abundance
+of the pitch, the people of the country daub all their boats two or
+three inches thick with it on the outside, so that no water can enter
+them. These boats are called _danec_. When there is plenty of water in
+the Tigris, the boats may go down from Bagdat to Basora in eight or nine
+days; but when the water is low it requires a longer time.
+
+In times past, Basora belonged to the Arabs, but is now subject to the
+Turks. Yet there are some Arabs that the Turks cannot subdue, as they
+occupy certain islands in the great river Euphrates, which the Turks
+have never been able to conquer. These Arabs are all thieves, and have
+no settled dwelling, but remove from place to place with their camels,
+horses, goats, wives, children, and household goods. They wear large
+blue gowns; their wives having their ears and noses full of copper and
+silver rings, and wear copper rings on their legs. Basora is near the
+head of the gulf of Persia, and drives a great trade in spiceries and
+drugs, which come from Ormus. The country round produces abundance of
+white rice and dates, with which they supply Bagdat and all the country,
+sending likewise to Ormus and India. I went from Basora to Ormus, down
+the gulf of Persia, in a ship made of boards sewed together with
+_cayro_, which is a thread made of the husks of coco-nuts, and having
+certain canes, or leaves, or straw, sewed upon the seams between the
+boards, so that these vessels leak very much. Having Persia on our left
+hand, and Arabia on our right, we passed many islands, and among others
+the famous isle of Baharin, or Bahrain, from which come the best and
+roundest orient pearls.
+
+Ormus is an island about 25 or 30 miles in circuit, which is perhaps the
+most arid and barren island in the world, as it produces nothing but
+salt, all its water, wood, provisions, and every other necessary, coming
+from Persia, which is about 12 miles distant; but all the other islands
+thereabout are very fertile, and from them provisions are sent to Ormus.
+The Portuguese have here a castle near the sea, with a captain and a
+competent garrison, part of which dwell in the castle and part In the
+town; in which likewise dwell merchants from all nations, together with
+many Moors and Gentiles. This place has a great trade in spices, drugs,
+silk, cloth of silk, fine tapestry of Persia, great store of pearls from
+Bahrain, which are the best of all pearls, and many horses from Persia
+which supply all India. Their king is a Moor, or Mahomedan, who is
+chosen by the Portuguese, and is entirely under subjection to them.
+Their women are very strangely attired, wearing many rings set with
+jewels on their ears, noses, necks, arms, and legs, and locks of gold
+and silver in their ears, and a long bar of gold upon the sides of their
+noses. The holes in their ears are worn so wide with the weight of their
+jewels, that one may thrust three fingers into them.
+
+Very shortly after our arrival at Ormus we were put into prison, by
+order of Don Mathias de Albuquerque, the governor of the castle, and had
+part of our goods taken from us; and on the 11th October, he shipped us
+from thence, sending us to the viceroy at Goa, who at that time was Don
+Francisco de Mascarenhas. The ship in which we were embarked belonged to
+the captain, who carried in it 124 horses for sale. All goods carried to
+Goa in a ship wherein there are horses pay no duties; but if there are
+no horses, you then pay eight in the hundred for your goods. The first
+city of India at which we arrived on the 5th November, after passing the
+coast of _Zindi_, [Sindi] was named Diu, which stands in an island on
+the coast of the kingdom of Cambaia, or Gujrat, and is the strongest
+town belonging to the Portuguese in those parts. It is but small, yet
+abounds in merchandise, as they here load many ships with different
+kinds of goods for the straits of Mecca or the Red Sea, Ormus, and other
+places; these ships belong both to Christians and Moors, but the latter
+are not permitted to pass unless they have a Portuguese licence.
+Cambaietta, or Cambay, is the chief city of that province, being great
+and populous and well built for a city of the gentiles. When there
+happens a famine the natives sell their children for a low price. The
+last king of Cambaia was sultan Badur, who was slain at the siege of
+Diu, and shortly after the capital city was reduced by the great
+_Mogor_, [Mogul] who is king of Agra and Delhi, forty days journey from
+thence. Here the women wear upon their arms, a vast number of ivory
+rings, in which they take so much pride that they would rather go
+without their meat than want their bracelets.
+
+Going from Diu, we came to _Damaun_, the second town of the Portuguese
+in the country of Cambaia, forty leagues from Diu. This place, which has
+no trade but in corn and rice, has many villages under its jurisdiction,
+which the Portuguese possess quietly during peace, but in time of war
+they are all occupied by the enemy. From Damaun we passed to _Basaim_,
+[Baseen] and from thence to _Tanna_ in the island of Salsette, at both
+which places the only trade is in rice and corn. The 10th November we
+arrived at _Chaul_ on the firm land, at which place there are two towns,
+one belonging to the Portuguese and the other to the Moors. That of the
+Portuguese is nearest the sea, commanding the bay, and is walled round;
+and a little above it is the Moors town, subject to a king called
+_Xa-Maluco_. At this place is a great trade for all Kinds of spices,
+drugs, silk, raw and manufactured, sandal-wood, elephants teeth, much
+China work, and a great deal of sugar made from the nut called _gagara_,
+[coco]. The tree on which it grows is called the _palmer_, and is the
+most profitable tree in the world. It always bears fruit, and yields
+wine, oil, sugar, vinegar, cordage, coals, or fuel; of the leaves are
+made thatch for houses, sails for ships, and mats to sit or lie on; of
+the branches are made houses, and brooms wherewith they sweep them; of
+the wood ships. The wine issues from the top of the tree, and is
+procured thus: They cut a branch, binding it hard, and hang an earthen
+pot under the cut end, which they empty every evening and morning; and
+still[403] the juice, putting raisins into it, by which it becometh
+strong wine in a short time. Many ships come here from all parts of
+India, and from Ormus and Mecca, so that there are many Moors and
+Gentiles at this place. The natives have a strange superstition,
+worshipping a cow, and having cows dung in great veneration, insomuch
+that they paint or daub the walls of their houses with it. They kill no
+animal whatever, not so much as a louse, holding it a crime to take away
+life. They eat no flesh, living entirely on roots, rice, and milk. When
+a man dies, his living wife is burnt along with his body, if she be
+alive; and if she will not, her head is shaven, and she is ever after
+held in low esteem. They consider it a great sin to bury dead bodies, as
+they would engender many worms and other vermin, and when the bodies
+were consumed these worms would lack sustenance; wherefore they burn
+their dead. In all Guzerat they kill nothing; and in the town of Cambay
+they have hospitals for lame dogs and cats, and for birds, and they even
+provide food for the ants.
+
+[Footnote 403: I am apt to suspect the word _still_ here used, is only
+meant to imply fermentation, not distillation--E.]
+
+Goa is the chief city of the Portuguese in India, in which their viceroy
+resides and holds his court. It stands in an island about 25 or 30 miles
+in circumference, being a fine city and very handsome for an Indian
+town. The island is fertile and full of gardens and orchards, with many
+palmer trees, and several villages. Here are many merchants of all
+nations. The fleet which sails every year from Portugal, consisting of
+four, five, or six great ships, comes first here, arriving mostly in
+September, and remaining there forty or fifty days. It then goes to
+Cochin, where the ships take in pepper for Portugal. Often one ship
+loads entirely at Goa, and the rest go to Cochin, which is 100 leagues
+to the south. Goa stands in the country of Adel Khan, which is six or
+seven days journey inland, the chief city being Bisapor. [Bejapoor.]
+
+On our arrival in Goa we were thrown into prison, and examined before
+the justice, who demanded us to produce letters, [of licence?] and
+charged us with being spies; but they could prove nothing against us. We
+continued in prison till the 22d December, when we were set at liberty,
+putting in surety for 2000 ducats not to depart from the town. Our
+surety was one Andreas Taborer, who was procured for us by father
+Stevens, an English Jesuit whom we found there, and another religious
+man, a friend of his. We paid 2150 ducats into the hands of Andreas
+Taborer, our surety, who still demanded more; on which we petitioned the
+viceroy and justice to order us our money again, seeing they had it near
+five months, and could prove nothing against us. But the viceroy gave us
+a sharp answer, saying, we should be better sifted ere long, and that
+they had other matter against us. Upon this we determined to attempt
+recovering our liberty, rather than run the risk of remaining as slaves
+for ever in the country, and besides it was said we were to have the
+_strapado_. Wherefore, on the 5th of April 1585 in the morning, we
+removed secretly from Goa; and getting across the river, we travelled
+two days on foot in great fear, not knowing the way, as having no guide,
+and not daring to trust any one.
+
+One of the first towns we came to is called _Bellergan?_ where there is
+a great market of diamonds, rubies, sapphires, and many other precious
+stones. From thence we went to _Bejapoor_, a very large city, where the
+king keeps his court, in which there are many Gentiles, who are gross
+idolaters, having their idols standing in the woods, which they call
+pagodas. Some of these are like a cow, some like a monkey, some like a
+buffalo, others resemble a peacock, and others like the devil. In this
+country are many elephants, which they employ in their wars. They have
+great abundance of gold and silver, and their houses are lofty and well
+built. From thence we went to _Galconda_, the king of which is called
+_Cutub de lashach_. In this country, in the kingdom of Adel Khan, and in
+the Decan, those diamonds are found which are called of the _old water_.
+Golconda is a pleasant fair town, having good and handsome houses of
+brick and timber, and it abounds with excellent fruits and good water.
+It is here very hot, and both men and women go about with only a cloth
+bound about their middles, without any other clothing. The winter begins
+here about the last of May.
+
+About eight days journey from thence is a sea port called Masulipatan,
+toward the gulf of Bengal, to which many ships come out of India, Pegu,
+and Sumatra, richly laden with spiceries, pepper, and other commodities.
+The country is very fruitful. From thence I went to _Servidone?_ which
+is a fine country, its king being called the _king of bread_. The houses
+here are all built of loam and thatched. The country contains many Moors
+and Gentiles, but there is not much religion among them. From thence I
+went to _Bellapore_, and so to _Barrampore_, which is in the country of
+_Zelabdim Echebar_ the great _Mogor_. In this place their money is of
+silver, round and thick, to the value of twenty-pence. It is a great and
+populous country; and in their winter, which is in June, July, and
+August, there is no passing the streets except on horseback, the waters
+are so high. In this country they make great quantities of cotton cloth,
+both white and painted, and the land produces great abundance of corn
+and rice. In the towns and villages through which we passed, we found
+many marriages celebrated between boys of eight or ten years old, and
+girls of five or six. These youthful couples did ride both on one horse,
+very bravely dressed, and were carried about the streets with great
+piping and playing, after which they returned home and banqueted on rice
+and fruits, dancing most of the night, and so ended the marriage, which
+is not consumated till the bride be ten years old. We were told they
+married their children thus young, because when a man dies his wife is
+burnt along with him; and by this device they secure a father-in-law, in
+case of the fathers death, to assist in bringing up the children that
+are thus early married, thus taking care not to leave their sons without
+wives, or their daughters without husbands.
+
+From thence we went to _Mandoway?_ a very strong town, which was
+besieged for twelve years by Echebar before he could reduce it. It
+stands on a very great high rock, as do most of their castles, and is of
+very great circuit. From thence we went to _Vgini?_ and _Serringe?_
+where we overtook the ambassador of Zelabdim Echebar, attended by a
+prodigious retinue of men, elephants, and camels. In this district there
+is a great trade carried on in cotton, and cloths made of cotton, and
+great store of drugs. From thence we went to Agra, passing many rivers
+which were much swollen by the rains, so that in crossing them we had
+often to swim for our lives[404].
+
+[Footnote 404: In this route from Masulipatan to Agra, there are several
+places of which the names are so disfigured as to be unintelligible.
+Barrampore and Mandoway, are probably Burhampore and Candwah in the
+northern part of Candeish; Vgini and Serringe, may he Ougein and Seronge
+in Malwa.--E.]
+
+Agra is a very great and populous city built of stone, having large and
+handsome streets, upon a fine river which falls into the gulf of Bengal,
+and has a strong and handsome castle with a broad and deep ditch. It is
+inhabited by many Moors and Gentiles, the king being Zelabdim Echebar,
+called for the most part the great _Mogor_. From thence we went to
+_Fatepore_, where the king ordinarily resides and holds his court, which
+is called _Derican_. This town is larger than Agra, but the streets and
+houses are by no means so good, but it is inhabited by a vast multitude
+of people, both Moors and Gentiles. In Agra and Fatepoor, the king is
+said to have 1000 elephants, 30,000 horses, 1400 tame deer, 800
+concubines, and such numbers of ounces, tigers, buffaloes, game-cocks,
+and hawks as is quite incredible. Agra and Fatepoor are two great
+cities, either of them larger than London, and very populous, at the
+distance of 12 miles from each other[405]. The whole road between these
+places is one continued market of provisions and other articles, and is
+constantly as full of people as a street or market in a great and
+populous town. These people have many fine carts, many of which are
+richly carved and gilt, having two wheels, and are drawn by two little
+bulls, not much larger than our biggest English dogs, which run with
+these carts as fast as any horse, carrying two or three men in each
+cart: They are covered with silk or fine cloth, and are used like our
+coaches in England. There is a great resort of merchants to this place
+from Persia and all parts of India, and vast quantities of merchandise,
+such as silks, cloths, and precious stones, diamonds, rubies, and
+pearls. The king is dressed in a white _cabie_ made like a shirt, and
+tied with strings on one side, having a small cloth on his head, often
+coloured red and yellow. None enter into his apartments, except the
+eunuchs who have charge of his women.
+
+[Footnote 405: Futtipoor, certainly here meant, is now a place of small
+importance about 20 miles west from Agra.--E.]
+
+We remained in Fatepore till the 28th of September 1585, when Mr John
+Newbery took his journey towards Lahore, intending to go from thence
+through Persia to Aleppo or Constantinople, whichever he could get the
+readiest passage to; and he directed me to proceed to Bengal and Pegu,
+promising me, if it pleased God, to meet me at Bengal within two years
+with a ship from England[406]. I left William Leades the jeweller at
+Fatepore, in the service of the king Zelabdim Achebar, who gave him good
+entertainment, giving a house and five slaves, with a horse, and six
+S.S. in money daily. I went from Agra to _Satagam_ in Bengal, in company
+with 180 boats loaded with _salt_, opium, _hinge_, lead, carpets, and
+various other commodities, down the river _Jemena_, [Jumna]; the chief
+merchants being Moors.
+
+[Footnote 406: In Purchas his Pilgrims, I. 110, is the following notice
+respecting Mr Newberry: "Before that," meaning his journey along with
+Fitch, "he had travelled to Ormus in 1580, and thence into the
+Continent, as may appear in fitter place by his journal, which I have,
+passing through the countries of Persia, Media, Armenia, Georgia, and
+Natolia, to Constantinople; and thence to the Danube, through Walachia,
+Poland, Prussia, and Denmark, and thence to England."]
+
+In this country they have many strange ceremonies. The bramins, who are
+their priests, come to the water having a string about their necks, and
+with many ceremonies lave the water with both their hands, turning the
+string with both their hands in several manners; and though it be never
+so cold, they wash themselves regularly at all times. These gentiles eat
+no flesh, neither do they kill any thing, but live on rice, butter,
+milk, and fruits. They pray in the water naked; and both dress and eat
+their food naked. For penance, they lie flat on the earth, then rise up
+and turn themselves round 30 or 40 times, lifting their hands to the
+sun, and kiss the earth with their arms and legs stretched out; every
+time they lie down making a score on the ground with their fingers, that
+they may know when the prescribed number of prostrations is finished.
+Every morning the Bramins mark their foreheads, ears, and throats, with
+a kind of yellow paint or earth; having some old men among them, who go
+about with a box of yellow powder, marking them on the head and neck as
+they meet them. Their women come in troops of 10, 20, and 30 together to
+the water side singing, where they wash themselves and go through their
+ceremonies, and then mark themselves, and so depart singing. Their
+daughters are married at ten years of age, and the men may have seven
+wives each. They are a crafty people, worse than the Jews. When they
+salute one another, they say, _Rame_, _rame_.
+
+From Agra I came to _Prage_[407], where the river Jumna enters into the
+mighty Ganges, and there loses its name. The Ganges comes out of the
+north-west, and runs east to discharge its waters into the gulf of
+Bengal. In these parts there are many tigers, and vast quantities of
+partridges and turtle-doves, besides many other kinds of birds. There
+are multitudes of beggars in these countries, called _Schesche_, which
+go entirely naked. I here saw one who was a monster among the rest. He
+had no clothes whatever, his beard being very long, and the hair of his
+head was so long and plentiful, that it covered his nakedness. The nails
+on some of his fingers were two inches long, as he would cut nothing
+from him; and besides he never spake, being constantly accompanied by
+eight or ten others, who spoke for him. If any one spoke to him, he laid
+his hand on his breast and bowed, but without speaking, for he would not
+have spoken to the king.
+
+[Footnote 407: At the angle of junction between the rivers Jumna and
+Ganges, the city of Allahabad is now situated.--E.]
+
+We went from _Prage_ down the Ganges, which is here very broad, and
+abounds in various wild-fowl, as swans, geese, cranes, and many others,
+the country on both sides being very fertile and populous. For the most
+part the men have their faces shaven, but wear the hair of their heads
+very long; though some have their crowns shaved, and others have all
+their heads shaven except the crown. The water of the river Ganges is
+very sweet and pleasant, having many islands, and the adjoining country
+is very fertile. We stopt at _Bannaras_, [Benares], a large town in
+which great quantities of cotton-cloths are made, and sashes for the
+moors. In this place all the inhabitants are gentiles, and the grossest
+idolaters I ever saw. To this town the gentiles come on pilgrimages out
+of far distant countries. Along the side of the river there are many
+fair houses, in all or most of which they have ill favoured images made
+of stone or wood; some like lions, leopards, or monkeys; some like men
+and women; others like peacocks; and others like the devil, having four
+arms and four hands. These all sit cross-legged, some with one thing in
+their hands, and others with other things; and by break of day or
+before, numbers of men and women come out of the town to these places,
+and wash in the Ganges. On mounds of earth made for the purpose, there
+are divers old men who sit praying, and who give the people three or
+four straws, which they hold between their fingers when they bathe in
+the Ganges; and some sit to mark them in the forehead: And the devotees
+have each a cloth with a small quantity of rice, barley, or money, which
+they give to these old men when they have washed. They then go to one or
+other of the idols, where they present their sacrifices. When they have
+finished their washings oblations and charities, the old men say certain
+prayers by which they are all sanctified.
+
+In divers places there stand a kind of images, called _Ada_ in their
+language, having four hands with claws; and they have sundry carved
+stones on which they pour water, and lay thereon some rice, wheat,
+barley and other things. Likewise they have a great place built of
+stone, like a well, with steps to go down, in which the water is very
+foul and stinking, through the great quantity of flowers which are
+continually thrown into the water: Yet there are always many people in
+that water, for they say that it purifies them from their sins, because,
+as they allege, God washed himself in that place. They even gather up
+the sand or mud from the bottom, which they esteem holy. They never pray
+but in the water, in which they wash themselves over head, laving up the
+water in both hands, and turning themselves about, they drink a little
+of the water three times, and then go to the idols which stand in the
+houses already mentioned. Some take of the water, with which they wash a
+place of their own length, and then lie down stretched out, rising and
+lying down, and kissing the ground twenty or thirty times, yet keeping
+their right foot all the time in the same place. Some make their
+ceremonies with fifteen or sixteen pots, little and great, ringing a
+little bell when they make their mixtures, ten or twelve times. They
+make a circle of water round about their pots and pray, divers sitting
+by them, and one in particular who reaches the pots to them; and they
+say certain words many times over the pots, and when they have done,
+they go to their idols, before which they strew their sacrifices, which
+they think very holy, and mark many of those who sit by in the
+foreheads, which they esteem highly. There sometimes come fifty or even
+an hundred together, to wash at this well, and to sacrifice to these
+idols.
+
+In some of these idol houses, there are people who stand by them in warm
+weather, fanning them as if to cool them; and when they see any company
+coming, they ring a little bell which hangs beside them, when many give
+them alms, particularly those who come out of the country. Many of these
+idols are black and have brazen claws very long, and some ride upon
+peacocks, or on very ill-favoured fowls, having long hawks bills, some
+like one thing and some like another, but none have good faces. Among
+the rest, there is one held in great veneration, as they allege be gives
+them all things, both food and raiment, and one always sits beside this
+idol with a fan, as if to cool him. Here some are burned to ashes, and
+some only scorched in the fire and thrown into the river, where the dogs
+and foxes come presently and eat them. Here the wives are burned along
+with the bodies of their deceased husbands, and if they will not, their
+heads are shaven and they are not afterwards esteemed.
+
+The people go all naked, except a small cloth about their middles. The
+women have their necks, arms, and ears decorated with rings of silver,
+copper, and tin, and with round hoops of ivory, adorned with amber
+stones and many agates, and have their foreheads marked with a great red
+spot, whence a stroke of red goes up the crown, and one to each side. In
+their winter, which is in May, the men wear quilted gowns of cotton,
+like to our counterpanes, and quilted caps like our grocers large
+mortars, with a slit to look out at, tied beneath their ears. When a man
+or woman is sick and like to die, they are laid all night before the
+idols, either to help their sickness or make an end of them. If they do
+not mend that night, the friends come and sit up with them, and cry for
+some time, after which they take them to the side of the river, laying
+them on a raft of reeds, and so let them float down the river.
+
+When they are married the man and woman come to the water side, where
+there is an old bramin or priest, a cow and calf, or a cow with calf.
+Then the man and woman, together with the cow and calf, go into the
+river, giving the old bramin a piece of cloth four yards long, and a
+basket cross bound, in which are sundry things. The bramin lays the
+cloth on the back of the cow, after which he takes hold of the end of
+the cows tail, and says certain words. The woman has a brass or copper
+pot full of water; the man takes hold of the bramin with one hand, and
+the woman with the other, all having hold of the cow by the tail, on
+which they pour water from the pot, so that it runs on all their hands.
+They then lave up water with their hands, and the bramin ties the man
+and woman together by their clothes[408]. When this is done, they go
+round about the cow and calf, and then give some alms to the poor, who
+are always present, and to the bramin or priest they give the cow and
+calf, after which they go to several of the idols, where they offer
+money, lying down flat on the ground before the idol, and kissing the
+earth several times, after which they go away. Their chief idols are
+black and very ugly, with monstrous mouths, having their ears gilded and
+full of jewels, their teeth and eyes of gold, silver, or glass, and
+carrying sundry things in their hands. You may not enter into the houses
+where they stand with your shoes on. In these houses there are lamps
+continually burning before the idols.
+
+[Footnote 408: This tying of new married folks together by the clothes,
+was used by the Mexicans in old times.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+From Benares I went down the Ganges to _Patenaw_, [Patna] passing many
+fair towns and a very fertile country, in which way many great rivers
+enter the Ganges, some as large as itself, by which it becomes so broad
+that in time of the rains you cannot see across. The scorched bodies
+which are thrown into the water swim on the surface, the men with their
+faces down, and the women with theirs up. I thought they had tied some
+weight to their bodies for this purpose, but was told no such thing was
+done. There are many thieves in this country, who roam up and down like
+the Arabs, having no fixed abode. Here the women are so decked with
+silver and copper that it is strange to see them, and they wear so many
+rings on their toes that they cannot use shoes. Here at Patna they find
+gold in this manner: They dig deep pits in the earth, and wash the earth
+in large holes, and in these they find gold, building the pits round
+about with bricks, to prevent the earth from falling in.
+
+Patna is a long and large town, being formerly a separate kingdom, but
+is now under subjection to the great Mogor. The men are tall and
+slender, and have many old people among them. The houses are very
+simple, being made of earth and covered with straw, and the streets are
+very large. There is here a great trade in cotton and cotton cloth,
+likewise great quantities of sugar, which is carried to Bengal and
+India, much opium, and other commodities. He that is chief here under
+the king is called _Tipperdas_, and is held in much estimation by the
+people. Here in Patna I saw a dissembling prophet, who sat on a horse in
+the market-place, making as if he were asleep, and many of the people
+came and touched his feet with their hands, which they then kissed. They
+took him for a great man, but in my opinion he was only a lazy lubber,
+whom I left sleeping there. The people of these countries are much given
+to these dissembling hypocrites.
+
+From Patna I went to _Tanda_ in the land of _Gouren_[409], which is in
+the country of Bengal. This is a place of great trade in cotton and
+cotton cloth, formerly a kingdom, but now subject to the great Mogor.
+The people are great idolaters, going naked with only a cloth about
+their middles, and the country hath many tigers, wild buffaloes, and
+wild fowl. _Tanda_ is about a league from the river Ganges, as in times
+past the river flowed over its banks in the rainy season, and drowned a
+considerable extent of country with many villages, and so it yet
+remains, and the old bed of the river still remains dry, by which means
+the city now stands at a distance from the water. From Agra I was five
+months coming down the Jumna and the Ganges to Bengal, but it may be
+sailed in much shorter time.
+
+[Footnote 409: In our modern maps Tanda and the country or district of
+Gouren are not to be found; but the ruins of _Gour_, which may have some
+reference to Gouren, are laid down in lat. 24 deg. 52' N. long. 88 deg. 5' E.
+about seven miles from the main stream of the great Ganges, and ten
+miles south from the town of Maida.--E.]
+
+I went from Bengal into the country of _Couche_[410], which is 25 days
+journey north from Tanda. The king is a Gentile, named _Suckel Counse_.
+His country is very extensive, and reaches to within no great distance
+of Cauchin China, whence they are said to procure pepper. The port is
+called _Cacchegate_. All the country is set with bamboos or canes made
+sharp at both ends, and driven into the earth, and they can let in the
+water and drown the country above knee-deep, so that neither men nor
+horses can pass; and in case of any wars, they poison all the waters.
+The people are all Gentiles, who kill nothing, having their ears
+marvellously great and a span long, which they draw out by various
+devices when young. They have much silk and musk, and cloth made of
+cotton. They have hospitals for sheep, goats, dogs, cats, birds, and all
+kinds of living creatures, which they keep when old and lame until they
+die. If a man bring any living creature into this country, they will
+give money for it or other victuals, and either let it go at large or
+keep it in their hospitals. They even give food to the ants. Their small
+money is almonds[411], which they often eat.
+
+[Footnote 410: This seemeth to be Quicheu, accounted by some among the
+provinces of China.--_Hakluyt_.
+
+The name of this country is so excessively corrupt, and the description
+of the route so vague, that nothing can be made out of the text at this
+place with any certainty. It is merely possible that he may have gone
+into Bootan, which is to the north of Bengal.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 411: In Mexico they likewise use the cacao fruit, or chocolate
+nut, for small money, which are not unlike almonds.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+From thence I returned to _Hugeli_, [Hoogly in Bengal] which is the
+place where the Portuguese have their residence in Bengal, being in lat.
+23 deg. N[412]. About a league from it is _Satagan_[413], called by the
+Portuguese _Porto Piqueno_, or the little port. We went through the
+wilderness, because the right way was infested by robbers. In passing
+through the country of Gouren we found few villages, being almost all
+wilderness, in which were many buffaloes, wild swine, and deer, with
+many tigers, the grass being everywhere as tall as a man. Not far from
+Porto Piqueno, to the south-westwards, and in the country of _Orixa_, is
+a sea-port called _Angeli_[414]. It was formerly a separate kingdom, the
+king being a great friend to strangers; but was afterwards taken by the
+king of Patna, who did not enjoy it long, being himself conquered by the
+king of Delhi, Agra, and Cambaia, Zelabdim Echebar. Orissa is six days
+journey south-westwards from _Satagan_. In this place there is much,
+rice, and cloth made of cotton; likewise great store of cloth made of
+grass, which they call _Yerva_, resembling silk, of which they make
+excellent cloth, which is sent to India and other places[415]. To this
+haven of _Ingelly_ there come many ships every year out of India,
+Negapatnam, Sumatra, Malacca, and many other places, and load from hence
+great quantities of rice, much cotton cloths, sugar and long pepper, and
+great store of butter and other provisions for India[416]. Satagan is a
+very fair city for one belonging to the Moors, and is very plentiful in
+all things. In Bengal they have every day a great market or fair, called
+_chandeau_, in one place or other, and they have many boats called
+_pericose_, with which they go from place to place to buy rice and many
+other things. These boats are rowed by 24 or 26 oars, and are of great
+burden, but are quite open. The gentiles hold the water of the Ganges in
+great reverence; for even if they have good water close at hand, they
+will send for water from the Ganges at a great distance. If they have
+not enough of it to drink, they will sprinkle a little of it upon
+themselves, thinking it very salutary.
+
+[Footnote 412: More accurately 22 deg. 55' 20" N. and long. 88 deg. 28' E. Hoogly
+stands on the western branch of the Ganges, called the Hoogly river,
+about twenty miles direct north from Calcutta.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 413: We thus are enabled to discover nearly the situation of
+Satagan or Satigan, to have been on the Hoogly river, probably where
+Chinsura now stands, or it may have been Chandernagor.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 414: Injelly, at the mouth of a small river which falls into
+the Hoogly, very near its discharge into the bay of Bengal. Injelly is
+not now considered as in Orissa, but in the district of Hoogly belonging
+to Bengal, above forty miles from the frontiers--E.]
+
+[Footnote 415: A similar cloth may be made of the long grass which grows
+in Virginia.--_Hakluyt_.]
+
+[Footnote 416: India seems always here limited to the Malabar
+coast.--E.]
+
+From Satagan I travelled by the country of the King of Tippara, or
+_Porto Grande_[417]. The _Mogores_ or _Mogen_ [Moguls] have almost
+continual wars with Tiperah; the Mogen of the kingdom of _Recon_ and
+_Rame_, are stronger than the King of Tiperah, so that Cittigong or
+Porto Grande is often under the dominion of the king of _Recon_[418].
+There is a country four days journey from _Couche_ called
+_Bottanter_[419], the principal city of which is _Bottia_, and the king
+is called _Dermain_. The people are tall, strong, and very swift. Many
+merchants come here out of China, and it is said even from Muscovy and
+Tartary, to purchase musk, _cambals_, agates, silk, pepper, and saffron,
+like the saffron of Persia[420]. This country is very great, being not
+less than three months journey in extent, and contains many high
+mountains, one of them so steep and high that it may be perfectly seen
+at the distance of six days journey[421]. There are people on these
+mountains having ears a span long, and they call such as have not long
+ears asses. They say that from these mountains _they see ships sailing
+on the sea_, but know not whence they come nor whither they go. There
+are merchants who come out of the east from under the sun, which is from
+China, having no beards, who say their country is warm; but others come
+from the north, on the other side of the mountains, where it is very
+cold. These merchants from the north are apparelled in woollen cloth and
+hats, with close white hose or breeches and boots, who come from Muscovy
+or Tartary. These report that they have excellent horses in their
+country, but very small; some individuals possessing four, five, or six
+hundred horses and cattle. These people live mostly on milk and flesh.
+They cut off the tails of their cows, and sell them very dear, as they
+are in high request in those parts. The rump is only a span long, but
+the hair is a yard in length. These tails are used for show, to hang
+upon the heads of elephants, and are much sought after in Pegu and
+China.
+
+[Footnote 417: Perhaps this ought to have been, by the country of Tipera
+_to_ Porto Grande. Porto Grande, formerly called Chittigong, is now
+called Islamabad, and is in the district of Chittigong, the most
+easterly belonging to Bengal.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 418: Aracan is certainly here meant by _Recon_; of _Rame_
+nothing can be made, unless Brama, or Birmah be meant.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 419: _Bottanter_ almost certainly means Bootan. Of _Bottia_ we
+know nothing, but it is probably meant to indicate the capital.
+_Dermain_ may possibly be some corruption of _Deb raja_, the title of
+the sovereign. It is obvious from this passage, that _Couche_ must have
+been to the south of Bootan, and was perhaps Coch-beyhar, a town and
+district in the north-east of Bengal, near the Bootan frontier.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 420: The saffon of Persia of the text may perhaps mean
+_turmeric_. The cambals may possibly mean camblets.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 421: These seem to be the mountains of Imaus, called Cumao by
+the natives.--_Hakluyt_.
+
+The Himmaleh mountains, dividing Bootan from Thibet, said to be visible
+from the plains of Bengal at the distance of 150 miles.--E.]
+
+From Chittigong in Bengal, I went to _Bacola_[422], the king of which
+country is a Gentile of an excellent disposition, who is particularly
+fond of shooting with a gun. His country is large and fertile, having
+great abundance of rice, and manufactures much silk, and cloths of
+cotton. The houses of this city are good and well built, with large
+streets. The people go naked, except a cloth round their waists, and the
+women wear many silver hoops about their necks and arms, and rings of
+silver, copper, and ivory about their legs. From thence I went to
+_Serrepore_ upon the Ganges, the king or rajah of which is called
+Chondery. They are all hereabouts in rebellion against the great Mogul,
+for there are so many rivers and islands that they escape from one to
+another, so that his horsemen cannot prevail against them. Great store
+of cotton cloth is made here. _Sinnergan_ is a town six leagues from
+_Serrepore_, where the best and finest cotton cloth of all the east is
+made[423]. The chief king of all those countries is called Isa-khan,
+being supreme over all the other kings or rajahs, and is a great friend
+to the Christians. Here, as in most parts of India, the houses are very
+small and covered with straw, having a few mats hung round the walls and
+over the door-way, to keep out tigers and foxes. They live on rice,
+milk, and fruits, eating no flesh and killing no animals; and though
+many of them are very rich, their sole article of dress is a small cloth
+before them. From hence they send great quantities of cotton cloths and
+much rice, all over India, Pegu, Malacca, Sumatra, and other places.
+
+[Footnote 422: Perhaps Pucouloe, a place of some size near Davas between
+the Ganges and Burhampooter rivers.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 423: Serampoor on the Hoogly river agrees at least in sound
+with the Serrepore of the text; but, from the context, I rather suspect
+Serrepore to have stood among the numerous islands of the great eastern
+Ganges, in the province of Dava, and near the junction of the Ganges and
+Burhampooter or Megna rivers. Of Sinnergan I can make nothing, only that
+it must have stood in the same district.--E.]
+
+I went from Serrepore the 28th of November 1586 for Pegu, in a small
+ship or foist, commanded by one Albert Caravallos, and sailing down the
+Ganges, we passed by the island of Sundiva, Porto grande, or Chittigong,
+in the country of Tiperah, and the kingdom of Recon and Mogen[424],
+leaving all on our left hand, our course being south by east, with the
+wind at north-west, which brought us to the bar of Negrais in Pegu. Had
+we met with a foul wind, we must have thrown many things overboard, for
+we were so lumbered with people and goods, even on the deck, that there
+was scarce a place to sit down upon. From Bengal to Pegu is 90 leagues.
+We entered the bar of Negrais, [at the mouth of the western branch of
+the river of Ava], which is an excellent bar, having four fathoms water
+where shallowest. Three days afterwards we came to Cosmin, a very pretty
+town, pleasantly situated and abounding in all things. The people are
+tall and well disposed; the women white, round faced, and having small
+eyes. The houses are high built, set upon great high posts, and they go
+up to them by means of ladders for fear of the tigers, which are very
+numerous. The country is very fertile, abounding in great figs, oranges,
+coconuts, and other fruits. The land is very high on the sea coast, but
+after getting within the bar, it is very low and much intersected with
+rivers, so that they go everywhere in boats, which they call _paraos_,
+in which many of them dwell with their wives and children.
+
+[Footnote 424: Recon has already been supposed to be Aracan, which is
+now quite obvious; but in what manner Mogen may refer to Ava, the next
+country to the south, does not appear.--E.]
+
+From the bar of Negrais to the city of Pegu, is ten days journey by the
+rivers. We went from _Cosmin_ to Pegu in paraos or boats, and passing up
+the river we came to _Medon_, a very pretty town, having a wonderful
+number of paraos, for they dwell in them, and hold markets on the water.
+In rowing up and down with their commodities in these boats, they have a
+great _sombrero_ or umbrella over their heads, to defend them from the
+sun, as broad and round as a great cart wheel, made of the leaves of the
+coco or the fig tree, which are very light. From Medon we went to Dela,
+where there are 18 or 20 great long houses, where they tame and keep
+many elephants belonging to the king, as elephants are caught in the
+wilderness near this place. From Dela we went to _Cirian_, [Siriam] a
+good town having an excellent sea-port, to which come many ships from
+Mecca, Malacca, Sumatra, and other places; and there the ships discharge
+their cargoes, and send up their goods in paraos to Pegu. From Siriam we
+went to _Macao_, a pretty town, where we left the boats, and in the
+morning taking _delingeges_, which are a kind of couches made of cords
+and quilted cloth, carried on a _stang_, or long pole, by three or four
+men, we came to Pegu the same day.
+
+Pegu is a great strong and fair city, having walls of stone and great
+ditches all round about. It consists of two towns, the old and the new.
+In the old town dwell all the stranger merchants, and very many native
+merchants, and all the goods are sold in the old town, which is very
+large, and hath many extensive suburbs all round about it, all the
+houses being of bamboo canes and covered with straw. In your house,
+however, you have a warehouse, which they call a _godown_, built of
+bricks, in which to keep your goods, as often the city takes fire, and
+four or five hundred houses are burnt down, so that these _godowns_ are
+very useful to save your goods. The king with all his nobility and
+gentry dwell in the new town, which is a great and populous city,
+entirely square with fair walls, and a great ditch all round about full
+of water, in which are many crocodiles. It has twenty gates, five on
+each side of the square, all built of stone. There are also many turrets
+for centinels, made of wood and splendidly gilded. The streets are the
+handsomest I ever saw, all as straight as a line from one gate to the
+other, and so broad that ten or twelve men may ride abreast through
+them. On both sides, at every door, there are palmer trees planted,
+which bear coco-nuts, and which make a fine shew as well as a commodious
+shade, so that the people may walk all day in the shade. The houses are
+of wood, covered with tiles.
+
+The palace of the king stands in the middle of this city, and is walled
+and ditched all round, all the houses within being of wood very
+sumptuously gilded, and the fore-front is of very rich workmanship, all
+gilded in a very costly manner. The pagoda, or house in which his idols
+stand, is covered with tiles of silver, and all the walls are gilt over
+with gold. Within the first gate of the palace is a very large court, on
+both sides of which are the houses for the king's elephants, which are
+wonderfully large and handsome, and are trained for war and for the
+king's service. Among the rest, he has four white elephants, which are a
+great rarity, no other king having any but he; and were any other king
+to have any, he would send for it, and if refused would go to war for
+it, and would rather lose a great part of his kingdom than not have the
+elephant. When any white elephant is brought to the king, all the
+merchants in the city are commanded to go and visit him, on which
+occasion each individual makes a present of half a ducat, which amounts
+to a good round sum, as there are a vast many merchants, after which
+present you may go and see them at your pleasure, although they stand in
+the king's house. Among his titles, the king takes that of king of the
+white elephants. They do great honour and service to these white
+elephants, every one of them having a house gilded with gold, and
+getting their food in vessels of gilt silver. Every day when they go to
+the river to wash, each goes under a canopy of cloth of gold or silk,
+carried by six or eight men, and eight or ten men go before each,
+playing on drums, _shawms_, and other instruments. When each has washed
+and is come out of the river, he has a gentleman to wash his feet in a
+silver basin, which office is appointed by the king. There is no such
+account made of the black elephants, be they never so great, and some of
+them are wonderfully large and handsome, some being nine cubits high.
+
+The king has a very large place, about a mile from Pegu, for catching
+wild elephants, in a great grove or wood, having a fair court in the
+middle. There are many huntsmen, who go into the wilderness with
+she-elephants, trained for the purpose, each huntsman having five or six
+which are anointed with a certain ointment to entice the wild males to
+follow them. When they have brought a wild elephant within their snares,
+the hunters send word to the town, on which many horsemen and footmen go
+out, and force the wild elephant to enter into a narrow way leading to
+the inner inclosure, and when the he and she are in, then is the gate
+shut upon them. They then get the female out, and when the male finds
+himself alone and entrapped, he cries out and sheds tears, running
+against the enclosure, which is made of strong trees, and some of them
+break their tusks in endeavouring to force their way out. The people
+then goad him with pointed canes, till they force him into a narrow
+stall, in which he is securely fastened with strong ropes about his body
+and legs, and is left there for three or four days without food or
+drink. Then they bring a female to him, with food and drink, and unbind
+the ropes, and he becomes tame in three or four days. When they take the
+elephants to war, they fix a frame of wood on their backs with great
+ropes, upon which sit four or six men, who fight with guns, bows and
+arrows, darts, and other weapons; and it is said that the elephant's
+hide is so thick that a musket ball will not pierce them, except in some
+tender place.
+
+The weapons of these people are very bad, their swords being short and
+blunt at the points. They have arquebusses also, but they shoot very
+badly with them. The king keeps great state, sitting in public twice
+every day, having all his nobles, which they call _shemines_, sitting on
+each side at a good distance, and a numerous guard on the outside of
+all, so that the hall, or court is very large. If any one wish to speak
+to the king, he maketh three profound reverences, when he enters, in
+the mid way, and when he comes near the king; at each of these he kneels
+down, holds his hands above his head, and bows with his head to the
+ground three times. He then sits down to speak to the king, and if
+favoured is allowed to come near, within three or four paces, but
+otherwise is made to sit at a greater distance. When the king goes to
+war he is accompanied by a great military force. While I was in Pegu, he
+went to Odia, in the kingdom of Siam, with 300,000 men and 5000
+elephants. His particular guard was 30,000. When the king rides abroad,
+he is accompanied by a strong guard and many nobles, and often rides on
+an elephant having a great castle on its back superbly gilded; sometimes
+he travels on a great frame of wood like a horse-litter, having a small
+house or canopy upon it, covered over head, and open at the sides, which
+is all splendidly gilded with gold, and adorned with many rubies and
+sapphires, of which he hath an infinite store, as a vast many of them
+are found in this country. This couch or litter is called _serrion_ in
+their language, and is carried on the shoulders of 16 or 18 men. On
+these occasions, there is much triumphing and shouting made before the
+king, by great numbers of men and women.
+
+This king has little force by sea, having very few ships. He has houses
+quite full of gold and silver, both of which are often coming in to him,
+but very little goes out again, so that he makes little account of it,
+and this vast treasury is always open to inspection, in a great walled
+court with two gates, which are always open to all men. In this court
+there are four houses very richly gilded and covered with leaden roofs,
+in each of which is a pagod or idol, of huge stature and vast value. In
+the first of these houses is the image of a king, all in gold, having a
+golden crown on his head richly set with large rubies and sapphires, and
+round about are the images of four children all in gold. In the second
+house is the image of a man in silver, of prodigious size, as high as a
+house, insomuch that the foot is as long as the stature of a man. This
+figure is in a sitting posture, having a crown on its head, richly
+adorned with precious stones. In the third house is the statue of a man
+in brass, still larger than the former, with a rich crown on its head.
+In the fourth house is another brazen statue, still larger than the
+former, having also a crown on its head richly adorned with jewels. In
+another court not far from this, there are four other pagodas or idols
+of wonderful size, made of copper, which were formed in the places in
+which they now stand, being of such enormous size that they could not be
+removed. These stand in four separate houses, and are gilded all over
+except their heads, which resemble black-a-moors. The expences of these
+people in gilding their images are quite enormous. The king has only one
+wife, but above 300 concubines, by whom he is said to have 80 or 90
+children. He sits in judgment every day, on which occasion the
+applicants use no speech, but give up their supplications in writing,
+being upon long slips of the leaves of a tree, a yard long and about two
+inches broad, written with a pointed iron or stile like a bodkin. He who
+gives in his application, stands at some distance carrying a present. If
+his application is to be complied with, his present is accepted and his
+request granted; but if his suit be denied he returns home with his
+present.
+
+There are few commodities in India which serve for trade at Pegu, except
+opium of Cambaia, painted cottons from San Thome or Masulipatam, and
+white cloth of Bengal, vast quantities of which are sold here. They
+bring likewise much cotton yarn, dyed red with a root called _saia_,
+which never loses its colour, a great quantity of which is sold yearly
+in Pegu at a good profit. The ships from Bengal, San Thome, and
+Masulipatam, come to the bar of Negrais and to Cosmin. To Martaban,
+another sea-port in the kingdom of Pegu, many ships come from Malacca,
+with sandal-wood, porcelains, and other wares of China, camphor of
+Borneo, and pepper from Acheen in the island of Sumatra. To Siriam,
+likewise a port of Pegu, ships come from Mecca with woollen cloth,
+scarlet, velvets, opium, and other goods.
+
+In Pegu there are eight brokers called _tareghe_, which are bound to
+sell your goods at the prices they are worth, receiving as their fee two
+in the hundred, for which they are bound to make good the price, because
+you sell your goods on their word. If the broker do not pay you on the
+day appointed, you may take him home to your house and keep him there,
+which is a great shame for him. And, if he do not now pay you
+immediately, you may take his wife, children, and slaves, and bind them
+at your door in the sun; for such is the law of the country. Their
+current money is of brass, which they call _ganza_, with which you may
+buy gold, silver, rubies, musk, and all other things. Gold and silver is
+reckoned merchandise, and is worth sometimes more and sometimes less,
+like all other wares, according to the supply and demand. The ganza or
+brass money goes by weight, which they call a _biza_; and commonly this
+biza is worth, in our way of reckoning, about half a crown or somewhat
+less. The merchandises in Pegu are, gold, silver, rubies, sapphires,
+spinels, musk, benzoin, frankincense, long pepper, tin, lead, copper,
+_lacca_, of which hard sealing-wax is made, rice, wine made of rice,
+[_aruck_,] and some sugar. The elephants eat sugar canes in great
+quantities, or otherwise they might make abundance of sugar.
+
+They consume many canes likewise[425], in making their _varellas_ or
+idol temples, of which there are a prodigious multitude, both large and
+small. These are made round like a sugar loaf, some being as high as a
+church, and very broad beneath, some being a quarter of a mile in
+compass. Within these are all of earth, faced round with stone. In these
+_varellas_ they consume a vast quantity of gold, as they are all gilded
+aloft, and some from top to bottom; and they must be newly gilded every
+ten or twelve years, because the rain washes off the gold, as they all
+stand exposed to the weather. Were it not for the prodigious quantities
+of gold consumed in this manner, it would be very plentiful and cheap in
+Pegu. About two days journey from Pegu there is a _varella_ or pagoda
+called _dogonne_, of wonderful bigness, gilded all over from top to
+bottom, to which the inhabitants of Pegu go in pilgrimage; and near it
+is a house where their talapoins or priests preach to the people. This
+house is fifty five paces long, and hath three _pawnes_ or covered walks
+in it, the roof being supported by forty great gilded pillars, which
+stand between the walks. It is open on all sides, having a vast number
+of small gilded pillars, and the whole is gilded both within and
+without. Round about this there are many fair houses for the pilgrims to
+dwell in, and many goodly houses in which the talapoins preach, which
+are all full of idols or images, both male and female, all gilded with
+gold. This, in my opinion, is the fairest place in the world. It stands
+very high, having four roads leading to it, all planted on each side
+with fruit-trees, so that the people walk in the shade in all these
+avenues, which are each above two miles long. When the grand festival
+of this varella approaches, one can hardly pass any way, on account of
+the great throngs of people, both by land and water, as they flock from
+all parts of the kingdom of Pegu to be present at the festival.
+
+[Footnote 425: Surely the bamboo, not the sugar cane. It may be noticed,
+that almost the whole of this account of Pegu seems to have been
+borrowed from the relation of Cesar Frederick.--E.]
+
+In Pegu, there are many priests or talapoins, as they are called, who
+preach against all abuses, and many people resort to hear them. When
+they enter into the _kiack_, that is to say the holy place or temple,
+there is a great jar of water at the door, having a cock or ladle, and
+there they wash their feet. They then walk in, and lift their hands to
+their heads, first to the preacher, and then to the sun, after which
+they sit down. The talapoins are strangely apparelled, having a brown
+_cambaline_ or thin cloth next their body, above which is another of
+yellow many times doubled or folded over their shoulders, and these two
+are girded round them by a broad girdle. They have a skin of leather
+hung by a string round their necks, on which they sit, bare headed and
+bare footed, as they wear no shoes. Their right arms are all bare, and
+they carry a large _sombrero_ or umbrella over their heads, which
+protects them from the sun in summer, and from the rain in winter.
+
+Before taking their orders, the talapoins go to school till, twenty
+years old or more, and then go before a head talapoin appointed for the
+purpose, called a _rowli_, who is the most learned of the order, who
+examines them many times, whether they will leave their friends,
+foregoing the company of women, and assume the habit of a talapoin. If
+any one be content, he is made to ride through the streets on a horse,
+very richly apparelled, accompanied by many drums and trumpets, to shew
+that he is about to quit the riches and vanity of the world. A few days
+afterwards, he is again carried through the streets, on a thing like a
+horse litter, called _serion_, mounted on the shoulders of ten or twelve
+men, and dressed in the habit of a talapoin, preceded by drums and
+instruments of music, and accompanied by many talapoins and all his
+friends. He is thus carried to his house without side of the town, and
+is there left.
+
+Every individual talapoin has his own house, which is very small, set
+upon six or eight posts, and to which they have to go up by a ladder of
+twelve or fourteen staves. Their houses are mostly by the road sides,
+and among the trees in the woods. They go about, having a great pot of
+wood or fine earthen ware covered, and hung by a broad belt from their
+shoulder, with which they beg their victuals, being rice, fish, and
+herbs. They never ask any thing, but come to the doors, when the people
+presently give them, some one thing and some another, all of which they
+put into their pot, saying they must feed on their alms and be
+contented. Their festivals are regulated by the moon, their chiefest
+being at the new moon, when the people send rice and other things to the
+_kiack_ or church which they frequent, where all the talapoins belonging
+to it meet and eat the victuals that are sent. When the talapoins
+preach, many of their hearers carry gifts to them in the pulpit, while
+preaching, a person sitting beside the preacher to receive these gifts,
+which are divided between them. So far as I could see, they have no
+other ceremonials or religious service, except preaching.
+
+From Pegu I went to _Jamahey_, in the country of the _Langeiannes_, whom
+we call _Jangomes_, which is twenty-five days journey north from
+Pegu[426], in which journey I passed through many fertile and pleasant
+countries, the whole being low land, with many fine rivers; but the
+houses are mean and bad, being built of canes and covered with straw.
+This country has great numbers of wild elephants and buffaloes.
+_Jamahey_ is a large handsome town, well peopled, and the houses are
+well built of stone, with broad streets. The men are strong and well
+made, having a cloth about their middles, bareheaded and with bare feet,
+as in all these countries they wear no shoes. The women are much fairer
+than those of Pegu. In all these countries they have no wheat, living
+entirely on rice, which they make into cakes. To Jamahey there come many
+merchants out of China, bringing great store of musk, gold, silver, and
+many Chinese manufactures. They have here such great abundance of
+provisions, that they do not take the trouble to milk the buffaloes as
+they do in other places. Here there is great abundance of copper and
+benzoin.
+
+[Footnote 426: The names here used are so corrupted as to be utterly
+unintelligible. Twenty-five days journey north from the city of Pegu, or
+perhaps 500 miles, would lead the author into the northern provinces of
+the Birman empire, of which the geography is very little known, perhaps
+into Assan: Yet the _Langeiannes_ may possibly refer to _Lang-shang_ in
+Laos, nearly west from Pegu. _Jamahey_ may be _Shamai_, in the north of
+Laos; near the N.W. frontier of China.--E.]
+
+In these countries, when people are sick, they make a vow to offer meat
+to the devil in case of recovery; and when they recover, they make a
+banquet, with many pipes and drums and other musical instruments,
+dancing all night, and their friends bring gifts of coco-nuts, figs,
+arecas, and other fruits, and with much dancing and rejoicing they
+offer these to the devil, giving him to eat, and then drive him out.
+While dancing and playing, they often cry and hallow aloud, to drive the
+devil away. While sick, a talapoin or two sit every night by the sick
+person, continually singing, to please the devil, that he may not hurt
+them. When any one dies, he is carried on a great frame of wood like a
+tower, having a covering or canopy made of canes all gilded, which is
+carried by fourteen or sixteen men, preceded by drums, pipes, and other
+instruments, and being taken to a place out of the town, the body is
+there burned. On this occasion, the body is accompanied by all the male
+friends, relations, and neighbours of the deceased; and they give the
+talapoins or priests many mats and much cloth. They then return to the
+house, where they feast for two days. After this, the widow, with all
+her neighbours wives, and female friends, goes to the place where her
+husband was burnt, where they sit a certain time lamenting, and then
+gather up all the pieces of bones which have not been burnt to ashes,
+which they bury; they then return home, and thus make an end of
+mourning. On these occasions, the male and female relations shave their
+heads, which is only done for the death of a friend, as they greatly
+esteem their hair.
+
+_Caplan_, the place where the rubies, sapphires and spinels are found,
+is six days journey from Ava in the kingdom of Pegu. There are here many
+great hills out of which they are dug, but no person is allowed to go to
+the pits, except those employed in digging. In Pegu, and in all the
+countries of Ava, Langeiannes, Siam, and of the Birmans, the men wear
+little round balls in their privities, some having two and some three,
+being put in below the skin, which is cut for that purpose, one on one
+side and another on the other, which they do when 25 or 30 years of age.
+These were devised that they might not abuse the male sex, to which
+shocking vice they were formerly much addicted. It was also ordained,
+that the women should not have more than three cubits of cloth in their
+under garments, which likewise are open before, and so tight, that when
+they walk they shew the leg bare above the knee.
+
+The _bramas_, or birmans of the kings country, for the king is a birman,
+have their legs or bellies, or some other part of their body according
+to their fancy made black by pricking the skin, and rubbing in _anile_
+or indigo, or some other black powder, which continues ever after; and
+this is considered as a great honour, none being allowed to do this but
+the birmans who are of kin to the king. Those people wear no beards, but
+pull out the hair from their faces with small pincers made for the
+purpose. Some leave 16 or 20 hairs growing together, some on one part of
+the face and some on another, and pull out all the rest; every man
+carrying his pincers with him, and pulling out the hairs as fast as they
+appear. If they see a man with a beard they wonder at him. Both men and
+women have their teeth black; for they say a dog has white teeth, and
+therefore they have theirs black. When the Peguers have a law-suit that
+is difficult to determine, they place two long canes upright in the
+water where it is very deep, and both parties go into the water beside
+the poles, having men present to judge them; they both dive, and he who
+remains longest under water gains his suit.
+
+The 10th of January, I went from Pegu to Malacca, passing many of the
+sea-ports of Pegu, as Martaban, the island of _Tavi_ whence all India is
+supplied with tin, Tanaserim, the island of Junkselon, and many others.
+I came on the 8th of February to Malacca, where the Portuguese have a
+castle near the sea. The country without the town belongs to the Malays,
+who are a proud kind of people, going naked with a cloth about their
+waists, and a small roll of cloth round their heads. To this place come
+many ships from China, the Moluccas, Banda, Timor, and many other
+islands of the Javas, bringing great store of spices, drugs, diamonds,
+and other precious stones. The voyages to many of these islands belong
+to the captain of Malacca, so that no one can go there without his
+licence, by which he draws large sums of money every year. The
+Portuguese at Malacca are often at war with the king of Acheen in the
+island of Sumatra; from whence comes great store of pepper and other
+spices yearly to Pegu, Mecca, and other places.
+
+When the Portuguese go from Macao in China to Japan, they carry much
+white silk, gold, musk, and porcelain, and bring from thence nothing but
+silver. A great carak goes on this voyage every year, and brings from
+thence about 600,000 crusadoes: and all this silver of Japan, and
+200,000 more which they bring yearly from India, they employ to great
+advantage in China, whence they bring gold, musk, silk, copper,
+porcelains, and many very costly articles richly gilded. When the
+Portuguese go to Canton in China to trade, they are only permitted to
+remain there a certain number of days. When they enter the gates of the
+city, they have to set down their names in a book, and when they go out
+at night must put out their names, as they are not allowed to remain in
+the town all night, but must sleep in their boats. When their time of
+stay is expired, if any one remain, he is liable to be imprisoned and
+very ill used, as the Chinese are very suspicious and do not trust
+strangers; and it is even thought that the king of China does not know
+of any strangers being admitted into his dominions. It is likewise
+credibly reported, that the people of China see their king very seldom,
+or not at all, and may not even look up to the place where he sits. When
+he goes abroad, he is carried in a great chair or _serion_, splendidly
+gilded, on which is made a small house with a lattice to look through,
+so that he cannot be seen but may see about him. While he is passing,
+all the people kneel with their faces to the ground, holding their hands
+over their heads, and must not look up till he is past.
+
+In China, when in mourning, the people wear white thread shoes and straw
+hats. A man mourns two years for his wife, the wife three years for her
+husband, the son a year for his father, and two years for his mother.
+During the whole time of mourning the dead body is kept in the house,
+the bowels being taken out, filled with _chaunam_ or lime, and put into
+a coffin. When the time expires, it is carried out with much playing and
+piping, and burned. After this they pull off their mourning weeds, and
+may marry again when they please. All the people of China, Japan, and
+Cochin-china, write downwards, from the top of the page to the bottom
+using a fine pencil made of dogs or cats hair.
+
+_Laban_ is an island among the Javas, whence come the diamonds of _the
+new water_. They are there found in the rivers, as the king will not
+allow them to be dug for in the rock. _Jamba_ is another island among
+the Javas, from whence also diamonds are brought. In this island the
+king has a mass of earth growing in the middle of the river, which is
+gold; and when he is in want of gold, they cut part of this earth and
+melt it, whereof cometh gold. This mass of earth is only to be seen once
+a year, in the month of April, when the water is low. _Bima_ is another
+island among the Javas, where the women labour as our men do in England,
+and the men keep the house or go where they will[427].
+
+[Footnote 427: All the names of these islands among the Javas, or isles
+of Sunda are unintelligibly corrupt.--E.]
+
+The 28th of March 1588, I returned from Malacca to Martaban, and thence
+to Pegu, where I remained the second time till the 17th of September,
+and then went to Cosmin where I took shipping; and escaping many dangers
+from contrary winds, it pleased God that we arrived in Bengal in
+November. I had to remain there, for want of a passage, till the 3d
+February 1589, when I embarked for Cochin. In this voyage we suffered
+great hardships for want of water; for the weather was very hot, and we
+were many on board, merchants and passengers, and we had many calms. It
+pleased God that we arrived in Ceylon on the 6th of March, where we
+staid five days, to furnish ourselves with water and necessary
+provisions.
+
+Ceylon is a beautiful and fertile island, yet by reason of continual
+wars with the king, every thing is very dear, as he will not suffer any
+thing to be brought to the castle belonging to the Portuguese, so that
+they are often in great want of victuals, and they are forced to bring
+their provisions every year from Bengal. The king is called rajah and is
+very powerful, for he comes sometimes against Columbo, where the
+Portuguese have their fort, with 100,000 men and many elephants. But
+they are all naked people, though many of them are excellent marksmen
+with their muskets. When the king talks with any man, he stands on one
+leg, setting the other foot on his knee, with his sword in his hand; as,
+according to their customs the king never sits. He is dressed in a fine
+painted cotton cloth wrapped about his middle; his hair long and bound
+about his head with a small fine cloth, and all the rest of his body
+naked. His guard is a thousand men, which stand round about him. They
+are all Chingalese, who are said to be the best kind of the Malabars.
+They have very large ears, as the larger they are the more honourable
+they are esteemed, some being a span long. They burn the wood of the
+cinnamon tree, which gives a pleasant scent. In this island there is
+great store of rubies, sapphires, and spinels of the best kind, but the
+king will not allow the inhabitants to dig for them, lest they should
+tempt his enemies to make war upon him and deprive him of his dominions.
+There are no horses in this country, but many elephants, which are not
+so large as those of Pegu, which are of prodigious size; yet it is said
+all other elephants are afraid of those of Ceylon, and refuse to fight
+them, though small. The women of this island wear a cloth round their
+middles, reaching only to the knees, all the rest of their bodies being
+bare. Both men and women are black and very little. Their houses are
+small, being constructed of the branches of the palmer or coco tree, and
+covered with the leaves of the same tree.
+
+The 11th of March we departed from Ceylon and doubled Cape Comorin. Not
+far from thence, between Ceylon and the main-land of India at
+Negapatnam, they fish for pearls every year, whence all India, Cambaya,
+and Bengal are supplied. But these pearls are _not so orient_ [are not
+so round or of so fine a water] as those of Bahrain in the gulph of
+Persia. From Cape Comorin we went to Coulan, a fort of the Portuguese,
+whence comes great store of pepper for Portugal, as frequently one of
+the caraks is laden here. We arrived at Cochin on the 22d of March,
+where we found the weather very warm, and a great scarcity of
+provisions, as neither corn nor rice grows here, having mostly to be
+supplied from Bengal. They have here very bad water, as the river is far
+off; and by this bad water many of the people are like lepers, and many
+have their legs swollen as big as a mans waist, so that they can hardly
+walk. The people here are Malabars, of the race of the Nairs of Calicut,
+who differ much from the other Malabars. These have their heads very
+full of hair, bound up with a string, above which is a great bush of
+hair. The men are tall and strong, and excellent archers, using a long
+bow and long arrows, which are their best weapons; yet they have some
+fire-arms among them, which they handle very badly.
+
+In this country pepper grows, being trained up a tree or pole. It is
+like our ivy berry, but something longer, like an ear of wheat. At first
+the bunches are green, but as they become ripe they are cut off and
+dried. The leaf is much smaller and thinner than that of ivy. The houses
+of the inhabitants are very small, and are covered with the leaves of
+the coco-tree. The men are of moderate stature, but the women very
+little; all black, with a cloth about their middles, hanging down to
+their hams, all the rest of their bodies being naked. They have horribly
+great ears, with many rings set with pearls and other stones. All the
+pepper sold in Calicut, and the coarse cinnamon [cassia] grow in this
+country. The best cinnamon comes from Ceylon, and is peeled from fine
+young trees. They have here many palmers, or coco-nut trees, which is
+their chief food, as it yields both meat and drink, together with many
+other useful things, as I said formerly.
+
+The nairs belonging to the Samorin or king of Calicut, which are
+Malabars, are always at war with the Portuguese, though their sovereign
+be at peace with them; but his people go to sea to rob and plunder.
+Their chief captain is called _Cogi Alli_, who hath three castles under
+his authority. When the Portuguese complain to the Samorin, he pretends
+that he does not send them out, but he certainly consents to their
+going. They range all along the coast from Ceylon to Goa, and go in
+parties of four or five paraos or boats together, in each of which are
+fifty or sixty men, who immediately board every vessel they come up
+with, doing much harm on that coast, and every year take many foists and
+barks belonging to the Portuguese. Besides the nairs, many of the people
+in these paraos are Moors. The dominions of the Samorin begin twelve
+leagues from Cochin and reach to near Goa.
+
+I remained in Cochin eight months, till the 2d of November, not being
+able to procure a passage in all that time; whereas if I had arrived two
+days sooner I should have got a passage immediately. From Cochin I went
+to Goa, which is an hundred leagues; and after remaining three days I
+went to Chaul, sixty leagues from Goa. I remained twenty-three days at
+Chaul, making all necessary preparations for the prosecution of my
+voyage. I then sailed for Ormus, four hundred leagues from Goa, where I
+had to wait fifty days for a passage to Basora.
+
+From Basora I went up the Euphrates and Tigris to Babylon or Bagdat,
+being drawn up most of the way by the strength of men, hauling by a long
+rope. From Bagdat I went by land to Mosul, which stands near the scite
+of the ancient Nineveh, which is all ruinated and destroyed. From Mosul
+I travelled to Merdin in Armenia, where a people called _Cordies_ or
+Curds now dwell. I went thence to Orfa, a fair town having a fair
+fountain full of fish, where the Mahometans hold many opinions, and
+practice many ceremonies in reference to Abraham, who they allege once
+dwelt there. From thence I went to Bir, where I crossed the Euphrates,
+and continued my journey to Aleppo; whence, after staying some months
+for a caravan, I went to Tripolis in Syria. Finding an English ship
+there, I had a prosperous voyage to London, where by the blessing of God
+I arrived safe on the 29th of April 1591, having been eight years absent
+from my native country.
+
+       *       *       *       *       *
+
+Before ending this my book, I have thought right to declare some things
+which are produced in India and the countries farther east[428].
+
+[Footnote 428: This account of the commodities of India so very much
+resembles that already given in the perigrinations of Cesar Frederick,
+Vol. VII. p. 204, as to seem in a great measure borrowed from it, though
+with some variations.--E.]
+
+Pepper grows in many parts of India, especially about Cochin; much of it
+growing wild in the fields among the bushes without cultivation, and is
+gathered when ripe. When first gathered it is green, but becomes black
+by drying in the sun. Ginger is found in many parts of India, growing
+like our garlic, the root being the ginger. Cloves come from the Molucca
+islands, the tree resembling our bay. Nutmegs and mace grow together on
+the same tree, and come from the island of Banda, the tree being like
+our walnut-tree, but smaller. White sandal wood comes from the island of
+Timor. It is very sweet scented, and is in great request among the
+natives of India, who grind it up with a little water, and then anoint
+their bodies with it, as a grateful perfume. Camphor is esteemed very
+precious among the Indians, and is sold dearer than gold, so that I
+think none of it comes to Christendom. That which is compounded comes
+from China: But the best, which grows in canes, comes from the great
+island of Borneo.
+
+Lignuo aloes are from Cochin China. Benjamin, or Benzoin, comes from
+Siam and Jangomes[429]. Long pepper grows in Bengal, Pegu, and the
+Javas. Musk comes from Tartary[430], Amber[431] is supposed by most to
+come out of the sea, as it is all found on the shore.
+
+[Footnote 429: In Cesar Fredericks peregrinations, Benzoin is said to
+come from Siam and _Assi_, or Assam, which confirms the conjecture
+already made, of Langeiannes and the Jangomes referring to Assam.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 430: Fitch here repeats the ridiculous, story respecting the
+fabrication of musk, already given by Cesar Frederick.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 431: Certainly Ambergris, the origin of which from the
+Spermaceti whale has been formerly noticed in this work.--E.]
+
+Rubies, sapphires and spinels are found in Pegu. Diamonds are found in
+several places, as in Bisnagur, Agra, Delhi, and the Javan islands. The
+best pearls come from the isle of Bahrein in the gulf of Persia; and an
+inferior sort from the fisheries near Ceylon, and from Ainan, a large
+island off the southern coast of China. Spodium and many other drugs
+come from Cambaia or Gujrat, commonly called Guzerat.
+
+
+SECTION III.
+
+_Supplement to the Journey of Fitch_[432].
+
+
+INTRODUCTION.
+
+In Hakluyt's collection, p. 235--376, are given letters from queen
+Elizabeth to Akbar Shah, Mogul emperor of Hindostan, called there
+Zelabdim Echebar, king of Cambaia, and to the king or emperor of China,
+dated 1583. These are merely complimentary, and for the purpose of
+recommending John Newbery and his company to the protection and favour
+of these eastern sovereigns, in case of visiting their dominions; and
+need not therefore be inserted in this place. The following articles
+however, are of a different description, consisting of several letters
+from John Newbery and Ralph Fitch to different friends in England; and
+of an extract from the work of John Huighen Van Linschoten, who was in
+Goa in December 1583, upon their arrival at that emporium of the
+Portuguese trade in India, affording a full confirmation of the
+authenticity of the expedition thus far.--E.
+
+[Footnote 432: Hakluyt, II. 375--381. and 399--402.]
+
+
+No. 1.--_Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Richard Hakluyt of Oxford,
+author of the Voyages, &c._
+
+Right well beloved, and my assured good friend, I heartily commend me
+unto you, hoping that you are in good health, &c. After we set sail from
+Gravesend on the 13th of February, we remained on our coast till the
+11th of March, when we sailed from Falmouth, and never anchored till our
+arrival in the road of Tripoli in Syria, on the 30th of April. After
+staying fourteen days there, we came to this place, Aleppo, on the 20th
+of this present month of May, where we have now been eight days, and in
+five or six days, with Gods help, we go from hence towards the Indies.
+Since my arrival at Tripoli, I have made diligent inquiry, both there
+and here, for the book of Cosmography of Abulfeda Ismael, but cannot
+hear of it. Some say that it may possibly be had in Persia; but I shall
+not fail to make inquiry for it both in Babylon and Balsara, [Bagdat and
+Basora] and if I can find it in either of these places, shall send it
+you from thence. The letter which you gave me to copy out, which came
+from Mr Thomas Stevens in Goa, as also the note you gave me of Francis
+Fernandez the Portuguese, I brought away with me inadvertantly among
+other writings; both of which I now return you inclosed.
+
+Great preparations are making here for the wars in Persia; and already
+is gone from hence the pacha of a town called _Rahemet_, and shortly
+after the pachas of Tripoli and Damascus are to follow; but they have
+not in all above 6000 men. They go to a town called _Asmerome_,
+[Erzerum] three days journey from Trebesond, where they are to meet with
+sundry captains and soldiers from Constantinople and other places, to go
+altogether into Persia. This year many men go for these wars, as has
+been the case every year since they began, now about eight years, but
+very few return again; although they have had the advantage over the
+Persians, and have won several castles and strong holds in that country.
+
+Make my hearty commendations to Mr Peter Guillame, Mr Philip Jones, Mr
+Walter Warner, and all the rest of our friends. Mr Fitch sends his
+hearty commendations; and so I commit you to the tuition of Almighty
+God, whom I pray to bless and keep you, and send us a joyful meeting.
+From Aleppo, the 28th of May 1583.
+
+Your loving friend to command in all that I may, JOHN NEWBERY.
+
+No. 2.--_Letter from Mr John Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore of London_.
+
+My last was sent you on the 25th of February last from Deal out of the
+Downs, after which, in consequence, of contrary winds, we remained on
+the coast of England till the 11th March, when we sailed from Falmouth.
+The 13th the wind came contrary with a great storm, by which some of our
+goods were wet; but, God be thanked, no great hurt was done. After this,
+we sailed with a fair wind within the Straits, continuing our voyage and
+anchoring no where till the 30th of April, when we arrived in the road
+of Tripoli in Syria, which was a good passage, God make us thankful for
+it. We left Tripoli on the 14th of this month of May, and arrived here
+at Aleppo on the 20th; and with Gods help we begin our voyage to-morrow
+for Bagdat and Basora, and so to India.
+
+Our friend Mr Barret, commendeth him to you, and sent you a _ball_
+[bale?] of nutmegs in the Emanuel, for the small trifles you sent him,
+which I hope you have long since received. He has also by his letter
+informed you how he sold these things, whereof I say nothing, neither
+having seen the account nor demanded it; for, ever since our coming
+hither, he has been constantly occupied about the dispatch of the ship
+and about our voyage, and I likewise in purchasing things here to carry
+to Basora and India. We have bought coral to the value of 1200 ducats,
+amber for 400, and some soap and broken glass and other small matters,
+which I hope will serve well for the places we are going to. All the
+rest of the account of the bark Reinolds was sent home in the Emanuel,
+which amounted to 3600 ducats, being L.200 more than they were rated; as
+Mr Staper rated them at L.1100, and it is L.1300; so that our part is
+L.200, besides such profit as it shall please God to send thereof;
+wherefore you would do well to speak to Mr Staper for the account.
+
+If you could resolve to travel for three or four years, I would advise
+you to come here, or to go to Cairo, if any go there. For we doubt not,
+if you were to remain here three or four months, you would like the
+place so well, that I think you would not desire to return in less than
+three or four years; as, were it my chance to remain in any place out of
+England, I would choose this before all other that I know. My reason is,
+that the place is healthful and pleasant, and the profits good; and
+doubtless the profits will be better hereafter, things being carried on
+in an orderly manner. In every ship, the fourth part of her cargo should
+come in money, which would help to put off the rest of our commodities
+at a good price. It were also proper that two good ships should come
+together, for mutual assistance, in which case the danger of the voyage
+would be as little as from London to Antwerp.
+
+Mr Giles Porter and Mr Edmund Porter went from Tripoli in a small bark
+to Jaffa, the same day that we came from thence, which was the 14th of
+this month of May, so that I have no doubt they are long since in
+Jerusalem. God send them and us a safe return. At this instant, I have
+received the account from Mr Barret, and the rest of the rings, with 22
+ducats and 2 medins in ready money; so there remaineth nothing in his
+hands but a few books, and I left certain small trifles with Thomas
+Bostocke, which I pray you to demand. From Aleppo, the 29th May 1583.
+
+
+No. 3.--_Letter from Mr John Newbery to the same_.
+
+My last was of the 29th May from Aleppo, sent by George Gill, purser of
+the Tiger. We left that place on the 31st, and came to Feluchia, which
+is one days journey from Babylon [Bagdat,] on the 19th of June. Yet some
+of our company came not hither till the 30th of June, for want of camels
+to carry our goods; for by reason of the great heats at this time of the
+year, camels are very hard to be got. Since our coming here we have
+found very scanty sales, but are told our commodities will sell well in
+winter, which I pray God may be the case. I think cloth, kersies, and
+tin have never been here so low as now. Yet, if I had here as much ready
+money as our goods are worth, I would not doubt to make a very good
+profit of the voyage here and at Basora, and as it is, with Gods help,
+there will be reasonable profit made of the adventure. But, with half
+money and half commodities, the best sort of spices and other
+merchandise from India, may be bought at reasonable rates, while without
+money there is very little to be done here at this time to purpose. Two
+days hence, God willing, I purpose going from hence to Basora, and from
+thence I must necessarily go to Ormus, for want of a man who speaks the
+Indian tongue. While at Aleppo, I hired two Nazarenes, one of whom has
+been twice in India, and speaks the language well; but he is a very lewd
+fellow, wherefore I will not take him with me.
+
+The following are the prices of wares, as they are worth here at
+present: Cloves and mace the _bateman_, 5 ducats; cinnamon, 6 ducats,
+and very little to be had; ginger, 40 medins; pepper, 75 medins;
+turbetta[433], 50 medins; neel [or indigo,] the _churle_ 70 ducats: the
+churle is 27-1/2 rotils of Aleppo; silk, much better than that which
+comes from Persia, 11-1/2 ducats the bateman, each bateman being 7
+pounds 5 ounces English. From Bagdat this 20th July 1583.
+
+[Footnote 433: Most likely turmeric, anciently called turbith vegetable,
+in contradistinction to turbith mineral, so named from its yellow colour
+resembling turbith or turmeric.--E.]
+
+
+No. 4.--_Letter from, John Newbery to Messrs John Eldred and William
+Scales at Basora_.
+
+Time will not permit to give you an account of my voyage after my
+departure from you. But on the 4th day of this present September, we
+arrived here at Ormus; and the 10th day I and the rest were committed to
+prison. The middle of next month, or thereabout, the captain proposes
+sending us all in his ship to Goa. The cause for which we have been
+imprisoned is said to be, because we brought letters from Don Antonio:
+But the truth is, Michael Stropene is the only cause, through letters
+written to him by his brother from Aleppo. God knows how we may be dealt
+with at Goa; and therefore, if you our masters can procure that the king
+of Spain may send his letters for our release, you would do us great
+good, for they cannot with any justice put us to death, though it may be
+that they will cut our throats, or keep us long in prison. Gods will be
+done.
+
+All the commodities I brought to this place had been well sold, if this
+trouble had not come upon us. You shall do well to send a messenger in
+all speed by land from Basora to Aleppo, to give notice of this
+mischance, even though it may cost 30 or 40 crowns, that we may be the
+sooner released, and I shall thereby be the better able to recover again
+what is now like to be lost. From prison in Ormus, this 21st September
+1583.
+
+No. 5.--_Letter Mr J. Newbery to Messrs Eldred and Scales_.
+
+The bark of the Jews is arrived here two days ago, by which I am sure
+you wrote; but your letters are not likely to come to my hands. The
+bringer of this hath shewed me very great courtesy, for which I pray
+you to shew him what favour you can. About the middle of next month, I
+think we shall depart from hence: God be our guide. I think Andrew will
+go by land to Aleppo; and I pray you to further him what you may: But,
+if he should not go, then I pray you to dispatch a messenger in all
+speed. I can say no more, but beg you to do for me what I should do for
+you in the like case. From prison in Ormus, the 24th September 1583.
+
+
+No. 6.--_Letter from Mr Newbery to Mr Leonard Poore_.
+
+My last from Ormus certified you what had happened to me there, with the
+rest of my company; as in four days after our arrival we were all
+committed to prison, except one Italian, who came with me from Aleppo,
+whom the captain never examined, except asking what countryman he was;
+but I believe Michael Stropene, who accused us, had informed the captain
+of him. The first day of our arrival at Ormus, this Stropene accused us
+of being spies for Don Antonio, besides diverse other lies; yet if we
+had been of any other country than England, we might freely have traded
+with them. Although we be Englishmen, I know no reason why we may not as
+well trade from place to place as the natives of other countries; for
+all nations may and do come freely to Ormus, as Frenchmen, Flemings,
+Germans, Hungarians, Italians, Greeks, Armenians, Nazarenes, Turks,
+Moors, Jews, and Gentiles, Persians, and Muscovites. In short, there is
+no nation they seek to trouble, but only ours; wherefore it were
+contrary to all justice and reason that they should suffer all nations
+to trade with them, and forbid us. Now indeed I have as great liberty as
+those of any other nation, except it be to leave the country, which as
+yet I desire not. But hereafter, and I think ere long, if I shall be
+desirous to go from hence, that they will not refuse me licence. Before
+we were suffered to come out of prison, I was forced to put in sureties
+for 2000 pardaos, not to depart from hence without licence of the
+viceroy; and except this, we have now as much liberty as any one, for I
+have got back our goods, and have taken a house in the chiefest street
+called the _Rue drette_, where we sell our goods.
+
+There were two causes which moved the captain of Ormus to imprison us,
+and afterwards to send us to Goa. The first was because Michael Stropene
+had most falsely accused us of many matters. The other was, because when
+Mr Drake was at the Molucca islands, he caused two pieces of cannon to
+be fired at a Portuguese galeon belonging to the king, at least so they
+allege. But of these things I did not know when at Ormus. In the same
+ship which brought us to Goa, came the chief justice of Ormus, called
+the veedor general of that place, who had been there three years, so
+that his time was expired. This veedor is a great friend to the captain
+of Ormus, and sent for me into his chamber, one day after coming here to
+Goa, and began to demand many things at me, to which I made answers.
+Among other things, he said that Mr Drake had been sent out of England
+with many ships, and had gone to Molucca where he loaded cloves, and
+finding a Portuguese galeon there belonging to the king, had shot two
+pieces of his great ordnance against her. Perceiving this grieved them
+much, I asked if they meant to be revenged on me for what had been done
+by Mr Drake: To which he answered no; though his meaning was yes.
+
+He said moreover, that the captain of Ormus had sent me to Goa, that the
+viceroy might learn the news from me respecting Don Antonio, and whether
+he were in England or not; and that it might possibly be all for the
+best my being sent hither; which I trust in God may so fall out, though
+contrary to his expectation and intention: For, if it had not pleased
+God to influence the minds of the archbishop, and two padres or Jesuits
+of the college of St Paul, to stand our friends, we might have rotted in
+prison. The archbishop is a very good man, who has two young men in his
+service, one called Bernard Borgers born in Hamburgh, and the other
+named John Linscot[434], a native of Enkhuysen, who did us especial
+service; for by them the archbishop was often reminded of our case. The
+two good fathers who laboured so much for us were padre Mark, a native
+of Bruges in Flanders, and padre Thomas Stevens[435], born in Wiltshire
+in England. I chanced likewise to fall in with here a young man, Francis
+de Rea, who was born in Antwerp, but was mostly brought up in London,
+with whom I became acquainted in Aleppo, who also has done me much
+service.
+
+[Footnote 434: John Huighen van Linschoten, the author of the book
+respecting the East Indies, formerly quoted, and from which a second
+quotation will be given in this supplement.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 435: This is he whose letter to his father from Goa has been
+already inserted, and who was sometime of New College in
+Oxford.--Hakluyt.]
+
+We remained many days in prison at Ormus, and were a long while at sea
+coming hither. Immediately on our arrival at this place we were sent to
+prison, whence next day we were brought before the chief justice or
+veedor, to be examined, after which we were remanded to prison. When we
+had been thirteen days in prison, James Storie, the painter who
+accompanied us, went into the monastery of St Paul, where he remains,
+being made one of the company, which life he seems to like[436]. Upon St
+Thomas day, 12th December, 22 days after our arrival here, I was
+liberated from prison, and the next day Ralph Fitch and William
+Bets[437] came out.
+
+[Footnote 436: It will appear afterwards that he did not continue.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 437: In the narrative of Fitch no such name occurs, but
+William Leedes jeweller, is named as one of the party. Perhaps he ought
+to have been named by Fitch, William Bets of Leeds.--E.]
+
+If these troubles had not occurred, I think I was in a fair way of
+making as good a voyage as was ever made with such a sum of money. Many
+of our things I sold very well, both here and at Ormus while in prison,
+although the captain of Ormus wished me to have sold all I had before I
+embarked; so, by his permission, I went sundry times from the castle in
+the mornings, accompanied by officers, and sold things, and returned
+again at night to prison. They wrote down every thing that I sold; and
+at my embarking, the captain directed me to deliver all my money and
+goods into the hands of the _scrivano_ or purser of the ship, which I
+did, and the scrivano left an acknowledgement with the captain, that
+myself with the money and goods should be delivered up to the veedor
+general in India. But on our arrival here, the veedor would not meddle
+with either money or goods, seeing that no crime was substantiated
+against us: Wherefore the goods remained in the ship nine or ten days
+after our arrival; and then, as the ship was to sail from thence, the
+scrivano sent the goods on shore, where they remained a day and a night
+without any one to receive them. In the end, they permitted the bearer
+of this letter to receive them, who put them into a house which he hired
+for me, in which they remained four or five days. When afterwards they
+ought to have delivered the money, it was ordered by the _veedor_, that
+both the money and goods should be given into the custody of the
+_positor_, where they remained for fourteen days after I was liberated
+from prison.
+
+When in Aleppo, I bought a fountain of silver gilt, six knives, six
+spoons, and one fork, all trimmed with coral, for 25 chekins, which the
+captain of Ormus took to himself and only paid 20 pardaos, or 100
+larines, though they were worth there or here at Goa 100 chekins. Also
+he had five emeralds set in gold, worth five or six hundred crowns, for
+which he only paid 100 pardaos. He likewise took 19-1/2 pikes of cloth,
+which cost 20 shillings the pike at London, and was worth 9 or 10 crowns
+the pike at Ormus, for which he only paid 12 larines. He also had two
+pieces of green kersie, worth 24 pardaos each; besides divers other more
+trifling articles which he and the officers took at similar inferior
+prices, and some for nothing at all. But the real cause of all was
+Michal Stropene, who came to Ormus without a penny, and is now worth
+thirty or forty thousand crowns, and is grieved that any stranger should
+trade there but himself. But that shall not avail him; for I trust yet
+to go both hither and thither, and to buy and sell as freely as he or
+any other.
+
+There is a great deal of good to be done here in divers of our
+commodities; and likewise there is much profit to be made with the
+commodities of this country, when carried to Aleppo. It were long for me
+to write, and tedious for you to read, all the incidents which have
+occurred to me since we parted; but the bearer is able to inform you of
+every thing that has befallen me since my arrival in Ormus. It is my
+intention to remain here in Goa; wherefore, if you write me, you may
+send your letters to some friend in Lisbon, to be forwarded from thence
+by the India ships. Let your direction, therefore be in Portuguese or
+Spanish, by which they will the more readily reach me.--From Goa, this
+20th of January 1584.
+
+
+No, 7.--_Letter from Mr Ralph Fitch to Mr Leonard Poore_.
+
+Loving friend, &c. Since my departure from Aleppo, I have not written
+you, because at Bagdat I was ill of flux, and continued in all the way
+thence to Basora, which was twelve days journey down the Tigris, when we
+had extremely hot weather, bad fare, and worse lodging, all of which
+increased my disease; besides which our boat was pestered with people.
+During eight entire days I hardly eat any thing, so that if we had been
+two days longer on the water, I verily believe I had died. But, thanks
+be to God, I presently mended after coming to Basora. We remained there
+fourteen days, when we embarked for Ormus, where we arrived on the 5th
+of September, and were put in prison on the 9th of the same month, where
+we continued till the 11th of October, and were then shipt for this city
+of Goa, in the ship belonging to the captain of Ormus, with 114
+horses[438], and about 200 men. Passing by Diu and Chaul, at which place
+we landed on the 20th November, we arrived at Goa on the 29th of that
+month, where, for our better entertainment, we were committed to a fair
+strong prison, in which we continued till the 22d of December. It
+pleased God, that there were two padres there who befriended us, the one
+an Englishman named Thomas Stevens, the other a Fleming named Marco,
+both Jesuits of the college of St Paul. These good men sued for us to
+the viceroy and other officers, and stood us in such good stead as our
+lives and goods were worth: But for them, even if we had escaped with
+our lives, we must have suffered a long imprisonment.
+
+[Footnote 438: In the narrative of Fitch, called 124, which might easily
+be mistaken either way in transcription.--E.]
+
+When we had been fourteen days in prison, they offered us leave to go at
+large in the town, if we would give sureties, for 2000 ducats, not to
+depart the country without the licence of the viceroy. Being unable to
+procure any such, the before mentioned friendly fathers of St Paul
+procured sureties for us. The Italians are much offended and displeased
+at our enlargement, and many wonder at our delivery. James Storie the
+painter has gone into the cloister of St Paul, as one of their order,
+and seems to like the situation. While we were in prison, both at Ormus
+and here, a great deal of our goods were pilfered and lost, and we have
+been at great charges in gifts and otherwise, so that much of our
+property is consumed. Of what remains, much will sell very well, and for
+some we will get next to nothing. The viceroy is gone to Chaul and Diu
+as it is said to win a castle of the Moors, and it is thought he will
+return about Easter; when I trust in God we shall procure our liberty,
+and have our sureties discharged. It will then, I think, be our best way
+for one or both of us to return, as our troubles have been very great,
+and because so much of our goods have been spoiled and lost: But if it
+should please God that I come to England, I will certainly return here
+again. It is a charming country, and extremely fruitful, having summer
+almost the whole year, but the most delightful season is about
+Christmas. The days and nights are of equal length throughout the whole
+year, or with very little difference; and the country produces a most
+wonderful abundance of fruit. After all our troubles we are fat and in
+good health, for victuals are plentiful and cheap. I omit to inform you
+of many strange things till we meet, as it would be too long to write of
+them. And thus I commit you to God, &c. From Goa in the East Indies,
+25th January 1584.
+
+
+No. 8.--_The Report of John Huighen van Linschoten, concerning the
+imprisonment of Newbery and Fitch; which happened while he was at Goa_.
+
+In the month of December 1583, four Englishmen arrived at Ormus, who
+came by way of Aleppo in Syria, having sailed from England by the
+Mediterranean to Tripoli, a town and haven in Syria, where all ships
+discharge their wares and merchandise for Aleppo, to which they are
+carried by land, which is a journey of nine days. In Aleppo there reside
+many merchants and factors of all nations, as Italians, French, English,
+Armenians, Turks, and Moors, every one following his own religion, and
+paying tribute to the grand Turk. It. is a place of great trade, whence
+twice every year there go two _cafilas_ or caravans, containing great
+companies of people and camels, which travel to India, Persia, Arabia,
+and all the adjoining countries, dealing in all kinds of merchandise
+both to and from these countries, as I have already declared in another
+part of this book.
+
+Three of these Englishmen were sent by the company of English who reside
+in Aleppo, to see if they might keep any factors at Ormus, and so
+traffic in that place, as the Italians do, that is the Venetians, who
+have their factors in Ormus, Goa, and Malacca, and trade there, both for
+pearls and precious stones, and for other wares and spices of these
+countries, which are carried thence over-land to Venice. One of these
+Englishmen, Mr John Newbery, had been once before in the said town of
+Ormus, and had there taken good information of the trade; and on his
+advice the others were then come hither along with him, bringing great
+store of merchandise; such as cloths, saffron, all kinds of drinking
+glasses and haberdashery wares, as looking-glasses, knives, and such
+like stuff; and to conclude, they brought with them every kind of small
+wares that can be thought of.
+
+Although these wares amounted to great sums of money, they were yet only
+as a shadow or colour, to give no occasion of mistrust or suspicion, as
+their principal intention was to purchase great quantities of precious
+stones, as diamonds, pearls, rubies, &c. to which end they brought with
+them a great sum of money in silver and gold, and that very secretly,
+that they might not be robbed of it, or run into danger on its
+account[439]. On their arrival at Ormus, they hired a shop and began to
+sell their wares; which being noticed by the Italians, whose factors
+reside there as I said before, and fearing if these Englishmen got good
+vent for their commodities, that they would become residents and so
+daily increase, which would be no small loss and hindrance to them, they
+presently set about to invent subtle devices to hinder them. To which
+end, they went immediately to the captain of Ormus, who was then Don
+Gonzalo de Menezes[440], saying that these Englishmen were heretics come
+to spy the country, and that they ought to be examined and punished as
+enemies, for a warning to others. Being friendly to these Englishmen, as
+one of them had been there before and had given him presents, the
+captain could not be prevailed upon to injure them, but shipped them
+with all their wares for Goa, sending them to the viceroy, that he might
+examine and deal with them as he thought good.
+
+[Footnote 439: This seems a mere adoption of the rumours of the
+Italians; as Newbery distinctly complains of the want of cash, by which
+he might have made very profitable purchases in Aleppo, Bagdat, and
+Basora.--E.]
+
+[Footnote 440: The captain of the castle of Ormus is named Don Mathias
+de Albuquerque by Fitch.--E.]
+
+Upon their arrival at Goa, they were cast into prison, and were in the
+first place examined whether or not they were good Christians. As they
+could only speak very bad Portuguese, while two of them spoke good
+Dutch, having resided several years in the low countries, a Dutch Jesuit
+who was born at Bruges in Flanders, and had resided thirty years in
+India, was sent to them, to undermine and examine them; in which they
+behaved so well, that they were holden and esteemed for good and
+Catholic Christians; yet were they still suspected, as being strangers
+and Englishmen. The Jesuits told them that they would be sent prisoners
+into Portugal, and advised them to leave off their trade in merchandise,
+and to become Jesuits; promising in return to defend them from all their
+troubles. The cause of thus earnestly persuading them was this: The
+Dutch Jesuit had been secretly informed that they had great sums of
+money, and sought to get that for the order; as the first vow and
+promise made on becoming a Jesuit is, to procure and advance the welfare
+of the order by every possible means. Although the Englishmen refused
+this, saying that they were quite unfit for such matters, yet one of
+them, a painter, who came with the other three to see the country and
+seek his fortune, and was not sent by the English merchants, partly
+through fear, and partly from want of means to relieve himself from
+prison, promised to become a Jesuit. And although the fathers knew that
+he was not one of those who had the treasure, yet, because he was a
+painter, of whom there are few in India, and that they had great need of
+one to paint their church, which would cost them great charges to bring
+from Portugal, they were very glad of him, and hoped in time to get all
+the rest, with all their money, into their fellowship.
+
+To conclude, they made this painter a Jesuit, and he continued some time
+in their college, where they gave him plenty of work to perform, and
+entertained him with all the favour and friendship they could devise,
+all to win the rest to become their prey. But the other three remained
+in prison in great fear, because they did not understand any who came to
+them, neither did any one understand what they said. They were at last
+informed of certain Dutchmen who dwelt with the archbishop, and were
+advised to send for them, at which they greatly rejoiced, and sent for
+me and another Dutchman, desiring us to come and speak with them, which
+we presently did. With tears in their eyes, they complained to us of
+their hard usage, explaining to us distinctly, as is said before, the
+true cause of their coming to Ormus, and praying us for God's sake to
+help them to their liberty upon sureties, declaring themselves ready to
+endure whatever could be justly ordained for them, if they were found to
+be otherwise than they represented, or different from other travelling
+merchants who sought to profit by their wares.
+
+Promising to do our best for them, we at length prevailed on the
+archbishop to deliver a petition for them to the viceroy, and persuaded
+him to set them at liberty and restore their goods, on condition of
+giving security to the amount of 2000 pardaos, not to depart the country
+without licence. Thereupon they presently found a citizen who became
+their surety in 2000 pardaos, to whom they paid in hand 1300, as they
+said they had no more money; wherefore he gave them credit for the rest,
+seeing that they had great store of merchandise, through which he might
+at any time be satisfied, if needful. By these means they were delivered
+out of prison, on which they hired a house, and began to open shop; so
+that they sold many of their goods, and were presently well known among
+the merchants, as they always respected gentlemen, especially such as
+bought their wares, shewing them much honour and courtesy, by which they
+won much credit, and were beloved of all men, so that all favoured them,
+and were ready to shew them favour. To us they shewed great friendship,
+and for our sakes the archbishop favoured them much, and gave them good
+countenance, which they well knew how to increase by offering him many
+presents, although he would not receive them, as he never accepted gift
+or present from any person. They behaved themselves in all things so
+discreetly, that no one carried an evil eye or evil thought towards
+them. This did not please the Jesuits, as it hindered what they still
+wished and hoped for; so that they still ceased not to intimidate them
+by means of the Dutch Jesuit, intimating that they would be sent
+prisoners to Portugal, and counselling them to become Jesuits in the
+cloister of St Paul, when they would be securely defended from all
+troubles. The Dutchman pretended to give them this advice as a friend,
+and one who knew certainly that it was so determined in the viceroy's
+council, and that he only waited till the ship sailed for Portugal;
+using this and other devices to put them in fear, and so to effect their
+purpose.
+
+The Englishmen durst not say any thing to the contrary, but answered
+that they would remain as they were yet a little while and consider
+their proposal, thus putting the Jesuits in hopes of their compliance.
+The principal of these Englishmen, John Newbery, often complained to me,
+saying that he knew not what to think or say of these things, or how
+they might get rid of these troubles. In the end, they determined with
+themselves to depart from Goa; and secretly, by means of other friends,
+they employed their money in the purchase of precious stones, which they
+were the better able to effect as one of them was a jeweller, who came
+with them for that purpose. Having concluded on this step, they durst
+not make it known to any one, not even to us, although they used to
+consult us on all occasions and tell us every thing they knew.
+
+On one of the Whitson holidays, they went out to recreate themselves
+about three miles from Goa, in the mouth of the river, in a country
+called _Bardez_[441], taking with them a supply of victuals and drink.
+That they might not be suspected, they left their house and shop, with
+same of their wares unsold, in the charge of a Dutch boy whom we had
+procured for them, and who remained in their house, quite ignorant of
+their intentions. When in Bardez, they procured a _patamer_, one of the
+Indian post-boys or messengers who carry letters from place to place,
+whom they hired as a guide. Between Bardez and the main-land there is
+only a small river, in a manner half dry, which they passed over on
+foot, and so travelled away by land, and were never heard of again; but
+it is thought they arrived in Aleppo, though no one knows: with
+certainty. Their great dependence is upon John Newbery, who can speak
+the Arabian language, which is used in all these countries, or at least
+understood, being as commonly known in all the east as French is with
+us.
+
+[Footnote 441: Bardes is an island a short way north from the island of
+Goa, and only divided from the main-land by a small river or creek.--E.]
+
+On the news of their departure being brought to Goa, there was a great
+stir and murmuring among the people, as all much wondered. Many were of
+opinion that we had counselled them to withdraw, and presently their
+surety seized on the remaining goods, which might amount to the value of
+200 pardaos; and with that and the money he had received of the
+Englishmen, he went to the viceroy, and delivered it to him, the viceroy
+forgiving him the rest. This flight of the Englishmen grieved the
+Jesuits worst, as they had lost so rich a prey, which they made
+themselves secure of. The Dutch Jesuit came to ask us if we knew of
+their intentions, saying, if he had suspected as much he would have
+dealt differently by them, for he had once in his hands a bag of theirs,
+in which were 40,000 _veneseanders_, [442], each worth two pardaos, at
+the time when they were in prison. But as they had always given him to
+believe he might accomplish his desire of getting them to profess in the
+Jesuit college, he had given them their money again, which otherwise
+they would not have come by so easily, or peradventure never. This he
+said openly, and in the end he called them heretics, spies, and a
+thousand other opprobrious names.
+
+[Footnote 442: This word _veneseander_, or venetiander, probably means,
+a Venetian chekin.--E.]
+
+When the English painter, who had become a Jesuit, heard that his
+countrymen were gone, and found that the Jesuits did not use him with so
+great favour as at first, he repented himself; and not having made any
+solemn vow, and being counselled to leave their house, he told them that
+he made no doubt of gaining a living in the city, and that they had no
+right to keep him against his inclination, and as they could not accuse
+him of any crime, he was determined not to remain with them. They used
+all the means they could devise to keep him in the college, but he would
+not stay, and, hiring a house in the city, he opened shop as a painter,
+where he got plenty of employment, and in the end married the daughter
+of a mestee, so that he laid his account to remain there as long as he
+lived. By this Englishman I was instructed in all the ways, trades, and
+voyages of the country between Aleppo, and Ormus, and of all the rules
+and customs observed in the overland passage, as also of all the towns
+and places on the route. Since the departure of these Englishmen from
+Goa, there have never arrived any strangers, either English or others,
+by land, except Italians, who are constantly engaged in the overland
+trade, going and coming continually.
+
+
+
+END OF VOLUME SEVENTH.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of A General History and Collection of
+Voyages and Travels, Volume VII, by Robert Kerr
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK VOYAGES AND TRAVELS, VOLUME VII ***
+
+***** This file should be named 13287.txt or 13287.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        https://www.gutenberg.org/1/3/2/8/13287/
+
+Produced by Robert Connal, Graeme Mackreth and PG Distributed
+Proofreaders. This file was produced from images generously made
+available by the Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions.
+
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+https://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at https://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+https://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at https://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit https://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including including checks, online payments and credit card
+donations.  To donate, please visit: https://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     https://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
+
diff --git a/old/13287.zip b/old/13287.zip
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c003e01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/old/13287.zip